Prologue: The Journey to the World of Ruin

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 18, 2015
Prologue: The Journey to the World of Ruin.

A dream... everything that had transpired within the last 24 hours must have been nothing but a dream, and I was about to awaken from it. Yet, it seems this is nothing but wishful thinking on my part, for I was in a situation that could be best described as the worst moment of my entire life. Deep down, I knew this was real because I had been warned about it after what happened last time, and while it was on my mind, I was fixated on my life in the human world which has gotten a lot better in recent months.

Fate sure has a funny way of making its mark, but if there was any solace to be found, it would be the fact that I wasn't entirely alone in my ordeal. Then again, I wish that she didn't have to deal with this problem because I was the one fated to deal with the crisis. Actually... it's not the exact crisis which had been told to me by Ganondorf who bested me in combat... no, it was something completely different which caught me by surprise. Just when I thought I had figured out one world, I get flung into another one that plays by its own set of rules.

My name is Sunset Shimmer, and for as long as I can remember, I was a magical unicorn from a world inhabited by ponies among other creatures. I exiled myself to another world where I took on human form out of sheer anger towards my former mentor, Princess Celestia, all because I followed the advice of a mirror rather than stick with my studies.

During my adventures in the human world, I was able to achieve a form that is a combination of my two appearances, yet no sooner had I found myself in the situation that had been placed upon me... well... I wasn't prepared to face the reality of having been forced to undergo a transformation into a different creature. What made things even worse was that this was due to a dark power which was being used by someone who may or may not understand just what they are getting themselves into...

" I feel strange..."

" That's because my magic has changed you, and personally for the better I might add!"

" What do you mean?"

" Rather than having me waste my time explaining things to you, why don't you just take a look at your reflection in that pool of water in front of you. I'm sure you'll get a real kick out of it once you seen what I've done to make you more appealing."

" Like I should believe that!"

" It's not surprising to hear you say something like that given what I've already put you through in addition to spouting a few lies in an attempt to get you to leave me alone, and find another horse and instrument to call your own. However, in this case, I am telling the truth, so I suggest you look down at your reflection."

" WAAAAH!"

" Do you hear that beautiful sound Tatl? Tael? That's the sound of someone whose very existence has been turned upside down!"

" What have you done to me?"

" Your previous expression and form looked so boring, and you were nothing short of tense all because you kept on yammering about not wanting to be here again. So, I decided to give you a complete makeover. The results speak for themselves as this look really suits you, but I doubt the people in town will be thrilled having another scrub running around."

" I'm... I'm... I'm a Deku Scrub!"

" And this is a form which is going to last the rest of your life, so I hope that you quickly get adjusted to it. Of course, you've got plenty of problems already considering what I've already done, and now chalk this one up as another addition. Getting rid of that annoying horse was worth it, for I doubt it will be of any use to a mere scrub, but maybe you'll find it one day if you survive. As for this ocarina which you gladly gave to me... I'm sure to get better as I continue practicing, and it already sounds better than my flute."

" Change me back right now!"

" What!?!? Now why would I go and do a thing like that? Like I said, this look really suits you."

" Well, I don't like it!"

" Unfortunately, your opinion doesn't count. I would stay here and make you suffer more humiliation, but I've got things to do, and people to see. Besides, I need to get Tatl away from you as she is getting rather anxious which is beginning to get annoying. She's been acting that way ever since we first ambushed you back in the woods, so we'll take our leave before things go south.

I hope you enjoy your new life, and I do have one good piece of advice as a parting gift. You might want to stay away from dogs because they have a tendency to attack Deku Scrubs."

" Wait! Come back!"

" Sorry, but I've more important things to do."

" Stop!"

" Have fun with your new life."

" I'm not going to let you get away with this."

" Was that a threat? Ha! That has to be the cutest thing I've ever heard, and coming from you it sounds even more adorable. You don't have the means to defeat me as my power is far greater than anything you could muster up, so I recommend you back off before I lose my good humour. Still, you have proven to be quite resourceful which was unexpected."

" Why don't I show just how strong I can be!"

" Okay, but don't come crying to me when you lose everything."

Being changed into a Deku Scrub was perhaps the lowest moment of my life, and has personally tied with me abandoning my studies with Princess Celestia to pursue my own path. Just when I thought that things were about to get even worse, a miracle occurred which made this ordeal much more bearable. I tried to follow this mysterious person who was wearing the most bizarre mask imaginable, but I was stopped by one of their two fairy companions who attacked me.

It turned out that this fairy was someone really close to me, and who was aware of the fact that neither of us were meant to be in this place. And yet, she wasn't completely whole like me as she had some memories of my new surroundings.

I suppose that I should explain how I ended up in this situation in the first place, for it would ease my mind knowing that I shared such a painful tale with those who have a sympathetic ear.

Before all of this started, I was living in the human world where I was continuing to understand friendship, but I would be lying if I said that everything was perfect. It had been several months since my adventure in Hyrule which only I remember as everyone else had no memories, and I had been experiencing dreams which all consisted of the exact same thing. I was in some kind of strange world that was on the verge of ruin, and before I could do anything to help, a large burst of flame consumes everything.

This results in me being consumed by the flame which is where I wake up with sweat dripping down my face which follows with me struggling to get back to sleep, and it has taken a real toll on my body both physically and mentally. My friends often asked me if I was okay, for it became obvious to them that something was wrong, yet I couldn't tell them what's wrong because they wouldn't believe it. There was no doubt that it related to the warning given to me by Ganondorf, but I had no idea as to how long I could keep going before I completely lose my sanity.

My friends tried everything they could to keep my mind off my problem, but sadly their efforts were in vain as the dreams only got worse as time went on. What was perhaps the most discouraging part involved Pinkie Pie's attempt at what she called "The Grandest Sleepover in the History of Ever", yet this didn't make me feel better even though everyone had an amazing time, but then I wished that fate had dealt me a different hand instead of what I was given.

Despite the concerns of my friends, I managed to keep my spirits up which was all I could do really, yet deep down there was the fear of the unknown... Ganondorf's warning... those haunting words were about to become my worst nightmare.

It had been about two weeks since the "Friendship Games" were held which saw Canterlot High competing against Crystal Prep, yet I was able to maintain my focus despite my dreams tormenting me. Rainbow Dash had orchestrated a celebration where students from both schools were to attend despite how both sides were at incredible odds during the games, but I wasn't prepared for what was about to happen. I don't blame Rainbow Dash for what she had planned, for how could she have known what happened to the human world.

She had been keeping her plan a secret, but when the big unveiling happened where everyone in attendance experienced her surprise, the only one who wasn't happy about the situation was me. To be honest, I was hoping that she would have chosen something different rather than what she had selected, but again this was fate.

" I have no doubt in my mind that this is the most awesome idea I've had," said Rainbow Dash as she couldn't contain her excitement, but if she had been in my shoes then she wouldn't be feeling so much adrenaline. Instead, she would be fearful of what could potentially happen, and would try to run away before anything could go wrong.

" Well, you did say that you wanted to have a party complete with enough video game consoles of various kinds," I said.

" It took some real work on my end, but it was worth it because this party is sure to last all night!" shouted Rainbow Dash.

" Maybe you could have done something more low-key," I suggested.

" Huh? Why would I do that? I do have a reputation to maintain Sunset Shimmer, and if word got out that I would do something that wasn't awesome and epic, no one would ever be able to look at me in the same light again," said Rainbow Dash. While it looked as though she was completely full of herself, she noticed the expression on my face, and decided to comfort me because she suspected that my condition related to my dreams.

" Are you still suffering from that dream of yours? Most dreams would have ended after a couple of days, but this one has lasted several months. Are you sure that you're okay?"

" Is it that obvious?" I asked.

" You look as though you're about to collapse from exhaustion, and many have been wondering what's wrong with you. The girls and I have been the most worried considering how close-knit we've become since the Battle of the Bands, but it feels like we're just hitting nothing but straw given that you haven't exactly explained why you keep having the same dream," replied Rainbow Dash.

" It's complicated," I began.

" We're here for you Sunset Shimmer, but we can't do anything until you tell us," said Rainbow Dash.

" I really want to, but I doubt you'll believe me," I said.

" Seriously? You've been keeping it to yourself just because you think we won't believe it? After all we've seen at this school what with you becoming a demonic monster who wanted to conquer Equestria, a singing group who wanted to steal our energy just because they wanted people to adore them, and having the best Friendship Games in recent memory between CHS and Crystal Prep, I'm sure we can handle whatever it is you're dealing with," said Rainbow Dash.

In all of my misery, I had completely forgotten about all of these scenarios which have plagued the human world, and of course I was the reason this place has witnessed so many problems from Equestria. If I had chosen to remain in the place of my birth and just waited patiently to achieve greatness, this world wouldn't have suffered because of it, but then friendship would never have entered my heart, and I would probably be some kind of demonic pony right now. Rainbow Dash noticed that I was daydreaming from her perspective, and felt the need to shout into my ear. " Um, hello? Aren't you going to say something?"

" There's no need for shouting," I moaned.

" With so many students shouting already, my voice has been lost in the confusion," said Rainbow Dash.

" Oh," I said.

" So tell me about this dream of yours," suggested Rainbow Dash. Just as I was about to say something, Applejack came up to us as she had managed to overhear the general gist of our conversation, and the expression on her face showed that she didn't like Rainbow Dash asking me something personal.

" Y'all don't need to give her anymore pressure," said Applejack.

" I'm not!" shouted Rainbow Dash.

" We all know that Sunset Shimmer has been having problems with that dream of hers, but we don't need to pressure her into explaining what it is especially if it's difficult to actually even explain. Look, I know you just want to help Rainbow Dash, but you can't force her to do something she ain't comfortable with. I'm sure in due course she will share with us, so for now all we can do is buck up, and enjoy this party of yours," said Applejack. That was when I decided that I would explain for a part of me agreed with Rainbow Dash which was everyone around here had seen unbelievable things already.

The rest of me just wanted to keep it all to myself, but I couldn't keep it up for much longer, yet now that I think about it, I shouldn't have hesitated. If I had chosen to simply go home at that exact moment, what ended up happening to me wouldn't have occurred, and everyone wouldn't have been dragged into my problem.

Instead of leaving in hopes of defying fate, I took both Applejack and Rainbow Dash elsewhere so as to avoid all the noise, and proceeded to explain what was wrong. It took me quite some time to explain as I didn't want to leave out any details, and my friends listened to every word I said as though they were mesmerized...

" And that is everything that happened," I finished after what felt like forever.

" Oh... um... wow," said Rainbow Dash as she struggled to come to grips with my story.

" That certainly was some story," said Applejack as she took off hat in order to scratch her head.

" I told you that you wouldn't believe me," I sighed.

" Well, it is a difficult tale to take in all at once, but both of us believe you," smiled Applejack.

" You do?" I asked.

" Weird things have been happening around here throughout these past months, so what you just explained to us most likely happened, and it does explain why no one else apart from you has any recollection of those events," replied Applejack.

" I always wanted to become a part of a video game world, yet I don't remember it," moaned Rainbow Dash.

" Not helping Rainbow Dash!" shouted Applejack. It felt like a weight had been lifted from my shoulders when I finished explaining my story, but I could tell that my friends were still having doubts about it as though something was holding them back. If only they could remember the events of Hyrule like I did, for that would make this moment seem less awkward than it really was, but they don't which is why they feel uneasy.

Applejack then put her hat back on her head, and proceeded to speak as no one else was willing to. " I'll be sure to let Pinkie Pie, Fluttershy, and Rarity know about this story Sunset Shimmer, but I think they'll be just as confused as we are."

" What about that warning from that guy?" asked Rainbow Dash.

" You mean Ganondorf?" I asked.

" Yeah him," replied Rainbow Dash.

" He said that my journey had only just begun, and that fate had chosen me to travel to a different world some time in the future. This world would be on the verge of ruin, and I am to save it before it gets destroyed. At first, I chose to simply ignore his words when everything changed back to normal, but now I think his words were true because of my dreams," I said.

" Are those his exact words?" asked Applejack.

" Not exactly as I don't recall them entirely, but that was the general gist of it," I replied.

" Maybe you should go home until at least this party has come to an end," suggested Applejack.

" That's what I was thinking especially because of one of the games that Rainbow Dash has brought to this gathering. Out of all of the video games that exist out there, why did you choose the sequel to the game that caused so much trouble?" I asked.

" After playing Ocarina of Time, and beating it many times over until I was bored, I just had to get my hands on the sequel. Besides, I'm not the only one who gets to try it out as there are hundreds of students who are probably dying to play because they know how much of a classic it is. Maybe even some teachers and other staff members will want to play, so in that sense it's nothing but a win-win situation.

I'll most likely let other people play before I get my turn as I've got my heart set on some other games, and will no doubt ace all of them in a short period," replied Rainbow Dash. In a way, I can't really blame her for wanting to bring along the sequel, "The Legend of Zelda: Majora's Mask", for she showed so much passion about it, but I could blame her for bringing me here. I would have gladly left there and then, but I couldn't because leaving would have upset Pinkie Pie, and she was very passionate about her parties. Rainbow Dash may be the one who was presenting the occasion, yet Pinkie was the one who catered the affair due to being the premiere party planner in the city.

" There's no point in arguing with her Sunset Shimmer, for she is completely lost in the images of grandeur," said Applejack.

" Not only that, but Pinkie would be heart-broken if I were to just leave," I added.

" Oh yeah! I completely forgot that we all made a Pinkie Promise prior to coming here," said Applejack.

" Which means I'm stuck here for several hours," I sighed.

" You don't need to actually leave the building, so you can simply keep your distance from where the action is. I'll explain things to Pinkie as I know she will understand, but my suggestion would be not allowing this dream to get in the way," suggested Applejack.

" I guess you're right," I said.

" Also, I'd keep it just between all of us as we wouldn't want to cause an uproar right?" asked Applejack.

" That's the last thing on my mind," I replied.

" Then just relax and have as best of a time as you can sugar cube, but if you do change your mind and want to play some games, you'll need to get to them before a certain someone does, and ends up hogging it for herself," said Applejack as she winked at me before heading off towards the gym following Rainbow Dash who had left a few minutes prior leaving me on my own. I really wanted to have a good time, but something told me that I should have left even if it meant breaking a Pinkie Promise.

My friendship in this case ended up costing me, for a couple of hours later, things would change completely. The party had been a big success which was natural given who was catering, and Rainbow Dash was hogging some of the games although there were others she avoided due to not being in multiple places at once. Fluttershy was displaying her competitive nature which I remember from a sleepover we had during the holidays, and she was defeating any and all challengers who thought they could beat her.

Rarity on the other hand had been busy showcasing one of her newest dresses while playing some games on the side she felt reached out to her, and she apparently had a competitive streak as well especially with one game that revolved around dresses and jewels.

Everyone else I knew were having so much fun that I couldn't just walk out on them, for that would make me feel not only guilty, but also a bad friend considering how they have all forgiven me for my past actions when I was acting like a bad girl. I had been sitting alone in the gym, and while people came by to say hi to me, they would quickly move on because the urge to play video games among other activities were too strong for them to ignore.

I was okay with this scenario, for I needed some time by myself in order to think about what was happening with that dream. It was just a dream, and those can't hurt you... such words would soon prove to be my undoing for I would begin hearing a voice instead of my head... a familiar voice which I hoped I would never hear again for as long as I lived.

" Huh?" I asked.

" Heh, heh, heh, heh..."

" Am I hearing things, or is the noise in the gym really getting to me?" I asked myself.

" Heh, heh, heh, heh..." This prompted me to get up and leave the gym in order to go to a secluded spot, and I was fortunate that no one paid any attention to me otherwise they would have suspected me to be crazy or something. The voice continued tormenting me as it grew louder which caused me to experience a headache, so when I reached a place where I could be alone, I concentrated in order to hear whose voice it was, and my heart sank when I recognized it. " Do you think that you can simply tone my voice out from your mind? You have forgotten your place it seems child."

" No... I don't want to listen to anything you have to say!" I said with a defiant tone in my voice.

" You cannot ignore me child, for you remember what happened during your exploits throughout Hyrule. Such things can never be forgotten no matter how hard you try in a vain attempt to live out a pitiful existence. Do you remember my name?"

" How could I forget the name of Ganondorf?" I asked.

" Then you also remember how you were completely outmatched by my power, yet I have come to remind you of the warning I gave you when I allowed you to return to your life given that I had been satisfied with the suffering you endured. Do you remember these words from our previous encounter? 'This other world is far more dangerous than what you've experienced here by far, so the chances of your survival are slim to none.

You cannot escape from this fate which destiny has placed upon your shoulders, and the same can be said about the one who is viewed as being close to you.' These words I desired to have burned into your memory, and your reaction shows you remember them. The time has come for you to go, and it shall be most amusing to see how much you will suffer," replied Ganondorf.

" You're nothing but my imagination playing tricks on me," I said.

" I am not surprised at that response, for I knew you would attempt to deny your previous experience. Yet, there is something that you possess which shall remind you that what you experienced was a reality, and these words shall serve as an additional reminder. 'Fate has dealt this blow to you, and now you must face what lies ahead. You can rest knowing that you fulfilled one destiny, but know that some day you shall face your greatest challenge.

It will hang over your head like a sword waiting to cleave the head off of your shoulders'. Yes, my words have brought back the painful memories which you have tried so hard to ignore, but you cannot avoid the fate that awaits you. This time of peace has reached its end, and there is nothing you can do other than accept it," said Ganondorf. Hearing those same words back when he completely overpowered me brought back images that I would rather forget, but this wasn't the issue which really made me freak out.

No, it was the glowing mark that suddenly appeared on the back of my hand... the same mark which was commented on by Pinkie Pie after I had woken up when I had hit my head as opposed to spending many days in a different world. Even though I couldn't see his face and determine it for myself, Ganondorf was laughing as he knew what this mark meant, and sadly I do as well.

The mark on the back of my hand was the Mark of the Triforce which was given to me back in the Temple of Time during the final stages of my journey. While I still believe myself to be unworthy to possess such a power because I wasn't exactly the embodiment of courage, I was chosen regardless, and seeing the mark appear on my hand meant my connection to the golden power remained. Had I taken such a power with me?

The answer was yes, for this mark was my reminder. It then dawned on me that Ganondorf also possessed a piece which meant I was now connected to him, and just thinking about it made me sick to my stomach. My thought process at that exact moment was there was no chance that my mark could cause any kind of trouble, but I was wrong on all accounts especially when it began glowing brightly.

" Why is it glowing?" I asked.

" To inform you of what awaits," replied Ganondorf.

" Disaster is about to strike!?!? I need to make my way back to the gym, and warn everyone," I said.

" Such words will hold no meaning in their ears, for they will not believe one such as you," said Ganondorf.

" After all of the strange things that have plagued this world, my warning will definitely resonate with them," I said. Ganondorf merely laughed which annoyed me greatly, and then his laughter slowly faded away which was a huge relief, but maybe what he said was true in that no one would believe me. He turned out to be correct in the end as my story was known only to my friends, and trying to warn so many during something like a party would be next to impossible.

Still, I felt that I could make a difference, so I quickly ran towards the gym. It didn't take long as most were already there enjoying the celebrations, and when I arrived, I found myself unable to get anywhere due to how many people were in my way. Rainbow Dash had been tearing up a storm by proving her dominance across several video games, yet she had been saving the best one for last according to various voices echoing across the gym.

" I know you've all been waiting to experience "The Legend of Zelda: Majora's Mask" all evening, so now the wait is finally over. I know most of you are probably thinking that this is going to be a pretty lame game, but let me tell you that this is anything but that! I can guarantee that this will be the greatest experience ever!" shouted Rainbow Dash.

" If you're done bragging about it, how about letting someone play it?" asked Applejack.

" Of course as I want other people to experience how awesome this is... until I play it and beat it," said Rainbow Dash. I tried to say something that would perhaps convince her to play something else despite being so far away from her, but my words were muted out by the sounds of countless cheers coming from the student body.

Even several teachers were cheering which looked rather unusual, yet I suppose they want to have fun given how things got so intense during the Friendship Games. Rainbow Dash then stepped aside where she walked towards a table with Applejack where the rest of my friends were sitting, so I struggled to make my way over to them.

" Darling! You look as though you've experienced quite the tussle," said Rarity.

" I had to get through so many students just to get here," I said.

" Whatever is the matter?" asked Rarity. I then explained what happened, and I was actually expecting my friends to give me confused looks along with the traditional 'huh' that comes along. However, my words almost caused Pinkie Pie to freak out, but she managed to prevent herself from going off the deep end. Rarity then took a long look at the empty glass she had been holding for what might have been some time before putting it back down, and turning to face me.

" If this is true darling then things are going to get a whole lot worse, and we've just been through a hair-raising experience what with the Friendship Games. Also, I don't think Principal Celestia, and Vice-Principal Luna would appreciate another magical situation given what our school has experience these past months."

" Why did you have to choose that particular game?" I asked.

" Relax! I'm betting that Sunset Shimmer must have had a nightmarish day-dream or something like that," replied Rainbow Dash.

" Look! We know this party means a big deal to both you and Pinkie Pie, but we simply cannot ignore something that could potentially bring about some kind of destruction. Granted, I do feel that this does seem a little out there Sunset Shimmer despite what both Applejack and Rainbow Dash told us, but I suppose we could simply ask for some other game to be played. Surely, our fellow students will not protest against such a decision," suggested Rarity.

" But, I promised them something epic!" shouted Rainbow Dash.

" I think we're all jumping to some kind of weird conclusion here sugar cubes, so why we all just relax and take some deep breaths before doing anything else. I don't deny what Sunset Shimmer is saying because we've seen our share of strange events, but at the same time it is hard to believe especially without proof. I'm sorry Sunset, but believing your story, and believing something will happen are two completely different things," said Applejack.

" You think I'm lying?" I asked.

" We all think that maybe you are having problems due to your lack of sleep these past months, and because of this your mind hasn't been in the best of conditions. I know my explanation didn't make a lick of sense as even I don't get it, but the idea that this party is going to be struck by a disaster just seems plumb crazy. Your story is easy to believe, but the school being attacked just don't add up. It sounds like I'm just contradicting things, so I'll conclude by saying just relax and maybe get some sleep before going home," replied Applejack.

My heart felt like it had been struck by a powerful blow, for my friends refused to believe that a disaster was coming. If only they had chosen to believe me instead of ignore me then things would be different than they are now, and it would have also meant Ganondorf being wrong which turned out not to be the case.

Students and teachers started to play Majora's Mask while my friends lined up for a chance apart from Rainbow Dash given how it was her game, and she wanted to be at the front of the action. I remained seated with my face looking as though I had experienced some kind of horrific event, yet how could I have any other expression when the disaster in question was about to make its appearance. Things appeared normal at first which made me think that perhaps Applejack was right in that my imagination had caused me to feel disillusioned, but this quickly changed when Ganondorf's laughter echoed in my head.

" They did not believe your words child as I expected from them, so now your one chance to prevent disaster has been crushed. Of course, you were never meant to stop what was to come anyway, for I had foreseen this event long ago," said Ganondorf.

" I still have a chance," I said.

" No, you do not for look before you, and see what is about to transpire. Your fate has now been sealed child, for now you shall venture forth to a world that lies on the brink of destruction. Whether you succeed or die is of little consequence to me as it is the tremendous torment of yourself and those connected to you which shall prove most delicious to witness," said Ganondorf.

I then looked at the giant screen which Pinkie Pie had acquired for the party, and the image of the Majora's Mask game suddenly got distorted until it was replaced with what appeared to be a moon with an angry looking face on it. This caused everyone to start gasping in horror as no one aside from me knew what was about to happen, yet at this exact moment did I wish that I were somewhere else.

" Know that you have not seen the last of me child as I intend on facing you in battle once again, for I desire the knowledge of seeing just how much stronger you will become... do not betray my expectations." His laughter echoed in my head as it quickly faded away, but my concern had to do with what was happening.

" What is going on?" asked Rarity as she and the other girls came over to me.

" You should have believed me," I replied.

" This has to do with the disaster talk you heard in your head?" asked Applejack.

" Shouldn't we pony-up or something in the hopes of stopping it?" asked Rainbow Dash.

" There's nothing we can do," I replied.

" Now's not the time for a negative attitude Sunset Shimmer especially when we have terrified students here," said Applejack. I sighed and told her that this was fated to happen according to Ganondorf, and that nothing could prevent the disaster from coming. Rainbow Dash quickly complained that her party was now ruined because of yet another disaster that comes from beyond their world, yet this one had nothing to do with Equestria, and involved the world of Hyrule... or whatever world Majora's Mask took place in.

Upon looking back at this moment, I should have played it a couple of times in order to get used to what was about to happen. The eyes of the moon began to glow brightly before its mouth opened up which brought about a powerful tornado which then began pulling everyone into it, and while I tried my best to get away, I found myself being pulled in which resulted in me losing consciousness.

You probably think that this is where things now stand, but you'd be wrong about that as something else happened. While I felt as though I had been dead for a long time given how bleak everything was while I was out of it, I slowly came to where I was immediately expecting Spike to call out my name, or the name of Link as he did before, but there was no voice calling out to me this time.

In fact, there was pretty much nothing upon waking up apart from being in some kind of dark forest where I could hear the sounds of crickets chirping about. That's when I noticed that I wasn't walking despite moving, so I looked down to see that I was riding on a small horse. If I remember correctly from last time... this was Epona, but the younger version of her when she was just a filly, yet would she recognize me, or is this a different version?

" Um... do you remember me?" I asked although it sounded much worse in my mind. Epona then came to a stop before turning her head around to face me. She looked at me for a few moments before sniffing me which must have been her way of figuring out if I was the one she bonded with during my last adventure, but I thought that to be impossible given this was a different game compared to what I experienced before.

She then started to whinny at me which prompted me to whinny in response where she reared up onto her hind legs which almost made me fall off and onto the ground, yet she remembers me based on the reply she gave. I guess it was still a good thing that I am in fact a pony from a world filled with ponies otherwise communicating with Epona would have been impossible.

Thinking about what happened last time, I quickly looked down at myself, and sure enough I was wearing the same green tunic as before complete with the hat although without those fingerless gloves and tights. Looking behind me, I found a sword and shield were already strapped to my back with the sword being very familiar to me.

" This is... the... the... Kokiri Sword if I remember correctly, so at least I am not unprotected, and I should feel relieved knowing that I managed to eventually figure out some of the basic sword skills. As for the shield... it isn't made of wood which is another sigh of relief as it should protect me until I figure out exactly where in Hyrule this is supposed to be." I said to myself.

It felt weird knowing that once again my friends and the rest of the human world had been once again dragged into a situation all because of me, and that they now have been given new memories based on the world of Hyrule as depicted in this game, Majora's Mask, as opposed to Ocarina of Time which is what I experienced before.

From what I could estimate based on first impressions, I was riding on Epona within the confines of a dark forest, and having no idea why I am even here other than just because, so the question was where exactly am I going? Another question is what became of my friends when we were all brought here. The answer to the first question would remain an elusive one, but the answer to the second question would soon become a reality.

" What's going on?"

" This girl and her horse just decided to stop all of a sudden."

" Who would want to stop in the middle of this dark forest?"

" Someone without any kind of sense! To be honest, I didn't wish we were here either as this part of the Lost Woods is one that is rarely traversed by anyone. Why she insisted on waiting here for a wandering traveler was perhaps the stupidest mistake she has made!"

" And now you need to apologize given that someone finally came along this route."

" We've been waiting here for days."

" That's just a small price to pay."

" I've been thinking."

" About what?"

" Why are we resorting to attacking travelers on this route in the first place? It makes us appear as nothing but common criminals who are trying to earn themselves a small piece of coin at the expense of someone else. I mean, we could be doing something that doesn't involve thievery in order to make a living."

" Then explain that to the Skull Kid as she insists that we do this because she feels it would be a lot of fun. Granted, I am starting to wonder if this is the right thing we should be doing, and she has been acting a little strange ever since encountering that woman. Then again, everything has been getting weird after she put that mask on, but hopefully she will give it back, or even throw it away once she has had her fun with it."

" Guess we'll carry out the plan by scaring that horse, and see what this girl has."

The dark forest continued onward as though it was never going to end, and it was constantly getting darker as a reminder that the sun wasn't able to reach down to the ground due to the thick tree branches filled with leaves above me. As Epona continued to trot forward, I began to experience some kind of memory which had never happened before, so it felt strange at first. In my mind, I could see several images flowing about that didn't add up apart from one consistency which involved Spike in the form of a fairy.

Was I in this forest looking for Spike? If so then why? What could have happened at the end of Ocarina of Time that would cause him to leave? I really should have finished that game given that Rainbow Dash kept on insisting, so now I've got another problem added onto a plate that was getting heavier with each passing moment.

I was hoping to find someone on this dark path, and ask where exactly I was as that would have given me a sense of reassurance, but I wasn't prepared for what was about to happen next which began the downward spiral which lead into me being transformed. Had I just decided to remain unconscious, and not attempt to be some kind of hero, I could have avoided so much trouble, but when you have a traveling companion with you, things get much more complicated.

My mind was focused on where I was along with what it was I had to go through in order to change things back to normal this time, so I didn't even see the two fairies who came out from behind one of the trees. They quickly darted out in front of Epona scaring her just by simply floating in front of her, and it caused her to rear up onto her hind legs again throwing me off. I landed hard on my head effectively knocking me unconscious while my trusty steed just stood there, for she had no idea what was going on.

" That worked out better than I expected."

" We didn't even need to make any kind of noises to scare this horse."

" Let's take a closer look at her just in case she is only pretending to be knocked out........it's strange Tael... I feel as though I know this person from somewhere."

" What brought that up Tatl?"

" Her face reminds me of someone that I once knew, but it feels like that happened in another world entirely."

" You must have hit your head on a tree or two as we made our way to this clearing for you to think of that, so get your head in the game and see if you can find anything of interest on this girl while I give the signal to the Skull Kid that the coast is clear." The white fairy then floated over to where I had landed, and started combing over me as though she were some kind of detective looking at a corpse, but she was fixated on my face for some reason which didn't make sense to me at the time.

The black fairy in the meantime whistled into the distance where a strange figure walked into the clearing, and it was this person who would be the source of my current predicament all because of what she was wearing on her face. This person was a Skull Kid, a Kokiri child who wandered deep into the forest where she transformed into what she looks like now.

Why is that I could remember some things from my previous experience and not others? I guess my adventures in Hyrule really engrossed me into the mythos, yet not everything was of importance in my mind. The strange person then walked forward in an unusual manner before coming to a stop, and lifting up her mask as a means of getting a much closer look before putting it down again.

" You two fairies did it!"

" It was easy once she finally had her horse start moving again."

" What was up with that?"

" I have no idea, but we should quickly search through her belongings before she comes to." The person then walked over to me where the white fairy had been looking at my face this entire time, and it resulted in an awkward conversation between the two.

" Tatl!?!? Why are you staring at her face?"

" She reminds me of someone that I've seen before, and I'm trying to think who it was. There are some images flashing through my head of someone who has a face just like hers, but nothing is adding up other than it giving me a headache."

" Maybe you should wait over there while Tael and I see what this girl has on her person that we can take for ourselves. You know Tatl, you've been acting strange these past few days as though something were bothering you. Hopefully, it doesn't get in the way of what we're doing, for we'll be moving onto much bigger things once we're finished here.

Right now, I've only been doing small things here and there as a means of making myself feel better, but thanks to the new powers which I've acquired, I feel that I can go even further to the point where I can bring an entire world to its knees."

" Why are we resorting to thievery?"

" It's fun scaring people and stealing their things."

" Maybe, but have you considered what might happen were they to come after you? That woman whose mask you stole probably doesn't have the means to pursue you in order to get it back, yet I feel this girl here could. She's got a sword and shield on her person, and both show signs of wear and tear, so she must be an adventurer. Skull Kid, perhaps we should ignore her, and go back to the forest to wait for someone else to come."

" I just want to take a quick peak, and nothing you say will change my mind. Besides, I'm looking forward to returning home as I have something really fun that will change the lives of everyone. I want you to wait over there until I'm done, and I don't want to hear another word coming from you until we reach town. Your recent change in behaviour is really starting to get me down, and I don't want your brother going through the exact same experience."

The person used her foot to flip me over onto my back where she proceeded to search my pockets, and quickly she discovered something that piqued her interest. I had no idea that I was carrying an important item, for if I had known then I would have made sure it was well hidden as opposed to just being in a pocket.

She took out none other than the Ocarina of Time, yet why was it on my person? At the end of my previous journey, I had given it back to Princess Zelda who was Princess Twilight Sparkle from my perspective, so theoretically it should still be in the future rather than here in the past. " It looks like we struck pay-dirt this time!"

" Wow! That's a pretty ocarina!"

" And it's probably really valuable given how shiny it is."

" Can I try it?"

" You're much too small to play something like this, and besides you are most likely to break the thing which would ruin the value. Then again, I'm most likely to do the exact same thing, so I'll just put this into my pouch once I've played it for a bit, and we can be on our way. As for this horse... I think we should take it as well, for I do like the idea of riding around from place to place instead of walking. It won't take long for me to get this thing under my control!"

It was around this point where I started to regain consciousness, and I immediately placed my hands over my ears due to the poor ocarina playing that broke through the silence of the dark forest. Whoever was playing clearly had no idea how to play, so I got onto my feet where I noticed who was playing it. The person at first didn't pay any attention to what was going on behind her, but when the two fairies indicated that something was amiss, she turned around and jumped slightly because of seeing me back on my feet.

I too jumped due to seeing what looked like a mask on her face, and it was the most bizarre looking mask I've ever seen. The large yellow eyes were perhaps the most distinguishing feature along with the two horns sticking out above each eye. Overall, the pattern made it look like some kind of weird monster instead of a mask, and there was some kind of dark power coming from it which I should have noticed, but didn't which would eventually come back to haunt me.

" What in the world are you?" I asked.

" You're awake!?!?"

" I am now after having been knocked out for a while, and it was your bad playing which brought me back to my senses," I replied.

" It's difficult to play a new instrument especially when you wear a mask like I do, but that's not the point I'm bringing up here. I was thinking that you would be out of it for just a while longer, so that I could make a getaway, but it seems I underestimated you."

" Why would you want to run away from me? I was actually hoping to run into someone, and asking where exactly I am," I said.

" This is the Lost Woods."

" Really? It looks a lot different from what I remember," I said.

" Those clothes of yours are of the Kokiri tribe, yet you don't have a fairy companion which is the staple of their kind. That makes you either a pretender who is trying to pass herself off as one of them, or you lost your fairy due to reasons I don't want to know. Anyway, I don't need to be here anymore as I have what I want, so if you'll excuse me, I'll leave you to figure things out."

" Wait! I've still got some questions!" I shouted, and that's when I finally noticed she was holding the Ocarina of Time. My first reaction was one of shock, but then my second reaction kicked in where I displayed both anger and surprise as this person had just robbed me by scaring Epona. I suspected those two fairies were also involved, so I needed to get the ocarina back as it could be essential in figuring out how to change everything back to normal, and I'm not about to let a thief get away.

I slowly moved a step forward so as to not give away my intentions, but the person noticed what I was doing, and took a step backwards which prompted me into moving forward again.

That's when I decided to make a leap in an effort to grab her before she could run away, but she jumped in a manner that defied logic, and landed on top of Epona as thoughshe were some kind of acrobatic star. She then kicked my steed in the ribs as an indication of wanting to get going, so now I found myself faced with quite the dilemma. I had about a few seconds to react otherwise I could wind up being trampled over by my own horse....

To Be Continued.

Chapter 1: Curse of the Deku

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 20, 2015
Chapter 1: Curse of the Deku.

The mysterious person raced towards me on the back of Epona, who was scared out of her wits as she was only used to two people riding her, and one of them was me. Without taking any time to come up with a counter-measure, I simply jumped to the side although I ended up colliding with a tree. It was a little embarrassing to have done that given the current situation, but it has been a while since I had to do an acrobatic feat of that nature.

The human world wasn't really known for having such an exciting lifestyle unless you were involved in a dangerous line of work, and what happened during the Friendship Games, Battle of the Bands, and Fall Formal doesn't really count. As I got back onto my feet, and walked towards where Epona had stopped, the person forced her to turn around where she proceeded to charge at me again. I jumped to the side, but this time I made sure to stick the landing, and not collide with anything.

Epona whinnied at me which made me feel angry, for she was scared of what was happening as well as being forced to run me down, but I wasn't exactly in a good position to stop this person who was having the time of her life.

" You know, this is something that I could really get used to!"

" Why are you tormenting me like this?" I asked.

" I'm only having a little bit of fun, and it just so happens to be at your own expense. You really should liven up before you end up getting all frustrated which will do you no good whatsoever. Besides, your horse is enjoying all of this running around as listen to those sounds she is making."

" You have no clue as to how she feels," I said.

" Oh, and I suppose you know?"

" Of course as she and I are able to communicate with each other," I replied.

" Wait just a minute! You can understand the sounds that this thing is saying?"

" And I can speak horse too," I replied. My response resulted in the person going quiet for a few moments, for what I just said left her stumped, yet my focus was on the white fairy who had moved closer to me as though I were attracting her. I'm not sure why it wanted to get close to a complete stranger, but I can't allow myself to be distracted as I need to rescue Epona, and get the Ocarina of Time back before anything else can go wrong.

The person kicked Epona in the ribs again which caused her to start charging towards me, but instead of trying to knock me down yet again, Epona was steered towards a pathway which lead even deeper into the woods. There was no chance of me stopping Epona with my hands as I don't have that kind of strength, yet I needed to make sure not to lose sight of her.

So, I decided to perform an act of stupidity because there was no other option available, and it involved grabbing onto Epona's tail and hanging on for dear life. She then began to gallop along at a fast pace while I was being dragged along the ground which caused me to experience third-degree burns, but that wasn't the only problem getting in my way. The two fairies began attacking me in an attempt to throw me off, yet I had no intention of giving up.

" Wow! You certainly are a stubborn one."

" After everything I've been through in this world, the human world, and Equestria, this is nothing," I said. The white fairy suddenly reacted when I mentioned Equestria, so she stopped attacking me, and simply floated along as though she were in deep thought. I didn't pay attention to this as my focus was on getting my horse and ocarina back, and teaching this person a lesson in the process.

" Equestria? What kind of name is that?"

" It's nothing you need concern yourself with," I replied. Epona continued to gallop through the Lost Woods, and if I was getting worried about becoming lost, that feeling had disappeared several minutes ago, but then we entered a really deep part of the woods where everything seemed a lot bigger than normal. There was something strange about the flora and fauna which made me nervous, and I could have sworn some bushes were moving about off in the distance.

" I'm amazed that you are still hanging on despite having been dragged along all this time."

" It's called perseverance," I said.

" I prefer to call it annoyance, and you are certainly beginning to get on mine. All I wanted was to have some fun, and here you are ruining it for me all because you're just too stubborn over some horse."

" She and I have been through so much together that the thought of you stealing her just makes me mad," I said.

" There's that frustration again, but the novelty has already worn off, so I think I'm going to put an end to this charade right now. Do you see that sharp turn coming up by the tree stump ahead? I hope you know how to land because you're about to be ejected! Guess I'll get some last minute fun at your expense!" I then looked at what she was talking about, and sure enough the upcoming turn was very sharp.

Considering that my body has been dragged all this way, it was on the verge of collapsing, and while I didn't want to admit that I was getting weaker, I remained dedicated to rescuing Epona. Unfortunately, my physical resolve wasn't as strong as my mental one, and so my grip on her tail gave out which caused me to tumble on the ground before crashing into a tree stump.

The person then laughed before galloping off with Epona as the sound of her whinnying reached my ears, so I got back up to realize that now I had to chase them on foot which wasn't going to be easy as I had no idea what was waiting for me. Even though I had a sword and shield on hand for protection, my first instinct involved using my fire magic.

I still had some doubts regarding my ability to swing around a sword given how during my last experience, I often dropped it, or threw it across a room by accident, and even nearly breaking it on one occasion which would have been nothing short of embarrassing. Staring towards the deep recesses of forest which stood before me, I sighed a heavy sigh before beginning to walk forward, but if there was one bit of consolation for me, it was Epona's hoof-prints which would serve as a means of following the right path.

At the end of this path, the thief whose name I would soon discover to be just Skull Kid, and whose proper name became known to me later, had managed to come to a stop before a large cave entrance where she seemed both annoyed and surprised at what had happened.

" Well, we managed to make a clean getaway this time!"

" That was our most difficult target yet Skull Kid given how she regained consciousness sooner than everyone else we've robbed."

" Maybe I shouldn't have wasted precious time trying to play this ocarina, and I can't believe that I'm finding myself agreeing with that girl when it comes to my lack of playing skills with it. Well, I've no intention of getting rid of this instrument... unless that one guy is interested in buying it. I mean, he'll buy just about anything if the price is right, but then he might not want my business given I'm wearing this mask."

" Why not take it off?"

" No way! This mask is making my dreams become a reality, and I just realized that I could use my powers into manipulating that guy without having to worry about him cheating me. It's a win-win situation for us Tael! As for this horse... he won't want a used creature, and even if he did, this thing has proven to be rather unruly."

" You were almost knocked off a few times Skull Kid."

" I think having a horse to ride around isn't the best idea."

" What will you do with it?"

" I'll probably just get rid of it by placing it somewhere back home, and be done with it where it will become someone else's problem."

" And here I thought you were going to end its life."

" Oh come now Tael! Why would I do something as barbaric as that? Granted, I have been having violent tendencies ever since I first put on this mask, but I'm not about to kill an innocent creature just because it won't listen to me. Besides, getting rid of it would be much more interesting as I'll bet that girl would go to the ends of the earth and back in order to be reunited with her steed. Speaking of that girl, I need to speak to you Tatl about what happened to you back there."

" ..."

" You and Tael were attacking that girl repeatedly so she would eventually let go of the horse's tail, yet you suddenly stopped and just floated along like you didn't have a care in the world. Despite our robbery being a complete success, you clearly didn't have your head in the game which is leading me to suspect you don't like what I've been doing as of late. Or, does it involve something else altogether?"

" I'm not sure why we have to resort to thievery just because you think it's fun.

" Of course it's fun!"

" Not for those who we have robbing from."

" They deserved it because many of them have been acting high and mighty, so they needed to be brought down a peg. Okay, some were just unfortunate incidents that happened to be on the path, yet the majority were within reason. Besides, you know that I'm just getting back at everyone who was ever mean to me... including total strangers many of whom I've never seen before.

As long as I have this mask, I have no intention of stopping until I've punished all of them. You two fairies have been mistreated as well given what you told me when we first met a long time ago, so if anything, my actions are in your best interests as well."

" When said in that context..."

" I'm in the right about it."

" I suppose so, but there was something that girl said which sparked a nerve."

" What was it?"

" She said Equestria."

" Again, what kind of name is that? Also, why would such a stupid word cause you to suddenly stop doing anything?"

" As soon as she said it, I started getting these weird images in my head about a world much like our own, but completely different at the same time. There were all kinds of locations that were a mixture of natural, unnatural, ancient, modern, and everything else in-between, yet the weirdest thing is that this world was inhabited by ponies."

" Did you say ponies?"

" Yes."

" Tael was right about you having hit your head on a few trees on the way, for that's the most absurd thing I've ever heard in my entire life. If I were you Tatl, I'd stop thinking about such nonsense before it winds up getting you into a lot of trouble. Still, this happened to you all because of that girl... there seems to be more to her than appearances suggest, so perhaps she ought to be dealt with before she winds up ruining my fun. I've got no doubt that she is following us right now as her stubbornness is quite strong, but she will discover that following someone can lead into disaster."

" But Starlight Glimmer..."

" What did you say Tatl?"

" I don't know why that came out of my mouth."

" Neither do I, but clearly you're losing your mind. That name was probably even more stupid than the word Equestria, but we'll discuss this later as right now I've got more important things to deal with."

" My sister might just need some rest Skull Kid."

" I'm not going to let her messed-up head ruin things for me Tael, so you'd better get her back in line."

Some time passed, and I would eventually find myself staring at a cave entrance, and Epona's hoof-prints kept going. Before entering to continue my pursuit, I took a moment to look at the beautiful scenery which I had grown fond of despite being lost. Seeing all of these trees reminded me of what my life used to be like back in Equestria, and what I had given up in a mad quest for power. Even though I've come a long way since those days where I betrayed Princess Celestia, my heart still wishes that I never left due to not getting what I believed was rightfully mine.

Princess Twilight Sparkle has since become my mentor in addition to a friend, for through the letters I've been sending her via a magical book given to me by Princess Celestia, I've been guided on understanding friendship. There are still certain things I need to understand, but my progress according to Twilight has been outstanding.

I reached into one of my many pouches in the hopes of actually pulling out the book in question, but nothing could be found. If I had it in my possession instead of not, I'd have sent a letter to Twilight explaining what was happening, yet I didn't have a means of writing anything down, so my idea was flawed.

This person... I started to think about the strange mask she was wearing and the dark power that came from it. I don't know why, but I could sense another power coming from this kid, and it reminded me of Equestria for some reason. It could have just been a coincidence on my part, yet there was no mistaking Equestrian magic as it's easy to sense especially when you've been using it. Was it possible that she was from Equestria? If so, then I truly have no idea as to who she really is as it's been a while since I last visited.

Then again, she could be someone from the human world who was banished from Equestria just like the Dazzlings were. The dark power coming from the mask made me think that perhaps she has either been consumed by it, or has complete control over it thus making her dangerous. I've dealt with evil magic before, but this was a magic foreign to me, and yet I would soon experience it first hand when I decided to venture onward by going inside of the cave because Epona needed my help.

There was no chance of me ignoring a friend despite knowing that this could be a trap, so the moment I stepped into the cave, I found myself struggling to keep balanced so that I wouldn't fall into the deep abyss which consisted of the entireity of the cave. Unfortunately, the weight of my sword and shield played against me, and I plunged downwards where everything went dark as though I were once again being dragged into something.

As I fell without knowing what was going to happen, strange images began appearing all around me, and these quickly formed into the shapes of heads which made no sense. Well, they didn't make sense to me while falling, so perhaps they will make sense in due time? The faces were in all kinds of colours that looked both pretty, and psychedelic at the same time, so I was hoping it would end as I was getting freaked out by them.

They would eventually cease appearing which was when I finally landed after falling for practically forever, yet it's the thing that broke my fall that would pique my interest if only for a brief moment. What I landed on was some kind of large plant, and it looked as though something small could dig its way into the center. I had no idea as to what could be capable of such a feat, yet my curiosity beckoned me to take a closer look... my studies with Princess Celestia weren't entirely in vain mind you, for she did teach me some interesting things which I could apply in any given situation.

Unfortunately, I should have been paying more attention towards what was in front of me as opposed to this strange plant, for the one that I had been chasing was waiting in the shadows, and had known of my pursuit. As I continued to examine the plant in the hopes of trying to understand how it worked, a bright light suddenly flashed which blinded me for a few moments, and when I regained my vision, a spotlight was now shining on me as though I were the star of some kind of play, but with no audience in sight apart from the person.

Looking forward, she was floating in front of me which probably had to do with her magical powers, yet why did she need to steal Epona in order to ride a horse when she can clearly fly? I didn't know it then as I do now, but there was a seething anger behind that mask, and it was about to become unleashed with me being the unfortunate victim.

" Welcome although I'm not surprised that you are here."

" Did you seriously think I was about to run away while you robbed me?" I asked.

" Actually, I had hoped you would have been smart and just turned the other cheek leaving me to my own devices, but I knew you were going to follow me. That's just the kind of person you are... stubborn, and unwilling to know when you should give up. But, you're here now which means I've got to deal with this little problem before I can move onto much bigger things."

" What have you done with my horse?" I asked. Epona was no where to be found, and the thief was still holding my ocarina given how she was tossing it back and forth between her hands, so naturally she has done something which demands an answer. I made sure not to be too angry as I sensed the dark magic coming from the mask had gotten stronger. " I don't see my steed anywhere in the facility, so please tell me what you've done with her."

" That horse of yours wouldn't listen to a single word I said."

" She didn't have any trust in you given what you went and made her do," I said.

" What does that even mean?"

" Epona will only obey those who have earned her respect, and know the song that is a sign of a special bond," I replied.

" Is that a fact? Well, since it didn't want to obey any of my commands, there was no longer any reason to keep it around, so I did you a favour and got rid of it. Now, before you go and make a scene, I didn't end the life of your horse as that wouldn't be fun at all. Instead, I just dumped it off somewhere, so you'll just have to go and find it... assuming of course that you can survive what is about to happen."

I couldn't believe it! This person...this thief, had stolen my horse, and had the audacity of getting rid of her somewhere without caring where just because she couldn't control her. The anger building up inside me was reaching a fevered pitch, for I have been greatly wronged, yet my reaction had caught the attention of the person who simply chuckled. " Awwww, what's wrong? Why the angry expression on your face? You're much better off without that horse anyway, so you have no need to feel angry.

" While this may not be the worst thing that has happened to me, it does come rather close," I said.

" I figured you had some previous experiences, but who cares as that horse of yours was just too stupid and stubborn."

" Take that back!" I shouted.

" Aww, boo-hoo! Why the sad face? I just thought I'd have a little fun with you..."

" The fun has just ended," I said.

" Oh, come now... do you really think you can beat me as I am now? Fool! The thought of you posing some kind of threat to me is just laughable, so do yourself a favour and just leave." The person then noticed me drawing both my sword and shield, and she merely laughed which almost made her fall down. " You really are serious about this aren't you? I'll admit that you've got plenty of courage, but that doesn't change the fact that you're stupid. Guess I must show you what happens to those who defy me!"

She then began shaking her head back and forth which made the mask look as though it was shimmering, but that was the least of my problems. I suddenly found myself under her power which caused me to struggle for a moment, but her power proved too strong for me to overcome, and it resulted in me blacking out once again. Instead of being a regular blackout where I would wake up somewhere else a short time later, this was more towards a dream that quickly descended into a horrible nightmare.

Upon awakening from my blackout, I heard a strange noise, but couldn't determine what it was. Then I found myself surrounded by a large number of plant-like creatures that were intent on smothering me, and there was no means for me to make an escape. As they contained to pile on top of me in an attempt to suffocate me, I remember encountering several during my journey across Hyrule... Deku Scrubs I believe they were called.

Eventually, I broke free and began running away as the noise continued getting louder, but then a larger Deku Scrub began following me which really freaked me out, yet tried as I could to outrun it, it was able to catch up before smothering me, and I blacked out yet again which was really starting to get annoying. When I came to this time around, I felt as though my perception had changed like I had someone shrunk in height, and for some reason my sword and shield were no longer in my possession.

" I feel strange..." I said.

" That's because my magic has changed you, and personally for the better I might add!"

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" Like I should believe that!" I shouted.

" WAAAAH!"

" Do you hear that beautiful sound Tatl? Tael? That's the sound of someone whose very existence has been turned completely upside down!"

" What have you done to me?" I asked.

" Your previous expression and form looked so boring, and you were nothing short of tense all because you kept on yammering about not wanting to be here again. So, I decided to give you a complete makeover. The results speak for themselves as this look really suits you, but I doubt that the people in town will be thrilled having another scrub running around."

" I'm... I'm... I'm a Deku Scrub!" I shouted upon the realization that I was no longer human. For some odd reason, my hair remained intact along with the hat that I had been wearing, and the pants of my tunic were still there despite having changed. Everything else that I was wearing and/or holding were gone as though they had been sealed away with powerful magic or something.

I tried to use some of my fire magic in the hopes of getting this person to undo what she had done, but nothing happened which really crushed my heart. The person in the meantime was laughing away at my misery, for in her perspective, my plight was nothing short of amusing, yet I clearly wasn't having a good time.

" And this is a form which is going to last you the rest of your life, so I hope that you quickly get adjusted to it. Of course, you've got plenty of problems already considering what I've already done, and now chalk this one up as another addition. Getting rid of that annoying horse was worth it, for I doubt it will be of any use to a mere scrub, but maybe you'll find it one day if you survive.

As for this ocarina which you gladly gave to me... I'm sure to get better as I continue practicing, and it already sounds better than my flute." Since when did I give her that? First she gets rid of Epona to who knows where because she assumed that she was doing me a favour, but in truth she stole her from me, and now she plans on taking my instrument away just to add salt onto an already festering wound.

" Change me back right now!" I shouted.

" What!?!? Now why would I go and do a thing like that? Like I said, this look really suits you."

" Well, I don't like it!" I shouted.

I hope you enjoy your new life, and I do have one good piece of advice as a parting gift. You might want to stay away from dogs because they have a tendency to attack Deku Scrubs." Again, this is something that I completely ignored because I was irrational over had just happened to me, but I should have paid more attention because I would have saved some time otherwise.

" Wait! Come back!" I shouted.

" Sorry, but I've more important things to do."

" Stop!"

" Have fun with your new life."

" I'm not going to let you get away with this." I said.

" Why don't I show just how strong I can be!"

" Okay, but don't come crying to me when you lose everything." When will I ever learn that being impulsive will do me no good especially when my power had been sealed away, and I had no idea how this new body was supposed to work. In the eyes of the person, my actions were nothing short of immaturity simply due to me being desperate over this incident, so she merely laughed before she began floating backwards towards a tunnel entrance. Who knows where it lead to, but my mind was focused on making her change me back to normal...

... and this is where things are at this moment in time. As I mentioned at the beginning, everything during these last 24 hours has been nothing but a bad dream which I can't wake up from. All I wanted to do was live a normal life despite having to deal with problems that stem forth from Equestria, but instead I am once again trapped inside of a video game world with no idea on what kind of fate awaits me. It felt as though this was the beginning of a new series of torments, and yet there would be an unexpected miracle that would change everything.

The purple fairy chose to go with the person which told me what their alliance was, yet the white fairy ran into me as though it were trying to stop me from chasing after its friend. I tried getting past this fairy, yet it continued on getting in my way, so when I was about to give it a piece of my mind, it called out my name which brought me to a stop.

The person then entered the passageway followed by the purple fairy who called out to the white one in hopes of getting it to hurry up and come along, but it was too late for the tunnel became blocked with a large door.

" Oh no! Tael!" The white fairy quickly flew over to the door and began to collide against it in the hopes of being able to open it, but its drooping wings indicated that it had no chance of getting through. " I need to catch up with my brother before something bad happens... huh? Brother? Tael is my brother? No... no, that can't be right. I don't have a brother named Tael... my brother is named Shining Armour, co-ruler of the Crystal Empire." Did that white fairy just say Shining Armour?

That was the name of Twilight's brother that she told me about during one of her responses to my friendship reports. Now that my mind is cleared of all of the frustration which revolved around me being robbed, I took a closer look at the white fairy, and I was shocked at discovering that this fairy was none other than Princess Twilight Sparkle. Now hold on for a second... she was Princess Zelda during my journey in Hyrule, but now she has taken on a different form?

" Ummmm....Twilight?" I asked.

" Huh? Sunset Shimmer? What are you doing here? More importantly, what am I doing here?" asked Twilight.

" Wait! You know who I am?" I asked.

" Now that's a strange question to ask a friend who is also your mentor," replied Twilight.

" You have no idea how happy I am seeing you here," I said.

" The last thing I remember was sitting inside of my castle attempting to figure out a really difficult problem, but then some kind of strange tornado appeared in my throne room which dragged me into it before I lost consciousness. The next thing I knew, I was in this forest hanging out with someone wearing a weird mask who resorted to thievery, and with me was a fairy who I believed was my brother, yet that honour belongs to Shining Armour," said Twilight.

" You had no idea what you were doing?" I asked.

" Upon looking back on it, I was acting as though I were someone else, but when I saw your unconscious body back in that dark forest, something in my mind reacted which enabled me to remember my true identity as the Princess of Friendship. However, it looks like I've still got some memories of existing in this world," replied Twilight. This little bit of information could prove to be extremely useful, for I had no idea as to where I was going in this world, but Twilight does to some extent.

It looks as though we're both in this together which makes for a nice change of pace, yet Spike proved himself invaluable during my previous adventure. " Now, can you explain to me what exactly is going on? You've been changed into some kind of plant, and believe me when I say it looks really weird, but what about the rest of this?"

" Where do I even begin?" I asked.

" I've plenty of time to hear your story," replied Twilight. I then explained everything that happened which resulted in everyone in the human world including Twilight being dragged into the world known as Hyrule as seen in 'The Legend of Zelda: Ocarina of Time', and everyone had been given new lives aside from me as only I remembered how things were supposed to be. I even explained that I went through so much torment in my bid to change everything back to normal, and that Ganondorf had warned me of my current plight which ended up being where we are right now.

As Twilight listened to my intricate description, she experienced a variety of emotions such as sadness, shock, horror, happiness, and even anger. " I can't believe all that happened to you and everyone else... including me all because one man wanted you to suffer, but why didn't you mention any of this in your friendship reports? If you had told me, I could have provided some kind of help."

" At first, I didn't want to believe what happened, and pretended as though it had been nothing but a bad dream. When I started seeing the Mark of the Triforce appear on the back of my hand on a regular basis, I knew that it was all true, so I chose not to let anyone else know about it. My thought process was that no one would believe me even if I told them, so that was I went with until Rainbow Dash made me realize that the human world has seen all sorts of weird things courtesy of Equestria. The thought of one world being changed into another isn't quite out there as one would think, yet only our close friends knew," I said.

" And me?" asked Twilight.

" I thought you would have laughed," I replied.

" No, my role as the Princess of Friendship would have compelled me to help you deal with the problem," said Twilight.

" Wish I'd known that sooner," I moaned.

" Nothing can be done to change the past Sunset Shimmer, and you know that better than most, but I think you should be open with me regarding your inner demons, for you know that I've got your back," said Twilight. I cringed when she brought up the word demon because of Sunset Demon, so I explained to her about my dark side wanting to take over my life, and become the real me. " Hyrule must have a magic which is more ancient and powerful than what's in Equestria, yet you defeated this demon proving you are in fact Sunset Shimmer."

" I'm not so sure as she did say that she would return," I said.

" Well, if that were to happen then you can easily overcome her given that you're be stronger than you are now. Since you went to all the trouble of explaining what has happened to you, I should explain what I know about this world. It feels weird having two sets of memories, but it's something I'll quickly adjust myself towards," said Twilight. She began by talking about the other fairy who had been in the company of the Skull Kid, the name of the person, and my jaw dropped when she revealed that it was Spike.

How about that? He went from being my partner to that of a thief who wears a creepy mask. Twilight said that Spike doesn't have his real memories like the two of us do, so the chances of getting him to aid us are slim to none, and this will apply essentially to everyone else we know who exist in this world. " I can't imagine Spike as a fairy given how he is a dragon, but you can as he was a fairy when you went through your experience."

" We had our share of banters here and there, but we did make for an excellent team," I said.

" Did he ever believe that you were someone else, and not the one he thought you were?" asked Twilight.

" It took Spike a long time before he finally believed that I came from another world, yet I think he knew from the very start, but didn't want to confess as he thought it would have made him appear inferior to me. This time around, you're my partner Twilight which will make things different," I replied. This revelation came as a surprise to her as she had never been anyone's partner before from that perspective.

Usually, she was the one in the leader role given how she was a natural born leader, but now she must guide me along as I'm the only one who can actually perform any kind of feat as fairies are rather fragile in nature. Twilight then remembered the face of the Skull Kid, for it was one that she could never forget because of an incident that happened in Equestria.

" It was Starlight Glimmer," said Twilight.

" Who?" I asked.

" Right, you don't know about her," replied Twilight. She went on to explain that Starlight Glimmer was a pony who wished to make all ponies equal with another, and desired a world where no one is either superior or inferior to anyone else... a world where equality dictated all. Those who she convinced gave up their cutie marks willingly without understanding the true nature of what was going on, yet Starlight never gave up her mark, and pretended to have a equal sign mark just like everyone else did.

The thought of a pony with that kind of desire in her heart frightened me to the core, and now this same pony was here in this strange world wearing a mask of tremendous dark power which could allow her to fulfill her wishes. Twilight then explained that Starlight Glimmer became so desperate to see her vision become reality, she was willing to go to any extreme even if it meant bringing Equestria to its knees.

" And I thought my problems were bad," I said.

" You reformed and learned from your mistakes, but she refuses to change her ways," said Twilight.

" Starlight Glimmer most likely doesn't recall her memories of Equestria, so we won't have to deal with her plans for equality, but she is capable of so much more given she changed me into a Deku Scrub," I said.

" Then we need to go after her to make sure she doesn't cause anymore trouble, and since I'm your fairy partner as opposed to Spike, it's up to me to guide you along which means this will be difficult as I don't know much either," said Twilight. In reality, she knew a lot about this world, but such memories would appear at various intervals as though it would just come to her when the situation needs it.

It was pretty obvious that I needed to open the door ahead, so I did so and entered the same tunnel Starlight Glimmer used when she and Spike made their escape earlier. The tunnel turned out to be pretty short, for it expanded out into a large room where shrubs were scattered all over the place. Twilight floated ahead of me for a few seconds before making her way back over before looking at me from several angles, and it felt really uncomfortable as though she was scanning me. " It looks as though you can spin around and use the tip of your hat as a weapon."

" I can actually fight like this?" I asked.

" You can't use magic, or that sword and shield, so this looks to be your means of fighting," replied Twilight. It sounded odd spinning around as a means of attacking, but I didn't have much choice given my current form was so restrictive, so I began to spin around several times in order to cut down the shrubs as they were the only things that counted as targets. Spinning around was actually a lot of fun, and I didn't feel sick even once which must be because Deku Scrubs are used to spinning compared with humans.

I also learned that I move quite the distance when I spin, so this could allow me to get around at fast paces in case I'm racing against time for whatever reason. Once I felt comfortable, I made my way over to the door, and opened it where I entered a much larger room that consisted of several pillars that rose up from an abyss.

There was another one of those flowers like what I landed on before when I first came to this area, and something was compelling me to take a closer look. Twilight took notice of my actions, and decided to take a closer look as well. " I've got to admit that the flora and fauna around here is different from what we have back in Equestria, but it looks like you might be able to dive down into this flower given how you're currently a plant yourself."

" I can dive into this?" I asked.

" Maybe, but I'm not sure where," replied Twilight.

" Guess all I can do is look," I said. The center of the flower looked to be the perfect spot for me to dive into, and that urge was directing me to stand there, so I did and dove into the flower until my mouth stuck out which must have looked weird. " Okay, aside from this being completely bizarre especially for my standards, this does feel really nice as though I was meant to do this, but how am I supposed to get back out?"

" This is something that's beyond anything I've ever seen, so you'll have to figure out an answer," replied Twilight.

" Am I going to be stuck in this flower forever?" I asked. Such a thought made me curse the fact that I dove into this flower, and just as I was about to blow my top, I found myself being ejected where I somehow materialized two smaller flowers. These began spinning around at a rapid pace like they were the blades of a helicopter, and it dawned on me that I was floating above the ground.

My next thought was to try and see if I could move around as just hovering wasn't going to do me any good, so I floated along which was really fun... until I came to a startling conclusion. This method of flight has a time limit, and I learned this the hard way as I almost plunged into the abyss, but lucky for me, I managed to make it to the next platform.

" Okay, I can use those flowers that appear whenever I'm in the air to float around, but only for a short time as demonstrated when they wore off. This would have been something I could have been told much sooner, yet I'm not blaming you Twilight as you didn't know any better than I did."

" Perhaps one of those Deku Scrubs can teach you," suggested Twilight.

" First, I need to see if I can do this on my own, and I've got a few more pillars to reach," I said. There was another flower nearby on this second platform, so I dove down into it before launching myself again where those two small flowers appeared above my head, or rather in my hands as I'm holding the stems which connect to the petals and core.

Unfortunately, I was facing the wrong direction, so when I realized this and attempted to float over to the next platform, the petals fell off which made me fall where I barely managed to grab the platform's edge allowing me to pull myself up. " Definitely need some teaching as that was another close call."

" You still have another platform," said Twilight.

" This is going to be one of those days," I sighed.

" Sorry for not being more helpful," said Twilight.

" No, you've already proven that and then some what with the replies you've made to my reports," I said.

" Reports about friendship aren't exactly going to be helpful where we are," said Twilight. She then noticed a weird-looking tree that was situated on the final platform which also connected to another tunnel which lead into the darkness, and she signalled me to make my way to the tree as fast as possible.

" Sunset Shimmer! You need to see this tree right away as it looks as though it could explain why you look the way you do." A third flower was present in this area, so I dove into it before launching myself again, but I was slightly more fortunate in that I was floating in the right direction. However, I didn't take distance into consideration this time which resulted in me crashing into the wall above the tunnel entrance before landing hard on my burear. " Not exactly the most graceful moment you had there."

" Spike said the same thing many times during my last adventure," I moaned.

" He was wise to have done so," chuckled Twilight.

" So I'm not the most graceful person out there, but I made it which is all that matters. So, what did you mean when you said this tree would explain things?" I asked.

" Take a good look at it," replied Twilight. The tree was certainly weird given how small it was compared to normal trees, yet it appeared to have some kind of face on it which resembled someone crying as though their life had come to a tragic end. " Your current face bears such a striking resemblance to the face on this tree, it's as though you have taken on its form. What I'm trying to say is that this tree must have suffered horribly, and you were changed into it albeit in a moving form. I am also sensing the same dark magic which was surrounding Starlight Glimmer, so she must have been the one who did this."

" Could it have once been a living creature?" I asked.

" Perhaps, but I don't have enough evidence to answer that properly," replied Twilight.

" If Starlight Glimmer did do this, she must be stopped before things get even worse," I said.

" Considering her current memories are of this world as opposed to Equestria, she has an advantage in terms of knowing the lay of the land. The two of us are walking around blind without any clue as to where we can go," said Twilight.

" You have the memories of this world in addition to your own," I said.

" Oh! Then, I guess we do have some idea on what this world will be like," said Twilight. After shaking my head for a few moments as a means of chuckling along at this rather awkward moment she just had, I walked into the tunnel which resembled the previous one, but then things got weird again when everything started to spiral around as though everything was becoming distorted for no reason.

It eventually came to a stop when I entered a large room where a massive door closed behind me with no means of opening it, and all around me were several large gears like the kind you see within factories, or other forms of machinery.

" This place feels morbid," I commented.

" All of these gears give off the impression that we're inside some kind of giant mechanism," said Twilight.

" Such as?" I asked.

" A clock for one thing," replied Twilight.

" Then we should look for the entrance if this place is exactly that," I suggested.

" Why not try that flight of stairs over there at the back? I don't think there is any exit on the lowest level of this place, so climbing up to the top may be our best bet," said Twilight. Even though I had a small body complete with small legs and feet, I still walked at my usual pace which didn't mean it would take me a long time, so I walked over to the stairs and up to the next level which consisted of a large area with an even larger door on the opposite side. " That must be our way out, yet why have such a large door anyway?"

" I've got a question," I began.

" What is it?" asked Twilight.

" How did Starlight Glimmer get a hold of that mask?" I asked.

" My mind is hazy given how I've got my real memories back, but I do seem to recall a strange woman who carried a large bag that was filled with masks. Starlight got her hands on that mask by taking advantage, but I don't remember how she did it," replied Twilight. There was no doubt in my mind that the woman Twilight was referring to was Sonata Dusk, who in Hyrule was known as the Happy Mask Saleswoman. I remember my encounters with her where she wanted me to assist her in the sale of her masks, and she even assisted me in other ways which proved to be invaluable.

If I'm to meet up with her, I'm hoping she will remember who I am in her current incarnation rather than the one where she was a member of the Dazzlings. This strange area was devoid of any kind of life which made it even more eerie, but then something came to mind that related to Sonata.

How could she even be here in the first place? I doubt she dropped down into that massive chasm back in the Lost Woods, so maybe there are other entrances to this new world aside from the one I used. I walked a few paces towards the door before coming to a stop, for I could sense someone having appeared behind me. My first instinct was that the one behind me was Sheik who wanted to surprise me, but she was Twilight in disguise last time, and is currently with me in the form of a fairy.

Then I thought it could be some kind of monster, but this place isn't exactly an ideal location for something like that. Knowing that I had to face whoever this person was, I turned out where Twilight immediately hid behind my hat while I responded with my usual reaction in a situation like this.

" WAAAAH!"

" I remember that scream from back in Hyrule although that was quite some time ago."

" You recognize it?" I asked.

" One person loved to make such a scream, but not for a good reason of course as she did so because of being scared. That person was named Sunset Shimmer, who at one time served as a Happy Mask Saleswoman who was able to sell some of my masks." I breathed a huge sigh of relief as Sonata Dusk was standing behind me with her iconic bag of masks, yet her appearance was not as cheerful as before as though something had greatly affected her.

Maybe traveling to this world from Hyrule may have been too much for her to handle, or maybe all that time traveling alone without any friends has made her bitter. " You know, that green hat along with those green shorts reminds of the Kokiri child who helped me out, and that reaction of yours was almost identical to hers."

" I am Sunset Shimmer," I said.

" Really? But, you look so much different than you did when we last met. If you really are Sunset Shimmer, then you should be able to tell me what masks I gave you in order to sell to those who desired them. This also includes how much each mask cost which had to be paid back to me upon the successful sale. While it may seem unfair that I'm asking all of this to you after we've only just met, but I need to be sure that you are being sincere," said Sonata.

My mind began thinking about what the masks were, so remembering the exact details was difficult. Eventually, after spending what felt like 20 minutes trying to remember something which didn't have much practical use to me, I revealed what Sonata wanted me to tell her, and I stumbled several times as clearly this was information I had to dig deep into the recesses of my mind to even remotely recall any of it.

" Only someone who was dedicated when it comes to selling masks would know all of that... so, I see you've met with a terrible fate haven't you? In case you have forgotten which is a distinct possibility, allow me to introduce myself. I own the Happy Mask Shop. I travel far and wide in search of masks. During my travels, a very important mask was stolen from me by an imp in the woods."

" You don't say," I commented. That must mean Starlight Glimmer stole that strange mask she was wearing from Sonata, but how was she able to do that? Twilight knows the answer to that question, but her memories from this world currently elude her, so I guess I'll just have to figure it out later. On the other hand, I wish Sonata didn't tell about who she is and what her profession was as I remember it from my Hyrule adventure.

Maybe she has doubts about who I claim to be, and I don't blame her as I'm not exactly in my more well-known form right now. I'll humour her for the time being, for that should make her feel better to some extent. " So here I am at a loss, and now I've found you. Now don't think me rude, but I have been following you."

" Wait, what!?!?" I exclaimed.

" I have been following you," said Sonata.

" How? There was no way someone who carries such a large bag would have survived the plunge back in the Lost Woods, and even I was barely able to survive the drop as an unusual flower managed to break my fall," I said.

" Things are not always what they seem," said Sonata.

" If you say so," I said.

" Judging from the tone in your voice, you're not a fan of being stuck in the current form you now reside in. I wouldn't want to wish such a fate on anyone, and I certainly wouldn't want to suffer myself otherwise I wouldn't be able to sell my masks. I also wouldn't get to enjoy the tacos which I eat whenever I am feeling peckish, but you need not worry about your current condition my small friend... for I know of a way to return you to your former self," said Sonata.

" You do? How?" I asked.

" If you can get back the precious item that was stolen from you, I will return you to normal," replied Sonata.

" That means I need to find Starlight Glimmer, and reclaim the Ocarina of Time," I said.

" In exchange... all I ask is that you also get back my precious mask that the imp stole from me," said Sonata.

" I'm not sure if that's possible, for she has proven to be very powerful when it comes to using the dark magic which stems from it," I said.

" What? Is it not a simple task? Why, to someone like you, it should by no means be a difficult task. However, there is something which I must reveal to you, yet I am sure that it won't cause any problems. You see, I am a very busy woman what with my business of selling masks, and because of this, I am on a very busy schedule which may not appear as such. I must leave this place in three days," said Sonata.

" You have to leave in three days!?!?" I exclaimed. During my journey across Hyrule, I never had any kind of time limit on my hands aside from when I needed to find the third and final Spiritual Stone, but then that was actually pretty tame given how Ganondorf wasn't doing anything until he made his move. Three days isn't a lot of time for me especially since I have no idea what kind of world I have been dragged to, and Twilight doesn't have any ideas either, so Sonata is expecting me to perform what is basically a miracle for her?

Judging from the way she worded her situation, I've got no other choice but to carry out her task, for it means me being freed of this accursed form. There was no doubt in my mind that this wasn't going to be a good day for me... or in this case, a good three days....

To Be Continued.

Chapter 2: The Tingle of Pinkie

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 22, 2015
Chapter 2: The Tingle of Pinkie

" How am I supposed to find that mask for you in just three days?" I asked.

" If you have faith, then there is nothing that can stop you from achieving your goal, and of course you will be benefitting from this as well. If you believe that I am trying to deceive you, then there is no need to show such concerns. I do indeed have the means to break the curse, but I cannot do anything until you get back the precious item which that imp stole from you," replied Sonata. While the thought of being changed back was a very tempting offer, what she was asking of me was far greater than anything I've ever done before.

Granted, I ended up having to help a lot of people during my adventures across Hyrule, yet those had no time limits attached to them whereas this one does. Looking at the expression on Sonata's face showed me that she was really upset about having been robbed, and I can relate to her as I experienced the same thing courtesy of Starlight Glimmer. It could be that she is pretending to be upset in the hopes of making me help her out, so my thought process was seeing if I could maybe get some information that will help me get started.

" You do look very upset over losing this mask, yet I am sure that you can get it back yourself," I said.

" Under normal circumstances yes, but the imp has figured out how to tap into some of the mask's dark power. She will eventually come to wield a power that most cannot even fathom should she progress far enough with it, and because of that I am unable to do anything to stop her. You on the other hand, have dealt with such things time and again which gives you a certain knack. How grateful I would be if you could bring it back to me before my time here is up. But yes, you'll be fine. I see you are young and have tremendous courage. I'm sure you'll find it right away," said Sonata.

" Sigh, it looks like I've got no choice but to help," I sighed.

" Again, you shall benefit from this," said Sonata.

" Got any advice?" I asked.

" I haven't been here that long myself even though I did follow you, but several people may be able to help you. There is a group of children who patrol this town, and they are dedicated to fighting for justice. Despite how young they are, the people have praised them for their efforts, yet they are cautious when it comes to dealing with non-children which includes non-humans. There is one other person who can be of immense help, but I must warn you that she can be rather difficult to comprehend given how her behaviour is viewed as being odd in the eyes of others," replied Sonata.

" That's not much to go on," I said.

" Your fairy companion will be able to fill in the blanks as it were," said Sonata.

" But why three days?" I asked.

" It will become clear to you the moment you step outside of this tower. Well then, I am counting on you," replied Sonata. She then took her bag off of her back before reaching into one of her pockets, and pulled out a taco. She proceeded to sit down in order to rummage through her bag which indicated that there was no longer any need to remain here, so I walked up to the large door which opened up quite easily despite its size.

Dawn of the First Day: 72 Hours Remain

I found myself staring at what appeared to be some kind of town given how there were people walking about doing their business, several buildings which must be people's houses, and the sounds of construction were everywhere as though someone was building something very close by.

Right off the bat, I could tell that this place was different from Hyrule as it had more modern looking buildings as opposed to medieval kinds, but the strangest thing is that several people looked familiar as they were people I encountered in Kakariko Village. Surely this was because of everyone in the human world got dragged into this world, or maybe there was something else at work?

" Where are we?" I asked.

" This is Clock Town which serves as the central hub for all of Termina," replied Twilight.

" Termina?" I asked.

" That's the name of the world we're currently in. It's quite an interesting place where Clock Town is situated right in the centre of the land, so many people come and go from here in order to reach their destinations. There are four additional areas located in the four compass directions... Woodfall is situated south where many forest creatures dwell, and they say that a palace is situated at the heart of the forest which also doubles as a swamp. To the north is Snowhead, a large mountain range that can be difficult to traverse due to how often it snows there, but those who live there are used to such conditions.

Great Bay is next which lies to the west, and comprises of a coastline that stretches across western Termina, yet it can be dangerous because of the pirates who make their home there. The final area is called Ikana, but much about this area remains in shadows due to few people venturing there, for they say it's haunted by spirits... ethereal beings of an ancient kingdom that once thrived there," replied Twilight.

" Not bad for someone who is having memory issues," I said.

" I would tell you more, but that's all I'm able to recall," said Twilight.

" Well, it does give us some ideas about where we'll be visiting in order to figure out how to change things back to normal, but perhaps if we talk to some of the locals around here, they may be willing to provide additional information," I said. The thought of what kind of adventures and dangers which awaited me outside this town filled my heart with dread as it meant fighting against powerful monsters, but it had to be done in order to save this world from destruction.

It then hit me that from what I was looking at, things looked relatively peaceful, and not disastrous as Ganondorf claimed. Perhaps he was wrong? Or, maybe there was something I was missing? Either way, my mission involved figuring out where Starlight Glimmer was hiding, and I had just three days to find her and get back both the Ocarina of Time, and the mask she stole from Sonata.

" There is one person who can help us out," began Twilight.

" Who?" I asked.

" The Great Fairy who lives in the Fairy Fountain that lies in the north of town. She watches over everything that happens around here, so she most likely knows where we can find Starlight Glimmer," replied Twilight. I remember my encounters with the Great Fairy in Hyrule... all six of them, and each time I had to deal with the same person every time... Adagio Dazzle, who was the leader of the Dazzlings who used their siren voices in an attempt to try and take over the human world. Did this mean I had to deal with her in this world? Also, would she remember me from last time? Finally, would she be aware that things aren't what they are supposed to be?

" Do you know where in the north the fountain is?" I asked.

" I have no idea," replied Twilight.

" Your memories from this world really need to be worked on," I said.

" I just need to get used to the fact that I have two sets of memories, my own, and those of this character Tatl which I'm portraying. Was it this bad when you were journeying around with Spike?" asked Twilight.

" He had no memories of his real self, so he was strictly all about portraying the role of Navi the Fairy," I replied. It sounded like Twilight was really struggling, but I knew deep down that she was trying her best, and that meant not giving her any kind of pressure. I know things look pretty bad right now, but they should get better especially when we start to get an understanding as to how Termina is supposed to work. Until then, we're walking around blind which was what I was doing last time despite Spike doing his best to guide me along.

" By the way, what was up with Sonata?" asked Twilight.

" Everyone we know from the human world, and in some cases from Equestria, have been re-imagined as people who live in this video game world, but they don't realize that it's all just a video game. They think everything that has happened is all real, and for the most part they will reject any notions that things aren't meant to be like this. Only those who are the closest to us, in this case, our friends, may have an inkling that compels them to come to the understanding that we're from a different world," I replied.

" So Sonata isn't our enemy even though she was before?" asked Twilight.

" It's a case of black and white from what I discovered during my previous adventure. Those who are our friends may end up being our enemies in this world, and the same is true of our enemies being our friends here. There is no way of knowing for certain until their true natures become apparent to us," I replied.

" Things are going to be getting weird," said Twilight.

" You have no idea," I said. Both of us then laughed together which made us feel good, and this was especially true for me. In the past, I never got the chance to laugh with any friends about anything, for my focus was on my studies with Princess Celestia. In my eyes, becoming a powerful unicorn was all that mattered, and friendship was nothing short of weak and worthless.

Oh how I wish that I could have learned about such a wonderful thing as friendship much sooner than I did, for it would have meant my life going down a much different path than what really happened. Having accepted friendship into my life was the greatest thing I've ever experienced, and I'd never give it up for anything, yet there were those who feel I should have remained on the path I had chosen... those such as Sunset Demon who desired power above all else.

" Hey! Why is that one person looking up at the sky?" asked Twilight.

" Beats me, but it's probably not that important," I replied.

" Judging from his expression, he looks scared," said Twilight.

" Maybe we should look up as well?" I asked.

" It's probably nothing like you said, but we can't overlook anything," replied Twilight.

" I just need to move forward a little bit given the Clock Tower is overshadowing us with its presence," I said. Taking several steps forward until the warmth coming from the early morning sun shone down on me, I looked upwards where my entire body froze in utter horror. Floating miles above was a moon, but this one had a face which was giving off a rather menacing expression, and then something flashed in my memory.

I remember seeing that same face on the giant screen just before the tornado appeared that brought all of us into this world. Just seeing that face made me run back towards the Clock Tower in fear, and I buried my head into my hands knowing what it really meant.

" What's wrong?" asked Twilight.

" That face on the moon... it was the same one I saw when everything went wrong back in the human world," I replied.

" Do you suppose this could be what Ganondorf said about a disaster?" asked Twilight.

" I don't know as he was rather cryptic about it," I replied.

" From what I've seen so far, only the one person has shown signs of taking notice of the moon, for everyone else just seems to be focused on their lives. I hope you don't plan on going back inside Sunset Shimmer as we need to figure this out otherwise everyone is going to be stuck here forever," said Twilight.

" You're right! Even though I'm scared out of my wits knowing this revelation, I can't allow myself to become consumed with fear. Okay, we first need to figure out a plan before we do anything as we've only got 72 hours before Sonata has to leave," I said.

" Coming up with plans is my speciality, and it should only take me a few minutes to come up with something," said Twilight. She then floated down to the ground, and began scribbling on the dirt as a way of concocting a plan. While her actions did come off as somewhat unusual, I knew there was nothing to worry about even though sometimes her plans have been known to backfire. After scribbling for a few minutes, Twilight came up with a solution given how she celebrated by doing a dance while also saying the word 'yes' several times over.

" Seeing the Great Fairy is a great first step as she will no doubt tell us what we need to do in order to find Starlight Glimmer, but we could do with some kind of map that will help us navigate this town better. It may not look like it, but Clock Town is quite a large place, and getting ourselves lost would be the worst thing imaginable if you know what I mean."

" I've been around Rarity long enough to know that," I said.

" Someone in Clock Town is a specialist when it comes to making maps, so finding them is of the utmost importance," said Twilight.

" Guess I should start asking people around," I sighed. It proved to be a rather difficult task when it came to asking people for help, for many of them turned a blind eye towards me simply because of being a Deku Scrub. Those who saw past that simply referred to me as a little child who was trying to find her own way without the assistance of her parents, and even a small dog attempted to bite me which is something Starlight did warn about in her own cruel way.

After spending a good while trying to find anyone who was willing to look past my current appearance, I ended up with no progress at all, and already an hour had gone by as though it had merely been minutes. " This isn't working out very well for me Twilight!"

" People are treating you badly due to you being a Deku Scrub," said Twilight.

" It's like those few months after being defeated when I became a she-demon all over again where almost everyone shunned me just because of what I did to them," I cried.

" Blame Starlight Glimmer for having turned you into this form," said Twilight.

" She must be enjoying my misery right now," I said.

" Then you've got a strong resolve to prevent her from doing so to anyone else," said Twilight. That was a pretty interesting way to look at it, and it did make me feel better overall, but then Starlight wielded a power that could become even worse were she to somehow lose control of it. Power is a double-edged sword in that while many people strive to claim it for themselves to better their own lives, only a select few can control it.

Those who are too weak will end up being consumed by the very power they seek, and in turn will hurt others just because they couldn't succeed. My instincts convinced me to take a look behind the Clock Tower as I figured something could be hiding back there waiting for me to discover it, and sure enough I was right as there was something there... or rather someone.

" Now there's someone I've never seen before, yet she has an Equestrian feel about her," I said.

" I'll say that she does. That's Fleur Dis Lee, one of the Canterlot elite who are perhaps the most recognized ponies in Canterlot barring the princesses. Fleur is often in the company of Fancy Pants, who is at the top of the social ladder, and she is known for supporting a large number of charities. Her appearance and mannerisms do give an impression that she is snooty and superior to others, but she never thinks that way," said Twilight.

" How do you know all of this?" I asked.

" I got it from Rarity," replied Twilight.

" Ha, ha, ha, ha! I should have known considering how you've told me that the Rarity you know strives to be of the Canterlot elite, but it seems Fleur Dis Lee in this world is anything but a member of the social elite. In fact, she looks like she is the proprietor of a bank," I said.

" That's a bank!?!? It's more of a stall than anything else," said Twilight.

" We're not in Equestria anymore Twilight, so this must be the Termina version of a bank... yeah, I do see what you mean given that Equestrian banks are large and full of splendor which is also true with banks in the human world," I said.

" When you get your hands on some bits, maybe we can deposit them for safe keeping," suggested Twilight. Did she seriously just say bits? It's been a very long time since I heard that word being used to describe a currency, but sadly she was wrong. In Equestria, bits served as our means of paying for things, and took on the form of gold coins which unicorns carried around using their magic while Pegasi and earth ponies had to do so with their teeth.

I then explained to Twilight that the currency around here was the rupee given how I acquired some back when I cut the grass during my spinning practice earlier. At least Termina has the same currency as Hyrule, so I'm not completely in the dark at least when it comes to money. Fleur Dis Lee looked like she was desperate given how she kept on slapping her hands down onto the desk, but maybe she is just trying to get people to pay her a visit and deposit some of their rupees.

I quickly checked the wallet that somehow appeared out of nowhere in one of my pouches, and it contained about 20 rupees which didn't really seem like all that much. I must have acquired this wallet upon waking up after the tornado brought me here, yet it looks like it can only hold a small amount of rupees. I'd say about 100 rupees at the most which may become a problem especially if things start getting expensive.

" Guess we might as well pay her a visit," I suggested.

" With just 20 rupees?" asked Twilight.

" In Hyrule, I ended up running out of money more times than I would have liked, and I had no means of storing them somewhere in case I needed them. You never want to explore anywhere without the local currency in your pocket," I replied.

" I suppose that's true," said Twilight. I proceeded to walk up to the bank which made me feel awkward, for I had no idea as to the kind of reaction I was going to get, but luckily this was a case where it was a positive one.

" What's this? You need something from me? Oh! A new customer, and a Deku Scrub all of things. I rarely see any Deku Scrubs come to the bank because of how they are constantly mistreated by everyone around here, so you must either have tough skin to withstand all of the abuse, or you came here during our quiet period. Anyway, welcome to the bank of Clock Town as administered courtesy of the mayor!" said Fleur Dis Lee.

" I came here to deposit some rupees," I said.

" Then allow me the privilege of explaining how the bank works. Every time you pay me a visit, you can either deposit rupees or take some out if you have the need to do some spending for reasons that I'm not allowed to know as it's your business. Now, when it comes to depositing and/or withdrawing rupees, you can only give/take up to your maximum amount.

I'll get really annoyed if you tried withdrawing more rupees than what you currently have in the bank for example, so don't do anything like that! What else do I need to explain to you? Oh yes! At night, there is a small fee that I'll be enforcing whenever you've got a mind to withdraw," said Fleur Dis Lee.

" How much is the fee?" I asked.

" Four rupees," replied Fleur Dis Lee. That actually wasn't a bad thing when you consider that she could have said say something like 50 rupees, but the rest of her explanation sounded really confusing, but Twilight appeared to understand given how she was listening to everything.

" How often are you open?" I asked.

" We never close because it's my belief that the bank must be accessible at all times. Now, you probably think that I never go to sleep or anything, but even I can't escape the beautiful nature of sleep, so I do have an assistant who covers for me. You'll probably never see him working here unless you do all of your banking needs during the night," replied Fleur Dis Lee. She could tell from my expression despite being a Deku Scrub that I was still having some hesitation, so she decided to sweeten the deal as it were.

" If you deposit rupees on a regular basis, you'll end up getting some really good rewards which could prove useful." Hearing her say that did pique my interest, and she knew this.

" What kind of rewards?" I asked.

" If you can deposit over 200 rupees, I'll give you something which can enable you to carry more. Judging from your size, you must be a child which means you carry a child's wallet with a 99 rupee limit. This isn't the only reward I can give you, so don't stop after depositing 200 rupees. If you can deposit 1,000 rupees then I'll give you some interest, and finally, if you can deposit 5,000 rupees you'll receive the best prize I have, but I can't tell you what it is other than say that you'll survive longer," replied Fleur Dis Lee.

" 5,000 rupees!?!? That's more than what I acquired altogether last time," I said. Even though I never took the liberty of writing down how many rupees I amassed during my adventures in Hyrule, I never collected 5,000 rupees even after finding many hidden treasure chests that contained rupees. If I am to get this final prize, I've got to grind like there's no tomorrow which is bound to be extremely difficult. Perhaps going for the smaller reward for 200 rupees deposited would be easier for me, and I can go from there.

" Now that we've got all of that sorted out, do you have any rupees for depositing?" asked Fleur Dis Lee.

" I have 20 right here," I replied.

" That's it? That ain't nothing at all, big spender!" said Fleur Dis Lee.

" I'll be depositing a lot more in the future," I said.

" Well, since you did deposit some rupees even though 20 is really a joke, I might as well do something else for you so that I won't forget your deposits. Let me stamp you with my special ink. Hey, relax! It doesn't leave any marks, and it's not gonna hurt. There! Now I'll know you when I see you," said Fleur Dis Lee. The stamp didn't really look all that impressive, and there was some kind of strange smell coming from it which might linger about for a while, but this did seem like a benefit in a sense.

If I manage to return to my human form upon getting the ocarina back and pay her a visit again, she'll recognize me in an instant. Since there was nothing else for me to do at the bank for the time being, I said my thanks before leaving.

" That went rather well," said Twilight.

" Yeah, but the ink smell is going to make me nausceous," I moaned.

" At least you know that your money is safe," said Twilight.

" I just need to remember to come back here after I've saved up some more," I said.

" Now we must find someone who can sell us a map, and you'll need to scrounge up some more rupees seeing as you just deposited all you've collected so far into the bank, and I doubt Fleur Dis Lee will appreciate you coming back just after leaving so that you can reclaim them again," said Twilight. I smacked myself on the forehead upon realizing my mistake as that money could have gotten me a map, but I suppose I'll have to find more.

Since Twilight said that the Great Fairy Fountain was located in North Clock Town, I walked north, or what I assumed was north, and entered another area which comprised of a small field with a playground of sorts in one corner. In the middle of the area was a young child who appeared to be trying to hit a balloon with a peashooter, and the balloon featured the image of the mask Starlight Glimmer was wearing on her face. I could see another balloon close by, yet this one was being used by someone wearing a green spandex suit which looked really weird, and finally a large cave entrance stuck out to my left which could be the location of the fountain.

" Very quiet around here," I commented.

" Unless you're referring to the girl floating with the balloon," moaned Twilight.

" Is she someone you know?" I asked.

" I've heard rumours of someone who has been seen floating around in various places across Termina, and wears a green suit which makes her look as though she comes from the forest, but people have said that she is eccentric... or just downright nuts because of her twisted fantasies," replied Twilight. It sounded like this girl must have some really weird way of thinking to act in such a manner, so why was I drawn to her by taking a closer look? The description I received felt very familiar like I knew who she was, and when I got close enough without making myself out to be some kind of stalker, I immediately recognized her.

" Pinkie Pie!?!?" I exclaimed.

" Where?" asked Twilight.

" She's the one wearing the green spandex suit," I replied.

" You've got to be kidding me! Then again, considering how Pinkie has been known to bend reality to her will without doing so intentionally, her wearing such a ridiculous outfit isn't that far from the truth," said Twilight. As I walked forward, the child who was using the peashooter suddenly looked in my direction as though I was doing something wrong which clearly wasn't true, but then he went back to what he was doing which made me feel slightly uncomfortable.

Being a Deku Scrub was really starting to become annoying as most people treated me like I was dirt, and that wasn't fair as I didn't want to look like this. Sighing heavily, I made my way over to where Pinkie was floating above ground via her balloon, and I looked upwards in order to communicate with her.

" Um... hello?" I asked.

" Huh? Is that a fairy I see floating around you? I can't quite see from way up here, so could you pop my balloon for me? I'll drop down to the ground like a rock, and get a much closer look to see if my eyes weren't playing tricks on me," replied Pinkie Pie.

" If I do that, you could get seriously hurt," I said.

" Nah! I'm used to dropping down from the sky as it's the only way people are able to talk to me provided they want to. You're a funny looking Deku Scrub, but don't take it as an insult as it's not often I see one of your kind wearing a hat that's almost as big as your head. Since you're a Deku Scrub and all, mind using your bubbles to pop my balloon and getting me down?" asked Pinkie Pie.

" My what?" I asked.

" Your bubbles silly. All Deku Scrubs are capable of blowing magical bubbles from their mouths provided they have magic, so could you please hurry up as I really want to see you up close," replied Pinkie Pie.

" I don't know how to use bubbles like this," I said.

" Wait! Seriously? You're a Deku Scrub, and you don't know how to blow bubbles? Gasp! That means you either haven't come of age yet, or you haven't acquired the ability to use magic. The latter is always given to those of the Deku tribe by the Great Fairy who lives in the swamp to the south of Clock Town, for it serves as a right of passage for them which allows them to do other things. Or, at least I think that's how it goes as I did get my information from a Deku Scrub. Anyway, since you can't use bubbles to get me down, try finding something that will work just the same," suggested Pinkie Pie.

" Are you sure you can keep floating up there?" I asked.

" I can stay up here for hours without getting tired, but sometimes I do need to get down to stretch my legs a little," replied Pinkie Pie. Of all the times to be unable to use my magic, and all because Starlight Glimmer changed me into a Deku Scrub. Unfortunately, I can't make my way over to the swamp as that would take too long of a journey given how little precious time I had, and also because I wouldn't even know where to find the Great Fairy of that area to begin with.

That meant needing something which can pop her balloon, and at first I was thinking of borrowing the peashooter that child who stared at me had, yet I quickly changed my mind as I doubt he would be willing to help me. I then noticed a number of shrubs near the playground, and figured there should be a small stone which could pop the balloon. Spinning my way over there and cutting the shrubs down which did net me several rupees, I eventually discovered a stone after spending almost ten minutes looking.

" That should do the trick," said Twilight.

" I really need my magic," I said.

" What kind were you capable of using before?" asked Twilight.

" I used earth, wind, water, and fire magic although the first three were actually granted to me by the first Great Fairy I encountered back in Hyrule. Fire magic turned out to be natural for me given my cutie mark was a blazing sun hence my name," I replied.

" I look forward to seeing you use magic," said Twilight.

" You are?" I asked.

" Sure! When it comes to magic, I'm always willing to learn new spells, and seeing ponies use magic in creative ways whether I'm teaching them or not. Even though I only saw you use your magic briefly when you teleported during that chase where you stole my crown, I could sense you were extremely gifted," replied Twilight. I wish that she hadn't brought up the incident where I took it, and brought it to the human world which basically began the influx of magic coming from Equestria, but her praise of my magic did make me feel better.

Taking the stone that I found, I walked back over to Pinkie Pie who wasn't angry over how long it took me to find something, so now I needed to aim at her balloon in order to pop it. Luckily, I know how to throw things which was one of the first things I got adjusted to when I went from being a pony to being a human, so this will be easy enough so long as nothing goes wrong.

Pinkie constantly bobbed up and down due to her balloon being caught in an updraft, so I had to wait for the right moment to throw this stone. If I end up missing, I'll have to spend even more time trying to find another stone, and there's no telling where the first stone will end up which could cause me even more problems. Concentrating as hard as possible, I waited until the balloon reached the highest point in the sky before making my move.

It was over in an instant where the stone popped the balloon with a loud popping sound, and Pinkie suddenly realized she was no longer floating, so she screamed and dropped down until she landed where her knees buckled pretty badly. I know that feeling all too well because of dropping from great heights myself during my last adventure.

" That was a lot of fun," commented Pinkie Pie.

" Your knees don't feel the same way," I said.

" Like I said, I'm used to falling from such heights, so you don't need to worry about my knees or any other part of my body getting hurt in the process. Now that I'm finally on the ground again, let me take a good look at you, and that thing which looked like a fairy from up there," said Pinkie Pie. Twilight looked a little offended as being referred to in such a manner, and I was feeling creeped out given Pinkie was scanning me all over as though she were obsessed with me or something to that effect.

" What's this? Green clothes... white fairy... madam, could you, by chance, be a forest fairy? Oh my! My name is Tingle! I think I am the same as you, madam. A forest fairy! Alas, though I am already age 35, no fairy has come to me yet..."

" Wait a minute! You're 35?" I asked.

" Quite the sad revelation," replied Pinkie Pie.

" You definitely don't look like someone who is 35. In fact, you look more like you're 16 than anything else," I said.

" That's quite a nice thing to say, but sadly the age I mentioned is correct which does bum me out sometimes. My father tells me to grow up and act my age, but why? I tell you...Tingle is the very reincarnation of a fairy! Now while I stand here waiting for a fairy of my own, I sell maps to help out my father," said Pinkie Pie. I didn't know what to say about how she was acting, for this wasn't the Pinkie Pie that I'm familiar with, yet I could still see some of her zanyness gushing forth.

I then remembered in Hyrule that I got through to my friends because of the Equestrian magic inside each of us, but perhaps it was because they were Sages at the time. In her current appearance, Pinkie clearly wasn't a Sage of any kind, and she looked like she was more concerned with looking for fairies than wanting to remember how things were meant to be. All of a sudden, I slapped myself on the forehead as Pinkie mentioned about selling maps, and I could do with one of those.

" Did you say that you sell maps?" I asked.

" I've been dabbling, creating, drawing, navigating, and charting maps as a means to earn some extra rupees on the side, and despite how eccentric I may appear, my maps are guaranteed to be worth every rupee, for you'll be thankful. Lucky! Lucky! You're so lucky to have a fairy! I know! I know! We should be friends! Yes! Yes! In exchange, I will sell you a map for cheap as a sign of my friendship. Will you buy one of Tingle's maps?" asked Pinkie Pie.

" What do you have?" I asked. She then showed me two different maps which made absolutely no sense to me, but she explained that the first one was a map of Woodfall, and that it would cost more due to her not being in that current area. The other one was of Clock Town, and it would be so inexpensive, she would be practically giving it away. I inquired as to the prize of the second map, and she said five rupees of which I have more than enough to pay her.

" I'll take a map for Clock Town!" I announced.

" Yippee!" shouted Pinkie Pie as she took my money, and handed over a map in exchange. The amount of detail on the map was remarkable, so she definitely knows how to make a good map. With this in my hands, I should have no trouble finding my way around this town. " Well, call again! Tingle, Tingle! Kooloo-Limpah! These are the magic words that Tingle created herself. Don't steal them!"

" I actually need more of your help," I said.

" Do you need to buy another one of my maps?" asked Pinkie Pie.

" No, but I could do with some information," I replied.

" Information?" asked Pinkie Pie.

" You see, I'm kind of new in town, and I'm trying to figure out where everything is. You see, I need to find someone who stole two very important things from myself and from a friend of mine, and so far no one has been helping me out just because I'm a Deku Scrub," I replied.

" Deku Scrubs aren't really all that popular throughout Termina due to how treacherous they can be, but you aren't like other Dekus in that you haven't shown any signs of arrogance, or thinking yourself as being superior. Dekus have forged alliances with the other tribes, yet often backstab them in order to come out on top. I know it must sound pretty bad of me saying such horrible things about your people, but this has been normal for decades," said Pinkie Pie.

" It doesn't bother me," I said. While my heart was telling me to tell her the truth in that I was a human and not a Deku Scrub, she might not believe me, and could think I was trying to confuse her. Since she thinks I'm a forest fairy because of my clothes, she could believe me, but I don't want to take that chance otherwise I'd lose the one potential ally that I have who isn't a divine being.

" Now, the first thing anyone who comes to Clock Town must know is that every year we have a special occasion known as the Carnival of Time. People from all over come to celebrate by praying for a good harvest in the coming year, and they even bring along their own masks. Granted, there are some things I don't know with regards to the myths and legends associated with the carnival, but there are those who have dedicated themselves to teaching such information to the younger generation," said Pinkie Pie.

" Where is it held?" I asked.

" Wow! You really must be new to ask that kind of question, or you never went that far from your home in the swamp until recently which might suggest that much of Terminian custom currently escapes your mind. The celebration takes places at the Clock Tower where it will open up once we've reached the eve of the carnival, and that is going to happen in about three days from now. Again, you should ask someone who truly knows all of the nuances regarding this occasion.

Next, newcomers to Clock Town should pay a visit to the residence of the mayor, for she is the most powerful person in town. From what I've been hearing, she is currently stuck in a meeting that shows no signs of ever ending, so unless you really need to speak with her, you'll have to wait until she gets finished," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Your map shows that the mayor's office is in East Clock Town," I said.

" Most of the fun activities are located over there, so if you're up for some fun games then go there at the earliest opportunity as long as you have rupees," said Pinkie Pie. If this mayor is as important and powerful as Pinkie claims her to be, she could prove to be of immense help when it comes to me searching for Starlight Glimmer. The thought of barging in on a meeting didn't sound all that pleasant, but maybe I can do something that will bring it to a conclusion.

As for what she said about playing games... now isn't exactly a good time given how I have only three days before Sonata has to leave town herself, so maybe I can have fun after finishing my mission. Pinkie at this point was trying to get my attention, for she had more things to tell me about Clock Town. " Did you notice that child trying to pop a balloon? He is the leader of a group known as the Bombers Gang, and they are dedicated to protecting this town even though they are just kids.

Got any problems? They can help you out, and if you can get on Jim's good side, you may be able to join their crusade. He isn't in the best of moods these days as one of his members accidentally lost a notebook which details their mission, yet I heard that a strange person carrying a large sack found it." Sonata found this notebook, yet she didn't tell me about it? Why would she not let me know about something like that? Perhaps paying her another visit in the future is in order, but after I've gotten the items I need to get back from Starlight.

" Do you know about the Great Fairy?" I asked.

" She lives in that cave to your left," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Oh," I said.

" A lot of people pay her a visit in order to receive her blessings, but there was one person who went in there recently who seemed different from most. She had a strange dark aura which was coming from some kind of weird mask," said Pinkie Pie. So Starlight Glimmer has already gotten to the Great Fairy, and that means things have just taken a turn for the worse.

" Do you know what this masked person did?" I asked.

" No, but when she came back out of the fountain, she decided to pay a visit to the secret hideout of the Bombers," replied Pinkie Pie.

" They have a hideout?" I asked.

" Don't all children their age have something like that? Anyway, I have no idea where it is for they say it's on a need to know basis, and the only ones who are allowed to know are kids. While they do respect their elders, they wouldn't tell them anything that important. The masked person has been to almost every last location in Clock Town according to eye witnesses, and within the span of under an hour which must be some kind of record," replied Pinkie Pie.

" She knows how to get around," I said.

" People have been saying she has been causing trouble all over town, yet no one is really paying that much attention as they are all busy preparing for the carnival. Oh, I have one last piece of information for you. The west side of Clock Town is the place you want to go if you wish to buy some items, but you may have some trouble given how people view Deku Scrubs. Well, I must get back to the air now, so I hope to see you again real soon Ms. Fairy," said Pinkie Pie.

She then began inflating a brand new balloon which caught me by surprise as I didn't think she had another one, but she did and soon she was floating in the air as before leaving me to my own devices. The information I received from her has proven useful along with the map, yet it seems I've arrived too late seeing as Starlight Glimmer has been busy causing trouble.

" Things are much worse than we thought," said Twilight.

" Starlight has been on a rampage," I said.

" And no one is doing anything to stop her, so I guess it's up to the two of us. I feel guilty knowing that I played a part in helping her get that mask, and getting that instrument she stole from you earlier," said Twilight.

" You're not to blame for that as you weren't yourself," I said.

" Thanks Sunset Shimmer," smiled Twilight.

" What do you suppose has happened to the Great Fairy?" I asked.

" Hard to say because we still don't know what kind of power Starlight has, but we need to make our way over to the fountain right away," replied Twilight. We then both agreed that Pinkie Pie was of tremendous help even though her eccentric behaviour made it a challenge, so then we began making our way over to the Great Fairy Fountain, and along the way I spotted another flower which I could dive down into, yet I saw no reason other than wanting to reach a hole on the other side of a wooden fence.

Upon entering the fountain, things looked peaceful at first, but when I got closer, Twilight floated ahead of me where she was in complete shock. " Oh no! Sunset Shimmer! Something has happened to the Great Fairy." I immediately ran over, and discovered that there were a bunch of small looking fairies with large heads. At first I thought these were just regular fairies who lived here, but then they all started talking in unison.

" Young one! Please hear my plea! I have been broken and shattered to pieces by the masked Skull Kid. Please find the one Stray Fairy lost in town, and bring her to thisfountain. If you can succeed in this small task, then you shall receive my aid."

" Where can we find your missing fairy?" I asked.

" It is currently the middle of the day, so the lost one must be somewhere in the Laundry Pool. I am worried for without the lost one, I cannot be restored to my former self, and this town has need of my powers in order to protect them from a terrible darkness. Please, you must find the Stray Fairy and bring her back here." Since there was nothing left for me to do in the fountain, I turned around and left where I realized that it was already past noon which meant that time was already ticking away, and I hadn't exactly done all that much in my search for Starlight Glimmer.

" Do you know where the Laundry Pool is, or even what it is?" I asked.

" Even though it's called that, no one actually goes there to wash any clothes as far as I'm aware. The Laundry Pool is best described as a quiet area in town where you can go in order to think without having to deal with all the hustle and bustle. Maybe we should take a look at that map Pinkie Pie sold us, for it should show us a complete detail of every area," replied Twilight. I followed her advice, and took out the map before unfurling it in order to see the layout.

She then began observing the map to see if Pinkie had taken the liberty of labelling the names of any important places across town, and to our delight this was the case. " It says here the Laundry Pool is located by taking a small passageway in the southwest portion of South Clock Town, so we need to get over there right away."

" Quite the tucked away area isn't it?" I asked.

" It makes it more convenient for those who want peace and quiet," replied Twilight. It didn't take long for me to make my back to South Clock Town again, but then my progress was hindered due to running into someone the moment I entered the area. The collision made me fall down onto my rear, but when I got back onto my feet in order to see who I had bumped into, my mouth opened wide in shock over who it was.

" Please watch where you're going! If I fall behind schedule, then my routine gets completely interrupted!"

" Sorry about that," I said.

" I'll let it slide just this one time, but please do not speak to me while I am on duty delivering the mail! Even now, just speaking to you has made me fall behind schedule by almost 30 seconds, so I must resume my deliveries before I fall behind even further." Apparently, I had run into a postwoman based on her female voice, and she seemed totally dedicated to the cause given how she scolded me for making her late with her deliveries. She would soon continue onward at a more rapid pace due to falling behind, but I was still shocked over who I had bumped into.

" That was rude of her," commented Twilight.

" Yeah, but that's not what made me shocked," I said.

" What did?" asked Twilight.

" The fact that was Aria Blaze who I ran into," I replied.

" Wait, what!?!? You collided with one of the Dazzlings who were banished from Equestria? You need to explain this one to me very carefully, for I have no idea why she would even be here in the first place, and as a civil servant no less," said Twilight. I told her that I encountered Aria back in Hyrule where she was known as the Running Woman, someone who challenged all manner of creatures to foot races be they human or no.

She also had a strong fascination for rabbits, and desired to have a mask which would allow her to become one with her inner rabbit. I had sold her something called the Bunny Hood that allowed her to realize her dream, yet despite this she maintained her rebellious streak which involved being emo. Aria was also associated with the Gerudo Thieves in that she was an honourary member of their tribe much like how I achieved the same thing due to needing access to the Spirit Temple, but to see her here as a postal worker was certainly surprising.

I never would have imagined her in such a position, yet there she went while wearing a red postal hat, and carrying a satchel that contained letters, packages, and who knows what else constitutes for mail around here.

" I've got a feeling we'll be seeing Aria again," I said.

" Maybe, but for now we need to get to the Laundry Pool," said Twilight. After watching Aria disappear around a corner, I made my way over to the Laundry Pool which was accessible by running up a short flight of stairs, but as I was reaching the top, a child walked by me wearing another mask, yet no one took any notice of him which struck me as really odd.

The Laundry Pool itself was a small area which featured a single tree that overlooked a pond that did feature fish in it, but this didn't look like a spot where anyone could come along and fish. The only other thing of interest was a bell which was attached to a sign, but I was fixated on the Stray Fairy located in the middle of the pond.

" This looks easy, but then you never know," I said.

" You have to be careful here Sunset Shimmer as Deku Scrubs have problems when it comes to water," said Twilight.

" How so?" I asked.

" In your current form, you can't swim so if you were to jump into the water, you'll sink to the bottom and perish. However, you can hop across bodies of water to reach far away places, but this can only be done five times. After your fifth and final jump which involves jumping really high, you'll sink which will result in the same perishing scenario as before. So, you must plan carefully if you want to grab the Stray Fairy without sinking," replied Twilight.

" Guess those swimming lessons aren't going to pay off here," I said jokingly, but this was no joking matter as the thought of drowning made me worried. Walking over to the edge of the water, and adjusting my direction so that I could collect the Stray Fairy who continued to float there, I jumped across using almost all of my jumps in the process. I do need some practice doing this as it was just a little too close for comfort, but as soon as I reached the other side of the water, the Stray Fairy began speaking.

" Please, hear my plea! The masked Skull Kid has broken me apart and scattered my pieces! Please find a way to return me to the Fairy Fountain in North Clock Town. I must be reunited as soon as possible with my fellow fairies who share the same colour as I do."

" How did you end up all the way over here?" I asked.

" The Skull Kid shattered me to pieces because she knew that I was aware of the powers that she now possesses, and placed me here to prevent me from making my way back to my fountain. There is much that I must explain regarding her powers, but right now I cannot do so in my current condition."

" If you can help me deal with her, then I'll gladly bring you back to your fountain where you're friends are," I said.

" Yes, I shall give you as much aid as possible."

" Okay, then please hide in one of my pouches so that you don't end up getting lost," I said. The Stray Fairy did as I asked, and entered a pouch where she commented that it was really warm before giving me the signal that she was ready to be transported. It didn't take long for me to find my way back to the fountain as I made sure to follow the map given to me by Pinkie, for I still wasn't familiar with the general area. Upon reaching the fountain, I looked up at the sky because of wondering how much time I spent, and I noticed the moon had gotten slightly bigger than when I looked previously.

I had no idea if this was my eyes playing tricks on me, or the moon was somehow increasing in size, but my decision was to ignore it and enter the fountain where the Stray Fairy united with the rest of her friends. They would merge together to become Adagio Dazzle which didn't surprise me in any way for I knew this would happen, and of course Twilight's jaw dropped when she noticed Adagio appear before us.

" Tatl, and you, young one of the altered shape. Thank you for returning my broken and shattered body to normal. I am the Great Fairy of Magic. I thought that masked child was helping me, and I grew careless which resulted in my body being broken," said Adagio.

" So you know that I'm not a Deku Scrub?" I asked.

" There is a powerful dark magic which surrounds you, and it has trapped you inside of your current form. My power is unable to free you from this curse, but there is someone who has the ability to return you back to normal. However, she will not remain in this place for very long, so you must move quickly before she chooses to leave thus keeping you trapped as you are forever. But, you may not be able to change back to normal should the impending disaster makes itself known," replied Adagio.

" That's why I came here," I said.

" Yes, for you must stop the Skull Kid before she brings about the destruction of this world. Also, I know the other reason as to why you are here. Both you and Tatl are aware of things that others across this land do not yet understand, yet I too know which is why I am bringing this up with you. Despite the odds not being in your favour when it comes to finding a way to bring your inner most desire to pass, do not give up hope for you shall one day succeed," said Adagio.

Even though she didn't say it specifically, she knew that this world mustn't exist as it currently does, and that the human world must be returned to normal. Still, it feels somewhat strange that someone like Adagio ended up being someone of such pure goodness. You'd think I would gotten used to this after encountering her in this form six times in Hyrule, but I guess my mind just can't grasp the concept.

" I'm glad I could help you," I said.

" And as mentioned before, you shall receive my aid. All I can offer you now is this: I shall grant you Magic Power as a sign of my gratitude. Please accept it! I shall not be refused if you feel that a reward is not necessary, yet know that without magic by your side, the chances of success are slim to none. I sense that you possess a natural ability to use magic which is most impressive for one so young, but your current form prevents such magic from being used," said Adagio.

She then raised her hands to her mouth where she proceeded to blow at me which surrounded me in a warm light that made me feel happy, and then I suddenly blew a bubble from my mouth that popped a short distance away. This must be the magical ability that Deku Scrubs are capable of using, so I need to quickly get used to using this new power.

" With this power in your possession, many restrictions no longer get in your way, so now you can partake in the challenge that the children who act as justice warriors are offering to those who are like them. The challenge will not be an easy one to accomplish given that time is short for you, but you must impress their leader in order to find the Skull Kid."

" Do you know where I can find her?" I asked.

" The man who lives in the observatory outside of town may know of the Skull Kid's whereabouts, yet the only way to reach him is to complete the challenge the justice warriors have for they use his home as a base from time to time. But be careful! You must not underestimate that child's powers, kind young one. The mask that she wears contains dark powers that she has yet to tap into, but what she already is capable of doing has already affected much of Termina," replied Adagio.

" You mean Clock Town isn't the only place Starlight Glimmer has affected?" I asked.

" She has caused problems all across Termina, for the different regions have experienced problems which were never a reality before until the Skull Kid decided to cause them misery in the name of having fun. Once you have regained your true form, you will need to venture forth into these regions in the hopes of restoring them. The problems which afflict this world are nothing compared to the greatest danger which lies close to us all," replied Adagio.

She then looked upwards which didn't make much sense to me at first, but then I quickly figured that this was her way of telling that the moon above town was the danger. " The moon that exists above us is one that is both revered and feared by the people of Termina, yet it has never posed a problem to this world until now. Most have chosen not to take notice of it, yet others have come to the realization that I am now about to reveal to you. The moon is slowly falling from its place in the sky, and it shall bring about destruction."

" What!?!?" I exclaimed.

" The dark powers of the Skull Kid are causing the moon to be pulled down. Why she has chosen to do this remains unknown even to me, but know that within exactly two and a half days from now, it shall collide with this world. Nothing will survive such an impact no matter how hard the people try and flee when the time comes, yet the Skull Kid is determined to see this through," said Adagio.

" What does she have to gain from doing such a crazy act?" I asked.

" I do not know, but there is only one course of action that must be taken. You, young one, must find her and prevent the disaster that looms above from happening, but first you must speak to the man who lives in the observatory. He will be able to explain more about the mysteries of the moon better than I can, yet you must complete the challenge of the children.

As I mentioned, time is against you, and knowing what you do now means time has become incredibly precious," replied Adagio. Just when I thought things couldn't get any worse than they already were, I now find myself in a race against time with the fate of an entire world hanging in the balance. This is what Ganondorf was telling after I was defeated by him before everything was turned back to normal after my last adventure.

Termina really was on the brink of destruction, and the one behind it was someone who had no true understanding of what she was doing. With every passing moment from this point onward, I have to worry about what looms above us, and hopefully find a way to prevent destruction from happening. Adagio said that the man who lives in the observatory could help me further with regards to finding Starlight Glimmer, so I'm guessing that she has paid him a recent visit as well on her path of causing misery.

If she has done something horrible to him, my chances of finding her will have gone up in smoke... no... I've got to believe that this is something that I can resolve. Twilight is with me which will make this more tolerable, but we don't have our other friends by our side which could prove to be a deciding factor.

" Is there anything else you can do for me?" I asked.

" From this point onward, the fate of this world rests on your shoulders, and yet I feel as though this is a burden which you have faced once before. Young one, if you are successful in preventing this disaster, and are able to change back to your true self, be sure to visit me again for I shall be able to provide further aid. There is the other crisis which plagues your heart, so success does not mean the end, but rather it is the beginning of a more difficult task," replied Adagio.

" It's not like I have a choice here," I moaned.

" Should you feel overwhelmed by the wounds of battle, you can come back here where I shall ease your weariness. If your magic power is running out then I can restore this as well, yet I am certain that such needs will not be necessary," said Adagio. She then laughed and returned to the fountain leaving me with having to find a man who has an observatory outside of town.

" You know, I could just leave Clock Town to find this man without needing the Bombers," I suggested.

" That's not exactly going to work," said Twilight.

" Why?" I asked.

" There are four guards posted at each entrance to Clock Town with one guard per gate. This was done by the captain of the guards as a means of preventing the evil creatures which roam outside from getting into town, but they have a strict order not to allow any children to leave. In your current form, they would stop you at the gates thus preventing you from leaving," replied Twilight.

" Well that's just great!" I moaned.

" Looks like we need to take on the Bomber's challenge," said Twilight.

" I was thinking about paying a visit to West Clock Town, and perhaps buy some items what we need to deal with," I said.

" That would be a good idea, except the stores around here aren't particularly kind to Deku Scrubs," said Twilight. That was a real let down because I actually wanted to buy a potion or two, but then I don't have any bottles, so my idea wouldn't work anyway. Upon leaving the fountain, the sky was already starting to change colour which meant the sun was beginning to go down for the night.

Night of the First Day: 60 Hours Remain

While it may seem that things are progressing rather nicely, there was no way of knowing what kind of challenge I would have to face in order to access the observatory. Ahead of me was the kid who looked at me with that scorned expression, and he was still using that peashooter in order to pop the balloon, so I needed to grab his attention which meant having to pop it for him.

" Guess this is as good a time as any to try shooting bubbles," I said.

" You need to concentrate and make it as large as possible, but not too big otherwise it will pop in your face, and you'll have wasted magic. Maybe you should get as close as possible without him noticing, for I don't think you can hit that balloon from here," said Twilight.

" Was it that obvious?" I asked.

" His expression has made you uncomfortable, but you need to deal with him otherwise we're stuck," replied Twilight. Knowing that she was right about this, I moved as close as possible without the kid taking notice of me doing so, and I was fortunate in that he remained fixated on trying to pop his balloon.

Once I felt that I was close enough, I looked up and began to concentrate on creating a bubble using my magic. It turned out to be much harder than I thought as my belief was that I'd be a natural given how magic is second-nature for me, but this was actually pretty difficult. I hope that I can do this otherwise I won't be getting any further, and Termina would be doomed.

To Be Continued.

Chapter 3: To Find the Children, and to Learn of the Impending Danger

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 25, 2015
Chapter 3: To Find the Children, and to Learn of the Impending Danger.

After several attempts where I blew a bubble in my mouth where it ended up popping thus splatting me in the face, I finally managed to get it working. However, the problem was that I had wasted a few minutes, and considering what was happening, time was something I couldn't afford to waste. The balloon that was being used as target practice by the kid who scorned me earlier just floated in the air, so it wasn't like I needed to hit a moving target, yet that was probably something I'll have to do later.

I aimed my mouth upwards, and shot out a bubble, but it went spiraling off until it collided with a wall on the other side of the area staining it for a few seconds before fading away. Okay, I didn't think there would be any wind resistance when it came to doing this, yet there was no wind, so why did that just happen? I tried firing another bubble which resulted in the same thing, so then I tried it for the third time, and failed which had me wondering what I could be doing wrong.

" This isn't working," I moaned.

" I'll say, and you're wasting precious magic," added Twilight.

" I can create the bubbles using my mouth despite it sounding utterly disgusting, but I just can't seem to aim them where they need to go. In this case, I need to pop that balloon in order to get that kid's attention," I said.

" I'm not all that familiar when it comes to how Deku Scrubs use their magic, yet maybe you should aim slightly higher so as to overcome any sort of resistance. If you do end up running out of magic, you can either find magic jars by cutting down shrubs, or go back to see the Great Fairy," said Twilight.

I was actually considering seeing Adagio just so that she could explain how I'm supposed to use this new form of magic, but she might not know anything given how Deku Scrubs are seldom seen around Clock Town from what I can gather. You'd think I'd be able to do this without any problems seeing as magic is my natural talent, but it turns out Equestrian magic is completely different compared to the magic of Termina. All of a sudden in the midst of my moaning, the sound of a wolf howling could be heard which made me think that wolves were about to bear down upon us, yet why would there be wolves here?

" Did you hear that?" I asked.

" Wolves howl as an indication that night has fallen, and just look at the sky above you Sunset Shimmer. The sun has gone down for the evening, so that gives us about 60 hours before the moon crashes down onto Clock Town. Also, is it my imagination, or has that moon gotten closer since we last looked at it? In any case, you need to pop that balloon as soon as possible," replied Twilight.

I looked upwards to see for myself, and sure enough it was bigger. 60 hours may seem like a very long time to most people, but that isn't the case, for who knows how long it will take me to find Starlight Glimmer. She might no longer even be in town which would really be devastating seeing how I can't leave due to being a child despite being much older than that. That's when Twilight noticed something or someone hiding in the playground area, and brought it to my attention because of how odd it was. " Sunset Shimmer?"

" What is it?" I asked.

" Who do you suppose that is sneaking around over there?" asked Twilight.

" Huh?" I said with a confused expression on my face. I moved away from the kid towards the playground, and someone was standing there with her hands in her pockets as though she were trying to act casual. " That person looks kind of like Rainbow Dash in terms of her hairstyle, but she looks like she's up to something."

" That's Lightning Dust," said Twilight.

" Quite the odd name when you consider how she looks suspicious," I said. Twilight then explained to me that Lightning Dust wanted to join the Wonderbolts Reserve back in Equestria, and ended up being accepted because of wanting to take things up to a higher level than the standard. She proved herself wreck-less as she wanted to prove how fast she was in addition to wanting to be the best, and was highly competitive. This in turn made her oblivious to her actions which placed so many ponies lives in danger including my own, and was subsequently kicked off the squad.

Just looking at her calm composure compared with what Twilight said made me think otherwise, but then I remember that everyone from the human world has been re-imagined in Termina. I decided to walk up to Lightning Dust as I was curious to see what she was up to, for why hide behind a playground unless you have nothing to hide.

" Can I help you kid?" asked Lightning Dust.

" I'm just curious as to why you're hiding behind here," I replied.

" That can cause problems as some people may not like being snooped on," said Lightning Dust.

" I wasn't trying to imply anything," I said.

" Good otherwise I would be feeling really uncomfortable right now. Besides, you don't need to check up on someone like me as I'm not really doing anything. I have every right to be behind this apparatus because of wanting to be alone with my thoughts, so unless you've got some kind of question, could you please leave me alone? You looking at me with those weird eyes gives me the creeps," said Lightning Dust.

" I do have one question," I said.

" What is it?" asked Lightning Dust.

" Have you seen a strange child around town wearing an evil looking mask?" I asked.

" I was about to say that I've seen a kid wearing a mask hanging around the Laundry Pool, but as soon as you said evil, I immediately began thinking of that other kid who has been wandering around wearing a really frightening mask on their face. If you're looking for that kid, I suggest doing something else entirely as she had such a powerful aura surrounding her. In fact, I hid behind here in order to avoid her as someone like that is probably up to no good," replied Lightning Dust.

" Yeah, she is definitely trouble," I said.

" What's that supposed to mean?" asked Lightning Dust.

" I need to find her before it's too late," I replied.

" It sounded like you were referring to me when you said that, for you were looking at me with those eyes of yours. Like I said, I'm not doing anything wrong other than just hanging out around here," said Lightning Dust. Her words made me feel suspicious because no one would just hang around especially with a moon that was looming above, but I had no other choice but to go back to the kid who was still trying to pop his balloon.

As I began making my way back over to him, Lightning Dust has one piece of parting advice. " You should lift your head a little higher Deku Scrub if you want those bubbles to be of any use to you!" Now why would she know something about the form I'm currently in? Maybe Dekus aren't as common as I originally thought, or had she been spying on me? Either way, I decided to do what she suggested which made me feel somewhat uneasy. I looked back in her direction one last time just to be sure, and Lightning Dust continued standing there with her hands in her pockets just like before.

" I don't trust her," I said.

" While she may not be cocky and competitive in nature like she was in Equestria, I agree that she can't be trusted, yet I can't put my finger on it," said Twilight. She then looked down at her fingers, and realized that she had them now as opposed to having hooves back in our true home, and she made sure to mention this tidbit to me which did make me laugh causing Lightning Dust to look at us both one last time before ignoring us entirely. " As for her piece of advice regarding you raising your head slightly... what are you going to do about it?"

" The only thing I can do Twilight, and that is do what she suggested," I replied.

" Did you have these kinds of problems during your last adventure?" asked Twilight.

" When the Hyrulean Royal Family were in power, most obeyed the laws of the land, and for that they could be trusted. The exception were the Gerudo who had their own laws courtesy of Ganondorf, so people feared them. Of course, when he took over, things in Hyrule changed completely where trust was difficult to find in a world filled with evil. It seems Termina isn't governed by a monarchy, so the different regions including Clock Town are self governed which explains why things are like they are barring what is happening," I replied.

" I never would have guessed that kingdoms exists without a monarchy," said Twilight.

" Equestria just has that rustic charm I suppose," I said.

" Hopefully, our fellow ponies don't decide that they want to do away with the monarchy," said Twilight.

" That would be the absolute last thing to happen Twilight, for you and the other princesses have proven to be immensely favoured by everypony else, and I doubt they would want it any other way. As long as you continue serving the people as best as possible, things will continue going forward as they already do," I said.

To think that it could have been me in Twilight's shoes rather than her had I chosen to continue with my studies rather than strike out on my own, but thinking about it from the perspective I've got, I'm not worthy to become an alicorn even though saving the world after the other Twilight almost destroyed it does bring me one step closer. Maybe someday that chance will come, but not today as I'm content with what I have.

Anyway, upon reaching the kid again, Twilight finally got a good look at him which she somehow didn't get to do so before, and told me that this child was Pip Squeak. At first it sounded like she just went and insulted the poor kid, but in fact that was his actual name due to how small he was for a filly.

Good thing Twilight is with me on this journey as those who we've bumped into so far I would have never recognized, and that could
have tripped me up when it comes to determining who is friend or foe. I know Spike did the best he could for me back in Hyrule, yet having such knowledge would have made certain situations turn out a whole lot differently than they did.

Upon distancing myself far away enough from the balloon, I aimed my head even higher than before, and fired a bubble which popped it where sparkles scattered everywhere in the process. This prompted Pip Squeak to look around at first to see what had just happened, for he was completely dumbfounded, but then he took notice of me, and came over as he quickly figured it all out.

" Are you the one who just popped that up there? Not bad for a Deku Scrub! We Bombers have a hideout that leads to the observatory outside town. Around this time of year, things get pretty hectic which is something we kids have gotten used to. Even though you're just a Deku Scrub, you've probably felt the exact same way. The adults are all busy getting ready for the carnival! The old astronomer at the observatory is the only one who'll spend any time playing with us kids, for he can be best described as a big kid at heart despite how old he is. You need a code to get in. Maybe I'll tell you what it is!" said Pip Squeak.

" That would be appreciated as I really need his help to find someone," I said.

" But don't think you're getting it that easily! I can't just tell you what the code is, for it's something meant only for the Bomber's Gang, and I am their leader, Jim, which should have been obvious given how I wear red while the others wear blue. If you want to gain access to our hideout, you'll have to pass my test first," said Pip Squeak.

" What kind of test?" I asked.

" Before I can say anything, you have to accept," replied Pip Squeak.

" That's not fair!" I shouted.

" Sorry, but that's how things have got to work Deku Scrub. I can tell by the tone in your voice that you're desperate to meet the astronomer, and the only way you'll be able to see him is to know our code. That involves taking part in my test whether you want to do it or not," said Pip Squeak. I felt as though I was being bullied into doing something which could potentially consume what precious time I had, but he did have a good point in that I need that code in order to find out where Starlight Glimmer is.

Slowly nodding my head in approval of accepting his test, Pip Squeak took out a small whistle which was concealed inside of his shirt, and blew it as hard as he could. All of a sudden, four additional children showed up out of nowhere, and each one looked exactly like him as though they were clones. " All right! Line up, guys! These are the other members of the Bombers who go around helping those who are in need. If you can find all five of us by tomorrow morning, I'll teach you the code!"

" I've got to find you all?" I asked.

" Think of this as a game of hide-and-seek, but with a much longer time limit. If you want to know our code, then you'll find all of us before morning. None of us are going to be leaving town in case you're worried, for we know that a Deku Scrub your age can't leave without having her parents around. Now turn around, and count to about 20 while we all pick good places to hide.

Oh, and before I forget, even if you do manage to find us, we still won't be making it easy for you as you'll have to actively catch us otherwise you'll never complete my test," replied Pip Squeak. He then turned me around by force which was rather rude, and then he blew his whistle again where the sounds of five pairs of feet began running off in the opposite direction. Somehow, I had a feeling this is what his test was going to be like, for only a kid would want to play a game like this.

" I can't believe we're being forced to do this," moaned Twilight.

" How do you think I feel?" I asked.

" True as you've got all the footwork," replied Twilight.

" If we want to gain access to that observatory, we've got no choice but to play this game," I said.

" The sun will rise in about 12 hours, and that isn't as much time as you may think given how we've wasted half a day already. Luckily for us Sunset Shimmer, those kids have heavy feet as evidenced by the sound of their footsteps walking across the dirt. I'll be able to track them down for you without any problem, but you should use your spinning ability in order to keep up with them should they try to run away upon finding their hiding places," said Twilight.

Sighing, I began counting up to 20 even though this did make me stand out like a sore thumb, and upon reaching the maximum number, I turned around and began searching for any signs of those kids. Twilight immediately sensed the footsteps of one of them, and it was coming from the playground area which was really close to home. Of course, it did mean having to interact with Lightning Dust who probably thinks me as being odd, but I've no time to deal with her when the fate of the world is hanging in the balance.

" Where exactly in this playground can we find him?" I asked quietly.

" The sound of his footprints are coming from the other side near the shrubs, so if you can sneak up on him without making a noise, you might be able to catch him before he has a chance to run away. Either way, I don't think he will leave this part of town as that would be unfair to us," replied Twilight. Despite being trapped in the body of a plant, I actually was pretty light on my feet as each one of my steps were so soft, I can easily sneak up on anyone.

The kid in question was hiding and trying really hard not to be noticed by me, but a gurgling sound from his stomach gave him away. It also meant he hadn't eaten for some time, or maybe he had eaten too much. Slipping around the other side of the playground making sure to ignore Lightning Dust, who was actually ignoring me, I slowly made my way over to the kid, and grabbed him before he even had a chance to figure out what had just happened.

" Aw! You caught me... and by sneaking up on me no less! No wonder you snuck up without me hearing you as you're a Deku Scrub, and your kind are awfully quiet when it comes to walking around. Now there are only four left!"

" That wasn't so bad," I said.

" We'll seen soon enough." Leaving the kid to accept the fact that I had caught him, Twilight suggested that I pay a visit to East Clock Town next as one of them is bound to be hiding there. Walking along until I entered a large opening, I entered East Clock Town where I immediately saw several buildings with unusual signs.

" None of this makes any sense," I said.

" Remember what Pinkie Pie told us? This is the area of town where you can play all sorts of fun activities, so if you have the urge for entertainment, this is the place for you provided you have enough rupees, and aren't a Deku Scrub," said Twilight.

" Why am I not surprised," I moaned.

" Deku Scrubs aren't welcomed in these establishments which is why they have a secret area where they have their own fun activities, but at least the Stock Pot Inn to your right will accept you as you currently are," said Twilight.

" So it's like a hotel?" I asked.

" Kind of. The Stock Pot Inn isn't what I would call a five-star luxury hotel given how it does have bugs crawling around in many of the rooms, and other rooms need some serious repair as they aren't exactly up to standard. Normally, not many people stay there because of the problems it has, but around this time customers come in droves. As such the inn gets filled up quickly to the point where one would need to make a reservation in order to be guaranteed a place to stay. It's night-time right now Sunset Shimmer, so the inn is closed, but there is a door no one ever locks which makes it easy to sneak inside," replied Twilight.

" So that means there's no reason for us to look inside of the inn for those kids as I doubt whoever owns it would appreciate them running about. That means we'll need to take our search elsewhere," I said. There was a sign up ahead next to a door which was the first time I've seen one in Termina, and it said that this was the residence of the mayor.

If I recall what Pinkie told us, the mayor has been stuck in a meeting that shows no signs of ending, yet it's quiet which must mean they've all gone to sleep, and are likely to continue on in the morning. I was actually feeling tired myself and desired to sleep, but I knew that doing so would prevent me from beating this test, so I'm going to have to pull an all-nighter for three days straight which is probably going to kill me. " Since we can't see what is happening with the mayor, we could always come back here in the morning."

" Do you think the mayor may be able to help us?" asked Twilight.

" As the one who is in charge, she must know everything that goes on in town," I replied.

" Guess we might as well continue searching for the Bombers," said Twilight. Already, this game was beginning to get on my nerves as I had more important things to do, but I've learned that I need to endure such punishment in order to reap any rewards later. Turning to the right and walking down towards the central part of this area, I suddenly stopped because there was a crate which was shaking as though something were hiding underneath it.

" Could they be any more obvious?" I asked.

" When you're a kid, hiding underneath a crate is a perfect place," replied Twilight.

" This is either really easy, or they are planning something which will prevent us from getting that code," I said.

" We don't have much of a choice other than face it head-on," said Twilight. Using my sneaking skills again which consisted of walking slowly towards the crate, I tried to lift it up, but it was no use as it was just too heavy for me. This made no sense to me at all as I should be able to lift such a weightless object with ease, for I did work out in preparation for the Friendship Games. Twilight decided to take a closer look at my body in order to see what was wrong, and it only took her a few moments to reach a conclusion that wasn't to my liking. " In your current form, you lack any muscle to lift up anything like this."

" Seriously?" I asked.

" The only way you can do is spin into, and break it, but the kid underneath is bound to run," replied Twilight. The more of these negative drawbacks I keep on hearing about Deku Scrubs, the more annoyed I get because this was getting ridiculous. Moaning to myself as I took a few steps backward, I span into the crate destroying it in the process, and the Bomber freaked out over finding him before he started to run away in a crazy fashion.

" That was awkward," I commented.

" Any parent would be ashamed to see their kids run around like that," said Twilight.

" It makes him run faster which I guess is beneficial for the little guy, but then I need to catch up with him," I said. I began spinning repeatedly in the hopes of catching him before he gives me the slip, but he was a little slower than I thought as I caught him, and that was because being under that crate gave him some cramps. Good thing this didn't take me too long as I was about to throw up due to all that spinning.

" How did you catch me so easily?"

" Hiding inside of a crate caused you to experience some cramps," I replied.

" Guess that wasn't my greatest plan, but there are still three of us left!" Leaving the second kid to curse at himself for making such an obvious blunder, I decided to take a quick look at the other buildings before moving on. One building was in the shape of a treasure chest which looked really out of place, but Twilight said that this was intentional for it was a place where people have to try and grab a chest hidden a maze which keeps changing every time you play.

Anyone, no matter which tribe they are from can take part, so there is at least one place I can go to without being ridiculed because of my appearance. Twilight then mentioned that the other two buildings were ones where you could challenge games of dexterity involving various items, but I currently lack the means to do so in terms of both appearance and not having said items. I told her that we should remember these places for future reference as I had a feeling something good can be had if I completed these games.

Walking down another path that turned to the right lead me right back to where I started, but things were much quieter than before, and that was due to the sounds of construction no longer being heard. In fact, I was looking at some kind of stand which must be what the workers have been making, but it doesn't really look like much of anything other than a confusing mess.

" What is it even supposed to be?" I asked.

" I think they were going for some kind of platform," replied Twilight.

" All of that noise happened for this thing? Maybe they plan on working on it in the morning, but I do have to wonder why they don't just try to go for something with a little more pizzazz?" I asked.

" It's not like the human world Sunset Shimmer! They don't have all of those modern conveniences that you've become used to, so all they can do is go with a really simple project which to you would probably date back several decades or so," replied Twilight. Despite having lived as a human for several years, I'm still the same age as Twilight, so her comment there wasn't really that appropriate, and I made sure to tell her that which she apologized. That's when she noticed the third Bomber just walking around the area as though he was mesmerized by all of the construction. " Is it just me, or are they getting really easy to find?"

" Do you suppose they want us to know the code?" I asked.

" I doubt Pip Squeak does as that would mean someone outside of their group knowing a secret of theirs, but the other four do look like they're warming up to you. Then again, it could be just a trick where they pretend to be nice, but end up backstabbing you making you feel miserable in the process," replied Twilight.

" It's not the first time," I sighed.

" You've changed a lot since then," smiled Twilight.

" I know, but I still feel guilty because of my past actions," I said.

" That will take some more time before it can finally be forgotten, and you can spend your life living it the way you want it to without having to worry about the past dragging you down. Say, do you mind if I take care of this one?" asked Twilight.

" You want to try?" I asked.

" I may be a fairy in this world, but I still have my personality from Equestria," replied Twilight. This is true which brooked no argument from me, so I folded my arms which let her know that she could go ahead, and do whatever it is she's planning on doing. I was actually curious as to how she was going to speak to this kid who was still looking around the construction site, so Twilight flew over to him where he took notice and began talking to her. In order for me to listen, I quietly snuck forward a few steps before hiding behind a stall which happened to be close by.

" Tatl? What are you doing here?"

" I was just in the neighbourhood, and wanted to see what was happening," replied Twilight.

" We're playing a game with this Deku Scrub who has the most unusual coloured hair I've ever seen, and if she can find all five of us before tomorrow morning, Jim will teach her the code which will allow her to access our hideout."

" Why did Jim insist on it?" asked Twilight.

" He's been on edge as of late because of your friend."

" My friend?" asked Twilight.

" Yeah, you know, the Skull Kid? She has been causing all sorts of trouble which clearly goes against our rules, and Jim is about to completely lose it. One more prank, and she is likely to be kicked out! As for that Deku Scrub, Jim asked us what we thought about the idea of having a Scrub amongst our number, but the jury is out when I say that she'll never join. A shame really, for I really do like her hair." That was when I decided to come out from my hiding spot, and grabbed the Bomber before he even knew what was going on.

" What!?!? You were hiding this entire time? Pretty sneaky there Deku Scrub, so now you have two more of us left to find if you want to win." Twilight and I then left the kid who started looking at me which was creepy, and then he commented about my hair again which made me want to leave quickly.

" That... was just awkward," I said.

" Maybe, but we've learned some important information in the process," said Twilight.

" Starlight Glimmer is one of their members, yet she is clearly breaking their rules without showing any remorse for her actions. No wonder Pip Squeak wanted me to take on this test as he feels guilty over making such a big mistake as allowing her to join," I said.

" Also, I do believe that kid was the first person who has commented about your hair," laughed Twilight.

" As long as no one starts calling me "bacon hair", I'll be alright," I moaned. Yeah, I've been hearing some people calling me that as a nickname of sorts, but to me it feels more like an insult just because my hair has yellow and red streaks which just so happen to resemble bacon. Anyway, we decided to check out West Clock Town as it was the only area we've yet to explore, and upon entering it, I found myself feeling rather claustrophobic due to how narrow the street was. " This is where you can purchase items right? Also, you'd think they would have widened this street to accommodate shoppers?"

" Not many people come this way most of the time unless there's a special occasion happening in town, but I do see what you mean about how small everything looks compared to the other areas. Not only do we have shops here where you can purchase items... once you're no longer a Deku Scrub, but the Post Office can also be found here, yet it's rarely open. That's because Aria is often away delivering the mail while stick to her schedule until she's finished, and I still can't fathom how she of all people is a postal worker. Oh, and there is a Swordsman School around here," replied Twilight.

" Really? They have an educational facility dedicated to the sword?" I asked.

" Weird isn't it? Besides, they're closed for the night, and you can't use the school until you become human again," replied Twilight. Clock Town certainly is a diverse place what with all of these different attractions, yet there was one thing I noticed which I didn't bring up before until now. The Carnival of Time is supposed to bring people from all across Termina to town in order to celebrate the coming year, but there weren't that many people around.

Shouldn't things be more active especially during the day? This was something I suppose the mayor would know about as she is the ultimate authority when it comes to Clock Town's well being. Walking forward a little further, I tripped on something, and landed flat on my face before hearing the sounds of feet running in the opposite direction.

" What was that?" I asked as I picked myself up.

" You tripped over one of the Bombers, and he ran off towards the south," replied Twilight. That was completely uncalled for, so I ran after him as fast as my small legs would allow, and for some reason he was stuck as though something was preventing him from leaving the immediate area. Right! This world is still just a video game despite how real everything is, so this kid isn't allowed to go from area to area otherwise players would cry foul. Since this was just absolutely pitiful to see with my own eyes, I grabbed the kid because his routine was getting old now. Before talking with him, I made sure to bring him back to where he made me trip.

" You caught me!"

" There was no need to trip me!" I shouted.

" Sorry about that, but I honestly had no idea you were going to come this way."

" Don't make a habit out of it," I moaned.

" Again, sorry for doing that. Looks like you only have one more of us to find, and it just so happens to be our leader Jim who remains elusive. I hope you're ready to search around town all night Deku Scrub, as that's what you'll be doing until you either succeed or fail."

" Isn't that him over there?" I asked.

" Huh?" Sure enough, Pip Squeak was standing in front of a building which had a sign of a pair of swords on it which must be the Swordsman School that Twilight was telling me about. He was looking in both directions with rapid glances as though he were wondering where I could be, or maybe he doesn't like being outside in the dark. Either way, this was extremely convenient, and the kid in front of me slapped his head knowing what had just happened.

" What could Jim be thinking? Why leave yourself wide open to be found so easily by this scrub? I guess you could win our little game after all." Leaving the fourth Bomber behind, I walked up to Pip Squeak who immediately tried running away, but I was through playing around, and grabbed him before he could do anything about it.

" I don't believe it! You were able to catch me!" shouted Pip Squeak.

" You're the last one," I said.

" And it only took you about an hour or two to find all of us. That was some pretty fast searching there Deku Scrub, but I can't believe that I made such an obvious blunder by being in plain sight. I should have used that Cucco when I went through East Clock Earlier before doubling back this way, for that would have kept me well hidden until the sun came up. Well, since you completed my test, I'll keep my end of the promise, but first I need to call the others," said Pip Squeak.

He took out his whistle, and blew it again which caused his fellow Bombers to show up where it took ten more minutes for them to arrive. " Okay, you've earned the right to use our code to enter our secret hideout, but make sure you remember this, for I'll only give it out to you once."

" I'm ready," I said.

" The code is 52143," said Pip Squeak.

" That's a pretty simple code to remember," I said.

" I know which is why someday I really should change it as just about anyone could waltz into our hideout just by saying those five numbers in that order. Now, the next thing on the agenda would be your name, for I'd like to know," said Pip Squeak.

" It's Sunset Shimmer," I said.

" Quite an unusual name for a Deku Scrub, but I can see why it suits you, for your hair does remind me of a beautiful sunset. I'm going to guess that you think you're worthy of joining the Bombers because of how quickly you found us all, but I'm afraid that isn't possible. You see, the last person who joined our group who came from the forest has been causing nothing but trouble, so we're of the mind that all forest folk are just like her. Personally, I'd welcome someone like you in an instant, for you have a heroic aura surrounding you, but it will be up to my friends, so what say you?" asked Pip Squeak.

" No way! No scrubs!"

" Then I guess you can't join," said Pip Squeak.

" Where exactly is the location of your hideout?" I asked.

" Oh yeah! I never told you that, and that code is useless unless you know where to go. If you make your way over to East Clock Town, and walk to the right of the mayor's residence, you should see a narrow passageway which leads down into an underground tunnel. One of our members is blocking that path from anyone who thinks they can sneak in, but because of the code you've received from me, he will let you in if you tell it to him.

Be careful down there as you never know what could be lurking in the shadows, and with that we shall take our leave, and resume our usual patrol," replied Pip Squeak. He blew his whistle one more time which prompted all five kids to run off leaving me to make my way over to their hideout on the other side of town.

" They're gone," I said.

" Aren't you upset that they wouldn't let you join?" asked Twilight.

" We learned from the third Bomber that Starlight Glimmer's actions have practically sullied their reputation," I replied.

" That's true as for a group who are dedicated to preserving the peace, they want to maintain their credit even if it means cutting the fat so to speak. By the way, it's getting close to 9:00pm now, so perhaps we should think about getting some sleep? We can continue with our mission in the morning," suggested Twilight.

" If this were Hyrule, I'd agree completely without any hesitation, but because we've only got 57 hours left before disaster strikes, we can't afford to waste even a single minute on something like sleep. I don't know if fairies sleep as I never once considered it back in Hyrule, but I know that I can't sleep which means I'll barely be conscious once this is over with," I said.

" Fairies need sleep just as much as everyone else, but our magic does enable us to stay awake longer, and for that we don't need to sleep as much as others do, yet I can't see you running around for 72 hours straight without resting. You may have had experience of this nature before Sunset Shimmer, but not even you can ignore something as precious as sleep. Why don't we pay a visit right now to this astronomer that Adagio told us to see, and after that we can take a few hours to sleep," suggested Twilight.

Sleep is the last thing I want to do given what is hanging above is, yet Twilight was right about it being impossible for me to stay awake for an entire 72 hours. This is going to be one of those conflicting moments which could make or break me. Sighing, I began to make my way back to East Clock Town, and as I trudged along, I looked up at the moon which had gotten slightly closer than before.

The face was enough to frighten me as it was so hideous, yet I can understand why people feared it. Yet why was Starlight Glimmer so determined to bring forth the destruction of this world? If this was her means of pulling a prank, it stopped being funny a long time ago.

Twilight told me that Starlight believes that no one in Equestria should be superior to anyone else, and strives to bring equality even if it means relying on force and deception to achieve her goal, so would forcing a moon to come crashing down and destroying an entire world make everyone the same as each other? Now that I think about it for a moment, her mannerism back in the forest was different from what she was like in that cave.

Could it be that the mask she wears is making her become more sadistic? Or, maybe she has fallen under the mask's control, and is merely doing its bidding? Nah! The chances of that happening are less than zero! I guess Starlight is someone I can relate to because I've done things because of wanting to achieve power, yet I was able to come back before I was consumed entirely. She could actually be reformed unless she is so far gone that nothing can help her change.

" Deep thinking?" asked Twilight.

" Yeah," I answered.

" I've got a feeling you're thinking of Starlight," said Twilight.

" Do you think she can be reformed?" I asked.

" It's difficult to say if such a thing is possible with the likes of her. She was so determined to make everyone equal that she used a forbidden magic in order to remove cutie marks from ponies, and replacing them with equal signs. Starlight stole the cutie marks of hundreds of ponies all in an effort to bring forth equality, and was essentially taking away what makes each of us special. That ranks her up with the likes of Queen Chrysalis, King Sombra, and even Tirek for being a big threat to Equestria," replied Twilight.

I suppose she was right because Starlight was someone I don't even know about because I left Equestria long before she made any kind of appearance Upon reaching the passageway which lead to the observatory, the Bomber that Pip Squeak told me about was standing there looking rather bored.

" Um, you can only go beyond this point if you have the code."

" Does this path lead to the observatory?" I asked.

" Yes, but don't feel creeped out by what you see down there, for the passage isn't nice and clean." I then gave the password to this kid by saying the following numbers in the right order... 5, 2, 1, 4, 3. Upon saying the final number, he acted surprised at first before stepping aside which gave me access. " Wow... you know our code which means you must be a member.

There is a lot of cool stuff to be found at the observatory, but I wouldn't touch anything as the professor is very protective of his inventions." I don't know why he said it like that as I'm always careful when it comes to looking after people's belongings, yet Twilight reminded me of when I destroyed the front entrance to Canterlot High back when I was the she-demon.

" I was consumed back then," I said.

" That you were, but know that I am just having some slight fun," said Twilight.

" At my expense," I moaned.

" Sorry for bringing up such a bad memory," said Twilight.

" Well, I did manage to repair the damage I caused, and it felt really good doing something nice back at the time," I said. Upon entering the passage, I tried to hold my nose because of the slightly foul smell which was surrounding us, but in this form I don't have a nose which means this is going to be unbearable. " They weren't kidding when they said this place would creep me out! I'm about ready to collapse as the smell is unbearable."

" I feel fine myself," said Twilight.

" That's because you're a fairy, and you have certain immunities. Why do those kids have to use this route to get to the observatory instead of something simpler? Or, couldn't they just leave town, and go to the place like normal people?" I asked.

" The guards would never let them leave without any parental supervision, and this was even before the moon was falling down on everything. Besides, you told me that you experienced worse than this during your adventure in Hyrule, so I figure you've gotten adjusted by now," replied Twilight. I chose to withhold my enthusiasm because there are some things that happened last time I'd rather forget entirely.

There was water running throughout the area, and I've no intention of swimming about in it as who knows where it's coming from. This is a rare instance where I'm happy being a Deku Scrub, for I can't swim which means not plunging into what could be dirty water. " There are small platforms dotted about ahead of us, so I should be able to make it across by hopping using my jumping ability right?"

" Remember that after the fifth and final jump, you'll sink to the bottom of the water. I know the water isn't really deep, but in your current form, it is so be careful and take your time," replied Twilight. I took a closer look, and sure enough she was right about it being deep for someone of my size. " Oh, and before I forget, be careful not to touch the flames on that torch on the one platform in the center."

" How come?" I asked.

" Did you seriously just ask that question Sunset Shimmer? Because Deku Scrubs are plants, anything fire related is pretty much instant death," replied Twilight. The element which helped me so many times in the past as well as part of my namesake was the bane of my existence so long as I remain like this? It made me feel upset as fire is something that truly speaks to me, and I don't mean because it's my preferred magic of choice.

My parents named me Sunset Shimmer because they believed the fires of the red-hot sun would guide me down the right path towards my destiny, and while it has been a bumpy ride due to taking a dark direction, my path has become clear to me now. Speaking of which, I began hopping along from platform to platform as this foul-smelling water was beginning to make me feel queasy. Upon reaching the other side, I collapsed to the ground with every intent of throwing up, but I held it back just in time by breathing deeply several times.

" Those deep breathing exercises really work," I said.

" Glad you asked me to teach you during my last trip to the human world. Anyway, you need to be cautious as I'm sensing an evil force nearby," said Twilight. The faint sounds of scratching ringed in my ears, so I slowly stepped forward where I found myself being knocked back by something that dropped down from above. " I knew it! I'm not sure what this thing is, but I don't think it will be any threat to you given how it isn't moving."

" Looks like my past wants to make a comeback, and it's doing so in the form of a monster I've fought before. This creature is a Skulltula, and aside from dropping down from the ceiling for a surprise attack, it doesn't do anything else that can be considered threatening. When it turns around, it exposes its back which is the weak point, but I used my fire magic to roast them from any angle," I said.

" Why not try using your bubbles?" asked Twilight.

" I think it's my only option," I replied. As soon as I got close enough to the Skulltula, it span around producing some kind of barrier which I managed to dodge by jumping backwards. " That's new!"

" Guess you don't know it all that well," said Twilight.

" Since this is Termina and not Hyrule, monsters that I've met before may have slightly different behaviours," I said.

" Which means you need to prepare for anything," said Twilight. Aiming at the Skulltula, and using my mouth to produce a bubble until it was at the right size, I fired it at the Skulltula upon it turning around and exposing its back destroying it. Once it had burned away to nothing leaving behind a single green rupee which I picked up without a second thought, I proceeded forward making sure to walk slowly as who know what else would drop down.

Around the next corner, the passageway opened out, and at the back someone had propped up a ladder against the wall with a balloon on top. Since I already popped one balloon already, I fired another bubble which popped it giving me access.

" Not sure why they used a balloon as a security measure," I said.

" You've got to them credit for being creative," said Twilight.

" I suppose so, but more than a balloon would have sufficed," I said.

" Assuming anyone else comes down here," said Twilight. That was a really good point, for as far as we knew, only the members of the Bombers have come down this way with Starlight being one of those provided she was given access to this path. Climbing up the ladder and moving forward, everything went dark for a few seconds before I found myself inside of a vertical room which looked alien like because of the unusual choice of colours. Crates and all sorts of gadgets were strewn about everywhere as though whoever lived here didn't understand the virtues of being tidy, and if Rarity were here to see this, she would have thrown a hissy fit.

Upon walking up the stairs, Twilight and I came across a strange man who was busy looking at a telescope that was aimed upwards at the night sky. I had no idea who this person was, but Twilight told me that she had seen him many times in Ponyville although he usually kept to himself.

She said that his name was something to do with time at first according to some ponies, but when he decided to make a rare appearance at a wedding, he identified himself as a doctor. He wasn't the kind who studies medicine, but rather one who uses all kinds of skills to solve problems. I then made the joke of calling him Doctor Hooves to which she laughed in response because he was a pony, and a doctor, and because of a old television show Pinkie Pie asked me to watch with her one time.

Perhaps if I used his telescope, I'd be able to find where Starlight has been hiding all this time, so I approached him where he noticed my shadow which prompted him to turn his attention towards me.

" Well, well... a strange-looking child has joined me today. Are you a new friend of the Bombers gang? I always say that it is important to develop your interests while you are young! I am Shikashi, professor of astronomy!" said Dr. Hooves.

" I'm Sunset Shimmer," I said.

" A very interesting name that has a strong connection to the very sun itself, and I can see the fires of the sun burning in your eyes. Most people would view this as a sign of great evil, but I can tell you are different, for your eyes are filled with a desire to perform great deeds. I have been enamored with the moon since I was a child, and have dedicated my life towards understanding the true nature behind its existence. Now, I spend my days gazing at it from here using my telescope in order to see what new changes have occurred. The moon has long been considered a mystical body, which people have worshiped and feared," said Dr. Hooves.

" People worship it?" I asked.

" A tradition which dates back many centuries Sunset Shimmer, and continues even now because it shows how the moon has a cosmic influence that affects our daily lives whether we are aware of it or not," replied Dr. Hooves. He took a few moments to get a closer look at me as though he was suspecting me of something, but then he slowly walked over to something that was inside of a glass container.

" Hmmm. Your manners seem much better than those of your mischievous friend from the other day. That ill-mannered troublemaker from the other day said she'd break my instruments all because she saw it as having fun."

" I'm actually looking for her right now," I said.

" She said she'd steal my Moon's Tear which you can see inside of this case, for she wanted me to suffer due to wronging her in some fashion, but she chose not to steal it as she had much bigger plans in mind," said Dr. Hooves. According to what he just said, Starlight had been here sometime before my arrival in Termina threatening him by destroying his various inventions, yet it looks like it was around that moment where she decided to bring down the moon.

Could it be that the doctor was what shattered the remainder of her sanity, or maybe seeing that gem made her react. She needed to be stopped before this world becomes nothing but a smoldering crater. " After she left my observatory, I resumed my studies of the moon as before, but lately, there is something quite strange with it.

Strange, indeed... it seems as though the moon is being pulled down by something and is slowly drawing closer to us. At first my belief was that my eyes were deceiving me, yet as I continued to record my information, I can confirm that the moon is on a collision course."

" How long do you think we have?" I asked.

" According to my calculations, the moon will crash into Clock Town in exactly 52 hours from now. The impact will destroy everything, and no where on Termina will be safe from the impending doom. You may think that is a long time, but time is relevant Sunset Shimmer, for that amount of time can pass by without even realizing it.

Most people in Termina do not believe that the moon is falling, and choose to ignore such matters... the fools! If they choose to act too late, they are as good as dead as the rest of us will be when the moon crashes," replied Dr. Hooves.

" I just can't believe that the Skull Kid would do this," I said.

" Even now! Just watch her! She's probably causing trouble around the clock tower," said Dr. Hooves.

" You know where she is?" I asked.

" I have been watching her by sheer coincidence whenever I look into my telescope to observe the moon, and if you have been looking for her, then perhaps looking into my telescope yourself can help confirm that I am telling the truth," replied Dr. Hooves. He pointed towards his telescope which was pretty impressive, so I walked up to it in order to take a closer look at the Clock Tower, yet I had some trouble at first due to being too small to reach.

Dr. Hooves adjusted the height down allowing me to take a look, and what a sight it was seeing so many stars in the night sky. No wonder astronomy has become a rather popular subject as of late at CHS, for you get to see things that the naked eye can't. I made sure to allow Twilight to see as I knew she would get a blast out of this, and her reactions indicated that I was correct about that assumption. Once we had our fill of seeing the stars and constellations, I moved the telescope to look at the Clock Tower before zooming in due to seeing something.

Sure enough, Starlight was standing up there, and she knew that I was looking at her. Her demeanour was even more different than what it was before, but before I could get a chance to figure it out, she looked upwards towards the moon where something suddenly fell down from the left eye before a lot crashing noise could be heard.

The resulting impact felt like an earthquake, but I ignored this and turned my attention to Starlight who just stood there twitching, and stared at me which made me nervous. Now that I know where she was, I moved away from the telescope allowing the doctor to move back in front of it.

" Well, did you find that troublemaker? And that loud noise... what was that? Perhaps another Moon's Tear has fallen nearby? That is a phenomenon which happens on rare occasions, and people call it the Moon's Tear because it looks as though the moon is shedding a single tear. If you want to see what landed, go through that door and take a look outside.

But I wonder how that troublemaker got on top of the clock tower? The only way up there is through the clock door, and that opens only on the eve of the carnival which will be tomorrow night. What could she be doing atop the clock tower? I just hope she's not plotting another one of her no-good tricks," said Dr. Hooves.

" You mean I can have whatever fell outside?" I asked.

" Moon's Tears are very rare, and there are those who are willing to give one anything they desire should they have one. What you see in the case is for research purposes only, so I cannot give it away, but the one outside is yours for I don't need another. I have heard a Deku Scrub in town has been trying his best to find a Moon's Tear, but has so far failed in his mission to do so. Perhaps you could get something from him if you were to give him the one that landed outside of my laboratory? I am certain that it won't do you much good, so giving it to another would be the right course of action," replied Dr. Hooves.

" And the moon?" I asked.

" It already may be impossible to stop its descent even though we still have plenty of time to go before the impact. All we can do is accept what the cosmos has designed to be the destiny for us and this planet. Once you've picked up the Moon's Tear, you must go back the way you came in order to get back to Clock Town. If you can stop that troublemaker from carrying out her desires, this world may yet survive to see the next sunrise," replied Dr. Hooves.

He then began looking through the telescope again which indicated to me that he was continuing with his observations of the moon, and perhaps keeping an eye on Starlight, so I went outside using a nearby door, and found myself staring at an immensely large field that looked as though it would never end due to how big it was.

" Not another one," I moaned.

" What are you talking about?" asked Twilight.

" Back in Hyrule, I had to traverse across a large field in order to reach other areas, and I remember exactly what happened that first night," I replied. I then explained that when nightfall came out in the field, undead monsters called Stalchildren rose up from the ground where they proceeded to attack me. Back then, my experiences with fighting monsters was less than pitiful, so my option was running away instead of sticking around and fight.

Because of what happened, I developed a temporary fear of going out into the field after the sun goes down where I insisted on only travelling it during the day. Eventually, I managed to overcome this fear, and it enabled me to destroy them without any problems using my magic. Of course, the one remaining issue was that they kept on rising from the ground until the sun came up.

Upon finishing my little explanation, Twilight felt sorry for me, but I told her that it was okay as I needed to step up to the plate as it were. " If I hadn't acquired courage during that intense time, I wouldn't be here right now, and what happened during the Friendship Games would have been different."

" Is it true that you walked miles across Hyrule Field?" asked Twilight.

" I wasn't exaggerating when I said that, and despite getting a lot of exercise in the process, my feet probably got blisters because of how much walking/running I did to get from one place to another. In the future, this method was finally cast aside when I gained a horse after freeing her from a cruel man, but there were still moments where walking on foot was necessary as certain areas existed that horses could not traverse," I replied.

" Wait... did you say you rode on a horse?" asked Twilight.

" Yes," I answered.

" Um, you do realize that you're a pony right?" asked Twilight.

" Only when I'm in Equestria, for in the human world, I'm... well... a human. Besides, Epona and I are able to communicate with each other through whinnying, and while it may look weird seeing me speaking horse to a horse, we've developed quite the powerful bond which retained itself from one game to the next. Oh, and Epona is the name of my horse even though she isn't mine technically as someone else has ownership of her. Just think of me as being a permanent borrower until this is all said and done. You don't remember me riding a horse in the woods earlier?" I asked.

" Those are among the memories of Tatl," replied Twilight.

" And you're that character in this world," I said.

" This is getting weird," moaned Twilight.

" Now you know how I feel about it," I said. Getting back to the matter at hand, I began looking around this outside area until I stumbled upon the Moon's Tear, and it was quite the large gem considering it fell down from the moon when it literally shed a tear. Making sure that it wasn't hot or anything because of how fast it fell down from on high, I picked up and took a good look at what was supposedly going to help me reach Starlight Glimmer who waits on the Clock Tower. " So this gem is going to get us up there? To be honest with you Twilight, I just don't see how."

" Dr. Hooves said that a Deku Scrub in town has been trying to find one, so maybe we should find and give this to him," suggested Twilight.

" Do we even know where they like hanging out?" I asked.

" Well, there is that one location in North Clock Town where Deku Scrubs like to play, but I don't think he'd be there considering his priority would involve trying to get his hands on a Moon's Tear. You know, now that I think about it, I'm starting to remember some aspects of Tatl's memories which may prove useful.

Those flowers we've seen scattered about are known as Deku Flowers, for they enable a Deku Scrub the ability of flight for a brief period. Perhaps we should search near their locations, for we could end up discovering the one who needs that gem," replied Twilight.

" Do you know how many flowers are around town?" I asked.

" Not a clue," replied Twilight.

" Then we have one of two options to consider here. The first would be to speak to the mayor as she might know something, or maybe not as I doubt she would show any kind of concern towards flowers used by Deku Scrubs. Our other option is going back and seeing Pinkie Pie again, for you have to admit she has proven to be quite the informant despite what she wears, and how she acts," I said.

" Seeing Pinkie is probably the better course as the mayor is likely still busy with her meeting," said Twilight.

" Yeah, I guess," I said.

" We'll still need to see her though as she needs to be informed about Starlight Glimmer, but it will have to be in the morning as she's asleep right now. By the way, seeing as that is a gem you're holding in your hand, if Rarity were here right now, she would be completely fawning over it, and we both know how much she loves gems of all kinds," laughed Twilight. I couldn't help but laugh along with her because that's exactly what Rarity would do... I do miss my friends even though we've ran into one of them via Pinkie Pie, yet she isn't the same person I've come to know.

Twilight probably feels the same way as she has been taken away from her version of my friends minus the Twilight of the human world, so this would be another instance where have much in common. It's no wonder the two of us have become close friends in addition to the teacher/student mentality where I am the student, and she is the teacher, for we've overcome great differences in our lives. I do suspect though that our friendship will be tested as this adventure unfolds, so we need to remain strong for the duration otherwise things will completely fall apart.

" Upon pocketing the Moon's Tear, I began to take a closer look at this large field, and I could see what looked like floating winged skulls covered in blue fire... I remember those from before, and I didn't enjoy battling them that much, but maybe they only appear at night like the Stalchildren. In any case, I can't leave this area where the laboratory is as the fence is too high for me to reach, yet there was a Deku Flower on the other side which didn't do me any good.

Going back inside where Dr. Hooves was still looking at the moon through his telescope, he pulled himself away from it when he noticed me come back in, and proceeded to tell me something due to how irritable he looked.

" That troublemaker seems to be doing some kind of chant up on the Clock Tower," said Dr. Hooves.

" Like an incantation?" I asked.

" While I don't understand much when it comes to magic as I am a man of science, what I do know is that she is using a magic spell. I don't know what kind of spell it is she is trying to cast, but if it causes the moon to fall down faster, our world could be destroyed much sooner than expected. Sunset Shimmer, you must confron the troublemaker and stop her from carrying out her deeds, but you will need to wait until the Carnival of Time begins," replied Dr. Hooves.

Thanking him for everything he told me, he proceeded to resume his gazing into his telescope, I began making my way back to town by using the secret passage used by the Bombers. Along the way, I began to think about what it was he just said about having to wait until the carnival begins, so I asked Twilight about it.

" When does it open?" I asked.

" At midnight on the eve of the carnival," replied Twilight.

" Could you be more specific?" I asked.

" Well, if we take into consideration that we only have three days before Sonata leaves Termina, and the moon will crash into the world at the exact same, the carnival will open at midnight of the final day," replied Twilight.

" That gives us roughly two more days," I said.

" You might think we've got all the time in the world, but that couldn't be further from the truth. We haven't exactly come up with a plan on how we'll deal with Starlight once we confront her, for you've seen what kind of power she has. In order to defeat her and prevent Termina's destruction, you would need your ability to pony-up, but you can't do that right now," said Twilight.

I'm not sure if my ability to gain pony ears and a pony tail would make a difference, for even though I've gained full control of my ability to pony-up I doubt it would be this easy. Ganondorf said I would suffer once again through tremendous torment, and so far I haven't experienced that much hardship apart from being changed into a plant. I suppose the truth will be revealed to me once I catch up to Starlight.

Upon reaching East Clock Town again, something was different from before, and it took me a few moments to understand why. Pinkie was standing by the entrance to the north of town, and without her balloon no less, yet what could have forced her to come this way? The expression on her face was one of concern as though something had happened while I was busy talking to Dr. Hooves, and getting the Moon's Tear. Upon seeing me coming up, Pinkie began waving her hands around like she didn't want me to go any further, but my curiosity knew no bounds, so I was coerced into continuing moving forward.

" Ms. Fairy! Ms. Fairy!" exclaimed Pinkie Pie.

" What are you doing?" I asked.

" I'm waving my arms around trying to prevent you from going into North Clock Town," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Why in the world are you doing that?" I asked.

" Something horrible happened a couple of hours ago, and the entire north area has been locked down as it were until they can sort it out. An old lady was walking along with a bag on her back which contained goods for the Bomb Shop located in West Clock Town, but before she could reach the shop, a prancing woman came out of nowhere, and stole it. One of the local militia tried to stop this thieving woman from escaping, yet she was way too fast and crafty to be caught, and managed to escape," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Did you say a prancing woman?" I asked.

" She looked completely innocent what with her smiling smile, but her true colours came out when she casually walked up to the old lady, and stole her bag of goods. I know for a fact that Clock Town is a relatively safe town, yet this incident could cause people to want to stay away," replied Pinkie Pie. There was no doubt in my mind as to who the thief was, and I couldn't believe that I received and took advice from her regarding bubbles.

Lightning Dust... no wonder she didn't want to talk to me, for she had been focusing her efforts on stealing important goods. Now she had committed a terrible crime, and I should have done more to prevent her from succeeding. Pinkie Pie then noticed I was trying to walk forward, and insisted that I stayed out of the north until things had calmed down there. " Don't go there! The militia are interrogating everyone who was there when the crime took place! If you go there, they may try asking you some questions!"

" I need to see what happened," I said.

" But they will start asking you questions," said Pinkie Pie.

" This is something I need to do, for it's part of being a heroine and all," I said. With that, I walked into North Clock Town leaving Pinkie Pie to scratch her head in confusion, and upon entering, there were signs that a struggle had taken place. The dirt on the ground had been disturbed where patches of it were lying on the grass, and several broken jars were scattered everywhere. I then slapped my forehead once again due to forgetting to ask Pinkie about the Deku Scrub who needed my Moon's Tear, yet it was too late for me to go back as the local militia just so happened to be nearby. He was comforting an elderly woman who looked dazed, and must be the one who got robbed.

" Are you okay madam?"

" I can't believe that a frail old lady like me was robbed by some prancing fool! I never would have suspected her of anything... it just goes to show that you can't judge people on their appearance."

" My apologies for not capturing the thief."

" It's not your fault as she was far too slippery for you given how she was a thief. My son is going to be so disappointed in me when I return to the Bomb Shop, and tell him that our stock of Big Bomb Bags won't be on sale in the foreseeable future. Perhaps he should have performed this delivery instead because of my frailty, yet my stubborn pride prevented me from seeing the truth for what it was."

" I've been asking those who witnessed the crime, and so far they all say the same thing."

" It was a prancing thief, but I didn't see what she looked like."

" Perhaps someone saw something that wasn't just the body-shape, but I've questioned everyone who was in this area." That's when the militia man noticed I was standing nearby, and began to walk towards me believing I might know something even though I wasn't here when it happened. As he pointed his spear right at my face, upon reaching my location, I should have listened to Pinkie Pie, and avoided this area entirely, but it looks like my blunder could wind up costing me.

To Be Continued.

Chapter 4: Showdown at Midnight

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 28, 2015
Chapter 4: Showdown at Midnight

" Hey! You there, Deku Scrub! What are you doing?"

" I just happened to come into the area because of hearing about the robbery that took place here," I replied.

" Surprised that a Deku would be in the know, but yes there was a recent crime, and this poor woman was the victim. An unusual woman who had been prancing about suddenly came up to her according to witness accounts, and stole a bag which contained large-sized Bomb Bags which were intended for the Bomb Shop located in West Clock Town. No one saw the face of the thief, yet she prances about as though she were dancing or something."

There was definitely no doubt in my mind that the one responsible was Lightning Dust, and I still feel bad about not doing something to prevent this robbery from happening. Upon thinking about it for a while, I had no idea of her true motives, so I can't exactly be guilty given she just wanted me to leave her alone. Still, I wish that I could somehow reverse time, and stop her from stealing from this old lady who still appears pretty shaken up.

But who would want to steal a bag filled with Bomb Bags? Normally, a thief would either try to steal a lot of money, or something of incredible value which they then try to sell or give back in exchange for even more money. Then again, Lightning Dust could desire destruction by using those bombs in a horrible way, but I don't think she would sink down to such a low level I then overheard the soldier and the old lady say that this hasn't been the first time someone has been robbed, so it seems Lightning Dust has quite a track record.

Then maybe she has some kind of hideout in Termina, but where would such a place even be? I doubt she would have it in Clock Town as that would be too obvious, so it must be somewhere where very few would ever dare to go. The soldier then turned towards me again, for he wasn't finished dealing with me given how I accidentally came in here rather than simply staying away from the problem.

" Can I help you?" I asked.

" Normally, you Deku Scrubs would say something along those lines, and then lie through your mouths just to get us riled up, but for some reason I sense that you're different from others. I believe that your response will be one that doesn't end up being misleading."

" I did get a look at her face," I said.

" Really? No one else saw it, so that makes you a valuable witness."

" At first, I thought she was someone I had met before somewhere, but then it turned out that she was a complete stranger. Her face looked really young as though she were in her late teens, and her hair was combed in a way that resembled lightning," I said.

" Hair like lightning? Right! We'll make sure to be on the lookout for someone like that."

" What do you suppose the thief intends on doing with those stolen goods?" I asked.

" Quite the curious Deku Scrub aren't you? Since you provided us with some useful information, I'll answer your question in return. The Bomb Shop at this time of the year gets a lot of customers who want to buy explosives to celebrate the coming of the new year, but due to the high volume, many aren't able to purchase anything. So, a decision was made some time ago where the shop would begin carrying a Large Bomb Bag designed for those who really want to have a blast. However, only those who have been given permission are allowed to purchase that larger bag."

" I have noticed a lack of people around here," I said.

" Clock Town should be packed by now, yet only a small handful have come."

" Could it have to do with the moon?" I asked.

" I wouldn't know, for that's information which I don't have access to. Perhaps if you were to speak to Viscen, the one whose in charge of the town soldiers, you might get a better understanding, but why would you do that? Deku Scrubs aren't known for wanting to get involved in the affairs of other tribes unless they can get something out of it. Anyway, I'll escort the old lady to the Bomb Shop, and then come back to resume my patrol.

Of course, you might try to leave town which is against the law given how you're a child, so perhaps you should take her where she needs to go." Just like that, I found myself being an escort all because I got involved. Luckily for me, it wasn't that far to the Bomb Shop given how it was roughly two minutes away, so when I brought the old lady there, and entered without saying a single word, I began contemplating my next course of action.

" What's wrong?" asked Twilight.

" I still can't believe that Lightning Dust robbed an innocent old lady," I replied.

" Termina isn't like Equestria, but I'll admit that I am surprised she would do such a thing," said Twilight.

" It makes me wish that we could go back in time, and prevent the robbery from happening, yet I know that's impossible as time cannot be altered like that. I also feel bad that the old lady was robbed just because of how frail she was... Lightning Dust should be ashamed for what she did," I said.

" I doubt she has any conscience that would make her feel that way Sunset Shimmer, but you providing information to the soldier should help them track her down if she were to appear again. You can't dwell on events of the past, for that could damage the potential future which you're striving for, and in question would make you suffer a relapse were you could do something evil," said Twilight.

" Yeah, I know that, but it's still frustrating knowing that she got away with it," I said.

" Lightning Dust is bound to slip up eventually as someone who thinks they can't be caught will make the one blunder that enables the law to uncover their wave of crime," said Twilight. While that wasn't the best pep talk I've gotten from her given how often I wrote her reports in my magic journal, her words were enough to make me smile, and remind me that I need to keep looking ahead.

My past is behind me, and I can't allow it to consume me, so I'd say this incident was more of a hiccup than something that would have a profound effect on my life. " We should probably head back to see Pinkie Pie, for she may know something about the Deku Scrub who is looking for that Moon's Tear."

" Considering what information she told us before proved to be helpful, she is bound to know where we can find this Deku," I said.

" Are you okay?" asked Twilight.

" All of this running around non-stop has really exhausted me... I need to lie down and sleep for a while. I know that we need to keep on going seeing as the fate of this world is riding on our shoulders, but my body is on the verge of completely collapsing," I replied. My eyes were struggling to remain awake at this point, and both my arms and legs felt as though they had suddenly gained several pounds. " Guess you were right Twilight about how I need sleep, for there's just no way I can go an entire 72 hours without resting. If it's okay with you, I want to go over there to that corner of West Clock Town, and curl up where no one can disturb me."

There was nothing Twilight could do to convince me otherwise, for she knew that sleep was important, and ignoring it was nothing short of absurd. I walked over to the corner in question making sure the soldier didn't notice as he might accuse me of loitering, and then I fell asleep instantly with Twilight choosing to sleep as well as she felt just as tired as I did. Maybe I should have tried to stay awake instead of sleep, for I was about to experience that dream again...

...the same dream which had been plaguing me for several months, and served as the catalyst which has brought me to Termina. I once again found myself alone in a strange place, but this time I was wearing the Kokiri Tunic along with having my sword and shield on my back. The large burst of flames then appeared as normal, and I braced myself as they came towards me in attempt to consume my body thus destroying me in the process. However, it suddenly came to a stop in front of me like something was holding it back, or maybe it was someone who possessed tremendous power.

" Huh? Why has the fire stopped?" I asked.

" Because I have willed it to be."

" That voice....Ganondorf," I said, and sure enough the image of the Dark Lord himself appeared before me in the flames.

" Did you think that you had seen the last of me in your mind child? Such a foolish notion coming from one as weak-minded as you, and yet I can sense great anger forming deep within your heart because of my presence. Do not attempt to try and fight me, for even though we are within your dreams, my power remains strong thus whatever power you possess means nothing," said Ganondorf.

" Why are you here?" I asked.

" I am impressed with how quickly you figured out why this world is on the verge of destruction, yet there is still much which continues to elude you. Once you have come to understand the truth, you will beg to be killed as your sanity shall shatter to pieces. Breaking your body physically grows dull child, yet doing so to your mind is so much more entertaining. The little fairy retaining her true memories is something I had foreseen, yet this will change nothing for you shall endure much suffering," replied Ganondorf.

" This rhetoric has gotten old," I said.

" Your fiery nature still remains as amusing as ever," laughed Ganondorf.

"Okay, then explain to me why you insist on being so cryptic with everything you have to say? Is there some reason why you feel the need to give me vague hints as to what will happen? Or, is because you're afraid that I will end up surpassing you? I asked. That wasn't my best attempt at defying him, but I knew that I was taking a big risk by saying he was afraid of me when in fact I still feared him because of what he did to me at the end of my last adventure.

Ganondorf remained quiet initially which made me suspect he was going to end my life while drifting about in the dream realm, but his laughter echoed about before he folded his arms in front of me before continuing to laugh. That's when his eyes glowed bright yellow which instantly froze me as though he used some kind of arcane power.

" You think that I fear you? Heh! I have faced many who had the very attitude which you possess child, and all of them have fallen before my power. Several of them proved worthy to become my servants, so upon their deaths, I resurrected them as my obedient slaves who obey my every command," said Ganondorf.

" I'm not going to let you get through to me," I said.

" Why struggle against the inevitable? You are destined to suffer physically and emotionally once again, yet can you survive such torment this time around? Termina is not like Hyrule, for this world was doomed from the start as opposed to the former which was destined to be mine years later. Should you overcome the evil which exists here, I will face you once again in battle," said Ganondorf.

" Why do you want that?" I asked.

" Your power intrigued me the last time we fought, and so I desire to see how much better you have become. I know that you can never defeat me as your power is a mere speck compared to mine, but perhaps you will be more entertaining than before rather than crumble within mere moments," replied Ganondorf. He was completely full of himself which shows that he has quite the arrogant personality, yet was he aware that I can achieve an even greater form other than ponying-up?

If I do have to fight him again, I hope I can at least last long enough to find a way out as I doubt he'd be willing to let me escape just because he decreed it. I then began sensing his power, and it was even stronger than before which means his dark power had grown, and it became difficult for me to breathe. " Tell me child... the one who is your companion... this one happens to be a princess from your true world, but it appears she has hesitation in her heart. Is it because she is too weak to fulfill her intended duties, or perhaps she is afraid to face the consequences should she fail those who believe in her?"

" Twilight would never succumb to such things, for she's much stronger than you think!" I shouted.

" Your voice tells me that I have struck a nerve," said Ganondorf.

" Insulting her is really pushing it," I said.

" This companion possesses a powerful magic which makes her strong, but it is merely a fledgling force compared to mine. While she believes in you child, she does not believe in herself despite putting on a brave face. Deep down within her soul, there is a feeling of failure which she does not desire, and it torments her endlessly as it continues to eat away at her mental state. She has retained her memories for this very reason... you and your companion were fated to suffer," said Ganondorf.

" By your hand?" I asked.

" Not by mine, but by another whose hatred is so strong that it desires nothing but to consume everything. Ironic that the two of you, close friends who have forged a powerful bond shall be tested in ways that one can only view as imaginable, but this is what destiny has dealt you. Fate is a force which cannot be changed no matter how hard you may try, but should you find a miracle and defy fate, then you shall face death at my hand.

Child... do not betray my expectations," replied Ganondorf. He then disappeared into the flames leaving me to wonder what he meant by his parting words, but then the flames moved forward again where they consumed me, and I woke up instantly with sweat dripping down my forehead. My sudden movement caught Twilight by surprise, and she felt annoyed by what I just did at first until she realized what was wrong by looking at how I was sweating.

Dawn of the Second Day - 48 Hours Remain

" You look as though you had a bad dream," said Twilight.

" The same one I've experienced many times, but this time it was different because of Ganondorf," I said. I then told Twilight everything he said to me in my dream making sure not to leave out any details, and her expression upon me finishing was to be expected. Both of us are fated to suffer torment... while it does sound like everything is being stacked against us, Twilight insisted that we ignore his words otherwise we'll be consumed by our own fears. She was now beginning to understand just what I went through back in Hyrule, and now it's determined to repeat itself in Termina.

" How do you ignore someone like him?" asked Twilight.

" Through great difficulty," I replied.

" Well, we need to focus on saving this world, and then finding a way to change things back to the way they were. By the way, we should find a clock so that we can check out the time as who knows how long we've been sleeping for," said Twilight. We spent a few moments looking for a clock before discovering one hanging on one of the walls near the post office, and it says that it was currently 11:00am which means we've been sleeping for at least nine hours. I suppose it could have been worse in that we may have slept for an entire day given how this world doesn't have alarm clocks like the human world does.

" We've got 43 hours to go," I said.

" Considering how close Starlight Glimmer is, it feels like we've got plenty of time to prevent the moon from crashing, but then we can't get to her until tomorrow night when the Clock Tower opens up to celebrate the Carnival of Time, and the coming year. Guess all we can do is kill some time until the tower opens, yet I've got a feeling you don't have any plans to waste any time right?" asked Twilight.

" We still need to find that Deku Scrub who wants the Moon's Tear, so we should speak to Pinkie Pie about that as surely she would have an idea. Also, I think we need to pay the mayor a visit, and warn her about Starlight," I replied.

" Pinkie should be in North Clock Town floating about with her balloon," said Twilight. With that, I made my way back to that part of town where she was indeed floating in the air, and when she noticed me walking nearby, she let out a yell which made me jump in the air due to how sudden it was. Since I now have the ability to shoot bubbles out of my mouth, I figured that I should pop her balloon using one of those instead of a stone to bring her down. Aiming carefully for her balloon and taking the rain into consideration which started falling down from the clouds just a few moments ago, I fired a bubble which connected with the balloon popping it.

" YAAAA-AHHHH-AHHHH-AHHHH!" yelled Pinkie Pie as she dropped down before landing on the ground, and buckled her knees in the process. When she regained her composure, she turned towards me, and began to jump around repeatedly as though she were some kind of rabbit. It was actually adorable to see because it shows that despite being different in this world, Pinkie was still being Pinkie, yet I eventually had to stop her because I needed to speak with her. " Ms. Fairy! I'm so glad that you came to visit Tingle once again! Are you here to purchase another one of Tingle's maps?"

" Actually, I need more information," I replied.

" That's fine too as I know plenty of things around town," said Pinkie Pie.

" I'm looking for a Deku Scrub who has been searching for something called a Moon's Tear," I said.

" Oh yeah! I know which one you're talking about! He's a regular at the Milk Bar where he goes there every night for about an hour or two to relax after a hard day's work selling his wares to potential customers, yet he constantly harps on regarding that gem you mentioned. You may not realize this Ms. Fairy, but the Moon's Tear is quite the sought after item for men as they desire to give it to their wives to make them happy. That Deku Scrub has been searching a very long time for one, yet has never succeeded which has made him so desperate, he will practically give you anything in exchange for one," said Pinkie Pie.

" Well, I have a Moon's Tear," I said.

" Shhhh! Don't say that so loud otherwise everyone will hear you, and all of those men will come running this way," said Pinkie Pie. She then began to dart around thinking that men were about to come out of every nook and cranny upon me saying what I did, but she was merely overreacting as I doubt anyone heard me. " Okay! No one heard that, but you should be careful when saying things like that."

" Do you know where I can find the Deku Scrub?" I asked.

" He hangs out in South Clock Town where he owns a Deku Flower that's situated near the Clock Tower, but when he's not there or at the Milk Bar, he can be seen flying off to some secret grotto hidden somewhere in the field. I should warn you Ms. Fairy of his temperment as he doesn't like people getting close to his property. Also, you should consider talking business talk with him as he can understand that better than regular talk. Now, are you sure you don't need another of Tingle's maps?" asked Pinkie Pie.

" I'm good on the map which by the way has already proven to be useful," I replied.

" Of course as I make sure to not leave out any detail," said Pinkie Pie.

" I do have one more question for you, and it has to do with what's happening in the mayor's residence. You said to me before that she was involved in some kind of meeting, yet you never really specified as to what was happening," I said.

" Usually, things that happen in the mayor's residence are private affairs given how she doesn't want the public to think of her as being weak, but what's been going on in there for the last couple of days is anything but that. The entire town is abuzz about what has been happening at her residence, and it involves two groups who are trying to get her support when it comes to the carnival. I don't know what exactly as I make it a mission not to become involved with politics, but you should be able to find out for yourself as all of the mayor's other meetings have been cancelled according to one disgruntled man," said Pinkie Pie.

" I'll go there before I find that Deku Scrub," I said.

" If you change your mind about wanting one of Tingle's map, you know where to find me. Tingle, Tingle, Kooloo-Limpah! Well, call again," said Pinkie Pie. She then began to inflate another balloon before taking to the air again, but what she said about the mayor's residence made me concerned, and Twilight's expression mirrored my own. In Equestria, we've never had problems with elected officials in addition to the rulers, yet it looks like what happens here in Termina is completely different.

As I walked along towards the mayor's residence, I began thinking about what must have been going on in the minds of the students and staff at Canterlot High in addition to the Crystal Prep students as they were dragged into this world. No doubt they were shocked as it was something they weren't expecting, and they've experienced some magical events already.

Right now, none of them are aware of what has happened, and are acting out the parts of the characters in this video game, so for the time being they are actually safe, yet who knows for how long given that the moon above was going to crash. As I looked up at the moon, it had gotten much closer than before, and it meant that people should start taking notice of it. This made me stop walking for a few moments which Twilight thought was odd, but then I explained that I wanted to see any possible reactions to the moon being closer.

Several people walked by, but none of them paid any attention to the moon. Maybe they were either ignorant of it all and were focused on their own lives, or maybe they didn't want to be worried about the impending doom. Either way, they would soon pay attention especially when we come down to the final hours where the moon will be practically on their doorstep. Speaking of which, I finally reached the residence of the mayor, and already I could hear the sounds of arguing coming from inside.

" You can practically hear them all the way out here," I commented.

" It must be quite the heated argument if they're that loud," said Twilight.

" Maybe we shouldn't go in after all," I suggested.

" I doubt anyone in there is going to pay attention to a Deku Scrub and fairy," said Twilight.

" Yeah, I suppose not," I smiled. Opening the door and walking inside, the interior of the mayor's residence was pretty impressive, yet I couldn't say the same thing about the choice of paintings hanging up. There was one which depicted a man and a woman in a rather unusual pose, and I suspect they were the mayor and her husband during their younger days. It looked to me like they were full of themselves given how gaudy the picture was, but I ignored it as best as possible, and made my way over to a desk which must be where a receptionist works. " The receptionist isn't here... strange as there are plenty of various baubles on the desk."

" Maybe she couldn't take all that noise?" suggested Twilight.

" That's a possibility," I said. There was a note lying on the table which caught my interest, but because of my height, I was barely able to see it, and I struggled to climb up onto the desk to read it. I'm looking forward to changing back to a human, for I don't know much more I can take being like this. " At least this was written in English as opposed to Hylian otherwise we'd need a translator. 'Mayor Dotour, I'm currently on lunch break, and won't be back for several hours due to all that bickering. Please don't do anything foolish otherwise your husband may not appreciate it, and don't worry about your son... I'll ask around once again.' Wow, this receptionist doesn't view the mayor as being all that good."

" And the same thing can be said regarding her husband," added Twilight.

" What of her son?" I asked.

" There's nothing we can do about that unless we can learn more from either the mayor, or her husband, but I don't think the former will be able to say anything given she's stuck in that meeting. As for her husband... I'm not sure if she would want your help in your current form," replied Twilight.

" Guess we should just let ourselves into the meeting," I said.

" Are you sure? We might make a scene," said Twilight.

" They're probably so wrapped up in their arguing that they won't even notice us slip inside, and watch the proceedings from a safe distance. Before we do go in there, we should try and see if we can recognize anyone we know," I suggested. I didn't need to sneak around seeing as all that noise filtered out my footsteps, and upon reaching a more fancy-looking door, I looked through the keyhole in order to see who was in there.

Okay, so being this small does have one advantage, but that's all! A woman wearing glasses was sitting on a chair behind a small desk, and she looked miserable as though she had no idea what to do. The chair looked just as fancy as the door, yet no one in the room took notice of it, for they were busy arguing. " That must be the mayor of Clock Town, but I've never seen her before."

" That's Mayor Mare," said Twilight.

" Seriously?" I asked.

" In Equestria, she serves as the mayor of Ponyville, and even though I'm a princess who now lives just outside in a massive castle, she still holds authority over what gets done. She doesn't appear to be enjoying this meeting, yet how can you blame her when you've got two people bickering back and forth. Okay, let's see who is to her left as they are shouting loudly," replied Twilight.

Looking to our left, there was a group of three men with a much smaller woman among them, yet I wouldn't say she was a woman, but rather she was a kid. While I knew who it was, Twilight's reaction had more shock value. " Huh!?!? Sweetie Belle!?!? What is she doing in there, and looking like some kind of worker?"

" Just like before," I replied.

" What do you mean?" asked Twilight.

" Back in Hyrule, Sweetie Belle was portrayed as a character named Mutoh who was the boss of a group of carpenters who were hired to transform Kakariko Village from a small village, and into a large city. After that, they all left the village where they traveled to Gerudo Valley, and settled there which was the last I saw her. I'm slightly surprised that she is reprising the same character here as she did there, but it looks like she isn't a carpenter this time," I replied.

" I wonder what Rarity would say to this," said Twilight.

" She'd throw a hissy fit if she saw her sister wearing such drab clothes," I said.

" That's sounds just like her... I'm sure we'll eventually run into her wherever she is in Termina. Okay, let's look at the other person arguing," said Twilight. Turning and looking to our right, she suddenly began to flutter around like crazy all because of who was arguing with Sweetie Belle. " My brother!?!? My brother's in there! Sunset, we need to get in there, and talk to Shining Armour as surely he can help us out." Sure enough, it was her brother, but was this the one from Equestria, or from the human world? Twilight's human counterpart did tell us that her brother was a former alumnus for Crystal Prep, so could that be him in there?

" I don't think he'll listen," I sighed.

" Why not?" asked Twilight.

" Even though that is your brother, at the same time it's not him because he is portraying someone else in Termina. He won't recognize you no matter how much you try and plead with him, so we can't expect him to help despite you wanting that. Then again, he might be the Shining Armour from the human world who is also the sister of your human counterpart," I replied. At first, Twilight scolded me for not wanting to help her brother, and for suggesting that wasn't the Shining Armour she knew, so I decided to explain what he was like during my adventures in Hyrule.

Shining Armour was the Captain of the Royal Guards who protected Twilight when she was Zelda, yet Ganondorf almost killed him during his invasion of the castle, and he would reappear years later as a broken man who kept to himself because he felt that he failed in his duties. It looks like he is a captain once again like he was before, but I don't think he'll be facing any kind of danger.

" My brother did recover right?" I asked.

" I was able to get him to see things in a positive way," I replied.

" You're really getting a handle on knowing how to be a good friend," smiled Twilight. With that little explanation out of the way, I opened the door to the actual office of the mayor, and as I suspected, no one was paying attention because of how loud it was. Upon sneaking inside, I hid behind a large plant located in a corner before Twilight and I began listening in on what they were arguing about.

" Most of the townsfolk already have taken shelter without waiting for the Mayor's orders. The only ones left are public servants and committee members. Ms. Mayor and Carnival Committee Members, please order those who remain to evacuate! We don't know much time remains before the moon is expected to crash into Clock Town, so the sooner everyone has evacuated from town, the sooner we can arrange for transportation to Romani Ranch," said Shining Armour.

" Yes, that is a valid option," said Mayor Mare.

" The ranch should be an ideal location to weather out the oncoming storm, for it's obvious that Clock Town won't survive. Then again, I can't say for certain if relocating there will work as the impact could destroy all of Termina. Still, we do need to flee otherwise the casualties could be insurmountable! Mrs. Mayor, give the order to evacuate as soon as possible," said Shining Armour.

From what I could hear despite arguing coming from minor characters on both sides, Shining Armour wants to ensure the safety of the people above everything else. Twilight commented that she felt proud knowing her brother even in this world was putting other people's lives ahead of his own, but what will Sweetie Belle say in return? I'm not sure if she agrees completely with what he said, or she refuses to believe anything he has to say.

" Alright! I've heard your side Viscen, so now I turn things to you Mutoh," said Mayor Mare.

" You cowards! Do you actually believe the moon will fall? Throughout my entire life, I've never heard anything so utterly foolishness like the moon is being pulled down towards us by some kind of powerful force. The confused townsfolk simply caused a panic by believing this ridiculous, groundless theory. The soldiers couldn't prevent the panic, but outside the town walls is where the danger is!

Those monsters didn't suddenly come out of the woodwork within the last few days, but rather they've been out there for years, and it's only just now that they are beginning to stir because of the fear being exuded. You soldiers need to focus on dealing with those beasts, and making sure none of them can get into town otherwise people could get hurt," said Sweetie Belle.

" The soldiers have been working hard to keep our citizens safe," said Mayor Mare.

" But because of this stupid moon talk, they've been slacking off by focusing on that instead of their regular duties. Did you all hear about the old lady from the Bomb Shop who was robbed last night? The soldiers should have easily caught the thief before she could escape, but they were focused on dealing with an imaginary problem instead. If this continues to be an issue, then maybe we could do with some new soldiers who actually know what they're doing. In any case, back to the important matter at hand!

You want answers? The answer is that the carnival should not be canceled! Isn't that right, Mrs. Mayor?" asked Sweetie Belle. I didn't need any hint regarding how she thinks, for it was pretty obvious to me as soon as she began talking. The Carnival Committee are more concerned with the carnival itself instead of the people, but I'm sure there is a much deeper meaning here.

Twilight couldn't believe how Sweetie Belle was acting given how sweet and innocent she is in Equestria, yet I reminded her that she's different in Termina compared to the one she happens to know. Still, it looks as though the militia are in the right, but that could quickly change depending on what gets said next.

" Now Mutoh, there is no need to insult the soldiers like that. While that thief did end up escaping, she was far more experienced than originally suspected. Thanks to important eye witnesses, the thief shall be captured without fail when she returns to Clock Town which is inevitable," said Mayor Mare.

" I did step out of line a little, but I still by what I said about them not focusing on the monsters," said Sweetie Belle.

" This shall be taken into consideration, so now you may speak again Viscen," said Mayor Mare.

" Are you serious, Mutoh!?!? First of all, my soldiers have proven themselves time and again that we're doing our job considering that no monsters have ever managed to enter Clock Town, and despite last night, our track record remains impeccable," said Shining Armour. He was beginning to get rather testy which could end up getting a lot worse unless he calms down, but then Sweetie Belle isn't likely to allow him the chance to cool off.

" Also, it seems that giant chunk of rock above us hasn't caught your eye! At this time every year, we are overrun by tourists! So why is the town empty? It's because the people are afraid of what is falling above us, and they wish to preserve their own lives as opposed to being here. Clearly, it's your job to ensure the carnival's operation, but that's if people are here for it! Since there aren't any people around, there is no point in having the carnival as it would just be a waste of time. Don't drag the merchants and soldiers into this!"

" Now, now, Viscen... let's try to calm down before things spiral out of control. I know how you feel about Mutoh's way of thinking, but there is no need to resort to harsh rhetoric, and this applies with you as well Mutoh. This is supposed to be a peaceful meeting where we must figure out an ideal solution to the problem at hand, yet shouting back and forth isn't the way to do things," said Mayor Mare.

Just looking at the mayor made me feel really sorry for her because she is stuck in-between two people who clearly don't understand what being mature is all about. She's taking their respective insults, and trying so hard to keep things civil, but it looks as though she has lost complete control. No... she never had control from the start as it was beyond her means the moment things began.

I remember back when I was Princess Celestia's student in Equestria, there were incidents similar to this, yet she was able to bring about peaceful resolutions without it getting to the point where ponies would consider attacking each other. Mayor Mare doesn't deserve to be caught in such a mess, yet I don't think there's anything I can do to help her out.

" If the soldiers wish to run, then run, Viscen! We councilmen will stick to tradition. This carnival will be a success! I've never heard of a defense unit abandoning its town under any circumstances! Even though there aren't as many people this year compared with previous years, we can still put on the carnival without the need to cancel anything just because the moon is falling. You and your soldiers should be protecting the people, and not wanting to flee with your tails between your legs. Monsieur Aroma would surely say the same thing, wouldn't he, Mayor Dotour?" asked Sweetie Belle.

" Let's not bring my husband into this," replied Mayor Mare.

" Why?" asked Sweetie Belle.

" Monsieur Aroma doesn't need to get herself in this meeting Mutoh," replied Shining Armour.

" You're just afraid that he will agree with what I'm saying aren't you? I can read you like a book Viscen, for you're just so predictable that it just makes me laugh," said Sweetie Belle.

" Such a blatant lie coming from you," said Shining Armour.

" Anyway, it's obvious what we need to do in order to resolve this issue, and that is to not cancel the carnival," said Sweetie Belle.

" No, we must evacuate the town before the moon destroys us all," said Shining Armour.

" On with the carnival!" shouted Sweetie Belle.

" All must take refuge!" shouted Shining Armour.

" On with the carnival!" shouted Sweetie Belle.

" All must take refuge!" shouted Shining Armour. It was around this time where it became apparent that things were just going to continue on with the two of them repeating the same thing over and over until Mayor Mare agrees with one of them, and I personally couldn't take the arguing any longer, so Twilight and I slipped out of the office without being noticed, and soon we were outside again where the arguing could still be heard.

" That was one of the worst experiences I've ever seen," I moaned.

" Sweetie Belle and my brother are at such odds with each other, that they refuse to listen to what the other has to say. They are just yelling in order to get their voices heard, and to earn a sympathetic ear with Mayor Mare who must be ready to lose what little she has of her sanity. I would suggest we go back, and show them the meaning of friendship, but my skills as the Princess of Friendship can't work out miracles," said Twilight.

" Maybe they need to see something that can convince them to come up with a solution," I suggested.

" I think the mayor is the one who needs to end that meeting," said Twilight.

" How? She looks completely overwhelmed," I said.

" They all just need to see something wonderful that's a reflection of the strongest emotion out there... love. If Princess Cadance were here, she would have used her powers, and calmed them all down instantly. They would still need to resolve that problem which keeps them stuck in that office, but they would be much more level-headed rather than acting like savages. This actually has me wanting to discuss something important with you," said Twilight.

" What is it?" I asked.

" Clock Town seems to be filled with all kinds of problems given how people have been suffering because of Starlight Glimmer, so if we could solve these problems that plague everyone, we'd be doing them a terrific service. We'd also feel good about ourselves for taking the time to help them. Now I know it wouldn't be easy given how we don't have much time before the moon falls, and we most likely haven't seen everyone in town and beyond who have issues, so we would be at a disadvantage at first," replied Twilight. You've got to love how determined she is to resolve issues with the power of friendship, but then that has been the kind of person Twilight is.

She is always willing to lend a hand, or hoof in her case, and help anyone who needs it. I've actually learnt a lot from our reports we send back and forth with one another, yet I would be a novice compared with her expertise which means she would be in the lead.

If only those Bombers had allowed me to join them, we could have done things in their name, and help those in need which in turn would make their cause even more of an attraction for other kids who aspire to aiding those who need help. But, they refused to let me join all because I'm trapped as a Deku Scrub due to this curse, and regaining the ocarina is my only means of changing back to normal.

Speaking of Deku Scrubs, I think it's high-time we pay that one who wants the Moon's Tear a visit, so I began to head back towards South Clock Town, yet I would soon discover a small snag. Pinkie Pie never said where the Deku Flower was which belongs to the Deku in question! What began as a simple task has now become more difficult.

" We could be spending hours trying to find it," I moaned.

" This definitely wasn't one of Pinkie's better moments," moaned Twilight.

" How much time do we have left?" I asked.

" That meeting took up quite a lot of time, and judging from the change in colours all around us due to the setting sun, I'd say we have about 36 hours left. It's a really scary thought as time just seems to be ticking away even though it doesn't feel that way," replied Twilight.

Night of the Second Day - 36 Hours Remain.

" Only 36 hours left? Seeing as we have to wait until midnight tomorrow before we can access the Clock Tower, we've essentially got 30 hours to find that Deku Scrub, and see what we can get by giving him the Moon's Tear," I said. When I said that things were about to become more difficult, I assumed that there would be at least several dozen of those Deku Flowers, but in reality where was only one which stood out quite easily. It's just that we didn't bother to look directly in front of the Clock Tower, so we wasted several hours going back and forth throughout the area. " I can't believe we couldn't see this flower right by the Clock Tower!"

" And we wasted a couple of hours," added Twilight. Pinkie did say where the flower was located which I now remember, so I smacked myself in the forehead as a result of my blunder.

" Well, we've found the Deku Flower, so where is the Deku Scrub?" I asked.

" I'm not sure where he could be given how we haven't seen any of them, but then they probably prefer to keep out of sight given how they are treated by most people. I wonder if we can just use this flower without him knowing about it. Of course, it won't be until tomorrow night since we still have time," replied Twilight.

" Considering how much running around I've done on my feet, that does seem like a fair trade," I said. No sooner did I say that and attempted to walk forward towards the flower, a voice came out of nowhere, and didn't sound appreciative of what I was about to do.

" Wait! Wait! Hang on!" I was thinking he was hiding inside the flower, and popped his head out, but then I heard what sounded like helicopter blades only not as loud and obnoxious, so looking upwards the sky, an unusual looking Deku Scrub was flying towards us. He was carrying a few bags with him which must be wares, so this has to be one of those Business Scrubs like those in Ganondorf's castle.

It felt weird just then that I remembered such names given that I haven't played Ocarina of Time ever since changing things back to normal, but then I did say to Rainbow Dash not to let me near it because of a premonition of disaster to which she laughed and shrugged her shoulders as though I made it up. I guess she realized she was wrong when the tornado brought us here, but I'm not going to look down on her because of it.

The Business Scrub was certainly taking his sweet time getting down here, but when he finally landed, he somehow made his wares disappear, and put on a small hat before addressing me. " This is my private property. Don't try using it when I'm not around!"

" You own this flower?" I asked.

" I have a deed which claims that this spot belongs to me!"

" My assumption was you were using it because you found it first, and I was going to use it just for one simple thing," I said.

" If you had gone and carried out such a plan, I would have called the soldiers, and have you arrested for using private property. Now, I can tell that you're just a young little Deku, so I'll go easy on you, and not make this go any further. Next time however, I won't hesitate to call them, so be sure to remember that for the future. Anyway, today has been a very good day for me when it comes to doing my business."

" How so?" I asked.

" I've already sold out of my wares, and the carnival hasn't even begun. I'm thinking of closing up shop so I can buy a gift for my wife and return to her in my village! I've heard that a stone called the Moon's Tear shines brighter than any other in the land! If you've got one, I'd really like to get it from you. My wife would love it!"

" And what would you do for me if I told you that I had one?" I asked.

" If you give it to me, I'll give you my spot here... Deku Flower included! You're a Deku Scrub, so you know just how convenient a Deku Flower can be. If you don't hurry, I'll give it to another Deku Scrub. The early Scrub gets the nut! Okay, I'll sweeten the deal for you by explaining how special my flower is. If you haven't already noticed by now, this flower is yellow in colour compared to the pink colour of most flowers. Jumping into this Deku Flower will enable you to launch even higher than ever before, and you'll be able to glide along for a greater period of time.

In fact, you could probably reach the upper entrance of the Clock Tower using this Deku Flower alone." Hearing him say this was just what I wanted to hear as now we've got the means to get up there, and confront Starlight Glimmer once and for all. Judging from the expression on his face, he really wants the Moon's Tear badly, and seeing the sweat dripping down his brow does creep me out, but at least this is going to be an easy transaction provided that no one decided to rob me while I was sleeping some time ago.

The Business Scrub then reached forward with his hands, and I gave him a cold stare which prompted me to back off. " Sorry about that, but I'm really hoping that you have a Moon's Tear, and aren't trying to tease me because of that whole calling the soldier business. Do you have one?"

" Would this be it?" I asked. Reaching into one of my pockets, I pulled it out where the Business Scrubs eyes enlarged so much, they were about to burst.

" Ah! That stone! You must hand it over to me! In exchange, I'll give you my spot here...Deku Flower included! Yes?" This was an offer which I couldn't refuse as there was essentially no other means of getting up there, so I placed the Moon's Tear into his outstretched hands again where he immediately jumped for joy! " Yes! This is definitely a genuine Moon's Tear if I ever saw one! Since you have given me your item, allow me to give you this in return thus completing our deal."

He then handed over what looked to be some kind of fancy paper, yet it had writing on it which looked official. " With this Land Title Deed, the Deku Flower legally belongs to you, and no other Deku Scrub can take it away from you. You really helped me out! Now I have the perfect souvenir for my wife! She hasn't set eyes on a jewel or strange, sparkling stone like this in a very long time."

" I'm glad to have done this good deed," I said.

" Oh yes! I remember seeing a large heart-shaped object on top of the ledge in front of the tower entrance, so you can have it as well as part of the deal. I don't know who put it up there to begin with, but I've no need for such a thing, and I have a hunch that you will find it most lucrative. One last thing... the Title Deed for this spot should be in high demand among Deku Scrubs, but then you probably already know that, so there's no need for any sort of reminder.

If you don't need it anymore, you can always sell it! Well, I'll leave things in your capable hands, for I have a wonderful wife who is going to be extremely happy." The Business Scrub then ducked down into the Deku Flower for a few seconds before popping back out, and taking to the air holding his bags of merchandise. As soon as he left town by flying over a wall, I was left with a flower which I now owned because of having a deed for it.

" I feel like I've suddenly become a duchess," I said.

" It is strange that he was willing to give you the deed to the flower in exchange for a rock that fell from the eyes of the moon," said Twilight.

" While he did act really weird when he reached out initially, I can overlook that given we've got our means to get to Starlight now. All we have to do now is wait for midnight tomorrow night, and we can bring this to an end," I said.

" Our adventure will be over already?" asked Twilight.

" It does sound it, but I've got a feeling something will go wrong," I replied.

" What makes you say that?" asked Twilight.

" Everything so far has been somewhat easy, and for that I haven't been tested yet which would involve me being beaten to within an inch of my life," I replied. Yes, I did just say that to Twilight, and I knew she was going to ask me to elaborate on it due to being shocked. I told her that during my adventures in Hyrule, I sustained lots of injuries at the hands of powerful monsters where I hurt my back, suffered cuts all over my body, blood seeping forth with no means of stopping it, and even having a sword go right through me at one time.

If not for the fairies who revived whenever I was killed in battle, I wouldn't be alive right now. Twilight then asked me how many times I've died given this was the first time she had been told about it. I answered by saying at least three or four times, but I've lost count given that my life left my body at those precise moments.

" Is this going to happen here in Termina?" asked Twilight.

" Guaranteed," I replied.

" Then you need to get your hands on some fairies as soon as possible," said Twilight.

" Unfortunately, the shops around here don't take too kindly to Deku Scrubs according to you, so the chances of me getting a fairy is next to none. Besides, you need a bottle in order to carry one, and I haven't got any on hand which further compounds things. Besides, I don't want to fight Starlight Gimmer, for I'd rather avoid resorting to fighting if a more peaceful solution can be found," I said.

" So what do you want to do now?" asked Twilight.

" There's not much else given we can't enter the tower until tomorrow," I replied.

" We could try to find some more rupees and deposit them at the bank," suggested Twilight.

" Because those soldiers won't allow us to leave town, we might not find much other than smashing the occasional jar, and cutting down bushes using my spinning attack which will give us a rupee or two," I said.

" How about sleep again?" asked Twilight.

" Yeah, we can do that, and if I sleep inside of the Deku Flower, no one is bound to bother me as I'll be safe and secure," I replied. The thought of sleeping inside of a flower did feel weird to me at first, but it should be something I'll quickly get used to. Twilight said she didn't mind where we sleep so long as we don't oversleep, and end up missing our chance as we'll only have the one. Diving into the flower without another thought, I slowly drifted off by closing my eyes, and once again that dream crept into my subconscious where once again I was consumed by flames.

Was this some kind of premonition of things to come? Or maybe there was some other kind of meaning? Eventually, I began to dream about hanging out with my friends, and this remained consistent throughout the duration of my sleep... until I woke up hours later due to an earthquake!?!? " WAAAAH!" Before I knew what was happening, I popped from the Deku Flower, and landed on my rear a short distance away. " What the!?!? Why is the ground shaking?"

Night of the Final Day - 12 Hours Remain.

" Sunset Shimmer..." began Twilight.

" Yeah?" I asked.

" You might want to look up at the moon," replied Twilight. I did what she suggested, and my mouth dropped down in sheer horror, for the moon had gotten a whole lot bigger since the other day. In fact, you could almost see inside of its nose which was both creepy and disgusting. " That tremor we just felt wasn't an earthquake, but rather it's coming from the moon as it draws closer to Clock Town, and I think this has been a trend occurring these last 12 hours or so. Judging from the colour of the sky, we've slept through what was left of the second night, and throughout the entireity of the final day."

" So we have about 12 hours left?" I asked.

" This is cutting it awfully close," replied Twilight.

" On the bright side although that's putting it mildly when you consider what's above us, I'm fully rested which means I can go on for at least 24 hours or so," I said.

" You're going to need your 'A' game Sunset Shimmer, for you know as well as I do that Starlight is waiting for us. We have to be extremely cautious as who knows how much her power has grown since changing you into a Deku Scrub," said Twilight. If there's anything that can be said about what Starlight is going through, it's that I've been there before when I strived to gain as much power as possible.

The thing about power is that most end up losing control, and become nothing more than enraged beasts who are beyond saving as their minds are lost. Those who do manage to gain control become like Ganondorf... or perhaps similar to him, yet different at the same time. You'd need to have incredible willpower to be able to not lose yourself, and that is a seldom seen gift.

For Starlight, she may have gained control, or she may have lost all senses of self, so if the latter happens to be the case, all I can do is offer pity before stopping her from bringing down the moon. Me? I won't succumb to any temptations as I've reformed from how I used to be, and Twilight of course would never become corrupted as she is one of the purest people I've ever known in my life despite having some anxiety issues. Granted, her human counterpart succumbed to darkness, but not in an evil manner, for it was knowledge, and being pressured that consumed her.

Even though waiting here for midnight for the tower to open was a good course of action, I decided to see if anyone was still around given how close the moon was. As I walked around with Twilight floating along by my side, apart from experiencing the occasional tremor as the moon inched ever closer, Clock Town was mostly deserted, yet it looked as though some people were still here for reasons of their own.

Pinkie Pie was still floating in the air via her balloon, and I think she wasn't concerned with the moon given how she is practically in her own little world. The Bombers were on patrol which shows how dedicated they were, but maybe they should leave before things get too dangerous. The soldiers were still guarding the entrances to town along with stopping me from leaving due to being a child, but when I came back to South Clock Town after spending an hour looking around for anyone still here, I could hear the grumblings of Sweetie Belle who was standing alone staring at the tower.

" Cowards! All of you! Not a one of you stayed! You all said that you would stick this out no matter what, but you ended up running away all because the moon falling was too much. Bah! My apprentice will be disgusted with all of you! At least he decided to stay because he's not going to let something like this stop him. Hmph! If you reckon that you'll be forgiven for fleeing by the time you come back... think again! The rest of you people have no backbones, and fled just like those worthless cowards. I'll have a fine carnival without you," said Sweetie Belle.

" Who knew that she had quite the mean streak when she gets mad," said Twilight.

" Do you think we should talk to her?" I asked.

" It might make her feel better," replied Twilight.

" It's the eve of the carnival, and I can't even get to the clock tower's stairway entrance! This stinks worse than Dodongo breath! Hmph! This had better be the last of the surprises!" shouted Sweetie Belle. She then noticed me walking up towards her, and was taken aback by the fact that I was still hanging around town. " Hey, Deku kid! You waitin' for us to finish the bridge from the festival tower to the clock tower entrance up there?"

" Is that what that thing is?" I asked.

" Every year, a bridge gets built which connects from the ground to the entrance to the tower, for that's the only way people can get up there in order to pray for a good harvest to come. If you planned on going up there yourself, then you're out of luck I'm afraid. Sorry! My apprentices panicked and ran away! The cowards! They should have stayed and gotten this bridge finished rather than fleeing to save their own skins, but then it shows that I picked a sorry bunch given they cracked under pressure. This is all we get for a festival tower. It's not quite tall enough, is it? Sheesh!" replied Sweetie Belle.

" So what do you plan on doing?" I asked.

" I intend on celebrating the carnival even if most of the town have abandoned it," replied Sweetie Belle.

" Why haven't those soldiers left?" I asked.

" They wanted to flee along with the townsfolk, but they can't because Mayor Dotour never gave them the order to flee. You see kid, we had a meeting which was to decide what course of action we were going to take regarding the current situation, yet we couldn't come up with a solution which resulted in nothing being done. I suppose if we had been more civil about it rather than shouting endlessly, something could have been done.

This carnival has been nothing but problematic from day one, and the results of our labours speak for themselves. Even if we went to the top of the festival tower, we wouldn't be able to get up to the clock tower entrance! When the tower opens at midnight, it raises up before opening, but as it currently stands, that bridge isn't going to do us anything," replied Sweetie Belle.

" Can't you finish building it yourself?" I asked.

" One person isn't enough kid, and there isn't much time left anyway. I apologize for all this. I wish I could scare that moon away! Why don't you try to flee kid, for you have a reason to flee whereas I've got to stay here to hold my ground," replied Sweetie Belle. Even though escaping sounded like a good idea, I knew that wasn't an option as I had to get up there and face Starlight Glimmer. I didn't mention any of that to her, and instead said that I couldn't leave town because the soldiers won't let me due to being a kid.

" Then it looks like we're both stuck here then kid! Enjoy the carnival for as long as you can even though it should be better than this." I decided to leave Sweetie Belle alone as her constant bouts of anger started to get worse. Walking back over to where the Deku Flower was, I looked up at the moon again where it had gotten even closer, and the tremors were getting more and more prominent.

" Things have gotten out of control," I said.

" It doesn't matter how far away people have gotten from Clock Town, for the impact of the crash will destroy all of Termina. There is no place that is safe, so if we can't stop Starlight from carrying out her insane intentions, this world is as good as gone," said Twilight.

" We should use the Deku Flower, and get up to that platform," I suggested.

" You can even pick up that heart shaped object the Deku Scrub said was there, for no one else will," said Twilight. Diving into the flower before launching myself from it, I gained even greater height than ever, and I used this increased height to easily land on the ledge in question which housed a Piece of Heart. I remember collecting these back in Hyrule, and to see one of these again made me happy, for these will let me survive longer than usual.

Upon picking it up, I felt the warm feeling which occurred when I picked them up before. At that exact moment, bells suddenly ran out which must have signified that midnight had finally come. At first, fireworks began to shoot upwards towards the sky indicating the beginning of the Carnival of Time. Then, the entire tower began to rise up which made me fall onto my rear as I wasn't expecting such a sudden shift, but when I got back onto my feet, a giant handle dropped down which raised up a massive platform.

This must be what the people get onto in order to pray for the coming year according to what Pinkie Pie said to me, but before I could think about her words further, steps began to appear as panels in front of me dropped down.

" That must be the way up," I said.

" Sunset Shimmer! Now is the time to take on Starlight Glimmer," said Twilight.

" You don't have to tell me twice," I said. Running up the stairs as fast as possible, I soon reached the platform where a number of green coloured jars were located around the edge, but my focus was on who was floating about in front of me. Starlight Glimmer at first was ignoring me as she was fixated on the moon, but she eventually turned to face me probably due to sensing me being in the area. The dark aura coming from her was so strong that it felt like being pulled down by an incredible force of weight, yet I resisted this for I've come so far, and succumbing just isn't an option.

" I'm surprised to see you again," said Starlight Glimmer.

" Despite turning me into a Deku Scrub which has caused me nothing but problems, at the same time I've learned to adapt to this new form. In that sense, I have you to thank for this, but don't get too used to the idea that I am complimenting you. Far from it! You have caused so much pain and suffering which you think of as just having fun, so now you must pay for what you've done," I said.

" Quite the bold words, but you don't have what it takes to defeat me. Even though you've gotten a little better since I last saw you, and I suppose I've the Great Fairy to thank for that, it won't be much of a factor in the end. I should have finished her off after shattering her body into pieces, yet instead my focus lead me elsewhere, and you were able to benefit from her assistance," said Starlight Glimmer.

" Tatl!"

" Huh?" asked Twilight. I had completely forgotten that Spike was also here, for I had been focused on Starlight the entire time. Spike had been floating by her side, yet he isn't aware of who she really is, and that actually goes double for him as well. It felt strange because he was there by my side throughout my last adventure, but now this is no longer the case as he chooses to side with her.

" Tatl! I've been worried about you ever since you got left behind back in that cave," said Spike.

" Spike!?!? Get away from her before it's too late!" shouted Twilight.

" Are you okay Tatl? Why did you call me by such a simplistic name as that? You know my name is Tael, or did you suffer some kind of memory loss due to coming into contact with that girl you're standing next to. Skull Kid, we shouldn't have abandoned her like that as now she has no idea who either or us are," said Spike. Starlight said nothing as though she didn't care at all, and this made Spike rather annoyed. " Hello? Did you hear what I just said?"

" I heard you, but I don't care," replied Starlight Glimmer.

" What!?!? That's my sister down there, and your friend who has stuck with you through thick and thin along with myself. How can you say that you don't care when she did everything for you even though many things you've done are questionable. We need to get her away from that kid before she ends up getting even worse, and I wouldn't even begin to know what to do if that were to happen," said Spike.

" She made her choice Tael, and there's nothing that can be done about it. She was far too weak to even understand what I desire, and now I stand on the cusp of success as everything is in place. Those who are weak must be destroyed as they cannot fathom what will happen when the moon comes crashing down... the strong are just as useless as their way of thinking is flawed to no end. No, nothing can be allowed to survive," said Starlight Glimmer.

" Are you serious?" I asked.

" If I wasn't, the moon wouldn't be falling now would it?" asked Starlight Glimmer. Either she had completely lost her mind due to the power of the mask, or she was dead serious about destroying Termina, and I personally think the former is what has happened. Now I need to figure out how to get that mask away from her, but how am I supposed to fly up there without the means of a Deku Flower?

While I was trying to come up with a plan, Spike looked as though he had something to say, yet was holding back perhaps out of fear of betraying Starlight? If this were Equestria, Spike would never fight by her side, but because this is Termina where everyone now exists with different lives, he is struggling to do the right thing even though it would mean betraying a valuable friendship.

" Starlight Glimmer!" shouted Twilight.

" Are you calling me by that name again Tatl? What is up with you all of a sudden? You've always been wanting to have fun even though it did mean at the expense of others sometimes, but ever since we ran into that girl in the woods, everything has changed completely. It's like you're a different person now, and I won't tolerate it! Even though that name does sound rather dashing, and I do aim on using it with what little time we have left, I am the Skull Kid who shall bring Termina to its knees," said Starlight Glimmer.

" The reason I've changed is something you'll never understand," said Twilight.

" Is that so? You think I'm some kind of idiot? Well, I'll make sure that you and your new friend will be destroyed first before the end comes. Think of it as a little gift from me as I doubt seeing everything consumed in flames will be an ideal final image," said Starlight Glimmer.

" Then is there nothing that can convince you to stop?" asked Twilight.

" Why would I stop this now? Besides, the chances of stopping the moon from falling are slim to none, so I suggest that you enjoy these last hours before it all ends... or until I destroy you both before the end comes," replied Starlight Glimmer. It was at this point where Spike suddenly darted out in front of her, and she was surprised that he went and did that, but then her voice changed to one of anger as though she didn't like his action. " Tael? What are you doing? Don't tell me you're going to say what I think you'll say?"

" Swamp... mountain... ocean... canyon. Hurry! The four who are there... bring them here," replied Spike. His words made no sense at all, but then there is nothing about this world which makes sense to me given how I was thrown into it without any prior knowledge. What did he mean by the four? As I tried to figure out what Spike had said, the reaction from Starlight Glimmer made it obvious that she wasn't very happy about him saying that.

Is it possible Spike knows how to prevent the moon from crashing? If so, then why did he keep silent until now? He could have said something back when we first met in the woods, or he could have left Starlight, and tell me what I needed to know. While I'll applaud him for confessing, it's sadly a little too late given that there was less than six hours to go.

" Don't speak out of line!" shouted Starlight Glimmer as she smacked Spike really hard which caused him to get pushed aside. " Stupid fairy!"

" Spike!" exclaimed Twilight.

" That was uncalled for!" I shouted.

" He shouldn't have gone and said that, so he had to be punished for it," said Starlight Glimmer.

" I was willing to believe you could be reformed, but after seeing you do something as deplorable as that, you're too far gone to be saved. Spike and I in this world were your friend because you had no one, and we all bonded instantly, yet by smacking him like you did, you've pretty much sullied our friendship," said Twilight.

" Whatever... even if they were to come now, they wouldn't be able to handle me," laughed Starlight Glimmer.

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" Just look above you, and you should understand what I mean. If not, then it shows how narrow-minded you really are, so allow me to explain it so that you can figure it out. If it's something that can be stopped, then go ahead and try to stop it!" replied Starlight Glimmer. The blank expression on my face told her that I still didn't follow what she was saying, and she slapped her head in confusion.

" Well, I guess in the end you just lacked common-sense seeing as you couldn't figure out something so simple, but I'll give you one last bit of merriment before it all ends. Even though we still have just over five hours left before the moon crashes, why not speed things up a notch, and make it crash within the next five minutes? That way, there's no reason for dragging this out anymore than it already has."

" What!?!? Surely you don't have that kind of power," I said.

" I could have ended things a whole lot sooner had the urge really been strong enough, but I figured on letting everyone below suffer for as long as possible, or until I got bored. Guess the latter option ended up winning, for I'm bored speaking with you. Once I use my powers to bring the moon down even faster, I'll deal with you and Tatl, so don't do anything until I'm ready," said Starlight Glimmer. She then raised her hands up above her head, and unleashed a powerful burst of magic which began to swirl about the moon. At first nothing happened which made me think this was nothing but a bluff, but then the moon started to fall faster than ever before. I guess she really was serious, for now what was five hours left to impact had been reduced to five minutes.

" Things just got a while lot worse," I sighed.

" She's really desperate to bring about an end to Termina," said Twilight.

" With only five minutes left before the moon crashes, we don't have many options available," I said.

" We do have one," began Twilight.

" And that would be?" I asked.

" Starlight is so consumed with bringing the moon dow, she is completely ignoring us which means you can get that ocarina back. If it's as powerful as you say it is, then maybe we can play some kind of song that will bring about an end to all of this," replied Twilight.

" But, how am I supposed to get it when she's up there?" I asked.

" Why not use those bubbles of yours, and knock the instrument out of her hand? It most likely won't break as when I saw her practicing with it earlier, she did drop it a few times, and it suffered no damage at all. I'd say make it count Sunset Shimmer, for you only have one shot at this," replied Twilight. First off, I slapped myself in the forehead for not realizing that I could use my bubbles from a distance. Second, I wish she hadn't said that as now I've got even more pressure than ever before.

If this fails, Starlight will figure out what I'm doing, and I'll never get the Ocarina of Time back. Aiming as carefully as possible without making her aware of my actions, I produced a bubble in my mouth, and fired it at her when she suddenly turned around after hearing some kind of whizzing sound.

Luckily for me, Starlight couldn't react fast enough, and dropped the ocarina where it landed on the ground in front of me with a soft thud. Without worrying about my own safety, I ran over to pick it up, and upon laying my hands onto it, I began to envision some kind of dream which didn't make much sense, for this was a memory that I don't recall ever having... unless this was something from the memory of the one that I'm portraying.

In this dream, I stood before a young girl who I didn't recognize at first, but then her clothes made me remember that this was the person Twilight portrayed. This must be the real Princess Zelda, and the memory I'm currently experiencing must have been when the hero returned to the past in order to live out his life. According to the Hyrule Historia, after he returned to the past, the hero was able to warn the king of Ganondorf's treachery, and was subsequently arrested before he could succeed in getting his vile hands on the golden power.

I guess he decided to stick around Hyrule Castle for a period of time, yet it appears that he is about to go on a journey... or rather I should say me because I'm portraying the hero... whose name currently escapes me even though I've heard it before, which means this is apparently what I did where it leads into where I started in the forest.

" You are already leaving this land of Hyrule, aren't you?" asked Zelda.

" I believe so," I replied

" Even though it was only a short time, I feel like I've known you forever. I am not sure why I feel this way, but it is of no real consequence, for the time that we have shared are ones that I shall cherish forever. I believe in my heart that a day will come when I shall meet you again Until that day comes, please... take this... you should recognize this instrument for you used it during your adventures, and I feel you are far better at keeping it safe rather than it remaining here in the castle," said Zelda.

" Why give me the Ocarina of Time?" I asked.

" Because destiny has revealed to me in a dream that it will become of immense value as you go on your personal journey. There is no need for you to explain what this journey of yours consists of, for it is not my place to know. However, please allow me to say this otherwise I may never have another opportunity to do so. I am praying... I am praying that your journey be a safe one because you have been known to wander into situations where you have fought for your very life, and I fear that you may end up falling into a situation which is much worse than anything that Hyrule has. If something should happen to you, remember this song..." replied Zelda.

" What kind of song?" I asked.

" It was needed to open the Door of Time which is where the Master Sword had been located, but now there is no longer any need to wield the divine blade. Evil no longer exists in Hyrule as Ganondorf is now awaiting his execution which should happen within the next year or two, but now I reveal to you a secret about this melody which has been a closely guarded secret to the Royal Family of Hyrule.

This melody has the power to control time itself, so if you find yourself needing more time, the Song of Time will allow you to acquire what you need. I know that you will not abuse such an ability, but instead you will use it to make the worlds you visit better than they currently are," replied Zelda. Before handing over the Ocarina of Time to me, she then played a song which I remember from before, and upon playing it twice in order to show me how it was meant to be played, she gave it to me.

Even though it had been a while since I last played it, I hadn't forgotten how to play the ocarina, and I flawlessly played the same notes that she did. Now this memory in my dream makes sense, for I remember the Song of Time. If what Zelda says is true, this song will allow me to manipulate time itself to my whim, and I may just have the solution to the current crisis happening in Termina. Of course, it all depends on what I do next once I come out of this dream, and back into reality.

Upon learning the Song of Time, I climbed onto Epona who was standing by my side, and she trotted off at a slow pace perhaps to emphasize that I was going on a long journey. As I was leaving, Zelda said one last thing which really struck home with regards to what I need to do. " The Goddess of Time is protecting you. If you play the Song of Time, she will aid you..."

" Sunset Shimmer?" asked Twilight.

" Huh?" I asked.

" What happened to you just now? You suddenly began daydreaming, and at during such a critical time," replied Twilight.

" It was a memory of the one who I am portraying experienced before he left Hyrule to begin a personal journey. Princess Zelda, who you portrayed, gave the ocarina to me, and taught me a song which I originally believed was meant to open the Door of Time. I know now that the song she taught me in my dream has the power to manipulate time itself, so if what she said was accurate, I could play it and send us both back into the past," I said.

" If we can do something like that, we'd have more time with which to figure out what Spike meant," said Twilight.

" How much time remains?" I asked.

" Your dream did take up much of it, so I'd say about a minute," replied Twilight.

" Guess this is what Ganondorf meant when he said that this was just the beginning. Of course, I can't guarantee success upon playing the Song of Time, for what Zelda told me may not be correct despite what I just said. She could have just assumed that I would have the ability to manipulate time as a means of wanting to make me feel safe," I said.

" Can we not take the chance?" asked Twilight,

" No," I replied.

" Then play that song, and see what happens as clearly we need more time," said Twilight. Even though I was having doubts over the truth behind Zelda's words, I soon shook my head several times to indicate that I couldn't start doubting her as she was my friend. No, I had to go through with this, so hopefully this is going to work otherwise we're all as good as dead. Upon raising the Ocarina of Time in order to play it, instead of holding up the ocarina, I suddenly had what appeared to be a horn which had five different openings.

" Huh? When did you get that instrument!?!?" Twilight a made a valid point as when was I capable of playing a horn? Something didn't seem right with this, but there was no time to think about it. With mere seconds left, I've got to try and play the Song of Time using whatever this thing is.

" Here goes nothing," I said.

" You can do it," said Twilight. Without even worrying about everything around me because that would just make me feel stressed out, I played the Song of Time, and found myself being surrounded in a strange light before it suddenly went white. Had I gone and done the right thing? Or, did I end up making things even worse?

To Be Continued.

Chapter 5: Regaining One's Humanity

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 29, 2015
Chapter 5: Regaining One's Humanity

When everything went white, I had no idea what was about to happen. Was I going to be sent back to the beginning of the three day period? Or, did nothing happen upon playing the Song of Time, and I witnessed everything being destroyed? In an instant, I found myself surrounded by a number of clock faces which were all ticking backwards, but before I could try to understand what it meant, I began falling through what could be the fabric of time itself.

That's when the one drawback of using time travel became apparent to me, and now I wish that I had figured it out a little sooner. The few rupees that I picked up suddenly flew upwards as a sign they couldn't be taken back with me to the beginning, so does this mean I've got to collect everything that I picked up again? Does this also include the Piece of Heart?

" Sunset Shimmer?"

" Is that you Twilight?" I asked.

" Yeah it's me, and you need to come to your senses right now and see what has happened," replied Twilight. Upon opening my eyes, I quickly came to the realization that I was standing in front of the bottom entrance of the Clock Tower. Not only that, the sounds of construction could be heard all around me, and there were people walking about as though nothing had happened. " It looks like using that song has done the trick, for everything has started over. If you don't believe me, just look up at the moon."

As I recall from a few minutes ago, the moon was mere seconds away from destroying everything, so when I looked up at it, I was expecting the moon to be extremely close, yet it was much higher up in the sky than before... in fact, right back where it was when I first entered Clock Town.

" Everything is as it was when Sonata first tasked us with finding her mask," I said.

" That means all of those conversations, and encounters we experienced never happened," said Twilight.

" So if we were to say go visit Pinkie Pie, she won't recognize us even though we purchased a map from her?" I asked.

" As far as I can tell, all of our progress has been reset. Everything we went through in order to reach Starlight Glimmer never took place, so we essentially have to go through it again. The Great Fairy is back to being shattered into pieces, the Deku Scrub who gave you the Land Title Deed has his property back, and Lightning Dust hasn't committed that robbery yet," replied Twilight.

" Lightning Dust..." I thought.

" What are you thinking about?" asked Twilight.

" Remember how we discussed about not being able to do certain things, and wishing that we could have gone back in time in order to sort them out? With the ability to reset time, we can change events for the better if it means helping out those who need it. Of course, if we don't get it right on our first attempt, we can remember what went wrong, and apply it for future attempts. For example, we can now stop Lightning Dust from robbing the old woman from the Bomb Shop, and change a horrible outcome into a good one," I replied.

" When you put it that way it does sound like the right thing to do, but we can't allow ourselves to misuse this ability," said Twilight.

" Perhaps the most important thing is we now have more time to figure out how to stop the moon from crashing, so if we can find the solution, this world can be saved from destruction. From there, we'll be able to figure out to change everything back," I said. While this was definitely a positive first step towards solving what appeared to be one serious mind puzzle with time travel playing a crucial part, there was one thing which needed to be figured out. " So what do you suppose Spike meant about the four who have to come to the Clock Tower?"

" Until we can figure that part out, we'll be going around blind and resetting time in the process," replied Twilight.

" Spike is your assistant given how he's been living with you ever since he hatched according to what you told me in one of your responses to a report of mine, so wouldn't you be able to understand exactly what his words meant?" I asked.

" He mentioned swamp, mountains, ocean, and canyon before Starlight Glimmer smacked him, so I gather she didn't want him to mention any of that. Just give me a moment to figure this out, for I need to rely on the memories of Tatl... hmmmm... got it! I bet Spike was referring to the four areas just outside town. There's one in each compass direction. If we were to go and check these locations, I'm sure we'll be able to find something that can help us figure out how to prevent the moon from crashing," replied Twilight.

" At least Starlight's so-called pranks are restricted to just here," I said.

" I'm not sure if that's true, for she did say that she was planning on bigger and better things. Clock Town must have been small in her mind, so in order to further her sense of fun, she must have done something in each of the four regions. That means we've got to essentially fix any messes she has caused, but how can the two of us do all of that despite having limitless time on our hands?" asked Twilight.

" It's not as bad as you think," I replied. I then explained this is what I had to constantly deal with back in Hyrule, for Ganondorf did similar acts all in his bid to gain control of the kingdom through the power of the Triforce, so Starlight was following his example, but using a much different power to achieve her goal. To be honest, I'm not really looking forward to this adventure as it means having to go through dungeons where monsters and traps will be waiting, and it will be much worse because of the three day time limit.

Since we figured out that when we reset time, everything goes back to the way it was at the beginning, progress in any dungeon will also be reset. That means I'll have to work incredibly fast unless I want to go through all of the inevitable torture again.

" That mask..." began Twilight.

" Even though it makes Starlight really powerful, it's also quite hideous looking," I said.

" Well, yes there is that, but what I was thinking is she uses the power of that mask to do those terrible things we've seen. No one else is capable of stopping her, for anyone who tried has probably met some kind of terrible fate. Well...whatever it takes, we have to do something about it. If this were Equestria right now, the Cutie Map would be showing us where we need to go in order to solve the problem which exists there," said Twilight.

" Did you just say Cutie Map?" I asked.

" I never mentioned this before to you?" asked Twilight.

" My reports to you have been about friendship lessons that I've learned, and you giving me advice on what to do, but I guess I never really asked about the interior décor of your castle. Still, the name is one that doesn't exactly roll off the tongue," I replied. Twilight explained that after gaining her castle which came from the Chest of Harmony upon using the six keys to open it, the Cutie Map appeared when she and her versions of my friends sat down on their respective thrones, and their Cutie Marks reacted.

The map would show them areas that were in need of friendship along with the Cutie Marks of those who had to go. I commented that it sounded like the map dictated their every mission without an opportunity to consider who would actually be best suited to handle it, and Twilight agreed as she wanted to go to Griffonstone and Manehatten, but couldn't due to Rainbow Dash and Pinkie Pie being chosen instead for the former, and Rarity and Applejack for the latter.

" By the way, I never knew you could play the ocarina," said Twilight.

" You can thank all of those songs I learned from you back in Hyrule along with those I learned from others," I said.

" Speaking of the ocarina, Sonata said that if you got it back, she could return you to normal! I'm not sure how she plans on actually doing that, but if she says she can then I say give her a chance. Besides, you need to regain your human form if we plan on being given permission to leave Clock Town seeing as the soldiers won't allow you in your current form," said Twilight.

" But there's just one problem," I began.

" What's that?" asked Twilight.

" We weren't able to get the mask Starlight was wearing, and Sonata is expecting us to come back with it in our possession. Even if she does change me back to my human form, she'll be disappointed because we failed her," I replied.

" Thanks to that song, we have as much time as necessary," said Twilight. Again, I completely ignored the fact that the Song of Time would allow us to go back to the beginning, and even though the moon won't crash, it's just a temporary solution until we can actually stop it from falling altogether. Upon thinking about this scenario, I've defied Ganondorf's warning, and even cheated him on it because Termina won't be destroyed, but his cryptic words do have other meanings.

Maybe I shouldn't be overthinking all of this, and simply face the situation as it comes. If things go really bad during a run-through of the three days, we can go back and try it again in the hopes of getting it right. With that settled, I walked back inside where Sonata was sitting down eating a taco, but I waited for her to finish as I needed her full attention.

" You came back much sooner than expected," said Sonata.

" How long has it been?" I asked.

" You left this tower about five minutes ago, and already you've returned from your task," replied Sonata. If there were any doubts in my mind regarding as to whether or not no one remembers what happened, this was the proof I needed to relieve myself. From her perspective, she had just recently asked for my help which has taken me several minutes to complete as opposed to three days, yet I've got to keep this whole time paradox thing under control. Otherwise, I could slip up trying to remember if I did one thing, or another thing, or even not do something which helps resolve something else.

" Were you able to recover your precious item from that imp?" Sonata got me back on track when she said that, so I took out the Ocarina of Time, and presented it to confirm my success. " Oh! Oh! Ohhh!!! You got it! You got it! You got it! You got it!!! Like I said to you before you left, this would be an easy task for one such as yourself."

" I wouldn't say it like that," I said.

" You should give yourself more confidence in your abilities, for you have so much potential inside of you. Now that you have gotten back your item, and let me say that this is quite a splendid looking ocarina, we can proceed with the method that will change you back to normal. I've no doubt this is something you've been looking forward to for quite a while, so let's get this started without delay," said Sonata.

" What the!?!? Where in the world did that come from?" I asked. My mouth dropped down when Sonata was suddenly sitting in front of a large pipe organ which somehow materialized out of nowhere, yet how was she able to get it in here without anyone noticing from outside? How did I not notice it before when I came up from the basement? Twilight's expression showed she was just as confused about this as I was, and yet this sort of thing was normal for Sonata given how she was rather ditzy back in the human world.

" There are many mysteries in this world that are beyond our understanding," replied Sonata.

" Still, how could you have gotten a pipe organ in here?" I asked.

" That isn't important for your desire to become human again is. Please play this song that I am about to perform, and remember it well... this is a melody that heals evil magic and troubled spirits, turning them into masks. I am sure it will be of assistance to you in the future. It is known as the Song of Healing, and like the name says, those who hear these notes will become at peace," replied Sonata.

" It turns people into masks?" I asked.

" You think this is an unusual circumstance?" asked Sonata.

" Well, yes!" I replied.

" Perhaps it does sound rather morbid when you consider that a person's spirit is trapped with a mask for all of eternity, but it's better for them to become like this otherwise they shall remain tormented by the regrets of not being able to complete their goals when they were alive," said Sonata. Even though I hope I'll never encounter a spirit who needs to be healed of their troubles, I suspect this is going to become a theme throughout this adventure.

No doubt about it... Termina is more darker than Hyrule ever was, but before I could say something in response, Sonata played six notes on the pipe organ which gave off a loud dinging sound before repeating them again where she then turned it over to me, and these particular notes sounded familiar to me as though I heard them before.

Shrugging off such a notion, I played the Song of Healing which made me feel dizzy for a few seconds before I suddenly lost consciousness. This was apparently another theme where I lose consciousness from any given thing no matter how small it was. Then I found myself inside of my dreams again where the large Deku Scrub from before had been chasing after me. This time however, it was retreating backwards perhaps due to being afraid of the magic coming from the song.

Since I didn't know what else to do in this situation, I waved my hand goodbye knowing that this nightmare was finally over before I lost consciousness again. Upon awakening this time around, I heard something fall before making a loud thud as it hit the ground, and judging from the distance of the fall, it must have fallen from somewhere on my face.

" It worked," said Twilight.

" You mean I'm back to normal?" I asked.

" Yes, but this is the first time I'm seeing you wearing such an outfit with my memories as opposed to those of Tatl," replied Twilight.

" I'll admit that green does suit me well as it goes good with my hair," I said as I began to chuckle.

" By the way, some kind of mask dropped from your face, and landed in front of you, so if you just look down for a few moments, you'll see what I mean," said Twilight. I took her advice, and looked down at the ground where there was indeed a mask. I instantly recognized the facial design as that of the Deku Scrub tribe, but then it all started to sink in for me. Was I really trapped inside of that form until a moment ago? What happens to that form of me now? Would wearing this mask allow me to assume that form again?

So many questions were flowing through my head without any answers, but then Twilight offered me a piece of advice. " If you're not sure about keeping it, then I would just throw it away somewhere, or maybe give it to someone else who desires to become a Deku Scrub for whatever reasons they may have."

" If I can make a suggestion?" asked Sonata.

" What is it?" I asked.

" I'm glad that you've regained your human form, and no doubt you feel relieved that your nightmare has come to an end. However, you need not throw away such a mask because it could prove useful throughout your journey. Yes, I give you this mask in commemoration of this day... the day where after struggling through many hardships, you have regained your true form," replied Sonata. Actually, my true form is that of a unicorn, but I suppose she doesn't need to know given how such information is likely to make her feel confused.

I then reached down to pick up this "Deku Mask", and upon rising back up again, I took a deep look at it because something made me feel both curious and frightened about it. " Fear not, for the magic has been sealed inside the mask. When you wear it, you will transform into the shape you just were. When you remove it, you will return to normal."

" Sort of like a transformation?" I asked.

" Yes, you could say that, and know that it should help you especially if you were to go to the Southern Swamp which is where the majority of the Deku Tribe dwell. Now, I have fulfilled my promise to you... I have changed you back to normal even though you most likely questioned my methods, so, please, give me that which you promised me..." replied Sonata. This is where things were about to become really awkward, for I wasn't able to get the mask that she wanted. In fact, I didn't even have the power to do so, for Starlight Glimmer was too powerful, and I only had a few minutes before Termina would be destroyed.

" I'm sorry," I sighed.

" Don't tell me..." said Sonata.

" I think you already know," I said.

" You weren't able to get it back!?!? Normally, I would have exploded with rage because you didn't fulfill your end of the deal, but I can understand why you didn't succeed with the task. The imp has been growing more powerful with each passing moment, so the chances of getting my mask back continue to grow more challenging. That's why you don't have it with you because she is beyond your reach, but that's fine as it shows that you've got much more growing up to do. It also shows that perhaps I may have been a little hasty in terms of believing that you could handle the job," said Sonata.

" Are you calling me weak?" I asked.

" No, but rather inexperienced when it comes to dealing with the dark power of the mask," replied Sonata. I have a feeling that she did call me weak despite not saying it directly, yet I've seen all sorts of things during my adventures in Hyrule. Those were experiences if I ever saw them, so her words hold no ground at all. Granted, much of the time I blundered my way through, so I guess some of what she says sounds valid. " That expression you have tells me that you don't know much about that mask, and for that I must apologize to you. It was my fault not telling you about it, so now allow me to fix things by revealing all there is about the legend."

" From what I've already experienced by being changed into a Deku Scrub, there is a lot about it I don't know other than it possesses dark powers," I said.

" My own research revealed the same thing. As one who has dedicated herself to selling masks, it's important for me to know every last detail otherwise whoever comes to own the mask may not know of key details which may or may not need to be avoided. After reading about it based on what information remains, what you experienced was just the beginning. The mask... it is called Majora's Mask... an accursed item from legend that is said to have been used by an ancient tribe in its hexing rituals," said Sonata.

" Majora's Mask you say?" I asked sarcastically, for that was the name featured in the game this world takes place in. Like I said to myself before all this started, fate has a mysterious way of making things worse than they already are. Even though I've only glanced at that mask Starlight wears a couple of times, its vile, twisted image appeared in my head where it became consumed by flames... this must refer to the ruination Termina will experience should the moon crash.

" It is said that an evil and wicked power is bestowed upon the one who wears that mask," said Sonata. Well, that's obviously true given what Starlight has been doing, yet she started out doing simple things which annoyed people, but quickly expanded into far more dangerous territory with the moon being the most extreme of her powers. It's just like I suspected, she has succumbed to the temptation of power instead of controlling it. " According to legend... the troubles caused by Majora's Mask were so great...the ancient ones, fearing such catastrophe, sealed the mask in shadow forever, preventing its misuse."

" How did they do that?" I asked.

" My guess is they merely hid it away from the world," replied Sonata.

" You mean you don't know?" I asked.

" No one has the correct answer my young friend, for this happened many eons ago as legend dictates. The ancient tribe who used the mask have long since vanished, and the possibilities of any descendants who may know of anything remains unknown. Also, because few records remain, no one really knows the true nature of the mask's power. It could be that the imp has reached her full potential, or there could be even more to come," replied Sonata.

" Yet you still wanted it," I said.

" I went to great lengths to get that legendary mask, for even though the legends dictated it to be a mask of evil power, I still desired to add it to my collection. Not all of my masks are sold you know, for some I choose to keep because I know how truly unique they are. Yet, this only applies when the masks are worn. If no one wears them, the power locked within remains dormant thus no threat occurs.

When I finally had it... after all of that searching by leaving my homeland, and venturing forth to a neighbouring kingdom where it had been buried by the ancient tribe, I could sense the doom of a dark omen brewing. It was that unwelcome feeling that makes your hair stand on end," said Sonata.

" You should have just left it alone where you found it, for that could have prevented all of this from happening," I said.

" A small part of me wanted to do that, yet I couldn't because it's a mask I've wanted for so long," said Sonata. It sounds to me that Sonata had an inner conflict between her head and her heart with regards to whether she would take the prize that she coveted, or do the smart thing and leave it where history would once again forget it had ever even existed.

The majority of her subconscious decided to follow her head which is why Termina is in such a sorry state, and her heart has now got to deal with the aftermath... provided it even registers. Could I blame Sonata for condemning this world to its fate? In a way, I could because her desire ended up bringing Majora's Mask back into the world which is what the ancient tribe didn't want to see happen again.

Then again, I can't blame her as she had no idea someone like Starlight would come along, and steal the mask with every intent on using it. At least, I think that was the reason, yet this was based on my own assumptions instead of actual truth. Maybe Twilight has an answer which could shed some light? After all, she was with Starlight when she decided to steal from Sonata in the first place, but then that would involve finding some way to remember what happened through Tatl's memories.

No doubt Twilight was getting better with the dual memories thing, yet it could be a lot better which she hopes for as well. Turning my attention back to Sonata, I was about to ask her another question, but she had turned her back towards me like in an effort to ignore me, but it turns out that she was eating another taco which just came out of nowhere. So, I turned my head towards Twilight who seemed to be hovering about as though she were guilty.

" I should have stopped her," began Twilight.

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" Starlight Glimmer wouldn't have that mask, and be causing so much trouble if I had been aware of things instead of just following along some kind of script. I feel that all of this is my fault," replied Twilight.

" You weren't acting like yourself, so you had no control over your actions. Besides, you didn't even know that the mask possessed all that dark power, so again this was something beyond your control. If anything, the one who is to blame is Starlight for wanting to wear it, and Sonata over there who wanted to find it," I said.

" I suppose so," said Twilight.

" What do you think about this legend?" I asked.

" It was really informative as it should be given how it's been passed down for generations until it was intentionally forgotten. Now even though I don't know much about any legends from this video game, what Sonata said sounds familiar to some of the more ancient legends of Equestria," replied Twilight. She then floated down to the ground, and began scribbling about in the dirt which was both convenient and disgusting as no one has cleaned this place in practically forever.

Upon finishing, Twilight then floated up to my face, and asked me to take a look at her drawing in the dirt. " This image depicts a pony who obtained a powerful artefact, and upon using it, he gained immense power where he could do anything his heart desires. Eventually, he became so consumed with power that he lost his way, and his original intentions became twisted. Once he realized the consequences of his actions, he disappeared never to be seen again."

" Sorry, but I don't remember that legend," I said.

" Really? It was one that Princess Celestia taught me personally," said Twilight.

" I left because of what I did remember?" I asked.

" Guess you never got to some of the more intricate historical stories," replied Twilight. She then started to blush in response to what she said, but then I gave her such a cold expression, it would have made even a fearsome monster freeze with fear. " Ahem! Anyway, the point is that I understand this legend about Majora's Mask, and know what we need to do. We've got to get that mask back from Starlight before she does something even worse."

" Like what she did isn't bad enough?" I asked.

" I wonder... do you suppose Clock Town has a library?" asked Twilight.

" We didn't see one during our exploration across town when we had to find the Bombers," I replied.

" If we can find a book similar to what Sonata read, we'd find out more about Majora's Mask, and maybe find some way to stop Starlight," said Twilight. I did seem to recall a shelf in the mayor's residence which was filled with books, but then that would involve having to deal with all that bickering again. I'd rather not go through that experience a second time unless it were to resolve it, so that option was out of the question.

" We could try a historian," I suggested.

" It's not much, but it's the best we've got," said Twilight. All of a sudden, a loud burp came out of nowhere which made me feel really disgusted, and Twilight slapped my head before using her hand to point at Sonata who caused the noise in the first place. Despite being someone who sells masks to make people happy, she really needed to work on manners otherwise she'll lose potential customers.

" Sorry for that crude behaviour of mine in addition to stopping my explanation, but my stomach was growling something fierce, so I needed to feed it with a gorgeous taco before I could continue. Anyway, I was happy that Majora's Mask was mine as I had spent a long time looking all over for it, and now... that imp has it... I am begging you! You must get that mask back quickly or something horrible will happen to this defenceless world!" shouted Sonata.

If only she knew what was going to happen in exactly three days from now, yet she was right about needing to deal with Starlight. That's when she dropped down to her knees, and began pleading as a means of making me agree. " I'm begging you! I'm begging you! You must do it! I have no else who I can turn to!" I sighed because this was just really pathetic seeing her like this, but then she went even further by grabbing my hands, and shaking them in a rapid fashion which quickly got on my nerves.

" All right!" I shouted.

" Huh?" asked Sonata.

" I'll get your mask back," I replied.

" Really? You'll do it for me? I was certain you would tell me that because that's the kind of person you are. You'll be fine! Surely, you can do it. Believe in your strengths...believe..." said Sonata. I agreed for two reasons with the first being that because I'm the heroine, I've got to save this world not just to return things back to normal, but also not allow myself to succumb to the pressure that is sure to occur. My other reason was I didn't want to deal with Sonata acting in such a childish manner anymore. " Before you leave, I have this which should prove useful especially if you have a strong desire to help out others."

" What's this?" I asked.

" Before encountering you here in the tower, I stepped outside for a few moments in order to clear my head, and this book was found by my feet. I'm guessing it belongs to the local children who are dedicated about patrolling this town, and keeping the peace. I've no need for such a thing as I am a very busy woman, so take it off of my hands, and good luck in getting my precious mask back. Remember that I'll only be here for three days, and then I must leave, so be sure to bring it to me before then," replied Sonata. She then sat down on the floor before removing the large bag on her back, and placing it on the ground where she began to rummage through.

" We've seen this part before," I commented.

" There's no need to focus on Sonata anymore unless we need to come back here, but let's take a closer look at that book she gave you," said Twilight.

" Do you know what it is?" I asked.

" I've seen the Bombers carrying copies of it around on their person, but I didn't think much of it until some of Tatl's memories flowed into me just now. What you have here is the Bomber's Notebook, a special journal which you can use to record the names of people who have a problem which needs to be solved. Their schedule will be written down where we can look at it to see where people are at any given time. I'm not really sure what else there is to the notebook given I'm just going on Tatl's memories, but maybe we should speak to one of the Bombers as they know much more than I do," replied Twilight.

" Oh no! I'm not going to play their little test again," I moaned.

" I don't think their game is needed anymore, and here's the reason why. Do you remember the code Pip Squeak gave you which allowed us access to their hideout which is the observatory outside of town? What if we give that one member who stands guard the same code even know none of them have told us what it is considering we're back at the beginning? That should impress Pip Squeak immensely especially when he hasn't shared it," said Twilight.

My face lit up with happiness over this idea, and it was another example of how this whole time travel thing was going to be very useful. We learned their code in the previous cycle, so now we can bypass the test without having to waste time looking for them. I was thinking of paying Adagio a visit despite knowing that I'll have to restore her back to normal by finding the Stray Fairy, but first I'm thinking of putting that code to good use. Upon revealing my plans to Twilight, she agreed and we left the Clock Tower, and for me this was a huge sigh of relief.

I'm back to being a human, so now many things which were inaccessible to me before due to being cursed are now opened. As we made our way back to where that hidden passageway was located, Twilight asked me why not leave town, and head for the first region. My answer was I needed items before truly getting started as I wasn't about to make the same mistake as last time where it took me almost half of my journey to figure out how to master even a simple item like a Deku Nut.

No one was bullying me, or giving me a hard time as in their eyes, I was just like them even though my choice in clothes was probably weird. Anyway, upon reaching the passageway, the Bomber who guarded it ran over as he probably thinks I'm some kind of intruder, but he is going to be surprised when I tell him what I know.

" Ummmm, you can't pass through here unless you say the secret code."

" Why is that?" I asked.

" Only members of the Bombers are allowed past this point, so unless you speak to Jim and take on his test, I can't allow you to continue on."

" 52143," I said.

" What!?!? That's our secret code alright, but how did you come upon it? Well, since you did say it to me, it must mean you're a member, but I don't ever recall seeing Jim making you one of us. In any case, you can go through the secret passageway, yet I still don't quite understand how a complete stranger would know something like that." Even though I felt upset over tricking this kid because of prior knowledge, I walked into the passageway where I immediately decided to turn back. That's because while walking over this way, Twilight suggested that we just leave as soon as we enter as we don't need to speak with Dr. Hooves or anything. As soon as I stepped back outside again, the pathway was being blocked by Pip Squeak who had quite the serious concern on his face.

" Who are you? I don't recall seeing anyone like you around here before," said Pip Squeak.

" I'm not from around here," I said.

" Well, whoever you are, I've got to admit that I'm really impressed. You managed to figure out a code that only we know! Now that's something! I like you! Someone who is pretty clever would make for an excellent Bomber, so what do you say about joining us?" asked Pip Squeak.

" Do you only allow humans to join?" I asked.

" Until very recently, anyone was allowed to join no matter if you were human or not provided that you could pass my test. Then one day, a Skull Kid came along, and was able to pass the test quickly becoming a member in the process. At first she was pretty good at carrying out our mission, but when she started wearing that weird mask, things just got out of hand. That Skull Kid started to break our rules without a care in the world, and she has been playing all sorts of pranks on everyone because she thought it would be funny to see them miserable. I feel it's my fault for allowing her to join, so I decided to change our membership policy," replied Pip Squeak.

" Even Deku Scrubs?" I asked.

" They come from the swamp to the south along with the Skull Kid, so me and my friends just lumped them all in together," replied Pip Squeak. Even though I already knew about this from the previous three day cycle, I wanted to hear things from Pip Squeak's perspective. Starlight Glimmer earned their respect by proving herself worthy to become a member of their group, but wearing Majora's Mask has changed her which isn't surprising given I've first-hand experience because of what she said on top of the Clock Tower. " As I said, you'd make for an excellent member, so what do you say?"

" I'll join as I'd like to help out those who need it in the name of friendship," I replied.

" Friendship huh? Well, if that's how you wish to handle things, then go ahead and stick with that principle. Now, even though I don't know why Tatl is with you instead of the Skull Kid, I need her to tell that troublemaker the next time she sees her that she's outta here! She's been actin' like a real jerk lately! Hmmmm? Is that one of our Notebooks you're holding in your hand? One of my guys recently lost his, and said that a woman carrying a large bag picked it up before going inside the Clock Tower. I guess you were able to get the book back, so why don't you keep it as a sign of my friendship," said Pip Squeak

" Thank you," I said.

" I don't suppose you're aware of our rules?" asked Pip Squeak.

" Not really," I replied.

" Figured as much, but then we keep those really close to our chests because they form the heart and soul of what we do. The code can easily be changed as it's just a bunch of rules that are easy enough to remember, but form the back-bone of our group. Okay! Here are the rules by which we Bombers strictly follow, and I'll go into as much depth as necessary. I suspect Tatl probably told you some things given how she was with the Skull Kid when we let her in, but I'll explain things anyway. 1. Find troubled people and add their names and pictures.

Originally, only 20 people could be added, but we made some adjustments, so now you can add many more. By adding names and pictures, you'll never forget what they look like. 2. Promise to help them. Mark promises with Promise Stickers. Don't be late fulfilling your promises! Everyone has a schedule that they follow, and apart from extremely rare cases, they'll never stray away no matter what. You can even have Tatl give you a reminder of needing to meet someone in case you're so busy, you end up forgetting what you're supposed to do," said Pip Squeak.

" It sounds simple enough," I said.

" Once you start adding people to the notebook, and solve their problems, it becomes second nature," said Pip Squeak.

" Are all those who need help live in town?" I asked.

" Most will be located around here given how busy this place is, yet there are those living outside town who need help as well. You don't need to help out every last person in Termina as that's quite the undertaking for just one person, but try to help as many as you can. 3. Whenever you solve someone's problem, it makes you happy, so a Happy Sticker will be added to your book. People whose problems you solve will give you a reward, but mainly help them for the pleasure of doing good.

The reward at the end is just an added bonus which could prove to be useful. Finally, the last rule... 4. No removing stickers! Use Promise Stickers to keep track of people until everyone is happy. Again, try to help as many people as you can, for on your own it may be too difficult, but if you do manage to complete the Notebook, you'll go down as being the greatest helper to those in need in Terminan history," replied Pip Squeak.

" Guess I should get started then," I said.

" You don't need to solve many problems at once, so why not tackle one or two at a time instead? That should prevent any kind of stress from afflicting you. Now that you know what is expected of being a Bomber, I'll head back to my training up in North Clock Town, so if you need to find me, I'll be over there. Don't forget the rules!" said Pip Squeak. He turned around, and ran off towards the north part of town leaving me to ponder what I should do next.

There are all sorts of people around town who need help, and while I intend on helping out as often as possible, I do need to figure out where to go. I know leaving town is a must because staying here forever isn't going to work, so when Twilight suggested that we pay a visit to Adagio again for some more guidance, my suggestion was to try Pinkie Pie.

" Pinkie only knows of the local gossip," said Twilight.

" Yes, but she isn't cryptic with her explanations as opposed to Adagio," I said.

" Adagio can't help doing that as she's the Great Fairy, and is known for not wanting to reveal the exact truth. In her mind, she wants those who visits her to figure out the meaning behind her words rather than just give it away," said Twilight.

" How about we visit both?" I asked.

" Why not as I don't think Adagio would know much about anything outside Clock Town," replied Twilight.

" One of her other selves will probably help us there," I said.

" What!?!? There is more than one Adagio Dazzle in Termina?" asked Twilight.

" In Hyrule, I had to deal with six versions of her with each one possessing a different power. I'm going to take a guess and say that I've got to deal with at least four more versions of Adagio alongside the one we need to help again," I replied. Knowing what I needed to do next, I began making my way over to the Fairy Fountain, yet Twilight flew out before me demanding to know why there were multiple Adagios, and my response was this is just how it ended up happening in Termina.

She then shook her head feverishly because she refused such an answer, but then I said to her that things were going to get really weird when we see the other alternate versions of our friends and enemies. That's right... our enemies which is what Adagio was in the human world along with Aria and Sonata, yet here they are friends.

" Does it means friends could be enemies?" asked Twilight.

" That is a strong possibility, so we need to treat everyone as though we don't really know them," I replied.

" No wonder you had to endure an awful lot," said Twilight.

" I got adjusted over time although I do slip up on occasion," I said. When I got to the fountain, I noticed Pinkie Pie floating up and down in the air via her balloon, and it saddened me to think that my conversations with her from before now never happened. If it were possible for me to do, I'd allow her and my other friends to remember what happened instead of them forgetting everything.

" We can talk to her after we're done with Adagio," said Twilight.

" I know, but I wonder what her reaction would be when she discovers that we have the map we purchased from her before," I said.

" Huh? You still have that?" asked Twilight.

" It's right here in my pocket," I replied as I took out the Clock Town map. Despite having walked all over this town a couple of times because of doing all of those errands just to reach the Clock Tower, I'm still having trouble remembering where everything is.

" You having that map has just proven another theory," began Twilight.

" Which is?" I asked.

" It seems key items come back with us whenever you play the Song of Time to go back to the beginning of the first day, but minor items end up becoming lost which does mean backtracking is going to become a thing," replied Twilight. I'm surprised that she didn't figure it out sooner when you consider that I brought the ocarina back, but I suppose she was more inclined towards learning about the Majora's Mask legend, so it was an oversight. Then it dawned on me... backtracking... why did that have to be a thing again? It was bad enough having to backtrack in those temples last time which really got annoying, but this sounded even worse. Just before I began to walk up the path which lead to the fountain, I noticed something out of the corner of my eye prompting me to take a closer look.

" What's that up there?" I asked pointing to something that was nestled within the branches of a leafless tree.

" Let me take a look," replied Twilight. She flew upwards to get a closer look before floating over to the playground area as though she were trying to find some sort of connection between everything, and upon finishing with her inspection, she flew back to me. " It's another one of those Pieces of Heart although how anyone never bothered to take notice of it is beyond me. It looks like you can jump across this playground, and reach it that way."

" What about running up the slide?" I asked.

" That looks really steep, so you may end up sliding back down," replied Twilight.

" Since I need to collect as many of these as possible, I can take some time to collect it provided that I don't make any mistakes," I said.

" You sound like you make mistakes constantly in this kind of setting," said Twilight.

" It happens more often than you think," I said. True to form, my first attempt to reach the Piece of Heart ended in failure as I clearly overshot the tree when I jumped, and the result was me landing face-first into the ground. Then I tried again which resulted in overshooting again where I landed on my rear due to tripping on a branch. After getting back up, and jumping across a third time until reaching the tree, I carefully assessed the situation before jumping which resulted in me landing where I wanted to be which was on the tree where my prize was. I grabbed the Piece of Heart which gave me that warm feeling again, and from there I jumped back down where I landed without any problems although I wish I had done this perfectly the first time.

" How many of those things even exist?" asked Twilight.

" I'm not sure as I didn't pick up all of the ones that were in Hyrule. I think I picked up somewhere between 15-25 pieces back then, but don't quote me on that, so I'm assuming Termina has the same number Hyrule has, or perhaps even more than that which would be surprising," I replied.

" Guess we should be on the lookout, and pick up as many as possible," suggested Twilight.

" Not all of them are scattered about like the two we've found Twilight, for some are in the hands of people who will give them to me as a reward for helping them. Others are obtained by completing some kind of challenge, and that involves paying rupees to play as playing for free doesn't comprehend with anyone. The more I have, the better I'll be able to survive the trials which lies ahead," I said.

" You make it sound like this will be difficult," said Twilight.

" Of course as I've only got a sword, a shield, a mask which allows me to assume the form of a Deku Scrub, and anything else I might find," I said.

" You've got your magic," said Twilight.

" Oh yeah! What Adagio gave me should prove invaluable," I said.

" I meant your Equestrian magic," said Twilight. In all of the excitement as well as worry about having to deal with the impending destruction, I completely forgot about my own magic which is what I used constantly in Hyrule. I've realized that using my magic was a crutch for me as I never learned how to use my other items until I reached a certain point where I had to learn how to fight differently. Does this mean I'll be relying on the same methods like before?

Maybe, as I was comfortable, but this time I think I should rely less on my own natural talent, and go with what is intended... which is the Kokiri Sword. When I explained this to Twilight, she slapped her forehead as she couldn't believe I'd say such a thing, and insisted that I used my magic right there and then.

So I did, and what resulted was really pitiful. My magic came out like a whimpering fireball instead of a blaze, so in my eyes this was the opportunity to rely on other abilities rather than go with the usual. Twilight on the other hand wasn't as accepting of this as I was, and said that we needed to see Adagio immediately so she could figure out why my magic fizzled instead of sizzled. Our fears were confirmed upon entering the Fairy Fountain, for Adagio had been shattered into pieces again just like before. I guess even one such as the Great Fairy isn't immune to the ravages of time.

" Young one! Please hear my plea! I have been broken and shattered to pieces by the masked Skull Kid. Please find the one Stray Fairy lost in town, and bring her to this Fairy Fountain."

" Maybe we should have found the Stray Fairy first before coming here," I whispered to Twilight.

" Since it's still in the same place as before, we can easily bring it back here provided that we don't run into any problems," whispered Twilight. The remaining fairies then began wondering what we were talking about, but I told them it was nothing, and that we'd be right back with their missing friend. When I walked back outside, I immediately headed off towards the Laundry Pool as the Stray Fairy was still located there, yet Twilight's words ended up coming back to haunt us almost immediately. No sooner did we reach our destination by cutting through South Clock Town, I had to stop because two people were around the corner speaking about something.

" What do we do?" I whispered.

" Hide among those flowers over there, and remain perfectly still so that we can listen in on their conversation. I know it sounds weird of me to say something like that, but we could learn some valuable information. As long as they don't spot you Sunset, they'll continue without thinking anything was amiss," whispered Twilight. She didn't mention about them seeing her, but then she was a fairy, and was small enough to not be noticed. Sighing, I slipped into the flowers where I dropped down to my stomach before I began crawling forward to get as close as possible without drawing any attention my way.

" Did you hear?"

" How could I when you haven't told me anything yet!?!?"

" I needed to wait until we were on break before I could say anything. You know how Master Mutoh gets when we start talking while on the job, for she sees it as us slacking off especially when the bridge needs to be finished in three days."

" We've got ten minutes, so tell me what you've heard."

" Master Mutoh sent one of the younger fellas over to Milk Road located to the right of the Southern Swamp, as there was a complaint about a giant boulder appearing out of nowhere, and blocking the entrance to Romani Ranch."

" Who would do such a thing!?!?

" Don't know as no one saw anyone suspicious in the area before the boulder showed up. Because it's blocking the entrance, they aren't able to make any deliveries to the Milk Bar on the east side of town, and you know as well I do how people enjoy going there to drink that Chateau Romani even though it's expensive. Even before this incident, they were having problems with their deliveries because of unusual accidents."

" Accidents?"

" Someone kept attacking the supplies before they can leave Milk Road."

" Whoever is doing that is clearly nothing but a mean little punk who is denying people good milk. No wonder Mrs. Barten is beside herself over all of this, for she needs those deliveries in order to keep customers coming back especially during the Carnival of Time. They've got a bunch of acts lined up to perform there such as the Gorman Troupe, and the Indigo-Go-Gos of the Zoras."

" Without any milk, no one is going to want to stay."

" How long do you think it will take that fella Master Mutoh sent to remove the boulder?"

" It's pretty big, and because only one person is dealing with it, it'll take two days at least before the path opens. Master Mutoh would have sent additional aid for our fella down there, but she needs all the workers she can get to finish constructing the bridge on time."

" Shame we can't just blow it up."

" The Bomb Shop doesn't carry bombs that powerful enough to destroy something that big as far as I'm aware, but I suppose we could use that giant bomb the Gorons use. Then again, they have their own problems to deal with right now, so asking them for assistance would amount to nothing."

" Why is this happening?"

" All of Termina has been affected by all of these weird pranks, yet some have been more violent than others."

" Do you think that kid wearing the weird mask has something to do with all of this?"

" Maybe, but she just's a Skull Kid who comes from the swamp where those Deku live. Anyway, we've got to get back to work as our ten minutes are up! Master Mutoh will chew us out if we aren't working by the time she checks on our progress, so let's get going right away!"

Once the two men had left the area, I got up from my hiding spot where I brushed off the various petals and specks of dirt that clinged onto my tunic.

" What do you think about what we heard?" asked Twilight.

" Starlight Glimmer obviously placed that boulder there blocking the entrance to that ranch those two talked about, but that doesn't really sound like a spiteful thing when you think about it. Instead, it's just an annoying prank designed to deny people a good beverage. Still, it's inconvenient because we can't access that area without a giant bomb which the Gorons have, but we can't pay them a visit as they're busy with problems of their own," I replied.

" Not to mention someone has been destroying that milk," said Twilight.

" Do you suspect Starlight of doing that?" I asked.

" No as that would be beneath her, and she is someone who won't resort to petty acts especially with that mask," replied Twilight.

" There was something one of them said which piqued my interest, and it was the name of a milk brand," I said.

" Chateau Romani," announced Twilight.

" What is it?" I asked.

" I'm not entirely sure what it is even with Tatl's memories, but it sounds like it could be very useful to taste even though it will cost a lot according to what they said. Well, I suppose we could investigate this Milk Road when we finally leave town because you're not a "child" anymore, but we should still seek out Adagio's advice... I can't believe I just said that and with a straight face," replied Twilight.

Upon grabbing the Stray Fairy who was hovering above the water of the Laundry Pool just like before, it repeated the same thing about wanting to be taken back to its fellow fairies, so I did that immediately given there were no other distractions getting in my way. Once I returned to the Fairy Fountain a few minutes later, and returned the fairy, they all merged together to become one, and Adagio once again appeared before us.

" Tatl, and you, kind young one... thank you for returning my broken and shattered body to normal. I am the Great Fairy of Magic. I had no idea that the Skull Kid was deceiving me for the moment I let my guard down, she shattered me into pieces before taking one piece away thus preventing me from being restored. As I am now, all I can offer you is this. Allow me to ease your weariness... I would have granted you the ability to use magic, but it seems you already possess that ability which strikes me as odd, for I do not remember seeing you," said Adagio. In the previous cycle, when I restored her body back from being broken, I gained the ability to use bubbles when as a Deku Scrub due to being unable to use my own magic, but then this reminded me of the elephant in the room which needed to be addressed.

" I was wondering if you knew about other forms of magic?" I asked.

" Magic exists all around us in ways which are still being discovered, but yes I am aware that multiple forms do exist. The different tribes that live in this world are all capable of using their own magical skills that differ from one another, yet some are unique, for they acquire a magic which is rare to most," replied Adagio.

" I suppose you could say I have a rare form of magic," I said.

" And yet it appears that you feel frustrated about this power you possess," said Adagio. I then explained to her what happened when I tried using my own natural magic which ended up failing miserably, and I didn't understand why . At first, she floated about as though she were thinking hard about what she had just heard, and from my perspective, she was taking her time which made me feel like she didn't know. Eventually after much pondering, Adagio turned to face me with a smile on her face.

" I am sensing you come from a different world, so your natural magical power has a unique property. In some worlds, your magic can be used without any restriction, yet in others, it is held back by forces most cannot comprehend. Termina is a world which holds back your magic thus why it is not as effective as normal, so I am afraid that if you were planning on using your magic, it will not work, or it shall but with limited success."

" I guess that means I'll have to use the magic of Termina," I said.

" It is good to see that you have a broad horizon young one," smiled Adagio.

" Where I come from, I used my magic far too often which resulted in me not applying my other skills. So now I can hone those skills instead of having them serve as a crutch while my magic takes centre stage," I said.

" You are a courageous child for wanting to continue despite knowing that your true power does not work, but never neglect your true self, for it is the real you. Kind young one... know that I am not the only Great Fairy who exists in Termina. There are four additional fountains located in each of the regions, but I suspect that the Skull Kid has already made sure that they are not able to help you. Scattered about the four temples of this land are Stray Fairies which is most likely where the masked one placed them all in an effort to prevent you from saving them. Please, somehow find the Stray Fairies and return them to their fountains. Surely, they too will add to your strength," said Adagio.

" Did you say temples?" I asked.

" Each region houses a sacred location known as a temple which are places people have gone to in order to worship the spirits who protect the land, but I am not sure why, but a strong darkness is coming from each one. Of the four, the one located in Woodfall south of Clock Town would be an ideal place to start. As you currently are, going to the other three regions would be far too dangerous, so I suggest beginning your journey in the swamp.

Before you leave, allow me to grant you something good so that the Stray Fairies will not fear you. They will not go near anyone under normal circumstance, but this will give them the solace of knowing that they will be safe," replied Adagio. She then raised her hands above her head, and a bright light flashed which caused a mask to appear before it floated down to me where I took it into my eyes.

The mask had quite an abundance of hair, yet it felt as though it were alive. As for the face... this must be what the Great Fairy really looks like, but then two thoughts popped into my head. Would wearing this mask transform me into the Great Fairy. Second, would it transform me into Adagio specifically?

" Is this similar to what I already have?" I asked.

" The mask you now hold in your hands does not contain a spirit, so wearing it will not cause a transformation," replied Adagio. I breathed a sigh of relief knowing that wasn't the case, but then what kind of mask was this supposed to be? " I sense that you feel confused and disappointed, so allow me to explain what the Great Fairy Mask can do for you. Whenever the hair begins to shimmer, it means a Stray Fairy is close by, and will be drawn to you. If the lost one is trapped within some kind of prison, free them first and they will come over to you as normal. You will know when there are no more fairies in the area when the hair no longer shimmers."

" Is this the only mask like this?" I asked.

" There are others which exist across Termina, but I do not know where they all are. I would suggest to always be on the lookout, for these other masks you come across each possess their own unique abilities that can be helpful depending on the situation. One mask is in the hands of a woman who travels about at night alone, yet her child worries for her safety because of thieves who prowl about. Another can be found by speaking to someone who has much guilt in his heart who resides where you found my missing piece. This is all I know, so you will need to find any additional masks on your own. I would strongly recommend collecting them, for something may happen," replied Adagio.

" I'll be sure to find them," I said.

" Come back and see me whenever you are overcome by weariness, and speak to the one who believes she is of my kind. She has far greater knowledge of the land beyond this town than I do," said Adagio. She then retreated back into her fountain leaving me with a new mask which does sound pretty useful given what it can do. I'm going to need as much help as possible, so rescuing the Stray Fairies is definitely worth my time. Judging from what she said just before departing, each of the Great Fairies really only has knowledge of the area they happen to be located in, so someone who has been around all over the place would be better for getting information.

" That mask is certainly strange looking," commented Twilight.

" I actually thought wearing it would change me into her," I said.

" Not every mask can do that Sunset Shimmer, but I do understand why you thought that way. Anyway, we need to go to Woodfall first which lies to the south, but then we can check out this Milk Road and Romani Ranch once that boulder finally gets destroyed provided those two men were accurate in their description of the ," said Twilight.

" We're going to Woodfall when we reset time again," I announced.

" Why not go now?" asked Twilight.

" I want to get those two masks Adagio mentioned, and maybe some other items before we head to the south. Like I said, I want to get as many items as possible, so that I'm prepared when the time comes. Besides, I want to stop Lightning Dust from robbing that old woman, and yes that is who Adagio was talking about. We'll take care of some business here in Clock Town before seeing what is happening at the ranch, but before we do anything else, I think we need to see Pinkie Pie," I replied. With that, I exited the fountain, and made my way over to Pinkie Pie who was still floating about with her balloon. Hopefully, I've made the right decision here, and am not making a big mistake.

To Be Continued.

Chapter 6: Adventures in and Out of Town

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 1, 2015
Chapter 6: Adventures in and Out of Town.

When I reached Pinkie Pie, she took no notice of me because she was preoccupied with drawing one of her maps, and I found this odd given she noticed me last time when I had the body of a Deku Scrub. Actually having her floating above via her balloon did pose a problem, for I now don't have the means to bring her down. My magic won't work like it did in Hyrule due to Termina's magical properties being different, and finding a stone to throw would be a waste of time even though I do technically have as much as I want.

Turning to Twilight, I asked her what I could do to get Pinkie down here... her response involved pointing at my pockets where I had tucked away the Deku Mask after receiving it upon changing back into a human.

" What will this thing accomplish?" I asked.

" Even though you're human again, you'll still have need of your Deku Scrub form. Such an example of needing it is right here, for you don't have a projectile weapon such as a bow for instance, so using a bubble will have to do as a ranged attack until then. I would have suggested using magic, but that isn't an option because of what Adagio said about Termina restricting you," replied Twilight.

" How about your magic?" I asked.

" You know, I didn't even consider that until you mentioned it just now," replied Twilight. She then floated in front of me, and looked up at the balloon which indicated to me that she intended on popping it herself. Concentrating as hard as she could, Twilight attempted to fire a magic beam like what we can do back in Equestria, but nothing happened which made her look and feel crest-fallen. It looks like her magic has the same restriction as what has been placed on mine, or maybe it has to do with the fact that she is a fairy here in Termina rather than an alicorn. " Nothing! Nothing happened! That means my magic can't be used either!"

" You should have fairy magic," I began.

" Fairies are capable of that?" asked Twilight.

" When I was going around Hyrule, Spike demonstrated such magic when he wasn't affected by certain conditions compared to myself who was vulnerable. Granted, he couldn't use it against monsters or anything like that, but he could use it to protect himself if necessary. I'm sure you can figure it out Twilight as magic is what you're good at in addition to being a valuable friend," I replied.

" Well, that brings us back to square one which involves you transforming into a Deku Scrub again. When you originally changed, it was through a curse inflicted upon you by Starlight Glimmer which may have been painful, but who knows what will happen upon putting that mask onto your face," said Twilight.

" Now's as good a time as any," I said. Looking at the Deku Mask I held in my hands upon taking it out of my pouch, I began to think about what would happen the moment I put it on. I know I'll assume my previous form even though it won't be under any curse, but how will the transition go? Will it be so painful that I'd never want to try it again, or will there be relatively no pain at all? Good thing I'm doing this now instead of during an intense situation, for I would be freaking out at this exact moment. Closing my eyes and taking several deep breaths, I gripped the mask firmly before putting it onto my face.

For about a few seconds, nothing happened which felt normal, but then I started to perform some kind of choking maneuver even though I had nothing in my throat. This would continue on with me feeling like wanting to rip the mask right off of my face because of how I felt , and when it got to the point where I couldn't take it any longer, I let out a scream before everything flashed in a bright light. When my vision came back to me, I had assumed my Deku Scrub form, but I looked around at a rapid pace hoping no one heard me, and luckily no one had taken any notice of what just happened.

" Are you alright?" asked Twilight.

" Even though it looked and felt like I was in a lot of pain during that transformation, I actually feel pretty good," I replied.

" Unlike before where you were stuck like that, you can change back just by taking the mask off," said Twilight.

" I'll do that in a moment as right now I need to pop a balloon using my bubbles," I said. Aiming at Pinkie's balloon carefully, I formed a bubble in my mouth and fired it at the balloon causing it to pop. Pinkie then yelled before dropping down to the ground where she buckled her knees upon the landing, and once again she was completely fine which still didn't make sense as someone falling from that kind of height would get hurt.

" Now all you need to do is grab at your face, and the mask will come right off thus changing you back. Oh, and I wouldn't worry about changing back and forth in front of people as they won't remember any of it when you reset time," said Twilight. That was actually a major concern which had formed into my mind, but then it disappeared upon Twilight mentioning it. I grabbed my Deku Scrub face, and pulled the mask off which took some doing, but after another flash of light, I was back to my human form once again. " Expect to do this transition quite often because you'll need to rely on your other form."

" I'll get used to it eventually, but right now I'll probably complain about the feeling I get when putting it on," I said.

" Be glad you don't have to worry about that happening when you try any other mask you might get, and that includes the one Adagio gave you. Speaking of masks, I was thinking we could on occasion pay a visit to Sonata, and ask her about the history or significance of the masks in your possession. If anyone would know about how they work, it will be her no doubt," said Twilight.

That made sense to me, but what Twilight didn't realize was that Sonata expects me to bring her Majora's Mask whenever I go into the lower portion of the Clock Tower. Sure she might explain about other masks, yet she will constantly make me feel guilty over not fulfilling my end of the deal. Despite being a good person here in Termina, Sonata still had some of her evil intent from Equestria. Sighing, I walked over to Pinkie Pie who finally took notice of me.

" What's this? Green clothes? White fairy? Madam... are you by chance, a forest fairy?" asked Pinkie Pie.

" You already..." I began before remembering that I reset time, so she doesn't know who I am even though I did buy a map from her. I'll need to act like I've never seen her before even though this opening statement is probably going to get real annoying over time. " Yes, you might say that, but that isn't really important Pinkie Pie, for I need to speak with you about information which I know you have." Did I just call her Pinkie Pie instead of the name she is known as in Termina? In my mind, I had just made a massive blunder which could cause me to get into even more trouble.

" Huh? Pinkie Pie? Now that's a funny name, yet it reminds me of my friend, Pinkle, who lives somewhere in Termina. I haven't seen her for a really, really long time, so when I've got a free moment, I'll pay her a visit. Now then, I am Tingle madam, and I believe I'm the same as you... a forest fairy, but alas no fairy has come to me yet. My father tells me to act my age because of being 35 years old, but why consign myself to such misery? My father's words won't affect my resolve! I tell you, Tingle is the very re-incarnation of a fairy," said Pinkie Pie.

" And you sell maps to help him out," I said.

" Whoa! You must be a psychic if you knew that is what Tingle sells to earn herself some rupees," said Pinkie Pie.

" It was a lucky guess," I said sheepishly. In my mind, I made another blunder as that's something she told me before, so upon resetting time, she isn't aware of telling me this which means I told her something I'm not supposed to know. Already this whole time paradox bit was going to be a problem for me, and I'm off to a roaring start, but it looks as though Pinkie wasn't bothered by it.

" I'm assuming then that you aren't interested in one of my maps which does make me feel somewhat disappointed, but I can help you with information seeing as I've seen my share of things around Clock Town and beyond," said Pinkie Pie.

" What do you know about masks?" I asked.

" Masks? That's an unusual question, but then Mrs. Fairy, you are an unusual person. Masks... masks... yes, I have been hearing about certain people in Clock Town who have some, but then why would people their ages have masks unless it was for the Carnival of Time celebration which happens in three days from now. Do you know Mayor Dotour who is in charge of this town? Whether you do or not isn't a big deal, but her husband Monsieur Aroma has been in a real panic as of late.

Their son Kafei vanished about a month ago for reasons unknown, but the real tragedy is that he was supposed to get married, and the family of the bride claim that he abandoned his obligations due to being cowardly which may or may not be accurate," replied Pinkie Pie.

" What does this have to do with Monsieur Aroma?" I asked.

" He's looking for someone, anyone with experience to find his son, and is willing to give them a special mask to help in the investigation. So far, no one has offered to help as a lot of people do suspect that Kafei is nothing but a scoundrel for running away. The only one willing to give him any kind of defence is his fiancé, Anju, but then she is being pressured to forget all about him, and find someone else," replied Pinkie Pie. The mask that can be obtained from Monsieur Aroma does sound promising, and finding a missing person would be the right thing to do. Despite this being a redo of the three day cycle, it's like everything is brand new as this is information I didn't know the first time through.

" Does anyone else know about Kafei who would be willing to talk about him?" I asked.

" There is the man from the Curiosity Shop, for he is an old friend of Kafei's, but he can be difficult to deal because of the shady business he deals with," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Curiosity Shop?" I asked with a confused expression on my face.

" It's located in West Clock Town, but it only opens from 10pm at night until 6am the following morning, and that's due to how shady the place is. They say the man who runs the place acquires items that you can't find anywhere else, yet much of the time it's stolen goods brought in by thieves. They have a tendency to go there to sell him something in exchange for rupees, and it's all under the table because they can't sell at normal shops otherwise the town soldiers will be after them," replied Pinkie Pie.

So thieves use this shop to sell stolen goods, so does that mean Lightning Dust goes there as well? I need to ask the right question otherwise Pinkie may think of me as being suspicious, but maybe I can find a mask at this Curiosity Shop as those do qualify as rare items.

" Do you know of a prancing thief?" I asked.

" I've seen her hanging out around here a few times, and she is a regular at the Curiosity Shop. I don't know her name as she often comes around here during the night, so your best bet would be to speak to the owner. Oh yeah! Apparently, he has a thing when it comes to anyone who isn't human, so the other tribes never go there. I know this next bit is going to sound a little sinister, but if you have something you don't need, and wish to earn a lot of money, the guy will buy it from you at pretty good prices," replied Pinkie Pie.

" What does he sell?" I asked.

" Most of what can be bought from him are stolen, but there was a weird looking mask among his collection. He hasn't sold it yet, for other items keep coming in which has him focus on those, but if he were to not get any goods within the next couple of nights, he's bound to sell the mask. I heard the price is just outrageous, but if you're the kind of person who has an interest in masks, you'll pay the amount asked without any questions," replied Pinkie Pie.

Something told me that it's going to take more than 99 rupees which is my current rupee limit to get it, so I'll need to deposit rupees into the bank whenever I get a free moment. Adagio said Pinkie has more knowledge of the world outside of Clock Town than she does, so perhaps I should inquire about both Woodfall and Milk Road.

" What do you know of Woodfall?" I asked.

" Huh? The swamp where the Deku Tribe live? I know quite a bit about that area, but I'd rather talk about it when I'm there otherwise I just can't get in the mood. The same goes for pretty much any area in Termina, so if you want more information Mrs. Fairy, you'll need to speak to me in that particular area. I may not look like it based on my appearance, but I can get around relatively quickly when I use my balloon," replied Pinkie Pie.

" How can you get to those other places when you're standing right here?" I asked.

" Trade secret," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Seriously?" I asked.

" I've got some things I'd rather not share with anyone," replied Pinkie Pie. My response to this was slapping myself in the forehead, for I should have known Pinkie would say something to that effect. She is just being Pinkie Pie after all although it'd be nice if she could tell me about Woodfall and Milk Road as I'm going to check those places out once my errands here in town are over. " Well, that's all the information I have Mrs. Fairy, so hopefully we'll meet up later. Call again! Tingle, Tingle, Kooloo-Limpah! These are the magic words that Tingle created herself. Don't steal them!"

With that, she inflated her balloon, and took to the air again leaving me feeling frustrated over not being told everything. I mean, how can she not talk about an area unless she happens to be there? Who does that? In any case, I did learn some valuable information, so all I have to do is wait here until nightfall, and prevent Lightning Dust from robbing the old lady.

" Well that was awkward," commented Twilight.

" How do you put up with that?" I asked.

" Sometimes, I have to question her sense of ethics, but she is a really good friend. We have some time to kill now until that robbery happens tonight as I know you don't want to leave town until you stop Lightning Dust," replied Twilight.

" Actually, I want to test a theory," I began.

" Regarding?" asked Twilight.

" Even though I never walked towards one of those soldiers as a Deku Scrub during the last cycle which would have caused them to turn me back, I was thinking that I should talk to the one over there, and see what his reaction will be," I replied.

" They are very persistent about children leaving town without being accompanied by an adult, but that guy might be willing to listen if you prove to him that you can take care of yourself outside where all those monsters are," said Twilight. Acting with confidence, I walked towards the soldier who immediately thrust his lance out at me which indicated he had no intention of letting me by, so this is where my theory was about to be proven.

" Stop right there! Have you an errand in the mountains?" Maybe I should have talked to the one standing guard at the southern entrance, as I don't really need to pay a visit to the mountains until I've gotten stronger and more items according to Adagio. Thinking quickly, I nodded my approval hoping he would be convinced of my intentions, but his spear was still pointing at me which meant he didn't believe me. " It is dangerous outside the town walls, so I cannot allow a child like you to... a sword?" He then took notice of my Kokiri Sword located in its scabbard on my back, so I quickly took it out and placed it in front of him.

" This is my sword which I use to defend myself," I said.

" My apologies, madam. It was wrong of me to treat you like a child. Anyone with a sword and shield can easily hold their own against the creatures which have been festering about Termina Field these past few days, but I recommend against travelling to the mountains."

" How come?" I asked.

" Snowhead is known for its winter weather which can make it difficult especially for those who aren't used to the conditions, but lately the weather there has gotten so bad that it's become a natural disaster. The Gorons are having problems up there as all of that cold is too much for them, but even if we could send some supplies up there, the pathway to the mountains has been blocked off by an unusual ice formation."

" Unusual?" I asked.

" Rumours say that someone wearing a mask erected the ice which blocks the way, but I can't say for certain if it's true or not." It sounds like Starlight Glimmer has been causing problems all across Termina aside from Clock Town, and I was hoping that wouldn't be the case. This is why I needed Pinkie Pie to tell me about these other areas, for I would have made my way south without knowing what I had to go through on my way to a temple.

" If you still insist on going, the mountains of Snowhead lie this way. Be careful." The soldier then moved aside before raising his spear which meant I could now leave town whenever I want, so I picked up my sword, placed it back into its sheath, and then I turned to face him as I wanted to ask him a couple of questions about Termina Field as he called it.

" Do you know of any unusual occurrences or the like out there?"

" Well, I have been hearing some kind of strange music coming from near this entrance, yet it only happens at night which strikes me as odd. The ironic thing is that the same music can be heard in West Clock Town when the Rosa Sisters go over there to practice as they've done for the last few days since their troupe arrived. In case you don't know who they are, the Gorman Troupe are a group of performers who entertain people with their various acts.

There are the Rosa Sisters, professional dancers, but they appear to be having some trouble coming up with something that is sure to wow the crowd. Guru-Guru is a musician who has an unusual looking accordion, but rumours say he is having trouble practicing due to the noise. Then there are the jugglers who can juggle in many different formations, yet they refuse to share with names with anyone as they prefer to remain anonymous.

Finally, there is Gorman himself, their leader who essentially handled the business side of things, and also owns the troupe given why it's named after him. They are staying at the Stock Pot Inn until the Carnival of Time has finished, so if you want to get yourself an autograph, do it now before they leave for their next show."

That certainly was quite a mouthful the soldier said to me, and while much of it didn't really spark my interest, what he said about the strange music coming from outside is something I wanted to check out. Of course, I already had plenty of things to do what with preventing a robbery, and going to the Laundry Pool where someone wishes to confess a hidden secret they've been holding back. So, investigating the strange music will have to happen after I've gotten my hands on a mask.

" Are you thinking of looking into that?" asked Twilight.

" The music?" I asked.

" Yes," replied Twilight.

" It seems you've been rubbing off on me Twilight as I'm curious as to what we will discover," I said.

" Termina certainly does have a lot of mysteries surrounding it, and while it does mean throwing ourselves into constant danger, I'm all up for wanting to discover as many different secrets as possible. By the way, before you leave town after taking care of business, you should speak to the soldier guarding the southern entrance. He might have some information that we couldn't get from Pinkie Pie. We've nothing to do now, so we might as well get some sleep until we need to stop Lightning Dust. Given how you can reset time whenever you want, sleeping isn't a bad thing so long as you don't miss anything important," said Twilight.

I was thinking maybe of making a note in the notebook given to me by Pip Squeak, and Twilight agreed as that would keep it fresh in my mind. She even insisted on ringing out using her fairy magic as an alarm, and while I had to question such an ability, she insisted on it given how we're both heavy sleepers. There was a spot in the corner of the area which looked ideal for sleeping, so I walked over there, and sat down before closing my eyes, and Twilight settled down on my hat.

Since I had my sword on hand, I doubt anyone was going to try and take advantage of me sleeping, so I drifted off into my subconscious where I had that dream again. The flames were still surrounding me, yet it didn't approach as though it knew that I now had the means to stave off the impending destruction. I was actually expecting Ganondorf to make an appearance, and sure enough, his silhouette appeared in the flames. His glowing eyes were truly intimidating at firs, but I've got to prevent myself from succumbing otherwise he'll have complete power over me.

" So, you have figured out the secret of manipulating time to your whim," said Ganondorf.

" At first it looked as though things would become a disaster, but then a memory of the true hero appeared in my head," I said.

" Yes... the Hero of Time. He was the first one who bested me in battle causing me to be banished to the Sacred Realm in that respective timeline, and you repeated this same process. Of course, his life was ended by my hands in another timeline, so his success against me was nulled by this branch within time itself. Know this child! When the hero left to find someone dear to him, and pulled into this world by fate, he was separated from the elements which made him what he was. The Triforce of Courage... it became lost to him," said Ganondorf.

" And since I'm portraying him, the same thing has applied to me," I said.

" If you truly think this, then you are more of a fool than I suspected originally. Because of my will, you still possess the Triforce of Courage in this time, so therefore you are still bound to both Zelda and my younger self who even now awaits his execution which was botched due to an unforeseen coincidence," said Ganondorf. I thought he was bluffing as a means of making me more nervous than I already am given what this dream meant, but when I looked at the back of my hand, the Mark of the Triforce appeared which meant he was telling the truth.

My heart sank knowing this unfortunate reality was true instead of false, yet it also showed that Ganondorf was able to manipulate time just like I could... except to him, this was something he had been doing for centuries. " You are not the only one who can manipulate the flow of time child, for how else do you suppose we are having this encounter? There is much you do not yet understand, but perhaps this will become apparent to you. Still, upon thinking back to this era, I underestimated Zelda, for she gave you the means to delay the inevitable."

" She is wise beyond her years," I said.

" And also naïve for she knows little about the grand scope which exists," said Ganondorf.

" What do you want?" I asked.

" My aim is not to distract you from your pitiful obligations, but to tell you that your efforts will bore no fruit. Just because you are delaying the destruction that is to come does not mean that it can be overcome! My words confuse you, yet it will become clear once everything has been put into place. Become stronger child... go beyond the boundaries which contained you in Hyrule, and surpass any and all obstacles that stand in your way.

Do not assume that I want you to succeed overall, for that is not the case, as I desire you to suffer much. I want to make certain that you live up to my expectations, and it will involve fighting me at a time which will be decided by me," replied Ganondorf.

" And if my strength doesn't satisfy?" I asked.

" Then you shall die! It is by my will, and mine alone that you still live, for I would have killed you when we faced off last time before I sent you back to where you truly came from... or perhaps at an earlier opportunity? I could end the miserable existence that is your life on the very day where you were born, and were nothing more than a mewling little child who cried out for attention. Such is my power, so you would do well not to betray my expectations," replied Ganondorf.

" Gasp! Twilight!" I exclaimed.

" She, and the rest of those from both of your worlds cannot escape my power, for I could kill them in the exact same manner. Even those who serve as the guiding light and darkness of your true home would succumb in the same way. Time holds no bounds to me as there is nothing that can deny me what I truly desire, and you would do well to remember this harsh lesson. There is no need for me to remain here within your subconscious any longer, for already your spirit has been crushed by the harsh reality I have now passed onto you.

Your worlds can be conquered with ease as both lack the means to repel one who is pure power! Remember... do not betray my expectations otherwise your life as well as theirs will become forfeit. Yes, I am tying their future with your success, so this will give you an even greater incentive to improve. Fail, and they shall forever condemn one such as you for eternity," said Ganondorf. He then folded his arms before beginning to laugh, and then he disappeared into the flames which caused me to wake up with a scream once again along with the sweat dripping down my face.

I couldn't believe that he would do something like that! He had no right to place the lives of everyone I know upon my shoulders, but then he does have the power to do so given how he is able to perform all kinds of things with just a mere thought. Twilight was accidentally awoken, and flung into the wall when I woke up, and her groggy complexion was nothing compared with how irritated she was about being woken up. That's when she began to ring indicating that it was time to prevent the robbery from taking place, but that's the least of my worries given what just happened.

Night of the First Day - 60 Hours Remain.

" I hope you have a pretty good reason for waking me up like that," moaned Twilight.

" Yes, but I'm not sure how you'll take it," I said.

" Try me," moaned Twilight. I then explained to her that Ganondorf appeared in my dream again where he proceeded to reveal that I still possessed the Triforce of Courage, and that everyone I knew from the human world and Equestria were in danger. He would kill all of them without hesitation, and conquer both worlds should I not live up to the expectations he has of me. I even told her about he could kill me at any time... quite literally as he could go back through time's flow, and kill me on the day of my birth.

I assume this is also true for everyone else, and not even Princess Celestia and Princess Luna can oppose him. Upon finishing, Twilight felt concerned about everyone, and wished something could be done to change things back to the way they were.

" That will take a long time knowing what happened before," I sighed.

" He sounds just like Tirek only much more sadistic," said Twilight.

" That's who portrayed Ganondorf," I said.

" Seriously?" asked Twilight.

" We just have to get through this as fast as possible otherwise everyone will suffer because of us, or rather I should say me as I'm the one Ganondorf wants to see improve as a means of pleasing his ego," I replied. Getting back to the matter at hand, I jumped to my feet and began looking for where I found Lightning Dust before, and sure enough she was waiting behind that playground apparatus. I walked over to her in the hopes of making some kind of conversation, and hopefully distract her until the old lady makes her way through here.

" You're quite an unusual kid considering you're wearing green clothes," said Lightning Dust.

" I would have worn something else, but it's okay as I've grown fond of this tunic," I said. Even though I could stop her right here and now, she hasn't done anything wrong yet, and falsely accusing her could land me in a lot of trouble. Besides, I have an opportunity to inquire about the Curiosity Shop as Lightning Dust is a regular customer according to what Pinkie Pie said.

" In case you're wondering, I'm just hanging out here by myself not doing anything," said Lightning Dust.

" It must feel lonely doesn't it?" I asked

" At times that's true, but in my line of work, you can't afford to build any friendships as you never know who is going to stab you in the back next. By the way, that's a very nice looking sword you have there. I know this sounds rude of me considering we've only just met, but would it be okay if I look at it? Just for a second? I'm not going to break it or anything as a blade of that calibur deserves far better," replied Lightning Dust.

" Actually, I'm really attached to it because I borrowed it a long time ago, and didn't give it back when I was finished," I said.

" That's okay then. I wasn't implying anything mind you, but I really did want to have a good look at it. Anyway, why is a kid out here in the middle of the night? I thought someone like you would still be asleep, yet here you are talking to me," said Lightning Dust. Oh I was going to let her see my sword soon enough, but I just need to wait until the old lady arrives which should happen shortly according to her as she said it was the middle of the night.

" You know kid... if you really wanted to, you could sell that sword, and get a lot of rupees for it in return. There's a shop on the west side of town whose owner buys anything no matter where it originated from. Then again, going there may not be all that beneficial given how the guy cheats you of a good payout."

" You know of this place?" I asked.

" I'm a regular there because of my choice in profession, but the guy is greedy and cruel to no end. He always gouges when it comes to selling him things, and he does the same thing when it comes to selling what he has. Of course, no other shop in town does his kind of business, so you have to just accept the fact he will cheat you. Sometimes I wonder why I continue going there when clearly I should take my business elsewhere, or just retire from my line of work, and live out my life in comfort. Despite being a kid, you're someone he would want to deal with," replied Lightning Dust.

" I'm hoping he sells a certain item," I said.

" What is it?" asked Lightning Dust.

" A mask," I replied.

" You want to purchase that weird thing!?!? I've been a regular of his for quite some time, and not even I would buy that. Since you've laid claim to it, and are actually the only person who has shown interest in it, you can have it if you think it will make you feel better. Of course, it depends on if it will be available. After tonight, he should be getting in something that is normally sold at the Bomb Shop, so the mask won't be available as he will be focused on selling the other item," replied Lightning Dust.

Now it's all starting to make sense... if Lightning Dust succeeds in robbing that old lad, the Curiosity Shop will have a Bomb Bag on sale, and not the mask which I need. She must be stopped otherwise I'll lose out on not only one mask, but a potential second as Adagio did say the old lady has one.

" Well, thanks for the information," I said.

" Hopefully, you'll sell that sword for good money," said Lightning Dust. As I walked away from her, I turned around to see if she was still paying attention to me, and she wasn't which means I can prepare to stop her. Since I wasn't in the area when the robbery originally occurred, this will be a blind attempt for who knows when she will make her move, and her fast speed could pose a problem.

Waiting near where Pinkie was floating who seemed oblivious to everything, I sat down and pretended that I was falling back asleep so as to not let Lightning Dust know of my intentions. After a few minutes of just sitting there, the old lady appeared from the entrance gate where she began walking towards the path which lead south. I then turned my attention towards my would-be-thief, and discovered she was already making her way over. Her manner of walking looked so weird, but then this masked her motives as anyone would view her as harmless. Waiting carefully for the moment to occur, Lightning Dust bumped into the old lady without a care in the world.

" Ouch! Hey! Watch where you're going."

" My apologies," said Lightning Dust.

" Well don't make a habit of it in the future."

" Believe me... after this, you won't be seeing me again," said Lightning Dust.

" Make sense you strange woman... huh? What the!?!? Stop! Thief!!! Give the old lady her luggage back!!!" That was my cue to get up, and stop this robbery as I can't allow this to happen. Lightning Dust began prancing about while holding a bag which must belong to her victim, so I darted out in front of her before drawing my sword and shield which certainly took her by surprise.

" What are you doing kid?" asked Lightning Dust.

" Take a wild guess," I replied.

" And here I thought you were on the level, but it turns out that you're one of those do-gooder types who stop people like me from doing what they do best. A shame really for you could have become something better," said Lightning Dust.

" Been there, done that," I said. As I held my sword close to her face, she did step back a few paces which had me suspect she was going to surrender, yet I was distracted by what she said. I'll never go back to the way I used to be, as the old me no longer exists aside from Sunset Demon, but hopefully that doesn't become an issue.

As my mind was thinking about her words, Lightning Dust suddenly began running in an attempt to get out of town taking her stolen goods with her. I was thinking of attacking her, but I could never do that to a living person, so I decided to come up with another tactic which should work. I immediately began to run in an attempt to keep up, and she proved to be rather fast even though she was prancing about a few moments ago.

" You have no chance catching up with me kid, for I'm much too fast," laughed Lightning Dust.

" I'm willing to bet that bag is quite heavy," I said.

" Yeah, so what of it?" asked Lightning Dust. She quickly answered her own question as I caught up with her before swinging my sword, and hoping that I don't fling it across the area like in the past. I connected with the bag causing her to drop it, and she began cursing which made it hard to understand what she was saying. " Ack! Why? Why are you doing this to me? If you hadn't interfered with my plans, I could have made some sweet money selling the contents of that bag. You wretched brat! I'll be sure to remember this, so watch your back as I'll be there to get my revenge."

She then ran past the soldier standing guard who did nothing to stop her, and while that made me feel annoyed, the important thing was that the robbery had been prevented this time. It felt good doing something like this, and I showed restraint as I could have seriously hurt her had my sword not connected correctly. I walked over to where the bag had fallen during the scuffle where I picked it up before handing it over to the old lady, and the expression she was giving me made my heart feel good.

" You saved my life, and stopped that thief from stealing my bag."

" It was the least I could do," I said.

" My son always warns me about coming this way especially at night, for thieves enjoy lurking about in North Clock Town. I believe whenever we have need to bring a delivery to the Bomb Shop, I'll either have him take care of it, or I'll travel during the day where it's much safer. I run the Bomb Shop located in the western part of town, and thanks to your efforts young lady, we can finally sell the Big Bomb Bag which has been a dream of ours for some time."

" Any chance I could buy one?" I asked.

" Well, you don't have a regular Bomb Bag on your person, so I wouldn't be able to sell you the bigger one unless you buy the first one. Maybe I'll put 'em out tomorrow seeing as you prevented me from being robbed. You really helped me out, so thank you for aiding an old lady in her time of need. For that, I shall reward you, and I won't take no for an answer. Yes, I must thank you. It's a dangerous mask, but maybe you could use it to throw your own festival fireworks show." The old lady then reached into her bag where she took out an unusual looking object which had a skull on the front of it, and then she placed it into my hands where I felt confused.

" What is this?" I asked.

" It's known as the Blast Mask! It is quite literally a bomb that you wear, and when you use its special powers, the mask will explode which can be useful if you need to destroy any kind of obstacle that's gotten in your way. However, there is a price that must be paid... life energy. Unless you're willing to accept the mask causing bodily harm upon you every time you use it, I suggest that it be saved for special occasions where you have no alternative. Well, thanks for helping me... take care..." With that, she slowly walked away towards the Bomb Shop, yet the confused look on my face was pretty evident. I looked at the mask which she had placed into my hands, and I didn't really know what to think of it other than it would be too dangerous to use because I'll get hurt.

" Wow... that's certainly a strange reward," said Twilight.

" The thought of blowing myself up using this mask freaks me out, but I suppose it can work in a pinch especially when I don't have any bombs," I said.

" Wait! You can use bombs?" asked Twilight.

" I know they are dangerous, and in both Equestria and the human world, they are used only by professionals who work in the demolition business, yet I'm allowed to use them without any restrictions provided that I have a bag to put them in. You know, you're going through the exact same reactions I had when I first discovered certain things were possible in this video game, but I still get the reaction on occasion because of not expecting it. Still, I'm not sure if I should use the Blast Mask as I could accidentally kill myself if my health were too low which can happen mind you," I replied.

" You could actually prevent any damage by raising your shield, and then using the mask to blow something up. It will probably affect the radius of the blast, but then you would be unharmed. I'd keep it on you just in case as it could come in handy," said Twilight.

" I suppose you're right, but hopefully I won't be relying too much on it. Well, we've sorted out that problem which netted me a mask as well as doing a good deed, so why don't we head over to the Laundry Pool? Adagio said that someone there has a mask, but desires to talk about something personal to any who would listen," I said. After putting the Blast Mask in one of my many pouches, I began to head south towards the Laundry Pool, and along the way, I had to take out the Bomber's Notebook as it began to start glowing like it were trying to tell me something about my actions in stopping Lightning Dust.

Opening it up, I was shocked to see an entry had appeared representing the old lady, and all of those details Pip Squeak mentioned were here too: the old lady's schedule, the reward I received for helping her, and a ribbon to say that I had solved her problem. If it was going to be this easy, maybe I should try solving every single problem.

Upon reaching the Laundry Pool, I could hear something which sounded like music, but I doubt it was the kind that soldier was talking about. He said the music he heard came from outside while this music was clearly coming from within town. I'm surprised that no one has complained about it being nothing but noise, yet I guess this area doesn't have any kind of population except for any who desire to be left alone with their thoughts.

Twilight suggested that I get my sword and shield ready just in case things were to eventually go wrong, but I insisted otherwise as whoever was playing this music was most likely harmless. Besides, it was a music I recognize from Hyrule, and I'm actually looking forward to seeing Twilight's reaction if the performer is who I think it is. Walking down the pathway before entering the main part of the Laundry Pool, I looked to my left which was where the music was coming from, and it was him which felt nice for consistency purposes.

" What the!?!? Discord!?!?" exclaimed Twilight.

" I was waiting to see that reaction where you freak out over unexpected twists," I laughed.

" Why is he here? Also, his human form looks pretty normal even though you can still see traits of his true self," said Twilight. Playing the accordion was the Master of Chaos who like me, was once a villain but had reformed, yet in his case it was Fluttershy who managed to see him as a true friend while everyone else didn't think of him as such. Twilight had been flying about like she was having a sugar rush, but she eventually calmed down before flying into my face.

" How come you're not as freaked out as I am over seeing the likes of Discord?" I then told her that I met him in Hyrule where he played the exact same instrument as seen here, yet he was the owner of a windmill located in Kakariko Village. He was originally someone who liked having fun with his music, but eventually lost his mind, and became more chaotic in his mannerisms.

While Twilight is well familiar with how Discord operates as a character, the same can't be said about myself as I left before he was freed from his imprisonment after 1,000 years, so all I know about him are various legends Princess Celestia taught me. Twilight was hesitant about me talking to him, for aforementioned reasons, yet I'm expecting him to be more mellow given he's just standing there playing his accordion. I walked up to him where he didn't pay any attention, so I coughed a little which made him turn towards me where he smiled a creepy smile which made Twilight nervous.

" La-la-la... they said I was much too loud when I practiced in my room. They got mad. Sigh... now I'm sad," said Discord.

" Who got mad at you?" I asked.

" Allow me to introduce myself stranger... I am Guru-Guru, musician of the Gorman Troupe. Ever since we arrived in Clock Town a few days ago, I've been trying to practice for our performance during the Carnival of Time, for without my music, my fellow performers won't be in sync with one another. But, they needed peace and quiet because they struggle to come up with something extravagant, so they told me to go away for a while. I came down here to this area where I can play to my hearts content during the night until I desire sleep, yet I believe my efforts may be for naught," replied Discord.

" There's nothing wrong with your music," I said.

" It's not that dear guest, but rather it has to do with the complications which have arisen for not only us, but for the other performers who came here from their respective regions for the carnival. According to Gorman, our leader, it appears they plan on cancelling the carnival because of what you can see above our heads... namely the moon; it has instilled fear in their hearts making them want to take such action. It has angered Gorman so much, he now wallows away in the Milk Bar even as I speak, but he made me promise not to tell the others for such knowledge would break their hearts," said Discord.

" And that's why you're sad?" I asked.

" Yes, so I'll just think about the past to keep my mind off the bad. Ah, yes, I'll do that," replied Discord. He then stopped playing his accordion, and proceeded to look up at the night sky making me wonder what he was thinking. After a few minutes of doing this, he looked at me before sitting down on a bench that was situated behind him, and he beckoned me to join him. " Dear guest... long ago, I was in an animal troupe, with dogs and donkeys and such."

" No offence, but that doesn't sound weird at all," I said sarcastically.

" I know it's weird, but you see they accepted me into their troupe without question," said Discord. He then began to play his accordion again, but at much faster pace while giving off an evil expression on his face which felt uncomfortable. Twilight whispered that we should get out of here as there was no telling when he was going to lose it, but I insisted on sticking around as this story piqued my curiosity.

" Why could a...? Why could a...? Why could a man join?!? That's 'cause a man is an animal, too, my dear! We are all of the same kingdom, so it made sense for me to travel around with animals. Even though they were restricted to their various sounds, I could understand what they were saying."

" It sounds to me like it was quite the experience," I said.

" Oh yes! For a few years, I travelled about with them learning their ways, and appreciating everything they did. Despite me being an outcast given my station in people's eyes, the animals treated me as one of their own. They were all great, but there was one thing I didn't like about it," said Discord.

" What was that?" I asked.

" Why was the...? Why was the...? Why was the dog the leader?!? Was it 'cause something was wrong with me, madam??? Considering I was the highest animal among them because of being a human, it should have been me to lead them. I had the qualities to be an ideal leader, for I could have easily brought them under my control, yet they didn't want me to become their leader as they feared my way of thinking was too radical," replied Discord. Now I'm beginning to understand why Twilight wanted us to go, for Discord can be very irrational whenever he loses his temper, yet what he just said had me thinking about my friend.

She has become a leader of ponies due to being a princess in Equestria, yet she wouldn't instill her philosophies on anyone as means of forcing them to obey her. Twilight is a perfect example of someone who is reluctant about leading anyone, but would if no other choice was available for her.

Discord on the other hand, would be incapable in the role of a leader as his volatile behaviour would become his undoing. As he continued to play his accordion quickly because of having to talk about something in his past he probably didn't want to talk to anyone about, he suddenly smiled and stopped playing like he was completely normal compared from a minute. Guess you could call that a sudden mood swing, but I'll hold my breath on that subject.

" Oh, that dog was an amazing leader! He always had a stellar troupe no matter what animals he had to work with... there was no animal that he could not lead. The others looked up to him with the utmost respect, and in a way I too respected him despite believing that I would be the better leader, but before I left the troupe to pursue my own interests... I did something which I regret even now, and while there are times I wish I could have left under different circumstances, the past cannot be changed."

" And that is?" I asked.

" That's why I... that's why I... that's why I stole it... the dog's mask. I stole it," replied Discord.

" You stole a mask from a dog?" I asked.

" I wanted it because it was the leader's mask... a symbol of his authority as leader of the animal troupe. I felt that without his mask, the dog would no longer feel respected by the others, but who knows if this is still true after all this time. They may still look up to him even though he no longer has it, but I no longer need it... I give it to my guest as thanks for listening to my confession. I feel relieved knowing that I finally told someone about this after keeping my secret to myself for so long," replied Discord. He reached into a pocket where he pulled out a mask in the shape of an eagle's head, and proceeded to give it to me which I took even though I was shocked by what he had done to a dog because of being jealous... I can't blame him though as I felt that way once.

" This is the Bremen Mask... used as a symbol of authority for animals, for they look up to anyone who wears it. Even though my disdain towards the dog caused me to steal his mask to begin with, he was a good instructor. His members matured quickly and they became adults in an instant. If you were to play some kind of instrument in front of some animals, they are bound to follow you around due to the nature of the mask. Thank you for listening to my confession of guilt, so now I can go back to my room without feeling sad about my past actions."

" Glad I could listen," I said. Discord got up from the bench before he bowed before me, and walked away leaving me once again to ponder over what just happened. I get he was ashamed of what he did, but to do so to animals? It's a good thing Fluttershy wasn't here to see this, for she would have given him quite a stern talking to. Looking at this new mask I received, I could sense the power of leadership flowing about it, but where could I go to find animals that could mature from its power? It's not like animals are plentiful here in Termina, or maybe I'm just missing something?

" He hasn't changed," said Twilight.

" In what way?" I asked.

" Discord still has to rely on his chaotic nature whenever he does anything, but I suppose he can't be blamed here seeing as this isn't the version of him I know. Still, you do have to question why he joined an animal troupe despite saying humans are animals. Then again, you're an animal Sunset along with myself given we're both ponies, but would that mean that mask would have some kind of effect on us? I'd rather not find out personally, but then this is your quest, so the decision is ultimately yours," replied Twilight.

" I may be the hero, but you're just as important," I said.

" Yet you have been ignoring some of my suggestions," said Twilight.

" I know because we need to face those kinds of problems head-on, and not run away from them. Besides, as the Princess of Friendship, you're compelled to want to solve problems we run across as that's in your nature. Even when he was freaking out on us because of his irrational behaviour, I wanted to listen to Discord's confession, for he needed someone to hear him out after being silent for a long time, so I gave him a shoulder to cry on," I said.

" Looks like some of my mannerisms are rubbing off on you," laughed Twilight. This prompted me to laugh in response, and for a brief moment it felt like we were back in the human world laughing up a storm because of how close we've become as friends despite starting off on the wrong foot. Once we had finished laughing which took us a while to get it out of our systems, I carefully pocketed the Bremen Mask, and took out Pinkie's map to see what else I could do.

Running my finger along it, I found nothing really stood out for me that I would understand with the knowledge I've learned about Clock Town, so I guess we've got to leave and explore the rest of Termina. Adagio said we need to go to the south where Woodfall is located, so that was my initial plan... until something clicked courtesy of the Bremen Mask.

" Didn't those two guys mention something about a ranch?" I asked.

" The entrance is currently being blocked," replied Twilight.

" A ranch has animals living there, so maybe we can go there to see if this new mask can do something," I suggested.

" You want to go because of that?" asked Twilight.

" Actually, my reason involves seeing if we can find Applejack, for she lives on a farm in both the human world and in Equestria, and a farm is similar to a ranch. If she is there, we could get some insight on what we need to do to prepare ourselves for Woodfall," I replied. That wasn't my best reason given I flubbed through much of that, but Twilight agreed about going to this ranch to see if we can find Applejack.

Plus, I do want to see if I can find an animal that would show interest in the Bremen Mask, but before we leave town, I figured on asking the soldier at the gate if he had any information about Milk Road, and Woodfall given the other solider had knowledge of Snowhead. One thing can be certain about these guys... they know how to stay on patrol as I don't think any of them take a rest for even a moment.

" Heading to the swamp at this time of night?" The soldier asked me this question the moment I walked into his range.

" I figured on going there to see if I can find some adventure," I replied.

" The heroic type are we? Well, the swamp has seen better days what with the poison that suddenly began seeping forth into the water near the Deku Palace. People have been saying that going there is dangerous as who knows when the poison will spread until it covers every last inch of water, but then those Dekus are suffering more than anyone else living in the region."

" The Deku Tribe live in the swamp?" I asked.

" Despite being untrustworthy given how they've backstabbed every other tribe on multiple occasions, they don't deserve to be living among something as horrible as poison, for they need that water to survive. Unfortunately, no one knows much else about what's happening there as the Deku Tribe are very reclusive, so unless you could somehow become one of their own, you have no chance of seeing them under any circumstances."

" They sound paranoid," I said

" You could say that, but then most people leave them alone because of what history has taught us. The road to the swamp is dangerous during the night, so be careful of the undead monsters which lurk about out there, but you appear capable given you've got a sword and shield on hand." He gave me a salute which was nice of him, and with that I walked through the gate, and out into Termina Field... which looked rather small especially when compared to Hyrule Field.

" This is it?" I asked.

" Were you expecting more?" asked Twilight.

" Yes! This field just consists of what we're seeing in front of us!" I replied.

" You've already forgotten that Clock Town is situated in the heart of Termina, so the field is a lot bigger than this. For some unknown reason, each quadrant of the field which connects to one of the four regions has an ecosystem that matches up with that region. What we're seeing right now is the Woodfall variation of Termina Field, so I'm guessing this helps people figure out where to go especially when they rarely leave town.

While we could go to Woodfall as part of our main objective, we don't know much about the area despite what the soldier said about it, so paying a visit to this ranch may be our best bet. Besides, if Pinkie Pie is going to be somewhere on Milk Road like she said she would, we may find out from her what we need to know," said Twilight.

" Hopefully she will cooperate instead of saying she needs to be in the swamp to tell us something," I said.

" If we can explain the situation without making her upset, I'm sure she'd be willing to share some valuable information. Judging from the night sky's colouring, your conversation with Discord lasted a couple of hours, so the sun should be rising soon. However, we do need to waste time as that boulder is probably still there given those guys said it would take two days to remove it," said Twilight.

I guess we could always sleep again, but because we'll be out in the field as opposed to the somewhat safe haven of town, it could be dangerous especially when this world is still new to us. Sighing, I began to head south towards Woodfall, yet I needed to head slightly west to reach Milk Road, but no sooner had I walked a few steps, Twilight started to freak out when several winged skulls were getting closer. " What in the world are they?"

" I remember them from Hyrule," I replied.

" Not me," said Twilight.

" Use your memories as Tatl, and you'll be able to tell me about them. That's what you have to do as my fairy partner Twilight even though it seems like I'm using you to provide me with knowledge, but know that's not the case," I said.

" I know Sunset Shimmer, so let me see what those memories come up with... hmmmm... they are called Blue Bubbles, and for the most part they will ignore you unless you venture too close to them. If they hit your shield, the blue fire which surrounds them will vanish, and from there you can easily get rid of them. They also have a nasty ability where your sword becomes disabled for a couple of minutes should they make contact with you. If this happens, use the Ocarina of Time, and play some kind of soothing song to dispel the curse otherwise you might regret it," said Twilight.

" That was pretty good," I smiled.

" Something called Deku Nuts can stun them which can also get rid of their fire," said Twilight. I remember those as well, but so far I haven't found any even though I'm still at the beginning of my journey. Deku Nuts are usually found in a forest setting, so that means I'll find plenty in Woodfall, but that isn't going to help me out here, so rather than fight all these Blue Bubbles at once, I decided to make a run for it, and maybe lure only one or two of them which would make the odds work in my favour.

I began to run, and sure enough they began to follow although all four chased me which isn't what I wanted. After running for a few metres, I came across a tree stump which gave me an idea. Jumping over to the other side of it, I hid there while drawing the Kokiri Sword from its scabbard to prepare myself accordingly, and one of them had chosen to continue following.

When it hovered over the tree stump, I was waiting for it with my shield raised as I forgot to take it out, and when it collided with my defence, the fire disappeared enabling me to destroy the Blue Bubble with only a couple of hits. The other three had since gone back the other way leaving me free to continue going, but then I felt good as it had been a very long time since I fought a creature. Twilight was surprised at first, but then remembered that I had prior experience, so she just shrugged it off although it wasn't ignored by me.

" Were you worried?" I asked.

" I thought that thing was going to hurt you, yet you took care of it with no trouble," replied Twilight.

" Compared to other monsters, Blue Bubbles are among the weakest," I said.

" Those aren't the only ones?" asked Twilight.

" There are all kinds of monsters out there with some being next to no challenge, and others are extremely powerful which makes them truly frightening. Some monsters are unique in that only the one exists, yet those tend to be guarding a valuable treasure," I replied.

" And what about that?" asked Twilight as she floated ahead of me slightly indicating that I should look ahead. Flying about in the sky was some kind of weird looking bird which stuck out like a sore thumb, and I had no idea what it was as I've never seen anything like it before. It was minding its own business given how I wasn't near it, but I have a feeling it will attack me upon getting too close.

Twilight then started to rely on those memories again to figure out what this weird bird was, and when it clicked for her, she began shouting as a means of telling me to keep my distance. " This is a rare monster known as the Takkuri, and despite its odd-looking appearance, you need to keep far away from it at all costs. Should it make contact with you, it will steal an item from you, and fly off at such speed that not even Rainbow Dash could catch it."

" Do you know where it takes them?" I asked.

" To the Curiosity Shop, so make sure you don't get hit otherwise you'll be buying your items back. This creature also has quite a sturdy body in that it takes a lot of punishment before it finally goes down, but it will always drop a large rupee worth 200 rupees. I wouldn't risk it Sunset Shimmer as losing an item is more important than earning a lot of money from one thing," replied Twilight. I'm guessing this Takkuri belongs to the owner of the Curiosity Shop, but then why train such a weird creature to steal from people coming by this way? Why not do something legitimate which would make you look less suspicious?

In any case, I'm still going to visit there in order to get that mask, but I'm having serious doubts about their ethics. The Takkuri unfortunately noticed me, and began to fly towards me hoping to steal my sword which would be the only valuable item in my possession, so I decided to run for it again not because of being afraid, but because I don't like the idea of buying back anything stolen from me.

Twilight suggested to run through some grass to my right which at first didn't make sense as the pathway in front was just as good, but when I started to pick up a few rupees hidden in the grass, I understood why she made the suggestion. The Takkuri must drop these due to some people choosing to fight back against it, or these were dropped by its victims before they lost something precious.

Once I had gotten far enough away, it turned around and flew back the other way leaving me feel relieved for a moment, but I'll need to get past it if I want to get through to Woodfall which must be its territory. In the meantime, the path suddenly changed where cliffs formed around either side, so this must be Milk Road, but why do they call it that anyway? I know that isn't really an important question, but my curiosity compells me to know what it means.

" Do you see anymore monsters?" I asked.

" I think we're in the clear for now," replied Twilight.

" Good, for I think I'm going to need some additional items if I'm going to be facing stronger monsters in the future," I said.

" Where do you suppose we can find them?" asked Twilight.

" The shops back in town probably have a few good items, but that will require me to pay for them, yet some I can't buy unless I have something specific first. Other items will become available to me as I find them in dungeons, and even in hidden places where few would traverse because of the danger involved. A sword and shield won't be my ideal choices for everything Twilight, and this is something I found out the hard way back in Hyrule," I replied.

Back then, I often ran out of ammunition for several weapons such as the bow due to being bad at using it, but nothing can compare to not having potions. Healing items are the most important thing to have during an adventure, for these will determine if you can survive any given situation. Twilight thought I was being a bit overdramatic, but I told her wait and see whats to come, and she would understand.

Milk Road certainly looked peaceful as it was just a simple looking area with a path that branched off to the left of the main route, yet this peaceful scene was constantly being interupted by the sounds of metal clanging against rock. That's when I remembered what those two men talked about when we found the missing piece of Adagio again... there was a giant boulder which was blocking off the entrance to the ranch, and sure enough there it was at the far end of the path. They weren't kidding when they said it was gigantic in size, and the person trying to break it down must be who Sweetie Belle sent here.

" So Starlight Glimmer placed that boulder here?" asked Twilight.

" I don't see any other logical explanation other than dark magic," I replied.

" No wonder those two guys said that it would take two days to get rid of it, as look at the man who is working over there. He does look strong, but using a pickaxe might not be the best way to approach such a problem," said Twilight.

" This world doesn't have magic that can perform such miracles like in Equestria, Twilight, so they have to go with whatever they can, and in this case he's using a simple tool to get the job done. I agree a pickaxe isn't a good choice, but then I doubt he has access to any bombs. Then again, I doubt bombs are going to destroy that boulder as they don't have enough firepower," I said. I then folded my arms and started to think about a possible solution, but my mind drew nothing but blanks for a few moments until something else those men said came to mind.

They mentioned the Gorons having a new kind of bomb which could do the trick, yet because they have their own problems, they can't send one of their own down here, but even if it were possible to send help, the pathway to the mountains has been blocked by ice. " Until we can find a way through to the mountains, I guess we've got to rely on that guy over there."

" Maybe it won't be so bad waiting," suggested Twilight.

" I guess, but you can never tell especially with someone like Starlight causing problems," I said. I wanted to speak to this man digging away at the boulder, but I suddenly stopped upon noticing Pinkie Pie floating in the sky further ahead via her balloon. " How did she get here ahead of us?"

" Do you really expect her to answer that?" asked Twilight.

" No, but maybe she will talk about this area now that she's here," I replied. Since I didn't have anything to use as a projectile aside from bubbles, I took out the Deku Mask, and put it on which resulted in the painful looking transformation from a human to a Deku Scrub... it's going to take some time getting used to doing this. Upon changing forms, I looked up at Pinkie Pie, and fired a bubble which popped her balloon, and she yelled before dropping down. Once she had landed, I took the Deku Mask off to go back to being human where I approached her where she jumped for joy at seeing me again.

" Welcome again Mrs. Fairy," said Pinkie Pie. Because this was still the same cycle, she remembers me even though she calls me Mrs. Fairy instead of Sunset Shimmer, but I suppose I'll take what I can get from this. " Tingle is so happy to see you again, and like I said before, I would be here quickly because of my balloon. Now, I know that you are here to get some information, but perhaps you would like a map of this area? Milk Road may be a small place when compared to the four regions, but having a map can be pretty handy. So, are you interested in one of Tingle's maps?"

" How much?" I asked.

" For a map of Milk Road, it will cost you 20 rupees, and for a map of Woodfall, 40 rupees," replied Pinkie Pie. Checking my wallet, I discovered that I had enough to buy the first one, but not the second which wasn't necessarily bad because I'm sure to get it from her when I eventually go there. I guess going through the grass really did pay off otherwise I'd be disappointing Pinkie right about now. Handing over the 20 rupees, she reached into a pocket, and pulled out a map which she gave to me. " Yippee! You now have Tingle's map of this area, so now you will know where to go."

" About that information," I began.

" Since I'm in Milk Road now Mrs. Fairy, I feel more inclined to talk about what can be found here. Do you see that path that goes off to the left? If you go that way, you'll reach the Gorman Racetrack which is where the Gorman Sisters reside. They are known for breeding powerful horses, but their motivations are often questionable. People come from all over to race on their track, but they can't help but be suspicious," said Pinkie Pie.

" Are they related to the Gorman Troupe?" I asked.

" Gorman is the brother among the three of them, and used to work there, but he had dreams of show business which prompted him to leave. Rumours say that the sisters are always worried about Gorman, but they never admit this to anyone. Another rumour says that they a strange mask on their property which has something to do with an ancient kingdom that once existed in Termina, but I don't know for sure if this is true. You may have to talk to them about it should you be curious enough," replied Pinkie Pie.

" And the ranch?" I asked.

" Everyone who is everyone knows all about Romani Ranch, and if you don't then you've been living under a really, really, heavy rock for a very long time. The ranch is well known for producing the famous Chateau Romani, a milk that has magical properties where drinking it will give infinite magic power to those who possess any. However, unless you happen to be made of rupees, you can't afford this beverage, so you'll have to settle for regular milk.

Things haven't been good at Romani Ranch lately, for everything started going wrong when the original owners sadly passed away some time ago. The older daughter runs it now, but I hear she has reached her limit in terms of stress. If you really are curious Mrs. Fairy, you should talk to her about it... when the boulder has been cleared," replied Pinkie Pie.

This Chateau Romani really intrigues me now, for having infinite magic would be the best thing ever considering that I only have a small amount to use, and I should consider picking up some magic jars by cutting down grass as I'm almost out. Even though this was a different version of Pinkie Pie, she knew me well as I intend on finding out more about this Romani Ranch.

If it's anything like Lon Lon Ranch back in Hyrule, I could find Epona here... yeah, it was a long guess on my part, but I've got to believe my guess to be correct. I had nothing more to ask her although I did want to know more about Woodfall, but she would prefer to be in that area before she talks about it. For wearing a green spandex suit, and behaving in such an eccentric manner, Pinkie is well versed about Termina which has me wondering how she knows so much. Was the character she is portraying... Tingle, I believe it was... this knowledgeable?

" Looks like I have no more questions," I said.

" In that case, I should get back to my usual business... waiting for a fairy of my own. Tingle will get a fairy, for Tingle strongly believes this. Well, call again! Tingle, Tingle, Kooloo-Limpah!" said Pinkie Pie. She didn't say anything about stealing her words, and that must be because I've already talked to her earlier. She then re-inflated her balloon before taking to the sky once again, and while I wanted to gain access to Romani Ranch, I'm not able to because the boulder was still there.

Methinks I could have planned this out a little more carefully as now I've got to wait until tomorrow morning before I can see the current owner. That means I have to sleep out here for the night, and even though there aren't any monsters right now, who knows what might happen during the next night...

To Be Continued.

Chapter 7: The Misery of the Ranch

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 4, 2015
Chapter 7: The Misery of the Ranch

The idea of sleeping out here definitely made me feel nervous, for who knows what creatures lurk about, but then I've done this before in Hyrule where I slept outside for hours at a time. However, I am constantly having to remind myself that this isTermina which is a completely different thing altogether. After making my way from Clock Town to Milk Road while avoiding monsters, talking with Pinkie Pie, and generally getting a lay of the land, night had come and gone, and now the second of the three days were upon me.

Dawn of the Second Day - 48 Hours Remain

Looking up at the moon, it had once again drawn closer during my prior sleep and respective escapades, and even though I can reset all of this in order to give myself more time, I began to get curious as to the very nature of the moon itself. Dr. Hooves said that it was something feared and worshipped by the people, but what reason could they have to fear it other than the scary face?

" What are you thinking about?" asked Twilight.

" I'm just curious about the moon that will become the death knell for this world unless we figure out what needs to be done. I still find it hard to imagine that something non-sentient could cause so much trouble, and all because of one person's actions. Twilight, what if we can't save this world from the impending destruction?" I asked.

" That was sudden," replied Twilight.

" I'm serious!" I shouted.

" You've handled some pretty difficult situations Sunset Shimmer including ones where you didn't need my help even though you wanted it, but you have to remember to accept your limitations, and your ability to go beyond them whenever you feel the need to. The moon falling is being caused by the power Starlight Glimmer holds, yet she probably doesn't even know why she's doing it anymore other than to bring about destruction. People here are panicking because they're dealing with a situation which has never happened to them before, so just because they are losing faith doesn't mean you have to," said Twilight.

" But can we do it?" I asked.

" We must if we're going to change things backto normal. Listen, this is not going to be easy for either of us, and we're likely to deal with all sorts of mental and emotional turmoil along the way which could cause us both to lash out at each other, but we must be strong in order to prevent Termina from being destroyed. You've got more experience dealing with this video game world business than I do, so that means you have to lead the way to victory.

But, you won't be going at it alone as I'll be here to provide all the assistance I can get," replied Twilight. One thing which hasn't changed with Twilight despite all that's happened is her ability to see the potential in people, and if she hadn't given me the chance to change my ways... well... my life would probably be a lot different than it is right now.

I owe my life to Twilight as she saved me from myself just like how I saved her alternate self in the same manner. Heh, kind of ironic when you think about it that way, yet the point is that she's right about needing to prevent Termina's destruction. It's going to make me suffer all kinds of emotional trauma just like before, and there will be moments where I just want to give up because of being overwhelmed, but I've come so far since I was given a second chance.

Deep down, I think Twilight feels the same way about how I feel about her as a friend and mentor, and for that I'm glad that she's with me on this adventure. It also allows us to truly get to know one another as we don't get much time given the human world is often threatened by magic from Equestria, and Twilight can only stick around for short periods at a time because of her duties as a princess.

All of this thinking made me forget about the whole problem I had with sleeping outside, so I found an ideal spot near where Pinkie Pie was floating about, and drifted off to sleep as there was nothing else to do until tomorrow.

Then another thought popped into my head... does Pinkie sleep while she's up there? Does she even sleep? I mean, I don't know if she does given how I've talked to her a couple of times in the middle of the night, but I was curious about it. Luckily, Ganondorf didn't show up in my dreams this time around, and for once I'm thankful as I doubt I could deal with another verbal assault. His threat towards both the human world and Equestria felt very real, for I know what his power is like as I've experienced it first-hand.

Even now, I still don't quite understand his motivations, but I'm afraid of finding out when the actual time comes. What I do know is that I won't let him harm either world, for he would need to kill me first before doing so. The entire day and night passed by without incident, and yes I'm aware that I've slept for an entire 24 hours which means not needing as much sleep for next time, so when I finally woke up, it was now the final day.

Dawn of the Final Day - 24 Hours Remain

I woke up because of tremors, and also because of the sound of something shattering to pieces. Making sure to carefully wake Twilight up, and not doing so in a sudden fashion, I picked up my things, and made my way towards the entrance of Romani Ranch where I discovered the boulder was what had been shattered. The man that Sweetie Belle asked to take care of it had succeeded in his task, but judging from his shortness of breath, and the sweat trickling down him, he had completely exhausted himself.

" Someone was up to no good, and placed a boulder here."

" I heard about it from some of your fellow workers employed by Mutoh," I said making sure not to say Sweetie Belle as that would cause utter confusion.

" Master Mutoh sent only me here to take care of the problem due to needing everyone else in town. I do wish that I could have had some help as this job has left me feeling tired, or even better some way of blowing up the boulder without having to exert myself. But, with the way things have been going as of late all across Termina, the ranch should be grateful that the boulder was destroyed period."

" Don't the Gorons have any powerful bombs?" I asked.

" They have Powder Kegs which they use for heavy duty jobs like this, but due to the cold snap happening in the mountains, everything has come to a complete stop. Snowhead is known for its weather, yet it's never been this bad before throughout Terminian history. Their food supplies are limited due to the cold conditions, so unless they can find some way to stop the snow, they'll become extinct within a matter of days."

" These are dark times," I sighed.

" Even Romani Ranch hasn't avoided all of this chaos."

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" About two nights ago while working to destroy this boulder, I saw a strange light appear in the sky over the ranch, and this was followed by numerous lights which kept on appearing sporadically until they all disappeared again after a couple of minutes. During that ruckus, I heard a young girl scream along with a bunch of cows which makes no sense, but it sounds like something bad has happened. If you plan on visiting Romani Ranch, who knows what you'll find assuming anything is even there.

Oh, and I wouldn't hang around too long as people will be coming this way in a few hours. They might take things the wrong way, and believe you to be some kind of troublemaker. No offence."

" None taken," I said.

" Well, my work here is done, so I'm heading back to Master Mutoh, and maybe help convince her to flee before it's too late." The man then turned around and ran off towards the entrance which connects back with Termina Field, yet he provided me with so much information, I struggled a little trying to make sense of it.

" What do you think Twilight?" I asked.

" Now we know what's happening in the mountains, but we can't do anything about it until we can remove that ice blocking the path that goes up there. If you had access to your magic Sunset, you could have melted the ice allowing access to Snowhead, yet you can't due to Equestrian magic being restricted here," replied Twilight. She floated ahead of me for a couple of seconds before coming back.

" I mean, you could still use some magic as I don't think it's been entirely taken away from you, but it would be the most basic spell which may not be much." She then floated away again which made me feel like she was trying to hide something, yet I shouldn't doubt her motives as she is my friend after all. In actuality, Twilight was a little embarrassed as what she was about to say next would have caused incessant laughter to leave my mouth. " This is going to sound so silly, but what is a Goron exactly?" Yes, she asked me that exact question, and I totally expected it.

" Where do I even begin?" I asked.

" Are they humans like you, or are they plants like the Deku Scrubs?" asked Twilight.

" It's hard to describe them as when I was in Hyrule, they were all humans, but it looks like in Termina, we'll be seeing what these tribes really look like. If I recall the Hyrule Historia which I read to learn some of the more interesting events of Hyrule, the Gorons are rock-like in appearance, and eat rocks as part of their diet," I replied. That's actually all I remembered from my reading, and I wish now that I had read more about Termina as the Historia had numerous chapters on it. Twilight seemed skeptical at first, but considering what we've seen so far, she accepted my words as truth. Besides, what would I get from lying to her?

" Guess we'll find out when we eventually get to the mountains," said Twilight.

" If we do," I said.

" Remember to stay positive Sunset," said Twilight.

" I know," I said. With that exchange out of the way, I walked forward and entered Romani Ranch where my jaw dropped upon seeing what I saw with my eyes. Everything looked relatively fine, and intact thus denouncing what that guy said a while ago, but there was something off which I couldn't put my finger on. The ranch was certainly expansive which put Lon Lon Ranch to shame, but apart from it being quiet, nothing looked out of the ordinary.

Taking a single step forward, I almost tripped due to getting my foot caught in some kind of hole in the ground, yet upon a closer look, this wasn't a hole but rather a burned patch as though someone or something had used fire here, and quite a long time ago judging from what was left. Because fire magic was my specialty, I knew this was caused by fire, but what could have done this? " There are patches everywhere, but none of them are consistent in that they don't connect together."

" It's like whoever, or whatever did this was being completely random. Huh? What are you doing?" asked Twilight. She noticed me having dropped to my knees, and sniffing the patch like I were a dog.

" I'm trying to determine how long these have been here," I replied.

" By sniffing?" asked Twilight.

" Hey... the weirdest methods work the best," I replied. By sniffing the patch a few more times, I could confirm that these had been made roughly two nights ago which is when that guy saw those weird lights. Upon getting back up onto my feet, I dusted off my knees due to getting them dirty before I started to think about this. Romani Ranch had suffered some kind of attack, but not in a normal sense as these patches don't add up. Whoever did this was clearly unconcerned about what the lasting effects would be, or they did know, and just didn't care about it.

Perhaps speaking to the owner could clear things up, but what if they didn't see anything? That's always a possibility in scenarios like these, so I'll hold my judgment until we find whoever runs things. As I walked along towards a house way off in the distance which must be where the owner resides, I could see a barn to the right of that, and what appear to be additional buildings even further away. " They have few buildings around here, and all this space with nothing occupying it."

" They must have incredible wealth to have so much land, or perhaps it was necessary because the ranch provides much of the food for Termina," suggested Twilight.

" Only way to know is hear it from the horse's mouth," I said.

" Did you really just say that?" laughed Twilight.

" It makes sense to us because we're both ponies," I laughed. As I continued walking along the dirt path which lead up to the house, I began to think about all that I've seen so far in Termina, and compared with Hyrule, everything here was bleak, dark, and miserable. It's as though everything positive about Hyrule was put into reverse, and the result of that is this world, for most of the people I've encountered look like they are on the verge of succumbing to their own deepest fears.

Could Starlight have really done all of this just because she wanted to have fun? No... although her contributions can't be ignored. I think the people themselves contributed to their current sense of misery, and allowed themselves to fall down on hard times. I really do hate to agree with Ganondorf on anything as it gives him the opportunity to further remind me that I'm to suffer greatly here, but Termina is on the verge of ruin in more ways than one.

It was going to fall apart not only from being destroyed by the moon, but by the fact that the people have given up hope for the most part, and have chosen to accept their fates. The few who still remain positive are a minority group at best, yet their efforts aren't going to be enough unless I do something about it. Twilight has told me that one person can make all the difference, and I intend to do just that by helping out everyone I can.

I know Pip Squeak told me to take care of as many problems as possible, but I want to help everyone no matter what I've got to go through. If Twilight were in my current position, she would do the exact same thing, but maybe I should ask her that particular question just to be sure as she has been through an awful lot based on what she said happened in Equestria which caused her to not respond to my reports. " Twilight, I want to help everyone in Termina."

" I had a feeling you'd say that," said Twilight.

" You knew?" I asked.

" Everyone here in Termina is so miserable what with the moon falling, and they are losing hope as no matter what they do, there is nowhere for them to be safe. You've been through so much since you left Equestria, and because of everything you've learned about friendship, I know you can make the people of Termina feel good about themselves once again. They may not remember any of it whenever we reset time, but we'll know because the Bomber's Notebook records this knowledge," replied Twilight.

" It isn't just me doing this, for you're here as well," I said.

" I know Sunset, but this story belongs to you, and no one else. My presence here is to act as your partner and guide, for you are the hero who has to solve all of these problems, and prevent the world from being destroyed. It's a pretty tall order, and I should know as I've had plenty of those already, yet this is your chance now. You can take what you've learned since accepting friendship, and apply it in all kinds of ways," said Twilight.

" Thanks Twilight," I smiled.

" I'll be by your side through thick and thin Sunset as that's what friends are for," smiled Twilight. She was right about me being the one who can help these people, and it will help me understand myself as well as I continue to accept friendship into my heart. When we got close to the house, a familiar sound started to ring throughout my ears prompting me to start looking around to see if it was my trusty steed. As I was frantically searching around, something else had caught Twilight's attention which is why she didn't say anything at first, but when she looked ahead of us, she noticed what had me looking.

" Say... isn't that your horse over there?" Twilight asked. I turned to look in the direction she was focusing on, and there was Epona whinnying away with fear in her voice as she had no idea where she was given Starlight stole her from me. Running over, her whinnying changed from fear to happiness as she was happy to see my face again. I then whinnied back at her in response which made her feel relaxed knowing I was here, and Twilight merely chucked over the fact that I had been speaking horse.

" What's so funny?" I asked.

" Seeing you speaking the language of horses... whinnying... is such a delight as it shows you still embrace your inner pony. Besides, you don't need to be so surprised about it, for I'm a pony too, so I can understand what she's saying. It does feel weird knowing that you've ridden a horse considering what we both really are, but then I can tell she trusts you immensely based on her sounds," replied Twilight.

" I don't know why, but I have this strong connection with her," I said.

" Then that should be enough," said Twilight.

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" No need to worry about why you have a connection, but know that it remains strong despite all that's happened," replied Twilight. That was quite an interesting way of looking at it, so perhaps she was right about that. Twilight then nudged at me to get my attention, for she wanted to show me what had caught her attention before spotting Epona.

" I know you want to spend more time with your horse, but you need to take a look at who is sitting over there on that crate." Looking at where she was pointing, I immediately recognized the person as Applebloom, but something was wrong with her. " Applebloom looks as though someone has given her a serious blow to the head seeing as she is constantly holding onto it, or maybe she's been affected by some kind of magic."

" I don't think magic did this," I said.

" Then the first option?" asked Twilight.

" Maybe, but then why would anyone want to do that?" I asked.

" Who knows given how Termina is different from both the human world and Equestria, but what is she even doing here in the first place? Seeing her here on a ranch isn't surprising as it matches with her human and pony counterparts, but why is she here? Judging from your lack of a reaction, you've seen this scenario before haven't you? Looks like you'll need to explain this one too," replied Twilight.

I told her that in Hyrule, Applebloom lived in Lon Lon Ranch as the granddaughter to Granny Smith which was accurate, and was the one who taught me Epona's Song, yet in the future she had been forced to become a farmhand all because Big Macintosh took over the ranch due to being fed up with the management. Before Twilight could question that last part, I quickly told it to her thus avoiding another awkward moment.

" Big Macintosh was antagonistic back then," I said.

" Like you said, everything is black and white where those who are friendly could be bad here, and the same is true in reverse," said Twilight.

" My advice for dealing with such things is to take a slow and steady approach," I said. That's when we turned our attention to Applebloom who was still clutching her head every now and again, so I tried talking with her, and the results weren't what I was expecting.

" Huh... you... who are you again?" asked Applebloom.

" We've never met before," I replied.

" Really? I... Romani is trying to remember... but nothing is coming up," said Applebloom.

" What's wrong?" I asked.

" I... don't understand... why is something wrong with me? Did I experience... maybe... I don't recall," replied Applebloom. It looked as though she was suffering from a bad case of amnesia, but this was quite a severe case compared to what I've normally seen. " Something happened... I think... trying to remember... but it's so hard. Did I try to protect the ranch? I can't remember! Who am I... not sure... is the person in the barn... sister? Is she my sister? Romani... all confused as nothing... nothing is adding up for me. Was practicing for something... but Romani doesn't know what, or why... why is a bow on the ground? Everything... just doesn't make sense."

It became quite apparent that she had no idea what was going on, so it looks like I won't be able to get any information from her. She mentioned her sister was in the barn that was located to the right of the house, so maybe she might know why Applebloom was suffering from amnesia. Walking over to the barn, and entering via the door, my jaw dropped as standing near some empty stalls was Applejack which was surprising, yet she appeared to be in deep thought as she didn't hear me come in.

" I didn't think Applejack would be here," I said.

" Why?" asked Twilight.

" In Hyrule, she portrayed Zelda's loyal attendant, and since you were Zelda, Applejack acted as your bodyguard even though she is a farm girl at heart. Seeing her here makes more sense given this is a ranch and all," I replied.

" Yet why does she look so miserable?" asked Twilight.

" I don't know, but maybe we shouldn't pry in case she takes it the wrong way," I replied.

" Something happened here Sunset, and we've got to find out as we may be able to prevent it from happening," said Twilight.

" True, but we can't abuse the power of resetting time otherwise that could result in me being corrupted," I said. Having the ability to reset things back to the start was fine and all, yet using it just because I could would be taking advantage. Talking to Applejack to find out what happened around here would be a wise idea, but if the situation is something minor, I can't justify resetting things just for that. Of course, I wasn't prepared for what she was about to say to us.

" Oh... I'm sorry I didn't hear you coming into the barn. Right now... I'm thinking... a little... my little sister... my sister, she... she... I can tell that you saw what my sister is like outside as she sits on that crate," said Applejack.

" Yes, but what happened?" I asked.

" It's hard for me to explain," replied Applejack.

" You look as though you want someone to hear what you have to say, and that's why I'm here so that you can share your story," I said.

" Okay, but I must give y'all a warning that this is a story that will break your heart, and it's my own fault. About two days ago my sister... my little sister... told me about these creatures who come by the ranch at this time every year to steal our cows, and she wanted to keep them safe. She had been training herself to use a bow so that she could protect them, but I thought she was making the whole thing up... I thought it was a part of her imagination.

I didn't believe any of it, so I paid it no mind as I resumed working on running this here ranch," said Applejack. She then began to cry which forced her to wipe away the tears using her sleeve, but her eyes continued to water which must mean that this was far more serious than I thought which made me feel upset. " If I thought it would come to this, then...what Romani said, I should have... I should have listened to her instead of dismissing it as being a part of her imagination. Now looking back on it... I could have saved her and the cows."

" What happened that night?" I asked.

" The creatures came to the ranch, and proceeded to abduct the cows from the barn by using some kind of force to pull them upward to the sky. My little sister tried to stop them, but she must have been taken as well. Even though I didn't see any of it, you can tell that's what happened as the roof of the barn has been damaged badly. The cows are all gone now, yet Romani returned early this morning, and in the condition you've seen outside," replied Applejack.

" Those creatures must have done something to her mind," I said.

" Do y'all think I don't know that!?!?" shouted Applejack before she quickly calmed herself down. I could tell that what happened has really crushed her heart, and the fact that she blames herself has made her irritable. " I'm sorry for snapping at you because of my own weakness, so I apologize as you were just curious about it."

Applejack then walked over to a nearby wall where she began pounding it over and over until the part she was hitting started to crack a little, yet she proceeded to another part of the barn, and repeated the same thing before coming back over to me. " Without any of our cows, we can no longer produce any milk, and especially our famous Chateau Romani, so that means this place is going to go bankrupt... assuming that moon falling above us doesn't end everything first."

" I'm sorry about what happened to your sister," I said.

" You don't need to apologize at all ma'am, for all of this was just one misfortune after another. First, that giant boulder blocked our only entrance to the ranch, and then my little sister and our entire stock of cows were abducted by some weird creatures. Second, because it wasn't removed from Milk Road until just recently, I couldn't make an important delivery to the Milk Bar in town last night, and I've no doubt Ms. Barton is mighty upset over not getting milk for those attending the Carnival of Time celebrations.

To top it all off, that moon above us will be making impact tonight which is why people from town are coming here to seek shelter. I'm not sure if coming this way will work as that falling rock looks as though it will destroy everything across Termina," said Applejack.

" Maybe you should have a lie down," I suggested.

" I can't! I just can't alright! Look, things have been so stressful for me over these last few hours, and I just don't know what I can do about it. Having a rest won't do me any good as it doesn't change the fact that my little sister will never be herself again!" shouted Applejack as she dropped to her knees before bursting into tears. I was completely beside myself, for instead of making her feel better, she was feeling even worse all because of my suggestion which was pretty narrow-minded of me.

After crying for a few minutes which involved her pounding on the ground in utter frustration, Applejack would get back onto her feet, and the red in her eyes showed she was on the verge of losing her mind. I know I've no idea what happened, but I just couldn't stand seeing her this way. I walked over to her in order to comfort her with a hug even if she doesn't know I'm her friend in this world, and she accepted by hugging me back. " Thank you... I really needed that, and that's the honest truth. I feel ashamed that you had to see me like that, but your words caused me to finally snap after holding it all in for so long."

" I'm the one who should be ashamed as I didn't take your feelings into consideration," I said.

" That's mighty big of you to say that ma'am, and while I may not be in the best condition mentally, I suppose I can answer any questions you may have. I know it probably won't do you any good given the moon will destroy us all, but you did come all this way for a reason, and it's only right for me to listen," said Applejack.

Did she just speak to me by being honest? When I was talking with Pinkie Pie earlier, her manner of speaking did make me laugh on the inside, but I never said anything at the time as I didn't really see it as important. Now that Applejack had been honest with me, I see that my friends have retained some aspect of their respective elements. This could help change things back to normal, but for the time being I'll keep this to myself, and inform Twilight about it when we're finished here.

" I noticed you have a horse penned up outside," I said.

" No idea who it belongs to, but my sister found it wandering about in our field a couple of days ago, so we took it in," said Applejack.

" Her name is Epona, and she belongs to me," I said.

" That's your horse out there!?!? Well, this is quite a predicament ma'am, for while I would like to believe that, to be honest, unless you have some way of proving that horse belongs to you, I can't give her back no matter what you say," said Applejack.

" But she really is mine," I pleaded.

" Those eyes of yours tell me that you're really concerned for that horse, and I can tell someone with eyes like that aren't liars. However, my sister was the only one who knew how to keep that horse under control, and since she is the way she is, I'm afraid there's nothing more that can be done," said Applejack. I had a suspicion I needed to play the song which would call Epona over to me, but the problem was that I was currently drawing a blank. If I want to remember how it went, Applebloom has to teach me. This means somehow coming here before all of the weird things occur of which the results are what I'm seeing.

" Any other animals?" I asked.

" Well, there's Grog who runs the Cucco Shack, but he's been having all sorts of problems what with his chicks. He really wants to see them in their prime, but the chances of that happening are slim to none given we've only got less than 24 hours before we're all dead. Mamamau Yan runs what she calls a "Doggie Racetrack" located just a short distance away from the Cucco Shack, but business for her has been slow due to the boulder blocking the entrance until recently. Chicks, dogs, and two horses may not be all that much, but it's all we've got left what with the cows no longer being here," replied Applejack.

" You know, if you could do things all over again, would you?" I asked.

" Would I? Of course I would ma'am! Don't know why y'all asked me such a question, but the answer to that is yes! If I could go back in time, I'd make sure the cows were protected along with my little sister from the monsters that did this to her," replied Applejack. I what needs to be done around here, but it will take me a while as I need to deal with the problems currently plaguing the mountains. Some problems I can solve almost instantly, yet others will have to wait which is going to test my patience to the core.

Applejack really wants to change what happened so as to prevent this nightmare from happening, but she doesn't possess that kind of power unlike myself who does... now it's all starting to make sense for me. Going back through time is a blessing as it enables me to change things for the better, but others desire to make those same changes, and they can't.

That also makes this ability of mine a curse as only Twilight and I are affected by it. The very thought of the two of us being alone because of being the only ones who know why time keeps changing back to the start makes my heart ache, and I wish it didn't have to be this way. Could this be an example of where I have to suffer? Surely it must because even if I change something, when I reset time again to give me more time, my efforts will reset as well. I heaved a heavy sigh making sure Applejack wasn't offended, and she was concerned about me this time. " Y'all look as though you've got a huge burden on your shoulders."

" You have no idea," I sighed.

" Everyone in Termina has their own share of problems what with all of the strange happenings," said Applejack as she walked over to grab a pair of mugs sitting on a wooden table nearby. She then took a bottle filled with fresh milk, and poured it into each mug making sure both had the same amount. " Whatever this problem of yours is, all you can do is try as hard as possible to solve it." She handed over a mug which I accepted graciously before drinking the milk where it made me feel a lot better." Even though the cows are gone, I always make sure to have extra supplies of milk just in case, but what we're drinking is all that's left."

Hearing her say that was enough to convince me to spit it back out, but Applejack shook her hand back and forth to signify that it was okay. " Seeing as the world is ending tomorrow, this here being the last of the milk is fine even though my predicament remains what with my sister."

" What happened to the milk?" I asked.

" Someone kept on smashing the bottles, and this was before that boulder blocked the entrance," replied Applejack.

" Do you know who's responsible?" I asked.

" I've got my suspicions, and it's got to be those pesky Gorman Sisters who run that sorry excuse for a racetrack down the road. They've always been a problem what with their shady methods, but only two of them remain there now. The brother left to follow his own path which didn't involve being a schemer, so at least there's one good apple among a really bad crop.

My advice for you ma'am would be to keep your distance from them at all costs unless you've got some kind of crazy reason for wanting to see them," replied Applejack. After finishing my milk while making sure Twilight got some, I handed the bottle back, and said to Applejack that I needed to continue on with my journey, but I thanked her for the beverage in addition to all of the information she shared. " Good luck on your journey ma'am even if it will be a short one what with the moon." Leaving the barn and walking forward a few paces, I turned my attention to Twilight who was both concerned and happy... the milk contributed to the latter.

" What do you make of all that?" asked Twilight.

" We should have gotten here much sooner," I replied.

" I know, but we don't have the means to access this ranch unless we get help from the Gorons," said Twilight.

" This is why I feel my patience will be tested, for the knowledge that we've got to wait who knows how long until we can get a chance to solve specific problems will prove unbearable. What we've discovered here is without a doubt one of the worst experiences I've ever had the pleasure of knowing. I've never seen Applejack lose her mind so easily, and even my own suggestion contributed to her losing it," I said.

" Don't blame yourself as you didn't know," said Twilight.

" I know, but seeing Applebloom like that breaks my heart," I said.

" We'll help her and her sister when we can, but right now they'll be forced to relive the same thing over and over even though they won't remember due to us resetting time back to the beginning," said Twilight.

" By the way, did you notice how Applejack kept being honest with us?" I asked. To my surprise, Twilight shook her head to signal that she didn't notice, and while this did give me quite a shock as I thought she would have noticed given the elements my friends represent originated from the pony versions who were her friends. I really should ask more about what she's been doing in Equestria, but I'll do that later as I need to focus on this revelation.

" It's as though her element was shining through despite the human world changing into this dark, brooding, miserable place. It also happened when we were talking to Pinkie Pie where a lot of things she said made me laugh inside, and that relates to her element. Do you suppose this could help change things back to normal?"

" Maybe, but it's hard to say," replied Twilight.

" I remember during my adventure in Hyrule, the magic from Equestria was still there, and it helped our friends remember what the human world is really meant to be like, and that included you Twilight. It wasn't enough to give them back their full memories, but it did make explaining things a whole lot easier. Termina is similar to and different from Hyrule, so maybe Equestrian magic works in the same manner? Or, could it be a completely different effect that provides different results? Either way, or friends will be important to our journey even when they don't know this," I said.

" What do you want to do now?" asked Twilight.

" Speaking with Applejack has consumed much of our time, so really all we can do is reset time. Or, we could wait around a little while longer and see what happens during the final hours," I replied. Since we were outside of Clock Town at this point in time, I didn't feel quite as restricted as before because of being trapped in the body of a Deku Scrub, yet even with all this freedom, I still didn't know where to go apart from Woodfall.

Looking up at the sky, the moon had gotten closer which made me feel uneasy, but I quickly remembered that with time on my side, the moon will never have the chance to destroy this town. I thought about resetting time seeing as there was nothing more for me to do in this cycle, but I suddenly received a brainstorm. " There is one more place we can check out."

" And that would be?" asked Twilight.

" The Curiosity Shop! We were told that it opens after 10:00pm at night because of how shady the place is, so why not check it out, and see if that expensive mask is currently on sale. Now I know that I don't have enough rupees, but maybe I could persuade the owner into parting with it through haggling," I replied.

" Haggling? You want it to become an auction?" asked Twilight.

" If I can get him to lower down the price just enough, I might be able to buy it, but then I may have to give up something precious in the process," I replied. To be fair, I didn't have anything that constituted as being precious as nothing from the human world made it over when everything changed, yet perhaps there's another way... it felt like what I did for the human version of Twilight prior to the Friendship Games concluding two weeks ago.

I found a way to resolve that issue without fighting, so hopefully a similar result will happen. It would take me about an hour to make my way back to Clock Town from here, so I can't waste any time even though I suppose I could do this later. As I ran as fast as I could back to town, Twilight mentioned that the Bomber's Notebook was starting to glow from within my pouch, so I took it out and opened it up to where the old lady was featured, and the images of both Applejack and Applebloom appeared indicating they were in need of help.

That's when I noticed that Discord has been added to the book as well, yet I never noticed this before until now, so perhaps it glowed while I wasn't looking due to being distracted by something else? In any case, this made five people out of a possible few dozen or so to be added to the notebook, but there was still a long way to go given many problems in Termina would have to wait a long time before I can solve them, and there were people who I couldn't get access to just yet.

The way back was fraught with danger as the moment I entered the field, the Takkuri was there flying about where it proceeded to attack me in the hopes of stealing something. Luckily, I was able to outrun it again, and I have to thank our curriculum at Canterlot High regarding physical education for this otherwise I would have lost something. The Blue Bubbles on the other hand were in my path, so taking out my shield, I plowed my way through them where each one lost its flames upon connecting with it.

A couple of them continued to pursue me in the hopes of getting at least one attack in, but I wasn't about to let that happen, so I drew the Kokiri Sword, and slashed both monsters destroying them without any problems. Once they were gone, I continued running forward until finally reaching the entrance to Clock Town only to realize that this was the wrong side.

I needed to be on the west side as opposed to the south, so moaning while stomping my foot out of frustration, I ran to the left until reaching the desired entrance, and from there I went through and found myself in West Clock Town again. Most of the people had fled by this point given the moon was mere hours away from crashing, but I had a job to do which involved speaking to a man about a mask.

Night of the Final Day - 12 Hours Remain

" You were intense out there," commented Twilight.

" When I used my sword and shield?" I asked.

" In my own mind, I thought you were going to get hurt, but then you took care of those monsters so easily. I think all this time living in the human world has really paid off for you Sunset Shimmer, for all of those movements are something I could never do given how I'm not used to having a human body," replied Twilight.

" Maybe, but deep down I still want to go back to Equestria, but my heart doesn't feel like it's ready for that," I said.

" Because of Princess Celestia?" asked Twilight.

" I've done great things in the human world such as helping to defeat the Sirens, and showing the human version of yourself the same path that you gave me back when I was a demonic monster. I also achieved a new form where I used the elements from our friends to help her out after she was corrupted by magic, yet I don't think it's enough for me to say that I've really changed. Despite earning everyone's trust and understanding how magic works in the human world, my mistakes from the past continue haunting me," I replied.

" Sunset... you will return to Equestria when you feel that you're ready to face Princess Celestia. There's no need for you to fear returning to the land of your birth just because of what happened a long time ago, for allowing fear to consume you will only cause you to regress back to being the person you've broken free from.

I know you would prefer to speak to her directly, but perhaps I can get things going which might make it more comfortable for you. No need for an answer straight away of course as it's something that requires a lot of thinking on your part," said Twilight. Is it any wonder how she has become both my friend and mentor? I know that I've solved a big problem without needing her help because I wanted someone to show me the answers even though I could easily get them, but I still appreciate hearing her thoughts on something I'm having trouble dealing with for she is the Princess of Friendship after all.

If only I had could have had the chance to understand Friendship Magic a little more before all of this happened, but like Twilight said, I don't need to find an answer straight away. She was also right about me facing Princess Celestia once again, for I can't allow my fear to consume me. After all, she's the pony version of Principal Celestia, and I can talk to her so easily without any kind of fear on my part.

One day... I'll have my hooves walking on the grounds of Equestria... my home world where I was born... yes, my hooves as opposed to hands and feet. It will happen one day, but not today as there is this problem before us that needs solving. With this little pep talk courtesy of Twilight inspiring me, I walked towards where the Curiosity Shop was located, and went inside knowing that they were open for business.

" This place is so strange," I commented.

" You won't hear me arguing about that," added Twilight. The interior of this shop was filled with all kinds of knick-knacks that ranged from the mysterious to the utterly bizarre, and somehow it managed to work all while giving off a creepy factor. There were additional items located behind the desk, but one item stood out for me, but not in a good way because of what I experienced in Hyrule.

" Do you see that armour?" I asked.

" The one in the corner?" asked Twilight. She looked in the same direction that I was, and propped up in the corner was a suit of armour which looked centuries old, yet many pieces were missing. That wasn't the point though, for this was armour that comes from an Iron Knucle... no way could I ever forget that creature because of how powerful it was, and what happened to Rainbow Dash all because she was loyal to the Gerudo, but not to Ganondorf.

For a brief moment while staring at the armour, I felt like it was going to move in a bid to kill me like all those other ones did, yet I relaxed because this shop lacked any space. Twilight, who had been spending her time looking it over most likely to analyze it, just shrugged her shoulders as she had no answer. " Looks like ancient armour to me."

" That armour is an automating killing machine, for should you strike it while it lies dormant, it will come to life where it's axe is deadly," I said.

" Come on! You're just pulling my leg," said Twilight.

" You should listen to your friend here little fairy, for what she says is the truth when it comes to Iron Knuckles, I kid you not!" That voice was instantly recognizeable by both of us although Twilight's jaw just dropped which caused me to roll my eyes and make a smirking expression on my face. The man standing behind the counter who obviously had been watching our actions was Iron Will, and I remember him from Hyrule where he helped me learn how to use a bow.

" What is he doing here?" asked Twilight.

" He runs this shop," I replied making sure not to make a big scene.

" That I do, and judging from your confused looks when you came through my door, this is your first time entering my shop. So, allow me to welcome you to my shop where all kinds of rare and stolen goods are available nowhere else, I kid you not! Come on, come a little closer, and take a look at what I'm selling tonight," said Iron Will. I didn't want to offend him, so I walked towards the counter all while Twilight just floated there in utter shock over seeing Iron Will whom she must know.

" You look as though you've got a thing for unusual objects seeing as you were looking at the Iron Knuckle armour, so have I got something really interesting for you. Now I know that it's really bad out there what with the moon falling, but I've got keep my business going because people continue buying unique things even during times of crisis. Tonight's bargain is the All-Night Mask for use at bedtime. I forgot when this was made, but it sure is a freaky mask see?"

" It sure is unique," I commented with hesitation in my voice. Pinkie Pie told me that a mask was being sold here, but I wasn't expecting it to look so weird. I couldn't quite explain it even to my own mind, for the bizarre design was just too much for me. Still, this is something I need to purchase because I've collected several masks now, and it seems having many more is going to be rather useful. A shame that Pinkie never gave me a description about this mask, but I guess she's not welcomed in here because of how odd she looks, and Iron Will may not appreciate her company.

" When you put it on, you can try and try to fall asleep, but you won't be able to. Pretty creepy, huh?" asked Iron Will.

" I don't know. A lot of people love sleeping because it gives them a refreshing feeling when they wake up, yet others want to avoid sleep especially if they are extremely busy, and can't afford to waste any time with their eyes closed," I replied. It then dawned on me that this mask would make it so that I don't need to rest due to working so hard on any given task, but the problem was wearing this mask would make me stand out pretty badly."

" While that's true buddy, it possess arcane powers neither of us could begin to understand," said Iron Will. Actually, both Twilight and I would be able to figure it out as both of us were capable of magic, yet we stared at each other for a brief second as an indication not to let him know what we're capable of. Staring closely at the All-Night Mask, I could tell that it had been crafted with a lot of care, but perhaps fashion wasn't the maker's strongest suit.

If Rarity were here and saw me purchase this, I doubt I'll ever hear the end of it. Still, I really do want to get it, but I don't have enough rupees in my wallet... not even close because I haven't been doing any grinding even though this is something I told myself I need to do because of situations like this.

" How much?" I asked.

" 500 rupees," replied Iron Will.

" Figured you say that," I said.

" Oh? Then tell me what would you price it at?" asked Iron Will.

" I'd keep it the same because it is something unique seeing as no one else around town has anything like it," I replied. No, I wasn't about to cheat Iron Will because that would make me a liar, and I'd rather be honest and accept the fact that I'm too poor to purchase this mask, than be dishonest and manipulative.

I then told him that while I appreciated him showing it, I said that I had very few rupees on hand, so he might as well just kick me out for wasting his time. At first Iron Will looked as though he was about to blow a fuse given the expression he had on his face, but then he began smiling as though he were planning something.

" I like you buddy..." began Iron Will.

" Excuse me!?!?" I said in utter surprise.

" Most people who come in here try real hard to cheat me at every turn, but not you which makes you better than them. You're honest, and that's something I forgot about a long time ago back when I was a much younger man. Also, no one has ever inquired about the All-Night Mask before with the exception of you, so perhaps we can make some kind of deal," smiled Iron Will.

" What do you have in mind?" I asked.

" I really want to get rid of this mask, but since you don't have any rupees, I was thinking that maybe I could give it to you. In exchange, you would have to do something really quick in return considering the moon will be crashing in just a few hours. In this fashion, you get what you want without having to pay a fortune, and, I'll at last be finally rid of this mask," replied Iron Will. Getting it without having to pay that outrageous price would really be beneficial to me, but this whole thing about doing him a favour in return has me worried, for that smile of his makes him appear as untrustworthy.

Still, I'm this close to getting another mask, and I don't want to go away empty-handed after coming here despite my own judgment. Yet when I saw the look in Twilight's eyes, I knew straight away that I was making a big mistake. Iron Will was a shady businessman who may or may not be all that honest, but then something else struck my mind. The Takkuri... Twilight said it takes things to the Curiosity Shop due to stealing them from unsuspecting people, so I should confront him about this.

" Do you know about the Takkuri?" I asked.

" Um... no, I have absolutely no idea what you're talking about, I kid you not!" replied Iron Will.

" Your stutter tell me otherwise," I said.

" How did you figure out that the creature belonged to me?" asked Iron Will.

" My friend here told me your Takkuri brings goods here... goods stolen from innocent people who wonder why a weird bird-like creature would steal from them without any kind of provocation. I was told by another friend that you dealt in shady activities such as buying stolen goods from thieves such as the one who loves to prance about," I replied.

" Sakon is one of my regulars," said Iron Will.

" I was thinking about purchasing that mask, or doing you that quick favour, but once I remembered the stuff about the Takkuri, I know now that I've no desire to do any kind of business with you. In fact, the soldiers are still on patrol, so I can easily get one of them down here, and you should have a pretty good idea as to what is about to happen next," I said.

My words must have resonated with Iron Will, for his eyes were filled with fear... fear that his operation would be exposed after keeping it secretive. Even though I didn't want to resort to this method, I wasn't doing this to earn sympathy or to get the mask for free. No, I wanted him to know what can happen when you make the kind of mistake which can lead you down the wrong path in life.

" If you tell them about my business... I'll be ruined," said Iron Will.

" Someday, I'll be back to pick up that mask because I will purchase it for the full amount to show you that I do things in a legitamite manner, but for now I'm taking my leave of you, and be prepared for a visitor to come within the next couple of minutes," I said. Walking out of the Curiosity Shop, and immediately walking over to the soldier who was standing guard by the west gate, I told him everything which resulted in him being shocked.

It looks as though Mayor Dotour according to him has been wanting this shop closed down, but they never had any proof of the shady business as no one was willing to come forward. The soldier told me that even though the town was doomed, he still had a duty to perform even if it meant Iron Will not being punished for very long. For me, this was a victory as I didn't want anyone else making a mistake similar to the one which ruined my life for years... perhaps this will make him see the error of his ways, but if not then I tried my best to get him to change his life around.

" Why did you do that?" asked Twilight.

" I could sense that if he continued down his current path, one of his customers would eventually try to kill him out of sheer frustration, and that would just be a tragic end which he doesn't deserve despite what he's done. Just like how you gave me a second chance Twilight, I wanted Iron Will to have the same opportunity, yet if he chooses to spit on my offer, I did the best that I could, so it's not my fault if he were to meet an untimely demise. I know everything that's just happened will mean nothing in just a matter of moments given we'll be resetting time, but he needed to be exposed for the greater good," I replied.

" And the All-Night Mask?" asked Twilight.

" I'll get it another time," I replied.

" Then we have nothing else left?" asked Twilight.

" At this point, it's too late to do something, so resetting time is all we can do," I replied as I took out the Ocarina of Time, and spent a few moments looking at it. I know this cycle didn't contribute much towards figuring out how to prevent the moon from destroying Termina, nor find a way to return the world back to normal, but I feel as though progress has been made with regards to collecting these different masks. Oh, and regaining my human form after being trapped as a Deku Scrub for what felt like forever.

Playing the Song of Time while spending a few minutes remembering how it went, everything suddenly went bright, and just like before I fell down where all of those clock faces were surrounding me as a reminder that I was going back through time to the beginning of the three day cycle which is going to be something I'll be getting used to.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain

With time having started once again, I knew that my next destination was Woodfall as there was no other location I could visit at this point until I had acquired more items, and while I did have the urge to get a Bomb Bag, I've got to get my wallet filled up with rupees. I've also got to deposit more at the bank if I want to get my hands on those rewards Fleur Dis Lee mentioned when I first arrived in Clock Town.

Before I could leave town, I had to once again remind the soldier standing guard that I wasn't a child due to having a sword. This wasted a couple of minutes, but he would soon allow me to pass, and upon exiting town and entering Termina Field, I immediately headed south which would lead me towards Woodfall, and things were going smoothly... until Twilight stopped by a large tree which made me wonder what she was up to.

" This tree... there's something about it... something from Tatl's memories which is why I stopped," said Twilight.

" While we do need to go to Woodfall, we won't until you can figure out what her memory is trying to tell you," I said.

" Just give me a moment Sunset," said Twilight. She began to scan the entire tree looking for whatever it was that was making Tatl's memories wanting to inform her, but when I started to look as well, and discovered some kind of crude drawing, she said that's what was making her react. " This drawing... I remember this! Or rather, Tatl remembers this! Anyway, Spike and I drew this with Starlight Glimmer over a year ago according to these memories when we first met her.

It was during a dark, rainy day, and both of us took shelter inside of a giant log just like the one over there. We had to find somewhere safe where we wouldn't be caught in the rain, but what we didn't know was that someone else was there."

" Starlight?" I asked.

" Yes, she was there and looked completely miserable as though something bad had happened. The three of us immediately huddled together in the rain until it would eventually pass, but during that time we began to bond as friends," replied Twilight. No doubt hearing herself say that made her feel bad because of what happened in Equestria courtesy of Starlight according to her very quick summary after she came through the portal after the Friendship Games concluded.

" She told us that she had been fighting with her friends, and that they had left her all alone. Spike and I did think of asking who these friends were, but we decided not to in case Starlight would react in a negative fashion, yet we'd quickly figure out why she had been abandoned."

" What was it?" I asked

" I'm sure it was because she was always playing tricks, nobody wanted to play with her. As you know Sunset, in this world, Starlight has been playing a number of pranks on people which started out innocent where she was having fun at their expense, but to do what she did just because of that... not long before you came along that path back in the Lost Woods, the three of us were planning on robbing the next person who would come.

Starlight convinced us stealing from people would be fun, for most of them had too many possessions, and probably wouldn't miss anything important. Back then, we never questioned why she wanted to resort to thievery, but I suppose we should have voiced our concerns to perhaps persuade her from going too far," replied Twilight.

" It was Sonata Dusk wasn't it?" I asked.

" We encountered her sleeping by herself in the forest, and that made her an easy target according to Starlight. She began to rummage through Sonata's belongings in the hopes of finding something of value, and that's when she discovered Majora's Mask. Starlight picked it up to take a closer look at it... and once she got her power... that's when things started to get worse. Her pranks became more and more violent as opposed to her wanting to have fun by making them miserable, and this in turn caused many to lose their lives in the process, but this is something Spike and I ignored," replied Twilight.

I then began to imagine seeing that exact scene play out in my mind, and it filled me with dread as Starlight was holding up a power she had no idea as to how it worked. I'm guessing that in her mind at that exact moment, she didn't care about any possible side-effects, but instead just wanted to get back at those who wronged her. It's just like the human version of Twilight where she had no idea what magic was, but she wanted to learn more out of a need for knowledge, and not the desire for revenge.

" That's when you ran into me," I said.

" After robbing you, Starlight suddenly changed for the worse where she wanted to make big things happen. Everything she had done thus far had been small according to her which made her feel bored, and she wanted to take things to a bigger level that would make everyone who picked on her suffer. It's apparent now that Majora's Mask not only has provided Starlight with some dangerous magic, but also twisted her mind into something spiteful who desires complete destruction," replied Twilight.

Now things were starting to make sense, yet there were still many mysteries which needed answering. Perhaps the biggest mystery of all revolved around the moon, and how I can prevent it from destroying this world. Even if I reset time constantly just to stave off the impending doom, it's just simply delaying the inevitable, but perhaps I'll discover some kind of answer at Woodfall. As I stared at the pathway which leads into this swamp/forest hybrid, I gulped really hard before entering...

To Be Continued.

Chapter 8: Into the Swamp

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 8, 2015
Chapter 8: Into the Swamp

" This doesn't look like a swamp to me," I commented upon entering the area.

" We still have to get through this section before we finally enter Woodfall proper," said Twilight.

" Guess looking around isn't going to hurt, for we could find something useful," I said. Scanning the area before walking any further, I could barely see a balloon floating off in the distance, and the green object that was attached to it was no doubt Pinkie Pie. It amazes me as to how she manages to get here so quickly, but I suppose trying to figure it out would only give me a headache. There was a tree not too far ahead, but there were no leaves on it, and the bark looked rotted indicating that the tree was dead, so why hadn't anyone come along to cut it down?

Aside from that, there were several Deku Flowers scattered about near where Pinkie was floating, and a pathway which went to the left looked promising. " Maybe I should have picked up some rupees by cutting the grass back out in the field, for it looks as though we'll need a map from Pinkie."

" Woodfall is a large area, and everything looks almost identical which will make navigation difficult. As far as getting more rupees, there are shrubs you can cut down in addition to grass, so hopefully you don't have to leave this area, come back to get more rupees, leave again, come back again, and so on in a repetitive manner until that wallet of yours is filled up with rupees," said Twilight.

" To think that the Deku Scrubs call this place home," I said.

" It's a shame they chose to isolate themselves by living deep within the swamp, but then you can't blame them for it because of how the other tribes have treated them over the centuries," said Twilight.

" I know, but at the same time you can as it was their own treachery which has left them in the position they're in. If they hadn't put preservation of their own kind ahead of forging ties with everyone else across Termina, they wouldn't be treated horribly in return. I doubt anything we can do will change things, for this has been something which has existed far longer than any of us, and I doubt both sides are willing to try and settle any differences," I said. Twilight sighed knowing how correct I was about it, but then I quickly apologized for I didn't mean to make her feel upset seeing as solving friendship problems was her expertise.

" No feed for any apology Sunset because of me," smiled Twilight.

" Why do the Deku betray everyone?" I asked.

" Maybe they feel insecure, and want to make sure that they remain on top even if it means having to use the goodwill of the other tribes to get it. If you were in a group who wanted to be on top Sunset, you'd do whatever was necessary to maintain that position. Speaking out against something which has become a cornerstone of their society for generations would cause you to become an outcast, or much worse. In their eyes, the Deku want to have as many benefits as possible, and everything they do is focused towards their continued survival by treating others as nothing more than pawns with which to further their own agenda," replied Twilight.

That was a pretty good speech she just delivered, and I could tell through her voice that she wishes things were different, but resetting time isn't going to work because this is something which has been happening far too long. I didn't know if there was anything we could to try and thaw the relations between the Deku Tribe, and the other tribes, but trying was better than doing nothing at all.

" We should speak to the ruler of the Deku," I suggested.

" That may or may not be easy depending on what kind of society they live in, for even though you've been in the body of a Deku Scrub courtesy of the curse which was placed upon you by Starlight Glimmer which is form in the form of a mask, you know hardly anything about them," said Twilight.

" Neither do you," I added.

" Granted, but maybe Pinkie Pie may know something seeing as she said she's travelled all over Termina," said Twilight. Despite how eccentric she was in this world, I've got to admit Pinkie has actually provided solid advice which has allowed me to survive so far, but the places I've seen her in lacked monsters, so now the real game was beginning which was quite literal as this was just a video game. One thing though that was going to become rather annoying is that I'll be listening to that same opening speech where Pinkie thinks I'm some kind of forest fairy, and all because resetting time makes her forget that she even talked to me.

The way forward looked clear, so I began to move in the hopes of reaching her, but I didn't take into account that monsters could either by hiding underground, or hiding amongst the environment. Flapping noises suddenly came out of nowhere, and I frantically began searching around to see where it was coming from. Twilight thought I was freaking out given how erratic my movements were, but I quickly assured her that everything was fine because this was normal for me in this situation.

" You see Twilight?" I asked as I looked up at the tree which was where the flapping sounds were coming from. " Even though it looked like I was panicking, I was trying to find the source of the noise in a quick fashion, for taking too long would have caused me to become injured." As I said this, I took out my shield from behind my back, and whatever came at me merely bounced off of it before flying back to where it came from. " I learned a lot when it comes to fighting monsters in this particular way, but I'll admit that I'm a little rusty as it's been a while. However, I have no clue what that thing was, so do you have any ideas?"

" That creature is called a Bad Bat, and while it does have a ridiculous name, it doesn't do much other than try to fly into you. By using your shield, you can deflect its attacks, but you'll only have a few seconds to defeat it otherwise it will fly away where your sword can't reach it. I suppose using a projectile weapon can pick them off before and after they make an attack, but you haven't used your bubbles that much in battle," replied Twilight.

" It looks as though those bats are hoarding around something at the top of the tree," I said.

" Let me take a closer look," said Twilight as she floated up making sure to avoid being struck by the Bad Bats. I know she wants to be more than just a partner and guide for me seeing as she can take care of herself, but she has to remember that she's in the form of a fairy, and they get swatted about quite easily. Upon reaching the top, Twilight began to dart about in the hopes of finding something, and a gasp from her indicated she found what she was looking for, but before she could come back to me, a Bad Bat came along, and slammed into her knocking her out of the sky.

Without thinking of my own safety, I ran forward and caught her by performing a diving catch just as she was about to crash into the ground. I didn't get away scot free though as my knees ended up scraping against the ground causing them to bleed, but again I wanted to save her. Twilight then noticed my wounds, and began to cry because I was hurt because of her rushing off into danger. " Your knees are soaking in what looks like blood, but why did you go and do that? I could have survived the fall very easily."

" As a fairy, you would have suffered heavy injuries because of how fast you were falling. Besides, I'm used to being injured like this, and having bleeding knees is nothing compared to what I've experienced during my last journey," I said.

" You need to tend to those wounds immediately," said Twilight.

" If I can get my hands on a Piece of Heart, or maybe even a Recovery Heart given the former doesn't come up that often, then the healing properties would fix my knees just like that as though nothing happened," I said.

" Then you're in luck as I saw a giant heart up in the tree, but you may find it hard to reach because of the Bad Bats flying around near the top. If they spot you, they will attack you without mercy which could make things even worse," said Twilight. Again, I've experienced a whole lot worse than having both of my knees bleeding blood down my legs, but hopefully Twilight will now realize that this world is dangerous, and that heading off into danger is nothing short of asking for trouble.

Making my way over to the tree, I noticed a series of vines on the one side which looked as though they could be climbed on, and when I tried doing just that, I found myself climbing up towards the top where my prize awaited me. The Bad Bats attacked me while I was climbing up, but I managed to maintain my grip on the vines. When I reached the top, the Piece of Heart was floating there just begging to be taken, so I jumped forward catching it, and falling to the ground in the process although I managed to roll forward slightly preventing me from sustaining any fall damage.

" While I did take some more injuries by being bitten all over, this Piece of Heart will restore me back to full health as though nothing happened," I said. True to form, I felt the warmth once it started to kick in, and my wounds disappeared entirely including the scars. Looking around at where I landed, Pinkie Pie was only a short distance ahead, but then blobs of jelly appeared all of a sudden from below the ground. These creatures had bizarre faces giving them the appearance of being both goofy and creepy looking, yet one was red in colour, and the other was green.

" Okay, those red blobs are known as Red Chu-Chus; virtually harmless unless you act careless in which case they will attack you repeatedly. If you're not at full health, and you defeat one of them, it will pop like a balloon where it will leave behind a single Recovery Heart. If you are at full health, it leaves behind a green rupee which is worth just one, so don't think they can be used to grind rupees. The green blobs are Green Chu-Chus, and behave in the exact same manner, yet replace the Recovery Heart with a Magic Jar as that's what comes from them upon being popped," said Twilight.

" So basically they serve as nothing more than an annoyance?" I asked.

" Pretty much, but you need to know one other thing," replied Twilight.

" What's that?" I asked as I cut down several of the Red Chu-Chus with my sword in order to get the rupees they drop due to being at full health.

" These things will re-spawn after about a minute when destroyed, so unless you want to waste your time destroying them in an endless fashion, you should just keep going as they won't bother chasing you down given how sluggish they are," replied Twilight. Her words would become a reality relatively quickly as the ones I just destroyed immediately came back to life, so I decided to run once I got rid of this second batch of Chu-Chus making sure to collect all of the rupees.

Before approaching Pinkie, there were shrubs nearby which prompted me to cut them all down in the hopes of collecting rupees, but when I cut the first shrub, they started to move about which caught me by surprise at first, but then I quickly grew accustomed to what I was seeing as it was similar to plants back in Equestria even though it's been a long time since I went there.

I've lived in the human world for so long, yet I still remember much about the land of my birth, and I long for the day when an opportunity will come which will allow me to return on my own terms. Until that day, I'm fine with being a human as long as my friends are standing there by my side.

Turning my attention back to Pinkie, she hadn't taken notice of what I had been doing, but I should be used to that seeing she is working to earn extra rupees for her father... that's something I'm having a hard time grasping given how I've never really met her family aside from her sister Maud. Anyway, once again I need a ranged attack in order to bring her down, and that means changing into a Deku Scrub by putting on the Deku Mask.

Even though this was only my third time doing this, the transition between forms still feels like I'm going through immense pain, but at the end I feel completely fine. This must be an example of the magic that is apparent throughout Termina, and maybe I'll figure out how to use it better. Taking out the Deku Mask and putting it onto my face, I once again began convulsing as it began to take effect, and upon letting out a scream which Pinkie didn't hear or notice, my body changed where I was once again a Deku Scrub.

" That still looks painful," commented Twilight.

" Only when the magic within the mask begins to change me," I said. Aiming up at the balloon Pinkie was using, I fired a bubble after forming it with my mouth, and popped her balloon which caused her to drop down along with her obligatory yell. Just before she regained her composure, I removed the Deku Mask changing back to normal where I put it away again before seeing what she has to say this time.

" What's this? Green clothes? White fairy? Madam... are you by chance, a forest fairy?" asked Pinkie Pie.

" I am," I answered with an annoyed sound in my voice because this was now the third time I've had to answer that question, and it was really starting to get old now.

" Oh my! My name is Tingle..." began Pinkie Pie where she suddenly found her mouth being covered by my hand. I wasn't about to listen to the rest of her speech, so I decided to take the initiative by saying that I wanted to learn about Woodfall first, and then I would purchase the map for this area which will be useful if what Twilight says about the size of this swamp is accurate.

Pinkie asked me why did I prevent her from introducing herself, so quickly thinking, I said that I had heard about her from the locals in town who said that if you need a map, Tingle is the one to see. In my own mind, I almost made another blunder due to forgetting about how resetting time erases all traces of my actions during the current cycle. " Really? You have heard of Tingle? Who would have thought that I'd become famous given most avoid me due to my eccentric behaviour."

" I've been meaning to ask about that," I said.

" About why I believe I'm the reincarnation of a fairy?" asked Pinkie Pie.

" Well, there's that, but I was also wondering why people avoid you. If anything, I'd figure you would have lots of people wanting to talk to you seeing as you're full of energy, and follow your own rules," I replied.

" I do appreciate those words Ms. Fairy, but I'm afraid that what you figured out is wrong. Most avoid me because of how I act, and there have been a few occasions where the town soldiers desired to arrest me... which they did... because they thought I was disturbing the peace what with my antics. It took me a couple of days just to prove that my intentions were noble, and that revolves around selling maps, but the experience I felt still remains with me," replied Pinkie Pie.

The soldiers arrested her all because she dresses in a green spandex suit while claiming to be interested in fairies? If there were any doubts about Termina being a peaceful world even on such a small level, those have been thrown away. No wonder there's so much misery around... the moon falling has really had an emotional effect on everyone. Just hearing Pinkie talk about her experiences made me shed some tears, and she noticed this and proceeded to comfort me. " No need for you to cry about what happened to me Ms. Fairy. The soldiers treated me nicely, and I don't blame them as things have been so tense these past couple of days."

" They had no right to arrest you," I said.

" No, but I suppose they just wanted to vent out some frustration. I'll never forget the experience of being arrested, but it was a lot of fun as well because I got to see what their guardhouse looked like," said Pinkie Pie. Her words did stop me crying, but I was still angry over how she was treated. I'm even angry at myself for preventing her from giving out her proper introduction, so for that I apologized, and in my mind I won't do anything like that again.

" Tingle is happy that you are feeling better Ms. Fairy, so I'll proceed to telling you everything I know about Woodfall before focusing on the whole map business. I'm not sure why you would want to come here unless you were looking for adventure, but the swamp has changed a lot ever since the poison started to show up."

" Poison?" I asked.

" Several days ago, the water near where the Deku Palace is located began to become contaminated by poison, and it's made things really difficult for not only the Deku, but for the other creatures that live in Woodfall. Rumours are spreading that someone wearing a weird mask came by just before the poison first appeared, and were somehow able to access the temple which is something only the Deku can do," replied Pinkie Pie. Hearing those two specific words... weird, and mask... made it obvious to me that the poison was caused by Starlight Glimmer, but I was interested in this temple because I had a feeling that important answers could be found there.

I decided to ask Pinkie if she knew anything about the temple, and I was surprised at what she had to say. " Even though the Deku have said the temple is for them only, you'd be surprised how many outside of their tribe have knowledge about it. That's because the Deku are pretty bad at keeping secrets, and this stems back to them backstabbing the other tribes."

" What do you know?" I asked.

" Well, you really need to be a Deku Scrub in order to reach it, and there is a special song that needs to be played on an altar located within the heart of Woodfall itself that can summon the temple which apparently is buried underneath the swamp, but only the Deku Royal Family knows about the song because it's been passed down from generation to generation for a really, really long time," replied Pinkie Pie. That sudden burst of hyper-activity was certainly unexpected given how serious she was just a moment ago, but I've got a feeling that her true self from the human world is shining through even if she isn't aware of it.

Twilight must have sensed this as the expression on her face confirms it, so it looks like once again portions of my friends true personalities survived the transition, but I don't think Equestrian magic is going to help here seeing as it can't be used. So there has to be something else that can be done, but what that is I don't know yet.

My only theory may have been what happened at the end of the Friendship Games where I absorbed the magic of my friends and myself, and became Daydream Shimmer which some of the Canterlot High students called me as a nickname. Maybe if I can remind them of their true elements, it may be enough to get them to remember how things are meant to be, and quite possibly help me stop the moon from crashing into Termina.

The only problem is that my efforts could potentially be wasted given how resetting time erases everything I've done in terms of progress, so there needs to be another way to solve this... unless their elements could somehow make them remember things from previous cycles. Pinkie had been staring at me for some time now, and I think she had been waiting for me to ask her additional questions.

" I've got an ocarina with me, so do you think the Deku Royal Family would be willing to teach me their song?" I asked.

" Deku Pipes are the only instrument which are needed to summon the temple, so using an ocarina isn't really going to do much for you Ms. Fairy. Not only that, but the chances of you learning anything from the Deku are essentially zero," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Why not?" I asked.

" None of the other tribes have ever seen the Deku Palace, and if any of them did make it there, they will never come back if you know what I mean. The Deku are extremely territorial when it comes to their palace, so unless you were one of their kind, you'll never be able to reach the palace," replied Pinkie Pie.

" What if I told you that I can become a Deku?" I asked.

" My response would be sheer laughter before saying that you were pulling my leg," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Well, let me show you something that can be considered magical, but I advise you to step back as I need some room," I said. As soon as she stepped a couple of paces backward, I took out the Deku Mask where I showed it to Pinkie who just stared at me with her smile, and it did feel creepy that she was doing that, but I wasn't about to call her out on it.

Knowing what was about to happen to me next, I put on the mask where once again I began convulsing as the magic within the mask began taking effect, and when I screamed, a bright flash followed, and once again I had become a Deku Scrub. The painful transition was still pretty unbearable, so who knows how long it will be before I get used to it, but Pinkie's reaction was exactly what I hoped for.

" Gasp! You can change into a Deku Scrub!?!? That is the most exciting thing I've ever seen in my entire life!" shouted Pinkie Pie.

" The transition from human to plant is hard on my body, but once I change into this form, I feel perfectly fine, and in case you were wondering, this isn't a permanent thing for all I need to do is just take it off like so..." I said as I began to pull on my face until the mask came off of me. "...and become human again just like that."

" Then you've got no trouble learning that song from the Deku Royal Family in theory," said Pinkie Pie.

" What do you mean in theory?" I asked.

" I thought someone as adventurous as you would have known Ms. Fairy, but that's okay as I can explain it to you. The Deku Queen is the ruler of her people, but while for the most part she is a benevolent ruler, she has a tendency to lose control of her emotions all because of conflicting issues with a certain group of Deku Scrubs," replied Pinkie Pie. If that's the case then I'll need to be careful so as to not make her angry otherwise I'd have the entire tribe coming down on me. " There is one person though who is able to calm her down, and that's her daughter known as the Deku Princess."

" What kind of power does she use?" I asked.

" I wouldn't call it that exactly, but rather she is able to calm her mother down with her sweet voice. I've heard the Deku Princess is very close to the animals that live in the swamp, and this is especially true with the monkeys. Her mother doesn't really get the appeal, but she accepts her daughter's choices in life. Should the queen have lost control, then asking the princess would probably be your best course of action," replied Pinkie Pie.

" And getting to the temple?" I asked.

" As long as you remain in your Deku Scrub form, I see no reason for the Deku Queen to refuse you access," replied Pinkie Pie.

" Then I guess I'm off to see her," I said.

" WAIT!!!!" yelled Pinkie Pie as she grabbed me by the arm which caused me to be pulled to the ground in a rather comedic manner. As I got back onto my feet, and brushed away the dirt on my tunic, I looked at her with a scornful expression on my face, but this quickly faded away due to Pinkie having a concerned look on her face.

" Sorry for doing that to you Ms. Fairy, but it's not quite that easy to get to the Deku Palace. The poisonous water will surely kill you, so trying to get to the palace on foot would be impossible, so you'll need the local guide for that." This made me scratch my head as while what she said about the poison was true, since when would I need a guide? " Once you enter the next area which is known to everyone as the Southern Swamp, you'll see a building located on top of a platform by the water.

This place is known as the Swamp Tourist Center, and you'll need to ask the tour guide if she will take you to the palace. My father also works there at the center running his own business, but he can be a little rough around the edges from what I remember." I've got a feeling Pinkie doesn't have a good relation with whoever is her father in Termina, but maybe I'll have much better luck.

" Now about that map," I said.

" I have two of those available for purchase, and I strongly recommend you getting this one which is for Woodfall. Unlike Clock Town, this region of Termina is quite big, so it's real easy to wind up getting lost. Tingle's price for this map is 20 rupees, so hopefully that won't be an issue. The other map is for Snowhead which lies in the opposite direction, but it will cost 40 rupees to purchase, so unless you have a desire to go up there, I would pass on it," said Pinkie Pie. Thanks to cutting down those shrubs and grass, I had more than enough to pay for a map, and Pinkie's reaction was once again priceless. " Yippee! Tingle is very happy that you purchased one of my maps! In terms of any more information, I suggest seeing the Great Fairy who lives somewhere in the region."

" Do you know where?" I asked.

" Can't say that I do, for I've never made it that far into Woodfall," replied Pinkie Pie. Well that was just great! Okay, maybe not that bad seeing as she just gave me a map for this area, so finding the location of the fountain should be an easy enough task. " Well, call again! Tingle, Tingle, Kooloo-Limpah! These are the magic words that Tingle wrote herself! Don't steal them!" With that, she inflated her balloon before rising to the sky, but I had a lot to think about which had nothing to do with this adventure. Once we were a safe distance away from her as we didn't want her to learn something she wasn't supposed to know, Twilight and I began talking about what we discovered.

" You saw what I did during the conversation?" I asked.

" She began acting hyper although she didn't take much notice," replied Twilight.

" I think that was her element trying to come through," I suggested.

" Glad to see you figured it out Sunset, for that's the reason I came to as well," said Twilight.

" Your expression did clue me in, but why not say something?" I asked.

" Well, I wanted you to see if you could come up with the answer seeing as you have been getting better as solving problems without having to need me to be there, and hold your hand in the process," replied Twilight.

" I know I'm capable of doing that, but I'm not saying I no longer need you Twilight, for my heart still desires for you to be my guiding light, as well as my friend. Just because there are now problems I can solve on my own doesn't mean you've got to stop coming through the portal. If anything, I still need you to help me out, for I've still got some insecurity issues which I'll resolve one day in the future. Also, I need you now more than ever especially when we're both in this situation together," I said.

" Sunset, you don't need to think of yourself as incapable," said Twilight.

" Twilight..." I said.

" You've done things which I could never hope to achieve, so don't sell yourself short as that won't do you any good. If anything, you should embrace who you are, and continue to strive for what you believe in without allowing your insecurities to get in the way. Things will be challenging as you've said before we started out on this journey as we'll be tested to the limits of endurance, yet you've risen to these challenges before, and overcome each and every one. I'll be sure to remind you of this when necessary in case you begin to lose your way, but hopefully it won't come to that," said Twilight.

This is one of the reasons why she and I have become so close as friends, for she has been there to help me get back onto my feet along with the rest of my friends, and I'll always be grateful to them for it. I've got to remind myself that I've come far ever since the day Twilight gave me a chance to understand friendship, and I can only continue to get better from there.

I mean, I helped the human version of Twilight in the same manner by giving her the same chance that I was given, so I owe it to myself to not fall into despair... this won't be easy as Ganondorf wants me to suffer, and I know we've only seen the surface of Termina when it comes to the misery which exists here.

" Last time, it was Equestrian magic which helped our friends to remember the truth," I said.

" Because our magic can't be used here that well because of how it's being restricted by this world's power, then the elements of our friends need to be exposed so that they can remember how things are meant to be," said Twilight.

" The problem though is the whole resetting of time," I said.

" That is a concern, for time magic is something I've not really gotten a grasp of given how difficult it is to control, but I do know enough to understand it in this context," said Twilight. She then floated over to the nearby wall where she beckoned me to follow her, and began to scribble something which looked complicated. Well, complicated to anyone who doesn't understand Equestrian script which is what this was, and I still remember it even after all this time.

Twilight spent a couple of minutes scribbling on the wall, and she did have to fix some mistakes due to being in a hurry given time is against us, but when she was finished, her results were really promising. " If we tried to bring Pinkie Pie's element through entirely, it should be enough for her to remember how the world is really supposed to be, but she may lose this when time gets reset, and that would set us back to the beginning. I was thinking maybe we could find a means of containing her element, and use it accordingly whenever we encounter her."

" It's a good idea in theory Twilight, but I know what happens when you try to contain magic from different people," I said.

" Right... you told me what the other me did by accident," said Twilight.

" Our combined magic caused all kinds of problems in the human world, and I can only imagine what would happen here in Termina if I did the same thing. Our magic doesn't work because of this world's dynamic, but combined it would definitely be a problem," I said.

" Then what can we do?" asked Twilight.

" Last time, I defeated Ganondorf thus completing the "game" which changed everything back, so I'm guessing this time we've got to defeat Starlight Glimmer, and prevent the moon from crashing into Termina. However, there is one complication in the form of the real Ganondorf who intends on getting in the way, and even with my new transformation, I doubt it will be enough to overcome him," I replied.

Twilight then reminded me about not selling myself short, but I told her that my words were true even though I wish that weren't the case. Ganondorf's power is far greater than anything I've ever seen in my entire life, and when I fought him just before he sent me back home, I ponied-up and gave him the full extent of my magic, but he merely described it as me tickling him. From there, he beat me to within an inch of my life, but chose to spare my life because it was his will alone that allowed me to survive the experience.

" He sounds a lot like the villains I've faced in Equestria," said Twilight.

" But they are nothing compared to him as he wields an ancient magic which has existed since the beginning of time, and I don't need to explain this again as I already told you what happened to me," I said.

" So beating this game will change things back?" asked Twilight.

" And live up to Ganondorf's expectations," I replied.

" Why is he so interested in you?" asked Twilight.

" His younger self said he wanted me to become his servant because of who I used to be and that I still had potential, but that was Tirek portraying him, so who knows what the real him is thinking. We'll find out soon though as I've got to fight him again because he will make it so, and hopefully I've lived up to his expectations... for all our sakes otherwise both the human world and Equestria will be conquered and everyone we know dies," I replied.

" First we need to figure out how to bring out the elements of our friends, and somehow keep them going from cycle to cycle. Then, we can focus on figuring out how to stop the moon from crashing. Finally... I guess we somehow defeat Ganondorf, but it may not be easy given what you've said about him. If the magic of friendship has no effect on him, we need to come up with a contingency plan that can work," said Twilight. All of this sounded like pretty tall orders, but there was no other choice but to go through with them. Once Twilight had removed the scribbles she created on the wall, I walked forward until the pathway opened out to signify that we had entered Woodfall.

For an area which is supposedly a swamp, it looked more like a forest than anything else, but then appearances were often deceiving, and I've had plenty of experiences dealing with stuff like that. The most striking feature was a large pink coloured mountain that featured a ring of smoke surrounding the peak which reminded me of Death Mountain back in Hyrule, so perhaps there is an area inside which needs exploring, and hopefully not an inferno.

Ahead was a building located on a raised platform with what looked like a boat floating on the surface of the water below it, so that must be the Swamp Tourist Centre which is where I'll go first in order to gather more information about the area. The water from what I can see looked perfectly fine, yet some kind of strange creature could be seen at the far end of the river blocking the way forward. There was a pathway which disappeared around a corner to my left, so maybe that's somewhere I can search as well.

" We should check the tourist centre first," I suggested.

" Pinkie's father could tell us more about this place," said Twilight.

" I still can't believe her father works here," I said.

" There are many things which will be difficult for you to believe, yet you must overcome these challenges if you are to succeed."

" WAAAAH!" I screamed as I looked to my right, and seeing another familiar face. Standing on some kind of stone slab was a giant owl, but it was Flash Sentry who was sitting on the owl's back who caught my attention. Why is it every time he speaks out of the blue, it causes me to scream in the same manner I used when Maud Pie scared me during that sleepover we all had when Twilight returned?

" Flash Sentry!?!? Here!?!?" exclaimed Twilight. I could see her blushing which made me smile and roll my eyes in response, but then I doubt he'd be willing to return the affections as he has no idea who she is in this world. Then again, in my previous adventure, Flash Sentry was pretty knowledgeable even when scaring me out of my wits, so perhaps it will be the same this time.

Twilight was still fawning over him because of not seeing him for a while, but I quickly pulled her aside, and told her that this wasn't the same guy we both know despite his choice of clothes giving off a sense that he is a veteran warrior. " I know he's not the same Flash, but just seeing him made me react like that."

" Of course he did," I said sarcastically.

" This is a rare sight. You are a fairy child, correct?" asked Flash Sentry.

" What gave me away?" I asked.

" You wear clothes that come from a mystical forest that is not of this world, and you are also in the company of a fairy who appears to be quite smitten with me. That's the first time anyone has shown affection towards the likes of me, yet I am one who travels about alone with my trusty owl. What business might you have in this poisoned swamp? If you dare not venture further, I shall pass no judgment. It is better that you hurry back to town," replied Flash Sentry.

" I have no intention of running away," I said.

" Then you possess a strong heart and determination which shall be tested," said Flash Sentry.

" I've only just begun this journey, so giving up this early would be too easy, and I've been through a lot worse than this," I said.

" Yes, I can tell that you have experienced many hardships, but are you sure that these will be enough to see you through what lies ahead? Again, I shall pass no judgment upon you fairy child, but claiming you've done something like this before is one thing, but to actually go and do it is another," said Flash Sentry. It sounded like he didn't want me to continue forward, and accept what is going to happen, but I'm not about to give up! I know I'll be tormented immensely along the way, but I've got to do this if I want to change everything back.

I then repeated my desire to stick to the path I've chosen, and he was taken aback slightly before smiling at me which must mean he's glad I'm not going to run away. " Then you have accepted the fate which has been placed before you, but you must know something very important which is knowledge that eludes you. This swamp you are in has lost its guardian deity, but it was destined to fade anyway."

" Guardian deity?" I asked.

" It seems there is much about this world which you do not understand, but allow me to reveal this knowledge anyway. In each of the four regions that comprise Termina, a guardian sleeps within the temple of that region, and remains dormant until they are summoned when the world has need of their might. Unfortunately, a dark power has caused them to vanish, and no one knows what has become of them. Without the guardian deities, this world is doomed to suffer in an eternal nightmare until the end comes. As you can see from what is falling from above, the end shall come within mere days," replied Flash Sentry.

" Is it just the guardian from Woodfall who has vanished?" I asked.

" No, that is not solely limited to this swamp... the other regions have lost their respective deities as well," replied Flash Sentry. Now things were starting to make a little sense, but I don't think Flash has any idea about what these deities are supposed to be. I mean, I've not asked him about them yet, but I've got a feeling he may not know, or if he does then he desires for me to figure that part out. Could it be that I need to somehow get these deities to stop the moon from falling?

That did sound like quite the stretch in my mind, but maybe it's true, and I just can't seem to grasp the concept. Twilight may have an answer herself, but then she's just as confused as I am when it comes to all of this lore and legends of Termina. " Since you have the courage and determination to proceed in the face of destiny, I shall teach you something useful.

Before coming here, had you not seen any of the stone statues that bear close resemblance to my companion?" Just when I was trying to grasp one thing, Flash Sentry had to bring up another, and one which I immediately didn't answer for I was wondering about these deities he spoke of. By the time his question did register with me, I realized that I hadn't seen anything that matches the description.

" I don't think so," I answered.

" Since you have much going on inside of your mind, I suspect that you have not taken notice of these even when in plain sight. There is no need to feel saddened if you think I am offended with your answer, but you should know that these statues will prove invaluable. Given that time is something which you have little of, what I shall provide will give you more, but not in a literal sense. I have placed statues throughout the land to aid the one with the power to change the destiny of this land... wherever she may appear, and I believe the one who wields such a power is you," said Flash Sentry.

" Are you sure about that?" I asked. This is not the first time I've been given such a daunting task, but what is happening in Termina is far worse than Hyrule, so already the pressure was starting to get to me, and I've barely started this journey. Flash Sentry is just trying to tell me important matters, yet my mind has other things that are worrying me, and destiny just got added which makes it worse. He said that he could give me more time, but how is that even possible? I'm already defying nature by resetting time, so what could he provide which wouldn't cause further problems?

" If you interact with any of those stone statues... then the song carved at the feet of my companion will certainly be of some assistance. Once, one would have needed to strike them with a sword, but that is no longer necessary as a mere interaction will suffice. Remember this song well, and play it wherever the need arises," replied Flash Sentry.

" What does it do?" I asked.

" The Song of Soaring will allow you to ride on the very wind, and travel effortlessly from one location to the next provided that you have activated the statues. I am sure it will make traversing this land an easier experience, and allow you to have more time to solve a particularly difficult situation," replied Flash Sentry. My eyes suddenly widened with excitement over the possibilities that such a song could provide. I mean, walking around is good and all, but a time will come where my feet will get blisters, so warping around will prevent that.

While I've dealt with using warp magic, I barely used those songs Sheik taught me before, yet this could be a song which I'd use frequently. After grinning for a few moments, Flash beckoned me to take a closer look at the stone slab his owl was perched on, and inscribed were several notes that prompted me to take out my ocarina. I doubt Flash has any musical talent in this world, so it looks like I'll have to memorize this song.

Good thing music is something I specialize in courtesy of being a member of the Rainbooms, and it was my guitar playing which has given me a stronger understanding of the art. It took me only one attempt to play the Song of Soaring, and I could feel strong gusts lifting me up into the air as their way of saying that they will provide assistance. All I need do now is find some of those statues in order to make good use of it. " From the first time you play this song, we shall become eternal friends, transcending time and place!" Flash's words sounded powerful, but also confusing which prompted me to inquire about it.

" Are you saying you'll be unaffected whenever I reset things?" I asked.

" Perhaps, or perhaps not, yet you will find out for certain when we meet again," replied Flash Sentry.

" Wait!" shouted Twilight whose sudden burst caught me off guard.

" I was wondering when you would say something little fairy," smiled Flash Sentry.

" It's just that I... well... I... the thing is," said Twilight as she began blushing again, and my response was the same as before... smirking and rolling my eyes. " I was wondering if you could tell us where we should go next. I mean, we have a pretty good idea, but we're not what you would call familiar with the land." At least she was able to regain her composure, but maybe she ought to not react like that given this wasn't the Flash Sentry we knew. The vision between fantasy and reality is fragile here after all.

" Seek out the practitioners of magic who reside in the direction opposite of this stone slab, for you will need to aid them before the truth becomes known. Never lose faith in yourself fairy child, and success shall be certain," said Flash Sentry. With that, he commanded his owl to rise, so I backed away otherwise I could get blown away, and then a few moments later, he took to the skies until he vanished over the horizon. The stone stab in the meantime had since vanished giving me the impression that the Song of Soaring was one that had to be remembered along with the Song of Time.

" I can't believe Flash was here," said Twilight.

" And you were smitten over him," I added.

" Was I being that ridiculous?" asked Twilight.

" You did lose a slight amount of dignity, but I can let it slide as it has been a while since you last saw him," I replied.

" So should we pay ourselves a visit to these magicians?" asked Twilight.

" I think going to the Swamp Tourist Centre is in order, for we could find some more information there," I replied.

" Well, whatever decision you decide to make, we've got to pick up the pace as I think we've already spent close to half the morning talking," said Twilight. I looked up at the sky to see what she was on about, and the sun was almost at its peak which meant time was already slipping away. Was it possible to somehow slow down time itself so that everything moves at a slower pace? I didn't know if my words were feasible, but I had to get going, so once I put the ocarina back into my pouch, I headed over to the ladder propped up which would give me access to the centre, and climbed it to discover another Business Scrub was located there.

" What do you suppose his business is?" I asked.

" Not sure, but hopefully he doesn't want a Moon's Tear as well," replied Twilight.

" We'll come back to him," I said as I walked up to the door, and entered the Swamp Tourist Centre where I found myself surprised at the décor. It looked pretty pleasant unless you weren't a fan of green, but there were two locations which had potential; one was a desk with a large man standing behind it who seemed to be ashamed of something, and the other was a hole in the wall with a sign both above and below it.

Twilight then revealed to me that the one by the desk was Trenderhoof, and I remember seeing him among the members of the Shadowbolts during the Friendship Games. She told me he also exists in Equestria where he's a famous pony who writes various articles for Equestrian magazines although not everyone knows him, yet the pony version of Rarity was smitten with him at one point. I chuckled as I could imagine seeing her fawning over him, but he looked like someone who wasn't about writing anything. Still, I walked up to Trenderhoof in order to see what he had to say.

" Blimey! Where is she? That spoiled child is off playin' hooky again! A child her age has no business searching for fairies!" Trenderhoof said as covered his eyes with one of his hands, and shook his head back and forth in embarrassment, but did he just say something about a child and fairies? Could this be Pinkie Pie's father? Actually, I've met her real father before, but this was still quite a shock even though I knew it was coming. " I love her an' all, but I wish she didn't wear that green outfit, and prance about! She says she would be sellin' maps to help, yet I think she is more invested in fairies than helping me."

" Excuse me," I began.

" Oh... ahem... welcome to the Swamp Tourist Centre where you can learn as much as you want about Woodfall, but you'll need to read them books over there as I don't quite feel like providin' a description," said Trenderhoof.

" I already have some ideas about what this place is like," I said.

" Then what brings you here? I suppose you've taken a pretty good picture am I right? Well then, why don't you show me the pictograph you've taken? Come on! You don't need to be shy or anything," said Trenderhoof. I then looked to my left, and then to my right as though he was expecting something, but I just stood there with a blank expression on my face because I had no idea what he was talking about. " Huh? Is this your first time entering the pictograph contest?

Well, the Swamp Tourist Center is currently holding a pictograph contest open to all ages, from children to adults. Now, the rules are really simple to this. In order to get any kind of credit for this contest, you need to take a pictograph of something that appears in the swamp. If you show me a pictograph from an area other than the swamp, I won't accept it under any circumstances. The prizes you can win vary depending on how rare of a pictograph you've got.

For example, if you show me something like say one of those Big Octos near where all that poisonous water is, you'll get only a few rupees as those are common, but showing me, say, a photo of the Deku Queen... well now... that would get you the best prize. No matter what you show me, a free boat cruise gets awarded as a special prize just for participating."

" That was quite the long explanation," I said.

" Well, I wanted to make sure you knew everything in case you had questions," said Trenderhoof. It seems to me that these pictographs are a lot like photos which we take using our cell phones back in the human world, but I doubt they have anything that sophisticated here. I'm expecting the device to be something old and archiac... not like that's a bad thing as it reminds of good times in Equestria... when I wasn't acting like I was superior to everyone else. Trenderhoof was holding his hands out as though he didn't know what to make of me, but I quickly nodded to indicate my awareness of the rules. " So, would you like to enter our contest?"

" It sounds like fun," I replied.

" Oh, but to enter, you first must take the boat cruise, yet that's going to be a problem given that the one who runs the service isn't available right now. Normally, you'd speak with her, and she would get things going, but it's been a few hours now since she left, yet it feels like somethin' is wrong," said Trenderhoof.

" Wrong?" I asked.

" I know that old hag really well given how we're the only two people who work in this centre, but she's never been gone this long before. Unless you can find out what happened to her, the boat cruise isn't going anywhere, and you won't be able to get yourself a Pictograph Box," replied Trenderhoof.

" Okay, so where would I even begin to find her?" I asked.

" She has a twin sister who runs the Magic Hags Potion Shop located near the Woods of Mystery, so I'd talk to her about where she went to. I know you want to do this because your voice tells me how desperate you are in wanting to take the cruise, for it will take you to the Deku Palace. Not that it's any of my business little lady, but humans who go to the Deku Palace often end up hating the experience because those Deku are really territorial.

You'd literally have to be one of them in order to get inside, and I know those witches don't have potions or spells which can change a person into one o' them," replied Trenderhoof. Thanking him for the information, I left the centre where my mind started to think about what he said regarding witches.

There was something in my mind which was itching for me to remember, but I couldn't which means I'm going to experience something I wish I were better prepared for. It also looks like becoming a Deku Scrub is the order of business in Woodfall, so I'll have to quickly get used to changing back and forth between forms. The Business Scrub had been watching me for some time now, so I decided to see what he had to say because that look on his face was just creepy. I'm hoping he doesn't want something because I currently have nothing to give.

" Welcome to my Deku Flower, and I apologize if my staring at you was unnerving, but I was hoping that you would stop by. Normally, I'd be selling Magic Beans to my fellow Deku provided they purchased them from the man I get them from, but perhaps you might be interested as well?"

" Did you say Magic Beans?" I asked. Twilight had no idea what was going on, but I remember what happened last time, for I ended up spending a great deal of money purchasing ten of them which continued to go up in value by ten every time I bought one. Upon thinking back on it, it wasn't my best idea, but then I did in order to make someone happy even if it meant losing rupees. It also occurred to me that I don't have seven years before the beans grow, so maybe there's another way to make them flourish.

" Ah, so you're familiar with them?"

" I suppose you could say that," I replied.

" They may look like ordinary beans, but they have special powers which enable one to reach new places just by stepping on them. Now, I have this suspicion that you don't know how to use them even though you're familiar with them, so I'm afraid that I can't sell you any until you get them from my source. It's strange how he managed to build a shop right underneath the Deku Palace, and no one has ever figured it out. He is one clever human that's for sure, but at the same time he's essentially stuck there as leaving would cause him to be arrested."

" Do these Magic Beans have any new properties?" I asked.

" I heard that they found a means to make them grow instantly rather than having to wait several years. All it takes is ordinary water, and they will grow just like that." I then smacked my head over hearing this, and I couldn't believe that was the secret to making them grow. You'd think this could have been applied in Hyrule, but maybe that was an idea not programmed into the game. That's when the Business Scrub started looking distant as though something were on his mind, so I asked about it as a means of lending an ear in order to listen. " I've been selling my wares here in this swamp for a long time now, but because of all that poison, no one from the palace comes this way. I really want to set my shop in a much more lively location where customers of all kinds could come and purchase what I have."

" And how do you plan on going there?" I asked.

" Through the proper channels of course, but since you don't have what I need to be able to go there, please forget I ever said anything." His sudden abrupt end to the conversation made me realize that talking to him at least for now was a waste of time, and while he thought I didn't know what the channels were, I've got a pretty good feeling that I need to give him that deed I got from the previous Business Scrub back in town. Since there was nothing else for me to do, I climbed back down the ladder, and proceeded forward in the direction of the Magic Hags Potion Shop.

" Well, we certainly learned a great deal," said Twilight.

" In order for us to reach the Deku Palace, we need to take that boat cruise," I said.

" Which involves finding whoever runs it," said Twilight.

" You know, the fact that we need to speak to hags reminds me of something," I said.

" What?" asked Twilight.

" Something that happened to me back in Hyrule which involved dealing with two witches who manipulated an entire tribe, but it couldn't be them again could it? Nah, if it were them then we would be walking into a trap," I replied. Sometimes I wish that I paid more attention to these premonitions of mine, for I would soon discover that what I believed to be wrong was actually correct. Upon reaching the edge of the water, my first instinct was to check and make sure it wasn't poisonous or anything.

Twilight then questioned as to what I was doing taking a closer look, and I responded to her as I've wanted to bring this up with her for a while. " Unlike you Twilight, instead of reading books, I had the desire of going out into the field in order to do a more hands-on approach with my studies. Even now, I still do this in the human world such as when I used a device in order to understand how magic worked there by using our friends as test subjects." A bottle in my possession would have made this easier, but I decided to go with an unorthodox method... tasting the swamp water. Cupping my hands together, and scooping up some water, I drank it only to spit it out a few seconds later as it tasted awful.

" Why did you do that?" asked Twilight.

" Like I said, a hands-on approach," I replied.

" And now your mouth has had swamp water in it," moaned Twilight.

" At least it's not poisonous which is the most important thing," I said. Twilight simply shrugged her shoulders as I began to walk into the swamp water which went halfway up my body, so this was going to be quite a trek unless I switch to a Deku Scrub, and hop along those lily pads for a faster means of crossing. Twilight started laughing at me because of wadding my way through the water, but then my scowling expression stopped her in her tracks.

" Sorry about that," said Twilight.

" Spike often did the same thing because he could fly while I had to do things the hard way," I moaned.

" You two really got along well," smiled Twilight.

" For the most part we did, but there were times where he questioned my methods and vice-versa. Of course, this made our friendship all the more special as our bantering kept us going even during difficult situations. Believe me Twilight, what I'm doing now is nothing compared to what will be coming later on," I said.

After what took like an hour to finally make it across, I shook myself off as my tunic was soaking wer, and continued forward down a narrow pathway which twisted about a few times, but as I was about to reach a large open area, I was ambushed by two plants which I remember from before.

" Plants are sentient here," observed Twilight.

" But they aren't friendly," I added.

" The one on the left is a Deku Baba, but it looks really withered as though no one has watered it for a very long time, so a single swipe of your sword will be enough to cut it down without a problem. As for the one on the right, it's a Mini Baba, a smaller version of the Deku Baba where it has no stem which connects to the mouth. This makes it annoying to discover as you could end up getting bitten if you were to step on it," said Twilight.

" This is where my magic would be important," I sighed.

" Well, you can't use your own natural magic, so you'll have to come up with some other tactic," said Twilight. Since neither monster could lunge out against me, I took out my sword and chopped the stem of the Deku Baba which destroyed it, and revealed a Deku Stick which I gladly picked up. " Huh? Why would you want to carry around a stick when you've got better items?"

" Deku Sticks can be lit in order to solve puzzles, and light the way in dark places," I replied.

" In that case, collect as many of them as possible," said Twilight. With that in mind, I destroyed the Mini Baba without getting my feet near it, and it also produced a stick which I took because I'm likely to be using one or two at some point in this region. The open area consisted of a rather gaudy looking shop located on top of another platform which required me to reach it using a ladder which had been propped up against it. " You know, that house up there reminds me of Zecora's house in the Everfree Forest in that it looks just as mysterious, and I can sense powerful magic coming from it."

" Who was Zecora again?" I asked.

" She's a zebra who comes into Ponyville sometimes to buy ingredients for her potions, and her rhyming is both exquisite and confusing," replied Twilight. She sounded like an interesting character, and it's possible that she could be inside waiting to help anyone who happens to have need for it. Still, what Trenderhoof said about hags did fill me with dread, but I've got to go inside to find out what happened to the one sister who has vanished.

Climbing up the ladder until I made it to the top of the platform, I could sense magic flowing about, and it didn't feel threatening in any way. Of course, there was also a powerful odor which most likely came from whatever they were using to create their potions, but it's good that I'm used to magic otherwise the odor would have knocked me out cold by now. Walking up to the door of the shop, and going inside, everything immediately went dark as though this were some kind of dungeon or something.

" Quite the atmosphere huh?" I asked.

" There does appear to be a lot of powerful magic flowing through here," replied Twilight.

" Not to mention clutter," I added.

" When you work with all kinds of magic, you have a strong tendency to want to learn as much about it as possible. That can result in what we're seeing right now, but at least we don't have to worry about finding any cobwebs around here as everything is remarkably clean," said Twilight.

" It's probably more organized than your castle," I chuckled.

" I wouldn't deny anything that obvious, but yeah my castle could do with some cleaning," said Twilight.

" Still, there's something about this place which strikes me as familiar," I said. It began eating away at me as though I knew what the answer was, but my mind just couldn't come up with the solution. Fortunately, I wouldn't have to think about it for much longer as the sounds of someone shuffling about in front of me broke the silence of thought. You'd think there would be more adequate light in this shop, a shop cluttered with knick-knacks, books, cauldrons, and even dust which looked like it was there in layers, but I guess they aren't tidy when it comes to their own well-being.

The shuffling got louder and was followed by some heavy wheezing before both that and the shuffling came to a stop. Then, the sounds of someone fiddling about in the darkness could be heard, and then a candle got lit which prompted me to look forward.

" Blast it all! I really should remind that sister of mine that we need to find better sources of light instead of a wretched candle! One of these days, someone is going to get themselves hurt, and I'm not talking about any potential customers who come through that door. Oh? Well, imagine that! Someone has paid the Magic Hags Potion Shop a visit, and she appears to be quite the outrageous individual." My body came to a complete stop as did my heart, for I couldn't believe who was standing there in front of me, and neither could Twilight as she remembers this person quite vividly...

To Be Continued.

Chapter 9: Mysterious Woods, and Familiar Faces

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 12, 2015
Chapter 9: Mysterious Woods, and Familiar Faces

" Queen Chrysalis!" exclaimed Twilight as she darted out in front of me in order to attack the character whom she assumed was an enemy of hers, and while I tried to hold her back, she was much too fast for me. I could only close my eyes, and wait for the inevitable which would be Twilight learning an important lesson. Granted, my reaction would have been to do the same thing given what happened in Hyrule, yet I chose to wait and see given this hag had not shown any kind of aggression.

" What!?!? Why is this fairy buzzing around me?" asked Chrysalis.

" I don't know how you got here Chrysalis, but I'm not going to let you get away with whatever it is you're planning," replied Twilight. She continued to dart about making the occasional strike against her head, and all Chrysalis could do was swat at my friend in an effort to get rid of her. In the meantime, I tried to bring the situation under control by telling Twilight that this wasn't who she thought it was with utter failure, but eventually I began losing patience which resulted in me screaming.

This brought Twilight to a sudden stop where both she, and Chrysalis looked at me as though I had made some kind of grave sin, so all I did was blush immensely before sinking down to the ground in utter embarrassment for having to yell to stop all of this. " Why did you stop me?" Twilight asked as she floated back over to me.

" That's not who you think it is," I replied.

" What!?!? Of course that's Queen Chrysalis, the ruler of the Changelings, who I've dealt with on several occasions where she tried to cause all kinds of problems for the ponies of Equestria. I'm assuming you know all of this based on your own studies right?" asked Twilight.

" I know who she is according to what you've told me about her in our friendship reports, but this isn't the same person you've come to know," I replied. I then had to remind her that in this world, while the people we encounter look like those we know from both the human world and Equestria, they were completely different characters because of the memories they have of Termina as opposed to their own.

Twilight then blushed a bright red knowing she had made a grave mistake, and began begging for forgiveness as she allowed her emotions to cloud her judgment. I know that feeling pretty well as it was my emotions which caused me to abandon my own studies in the first place. I always saw myself as superior to everypony else, but in truth this was just a delusion on my part, for friendship is what I lacked back then along with humility.

I then explained the rest of Queen Chrysalis's story to Twilight regarding her role in Hyrule, where she served as one of Ganondorf's surrogate mothers who taught him the ways of evil magic, and she along with her sister manipulated the Gerudo into following such an evil man. Even though I could never forgive Chrysalis for what she did, I could tell this version lacked any kind of evil force coming from her heart.

Instead, I could sense a warm glow although it was starting to show signs of darkness given Twilight's actions who flew over to the witch in an attempt to save face. " I am so, so sorry for attacking you like I did. You just reminded me of someone I know... someone who caused me and my friends plenty of trouble, and it made me lash out in sheer frustration because of my own failings."

" At least you had the gall to apologize little fairy, so I'll forgive you this one time. Know that if you ever do something like that again, I'll have no choice but to use you in one of my magic brews as fairy magic has quite a lot of potential," said Chrysalis. Twilight then floated back over to me, her head hung in shame, and her face blushing with both embarrassment and sadness, where she hid underneath my hat which made me look at Chrysalis with scorn in my eyes.

" I was only kidding when I said that I would use your fairy, so there's no need to be angry with me. Besides, that little one didn't really do all that much to me other than become annoying. Anyway, welcome to the Magic Hags Potion Shop where we brew all kinds of potions to suit your needs. I am Kotake, and I generally run this place on my own seeing as my sister, Koume, has her hands full dealing with the Swamp Tour which goes through this area. You know, it's been a while now since anyone has come along in order to go to the Deku Palace, but then who can blame them because of all that poison located near there."

" You don't know the half of it," I said.

" Has it gotten even worse?" asked Chrysalis.

" Actually, I don't know what the condition is, for I haven't been to the Deku Palace, and I really want to," I replied.

" You want to go there!?!? Not many are willing to do what you just said, but I suppose you've got some kind of valid reason, so would that make you a boat cruise customer? My sister would be so thrilled to hear that someone has finally come along to take that cruise, but I'm afraid that I have some unfortunate news. Koume has gone into the woods located behind this shop looking for mushrooms which we need for some new potions which are sure to be of merit. I'm not very good when it comes to finding those little things, so she takes it upon herself to find them," said Chrysalis.

" Well, she hasn't been back for quite some time," I said.

" And how do you figure this?" asked Chrysalis.

" The man who works at the Swamp Tourist Centre told me she hasn't been back for quite some time," I replied. This prompted Chrysalis to begin fumbling about as though she was looking for something, and as she searched, I could hear various items clanging about which was a reminder that the shop really needed some organization given the clutter. After a couple of minutes, she finally turned her attention back at me, holding what looked like some kind of musty book. It must be really old given how dust escaped from it when she opened it using a latch on the side, and the sounds of pages flipping almost made this whole experience boring. " Ummmm..." I began upon noticing she was ignoring me. " ... I was wondering if you were listening to what I said?"

" Of course I was listening impatient child, but I'm also looking up where Koume wrote down in our journal about how long she said she was going to be gone for. All of this clutter in our shop really needs to be addressed one day!" Chrysalis moaned before continuing to look through her book which made me feel just as embarrassed as Twilight even though I didn't use any anger, and just when it looked as though things would get even more dull, Chrysalis slammed her hand onto the pages of the book before making some kind of horrible sound. " Ah-ha! This is what I needed to find! Now then, Koume left at around this time, and this much time has passed since then... yes... that fellow was right about my sister being gone for so long. Say, could you go find her for me?"

" You said she was in the woods right?" I asked.

" Yes, but I must warn you that those dense trees are not what you think they are. The Woods of Mystery is a place where one can easily become lost due to how every path looks identical with one another, and the pathway is never the same during each subsequent day. Ask the monkeys that live there for guidance as they know that area better than anyone else. If you do manage to find where my sister is in there, please come back and let me know because I do worry about her," replied Chrysalis.

It looks as though I have no choice but to find her sister otherwise I won't be able to reach the Deku Palace. Upon leaving the shop and stepping back outside, my eyes had to adjust to the brightness given how dark it was in there, but I then noticed the sun was beginning its descent which means I have a couple more hours before nightfall.

" So where are these Woods of Mystery?" I asked.

" I believe the entrance is over there," replied Twilight as she pointed towards a cave entrance at the far end of the clearing.

" What do you know about these woods?" I asked.

" Tatl has never been there before according to her memories, so I won't be able to guide us through it. However, Chrysalis did say that we should seek the advice of the monkeys... you know... I find it difficult for me to view her as a good person in Termina given what she has done," replied Twilight.

" Like I said, everything is a case of black and white when it comes to this sort of thing. Those who were enemies in the human world, or in Equestria have become friends as is the case with Queen Chrysalis, yet others who were friends have become enemies which means having to overcome them even when we don't want to. I'm used to dealing with this, but you need to show a little more restraint," I said. Even though Twilight had tears forming in her eyes because of what she did, I reassured her that I wasn't angry because I would have done the exact same thing. While I've changed for the better, there are times where my anger comes forth from deep within; an anger that could cause anyone to cry, and make me feel guilty over regressing back to my past.

" Guess we should go into the Woods of Mystery, and find Chrysalis's sister," said Twilight.

" Want to know who it is?" I asked. My question caused Twilight to react quite surprisingly, and said she was surprised that I figured it out without actually finding the sister, but then I told her that there were some consistencies between Termina and Hyrule. It took me a while to understand this one, but it seems that those from the human world and Equestria for the most part who appeared in the former, will appear here in the latter as the same character just with different personalities.

While this didn't make much sense in my own head, I figured it out which should make future encounters more appropriate. " In Hyrule, Chrysalis was one of the two witches that I told you about, and since she is also here, then Trixie is most likely who we'll find in the woods."

" What!?!? Trixie is related to Queen Chrysalis?" asked Twilight.

" Only in this world," I replied while trying to calm my friend down before she loses it again. I know it sounds weird to me too, but I just roll with it because that way you don't end up making some kind of blunder which could prove costly later. Once I climbed down the ladder, and onto the ground as I had no intention of jumping off as I was bound to slip on the water below, I made my way to the entrance of the Woods of Mystery where a strange aura could be felt coming from the entrance. Could this be Trixie's magic that she has in Termina, or is it something else?

" Sorry about my outburst like that Sunset, but Trixie did do some things back in Ponyville," said Twilight.

" As you've told me before," I said.

" I know she left on good terms, and I heard from Rarity, Fluttershy, and Applejack that she has changed for the better, but I still have this uneasy feeling about her. I guess it's difficult for me to let go of something so trivial given how Trixie has proven herself," said Twilight.

" If you give someone a chance, and they are willing to show change, then you know you've made the right decision," I said. In the human world, Trixie did try to get rid of us during the Battle of the Bands due to being furious over how her band didn't go to the finals, but she along with most everyone else at Canterlot High were under the Sirens control, so her actions weren't by her own will.

Still, I believe this encounter will be a good one for if someone as evil as Queen Chrysalis can be good in Termina, then Trixie will be the exact same thing even though she was nice to begin with. Upon entering the Woods of Mystery, it brought back memories of the Lost Woods from before, and I think this place was meant to be a recreation of it. It didn't feel ominous because of how bright everything was, but I knew not to be fooled that way otherwise I'd lose before getting anywhere.

" Sunset?" began Twilight.

" What is it?" I asked.

" Do you see the monkey jumping up and down in front of us?" asked Twilight.

" It's kind of hard to miss something like that," I replied. There was a monkey a short distance away who was hopping up and down, but since Chrysalis said that we needed to follow the monkey as they knew the way, hopefully this one will be cooperative. I took a single step forward which prompted the monkey to stop hopping, so I knew I had gotten its attention, so when I took another step forward, it turned around and began to run away.

" We've got to keep up with it," said Twilight.

" I know otherwise we could find ourselves back at the beginning again," I said. Running after the monkey and making sure not to trip up on anything, I found it difficult to keep up with it given it was running on all fours while I was running on two legs. Just when it looked like I was about to catch it, it suddenly changed direction without warning prompting me to do the same thing. Sighing under my breath, I followed the monkey into another tunnel where I found myself surrounded by some unusual fauna, but I had no time to investigate as I can't afford to lose sight of the monkey.

It changed directions again although I was prepared this time, so when I followed it down the next tunnel, something came out of nowhere which struck me in my leg causing me to trip and fall on my face. " What just bumped into me!?!?" As I climbed back onto my feet, I saw what looked like a giant turtle stomping about, but when it took notice of me again, it went into its shell, and came hurdling my way. It struck my stomach this time which caused me to fall down onto my rear, yet my concern was the monkey as surely it had run off by now. Surprisingly, it was still there having stopped to see what was happening.

" This creature is called a Snapper, and despite being a turtle, it can move relatively quickly. They never expose the weak part of themselves which is their underbelly, so you need to find some way of attacking it from below," said Twilight.

" What would constitute for that?" I asked.

" I'm thinking that those Deku Flowers might work as when you dive into them, you are technically below the ground, and when you come back out, you could potentially strike something from below if it happened to be passing by," replied Twilight. I quickly darted my eyes back and forth hoping for a Deku Flower to be nearby, but there weren't away, so I've got to avoid these turtles as I can't defeat them due to their shells. The monkey beckoned me to follow it again, and I chased after it only for the Snapper to come charging at me again by hiding in its shell, yet because of being a bit further ahead of it, I managed to get away before I took take additional damage.

" Chrysalis never said anything about monsters," I said.

" I guess she doesn't come here very often," said Twilight.

" It would have been nice to have been given a fair warning," I moaned. In the next area, the monkey was able to avoid three more Snappers as though they were ignoring it, and I felt shocked at how it just weaved through them all, and I was forced to take evasive actions to avoid them. The first two I avoided by jumping over them which proved to be difficult given their fast speed, but the third one ended up hitting me in the leg just like that previous one, so I limped my way across the remainder of the clearing before following the monkey into yet another tunnel where I suddenly heard the sounds of someone moaning. " Do you hear that?"

" It sounds like Trixie," replied Twilight.

" Only way to find out is to see for ourselves," I said.

" What about your leg? You were limping for a few seconds back there," said Twilight.

" I'm used to being injured like this given what I experienced before, but my leg will recover quickly as all I need is to rest for a few moments," I said. Twilight then gave me a rather perplexing look which made me react to it. " Don't give me that look! I know I've been hurt, but it's minor at best. If the wound had been far more severe, I would be bleeding right now, and in need of consuming a potion. I may be reckless sometimes Twilight, yet I'm not so reckless that I'd allow myself to be killed."

" Looks like we're both reckless," laughed Twilight. It took me a couple of seconds to realize the meaning behind her words, and I couldn't help but join in the laughter seeing as both of us were pretty stubborn. That's when the moaning sound got louder as though Trixie was either in extreme pain, or wanted us to stop talking, and seeing what was wrong with her.

I walked forward where several monkeys had been surrounding her, and they quickly ran away upon my approach. Sure enough, it was indeed Trixie as I recognize those moans as belonging to her, and she definitely looked real bad. While there were no signs of blood, I could sense that she was weaker than normal, so I walked up to her to see what I could do.

" Ohh! Owwww! I'm in so much pain right now! Help me!" said Trixie in a weak voice.

" What happened?" I asked.

" I came here to the Woods of Mystery in order to pick mushrooms so that my sister Kotake can use them to make some new potions, and I was generally minding my own business given how I've never caused any grief for the local creatures. Just when I thought things would remain peaceful as I continued picking... BAM! I get hit from behind! That pesky Skull Kid! Did she think I wouldn't recognize her if she hid her face? Granted, it was quite surprising to see her wearing such an ancient mask like that, but still the fact remains she attacked me for no reason," replied Trixie.

" You know about Majora's Mask?" I asked.

" Yes, I'm familiar with some of the legends associated with it, but much has become lost over the centuries. What I do know is that the mask is able to augment the powers of those who wear it by granting them a dark power which shouldn't exist in this day and age. The Skull Kid apparently can use magic as though she has been using it her entire life, but where could someone like her have studied the arcane arts," replied Trixie. This didn't sound quite right in the context of this video game, but rather it sounds like some aspect of Equestria has made it through here... just like what happened before with my own magic.

If Starlight can use her own magic combined with the dark power that stems from the mask, she is even more dangerous than I could have realized, and it could get even worse should her memories from Equestria somehow be restored. I shook my head as such a thought was too scary for me to even think about. Twilight had the exact same reaction, s this new knowledge has worsened the situation, and this came from Trixie no less which probably caught her by surprise.

" Why did she attack you?" I asked.

" Most likely to demonstrate her newfound powers, and to take advantage of someone who she viewed as beneath her. Oh, ow! To think she's that powerful... and now I can't even move! If she had truly been merciless, I wouldn't be speaking with you right now, so I can safely say that the Skull Kid's power hasn't reached truly terrifying levels, yet judging from your expression, you know something about that," replied Trixie. I couldn't tell her about how I'm able to reset time, for even though I know she would believe me given her magical knowledge, telling her could cause problems when it comes to time paradoxes.

Trixie raised an eyebrow when I refused to answer her curiosity which made this all the more awkward when I began sweating like crazy, but she then lowered her brow which confirmed that she had lost interest. " Well, you don't need to say anything as I'm sure you have your reasons. Ow! I can't keep going on like this! I need to heal these wounds otherwise I'm stuck here! You! Don't you have anything that gives you energy? I'm sure you know what I'm talking about, so there's no need to repeat myself!"

" Sorry, but I don't have anything like that," I replied.

" Ah! What is this?! You're no help even though it's obvious that you know what I'm talking about... I say, you're not at all what you make yourself out to be!" said Trixie.

" I did come here on behalf of your sister," I said.

" Kotake is worried about me? I feel bad about making her worry so much, but I can't do anything right now unless I can get my strength back. You! Go back to see my sister, and tell her what has happened. She will give you what you need to restore my wounds, so please hurry up! Don't you dare use it for yourself otherwise I'll make sure you pay immensely, so focus on bringing it back to me!" said Trixie. She then collapsed down which made me feel sorry for her, but I didn't like how she threatened me into helping her.

I was going to help her anyway regardless of the situation, but using threats wasn't the way to go about it. Walking away from Trixie given there was nothing I could to help, there were several exits for me to use, so I chose one at random in the hopes that I picked wisely, and a few seconds later I was back outside where the Magic Hags Potion Shop was.

" That was awkward," I sighed.

" She threatened you to help her!" shouted Twilight.

" I know," I said.

" Even though in my mind we shouldn't help her because of what she said, I think we should because not even someone like Trixie deserves to be attacked," said Twilight.

" What do you think about what she said regarding Majora's Mask?" I asked.

" Starlight Glimmer is even more powerful than we suspected, and if you've come to the same conclusion as I have, her Equestrian magic has somehow been retained even though the human world has been changed," replied Twilight. I nodded my head in approval which caused her to float up and down with glee. " I was hoping you'd say that Sunset, so at least both of us are on the same page. We both know that Equestrian magic can be unpredictable given what we've seen happen in the human world, and if this world is any indication, who knows what could happen."

" We need to stop her at all costs," I said.

" Assuming we can," said Twilight.

" Unfortunately, you're right as while we may claim that we can stop her, I didn't actually fight her last time as I just needed the ocarina. If I do fight her in an actual battle, I may or may not prevail depending on just how strong she really is," I said. This conversation was making me feel pretty bad, and Twilight was feeling the same way, so we quickly changed the subject to figuring out how to help Trixie with her problem. " She needs a potion of some kind, but the problem is I don't have a bottle to carry any around."

" Maybe Chrysalis has one?" asked Twilight.

" I hope so otherwise we're not going anywhere," I replied. Making my way back to the potion shop, climbing the ladder, and going through the door, I immediately collided with some knick-knacks which someone had propped up a few feet away, and it caused me to fall over to the sounds of clangs from metal objects, the flapping of book pages, and even one or two crashes courtesy of bottles breaking. As I tried picking myself up from the floor, Chrysalis shuffled her way over to me, and offered her hand as a means of picking up me up where she began bowing several times over. " I'm okay you know as that didn't really hurt."

" Sorry that I placed those there in front of the door, for I was trying to clean up some of the rabble I have around here. Guess I forgot that you were coming back with news about what has happened to my sister," said Chrysalis. She then pulled me along where I collided with additional knick-knacks until we reached the counter, and ended up knocking over a large stack of books which scattered across the floor, yet Chrysalis didn't seem fazed as though she wasn't concerned with my various blunders. " Again, I really need to be better organized, so don't feel bad about knocking things over." I did offer to help clean up, but a wave of her hand and refusing meant that she was more concerned with what I had to say about Trixie. " I take it you found her?"

" Yes, but she was attacked by the Skull Kid," I replied.

" Come again?" asked Chrysalis.

" The Skull Kid attacked her although she calls herself Starlight Glimmer," I replied.

" What's that?!? The Skull Kid got to Koume?!? No! Impossible! Unthinkable!?!? My sister is far more powerful than most people in Termina, so I'm going to have to call your bluff on this one. What you just said... that's ridiculous... if it's just the Skull Kid, then what harm could she possibly do?" asked Chrysalis.

" She wears a mask on her face which gives her dark powers," I replied.

" What!?!? Why didn't you tell me this sooner? I know of only one mask that possesses that kind of power, but how could the Skull Kid have gotten her hands on it? I can't imagine seeing her finding that accursed item, so something else must have happened," said Chrysalis. Twilight then slinked down and hid behind my hat, for she knew what happened, and still felt guilty over not being able to stop it, and I decided to defend my friend by not revealing that bit of information.

Instead, I told Chrysalis how the mask was found by Sonata Dusk, and how Starlight acquired the mask by stealing it while the former was sleeping. " That mask saleswoman was a fool for wanting to find it, for those who created it hid it away for a reason. Nothing has changed when it comes to the heart being corrupted by thoughts of desire..."

" What about your sister?" I asked.

" Oh! I'd completely forgotten about that, so take this potion to her... it's a standard red potion which can restore life energy, and should be what she needs to recover from whatever that Skull Kid did to her. Don't you dare drink that yourself otherwise I'm going to be very annoyed! If you manage to give that potion to my sister, you can keep the bottle for yourself as I have no need for it due to having extras lying around somewhere," replied Chrysalis.

She then began looking around the counter for the potion in question, and a flurry of knick-knacks went flying everywhere prompting me to avoid being hit, yet she showed deep concerned towards her sister given how she was throwing things about. Eventually, she managed to produce a bottle filled with red liquid which I recognized from my adventures in Hyrule. " Take that potion to her! Go back through the Woods of Mystery, and again make sure you don't drink it yourself!"

" Before I go, I do have one question," I began.

" Make it a quick one," said Chrysalis.

" Your sister went into the Woods of Mystery in order to get mushrooms, yet couldn't you have gone and done that?" I asked.

" Long ago, this powerful nose of mine could detect them wherever they grew, and for that I used to go out there to collect mushrooms for my potions, but these days my nose has lost its touch which is why Koume goes out for me. If not for my age being an issue, collecting mushrooms would have solely been handled by me, and Koume wouldn't have to leave the Swamp Tourist Centre at inconvenient times. Sigh... it's tough getting old... everything is usually handled by young people anyway," replied Chrysalis.

I didn't think she looked that old, but I didn't want to question her about it in case she got offended, so then I asked why she needed mushrooms in the first place when practically any ingredient could make an effective potion. " Oh sure, I could use anything else, but the mushrooms in the Woods of Mystery have a special property which makes my potions really effective, so why try something else? If you think I'm going to reveal how they are used, I'm afraid I can't say as it's a trade secret."

Hearing her say that last part felt discouraging, so I took the bottle of red potion which I forgot to take, and was preparing to leave when Chrysalis said something else. " If you can find and bring some mushrooms here, I'll make it worth your while, for I'll use the first one you bring to create a powerful potion, and buy subsequent mushrooms for the right price. I'll buy them for about 50 rupees each, so if you need some money, you know a good way of getting some."

" That sounds fair," I said.

" Anyway, go and deliver that potion to my sister!" shouted Chrysalis. She began to shoo me away as an indicator to get going, so I left the potion shop making sure to place the potion she gave me into my pouch so that it wouldn't break along the way. Then I realized that I need to go through the Woods of Mystery again which involves getting by those Snappers, and maybe that same monkey will guide me through to Trixie.

" We could find some of those mushrooms to earn some money," suggested Twilight.

" Maybe, but that might waste precious time," I said.

" True as we don't really know the layout of those woods, so finding mushrooms may be difficult... actually, it will be difficult as you'd need to have a powerful sense of smell, and I don't think your human nose would be able to sniff one out. This is a prime example where being a pony is beneficial, for our noses are more powerful compared to human noses, but neither of us can resume our true selves while the world is like this," said Twilight.

" No need to remind me," I sighed.

" You miss being a pony don't you?" asked Twilight.

" Yeah, there are times where I miss running on four hooves, and using magic by firing it from my horn, but I'm fine with being a human," I replied. Deep down, I really did want to become a pony again, but something was holding me back which I'm sure Twilight knows about. I also feel she won't force the issue as it is something I've got to figure out on my own whenever I feel ready to tackle it, yet I hope she provides the kind of advice I'll need for when that time actually comes.

Still, I do want to become a pony again even if only for a little while as it's part of who I am... I'm a pony in reality, and this human form is something I chose because of what I did back then. Perhaps the other Twilight can help me deal with some of my more troubling issues, for I have been helping her cope with what transpired during the Friendship Games finale.

Upon entering the Woods of Mystery again, the same monkey was waiting there for me, and beckoned me to follow, so I began running after it. Already, this felt really familiar as the route it was taking was exactly like before, and that meant encountering a single Snapper on its own before running into three of them at the same time. Given what I know about these creatures, when they begin to charge at me after going into their shells, they must travel in a straight line until they come to a stop, so that does give me some leeway when it comes to avoiding them.

The monkey entered the next clearing where the first Snapper was, and it immediately took notice of me where it hid in its shell, and began to charge at me with that incredible speed... I really shouldn't be praising it for that, so just when it was about to hit me, I jumped over it, and continued following the monkey under we entered the next clearing where the other Snappers were waiting.

Again, the monkey weaved its way through forcing me to have to do things the hard way, so I sighed and decided to take the initiative by running towards them, and I was able to get by two of them before they even knew what was happening, yet one still needed to be overcome. It went into its shell before charging at me where I jumped over it although it did get my leg which was really starting to become a problem. With that out of the way, I continued following the monkey into the clearing where Trixie was still lying on the ground in pain, and it sounded like she was feeling even worse given her moaning.

" You're back," said Trixie as I walked up to her.

" I've brought what you wanted," I said.

" Oh? You actually didn't drink the potion yourself? I must say that I'm surprised as I would have thought you to be sinister, but I guess I've completely misjudged you, and for that I apologize... so long as nothing bad happened to the bottle," said Trixie. I then reached into my pouch, and took out the red potion before handing it over to her where she took it using those grubby hands of hers. " Ah! That color! That smell... that's definitely Kotake's... no mistaking it at all."

Trixie then began to drink the potion really quickly without pausing for even a second, and upon finishing, she coughed up a little bit of red smoke for some unknown reason. After a few moments of waiting, she got onto her feet where she suddenly experienced some kind of magical surge, and was soon flying on her broomstick... which felt really cliché. " Feel the energy flow! Koume is revived! You saved me! I won't criticize you for taking your sweet time or anything, for you did your best despite the circumstances."

" Happy to have helped," I said.

" Now, there has to be something I can do for you... I know! You can keep this bottle that Kotake gave you as I'm sure you'll find some use for it, but I have this feeling you want to go somewhere otherwise why come all this way," said Trixie.

" I need to get to the Deku Palace," I said.

" Really? Someone actually wants to go there? No one has been wanting to go down there for quite some time, so you'll have to forgive me for being surprised. Ever since that poison first showed up, no one has had the desire for taking the boat cruise, for those Big Octo are too frightening for them, but I feel you're not afraid of such things seeing as you are carrying a sword and shield," said Trixie.

" I'm trying to understand why the swamp water has become poisonous," I said.

" Well, if you can figure out some way of restoring Woodfall back to the way it used to be, then this part of Termina would be indebted to you. Anyway, I'm the swamp tour guide. I run the boat cruise which makes a stop at the Deku Palace, so come by if you want a free ride," said Trixie. With a cackle in her voice, she then flew off using her broom, so now I've got to get back to the Swamp Tourist Centre... you know, I wish she could have taken me with her, for it means having to backtrack all that way again. Sighing, I walked off in a random direction as all of them go back to the entrance of the woods, and when I was back behind the Magic Hags Potion Shop, I noticed another monkey was waiting for me by the passageway where those Deku Baba were.

" What do you make of that?" I asked.

" That monkey could be trying to beckon you to follow it," replied Twilight.

" Not again..." I moaned.

" Might as well see what it wants," said Twilight. Walking past the potion shop, and looking up at the sky, the sun was starting to set which meant I had wasted an entire afternoon helping out Trixie, so I'm hoping she won't say something about not operating the boat cruise at night, for that would be so inconvenient on so many levels. As soon as I got close to the monkey, it took a few steps forward towards me before it surprised me in a way which almost caused me to fall down.

" You have strange powers, no?"

" Did... did you just speak?" I asked with my eyes wide open in shock.

" Surprised?"

" Yes!" I answered.

" Humans strange creatures, yet you are different, something unusual... as though you... you were animal too." I guess this monkey could sense that I was in fact a pony, and I didn't know if I should be happy or sad about that. I mean, I was a pony during my early years, but now live as a human, and they aren't as strange as it thinks. Still, it reminded me of my true identity despite all I've been through. " Me been watching you! Lately, this swamp, filled with poison water."

" You know of the poison?" I asked.

" Poison spread across swamp, will soon consume all water, make it impossible for creatures to live here. It comes from temple."

" Really?" I asked.

" Temple above waterfall strange... brother go to temple in order to find out what wrong. Dark aura coming from temple which is cause of problems, but brother no able to find entrance. It hidden real well, and after many attempts, brother gave up. Temple for Deku only. Brother captured by Deku. Now in palace. Help!" Despite missing specific words, I have to admit that this monkey can talk really well, and thanks to this piece of information, things are starting to make sense.

Whatever is happening inside of the temple is the source of the poison, but I can't gain access to this place until I speak with the Deku Queen. Then it dawned on me that the monkey mentioned its brother had been captured, but why do something like that? Looks like there was another part of the puzzle which needs uncovering before I can solve it. After agreeing that I would go to the Deku Palace seeing as that was my original plan, the monkey jumped into the thicket before disappearing leaving me to make my way there.

" What do you think Twilight?" I asked.

" The Deku capturing a monkey sounds really weird, but there's got to be more to it than that," replied Twilight.

" It might be normal for them as honestly, do we even know anything about this place?" I asked.

" No, but I said that because it just felt strange that plant-like creatures would capture a monkey. What I'm more interested in is the temple that other monkey mentioned which exists somewhere in Woodfall. You told me that going into temples allowed you to progress through the story of the last game, so I'm assuming it will be the same here where going into one will progress things," replied Twilight.

" Maybe, but last time I didn't need to reset time," I said.

" That will make things more complicated, but there's no point in dwelling over it until we actually find out for ourselves. Our next destination is the Deku Palace for we've got to find out what's really going by speaking to the Deku Queen, so I hope you're used to being a Deku Scrub as you'll have to stay as one for a while," said Twilight. Aside from the pain I go through during the transformation process, I'm getting used to my other form, and she was right about me needing to remain that way as I doubt the Deku would appreciate a human girl wandering around their territory.

As I started heading back towards the Swamp Tourist Center, the same Deku Babas and Mini Baba appeared before me... a stark reminder that monsters re-spawn on a permanent basis aside from rare occasions, so I took out my Kokiri Sword, and cut them all down using several sword swings. Yeah, I'm not experienced enough to cut them all with one strike. As each one fell over and disappeared in what could be described as rotting away, I picked up three Deku Sticks which have so far not done me any favours, yet I sense I'll be needing them soon enough.

Wading through the swamp water again wasn't my idea of fun as I didn't like it the first time, but this had to be done because I wasn't entirely comfortable hopping from lily pad to lily pad as a Deku, and I don't want to drown given the water was quite deep. Once I reached the other shore where the centre was, the first thing I did was shake off the excess water from my tunic before Twilight brought something to my attention. " Can you see that small statue over there?"

" I don't see anything," I replied.

" Take a closer look," suggested Twilight.

" Alright," I said as I began looking forward where I almost had to squint my eyes, for what she was trying to show me was quite far away. At the edge of the water right by the wall was a statue in the shape of an owl, but I don't recall ever seeing it before. " I wonder if that's one of those statues Flash Sentry said I should activate? He did mention something about playing that song he showed me in order to warp here again."

Taking a slight detour, I ran over to where it was situated, and defeated a Mini Baba which happened to be close by, so picking up the Deku Stick it dropped, I took a closer look at the statue. It was certainly majestic and well crafted, but could this thing really enable me to warp here whenever I need to? " How am I supposed to activate it anyway?"

" Maybe using your sword?" suggested Twilight.

" I don't want to destroy it," I said.

" Perhaps some kind of interaction will work instead?" suggested Twilight. I began looking at every last aspect of the statue in the hopes of finding some way to activate it, and after spending two minutes pushing and pulling at different parts, I was about to give up when touching the beak caused a bright light which made the statue change. This must be what happens when it gets activated, but I do feel awkward for having wasted so much time trying to figure it out.

Twilight noticed me feeling bad about having wasted precious time despite still having plenty to go before needing to start over again, but she understood how I felt. " I know we have practically an infinite amount of time, but if only we could have more of it."

" We've spent half a day here in Woodfall, yet it feels like we haven't made much progress," I sighed.

Night of the First Day - 60 Hours Remain.

" Didn't the princess who you saw while remembering what the hero experienced say anything else about time?" asked Twilight.

" No, she pretty much said that the Goddess of Time would be watching over me," I replied.

" Then someone must know of a way to slow things down," said Twilight. Things moving at a slower pace would really be appreciated at this point, for I was beginning to realize that my current approach wasn't working, for I was just simply taking too long. Having more time would be beneficial, but who would be a time expert? Adagio? Maybe, but she may not have that kind of knowledge given she was affected by time restarting.

What about Flash Sentry? Maybe, yet would he be willing to say something? Aside from them, I couldn't think of anyone else, so unless some kind of miracle occurs, I'm stuck with having to deal with the standard flow of time. I then walked back over to the ladder, and climbed up it before entering the centre, and Trenderhoof was still there at his desk, so I walked towards him.

" Welcome back! I see from the water drippin' down you that you've been trudging through the swamp water," said Trenderhoof.

" It's been a worthwhile experience," I moaned.

" The old hag who runs the boat cruise has finally come back after bein' gone for so long, and I suspect you've got something to do with it am I right? Well, I'm glad you were able to bring her back, for it means business can resume like normal despite the swamp water near the Deku Palace being poisonous," said Trenderhoof.

" Am I too late?" I asked.

" For what?" asked Trenderhoof.

" The sun has gone down now for the night, and I think the boat cruise isn't going anywhere until the morning," I replied.

" I have no idea what made you think of that, but that old hag runs it every wakin' hour because it's her way of providing a good service. I know we don't get many people come through here what with the poison, yet I gotta admit she is brave for wantin' to continue her service. Anyway, you should go over there, and talk to her where she will get the boat cruise ready for you. Oh, and since she's come back now, you can finally take part in the Pictograph Contest I mentioned last time you were here," said Trenderhoof.

I then began rubbing my chin because I actually forgot about that contest given I was busy trying to help Trixie, and Trenderhoof slapped his head in response before heaving a heavy sigh which showed he was annoyed slightly. " Let me explain it again... if you take a Pictograph of something within the swamp, and bring it back here, you'll win a prize depending on what kind of Pictograph you took. The rarer the subject, the better the prize will be."

" Okay, what would you consider rare?" I asked.

" A Pictograph of the Deku Queen would be something to see, but unless you happen to be a Deku Scrub, you won't be getting access to her let alone the palace as any non-Deku will be denied entry," replied Trenderhoof.

" What about your daughter?" I asked.

" You've met her!?!?" asked Trenderhoof.

" I've purchased a few maps from her," I replied.

" That daughter of mine has a very good heart, and she is very skilled at making maps which have proven invaluable to adventurers aplenty, but I do wish that she wouldn't go around wearing what she does. It doesn't look right to me, but I suppose it's my fault that she has an obsession with fairies, and at her age no less.

You could say I was overprotective of my daughter, and for that I spoiled her too much. I'm just relieved you didn't take a Pictograph of her, as that would have been rather humiliating... still, if that's what makes her happy then I suppose I oughta be more accepting of what she does. Say, I was wonderin' if you could tell my daughter something for me," said Trenderhoof.

" What's that?" I asked.

" Could you please ask her not to go outside in that outfit anymore? Wearing somethin' like that just makes her look so unnatural," replied Trenderhoof. I was surprised at how much he felt about what Pinkie Pie does with her life, but I suppose he was just being a concerned parent who wanted his child to be safe. Pinkie wearing a green spandex suit complete with red pants, and a hood with pointy ears does look ridiculous, yet she obviously doesn't care what she looks like as long as she remains happy.

Even in a world where there is sadness everywhere, Pinkie manages to maintain her positive attitude. Thanking Trenderhoof for reminding me about this contest, as I had this feeling the best prize would be something I'd find useful for my journey, I walked over to where Trixie was now behind what looked like a small hole in the wall where her face barely protruded through it.

" Oh! It's you again! Thanks for what you did back there! When I left you back in the woods, I immediately went to see Kotake, so as to let her know that I was okay, and from there I returned here in order to resume the boat cruise," said Trixie.

" Do you actually run this at night?" I asked.

" The boat cruise is always available whenever anyone has need of it. Besides, I don't go on the cruise myself as the boat has a magical property which allows it to go to its intended destination... the Deku Palace, and from there head back here for someone else to use. That's how I'm able to get some shut-eye otherwise I'd be cranky by the time the boat goes out during nightfall. One thing you should know is the boat will remain at the Deku Palace indefinitely unless you ride it back here, but considering only you have shown a desire to go to the palace, you might as well just have it stay there until you're finished with your business," replied Trixie.

She then began rummaging through something behind the wall, and I had no idea what it could be given how this whole set-up of where she was just felt completely out of place. Eventually, after tossing a couple of things out which nearly hit me, she took out a small plaque, and presented it to me. " Okay, this is how much it will cost you! Children are 10 rupees, adults are 50 rupees, and it's 30 rupees for a couple. As for a group price... I'm still working out the details on that one."

" Guess I'll pay 10 rupees," I said.

" Normally, that's what you would do, but because you helped me out back in the woods, I'm going to do something a little different. In a special deal just for you, I'll let you take this cruise for free just this once, but next time you'll have to pay okay? Ah, yes, we've got a special going on right now, so we're giving this out for free! Just give me a second to find it, as it's somewhere among all of this junk in here," said Trixie. She then disappeared into the shadows of the hole, and the sounds of objects tumbling about could be heard.

I was hoping she was okay given how there were sounds of glass shattering, pots clanging, and even wood splintering. After a few minutes, Trixie popped her head back out before producing what looked like an old fashioned camera, and judging from the gestures with her hands, she wanted me to take it. " This is a Pictograph Box which you can use to take all kinds of pictures, and store them for safe keeping if you happen to like them."

" It looks old," I commented.

" Granted, the style does look ancient, but this is actually the latest model that has been created. Years ago, you could only take one picture at a time, and without any colour, but thanks to improvements in technology, it can now take up to ten pictures all in glorious colour. If you take a nice picture from the boat, take it to that fella over there, for I overheard you two talking about that contest of his. All right... the boat's leaving!" said Trixie.

After taking the Pictograph Box, and placing it around my neck due to it having a thick string that serves as a necklace, she then handed over a ticket which must be what I need in order to proceed. Thanking her for everything, I left the tourist centre, and upon looking down at the water below, I could see the boat in question.

" Looks fancy," I commented.

" As long as it's sturdy enough and gets us where we need to go, it doesn't really matter what it looks like," said Twilight.

" Yeah, I suppose you're right," I said as I climbed down the ladder, and proceeded to climb into the boat before sitting down. " I'll admit that it's also pretty cozy... in fact, I could probably sleep here for a while until we arrive at our destination." Twilight then floated over next to me, and made herself comfortable which indicated she had the exact same idea in mind.

The boat then began to move, so the only thing for me to do is fall asleep which should be easy seeing as I feel so comfy. I drifted off to sleep where I immediately began dreaming, and once again I dreamt about the end of Termina just like before. " Oh no... not this dream again."

" Sunset Shimmer?" asked Twilight.

" Twilight!?!? What are you doing here?" I asked.

" I must be having the exact same dream," replied Twilight.

" More like a nightmare," I sighed.

" Is this what you've been suffering from for these past few months? I can't believe you've had to endure this same dream over and over all because of what you went through before, and if only I'd been able to help you out sooner, but why am I here?" asked Twilight.

" It is because I willed it!" Because I was having this dream again, it meant having to deal with Ganondorf, yet he is someone Twilight has never met before, so who knows what kind of reaction she is going to get. Flames suddenly rose up in front of us, and the Dark Lord as he called himself appeared once again as a shadow, his eyes burning with fear that made me cower slightly, yet Twilight didn't feel the same way, but that's because she has no idea what was about to happen. " So... you are the one who possesses magic which is greater than most of those of your kind... you guide this child on a path of light... yes... most amusing."

" Who are you?" asked Twilight.

" My name is Ganondorf, and you did not need to ask such a question, for the child has told you all about what she experienced... Twilight Sparkle... princess. Are you surprised that I would know your name? There is much that I am aware of little one, and that includes the world which both of you call home... a world where magical energies flourish which in turn produce much in the way of power.

Such a power can be utilized to conquer all that you survey, and those who would resist would become nothing more than a mere memory cast aside where it fades away," replied Ganondorf. His eyes glowed even brighter which made it difficult for me to breathe, yet Twilight appeared to be unaffected. Could it be because she's a fairy? Or, is she unaffected because I'm the one who is to be tormented and not her?

" You know, you're not doing a good job of intimidating me," said Twilight.

" It is because of sheer ignorance that you remain defiant little alicorn, but then that has always been one of your many flaws," laughed Ganondorf.

" Why are you doing this to my friend?" asked Twilight.

" The child has experienced hardships her entire life, and even when she believes that she has finally reached the point where she can revel in bliss, the nightmares of her past return to haunt her, and such ghosts cannot be overcome as they cling to a morbid existence. Her suffering is an amusement for me... the more anguish she experiences, the better, but then the true reasoning will come in time. Then there is you little one... you possess a tormented soul just as strong as her, and that makes you just as vulnerable.

Do not try to deny the truth for what it is, for you cannot hide from fate!" replied Ganondorf. I could tell his words were now starting to affect Twilight, yet she continued to shrug them off in an attempt to not let it get to her. " Why struggle when you know that you cannot escape from your fate!"

" Why do I feel strange?" asked Twilight.

" Because you are now experiencing hopelessness and despair," replied Ganondorf.

" I don't understand why you're doing this to me," said Twilight.

" The child has most likely informed you of what will happen to your respective worlds should she not exceed my expectations... yet you, Twilight Sparkle, possess the same divine power that Sunset Shimmer holds in her hand. While she assumed the guise of the Hero of Time, you were under the guise of Zelda, and for that you currently hold one of the Triforce parts... the Triforce of Wisdom which connects both of you together, and also to me.

Fate in addition to my will have proven a most dangerous combination for you... alicorn... for now you shall truly suffer insurmountable torment so that I will be amused with it," said Ganondorf. Twilight at first didn't believe what he was saying, but when her hand started to glow, she looked down at it, and sure enough the Mark of the Triforce appeared which meant he was telling the truth. He knew this would happen from the very beginning, yet I didn't see it because I never even considered such a possibility.

" You want to destroy Equestria?" asked Twilight.

" Should the child prove herself unworthy of my expectations, your precious Equestria shall be no more, and those who you hold dear to your heart shall die! The same will apply to the world which Sunset Shimmer resides, for it too must be made to suffer. Perhaps you can spare such a fate from happening by becoming stronger child, and you little one must ensure of her success otherwise her failure shall be on your hands. You may think little one that the rulers of light and darkness can prevent my power from covering your world in darkness, and destroy it through mere corrosion of evil, yet their power is fresh compared with my ancient magic," replied Ganondorf.

" Princess Celestia and Princess Luna will stop you!" shouted Twilight.

" How amusing... you are defending them, and yet it is not their well-being which should be worrying you. No, you should be worrying more about your own lives, for this world shall test your resolves in ways which you have never experienced before," said Ganondorf. His eyes glowed even brighter than before, and his silhouette faded away as he came forward where Twilight could see him in the flesh as opposed to seeing only his shadow. I could tell that she was afraid of him just like I was, but why were his words so difficult to ignore as all he was doing was intimidating us.

I know he could destroy both worlds as he wields such power, yet something about all this felt odd to me. Why not just get it over with? Why go through so much drama just to test how strong I've become? What is his true motive? All these questions were swirling in my head, and I didn't have an answer to even a single one of them.

" Is that fear I see in your eyes, Twilight Sparkle? Now you understand what it means to experience true evil, for when the time comes, the child shall face me in battle again, and you shall be there to experience all of it. Remember my words child... remember them... and do not betray my expectations of you." Ganondorf laughed once again before clenching his hand into a fist where his Triforce Mark appeared with all three pieces glowing where everything suddenly went white.

" WAAAAH!" I screamed as I woke up.

" AAAAH!" screamed Twilight as she woke up, and almost falling into the water. " That was the most horrifying nightmare I've ever had in my entire life."

" That was no nightmare," I said.

" Seeing Ganondorf even within the confines of the dream world was an experience I'd rather never have again, but I feel this won't be the last time we'll be seeing him within our own subconscious. Even after what you told me what happened when he appeared in the human world, I couldn't even begin to imagine what it must have been like, but now I've experienced it with my own eyes," said Twilight.

" You understand what it means don't you?" I asked.

" We've got to do exactly what he says otherwise our worlds are finished," replied Twilight. If there was one comforting thing to take from all of this even though it isn't really all that much, I'm not going through this alone as Twilight is there with me going through the same thing. I've got to try and figure out what Ganondorf is really planning, but it won't be easy as there is so much which doesn't make any sense to me.

After spending a few moments waking up properly as Twilight and I were still feeling groggy, the boat finally came to a stop in front of what appeared the entrance of the Deku Palace, but my immediate concern involved several monkeys who ran through the entrance. There were also numerous sounds coming from within which sounded like chanting, and screaming which made me wonder what was going on.

" Guess we've got to go in," I said.

" Not before you change into a Deku Scrub as you can't go running about in there as a human as they'll kick you out instantly," said Twilight. She was right about this, and I knew that from this point onward, my true self would need to take a backseat for a while until I'm able to find what I need to access the temple. Hopefully, nothing will cause me to be discovered, for I don't think I'll be able to handle an entire tribe just by myself...

To Be Continued.

Chapter 10: Palace of the Swamp

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 16, 2015
Chapter 10: Palace of the Swamp

The sounds coming from within the Deku Palace started to get louder although I could hear at least one voice trying to calm everyone down, so it sounds like there is at least one person in there who I'm likely to be able to reason with. Whatever was happening in there, I had to find out because I need access to the temple. Holding the Deku Mask in my hand, I began to breathe several times as a means of remaining calm, for this would be quite a challenge given I'll be stuck as a Deku for a while as no other creature aside from the monkeys can access the palace.

Once I felt ready to proceed, I put the Deku Mask on my face, and immediately I began convulsing as the transformation began... I'm still having trouble getting used to this part, but at least it doesn't last that long otherwise I'd really dislike it. Upon screaming where no one heard me doing this, I became a Deku Scrub once again although I did stumble about for a few seconds before falling down on my rear.

" What happened?" asked Twilight.

" I haven't gotten used to transforming from one creature to another," I replied.

" Well, it's something you won't need to worry about for a while as you'll have to remain a Deku Scrub until we're done. I'm going to be okay as I doubt the Deku will even take notice of me given my small size, but hopefully nothing happens where you suddenly decide to take the mask off due to some kind of weird frustration factor like say being fed up," said Twilight. I'm not entirely sure what she meant by that, but it sounded like she thinks I won't be able to handle being a Deku for lengthy periods at a time... even though I was stuck in this form for three days straight, and without a means of changing back to normal until later.

Sometimes, I think she needs to have more faith in me seeing as this is what I'm used to doing while she is still experiencing new things for the first time. Then again, I need more faith in myself especially after what happened while we were sleeping, and making our way here in that boat.

Ganondorf's threat regarding Equestria, the human world, and everyone who resides in both worlds still burned in my mind, his words felt like knives striking at my heart because he was capable of carrying out his intentions. If there was a time where I've felt an intense amount of pressure, it would be right now because the fate of two worlds was now firmly on my shoulders, and the weight was dragging me down to the depths as it were.

Twilight tried to reassure me that everything would be alright, but how can it when he could just end it all for both worlds without a moment's hesitation. Even if I think he's doing this to see me suffer on an emotional level, there's no telling what is going to happen next. I suppose the only option I have is to just roll with it, and hope nothing truly bad goes wrong.

Upon walking through the entrance, my mouth suddenly dropped open, and my eyes opened wide with surprise when I gazed at the Deku Palace. I was expecting it to be a relatively small location, but this place was probably just as large as Clock Town. There was a pond which must serve as some kind of moat, but I had no intention of swimming about in it given it was filled with poison.

" So this must be what all the fuss is about," I said.

" That poison could seriously injure you, so I advise not to fall into it under any circumstances. Still, hearing everything about it pales in comparison to actually seeing it with our own eyes," said Twilight. That's when she noticed me looking around as though I were trying to find something, yet so far I wasn't having any kind of luck. " Um, what are you doing Sunset?"

" I'm trying to see which direction the poison is coming from, but the water looks so calm that I can't tell," I replied.

" How about that waterfall over there?" asked Twilight. She pointed towards a large cliff to the right of where I was standing, and sure enough there was a waterfall flowing down from above where the poison was stemming down from. That means the way to the temple must be over there, yet knowing this changes nothing about the situation.

Even knowing the direction, it won't do me any good unless I know exactly where I have to go, and that means asking the Deku Queen for information. Of course, I have no idea if she will even listen considering that in her eyes, I'm just a commoner, and probably unworthy of being in her presence. Back in Equestria, Princess Celestia, and Princess Luna were both really approachable despite their status as rulers of Equestria, yet I suspect this isn't going to be the same in Termina.

" Okay, so I guess we need to go up there," I replied.

" Not sure why you said that Sunset as I think you already figured out we can't go that way until we know what we're supposed to do," said Twilight.

" I just felt like answering that question," I said.

" You didn't really need to, for I knew you were thinking it," smiled Twilight.

" Guess I just felt a little bit insecure," I said, and this was putting it mildly as I need to remain confidant otherwise I could potentially make things even worse. Judging from all of the yelling coming from further ahead, the Deku Tribe are busy with some kind of argument, or maybe there's something else going on. Before choosing to walk forward, I took another look around just to see if there was perhaps another way for me to get inside.

There was a large assortment of lily pads to my left which travel in a straight line towards some kind of cave entrance, and a smaller number of them to my right lead towards both the waterfall, and maybe somewhere along the side of the palace. " Our options are pretty limited given that I'm not confidant enough in hopping from lily pad to lily pad."

" Then heading forward is our only choice," said Twilight.

" I guess that makes sense given that's where all of that noise is coming from," I said. Walking a few steps forward, I finally took notice of a series of logs which formed a bridge across the poison water, and upon stepping onto the bridge, it began to wobble a little which meant it was rickety at best, but I've got to make it across in order to find out what's going on further ahead.

Walking a few more steps forward, I almost fell over into the water due to how unstable the bridge was, and that would have been just disastrous, but I managed to make it across where I found myself faced with another problem. " These are Deku Flowers just like what we've seen in Clock Town, but they look a little different as though something were already inside them."

" Want to take a closer look?" asked Twilight.

" I suppose so as we have to get past these flowers in order to keep going," I replied. I walked up to the flowers to get a closer look at them, but suddenly two Dekus, one in each flower, popped up from them which caused me to fall down onto my rear in reaction. I'm guessing these two must be some kind of sentries who protect this area, yet why only have two guarding the entire outside of the palace?

Then again, there could be more guards waiting further ahead, and the ones out here merely serve to provide a false sense of security especially towards those who may try to cause trouble.

" Are these the only guards?" asked Twilight.

" No, I think there are others located elsewhere in the castle," I replied.

" That's a relief as I was thinking that only having two guards protecting the Deku Queen is probably the worst kind of security you can imagine, but then why only have two guards out here instead of say a dozen of them?" asked Twilight.

" I don't know, but I suppose the Deku Queen may know if she happens to be in a good mood," I replied.

" Why do you say that?" asked Twilight.

" The arguing coming from the room at the far end of that hallway in front of us has gotten even louder than ever, and I have a feeling that the one shouting in there is the Deku Queen, or a reasonable facsimile," I replied. This now makes the problem a whole lot more difficult for me to solve as I was hoping for a pleasant conversation, so I may have to wait for an ideal opportunity where she isn't in a foul mood, but first I need to convince the two Deku guards in front of me to allow me to pass otherwise I'm not getting anywhere.

I moved towards the one on my left who immediately began looking at me where it looked like he was going to attack, but I must hold back, for going on the offensive would get me nowhere.

" Halt! Stay where you are!"

" I was wondering if I could go through," I said.

" This is the palace of the Deku Kingdom. Only those on official business may enter!" Judging from both the sound in his voice, and his choice of words, regular Dekus aren't allowed inside whenever they have a problem like it is back in Equestria where ponies could see Princess Celestia, and Princess Luna at any time. This Deku Queen must be some kind of enigma to them if she doesn't interact all that much with her subjects, but then I could be wrong as I don't know anything about how their society works especially the royal side of it.

" But, you may enter to see the public humiliation of the foolish monkey who has angered our people including our queen even though she has been relatively calm despite a few outbursts." These next words caught me by surprise as he just said that no one without official business were allowed through, and now he is giving me permission, but what did he mean when he said the Deku Queen has been having a few outbursts? Does this mean our original theory about who was yelling was true, and that the Deku Queen wasn't solely responsible.

" What's going on?" I asked with a confused look on my face.

" Where have you been all this time?"

" I've been in Clock Town," I replied.

" Ah, you're one of the Dekus who moved away from the swamp some years ago in order to live in that city of humans, but I would have thought all of you would be aware of what's been going on around here within these last couple of days. Sigh, I guess some of you city Dekus have remained ignorant after all this time, so I might as well explain the situation." Sounds to me this Deku, and quite possibly the entire tribe have issues with those of their kind who decided to move away from the swamp, or maybe it was just this one Deku who felt that way. " Now listen up! Things have been pretty peaceful around here until an incident happened roughly three days ago."

" What happened?" I asked.

" The Deku Princess left with one of the monkeys who frequent the swamp, and the two of them travelled to the temple, but our dear princess never came back from their trip, so we believe that the monkey kidnapped her in order to hold her for ransom. Our queen doesn't believe this to be true, and has been rather calm about the disappearance of her daughter, so her advisors have had to provide the proper incentive because she needs to set a good example by punishing the monkey for his crimes."

" Is that why her majesty has been vocal from time to time?" I asked. I made sure to refer to the Deku Queen as her majesty, for I have to convince everyone in the palace that I'm in one of their kind otherwise they may think of me as offensive and rude to her which will place me in even more trouble.

" The Deku Queen, for the most part is a majestic ruler who holds the Deku's love in their hearts, but her advisors often suggest for her to be more assertive with her actions so that our tribe can become dominant against the others when it comes to political and territorial affairs across Termina." So, those who hold high positions in Deku Scrub society have been coercing the queen into doing things which she may not accept in her heart.

They sound a lot like the Crystal Prep students and Principal Cinch where they did something similar to Twilight's human counterpart just to win the Friendship Games, but this situation has more political clout compared to two worlds being threatened by someone who desired knowledge no matter what the cost. " We have questioned that monkey numerous times demanding he tell us where the princess is, but he has refused to say anything!"

" Could it be that he doesn't know?" I asked.

" He knows what happened, but pretends to be ignorant!"

" Would it be okay if I asked him some questions?" I asked.

" The likes of you!?!? The Deku Queen is most likely to accept your request, but her advisors will deny you seeing as you're just a common scrub even though you do have quite an impressive hairstyle. Very well! You may proceed forward towards the throne room of the Deku Queen! Follow this hall straight to the Royal Chamber. Do not enter any other areas whatsoever! I'm serious about this, so if I were you, I'd do exactly as I say unless you want to be punished yourself!" With that, both Dekus went back down into their flowers giving me access to the remainder of the palace. Walking a few metres forward, the décor looked rather tacky to be honest, and no doubt I was feeling this way courtesy of Rarity, but I quickly stopped upon seeing two doorways on either side of me.

" I'm guessing those must be the areas we can't visit," I said.

" Do you hear something coming from each entrance?" asked Twilight.

" It sounds like there must be at least a dozen guards both on the ground, and in the air which must make this palace quite difficult to explore without being spotted. I know we were told not to go into these other areas, but I have this feeling that we'll need to," I replied. If this is the case, I'll have to rely on sneaking around so as to make sure not to get caught by the guards as I won't be able to take on so many of them all at once. What makes little sense with all of this is why there aren't more guards patrolling this central hallway as opposed to patrolling the areas on both sides of me.

I quickly turned around to see if those two Deku guards were still paying attention to me, but they were still inside of their flowers, so I was free to take a quick inspection. " I'm going to see what's inside this doorway as I'm curious." Walking through the doorway, I found myself in a fairly large open area where all kinds of plants were scattered about along with boulders, and several pieces of décor which must be some kind of fashion trend for the palace. The guards were on patrol, yet their movements felt weird like they were moving about in a specific pattern. " Why are they moving like that? It just seems so unnatural."

" This is a video game Sunset, so maybe this is how they were commanded to act in order to give whoever is playing a fair chance. Judging from their behaviour, they move forward a little before stopping to investigate, and then continuing in this manner in an endless loop," said Twilight.

" I suppose this will make it easy to sneak by provided I don't walk directly in front of them, but why would we even need to come here anyway? I mean, I know that I just said we'll need to explore both sides given how curiousity compels me, but maybe we won't need to as this looks like it will waste our time. You know Twilight, this is where helpful advice on where we need to go would come in handy," I said.

" Sorry for not being more helpful," said Twilight. Hearing her say that made me slap myself in the forehead really hard, for this is the kind of thing that made her human counterpart run away in tears all because I allowed my anger and frustration reach a boiling point. Twilight is doing her very best given how she was thrown into this situation without any warning, so I've no right to make such a critical remark against her.

I then reassured her that she wasn't to blame for our wandering around blind, and that it was my own fault for not asking the right questions out of fear of being discovered. " Thanks for saying that to me Sunset! I really appreciate it!" Hearing my words made Twilight feel a lot better which in turn made me feel better, so I walked back to the main hallway, and walked forward where I entered the throne room, or Royal Chamber as the guards called it.

" What in all of Equestria!" I exclaimed.

" It's been a long time I heard you say that," commented Twilight.

" Can you blame me for what we're looking at?" I asked.

" No, I suppose not," replied Twilight. There were a large number of Deku Scrubs jumping up and down, spinning around in place, and even spewing forth bubbles as a sign of frustration, so it looks as though they're taking the missing princess situation rather well. There was a rather large cage to the left which must be where the monkey is currently imprisoned, yet I don't see a means of being able to open it.

" How do you suppose we can get in there?" I asked.

" There may be another route, but that would involve investigating the other areas of the palace," replied Twilight. So it looks like we do need to check those other areas in order to find our way into the cage, yet while it sounds weird to want to get into something like that, I do need to check to make sure the monkey is okay.

There was a bonfire in the centre of the room, but what could its purpose be seeing as fire is fatal to Deku Scrubs seeing as they are plants, but then I noticed a cauldron was nearby which had me wonder just what could they be planning. That's when I took notice of the one sitting on a large throne at the opposite end of the room, and while she was clearly a Deku Scrub, she had several features which struck me as being Equestrian, and Twilight recognized her right away. " Tree Hugger!"

" I'm sorry, what?" I asked.

" That's Tree Hugger," replied Twilight.

" Aren't people called that because of being devoted to the environment?" I asked.

" I don't know much about her other than what Fluttershy described, and according to her, she is a member of the Equestrian Society for the Preservation of Rare Creatures who Fluttershy met when she saw the Breezies. There was an incident between Tree Hugger and Discord during the Grand Galloping Gala where Discord's jealousy almost caused her to be sent to another dimension, but luckily they were able to sort things out.

One distinct feature about Tree Hugger is that she speaks in a very mellow voice which makes her act as though she were calm and collected, yet it can be difficult for ponies to understand what she means as uses unusual words," replied Twilight.

" And here she is as the Deku Queen," I said.

" This could be difficult," said Twilight.

" Only one way to find out, and that is to talk with her," I said. Walking around the bonfire because I don't want to get set on fire due to being a Deku Scrub, I approached the throne where Tree Hugger was sitting where she immediately noticed me, and smiled which made me feel sure that this would be a pleasant conversation, but then my eyes took notice of the four Deku Scrubs, two on either side of the throne, who were staring at me with cold expressions. It was obvious that these were the advisors those guards mentioned, and they definitely looked like they were ready to explode, so I decided to ignore them in favour of Tree Hugger.

" I like, haven't seen your face before around here. Are you like visiting this palace? I can sense a powerful good vibe coming from you, and it's like a real pleasure to experience something so wondrous for the first time in a long while," said Tree Hugger. Her advisors continued looking at me with their cold expressions as though they didn't want me to be here, and it looked like one of them was mumbling under his breath. " Usually, regular Deku Scrubs aren't allowed inside of this groovy room full of wonder according to what my advisors often suggest, but today is like, an exception which is why you are here before me."

" Does it have to do with the monkey over there?" I asked while pointing at the cage.

" Yeah, for my advisors have suggested that we do something, but like, I'm not really feeling that kind of flow in my chakra," replied Tree Hugger.

" Your most gracious Deku Queen! You know the reason why we have set all of this up, and it has to do with the fact that your precious daughter, our precious princess, is missing, and it has to do with that wretched monkey we've locked away in that cage!"

" Wow... why go to such an extreme?" asked Tree Hugger.

" Because that monkey must learn! You, common Deku Scrub! We're about to punish the foolish monkey who kidnapped the Deku princess! He has insulted the Royal Family, so we'll show him what happens to those who defy our tribe! Please your majesty, allow us to carry out the sentence without further delay! We must make an example of this monkey, and the only way involves dunking him into a cauldron of boiling water." Did this advisor just say what I thought he said? He wants to plunge an innocent animal into a cauldron without any kind of trial? Fluttershy would likely be suffering a heart attack if she heard what came out of his mouth, so hopefully Tree Hugger will refuse such an outlandish request, and put this Deku in his place.

" Now, I don't think like, we should be doing something so extreme," said Tree Hugger.

" Your people demand justice!"

" I suppose that is true, but this monkey hasn't been found guilty or not," said Tree Hugger.

" He is clearly guilty your majesty, for he went with the princess to the forbidden temple which only members of the Deku Royal Family are allowed to go to, and he was the only one who came back which means her life was merely expendable." At that moment, Tree Hugger suddenly erupted into anger because of what she had heard about her daughter, but then she quickly calmed down again before pointing a finger towards the monkey.

" Like, I can't argue with such evidence like that, so I guess I've no other choice but to carry out a sentence. However, the punishment will not be carried out until sometime tomorrow evening, for I'm like willing to give the monkey a chance to prove his innocence. If he doesn't reveal his inner aura, or his chakra remains impure, then you have my full permission to do what must be done," said Tree Hugger.

" Are you sure this is a wise decision?" I asked.

" What do you mean?" asked Tree Hugger.

" The facts are against this monkey your majesty, and for that I do understand where your advisors are coming from, but I think this kind of punishment is just way too extreme, and could prove to be problematic especially if the other tribes get wind of this. I was thinking that maybe I could speak with him for a while, and see what he might say, but if I can't get any answers from him, then I won't say anything else, and you can go ahead and do whatever you want," I replied.

My request drew the ire of her advisors right away, and seeing their cold expressions made me feel uneasy, but then Tree Hugger rose from her throne before picking up what appeared to be a sceptre, and walked forward towards me before commanding me to bow down before her.

" You may like do this thing," said Tree Hugger.

" I only need a few minutes," I said.

" Are there like, any questions about my decision, or something like that?" asked Tree Hugger. None of the advisors said anything which meant I was free to speak to this monkey, so I'm hoping he will be cooperative, for his life is practically hanging in the balance. " Okay, now I need to get back to realigning my aura especially after having it agitated by the news of what happened to my daughter, but before you leave little sprout, I advise you speak with my butler, for she may be able to help you with something I guess?

Oh, and if you've like, no idea on where the monkey is, he is up in that cage. Take a good look at his face, for it looks so charming as though it were a beautiful cloud." Did Tree Hugger just tell me something I already pointed out to her? Twilight then told me that she was known for having a slight issue with memory loss, but then it was probably because she was so connected with her aura that she has a tendency to overlook things the first time. As I walked towards the cage, the Deku advisors began to huddle together as though they were planning on doing something to me, and the rest of the Deku Scrubs continued to act as they had before I entered.

" I don't trust those advisors," I whispered.

" It looks like they are influencing Tree Hugger into doing things that she doesn't want to do because of her attitude. They want to become a more ruthless queen which may explain why the other tribes have been looking down on the Dekus because the advisors are making the entire tribe look bad while Tree Hugger unknowingly wants them to be viewed in a positive light," whispered Twilight.

" Do you suppose the Deku Princess keeps those advisors in check?" I whispered.

" They act as though they were in charge instead of Tree Hugger, and it wouldn't surprise me if they were to suddenly rise up and overthrow her. Granted, this would never happen in Equestria given everypony appreciates Princess Celestia, Princess Luna, Princess Cadance, my brother, and myself. Still, this princess must give Tree Hugger the support she needs to rule her kingdom," whispered Twilight.

" Without the princess, the advisors have free reign," I whispered.

" Not much we can do about it until we find out more about this abduction," whispered Twilight. We both then looked back at the advisors who continued to glare at us with their cold expressions, but then they suddenly turned away which made me feel worried. I hope they don't decide that I deserve some kind of punishment just because I wanted to ask the monkey some questions. Besides, if I get nothing out of this, my efforts would be in vain, and in turn the advisors would use their influence to coerce Tree Hugger into carrying out whatever punishment they had in mind.

Walking up to the cage, I saw the monkey imprisoned behind strong, metal bars, yet he was tied up with thick rope onto a large pole where he was struggling to free himself. This was clearly an inhumane act, but there was nothing I could do other than hope for some kind of answer to my question.

" Excuse me," I whispered.

" What do you want?"

" I was wondering if you'd answer my question regarding what happened to the Deku Princess," I replied.

" They keep saying that I kidnapped her. No matter how many times they say it, it's not going to bring the princess back! I know deep down, the Deku Queen believes my words, yet her advisors have insisted that my actions have threatened the very existence of the Deku Kingdom. They've been trying to convince her to punish me in a brutal manner so that my brothers will learn to fear the Deku, and I fear she will eventually agree with them especially when she learns I did something really sinister."

" What did you do?" I asked.

" I refuse to speak to the likes of you!"

" Where is the princess?" I asked.

" Again, I won't answer you!"

" Listen... I'm aware of the fact that you're innocent, and I want to help you," I said.

" Punish me or do whatever else you might!"

" I want to help you prove your innocence, save the Deku Princess, and possibly return this region back to normal, but I can't do anything unless you tell me exactly what is going on around here," I said.

" Huh? You... want to help me? Strange, but there's something about you which makes me believe in your words, yet at the same time you're on that side of the cage which means this might be some kind of trick in order to make me confess." The monkey then went silent for a couple of seconds before speaking in a much softer tone. " If you can find your way to this side, I'll listen to you, but until then I refuse to accept your help! Won't someone listen to me? If they're not careful, the princess will fall victim to a monster! Please, believe my words..." My efforts have proven to be in vain, so with a sad expression on my face, I walked away from the cage which in turn caused the advisors no end of glee as this is what they wanted to see happen.

" That could have gone better," whispered Twilight.

" No wonder he refuses to listen, for look at how they've treated him," I whispered.

" And those advisors are happy that your plan didn't work," whispered Twilight. That thought alone made me feel really angry on the inside, but I had to restrain myself otherwise the situation would get even worse, so I decided to simply leave without saying another word. Tree Hugger tried to inquire as to how it went, yet her advisors shook their heads to let her know that nothing worked, and she just sat back down on her throne where she began to look glum.

Just as I was at the exit, someone grabbed me by the shoulder, and I spun around where I was looking at Mrs. Cheerilee which certainly was surprising. Back in Hyrule, she was a Business Scrub who had a shop inside of Ganondorf's castle, yet here she was as an actual Deku Scrub with her hair style much like Tree Hugger, but what was with her strange attire.

" Greetings, I am known as the Deku Butler," said Cheerilee.

" You're a servant?" I asked.

" I suppose that's one way to look at it, but rather I am the personal attendant to the Deku Queen, and the Deku Princess. Unlike the rest of my fellow Deku, I do not have any kind of animosity towards the monkey, for I believe his words to be true," replied Cheerilee.

" Then why not do something?" I asked.

" My place is to serve the Deku Queen, and nothing more. My own opinions are often ignored by both the advisors and her majesty, yet I've grown accustomed to this because it is the nature of being a butler," replied Cheerilee. I was thinking that her words were nothing but garbage given she had a voice just like everyone else, but maybe she is afraid to speak her mind due to those advisors. " Now that our beloved princess is missing, the advisors to the queen have become even more vocal than ever before, and will no doubt convince her that punishing the monkey is the best course of action.

While her majesty has remained calm and collected, all it would take is just one small push resulting in her completely losing it." Tree Hugger lose it? That didn't sound like something I'd want to see, so I need to move fast if I want to resolve this before something bad happens. Cheerilee then continued talking which did start to feel unnerving given how negative she was feeling, yet who could blame her given the attitude of most of the Deku. " I fear the princess may be caught up in some kind of trouble, just as that monkey claims..."

" Then let him prove himself," I suggested.

" If only I could, but then the queen is the only one who can make such a decision," said Cheerilee.

" She seems more than capable," I said.

" Her majesty relies on her chakra to remain calm, but I fear her vibes as she calls them will shatter. Should she lose control of her emotions, the Deku Queen can become truly frightening. We can't even send troops out to look for the princess, for the poisonous swamp water makes traversing Woodfall difficult, and of course there is the problem revolving around the queen and her advisors.

What are we to do?" asked Cheerilee. I actually had no answer to her question, for this is something that was completely over my head due to not knowing enough about this situation. Cheerilee noticed my head had slumped slightly forward, and she took that as a sign that I couldn't answer her. " It's terribly sad... but nothing can be done now... our swamps have become poisoned... this may be the end of the Deku Kingdom!"

" What of the guardian of this region?" I asked.

" No one knows why the one who protects us has vanished," replied Cheerilee.

" Hasn't anyone tried to find out?" I asked.

" Only the royal family are permitted to do this, but the princess is missing, and with her majesty unable to act because of showing defiance towards her advisors, there is nothing anyone can do to find out why the guardian no longer protects us all. The end is nigh young Deku child, so I suggest you flee this place, and return to where you came from so that you can avoid the inevitable destruction that is to come," replied Cheerilee.

With that, she turned around, and slowly walked off towards Tree Hugger, and I assumed she was just going to stand there ready to carry out the commands of her queen without question. Despite getting a little bit of information, I felt really bad for Mrs. Cheerilee because of what her conscience must be telling her.

" I can't believe she doesn't want to do anything," whispered Twilight.

" She may not be in any position," I whispered.

" Maybe but that's no reason for her to feel so negative," whispered Twilight.

" We really need to speak to that monkey in the cage, for I think he will tell us exactly what's going on," I whispered.

" Maybe we should leave for the time being, and try to find a way to get to him on the other side of the cage," whispered Twilight. Deep down, I felt really disappointed as I was hoping for the monkey to be a bit more cooperative, but I suppose I shouldn't be surprised by his reaction, and can't blame him due to what the Deku have done. Upon leaving the throne room, I found myself confronted with the same monkey who spoke to me before about helping his brother. Is it just me, or was there some kind of psychic link here as how else would he have known I was coming outside again at this exact moment.

" Was my brother all right?"

" They have him tied to a pole inside of a cage where he has been insisting to them that he is innocent," I replied.

" Deku treat brother like criminal, but he isn't which makes me sad knowing they are punishing him. Did you see entrance to cage? We know secret route there."

" A secret route!?!?" I said with a surprised look on my face. To be honest, I didn't really notice anything like that, but then I was more inclined on trying to get some answers from the monkey in question. My heart began to beat rapidly as I had this feeling the secret route would be placing me into harms way, and more specifically exploring those side areas more closely given how they felt out of place.

" Enter secret route from Outer Garden entrance, but entrance in tall place. No can reach it... not even Deku for their flowers cannot reach high enough. Need bean from bean seller. Live beneath palace garden." I slapped my head when the monkey said that as I remember a similar incident back in Hyrule, yet both Twilight and the monkey were wondering why I did that to myself, and it resulted in me blushing a bright red out of sheer embarrassment before asking the monkey to continue. " Bean needed to create way up to entrance. Without bean, you cannot help my brother, and he will be punished for crime he did not do. Understand my meaning?"

" I do," I answered while nodding.

" Oh! You smart. Plant bean in soft place by Outer Garden. You figure out rest. Hurry. Help brother!" The monkey then turned around and ran away leaving me feeling somewhat annoyed because of having to deal with a situation which wasn't my best moment during my last adventure, and I had a feeling I would be dealing with the exact same person as before... not like that was a bad thing, but rather it was the principle.

" Why did you slap yourself?" asked Twilight.

" I have a story regarding those beans," I replied.

" Really? You understood what that monkey was on about? To be honest, I didn't understand why he was talking about beans," said Twilight.

" They aren't regular beans like the kind you would grow in the human world, and in Equestria, but rather they are magical where if you planted one in the proper place, it would eventually grow into a large plant which can be used to travel about from one location to another," I said. Twilight obviously had no idea what I was on about, so I had to rely on some visual aide through the use of my hands, and believe me when I say it felt humiliating doing this, but after my attempt at charades, she immediately understood which was a sigh of relief, yet how come she figured it out when I did that? " Why do you believe me, and not the monkey?" I have to admit that this did make me feel concerned.

" It's because I know you Sunset, and you've been through an awful lot," replied Twilight.

" Thanks Twilight," I smiled.

" I still can't believe you spent that many rupees buying ten beans, but then you wanted to make him happy, so your heart was in the right place," said Twilight.

" While not all of the beans were used, I just couldn't bare to see him upset, but then Spike did berate me for a while," I said.

" That doesn't sound surprising," laughed Twilight. I ended up laughing as well because of what it all meant, but eventually we had to get down to serious business if we were to reach the monkey trapped in the cage.

I looked upwards at the night sky where it was still pretty dark, so I'm guessing it's roughly the middle of the night, so perhaps I can use this somehow to sneak past any Deku Scrub guards patrolling about. " This isn't going to be easy Sunset, for we can't afford to be caught otherwise we'll get thrown out of the palace, and any efforts will be wasted." Twilight started to think about how we would approach this scenario, and she immediately came up with an idea. " Those guards have a basic movement pattern as we witnessed before, so if we apply a strategy around that, avoiding them will be a cinch."

" It does depend on how many there are as I'm sure there were more than what we could see," I said.

" We'll know soon enough," said Twilight. It then came down to a decision as to which area we should explore first, and Twilight suggested going to the right to which I agreed. Walking through the right-hand passage, I stopped almost instantly as there was a Deku Scrub on patrol nearby. " Watch his movements closely, and wait for the right opening, but make sure to keep watch of other guards as you don't want to be pinned in." Good thing Twilight mentioned this, for a second guard was nearby walking in a slightly different pattern which would make this a little difficult.

" What do you suppose their vision is?" I asked.

" Well, since you're a Deku Scrub right now, you already know that answer," replied Twilight. In my mind right there, I felt silly because what she said was true. I'm a Deku right now, so my vision is the same as theirs, so I looked forward as far as possible to determine how much I can see.

" I got a pretty good distance, yet it seems to only work when I'm looking straight. Every other direction is just nothing but darkness," I said.

" So Deku Scrubs have some kind of restriction on their vision... I'll use my light to guide you along although I'll need to stay pretty close in case I accidentally alert them to our presence," said Twilight. She snuggled up next to my hat which did catch me by surprise, but then my vision in those other directions suddenly improved, and when the two guards weren't watching me, I ran as fast as I could until I reached the wall where I turned right, and came to a stop at another doorway.

" Guess there's more to this area than we previously thought." Twilight said before floating ahead, and quickly coming back because of hearing the sounds of more shuffling further ahead. " I'm hearing another three guards in the next section, so be careful not to get caught." Moving forward slowly, I entered the next area which looked identical to the previous area aside from the guards who were moving around at slightly different speeds.

" Maybe I can use those bushes for cover," I suggested.

" It might work, but they don't seem all that spacious," said Twilight.

" Maybe you're right," I said.

" Why not use some of the shadows to your advantage," suggested Twilight. I followed her advice and moved forward where one of the guards almost noticed me, but quickly turned around allowing me to slip by where I saw the second guard walking around a group of plants, but I had to hide in the shadows immediately as the first Deku was coming back again.

" This is actually pretty intense," I said.

" Just have to remain calm," said Twilight.

" It's just like what happened when I explored the Gerudo's Fortress," I said.

" Oh?" asked Twilight.

" I did end up getting caught on one occasion, but then I didn't know what I was doing at the time, yet I've learned since then so the chances of me being caught are slightly better than before, but not by much," I replied. When the first guard walked back to his previous position, I moved forward making sure to keep absolutely quiet as I was behind the second guard by mere inches, yet he didn't turn around even once, and when he went around the next corner of the plants, I just walked forward where two things quickly became apparent.

This way was a dead-end which meant having to go back to the main hallway, yet there was a Piece of Heart near where the third Deku guard was patrolling. " Shoot! We went in the wrong direction, but at least I can pick that up over there."

" Maybe you should leave it as you could get caught," suggested Twilight.

" No, I'll go for it," I said. Waiting for the Deku Scrub to move away from the Piece of Heart, I quickly ran forward picking it up, but I had no time to feel the warmth from it as the Deku had suddenly turned around, and my instinct kicked in where it prompted me to jump into the shadows while making a loud thud. The Deku kept looking in my direction as my crashing sound definitely caught his attention, but he eventually resumed patrolling, and probably thought that the noise belonged to a monkey who was just swinging by for whatever reasons it had.

From the safety of the shadows, I looked ahead to see where that Deku was before relaxing for a bit. " That was way too close for comfort Twilight, and yet I acquired my prize even though I couldn't feel its effects due to running.

" Now we need to get back to the main area, and inspect the other side," said Twilight.

" Great," I moaned as I waited until I had an opportunity to begin heading back. Making my way past the third Deku Scrub, I decided to use the giant bushes as a hiding spot as the second Deku was more fixated on following his intended path, but when he quickly turned around due to hearing something scurrying about, my heart began racing as I feared that I had been discovered, and then my heart broke when the Deku began yelling because of an intruder. " No!" I thought as it meant everything was now ruined, but then my expression turned to one of confusion as the guards were focusing on something other than me. " Huh? What happened?"

" I'm not sure, but it looks like they found someone," replied Twilight.

" What should we do?" I asked.

" Make our way back, and hopefully they don't find us," replied Twilight. The guards from the other section had also come to investigate what had caused such a commotion, and as I walked carefully to avoid being spotted, I noticed that they were surrounding a couple of monkeys which made me wonder if they wanted to be caught on purpose in order to help me out.

While I could help them by taking on the Deku Scrubs, I should ignore them otherwise their sacrifice would be in vain. Running past the guards, and through the now defenceless section, it took a few seconds for me to get back to the main hallway where those two main guards hadn't noticed me entering from that doorway.

" That... was so intense," I said.

" Are you okay?" asked Twilight.

" We almost got caught, and my heart was racing like crazy," I replied.

" Those monkeys must have done that so we could get back here before anyone noticed," said Twilight.

" That's what I came to as well," I said.

" I don't think we'll have any monkeys helping us in the other area," said Twilight. I contribute that to being a sheer stroke of luck, yet why didn't any of the guards in the other area come over to investigate? Despite their attitudes, Deku Scrubs were quite diligent in terms of being properly trained to follow commands. I then noticed Twilight was hovering around back and forth like she were in deep thought, and then she asked me an unusual question. " Is the bean seller human?"

" He was in Hyrule, and if he is the same one here as he was there, then he'd be human too," I replied.

" The Deku Tribe don't allow any non-Deku access to the palace, so how could someone from another tribe make their way through without any trouble. Not only that, how did they set up a shop right under their noses? None of this is making any sense!" moaned Twilight. I have to agree with her concerns as what she said didn't sound possible given where we are, but I have a feeling we'll know soon enough when we run into the bean seller.

If the seller is who I think it is, at least I'll be in familiar company once again even though my previous experience didn't go over that well. As soon I entered the other area, I had to come to a stop due to two Deku Scrubs who were supposed to be on patrol... a big supposed to be, yet they were having a conversation with each other which sounded like they were either on break, or this was a convenient moment.

" What was all that ruckus?"

" Monkeys on the other side of the garden."

" Again!?!?"

" It's the third time this week guards have spotted them around here, but I don't blame them because our queen has one of them captive."

" Do you think what the advisors say is true?"

" Our princess may have been eaten by the monkey, or he was using her in order to gain access to the temple? I'm not sure what to believe as they don't exactly have any concrete evidence to support either theory, but who am I to question their sense of judgment?"

" We're just low-life soldiers who just watch over the palace."

" Quite an exciting life huh?"

" If only there were something more happening right now."

" Actually..."

" You know of something don't you? I can see it in your eyes!"

" This is a rumour more than anything, so don't think of it as being confirmed, but I heard from a number of Deku across Woodfall that they have seen two mysterious figures prowling about as though they were trying to find something. They say these two possess powerful auras which make them impossible to approach, but the weirdest thing is what they look like."

" Tell me more."

" They both looked demonic in nature... like they aren't part of this world... they even possessed magic which couldn't have been granted to them by the Great Fairy. These sightings aren't just limited to our corner of Termina, for the other tribes have claimed to see these demonic figures. I'd go as far to say that all of Termina save for that wasteland to the east have spotted them. Just thinking about demonic creatures with terrifying magic makes me quiver all the way to my roots."

" Could they have something to do with the princess?"

" According to what Dekus and others have said, these creatures appear to be searching for someone, but they couldn't understand what they were saying as it sounded like garbled nonsense... something about sunset and twilight..."

" That does sound weird."

" Everyone has been warned to keep their distance from them as they have apparently claimed the lives of a few innocent people who either got in their way, or perhaps they were killed due to being mistaken for someone else. Maybe the words sunset, and twilight have some other meaning like they were the names of individuals, but then who be named in such an unusual manner?"

" It doesn't sound like a rumour to me."

" What makes you think that?"

" Because I can see them up there!"

This prompted me to immediately look upward, and sure enough there were two shadowy figures perched on top of one of the palace walls where it looked like they were observing the area for something. Even though I couldn't see what they looked like due to being too far away, I could sense powerful magic coming from both of them which felt familiar... then my entire body froze when it suddenly clicked for me. No... it couldn't be... could it? Was it possible?

While various images began running through my head, the two figures then took to the sky using large wings before disappearing leaving me feeling confused, and extremely worried. The two Deku Scrubs decided to resume their patrols especially after what they just witnessed, and while Twilight was eager to continue onward, she noticed that I was feeling very hesitant which made her take me aside in order to find out what was wrong.

" Why have you frozen up?" asked Twilight.

" Those two shadowy figures..." I began.

" They're gone now, so we don't need to worry about them," said Twilight.

" We should seeing as their aura was Equestrian magic," I said.

" What!?!?" exclaimed Twilight before she quickly closed her mouth as a sudden outburst would attract some unwanted attention. " Are you saying those two figures come from Equestria?" That's when I explained something about my experiences in Hyrule which I was hoping to never reveal because of what it meant to me on a personal level, and I felt sick to my stomach just thinking about it.

I revealed to her the existence of Sunset Demon... the she-demon form I assumed during the Fall Formal at Canterlot High... the same form which caused me to become overwhelmed by the magic of Twilight's crown which started all of this mess in the first place.

" I'm sorry that I didn't tell you, but it was something I just couldn't share with anyone, and that includes the likes of you," I said.

" Don't worry about me being offended Sunset, yet why not tell me at least?" asked Twilight.

" It'd just be a reminder of what I used to do," I replied.

" But I thought you got over that?" asked Twilight.

" I've still got some anxiety as well as insecurity issues because of the magic in the human world, and just knowing that she could still be alive after what happened fills my heart with so much sorrow," I replied.

" We don't know if one of those creatures was your she-demon form even though the Equestrian magic radiating from her was pretty obvious, but I thought she was the only one of her kind? How can there be a second version of her... unless... the evil form that my human counterpart became also exists as a separate entity?" asked Twilight. Did she just say what I thought she just said? I sincerely hope she didn't because I don't think my anxieties can handle anymore surprises.

Twilight quickly flew upwards before coming back a few moments later looking crest-fallen. " There were a few loose black feathers scattered about up there, but I don't understand the meaning behind it." Unfortunately, I do because I remember Twilight's human counterpart became a demonic creature who had wings which comprised of feathers, yet how could that form still exist when I clearly was able to bring her to her senses without it resulting in conflict?

Could my own inner demon be responsible? Maybe Ganondorf? Or, something else completely? " In any case, we must continue onward with our journey, and not worry let this get to us."

" If only I had that kind of positive attitude," I said.

" You can do this Sunset," smiled Twilight.

" Maybe, but if it is them, things have only gotten even worse... especially for me as there is a lot more that I haven't told you. All I mentioned was the basic gist of it, but there's a far deeper meaning," I said. That's when Twilight rubbed her wings against my face for support, and told me I've become a lot stronger since coming to understand how magic operates in the human world, and I started to feel better for this was true.

I was allowing fear to consume my heart, and for that I forgot that I defeated the she-demon in the end after such an epic struggle thus proving myself as the one true Sunset Shimmer. If she is here in Termina, I can handle her although this can be disputed especially if that other creature is the other Twilight's demonic form.

" Feeling better now?" asked Twilight.

" Yes, so let's resume what we were doing," I replied.

" The guards will probably be less serious now considering they all saw shadows moving about above, so we should be able to find the bean seller," said Twilight. I then started to walk forward where I noticed the guards were acting rather skittish, and who could blame them? I wasn't going to make them feel even worse, for that would just be me acting really mean which is a call-back to my own past, so I waited for the right moment where I slipped by while they were distracted.

Just like the other area of the palace, this side had a second section which looked exactly like the previous area, and Twilight made sure to bring this up. " It feels like everything is identical around here which makes exploring a challenge."

" We need a hole in the ground," I said.

" What!?!?" exclaimed Twilight.

" There were holes all over Hyrule which led into secret grottos where small rewards and the like were located, and while I didn't explore many of these due to not finding many of them, I'm sure these exist in Termina as well. This would also provide a logical explanation as to how the bean seller was able to hide from the Deku, for I doubt any of them would be willing to explore underground," I said.

" Would such a hole be out in the open?" asked Twilight.

" Most of the time this is true, but some are hidden away for reasons I haven't figured out yet," I replied. The only reason why I knew about these holes was due to a hole back in the Lost Woods from my last adventure which was the entrance to a Fairy Fountain, and that fountain proved itself immensely useful because of the Forest Temple.

Unlike the previous section, none of the Deku Scrub guards were feeling insecure, so it was back down to business where I had to sneak by them. There were three on patrol, and were moving in the exact same pattern, so I didn't need to rely on different strategies. " Now if I were a hole in the ground..."

" Trying to find it?" asked Twilight.

" If we can drop down into it, we'll be safe for the time being," I replied. Slipping past the first Deku who was distracted by some kind of weird noise, I quickly jumped into a large shrub to avoid the second Deku who turned around and walked the other way leaving me to deal with the final one who just kept walking back and forth as though he were paranoid about something.

It took me a few minutes to figure out exactly when there was a perfect opportunity to get through, and there was one where the Deku briefly stops for about two seconds due to that paranoia.

" Sunset," began Twilight.

" What?" I asked.

" I can see the hole over there in the corner," replied Twilight. Sure enough, there was one which means the bean seller has to be down there, so the moment the guard paused for two seconds, I quickly made a mad dash towards the hole where I dropped down into it before he noticed me. Maybe I should have waited a little while longer, for those demonic creatures appeared again by landing on a palace wall making sure to remain hidden in the shadows.

" Are you sure that was her?"

" It took me a while, but once I sensed the Equestrian magic coming from her, I knew it was her even though she has somehow changed her appearance." The first demon lurched forward where its eyes began to glow a bright yellow before it began to laugh a little. " Even after time somehow reset itself a couple of times, you and I remain unaffected because of our Equestrian magic protecting us, and that applies to those two."

" My knowledge shows that they are using an arcane magic which isn't used all that often."

" And for a good reason it seems."

" Since we know that she's here, and walking around in that strange form, we can take care of her before we move onto our other target." The second demon walked forward a few paces where the light of the moon shone on its face, and flames surrounding its eyes flared up. " From what you told me about what happened before, Hyrule possessed a tremendous magical energy, and it seems this world has a similar effect."

" You'll be able to figure out what it means, and it will definitely prove beneficial as all of this time travel business does make traversing this world difficult. I'm just glad to see Sunset Shimmer again, and yet there is something different about her." The first demon stopped smiling before it looked up at the moon before slumping down to the floor as though it had suddenly lost its pride. " She seems stronger... more understanding of her surroundings."

" Absorbing all of that magic will do that for you."

" So she really did it?"

" I should know because I was there, and she used that power in order to defeat me even though we were equals." The second demon's eyes then changed to reflect upon this notion, and provided a sort of sympathetic expression where she shed a few tears before stopping herself. " All I wanted was to understand the magic of Equestria all in the name of knowledge, yet I was denied because I became too consumed with power." It's eyes then changed back to normal upon the realization that it's desire, it's goal had been cast aside to the winds. " You've experienced this feeling right?"

" On more than one occasion, yet I kept coming back because I believed myself to be the real her, and I still do even now."

" Then why not face her now?"

" If she is as strong as you say, trying to encounter her now would be nothing short of a suicide, and I'm barely able to do anything given how it took me an awful lot just to bring myself back from the brink." The first demon then began sighing as though it were already giving up before anything had been done, and then gained some slight comfort from the second demon who sat down next to it. " Sunset Shimmer will just have to wait for a while much to my own annoyance, but I know continuing this course will result in disaster, so we should try and find the version of you who exists here."

" Would that not be her who accompanies Sunset?"

" That is the Twilight of Equestria... the one we seek originates from the human world..."

" Right, I forgot about that little detail."

" We have plenty of time to find her because of time resetting, but it will become a problem because of having to retrace our steps. Come on, we don't need to be here anymore, so Sunset will be left alone for a while until we come up with a more ideal strategy." The first demon stood up before spreading out its wings, and taking off where it flew towards the pink mountain located in the heart of Woodfall, yet the second demon decided to observe things for a few more seconds.

" This shall prove most enlightening." It then took off using its wings, and followed after the first demon which caused the aura of Equestrian magic to disappear thus causing the Deku Scrubs on patrol to start relaxing because it was the magic of my home world which made them feel so uncomfortable in the first place. If I wanted even more pressure added onto my plate, the knowledge of these two demonic creatures has increased my stress levels to unprecedented levels...

To Be Continued.

Chapter 11: When Magic Leads the Way

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 21, 2015
Chapter 11: When Magic Leads the Way.

"Ooof!" I moaned as I landed on what looked like a small raised platform which was glowing in several colours. I then looked up to make sure that none of the Deku Scrub guards were following me, and my heart felt relieved knowing that we weren't being followed. After getting up because of landing on my rear, I walked a few steps forward before taking the time to look around this underground cave... it looked relatively peaceful which makes you wonder why such a cave would exist below the Deku Palace, yet I suppose it's a mystery which may not have an answer.

There was the sound of water coming from a passage to the right, but it was the sound of someone munching away to the left that caught my attention, and it was a sound which I remember from before. " Only he has that specific chewing sound..."

" You can tell just by listening to something like that?" asked Twilight.

" When you've heard it as much as I did during a conversation, it sort of gets engraved into your memory," I replied. Walking up to where the path splits into two directions, I turned left which looked like a dead-end, but light coming from the next corner made me suspect that it was an exit, but where it would take me remains to be seen, and if it sends me somewhere filled with numerous Deku Scrubs guards... well... I don't think I'd be surviving such an encounter.

That's when I noticed someone was sitting down nearby holding a large bag, and he constantly thrusted his hand into it before pulling it back out, and munching on what I suspected were beans. He showed no signs of slowing down such eating habits, so hopefully nothing ends up happening to him such as indigestion.

" I don't believe it," said Twilight.

" Just like before," I moaned.

" No wonder you knew it was him because of how he chews on those beans, but why is he here of all places?" asked Twilight. Sitting in front of me bare-chested was Snips, a student from Canterlot High, who at one time served as one of my lackeys who carried out my plans when I was the bad girl before accepting friendship into my heart.

Even now after all this time, I still feel bad about how I used both him and Snails like that without taking their own feelings into consideration. I mean, they both forgave me for what I did, but deep down those wounds probably still exist, and won't be healed for quite some time. " Sunset... are you okay?" Twilight asked due to noticing that I was daydreaming. " Does seeing Snips remind you of how you used to be?"

" Yeah, and I still feel pretty bad that I treated him and Snails like slaves," I replied.

" They did get over it," said Twilight.

" I know, but it's something I never should have done in the first place," I said. My heart started to pound rather quickly because of my feelings, but these weren't feelings of love... no, not in the least... they were feelings of shame, shame that I had done a great wrong... one of many after the Fall Formal last year where I had to spend time apologizing to everyone at CHS because of my immaturity.

It took a long time for me to earn their trust, and while I'm no longer that old version of me who was cruel and dishonest, I still had moments where I regress back to those days such as feeling guilty, or releasing pent up rage due to feeling frustrated. " Twilight, this is another instance of me having to suffer because of my actions." I said as I pressed my back up against the cave wall. " Just because I'm in a much better place now doesn't mean what I did can just be forgotten simply by snuffing it out like it were a candle."

" I never knew you felt this way," said Twilight.

" While our friends helped me along, there were times where I had to tackle these issues on my own," I said.

" If only I had known much sooner, I could have helped," said Twilight.

" No, you wouldn't have because in your heart, you didn't exactly trust me especially after the Fall Formal, yet it was a friendship which took time to forge. These days, you would help regardless, but back then was a much different time," I said. My words sounded rather cruel from my perspective, but they were the honest truth. After the formal, people kept looking at me with such disdain because I made them miserable what with manipulating, lying, scheming, and more where that came from, yet deep down in my heart, I had to suffer this way in order to atone for my actions.

Twilight then rubbed her wings against my face before she started to shed some tears, and I had no intention of stopping her from doing so. Actually, I began crying a little as well because thinking back on my past gives me both pain and pleasure... pain because of being reminded, and pleasure because of having overcome such obstacles in my life.

" Feeling better now?" asked Twilight.

" A little," I answered.

" You just have to remain positive Sunset, and don't allow the past to consume you even though you can't forget about it. What you did wrong can be used to show others not to fall into the same situation, and you can tell them that despite what happened, people will be forgiving," said Twilight. She then smacked herself in the forehead upon remembering that I've already done something like that, and it was for her human counterpart who became corrupted by Equestrian magic. I was able to show her the path of both forgiveness, and redemption which is what Twilight herself offered me.

" I wasn't about to let the cycle continue," I said.

" What do you mean?" asked Twilight.

" Sorry, just thinking out loud," I replied while blushing, yet I suspected Twilight knew what I meant because she had a skeptical look on her face. That's when a loud burp began to echo throughout the cave, and despite how disgusting it sounded, it reminded me of needing to speak to Snips who probably is wondering why a Deku Scrub and fairy were interacting with each other, so after gulping really hard on my throat, I walked up to him where he turned to pay attention to me.

" Huh? A Deku Scrub? I didn't think any of you would find me down here! Still, you seem different from the regular Deku I hear walking about up there as though you weren't really one of them, but don't pay me any mind for I can't judge on appearances," said Snips. He stopped pulling beans from his bag because he knew that eating while talking to someone would be just plain rude, and then he reached into a pocket where he pulled out a Magic Bean... just like in Hyrule...

" How did you get down here?" I asked.

" The Deku Palace is usually not under heavy security, so it was easy for me to slip through their defences, and come down here. Ever since their princess went missing a few days ago, there have been more Deku running around here than ever before," replied Snips.

" Do you know anything about a temple?" I asked.

" That's common knowledge even though the Deku insist that it's for their royal family only," replied Snips who suddenly raised his hand before plunging it into his bag, and pulling out some beans before eating them which made me gag on the inside of my mouth. " Sorry about that, but I was feeling peckish."

I glowered at him with such a cold stare, he slowly took his hand out of the bag, and placed it a few inches away. " Ahem... the temple is said to be hidden somewhere in Woodfall, yet the location is known to the royal family only as they go there in order to pray to the guardian who protects this region from dark forces."

" The Deku Princess and a monkey went there," I said.

" She would be able to gain access to the temple since she knows what needs to be done to make it appear, but why would she want to go there in the first place? Ever since that poison started seeping into the water, Woodfall has slowly succumbed, and is showing no signs of returning to normal," said Snips. I looked at him with an odd expression, for I didn't think he would be aware of what was happening outside of this cave, yet he felt rather offended by my reaction. " Just because I'm living down here doesn't mean my knowledge of the world above is next to nothing."

" Sorry," I said.

" You want to go to this temple don't you?" asked Snips.

" Was I that obvious?" I asked.

" Most Deku Scrubs would never dream of inquiring about the temple, for they are forbidden to go there in addition to knowing the secret that reveals it. You on the other hand are different... as though, something in your heart was telling you to do something, yet you don't know what exactly," replied Snips. His words rang true in my heart as even though I want to help out, I wasn't sure what I could do given my lack of knowledge, but then the thought of the monkey imprisoned in the cage was what I need to deal with.

If he knows anything regarding the temple, then asking him is a sure bet, provided he is willing to speak. I decided not to tell that little tidbit to Snips in case he thought of me as being a weird Deku even though I am human... err... a pony.

" So, you sell beans?" I asked in an attempt to change the subject.

" Well, you're the first customer I've had in a long time! The Deku who I sell them to hasn't been by here for a while now, so I've been sitting here on my own with all of these beans, and it's been a frustrating time," replied Snips. I had taken several steps backward because those latter words felt worrisome, but then I moved forward again which made him suspect me of being interested in his wares. " Do you need any Magic Beans? They sprout leaves as soon as you water them which will cause them to grow up in an instant. Of course, I cannot sell you any water, so you can use a bottle, and pick up some water by that spring in the opposite direction."

" They need water?" I asked.

" Were you expecting something else?" asked Snips. Back in Hyrule, planting a Magic Bean merely caused it to sprout and nothing more, yet it seems in Termina, planting a bean isn't enough, and that water is needed to make it grow instantly rather than having to wait seven years. From Snips' perspective, I wasn't able to answer his question, making me look foolish, so then he sighed before continuing, but not before grabbing his bag of beans which prompted me to glower at him again where he held it without reaching into it with his hand.

" I'll give you one free sample, so try planting it in some soft soil. You can always buy more, for I have no plans on leaving this area any time soon."

" How much?" I asked.

" Only ten rupees for one Magic Bean," replied Snips. It sounded too good to be true because of how I ended up paying a fortune for the same beans last time, but since this was a different version of Snips, he sounded really sincere about the price. Besides, this first bean was a freebie which wasn't too bad, but then where can I find soft soil with which to plant one?

The monkey who wanted me to come here mentioned something about a location where I can plant a Magic Bean, yet my mind was drawing a blank which prompted Snips to shed some light for me. " If you head that way towards the light which is shining down from above, you can get back to the surface, and end up on the opposite side of the palace. I heard that some monkeys were playing around in that area as though they were trying to get to something."

" Really? There's no need for me to go back the way I came through?" I asked.

" Not unless you want to be captured by those Deku," replied Snips. He then handed over the bean to me where I looked down at it. It really was just like before where he was selling them, and I ended up purchasing all that he had, but I don't think I'll be buying them quite as often if not at all depending on what future challenges come my way. " Do you have a bottle?" Snips asked me this quite suddenly which caught me off guard. " Unless you have one to fill up with the necessary water needed for that Magic Bean, you're pretty much stuck."

" I have one," I said as I brandished it before him.

" In that case, help yourself to as much water as you would like," said Snips.

" Well, I only need the one bottle full," I said.

" There is a sign over there by the water's edge which states that people are allowed to take as much water as they want for souvenir purposes, and apparently it was written by the Swamp Tourist Centre as means of publicity. Sometimes, I wonder why they even bother given most people don't come here to Woodfall for the water as there isn't any special properties in it any way.

If you ever have need for more Magic Beans, I'll be waiting around here munching on my own bean stash, or you could buy some from the Deku who is located outside of the Swamp Tourist Centre," said Snips. Since I no longer had any business with him, he dipped his hand into the bag before resuming his eating, and I simply turned around, and walked back towards where the sound of water was coming from.

" Quite the small body of water," commented Twilight.

" How do you suppose it got down here?" I asked.

" One of the great mysteries of this world," replied Twilight.

" Well, we need to fill this bottle up with water, and use it on the bean which Snips gave to me," I said. I then realized that I was still holding onto the Magic Bean, so I quickly put it into one of my pockets before I drop it by accident or something. The body of water didn't look all that deep, but Twilight reminded me that Deku Scrubs have trouble dealing with water, so I figured walking into the water without going too deep will be enough for me to fill a bottle full of the stuff.

" Okay, this will only take a few moments, but if you see me going too far in, let me know, and I'll move back." Twilight nodded in approval of my request, and I stepped forward where I began to submerge myself into the water... it certainly felt strange, but maybe it's because I'm a Deku Scrub, and my body doesn't like it, so upon reaching an ideal spot which Twilight insisted because she warned me that I was about a step or two away from hopping due to simple reaction, I took out the bottle Chrysalis gave me.

I suppose it felt strange using something given to me by a villain, for that is what she was according to Twilight, but in this world she was very kind even if her shop could do with some sprucing up in the future what with all those knick-knacks around. Taking the bottle, I pulled out the cork before scooping up some water which made for quite the splashing sound, and when I was satisfied that it was filled to the brim, I re-corked it, and carefully put into one of my pouches as I don't want to accidentally waste it.

With that out of the way, I slowly waddled back to land before climbing out, and shaking myself off as though I were a dog before heading back to where Snips was still eating his beans.

" I forgot to mention something," began Snips.

" What's that?" I asked.

" You need to plant the bean first, and then apply the water to it otherwise it won't grow. Just because it has magical properties, it doesn't mean that a Magic Bean is capable of performing miracles," replied Snips. I'm not sure why he brought that up considering I knew what I had to do, but maybe he thinks that I don't understand, and is merely doing what he thinks is best to make sure that I get the proper results I'm looking for.

" Remember also that you need to plant it in soft soil, so be sure to look around for anything that resembles a small patch of dirt with a tiny hole at its center." Again, he didn't need to tell me something I already knew, but again he assumed that I don't know. Sighing to myself without him noticing me do it, I thanked him again before turning to the right, and walking towards another slightly raised groove which was right below another hole.

" That was certainly informative," commented Twilight.

" But I already knew that stuff," I moaned.

" Maybe, but perhaps you forgot?" asked Twilight. I then slapped myself in the forehead yet again, for how could I have not taken that into consideration? I may have done a lot of things during my adventures in Hyrule via that other video game, but that was several months ago, so obviously there would be things I don't remember such as Epona's Song which could be very useful as it would allow me to get around quicker as opposed to doing so on foot. " No need to feel ashamed Sunset as I'm just as guilty when it comes to forgetting things."

" Since when do you forget anything?" I asked.

" I forgot about my old friends back in Canterlot for over a year, and I had to go through a lot of personal experiences just to resolve the issue. It made me realize that just because my life has changed completely, I shouldn't forget about old friends who were there for me during difficult times," replied Twilight.

" Wow, I never would have pegged you for that," I said.

" I'm not perfect," said Twilight.

" No one ever really is no matter how much they think so in their minds," I said. Once again, it felt good talking to Twilight about my problems, yet deep down I wish that we could do this far more often either in the human world, or in Equestria. Doing so through my Friendship Reports is fine and all, but I do appreciate talking to someone in person about my fears and insecurities.

Perhaps that's a reason why I wanted to befriend Twilight's human counterpart because of wanting someone to talk to, but also because she needed someone who has had the same experiences to guide her along. Speaking of her, I wonder if we will run into the other Twilight in Termina? I mean, we've encountered people from both worlds, so it's entirely possible that she is somewhere around here.

" What are you thinking about?" asked Twilight.

" About the other Twilight," I replied.

" I still felt strange seeing another version of myself, but from what you and the others told me about what happened, it seems she needs friends now more than ever especially when it comes to dealing with her own inner demons as well as understanding magic. She was very lucky that the magic she inadvertently absorbed didn't destroy her or anything, but perhaps the whole experience will show her something which she has chosen to keep closed for such a long time," said Twilight.

" Friendship?" I asked.

" Among other feelings, and you and the rest of our friends will need to guide her along," replied Twilight. It sounded like she didn't want to help her counterpart, yet I can understand why because of the whole interacting with your other self mentality. Twilight is probably the one person who needs the most reassurance when it comes to the other Twilight, for I think it still creeps her out even though she should be used to it given how most ponies in Equestria have a human version of them. Guess this is something she will have to come to terms with when she feels ready. " I'm sure this is something which can be figured out."

" Just come through the portal whenever you have free time after this is all taken care of," I suggested.

" I think I'll do just that," said Twilight. Her words hid her true feelings on the matter, yet who am I to force her into confronting the other Twilight? I should just allow them to take their time to come to an appropriate understanding, for forcing the issue could make things worse, and that can result in friendships being destroyed... something all-too familiar for me given that's what I used to do before accepting it.

" Anyway, we need to keep going, so try standing on that groove, and see what happens." Twilight wasn't fooling me in the least, but I won't force the issue on her as I know she wouldn't do the same in return if I were in her position. I looked up at the ceiling out of curiosity, and it looked rather shoddy as though this entrance was only made recently, but then could Snips have done this?

He certainly doesn't appear capable of it, but then his appearance belies his true skills, and I shouldn't judge based on looks alone. Standing on the groove, I suddenly felt myself being pulled up by a magical force, and while my mind wanted me to run, I decided to stick with it as there was no other exit apart from where I entered.

" Where are we?" I asked as I closed my eyes prior to a bright light blinding me.

" Back outside," replied Twilight. I opened my eyes and looked around, and she was right in that we were outside, but in a completely different area of the palace. It didn't take long for me to figure out our precise location as the waterfall from before was now in front of us, and a massive wall prevented us from going any further thus making this part of the palace a dead-end. " Snips said that those monkeys have been around here, so perhaps this is where that secret route is we need to take in order to get to the imprisoned monkey."

" If we can find some soft soil, then the Magic Bean will serve its purpose," I said.

" Do you even know what it looks like?" asked Twilight.

" I've planted a few beans before in Hyrule, but I'll admit when I say that soft soil isn't easy to find as it's usually hidden pretty well. This could take us about an hour or so before we even find it, so we might as well get started," I replied. Twilight bopped me on my hat as though she wanted to show me something, so when I paid attention to her, she was pointing towards the ground where I could see the soft soil we need for the Magic Bean.

" Oh... well... I guess that was easier than I thought." In my mind, this was really embarrassing, so I quickly closed my mouth before I can say something even more humiliating, and then took out the bean from my pocket before planting it into the ground making sure to plant it right in the middle of the soil.

" So, what happens now?" asked Twilight.

" Just give it a few seconds," I replied. We both watched, and soon a small sprout popped out of the ground indicating that the bean was ready to be watered. " Most plants take several weeks or so before they sprout, yet these beans do so in mere seconds, so now I need to apply water so as to make it grow."

" Hopefully your bottle is still intact," said Twilight.

" I didn't do anything dangerous, so it should still be in one piece," I said as I took it out of my pouch. The water swirled around in the bottle at a fast pace which could make people feel queasy, but I wasn't affected by such a thing, so I uncorked the bottle before splashing its contents on top of the sprout. " Now we have to wait again." A few seconds later, the sprout suddenly to enlarge until it had reached its full growth, yet it was certainly surprising to see it happen so fast. " There we go Twilight!"

" While that was an impressive sight Sunset, I'm not sure how we can use this," said Twilight.

" By stepping onto it, the plant will hover into the air, and allow us to reach whatever we're supposed to get to," I said.

" Magic?" asked Twilight.

" Pretty much, yet even though it isn't as impressive as what's seen in Equestria, it's still pretty good," I replied. Before using the Magic Bean, I noticed two Deku Babas nearly which looked wilted, but rather than going over and destroy them, I decided to ignore them as it would just be pointless to destroy creatures without a good reason. Once I stepped onto the plant, it rose upwards revealing that there was a small gap in the wall which turned to the right to form a passageway.

" Strange how no one in the palace is aware of this," said Twilight.

" That should make things easier for us," I said. Sometimes, I really should think before I say anything, for the moment I walked down the passageway where it turned to the left, I found myself back in the large area that was to the right of the main hallway, yet now at a much higher elevation. " Well, this is unexpected."

" Since we're up here now, the Deku Scrub guards down below won't be able to notice us, but if you were to accidentally drop to the ground, they are likely to spot you as you won't have enough time to make any kind of reaction. Still, I'm surprised that this upper portion doesn't have anything protecting it," said Twilight.

" Oh they'll have something," I moaned.

" What makes you think that?" asked Twilight.

" It just looks too easy," I replied. I then jumped down onto a wooden archway due to it having a Deku Flower on top of it, and then I began to observe the area from this perspective where I noticed another Deku Flower on top of a floating platform. It looks like flying is going to be needed if I'm to make it to the next section, but I've only had a few experiences, so I'm going to need to bring my A-game. That's when I noticed a third flower off in the distance, yet this one was red in colour as opposed to pink and green like this one here is.

It looked suspicious, so I walked forward hoping to get a little closer to it, and that's when a different looking Deku Scrub popped out of the flower where it observed its surroundings before hiding back down again. " See? I told you things looked easy upon a first glance, so now we have to deal with monsters, and I think I remember seeing them in Hyrule, but not that often."

" Those are Mad Scrubs, and if it isn't obvious due to their colours and mannerisms, they are constantly annoyed which makes them a little difficult to deal with. They will pop up from their flowers before spitting out Deku Nuts in a barrage, and then pause for a few seconds before resuming their onslaught again. They are cowardly in nature for if you get too close to them, they will dive down into their flowers thus preventing you from attacking them," said Twilight.

" Can I attack them from a distance?" I asked.

" If you have Deku Nuts, you can drop them down on top of them, but that would involve you flying above them," replied Twilight. Now this was something I never knew before until she brought it up, and it makes me wish that I had Deku Nuts on my person, yet I don't so I'll have to use another tactic. Still, it does give me a new means of fighting monsters as I don't necessarily have to confront them, but rather attack from above if I've got the correct height.

" You can also use those bubbles of yours, but remember that you have little magic power as you haven't been collecting any magic jars to restore it." Once again, I slapped myself in the forehead because of neglecting that... I know slapping myself like that makes me look foolish, yet I deserve it due to being ignorant about the very basics of this game. " You shouldn't keep doing that to yourself Sunset as you're bound to leave a bruise."

" It helps me remind myself that I can do better," I said.

" Well, if you can find some of those magic jars, be sure to pick them up, or you could buy something which can restore magic," said Twilight. Because I now have a bottle, I can buy potions, or collect fairies and use them when I've been killed in battle, yet for now I'll just have to contend with the fact that it's empty, and fill it up with something later, or maybe after I reset time as I have a feeling that I can't take healing items whenever I do that.

" Smashing pots should provide results," I said while diving into the Deku Flower before launching myself. As I quickly took out the flowers which grant me the ability to fly in the air, I looked down in fear of the Deku Scrubs noticing me, and subsequently trying to shoot me down with their own magic bubbles, yet none of them paid any attention, and continued with their patrol. I breathed a sigh of relief knowing they won't bother me unless I accidentally drop to the ground, so I have to make sure not to do that.

I then landed on the platform which houses the second Deku Flower, and the Mad Scrub began attacking, but its Deku Nuts just fell short of their target, and I responded by firing a bubble making sure to aim carefully so as to not waste my magic. My bubble hit its target, and the Mad Scrub collapsed before shattering into brown leaves which caused the Deku Flower it used to become like the one I used.

" So defeating them allows you to use their flowers," said Twilight.

" That must be how I can make it across," I said.

" But again, you need to conserve your magic until you can restore it," said Twilight. Not being able to use my own Equestrian magic, and being forced to rely on the magic of Termina was really annoying, yet I suppose it was meant to be given how I relied too much on my magic in Hyrule. I needed to hone my other skills rather than use what is only natural all the time. Diving into the Deku Flower I was standing on, I took to the sky and hovered over to the now available flower which the Mad Scrub had, and when I landed on the platform, I could see more of them further ahead in the next section along with additional Mad Scrubs.

" Looks like I'm going to be doing a lot of flying," I moaned.

" Think of it like it were a test back in Equestria," smiled Twilight.

" I haven't had one of those in years," I moaned.

" Oh... well... you can still apply what you've learned at Canterlot High to do this Sunset. You just need to be patient when making your way across as you don't want to be knocked out of the sky by any wayward Deku Nuts. Also, you may get some of your own which are dropped by Mad Scrubs, but the chances of that are pretty slim. Also, it looks like some platforms with Deku Flowers move about, so aim accordingly and when they are within range," said Twilight.

Patience... that's something I used to take for granted, for that's what helped start my problems which resulted in me leaving Equestria. I wanted everything right there and then, and refused to wait for it because in my mind back then, I had no desire to wait as it meant my potential was being wasted. Twilight is right in that I need to approach this with patience, so that we can get through this.

Jumping into the next flower, I launched myself over the wall which had a small piece removed as though it were expecting me, and to the next flower before having to drop down to the platform in order to avoid an incoming Deku Nut. As I prepared myself to deal with the Mad Scrub ahead, I should have been paying more attention towards the other walls because Equestrian magic was coming from the one that was furthest away from me.

" I thought we were going after her instead of Sunset Shimmer?"

" That is still our intention, yet I needed to come back here out of curiosity at best, and to also answer a question which has been plaguing me."

" What kind of question?"

" You told me that Sunset was able to absorb the magic of her friends, and used it to become something truly radiant. I know you wouldn't lie to me because you came into existence in the exact same manner, yet through more of a negative connotation, but still, she has achieved a new power which makes me feel inadequate." The first demon began to burn up on the inside due to this revelation, and was about to explode in a fit of jealous rage, yet it was able to remain calm as though something were holding it back.

It flew over towards a group of trees by the edge of the palace before striking at them with various claw swipes as a means of venting out frustration, but the other demon ignored this, and was more focused on observing what was happening around it. " How? How did she achieve that form? Could she really be the real thing? Am I nothing more than a shadow of the past who no longer has any need of existence?" The first demon sounded sad as it though it could cry, but then it slammed both hands into a tree before slumping down in utter defeat before being joined by the second demon.

" You're allowing your emotions to cloud you."

" And what else can I do?"

" Understand the situation, and use it to your advantage. Because you are the dark aspect of her personality, you are capable of the same thing she used... being able to absorb magic from various individuals into your own being." The second demon then presented what looked like a scroll before it used its fingers to scribble down something before presenting it to the other one. " Let's use some logic here to figure this one out.

Both of you are essentially the same person, so therefore you both possess similar, yet different traits because of certain choices." The demon then noticed its comrade was looking bored, so it knocked some sense into it which made the other really annoyed at first, but then it simmered down. " The problem is you are tied to the past because of what used to be, yet that no longer works for she has moved on from it despite some lingering moments."

" I should embrace the future?"

" Which would mean absorbing several forms of magic into your being all at once."

" You make it sound so easy."

" If she and my significant other are capable of it, you are as well, and I suppose that includes me seeing as I am the result of it."

" Maybe, but what if such a plan doesn't work?"

" Why wouldn't it?"

" She is uses the light inside of her heart as a source of strength, and such light can destroy darkness... something I learned the hard way. She has a fiery passion which combined with her temperment, makes me nothing more than her empty shadow... a being which shouldn't even exist, yet does. If you think I'm giving up my desire to become the real her, and fulfill the original desire she had which was to acquire power and conquer Equestria... no, I haven't abandoned that path, yet the chances of success are slim."

" I see that I've got a lot of work ahead of me in order to make you understand, but it's worth the challenge seeing as it will add to my knowledge." The second demon then dropped the scroll which burned to ashes, and it turned towards the first one who felt confused. " I owe you that much at least, for you were the one who was able to enable me to exist despite my significant other being purified." It then rose to its feet before extending its hand out to the first demon who accepted it. " Once I have finished making you understand, you will become even more than she ever was, and you will come to accept that you have a different goal instead of longing for a lost past."

" Abandon my current goal for another?"

" She has accepted the past, and you must do the same otherwise your truest desire will forever be dashed! Now come on! We have to find the other one first, for there is something I need from her before I can begin acquiring that succulent knowledge which I crave. I have a pretty good idea as to where she is when our world was changed into this one, so follow me, and try not to fall behind okay? We must find my other self... Twilight Sparkle..." The two demons then vanished into the night, yet I never sensed their presence this time as though they were hiding their Equestrian magic. That, or I was too preoccupied with trying to make it through to wherever it is I've got to reach.

" How much further do we have to go?" I asked.

" There is an opening up there," replied Twilight. I looked upward, and there was an entrance which didn't really look inconspicous or anything given it was just out in the open, but at least we didn't have much further to go. " I've got to admit Sunset that you made some impressive moves while we were making our way here, and you've got your previous experiences to thank for that."

My magic power ended up running out just before I reached the other area of the palace, and since there were Mad Scrubs in the way, I had to rely on more unconventional tactics to proceed forward. " Who knew that you were capable of using a shell as a shield even if it was a nut."

" I guess that must be the equivilent of my shield," I said.

" In any case, you bounced those Deku Nuts back at those Mad Scrubs, though you did get hurt in the process," said Twilight. While my moves were impressive according to her, I wouldn't call them perfect given how I got hit several times, and almost getting myself caught when I almost fell to the ground.

I really do need more flying practice which makes me wonder why I wasn't born as a Pegasus instead of a unicorn. " We have one more Mad Scrub left to deal with, and a platform which moves from one side to the other before rising up to where that entrance is."

" I don't think using my shield will help this time," I said.

" Shame you didn't get any magic jars," said Twilight.

" But I did get some Deku Nuts along the way," I smiled as I juggled a couple of them in my hand. These nuts may not appear to be of much use, but they are able to stun enemies for a few moments when they flash, and that can get rather annoying as I've almost gone blind from the impact. On the other hand, they can destroy weak monsters with ease provided that I hit the target in the correct location. " I've only got about five of these, so that should be enough to get past this last Mad Scrub. What surprises me is that we've made plenty of noise while up here, yet none of the guards below have taken any notice."

" Maybe it's how they were programmed?" asked Twilight.

" Never thought I'd hear you say something like that given such a word doesn't exist in Equestria," I replied.

" I've brought it up once or twice," said Twilight. I keep on forgetting this world is just a video game, so certain characteristics are ones I have no control over because those who made this game did so in a certain fashion. As long as those Deku Scrubs below continue to mind their own business, I've nothing to worry about until I have to deal with the ones inside of the throne room, and that includes Tree Hugger and her advisors.

" Remember when I told you that you can drop Deku Nuts onto the Mad Scrubs?" asked Twilight.

" Yes," I answered.

" Now's the chance to try it for yourself as you have some nuts on hand, and I think it's the only way you'll be able to defeat it. Be careful though Sunset as when you're flying, you have no means of deflecting attacks, so getting hit would be an absolute disaster. I suggest to watch the movements of that Mad Scrub closely in order to judge when would be the best moment to move in," suggested Twilight.

She didn't have to rub in the fact that one small mistake would mean having to come all the way back up here, or even worse, get captured by those guards, but then I'm used to having pressure riding down on my back. After looking at its behaviour for about a minute I concluded that the Mad Scrub pops its head up from the flower it hides in, waits a few seconds to see what happens, and then attacks by spitting out a single Deku Nut before going back down again where it repeats the process.

" Maybe I can move when it first pops out," I suggested.

" You would need to avoid any projectiles," said Twilight.

" Good point. I mean, I can maneuver myself a little while airborne, but I might not be fast enough," I said. Looking up at the sky quickly, I noticed that it was changing colour indicating that the night was almost over, and the second day would be beginning probably within the next hour. Have I seriously spent half the night in this palace!?!? It felt like I've been here a lot longer, and it felt like being in Canterlot all over again... only without the swamp motif which is pretty self evident.

Getting back to what I needed to do, I waited for the Mad Scrub to hide before diving down into the Deku Flower, and launching myself into the sky. It then popped up and spat out a Deku Nut despite me not being in its radius, but then it was probably a natural reaction, yet I avoided the nut which sailed harmlessly before colliding with the wall, while I flew over until I was right on top where I dropped a nut of my own which defeated it instantly before landing. " Didn't think that would be so effective..."

" Well, you did bounce their own Deku Nuts back at them which caused the same result," said Twilight.

" Guess they are more powerful in Termina as opposed to Hyrule," I said.

" In any case, we can now continue," smiled Twilight.

" There was something else I'm supposed to do, but I'm struggling to remember what it was... something that I need... gasp! Didn't that guy who is Pinkie's father in this world mention about taking a picture of the Deku Queen?" I asked. It's amazing how I suddenly recall this right now just as we were about to encounter the imprisoned monkey on the right side of the cage, yet why didn't I do this sooner given how close I was to Tree Hugger at the time.

" I wish I could have taken a photo as I really wanted that prize, for it could be useful." I began cursing myself for not doing something so obvious, but then Twilight's expression made me feel a little better. " You think there's still a chance?"

" If that Pictograph Box has the ability to zoom in, you may be able to take a picture, but we need to remain quiet, for if they spot us in the cage, we could get into all sorts of trouble, and then we'd have to reset time, and go through all this again," replied Twilight. It was my own fault for not doing this earlier, but I'll take a picture first before speaking with the monkey.

Once I dove into the Deku Flower the Mad Scrub had been using, I waited until the moving platform was in range before launching myself, and landing on it where I had to dive down one more time because apparently it has become a thing here. After making my way onto the ledge connected to the entrance, I walked inside before experiencing a slight drop.

" Ooof!" I whispered.

" Are you alright?" whispered Twilight.

" I wasn't expecting that to happen," I whispered. My rear was slightly bruised, but I'll survive, so I got back onto my feet and looked at my surroundings. We were back in the throne room, but now we were on the other side of the cage where the monkey was located. He was definitely not having a good time as he was struggling to break free, but I doubt he'll be able to break free of those ropes as they appear to be really tight.

My unexpected landing hadn't caused me to draw any attention my way, and even the monkey hadn't taken notice, so I quietly tip-toed behind the pole until I was on the edge of the cage looking through the bars. " There's Tree Hugger over there on her throne, yet she looks even more tense than before."

" Do you suppose her advisors have been pressuring her?" whispered Twilight.

" Maybe, and if that is the case then we need to work fast," I whispered.

" Take the picture quickly Sunset, and hope that thing doesn't produce a bright flash," whispered Twilight. Reaching for the Pictograph Box around my neck, I began looking at Tree Hugger who coincidentally was looking in my direction. Good thing this Pictograph Box was essentially a rather primitive camera, or better yet, a rather primitive cell phone, for I knew exactly how to use it... I guess being a human has its advantages after all. Once I zoomed in as close as possible--which was a thing, I waited for Tree Hugger to remain perfectly still, and I took the picture which produced a weak flash, and no one in the vicinity took notice.

" That was easy," I whispered.

" You almost gave me a heart attack," whispered Twilight who was checking her chest to make sure her heart was still beating.

" Now we can focus on the monkey, and hopefully he'll be more cooperative this time," I whispered. I tip-toed back behind the pole making sure not to let myself be seen by anyone including the monkey, and when I was back where I started, I inched forward slightly so that the monkey would take notice of me. Yeah, I know what I just did makes no sense, but my aim is not to be spotted by all those Deku Scrubs in the throne room as I won't be able to overcome that many all at once.

" Oh! You... how did you get here?"

" I used the secret passage which your brother told me," I replied.

" So, you really want to speak with me? Yes, you must otherwise you wouldn't have come all this way, but you need to remain quiet. If they see you, they'll capture you, and your punishment will surely be death if the advisors of the Deku Queen allow it. The queen is a gentle soul, yet her advisors believe that the Deku should have more influence in the world."

" Why listen to them?" I asked.

" The Deku Queen chose those four to be her advisors in the hopes of quelling their lust for power, yet it seems her decision was in vain as they have been increasing their power and influence these past few years, but they would never overthrow her unless they believe her to be unfit to rule over the Deku. By the way, why did you want to speak with me in the first place?

I assumed you were just like the other Deku, yet you've been listening to me this entire time." His words sounded confusing at first, but it quickly dawned on me that he was acting in such a manner because of being ignored, and I was the first person... Deku in his case, to actually want to listen to him. I guess the Deku Princess being abducted has closed their ears to the truth, and all they can hear are sounds of wanting someone to suffer.

" Your brother," I said.

" What? My brother asked for your help? Ugh...I'm terribly sorry... just try to cut my rope. We'll talk after that! Again, make sure to remain quiet! I don't want you to get into trouble because of listening to your heart, and I certainly don't want to be punished even more than I already am." I then walked around behind the monkey to take a closer look at the ropes which bound him, and as I suspected before, they are really tight.

In fact, I don't think I can cut them in my current form. If I were to use a bubble on the ropes, it would just make them wet, and nothing more. " What are you doing back there? Quick--cut this rope, and free me! I'm not sure I can hold out like this for much longer!" He didn't need to be so rude about it, for I was working as fast as I can to cut him loose.

" What should I do?" I whispered.

" You won't be able to cut the ropes, so you'll need to become human again, and cut them with your sword," replied Twilight. Guess that means I'll be resuming my true self for just a brief moment, and I'll have to cut the ropes from the safety of the shadows in order to avoid being seen. Grabbing my face, I pulled the Deku Mask off until I was human again, and drew the Kokiri Sword from its scabbard.

" Okay, you need to perform a jump attack which is where you jump into the air while swinging your sword forward with all the strength you can muster." Twilight made sure to provide me with a demonstration in case I didn't know what she was talking about, but I'm quite the fast learner, and I knew what she was talking about. Performing the jump attack while making sure not to create any kind of noise, my efforts were in vain for the ropes refused to break.

" Huh? That Deku Scrub... where did she go?" The monkey wasn't aware that I changed forms, so when I presented myself, and explained that I was the Deku, he laughed it off as though I were trying to make him feel better, but I refused to start an argument with him, and then explained that the ropes couldn't be cut. " Hmm... no good, after all! I thought you could free me, or that Deku Scrub could achieve the same thing, but I guess those ropes are too tight."

I felt crestfallen because I wasn't able to help the monkey, but then he suddenly began making some slight noises which he stopped doing shortly afterwards due to the Deku Scrubs looking in this direction. They quickly went back to what they were doing before, and I breathed a sigh of relief. " Sorry about that, but I realized that you can help me in another way. You don't happen to have something that can make a lot of noise... like a loud instrument with sound that carries a long way? If you have one, show it to me!"

" Why?" I asked.

" While you may not be able to save me, you may still be able to save the Deku Princess, and she in turn can save me before I am punished by the Deku Tribe. Please! An instrument that can blare out a lot of sound that'll carry a long way! If you have something like that, then this will be perfect for both of us!"

My instincts told me to take out the Ocarina of Time, so I reached into the pouch where I keep it safe, and took it out before raising it to my mouth, yet judging from the disappointed expression on the monkey's face, this isn't what he had in mind. " That tiny thing will never do. Its sound won't carry far enough... don't you have something else? Something that can unleash a powerful sound which can heard for miles around?"

" Twilight! I don't have anything like that," I whispered.

" Let me think for a moment here Sunset..." whispered Twilight as she started to concentrate, and a few moments later she came to a conclusion. " Remember when you first got your ocarina back from Starlight Glimmer?" How could I forget, for that's when I had that memory of Princess Zelda. " When you played the Song of Time,instead of using that instrument, you ended up using something else completely." My eyes lit up upon hearing her say that, for I do recall using a different instrument.

" Looks like you need to become a Deku Scrub again, and use the instrument that form uses." Twilight then looked over at the Deku Scrubs before turning her attention back to me, and I knew that my transformation could alert them to my presence, but what other choice did I have?

" Okay, I'll go back to being a Deku Scrub," I whispered. Placing the ocarina on the floor, I took out the Deku Scrub when I let out a quiet sigh before putting it on, and once again my body started convulsing as the magic began to work, and my body was about to change, but not before letting out that scream which surprisingly didn't cause the Deku to take notice which was another sigh of relief for me.

Once I became a Deku Scrub again after needing a few seconds to get adjusted, I picked up the ocarina, and raised it to my mouth where it changed into the other instrument from before. The monkey noticed my transformation, and was in shock over how a human had suddenly changed, but that wasn't his real concern, for when he saw me using the ocarina, his excitement reached a fevered pitch which did alert the Deku Scrubs except for Tree Hugger who remained oblivious to it.

" Oh! You have them! You do! Just like the princess... Deku Pipes! Those will work great!"

" Deku Pipes?" I asked.

" That's the name of that instrument you have there, but only a few Deku Scrubs are able to use them, for it's an instrument which is very difficult to master. I just saw you change from a human into a Deku Scrub, and I'll admit that was surprising, yet you were telling me the truth. I'm not sure how you are capable of this as it looks magical, but it does mean you can help me. By the way... who are you?"

" Sunset Shimmer," I whsipered.

" That's an unusual name, but pay me no mind as it's not my place to judge one such as you. Anyway, you must listen to what I have to say because you're the only one that I can turn to. I've been trying to get the other Deku including the Deku Queen to hear my words, yet they ignore me at every turn, and those advisors are dead set on punishing me.

As you probably know by now, Woodfall has been plagued with a terrible poison which has been corrupting the swamp. I was trying to find out more about the situation, so I went to Woodfall Temple above the waterfall with the Deku Princess, but the temple had become a monster's lair." This probably wasn't the best idea that I've heard, but I suppose there weren't that many options to consider. Still, I have to give props to this monkey for wanting to do something about it instead of just lamenting about, and waiting for disaster to come.

" What happened to the Deku Princess?" I asked.

" She... she... she was captured by the monster... and before I was able to save her, it summoned strange creatures which forced me to abandon her. When I came out of the temple by myself, I tried to find someone who could help me rescue her, but some of the Deku Scrub guards were waiting for me by the entrance to Woodfall proper, and you already know the results." The monkey then started to whimper which caused my heart to ache, yet this was information I've been needing, for now I know what needs to be done.

I'm the only one who can resolve all of this, so it looks as though my first true test will begin relatively soon. The only thing that prevents me from doing anything is not knowing how to gain access to the temple, but I had a hunch this monkey knows how to get around that. " I've been imprisoned here ever since, and while the Deku Queen feels that I am innocent, the same can't be said about her advisors."

" What about them?" I asked.

" They think I kidnapped the princess, and they won't listen to a word I say all while trying to convince the Deku Queen to carry out a suitable punishment. Even though I want to go to Woodfall Temple, and save her, I'm unable to do so because these ropes are too strong for either one of us to break. But you... you can go there in my stead! Do you understand my plight?" I nodded my head to confirm this, but I then told the monkey that I needed to have a moment with my fairy companion, so I turned around to face Twilight who had been taking all of this in.

" What do you think?" I whispered.

" This is a dire situation, and one we just can't ignore," whispered Twilight.

" Not only do we need to resuce their princess, we also need to find anything which can help us stop the moon from destroying this world," I whispered.

" Looks like we've got a double duty on our hands," whispered Twilight. I turned back to the monkey, and told him that Twilight agreed with my decision in that we would go there in his stead, and the expression he had made me smile, for he had been using an expression of despair for quite some time.

" I had a feeling you were going to accept otherwise you wouldn't have gone to all this trouble just to speak to me. Now I really need you to listen to me carefully, for I'm only able to do the following once. When you enter the central part of this region which is known as Woodfall, you will find a shrine which has been used by the Deku Royal Family for generations. This Deku Shrine is a sacred place, and it is here that you must play the following song I am about to share with you. The temple will reveal itself to you when this song is played using the pipes which you possess."

" How did you come to know it?" I asked.

" The princess taught it to me in case there was a time where I would need to teach it to someone else. We can't let them hear us, so I'll sing it softly... in case you were wondering why I need to be quiet about it, this song is only for the Deku Royal Family, so the fact that I know it will land me in more trouble than what I already have." So to pass this song down to me, the monkey is willing to sacrifice his freedom. In my heart, I didn't want this to happen, but my mind insisted on learning this song, for the monkey's kind gesture must not be in vain.

" Come closer because you won't be able to hear this song from over there." I moved forward slowly so as to not let the Deku know I'm there, and once I was close enough, the monkey began speaking in what sounded like gibberish at first, yet it was making traditional monkey noises in different pitches. Upon doing this twice, it fell onto me to play those sounds through the Deku Pipes yet I haven't had much experience using them.

" This could take a few moments," I whispered.

" Before you play, allow me to tell you more about this song. It's called the Sonata of Awakening, and when played on anyone or anything which appears to be sleeping, they will awake instantly upon hearing its mysterious melody. Know that only a loud instrument can get the most use out of this song."

After spending a couple of minutues figuring out how these pipes worked, I tried to play this song with some rather disastrous results such as playing wrong notes, using the wrong kind of pitch, and even forgetting how the song went at one point. Eventually after numerous attempts, I managed to play it correctly, and its loud sound echoed throughout the throne room which was a blessing because I was impressed with its range, but also a curse as it meant my presence is now known to the Deku Scrubs.

" Wow! That song is making my chakra ebb and flow in such righteous ways," commented Tree Hugger.

" Your majesty! Isn't that the song which only the royal family is allowed to know?"

" Now that you like, mention it, I do recognize that song as the Sonata of Awakening. Whoever just played that has some radical musical skills, and could possibly equal the talent, or perhaps exceed what my daughter can do," replied Tree Hugger.

" The monkey who kidnapped the Deku Princess has taught that sacred song to another which means he is guilty!"

" No need to be so harsh about it," said Tree Hugger.

" We must insist on punishing the foolish monkey much sooner than expected, for this act cannot be allowed to stand. I know that you hold no ill will towards the monkey, but you have to think of how your people feel. They desire justice to be served as they feel the monkey has wronged our people, and you must show them true leadership skills otherwise they could overthrow you in an act of sheer rage."

" Would they like, totally do that?" asked Tree Hugger.

" In an instant."

" Their vibes really need to mellow out otherwise they could hurt themselves, but I suppose you are correct in that I must perform my duty. My aura is going to suffer a little because of this, but I must appease my people even if my heart doesn't feel right. Attention Deku Scrubs! The punishment of this monkey will now take place much sooner than expected, so please like, prepare the necessary items, but do not harm him until everything has been set up accordingly," said Tree Hugger.

My heart suddenly started beating rapidly upon hearing what Tree Hugger just said, and then I turned towards the monkey who simply shook his head as indication that I shouldn't worry about him. I may be able to reset time, but it doesn't change the fact that this is just unbearable knowing that this is going to happen until I can break the curse of Woodfall Temple. Looking at Tree Hugger, I noticed all of the Deku Scrubs were now looking at me, and I felt really uncomfortable knowing something bad was about to happen.

" What am I going to do?" I asked.

" You can't fight all of them at once as they clearly outnumber you," replied Twilight.

" And the entrance we used to get in here can't be reached even if I were to change back into a human," I said. The entrance in question was at a high elevation in this room, so there was no way I could reach it which means I'm trapped in here.

" You'd better take the shortcut the Deku use to get to Woodfall Temple."

" I'm not sure I'll be able to as they look as though they are ready to storm this cage," I said.

" Remain calm Sunset, for I'm sure we can figure a way out of this," said Twilight. The reason she is feeling so calm is that as a fairy, she can just float away without having to face any kind of consequences, yet I have to endure whatever is about to happen.

" And what about the Deku who just played the sacred song?"

" I'm sure they were like, totally unaware of that little bit of information, but since I can see the expression on your face, you want them to be punished as well? There is going to be a major shift in vibes by the time this has been resolved, yet I must once again appease my people even if my aura tells me that this Deku Scrub is innocent. All I ask in return is for you to be like, gentle, you know, nothing too serious," replied Tree Hugger.

" Guards! Capture that Deku in the cage!"

" Here they come," said Twilight.

" You must hurry! If you don't, I will be punished by the Deku Tribe!" The monkey's pleas for help rang throughout my ears, but before I could say or do anything, a large number of Deku suddenly surrounded me on all sides as though they had just come out of the woodwork or something. It also doesn't help that my movements are limited due to still having these pipes out, but I suppose it wouldn't have mattered either way. In an instant, I was bombarded by Deku Scrubs and everything went black...

To Be Continued.

Chapter 12: The Final Hurdle of the Swamp

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 25, 2015
Chapter 12: The Final Hurdle of the Swamp.

" Ooof! Ouch! Ow! Hey! Watch it!" I shouted as the Deku Scrubs continued to swarm me all because of learning a song which only the Deku Royal Family is permitted to learn according to the advisors. Before losing consciousness, I could hear the monkey repeatedly tell me that I was the only one who could save Woodfall from disaster... I didn't need all that pressure given how I already am stressed what with the moon falling above our heads. Upon being knocked out due to suffering a blow to the back of my head which is what prompted me to lose consciousness, the advisors began arguing with Tree Hugger over what was to be done with me.

If I had been conscious at that point, I would have tried to convince them into letting me go because I could bring back the Deku Princess. I doubt they would have listened to a word I say given I'm just an outsider who has been taught a sacred song thus further convincing them that punishing an innocent monkey was both necessary, and required so that the Deku Tribe's honour remain intact.

" You like, didn't need to rough her up," said Tree Hugger.

" It was necessary your majesty, for this Deku child has proven the monkey's guilt over kidnapping the Deku Princess."

" I will admit that the Sonata of Awakening is like a pretty sacred and radical song, but I don't really see anything wrong about the monkey teaching it to that child. It's not like the song is used for anything other than gaining access to the temple," said Tree Hugger.

" That temple is only for the royal family... which would be both yourself and your daughter! Only those of royal blood are permitted to enter, and the monkey has clearly violated our laws in addition to kidnapping her highness, so his punishment will be legendary, and serve as a reminder to the other monkeys of the swamp that we won't tolerate their actions under any circumstances."

Tree Hugger's reaction, or rather lack thereof was one that made the advisor who had been speaking rather annoyed, and he immediately began to speak amongst his fellow advisors in the hopes of coming up with some kind of compromise to this situation. What they didn't realize, was that Tree Hugger was aware of the laws of the Deku Tribe, and that she was going to enforce them which goes completely against her calm persona.

" When it comes to our laws, no one is exempt," said Tree Hugger, her voice having changed to reflect her anger. Normally, she was a peaceful sort who wanted to ruler her people with a passive approach, yet it seems there were some tropes when it comes to the typical monarch that she just couldn't ignore. " Like I said, I don't believe the monkey has kidnapped my daughter, and I like don't approve of punishing him further just because another Deku has been taught a sacred song.

However, violating our laws is a different manner, and for that, I've got to put my chakra and calm composure aside in favour of administering justice. The punishment will continue as planned, but it will only be for the crimes the monkey has committed. Is that, like, understood?"

" That... that was a beautiful speech."

" Well, I haven't had much to do all day other than trying to find inner peace with my surroundings," said Tree Hugger.

" You have given your command, and we shall obey your decision."

" At least for once, we've actually agreed on something which didn't end up with our auras being consumed with rage, and our attitudes crumbling apart. I shall leave you, my royal advisors to prepare the punishment, but like, don't go overboard just because you think he deserves more. His aura has already been shaken, and breaking it into pieces would leave a sour taste in my mouth," said Tree Hugger, giving her advisors a stare which was enough to make them quiver slightly.

Despite the fact that this relationship between her, and her advisors has been one of sheer tension, she wasn't above putting them in their place, for she was the queen, and they were her subjects who didn't have the right to make any kind of decisions without her approval.

" What about the Deku child?"

" Do not throw her into the dungeon, or even try to punish her, for she has done nothing wrong," replied Tree Hugger.

" Can we at least have your guards kick her out of the palace?"

" I suppose that's fair, but like, make sure you do it gently," replied Tree Hugger. She then waved her hand which was a signal to the guards to carry my unconscious body away, and then she assumed a rather unusual pose before closing her eyes which looked a lot like meditating. Twilight, who had been watching everything that happened, made sure to stick close to me, for she had no idea what was going to happen. A few minutes later, the guards brought me outside where they tossed me into the wall before turning around, and heading back inside. While hitting the wall hurt a little bit, it was enough for me to wake up, and wonder just what happened.

" I see you're awake," said Twilight.

" What happened?" I asked.

" Those Deku Guards were ordered to kick you out of the palace, so if you were thinking of going back inside for anything, I doubt they will let you pass considering you've become an enemy of sorts," replied Twilight.

" I thought they would have thrown me into the dungeon instead of out here," I said.

" You have Tree Hugger to thank for that, as she insisted on you not being thrown into the dungeon, or punish you. Apparently, she has decided that the monkey is to be punished due to breaking the laws of the Deku Tribe," said Twilight, checking every last part of my body to make sure that nothing was broken.

While I do appreciate her checking me over in such a fashion, she didn't need to be so thorough about it as people might get the wrong idea. " In any case, we need to find the Woodfall Temple, and save both the princess and this region of Termina before things get even worse."

" The question now is which way do we go to get out of here?" I asked.

" We need to use the shortcut the monkey mentioned just before those guards swarmed all over you," replied Twilight. Even though my mind was a little hazy, I do recall the monkey mentioning something about taking a closer look at the waterfall, for the shortcut we needed to take was over there. Once I felt ready to continue, I turned to my right where it became apparent that to get across, jumping from lily pad to lily pad was the order of the day.

Twilight noticed how slightly nervous my body was, and reassured me that things would be okay. " Remember you hop four times before using a larger jump for your fifth and final hop, so you can easily make it over to the waterfall so long as you be cautious, and not get overconfident."

" I wonder what lies in the other direction?" I asked, turning my head around to see where the other trail of lily pads go to.

" We may get a chance to explore that way, but for now we should focus on where we must go," replied Twilight. Despite my heart wanting me to explore that other path, my mind was fixated on progressing for we need answers regarding the situation of Termina. Making sure that I was lined up properly with the lily pads, I began hopping on each one at a slow pace because I didn't want to drown due to being a Deku Scrub.

I suppose that I could just take my Deku Mask off, and make my way over to the other side as a human, but then this is good practice as there was this feeling in my heart that I'd be needing this alternate form, and to be at the top of my game. After experiencing some almost fatal mistakes such as hopping one time too many prompting me to quickly pull back before taking an unnecessary plunge, I arrived at my destination, and looked upwards because of how small I was compared with the waterfall itself.

" It makes me sad seeing all this poison seeping down the waterfall," I commented.

" To think that the Deku Tribe in addition to all creatures living here in the swamp have had to endure this kind of painful torment," said Twilight.

" I can understand why Starlight Glimmer would cause the people of Clock Town trouble, but why treat those who live in the four regions in the same manner? Does she really desire all of Termina to suffer just because she had been bullied?" I asked.

" I don't know, but it seems as though Starlight either is oblivious to those she has hurt, or she doesn't care," replied Twilight. Just thinking about it made me feel angry, but then I had to remain calm, for my temper has gotten me into plenty of trouble such as how I unintentionally hurt the feelings of the human version of Twilight. That's when something just struck my mind like a thunder clap, and Twilight noticed my reaction, and was curious about it. " What are you thinking about now?"

" About you... the other you," I replied.

" The Twilight who went to this Crystal Prep Academy?" asked Twilight.

" Yes," I replied.

" Even though I'm not jealous of the fact that you and the others have befriended her given how lonely she had been feeling according to what you said to me, I must admit that I am curious as to what happened to her when all of this started. Even though she does look identical to me, I doubt she has retained her memories of the human world, and is somewhere in Termina going about her business blissfully unaware of what's at stake," said Twilight.

Her words reminded me of how the human Twilight acted in a similar manner, not realizing what was happening until it finally showed itself before her. I was disappointed at the notion that she doesn't have her memories, but I suppose it does mean that she isn't suffering from any after effects.

" She really is a lot like you minus the magic," I said.

" That's because magic wasn't introduced into the human world until you brought it in," said Twilight.

" No need to remind me of that," I moaned, looking down at the ground in shame. Because I stole her crown after she became an alicorn, my actions brought magic into the human world which has since resided in the two of us, and our friends, yet I still show signs of guilt over having introduced such a foreign concept without thinking about the possible ramifications that would endure.

While I may have finally gotten an understanding as to how the magic works in the human world, I wish that I could go back in time, and stop myself from leaving Equestria all because of not getting my way. If I had stayed the course under Princess Celestia's guidance, I'd be an alicorn right now alongside Twilight, yet my arrogance coupled with how I closed my heart off to friendship sealed my fate.

If I hadn't made those bad decisions, I wouldn't have the friends that I do now, so in a way my actions ended up benefitting me even though it did start out pretty bad. I wonder... was this Princess Celestia's doing? Did she know that this is where my life would end up, or was it truly a work of fate? One of these days, I need to discover the truth, and surely she would be willing to give me an ideal answer.

On the subject of the other Twilight, even though she became corrupted by Equestrian magic, she has been exposed to it even if it was completely unintentional, yet she seems to be fine. Then again, she could still be capable of using magic, but it will be a while before it reaches the surface, and she goes through the same transformation the rest of us experience.

" I do hope that we run into her," began Twilight.

" Why?" I asked.

" I've still got plenty of questions to ask her, and I'm sure she feels the same way towards me. It's not everyday that you end up encountering an alternate version of yourself, so not wanting to find out more would be a tragic waste," replied Twilight.

" I think I have an idea as to where she is," I said.

" What kind of theory do you have?" asked Twilight.

" The common trend I've been noticing both here and in Hyrule is that those we've met from the human world and Equestria... the characters they portray have some connection with how they are perceived in our respective worlds. For example, you said that Tree Hugger was a member of a committee dedicated to protecting animals... that has something to do with nature, and we've seen her in the form of a queen who rules over a kingdom where nature is the dominant force," I replied.

" So if the other Twilight has a strong fascination with wanting more knowledge, she must be portraying a character who aspires to learn more," said Twilight.

" That doesn't give us many options for I doubt the Deku, Goron, and Zora tribes have someone like that, and we've seen most of the people who reside in Clock Town ruling them out, so the only logical place left would be that region off to the east which no one seems to know about," I said. Why does this eastern most region have so little information about it according to what we've heard from various sources? I suppose we'll eventually find out seeing as we will be exploring it eventually.

Walking along the pathway which lead up to a Deku Flower, there was a sign nearby which I decided to read, and I smacked myself in the forehead because this sign was just providing a reminder as to where this direction would take us. " This way to Woodfall! For Deku Scrubs only! Sigh... they couldn't be more subtle than this?"

" You have to wonder how many of them even come this way," replied Twilight.

" Probably not that many," I suggested. Diving into the Deku Flower, I launched myself up to a platform located pretty high up on the cliff face, and barely climbed up due to it being a lot higher than I thought it would be. In front of me was a cave entrance which must be the start of the shortcut, so I entered it, and ended up back outside in the swamp, but this time I was overlooking the entire area. Just staring at the entirety of Woodfall made me feel small and insignificant, and completely in awe of it all. That's when Twilight flew slightly ahead because she was looking at the pink mountain which we noticed before.

" The secret path looks to be leading us right to it," said Twilight.

" Somehow, I'm not surprised that a temple would be hidden inside of a mountain," I moaned.

" You've seen this before?" asked Twilight.

" Back in Hyrule, there was one place I explored known as the Fire Temple, and it was located at the very bottom of a mountain which also served as an active volcano! The intense heat would have roasted me alive if not for the special tunic I wore which allowed me to survive in such conditions, so knowing that the Woodfall Temple is located inside that pink mountain feels like a repeat of what happened before," I replied, looking up at the mountain to see the ring of black smoke swirling around it.

It really was uncanny how it reminded me of Death Mountain, for even the smoke ring was identical, yet this was a much smaller place compared to the former location which featured numerous pathways that lead up to the peak, and various nooks and crannies were everywhere which hid all sorts of secrets.

If there was one saving grace which happened to get my attention, it was the fact that I wouldn't be going through an active volcano, but then I began to imagine what was waiting on the inside of the mountain. Since the source of the poison is coming from Woodfall Temple, that means the swamp will be at its most deadliest, and I'm heading there now because I've been given a task to perform. That's when I decided to take a much closer look at this shortcut which is apparently used by the Deku to reach Woodfall itself, and there were several giant trees and other bizarre formations which featured Deku Flowers on top of them.

Guess it makes sense that they use this path, for this would be impossible for the other tribes to even consider as their lack of flying would stop them. In fact, they wouldn't even be able to get up here to this part of the swamp unless they were really good at climbing, for the cliffs don't seem all that safe.

" I have a suggestion," began Twilight.

" What is it?" I asked.

" Why don't you take out the map Pinkie gave you earlier, for it could provide us some answers as to what could be waiting for us on the inside of that mountain. I mean, she must have been there herself at one time otherwise her maps would be largely inaccurate," replied Twilight. She actually made a really good point, so I took the map out of my pocket, and was amazed that I didn't come to that conclusion myself. " Okay, she did provide an overhead view of the inside of the mountain, and I'll admit that it's not what I was expecting given how most mountains are."

" Is that what's on the inside?" I asked. According to the map, the inside of the mountain was a massive swampland with various trees scattered about complete with wooden planks which connect some of them together. There was also a very large gap located near the very centre of the area, and that must be where the temple is, so now we need to figure out how to traverse our way through.

" It does look complicated," replied Twilight.

" And probably filled with monsters," I added.

" You think so?" asked Twilight.

" We haven't seen much in the way of monsters so far in this region other than the Snappers back in the Woods of Mystery, so I'm guessing that the majority of monsters thrive in that central area of Woodfall which means fighting them will be difficult especially on those narrow planks," I replied.

" You might want to change your thought process on that," said Twilight.

" Why would I?" I asked.

" Because we have some monsters over there in the distance," replied Twilight, pointing towards the Deku Flowers I need to use to make it over to the mountain. Flying in the air in front of me were what appeared to be dragonflies, yet these were much bigger than what I've normally seen, and even bigger than the kind that exist in Equestria. I may not have been back home for a very long time, but there are certain mystical creatures in Equestria you can never forget no matter how hard you try.

These dragonflies also produced electrical attacks, and I suspected they use this maneuver for self-defence, and also for attacking any prey that they detect. " It's a Dragonfly... quite the uninspiring name considering what they are." Twilight said sarcastically while pulling a face. " You need to be careful of its tail, for if you get too close to one, that tail will come swinging at you, and you'll be sent flying back quite a distance. If you were to get hit by the tail in a place like this, you'll have to make your way back up here thus wasting precious time."

" What's the best strategy?" I asked.

" You could attack them using your sword, but that might be too risky given how random they can be. However, you can use bubbles to defeat them from a distance, but their erratic movement will make it difficult to hit them. The only other option I can think of is attract their attention, and dive into one of the Deku Flowers.

Once one of them is directly above the flower, you can launch yourself, and strike from below," replied Twilight. I didn't like the notion that being knocked back due to being hit by their tail would cause me to fall down to the lower area, and what was even worse is that there were no lily pads in the swamp water, so falling down below would pretty much be me falling to my death.

" Well, they're in the way, so we do need to get past them," I said.

" You don't sound thrilled," said Twilight.

" Look down below, and you'll understand," I said. Twilight then looked down where she saw the swamp with her own eyes, and quickly clued in on what I was thinking about regarding the lack of lily pads. Her expression told me that she knew why I didn't sound very happy about this situation. " I'll have to rely on using bubbles, and hopefully connect without wasting too much magic otherwise I'll have to do things the hard way."

That would involve having to use the Deku Flowers, and attacking them from below as was suggested by Twilight. Luckily, there were only two Dragonflies so it meant not dealing with a large horde of monsters, but I had to be cautious as I don't want to have to make my way back up here again as time is something I really don't have.

" Why not take off the Deku Mask?" suggested Twilight.

" The idea of fighting in human form is doable, but I'd need to get up-close in order to defeat them," I said.

" True, and that could place you in harm's way," sighed Twilight.

" I'll just have to lure them out one at a time, and hope that my bubbles don't miss," I said. Since the two Dragonflies were located on the next giant tree, I needed to get off of the one that I was currently standing on, and make my way over there which would throw me right into their radius. Diving into the nearby Deku Flower and aiming towards the next tree while waiting for them to move around to the over side of the next tree, I launched myself and flew over where I had to quickly cut my flying short due to one Dragonfly suddenly deciding to turn back the other way.

As I landed on my rear, I quickly used the shield which comes with being in this form, and just in time too as something sharp plunged itself into my shield, and my heart started shaking upon seeing the sharp tip covered with electrical currents.

" That was too close," said Twilight, breathing heavily.

" My reactions have definitely gotten better," I smiled.

" Well, don't make it a habit," said Twilight. The Dragonfly then pulled its tail out of my shield before floating backwards in order to prepare itself for another attack, so I lowered my shield, and fired a bubble which sailed along... and missed the target by a mere several inches which really crushed my spirit. " You've really got to get in more practice using those bubbles in combat Sunset..." Twilight's words felt rather discouraging, but before I could say something in response, the Dragonfly attacked again prompting me to use my shield to protect myself from being electrocuted, and being knocked off this tree.

" Deeply noted," I said. The Dragonfly then began to repeat the same attack pattern as before, so I decided to move forward as well in the hopes of getting close enough to knock it out of the sky. Firing another bubble, and at such close range, it was enough to defeat it which burned away to nothing. I was actually surprised that Twilight had not once commented on how barbaric this fighting is, for normally she would have given some kind of epic speech about it. I mean, I'm already used to it given how this was my second rodeo so to speak... but I'll admit that when I started my journey in Hyrule, I questioned the ethics behind my actions. " Twilight? Are you okay?"

" If you're referring to how I feel about you defeating these monsters, and what happens to them upon being defeated... let's just say that it will take me some time to get used to it," replied Twilight. From what she had often written to me about in response to my Friendship Reports, Twilight often had to face powerful monsters who were either desired food, territory, prestige, or even wanting to conquer Equestria. Yet, none of them with the exception of one were destroyed in a manner similar to the Dragonfly which I just defeated, so in my mind, I was worried that she was being exposed to something she might not be ready to accept.

" Well, if you want to talk about it sometime, just let me know," I said.

" Thanks for having my back," smiled Twilight.

" I could say the same thing about you," I smiled. Focusing my attention towards the other Dragonfly which was off in the distance, I needed to either use the Deku Flower on top of this tree, and make my way over to deal with it, or somehow convince it to come this way, and perhaps defeat it here before moving onto the next tree.

I began pondering over to best handle this situation, but this was the least of my worries, for something else was happening in Termina... something which would prove to be a real game changer not just for me, but for Twilight as well... as in not this Twilight, but the other one. Those two demonic creatures that I saw in the Deku Palace had dedicated where she ended up when the human world was transformed, and were trying to gain access to her, but there was something preventing them from achieving their goal.

" Who would have thought that the other version of you would be out here in this desolate wasteland."

" I must admit that I had my doubts, but then her aura is very powerful. She may think that her body no longer possesses any magic, but she doesn't realize that magic doesn't simply fade away into nothing. The magic she acquired still remains, yet for now it's merely dormant... waiting for the right moment to manifest itself. She wanted to understand magic, and now she has gotten her wish even if it is all an oblivious notion to her."

" What I don't understand is why we can't get close to her!"

" There is a powerful dark presence around here which exceeds our own magical boundaries... plus those undead monsters surrounding that building are making sure that no one can get close enough."

" Every time we destroy one of those things, another one immediately appears to take its place! It's as though the very land itself reeks of the undead, and whatever is inside that building is giving off the same scent in addition to the magical aura coming from her! Our Equestrian magic is powerful, but it has limitations in this world... which does explain why Sunset Shimmer hasn't been throwing her own magic around like there was no tomorrow."

" This world prevents us from using our power to its full extent, so we along with your counterpart have been weakened. My guess is that this will remain a permanent situation until everything has been returned to the way it was before this transition occurred."

" Does this mean our goals are unreachable now?"

" Not necessarily, for we can still rely on our other abilities. We've both depended far too much on our magic to solve problems, so now we need to rely on more... intricate methods to get anything done. An example would be waiting for Sunset to eventually find her way here, and figure out how to remove the stench of undead that pervades this place, and surrounds us with its foul mien. In fact, that is pretty much what we must do, for only she can solve the complex conundrum that is stopping us from getting our hands on the other me in there."

" Your choice of words reminds me of your intellect, and yet I must agree with your assessment of the situation."

" That is surprising considering that before in the past, you were much more volatile where you wanted to rely on pure power and rage to get your way."

" You've shown me a different way to look at things, and I won't deny that my own arrogance cost me everything. This wait-and-see approach has proven itself to be rather beneficial as we've come to understand how certain aspects of this world function, and we can apply this to our own repertoire when it comes to dealing with both of them. Still, I am not the patient type, for I won't wait around too long for her to finally get here."

" Are you thinking of attacking her?"

" There is this urge in my blood that wants me to."

" Nothing wrong with wanting such a desire, but you must remember that he is still a factor."

" Oh yes... Ganondorf..."

" His own power vastly exceeds our own, and if we were to get on his bad side, our lives would be snuffed out in an instant. As long as we remain in our current stance where we don't interfere with Sunset directly, he won't see any need for wanting to destroy us."

" I've been there before..."

" So for the time being, we should try to figure out how you can achieve an even greater form to match up with what Sunset acquired when she defeated me. If you want to carry out your intentions which are your very reasons for existing, then you must be willing to do whatever it takes to achieve it."

" What must I do?"

" Go through the darkness where it will surely rip you to pieces, but then you'll be doing so in the embrace of having absorbed a large amount of magic. Both our other selves were able to transform after absorbing the collective magic of their closest friends, and while each form was different in terms of personality, the fact is they achieved a form that is beyond anything you can imagine.

I came into existence when she unleashed the magic, and even though I no longer have access to all that power, I managed to retain some small amount which is enough for me to continue my desire of understanding more."

" That means acquiring the magic from them."

" Indeed, but it won't be easy for this world blocks Equestrian magic."

" Then you will help me achieve a form unlike any I've ever experienced before... you owe me for I was able to bring you to life again after Sunset was able to take you away from the power which became part of you, and for that you aren't just my partner and fellow demon... you're also my servant although just for that one specific fact. For everything else, you're your own person."

" I know the expectations, and I won't fail."

" Should there be a need for us to provide some encouragement, then we shall deliver upon it."

" Even if it means angering him?"

" That's a bridge we'll cross when we reach it, but for now we should return to the town located in the center of this world, and merely wait for things to progress. We know where our respective targets are located, so Sunset should be allowed to run around for now, and do her own thing. In the meantime, I want you to tell me everything that happened during that competition, for you still have memories of that experience. I want to know exactly what she, and by her I mean you, did to absorb all of their precious magic. Don't leave out any details as I want to hear every last little detail."

The two demonic creatures then took to the sky before disappearing out of sight, and I had no idea as to what they were plannin. In fact, I should have known their true identities, for I sensed Equestrian magic coming from them... magic which connected with both myself and the other Twilight.

After some struggling on my part to get past the other Dragonfly who proved to be rather persistent what with attacking me in a relentless fashion, I was able to take it down before using the next Deku Flower, and launch myself over to the other side where I landed on a walkway which ran along the side of the mountain. Further ahead was a cave entrance which must be how we gain access to the interior, but a strange looking statue piqued my curiosity. There was actually something else as well, but this piqued Twilight's curiosity for I didn't even take notice of it, but she made sure that I looked when she decided to bop me on the head.

" Look down there," began Twilight.

" What am I supposed to be looking at?" I asked.

" Do you see that giant cobweb covering up what looks like an entrance?" asked Twilight. It took me a few moments to understand what she was talking about, and when I looked down at where she was pointing at, I could see the cobweb in question which looked rather suspicious. There was a torch nearby which gave me the idea that I needed to light a Deku Stick on fire, and burn away the webbing in order to gain access to whatever was inside. " Maybe you should make some kind of note on your map, so that we can come back here later once you have more items at your disposal."

" I could check it out right now," I suggested.

" To do that, you would need to drop down below, and that would mean having to come all the way back here," said Twilight.

" A valid point," I moaned.

" It's really strange why there's a cobweb covering up the entrance as though someone, or something were trying to hide some kind of secret," said Twilight. Strange isn't the word that I would use to describe what we're looking at, but rather mysterious, curiosity, and even odd would perhaps be better words.

I was really tempted to jump down, and investigate this further, but I knew my focus had to be on getting to the Woodfall Temple, for that's where part of this whole mystery behind the falling moon would be resolved. Plus, I have to rescue both a princess and a monkey... yeah, things are already starting to get pretty weird.

" Let me mark this spot down on my map," I said, picking up a small stone located near my feet, and carefully using it to make a tiny mark on the map. I didn't want to press too hard in case I accidentally rip it apart, and that would make Pinkie feel just awful knowing that I ruined something she worked so hard on. Once I finished making the mark, I put away the map, and dropped the stone before walking along this narrow walkway towards the strange statue at the end.

" Take it slowly otherwise you'll fall," said Twilight.

" I'm just surprised that Deku Scrubs are able to come this way at all," I said.

" This route was designed for them in mind," said Twilight.

" At least we managed to make it through despite the trouble with those Dragonflies, but the real test will start once we enter that cave entrance, for we still need to reach the altar where I have to play that song the monkey taught me. However, I want to take a closer look at that statue first," I said. Walking up to the statue in question, I found myself feeling rather dumbfounded as I had no idea what it even does, but Twilight was very excited because the main feature of the statue was a large book with a quill inside of a bottle of ink on the side.

I rolled my eyes in reaction to her excitement, for it was another reminder of how much she loved books, and my interest revolved around getting out into the field to discover things for myself instead of just reading it.

" This statue is similar to the Owl Statue that Flash Sentry told us about, but I don't think you can use that warping song to come to this exact spot," said Twilight.

" So then it doesn't do anything?" I asked.

" There is something it does, but it's probably not going to be very useful to you. Since this is a video game we're in, there must be some way a player is able to save what they were doing in case they needed to go and do something else. That must be the purpose behind this statue... to allow players to save their progress, and come back to it later without having to go through the same thing over again just to get back here," replied Twilight.

What surprised me was that only did she just figure out how this statue works, she also knew something which was practically foreign in Equestria, and that was the video game. Okay, I'm not that familiar with them either as I don't have much experience in playing them, but what I do know is from what I learned from Rainbow Dash. She may have hogged the controller much of the time given how it was her console, but I was able to watch some of the things she did which includes saving progress.

" So, I should just ignore this statue?" I asked.

" It won't do us any good," replied Twilight.

" I'm sure we'll encounter more of these statues as I doubt this is the only one that exists here," I said. Walking into the cave upon deciding to leave the statue behind, everything went dark for a moment before we entered the central part of Woodfall which according to the map, was called Woodfall, and Twilight and I were in complete awe over what we were looking at.

The entire area was just one massive swamp with a number of dead trees scattered about with some which served as platforms where Mad Scrubs had taken refuge, and there were planks that connected to the trees although this wasn't the case with all of them. " Guess the map was very accurate about what would be waiting for us here, so how in the world did Pinkie know exactly what we would encounter?"

" She is someone whose very presence goes beyond our understanding," replied Twilight.

" Meaning there's no point in trying to figure her out right?" I asked.

" Pretty much," replied Twilight. Sighing, I continued to look around in order to see where certain features were located throughout the area. There were a few platforms which had treasure chests on them including one to my left, so this should get me some rupees as I really do need to deposit more to get those rewards at the bank.

Then I noticed another cave entrance all the way at the back which must be where Adagio of this region is located, and while it sounded like this was merely a guess on my part, previous experiences are what I'm using to justify my reasoning. Of course, Twilight should be able to confirm my suspicions as she is a fairy after all, and so she should be able to sense the powerful magic coming from the Great Fairy.

" So far, it looks relatively normal aside from the Mad Scrubs scattered about," I said.

" I've noticed a lack of lily pads, so if you were to fall down into the poison swamp water, you'll have no chance of surviving unless you change back into a human, and proceeded through the area until we reach the altar," said Twilight. If I were to traverse this area as a human and fall, I'm sure to take a lot of damage due to the poison until I climb back out again. Twilight then started bopping me on the head again which was her way of getting my attention, so I quickly looked up at her to see what she wanted to tell me. " I can see the altar over there in the distance!"

" Where?" I asked.

" If you look slightly to your left, and through the reeds, trees, planks, and pretty much everything else, you should be able to see it," replied Twilight. I then looked in the direction she was pointing at, but at first I wasn't able to see anything because she had a slight advantage due to floating slightly above me enabling her to see things better than I can, but then after searching for a couple of minutes, I finally noticed the altar, and it actually looked pretty normal. In my mind, I assumed it would be a giant building complete with a statue dedicated to the Deku Tribe, but it was just a fancy platform with some kind of raised groove on it.

" So playing that song on that groove will reveal the temple?" I asked.

" It must as there's no other option I can think of. Before we go any further Sunset, we should think about how to approach this temple in terms of how much time we have before needing to reset time. If you look up at the sky, the sun has already started to rise to signal the beginning of the second day, so the question is, are we able to figure out the secrets of the temple within the next 48 hours?" asked Twilight.

Dawn of the Second Day - 48 Hours Remain.

" Based on my previous experiences, the dungeons of Hyrule started out pretty simple, but then they quickly got complicated which ended up costing me to waste an awful lot of time, and I expect no less here although I feel this time things will be complex right off the bat. Personally, I don't think 48 hours is enough for us because there will be traps, puzzles, monsters, a big monster, and who knows what else waiting for us in there," I replied. It looks like resetting time and having the complete three days is going to be the order of business, but it would be nice to find another Owl Statue, as I don't really want to backtrack through all that we've been through in this cycle.

" Did you say a big monster?" asked Twilight.

" At the end of the dungeon is something referred to as a boss according to what Rainbow Dash told me one time after my first adventure, and if the same principle applies here as it does with Hyrule, fighting one will take plenty of time," I replied.

" So resetting time is going to be essential?" asked Twilight. I nodded my head in approval, but then something else entered my mind with regards to time. If only there was a way to have more of it, so that I wouldn't feel pressured into getting things done so quickly. I wish Zelda in that memory I experienced told me something else about using the power of time, for it would be essential especially when it comes to these dungeons.

" Twilight, do you think Tatl's memories could tell you something about anyone who may know any secrets related to time?" I asked.

" That's a pretty tall order, but let me see what I can come up with," replied Twilight, closing her eyes and concentrating. She began experiencing various images of Tatl visiting different places during her time with Starlight Glimmer, but judging from her lack of enthusiasm, she wasn't finding anything of importance. Suddenly, she began to dance about as though she had just lost it, and before I had the chance to question what was wrong, Twilight began to speak. " There is something Tatl experienced in Clock Town, but it's really weird that a character like that would know anything."

" Who is it?" I asked.

" When Starlight paid a visit to Dr. Hooves, she encountered a scarecrow at the base of the observatory who mentioned something about dancing, and a secret about how to manipulate the flow of time. Such information was ignored by Starlight, for she had other plans in mind," replied Twilight. Why did it have to be a scarecrow of all things? I remember encountering a scarecrow before in Hyrule, and I had a feeling this was going to be the same one, but with a different message for me.

Wait! Did Twilight say that the scarecrow was seen in the observatory where I obtained the Moon's Tear? I've got to go back through that secret passageway again!?!? " I thought it was weird seeing one of those talking, but then other things have proven to be even weirder, but the scarecrow said something that struck me as odd. He said that he was also located in some kind of shop in West Clock Town, yet I wasn't able to get a precise location as Starlight wanted to leave."

" That sounds both convenient, and somewhat expected," I said.

" This game apparently gives players a bone when it comes to hints, and I think I just gave you one without even realizing it," said Twilight. Guess I should have checked out those other shops in addition to the Curiosity Shop, and the Bomb Shop, so maybe I'll check out the rest before resetting time. If this scarecrow does indeed know something about manipulating the flow of time, it could prove to be the kind of edge I need.

" Why don't we go to that altar first before doing anything else," I suggested.

" You do realize that if you do use that Song of Soaring to warp, your only other destination is the entrance to the Southern Swamp, so you'll still have to make your way back to town on foot which will waste a bit of time," said Twilight. That was her subtle way of telling me to look for an Owl Statue in town, and I think I know exactly where to look if my memory of what I saw is accurate.

With that all taken care of, I went to the left where I hopped once across the swamp water landing on the platform that contained the treasure chest Twilight mentioned before, and it certainly was a big chest, but not one that would contain a Piece of Heart. " Are you sure you're allowed to take what's in there?" Twilight asked with a look of concern on her face.

" No one else has come this way Twilight, and these are the kinds of rewards an adventurer looks forward to," I replied.

" Can you even open it considering your height and all?" asked Twilight.

" I suppose giving the chest a little kick should produce the desired results," I replied, using my right foot to kick the chest open before jumping inside which made me feel really small as I've never done anything like it before. Luckily for me, there was something inside, and when I jumped back out, I showed Twilight a red rupee.

" This is worth 20 rupees, so while it isn't all that much, it will go a long way towards getting those rewards at the bank." Pocketing the rupee, and hopping over to the main pathway again, I walked to the other side of the platform where one lily pad separated the platform from a tree stump, but then I noticed something on the plank. " What's that thing over there?"

" That creature is called a Hiploop, and it can be pretty difficult to defeat if you're not careful. Right now, it's just minding its own business, but the moment you walk into its territory, it will charge at you with every desire to knock you off, and into the poison swamp water below where death is certain. You can use bubbles to attack from a distance, but you need to be quick as it will move very quickly when it charges. If you use your spin attack, and collide with it, it will be stunned for a few seconds which will give you enough time to inflict some damage, and this also works using Deku Nuts," replied Twilight.

" I don't have many of those," I said.

" Then spinning into a Hiploop is the way to go if you're not confidant with your magic," said Twilight. Hopping onto the lily pad before hopping over and landing on the stump, the Hiploop so far wasn't paying any attention, so I walked ever so slowly in order to get as close as possible, for my bubbles only have a limited range, plus the plank was on a slope which would work against me as my bubbles fire in a straight line.

The Hiploop then suddenly turned to the left as though it heard me, and I was really nervous about this, but it then turned back the other way where I breathed a sigh of relief. Once I was close enough, I formed a bubble in my mouth, and fired where it sailed through the air hitting its target from behind which caused it to suddenly get really mad. Before it was able to mount some kind of counterattack, I fired another bubble which connected, and caused it to fall apart where its remains splashed into the swamp water below.

" That was rather gruesome," I said.

" And you have seen worse than this right?" asked Twilight.

" I think Termina takes it up a notch given how morbid this world is," I replied.

" There are additional Hiploops in the area, for I can hear their horrible noises, and I'm also seeing a couple of Dragonflies near the altar, so you need to converse your magic until you can find a magic jar," said Twilight.

" Like that one?" I asked, pointing to where the Hiploop had been defeated. It had dropped a magic jar which was very convenient seeing as I've yet to restore my magic since first getting it, so quickly picking it up before it disappeared, I felt a slight surge which meant that my power had been restored slightly, and good thing too since there was another Hiploop patrolling the next plank with a Mad Scrub waiting right behind it.

" How do you feel?" asked Twilight.

" Getting that magic jar restored some of my magic power, but I need to collect some more in order to fully restore it," I replied.

" Maybe the Great Fairy can help you with that," suggested Twilight, floating to my right as her way of letting me know that the cave entrance to the Fairy's Fountain was to my right. Since there was a Deku Flower situated in front of the entrance, I can easily get back onto the main path, but there was one problem which I can't afford to overlook, and that involved monsters re-spawning.

If I were to enter the fountain, and then come back out here, monsters I've defeated will have come back which would cause me some additional problems. I then fired a bubble at the second Hiploop striking it in the rear where it turned around in frustration, and proceeded to charge towards me where I fired another bubble defeating it where it left behind another magic jar which I happily picked up. " Sunset, we should pay the Great Fairy a visit." Twilight suggested.

" There's one problem with doing that," I began.

" What's that?" asked Twilight.

" Even though I've just defeated two monsters, if we were to enter the fountain in order to see Adagio, and then come back out later on, those same two monsters will have re-spawned where they were prior to destroying them, and it would mean me having to perform the task all over again. This is true inside of the dungeons, and practically anywhere in this world with the exception of specific monsters which only need to be defeated once, and never again after that. Besides, Adagio mentioned that her fellow Great Fairies have been shattered to pieces thanks to Starlight Glimmer, so going into that fountain would produce no results as there will just be numerous Stray Fairies," I replied.

" Right... they're inside the temple," said Twilight.

" We'll pay a visit to the fountain after resetting time," I suggested.

" Hopefully, there's an Owl Statue for you to strike otherwise you'll have to come all the way back here again," said Twilight. Hearing her say that made me gulp pretty loudly, for I didn't know if Flash Sentry had left one of those statues here in this part of Woodfall. Guess we'll know for certain upon reaching the altar, but first we have to actually get there by overcoming these other monsters such as the Mad Scrub before me who decided to fire a Deku Nut which I avoided simply by not being close enough.

" Sunset, your spin attack will work against Mad Scrubs, but you need to have some space to use it otherwise nothing will happen. Just be sure it doesn't hide in its flower otherwise you'll end up falling off the edge, and into the poison."

" I'll wait for it to fire another nut before attacking," I said. The Mad Scrub would do exactly that roughly ten seconds later, and the moment it fired its nut at me, I quickly ran forward, and used my spin attack defeating it where the Deku Flower changed colour which meant I could now use it, but that's when I noticed there was another one located on top of the next tree stump I need to land on. " I don't think my bubbles can reach that far."

" I'm afraid not, so you'll need another tactic," suggested Twilight.

" Aren't I able to drop Deku Nuts while flying? If I can fly over until I'm right above it, I can drop one on top of it which should be enough," I said.

" How many do you have?" asked Twilight.

" I've got about four, so I have only four chances unless I can get more Deku Nuts," I replied. The second Mad Scrub noticed where I was, and proceeded to fire Deku Nuts at me which harmlessly collided with the side of the tree stump which had me thinking that it was either ignorant about its efforts, or it was some kind of bizarre programming which is due to this being a video game, and would serve nothing more other than being an annoyance... I decided to go with the second option here as it sounded better.

Diving into the Deku Flower, and aiming for where the Mad Scrub was located, I launched myself and flew over to where it was all while it continued firing Deku Nuts, and I learned that these guys are pretty good at curving their shots as one nut almost hit me, but missed by mere inches.

" They're a lot better than I thought," said Twilight.

" Guess I underestimated them," I added.

" Just be careful when aiming, and remember that you only have a limited amount of flight," said Twilight. I quickly looked up at my own flowers, and sure enough they were beginning to wane which meant I only had a few seconds which would equate to about one attempt to drop a Deku Nut onto the Mad Scrub.

I flew over where my flowers slowed down even faster, and just before they stopped completely, I dropped a Deku Nut which landed on the Mad Scrub, defeating it where it left behind its own Deku Nut which I grabbed by falling onto it. " There's another Mad Scrub at the end of the next plank, so do what you did before against the first one by using your spin attack once you're within range." It sounded like Twilight was starting to enjoy this a little, but hopefully she doesn't develop a sadistic nature.

" Is that the altar up ahead?" I asked.

" I think so, and I think I can see an Owl Statue over there," replied Twilight.

" That means we can come back here at any time provided I activate the statue," I said.

" All you need to do is defeat that last Mad Scrub," said Twilight. Walking across the plank before using a spin attack, I defeated the third Mad Scrub although it did hit me in the process which almost caused me to fall off the side, but lucky for me that I have good reflexes, for I quickly grabbed onto the plank before pulling myself back up.

" That was a little too for comfort, Sunset, but at least you recovered. Still, you need to be more careful as Termina isn't the same as Hyrule, but what would I know seeing as I don't remember much about the latter world." What Twilight said was true, for even though she portrayed Zelda last time, she has no memories of that experience, and this was the same for the rest of my friends, and everyone else who were involved from both the human world and Equestria.

" Once we enter the dungeon, being careful is going to be my top priority," I said.

" Are such places really that bad?" asked Twilight.

" Considering I've almost been killed in about six of them before, I would definitely say yes," I replied.

" Maybe you should prepare accordingly before going inside the temple," suggested Twilight.

" I actually do have a weird idea which may prove useful, and that involves taking a picture of Woodfall Temple when it appears. I know Trenderhoof has probably never seen the temple before given that only Deku Scrubs are able to make it this far, so I'm willing to believe that he will give me plenty of rupees as a reward," I said. Twilight looked at me with an odd expression on her face which indicated that she didn't quite understand what I was saying, so I explained it again with more detail.

If I can show Trenderhoof both a picture of the Deku Queen, and Woodfall Temple, I'm sure to get the best prize and maybe something else. The first thing I need to though, is make the temple appear so that I can use my Pictograph Box... which apparently is going to be getting more use than I originally thought, but maybe getting to the altar is the more important thing.

Diving into the Deku Flower which had been previously occupied by the Mad Scrub, I launched myself and flew over where I landed on the altar itself, and the first thing I did was walk over to, and activate the Owl Statue so that I could return here again. The statue unfurled its wings which must mean that it's been activated, but I won't know for sure until I use the Song of Soaring.

With that done, I took a closer look at the altar, and it was pretty sparse as though the Deku didn't really care about overall presentation. The raised groove had an image of a Deku Scrub's face on it, so being in this form was necessary as I doubt the temple will react to an ocarina.

" This must be some kind of place of worship," suggested Twilight.

" Perhaps they pray to the temple?" I asked.

" No, that sounds kind of silly Sunset, but maybe they pray to the guardian of this region for protection, yet for the deity to acknowledge their prayers, they must reveal the temple, and go through it in order to truly make a connection," replied Twilight.

" Should I try playing the Sonata of Awakening?" I asked.

" We don't need to go inside, for we agreed on resetting time, but you said that you needed a picture, so you might as well try," replied Twilight. I stood on the groove before taking out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch as it was obvious that I needed to stand in the designated location otherwise nothing would happen, and it immediately transformed because in this form, I use the Deku Pipes as opposed to the ocarina. It took me several moments to remember how the Sonata of Awakening was supposed to go as I haven't played it at all since learning it, so I played the song where nothing happened at first.

" Nothing," I sighed.

" Give it a few moments," suggested Twilight. Suddenly, the entire area began to tremble as though there were an earthquake happening, and I struggled to keep my balance as I didn't want to fall into the poisonous swamp water when I'm this close to entering the temple. Twilight told me to look out at two dead trees which were completely whole compared to the other dead trees, and something was beginning to stir below them which quickly gained strength in the form of a whirlpool.

That's when something large suddenly came forth and rose up for quite a distance until it stopped... my mouth dropped in awe over having witnessed Woodfall Temple rising from the poisonous depths. Excess water was trickling down every last crevice, and since there was another Deku Flower on the altar, I had to fly over to the entrance which consisted of an opening at the top of the structure.

" So that's the temple?" I asked.

" I'm sensing a powerful dark aura coming from there," replied Twilight.

" How did Starlight Glimmer gain access to the temple?" I asked.

" She must have used the power of Majora's Mask in order to gain access," replied Twilight. I could feel the dark aura as well, and it made me feel really nervous as though I didn't want to go inside, but I had no other choice for doing nothing would mean the human world would never change back to the way it was before all of this happened. " The temple has appeared now, Sunset, so aren't you going to take a picture?"

Twilight's question reminded me of what I was going to do, so I lifted up the Pictograph Box that was around my neck, and stepped back a few paces in order to get the entire temple in the shot. One flash later, and the picture was taken, and judging from how well it looked, Trenderhoof should really like it along with the picture of Tree Hugger.

" I know we need to go inside, but first I need to deal with leftover tasks," I said.

" That would include showing Trenderhoof those pictures, depositing rupees at the bank, seeing that scarecrow about learning the secret to manipulating time, and maybe even something you haven't considered before," said Twilight.

" Guess it's time to see what the Song of Soaring can do," I said.

" You should take that mask off now as you won't be needing it for the time being," suggested Twilight.

" I agree, for I've been a Deku Scrub long enough," I said, pulling on my face and removing the Deku Mask thus turning me back to normal, and right away I breathed a sigh of relief as I was myself again although I would have to resume my altered form to enter Woodfall Temple. Since I was holding the ocarina in my hand, it had changed back to normal too, so upon raising it up to my mouth, I played the Song of Soaring where a voice in my head asked me where the wind should take me.

There was only one location I could go, so I responded to the voice by asking the wind to send me over to the entrance of the Southern Swamp. That's when I started spinning around rapidly courtesy of the wind, and it felt as though my stomach was about to heave, but then in an instant it was over, and I was back where the tourist centre was.

" That was fast," commented Twilight.

" I almost threw up," I moaned.

" You'll get used to it," said Twilight.

" Hopefully, otherwise this will be another thing I'm not going to enjoy," I moaned. Thanks to feeling so queasy, I stumbled my way over to the centre, and even tripped along the way as I wasn't feeling well at all, so upon reaching the ladder, I propped myself up against it in order to rest for a few moments. While I was just standing there, I began to think about the human version of Twilight again, and what she must have felt before everything suddenly changed.

I know she isn't the Twilight who has become my mentor in addition to my friend, but I can really relate with her human counterpart for she has been through what I experienced back then... before understanding my actions had caused nothing but pain and misery. She was able to avoid the fate which plagued me, but I know there is still a long path ahead of her where she will need plenty of guidance especially when it comes to accepting magic as existing, and what she unintentionally became.

" Feeling better?" asked Twilight about five minutes later.

" My stomach still feels a little weird, but I can keep going," I replied, regaining my composure before climbing up the ladder, ignoring the Business Scrub who was looking at me again, and entering the Swamp Tourist Centre where Trenderhoof was still shaking his head in shame due to Pinkie Pie's antics. Trixie was also here in the hole in the wall where she was surprised that I had come back, but I wonder if she knew that the boat wasn't below the centre seeing as I didn't ride it all the way back here. Ignoring her as I had no need to talk to her, so I walked over to Trenderhoof who recognized me straight away.

" You came back after all! I was afraid that the Deku Tribe had captured you or somethin' seeing as you wanted to go down to their palace and all. Hopefully, you were able to take some good pictographs seeing as you came to speak to me in order to show me what you've taken," said Trenderhoof.

" I only have two to show," I said.

" It's better than nothin', so what one do you want to show me first?" asked Trenderhoof. I removed the Pictograph Box from around my neck, and handed it over to him where he looked at the photo I took of Woodfall Temple which was what I was hoping he would look at it rather than the one of Tree Hugger. " Say, is this the Woodfall Temple? Many of us around here are aware that it exists given the Deku talk about it constantly, but no one has ever taken a pictograph of it before seeing as only Deku can get ther. You've got quite a rare pictograph here, and even though I can't give you the best prize, I can still give you quite the rupee reward."

" How much?" I asked.

" For a pictograph of the temple, I'll give you 100 rupees," replied Trenderhoof. My face started beaming because that's exactly what I was hoping for, but then I realized that my wallet can only hold up to 99 rupees, so some of this reward is going to be utterly pointless. He then handed the Pictograph Box back to me before handing over a silver rupee which he said was what constituted as being worth 100 rupees, but then I told him that I had another picture for him to look at.

" Sorry, I guess that I forgot about that what with being excited about the pictograph of the Woodfall Temple." I handed the Pictograph Box back to Trenderhoof where his expression suddenly changed to one of complete shock upon seeing what I had taken. " Is this... is this the Deku Queen?"

" Yep," I answered.

" Unbelievable! No one aside from the Deku are allowed to enter the Deku Palace, and yet you've managed to somehow sneak in there, and took an excellent pictograph of their queen! That takes an awful lot of stealth to have pulled this off, so you automatically win the best prize of this contest. Here you go!" shouted Trenderhoof, handing back the Pictograph Box where I place the string around my neck before he handed over a Piece of Heart which was a prize that really made my day, and upon grabbing it, I felt the familiar warmth I experience whenever I get one.

" What will you do with those pictographs?" I asked.

" Place them into this album where they will be preserved for all time," replied Trenderhoof.

" I guess I've got no other reason to hand over pictographs," I said.

" Well, if you ever come back here for whatever reason you may have, and show me some additional pictographs, I'll reward you with some rupees. The rarer the subject, the more rupees I'll give in return," said Trenderhoof. I don't think I'll ever need to come in here again, but then I had a suspicion Trixe over there wasn't quite finished with me, but I don't think she can do anything right now until the poison has been taken care of.

With all of those rupees in my possession, I left the Swamp Tourist Centre, and decided to make my way back to Clock Town because I had rupees to deposit at the bank. It did mean having to run all the way back to town which would be annoying, so I climbed down the ladder before stopping due to someone standing in my way which was strange as I didn't see them there before.

" Who are you?" I asked.

" I'm the one who will be asking the questions around here!"

" Look, I'd love to stay here and chat with you, but I really need to head back to Clock Town to take care of some business. So, if you'll excuse me for my rudeness, I simply must be going right away," I said, trying to move to the side, yet this person had other ideas, and prevented me from leaving due to moving right out in front of me. This was starting to get rather annoying, for what reason did someone have to stop me from leaving Woodfall?

" I'm afraid you're not going anywhere!"

" Why not?" I asked, before suddenly finding a sharp blade a mere inch from my neck.

" You've had it pretty easy so far, but I'm afraid that you must be reminded of the harsh trials which await you... Sunset Shimmer."

" How do you know my name?" I asked.

" If you can survive what's about to happen when I decide to let my finger slip on this sword, I'll tell you, but you'll be dead before that, so there's no point in telling you anything." Whoever this person was, their voice sounded awfully familiar as though I know it from somewhere, yet I wasn't in the position to do anything. If I don't come up with a strategy and fast, I'm going to be cut down before I can enter Woodfall Temple...

To Be Continued.

Chapter 13: Temple of the Swamp

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 30, 2015
Chapter 13: Temple of the Swamp.

Thinking quickly, I noticed that this would-be-assassin had left her legs completely vulnerable, so using my own, I tripped her where she landed on her side, and I was able to get to safety before drawing my sword and shield before she managed to get back up. There was something odd about her movements, especially when she performed a backflip as though she were some kind of gymnast, but I'm not about to start praising someone who had a sword up against my throat a few moments ago.

The assassin then dashed forward, her sword aloft in an awkward position, yet by raising my shield, I deflected the blow before swinging back at her to discover that she parried me with her own sword. Our two blades clashed against one another; a battle of steel versus steel, and so far she was superior given how I was being pushed back to the wall, but then I noticed a proverbial chink in her armour, for again she had left her legs wide open like she didn't care about that, so I used my legs to trip her again where she landed on her back this time.

I suppose I could have just run away, but this assassin probably would have quickly caught up given how resourceful she was, and when she got back onto her feet, she proceeded to dash towards me yet again as though it was her only strategy. This time, I was prepared for her, and merely stepped aside while she collided with the wall, and slumped to the ground where she suddenly found my sword protruding up against her neck.

The tables have now turned in favour of me, but why would someone choose to attack me like this, and how did they know my actual name? As far as I was aware, no one in this world knows who I am except for Twilight, so was it possible that this assassin retained her memories of the human world?

" Sunset..." began Twilight.

" What is it?" I asked.

" I'm sensing a powerful dark magic surrounding this person, and it isn't Equestrian in nature," replied Twilight. I began trying to sense the same magic myself all while making sure my sword was still up against the assassin's neck, yet my worst fear had been realized. I actually assumed that this was Starlight Glimmer's doing, but the darkness was too strong, too potent... too filled with hatred and malice which lead me to the one and only conclusion... Ganondorf.

" This is Ganondorf's doing," I concluded.

" It must be for the magic coming from her is unlike anything I've ever felt before," said Twilight.

" She knew my name without second-guessing herself, and Starlight isn't aware of that, so this has to be his work. I guess it's his way of trying to see if I will live up to his expectations given what he said he would do if I fail," I said.

" Judging from the clothes this assassin is wearing, she is definitely from Termina, but I'm not sure from where exactly. I just need a few moments to tap into Tatl's memories as I'm sure she has probably seen her somewhere before," said Twilight. Before she could concentrate, the assassin was able to backflip over, and behind me where she landed, but slipped ever so slightly which caused the cowl she had been wearing to fall off exposing her face, and my jaw dropped for I knew who we were dealing with.

" Sour Sweet!?!?" I exclaimed.

" Just because you figured out my identity... doesn't mean I'm going to take it easy on you!" shouted Sour Sweet. This was completely unexpected as I haven't seen her since the Friendship Games ended two weeks ago, yet now that I think for a second, she and the rest of the students and staff from Crystal Prep were there at Rainbow Dash's party, but I guess I never took notice given that I had my own problems to deal with.

" Who is this?" asked Twilight.

" Right... she is someone you've never met before. Sour Sweet was one of the Shadowbolts, the high-school team from Crystal Prep who competed against me and the rest of the Wondercolts in the Friendship Games which we talked to you about when you came through the portal. She suffers from what can be described as bi-polar disorder, for while she speaks in a nice tone, she will suddenly speak in a nasty tone before switching back, and sometimes this is thrown into reverse which makes it even more confusing," I replied.

I remember how Sour Sweet gave the human version of Twilight a really hard time during the games, and I would have easily throttled her as a result because all she did was make the situation even worse.

But, deep down I knew that she wasn't to blame, and the same goes for the other Shadowbolts along with all of Crystal Prep. No, the one who was to blame for what happened to the other Twilight was Principal Cinch, for in her mind, she would do anything in order to win the Friendship Games, and that even includes unleashing powerful magic which could have destroyed the human world completely.

Cinch did leave after everything was all over with her dignity intact, but whether or not she will change her ways remains to be seen. As for the Crystal Prep students, they can finally begin to heal the wounds which Cinch caused because of having a strong obsession over reputation, but right now they can't do anything like that until things have been changed back.

" I know where she is from," began Twilight.

" Oh?" I asked.

" According to Tatl's memories, she and Starlight along with Spike paid a visit to where Sour Sweet resides in this world, and that is a place called the Swordsman School, a place that's dedicated in all things related to the sword. She is the instructor there who has trained many of the soldiers of Clock Town as well as others who desired to learn the ways of using a blade, but while she can be viewed as a harsh taskmaster, her training is well known throughout Termina," replied Twilight.

" While I do appreciate the nice compliments about my training regimen, it doesn't change the fact that I am here to cut her down, and I will do the same thing to you!" shouted Sour Sweet.

" Ganondorf must have used his dark power to place her under his control as a means of testing my resolve, and considering that she's been relentless when it comes to trying to kill me, he wants me to end her life before she does that to me," I said. I must admit that Ganondorf's plan was twisted in its execution, and since I actually fought back against her, I was falling right into his trap, and I know that killing an innocent person would be the ultimate act of betrayal of who I am as a person. There was only one course of action for me to take, and that was put my weapons away.

" Twilight, I know what I need to do," I said.

" What do you have in mind?" asked Twilight.

" I'm not going to fight her," I replied.

" You refuse!?!?" said Sour Sweet, her mouth dropping down in utter shock. " I have come all this way to deal with you Sunset Shimmer, and you shame me by choosing to act like a coward, and not fight against me in an honourable duel?"

" Are you sure about this?" asked Twilight.

" I know what Ganondorf is trying to make me do, and I refuse to allow him the pleasure of forcing me into acting the way he wants me to. He wants me to kill Sour Sweet which would bring me one step closer towards fulfilling his expectations, so I must do what my heart says even if it means placing the fate of both worlds on the line.

Besides, it's not like this is a new thing I'm doing, for I've been in this spot before many times... before and after becoming a raging she-demon," I replied. Sour Sweet shrugged her shoulders which was her way of saying that I was being a coward, but I refuse to cut her down even if she does desire to do the same to me. Once my sword and shield were put away, I merely stood there completely unarmed, and with nothing in my hands.

" You really are serious aren't you?" asked Sour Sweet.

" I refuse to kill a friend," I replied.

" Friend? All I know is that you must die because you've not been challenged hard enough!" shouted Sour Sweet.

" Then come, and end my life," I said, refusing to move an inch. Sour Sweet then dashed towards me one more time, her eyes filled with blood lust, for she was dead serious about doing this, but then she suddenly came to a stop before collapsing on the ground, dropping her sword in the process.

" The darkness surrounding her... it's gone," said Twilight.

" Thought so," I said.

" What did you figure out?" asked Twilight.

" If I had killed her in cold blood without mercy, I would have proven myself worthy of Ganondorf's expectations, for he wants me to become his servant. I guess he's aware of my troubled past where darkness covered my heart, and that my magical prowess has exceeded even what I originally believed. His aim is forcing me into being subjugated to various amounts of torment so that the evil that used to be me comes back to the forefront," I replied.

" Sunset..." said Twilight.

" What happened here is just the beginning Twilight, and there will be times where I'm going to be tested in ways I won't be prepared for, so consider this a heads-up from me in case you're wondering why I suddenly experience a sudden change in perspective," I said. While it sounds like me simply repeating what I've said before, it feels as though this time it was more important given what almost happened.

As I looked down at Sour Sweet, she looked completely different now that the darkness surrounding her had vanished, and to think at one point she along with the rest of Crystal Prep were our rivals during the Friendship Games. While I could just leave her here, I decided to wait until she regained consciousness for I wanted to make sure that she would be okay.

" Huh? Where am I?" asked Sour Sweet as she woke up twenty minutes later.

" You collapsed all of a sudden, and I've been waiting here with you to ensure that nothing happened," I replied, making sure not to tell her what really happened otherwise she could view me as either someone who is crazy, or may assume that I was the one who left her in such a condition.

" Me? collapse? Ridiculous! I would never do such a thing, for that would mean I was being lax in my training," said Sour Sweet.

" What kind of training?" I asked.

" Normally, I wouldn't respond to that question unless whoever I was speaking to happened to be in possession of a sword, but I see that you have one sheathed in its scabbard, and I'm sensing that it's been used quite a bit, so for that you'll receive an answer. I am the sensei of the Swordsmanship School, a place where any can come to learn the ways of the sword.

For over twenty years now, I have trained many who desired to learn, and while there were failures, others succeeded and used my knowledge by teaching others who then taught others, and so on," replied Sour Sweet. Did she just say over twenty years? She definitely didn't look that old, but I made sure not to bring this up, for she isn't aware that she is in fact a high-school student.

" Sounds to me that you enjoy your work," I said.

" It takes sheer dedication to master the ways of the sword, and should one succeed in mastering my techniques, they will become better for it. Let me see your sword for a second, for I want to take a closer inspection just to make sure that my senses were indeed accurate," said Sour Sweet. Even though I knew that I could trust her given who she is, I hesitated in complying with her request, but then I drew the Kokiri Sword from its scabbard, and handed it over to her where she began inspecting it.

It was as though she knew exactly where to look in terms of knowing how often it had been used, and at one point she even ran her finger across, yet not a single drop of blood dripped from her finger which showed that she was definitely what she claims herself to be. Upon finishing with her inspection, Sour Sweet handed my sword back to me, and said nothing for a few moments before uttering a single word, " Impressive..."

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" Your sword's edge remains sharp which means it has been used, yet it could be even sharper were you to have the necessary skills. If you were to come to my school located in West Clock Town, I can teach you techniques which can really you stronger than you currently are," replied Sour Sweet.

" Aren't you busy with other students?" I asked.

" Right now, business has been rather poor what with the panic that has been going on, so there are fewer people in town than normal for this time of the year, and for that I have not had many students pay me a visit... it gets really frustrating!" replied Sour Sweet, her bi-polar disorder coming to the light, for she constantly switched between being nice, and being spiteful. " Just know that my school isn't open 24 hours a day, or something like as even a master swordsman like myself needs to have her precious sleep, so if you were to come between 6am to 6pm, I'll be able to teach you my techniques."

" That's quite the window of opportunity," I said.

" It pays to be flexible. Speaking of which, that's something I need to do before heading back, as my back seems to be out of whack for some reason. Even though you told me that you found me unconscious from collapsing, I feel as though something else happened, but I don't know what as though my mind were drawing a complete blank. Personally, I prefer the hustle and bustle of Clock Town rather than this accursed swamp, yet I'll make it back to the school before this day is done," said Sour Sweet.

" I could help you back if you want," I suggested.

" While that would be nice, I simply cannot accept that no matter what! You appear to be on some kind of important mission as no one would ever come to this place unless they were either crazy, or were looking for an adventure, and you clearly fit the other description perfectly. I'm not so harmless that I can't take of myself, so you get out of here and do whatever it is you're supposed to be doing," said Sour Sweet. Her choice of words were cruel in design because of her changes in personality, but she did make a good point about me needing to resume my journey as this situation had proven itself to be quite the time stealer.

I then thought about what would happen to her upon resetting time... would she be back where she belongs, or would she be trying to kill me again like she attempted just a short while ago? Either way, there was nothing more I could do, so I began making my way back to town in order to deposit these rupees as I really need a much larger wallet.

" What's wrong?" asked Twilight.

" Sour Sweet was used against her will by Ganondorf, and while I was able to snap her out of his influence, what will happen to her when we reset time? Will I have to deal with her again, or be located where she's supposed to be... the Swordsman School?" I asked.

" I don't know as Ganondorf's power is one that I'm not familiar with," replied Twilight.

" And wouldn't you know it, I happen to be somewhat of an expert on it given my previous experiences," I moaned.

" My only suggestion is simply find out for yourself when we go back to the beginning. I know it's not the best answer, but I'm working with all I know which isn't all that much seeing as Termina as well as this whole game universe doesn't make much sense," said Twilight. This would prove to be problematic as Twilight's words were true in that she didn't understand this video game world like I did.

She is really good however, at catching onto different things, and combined with her articulate knowledge, I know she will guide me in the trials that are to come... such as what awaits in Woodfall Temple. Even though my heart wants me to enter the temple now, I feel as though there are certain things that need doing before I go in otherwise I could be in over my head before truly getting started.

It didn't take long for us to get back to Clock Town as the distance wasn't as bad as I thought it was, and the monsters generally avoided me although a couple of them did try to attack me which prompted a response in the form of my sword slashing them to pieces. Checking my wallet again, I had accumulated 99 rupees, my maximum, so I began to count off in my head how many I deposited back when I first entered Clock Town.

I think it was somewhere around 20 rupees which isn't all that much, and combined with the 99 in my wallet, that gives me a total of only 119 rupees... 81 shy of the 200 needed to acquire something good from the bank. There just had to be other places I could go in order to get the remaining rupees, so I decided to see if Twilight had any suggestions.

" Know a place where we can score some rupees?" I asked.

" You really do want those rewards from the bank don't you?" asked Twilight.

" I think they will be immensely helpful," I replied.

" Well, I heard that there are powerful creatures located in the northern reaches of Termina Field that drop rupees worth 50 upon defeating them, but they are very powerful not to mention rather large in size, and given what you currently have for items, it may be too risky to fight them," said Twilight. I guess she said that to me because of wanting to tell me about where I can rupee-grind, yet the harshness of reality had kicked in, and the challenge could be too much for me. Then again, there could be other locations where rupees are hidden as surely there are hidden holes all over Termina.

" Maybe we should check out the monsters," I suggested, walking into Clock Town via the southern entrance, and heading my way to the bank.

" Okay, but if it proves to be too dangerous, head back here, and we'll think of another plan," said Twilight. I wasn't sure if she was losing confidence in me, or worried about me getting myself killed by these monsters, but I really need more wallet capacity as items were starting to become expensive. That's when I had a thought race through my mind, but I needed to test my theory, and surely Fleur Dis Lee can help me with it. She was still in the same place as she was before, so there's some consistency right there, yet would she even remember me as it has been a while since I saw her last.

" Huh? What's this? You need something?" asked Fleur Dis Lee as I approached her.

" I need to deposit some rupees," I replied.

" First, before I allow you to do that, let me take a closer look at you," said Fleur Dis Lee. She then began to scan me over like someone fawning over an object, and I felt really uncomfortable with her eyes watching my every moment. Just when I was about to tell her to stop doing what she was doing, she began clapping in excitement which left me feeling more than confused. " I see that you have the stamp which lets me remember certain customers who have come to the bank, so that would make you Sunset Shimmer if I recall correctly." My jaw dropped in shock, for how did she remember me like that?

" You know me?" I asked.

" Of course otherwise I'd be questioning as to where you got that stamp on the back of your right hand from. Now, you say that you want to deposit some rupees? You deposited 20 rupees last time you were here, and believe me when I say that wasn't a very good deposit compared to everyone else around here. Hopefully, this time you'll give me more other than just a paltry sum," replied Fleur Dis Lee.

" How does 99 rupees sound?" I asked.

" What!?!?" replied Fleur Dis Lee, causing her jaw to drop down pretty far. " You're seriously giving me that many rupees? Wow... you're a much richer girl than I previously thought, but then I take it you're still interested in getting those prizes the bank is currently offering?" I nodded my head in approval, and she nodded in turn with a smug look on her face. " Uh-huh, thought as much as I figured it would be appealing to an adventurous person like yourself.

Well, let me take these rupees, and deposit them like so which will give you a total of 119 rupees which isn't bad at all." Fleur then emptied out my wallet upon me presenting it to her, and she was very surprised in that I had told her the truth. She then took them to the back of the bank where she deposited them in some kind of archaic safe which must mean they don't have much in the way of crime in this part of town.

" Is that where everyone's rupees are?" I asked.

" It's quite an effective system I'll have you know, and I should know because I made it," replied Fleur Dis Lee.

" Now that I've deposited my money, I was thinking that maybe you could answer a couple of questions," I said.

" Since I have a lot of free time right now seeing as this is the slowest part of the day, ask away provided that it's something I even know," said Fleur Dis Lee.

" My friend here told me about powerful creatures that drop valuable rupees upon being defeated which live in the northern part of Termina Field, so I was wondering if you knew anything more about it," I said.

" You really must be desperate to get those prizes if you're taking that idea into consideration. I'm aware of the Dodongos which live in that part of the field, and while they are known for their treasure hordes, someone of your stature is bound to be killed as those creatures have thick hides in addition to being able to breathe fire. In fact, I'd say you'd need to be a Goron, for they can survive against Dodongos given they've had to deal with them for generations," said Fleur Dis Lee.

When she mentioned the word "Dodongo", I slightly slumped downwards because I remember what happened in Hyrule regarding those things. I almost got killed by several of them, but I was saved courtesy of Pinkie when she was portraying Darunia as opposed to Tingle which she does now. If those monsters are lurking around in the northern field, fighting them would be tantamount to suicide.

" Do you think I could engage them in battle?" I asked.

" Ha! Quite the moxie you've got there Sunset Shimmer, but that isn't going to cut it against those Dodongo, and judging from the size of that sword on your back, you'd need to get right up close in order to strike their tails. No, I suggest not going that way unless you desire to go to Snowhead which wouldn't be a good idea anyway what with that chunk of ice blocking the path, and that harsh winter condition which has plagued the region. On the other hand, if you were to ignore my warnings, and fight those Dodongo, hope that you know how to dodge otherwise they'll be making you their next meal," replied Fleur Dis Lee.

" Is there no other strategy?" I asked.

" Like I said, you'd need to be a Goron if you were to fight them on a more even playing field," replied Fleur Dis Lee. Hearing her say this broke my heart a little, and that meant needing to find another way of earning enough rupees, but I suppose I could still ask her my other question as that should still be within the realm of certainty.

" My other question is rather unusual given I'm looking for something really specific, but do you know of any locations in town that have a scarecrow?" I asked.

" You weren't kidding when you said it was an unusual question, yet I know what you're talking about as I've seen a scarecrow around here. If you go to the Trading Post located in West Clock Town, and look to the left upon going inside, you'll find the scarecrow in question. I don't know why they have such a ragged looking thing in such an establishment, yet the owner says it's good luck for him, and some say it will talk to you if you were to interact with it. Personally, I think that last bit is just a load of hogwash, but I suppose it's worth checking out seeing as you did ask," replied Fleur Dis Lee.

" I was told that a scarecrow was in the observatory," I said.

" You mean the place old Shikashi calls home? He's collected all sorts of baubles and knick-knacks over the years, and there was a scarecrow among them which looks identical to what I just told you about. A coincidence perhaps? Maybe, but then I don't bother to look into such things as I have my own things to take care of," said Fleur Dis Lee, slamming her hands down onto the counter as though she were frustrated. " Sorry about that... I needed to fix my hands due to them getting numb for some reason, and slamming them really does work wonders for me."

So I now have another reason to revisit West Clock Town because the secret of manipulating time was in the hands of a scarecrow located over there... even just thinking about such a notion made little sense, but I suppose it's better than not saying anything about it. Of all those shops located in the west part of town, the only one I never looked at on that thin strip before the clearing was the shop to the right of the Bomb Shop. Thanking her for everything, I turned around, and was about to leave when she mentioned this to me, " Thanks for using our banking system, and we hop you'll come back to deposit some rupees once you've collected some."

" What do you think of that?" I asked.

" The scarecrow we need to find is in a place where people do their shopping?" asked Twilight.

" Stranger things have happened," I replied.

" We could reset time now, and use the Song of Soaring to warp back to Woodfall, and finally enter the temple," suggested Twilight.

" That will be our next course of action once we learn the secret behind manipulating time," I said. Whatever this secret was, it had to be beneficial in some way otherwise why even have it in the first place? Not only that, why have a random scarecrow be the one who knows such a thing?

Once again, I experienced the issue of trying to make sense of this world, and all I'm getting out of it is just more confusion. Sighing, I walked over to West Clock Town by taking the entrance that was located by the bank, and immediately I was reminded about how claustrophobic the area was what with the narrow section, yet now that I was taking a closer look at everything here, I was confused by the remaining shops even though I needed to find just one.

" So where do we start?" I asked.

" To the right of us are the Post Office, and the Swordsman School," replied Twilight.

" Guess Sour Sweet was being honest about that," I said.

" The Postman, or Aria Blaze in this case, is usually out and about making her deliveries, so the chances of entering the Post Office are slim, for it depends on when she gets finished with her run, and how long she chooses to remain inside until she has to go out again. Right now, she's most likely on a delivery run, so we'll have to visit another time when she is available. The Swordsman School is next door, yet right now no one is there because Sour Sweet unintentionally attacked us in the swamp because of being under the power of Ganondorf, so there's no reason to visit there either," said Twilight.

" What about this shop here?" I asked, looking in the direction of a building to my left.

" That place is where they have a lottery which gets held every night hence why it's called the Lottery Shop. At the beginning of a given day, you pay them ten rupees, and in return they will ask you to select a number between 0 and 99 which becomes your number. At night when they give out their results, if your number matches the number they announce, you'll win 50 rupees which could be a way of rupee grinding," replied Twilight.

I've heard about a custom in the human world where people play a similar kind of game which they call Bingo, but I never really considered it because of it being a game suited for older people. Plus, there was a gambling aspect to some versions of it, and I'm too young to play a game like that. According to what Twilight said, the chances that I would match my number with that of the Lottery Shop was slim, but perhaps there was some way of manipulating it to my advantage?

" Here's a theory... what if I were to try to win the prize at the Lottery Shop, and end up failing only to remember what numbers they announce, and then when I reset time, I go back and select the numbers they end up using anyway?" I asked.

" Umm... you'd win," replied Twilight.

" Interesting to know," I said.

" Are you thinking of resorting to cheating?" asked Twilight.

" It's not really cheating because resetting time allows me to apply new knowledge that I learned previously," I replied. Twilight shrugged her shoulders upon realizing my words made a great deal of sense, but right now I had no time to actually implement this theory, for I needed to pay a visit to the Trading Post which had to be the one shop which we didn't talk about.

The Trading Post itself looked like an ordinary shop although it did have a fancy sign out front which was probably their way of attracting potential customers, so upon walking inside via opening the door, it resembled what I've experienced in Hyrule which was a shop with goods stacked on shelves behind the counter, and someone was standing behind the counter ready to serve someone. Of course, I came here to speak to a scarecrow, and turning to my left which is what Fleur Dis Lee suggested for me to do, I found the scarecrow... who looked exactly like the one I encountered in Lake Hylia during my previous adventure.

" Yo! Hey, baby! I'm a stylin' scarecrow wandering in search of pleasant music."

" Excuse me!?!? I said with utter surprise in my voice.

" While I'm a scarecrow, I'm not the kind who gets placed into a corn field in order to scare away any birds. No, I have a desire to listen to all kinds of music, and through the use of my special powers, I can warp from one place to another instantly if I hear the sounds that I long for. Time will pass in the blink of an eye if you dance with me. If you like, baby, we can forget the time and dance until night! Or, if you want, we can dance until morning because I've got a hankering for dancing an all-nighter!"

" Uh, no thanks as I'm not the type of person who dances," I said.

" Really, baby? That's too bad. In that case, come back anytime if you do decide you want to dance." It sounded like the scarecrow was about to leave, and if he does then who knows if I'll have another chance of learning the secret that he possesses.

" Wait!" I shouted.

" Changed your mind, baby?"

" No, I still don't want to because I'm not a dancer, but I heard that you know something about manipulating time," I replied.

" Then you heard correctly, baby, for I do know of a mysterious song that allows you to manipulate the flow of time... however, I can't just reveal it to anyone because if I did, you can imagine the kind of trouble that could arise. Manipulating time is something only a chosen few are allowed to know, for if the vast majority had such a power, reality itself would tear itself apart! I tell you, baby, I'm not about to allow that to happen, so unless you've got something that can allow you to manipulate time, I'm afraid you should just move along right now, and forget all about such nonsense."

" Well, I do happen to have this ocarina," I said, reaching into my pouch, and taking out the Ocarina of Time before presenting it to the scarecrow. Upon seeing it with his own eyes, the scarecrow reacted in a way that could be described as downright bizarre, but I think this means he will give me the information I need.

" WHOA! Why didn't you tell me you had such a cool instrument, baby, and while it would be nice if you were to play a song for me using that, I suspect you're more interested in knowing those secrets right?" If I recall my previous experience in Hyrule which involved dealing with the scarecrow from Lake Hylia, he asked me to play him a song during my childhood, and then repeat the same notes as an adult which gave me a special song that would allow me to summon him although I rarely used such an ability.

If this scarecrow wants to me to do that, playing him something could be useful, but then the problem is if I reset time, this conversation will not happen, so that means having to teach him a new series of notes every time.

" I would like to know the secret," I replied.

" Fair enough, baby, now listen up. If you play that strange song backward, you can slow the flow of time down to one third of what it normally is, so if for some reason you're feeling pressured by not having enough time, this will give you more even though time will still tick away as playing the song in this fashion doesn't stop time... nothing can ever really stop time no matter how hard we try.

If you play each note twice in a row, you can move forward through time where you can choose the hour you wish to go to. You can only move forward in this manner up to half a day's length, so playing this variation again will allow you to move further through the flow. How's that? Pretty interesting, isn't it? But I'm sure I'd like any song written by you better, baby!"

" Maybe I'll play a tune the next time I see you," I suggested.

" Why not now, baby?"

" I'm kind of busy with an important journey," I replied.

" Say no more on the subject, for I know that such a thing must be taken care of first, baby, before you can indulge in any kind of fun activity. Very well, I'll take you up on your word, so I hope to see you again real soon, baby!" The scarecrow began spinning around at a rapid pace which caught me by surprise, and then he began to sink into the ground which sounded like water for some reason, and soon he was gone leaving me with the secret behind manipulating time. Upon exiting the Trading Post, I took a closer look at the ocarina again, and immediately figured out that the Song of Time is what needs to be played differently in order to make those changes.

" So playing the Song of Time backwards allows you to slow things down... that is probably the more useful secret Sunset as it means having more time to complete one of those temples, or completing a challenge that has a harsh time limit," said Twilight.

" Makes sense for I'm merely slowing everything around me down, and the two of us will be completely unaffected," I said.

" Not everything will be affected Sunset, for those two creatures who possessed Equestrian magic might have some kind of immunity, but we won't know for sure until we encounter them, or they encounter us which is a possibility. Ganondorf is immune period as he clearly shows an ability to manipulate time seeing as he comes from the distant future according to what he has said," said Twilight.

I wasn't surprised when she said that because I didn't think he would be affected, so when I have to eventually face him in battle, slowing down time won't make any kind of difference. " As for this other variation... the one where you can skip forward through time, its usefulness is less limited, but it can be helpful if you're going through a cycle just to fulfill specific requirements before resetting time again."

" Even if we do have an infinite number of times to reset everything, we shouldn't take advantage of it because it would make me feel pretty bad about myself, for you more than anyone else knows about how I don't like the idea of taking advantage," I said.

" I know," said Twilight.

" What now?" I asked.

" Unless you have something else you need to take care of, my only suggestion would be to reset time, slow it down, and finally enter the first temple of the region as we do have to progress through this game if we're to solve this mystery, and change everything back to normal," replied Twilight. Even though I still had about roughly 40 hours to go before the moon crashes, I decided that resetting time would be a good idea, as a new cycle would probably be just as promising as this one especially because it would mean finally getting some answers. Raising the ocarina to my mouth, and playing the Song of Time, I immediately fell down through a time stream just like the previous times, and all I lost during the transition were my Deku Sticks which was slightly annoying.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain

" Sunset... Sunset Shimmer..."

" Huh?" I asked.

" We're back at the beginning of the 72 hours again," replied Twilight.

" I still can't get used to doing that," I moaned.

" Play the Song of Time in reverse so that we can have more time," suggested Twilight. Since the notes to the Song of Time were simple to remember thanks to my skills of playing a guitar and having musical talent, playing the notes in reverse should be just as simple if not slightly weird in terms of sound. Raising the ocarina to my mouth again, I played the song backwards where everything started to slow down instantly, and I along with Twilight remained unaffected.

" Wow... it feels so weird," I commented.

" To everyone else, things are still normal, but for us they have been reduced in speed," said Twilight. Looking around at the people of Clock Town, they were moving slower now than they were before, and the sounds of construction had also slowed down making it feel rather eerie even though they don't know what has happened. Since time has now been reduced to one third of its actual speed, I now have more time in a given cycle even though it technically still is 72 hours.

I next played the Song of Soaring, and asked the wind to take me to the altar located in the heart of Woodfall... yet once again I would find myself struggling with my stomach because of not wanting to throw up due to spinning around too many times for my liking, and eventually the wind dropped us off in Woodfall where we discovered something that we should have expected.

" Where is the temple?" I asked.

" It's still buried below the swamp because when we reset time, we reversed all of that progress," replied Twilight.

" Good thing we activated this Owl Statue otherwise we'd currently be going through the Southern Swamp, the Woods of Mystery, and the Deku Palace all over again which would be nothing more than a waste of time. I'm also glad that Flash Sentry taught me that song which allows us to fly from place to place using the wind, for this is going to make traversing this world much easier although there are certain places we can't reach with it, so going on foot or on horse will be needed," I said, cupping my hands over my mouth upon saying "horse", and I turned to Twilight out of fear that she would have a reaction.

" I'm okay with the whole Epona thing," said Twilight.

" I didn't mean to bring it up," I said.

" What happened back then was my own doing for not trying to stop Starlight Glimmer, but now I'm making up for my mistake by helping you to stop her, and also because this is me we're talking about here. Like I would allow a problem of this magnitude to continue any longer than it already has!" shouted Twilight.

I never knew how passionate she can be towards solving problems, but she did become an alicorn back in Equestria because of solving problems which most ponies couldn't have figured out on their own, and for fulfilling several other requirements such as understanding friendship, finishing an unfinished spell, and being a good leader. Sometimes I wish that I could have had those qualities, yet instead I abandoned my studies because of succumbing to temptation.

" Guess it's time for me to become a Deku Scrub again," I moaned.

" Yes, as only a Deku can summon the Woodfall Temple by playing the appropriate song. By the way, we could check out the Fairy Fountain to see if Adagio is okay before going inside," suggested Twilight.

" She has been shattered to pieces by Starlight Glimmer which the previous Adagio mentioned, so going there would merely be a waste of time. No, we need to collect the missing pieces of her body in the form of the Stray Fairies, and return all of them to the fountain when we're finished," I said. Twilight nodded to signify her agreement, and said that was the best course to take given that I was sure to be rewarded by helping her out by fixing the damage caused by Starlight.

Putting the ocarina down on the ground, I reached into my pocket, and pulled out the Deku Mask, and upon placing it onto my face, my body began experiencing those familiar convulsions which I still haven't gotten used to. After a few seconds as the magic locked within the mask activated, I let out a scream before completing my transformation, and becoming a Deku again. " That is starting to get a little less painful in terms of those convulsions, but it still feels weird to me."

" Better get used to switching back and forth between forms as that could be a thing," suggested Twilight.

" Just what I needed," I moaned sarcastically, reaching down and picking up the ocarina where it changed into the Deku Pipes. From there, I stood on top of the raised groove of the altar, and played the Sonata of Awakening which caused everything to vibrate like an earthquake like before, and a few moments later, Woodfall Temple appeared from the swampy depths.

Upon taking a much closer look at the entrance which was located at the top of the structure, it could only be reached by a Deku Scrub by using a Deku Flower to fly across to the entrance, but the way was blocked by two Dragonflies, and neither were willing to come over and attack. " I can't lure them over to me as they're too far away, so I have no other choice apart from flying across, and hope that I don't get hit."

" Time your flight carefully so as to avoid them at the best possible time," suggested Twilight. After putting the Deku Pipes away, I walked over to the flower, and dove into it before waiting for the right moment to fly across which took about a minute for these Dragonflies had erratic movement.

Once they were at a reasonable distance away from my flight path, I launched myself, and immediately produced the flowers needed to fly, and flew across the sky, but the Dragonflies suddenly turned around, and started to come towards me with the intent of knocking me out of the sky, and into all of that poisonous swamp water below. Luckily, I managed to make it to the entrance of the temple... just barely, and immediately entered before anything else could go wrong.

" So this is it," I said.

" I've never experienced one of these "dungeons" before, so you'll have to guide me through it as well," said Twilight.

" There a number of puzzles which need to be solved in order to reach the end of the temple where the "boss" is located, and along the way, powerful monsters must be overcome with several being required to defeat as they form part of the overall puzzle. Somewhere in here, various treasures are hidden where I can pick up a map, a compass, small keys, a Boss Key, and a treasure which will be immensely helpful," I said.

" How do you keep tabs on all of that?" asked Twilight.

" Believe me, it isn't easy," I replied. The first room of Woodfall Temple was fairly large, and already I could see Deku Flowers situated on top of high ledges which went across the room, so remaining as a Deku Scrub was essential at least for the early going. Several Skulltulas were hanging from the ceiling, and will come down to attack me the moment I get close enough to them, but then I noticed a large assortment of black coloured spheres with eyes moving about below. " What are those things?"

" Those are Black Boes, and while there are a lot down there, they are generally harmless as all they can do is attempt to jump at you, causing minimal damage. What can make them a threat is the fact that because of their colour, they can blend in really well in dark places, so you never know whether they are there or not," replied Twilight.

Since the floor below was quite deep in comparison to the ledges, I doubt these Black Boes will be able to make their way up here... aside from the steps located to both my left and right, so I decided not to try and answer that question. That's when something else struck my interest, and it was a raised groove right in front of me which upon a closer inspection had an image in the form of Majora's Mask.

" What do you suppose this is for?" I asked.

" I'm not sure, but what I can tell you is that I'm sensing a very faint magic coming from it. I don't think there's anything you can do about it right now, but maybe coming back here another time will provide an answer," replied Twilight. Hearing her say that did deflate my overall excitement as I was curious about this groove, yet I suppose I can live with her answer seeing as I would just be wasting my time trying to figure out something which can't be solved just yet. Not even stepping onto it, and jumping up and down... which is what I did... proved ineffective, so I ignored it, and focused on where I need to go next.

" There's a treasure chest on that first platform," I said.

" Do you suppose the map is in there?" asked Twilight.

" It's possible, but I have a feeling that isn't going to be the case," I replied. Diving into the Deku Flower behind the raised groove, I launched myself into the air before flying to, and landing on the platform in question. You know, I never knew these treasure chests could be so big, but then I'm currently a Deku Scrub, so I'm seeing things in a much different perspective. Walking up to the chest, I realized that opening it using my hands wasn't going to happen as the lid was too high, so I did the next best thing, and that was kick it open.

" Is that?" asked Twilight upon my kicking the chest open.

" A Stray Fairy... just like the one we found in Clock Town, but this one is green in colour as opposed to orange," I replied.

" Please hear my plea kind young one! Please find the fairies trapped inside Woodfall Temple who match our color. Please bring us back to the Fairy Fountain which is located outside in the swamp.There are fifteen of us altogether hidden throughout the temple, and since you have found the first one of us, there should still be fourteen fairies trapped in the remaining chambers. Please save us so we can be returned to our former shape!"

" Guess we should have gone to the fountain after all," I said.

" Is that the Great Fairy mask in your possession kind young one? You must have gotten that from the Great Fairy of Magic in Clock Town, so this will make your task of finding all of us a much easier task. Whenever the hair starts to shimmer, that means you're in a room where one or more of us can be found, and when the hair stops shimmering, you have no more fairies to find in that room.

You will find us in all sorts of locations, so be sure to look at your surroundings very closely. As long as we're free, we will draw ourselves to you so long as you wear the mask of the Great Fairy." With that, the Stray Fairy disappeared by entering my body, and even though I had Adagio describe the Great Fairy's Mask in great detail before, it was nice to hear that description again as I did actually forget about it.

" Fifteen Stray Fairies?" I asked.

" I know it seems like an awful lot, Sunset, but then this is nothing compared to what you've done before. If you can get your hands on a map, I should be able to write down which rooms contained Stray Fairies, so that way, you know which ones you've found already, and which still need to be found," replied Twilight. She certainly had a lot of confidence in me especially since what she said is true about me having done similar things before, yet it has been a while so I'd consider myself rusty, or out of shape when it comes to this sort of thing.

" Now where do you suppose the other ones are?" I asked.

" There's one over there hovering above a dead tree," replied Twilight. I looked in the direction she was pointing at, and there was indeed a dead tree which served as a support beam which keeps this room, and quite possibly this part of the temple from collapsing entirely. In the middle of the two thick trunks which split off from the main one, I could catch the glimpse of the Stray Fairy floating back and forth as though it were just waiting for me to come up, and interact with it. " Guess this is where you'll need to learn how to quickly switch between your two forms effortlessly in order to maintain a steady flow."

" In other words?" I asked.

" Think of it as quick transformations," replied Twilight. I wasn't liking the sound of it, but I did understand what she meant, so I grabbed my Deku face, and took the mask off changing back to a human before taking out the Great Fairy Mask, and putting on my face. The hair of the mask immediately started to shimmer, and I'll admit that it looked really cool, and it certainly proved to be what I needed for this situation as the Stray Fairy suddenly came towards me without any kind of fear on its face. It disappeared into my body upon making contact with it, so now there are only thirteen more left to find.

" The hair isn't shimmering anymore," I said.

" That means there aren't anymore Stray Fairies in this room, so you can switch back to being a Deku Scrub, and proceed over to the door over there at the far end of the room, but make sure not to get knocked down to the floor below by those Skulltulas," said Twilight. The Skulltulas in question were situated right where I had to go, so that meant having to squeeze in-between them without getting close as that would be unpleasant, and that also meant being accurate with my flying.

Taking off the Great Fairy Mask, and switching over to the Deku Mask, I placed it on my face where once again I began experiencing convulsions as my body began changing again, and once I screamed out at the top of my lungs, I finished my transformation where I needed a few moments to catch my breath.

" Doing that quickly doesn't make me feel good," I said.

" You'll need to get used to it especially when in the heat of battle," said Twilight.

" I guess so, but believe me when I say that it's very painful when my body changes, as I don't think the human anatomy is supposed to twist and contort in such a manner, yet the change back is just painless," I said. While in reality I'm a pony, I've been a teenage girl for a few years now, and upon thinking back on it, when I first came into the human world after leaving Equestria, it took me some time to get used to having a human body since the only form I ever knew was that of a pony, or more specifically a unicorn.

So I know what's it like having my anatomy change through some kind of transformation, and this only gets weirder for me due to having become that she-demon as well as an angelic form of myself.

There was another Deku Flower on this platform where the treasure chest was located, and I could see the next platform on the other side of the dead tree, so I'll have to fly in-between the two trunks to be able to continue to the end of this room. Diving down into the flower making sure to aim carefully, I launched myself where I flew across the room while looking down, and seeing the Black Boes which must be attracted to me given how they were now hovering around the bottom of the platform I was heading towards. Upon landing there where I spotted yet another flower, I looked down at the monsters, and I felt bad about what they were doing.

" Those things are ramming themselves into the platform," I said sadly.

" They really want to attack you Sunset, but because they can't make it all the way up here, they are only doing what is natural to them. I must admit that seeing them just ramming into the column makes me feel sorry that they are essentially inflicting self-injury onto themselves," said Twilight.

" I feel that way about it too," I sighed.

" There's no point in even considering falling down to that lower level, and just destroying them to put them out of their misery, for that would just be a waste of time, and quite possibly make you nothing more than a sadistic person who enjoys doing that sort of thing. Still, I am curious why such monsters even exist to begin with. I mean, they can be a problem when they attack you in the darkness, and using a group mentality, yet on their own they don't do much of anything," said Twilight.

" Different monsters have different strengths," I said.

" What do you mean?" asked Twilight.

" Most monsters in this video game world may look strong, but in truth they are relatively weak especially when you know how to deal with them. However, there are some who definitely live up to their reputation when it comes to being powerful, and we're going to be encountering some soon enough," I replied.

" What makes you say that?" asked Twilight.

" Powerful monsters in these dungeons are always guarding a valuable treasure," I replied. While Twilight gave me another skeptical look, she will soon come to realize that my words are very accurate, and since this game is a sequel to the one where I traversed throughout Hyrule in order to defeat Ganondorf, I've got some powerful monsters guarding important weapons which I need to progress.

I remember what I experienced before during my last adventure, and such thoughts sent shivers down my spine because I was almost killed by the likes of the Stalfos, the Iron Knuckle... and of course on several occasions by Sunset Demon. Speaking of the she-demon, I wonder if that was her who had been giving off that Equestrian magic? Hopefully, I'm completely wrong about this, but then again when I want to be wrong, I end up being right about something.

Sunset Demon, next to Ganondorf, is perhaps my truest enemy as she is essentially me... well... to be more precise, the old me who used to be a bully to everyone who attended Canterlot High, and whose sole aim was to ruin all friendships in a bid to maintain my power and influence over everyone. She represents everything I hate about myself, and is determined to assume my life by killing me, and taking it for herself so that she can become the true Sunset Shimmer according to her.

I guess I have some sympathy towards her as after all, she only exists because of how I messed up my life, yet I'd say her sense of morals are even more twisted than what they were back when the she-demon was me. If she has somehow survived her apparent death... why is she here now? Also, why not attack me? Considering how I don't have the same weapons as before, Sunset Demon can easily overpower me without any problems, so maybe there's another factor in play I'm not aware of?

" Thinking about something again?" asked Twilight.

" Just the she-demon," I replied.

" You mean that horrifying wicked monster you became when you stole my crown?" asked Twilight.

" No, I'm talking about Sunset Demon... my former mean self who exists as her own entity," I replied.

" Yes, you told me this in one of your friendship reports, and while I was at first skeptical on the whole thing, I quickly realized you were telling the truth seeing as your attention to detail about what happened was beyond anything I've ever read before," said Twilight.

" The Equestrian magic we sensed back at the Deku Palace... I think it may have been her," I said.

" That bodes ill will for us Sunset as from what you mentioned, the she-demon has no qualms about killing you, and assuming your life all because she feels that she was robbed of being the Sunset Shimmer you once were. If she is alive, there's no doubt in my mind that you two are destined to fight even though such a thing sounds horrible, but there were two Equestrian magical auras, so there was someone else who possessed the magic of Equestria," said Twilight. It quickly dawned on me that I did sense another aura, so who could that have belonged to?

" Guess we'll find out eventually," I sighed, diving into the Deku Flower before launching myself over to where the door to the next room was located. The Skulltulas had obviously taken notice of my presence, for both of them dropped down from the ceiling in order to attack me, so I carefully weaved in-between which is what I needed to do, and entered the next room without trying to attack either one. I mean, I could have attacked them, but then what would be the point? I'd most likely get myself hurt seeing as they have a new barrier like maneuver which makes them more potent.

" Ugh! That stench! This place smells just like that poison swamp," said Twilight.

" Did we even smell anything?" I asked.

" It might not have affected you because of being a Deku Scrub, but I definitely smelt a putrid stench, yet kept it to myself so as to not make a scene," replied Twilight.

" Why didn't you bring it up? I would have been willing to help in some way," I said.

" Guess I was more concerned with us getting to the temple that I just decided to not say anything," said Twilight. That response prompted me to chuckle as it was just like her to allow herself to be distracted by important things, and not sharing her feelings on any particular subject. I made sure to explain why I was laughing in case she may think of me as being insensitive.

Upon explaining myself, Twilight began to chuckle as well, and for a few moments, we laughed at ourselves, and how some of our quirks were kooky before we got back on track, and looked around this room. In the center of the poison-ridden water was some kind of structure in the shape of a closed flower, yet it was down below slightly above the poison, yet it was still a platform regardless. There was what appeared to be a torch in the centre, and surrounding this structure were a number of flowers which looked really ghastly as though the poison had warped them beyond recognition.

" Where do we even begin?" I asked.

" I can see a locked door on the lower level to our left, and you can reach it by going down this ramp also to our left, but without a key in our possession, we're not going that way any time soon," replied Twilight.

" What do you make of this flower-like structure?" I asked.

" It does look important Sunset, but I don't think we can do anything with it right now. Judging from the fact that there is a walkway on the other side of this room along with another door, and what could be a passageway which goes up to another floor, we need to somehow get over there by using that passageway. That means finding that small key is imperative if we want to go any further," replied Twilight.

" What about the door down there to the right?" I asked. Twilight looked down at what I was looking at, and sure enough there was a door which we could easily access as there wasn't anything preventing us from using it, but then she took notice of the five pots sitting on a platform in the corner of the room, and said that it was suspicious as though something could be hiding there. " Those pots do look out of place, but should I jump down there like this, or as a human?"

" I'd jump down as a Deku as you'll still get those five hops even when falling from a great height," replied Twilight. Deciding to go with her advice, I jumped off the ledge and dropped until I landed on the poisonous water where I immediately jumped on the spot before using my next jump to reach the platform.

I remember back in Hyrule that smashing these can yield rewards sometimes, so I performed a spin attack, shattering them all to pieces, and producing a Stray Fairy which must have been trapped inside one of them. That now gives me three of them with only twelve more to find, and when it entered my body, I jumped over to the next section where the door was situated.

" That was worth it," I said.

" All you got were a magic jar, a Deku Stick, ten rupees, and the Stray Fairy... yeah, I agree with you," said Twilight. Opening the door, and entering the next room, I came to a stop because there was nothing in here apart from a ledge to my left which featured a treasure chest, and a Deku Flower in the middle of all that poisonous water which is probably what I have to use to reach that chest.

There was another door located on the opposite side of the room, so I should also check that out in case I can find something useful in there. " Remember that this poison is the same as what we've seen outside in Woodfall, yet this is more potent given how we're traversing through the source of the poison that plagues this region."

" One slip up could cost me my life," I said nerously.

" Maybe you should ignore that treasure chest," suggested Twilight.

" It might contain the small key," I said.

" Then going for it may not be a bad idea, and at least there are no monsters lurking around, so you can take your time," said Twilight. In order to reach the flower, I had to hope across the poisonous water, so I did exactly that without any trouble although those warped flowers were also in here. They look as though they could be stepped on, but their hideous forms made me think otherwise.

Jumping across the water and reaching the platform to my left, I kicked open the chest, and jumped inside where I picked up the small key needed for the locked door in the previous room, but I want to see what lurks behind that other door. You might say that my curiosity compelled me to see what there was, and I've never been known for resisting such temptations. Jumping back across the water before jumping forward towards the other door, I opened it, and entered the next room where it closed right behind me with something I haven't seen for a very long time.

" Figures that would happen," I moaned.

" We're locked inside!" shouted Twilight.

" Relax..." I began.

" How when we're locked inside of this room with no means of escaping?" asked Twilight.

" We can only leave when the puzzle in here has been solved which usually involves defeating monsters, activating a switch, or doing something specific. In this case, we need to defeat monsters in order for those iron bars to rise, and in case you were wondering how I know this... well... take a look in front of you," I replied. Twilight looked out in front of her where she saw three Snappers walking around where they suddenly noticed us, and ducked into their shells before charging at us. Given how there isn't much room to make some kind of maneuver, things are about to get difficult...

To Be Continued.

Chapter 14: The Fiery Reptile

View Online

Author's Notes:

Disclaimer: I do not own anything regarding the Legend of Zelda, the Legend of Zelda: Majora's Mask, My Little Pony: Friendship is Magic, and My Little Pony: Equestria Girls: Friendship Games. These are the properties of Nintendo and Hasbro respectively.

Wow... A new chapter has appeared! It's only been seven months since the last one. I'm sorry for leaving this story hanging, but "The Other Journal" ended up taking up my full attention.

That story is finished now, so this one can at last continue where it left off. However, what I learned while writing "The Other Journal" will be applied to this story from now on. The sudden change from the last chapter to this one will feel awkward, but hopefully it shouldn't cause too much of an issue.

Anyway, Woodfall Temple continues on, and a familiar weapon shall be retrieved.

Cast appearing in this chapter.

Sunset Shimmer - Link
Princess Twilight Sparkle - Tatl the Fairy

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 8, 2015 (Written), June 6, 2016 (Published)
Chapter 14: The Fiery Reptile.

Twilight was still freaking out over being locked inside of a room, not to mention being surrounded by three Snappers. Thinking fast on my feet, I took out my shield and propped myself up against the wall. Each Snapper collided with it, causing them to bounce back to the other side of the room. I breathed a sigh of relief knowing I had some room to maneuver. That's when I noticed the three monsters began ignoring me, as though I wasn't even there to begin with. This revelation began making me think that perhaps their vision wasn't very good or they only attack when prey enters their territory.

This could prove to be very useful, but probably just for this part of Termina. I doubted these Snappers exist anywhere else. I then looked at my shield. Despite it having a few dents, it remained as strong as ever--something I'm now appreciating. It meant my journey had gotten slightly easier, but then I was still at the start. More difficult challenges awaited further ahead. Turning my attention towards Her Highness, she had spent the last few moments ramming into the bars of the locked door. While scenarios like this were ones I had gotten adjusted to from last time, she wasn't used to it.

Knowing she would likely give herself a concussion, I reached out with my hand, planting it in front of her flight. She collided with a soft thud, and looked up at me wondering what just happened.

" Why did you stop me?" Twilight asked.

" Because if I hadn't, you'd have flung yourself straight into those iron bars. Like I said, we can't open the door until the problem in this room has been resolved." I answered, prompting Twilight to take a look for herself. " I figured that they only attack when something enters their territory, so right now we can plan some kind of strategy."

" Guess I'm no good under pressure."

" I figured that out some time ago."

" Okay, since we know that they have to be struck from below, you can use the Deku Flowers scattered across the room. However, you'll need to attract their attention, so that means getting up close to one. Otherwise, you'll miss your chance, and could possibly receive some kind of counterattack." Twilight said.

" See? Quite simple, isn't it?"

" Are you serious, Sunset? We've only just started this temple, and already I'm losing my nerves because of all the monsters, puzzles, confusion, and traps getting in the way." Twilight answered, hyperventilating for a few moments. " I know you're used to this, given your previous experience, yet even though I've faced similar odds back in Equestria, those are nothing compared to this." Twilight realized that what she said was nothing more than an excuse. She turned towards me, my arms folded, a smug expression on my face. " Is my 'freaking out' really that obvious?"

" Without a doubt."

" I must look like a fool to you."

" Not at all! You're just frustrated as this is an environment you've never experienced before. When I was exploring Hyrule in my previous journey, I experienced the same feelings you are right now. Logic from both worlds made no sense, so I quickly adapted knowing there was no other choice. It became part of me, and a small portion wish that it could have stayed that way, but I knew things had to change back to normal." I said.

" You enjoyed being in Hyrule?"

" Running around the field, exploring dungeons, using magic, and fighting against monsters. It reminds me so much of--" I answered before Twilight cut me off

" Equestria?"

" Yeah, but how did you--?" I asked, being cut off again.

" You've been gone from Equestria for so long, Sunset, that you've been using these video game worlds as a substitute, yet they can never measure up to the real thing that is our true home. I know it's a rather sensitive subject, but you will have to face Princess Celestia one day so that you can finally bring about a conclusion to what can be described as a critical part of your past." Twilight answered.

" Guess all I'm doing is avoiding her, huh?"

" It's something you're not comfortable with right now, but you can't keep hiding behind this fantasy forever. One day, you will have to face Celestia, and ultimately, the only one who can end the problem, is you." Twilight answered. Was it any wonder why she became my mentor? Twilight was right in that I can't use these video game worlds as a substitute for my desires.

I left on bad terms with Princess Celestia, and not a day goes by that I regret my actions. When this is all said and done, and there are no problems that need solving in the human world, I'm going back to Equestria at least to reconcile with my former mentor. I owe her that much, and an apology for having strayed away from my path.

" She had every right to bring an end to my studies."

" I know it still eats away at you, but that's in the past, and what happened can't be undone."

" Which is why I need to make sure no one else experiences my biggest mistake for themselves."

" That's the spirit! We'll have another discussion about this later, but right now I just want to get out of this room!" Twilight said. In some ways, what I just went through was exactly what Ganondorf wanted me to experience: to suffer because of my past actions. I may have passed this small hurdle, yet there were many more that needed to be jumped over. " Sunset, in order to defeat these Snappers, it's best to take them down one at a time. Focusing on all three at once will cause you to lose track of them."

" So I'll need to pick the right Deku Flower based on where they are positioned?"

" Or, just stick with one, and corral them towards it." Twilight answered. Looking around the room at the Deku Flowers on the floor, the one that was the closest to the door looked to be a sure bet. I walked towards it and the Snappers took notice before ducking into their shells. They proceeded to charge at me, yet I was much faster, and dove into the flower just in time. They then began charging back and forth thinking they could reach me within the safety of the flower, but their actions were, in truth, pitiful.

As soon as one of the Snappers charged, the moment its body covered the flower, I launched myself striking its underbelly, and defeated it in the process. I had a slight problem in that I was now flying above the floor, and the other two Snappers were charging about below.

" Now what?"

" You do know that you can drop down when airborne, right?"

" I assumed that flying the entire distance was the better course of action."

" That's for when you're trying to reach a platform, but if you hold the flowers forward, you'll drop straight down. Deku Scrubs aren't fond of falling from great heights, so you'll take some slight damage if you do that." Twilight said.

Pushing the flowers forward, they folded up, and my body dropped down where the Snappers were waiting. I ended up getting hit by both of them, causing me to crash into a nearby wall.

" Well that didn't go over well."

" Perhaps the one main drawback of flying is when you fall down by choosing to end your flight early, you become vulnerable to attacks from all sides when you land." Twilight said. At least I've learned this information now instead of later otherwise if I had discovered this during a more intense situation, my life would be in peril.

Getting myself up, and dusting off some dirt which caked itself across my shorts, I made my way back over to where the Deku Flower was, the Snappers taking offence to my actions.

Jumping into the Deku Flower, I launched myself when the next one charged, defeating it, and immediately dropped down before quickly taking out my shield. The remaining Snapper collided into it, bounced back the other way, allowing me the chance to dive into the flower again. With one more repeat performance from it, I launched myself upward, striking its underbelly, and defeating it where it burned away. Twilight bopped me on the head--much to my annoyance--to acknowledge that something was happening back at the door.

Turning towards the door, the iron bars rose up, and no doubt this was a huge sigh of relief for Twilight given how she had been trying in vain to open it.

" Like I said, upon solving the puzzle, the iron bars rise up, and we can now leave."

" Then why don't we?"

" Because I have a suspicion that we'll be getting something in here." I answered. Sure enough, a giant treasure chest materialized in the middle of the room. It was a pleasant sight to see, as it meant it would contain one of the key items one needs to be able to progress through one of these dungeons.

" That's quite the large chest."

" A reward for having solved the puzzle here." I said, walking over to the chest before kicking it open. I jumped inside, picked something up, jumped back out, and showed Twilight a piece of paper. She was expecting something better than this--hence her disapproving expression. " This is the Dungeon Map, which shows all of the different rooms located inside of the temple. Believe me, this thing is going to be very handy."

" I suppose this makes up for it considering that it's just a piece of paper." Twilight said. We both then took a look at the map, and discovered that Woodfall Temple was surprisingly small, an indication that things may not be as difficult as originally suspected. The layout was rather simple in design and, apart from an unusual second floor--it comprised of just three rooms with one of them cut off from the other two--much of the temple was situated on the first floor.

" Here Sunset--" Twilight began, " Let me mark off where the Stray Fairies were found, so that we know that they have been collected." I held out the map andshe used her fairy magic to create a few colourful specks that indicated where the fairies were.

" This place isn't really all that big."

" Perhaps it was intentional when this game was designed?"

" I remember during my last adventure, the first three dungeons were just as short as this temple. Despite some troubles along the way, they weren't all that complicated. Woodfall Temple must have been created to give off a sense of what the dungeons are going to be like before the size, and overall difficulty are increased," I said.

" So, things will be getting harder later?"

" I did say something to that effect."

" Guess there's no point in denying it, but promise me that you'll be prepared to handle it."

" You have my word Twilight."

" Okay then. We have a map of the temple, and we have that small key, so it's just a matter of getting back to that locked door we found earlier." Twilight said. Making sure there was nothing else of interest in the room, I proceeded back to the previous room, and that meant hopping across the poison water. If only I could find a means of getting rid of that poison. It would make traversing across these pools of water a more comforting experience.

After crossing over the pool using the Deku Flower, I reached the other door, and opened it to go back to the central chamber. " Now how are we going to get over there?" Twilight asked, both of us reaching that very conclusion. There was no actual pathway to the other side, and the slope she mentioned was on the upper ledge.

" What about those weird flowers in the water?"

" I suppose you could use them as stepping stones, but then it depends on whether they will attack you or not."

" Why would they attack me?"

" Because they have a row of teeth that go around the outer rim of the plant." Twilight answered sarcastically, prompting me to take a closer look. The flowers did possess teeth, resulting from being contaminated by all that poison. Despite being warped versions of themselves, they were still plants, so would that mean they would accept a fellow plant, and allow them to cross safely? I explained this to Twilight, who began to pace back and forth in order to process all of this information. " If you attempted to cross as a human, they might attack, and you would take damage from the poison."

" I'd rather not do that."

" Then I guess you've no choice, but to jump onto one in your current form." Twilight said. In my mind, I was nervous about jumping onto these flowers. What if my idea doesn't work? What if they chew me up and spit me out into the poisonous water? No, I need to cross otherwise I'm pretty much stuck here, and this journey would end all because of a warped flower.

Closing my eyes, I jumped over, landed on a flower, and nothing happened. Upon opening my eyes, I made my way over to the other side of the water, and something was waiting for me which lunged out at me in an attempt to bite my head off.

" Figures I'd end up facing this again."

" This is a Deku Baba, and unlike the one that had a withered stem, this one has a fully flexible stem that allows it to rear its mouth back before attacking by lunging forward. If you use any kind of shield, it will bounce it back, yet it will immediately attack again, so I wouldn't recommend you doing that." Twilight said. I remembered this version from before, and they were among the first monsters I had to deal with. It didn't go over very well given I had no idea what I was doing back then; everything was still new to me.

" Deku Babas do have a limit to their range, and when they reach it, they instinctively bite at you before moving their heads back to attack again. If you can stun them, you can easily cut down the stem, and will produce a Deku Stick. If defeated without relying on that strategy, you'll get a Deku Nut instead." Twilight said.

" Do you think I should ignore it, and unlock the door?"

" Maybe, but then why place a Deku Baba right here for no apparent reason?"

" That does sound strange when you say it like that, so maybe something will happen if I defeat it?"

" You can use your spinning attack that should protect you from its biting, but don't go crazy otherwise you might accidentally fall into the poison." Twilight answered. I walked around until I was at an angle where I couldn't plunge into the poison, yet the Deku Baba constantly lunged at me. With one timely spin attack, it was defeated and shattered into dead leaves. A Stray Fairy appeared that I immediately grabbed before it could get away. " That was ironic wasn't it, Sunset?"

" Good thing you convinced me otherwise we would have left that fairy behind." I answered. Twilight then asked to see the map, and I held it out for her so that she could mark down this Stray Fairy. " Four fairies down, and only eleven more to go. By the way, I wonder how much time has passed since we first entered this temple? I mean, there aren't any clocks around here to tell us."

Before, I would spend many hours--if not an entire day--in a dungeon, yet I could take my time given there was no constraints. Because I only had three days, time had become important. Knowing the current time would be a blessing, so how would I go about knowing without having to leave and come back later?

" I'd say we've been in here for about a couple of hours."

" That's just it though! That's just an assumption on your part, yet we need the exact answer! I know we're still on the first day, but it's best to figure it out now, and not later on." I said.

" Since this is a video game world, is there some way you can access certain things that a player can see?"

" Not that I know of. I'm portraying a character within the game... all of us are, Twilight. There are certain perspectives we can't access due to them being beyond our realm of understanding." I answered

" You never know until you try, Sunset." Twilight smiled. Her words prompted me to begin checking my gear to see if there was something that could help me figure out the current time. That's when I took out something that looked like an hourglass, but was slightly different in appearance. " I think you just found what we need, yet I wasn't expecting that." Twilight commented, her expression one of disappointment. How was I supposed to figure out how to use an hourglass?

" Any ideas?"

" Not a clue."

" Guess we won't know the correct time until someone can tell us how we use this thing."

" At least we have the howling of wolves to indicate nightfall." Twilight said. Okay, that was a little reassuring, but it'd be better if we had the correct time. Putting the hourglass away, making sure not to drop it, I took out the small key, and used it to unlock the door. I opened it, and entered the next room that featured even more poisonous water. There were some steps that went up to a higher level, a strange block which featured Majora's Mask as a symbol, and a few Skulltulas situated here and there.

" There's something down there under the water." I said, pointing towards some kind of sphere located underneath the wooden catwalk in the middle of the room. It looked like a bubble--which made no sense--but then I noticed something moving around inside it.

" I think that's a Stray Fairy."

" Do you suppose one of my bubbles can pop that one?"

" No, I think something more powerful is in order. We'll have to make a note of this fairy, and come back here later." Twilight answered. I then walked up to the strange block, and began pushing to see if I could move it. It slid along until it became lodged in place. " Okay, we've established that you don't need to switch back to a human to push it, but don't think that you've made a mistake. You can easily go around the outer edges of the room, and push it back the other way."

" Hopefully I've got enough magic to deal with those Skulltulas."

" The pathway is too narrow so avoiding them isn't an option." Twilight said. Sighing, I began to make my way over to the corner of the room where one of the Skulltulas was waiting for me. Since I had to hit it from behind, I inched closer until it dropped down from above, and spun around using that barrier it had. The moment its back was facing me, I fired a bubble which destroyed it, but that was just one of them in this room. " You know, I don't understand why those skeletal spiders turn around, and expose their weakness like that." Twilight said.

" It doesn't make any sense to me either, so I don't bother thinking it, and just go with it," I said.

" I mean, it isn't a concern, but aren't you just curious as to why they have such an unusual quirk?"

" My guess is that whoever made this game wanted some easy monsters, but don't think for a second that this means we can drop our guard, Twilight. There are some powerful monsters out there waiting for us to run into them." I answered. Walking further until stopping due to another Skulltula lying in wait on the ceiling, I repeated the same process from before and defeated it, yet this one revealed a Stray Fairy when it burned away to nothing. I collected it which now made five altogether with another ten more remaining--nine if you don't include the one located in the poisonous water. Twilight then used her fairy magic to mark this room down on the map before I put it away, and walked onward until I came back to where I started.

" Now push it forward, and we can go to the right."

" Makes you think there could have been an easier way, but then doing that would ruin the whole experience."

" Nothing ever works out when you want to cheat." Twilight said. Heading down the next walkway, I soon came to a stop at another door, but it had iron bars which meant we weren't opening it until we figured out what needed to be done. A nearby torch indicated that fire was needed, and while Twilight cursed under her breath about me not having access to my fire magic, I pretty much figured out what we had to do. To my right, a withered Deku Baba was, rooted into the ground, so defeating it should give me a Deku Stick which can be used to light up this torch.

" Now we just need a torch." I said, using my spin attack, cutting down the Deku Baba. It left behind a Deku Stick that I picked up.

" There was one back there where the first Skulltula was." Twilight said, prompting me to look in that direction. " I don't think you can use one of those sticks in your current form, so changing back into a human is the best course of action." Grabbing my face and pulling on it, I removed the Deku Mask where I breathed a sigh of relief.

I knew I'd have to put it on again, yet it was a matter of when rather than where. Running over to the torch, I took out the Deku Stick, placed it into the flames, and immediately pulled it back out before running back to the unlit torch. " Why do all of this needless running, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" Isn't it obvious?"

" The stick doesn't last that long?"

" It can only stay lit for about thirty seconds before it burns away, yet if you manage to maintain the lit flame, you could keep it going for as long as you want. Also, I learned from Rainbow Dash that a Deku Stick can be used as a substitute for a sword, but she recommended not using it as one. They break in two upon contact with anything, yet they do inflict a lot of damage." I answered. Once I reached the other torch, I lit it causing the door to unlock, but then I immediately put the stick away. It left Twilight feeling concerned as she assumed the flame would burn my tunic to ashes, yet I reassured her that wasn't going to happen. When it gets put away, the Deku Stick extinguishes itself which allows me to use it again later

" For such a simple item, it certainly has a lot of uses."

" It's pretty good during the early stages, but it's usefulness will diminish as better items come along. I might as well use it for all its worth until there's no real need to use it anymore." I said.

" Where to next?"

" I was thinking we could check out the room behind the door now that the iron bars have risen up." I answered. Twilight nodded in agreement, and I opened the door leading me into another small room containing two Dragonflies. Before I could anything, the door closed behind me with iron bars, yet Twilight didn't freak out. She was a pretty fast learner given all she's been through so far in her life.

" Since you have plenty of room, you should have no problems dealing with these two monsters. I do suggest fighting them as a human, as you don't want to neglect your skills with a sword and shield, right? Even though those Dragonflies use electrical attacks when they swing their tails, it's completely harmless upon your shield. You can then follow through with a single strike of your sword." Twilight said. While my skills with a sword have gotten better, I still wouldn't consider myself an expert as I could easily screw up.

Walking forward caught the Dragonflies attention, one of them flew over before striking with its tail, and I raised my shield just as the tip sunk into it where nothing happened. As it struggled to lodge itself loose, I swung my sword, striking it down where it burned away to nothing--quite a common trend I've been seeing so far. I had no time to ponder over it as the other one came over with every intent on getting revenge or because it now had no competition in terms of getting another meal.

It flew over slowly where it used its tail, and I raised my shield causing its tail to get sunk in. That allowed me to swing my sword destroying it. To think these Dragonflies are only really a problem whenever I'm flying in the air as a Deku Scrub, yet on the ground they are non-threatening. The moment it burned away, I looked back at the door where the iron bars raised up meaning we could now leave, but when a large treasure chest materialized before me, I had a suspicion that I knew what was contained inside.

Opening it up with some slight difficulty, I lunged into the chest where I took out a compass which made me smile as I remember how these things worked, yet my friend was about to express her disappointment as I suspect she wanted me to get something else.

" A compass!? Seriously!?"

" What's wrong with that?"

" We don't need a compass to figure out which way to go."

" This one doesn't follow that trope, Twilight. First of all, this compass will allow us to know exactly where we are in the temple
which is going to be immensely useful. Second, the map will now display icons that represent unopened treasure chests, and even though that doesn't sound possible, I learned to not question how this world works. Finally, it will also have a skull icon which is where the location of the boss is." I said.

" How?"

" That I know so much information? Well, you can thank Spike for showing me the ropes." I answered. Putting the compass away, and going through the door back into the previous room, I noticed something different which wasn't there before. A few butterflies had suddenly appeared, and were flying in a circle around the torch which I had lit a few moments ago. They appeared completely mesmerized by the spectacle. " Why do you suppose those butterflies are there?"

" Uh-oh... This could be problematic."

" Why?"

" According to Tatl's memories, butterflies for some reason are drawn to flames, and when they settle down near any kind of torch, they will instinctively protect it. While it may seem that these little creatures are innocent, they can and will inflict tiny amounts of damage which can quickly build up." Twilight answered. I never would have guessed that butterflies were capable of causing problems, but then Termina has already proven to not follow specific standards when it came to how certain things worked.

I then decided to ignore the torch as I didn't want to be pursued by butterflies, yet I would soon learn the hard way that trying to take the easy way out ends up not being an option. Walking up the stairs, I came across another unlit torch, along with a platform that had been raised up by a massive column coming from below. There was a giant spider-web blocking another passageway which must be the way forward.

" Guess I need to bring fire up here by lighting this other torch, and then using the same fire to burn away the webbing."

" If you do that, you'll get chased."

" Like I have any other choice." I said, taking out the Deku Stick I used earlier. Rather than plunge it into the flames, I decided to hold it out, and allow the stick to be caught on fire, and keep me from those butterflies. Brandishing it like it were a sword, I ran past the torch where the stick caught fire, and up the stairs before turning around to see if I had been followed. The butterflies followed along at a fast pace, yet weren't able to catch me.

Lighting the torch, I jumped over to the platform before jumping again, burning the spider-web away, and giving us access to what looked to be a staircase that went up to the next level. However, my joy was shortly lived not because of the butterflies--they got distracted by the second torch--but rather the Deku Stick burned away in my hands. Since I only had the one stick due to resetting time, if I run into another puzzle that involves lighting torches, I would be stuck.

One thing that only now just struck my mind as I walked up the stairs was that there was an actual staircase. That was something that never happened in Hyrule.

" There's a Deku Baba to your left, Sunset, tucked away in that small alcove."

" No, I'll take care of it."

" Why even bother? It would just be a waste of time."

" I could do with another Deku Stick, as the one that burned away was my only one."

" Oh..." Twilight said, blushing. Cutting down the Deku Baba with a simple swing of my sword, and almost clanging it into the wall, a Deku Stick appeared when the Deku Baba became scattered leaves. I picked up, and began walking up the stairs to the next level where everything suddenly went dark.

It was so pitch-black that I couldn't even see my own hands, but then Twilight moved slightly ahead where she glowed brighter to give us a sense of where we were going. I had a smug look on my face which meant that I told her so about needing a Deku Stick. " Okay, so you made the right choice by taking that Deku Baba down, but be careful as I'm sensing a lot of evil around here."

" Do you know what kind?"

" I can see... a lot of those Black Boes up ahead." Twilight answered. That wasn't what I would call evil, but then if there are a lot of them coming this way, I suppose it would count especially since I'll be outnumbered until I can clear them all out. " I'm also seeing the faint light of a torch at the end of this corridor, but that probably won't do us any good until we actually get close to it."

" Guess we're going through at least a dozen monsters."

" Or rather, you are." Twilight added. I chose not to acknowledge that response because I knew she was teasing me. Deciding that the best course of action would be running down the corridor, my sword connected with most of the Black Boes--who were really good at hiding amongst the darkness--yet each one fell upon my blade although a few did manage to strike me. Due to the corridor being too narrow, my sword clanged off the walls far more often than I was hoping. Eventually, I reached the end of the corridor where the room opened up into a slightly bigger one, and the torch looked rather unusually positioned.

" Okay, so what exactly do we do now?" I asked, striking down more Black Boes that were popping up all over the place.

" There's a locked door over there to our left, and it looks as though we'll need to light the torches in order to unlock it. Good thing then you brought that Deku Stick along despite my initial protests, but I feel as though something else is in this room." Twilight answered.

" What makes you think that?"

" Oh, I'd say those Black Boes." Twilight answered, pointing at many more which were situated by the unlit torches, and proceeded to gang up on me. This would be a perfect time to use my fire magic, but that's not going to happen, so thinking quickly, I stuck my sword arm out where it began to glow. I then unleashed a powerful spin attack--it wasn't really powerful--yet it did get the job done,and I ended up dropping my sword on the ground when the last one was defeated.

" I knew that was going to happen eventually."

" You weren't kidding when you said that happened before."

" Let's just hope it doesn't become a recurring theme." I said, moaning. The moment the last Black Boe was defeated, a treasure chest materialized in front of the torch. I walked over and kicked it open where a Stray Fairy came out before entering my body. " Six down, and only nine more to find, or should we just say eight left because there is that one downstairs trapped in that bubble."

" Better stick with nine otherwise we might confuse ourselves, so allow me to mark down this one on the map." Twilight said. That now left the obvious puzzle to solve which involved taking out the Deku Stick, and upon doing so, I plunged it into the fire before running around clockwise lighting the remaining torches. Upon lighting the last one, the iron bars rose up allowing me to proceed into the next room where everything got brighter, and was much more roomier.

" There's more of those Dragonflies up ahead."

" I'd look down at the ground first, Sunset, as there's something you need to see." Twilight said. Taking her advice, I looked down and noticed a number of holes in the ground. It made me wonder if this room had fallen into disrepair, but then judging from the positions of the Dragonflies, they were situated above the holes. Were I to be knocked down into one of them, I'm likely to end up back on the lower level, and perhaps in an even worse position than before.

" If you're thinking what I'm thinking, taking care of those Dragonflies is imperative otherwise you'll be backtracking. On another note, I can see a Stray Fairy trapped in a bubble down there." It took me a moment to find this fairy myself, and when I did, I ran down the stairs in front of me making sure not to fall down into the hole. I released it by popping the bubble using my sword. As soon as it entered my body, I ran back to where I was before to plan my next strategy.

" Guess I've got to become a Deku Scrub again."

" You have no choice, as you need to use those Deku Flowers to get across." Twilight said. The problem here was that if I fly across, one of those Dragonflies could hit me along the way with its tail, and I'll be helpless as I plummet down one of those holes below. Maybe, if I could somehow lure them towards me, I should be able to pick them off. That meant flying over to one of those moving platforms as I doubt they would follow me all the way down below.

Taking out the Deku Mask and putting it on again, I experienced the same convulsions as always--I was starting to get adjusted to it--and after a few seconds, I screamed out loud before completing my transformation, yet the transition still feels really awkward.

" If I want to take down those Dragonflies, I'll need to use my bubbles on them when I make it over to the first moving platform."

" Just be careful they don't hit you."

" Yeah. I do need to watch myself as I really don't want to backtrack up here." I said, diving into the Deku Flower at the edge of the ledge before launching myself when my flowers appeared, granting me the ability of flight. " I just need a clear shot to take them down." Landing on the moving platform, one of the Dragonflies flew closer when it noticed my approach. I used my shield to deflect its tail, and when it found itself stuck, I tried a different tactic that involved throwing my shield on the ground stunning it in the process. From there, I fired a bubble which burned it away, but then the other one had suddenly disappeared.

" Where did it go?"

" I know there were two of them as we saw them upon entering." I answered. My answer quickly came in the form of a tail attack from behind electrocuting me, but I managed to drop to my knees instead of being knocked off the platform. It felt as though every fibre of my being was shaking, and I did struggle to get back onto my feet that gave the Dragonfly some momentum before it struck me again.

" Are you alright?"

" I've been better." I answered, climbing onto my feet. The Dragonfly proceeded to attack me for the third time, but my response was to simply drop to the ground, and its tail sailed past my head in a harmless manner. I quickly jumped onto my feet again, and fired a bubble which destroyed it before it could do anything. " Whew! I am really starting to not like those things as that electricity in their tails really does go through your body."

" The damage was probably minor to you at best given that plants can handle some electricity." Twilight said. The fact that my internal organs felt like they've been turned into jelly, I wouldn't exactly call it that! In any case, I waited until this moving platform was close to the other one before diving into the Deku Flower present, and launched myself over before landing on the second platform. It slowly made its way over to a ledge where stairs were leading downwards. Twilight was concerned about my health, but I shrugged off her concerns. It would take more than an electric shock to bring me down. " Looks like we're heading back down to the first floor again."

" I have this feeling we're getting closer to the end."

" What makes you think that?"

" I've two of the four important items one would find in a dungeon, the map and compass."

" And what would that make the other two?"

" The dungeon item solve specific puzzles, and the boss key to open a special door." I answered. Deep down in my heart, I was getting nervous about what I would face in the room that housed the dungeon item. I remembered my previous experiences, and none of them were particularly pleasant, especially the fights against the Iron Knuckles, and Sunset Demon. " All other chests contain small keys, stray fairies, ammunition for items, rupees, recovery hearts, and anything else which can be deemed useful."

" Quite the diversity."

" It makes it a very exciting experience." I smiled. Once the second platform got close to the ledge, I dove into the Deku Flower, launched myself, and just barely made it onto the ledge. I took off the Deku Mask at that point, as I felt that being a human would be better. Once I was back to normal, I ran down the stairs, and found myself on the other side of the central chamber where that flower-like structure was in the poison water.

" There's a Stray Fairy trapped in a bubble to the right."

" Well that's pretty convenient." I said. Heading in that direction, I grabbed the fairy after using my sword to pop the bubble, so this now gave me a total of eight of them in total with seven more remaining to find. That's when I took notice of what was over here apart from the door with iron bars covering it. There was a unlit torch that I couldn't reach along with a switch that was close by.

" I don't think we can do anything here right now."

" Without a ranged weapon that hits hard and fast, guess going back the other way is where we should go." I said. Heading back in the opposite direction before turning to the right, a lone switch was situated right in front of the door I need to use. " Strange that a switch would be located right here, but I suppose it couldn't hurt activating it to see what happens."

" Are you sure that's a good idea?"

" I'll admit that sometimes pressing these can cause problems, but other times they are incredibly useful." I answered, stepping on the switch. It caused two ladders to materialize close by on opposite sides of the next door I needed to walk through. " Convenient they would appear close by, so now we can climb up here without having to go the long way around." That was a huge sigh of relief, as it meant a lot of backtracking had just been avoided.

Opening the door behind the switch, I found myself back in the room where the chest with the small key was located, yet now I could see what the rest of the room contained. There were two additional doors, to my left and to my right, yet it seemed I can only go right. Going left wasn't possible given the door was located on a ledge that was just too far away.

" What's that thing over there on the wall?" Twilight asked, floating over to what looked like a switch, but with an eye embedded in it.

" I remember those switches from before. " I answered, walking around the corner to get a better view of it. " Those do all kinds of things, yet they require an arrow in order to activate them. If one of those is in this temple, I have a pretty good idea as to what kind of dungeon item awaits me." Right away, I knew that this meant getting my hands on a bow, and thanks to the training I received during gym class, I'm better now at using one as opposed to before.

" So there's nothing we can do about that switch now?"

" We just have to come back to it."

" By the way, there's a beehive right above your head." Twilight said. I then looked up to see the beehive in question, yet why have something like this placed above a door? I didn't hear any sounds coming from it which made me wonder if it had been abandoned or perhaps something else has decided to take up residence. " You won't be able to reach it even if you were to extend your sword out, so it looks like you'll have to switch over to the Deku Mask for just a brief moment."

" I've got a better idea."

" What's that?"

" Throw my sword up at the beehive, and cut it down."

" Isn't that being somewhat reckless, Sunset? I know you've told me all about those incidents where you accidentally threw your sword across the room, but if you were to do a stunt like that, and end up tossing the sword down into the poisonous water below, you'll never get it back again." Twilight said.

She did have a good point. While throwing my sword sounded good in theory, because I wasn't good with it, the chances of me missing were pretty high. Still, Twilight should know that when I come up with an idea, nothing anyone else says or does could change my mind. I unsheathed the Kokiri Sword from its scabbard, yet instead of just tossing it at the wall, I chose to throw it slightly upwards from below.

" By throwing it up from this position, I can cut down the beehive, and my sword will land back down on the ground provided that I get out of the way before I end up skewering myself." I said.

" Okay, that actually sounds more feasible than had you just tossed it."

" I've come a long way you know, Twilight. While I won't change my mind on something, I'm not exactly being stupid about it. If I believe that I can't resolve something, then I'll simply move on with my journey as all I'd be doing is wasting precious time." I said. Stepping underneath the beehive, and tossing slightly upwards, my sword cut it down, shattered on the ground revealing a Stray Fairy. My sword then dropped and landed with a loud clanging sound before I picked it back up. " That went better than expected."

" You did have me worried for a moment there."

" To be honest, I felt the same way." I said. Walking over to the door that was at the end of the walkway, there were several pots lined up in a row. I smashed each of them that gave me a magic jar, a recovery heart, and two blue rupees, yet I knew this meant something strong was waiting for me behind the door. In the next room upon, it would lock itself behind me via iron bars, but things felt quiet, perhaps too quiet as though I were being watched from somewhere.

" What do we do in here?"

" I'm not sure as we're the only ones in here right now." I answered. Unfortunately, I was about to be proven wrong when the sound of something reptilian suddenly echoed around us. That's when something dropped down from the ceiling. It looked like a bipedal lizard wearing armour and held a rather crude sword, yet the way it was posed reminded me of what I dealt with back in Hyrule. Without warning, it suddenly breathed out a burst of flame from its gaping maw that took me by surprise, and then it dashed forward striking me with its blade before I could even react. I got knocked back a few inches before it jumped back to its original position.

" Are you alright?"

" I've been better."

" That's a Dinolfols--"

" I remember them from before, yet why are they different?"

" That's something I don't know, Sunset. I wasn't there with you at the time. Anyway, you need to be careful when it comes to this monster. Use your shield well in order to block its sword strikes, and attack whenever it drops its guard which is easy enough to figure out once you've memorized its movement. I should also mention that it will breathe out fire whenever you strike it as a means of self-defence to keep you away from it.

" Don't spend too much time up close even though that's how you fight it, as it has a tendency to jump over you, and attack from behind. Unless you've got some good reaction skills, don't try anything reckless." Twilight answered. This did feel exactly the same as the ones I saw in Hyrule apart from the fire breathing.

" Changing into a Deku Scrub would be nothing short of suicide."

" Agreed, so staying in human form is the best way to go." Twilight said. As I drew my sword and shield from my back, the Dinolfols immediately took this as a sign, so it dashed forward and struck me in the chest. The blew sent me flying into a nearby wall, hurting my back in the process. The Dinolfos then moved forward and I managed to raise my shield just in time as it's sword strikes clashed against my shield, sparks were flying as metal clanged against metal. While my shield could last a long time given how sturdy it was, I couldn't play a defensive game forever as that meant wasting precious time.

" This is where my magic could have helped." I moaned, struggling to keep my shield up as blow after blow continued.

" Well, you don't have access to it, so you'll have to try another tactic." Twilight said. Looking to my left and right in the hopes of seeing some kind of solution, I saw nothing, but maybe I could go use an unexpected method instead. It had occurred to me that its legs were apart which made for an opening in terms of escape, and since I was already on the floor, I was in a pretty good position already.

Once its sword clanged against my shield yet again, I took the initiative where I slid underneath its legs, enabling to emerge behind it, and struck it with my sword. It was able to do the same thing when it suddenly turned around, and breathed fire all over me which surprisingly didn't hurt all that much.

" You're covered in flames!"

" I know, but I feel completely fine."

" Really? Is it possible that despite not having your magic, your resistance to fire remains intact?" Twilight asked. This was a special gift I had back in Hyrule. I didn't take much damage against anything fire based, and while it didn't grant me an immunity, I could handle some pretty hard fire attacks. There was one catch, however. I would stand no chance in lava, and my immunity didn't apply with magic fire. While I may have resistance to fire, the same can't be said about swords, and the Dinolfos made sure to remind me of that. It jumped over me before turning around, striking me in the back, and I landed flat on my face.

" I deserved that."

" Get out of the way!"

" Whoa!" I shouted as I quickly rolled to the side just as the Dinolfos' sword came crashing down into the ground, yet I kept on rolling without the common sense to stop. Eventually, I rolled into another wall and got up just as the Dinolfos was making its way over to me using that incredible speed which made me somewhat jealous. Then it swung its sword prompting to raise my shield in response, and we were back at it again with metal clashing with metal. This time I was standing uprather than being on the ground. " When do you suppose this creature drops its guard?"

" You just need to watch it carefully."

" Kind of hard for me considering I'm defending myself here."

" Maybe you should move back a little, or lower your shield, and see what happens." Twilight said. Lower my shield? That would mean getting hit, but then if I were to move back just before its sword comes down, that should give me the answer. Lowering my shield, the Dinolfos saw it as an opportunity to strike, and just before it could, I jumped back where its guard dropped. That allowed me to strike it in the chest where it reeled back a few steps. Of course, I completely forgot about its fire breath that it used against me at point-blank range, and despite not feeling much pain, it still caused some damage. " Did you see when it dropped its guard?" Twilight asked.

" There's a vulnerable moment in-between when its sword goes down and then rises again."

" That's when you have to strike even though you have a mere second." Twilight said. The only problem with this strategy, is that I had to get up close in order for it to use its sword otherwise it will just move around without doing anything. It also meant my chances of being hit increase, but I've no choice in the matter but to take the chance. Moving forward while the Dinolfos did the same thing, we both met halfway, and we swung our respective swords which bounced off each other. " That won't do much good here, Sunset!"

" Maybe, but perhaps I can overpower it?"

" Don't always use brute force when you can use your wits." Twilight answered. I knew she was right, and I completely agreed which is why when I said overpower, I wasn't referring to strength, but rather turn its own weight against it. As we continued to parry one another, I decided to change the angle of my sword in hopes it would cause some slight unbalance. My plan succeeded although I did get nicked in the shoulder. Despite Twilight protesting that I don't act reckless, she needed to have more faith in me than that. I had seen things that she most likely witnessed through reading one of her books. Fighting monsters like this had become something I'd long gotten used to, yet I still didn't enjoy it because my life was on the line.

The Dinolfos reared back again, and I swung my sword in an arc shape, striking it in the chest again, and it answered back by breathing fire all over me. This time, in the midst of the confusion, it jumped over me, and hit me in the back. I slammed against the wall, landing on my back.

" Someone is getting desperate."

" You'd better get up quickly." Twilight said. Before I could, I felt something sharp hitting me in my arm, and it turned out to be the Dinolfos' sword having gone through my arm--the tip of the blade protruding from the other side. While Twilight freaked out over seeing my grievous wound, I began using the hilt of my sword in an attempt to knock it away. It looked like my plan wasn't working, but after hitting it a dozen times, it fell backwards allowing me to get back up and resume.

I had to end this quickly before things got even worse, so when we clashed with our swords again, we both parried one another until I managed to turn its weight against it, but not by changing my sword swing. This time, I just simply pushed back with a bit of my own weight, and when its guard dropped, I swung one more time, striking the Dinolfos where it reared back again. Instead of continuing, it made a noise similar to what it did before dropping down from the ceiling. Was it a sign that I had prevailed? I wasn't sure so I held my sword firmly in case it was trying to psyche me out.

It then toppled over and landed hard on the ground, a sign that I had prevailed despite receiving some nasty wounds. My arm continued bleeding, but that's when I noticed several recovery hearts had appeared where the Dinolfos had fallen. Walking over to pick them up, it caused the blood to stop flowing, and my arm to slightly heal, yet I knew that restoring my health to full was what I needed otherwise I could risk the wound opening up again. The iron bars then rose up allowing us to leave this room, and as was expected, a large treasure chest materialized in the centre of the room.

" And there is my prize."

" That was pretty intense."

" You freaked out you know."

" Sorry... I'm just not used to seeing you get hurt like that."

" This is what I meant when I said that I'm used to this, but I'll admit that I do need more practice as that was pretty sloppy. Anyway, those recovery hearts have stopped the bleeding for now, but I'll need more health to fully close up the wound." I said.

" Is that the reward you get for winning?"

" You were expecting something more?"

" Yes, if I must be honest."

" It may only be the one treasure chest, but it holds what we need to get through." I said. Walking over to the treasure chest and opening it up, I jumped in slightly--my legs dangled out a little bit--and upon pulling myself back out, I was holding a rather beautiful looking bow that immediately made me think of what I had before in Hyrule. " This bow feels so right in my hand right now. Twilight, and it's small in size compared to the last one I used."

" You've used a bow before? Since when?"

" In Hyrule, I used a much larger bow, yet I had complications using it."

" What kind of 'complications'?"

" I didn't know how to use it."

" Then how did you succeed knowing that?"

" I was taught how to use a bow, and I guess the lessons just stuck with me the rest of the way."

" I assumed you used a bow during the Friendship Games."

" No. That was Fluttershy and Applejack who handled the archery segment of the Tri-Cross Relay." I said. Twilight then looked at me, confusion spread across her face. I explained that Rainbow and I handled the motocross, and her reaction wasn't what I was expecting. She honestly couldn't see me riding a motorbike, but at least I could unlike herself. She still hadn't gotten used to having fingers and feet as opposed to the hooves of Equestria.

After looking over my new bow for a couple of minutes, I was thrilled at having a new weapon, yet I wasn't sure what exactly to call it. I remember the previous one being called the Fairy Bow, so perhaps this one had a similar name? " Twilight, do you know the name of this weapon?" I asked.

" It's known as the Hero's Bow, a powerful weapon which can allow you to shoot arrows at all kinds of things, and can even be used in creative ways such as firing an arrow through a torch in order to get a temporary fire arrow. This thing has incredible versatility which makes it an invaluable addition to your items, for now you can do things that weren't possible before." Twilight said. She then noticed my lack of enthusiasm towards her words and took offence to it. " Why are you acting like you're bored? You asked to tell you what it was called, and I did just that."

" I already know how to do that stuff?"

" It couldn't hurt to be reminded, could it?"

" No, I guess not."

" So there you go."

" Guess I know what needs to be done first."

" That switch in the previous room?"

" Might as well see what that does." I answered. Heading into the other room, I could see the yellow eye switch more clearly, and it was practically begging for something to be shot at it. I took my new Hero's Bow, placed the quiver on my back, and notched an arrow before aiming for my target. It looked difficult, but, in truth, it really wasn't. I received instruction from Iron Will, yet I couldn't tell Her Highness that he was the one who showed me the ropes.

The Equestrian version of Iron Will was well known for his assertiveness training seminars--a fact Her Highness brought up one time when she responded to one of my Friendship Reports.

Once my sight was lined up with the switch, I fired the arrow where it sailed through the air before hitting the center of the eye, and it caused the platform in the poisonous water to start rising. It then stopped and started going downwards, then stopped before going back up again. At first this didn't make sense, but I quickly figured out what was going on.

" Yet another shortcut that can help you get back up here quickly."

" And to allow us to reach the door over there at the far end of the room." I added. I needed to fly across to reach it, and that meant changing forms. I put the Hero's Bow away, took out the Deku Mask, and placed on my face. The change from human to Deku still caused me to suffer from convulsions, but I was slowly getting used to it. " I know my screaming can get annoying after a while, but I can't help it. Every time I put this mask on, it feels like my body is being twisted all about."

Diving into the Deku Flower, I waited for the moving platform to reach its highest point, and when it began dropping, I launched myself and landed safely several seconds later. I dove into the next flower and did the same thing all over again--this was going to become a consistent trend by the looks of it--landing on the ledge that lead up to the door. I did have one slight mishap, however. When I landed, my foot slipped and I almost fell into the water. Luckily, my reaction was quick enough to prevent tragedy from happening.

" You really need to work on that."

" It's on my list."

" Want to change back?"

" No, I think I'll stay this way for now, as I might need my Deku skills soon." I answered. Walking up to the door, I stopped due to hearing something weird coming from the other side. It sounded like a frog was in there, but they didn't sound anything like that. Something strange was no doubt waiting for me, and I had no choice but to go through and confront it. Opening the door, and entering the next room, it closed behind me with iron bars--another trend--but when I looked forward, my mouth dropped open upon seeing what it was that had been making that awful croaking.

To Be Continued...

Chapter 15: Jungle Warrior with the Mask

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 11, 2015 (Written), June 13, 2016 (Published)
Chapter 15: Jungle Warrior with the Mask.

" What in the wide world of Equestria is that?" Twilight asked. I was in complete agreement with her, as what we were looking at was hideous to say the least. The creature standing before us looked like a frog, but not the kind that one that sits on a lily pad. No, this one was just as tall as me with its elongated mouth, sharp teeth, and crazy colour scheme. The moment its eyes made contact with me, instead of choosing to attack, it turned around and began to hop away which made me think it was lacking in courage.

" Well, this is certainly unexpected." I said.

" You never told me that some of the monsters would be this ugly."

" They were never this bad in Hyrule, but then this is Termina, so the rules are different. However, I'm currently interested in what is located beyond that door over there at the back." I said. There was a single large treasure chest located behind a door, and it was a blue and gold in colour. That meant that the Boss Key was inside, a familiarity to me from my previous adventure. To claim my prize, I had to defeat this bizarre-looking frog that was more interested in running away than wanting to fight. Then again, this felt a little too easy. Something didn't seem right about this. Why have a monster like this guard such an important item?

" Aren't you going to do something?"

" Yes, but first I need some information."

" Oh, right! This thing is apparently called a Mad Gecko. It doesn't really do all that much in battle other than hop around, and maybe attacking you every now and again to gain some slight advantage. One thing that is surprising is its ability to climb on walls and the ceiling, quite an impressive feat. Whenever it decides to do that, use your Hero's Bow in order to pick it off." Twilight said.

" So I guess being a Deku Scrub for this doesn't make sense."

" I'm not so sure about that, Sunset. There are several Deku Flowers scattered about this room, and while this Mad Gecko isn't likely to want to get anywhere near them, why have here to begin with?" Twilight asked. Like I said, this felt a little too easy, as though there were something else waiting to happen. The Mad Gecko had merely been hopping around acting without a care in the world while we were talking--I just couldn't take it seriously because of its appearance--but I would soon be reminded that appearances can be deceptive.

" Let's just get this over with, so that we can claim the Boss Key." I answered. As soon as I walked within range of the Mad Gecko, it suddenly turned around, and began hopping towards me. Since I could perform a spin attack in this form, it should be enough to inflict some damage. I used the spin attack, striking the Mad Gecko knocking it back a few feet. It then started to look around as though it were trying to find something. " What's it doing Twilight?"

" Your guess as is good as mine, but I wouldn't let this odd behaviour distract you." Twilight answered. It then began to hop around again, and I'll admit that this was starting to get annoying. Was it leading me into a trap? Nah! Why would something this hideous think of setting a trap when it clearly had no idea what it was doing. Moving forward again until I got its attention, it turned around and hopped towards me, and I responded in kind by using a spin attack, knocking the Mad Gecko into the wall. It then fell to the ground and struggled to get back up. In my mind, this was just pathetic.

When the Mad Gecko managed to get itself up from the ground, it turned to face me, raised its hands to its mouth, and began to cry out as though it were in serious pain. Or perhaps it was doing some kind of mating call? Suddenly, everything started shaking and something smashed out from the ground. I couldn't see what was happening at first due to rock pieces scattering all over the place, prompting me to take defensive action.

Once I was able to get a look at what just happened, standing in one corner of the room was a Giant Snapper that the Mad Gecko jumped over to, leaping onto its back, and charged towards me. I had no chance to avoid what was about to happen, and I was sent flying across the room upon being hit by the Giant Snapper.

" That wasn't a very good moment."

" This explains why everything was so easy."

" I guess I'm being taught a lesson about not letting my guard down." I moaned. As I managed to get back onto my feet, the Giant Snapper charged at me again, striking me in the back. I went flying into the wall face-first before sliding down to the ground in a heap. That's when it struck me for a third time, and I bounced off the wall, landing on top of a Deku Flower. That's when I noticed something that may or may not prove to be a factor. " I guess this Giant Snapper has problems stopping as it just slammed into the wall after knocking me over. So
we do have a few moments to come up with a strategy." I said.

" How are you feeling?"

" I could be better." I answered, getting back up and rubbing my back.

" Since we know now that the Mad Gecko is using this Giant Snapper as a mount, this fight has now changed. You now need to use those Deku Flowers, and attack it from below by launching yourself the moment it's right on top of you. Unlike the previous ones where you had to lure them over, this one is going to be constantly charging at you." Twilight said.

I dove into the Deku Flower just as the Giant Snapper charged on by before I could get a chance to launch myself, but then it came back the other way in an attempt to knock me over despite me being safe inside of the flower.

" I guess this Mad Gecko is desperate."

" I'm surprised the Giant Snapper doesn't just shake off the Mad Gecko." Twilight said. When the Giant Snapper came by this time, I launched myself out of the Deku Flower, knocking the wind out of the monster, and ducked into its shell. The Mad Gecko went flying across the room landing face-first into the ground. When it regained its composure, it began hopping over to the wall before beginning to climb up and crawling above me on the ceiling.

" Now what do I do?"

" That Giant Snapper is currently out of commission, so now you need to take the fight to the Mad Gecko. It isn't going to come back down as it realizes that fighting you in a fair fight isn't going to cut it. You'll need to change back to a human, and use your new Hero's Bow, yet you'll be switching between forms." Twilight answered.

" So I need to use this form to knock out the Giant Snapper, and my true form to fire arrows?"

" Pretty much, but I hope you had plenty of training when it comes to moving targets. That Mad Gecko is constantly moving about on the ceiling, and I think you'll need to be quick otherwise it will try to get back to its partner over there." Twilight answered. Knowing that there was no other choice, I grabbed my face, and pulled on it removing the Deku Mask, becoming human, taking out the Hero's Bow and aimed at the Mad Gecko. Twilight wasn't kidding when she said that she hoped that I had plenty of practice, as it was moving around on the ceiling at a pretty decent pace. I only had twenty-nine arrows to use, every shot I make needed to count.

Firing my first arrow, it almost hit the target, but was slightly off by a few inches. It had been some time since I last used a bow, and now that I think back on it, maybe I should have paired up with either Applejack or Fluttershy during the archery section of the Tri-Cross Relay event during the Friendship Games. My second arrow managed to connect, and the Mad Gecko dropped down landing on its back before getting back up and hopped over to the Giant Snapper. It then jumped onto its back, so now I had to switch back to a Deku Scrub to repeat the process.

" How many hits do you think this will take?"

" I have no idea, so the only option I can think of is to keep going until its finally had enough." Twilight answered. Before I could put on the Deku Mask, the Giant Snapper charged into me, sending flying across the room. When I landed, I placed my hand onto my right knee that was now starting to bleed. It couldn't have come at a worse time. Even though the hits I'd been receiving have been pretty minor, the fact that I am now gushing out blood made Twilight concerned that I was being reckless again.

" I'll be fine Twilight."

" That wound makes me think otherwise."

" Granted, I wasn't expecting that to happen given the previous blows I've taken, but I can't afford to argue about it right now. We're trapped in this room until this battle ends, and I've no intention of being defeated by that thing!" I said. When I tried getting up, I dropped down onto my left knee, and I knew that my strength was starting to run low. If I took a few more hits, I'd be killed, and without a fairy, it would be a permanent death.

" You need to do something about that knee!" Twilight shouted. I then began to look around for anything that could relieve me, and my answer came in the form of shrubs located around the edge of the room. Why didn't I take notice of these before? I began making my way over to the nearest shrub, but it proved to be difficult what with my knee giving me some problems. Being struck again by the Giant Snapper wasn't doing me any favours, apart from sending me right where I wanted. Cutting down the shrub using my sword produced a couple of recovery hearts, so I grabbed them where the blood stopped seeping out of the wound.

" That will have to do."

" Better change forms before you get hit again." Twilight said. Putting on my Deku Mask, the convulsions started once again, and this time I stumbled about slightly as the magic took effect. Upon screaming, I became a Deku, and just in time as the Giant Snapper, who had been frozen in time during the transformation, came flying at me. I dodged it by jumping to the left. When it crashed into the wall, I took the opportunity to dive into a nearby Deku Flower and waited for the Giant Snapper to regain its senses. I launched myself when it passed over the flower, knocking it out again, and the Mad Gecko rolled into the corner. Before I was able to make another move, the sound of a wolf howling began to echo throughout the room.

" What's that sound?"

" It means we've been in here for about twelve hours. Nightfall has occurred outside."

" I'm not surprised as I've experienced lengthy dungeon explorations before."

" Right. You often spent many hours wandering around such places."

" This temple is small in size, so the time spent here is going to be small compared with future dungeons." I said. My words made Twilight feel worried, but I reassured her that everything would be okay as each dungeon will be tackled at the start of a new seventy-two hour cycle. I took off the Deku Mask before switching over to the Hero's Bow, as I still had to deal with the Mad Gecko. Firing three arrows, the first two missed their mark by mere inches. It felt rather dejecting knowing that I came that close, yet the third shot proved successful, and it fell down before landing on its back.

" Here we go again." Twilight said, as the Mad Gecko made its way back to the Giant Snapper. I was surprised that it didn't decide to pick up speed as surely it must be even more angry than before, but I won't think long about it. Choosing to run for the wall instead of changing forms, I was hoping the Giant Snapper would follow me, and sure enough it did, but I did get hit in the back. " You really need to work on timing." Twilight said.

" It's one of the biggest things on my list." I moaned, getting up and putting on the Deku Mask. Once I finished my transformation, my body was feeling tired because of changing at such a rapid pace. " Twilight... This is really tiring me out."

" I know Sunset, but you need to get used to it."

" Hopefully, this doesn't become a re-occurring theme." I moaned before diving into a Deku Flower and waiting for the Giant Snapper to come by. It would charge over the flower several times, but after Twilight insisted that I get this over with as the fight had dragged on long enough, I launched myself and knocked the Giant Snapper out, the Mad Gecko landing in the middle of the room this time. I could have ended it there and then, but it hopped away too fast for me to catch up with it, so I pulled on my face removing the Deku Mask, and again I switched to my Hero's Bow and aimed upwards.

By relaxing and waiting for the right moment, all it took was one arrow which turned out to be the final hit I needed. The Mad Gecko dropped to the ground like a rock, and the Giant Snapper shrunk down before disappearing.

The Mad Gecko shrunk down before disappearing in a pile of leaves, and standing in its place was a frog. The iron bars on both doors rose up and while I was happy that the fight had concluded, seeing this frog made me wonder what had just happened. I mean, I had just saved an ordinary frog, yet why go to all so much trouble? Could this be one of Starlight Glimmer's pranks?

" What's wrong?"

" I guess I just feel cheated that all we did was save a frog."

" Fluttershy would be giving you an earful if she heard you say that, but I must admit that this doesn't make sense. There's something strange about this frog. Why change an innocent creature into a monster and command it to protect the Boss Key?" Twilight asked.

" Maybe this was Starlight's doing?"

" Or Ganondorf?"

" No, it wouldn't be him. While he does have a large assortment of servants to carry out his bidding, he wouldn't use something minor as that would reflect poorly on his ego. I'm leaning more towards Starlight, but I suppose we shouldn't dwell on it since we can now get the Boss Key, and make our way towards the room with the skull mark." I answered.

" Don't forget about those remaining Stray Fairies."

" How many do I have left?"

" You have six more to find including the one that was trapped inside of the bubble back in a previous room. I think you should head for that one first before proceeding to the next room." Twilight answered. I then told her that before I could do anything else, I was going to open up the treasure chest which was now accessible to me, and take the Boss Key. I began walking over towards the chest, but quickly came to a stop because of something else that was happening; a little something happening.

" Twilight... that frog is hopping along behind me."

" Maybe it just wants to thank you for freeing it from being an evil creature."

" I don't know about that."

" Why?"

" It's as though it wants to tell me something, but I don't understand. Do you happen to speak frog?"

" Don't be ridiculous!" Twilight answered. This was certainly an awkward moment, as this frog continued following along behind me by hopping on my shadow. I chose to ignore it in hopes that it would simply leave the room and carry on with its life. As I reached the door that lead into the tiny alcove where the chest was, the frog was still following me, and I was started to get freaked out.

" What does it want?"

" If only you could communicate with it."

" I don't have anything that will allow me to do that, and I doubt becoming a Deku Scrub will do any better. You know, if it could simply write down something that explains to me what it's saying, then I can probably try and help it, but just hopping and following along doesn't solve anything! Maybe... Maybe there is something I can get in the future that can solve this problem, but that would mean having to come back here, and go through this dungeon again." I moaned.

The notion of backtracking was something I didn't want to experience again, so this frog was going to have to find someone else who could understand what it wants. Opening the door, and entering the alcove, I opened the chest, hopped into it--my legs dangled out again--and took out the Boss Key which looked really stunning.

" So that's it?"

" Yep!"

" Will it allow us to open any locked door we encounter?"

" No, we'll need small keys in order to open those. This key will allow us to open the one door in the temple that has a golden padlock on it. Sure it feels weird having a key that is only used for one door, but the trials you have to go through to get it are worth every experience." I answered. Placing the Boss Key into my pocket, I went back through the door, and into the main area again where I felt something slimy running up my leg.

Upon looking down, the frog was clinging onto my leg as though it really wanted my attention now more than ever before. " I'm sorry little guy, but I don't understand what you're trying to tell me, and even if I did, I doubt that I can help you right now. Maybe in another cycle, but not this one." I then grabbed the frog where it felt really uncomfortable to hold because of how slimy it was, and gently placed it on the ground and walked away. When I turned around to look back, it just sat there with a sad expression on its face.

" You're doing the right thing."

" Am I really, though?"

" Until you have the means to communicate with that frog, you can't do anything for it." Twilight answered. That's the one thing I truly hated about reliving the same three days over and over again. Having to experience immense guilt over not being able to help out everyone right there and then proved truly emotional to my heart. I've already witnessed that myself through Applejack and Applebloom, the imprisoned monkey, the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop, and now this innocent little frog.

I just hoped that my emotions didn't spiral out of control otherwise I could have a relapse. Heaving a sigh, I left the room and while it was what I needed to do, the pain proved difficult to overcome.

" I'm really getting emotional about this."

" I know it's hard, but what other choice was there?"

" If only we had access to specific items now instead of later, but then that would be taking the easy way out." I answered. Right there and then, I decided to make a mental note to come back here at a different time, and speak to the frog when I know how, even though it meant having to go through Woodfall Temple again. Since I now had both the Hero's Bow, and the Boss Key, it meant going back to previous rooms, and do things that weren't possible before. " Aside from the one Stray Fairy, what else did we overlook?"

" What about that flower structure in the main chamber?"

" We never did figure that thing out."

" I do recall seeing a few torches scattered around it with one of them having been lit on fire, so maybe you can do something to make it work again?" Twilight asked, scratching her head in the process. Her idea was confusing, yet since I had nothing else to consider, I had to try it out. I had to become a Deku Scrub again to get back to the previous rooms, but I wasn't really in the mood to change forms. Instead, I took a leap of faith by jumping off of the platform, and landed on the ledge below where my knees buckled slightly. " What in the world were you thinking doing a crazy maneuver like that!?"

" I'm not in the mood to change."

" It's about that frog right?"

" I just don't like the idea of leaving it behind without at least trying to help it."

" Believe me, Sunset. I want to help that frog just as much as you do, but again there is nothing we can do unless we could somehow magically start talking to it. We can't use our Equestrian magic, so our only option is to keep going and come back upon having something that can enable you to communicate without the need of magic." Twilight said. While her words were bitter and made my heart cry out in pain, I knew she was telling the truth, a fact that I had to accept even though I didn't want to.

" We'll be back!"

" Agreed." Twilight smiled. With my heart still feeling conflicted, I ran towards the edge of the platform, and jumped over the poisonous water before landing in front of the door. Entering the main chamber, I immediately climbed up one of the two ladders which had materialized earlier, and soon I was staring at the flower structure again.

" Okay, there are the torches you mentioned, Twilight."

" Now that you have the Hero's Bow, you can shoot an arrow through the flames, and light the torch located in the center of the structure. I don't know what will happen, yet it could prove beneficial." Twilight said. Given the torch was fixated on that spot rather than moving around, this was an easy enough target to hit. I took out the Hero's Bow and aimed for the torch before letting loose an arrow. It sailed through the torch, catching fire in the process, and lit the unlit torch in the middle of the flower structure. At first nothing happened, and I was worried that I missed a vital step, but then something unusual happened. It appeared that the structure was more mysterious than ether of us thought.

" What's going on?"

" The petals are lifting themselves up." Twilight answered. The petals then folded outwards and the entire structure began rising up before coming to a stop. I would have paid attention to such a phenomenon, but my mind was focused on the water. It began to change colour from the purple poison to a clear, crystal blue. Had activating this structure removed the poison that had been plaguing Woodfall for so long? Perhaps, but that would be too much of a miracle to occur. No, I think it only the temple was affected by this change. That meant defeating the boss would fix everything else.

How could one structure do so much? I wasn't exactly sure why it was possible, but it did, so I guess you could call that a victory. Finally, those corrupted flowers changed colour as well, a sign of no longer being affected by what had been ailing them. That meant traversing this area got a lot simpler.

" At least the poison is gone in here."

" And outside?"

" We need to do more."

" Defeat this 'boss'?"

" There's no other choice."

" Well, at least we managed to stop it here in the temple, so that brings us one step closer to solving this problem. Also, I think I'm starting to figure another purpose that structure has." Twilight said. She then flew over to where we entered this area from via the second floor, and took a few minutes to comb over everything before coming back with what she had discovered. " Remember seeing a torch over there? I have a feeling you need to set it on fire, and that should unlock the door to continue forward."

" That would mean having to fire at a moving target."

" No, the target isn't moving, but rather where you'll be standing will be what's moving." Twilight said. I knew that my skills with the bow had improved, but having to do something like that was asking quite a lot from me. There was no other choice. Time wasn't on our side, and we needed to continue onward no matter what trials got in our way.

Jumping onto the structure which had been spinning around since activating the now lit torch, I looked around to see where I needed to shoot next. The unlit torch was quite far away and that meant I needed absolute precision to hit my target. I just knew I was going to be wasting arrows, so I hoped there were spare arrows lying around that I could find. Cutting down shrubs and smashing pots would surely aid in that little salvation.

Aiming at the torch proved difficult, as I needed to maintain a firm grip if I wanted to connect. I began firing several arrows that completely missed their target, and already I could feel the problems from before creeping up on me. Whoever came up with this puzzle must have had quite a sadistic mind to have created something that needed precision in order to complete it. I didn't like the idea of having to be accurate with my aiming. I wouldn't call myself an ace archer, but I wanted to be able to actually hit something. Again, this is where magic would have proven beneficial, but I don't have access to it. Then again, I doubt it would be of much help in a situation like this.

" This isn't working out all that well."

" It's the rotation of the platform which is throwing you off, so you need to adjust the bow accordingly, and aim at the exact moment where your line of sight." Twilight said.

" How do you figure that?"

" Shooting an arrow is just like firing a magic spell from your horn." Twilight answered. It had been a long time since I last used my magic via my horn, but she made a good point. Using this bow was the same as performing a simple spell. By making myself fret over the possibility of failure, all I was doing was damaging my self-confidence.

Focusing my efforts on the unlit torch, I carefully aimed making sure everything was lined up perfectly, and when my line of sight and the torch met each other, I fired an arrow. It sailed across the room, striking through the flame in front of me, and igniting the torch unlocking the door. " See? I told you that using an arrow is like using magic." Twilight said.

" Even though I haven't done that for a long time."

" By the way, there was a switch next to that torch you just lit."

" Now how am I supposed to activate it when it's in such an awkward position?"

" I don't know, but maybe you should try to see if you can. It may give you something." Twilight answered. I decided to wait for the structure to rotate around until my section was directly in front of the door I had just unlocked. I then jumped off, landed safely on the ledge, and walked left towards the switch. It was situated on an awkwardly shaped platform, and there was no means of reaching it through conventional means. That's when I noticed the Deku Flower ahead, prompting me to quickly figure out what needed to be done.

" Looks like I need to change forms."

" I don't see any other way you can reach that switch unless you were to perform a really weird jump, but I would suggest against it otherwise you'll be climbing back up here again." Twilight said. Putting the Hero's Bow away, I took out the Deku Mask before putting it onto my face. This time, I didn't feel any kind of side-effects like I had done the previous times I changed. Was I actually getting used to the transition? Maybe, but I couldn't be sure about it. There was much about this transformation magic that confused me, so trying to figure out an answer might not be in my best interests to know right now.

Upon finishing my transformation, I dove into the Deku Flower before launching myself, and that's when Twilight warned me about something that felt like a dagger to my heart. I had to avoid the torch as Deku can't handle fire--they would burn to a cinder--so I swerved around it before landing on the switch. Pressing it did absolutely nothing, so I turned towards Twilight, a confused look on my face.

" Okay, I'm confused here."

" Maybe you're too light?"

" Excuse me!?"

" I mean, Deku Scrubs are fairly light in weight so they have trouble pushing down on things. You'll need to change back to a human in order to activate the switch. By the way, since we're over here, the only way down is to jump into the water below. Since the poison has dissipated, you can jump without fear of damage." Twilight said. Grabbing on my face, I pulled the Deku Mask off, and my increased weight pushed the switch down, producing a small treasure chest located back where we first entered this room initially.

" Guess we have to backtrack."

" Don't forget about the room that had the Stray Fairy we skipped over. I have a feeling you can free it by bursting the bubble by using a well-aimed arrow." Twilight said.

" I think we'll take care of that one first otherwise I'm likely to forget about it." I said, jumping down from and splashing down into the water below. The water was definitely pure as I was suffering no poisonous effects, but I wasn't about to wait around here to see what could go wrong. I swam over to the former locked door, climbed out, and entered the next room where the water had been purified as well. " I guess every room in the temple that had been affected by poison have been cured, but then I'm not happy about it."

" Why?"

" When we reset time, all of this progress will be undone."

" Yes, I hadn't taken that to account."

" It makes you wonder why we're even doing this? Ultimately, our progress isn't going to matter in the end."

" Maybe, but perhaps there's more that we don't know about yet?"

" This resetting shtick is wearing rather thin."

" An unfortunate reality when you consider we've been re-living the same three days now quite a few times."

" No wonder Termina is such a miserable world to live in. There is so much that borders on being beyond hope, yet somehow we've managed to prevent things from completely spiraling out of control. Sometimes, I wonder if I'm doing the right thing."

" You just have to listen to your heart." Twilight said. True words had never been spoken, but I knew this was something I would need to figure out on my own. Not even my friend and mentor can show me the answer. The Stray Fairy trapped inside of the bubble underwater was much easier for me to spot given the water was clear as opposed to the poisonous water that made things murky.

Even if I were to free it from its prison, it would just float there and most likely drown. That's when I remembered that I could bring it towards me by using the Great Fairy's Mask. Pulling it out from my pouch, I was about to put it on when I realized that I should free the fairy first. I don't think I can aim while wearing a mask on my face.

Firing an arrow, I managed to pop the bubble with one shot, and I quickly put the mask on. The Stray Fairy immediately floated over to me before entering my body, so that meant only five more of them remained. I never really complained whenever one of those fairies did that. I could appreciate them thinking my body was a safe haven, but I didn't know if there would be any long-term side-effects. Once the fairy was safe, I took off the Great Fairy's Mask, and decided to take another look at it.

I loved the shimmering hair this mask had, as it reminded me of my own hair to an extent, but I eventually put it away as I needed to focus on getting through the rest of the temple. I guessed that the time outside was about 9:00pm, so while there was still plenty of time, I did need to pick up the pace in case there were other things I needed to do before resetting time. Upon going back into the previous room, I ran up the ramp to the chest that had materialized, and opened it up revealing another Stray Fairy.

" That was convenient."

" Good thing you activated the switch."

" Now only four fairies remain, and they must all be in the one room we haven't explored yet."

" You could jump across to the other side using the structure or you could use those ladders over there that materialized by activating the switch earlier. Either path will eventually take us to the same general location." Twilight said. Since I had no confidence when it came to rotating platforms given what I just experienced with firing arrows, I jumped into the water which had become purified, and swam over to the platform that housed the ladders.

As I swam across, I began to think about what I had been through so far on this journey. Much like it had been with Hyrule, I struggled to get myself going, but at least I was now confident--kind of--with using weapons. I still needed more practice to wield them without accidentally throwing them somewhere, but I was better off than I was last time.

Once I reached the platform, I got out, climbed up the ladder, and ran around until I reached the now unlocked door. You'd think this could have been simpler had I chosen to use the flower structure, thus saving maybe a few seconds at the most, but I went with the choice that made me the most comfortable. Shrugging my shoulders over going with the easier choice, I entered the next room that had a lot of different things that needed to be resolved.

" What kind of room is this?"

" It's certainly voluminous if that's what you're thinking." Twilight answered The Boss Door was right in front of us situated on a platform, so when I walked forward to see the rest of what this room had to offer, it certainly felt daunting. There were two pillars that had flames on top of them that probably needed to be extinguished, and there was a Stray Fairy trapped in a bubble floating above the one to my left. I was surprised it hadn't succumbed to the intense flames, but then fairies were capable of surviving in all kinds of conditions. Firing an arrow after taking out the Hero's Bow, I popped the bubble that released the fairy, but I immediately donned the Great Fairy's Mask, and it floated over to me before entering my body.

" Three more left, but where could they be?"

" You might want to look down."

" Why?"

" It will give you an idea of what you need to do in this room." Twilight answered. Walking to the edge of the ledge, I could see the entirety of the room that comprised of several platforms with Deku Flowers on them, and one had a Crystal Switch. I've not seen one of those for a long time, and I remembered how those worked When activated, they allow for further progress, but the effect doesn't last very long, so you need to hurry unless you want to get caught because of not being fast enough.

I jumped down without taking into consideration how deep the room was, and I landed on a small raised platform below, my legs buckling in the process. Twilight then scolded me for not using the nearby ladder that was by the wall. " I told you to look down, Sunset!"

" I know."

" At least you can now see where the remaining Stray Fairies are. That begs the question as to what you'll do once you've gotten all fifteen of them. Will you take them back to the fountain before facing the master of this temple, or will you overcome whatever lurks behind that door, and then proceed to the fountain afterwards?" Twilight asked. This was actually a very good question, and one that I hadn't thought about until she mentioned it.

Getting the gift from Adagio could be very helpful when dealing with the boss, but then that could prove problematic ,as I'd need to do a lot of backtracking. After spending a few minutes thinking about what to do next, I decided that I would wait until after the temple had been restored before paying Adagio a visit. " I had a feeling you were going to take that route, Sunset, and it probably had to do with the backtracking, right?" Twilight asked.

" Have you been reading my mind?"

" No, but it was obvious given you've complained about it."

" Believe me, backtracking can get really bad especially when you're in a race against time."

" I'll take your word for it. Once you've saved the remaining fairies, you should deal with those Dragonflies I saw flying around near those flaming pillars. You could have dealt with them before dropping down here, so now you'll need to take care of them to continue onward." Twilight said. Upon realizing that I did see two of them as we entered, I slapped my forehead, a reminder of how my impatience had gotten the best of me. " It looks like you'll need to become a Deku to get through most of the puzzles in this room." Twilight said.

" I figured as much when I saw the Deku Flower below my feet." I sighed, switching out the Hero's Bow for the Deku Mask. It's not that I don't enjoy changing forms, but it was starting to become a little taxing especially since my body undergoes a complete DNA change. I shrink down in size, and lose a lot of weight--not that losing weight was a bad thing mind you.

Once I had become a Deku Scrub, I turned around, and saw just what I had to do in order to rescue the remaining Stray Fairies. I wasn't looking forward to it seeing as they were situated in small alcoves that most likely couldn't be reached without using Deku Flowers, so I sighed, and dove into the one by my feet in what can be considered the start of a real annoying experience.

" Who would have guessed that something as large as this had been hidden below the surface?"

" This world certainly does have a lot of mystery surrounding it, but why did you want to come back here after we discovered her location? I didn't think you were that interested in some ancient building, but then you do possess a strong desire to acquire more knowledge even if you don't have any real use for it."

" Knowledge is what I strive for. The more of it I have, the more I can apply what I learn to all kinds of situations."

" My only interest is power!"

" Not surprising given your background, but that is a worthy goal, yet your methods can be best described as uncouth. I can understand doing whatever it takes to acquire power especially if you don't want anyone else to get it, but going to such extremes? I can't really appreciate such a commitment."

" Are you suggesting that I tone it down?"

" You've already experienced a number of setbacks because of your desire, so you tell me the answer."

" Maybe I have been going about it the wrong way, but I've always been this way ever since she was a young filly. She always strived to become the best unicorn because of being neglected by her family. They never appreciated her talents, so she wanted to prove herself worthy by becoming strong, and one day achieve her ultimate goal, to become an alicorn. You could say that I came into existence through her desire for wanting power. Without that determination to drive her forward, she would have remained a weak little child.

" That explains why you're the way you are."

" What does that mean?"

" You are essentially what she used to be, yet you continue to exist because death was something that you wouldn't allow yourself to succumb to. You're like a ghost. You exist resulting from a desire that keeps you going, and nothing will stand in the way of you wanting to achieve it. Until this goal has been fulfilled, you can never rest no matter what, and while it does sound like a morbid existence, it's something that you have no qualms about."

" No wonder I've grown to like you, as you've been explaining things in a way that makes me understand myself a lot better."

" We're both in a similar situation, yet our reasons for coming into existence are different, as is our goals which we strive for. You desire power and wanting to assume her life because you believe yourself to be the real her. I on the other hand, desire knowledge, as I want to understand everything, and I believe myself to be worthy of knowing every last possibility that exists out there."

" Am I the real Sunset Shimmer, though?"

" You are part of her--the dark half--but still part of her."

" So that makes me the real Sunset Shimmer?"

" In a certain way, it does."

" That makes no sense."

" Confusing, isn't it?"

" I'll say."

" You're both halves of the same hole, and you wish to become the complete form. That is why you were so adamant about killing her, yet you became blinded by this, and taken advantage of. Quite the sad thing really as you got reduced to the role of slave, but now that you've been given a better understanding of the world, everything is different than before. Take our reason for being here as a good example of this. We could go after my significant other at any time, but in truth those undead creatures will not yield, so there is no point in dealing with them. As such, focusing on other things in order to strengthen your resolve becomes beneficial."

" Like what?"

" Becoming stronger by absorbing the magic of others."

" Still can't believe I can do that."

" If she is capable of such a feat, then so are you."

" Now, tell me the reason why we're here?"

" Your significant other was the one who raised this temple from the depths, and I can faintly sense Equestrian magic coming from within, so it's safe to assume that she is inside right now. We're not going to attack her or anything like that. Instead, we'll just observe how the temple rose up in the first place, and perhaps learn something about the local magic."

" Those strange plant-like creatures possess magic?"

" It's not as powerful and potent as what we're capable of, but there is something special about it which could prove valuable."

By the time I finally acquired the remaining Stray Fairies, defeated the two Dragonflies, and spent what felt like several hours going up and down alcoves, I finally reached a point where I could safely say that this ordeal was almost done--if not for what was waiting for me behind the boss door. Its ever growing presence reminded me that a fierce battle was coming up, and it was something Twilight has never experienced before. I mean, she's faced all kinds of monsters back in Equestria, yet those were nothing compared to what exists in this strange land.

" I didn't expect you to struggle so much." Twilight said.

" Those Stray Fairies were located in such horrible places, you knew I was going to complain." I moaned.

" At least you rescued them all."

" So where do we go from here?"

" You'll need to activate that crystal switch on the far side of the room. If what you described about them to me earlier when I asked is correct, it will cause the flames on these pillars to disappear for a few moments. That should be enough time to make it across to where that Deku Flower is. I don't need to say what will happen should the effects of the switch wear off, right?" asked Twilight. I shook my head back and forth several times, an indication that I knew the risks. Forming a bubble in my mouth, and aiming carefully towards my target, I fired it at the switch, barely striking it. The flames disappeared before a ticking sound started to ring out. " What's with the ticking, Sunset?"

" You don't want to know, Twilight." I answered. I dove down into the Deku Flower beneath me, and launched myself over quickly as I didn't want to be caught should the flames return sooner than expected. When I reached the other side, the flames reappeared, and while Twilight insisted on knowing, all I said was the ticking places a lot of pressure on you.

As soon as I regained my composure now that the danger had passed, all that remained was reaching the boss door, yet there were two Skulltulas blocking either side of it. For a last line of defence, I would've expected something a bit more menacing. I needed to land in between them otherwise I'll be on a one-way ticket back down to the area below, and that meant having to make my way back here again.

I had to take the chance. There was no other choice otherwise I'd never get anywhere. I dove into the Deku Flower, launching myself and flying across making sure not to stray from my flight path, as those Skulltula must remain where they are. Luckily for me, my flying skills had gotten better, and I managed to squeeze through without drawing either one's attention. When I landed in front of the door, I pulled on my face, removing the Deku Mask, and changed back to normal. Twilight then felt something coming from the other side of the door, a great evil was waiting, and she was concerned that I wasn't ready to face it.

" I'm not sure if you're ready."

" What other choice is there?"

" You could practice a little before going in? Maybe, go through the temple again just to gain some extra experience?"

" I've faced situations like this plenty of times, Twilight, and this is no different other than the atmosphere. I know that I'm not ready either, as not having done this for a while does make me feel concerned, but we have to go through with it otherwise nothing will be resolved. We need to change things back to the way they were as it's not meant to look like this, and the only way to do this is unravel the mystery behind this game." I answered.

" Yes, you're right, Sunset."

" I do wish that I had a fairy who could revive me were I to die."

" What about me?"

" You don't have the ability to revive those who have fallen in battle. No, your ability is to guide me through this journey by providing all kinds of information that I don't know about. I know it may not seem like much and doesn't help our current situation, but I need that intellect you have, and you need my courage." I answered.

" Shall we go in?"

" Might as well." I answered. Taking out the Boss Key that I picked up a while back, I inserted it into the lock and it tumbled to the ground, unlocking the large door. I opened it and it lead us into a fairly large chamber that had a "unique" presence about it. There were murals on the walls, but I didn't know what they represented. Some of them looked creepy like they were staring directly at me. There were five Deku Flowers strewn about on the floor, but aside from this, there was nothing unusual apart from those murals. " Pretty quiet in here, don't you think, Twilight?" I asked.

" Too much if you want my opinion, Sunset, but I think becoming a Deku Scrub is going to be important otherwise those Deku Flowers serve no real purpose other than being bizarre décor. What I don't understand is where this supposed boss you kept on mentioning is? I'm not sensing anything in this room, so maybe we don't have to deal with anything." Twilight answered.

" No, something is here as it wouldn't be this easy."

" Where do you suppose our mystery boss even is?"

" The only direction I can think of is right above us." I answered, promptly looking up at the ceiling that further reinforced the fact that this room was fairly large. The ceiling was too far away to be able to see what could be waiting up there, but then something else came to mind. " Maybe I should walk forward until something happens."

" Might as well as we do need to get things going."

" I'll just take a single step forward then. If that does nothing, then I'm at a complete loss for words." I said. Following my own advice, I took a single step forward where a noise that sounded like jungle drums began beating all around me. The noise continued getting louder as though someone or something was about to make its presence known, yet where exactly was it coming from? " Twilight, I'm sure you can hear jungle drums, right?"

" Yes, and even though I'm not very familiar with their premise, I definitely hear them. It seems the noise is coming from above, so you might want to look up." Twilight said. I then looked up to see if anything was up there, and my entire body froze in an instant. Something large dropped, and was falling so fast that I couldn't see what it was. The shape resembled a rather tall man--not exactly what I was expecting from a "boss"--yet what happened next was something I wasn't expecting either.

When the man landed with a loud thud on the ground, he bent over and the back of his head suddenly opened up, revealing an eyeball that looked around before his head closed and he stood upright. Seeing such a horrid sight made me feel sick, yet he wasn't finished as he began swinging around a giant sword while thrusting his shield forward before simply standing there, and began chanting some kind of weird language which made no sense.

" Uh, Twilight?"

" Yeah?"

" Care to explain this?"

" This is Odolwa, the 'Masked Jungle Warrior', and how I know his name is something I haven't quite figured out yet. Anyway, he's known by that moniker because of his attire, and that he is wearing a mask on his face." Twilight answered, pointing towards the creature's face. I assumed that was merely his head, and looking at it made me feel uneasy as it certainly looked demonic in nature. " Much of the time, Odolwa will move about, and dance as a means of expressing himself, but don't underestimate him because of his mannerisms. That will only lead to death, and when he dances, all kinds of things will happen. Also, that sword of his is very real, and provides him with quite the reach, so use your shield wisely to block his attacks, but know that his own shield will protect him unless you can use something that can knock him off balance for a while."

" And the Bomb Flowers?"

" What?"

" There are several of these scattered around the room, which has me thinking that he doesn't like being blown up." I answered. Twilight had no idea as to what I was talking about, so I told her that Bomb Flowers were special plants that when picked, can be tossed like a bomb, and will explode after a short period of time. They blow up a lot slower than proper bombs, but they can be used as a substitute as picking one causes another to appear several seconds later. Back in Hyrule, I needed an item called the "Goron's Bracelet" that allowed me to pick them up, yet maybe I won't need it this time around.

" Bombs might do something, but my suggestion would be to attack that eye on the back of his head."

" And how am I supposed to reach that?"

" Knock him down somehow." Twilight answered. Not the kind of response I was hoping for, but I didn't have time to argue as Odolwa began running around in a ridiculous manner. I shouldn't have dropped my guard over his unusual movement, as the moment he came to a stop, he swung his sword, striking me in the chest, and I went sailing across the room. Getting back up, I ran towards him with my own blade, yet he responded by kicking me, and I was sent flying back again before landing with a thud. I got onto my feet before running at Odolwa again, but this time he jumped covering an incredible distance before landing on the other side of the room, and began dancing that felt like he was taunting me.

" Didn't think he could jump like that."

" It's like a defensive mechanism he employs whenever he feels threatened."

" Well, I'll just find my way around it." I said, rushing forward where he jumped over me again before charging forward. His sword struck me in the back with tremendous force, and I slumped to the ground before he jumped over and landed in front of me. I received another kick courtesy of his leg that felt insulting. Upon getting back up onto my feet, Odolwa began running around, and while this was really testing my patience, I realized I wasn't thinking straight. I needed to focus on finding a way to knock him down so that I could hit that eyeball of his, and that's when I had an idea. " What about using arrows to knock him off balance?"

" That might work, but you need to use arrows carefully as you don't have many." Twilight answered. Taking out the Hero's Bow, and putting both my sword and shield away--I didn't want to go through that whole putting a sword in my mouth routine like last time--I fired an arrow thatOdolwa deflected by raising his shield, and that's when he jumped to the other side of the room again before dashing forward, thrusting his sword in my direction, but I merely stepped a few paces backwards to avoid this.

I then fired two more arrows that he blocked just like before, but then he just ran around making me think he was just trying to get me to waste my ammunition. " Shoot an arrow when he drops his guard, but watch carefully as it can be tricky to notice." Twilight said.

The moment Odolwa stopped running, I noticed that he dropped his guard for just a split second, but I didn't think I was fast enough to respond. I ran forward where he kicked me away before jumping to the other side of the room, and swung at me with his sword that nicked me on both shoulders. Had I been a little closer, that would have cleaved off my arms and quite possibly my head. He then began running around, and I immediately got fed up with this action, so I responded by firing another arrow that struck him in the head, causing him to lose his balance.

" He's staggering!"

" Use your sword and attack his legs so that he will eventually fall over." Twilight said. Quickly running towards him before switching to my sword, I slashed at Odolwa's legs a few times, but then he jumped to the other side before dashing forward, his sword thrusting forward in a bid for my head. I just barely blocked this attack by using my shield, but I got pushed back because of how much force he used. Odolwa looked like he was about to run, but instead he just jumped up and down. It looked weird, but I ignored this by firing another arrow that knocked him off balance. I then attacked his legs again where after a few moments, his entire body collapsed to the ground, and the eyeball on his head became exposed. " Hit the eye! Hit the eye right now, Sunset!" Twilight shouted.

" Got it!" I shouted. I struck this eyeball, but for some reason it kept on expanding in size as though it were trying to pop, yet it just stopped short of doing so. Eventually, the eye closed that prompted Odolwa to get to his feet, and he jumped once again--it got annoying by that point--but when he landed, he began jumping up and down in a violent manner, and I wondered what he was planning.

" Watch out for falling rocks!"

" Huh?" I asked, looking up and seeing boulders falling down, and shattering into pieces upon hitting the ground. Some of them hit me, and while the damage was minimal, it was building up, so now I've got to be more careful unless I can recover some health. I noticed at this point that Odolwa constantly kept on chanting his strange language, and despite how annoying it was, there was something magical about it that made me feel impressed--I shouldn't have praised him as I was fighting for my life, and I needed to stop that rock shower. Firing another arrow caused him to lose his balance that, in turn, stopped the rocks, so I ran over and struck his legs, yet he would eventually jump to the over side where something different happened. " Twilight? What is he doing now?"

" It looks like he's calling something from above." Twilight answered. Odolwa danced in place, yet his body movements suggested that he was intentionally hoping for whatever was up on the ceiling to come down. Was he afraid that I was prevailing against him despite having been kicked around, or was there more to his plan than what could be seen?

I would soon get my answer several seconds later when a series of bugs dropped down from the ceiling before landing on the ground and proceeded to scuttle about. I'm personally not afraid of bugs no matter how many of them had been summoned, yet Twilight appeared to have some kind of fear. " Sunset, those bugs are huge! You must get rid of them, quickly!"

" I'm sure they're not that bad."

" Their aim is to get in your way as you'll be too distracted by focusing on Odolwa to even notice them. Don't think this is going to be a one-time thing. I have a hunch that he plans on calling more of them down here should he feel the need to. Be prepared, Sunset, as who knows what else he is going to do," Twilight said. Sure enough, the bugs immediately proved themselves to be distracting almost instantly, so I needed to get rid of them before I lost control of the fight.

Using my sword to strike each bug as I didn't want to waste any arrows, it didn't take long to clear them from my path. However, I lost my focus on Odolwa who struck me in my side with his dash attack, and that part of my body began bleeding. He then jumped over to the other side of the room before running about again.

" Okay, this is getting ridiculous."

" You're getting weaker."

" I need hearts."

" Why not cut down the bushes next to those Bomb Flowers?" Twilight asked. That wasn't a bad idea, but I should have paid more attention to those bugs as some of them dropped hearts, yet I was too busy focusing on Odolwa to have noticed. My opponent began jumping up and down--yet again--that caused more rocks to drop from above, so I weaved my way though before cutting down the closest bushes near me, producing one heart that I took.

" It's better than nothing."

" Maybe you should change into a Deku Scrub."

" The thought did cross my mind, and there are all those Deku Flowers around, but I'll stick with being a human." I said. Deep down, I kept that idea close at hand in case I did need to change forms. Odolwa finished bringing rocks down before jumping and landing right behind me, and swung his sword that missed due to me rolling away. I felt a little queasy after coming out of that--it had been a long time since I last did that technique--but I had no time to complain. I had to focus on winning this battle. Odalwa then stood upright with his arms and legs out, and started chanting like he were calling something else. " Now what is he trying to accomplish?"

" I'm not sure, but it's left him wide open for an attack." Twilight answered. That was true, so I ran over and attacked his legs, but after he jumped over to the other side, I felt something attacking me from all sides. Looking down, my body froze due to be surrounded by butterflies, like the ones that were enamoured by torches from earlier. Odolwa must have summoned them when he performed his chant, so now I had even more problems to worry about. My immediate concern were the butterflies that slowly began injuring me. " Remember those butterflies were attracted to fire? If you can produce some fire of your own, it should distract them and ignore you entirely until you can find a way to get rid of them." Twilight said.

" And where can I find some?"

" Why not those Bomb Flowers? Explosions are akin to fire." Twilight answered. I then slapped my forehead. That was the simplest solution to my problem, yet I was completely ignorant about it. I ran over to the nearest Bomb Flower, picked it up--I must have gotten stronger since my last journey, considering I didn't need the Goron's Bracelet-- and tossed it as far away from me as possible. The butterflies swarmed over to it and they were destroyed when it exploded.

That was one problem solved, but there was still my main issue dancing about before me. I tried going for his legs again, yet he jumped to the other side of the room before I could even unsheathe my sword, and when I attempted to fire an arrow, it appeared to sail right through him as though it no longer had any effect. " Sunset, I think it's gotten to the point where you need to become a Deku Scrub, as why else would all these Deku Flowers be in here?" Twilight asked.

" Guess I've no other choice." I answered. Odolwa was acting erratic, so would he even allow me to change forms? I had no choice but to find out, so I put away the Hero's Bow, took out the Deku Mask and immediately put it on my face. During this transition, I paid close attention to his movements to ensure that he wasn't planning on attacking me while I was unable to defend myself. Once the transformation had finished, Odalwa looked bigger than before, but that was due to shrinking slightly.

I had to remain as a Deku for the duration of the fight. It did pose a problem as I could no longer attack his legs, my spin attack would merely bounce off of his shield. I knew that I couldn't pick up Bomb Flowers, so if those butterflies showed up again, there was nothing I could do to stop the swarm unless I performed a quick-change. Odolwa, in the meantime, had just been running around, so for the moment he didn't attacked, but then an idea sprung into my mind.

That eyeball on his head was his obvious weak-point, and due to him being too tall, I couldn't reach it unless he got knocked over. That was why I attacked his legs, but since that wasn't an option, I needed another approach. That's when an idea came to mind. I checked my pockets and discovered that I still had some Deku Nuts left over. Cutting those shrubs should give me some more, but hopefully it wouldn't come to that. If I was to hit that eyeball, I had to attack from above instead of below.

" Are you thinking of flying?"

" I am."

" Do you have enough Deku Nuts?"

" I think so."

" You haven't used any since entering the temple as far as I'm aware, but I suggest cutting down other shrubs to pick some up before you attack." Twilight said. One good thing about being a Deku was that my spin attack made me faster--all that spinning did make me feel sick--so I could easily avoid Odalwa. Cutting down several shrubs as I spun around the perimeter of the room, I managed to pick up about four Deku Nuts, so I needed to make each one count.

Diving into the closest Deku Flower, I launched myself, flew over to Odolwa--he was just standing there as though he had no idea what was happening--and dropped a nut on top of his head. It made a blinding flash that reacted to his eyeball, and it was enough to cause him to topple over. The instant he crumpled onto the ground, I landed behind him and rushed around to the other side.

" Is his eyeball exposed?"

" It is, so you should be able to damage him by spinning rapidly." Twilight answered. I began spinning into the eyeball causing damage, but it wasn't enough as Odolwa jumped to the other side of the room before summoning more bugs from above. " Spin into those bugs as fast as possible otherwise they'll only serve as a distraction. Also, while you're spinning, make sure you don't run into Odalwa or he runs into you." Twilight said.

I took her advice and began attacking the bugs, but I should have paid more attention to Odolwa. He suddenly began spinning around via crouching, and was somehow able to move towards me, catching me off guard. His sword struck me several times in a row as he continued spinning, and I was sent flying upon his final hit, smacking into the wall.

" Ow..."

" Are you alright?"

" That came out of nowhere."

" Odolwa is struggling to keep upright, so maybe he's getting exhausted?"

" Guess we're both at the ends of our limits."

" Don't you usually 'pony-up' at around this point given how much damage you've taken? I remember what you told me when you transformed into your half-pony state in this kind of environment. It was difficult to control and it made you act irrationally, but you were able to use it to achieve victory." Twilight said.

" I got over that, but I don't think I can pony-up like this, and even if I could, it usually takes a heavy toll on me. My body needs to be barely conscious for that particular change to happen. No, I'm not going to rely on it. Using that means I've failed to rely on my own skills that don't require the use of Equestrian magic. Besides, I don't even know if it will work given how Termina already prevents my regular magic from working." I said.

" Good point." Twilight said. After picking myself up from the floor, I turned around to face Odolwa, who began dancing around. He brought down more boulders, yet not as many that indicated that he was getting tired, so the time to strike was at hand. Well, it would have been had he not decided to use his own spin attack. While I managed to put up my shield, it didn't prevent me from taking some serious damage, leaving me barely able to stand. Knowing that I had to dive into a Deku Flower, I took a gamble by running towards the one in the center of the room, yet this caused Odolwa to spin around yet again, but I managed to dive in just in time.

That's when he summoned more bugs from the ceiling, but he only managed to call down three of them. Either he had run out of them or he was so exhausted, he couldn't concentrate very well. I launched myself into the air, and flew straight towards him, dropping a Deku Nut on top of his head once again. Odolwa collapsed onto the ground, so I dropped down and quickly ran around to his eyeball. It had gotten much larger than before and was even pulsating. Did it mean that I was on the verge of victory? Or, did it mean there was going to be another phase that would allow him to regain his strength? I hoped the former was true, as I wasn't going to last much longer.

Before I could attack him, I had to get rid of the bugs before striking the eye with everything I had. They did everything in their power to get in my way, but precise spin attacks neutralized them. Upon striking the eyeball for the fourth time, Odolwa suddenly stood up, but then he slumped forward and landed flat on his face, remaining completely motionless.

" Now that was intense."

" You almost got killed during all of that."

" Granted, I should have brought along a potion, but in the end I was able to prevail. Still, it was challenging, as I wasn't prepared to handle so many different attacks, but you were right about me becoming a Deku Scrub." I said.

" So what happens now?" Twilight asked. Her answer came when darkness seeped forth from the eye on the back of Odolwa's head, followed by his body burning away to nothing leaving behind something I really needed. However, it was what appeared on top of the central Deku Flower that truly piqued my interest. " That looks like one of those Pieces of Heart you've been picking up." Twilight said.

" This is a Heart Container. It will make me stronger in addition to surviving longer."

" Then pick it up, Sunset, as you could do with that right now." Twilight said. I walked over to where Odolwa had fallen, and picked up the Heart Container, and felt the incredible warmth from before--oh how I missed that feeling. My wounds immediately healed like I had just taken a potion, but then I turned my attention towards what had appeared on top of the Deku Flower. Walking up to it, it gave me quite a surprise as I wasn't expecting to see anything like that.

To Be Continued.

Chapter 16: The Shy Princess

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 14, 2015 (Written), June 20, 2016 (Published)
Chapter 16: The Shy Princess.

" What's that?" I asked.

" It looks like Odolwa's head or at least the mask he was wearing." Twilight answered.

" You did say that he was a 'Masked Jungle Warrior' when you described him at the start of the fight, but I didn't think you were being serious about it. Still, I'm sensing a mask theme here, and this guy was wearing a mask on his face." I said. I then walked closer to where the mask was floating above the Deku Flower, and while I didn't want to pick it up, something in my mind compelled me to do it.

I grabbed the mask before holding it up above my head, yet I sensed a strange aura coming from this mask, as though something used to be contained within it. " Twilight, are you sensing an aura?"

" Yes, I can and it has lead me to come up with an interesting theory."

" Do tell."

" The guardian who protects Woodfall disappeared without a trace, right?"

" That's what Flash Sentry meant although he didn't exactly say what caused her disappearance."

" Well, I think I've got a pretty good idea what happened. The aura coming from this mask feels majestic, ancient, far beyond our own understanding, as though the guardian itself had been sealed within this mask. I know it sounds rather farfetched and I'm just pulling at straws here, but it's the best logical conclusion that I can come up with given what little we do know." Twilight said. Her theory held a lot of weight and made me come to my own conclusion. If this had happened to the guardian of Woodfall, had the same thing happened to the other three? If so, then Starlight had done something really terrible, but why go to such lengths just to play some pranks?

Everything was beginning to make a tiny bit of sense, yet there was much that remained elusive. This mask that Odolwa wore felt weird in my hands, and not because he had been wearing it. It used to be the face of a monster, yet it felt right for me to hold it. He had been defeated and this mask was proof that I had conquered him. I had an incentive burrowing through my mind that compelled me to put the maskon , but I quickly got such thoughts out of my head. The option didn't even become an issue when the mask suddenly wrestled itself from my hands, and began floating upwards of its own volition.

" Um, Twilight?"

" What did you do?"

" I don't know, but it looks as though this mask has its own plans." I answered. Everything then turned white and I blacked out before waking up several minutes later in a strange place. I mean, I'd all kinds of strange locations in the past, but this location definitely was up there as unusual. There was this blue presence all around me caused by the blue sky, and there were strange blue columns that resembled streams of energy, but the weirdest thing had to be me standing on top of a pillar that was small in diameter. That's when I noticed that I was no longer in my Deku Scrub form, and was instead human. Had collecting Odolwa's mask change me back instantly?

" Why did the mask bring us here?"

" Don't ask me, Twilight."

" Something about this place feels magical, like I'm sensing Equestrian magic, but also a different kind of magic that's beyond even my knowledge." Twilight said. That's when she noticed what looked like a giant figure behind one of the streams of energy, and brought it to my attention by bopping me on the head. " Sunset, it appears we're not alone here."

" Where?"

" Behind that stream." Twilight answered. I then looked in the direction she pointed at, and a large figure was standing behind the stream. There was something familiar as I recognized the bodyshape, but I couldn't quite put my finger on it just yet. " That must be the guardian whose spirit was sealed inside of Odolwa's mask, but why does it just stand there without saying anything? I mean, what exactly are we supposed to be doing right now?"

" Good question."

" Why aren't you more interested in this?"

" I know I've seen that particular bodyshape before, but I guess I was fixated on that instead of why this guardian hasn't done anything other than just stand there." I answered. Suddenly, the guardian took a couple of steps forward, and the moment I saw the multi-coloured hair shimmering about, my eyes opened wide with shock. " Twilight! I know who this is! I can't believe that I didn't figure this out sooner."

" Who is it?"

" I thought the answer would be obvious to you, Twilight." I answered, my words making her feel confused. Twilight then took a closer look for herself. When she saw the flowing multi-coloured hair, she immediately came to the very conclusion. " Now do you understand who is standing before us?"

" Princess Celestia!"

" Perhaps or it could be Principal Celestia." I said. This guardian was indeed our mentor, well, my former mentor I suppose due to what happened a long time ago. The point was that we were staring at one of the rulers of Equestria or the principal of Canterlot High, yet there was also some irony at play here. In my last adventure, she portrayed one of the Great Goddesses who created Hyrule, and now she portrayed what appeared to be a giant woman who wore nothing aside from a golden swimsuit.

" What in the world is she wearing? I don't think I've ever seen a dress quite like that before.

" That's a swimsuit, Twilight."

" What!?"

" You've never seen one before, haven't you?

" No!"

" Well, now you have."

" I don't think this is the right time to discuss such matters."

" I'm not surprised at that sudden outburst, but then swimsuits don't exist in Equestria given we usually don't wear clothes. I'll admit that seeing Principal Celestia like this strikes me as odd considering she's usually much more elegant." I said. Seeing Principal Celestia wearing a swimsuit made me feel uncomfortable, but I couldn't blame her for wearing something she had no control over. I doubted she even was bothered and merely has accepted it.

Her swimsuit was gold in colour, and radiated an aura that made it look like it were brimming with power. I had to remember that while this guardian looked like Principal Celestia, she had no recollection of who she really was. Even someone with her immense power wasn't immune to the dark powers of Ganondorf.

" How do we begin a conversation?"

" Maybe I should say something."

" Couldn't hurt."

" Um, hello?" I asked at the top of my lungs, yet Principal Celestia made no response. " I was wondering if you could tell me where me and my friend are? You see, I defeated this powerful monster called Odolwa and left behind a mask that he wore upon being defeated. For some reason, it brought us here to this place and before you." At first, my words fell on deaf ears, but then I heard the sounds of giant footsteps. Principal Celestia had paid attention, and then stepped through the energy stream, showcasing her majestic form.

The golden swimsuit was incredibly lovely--especially where it forms like a turtleneck around her neck--yet I wasn't thrilled with the fact that the outfit was one of those high-cut swimsuits. There was one thing I didn't take notice of due to Principal Celestia's face having been hidden behind the energy stream, and that was the various symbols strewn about her face and arms.

" Those symbols represent ancient writing."

" Gotten that from Tatl's memories?"

" Yes, but don't bother asking me what they mean."

" You were the one who freed my spirit that had been sealed within that mask of darkness?" Principal Celestia asked, her body lurched forward to get a closer look at me. " Yes, you are the one who saved the region that I have sworn to protect, and for that you have my eternal gratitude."

" It was my pleasure."

" There is much that eludes you small human, and it has left you with many questions. While the Great Fairy has taught you some things about this world, there is much that goes beyond even her understanding. While she does possess incredible power, she is merely a fairy, while my fellow giants and I are celestial beings." Principal Celestia said.

" Giants?"

" I am the first of the Four Giants. We are ancient beings who protect this land from anything that dares to threaten it. Whenever the people need our might, we shall appear upon being called. However, something believes us to be a threat, and so we were sealed within dark masks that are worn by powerful creatures who serve as the source of the problems in the four compass points. I take it you desire to save this world from destruction?" Principal Celestia asked.

" Yes."

" What I am about to tell you is essential if you are to save this world. The moon that falls from on high must not be allowed to cause destruction, so you must call on the four of us when the allotted time comes. When you do so, we shall appear just as we have done in ages long past. You must summon us using the song of calling or else this world shall cease to be." Principal Celestia said. She then moved backwards, spread her arms out, and stood in that position as though she were waiting for some kind of signal.

" Sunset, didn't Principal Celestia mention a 'song of calling'?" Twilight asked.

" Yeah, she did say that."

" Maybe we should ask about that?"

" Might as well." I answered, looking up at Principal Celestia. " You said that I need to call on you. How am I to do that?" Principal Celestia didn't respond to my question at first, but then she began to sing a series of notes. Rather than simply sing them twice--like I had experienced many times in the past--she kept on singing.

" It sounds like she's trying to teach you a song."

" Are you sure about that?"

" I think so, but you need to take out the Ocarina of Time right now." Twilight answered. I did as she asked and took it out of my pouch, holding it up to my lips. " Give me a second so I make sense of what Principal Celestia is doing." Twilight floated away towards her and began to memorize the song. She floated back with a confused look on her face, yet she wasn't the kind of person who gave up easily. " I think I know what notes must be played on your ocarina, so try picturing one of those musical bars, and apply that to what I'm about to do."

Twilight began to act like a chime, her way of telling me what notes I needed to play. She repeated the "song" Principal Celestia was singing twice before handing things over to me, but it took me quite some time to memorize the precise notes. After numerous attempts--and a lot of blunders--I finally played the song. It sounded like it was filled with an ancient power, and upon finishing, Principal Celestia stopped with her singing before she lurched forward again.

" Guess that means I did it."

" That took you quite some time."

" Your method wasn't easy for me to follow."

" Sorry, but it was the best that I could do."

" Now all we need to do is figure out where to find the rest of the giants, and free them from their imprisonment. Also, I think we should ask her where I'm supposed to play this song. It's not like it can played out of the blue like most songs." I said.

" Do you think she will answer those questions?"

" I hope so."

" You have learned the song that shall call us." Principal Celestia said.

" So by playing it, you and the other three will appear?"

" Correct, small human."

" Am I right to assume that without the other giants, playing this song will do nothing?"

" The 'Oath to Order' will summon us regardless of whether you have freed us all or not. This song was used long ago by those who once lived here in this world.. It is a power that has been passed down from generation to generation, yet it is a power that has long been forgotten by those who now reside in the four compass points. When you play that song when the time comes, we shall appear and aid you with what needs to be done." Principal Celestia answered. Her words held a ring of truth to them, and made me realize I still had a long way to go before I can save Termina. It then dawned on me that perhaps she was aware that the world shouldn't be the way it was, but first, I needed to ask her about where I was supposed to play this new song.

" You said that I must play this 'when the time comes'. What do you mean by that?"

" The song must be played in the place the people go to worship us."

" In other words?"

" I am certain you already know the answer." Principal Celestia answered. I had a feeling she wasn't going to give me the direct answer, and instead be cryptic. I wasn't sure if I believed what she said about me already knowing, but I had to trust in her judgement. I knew she wouldn't try to steer me wrong even when she doesn't recognize me. With that question out of the way, I decided to ask her the other one and hoped she would be more responsive.

" I have another question for you."

" What is it?"

" I was wondering if you know that things aren't meant to be this way."

" There is truth to your words."

" So you know something is wrong?"

" A strange power did radiate across this land before the current crisis, yet why it happened remains unclear. We giants possess a strong connection to this land, and I can confirm that your concerns are correct. However, we do not possess the power to undo such power as it goes far beyond our own reach, but perhaps this is something you must do on your own, small human. We shall aid you in preventing the looming destruction, but what happens after that will be on your shoulders." Principal Celestia answered. I was expecting her to have said something more positive about what Ganondorf did, yet I suppose it was the best I could get from her.

I also suspected that she was unaware as to who Ganondorf was. My readings of the Hyrule Historia revealed that the Dark Lord had no influence in Termina. As far as the people were concerned, he never existed here. " Now you must return and seek out the next giant who awaits to be freed. Go north beyond the warmth of the land, and into the frigid wastes where life struggles to sustain itself. There, you shall witness first-hand the dark power that holds all in a grip of death." Principal Celestia said.

" Thank you for everything."

" Do not forget the Oath of Order." Principal Celestia said. She then stepped backwards until she disappeared behind the energy stream, and that's when everything turned white. As I was returning, I didn't notice something new happening to Woodfall. A walkway rose up from the depths of the swamp connecting the entrance with a back entrance to the temple.

" Sunset..." Twilight said.

" Yeah?"

" Is this what you had to do in your previous adventure?"

" Pretty much, but I was way more hesitant due to constantly questioning everything. I always kept complaining about what I was supposed to be doing, and over time I slowly grew adjusted to it. Looking back on it now, Spike really deserves a lot of credit for having put up with my whining despite him taking the entire journey before he believed me." I answered

" Sounds to me you two had a memorable time."

" Filled with twists along the way."

" Such as?"

" Like him!" I answered, pointing straight towards a familiar shadow who was very much real this time around as opposed to appearing in my dreams. Ganondorf's silhouette had appeared before me, and I was too afraid to draw my sword and shield. Was this fear? Was I scared to face him out of fear of being killed?

" So, you have awakened one of the protectors as I knew you would, child. You have once again proven yourself worthy of my expectations. Do not think for even a second that this means that you and your little friends are free of my power." Ganondorf said.

" What has brought on this encounter?"

" If you believe that I am here to do battle with you, then know that you can relax. Now is not the time for our contest. No, that shall come when the time is correct. The power I am sensing within you has increased since last we spoke, and yet it can become even greater were you to shed away the light and embrace your true self." Ganondorf answered. Already, I knew he desired for me to go back to who I used to be, but I've no desire to go back to that ever again.

He then smiled at me that I could see in the form of a white marking appearing on the bottom of his silhouetted face. That meant he knew what my answer was going to be. His ability to foresee the future--and apparently read minds--was truly immense as it meant there was nothing I could hide from him.

" You know what I'm going to say."

" The light continues growing inside of you... How amusing, and yet misguided at the same time." Ganondorf said, his eyes glowing bright yellow. He was using intimidation to frighten me, and it worked because I was shaking like a leaf. " Darkness is a power that you once embraced, child. You would consume it without hesitation and do anything necessary no matter the cost to claim it. You would even destroy the strongest emotions for it. Is it no wonder that the she-demon you became still exists? Or, perhaps that creature is merely a shell of what was once a powerful being?"

" I'm never going back there!"

" You cannot escape the taint."

" Taint?"

" When you first committed an act of darkness, the day you betrayed your teacher, your heart became corrupted, tainted with evil, and that taint still exists even now despite everything you have done to move on from the past. Nothing you do will ever remove this taint, so if you believe that you can, you are merely deluding yourself. And I have not forgotten the likes of you, Princess Twilight Sparkle. There is a taint of darkness within your heart as well." Ganondorf answered. His gaze sharply turned towards Her Highness, and she quickly darted behind my hat to shield herself from his sight.

" What does this taint do?"

" The more evil acts you perform, the darkness grows stronger until it has consumed your very being. How long it takes depends on the willpower of the one tainted. Should you possess a weak will, it would not take long for you to become corrupted. If the opposite is true, you would last much longer, and perhaps even control such darkness." Ganondorf answered. I was starting to understand where he was coming from with his choice of words. Even though I've changed my ways and become a much better person, the darkness within my heart still existed. An example would be whenever I lose my temper. That must be the darkness within me coming forth.

I guess no one can be considered purely good unless they never once committed an act of evil, but what did he mean about Twilight having a taint of evil inside of her heart as well? I've known her for a long time, and not once had she ever done anything that can be viewed as evil, yet maybe she did some things before we met or after she became a princess in Equestria. Come to think of it, I didn't believe I ever asked her if she ever did something that constituted as having been malicious.

" Okay, so I'm not perfect!"

" Try as you might, the darkness within cannot be snuffed out by heroics."

" Something just occurred to me, Ganondorf. Why did you mention the she-demon?"

" You already know the answer, child, so there is no need for me to explain." Ganondorf answered. My suspicion was right after all. The ones I sensed earlier who were in possession of Equestrian magic were indeed Sunset Demon, yet who was the other one? I quickly slapped my forehead when it became apparent as to the identity of the other demonic creature. It had to be Twilight's--the human and not the pony at my side--form she took on when she was consumed by magic, yet how could that form even exist considering I freed her from it when I extended my hand out in friendship? " Darkness is a force that can never be destroyed! It must exist alongside light, as both forces clash against one another for supremacy, yet those who fight on the side of light strive to blight out evil."

" Light and darkness... Existing together?"

" It seems the teachings of the one who guided you are false, but then that is not surprising. Already, your vision of a world where only light exists crumbles apart, yet it will be interesting to see how such convictions will stand when you see the truth. I am done with you for now, child, but do not get complacent. The next time we meet, we shall have our contest. Know that I shall not hold back, so you must fight as though your very life hangs in the balance." Ganondorf answered. He then began to laugh before his silhouette became consumed in flames, and all I could do was cover my eyes as everything went white before losing consciousness.

" Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" Ohhhh!"

" I see you're awake!"

" Twilight?"

" It's me, and you've been out for a couple of hours, at least." Twilight answered. I immediately got back onto my feet, and found myself in another room that was different from the one we were prior to Odolwa's mask taking us to see Principal Celestia. There was nothing of interest apart from branches hanging on the ceiling that served as support beams to keep the ceiling from collapsing. Upon looking around a little more, it turned out the branches were connected to an old tree that looked as though the temple had been built around it.

" Are we still in the temple?"

" I think so, but we should look at the map just to be sure." Twilight answered. I took it out from my pocket, unfurled it, and took a closer look at it. We were still in the temple, but in a room that was completely isolated. " The only way we can get out of here is by going that way, but I'm happy to announce that all fifteen Stray Fairies have been accounted for. We can pay a visit to the Fairy Fountain where I'm sure you'll receive some kind of reward."

" We can't leave just yet."

" Why not?"

" The Deku Princess is still missing, and we need to find her to save the monkey."

" Right! We've got to prove his innocence before the Deku Scrubs wrongfully punish him. Where do you suppose she could be?"

" I don't know, but we don't have much time." I answered. Both of us then began to think about a possible location this Deku Princess could be located, but we were drawing blanks as we combed every room aside from this one. She could be standing behind us, but what were the chances of that? That's when I heard a strange shuffling coming from behind me.

" Someone is behind us."

" It could be the Deku Princess."

" Or a powerful monster that has been placed here to kill us were you to overcome Odolwa." Twilight said.. While her suggestion did sound pretty ridiculous, I couldn't rule it out because I'd been in similar situations before. Drawing my sword and shield, I turned around to face whatever made the noise, and it turned out that the only thing behind me was the tree. It had what looked like foliage-like bars covering up an entrance to a small alcove within.

" Is that supposed to be a cage?"

" If so, then it's not the most practical one I've seen."

" Whatever made that sound is coming from within, so let's see who's in there." I said. Walking carefully until I was right next to the foliage, I cut it down with a single slice of my sword. Inside of the alcove was nothing apart from a young Deku child who looked at me with a confused expression in her eyes--I had a look of shock on my face. I was staring at someone Twilight and I knew very well, yet I guessed I shouldn't have been surprised that this was the role that she ended up portraying given who she portrayed in Hyrule.

Standing in front of me was Fluttershy, this time in the form of a Deku Scrub, who wore a beautiful dress that had her cutie mark on the front of it. I made a quiet nod to Twilight that she understood immediately. While this princess resembled our quiet friend, she had no recollection of the human world, so we needed to approach her in the proper manner.

She looked surprised that someone had managed to come all this way, so hopefully I could speak to her without any problems. What I should have done first was figure out how I was supposed to bring her back to Tree Hugger, as I doubted anyone among the Deku even knew where she was.

" Wha? Who are you?" Fluttershy asked.

" I'm Sunset Shimmer, and this is my friend, Twilight Sparkle."

" Those are strange names for both a human and a fairy, but pay me no mind. Did you say your name was Sunset Shimmer? Strange, but it feels as though I know you from somewhere, but maybe I've just been stuck in this horrible place for far too long." Fluttershy said. Her sudden outburst indicated that she may have retained some of her memories, yet were nothing more than a fleeting moment.

Twilight then bopped me on the head as a reminder that I could potentially bring out her memories were she to do something that revolved around her Element of Kindness. That meant bringing her back to the Deku Palace to save the monkey, but it seemed she had something else on her mind. " Um... Why did your friend just hit you on the head without a moment's hesitation?" Fluttershy asked.

" She wanted to remind me of something."

" I see."

" There's no need for you to worry about it, Fluttershy, as it's something I forgot about." I said, quickly covering my mouth because of saying her real name as opposed to Your Highness. This blunder prompted Twilight to slap her forehead.

" Fluttershy? That's quite a cute name, Sunset Shimmer, but it means nothing to me. I prefer to be called 'Her most Royal of Highnesses of the Deku Kingdom, Daughter of the mighty Deku Queen'. Oh! Where are my manners! You went and introduced yourself, and I haven't done the same in return to you. My mother would be ashamed if she were to have witnessed my behaviour. I am the Deku Princess! Pleased to meet you. Now, let me guess as to the reason you came all this way." Fluttershy said. It felt weird seeing her speak in such a manner given how she was shy, yet Twilight just stood there, jaw dropped because of seeing our friend acting like, well, acting like a princess.

" The reason I've come here--"

" No need for you to say why as I have already figured it out, but I do apologize if I stole some of your thunder." Fluttershy said. She was also apologetic, so that was a relief on my heart. " Were you, by chance, asked by that monkey to come save me?" Her question took me by surprise, for how did she know that I had met the monkey?

" How did you know?"

" Aha! Just as I suspected! You see, your body smells a little bit like monkey." Fluttershy answered. Did she seriously just say that!? I felt offended that she would say something so horrible, but then it compelled me to actually sniff my own body. I almost felt like throwing up because I smelt something foul, the odor that came from the monkey. Fluttershy was obviously not affected by such a smell because she been interacting with that particular monkey, but I still felt offended by her remark, and I sure that she knew this. " Oh my! You appear upset that I said that! I am so, so sorry for making such a horrible analogy. Please, can you ever forgive me for saying that?"

" Of course I forgive you."

" That is a huge relief."

" I did encounter the monkey who travelled here to this temple with you, and he taught me the song that would allow a Deku to gain access, yet I'd rather not go into complex details." I said.

" So the monkey made it back fine after all. That's good. I was worried that when I didn't come home, my people would think that monkey had kidnapped me! I know that my mother would never suspect anything of the sort, but her advisors would definitely make such a radical suggestion. They might even convince my mother to go so far as to punish the poor monkey." Fluttershy said. She then began to laugh thinking that the idea of the monkey being punished was nothing more than a joke, but I knew the truth. I needed to explain things so that she could understand.

" I don't know how I'm going to say this, but..."

" Um, do you have something I must know?"

" About the monkey being punished. You see, when I last saw him, he had been tied up, and the advisors were insisting--"

" Don't tell me... are you serious!?" Fluttershy asked. Judging from my lack of a response, she knew what I said was true. " Is mother actually doing that!? No, she would never condone such actions. No, this has to do with her advisors! They are always trying to convince her to be more aggressive, yet she always resists their efforts. They always were ambitious what with their desire to perhaps one day have an even greater sphere of influence over my mother. Oh yes! I've known about their desires for quite some time."

" They sound like they're trouble."

" Um, yes, they do make hasty decisions. W-Well, we haven't any time to lose. We must get to the Deku Palace before that innocent monkey is punished. Um, I have a small confession to make, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer. I'm not comfortable with travelling great distances, so you will need to carry me back to my mother. I'm really sorry for suddenly placing such a burden on you." Fluttershy said. Was she serious? I had to carry her around on my back while avoiding monsters? I wasn't liking where this was going, but it looked as though I didn't have much of a choice. Given her size, she wasn't that heavy, but it would slow me down. " Um, are you having second thoughts?" Fluttershy asked.

" I don't think I can carry you on my back as I do need to be able to fight."

" Yes, that would be a problem, so here is another option you might consider. Um, could you please find something to carry me in so you can take me to the Deku Palace? I don't mind tight places, so surely you have something you can put me in to carry me." Fluttershy said. Did she just suggest that I use a bottle, and put her inside of it?

I couldn't even imagine how wrong that sounded, but I didn't have many options available at that point. " If you have anything at all, then, by all means, take it out and use it right here! Um, I know it sounds strange, but it is the only alternative we can go with otherwise it would mean sending some Deku Scrubs to bring me back, and that would take too long. Also, I doubt the advisors would believe your story, and possibly throw you into the dungeon." Fluttershy said.

" I do have an empty bottle." I said, taking it out of my pocket.

" Then use it without hesitation."

" Are you sure?"

" Yes, so please scoop me up into your bottle, and deliver me to my mother as soon as possible." Fluttershy answered. I didn't feel comfortable about doing that to her. Not only did her request sound dangerous, it also sounded ridiculous. How could she even fit into a bottle anyway? It's not like she could magically shrink herself down to a small size and enter it of her own accord.

" I'm not sure about your idea personally. Your mother might not like it."

" It will be fine Mrs. Sunset Shimmer, so don't let such a thing trouble you."

" There is one thing--"

" Um, what's that?"

" Before I can deliver you to your mother, I need to take a slight detour by paying a visit to the Fairy Fountain. I have to restore the Great Fairy back to normal whose body was shattered into pieces by someone who possess terrifying power." I answered.

" That is acceptable." Fluttershy said. That went better than expected. I was certain she would complain about me wasting time because the life of that monkey was hanging in the balance, she was okay with it. She must have known that restoring the Great Fairy was important to her people. I took out the empty bottle and walked over to her, sweat dripping down from my forehead. I just couldn't accept what I was about to do, but it was the only way to transport her.

When I scooped her up, Fluttershy disappeared and was inside my bottle. I didn't understand how she managed to pull that off, but she had, and all I could do was accept it for what it was. Hopefully, she wouldn't get sick along the way as I was going to be doing a lot of running and jumping given the location of the Fairy Fountain. Why have it in such an inconvenient location?

I accepted the fact that only Deku were allowed in this part of Woodfall, but couldn't the Great Fairy have at least accommodated for a non-Deku? " Ungh! Mrs. Sunset Shimmer! There's nuh-no time to lose! Huh-Hurry! Take me to the palace as soon as you can!" Fluttershy said, her voice struggling with the small space. Knowing that speaking with the Great Fairy--Adagio--would most likely take up a lot of time, I had to get to her fountain quickly. That's when I noticed Twilight looking down at Fluttershy's current predicament. Was she truly concerned with the arrangement? Or, was she thinking of something else?

" What do you make of this?"

" This is just too weird." Twilight answered.

" I'm surprised Fluttershy was able to squeeze into my bottle without any trouble."

" Even I don't know how she did that, and I'm the one who relies heavily on logic to understand things. Judging from what she just said however, she won't be able to hold out for very long, so we need to speak with Adagio before making our way over to the palace before it's too late. I think taking shortcuts are in order, Sunset, so that means jumping down back in the Southern Swamp area to get to the palace sooner rather than later. We'll cross that bridge when we get to it, so for now we should return those Stray Fairies." Twilight said.

" Flutt--Your Highness." I began, quickly fixing my blunder. " What do you know about the Great Fairy of the swamp?"

" Um, she has watched over our land for as long as anyone can re-remember. While the guardian protects us, the Great Fairy has taken on a more ac-active role in ensuring we Deku are kept safe. My fellow Deku often question why she chooses to protect all creatures that call the swamp their home, but I know they deserve the same treatment that we receive." Fluttershy answered.

" It sounds like you have a different way of thinking."

" Yes, and I hope that I will continue to bridge the gap between the Deku and the other creatures once I succeed my mother. I should also mah-mention about the four forces that make up our land. Termina possesses four forces that all beings strive for, yet some focus on certain ones based on their perspective." Fluttershy said. It sounded like she was talking about something similar to what I learned during my adventure in Hyrule. That world revolved around the three forces that made up the Triforce: Power, Wisdom, and Courage. Was that also apparent here? But, what could the fourth force be?

" So the Great Fairy of Woodfall represents one of those forces?"

" Yes. A long time ago, we used to have a different Great Fairy, one who represented the force most believe in. Sh-she tried her best to guide the Deku on the right path, but they grew arrogant over wanting to fight the other tribes. She would leave us and travel to the cu-cold recesses of the north, yet we weren't without guidance fah-for very long. The Great Fairy who resided in the north chose to come here, believing that her knowledge could serve us better than offensive muscle." Fluttershy answered.

" I didn't think that was possible."

" My people can be truly stubborn."

" I'm sure they're not all bad."

" My father was one of the most tyrannical Deku you could imagine. His father was the same as was his father before him. Every Deku King for the past few hundred years has ruled with merciless intent, stemmed from their boisterous ego. My mother was able to soothe my father's tormented heart, and he changed his ways months before he wilted. She has since adopted a kind, benevolent stance that has been challenged by her advisors." Fluttershy said. I offered condolences to her unfortunate loss, yet she waved her hand and told me that it wasn't something I should allow to affect my own judgement. " The Deku have always been war-like out of the need for self-preservation of our species. Wah-Why do you think the other tribes look down on us so? We abused their kindness and now they treat us like parasites. I don't blame them for that."

" Do you think their opinions will change?"

" That is my wish when I assume the throne. No-Now we must hurry to the Great Fairy. Um, I believe I've wasted some of your precious time as well as my own. Again, do not worry about my current arrangement. Ple-Please hurry and visit her." Fluttershy answered.

I wasn't sure how I felt about having Fluttershy travel about in a bottle, yet I had no other choice. Sighing, I left Woodfall Temple in the only direction available to me, and was back outside where a lengthy walkway stood before me. It must have risen from the depths of the swamp, yet I wasn't going in that direction, at least, not yet. The fountain was in the opposite direction, so that meant having to go back the long way around, unless I were to warp which would save me some time.

Deciding that warping would save me some time, I took out the Ocarina of Time, and prepared to play the Song of Soaring. As I was doing this, I began to wonder what might be happening elsewhere in Termina. Despite only having visited one region, in addition to Clock Town, my curiosity proved too strong to simply ignore. I knew that whatever was going on, I was going to become a part of it.

" Whew! That was much harder than expected!"

" Who knew that lugging around that casket would prove to be a real hassle for us? Besides, whose bright idea was it to have the burial mound right up here on top of such a high plateau? The elder could have just said to bury her with the rest of our fallen brothers in the crematorium behind the village, yet he was insistent on having her buried here high above everything."

" The Great Darmani was a hero among us!"

" I know, but why go to all this trouble?"

" You do make a valid point, yet she was the greatest among us Gorons for a reason. Despite being rather stoic at times, and almost feeling like she were a ghost, she proved herself by fighting off against those wild monsters that stumbled into the village. I guess the quiet ones are capable of doing great things when necessary to protect those they care about."

" So why bury her up here?"

" The elder always said that those among us who did great things are buried in a place of honour upon their death, so that their spirits can continue watching over us from. Whether there is any truth to it remains to be seen because no one has ever died, and come back to life in order to share such an experience. The Great Darmani was to become the next chieftain of our tribe so that the elder could finally step down to focus on caring for his son, but fate had other plans."

" Do you think she would've accepted?"

" Without a doubt. Darmani always thought about being our leader, yet it never came up what with her constantly having to fight against the evil that threatened us."

" Such a tragic loss, Brother."

" The Goron pride has been shattered."

" Why did she have to die?"

" It's this accursed cold snap we're having!"

" Ever since that strange child wearing that mask came to our village several days ago, the weather around here has gotten even more unbearable, and we're already used to such cold conditions around this time of the year."

" Darmani said that something was going on at Snowhead Temple. That was where the child had gone, so she took it upon herself to investigate to find the source of the cold. Of course, everyone in the village knows what happened next, which is why we're up here burying her casket in this special graveyard dedicated to her. Morale around the village has been pretty abysmal ever since she passed away, and the cold weather continues to worsen, not to mention our food supplies have been running low. If this keeps getting worse, we're bound to starve to death or even freeze were that to happen instead."

" I thought Biggoron was supposed to be watching the temple?"

" He was, but no one has seen him lately."

" Do you suppose he witnessed the Great Darmani's last moments?"

" Maybe, but only he knows for certain."

" Whatever became of the elder?"

" He decided to check out the temple himself believing that someone had to do something, but he hasn't been seen in several days."

" I know that his age does slow him down tremendously, but not even the elder would be taking this long. Yet, because of his extended absence, everyone else has been trying to keep his son from getting worse, but so far their efforts have failed to raise up his spirits."

" Do you think this is the end?"

" For us, or for this world?"

" What's the difference?"

" If you were referring to us, I'd say we will be wiped out of existence within a matter of days should things continue on as they are, but if you were referring to the world coming to an end, we have about two more days before the moon crashes. I hear that the impact will be so severe, no corner of Termina will be safe, so all those who plan on fleeing are merely wasting their time. Nothing can be done to stop this impending disaster, and those who think they can make a difference are kidding themselves by believing that a miracle will occur."

" I guess so."

" On another note, the Mountain Smithy has had his business come to a halt because of the cold making it impossible for him to do his work."

" Can you blame him? Snowhead is freezing in places that haven't experienced such conditions in centuries!"

" We really could do with his kiln being active."

" It got frozen over when the cold came, so now all he does is sit around and mope all day."

" A shame no one found any hot spring water."

" Um, there was the one that the Great Darmani is buried under, but we had to cover that up with the grave marker."

" Our own blunder has doomed us."

" Have you figured out how we're supposed to get back down, Brother? After all, we Gorons don't like heights all that well, and for some reason I can't see the pathway we used to make our way up here."

" The path is gone?"

" Yep!"

" Then it appears our fate has been sealed, Brother. If we can't find our way back down, we'll freeze to death up here. Considering that the world will be coming to an end within the next two days, I suppose freezing would mean not seeing the end of everything."

" How long do we have?"

" Maybe several hours, provided we stay out here."

" Are you suggesting that we go instead the burial site of the Great Darmani? No one must desecrate her grave under any circumstances! We Gorons know that would be a violation of our most sacred laws, and would bring shame to her spirit who even now lingers in death. I have a feeling Darmani can't rest in peace as what is befalling us here was something she gave her life to see resolved, so she must be in a terrible predicament where all she can do is watch from the beyond."

After playing the Song of Soaring, I warped back to the small platform on the other side of that housed the Deku Marker. I had to essentially make my way over to the Fairy Fountain by taking an alternate route using the Deku Flowers. The monsters had since re-spawned, but I had enough magic to take care of them by using bubbles. When I put on my mask and assumed my Deku form, the reaction I received from Fluttershy was to be expected.

" Gasp! You can become one of us?" Fluttershy asked.

" It's rather complicated." I answered.

" I should say so considering you changed from a human into a Deku just so that you could make your way over to the fountain. Um, didn't that hurt? I mean, your body changing must have been very painful to go through." Fluttershy said. Hearing her say that brought several tears to my eyes. Someone else aside from me understood that changing forms was very taxing, and while Twilight had often asked me if I was okay upon changing, I pretended that I was okay. In truth, my body struggled for a few minutes every time I changed.

At first, I was afraid that Fluttershy would inform her people that I was not a real member of their tribe, and that I used a powerful magic to assume the guise of a Deku. She happened to notice my disappointed expression, prompting her to inquire about it. " Um, Yu-you seem upset about something, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer. Did I say something that has offended you? If so, then I apologize for making you unhappy."

" Was I that obvious?"

" You may be a powerful heroine who possesses strange magical powers, but even someone of your nature is easy to read based on the emotions that seep forth from your face. Um, you don't have to explain anything because it's not my place, but if you want to tell meh-me, I am willing to listen." Fluttershy answered. I then smiled and revealed certain points regarding my mission. I had to refrain from telling her about certain points not because she would believe them or not--I doubted she would even believe me--but rather because some things aren't meant to be known.

I couldn't tell Fluttershy that I had the power to go back in time. Manipulating time was something that no pony in Equestria ever did due to how dangerous it was. Her Highness had told me of such matters after she came through the portal several days after the Friendship Games concluded. Starlight Glimmer, the one who has caused this world to unravel, used time magic in her bid to change history. No pony had achieved what she had done, and she could have shattered the very fabric of Equestria's existence.

Luckily, Her Highness was able to get through to her before the damage had become permanent. Time magic was viewed as being too unwieldy. Even Star Swirl the Bearded, who created some of the most powerful time magic to have ever existed, never attempted to use such magic.

Once I finished with my explanation, Fluttershy went quiet for a moment, and I feared that she may have succumbed, but in truth she had been thinking about my words carefully, and attempted to express her deepest sympathies. " I-I am so sorry that you have to endure so much, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer all in a valiant attempt at saving this world."

" It's something that I must deal with as a result of destiny. I never wanted to have to do this, but fate dealt me this hand, so now I have to see it through to the end. Let me be clear with you for a moment, Your Highness. I have no intention of allowing anyone else to go through what I've seen." I said.

" Such an awful experience."

" And it will only get worse before it gets better."

" Um, if it's any consolation for you, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer, if I wasn't stuck in this bottle right now, I'd give you the biggest hug you've ever felt. I don't mean it out of common courtesy, nor would I take my status into consideration. You must feel alone constantly what with having to fight against unspeakable horrors on your own, but know that if you ever need some kindness, I can provide that comfort even when I don't understand the full consequences." Fluttershy said.

" That's really nice of you."

" Heh-Everyone deserves kindness to keep them going through such tough times, and you could definitely u-use some to help you through the tough times." Fluttershy said. It would soon become clear to me that Fluttershy had just showed me some kindness, a representation of her Element of Harmony, so it looked like my theory was correct. My friends' Elements had survived the transition between the human world and Termina to some capacity, yet their memories were a different matter altogether. They vaguely remember how things should be, but what they've become here had taken permanent hold over their minds.

If only there were a way for them to remember these experiences without being forced to forget them every time I reset things back to the beginning. I'd thought about it before, but that was because Pinkie caught me off guard with her laughter, yet I shrugged it off as a coincidence and nothing more. Now, after seeing Fluttershy's display of kindness, I didn't think it was coincidental, but rather the result of her Element wanting to come through in a place that's foreign to it.

But this was only two of the five Elements that our friends possessed. I didn't include Her Highness as she already knew what was going on, and I couldn't include myself due to not having my own Element.

For the next several minutes--it felt like forever due to how much got in my way--I used the Deku Flowers to fly from platform to platform all while taking care of any Mad Scrubs and Hiploops that attacked. Despite having grown a little stronger after my fight with Odalwa, these simple creatures continued to give me problems. Perhaps I needed some extra training at that Swordsman School or a better grasp at fighting as a Deku Scrub. Fluttershy didn't think that way at all. She was very impressed with how I conducted myself.

" I see that you can use magic as a Deku."

" It allowed me to overcome some hard challenges."

" You should feel honoured that you have been blessed as such. Most Deku never acquire magic and grow jealous of those who were fortunate enough to receive such a gift." Fluttershy said.

" Thank you for your kind words, Your Highness."

" Never allow jealousy to consume you."

When I finally reached the Great Fairy's Fountain, I decided to enter as a Deku Scrub instead of a human. I didn't know way, but something compelled me to stay in my current form. Inside of the fountain resembled the one from Clock Town, yet the assortment of fairies that hung out in the centre looked confused as I approached. They were the same green colour as the Stray Fairies I acquired throughout the temple, so I knew that I was in the right place.

The moment I got close enough, the Stray Fairies exited my body, and merged together with their fellow fairies before Adagio appeared in front of us. Unlike her previous self who had the orange coloured hair she was known for, this version had green coloured hair. She was even wearing a green gown as opposed to the plain white one from before.

" Welcome Tatl, and kind, young one! I am the Great Fairy of Wisdom! I thank you for returning my broken and shattered body to normal. It also seems that you have the princess of the Deku Tribe present, so welcome to you as well." Adagio said.

" Things should be back to normal now that the guardian of this region has been rescued."

" Yes. I sensed that the guardian had returned when a great power emerged from the temple. I also know that you were the one who freed it from its imprisonment. Are you surprised that I knew the guardian had been sealed inside of a dark mask? You need not be for there is nothing in this swamp that does not elude me. However, my own judgement was my downfall when the masked child came. I believed her to be a curious little imp, yet I did not realize that she possessed such terrifying power. Before I had a chance to stop her, she shattered my body to pieces and took half of the Stray Fairies to the temple." Adagio said.

" That explains how they got there."

" I was powerless without the rest of my pieces, but now you have fixed what had been broken."

" Why is Starlight Glimmer doing this?"

" An odd name to be sure, but I shall answer your question. It seems the masked child is lashing out against the guardians because she feels they have wronged her, and her great power makes her perform terrifying deeds that she does not fully comprehend. Why they have wronged her I do not know, but perhaps one of the remaining guardians may have an idea. What I do know is the masked child continues to grow in power. Were that power to reach its maximum potential, this world would succumb to a terrible fate." Adagio answered.

" Then I need to awaken the other Giants, and stop the moon from crashing."

" That alone will not save this world." Adagio said. Her words immediately crushed my spirit. I was expecting her to say something along the lines of "by calling the guardians from their respective places of rest, you can prevent disaster from coming", but it sounded like there was more that needed to be done. " Even if the guardians were to succeed in their anointed task, the masked child would still be on the loose, and can easily begin a new disaster."

" How am I supposed to combat something like Majora's Mask?"

" There is a way, but it involves collecting something legends say is filled with a similar darkness." Adagio answered. That didn't sound all that good as darkness heavily influenced me during my younger day, but it sounded like I had to embrace this particular darkness. " There exists a mask somewhere in this world that possesses a power far beyond mortal minds can comprehend. Even the guardians cannot begin to fathom the power contained within it. However, one simply cannot find this mask anywhere. The same legend states that when one has collected all known masks that exist in this world, the power shall become theirs."

" How many masks are there?"

" I would say about two dozen."

" Two dozen!?"

" It may sound like a steep task, young one, but this mask is one that not anyone is able to wear. The dark power can corrupt any who try to control it, so unless you become one with the darkness, any attempt to control such power would result in your death. You would also need to possess a willpower stronger than any mere mortal. If you desire to defeat the masked child, obtaining this dark mask may be your only chance at securing victory." Adagio said.

" Isn't there any other way?"

" You could overcome these forces through your own abilities, but your success would be slim at best."

" So where can I find additional masks?"

" There is a mask in the possession of one who commands fierce loyalty to her sovereign, and awaits in a place that can be accessed from the palace. I am certain that you know who this person is." Adagio answered. I didn't know why she wanted to be cryptic, but it wasn't difficult to figure out. She gave it away when she mentioned the word "loyalty". This mystery mask was in the possession of Mrs. Cheerilee,

While I wanted to inquire about other masks, I needed to return Fluttershy to Tree Hugger before doing anything else. Just as I was about to thank Adagio and take my leave, she suddenly began talking about an another mask." There is another that can be found in the swamp, but you do not possess the appropriate equipment to claim it."

" What do I need to get it?"

" You will require magical fire, but not from your own body. The fire you seek can soar through the sky." Adagio answered. Her words were again cryptic, but I didn't know what she was talking about. What I did understand was that I needed more items than what I currently possessed, so for now collecting that other mask wasn't possible. Adagio didn't mention a location for this other mask, but my mind came up with one idea. I recalled passing by the cave entrance that had the cobweb covering it.

If I had to go there to claim a mask, then it would have to wait until I could acquire what I need. Adagio then brought something else to my attention. " Kind young one! I shall now give you a reward for returning my shattered body to normal. It shall prove most beneficial to one who uses magic as often as you do. I will enhance your magic meter, so receive it now!" Adagio said, thrusting her hands out. She began to blow a powerful wind in my direction that enveloped me in a green haze, and it felt invigorating--like I could do anything. I definitely needed this gift because I had this feeling things were only going to get harder from here.

To Be Continued.

Chapter 17: Monkey Rescue

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 17, 2015 (Written), June 27, 2016 (Published)
Chapter 17: Monkey Rescue.

After being surrounded by the green aura for several minutes, I felt something inside of me, and extended out my arms. Then the feeling disappeared just as quickly as it began, but a new sensation had been unleashed, and one which felt familiar.

" What did you do?" I asked. Technically, I already knew what happened, but I wanted to ask anyway in case it was a different experience than before. Adagio had since lowered her arms down before levitating down to the ground, and I finally got to see what she looked like in her current attire up close. During my previous encounters--including Hyrule--she never came that close to me, as though she were cautious about my intentions. The dress reminded me of what she wore during the Battle of the Bands, but was more flowing and simplistic as opposed to the vibrant and crazy colours she had.

" I have enhanced your magic power, kind young one. You can now use twice as much magic as you could before, but know that you must refill such power otherwise it could become difficult to achieve success. I can sense an innate ability within you that has been blocked by this world's chaotic energies, but perhaps this was for the best." Adagio said.

" What do you mean by chaotic energies?"

" Termina is a world that is currently embroiled within a veil of chaos courtesy of the dark power that has infected every last trace of the land. This energy renders most magical powers unusable, yet some are able to be used. What you possess cannot be used, and I can sense frustration in your mind, but do not see this as a weakness. Someone like you has a strong affinity for magic, so learning to use a different kind of magic can prove to be most beneficial." Adagio answered. In her own way, she told me that not having access to my Equestrian magic wasn't necessarily a bad thing, and that the magic of Termina could be just as effective.

During my adventure in Hyrule, I relied on my own natural magic often, and shunned the Hylian magic that had been presented to me by the Great Fairies. This was my chance to make up for that mistake by using what this world had to offer, so now I looked forward to finding out what other kind of magic existed in this world. I'm sure Twilight would understand my decision, but I would cross that bridge later when the time came. For the time being, Fluttershy still needed to be returned to Tree Hugger in order to save that monkey.

" This may sound like a sudden question, but what do you know of Snowhead?"

" The mountains that reside in the northern reaches? I am afraid that I know very little about the region. I am aware that you know that long ago I once lived there, but I chose to come here to watch over the creatures here. There is another Great Fairy who can be found in the mountains, and I suspect that she has been shattered to pieces by the masked child. Seek out the mountain people, the Gorons, who live in Snowhead as they know the land better than most. It may take more than just your own skills to prevail in such a frozen wasteland. You may need to channel their strength as your own." Adagio answered.

" What does that even mean?"

" This is something you shall figure out on your own. For now, I must return to my fountain in order to recuperate, but know that if you ever become weary from battle, please come back to see me, and I will restore both life and magic." Adagio answered, laughing as she disappeared leaving me to try and figure out the meaning behind her words.

Unlike the actual Adagio Dazzle, the ones I've encountered are far more cryptic, but then they had to be so as to not make the experience too easy. Having an extended magic meter was going to be immensely helpful as I had need of magic more than ever especially since my own couldn't be used while I traversed this world.

" Twilight..."

" What is it?" Twilight asked.

" There's something I want to discuss with you, but it will be later once we've resolved what issues remain here in the swamp."

" If it has to do with what Adagio said, then I'll wait until your comfortable enough to talk about it." Twilight smiled. It wasn't surprising to know that she knew what I was getting at, as she was someone who had dedicated her life to understanding magic, but it was a relief as it meant not stumbling with the eventual explanation. " Were you confused about what she regarding the Gorons?"

" I have to channel their strength."

" I'm not familiar with them, but you have encountered them before, haven't you?"

" They existed in Hyrule where they lived on a mountain, yet it was an active volcano. Still, these Gorons should essentially act similarly to the ones I encountered before." I answered. That's when I realized she wanted a full explanation, and I slapped my forehead. " Okay, let me tell you everything as we make our way back to the Deku Palace. From what I remember, the Gorons were a tribe who consumed rocks as part of their diet, yet only liked specific rocks. They became rather fussy as a result, and that made them an easy target for Ganondorf who sought to starve them to death unless they gave him a spiritual stone."

" They ate rocks?"

" It sounds weird I know, but I'm telling the truth." I answered. As we left the Fairy Fountain, it was still night out that made me think of getting some sleep. I had been pretty busy what with exploring a temple and defeating a powerful warrior, but I knew that I couldn't rest until Fluttershy was back where she belonged. Looking at the bottle that contained her, she had since fallen asleep. She had been through an awful lot what with being kidnapped and held against her will, but soon this ordeal of hers would come to an end.

Since the poison was no longer in the water, I could jump down and swim over to where the entrance was. Just as I was about to make a leap of faith, Twilight reminded me that I would drown in my current form. I grabbed my face and took off the Deku Mask becoming human, and jumped down below, landing in the water with a loud splash that echoed throughout the area.

" What else do you remember about the Gorons?"

" They are proud warriors who were always willing to lend a hand, but their pride could be a problem especially when it came to outsiders. I guess it made them appear weak, and that's something they couldn't afford to have happen as it gave other tribes a reason to question them. Aside from that, they were experts in explosives as they created bombs that were sold to Hylians in exchange for certain goods and services." I answered. The monsters had since taken notice of me, and how could they not since I made a loud splash, yet they ignored me probably due to not violating their territory. I was glad actually as I didn't want to get involved in any fighting.

" The Gorons sound very friendly."

" Provided you talk to them when they are in a good mood, that is."

" Oh? They have an attitude problem?"

" Let's just say that they've got a lot of passion." I answered, breathing heavily because I knew exactly what I was talking about. Back in the main area of swamp, I took a moment to observe my surroundings to see what had changed since Odolwa's defeat, and what became quickly obvious was the water. No longer was there any poison, so I was free to traverse it. The monsters were still around that felt disappointing as I was expecting them to have gone away upon things returning to normal, but I guess there was still darkness that needed to be conquered. " Twilight? What did you think of Principal Celestia being one of the Four Giants who protect this world?" I asked.

" It's like a dream come true despite her being the human version of our mentor."

" You always did like that about her, didn't you?"

" Princess Celestia taught me everything I needed to know to become my own pony."

" I sometimes wish that I stayed inside of go off on my own. Not a day goes by that I continue to blame myself for everything that went wrong between us." I said.

" You were just going through a phase."

" No, it wasn't like that." I said, coming to a stop in the water and floating in place. " My family always ignored me in favour of my siblings, and I felt rejected because of that. I wanted to prove that I could be the best unicorn Equestria had ever known, and I began a dark path that only ended when you and our friends finally stopped me."

" I'm sure Princess Celestia has forgiven you by now, Sunset. I have said good things about you to her, but you need to one day find the courage to speak to her in person." Twilight said.

" I want to, but I'm afraid I'll be arrested and banished to the desolate wastes for stealing your crown."

" Don't worry, Sunset. I'll make sure that doesn't happen."

" I know you'll have my back when the time comes for me to confront her Anyway, this isn't the first time Celestia has appeared in a scenario like this where she appeared as a deity. While her human self appeared here, her pony self appeared as a deity in Hyrule." I said.

" Really!? You know I'm going to ask you tell me, Sunset." Twilight said. Knowing that I couldn't deny her request, I began to explain myself while I continued swimming towards the shore and the Deku Palace. I told her in Hyrule, Princess Celestia was one of the Great Goddesses, ethereal beings who created Hyrule in addition to forging the Triforce that contained their essence. This power could grant anyone's desires, and because of that, many sought to claim the golden power for themselves.

Ganondorf was one of those who coveted the Triforce in order to become the most powerful being, so through manipulation, deceit, treachery, and more, he was able to get his hands on it. " So that's what he did? I've got a feeling there is more to it than that, but it's a difficult story to tell as there's much that you don't know about." Twilight said.

" No, I know what happened."

" Really? Then why not explain the rest of it?"

" It would involve talking about time paradoxes, as the actions of certain individuals created three different timelines."

" Time magic!? Seriously!?"

" It has nothing to do with magic, but rather events playing out differently. This timeline is the one where the Hero of Time defeated Ganondorf, but returned to the past by returning the Master Sword to its place of rest. Ganondorf never conquered Hyrule, and was subsequently arrested and charged with treason with the punishment being his execution. The second timeline follows the events of the future where he was imprisoned within the Sacred Realm with the Triforce of Power in his hand. Finally, there's the timeline where the Hero was killed in battle and Ganondorf claimed the complete Triforce before being banished." I said.

" Sounds to me that there's more to it than that."

" You have no idea." I said. She really didn't. I've read what happened in each timeline in the Hyrule Historia. While most who read it wouldn't think too much of it because it was just a video game, I saw it as more towards being part of my existence given how I've become intertwined within the narrative of this legend. I was in the role of the Hero who had been chosen to defeat the darkness, so it fell onto me to carry out the task that has been assigned to me whether I liked it or not.

Was my being chosen to fulfill this part predetermined a long time ago, or did Ganondorf have something to do with it? Maybe my troubled past was the key factor that made me the prime candidate? I thought of it like that as a small portion of me had started to consider what might happen were the roles reversed.

What I meant was, what if Twilight was the one chosen instead of me? What if the role of partner was given to me instead? How would both of us behave in our respective roles that's different from our current ones? Another thought that crossed my mind was the villainous role this game possessed. That could have been how I ended up were Twilight to have been chosen instead of me.

I've had experience playing the bad girl that even now continued to torment me despite my attempts to move on. Just thinking about such alternate possibilities frightened me to no end, and I hoped that I'd never see such a thing happen. I'd hate for something like that to happen where I have to fight against those who truly care about me.

It didn't take long to make my way back to the Deku Palace. Again, I felt the urge to fall asleep due to how exhausted I felt, but I had to keep on going for Fluttershy's sake--she was the only one who could save that monkey from being punished. Originally, I assumed that seeing her "daughter" would be enough for Tree Hugger to get involved, but I don't think those advisors would be willing to stop what they were trying to achieve. From what I gathered from the Deku Queen, she was more interested in maintaining her aura as opposed to ruling over the Deku, and her advisors constantly took advantage of this by convincing her to follow their suggestions.

" Mrs. Sunset Shimmer?" Fluttershy asked.

" I see you're awake."

" That was a really nice sleep despite my cr-cramped quarters, but I was wondering if we've reached the palace."

" We arrived just a few moments ago."

" Such relief as I feel like I have been trapped inside of this bottle forever. I do apologize for falling asleep, but being trapped inside of your bottle made me tired. Also, my concern over the well being of that poor monkey stressed me out, so I decided that resting would allow me to calm my nerves. Um, please Mrs. Sunset Shimmer, you must hah-head for the throne room where my mother is." Fluttershy said.

" Will you resolve things?"

" I have no other choice but um, I was hoping that my mother would be able to resolve it." Fluttershy answered. I rolled my eyes to what she said as it was a typical response. Even in this world, Fluttershy didn't like being confrontational, and preferred someone else do all of the talking for her, yet she had no other choice as the fate of an innocent animal was on the line. Since she had such a strong affinity towards animals, there was no doubt she was going to make things right for the monkey.

Walking through the entrance and entering the outside section of the palace, things still looked the same apart from the clear water, yet ahead of me were the two Deku Guards I had trouble with before during my last visit. It still bothered me that no other guards were on patrol as it meant this area had next to no defence, but I suppose there may be hidden Deku somewhere around here.

" The guards are still there," I said.

" Remember that due to resetting time, they no longer know who you are," said Twilight.

" Positive?" I asked.

" Of course, and it means your actions have been forgotten by them as well. In the minds of the Deku Scrubs who live in the palace, you are someone who is paying a visit who came all the way from Clock Town, and none of them will suspect something is amiss. You'll need to change forms though as non-Deku can't go inside; those guards are persistent in that regard." Twilight answered.

" What about Flut--I mean, Her Highness?"

" You need to make your way to Tree Hugger's throne, and empty your bottle next to her."

" She won't recognize her?"

" I have no idea as to her depth perception, but that's what you must do." Twilight answered. That meant having to deal with those advisors, yet they too didn't remember ever seeing me. I could easily make my way up to Tree Hugger, but I had to remember that there were other Deku in the throne room. If I made a blunder, I could be swamped by them all over again, and be punished myself.

Of course, Twilight also mentioned the part about needing to change forms. I took the Deku Mask out from my pocket--but not before putting the bottle down that contained Fluttershy-- and placed it on my face where the magic began to change me again. Upon letting out a loud scream, I had become a Deku Scrub once again. When I picked up the bottle, Fluttershy stared at me in disbelief. I sensed she was surprised that a human that changed into her own kind.

" This ability to transform your shape is amazing." Fluttershy said.

" It does come in handy, but the pain can be annoying at times." I said.

" You experience agony?"

" When one's body changes completely, you'll feel considerable pain until you either get used to it, or not."

" That sounds awful."

" It does, yet I need to constantly do this to move one step closer towards saving this world from impending doom." I said. An idea then appeared in my mind the moment I said those words. Looking at the night sky and seeing the moon overhead with its monstrous face, I looked back down at Fluttershy before continuing. " Do your people know about what's currently falling from above?"

" The moon? Yes, we have seen it slowly descending, yet we never took it seriously as we were content with our own business. In our minds, those humans would figure out something, yet they haven't come up with a solution. Um, my mother tha-thinks the moon is expressing so much negativity that its chakra has come to a grinding halt. She may not look like it, but she has the ability to sense people's auras that she uses to determine someone's nature." Fluttershy answered.

" Tree Hugger must be proud of that."

" Who?"

" No one." I answered, covering my mouth so as to not say anything else.

" You called her Tree Hugger? You know, that name sounds so much nicer than Deku Queen. That is what most of our subjects call her, yet she doesn't like titles as she doesn't take such traditions all that seriously." Fluttershy said. In my mind, I made a blunder by referring to the Deku Queen as Tree Hugger. I needed to be more mindful of what words came out of my mouth. Picking up the bottle, I made my way over to the two guards who immediately commanded me to stop. One thing that was imperative was that they didn't see the bottle containing their princess otherwise they might think I kidnapped her.

" This is the palace of the Deku Kingdom. Only those on official business may enter!" I was about to remind them that I'd been here before, but I quickly remembered that neither of them recognized me. " I've never seen the likes of you around here before! Do you happen to have come all this way from Clock Town?"

" I suppose you could say that." I answered.

" Figures you came from there. Normally, that would mean asking you to leave because you big city Deku think too highly of yourselves, but for today, I'll make an exception to that rule."

" What's going on?" I asked, pretending to have no idea.

" I'm not surprised that you Deku from Clock Town are so oblivious to the tragedy that has befallen our kingdom! After all, you lot left here because you all thought there was nothing for you, so by leaving this swamp, you hoped to start a better life elsewhere." The guard was taking tremendous offence to my words--just like what happened before--but he quickly regained his composure. " Sorry about that. I've just been under a lot of stress ever since the Deku Princess disappeared several days ago." I quickly looked down at Fluttershy, and she knew to be quiet otherwise I could be arrested.

" What happened to Her Highness?"

" Normally, I wouldn't tell commoners of such important matters, but the Deku Queen has permitted it. You see, the Deku Princess went with a monkey up to the Woodfall Temple, and only that beast returned which devastated our kingdom. The advisors believe she was captured, and the one responsible for her abduction was that monkey. The Deku Queen doesn't believe the monkey was responsible, yet she had been convinced by her advisors to carry out an appropriated punishment."

" That sounds horrible."

" Perhaps, but I'm just a guard, so my opinion holds no value. Anyway, you may enter to see the public humiliation of the foolish monkey who angered our queen."

" Does her anger have to do with her advisors?"

" Just between you and me, I never did like those four for the sole reason that they are corrupt. They've been wanting to have the Queen be more serious about the affairs of the Kingdom, yet she prefers to rule through kindness and her ability to sense the auras within those who grace her presence. Many of us are well aware that her advisors have grander aspirations that do involve assuming control, yet none of us have ever tried to expose their true intentions as they hold powerful positions.

" The Deku Queen may or may not be aware of what they do, and if she did, she could never do something about it because the four of them used to be advisors to her husband." That was something I didn't know before until now, and it started to make this whole situation less confusing than it had been before. No wonder Tree Hugger had problems.

In Equestria, the only rulers ponies had ever known were Princess Celestia and Princess Luna, and while their reign had had its ups and downs, everypony was happy because they always had their best interests. We didn't know any other ruler, so the thought of somepony one day replacing them was virtually unheard of. In the case of Tree Hugger, she had assumed the throne after her husband passed away, according to this Deku, and that meant having to take on the baggage known as the royal advisors. I'm guessing that they were fiercely loyal towards the previous king, and never were happy when she took on the task of solo ruler.

No wonder Tree Hugger hid behind the whole sensing of auras, and had such a peaceful outlook on life. She's had to deal with a problem she didn't want, but then the question I wanted to know was, how did her husband react around her advisors? Did he possess similar convictions? Or, did he treat them like they were his own children? The answer was one that would be difficult to discover. While I could easily talk to Tree Hugger about it, I wasn't sure she would be willing to listen.

This was an example of how those who closely served the monarchy were secretly gaining more power by taking advantage of them, and when the proper time came, they would overthrow the monarchy to establish a new rule. Just because you think that you could be a good ruler meant absolutely nothing if you didn't have the support of your subjects. Princess Celestia and Princess Luna knew this was true, but never once did anything that would have their ponies want to oust them.

" Couldn't she dismiss them?" I asked. I figured that perhaps this guard knew the answer, and would tell me what it was rather than having to ask Tree Hugger.

" Quite easily as the Queen has her own way of doing things compared to her husband."

" But?"

" The problem is that the advisors have far too much power, so dismissing them would be rather difficult. In any case, we've been talking long enough, and you are most likely anxious to see that monkey with your own eyes. Besides, I need to get back to work otherwise I could get in trouble for neglecting my duties as a guard. Follow this hall straight to the Royal Chamber. Do not enter any other areas whatsoever!" Since I explored those areas already, I could just go straight to the Royal Chamber without being distracted, and Fluttershy was most likely being impatient what with having listened to my conversation with this guard.

Thanking the guard for the conversation, he allowed me to proceed, and I walked immediately towards the Royal Chamber. I then just realized that Fluttershy knew more about this situation given she was the Deku Princess after all. However, I needed to be quick as I doubted she could last much longer inside of my bottle.

" Before we go inside the Royal Chamber, I was wondering how you feel about the advisors to your mother."

" Those four? I... I've never really been too f-fond of them for as long as I can remember. They always wanted my mother to be more like my father. When he was alive, my father ruled over the Deku Kingdom with an iron fist, and was prone to temper tantrums over the most trivial of things. If even the smallest thing were to bother him, he would lose control of his emotions. He always said that it was his passion that made him overreact, and the advisors enjoyed every minute of it." Fluttershy said.

" And then he passed away?"

" My father wilted about five years ago, and it shook the entire kingdom to its foundation. Many Deku were devastated over his death because it meant their interests when it came to the other tribes were now in jeopardy. Others felt relieved knowing that my mother was planning on ruling on her own, and had a much more peaceful way of doing things that would let us be seen as being on equal terms with everyone else across Termina.

" It was the senior Deku Scrubs who were against my mother, as they wanted to maintain our usual nature of forging alliances, and breaking them in order to protect our own interests. The younger generation favoured the peaceful approach my mother desired, and right from the start, her ideals conflicted with those of the advisors." Fluttershy answered.

" So it's a case of the old versus the young?"

" Um, something like that, I suppose."

" In some ways, I'm actually jealous."

" Why would you be?"

" Where I really come from, we have a ruler who has guided our fair land for over a thousand years, and not once has she ever had anyone attempt to overthrow her, with the sole exception of her younger sister. She became corrupted by darkness out of jealously, and was imprisoned in the moon for the same thousand year period, yet returned to the side of her older sister and became co-rulers. She ruled solely through kindness, understanding, and a general desire to protect her subjects." I answered.

" It must be nice to have someone like that who doesn't have advisors hounding her by the roots." Fluttershy said. Hearing her say those words made me feel regretful, as though I had been boasting about how Equestria was superior to both the Deku Kingdom, and Termina overall. That wasn't my intention by any means. The more I became adjusted to my new surroundings, the more troubled I became because of how miserable everything around me was.

No wonder so many people felt such negativity, as they were surrounded by it on a regular basis, and coupled with the moon falling, I fear they were on the verge of giving up and wanting to submit to eternal destruction. It was up to me to resolve this issue before things spiraled out of control. Even though just thinking about having to save an entire world by myself with Twilight by my side made me feel sick, I had to complete my task no matter what I had to go through.

" Um, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer?"

" What is it?"

" Can we go inside now? I'm starting to feel really cramped."

" Oh, right!" I said, blushing because I had completely forgotten that she was still inside of my bottle. I made my way across the courtyard, entered the Royal Chamber, and suddenly came to a stop upon seeing what transpired since my previous visit. A rather crude looking apparatus was situated above a cauldron; smoke rising from it indicated that it had been filled with hot liquid. Tied up by his feet and hanging from below the apparatus was the monkey. He was still insisting that he hadn't done anything to the Deku Princess, yet his pleas fell on deaf ears. This was true as she was now with me, but I had to make it over to Tree Hugger as only she could set all of this right.

Looking around to see where I could find her, there were a large assortment of Deku Scrubs prancing about. The four advisors, the ones who had practically instigated this display, were standing at the back of the chamber, grinning with glee that all of this was happening To their left, sitting on her throne with a miserable look on her face, was Tree Hugger.

Clearly, she didn't like what was going on, yet I'd bet she had been told by those advisors that this was necessary to appease her subjects who demanded satisfaction. To get over to her, I had to weave my way through these Deku, but be casual about it otherwise those advisors might suspect me of being suspicious, and that could prevent Fluttershy from being reunited with her mother. I then started to walk forward, making sure not to cause a scene, and none of the Deku bothered to take notice of me. At least that was one problem out of the way. The other would involve how I dealt with those advisors.

" Hey! You're like, a new face I've never seen around here before." Tree Hugger said as I approached her. I could tell that she wasn't joyous like before, but again I had to play my hand carefully to avoid any suspicion.

" I just came here recently from Clock Town." I said.

" Whoa! That's totally gnarly! It's not often that we get any of our fellow Deku from Clock Town. Most of them choose to stay there and never associate with us, but I suppose they have their like, reasons for not wanting to come back." Tree Hugger said, looking at her advisors for a brief second before turning her attention back to me. " I am the Deku Queen, but I like the title of 'She who can sense the aura of those who approach her'. It has like, a real nice ring to it, wouldn't you agree? Sorry if I sound rather miserable, but my chakra has been totally messed up lately what with my daughter disappearing. My advisors have said that this monkey is the one who kidnapped her, yet I can't accept such a thing as the truth."

" Why not?"

" I can sense the aura coming from that little fellow, and like, he gives off a radiant glow, much like you are right now. You must be someone who possesses a strong life force to make someone like me coil back." Tree Hugger answered.

" If you strongly feel that way about it, why not release the monkey?"

" My people want justice to be done otherwise it would like, destroy our societal fabric just like that." Tree Hugger answered, snapping her fingers in response to her last word. I then took notice of her advisors who began looking at me with anger in their faces. They didn't want me talking about freeing the monkey, so I had to do this carefully otherwise Fluttershy would never be reunited with her mother.

So far, no one knew that she was with me, and she made certain not to say anything until I had released her from my bottle. I then turned to Twilight, who had also been silent. She nodded her head indicating that she would back me up on how I handled this problem. I just needed to steer the conversation towards the right direction.

" Do you know where she went?"

" She went to that Woodfall Temple. I don't know why she would like, want to visit such a run-down place, but she never returned. The monkey returned, and that's where all of these accusations began. To be honest, the temple is like, not really that big of a deal unless you have a strong inkling to want to pay a visit to the guardian." Tree Hugger answered.

" If your daughter returned, what would happen?"

" The monkey would be released immediately."

" No matter what?"

" For a Deku Scrub who comes from Clock Town, you certainly are the curious type. I like that about you! Most of the Deku in here just nod their heads in approval whenever I say something, and it like, really bums me out and weakens my chakra because they don't have an actual opinion. Sometimes, I just wonder why I even rule over this kingdom to being with." Tree Hugger answered. That was the signal I needed to hear, and that meant I had to act quickly. However, the advisors looked at me again before deciding to approach, and I knew they didn't like me asking questions.

" Your Majesty! This Deku child certainly is suspicious."

" What makes you think that?" Tree Hugger asked.

" She seems very interested with regards to the Deku Princess, as though she were hiding something."

" Not only that, she is undermining your authority by claiming this monkey should be released. You know that he must be punished for his actions! If justice isn't delivered, your people would surely riot, and our way of life would come apart at the seams. Do not let this city Deku Scrub coerce you into acting out against the wishes of your people!"

" Or, she may have been born in that human city, and thinks she can strut around your kingdom as though she were entitled to!"

" Whoa! Why do you four have to have such negative vibes?" Tree Hugger asked.

" Sometimes, we question it ourselves."

" In any case, the punishment must be delivered, yet we shall await your command, Your Majesty."

" We shall act when you say so."

" For the good of my people, the monkey will like, be punished within the next few moments. I am like, so sorry little monkey, but I have no other choice here. I've protected you as long as I could, but I fear that I've run out of time. If like, my daughter were here right now, my chakra would be restored to the way they were before. I know this is going to be terrible karma that strikes me, yet I must act for the good of the kingdom." Tree Hugger said.

While she was busy with that little tirade, I removed the bottle from around my belt, uncorked it, and began shaking it. " Huh? What are you doing little Deku Child?" Tree Hugger had taken notice of my actions, yet I continued to shake it until Fluttershy emerged, landing right in front of her mother with a soft thud. " Deku Princess? Is that, like you, or has my chakra really taken a nose dive?"

" It's me." Fluttershy answered.

" Why are you shivering like that?"

" Because, um, I need to do something very important."

" By all means."

" H-Hufff-huhhh! Foolish mother!" Fluttershy said, her calm demeanour suddenly changing to one of anger.

" What are you talking about?"

" I didn't want to do this, but you've left me no other choice, mother!" Fluttershy answered. She then suddenly leapt at Tree Hugger, knocking her down onto her back, and began bouncing up and down on her belly in a fit of anger. It reminded me of what Twilight once told me about the Equestrian version of Fluttershy. She would lose control of her emotions whenever an animal was threatened in any way, resulting in her becoming very assertive.

She also had an ability called "The Stare" that allowed her to force any creature to obey her without question. It sounded like a useful, if terrifying power, especially if she were to use it to her advantage, but I doubted Fluttershy would ever do that. Her sudden course of action caused every other Deku Scrub to stop what they were doing, and looking on at their princess. Even the monkey, who had pleaded for his release, looked on in surprise. " Mother! Why did you allow yourself to be persuaded by your advisors without taking everything into account? You're supposed to be in charge, not them!"

" I did, dear daughter, yet they insisted that the monkey be punished for the good of our people."

" And you went with it?"

" Our people demanded justice, and I had to carry it out."

" I can't believe that I'm hearing this!" Fluttershy shouted as she stopped bouncing on her mother's belly. She then turned to face the other Deku Scrub with such a horrifying expression on her face, they shuddered in fear before backing away slightly. Was this the power of her stare at work? It was impressive to say the least, yet it made her appear as though she were a monster. Good thing I wasn't a victim otherwise I'd be scared of her as well.

She then turned her attention towards the advisors, who had since cowered themselves into a corner. Each one tried pushing one another out in front to take the full brunt of what was about to happen next. " And you four! How dare you manipulate my mother into doing something so barbaric as punishing an innocent creature? My father's methods of punishment were both archaic and wrong, and that is why they were abolished when my mother chose to rule on her own."

" But they had to be retained for the good of the kingdom."

" No! We have done nothing but act in a deceitful manner against the other tribes in addition to relying on outdated ideals, so I am only going to say this to you four once and only once, so listen carefully. I don't want any of you to ever assert your influence on my mother ever again! From now on, you shall respect her way of doing things, and accept them because that is your duty. No longer will my mother and I tolerate your actions because of how her ideals conflict with yours! Have I made myself clear on this matter?" Fluttershy asked.

The advisors didn't answer her, and that only made her raise her voice in anger.

" Have I made myself clear!!"

" Yes, Deku Princess!"

" We shall obey."

" No longer will we persuade your mother to act against her own ideals."

" Please don't punish us."

" Thank you." Fluttershy said.

" And the monkey?"

" Let him go this instant!" Fluttershy answered. I never knew that she could exude so much anger, but the advisors had it coming what with their actions. Throughout this experience, I knew that Tree Hugger wasn't at fault because the responsibilities of being a ruler forced her hand, and she had no choice but to carry out such a horrific act for her people. No wonder Equestria was always so peaceful aside from when it was threatened by those who desired to conquer it.

A short time later after the monkey had been set free, and the advisors contemplating their berating, Fluttershy approached the monkey before bowing down before him. " I am truly sorry for what happened you Mr. Monkey. My mother didn't mean to make you suffer like that, as she had been tempted by her advisors to punish you. She can be very protective of me at times when it comes to my well being, so she has been known for listening to some rather rash decisions."

" I understand, Princess. Forget about that. Has the temple been returned to normal?"

" Why yes, thanks to Mrs. Sunset Shimmer here. She braved the many dangers that resided in the temple including the monster that had imprisoned me, so for that I am very, truly grateful. You need not worry about the advisors anymore. They have been put in their place and will no longer try to influence my mother." Fluttershy answered. She then reached out and grabbed my hand before pulling me forward to be properly thanked by the monkey. I wasn't the sort of person who wanted to be given any credit, what with how I used to behave. I could be tempted by evil desires, so I tried refusing Fluttershy's request, yet she wouldn't have any of it.

" Really? So you're called Sunset Shimmer, are you? Thank you for keeping your promise to me. I know that we've only just met, but I felt compelled to say that, as though, I met you in another time and place." The monkey was a lot closer than he thought in that regard, but it was for the best that he didn't know the truth. It could prove rather complicated.

" As a symbol of our gratitude, our butler has prepared a little something for you." Fluttershy said. It had just dawned on me that Mrs. Cheerilee was no where to be found, and she was usually standing next to Tree Hugger ready to serve her at a moment's notice. Where in the world could she have gotten to? My reaction to her announcement made Fluttershy giggle, and she told me to calm down before I ended up with drooped leaves.

" Our Deku Butler was here before you arrived, but decided on waiting for you in a special place that is sacred to us. Most Deku aren't permitted to enter the Deku Shrine unless they have permission from my mother. Yet, since she is currently overjoyed with her chakra upon seeing my safe return, I shall give you permission instead. Please accept the gift that we have prepared, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer, but, um, don't be shocked at what you'll get."

" What do you mean?"

" When I first witnessed your transformation between a Deku Scrub and a human, I suspected that you possessed other masks in your possession, so I made certain arrangements some time ago. You see, we Deku have been guarding a special mask for many generations, yet not once have we ever used it because we had no need to. My father actually considered getting rid of it as it creeped him out, but my mother insisted we kept it.

" She knew that one day, someone would come along and claim it, one would possessed other masks, and had the ability to change their shape." Fluttershy answered. At first, I was wondering why she had lowered her voice, but I quickly figured out that she didn't want anyone else to know that I wasn't an actual Deku Scrub. Were they to know that truth, I'd be captured almost instantly, so it was for the best to remain in my current form.

" Where is the shrine?"

" When you leave this chamber, make your way to the moat, and then cross the lily pads to your right. The Deku Shrine will be at the end of the path, but I must warn you. Um, it's not exactly what one might call an actual shrine. In truth, it is a long, winding tunnel that goes deep underground, and if you're not careful, you may find yourself getting lost down there. Do not worry though. Our Deku Butler is sure to guide you along. After all, she knows her way around down there better than anyone, and besides, it seems she has taken somewhat of a liking to you, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer." Fluttershy answered.

" Are you sure you don't need my help for anything?"

" Um, I know that things had gotten hectic around here with my absence, but I think we shall be fine from now on. My mother's advisors have now learned their place, and should hopefully not aspire to influence her in the future. As for you, I sense that you'll be needed elsewhere in this world. The other regions are calling out to you, and while the challenges within those places will prove difficult, I know that you will succeed." Fluttershy answered.

She then noticed the Hero's Bow on my back, and that made no sense as I already figured out that I couldn't use it in my current form, but her eyes suddenly widened in excitement. " That weapon you have there. It was hidden inside of Woodfall Temple for the chosen one to wield it someday, and that day has finally come."

" It was being guarded by a fiery Lizardman, so I defeated it and claimed it for my own."

" I see.

" If I hadn't taken it, I wouldn't have been able to save you."

" It was meant to be in your possession, and I couldn't be more proud of that. That weapon has been in the Deku Royal Family for many generations, but my great-great grandfather chose to hide it inside of the temple believing it would be safer there. I must admit that it does really suit you, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer." Fluttershy said.

" No offence, but I can't really use a bow looking like this."

" I know."

" What!? If you knew that, then why have such a weapon hidden away in a sacred place to your people?"

" The Hero's Bow was given to one of my ancestors long ago by a human who bore such a strong resemblance to yourself. As I said, my family has guarded it for generations until it was placed in the temple. My ancestor was also told that one day, another human would come along and claim the weapon for themselves. This human would have the power to change their shape at will, and possess arcane powers that are beyond anything imaginable." Fluttershy answered.

" You believe I'm that human?"

" Yes, otherwise you would not be in possession of it."

" That does make sense."

" Always treasure that weapon."

I soon came to accept that I was the one who had been chosen to wield the Hero's Bow, but what about the human who supposedly looked like me who gave the bow to the Deku long ago? Was that a coincidence? Fate? Or perhaps something much more? In either case, it actually wasn't significant with the exception that it gave me more of an understanding as to the history behind Termina. I still was clueless regarding many legends, but at least I had something to rely on for future reference.

I would have gone back to Clock Town to prepare myself for the long journey to the next region, but first I had to make a detour as there was a mask I needed.

" Any further questions?"

" No, I'm good."

" Then it's time for you to take your leave of us, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer. I don't know why, but it feels like I've known you for a very long time despite only knowing you for about a few hours. I hope that one day, we will meet again. Before you go, make sure to speak to the monkey in case he has something to say. I would ask you to speak to my mother, but that probably won't be necessary as she's still trying to realign her chakra due to my return." Fluttershy said. Smiling and thanking her for everything she had done, I started walking back towards the monkey, but then she beckoned me stop as she had one last thing to say.

" Um, I shall never forget what you have done for us. Also, um, please forgive me if I refuse to ride in that tiny, little bottle ever again! I am not going to be missing that experience any time soon." That certainly must have been awkward considering how she had to be carried around, but I respected her wishes. The monkey was in the center of the chamber near the cauldron was, and he turned his attention towards me when I approached him.

" Sunset Shimmer, I'm sorry for all that trouble. I didn't mean to drag you into such affairs like this."

" It's okay! This was something I really needed to do."

" Really? Well, I'm glad that you benefitted from this experience."

" What will happen now?"

" Now it looks like we monkeys and Deku can start getting along again. A lot of damage has been done no thanks to those advisors, and the monster who had kidnapped the Deku Princess, but in time things should slowly go back to normal like they were before. We certainly owe a great deal of gratitude towards you, Sunset Shimmer, and for that, we declare you an honourary monkey!" I smiled in response, but deep in my mind, that thought made me shiver. " You know, the swamp may be back to normal, but something still gives me a bad feeling. I wonder what it could be? I'm probably thinking too hard about it, so pay me no mind."

The monkey had no idea as to how right he really was, yet once I've reset time, none of this would even matter to him. That's because when I restart the cycle, everything will go back to the way it was before I showed up. He will be getting punished, Fluttershy will be trapped once again, and Tree Hugger would be at the mercy of her advisors. The very thought wounded my grieving heart, but I knew that I had to restart to give myself more time to rescue the Four Giants.

Thanking the monkey as well, I immediately took my leave of the Royal Chamber, but not before looking over my back towards those advisors who had since huddled into a corner. Each of them were looking right back at me, expressions of hatred filled their eyes, and they most likely blamed me for being punished by Fluttershy. Yet, they deserved it for all of the horrible things they did. Once I left the chamber and walked up to the moat, a light tapping occurred on my shoulder.

" Where to now?" Twilight asked.

" It's been a while since you last said anything."

" I wanted to hold back while allowing you some much needed space."

" You didn't really need to do that."

" Think of it as a learning experience for when the day comes where you'll become a princess."

" That won't be happening any time soon." I said. I wasn't sure why Twilight said that. I mean, it was my dream to ascend to such a lofty position, but because of my troubled past, I didn't think I deserved it. I knew I've done good lately, but what happened in Equestria is pretty hard to ignore. One day, I'll go back home and face my just punishment for stealing of one Equestria's national treasures, but for now I was content with trying to figure out how to change this world back to normal. " Anyway, we should focus on getting that mask Mrs. Cheerilee has in this shrine of theirs."

" Adagio did mention that a mask was in the possession of the Deku."

" Why not just give it to me?"

" I don't think they can just do that for a complete stranger."

" Nothing ever is easy to accomplish, is it? Guess we might as well make our way over there." I said. I was thinking of crossing as a human as that meant walking slowly up to my knees in water, but because this was still the Deku Palace, there might be additional guards lurking about in the shadows. They would react badly if they were to suddenly see a human walking about.

" You shouldn't have any trouble using those lily pads."

" I'm hoping this mask will be worth it." I said, moaning. I then began to make my way across to the Deku Shrine using the lily pads as platforms, and unlike the other direction, this pathway was much easier as there were more lily pads. Around the half-way point, I looked upwards to see if it was still nightfall. It was, meaning that I would soon require some sleep.

After all, I'd been on my feet since starting this three day cycle without taking the time to rest. Maybe Ms. Cheerilee would allow me to sleep for about seven or eight hours before giving me that mask she supposedly had. Truth be told, I'd prefer to sleep for an entire day given what I went through in Woodfall Temple, but I still had additional tasks to perform.

Once I made it across, I found myself standing in front of the entrance to the Deku Shrine, and it wasn't what I expected. I was expecting it to be something glorified, a strong representation of the might of the Deku Kingdom, yet it was rather lackluster. Also, why have something this important tucked away where no one could gain access to it? Then again, I suspected there had to be another entrance inside the palace. How else could anyone get over here especially if they didn't have any jumping skills?

Walking inside, everything went dark as though no one had been here for centuries, yet I could smell the history all around me. A few torches in front of me was the only means of light, but it was enough to allow me to see any details. The walls were decorated with various murals that depicted ancient histories of the Deku, but these impressive designs made no sense to me. It then dawned on me that perhaps, I should have taken the time to read the Hyrule Historia section dedicated to Termina.

" It sure is dark in here."

" I can light the way using my, well, light."

" We do have these torches, Twilight."

" I know, but you can never be too careful."

" Where do you suppose we'll find Ms. Cheerilee?"

" Hard to say around here since everything is so dark, but I'm sure we'll find her eventually. Despite being a different person in this world, Fluttershy wouldn't lie to us just to be rid of us." Twilight answered. I knew our friend wouldn't have lied. If she said we were to come here to claim a mask, then that is what we've done. I still didn't understand why I'm even collecting them in the first place considering I've only used two of them at the most, yet Adagio was insistent on it. Otherwise, why would she have brought them up?

After walking forward up a small flight of stairs, I came upon a small clearing and saw something in the distance. Someone else was in here with me, lurking about in the shadows. Walking a little further, the figure turned out to be Ms. Cheerilee, holding what appeared to be an umbrella in her hand. How was she able to get here?

" I've been expecting you." Mrs. Cheerilee said.

" What is this place?" I asked.

" It seems the Deku Princess did not explain that little tidbit to you, so permit me to tell you. The Deku Shrine is a sacred place where those who have wilted are buried here so that they can return from whence they came. It doesn't matter what your status in life was. If you wilted, this is where you come. Despite this region being nothing more than a swamp, it is our haven where we have lived since ancient times. This place also serves another function, and that involves racing." Mrs. Cheerilee answered.

" Did you say, 'racing'?"

" Think of it as a rite of passage among my kind. When a Deku Scrub is ready to become an adult, they must take this test to see if they are worthy enough." Mrs. Cheerilee answered.

" And me?"

" No. I am aware of what you truly are. I had long sensed that you weren't a Deku Scrub even though you stand before me as one. You possess a powerful magic to be able to perform such a feat as this. As far as I am concerned, you are one of my kind, and so you can perform the rite. You've come here to claim the precious mask that we Deku have been guarding for generations. I shall lead you to it as your reward for rescuing the Deku Princess." Mrs. Cheerilee answered.

" Why not give it to me now?"

" To do that would mean you did not truly earn it."

" I guess that makes sense."

" All you need to do is keep up with me as best as you can as I lead you through the dark recesses of this shrine. There are many twists and turns that lie ahead, and should you fall behind, I fear that the dark creatures shall claim their food." Mrs. Cheerilee said. Her description of this shrine completely changed my opinion of it. I thought she would simply hand over the mask as a reward for all of that hard work, but she had an ulterior motive.

I should have known this was going to happen. Nothing was ever earned for free. It had to be earned by completing some kind of trial, yet my mind was blinded by the thought of getting my hands on whatever mask Mrs. Cheerilee had. " So, if you are ready, I shall lead the way, and don't think of me as being weak just because I'm older than you. You'd be surprised at how fast I can really be."

" Um, I actually want to make a request."

" A request?"

" You see, I've been working hard non-stop since the crack of dawn, and I've yet to get some sleep because of it. So, would it be okay if I rest for a few hours? I know it's very impractical since you need to return to your queen's side what with being her butler and all. Yet, I really need to sleep otherwise I'm likely to keel over while attempting this challenge." I answered.

" Very well..."

" Huh?"

" I accept your request."

" Thank you."

" Rest now, for when you awaken, we shall see if you have what it takes to earn this mask."

Chapter 18: The Ghost Dancer

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
July 4, 2016
Chapter 18: The Ghost Dancer.

Mrs. Cheerilee pointed to a small bench to my right and told me that I could rest there for as long as I needed. It wasn't what I called practical, but it was better than sleeping on the floor--the unfortunate alternative. As I slept, I started dreaming about my friends, and we were at Canterlot High talking about our future goals. I yearned for things to return to normal, yet I knew that wasn't possible. I had to stop the moon from falling. So far, I had freed one of Termina's guardians who protected it, yet three others were trapped most likely within the masks of giant bosses created by the magic Starlight Glimmer possessed.

From what Her Highness told me about her when she came to visit after the Friendship Games, Starlight was an exceptional unicorn, gifted in the magic arts and possessing a magic that was on par with that of an alicorn. A part of me felt jealous as my magic never got that powerful, but then I did leave Equestria to find my own path. Had I chosen to remain and continued my studies, my magic would've been equal to that of Twilight. She said in a message a week later that Starlight had become her second pupil--after me--but felt that she shouldn't get to know me just yet. I thought Her Highness had cast me aside, but I quickly learned that wasn't the case at all.

If Starlight knew about the existence of another world, one where Equestrian magic was still new--it might have caused her to go into a relapse, and possess a desire to subjugate the humans in a bid for equality. I knew firsthand about suffering a relapse. During the first weeks of my reformation, there were times where I wanted to have my power back, and resume my bid to conquer Equestria with an iron hoof. My friends helped me ignore those temptations, and now I no longer desire that old life. Of course, it didn't help that a manifestation of my old self existed in the form of Sunset Demon, a psychotic being who wanted to assume my life as it used to be.

She's gone now--a huge relief there--when she finally collapsed after our second great battle in Hyrule. In a way, I felt guilty that she had to die like that. I was the one who brought her to life all because of how twisted I was back then. Sunset Demon didn't deserve the treatment she got from me or from Ganondorf, but perhaps now she can finally rest in peace, and not yearn for anything other than a blissful existence.

As I continued to dream, Ganondorf didn't appear to taunt me in his usual manner, yet his words continued to haunt me. He wanted to fight me again just as he done before after I succeeded in saving Hyrule. When I fought him, it felt like I was fighting an omnipotent being who just couldn't be stopped no matter what I did. Compared to his younger self, he was in a league of his own, yet surely he possessed a weakness somewhere. I had no idea when he would issue our next contest. That alone filled me with dread. He could summon me to wherever he chooses and I'd have no choice in the matter. His power was far beyond anything I had ever felt before. I had taken on Her Highness, our friends, the Sirens, and even the human version of Twilight, yet they were nothing compared to the likes of Ganondorf.

Then I thought about Her Highness. What did she truly think about what had happened to us? I was used to it from my previous experience, yet she was a stranger going around a world that was no longer the one she had come to know. Could Twilight snap and lose it? I feared that as a possibility, and I needed to make sure it never came to pass. It wasn't just my life on the line, but hers as well. We were both trapped in a dangerous game with a great evil overlooking us as the Games Master.

When I finally woke up after an eight hour rest, I immediately checked to make sure Twilight was alright. Sure enough, she remained safe and sound, sleeping on top of my hat. I didn't want to wake her in case she had experienced a nightmare--I've had more than my fair share of those--but that wasn't meant to be. I had almost forgotten what we were doing prior to falling asleep. I turned to my left, and Mrs. Cheerilee was standing there, eyes wide open, as though she knew exactly when I would wake up.

" Did you have a pleasant rest?" Mrs. Cheerilee asked.

" Aside from one or two internal issues, I really needed it." I answered.

" When you have much on your mind, one tends to lose focus until they can no longer handle things."

" I do have a lot going on right now."

" You need not tell me such matters as they are clearly not meant for my ears." Mrs. Cheerilee said, taking out her umbrella and raised it above her head. The look she had in her eyes told me that she was ready to get our race started--I was glad that I didn't forget about that. " If you would like, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer, we can wait for your little friend to awaken before we get underway. I would not want her expressing disgust for being rudely woken up on account of my challenge."

" No, I think she will just come out of it on her own."

" Very well. As I mentioned to you earlier, all you need to do is to keep up with me as I lead you through the dark recesses of the Deku Shrine. There is no time limit that you must reach to be deemed successful, but know that taking it slow will only make the experience more unpleasant." Mrs. Cheerilee said.

" What do you mean?"

" That is for you to find out once we begin. You may use anything in your possession, so do not think that you are restricted to just your natural ability. You may learn that relying on your various skills shall prove beneficial." Mrs. Cheerilee answered. She then opened up her umbrella, and suddenly began to float in the air. Was this another form of Deku magic? Or, was it something only she could do? Either way, I realized the full extent of her magic, and that she wasn't kidding about her speed. I assumed Mrs. Cheerilee would run through the shrine, but flying through was completely unexpected. " If you are too slow then the creatures shall feast upon you." She then started to fly away from me only backwards leaving me to start running in a bid to keep up.

She must have known the layout of the shrine's dark recesses to act so confidently. There was no other explanation behind it. I knew this wasn't going to be an easy challenge, but this only further proved that Mrs. Cheerilee was dead serious.

" Huh? Sunset? What's going on?" Twilight asked in a groggy state.

" Ah! You're awake." I answered.

" I was having a pleasant sleep until you started running."

" Sorry. It was either that or wake you up personally."

" Well, I'm glad you were considerate, but couldn't you have made it less bumpy?"

" If I had chosen to walk instead of run, I'd have lost sight of Mrs. Cheerilee, and get us lost in the Deku Shrine." I answered. It took Twilight a few seconds to remember why we had come to the shrine in the first place. She then looked ahead to see what it was that we were chasing, and found it difficult to believe that Mrs. Cheerilee was flying in front using an umbrella. I assumed she thought wings were going to be involved, but I was only partially surprised by the revelation. " We can't afford to go too slow otherwise we could succumb to the creatures that lurk about down here." I said.

" Okay, so we know that we need to keep up with her."

" Yes, but where she's going has yet to be determined."

" If Mrs. Cheerilee said you need to keep up with her, then you need to do exactly that. Ignore any and all obstacles that get in your way, and don't be tempted by any rupees you may see scattered about the floor." Twilight said. I thought she was crazy about there being any rupees, but I quickly retracted my statement upon seeing the shiny gems. Certain paths contained them, and that immediately told me going down those paths would lead to a dead end, or perhaps a hungry monster who hadn't eaten for a while.

At first, the path we took was just a straight line that went down several flights of stairs every few hundred meters, but that changed upon reaching the first corner. Luckily, I reacted fast enough and didn't smack into it, and continued following Mrs. Cheerilee. One thing I did notice was that whenever I got close enough, she suddenly moved further away as though she were trying to maintain a specific distance. I had learned that this was known as rubber-banding, yet I didn't think it would happen in a situation like this.

Along the path were a number of Mad Scrubs--the obstacles she mentioned were of the violent type--and torches lined several corners giving off weak amounts of light, but then it soon became apparent that I was slowly falling behind. I saw myself as an average athlete--I wasn't as sports heavy as say, Rainbow Dash--yet how come she was getting further and further ahead? Did her umbrella truly possess great power or had I gotten slightly softer since the Friendship Games?

" She's a lot faster than I gave her credit for."

" Maybe you should switch back to being a human?"

" Wouldn't that freak her out knowing that that I'm not a Deku Scrub?"

" Didn't she say that she knew you weren't?" Twilight asked. I thought back to what Mrs. Cheerilee said when I asked if I was worthy of taking her tribe's rite of passage. I slapped my forehead knowing I was making things much harder for myself by running with such a small body. Twilight then bopped me on the head to get my attention. " I don't know if you can remove your mask, Sunset. If you waste any time, Mrs. Cheerilee will end up getting really far ahead, and catching her will be impossible." I needed more speed and my own body could easily provide that, but would it cost me both the race and the mask? " It's your decision to make." Twilight said.

There was no other choice! I had to become a human if I stood a chance. I came to a stop before grabbing at my face, and when the mask started to come off, everything around me suddenly came to a stop. Even Mrs. Cheerilee froze in mid-air as the magic within the mask took effect. Upon becoming human again, I quickly put the Deku Mask away, and resumed chasing after her, my speed being much faster than before.

" Did you see that, Twilight?"

" I did! Time freezes when you transition from one form to another."

" Why do you think that is?"

" I've got no idea, but it does mean you can use it to your advantage without fear of wasting time. In your current form, you do become a larger target, but you're faster now and can easily deflect any Deku Nuts using your shield." Twilight answered.

After going through several more passageways including ones that travelled upward and featured awkward platforming sections--whoever came up with the idea of narrow walkways for stairs and narrow gaps were either crazy or did it to test the jumping skills of Deku--the path opened up into a large cavern that consisted of several tree stumps that rose up from the ground. I had no idea how deep the chasm before was nor was I willing to find out. It didn't faze Mrs. Cheerilee one bit as she merely floated across towards an open entrance. Her path seemed easy enough until I noticed how wide of a gap existed between the stumps.

" Do you think I can take her route?" I asked Twilight, pointing in the direction Mrs. Cheerilee was floating in.

" Unless you had the best jumping skills in the world, you're likely to plunge into the abyss below."

" So the other path is my best bet?"

" Yes, but you need to watch out for the Mad Scrubs that lie in wait on some of the stumps." Twilight answered. There were about three Mad Scrubs looking around for anything that was within their attack range, but I couldn't afford to dawdle especially if it meant keeping up with Mrs. Cheerilee.

The tree stumps looked intimidating at first, but it was just like when I jumped from platform to platform back in the forest where all of this started. So long as I didn't jump when one of those scrubs opened fire, or I landed on the edge of a stump and got pelted by a Deku Nut, I wouldn't fall down below to my death. I also knew that I had to be quick so that meant every jump had to be perfect and the Mad Scrubs were pausing in-between shots.

I jumped onto the first stump and narrowly avoided a Deku Nut. A part of me was tempted to use my sword and put the Mad Scrub out of its misery, but that would have only been a waste of time. It would've also been a non-heroic act, and I wasn't about to needlessly take away a creatures life without good reason. Jumping to the next stump, I discovered that each one wrapped around the outer edge of what looked like an old tree that must have been down here for centuries.

It was the Deku Shrine after all, so nods to the forest were expected.

The next three stumps proved slightly challenging as the remaining Mad Scrubs were situated on the first two. I thought about just rushing through and taking my licks from the oncoming Deku Scrubs, but Twilight bopped me on the head to remind me that I could use my shield. It was also a reminder that Mrs. Cheerilee said that I could use anything I'd collected to help me get through, and this was a perfect example of needing one of my items.

Raising my shield in front of me after removing from my back, I charged forward blocking the Deku Nuts that were being lobbed at me. Again, I chose not to attack the Mad Scrubs out of not wanting to resort to senseless violence. I also chose not to grab the green rupees that were scattered about on the tree stumps. They were tempting but my task was to catch up with Mrs. Cheerilee, and not wanting to become richer. One last jump later and I was in the same passageway as she was, yet I knew there was still a long way to go. What was waiting for me in the next section? I had no idea but I was about to find out in mere moments.

" That wasn't so bad."

" Yet you know there are probably tougher challenges ahead, Sunset."

" How far do you think this shrine goes?"

" The world underground stretches much farther than either one of us can fathom. I'd say we could go way deep below the surface of Termina , yet this is normal for Deku as they are plants after all." Twilight answered.

" Guess I'd better get going unless I want to fall behind." I said. The passageway felt just like the one I started the race in, yet I could tell it was different from an esthetic standpoint--the mold on the walls was a dead giveaway along with cobwebs that looked like they had been there for centuries. Just like before, Mad Scrubs and torches were pleasant, yet now there was large balls of fire that served to roast me were I to not weave in-between them. No wonder this was seen as a rite of passage. Being so close to fire when you're a plant meant instant death were you to stray off the path a little bit. " Twilight? Do you have any idea what kind of mask I'll get?" I asked as I turned at another corner.

" It's hard to say really."

" I was hoping you wouldn't say that."

" This world, its tribes, and their customs are all unknown to me, Sunset. Asking me such a question will grant you no answer in return."

" Not even Tatl's memories can help?"

" It's not like I can access them on a whim, Sunset. I've been trying everything I can to use them more efficiently, but so far my efforts have amounted to nothing. Whenever you talk to someone, that allows me some time to see if I can get to those memories." Twilight answered. That explained why she was often quiet during those moments. She was struggling to comprehend Tatl's memories so that she could provide more help instead of being nothing but a helpless fairy. I felt guilty for putting any undue pressure onto Her Highness. I apologized for bringing up the question and it caught her by surprise. " No need to apologize for something I should be able to do. I'm supposed to be your fairy partner. While I've been providing solid advice, what lurks within Tatl's memories are what shall truly prove useful."

" Just... Don't overexert yourself, okay?" I said. I knew Her Highness was gifted in intelligence as well as magic and friendship, yet she had a tendency to go off the deep end were she to focus too much on a subject. Hopefully, she could find a way to get to those memories, yet I was willing to wait a while for her to do so.

Mrs. Cheerilee continued pulling ahead whenever I got close to her, but then I noticed her snickering slightly before pulling away. What was she planning? She knew this place really well, so was she leading me into a trap? No! She wouldn't do a thing like that. Fluttershy wanted me to have the mask Mrs. Cheerilee currently had in her possession, so the idea of her luring me to my death was stupid thinking on my part. However, that wasn't true when it came to what awaited up ahead in the next open area.

It consisted of a fast flowing river--where it came from and where it went were beyond me--with numerous platforms floating along at the same speed. Apart from a small platform embedded into the back wall with a Mad Scrub looking around for prey, this area seemed easier than the previous one. That's when a flying Deku Nut that came from my right revealed that there was a second platform. Looking quickly to my left, the water flowed through an open grille. I relaxed slightly knowing I was too big to fit through those bars. Mrs. Cheerilee floated over the river and that meant I had to do the same by using those platforms.

" Should I change forms here, Twilight?"

" Why?"

" It could make it easier to jump across."

" Maybe, but if you fall in the water, the current will drag you through that grille and to your death."

" Guess I didn't think of it like that."

" You won't be able to use your shield this time, Sunset. Those two Mad Scrubs should be easy to avoid given how much room there is, and you can hop across on those moving platforms at certain angles. Better not take too long otherwise we're going to lose Mrs. Cheerilee." Twilight said.

She had since inched closer to the next passageway, so I had to hurry in hopes of not succumbing to the ever encroaching darkness. I had no time to determine the speed of the platforms, so I jumped to the first one, dodging a Deku Nut that just barely flew by my face. Like before, killing them would serve no purpose apart from bloodlust, and I had since figured out they were merely acting as a defensive measure to test those who came this way. I jumped to the first ledge, ran around the Mad Scrub a few times causing it to fall dizzy, jumped across to the other side, and was just about to jump again when another Deku Nut struck me in the back.

The sharp pain I felt was enough to make me buckle down slightly, but I gritted my teeth and kept going knowing that I had to now contend with a shooting pain along with following a butler. Mrs. Cheerilee hadn't said anything during the race since it started, and I doubted she had any intention of changing her stance. My aim was to focus on staying close until I finally got to the end of this shrine. I jumped on another platform to the other side before continuing down the new passageway. All of a sudden, Twilight flew under my hat and that almost made me run into a nearby wall out of sheer surprise.

" Twilight? Why did you do that?"

" Can't you hear it?"

" Hear what?"

" The sound of moaning. I thought this was supposed to be a shrine dedicated to the Deku Scrubs."

" You've got to be kidding me." I said. I then closed my mouth in order to hear the sound that had freaked Twilight out. It was very faint but I could hear a distinctive moaning coming from somewhere, and I slapped my forehead in response. It was a noise I was hoping to never hear again after what happened before. " Why are their Re-Deads down here!? This isn't a graveyard or the Shadow Temple!"

" What is a Re-Dead?"

" An undead monster that loves to such the life force out of its victims."

" That doesn't sound too bad."

" Oh, and it has a killer scream that can freeze anyone in their tracks." I said. That prompted Twilight to suddenly go silent and I couldn't blame her. Re-Deads were truly terrifying creatures that were almost impervious to most attacks. It took many hits before they finally drop down dead--I mean, become more dead than they already were--but their screaming was nothing short of sheer aggravation. If they were truly down here, I couldn't afford to fall behind Mrs. Cheerilee.

The next staircases upwards became even more annoying as now there were narrow steps surrounded by slopes. I slid down several of these before managing to get to the top, yet this was nothing compared to the boulders that suddenly came barreling down the path. What kind of test would have Dekus avoid massive boulders? It felt more like a test suited to anyone other than a Deku, but then I was ignorant in their ways.

As I continued forward, the passageway opened up to an even larger area than be fore. There were three tree stumps--how deep this chasm went was anyone's guess--and each had a circle of fire. My eyes then detected a Crystal Switch located on a fourth stump that was isolated in the middle of the chamber. Finally, the path turned to the right towards the three initial stumps, so I knew what needed to be done here. The question was, did I have enough time to do it?

Mrs. Cheerilee avoided the circles of fire by simply floating across towards where the switch was, and while I thought of cursing her for taking a shortcut, it made sense. She was quite vulnerable to fire--I could easily handle it--so keeping a safe distance was a good idea.

" I don't need to tell you what to do here, do I?"

" No."

" Just know that your first shot needs to count otherwise we're going to lose her." Twilight said. I wish she hadn't said that. I mean, I had gotten a lot better at using a bow, but I had some issues when it came to aiming properly. I was of the mindset that I could just fire an arrow and hit my target, but I knew better than to think like that. I also needed to remind myself that I couldn't continue doubting my abilities and being insecure.

Taking out the Hero's Bow and making sure not to accidentally hit Mrs. Cheerilee, I aimed carefully at the crystal switch before letting loose an arrow. It flew across the chasm, striking the switch with pin-point accuracy, activated it, and the fire disappeared in an instant. Since there was no way of knowing how long this would last, I quickly put my bow away and began jumping across the tree stumps. Just because I hit my target with ease didn't mean it would happen again. Maybe I should've considered getting some more practice.

Upon making it to the other side, I turned around to see the fire reappeared and the switch lost its glow. Had I taken too long, I would've been knocked down into the chasm belowfor certain. Turning back, I looked upon yet another passageway, and I just couldn't believe it. How big was this shrine anyway? " This is getting ridiculous." I said to myself. " I must have travelled several miles by now, and I'm still no closer to getting to the end. Why would Deku Scrubs go through such torment for a rite of passage? Why not make it more simple by catering to their skills at flying through the use of Deku Flowers?"

I resumed running after Mrs. Cheerilee, who had gotten slightly ahead due to me stopping, but as I turned around several corners, avoided rupee filled paths, and Mad Scrubs who showed no signs of simply letting me pass, another thought came to mind. " If and when I do get to the end, how am I supposed to get back out?" There was no way I could go back the way I came considering some obstacles only worked in one direction. " I hope Mrs. Cheerilee knows of something otherwise we're both stuck here until I choose to reset time." That was an option to consider, but one that would deny me using the entire three days effectively.

When I turned around the next corner, a trail of rupees was right in front of me. Since there were no other paths for me to take, I had no other choice but to continue on and hope that I didn't lose track of Mrs. Cheerilee. As I collected them, I heard a strange sound further ahead. In fact, I had been hearing that sound since the race first started. It was the noise her umbrella made. I picked up the pace and entered a smaller area that was lined with two rows of Mad Scrubs, yet they didn't show any signs of wanting to attack.

" Did you lose her?" Twilight asked.

" I've been following the sound of her umbrella and it lead us straight here."

" That's fine and all, but we need to know where she is."

" I am here."

Twilight and I immediately looked forward, and there was Mrs. Cheerilee, standing in front of another mural that depicted various Deku Scrubs. She stood atop a raised platform with a flame situated either side of her. Since she was no longer moving, it meant that I had finally made it to the end, and not a moment too soon. I was on the verge of collapsing from exhaustion, yet I managed to shake off that desire and walked over to her. The Mad Scrubs went back down into their flowers as I approached, and Mrs. Cheerilee bowed slightly before me after she put her umbrella away.

" Well done, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer."

" That was really difficult!" I said as I struggled to catch my breath.

" Most would've given up a long time ago, yet you persevered and made it to the very end. I must admit that I actually did not think you were going to make it. Please forgive me for my rudeness towards your abilities." Mrs. Cheerilee said.

" So where exactly are we?"

" This room is where all Deku Scrubs must come if they are to become adults." Mrs. Cheerilee answered. She then turned to face the mural, produced a lantern from out of nowhere, and beckoned me to come forward and stand next to her. As I did, I checked her lantern to see if the flame within was sealed off--it was. " This painting depicts Deku who have endured many hardships on their path to becoming adults. Do you notice that there are only a few of them?"

" Yes."

" The rite of passage amongst my kind is a harsh mistress. Most Deku never make it, so while they claim to be adults, they are merely children in the eyes of their peers. If you did make it, you are seen as worthy to the cause." Mrs. Cheerilee said.

" What cause?"

" To further the Deku Kingdom." Mrs. Cheerilee answered, putting the lantern down on the ground. She turned away from me all of a sudden and began fiddling about as though she were grabbing something. I chose not to pry in case it was something personal. When she turned to face me, I couldn't help but notice what she was holding. " Here is the item that I promised you were you to complete the race. We Deku now pass it onto you." In her hand was a mask that looked like a pig's face complete with snout, large beady eyes, and tusks on either side of the snout. " Am I to suspect that you are disappointed with this mask?"

" No, not that, but surprised is all."

" That is understandable. This mask is known as the Mask of Scents. Anyone who wears it will have their senses heightened to the point where they can smell things they couldn't detect before. You may think it's not very useful to one like yourself, but you would be surprised by its hidden potential." Mrs. Cheerilee said. The mask's appearance was rather off-pointing--those eyes were really creepy--yet it was something Adagio said I needed, so at the very least, I should accept this gift from the Deku without complaint. I then grabbed the mask from Mrs. Cheerilee and held it in my hands. " For example, you cannot smell something like mushrooms with your weak nose, but you can with the Mask of Scents."

" Did you say... Mushrooms?"

" Yes. There is a witch who lives on the far edge of the swamp who collects them." Mrs. Cheerilee answered. My eyes opened wide when she said that. I remembered my encounter with Chrysalis when I first entered the swamp. She mentioned something about mushrooms and how she used to collect them. Perhaps this was something to consider the next time I come into the swamp. For now, it was best to go back to Clock Town, and see if there was anything I could do there before resetting time again. " You know, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer. You remind of my son whenever I look at you. He left home a long time ago to understand what he wanted in life, yet at times I wish I knew what he has been up to."

" Your son!?"

" Before he left, he and the Deku Princess used to play together all the time. She was his one and only friend who saw her as anything but a princess."

" And you say I look like him?"

" Well, I wouldn't say you exactly, but rather when you become a Deku Scrub."

" You don't find it odd that I can do that?"

" Most Deku would be appalled at how you can become one of us, but I see it as a unique power that allows you to experience our way of life. Your Deku form... It is that form that reminds me so much of my son." Mrs. Cheerilee answered.

That's when I suddenly remembered the strange Deku Scrub statue I encountered way back when I was first changed into a Deku by Starlight Glimmer. Twilight said the statue bore a striking resemblance to me, yet we both ultimately ignored it. Was it possible that the statue wasn't a statue at all, but rather Mrs. Cheerilee's son? If so, what could have happened to have caused him to become like that? Had Starlight killed him out of sheer pleasure? No, she couldn't have done that. What if her son was like that because of a curse? No, that wouldn't explain why he was where he was in the first place.

I then had another thought. Mrs. Cheerilee said that it was my Deku Scrub form that bore the most resemblance to her son. That meant his spirit was sealed within the Deku Mask that Sonata created after the curse was broken, yet it reaffirmed that Starlight killed him.

Was I living out someone else's life? If so, why was I even doing it? I grabbed my arms and shuddered for a few moments over such a horrible thought. I assumed I was becoming another version of myself, yet instead I had been portraying an innocent child whose life was taken from him far too soon. How could I ever use the Deku Mask again knowing now how it truly came to be?

Another thought crossed my mind. What if Mrs. Cheerilee's son had something important he was trying to accomplish, died before he could complete it, and couldn't rest in peace until it had been completed? If that were the case, had I helped him unintentionally to complete something that meant a great deal to him? She said her son used to play with Fluttershy, so was he trying to get back to Woodfall upon learning that she had been kidnapped? Starlight came along and killed him, yet he couldn't rest until Fluttershy was safe. In that sense, I had finished what he started, and now he can find solace in the beyond. Then again, her son may still have unfinished business... Such as saving Termina from destruction.

Mrs. Cheerilee had since noticed my odd behaviour, so I let go of my arms and relaxed before turning to face her.

" Sorry. I was in deep thought about what you said."

" I appreciate you showing consideration for my son."

" Do you miss him?"

" More than anything in the world, but I know that he will return to me one day." Mrs. Cheerilee answered. I didn't have the heart to tell her that her son was dead and not coming back any time soon. " I felt like I was once again racing my son during our race. As such, I may have tried too hard to outrun you. I may not be young anymore, but I'm still fast to be able to hold my own even against my own son. Please forgive me if I'm sounding rude, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer." I shook my head in response to her. " Do you see that light shining over there?"

" When did that get there?" I asked. To my right, a glowing section had appeared on the floor.

" That appeared because I wished for it. You can use it to return back to the entrance of the Deku Shrine. That is how we Deku manage to leave here once the rite of passage has finished be it in success or failure. Do not be concerned about what I plan on doing next. I think I shall stay here for a little while before I go back and tend to Her Majesty. I look forward to meeting you again someday, Mrs. Sunset Shimmer. Take care." Mrs. Cheerilee answered. She then bowed before me slightly, turned around to face the mural on the wall, and completely ignored me like she were off in her own little world.

" What an unusual character." Twilight said.

" Yeah, but you can tell she has been through some hard times."

" Why did you grab your arms like you were freezing?"

" I thought about that Deku Scrub statue we encountered back in the beginning. It took me a few minutes to figure everything out, and despite not liking some parts, I've come to respect the form that I become whenever I wear that mask." I answered.

" Mind telling me about it?"

" Sure, but let's get out of here first. I don't think Mrs. Cheerilee should know about it." I answered. I didn't need to explain my reasons. Twilight could tell from my expression that what I concluded was something we had to discuss elsewhere.

Walking into the light, at first nothing happened, but then I was suddenly surrounded by a crystal prism. It began to spin around and raised into the air taking me with it. Within a matter of moments, Twilight and I were back outside the entrance to the Deku Shrine. I was certain the light would drop us back inside, but I supposed it wasn't anything that was worth complaining about.

" Want to play the Song of Soaring and warp back to Clock Town?"

" We've got plenty of time before we need to reset time, so I was thinking we could walk back to town. Besides, we might find something new along the way that we couldn't access before now that I have the Hero's Bow." I answered.

" If we do that, we won't get back to town until the evening."

" That's fine with me."

" I suppose you do deserve to relax considering what you went through in Woodfall Temple. The swamp should be more peaceful now that the poison has disappeared, yet you may still encounter some monsters that are native to the area regardless of what you did. Maybe you can try using that new mask you got from Mrs. Cheerilee? Mushrooms do grow rampantly in places like this, so picking up one or two may prove useful for later." Twilight said. Even though I wasn't planning on paying Chrysalis a visit, perhaps I should in case giving her a mushroom would do something good for me in return. Then again, I could pay another visit to Trixie at the Swamp Tourist Centre. I knew she wouldn't remember me as I saved her during the previous cycle, but it might prove enlightening for me.

Rather than become a Deku Scrub and hop across the lily pads, I decided to just wade through and immediately turn right at the main entrance of the palace. Those guards may be happy that their princess has returned, but I doubted they would enjoy seeing a human enter their midst.

" Hey! Is like something bumming you out, dear daughter?" Tree Hugger asked.

" Um, I was just thinking about Mrs. Sunset Shimmer, mother." Fluttershy answered.

" Oh yeah! I don't think I ever gave her a proper thank you for giving me back my flow by bringing you back to me."

" I'm sure she already knows that you were appreciate of her actions."

" You know, that one is one wild and crazy child." Tree Hugger said as she sat down next to Fluttershy. " She seemed like a calm person on the outside, but deep within, her mojo was seriously taking its toll on her chakra. I'm like gonna assume she has seen things most people her age shouldn't ever see until they've properly sprouted.

" Mother? Do you think Mrs. Sunset Shimmer is in trouble?"

" Did you notice how sharp that sword of hers was?"

" Yes, but um, I didn't think it was important."

" I may not be a sword person like she is, dear daughter, but I've been around long enough and seen plenty of others with swords. The sharper the blade, the more bloodshed they've seen, and the harsher their karma gets for taking lives needlessly. That's a funny thing, karma. Many of those sword people love going around and like cutting up everything that gets in their way, but many wind up meeting their end thanks to karma striking them down." Tree Hugger said.

" You don't think?"

Tree Hugger then placed her hand on Fluttershy's shoulder and smiled a gentle smile that was full of sincerity. " Sunset Shimmer may have an awkward mojo probably caused by all that stress she's got, but I know she doesn't like the idea of killing for the sake of it."

" Um... Come again?"

" She will be fine, dear daughter. I know her aura will be tested in the near future, but only she can determine how it will cope with what lies ahead. You've like already guessed I did a reading of her aura before she left the palace, right?" Tree Hugger asked. Fluttershy nodded meekly. " Her aura burns brighter than any I've ever felt before. In fact, I'd say her aura puts mine to shame. And yet, there is something in her aura that is struggling to overcome a dark influence. I don't know if it will cause her chakra to like, drop down until its empty, but if she remains true with her heart, she will succeed."

" I hope so, mother."

" By the way. I was like, totally talking to my advisors before I came out here."

" Um... Are they mad at me?"

" They weren't expecting you to give them such a spirited pep talk, but I blame myself for not giving them a karma reality check. I know they were only trying to help my people, but their actions totally dug against my vibes. I think they will be playing nice from now on. I could always demand that they take some time off to realign their auras. They're truly righteous fellows but need boundaries." Tree Hugger answered.

" Do you suppose father would be proud of your accomplishments?"

" Your father always viewed me as an inspiration. In fact, he planned on marrying a female Deku Scrub who was just as cold as he was, but when he saw me for the first time, he knew that I could change him for the better. Through my blessings, I was able to bring him enlightenment. Our people at first were surprised at how I changed his ebb, but they quickly grew to appreciate my perspective. Before he wilted, your father told me that our kingdom was in perfect hands with me guiding everyone. Sure, my methods are like, totally freaky and radical, but I have to be who I'm meant to be." Tree Hugger answered.

She then looked up at the sky and saw the moon, it's mere presence brought a sense to dread to her face. She looked back at Fluttershy before looking at the moon again, and began humming a tune mixed with strange noises.

" Mother... I haven't heard you sing that melody since I was a baby."

" Looking at that moon bummed me out, but then I remembered that my song always made you feel better."

" Um, you didn't have to do that for me."

" But I had to, dear daughter. Look up at the sky." Tree Hugger said. Fluttershy looked up and her expression turned cold when she saw the moon. " I take it that this is your first time seeing the moon?" Fluttershy nodded before scooting over and cuddled her mother who, in turn, wrapped her hand around her arm and returned a similar affection. " News has reached me that says that our world will be destroyed tomorrow night. I've done everything I could to keep my people from freaking out, but I know that my calming aura isn't enough. Our existence will be wiped out along with everyone else."

" Isn't there anything that can be done?"

" Pray for a miracle."

" Um, but don't you do that?"

" There is only so much I can do, but what you see above us is something that's beyond even my awesome powers. Unless a miracle occurs that can like, save us, there is nothing anyone can do to stop the moon from falling. It will be a huge bummer to everyone." Tree Hugger answered. She began stroking Fluttershy's hair before looking down at her and smiling in a manner that only a mother knew.

" No one can escape from the moon. The humans are like, trying in vain to save themselves, but it's in vain. They will all die with the rest of us. That's why I intend on doing something I should have done long ago." Tree Hugger then let go of her daughter and stood up. " I need to have the rites of passage prepared for those Deku who seek to become adults before it's too late. It's the least I can do at this point."

My trek back through the Southern Swamp was a lot more pleasant than what I was expecting. Because the poison had disappeared thanks to Odolwa's defeat, I could now wade through the water as opposed to having to take it carefully. Most of the monsters had either vanished or crawled back into their holes in the ground, and I was perfectly fine with that. I had no intention of going around and slaughtering them just because they happened to be dangerous. I was certain many of them were only seeking to protect their territory from others who wanted to barge in. Unless any of them were charging at me, I just avoided them and left them to their own devices.

I tried using the Mask of Scents in an effort to find a mushroom, but there weren't any on the path back to the Swamp Tourist Centre. Twilight suggested to me that if I wanted to pick up a mushroom, I should consider visiting the Woods of Mystery. I did consider the option but ultimately decided against it. Even though I did have plenty of time left, it was better served trying to get any additional items that could help me prepare for the next leg of my journey.

The cold reaches of Snowhead were my next destination according to Twilight. The very thought of trudging through the snow sent a shiver down my spine. I wasn't a fan of the cold, and that was thanks to always slipping on the ice during the winter season. Hopefully, Her Highness wouldn't get too upset about my complaining when we get up there.

In the meantime, I paid a visit to the Swamp Tourist Centre in hopes of seeing Trixie, but was told she had left to go on an errand and wouldn't be back for several hours. I was disappointed about not getting to see her, but I could always do so again when I reset time--it would mean going through all that trouble again, but that was the one drawback when it came to going back to the beginning of the seventy-two hour cycle. Trenderhoof, who didn't recognize me, mentioned the contest he was having, yet I already got the reward, so I didn't need to show him anything else. He did mention a game Trixie had prepared in her spare time, but it was something I had to pass on.

On the way back through the path that connected the Southern Swamp to Termina Field, I thought about shooting down Pinkie Pie with an arrow--a better alternative than using a bubble--and ask her anything about Snowhead, but then I remembered her unusual quirk. She wouldn't tell me anything unless I happened to be in the region itself. I did consider shooting her down for a chat, but Twilight suggested otherwise saying we needed to get back to town as soon as possible.

By the time I reached the outside of Clock Town, the sun had already set and the night was slowly settling in.

~Night of the Second Day: 36 Hours Remain~

" We just barely made it back as the sun went down." Twilight said.

" I know you wanted me to use the Song of Soaring, but I figured taking the long way back would prove beneficial." I said.

" In the future, please consider using that song. It will definitely save us plenty of time otherwise."

" That depends on finding more of those Owl Statues."

" By the way, Sunset. Why did you come over to the western entrance of Clock Town?" Twilight asked. Normally, I would've walked through the southern entrance as it was where we embarked upon leaving originally for the swamp. But, I wanted to check out the shops to see if any of them had the supplies I needed to combat Snowhead. When I mentioned my reasons to Twilight, she floated in front of me before quickly darting back and began hopping up and down on my hat. " The shops should be open even though the sun has gone down, but I suggest you be careful. Strange characters do come out at night."

" Do I have enough rupees?"

" You can always take some out of the bank."

" It makes me wish that I had a bigger wallet." I said, taking it out and sighing upon looking at it. It could only hold up to ninety-nine rupees. While that was indeed an incredible sum that could fit into it, there were items in the shops that cost more than that. If I wanted those expensive items, I needed a larger wallet. I had no idea where I could get my hands on one, but it became increasingly obvious that I needed more rupees. " Remind me to deposit more rupees at the bank before we reset time."

" You could do with having some in the bank."

" If I don't get an upgrade soon, buying certain items is going to be impossible." I said, putting my wallet back in my pocket. Just as I took my hand out of my pocket after putting my wallet into it, a strange sound suddenly echoed all around me. " Twilight, do you hear someone playing music?" The sound was rather faint, but it was coming from on top a large rock formation that resembled some kind of mushroom. " I can definitely hear music although it sounds more like a whistle than anything else." I perked up my ears in hopes of hearing the sound a lot better, and sure enough, it was coming in loud and clear, and from on top of that rock.

" Who do you suppose could be out here at night?"

" I don't know, but what say we find out?"

" Didn't you want to visit the shops?"

" With my wallet? I'd rather have a larger one than what I currently have."

" True."

" Besides, this may prove interesting." I said. Twilight shrugged her shoulders. She knew that once I made a decision, I planned on sticking through with it. There were several mushroom-like rock formations on the west side of Termina Field, yet the largest rock was where the sound was coming from. In the distance, I could barely make out someone standing on top of it, and it looked like they were in pain.

I walked towards the rock and as I did, the music continued to get louder until I eventually reached it. On top of the rock were a pile of stones, and standing in the middle of them was a strange man who was wearing nothing but a white loin cloth. He was dancing about in an unusual manner, and every so often, he would squat down slightly--I thought he was doing something naughty--before rising again. His most distinguishing features were the stubble on his chin and the hairstyle of his blond hair.

The strangest thing about this man had to be his complexion or rather his lack of it. He looked utterly pale as though he hadn't eaten anything for days, but I'd soon realize what was really going on.

Before I could cross the small gap between the rock and the ground I was standing on--a small wall was in the way--Twilight bopped me on the head, and I looked up at her to see what she wanted.

" I don't believe it!"

" What?"

" That's Zephyr Breeze!"

" I don't know anyone by that name."

" He's Fluttershy's younger brother. I'm not sure if the human Fluttershy has any siblings, but the pony version sure does, and this would be him. When I first met him, he was a slacker who had no motivation to do anything himself, and would get somepony else to do it for him. He would start something but never finished it by simply giving up all because of how laidback he was. Rainbow Dash couldn't stand him due to how he tried hitting on her, and he had a shaky sibling relationship with Fluttershy." Twilight said.

" Sounds like a pony you'd love to hate."

" He managed to turn things around after several failed attempts and through encouragement by Rainbow and Fluttershy."

" Weren't expecting him to be here, were you?"

" Not in the least."

" I might as well talk to him and see what he has to say." I said. Twilight nodded although I could tell she wasn't being sincere with me. This Zephyr Breeze must have rubbed her the wrong way back in Equestria, yet he was someone completely different in Termina. Her Highness didn't need to show any disdain towards him because he didn't know any better.

The gap between the ground and rock was small, so I easily jumped across. Upon landing, Zephyr paid no attention to my presence, and instead continued dancing with no signs of stopping any time soon. I was actually amazed at how unique his dance moves were compared to what I had seen on television. Since he ignored me initially, I walked up to him to get his attention, and he turned his head towards me.

" I am no longer part of the living... My sadness to the moon... I haven't left my dance to the world... I am filled with regret." Zephyr Breeze said. I had no idea what he was going on about, but it quickly became apparent that his pale complexion was the result of him being dead and not from a lack of food.

" What are you talking about?" I asked.

" I am no longer part of the living... My sadness to the moon... I haven't left my dance to the world... I am filled with regret." Zephyr Breeze answered. Again, I had no idea what he was saying, and it started to make me very angry. He then noticed my expression and looked down before looking back up. " (Translation) I am disappointed, oh moon. I have died! Why did I come out here knowing full well that the creatures had grown restless."

" Is that how you died?"

" Yes. Oh moon! Why did those creatures pursue me? I had caused them no ill will."

" Who are you?"

" My name is of no consequence... I lost that when I no longer lived among the living."

" You've got to be kidding me!? You may be dead but that doesn't mean you aren't entitled to the identity of who you once were in life." I said. Zephyr then looked up at the moon this time before looking at the ground, and followed it up by looking at me again. I didn't understand why he was doing that, but I had every mind to tell him to stop.

" Oh moon, this one possesses a strong spirit."

" Glad you noticed."

" My name is Kamaro. When I was of the living, I perfected a dance that I had spent many years working on. It had been my life's work and now, I have died. Oh moon, I have died and to you, strange child, my sorrow continues to linger even now. Oh, I planned to bring the world together and stir it into a giant melting pot with my dance! That was my only joy, and now I have lost all meaning. I am filled with regret." Zephyr Breeze said.

" You want to teach your dance to someone?"

" That was my goal, but alas I have died."

" What's stopping you from doing it anyway?" I asked. I quickly covered my mouth with my hands. He had clearly explained why he couldn't teach anyone his dance, yet I blundered by saying something so stupid. I then took a closer look at Zephyr's face. Despite how stoic it looked, I could see the tears trickling down his face. He truly wanted to bring inspiration to this world, yet now he couldn't.

" If only I had taught my new dance to someone... I could finally rest in peace."

" How can someone do that?"

" Oh moon, why did I die at the hands of the monsters?"

" Answer my question!"

Zephyr then went completely silent and continued dancing. I shouted him in an effort to get an answer, but he refused to say anything. Already, I was beginning to see why he was so annoying to Her Highness. I was just about to lose my temper when Twilight bopped me on the head again--she really enjoyed doing that to get my attention. Had she figured out the solution? I certainly couldn't see an answer.

" Hmmm... He regrets not teaching someone his dance." Twilight said.

" Regret usually occurs when you remain tied to this world upon death."

" A grim way of looking at it, Sunset, but not incorrect."

" Have you figured out what we can do to help him?"

" Well, he does appear to be tormented from not achieving his goal in life. Perhaps he needs to have his soul healed? That might make him feel better and give him the incentive to teach you his dance." Twilight answered.

To heal his soul meant playing the Song of Healing, but would that cause him to become sealed inside of a mask? I mean, that's what happened when I played it to remove the curse Starlight Glimmer gave me when I first stumbled into Termina. Was I willing to do the same thing to this innocent--also annoying--spirit?

I thought about it for a few moments before concluding that I had to heal him. I took out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch, raised it to my lips, and was about to play when I suddenly stopped and looked forward at Zephyr. I had forgotten how the song was meant to be played, as I had only played it the one time when I cured myself. I began thinking quickly as to how it went, hoping he wouldn't get annoyed over my actions. Her Highness, on the other hand, stared up at the moon before turning her attention back to what was happening.

When I finally remembered how the song went, Zephyr sighed before starting to dance a little faster, and I knew that I had wasted enough of his time. Raising the ocarina to my lips, I played the Song of Healing, but it didn't have any effect. I thought perhaps I had played the wrong song or at least the wrong note, but I should've remembered that some forms of magic take time for them to work. Zephyr slowed down no sooner had he started speeding up, and something began to appear behind his back.

" That song... Oh moon, it is so heavenly." Zephyr Breeze said.

" I have healed your soul."

" Could you be the one... My joy has been rekindled." Zephyr Breeze said. What appeared behind his back started to glow, and he quickly spun around, grabbed it, spun back, and presented a mask. It was in the shape of his head, and had a really long neck that connected his head to what constituted as the part that went on my face. " Spread my dance across the world... Train its followers... (Translation) I have taught it to you, now make it into a popular dance craze!" Zephyr held out his hands and I took the mask from them.

" Is this your mask?"

" By wearing it, you will be able to perform the very dance I spent years perfecting."

" Who am I supposed to show it to?"

" There are those who are dedicated to the dance... Show them my life's joy... They shall in turn spread it, oh moon, they shall." Zephyr Breeze said. He then stopped dancing and lurched forward until his face was mere inches from mine. I felt really uncomfortable, yet I could see tears were no longer trickling down his face. Was this his way of telling me that I had helped him finally find peace? " I am counting on you. (Translation) I am counting on you. Oh moon, I am counting on you." Zephyr suddenly disappeared by vanishing in a puff of smoke, and it left Twilight feeling shocked over what she just witnessed. It didn't faze me in the least. After all, this was something I had seen before.

" Where did he go?" Twilight asked.

" His soul can finally rest knowing that I've accepted the responsibility of spreading his dance." I answered.

" Are you sure you can handle it, Sunset?"

" I don't really have much of a choice, do I?" I asked. I looked down at the mask Zephyr had given me before he vanished. Upon a second glance, the tiny head on the mask that represented his head wasn't really Zephyr at all, but rather the real Kamaro whom Fluttershy's younger brother had portrayed. Why did I think otherwise? Perhaps it was one of those "spur of the moment" moments that blinded me to what was real.

This mask, according to Zephyr, would allow me to perform the dance that he performed throughout our entire encounter. I was to teach it to those who would become my followers and spread the dance further until it became incredibly popular. All I needed now was an actual dancer. The only place that would have a dancer was back in town, but that also meant searching every nook and cranny, and that could take up the rest of my time. I heaved a sight knowing I didn't want to disappoint Zephyr, so I slowly walked through the western entrance of Clock Town, my head hung low.

A strange music suddenly gripped my ears the instant I entered West Clock Town, and it immediately sounded familiar. I darted my head left and right to see where the music was coming from, and standing on the opposite side of the area were a pair of what I assumed were dancers--it wasn't their clothing that clued me in but rather their terrible attempts at trying to perform some poses. It looked like things were suddenly looking up until Twilight floated near a guard who happened to be staring at the dancers. I thought that the town militia were supposed to be watching out for troublemakers, not oogling over a pair of women.

" Excuse me--" I began, stepping closer to the guard."

" Huh? And what can I do for you?"

" Why are you staring at those women over there?"

" Don't tell me you haven't heard of the famous Rosa Sisters of Gorman's Troupe? They are renowned as being the best dancers in all of Termina, and were taught their craft by their mother who, in turn, was taught by her mother."

" That doesn't answer why you're looking at them."

" They were out here last night trying to come up with a dance routine, and now they're back at it again. I tried to ask them if they needed any assistance, but they said I was bothering them, and I've kept my distance since."

" Is that so?"

" I feel sorry for those two, ma'am. They've done so many different routines throughout their careers, yet they wanted to do something special for the Carnival of Time. As you can see, it hasn't been working out very well, and it's made them really antsy." I then looked at the Rosa Sisters again, and I could see where the guard was coming from. They started to perform a routine but it quickly faltered when one of them stumbled over. The other helped her sister up before they resumed with a different routine. " A sad sight wouldn't you say?"

" And you say that they shun anyone who tries to talk to them?"

" When you've got something as important as the Carnival of Time tomorrow night, it can produce an intense amount of pressure that stems from wanting to perform flawlessly in front of patrons who look up to you for inspiration."

" Is there anyone who can help them?"

" There was one person who could've, but he passed away most unexpectedly."

" Oh? Who was it?"

" His name was Kamaro. Before the Rosa Sisters became a huge sensation, he was seen as Termina's greatest dancer, yet was rather eccentric. They say he was perfecting some kind of new dance no one had ever seen, yet when he went out into Termina Field one night, the monsters out there chased him down. I don't need to tell you what happened next as I think you can figure it out on your own."

It didn't take a genius to figure out what needed to be done here. The Rosa Sisters needed a new dance routine, and what Zephyr had passed onto me was exactly what they needed to entertain their audience. With Kamaro's Mask held firmly in my head, I walked over to the sisters, but immediately stopped upon realizing who they were. Much like how Twilight was surprised upon seeing Zephyr Breeze, I was surprised at who was standing before me.

" What's wrong, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" Look at who the Rosa Sisters are."

Twilight looked at them for a few moments before looking back at me. " I'm sorry, but I don't recognize either of them."

" That's right! You weren't there for the Friendship Games, so you never met any of the Shadowbolts. The one on the left is Indigo Zap, an athletic nut who is Rainbow Dash's biggest rival, and perhaps the most optimistic person Crystal Prep has ever seen--regarding sports. She and Rainbow didn't see eye to eye during the Games, but things have gotten better now since then. The other one is Sunny Flare, a student who desires perfection above anything else, and is willing to do whatever it takes in order to get it. She can be flamboyant, short-tempered, and proud, but she does possess quite the good heart." I said.

" What are the odds?"

" Yeah."

" Ugh! That was another failed routine, sister." Indigo Zap said.

" At this rate, we're never going to be ready for the Carnival of Time tomorrow night." Sunny Flare said.

" I don't think it'll happen."

" What!? Of course the carnival has to happen. It's tradition! People in Clock Town have been celebrating at this time every year for generations. The thought of them suddenly breaking that trend is just ridiculous." Sunny Flare said.

" Guru-Guru told me that he heard from Gorman that the carnival has been cancelled."

" What!? Why!?"

" Just look up at that moon!" Indigo Zap said. Sunny Flare then looked up and scoffed at what she saw. " I wouldn't do that if I were you, sister. That thing's getting really close now, and could very well smash this town to bits. Heck! It's likely going to smash all of Termina to bits."

" So what do you want me to do about it?"

" Nothing, unless you know of a way to stop the moon."

" Let's just focus on what we do best, sister, and that's practice for the carnival. I'll bet this whole moon business is just a bunch of nonsense designed to scare everyone from coming to town tomorrow night." Sunny Flare said.

" Quite the optimism."

" I'll bet they'll go through with the carnival despite what's falling above us."

Was Sunny Flare being serious? Was she so ignorant about the moon that she pretends that it's nothing more than a hoax? I understood that not everyone is accepting the fact that the moon will crash into Clock Town tomorrow evening, but they were trying to hide the truth from their eyes. Anyone who sees the moon must know this world hangs precariously by a thread that continues to weaken until it breaks.

But, I was getting ahead of myself by focusing on the wrong thing. If I were to walk up to the two sisters and start complaining about Sunny Flare's attitude regarding the moon, it would make me look to be the bad guy, and they'd refuse my help. I had to help them learn a new dance routine.

Chapter 19: A Cold Wasteland

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
July 11, 2016
Chapter 19: A Cold Wasteland.

As I approached Indigo Zap and Sunny Flare, neither of them paid any attention to me. They had since gone back to focusing on coming up with a new dance routine, but it was obvious that tensions existed between the two regarding the moon. No one could deny that it was falling from on high--looking at it would definitely give you that impression--yet despite knowing what looms overhead, one sister wanted to continue believing that the carnival would happen as expected. This wasn't the first time I had noticed people going about their business despite impending disaster.

They were either truly brave, completely in denial, or believed that nothing could be done and were graciously awaiting their demise. From what I had observed through my conversations with these characters, they'd mainly accepted the latter option. Had Starlight Glimmer taken away what little hope they had to see them through this crisis? What could have possessed her to cause so many problems? Had she no morals? Those were just a few questions that needed answering, yet many more were waiting for me to uncover them.

Indigo was of the mindset that the moon would destroy all of Termina, and Sunny Flare cast it aside as superstitious nonsense designed to instill fear. Her perspective reminded me of what happened when I went to see Mayor Mare--Mayor Dotour--in her office. She was being plagued by opposing sides who either wanted the public to flee or continue on with the carnival as planned. Not everyone believed the moon was a threat. I would gladly tell them that they were being foolish, and that the moon would be their end. But, because of my ability to reset time, they didn't even know that they were being spared.

Were both sides right in their opinion? Fleeing Clock Town sounded like a plausible option, in theory, but then there wasn't really anywhere people could go to truly avoid the destruction the moon would cause. That brought up another theory. Was there land beyond the borders of Termina? If so, why not have everyone relocate there? Sure, it would be rather inconvenient, but they'd be safe although it would mean having to rebuild their lives. Proceeding as normal with the carnival meant defying the destruction, yet that meant believing a miracle would occur. No wonder Mayor Mare looked so miserable. She struggled to come up with an ideal solution that would please both sides.

Shaking my head, I focused on what I was supposed to be doing instead of lamenting over what might be. Still, Sunny Flare's words made think about the overall scope of this world, and how its people were going about their lives whether they accepted their fate or not. It also made me think of my actions when it came to helping them deal with their problems, like what I was about to do with these "sisters". Even though resetting time effectively wipes out my deeds--it also wipes out any knowledge of my existence--was it a waste of my time? I personally didn't think so, as helping people was natural for me to do. On the other hand, helping anyone meant nothing if they didn't remember it. The only way to know for certain was to bring the four Giants to Clock Town.

Eventually, the two sisters noticed that I was watching them, and turned towards me with anger in their faces. Their attire didn't look anything like the costumes dancers usuallywore back home, but perhaps this was a Terminian custom?

" Go away! You're bothering us!" Indigo Zap said.

" Can't you see that we're busy!" Sunny Flare said.

" I couldn't help but notice that you two were struggling." I said.

" What!? Us!? Struggling!? You've gotta be kidding! We're the world famous Rosa Sisters! We don't struggle with anything when it comes to dancing! What would you know, you little brat?" Sunny Flare asked as she scoffed at me. I knew she was trying her best to not appear weak in front of me, but she was doing a lousy job. Pride was something that she obviously had, and didn't want it to be tarnished. " If you came for an autograph, wait until tomorrow!"

" I'm sorry if my sister comes off as being rude." Indigo Zap said. She looked at her sister with a glare that could make anyone cower in fear. Sunny Flare, for her part, simply turned her back to me and continued practicing. " My sister is usually a lot more friendlier than that, but we've been having problems lately coming up with a new dance routine for the carnival tomorrow night." Indigo wiped her hand across her forehead to stop some sweat from trickling down. " Our dancing has always been the talk amongst people across Termina, so we always strive to come up with something new. But, with the carnival being cancelled, I'm wondering if we should even be practicing."

" The carnival's still happening, sister!"

" Gorman was told otherwise by Monsieur Aroma."

" Huh? The mayor's husband said that?"

" According to Guru-Guru."

" Well, Monsieur Aroma words shouldn't be ignored, but why would Gorman not want to tell us in person? I mean, I'm all for Guru-Guru explaining it to us, but why didn't our leader just say it to our faces instead? That would've solved a few problems instead of creating some." Sunny Flare said.

" Maybe he didn't want your dreams to be crushed?" I asked.

" And what makes you think that?" Sunny Flare asked. She lurched forward, arms on her hips, until her nose was mere inches away from mine. I could tell that she was about to insult me even further, but I wasn't about to call her out. Both sisters were troubled with what had been going on in Clock Town, and making Sunny Flare feel even worse would only make things more difficult regarding their problem. " You seem to be an expert on matters that don't involve you."

" I don't personally know Gorman, but I do understand where he's coming from with regards to his decision to not inform you of the carnival's cancellation. He knows that you've been looking forward to this event all year, and he'd love nothing more than to see you perform your very best. But, he also knows that revealing a terrible truth would shatter what expectations you currently have. It would also shatter your confidence." I said.

" Wow... For a kid, you certainly have a keen observation."

" My sister is correct. However, it doesn't explain why the moon's descent resulted in the carnival being cancelled." Indigo Zap said.

" Safety, I suppose." I said. To be honest, that wasn't my best answer, but then I was on the spot to say something otherwise Sunny Flare would twist the conversation about to make me come off as an uppity kid who thought she knew it all.

" Is there anywhere truly safe?" Sunny Flare asked.

" Not really."

" Figures you'd say that, kid! Looks like your opinion is wrong, sister, but then my own opinion has proven to be wrong." Sunny Flare said. She backed away from me, sat down on the ground, buried her head in her hands, and began to think about what had been said in the conversation. " We must believe that the Carnival of Time is still going to happen despite all this doom and gloom everyone around here has been having. We're the Rosa Sisters, after all! If we can make people happy with our dancing, that should relieve them of their misery until everything comes to an end."

" So, you do believe the moon is falling?" Indigo Zap asked.

" I'm not entirely convinced, but I do know that things aren't quite what they seem."

" Better than you outright denying it."

" Shall we resume our practicing, sister?"

" You've given me the encouragement to please our audience." Indigo Zap answered. She then turned to face me again, her annoyed look having since come back after she had been concerned for how her sister had treated me. " I'm sorry kid, but you'll have to leave us alone now. We must come up with a new dance routine to please the people. If we continue talking with you, we'll never get ready in time."

" Maybe I can help you." I said.

" Do you know anything about dancing?"

" Well, not exactly but--"

" How can she say that she can help us when she knows nothing about dancing? Ugh! Listen, kid! If you're trying to make us feel better, it isn't working! We were hoping to have learned a dance from the legendary dancer, Kamaro, but he died in Termina Field." Sunny Flare said.

" My sister is quite right. You can't help us because you don't know the first thing about dancing. Now, would you please stop bothering us? We've got to get back to practicing until we can come up with a new routine. If only we could've learned one of Kamaro's dances. Despite how eccentric he was, he had the power to make anyone mesmerized with his fluidity after just a few minutes of starting." Indigo Zap said. Both sisters then turned and walked away to give themselves some room to continue.

Despite some ups and downs, they both deeply cared for each other. It was that kind of sentiment that brought a tear to my eye. However, I also knew that they needed some help, and that meant I had to teach them the dance that Zephyr Breeze--aka Kamaro--had left me to spread into a popular craze. To be fair, I wasn't exactly sure how to actually go about teaching the Rosa Sisters. All Zephyr gave me was a mask before disappearing. Was it possible that a part of his spirit had been sealed into the mask just like what happened when I cured myself from being stuck as a Deku Scrub?

I took out Kamaro's Mask and looked at it carefully. Despite how strange it looked, I felt a strange power emnating from it. Even though he didn't actually teach me his dance--it probably would've taken several years--he said that by wearing his mask, I could perform the dance he was performing when I encountered him outside town. I doubted that I would be as experienced as he was or as fast, but then the Rosa Sisters didn't need to know that. So long as I showed them the basic routine, they'd be able to mimic my movements and perform the dance. They would be doing it naturally whilst I would be doing it through the use of a mystic mask.

My only concern, was how was I supposed to see anything? The part of the mask that goes on my face had no eyeholes. If I were to put on it on and stumble about, I'd be doing a great disservice to Zephyr. I couldn't desecrate the legacy he had left behind! I thought about asking Twilight for some advice, but she didn't exactly understand the powers contained within these masks--I didn't understand it either and I was the one who had to wear them.

No! I had to believe that Zephyr was telling me the truth about his mask. Holding it firmly in front of my face, I put it on and immediately expected to be surrounded by darkness due to being blinded. In reality, I could still see everything. I quickly pulled off the mask and looked at it again. What kind of power did it possess? Granted, the Blast Mask--one I needed to use--didn't have eyeholes either, but I suspect that upon wearing it, I'd be able to see just like I could with Kamaro's Mask. All of them had unique traits and it meant collecting them was more important than I realized. Adagio could be thanked for giving me the suggestion.

" How do I look?" I asked Twilight, putting Kamaro's Mask on my face again.

" Can you even see out of that?" Twilight asked.

" That was my concern but miraculously, my vision is the same as before."

" It does look weird on your face, though."

" Hopefully, the Rosa Sisters don't freak out over seeing me like this."

" They'll be curious more than anything else."

" What do you mean?"

" Masks are a means to hide one's identity, right? Even if someone saw someone else and then saw that same person a few moments later wearing a mask, the first person would view the second one as someone new. If you go up to the Rosa Sisters with that mask on, they'll think you're someone else." Twilight answered. Her answer felt like she was insulting their intelligence and that everyone in Termina would react in a similar manner.

I knew there was truth to Her Highness' words in that wearing a mask did give off the impression of being a different character, but surely people could recognize you from the clothes you wear or something like your hairstyle. " It may sound like I'm being critical of people's intellect, but surely you've seen examples of how someone reacts differently depending on what's on your face." Twilight said.

" Only when I was a Deku Scrub."

" Both of your forms will cause people to respond accordingly, Sunset. Remember those guards posted at the gates? They wouldn't let you leave as a Deku because they thought you were a child, but they let you leave without any questions when you were human." Twilight said.

" I was carrying a sword." I said, pointing to the scabbard on my back behind my shield.

" The point is, the Rosa Sisters will see you as someone else because of the strange perception that revolves around wearing a mask. It sounds weird, I know, but have faith in what I'm saying, Sunset." Twilight said. It's not that I didn't believe her, but rather how she said people wouldn't recognize me just because I had something on my face. Humans had their faults but they weren't completely devoid of brains.

Since I knew it was pointless to argue with Her Highness--she did have knowledge on her side--I walked up to Indigo and Sunny Flare, who immediately stopped practicing and looked at me with puzzled expressions. Twilight's theory wasn't going to work--I just knew it wouldn't--but then the two walked in a circle around me several times. It looked as though they were trying to deduce my identity but couldn't put their fingers on it. Surely they recognized my tunic from just a few minutes ago!

Once they finished their observation, they huddled off to the side and began whispering something that was too quiet for me to hear. I then looked at the guard in case he decided to get involved, but he merely stood in place like a statue. The sisters eventually came back over although I felt nervous over what they were going to say about me.

" That's quite the strange mask you're wearing." Indigo Zap said.

" Um, thank you." I said nervously.

" We were practicing a new dance routine, but we stopped because of seeing 'that' on your face." Sunny Flare said.

" Does it frighten you?"

" No, I wouldn't say that. More like it just looks so weird. I've seen a couple of people walking around town wearing masks, so you would easily fit in with them. Still, I think you should leave us alone. As long as you hang around here in that get-up, my sister and I can't concentrate on preparing for the carnival tomorrow." Sunny Flare answered.

" You're having problems?"

" When you're as famous as we are, coming up with new material can be extremely difficult. We've tried all kinds of poses and maneuvers but none of them work. We want to try a routine that has a lot of pizzazz if you know what I mean." Sunny Flare answered. She then noticed my tunic and pondered over it for a second. Surely she knew that I was the same person she and her sister spoke to mere minutes. " But, it's none of your business. You're bothering us!"

" Can I help?"

" With what?" Indigo Zap asked.

" Give you a new dance routine."

" What!? You!?" Sunny Flare exclaimed.

" I might have exactly what you need."

" Just because you waltzed into this area doesn't suddenly make you an authority on dancing. It takes years and years of intense training, dieting, having a nimble body, and possessing perfect choreography with your partner. I bet you can't even dance!" Sunny Flare shouted.

" I'm inclined to agree with my sister, but I'll give you the benefit of the doubt. If you think you can help us out, by all means show us what kind of dancing you can do. We'll give you as much space as you need." Indigo Zap said. She and Sunny Flare stepped back a few paces and I took a single step back before turning my back to them.

What was I thinking, turning away from them? Were they thinking that I was a liar for saying that I could show them a new routine? Or did they find me ignorant for boasting that I could do something they had been struggling to figure out? Underneath the mask, sweat dripped down my brow and my breathing became erratic. I was completely nervous about dancing for them, but this was something Zephyr desired just before he disappeared into the ether. The tapping from Sunny Flare's foot only furthered accentuated the pressure that was already building up inside of me, but I knew that I had to go through with this.

If the mask on my face was just like the other ones I had, there was nothing I needed to do. The mask itself would do what was necessary for me to achieve success. Twilight sensed that I needed her to not be on my hat, so she floated above the sky before looking down at what was about to happen. The music that I heard when I first came into West Clock Town began playing, and that meant it was time. I gulped heavily and took my first step.

Just like that, my body began moving on its own as though a strange force had taken control of me. I began moving my hips left and right in a swinging motion whilst moving my feet forward and back a single step interchanging between them. My left hand was behind my back while my right was up against the mask. Underneath it, I thought about how it was possible for me to be dancing something I hadn't been taught. The magic contained within the mask must have been Zephyr's--no, Kamaro's--spirit and was guiding me along. Indigo and Sunny Flare watched in awe as I continued to swing my hips around, but then the next bit surprised them--it even surprised me.

I spread my legs apart and squatted down until my rear was a couple of feet above the ground. I had no idea why I did that, but it was something Zephyr had done when I talked with him prior to speaking to the Rosa Sisters. My hands reached up to the mask, and began swaying back and forth slightly in conjunction with my legs swaying about. The sisters began talking amongst themselves and this time I could hear what they were saying. They were surprised at how my dance was unlike anything they had ever seen before. So far, it was working but me dancing alone wouldn't solve the problem. I needed them to follow along and dance the same routine.

After being stuck in the squatting position for what felt like forever--it was more like roughly six seconds--I lifted my body up, spun around on my right leg, extended my left arm out, held my right up to my face, and began the routine all over again. Unlike Zephyr who managed to perform the routine extremely quickly, my version was slower although easier for someone to memorize if they were watching.

Were Indigo and Sunny Flare attempting to perform the dance? I couldn't tell as my body wouldn't let me look at them no longer than a mere second. The power of the mask had compelled me to continue dancing.

" Are you seeing this?" Sunny Flare asked.

" Unbelievable!" Indigo Zap answered.

" Look at how her body flows about."

" It's poetry in motion."

" There's no mistaking that this is a dance that Kamaro himself created, yet how did this kid manage to learn it? No one could've mastered one of the legendary Kamaro's dances unless they were willing to sacrifice their bodies in the process." Sunny Flare said.

" Whoever she is, she is definitely a dancer."

" Yes, sister. I underestimated her."

" Shall we?"

" I think we shall."

The mask then began showing me a vision in my mind of Indigo and Sunny Flare performing the same dance routine. I was impressed that they were able to mimic my movements precisely after having witnessed it being done twice. Then again, they were professional dancers while I was just using a mask to achieve the same effect. In the meantime, the guard had been watching our performance intently, yet he knew what his place was. He had to stand guard to make sure monsters didn't enter, but deep down he wanted to get close and watch.

Once I felt certain that the two sisters had performed the dance successfully, I raised my body, spun around on my right leg, and finally planted my left foot on the ground ending the dance in an instant. Despite having danced for several minutes, I felt no signs of exhaustion nor any sweat pouring down every facet of my being. If Zephyr were watching me right now wherever he was, I was certain he was proud that I had fulfilled his dream.

I reached for my face in order to remove the mask, but Twilight stopped me by bopping my head.

Turning to Indigo and Sunny Flare, I was surprised to find them on their hands and knees.

" You... That dance was amazing." Sunny Flare said.

" Never have we seen anything like it." Indigo Zap said.

" I must apologize for doubting your ability to dance. In truth, your movements were beautiful and your choreography was sublime. I think I speak for my sister when I say we're both in awe over what you just did." Sunny Flare said.

" If it's okay with you, we'd like to use this routine at the Carnival of Time tomorrow night." Indigo Zap said. I nodded my head and they both squealed with glee. " Thank you for teaching us this new dance. From this moment onward, you are our master."

" Master, you were wonderful."

" We have something for you that we'd like you to have. It's a token of our appreciation for teaching us." Indigo Zap said. She reached behind her back and pulled out a Piece of Heart that glowed brightly in her hand. Just seeing its majestic was enough to make me happy, but then I did this not to get any reward out of it. I did it because it was the right thing to do, and they needed help. " We were given this a long time ago by a strange woman who possessed an aura that could be best described as breath-taking. We told her that we had no use for it, but she said to keep it until the right person comes along who you could give it to."

" Please accept our gift, master." Sunny Flare said. I reached out and took the Piece of Heart from Indigo, and immediately my body felt the same warmth that usually came whenever I got my hands on one. Before I could thank them properly, they started clapping upon getting back onto their feet. I felt embarrassed knowing they were smitten what over I had done for them, underneath my mask, my face began to blush. " Master, you're so cool. It'd be a great honour if you could come and watch us at the carnival."

" You want me to be there?" I asked.

" Of course! We'll make sure you have a front row seat."

" Nothing is too good for our master." Indigo Zap said.

" We'll speak with Gorman about it tomorrow morning when he wakes up."

" Master, feel free to speak to us any time you want. We'll always be willing to chat with you should you feel the need to. Now, we must resume practice with our new routine so that we may prove ourselves worthy of your teaching." Indigo Zap said. With that, she and Sunny Flare turned and walked a few paces before performing Kamaro's dance. They were in perfect sync with each other, and that meant they were going to be fine.

Since I no longer needed to wear Kamaro's Mask, I removed it from my face, breathed a sigh of relief, and ran my hand across my face. I wanted to see if I was sweating after going through a grueling experience. My hand revealed no sweat. Looking back upon Indigo and Sunny Flare, I wished that I could help them deal with the true problem at hand, namely, changing the world back to the way it was supposed to be. They obviously didn't know things weren't meant to be this way, and were completely entrenched portraying the Rosa Sisters.

I looked down at the mask in my hands, at the sisters, then up at the moon, and it made me realize something. Despite everything I had done: rescuing Fluttershy, saving a monkey, freeing Principal Celestia from being trapped inside an evil mask, soothing Zephyr Breeze's spirit, and helping two Shadowbolts learn a dance, it ultimately would amount to nothing. When I reset time, all of this would go back to the way it was before I arrived in Termina. My hard work would be gone.

" Is something bothering you, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" When we restart time, all of this will revert back." I answered.

" The one drawback of reliving the same three days over and over."

" Twilight? Do you think my efforts amount to anything in the overall grand scheme?"

" It's hard to say because we don't know what will happen once the moon has stopped falling. I know our current efforts will be wiped clean upon restarting, but I'd like to think that you're doing the right thing by helping. Besides, that notebook you got from Sonata should be keeping tabs on the people you've helped." Twilight answered.

Her Highness was right. I quickly took out the Bomber's Notebook from somewhere on my person and opened it up. Entries for both Kamaro and the Rosa Sisters had since appeared in it, yet the portraits were of the characters as they were meant to be in the game. I flipped back a couple of pages to see if Fluttershy had been given an entry, and sure enough, there she was along with Mrs. Cheerilee--rather, it was the Deku Princess and Deku Butler respectively. Despite time undoing my work, the notebook contained proof that I had been helping out those who needed it. Would there be other people? Most likely as Termina was brimming with people who were miserable.

" Do you think we have enough time to get started on the next region?"

" Maybe, but we don't know for sure what awaits us up there."

" We know that the Gorons live in the mountains, but we haven't seen any around here since we arrived."

" Going to Snowhead now might not be a wise decision, Sunset. Tatl's memories have nothing about the region, so we would be going in blind. Perhaps we should start our trek there on the next seventy-two hour cycle? That way, we can have the full three days to explore it instead of just one and a half days." Twilight said.

The only problem with her idea was that I didn't have anything else to do as far as I was aware. Much of Termina still remained inaccessible due to not having the correct items, so resetting time now with plenty of time left would be wasteful. That's when a thought hit my mind.

Earlier, I had complained about having a small wallet and needing some way to upgrade to a bigger one. What if I spent some time trying to find a way to get it? That would mean not wasting time, and it would certainly make purchasing certain items a little easier. The only problem involved finding someone who knew something. Another problem was finding plenty of rupees to fill up the wallet with.

" I'm going to get a better wallet!" I announced to the surprise of Twilight.

" How do you plan on doing that?"

" Someone must know where I can get my hands on one."

" Well, I guess it's better than not doing anything."

" Now who would be an expert when it comes to money?"

" The upper class might know something, but I doubt they'd want to speak to someone like you because of your status. It happens far too often in Equestria these days and something really needs to be done about it. Anyway, the only other I can think of is Fleur Dis Lee who runs the bank behind the Clock Tower." Twilight answered. I was surprised that she used our home land in such context. Her Highness was right about Equestria having a disparity issue between high and low class ponies, but I didn't think she would use it to talk about finding out how to get my hands on a bigger wallet.

She was right about Fleur Dis Lee, however. If anyone knew something about money, it would be her, and she might know where I could find a wallet. Luckily for me, she was located in the next section of Clock Town, so it wouldn't take more than a minute to walk over to the bank. With a plan figured out, I began to walk towards South Clock Town.

" So this is where my other self ended up when the human world was transformed into this one. I honestly had hoped she would wind up in a place that took advantage of her vast, but inferior intellect, but I suppose this will have to suffice."

" What is that awful stench!? I've been smelling it ever since we got here!"

" That would be the smell of death. I'm surprised that you would be so easily offended by such an odor considering that you have been on death's doorstep many times all because of your other self."

" No need to rub it in!"

" I didn't mean to remind you of what happened."

" It's in the past and I'd prefer to keep it that way." A large figure then jumped down from its perch and landed next to a slightly smaller figure who had been busy writing down something on a notepad. The small figure appeared content with her work and showed a calm demeanour as she wrote using what looked to be a pen made of shadows. The tall figure was antsy and appeared ready to snap at a moment's notice, yet was quickly calmed down when the small figure showed her what she had written. " Despite being a demon of immense magical power who could potentially rule the world, you're far more interested in learning about your surroundings."

" I'm dedicated to understanding everything no matter what."

" Your attention to detail is spot on. I wish that I could be like that instead of what I ended up being." The tall figure looked down at her hands for a few seconds before slamming them down on the ledge she and the small figure were sitting on. The impact from her hands loosened bits of rock that dropped to the ground below, yet the mysterious shapes that surrounded a nearby house were oblivious to what had just occurred above. " All I am is someone who has to be strong so that Equestria shall fall at my feet."

" It's hard to change when you only know certain things."

" If not for you keeping me in check these days, I'd have likely found Sunset Shimmer, attempted to kill her and assume her life, and end up dying again all because I allowed my anger to blind me. It was a miracle that I managed to come back to life through sheer will alone."

" Most could never will themselves back to the living, but you had a valid reason and that was to become the true Sunset." The small figure then turned to the next page of her notepad and showed her companion what else she had written. " I've been watching those strange creatures surrounding that house for some time now. Despite having no intelligence and just walking around the place, they appear to be drawn to something that's inside."

" What do you think is in there--other than 'her', of course?"

" I don't know, but what I do know is that those creatures cannot die through conventional means."

" Hah! Just give me a few minutes and I'll rip them to shreds." The tall figure then took off by spreading her wings, but was quickly dragged back down to the ledge when the small figure grabbed her by the tail on a whim. " Ow! What was that for!?"

" Those creatures are already dead, so killing them would do nothing."

" Oh."

" This entire place is crawling with the undead and all because of that temple being open."

" Why not close it again?"

" The undead don't have the power to do that, but Sunset Shimmer does. Unfortunately, it will be quite some time before she manages to get here." The small figure then closed her notepad, adjusted what looked like glasses on her face, and turned to face her companion. " She should be starting her trek through the frozen wasteland soon, so if you want to carry out your intention of encountering her there--"

" No, I think we'll remain here."

" What made you change your mind?"

" Dealing with Sunset Shimmer is something I want to do more than anything, but right now I need to think about how best to approach the situation. My previous attempts resulted in me getting beaten to within an inch of my life with the final attempt resulting in my life leaving my body."

" You're learning."

" We'll meet her in that frozen tundra, but not just yet. For now, I'll let her play about in the snow and go about her business. The two of us can continue to observe your other self as she struggles to protect whatever is inside that has enticed the undead. Why do you think that house is in the shape of a music box?"

Once again, Her Highness had come through spectacularly. We visited Fleur Dis Lee at the bank, who had to check my hand for the mark she stamped on it when I first met her upon arriving in Termina, and revealed she knew how I could get my hands on a bigger wallet. I didn't understand why she insisted on being cryptic, but I guessed I had to earn it the hard way rather than simply having it handed over to me. Fleur said that I needed to deposit a lot of rupees at the bank--and reminded me that I had only deposited twenty rupees. My assumption was that the task of depositing rupees would be easy, but it was harder than expected.

The problem with collecting rupees was that there was only so many in one location before you were forced to look somewhere else. My efforts in looking for rupees across town resulted in abysmal failure, but it did allow me to memorize where everything was for future reference. I had hoped there would be some treasure chests lying about, but they were either very well hidden or I lacked a keen sense of finding them. That meant I had to collect rupees in the most mundane fashion.

I had to grind for them.

It was something I did when I explored Hyrule, but I hated it because I had to go back and forth several times between locations. Ultimately, it was just a waste of time that only made me miserable. The thought of having to do it again brought misery on my face, yet it would be under more restrictive conditions what with the limited time I had until I had to reset everything. I had no other alternative. If I wanted a bigger wallet, I had to rupee-grind for several hours or so.

My first instinct involved searching for pots scattered throughout town, and smashing them to collect what was inside. Unfortunately, there weren't that many pots so I had to try another tactic. Then I thought about cutting tufts of grass as that usually gave me small rewards, but again there weren't many of those in town either. My only option involved going outside into the field, cut down any grass, defeat monsters, and check every nook and cranny until my wallet was completely full.

Twilight had one concern about my plan. When the grass is cut by my sword, she said it would take several days for new grass to grow. However, I told her that by leaving an area and then coming back a moment later, it will be back and fully grown. Her Highness was confused at how that was even possible, but I said it involved a mechanic the game employs to give players a chance to spend some time collecting rupees. She had forgotten that we were still in a video game--to be fair, it felt so much more than that. Once we were outside, I began my quest to grind for money, give it to Fleur Dis Lee, and repeating the process until I had deposited enough.

[Several Hours Later]

" Oh? You're back again!" Fleur Dis Lee said as she saw me approach the bank.

" Here... You... Go!" I said, completely exhausted. When I got up to the counter, I stumbled forward, my body slammed into the counter, my arm thrust forward, and my wallet fell from my hand onto the ground by her feet. It felt like my body had been weighed down by a boulder that I couldn't get rid of. I had spent roughly five hours combing through grass, avoiding Blue Bubbles, and more just so that I could reach the maximum amount of rupees--it was ninety-nine--my wallet could hold. It helped that I had properly rested earlier when I had to race against Mrs. Cheerilee, yet I really wanted to just drop down and sleep for the next twenty-four hours. " I... can't believe... I endured so much... just to deposit money."

" If I didn't know any better, I'd swear you were addicted to depositing money."

" That's the understatement of the year."

" Well, let me just add this total to what you deposited earlier, and we'll see if you have enough." Fleur Dis Lee said. She picked up my wallet and walked over to the safe that was situated at the back of the bank. She then fiddled about with a dial on the front for several seconds until it clicked then opened the vault before emptying the contents of my wallet. As I regained my composure and stood back up, I was able to glimpse over at what she was doing. " Are you curious as to how many rupees I have in here?" Fleur Dis Lee had noticed me and turned her head slightly before winking. " You might not know this, but you're the only one who has deposited anything."

" You mean, I'm your only customer?"

" People have been hoarding their wealth in the last couple of days ever since the moon first started falling."

" It's not like that will do anything."

" To them, it's part of their plans to relocate to safer grounds until the moon crashes. I doubt it's going to work since I think the moon will wipe out all of Termina. For me, it's just business as usual until the end comes." Fleur Dis Lee said. After she had finished depositing my rupees, she walked back over but kept my wallet in her hand. " You've now deposited two hundred and eighteen rupees, and that means you reached the two hundred threshold."

" So now you'll show me how to get a bigger wallet?"

" Why show you when I can just give it to you?" Fleur Dis Lee asked. Reaching into her pocket, she pulled out a wallet that looked identical to the one I had given her, yet it was much larger and appeared to have been made from better materials. " This right here is the Adult's Wallet! Adults are allowed to carry a lot of money, yet kids are forced to carry small amounts as adults claim they're immature. You've proven to be mature, and you did deposit plenty of rupees, so let me keep your old wallet and you can have this bigger one in return." She handed over the bigger wallet and I held it firmly in my hand. This would go a long way to making better purchases that would help me along. " Now let's see if you can deposit five thousand rupees into the bank."

" Five thousand!?" I exclaimed, my jaw dropping and eyes widening in response.

" That's the most the bank can hold. I know it sounds weird but I think you'll like the reward that you get in the end. You don't need to deposit five thousand rupees at all once as I know you've got other things that need to be done first. Just be sure you stop on by every now and again. I hardly see anyone because of what's been going on." Fleur Dis Lee said.

Thanking her for the new wallet, I turned and walked back toward a bench located near the bank, and sat down on it before looking up at the sky. Was it worth spending so long scrounging up enough rupees? I think so because now I can buy more expensive things. However, there was one item that continued to elude me. I recalled seeing the mask that Iron Will was selling at the Curiosity Shop for five hundred rupees. This new wallet wouldn't allow me to buy it, and I doubted he would accept being paid in several payments. I supposed I could convince him to cut me a deal and drop the price, but he looked to be immune to such ideas.

" Hey!" Fleur Dis Lee called out. " I forgot to mention that there is an even larger wallet that you can get. It's a pretty rare wallet in that only the truly wealthy can afford it, but I do know of a guy who has one that he received through questionable circumstances. Last I heard, he was heading towards Great Bay to the west of town." I thanked her by waving and she resumed her business by just standing there waiting for another customer.

" Another wallet?" I asked.

" Is it something you need, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" Remember that mask Iron Will had?" I asked. Twilight nodded her head. " He was selling it because I prevented that Old Lady from being robbed of her goods, but the price was too high for me to afford. If I can get the next sized wallet, there should be nothing that I can't afford. The only question is, should we go to Snowhead to find the next Giant? Or, see if we can find this guy in Great Bay?"

" I suggest Snowhead."

" Because of our mission?"

" Yes, but I recall something from Tatl's memories. There is a tall fence that blocks the path that leads to Great Bay. I don't think you have the ability to jump that high, and it appears to be completely unscalable." Twilight answered.

" Guess that means we're going to Snowhead."

" Is there anything else you need to do or do you want to reset time?"

" Grinding for this wallet did take up most of the night and there isn't really anything else I can think of that needs doing. Looks like we're going to be restarting things a little sooner than expected." I answered. I reached into my pouch and took out the Ocarina of Time, and upon staring at it, I knew that by resetting time, everything that I had accomplished would be completely undone.

It pained me to have to force Fluttershy back into Woodfall Temple as Odolwa's prisoner among the other things that would be reversed, yet there was no other choice. I had no time to complete another region with what time remained. " So when I play the Song of Time, we should immediately head north, right?"

" Remember that the guard is going to stop and demand to see if you're old enough to leave town, so you'll have to endure that again. I do suggest picking up some ammunition for your bow by cutting down grass. I've got a feeling you'll be needing its power soon enough." Twilight answered.

That was something I felt was getting redundant, but then the guard didn't know any better because he forgets who I was every time.

With my decision having been made, I raised the ocarina to my lips and played the Song of Time--it only took me three attempts to play it properly. The magic contained within the song began flowing around me, and I felt it pulling me back through time's flow. My ammunition left my body along with any temporary items that couldn't be brought back through time, but at least my new wallet was accepted along with the money I had deposited at the bank.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain.

Once I was back at the beginning of the seventy-two hour cycle--and in front of the entrance to the Clock Tower--I immediately ran around the side of the tower, past the bank and into North Clock Town, and spent a few minutes getting past the guard. It was a good thing that Her Highness had warned me ahead of time that this was going to happen. It made listening to the same speech the other guard at the southern exit said that more tolerable. When he was convinced that I was old enough to leave town on my own, I ran past him and immediately halted in my tracks upon seeing what stood before me.

I was in complete awe of the majesty that was the mountains known as Snowhead. It looked like a thick layer of rock had spread itself out across the land shielding what lurked beneath it, and the white blanket that existed on each peak added to the pristine beauty that was no doubt plagued with problems. The white blanket--that I had deduced to be snow--made me shiver because I knew it meant being exposed to cold temperatures. I was the kind of person who loved mild days that were neither too hot nor too cold, yet every now and then I did yearn for a hot day, especially during the summer.

Then it hit me. Was I seriously going to be trapesing about a frozen tundra in my current attire? Couldn't I have been given a warm jacket to wear along with some ear muffs? If it wasn't the creatures that lurked ahead, it was catching a cold or even worse that was going to end my life up there.

" So there it is."

" Who knew that this side of Termina looked the way it did."

" What do you mean?"

" Look in front of you, Sunset, at the area below where we're standing." Twilight answered. I walked forward towards a small wall cutting some grass along the way that gave me some rupees and arrows before I looked down upon reaching the wall. The entire clearing was covered in snow, a reflection of what I was going to be experiencing once I actually get into the region proper. Twilight then bopped me on my head to get my attention. " Good thing you just picked up those arrows because it looks like you need to do some sharp-shooting." She flew ahead slightly and I followed her movements until I saw what she was talking about. There was a pathway that went up to the mountains, but a large chunk of ice was blocking the way with a suspicious looking chunk above it.

" Do you think Starlight Glimmer put that there?"

" She must really not want anyone to go to Snowhead."

" That obviously means something is wrong up there."

" You need to use your Hero's Bow and fire some arrows at the ice chunk that's above the bigger one below. That should cause the former to smash into the latter and allow us to continue forward. I suggest getting a little closer as you're too far away for an arrow to hit it." Twilight said. There was a ramp nearby that I walked down, but before I reached the bottom, I was stopped by Her Highness again when she heard something loud. " Sunset? Did you hear something roar around the corner?"

" What do you suppose it is?"

" I'm not sure, but I don't want to find out." Twilight answered. That was her way of telling me to run, so I began running where it was immediate that I lost traction when running through the snow. The roaring sound was quickly followed by the sound of large footsteps, and when I was about halfway across the clearing, we found out what it was. My heart instantly froze upon seeing a familiar creature I hoped to never see again. " Sunset! What in Equestria is that!?" A large bipedal lizard was stomping towards us covered in a thick hide that looked to make it impervious to most damage. While Her Highness just stared in complete horror, I merely slapped my forehead because of knowing it was a Dodongo.

" Why did this thing have to be in this game?"

" You've seen it before!?"

" Back in Hyrule, although this one is much larger in size. Dodongo's can only be damaged by attacking their tails, but then it's not an easy task when they start breathing fire on you as a defensive measure." I answered. I had no doubt my sword wouldn't do much, and without my magic, fighting it was useless. Fortunately, Dodongos were sluggish so out-running it was easy, but I would quickly discover that it wasn't the only one stomping about. To my right, another Dodongo could be seen, yet it was smaller than the other one. Nearby was one the same size as the first one, so it appeared they came in different body sizes.

" Can you fight them?"

" My sword isn't going to do much damage to them."

" Run away then?"

" No need to tell me twice." I answered. I began to run forward again and hoped that the Dodongos either didn't notice me or were too slow to be able to catch up. Fortunately, it seemed the latter was the reason why they eventually gave up and returned back to their original locations. It did give me some insight on how they defended what they perceived to be their territory from anything foolish enough to venture into it.

With the Dodongo threat temporarily neutralized--I would have to eventually fight them at some point--I slowed down and walked up the path that lead to the ice chunk. It was a radiant blue in colour and was thick in diameter. If I had my fire magic from before, I could've melted this ice without having to rely on doing things properly. However, it occurred to me that I had to do things as the game had intended rather than constantly defy it. Looking up above, I could see the second chunk of ice. It was sharp on the bottom end and extremely narrow near the top. One or two arrows would be enough to lodge it loose and come crashing into the ice below.

" Why not stand a short distance away?"

" Couldn't I just aim from here?"

" Yes, I suppose you could, but just how confident are you with your bowmanship?" Twilight asked. Touché. I thought being up-close would make it easier, but that would involve aiming straight up at an angle only a professional could hit. I wasn't anything of the sort so Her Highness' suggestion was pretty solid.

Stepping back a few paces until I was a fairly good distance away, I took out the Hero's Bow, nocked an arrow, and aimed up at the narrow part of the ice. Unlike previous times, my target was big enough for me to hit without needing to be a perfect sharp-shooter. I fired my first arrow, hitting the ice where it shuddered slightly, so I fired a second one that ended up careening off the main section of the ice and landed on the ground several feet away from me. Twilight thought about saying something but my cold glare kept her silent.

A third arrow was fired from my bow and connected, the chunk of ice coming loose, dropping down, and shattering itself along with the other ice until all that remained was bits of powder that scattered away with the wind. As I put my bow away, I made sure to walk over and pick up the loose arrow that missed. I wasn't about to waste a precious arrow all because my aiming was still lousy.

With that done, I walked forward and soon the path ahead started getting misty, the sky above completely disappeared, and snow started to fall all around me. My body started to shiver slightly from the sudden change in weather, but I knew that I had to just grin and bear it until I was finished in this region. Of course, Her Highness had noticed that the cold was getting to me, yet there was nothing she could have done. As a fairy, she was immune to various environmental conditions--including the cold--so she was fine. Sometimes, I wished she had been the hero and I the fairy partner. That way, she'd know how it felt to go through such torment.

" It's getting harder to see where I'm going, Twilight."

" We need to stick to the path until we can find some kind of civilization."

" I can't believe the Gorons live in such conditions."

" You did tell me that they were capable of surviving in conditions humans could never hope to achieve."

" Makes you wonder how they do it."

" I'm more concerned with your current temperature. Don't try to hide it from me, Sunset. I know you're getting cold from the sudden drop in temperature as your body is shivering up a real storm, so maybe we should go back to town and find you a warm coat before coming back here again." Twilight said.

" A nice thought but we need to keep going."

" Do you want to catch pneumonia?"

" This is the kind of thing I've been forced to deal with ever since I was first sent into the previous game, Twilight. I know you don't like it when I suffer because there isn't much you can do for me, but I have no other choice." I answered. I wanted to make Her Highness understand why I had to do certain things despite clearly wanting to do so in the safest manner possible. Destiny had placed me in a position where there was no escape. I wanted to wear something warm but that would be taking the easy way out. I assumed that Link didn't wear anything up here in these mountains other than the clothes on his back alongside whatever weapons he'd picked up.

" There's always a choice, Sunset."

" Not when the game intends for me to follow it to the letter."

" I thought you didn't do that last time."

" Exactly, but it looks like I have to follow protocol."

Her Highness thought about saying something in response to that, but ultimately decided to keep quiet about it. Despite not playing video games herself, she had some slight experience when we went to that slumber party during the Battle of the Bands. Applejack and Rainbow Dash were competing against each other in a fierce competition their game presented them--Rainbow reset it when it became apparent that she was going to lose--and it compelled Twilight to briefly pay attention. She was told that gamers had to play as was intended by the creators otherwise the true purpose would be lost. Some games did allow for cheating but only if the creator had included it as an option.

As I walked along, despite how cold it was, I couldn't deny that the scenery looked beautiful. The snow was falling at a slow pace and gently landed on the ground where it disappeared into the white hue that already existed. The trees were caked with snow and could easily fall off if enough pressure was applied. If there was one complaint to be had about my surroundings, it was dealing with icy sections every now and then--to me, ice was even worse than snow. On occasion, there were snow mounds that could break if something powerful were to smash into them.

These mounds looked innocent, but the familiar creatures that popped up from the snow nearby certainly weren't.

" I didn't think those things could survive in the snow."

" Another monster you've seen, Sunset?"

" Their names escape me, but I do remember that they're at home in the water. They enjoy skimming along the water's surface, yet they're just as deadly on land where they bounce around in an attempt to ram into something." I answered.

" Snow is basically cold rain, so it makes sense to see them here. Oh, and they're called Blue Tektites. You can easily slash at them with your sword although I suggest keeping your shield raised in case you're not too confident. Conversely, heavy impacts can cause them to flip over onto their backs living them vulnerable." Twilight said. "Heavy impacts"? I had nothing like that on my person, so it looked like going with the sword was my best option.

The Blue Tektite bounced towards me but I raised my shield just in time. It bounced off it constantly in its efforts to damage me, but I wasn't about to let it do that. When it hit my shield again, I drew the Kokiri Sword as it rebounded, slashed it twice, and it disappeared by falling apart.

" Huh... And to think I had trouble with them before."

" You have gotten better."

" Maybe, but I still think I could improve."

" Anyway, we do have another problem and it doesn't involve monsters." Twilight said. She floated ahead of me and slightly to the right before coming to a stop. I walked over to what had caught her interest and gazed upon several snow mounds that blocked the path. I began to think of a way to get past by using something heavy like Her Highness suggested, but did I have anything that would work? " Do you have any bombs with you? Snow mounds may look sturdy, but they're only snow so using a bomb should get rid of them." Unfortunately, I never took the chance to buy a Bomb Bag in Clock Town, so I shook my head.

" I never went to the Bomb Shop after saving that woman."

" Then we need something else." Twilight said. She floated back and forth for a few seconds before an idea popped into her head. " Sunset! That woman you saved! Didn't she give you a mask that was capable of setting off a small explosion?" I wasn't liking where this was going. " Since you don't have any bombs, maybe you can use that instead to destroy these snow mounds."

" Wouldn't the Blast Mask hurt me in the process?" I asked as I took it out from an unseen location. " I know it can be used as a substitute for not having bombs, but I'm not liking the idea of blowing myself up."

" Do you want to go back to the bank, take out some rupees, and buy a Bomb Bag?"

" That would waste precious time."

" Time is pretty much relative given you can reset it as much as possible." Twilight said. I should've decided to go back, get the proper equipment, and come back again instead of deciding to go with using the Blast Mask.

I knew it was a dangerous mask to wear--the skull on the front was a dead giveaway--but then the old woman did say that I could use it to put on my own fireworks show. I didn't actually understood what she meant at the time, but now it made perfect sense. Putting it on my face, my vision remained intact like it had with Kamaro's Mask, yet the smell of gunpowder wafting around my face made me uncomfortable. If my health wasn't very good, using this mask would've resulted in being blown to pieces, but I was doing fine on that front. I walked towards the snow mounds--bombs had a small radius and the Blast Mask most likely had the same radius--until I was mere centimetres away from them.

" You may want to stand back, Twilight." I said, prompting Her Highness to fly a few feet away from me. I assumed that to activate the mask's special power, I had to concentrate my mental energies. I closed my eyes and focused on the thought of clearing the obstacle that was in my way.

BBBOOOOOOMMM!!

The mask exploded and I was obviously caught in the process, yet the damage done to me was surprisingly minimal. I expected to be bleeding profusely due to how powerful bombs could be, but I supposed that the game's physics favoured me. I did suffer some slight burn marks on my arms, but it was better than losing something. Fortunately, the blast was enough to destroy the snow mounds and allow me to continue onward towards the mountains. Twilight then floated back over to me and looked me over to make sure I hadn't taken more damage than expected.

" I wasn't expecting that to happen."

" At least I now know what the Blast Mask can do for me."

" Perhaps it's something you should use in an emergency."

" Guess I'd better put it away in case I get the urge to use it again." I said. I grabbed the Blast Mask, pulling it off my face only to discover that it was fading in and out. A few moments later and it was back to normal. " Huh? Why did it do that?"

" I'm guessing the mask needs a few moments to recharge when you use its power. That does make it less reliable than bombs as you can use as many of those as you so long as you have enough. Perhaps we should consider finding an owl statue, activate it, and warp back to Clock Town with the Song of Soaring." Twilight answered. I had actually forgotten that I could warp around Termina using the song Flash Sentry provided when I encountered him in the swamp. No wonder he was so insistent on me learning it as soon as possible. " In any case, we can continue forward, but be cautious as who knows what may be waiting up ahead." Twilight said.

I took several steps forward before another Blue Tektite popped out from under the snow, so I put the Blast Mask away, took out my sword and shield, and waited for it to get close enough to strike it down. For some reason, it refused to bounce towards me and I wondered why it was acting strange, but then it suddenly began sliding towards me. I reacted fast enough by jumping left and the monster continued sliding down the path until it was out of sight. Upon getting back up, I extended my foot forward and tapped the ground--being cautious never hurts--and my suspicion was correct. This section was made of ice.

No wonder it slid away like it did. I doubted the same thing would happen to me, but I didn't want to chance slipping and falling onto my face. So, I walked forward slowly to the point of shuffling, but soon the ice became snow again, and I was on my way again.

Eventually, the narrow path expanded out into a large area, prompting me to come to a complete stop. I looked left and right to see what kind of area this was. There was a single house to my right that looked out of place given the current environment, yet a body of water situated at the far end of the area was even more suspicious. It should've been completely frozen, yet it was water that could easily be swam in--several ice chunks were floating on the surface. Beyond that, a cliff extended upward so high, it went beyond the clouds that hung above. A path beyond the house looked promising, but a second path near the water that went further up the mountain was even more promising.

" I wasn't expecting this to greet us, Twilight."

" I'm surprised someone has a house here in the middle of nowhere."

" If only there was a sign that could explain what this area is."

" How about that one over there?" Twilight asked, floating towards a nearby sign that was a few feet away. How did I miss seeing that? Perhaps I wasn't as observant as I hadoriginally thought? I slapped my forehead before walking over to the sign with my head held low. Despite how the cold should've clearly shattered the sign to pieces, it was still standing and was fairly readable. " It says here, 'Welcome to the Mountain Village, gateway to the rest of Snowhead. If you want to go to Goron Village, head down the path to the right. If you want to go to Snowhead Temple, take the path that goes further up the mountain. If you need a sword or other weapon forged or improved upon, visit the Mountain Smithy, located ahead in the building to your right.' Well, that was certainly informative."

" At least we know where to go to find the Gorons."

" Yes, but perhaps we should pay a visit to the Mountain Smithy?" Twilight asked. Her thought process was to ask whoever was in there questions about the region, but I believed they wouldn't want to bother with anyone who didn't need them to work on some kind of weapon. " Besides, you might want to inquire about making some improvements to your sword so that it can serve you better. Against Odolwa, you struggled when it came to dealing damage."

" I suppose it could do with some work." I said, drawing my sword from its scabbard and looking at it. The Kokiri Sword had proven itself to be a faithful weapon, but there had been times its power hadn't been enough to ensure my victory against more powerful foes. Perhaps an improvement would make it more effective. " Yeah... I definitely agree that my sword needs to be improved, but what if the smithy doesn't want to do anything?"

" Only way to know for sure is to ask."

" Good point."

Fortunately, the Mountain Smithy's house wasn't too far away, but it did mean having to trudge through the snow. As soon as I started walking forward, my feet sank down causing my movements to become sluggish. At least there were no monsters attacking otherwise I'd be a sitting duck. Upon reaching the front door to the smithy's, a loud roar came from the other side that sounded like someone was experiencing great pain--it was enough to cause me to fall down onto my rear. Someone inside then said "shut up" before the noise quickly went silent, but what could've made that sound in the first place?

Chapter 20: The Stoic Goron Ghost

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
August 8, 2016
Chapter 20: The Stoic Goron Ghost.

Even though I knew that the Smithy's would allow us to get out of the cold and into the warmth, I was hesitant to go inside over who lived there. Someone inside clearly had a bad attitude given he told someone else to keep quiet, but it was the other voice that sent a chill down my spine. What kind of person--or creature for that matter--could make a noise that horrible, that putrid? My journey through Termina had already introduced me to characters that I'd never seen before, but perhaps those encounters were nothing compared to what awaited in this region along with the other two. I shouldn't be surprised by this revelation.

I had read the Hyrule Historia--why Rainbow Dash ordered it and never bothered to read it still escaped me--and learned the unfortunate truth behind Termina's creation. Twilight had insisted on me telling her about it, and who was I to deny Her Highness the knowledge that she craved--it couldn't help her further her Friendship Lessons--other than get an earful from her later.

According to the book, the Great Goddesses of Hyrule: Din, Nayru, and Farore, created Termina accidentally which explains why they have no influence in this world. When the three created what became Hyrule, their power spread throughout the cosmos touching every last fabric of existence, yet their excess energy seeped into unseen cracks within the fabric giving birth to alternate realities.

Termina, had never been intended to be created by the Great Goddesses. They didn't even know it existed--and probably still don't--and so they left it to fend for itself never once acknowledging its existence. It did explain then why no one around here knew about the Triforce or the rise of Ganondorf, or even the existence of the Royal Family of Hyrule.

Because this world was never touched by the goddesses, the Four Giants assumed the mantle by swearing to act as guardians to protect Termina from evil. I couldn't even begin to imagine where they came from or why they were chosen, but perhaps someone knew of such legends. It may or may not be useful in getting everything back to normal, but sometimes such knowledge proved invaluable in case you needed to know about it.

After waiting a couple of minutes in front of the door of the smithies, Twilight bopped me on the head several times urging me to do something. As a fairy, she didn't feel the effects of the cold air swirling about, but I wasn't as fortunate. Whoever designed this game clearly had no idea about how people trudge about in these conditions. I mean seriously, who walks around in a frozen wasteland wearing nothing but a green tunic?

Maybe the actual hero could survive in these conditions, but I'm someone who prefers to wrap up accordingly to survive the winter months. Knowing that standing outside meant freezing to death--I wish I had a Goron Tunic--I reached for the doorknob, turned it, opened the door, and walked inside before brushing off some loose snow on my body.

The interior of the Smithy's wasn't surprising apart from a ridiculously large sword hanging on one of the walls. Whoever could wield a weapon that big must either be pretty strong or downright crazy for wasting their money acquiring it. To my left was a furnace that looked retro in design yet a chunk of ice was preventing it from working properly. To my right was someone laying down on a couch but I couldn't see their face from this position. All-in-all, it was pretty cozy aside from a couple of oddities here and there.

" Look at that furnace over there, Sunset." Twilight said.

" It certainly does look rustic." I said.

" You don't see many in that design back in Equestria these days."

" Oh? Have ponies achieved new advances in technology?" I asked. Twilight rolled her eyes knowing full well that I had made a joke about how the world I call my home gained new technological marvels almost every other day while Equestria achieves something similar several times every couple of years. " Sorry, please continue."

" Back home, ponies have been using more modern designs that consume less fuel but can produce the same quality."

" Yet this furnace isn't working."

" Let me take a closer look." Twilight suggested, floating in front of me to inspect the ice. She looked at it from different angles for a few moments before floating back over with her head held down low. " That ice doesn't look like it will melt any time soon. I mean, it can be melted but I don't think you have the means to melt it right now."

" What would I need?"

" A simple magic spell could easily get rid of the ice, but then we're in a world where Equestrian magic doesn't work, and you haven't acquired any new magic. No, I think this will require the direct approach." Twilight answered.

" And that would be?"

" Hot water!"

" Can't get any more direct that that." I said sarcastically.

" The only question is where can we find hot water in such frigid conditions? I doubt the smithy has any otherwise they would've melted the ice by now, but if we ask them some questions, we might get some answers and quite possibly help them out. I'm sure they would appreciate you doing that for--" Twilight said before suddenly going deathly silent as though something had freaked her out.

" Twilight? Are you okay?" I asked, waving my hand in front of her. There was no reaction. I then saw the expression on her face: stone silent and staring dead ahead. I then looked in the same direction and my entire body froze.

There was a counter at the other end of the room, but it was who was standing on the other side of it that froze me to the core. A large bare-chested muscular figure wearing something on his face that resembled a mask--it looked more like leather straps bound across his face reinforced with small nails and covered the right side of said face--and nothing but a ragged pair of shorts, but it was the large horns protruding on either side of his head combined with the red skin that was an instant giveaway. Twilight was shocked over seeing the one person who almost brought Equestria to its knees, yet I was shocked that this is what he had been reduced to.

" Tirek!?" Twilight exclaimed. Sure enough, the large hulking figure was none other than Tirek, who had portrayed Ganondorf himself in my previous journey. It definitely felt weird seeing him here of all places and wearing nothing but ragged shorts, but Termina had proven to be filled with all kinds of surprises. In Tirek's hand was a large hammer that was most likely used to forge metal due to the nature of this business, yet the weirdest thing was that he just stood there like he was staring into thin air. " What in the world is he doing here!? Wasn't he banished or something, Sunset?"

" He was but I guess this is a different version of him."

" I think it's obvious that he was the one who made that noise when you were standing outside."

" It just feels so weird seeing Tirek reduced to this!"

" You never saw what he did to Equestria, did you?" Twilight asked. I shook my head. I had only ever heard about what he did when Her Highness and I first started sending messages back and forth to each other upon finally accepting each other as friends and her personally as my teacher. " I know that I only gave you vague hints at what Tirek did to your fellow ponies, but my aim involved protecting you in case you decided to get revenge or something. Tirek drained the magic from everypony in a bid for power but he was undone when we unlocked the Chest of Harmony and released the Rainbow Power."

" Rainbow Power!? Did you seriously call it that?" I asked. Her Highness had told me that she and the pony versions of my friends gained ridiculously long manes as well as their cutie marks appearing on their hooves. I just couldn't grasp the fact that she experienced such an extreme transformation.

" It's a power we've only used once and hoping never again any time soon."

" By the way, who do you suppose was telling Tirek to keep quiet?"

" Maybe that guy sleeping on the couch over there?" Twilight asked. I slapped my forehead knowing that I walked into that one. I took a few steps forward so that I could get a better look at who had been talking to Tirek, and I wasn't nearly as surprised as Her Highness was--her jaw dropped when she saw who the other smithy was, but I felt it was an improvement over what I saw from him last time.

Sleeping on the couch was Fancy Pants, and while he certainly looked less than glamourous--he was wearing a blue coloured vest over his bare chest, blue pants, a strange white coloured hat, and sandals--he seemed to be struggling with his sleep. Every few seconds came the sound of mumbling from his mouth and what he said was consistent: he spoke of his business being on the verge of ruin because of the weather being a huge problem.

I never met his Equestrian counterpart so I always assumed Fancy Pants to be a business pony who pretended he was a high ranking societal member. Her Highness quickly whispered in my ear that Fancy Pants was the most famous pony in Canterlot barring the princesses and was on top of every important social gathering.

If I had known that from my previous encounter with him, I would've treated him in a much different manner. Still, the fact that he was here with Tirek didn't make much sense, but there was no use in trying to come to any logical conclusions. The two of them were living together as smithies although Tirek appeared to be behaving as such what with that hammer in his hand while Fancy Pants was just lazy in demeanour.

" So he's one of the Canterlot elite?"

" Rarity can't stop talking about him every time we pay a visit there."

" It must be weird for you seeing Fancy Pants like this."

" A little, but Rarity would've gone through one of her overdramatic moments were she to have seen him in such clothes." Twilight said. I couldn't help but chuckle at such a thought, but I made sure not to laugh too loud in case I disturbed his sleep. " I am surprised at what he's mumbling about."

" Oh, about his business suffering?"

" The cold conditions must be a lot worse than we thought."

" Do you suppose Starlight had something to do with this?"

" Maybe, but it's too soon to say. This weather might actually be a normal occurrence around here or the mountains are experiencing a rare freak storm. Guess that means you'll need to ask either Fancy Pants or Tirek about what's been going on around here. If you want my opinion, I'd talk to Fancy Pants as Tirek kind of looks like he might not have much to say given his mouth is covered up by whatever it is he's wearing." Twilight answered, floating towards the couch indicating that I should follow her lead.

A part of me wanted to talk to Tirek given my past struggles against him in Hyrule, but Fancy Pants did seem to be the obvious choice. I walked over to the couch and coughed a few times to grab his attention, but he remained fast asleep leaving feeling dejected.

" That didn't work."

" He must be a heavy sleeper."

" Guess I've got no choice but to talk to Tirek." I said, prompting Twilight to hide underneath my hat. I looked up slightly where Tirek was standing, and he continued staring off at nothing while clutching his hammer. He was different in this world so I knew that I was safe, so I walked up to the counter before coughing to grab his attention. At first, Tirek ignored my coughing but then he quickly looked down upon noticing my shadow. The instant he saw me, he started swinging his arms around--including the one with the hammer--and I ducked down so that I wouldn't have my head lobbed off.

" Ugogh! Ugor ugoh ughor?" Tirek said. It didn't take long for me to realize that he had trouble talking. Was it because his mouth was covered up or did he have a speech impediment that prevented him from communicating properly? " Ugogh! Ugor ugoh ughor?"

" Shaddup!" I quickly turned my attention towards the couch, and saw that Fancy Pants was staring back at me, hands on his hips, an angry look spread across his face. I was certain he was about to snap at me, but he instead looked at Tirek, his finger pointing directly at him. " How many times have I told you to never do that!? What is it about not making any noise while I'm sleeping that doesn't resonate with you? Bah! And just when I was finally starting to have a good dream!"

" Ugogh! Ugor ugoh ughor?"

" I said... huh? You say that we have a customer? Are you serious!? Who in their right mind would come here during this cold snap?" Fancy Pants asked. That's when he noticed me standing to the left of Tirek resulting in him blinking several times before rubbing his eyes. " A customer!? Well I'll be! I'm surprised you were able to make your way here what with that blasted snow causing problems for everyone."

" It wasn't easy to get here." I said.

" I should say so seeing as you're wearing that get-up. You must be either brave or stupid for walking around in that anywhere, but that's just my opinion, kid. Anyway, welcome to the Mountain Smithy, where we take our time to make a good point. That's the slogan we've been using for the last few years." Fancy Pants said.

" I'm Sunset Shimmer."

" Odd name but then I've heard weirder. I'm Zubora, the owner of this fine establishment."

" Ugo-oh! Ugo ugo!" Tirek said.

" Shaddup over there! Sheeh! When I say you can talk, that's when you can speak whatever gibberish you want. Until then, just keep quiet unless you really have something important to say. I am so sorry for that sudden outburst from him. That huge fellow is my assistant, Gabora. He's all brawn and about as smart as a Deku Stick. When it comes to forging weapons, he is a natural, but his social skills aren't up to snuff." Fancy Pants said.

" I was wondering if you had any information." I said.

" Information? Usually, when people come here--mainly Gorons--they ask us to forge them new weapons."

" I'm not particularly choosy, but I want to know what's been going on around here."

" You're not the only one."

" Ugogh! Ugo-oh!" Tirek said.

" Even Gabora, what with his limited intellect, is curious about the sudden cold snap. You see, kid, it never used to be like this. Snowhead has always been known for its cold winters--the Gorons like it a lot better than we do--but this winter has been absolutely terrible to the point where all life is on the verge of extinction. Don't ask me why things have gotten like this as I don't know! You might have better luck asking the Gorons." Fancy Pants said. I had hoped he would've given me more information, but I supposed what he said was better than not getting anything at all.

I had suspected the Gorons would know more about what was going on, but then I didn't exactly know where to find them. Unlike Death Mountain that had one main path that lead up to their city, Snowhead had numerous paths that lead in different directions. There was no telling which direction would lead me to the Gorons. My only other option involved speaking with Pinkie Pie in hopes she knew something, but like the Gorons, I didn't know where to find her.

Looking back at Fancy Pants again, he appeared to be checking a watch on his wrist in-between looking at me and Tirek. " I hope you didn't just come here to ask questions, kid, as I'd really hate for my assistant to have to kick you out for wasting our time."

" Do you know where the Gorons are?"

" Head east from here! You can't miss their village no matter how hard you try!" Fancy Pants answered. His eyes then look towards something that was behind me, and I quickly turned around to see what had piqued his interest. In truth, it was his way of seeing the scabbard on my back that housed the Kokiri Sword. " I couldn't help but notice that sword you've got there, kid. I'm amazed someone of your age has a sword but I guess you're trying to see how tough you are. No, you don't need to say another word. You came here to get it sharpened so that it can cut even deeper, right?"

" You improve swords?"

" That is what a smithy does. It's a shame really. You came all this way and there's nothing we can do for you. Unfortunately, we're not doing any business right now. It's because of the abnormal cold snap. I'm sure you've already seen the chunk of ice the instant you came in here. We need that hearth working in order to sharpen weapons, and in its current condition, we'll be out of business within the next week or two. I'll bet we won't even last until spring with the way things are going. If I could just do something about that frozen hearth then we can make your sword stronger." Fancy Pants answered.

" Ugo-oh! Ugo, ugo!" Tirek said.

" That old story again!? You know better than that! No, wait! Of course you don't!"

" What did he say?" I asked.

" He said that hot water should be able to melt the ice, but he doesn't even know what he's talking about. Gabora, you're nothing but a Deku Stick! Don't pretend that you know anything because you don't! Oh, he believes a rumor that says long ago there were hot springs somewhere in the mountains near here. I personally think he's being more stupid than usual, but maybe the Gorons would know something about it. They know these mountains better than anyone else." Fancy Pants answered.

" Ugoh-oh! Ugoh ugo ugo?" Tirek said.

" Sheesh! You're so loud! I'm sorry that you wasted your time coming here, but unless I can get this ice melted, you're stuck using that old sword. Why don't you come back in the spring when the weather finally clears? We can sharpen up that blade and make it something really special." Fancy Pants said.

" Ugoh-ooooh!!! Ugoh! Ugo-a-go-go!"

Despite not earning much in the way of information, I had gained enough that gave me something to work towards. If I could find hot spring water--Her Highness had suggested hot water is what we needed--then I could upgrade my sword into a more powerful weapon. I thought about asking Fancy Pants more questions, but I could tell that he was in a foul mood what with his business being on the verge of collapsing. I felt bad for Tirek due to how much verbal abuse he had been given, but then he didn't say anything about it offending him.

In any case, I couldn't do anymore here, so I turned and walked out the door leaving the two smithies to do whatever it was they were doing before I showed up.

Back outside, the cold weather immediately began to be felt on my body. The warmth of the fire inside the Mountain Smithy warmed me up tremendously, but now I had to endure winter once again until I could find the location of the Goron's settlement. Fancy Pants said I should head east if I wanted to find them, so I walked to the right of the building and resumed my journey making sure to keep myself warm by blowing into my hands every now and again.

" That was certainly something." Twilight said as she flew out from under my hat.

" Did Tirek really scare you?" I asked.

" After witnessing what he did to our fellow ponies, I still have some hesitation towards him. Of course, this version of him must be miserable what with being yelled at all the time by Fancy Pants, but I guess it doesn't really faze him." Twilight answered.

" I feel sorry for him."

" Me too."

" Do you think getting their furnace--hearth--will make Fancy Pants treat Tirek better?"

" It being frozen does appear to be the source of the former's frustration, but we don't have access to any hot spring water. If we can find a deposit, you can scoop some up into your bottle and bring it over to them. You should know, Sunset, that hot spring water doesn't stay hot for very long. I'd say it takes about two or three minutes before it cools down and becomes ordinary water." Twilight answered. That meant if we were to find a deposit that was too far away from the Mountain Smithy, there would be no point in trying to help them unless there was another way that we just couldn't see.

As soon as I walked a few more steps forward, I suddenly came to a stop and placed my hand next to my ear. I could barely hear something that was coming from the opposite direction, but was it worth investigating? Twilight was curious about why I stopped, so I explained that I was hearing what sounded like cries for help. She then floated away for a few moments to see if she could see anything, but quickly came back and shook her head. Perhaps my ears had picked up the howling wind instead of someone calling out to me. I shrugged my shoulders and resumed walking eastward towards what I assumed would be the Goron's settlement ahead.

" How long has it been?"

" It's been about a week now since the elder left."

" A week!? It feels like he left us an age ago."

" In these dark times, it fell onto the elder to go forth and find out what has caused winter to become so severe."

" Has there been any word from him?"

" The last Goron who saw the elder was the one standing guard by the village entrance, but he has since relocated to in here to get out from the cold. Only the guard standing on top of the shrine's entrance remains out there, bless her soul. I know it was his duty as our patriarch to go out there and find answers, but he should've allowed one of us to have carried out the task in his stead. The cold weather outside is much too harsh for the elder's frail body, so I fear he may have gone to his death."

" Why did the Great Darmani have to die?"

" She was our greatest hero, the shining beacon of hope that lead us through dark times."

" What did the coroner say when he examined her lifeless corpse?"

" He said that she must have fallen from a great height to have winded up where the others originally found her after she had been gone too long. I shudder to think what had been going on in her mind during that plunge into the abyss from which she fell into."

" Without her and the elder, the village has lost all meaning."

" We still have his son."

" Please don't mention him considering the incessant crying he's been doing ever since the elder left. I can't believe that the elder's son has been crying non-stop for the past week and shows no sign of stopping any time soon."

" Can you really blame him? His father has left him during a difficult time, yet he wishes to be nurtured in his loving embrace. A child that young shouldn't be forced to endure being on his own."

" If the Great Darmani were here, she could have easily calmed the elder's son down."

" But she's not here because of unfortunate circumstance."

" Do you suppose she is watching over us in death?"

" Perhaps, but I think Darmani's soul lingers on the other side due to not being able to rest. Everyone knew how passionate she was with regards to protecting us, and I believe she cannot rest until this situation has been resolved. I'm not saying it's a good thing. Darmani must be suffering in death because there isn't anything she can do."

" If only we could ask the Great Fairy to bring her back to life."

" That is something she can't do and besides, that is a forbidden magic."

" I know, but it would be a miracle if she were to return to us."

" Darmani is dead and we must accept this even though we wished that weren't the case."

" What of the elder?"

" Until we hear from him, we must remain here and keep his son occupied, but it won't be easy due to the incessant crying. Yes, even I am starting to grow weary of the noise that comes forth from his mouth. If miracles truly exist then this would be the ideal time for one to happen."

" By the way... Have you seen that strange human riding the giant bird?"

" That stranger who is waiting near the abyss?"

" Why would a human come here of all places?"

" Their kind are a brave lot if not foolish for thinking they are invincible. We should just ignore him as he probably has a death wish or something for wanting to remain out there in the bitter cold. Besides, we've got problems of our own like trying to figure out how to stop the elder's son from crying. If only one of us could remember how that song went then perhaps we could lull him to sleep."

" Wow! Talk about an unbelievable sight." I said.

" Even in the cold clutches of winter, you've got to admit that the scenery looks beautiful." Twilight said.

The next area that existed east of the Mountain Smithy comprised of two islands located in the middle of a large lake. Because of the cold weather, the water had been frozen over completely, yet I could barely make out several small figures swimming about below the frozen surface. There were also numerous snow mounds scattered about with one of them being much larger in size. Perhaps something special lurked within but I wasn't about to hold my breath. What really interested me was the barely viewable red balloon that belonged to Pinkie Pie, yet how could she survive in these conditions wearing only a green suit?

Another thing that caught my attention--Twilight bopping me on the head also helped--was a large boulder that overlooked the area. I had no idea why it was up there but maybe it was worth investigating, but the pathway up to it looked mighty steep. I doubted that I could simply run up such a sharp slope.

On the other side of the area was a large opening that lead down a tunnel with two large pillars situated on either side. I suspected that the Goron's settlement was through that tunnel, yet while I was eager to get going, I knew something didn't feel right--Pinkie being there notwithstanding. It seemed a little too easy. Perhaps there were monsters that couldn't be seen until you were literally on top of them, but there was no way of knowing until it was too late.

There was also the chunk of ice situated right underneath Pinkie. Part of me wanted to know why that was there, yet my mind was fixated on reaching Pinkie. Given how she functioned in our previous encounters, she definitely knew what was going on around here.

" Is something wrong, Sunset?"

" This looks a little too easy, Twilight."

" That's not a bad thing, you know."

" I know, but since we first got here, the only monsters we've encountered were those two Blue Tektites that came out from under the snow before reaching this area. I was expecting more than that considering--" I said.

" You should be thankful that you weren't attacked by something much stronger."

" I'm not itching to fight monsters, but I assumed they would be swarming this region in droves. Maybe they're hiding themselves until I get close enough or the weather is just too cold for them? I guess I feel kind of disappointed about it." I said.

" Yes, I do see what you mean."

That wasn't the only issue on my mind. It had since occurred to me that I needed to purchase a map of this region from Pinkie--it was the only way she was going to tell me anything--but I didn't know if I had enough rupees to pay her. I took out my wallet, opened it up, and looked at what I had collected. If I remembered correctly, Pinkie had a map of the current region, and a map of another region that was more expensive. Common sense indicated that getting the map for the current region was highly recommended, so I started counting my rupees. Twenty-five... I did pick up some loose ones by cutting grass back in Termina Field, but did I have enough?

I also had some spare arrows with which to shoot Pinkie down from the sky. I supposed that I could become a Deku Scrub again and use a bubble to pop Pinkie's balloon, but that would only waste magic. Also, Deku Scrubs may not handle cold temperatures very well.

" Hmmm... Yes, I do believe I have enough."

" To buy a map?"

" Yeah."

" We could do with a map of Snowhead."

" Then we should get one from Pinkie right away." I said. She was floating above the second island in the middle of the frozen lake, but fortunately, there were a few wooden bridges that connected the islands together.

Walking towards the nearest one, I tapped my foot on the wooden plaque several times just to make sure it was sturdy enough. I wasn't being conscious about my weight--I prided myself on being pretty fit for a girl my age--but rather I was worried about whether the cold had made the wood brittle. If I fall down to the frozen lake surface below, I'd have no chance of getting back up to Pinkie. The slopes of snow that ran down the sides of the islands looked like only a seasoned roller could traverse without any problems.

Once I was satisfied that I could make it across, I ran quickly onto the first island making sure to watch every nook in case a monster attempted to catch me by surprise. I ran across the second bridge and came to a stop in front of the ice chunk. I remembered what happened when I accidentally ran into similar ice back in Hyrule. Even a small brush up against it would result in my body being encased for several moments until it shattered.

Considering I was already freezing from being out here, getting frozen would only add insult to injury. The most curious thing was the hole situated beneath the ice. Something of importance could be down there, but I'd need to melt the ice using hot spring water.

Turning my attention back to Pinkie Pie, who was now floating above me--how she didn't notice me below her was unbelievable--observing the area, I stepped back a few paces before taking out the Fairy Bow and aiming it at her balloon. I nocked the bow with an arrow, fired where it sailed upwards, and popped the balloon. Pinkie's reaction was the same as it was last time, screaming as she dropped to the ground, knees buckling upon impact.

" At least the snow was able to cushion my fall. Still, you'd think I'd have taken the liberty of giving myself something soft to land on every other time." Pinkie Pie said before noticing me standing next to her. " What's this!? Green clothes? White fairy? Madam... Are you perchance, a forest fairy?" Since I had already been through this routine with her on two previous occasions, I immediately told her that I was from the forest and that my name was Sunset Shimmer.

This was the only disadvantage when it came to resetting time. No one remembers what happened, and I'm forced to re-introduce myself to specific characters. " I knew you were a forest fairy! I don't know what might have convinced you to come here, but you must have come to see the Gorons in their village."

" Do you know what's been going on around here?" I asked.

" Sure I do! It's my civic duty to learn about such things and rely that information to anyone who wants it."

" But before you can tell me, I have to buy a map, right?"

" Wow! How did you know I was gonna do that? You must be psychic or something!" Pinkie Pie said. I rolled my eyes making sure she didn't notice. " You're very fortunate that you chanced upon me, Mrs. Fairy! Right now I've got two maps that are sure to be very helpful for an adventuring person like you. Surprised? Don't be! It's pretty obvious that you came here for an adventure as why else would a fairy be carrying around a sword?"

" Have you got a map of this area?"

" Sure do! I'll sell it to you for twenty rupees, but if you prefer to have a map of Great Bay, I can sell you that for forty rupees."

" I'll take the first one."

" That'll be twenty rupees!" Pinkie Pie announced. I took out my wallet, opened it up, grabbed a handful of rupees that made up twenty in Terminian currency, and handed them over to Pinkie who quickly placed them into a bag she had attached to her red underwear. A rupee symbol was on the front of it, telling me that she kept her money from map purchases among other things--surely she sold things other than maps--inside of it. " Yippee! You've made Tingle very happy this day by buying one of Tingle's maps, Mrs. Fairy. I am sure you'll have no trouble finding your way around these mountains."

" Now that I've bought a map from you, can you tell me more about what's been going on around here?"

" Of course! Tingle never breaks a promise and that is always a guarantee! I'm not sure if those smithies back in the Mountain Village told you anything, Mrs. Fairy, so I might as well start at the very beginning or as close to it as possible. The Gorons have been through a painful experience recently when they lost someone very important." Pinkie Pie answered.

" Who was it?"

" Her name was Darmani, and was viewed by the tribe as the greatest hero who had ever lived. No matter what dangers threatened the tribe, she was there to protect them even if it meant paying the ultimate sacrifice. I heard that Darmani had been chosen by the Goron's elder to become the next patriarch, but that's something that will never happen now. About a week ago, a sudden burst of winter seeped through these mountains affecting every last corner of the region." Pinkie Pie answered.

" I heard from the smithies that the cold wasn't normal."

" Wasn't normal!? I'd say it was a freak accident of epic proportions! Ever since that masked person came back from the path that leads up to Snowhead Temple in the north, this region has been pelted repeatedly with the worse cold snap ever recorded in Terminian history." Pinkie Pie said. I should've known that Starlight Glimmer was responsible for bringing about this weather, but what could she gain from doing so?

" Darmani, according to a couple of Gorons I spoke to the other day, took it upon herself to go up and investigate the temple, but she ended up meeting a horrible fate." Pinkie then handed over a piece of paper that miraculously had not been frozen. On the paper was a drawing of a large statue--it certainly looked impressive--but I didn't understand where she was going with it.

" What's this?"

" It's a drawing of the grave marker those Gorons built for Darmani--she really was respected amongst them--and they gave it to me out of sympathy. Tingle has no need for a crude picture when my own artistic skills are far superior." Pinkie Pie answered.

" Where is this grave? I want to know because I'd like to offer my condolences."

" They buried Darmani on top of a high mountain, but the path can no longer be accessed due to the snow covering up the entrance. It's a shame none of them had the idea of getting some of the hot spring water that her grave was built on top of. Go figure! The one place in all of Snowhead that houses hot spring water, and they covered it up. Oh well! Nothing can be done about it now." Pinkie Pie said.

The instant she mentioned hot spring water, an idea began to form in my head. Twilight, who had been listening to the conversation, must have been thinking the same thing. I had to get to that grave site, even if it meant climbing up the mountain. " You know, I don't know what became of those Gorons. They were supposed to have returned home days ago, but they're still out there."

" What about the Goron Elder?"

" Him? I saw him walking down there on the frozen lake, but that was the other day. I don't know where he is now, but I'm assuming that he was able to make it to the temple--okay, maybe not considering how slow he moves." Pinkie Pie answered.

" Maybe I ought to go to their settlement and find out more."

" Goron Village? That's through the tunnel you see before us!"

" Then that's where I'm going next."

" I should mention one little warning, Mrs. Fairy. The Gorons may not be willing to talk to you due to a lack of sleep. I know it sounds like Tingle is crazy, but I heard this from a reliable source who happens to be a Goron. Their sleep depravation is the result of the elder's son crying. He's been at it for at least several days now and shows no sign of stopping. I'm amazed they've held out so long, but you're likely to get a cold welcome until they can get some sleep." Pinkie Pie said.

" How could a parent leave behind their child?"

" The elder didn't want to do it, but he had no other choice. Darmani was their best hope of stopping this cold snap, but she's dead now and it fell onto him to do something. I don't know how much longer they can hold out. Anyway, that's all the information I have, Mrs. Fairy. Thank you for purchasing one of Tingle's maps. Please come by again if you wish to buy another. Tingle-Tingle-Kooloo-Limpah! These are the magic words that Tingle created herself! Don't steal them!" Pinkie Pie answered. She then spread her legs apart, clenched her fists, and produced a flurry of confetti before another red balloon appeared from the backpack on her back, lifting her up into the air.

Pinkie Pie had given me a lot of information this time around, but it sadly revolved around the passing of an important person. Whoever this Darmani was, she must have been a very powerful Goron to have commanded so much respect from her people. Perhaps if I had come here sooner, I could've done something to prevent her death. No, it happened before I arrived in Termina, so her death was predestined to occur. I then looked up at the sky to clear my mind. Despite not seeing the clear blue skies--I was glad that the snow prevented me from seeing the moon--I wondered if Darmani could see what was happening.

I'd hate to think that she was being tormented in the afterlife because of not being able to do anything to save her people.

It was now starting to become apparent that Termina was a world embroiled with death overlooking everything, waiting for the perfect opportunity to strike down anyone it feels deserves to die for one reason or another. The Deku Butler's--Mrs. Cheerilee--son, Kamaro--Zephyr Breeze--and now Darmani. Three lives had been lost yet I suspected there were many more out there waiting for me to find out about them.

Twilight then bopped me on the head again--was this going to be her means of getting my attention--reminding me that we needed to keep going. Just because the village was a short distance away didn't mean that I could take my time. I still only had seventy-two hours to prevent the moon from destroying Termina.

Much like the previous bridges, the last one was just as sturdy, so I walked across and into the tunnel that turned out to be a lot shorter than I was expecting. Upon exiting the tunnel, Twilight and I were shocked at what we were looking at. Goron Village looked like it extended forever what with how big it was, and how the far end consisted of nothing but a blank void of space--the snow did limit my vision so perhaps I couldn't see everything.

" So the Gorons live here?" Twilight asked.

" This place is far more spacious than Goron City was." I answered.

" Am I to assume that you're talking about a location in Hyrule?"

" Yeah. Goron City featured narrow passageways that went in all kinds of directions. I don't know how the Gorons were able to live in such cramped quarters, but they never once complained about it. Seeing how big this village is really shows just how different both words truly are." I answered.

" Just make sure not to fall down on the ice."

" No need to tell me that." I said. The thought of falling down on my rear because of the ice was the last thing on my mind. What was on my mind involved feeling sorry for someone I didn't even know. Darmani was taken away from her people and that has had a negative effect on them. Did it was a reflection of how life itself was short, and so we have to make do with how much of it we get before moving onto the next life. Just thinking about such thoughts sent shivers down my back.

" I don't see anyone around."

" They might be inside somewhere."

" It makes sense that they would prefer to stay inside where it's warm."

" I'm sure we'll find a Goron if we look hard enough." I said. It actually didn't take as long as I initially thought--I guessed several minutes and it was several seconds--as standing a few hundred metres away on the other side of a narrow walkway was a Goron. I couldn't tell if it was a male or female Goron, but they were wearing a helmet along with a breastplate that didn't appear to fit on their body very well. When I saw their kind before, they resembled humans who wore clothing that was amazonian in nature. Now I was seeing them for what they really were, creatures that looked like rocks.

Since the walkway was made of ice, I had no intention of using it in case I were to slip and drop down to the floor below. Luckily, there was a wooden bridge nearby that went around a longer path, but I preferred it instead of the more dangerous path. The Goron hadn't noticed my presence so they continued standing--more like shivering--so I walked over to the bridge and across making sure to keep an eye on them. Twilight had no qualms over me wanting to use an easier path as she didn't like the thought of me falling down.

Upon getting to the other side and walking up to the Goron, they turned to face me and I could see that they had been outside in the cold for quite some time--having pieces of ice hanging on your facial features was a pretty good indicator. My mouth then dropped upon recognizing who was standing before me. It was Diamond Tiara! Her Highness once told me that her Equestrian counterpart had since become much nicer, yet that might not be true with this version.

" Huh!? A human!? Someone actually made it here in one piece!?" Diamond Tiara asked.

" The cold weather didn't do me any--" I answered, but was quickly cut off when Twilight bopped me on the head. I was annoyed at how she interupted my conversation, but the look on her face made me feel concerned.

" Sunset? Do you mind if I take this one?" Twilight asked.

" I'm not sure if she would want to talk to a fairy."

" Maybe, but I'd like to talk to a character for a change instead of you. I know you're the hero of this adventure, but I'd like to contribute in ways that don't involve me simply giving you advice and pointing out the obvious." Twilight said. I never knew Her Highness felt so passionate about it. I supposed it was something I never really considered before, and for that I felt guilty about not giving her a chance to express her desires. There was no way I was going to deny her what she wanted, so I stepped aside with a wave of my hand. " I know this is awkward, Sunset, but I appreciate you giving me this opportunity."

" Just do what you usually do."

" If you mean a lecture, I think a more direct approach is in order." Twilight said as she floated in front of me before stopping inches from Diamond Tiara's face. " Excuse me, but I hope it's okay for me to talk to you."

" Oh! A fairy! I haven't seen one of your kind around here before. Usually, you're up there with the rest of your friends at the Great Fairy's Fountain, but I can accept you wanting to get away from there considering the temple has been nothing but a major pain for us Gorons." Diamond Tiara said.

" I was wondering if you could answer a few questions?"

" Make it quick, okay? The weather around here continues getting worse, and while I'd love nothing more than to inside where it's a bit warmer, I have to stay out here as the guard of the Goron Shrine until my relief replaces me." Diamond Tiara answered.

" My friend and I have heard about the passing of one of your own."

" You mean, Darmani?"

" Yes. We also heard that she was buried somewhere in these mountains. Do you know where exactly?"

" Well, that's something we Gorons wouldn't normally share with outsiders, but your kind do live on this mountain as well, so I guess it's okay for me to tell you. The burial site for the Great Darmani is located in the Mountain Village, but the pathway is no longer accessible. Unless you were to climb up to reach her grave, I'm afraid you've got no reason for going up there. I wish that I could've gone up there to give her a burial worthy of her greatness--even though she was stoic in personality." Diamond Tiara answered.

There was something she said that sounded familiar, but I couldn't put my finger on it. I tried to figure it out but the sound of crying made it difficult for me to concentrate. The noise didn't appear to be fazing Diamond Tiara, so had she gotten used to it or was completely ignorant.

" Do you hear something crying?"

" I was hoping you wouldn't have noticed, but then the elder's son is known for having a loud wailing voice. He's been crying non-stop ever since his father left a week ago in order to find out why Snowhead is being bombarded with so much snow. We've tried everything to calm him down but nothing's worked." Diamond Tiara answered.

She then looked at me for a few moments before turning her head in the opposite direction and mumbled a few words. I had no idea what she was saying, but it felt like she didn't appreciate me learning about something that had nothing to do with a non-mountain native. " I'm sorry, but I can't say anything else about it."

" What? Why not?"

" It's a Goron matter. While I have no problems seeing a human around here, outsiders knowing our business is a bad precedent. That strange human in the green outfit already knows way too much as it is, and she doesn't even live in the mountains. Sorry, but I'm not going to say anymore to you." Diamond Tiara answered. She then turned her face away from me and resumed her shivering from before.

I could understand why the Gorons didn't want anyone from beyond Snowhead to know about their way of life. Granted, she did act like a complete jerk, but she most likely was told not to tell anything otherwise she'd get punished.

There was no point in trying to get Diamond Tiara to say anything more about what was going on. It was something that Twilight and I had to figure out on our own. Thanking her for what information she did provide, I walked past her making sure not to make eye contact, and resumed walking down the pathway. Had the cold weather changed the Gorons' attitudes towards outsiders or was this something they had always been known for?

As I was thinking about how Diamond Tiara behaved, I failed to notice the icy floor ahead of me. The instant I stepped on it, I slipped, fell onto my rear, and slid down the path where it went around a strange building before I landed on my face in a large clearing. Climbing back onto my feet and brushing off loose ice chunks, I began to look around to see if I could find a way back up. Ahead of me was an endless chasm with an island situated quite the ways away. How was anyone supposed to get over there without wings? Also, why weren't there guardrails to prevent someone from plunging off? You'd think the Gorons would be more inclined to keep themselves from dying.

" I can't believe how rude Diamond Tiara was."

" It didn't bother me all that much, Twilight. I got used to people treating me badly, especially after the Fall Formal when I was exposed as the monster I was." I said.

" Sunset..."

" I'm better now than I was before, yet there are times when I look bad on what I did, and wished that I could've done things differently." I said. That's when I noticed something really odd and stepped forward in order to confirm my suspicions. There was a shadow in the middle of the clearing near a wall, yet what was even casting it? Nothing within the immediate vicinity was producing a shadow, and Her Highness and I had our own underneath us. " What's this doing here?" I inched slightly closer and sensed some kind of presence hanging above the shadow, but maybe the cold had really gotten to me.

" A shadow without anything attached to it."

" Is it danger?"

" I don't know what it is."

" Sometimes the most mysterious thing can turn out to be the most obvious."

" WAAAAH!" I shouted. I looked around upon hearing Flash Sentry's voice in hopes of figuring out where he was. It took me a few moments to figure out that his owl was perched on top of a tall pillar with him sitting on the saddle. Even when I try hard not to freak out whenever I encounter him, my efforts prove to be in vain. Flash always caught me by surprise even when it wasn't intentional. Once I regained my composure, I folded my arms and gave Flash a stern look.

" My apologies for surprising you." Flash Sentry said.

" I really wish you wouldn't keep doing that."

" This is only our second encounter, fairy child, but again I apologize for making you uneasy. In any case, it is fortunate that we have met again. Have my stone statues been of help to you on your journey? The more of them you have activated by striking with a blade, the larger your horizons shall become." Flash Sentry said.

" It has made travelling around Termina much easier."

" To soar through the skies like a bird is truly an honourable experience." Flash Sentry said. His owl companion suddenly thrust its head forward to get a closer look at me. I backed away several steps in case it tried to attack me, but then it started tilting its head left and right before turning it upside down. I knew owls were capable of doing that, yet it felt really creepy, especially because it was much bigger than normal owls.

Flash noticed his companion glaring at me and whispered something that caused it to pull its head back. " My owl was merely observing you, but perhaps his gesture was more towards intimidation? In any case, it seems you may have the strength to change the fate of this land as I had expected."

" You doubted me?"

" Many claim they can change fate, but only the strongest of heart can do so. I must warn you, fairy child. The road ahead is even more challenging. Many trials await you that shall test your limits, yet they must be overcome. Please watch over these Gorons around you. Their land is doomed to be smothered in snow and ice forever. should the evil that pervades these mountains continues to thrive. It will become a land where no living thing can survive.

" Without courage and determination, you surely will collapse from the extreme conditions, and beccome a forgotten relic. But if that courage and determination burns bright within you, then that's another story." Flash Sentry answered.

He certainly had a lot of expectations about me, but some of his words felt like they were insulting my abilities. I know that I had struggled in the early going of this journey what with trying to get used to using items that I'd never use in everyday life, yet couldn't he have been a bit more sympathetic in some regards? Even though this was Flash Sentry, the guy who still had a crush on Twilight, I had to remember that he was portraying a different character.

Speaking of Her Highness, I wondered what was going through her mind right now. I knew she still harboured some romantic feelings towards Flash, but then she hadn't seen him in person for quite some time. Did she still have those feelings or had she moved on? It was something I couldn't just ask her to confirm. She needed to express such feelings at a time that was convenient to her and no one else.

" I've come this far, so I might as well keep going."

" You are a child of many strengths! Perhaps you do have enough strength to change the fate of this mountain after all. Can you see the island that exists on the other side of this chasm, the island that cannot be reached through normal means?" Flash Sentry asked. He then titled his head towards the island I had noticed earlier. I knew there was something about it that felt odd, but now it seemed there was more to it than I originally thought.

" My companion shall take to the air now, flying towards the shrine located within the cave on the island, so follow behind me. Do not be daunted by appearances. Instead, let your feelings guide you, and the true path shall open before you." Flash then urged his owl to begin taking off by using its great wings to pick up air currents. I had to struggle to prevent myself from falling over due to how powerful the gusts were.

The owl then began flying over towards the island, yet I wished that he had taken me with him. How was I supposed to make it across if I couldn't fly? Twilight could easily make it across as she had wings, but I was forced to come up with a means of making it over there. I folded my arms and began thinking hard on figuring out an answer, but then a timely bop on my head from Her Highness made me realize what was going on.

Flash's owl was losing its feathers as it flew across to the island--whether it was intentional or not remained to be seen--yet while some of them drifted down into the chasm, others landed on the air itself and remained in place. How in the world was that even possible? Unless, there was something there I couldn't see with my eyes?

" What do you think, Twilight?"

" There must be some kind of invisible platforms that are allowing the feathers to remain suspended like that. Flash did say that you need to let your feelings guide you, so I'm guessing you need to trust in them and hope that you don't plunge down to your death." Twilight answered.

Why did she have to say that? I already had plenty of pressure on my shoulders what with saving an entire world and restoring another one back to normal. I didn't need for her to mention anything that would make me feel even worse. However, she was right about me needing to rely on my feelings. That island was important for a reason so getting over to it was my immediate goal. I inched closer to the edge and peaked down at the chasm below--and boy was it massive. I doubted that I'd hit the bottom instantly if I were to fall in, but then I couldn't allow my mind to think of such horrible thoughts.

I had to take a risk, so I leapt from the mainland towards the first feather... and landed on what felt like a chunk of ice. On the one hand, I'm glad that I'm still safe, but on the other I wished that it could have been anything except for ice.

I sighed and looked ahead to see where the remaining feathers had fallen. Each one had fallen the exact same distance apart from each other, and that told me that each subsequent jump wouldn't be all that challenging. I did have to aim for each one correctly as the notion of plunging to my death was still apparent. Calming my nerves and leaping again, I landed on the next invisible ice chunk and continued in that manner until I reached my destination--on the final jump, I landed face-first in the snow and quickly picked myself up in case my display made Flash think otherwise of me.

" I have certainly been assured of your courage and determination. From here on, you must not be fooled by appearances. You must rely on your feelings otherwise you will meet an unfortunate end in the future. Now, enter the shrine before you." Flash Sentry said.

" Is it a shrine dedicated to the Gorons?" I asked.

" The Gorons have known this island to have existed beyond their village, but none of them have ever set foot within it. Something that will aid you in your quest lies within a wooden treasure chest. Use that item when returning from here. You will be able to find your way back, and you will understand the shadow." Flash Sentry answered. He urged his owl to rise once again where it began to fly off in the distance. I had no idea as I would ever see him again after this point, but I was grateful for his guidance.

Twilight didn't need to say anything. I knew that I needed to go into the cave entrance and get something that was inside. I had a feeling I knew what I was going to get based on how I was able to the island. Walking into the cave without any hesitation, I was expecting to go through a series of chambers in order to claim my prize, but instead it consisted of just one room with a chest situated at the far end with two boulders on either side. It seemed quiet at first but then the shuffling sounds of monsters coming from above was a dead giveaway.

" Skulltulas." Twilight said.

" Do you think I could avoid them by going straight for the chest?"

" They only come down when something enters their territory, so you might be able to avoid a fight if you tread carefully." Twilight answered.

I looked up at the ceiling and saw that there were two Skulltulas, yet I couldn't tell if they were looking down at me or not from their vantage point. It was true that I didn't want to fight them if it could be avoided, so I slowly stepped forward making sure to remain in a straight line. The Skulltulas began to shuffle as my presence in the cave finally caught their attention, but they remained on the ceiling most likely due to me not being a threat.

While a mad dash would've been beneficial, it wouldn't have done me any favours other than being drawn into a conflict. Upon reaching the chest, I quickly looked up to make sure neither monster decided to drop down for an investigation; they didn't so I was relieved. I opened up the chest and peeked inside to see what it was that Flash Sentry insisted would be helpful to me, and when my eyes caught sight of a familiar object, I just had to roll my eyes in response.

" Never thought I'd see this thing again." I said as I grabbed and pulled out the object in the chest. It was a purple coloured magnifying glass with a strange eye symbol in the middle of it, yet its most distinguishing feature was the lens itself having a blue tint on one side and a red tint on the other. " Flash Sentry was right about it being useful! Guess I shouldn't have doubted him just because he's Flash. I am surprised that it's become available a lot sooner than it did when I acquired it last time."

As I gazed at my new item, Twilight flew about in a tizzy and I knew she wanted to know what was special about a magnifying glass. " This is the Lens of Truth although some call it 'the eye that can see the truth'. When I use magic and gaze into the lens, the truth becomes known to me."

" It can show you the future?"

" No, I didn't mean to say it like that. It can reveal things that are either invisible or aren't really there."

" The truth can be a powerful thing but you need to make sure not to abuse it, Sunset. There are some things that are immune to the truth, and attempting to figure them out would only be a waste of time." Twilight said.

" What about that shadow we saw outside?"

" You think that item will reveal something?"

" It couldn't hurt to try. We need to get back over to the mainland anyway in order to continue, and I can show you just what this thing can do. The magic I gained from Adagio will enable me to see the truth, but I can't use it too much or else my magic will be drained." I answered. Walking back outside--running would've brought those Skulltulas down on me from above--the feathers that dropped from Flash's owl were no longer there, but I raised the Lens of Truth to my eye and looked forward.

" Come and take a look for yourself, Twilight. You can see what I used to make my way across initially." Twilight floated down in front of my face and peaked through the lens to see the ice chunks. How they were floating in thin air was a question neither of us could answer, but she was amazed at how something so simple could show so much.

" Now this quite the fascinating magic."

" I knew you'd be impressed."

" Magic like this doesn't exist in Equestria, but if it does then it's a kind that almost nopony uses."

" It might have been a Star Swirl the Bearded thing."

" If anyone in Equestria could use magic like this, it would be him because after all he--" Twilight said before cutting herself off. Her eyes opened wide in horror followed by her jaw dropped that prompted me to check to see if she was alright. " Sunset... I... I... I can someone or something standing on the mainland over there." I thought she might have gotten a little intoxicated from witnessing such a magical display, but when I looked through the lens to see for myself, I almost dropped it. " See? I told you there was something over there, but I can't make out what it is."

" Well, I was going to show how the Lens of Truth works, and now's a really good time." I said. Without a second thought, I began jumping across the ice chunks--they were actually small platforms--making sure to keep looking into the lens so that I didn't accidentally jump into the chasm--I only had one life instead of multiple lives. While it looked like I was making it look easy, I was having a mental nervous breakdown. Upon getting back to the mainland, I dropped down onto my knees and began kissing the snow as that horrible ordeal had come to an end. " Glad that's over!"

" You didn't need to kiss the snow."

" Be in my shoes and you'll understand."

" Fair enough. Now, what about the strange person we saw while peering through the lens?" Twilight asked. I had almost completely forgotten about that! Gripping the lens firmly in my hand, I looked through it to see who or what was making that shadow, and this time I dropped it upon seeing who was standing there. Twilight was surprised at my sudden reaction and started bopping me on the head. " Sunset! Sunset! Are you alright? You look like you've seen a ghost."

" You've got no idea how right you are."

" What do you mean?" Twilight asked. She then hovered down to my face and looked through the Lens of Truth before rubbing her eyes. " No... this is impossible! How could that have happened to her? Sunset... What in the wide world of Equestria is going on here?"

I had no answer to give her. How could I? What I was seeing was impossible in my opinion, yet there was no trying to deny that we were seeing the ghost of someone who was very familiar to us. Standing--floating actually--with her usual blank--stoic--expression was Maud Pie, yet I knew straight away she was different from before. She had a large gaping wound across her chest and aside from wearing a bra and ragged shorts, she wasn't wearing anything else. Unlike other Gorons who were brown in colour, Maud was grey and transparent.

How did she get that wound? More importantly, how did she die? What was I going to say to Pinkie? The only way to know for certain was to ask and hope that she would respond.

" Hello there." I said. Maud didn't respond, but that was because I didn't use the Lens of Truth to properly see her. Raising it to my eye, I could see her again--it was actually difficult for me to look at her in her current condition--and she simply floated there without any emotions on her face. " Hello."

" Hello. I was wondering when you were going to take notice of me." Maud Pie said.

" It's kind of hard to do that since you're a ghost and all."

" I have been watching you for the last few minutes going over to that island and back again."

" That doesn't sound creepy at all."

" The one who was riding on top of the large bird told me that I had to wait here for the one who would help me to come. He said the one I needed would have the power to see spirits through eyes that can see the truth. It feels like I've been waiting forever, so I am glad that you." Maud Pie said.

" Flash Sentry told you to wait out here in the cold!?"

" I do not know who this Flash Sentry is that you talk about, but the cold weather that spreads across my village no longer affects me. After all, I no longer can feel anything since my body passed away some time ago." Maud Pie said. I clenched my teeth upon realizing I said something that offended her. Either she didn't take notice of it or did and was really good at remaining calm.

" You are the first person to have seen me for quite a while now. I had been waving my hands around hoping anyone would see, but they were not able to gaze upon one who no longer lives amongst them." She then floated a few paces and I managed to get a better look at the wound on her body. Whatever did that must have been incredibly powerful, but then why would she want to fight anything bigger than her. " You are looking at my wound."

" I'm sorry if it makes you uncomfortable."

" No. It's alright. I received it when I was protecting my village from a rampaging Dodongo many years ago. The wound never properly healed and became scarred. I like to think it reminds me of when my people turned to me in their time of need." Maud Pie said. The wound itself looked like it may have reached down to the bone, but I was afraid of asking in case she changed her mind and took offence. " I'm sorry but I ended up going off topic. I would like to focus on what is really important."

" Oh? And what would that be?"

" Since you can see me with strange magical powers, you may be the one who can help me."

" What do you want me to do?"

" Not here."

" Huh?"

" I wish for you to help me in the proper location. Please follow me to the place where I was buried by my people. You have the ability to see me so you should be able to keep up with me as we travel through Snowhead." Maud Pie answered. Was she being serious right now!? She wanted me to follow her to her grave? Why not simply ask me to help her here and now rather than drag across the entire region? Before I could respond accordingly, Maud turned to her left and began floating away. " Standing there like a statue won't do either of us any favours, so please follow me and try to keep up as best you can."

This had become a real dilemna. Should I follow Maud Pie to her grave or should I stand my ground and insist that I help her here in the village?

Chapter 21: Goron With the Sunset Hair

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
August 15, 2016
Chapter 21: Goron With the Sunset Hair.

I was stuck with a difficult decision to make. On the one hand, Maud Pie wanted me to follow her all the way back to where she was buried. While I was curious as to what her grave looked like, the fact that it meant traversing back through some rather difficult terrain was something I'd rather not do. On the other hand, I could just ask her to tell me what happened right here in Goron Village without having to go gallivanting off like she wanted.

I thought about asking Twilight for her opinion, but Maud quickly came to a stop and turned around. Was she annoyed at how I was just standing there? I actually couldn't tell because her emotionless face made it hard to figure out which emotion she was using.

" Why are you standing there? I told you that we must go to where my people buried me." Maud Pie said.

" I just don't see the point of dragging me back to your grave. Why not just tell me what you want from me here? It would save us both plenty of time, something your people are currently lacking right now." I said. Maud floated there without saying a word for a few moments, and I thought I had somehow offended her with my remark. My next thought was that she was going to possess me or whatever it was that ghosts did, but she just floated in place without displaying a single emotion. " Is something wrong?"

" If you are to help me as the one on the flying bird says, you must come to my grave."

" That doesn't answer my question."

" I am sorry but there is no time for me to answer anything."

" Well, then I'm sorry but I'm not able to help you unless you can give me some leeway here." I said. It felt strange conversing with Maud Pie despite being a ghost. Whenever I had the pleasure of her company back home, she was always difficult to approach.

I mean, she wasn't impossible to talk to. She just had a strange way of expressing her feelings. How Pinkie Pie was able to understand her older sister's mannerisms continues to baffle me, but there was a sisterly bond between them that the rest of us couldn't fathom. If I could describe Maud in a single word, it would be eccentric. Unlike other people who live in the world that I now called home, Maud was the only one I knew who had a rock as a pet. Bizarre? Probably, but it made her happy and, in turn, made Pinkie happy. In this scenario, Maud's stoic personality was at the forefront, yet I doubted she understood where I was coming from.

As we continued to stare at each other, I could feel the cold air beginning to grow stronger. It made me fold my arms in an attempt to keep warm, and that meant I needed to get into someplace warm or else come down with a nasty case of pneumonia.

" I haven't been fair with you."

" Huh!?" I didn't expect Maud to say something like that. I knew she was difficult to understand but that took the cake.

" The reason why we must go to my grave is because that is where I shall finally return to this mortal coil. I have been waiting here for the one to come along who can allow me to come back to life and finish what I had started." Maud Pie said.

" Is that true?"

" Yes. I have no reason to lie to you."

" Then why didn't you say that?"

" I don't quite follow your logic. I assumed you would understand my reason and choose to follow me without any questions. Perhaps I was not clear with my intentions and I apologize for being confusing. The one who rides the giant bird says that you possess a power that no one else has. If it is a power that can help me regain my life, then I will do whatever is necessary to be able to achieve my goal." Maud Pie answered.

" Did he say what that power was?"

" No, but I would learn when the time came. Are we finished with this conversation now? I know you want to get out of this weather, yet I wish for you to follow me to where my people buried me. From my position, you do not have much of an option. Please do not view my words as a threat. You have questions and I have the answers." Maud Pie answered. She then turned around and began to float away from me before tilting her head around slightly. " Follow me to my grave and everything will become clear. The journey will take us to the highest point in Snowhead." Before I could get in a word edgewise, Maud resumed floating away.

I didn't know what to think of what just happened. The option of her explaining everything to me right here had been cast aside by the cold wind, and now I found myself forced to follow her until we reached her grave. If it was located where she said it was, I hoped that my body would last long enough in this accursed weather. Flash Sentry... What had he gone and said about me to Maud before I arrived in the village? I could've easily explained things to her without him making some kind of wild statement. Knowing that there wasn't anything else I could do, I sighed and began to follow after Maud who appeared to be taking a more roundabout route.

Even though I could use the Lens of Truth to follow her ghostly form directly, that would just be a waste of my magic, and I had a feeling I was going to be needing plenty of it in the upcoming trials. Since her shadow was still plainly visible, I could just follow it and use the lens every now and then in case she wanted to say something.

As I walked back around the building making sure not to run in case I slipped on the ice again, Twilight floated down and landed on my shoulder before grabbing the collar and sliding underneath it. Maybe she wasn't as immune to the cold as she previously thought?

" Sunset? Did you hear what Maud said?" Twilight asked.

" She didn't really give a good reason as to why we have to follow her."

" Yes, that's true, but that wasn't what I was getting at. She believes that you have the ability to bring her back to life, and I think she's expecting you to use your magic. Doesn't she know that you don't have the ability to resurrect the dead?" Twilight asked.

" No one in Equestria could do that."

" Whatever happened that caused her death hasn't obviously settled well with her."

" Her home is on the verge of succumbing to a freak snowstorm, Twilight. In her defence, Maud is willing to do whatever it takes to come back to life and save her people by going to the temple. But, we both know that what she wants is wishful thinking, and that nothing can bring her back." I said.

" Maybe we should tell her?"

" I'd doubt she'd listen."

If there was one thing I knew about the Gorons of Termina that was the same as the Gorons of Hyrule, was that they were very stubborn. As a proud rock people, they didn't like to be proven wrong about anything. In her head, Maud believed I could use my powers to revive her, and nothing anyone says would change her opinion. There was a sense of dread that filled my heart. I knew she wasn't going to like what I would tell her when we reach her grave.

Despite being a ghost, Maud was surprisingly fast--I assumed she wanted to reach her grave as quickly as possible--and I found it difficult to keep up with her. The pathway she took to reach the entrance of Goron College involved getting past a couple of Blue Tektites who had decided to make the path their territory. One hit from them would've meant falling back down and having to run all the way up again. Fortunately, I had improved on my dodging and both monsters slide past me when they attempted to attack. Of course, Maud didn't even notice given that nothing would affect her corporeal body.

I took the time to get a better look at Goron Village just to get myself familiar with the layout in case I had to come back later. Much of the village was surrounded by walls of solid rock, yet there was a cave entrance in the eastern most section. It was covered by an ice chunk so that meant using hot spring water would melt it away quickly. The entrance was actually quite large as though something big could live in there. Aside from that and the mentioning of the Goron Shrine by Diamond Tiara, there wasn't really that much else around here. It actually felt disappointing knowing that the Gorons had to endure in such conditions whether there was any snow or not.

By the time I reached the entrance to the village, Maud's shadow had stopped moving, indicating that she needed to speak to me about something. I raised the Lens of Truth to my eyes and peered through it to see her ghostly form suddenly appear before me.

" I noticed that you were looking around my village." Maud Pie said.

" I wanted to be familiar with it."

" You seem bored."

" Compared to the likes of Clock Town, Goron Village is lacking."

" My village may not have the same appeal, but it is the only place my people have ever known. Generations ago, we Gorons came to these mountains from beyond this land, and settled when they realized that they could carve out a worthwhile existence. They worked really hard to get everything the way it is." Maud Pie said.

" What about that cave down at the bottom?"

" That is where Medigoron lives. He was too big to fit in the Goron Shrine, so he carved out that cave with his hands. He has very powerful hands. He created something special only Gorons who have proven themselves can use." Maud Pie answered. I was expecting her to give me a little more information, but she had the same mentality about revealing information to "outsiders" like Diamond Tiara. I thought about inquiring a little further without making my intentions known, yet Maud chose to continue guiding me ending the conversation before I could say anything else. In the next area which was where I encountered Pinkie, Maud had stopped by the wooden bridge that connected to the island. " You look like you are upset with something."

" I wanted to know more about what Medigoron makes."

" Only Gorons are allowed to know that."

" That's what Diamond Tiara said."

" I don't know who that is."

" Never mind..."

" While my people like to keep some things about us to ourselves, there is one thing I can tell you about. Have you heard of the Goron Races?" Maud Pie asked. I shook my head yet she didn't seem surprised by my response. Most people who were able to express their feelings would've been shocked, but she simply stared at me with that blank look that was slowly becoming a normality for her.

" Gorons race there to be the fastest." She then looked down at her legs and looked at my legs before dropping her head slightly. If I didn't know any better, I could've sworn I heard her crying softly so that I couldn't hear it. " I used to be the fastest among my people. Everyone went there to either race or watch to see who amongst them would become the champion."

" Um... Why were you looking at my legs?"

" Was I being offensive?"

" No, not really."

" I don't understand."

" You seemed disappointed."

" I guess that I just haven't gotten used to the fact that I no longer have my proper legs." Maud Pie said. I looked down at her legs again and realized that they ended in short nubs compared to what Gorons usually had. Was this because she was a ghost? " Whenever I competed in the Goron Races, no one was ever able to beat me. I was the best. The others admired me for my skill even though deep down they wanted to beat me.

" The elder's son was my biggest fan. He loved seeing me roll along at intense speeds, pushing my way through using magic, and winning the prize every year." Maud then noticed my blank expression, and took her a few moments to realize that I had no idea what she was talking about. " Sorry. I got carried away with my memories."

" Do you miss those days?"

" Yes, but I will get new ones when you have revived me." Maud Pie answered. She truly believed that she could be brought back to life. I was a magical prodigy--not to the same extent as Her Highness given that I abandoned my studies--but not even I could perform such a miracle as resurrecting the dead.

I really wanted to tell her the truth, but I knew she wouldn't listen to me--maybe not right now but perhaps later?

Maud continued to float along past Pinkie, and I followed after her making sure to avoid the ice chunk that covered the hole in the ground. The instant I walked past Pinkie, however, a howling sound broke the eerie silence of the area. At first I thought it was coming from behind me, but then I looked down and saw a white beast running around on the frozen lake, struggling to climb up to where I was--it must have had sharp claws to avoid slipping on the ice. I could've sworn that I'd seen it somewhere before, but my mind was running a blank, yet Twilight knew what it was immediately.

" A White Wolfos... Can't say I'm surprised to see one around here." Twilight said.

" What makes you say that?"

" They live in cold regions by hiding in plain sight by pretending to be flat, but then suddenly spring up and attack whenever something gets near them. I know it sounds silly to hear me say it like that, Sunset, but that is what they really do. Most of the time, they dart about waiting for the perfect opportunity to get close, but if you try to attack them, they jump back and continue darting back and forth. Despite having sharp claws, White Wolfos don't really inflict that much damage." Twilight answered.

" Now I remember!"

" Remember what?"

" I encountered one of these back in Hyrule, but I only ever saw the one, or maybe I saw a second one somewhere? In any case, I don't recall how you go about beating them, so perhaps you can remind me. After all, you are my fairy partner and your knowledge is second to none." I answered.

" No need to flatter me, Sunset. But... I do appreciate the comment. Anyway, when a White Wolfos attacks up close, it will turn its back towards you. That's when you can strike it from behind and take it down in just one hit. Why it does this maneuver is beyond me, but you shouldn't hesitate as it could mean the difference between life and death." Twilight said. The creature looked rather pitiful from where I was standing, but I wasn't about to start mocking it. Monsters in these games had a nasty habit of suddenly doing something that went against their programming, and I wasn't about to see what this thing would do.

Turning my attention back to Maud, she had since continued on and probably didn't even notice that I wasn't following her. Knowing that I needed to conserve my magic, I stopped using the Lens of Truth and followed her shadow making sure not to fall down to the frozen lake below. The White Wolfos wasn't an actual threat, but fighting it would only slow me down and I needed all the time I could muster given that I still had three days.

Running across the second bridge, my heart began to beat faster when the howls of a second White Wolfos echoed around me. Unlike the first one that popped up on the frozen lake, this one appeared right in front of me as though it were guarding the final bridge. I drew my sword and prepared to fight but then it suddenly got pushed aside by an unseen force, tumbling down the slope and onto the lake.

Using the lens again, I noticed Maud was standing where the monster had stood, yet she simply stared at me with her emotionless expression. I had a feeling she just saved me some time, but how was she able to push it away when she wasn't capable of touching anything? Ghosts can't touch physical objects as far as I was aware, but perhaps the White Wolfos had some ghost-like qualities as well?

" We need to keep moving."

" How did you do that?"

" Those beasts are afraid of anything that's stronger than them."

" That doesn't make any sense."

" I would like us to keep going if that's okay." Maud Pie said. She then looked up at a large boulder on top of a ledge that could only be reached by walking up a steep slope, and reached out with her hand like she wanted to go there, but quickly dropped it. I could see her clench that same hand into a fist, but she quickly changed her tone upon noticing me looking at her actions. Perhaps Maud was realizing that she couldn't be revived from the dead. " The entrance to the Goron Racetrack is blocked."

" Is that a problem?"

" If spring were here, everyone would be up there preparing to see a great race. The snow is preventing the race from happening, but that boulder is also a problem. If only there were some way of shattering it to pieces." Maud Pie answered. Again, was she beginning to realize that she was permanently dead? " Once you bring me back to life, I can shatter that boulder with just one punch. Gorons who win the races are rewarded with a special material that is desired by the smithy who lives in the Mountain Village. I don't get why he wants it so much. Our prize is not worth anything really."

That was something I needed to remember as I had every intention of paying another visit to Fancy Pants and Tirek once I had gotten my hands on hot spring water. " We need to continue onward. The place my people buried me is not very far now." Maud Pie then continued onward prompting me to follow along.

" Twilight?"

" What is it?" Twilight asked.

" I think Maud is starting to realize that coming back to life isn't going to happen."

" Yes, she does seem to be having some internal conflict, but why not just tell her that you can't bring her back?"

" I just don't have the heart to tell her. If I suddenly said that I couldn't fulfill her wishes, it'd make me out to be the bad guy. You, more than anyone else knows that I don't want to ever go back to those troubled days. I've worked really hard to get away from my old life, and to go back to it would just destroy what confidence I have in myself." I answered. Twilight looked at me for a few seconds with a surprised look, but then she nuzzled up next to my face. I knew Her Highness understood. She was the one who gave me a second chance where the others chose instead to scorn me. " Maud will realize that nothing in this world can revive her and accept what fate has dealt her."

" A harsh way to look at it, but nothing I don't disagree with."

" I do wonder what Flash Senty said to her before we got to Goron Village."

" That's something we may never know."

As I entered the Mountain Village, Maud's shadow continued moving although she was heading more towards the right. If I recalled what I saw when I first came here, there was a small pond that featured several chunks of ice. Could her grave be located nearby? As I thought about where the Gorons could've buried her, her shadow suddenly began getting smaller.

I quickly used the Lens of Truth and saw that she began to fly upwards, but that actually wasn't the worst thing. No, that honour went to a massive climbing section. The entire mountainside was cover with a ladder that split into different directions. Some paths lead to dead ends while a main path the very top of the mountain.

Thinking that climbing while using the Lens of Truth would only waste my magic, I put it in my pocket and came to a realization. The ladder disappeared the instant the lens was no longer shining on it.

" Did that ladder just disappear?"

" It does seem to be that way, Sunset."

" How did the Gorons manage to climb up that!?"

" I don't think they did. Remember what we learned from Pinkie Pie? There was a tunnel that they used to get to the top of this mountain, but the cold weather has covered up the entrance with thick snow. I'm guessing this is how you have to get up to her grave." Twilight answered.

" That means I need to consume a lot of magic."

" Considering that you used quite a bit upon acquiring the Lens of Truth, I'm not sure if you have enough to make it to the top. I know that Adagio gave you an increase in magic when you returned the Stray Fairies to the Fairy Fountain in Woodfall, but you haven't picked up any magic jars lately. If you ran out of magic during your climb and somehow slipped, you'd fall straight down to your death." Twilight said.

Her words were horrible in nature to think about, but she wasn't trying to hide the truth from me. Unlike the actual hero who most likely had numerous lives despite getting killed--video game logic at its best--I only had the one life. If I lose that life, my world would never go back to the way it was.

There was only one option to take. I needed to collect some magic jars to restore my magic--having my Equestrian magic would've made this a moot point but Termina prevented me from using it--and that meant smashing jars scattered across the land. The only problem was that there were no jars considering I was out in the middle of nowhere. To find pots meant going all the way back to Clock Town. I could save time by warping there using that song Flash gave me, the Song of Soaring, but even then time was precious.

" Gah!" I shouted, stomping my foot on the snow.

" What's wrong?"

" I'm just frustrated knowing that my own natural magic has been supressed."

" You do know that you shouldn't rely on it too much, right?"

" I know, but still--"

" There's not much you can do about it, Sunset. You need to collect some magic jars to replenish your magic power. Now, what exactly do you have to do in order to restore it? I assume that asking Adagio is out of the question seeing as both Great Fairies you've saved have now been shattered thanks to resetting time." Twilight said. I then told her about pots and how I needed to smash them in order to get whatever was hiding in them. Upon hearing that I had to resort to cheap vandalism, Her Highness scoffed at me before looking directly in my eyes with a sharp gaze. " You're kidding me, right? Tell me you're kidding me, Sunset."

" It's a mechanic I learned from my previous journey."

" Whoever came up with the idea must have had some twisted desire or something. In any case, there aren't any pots for you to smash around here, but maybe you can break those small mounds of snow we've been seeing all over the place." Twilight suggested.

The idea of picking up snow with my hands wasn't to my liking--it was cold and I didn't want to get frostbite on my hands--but Twilight's suggestion was pretty sound especially since it didn't mean having to waste time going somewhere else. I decided to walk towards the Mountain Smithy as I remembered seeing a lot of small snow mounds nearby. Whenever I ran into one, I picked it up, tossed it, and waited to see what would come out upon it breaking on impact with the ground.

My first few attempts resulted in some rupees--wealth wasn't what I needed at that point--but then the next one produced a small magic jar. One of those would only restore a small amount of magic compared to the big jar that restored a lot in one go. Knowing there was no reason to be choosy, I picked it up and continued smashing the snow mounds in hopes of getting what I needed. Upon smashing my twentieth mound, I was just about to grab what had been just my third small magic jar--they proved to be elusive--when a voice suddenly called out from out of nowhere causing me to jump slightly.

" Whoa-oh-oh!"

" Twilight? Did you hear that?"

" I did, but where did it come from?"

" No clue."

" Whoa-oh-oh!" The voice called out a second time. Again, neither Twilight nor I knew where it was coming from, so we began looking around to see who or what was calling. I actually thought it was Fancy Pants, but then he didn't seem like the kind of person who would call out like that--he wouldn't come outside where it was cold either--so it had to have been someone else. Who in their right mind would be out here in such harsh weather? " Hey! Can anyone hear me?"

" Where are you?" I asked, cupping my hands together so that my voice could echo.

" Up here! Up here! I'm up here!"

" That doesn't exactly give me much to go on."

" Look on top of this ledge! I am standing right here and shivering to death!" There were a lot of ledges that jutted out across the Mountain Village, so there was no telling which one this mysterious person was calling out from. There was something about the accent that felt familiar, but that wasn't important so as to finding where they were.

That's when Twilight came up with an idea. She decided to fly into the air in hopes of seeing if she could find whoever was calling for help. I told her to be careful in case the one connected to the voice was only pretending to help and was in fact a monster that wanted to eat her or something. Her Highness floated upward and began scanning about to see if anything looked suspicious while I looked on. It didn't take long for her to notice a Goron wearing a strange hat was shivering on a ledge that was right above where I was standing. She floated back down and informed me of what she saw, and I was shocked that someone was trapped.

I walked forward a few feet before turning around and noticing the ledge in question. It wasn't so much a ledge jutting out from the mountain but rather a raised frozen platform that must have formed when the cold weather initially began. Judging from how far from the ground the ledge was, whoever was up there could easily jump down to the ground without sustaining any kind of injury.

" How did you get up there?" I called out.

" I've got no idea but I need help!"

" Can't you jump down? It's not that big of a drop so I'm sure you'll be fine."

" I'm too cold and weak to make such an attempt."

" Are you able to at least inch yourself towards the edge? I'd like to be able to see you so that I can talk to you better." I said. At first, the mysterious person didn't say anything and I assumed they weren't even able to do that, but then I heard shuffling coming from the ledge. A few moments later and a Goron's head poked out in front of the ledge, resulting in dropped jaws from both myself and Twilight. We recognized who this Goron was. It was Photo Finish, the student from Canterlot High who loved taking photos using that old-fashioned camera of hers. I should've known it was her based on the accent.

She definitely looked unusual as a Goron given how plump they were, but it was her hairstyle and flashy sunglasses that made her distinguished. She was also wearing her usual attire, but it was the mask on her head that struck me as the most important thing. Since I already collected a few masks, I needed to get my hands on the one Photo Finish had, but within good reasons of course.

" A human!? I was expecting the fellow Goron, but perhaps you might do." Photo Finish said.

" Did you say something about being cold?"

" Yes! I am... da freezing up here! I'm also very hungry! I haven't eaten anything in so long, I feel like I will pass out."

" What if I find you some food?"

" You!? No offence but I don't think a human can find what I crave." Photo Finish answered. She then began to wobble about for a few moments before falling over and landing with a loud thud on the ledge. Just hearing that sound made me want to laugh, but I withheld in case my actions offended her. " Ooooh! I'm so hungry that I can't even stand up properly. I really need something in me and soon." She climbed back onto her feet and shuffled over to the edge again and looked down at me, desperation protruding from her face. " Maybe you can help me after all. I mean, I doubt you'll succeed, but at this point I'll do anything before I go."

" Go? You're not going anywhere."

" You do not understand my meaning? Gah! I'm surprised a little schnitzel like you can't grasp the obvious! I am not long for this world. I doubt that I will be able to last much longer what with this cold weather freezing me, but perhaps one last meal is all I need to quietly drift away to that big sleep where you never wake up again." Photo Finish said. Had she been up there so long, she had gotten delusional about surviving? Or perhaps she was being serious and death was loaming over her? " I just want to eat once more before I die up here even if it isn't that big of a meal. Something tough and hard to chew... I cannot forget that flavor."

" And where am I supposed to get that?"

" My village is sure to have the food that I crave, but you may be hard pressed to find someone willing to give it to you. Because of how cold it's gotten, most Gorons have either hidden their food to prevent others from stealing it or simply don't have enough for themselves." Photo Finish answered.

" I'll see what I can do."

" If you can bring me what I desire, then I'll give you this mask I'm wearing on my head. I know it's not exactly a wonderful item, but I'm sure a human such as yourself can get some good use out of it. Now go! Leave me and do not return without my final meal." Photo Finish said.

She may have thought the mask she wore wasn't very important, but it was something that I really needed, and now I had a valid reason as to how I could get it. Turning around, I began to walk over to the small pond, but then I began to think about how I was going to get her a meal. Going back to Goron Village was easy, but going inside the Goron Shrine where they resided would prove difficult. Diamond Tiara may or may not be willing to let me inside given how she viewed me, but perhaps she might be willing to change her mind should I tell her one of her own is in dire need of food and is likely to die.

The first thing that needed to be done was figure out what Maud Pie wanted from me. I mean, I knew she wanted me to use magic, but that wasn't going to happen no matter how much she talked about it. Perhaps there was something else that I had to do for her? All manner of thoughts began flashing in my mind as to what she would ask of me. Sighing, I kept going until I reached the pond. A sign nearby stated that it was deep and that Gorons shouldn't play near it. Were they unable to swim? I supposed it did make sense given how bulky they were compared to humans and Deku Scrubs. It also explained why they needed to use that tunnel.

Several chunks of ice bobbed up and down in the water, and it was obvious that I needed to use them to make my way across. I needed to time things just right otherwise I would end up experiencing a cold swim that I would rather not have.

" You'd better be careful here." Twilight said.

" I'm not a Goron so I'm not going to drown."

" That's not what I meant."

" Don't worry, Twilight. I happen to be a very good swimmer as you've already seen. A little cold water isn't going to cause any harm."

" That's where you're wrong, Sunset. The water is much colder than you think. If you were to swim about in it, your strength and eventually your life-force will drain away until you perish. Those ice chunks will be slippery, obviously, so take your time here." Twilight said.

Now that she mentioned it, I could sense a cold vapour wafting up from the water below. In any case, I couldn't allow myself to be discouraged. I had to keep on going no matter what trials were waiting for me--although having some kind of cheat would be practical. I steeled myself and jumped onto the first ice chunk causing it to wobble slightly due to my weight being applied to it. Fortunately, there was only one more ice chunk to jump onto, so at least this wasn't going to take very long. No, what would take a lot of time was the daunting task that laid ahead of me in the form of the large mountain. I had to climb up what could be several thousand feet.

Sometimes, I wished that I wasn't the one who had to go through all this. I've had experiences like this back in Equestria, but that was when I had magic along with four hooves with which to gallop along at an incredible pace. But, it was destiny--maybe fate--that placed this burden on me, so who was I to go against it?

Jumping onto the second chunk and nearly slipping into the water, I jumped again and landed on the other side before looking straight up. The mountain disappeared into the thick clouds that swirled above, but that was the least of my worries. My concern involved running out of oxygen in case the air up there was too thin for me.

" Guess it's time for me to start climbing, huh?"

" Do you think you got enough magic jars?"

" I'm not sure, but I can't put it off any longer. To be frank, I don't know how I'll be able to climb and hold the Lens of Truth at the same time."

" Yes, that is a problem and one we didn't consider."

" Could you hold it for me?"

" Me? I'm a fairy! I don't think fairies are capable of holding anything bigger than a thimble. But, what if you tied some string around the hilt of the lens, place it around your neck like a necklace, and allow me to hold onto it that way? I should be able to do that while you bear the brunt of the weight." Twilight answered. I knew Her Highness was right about being too small to hold anything, but did she have to make herself appear completely helpless? Also, where was I going to find some loose string in the middle of nowhere? My pockets can carry a lot of things yet string wasn't one of them.

" Where am I supposed to get some string?"

" Pull off a piece from your hat, tunic, or even your boots. Not too much though as that would cause it to unravel, and I don't think you want to walk around in the cold if your tunic ends up that way." Twilight answered.

It sounded like a really good plan until I addressed one little snag to Her Highness. Such string on my clothes had most likely become brittle by that point, so any attempt at trying to pull a piece off would result in it being frozen and prone to snapping like a twig. No, I believed the direct approach was necessary. I had to climb with the lens in my hand--our little conversation had essentially amounted to nothing. As soon as I took out the lens, raised it to my eye and started climbing, Twilight protested against my decision.

" What are you doing!?"

" Climbing and using the lens."

" Didn't you want to consider an alternative option?"

" I did but then I figured I should just go with it." I answered. Despite Twilight's protests, I started climbing up the ladder making sure to constantly look upward to make sure I was going on the right path.

Right off the bat, the cold wind began howling, but I knew that I had to remain strong as I climbed upwards towards the top. As soon as I climbed a short distance, the ladder split into two directions, but I could see that the path to the right lead to the next section. Inching over proved a little difficult given I had only one hand to use along with my feet, but I managed to shift over and climb further upwards.

It then made me start to think. Who built this long ladder in the first place? It couldn't have been the Gorons as I doubted they were capable of climbing ladders what with their short stubby arms and legs. Could it have been humans who came to settle down in Snowhead long ago? Also, why make them invisible aside from those who possessed the one item that could see the truth? It was questions like those and many more that continued haunting my mind because they could prove essential in figuring out how to progress further. I knew what needed to be done to save this world, but the little things weren't meant to be ignored.

A short while later, my arm started to get tired--it was supporting the entire weight of my body--yet I wasn't even halfway up. Falling off at that point would've meant instant death, so how could I continue going? Maybe I should've paid counsel to what Her Highness suggested instead of thinking I could do it on my own as is. I reached out to grab the ladder but lost my grip and wound up dangling from the ladder--thank goodness my legs hadn't gotten tired although this position was putting a lot of pressure on them--and my arms flailing about.

" Sunset!"

" This is a lot more painful than it looks."

" Drop the Lens of Truth!"

" Are you kidding!?"

" You need both hands to grab onto the ladder and with one being used to hold that lens--"

" I'm going to have to stop you right there, Twilight. I know what you're saying is sound advice given my predicament, but throwing away an essential item is something I can't consider for even a moment. I have a feeling I'll be needing the lens throughout the duration of our time here. I'll just find a way to make this work." I said. It was easier said than done. Not only were my legs experiencing agony, but my back was beginning to feel incredible pressure. I couldn't stay in this position for much longer.

I did consider sliding my legs out, fall, and hopefully grab onto the ladder instead of crashing into the snow below, but I doubted my reaction would be fast enough. Twilight's fluttering about didn't make things any easier given she continued insisting that I throw the lens away in order to save myself. That's when an idea struck me. Despite the mountain being made of rock, the outer layer was snow that had frozen over especially in these higher altitudes. What if I thrust the lens into the side of the mountain like a marker then use my free hand to regain my balance? It sounded crazy but then it was my best and arguably only option.

Without a moment's notice, I plunged the lens into the side of the mountain where it stuck in place--although it did slip a little--then I lifted myself up and tried to grab the now invisible ladder with my hand. When it was apparent that I couldn't recall where I needed to grab, I flailed about again until my hand clasped onto the ladder through sheer coincidence.

I then began to relax and breathe heavily knowing that the ordeal had come to an end. Before resuming my climb, I pulled out the lens from where I had placed it as I still needed to use it to reach the top. Twilight floated onto my hat, snuggled in a little, and also began breathing heavily. I didn't mean to give her so much stress, but then this was part and parcel of being a hero.

The next sections weren't as hectic as what I experienced earlier, and soon I found myself having finally reached the top of the mountain--only to run into something both unpleasant and saddening. A Goron was standing in front of me as I climbed onto the plateau, yet he was completely frozen, his entire body solified in a block of ice. I had no idea how long he had been there, but I knew it had to have been some time.

To his left shivering away was another Goron, but what really caught my attention was the unique cave entrance. Someone had decorated it with what looked like ancient Goron runes. Maud's shadow was nearby and that told me that this was where she had been buried.

Another thought struck me. Were these the two Gorons that Pinkie Pie said never went back to the village? The snow that blocked the tunnel they used to get up here now prevented them from going back down, so all they could do was stay here until they froze to death.

" Huh? Is someone over there?" The Goron was either very short-sighted or couldn't see due to the wind blowing. Something about his voice sounded familiar, so I walked forward to see who it was. My suspicions were confirmed when I recognized Sandalwood--his hairstyle combined with that hat of his should've been a dead giveaway. I then turned to look at the other Goron to see if he was also someone from my world, but he resembled what I assumed was an actual Goron--he didn't have any distinguishing features. " How did you get up here without using the tunnel?"

" I climbed up." I answered.

" Really? I don't recall ever seeing a ladder on the side of the mountain, but perhaps you have experience climbing mountains. It's been a while since my brother and I had any contact from anyone down below. We've been up here so long that it feels like we've been here forever." Sandalwood said.

" Why are you two even up here?"

" My brother and I were tasked with an important mission from our elder. This is the grave where a Goron hero rests. She was the greatest among us and risked her life countless times to protect us from terrifying beasts who've come to inhabit these mountains, but now her life has been taken away and during such a terrible crisis. The elder asked my brother and I to put up a memorial dedicated to the hero, but as you already know, the way back has been blocked by snow." Sandalwood answered.

" Can't you remove the snow somehow?"

" If only I could then I'd gladly go back home to Goron Village, but without Medigoron's newly developed explosive, nothing is going to be able to remove that snow. Because of that, I'm stuck up here and slowly freezing to death. My brother has already been frozen solid from the cold, and I fear that I will soon be joining him." Sandalwood answered.

" Why don't you melt the ice?"

" That would be an option, but there's something my brother and I did which I now regret." Sandalwood answered. He developed a sheepish grin on his face followed by scratching his head, indicating that I wasn't going to like what he was about to say next. " It's times like this that make me wish I had taken some of the hot spring water I found when I was digging the hero's grave." Wait, what!? There was a hot spring up here of all places!? I hoped he wasn't going to say something that would make me seething mad, but judging from how he looked down at his feet instead of at me, the former had happened.

" But the hot spring is now covered by the gravestone. I can't move something that big by myself. He did say something that made me seething mad. Sandalwood then noticed my face turning red and appeared concerned about it. " Are you okay? You look like you're about to explode like a bomb."

" I really needed some of that hot spring water." I said, clenching my teeth to hold back my anger.

" If you can somehow move the gravestone, then feel free to help yourself so long as you have a bottle." Sandalwood said. How was I supposed to move something big according to him!? Sure, I had plenty of strength for someone my age, but nothing compared to what a Goron was capable of. Now I had to go somewhere else to find some hot spring water so that I could melt the hearth the smithies used. " I'm sorry for covering up the hot spring in the hero's grave site, but I guess this is what's meant by the Goron saying, 'There's no use in crying over split rocks.' Nothing can be done about it now."

" Maybe you should've thought about that before putting the gravestone in place."

" Perhaps, but then the elder straight that the hero's grave had to be made as soon as possible. Gorons who aren't given a proper burial are said to come back as ghosts to haunt those who desecrated them. Still, if only I had taken some water from the hot spring beneath the great hero's grave... then I could melt the ice off of my brother." Sandalwood said. My mind was seething with anger over what Sandalwood did, but then I quickly calmed down upon realizing that I didn't fully understand what was going on.

" Do you know how the hero died?"

" When she didn't return several days after leaving for the temple, we sent out a search party to see if we could find her. When the party discovered her lifeless corpse, it was as though the Goron's spirit died at that exact moment." Sandalwood answered.

" Maybe she fell from a high place?"

" That's what the elder assumes happened."

" How certain do you think he is?"

" Very."

" This may sound strange to you, but would it be okay if I take a look at the hero's grave myself?"

" You came all the way up here for nothing else, so don't allow me to stop you from indulging in your curiosity. By the time you finally come back out, I'll probably be frozen just like my brother, so don't expect me to address you." Sandalwood answered. I thought about saying something regarding how he had such a negative attitude, but then the cold was really bad this high up.

Knowing there wasn't anywhere else for me to go, I walked past Sandalwood and turned on the Lens of Truth upon reaching Maud's shadow. She must have been really patient considering I talked to two Gorons even when she insisted on getting to her grave as soon as possible. She floated into the cave prompting me to follow her, and immediately I was astonished at what awaited me inside.

The cave comprised of several crystals strewn about the floor and ceiling, and a warm breeze could be felt coming from a large monolith block located in the middle of the room. A face on top one side of the monolith displayed what I assumed was Darmani's actual face--he certainly looked relaxed--and writing had been carved below it. I tried to see if I could read what it said but to no avail.

Maud herself floated forward until she came to a stop in front of the monolith so I walked over to see what she had to say. My feet became entrenched in water upon getting close and it didn't take me long to know where the hot spring was prior to Sandalwood and his brother covering it. My magic at that point was starting to run low making using the lens more , difficult, so I put it away and almost jumped upon Maud appearing before me out of thin air. Was there a force that allowed her to finally be seen without magic?

" I am sorry for making you come all the way up here." Maud Pie said.

" It was a pretty good experience given who I ran into." I said.

" Now that we have arrived at my grave, I can now introduce myself to you. I am Darmani the Third! The blood of proud Gorons flows through me. This feels strange for me to say, but when I was alive, I was a renowned warrior and veteran I protected my people from danger. No challenge was too great for me to overcome." Maud Pie said.

" When you were alive?"

" Yes... When I was alive... But alas... I am now dead." Maud Pie answered, her mouth having dropped open and placing a hand over her eyes. It looked like she was about to cry but then she quickly regained her composure. Perhaps the proud blood she possessed didn't allow her to display any kind of weakness?

" What happened to you?"

" It came all of a sudden."

" What did?"

" Just over a week ago, a terrible snowstorm came out of nowhere and blanketed the entire region in a frozen wasteland of snow. The source of the storm came from the temple to the north of here. As the hero of my people, it fell onto me to me to find a solution. I was fine at that point. I was fine until I reached Snowhead Temple--my aim to destroy a demon that had been created according to rumours by a child who wore a strange mask." Maud Pie answered.

Starlight Glimmer was the cause behind the harsh weather as Her Highness and I suspected. The only question that remained was why she wanted to cause so much pain and misery to the Gorons.

" Did you meet this child?"

" No, but I couldn't believe what the rumours were saying. I marched to the temple to destroy the demon. It had been wreaking havoc on Goron Village and I was the only one who could stop it. But something I didn't expect happened that changed everything. Biggoron, largest of Gorons, had been assigned by the elder, the task of preventing anyone from gaining access to the temple, yet was no where to be found. I assumed he was sleeping like he usually did. When I began walking across a narrow pathway, a blizzard suddenly appeared and I couldn't avoid it. It blew me into the valley... And now... Here I am..." Maud Pie answered.

So that was how she died. A chance wind was what claimed her life and left her in her current condition. My heart was weeping with sadness upon hearing what had befallen her, yet I chose not to cry in case it offended her pride as a warrior. The ones who were truly sad were the Gorons who had to bury her. To them, Maud was their pillar of strength, the one who lighted their path whenever darkness came calling, but now she was lost to them, unable to do anything other than look upon in the visage of a spirit. Her reason for wanting to come back to life was starting to make sense now.

" I'm sorry for your passing."

" I am infuriated."

" What will you do now?"

" In this current state, I can only watch as Goron Village is slowly buried in ice...I may have died, but I cannot rest. My spirit will linger in this perpetual existence until my mission has been fulfilled. That is where you come in. The one who rides the giant bird told me that you can use magic, so you may be able to help me return to the living. I beg you! Bring me back to life with your magic so I can save my people from dying. Please!" Maud Pie answered.

" You want me to bring you back to life?"

" Yes! I must complete my mission otherwise I'll never be able to rest in peace." Maud Pie answered. I could tell she was desperate to be brought back to life, but I knew that what she asked was impossible given it was a magic I couldn't use. Deep down, she knew this was true and was only trying to avoid the truth for as long as possible. I had no other choice but to tell her the truth so that she couldn't continue on with such a pointless display.

" I'm so sorry, but I can't revive you."

" Why not?"

" It's a magic that I don't possess, and even if I did, I don't think it would even work on you. From what I've experienced since coming to this world, when someone dies, it's permanent and nothing can change it. Look, I know you want to finish what you started, but there's nothing you can do." I answered. I knew my answer was going to make Maud upset. It was an inevitability that couldn't be avoided, but perhaps now she was willing to accept what fate had decided to inflict upon her.

She then floated around her gravestone--that was what the monolith was--for a few moments before looking at the strange writing on it and turning back to face me. " Sorry if my words have hit you hard, but you needed to know the truth before it ended up destroying you--well, more than you already are."

" It is beyond your power? I see. Then I have one recourse. Heal my sorrows. Any way that you can do it will suffice, but please heal my sorrows. If you can heal my tormented soul, perhaps there is a way for me to finished my mission. If you have the ability to free me from this torment, then use whatever you possess. I am not going anywhere any time soon, so I shall remain here." Maud Pie said. I didn't know what healing her sorrow would actually do, but she appeared very adamant about it. This was yet another one of those awkward moments that involved me making a decision that resulted from being under a lot of pressure.

" I think I see where she is going with this." Twilight said, bopping me on the head to get my attention.

" Really? Because I sure don't."

" Remember what Sonata did for you way back at the beginning of your journey? Remember when you soothed the soul of Kamaro? You used the Song of Healing to rid yourself of the curse Starlight cast and assured Kamaro that you would continue his legacy by teaching his song to others. If you played that song before Maud, it might be enough for her to finally move on." Twilight said.

" What if she doesn't want to?"

" At this point, it's for the best that you fulfill her request, Sunset. So long as she remains in her current condition, she will never be able to rest."

I looked at Maud, who had since tilted her head forward to look down at the ground, and I could see the teardrops landing with soft splashes. She truly wanted to do something to save her people, and it was that display that moved me more than anything I had seen so far in Termina. Without a moment's hesitation, I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, thought about how the Song of Healing went, and played the notes in front of her. She didn't feel anything happening to her at first which made me think that it wasn't going to work, but then she suddenly clutched her head.

" What a soothing melody. My sorrows are melting away into the song." Maud Pie said, her body swaying back and forth. Suddenly, a bright light flashed where she was floating, and I closed my eyes to prevent myself from being blinded by how intense the light was.

When I opened them several seconds later, I was in some kind of dream where everything appeared warped. In front of me stood Maud who was floating in front of a large gathering of Gorons who appeared to be cheering her on. They must have represented the respect and love they had for her when she was alive, and that even now they still felt that way even when she was no longer with them. Maud then looked at me and nodded before raising her arms, sparkling energy radiating from her body. I didn't know what was going on, but then a second bright light flashed and I covered my eyes again.

This time upon opening them, I was back in the grave site, but Maud was no where to be seen. Had she finally been put to rest? I felt bad that she wasn't able to complete her mission, but it was for the best as she couldn't continue living such a tormented existence. Twilight then bopped me on the head and told me to look up at something that had appeared in front of the gravestone. I looked and saw a Goron's face staring back at me before it dropped to the ground, landing with a loud clank. I walked over to where it fell and picked it up to discover that it was a mask, perhaps one that was like the Deku Mask I received from Sonata.

" Is this what I think it is?"

" That's the Goron Mask. The Song of Healing has healed Maud's--Darmani's--soul and sealed it inside of this mask. If you were to put it on your face, you will transform into a slightly different version of Darmani based on your own looks. I'm guessing this is what she meant when she said that she wanted her soul healed. You've been tasked with completing her mission, Sunset, and changing into her will open up new paths that were unavailable before." Twilight answered.

" I leave my undying feelings with you..." Maud Pie said, her voice echoing from the beyond. " The deeds I accomplished while living are carved on my grave. You should read it to learn more about the power that I've left within the mask you hold. For the Goron Village... I have asked your assistance." Her voice disappeared and I held the mask firmly in my hands knowing what was about to happen when I put it on.

" Twilight, I suggest you move back as this could get ugly." I said. Twilight nodded without saying a word and floated off to the side. What was going to happen when I don this mask and change into a Goron. Would I become a variation of Maud or a variation of Darmani?

Gulping, I placed the mask on my face and immediately felt the same convulsions whenever I put on the Deku Mask. It felt like I was trying to throw up as my body began to go through the process of changing into another creature, but I knew I had to go through with this. Moments later, I let out a scream that Twilight couldn't hear--the Goron Mask looking like a mask of terror or something--before everything went white in a blinding flash.

When I opened my eyes a few moments later, my perspective felt different as though I had grown a few inches taller. Her Highness stared at me in bewilderment and that told me I needed to find a reflective surface so that I could see what I looked like--I found one by simply looking at my reflection in the body of water that surrounded the grave.

I looked at my reflection and held my hand to my face. I looked like an ordinary Goron aside from the green hat and my own hairstyle--along with the colour--that would most likely be seen as a distinguishing feature. When I noticed the rest of my body, my immediate reaction was to place my gloved hands across my chest. I was wearing a bra with metallic pieces covering up my private parts, green shorts, and thick boots. Once I got over the initial shock, I swung my arms around to see what kind of power they possessed before slamming them down onto the ground. The impact they left was simply remarkable.

Gorons were physically strong but I never knew just how much it was true until now. I then looked at my chest and remembered that Diamond Tiara wore a breastplate that covered up her breasts, yet all I had was a bra that didn't look right given this body featured a plump stomach. I'd say she fared better than I did in terms of armour.

" Are you okay, Sunset?"

" I feel so strange in this form."

" That's to be expected given you've never been a Goron before. I noticed you were surprised by your lack of clothing, but you should know that most Gorons don't wear that much." Twilight said.

" How am I supposed to move around with such a bloated belly?"

" Maybe you should heed what Maud said before her voice faded away." Twilight answered. Just before she left, Maud mentioned something about leaving behind her deeds that were written down on the base of her grave.

I turned to look at the words and was surprised to see that I could now read them. As a Goron, I could now understand their written language like it were natural. I began to read what had been written down so that I could figure out how this body worked.

"The Goron hero, Darmani the Third, rests here. In honor of a great hero, this memorial is inscribed with the knowledge of a great hero. Oh, chosen Goron hero! Your power to lift objects without effort is mightier than the strength of any other.
"And your heart is strong, too, as it is filled with compassion that is kinder than any other. Goron heroes have the ability to curl up and roll wherever it is they need to go. The faster you roll, the better as you shall reach speeds other creatures can only dream of. Gorons who possess magic can produce spikes from their bodies that can mow down enemies as though they were nothing. In the thickest snow, a Goron's roll will be quick and allow easy access to spikes.
"Water is the one thing a Goron hero must avoid at all costs. They sink like stones should they fall into water, so beware if you find yourself surrounded by water. Goron heroes can punch their enemies into oblivion with the climax being a hero's body for it is a weapon like a blade to a human. If a Goron hero curls up and leaps into the air, they will come crashing down with a mighty quake that can flatten all who oppose them."

" I think I got all of that."

" Well, if you ever forget anything, I'll be sure to remind you of what you can do."

" Thanks Twilight."

" Knowledge is something I strive for whenever I have a free moment, Sunset, and remembering how Gorons operate should be a simple enough task. Now, you need to find a way to access the hot spring water that resides underneath this gravestone. You need some to not only help Fancy Pants and Tirek get their business up and running, but to help Sandalwood free his brother from his icy prison." Twilight said.

" I wonder if I can pick up the gravestone?"

" With those muscles, I'm sure you can pick up just about anything, but I wouldn't do that in this case. Maud Pie may no longer be here, but to vandalize her grave by lifting up the stone dedicated to her memory would be just plain cruel. Maybe you could push it aside or something." Twilight answered.

That wasn't a bad idea. I walked around to the back of the gravestone--the front would've been disrespectful--grabbed it with both hands, and began to pull it back with ease. The gravestone felt like it weighed nothing at all, but I contributed it to my incredible strength as a Goron. If I had tried pulling as myself, I'd have probably strained something. Once I pulled it far enough, water began seeping out from a hole in the ground, and I knew what needed to be done next.

I took out the empty bottle from behind my back--still couldn't explain how it happens--and scooped up some hot spring water before corking it. Unlike regular water, it felt warm to the touch, and part of me was strongly considering taking a swig of it just because. One thing that was pleasant was how my body felt relieved just from standing knee-deep, but I couldn't stay here all day as I had plenty of things to take care of.

" Okay, I got some hot spring water."

" You'll need to be careful with this stuff, Sunset. If you take too long in trying to deliver it, the water will cool down and become ordinary spring water again. You'll have to climb all the way back up here if you want to refill your bottle with more. Frankly, it would be so much easier if you had more than one bottle, but I suppose this will have to do for now. Anyway, there's no reason to stick around, so let's see if Sandalwood's brother can be thawed out from his frozen prison." Twilight said.

Deciding that holding the bottle in my hand was the smart thing to do, I began to walk forward and quickly realized that Gorons weren't very good at walking about--it probably had to do with their bulky bodies being hard to utilize without rolling. Upon walking outside of the cave, I could see Sandalwood still shivering, so at the very least he hadn't succumbed like his brother. I had no idea how he would react upon seeing another Goron, but I was about to in just a few moments.

" You're back already!? I guess you didn't find it all that appealing, but then non-Gorons wouldn't understand." Sandalwood said. Upon seeing that he was staring at a Goron with red and yellow streaked hair, he performed a double-take before lurching forward to get a better look. " Huh!? What happened to that human girl who came by earlier? How did you manage to get up here what with the tunnel blocked off by snow." He then stepped back and began freaking out when he realized who I was supposed to be. " Y-You're... No! This is impossible! My eyes must be playing tricks on me! You're not the great Darmani, are you?"

" I am." I answered boldly.

" Yes, you do look exactly like her, but if you are the great Darmani, then... whose grave had I been asked to make?" Sandalwood asked. Did he just say that I resembled Maud right down to the very last detail? I saw what I looked like by looking at my reflection, and I don't see how he could've made such an obvious blunder.

Then again, perhaps this was another facet this game had where characters were oblivious. " Did you come back to life because it was so warm beneath your grave? You can thank the hot spring that was there before I placed that grave marker as per the elder's instructions, but now I regret covering it up. If I had some hot spring water, I could thaw out my brother."

" I have some hot spring water in my bottle."

" You do!? Oh! My brother will be saved! The great Darmani has pulled through once again!" Sandalwood shouted. I thought about rolling my eyes over his behaviour, but I shrugged my shoulders, walked over to where Sandalwood's brother was, uncorked my bottle, and poured the hot spring water near the base of the ice. In an instant, the ice melted away and the now unfrozen Goron took a few moments to regain his composure.

" Huh? What have I been doing? I remember getting cold due to the snow, but then I blacked out."

" You were frozen in a block of ice, brother, but the great Darmani saved you." Sandalwood said.

" The great Darmani? What's with you? Are you half asleep? I can't believe you just said that!" The other Goron then turned to face me unaware of who he was talking to, but it would sink in within a few moments. " Did you hear what my brother said? He claims that Darmani saved my life by thawing me free of the ice. The great Darmani died long ago when she chose to go to Snowhead Temple in order to put an end to the cause that affects this region. Right now, she's lying in her grave--may she rest in peace and... and..."

It finally sunk in for him and his reaction spoke for itself. The Goron took a few steps back, rubbed his eyes, and stared longingly at what he was speaking to. " Heeee! Darmani! You... You're alive!"

" I was shocked, too, but somehow, it seems the great Darmani isn't dead. I don't know how this is even possible, but here you are amongst the living once again."

" R-Really?"

" There's no need to pretend that we're having a dream, brother, as we're both wide awake now and she stands before us. Since you have returned from the dead, allow me to say welcome back, great Darmani. With this, a star of hope appears in Goron Village where it had previously been snuffed out. Great Darmani! Please do something about the blizzard blowing in from Snowhead! If you can figure out what's going on at the temple, our people shall be saved from death." Sandalwood answered.

" I've every intention of saving my people." I said, making sure to use the word "my" as opposed to "your".

" Then you must return to Goron Village and speak to the elder. He will tell you what's been going on since your false death." Sandalwood said. What he said had now become another problem that involved making a difficult decision.

Sandalwood and his brother didn't know that the Goron Elder left the village in order to finish what Maud started, so going to the village to speak with him was out of the question unless one of the other Gorons had some ideas. I felt compelled to check up on the Gorons given I was now living the life of their great hero, but part of me wanted to see about helping Fancy Pants and Tirek. I didn't want to have to climb up that ladder again after helping them to acquire some more hot spring water, so unless there was another spring somewhere down below, I was going to be hard-pressed in figuring out a solution.

Chapter 22: Soothing Lullaby

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
August 22, 2016
Chapter 22: Soothing Lullaby

" Great Darmani?" Sandalwood asked, noting that I was struggling to come up with what to do next. " You look like you're having trouble. Is it because you've only just returned that you're not sure if you remember where the village is?"

" Of course I know where it is!" I answered back.

" Whoa! Didn't mean to strike a nerve. Anyway, you should get going right away! The Elder will fill you in on what's been happening as of late. I'm not sure how he will react to seeing you walking around again after being death for some time." Sandalwood said.

" What do you mean?"

" The Elder was among the party who found your lifeless corpse after you didn't come back from the temple. When he discovered that you were dead, it was like a part of him died along with you. Since then, he's taken on more and more duties that are seriously affecting his physical and mental state. The others believe he is stretching himself too thin, but he refuses to listen to our pleas. Perhaps the saddest thing is he never informed his son of your death. A shame really for such a young baby to bear." Sandalwood answered.

Wait a minute! The Elder's son is a baby!? What was wrong with this picture? I assumed that the elder was a senior-looking Goron, so then how could someone that old have a child who was so young? It was something I couldn't ask Sandalwood and his brother to elaborate on. It meant I'd be exposed as not being the real Darmani as she knew why, and it would jeopardize Maud's final request before she rested in peace--in this world anyway as she would still be alive and well back home.

Another thought then appeared in my mind. Who in their right mind would leave behind a baby? The Elder should've stayed to comfort his child during such difficult times and instead send out a younger Goron to find out what was going on up at the temple. I consider him to be very irresponsible, but at same time he probably had no other choice. I suspected most Gorons weren't like Darmani, preferring a more peaceful lifestyle as opposed to the heroic life that she lead. With no one truly able to save them and their greatest hero having gotten herself killed, the Elder had to assume the mantle.

" I'm afraid that the Elder left Goron Village some time ago for the temple."

" He did? Well, that does make things more complicated."

" Brother? Something feels wrong here. How does the great Darmani know such a thing is true? She was previously dead and neither of us have been home since we were asked to come up here and create her grave site." The other Goron said.

Crap! How could I have made such an obvious blunder? As far as Sandalwood and his brother were aware, Maud had exited from her grave and had no knowledge of what had been going on since she died, and there I go stating something that had gotten them thinking. I began sweating, the drops pouring down the sides of my head and turning into tiny bits of ice that shattered upon impact with the ground.

Neither of them noticed my uncomfortable expression, but I had to do something to fix this problem before it fell apart--if I was hoping to make a good first impression assuming Maud's life and mission, I wasn't doing a very good job of it.

Darting my head back and forth in an effort to come up with an excuse, Twilight bopped me on the head telling me to calm down. Easy for her to say as she wasn't the one who accidentally said something she shouldn't, but Her Highness then mentioned that I had spoken to Sandalwood as a human before entering the cave. He still thinks that my human form is still in there exploring when in fact I was out here speaking to him as a Goron.

That's when I got an idea--I raised my finger upward to confirm it--so hopefully these two would buy it.

" Before I came outside and thawed you out, I chanced upon a strange girl wearing green." I said.

" You met that human?" Sandalwood asked.

" She seemed like a nice girl, but I told her that I had no time to listen to what she had to say." I answered, secretly giggling in my mind over what I was saying. My acting would need to be perfect for them to believe me, so keeping my composure was key. It felt weird talking about two versions of myself having ran into each other in the cave when in fact it was me playing two different characters. " I wanted to get outside and breathe in the mountain air that I love, but then she mentioned something about the Elder, and I demanded she tell me more. I was in disbelief over what she told me, but there was no doubt her words were true."

" What did she say?"

" Please tell us, great Darmani."

" The Elder went off to the temple to stop this cold snap, but hasn't been heard from since." I said, pounding my fist into the snow and leaving an imprint. It was my way of showing them that I was outraged over hearing the Elder left to do something Maud was originally sent to do. " My anger was so immense that I drank some hot spring water to calm myself down, but chose to take some more in case my blood boiled again."

" That human must have been to the village."

" No other explanation." Sandalwood added.

" The girl said she was thankful for me moving my gravestone so that she could access some hot spring water herself, but I think she decided to do some further exploring. In any case, I must return to the village to see what has become of it." I said.

" But the Elder isn't there."

" One of the others is sure to tell me what direction he went in. It will take me a while to find the Elder, but I will succeed as I am the great Darmani." I said. My thought process suddenly came to a stop upon remembering that I needed to melt the ice that put Fancy Pants and Tirek's hearth out of commission. " There was something else the girl told me, and it involved the Mountain Smithy who resides below. She said they need hot spring water to resume their business."

" Really? That's not good, brother."

" No, it isn't. We Gorons go to him to get our Goron tools repaired, upgraded, or even new tools for us to use in our lives. If his hearth isn't working then it needs to be addressed so that we can gain back one service. Our lives may be coming to an end due to the snow, but we shouldn't be deprived of an essential necessity for us." Sandalwood said.

" If I take some hot spring water to the smithy, I can melt away the ice but it would mean having to come back up here somehow to get more."

" That will not do, great Darmani. You need to get to the village as soon as possible, but you also need to help the smithy resume his work. You certainly have a lot of rolling around to do if you wish to solve both problems at once." Sandalwood said. He had no idea how much stress I'd get from running back and forth whether I knew what I was supposed to do or not, but then an idea struck him--or maybe it was the cold having finally gotten to him. " Why not use the other hot spring that lies in these mountains."

" There's another hot spring!?" I was about ready to explode into a fit of rage when Sandalwood mentioned that. If I had known this a lot sooner, I wouldn't have given myself all that stress from trying to figure out what to do next. On the one hand, it meant an easier time picking up additional hot spring water should the location be easily accessible. On the other hand, I could've saved some precious time. Then I started thinking again. I've been across most of Snowhead--aside from the northern path that leads up to the temple--so why haven't I been able to spot anything that screamed hot spring location.

Looking towards Sandalwood, he exchanged glances with his brother, and deep down I knew that my cover had been blown. A Goron as legendary as Darmani would know every last nook and cranny of the mountains like the back of her hand. Gripped with fear, I went numb as Sandalwood walked over and placed his hand on my shoulder. " You seem upset over not knowing where this other hot spring is located. Ha! You shouldn't be worried, great Darmani! Apart from myself and my brother, no one else even knows it exists. The only one they've ever known is what your gravestone was built on top of."

In an instant, I breathed heavily, the cold turning my breath into fog that floated into the sky and dissipated moments later. Did Sandalwood really have to torment me in such a horrid fashion? I believed my cover of masquerading as Maud had been blown, but instead he told me that this other hot spring was known only to him and his brother. I had every mind to let them have it with both fists, but I held back knowing that attacking them would be an act of dishonour towards the memory of the Goron whose life I now lived.

My curiosity began to perk up. How could these two have found something so wonderful, but not share it with the rest of their tribe?

" We discovered an underground hot spring a couple of months ago when the two of us were exploring." Sandalwood said. " We both decided to keep it a secret between ourselves because the other Gorons would've drained away the water within weeks. Surely I don't need to remind you about how much hot spring water consumption we go through just to relax and not have to worry about so many problems."

" Then why share your secret with me?"

" You are the great Darmani, who has returned to save us all. You need that hot spring water more than my brother and I do, so it's right for us to share our secret. Besides, you used hot spring water to thaw out my brother, so it's the least I can do in return." Sandalwood answered.

" The location is actually right outside our village."

" Quite convenient, yet I'm surprised no one else noticed." I said.

" Those twin islands serve no practical purpose other than a beautiful locale in the spring."

" It's there!?"

" When we came up here to prepare your grave, we walked by the entrance to the hot spring. For some reason, the entrance has been frozen over by solid ice, but I'm willing to bet that pouring hot spring water will melt that instantly." Sandalwood said.

" There was that weird woman, too." The other Goron said.

" When you get there, great Darmani, I suggest you be weary of that woman who wears the green outfit and floats about on a balloon. She tried to sell us a map of the area even though we both know this place by heart. She was also very eccentric, asking us if we had seen any fairies lately." Sandalwood said.

Him describing Pinkie Pie and her "unique" personality made it clear as to where the hot spring was. The only problem was getting some water to melt the ice before it cools down and becomes ordinary water again. I doubted that I could get there as a human, but then getting there as a Goron would be even worse--I was much more sluggish in this form compared to my regular form. How could I reach the spring in time without walking?

That's when another thought hit me, and I had to thank what was written onto Maud's gravestone. According to the description, Gorons were capable of curling into a ball and roll around at fast speeds. Could I use such speed and reach the hot spring in a matter of seconds?

I thanked Sandalwood and his brother for all the help, but before I walked back into the cave, I asked if they were going to be alright staying on top of the mountain. He said they had no intention of climbing back down and decided to accept their fate and freeze to death. I felt saddened by their decision, but I had no time to change their minds. I hoped that I would be able to save them before the cold claimed their lives.

Running back into the cave--or what constituted as running--I walked over to the edge of the pool of hot spring water, scooped some up in my bottle, corked it, and put it somewhere behind me--I didn't even want to begin to try figuring out how it worked as a Goron--before leaving the cave again. If I wanted to reach the island Pinkie was floating over, I had to get there within the span of two minutes. I hadn't attempted to curl up and roll along, so this was as good a time as any to see how it would work.

" I hope I don't throw up." I whispered to Twilight.

" If you were rolling around as a human, then yes you would feel nauseous, but you'll feel nothing of the sort as a Goron. I don't know much about them personally, but Tatl's memories indicate that she did interact with several of them at an undisclosed point in time before this all started. In your current form, you can curl up and roll around with as much speed as you can muster provided you don't bump into anything." Twilight said.

" Aren't I able to mow things down?"

" Only when you produce spikes from your body."

" I still don't get that."

" You have magic power so that allows you to produce spikes when you roll. I don't know, it sounds pretty simple to me." Twilight said. I rolled my eyes. Her Highness just loved to remind everyone of her immense intellect, but sometimes she did like to brag about it to the detriment of others. " Normally, it takes a long distance before the spikes come out, but you can achieve them instantly by rolling through snow for just a few seconds."

" Does the snow act as a cushion?"

" Yes, so you can build up speed without moving all that much. I suggest you do exactly that instead of taking off the Goron Mask and jumping down to the ground below. Gorons can survive falls from great heights should they be curled up, but dropping straight down will result in sinking below that cold pool. Besides, you don't want Sandalwood and his brother to freak out over you pulling your face off." Twilight answered. Granted, they wouldn't remember anything when I reset time, but I could see where Her Highness was coming from. I didn't want them to suffer a mental breakdown seeing their heroine transform into a teenage girl.

Twilight also suggested that I stand perfectly still before curling up so that I could have more momentum. I did as she suggested and upon curling up, I actually felt really comfortable as though I could stay in such a position forever without ever wanting to come out. Of course, doing that would be foolish. I had to focus on reaching that other hot spring. Knowing that I was still being watched, I began to roll forward although at first I thought I wasn't going anywhere. My body reacted to rolling on the snow and I quickly began feeling a strange sensation like I wanted to burst off in a blaze of glory.

All of a sudden, my Goron body produced a set of spike that made me look like an overgrown pincushion, but again I felt comfortable as though this was right. Without any fear gripping my heart, I rolled off the edge of the cliff and fell straight down towards the ground. As I was free-falling, I thought about everything I had done so far on this journey. The one thing that worried me more than anything was Ganondorf. He hadn't communicated with me through his usual manner, so perhaps he had decided to leave me alone--wishful thinking given I was expecting his presence sooner rather than later. I also worried what would happen when he and I face each other in battle again.

It was going to happen. That was an inevitability that couldn't be avoided.

Regarding my plunge to the ground, if I had merely stepped off the edge, I'd have dropped into the pond and drowned due to my weight. Luckily, rolling off gave me some forward momentum, so when I eventually landed, it was several feet away from would have been frozen death. I also sustained no damage from the fall as my body embraced the snow and allowed me to retain my rolling--the spikes as well. As though my body were acting of its own accord instead of me giving directions, I began rolling at an incredible speed--I felt like I was racing on a motorbike like I had done during the Friendship Games--towards the path that lead to the twin islands area.

Along the way, a Blue Tektite popped out of the ground, but I had no time to stop or even roll around it. Instead, I plowed right into it and sent it flying into the nearby cliff wall where it slid down and disappeared into smoke upon defeat. So this was the power I possessed as a Goron. I briefly felt an urge to have more power, but I quickly got such thoughts out of my head as that was the old me thinking there.

Rolling into the twin islands area, I thought about stopping because of the water, but I quickly remembered that the water had frozen so I could roll along it without any consequences. Plus, I preferred having more room to roll around as opposed to having a narrow pathway. A second Blue Tektite popped out from the snow and just like the previous one, I plowed into it without a second thought, and it went flying onto the frozen water, landing on its back and struggled to get back onto its legs.

As I continued rolling, I was surprised that I could see where I was going despite my face experiencing the same circular motion every couple of seconds. I felt more appreciative towards the Gorons as they endured this consistently due to their natural instincts. Also, I was having the time of my life rolling around.

I never got to do anything of the sort as pony as unicorns weren't known for rolling around like a ball. Sure, we could've replicated such motion through magic, but then wouldn't have done it we didn't have the stomach. Becoming different creatures gave me an insight on how they behaved and how each differed from one another.

When I reached Pinkie's location, she didn't call out to me or anything. That was because she was busy scribbling down something on a piece of paper and was too fixated to take notice of anything else.

" That... was the greatest thing I've ever done in my life!" I said as I uncurled myself.

" You sounded like you were having a blast."

" Was I that obvious?"

" Yes, but I didn't want to interrupt your fun. You actually needed it considering what you've been through since we arrived in these mountains. At first, I thought I wasn't going to be able to keep up with you, yet I managed to hold my own." Twilight answered.

" The only drawback with rolling is that I felt my magic being drained."

" I suspect that it takes a great deal of magic to maintain those spikes, and as such it gets drained really quickly. I'm going to assume that this is a Goron thing, so unless you can consistently regain magic, using those spikes will be difficult." Twilight said.

" As a Deku Scrub, my magic doesn't get depleted so quickly when I produce bubbles." I said, taking out the bottle of hot spring water from behind my back. " Good thing Adagio enhanced my magic meter otherwise I'd have run out back there." Walking up next to the ice chunk from before making sure not to touch it, I opened the bottle, poured the contents onto the ice, and watched it melt away in an instant. " That was easier than I thought."

" Do you need hot spring water now?"

" What do you mean?"

" Not only do you need to help Fancy Pants and Tirek with their hearth, you also need to find out what's going on with the Gorons, and help Photo Finish by giving her whatever it was she wishes to eat." Twilight answered. I slapped my forehead. Crap! How could I have forgotten about Photo Finish? I was so focused on getting hot spring water that I zoned out on helping her. I should've remembered the fact that she was wearing a mask on her head. " Looks to me that you forgot all about her, didn't you?" Twilight asked. I nodded my head. " Well, you might be able to get two things done at once."

" How do you figure that?"

" Photo Finish wants to have her last meal, right? She said that the village would be the best place to go, but it won't be easy because the other Gorons have most likely hidden their food away because the cold has made their food supply very scarce." Twilight answered. Even though Photo Finish didn't specify what she wanted to eat, I already knew that she desired rock sirloin, a factor that I learned from my previous encounter with them. Did it mean that I could eat rocks as well while in this body? It was a question I hoped not to answer if I could avoid it. " First, we need to know what happened to the Elder, so talking to the other Gorons is a must."

" Then we find the rock sirloin, give it to Photo Finish, then come back for some hot spring water to help the smithies."

" Looks like you'll be rolling back and forth for this one." Twilight said while laughing at her own joke.

I didn't see the humour in Her Highness' words. The fact that I had to do some more backtracking was painful enough, but at least now I could speed things up by simply rolling along from place to place. While magic resulted in gaining spikes, rolling along naturally should still be possible. The only thing was that plowing through enemies would be problematic without the use of my spikes to protect me. I also had to make sure to get some sleep when necessary otherwise I could end up collapsing in the cold and freeze to death. The hot spring below would make for an excellent resting spot as there would be no monsters and I'd be someplace warm.

Deciding to walk along the remaining bridge instead of rolling--despite having fun, I did lose control a few times--I entered Goron Village and immediately made my way over to where Diamond Tiara was standing. I had to give her credit for remaining outside in the cold despite only wearing a breastplate and helmet. Perhaps now she would be more talkative given my current appearance.

" A fellow Goron! I thought everyone was inside the shrine to shelter themselves from the cold." Diamond Tiara said.

" Some of us are still out and about doing our usual tasks." I said.

" Tch! Why would you guys insist on acting like such rock-headed idiots? The weather has gotten so bad that everyone has sought shelter, but with the food shortage combined with the lack of proper heating, we're all going to die within a matter of days." Diamond Tiara said. She then lurched her head forward so as to get a better look at me.

" You know, you look mighty familiar as though I've seen you somewhere before." She then rubbed her eyes, looked at me again, and rubbed them some more before realizing who was standing before her. " I don't believe it! You're the great Darmani! I was told that you passed away when you left to go to Snowhead Temple."

" As you can see, I'm not dead."

" I should say not. I can't believe that our heroine has returned to us! Please accept my apologies for insulting you, great Darmani. I suppose you want to be informed of what's been going on since you last walked these mountains?" Diamond Tiara asked.

" I seek our Elder."

" I'm afraid you're out of luck. The Elder left a week ago to finish the mission that you started, but he hasn't been heard from since. No one has tried to find out what became of him as they're all trying their best to keep warm. Not only that, but his son continues crying with that ear-piercing wail of his to the point where everyone just can't take it anymore. If the cold doesn't kill them, that incessant crying will do the trick." Diamond Tiara said. So the elder's son is crying. I didn't know this before due to Diamond Tiara not wanting to discuss it with a human, but things could get even worse should I do something that upsets him.

I then remembered Maud saying that the elder's son was her biggest fan. If I were to took to the child as Darmani, it might be enough to calm him down. I wasn't sure if the child was capable of talking, but the only way to know was to talk to him. First, I had to get inside and see for myself what was going on inside the Goron Shrine. That meant Diamond Tiara opening up the door for me, so hopefully she would comply.

" I need to see the Elder's son."

" Of course. I'll open up the entrance for you, great Darmani, but it will only stay open for a short period of time." Diamond Tiara said. She curled up into a ball--surely it was a painful experience what with wearing that breastplate--jumped into the air, and came crashing down onto the ground with a thud that almost caused me to fall over. In an instant, the entrance to the Goron Shrine opened up. " You've got about ten seconds to get inside before I close it again."

Thanking her, I jumped down to the ground below and entered the shrine just moments before the door closed behind me. I had no idea how I was supposed to get back outside, but I assumed there was some kind of pressure switch, or Diamond Tiara sensed that someone inside needed to come out. My eyes suddenly felt excruciating pain courtesy of a loud crying noise coming from further ahead. I had been warned that the elder's son had been crying for some time, but I didn't think it would be so ear-piercing. What made things worse was that the entire shrine was inside of a large cave, and sounds were bouncing off the walls.

Unlike Goron City that featured an open area in the center of the town with connecting passageways that were small to navigate, the shrine was largely open. To my right were a series of statues, each one depicting a Goron's face, and to my left was a door that looked like it had been hidden away. Looking up, I saw an impressive looking chandelier, although those lights looked brittle as though something could smash them with enough force. Finally, the main pathway wrapped itself around the statues leading up to what I assumed was the central area of commerce.

One thing that was immediately felt was the cold. I assumed that the Gorons came into their shrine to get out of the cold, but it was just as bad in here as it was out there. Such conditions were no place for a baby, and that lead me to my other problem. Ahead of me stood a Goron who was covering his ears so as to tone out the crying. I felt bad for the poor guy as he looked like he could snap at any moment. Why wasn't I affected? I had been around crying babies lots of times due to some odd babysitting jobs I took to earn some extra money. I guessed they weren't used to it compared to me.

I walked up to the Goron in front of me to see if he were willing to talk. Unlike Diamond Tiara and Sandalwood, he wasn't anyone I recognized from Canterlot High. I also had to make sure not to rile him up any further than he already was.

" Are you alright?" I asked.

" Do I look like I'm alright to you?" The Goron asked.

" I was just asking."

" Sorry for snapping at you like that, but we're at our wits end with this incessant crying. The Elder's son hasn't stopped ever since he left to find a way to bring an end to the cold that blows in from Snowhead Temple." The Goron said.

" I was hoping to have spoken to the Elder."

" You're not the only one who wants to do that. It's been a while since the Elder left, and no one knows what happened to him. If he doesn't come back soon, we're all going to lose our minds because his son won't stop crying, and resort to actions that our tribe has condemned for generations." The Goron said.

" Why is it so cold in here?"

" It's been getting colder outside and somehow it has seeped in here. If the crying doesn't kill us then the cold will." The Goron had kept his eyes closed all this time while I was talking to him, but then he decided to open them to get a better look at who he had been speaking to. Upon realizing who I was, he stepped back a few steps as though he were suddenly afraid of my presence.

" Those sideburns... Aren't you Darmani? But how? You're supposed to be dead... but you're alive? Please tell I'm not dreaming." I nodded my head to confirm that he wasn't dreaming, and his reaction of rushing over to me was greatly appreciated. " Is it you! It was those sideburns that gave you away."

" Do you know what prompted the elder to go to the temple and not stay here with his son?"

" The Elder was troubled because he thought you were dead. It pained him immensely because not only did he believe you were our only hope, but there was something else he wanted to discuss with you, but you died before an opportunity presented itself. Darmani! You must find the Elder and ask him to come back to the village. Only he can calm his son down as we're all out of ideas."

" I'm not even sure where he's gotten to."

" Not to worry. Despite being our patriarch, the Elder isn't as young as he used to be. At his age, I'm sure he hasn't gotten very far, so I'd say that he should be somewhere in the twin islands area. I fear that the cold may have frozen him, so it may already be too late, but I hope to be wrong about that." The elder was most likely frozen outside? That meant I needed some hot spring water provided I knew exactly where he was.

Leaving the Goron to continue suffering in pain, I walked up the pathway and encountered other Gorons who were suffering in a similar manner. Each of them were covering their ears with their heads and trying so hard not to completely lose their minds. They were also dancing in place in an attempt to keep warm. As I reached the top, I could see that the meeting area was fairly large although several pillars served as obstacles. For some reason, there was a frozen red strip on the floor that disappeared through a dark passageway ahead. An inconspicuous ramp located nearby told me that Gorons used it to go flying across by rolling.

What intrigued me was where the strip originated from, so I walked in that direction where everything around me went dark for a few moments. The crying at that point had gotten louder so I was indeed getting closer. Torches on either side of me provided a warm welcome to a small alcove that looked it were something you could sit on, and sitting there in tears was a small Goron wearing a diaper who showed no signs of stopping any time soon.

There was something familiar about him, but before I could do anything, a hand grabbed my shoulder and pulled me to one side. There was another Goron present, but he looked like he had gotten used to the crying--he hadn't covered his ears like the rest."

" This is the room of the Goron Tribe's Elder. Do you have some kind of business with him? Unfortunately, he's out and I've no idea when he'll be coming back. Since the Elder left, his son won't stop crying, and everyone has grown tired of it. I wish someone would do something so that we can finally get some rest." The Goron then noticed that I was Darmani, but unlike the previous one, he didn't freak out. No, he was just surprised at my appearance.

" Those sideburns... Aren't you Darmani? You're supposed to be dead according to what the Elder said when your corpse was found by the scouting party. You're alive? What have you been doing?" Again, there was the mention of sideburns. I never noticed Maud having any when we spoke earlier, but perhaps her greyish complexion prevented me from seeing them.

" I've only been awake again for a short period." I said, clasping my hands over my mouth upon realizing what I just said. I sounded like I had only been back to life for a while, and while that was technically true--it had been roughly twenty minutes since I acquired the Goron Mask and by extent, this new body--this Goron might think I was crazy or something.

" You were resting? I guess even the great Darmani needs her beauty sleep like everyone else."

" That's not what I--"

" All great heroes deserve some rest every now and then. Thinking you were dead, the Elder went to Snowhead on his own... but he hasn't come back yet. I fear the worst has happened to him and that leaves us in a fine mess. The Elder seems to forget that he isn't young anymore, but does things that are beyond his limits. Darmani, you need to find him and see if he is alright. Before you do that, I would see if you can calm down the Elder's son."

The Goron waved his hand towards the Elder's son, and so I took another look to see if I recognized him from anywhere. Unfortunately, I had no idea who he was, but then another bop on my head from Twilight revealed that she knew who it was. She whispered in my ear that this was Featherweight, a pony from Equestria who attends a foal school in Ponyville alongside other foals. She was surprised to see him here of all ponies, but then surprises have been part and parcel of this world.

At first, I didn't know what to say to Featherweight. He seemed to be completely unreasonable due to his crying, but I had to say something in the hopes that he would respond. I was about to say something when he suddenly began shouting, his words were a mixture of coherent sentences and bawling.

" Waaa... Hunh, ugh... u-waahhh! Da-daaaddy, daaaddy! Hunh... I'm cooooold... Daaaddy!" Featherweight shouted. It was such a sad sight. He was miserable due to not having his father around, but there wasn't anything I could do because the Elder had decided to finish what Maud started. My maternal instincts--I was surprised that I even had such feelings although I attribute it to my babysitting jobs--coerced me into trying to pick up Featherweight in an attempt to coddle him, but then he repeated himself only much louder. " Waaa... Hunh, ugh... u-waahhh! Da-daaaddy, daaaddy! Hunh...I'm cooooold... Daaaddy!"

I looked at the other Goron and he merely shrugged his shoulders. No wonder they had run out of ideas. I doubted they even really tried because the noise combined with the cold was just too much for them. I had every mind to throttle each and every one of them in here, but that would've ruined Maud's reputation. My only option was to speak to Featherweight and hope he would respond.

" Hey there, little guy." I said.

" Waaaaa.... u-waahhhh!" Featherweight responded.

" It's me, Darmani! You remember your great hero, don't you?"

" Hyunh, hunh... Ahh, Darmi, where's my daddy? Where's my daddy?"

" I am going to find him and bring him back to you."

" Waaa... Huh? You will?"

" I won't rest until he is back here and cradling you in his arms. Our people have already given me a clue as to where your father is, so I'll follow their directions and do what I must to convince him to come back to you. Going to the temple was my job, not his, so I must complete what I started." I answered.

" Darmi... Please find my daddy!" Featherweight said as he resumed crying again. Well, I hadn't completely stopped him from crying, but he wasn't as loud as he was just a few moments ago. My efforts had proven effective although I wish I hadn't stated that I wouldn't rest until the Elder had been found. I'd been on my feet for much of the day, and that meant I needed some rest soon before I keel over or something.

There was nothing more for me to do here. I thought about asking around for any rock sirloin with which to give to Photo Finish, but none of the Gorons looked like they were willing to talk about such things given their current conditions. It looked as though I was in for some more backtracking as I suspected I would be coming back here again once I had found the Elder. It was something I wasn't looking forward to, but there was no other choice. The game had been created in such a manner and that meant I had to follow it as intended while making some unexpected decisions.

Informing the Gorons that I was leaving to search for the Elder, they all quietly cheered as I ran down the pathway towards the exit of the shrine. When I got there, the stone slab was still closed shut, and I had no idea on how it could be opened. My suspicion of there being a pressure point quickly dwindled as I placed my feet all over the place hoping that a certain section would trigger the slab's movement, but no such luck.

I tried a few other things such as calling out to Diamond Tiara to no avail, and seeing if there was another way out--that didn't work either. With my limited options spent, I slammed my fists into the door in frustration, and just like magic, the slab swung open without a hitch. Seriously!? I had to pound on the door to get it to open? There was a lot about Goron customs that I needed to learn so that such a blunder wouldn't happen again.

Upon walking back outside, the cold air began to swirl around my body once again, but considering that the inside of the shrine was just as cold, I didn't really feel anything. I shrugged it off and proceeded to make my way back up so that I could leave the village. As I walked, I began thinking about what I learned. The Elder was somewhere in the twin islands area. I didn't have to search that far although would he even be alive when I find him? He might have succumbed by being frozen to death, but hopefully he was fine as his death would only weaken the Goron's pride.

" Darmani! Darmani! There you are!" Diamond Tiara called out as I approached her. " I take it that you weren't able to calm the Elder's son down?"

" He isn't crying as loudly as before, but he still wishes for his father to be by his side."

" You did the best you could given the circumstances, but only the Elder ever knew how to calm his son. I heard from other Gorons that the Elder knows an ancient melody that has been passed down from patriarch to patriarch. It is a melody that cause any Goron to grow drowsy until they fall fast asleep." Diamond Tiara said.

" Can a melody be that powerful?"

" It must be especially if it can knock out Biggoron for a spell."

" Biggoron?"

" You don't remember him, great Darmani? I'm surprised that you forgot all about him, but then that's to be expected given his mundane task of guarding the temple. He doesn't allow anyone to go near it unless they give him a good explanation." Diamond Tiara answered. From what I recalled from Maud's explanation, she didn't see anyone when she attempted to cross that narrow pathway. Was it possible that this Biggoron had slacked off or perhaps he too had succumbed to the magic power of Starlight Glimmer? " Anyway, I'm sure the Elder's son will be crying when you return from wherever it is you're going."

" I'm going to find the Elder."

" No one knows where he is."

" I've got a pretty good idea."

" You do? Whew! I should've known better than to doubt the words of the great Darmani. If you say that you can find the Elder, then you will without fail and bring him back here to be with his son once again." Diamond Tiara said. Since she knew that I had to get going, she walked back to her position, but not before giving me a salute, her way of saying good luck without having to utter a single word.

In my heart, I had a lot of pressure on my shoulders thanks in large part to the Gorons to go along with what I already had. I knew that Maud was famous amongst them, but I didn't realize that they hung onto her every word as though she were some kind of deity. It reminded me of my first years at Canterlot High where I strove for popularity. In my eyes, being the most popular meant students would listen to anything I said without question, and resisting meant they would be outcasts. If I had known back then what I do now, the pressure would've given me a heart attack several times over.

" Twilight..." I began as I walked towards the village entrance. " You've been quiet for some time now. Is something on your mind?"

" Not really. I'm just enjoying your efforts in talking to all these different characters." Twilight answered.

" You're liking how I struggle, don't you?"

" Of course not! What kind of friend and teacher would I be if I loved seeing you suffer? I'm actually very impressed with how you've handled yourself especially in difficult situations where you were put to the test. To be honest, I don't think I'd have been able to do anything like what you did." Twilight answered.

" Nah! I'm sure you could've done a much better job. You are the Princess of Friendship, after all. Talking to others comes natural for you given that you do a lot of it on a regular basis, yet I still have some trouble conveying my feelings." I said.

" That's because I studied to become a good listener and communicator."

" Makes me wish that I stayed home and finished my studies."

" You made that decision because you felt angry with Princess Celestia over how she saw you as not being ready." Twilight said as I walked through the brief tunnel and back out into the twin islands area. Pinkie was still floating up and down with her balloon, but I wasn't focusing on her actions--although I was curious about how she could survive out in the cold wearing only that ridiculous green outfit--but rather where the Elder might be.

" You've done things I could never do, Sunset, and for that I'm genuinely jealous. If you hadn't left Equestria, I doubt you'd have picked up on those skills, and you'd just be another unicorn who happens to be gifted with magic."

" I guess, but you've become an alicorn."

" So?"

" I know it doesn't mean a big deal to you, but it does to other ponies especially me. I still dream of the day when I will ascend, but that's something that isn't going to happen for a very long time. Just because I fended for myself in a world that was different from our own doesn't mean that I'm an expert." I answered.

" When I talked to that one character, I didn't know what to say and just went with what I thought was right."

" That's because you're used to talking to ponies and other Equestrian creatures. I've had to speak to humans for the last three years and a couple of weeks with characters from a video game world who were essentially people I already knew. You don't always need to remain quiet, Twilight, and leave me to do all of the talking. This isn't just my journey but rather yours as well. We're both stuck in this world and we need to work together to get ourselves back home." I said.

Wow... How did that conversation go from talking about Her Highness to about me and back to about her again? I guessed that despite how close the two of had gotten--not in the same manner as I had with the human Twilight--we still had some issues that we couldn't completely agree on. It showed that my weaknesses were still apparent aside from having problems controlling my temper. I still felt self-doubt towards my own abilities and felt others deserved better than I did. For Her Highness, she needed to be more vocal and not be afraid to show her negative emotions.

" Glad we got that out of our systems."

" Yeah, but you know we'll be talking about it again."

" The markings of a strong friendship, Sunset. Now then, the Gorons say that the Elder would've most likely reached this area given his age, but so far I'm not seeing any signs of life apart from Pinkie Pie." Twilight said. She thought about floating up to Pinkie and asking if she had seen an elderly Goron, but quickly abandoned that idea when she realized that Pinkie had already told us that no one apart from Sandalwood and his brother went by within the last several days " Have you noticed all those large mounds of snow scattered across the frozen lake?" Twilight asked.

" I did notice them when we first came through but I didn't think they were important." I answered. There must have been at least a dozen snow mounds on the frozen lake, each one looking out of place with the rest of the natural beauty. " Do you suppose something could be hiding underneath one of them?"

" That might be possible, but the only way you can be certain is to smash those mounds to pieces. I don't think you have enough bombs to blow them all up, so unless you can find some quickly, you'll have to pick your targets carefully." Twilight answered.

" Hello? I'm a Goron right now! I can just punch them with my fists without the use of bombs."

" How could I forget? You know, it feels weird seeing you walking around with that kind of body."

" Really? Yeah, it does feel strange, but so far it's proven to be very effective. I could take the Goron Mask off and go about as myself for a while."

" I'd stay in Goron form for the time being."

Not that I was complaining about having a strong yet bulky body, but I had been wearing the mask ever since I put it on back at Maud's grave. Was I afraid that if I tried to take it off, it wouldn't budge resulting in me being forever stuck like this? No, that sounded way too farcical even for me. Hopefully, there will come a time when my regular form would be needed again to handle a situation. Deep down, I preferred being a pony more than anything else, but being a human did have its charm.

I resumed surveying all of the snow mounds, and there was one that looked much larger than the rest. It was located in-between the two islands and immediately drew my curiosity as though it were screaming for me to smash it to pieces.

" Twilight? Do you see that mound over there? The one that looks bigger than the others?"

" Yes, I can see it, and yes it is bigger than the rest."

" Do you suppose the Elder is buried underneath it?"

" If he is then you need to get some hot spring water and thaw him from his frozen prison. You used some of that water to uncover the entrance to the hidden hot spring earlier, so you should go down there and use your bottle to scoop some up." Twilight answered. The hole did look a little intimidating, but I shook such thoughts from my mind, walked forward, and fell into the chamber below.

The hot spring looked positively lovely compared to the grim, morbid look the other one had--it didn't help that one becoming a grave site--and the water wasn't too deep to cause me to drown from waddling in too deep. There was also a warm heat exuding all around most likely from the water itself. It actually would make for a perfect place to sleep, yet finding my way back here would be difficult without using those owl statues Flash Sentry provided. Still, this was a beautiful location devoid of enemies--the rocks provided additional decorum that felt right due to my Goron body appreciating it.

In the midst of my admiration, Twilight once again bopped me on the head, reminding me that I needed to save the Elder. Rubbing my hat to ensure it didn't fall off, I took out my bottle, walked over to the edge of the water, scooped some up, corked it, and put it away. The way out was a bright light that shone down from the hole I used to get down here, so I stepped into it and my body rose to the surface where I immediately felt cold again.

" I want to stay down there!" I moaned.

" Maybe later when you need some sleep, but right now we need to save the Elder." Twilight said, floating ahead of me. I told her to wait for me as I began to chase after her and down the slope before slipping on the ice and smacking into the snow mound face-first.

" Mmph!"

" Are you alright?" Twilight asked as I freed myself from the snow."

" Next time, warn me about the slippery ice, okay?" I asked. Her Highness rubbed her head, closed her eyes, and stuck out her tongue in a sheepish manner. I couldn't help but laugh at how adorable she was, and it was my fault slipping on the ice without realizing it.

Once I regained my composure, I punched the snow mound with my fist, shattering it, and exposing a large chunk of ice that had a rather decrepit looking Goron in it. Is this what the Elder looked like? I didn't think they could end up looking quite so hideous when they got older, but I knew to keep such thoughts to myself.

On another note, I had no idea who was portraying him, but Her Highness immediately recognized who we were looking at. She said that this was Cranky Doodle Donkey, a donkey--go figure--who used to be one of the grouchiest characters who ever moved to Ponyville. He still acted like a curmudgeon although much more subdued thanks to being married to the girl of his dreams.

He did bear a resemblance to one of the teachers at Canterlot High, but I never had him as a teacher so I couldn't be certain. In any case, I opened my bottle and poured its contents onto the ice making sure I didn't come in contact with it--being frozen wasn't fun by any means. In an instant, the ice melted freeing Cranky from death where he immediately sprang to life by moving several limbs about.

" Hunh? What was I doing?" Cranky Doodle asked.

" You were on your way to Snowhead Temple, but you ended up getting frozen in a block of ice." I answered.

" I don't recall being frozen, but it does explain why my body feels so cold."

" Also, I'd say we have about two hours or so before the sun sets."

" Ah! It's already this late!? I must hurry!"

" You've only just been thawed out from some ice. You're in no condition to start walking about again."

" No, I must get over to the temple as soon as possible to save my people from the evil that plagues it. Because of the cold that's blowing from there, my village has been crippled and frozen it in an icy grip. We've also had to reduce our consumption of rations, and it's due to a lack of goods and supplies that is leading to the depopulation of Goron Village. The worst thing of all is seeing the image of my poor son, crying continually all because this biting cold has gotten so terrible in recent days." Cranky Doodle said. He hadn't taken notice of who I was, making me wonder if being frozen had somehow robbed him of his sight.

Just seeing his ancient frame--along with that creepy looking hump on his back--was enough to make feel really uncomfortable, but again I kept my thoughts to myself.

" Why not leave such a task to a more younger Goron?"

" What!? Are you being serious with me!? I am the patriarch of my tribe! As the Elder, I must do something about the situation the village has been plunged into. Look, I don't care what you have to say! This is a Goron problem so it doesn't involve any outsiders!" Cranky Doodle answered. I already knew that I had made a bad first impression by saying something that damaged his pride, so I needed to quickly address the situation before he walks off.

" I'm Darmani!"

" Hunh? What did you just say?"

" I said I'm Darmani."

" If I didn't know any better, I'd swear you just said that you were Darmani." Cranky Doodle said. He then inched closer to me--his waddling was a little cute although that swaying hump left something to be desired--before taking a good look at me. He rubbed his eyes a few times and looked again before rubbing them some more, and that was when his jaw dropped upon realizing that I was portraying Darmani. " Hunh? Oh! You're Darmani! But you're supposed to be dead!" Cranky Doodle stumbled back and almost fell down but managed to regain his balance by swaying his hump in the opposite direction. " Am I hallucinating? Yes, that must be it!"

" Um, I'm standing right here, you know."

" I saw your deceased corpse with my own two eyes when the search party discovered you. It was the most horrific and saddest moment I've ever felt in my life. I tasked two of the others to prepare a suitable grave site for you so that you could rest in peace, so hopefully they returned safely." Cranky Doodle said. I tried to tell him that Sandalwood and his brother were trapped on the mountain, but he refused to listen to me and instead continued believing I wasn't real. " Yes, I'm definitely hallucinating your presence here. Maybe this is also the doing of Snowhead's magic power."

" No, I'm very much real."

" Hmph... I've been made a fool of! You really do look like the legendary hero of the Goron Tribe, but... that's impossible. I refuse to flinch. If I can see past the illusion, you'll vanish in an instant! Now, please leave me alone! I must reach Snowhead Temple before nightfall." Cranky Doodle said. He began shuffling forward before starting a very slow brisk walk in the direction of the Mountain Village.

Did he refuse to believe that I was Maud or rather, Darmani? He was the Elder of the Goron but chose to believe superstition instead of the actual truth. I was at a complete loss with what to do, but I knew losing my temper would only make things worse.

" Now what do I do?" I asked Twilight.

" You need to convince him that you are Darmani." Twilight answered.

" What if he doesn't believe me?"

" Keep trying until he finally figures it out. You might even need to tell him something that only Darmani would know." Twilight answered. Cranky had since moved forward a couple of inches, so I walked out in front of him to hopefully explain myself. " Like I said, keep trying, Sunset."

" Hunh? What do you want now?" Cranky Doodle asked angrily. " I must reach the temple before nightfall otherwise the dark creatures are bound to kill me."

" You must believe that I'm Darmani." I answered.

" No! Darmani died a while ago and has been buried much to my tribe's sadness."

" But--"

" Enough! Please leave me alone and go back to wherever it is you came from." Cranky Doodle said. He then looked at me and realized that I was a Goron. At least he believed that much although I needed him to believe even further. " Oh... You're a Goron. I'm sorry for shouting at you like that, but I do insist you leave me alone. Go back to the village where it's safe before the dark creatures come out." Cranky resumed walking slowly, and I slapped my forehead over how frustrating he was.

Had his pride blinded him from seeing the obvious or was he just plainly ignorant. Like Her Highness said, I had to keep trying until he believed me, but I was running short of ideas. Something must connect with the Elder and convince him that I am Maud--or in this case the great Darmani.

" Please listen to me!"

" I've no time to hear your incessant nattering."

" Our people will die if you don't hear me out!"

" By the time I have finished with my task, our people will be free of this blasted cold."

At that point, my temper had gotten so strong, I was ready to throttle someone. Trying to deal with someone who was so stubborn taxed me mentally, but that's when an ideafinally came to me. There was one thing that could stop Cranky from throwing his life away, and that was telling him about the one person who meant more to him than anything else. If he were really concerned about his son, he would go to him without a second thought.

" I've one last thing to say..." I began in a more calm manner than before.

" Are you still pestering me? No matter how long you follow me, it's not going to do you any good."

" Your son has been crying ever since you left the village. He needs you to be there for me during these difficult times."

" What!?" Cranky Doodle said, coming to a stop upon hearing what I said about his son. My suspicion was correct. Mentioning his son was enough to get him to pay attention to me, so now I had to hope that he would go back and not get himself killed. Cranky turned around and waddled over to me before looking up at me with sharp, piercing eyes. " My son is crying because he misses me? Why do you know that?"

" Because I went to see him and that's what he told me."

" My son misses me... Ulp! Forgive me, my child! Your father has work to do! I wish that I could go back and comfort him, but as the patriarch of the Gorons, I must go to the temple and put an end to the evil that plagues it. Please don't misunderstand and call me stubborn, but my people mean everything to me. I must do all I can to protect them even if it means sacrificing my very soul." Cranky Doodle said.

" You're definitely brave but you must know that a younger Goron must handle this. I don't mean to imply that you're too old, but you have your place in the village as the patriarch, and as a father. Our tribe needs one who can guide them until this nightmare has come to an end." I said. Cranky looked at me for a few moments, silence billowing about us as he refused to speak during the same time frame. Was he taking my words to heart or did he think I had overstepped my boundaries by mocking his age?

" Darmani..." Cranky Doodle finally said, breathing a heavy sigh in the process. " Be you a ghost or a figment of my imagination, I no longer care. You mentioning the condition of my son has made me rethink my stance on you, but his well-being is more important than my mental state. If you feel pity for my crying son... then please quietly sing him to sleep with this song I am about to play on my drum." Cranky then stretched out his arm and placed it underneath--it looked disturbing--before producing a small drum that looked worn out in places.

I had no idea where he got it from, but I wasn't about to question it. " It is the very same melody that was often played for you when you were young... How does this song go?"

Good thing that Diamond Tiara mentioned to me about Cranky's song that had been passed down from patriarch to patriarch. Had she not told me about it, I would be completely lost over what he was trying to do. Would this song enable his son to get some sleep and relieve the Gorons of his crying? If what Diamond Tiara said is true, this melody had the ability to cause any Goron to fall asleep no matter how hard they resist its magical power.

Cranky then played three notes before coming to a stop. Was that how the song was played? Somehow, it didn't sound all that majestic but perhaps there was more to it than that, and he was merely pausing for whatever reason. He played the same three notes again and stopped like before. Now I was beginning to get worried.

" Is something wrong?"

" Hunh?"

" I said, is something wrong?"

" No, everything is fine... Let me play it once more." Cranky Doodle answered. He then played the same notes again, and like before he stopped as though he were trying to remember how the song went. I hoped that he hadn't forgotten otherwise things were about to go from bad to worse. " Umm..." Looking down at the drum by his feet, Cranky looked around before lifting up his hands to continue playing. " Ah, yes, yes! Like this!" The same notes were played but this time he repeated them before pausing. There was no doubt in my mind that he had forgotten the song. Perhaps he would have a sudden bout of inspiration and suddenly remember?

" Is that how the song goes?" I asked, making sure not to clue him in on the fact that I didn't know it at all.

" There's more to it than just those notes, so give me a moment to see if I can remember the entirety." Cranky Doodle answered. He spent the next few minutes pondering over how it went until he noticed that I was standing there watching him. " If you wish for me to teach you this song, you can at least present your drums, Darmani, if you are indeed her." I had my own set of drums?

To be fair, I was more of a guitarist at heart as opposed to being a drummer--Pinkie Pie nailed the drums perfectly in the Rainbooms--but since this song was important--I couldn't continue on with my journey without knowing it--I had to learn at some point. After all prior to becoming a Deku Scrub, I had no idea how to play the pipes--horn, trumpet, or something similar to that.

Taking out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch, it suddenly transformed into a set of five drums with a thick strap wrapped around my neck enabling me to hold them up without a problem. Each drum most likely represented a different pitch much like how covering the holes on my ocarina changed the pitch.

Cranky acknowledged that I had presented my drums and attempted to play the song again. He only managed to play the same six notes before stopping yet again. Part of me thought that perhaps this was the entire song and he was trying to be funny. Yet, another part knew that wasn't the case and that he had forgotten the remaining notes.

" Is there a problem?" I asked, sounding sympathetic.

" It's no good! I can remember only the beginning!"

" Will it be enough?"

" No. You need to play the entire song to sing my son to sleep. I shall provide you with the first half of the lullaby. If you play this in front of my son, I am certain that he will be able to sing the remaining notes." Cranky Doodle answered. He looked up and noticed I was glaring at him. " I know that look better than anyone else. You believe it should be me who should lull my son to sleep instead of you, Darmani, but you know that I must reach the temple." There was no point in reasoning with him so I shrugged my shoulder and waited for him to play the notes I needed.

He played the same notes on his drum twice before handing things over to me. Unlike the ocarina and pipes, playing the drums was difficult as I needed to know which drum corresponded to which pitch I needed. Cranky chuckled under his breath upon seeing how I was struggling, but he didn't criticize me for not knowing the pitches. In his eyes, I was trying to imitate Darmani--and failing at it mind you--or a phantom trying to trick him, but I had to prove that I could live up to the legacy Maud left behind. After pounding a couple of drums to memorize the pitches, I played the notes resulting in Cranky looking impressed.

" You say this will soothe your son?"

" Yes. No Goron can resist the soothing melody of that lullaby, but again what I taught you is only the first half." Cranky Doodle answered. I glared at him again, my way of letting him know that I wasn't happy. " It's not that I forgot it. It's just so cold that I can't play very well..." That was his excuse for not remembering the full song? I could only respond by rolling my eyes. He forgot it pure and simple and nothing he said to sugarcoat things would convince me otherwise. " At any rate, I am counting on you to play that lullaby. Oh! My son... I know that you want me to return, but I must save our people otherwise we shall be destroyed."

With that, Cranky put away his drum and began to continue his journey, brushing me aside in the process without saying another word. I didn't know what to think about all that had transpired. He should be back at the village comforting his son and to reassure the other Gorons that he was alive and well. They needed him there as he was the only one keeping them from losing all sense of sanity, but I understood why he had to reach the temple.

Once again, I was left with a decision to make. Should I go back to the village and comfort Featherweight? Help Fancy Pants and Tirek? Or help Photo Finish. I could do these tasks in any order, but which of the three was deemed the most important? Either way, I was going to be backtracking, much to my annoyance.

Chapter 23: Winter Tribulations

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
August 29, 2016
Chapter 23: Winter Tribulations.

As I watched Cranky shuffle away in his bid to reach the temple--I doubted he would make it before the moon destroyed Termina--I was left with a decision that would affect how I would proceed with my own journey. I could follow Cranky although would that be a good idea? I had to finish what Maud started, but was there something I needed before making the trek?

If there was and I got up there without it, it'd mean going all the way back down to get it and wasting precious time. Going back to the village and playing that song for Featherweight so that he could fall asleep might give me the complete version--Cranky only remembered the first six notes--but then what would I use it for?

Most of the Gorons were in the village aside from Cranky, Photo Finish, Sandalwood, and his brother were out in the mountains, so unless there were additional members that I didn't know about, I couldn't really see a use in playing a lullaby--I doubted those I listed would want to fall asleep given their circumstances.

The village was also where I needed to find some rock sirloin to give to Photo Finish, but I didn't have a clue as to where I could start searching. Most Gorons had hidden their food according to what I learned, and they probably had no intention of sharing in their bid for survival. That left Fancy Pants and Tirek, whose hearth was frozen and left them unable to do business with anyone. Of all three conundrums, it was the latter that I could deal with first as I was right next to a hot spring. It shouldn't take long for me to thaw out their hearth, and I could procure their services provided I had enough rupees.

I had one other problem to deal with, and that was time itself. I had been walking--also rolling--around since the start of this seventy-two hour cycle, and my body was showing signs of fatigue. I'd wager that continuing down my current course would result in me collapsing from exhaustion and freeze to death because of the snow. I wanted to do everything at once before heading out for the temple, but it seemed that I had to wait until tomorrow morning, or earlier if I woke up before dawn broke, to assist both Featherweight and Photo Finish.

I knew it wasn't the best idea, yet what other choice was there? Collapsing from exhaustion would mean the end of me and two worlds being lost forever.

" Sunset?" Twilight asked, noticing that I was looking incredibly nervous. " Is something wrong?"

" I just stressed myself out over having so many things to do." I answered.

" That has been a problem lately."

" Tell me about it."

" It's not really fair considering you only have seventy-two hours with which to do all you can before having to reset time. If you really wanted to, you could always complete your tasks in small bursts, but then that would take much longer, and it would also mean redoing certain things again so that other events can be triggered." Twilight said. Her Highness certainly knew how to remind me of what happens when I reset time, but I wasn't about to make a big deal out of it. She was right on both accounts so my only job was to grin and bear it until it was over. " You've got three options to consider, so which one will you handle first?"

" I actually considered following Cranky to the temple, but I think I'll need something from the village."

" Do you remember what Diamond Tiara said?"

" Something about a Goron guarding the temple?" I asked, scratching my head.

" Good! You do remember! I was afraid you'd forgotten and I'd have to explain things." Twilight answered. I stuck out my tongue and blew a raspberry without her noticing--my lack of maturity clearly showing--but quickly stopped upon realizing that she was right. I had forgotten. " Diamond Tiara said that someone named Biggoron guards the temple to make sure no one gains access to it. You might have to deal with him before being able to enter the temple, but it sounds like he's huge in size going by his name." Twilight said.

I remember him now. Biggoron was the Goron who forged the strongest sword I used in my previous journey. I felt embarrassed over forgetting about him.

" I might have to play that song to make him fall asleep."

" Then it's imperative we go back to Goron Village and help Featherweight out."

" Are you suggesting that I get the song first?"

" Right now, that's your top priority above everything else. I know I sound like a hypocrite when I said you could choose what to handle first, but if we're going to save this world from being destroyed, we need to go back to the village and put Featherweight to sleep." Twilight answered. She then noticed that I was twiddling my thumbs, resulting in her moaning as she rubbed her eyes with her hand. " Okay... What did you decide to do?"

" I want to help Fancy Pants and Tirek."

" You seriously want to help 'him' more than a small child?"

" Look, we've both had our experiences dealing with an evil version of Tirek in the past, but in this world he's a smithy who happens to be devoid of any evil merits despite having a somewhat frightening appearance. Besides, I want to help them because it would allow goods and the like to flow again, something they need right now. Besides, I might be able to get them to help me make a stronger sword than the current one I've got." I answered.

" You can upgrade your sword?"

" I did it before in Hyrule, although that involved using different swords and not the same one upgraded each time."

" Well... I guess you could make your sword stronger if it would make you feel better, but I would strongly recommend going back to the Goron Village. In the end, however, this is your adventure, Sunset, so I'll follow whatever decision you make." Twilight said.

Her Highness was making it sound like I wasn't taking her advice seriously, but I always took what she said to heart. It's just that I believed that having a stronger sword would allow me to survive given that monsters were starting to become more powerful. Granted, my way of thinking was contradicted with the physical strength I possessed while as a Goron, but my current appearance wouldn't always be useful. I knew Twilight wished I could focus on the main objective, yet there were times where doing something on the side would result in being able to handle an important job better.

Besides, getting some hot spring water to the Mountain Smithy wouldn't take that long at all. I just needed to roll over there within two minutes and melt the ice that covers their hearth just like that. Then I can roll back to Goron Village and see Featherweight provided my body doesn't give out along the way due to exhaustion.

My decision having been made, I turned to face the island that Pinkie Pie was still floating above--I was curious if she had been paying attention at all to me and Cranky having our 'delightful' conversation--before curling up into a ball and rolling up the slope with ease. This was actually a useful little tidbit of information. If there was a slope in the future that was too steep for me, I could roll up there instead.

Once I dropped down into the hole and was back in the hidden hot spring, the warm sensation I felt from before started to affect my mind. Again, it was so beautiful given how the light that shimmered from each wall looked like the blazing sun I had come to love so much, steam rising from the water made my eyes droopy, and the overall calmness was making me want to rest forever. No... I couldn't rest even if I wanted to. There were people surrounded by misery who needed my help to free them from such evil thoughts.

Taking out my bottle, I walked over to the edge of the water, scooped some up, corked it, and put it away before turning towards the exit. Before leaving, I just had to take another look at the beautiful scenery that surrounded me. Compared to what I had already seen of Termina, a place like this hot spring showed that natural places still existed even in a world that was hanging on the verge of destruction.

Stepping into the light and returning to the surface, I knew that I had about two minutes to get back to the smithies before the water cooled down and became regular water--I also had to consider avoiding any conversations until after melting the ice.

Curling up into a ball again, I rolled forward, the snow giving me enough momentum to produce spikes across my body, plowing through the same Blue Tektites that frequented the area--I kind of felt bad for them being knocked away by a rolling Goron--until I rolled into the Mountain Village. I continued rolling onward until I crashed into the back wall of the smithies house, rubbing my head as I came out of my curled up state.

" I really need to figure out how to stop on a dime." I said as I got onto my feet.

" Crashing into things must really take its toll on you, huh?"

" Actually, I don't feel much pain, but I take that as having a sturdier body when in Goron form."

" That's true as I doubt you'd enjoy injuring yourself if you crashed into things as a human. In any case, you need to get inside and apply the hot spring water before it cools otherwise you'll have to go back and try it again." Twilight said. The thought of having to go back to get some more water was something I didn't want to do, so I quickly walked along the western wall of the house, and around the corner before Her Highness stopped me just as I was reaching out with my hand to grab the door handle. " You're not seriously thinking about going in there as you are right now are you?"

" What's wrong with that?"

" You talked to Fancy Pants and Tirek when you were a human. If you go in there as a Goron, they'll wonder why one of the mountain people has paid them a visit despite their business currently being at a standstill." Twilight answered.

" Since you put it that way, I guess I need to change back to normal." I said. I checked to make sure that the bottle of hot spring water was still intact--it was so that meant these bottles were capable of surviving crashes although it's something I shouldn't be happy about--so then I grabbed at my face and pulled the Goron Mask off changing myself back into a human for the first time in what felt like forever.

As the mask came off, I flipped my head back in relief, my hair flapping about in the wind, and regained my composure before putting it away. I reached for the door knob and opened it where it made a loud click followed by a creaking sound that broke the silence that billowed about. Inside, I could see Tirek standing behind the desk like before, yet now he seemed confused given the expression on his face.

Despite being the evil despot I fought before--and whatever Her Highness experienced when she faced him--he looked completely harmless other than swinging around that giant hammer that could knock anyone's head off with one swipe.

To the right lying on the couch was Fancy Pants, only now he was sound asleep, yet I could barely hear him mumbling under his breath about something that involved gold. It seemed things hadn't changed since my previous visit, but that was about to change thanks to bringing what they need to get their business running again.

I looked to my left and saw the hearth, still in its frozen state. Upon a second glance at the chunk of ice that covered it, it was the same size as the chunk that I melted earlier that covered up the entrance of the hidden hot spring. I'd have been furious had the ice been bigger as that would've meant going back and getting some more. Twilight bopped me on the head to remind me that I needed to do this quickly before the water cooled down, so I took a single step forward only for Tirek to react to my presence.

" Ugo-oh! Ugo ugo!" Tirek said in a booming voice.

" Shaddup!" Fancy Pants shouted as he stumbled to get up from sleeping. " Why did you have to go and wake me up, you Deku Stick? I was dreaming about the pure gold that the Gorons keep to themselves when you had to open your mouth." I could tell from his mannerisms that he was feeling really groggy so I had to get him in a good mood. Otherwise, he would kick me out and I'd be unable to melt the ice. " Now, do you mind explaining what got you so excited?"

" Ugo ugo! Ugo-ugo-ugo!"

" Huh? You say that girl's come back?" Fancy Pants asked. He then rubbed his eyes before noticing that I was standing by the doorway, his slight jump into the air a reaction of being surprised to see me. " Why are you here again, kid? I can appreciate you wanting to come here and get your sword improved, but I've got to say that you're really pushing the limits of my patience. Like I said before, I need to get this ice melted before I can do any work. Until the snow outside melts and spring comes, there's nothing I can do."

" Ugo-oh!"

" The hot spring? I thought I told you that was just a rumour."

" I've got some right here." I said, flashing the bottle of hot spring water before him.

" Huh? You actually found a hot spring in these mountains? Unbelievable! How were you able to find something that doesn't exist? You know what, never mind! All I care about is you using that stuff to melt my hearth." Fancy Pants said. He could've at least said please but I supposed he cared more for his business than showing common courtesy.

I walked up to the hearth and took a closer look at it. Despite how far advanced technology had gotten back in the world that I now called home, it was truly a sight to behold something that was used back in more simpler times. Aside from malfunctioning due to being frozen, using a hearth was a lot of fun especially if you knew how to use one properly.

I remembered back in Equestria during my early years as Princess Celestia's student. She took my class to one of Canterlot's premiere museums where we saw a hearth much like this one but was more archaic. I was arrogant back then but at least I had some interest because I felt using a hearth would make me better than everypony else.

The tapping of Fancy Pants' foot told me that I was daydreaming, so I quickly shook my head, opened up my bottle, and poured its contents at the base of the ice. It melted away within mere moments prompting Tirek to react in his usual manner.

" Ugo! Ugoh-oh! Ugo-ugo!" Tirek said.

" It worked! That hot spring water has melted the ice! Now I can get back to work! You've done me a great favour, kid! I'm not sure how long it will take for the Gorons to make their way over here, but now they have a reason to get their goods moving again." Fancy Pants said.

" I don't think you'll be seeing them for some time." I said.

" What are you talking about?"

" I recently visited their village and it looks like the cold weather has affected them more than anywhere else in the mountains. They are starving, freezing, and their Elder has gone missing leaving behind his son who can't stop crying." I answered. I made sure not to tell him that I could become a Goron and learned of my information by directly talking to them. He wouldn't believe me and he'd think I had lost my mind from being out in the cold for too long.

" That bad, huh? Well, I suppose there isn't much that can be done for them now. If only that Darmani fellow hadn't gotten herself killed, they'd be in a much better position instead of being on the brink of destruction." Fancy Pants said. I looked at him with shock on my face. How did he know about Maud's death? The Gorons would never allow an outsider to learn something that important. " Why are you staring at me like that, kid?" Fancy Pants asked.

It took me a few moments before I uttered words that stated that I wanted to know how he knew of her death. He then laughed in response. " Just because Gabora and I are humans doesn't mean we don't know anything about the Gorons. We live in the mountains just like they do, so news like that is bound to reach our ears especially when their search party needed some supplies from us."

I felt foolish for even bringing it up, but it was over now and I learned something new in the process.

" Ugo! Ugo-oh!" Tirek said.

" Quite right, Gabora, quite right. Since our hearth has been thawed, I believe that we can now deal with you as a customer. Gabora! Fetch our customer some coffee, quick-like, and make sure mine is extra strong. How do you like your coffee?" Fancy Pants asked.

" With milk?" I answered sheepishly.

" Fair enough! Gabora! Make sure her coffee has milk in it!" Fancy Pants said. Tirek then turned around and walked to the back of the house, each footstep he took felt like a small tremor was rattling the house, yet Fancy Pants appeared to shrug it off like it were nothing. " Gabora may be a Deku Stick who stumbles about, but he makes some of the best coffee you'll ever experience in Termina.

" Now then, while he's preparing the refreshments, I want to take a better look at that sword of yours." I felt a little nervous about handing over my sword to him, but the expression on his face was telling me that he could be trusted. " Are you afraid that I might break it or something?"

" I had a previous experience." I said, reminding myself of what happened to the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop. I know that I prevented the robbery from happening, but the fact that it happened impacted me when it came to giving my important items to someone else.

" I can assure you that I won't do anything like that." Fancy Pants said. I drew my sword from its scabbard and presented it to him where he grabbed the hilt and looked at it from different angles like he were obsessed with it. " Now this is what I call a finely crafted weapon! I don't think I've ever seen anything like this in Termina. I've no doubt that this sword has served you well, but it can definitely be improved upon."

" You can forge it into a stronger weapon?"

" More like re-forge it so that it will have more attack power and have a much sharper blade. Normally, I'd charge one hundred rupees to re-forge swords, but I like you kid, so I'll cut you a special deal. I'll make your sword stronger for merely fifty rupees. I can't go any lower than that so consider this offer a steal." Fancy Pants answered.

Fifty rupees? Even though it was cheaper than the original price, deep down I knew that I didn't have enough to pay him. That meant he was going to be downright furious because of how I strung him along without having adequate funds. I reached into my pocket and pulled out my wallet, opening it up to show him that I didn't have enough money. At first, I couldn't bear to look because of what was about to happen, but a sudden noise of shock coming from Fancy Pants made me take a look for myself.

To my surprise, my wallet was filled to near capacity with rupees, but how did I get my hands on them? Was it possible that when I rolled around as Darmani, I somehow picked up some loose rupees.

" Guess I've got enough to pay you."

" Yep! You've definitely got fifty rupees, so why don't I take both those and your sword, and make it even better than ever." Fancy Pants said. Even if I had the option to back out from this, I felt compelled to complete this transaction. He held out his hand to indicate that he wanted the rupees, so I took out enough that totalled fifty and deposited them in his hand where he quickly pocketed them. " I should let you know before you leave that we'll be keeping your sword here for the night, so I suggest you don't go running into trouble. Come back here tomorrow morning and it shall be ready."

" Ugo-oh! Ugoh! Ugo!" Tirek said, coming back with the coffee. He handed over one cup to Fancy Pants and the other to me before returning to his place behind the desk. I had to admit that the smell coming from the cup was really good. Guess Tirek really knew how to brew some fantastic coffee.

" Gabora says that he will do his best to re-forge your sword."

" Ugo! Ugo!"

" Right! I'm off to work!"

After finishing my coffee--I had to drink it quickly because time wasn't on my side--I prepared to leave without my sword, and took another look at Fancy Pants. Despite saying that he was about to get started on re-forging my sword, he was just laying there as though he wasn't going to do anything. I had a feeling that it was Tirek who did the actual work and heloafed around taking the credit. Or, he could be providing direction for Tirek given his lack of smarts. In any case, there was nothing more for me to do other than come back tomorrow morning and seeing what my sword will look like once the work was done.

I left the Mountain Smithy but pressed my ear up to the door in case they started to work on my sword the moment I left. Sure enough, I could hear the sound of Tirek's hammer banging on something metallic, and that was enough proof I needed. It felt weird not having something to protect me, but it was worth it because it meant having a better weapon that would allow me to hold my own against the monsters.

" Can you hear what they're doing in there?" Twilight asked.

" I think they're working on re-forging my sword now." I answered.

" Not sure why it will take until tomorrow morning to complete the process, but I suppose that they needed the time because of how foreign your sword is. In any case, you'll be going through these mountains unarmed, so I'd avoid any monsters until you get it back." Twilight said.

" I'm not completely defenseless." I said as I took out the Goron Mask.

" That's right! As Darmani, you can hold your own in any battle by using your entire body as a weapon. Just don't get too used to that kind of power, Sunset. You won't be able to use the abilities of a Goron all the time as some problems can only be solved as a human." Twilight said.

Looking up at the cloudy sky above, I could tell that the sun was starting to set as the clouds had a yellow tinge to them. Had I really spent that much time in the smithy? I doubted that I could make it back to Goron Village before nightfall came, and my body was starting to feel tired. Besides, if I took the time to get some rest, I wouldn't have to worry about getting used to not having my sword on hand. Since the hot spring outside the village had proven an ideal location for me to sleep, I knew that I had to get there as quickly as possible.

It's not that I was afraid of the dark but rather it gets really cold at night, and I didn't want to freeze or anything--the Gorons who were forced to sleep out in the cold had my sympathies.

Putting on the Goron Mask, I stumbled forward down the steps and onto the snow as my body reacted to the magic that was changing me. It was more painful than when I put on the Deku Mask, yet I had to get used to it especially when I have to switch between both forms at any given notice. Eventually, I let out a scream that no one heard and became a Goron again although the transition left me slightly exhausted. Twilight asked me if I was alright and I nodded despite wanting to drop down and sleep in the snow.

I regained my composure, curled up into a ball, and began to roll forward towards the twin islands, spikes producing from my body once again courtesy of my magic.

" Did you see that?"

" Most interesting, and it does confirm my initial suspicions."

" How can you call that 'interesting'? She just changed into an entirely different creature by putting a mask on her face. How did she acquire such a power?" Two figures had witnessed what transpired in front of the Mountain Smithy, and the tall figure appeared shocked at what she saw. She jumped down to a lower ledge in a fit of rage but quickly realized her partner said something that piqued her curiosity and flew back up to an upper ledge where her partner had been writing something. " You just said that this confirmed your suspicions. What did Sunset do to reward such a notion?"

" Take a look at this." The short figure answered, brandishing her book. It contained a series of complex calculations that would confuse most people, but the tall figure appeared more than capable of understanding what it meant. " When we saw Sunset in the swamp, she had taken on the form of one of those plant-like creatures. I initially assumed it nothing but a freak coincidence, but now I see there was a magical presence at work."

" Magical?"

" Yes. I sensed an aura that wasn't her own surrounding her body. It stemmed from her face but I didn't understand at the time why that was. Upon seeing her transform into that rock-like creature, my suspicion has been confirmed. The mask that she put on contained the spirit of a creature who had recently passed away. That's how Sunset was able to become the plant from before. One of those creatures must have died and its spirit became sealed into a mask." The short figure answered.

" So what you're saying is Sunset is living out the life of a dead creature by wearing a mask?"

" Correct."

" Colour me intrigued. I never would've imagined Sunset relying on such a depraved method as that. Perhaps a small part of me still exists within her subconscious after all. A minor victory but important all the same." The tall figure looked down at the ground before looking back at her partner, her face exploding in delight upon having reached her own conclusion regarding the power of masks. " Do you think it's possible that I could harness such power if I wore one of those masks?"

" Even though you're a demonic version of her, you're still Sunset Shimmer, so I'd definitely say yes. To be honest though, would you really want to change into one of those rock-like creatures? They don't look all that fast despite being capable of rolling away. Plus, you probably wouldn't like to have your beauty tarnished." The short figure answered.

" Do you think I'm that petty!?" The tall figure shouted causing the short figure to start bursting into laughter. This prompted the tall figure to glare at her partner with eyes that could pierce into one's soul and uncover their darkest secrets. " I don't care about looks! All I care about is becoming more powerful and becoming the true Sunset Shimmer!" The short figure continued laughing until the tall figure grabbed the book she had been writing in and tossed it down to the ground below. " Don't think it's funny now, do you? For a demon who seeks knowledge, you sure can be a real jerk sometimes."

" You didn't have to do that." The short figure said as she jumped down to where her book landed in the snow. She picked it up, brushed off the excess snow, made sure that none of the pages had been damaged, and flew back up to where her partner was standing arms folded. " I didn't mean to strike a nerve with you, but please don't toss away my book. We need it to ensure that we get everything we want."

" Guess I overreacted."

" It takes time to not allow anger to blind you."

" Want to go back to that cursed desert? I know you didn't want to leave that place what with the other Twilight being there, but you agreed to follow my lead."

" You sensed Sunset in these mountains so I knew saying no wasn't an option. Besides, I doubt Twilight is going anywhere in the near future. She does have her own little problem to deal with that remains stagnant what with us being sent back to the beginning of this seventy-two hour time period." The short figure said.

" If not for the fact that we're their demonic selves--not you as you never spawned from the princess--we'd be losing our memories every time Sunset starts over. By the way, you do remember those undead mummies who were surrounding that house? I don't know which cycle of time it will happen in, but I'm betting that they will get to her. I know you want her to become you again so that she can fulfill her desire for knowledge, but those creatures are guaranteed to take her." The tall figure said.

" Should they try... I'll rip them apart so much, I doubt anyone would be able to find any remnants."

" Looks like you do have a sadistic streak in you when you're not focusing on books."

" Twilight is my pray and no one will deny me that."

" Of course. So... want to leave?"

" Why so insistent about it?"

" Because it's cold!"

I had managed to make it back to the hot spring just as the sun finally settled down for the night. While I could've gone the rest of the way to Goron Village by rolling--it was only a couple of minutes away--the sudden burst of cold wind that radiated throughout the twin islands area made it impossible to make an attempt. I still felt bad for the Gorons who were forced to endure the cold. If I could, I'd have gladly taken their place and allowed them to bask in warm splendor of the hot spring. But, I knew deep down that I had to survive as I only I could save Snowhead from becoming a frozen wasteland.

Once I had gotten myself comfy by resting my body up against a wall, I thought about taking my mask off and sleeping as a human, but part of me wanted to stay a Goron because of how unusual it was being a rock-like creature--having powerful muscles was also a reason. As I slowly closed my eyes and began to dream, it didn't take long for me to experience a nightmare, the kind that often made me feel restless as I struggled to avoid succumbing to it.

Within the subconscious of my dream, I was once again surrounded by fire--I was also a human and not a Goron--and I knew straight away that Ganondorf was going to pay me a visit so that he could once again torment me. To be honest, I had hoped he wouldn't bother me anymore, but I should've known someone that evil wouldn't shy away from bringing misery to someone because it was in their nature.

As I tried to see beyond the flames--they had since flared up and were blinding my vision--a pair of eyes appeared before me. They were filled with a dread and a gaze that made me want to hide from them, but there was nowhere for me to hide. The gaze from the eyes pierced through my soul and could see everything about me. I knew at that point I was staring into the eyes of Ganondorf.

Why had he appeared now when I hadn't dealt with him for a long time? This along with many other questions riddled my mind, yet there was no telling if I'd even get answers to them due to how cryptic he could be. What was truly bad was that Her Highness wasn't by my side.

" Child... It has been some time since our last encounter." Ganondorf said, his piercing gaze grew stronger and I couldn't help staring deep into them.

" Why torment me now?" I asked.

" Do not consider my visit to be a mere taunting of your misery."

" Okay, then what brings you to my dreams?"

" People such as you are most vulnerable within the realm of dreams. They believe themselves protected from the darkness that surrounds them, but in truth they can be struck down without any mercy. I would gladly demonstrate this by making you suffer, child, but there is no need to do so through your subconscious. No, such a pleasure works best by doing so in person." Ganondorf answered.

Like before, his choice of words were a mixture of confusion and intimidation, but it seemed he had either slipped or intended for me to understand what he was talking about. " Tell me... Have you gotten stronger since our last meeting?"

" Can't you tell?"

" Such ignorance is most amusing. Even though your power is nothing compared to mine, I still believe you have the potential to become so much more. You may not think that way, but deep down your heart yearns for hatred. It yearns for the desire to crush all that oppose it through sheer power alone." Ganondorf answered.

" I'm not like that anymore."

" Heh... You cannot hide from the past, child, nor can you remove the taint that stains you."

" Taint? What taint?"

" The taint of evil. It has existed within your heart since the day you learned that your family neglected you. It has been feasting on your hatred for others and your desire to be better than everyone else from your world. It grew alongside you until it manifested into the demonic form that eventually became its own entity." Ganondorf answered.

His eyes then started glowing and it felt like he was peering straight into my heart. I tried to do something to prevent him but I went completely numb. As the eyes of the Dark Lord scanned my body, I could feel something inside trying to tear me apart. I didn't know what it was but it felt unbearable. " Do you feel that, child? That is the taint of evil that was born from your hatred of those who abandoned you."

" I thought friendship saved me from that?"

" No matter how much you do to change the perception others once had of you, your taint is forever a part of you. It can never be destroyed and shall remain with you until the day you die or choose to embrace its blessings." Ganondorf answered.

" I'll never embrace it!"

" Heh... I knew that was going to be your answer. So then you shall die."

" What are you talking about?"

" Have you gotten stronger, child? You did not answer my question and instead provided ignorance, but I could simply peer into your soul to determine if you have become stronger or remain weak and helpless." Ganondorf answered. His eyes glowed even brighter than before and again there was nothing I could do. His power was far too much for me to resist and I felt like a newborn puppy, but then he began laughing which didn't make much sense. I was completely at his mercy yet he just laughed at my expense.

That's when he revealed something that changed everything. " Ha! You forgot my ability to foresee the future." That's right... Ganondorf knew what was going to happen long before it was even conceived.

He knew that I was stronger and put me through painful torment all because I forgot he possessed that kind of power. Unfortunately, the reverse wasn't true. I had no idea what kind of power he wielded apart from the fact that it far exceeded anything I was capable of unleashing. Ganondorf could be three times stronger than me or even something like ten times stronger, but in any case his strength was in a league of its own.

" A little..." I answered. I wasn't sure what to say so I went with something simple.

" Do not think you can hide the truth from me. I am aware that you have been blessed with a new form. Your ignorance shall cost you your life, but perhaps you will survive long enough to provide me with some entertainment. You shall fight me again, child." Ganondorf said. What!? Was he being serious!? I barely survived my previous encounter! Now he wants to fight me again!?

I felt stick to my stomach but I knew he wasn't fazed by my actions. " Upon saving the mountain where the cold winds blow, you shall appear before me and we will have our contest. Your fate will be decided by my hand and mine alone. Do not attempt to run away, child, as you cannot escape. Remember these words."

Ganondorf's eyes disappeared into the flames that suddenly flared up, his laughter echoing all around me. The situation had gotten even worse than I had imagined. I tried to find a way to escape the flames, but every direction was blocked off as the flames grew larger in size. I found myself slowly being closed in on all sides, and I cowered in terrible believing that this was how it was going to end for me.

" WAAAAH!" I screamed, waking up from my sleep, and knocking Twilight--she had been sleeping on my hat--to the ground. I quickly crawled over to the water and looked at my reflection; my face was dripping with sweat.

" Sunset?" Twilight asked as she started to come to from being rudely awakened. " Did you have another nightmare or something?"

" It was horrible." I answered, cupping my hands together, and splashing my face with hot spring water to calm my nerves. " Ganondorf appeared in my dreams and told me that he wishes to fight me again, and it will happen when the mountains have been restored."

" What!?" Twilight exclaimed, my answer snapping her to attention. " If that's the case then things are going to get seriously bad if the second giant is awakened. Is there anything you can avoid facing him?"

" No. His power allows him to perform just about anything, so there's no point in even trying to run away."

" I'm so sorry, Sunset."

" I was already struggling with having to deal with his torments, but now I have to go toe-to-toe with him all because he wants to see my 'Daydream' form that I told you I achieved during the Friendship Games. My past is showing no signs of fading away, Twilight. No matter what I do to move on from it, it continues to haunt me in new and horrifying ways." I answered, tears streaming down my face. I felt like crying because of what had happened in my dreams, but then I felt the warm embrace from Her Highness as she pressed her tiny body up against my face. I could tell she was devastated.

" What are you going to do?"

" There's not much else I can do other than accept the fact that I've got a date with destiny." I answered, getting back onto my feet.

It wasn't the best analogy I could've come up with, but it was still appropriate given that Ganondorf was now waiting for me. To be honest, deep down I knew that I would have to fight him again--he still insisted on wanting me to embrace power--but I didn't expect it to happen so soon. If anything, I'd have guessed he would want to fight me after saving Termina from being destroyed and not before I achieved that goal.

There was no point in trying to go back to sleep at that point. I didn't want to run the risk of having another nightmare, so I told Twilight that we would be heading to the village and help Featherweight get some much needed rest. If anyone deserved not to be tormented, it was him because a child didn't deserve to suffer. The only problem was that I didn't know what time it was, so there was a chance I'd be travelling about in the cold dead of night--I wish I had a watch or something that could provide an accurate time.

After spending a couple of minutes regaining my composure, I walked over to the light that shone down from above, and floated back up to the surface. It was dark out and the intense cold wind immediately shook me to the bone. Was this what Gorons dealt with on a regular basis whenever the sun went down? Perhaps they were strong in spirit alongside being strong in body? Despite being in a Goron body, I struggled to keep warm although I was more concerned with Cranky.

Despite having years of experience, he was frail compared to the others, so had he succumbed to the intense cold? Photo Finish, Sandalwood, and his brother most likely were holding their own although probably begging to be someplace warm.

" Judging from how dark it looks above, I'd say it's about three in the morning." Twilight said as she observed the cloudy mass above us.

Night of the First Day - 51 Hours Remain.

" How accurate do you think your guess is?"

" I don't know, but it's better than not knowing at all."

" I'd have preferred to wait until morning, but my nightmare woke me up."

" I'm surprised Pinkie Pie is still floating about on her balloon. In fact, I'm surprised she hasn't frozen to death! I mean, all she's wearing is that green suit! I doubt it has insulation to keep her warm in these wretched conditions." Twilight said. We both looked up at her and were surprised that she was actually sleeping out in the cold whilst floating above the ground with that balloon of hers. There was no point in trying to figure it out--bending reality came natural to her--so I walked forward only to stop due to a sudden burst of cold coming out of nowhere and chilling my bones to the core. I folded my arms in an attempt to keep myself warm.

" Where did that come from?" I asked through chittering teeth.

" I'm not sure, but I suggest you get to the village before it gets worse."

I could've curled up into a ball and rolled my way there, but I decided to run as fast as my body was able to. The village certainly looked different at night what with there being no outdoor lights to help show the way--if not for the snow I'd be running around blind--but a familiar looking face nearby was a sigh of relief.

" Darmani! Why are you out here in the middle of the night?" Diamond Tiara asked.

" Me? What about you?" I asked as I walked up to her. " I thought you'd be inside with the others?"

" I took an hour long break from my duties, but it wasn't all that fun considering the Elder's son continues to cry. To be perfectly frank, I prefer to be out here as the cold is much more tolerable than the crying inside. I may sound nasty, but it's for my own peace of mind." Diamond Tiara said. She then noticed that I was shivering, so she walked over and placed her hand on my shoulder making me feel slightly more comfortable. " I'm not surprised that you feel so cold right now, Darmani."

" It's so unbearable."

" Ever since the cold winds started blowing from the direction of the temple, travelling about the region especially at night is tantamount to suicide. You never know when the wind will start to blow, so all you can do is hope that you don't get caught." Diamond Tiara said.

" I don't think the Elder will survive out there."

" You don't need to worry about him." Diamond Tiara said. Was she being serious? The Elder was more frail than either one of us, and someone of his age shouldn't be walking around in such horrible conditions. I meant no disrespect to him because of his age, but he should know better because of it. Diamond Tiara began laughing before she patted me on the back several times.

" The Elder has been through worse conditions than this--not entirely this bad mind you but you know what I mean--so don't expect him to die out there. Speaking of which, were you able to find him?" I nodded my head and she squealed with glee. " I knew you'd be able to do it, Darmani! Did he mention anything about coming back?"

" The Elder has no intention of returning until he finds out what's going on at the temple."

" Really?" Diamond Tiara's expression went from happy to sad in mere moments. " I suppose he must complete his mission since he is the patriarch of the village. A shame really as he really could do with him putting his son to sleep. The Elder is only going up to the temple because the one who was supposed to..." She then stopped upon realizing that I was the one who was supposed to go up there.

" I'm the one who was supposed to go there."

" Then you should go into the shrine and see if you can calm down the Elder's son. I'm hoping that he was able to teach you the song otherwise you won't be able to do anything and the others will only get worse. You did learn that song, right?" Diamond Tiara asked.

" He only gave me the first six notes."

" What!? How could he have forgotten? Well, I hope that his son remembers the rest of the melody. I'll quickly open up the entrance so you can get in there and do what you need to do." Diamond Tiara said.

" Before you do, I have a question."

" What's that?"

" There's a Goron I ran into at the Mountain Village who needs some top rock sirloin as her supposedly last meal, but she's trapped on a high-up ledge and doesn't have the strength to come down of her own volition." I said. Diamond Tiara then looked at me with a puzzled expression. Did she not know which Goron I was talking about? Surely she didn't believe everyone looked the same--there were some slight similarities but they had their distinct features. " She was wearing a frog-like mask on her head."

" Photo Finish!? What in the rocky crevasse is she even doing there!? I thought she came back to the village days ago!" Diamond Tiara said. She mumbled something under her breath that I couldn't understand, but she quickly turned to me all while slapping her forehead. " I know she means well, but she can be thick-headed like a boulder. If she needs a last meal as you say--though I doubt she'll die out there--I do know that one Goron hid some sirloin in the chandeliers above the meeting place. I'm not which part of the chandelier he hid his stash in, but it's top quality rock sirloin, perfect for Photo Finish."

Diamond Tiara curled into a ball before jumping into the air and crashing down onto the ground. The force of her impact opened the door, so I immediately thanked her for all the help and dropped down the side of the cliff to the floor below. A burst of cold wind caught me as I fell and I got flung into a large snow mound nearby, but luckily I got back onto my feet and entered the shrine just as a loud clicking sound coming from behind signalled the door closing. My ears once again heard the crying sounds coming from Featherweight, but this time I knew what needed to be done.

As I walked up the pathway that lead to the meeting place, I looked up at the chandelier that Diamond Tiara mentioned. It consisted of six clay spheres that looked extremely brittle--cracks in them indicated a heavy object could shatter them to pieces--connected to a center, but since I didn't know where that Goron had hidden his food, I had to smash each one until I found the rock sirloin Photo Finish needed.

While helping her out wasn't necessary, she would give me a mask in exchange for giving her a meal. Sure, it sounded like an unfair trade on her part, but she was willing to give me anything in return even if it was just a mask.

My focus broke when the sound of crying echoed throughout the chamber. Gorons all around were holding their ears so hard, it looked like they were on the verge of squeezing their heads just so they could relieve themselves. I walked to the back and saw that Featherweight hadn't changed since my last visit. He was still crying up a storm, yet I was surprised he had gone this long without taking a break. The Goron who was standing nearby looked at me with sadness in his eyes, that look made my own heart ache. I knew what needed to be done, so I took out my drums and was about to play when Featherweight interrupted.

" Waaa... Hunh, ugh... u-waahhh! Da-daaaddy, daaaddy! Hunh... I'm cooooold... Daaaddy!" Featherweight cried. He then opened his eyes and noticed that I was standing there, drums ready to play the song that would finally get him to fall asleep. " Darmi... Did you bring him? Did you bring daddy home? You said that you would." I didn't have the heart to tell him that his father wasn't returning, but I couldn't deny information that important. I told Featherweight that his father wishes he could be here with him, but had to continue on with his journey to the temple. The news wasn't taken very well. " Waaaaah! Waaaaaah!"

" There's no need to continue crying." I said.

" You promised... you promised to bring my daddy home."

" He insists on going to the temple, but he'll never make it at this rate. No, I must go there and finish what I started. In the meantime, there is something that I can do for you courtesy of your daddy. Before he continued with his journey, I was asked by him to play you this song. I'm sure you'll feel a lot better once I've played it." I said.

" But... But... Hunh... waahhh! Daaaddy!"

There was no point in trying to reason with a child when they were in such a state. Quickly remembering the exact notes that Cranky played on his drum, I played the song by beating the appropriate drum hoping that Featherweight would be able to give me the remaining notes I needed. At first, nothing happened when he heard the notes, but then he got up onto his feet and looked at me with a puzzled look.

" What's wrong?"

" That song... That's the song daddy always plays for me before I go to sleep... but it's not the entire song. Did daddy forget the remaining notes? I'm sure he didn't do it on purpose, but he has been really stressful lately." Featherweight answered. This had me thinking. Was he aware that the real Darmani had died after falling into the chasm below the temple or was his innocence making him immune to the awful truth? No... I doubt he knew. A child this young should never be told something that horrible even if it meant preventing any kind of mental anguish later in life. It was the least I could do. " Here, I'll sing the next part, Darmi." Featherweight said.

He then began to sing in a beautiful voice--surprising me as I never would've guessed--the first six notes Cranky taught me, but then sang an additional two notes before repeating it and turning it over to me. I was expecting half a dozen more notes that created a very complicated song, yet all I needed were two notes. Somehow, I felt annoyed for having to go through a few hurdles just for a mere two additional notes, but at least I now had everything I needed.

I played all eight notes before playing them again followed by Featherweight singing them. As he sang each note, another vision appeared before me depicting both father and child as Cranky appeared from the haze, picked up his son, and cuddled him with a loving embrace that could only be realized by a parent. Just seeing such a wondrous display brought tears to my eyes, yet what was truly important was that Featherweight had finally stopped crying. The melody made him drowsy, but he looked like he was trying very hard to not fall asleep. His chances were slim as no Goron could resist such a melody.

" Feel any better?"

" Yes... I do feel a lot better now, Darmi. Thank you for playing the Goron's Lullaby."

" So that's what it's called."

" I don't know why daddy wanted you to know this song, but I am sure you'll know what to do with it." Featherweight said. He was getting more and more drowsy by the second and began tilting left and right as the magic within the melody was taking full effect. " Mmmmm... It's just like... daddy's... right... beside me..." Featherweight then curled up into a ball, and fell asleep, his gentle snoring echoing all around. He looked absolutely adorable and I thought about coddling him like a proud mother, but then his snoring was suddenly overshadowed by a more obnoxious sound. I looked behind me and saw that the Goron who was standing there had also fallen asleep.

" That lullaby is a lot more powerful than I thought." Twilight said.

" How come it hasn't affected me?"

" I think it's because you're not a proper Goron despite currently having the body of one. That should prove useful when you have to play the lullaby in front of Biggoron if he doesn't allow you to get past him and into the temple." Twilight answered.

" Guess coming back here was essential."

" Hold on a second! I want to see something first." Twilight said. She flew off into the darkness leaving me to wonder what had gotten her so excited. " Sunset? Come over here and take a look at this!" She sounded like it was serious, so I put away my drums and walked over to the meeting place, discovering the Gorons were sound asleep. I was surprised at how much range those drums possessed. " No doubt those drums echo much better than the ocarina. This could be useful."

" I noticed something as well."

" What's that?"

" This torch to our left wasn't burning when we came by a few minutes ago." I answered. Did the power of the song cause the torch to ignite? In any case, it was providing some much needed warmth. There were additional torches near the entrance that looked like they wanted to be lit as well. " I wonder what will happen if I light up all of those torches?"

" Only way to know is to try. Oh, you should know that you can't use Deku Sticks while as a Goron, so you'll have to do this as a human. If you're worried about revealing your true identity by taking off your mask, then don't as the Gorons are likely to remain asleep for quite some time." Twilight said. At least that was one problem that wouldn't become an issue, yet did I have a Deku Stick on hand?

First of all, I grabbed my face and pulled as hard as I could, taking off the Goron Mask--I also tilted my head back allowing my hair to flow about--and became human again. I then rummaged through my items in hopes that I had a Deku Stick on hand--I didn't have one. That meant going to the swamp and searching for a Deku Baba in hopes that cutting one down would give me what I needed. I didn't want to do anymore unnecessary backtracking, so in my frustration I picked up a nearby pot and smashed it against the wall. I was surprised at seeing a Deku Stick falling out of the pot upon impact.

I wasn't about to knock it. I needed a Deku Stick to light up the remaining torches, so I picked it up, plunged it into the flames, and ran down the path back to the entrance, lighting the torches one by one until they were all burning brightly. Upon lighting the last one, a strange whirling sound came from above. I looked up and saw the chandelier had begun to spin around. It was making a loud racket but not enough to wake up the Gorons.

" That was kind of pointless, Twilight."

" Maybe, but perhaps the sphere that contains the rock sirloin can now be easily reached."

" How am I supposed to get it?"

" Do you remember seeing that small ramp up there where the Gorons gather? I'm willing to bet that if you rolled off of that ramp as Darmani, you should be able to smash into those spheres, breaking them in the process. I don't know which sphere contains the sirloin so it involves guessing." Twilight answered.

" Wouldn't smashing them wake the Gorons?"

" I doubt it. They're sleeping so loudly, it would take something exceptionally loud to wake them."

Walking back up the path wasn't so bad as now I could bask in the warmth coming from the torches, but when I reached the meeting place, I noticed something that I either didn't pick up on before or I simply ignored it. The red carpet was frozen despite it not looking that way--I tapped my foot on it making a pinging sound. Could this give me enough momentum to roll off of the ramp? Yes, provided that I start rolling from a good enough distance.

Taking out the Goron Mask--the eyes on it looked derpish--I put it on and began to go through the usual transition. I wondered if this would happen to anyone else who put these masks on their faces or that it was only restricted to me? It was something to consider in case I needed more than one form to solve a specific problem. My body was beginning to change shape as the magic took effect, and I screamed out loud--the Gorons didn't hear a thing--before becoming Darmani again. I'll never understand why screaming is part of the transformation. It feels rather silly in my opinion.

I walked into the shadows that lead to Featherweight, stopping half-way because I didn't need to go all the way back. I had to make sure that I was aiming for the chandelier in a straight line otherwise I'll most likely careen off the side and land somewhere else. Who knew that rolling around as a Goron required precise calculations? My assumption was that they just rolled somewhere and hoped they would hit their target.

Curling up into a ball, I waited until the sphere on the chandelier I wanted to hit--there were six of them and I picked one that spoke to me--before rolling forward, the ice acting like snow thus giving me the momentum necessary to produce spikes on my body. In a matter of seconds, I rolled off the ramp and smashed into the sphere, a strange object came out and dropped to the ground upon impact--I rolled into a wall and came to a complete stop.

" Did you see that, Sunset?"

" Something came out of the chandelier."

" You must have luck on your side as that's the rock sirloin that you need to give to Photo Finish." Twilight said. I walked over to where it had dropped and took a closer look. It looked like one of those pieces of meat they serve back home attached to the bone, yet you could tell that the meat was rock that had been grinded down. My mouth started to water as I continued to gaze at the sirloin, so Twilight bopped me on the head and I realized that I had the desire to eat it for myself. " Get a hold of yourself! As a Goron, the smell coming from that sirloin is making you hungry."

" I don't want to eat that!"

" Gorons eat rocks all the time as you told me before, so it's natural that you feel a tremendous hunger coming from within your stomach."

" You know, I feel really bad about taking this sirloin. I mean, some Goron put it up there in the chandelier for safe-keeping, and here I am stealing it from him or her just so that I can give it to someone who shouldn't have ended up the way she did. Do I sound like a bully when I think about it that way?" I asked.

" Think about it this way then. Even though you're stealing, it's for a good cause as Photo Finish could potentially die out there. Also, when you reset time, things will go back to normal before we even arrived. The sirloin will still be stashed away and whoever put it in the chandelier won't be none the wiser." Twilight answered. What she failed to grasp was that resetting time meant Photo Finish would be back to being up on that ledge shivering and hungry. No... I shouldn't doubt Her Highness. She knew better than most about such things because of what she dealt with as a princess.

" I don't think I can put this sirloin away."

" How about carrying it around?"

" Are you sure I can do that?"

" Gorons have tremendous strength so you should have no problems carrying that sirloin around. The only problem I can see is that you won't be able to defend yourself in case a monster decides to attack you. Also, I don't think the Goron who hid the sirloin had any extra pieces stashed away, so you've got one shot at this." Twilight answered.

That wasn't very reassuring but I supposed when it came to food, there weren't any second chances especially if someone was desperate for some. I grabbed the rock sirloin and lifted it up with no effort above my head--it was surprisingly light although I attribute that to having so much strength--and walked towards the entrance of the shrine. Like before, it was closed so I pounded my fists in hopes Diamond Tiara would hear me--it opened several moments later.

" You managed to find some rock sirloin." Diamond Tiara said as I walked outside. I took a few more steps forward, turned, and looked up to see her staring down at me. " Judging from the smell, that's top quality you've got there in your hands, Darmani."

" Photo Finish was very adamant about it being like this." I said.

" Ugh! She always demanded the very best sirloin."

" I take it that she's picky?"

" Most Gorons sadly are like that these days. In the past, our ancestors would eat any kind of rock no matter the quality. Over time, the idea of only consuming the best became integrated in our society and now most of us will only eat rocks from Dodongo's Cavern." Diamond Tiara answered. This world had a cavern filled with those monsters too!? I guessed some things between the two worlds were the same. " Some Gorons will eat anything and I envy them for that. Anyway, you should get that to Photo Finish before she freezes out there, but make sure she actually gives you a good reward for your work."

Thanking her once again, I turned around and started to make my way towards the entrance of the village. As I walked, I began to think about what Diamond Tiara didn't do. She never warned me of the dangers beyond the village or tried convincing me to stay until morning. Was Maud really that strong amongst the Gorons that she could take care of just about anything without getting herself overwhelmed? Well, it wasn't anything I should feel offended over.

I reached the entrance and walked through the tunnel to the twin islands area--it was still dark out although it had gotten a bit lighter--and so far, nothing had chosen to attack me which was good as carrying this rock sirloin did make me feel somewhat ridiculous. When a White Wolfos suddenly popped up from the snow, I was reminded that I should know better than to think that nothing would go wrong. I thought about putting the sirloin down and fighting it, but I couldn't afford to keep Photo Finish waiting. My only option was to keep going and take the damage as it came provided the White Wolfos didn't do something stupid like sliding down a slope.

It ran towards me while I walked towards it before slashing my chest with its sharp claws--my stomach may have been bulky but it was still pretty sturdy--resulting in me wincing with pain as I kept going. It started to follow behind but I ignored it as Photo Finish needed me. It began slashing me in the back, each swipe brought more and more pain--I think it eventually caused me to draw blood--and Twilight started to suggest I put the sirloin down and fight back.

I was determined to get to my destination even if it meant getting clawed to pieces. Fortunately, the White Wolfos got bored over time and decided to look elsewhere leaving me free to continue.

That was short lived when a Blue Tektite appeared and jumped into me from the front. I almost dropped the rock sirloin into the snow but managed to keep hold of it and continued walking across the remaining bridge and into the Mountain Village. My body felt pretty banged up what with being clawed and slammed but it was nothing compared with what I experienced back in Hyrule--in that journey I almost died at least a dozen times or so. At least the worst part was now over as getting over to Photo Finish should be simple enough.

" Why didn't you fight back?" Twilight asked.

" If I had, I might not have gotten to Photo Finish in time."

" Yes, I suppose that's a valid enough reason."

" Besides, those wounds weren't really all that bad."

" And the blood coming from your back?"

" It will heal quickly, I think. I know it sounds like I'm not being very reassuring, but this body is way more durable than my actual body. It's a shame that I'll only be able to experience this until we change everything back to normal. It would make going up against evil magic more tolerable." I answered. Twilight chuckled prompting me to do the same. Okay, so I wasn't confident about fighting evil magic. It doesn't come up quite as often as what Her Highness has to go through but it'd be nice to have some better protection.

I continued onward past the Mountain Smithy only to come to a stop when a familiar called down from on high.

" Hey you! Yes, you! The Goron holding that succulent rock sirloin above your head." I looked up and saw Photo Finish gazing at me, her eyes wide open, fixated on what I held above my head. She looked like she was desperate to get something in her stomach. " I'm not sure why you're lugging that thing around in the open, but would you be so kind as to toss it up here? I haven't anything in what feels like forever."

" Actually, that's the reason I brought it here."

" It is? I don't remember seeing you saying that you'd bring me food." Photo Finish said. Crap! When I spoke to her before, I was a human, yet now I was a Goron. No wonder she looked so confused; she never saw me like this.

" Um... some girl in green gave this to me." I said, trying my best to sound convincing and fix the blunder I made.

" A little schnitzel like that came by earlier and said she'd bring me some food. Was she too afraid to see me, Photo Finish, again? No! Perhaps she didn't want to deal with a Goron whose life hangs ever so closer to the brink of starvation?" Photo Finish asked. Even in this world, I could tell that she was just as hammy as always with her words. " Enough! So, will you
give me that food you carry? I'll give you something very nice in return."

" What do you want me to do with it?"

" Toss it up here!" Photo Finish answered. With my Goron strength, I easily tossed the sirloin up onto the ledge where it landed with a loud thud. The sound of scuffling followed indicating that she gotten her hands on it. " Ya! I've no doubt about it. This is Dodongo Cavern's finest quality rock sirloin! I've dreamt about eating some for a very long time. This is my absolute favorite!" As I stood there, the sounds of chewing could be heard coming from the ledge followed by consistent swallowing.

Bits and pieces of rock came flying, splattering across the snow, and it made me want to throw up. You'd think she would have better manners. " That was the best meal I've ever had. My energy has returned to me!"

" Glad to hear that."

" I come!"

" You what?"

" I'm coming down so that I can properly thank you, schnitzel. Wait one moment! Now, I come!" Photo Finish answered. All of a sudden, she came rolling off the ledge and I had to jump to the side to avoid being bowled over. She then rolled around for a few seconds before stopping in front of me and uncurling herself. " Oh! I wondered who it might be. Why if it isn't Darmani! You are...alive? Didn't the Elder say you died?"

" As you can see, I'm alive and well.

" Yes, I see. That is the reason why you knew my favorite food. Only the real Darmani knew that rock sirloin from Dodongo's Cavern is my absolute favourite food. Okay, it's what most of us prefer but my point still stands." Photo Finish said.

" Do you think you can make it back to the village?"

" It may be cold out right now, but I've got the strength to make it there." Photo Finish answered. She curled into a ball and was about to roll away when she stood back up. " Oh, I almost forgot. Please accept this as a token of gratitude." She took off the frog-like mask she wore on her head and presented it to me. " This is Don Gero's Mask. He is a famous frog composer who directs the Frog Choir who are well known through Snowhead. Every spring, they appear in this area and perform for any who happen to pass by. It was crafted so well that no one would even think twice if you were to direct the choir."

" Thank you." I said as I took the mask from her hands. It certainly looked unique what with the frog hands and feet on the bottom of the mask. I wasn't sure how this would be useful in changing this world back to normal, but I accepted the mask anyway because I'd be rude if I didn't.

" I hope that spring will come soon so that I can hear the frogs' enthusiastic performance."

" I've got to succeed in my mission first."

" Then go! Go now! Save us all!" Photo Finish said. She curled up into a ball and rolled away at an incredible speed until she was out of sight.

I didn't really need her to give me a pep talk, especially one that sounded like she was demanding. In any case, I now had everything I needed to get to the temple and find out what was causing all this snow. Well... almost everything. I still needed to wait for my sword to be re-forged into a better weapon. There were still a couple of hours remaining until the sun came up, yet I did have enough strength to handle whatever awaited me at the temple.

But, what if I needed my sword to do things that Goron fists couldn't? I didn't want to run the risk of running into a problem that required a sword. It looked like I was going to have to wait until sunrise before I could continue onward.

Chapter 24: Cold Winds of the Temple.

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 5, 2016
Chapter 24: Cold Winds of the Temple.

" Well? Ready to climb up the mountain path to the temple?" Twilight asked.

" I'm not if we should go just yet." I answered.

" You're not having second thoughts are you?"

" No! Of course not! It's just that I think having my sword would increase my chances of survival." I answered. I then looked down at my Goron body then at Her Highness who rolled her eyes. I knew what she was saying without having to say anything. I had a body that was its own weapon that proved more than capable of holding its own against monsters, so why bother using a sword? I clenched my fist tightly before releasing it and sighed heavily. " Being like this is fun and all, but I can't rely on this form for everything, Twilight. I have a feeling the temple will require human ingenuity in addition to Goron might."

" What makes you think you'll need that body?"

" In Woodfall Temple, a lot of the puzzles required me to be a Deku Scrub while others needed my human form. I never really paid much attention to it until now, but I'm certain the next temple will feature challenges that need both human and Goron skills." I answered.

" Yes... That's a very good point you bring up, Sunset."

" If we go up to the temple without my sword, if we come across a problem that requires me to use it, we'd be stuck because it would still be at the Mountain Smithy waiting for me to collect it from Fancy Pants and Tirek." I said. That was quite the mouthful, yet it was enough for Her Highness to realize that going anywhere in Termina without a proper weapon would be tantamount to suicide. Sure, Gorons had their fists but they couldn't use them for everything.

" So, you want to pick it up?"

" It'd be for the best."

" You do realize that they probably haven't finished working on making it stronger, right? According to what Fancy Pants said, your sword wouldn't be finished until tomorrow morning, and right now we're still a couple of hours away from the sun coming up. Unless you can kill some time, we'll be stuck here for a while waiting." Twilight said.

That was the only problem with my plan. Because I had woken up in the middle of the night--Ganondorf's visitation in my dreams resulted in that--I had gone and completed my remaining tasks a lot sooner. Had I fallen back asleep and not leave the hot spring, I'd have still completed those errands upon waking up and visit the smithies to pick up my weapon without having to wait around like this.

Well, there was no point in dwelling on the past--ironic given how even now I struggle to move on from my own past. I had to wait until the sun came up before I could go inside and claim my re-forged sword--I was curious as to what it would look like.

Looking up at the cloudy sky, I tried to see if I could determine how much longer it was until sunrise. From what I could see, the sky was still dark--not so much as before when I exited the hot spring--so I'd say that was at least another two or three hours to go. Her Highness said I needed to kill some time, but there wasn't much I could do given how there was snow all around me. One idea involved rolling around for a while so that I could get adjusted to the intense speeds that came with it.

Another involved taking a closer look at the mask I received from Photo Finish after I gave her that rock sirloin. After pondering over it for a few moments, I decided to look at the mask as rolling around would waste my remaining magic power.

" Where are you going?" Twilight asked as I walked towards the Mountain Smithy.

" I'm not sitting out in the snow until morning, so why not sit on the porch of the smithies' place and take a look at that mask I got?"

" Isn't that the same as sitting out in the snow?"

" My butt will be sitting on firm wood instead of cold snow."

" Your logic doesn't make sense at all." Twilight said. Before she could say anything else, I had already reached the porch and had sat down. She shrugged and floated after me but not without mumbling to herself.

There was another reason why I wanted to sit on the porch instead of out on the snow. I never noticed until I had begun to walk over to the smithies, but the roof of the building hung over the porch giving it some protection to anyone who wanted to sit there. While it didn't prevent the cold from being an issue, having a roof above your head wasn't something to be taken for granted. The porch even had a lush carpet in front of the door most likely used by people to wipe their feet so as to not bring in any snow.

Either side of the door were potted plants that served as both decorations and something I could smash to acquire any rupees or ammunition--I was surprised that plants could thrive out here in such conditions.

Upon sitting down--I made a loud thud that did reverberate through the area due to the mountains echoing sound--I quickly realized that I wasn't able to access any of the masks I had collected apart from the Deku Mask. Twilight deduced that I could switch between forms by wearing the respective mask thus skipping my human form entirely. It didn't make sense at first but she said that it was a way to cut down on time by eliminating the middle man.

So, if I were to put on the Deku Mask right now, I'd switch to my Deku form without needing to become a human in the process. I supposed it was a useful technique to consider and perhaps one that was a design standpoint for this game, but the thought of wearing one mask on top of another like that felt both risky and ridiculous.

Switching between forms so quickly could result in me getting stuck in one form without a means of changing back--like I was when I was stuck as a Deku back at the start. It actually sounded like one of those speed techniques Rainbow Dash always talked about where gamers played through a game quickly by exploiting certain features to get through as fast as possible.

Pulling on the Goron Mask, I pulled it off changing back to normal in the process, flipped my head back--my hair flipped back as well--and put it away before taking out the new mask that I received. According to Photo Finish, this mask would let me conduct a group of frogs who could sing. I had definitely heard stranger things--Equestria had such things happening several times a week as Her Highness mentioned in her responses to my Friendship Reports--but perhaps it could be useful. No doubt that the mask looked really authentic right down to the very last detail. Whoever crafted it knew what they were doing.

" I wonder where those frogs could be?"

" I can't believe you just asked that, Sunset."

" What do you mean?"

" We've already encountered a few frogs on this journey. Remember the one in Woodfall Temple that was that Mad Gecko creature? How about the other one in the swamp during that cruise we took to the Deku Palace? And don't forget the one we found back in town hiding amongst the flowers." Twilight answered. My eyes opened wide with shock. How could I have forgotten all of that? I remembered seeing those frogs yet never paid much attention. Now their presence made sense. What was truly surprising was that Her Highness remembered in intricate detail as to where we encountered them. " I have a feeling there are a few more frogs out there."

" Even if we find them all, they won't come to the mountains because of how cold it is."

" Yes, that's true. If spring were to appear then so would they."

" Do you think conducting a bunch of frogs would wield any reward?"

" Maybe, but then you'd do it not to earn something in return, right?"

" I don't get to dictate who gives and who doesn't give me a reward. I just do what I can in order to help out anyone who needs it. It doesn't even matter if my own life gets put in danger so long as they are happy in the end." I answered. I then noticed Twilight mumbling to herself again and this time I made sure to call her out on it. " I know you're upset with me for being reckless and not wanting to go to the temple as you wanted."

" You just contradicted yourself there."

" While it may look like I'm ignoring you sometimes and wanting to follow my instincts, it's because I feel that my way works best compared to yours. I want to save this world and restore the world I call home back to normal, and I need your help, Twilight. I need you more than you can even begin to imagine. Yet, I must do things my way because otherwise you might think lesser of me for it." I said.

" Sunset... Is that you really feel?"

" Yes."

" Why didn't you say something sooner? You don't need me to scorn you for wanting to do what you think is best." Twilight said. She then opened her eyes wide upon realizing that she had also contradicted herself because of her mumbling a few moments ago. " I had no right complaining under my breath about you not following my advice. I'm reminded of what happened when Starlight Glimmer had her first friendship lesson with me. I learned that she needed space to figure out the problem on her own. That's the same with you, Sunset. I need to give you space to figure things out. I'm here to act as an advisor while you carry out the overall action."

" Wait a minute! You gave Starlight a friendship lesson?"

" She is my student after all just as much as you are."

" When did you find the time to do that?"

" Our current predicament started the day after I came back from the Crystal Empire after helping Starlight reunite with an old friend. There's much more to the story, but I'll tell you about it some other time when we have a better free moment than this." Twilight answered.

I knew of what Starlight had done according to what Her Highness told me. Two weeks after the Friendship Games ended, Her Highness came through the portal after finally receiving my messages, and revealed that Equestria's past had been altered due to Starlight using forbidden time magic. I may have done bad things such as stealing one of the Elements of Harmony, but what I did was nothing compared to what Starlight did--I doubted any villain ever considered rewriting history. Starlight becoming Twilight's student was also something I knew about given she couldn't stop talking about it at the time, but her receiving a friendship lesson was definitely something I didn't know.

What Her Highness said about when she was dragged into this video game was a parallel to what happened to everyone at Canterlot High. Two weeks after she appeared, we had the get-together between the two schools leading into the events that brought us up to this point.*(1)

Part of me blamed Rainbow for deciding to have video games showcased, but she didn't know that Ganondorf would appear. No one knew except for me. I always had a feeling deep down that he would return based on what he said after leaving me within an inch of my life--he said I was to be tormented further but not until a later point in time.

I tried to warn them but no one listened. How could they believe a video game character would appear before us and change everything? Sure, they believed in magic after having witnessed it for themselves during the Friendship Games, but not someone whose magic was beyond even that of Princess Celestia? Again, the past is over now and what happened has been done. All that can be done now is to change everything back to normal, and for me, endure more torment until Ganondorf had been satisfied.

That's when I thought about what Her Highness said about her trip to the Crystal Empire. It must have been something spectacular for her to not want to tell me the whole story, but I won't force her into telling me. She'll let me know when she's ready.

" Twilight?"

" What is it?"

" I'm starting to get cold now."

" Guess sitting on the porch doesn't really work that well in the snow, does it?"

" Your smugness becomes you."

" Sorry, but I couldn't help myself with that one. In any case, you should go inside the Mountain Smithy and wait it out until the sun comes up. I don't know how Fancy Pants will react to seeing you come before your sword has been re-forged, but staying out here will result in you freezing to death." Twilight said. Gorons were able to survive out in the cold far better than humans, yet I had to remain human until I got my sword back due to visiting the smithies as a human in the first place. So it was natural that I would get cold from being out here for so long.

Getting myself up from the porch and putting Don Gero's Mask away, I walked up to the door and placed my hand on the knob. Sounds of banging could be heard coming from the other side so I knew that they were still working on making my sword stronger than it was. Gulping, I opened the door and stepped inside to see Tirek was banging what appeared to be my sword glowing bright yellow. Each of his blows courtesy of the hammer he wielded connected with my sword with loud bangs, sparks flying all over the place when the different metals clashed with one another.

Fancy Pants was lying down on the couch much like before--I was starting to see how their operation truly worked--but was issuing commands to his fellow smithy every few minutes to which Tirek appeared to be following them. So far, neither of them knew that I was even there, yet that quickly disappeared when Tirek noticed me.

" Ugo-oh! Ugo! Ugoh!" Tirek said.

" Huh? Why did you stop all of a sudden, Gabora?" Fancy Pants asked as he sat upright on the couch. " You know that we've got to get that sword finished before that girl comes in a couple of hours to pick it up."

" Ugo! Ugoh! Ugo!"

" What? She's standing by the front door?" Fancy Pants turned his head and noticed me standing there--I pretended to act innocent but to no avail--and looked rather annoyed by my presence. I thought he was going to lose it but instead he seemed rather cival. " Huh? Why are you here so soon? Morning hasn't come yet! Look, I'm working on strengthening your sword. I'm busy, so don't bother me."

" Um... It looks like he's the one doing all the work." I said.

" Despite his hulking frame, Gabora is a master when it comes to forging weapons. He knows how to bring out the best in any weapon that gets treated by his hands, yet he lacks proper direction and chooses to do whatever. That's why I tell him exactly what needs to be done so that he doesn't make a mistake. You see kid, in this business, making a mistake is like asking to be killed by monsters. One slip up and you're finished!" Fancy Pants said.

" That's quite the system."

" It works well for both of us. Anyway, please come back in a couple of hours! Your sword will be ready by then!"

" Would it be okay if I just sat in that corner over there and watch you guys work? It's gotten much colder outside since I was last here, and the monsters have been prowling about looking for something to eat. I'll not speak unless you need me to say something." I said. What I said about the monsters wasn't entirely accurate--they weren't hunting for food but rather attacking to protect their territory, but hopefully Fancy Pants would believe me and allow me to stay until dawn.

" Normally, I wouldn't agree to such a request, but the sun will be up in a couple of hours, and I do agree with what you said about those problems outside. Okay! You can sit over there but don't get in the way. Your sword won't be as you want it if you bother us." Fancy Pants said. He turned his attention back to Tirek while I walked over to the corner and sat myself down. The wooden floor wasn't half-bad compared with the front porch, but then it was warmer in here than it was out there.

This arrangement also gave me a chance to see some good old fashioned smithing, something that has been lost in the modern era thanks to advanced methods. Tirek continued banging my sword with his hammer, each blow varying in power as though he were sculpting my sword rather than simply re-forging it. It actually looked really funny to see someone his size wielding such a massive weapon and striking a tiny sword. No doubt that this was a much different Tirek as opposed to the one I faced back in Hyrule. This one, despite having an obvious speech impediment, was a gentle giant who had an abusive supervisor.

I then looked up to see whether or not Twilight was watching the proceedings. She was watching Tirek do his work yet she had a much more serious look on her face as opposed to myself who felt calm and relaxed. I couldn't even begin to imagine what was going in the mind of Her Highness given her past with Tirek. I only knew what she had told me when she came back to the world I call home after becoming the Princess of Friendship. No doubt there was much more to what happened when he decided to make his presence known. I had often wondered what Tirek did that riled her up so much, but I knew that it wasn't my place to know.

It was something Her Highness had to deal with on her own, yet she couldn't allow it to consume her very thoughts. She needed to remember that the Tirek in Termina wasn't the same person that she fought back in Equestria. This version was sweet and gentle, one who didn't desire to conquer the world in the name of power.

For about the next hour, I watched in amazement at Tirek working on my sword while Fancy Pants gave him specific instructions. I almost fell asleep a couple of times due to how warm it was--sitting next to a hearth didn't help much either--yet I managed to regain focus especially when my sword was placed into the hearth for several seconds before being brought out to be worked on again. The only thing that I didn't like was the smell coming from the hearth. That thick smoke wafting around it did make it difficult to breathe, yet I suspected these two had long gotten themselves adjusted to such conditions.

" Ugoh! Ugo!" Tirek said, breaking the silence.

" Gabora is curious as to where you come from." Fancy Pants said.

" He is?" I asked.

" To be fair, I'm a little curious myself, kid. You wear that green outfit which looks like something you see from a forest, but you ain't one of those Deku Scrubs so what does that make you exactly?" Fancy Pants asked. I kept quiet in hopes he would eventually change the subject, but it seemed that persistence was a strong quality he possessed. " You don't need to say anything if you don't think either of us deserve to know. I was just trying to make conversation despite telling you not to get in the way."

" No, I'll tell you. It's just that it's a little bit complicated."

" How so?"

" You see... I'm not really from Termina. I... I come from a different world."

" Is that all? Ha! You didn't need to sound nervous about that, kid."

" Huh?"

" Zabora and I come from a kingdom that exists on the other side of the ocean. We came here to Termina in hopes of starting up a good business in these mountains when we heard that Gorons lived up here in their village. If you come from a different world and weren't from where we hail from, then you must have come from a lesser known kingdom. It happens around here quite often." Fancy Pants answered.

" You could say my kingdom isn't known in these parts." I said. I couldn't tell them that I originally came from a world filled with talking ponies. Despite some of the strange things that I've seen in Termina, they'd never believe that a kingdom of ponies exists out there. " I moved away due to falling out with my old mentor. I believed myself to be ready to become on equal footing with her yet my arrogance blinded me to the truth. I wasn't ready for such a blessing and it took someone special to tell it to me straight."

" Pretty harsh."

" I've never been back since."

" There are people out there who can't go back to where they came from due to their past. All you can do, kid, is just accept things and move on. No point in dwelling over things you couldn't control. Yep! All that does is make you miserable all over." Fancy Pants said.

" Ugo! Ugoh-oh! Ugo!" Tirek said.

" Gabora says what about that fairy of yours? Does it have a story to share?"

When she took notice of the fact that Tirek had directly mentioned her, Twilight floated off my hat and hovered slightly in front of my face. I thought she was going to let him have it over what happened between them in Equestria, but she approached the situation in a relaxed manner. I breathed a sigh of relief knowing she had kept her feelings under control, but it was too soon to celebrate. She could still lose it depending on what Tirek decides to say next.

" I come from the forest." Twilight answered.

" Oh? You're a female fairy?"

" Yes. Is that a problem?"

" Not at all."

" Much like Sunset, I come from a different world, yet where I come from, there is a beautiful forest filled with trees, woodland creatures, rivers, and much more all co-existing together in perfect harmony." Twilight said. I knew Her Highness had lied to Fancy Pants as she lived in Canterlot before moving to Ponyville, yet like me, she knew that neither of them would believe that we came from a world filled with talking ponies. " I lived a peaceful life until I chanced upon the Skull Kid."

" You mean that weird kid in the mask?"

" What!? You've seen her?" I asked.

" A few days ago, I saw some weird kid walk up the path to the temple those Gorons watch over wearing some kind of freaky mask. I don't know what compelled them to go up there given how treacherous that path is, but hey, it's their funeral! I doubt that kid survived so I wouldn't worry about it. Anyway, we've talked long enough. Your sword won't finish itself so sit back and relax while we do the finishing touches. " Fancy Pants answered. If only he knew as to the kind of power Starlight possessed. She wouldn't have succumbed to the snow nor would she have been felled by any monsters. I thought about telling him but the chances of him believing me were slim to none.

Over the next hour, Twilight and I watched the two smithies do their work, whispering to ourselves as to what Fancy Pants said about Starlight. We already knew she had been here according to what others had said, but now we had absolute confirmation that she had been here. No doubt she was behind the harsh winter that had gripped the mountains, but the question now was why did she do it?

Unfortunately, Her Highness had no insight into Starlight's behaviour aside from what she remembered using Tatl's memories. In Termina, Starlight was someone who loved to play pranks because she wanted to get back against a lot of people who had wronged her in some way. I could enjoy pranks like the next person so long as no malicious intent occurred--I still suffered from guilt over how I manipulated everyone at Canterlot High for my own benefit--yet it seemed being malicious was what Starlight had in mind. As I continued to think about why she desired to bring this world to ruin, my mind lost complete track of time.

Dawn of the Second Day: 48 Hours Remain.

The clock that was hanging on the wall above my head rang twice to indicate that the next day was upon us. I didn't feel bad about wasting the remainder of the first day given all that I had accomplished, yet part of me wished that I had gone to the temple sooner instead of now. Oh well. I wanted to be safe rather than sorry when it comes to my protection.

" Ugo! Ugoh!" Tirek said.

" I'm amazed you didn't fall asleep."

" I almost did a few times." I said.

" Well, you needn't anymore, kid! Gabora just needs to make one or two more whacks and your sword will be done." Fancy Pants. He turned towards Tirek, nodded to let him know that he could proceed, and the latter smacked his hammer on my sword before placing it on the desk. " Finished! What impeccable timing Gabora! We said that we'd get her sword done by morning, and we did despite finishing three minutes after the fact."

" Ugo-oh!" Tirek said.

" You've waited long enough, so here is your sword nice and re-forged." Fancy Pants said. I got up and walked over to the desk where I saw a sword that was completely different from the one I dropped off the other night. " That expression on your face was what I expected to see from you, kid. No doubt that this was some of the best work Gabora and I have done in a very long time. It paid to be given such a unique sword."

" It looks very unusual." I said. My sword was curved near the tip with the sheen telling me that it was much sharper than before. I didn't get why there was a small piece of blade sticking out next to the main part, but overall it looked far superior to what I had. " I'm not doubting your abilities as smithies, but it does look different from a typical sword."

" That's the beauty of the Mountain Smithy. We take our time to make a good point! Anyway, what you have there is the Razor Sword. It's twice as strong as your old sword, so it should take care of any monster in short order. Go ahead and pick it up, kid, so you can feel it for yourself." Fancy Pants said.

His gesture told me that it was safe to grab my sword, so I walked over to the desk making sure to keep my eye on Twilight just in case she decided to give Tirek a piece of her mind by flitting about his head. She held her ground enabling me to pick up my sword without any problems. The grip was the same as before yet I could sense a great power lurking within waiting to be unleashed. I began to swing it around to get a better feel for it and I liked what I felt. My sword had a slightly longer range that should make fighting much easier, yet somehow I felt it could've had just a bit more reach.

Of course, I had no intention of making too many complaints just in case he got offended.

" Not bad at all. I wish it had a slightly longer reach, but I can tell this will make getting to the temple a much easier task." I said.

" You plan on going up there?"

" It's something I have to do."

" Can't say I understand why anyone would go up that path, but hey, it's your life that will be on the line."

" I'm thankful to you two for making my sword stronger, so I think I'll excuse myself now."

" Hold on! There are some things you need to know about using your Razor Sword!" Fancy Pants shouted. I had just reached the door and was about to grab the knob when he said that, prompting me to turn around and walk back over. " I should've mentioned this before you paid. That's what happens when I get ahead of myself. You must keep in mind that after you use your re-forged sword one hundred times, it will lose its edge and it'll be back to its original sharpness."

" What!?" I exclaimed. I couldn't believe it! My sword could only stay in its current form for one hundred times!? If I had known that a lot sooner, I wouldn't have wasted all of my money on something that turned out to be just a temporary solution. The anger pulsating through my veins was enough to want me to throttle Fancy Pants endlessly, but I quickly performed the breathing exercise that Twilight showed me to calm myself down and approach things more clearly. " I must admit that I am very disappointed."

" It's my fault for not telling you sooner."

" Well, I've got this sword now so I might as well get my money's worth out of it." I said. I had a feeling that going back to the beginning of the seventy-two hour cycle would also cause my sword to go back to its original state. Now I really felt disappointed over the amount of rupees spent.

" Actually, it may be possible for your sword to become even stronger."

" You're not pulling my leg are you?"

" If I did, I wouldn't have many customers." Fancy Pants answered. He then started laughing although I didn't find it at all amusing. " Ahem! Let me tell you a secret. I don't usually tell anyone about this, but if you bring me some gold dust, I can forge you the strongest of swords. It'll never lose its edge no matter how many times it gets used."

" Gold dust?"

" It's a material that can be used to forge any weapon into the strongest it could possibly be."

" Where can I find some?"

" Unfortunately, that's the hard part. You see, gold dust is a very scarce material especially around these parts. In fact, only the Gorons would know where to find some. When it comes to rare materials, they know where to find them." Fancy Pants answered. I should have known the Gorons would know something about gold dust. The temptation of wanting my sword even stronger was evident in my heart, but perhaps there was no need to strive for it.

" Ugoh-ugo! Ugo-ugo! Ugo!" Tirek said.

" Are you sure about that?"

" Ugo! Ugo-ugoh!"

" For once, you might be onto something."

" Ugoh!"

" Gabora says gold dust is the prize for winning the Patriarch's Race that's held by the Gorons every spring. Well, if it were spring right now, you could easily ask one of them to race on your behalf. If they agree then you can get some gold dust and bring it back here." Fancy Pants said.

" Patriarch's Race?" I asked.

" It's a race that determines who amongst the Gorons will succeed the current patriarch. From what I've heard from them, it's a gruelling track where everyone throw their bodies on the line in order to cross the finish first. Unless you happen to have a strong Goron body, you wouldn't last a minute against those who are hungry to be the next leader. The gold dust doesn't mean all that much apart from bragging rights." Fancy Pants answered.

" Ugo-ugo! Ugoh!" Tirek said.

" That's right Gabora. I'm surprised you remembered. There was one Goron who was a shoe-in to become the next leader. Her name was Darmani. She was well known in these lands as the protector of her people despite having an emotionless expression. She may have been stoic but that's what made her so interesting. A shame that she passed away a while ago due to falling to her death. No doubt she would've won some gold dust for you in a heartbeat." Fancy Pants said.

Little did he realize that Maud was alive and well or rather Darmani herself was through me by wearing the Goron Mask. He also unintentionally gave me the exact information I needed in order to upgrade my sword. I needed to enter this Patriarch's Race and win! To do that, first I needed to solve the mystery of what was happening up at the temple and bring forth spring. Once that's done, the race will take place shortly afterwards. My only concern was having to do so much rolling despite not feeling sick at all whenever I do it as a Goron.

Sure it was fun but I wasn't quite able to roll for an extended period of time. If I could roll around for at least a minute or two then I'd be able to win the race for sure. Part of me then felt bad because Maud would've loved to compete in something that meant so much to her.

Thanking both Fancy Pants and Tirek for everything they did--I was still slightly annoyed that my sword wasn't permanent--I walked back to the door, opened it, and stepped outside where the temperature was slightly warmer than it was before. The day had just begun and there was a lot that needed to be done before time ran out.

I walked over to where the Owl Statue I activated was because the pathway next to it was where I had to go to reach the temple. It was still snowing but not as strong as it was the other day which would make my trek a little more safer. A sign nearby told me something that no one had mentioned before. Giant snowballs rolled through the pathway and only those who possessed a strong enough body could get past them with little effort.

" Guess only a Goron can reach the temple."

" They can withstand something like a giant snowball." Twilight said.

" And Starlight?"

" That mask she wears gives her unnatural powers allowing her to do just about anything she wants."

" Do you know why she's playing these twisted pranks?"

" Tatl's memories about Starlight's character in this world are vague, so all I can remember is that it had something to do with her friends abandoning her. She took it really bad and decided to play pranks as a means of letting off the pent-up rage she had inside of her heart." Twilight answered. I felt bad for Starlight having to go through something like that. I knew what it was like having losing friends through being abandoned.

I still have nightmares about what happened when the crusaders created Anon-A-Miss and made it look like I was the one revealing secrets. I always took friendship for granted back then when it first became known to me, but now I cherish it every chance I can get. If not for my strong resolve in wanting to find out the truth, my family would've left me to rot on my own for the rest of my life. No... That's something Starlight must never experience despite what she had done both here and Equestria. While her situation here was different than what she had in reality, losing friends was never a pleasant thing.

The looming question was... who were her friends in this world?

It was something that would require time to figure out the answer, but for now I had to focus on what needed to be done. With my sword safely back in its scabbard, I began walking up the path towards the temple. No sooner had I started did I understand why only Gorons could survive the path. The sign wasn't kidding about those giant snowballs and one rolled down towards me, running me over without a second thought.

" Mmph!" I said, the front side of my body buried in the snow.

" Are you alright, Sunset?"

" Mmph!" I answered. I lifted myself out of the snow and brushed off any lose bits off of my tunic. " That certainly wasn't pleasant by any means."

" Looks like you'll need to become a Goron if you want to get through this path."

" Guess it's time to change forms again." I said, taking out the Goron Mask from my pocket. I placed it on my face and began stumbling about as the magic started its usual means of changing my shape. I didn't understand why this mask made me stumble about while the Deku Mask resulted in convulsions. I wasn't looking forward to what would happen when I wear the next mask--there was going to be a third one as I doubted this game would only provide two alternate forms.

After stumbling about for a few moments and falling flat on my face at least twice, I let out a huge scream--the mask still looked horrifying at that point--and transformed into Darmani. Despite what I go through during the transition, I feel completely fine upon finishing as though nothing happened to me.

Walking further up the path whilst trudging through the snow--it got deeper as I progressed further--I came to a stop due to a large gap where there was nothing but a bottomless chasm that meant certain death were I to plunge into it. A ramp in front of me indicated that rolling over the gap was the aim here as the pathway continued onward on the other side. As I stared longingly at what I had to cross over, giant snowballs rolled down and into the chasm where they disappeared into the abyss below although a couple did manage to leap over the gap and continued rolling down the path.

" Now we know why only Gorons can reach the temple." Twilight said as she observed the problem.

" I'll have to roll off this ramp to make it across."

" You'll find to replenish your magic power, Sunset. From what I observed as I followed behind your rolling earlier, magic power not only produces those spikes but also gives you speed. If you don't have the necessary speed, you'll plunge into the chasm below." Twilight said.

" My magic power is pretty low right now."

" Then you need to restore it."

" How?"

" Those tiny mounds of snow contained magic jars, rupees, and the like, so finding some of them would be helpful." Twilight then looked around to see if there were any mounds but sadly there were none to be found. She then noticed a giant snowball having made it across the gap and began putting two and two together. " Maybe you just need to smash something a little bigger. Let's wait around for the next one to come rolling by and then use your fists to smash it to pieces." I didn't know what Her Highness was planning, but I wasn't about to start questioning her.

A few moments later, a second snowball crossed the gap and Twilight urged me to smash it before it rolled away. I ran over just as it reached my location and used my fist to destroy it revealing a large magic jar that fell onto the ground with a soft thud. I picked it up and I could feel my magic power coming back to me.

" I got some magic back!" I said with excitement.

" My theory turned out to be correct. I love it when I turn out to be right about something. If you plow through those snowballs while rolling, they should release magic jars that will allow you to keep going. I'm not sure how far we have to go to reach the temple, but will be a lot easier so long as you keep picking up magic jars." Twilight said.

" I'll need a running start."

" Wait until the next snowball rolls by before you start rolling. If you don't have your spikes out, you'll get pushed aside by a snowball. I don't think I need to tell you what would happen if you were pushed aside whilst in the air." Twilight said. No, she didn't need to say anything. I had been through enough life or death experiences on my previous journey to know that even something as innocent as snow could cause me to die if I wasn't careful.

Once the next snowball rolled on by, I curled up into a ball and began rolling forward, the snow giving me enough momentum to produce my spikes without having to roll too great a distance. As soon as my body produced its spikes, I picked up speed, made sure that I was in a straight line, and went off the ramp and over the gap before landing on the other side--the impact left behind a small crater--before continuing on. More giant snowballs could be seen rolling down the path towards me, but I knew that I couldn't slow down, so I rolled through them, each one crumbled to pieces and left behind a magic jar for me to collect.

Along the way, there was an island that was situated in the middle of a large abyss to my right. It didn't catch my attention at first, but then I noticed that a Piece of Heart was sitting there as though it were calling for me to come and get it. I thought about stopping and letting Twilight know what I saw, but I decided to wait until later once I had gotten through this nature-filled obstacle course.

I crossed two more gaps with ease making sure to bowl over any snowballs that came my way, but then the path started to get rather rickety what with bumps here and there designed to make it hard for me to maintain my speed. Eventually, it proved too much and I wound bouncing off a bump and crashing into a large wad of snow that had been pushed to the side by someone or something.

It took several seconds for me to come around, shake my head to get rid of the snow that was on my face, and to see how much further I had left. I could see another gap down the path but beyond that was nothing but a foggy haze courtesy of how high up we were. More and more snowballs continued rolling down the path with some seemingly dropping from above making things even more complicated. With so many falling all over the place, I needed to wait for just the right chance to make my move and get over the gap--it took almost ten minutes before a break between the falling snowballs finally happened.

Knowing I had mere seconds before the snowballs resumed, I curled back up into a ball, rolled forward getting momentum, produced my spikes and went sailing over the gap only to get blindsided by a snowball that dropped down from above. Fortunately, the impact from colliding with the snowball pushed me towards a nearby tree.

" That was too close!" I said. " I almost got knocked into the chasm."

" It seems the closer we get to the temple, the more snowballs roll down the path."

" At least there are no more gaps left."

" For that we should be thankful, but don't let your guard down yet, Sunset. Remember that Maud fell to her death due to an unseen wind blowing her into the chasm when she tried crossing a rather narrow walkway." Twilight said.

" I'm glad you brought that up."

" You are?" Twilight asked looking confused.

" I've been curious over what caused that wind in the first place. We've experienced some harsh wind conditions when I climbed up that one mountain where Maud's grave was, but nothing like what she described when she told us what happened when she arrived at the temple's location." I answered.

" It could've been a freak storm."

" No, I don't think so. Twilight, would you say Starlight had something to do with Maud's death?"

" I know she caused this cold snap but to specifically target the one hope that the Goron's had?" Twilight paused for a moment allowing it all to sink in. " You make a good point and one we need to confirm."

" Maud was their hero and paid the price for Starlight's behaviour."

Her Highness nodded in favour of my statement. Maud came up here to save her people yet was killed because she threatened Starlight's fun or was just an unfortunate victim of circumstance--something I'm sure Twilight assumes would be a possibility. When someone is playing pranks, they get really annoyed when anyone attempts to put a stop to it. Could that be why Fluttershy was kidnapped in the first place? She and the monkey went off to Woodfall Temple to find out what was causing the poison, and she was kidnapped while the monkey was blamed for it.

I had underestimated the lengths Starlight was going to just to have fun. If Pinkie Pie were herself and not Tingle, she would give Starlight a real talking to about what it meant to have fun without putting anyone's life in danger.

Looking back at the path, I could tell that there was no going back--I wasn't planning on going back anyway--as there were no ramps that would allow me to go back down. The only way was forward so I walked towards the foggy haze that prevented me from seeing what lied ahead. Once I was within the haze, I had to place my hand in front of my eyes to prevent the snow from blinding me, and see where I was going. I had to give credit to Maud again as she had to endure this as well. Whoever built the temple all the way up here knew that it could be reached only by Gorons who were used to such conditions.

After what felt like forever--it felt even longer to me--the haze finally let up and I could see clearly once again. That's when my eyes opened wide and my jaw dropped upon seeing the beauty that lay ahead. The path opened up to a massive clearing that comprised entirely of an endless abyss with a large structure on the far end of a narrow walkway that looked like only one person could walk across at a time. The structure was made of snow and ice with a path that went up and around to the top where I could barely see a cave entrance. A second entrance existed at the base which made me wonder why a higher up entrance was even needed.

Giant snowballs could be seen rolling down the pathway that up to the higher cave entrance and down the path that lead up to the structure. On a second glance, it wasn't really much of a structure as it was a precarious plateau that had been built on top of a narrow column made of solid ice.

No doubt that this had always been here long before the Gorons first settled in these mountains, so why did they decide to take it upon themselves to look after it? Perhaps the most important thing was the dark aura coming from the top, a sign that an evil presence lurked within the temple. That's when another thought came to mind. We hadn't seen any traces of the local Great Fairy's Fountain, so perhaps one of those two entrances lead to it.

It would make sense since in Woodfall, the previous fountain was practically next to Woodfall Temple. I also had to assume that Adagio around here had been shattered to pieces courtesy of Starlight. That meant seeking her help was out of the question.

Twilight bopped me on the head, asking me to look to my left. I did so and sure enough there was an Owl Statue slightly buried in the snow. I hadn't really used them all that much despite the insistence from Flash Sentry that they would be useful on this adventure.

" I'm guessing that this was put here to help you get back up here without having to take that path."

" Do you suppose I could just punch it with my fists to activate it?"

" Not a chance, Sunset. The statues need to be struck with a sword wielded by the one chosen by fate to save this world. While it does mean having to switch back to a human for just a few moments, it's best to activate it now just in case you need to go somewhere else before entering the temple." Twilight answered.

" Why did Flash have to make them like that?"

" No point in complaining about it." Twilight answered. I knew she was right thus making my statement pointless. Deep down, I had a feeling that I would need to come back here in a hurry, so activating the statue would be in my best interest.

I grabbed my face and pulled off the Goron Mask changing back into a human, and from there I drew out the Razor Sword where I realized something: I was going to waste one of the one hundred uses it had before going back to its original state on an inanimate object. I was still slightly bitter about it only being a temporary upgrade to my Kokiri Sword. If I had gold dust, it could be re-forged again into the perfect weapon according to Fancy Pants. Swinging my sword, making sure not to accidentally let go of it it struck the side of the statue causing its wings to spread out informing me that it could now be used as a warp point.

With that done, I picked up the Goron Mask I dropped on the ground, I walked towards the middle of the path, stomped my feet down into the thick snow--I didn't want to stumble into the chasm during the transition--before putting it on my face. As I expected, my body began to stumble but didn't go anywhere thanks to burying myself up to my knees. From the perspective of Twilight, it looked like I was throwing a temper tantrum, but she knew why I dug my feet into the snow. Several moments later, I let out a scream signalling my transformation had finished, but then something else happened.

The moment I became Darmani, a powerful gust of wind came out of nowhere and I struggled to keep myself from falling over.

" Where did that come from?" I asked as I lifted my feet out from the snow.

" It looked like the wind was coming from the direction of what I assume is the temple over there."

" Do you think this is what caused Maud to die?"

" I've no doubt about that. When you think about it, Sunset, she didn't stand a chance when the wind came out of nowhere. Had Maud been better prepared, she would have made it across and saved her people from freezing to death." Twilight answered. The thought of seeing Maud being blown into the chasm below sent a chill down my spine. I hoped I wouldn't end up in the same position with my life being taken from me due to an unfortunate circumstance.

Her Highness noticed that I was having second thoughts and proceeded to give me some ideal comfort. " Don't allow this strange wind to scare you, Sunset. Maud is counting on you to finish what she started. You can't let both her down and the entire Goron tribe."

" What if we can't get past this wind, Twilight?"

" It's just a natural wind that blows about here."

" How can you be sure of that?" I asked. At that moment, another powerful gust of wind started to blow, pushing me back several inches before stopping. " Hmmm... It looks like the wind has a limited amount of reach given how far it pushed me."

" Really? That's very strange."

" I know wind is supposed to be unrestrained."

" So why does this one act the way it does?" Twilight asked. Before she could finish her thought, the wind gusted again, pushing her back so much that she struggled to regain her balance when it died down. " Sunset? Could you wait here for just a few moments? There's something I need to confirm." Her Highness began floating in the direction of the walkway only to be pushed back again when the wind gusted. It soon became apparent that the wind did this every twenty seconds or so, yet it didn't deter Twilight from wanting to see what had gotten her curiosity ablaze.

Every time she tried to get close to the temple, the wind pushed her back, yet she continued repeating her assault until she finally dropped to the ground in exhaustion. All I did during this moment of hers was watch as she kept on getting blasted by the strong gusts that took Maud's life.

" Had enough, Twilight?" I asked, picking Her Highness up in my cupped hands.

" That wind isn't natural."

" I think we already established that."

" No, I mean it's not supposed to be here. When I was getting pushed back, I sensed that it was coming from a single direction. Natural wind blows in whatever direction it feels like so something or someone is behind the wind that's preventing us from continuing." Twilight said.

" I don't see anything out there." I said raising my hand above my eyes to see if I could spot something in the distance.

" I'm beginning to understand what caused Maud to fall to her death." Twilight said, her clenched fist covering her hand. " Whatever is behind the wind can't be seen by the naked eye so Maud wasn't able to see anything." The wind then blasted out from where it was coming from preventing me from hearing what Her Highness said next. When she finished, she asked if I knew what to do, yet I didn't answer prompting her to slap her forehead. " I thought you knew before I said anything but I guess I was wrong."

" Did you say something? I couldn't hear you over the wind."

" Oh... Ahem! If you use the Lens of Truth, we might be able to see what is causing that wind." Twilight said. I had plenty of magic power thanks to plowing through those snowballs on the way up here, so I had no problem consuming a little using the lens. I took it out from behind my back, raised it up to my eye, and looked through it. I was surprised at first at what I saw but then I should've expected it would be him. Her Highness was confused by my expression and asked to look through the lens herself, so I obliged by lowering it down to my shoulder so she could look. When she stared into the lens, the reaction she made in response was priceless.

" Sweet Celestia! What in the wide world of Equestria is that!? It looks like that one pony who has tiny wings and huge muscles."

" That would be Bulk Biceps, yes." I said calmly.

" How could anyone get that big!? It defies logic! It defies science! It defies everything!"

" Are you done?"

" I've got one more in me... This can't be real!" I guessed that giant humans weren't something Her Highness believed was possible--in Equestria there were several types of creatures who were just as big as Bulk Biceps--yet there he was in all his glory.

Bulk Biceps looked similar to the way he did during my previous adventure, yet the obvious Goron features were present this time around as opposed to him being purely human like the other Gorons were in Hyrule. He wore a ragged shirt along with two shoulder plates that looked like they could fall off at any moment. Yet, it was his expression that struck me as truly being different. There was no joy or anything in how he stared down at us. It's as though his only purpose was to ensure that we didn't reach the temple.

" WHO GOES THERE?" Bulk Biceps asked in a booming voice.

" Should I respond?" I asked.

" I think you should unless you want him to flatten you." Twilight answered.

" WHO GOES THERE? I WON'T REPEAT MYSELF!" Bulk Biceps said.

" He's not going to flatten me, Twilight. He's a very gentle person despite having huge muscles." I said. Looking at him with his current demeanour, perhaps Her Highness wasn't as far off from the truth as I thought. " Hello? Can you hear me from over there?" I called out.

" I CAN HEAR YOU AND CAN SEE YOU FROM WHERE I SIT! YOU SEEM FAMILIAR TO ME AS THOUGH I KNOW YOU FROM SOMEWHERE, BUT THAT DOESN'T MATTER AS NO ONE MAY PASS BY ME." Bulk Biceps answered.

" I am Darmani!"

" WHAT!? DARMANI!? HOW CAN THIS BE?"

" You look like you've seen a ghost or something."

" I SAW YOU HERE BEFORE WHEN YOU ATTEMPTED TO ENTER THE TEMPLE, YET I BLEW YOU INTO THE CHASM BELOW BECAUSE YOU WERE DEEMED A THREAT TO THIS PLACE. HOW IS IT YOU STAND BEFORE ME ONCE AGAIN?" Bulk Biceps asked.

" Death couldn't stop me from coming here."

" YOU ARE AS STRONG AS EVER!"

" Please! You must allow me to go into the temple. Our people will surely freeze to death if the weather continues to worsen."

" NO ONE MAY ENTER!"

" Are you serious!? Don't you care about our fellow Gorons?"

" THE GORON ELDER TOLD ME THAT NO ONE MUST BE ALLOWED TO ENTER THE TEMPLE UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. I AM SORRY BUT YOU MAY NOT ENTER EVEN IF IT IS FOR A VERY GOOD CAUSE." Bulk Biceps answered.

" Then I've no choice but to make you move."

" YOU MAY BE THE STRONGEST AND BRAVEST AMONGST OUR PEOPLE, DARMANI, BUT THAT STRENGTH ALONE PALES IN COMPARISON TO WHAT I AM CAPABLE OF DOING. IF YOU TRY TO FIGHT ME THEN YOU WILL DIE! NO, I WILL NOT FIGHT AGAINST ONE AS GREAT AS YOU. THAT WOULD MERELY BE DEMEANING TO THE GREAT DARMANI. I SHALL BLOW YOU AWAY LIKE BEFORE AND PERHAPS THIS TIME IT WILL BE PERMANENT!" Bulk Biceps said. He began to exale a powerful gust of wind from his gaping mouth, and it was clear that he was the one who killed Maud.

Yet that didn't make sense at all. Why would Bulk Biceps kill the one person who was loved by her people? Unless... He didn't know what he was doing. Had he been placed under some kind of enchantment that made him exhale wind at anyone who came close to the temple? It certainly was possible given Starlight did come up here according to Fancy Pants, so perhaps she used her magic on Bulk to ensure that the problems of Snowhead would continue on until the Gorons were destroyed.

It had gone far beyond being a simple prank. What Starlight was doing was beyond foul and needed to be stopped--I have a few choice words for her when I finally see her again on top of the Clock Tower--before innocent lives were lost.

" We need to get him out of the way."

" You don't have the strength to move someone that big, but perhaps you could make use of that song you learned." Twilight said.

" The Goron Lullaby, right?"

" Yes. No Goron can resist its magical properties so if you were to play it, Bulk Biceps is sure to fall asleep and move out of the way. I do suggest you get a little bit closer as you need those drums to be able to reach his ears." Twilight answered.

Considering how fast and furious he was exhaling wind from his mouth, getting close enough to Bulk Biceps would be slightly challenging. Since there wasn't any other option, I turned off the Lens of Truth, walked several paces forward, my eyes covered so as to not be blinded by the strong gusts pounding me. When I felt I was close enough, I took out my drums and planted my feet into the snow so as to not get blown away. I needed a few moments to recall how the lullaby went and in the meantime, Bulk Biceps continued his relentless assault. I was actually surprised that he could keep it up without exhausting himself.

Once I remembered how it went, I played the Goron Lullaby, and he immediately appeared, the magic that made him invisible wearing off in the process. If I had played that song with any other instrument, I doubted Bulk Biceps would've been able to hear it. Only something as loud as drums would've reached such a grand distance.

" HUH? WHAT WAS THAT STRANGE SONG YOU JUST PLAYED?" Bulk Biceps asked.

" That was the Goron Lullaby, courtesy of the Elder and his son." I answered.

" I... I REMEMBER HEARING THAT A LONG TIME AGO BACK WHEN I WAS YOUNGER. THE ELDER PLAYED IT TO EVERYONE AS A LULLABY BECAUSE HE CARED SO MUCH ABOUT OUR WELL-BEING. WHENEVER I HEARD IT, I WOULD DRIFT OFF TO SLEEP IN AN INSTANT." Bulk Biceps said.

" How do you feel right now?"

" SLEEPY... I FEEL VERY... SLEEPY AS THOUGH... I... I WANT TO GO... TO... SLEEP..." Bulk Biceps began struggling to keep his eyes open but it was no use. The power of the lullaby was too much for him to resist. It looked like he was crying from my perspective or at least trying to, but I knew he was mere moments from falling asleep. It then occurred to me that he could wind up falling into the chasm in the same manner as Maud had done. I tried calling out in hopes of getting him to move, but Bulk Biceps was on the verge of collapse. " SLEEP... I MUST... SLEEP... G... G... G..." He then curled up into a ball and began snoring, the noise echoed throughout the area.

As I watched, he then tipped to the side and plunged into the chasm below landing with a loud thud that caused a slight tremor. The way forward was now open but it came at a terrible price in the form of Bulk Biceps falling down to his death.

" Are you alright?" Twilight asked.

" I can't believe I just killed him."

" No, I doubt that the fall ended his life."

" You think so?"

" When Maud fell into the chasm, she perished because of how small she was. Bulk Biceps is much larger than she was, so if anything he survived the plunge and is probably sleeping it off down below." Twilight answered. I wasn't so sure if he had survived and Her Highness knew it took a heavy toll on my mind. " I'll tell you what, Sunset. Once we're done in the temple, we'll come back here and see if he's still okay. Either way, when we go back to the beginning of the seventy-two hours, he'll be alive regardless." While that did sound a little better, she could've said it in a different manner.

In any case, the path was clear and I initially consider rolling across the narrow walkway. But then my mind told me that doing so would likely cause me to plunge into the chasm and end up just like Maud and Bulk Biceps. Walking was a much better decision as it meant being cautious especially when everything was narrow.

I started to walk across the walkway, smashing snowballs with my fists whenever one happened to be in my path. It was slow progress given how I didn't want to fall nor get hit by any snowballs, but eventually I reached the other side. A small slope prevented me from going further so I curled up into a ball and rolled up before uncurling myself. The cave entrance at the base of the temple was slightly to my right with the path I needed to take to my left. While I had the urge to enter the temple, a voice in my head told me to ignore it and go inside the other cave.

Looking at Twilight, she began floating towards the cave. That was all the incentive I needed to go over there and check it out for myself. Aside from the occasional snowball rolling by, the cave wasn't being guarded by any monsters--a huge relief on my part. I walked inside where everything suddenly turned dark but soon became bright again when the beauteous majesty of the Great Fairy's Fountain appeared before me.

" Are those Stray Fairies?"

" Starlight must have shattered this version of Adagio to pieces like the previous ones."

" Then there's nothing more we can gain here."

" If we want her to help us, we need to find the Stray Fairies inside of the temple and bring them back here." Twilight said. The fairies were pink in colour as opposed to orange and green as seen in the previous fountains, so at least we knew what colour to look out for. " You could walk over to see what they have to say, but I think they will repeat the same message in that they want you to hear their plea."

" I wonder what kind of power they will grant?"

" The first Great Fairy gave you both magic and a mask while the second extended your use of magic, so I'm going to take a guess and say that this next Adagio will give you something related to magic." Twilight answered.

" Guess we should leave then, huh?"

" Like you said, there's nothing more we can gain here." Twilight answered. A sense of dread was then shared between us. Three Great Fairies had been shattered to pieces no thanks to Starlight's magic, but what of the remaining Great Fairies who live in the other regions? Had they suffered the same fate and preventing them from providing aid? It was something we couldn't ignore. I turned around and was just about to leave when several voices began speaking out behind my back.

" Oh, kind, young one! Please hear our plea! Please save the fairies trapped in Snowhead Temple. Find the fairies who match our color and bring them back to us!"

" Not very subtle are they?" I asked.

" At least they went and said it so you know you need to help them get themselves back together."

With the words of the Stray Fairies hewn into my mind, I walked outside and back out into the snow where I was immediately beset by three White Wolfos. They weren't there before when we went inside so had they chosen to hide it out in the snow until I returned? In any case, I had to get past them if I wanted to enter the temple. I thought about changing back to a human and use the Razor Sword, but Twilight suggested they could be taken care of by simply using my fists. Despite being a lot slower, my fists were generally stronger than my sword according to Her Highness. I never questioned her judgment but maybe she was wrong this time?

I had no time to think further on the subject. Each of the White Wolfos ran circles around me in an attempt to strike me in places I couldn't defend, but then one decided to break from the ranks and lunged at me. I attempted to punch it but it quickly leapt back before it resumed its running stance. Another one then decided to attack and when I tried punching it, the same happened where it leapt back and continued running. This kept going for about a minute resulting in me getting exhausted, and that's when they were able to score some hits on me by striking me in the back or on my sides.

The first White Wolfos eventually decided to leap over me in an attempt to see if it could strike me in the stomach--I had no idea they could do that. When it leapt over and landed, my body decided to take matters into its own hands. I swung my fist, hitting it in the snout, causing it to disappear by bursting into flames--this was something that still bothered me whenever I defeated a monster. My first tingled a bit because of not being used to using them for fighting, but the other two realized that I posed a threat to them. Rather than continue on, they chose to run away thinking that I was too much for them.

When they were out of sight, I looked down at my tingling fist--it had since stopped doing that. Now I truly understood the power that Gorons possessed. Their physical strength allowed them to fight using their bodies and not worrying about getting beaten up. They were durable to the point where their bodies could recover from even the most severe injuries--unless it was a death blow--but this came at the cost of speed and being able to react to situations quickly.

" I told you that getting my sword was a good idea."

" Yes, but you defeated that White Wolfos so easily despite some trouble. Perhaps you should consider remaining as a Goron indefinitely because those fists of yours are more powerful than a sword." Twilight said.

" Twilight, you saw how slow I moved. I couldn't keep up with their speed resulting in me getting scratched by their claws. Having all that power means nothing if I can't react fast enough to prevent serious injury. Granted, this body takes hits better than my human body, but the point is that this form is only useful when fighting slow opponents. For faster opponents, using more traditional means will work." I said.

" Okay, you've proven your point."

" I'll still use this body as I've got a feeling I'll be needing it to handle things that are too heavy for a human."

Now that the threat of the White Wolfos had passed, I had to walk up the pathway that lead to the upper cave entrance. My first instinct was to roll up there but Twilight quickly dismissed it by saying I could easily roll off and into the chasm below.

Since that was the case, I went with the option of simply walking up there. It wasn't a bad little trek mind you apart from the occasional giant snowball that dropped down from above or came rolling at me. Whenever one got too close, I smashed it to pieces using my fist, picking up some magic jars, and generally taking it slowly. It soon became apparent that walking up the path resulted in the oxygen levels changing slightly, causing my head to start feeling a little woozy. I shook it off because I knew I had to keep going as the Gorons were depending on me to save them.

After about five minutes of walking, smashing snowballs, and getting adjusted to the oxygen, Twilight and I finally reached the entrance to the temple. It looked just like an ordinary cave entrance but we both knew there were all sorts of dangers lurking within.

" Ready to go inside Snowhead Temple, Sunset?"

" Is that what this place is called?"

" Granted, most of the characters we've talked to referred to it as just 'temple', but I recalled a couple refer to it as Snowhead Temple. This place won't be as easy as the previous dungeon, so I suggest you find a map so that we can keep track of where we've been." Twilight answered.

" Don't forget I'll need a compass, Boss Key, and whatever weapon is hidden inside."

" Those too."

" Let's get this started." I said. I walked into the cave entrance--a cool breeze brushed against my face indicating that it was even colder inside compared to the snowy landscape that dominated the region--and soon came upon an impressive sight. There were two ice structures that resembled hands trying to reach up and touch the ceiling appeared on either side of me in this first room. Was it some kind of sign? A warning? Or perhaps a bizarre greeting? In any case, it looked eerie considering.

" There's that same raised groove we saw before in the previous temple with that Majora's Mask that Starlight wears imprinted on it." I said, noticing the groove in-between the two ice structures.

" I still don't understand the purpose behind it."

" It must do something as why else have it here at the start?"

" Good question and one I don't have an answer to."

Upon looking at the remainder of the room, nothing really stood out apart from a block that appeared to be stuck in a narrow passageway. Since there was no other direction to go apart from forward, the block needed to be moved so that I could progress. It looked bigger than usual so I suspected it would take some Goron strength to move it. Before I took a step forward, strange noises started coming from the other side of the ice structures. Little white snowballs then started falling down from the ceiling, but I quickly discovered that these weren't snowballs but rather monsters when they started looking at me with glowing red eyes.

" Those are White Boes." Twilight announced. " Similar in nature to the Black Boes we encountered in Woodfall Temple, this variation is exactly the same in that they are only strong when they attack as a group as opposed to doing so on their own. They are a bit more difficult to detect given they hide in the snow, but you should have no problems."

" How many do you suppose there are?"

" About a dozen."

" Works for me." I said. The White Boes noticed my presence and began bouncing along towards me, and I responded by punching each of them in a barrage. Whenever one was defeated, it rolled away before disappearing into a puff of smoke only for another to quickly replace it. At first it looked like there was more than a dozen--there was--and would be an endless assault aimed to tire me out, but eventually they stopped spawning. When the last one disappeared, I dropped to my knees and breathed heavily several times" That took more out of me than I thought, yet those monsters weren't an actual threat."

" Like I said, they are strong in a group."

" Do you think we'll run into more of them?"

" Most likely. The cold temperature combined with the snow in this temple makes it a perfect locale for them to thrive in."

" Anyway, what do you make of that block over there?" I asked, pointing at what was preventing us from progressing.

" Hmmm... It's certainly larger than normal blocks. No doubt you'll need to push it forward as a Goron until it falls into a hole in the ground further ahead. I don't think you can pull it towards you as the entrance to the passageway is too small for it." Twilight answered.

" So pushing it is better than pulling?"

" In this case, yes."

I did consider pulling it towards me, but now I could see that Her Highness was correct in that it couldn't get out of the passageway on this side. Walking up to it, I pressed my hands up against the block and began pushing it forward with relative ease. In the past, pushing or pulling these blocks was a real chore, yet here it was like it weighed nothing.

After pushing it down the passageway for several meters, it suddenly dropped down into a hole effectively giving me access to the next room--more like the remainder of the same room--that featured three doors on each wall. The first had a padlock on it so I knew a key was needed to unlock it. The second was covered by a large chunk of ice and I knew that hot spring water wasn't going to work--I wouldn't be able to get some up here in time. The third and final door had iron bars preventing it from being opened.

Now I was really confused. There was nothing I could do to open any of the doors so how was I supposed to continue?

*(1) This part is a retcon. Originally, the prologue said that it had been two weeks since the Friendship Games. That's because it was written before the movie became available, so now it's been about a month since the Games. Hopefully, these little notes will provide some explanations whenever they are necessary.

Chapter 25: The Wizard's Ice

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 12, 2016
Chapter 25: The Wizard's Ice.

Twilight and I hadn't been in this temple for even five minutes before getting stuck at a problem. Each of the three doors had something that was blocking them and I needed to get said obstacles out of the way to be able to get anywhere. The first door had a padlock on it so I knew that a key was needed--where I could find one would prove challenging. The second door was covered with a large chunk of ice and I knew that touching it would result in me being frozen for several seconds. The final door was perhaps the most intriguing despite having iron bars blocking the way.

Of the three, it was the one with the iron bars that seemed the most logical to open. A thought then came across my mind. Was it possible for me to lift up or even remove the iron bars using my strength? That would definitely solve this problem but what if it doesn't work and I merely waste what little precious time I had?

" I wish I could use my magic." I said, folding my arms and pouting.

" Well, get over that right now." Twilight said sternly.

" You didn't have to say it like that."

" Sorry, Sunset, but I knew you were going to say something along those lines."

" Was I too obvious?"

" No, but you need to think about it this way. When you were journeying around Hyrule according to what you told me, you used your magic far more often than your items. I believe you became too dependant on using magic and you didn't learn anything that could be applied in future endeavours. That doesn't apply in this world as your magic--mine too--has been blocked. Magic is fine and all but relying on it too much only serves as a crutch." Twilight answered. Her Highness was right. I didn't want to accept her answer but I knew that I had to.

During my previous journey, I used magic for just about anything. Even when I could've used the Kokiri Sword during those early stages--along with those other items--I instead used magic without ever taking the time to try what I had received. It was as though in my mind, magic was all I needed. Everything else was just a collectible that I carried around to use as necessary to overcome something magic couldn't.

Unicorns and alicorns in Equestria used their magic in their everyday lives, yet some used it so much that they became lazy and refused to do things the natural way. They lost focus on what it meant to use magic and instead became far worse for it. You needed to strike a fair balance between using magic to solve a problem and your own skills doing the same thing. The lazy ones were treated with disdain because they abused their gift of magic.

I am reminded of something Princess Celestia once taught me. Despite thinking myself superior back then and believing that her lessons were nothing but pointless speeches, she did tell me about what could happen when a unicorn relied too much on their magic. Not only did they become lazy, they also lost themselves to magic and became corrupted with wanting power above all else--the perfect combination that could cause a unicorn to become evil.

Wow... She knew me a lot better than I knew myself, yet continued to teach me all because she felt that I was destined for greater things. The more I dwell on my past and what went wrong, the more I wanted to kick myself for being so stubborn and thick-headed.

No wonder I struggled so much in Hyrule. Had I used what was intended, I wouldn't have wound up going through the painful experiences that I felt. It would've still been a challenge to accomplish my goal, just not to such an extreme. So far in this adventure, the experiences I learnt have been utilized--despite some obvious blunders in the early going--yet why would Her Highness say that I didn't learn anything when I actually had done? Was she trying to teach me a lesson?

" Heh, I see through your deception, Twilight." I said smugly.

" I was beginning to think that you wouldn't have figured out my intentions."

" So why claim that I didn't do something when I clearly did?"

" The look on your face told me you were having doubts, so I did what I usually do in these situations and that's apply learning."

" Thanks."

" Magic is a part of you, Sunset, and always will be, but you can't allow it to dictate your life. You need to be able to do things without using it to speed through something by means of a short-cut just to get it done." Twilight said. She then floated over towards something that was lying on the ground, yet I didn't notice because of how it blended into the ground so seamlessly. She bobbed up and down to get my attention. " I think this will allow us to go through the barred door."

" How did I miss something like that!?"

" Again, the thought of relying on magic blinded you, Sunset. In the previous temple, we experienced something similar to this whenever we got locked in a room, but here it's the path ahead that has been blocked." Twilight answered. I took several steps forward and without warning, the White Wolfos that was hiding on the ground leapt up.

It began to run around in its bid to rip its claws into my back, but I knew what it was doing and did everything I could to keep my eyes on it. Suddenly, it jumped over me, turned around, and leapt at my back, yet I responded instinctively by dropping down onto my hands and knees, my back becoming rock-hard. The White Wolfos' claws connected with my back, snapping upon impact, the pieces scattering across the room. Before it could react, I punched it hard in the stomach where it burned away to nothing.

" What did I just do?" I asked as I got back onto my feet.

" It appears Gorons have a defensive mechanism that occurs whenever they are threatened."

" In English, please?"

" Remember when you used that oversized shield when you were a Deku Scrub?" Twilight asked. I nodded my head--I only used that shield a few times to protect myself from the stinging tails of those Dragonflies. " Your back becoming rock-hard is the Gorons equivalent of that. Instead of having a shield that you hold for protection, your body acts as both a weapon and a shield."

" The only issue I have is that I can't see anything."

" Yes, because you're on your hands and knees whenever you need to take a defensive stance. It will certainly help you when things get difficult, but you shouldn't rely on it too much as you need to see what is happening around you." Twilight said. At that moment, the iron bars rose up, unlocking the door, so I walked over to it and entered the next room--the door raised and lowered rather than swung open. A familiar sound I remembered from my previous journey caused me to fold my arms and shiver in place. "Sunset? Why are you acting like that all of a sudden?" Twilight asked having noticed my reaction.

" I remember that noise."

" What noise?"

" The one coming from those ice monsters over there." I answered, pointing my finger at three creatures. Each one was made of solid ice that you could see through, and every once in a while, they breathed a blast of cold air for several seconds before stopping. None of them were moving but that didn't matter as I recognized them from when I explored that frozen cave to acquire an important item--my mind was fuzzy regarding some details but was mostly accurate.

I then noticed a treasure chest frozen in a block of ice near the one closest to my location. It could contain something useful but I had no intention of going anywhere near those things without the proper means to destroy them with. Being frozen myself for a few seconds courtesy of their freezing breath is an experience I'd rather not go through again.

" Those creatures are called Freezards. Despite not moving from their positions, they have quite the range when it comes to their breath. Arrows don't have any effect on them so picking them off from a distance is out of the question, yet they are susceptible to fire. One shot of fire will melt them in an instant or you can attack with a sword or even use those fists of yours although doing so will require a few hits." Twilight said. Fire... Of course it had to be the one thing that my magic represented. Now I really wish that I had my fire magic but then that would just make me appear lazy and not wanting to do things properly.

" If only I had fire to hit them with."

" For now, it's best to just avoid them unless you feel gutsy enough to fight them." Twilight said. She took a look around the room to see what was up and bopped me on the head when she figured it out. " See that walkway that goes in front of the Freezards? Just like how you climbed up the mountain, you'll need to roll across and over a small gap to reach that other walkway over there. Luckily, the path is caked in snow so you can easily build up enough momentum." I hadn't paid a word to what Her Highness said as my attention was focused on something inside of a bubble. " Sunset! Did you even listen to a word I said?" Twilight asked angrily.

" No."

" Why not!?"

" I was looking at that bubble down there."

" Huh?" Twilight looked in the direction of the bubble and felt a magical force coming from within it. " It's a Stray Fairy! I forgot that we need to find all fifteen of them in here and return them to the fountain to restore Adagio back to normal. I'm so sorry for snapping at you, Sunset. I thought you were ignoring me on purpose."

" Sorry for not saying anything."

" The first thing you need to do is to free that fairy and lure it over here. I don't think I need to tell you how to do that now, do I?" Twilight asked. That was her way of saying this was an easy solution without actually saying anything. I think Twilight's adopting some of my mannerisms from hanging around me too much--it was also true in reverse.

Pulling on my face to take the Goron Mask off--I couldn't use the Hero's Bow while in that bulky form--I changed back to normal, flipped my head back--and my hair--and put the mask on the ground. I hoped my aim hadn't gotten rusty since it had been some time since I last used the bow for anything. I took it out along with the Great Fairy's Mask--it was needed to lure any Stray Fairies over--putting on the latter and aiming the former at the bubble. The Stray Fairy was located in a rather small nook surrounded by walls so I had to aim very carefully so as to not waste any arrows. I was lucky to have gotten some by rolling through snow mounds on the way up here.

Once I felt confident that my aim was sound, I let loose an arrow that sailed down towards the bubble only to hit slightly short of the target--it hit the column below and not go flying off in a random direction. I nocked another arrow and fired at the bubble without aiming, and surprisingly it connected causing a loud popping sound to echo throughout the room. It hadn't drawn the attention of the Freezards, but the Stray Fairy was freed where it immediately floated over to me and disappeared into my body.

I put the Hero's Bow and Great Fairy's Mask away, picked up the Goron Mask, walked back a few steps and put it on my face. I didn't want to fall into the area below the walkway I needed to traverse--there was a lava pit down there that I noticed while I was aiming at the bubble with my bow--so I made sure to stay away because of what my body goes through during this particular transition. Once again, I began stumbling about as the mask began to take affect, but a chance encounter that involved slipping and falling on the ice enabled me to finish the change without plunging off the side.

Getting back onto my feet as Darmani, I took a closer look at the walkway. It was certainly narrow yet wide enough for a Goron to roll across, yet the Freezard's breath could reach the centre of it. To make it across safely, I had to roll when they were paused in-between their breaths and in a straight line. Going too soon or too late would result in getting frozen and rolling at an angle would mean rolling down to the lava floor below. I used my fingers to formulate a quick calculation to determine the precise direction I needed and to see how far back I needed to go to build up my momentum.

Curling into a ball, I began rolling forward on the snow before continuing on the bridge, but just as I produced my spikes, the Freezard that was next to the one that was by the frozen treasure chest decided to breathe out its frozen breath much sooner than anticipated. I had no chance at changing direction and got blasted by the cold. I rolled down below and across the lava pool before smacking into the wall, unfurling myself in the process.

" That didn't go very well." I said as I got back up.

" Your timing was off, Sunset, but we did learn something."

" What's that?"

" Apparently, you can survive in lava while as a Goron although I don't know for quite how long. It's not what I would call an advantage per say, but it might prove useful to remember it in case we come across something similar later." Twilight answered. The lower area didn't really seem all that much unless you were an avid fan of lava, yet a ladder on the far end indicated that I could get myself back out--my assumption that I would be trapped down here quickly disappeared. I rolled across the lava until I reached the other side and began climbing the ladder--it was longer than I thought--until I reached the top where I found myself back at the start of the walkway.

This time, I made sure to check the patterns of the Freezards for any discrepancies. Each one fired three blasts of cold every two minutes although the one in the middle that got me before fired an additional blast of its frozen breath. I had to pay close attention to that one to ensure that it didn't hit me again otherwise I'd never get out of this room.

After doing a few more calculations on my fingers, I curled up into a ball and waited for the irregular Freezard to fire its cold breath. Once it did, I rolled on the snow to build up my momentum, across the bridge, produced my spikes, and leapt across the gap just as it was about to fire again. Luckily, there was a crate on the other walkway that stopped me from plunging back down below again.

On this side, there was another gap that I had to leap over to, yet it connected to a flight of stairs that went up to the next floor. To my left was a door with the middle Freezard to the left of that, yet before I could make a decision, Twilight bopped my head to get my attention on something.

" What's wrong?"

" I can see a Stray Fairy trapped in a bubble over there next to that Freezard." Twilight answered. I looked over at another walkway and there was the fairy in question. " I don't think you can leap that small gap while as a Goron as you know they drop like rocks, so perhaps becoming a human is in order."

" What of the Freezard?"

" It looks like none of them can tilt their heads around, so you can easily hack it to pieces without having to worry about being attacked."

That was a sigh of relief in my mind as I didn't want to get frozen. Grabbing my face and pulling on it again--I was starting to get annoyed with having to switch back and forth between forms so frequently--I took off the Goron Mask and flipped my head back as per usual before looking at the small gap in-between the two walkways. It wasn't really that threatening yet falling down below meant wasting time coming back up here, time that wasn't on my side.

Since I had more flexibility as a human coupled with the training I had to do to prepare myself to compete in the Friendship Games, I jumped to the other walkway, drew out the Razor Sword, and slashed the Freezard to pieces in a single stroke.

Without hesitating, I popped open the bubble releasing the Stray Fairy where it entered my body upon me making contact with it. With that out of the way, I had to decide to go up the stairs or through the door.

" Which direction should I take, Twilight?"

" I suggest the door."

" Any particular reason why?"

" I've got this feeling that the door will lead us to the heart of this temple, and by that I mean the central chamber that connects everything together." Twilight answered. That was certainly a bold proclamation from Her Highness, yet my heart was compelling me to take the door.

Jumping back across the small gap, I walked up to the door making sure not to accidentally walk in front of the Freezard, opened it, and entered the next room where I came upon a truly foreboding site. Once again, Twilight had proven herself correct by following her gut instincts. The room contained numerous walkways above my head that went around the edge of the room along with jutting out towards the centre. I suspected that those walkways connected to additional doors so that meant I'd be coming back here many times. I couldn't even see what was on the ceiling due to how high everything went.

In front of me were several narrow walkways that culminated at a strange platform in the centre, and apart from a staircase that went down and the door I entered from, the remaining doors had blocks of ice covering them. I inched over to the edge and looked down to see at least six small lava pools below--I could see three blue coloured platforms that were below the one that the walkways lead up to.

" Wow... I'm just in complete over seeing this."

" It looks like this temple will be an uphill climb, Sunset."

" Why do I have the feeling I'll need to master Goron rolling?"

" Because of those walkways above us that go around the edge of the room?"

" Yeah."

" We'll deal with them when we eventually get up there, but for now it looks like the only direction you can go is down to the level below. I'm not sure if you want to unless you feel like exploring for the sake of it." Twilight said.

" There might be something down there that may prove useful."

" I suppose you have a point. If you want to go down there, you can either use those stairs or roll down to the ground below as a Goron. I would definitely advise against just dropping down for obvious reasons, but the choice is yours to make." Twilight said. She didn't really need to tell me that part about not falling. That was something I found out for myself the hard way on my previous adventure--I still had some scars from some of the more severe ones.

In any case, I planned on changing back into a Goron because those lava pools were more easy to traverse in that form as opposed to my current one. I shuffled backwards towards the door, took out the Goron Mask, and put it on my face. Once again, I stumbled about although not as bad as before--I might be starting to get used to it--and soon changed back into Darmani before looking down below by walking over to the edge of the walkway. Part of me wanted to be dumb and just roll off the side, but then my brain got that idea out of my head so I took the stairs down.

As soon as I reached the lower level, the temperature immediately started to pick up due to the lava pools--it was like this back in the previous room with the Freezards only it was much warmer here--making it a sharp contrast to what this temple consisted of. There was a switch partially submerged within the lava that I noticed, so I brought it to Twilight's attention by pointing at it. " Huh? Now that's what I call convenient if not a little bizarre, but it's up to you if you want to press it or not."

" It couldn't hurt I suppose." I said. I walked over to the switch and pressed it causing a treasure chest to appear also partially submerged in lava--who knew that both wood and stone could survive in lava--but the instant the chest materialized, something emerged from the lava. A skull with wings covered in flames began to bounce around, yet I stayed where I was until it disappeared by jumping into another lava pool.

" That was a Red Bubble. Unlike the blue variation that appears out in Termina Field at night, this version prefers to live in hot places. It can suddenly pop out of the lava without warning and attempt to ram into you, but if you use your shield or similar defensive techniques, you can block its attack. It will lose its fiery protection and bounce around harmlessly until you either destroy it or let it go back down into the lava." Twilight said.

" So I should just ignore it?"

" If your health is running low or you don't feel like dealing with it, then yes, you can do that."

I remembered encountering these things somewhere in Hyrule. While they didn't exactly cause me any problems, they were a disaster waiting to happen as one wrong move would result in getting hit by one unintentionally. There was no telling when one would appear so all I could do was just walk around as normal and hoped one didn't decide to pop out from the lava just to get in my way. The treasure chest upon walking over to it was a small one of no particular significance, and my first instinct was that it would contain nothing but rupees. I mean, a chest containing rupees wasn't necessarily a bad thing.

Unlike in Hyrule, there were quite a lot of things I needed to buy that required rupees, so finding them, especially in chests, was a blessing although sometimes it was nice to get something that was more practical. I opened it up and a Stray Fairy floated out of it before entering my body. I guessed coming down here proved beneficial as now there were only twelve more to locate. Just as the fairy entered my body, I was caught by surprise when another Red Bubble--maybe the same one as before--popped out from the lava, burning me slightly before bouncing away like a lunatic.

The burn wasn't really all that much, but I attributed that to being a Goron. I'd have taken a bit more damage as a human or maybe even less since I had a slight immunity towards anything fire based--I didn't know if the latter fact applied in Termina--yet the damage was one that would build up over time. I had no healing fairies or potions so taking things slowly was necessary to get through each room until I found a means to procure health.

Walking back to the stairs and up them to reach the upper level, I was about to go back through the door to the previous room with the Freezards, but stopped upon noticing another door that wasn't locked or covered by anything. Had I somehow missed this one during my initial scan? In any case, I walked over and entered another room that was smaller in scope, yet something immediately caught my attention and was to my left.

" Strange that these two blocks are stacked like this." I said, eyeing them carefully.

" I'm guessing you can move them, but perhaps they serve another purpose?"

" What else could they be for?"

" Why don't you look around the room for a few moments? I don't sense any monsters in here so you're safe to do a little bit of exploring." Twilight answered. Turning my attention towards the room, I noticed that there were two cliffs on either side with a single door located on the left. That meant there was a way to get up there from another direction yet I didn't see any point as there was no additional door or stairs.

As I walked forward towards the end of the strange snow-like floor, I almost tripped when my feet suddenly fell into a slightly dipped groove in the ground that was hidden underneath the snow. Dropping down to my knees, I began pressing the ground to see if there was some kind of switch and there was. If I were to step on it, I doubted anything would happen as my weight might not be enough--Gorons were heavy but some things were even heavier--yet I had an idea. I walked back to the two blocks and pulled them out from their hole in the wall, revealing a hidden chamber behind them.

Through a series of pushes and pulls to get the blocks to their intended destination--the pulling was the result of fixing a couple of blunders I made--I pushed the blocks into the groove, falling into place with a soft click. A small chest materialized on the other side so I knew something important had to be inside otherwise why even bother going to so much trouble pushing some blocks around? Also, I realized that the blocks now served as a platform but it meant nothing if I couldn't find my way up there.

Since there was nothing left for me to do, I was just about to leave when I remembered the hidden chamber behind the blocks. I walked into there and discovered another chest although this one looked to be made of a better material compared with the other one--it had a gold rim on it while the other didn't--opened it up and took out a small key.

" Finally!"

" At least now we can unlock that door and see where it goes."

" Guess we've got to take the long way back."

" Not necessarily. I don't believe Flash Sentry ever mentioned this, Sunset, but the Song of Soaring does have an additional function. If you were to play that song in a dungeon, you can warp yourself right back to the entrance." Twilight said.

" Really?"

" Yes, but you might miss out on important things if you do so. I suggest that you check every last possible thing before choosing to warp back to the start again. You might have missed something the first time." Twilight answered. Now that was quite the useful piece of information, yet how did Her Highness figure that out without ever being given a hint about it from Flash? Come to think of it, why didn't she mentioned anything about it before back in the previous temple?

Had I known that a lot sooner, it would've resulted in less backtracking as far as the temple was concerned. " Before you go and play that song, why not see where that other set of stairs lead to. You know, the one in the room with the Freezards?"

" Twilight... Um... Never mind."

" Is something wrong?"

" I was wondering why you didn't bring that up before."

" To be fair, I'm not sure why I never said a word to you. I assumed you already figured it out, but even then I had my doubts that the Song of Soaring could work inside a temple like it could outside in the world." Twilight said.

It may have taken a long time for me to learn of something that would save me some time, but at least I learned of it now instead of say in the next temple where such information would be relatively worthless. Putting the key in my pocket--the pants of my tunic still had them even when in this form--I went back to the previous room with the Freezards and realized that I needed to jump across another small gap to be able to climb up to the next floor. I grabbed my face, pulled on it to take the Goron Mask off, flipped my head back, put the mask away, jumped over and walked up the stairs when I immediately stopped upon seeing a very strange sight.

In the middle of the room was a large platform that certainly looked suspicious, but it was the weird creature running around that piqued my curiosity. It looked like some kind of giant rat with a deranged look on its face, yet its tail had a strange blue sphere on the tip. A second one soon appeared and followed in the footsteps of the first one by running around on the floor and even the walls. So far, neither one noticed my presence, but I could also smell small traces of gunpowder. Was my nose playing tricks on me? Maybe, but then there could be something more to this that I wasn't seeing.

" What in the world are those things?"

" Those are Real Bombchu."

" Um, I don't think so, Twilight. I've seen what real Bombchus look like and those things definitely aren't them." I said. I quickly explained to Her Highness that Bombchu were a special type of bomb produced in Hyrule that resembled a mouse. It could travel along the floor, walls, and ceiling until it blew up upon making contact with its target or after not hitting anything for a while. It was the next stage in the evolution of bombs yet the one drawback was how expensive they could get. " Unless you had the money, you couldn't use them, but even then some places only sold a limited amount."

" That's fine and all, but those are Real Bombchu."

" I beg to differ."

" What I mean is that those creatures are literally Bombchu. As in, what the bombs were based on according to Tatl's memories."

" Really?"

" Yes. Anyway, when they see you, the Real Bomchu's tail lights up causing it to go on a suicide course until it makes contact with you. If you bounce it away using your shield, it will explode disappearing in the process and causing no damage. You could also try avoiding them but it's better to parry them away just to be safe." Twilight answered. So these things were actual Bombchu? I wondered if this was what inspired Hylians to make them or was restricted to just Termina.

Either way, caution was important as getting blown up wasn't my idea of fun--it wouldn't kill me but it would hurt. Raising my shield up, I slowly walked forward in hopes that I would get the attention of either Real Bombchu. All of a sudden, the nearest one came running at me using its stubby little legs, its tail lighting up--it turned out the sphere on its tail was in fact a bomb--but I remained firm. It collided with my shield by ramming its face into it, bounced back a few feet and exploded upon landing on the ground.

The explosion's size was quite extensive so even if I were to bounce it away, I had to keep my distance in case I got caught in the blast radius. The other Real Bombchu had since decided to run up the wall for some reason--not that I was complaining--so I walked towards the platform and discovered a large treasure chest was hiding to its left. I took a moment to take a look around in case there was something I might have missed. I could see a switch covered in ice hanging high up upon the wall with a walkway going around the room's perimeter, but I noticed the familiar freezing breath that only a Freezard could exude from its body.

" Do you see that switch up there, Twilight?" I asked, pointing my finger up at it.

" It's frozen."

" I think I might know what we'll find here that constitutes as a dungeon treasure."

" Really? Do tell."

" No, not yet. It's just a theory right now, but if I find some additional evidence then I'll be sure to let you know." I said. In my mind, there was only one item that I believed would help me deal with so much ice, and it was something that was available to be in Hyrule. I never bothered using it because of having magic, but perhaps now I could use it as intended and make up for my obvious shunning. I opened the chest and took out a map, my eyes bursting with excitement. " Yes! We've got a map! Now we see how big this place is. " Twilight and I looked closely and discovered that Snowhead Temple comprised of five floors.

The central room was present on each floor indicating what I suspected was true. Many of the remaining rooms connected to the central one in different places, so it was one that we would be visiting many times before finally getting to the end. Overall, the number of rooms in this temple was about the same as what we encountered back at Woodfall Temple, but much bigger in scope and far more connected.

" Here... Let me mark off the places where we found the Stray Fairies." Twilight said, using her fairy magic to make tiny marks so as to not damage the map."

" The next thing we need is a compass. That way, we'll know where the other treasure chests are in addition to where source of the mountain's problem lies."

" Do you want to use the Song of Soaring to take a short cut back to the entrance of the temple?"

" No, I'd prefer to go back to the entrance via walking. Sure, using that song would save some time, but what's the point in doing that if it means skipping out on something? I'd rather do things as intended and not take an easier path. Besides, I might have missed something." I answered. Her Highness smiled at me and I knew that she expected me to take the proper path instead of the short cut. Actually, I wanted to use the Song of Soaring in case the chest didn't contain a map, but since it did, finding my way back was simpler.

I quickly looked around to see what became of that other Real Bombchu--it was now running on the ceiling--before making my way over to the staircase, and walked down it to the previous room with the two blocks.

" Shoot! I can't believe I didn't wake up at the crack of dawn! I thought them there Cuccos would've crowed at the sign of first light! Reckon I ought to speak with Grog about this when I next seem 'im. Anyway, Romani? Where are you? Come on! We've gotta get started on our chores quickly before we get swamped with too much work!" Applejack shouted as she ran out of the house, closed the door, and into the luscious fields of Romani Ranch. " This is no time fer games, sugarcube! Them cows ain't gonna milk themselves ya know! Romani? What in tarnation is that girl doin'?"

" Something wrong, Cremia?"

" Huh? Grog! Just the man I need ta see." Applejack answered. " Why didn't your Cuccos crow at dawn like they're 'spposed to?"

" That's what I've been trying to find out myself. I woke up later than usual due to none of them crowing this morning."

" What about them little chicks?"

" They're not big enough to start crowing."

" Y'all don't suppose they went missing or somethin'?"

" Those Cuccos are my pride and joy, Cremia! If any of them have gone missing, I... I... I don't know what to do. I know that I put them away in the barn last night before heading off to bed, so maybe they're still in there? As for why they didn't crow at first light..."

" Funny you should mention the barn. I was just about to head over there myself. Romani hasn't been answering me and I reckon she stayed up late or somethin' playing those silly games of hers." Applejack said. She took off her Stetson hat, scratched her head feverishly for a few seconds, and put it back on her head. " I swear that girl is really pushing my patience these days, Grog. I've been workin' hard gettin' the cows milked in case I can finally deliver some milk to Clock Town, yet all she's been doin' is shooting down balloons all because of some ghost stories she heard."

" She still thinks ghosts come here at night?"

" Only on the eve of the Carnival of Time." Applejack answered, slamming her hands down on a nearby crate. She then pushed it along a few feet in an attempt to cool off, but she found that it made her feel even more tense. " I keep tellin' her that there's no such things as ghosts who go around the ranch abducting cows, yet she refuses to listen."

" Maybe she needs to take a break from doing chores."

" Are y'all kiddin' me!?"

" With all the work you two have had to do since the unfortunate incident, maybe it finally proved too much for her?"

" It has been a couple of months since then, hasn't it?" Applejack then walked over to the barn and placed her hand on the doorknob before turning to face her companion. In her eyes he was definitely concerned about the mental strain that seemed to be apparent on her little sister, yet she didn't feel that way but instead felt annoyed. " I got over our loss so there's no reason why she hasn't done ta same!" She opened the door, walked into the barn, and dropped to her knees upon witnessing what awaited her. " What in the hay!? The cows... Where are the cows!?"

" What's wrong?"

" Grog! Get in here, quick! The cows are gone!"

" What!?"

" The cows are gone!" Applejack shouted. Grog immediately ran into the barn to witness what she was looking at. Normally, there were eight cows that slept in the barn at nightwhen it was time to go to bed, yet there were no traces of them anywhere. A light shining down from above prompted both Applejack and Grog to look up at the roof, and they discovered ithad disappeared.

" Where is the roof? How could it have vanished? What in the hay is goin' on 'round here?" She got onto her feet and started looking around in hopes of finding an answer, and that's when her foot bumped into a small bow that someone had dropped. Applejack dropped to her knees again when she recognized what it was.

" Isn't that the bow Romani's always carrying around?"

" Was she in here when whatever happened to the cows happened?"

" I'm sure there's a logical explanation."

" Romani! Romani! No! My little sister's gone along with all the cows!" Applejack then burst into tears upon realizing that her sister had been right all along. She didn't want to believe that there were ghosts, yet they existed and had taken them along with her little sister. " Why... Why didn't I listen? Why did I have to be so stubborn and ignore the warnings she gave me? If I had listened to her, none of this would've happened."

" I... I don't know what to say."

" Romani!!!!"

" Calm down, Cremia! No need to lose your composure!"

" How can you say that!? My little sister's gone! I've lost everything!" Applejack shouted! She continued crying for a few moments whilst cradling the bow her sister used before wiping away her tears and standing up, her hand clenching the bow tightly to the point where it was about to break in two.

" Maybe Romani was able to get away before whatever happened to the barn happened? I know it doesn't sound all that positive, but it's the best thing I can say given the current circumstances."

" I hope y'all are right, Grog."

" That's all we can do, Cremia."

It took some time for me to walk all the way back to the main entrance of Snowhead Temple--I now regret not following Her Highness' suggestion of using the Song of Soaring to get there quickly. In the room with those Freezards, one of them froze me for several seconds in an ice block. While I did eventually break free by sliding down to that lava pool below, the fact that I got frozen was most unpleasant. Then in the entrance room itself, I got attacked by the White Wolfos, but things quickly got out of hand when those White Boes decided to come down the passageway and attack me from behind.

Despite getting through that little--more like big--obstacle, the fact of the matter was that I could've warped back to the start, defeated the White Boes on their own, and then focus my efforts on beating the White Wolfos without any problem. In any case, I used the key to unlock the door that I couldn't get through before and entered a room that featured the same snow-like floor that was found in that other room that housed the key.

This room had another large chest seemingly located in the center although something told me in my mind that there were monsters around waiting to strike. I also saw a few large chunks of ice that were covering up some objects that I couldn't quite see. Finally, I could see what looked like a door at the opposite end of the room, but it might have been something else that only looked like a door.

" Sunset! I can see a White Wolfos hiding behind the ice chunk to your right." Twilight said.

" I see him." I said.

" Also, this white floored looks like it's made of ice."

" I thought it was that snow-like floor we found before."

" No, this appears to be ice, so I suggest you be careful when fighting that White Wolfos. You don't want to slip and fall now, do you? Then again, I'm sure it's not going to be good for that monster anyway." Twilight said. If there was one thing I disliked more than snow, it was ice because of how easy it was to trip, fall down, and land hard on your butt. At least here, I was a human so I could use my shield to reflect the White Wolfos' claw swipes.

I walked onto the icy floor and immediately I slipped although I quickly regained my balance. The White Wolfos in the meantime had noticed my presence and ran out from behind the ice chunk before lunging with its claws. Raising my shield, the claws bounced off although it didn't deter it from continuing with its assault. Blow after blow came crashing against my shield, yet it just couldn't get by thanks to my protection being made of steel instead of wood.

After a while, it tried to leap over me to attack me from behind, but I knew what it was trying to do. In a quick fashion, I took out my sword, whipped around just as it landed, and struck in the back defeating the White Wolfos. As it burned away to nothing, the next course of action involved opening up the treasure chest. Before I walked over, I took a moment to make sure there wasn't anything else hiding somewhere--it was clear.

At the chest, I opened it up and took out a compass before pocketing it and taking out the map. Through the power of magic, several treasure chest icons appeared all over it along with a skull mark that appeared on the highest level indicting that the source was up there.

" Looks like we've got a lot to do before getting to whatever is behind the snow outside." Twilight said, eying the map very carefully.

" I thought this dungeon was going to be as easy as the last one, but I guess I was wrong."

" Don't feel discouraged, Sunset. Sure, things look pretty bad right now, but it will get better once we start putting the pieces of this puzzle together. Now, according to the map, there should be a stairway at the end of this room, but all I can see is a wall." Twilight said. Upon a closer inspection, what I thought was a door was in fact a wall that looked out of place compared what we could already see.

" It's got a crack in it."

" That means you can use a bomb to blow it up."

" I don't think I have any with me." I said. I quickly rummaged through my items in hopes that I had a bomb, but sadly I didn't have any on my person. " Shoot! I don't have any bombs, so that means the only thing I can use is the Blast Mask." I reached into a pocket and took out the mask in question. " Normally, I'd prefer not to use this because of getting injured when the explosion happens, but what other choice do I have?"

" Here's a suggestion. Why not raise your shield just before you detonate the mask by using its power? That might prevent you from getting hurt--" Twilight answered. She suddenly stopped talking upon hearing a tiny squeaking noise coming from somewhere nearby. " Do you hear what I'm hearing, Sunset?"

" What is it?"

" It sounds like a Stray Fairy, but I can't see anything suspicious other than those two pots above the entrance to the stairway." Twilight answered. I looked up and saw the pots in question on either side that looked completely out of place with the rest of the room.

" The fairy must be in one of those pots."

" You need to set it free, but be sure to wear the Great Fairy's Mask. I don't think you can reach it from this position and that wall looks like it's impossible to climb. A simple arrow will shatter the pot so you should have no problems." Twilight said.

Taking out both the Hero's Bow and Great Fairy's Mask, I put on the former and aimed at the pot with the latter. Unlike what happened in that other room where I missed such an easy shot, this one proved to be no challenge; my arrow sailed at an upward angle, freeing the Stray Fairy from its imprisonment, and it sailed down and entered my body. That's when I noticed what was trapped within the chunks of ice. One contained a switch while the other contained a block. Whatever was going on, I couldn't do anything about it until I could find a means to melt the ice--it did give me another clue as to what kind of item I would find here.

" That should be my fourth, right?"

" I believe so, yes."

" I'm glad that you mark them down on the map, Twilight, as I'm already forgetting how many we've saved."

" It can be cumbersome given that we have other things occupying our minds. In any case, you can now focus on destroying that wall using the Blast Mask."

Putting away the bow and Great Fairy's Mask, I took out the Blast Mask and looked down at it. As I held it in my hands, I feared what could potentially happen if I were to use it without raising my shield to prevent me from being caught in a potential explosion. While I didn't want to say no to that Old Lady who gave it to me after stopping Lightning Dust from robbing her, perhaps I should've asked her if it were possible to tone down the power contained within it. Sighing, I put the mask on, walked over until I reached the wall, raised my shield, and detonated it causing me to get pushed back several inches as the wall blew apart.

Her Highness was correct! I didn't get injured from the explosion, yet there was a downside that became apparent. By using my shield to protect myself from the blast, I also prevent the blast from having the kind of radius that it should have. So, to keep myself safe, I had to get really close to whatever needed to be blown up. Taking it off and putting it away--it faded in and out several times due to being used, I walked up the stairs and entered a room that felt a lot colder than the previous ones.

Was I slowly succumbing to the cold or was I just experiencing it slower than what others would? My thought quickly changed to avoidance as something fell down from above and shattered on the ground.

" What the heck was that?"

" Look up, Sunset." Twilight answered. I did so and my body froze upon seeing numerous icicles hanging on the ceiling, some bigger than others. " Some of those icicles will drop on their own if you get too close, but others look like they won't move unless you can jar them loose. Maybe you can shoot them with an arrow like you did when we initially entered the mountains from Termina Field." My attention turned towards several platforms that stuck out of the ground with a couple having chunks of ice on top, yet they surprising had those large icicles hanging above them.

" I think I need to use those icicles to break the ice chunks."

" Like you did before."

" Don't chastise me for something I only did once."

" True, as you haven't done anything like it since."

" By the way, what do you suppose is up with that ice over there?" I asked. I pointed towards some ice hanging on the wall in a peculiar location. It looked out of place with everything else, yet I couldn't see a reason other than it was suspicious.

" When in doubt, try to see if it's what it appears to be."

It took me a moment to figure out that Her Highness was hinting at me to use the Lens of Truth--she could've been a bit more subtle--so I took it out and peered through the lens to see if there was anything strange about the ice. It looked normal despite where it was hanging, but what surprised me was that there was a hidden nook above with a treasure chest. It must have been important if someone had decided to hide it so carefully. To reach the nook, I had to jump onto a couple of platforms and jump over to it.

I walked to the closest platform--it was low down on the ground enough for me to climb onto--and got onto it before jumping up to the next one--it was slightly higher than the first one was--making sure that I had the Lens of Truth active. From there, I jumped and landed in the nook, opening the chest revealing another Stray Fairy. That gave me five already and I hadn't even explored a fourth of Snowhead Temple. The thought of collecting them would be easy never registered in my mind; quite the opposite. I believed it would be a challenge in that some were going to be hidden so well, I'd need to think beyond usual means to located each and every one.

Jumping back to the second platform, I put the lens away and switched over to the Hero's Bow. The next few platforms each had an ice chunk on top of them and some had items contained inside that should be free for me to collect when I shatter the ice. Looking up, I aimed at an icicle that was directly above the next platform I needed to use, fired an arrow that shattered the base, and it dropped down and smashed the large chunk to pieces revealing a red rupee. While getting money at this point wasn't as important as getting hearts, it was still useful in case I needed to buy something or deposit any rupees at the bank next time I was in town.

I repeated this process with the remaining icicles by aiming my now and firing arrows at them to shake them loose. Some required more than one arrow due to being quite stuck, but they eventually would drop down and smash the chunks into pieces releasing more red rupees. Since I didn't want to be too greedy--I also wanted to focus on my mission--I collected only the initial red rupee and jumped from platform to platform until I was standing on a fairly large platform. A locked door could be seen to the right indicating that there was key hidden somewhere in this room.

" I don't suppose the Lens of Truth can help me here?"

" No, but there has to be something we're not seeing." Twilight answered. She floated ahead of me to think about this puzzle, and smacked face-first into a large mound of snow that happened to be nearby. " Gah! What is this thing doing here!?"

" Strange that there's a snow mound here of all places."

" You could either blow it up with the Blast Mask or punch it as a Goron."

" I'm going with the latter here." I said, putting my bow away and taking out the Goron Mask. While it had only been about ten minutes since I last became Darmani, it felt like it had been forever. Maybe I was missing the power that came from being a creature that possessed tremendous strength--I was missing it. I put the mask on my face and only stumbled forward a couple of steps before I changed into a Goron through the mask's magic.

Turning to face the snow mound, I punched it, smashing it to pieces, revealing a treasure chest that I opened up, and took out a small key. Usually, keys were located far away from doors and required some backtracking, yet this one was in the same room as the door itself. I wasn't complaining as backtracking was something I didn't enjoy, but at the same time it was like whoever made this puzzle didn't put in much effort if it meant finding what was needed to unlock the door was close by. Oh well. No point in worrying about something that was beyond my realm of understanding--video games weren't my thing.

With the small key held firmly in my hand, I dropped down to the floor, walked over to the door, and unlocked it before opening it. The next room consisted of a snow filled area in-between two large larges that each featured strange circular switches. Before I could take in everything that was around me, strange objects started falling from the ceiling. It didn't take long for me to realize they were White Boes as they began swarming about the snowy ground.

" Remember what I said about them attacking in a group."

" Do I really need to fight them though?"

" It looks like as long as you don't walk onto the snow, they'll remain down there and attempt to jump up here in vain. Now I need to tell you something that I'm sure you most likely forgot about. Those circular switches can't be activated by normal means. Just standing on them will do nothing so this is where a Goron Pound is needed." Twilight answered. I stared at Her Highness with a confused look on my face. Goron Pound? What in the world was that? " Yep. I knew you forgot, Sunset. Luckily, I took the liberty of taking a mental note of what was written on Maud's gravestone when we healed her tormented soul."

" You remembered something I only glanced at once?"

" It pays to be highly educated."

" There's that smugness showing again."

" Ahem... Anyway, you read what Maud left behind on her gravestone, and one of those techniques was something called the Goron Pound. If you curl up into a ball, you can leap slightly into the air and come crashing down destroying weaker monsters while stunning stronger ones. It can also be used to activate switches like the ones you see all across this room, but you are vulnerable whilst airborne." Twilight said. I didn't recall ever reading that, but if I did then I had forgotten as Her Highness pointed out to me.

Sometimes, I wished she didn't have to rub in the fact that she completed her studies at Princess Celestia's School for Gifted Unicorns whereas I went to another world in disgrace. " I didn't mean to make you feel bad, Sunset, so I apologize."

" It's alright."

" The Goron Pound should be a useful technique."

" Only way to know is to try."

" It looks like you'll need to switch between being a human and Goron in order to reach all of the switches. All I can say is to not lose your cool when trying to figure out how this puzzle works." Twilight said. She knew me well enough to remind me about losing my temper.

First, I looked closely at the different circular switches scattered about. There were two pairs of switches: three that were yellow and two that were blue. My instincts told me that hitting one would affect the other so I needed to keep tabs on what happens to the other switch when I hit its partner.

I walked up to the yellow switch, jumped onto it, curled up, and leapt into the air before crashing down. The impact was enough to destroy several White Boes that happened to be nearby--the Goron Pound had quite the attack range if it managed to hit them where they had gathered--in addition to activating the switch. It sank into the ground and caused two other switches to rise up including one that blocked the door. The one switch that rose now acted as a platform but it involved jumping across a small gap to reach it, so I grabbed my face and took off the Goron Mask--I'm glad Twilight warned me that I would be changing between forms constantly.

Once I was human, I jumped across the gap, landed on the platform, and jumped again to the other side. On this side, I could see one of the two blue switches, so I put my mask back on, went through the transformation--complete with some stumbling about--became Darmani, jumped onto the switch, curled up into a ball, and pounded it into the ground. This caused the other blue switch to rise up leaving me confused as to what to do next. Luckily, I quickly figured that I had to pound the yellow switch I used to get to this side. I walked over to it, curled up, and slammed it down causing the first yellow switch to rise up and the third one to drop.

Pulling my mask off and changing back--this was pretty exhausting--I climbed up the raised blue switch avoiding the remaining White Boes, jumped onto the ledge, and was just about to walk through the door when something caught my attention.

" I can hear another fairy." I said cupping my hands to my ears.

" Your hearing must be pretty good for you to notice that."

" It's coming from above." I looked up at the ceiling and noticed that part of it looked darker than the rest--it looked like water had eroded it for quite some time. " Strange... That one part of the ceiling looks different as though it were hiding something." My gut was telling me it wasn't real, so I took out the Lens of Truth and looked through it to see what was really going on. In an instant, that part of the ceiling disappeared to reveal that it went up even higher, and also containing a bubble that had a Stray Fairy trapped inside.

" Now that's a clever place to hide one."

" Do you suppose Starlight put it up there?"

" I'm not really sure if she did it or if it was the work of whatever brought about the cold snap outside."

" I might as well save it since we do need all of them to restore Adagio." I said. Did I sound like I only cared about saving the fairy because it would help out in return when they were all gathered together? That wasn't my intention! I hoped Her Highness didn't think of me as selfish or something like that. Sometimes, I wish that I thought things through before speaking out.

Sighing heavily, I took out the Great Fairy's Mask and put it on my face. I never knew until now that the hair on the mask wasn't synthetic like the hair seen on other masks or on those cheap wigs. No, the hair felt natural. It showed that whoever crafted the mask--most likely the Great Fairy--wanted anyone who wore it to experience what it was like to be her despite not having the ability to use her vast magical powers. At least, I think that was what it was. With it on my face, I took out the Hero's Bow, aimed upward at the bubble, and fired an arrow only for it to sail past and embed itself in the ceiling behind it.

I almost felt like throwing my bow on the ground in anger, but I knew that would only cause Twilight to scold me for losing my temper. My skills had gotten better--thanks in large part to training for the Friendship Games--but it felt like I still needed some improvement in using such a simple skill as firing an arrow. Knowing that complaining would solve nothing, I aimed at the bubble carefully before firing an arrow only for it to hit the ceiling again. Maybe I was starting to lose patience because of what was coming upon finishing this temple. The thought of facing Ganondorf echoed in my mind.

In all the excitement--or lack thereof--I forgot that I would soon be facing him in battle. Twilight knew what he was like from what I told her about him, but being told about him is nothing compared to actually seeing him in person. The aura he exudes was enough to choke anyone to death in a matter of moments. That aura represented the purity of darkness, hatred, malice, and evil all at once. No one should have a power like that, yet Ganondorf did and it was very real.

Most who had that amount of power became corrupted by it, but he was different from them. I don't know how but he retained control of his sanity despite wielding all that power. Perhaps he was stronger than most?

For now, I couldn't allow myself to be distracted by the thought of fighting him. If I showed any kind of doubt, Her Highness would only be concerned--she had her own problems to deal with that involved the safety of Equestria. I fired one more arrow that connected with the bubble, bursting it, and freeing the Stray Fairy. It immediately sensed that I was wearing the Great Fairy's Mask and floated down to me before entering my body. Twilight quickly jotted down that this was the sixth one that we had found on the map.

Since there was nothing else of interest to be found--those additional red rupees were tempting but I didn't need them--I walked over to the door, opened it up, and entered the central chamber again at a much higher level--I refrained from looking down as I didn't want to fall from this height. The only way onward involved going across a large gap by rolling off of a ramp in front of me covered in snow. On the other side of the gap was another walkway that lead up to a stairway covered by ice.

To the right of it was a snow-covered slope that went around a corner and stopped at another door that wasn't covered by anything. Did I have to roll across on that slope? It was something I hadn't tried before, yet the alternative was a deep plunge.

" You'll need to become a Goron to get across to that door over there."

" How far down is it to the ground below?" I asked, making sure not to turn my eyes downward.

" It's a pretty steep drop so I wouldn't mis-judge your trajectory."

" You seem calm about being this high up above the ground."

" When I first became an alicorn, I struggled with basic flying skills--I also made my fair share of crashes. I couldn't even look down at the ground without freaking out! It took me some time before the idea of flight became second nature to me. Besides, I'm a fairy in this world so I'm used to flying around already." Twilight said. I wasn't sure if that last part was a jab against me, but I ignored that and focused on getting across the gap.

I had since put away the Great Fairy's Mask and Hero's Bow--before entering the central chamber--and took out the Goron Mask before putting it on. The usual stumbling about occurred during the transition between human and Goron, but I made sure to quickly press my hands against the wall just in case something went wrong. Within a few moments, I had become Darmani again, curled up by the door, and began to roll along the snow-covered walkway.

The momentum I gained from rolling quickly resulted in my spikes producing from my body and I sailed over the gap to the other side before crashing into a tiny section of wall in-between the frozen ice and the slope.

" I've got to work on stopping." I said as I got up onto my feet.

" You're liable to give yourself a concussion if you keep doing that."

" Tell me about it."

Since I had no other choice but to keep going, I curled up again and rolled along the slope, making sure to stay as close to the wall as possible so as to not roll off and down to the ground. There was a brief moment where I almost did that--nearly giving myself a heart-attack in the process--but I managed to maintain control and came to a stop in front of the door.

I opened it and entered a large room that looked pretty ordinary aside from four strange coloured panels in each corner of the room. " What do you suppose those are?"

" I'm not sure but I can sense a powerful magic radiating from them." Twilight said. She then began flying about in a mad panic upon realizing that the way out had suddenly become blocked by iron bars. " The door has been sealed! We're stuck in here with whatever is emitting that magical power." A maniacal laughter then started echoing around the room, prompting me to begin looking around to find out who or what was causing it.

" You can hear someone laughing, right?"

" We're not alone."

" I can't see who's doing it!" I said, my nerves becoming more panic-ridden. Suddenly, a bright light flashed from one of the panels illuminating the room in an eerie glow. This was followed by a strange looking old man wielding a large staff emerging from the panel. His robes flowed elegantly, the staff emitted a fiery blue hue that resonated with power, and his expression--despite being weird what with that face--bore a desire to subject me to powerful magic. Before I had a chance to properly assess the situation, the man began to run in place before disappearing. " Who or what was that?" I asked when he vanished.

" That was a Wizzrobe, an ancient sorcerer who can teleport around the room using those strange panels on the ground. You need to be very careful here, Sunset. He will appear from one of the panels and use his staff to fire a magical spell at you. If you get hit by that magic, it will inflict a lot of damage and who knows what else." Twilight answered.

" How am I supposed to keep up with him?"

" If you get too close when he appears, he'll quickly disappear and move to another location." Twilight answered. Before she could continue, the Wizzrobe appeared to my right, taunted me by moving in place, and fired magic from his staff. It landed a couple of inches in front of me and turned into a patch of ice that grew in size before stopping. I could see the vapours rising up from it indicating that it was particularly freezing in nature. " So, this Wizzrobe is a practitioner of ice magic. Fascinating..."

" Not from where I'm standing."

" You need to watch him closely and wait for the opportunity to strike."

" When will that happen?" I asked. The Wizzrobe then appeared in the upper left corner of the room, and was about to fire another magical ice blast my way. " I should probably keep moving and not become a sitting duck for him to freeze." Her Highness nodded and I moved away just as the icy blast from the Wizzrobe struck where I had just stood, the cold wind being felt across my back. I ran towards where he was standing but he quickly disappeared before I could reach him.

He next appeared in the lower right corner, and since my "running" wasn't exactly up to snuff, I curled up into a ball and rolled over just as the Wizzrobe was about to fire off another magical spell. I got to him before he could fire his magic and punched his stomach but then he disappeared and reappeared in the lower left corner. Grumbling, I rolled towards him only for him to teleport away just as I arrived. This was already starting to get on my nerves. It appeared that being a Goron didn't help when he runs away to avoid being attacked. I also didn't get what Her Highness was saying about waiting for the right opportunity.

When the Wizzrobe reappeared in the upper right corner, I immediately rolled over and accidentally veered off slightly to the left, hitting the back wall. Luckily, his magic went in a different direction so I was safe for a few moments.

" Things aren't going very well."

" Fighting someone who moves about so quickly is difficult in this body."

" You did punch him once, though."

" That was a lucky hit."

" So what will you do?"

" I've got to fight him as a human. I may not be as powerful as I am like this, but at least I'll be fast enough to keep up with him." I answered, grabbing my face. As I was pulling off the Goron Mask, the Wizzrobe reappeared and decided to take advantage of my temporary distraction.

He fired another magical attack, striking me just as I changed back to a human, and I was frozen in a block of ice with Twilight looking on in horror.

Chapter 26: Flaming Arrow

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 19, 2016
Chapter 26: Flaming Arrow

So there I was, frozen in a block of ice--again--just like what happened before when I explored a place filled with snow and ice. Twilight continued to scream out in hopes that I would break free of my confinement, but part of me wanted to take a moment to reflect upon everything I'd been through. My past began to flash before my eyes, the good and the bad became evident to me. The earliest recollection involved learning some magic from Princess Celestia and the disaster that ultimately ensued.

How ironic that being frozen would make me recall when I was taught how to use ice magic. I never really thought of it as important considering that fire magic proved to have so much more potential, but Princess Celestia insisted that using magic of all kinds would broaden my horizons and shape my future. When she showed me how powerful ice could be in the right context, I was determined to not only master it, but to be even better than her.

My first attempt at using ice magic was memorable to say the least. I was able to cast the magic perfectly without any trouble, yet it was something I couldn't control. All I remember was being frozen solid for about an hour before eventually thawing out--Princess Celestia later said that I was fortunate as I could've been frozen for a lot longer.

That one incident turned me away from ice magic, as the thought of being frozen was something I didn't want to experience again. Unfortunately, I would be reminded of this later on in life when I first experienced the holidays in the world that I now called home. Just seeing ice all around me resulted in me wanting to freak out--being frozen that had effect on my psyche--although my reactions were never displayed where others could see me--I had a reputation to maintain. The students of Canterlot High gave me strange looks and asked if I was okay, but I refused to answer them. In my heart at the time, showing fear was deemed weakness.

Even after living amongst humans and forging friendships with them, I still had problems when it came to ice. I couldn't even walk on it for more than ten seconds before slipping and landing hard on my butt or any other part of my body. That's why exploring that frozen cave in Hyrule made me feel so uneasy. All of that ice was enough to make me want to lose control of my mind, but I endured knowing that two worlds were in need of help.

And now, I had been frozen by powerful ice magic, just like when I was a filly. Had I gotten over my inate fear of ice? I could tolerate it a lot more than I used to, but the thought of being encased in a block of ice was too much for my mind to bear. Coming into Snowhead, I knew that there would be snow--hence the name Snowhead--yet ice was something unexpected. The one thing that I couldn't do was let Her Highness knew that I had a fear of ice. She had her own fears that were serious, but mine was due to a mishap that occurred because I wanted to prove myself superior.

How ironic--again--that my old self would cause problems for my current self.

My mind suddenly brought itself out of the past and into the present when Twilight began ramming her tiny frame against the ice in an effort to free me. Despite her best efforts, she lacked the power to break through ice--even her fairy magic lacked enough oomph to shatter it.

" Sunset! Please! You've got to break free!" Twilight shouted. Her concerns reached through to me and I began to slowly struggle in an effort to shatter the ice from within. I then looked on at the Wizzrobe who had since stopped teleporting around and was laughing at my misery. There was nothing I could do to prevent him from mocking me at that moment, but soon things would change. " Come on, Sunset! You can do it!" Twilight shouted.

There was one thing that I forgot about when it came to being frozen in ice within the narrative of the Legend of Zelda. It only lasts for about twenty seconds or so before it shatters of its own accord. Case in point, the ice shattered, freeing me mere moments later.

" Whoa!" I exclaimed, dropping to my hands and knees upon the ice shattering. " That's one moment I don't want to go through again."

" Sunset!!!!" Twilight exclaimed, hugging my cheek as hard as she could. " I thought you were done for!"

" Sorry to have worried you, Twilight."

" Maybe you should've stayed as a Goron."

" To be fair, it wouldn't have mattered whether I had chosen to remain like that or change back to this. I let my guard down and the Wizzrobe took advantage of that by freezing me in a block of ice. Granted, I did some thinking--I'll tell you more about it later--before escaping, but the point is that being frozen is something I truly despise." I said, my eyes locking onto the Wizzrobe who continued to laugh. He eventually stopped upon noticing my stare, and stared right back at me. " You may have gotten in a free hit buddy, but that will be the only one you'll ever get!"

He then spun around in the air a few times before disappearing, and I responded by drawing my sword and shield. What quickly became apparent was that I had no means of knowing where the Wizzrobe would appear next, and that gave him the clear advantage. He could attack me from any one of the four corners and I'd have mere seconds to avoid his magic or risk being frozen again.

" Do you think your shield will protect you from the ice?" Twilight asked as I raised my shield up.

" I'm not entirely sure. I know that a Mirror Shield can absorb magic and reflect it back at the user, but I don't have one of those on me."

" So, you're taking a gamble then?"

" Pretty much."

" I suggest trying just once to see if that shield of yours can handle it. If not then you should avoid being frozen at all costs. I don't know whether or not you've noticed it already, Sunset, but your health did take a slight nosedive." Twilight said. I knew I forgot something. That was the other thing that happened when you become frozen. The cold saps away your strength even though it doesn't feel like it. I had to watch my health carefully due to not having any healing fairies--something I must remember to pick up for future encounters with the more powerful monsters.

When the Wizzrobe reappeared on top of the northwestern panel, he spun around a few times and fired another blast of ice magic at me. With my shield up, I stood firm as the magic collided against it--it felt like I had been hit with a gale force wind due to how powerful the Wizzrobe's magic was. I got pushed back several feet yet I was able to deflect his magic using my shield although a small amount still landed on the ground, producing a smaller ice sheet. My shield didn't like getting hit like that and I quickly noticed that it had been dented slightly upon impact. If I had kept that up, I'd have lost full use of my shield, and the thought of being defenseless wasn't an option.

Seeing that I survived his magic, the Wizzrobe began jumping up and down with anger. This also left him distracted so I ran up and slashed him across the stomach with my sword causing him to disappear again. He reappeared a few moments later in the opposite corner, spun around a few times and fired more ice magic. Instead of using my shield, I simply jumped to the left and avoided the magic as it landed behind me with incredible force. It was at that point where I begun to figure out his attack pattern--I should've realized it sooner. The Wizzrobe warps around to attack when my guard was down, but runs away if I catch him too soon.

If I could attack him before he used his magic, that would give me the advantage. Without the use of his magic, he wasn't really that much of a threat.

" I need to strike before he does."

" If you spot him appearing from one of those panels before he has a chance to attack, he'll just disappear and relocate to another panel. I've noticed that when he finishes spinning around, he raises his staff and holds it in place for about two seconds before using his magic on you. If you can attack the Wizzrobe at that precise moment, you'll surely get the upper hand." Twilight answered. She then did a quick calculation with her hands--she reminded me of her human self--before addressing me again. " The only issue is that when you hit him, he will disappear and move to another panel."

" So it's a matter of being patient?"

" Yes. Also, I suggest you don't stand around in one spot and wait for him to appear. Why not move around while making sure not to get too close to the panels? By doing that, it will be easy for you to reach him before he can attack without him fleeing at the first opportunity." Twilight answered.

I followed Her Highness' advice and began running around making sure to keep my distance from the panels. A few moments later, the Wizzrobe appeared on the panel that was in the southwest corner--from where I entered the room from--and I ran over and slashed him again before he could use his magic. He immediately disappeared and then reappeared moments later on top of the panel in the northeast, and I repeated the process resulting in another vanishing act. By that point, I was beginning to feel confidant knowing that I had figured out the attack pattern, but that quickly faded when the Wizzrobe reappeared.

He appeared on the northwest panel, but instead of spinning around, he held up his staff with both hands and began running from panel to panel in a blurry manner. I had trouble keeping up with him at first, but he eventually stopped on the southeast panel and disappeared leaving me wondering what just happened.

" That was awkward." I said scratching my head.

" He did that for a reason." Twilight began. Before she could finish her thought, four different Wizzrobes appeared on each panel. They then began moving across the room quickly making it difficult to keep track of where they were going. " Sunset! Watch out!" Her Highness' warning was just in time when an icy blast came my way. I jumped backwards to avoid being frozen and focused on the Wizzrobes who continued moving about.

" Where did that come from?"

" I'm not sure as they were all moving around really fast."

" One of them had to have been not moving as he needs those precious seconds to prepare his attack."

" If you can determine which of the four Wizzrobes isn't moving, it should allow you to get over to him and strike before he can disappear." Twilight said. When they reappeared again moments later, I took a closer look to see who amongst them was standing still.

It then dawned on me that three of the four Wizzrobes looked like they were fading out of existence--they also lacked the blue fire that was on the tip of his staff. Of course! The others were mere illusions designed to confuse me into not focusing my attention on the real one. The illusions started running around in a mad panic but my eyes were clearly focused on the one who was spinning around. Unlike before, he wasn't concerned about trying to avoid me--perhaps he realized that doing so was pointless--so I ran over to him and slashed him prompting him to disappear along with his illusions.

Why was he going to such lengths? I didn't know the answer, but my best guess was that it was an act of desperation. He reappeared again and I immediately knew which one of them to attack, but that involved running over to the opposite side of the room. I ran towards the Wizzrobe only for him to fire his magic and getting frozen on the spot--the ice hit me just as I was about to swing my sword. He laughed at my misery before disappearing with his illusions, yet I quickly shattered my icy prison by shaking my arms repeatedly. When he reappeared behind me, he jumped up and down again giving me the chance to score a free hit.

He reappeared in the southeast corner--again he appeared on the opposite end of the room--and I ran over although he was able to fire his magic. Unlike before, I wasn't as close so I had a chance to avoid getting frozen. I avoided the icy blast by jumping to my left, and before he had a chance to disappear, I slashed the Wizzrobe once again. This time, he leapt into the air before landing on one leg and striking a really weird pose.

I assumed that this was another phase of the battle, yet my heart was relieved when he disappeared into flames along with his staff. The moment he vanished, the iron bars blocking the door rose up and a larger treasure chest materialized in the center of the room. I also saw the panels fade away into the floor and disappear indicating that their presence was connected to him. No doubt that the Wizzrobe was a truly powerful monster, and I had a feeling that this wasn't going to be my only encounter with him.

" Whew!" I exclaimed, dropping to my knees. " That was too close for comfort."

" You were magnificent, Sunset, despite getting frozen two times."

" My shield didn't fare very well either." I said, looking down at it. I rubbed my hand across the surface, bobbing up and down when it reached the dent courtesy of the ice magic that I blocked. While there was no doubt that it would still protect me from attacks, it needed to be repaired otherwise it could break upon colliding with a powerful blow. " Do you suppose I could get it repaired by visiting the Mountain Smithy when we're done in here?"

" I don't know if they can repair shields."

" Didn't Fancy Pants mention anything about it?"

" He was very adamant at seeing your sword so I assume that swords are the only things they work on."

" Only way we'll know is to ask when we next go there."

" That Razor Sword has certainly proven itself to be a most excellent improvement to your regular sword. I could tell that the Wizzrobe really didn't like being slashed by it, but you do realize you've probably got about eighty-five uses left before it loses its edge, right?" Twilight asked.

" And that still bugs me." I answered, putting my shield behind my back. " They could've at least attempted to make my sword even stronger despite the fact that I didn't have some gold dust." I looked down at the Razor Sword and immediately noticed some slight wear on it. " If they really needed it, why not get it from the Gorons? I'm sure they wouldn't mind giving them a few bottles worth."

" I don't think it's quite that simple, Sunset."

" How do you figure that?"

" Gold is a rare material no matter what world you're in, and both of us can attest to that what with having traveled to multiple worlds. The Gorons might see gold dust as something only they are allowed to have, and anyone else who wants some have to look elsewhere. At least, that's the way I see it." Twilight answered. If that was indeed the case, then if I wanted to make my sword even stronger, I had to win that race Fancy Pants and Tirek mentioned when the snow melts. " For now, we should focus on getting through this temple. You defeated the Wizzrobe so that means the treasure inside of the chest is rightfully yours." Twilight said.

" I could do with a new weapon."

" What makes you think that's what it is?"

" If this journey is the same as my previous one, then monsters like the Wizzrobe guard a powerful weapon." I answered. I walked over to the chest, opened it up, and took out an arrow whose tip was surrounded in a red prism. A powerful magic was brimming forth from it and felt warm to the touch. It reminded me of something I found back in Hyrule, but I couldn't recall what that might have been. " Told you so!"

" That's the Fire Arrow!" Twilight exclaimed, bobbing up and down. " If you combine it with your regular arrows, you can shoot flaming arrows using the Hero's Bow! It costs about two magic points in order to fire an arrow, so be weary of your magic meter running out. Fire Arrows can melt ice, light torches--Deku Sticks are now obsolete--and are really effective against monsters who are vulnerable to fire. This is most definitely a valuable treasure you've found."

At long last, I finally had the means to deal with ice and not worrying about being frozen upon touching it. It also meant I now had a better chance against those Freezards, as they wouldn't be able to stand up to a few Fire Arrows. It was at that moment when I remembered finding Fire Arrows back in Hyrule, and cursing myself for not using them and instead relying on my regular magic.

Granted, Fire Arrows weren't particularly useful back then aside from a couple of instances that involved lighting far-off distant torches, but now I had a chance to use them as intended without cheapening the experience. The only problem was that I had to use them sparingly due to their reliance on my magic meter--why couldn't it be viewable--so I couldn't go crazy and fire them--no pun intended--on everything that got in my way.

" Okay, so where do we go from here?"

" If I recall correctly, there was a block of ice that covered up a stairway, so you can melt that with the Fire Arrow. There was also a door that you could enter but you instead decided to roll across to this room--it wasn't the wrong decision considering what we found in here." Twilight answered.

" Maybe we should check out the regular door first and then melt the ice?"

" Then let's get moving. I hope you've recovered from your ordeal with the Wizzrobe as you've got to become a Goron if you want to get back across." Twilight answered. That was still an issue I was having problems coming to grips with. Like the Deku Mask before it, I assumed that I would be staying as a Deku Scrub throughout the duration of my exploration of Woodfall Temple rather than switch back and forth between forms.

It seems that going through Snowhead Temple required both human and Goron ingenuity--I suspected it before entering the temple--and it wouldn't surprise me if I had to rely on some Deku skills for a couple of things--it would surprise me.

Once I put the Fire Arrow away, I took out the Goron Mask and put it on my face. I began to stumble forward slightly before coming to a stop and just standing there as the magic began to take hold. One scream later--that no one could hear--I became Darmani and went through the door and back to the central chamber. The thought of falling down still haunted me as I didn't want to have to climb all the way back up--getting hurt was an unfortunate bonus--so I focused my attention squarely on my goal, curled up into a ball, used the snow as momentum, and jumped over the gap before crashing into the door.

Entering the door, I found myself in a very familiar room--from a certain perspective--so I looked down and noticed the empty large treasure chest on the floor below. I could also see those Real Bombchu from before although they hadn't noticed my presence, yet. My eyes then noticed the frozen eye switch from before and I knew what had to be done.

Pulling on the Goron Mask, I took it off and became human again before taking out the Hero's Bow.

" How am I supposed to get the Fire Arrow onto this?"

" If you take out what you got in the treasure chest, you could either rub it across the bow or somehow attach it to the bow. I'm honestly not sure how it's supposed to work as this is a form of magic that eludes even me." Twilight answered.

" Well, I might as well try anything and see what happens." I said, taking out the Fire Arrow from my pocket. I tried attaching it to the bow but that didn't work--the arrow merely dropped to my feet--so then I rubbed it across the bow. Doing so immediately produced a flame on the tip of the arrow, and that meant I was now in business. " What do you know? It looks like the first option ended up being correct, so let's see what these Fire Arrows can really do." I said. I aimed towards the frozen eye switch and fired a single arrow that melted the ice upon impact, activating the eye switch in the process.

All that happened was the platform next to the empty chest rising up to the upper level below dropping back down again and repeating the process in an endless loop. " I was hoping for something else like say a small chest that contained a Stray Fairy, but I guess having a short-cut will make things easier."

" Good thing you mentioned treasure chests, Sunset."

" How come?"

" I remember seeing a frozen treasure chest back in that one room with the three Freezards. You couldn't do anything about the ice before, but now you have the means to melt it and collect whatever was in it. Also, there was the frozen block and frozen switch back in that room where we found the Compass." Twilight answered.

" Oh no! Not more backtracking!" I moaned, slapping my forehead.

" At least you can play the Song of Soaring to warp back to the entrance. That should cut down on a lot of the backtracking."

" I should've expected this."

" Hold on!" Twilight announced. She cupped her hand to her ear in order to hear something. " I can hear the faint cry of a stray fairy coming from this room." She began flying around in an effort to pinpoint its location and then came back upon finding it. " There's a small treasure chest located further up, but I see no way of reaching it unless you can climb up the wall or something."

" Maybe there's more to it than appearances suggest?"

" The Lens of Truth! I keep forgetting that you have it on you." Twilight answered. To be fair, I was actually forgetting about it, too. Unlike the previous adventure, I haven't been using it as much as though it had been included in this game as an after-thought. Taking out the lens and raising to my eye, I noticed a series of steps going up the wall, but there was one tiny problem--no pun intended as these steps were literally that. " Those are some really small steps."

" You'll have to jump on them carefully to avoid falling down to the floor below."

" I don't want to deal with those Real Bombchus again."

" Then you should jump carefully."

Since I had to keep the Lens of Truth active until I reached the nook that housed the treasure chest, I had to work fast as I didn't want to lose too much magic power--I needed magic for my Fire Arrows--I walked over to where the first small step was and learned that they weren't even embedded into the wall. They were floating in mid-air close to the wall but not quite touching it. That made things a bit more awkward but if I wanted the Stray Fairy, I had to proceed with the utmost caution.

I jumped to the first step and almost fell due to how small it was. I then looked at the path the steps made and saw that they continued up and around the corner. I assumed it was a simple straight path but now it was more treacherous.

Jumping to the next steps in the sequence wasn't any easier while holding the lens in my hand, but I somehow managed to get across--I did almost fall off of the third step--and turned to the left so that I could continue jumping forward. The Real Bombchu had since somehow discovered my presence and began moving on the walls in their effort to reach me. I had no chance of using my shield to bounce them back so I continued jumping up making sure to ignore the monsters. Upon reaching the top, I jumped too far and dropped down slightly only for my hand to grab the edge of the step.

Her Highness looked on in terror as I struggled to climb up--I had to hold the lens with my teeth so that I could use my extra hand--but I managed and climbed up to the tiny nook before opening up the chest and freeing the Stray Fairy. This was my seventh one so I was about halfway through, but now I needed to get back down without getting the attention of those Real Bombchu--they were getting closer. I looked down to discover that the door I entered this room from was right below me, so I turned off the lens, put it away, and jumped to the ground below before going back to the central chamber again.

" Should I continue up to the next floor or go back to those previous rooms?"

" That's a difficult question for me to answer, but the decision is ultimately yours to make."

" Why do I have to make the choice, Twilight?"

" You're the heroine of this adventure."

" I do value your opinion, you know."

" While that may be true, all I can do is offer advice on what path to take. As the heroine, you have to make the final decision that will determine what happens next. I know it's a lot of unwarranted pressure on your shoulders, Sunset, but you have been in a similar situation in the past, right?" Twilight asked. Despite wanting to complain about having to make yet another important decision, Her Highness was unfortunately right.

I had been involved in similar situations in the past, and despite complaining about them to Spike--this was when he was my partner--I ended up making decisions that allowed me to progress through my journey across Hyrule. Unlike that one, this journey was much more stressful because of the three day time limit courtesy of the moon. If the moon falling from the sky wasn't such a dominating factor, I could easily make decisions--more like easy decisions--by thinking things through instead of having to make them there and then.

Knowing that it was on my hands, I quickly thought about my options. If I were to continue, I could progress further through the temple, but what if I got stuck due to not getting something important from one of those chests? I'd have to go back and pick up what I missed resulting in unnecessary backtracking. If I were to go back and get the items within those chests, I wouldn't be stuck later, but then it would mean backtracking just to get back to this area.

Either way, I had to resort to backtracking, the one thing I detested more than anything else.

" Fine... We'll go back to those previous rooms." I said.

" What made you choose that?"

" It was the lesser of two evils for me, Twilight."

" At least you don't have to go all the way back through those previous rooms to reach the entrance. You can simply play the Song of Soaring to get you there in a matter of moments, and I think we might learn something about that raised groove we saw that had an imprint of Majora's Mask on it." Twilight said.

" You believe I'll get warped right to it?"

" Want to guess any other place?"

" Point taken." I answered. That groove was something I simply ignored believing it to be nothing but an eyesore courtesy of Starlight Glimmer. If there was a reason why it was down there, warping to it might provide it with a valuable purpose.

I took out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch, raised it to my lips and played the Song of Soaring----I had to take a few moments to remember how it went as I only ever played it once as a Deku Scrub to get back to where Woodfall Temple was situated. Two massive wings suddenly protruded from either side of my body, wrapped themselves around my body like a warm blanket, and I began spinning around before everything went dark--I was no longer in the room.

Moments later, I appeared back at the entrance to Snowhead Temple, the wings disappearing into feathers that scattered away. Twilight was amazed at how fast we travelled back to the start, but I wasn't in the mood to appreciate what had happened. Her Highness turned and noticed that I was throwing up on the ground in the corner all because my stomach couldn't handle moving all that spinning.

" Are you alright?" Twilight asked, looking concerned.

" I just threw up over here!"

" It wasn't that bad."

" I'm not used to flying around with wings be it as a human or as a pony. Of course, you'd be fine with it as you've been flying with wings as an alicorn for at least a year. I just hope that my stomach can quickly adjust to spinning around so much." I said, throwing up some more. I didn't want to look at what came out of my mouth so I covered it up with some snow nearby, and walked over to the raised groove. " On a more pleasant note, you were right about the song warping us right to this groove."

" It was just a hunch that's all."

" I wonder if it has any other purpose aside from being a warp point location."

" If so then perhaps it's something we should look into. In any case, you need to start going back to those previous rooms as with the Fire Arrow, you can reach places that were inaccessible before. Oh, and do be careful of those White Boes as they have re-spawned since we were here last." Twilight said.

As if on cue, numerous White Boes dropped down from the ceiling and began advancing towards me. My first instinct was to become a Goron and punch them all away, but I thought that was too cruel considering they were relatively harmless. Instead, I put the ocarina away, took out the Razor Sword and began cutting them down with horizontal slashes. Each one I struck simply disappeared in a puff of smoke, yet part of me felt bad for them as all they were doing was protecting their territory.

When the last one was defeated, I walked forward, smashing the icicles in my path--a waste of Razor Sword usage--and down the passageway until I reached the three doors that initially stumped me. Before I had a chance to evaluate the situation, a White Wolfos rose up from the ground--the same one from before--and began running around in an attempt to rush in and attack. I didn't want to waste any time so when it lunged forward, I jumped back, it turned its back to me, and I struck it in the back causing it to burn in flames. With all the distractions gone, Twilight and I took a closer look.

The only door that was left to try was the one that had been covered in ice. Before, I had no means of melting the ice, but that was no longer the case thanks to having the proper item on hand. Taking out the Hero's Bow with Fire Arrows applied, I fired a single arrow that hit the ice--I couldn't miss with such a huge target--and exposed the door.

" Should I go through this new door?"

" You've got to check out the other two rooms because of needing to melt the ice in each of them, but I suppose going through this new door wouldn't hurt. Besides, it was covered by ice for a reason, so there must be something of importance behind it." Twilight answered.

" I'd better keep my sword out just in case." I said, putting my bow away and drawing my sword. I opened the door and was surprised to be back in the central chamber. I even recognized the stairway I used that went down to the lower level. " How about that? It's another short-cut that allows us to skip certain rooms. It might make some backtracking a little easier but I still don't like doing any of it."

" That door over there leads back to the room with the Freezards and the snow-covered path that you had to roll across. I think you can get rid of them without the need to become a Goron and gain access to the treasure chest by simply walking down a narrow walkway." Twilight said.

" I'd prefer not to switch to my Goron body just to do one simple thing." I said. Her Highness nodded in agreement. Whenever I became one of my alternate forms, I wanted to remain in that body for at least a minimum of five minutes and not five seconds when it comes to doing something. I wanted to appreciate what each form could do.

Walking over to the door and opening it, I entered the room that had the lava pool beneath the wooden walkway. The three Freezards were also in the room yet none of them turned to face me. I suspected they weren't capable of moving otherwise they would've moved by now in a bid to freeze me with their icy breath. The thought of melting them into puddles using Fire Arrows was very tempting, but I only needed to get rid of the one blocking my path to the treasure chest. Putting my sword away and switching to my bow, I fired an arrow that instantly melted the Freezard upon impact.

One Fire Arrow was enough to melt them and not multiple arrows as I originally assumed--at least I won't be wasting arrows and magic. The other two Freezards hadn't noticed my presence and continued to fire their icy breaths in unison, so I ignored them and walked over to the treasure chest. Upon opening it, I took out a small key. Coming back here proved to be beneficial as now I had the means to unlock a future door wherever it may be.

" A small key!"

" Surprised?"

" I was expecting another Stray Fairy, but at least with a key you can unlock a door somewhere."

" Keys are more useful than you realize, Twilight. Without them, opening up locked doors is impossible."

" I know that, Sunset, but my point still stands."

" Just teasing with you. Anyway, we should probably go back to that other room you mentioned that had the frozen switch and block. I don't know what I could possibly gain from using them but it might get us one step closer to completing this temple." I said. Pocketing the key, I walked back towards the door, opened it, and entered the central chamber. The ice that covered the door on the other side was tempting but I had to check that older room first.

" Grog! Any sign of Romani?" Applejack asked.

" You've been asking me that question constantly for the last couple of hours, and I keep telling you the same answer. I haven't seen any trace of your little sister. I know how agonizing this must be for you, Cremia, but you have to stop asking. Romani will show up whenever what happened to her has decided to bring her back."

" What if she doesn't come back?"

" That is something I hadn't counted on."

" Shoot! Reckon you oughta think of all possibilities! My sister is missin' and I'm rippin' my hair out trying to figure out what happened. The cows can easily be replaced though that'll take plenty of rupees, but Romani is irreplaceable!" Applejack said. Her sister's disappearance had grown worse during the past couple of hours when she discovered that the barn had been ransacked and the cows taken away. She had taken her anger out on Grog who didn't deserve it--she knew that but still continued yelling at him--but he took it in stride knowing how distraught she really was.

Applejack walked outside of the barn and screamed at the top of her lungs before dropping to her knees and bursting into tears. " When our father died, I promised that I would look after the ranch as well as protect Romani. The thought that she is somewhere out there all alone is somethin' I just can't accept." Grog then walked outside to join her and she got back up before turning to face him. " If the worst has happened... I... I... I don't know what ta do."

" Romani is a lot stronger than you give her credit for."

" She's also a little girl who don't know her way 'round this here crazy world."

" You need to realize that she won't remain a child forever, Cremia. One day, she will become an adult and you'll need to treat her as such. I know you promised your father and I won't disrespect his decision, but even he knew that the time would eventually come where Romani would grow up." Grog looked back at the barn before walking over and picking up a piece of the door. It most likely fell during the night when whatever struck the barn, yet he stared at it for a while before tossing it aside. " I'm not going to try to tell you what to do with regards to your sister, Cremia. I'm just saying that you should consider my opinion."

" Am I bein' overprotective?"

" You're acting just like your mother did, rest her soul."

" I can't change who I am, Grog."

" With how much time we have left, I don't doubt that for a second." Grog punched what remained of the door and it dropped to the ground with a loud thud. " We should start repairing the barn for those who plan on evacuating here tomorrow."

" Do y'all think we'll survive that thing?" Applejack asked, looking up at the moon that hung above the ranch. It's mere presence struck her heart with a sense of foreboding and a thought that their efforts would amount to nothing but a pointless endeavour. " Folks 'round town think it will fall sometime tomorrow night. They plan on fleein' to the farthest reaches in hopes of avoidin' what's gonna happen, yet I reckon it's for nothin'."

" It doesn't matter what we think about it. If they believe coming here will save them, who are we to deny them that?"

" I hope we've got enough food to feed 'em."

" Who is coming here tomorrow?"

" Anju along with her mother and grandmother." Applejack answered. She removed the Stetson hat from her head, pressed it against her chest before staring up at the moon and sighing heavily. " You know... I feel just plain awful 'bout Anju lately. She was supposed ta be gettin' married the day after tomorrow, but I doubt the wedding will even take place what with the moon falling down." She looked at Grog, then the barn, and finally up at the moon again. " Then again, Kafei has been missin' fer a month and no one knows where he is. I heard that her mother believes that he's two-timin' her, but I know Kafei better than that."

" Kafei... Wasn't he the guy you loved?"

" I had a thing fer him but he ended up choosing Anju over me. Part of me still loves him but I've accepted that he ultimately went with her. Despite how apologetic she can get over the smallest things, Anju will make for an excellent wife." Applejack answered.

" Do you know where Kafei is?"

" Nope!"

" Well, I'm sure he has his reasons for having just vanished."

" Maybe, but I reckon somethin' sinister is afoot." Applejack said. Her attention then veered forward upon seeing a woman in a beautiful dress running up towards the barn. She appeared to be in an awful hurry judging from how she was breathing heavily, and upon reaching Applejack and Grog, she dropped to her knees in exhaustion. " Mamamu Yan? What's gotten you so worked up?"

" I found her!"

" Huh? Found who?"

" I found Romani!"

" What!? My sister's alright? Where is she? I've got to see her right away!"

" She's over by the entrance to the ranch. I don't know how she got over there, but I came running over here to let you know, Cremia. But, I suggest you best be prepared for what you're about to see."

" Why should I be prepared to greet my little sister?"

" It's best for you to see for yourself." Mamamu Yan got back onto her feet, started running back in the direction she came from, and urged both Applejack and Grog to follow after her without any questions. The two shrugged their shoulders and ran behind her towards the ranch entrance, unaware that they were being watched by two shadowy figures who had been observing their conversation from a distance.

The two figures then took to the sky, their fell wings indicating that they weren't entirely human, and followed behind Applejack and the others.

My backtracking through to the previous rooms of the temple yielded some mixed results. When I went back to the room that housed the chest where I acquired the Compass, I had forgotten about the White Wolfos hiding behind the ice chunk that wasn't covering up anything--it got in a free hit because of my poor memory--but I destroyed it despite slipping on the ice a few times--I really despise ice. With it gone, I used Fire Arrows to melt the ice, freeing the switch and block.

Pressing the switch caused a treasure chest to materialize on top of a raised platform, yet the block couldn't be pushed with my current strength. How was that even possible!? I should've been able to push it along the ice with ease.

It turned out that I needed to become Darmani, so I took out the Goron Mask, put it on, went through the stumbling bit, and eventually started to push the block along upon finishing my transformation. It couldn't be pushed just anywhere otherwise I wouldn't be able to reach the platform--it was just slightly above my average jumping height--so I had to think carefully as to where to push the block so that it would reach its destination. The floor had a tiny raised groove that could be used to stop the block in case it slid too far, and combined with the layout of the icy floor, it was a matter of using the right angles.

Pushing the block was easy thanks to Goron strength and it didn't take long for me to push it into the right location--there wasn't an actual location for the block to go so I had to hope that it would go where I wanted it and luckily it did. I had to take off the Goron Mask--apparently they aren't very good at climbing up things or jumping--so I grabbed my face, pulled the mask off, changed back to normal whilst flipping my head back, and climbed up onto the block and eventually the platform. Opening the chest revealed the eighth Stray Fairy who immediately entered my body, but that's when I realized there was a second platform I could reach using the block.

" There's a door on that platform." Twilight announced.

" Where do you suppose it leads to?" I asked.

" Why don't we take a look at the Dungeon Map and find out? We should be using it more often to figure out where we are and not just use it to mark off any Stray Fairies we run into along the way with my magic." Twilight answered. I reached into my pocket, pulled the map out, and unfurled it before Her Highness took a closer look at it. " That door goes back to a previous room. If I'm not mistaken, it goes back to the room where we found the first small key."

" You'll have to remind me what was in that room."

" The two blocks stacked on top of each other?"

" Really? Why would we want to go back to that room? I believe we acquired everything in there."

" I believe we missed something, but I don't quite recall what it was. In any case, I suggest checking just to be on the safe side." Twilight said. Despite my initial protests, I had to ultimately agree with what Her Highness was saying. Besides, a treasure chest icon was in the room--the Compass' ability at work--and I didn't want to ignore it in case there was something inside of it that could be useful.

I put the Goron Mask back on, stumbled into the block by tripping over it, I changed back into Darmani upon falling flat on my face. I remained quiet as I started to push the block around in hopes of pushing it into the proper place. Twilight asked me if I was okay and my only response was a low-sounding moan--landing face-first on the ice would result in that kind of reaction--so she quickly dropped her concerns as I continued pushing.

" That... Really hurt." I said, my teeth gritting.

" You need to figure out a way to stop that stumbling."

" Before I get hurt even worse next time." I added, pushing the block until it stopped at the edge of the ice. I pushed it to the right, then forward, then left, then forward again, and finally right until it reached its destination. " I didn't mean to give you a cold reception, Twilight."

" I understand, Sunset. If I were in your shoes, I'd have done the same thing."

Hearing her say that made me feel a bit better, but the fact that I stumbled shouldn't have even happened in the first place. Was this due to something that occurred when Maud's spirit was sealed into the Goron Mask? Or, perhaps it was just an unfortunate side-effect? Whatever the reason, I couldn't allow it to become a distraction.

With the block in its new location, I grabbed my face, pulled off the mask, flipped my head back upon changing back to normal, and climbed onto the block before jumping over to the platform and going through the door. It lead me back to the room Twilight said that featured the two stacked blocks--they were still in the same place--and to my surprise, the top block now served as a small platform I could use to reach a treasure chest on a platform I couldn't have gotten to previously. I also noticed two pots over there yet something about their location concerned me.

Normally, pots would be located in more pristine locations so as to give the room some class, but these two pots were just sitting there on the platform. Had someone left them there for me to pick up some useful supplies or was the other option a possibility? I walked until I reached the edge of the ledge I entered the room from, then both pots suddenly rose up on their own and came flying at me. I raised my shield just in time as both pots shattered on impact--nothing was inside either one.

" That was a little too obvious."

" Sunset? What just happened?"

" Some pots contain magic that enable them to attack anyone who gets too close to them. They don't do much damage but they can definitely catch you by surprise as you don't think of them as being all that threatening." I answered.

" I'm absolutely fascinated by this! Just give me a moment to take a closer look." Twilight said. She floated down to the ground by my feet--that was where the pieces of the pots landed after colliding with my shield--and looked closely at the pieces. I thought she was being silly for wanting to do something I saw that was pointless, but then Her Highness floated back up, her eyes were brimming with excitement. " I sensed a little magic among the pieces. Whoever enchanted those pots certainly knew what they were doing."

" You think it was an advanced magic spell?"

" No, but it's a kind of magic that we don't have in Equestria just yet."

" Only you would consider studying a magic-infused pot for research purposes." I said sarcastically.

" I can't help myself."

" Of course you can't." I said sarcastically. Twilight and I then started chuckling before getting back to the task at hand. I jumped onto the block tower, then to the platform, walked over to the treasure chest, and opened it up to reveal another Stray Fairy. " This makes our ninth one if I have my calculations correct." It then entered my body without a moment's hesitation, and I jumped back across to the other platform. " Where do we have to go now?"

" I think we've covered all of the backtracking." Twilight answered. She then began to think to herself but then suddenly remembered something. " There was that chunk of ice near the bottom of the central chamber that we couldn't anything about. Perhaps we should check that out before continuing upward. What do you think, Sunset?"

" We've come this far with the backtracking so we might as well go the rest of the way." I answered. Fortunately, I didn't have to go that far back thanks to melting the ice back in the entrance room of the temple--if I hadn't then I'd have to go through that Freezard room first before the central chamber.

I went back into the previous room as it connected to the entrance room--I chose to avoid the White Wolfos this time instead of fighting it--jumped down to the ground, ran over to the door, and entered it appearing back at the start of the temple--close enough as the raised groove was down the passageway. The White Wolfos--I remembered this one at the very least--rose up from the ground, ran around, and lunged forward--its claws wanting to slash my throat. I also noticed the White Boes dropping down from the ceiling, so I made a mad dash for the door I thawed out from the ice earlier.

In the central chamber, I began breathing heavily by patting my chest where my heart was--that was too close a call for my liking--and began looking around. The door that was covered by ice was directly in front of me so I walked over making sure not to run--I didn't want to drop down to the floor below--and stopped mere inches from the ice knowing I would be frozen solid if I touched it by accident.

Taking out the Hero's Bow with the Fire Arrow empowering my arrows, I fired a single shot that melted the ice, and allowed me to enter the next room. As soon as I entered, the cold blast that came from a Freezard could be heard throughout the room. What actually had my concern was how this room was set up. It consisted of many small platforms with a few featuring unlit torches on them. It didn't take me long to figure out that I needed to light the torches with some Fire Arrows, yet I believed that my magic power had gotten low due to saving that one Stray Fairy earlier by using the Lens of Truth.

" You can easily pick off those Freezards from a distance with your Fire Arrows."

" I know, but do I have enough magic power? Bah! If only I knew how much I had left."

" Well, I should be able to tell you."

" How can do you do that?"

" Fairies are magical creatures, Sunset, so it would make sense that I could sense the magic coming from other beings." Twilight answered. She floated in front of my face and began staring at me with her eyes opened wide. I don't think Her Highness knew how she hoped to read my magic power, but she suddenly surprised me with her answer. " You've got a small amount left that should be enough to take care of the Freezards, providing you don't miss."

" I'm sorry I doubted you."

" Magic is my specialty after all."

" No arguments there." I said. The Freezards, much like the ones back in that other room, didn't move from their positions, so if anything they were merely a distraction that served to punish anyone who tried to go through this room too quickly. Why anyone would want to do that made no sense but I supposed someone--Rainbow Dash--would try it to prove they were good enough.

With Hero's Bow in hand, I fired flaming arrows at each Freezard, causing them to melt upon being struck. When the last one melted into a puddle, a small treasure chest materialized on a platform at the back of the room next to a torch and a pair of pots. It was at that moment where the flames from my arrows disappeared indicating that my magic power had been depleted. Since I needed magic, I made my way across to the chest hoping some magic could be found inside of the pots. I had to be careful going along as one misstep would result in falling down below and having to backtrack up here again.

After jumping across--I almost fell a couple of times--I reached the platform and smashed the pots collecting two magic jars. My magic power was restored so now I could light up the torches, but first I opened up the treasure chest and collected another Stray Fairy--this one was number ten.

" Okay! You need to concentrate very carefully if you want to light up the torches. Your targets are very small so if you accidentally miss, you'll have to waste precious magic shooting at them again." Twilight said.

" I could just take things slowly."

" Not a chance in this room. Can you feel the cool breeze?" Twilight asked. I nodded my head. " That breeze is sure to blow out the torches after a while, so going from torch to torch would only cause one of them to snuff out before you can light them all. That's why you need to hit them from a distance."

" To prevent them from snuffing out?"

" Yes."

Her Highness was asking a pretty tall order from me but I knew that I had to rise to the challenge. The first of the three torches was right next to me, but since I didn't want to be that close to it, I jumped over to the next platform, and aimed my bow at it. Before firing an arrow, I shuffled my body around to make sure that I could hit each from my current position--I could although one torch was really far away--before lighting up the first torch. As the flame began to burn brightly, I turned slightly left and fired a second arrow that streaked through the air, striking my target and setting it ablaze.

The final torch was to my right and far away as I had established, but I fired an arrow anyway that just narrowly missed the torch. Cursing under my breath for missing, I quickly loaded another arrow and fired it where it ignited the torch causing iron bars on a door that was behind me to rise up. I couldn't believe that I missed the torch by a couple of inches wasting an arrow and magic at the same time--actually, I could believe it--so I walked over towards the door without saying another word. Opening the door, I entered the central chamber again via a closed-off circular room that featured a round switch in the center.

" It's one of those switches I need to pound as Darmani."

" Perhaps activating it will cause a drastic change to the temple?"

" Might as well see what happens." I said. Putting away the Hero's Bow and taking out the Goron Mask, I put it on my face and stumbled about although I couldn't go very far what with this section of the chamber being closed off. Once I screamed and changed into Darmani, I jumped onto the switch, curled up into a ball, and leapt into the air before crashing down on the switch. Suddenly, a massive column rose up from the ground and continued to rise until it stopped very close to the ceiling. The column was made of solid rock although some parts looked like they were made of solid ice. " Why did I activate that switch? Now we can't go any further!"

" Take a look at those odd-coloured sections on the column, Sunset."

" They're just chunks of ice from what I can see."

" If that's true then perhaps you can smash them to pieces with your fists."

" What will that do?"

" I'm not sure just yet but I'm certain I'll figure it out. In the meantime, I think you'll need to warp back to the entrance of the temple and work your way up to where the ice on the lower part of the column is located." Twilight answered. She folded her arms, closed her eyes, and began thinking about how best for me to get there. I cursed myself under my breath for making things more complicated, but Her Highness insisted that I did the right thing by activating the switch. " If you can get to the room where we found the map, you can take that short-cut and end up in front of the ice on that column."

" How certain are you?"

" I'm pretty certain but checking the map wouldn't hurt." Twilight answered, looking at me with her eyes opened wide. Sighing, I took out the Dungeon Map and looked at the different rooms until I found the one that she mentioned--it was the room that housed the Stray Fairy that involved jumping on tiny platforms that were invisible.

While other rooms also connected to the central chamber, that particular room would take me to where I needed to go. Even though the column was what needed to appear in order to progress further, the one problem was that certain paths were now no longer accessible. I thought going back the way I came by going through that one door that connected with the room with the initial Freezards would be essential, but that assumption proved false. There was no other alternative but to use the Song of Soaring and go back to the beginning.

I then wondered if this was going to become an issue in the remaining temples. If so then I wasn't looking forward to what I had to do in those places. Since I preferred playing the ocarina as opposed to the drums--I lacked finesse unlike Pinkie who was a natural--I grabbed my face, pulled the Goron Mask off, and flipped my head back allowing my hair to flow about briefly--wearing that mask was stuffy--put it away behind my back, and took out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch. I then played the Song of Soaring, the giant wings appeared from either side of my body, wrapping themselves around me before I disappeared into thin air.

" Why are we stoppin'?" Applejack asked.

" There's something you need to see, Cremia."

" My sister needs me and y'all want me ta stop and look at somethin'?"

" I really insist that you look. It'll help you understand what all of us chose to ignore regardin' your sister."

" Fine!" Applejack said, looking down at the ground. " What in the hay is that!?" Where Mamamu Yan had stopped them from reaching Apple Bloom, Applejack noticed what appeared to be some kind of glowing slime. It gave off a strange pulsation every now and again as though it were alive. She then looked around and noticed other locations across the ranch had slime. What she couldn't see was that there was slime all over the place including behind the house. " I ain't never seen anything like it before."

" It looks like somethin' that was execrated by an unnatural force."

" What are y'all gettin' at? Also, what does this have ta do with my sister?"

" Remember how she kept on telling everyone the other day about the ghosts who come around here at this time each year? What we're looking at is probably what those things left behind as they wandered across the ranch. I know it sounds crazy, Cremia, but what if Romani was tellin' the truth? What if there were ghosts who took away the cows in the middle of the night as we slept? If Romani had every intention of protecting them, was she taken as well?"

" You're right, Mamamu Yan! That's just plumb crazy!" Applejack answered. She continued to remain stubborn over the fact that ghosts had abducted the cows, but this stance soon started to crack under immense pressure. The damage done to the barn roof could've only been done by something that wasn't human. The strange residue wasn't normal either and further provided evidence that ghosts came by while everyone slept. " I don't ever recall Romani wantin' ta protect the cows. She preferred ta play around with her bow and shootin' at the target she put together a couple of weeks ago." It then dawned on her that she found the bow in the barn.

" What's wrong?"

" I found Romani's bow in the barn earlier. You don't think she went in there last night?"

" She must have done if you found her bow lying there on the ground. That means whatever took the cows had taken her, and that also means that what she was trying to tell us actually happened as Mamamu Yan says." Grog's words were harsh in nature yet Applejack refused to deny them. How could she what with the evidence stacked against her? " While we may never know what transpired last night, what we can agree on is Romani was in the barn."

" Mamamu Yan... Please take me to see my sister."

" Alright, but again let me stress that you won't like what you see." Mamamu Yan resumed running towards the entrance of Romani Ranch with Applejack and Grog following close behind making sure to avoid the slime scattered about. A few moments later and they arrived where they discovered a shocking sight. Sitting on a large rock was Apple Bloom, yet she appeared to be absent-minded. Her expression was one of shock and she occasionally shook her head violently. " As you can see, Cremia, this is how I found her when I came over here to see if that boulder had finally been removed."

" Romani... What in the hay has happened ta my little sister?"

" She has trouble remembering what she did the other night among other things."

" You mean she's got amnesia!?"

" I think it's a lot worse than that."

" Romani? Can ya hear me?" Applejack asked, addressing Apple Bloom in hopes that she would listen. The younger sister turned to face her, a confused expression spread across her face, and she simply turned her attention back to staring blankly out at nothing. " It's me, your big sister, Cremia. I've been worried sick about where y'all have been, but I see that everythin's okay now." Again, Apple Bloom looked at her with her expression before resuming her blank stare. " What has happened to you?"

" It's like her memory has been messed up somehow."

" How can that even happen, Grog?"

" Your guess is as good as mine."

" Romani? Please! Say somethin', anythin'!"

" Uhhh..." Apple Bloom began, clutching her head with her hands as though she were struggling to speak. " Ro-Romani? Is that my name? I think it is but... I can't be sure 'bout that... It don't make a lick o' sense." She stared forward after letting go of her head before turning her attention towards Applejack and the others. " Why... am I sitting here? How did I... get here... my memory... Romani doesn't remember how she got here."

" No... This can't be!" Applejack shouted, dropping to her knees.

" I can't believe this has happened."

" Listen... I'm gonna take her back to the house and put her to bed. I don't know what's happened to Romani, but at the very least I can help her get some rest. I'm sorry fer being so sudden with my decision but I've got plenty here ta think about." Applejack said.

" Bed... Romani doesn't need to sleep. Sleep... Do I need ta sleep?" Apple Bloom asked.

" Everythin's gonna be alright now, sugarcube." Applejack answered. She grabbed her sister's hand and began to walk back towards Mama's House, the name of the house that the two sisters lived in. She walked only a few feet before turning around to face both Grog and Mamamu Yan. " I won't be long. When I get back, we're gonna figure out what happened with Romani, even if I have ta turn this here ranch upside-down." The look of seriousness in Applejack's face told the others that she was dead serious. They hadn't seen her with that look since the day her and Apple Bloom's father passed away.

She resumed walking slowly back to the house, holding Apple Bloom's hand, the younger sister obviously struggling to walk straight due to being so disoriented. As Applejack looked down at her sister, tears began trickling down her face. In her heart, she failed to protect Apple Bloom, a promise she had made on their father's deathbed.

" Are you... my sister?"

" Yes."

" Romani doesn't... remember much about you... but I do remember a name... Cremia."

" It's a start." Applejack said. As the two continued walking back to the house, the two figures who had followed her from before continued to observe them from a distance. One of them appeared to be agitated over her presence while the other calmed their companion down. Why were they at Romani Ranch? What had brought them there?

Chapter 27: The Mechanical Rodeo

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 26, 2016
Chapter 27: The Mechanical Rodeo.

Her Highness suggesting I go back to the beginning of Snowhead Temple was an okay idea in theory. Since I had gotten myself hopelessly lost--despite having a map that showed me where to go--playing the Song of Soaring was my best bet of regaining my sense of direction. The only problem was that I had to go through some annoying rooms again in order to reach my destination. Upon pounding down a switch as Darmani, a large column rose up until it almost touched the ceiling in the central chamber. I initially believed I had made a grievous mistake but Twilight reassured me that I had done the right thing.

But had I though? The column itself blocked off certain pathways throughout the central chamber, and that meant taking a different route to get to where I needed to go. What was interesting is that there were four pieces of ice embedded within the column, pieces that could easily be punched out of place using my Goron fists. I didn't understand the significance behind those pieces, yet Twilight believed it was part of a puzzle that would eventually reveal itself.

Getting back up there involved switching between my human and Gorons forms--also dealing with monsters that I didn't want to fight again--a fact that I was starting to despise; changing from one form to the form and back again only served to exhaust my reserves. If there was a bright spot in all of this, it would be activating a switch in the room that housed the map--with a little help from my Fire Arrows. By using a platform that raised and lowered between two floors, I skipped past a section of the temple without having to go through those specific rooms again. It not only saved me some time but also from losing my sanity.

Upon reaching the section of the column that had the ice embedded within it, I decided to walk up to it to get a closer look--I made sure to put on the Goron Mask before entering the central chamber in case my stumbling would cause me to fall off. It was actually impressive how the ice could integrate so well with the solid rock that was this column. It was like the ice was begging for someone to come along and smash it. Each piece had strange symbols carved into them, a truly astonishing sight.

Neither Twilight nor I could figure out what they meant, so I decided to ignore it. It's not like it was anything important--and it wasn't--but in a place like this, you should always view everything as suspicious.

" So if I punch this piece of ice, it should cause the column to drop down?" I asked.

" It will only drop a little bit, Sunset." Twilight answered.

" Then what's the point in making the column drop just a tiny bit?"

" We can't see it right now because of where we're standing, but I suspect it will become clearer to us as we progress further upwards to the top. I know my words don't sound entirely convincing, but what other choice is there?" Twilight asked.

" I see your point."

" If you're ready to punch out the ice, feel free to do so."

Part of me didn't want to do it in case it would cause a problem later on, but the look in Twilight's eyes convinced me to go through with it. I walked up until I was right in front of the ice--I could feel its cold touch across my skin--I punched it with my fist, the ice slid out of the column, and smashed into pieces. The column dropped down slightly despite not noticing it at first--I had to look up to confirm that it had dropped--but before continuing, I noticed that there was a fifth section that looked different.

Unlike the other four that were made of ice, this one looked solid in appearance. I punched out the second piece of ice, dropping the column down again slightly, but then I turned to face Twilight with a confused look.

" Okay, so now what do I do?"

" You need to get up to the next floor and smash those remaining two pieces of ice."

" Oh... Right." I said, sheepishly. How could I have made myself to look like an idiot? Of course I knew where to go next! I slapped my forehead before turning to look at the
way forward. A large chunk of ice had covered up a stairway to the next floor earlier, but I melted it away with a Fire Arrow. The only issue involved rolling across a snow-covered slope
to reach it, and I wasn't liking the idea. " If I slip on that slope and drop down back to the bottom, I'll have to climb back up here again."

" Maybe you won't need to use the slope."

" What do you mean?"

" Take a look down there." Twilight answered. Just below the slope was a metal cross-stitched fence complete with a raised section that went from where I was standing all the way over to the stairway. At the end was a ladder I could use to climb up in case I thought I was stuck or something. Seeing all of that brought a smile to my face. " I'm guessing that fence is there in case you accidentally fell off the slope."

" I think it was meant to be used if I was coming over here given where that ladder is situated."

" At least you won't have to roll along the slope now."

" I didn't want to do it in the first place."

" You had no choice." Twilight said, urging me to look down. " There's no ladder on this side so you had to roll along the slope. It's not like it was a bad thing, Sunset, despite how stressful it might have been for you. By rolling along the slope, you were able to get some experience that could only be achieved as a Goron. I'm certain there will be other slopes to traverse and there won't be any fencing below them."

" Are you trying to freak me out, Twilight?"

" Not at all! I'm just saying that you need to get used to some of the more difficult aspects of that Goron body of yours. If you master it sooner, it will help you out later instead of being completely stuck because of not doing it initially." Twilight answered.

Her Highness certainly had her way with words. I knew she was trying to make me feel better, but she really needed to choose her words carefully. I had experienced things that she couldn't even begin to imagine. No doubt she would be completely overwhelmed by those same experiences when we chance upon them. I mean, she already freaked out over certain matters that didn't faze me because of prior experiences. Perhaps focusing on her own well-being would serve her better for now rather than making me feel even more nervous.

Despite everything I had been through in Snowhead Temple, the worst was yet to come and I wasn't referring to the source behind the cold snap. I still had a fated contest lurking before me against Ganondorf, the one who had brought me here to Termina in the first place in his bid to make me suffer. Once this temple and by extent, the entire region, had been restored to normal, the Dark Lord wished to test my strength to see if I had gotten stronger since our previous contest. When I fought him before, I was completely overwhelmed and left in a near-broken heap within a matter of minutes.

That was because the level of experience between him and I was far too great. I was a unicorn turned human who wanted to live an ordinary life--as ordinary as I could make it what with all the magic--yet Ganondorf was a demon whose power had grown over centuries. He wielded a complete Triforce that granted him power far beyond any mere mortal--his power dwarfed Princess Celestia and Princess Luna combined several times over--and could easily conquer all that he surveyed. I knew he wanted me to become his apprentice and cast aside the life I had been given by Her Highness, yet I didn't want to throw that away.

Would I be able to resist him? Maybe, but his words were soothing in their attempt to manipulate my mind. That was something I knew Ganondorf still possessed despite being older now than he was in my previous adventure. He was a master of manipulating others behind the scenes. In his twisted black heart, everything was a game to him and he played to win no matter what happened to everyone else. I had no doubt that my mental state would be tested alongside the obvious physical state.

Twilight began bopping me on the head, wondering if I was okay, and I told her that I was just thinking about random nonsense. Deep down, I knew she was aware that my upcoming contest with Ganondorf was plaguing my mind every waking moment. Why lie to my friend and mentor? Simple... I didn't want to worry her.

Since I had no intention of rolling on the slope to reach the stairway--I wasn't going to drop down below if I accidentally slipped off but I didn't want to do it--I jumped down to the fence walkway below, walked around until I reached the ladder, and climbed up until I stood before the stairway. Droplets of water trickled down from the entrance where the ice once stood--it looked somewhat pretty--but I ignored it and walked up to the next floor.

" There are the other two pieces of ice."

" You need to approach this carefully, Sunset." Twilight said, looking at our surroundings. " You can break one of the pieces, but then you'll have to roll down that slope to your right to smash the other one. The only difference here is that there's no fence to keep you from falling down below."

" That's all I need."

" Do you still have that key?"

" Yeah." I answered, taking it out from behind my back. " I never lose these things because they are essential for progression. Why do you ask?

" There's a locked door down there at the end of the slope." Twilight answered. I looked for myself and sure enough, there was indeed a locked door. I was wondering when I was going to use that key I picked up earlier, and this was it although it involved rolling down a treacherous path to reach it.

" We can also see what that fifth piece is."

" It looks to be a platform you can use."

" Let me check something." I said, putting away the key, taking out the map, and unfurling it. " According to the map, there's another stairway that will take us up to the next floor which is where the source of the cold weather is located." I knew this was true as a skull icon indicated it, and my previous experiences also reaffirmed it.

That lead to another problem. If I go and smash the remaining piece of ice, I won't be able to reach the stairway as the platform would be too low. Then again, perhaps there was something else I wasn't looking at? The map wasn't as detailed as I liked it to be--it mainly consisted of someone's drawing with only a few distinguishing features that were deemed important to jot down--but it was better than going around blindly without a clue as to where to go.

Putting the map away, I turned my attention towards the slope that lay before me. I needed to roll down through the middle so as to not roll off the side or into the wall and lose my momentum. A part of me didn't want to go through with it in case I made a mistake, but Her Highness gave me a much needed confidence boost by saying I could do it. Those words were enough to drive away any doubts I had. I curled up into a ball and began rolling along the middle of the slope. At first, I almost fell off when my body tilted to the left, but I managed to regain my balance by tilting to the right.

After what felt like forever, I crashed into another metal fence--thank goodness that was there otherwise I'd have rolled off the edge--and got back onto my feet before assessing the situation. The locked door was behind me and the remaining piece of ice was in front of me still lodged in the column. Before I walked forward, I tapped the ground several times to make sure that it wasn't slippery or anything--it wasn't.

" You like being cautious, don't you, Sunset?"

" If it prevents me from dropping like a lead stone, then I'm all for it."

" I'm sure you could easily survive such a fall with that body."

" Maybe, but I don't want to risk it." I said, walking forward along the path until I stopped at the ice. With one punch, I lodged it from the column--it shattered to pieces--causing the column to drop down a little bit more. " Well, that was the last piece of ice that needed to be removed, but I'm still not sure about all this, Twilight. What if there was another way I could've used instead of simply smashing the column down?"

" I know you're still hesitant about it, but you need to trust my judgement."

" You figured out it out?"

" Think of the column as being part of a giant puzzle. You activated the switch that raised it from the ground, blocking off some routes in the process. While that was an unfortunate side-effect, it was necessary in order to continue progressing through Snowhead Temple. By destroying parts of the column, you're creating another path for us although it doesn't quite look right upon first appearances." Twilight answered.

" So, I'm doing the right thing?"

" Yes. I don't see any other option other than to knock down the column."

" The only way we'll know is when we get up to the highest level." I said. I turned around, walked back to the locked door, and opened it with the key. Before I entered the next room, I noticed something most unexpected. " Would you look at that? If I roll back up the slope, I can easily use that platform to walk across to where those snowballs are located. Maybe we ought to check that out first?"

" Maybe, but keys usually lead us in the right direction."

" Good point." I said. Opening the door, I entered the next room and almost got pelted in the face with a giant snowball. " Where did that come from?" My question was quickly answered when some kind of strange creature popped out from underneath the snow. It looked like a ghost--one that sported a beard--with its emotionless expression, but before I could make a move, it suddenly tossed another snowball at me. I had no time to dodge or take a defensive action, resulting in being hit in the face and knocked back into the wall. " What in the world is that thing?" I asked. A few more began rising from beneath the snow and began throwing snowballs at me.

" That creature is called an Eeno. It may look harmless but it can cause a lot of damage by throwing snowballs at you. They come in different sizes and that affects the size of the snowballs they throw at you." Twilight answered.

" Is there anything I can do to stop them?"

" If you attack them enough times, they will split into two smaller ones, but only the larger Eeno are capable of that."

" What about using fire? They look like they're made of snow."

" Eeno's are extremely weak against fire. If you use a Fire Arrow, you can melt them down instantly and they won't split up. You have to be careful if you decide to use arrows as you'll be vulnerable to their snowballs." Twilight said.

After what I've been through so far on this journey and throughout my previous one, being hit by giant snowballs was nothing more than a mere nuisance. Twilight's warning was warranted, however, as those snowballs would amount up to a lot of damage were I to allow myself to be pelted constantly. I quickly counted four Eenos--two small ones and two big ones--shuffling about the snow, so I knew the big ones were the true threats.

Grabbing my face, I took off the Goron Mask, flipped back my head upon changing back to normal, put the mask away, and took out the Hero's Bow. The Eenos had since began their barrage of tossing snowballs at me--I got hit by the two small snowballs--but I had their weakness well in hand. I aimed at the largest one and shot an arrow that sailed through the air and melted it into a puddle of water upon striking its forehead. The other Eeno took notice and continued their assault by increasing their proficiency. I struggled to avoid getting hit but it was to no avail as my body got pelted by several snowballs at once.

Once I had a clear shot, I fired another Fire Arrow at the other large one, melting it upon contact before turning to the other two. They then started to move away from each other in a bid to prevent themselves from being melted like their brethren, but I quickly caught onto their plan and fired two more arrows, melting them before anymore snowballs could be thrown at me--one did manage to score one last hit before I struck it.

" That was really cold." I said, shivering slightly as I brushed off the snow from my tunic.

" You took a fair bit of damage."

" Not only that but I used up quite a bit of magic powering up my arrows. That's only a moot point considering the threat of those monsters has gone." I said. Hearts had since appeared where the Eenos had melted, so I picked them up knowing they would restore my health--and put Twilight's heart at ease for the time being. I could now take a better look at this room since I wasn't being attacked. There was another large chunk of ice in the corner of the room, blocking the exit, but my eyes were focused on a pair of icicles that were sticking up from the ground. " Those icicles look suspicious."

" Yes, it's odd that they're the only ones in this room."

" I wonder--"

" What are you thinking?"

" I'm going to try something." I answered. I took out the Lens of Truth by putting my bow on the ground, raised it to my eye, and looked at the icicles. A large hole had since appeared and inside of it was a Stray Fairy trapped in a bubble. " Ha! I knew there was something suspicious."

" Good eye."

" How am I supposed to hold the lens and fire an arrow at the same time?" I asked. This was the one drawback when it came to using the Lens of Truth. I needed one free hand to use it properly and anything that required two hands wasn't feasible.

" I could hold the lens for you."

" Well... It is a bit big, Twilight, and you are a fairy, but it's not like I have any other options." I said. I tried my best to avoid branding Her Highness' size as a detriment given how all of my equipment was larger than her. I also didn't want to sound like she was being a burden either--which she wasn't. " Okay, I'll let you hold it for a few moments, Twilight, but don't strain yourself." I handed her the lens and immediately she struggled to keep herself from dropping to the ground. I was seriously considering taking the lens from her and think of another idea, but she insisted on holding it for me despite how much pain it was giving her.

Acting quickly, I donned the Great Fairy's Mask--I needed to wear it so that the fairy would come to me--switched back to regular arrows--I remembered that two different forms of magic couldn't be used together--and burst the bubble in a single shot. The fairy spent a few moments wondering what had just happened before being drawn to me through the mask I was wearing. It floated towards me before entering my body, and I immediately grabbed the lens just as Twilight was about to drop.

" I knew I could hold it." Twilight said in a exhausted voice as she dropped into my hand.

" Never should've doubted you."

" Now we can move on from here."

" By the way, I believe that was the eleventh Stray Fairy we've found in the temple."

" I actually count twelve of them." Twilight said. What!? Where did the extra one come from? I don't ever recall finding another Stray Fairy along the way, and Twilight had been marking them off on the map. Had I neglected one without even realizing it? Also, why didn't she mention it before until now? Something was definitely not adding up. " I can tell you're confused, Sunset, so let me shed a little light on the situation. It took me until just a few minutes ago to realize that we had picked up an additional fairy." (1)

" How do you figure that?"

" Remember the room that contained the map?"

" How could I forget going up those tiny steps?"

" It turns out that was where we picked up the extra Stray Fairy." Twilight answered. That didn't make any sense. How did we miss something like that? " There was one floating behind the big treasure chest in the room, and it must have entered your body without you ever noticing it. Since I can sense fellow fairies, I know you've got twelve of them currently hiding inside of your body."

" I guess it's both a blessing and a curse."

" In what way?"

" We don't have to backtrack in order to pick it up, but I wish we had known that a lot sooner."

" It's my fault for not realizing it."

" I think we can both take the blame here, Twilight."

" Anyway, we should keep going."

I could tell Her Highness felt embarrassed over something that I deemed trivial. While she may not like to admit it to anyone--it would ruin her reputation--she always wanted to be correct regarding anything. She had striven to become the perfect student under the guide of Princess Celestia, and that left her feeling inadequate if she couldn't prove herself right. It was best to humour her just to be on the safe side. Still, having an extra Stray Fairy meant not having to go looking for it.

Picking up my bow and putting everything else away, I turned my attention towards the chunk of ice that was blocking my way. Since I knew what needed to be done, I powered up my arrows by using the Fire Arrow, firing a single shot that melted the ice in a matter of moments. Once the last remnants had melted, I walked up the stairway and entered a large room that looked bleak and morbid compared to other rooms. Several large columns strewn about didn't make me feel anymore comfortable being here, but I could also sense evil coming from nearby so I knew I had to be on guard.

" This room reeks of evil." I said, putting my bow away and drawing my sword and shield.

" I sense strong forces in here but also some Stray Fairies."

" Why would anyone place any in a room like this?"

" I don't know, but we should be on the lookout."

" Hey! I can see something shuffling about in the shadows ahead of us." I said. I could see two figures walking slowly towards me, swords waving about in their hands, a sign that they planned on attacking me. Once they got closer, I immediately recognized them as two Dinolfos, the same creature I encountered in Woodfall Temple. " I'm surprised that this monster has come back a lot sooner than usual."

" I can sense Stray Fairies on them."

" What!? That means they must be holding them captive. I was actually going to avoid them, but now I need to defeat them in order to rescue their captives." I said. Knowing that these two were holding fairies made the situation a bit more complicated, but not by much as I knew how they fought.

Raising my shield, I walked forward towards the Dinolfos making sure to keep my eyes on both of them. One suddenly moved closer and began clanging its on my shield over and over in a bid to see if it could break through my defences--the other one kept its distance and simply darted back and forth. The first one continued its pointless assault until it finally exhausted itself, and that was my bid to strike it. Upon scoring a blow, it immediately breathed fire as a defensive mechanism, but I knew this trick from before and kept my distance. I also realized the Dinofols could be attacked--breathing fire required it to remain perfectly still--so I slashed it with my sword.

It responded by jumping over me and striking in the back--I still needed to improve on my reaction time--but I quickly spun around and performed a jump attack, defeating it in the process. At first I was surprised by this revelation, but I realized that my sword was still upgraded and that meant inflicting more damage than before. The other Dinofols was hesitant about wanting to fight me, but it slapped the sides of its face several times to get itself pumped up for battle. When the first one disappeared, the Stray Fairy it held prisoner became free and began floating around.

I had to rescue it before something bad happened so I sidestepped over to it--it entered my body--only to be slashed badly in my side by the other Dinofols. Blood started to trickle out from the wound, but I couldn't allow that to slow me down. Her Highness begged me to address the wound before it could bleed profusely, yet I ignored her and began swinging my sword in an effort to strike the Dinofols. My first swings failed to make a connection but I eventually made contact only to become caught within a burst of flame, sending me back a few inches before clutching my side.

The flow of blood was starting to get to me, and Twilight's pleas rattled about in my ears only adding to my problem. I wanted to keep going but I knew that I had to deal with the wound before I would collapse from losing too much blood. Running to the corner of the room, sitting down, and holding up my shield, I began to treat my wound by using a piece of my tunic as a makeshift cloth while the Dinofols bared down on me by clanging its sword on my shield repeatedly. I was fortunate that Canterlot High had given a first-aid seminar that one particular week otherwise I'd have no idea what I was doing.

I wrapped the piece of tunic around the wound as best as I could and used a little bit of saliva to hold it in place--disgusting I know--and crawled underneath the Dinofols before attacking it from behind upon jumping to my feet. It, in turn, breathed fire that I avoided with ease, and I ran around behind it and performed another jump attack before it had a chance to do something in response. It fell upon being defeated and released the other Stray Fairy that I picked up immediately.

" You've been hurt." Twilight said, morbidly.

" I'm used to it."

" Maybe, but I'm not!"

" At least I was able to wrap something around to slow down the bleeding, but I doubt it's going to last for very long. This is where a healing fairy would be beneficial as one of them could easily close the wound and heal it up at the same time." I said.

" Where can we find one?"

" Aside from the Fairy Fountains, you usually have to find them hiding inside of pots in the most unlikely of places."

" We should've picked one up at the fountain at the base of the temple."

" That wouldn't have worked, Twilight. The Stray Fairies can't be picked up because they are different from normal fairies. The only way healing fairies can appear in those fountains is for Adagio to be fully reassembled, and that means returning her missing pieces." I said.

" So you're stuck with that wound?"

" For now."

I knew my answer wouldn't satisfy Twilight's concern. Heck, it didn't even satisfy me. The thought of being injured was something I couldn't take personally, but it came with being the heroine of this adventure. Unlike in Hyrule where I could sustain numerous wounds and still keep going, in Termina, wounds were more serious and enough of them would end my life just like that. It also explained why I hadn't ponied-up whenever I was in danger of dying. I attributed it to my normal magic not working here but it appeared there was another factor in play I never knew existed. In this game, my life hung by a thread and injuries weakened that thread.

There was no point in trying to leave the temple to find a fairy--the idea was something I was certain Her Highness would bring up--as all that would do was waste time. I didn't know how much longer it was until nightfall but it must have been getting closer by that point. The only way now was onward so I kept on walking until I reached a door hidden in the darkness--I was surprised that didn't dissipate due to the Dinofols no longer being present--and opened it to enter the central chamber again.

" We've got a problem."

" Don't I know it." I said, sighing. By destroying all of the pieces of ice within the column, the path forward was no longer reachable. I could see a door on the other side of the chamber, yet it was beyond my reach what with the platform now being lower. I thought about becoming Darmani and jumping over to the other side, but there was no ramp for me to roll off of. I had made a grave mistake by smashing one too many pieces. " Is there any way for me to bring back one of those pieces?"

" Unless you want to reset time and go through all of this again, I'm afraid not." Twilight answered. Her answer left me crestfallen yet she quickly noticed the pathway below that was filled with giant snowballs. " Why not drop down there and see where that path takes you."

" You know I'll likely get hurt from dropping from this height, right?"

" I'm going to have to accept that even though I don't want to."

" Like I keep saying, you'll get used to it." I said. The drop down below actually wasn't as bad as I was making it out to be, but I would sustain some slight injury. I just hoped that my bandaged wound wouldn't suddenly bleed again. Her Highness wouldn't be able to take it if I continued to bleed profusely. I jumped off from the upper and down the one below, my knees buckling upon impact, yet my injuries were minimal to the point where I felt nothing--at least my side wound remained intact. " There must be at least several giant snowballs blocking the way ahead."

" You can either use some bombs, the Bomb Mask, or a Goron punch to clear the way."

" I'll go with the latter." I said, taking out the Goron Mask. It was the safest option for me--it would also please Twilight--so I got as close to the first snowball as possible before putting the mask on. I began to stumble about but I managed to stick my foot deep into the snowball to give myself some extra leverage. After waiting for a few moments, I screamed out loud and became Darmani again. " Huh... The makeshift bandage has expanded to coincide with my transformed state." I don't know how that happened but I wasn't upset as it meant not exposing the wound to anything serious.

The giant snowballs were no match for my fists and I collected some much needed magic jars in the process. When the last one was smashed to pieces, it revealed yet another stairway--this place certainly relied on them an awful lot--leading up to the next level so I walked up and discovered yet another problem. I could easily get across by using the ramp that was in front of me, but on the other side was a large door with a large padlock covering it. In front of the door were several icicles with a Deku Flower further out in front. No doubt its presence especially in a place like this struck me as odd.

" Now why do you suppose a Deku Flower would be here in a temple of snow and ice?"

" Beats me."

" Perhaps there is something you need to do that involves using it?"

" I can think of one way. I need to use it to get myself down to that other door we didn't enter yet."

" Then that means you must become your Deku Scrub form for the first time in quite a while. Now, before you go and take off your current mask, why don't you speed up the process by wearing another mask on top." Twilight said. I remember her mentioning that to me before yet we never really went that far with it. " Once we're on the other side, if you put on your Deku Mask while still being in the form of a Goron, you should be able to switch forms without having to become a human."

" Is that wise? What if something goes wrong?"

" You only need to try it once to see if it will work."

That wasn't the answer I was hoping for, but I knew that trying to convince Her Highness otherwise was just wasting my vocal chords--once she had an idea in her head, nothing could get her to change her mind. Curling up into a ball and rolling forward, I rolled off the ramp--the entire walkway consisted of ice giving me momentum--and landed on the other side before getting back up and taking out the Deku Mask. Could I really switch between forms without having to take off one mask in order to put on the other? It sounded impossible but then so was changing into an entirely different creature.

Sighing, I placed the Deku Mask onto my face, and immediately I felt strange as the magic started to take hold--it also didn't help that I looked weird being a Goron wearing a mask representing a different tribe. I felt like I was going to collapse from trying something I deemed dangerous but then my body started changing, and soon I had become my Deku Scrub form with the Goron Mask falling off my face and into my hands. I stared down at it for a few seconds before looking forward. That was certainly intense yet it was something I knew would become mandatory especially in later situations.

Jumping into the Deku Flower--it felt weird doing this again after so long--I aimed for the walkway that lead towards the door I hadn't entered, and launched myself into the air before floating downwards until I landed safely. I thought about switching back to Darmani, but I opted to take off my Deku Mask instead. Grabbing my face, I pulled the mask off until I was human again, put the mask away and entered the door.

" This room seems familiar."

" It should, Sunset, as look in front of you." Twilight said. I looked at what had gotten her worried and my body turned cold. In front of me were the same panels that I encountered in the room that contained the Fire Arrow, and that meant only one thing. " I can't believe you've got to fight another one and with that injury on your side." We both knew what she was talking about, and my heart dropped emotionally because of it.

Unlike before where there were four panels, this room featured six of them, and that meant the Wizzrobe had more places with which to attack me from. Speaking of which, the familiar shape of the old man that was the Wizzrobe appeared from the panel directly in front of me, spun around a few times, and disappeared signalling that the battle had begun. I already was dreading this encounter because of not being in peak condition, but what other choice did I have.

The Wizzrobe appeared on the far top left panel, spun around, and fired his icy magic that sailed across the air before landing mere inches away from me. I knew he didn't want to hit me with his magic straight away. No, what he did was a warning shot to let me know he was serious about this battle. I had no idea if he was aware that I had defeated the other Wizzrobe who had guarded the Fire Arrow, but I couldn't allow that to distract me. The Wizzrobe next appeared behind me on a raised platform, and I had no chance of climbing up to him on time before he could use his magic again.

Instead, I braced myself and jumped back just as the icy magic hit the ground, producing a large area of ice that steamed from the mist. Unfortunately, my leg got caught in the magic, trapping me in place all while the Wizzrobe laughed before disappearing.

" Already, things aren't looking good." I said, using the hilt of my sword to free my leg from the ice.

" With the extra two panels, he has more of an advantage than the other one did."

" How can I get to him?"

" Maybe you don't have to."

" Hello? If I can't reach him then there's no way we're getting out of here."

" This Wizzrobe uses ice magic to attack as you no doubt know from personal experience." Twilight said. I wished she didn't remind me of what happened--I still had chills whenever the memories of being frozen in a block of ice. " Since he has a much bigger range to move around the room with, why not attack him from a distance using the Hero's Bow? Also, since you picked up Fire Arrows, I'm sure they will be especially effective against the Wizzrobe."

I had no problem using Fire Arrows. If I hadn't collected those magic jars that were hidden inside of those giant snowballs, I'd be applying a different tactic, but my magic power was full and that meant going slightly crazy with firing arrows--overdoing it would mean wasting precious magic. Since I had to stand perfectly still in order to use the Hero's Bow, I had to keep a close eye on the Wizzrobe to ensure he didn't hit me from behind. He then appeared on the opposite side of the room, spun around a few times, and fired his icy magic. It sailed through the air and landed right behind me, a cold chill greeted my back, the wound I sustained earlier feeling it especially.

Now he was being serious and I had to follow suit. Taking out my bow with Fire Arrows ready to use, I figured there were two places I could stand that would give me enough of a range to pick him off wherever he goes. The first involved standing in a corner--distance shooting would be difficult--and the second involved standing in the middle of the room--easier but also difficult due to having to spin around frequently just to keep up. In the end, I decided to go with standing in a corner.

Running over to the southeast corner of the room, I aimed my bow and waited for the Wizzrobe to appear from one of the panels. Since his magic had to travel through the air before landing, I could easily move aside before it had a chance to hit me. My plan did have one flaw, however, and that was if he appeared behind me--the panel on the raised platform--I'd have little to no chance of avoiding his magic. My shield could be used for protection but I remembered it received a dent thanks to the other Wizzrobe. Losing it would mean a loss of protection and having to spend rupees buying another one.

The Wizzrobe then appeared in the center panel, and I fired an arrow at him while he was spinning around. I scored a direct hit but I had no idea if it did any damage--although his robes did ignite on fire in a few places. His reaction was pure rage as he disappeared and then reappeared on the opposite end of the room. This battle was going to take me some time to get through just like the previous one, but hopefully I should be able to sustain little damage.

" How's she doing, Cremia?"

" Romani's restin' right now in her bed, yet I still can't believe her mind's been messed up somethin' fierce." Applejack answered.

" It's like her very personality has been stripped from her body."

" Whoa now!" Applejack shouted, thrusting out her arms and waving them back and forth. " No need to get all crazy like with me, Grog. I know I'm bein' stubborn by refusin' to believe somethin's happened to my little sister, but I can't continue to pretend. I... I should've realized that there was evil doin's happening around here from the start, but I plum ignored her due to thinkin' she was only trying ta test my patience." Applejack then looked up at the window to the room her sister slept in. " All this time I thought Romani wasn't maturin' to be a fine lady who would one day run things, but in truth she's been far more mature than I ever was."

" Don't sell yourself short."

" If I could turn back the clock and prevent all this from happenin', I'd have made Romani an honourary adult."

" Unfortunately, no one has the power to turn back time."

" I know that, but it's still wishful thinkin'." Applejack said. She turned and walked over to the door of her house, placing her hand on the doorknob, and turning to face Grog with a sombre smile on her face. " You've been like family to us ever since my father hired you, so I was wonderin' if you wanted to see Romani? I know she ain't gonna be much of a talker given the circumstances, but still, the offer is up for ya."

" I'd like that."

Applejack opened the door and entered the house with Grog following her inside before closing the door. Unbeknownst to both of them, the two figures who had been following them for the last couple of hours landed close by and began to observe the house. Their fell wings and dark auras glistened in the setting sun, yet neither appeared to appreciate the beautiful setting and instead craved the darkness of the shadows.

The tall figure stepped forward, her eyes burning with sheer rage, the kind that would strike fear into the hearts of many, and stared longingly at the house Applejack and Grog went into mere moments before. The small figure on the other hand, convinced her companion to avoid relying on rage to get her point across. The tall figure stuck out her tongue in an immature fashion, but quickly retracted her statement when the small figure began writing down on some paper.

Every few seconds, she would look up at her surroundings before burying her nose into the paper leaving the tall figure feeling somewhat miffed. Eventually, the tall figure broke the silence by making a comment.

" Can't believe this place was ransacked by ghosts."

" I actually find the concept to be extremely fascinating. I mean, we encountered some spirits back in that wasteland to the east, yet what came here during the night was something entirely different. I've no doubt these ghosts are a threat to either of us, but you must admit they are strong despite not actually seeing them." The small figure said.

" It's nothing but a reminder that humans are weak!"

" Do you doubt the existence of ghosts?" The small figure asked, lifting her head up from her writing.

" What brought that up?"

" You seem to be disinterested about it."

" That's not what I meant! I... I know what it's like to be a ghost. When Sunset Shimmer was changed back from being me, I simply disappeared and became a phantom, haunting her everywhere she went, to serve as a reminder that I was once her and that she could never escape the past. For a long time, I existed in a perpetual twilight, reduced to being a ghost, yearning for when I could live and become the true Sunset once again. I continued such an existence until I was brought back to life by that man." The tall figure said. She clenched her hand into a fist, igniting it into dark flames, and was about to smash it into the house before stopping well short of it.

" Why did you stop?"

" That man made me suffer by forcing me to bend to his will. I am no one's puppet yet he made me his plaything, using me to fight against her for his own amusement. When my usefulness to him was at an end, he destroyed my body and I was left to wander about in the beyond." The tall figure answered.

" I never knew that about you until now."

" It was something I thought I could handle on my own, but perhaps deep down, I was scared to let my guard down. When I first came into being, I had everything I ever wanted: power, prestige, respect, and intimidation just to name a few. However, I wanted so much more than that. I didn't want to stop until everything was mine." The tall figure said.

" And that cost you everything?"

" I underestimated the Magic of Friendship and it resulted in my death. When I fought against her in that other world, she didn't rely on her friends to defeat me, but instead the power she had acquired by being lovingly embraced by them." The tall figure said, sitting down, arms folded, and burying her head in her hands. " It was at that moment I realized that she was far stronger than I could ever hope to be. That's why I've been hesitating about fighting her again. With her new power, I don't even hold a candle against her."

" You seem to be suffering from an inferiority complex. Sunset Shimmer has mostly moved on from her past yet you remain attached to it because you can't accept the fact that she has become her own person instead of being you." The small figure said. The tall figure then turned her head, a sharp piercing gaze bearing down on her companion, yet she shrugged it off before continuing. " Rather than force her into becoming what you want her to be, why not simply do that on your own? You're your own person now, much like I am, so leave her to her own devices and become the darkest side of Sunset that ever existed."

" What about you?"

" I have every aim to make Twilight Sparkle, the human version, accept me as her true self. However, I have no desire to conquer worlds as that would just be a waste of time that could be used to further my own knowledge. Sure, it sounds like I'm being just like you used to be, and the comparison is strongly acknowledged, but I strive for knowledge. Before I can do anything, she first needs to accept the fact that her life is no longer the same as it was." The small figure answered.

" What in tarnation!" The door to Mama's House suddenly opened, and Applejack was standing in front of the doorway, an angry expression streaked across her face. She then stepped outside to find out what was making so much noise. " Mamamu Yan... If that's you makin' that racket, could y'all please do it somewhere else? Romani needs rest and all that noise yer hollerin' ain't doin' her much good." That's when she noticed she was talking to two demonic monsters as opposed to Mamamu Yan. " What in the hay are you two 'spposed to be?"

" Things suddenly got interesting." The tall figure said.

" So that's the reason why you wanted to come here." The small figure said.

" Even though I didn't come to be initially until much later, I've got memories of what she did and one of them happens to involve Applejack here. I never could stand that smug country attitude she possessed, making herself out to be better than everyone because she worked hard to get where she is." The tall figure said, her eyes beaming with excitement, a cruel smile appearing on her lips as she stepped forward. " Oh, I've got no intention of killing Applejack. No, I've got a desire to have a little bit of fun before we move on. Since everything will reset when she uses that magic, I might as well cut loose and let out some steam."

" Applejack? Who in tarnation is that?" Applejack asked.

" That's right. No one here remembers the other world. Their memories have been altered to fit in with this one." The small figure said.

" Wait a dern minute! Y'all must be the ghosts who abducted our cows durin' the night and messed up my little sister's head." Applejack said. She quickly ran back into the house, sounds of objects being thrown about, before coming back out holding a broom firmly in both hands. Seeing this made the tall figure laugh hysterically, yet Applejack wouldn't have any of it and walked forward to make her intentions known. " Why are you laughin' at me?"

" I just find it adorable that you think you can stand up to me." The tall figure answered.

" I'm gonna protect my sister no matter what!"

" With something as pathetic as a broom? I admire your bravery although I do question your intelligence."

" You sayin' I'm bein' stupid?"

" The facts do speak for themselves but I'm not one to judge. Like I said, I've got no intention of killing you, and that's because I don't want to get my hands dirty dealing with a human who doesn't understand what's going on." The tall figure answered.

" Reckon you're afraid of me."

" I just need someone or something to vent out my pent up rage, and you have just volunteered to be my salvation. I'll probably do this for a couple of minutes before I get bored playing with you, but for now you can say whatever you want. I've seen enough to know that all you've got is bravado and nothing more." The tall figure said.

Applejack didn't know how to take that response at first, but she quickly came to a rash conclusion. These two creatures were the ghosts that stole the cows from the barn during the night and also abducted her sister for whatever reason they had. In her mind, they were responsible for her misery and she wanted to make them pay for it. Thrusting out her broom and assuming a defensive position, she slowly walked towards the tall figure, who in turn just stood there with a bored expression on her face. The small figure continued writing something down on the paper she carried in the meantime.

The battle against the Wizzrobe had mostly been a successful venture although there had been a couple of blunders. First of all, I was able to hit him two more times by shooting at him with Fire Arrows, and this caused him to do what the previous one did involving clones. However, this was offset by one particular moment where I got frozen in a block of ice for not noticing that he appeared on the raised platform until it was too late. Unlike last time, I didn't stay frozen for very long--my disdain towards ice coupled with not wanting to be encased in ice was enough for me to break free within a matter of moments.

Unlike last time as well, Twilight didn't scream at the top of her lungs. I assumed that she had started to get used to the fact that I was going to get hurt during this journey no matter how hard I tried to prevent myself from sustaining heavy injuries. Instead, Her Highness simply couldn't watch me being a frozen Sunset Shimmer all over again. Granted, she was getting better but it would've been nice had she done so a lot sooner.

My magic power was still in pretty good condition as the Wizzrobe continued to use his clones in order to confuse me. Like the previous one, only the real Wizzrobe had a flame on top of his staff--the clones had nothing--so I knew exactly where he would be at all times. I also realized that he remained stationary while his clones ran about all over the place--I probably figured that out before but forgot all about it--making it easier still.

When he reappeared right in front of me--there was a panel in front of the corner I chose to fight from--I panicked and fired a Fire Arrow, striking him in the chest, and causing him to disappear but not before jumping up and down. My heart began to beat rapidly because of being surprised, but Twilight quickly calmed me down by telling me to breathe slowly.

" How did you come upon such a technique?" I asked.

" Back in Equestria, Princess Cadance, my foal sitter, taught me how to deep breathe. It was to allow me to relax and not freak out when something happened that was beyond my means to control. It's proven to be very handy especially during times of stress." Twilight answered.

" Please thank her on my behalf."

" I'm sure you'll be able to do that yourself when the time comes."

Again, Her Highness was insisting on me going back to Equestria so that I could patch things up with Princess Celestia, and also get to see what has changed in the land of my birth since the last time I paid a visit--one that changed everything for better and for worse. She wasn't putting any pressure on me which I appreciated, yet I just felt that I wasn't ready to face my former mentor who raised me like her own, one who I abandoned because my ego was too big to contain back then. If I continued doing my best to help the world that was now my home, I would reach a point where I felt truly ready to go back.

When would such a feeling happen? I didn't know the answer and it was one that was elusive.

As I continued to ponder over Her Highness' words, the Wizzrobe reappeared in the upper left corner of the room--not on the raised platform. I fired an arrow at him without even thinking about it--my mind was focused on the question of returning to Equestria--and when it struck him, he jumped straight up, kicked his legs about for several seconds, and landed before striking the same pose the other one did. He then vanished by burning away to nothing, his defeat unlocking both doors that had been sealed with iron bars.

Even as I regained my composure over defeating a powerful enemy, the thought of Equestria continued to burn in my heart. I really wanted to go back and run around on my hooves again just like old times, but there was the other problem that lingered. I may have become a hero in the world of humans, but in the world of ponies, I had stolen a national treasure and placed an entire kingdom into danger because of my pettiness. Her Highness had insisted many times that she would profess my innocence, yet that wasn't enough to give me the vote of confidence I needed to go back and face Princess Celestia for the first time in a long time.

" Sunset? Are you alright?" Twilight asked, looking concerned.

" Sorry, I was just thinking about what you said."

" That's why I decided not to go any further than I did. I knew you were still having personal issues about going home, and I've come to respect your decision about not going back for the time being. Part of me still hopes you'll return home eventually, but when that will be shall be up to you." Twilight said.

I smiled, knowing Her Highness was giving me so much room with regards to such an important decision. She then bopped me on the head to remind me that I still needed to complete the remainder of the temple, and that's when it dawned on me that the Wizzrobe had been defeated. I walked over to the other door that had been locked with iron bars--I never noticed it before until now due to fighting for my life--opened it and found myself in a tiny room wedged between the central chamber and the previous room. If not for the see-through fence next to the other door, you'd think this room would make you claustrophobic.

In the corner of this tiny room was a blue and gold ornate chest, and I opened it up, taking out a Boss Key in the process. Unlike Woodfall Temple, I only had to get back up to the upper level, get across the gap, and unlock the big door up there. That's when one final problem reared its ugly head.

" We don't have the final Stray Fairy!"

" I've been thinking about that."

" And?"

" First, you need to get back to that Deku Flower we saw earlier." Twilight answered. After pocketing the Boss Key, I opened the other door and entered the central chamber properly--I was only a few metres away from the door that lead to the room where the Wizzrobe was moments ago.

Since it meant having to backtrack--only slightly this time--I ran over and jumped down to the platform below--my knees buckled--took out the Goron Mask, and placed it on my face but not before sticking my foot into the giant snowball to prevent my stumbling from making me fall. A few seconds--and one stumble--later and I started smashing the snowballs to pieces with my Goron fists as Darmani before running up the stairway, curling into a ball and rolling off the ramp, landing on the other side with the Deku Flower.

" Okay, we're at the flower."

" There had to be a reason why it was here in the first place, and I believe I've figured out the answer." Twilight said. She floated downward slightly and began observing the rest of the central chamber before floating back up to me. " Can you see that bit of snow down there hanging on the wall?" I followed where Her Highness' glance was looking, and was seeing what she noticed. Roughly halfway down that looked out of place with everything else was some snow that definitely screamed suspicious, yet how did that even get there let alone not slide down the wall to the ground below. " Do you suppose there's something hidden down there?"

" If there is then it would explain the Deku Flower." I answered. I took out the Lens of Truth--I could use it as a Goron and probably as a Deku Scrub--raised it to my eye and looked down at the snow again to discover a hidden nook that housed a bubble that contained a Stray Fairy. (2) " Now that's what I call a clever hiding place. If you hadn't noticed the snow being out of place, Twilight, we'd have completely ignored it."

" Can you hit that bubble from all the way up here?"

" I'm going to have to try." I answered. It occurred to me that I needed to have the Lens of Truth active for me to see the nook and ultimately the bubble containing the fairy, and I couldn't hold both it and my bow at the same time without struggling. There was no other choice but to rely on a familiar course of action. " Twilight... I need both hands to use my bow, so you'll need to take the lens for a few moments." Before I did anything else, I put the lens on the ground, grabbed my face, pulled off the Goron Mask, and flipped my head back--my hair as well--as I changed back to normal.

From there, I picked up the lens and handed it over to Twilight before taking out the Hero's Bow. Her Highness floated in front of my face, the lens jittering back and forth as she struggled to hold it in place, and I aimed down at the bubble learning that it was a lot farther down than I originally assumed. I fired an arrow that missed my target by such a large margin, I cursed under my breath knowing this would take some time. I fired a second arrow followed by a third, both missing the bubble by large margins. This happened again when I fired four more arrows although the latter did come close.

The eighth time proved to be the charm as the arrow burst the bubble and freed the Stray Fairy. I then immediately held my bow in one hand and grabbed the lens with the other just as Twilight was mere moments from collapsing due to exhaustion. I commended her efforts and put both items away, making sure to turn the lens off so as to not waste magic.

" I'm... Okay!" Twilight gasped as she dropped into my hands.

" Sorry for putting you through that."

" If you can endure then so can I."

Just as I was about to unlock the big door, my mind suddenly remembered that I still needed to lure the Stray Fairy up here. I quickly put on the Great Fairy's Mask and watched as the fairy floated up from the nook it had been hidden in before it entered my body. With all fifteen accounted for, I thought about leaving and restoring Adagio back to normal, but part of me didn't want to deal with having to go through all that anguish again. In the end, I chose to enter the room that housed the source of the winter plaguing Snowhead.

Taking out the Boss Key, I walked up to the door and unlocked it, the padlock falling off and landing on the floor with a thud that echoed throughout the chamber. Was it an omen of things to come? Perhaps, but this was no time for me to start doubting myself. I had been through so much throughout the temple and it was time to finally finish things despite knowing I would soon face what truly made me doubt my abilities.

I entered the next room and came upon a horrifying sight. To the right was some kind of giant four-legged creature encased in ice and surrounded by rocks that looked out of place with everything else. On the floor were several large jars and I smashed them by swinging my sword--I now smashed pots because it usually rewarded me in some way--revealing large magic jars that I picked up to restore the magic I lost from acquiring the final Stray Fairy of the temple. In-between the floor and the wall was a slope caked with snow, telling me that I would need to roll around as a Goron, but how given that the room was so small in size.

" What do you make of that creature, Twilight?" I asked, turning my attention back to it.

" That is definitely the source of all this winter."

" Seriously!? How can that be when it's trapped in ice?"

" I don't know why but I do know that this is what we've been looking for. This creature is named Goht, the 'Masked Mechanical Monster'. It may not look like much upon first glance what with it being frozen in a block of ice, but I can sense a strong power emanating from it." Twilight answered. Upon a closer inspection, it was indeed a machine, a giant mechanical quadrupedal. While seeing this was fascinating--especially for Twilight--from a scientific perspective, it didn't change the fact that this creature had caused so much pain and suffering to everyone living in the mountains. " Looks like you need to melt the ice and free it."

" Are you sure that's a good idea?"

" You need to destroy this creature and that means setting it free."

" What else do you know about Goht?"

" Like Odolwa before it, this creature possesses a giant eyeball that will serve as its weak-point. I don't where it is exactly but I'm sure you'll find it as the battle progresses. There's not much else for me to say, Sunset, until I know what it's capable of." Twilight answered. That meant melting the ice and freeing it from its frozen state. " I suggest firing an arrow from over here in case it does something that will catch you off guard."

Part of me didn't want to free Goht and hoped that another solution would present itself, but deep down in my heart, I knew that I had to use a Fire Arrow otherwise the mountains would forever endure the wrath of winter. Sighing heavily, I took out the Hero's Bow and prepared a Fire Arrow before aiming at the large chunk of ice that contained what I now knew as my next main boss. I fired my arrow--there was no chance of me missing such a huge target--striking the front of the ice, and watched as it began to melt into a pool of water. Steam arose from the ice as it melted, but that's when things took a turn for the worse.

The mechanized monster began to stir, its various body parts chugging to life as the warmth of my arrow affected every last corner of its frame. When the ice melted, Goht looked down at me, an emotionless expression from the mask-like thing that was its face, before it began looking around wondering what was going on. I stepped back knowing that something was about to happen--I was correct--as Goht reared up its head, smashing the rocks that were holding it in place. Upon its freedom, it charged towards me with incredible speed, knocking me aside, and smashing the wall behind me before continuing charging forward until it was gone.

" What just happened?" I asked as I got up.

" It's decided to run around the room in a frenzy, and it turns out this room is a lot bigger than we thought."

" So how do I track down where it went?"

" You won't need to, Sunset. If you wait for about fifteen seconds, the answer will come to you." Twilight answered. Her Highness sounded rather cryptic with her answer, but I decided to stand there and wait for Goht to return. It wasn't long--the exact amount of time Her Highness stated--before it trampled past me, but then it suddenly fired a burst of lightning from its horns that I dodged just in time. " This room goes around in a circle so it will always wind up coming by the way we came in here."

" That solves the tracking problem but what about the defeat problem?"

" Here's where things get complicated. You can stand here in this alcove and fire arrows at Goht whenever it charges by until it's weak-point is exposed, but you'll be limited to the number of arrows you currently have and when it comes through here as it charges about. The other option, and the more difficult one, is to become Darmani and roll after it, using your own body as a weapon to make it stop." Twilight answered.

" You want me to throw myself at it?"

" Either that or fire arrows."

Both options had their good and bad points, but between the two choices, becoming a Goron was no doubt the dangerous one, yet it sounded like my best bet against fighting against a creature that charged about aimlessly. I only had about a dozen arrows left in my quiver, and that wouldn't be enough to stop a rampaging monster. There was no other alternative despite knowing what it meant. I had to roll after Goht and use my body even if it meant sustaining heavy injuries in return.

I took out the Goron Mask, put it on my face, and stumbled forward, tripping on a small hill in the process. As I landed on my stomach, I yelled out loud--not from the landing but from the magic changing my body--and became Darmani before getting back up. As I scratched my head, Goht suddenly came thundering up behind me, and knocked me aside before continuing onward, but not before shooting another burst of lightning from its horns.

Once I got my face out of the snow, I curled up into a ball and began to roll after it. Unlike before where I gained instant momentum, I had to roll along for a short distance before my spikes would come out and my magic began draining--the snow gave me momentum whereas the rocky terrain in this room didn't. When my spikes appeared, my speed picked up and I actually was enjoying the rush of rolling at high speeds, but that's when my first problem reared its ugly head. Goht had stopped further up ahead, and began shooting out quick bursts of lightning that somehow were seeking me out.

The first blast narrowly missed as I tilted my body to the left, but the second one went right through me, and I felt like something had pierced my heart. The electrical surge immediately brought me to a stop while Goht resumed charging leaving me to pick myself up again.

" This isn't as easy as it looks."

" I did say that rolling after it as Darmani was the harder choice."

" Yeah and that lightning isn't doing me any favours either."

" Whenever Goht decides to shoot lighting from its horns, it will attempt to track you down, but it isn't entirely accurate. It takes about a second for the lightning to adjust to your actions, so if you can be unpredictable, you won't get hit all that often." Twilight said. Her Highness then heard the stomping of mechanical hooves coming from behind us and ordered me to move to the side as I was about to get trampled again. I followed her instructions just in time as Goht ran by and around the corner. " I suspect it has more than just lightning to use against you, Sunset, so be prepared for anything."

" What about my magic power? I can only maintain those spikes for a short period."

" Those green pots keep on materializing every time you make a lap around this room. Since they always contain magic jars, you'll essentially never run out of magic. I doubt you'll cause Goht any discomfort if you ram into it without those spikes." Twilight said. She then noticed I was looking at her with a shocked expression on my face, yet she merely chuckled in response, and it made me feel like I was missing out on something. " Surprised that I knew about that little tidbit, Sunset? That's the reason why I'm here as your companion. I'm able to observe things that otherwise go past your senses."

" I was surprised but don't act too proud."

" I've learned my lesson the hard way on that front." Twilight said. I'm glad Her Highness mentioned that about my magic. I did legitimately fear the prospect of running out and being unable to defeat Goht, but now I knew I had infinite magic throughout the duration of this battle.

Curling up into a ball and rolling forward, I followed after Goht, spikes protruding from my body, and within about five seconds, I had caught up to the creature. It must have known that I was coming because it began to increase its own speed, and that's when the next problem occurred. It appeared lightning wasn't the only thing it was capable of doing--exactly as Her Highness had predicted--as rocks were being kicked up from behind its back legs. That meant I had to attack either from the side or from above as trying to attack from behind would result in getting knocked aside.

As I continued rolling, avoiding the occasional lightning attack by tilting my body at the last minute, I noticed there were additional hills scattered on the ground including a section that dipped downwards before going back up. If I could roll off one of those hills as though I were jumping across a gap, I could knock Goht down without having to drag things out for very long. Of course, it had to be in the right position for my tactic to work.

Further up ahead, Goht had stopped again and began firing its quick bursts of lightning. I tilted my body from side-to-side avoiding them, yet it continued attacking even though it knew I was mere meters away from it. Directly in front of Goht was a small hill so I turned slightly to the right, rolled off of it, and rammed right into Goht's back, pushing it along several meters before it crashed to the ground, coming to a stop. I stopped rolling and uncurled myself before starting to walk over to where it fell only to witness something I didn't really want to see but was anticipating it.

A panel on Goht's back broke off into pieces, scattering about on the floor, and that's when a massive eyeball appeared. It looked directly at me, blinking a couple of times before simply remaining there, looking around on occasion. I knew it had an eyeball somewhere on its body like Odolwa had, yet I wasn't expecting to find it on its back. How was I supposed to hit something like that in the position it was located in?

*(1) I actually forgot this Stray Fairy was in the room with the Dungeon Map when I originally wrote that chapter, so I had to do a little bit of a retcon.
*(2) In the game, the Stray Fairy is trapped in a treasure chest. To reach it, you had to use the Deku Flower and float down to it as a Deku Scrub while using the Lens of Truth. You could also jump down as regular Link and perform a jump attack at the right time. Since I didn't want Sunset to go through another round of backtracking, I decided to change it to what I wrote.

Chapter 28: Daydream of Darkness

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 3, 2016
Chapter 28: Daydream of Darkness.

When I fought Odolwa and discovered that his weak-point was an oversized eyeball, I didn't think much of it at the time. Sure, it was hideous and moved of its own volition, yet it never occurred to me that it would become a consistent theme with these giant bosses. Upon the panel on Goht's back bursting open, the eyeball that it was hiding was revealed to me, scanning about the room whilst blinking at me several times. My opinion now was why did I have to resort to hitting something that was clearly beyond anything I'd ever seen in my entire life? I had seen strange things both in the world I call home and in Equestria, yet this definitely took the cake.

Termina had already proven itself to be a miserable existence of a world that struggled to cope with not only impending doom, but with the loss of life occurring among its people without them ever really noticing. Now, this place had proven itself weird by featuring beings who possessed abnormalities that not even Princess Celestia could explain. This was my lot in life I supposed, given that I was to suffer for being who I was, yet sometimes I felt things had gotten out of control. I felt my mind was slipping away into a deep subconscious from which I could never escape no matter how hard I tried.

Most people my age struggled with trying to prepare for their future lives as adults? Me? I was a pony turned human who fought against magic creatures among other kinds of beasts all to save a world that didn't always view me in a kind manner. I don't blame humans for how they treated me when my true ambitions were uncovered. Back then, I used them as tools so that I could further my own selfish desires, actions I still condemn myself over even after being able to move on for the most part. Did I enjoy the life I had been given? While it had given me experiences others could only dream of, there were times I desired a normal existence, a life that wasn't filled with magic.

Her Highness bopped me on the head to snap me from my daydreaming--I preferred to call it looking back on certain aspects of my past--and I shook my head several times before resuming focus on the task at hand.

Goht continued to lay on the ground in a paralyzed state, the eyeball on its back continued staring at me with a piercing gaze that was difficult to turn away from. The way its body landed when I rammed into its back moments ago, I could easily use my fists and punch it repeatedly, but what if it had landed on its stomach instead? I supposed I could use arrows to strike from a distance--the safer method according to Her Highness--but would those be enough? Arrows were strong without a doubt, but the raw power of a Goron was something that couldn't be dismissed either.

" What are you waiting for?" Twilight asked.

" I'm trying to assess the best way to attack that eyeball." I answered.

" You sound an awful lot like me just now, Sunset."

" Well, you've been a good mentor to me."

" I'm flattered that you're striving to follow my example, but now is not the best time to be doing that. I don't know how much longer Goht will stay paralyzed, but you need to act now before this opportunity gets wasted. Since his eyeball is closer to the ground, you can punch it with your fists until the creature is forced to get back up. If Goht were to land on its stomach, then you'll need to use arrows in order to hit its weak-point. I suggest using Fire Arrows as the magic within them should inflict extra damage. Either way, keep hitting that eyeball until it can no longer take it." Twilight said.

Strange that Her Highness said exactly what I was thinking about just now. Despite how the two of us never get to see each other--she has her obligations as a princess while I have my obligations as a student--we still remain close friends even though we didn't always act that way. We were on opposite sides because I believed I was entitled to everything without any of the effort, yet she earned everything by working hard and almost losing it through various means beyond her control.

If anything, I was actually expecting myself to have developed some kind of connection with her human counterpart. I had only known Twilight Sparkle for a short period of time, but we had so much in common. We were gifted, desired knowledge, had difficult upbringings, were loners, and--unfortunately--became demonic monsters. It was the latter that truly gave us a strong desire to get to know each other, and I especially wanted Twilight Sparkle to know that I was there to guide her through the aftermath of what happened--even though it wasn't her fault in the first place.

Maybe that's why she was the only one I could share my secrets with. I mean, Her Highness would know about them eventually, but it was Twilight Sparkle who I felt was the one I could trust the most about what I did. Both of them were the same person on the outside, yet on the inside they were like day and night, complete opposites that lead different lives who had a common connection in that they were my friends.

Just before Her Highness attempted to bop me on the head again--my daydreaming was really starting to get out of hand--I regained my focus and walked up to Goht. Its eyeball continued to watch my every move, but I ignored that and started punching it repeatedly with my fists. As each blow connected, the eyeball started getting bigger, and continued to increase in size until it looked like it was about to burst. I punched the eye one more time resulting in Goht getting back onto its feet, resuming its rampaging around rather than take the time to turn around and attack me.

" That eyeball looked like it was about to burst." I said, wiping my brow.

" I recall the same thing happening when you battled Odolwa."

" Do you suppose powerful magic is at work here?"

" Maybe, but it's difficult to say for certain, Sunset. We know those eyeballs are their obvious weak-points, yet I'm amazed at the amount of punishment they can take. Most eyeballs can only handle one shot before it causes unbearable pain, yet what we just witnessed makes you wonder." Twilight answered. For a brief moment, it sounded like Her Highness had a sadistic mindset regarding eyeballs, but that quickly dispersed when I realized she said it in the form of a question. " Anyway, you need to roll after Goht and continue ramming into its body so that you can expose its weak-point."

[Night of the Second Day - 36 Hours Remain]

The howling of a wolf echoed throughout the room, catching me off guard, and indicating that nightfall had come. Had I been exploring this temple all day? It felt like it had been a lot longer than that, but either way I was going to need plenty of rest after this.

Curling up into a ball, I rolled forward--my spikes protruding from my body several seconds later--after Goht who began firing lightning strikes again. As I tilted my body from side to side to avoid being electrocuted, there was something different about it. There was once a metal plate that covered its rear, but it had since fallen off--most likely after I knocked it down after ramming its back--revealing what looked like a small hole.

My first instinct involved ignoring it but that quickly proved disastrous when Goht started applying its next tactic. I eventually caught up to it and began ramming into its legs in hopes of making it crash to the ground, yet something suddenly appeared out of nowhere and exploded, my body being flung into the snow as Goht charged around the corner. As I climbed to my feet and brushed snow off of my body, I scratched my head wondering what had just happened.

" Where did that come from?"

" You were lucky you know."

" What do you mean?"

" Goht produced a bomb from that strange chute that got exposed when that metal plate fell off a few moments ago. If you had been even a smidgen closer, you would've been caught in the explosion and sustained a lot of damage." Twilight answered.

" Oh no... You don't mean?"

" I'm not sure that I follow." Twilight answered. You've got to be kidding me! That hole on Goht's rear is akin to... No... I'd rather not think about such a horrid thought. If that hole--chute as Her Highness called it--is exactly that, this battle had just gotten a whole lot more disturbing. Not only did I have to worry about being blasted by falling bombs, I also had to prevent myself from throwing up to the context behind it. " Sunset? Are you okay?" Twilight asked, wondering why my expression turned to one of nausea.

" Trust me! It's better for you not to know."

" Okay, if you say so. Anyway, those bombs will cause you to lose your spikes and reduce your speed leaving you vulnerable to Goht's lightning attacks. You'll need to avoid those in addition to the rocks it kicks up with its hind legs." Twilight said.

It's like what Her Highness said at the beginning when she described the behaviour of this mechanical bull, it has more than just the ability to shoot lightning from its horns. I wasn't looking forward to seeing what else it had in store for me. Before I decided to continue pursuing it, I needed to restore my magic power so I walked towards the pots on the ground, smashed them with my punches, and picked them up. As I collected the remaining magic, Goht suddenly thundered around the corner, trampling over me and leaving behind another bomb that exploded right next to me.

Luckily, I managed to protect myself in time by assuming a defensive position--my back became a craggy mass of rock that served as a shield--although I did suffer some slight burns, but it was better than being blasted through the wall. As I got back up, I noticed something unusual about Goht that I didn't notice before until now. There was smoke billowing from its back, and I could barely make out an electrical surge flowing about the smoke.

" Is Goht starting to short-circuit?"

" Perhaps all that punishment you're giving by ramming into it is causing a malfunction? I'm not very familiar with technology given how little of it is seen in Equestria, but what I do know from the experiences I've witnessed from the world you call home, Goht is definitely having some problems." Twilight answered.

" And I thought hitting its eyeball was the key? Maybe attacking its body is all I need?"

" You need to attack the body in order to knock it down so that you can hit the eye."

" So I am right, sort of."

" Just do your best to avoid taking too much damage, okay? I know you've been through this kind of thing before and that you feel confident about fighting against giant monsters of otherworldly origins, but remember that you're still just a human despite having special powers. It makes me wish I were a healing fairy." Twilight said.

That was the one thing I was truly missing from this experience. When I fought against the "bosses" during my previous journey, I always brought along fairies just in case I was going to lose my life--I knew that it wouldn't be easy--which almost always occurred. Why didn't I bring along any fairies this time? In my mind, my previous experiences were the result of me not being ready to handle something like a giant monster, and my awful performances back then were pretty obvious. Since I now had gotten better, I believed I no longer needed to carry around fairies, but perhaps my attitude was wrong?

No, I knew it was wrong. I struggled to defeat Odolwa and now I'm struggling to defeat Goht. Perhaps the strangest thing in all of this was the fact that I wasn't ponying up during these encounters. When my health reached critical levels--my body being bashed about also helped--I gained my pony ears and pony tail increasing my overall power. Not once in this journey had that occurred compared to the roughly half a dozen times it did before. Was it because Equestrian magic was being blocked out by whatever force was causing it to happen here in Termina? It was an answer that eluded me, and I knew Her Highness didn't have an explanation either.

Even if I could pony-up, how would that work with my ability to assume other forms? Would the magic from the land of my birth override the magic contained with the masks I wear to change my shape? Again, I had no answer for that, but I believed I knew someone who did know.

Deep within my subconscious, I knew he was waiting for me. The time was almost upon me to face death itself and my chances were slim.

Instead of chasing after Goht and being hit by attacks that came from nowhere, I decided to wait for it to come around before resuming the battle. That was something I had noticed that really got me thinking. This creature was being rather predictable in its movements compared with the likes of Odolwa. Did that mean it would be an easy fight? Maybe but then I had been surprised when bombs started dropping from that hole along with the lightning from its horns--I still couldn't get over the fact that the hole represented "that".

Goht eventually came charging by again, but I waited for it to drop its bomb before doing anything. When it exploded a fair distance away from me, I curled up into a ball and began rolling along after it. My spikes took a while to produce from my body due to several dips and hills in the way--why these didn't affect Goht was anyone's guess--yet I continued chasing it all while avoiding several lightning strikes. Once I caught up, I continued ramming into its legs--I did get bounced around a few times--until it finally toppled over, its eye expanding out and looking directly at me.

" It landed on its stomach this time."

" That means you can't punch the eyeball with your fists. You'll need to switch back to being a human and attack with arrows."

I grabbed my face, pulled off the Goron Mask, flipped my head back--hair as well--and took out the Hero's Bow. The arrows still contained the magic of fire so I decided to go with it in hopes of scoring extra damage--I had no problems wasting magic what with those infinitely re-spawning pots around--and since Goht's eyeball was huge, the chances of missing my target were fairly small. Aiming up at the eyeball--it started wriggling about much to my disgust--I fired a Fire Arrow, striking the eye causing it to increase in size. I continue firing arrows result in the eye continually expanding until Goht finally got back onto its feet.

" That smoke coming from its body is getting worse."

" It looks like an indication that it's weakening, Sunset. If you continue with this pace, you should be able to bring it down in no time."

" You don't think that smoke and the electricity coming from its body will affect me, do you?"

" No. If anything, it's making Goht feel very uneasy although I doubt it's even noticing. It's content with just rampaging about because you freed it from the frozen prison that once contained it." Twilight answered. She then bopped me on the head to warn me to get out of the way. I did as she asked just as Goht thundered by, dropped a bomb, and shot lightning from its horns. I avoided the lightning without any trouble, but the bomb bounced off of a small hill and landed next to me. " Sunset! Get away from that before it explodes!" Twilight shouted.

" Wha--" I said, not realizing what had just happened. The bomb exploded and I got caught in the blast, the right side of my body being consumed in the fiery haze that resulted from the blast, and being flung into the wall with a loud thud. I struggled to get back on my feet, Her Highness looking on not in shock or horror but rather with surprise. I was expecting to have severe burns, yet upon using my hand to touch the right side of my body, I didn't feel much at all.

" I don't know how you survived that, but you did and without losing any skin among other things."

" I call it a miracle."

" Perhaps someone is looking down on you with kindness?" Twilight asked. That thought only crossed my mind for a split second. In truth, I sensed a dark aura surrounding the bomb mere moments before it exploded. I knew he had no intention of me getting blown to pieces. He wanted to fight me at my full strength and being burned would deny him that. I chose not to bring it up to Her Highness as she would only worry. " Whatever the case, you can keep on going, right?"

" As long as that doesn't happen again." I answered. I put on the Goron Mask again and for once the stumbling proved to be beneficial. Goht came thundering by, but I had stumbled into the snowy slope before it had the chance to trample over me again. When the magic finished and I became Darmani, I curled up into a ball and started rolling again, my spikes producing quickly just as Goht fired another burst of lightning. I tilted to my left to avoid being shocked, ramming into its legs with plenty of force resulting in Goht running ahead of me a little bit faster than usual.

It didn't like the idea of me getting out in front so it would speed up to ensure it retained control. I had no intention of getting ahead of it because it meant getting trampled on by those mechanical hooves.

The battle was starting to take its toll on me in addition to Goht. While that bomb didn't severely injure me, the dark aura didn't entirely prevent me from taking any damage, so I knew I was beginning to lose steam. Smoke and electricity continued spewing forth from Goht's body and that meant it was close to finally being defeated. These next few minutes would determine which of us would make it out alive.

Goht continued rampaging forward until it came to a stop a short distance away before turning around in a half circle and firing lightning from its horns. This was the first time I had ever seen it stop like that and attack by facing me, but I wasn't about to let it gain the upper hand. A small hill several meters in front of me would provide an opportunity to attack it from above, but I needed to weave my way over to it.

I stopped rolling, my spikes retracted, and I turned slightly towards the hill knowing that I needed to jump off it. Before I could continue, a jolt of lightning travelled right through my body, the shock was enough to make my heart beat faster than usual, and I uncurled my body.

" Are you alright?" Twilight asked, concerned as always.

" I'm fine!" I answered, gritting my teeth as a second lightning strike went through me followed by a third. My heart was beating rapidly due to the constant barrages of lightning, but I had to keep going knowing that I needed to finish what Maud Pie started. " I have to defeat this monster otherwise the Gorons will die." I began rolling forward but was quickly stopped by another lightning strike, my body collapsing to the ground. Goht was serious in wanting me to die but I had to keep going even though it meant moving closer towards what could be my own death. " I'm going to chance it!"

" You can't be serious!"

" Just watch me!"

Was I allowing my anger to cloud my judgement? Perhaps yet it was a necessary pleasure. The image of Maud's ghost began flashing through my mind, tears trickling down her expressionless face, no words came forth from her gaping mouth. I promised that I would save her people and that was what I intended to do. Curling into a ball just as another lightning strike went through me, I began rolling forward towards Goht, dodging the next strikes, my spikes protruding from my body, and going off the small hill crashing into its side causing it to crash, but not before it flung a piece of rock that knocked me down.

The injury wasn't serious--a rock to the face was severe in certain circumstances--but I managed to get up and punch Goht's eyeball repeatedly with my fists before it got back up and began rampaging around. Rolling after it, I discovered it had one last measure as a means of desperation, namely, causing sharp rocks to fall from on high. One such rock landed right in front of me, my speed coming to an immediate stop.

" Its starting to drop stalactites."

" Are they going to be a problem?"

" Judging from the thickness of the one that stopped you, you won't be able to roll through them when your spikes come forth. Instead, you'll have to avoid them whenever they drop down otherwise you'll be a sitting duck." Twilight answered.

" How long do you suppose this will keep going on for?"

" I honestly have no idea, Sunset. I'm surprised that your punches and Fire Arrows haven't caused the eyeball to burst from such impacts, but perhaps it's much more resilient than we originally suspected? All you can do is keep on ramming into it with your body and attacking its weak-point until it finally goes down." Twilight answered. She then bopped my head--it was becoming her means of getting me to pay attention--to warn me that Goht was about to go by.

I walked off to the side and waited, Goht thundered by several seconds later, dropping a bomb before continuing on. Curling up into a ball, I began to roll forward only to be stopped by a stalactite that suddenly fell down from the ceiling. This caught me by surprise allowing Goht to strike me once again with lightning, but it wasn't enough to deter me from chasing it--it did get my heart beating fast, however--so I rolled around the stalactite and kept up the pace before my spikes appeared. More and more stalactites continued falling turning the battle into a dodging competition, but I persevered by focusing on Goht while tilting my body to get around the additional obstacle.

When I caught up with Goht, I rammed into its legs while avoiding the rocks it was kicking up with its hind legs. I didn't care about getting hurt. My only concern was to defeat it and save the Gorons from being wiped out from the cold of winter. In my mind, I wondered how Starlight Glimmer felt about the damage she had caused in the name of pulling pranks. I certainly had plenty of words to say to her once I had freed the remaining giants. Speaking of them, I had this feeling that I knew who the next one was going to be.

If my hunch was correct, I would be speaking with the significant other to Celestia.

Ramming into Goht one more time, it collapsed to the ground, its eyeball dangling out and swaying back and forth as a result of the impact. The eyeball was in the right position for me to punch it with my fists, so I began to do so repeatedly--it certainly was better than shooting it with arrows--until Goht got back up only to turn around and begin running after me, or rather stumbling about.

" What is it doing?"

" I think you damaged its eyeball enough to cause it to lose control." Twilight answered. I started running away from Goht as fast as my legs could carry me--it wasn't much considering my current body wasn't built for speed--and Her Highness looked behind to see what kind of behaviour it was exhibiting. It was flailing about its head in a maddening fashion, legs stammering about as it attempted to move in its bid to trample over me. " I suggest you hurry up, Sunset!

" What do you think I'm doing?"

" Not fast enough!"

" I may not be fast with this body but I can manage." I said. I had no intention of turning my head to see the maddening rampage of Goht--the sound it was making behind me was more than enough to pique my curiosity.

At first, it looked like Goht was about to run me down due to getting within mere inches of me, but then it suddenly changed direction, and plunged right into the wall. I stopped to see what was going on, and the only glimpse I got was Goht colliding with the wall, its mechanical body sprawling about. The impact caused rocks to start falling down on top of it, and it began to struggle freeing itself but to no avail. As each rock continued to pile on top of one another, Goht's attempts at freeing itself weakened until I could no longer see it, the rocks having buried it alive.

I looked up at the ceiling thinking that I too would become buried alive--the impact Goht made was enough to cause a massive cave-in--but luckily the rocks were only falling around the area it crashed in leaving me to breath a sigh of relief. And yet, I felt bad knowing that it had perished in a rather undignified fashion. I was expecting it to fall apart due to sustaining too much damage, its defeat by being buried alive felt empty of sorts.

Eventually, the rocks stopped falling from the ceiling, yet I wasn't about to take any chances. Slowly, I inched my way over to the rock pile that had formed, and tapped my foot against it to see if Goht would suddenly come out and attack me once again. Nothing happened so I tried one more time... Again, nothing happened. The battle had ended with me as the victor despite how it looked like Goht would make one final comeback. A bright light then started to form near where Goht had crashed, and I could make out what appeared to be its head or rather its mask floating above the light, a giant heart appeared nearby.

" You did it, Sunset!"

" That was way too intense." I said, dropping down onto my butt and exhaling heavily. " I'm sad that Goht had to die in such a horrible manner."

" I can understand how you feel about it. I've never seen anything like that, but remember that it was a mechanical monster that threatened to kill you. I doubt it had an actual soul other than what may have been inside." Twilight said.

" What do you mean?"

" You see that floating mask over there, right?" Twilight asked. I nodded my head. " When you defeated Odolwa, his mask appeared above a circle of light, and when you picked it up, we were transported to a strange place where we encountered one of the Four Giants who protect this land." Her Highness paused for a few moments before realizing that the giant was our old teacher or rather, Principal Celestia. " Celestia was trapped inside Odolwa until she was freed when you collected his mask. Another one of the giants was sealed inside Goht and has been freed. No, they weren't sealed into the bosses themselves but rather the masks."

" How do you suppose Starlight Glimmer sealed them like that?"

" She used powerful magic, magic that I can't even begin to fathom."

" Do you suppose the next giant is Vice Principal Luna?"

" Maybe, but we won't know for sure until we make contact with the giant." Twilight answered. She started to float towards Goht's floating mask before she turned around and noticed I was still sitting down on the ground. " Sunset? Come on! We need to collect that mask and meet the second giant!" Again I refused to move from my spot and Her Highness floated before me, a mad expression spread across her face. " What's wrong with you? Why are you being so stubborn all of a sudden?"

" You know what's going to happen once we've finished our business with Luna, don't you?"

" Oh... Oh... That encounter with Ganondorf."

" I feel like I'm going to die."

" No need for you to think like that, Sunset."

" Twilight... He is far more powerful than you can even begin to imagine. I've been dreading this moment ever since he revealed that he intends to challenge me once again. In our last encounter, I did everything I could and even used my full power in hopes of overcoming him." I said, standing up on my feet. " My efforts were in vain. Nothing I did even fazed him and in turn he left me within an inch of my life. The only reason I lived was because he willed it according to him." I slowly started walking towards Goht's mask even though my heart wanting me to turn back. " It was like I was facing death itself. Never in my entire time had I been so scared of anything."

" You've got me on your side."

" You really don't get it, do you?"

" No, I don't."

" Alright, Twilight. I'll keep going because we need to restore the world I call home to normal, but you will soon realize that my words are the truth. Ganondorf most likely has every intention of killing me because last time, it was all a test, a game where he was in complete control. This time, he won't be holding back." I said. My words didn't seem to resonate within Her Highness' heart, but she would soon realize that she hadn't seen true evil. The villains who aspired to conquer Equestria--myself included--were insignificant specks compared to the likes of Ganondorf.

The first thing I did was grab the Heart Container that appeared after Goht crashed into the wall. Picking it up gave me the familiar warm feeling that occurred whenever I grabbed one although this time it wasn't making me feel better--the upcoming contest truly frightened me to my very core. Once I felt ready to continue, I walked into the light, and picked up the mask Goht had worn giving me two of them. I had no idea why I needed to collect these masks, but I wasn't about to question something beyond my realm of understanding. To think that an innocent spirit--Vice Principal Luna--was once trapped inside without a means of escaping.

Suddenly, I changed back to normal without taking the Goron Mask off. Was it the power of the circle of light that caused it? Why would that be? I assumed that Maud's spirit would be a welcoming sight since she was a heroine who tried to save her people from being exterminated. Perhaps there was much more to this, yet again it was beyond my own understanding to comprehend. Goht's mask floated upward before I blacked out when everything turned white.

Moments later, I awoke to find myself in a familiar place. It was exactly the same as the location I encountered Principal Celestia, yet the colours were slightly different. This time, there was a blue hue surrounding me as opposed to the green hue from before, but I had no time to admire this change. I gulped before looking ahead at a large figure who was standing beyond several waterfalls, arms held out as though they were trying to bring down the heavens.

" I am free from the dark mask that kept me imprisoned!" Even though I couldn't see her, the tone in her voice was obvious in that I was speaking to Vice Principal Luna. " There is no doubt in my mind that it was you who saved me, you who can change your shape through the magic of masks." The giant lowered her arms and began walking forward, her hair flowing about like a beautiful veil, her footsteps soft and delicate but with tremendous power coming from them.

When she got close enough, I could see that she was indeed Vice Principal Luna, and much like her sister from before, she wore an identical swimsuit--a dark blue one that looked like I was staring into the moonlight of nightfall--symbols adorned on her face and arms, a powerful aura raditating around her body. There was no doubt that she possessed great power as did Celestia, yet something bothered me about all of this. If the Giants were so strong, how was Starlight able to imprison them within dark masks? Shouldn't they have prevented such a thing from happening by overpowering her?

" You remind me of the first Giant I rescued."

" We Four Giants share much in common but also possess our own unique powers." Vice Principal Luna said.

" Yet you couldn't prevent yourselves from being sealed away."

" The one who wears the dark mask that wrought great havoc upon the land that we four were sworn to protect is not what she seems to be. She believes that her dreams will become a reality, yet I fear she is playing with a force beyond her perception. What she wears will no doubt destroy her unless it is cast aside into the darkness from whence it came. You, who possess a similar power to her, must save not only this world, but the one who brought destruction." Vice Principal Luna said.

" You want me to help her?"

" Correct."

" Why should I do that?" I asked. Vice Principal Luna said nothing leading me to believe that she either didn't want to answer or didn't know it.

" You will learn the answer from the next one of us four who remains trapped within a dark mask. I can also sense a powerful dread coming from your heart, small human, a dread that threatens to shatter your mind. Someone is waiting for you... someone whose power vastly exceeds my own and that of the others. I do not what this person is planning, but you must be cautious unless the darkness consumes your very soul." Vice Principal Luna answered.

" Do you know anything else about this person?"

" This someone has lived far beyond the limits of mortals and possesses an arcane power that was created by the ancient ones. I suspect that this is knowledge you already know, but what you do not is that the person wields a secret known only to them." Vice Principal Luna answered. While it wasn't exactly the kind of information I was hoping for, at least she acknowledged that she was aware of Ganondorf's presence. I also learned that she and the other Giants had little power compared to him. Luna then looked upwards at the sky, and for a moment, I thought I could see several tears trickling down her face. " You poor child."

" Huh?"

" I cannot explain why but fate conspires against you."

" Doesn't it always?"

" Ah, so you are aware that your life hangs by a thread and that you have no control over it?" Vice Principal Luna asked. I slowly nodded my head and she responded by shedding several more tears. " I would wish such a fate on you, small human, yet it has been predetermined long ago. What happens to you when the one who awaits is finished, you must continue to awaken the remaining Giants until all of us are free once again." She then started walking backwards, indicating that my time with her had concluded. " When you awaken the final Giant, all of us shall appear before you to give you our one true desire before you must call us."

" Desire? What desire?"

" I cannot answer that."

I knew Vice Principal Luna was going to say that. Much like Celestia before her, she was being rather cryptic with her words, a fact that I had long gotten used to. I didn't know why these worlds were so bent on providing confusing information that only served to confuse those who were trying to save them from dark forces. Why not just come out and say it and not come across as being deceitful? Not only did I need to figure out where the Four Giants had to be summoned, but also what their one desire was supposed to be. Luna said they would reveal it to me when they were all awakened, yet that was something I couldn't trust her on.

She then continued walking backwards until her appearance disappeared into a veil of shadow, leaving me with more questions than answers. She mentioned that I needed to help out Starlight, the one who caused this problem in the first place. Why would I help someone like that? My mind started to become conflicted with mixed feelings. As a heroine, my goal was to help those who needed it. As someone who was once a monster, Starlight needed guidance to save her from the dark path she had chosen. Despite everything she had done in her bid to cause mischief, she had much in common with me, and I wasn't about to deny it.

That's when something else Luna said struck a nerve. What did she mean by "she is playing with a force beyond her perception"? Was she trying to suggest that Starlight wasn't in control of her actions and that something else had been pulling the strings? It sounded rather farfetched but then it was a possibility given how Ganondorf's surrogate mothers brainwashed his former second-in-command into acting against her own will. Part of me wanted her to pay for all she had done but another part wanted me to be sympathetic.

Everything suddenly went white as I blacked, and I believed that I would be sent back to either the entrance of Snowhead Temple, or at the very least, the base of the mountain so that I could witness the return of spring. With Goht's defeat, the harsh winter that plagued the region had finally come to an end, and that meant warmer weather would soon appear. No doubt the Gorons would feel relief knowing their lives had been spared, and Maud could now rest in peace in this world knowing her final request had been fulfilled. Unfortunately, I didn't appear in either of the two places I assumed I would return to.

When I regained consciousness, I found myself in front of what looked like a ruined fortress. I could tell that it was ancient and foreboding. There were several holes in the wall resulting most likely from being breached by either powerful soldiers, magic, or even catapults that fired strong projectiles. The front door was mostly missing with a small piece hanging on by a single nail that looked ready to snap off at any moment. Candles adorned either side of the door, a sign that someone lived here, but then who would live in such squalor? I looked down at the ground and noticed red stains scattered about, stains of blood from a bygone era.

This place didn't exist in Termina. It never did. It was just like what I experienced at the conclusion of my previous journey. This place was a ruined kingdom that must have flourished long ago, but was now nothing more than a relic of the past that had been forgotten.

" Where are we?" Twilight asked.

" I'm not sure, but it's obvious why we're here."

" Ganondorf?"

" Who else? He brought us here because he wants to face me again, but I'm not sure where he is exactly." I answered. A dark aura permeated throughout the area, an aura so powerful that it was impossible to sense the presence of anyone. Ganondorf was somewhere in this desolate place, but where he was remained unknown. " There's no telling when he will make his presence known so we should try to see if we can return to Termina before he finds us."

" I've noticed that you don't have your masks."

" What!?" I exclaimed. I quickly fumbled behind my back to see if Her Highness was bluffing, but she wasn't. All of my masks had disappeared.

" At least you still have your weapons, yet I find it strange that your masks have been taken away from you. Does Ganondorf not want you to assume your other forms? In any case, there's nothing we can do about it right now, Sunset." Twilight said.

" Already this is becoming my worst nightmare."

" No need to start freaking out." Twilight said. That was easy for her to say; she wasn't the one who had to fight Ganondorf. At that moment, it began to rain heavily thanks to the dark clouds that swirled above us, and the only place we could go was inside. " We must seek shelter from this rain. Once we're inside, we can figure out something that can help us get back to where we need to be."

Knowing that there was no other choice, I ran inside the fortress before I would get drenched by the heavy downpour. The interior of the fortress was even worse than what it was like on the outside. The roof had numerous holes strewn about allowing the rain to come in and create puddles of water, yet this was nothing compared to the large cobwebs that had skeletal remains dangling from them in an eerie harmony. Several support beams had fallen down from the ceiling, the lighting was poor, blood stains were common-place, and everywhere you looked, the stench of death could be sensed all around.

Truly this place was nothing short of being desolate. The dark aura that I felt outside was even stronger inside... Perhaps a reminder that this place was once home to many before they succumbed to whatever brought about their mutual destruction. What could've done this? It was an answer I hoped never to find out.

" I guess we should walk forward."

" There's something off-putting about this place and I don't mean the remnants."

" It's the evil that pervades everything."

" I've never felt such a strong evil like this before."

" You get used to it after a while."

After what I experienced in Hyrule and so far in Termina, I had long gotten adjusted to being surrounded by darkness, and I wasn't just talking about Ganondorf. Everywhere I travelled in both worlds, darkness could be felt all around, no place was safe from its tainted maw, waiting for the right moment to pounce on innocent people. Most people would've succumbed after being exposed to so much, yet I was able to persevere but not through normal means. Despite how much I've changed, I retained something that could never be gotten rid of and would forever remain a part of me.

My heart was tainted by evil.

I read about it out of curiosity in a book Her Highness let me borrow by sending it through the portal. Those who are tainted by darkness become less affected by it, a blessing but also a curse, a double-edged sword if you will. The blessing is that you can last longer than most in certain situations, the curse is that it's a reminder of the kind of person you once were before deciding to change things. Nothing can changed what I did in the past but I can learn from my mistakes and apply them to ensure others don't make them. The last thing anyone needs is another evil version of me wanting to conquer two worlds.

That's why Twilight Sparkle needed my guidance. She went through the same thing that happened to me except against her own volition. I wanted the power contained within the crown Her Highness once wore, her human counterpart didn't want so much magical knowledge. I will do for her that couldn't be done for me until much later in life. I'll make sure she never succumbs to the temptation of wanting power above everything else.

Walking over to a door at the end of the room, I opened it and entered a long hallway, candles adorned down the path on both walls provided the only means of light, numerous doors could be seen indicating something could be behind each of them, the path ending at a much larger door. While it would be obvious to immediately head towards that one, my heart compelled me to searching the additional rooms in case something was waiting in one.

Each room contained nothing but ruins, remnants of a forgotten people, and puddles of water courtesy of the rain coming through the damaged ceiling. At one point, I opened a door and got soaked by water leaving Her Highness to laugh at my misfortune, a frowned expression on my face as I wiped away the water with my hand. This would happen a second time prompting me to clench my hand into a fist, the anger burning inside of me, but not enough for me to lose control. When it happened a third time, I decided to just go along with it and laughed because I needed to remain positive knowing what laid ahead.

After searching each of the rooms to no avail, I opened the much larger door at the end of the hallway, the rust on the hinges giving off a terrible noise. This next room was rather furnished what with stained glass windows--some had been smashed--yet it was still ruinous, a painful reminder of what might be were I to fail in my task of restoring the world I called home back to normal. The various tables and chairs strewn about--what remained of them--told me that this room must have been a gathering place for those who once resided here, yet now looked like something lost in time.

Her Highness was in sheer delight upon seeing the contents of this room. Her love of knowledge caused her to react in the manner I had come to expect from her, freaking out over the possibilities of wanting to find out more about what this fortress once was in its glory days. That's when she noticed I stopped and was wondering why I did that.

" Sunset? Is something wrong?"

" He's here." I answered in a quiet manner.

" Who's here?" Twilight asked. She saw the look in my eyes and that it was in the direction of something in front of me. When she turned to see what I was looking at, she had the same look in her eyes and quickly hid behind my hat. Sitting there on a throne with a sword in his lap was Ganondorf himself, a cruel smile across his face, the aura of darkness surrounding him made it difficult for me to breathe when it began to flare up from him. " I've never felt such an evil force like this before, Sunset." Twilight said from behind my hat.

" This is nothing."

" What do you mean?"

" He's holding his power back because he feels that he doesn't need to use it. If he were exerting the true extent of what he's capable of, you and I would be dead from being choked from that aura." I answered.

" I have been waiting for you, child." Ganondorf said, his hand sliding down to the sword on his lap before gripping it tightly.

" Why bring us here?"

" This place... It is or once was the Kingdom of Hyrule until it fell into ruin. The Triforce kept the hearts of the people strong as they strove to live out their pitiful existences, but when the power was lost to them, despair soon ruled over them, madness consumed their thoughts, and soon they were no more. Without the golden power, this kingdom became a shadow, a forgotten land that no one can remember what it once was." Ganondorf answered.

" You did this, didn't you?"

" The Triforce was always destined to be wielded by me, and when I finally claimed all three pieces, I was banished from the land by those who believed they could live on without that given unto them by the Great Goddesses who created everything." Ganondorf answered. He clenched his other hand into a fist and the Mark of the Triforce appeared in his hand, glowing in an ethereal light. " By banishing me, they lost the light that protected them. Without it, Hyrule fell into ruin and became what you see before you." Ganondorf stood up from his throne and continued smiling that cruel smile. " I was their saviour and they forsook me in favour of their own misguided ways."

" So you killed them?"

" No... They killed themselves when the darkness the light strove away for ages consumed them. Had they accepted my dominion, my rule, they would have lived a existence where my word was law. A shame their own ignorance cost them everything." Ganondorf answered, taking several steps forward, drawing out his sword from its sheath, throwing it aside-it landed with a thud in the shadows--and stopping at the base of the steps that lead up to the throne he sat on. " You wonder why I brought you to this place, child? The worlds that you call home could one day become like this."

" Are you threatening Equestria?" Twilight asked, flying out from behind my hat.

" So... The one who is your mentor was also brought into this. How amusing."

" Wait! How do you know who I am?"

" I know everything little fairy, or should I refer to you as the Princess of Friendship? I have known of your very existence for a long time and everything that you've experienced since the day you were brought into your world. There is nothing that is beyond my reach, a testament to my power." Ganondorf answered. Her Highness was unable to respond initially, but that didn't matter as he wasn't finished speaking just yet. " You possess much power little fairy, but your beliefs are weak-minded much like yourself. Power is a force everyone aspires for and nothing will deter them from it. You can never change what lurks within their hearts, the desire for power no matter the cost."

" Friendship will always triumph over evil!"

" The light has been offended by the darkness it seems."

" What is that supposed to mean?"

" Perhaps the answer will come to you in time, but I grow weary of this pointless babbling." Ganondorf answered. He then looked at me with a gaze that pierced my very soul. I knew what was about to happen and it was something I had been dreading for so long. " Sunset Shimmer... Long have I been waiting for the chance to test your strength. I hope that you have grown stronger since our previous contest. My expectations of you have not changed since then so now show me your power." I drew my sword and shield in response yet he merely laughed at my actions. " Did you not hear me, child?"

" This is my power." I answered.

" Do not feign ignorance to me, child." Ganondorf said. He saw right through my deception and I knew that my attempt to fool him had failed. " Show me the form that you assumed before out of desperation, and perhaps the ascension that you achieved." I wasn't surprised at the revelation of his knowledge the form I became in order to save Twilight Sparkle from herself during the Friendship Games.

It was a form I had only ever achieved once and that was because I used the magic of my friends in order to ascend to a form that could match up to Midnight Sparkle, the evil twisted creature that Twilight Sparkle became upon unleashing the magic she had stolen. I had no idea that I was capable of becoming Daydream Shimmer--the name was given to me by my fellow students--as I assumed I would simply pony up and having an aura surrounding me or something. Magic in the world I called home was different than in Equestria. It continued confusing me even when it looked like it was starting to become easier to figure out.

Ganondorf wanted me to become Daydream Shimmer? Was it even possible? I didn't have the proper conditions to ascend so would I fail to live up to his expectations? I looked on at Her Highness who looked back with a worried concern on her face. I felt bad knowing that she got dragged into this because of me. No matter what happened, I had to make sure that she remained safe. The ponies of Equestria needed her. She was their guiding light. I was a fallen angel to them. I was important only to a chosen few, the masses had forgotten I even existed because of how long it had been.

" In Termina, that part of me was blocked by a powerful force."

" But in this wretched place, you are not restrained and can unleash your strength."

Before, I struggled to control my transformed state because of being hurt to the point of death, and almost losing my life several times in the process. I eventually controlled that power through sheer will and wanting to defeat Ganondorf--Tirek at the time--but would I be able to remain as my true self if I ascended? I didn't want to become the she-demon, the fallen angel that was the result of my desire for power, the very desire that Ganondorf wants for me. In my heart, I knew that unleashing my full potential would mean fulfilling his twisted desires of wanting me to abandon everything in exchange for becoming the strongest I could be, but there was no other choice.

I had to briefly cross the line between light and dark to survive without trapping myself in the dark side. Even if I were to become Daydream Shimmer, would I be able to control such a form given my past struggles? The only way to know for certain was to ascend.

Closing my eyes and concentrating, my pony ears and tail appeared--it felt like forever since they last appeared--before I took a defensive stance against Ganondorf. He merely laughed in response and walked forward, sword raised, eyes deadlocked on me. I didn't want to do this because I knew deep down that he too powerful, but I had to face him to stop myself from being afraid of his presence.

In an instant, he dashed towards me before thrusting his sword against my shield. The amount of force he exerted almost cost me my balance, yet I managed to persevere and held my own as I struggled to push him back. Since my shield had been damaged earlier when it got frozen by the Wizzrobe's magic, it was already starting to buckle under the pressure, and that meant it wouldn't last for long. I had to preserve it otherwise I'd be defenseless, but Ganondorf wasn't about to give me that chance. Using his free hand, he batted away my shield, it clanked about on the ground upon landing, and then he disappeared before reappearing right behind me.

With one swift stroke, he slashed me in the back before quickly darting around me and kicking me in the stomach--the blow knocked the wind right out of me. As I clutched my stomach, he followed through with another sword strike on my chest, and then a kick to my face--it really hurt--sending me flying into a table that broke apart from my weight.

" Come now! You are not even trying."

" What makes you say that?" I asked, picking myself up from the now splintered table.

" I know that you are more powerful than this, child, and yet you are afraid that you won't be able to control such a power? Heh... Why would you want to cripple yourself instead of embracing the truth that even now remains blinded to your eyes? Power is the driving force behind everyone's actions. To resist such a temptation is the same as admitting that you are weak and worthless." Ganondorf answered. Before I could respond, he kicked me in the stomach a second time followed by slashing me across my stomach and back using an advanced sword technique. " This is all too easy for me."

" Ha! Such arrogance!" I shouted as I slowly got back up after landing on my stomach.

" There is no arrogance in my words, child, namely truth. I had high hopes that you would achieve your more powerful form, and yet you disappoint me by fighting me with such an inferior power. Yes, I am well aware that you are able to ascend to a more grandeur state, but perhaps it is simply too much for you to understand." Ganondorf said. He lowered his sword before turning his attention towards Her Highness, a cruel smile once again appearing on his face. " What you need is convincing, child. I seem to recall that you transform whenever rage consumes your very being."

" What are you getting at?"

" The world that you come from... the real one that you were born into. Perhaps I should visit this world for myself, and conquer it as I have done with Hyrule among other realms out there, or perhaps I should allow it to burn to ashes by flooding it with the darkness that resides in the hearts of your kind." Ganondorf answered.

" I highly doubt you can do that!"

" You forget yourself, child. My power is far beyond your mind's comprehension." Ganondorf said. He raised his hand and it burst into dark flames, the light emanating from it was both pretty and terrifying. I wasn't surprised that the flames didn't hurt him--he was one with the very power that drove him to consume as much of it as possible. " I know that you desire to go back to the place where you were born, and I can send you there by simply conjuring up a portal. His hand then apparently slashed through the air and a portal appeared--the same kind that Twilight Sparkle created--revealing Canterlot in all its glory.

" Equestria..."

" Is right there for you to return to, but will it be the same way that it was when you left it?" Ganondorf asked. My desire to go back home quickly shattered when I realized what he was talking about. He had every intention of seeing my world consumed with darkness and quite possibly the extinction of everypony. Her Highness looked at me and it didn't take a genius to realize that this couldn't be allowed to happen. " Show me your true strength, child. Show me and I shall spare your world my fury, but if you refuse then their deaths shall be on your hands. You shall forever be known as their butcherer."

" Even if I wanted to, I can't do it! I don't have the magic of my friends to draw from to achieve that particular form."

" So be it then. Your world shall be condemned through your actions." Ganondorf said, his eyes shifting towards Her Highness again. " Not only the world of your birth but the world that you reside in now, both will not survive my wrath. And, I shall begin with the one who is held with such high esteem." He started walking forward and I knew he was going straight for Twilight. I tried to stop him but he batted me aside with his hand. " You will become my first victim, princess, and the child shall forever be tormented with the fact that she failed to save you when you needed her the most."

" NO! Don't you dare touch her!" I shouted at the top of my lungs.

" Your attempts at a threat are meaningless to me. You lack the power to do anything and so I shall allow you to watch your mentor die a slow, painful death. When she is dead, I shall bring the others who mean so much to you, and they shall also die by my hands." Ganondorf said. He took another step towards Twilight and I responded by getting in front of him to protect her from harm. " You bore me, child." He grabbed me by my tunic's collar, lifted me up effortlessly, punched me in the stomach several times before finishing up with a sword slash across my chest and tossing me aside where I landed by my shield.

" Why would you want to kill me?" Twilight asked.

" Because you are the key."

" Key? Key to what?"

" All will become clear soon enough."

" You're not making any sense."

" That is because you cannot see beyond the veil. Once you can see things that your eyes cannot, everything will become clear. It is a shame you will not live to understand. " Ganondorf said. He grabbed Her Highness and started squeezing her tiny body before he stopped and turned his head around slightly. " Now the true contest begins."

I was standing up once again, blood trickling down my stomach from the wounds he inflicted on me, my body covered with bruises, and a hateful expression on my face. The anger within me had reached a boiling point and there was no chance of me calming down. What Ganondorf just did to Twilight had pushed me over the edge, and he was going to pay dearly for it with every fiber of my being.

Images suddenly flashed through my mind, reminders of what I had been through. I saw Her Highness, my friends, my peers, all looking at me with scared expressions. I could hear them calling me a monster for losing control and allowing my temper to consume my every waking thought. No! I... I couldn't lose control. I'm not the same person I once was who struck fear into the hearts of everyone around me. I was their friend, a fellow Wondercolt, a member of the family. In an instant, my body relaxed and I began calming myself down, yet the magic continued flowing into me from somewhere.

My body suddenly glowed in a bright light, my tunic replaced with the elegant gown I wore when I had to stop Midnight Sparkle, wings of light appearing from my back, and my hair lifted itself up before it all finished with the accessories I gained.

" Sunset? Is that you?" Twilight asked, floating over to check me out.

" I don't know how I managed to become this form without our friends, but I've given Ganondorf what he wanted." I answered.

" So this is the Daydream Shimmer form you mentioned when I returned after that time travel incident."

" I'm just surprised that I'm in control right now. In the past, whenever I ponied up, I lost control and didn't care about my own well-being. Instead, my only desire was to use my sudden increase in magic to overcome whatever was blocking my path." I said.

" You're in control right now."

" That's because I eventually mastered having so much magic all at once."

" So this is your ascension?" Ganondorf asked, my attention finally focusing back on him. " I can sense that your power has increased exponentially, a far cry from the weaker form that you used mere moments ago, but it also proved that power is something you strive for despite denying it." He took a step forward before assuming what I believed was a fighting stance where his sword was raised in an arc-like fashion. " Perhaps there is still a possibility to abandon your current path and embrace your new power. Then again, this is merely the tip of what you are capable of. You can go even further beyond what I see standing before me."

" Shut up!"

" Heh, such boldness is most un-becoming of you, child. Perhaps I shall teach you what it means to respect those superior to you." Ganondorf said. He raised his sword in an effort to strike me, but I quickly moved forward, slashed him in the stomach, and moved back in the span of a couple of seconds. " What!? How were able to move with such speed? That must have been luck giving you sympathy."

" That's your reasoning? I guess you're not as astute as you think." I said. I repeated the same maneuver, Ganondorf again being surprised by what I did. In fact, I was also surprised at how fast I had moved in those split seconds. Had my transformation to Daydream Summer made me so fast he couldn't keep up with me? Was it the only thing that had changed or had I become even stronger? " You wanted to see this form and now you've got it."

" You merely caught me by surprise."

" Maybe, but I think you're lying to me."

" Such arrogance!"

" Like what you were doing to me earlier?" I asked. My words reacted to Ganondorf in the manner I was expecting from him. He swung his sword forward--much faster than he had done previously--yet he connected with nothing but thin air as I had since moved around behind him. " Maybe I've become stronger than you? I don't mean to brag but you are having some slight trouble keeping up with me." I knew not to underestimate him as he still hadn't shown me the full extent of his magic. I also knew not to anger him otherwise there was no telling what he would do.

" You? Stronger than me? Do not delude yourself into such thinking."

" Then why not use more of your magic?"

" What I have will suffice."

" If that's the case then allow me to show you some of my magic. I won't get the chance to use it again after I return to Termina, so I might as well use it now and see what it can do against someone whose heart has been poisoned by evil." I said. Cupping my hands together, I fired a beam of light that struck Ganondorf, and pushed him back several meters. I knew my magic was powerful yet I wasn't expecting it to be that potent.

" Your magic burns of the light."

" I know you better than that, Ganondorf. The light doesn't affect you all that much because you're surrounded by so much darkness. If anything, all I did was give you a minor graze that shouldn't even be an issue for someone like you." I said.

My words again triggered a nerve, and the Dark Lord charged at me, swinging his sword and crashing it against my shield. He showed no signs of relenting as blow after blow collided against the metal frame of my shield, yet I was holding my own thanks to my shield becoming stronger as a result of becoming Daydream Shimmer. Of course, I knew that I couldn't rely on playing a defensive game. I had no idea how long this transformation would last, so I needed to wrap things up before I wind up being vulnerable.

With a swing of my sword--it too had been powered up--I pushed Ganondorf back before following up with several slashes across his armoured chest. Each blow continued to push him back as he struggled to counterattack, and eventually he found himself against the wall, the tip of my sword inches from his throat.

" Yes... This is exactly what I was expecting from you, child."

" I know and that's why I'm not going to end your life."

" Because by doing so, you would be tainted with darkness, more than what currently lurks within your heart. You have strived so much to move on from your tortured past, but you can never hope to break free from that which has defined you." Ganondorf said. He grabbed my sword and pushed it away, causing me to stumble back a few paces before he moved away from the wall. " That is why you should abandon the notion of wanting to fight in the name of justice. I can see the conflict that boils within, a force that struggles to want to embrace power, but it is held back by a desire to move on."

" I'm not going to listen to you."

" You secretly desire more powerful magic to further your own ambitions, yet you deny this because you do not wish to hurt those who trust you. Deep within your soul, you still wish to become just like the princess, one who has ascended to a form only a few chosen could ever achieve." Ganondorf said. He walked over and placed his hand on my shoulder, the vile twisted darkness that was his power began to clash against the Magic of Friendship. " It is something that has been gnawing at you for a long time. You may think that you have accepted your fate, but you still desire to become a princess."

" That... That's something I know I'm not ready for."

" Light chooses to deny her destiny... How amusing."

" I'll become a princess when I've earned that right, and nothing you or anyone else says will change that. You've tried this trick on me before, Ganondorf, using my own feelings and turning them against me by filling them with malice." I said. I looked down at my hands, a fear causing me to tremble upon the realization that he was right about one thing. I did desire stronger magic and hoped that I could go beyond what Her Highness was capable of. " I won't deny it any longer. I do want stronger magic, to be able to ascend in a different way, but not without my friends by my side. Gaining new magic means nothing without them."

" Then you can still be turned."

" What do you mean?"

" The desire for wanting stronger magic is an admission that you crave power. It is like I told you before, child. All creatures desire power even if they do not necessarily have a need for it straight away. Power is the force most believe in because without it, they can never achieve their deepest desires, and become nothing more than shadows that fade away. Those who have power can perform great miracles, and perhaps influence others." Ganondorf answered.

" Why do you want me to embrace power?"

" You are special, child. I have seen many like you over the millenia. Most of them ended up being disappointments who failed to live up to the expectations I had hoped, yet you happen to be one of the few who has proven worthy. It takes one who has seen both light and dark to be able to achieve true power. I can show you a way that will give you not only power, but also the ability to allow you to fulfill your deepest wishes. You need not change your form for it is sufficient enough, yet you must cast aside everything you know and love. The path to true power involves removing weakness and salvaging the strong." Ganondorf answered.

" No!" I announced, grabbing his arm and pulling it off my shoulder.

" Have you chosen to defy me?"

" I've been through a lot of things since Princess Twilight gave me a second chance. I had plenty of moments where I wanted to give up and embrace for the power that I lost when my friends brought me back to my senses." I answered. My grip on Ganondorf's hand caused him to wince a little, surprising me, yet I wasn't about to let go. " I even wanted to run away from everything. I... I was being immature and believed that I had lost everything. I found my epiphany and I knew I couldn't succumb to despair and be ruled by my past. Despite still having some lingering doubts, what I did was in the past and it no longer defines the kind of person I am."

" This power... Where are you getting this power from?"

" It's something you will never understand. It took me a long time to finally embrace the Magic of Friendship, and I had plenty of help from my friends, my family. I'm afraid that you failed in your desire to turn me back to who I was in the past, someone who cared only for herself and for power. The future for me is bright thanks to knowing that it's something I won't have to face on my own." I answered.

I'll admit that my choice of words could have been better, but the point still stood in that Ganondorf had failed to persuade me to accept power as the one thing I needed to prove myself worthy of anything. Magic began to swell inside of me and I could feel it wanting to come out and show him that there was another way. He had spent his entire life seeking power because he wanted to stand above everyone else. He cared nothing for those he crushed on his path. That's the kind of person I could never become.

With a flick of my wrist, I threw Ganondorf back where he landed, his feet kicking up the concrete of the floor leaving behind a trail. The hatred in his eyes was intense as he ran forward, his sword glowing indicating that it was being fueled by the dark aura coming from him. I raised my sword in response and began repelling each strike he made, each blow grew stronger and stronger as he was determined to bring me down.

It looked like I was going to be overwhelmed by his might but I quickly turned the tables by slashing him in the stomach several times, each hit apparently weakening him until he dropped to one knee followed by the other one. Part of me still didn't want to kill him despite his actions because it meant embracing the darkness, but my heart knew that my actions were justified. Those like Ganondorf were beyond being capable of saving. His heart was far too twisted for any kind of warmth to appear and allow him to seek a better path. The only option was to strike him down and end it.

I moved my arm back and waited for him to stand up--I wasn't going to let him lose his dignity--and when he did, I lunged my arm forward, my sword going right through him in a blaze of light that represented the Magic of Friendship, and just like that, it was over. Ganondorf stood there, my sword in his chest, but he wasn't about to get the satisfaction of pulling it out himself in a final glory. Instead, I pulled it out, blood dripping down onto the ground, and he dropped onto both knees before falling flat on his face. In that instant, I breathed heavily, wiped the blood off my sword, and dropped to my knees.

" Sunset..." Twilight said.

" He's dead." I said. I picked up the sword that he dropped after he slumped to the ground, gripped it firmly in both hands, raised my leg, and broke the sword in two upon it connecting with my knee before tossing it aside.

" I can't believe you did that."

" I know it's difficult for you to understand, Twilight, but it was a choice that I had to make. I've been in this situation so often that it's become second nature, but know that I didn't want to have to do this. He forced me into this conflict through all that taunting he did, but perhaps it was meant to be." I said. I looked at my sword hand and the Mark of the Triforce appeared on the back of it, glowing brightly for several seconds before disappearing as quickly as it appeared. " If you're wondering what that was just now, Twilight, I'll give you an explanation once we get back to Termina. We still have work to do there."

" There is more to this than what you're saying, isn't there?"

" What I told you about in my report may not have been everything."

" Because?"

" I didn't know all of the details, but I think I'm starting to understand."

" You've got plenty of time to explain it to me, Sunset. For now, we need to figure out how to get back to where we need to be. I think we should search through this fortress again in case we may have missed--" Twilight said.

She suddenly froze on the spot before starting to shiver as though something had scared her. I scratched my head wondering what had gotten her worried, and that was when I felt a tremendous pain go through my stomach. I looked down and discovered what appeared to be a trident had protruded through my stomach. Blood gushed forth from the wound, my body going numb upon realizing what had just happened.

I tried to say something, but I found that I couldn't. My body then slumped forward and became lifeless, Ganondorf's laughter echoing behind me as he gripped the trident that had gone through my body, Her Highness looking on in absolute terror. I thought I had killed him but he lived and had killed me.

Chapter 29: Fated Sunset

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 10, 2016
Chapter 29: Fated Sunset.

As my body slumped to the ground, blood trickling out from beneath, Ganondorf continued to laugh at what he had done. The trident that he held in his hand had blood--my blood--on the tip and as it trickled down, he ran his finger along the tip before flicking the blood away. Calling him sadistic at this point was an understatement, yet he held a strong sense of satisfaction over what he had done. This wasn't the first time Ganondorf had killed someone, far from it, but I'd say it was his most satisfying kill considering how I was able to ruffle his composure by defying him.

Her Highness was still in shock that I had been killed, but that was when she noticed something about Ganondorf. He had since covered up his chest with his cape, yet the darkened section indicated that he had sustained more than just a wounded sense of pride. The thought of losing me was enough to make her rush forward in hopes of making him pay for what he had done, but her efforts were in vain. She was a fairy in this world and not a pony princess who possessed incredible magical powers. There was nothing she could've done against Ganondorf and he was about to remind her of that frailty.

The moment she got close to him, Her Highness was stopped by a powerful force that began to crush her on all sides. As she looked on, she could see that Ganondorf was struggling a little to maintain focus, yet he tried desperately to make it appear that nothing was wrong. Eventually, he relinquished his hold over her, his cape flapping to the side, revealing a gaping hole in the middle of his chest, blood gushing forth, his armour cracked around the epicentre around the wound. I had somehow performed the impossible and inflicted a severe wound on Ganondorf; not enough to kill him, but enough to show that not even he was invincible.

On the other hand, he was laughing before he chose to hide his wound. Perhaps what Her Highness was seeing was his attempt at trying to deceive her into thinking that he had suffered such a wound. In her eyes, however, all she could see was my lifeless corpse sprawled across the ground, the magic that had surrounded me faded away until my body changed back to normal from being Daydream Shimmer. Despite having ponied up on numerous occasions, I could maintain my ears and tail for as long as I needed to. Retaining such a beautiful form as I had become during the Friendship Games was much more difficult.

Was it because it was a form I had never achieved before until that moment? Did my body struggle to contain all the magic I had absorbed? Those weren't the only questions I had on my mind as my life continued to slip away. Had I reached the pinnacle of what I could do with magic? Had I achieved a form that the rest of my friends would never be able to achieve due to not having the same magical experience? Or, was this merely the beginning? Would I evolve even further than I had? It was a thought that had no immediate answer, yet perhaps it would come to me sometime in the future.

Her Highness attempted to charge at Ganondorf again--why she would do this again was beyond me given it didn't work before--but she stopped of her own accord when he turned his attention towards her, the hatred in his eyes glowed vehemently. It was that kind of fear he had been using to torment me in my dreams, yet now he was doing it to her because it was what gave him some additional power: the power of fear.

" The child... has proven herself much stronger than I had initially expected." Ganondorf said.

" I can't believe you would say that!" Twilight shouted.

" It seems that you still wallow in despair over the fact that the only one closest to you in this world has breathed her last." Ganondorf said as he slowly got to his feet. " Do you really think you can do something against me? You may possess a powerful magic far beyond most, yet it cannot be used here in this place. All you are merely doing is begging me to end your wretched existence."

Twilight was flustered. " Why? Why did you do this to Sunset?"

Ganondorf answered. " I wanted to test her strength once again, to see if she had gotten stronger since our last contest."

" Is that all you care about? Power? Those who dedicate themselves to power only end up destroying themselves by being consumed by it. You may think that you can control such power through those boasts of yours, but even you struggle to keep yourself in check." Twilight said. She floated closer to Ganondorf making sure not to get too close. " I noticed you lost control of your emotions when Sunset chose to defy you. For someone who claims to be all-powerful, that's certainly a glaring weakness to have."

" You would be wise to choose your words more carefully, princess."

" Oh? And what are you going to do about it? Kill me? Knowing you, that's probably what you would end up doing. I actually thought you could be reasoned with despite having a heart caked in so much darkness. I thought you and Sunset could've avoided all this by refusing to fight, yet you insisted on fighting her just to prove something pointless. Power isn't everything, Ganondorf!" Twilight announced. The moment she said that, the Dark Lord reared his head and lurched forward. " Having power means nothing if you can't have someone to share it with or better yet, not having it at all."

His response to her words was an immediate laughter that echoed throughout the room. It was at that point where Her Highness realized that she was merely wasting her breath trying to convince him that the pursuit of absolute power was wrong. He was far too gone to save given he had been gaining power over the course of many centuries. At the very least, she tried her best in a vain hope he would listen. Ganondorf then began walking forward, blood dripping on the floor with every step he took, yet it didn't appear to faze him. Perhaps his wound wasn't as severe as it originally seemed?

He continued walking until he stopped right in front of my body and raised his trident above his head. Her Highness believed he was about to drive it down into my body as further insult to the fact that he killed me, and she attempted to flutter about in hopes of distracting him. Again, her effort was in vain as she found herself being frozen on the spot by a more powerful force than before. Ganondorf's power was slowly growing and that meant his wound was no longer weakening him.

The trident came crashing down to the ground, inches away from my head, and he left it there for a few moments before picking it up again using dark magic. Twilight was confused as to why he put on such a display. Ganondorf's trident began to hover in the air through his magic to demonstrate that his power was still absolute, but when it disappeared into black smoke a few moments later, he clenched his hand into a fist, looked down at my body, and huffed before stepping back a few paces. He continued to stare down at my body as though he were waiting for something to happen, and that's when he began laughing again, kicking his head back in the process.

" I find this most amusing."

Her Highness wasn't amused in the slightest. " You've got a lot of nerve, laughing at Sunset's lifeless corpse."

" That nattering of yours, princess, tells me that you still haven't figured it out yet, have you?" Ganondorf asked. Twilight's immediate response to his question was a quick shake of her head before lowering it down slightly. " No, I didn't think it would make sense to one who has no knowledge of the Triforce." He thrust out his clenched fist and a bright glow suddenly appeared on the back of his hand before a similar one started glowing on my hand. Her Highness looked on in surprise as she didn't know what was happening. " The Triforce is a power that can produce great miracles, such as being able to cheat death."

" What are you saying?"

Ganondorf laughed quietly. " The child... still lives."

" Sunset is still alive!? But, how!?"

" My wound through her body did indeed kill her, but the Triforce of Courage that dwells inside of her body has reacted to her heart. It senses that she must continue in her efforts to save not only those she cares for, but for two worlds that she calls home." Ganondorf answered.

" The Triforce can perform a miracle like that?"

" Heh... There is much about the golden power that eludes both you and the child, princess. She believed that it was over when she restored her world, yet she never once told you or the rest of her friends that she still possessed the Triforce of Courage. Once a piece has chosen someone to bear it, they can never be rid of it. They are forever bound to the others who possess the remaining pieces... unless they are killed." Ganondorf answered.

" You wanted to kill Sunset so that you could claim her piece?"

" Ha!" Ganondorf answered, his fist revealing his mark had three glowing pieces as opposed to my one. " Where I am from, the complete Triforce became mine when I slaughtered all those who tried to prevent me from achieving my destiny."

" But, if you have the complete Triforce, why does Sunset have a piece now?"

" It is a question that she will discover when the time comes, and perhaps you shall find out the same answer." Ganondorf answered. At that moment, I let out a quiet groan and slowly began to move my arms and legs without even realizing it. " The child is the one who can indulge that curiosity, princess, but I would not assume that she alone must suffer. If you have not yet figured out why you are here, then perhaps you are not as intelligent as others have claimed."

" I... I don't understand."

" Fate hasn't just come down upon the child." Ganondorf.

My body continued to wriggle about as I struggled to regain consciousness, and upon seeing me flailing about, Her Highness floated beside my head to give me some much needed comfort. It was as though her very presence combined with an inner magic residing inside her body was enough to make me open my eyes. The first thing I did upon waking up was coughing up some blood that had gotten stuck in my throat. My next course of action was to try and get back onto my feet, yet that proved difficult given that the wound Ganondorf inflicted on me was still making me writhe with pain--at the very least I had stopped bleeding.

I looked down at the gaping hole in my stomach before noticing a similar hole that Ganondorf had in his chest, but unlike mine his didn't look any where near as bad. In theory, I should be wallowing about in what many have referred to as the afterlife, yet here I was alive with a hole that went right through me. How had I come back to life? I didn't collect any fairies along the way before coming to the temple--although on hindsight I should remember to pick some up--so what caused it? Looking at my hands followed by my body, that was when I noticed that my magic had weakened and I was no longer Daydream Shimmer.

Not that I was bothered by it all that much. In truth, I was relieved that I was no longer in that powerful form. While I enjoyed becoming so beautiful and possessing magic that came from all of my friends, I didn't want to lose control given how much power flows through me.

Before I even had a chance to figure out what was going on, I felt a tiny push against my cheek prompting me to look down. Twilight was squeezing my cheek as hard as she could with as much force as her tiny body could muster. The feeling felt mutual to me so I responded by closing my eyes, smiling, and tilting my head. No doubt I had worried her immensely over what had just transpired, yet that was when Her Highness broke the silence by saying something.

" Sunset... I thought you were dead."

" Wasn't I?" I asked, confused.

" You were, but the Triforce you possess brought you back to life."

" You're kidding!?" I exclaimed, looking down at my hand and seeing the Mark of the Triforce glowing. " This thing saved me, huh? I know that my spirit left my body for a few moments after I collapsed to the ground, but I felt some divine power pulling me back into my body, a voice telling me that I wasn't meant to die right now."

" I'm just relieved that you're alive!"

" Me too, but I still don't understand why it happened."

" It is because the Triforce of Courage willed you back to life through divine intervention." Ganondorf said. That's when everything started coming back into focus, and I looked onward at the man who had briefly ended my life moments ago. " I am not surprised that you have cheated death, child, but then the Triforce of Courage had chosen you to wield it because you represent that force. I knew that you would not die but it didn't stop me from enjoying myself."

" You knew Sunset would live?" Twilight asked.

" Of course he knew, Twilight. Ganondorf can foresee everything before it even happens." I answered.

" What has happened here is that you have now embraced the power that lies inside of you even if it escapes your understanding. That alone is what makes you worthy of my attention, worthy of casting aside your pathetic existence in favour of being one with the power and becoming my faithful servant. If you had not kept the Triforce of Courage after restoring everything back to the way it was, I would have killed you there and then instead of allowing you to live." Ganondorf said.

" Is that why you want me to suffer?"

Ganondorf laughed. " Think of it as a small bonus for me."

I shouted back. " You're sick and twisted."

" It is because of the changes that you have experienced in your life that has made you a threat to my dominion, child." Ganondorf said. His words suddenly shocked me. Was that the real reason he had been making me suffer from the very beginning? Had my change over the past year at Canterlot High resonated with him in some way? If so then why go after a pony turned human? I needed to know more about this. " I see you finally figured out an important answer."

" Why me?"

" When you became a demon, you gained power that almost rivaled my own, thus getting my attention. Then you changed and started gaining new power courtesy of the light, that power blossomed further through the bonds that bind you and your friends together." Ganondorf answered.

The truth had finally be made known to me, yet there was still much that didn't make sense. I was once a gifted unicorn who had so much potential who squandered that opportunity, but maybe that wasn't what drew his attention towards me. What else could there have been that would attract him? That's when it started to become clear. He mentioned the form I became during the Fall Formal, the form that I felt was my biggest ever mistake in life.

It was what happened after I was defeated by Her Highness and my friends. I had gained not only new magical abilities such as my ability to pony-up, but also my ability to combine my friends' magic together with my own and become Daydream Shimmer. Something didn't seem right about all of this. What happened during the Friendship Games occurred after the ordeal that was my journey across Hyrule in that video game. My new transformation had become a threat to him and he was determined to bring me under his influence because of the magic I acquire. It made sense since he'd rather have power under his control than against him.

My increasing magic courtesy of what I brought into the world that I called home was the sole reason why he was targeting me. My friends were gaining new magic at around the same pace, but because of my experiences, my magic was secretly more powerful than theirs.

" So you see me as a threat?"

" You are a unicorn whose magic is far beyond your years, yet you are a mewling compared to the likes of my power." Ganondorf answered. " I have lived over two millennia and seen things the likes of which are beyond your mind. Your magic is a small spark that cannot be held up to mine. Perhaps you would have the same satisfaction were you to have lived for as long as I have."

" Doesn't change the fact that I'm a threat."

" Heh... You may think all you like, child, but know that you will never truly escape my grasp." Ganondorf said. The fact that he changed the subject indicated that I had gotten under his skin, yet he was refraining from losing control like he did before. Was he trying to hold back his emotions? Perhaps he wasn't as intimidating as I originally thought. " You have lived up to my expectations of you, Sunset Shimmer, yet you can go even further than you already have."

I knew where he was going with those words and I wasn't about to put up with it. " I don't want to go further!"

" You have no choice in the matter."

" No matter what you say, Ganondorf, I'll never become your servant!"

" It is only a matter of time before you bend your knee to me and become my faithful servant whose power shall be nurtured under my guidance. So long as you possess a piece of the golden power within you, you and I are forever bound together by fate." Ganondorf said.

" Why do I even have it?" I asked. " Shouldn't it have left me when I finished that game?"

" The Triforce of Courage chose you as you exhibited courage in the face of adversity. It seems you needed courage to get you through the dark days after you lost the power you claimed by using what once belonged to the princess. You questioned everything because deep down you feared that the others would despise your very existence. It was all a mere coincidence that the power chose to remain with you instead of separating." Ganondorf answered.

There was nothing I could say in response to his words. Ever since I returned from Hyrule, I made absolute certain that none of my friends nor anyone else at Canterlot High knew about the power that remained inside of me. I feared they wouldn't understand considering they'd never believe what had happened to our world. For a while, the mark never appeared and I thought no less about it, but when it began glowing a couple of days before the get-together between Canterlot High and Crystal Prep, I should've realized it was a sign that things were about to get much worse for me. Maybe I should have said something instead of keeping it to myself.

Had I done that, perhaps all of my friends would be in this situation and not just myself and Her Highness. Speaking of her, I felt guilty over not entirely being honest about what happened when the world I call home was transformed into a world from a game. I knew she wasn't upset as she herself had kept secrets out of fear that no one could understand, yet perhaps she was disappointed all the same? At the same time, I should have taken those nightmares more seriously. They weren't just about making me suffer, but were also a warning that things were going to get much worse.

All of a sudden, I noticed Ganondorf had turned his back to me and began to walk away.

" Where are you going?"

" I am done with you, child."

" You don't want to kill me again?"

" Heh... There is no point considering the Triforce of Courage protects you." Ganondorf answered. I breathed heavily over what he said, but then he suddenly turned around and looked at me with a sharp gaze. " Do not feel so complacent, child. The golden power only protects you when you are in Hyrule and that you have proven that you represent the power it conveys from Farore (1). In the world that you shall be sent back to, it does not exist there." That alone caused my heart to start beating heavily and Ganondorf responded by laughing. " You thought the power would prevent the torment that awaits you? You can never escape from what has been fated to happen."

Turning around again, Ganondorf took a single step forward before stopping again. " Child... You shall face me once again when you have become even stronger, but it will not be in a place like this nor will it be in the world that hangs on the edge of destruction. I can foresee the great magic that awaits you upon acquiring something that has significance with a mark you were stained with at a much younger age."

His words confused me. " What does that mean?"

" When next we meet, it shall be within your very mind. I have seen your physical strength, child, yet your mental powers are something that I have yet to witness. So long as the Triforce of Courage is in your hands,there is no where that you can escape from me. Never forget my words, child! I shall always be watching from the shadows, waiting for the time when I shall test your mental prowess. I shall haunt your subconscious to remind you that you and I bound together by fate." Ganondorf answered. He walked forward until he disappeared into the shadows, but the echo of his words continued to be felt. " Your other is also bound to the same fate. Now... Begone!"

Everything suddenly went white as it had done before and the next thing I knew, I was back in the Snowhead Mountains--more specifically the Mountain Village. The first thing I did upon regaining consciousness was to see if the wound Ganondorf had inflicted on me had either healed up or was still there. To my relief, there was no wound. With that problem solved, I got back up onto my feet and began looking around to discover an amazing sight. The snow had been melting all across the area though some still remained, but why had it melted so quickly? By my recollection, my encounter with the Dark Lord had lasted roughly an hour or two.

Then again, he brought me to a place that was outside the boundaries of Termina. As such, time hadn't moved on since I defeated Goht, and that's when an idea came to me. The snow was a curse and Got was the source behind it, but with its defeat by my hands, Snowhead had turned back to the way it was before. Sadly, it was a hollow victory at best. I had saved all of Snowhead from succumbing to a frozen death, yet things would revert back to the they were with Goht once I reset time. Once again, my efforts had proven to be in vain but at least I could gain some satisfaction knowing that I was able to finish off what Maud started.

I'll also admit that Snowhead is much more pleasant during the spring as opposed to winter. Despite knowing that this wasn't going to last forever, I had to decide what to do with the remaining time I had, but before I could think of anything, a familiar bopping on my head ensued.

" We're back in Termina." Twilight said.

" I know... right?"

" You and I are going to have to have a long conversation, Sunset."

" Yeah... I know."

" There's some things you've been keeping from me, and they have to do with that strange mark that appeared on the back of your hand. But we don't need to deal with it right now because we have other objectives to take care of." Twilight said. " First, you need to return the Stray Fairies to their fountain. After that, we should check up on the Gorons to see if things have improved for them now that the snow has melted. Besides, we need to speak with them regarding how to get some gold dust for Fancy Pants. You do want a better sword, right?"

" Yes... We must see the Gorons... I'm sure they'll be happy to see Maud."

Her Highness noticed my sudden exhaustion. " Are you okay?"

" I'm... fine. Why... do you ask?"

" You look like you're about to collapse from exhaustion."

" I guess... Maybe fighting Ganondorf made me use up all... my... strength--" I said. I suddenly dropped to my knees before falling flat on my stomach and fell asleep. I had also spent much of my strength rolling around in my efforts to defeat Goht in addition to Ganondorf, so my body had been drained and needed plenty of rest.

Unfortunately, I chose a pretty lousy time to want to take a nap. Her Highness attempted to wake me up but there was nothing she could do. My body had completely shut down and refused to budge even an inch. It looked like I would be vulnerable to any creatures that prowled about at night, yet someone had noticed me collapsing and decided to investigate to see if they could help. Twilight attempted to protect me from whoever had come over, but her efforts sadly amounted to nothing. Whoever it was had picked me up before turning around and was about to start heading back when they nodded at Her Highness.

She smiled slightly because she recognized who it was that had come to investigate, but she was still concerned because of previous experiences. However, she knew that this wasn't Equestria so my would-be-rescuer wasn't the same person who almost brought about the destruction of the land of my birth. Without saying another word, Her Highness followed along behind who had found me as they took me back to wherever it was they came from.

" Ah, shoot! I can't believe none of my tactics are workin' on whatever y'all are supposed to be." Applejack said. She was holding a broken pitchfork in her hand and surrounding her feet were the remnants of other farm tools she had been using in an attempt to drive away the demonic creatures who had been plaguing Romani Ranch. " You monsters might have gotten our cattle, but there ain't no way I'm gonna let you take my little sister away!"

" You do realize that you have no hope of surviving, right?" The tall figure asked.

" That don't mean anythin' ta me. So long as Romani remains safe inside the house, y'all can do whatever you want to me."

The tall figure took that as a challenge and rubbed her hands with glee. " Even in this world, you still have to possess that annoying attitude that bugged me to no end."

" What are y'all even talkin' about?" Applejack asked. " I don't even know what in the hay you and your companion are supposed be. All I know is that you two must have been responsible for what happened to our cattle and to my sister, and nothin' you say will convince me otherwise."

She tossed away the broken pitchfork and tried to grab something else to use as a weapon, but to her dismay, she discovered that there wasn't anything left inside the house that could be used to protect her sister. Upon realizing that the rest of the farm tools were still inside the barn, she cursed under her breath knowing she didn't bring them back, but then she didn't know that she would be fighting for her life against two demonic creatures. The tall figure, who had done most of the damage by breaking Applejack's equipment, had grown annoyed over having to deal with someone she saw as beneath her.

The small figure, on the other hand, was content to just writing stuff down on her notepad, yet occasionally told her companion that she needed to show a bit of restraint. The situation continued to worsen for Applejack as it apparent that she had nothing left to use aside from her own fists, but even she knew these creatures wouldn't be intimidated let alone affected by punches. Her only option was to run back inside, close the door, and bolt it up in hopes it would be enough to keep them from getting inside.

As the final lock on the door was put into place, the tall figure walked forward, hands on her hips before grabbing the door by the hinges, ripping it off, and tossing it aside where it smashed to pieces a fair distance away.

" You actually thought a door would stop me?"

" That was my last ditch effort."

" I'll give you credit for keeping me busy for the last twenty minutes, but I've grown tired of being side-showed by some country bumpkin! If my companion hadn't shown me the value of being patient, I'd have ripped you to shreds before doing the same thing to your little sister." The tall figure said.

" Do what ya want with me but please spare Romani."

" I'm going to enjoy this immensely, Applejack. Despite being within the corners of her mind until she transformed into me, I observed you and the others struggling because of how she manipulated all of you through deception. I just couldn't stand seeing your face because you always thought of yourself as being the best thing ever. It was your mannerisms, country accent, and overall personality that bugged me to no end." The tall figure said.

" Why are y'all takin' your aggression out on me?" Applejack asked, stepping backwards in hopes of being able to reach the staircase. " I don't know who this Applejack even is, but it sounds like you've got a mighty big problem just because she annoyed you without even realizin' it. Whatever your problem is with her, just leave me and my sister out of it!" She moved even closer towards the stairs, but the tall figure grabbed her and pulled her outside of the house on to the ground.

The tall figure loomed over Applejack. " I just needed to vent a little bit."

" What in the hay is your problem?" Applejack asked. " If y'all are that annoyed with this Applejack person, then you should talk to them 'bout 'stead of tryin' ta pick a fight with someone ya don't even know."

" She makes a valid point." The small figure said. " And have you forgotten what happened when everything changed?"

" What are you getting at?" The tall figure asked.

" Even though this woman is Applejack, she doesn't know that because of how that man changed their world into this one. As far as she knows, she is the proprietor of this fine establishment and doesn't want anymore problems." The small figure answered.

Applejack got back onto her feet and rubbed her back. " Like I said, if y'all have got a problem with this Applejack, then talk it out with them 'stead of relyin' on physical force just because ya stronger than most. I'm tellin' ya ta honest truth and ya should consider my words careful like." At that moment, she began to glow in an orange light that blinded the two demons, but then it quickly faded away as fast as it had appeared.

The tall figure rubbed her eyes due to the light blinding her. " What was that?"

" I think it was her Element." The small figure answered.

" How could she have gotten that? I thought you said she was a different person now?"

" It seems that's only partially true." The small figure answered. She quickly combed over some notes she had written down before addressing her companion again. " Their personalities have definitely been changed to reflect upon what has happened to their world, but the Equestrian magic they possess didn't make the transition."

" What does that mean?"

The small figure coughed. " It means their magic is struggling to breach the reality of this world."

" If that's true..." The tall figure began, " ... then she isn't the only one going through what we just witnessed."

" A definite possibility."

" What are y'all both talkin' about? I ain't got no idea why I suddenly glowed like I did, but it don't change the fact that you two have ruined the ranch that my father worked so hard to turn into a prosperous place." Applejack said. She walked into the house and this time the tall figure didn't pursue her. " If ya know what's good for ya, you'll leave this ranch and go somewhere else. I know my words might be viewed as threatenin' but I just want ta be left alone right now."

" We shall comply."

The tall figure gasped. " What!? You want us to leave?"

" We have what we came here for." The small figure answered. " Besides, Applejack here has suffered plenty already, and while it would be delightful to add insult to injury, we should further confirm our suspicions by seeking out another one of her friends."

Applejack shouted. " I ain't this Applejack!"

" You are, but you don't exactly know it because of ramifications beyond your control. I'd go into more details but it would just go over your head, and I'd be wasting my time which is something I dislike. Besides, none of this is going to matter anyway."

" Y'all are referrin' to the moon?" Applejack asked, looking up at the night sky.

" Something similar to that, but again it's beyond your realm of understanding. Anyway, we shall leave to wallow in the misery of what has transpired here over the course of these past two nights. If I were you, I'd embrace what little remains before it becomes a forgotten memory." The small figure answered.

Turning her attention to the tall figure, she nodded but once and her companion sighed before they both took to the sky. As the two demonic figures disappeared into the night sky, two trails of magic flowing about behind them in the cool breeze, Applejack walked up the stairs and entered the bedroom where Apple Bloom had been sleeping the entire time.

" Cremia? Are you alright?"

Applejack answered. " No Grog... I ain't..."

" What was with those two creatures?"

" I don't know and I reckon I don't wanna know."

" At least everyone's safe."

" Until the moon falls." Applejack said. " When that happens, everyone across the whole of Termina will die."

As she looked down upon her little sister sleeping peacefully despite what happened, tears started trickling down Applejack's face. She then dropped to her knees, buried her head into the bedsheets, and quietly wept until she fell asleep. Grog walked over to a nearby chair, sat down, and slowly drifted off to sleep himself.

I had no idea where I was right now given that I collapsed outside in the Mountain Village. My brain was trying to tell me to wake up before I could get into even more trouble, yet my heart felt content about resting up for as long as necessary. Within my dreams, I could see a visage of home. Not the home that has been part of my life for the last few years, but rather the home that I abandoned because of believing I was destined for more than what was meant to be passed down onto me. It was Equestria... the land I was born in.

Part of me still longed for the day when I could gallop about on four hooves, fling about magic like it was nothing, eat Equestrian foods instead of the kind humans gorge themselves over, and generally embrace my true self as a pony. There was still the lingering doubt that plagued my mind. In the very corner of my subconscious stood a familiar figure who looked sad, a figure I knew just as well as Princess Twilight herself did. I knew she wanted to see me again after so long, hence why she appeared as crying, but I still believed I wasn't ready to be in her presence.

After what I said and did when we had our falling out, I felt unworthy to even bask in her presence let alone be in the same world. Her Highness continued to reassure me that nothing bad would happen to me should I choose to go back through the portal., yet she had it easy compared to me. She didn't almost bring about the destruction of Equestria by stealing one of the most important artefacts the kingdom had ever known--not a day goes by that I still felt tremendous guilt for resorting to petty thievery. Princess Twilight again insists that I wouldn't be punished for what happened, but I believed otherwise.

I just knew somepony in Equestria wanted me banished to the desolate wastes. Sure, it was what I thought was true and might sound ridiculous to others, but I knew that my actions were wrong especially betraying my former teacher by reading up on forbidden magic in the Canterlot Library. Would I truly be forgiven by Equestria and not just by those who knew me on a personal level? It was an answer I didn't know.

My subconscious suddenly turned black, the image of Equestria faded away, and it was due to my heart finally getting the hint from my brain that I was to wake up. How much time had past since collapsing from exhaustion after two grueling encounters? That answer would be made clear in mere moments.

The instant my eyes opened, I was greeted by the face of someone familiar. " Ugo! Ugoh! Ugo!"

" WAAAAH!!!!" I screamed, jumping several feet into the air.

I landed hard on my butt, rubbed it a little, and looked over at Fancy Pants who was chuckling away at my misfortune. " I am sorry that you were scared by Gabora. He usually frightens people a lot worse than that, usually just by staring at them."

" Where am I?"

" Back at our place." Fancy Pants answered. " Gabora went outside briefly to fetch some wood for the hearth, noticed you were lying close by, picked you up, and brought you here where you've been sleeping in that corner for almost eight hours."

I rubbed my eyes to get better acquainted to the light. " Now I remember... I collapsed from exhaustion."

" I don't know what you did to get that tuckered out, but be glad that Gabora found you instead of one of those hungry beasts that roam the mountains at night. If one of them had found you, we'd be preparing a burial and your friend would've suffered a mental breakdown." Fancy Pants said.

I turned to see Her Highness floating in front of me, tears trickling down her cheeks. " Twilight... I... I'm so sorry for making you worry."

" It's okay, Sunset." Twilight said. " I'm just that you pulled through although for a moment I thought you'd never wake up."

" How long was I out for?"

" About eight hours."

" That means dawn will come in about four hours."

" Yes."

" Ugo! Ugoh!" Tirek said.

" I should thank you, shouldn't I, for helping me out." I said, smiling.

" Ugo-oh, ugo, ugo!"

" I still don't understand what you're saying, but I think you just thanked me for the compliment."

" Ugoh!"

Fancy Pants then interrupted when he pointed his finger at the window. " Have you seen the weather outside, kid? The snow suddenly melted away in a matter of seconds like something had breathed a burst of spring air all across the mountains. It looks absolutely wonderful I tell you."

" Does that mean the Gorons are safe?"

" Most likely." Fancy Pants answered. " I'm sure they'll have that Patriarch Race that I told you about before."

" I need to participate in that race."

" Unless you happen to be a Goron, you've got no chance of joining something that means a lot to them." Fancy Pants said. " In fact, the only thing they'd let you do is watch from the sidelines and maybe bet on someone to win."

What Fancy Pants didn't know was that I could become a Goron by putting on my mask, so me not being able to race was a non-factor. There was a problem with competing and that was the fact that I had no experience with such a race. If it involved rolling around at high speeds, I would easily be trounced by the competition in no time. I mean, I was pretty confident about my rolling and my battle against Goht did provide me with a rough idea as to how the Patriarch Race worked, yet Goht wasn't an assortment of Gorons.

There was one thing that I was certain of. Regardless of whether or not I participated in the race, winning the prize of gold dust meant nothing when it came to what I had intended on using it for. I needed it to re-forge my Razor Sword but the chances of that happening were growing dimmer with every passing moment. By the time I won the prize--assuming of course that I won--and came back with the gold dust for Fancy Pants and Tirek, the final day would be upon us. Since it took until the following day to re-forge my sword according to what they told me, there wouldn't be a morning to look forward to.

My only recourse was to inquire about it just to be certain. " About re-forging my sword again."

" As I mentioned to you before, if you can get some gold dust, I can make you the strongest sword imaginable."

" About that... I'm not sure I'll be able to get some to you before morning."

" Is there a problem?"

I looked down at the floor sheepishly before looking back up at him. " I really do want to have an even more powerful sword, but I'm most likely to get some gold dust in the morning, so perhaps you could make an exception and work on re-forging it a little faster than usual?"

" Thing is..." Fancy Pants answered. " ... tomorrow is the Carnival of Time and I was planning on closing up shop and heading over to Clock Town along with Gabora. He may be as smart as a Deku Stick, but even he knows how important going there is. If we miss the celebration, we'd have to wait until next year and I'm not doing that. If you want me to make your sword better, you need to bring me some gold dust before the sun comes up."

His words made no sense. If it took an entire day to work on making a single weapon stronger, why would he say that he could do it in less than one-sixth of the time? Was this one of those unusual quirks that this video game world possessed? If it was then it was a glaring oversight that could easily be exploited. A shame that I couldn't exploit for myself as then I could procure his services and get a stronger sword. Did it mean having to reset time and defeat Goht again!?

That was something I never considered before until now. I knew that the bosses would be revived upon time resetting as it would be as though I never defeated them, but would it mean having to go through the temple again? If so then perhaps it wasn't a good idea to seek out a better sword, yet the temptation was too much for me to not consider it. Either way, I would get another empty bottle if my assumption was correct. The prize for winning the Patriarch Race was a bottle of gold dust, so that mean getting a new one without having to use the one I currently had.

Fancy Pants turned to face me and continued talking. " I know it's inconvenient, kid, but I want to go to the carnival."

" I understand. Besides, I still intend on checking out the Patriarch Race."

" You might as well do something to take your mind off of things." Fancy Pants said. " I also heard that gold dust can be sold to some merchant who lives in Clock Town. He's a strange fellow who buys and sells exotic items. Not much else is known about him other than he only opens his shop late at night."

" Ugoh! Ugo-oh!" Tirek said.

" You're right for once." Fancy Pants said. " Gabora says you should be careful when dealing with that guy because of how shady he is. If he tries to rip you off in any way, you should leave his place immediately and not face any consequences."

" Ugo, ugoh!"

Since I had nothing else to do at the Mountain Smithy, I thanked them for saving me from any nocturnal creatures, and began to take my leave of their place. Before I walked out of the door, Fancy Pants mentioned something else about the Gorons that he failed to mention earlier--I wasn't surprised in the least. He said that they had something that they had been working on in secret, and that he believed it would make for an excellent business opportunity. When morning comes, he would get into contact with the Gorons in hopes of working something out before leaving for the carnival.

My heart felt saddened knowing that he was putting one business opportunity ahead of another, but once again time wasn't on my side. With only twenty-hours left to go before having to reset time, I had to just accept the fact I had to wait for another chance to upgrade my sword.

Upon walking back outside and taking in the beauty that surrounded me, I began to think about what to do next. The Patriarch Race wasn't a complete loss since I could earn myself a second bottle--and use it for fairies so that I don't run the risk of dying somewhere in a temple--but then Her Highness bopped me on the head to remind me that the Stray Fairies still needed to be taken back to their fountain.

I couldn't believe that I forgot they were still inside me. It was also an opportunity to perhaps find out more about this race the Gorons partake in every year. If anyone could tell me something about it, it was Adagio. Besides, she would provide some magical assistance courtesy of a new ability. In order to get back to Snowhead Temple, I needed to go up the path that leads up to the top again, or use the Song of Soaring in order to cut out a little time.

Taking out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch, I took a moment to recall how the song went--I really needed to start practicing these songs. Once I remembered how it song, I played and within my mind, I wanted the song to take me to the Owl Statue that was located near where the temple was. In an instant, giant wings appeared on either side of my body, wrapped themselves around me, and spun me around several times before I disappeared.

In an instant, I found myself staring up at Snowhead Temple, yet the sceney had changed to reflect what had transpired after Goht's defeat. The sky was much clearer than before and the moon could be seen slowly plummeting from on high. My focus suddenly shifted towards a familiar character who was sitting on top of a small icy platform jutting up from the abyss that was beneath me. Bulk Biceps--who somehow survived plunging down below after falling asleep--was looking around in a daze, and I suspected that whatever had controlled him no longer had any kind of power.

" I should probably change forms shouldn't I?" I asked as I put the ocarina away and took out the Goron Mask.

" Remember that you stumble about when changing into a Goron. You might want to plant your feet into the snow before doing anything else." Twilight answered. " You don't want to end up suffering the same fate that Maud experienced, right?"

Her Highness didn't really need to say anything like that. I was well aware that my transformations weren't what one would call glamourous, but at least I had been doing it countless times until it had become second nature.

Planting my feet into the snow to ensure that I wouldn't accidentally stumble into the abyss below, I put on the Goron Mask and immediately started to flail about. With my feet in the snow, my stumbling was restricted, and upon screaming out loud--I was surprised Bulk Biceps didn't hear me what with his size--I became Darmani again, lifted myself out of the snow, and walked forward where he immediately took notice of me.

" HUH? DARMANI? IS THAT YOU?" Bulk Biceps asked.

I turned to look at him making sure to be convincing. " Yes, it's me Biggoron." I answered. I also had to make sure to say the name he was known as in this world.

" THE ELDER TOLD ME THAT YOU WOULD BE COMING THIS WAY IN ORDER TO ASK FOR PERMISSION TO ENTER THE TEMPLE. I WAITED FOR YOU TO ARRIVE BUT THEN SOME STRANGER WEARING A MASK APPEARED, AND THE NEXT THING I KNEW, I WOKE UP AT THE BOTTOM OF THIS ABYSS." Bulk Biceps said.

" Do you know what kind of mask it was?"

" IT DIDN'T LOOK LIKE ANYTHING I HAD EVER SEEN BEFORE, BUT I FELT A STRANGE AURA COMING FROM THE PERSON WEARING IT. IF I DIDN'T KNOW ANY BETTER, I'D SAY THAT MASK WAS EVIL IN NATURE." Bulk Biceps answered.

If I had any doubts that Starlight Glimmer was behind what had transpired in these mountains, what Bulk Biceps just said washed away what doubt I had left. I didn't think that she could top what she did in Woodfall, but I had been proven wrong. Could she have done far worse in the remaining regions? My body shuddered at the mere thought of it.

This now lead me to a dilemma because of what Vice Principal Luna told me before my encounter with Ganondorf. She told me that I had to save Starlight, the one who had caused so much trouble all because she was having fun pulling pranks. I didn't know if I could save someone who showed no disregard for those she wronged. A part of me wanted to leave her alone and let fate or some other force deal with her. On the other hand, what she was going through reminded me of myself. I too had abused a great power because of the desire to make my dreams come true.

It also brought up another question: was Starlight in control? From personal experience, when you start to use a great power, you maintain control of it for only a short period of time, and then you become corrupted by it. When you become consumed, you lose all sense of self and become a mindless monster. From what I had observed so far, Starlight appeared to be in complete control of the mask on her face, but perhaps things weren't what they seemed? Was she being controlled by the mask itself? Forced to do its bidding? I had no solid proof of that so it was nothing but a theory that held no merit.

Bulk Biceps then interrupted my train of thought. " IT'S SO STRANGE, DARMANI. I DON'T REMEMBER WHAT I WAS DOING FROM WHEN THAT STRANGER CAME BY TO WHEN I WOKE UP DOWN BELOW. NONE OF THIS MAKES ANY SENSE."

" I think she placed you under a spell."

" A SPELL!?" Bulk Biceps exclaimed. " AND HERE I THOUGHT THIS WAS GOING TO BE AN EASY JOB."

" Well, it's over now." I said. " Whatever enchantment that person had over you is gone, so you can go back to guarding the temple."

" I ALSO NOTICED THAT SPRING HAS RETURNED TO THESE MOUNTAINS." Bulk Biceps said. How had he come to that conclusion? This area of the mountains was still caked in snow as though nothing had changed. " IT MAY BE SNOWING UP HERE BUT I FELT THE WARM BREEZE FROM BELOW AS I CLIMBED MY WAY BACK UP. I DON'T KNOW WHAT YOU DID, DARMANI, BUT YOU HAVE SAVED OUR PEOPLE FROM FREEZING TO DEATH. NO WONDER YOU'RE LOVED BY EVERYONE IN THE VILLAGE. YOU ROSE TO THE CHALLENGE AND PROVED HOW GREAT YOU ARE."

I blushed, making sure he didn't notice. " I did what I had to do. Anyway, the reason I came here is to return the Stray Fairies to their fountain."

Bulk Biceps' eyes almost popped out of his head when I said that. " WHAAAAT!? THE GREAT FAIRY OF SNOWHEAD WAS SHATTERED? I DIDN'T THINK ANYTHING COULD HAVE DONE SOMETHING LIKE THAT. MAYBE THAT IS WHY THE MOUNTAINS FELL INTO SO MUCH DESPAIR?"

" Don't forget the guardian."

" THE LEGENDARY GIANT? IT WAS MISSING TOO?" Bulk Biceps asked. I nodded my head slowly. " HOW COULD SUCH THINGS HAPPEN?"

" Like I said, it's over now."

" IS THIS A SIGN OF THINGS TO COME? OH, I DON'T THINK I LIKE THIS. DARMANI, YOU SHOULD TAKE THOSE LITTLE ONES BACK TO WHERE THEY BELONG SO THAT THE GREAT FAIRY CAN WATCH OVER US ONCE AGAIN." Bulk Biceps then leaned forward to get a closer look at me. " SAY... YOU LOOK DIFFERENT, DARMANI." My heart began to pound quickly and my breathing came to a stop. Had he figured out that I wasn't really Maud? How could someone like him see through the magic whereas everyone else I've encountered couldn't? " HAVE YOU LOST SOME WEIGHT SINCE I LAST SAW YOU?"

My reaction almost made me fall over. " Err... I needed to get in shape a little for my eventual trek up here."

" GUESS YOU MUST HAVE EATEN TOO MUCH ROCK SIRLOIN LAST MONTH, SO NOW YOU HAD TO GO AND WORK IT OFF. YOU KNOW, SINCE SPRING HAS RETURNED TO THESE MOUNTAINS, WHY NOT TAKE PART IN THE PATRIARCH RACE?" Bulk Biceps asked.

" I was planning on doing that."

Bulk Biceps laughed. " EVERYONE HAS BEEN WAITING SO LONG WHAT WITH THE WINTER, BUT THEY SHOULD REALIZE YOU'RE GOING TO WIN EASILY. YOU ARE THE FASTEST ROLLER IN THE VILLAGE AFTER ALL. I HEARD THE ELDER IS HOPING THAT YOU WIN THE RACE."

" Any reason why?"

" YOU SHOULD ASK HIM. HE'S PROBABLY BACK IN THE VILLAGE LOOKING AFTER EVERYONE LIKE HE ALWAYS DOES. I SHOULD LET YOU GET ON, DARMANI. YOU HAVE A LOT TO TAKE CARE OF IN THE TIME THAT REMAINS." Bulk Biceps answered. He looked up at the moon and I didn't need for him to explain himself.

There was roughly a day to go before the moon would destroy Termina, so I needed to hustle and get things done before resetting time again. Thanking Bulk Biceps for the conversation, I walked forward choosing wisely to walk across the narrow path rather than roll across. Even though it was much more peaceful than before, the temple itself was still a foreboding place that reminded me of what I experienced in my bid to rescue the second giant.

I also realized that I was now halfway through with this journey. There were four giants and I had saved two of them. Once the other two were rescued, I could call them from their respective domains and they would do whatever it was they are supposed to do to prevent Termina from being destroyed.

But, when this world is saved, how was I supposed to change it back to the way it was before? That was a question I had absolutely no idea of what to do. I mean, the last time I was in this kind of situation, it was Ganondorf--not Tirek but the real one--who restored the world I called home back to normal when he saw it fit. I hoped that I wouldn't have to have him fix everything. It wouldn't be an easy task this time around if it were true.

Her Highness then bopped me on the head, and I knew what she was going to ask me. " Sunset... I think it's time you told me about that mark on your hand."

" Yeah... No point in trying to hide it."

" How did you even get it?"

" It happened on my last journey." I answered. " After going through so many trials, I learned that I was chosen by destiny to possess the Triforce of Courage. The courage I displayed as I awakened those who could aid me to defeat Ganondorf was what lead the golden power to dwell within my body. I didn't think much of it other than to play it out since it was a video game and all, but I learned that it wasn't just that." Upon reaching the other side, I looked down at my hand before clenching it into a fist. " When the mark appeared on the back of my hand upon things changing back to normal, I was beside myself in shock."

" Did you tell our friends?"

I shook my head. " I tried to tell them but they didn't listen. How could they believe something they don't remember?"

" So you kept it to yourself?"

I nodded. " I know I've changed a lot since those days, Twilight, but this was something that was beyond even my own understanding. But, I believed this was something I was burdened to do on my own."

" Sunset..."

I looked at Her Highness and gulped. I had to tell her that she possibly had the Triforce of Wisdom inside of her. Ganondorf's words may have been cryptic in design, but I knew that he was talking about what happened to her in my previous journey. Her Highness was like me, a pony, and I unintentionally dragged her into a conflict that even I had troubled understanding the nuances behind it. Had she realized at some point that she possessed a piece of the golden power? Perhaps, but if not then when would it be revealed?

Just as I was about to tell her, I decided against it. Was I being a coward? No. Far from it actually. Ganondorf said that my other was also bound to the same fate as I was. Could he have been referring to Twilight Sparkle, the human counterpart of Her Highness instead? Now things were really getting confusing. For now, it was best not letting her know that she could potentially possess a Triforce piece. I needed to be absolutely certain which of the two Twilights had it.

Entering the Fairy Fountain--there were no monsters around unlike before--I walked forward until the pink shimmer that came from the pool could be seen. The Stray Fairies then began to leave my body to reunite with their fellow fairies, and Adagio Dazzle appeared in front of us once again. Like how the previous Great Fairy had a green tint to her, this one had a pink tint in that her hair was pink and she wore a beautiful pink gown. I still had trouble believing that Adagio, a Siren, who along with her sisters tried to hypnotize all of Canterlot High into being their slaves just so they could be adored for eternity.

Adagio then spoke. " Welcome Tatl, and you, kind young one. I am the Great Fairy of Power. Thank you for returning my broken and shattered body to normal. You have been through a great deal to restore this land back to the way it was."

" So you knew about Darmani?" I asked. " She gave me her mission to complete."

" Whether you had taken up her request or decided to go about on your own, fate had decided that you were meant to destroy the evil creature that was responsible for the snow that almost blanketed this land forever. I knew that you would take up her gauntlet." Adagio answered.

" Do you know about the one who caused this winter?"

" I do." Adagio answered. " The forest imp who wears a cursed mask."

" Do you believe she will continue to maintain control of her power?"

Adagio shook her head. " She believes that she can use the power of the mask to bring about destruction, but she does not realize that there is a darker force in play. I sensed it when she came to my fountain in her bid to shatter my body to pieces. I am not sure what this force is, but you must not allow her to succeed in her wicked ways." Adagio looked up at the ceiling for a few moments before looking back at me again. " Young one, you must save not only this world from destruction, but the one who causes it."

" That's what the guardian told me."

" Yes." Adagio said. " The guardian's words are most wise indeed." She then smiled at me which made me nervous. " Young one, I noticed that you have collected more masks than what you had when you visited my fellow Great Fairy. You have done well in collecting them yet there are many more that await you. You may not fully understand the significance between them, but they will prove essential if you are to seek out the power that can rival what the forest imp possesses."

I was surprised by her words. Throughout this cycle of time, I had completely forgotten about why I was collecting masks. Did this version of Adagio know more than her previous self knew? I had to find out for certain. " What can you tell me about what I'm supposed to be getting?"

" The mask that you seek was created to serve as a counterpart to the one the imp wears. However, its power was far too dangerous for mere mortals to possess, and so it was hidden away in shadows to prevent its misuse. It is said that whoever wears that mask will become a being whose very essence ebbs and flows with evil. The resulting form is a reflection of the darkness inside of the wearer's heart." Adagio answered.

It's an evil mask!? That just made the situation not necessarily worse but rather confusing. Why would another evil mask be needed to combat Majora's Mask? Wouldn't it make more sense to use something more attuned to good instead? Was it really a good idea for me to seek out something that could potentially turn me back into the person I used to be before friendship entered my life? No... I can't go back there again after working so hard to earn everyone's trust. There had to be another way to stop Starlight but what?

(1) This was a mistake that a reader, rattler20200, brought up. It originally said Nayru but has been changed to the correct goddess, Farore.

Chapter 30: The Explosive Might

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 17, 2016
Chapter 30: The Explosive Might.

" You seem to be disturbed, young one." Adagio said.

" Can you blame me?" I asked. She had just revealed to me that the mask that I could acquire by collecting the other ones that existed throughout Termina was as evil as the one that was being worn by Starlight Glimmer.

The thought of wearing anything that was evil brought back painful memories of what happened when I decided to seek out more power. I thought that wearing Her Highness' crown would give me the power I craved--and it did--yet what I didn't know was that it would transform me into a monster. I became a demon, a creature consumed by power, one who wanted to conquer Equestria. The thought of wanting to take over the land of my birth was never my intention, yet instead of rejecting the power and tossing the crown away, I... I relished in that power and became a lost soul.

I suppose I became exactly what Ganondorf and to an extent, Twilight Sparkle, had become, monsters who became corrupted by the power they acquired. I had selfish desires to become a princess, an alicorn, yet those desires were pushed out of my mind and replaced with the desire to conquer Equestria. I wanted to subjugate my fellow ponies and make them bow to my very whim. If it wasn't for Her Highness and my friends defeating me, I would still be that horrible monster. I would remained on a path that would lead me to my own destruction, and ultimately lead me to my own death.

Whenever I think back on becoming that she-demon, I get sick to my stomach and wish that I could kill myself for being so stupid. I knew what I was doing was wrong. I knew that I should've returned to Equestria and seek out Princess Celestia's guidance. Instead, I believed my way was the only one that mattered.

Since that day, I had atoned for my crimes by being condemned by my peers and forced to endure the very torment I inflicted on them. But, instead of wallowing away in self pity, I decided to do the right thing. Her Highness had given me another chance, a chance to become someone who could become appreciated, liked, and eventually loved by those who I had once hurt. I took that chance and became so much better for it. Now I have friends, family, a mentor, and so much more than that. Perhaps the most important thing was that I had my own identity, one no one could ever take away from me. I was Sunset Shimmer, a force for good.

How could I possibly wear a mask that was as evil as Majora's Mask? The answer was that I couldn't. I may have changed my ways, but the taint of evil that Ganondorf mentioned still remains deep within my heart. I didn't want to believe his words, and yet I knew they were true despite my reluctance. Unlike others who are vulnerable to dark forces, I wasn't as affected--I'd eventually feel it but not straight away--thanks to my taint, a painful reminder of who I was once.

If I put on that mask and become a monster like before, I'd be betraying everything I had worked so hard for since that day. No, there had to be another way to defeat Starlight without having to rely on a similar power. I made that mistake once, and Twilight Sparkle repeated my mistake much to my displeasure, so the idea of making it again was completely out of the question.

Adagio then noticed my conflicting thoughts and proceeded to speak. " I sense that you do not wish to use the dark power of the mask you seek. Is it because you are afraid that you will succumb to something that once affected you long ago?" How did she know what I was thinking? Could she sense what was happening inside of my heart? If so then she was more powerful that I originally assumed--and this was Adagio Dazzle no less. " The power locked within that dark mask is strong and most who wore it in ages long past became monsters who lost all sense of self."

I buried my head into my hands. " Then there's no chance I will use that mask if I get my hands on it. The thought of becoming a monster again is too much for me to bear."

" There was one exception." Adagio said. " Legend says that someone was able to control the power of the mask. They were able to channel its magic and used it to protect their people from the darkness that threatened their very existence. Unfortunately, it is merely a legend. No one knows whether it happened or not."

I sighed. " That's not very reassuring."

" What I do know is that sometimes, to overcome great evil, you must be like them." Adagio said. Was she saying that I needed to become evil in order to defeat Starlight? I knew she was trying to reassure me, but I had my doubts considering what she said might not necessarily be accurate. " Do not worry about the dark mask, young one. You still have time to make a decision. No one shall force you into using something that worries you. But, you must think of not just yourself but of others."

Hearing her say that felt strange. Was it because I still couldn't get used to the fact that Adagio was a Great Fairy--more like all of them--in this world? In the world that I now called home, she only cared about feeding the negative energy that existed within people along with her sisters. They didn't care about what their actions would do to others so long as they could regain their magic. Yet, Adagio did make a valid point.

It wasn't just my life that hung in the balance. No, it was the lives of everyone I held close to my heart. My friends, my family, my homes--both of them--and the light itself were in danger of being lost in addition to myself.

I had to restore the human world back to the way it was before, and it sounded like my only option was to use evil itself. To do that would mean accepting Ganondorf's wishes of embracing power and giving up on my friends and family. I would be abandoning my very identity.

Adagio then continued. " And now, I shall aid you in your quest, young one. I will give you a new ability that can make things easier for you during battle. You will not be able to use this ability in your current form, but perhaps it will be more useful as your true self?" She cupped her hands together before blowing a pink coloured wind in my direction. I immediately began to swirl about in this wind, and I felt relaxed as her magic began to take effect. I had been so stressed over having to wear an evil mask, yet those tensions drifted away once I started feeling a hidden strength emerge from my body.

" What kind of ability is this?"

" You have mastered the Spin Attack." Adagio answered. " The first Great Fairy you saved enabled you to use magic, yes?"

" And that has been helpful."

" But, you were also given the ability to charge energy into your sword and unleash it in a powerful arc."

I rubbed my chin in hopes of remembering something like that, but I shrugged my shoulders informing her that I didn't understand her words. " I'm sorry but I don't think I ever used anything like that mainly because I never thought to use it." I felt embarrassed knowing that I had shunned something Adagio had given me. " I've used the magic that the Great Fairy of Clock Town gave me otherwise we wouldn't be having this conversation, yet I never used her gift through my sword."

Adagio smiled before chuckling to herself. " It tells me that you still have a bit to learn about using a sword. You need not be upset, small one. You have come to this realization now instead of much later where not knowing it would result in death. By charging up energy even further, the resulting spin will be even more powerful than it was before. It can be used to strike monsters from a distance, and may prove useful towards activating certain things beyond your reach."

" Does this power use magic?"

" Yes." Adagio answered. " Fortunately, a Spin Attack consumes very little in magic so you will hardly notice it."

That was a sigh of relief at the very least despite still feeling guilty over not using the weaker version. When it came to the consumption of magic, I was using up more than I originally hoped. Even with an extension of my magic meter, I feared what could happen were my magic to suddenly run out and I had no means of replenishing it. The thought of not having any magic made me feel cold to the bone.

It was something I never considered given that I always had magic even when it looked like I didn't. When I first started living in the world that I now called home, I couldn't use any magic much to my displeasure. It felt like a big portion of myself was lost to me, and I cursed Princess Celestia for forcing me to leave Equestria because of our falling out over me becoming a princess--I know now that I was at fault and not her. Sure, I eventually got used to not having it, but I could easily get it back by simply going through the portal, yet that meant having to return with my tail between my legs.

When Her Highness and my friends defeated me at the Fall Formal, my magic was permanently taken away from me. At least, that's what I originally believed. I had abused the very gift that had been granted to me on the day of my birth, so I don't regret not being able to use magic. When I learned that I could use it again and more freely than ever before, it was a blessing because part of me had been restored, yet it was a curse as the human world started getting exposed to Equestrian Magic. Sure, there have been great benefits but also great disasters thanks to my actions.

Had I remained in Equestria as a pony, I could've eventually gotten what I wanted, yet I was too stubborn to acknowledge my weaknesses. Everything that had happened since that terrible day wouldn't have happened, and many lives wouldn't have changed because of me.

Adagio noticed I was going through another personal moment, and floated down closer to me in hopes of giving me comfort. " I know that you have inner turmoil, young one, but you must not allow it to consume your thoughts. Succumbing to the fear of the past will only make you more vulnerable to the darkness." Easy for her to say. She didn't know that she herself had committed acts that would eventually weigh down on her given that she and her fellow Sirens lost everything. Then again, would the real Adagio even care? From what I got from her attitude, she had no guilt over anything in the past and was focused on the future.

Should I ask that question of her? I thought it over a few moments before going through with it. " Do you... Have any regrets of the past?"

" I feel that I have failed the Gorons of these mountains." Adagio answered. " Had I not allowed my body to be shattered by the masked imp, I could have prevented the death of their great heroine, and perhaps protected them from the cold winter that almost destroyed them."

Oh... I-I'm sorry. I didn't mean to make you remember anything like that."

Adagio smiled. " It is something I must live with for the remainder of time, yet I will not allow it to weaken me."

" Maybe I should learn from your example."

" You will come to your own understanding in due course." Adagio said. " By the way, you seem to be yearning towards ponies."

My eyes opened wide and my jaw dropped. How did she know that I was thinking about my past as a pony? I had to address what she said without mentioning the fact that I was a pony from another world. I mean, she wasn't obviously going to believe it, but I didn't want to bring up something that could cause her memories of our world to come back. Despite how much she was being so kind to me, I still saw Adagio as the monstrous Siren that she really was. " Um... Yes, I was thinking about a particular pony. She was my faithful steed until that masked imp took her away."

" You seek out this companion?"

I nodded my head. " She means an awful lot to me." I had actually forgotten about Epona! I couldn't believe myself! How could I have forgotten about the one being who I could whinny to without making myself look awkward in front of other people. If I hadn't started thinking about my past as a pony, Epona would be nothing but a memory. " I found her at the ranch but the problem is that I'm not sure how to get reacquainted. The one who currently takes care of her isn't exactly in the best mental state."

I was referring to what I witnessed when I visited that place... Romani Ranch, I believe it was called. Apple Bloom had been taking care of Epona, yet something happened to her and now she couldn't muster a coherent sentence without suffering from a migraine. Not only that but Applejack wasn't of much either. In fact, she was beside herself with grief over what had befallen her little sister. Something must have occurred at the ranch during the first or second night to have caused what I eventually witnessed. The problem was that there was no way of gaining access to the ranch until the final day because of a boulder that was blocking the entrance.

Starlight Glimmer was responsible for putting that boulder there--I knew as Sweetie Belle's worker mentioned a masked imp--yet why would she go to so much trouble? The ranch was the one area of Termina had lacked a temple so all she did was prove how much of a jerk she really was.

" A strange occurrence happened at the ranch two nights ago." Adagio said. " Yet only the little one knew the truth."

" Apple Bloom..."

" If you are to be reunited with your companion, perhaps you will need to use something more powerful than normal to remove any obstacles that stand before you. Unless you could find a way into the ranch sooner than expected, there is nothing that can be done." Adagio said. She floated back towards her pool indicating she was about to return to the depths below as she had completed her task. " Why not pay the Gorons a visit? I am sure the Elder would love to talk to Darmani. Also, you might want to indulge in some curiosity."

I scratched my head. " Curiosity? What do you mean?"

Adagio smiled. " There is a cave in the village that is the home of a Goron who has created something unique. Perhaps that might give you some answers that are currently eluding your grasp. When battle has made you weary, young one, please come back to visit me again. I shall restore your life energy." Adagio then laughed before disappearing back into her pool leaving me confused with what to do next.

" Why does she keep on doing that?"

" Adagio doesn't mean to be cryptic with her words." Twilight answered.

" Then why even do it in the first place?" I asked. " I understand the need to not make it easy, but sometimes there's a fine line that shouldn't be crossed.

Her Highness then bopped me on the head. " Why don't we figure out what Adagio meant before you lose your temper." She floated back and forth in front of me for several seconds before suddenly coming to a stop. " That boulder we heard that had been blocking the entrance to the ranch must be pretty big, right?"

" Well, duh!" I said sarcastically.

" I'm going to ignore that." Twilight said. " If the boulder took that man two days to break it down, perhaps we can destroy it ourselves in less time. Since you can use bombs now to blow up anything, maybe an explosive will work? Or... maybe not as a boulder that big would need more than a regular bomb. Maybe we need something more powerful, something that has so much destructive power, only the right person can use it?"

" Adagio did mention a Goron living in the village." I answered. " Maybe we can find out more by going there?"

" Time isn't on our side, Sunset. We still need to get our hands on that bottle of gold dust."

" Do we even need that stuff now, Twilight?" I asked. " We both know that Fancy Pants and Tirek aren't willing to re-forge my sword on the day of the carnival. Besides, there won't be a tomorrow since the moon will destroy this world before sunrise."

" Not the gold dust but the bottle. You could do with some healing items for the future."

Truer words were never spoken until that point. Considering how I got beaten up badly during my fight against Goht, and actually losing my life against Ganondorf for several minutes, the idea of having fairies or potions to restore lost health had now become essential. I didn't know why I was hesitating towards picking that sort of stuff seeing as in my previous journey, I couldn't go several meters without needing something to recover from injuries.

Was I trying to prove to Her Highness that I could handle myself? After all, she was concerned about my safety. But... What if I was trying to prove to myself? Had I gotten so stubborn that the obvious was escaping my vision? Was the thought of bravado blinding me? If so then I was being incredibly stupid about it.

I should have known better than that. No wonder Her Highness sometimes questioned my judgement. I was getting so caught up in the experience--despite my reluctance towards having to do all of this again--because I had more insight than she did, I was in fact making things even worse for myself, and I was worrying her to no end. I... I didn't want to make her worry anymore. If my suspicions regarding what Ganondorf said about my other were true, Her Highness would soon experience her own sense of concern. If she thought that my life was in danger, she would soon know better.

" Twilight... I want to talk to Cranky Doodle Donkey first." I announced. It felt weird calling him by his full name. " Even though she has moved on in this world, Maud's spirit wants me to go back and inform everyone that her mission has finally been completed."

Her Highness nodded her head in approval. " I understand, Sunset. We should deal with that first before we do anything else. Besides, Cranky might know where we can get our hands on a powerful explosive."

" We should warp back to the Mountain Village."

" Agreed. I doubt you'd want to go back the way you came."

With my business at the fairy fountain finished, I turned and began to walk back outside, but a thought suddenly crossed my mind. So far, I had only encountered three of my friends whose lives had been changed when the human world was transformed into Termina: Pinkie Pie, Applejack, and Fluttershy. Rainbow Dash, Rarity, and Twilight Sparkle--the human version and not Princess Twilight--had yet to be accounted for. I knew they were somewhere in this world, but where could be they be? A more important question was that would I have to fight against any of them?

Such a thought was dreadful even by my standards, yet it was something I had to take into consideration. In my previous journey, Rainbow was associated with an evil group in the form of the women who were from the same tribe as Ganondorf. I mean, she wasn't evil like they were and possessed a noble heart, yet the fact remained that she was initially an enemy who could've caused me or someone else trouble. Would that happen to her again? What about Rarity and Twilight Sparkle? Could either of them have become enemies here who I would have to defeat to progress?

I hoped that I was wrong in my assumptions.

Sometime in the past...

" Okay... How many of the eggs do we have?"

" All seven of them have been secured, ma'am."

" Good! I'm just so glad that nothing has gone wrong."

" Why did you have to go and jinx it?"

" Are you disrespecting our second-in-command?"

" What!? No! It's just that I wish she wouldn't say stuff like that! So far, the others have managed to keep the Zora distracted while we steal these eggs. Personally, I don't understand why we even need them in the first place. Aveil can easily have find other treasure that hasn't been found out there on the beach."

" Now you're disrespecting our leader?"

" Am I not allowed to be concerned?"

" Not at the expense of questioning our leader's motives! If it were up to me, I'd make sure you were thrown into the dungeon back at the fortress."

" That's enough! Both of you!"

" But... but... Derpy I..."

" What did I just say to you?" Derpy asked. " Look, I know how tense you all are since we'll get swarmed by every Zora in here were they to discover what we're doing. They may not be fighters like we are, but they do outnumber us and that spells trouble." She picked up a bag that contained what appeared to be eggs, yet there was something unusual about them although she didn't pay any notice towards that. " Aveil wants us to bring these back to the fortress and we must carry out that task."

" Why do we need to do that?"

" Um... I don't know." Derpy answered. " What did Aveil say the reason was again?"

" Are you kidding me!?"

Derpy then suddenly drew out a curved blade and had it mere inches away from the throat of the companion who spoke out. " I'd better watch your tongue if I were you. I'm of a superior rank to you, and that means you never question me on anything." She pulled her sword away and put it back into the scabbard on her side. " Oh! I remember why we need to get these eggs and bring them back to Aveil. We're just following what they masked person said when she paid us a visit last week."

" Can we trust that stranger, ma'am?"

" I'm not sure if we can."

" Do you think she is leading us into a trap?"

" I'm not going to question the authenticity of the masked stranger. That is up to Aveil alone to decide." Derpy answered. " If everything goes according to plan, we should be able to exchange these eggs in return for whatever hidden treasures the Zoras are hiding."

" What if Aveil has another idea instead?"

Derpy quickly answered. " We follow her lead, I think. She knows what to do anyway as she is the leader after all." She then motioned with her fingers to inform her companions that they needed to leave before any Zoras were to discover them sneaking about. " Everyone back through our secret tunnel, and make sure none of you leave behind your weapons! The last time someone did that, we had to cancel our surprise attack."

" Um... Weren't you the one who did that, ma'am?"

" I was?"

" Yes, you were. Aveil scolded you something fierce that day."

" I just don't what went wrong." Derpy said. " I know that I took my sword with me when I had to put it down for a brief moment to look over our battle plans." She scratched her head erratically in hopes of trying to recall what happened, but ultimately shrugged her shoulders and gazed down into the tunnel with her trademark expression. " I don't remember doing anything wrong but maybe I did. Oh well." Her words caused the outspoken companion to slap her forehead, but this was generally ignored by Derpy. " Everyone into the tunnel! Once we're back outside, rendezvous with the others and I will create a diversion."

" Can you handle it?"

Derpy nodded. " Of course I can. Why do you ask?"

" No reason."

" I'm going to ignore what you said." Derpy said, brandishing her sword again. " But, if you want to remain on Aveil's good side, you won't question my ability to handle being in charge of this little expedition." Her companion gulped before slinking away behind the other three women. " Aveil made me second-in-command because of how good I am in these kinds of situations. At least, I think that was why she gave me the position. Maybe it was because no else asked or was it because everyone else was afraid of her?" She shook her head before slapping her face. " Time to get serious! Into the tunnel! Let's go! We've got to get these eggs back to the fortress without fail!"

" The Gerudo Pirates strike again!"

" Not so loud." Derpy scolded. " And you think I'm an idiot..."

After warping back to the Mountain Village using the Song of Soaring, my first thought was to take in the wondrous beauty that surrounded me. I knew that I didn't have much time until I had to reset everything, but my heart wanted me to relax for once and take everything in stride. While there was still some remnants of winter scattered about in the form of patches of snow, much of it had melted revealing luscious grass, bushes, and even flowers.

Dawn of the Final Day - 24 Hours Remain.

The sound of a cucco indicated that the final day had begun. That meant I had to hustle my butt if I was going to get everything I needed to do done before having to reset time and undo all of my accomplishments in the mountains.

I went back to what I was thinking about. If Fluttershy were here right now instead of being trapped in a temple, she would absolutely love seeing what I was seeing with my eyes.

Even though what I just said about her sounded disappointing, in truth I wasn't as upset about it as I should be. After all, I had already freed her from Odolwa's clutches and it was written down in my notebook, so in my heart, I believed she wasn't really trapped. The Bomber's Notebook was something I forgot about given that I was preoccupied with other things to take notice of it, yet it still proved to be invaluable despite ignoring it. As I began to walk towards the twin islands--I had considered rolling my way back to Goron Village but I chose to go at a slow pace so as to take in the scenery--I took out the notebook and looked at all those I had helped so far.

Seeing their pictures brought back wonderful memories of me helping them out, although there were many whom I didn't know would end up in the book. This was a lesson that I needed to look at this thing more often than I did. There were some people that I had yet to help resolve their problem, and my heart felt bad knowing that I hadn't lived up to their expectations, yet Her Highness told me not everyone could be helped straight away. That would involve having the proper item sometimes and maybe fulfilling specific requirements that would trigger other events that lead up to the problem in question.

My eyes were mainly fixated on both Applejack and Apple Bloom. Since I apparently needed to gain access to the ranch sooner than the final day, I began to think about how I could help solve their problems. It was obvious that something happened at the ranch, but because I arrived too late, I wasn't able to help them. I recalled Applejack mentioning something about ghosts attacking the barn and stealing cattle. In my mind, that sounded farfetched yet Termina had proven itself an unusual world.

Apple Bloom was the real problem as whatever happened to her affected Applejack. Perhaps if I could help her--Apple Bloom--first, then maybe I could help her--Applejack--with the problem she had.

Princess Twilight finally took notice of the fact that I was looking through my notebook and decided to break the silence. " Look at how many people you've helped, Sunset."

" Yeah." I said. " I suddenly remembered I still had this thing so I thought to take a look through it."

" There are a lot of blanks next to people and I assume you haven't helped them yet."

I nodded. " I might be able to now that I have the right items."

" You seem to be fixated on Applejack and Apple Bloom right now." Twilight said. " You really want to help them don't you?"

Again, I nodded my head. " If it wasn't for Adagio mentioning Epona, I wouldn't be thinking about them."

" I still can't believe you actually rode a horse considering--"

" When you've lived as a human for as long as I have, you sorta get used to the whole thing and it doesn't freak you out. No one ever questioned me about how I would do certain things even when they found out that I was a pony at one time." I said.

Her Highness' face suddenly beamed and I knew what it meant. " What was it like riding a horse? I must know!" I knew she was going to ask me that question. I could read her like a book because she had specific facial cues that clued me in.

" It took a while to get used to it but it felt so natural. I forged a strong connection with Epona as though we were kindred spirits."

" She sounds like a good friend."

" Definitely!" I exclaimed. " She's also an excellent conversationalist. Whenever I felt the need to, I would talk to her by whinnying."

" You actually neighed?"

I blushed a little in response. " I just felt like talking to her that way, you know, what with me being a pony and all."

" Fascinating, yet I'll need to see you do this with my own eyes, but that can come a little later." Twilight said. " We should try to figure out what might have happened at the ranch that resulted in Applejack being a broken mess and Apple Bloom having lost all her senses."

" Other than what she told us, there isn't much to go on." I said. This was unfortunately true and Her Highness sighed knowing that I was right. We knew that ghosts showed up and stole the cattle earlier in the seventy-two hour cycle, yet we had no idea what happened exactly.

Applejack hadn't been forthcoming when it came to providing an explanation, and I attributed that to what she said about how she wished she could have believed Apple Bloom instead of ignoring what her little sister had known. If she had known then we could have already figured out some way of preventing whatever happened. Instead, guessing was our only option, and that meant we were drawing straws.

Putting the Bomber's Notebook away, I continued walking forward, entering the Twin Islands Area, and still thinking about the ranch's problem. Why did these ghosts choose to attack the ranch now of all times of the year? Was Starlight somehow involved in their presence? Why weren't the farmhands better equipped to deal with something that threatened their way of life? Could the ghosts have been repelled until a better solution came? These were only a few questions with many more waiting in the wings. Could I have made a difference had I been there to protect everyone?

And what of Epona? How was she tied into all of this? When I visited the ranch during a previous cycle of time, she was locked behind a fence and that meant she was stuck reliving the same experience of what happened over and over in an endless loop. Was saving her key to saving the ranch? That's what happened in my previous journey but it didn't necessarily mean it would be the same thing again. None of this actually mattered unless I could gain access sooner rather than later. Until I could get into the ranch and prevent the ghosts from doing whatever they did, I was powerless to help my friend.

The first thing I noticed with the Twin Islands Area was how the ice had melted and revealed a beautiful lake, yet there were strange fish swimming about below the surface. Upon a closer inspection, these fish had no flesh on their bodies.

I had no idea what they were but Princess Twilight did. " Those fish are called Skullfish, Sunset. They dart about in the water and zoom in on prey that happen to get too close to their territory. Any weak attack will destroy them but you'll need to find a way to fight underwater."

" There's a treasure chest down there." I said, pointing to a sunken chest to my right. " If only I had Iron Boots and a Zora Tunic."

" What would that accomplish?"

" I could walk underwater without worrying about drowning."

" Sounds like a useful ability to have, but I don't know if that will happen this time around."

Her Highness suggested that I ignore the chest as I didn't have the means to plunder it, but she did make a mental note of it in case I ever do find a way of being able to move about underwater like before. Floating ahead of me was Pinkie Pie, ever observant while drawing her maps, and my first thought was to see if she knew anything about the Patriarch Race since she had proven to be resourceful in the past. A bop on the head from Twilight and she told me that Pinkie most likely wouldn't have an answer. The only ones who would know were the Gorons since the race was apparently sacred to them.

Personally, I wanted to talk to her again, but I knew that time wasn't exactly on my side. The darkness of night began to fade away and the sun was slowly starting to rise up from the east indicating that the final day would soon begin. Deciding to go with Her Highness' suggestion, I walked under Pinkie--rolling wasn't a good idea since Gorons would drown if they fell into any deep water--and across the remaining bridges until I was in the village again.

It had definitely changed since my last visit and I attributed that to the snow having melted. The dirt on the ground coupled with the rocky outcroppings definitely reminded me of Goron City, yet this place was outside compared to the indoor confines of that place. I could tell that everyone here was relieved that their nightmare was over, but deep down I knew that they wouldn't remember any of this once time is reset back to the beginning. No matter how much I kept telling myself it was necessary to give me more time, I still felt guilty over having to undo my hard work in the name of a force beyond most.

I sighed heavily. " It's going to be difficult to accept this going back to that winter nightmare."

" Yes." Twilight said. " I understand that feeling, Sunset."

" I thought I could handle it seeing as Fluttershy would still be safe despite her current predicament." I said. I took a few steps forward and held out my hands before folding them close to my chest. " But now that we're witnessing Goron Village as it was meant to be, I just can't cope with the idea that we'll be condemning them again."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Nothing is ever easy no matter how much we try to deny it. All you can do is continue on and allow the pain to gradually subside."

" Isn't there anything we can do?"

" Well... I did have one theory I've been pondering over for a while."

My eyes lit up. " What is it?"

" When you defeated Odolwa and eventually reset time in order to come here to the mountains, I suspect that he was also revived back to the way he was before we ever set foot into Woodfall Temple. It makes sense since starting over means certain events get undone. He's probably waiting for you to come along and challenge him right now." Twilight said.

" Okay, then could I fight him again?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I'm assuming you can but that would mean going through the temple again, unless there is a way to skip all of that."

" It sounds like it's something we should investigate at some point."

" Yes." Twilight nodded. " For now, we should focus on tying up loose ends here before we reset time again."

In my previous journey, whenever I defeated a "boss", they would stay defeated and acted as an accomplishment for myself. I had conquered a powerful enemy and moved one step closer towards changing things back to the way they were before. Yet now I was conflicted because of this whole resetting time and going through the same three days over and over again in a near endless loop. If the bosses kept on coming back due to never being defeated thanks to the time paradox I create, had I truly accomplished anything? I earned their remains that I carry on my person, but was it really enough?

They were never truly conquered for good. No, they were conquered for a short period of time. I didn't care about the glory behind defeating them but the fact that I did the right thing and saved innocent spirits who had been trapped against their will. Were Principal Celestia and Vice Principal Luna trapped inside of Odolwa and Goht respectively every time I went back to the beginning of the seventy-two hours? It was something I hadn't considered before until now. Did I have to free them again or were they already free? Also, how was it possible that I could bring certain items back through time with me while other items had to be left behind?

No doubt this whole time paradox was confusing, and I knew Her Highness felt the same way. She had experienced time magic first hand when she told me what Starlight attempted to do in order to prevent the pony versions of my friends from becoming exactly that. To think that Equestria went through seven different alterations of time, each one more terrifying than the last until Starlight finally realized that Her Highness along with her court were an essential key to the protection of Equestria. What we were doing was small compared to what she experienced. A part of me wished I could've been there to give her some moral support.

Before I could continue with my current thoughts, a familiar voice broke my concentration. " Darmani! Darmani! Over here!"

" Is that Diamond Tiara?" I asked as I came out of my daze.

" She seems to be very excited about something." Twilight answered. Sure enough, Diamond Tiara was a few meters away, hopping up and down on the spot, her armour clanking about and echoing across the clearing.

" You finally made it back!" Diamond Tiara shouted.

I walked up to her. " You seem to be in a chipper mood."

Diamond Tiara nodded in a rapid fashion. " How could I not be when you have done the greatest thing ever barring none! When the cold wind suddenly stopped blowing from the direction of the temple, I thought it meant that the worst was yet to come. But then all that snow started to melt and was gone within a matter of moments. The two Gorons who went to prepare your burial returned about twenty minutes later followed by that one Goron who loves wearing her frog hat."

" So things are back to normal around here?"

" The Elder returned just a short time ago and is waiting to talk to you about something."

" I was actually planning on going to see him."

" You shouldn't keep the Elder waiting." Diamond Tiara said. " Let me open up the entrance to the shrine for you, Darmani. You should find the Elder in the meeting place along with everyone else in the village. It looks like you could be moving up in the world."

" Huh? What do you mean?"

Diamond Tiara made a snickering gesture that made me worried. What was she hiding from me? " I'd tell you about it but I think you should hear it from the Elder. By the way, his son left to watch the Patriarch Race. It should be starting real soon provided that boulder is destroyed first."

" Boulder?"

" Some half-wit placed a boulder in front of the entrance to the Goron Racetrack, and now no one can gain access to it. Everyone has been looking forward to this race all year and now it might be cancelled because someone had to be stupid and block our path." Diamond Tiara answered.

" Why not just blow it up?"

" We tried blowing up that boulder with bombs from the Bomb Shop, but nothing seems to be working." Diamond Tiara answered. " We can't even lift the blasted thing up because leftover snow and ice are holding it in place." She began stomping her foot on the ground impatiently before pounding her fist into the ground leaving a small indentation. " I know you want to compete in the race, Darmani, as you usually win them every year."

An idea suddenly popped into my head. Diamond Tiara knew the village better than I did, so perhaps she knew something about where I could get my hands on a more powerful bomb as Adagio indicated. I thought about asking Cranky Doodle but perhaps she would be a better choice. " Why not use stronger bombs?"

Diamond Tiara looked at me with a puzzled expression. " Huh? Stronger bombs? Are you feeling alright, Darmani? You don't have rocks stuck inside of your ears from rolling around again, do you?"

" I'm just saying that maybe a powerful explosion will work."

" Now that you mention it, I do recall Medigoron saying that he finally finished making that new Powder Keg of his." Diamond Tiara said. She looked down at a cave entrance located on the far side of the village. " He said that it could do more than a regular bomb could. I've never actually seen him test any of them so you'll excuse me if I'm skeptical about it. If we can use one of his Powder Kegs, it might allow us access to the Goron Racetrack."

" Powder Keg?"

" You don't know about it?" Diamond Tiara asked. I shook my head. Was I supposed to have known about it? If so then I had just blown my disguise and that meant having to take some drastic actions. My first instinct was to run away but Diamond Tiara shrugged her shoulders. " I'm not surprised that you don't know of Powder Kegs, Darmani. Most of us have no idea what they're supposed to be about. Medigoron likes to keep his secrets but that usually backfires on him. A Powder Key, according to him, is a special type of bomb that can only be used by Gorons what with how heavy they are."

" They sound useful." I said. " Do they work on any boulders?"

" Why wouldn't they?"

" I was curious."

" If what Medigoron says is true, those Powder Kegs are going to change Goron society forever." Diamond Tiara said. She then noticed that I was starting to inch a little closer towards the direction the cave was in, and she clamped her hand down on my shoulder. " Don't bother going over and getting a Powder Keg, Darmani. Medigoron won't just let anyone use them unless they pass some kind of certification test."

Hearing her say that made me feel slightly disappointed, but I now knew what I needed to gain access to the ranch earlier than usual. The thought of having to take a test to use a powerful bomb wasn't a problem since I enjoyed taking tests of all kinds at Canterlot High, but what would this Medigoron expect from me so that I could prove myself responsible? I supposed the only way I would find out was to go and ask him.

Before I go and do that, I had to speak with Cranky Doodle first. Even though my original plan was to ask him about the Powder Keg, I wanted to see him because Maud's spirit from beyond the grave had insisted on it. She needed to truly rest in peace in this world and that meant reassuring her people that their lives were safe once again.

Looking at Diamond Tiara, who seemed confused by my sudden silent treatment, I decided that I needed to continue. " Thanks for telling me about what Medigoron has been up to lately in his cave. I plan on visiting him once I've paid a visit to the Elder."

" You actually want to use a Powder Keg, Darmani?"

I nodded my head. " It's something I really need."

" Well... I won't question why you want to get one, but I wish you luck in passing that certification test. Anyway, you probably want to see the Elder now don't you? I think I've kept you busy a little too long, so let me pound the ground and open up the shrine." Diamond Tiara said.

She curled up into a ball, leapt into the air, and came crashing down onto the ground forcing the entrance of the shrine to open. Once it clicked open, she unfurled herself and gave me a salute before assuming her duties as a guard. I didn't have much time so I dropped down below and walked inside just as the door closed.

The first thing I noticed was that there were no Gorons parading about by the series of statues at the lowest point of the shrine. As I recalled, they were shivering like leaves and struggling to not lose their sanity from having to listen to a baby crying for hours on end. If Diamond Tiara hadn't told me that they had all gathered at their usual location further ahead, I'd have suspected something was amiss. That's when I noticed it was much warmer than it was before. It made what was a drab place feel more welcoming, and I did need some place to warm up given it was still cold outside.

" I think every Goron must be waiting for you up there." Twilight said.

" They really must hold Maud in high esteem."

Her Highness agreed. " She was their greatest hero and they looked up to her as their shining beacon. I doubt that Maud ever allowed their praise to cloud her judgement but she probably played along because it made her people feel proud knowing she would save them."

" I guess you're right." I said. " Should we see what Cranky Doodle has to say?"

" You might as well even if we already know what to do now."

Gulping for a moment, I then walked slowly up the path towards the meeting place, and was immediately beset with almost a dozen pairs of eyes coming from the Gorons. None of them said anything which made me nervous, but my attention was focused on Cranky Doodle himself. He stood in the middle of the Goron gathering, his hump swaying back and forth--it still creeped me out seeing that--yet I could tell he was smiling. As I walked closer to him, the others began chattering to themselves, and I couldn't catch what they were saying, yet they were silenced when Cranky lifted his arms.

No wonder he was the Goron Elder. If one of the others had gone and done that, they would've been ignored, yet Cranky showed why he was in charge. Despite having left his son behind to cry, Cranky had proven himself a capable leader of his people. Sure, I didn't understand everything that went into being the patriarch of the tribe, but what I did know was that he made some sacrifices to ensure their future.

" Darmani... I've been waiting for you." Cranky Doodle said.

" I was told that you wished to see me?" I asked. " The guard outside said everyone was waiting."

Cranky Doodle slowly nodded his head. " I have been waiting for your arrival ever since I heard the news. When some of our brothers returned from the mountains, they told me that spring was slowly coming back. I did not believe them at first, but when I witnessed the snow melting with my own eyes, I knew their words were true. I knew that you, the one whom I once thought to be dead ,had sealed off the blizzard that was blowing in from Snowhead."

" Yes... The creature that was responsible has been destroyed."

" To think that all of this happened because of a masked human who wandered up the mountain trail."

" I have a personal matter with her." I said. " I've heard that she has been causing trouble all across Termina."

My words instantly shocked everyone in attendance, yet Cranky was able to quickly calm them down by waving his hands. " So we weren't the only ones affected by this stranger masked human. While I cannot say for certain how the other regions of this land fare, I feel in my heart that they are suffering immensely." He then paced about back and forth, his hump once again making me feel very uncomfortable, but then he stopped and looked straight at me with a piercing gaze. " Darmani... I do not know why you feel you must pursue the one who almost caused our demise, nor do I know why you have such a burden, but I will not stop you from doing what you believe to be right."

" Thank you."

" No... It is we who should be thanking you, Darmani. Thanks to you, spring has come to Goron Village. Everyone is pleased!" Cranky Doodle said. " It will take some time before we can resume our usual endeavours, but things will be better from now on."

That left me feeling reassured for the time being. Despite knowing that all of this was going to amount to nothing because of resetting time, I felt happy knowing that Maud's mission had finally been completed. Would it have made more sense had she been here before everyone instead of me? Of course as she was their true hero. Me? I was just acting as a substitute by taking on her form and acting out her life.

I wonder if Cranky Doodle or anyone else ever figured out that I wasn't Maud. I mean, I don't look like her given that my Goron body features my hairstyle, my hat, a piece of a green coloured skirt that represented my tunic, and the metallic bra that covered what were the Goron equivalent of breasts. How had none of them ever questioned the fact that I didn't really look like their heroine?

As I pondered over something that ultimately didn't make any sense--a trend from my previous journey that was rearing its ugly head again--I was suddenly interrupted when one of the Gorons decided to shout at the top of his lungs. " The greatest Goron hero of all? That's..."

" Darmani!" Everyone else shouted.

" The immortal Goron who is not dead, even if he has died?" Another Goron asked. " That's..."

" Darmani!" Everyone shouted again.

A third Goron then spoke up. " The star whom we wish upon? That's... Darmani, greatest of Gorons!"

" Greatest of Gorons!" It quickly became obvious that they were singing my praises or rather they were singing Maud's praises. To be honest, I didn't feel right getting all of this praise considering all I did was finish what she started. I mean, I did defeat Goht and saved everyone from freezing to death, yet their words were misplaced in my opinion.

I thought of saying something in response to their cheering, but Her Highness bopped me on the head as though to tell me to go through with it. The first Goron who began to sing my praises then added spoke up again. " Darmani is the greatest in the world!!!

" Greatest in the world!" Everyone else said.

" I think that is enough celebrating towards Darmani." Cranky Doodle said. " While I know she deserves it for saving our lives, remember that she is just like the rest of us. She is someone who doesn't do what she does for the admiration or for the glory of being a legend among us. No, Darmani does what she does because it's the right thing to do. She fights for what she believes is right."

The other Gorons began nodding while they talked amongst themselves. At least Cranky understood that praise meant nothing and that it was the character of an individual that was important than anything else. Still, if they had gone on praising me any longer than they already had, I would've said something despite Twilight suggesting otherwise through her usual manner of bopping me.

Cranky then lowered his head and for a moment I thought something was wrong. " My son got better immediately once the winter weather disappeared. I know that I should have been by his side, but I had to complete the mission you started, Darmani. Had I known you were still alive, I would have remained by his side."

" I'm sure he understands what you had to do." I said.

" If you're curious as to where he is, he went to see the Goron Races that celebrate spring." Cranky Doodle said. " Since the weather has finally changed for the better, we can finally begin the Patriarch Race. I know that you will compete, Darmani, since you are one of the fastest racers who have ever graced that track."

" But, a boulder blocks the entrance."

" What!?" Cranky Doodle exclaimed. " Are you certain?"

I nodded my head. " You don't need to worry about it, Elder. I already have something planned that will remove that boulder, and everyone will be able to compete. I just need to talk to Medigoron and he should set me up with what I need."

" Then this makes my decision all the more easier."

" What decision?"

" Darmani... the real reason that I asked you to meet me is because I have an announcement to make." Cranky Doodle said. " I have been thinking about this for some time, and what you just displayed right now proves my choice is not mis-guided." He paused to take a deep breath before continuing. " I, the protector of this tribe for so many years, choose to yield the seat of tribal patriarch to a younger one." Gasps could then be heard all around me from the other Gorons. They clearly weren't expecting Cranky to make this kind of announcement, and yet he had without any hesitation in his voice."

" Are you sure about this, Elder?" A Goron asked. " You have lead us for as long as any of us can remember."

" And that is why I feel the time has come for me to name my successor." Cranky Doodle answered. " There is only one among you who I feel deserves to take my place, one I am sure everyone would agree upon. The Goron who makes calm decisions, yet boasts courageous determination and can take care of all shall be the patriarch!" He then turned his attention towards me, a twinkling appeared in his eyes. Oh no... He wasn't thinking what I think he was thinking, was he? " The chosen one, Darmani... is you! There could be no other!"

My entire body went numb. Did Cranky just say that I was to become the next leader of the Gorons!? I don't think he understood the ramifications of what he just said. I knew that he wanted this because Maud was the ideal individual to succeed him, but how was she supposed to do that when she was no longer alive? I certainly couldn't lead them despite having had some experience back home. I lead my friends when it came to understanding magic, yet this was on an entirely different level.

I looked around and saw the other Gorons were nodding their heads and pounding the air with their fists. How could I tell them that I can't lead them since I wasn't the real Maud, or rather in this case, the real Darmani? I was only assuming her identity and nothing more.

As I continued looking at how happy they were, I realized that I couldn't tell them the truth. It would break their hearts if they were to know that Maud had died and that I was nothing but an imposter. Maud herself would suffer immensely in the beyond, and above all else, I didn't have the courage to tell them. I had only one course of action. I had to accept this offer from Cranky and leave it at that. Yet, that meant going against a number of moral codes not to mention flat-out lying. Who would've guessed that I would be caught in a situation that revolved around a succession.

In the midst of the Gorons celebrating, Cranky raised his arms and they quickly grew quiet. " What do you think, Darmani? If it's you, everyone would happily accept you as the patriarch given all that you have done."

" Um... About that..." I began.

" Is something wrong?"

" You... could say that." I answered. I was definitely feeling nervous at that point and I hoped no one suspected anything was amiss.

Cranky then smiled and patted me on the shoulder. " You need not answer so quickly. Go, enter the Goron Race once you have taken care of that little problem. I am sure that will take your mind off of being named my successor. Think it over slowly. I am awaiting a thoughtful response." He then started to walk towards his private chamber before turning around slightly and looking at me. " By the way, you will be very happy with the prize that is being offered this year, Darmani. It is something I chose personally. You will need to speak to my son provided you are victorious which is a foregone conclusion. He should be anxiously awaiting your arrival."

As he walked away, the Gorons dispersed from the area although each of them made sure to "congratulate me" for being given the title of patriarch. I tried my hardest not to give off the impression that I didn't accept Cranky's offer of succeeding him, but it wasn't easy since I knew there was no way I could become their leader.

Once Her Highness and I were alone, she floated next to my ear and began to whisper. " That wasn't exactly what I thought he would say."

" How can I be their patriarch when I'm only a Goron while wearing this mask on my face?"

" I saw that you were struggling to tell them the truth."

I sighed and folded my arms close to my chest again. " How could I crush their spirits like that, Twilight? I didn't want to tell them that Darmani was dead and that I'm just assuming her life because her ghost told me. If they found out I was deceiving them, pretending to be their great hero, they'd have labelled me a monster for desecrating her name. I-I can't go through that experience again."

" You may have to tell them once Termina has been saved."

" That's going to be painful." I said, burying my head into my hands. " If only I could explain things without having them lash out at me."

Her Highness then had an idea pop into her head. " There is one option you can try. You can tell them that you only came back to life in order to finish what you started, and now that peace has been returned to these mountains, you have to return to your grave because there is no longer any need to be alive."

I looked at her with a skeptical look. " You're kidding, right?"

" Do you see any other way?"

" No... I guess not." I answered, sighing. " With my Deku Scrub form, it was easy to just walk away since none of the Deku recognized me aside from Mrs. Cheerilee. With this form, the Gorons all know who Darmani is and that makes it so much more awkward."

" For now, Sunset, we should just focus on trying to save Termina from destruction." Twilight said. " We can worry about telling them the truth about Darmani later. Why don't we pay a visit to this Medigoron who has that Powder Keg. I'm sure you can use his test as a distraction so that you don't get bogged down with guilt."

While it sounded like Her Highness' words were harsh in their delivery, in truth she was doing her best to assess the situation. She was right in that I had to focus on rescuing the remaining giants and fixing whatever damage Starlight had caused. I had to get the idea of confessing to the Gorons about Darmani out of my head otherwise it would continue to linger about and I'd lose my concentration. To bottle up so much guilt because of not knowing how to deal with it. Was that how Her Highness felt sometimes? She felt guilty over something and it only caused her to suffer later on in the future? Perhaps she and I still had much in common despite growing distant what with obligations.

I walked back down the path until I reached the entrance of the shrine, knocked on the slab of rock, and heard the sound of Diamond Tiara pounding down from above to open up the way so that I could go back outside. From there, I turned right and made my way over to that large cave entrance she mentioned earlier. The entrance was slightly raised up from the ground--it made no sense at all--making it seem impossible for a Goron to climb up and go inside. I thought about it for a few moment and realized I needed to become a human just for a brief moment before assuming my Goron form again. Whoever made this didn't think very hard regarding the locals.

Pulling on my face, I took my mask off, flipped my head back along with my hair, and climbed up onto the ledge of the cave entrance. I felt stupid for having to change back just to climb up a simple ledge when it would have been easier had there been a ramp or something for a Goron to use. Mumbling something under my breath--I didn't want Twilight to hear my cursing in case she was sensitive, I put the Goron Mask back on, tumbled down several ramps inside of the cave during the transformation, and became Darmani just as I reached the lowest part of the cave.

Standing, or rather laying in front of me, was Medigoron. He didn't resemble anyone from Canterlot High or Equestria so already I knew this wasn't going to be one of those awkward moments where I trip up.

" Oh? Someone has paid me a visit?" Medigoron asked. " Has spring finally come back?"

I nodded my head. " Winter has finally moved on and everyone is feeling much better about it."

" No doubt you were the one who saved us, Darmani." Medigoron said. " Sorry that I didn't recognize you straight away. My cave really needs several candles so that I can see things more clearly, but I'll worry about that later. Have you come down here in order to use my new invention?"

" I have."

" Only one other Goron came by to use my Powder Kegs before the weather changed."

" Really? I thought you'd have had dozens of potential customers by now."

Medigoron sighed. " The one Goron who came was also the only one who completed my certification test. The others attempted to pass it only to wind up failing miserably and refusing to take it again. Maybe I was being too hasty with my invention. You see, Powder Kegs contain much more gunpowder than regular bombs do, so if someone who wasn't qualified tried using one, they could cause a disaster and I would be the one to get in trouble because of it."

" Which is why you have a test."

" Exactly, Darmani." Medigoron said. " Powder Kegs are also very volatile in that they will explode if enough force is applied. They eventually explode once the fuse reaches the barrel but anyone crafty enough could make them go off sooner." He looked down and noticed that I was standing there with my hands behind my back. At first he thought I was ignoring him and that made him annoyed, but he quickly realized that I was actually listening to every word. " You want to use a Powder Keg, Darmani?" I nodded my head. " Then you must first pass my certification test."

" I understand."

" I'm sorry to have to put you through this but you're not allowed to use one on your own unless I know you can handle it." Medigoron said. He slammed his hands into the ground, causing a slight tremor that almost knocked me over, and a barrel with a crude looking skull painted on one side landed right next to me. " Unlike other Powder Kegs, this one has a long fuse giving you enough time to complete your test. You must take it and blow up the boulder that is blocking the entrance to the Goron Racetrack. If you succeed in your task, come back to me and I shall certify you."

" What if it explodes along the way?"

" If that happens, come back and I shall give you another one."

I took a closer look at the Powder Keg and noticed that the fuse had already been lit. Was he trying to give me more pressure than I needed!? Not only did I have to make sure it didn't explode until I reached my destination, but now I had a short period of time before it would go off on its own. No wonder only one other Goron was able to acquire certification enabling them to use one of these. Most probably couldn't handle the stress from needing to secure the Powder Keg and deliver it on time. Perhaps Medigoron needed a more subtle approach that could draw in more to want to use these for themselves.

Picking up the Powder Keg--it was fairly light although I attribute that to my physical strength--I turned to face my first obstacle. I had to roll back up to the entrance as the slopes were too steep for me to walk up naturally. It also meant tossing the barrel onto the sections of the slope that were flat. Really? Was that even necessary?

Sighing, I tossed the Powder Keg onto the flat ground, curled up into a ball, rolled forward, unfurled myself, and picked it up again. Already I knew this was going to be tedious and I was right since this process had to be repeated at least three more times. " Why couldn't he have dropped this thing at the cave entrance? It would have saved me the trouble of doing this ridiculous motion." I moaned.

" No use complaining about it now, Sunset." Twilight said. " You need to get this to that boulder otherwise you've got to come back and get another one."

" And Medigoron wonders why no one else bothered to try this."

" I know you don't like this approach, but you need to pass his test in order to use Powder Kegs on your own."

I mumbled under my breath again. Her Highness was correct as usual. I had to do this if I wanted to enter the ranch on an earlier day. " Let's just get this over with so that I don't have to do it again."

After tossing the Powder Keg up the slope until both it and I had reached the top, I picked it up and began to make my way over to the entrance. The smell of smoke coming from the fuse made me nauseous but I couldn't stop otherwise I'd be coming back to get another one and wasting what little time remained. That's when I discovered an unfortunate side-effect of carrying around a large object in my hands. A Blue Tektite popped out of the ground--guess the Gorons must have missed it--and began bouncing towards me. I tried to defend myself by using the spikes on my back, but I couldn't so long as I was holding something.

It began ramming into my body and all I could do was grit my teeth and keep going until it lost interest. The Blue Tektite continued to follow, ramming into me from behind every few meters, and already I could feel the strength leaving my body. I really wanted to stop moving and destroy it, but I couldn't as I was in a race against the clock. There was a frightening moment where I almost dropped my cargo, but I managed to hold on through the use of my fingernails.

Eventually, the Blue Tektite got bored and decided to bounce back the other way towards its nest leaving me to shake off the bruises I received from its attacks. When I entered the Twin Islands Area, I noticed something new that wasn't there before. A wolf-like creature was running around the hole that lead down towards the underground spring, and it was right in my path which meant it was another obstacle to overcome.

I groaned. " You have got to be kidding me!"

" That's a Wolfos!" Twilight announced. " This must be the regular version that only appears when spring has returned to the mountains. Aside from the slight height difference and their appearance, it's essentially the same as a White Wolfos. You'll need to attack it from behind but you can't so long as you continue to hold that Powder Keg. You'll have to find some way of getting past without it causing you to drop that Powder Keg."

Again, I groaned. " And here I thought it would be easy."

" You just have to power on through."

I glared at Her Highness. " Not the best thing to say given the situation."

" Sorry." Twilight said. " I didn't mean using your physical strength, but maybe you can use your body to absorb a couple of blows until it gives up? I know you just did that against that Blue Tektite a few moments ago and this isn't something I would normally suggest, but that fuse is ticking away and we need to hustle."

Sighing, I walked forward and the Wolfos immediately ran towards me as soon as I was in its range. It swung its claws around, striking my back repeatedly, and while I winced in pain, I had to keep on going. Pinkie Pie suddenly started giggling and my initial reaction involved scolding her for laughing at my misery. I then found out that she was giggling over the fact that she would make more rupees with a revised map of Snowhead. While I thought it was cute that Pinkie was thinking about her future profits, it didn't help out my situation one bit as the Wolfos continue striking me.

But when I crossed the bridge, it suddenly stopped and moved back towards the center of the island. Did it not like the water? If so then this was a boon as it meant I could reach that boulder without any futher problems, and that's when a second Wolfos appeared by popping up from out of the ground.

" Oh come on!"

" Just keep going." Twilight said. " You're almost there."

Since I had no other choice, I continued forward and the claws of the second Wolfos began to dig into my back. While the damage being inflicted on me was minimal, I was still getting injured and that meant needing something to recover my health. Why didn't I pick up a fairy or something before doing this?

" Darmi! Darmi!"

" That was Featherweight." Twilight said. " He must be nearby."

" Cranky did say that he came out here to watch the Goron Races, so he's probably standing by the boulder." I said. I quickly began to look around in order to find out where his voice was coming from, and sure enough, I found him standing on a high mountain plateau that was to my right.

Featherweight then called out again. " Darmi! I was wondering when you were going to show up! Why are you carrying that thing above your head?"

" I'll tell you about it when I get there." I said as I struggled to stave off the Wolfos.

" You'll have to roll up the slope if you want to get to me."

My jaw suddenly dropped. " Did you just say a slope!?"

" Of course, Darmi! You know that better than me since you've been racing on the track long before I was born." Featherweight said. " I'll move away from the edge so that I don't accidentally plunge into the water below. I'll be waiting here so please do hurry. I need you to solve a small problem."

He was kidding, wasn't he? Blowing up that boulder with the Powder Keg wasn't what I would call a "small problem" and now I had to throw this thing up another slope in order to reach my destination. Could things get any worse? Yes, they could. Once I started to cross the other bridge--the Wolfos turned back just like the other one had, I looked at the fuse and saw it had almost reached the Powder Keg. I'd say that I had about a minute before it would explode. I don't think I'm going to make it in time.

Chapter 31: Reunion of Ponies

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 24, 2016
Chapter 31: Reunion of Ponies.

If I wasn't a fan of slopes before, I definitely wasn't now. Who's smart idea was it to have the entrance to the Goron Racetrack located on a ledge that could only be reached by rolling up a slope? Were they trying their best to torment me? As I finished crossing the bridge and looking at what I needed to roll up, I was reminded of the explosive weight that I held above my head, slowly ticking away. The Powder Keg had so far managed to survive this long without exploding, but the fuse had grown shorter since I first got it.

If I were to make an educated guess, I'd say I had about a minute before it would go off. If that happened before I reached that boulder, it would mean going back to Medigoron for another one.

I knew it wasn't going to be easy to pass this certification test, but I wasn't expecting the boulder to be where it was. A part of me was thinking that this was just a waste of time, and that other things could be done before I would need to reset time, yet another part knew that this was necessary. Without the ability to use a Powder Keg freely, I'd never be able to reunite with Epona nor would I be able to help out both Applejack and Apple Bloom.

Epona... In hindsight, I used to think that riding around on a horse was weird. I mean, I knew people did it all the time for various reasons, yet I didn't have the same level of comfort as they did. I was a pony after all so the thought of a pony riding another pony would attract unwanted attention. I'm human now and have been for a few years, but deep down I still yearned for those glory days in Equestria, days before my life went wrong because of how stubborn I was. I'd love nothing more than to gallop about on four hooves, feel the wind blowing through my mane, and getting to eat oats, hay, and other such delicacies from the land of my birth.

Maybe, just maybe, that riding around on Epona allowed me to relive my past as a pony. She could gallop about freely without restraint, jump over wide gaps, and plow through anything that got in her way. Sure she couldn't use magic like I could, but the fact was she reminded me of what I had lost. A young innocence tainted by poor upbringing, being swayed by thoughts of power, wanting to prove my worth.

A new thought then crossed my mind. I wondered what went through Epona's mind as she was snatched away from me by Starlight Glimmer. For one thing, I'm betting she was surprised to see me again before we were separated by someone who may not even understand her own actions anymore. To be thrown into a strange world and locked up inside of a pen in a place you don't even understand. She must be scared because no one she knows is around to provide the ideal comfort she needs. That's why I need to get her back, to ensure that she never has to feel lonely again.

Was I being sympathetic to a horse? Yes, but she was more than just that. She was a companion who I could rely on to get me through difficult situations--even if she was now a foal as opposed to a steed like before.

" Sunset?" Twilight asked, noticing that I was daydreaming again. " What are you thinking about now?"

" About Epona." I answered. " You know, my horse."

" It still feels weird that you've actually ridden one considering you're... you know."

I sighed heavily. " It took me a while to get used to that. I mean, I still do find it strange but I also see it as a means of getting to experience my own life as a pony even if it is through another horse."

Her Highness had trouble responding at first. " I... I never knew you felt that way. Oh, if only you returned home to Equestria much sooner." I could tell that she was about to tell me something she regretted, but I wasn't about to scold her. " If I had done more to make everypony realize that you had changed, you'd have reconciled with Princess Celestia by now and not feel bad about going back and forth between the two worlds."

I lowered my hand to silence her before lifting it back up to support the Powder Keg I was holding. " Twilight... You don't need to feel guilty over that. I was the one who chose to remain amongst humans, because their world had become my home. Do I regret my decision? Sometimes, but what I've experienced have been the best years of my life. You know better than anyone how much I want to go back to Equestria, yet circumstances have gotten in the way."

No, I wasn't making an excuse. I knew both Princess Twilight and Princess Celestia would welcome me back with open hooves, but the rest of Equestria was a different story. I didn't know how other ponies felt about what happened when I stole Her Highness' crown--assuming they even knew but I wasn't going to take any chances. Had they forgotten about me? Did they even know I existed? My family... the one I was born into. Did they ever wonder what became of me?

That last question felt the most depressing. After all, I hadn't seen my family since I first became Princess Celestia's student. I... I was never really close to them. I tried my best to make them proud of my accomplishments, yet they ignored me at every turn. Was it their fault since they had my siblings to watch over in addition to myself? No, yet that was what I did without giving them a chance. If I could, I'd love to see them again even if I no longer remember much about that. Sure, I still had some grudges against them and no longer associated them as my family, but I had to acknowledge their existence.

It's what Princess Celestia would want me to do.

" Um... Darmi?" Featherweight called out from up ahead. " Why are you still down there? I'm waiting for you!"

Crap! I completely forgot that he was still up there! I looked at the Powder Keg and saw that the fuse was almost at the barrel. " Can we talk about this later, Twilight? I need to get this thing up there before it blows otherwise I've got to go back and get another one." I began to panic by walking back and forth before calming down when Her Highness showed me her deep breathing exercise she uses whenever she was stressed. " Wow... I've got to admit that your deep breathing does the trick." I said.

Princess Twilight smiled. " Princess Cadance showed it to me when I was a foal. I'd have never gotten through some difficult situations without calming down and not losing my nerves due to stress. Anyway, you've got to get that Powder Keg up there and that means tossing and rolling."

" You don't have to tell me twice." I said. I tossed the Powder Keg where it landed on the ledge situated between the first and second of four slopes. Knowing that time was even shorter than before, I curled up into a ball and rolled up before unfurling myself and quickly picking it up again.

I then tossed it up to the next ledge and repeated the process--I hoped I would never have to do anything this ridiculous again--until I had finally made it to the top. My first thought was to drop onto my knees with relief but I knew that I still needed to destroy the boulder. The boulder didn't really stand out although a crack in the center indicated that it must have gotten brittle from the cold and cracked when the warm weather returned.

My first instinct was to just toss the Powder Keg and watch it explode, but then I realized that Medigoron most likely made it extra sturdy to prevent it from blowing up prematurely under usual conditions; usual being thrown into a wall or dropping it on the ground just to name a few example. I decided to simply place it in front of the boulder and just let it explode once the fuse had run its course.

When I put it down, I rubbed my forehead clean of sweat. " That was without a doubt the most difficult thing I've ever done."

" At least you got the Powder Keg here." Twilight said. " Can you imagine what Medigoron would say if you told him that you needed another one?"

" Don't even joke like that!"

Her Highness stuck out her tongue at me before winking. " I was only having a little bit of fun, Sunset."

" That isn't very princess-like."

" Well, I'm not like other princesses." Twilight said. " Anyway, we should probably step away from the boulder. We don't want to get caught in the inevitable explosion that will happen when the Powder Keg explodes."

I walked back a few paces only to bump into someone who was standing behind me. I turned around and looked down to see Featherweight looking up at me, a huge grin on his face, and his arms behind his back. " Featherweight? Sorry! I didn't mean to bump into you." In my mind, I wanted to slap my forehead for making such an obvious blunder. He doesn't know that he was called that name in this world.

" Featherweight? You've never called me that before, Darmi." Featherweight said.

I blushed thinking that I had somehow insulted him. " I-I just assumed that was your name." I quickly started laughing, my hand behind my head as though I were trying to stop myself from making things worse.

" Are you okay, Darmi?" Featherweight asked. " You don't seem like yourself today."

" I've been through a lot."

" To be fair, I actually like the name Featherweight. I mean, I don't actually have a name but--"

My eyes opened wide in shock. " Wait! You don't have a name?"

Featherweight shook his head several times. " Nope! I'm only referred to as the Goron Elder's Son. I suppose one day I'll get my own name, Darmi, but for now I'm content with not having one." I had a feeling that whoever made this game slipped up here by not providing a name to poor Featherweight. Then again, the same was probably true with most of the other characters who inhabit this world. " I'm glad you came here, Darmi." Featherweight continued. " Now that it's nice and warm out, I'm much, much better."

" I'm glad to hear that."

" Even if my daddy isn't right beside me, I won't be selfish and cry." Featherweight said. " I know that everyone was probably upset over how I kept on crying, but I was filled with despair that I didn't even realize how they felt. At least I wasn't too loud for them."

I rolled my eyes. " I'm not sure they felt the same way."

" Did you say something?"

" No, nothing."

" Anyway." Featherweight continued. " Now that spring has come, the Goron Races should be starting soon. But... But this rock is in the way, so I can't get in to see the race. I don't know how it got there but I'm not strong enough to get rid of it. And spring's just started, too... I was so excited...but there's nothing I can do..." He started to sniffle and that meant only one thing. I was about to get an earful of his crying. Now I would know how the other Gorons felt when they had to put up with it.

I had to say something to convince him not to cry. " I'm just about to blow up that--"

" I hate it! I hate it! I wanna see it! I wanna see it! I wanna see the race!" Featherweight shouted in tears. My ears were immediately bombarded with his crying and I wanted to cover them up in hopes of not going deaf. For a child, he certainly had a booming voice. " Break it! Break it! I wanna go to the race! I wanna go to the race!"

As if a motherly instinct suddenly took over me, I got down onto my knees and gave Featherweight a big hug. " You don't need to cry anymore. If you look to where the boulder is, you can see that I placed a Powder Keg there. It's going to explode in a few moments so you'll soon be able to see the race." How was it that the Powder Keg still hadn't gone off yet? I could've sworn it should've blown up by now and yet the fuse was still going. Was it possible that time stopped whenever I talked to someone? I never considered it before as I never noticed, but perhaps now was a good time to test that theory.

Moments later, the Powder Keg exploded and the boulder was blown up into pieces that scattered about the landscape. Featherweight was immediately overcome with joy that he ran into the cave and was soon out of sight. He certainly had a lot of energy for someone of his age. At least now I could return to Medigoron and inform him that I had completed the certification test. I did consider giving him a piece of my mind for putting me through so much stress, but I ended up deciding against it.

That's when I noticed Princess Twilight was looking at me with a smug look on her face. " What!?" I asked.

" I thought that was wonderful how you comforted Featherweight like that." Twilight said. " If Princess Celestia had seen that with her own eyes, she would have been so proud of such a display."

" I just felt this motherly instinct take over."

" It must have been your empathy." Twilight said. " You didn't want him to suffer so you comforted him."

I scratched my head. " My... empathy?"

Her Highness nodded. " Yes. If you ever had your own Element of Harmony, it would be Empathy."

" Because of what I went through?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " Your struggles after you decided to change your ways in addition to your troubled past have made you someone who can express empathy towards anyone who might be going through a similar situation. By showing them what can happen if they continued down their chosen path, they will learn from you that they will end up experiencing pain and misery. I don't mean to insult you or anything, Sunset, but that is essentially what happened to you."

Her Highness didn't say anything that I didn't disagree with. I did experience pain and misery as I was growing up. I hid such feelings by becoming cold and wanting power more than anything else. Had I been more honest and admitted my weaknesses, perhaps my life would have turned out differently. Because I knew what it was like to become a monster, to atone for my crimes by being cast aside by my peers, to wallow in misery on my own, I could show others another way.

That's what happened with Twilight Sparkle. Had I not succeeded in reasoning with her--and becoming Daydream Shimmer--she would still be a monster and two worlds would be nothing but experiments to her.

Empathy... Was it really my Element? Despite the strong evidence suggesting yes, I wasn't entirely sure about it. Maybe, if I were to find someone else who had lived a good number of years and needed someone to talk to so they could open up their hearts to me. Perhaps then I could see myself as being empathetic towards their plight.

Suddenly, a thunderous roar started to sound throughout the area. Was it thunder? I looked up at the sky, no clouds indicted otherwise, although the moon falling reminded me that soon I would be resetting time and turning things back to how they were before. The sound continued to get louder until I looked behind me and saw a most peculiar sight.

Gorons--at least a dozen of them--were rolling towards me at an alarming rate. I had no idea where they came from but I wasn't about to be bowled over, so I merely stepped to the side and watched as they piled into the tunnel until only Her Highness and I remained, confused by the whole spectacle. Had the explosion from the Powder Keg reached the village prompting them to make their way over here? Or had they been following me, waiting for the moment to come where they could gain access to their precious racetrack? Either way, I could now gain access myself.

I walked into the cave and immediately began to stumble about in the darkness. Whoever created this tunnel forgot to include torches and that meant having to quickly adjust my eyes while hoping not walking into something--I would eventually do that by stubbing my foot against a rock on the ground.

" This is ridiculous." I moaned. " Why don't they have torches in here?"

" It's not that long of a tunnel." Twilight answered. " The Gorons probably don't think it wise to have torches since they don't seem to come in here all that often."

My throbbing foot was suggesting otherwise. " Well, maybe they ought to consider it in the future." For the next few moments, I mumbled under my breath so that Her Highness wouldn't have to hear the vulgar language I was using to express how painful my foot was.

It also turned out that she was right as the tunnel quickly ended and opened out into a really impressive sight. The Goron Racetrack appeared before us although we could only see the beginning and the end according to crude signs hanging from the peaks indicating start and finish. I had to admit that it was a pretty impressive sight especially how the track looked smooth. I suspected that it was the Goron's pride and joy given how neat everything was.

To my left were several Gorons who appeared to be flexing their muscles and getting in some exercise. Were they planning on racing? If so then I was in for some rather stiff competition since I had to win to obtain the bottle of gold dust. Technically, there was no point to me winning since the gold dust was worthless to me at this point, but the bottle was much more useful assuming it was something I could claim.

" It looks like there's strong competition." Twilight said. " I'm not sure how you're going to fare."

" Compared to me, those guys are experts at this Patriarch Race."

" That is definitely going to be a problem." Twilight said. " Yet you don't really have much of a choice here, Sunset. The others are expecting you to race because you've been chosen to succeed the Elder as the next patriarch of the tribe. I know this isn't supposed to be your race since Darmani was supposed to be here, but we can't let them know that their heroine is dead."

I sighed heavily. That was perhaps the one annoying thing about this. Maud--Darmani--was the real successor to the Goron Elder, not me. I was just someone who was pretending to be her in order to help her finish her mission in life. " Maybe I should reconsider this and go somewhere else until we need to reset time."

" Featherweight seemed to be hoping that you would race."

" What makes you say that?"

" Did you see the look on his face?" Twilight asked. " I sure did and it was a look of hope. I think he expects you to not only take part in the race but to win it too. If you're thinking of backing out now, Sunset, you no longer have that luxury especially with regards to Featherweight. There's no need for me to explain why, is there?"

Once again, Her Highness was correct. To back down from this challenge would mean breaking the innocent heart of a child, and I would merely be replicating my time as a monster by relying on emotional damage. I understand what Featherweight is going through better than most. When I comforted him just before the Powder Keg exploded, I could feel a deep feeling brewing inside of him, a feeling of admiration towards me. He must really view Darmani as the greatest thing out there. He sees her as someone to look up to, to be inspired by, to carry on a legacy that meant so much to so many.

For the sake of Featherweight and for the Gorons, I was going to race and I was going to win!

The odds were heavily stacked against me since the others were more experienced at rolling than I was, but perhaps I could channel the spirit of Maud to give me the strength I need to keep up with what I assumed would be a brutal contest. I didn't want her to help me win the race as that would be cheating, but if she could somehow transcend through death and grant me the ability to tap into her power, I could easily handle the rest.

Sure, it sounded rather farfetched but her spirit was inside of the mask I wore. I was Darmani and that meant I could do what she could... in theory.

Walking forward, I soon found Featherweight who seemed rather chipper. " Ah! Darmi! I've been waiting for you. I hope everyone else didn't run you down when they paraded in here to watch the races. See, everyone's restless 'cause they can't wait to enter. You're gonna enter, aren't you?" That look on his face told me that he couldn't wait any longer to see me rolling along battling other Gorons until I crossed the finish line first. I nodded my head and Featherweight began jumping for joy. " I knew you would enter. You have to! I want to show everyone how Darmi races!"

" I could do with some exercise." I said, trying to sound tough although I sounded ridiculous.

" That's the Darmi I know!" Featherweight said. " If your magic power runs low, charge it up with the green jars on the course."

" We can use magic power here?"

Featherweight nodded his head. " I'm not sure why you asked such a silly question, Darmi. Everyone knows that racers are allowed to use magic during the race. It can get pretty hectic out there especially with so many colliding with one another. Magic power will give you spikes you can use to defend and attack others."

I blushed once again and scrambled to make myself not appear like a complete idiot. " Of course I knew! I... I was just testing you." No doubt about it. I was humiliated all because of something that was so obvious. If Maud were here right now, she would be slapping her forehead in sheer embarrassment over how I just handled that situation. If there was any consolation, it would be knowing that no one would remember any of this once I reset time.

" You always did have a good sense of humour, Darmi." Featherweight said. " The Goron Races can now begin! Darmi will be racing today!"

One Goron then spoke out. " This year is my debut at the races... Please go easy on me!"

Another one then said something. " Darmani! Are you ready? I'm rarin' to go!"

Yet another Goron spoke. " Darmani! Are you entering after all? I guess I'll be last again."

Judging from what each of the participants were saying, they were either worried that I would be too much for them or they believed that they had a chance. I admired them for wanting to express their desires rather than keeping it bottled up.

Since everyone was expecting me to say something, I coughed to get their attention. " Let's make this the best race we've ever had!" At first, no one else responded and I feared my words had isolated me even further, but then one Goron started cheering before the rest of them joined in. No wonder Darmani was viewed with such reverence. She could say just about anything and her people would listen.

A Goron, who appeared to be a referee, motioned for those who were competing to stand at the starting line and wait for the signal to begin. I quickly followed the line of Gorons who began walking towards the track and soon found myself stuck in-between a pair who seemed both nervous and excited. Princess Twilight insisted on staying with me in case I were to get myself hurt, but I told her that she needed to stay behind. Since I would be rolling about at high speeds, she would struggle to keep up with me. Not only that, but I felt she would be tussled about by the collisions of competitive Gorons as she didn't have a tough body.

Knowing that I was right about this, Her Highness huffed and floated over to the finish line. Turning my attention to the other Gorons competing, I could sense they each desired to cross the finish line first. While a couple had their doubts, they quickly got over it by developing serious looks on their faces. I knew I needed to get serious too since winning this race would help me on my journey--an empty bottle was nothing to sneeze at.

The Goron referee than asked all participants to curl up into a ball and prepare for the whistle. Everyone else instinctively did so leaving me the only one who had yet to curl up into a ball, a surprise that caused everyone else to look at me. Without saying anything, I curled up and waited for the whistle. If I knew my racing rules, rolling before the whistle would mean starting early resulting in a false start.

Everything went quiet as everyone waited for the race to begin. One loud whistle later and the participants started rolling at top speed. I was the last one to leave the starting line as compared to them, my reaction time wasn't as strong. Already, I could tell that this would be a gruelling race as one Goron was already knocked out when another hit him from behind so hard, he went flying through the air and landed on his side in a nearby ditch. No one even bothered to go over and assist him. I thought about helping but something in my head suggested otherwise. A voice told me to continue going.

" I really want to help that poor fellow." I said to myself. " But, if I have to keep going then I guess I've got no choice." I was able to quickly look back and see the Goron pick himself up and slowly walk all the back to the starting line. They were tough all right and obviously held pride as an important virtue in their lives.

As I continued to roll onward, I was getting further and further behind the remaining seven competitors, but that began to change when I smashed through the green pots scattered on the track that Featherweight mentioned. My magic power was restored and I could feel it flowing throughout my body. Spikes protruded from me once I had built up enough momentum and my speed began to increase. The others in front continued rolling along although they began to swerve left and right in hopes I wouldn't be able to slip past.

" Got to weave my way in-between them if I want to get to the front." Waiting for the right moment, it came when two Gorons accidentally swerved into each other and I took advantage by rolling past. " Okay, this is where things get tricky for me. I've got two behind me and five in front. If I can get those two to collide into one of the others, I can slip by and get closer to the front of the pack."

Knowing I had to let the two behind me get ahead before I made my move, I simply stuck to my current speed and waited until we reached what appeared to be ramps. " I could try jumping off of them and get some wicked air but that could slow me down." The ramps were very tempting yet I knew they would be problematic. One of the Gorons up ahead got pushed really hard by another, resulting in him spinning off a ramp and crashing hard on the ground. " Wow... Things are getting intense." Magic jars could be seen on each ramp lined up including the main path so my choice was clear.

While everyone else rolled off the ramps, I stuck to the main path, shattering magic jars to keep my speed going and my spikes up. " So far, I'm doing good although I need to get from being in the middle of the pack and into first place." Suddenly, one of the Gorons rolled off a ramp, landed directly in front of me, exploded stopping my momentum, and sending me crashing into a rock located nearby.

I picked myself up and looked at the Goron who derailed me angrily. " What in the world was that for!?"

" Sorry, Darmani. Guess I got a little carried away."

I was about to lose my temper and let him have it, but I quickly realized that Darmani would never resort to such acts. I used the breathing exercise Her Highness taught me and calmed down in mere moments. " No, it wasn't your fault. Just please be more careful in the future alright?"

" Thanks. I'm gonna go back to the start. You should keep going, Darmani, and win this thing." The Goron curled up into a ball and slowly rolled away. I could tell that the explosion had really rattled him so perhaps he would consider being cautious whenever the next race would occur.

Speaking of the race, I had fallen behind--the Gorons who had been behind me had since retired and were no longer a threat--so I needed to hustle if I wanted to win and prove to everything that Darmani was who she says she was. Curling up into a ball, I rolled forward, spikes protruding from me, and I began the long and winding game of catch-up. I could see remnants of where the others had rolled around courtesy of tiny craters strewn about the track, broken pots, and pieces of rock just to name a few things. " They must be really serious judging from all this." I said to myself.

I soon reached what appeared to be a grove of dead trees. A couple of Gorons near the end were bouncing back and forth unable to get past, so using my swerving at the appropriate times, I weaved through the trees and in front of them before I felt something push into me from the side. One of the remaining competitors decided to get physical and wanted me out of the race. " He's putting a lot of weight behind his bumping but perhaps I can turn that around and get myself further ahead."

Seeing one more tree up ahead, I continued parrying with the Goron until he decided to make his move. I quickly nudged the tree--I gave myself a speed boost in the process--and he smacked into it before careening off to the side. That left only two more to go and I knew they weren't about to let me get by. They were rolling in tandem, each trying to edge out over the other in hopes of making it. " If I have my calculations correct, the finish line should be right around this next corner. I have one chance to do this otherwise I'll lose. I'm sure these two are familiar with cutting the corner in a race, but I'll have to risk it anyway."

The final corner went down a steep slope that brushed up against a large rock face. If I wasn't careful, I could get knocked into the cliff or even worse. My best bet was to wait until my opponents were so caught up trying to beat each other, they would ignore me completely.

My plan didn't go quite the way I hoped. Both Gorons continued pushing each other back and forth although they started to go for me when I got closer. One pushed me to the side and slightly backwards but didn't disrupt my momentum, but luck was about to come my way. " Magic! Sweet, sweet magic!" Ahead were plenty of magic jars and when I smashed through them, I rolled as fast as my body could manage.

It felt like I was burning up because of how fast I was, but deep down it was as though Maud herself was giving me that final push. " I can do this! I can do this!" I said to myself as the other Gorons began getting closer in their bid to overtake me. " Just a little bit more." My body continued to burn up and was about to reach its limit of endurance before the crowd located by the finish line started cheering. I had no idea what was going on as my last thought involved rolling into a rock face.

" We have a winner!" A Goron yelled out.

" What... What happened?" I asked as I unfurled myself and laid on my back.

" You did it!" Twilight answered. " You won the race!"

" Twi... Twilight?"

Her Highness floated up next to me and landed on my head. " I don't know where you got that last burst of speed, but it was enough to get you across the finish line first. I've never seen anything so intense before in my entire life. It was like a rush of adrenaline flowed throughout my body as I watched."

I got onto my feet. " I won?"

" You did."

Hearing those words made me slump forward a little out of surprise. " Ha... Ha... I actually won. I... I can't believe it. Those other Gorons... They were right on my tail... I thought one of them had gotten past at the last moment."

" You were mere inches in front when you crossed."

" That... That was intense." I said. " I don't think I'll be doing that again any time soon." It then dawned on me that I would have to in another cycle of time if I wanted to make my sword even stronger. Just thinking about it made me want to throw up. Her Highness didn't need to say anything. She knew what was on my mind.

" That was great!" Featherweight said as he walked up to me. " I knew you were the fastest Goron, Darmi! I was sure you'd get first place!" In his hands was a bottle filled with a bright powder which I assumed was the gold dust. " You won the race and proved to everyone that daddy made the right choice. Darmi, we will love having you lead us."

" I still need time to think about that."

" No need to rush things, Darmi." Featherweight said. " Take as much time as you need."

" Thanks."

Featherweight then placed the bottle he was holding in my hands. " This is from daddy... It's the prize. This is the finest gold dust ever found in Snowhead. Daddy discovered it a long time ago and only he knows where to find it. I heard that someone could make something really nice out of it if they were skilled enough."

" Too bad he closed up shop." I said under my breath.

" Did you say something?"

I shook my head. " Nope! Nothing!"

" I'm glad that you won, Darmi." Featherweight said. " When I get bigger, I wanna be just like you--quick!"

" This race will go down as being one the greatest we've ever had." I said. The other Gorons began to cheer and already others were lining up at the starting line eager to race so that they could experience the adrenaline. I thought it was just one race per year unless these were minor races for fun.

In any case, I had finished what I needed to do at the Goron Racetrack, so I began to take my leave. No one even noticed me leaving--not even Featherweight--and soon I was back outside looking down at the lake. Quite a bit of time had passed according to where the moon was positioned up above. I needed to see Medigoron to tell him that I had completed the test and was more than capable of using Powder Kegs on my own.

Another thought came to me. Even if I do get permission to use them on my own, where was I supposed to buy Powder Kegs? If the only Goron who sold them was Medigoron, that meant having to defeat Goht every time to restore spring. I hoped that someone else sold them otherwise this would be another problem I had to deal with.

Sometime in the Past...

" Did you call for me, ma'am?"

" I did! Whatever became of that intruder I heard so much about?"

" Well... the others were able to spot them during their patrols of the water."

" And were they thrown out?"

" Um... You see... The thing is..."

" Derpy? Is something wrong?"

" No, ma'am." Derpy answered. " Nothing's wrong at all!"

" You know I can tell when you're lying to me, Derpy. You stutter way more than usual. Look, I don't care if any of the pirates botched it when it came to tossing out that intruder as long as they were thrown out. We can't let anyone sneak into our fortress and go about as they please. We Gerudo Pirates have a reputation to uphold."

Derpy appeared nervous when talking to her superior and that someone rubbed the bridge of her nose before groaning. Unlike most pirates, Derpy was known for being rather klutzy in that she often left weapons among other things behind. The other Gerudo viewed her as incompetent although she was second-in-command amongst them. Their leader saw her as having amazing skill with the sword despite her flaws. However, even she would run out of patience and chew Derpy out for her blunders. It was a strange relationship that often resulted in more than just mere headaches.

As she continued to tremble nervously, Derpy thought about running away when something jabbed her from behind. In an instant, she regained her composure and no longer looked nervous which caught her superior by surprise. " Ma'am... The intruder was thrown out but then they suddenly reappeared inside of the inner ground of the fortress."

" What!? How is that possible!?"

" She just appeared out of nowhere."

" You've gotta be kidding me! Do I look like a fool, Derpy? Do I?"

Derpy once again began acting nervous until the same jab from before got her out of it. " I think they want to talk to you in person." She stepped aside, stumbling in the process as a strange figure entered the room. The figure was wearing a strange garb that resemblance something that fairy folk would wear, but it was the mask on their face that stood out as being the most intimidating. A dark aura could be felt surrounding the figure who seemed calm about the situation, but quickly giggled silently as though they knew this meeting was going to happen in the first place.

" So... You must be Aveil, leader of the Gerudo Pirates?"

" I am, and what in blazes am I supposed to call you?"

" Me? I'm just a humble Skull Kid, a denizen of the forest, who came here to tell you something important." This was the same Skull Kid who had been causing so much trouble all across Termina--or as I've come to know her, Starlight Glimmer. " I did have some trouble getting here because your people were so rude, but I showed restraint by not turning them inside-out with my magic."

" You've got a lot of nerve barging in here like you think you own the place, but let me tell you that you shouldn't underestimate us pirates." With a snap of the superior's fingers, several pirates appeared from behind pillars and surrounded Starlight, who showed no signs of being afraid. " I don't know how you slipped through our defences but your fun is about to come to an end. We can do this the easy way or the hard way."

Starlight began laughing and folded her arms to prevent herself from losing her composure. " That was just too funny! If you knew just how powerful I am, you'd call off your pirates right now, hee-hee. I'd rather not see any of them die when they are so close to making their fondest dreams come true." Some of the pirates began looking at one another when she mentioned dreams as though she could perform some kind of miracle, but were quickly silenced by their superior who glared at them. " Wow... I didn't think you'd be such a killjoy but I guess that's what happens when you're serious."

" You miserable little ingrate!"

" Um, Rainbow Dash?" Derpy asked. " Maybe you should listen to this masked figure. I've seen what she can do with her magic and it isn't pleasant."

" Derpy! How many times have I told you not to call me by that insufferable nickname!" Rainbow Dash answered--is this what became of her when everything changed? " Gah! I can't believe how quickly that spread when it became known that I was capable of running at ridiculous speeds. That name brings out the worst in me every time someone mentions it to my face! What made you want to call me Rainbow Dash when you know my name is Aveil?"

" Um... I don't know?"

Rainbow Dash rubbed the bridge of her nose again and moaned. " Derpy, Derpy, Derpy! Sometimes I wonder why I made you my second-in-command."

Starlight's face perked up--you couldn't really see it due to her mask covering her face. " Oh... So your nickname is Rainbow Dash? My, that is quite the tidbit of information your pirate had the courtesy to babble out just now."

" If you tell anyone outside this fortress about it, I'll make sure you'll regret ever being born."

" Your threats are a joke." Starlight said. " With just my little pinkie, I could easily flatten this fortress to the ground, hee-hee. But, since I'm in a chipper mood, I'm going to leave this place standing, but don't think I won't change my mind because I will."

" Our fortress... Our home... Alright, you've got my attention." Rainbow Dash said. She snapped her fingers and the pirates stood down. " It's not that I'm afraid of you. No, I'm curious by what you said about making our dreams come true."

Starlight laughed again. " I know you're afraid but I won't judge you for it. Now, the reason I've come here is because I wanted to tell you something important. What do you know about the Zoras who live on the southern part of the ocean?"

" Those fish-freaks?" Rainbow Dash asked. " That one Zora among them has been a pain in our butts for years."

" I take it that the relationship between your pirates and them isn't very good, hee-hee! This does make things more interesting. Anyway, the singer of their band recently laid some eggs and has been taking really good care of them." Starlight answered.

" What do we care about some Zora Eggs?"

" If I told you they were the key to acquiring vast wealth, would you believe me?"

" What!?"

" That certainly got your attention." Starlight said. " Listen carefully to what I'm about to say. I'm going to make it so that your dreams of wealth and power will come true. I know each of you desires such things because it's within your nature as pirates, hee-hee!"

Since I didn't have to carry something above my head, I found it much easier to make my way back to Medigoron to inform him of my success. I did feel bad leaving the Gorons but I had to continue with my journey. Judging from the position of the sun in the sky, it was almost noon. Had I seriously spent an entire morning rolling around on a lengthy stretch of dirt designed for Gorons to test their abilities against one another? It felt like time hadn't passed at all.

If only there were some way of slowing down time so that I could get so much more done. I mean, I'm already getting things done although I felt like I could go at a much faster pace than I was already going had I more time to work with. The Ocarina of Time must have the ability to slow time down but I hadn't figured it out yet. Another thought that crossed my mind involved having to wait for certain events. If it were possible to slow down the flow of time, perhaps it could be sped up. Unfortunately, I doubted anyone would be able to help me due to not realizing that everything around kept on going through an infinite loop thanks to me.

Still, if I could slow down or speed up time, it would make my journey a little easier.

When I crossed the Twin Islands Area to make my way back to Goron Village, the two Wolfos from before popped up from the ground on their respective islands and proceeded to attack me as they did before. This time, I had every intention of defeating them even though I could've avoided them. I guessed part of me couldn't let go of a grudge, a trait that was reminiscent of who I was. It didn't take long for me to beat both Wolfos, yet once I arrived in the village, I was surprised at what had transpired since my previous visit.

Many of the Gorons had since left the shrine and were busy decorating the area by hanging up flags, building small monuments out of rock, and even using bombs to carve out tiny nooks to be used as placeholders for what appeared to be small statues of Darmani. I knew Maud was popular amongst them but I didn't expect them to worship her like she was a deity who held reverence above all others. They truly believed her to be the one to succeed the Elder as the next leader of the tribe. As much as it pained me knowing all this would be reset upon playing the Ocarina of Time, I could relish in the fact that they were happy.

One Goron acted differently from the rest. He was looking up at the moon and the sweat dripping from his brow told me that he was worried about it. He was the only one who even noticed the moon was falling while everyone else focused on what they were doing. Carefree fools... Not that I mean it in a disrespectful manner. Until the remaining giants have been rescued, no one is safe from the impending doom that lurked above.

I walked down the path, waving to Gorons who noticed me pass them by, until I reached Medigoron's cave. Someone must have heard me as a tiny ramp had since appeared in front of the entrance meaning there was no need for me to change back to a human for about five seconds. Entering his domain and sliding down to the bottom, I was soon face-to-face with Medigoron who had a big smile across his face.

" Welcome back, Darmani."

" You seem to be in a good mood."

" Why wouldn't I be?" Medigoron asked. " Everyone in the village is preparing a feast in your honour, Darmani. After all, you are the one that the Elder has chosen to succeed him as patriarch. I'm surprised that you aren't mingling about."

Sweat began dripping down the sides of my face. " About that... You see, I wanted to come here first and tell you that I've blown up the boulder using the Powder Keg you gave me as part of my certification test."

" I suspected that was why you were here."

" Wait... You knew I succeeded?" I asked. " How did you figure that out?"

Medigoron laughed, his booming voice echoed throughout the cave. " I heard the explosion! Because of my size, I can hear things better than most although Biggoron does it even better since he is a giant among us. I knew you would succeed in your test, Darmani. Knowing your skills, I feel fine letting you handle Powder Kegs on your own. It was bad of me to put you through such a dangerous test."

" It had some difficult moments."

" Yes, but you overcame them as you always do."

" So, do I get something as proof that I have the proper certification?"

" Indeed along with something else. I want you to take this as my apology." Medigoron answered. He slammed his hand into the ground and a second Powder Keg dropped down from the ceiling although this one didn't have its fuse lit up. A small card then dropped down and landed on top of it which I picked up. " That card is proof that you are permitted to use Powder Kegs of your own volition. If you ever have need of another one, you can buy one from me for 100 rupees or from my apprentice who resides in the Bomb Shop of Clock Town for 50 rupees."

" And this one right here?"

" That's a free one on the house."

While I appreciated his kindness for giving me a Powder Keg for free, it would ultimately mean little to me because I would lose it upon resetting time. The same thing could also be said about the Razor Sword that Fancy Pants and Tirek re-forged from my Kokiri Sword. Resetting time would change it back to normal leaving me with a weaker weapon. It seemed that the more I thought about what I would lose upon resetting, the more I hoped there was some way of keeping it all. Yet, there wasn't because time magic was more powerful than most other forms of magic.

Thanking him for the certification and the gift, I curled up into a ball and rolled up the slope until I was back outside again. That's when I looked up at the sky to see the moon's ever grim expression looking down at everything below. The moon was always meant to be a romantic gesture especially during the night yet now it was seen as nothing but a nightmare to all those who knew that death was coming.

I sighed. " I guess there's nothing more we can do aside from resetting everything."

" I know you don't want to, Sunset, but we have no other choice." Twilight said. " It's going to take many more cycles of time before we can stop all of this."

" This is what Ganondorf meant when he wanted me to suffer."

" Seeing all of this progress being taken away is very painful."

" What if I can't take it anymore, Twilight?" I asked. " What if I suffer a mental breakdown?"

Her Highness then rubbed her tiny fairy body against my face. " It's going to be alright, Sunset. You don't have to go through this on your own. I'm with you and I'll always be there when you need me. We need to remain strong if we are to save this world and change it back to normal."

I smiled. " Thanks Twilight. You know, Medigoron said that his apprentice was in the Bomb Shop back in town."

" We never went in there before did we?"

" No as I never had enough rupees to buy anything there." I answered. " I've deposited some rupees at the bank--I should do that more often--so I should have enough rupees to buy another Powder Keg."

" You should still have some leftover rupees in your wallet. I suggest depositing those otherwise you'll lose them when we reset time."

" Do you think we've got enough time to do something before we start over?"

" Hmmm... I'm not sure what we can do." Twilight answered. " A lot of events are no longer available as they had to be done on previous days while others are unavailable until you've acquired additional items. Besides, most of the townsfolk have most likely fled because of the moon. The only ones left are those who have to remain for one reason or another. I think it would be a lost cause at this point."

I had a feeling Her Highness was going to say that. " Guess we might as well warp back to Clock Town, deposit my rupees, and start over." Taking out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch that changed into the drums that I use while as a Goron--it still baffles me over how a specialized flute could become a set of drums--I played the Song of Soaring and desired to be taken back to Clock Town.

The song heard my wish and wings appeared on either side of me before wrapping themselves around my body. In an instant, I disappeared and then reappeared several moments later in front of the bank--I landed on a higher up ledge that had a ramp leading down to the bank. I didn't think about it at that moment, but I walked up to Fleur Dis Lee without realizing that I was still a Goron. When she looked at me, I thought she was going to freak out but in truth she knew who I still was. When I asked how she knew that I was Sunset and not someone else, she told me that I still had the stamp she gave me back at the beginning of my journey.

Not only did the stamp somehow transcend through time, I could be in any of my forms when it came to dealing with the bank.

Once I deposited my rupees--I had about seventy in my wallet from who knows where--I thanked Fleur for her services and walked forward a few paces before stopping and taking out my drums. As I played the Song of Time, I looked around one last time and thought about all the good I had accomplished that was about to be erased. It pained me because all I would have as a reminder was what had been written down in my Bombers Notebook.

[Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain]

When I came to, everything looked the way it was back when I first started. That meant the harsh winter had returned to Snowhead, but I couldn't allow myself to wallow in self pity over something that was beyond my control. I had to look forward to the future by doing what needed to be done.

My first course of action was to take out fifty rupees from the bank and it was fortunate that it was located behind the Clock Tower. Upon walking over, speaking with Fleur, and getting the rupees, I made my way towards West Clock Town and started to look for the Bomb Shop.

" Which shop do you think it is?" I asked Twilight.

" How about that one with the bomb symbol next to the door?"

I blushed with embarrassment. " Oh." How could I have not noticed the obvious? Slapping my forehead, I walked over to and entered the Bomb Shop, grumbling to myself over not recognizing something like that. The interior of the shop was riddled with various bomb displays including some rockets and even what looked to be pieces from mechs. If I didn't know any better, I could swear the owner was obsessed with Gundam and its ilk. " Medigoron said that his apprentice would be in here, but I don't see him."

" What about that guy over there?" Twilight asked. She pointed at what appeared to be a Goron curled up on the floor.

" That will do nicely." I answered. I walked over to the Goron who got up as soon as he heard my footsteps. " Um... Hello there."

" Oh! Of all places! I never expected to see a Goron around these parts."

" I'm surprised that more of us don't come here."

The Goron nodded his head. " With the cold snap plaguing our home, it's impossible to make it out of the mountains without either freezing to death or being devoured by some wild creature out there. Say... Aren't you Darmani? I heard that you passed away recently. How are you here before me?"

" It's a long story."

" In any case, I'm glad you came. I can't believe that the Great Darmani is right here in front of me. This is just between us, but I have a huge bomb that this shop doesn't even carry courtesy of my master. Before we continue with this conversation, do you happen to have the proper certification?"

I flashed him the piece of paper I received from Medigoron. " Will this suffice?"

" That's all I needed to see." The Goron answered. " So, will buy a Powder Keg for 50 rupees?"

I handed over the money and in turn he gave me a Powder Keg that I pocketed behind my back--how I did that was something I'll never know. Thanking him, I left the Bomb Shop and was about to leave town when I remembered something I did a long time ago during an earlier cycle.

When I first paid a visit to the ranch, I struck an owl statue located on the path that connected the ranch to the field. I could warp there in an instant without having to waste time rolling over there. Taking out my drums and playing the Song of Soaring again, wings appeared on either side of me, wrapped themselves around my body, and just like that I was sent to the place called Milk Road if I remember correctly.

" Guess warping does save us precious time."

" You have been getting used to it." Twilight said. " Not once did you feel sick."

" I'll need to not use it for a while otherwise I will get sick."

Her Highness began to look around to see if things were different here on the first day as opposed to the final one. " Everything seems to be the same other than the giant boulder over there that's blocking our path."

My mouth dropped in awe over seeing how big it was. " No wonder it took that guy two days before it finally shattered. Why do you suppose Starlight would want to block access to a ranch? It doesn't seem to fit in with her usual means of causing pranks."

" Perhaps she did it to prevent you from reuniting with Epona?" Twilight asked. " Other than that, I agree that it doesn't make sense."

" Do you think we should check out the ranch first or see what Pinkie has to say?"

" Pinkie? Why would we need to speak to her?"

I pointed upward. " She's floating up there and is probably wondering why we haven't spoken to her yet."

" You're currently a Goron and she is only interested in talking to fairies."

" So? I talked to her when I was trapped in the body of a Deku and she still talked to me about fairies. I guess she thinks anyone who wears green clothes and has a fairy travelling about with them is a fairy in her eyes." I said.

" That does sound a lot like Pinkie Pie." Twilight said. " I'm sure she would be willing to talk to you despite you already having purchased the map of this area. Since we're here much sooner than normal, I'm sure she will have new information or rather old information because it hasn't happened yet."

" Okay, then we'll speak to her."

Her Highness then floated out in front of me. " Maybe we should visit the ranch first before doing that? I know Pinkie has been a valuable source of information, but deep down you really want to be reunited with Epona."

Princess Twilight knew me better than anyone else. I did want to see Epona more than anything because she and I possessed a special connection with each other. Since I had to come back through here anyway--I wanted to check out the remaining paths that branched off from Milk Road--I could speak with Pinkie later. With that decision made, I began to walk forward until I came to a stop at the boulder. Unlike what I saw blocking the Goron Racetrack, this boulder was even bigger. Could a Powder Keg truly reduce it to rubble? There was only one way to find out.

That's when I noticed the man who told me he struggled to break the boulder. Since I had come here earlier, he had only just started the process and was itching to continue working until the path was cleared. If I recalled correctly, Sweetie Belle asked him to come down here to take care of the problem. In his hand was a pickaxe that appeared dull from being struck many times against the boulder, yet why was he using it when he could be using something more reliable.

He turned to face me upon my approach. " Huh? A Goron? Fancy meeting one of you here of all places."

" I was able to get off the mountain before the snow hit."

" You're one of the lucky ones then. I heard that Snowhead has become a winter wasteland because of how cold it was getting. I can understand you wanting to leave to get away from the cold, but why leave behind the rest of your people?"

I had to take a moment to come up with something before I could continue. " They told me to go and find help despite my protests saying otherwise, so I reluctantly left them to get some help, but the way back has become impossible to traverse because of the ice that blocks the way."

" That's a shame."

" I'm not sure if I can go back now."

" Sorry that I made you bring up such a painful experience." The man said. " If it's any consolation, you might be able to do me a favour and get some kind of retribution for yourself in the process."

I nodded. " What do you need from me?"

" Someone was up to no good and placed this huge boulder that's blocking the way to Romani Ranch. I was planning on breaking my way through, but I think it's going to take me a couple of days before I can clear the path. If you happen to have a Powder Keg on you, we could blast away the boulder sooner instead of later. I heard my boss say that Powder Kegs have finally become available after waiting months for that Medigoron fellow to complete them. She hoped to have some Gorons come down from the mountain with some and assist on a few projects, but the harsh weather has gutted those plans." The man answered.

" I do have a Powder Keg on me."

The man jumped for joy. " You have no idea how much trouble you saved me from!"

" Just make sure you stand back." I said. " These things have a large blast radius."

" I'll take your word for it."

The man then thrust his pickaxe into the ground, folded his arms, and tilted his head to signal that he wanted me to proceed. I wasn't sure why he decided to act like that, but if I were to take a guess, it was because he felt jealous that I could do what he couldn't. He should be thrilled knowing the boulder would be out of everyone's way instead of throwing a hissy fit over not being up to snuff. I walked over to the boulder and first inspected it.

Placing my hands on it and rubbing them across the surface, I learned that it was both smooth and sturdy. No wonder that guy was having so much trouble. There wasn't anywhere that designated a weak point so he chose to hit aimlessly in hopes of creating a crack. No doubt Starlight intended for this to be almost impossible to break unless you were willing to go the entire distance and forsake sleep in the process. She probably didn't think anyone, especially a Goron, would have in their possession the means of getting rid of something she didn't want destroyed.

Reaching behind my back and taking out the Powder Keg, I placed it on the ground next to the boulder and took a few steps back. Miraculously, the fuse lit on its own and began ticking away until it reached the barrel, blowing it up and destroying the boulder.

As pieces of it scattered about the area, the man picked up his pickaxe, thanked me profusely for doing the work for him, and he immediately started running back towards the field leaving me and Her Highness to just look on in surprise. He really didn't want to be here given how he jumped for joy as he ran. I supposed that I envied him a little as while his work was complete, mine was only halfway done with the rest being more difficult.

" What a strange guy." Twilight said. " You'd think he would've stayed to catch his breath or something."

I nodded. " He just wanted to get out of here."

" It doesn't really matter what he does now I suppose."

" Maybe we ought to have told him about the monsters?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " If he was able to make his way down here then he can easily go back the same way. In any case, we can now enter the ranch and find out what really happened during the first two days here." I started walking forward only to have her fly out in front of me. " Sunset... You can't go in there in your current form. I don't think they would appreciate having a Goron rolling around plowing down any grass they need for their cattle."

" It's been a while since I got to walk around as a human."

" Then you need to switch back." Twilight said. " You can become a Goron again later."

Grabbing my face, I pulled on it, took off the Goron Mask, flipped my head back including my hair, and put the mask away before taking out my sword. I was disappointed in that it was now back to its weakest state, but that was due to Fancy Pants closing his business. Had I been a little bit faster in clearing Snowhead Temple, I could have given him the Gold Dust and gotten my sword upgraded--the Gold Dust vanished when I reset time. Maybe I would get another chance in the future but for now I had to make do with my sword not being as effective as it could've been.

Putting my sword away, I walked forward and soon entered Romani Ranch. Things were definitely different compared to my previous visit. For one thing, there were no patches of burnt grass caused by whatever made them before. There were also the plesant sounds of cows mooing and horses neighing. Despite Termina being such a gloomy place, this ranch was actually well off, but I knew trouble would soon rear its ugly head.

My first order of business was to find Epona so that I could finally get her out of here. Since Apple Bloom should be in a better mood than she was before--she somehow lost her memories--I should be able to explain the situation to her.

Before I could even take my first step, someone called out to me. " Hey! You! Yeah you! The kid wearin' the green get-up!" I turned to my left and standing there next to a cow was Applejack, who seemed more cheerful than last time. Of course, this was at a point where she didn't know what had happened to the ranch. " Y'all are the first person ta come visitin' this here ranch for what feels like forever."

" You must be the one in charge I take it?" I asked. I wasn't about to make the same mistake again. Even though this was Applejack, I had to treat her like the person she was portraying in this world.

Applejack nodded her head. " Yup! The name's Cremia! I run this ranch! By the way, how did y'all even get here in ta first place? Reckon you must have come from town, but I can't really be sure o'that."

" I did come from Clock Town." I said. " There was a boulder that was blocking the way, but it was destroyed just a few minutes ago."

" That explains the explosion, but how did you manage to get rid o'somethin' that dern big?"

I couldn't tell that I was responsible by changing into a Goron, so I had to lie to her slightly otherwise she wouldn't understand. " A Goron came by and used her Powder Keg to remove the boulder. She didn't say much and left just as soon as arrived."

" A Goron you say?" Applejack asked. " Huh... Good enough I 'sppose." That's when everything clicked when she realized I was here before her. " Then that means... Milk Road is open to traffic! Yeehaw! I've been waitin' ta hear that for what feels like forever! I can deliver milk to town now! Y'all don't know what this means ta me and the ranch. I thought we were gonna be stuck here without any means of makin' our livelihood, but seein' y'all here makes me happy knowin' I can make that important delivery."

" I heard that this place is famous."

" Yup!" Applejack answered. " Welcome to Romani Ranch, Chateau Romani's Village. Enjoy yourself. This here cow along with ta others over in the barn are Romani-bred. My father left them for us. An inheritance from the heavens..." She sounded rather sombre at that point indicating that she was struggling to come to grips with something. I figured it wasn't my place to pry so I chose not to question her past. " The special Romani-bred cows are the source of Chateau Romani, the most desired of forbidden milk!"

" Forbidden? That sounds suspicious."

Applejack began to laugh. " Hoo-wee! Y'all are quite the comedian, ain't ya? Usin' the word 'forbidden' just makes it sound way more excitin'. No need to be worrying' over nothin' since this is a good sign regardin' anythin' forbidden. It is a mystical milk that fills you with Magic Power... I can't tell ya what it can do cause y'all must experience it for yourself. If you seek the dreamy milk of Chateau Romani, please visit Latte, near Clock Town's East Gate."

" That was... interesting."

" How was my sales pitch?" Applejack asked. " Reckon I wonder if I said it just like it's written in the brochure."

" It was pretty good."

" Thanks sugarcube."

" No problem." I said. " I was wondering if you picked up any horses as of late."

" Horses?" Applejack asked. " We've got some over in ta barn, yet there is that one locked up in a small stable next to the house. Reckon I ain't never seen such a ornery horse like that one before in my life." She walked back and forth, hand under her chin as she began to think back on something. " Mah little sister found that horse just outside the ranch entrance about a few days ago. The little critter looked so terrified that I reckon anything coulda scared it outta its wits. There weren't no tag or anything ta confirm who it belonged to, so we decided to take it in and perhaps try ta raise it ourselves."

" That horse... belongs to me." I said. " She was stolen from me by a masked imp."

" Now who in their right mind would do that to a kid like you?"

I shook my head. " I don't know but I've been worried sick about her."

" In that case, y'all better talk ta mah sister over by the house." Applejack said. " She's currently lookin' after yer horse right now. If y'all explain the situation to her, I'm sure she'll understand and allow you to take her back."

Applejack then went back to tending to her cow leaving me to continue on and see Apple Bloom. I thanked her but she didn't pay attention as the thought of making a delivery for the first time in a while made her tune out everything else around her. Shrugging my shoulders before sighing heavily, I began to walk forward and knew exactly where I was going. The overall terrain remained the same which meant Epona would be within my sights in a matter of moments.

When I reached the house, the sound of a familiar neigh greeted my ears. I turned to the stable located nearby and there was Epona, still locked up although she did have food and water located nearby.

She began to whinny like mad knowing that I had come back to see her again. I walked up to her and whinnied in response before patting her on the head. Just like that, she calmed herself down and started making a soft whinny noise in return. Looking into Epona's eyes, I could tell that she had been frightened because of what happened when Starlight took her away from me. In my heart, I felt guilty over failing to keep her safe.

" Are you alright, Sunset?" Twilight asked. " I could leave you two alone if you want."

" No. I prefer you to be here."

" There is a powerful bond between you two."

" You can sense it?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " It's a bond that has transcended time and space. I'm actually rather jealous."

I continued patting Epona on her head before stroking her muzzle and neighing to her before addressing Her Highness. " I'm sure you've got a similar with Spike. I know he's not a pet nor does he carry you around, but he's always there for you when you need him, right?"

" I'm lucky to have him."

" Epona is like Spike in that sense." I said. " She's always been there when I needed her, yet it wasn't until she was taken from me that I realized that." Epona then nudged her muzzle against my hand and neighed causing me to neigh back at her. We both did this for a few moments before I stopped stroking her. " We need to get her out of this stable. If we had the key then we could do just that."

" If yer lookin' fer a key, I'm ta only one who's got it."

I had a feeling she would have it. I turned around and stopped Apple Bloom looking at me with a disapproving glare on her face. " I got word from your sister that you would be somewhere nearby."

" This is my first time meetin' a foreigner yet y'all are actin' mighty strange." Apple Bloom said. She then noticed how much Epona kept on nudging me in the back with her muzzle and her expression changed slightly. " That there horse ain't never done anythin' like that since it first showed up on our front door step. I reckon y'all know somethin' 'bout it otherwise it wouldn't be actin' so funny."

" Epona is my horse."

" Huh? Epona?" Apple Bloom asked. " Is that the name of that horse? Also, what do ya mean it's yours?"

" She was my horse until a masked imp stole her from me back in the woods. I've been trying to find her ever since and it's only recently that I discovered that the entrance to this ranch had been blocked." I answered.

" I ain't so sure she belongs to ya but I can't ignore ta that she takin' a might shine to ya."

" You don't believe me?" I asked. " No... I didn't think you would. It's not like I have any credentials to prove she belongs to me. In fact, the only proof I have is her continual nudging me in the back. It's not much to go on since it could be some kind of trick from your perspective, but I don't really know what else I could try."

Apple Bloom looked at Epona before looking at me. " There might be a way to know if y'all are bein' honest with me."

I gulped slightly. " What's that?"

" A little game of my own design." Apple Bloom answered, grinning slightly from ear to ear. I wasn't liking the sound of where this was going. I hoped that this wasn't going to be along the same lines as what I experienced during the Goron's Patriarch Race. If it was, then I'm in a lot of trouble... again.

Chapter 32: Dangerous Defence

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 31, 2016
Chapter 32: Dangerous Defence.

Why did Apple Bloom insist on me having to complete something that she most likely came up with on the spot? Epona was my horse and I had come to the ranch to get her back after she was stolen from me by Starlight Glimmer when all of this started. Technically, Epona didn't belong to me. In reality, she belonged to the girl Apple Bloom portrayed during my journey in Hyrule. Epona proved to be a horse that no one could tame unless they knew the special song that she loved listening to. Anyone who tried riding her without knowing that song would be bucked off in an instant.

That made me think of something. Why not play Epona's Song right now and prove that she belonged to me? That would save me some hassle and Apple Bloom wouldn't need to make me play whatever game she was concocting in her head.

I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, raised it to my lips, and was ready to play when I came to a sudden realization. I wasn't able to play Epona's Song even though the notes were still in my memory. I tried several times to play the song only for it to fail each time. Why wasn't it working? Did I have to remember it? What kind of video game mechanic crap was this?

" Um... Is somethin' wrong?" Apple Bloom asked.

My first instinct was to throw the ocarina on the ground because of how angry I was. My next instinct involved throttling Apple Bloom for making me have to go through and discover such a horrible truth. No... I couldn't blame her for something I should've known nor could I treat such a fabled treasure like a piece of trash. Just when I thought things couldn't get any worse for me in the torment department, they went ahead and did exactly that.

After mulling over it for a few moments, I finally answered Apple Bloom. " I was going to prove that Epona belongs to me, but I just realized that I can't much to my annoyance. I guess I've got no other choice but to play this game you mentioned."

" What kinda proof did y'all have in mind."

I showed her the ocarina. " A long time ago, I learned a song from someone who was very similar to you, but she had a more bubbly outlook on life. Epona was her horse at the time and said that she was afraid of me, and I honestly believed her words. When she taught me a special song that could tame Epona, I played it and she immediately stopped being afraid of me. Since then, whenever I played her song, she would gallop to me no matter where she was until she was by my side.

" And fer some reason y'all can't use that song?" Apple Bloom asked. " Sounds mighty fishy ta me."

" Yes, it really does." I answered. " I was expecting you to not believe me."

" Wait jest a durn minute. I never said anythin' 'bout not believin' ya." Apple Bloom said, arms folded with a scowling look on her face. " I think it's mighty cute how y'all have such a strong connection to that there horse of yours. Ya know, I think you're tellin' me the truth, but I can't be sure unless I see you ridin' that horse."

" I figured as much."

Apple Bloom then pointed her finger at me. " Before we get started with my game, I think some introductions are in order. I'm Romani. I was given the same name as the ranch. I take it y'all have met my older sister, Cremia. Just between ta two o'us, Romani thinks Cremia acts a little too big for her britches sometimes. She's got a huge burden what with having to watch over things and protectin' me, but I feel she oughta cut loose and not be so danged serious. Now then, what do I call you?"

I was surprised at how she viewed Applejack, yet at the same time I thought it was adorable. Even in a place like Termina, there were remnants from the world that I called home that were able to come through and be on full display. I had no doubt that Apple Bloom cared deeply for her older sister yet she was doing a good job of hiding it from me. The two of them have always been close especially during the hard times like when I was framed for being Anon-A-Miss by Apple Bloom and the other crusaders all because Applejack, Rarity, and Rainbow were spending time with me instead of their respective families.

If they hadn't confessed to being behind everything, my life would have been forever shattered. I'd have become like the Dazzlings, lost and alone in a world that can no longer trust them because of their actions. Guilt would plague the crusaders at the same time. If they had kept silent and watched me fall apart, they'd have blamed themselves for being too afraid by not speaking up. I supposed we all learned a valuable lesson that day.

Her Highness bopped me on the head to make me focus on what was happening. " Oh, um, sorry. I kind of drifted off for a moment there."

" If y'all hadn't apologized, I'd have taken it as a sign that you were rude."

" My name is Sunset Shimmer."

" Sunset Shimmer? Huh... That's quite the strange name y'all got there." Apple Bloom said. " Romani has got the perfect name for you. How about... Grasshopper? That's the name I give you. No need to thank Romani for giving you such a good name."

My jaw dropped upon hearing what she called me. " You've got to be kidding me?"

Apple Bloom shook her head. " Nope! I ain't kiddin'!"

" Okay..." I said, scratching my head. " But, why would you call me grasshopper?"

" Isn't it obvious?"

" No."

" Then let Romani tell ya why I decided to give y'all that name." Apple Bloom said. " See, you're wearing green clothes, and you patter about when you walk, so Grasshopper is what I shall call you. I saw y'all comin' up ta the house but I weren't sure of yer intentions."

I had no response for her ridiculous reasoning. I didn't think that I ran around like a grasshopper but apparently that was what she believed. I thought about correcting her and ask that she referred to me as Sunset, but already she was off in her own little world. Besides, that was when I noticed her expression had become one of worry. It was certainly a change from her previous expressions, yet it also underlined something that was clearly on her mind.

That's when an idea came to heart. Something happened at Romani Ranch between the first and final days of this seventy-two hour cycle that resulted in Apple Bloom losing all sense of self and a barn devoid of cattle that had Applejack at a loss for words. If I could learn more about what it was that I needed to do here, I could come up with an ideal solution that would save everyone. The only question was whether I could earn Apple Bloom's trust. She clearly didn't think too highly of me based on initial reaction.

" Um... You seem to be troubled." I began. " Is something bothering you?"

Apple Bloom looked up at me. " Why should Romani tell you anything?"

" Because I can help you."

" You? What can y'all do fer me?"

I answered by drawing my sword and shield before swinging them around a few times. " I may not look like it but I pride myself as being a competent swordswoman. I also have
some other tools at my disposal including bombs, masks, bow, arrows, magical arrows--"

" You've got a bow?" Apple Bloom asked. She cupped her hands together and inched closer to me. " Are y'all serious?"

I put my sword and shield away before taking out the Hero's Bow. " I've had this for a while now."

" Maybe... Maybe y'all can help me with my problem."

" What about your game?" I asked. " Don't you want me to deal with that first?"

" To be brutally honest, I was plannin' on tellin' ya about what's been going on 'round here. Y'all looked like someone I thought could help me out, but then ya got closer ta that horse and I assumed you were associated with them no good Gorman Sisters who live nearby." Apple Bloom answered.

" Gorman Sisters?"

" A pair o'sisters who own a racetrack on the other side of that hill." Apple Bloom answered, pointing towards a hill located on the eastern edge of the ranch. " Those two are nothin' but varmints according ta mah sister. She thinks they're ta ones responsible for our current problems but Romani knows that those sisters can't possibly be responsible for what happens 'round here at this time of the year."

Judging from the way she talked about them in addition to the tone of her voice, these Gorman Sisters sounded like they were troublemakers. I doubted they were on the same level as Starlight, but it did mean that I would need to be weary of them in case I were to ever encounter them. I didn't know why but something in my heart was telling that those sisters would end up benefiting me somehow.

When Apple Bloom mentioned the Gorman Sisters, I immediately doubted that they could have stolen the cattle when I came here after the boulder blocking the entrance to the ranch was destroyed. I didn't know how many cattle this place had but I assumed it would be about a dozen. Two people couldn't possibly steal that many without obviously being noticed by the cattle that in turn would make enough noise to wake everyone up. Not only that but they wouldn't be able to get past the boulder. Unless someone inside the ranch was working for them, the Gorman Sisters sounded like nothing more than con artists.

That begged the question as to who or what had been responsible.

Apple Bloom continued talking once she calmed herself down. " Sorry for bringin' up them no-good Gorman Sisters. They've been nothin' but a blight on the ranch since the days when Romani's late father ran things. Anyway, y'all might have noticed that I was holdin' a bow just before ya came over to me." I hadn't noticed her carrying one so I looked over and saw a rather crude looking bow lying on the ground. " Romani was practicin' for tonight... for tonight."

" What happens tonight?"

" 'They' are comin'." Apple Bloom answered. " At this time o' the year, they come here."

" Who are 'they'?"

Apple Bloom went quiet for a few seconds before continuing. " They... They come at night every year when the carnival gets closer. They always come exactly two nights before ta festivities begin. No one right knows what the hay they're 'spposed to be. I mean, I... I seen 'em once when I was a little bit younger, but what I do know is that they ain't from this world. They come riding in a bright, shining ball, and many of them come down to the field. And then... They come to the barn..."

It was difficult for me to imagine what kind of creatures Apple Bloom was talking about, but I had a pretty good idea as to what they could be. They sounded like aliens although that would be silly in a fantasy world like this. Perhaps they were some kind of spirits?

Something else bothered me about her story. Why would creatures go to the barn of all places? If anything, wouldn't they seek out any humans by going into the house? I just didn't understand why it had to be the barn.

I was about to call her out and say that she was making things up when Apple Bloom continued. " They go into the barn and steal all of the cows leaving none behind. I know it sounds crazy, but I'm tellin' ya the truth. When I witnessed what they did with my own eyes, I didn't want ta believe it was real. They looked like ghosts or somethin' with large glowin' eyes that could pierce yer soul, hands with sharp claws that could render flesh, and they float above the ground."

" Why didn't you try to get someone to deal with them?"

" Everyone else was away from the ranch that night." Apple Bloom answered. " Aside from Mamamu Yan, who was tending to her dogs, I was the only person around to watch over the ranch till my sister and ta others got back. When they got back that next mornin' and discovered that the cows were gone, they scolded me fer not bein' responsible. Never had I seen so many disappointin' looks come my way all at once."

" Did you at least tell your sister?"

" She didn't believe me."

I could understand Apple Bloom's plight more clearly now. She was powerless to have prevented the cows from being taken hence why she couldn't stop them, and it didn't surprise me that no one believed her story. They probably assumed that these creatures were the result of her imagination going wild and that the cows ran away all because she forgot to lock the door to the barn. If not for the fact that I had seen spirits myself when I was growing up in Equestria--the Windigos--I too would be questioning her imagination. There was no doubt that she was telling the truth.

While I still didn't understand why they targeted cows, at least I knew what these creatures were based on her description. Conventional means have no affect against ghosts so using my sword would be a poor decision on my part. Perhaps something different would prove useful instead? I didn't need Apple Bloom to ask me for help at this point. I knew I was going to be helping her out regardless of what the actual situation was.

Placing my hand on Apple Bloom's shoulder, I smiled at her. " I believe you."

" Huh?" Apple Bloom exclaimed. " Ya do?"

" I've seen plenty of weird things throughout my life and ghosts are the least of those things."

" Thanks for makin' me feel better, Grasshopper."

" About that name'--"

" Even though they'll be comin' here tonight, Romani must protect the cows! I ain't 'bout to let them have their way 'round here!" Apple Bloom said. Her eyes suddenly perked up and I knew that she was about to ask me for my assistance. After everything I've seen so far in my journey, little signals like that have become easy for me to recognize. She quickly ran over to pick up her bow before coming back and looking at me with those perked up eyes. " Hey, Grasshopper, I'm recruitin' fer an assistant right now! Y'all are a girl--won't ya try and help a fellow girl out?"

I didn't know what to make of her statement, but I nodded my head in response. " You didn't even need to ask."

" Great! Now that's the spirit, Grasshopper!" Apple Bloom said excitedly. " OK then, I'm goin' straight to my strategy! They'll appear all over the ranch... They'll aim for ta barn andapproach it slowly, so hit 'em with arrows so they can't get in!"

Wait a minute! They are vulnerable to arrows!? What kind of spirits are they who can be felled by arrows!? Something about this didn't seem right. Ghosts are invulnerable to most things due to their corporeal nature. In fact, only the light and anything imbued with it are able to inflict any kind of damage onto them. What I thought about using other means had now suddenly blown up in my face unless Apple Bloom could provide me with a valid explanation.

That's when a memory from my journey through Hyrule suddenly appeared in my head. I recalled using arrows against ghosts when I was acting as a ghost hunter for Sombra as he needed some for whatever reason he had. They were very effective so perhaps the same is true here in Termina? But, why would that be? Ordinary arrows didn't have any special properties that made them effective against ghosts, but perhaps there was a logical reason. That being that this was a video game where conventional rules were ignored in favour of making situations easier to manage. You'd think they would have relied on actual facts instead of making it up as they went along?

Apple Bloom then noticed I wasn't paying attention to her again so Her Highness bopped me on the head in response. " I don't why that fairy o'yours keeps on hittin' ya in the head, but I hope y'all were listenin' to me."

I nodded my head. " I was but you said something that bothered me."

" What's that?"

" You said that arrows can hit these things." I answered. " How is that even possible?"

" Truth is... I actually found out by complete accident." Apple Bloom answered. " When I watched them take the cows away, I grabbed my bow after runnin' into the house and fired an arrow at one in hopes it would do somethin'. The arrow struck and destroyed it, but that's when the others noticed and I hid to prevent 'em from findin' me."

" That still doesn't answer my question."

" I don't know why arrows work but they do."

" Guess I'll just have to take your word for it."

" Anyway." Apple Bloom continued. " Y'all got all that? Oh, and ya mustn't leave the ranch." My reaction to that was of shock. I could understand not leaving the ranch would be stupid since that would mean running away from the problem, but she didn't need to actually stress that. " Grasshopper! Let's practice right away!" Apple Bloom then pointed to something floating about nearby. It was a balloon shaped like a ghost and judging from the arrows located on the grass around it, she had been using it for target practice. " There are gonna be ten ghost-shaped balloons in the ranch, so hurry and burst them all. If y'all take over two minutes, you're out."

" All over the ranch?"

Apple Bloom nodded. " Yup!"

" How am I supposed to do that in under two minutes?" I asked. " I'm not exactly what you would call a track athlete."

" Ya ain't gonna be doin' it on yer own, Grasshopper. Reckon y'all are gonna be needing some faster feet or hooves in this case." Apple Bloom answered. She walked over to the stable where Epona was locked in, used the key she had to unlock it, and coralled her outside where she immediately galloped over to me before nudging my face with her muzzle. " Yer horse can give ya the speed ya need to reach each balloon. Hope y'all know how to shoot arrows from horseback otherwise ya might get embarrassed mighty quick. The current record is exactly one minute. Let me know when you're ready."

As she walked off to set up the balloons that I would need to pop, I began to pet Epona on her muzzle before speaking to her through neighing. She felt relived knowing that we were reunited although she had been scared all this time because she was in a place that was different. I climbed up onto her back and got myself adjusted before giving Epona a soft kick to her ribs. She began to trot forward at a brisk place--I was glad because I needed a few moments to get adjusted to riding a horse again--before she picked up speed and galloped forwards towards a fence used for horse jumping.

Her Highness insisted that I make Epona turn away but I insisted she keep on going. She galloped faster and jumped over the fence like it was nothing, my hair flapping about in the breeze, my heartbeat racing fast from experiencing the rush of horse riding. I had Epona go around in a circle making sure to handle sharp corners without losing too much speed, and had her jump over the fence again just to make sure it wasn't a fluke. When she landed on the ground, I neighed to indicate that she needed to stop. The only disadvantage I had compared to before was that Epona didn't have any reigns for me to utilize.

Instead, I would need to make her stop by simply talking to her. That could be difficult especially when she's galloping at top speed.

Princess Twilight then looked at me with a scornful look on her face. " Why did you jump over that fence, Sunset?"

" We made it, didn't we?"

" That's not the point." Twilight answered. " Both you and Epona could've gotten hurt had she caught her hoof on the top of the fence sending both of you crashing to the ground and sustaining some serious injuries.

" You don't need to be that worried, Twilight."

" Someone has to when you act so reckless."

" I see where this is going." I said. " You're treating Epona like she was a pony from Equestria. I know she's like family in that sense, Twilight, but you have to realize that she was originally raised to jump over fences like that and gallop about at fast speeds. Her original owner knew Epona was designed for something great so she made sure she was given the best training so that she could grow up to be a fine steed."

" Horses in this world are trained to do that?" Twilight asked. " That doesn't even make sense."

" Then it's time you learned."

" Learned what?"

" Trust me." I answered while winking. " You'll understand what horse riding is all about. Heck, I had to figure it out the hard way by just doing it. No one gave me any lessons on how to ride one around." In hindsight, perhaps I should've asked Applejack since her family owned several horses over at Sweet Apple Acres. I'd need to remind myself to ask her if she could give me some lessons so that I wouldn't become rusty like I was right there and then.

" Y'all ready now?" Apple Bloom shouted from a distance. Her Highness and I turned towards where her voice was coming from, and we were surprised at seeing ten balloons scattered about the ranch with some being placed in rather awkward locations. How was she able to set them all up within a matter of minutes? I assumed it would have taken her at least twenty minutes or so. " Like I said, ya got two minutes to complete my game even though the record is one minute. Feel free ta use as many arrows as ya want if it will give ya an edge at shootin' down those balloons. The time will start when ya make yer horse start gallopin'."

Taking out the Hero's Bow, I quickly looked at where each balloon was situated. Princess Twilight then suggested that I should go around in a counter-clockwise order so that I could easily pop them all within the two minute timeframe. I told her that I would try to break the record of one minute as it would prove that I knew what I was doing, and she agreed saying Apple Bloom would definitely believe that Epona belonged to me.

Kicking my horse gently in the ribs, she began to trot forward signalling the beginning of this game. Immediately there was a balloon located right in front of me so I aimed my bow upwards and began to shoot arrows without thinking about how many I would use. Since Apple Bloom said I could use as many as I wanted, I essentially had an infinite supply until this game was over. The balloon eventually popped after I fired my sixth shot--not bad but I had hoped it would've popped at least by the third one--into what looked like sprinkles of dust, so I had Epona veer left since there were two balloons, one after another, located near two buildings I hadn't noticed before.

Firing more arrows, I popped the second balloon and tilted my body to the left and popped the third one after shooting at least a dozen arrows at it. That's when I noticed the next balloon hiding behind a tree. Knowing that Epona would run into the wall ahead, I leaned left prompting her to start turning around sharply until we were facing the fourth balloon although that tree had become a slight hindrance. On a side note, it seemed that my fear about not having any reins to reign in Epona was already becoming an issue.

I fired several more arrows, popping the fourth balloon, the fifth located to the right, but I then noticed something cool. Every time I took out an arrow from the quiver on my back, another one suddenly replaced it as though I never took one out. Was that what it meant to have an infinite amount? Now I understand why my quiver could only carry a certain amount and not because of storage space. Having infinite arrows would make things ridiculously easy--it actually would be nice--and ruin the overall experience.

Tilting my body to the right, Epona turned in that direction and I fired even more arrows until the fifth balloon popped. " Halfway there!"

" Good thing no one else is around." Twilight said. " Otherwise they'd be running away from the shower of arrows coming from you."

" I'm glad about that."

" Sunset?"

" What?"

" Is this what it feels like to ride a horse?" Twilight asked. " To gallop about at incredible speeds without actually doing any of the galloping?"

I began to laugh. " This is what horses like to do whether someone is riding them or not. Sure they don't appreciate being whipped in the flank too much or else they get upset, and they aren't keen on jumping over things at an angle, but they generally enjoy the freedom of galloping about with no restrictions. Seeing Epona galloping of her own volition reminds me of how I yearn to do the exact same thing in Equestria."

" Really?" Twilight asked. " You want to run around back home?"

I nodded. " Yeah! Riding around on Epona has given me the urge to go back and gallop around in a big open field somewhere."

" Maybe you should consider--"

" We really should focus on the rest of these balloons." I said. I didn't mean to interrupt Her Highness but I knew that she was about to suggest that I go back to Equestria when all this was said and done. Again, I just wasn't ready to go back home because of what could be waiting for me.

Seeing Princess Celestia would mean absolutely everything to me but I knew that her guards would be waiting to apprehend me because of what happened. I also knew that I wouldn't receive the same warm welcome from Princess Luna. Her Highness said she returned to Celestia's side after being changed back from being Nightmare Moon, a legend I was well familiar with given it was one of the first things I was taught when I attended the School for Gifted Unicorns.

While I'm glad that Princess Luna has become integrated within Equestrian society after being gone for a thousand years, yet deep down I knew she wouldn't hold me in the same regard her sister did. If anything, she would want me banished to the desolate wastes for what I did when I stole Princess Twilight's crown. Granted, I'm merely assuming that Luna desires to banish me for my actions back then. Maybe I should know what she truly thinks of me before jumping to the wrong conclusion. I should ask Her Highness about it sometime otherwise I'll never be able to get it out of my mind.

I think I'll ask her once we're done here.

Urging Epona to the left, I gently whipped her in the flank so that she could reach the next balloon quickly.

Sometime in the past...

" Okay, you've got my attention, so tell me how you plan on making us rich and powerful beyond our wildest dreams?" Rainbow Dash asked.

" Hee-hee!" Starlight laughed. " Have you heard of the temple that exists out in the middle of the ocean?"

" The Great Bay Temple?" Rainbow Dash asked. " Everyone around here has heard about that accursed place. They say that it's a complex system of pipes, turbines, and other junk that can manipulate the water, but no one has been there for generations. We pirates and Zora used to fight over it a long time ago before we all agreed that it was a waste of time fighting over the damn place. We couldn't care less if the Zora changed their minds and took it over for themselves. So long as we continue to plunder their home, we'll always bring back something we can sell to other pirates."

" You poor, naive child."

Starlight then noticed that she was surrounded by a large assortment of swords with Rainbow Dash pointing hers right at her throat. " Just because I've granted you an audience with me doesn't mean you're free to say what you like. I could end your life right now just by snapping my fingers so you ought to remember that." Rainbow's temper started to flare up upon seeing Starlight laughing at her. " Am I missing the joke here?"

" You're the joke! Hee-hee!" Starlight answered. " Like I told you before, you and your pirates would be crushed if I were to use my powers."

" I'm not impressed."

" Oh, and why not?"

" You like to brag about your power but I haven't seen any action." Rainbow Dash answered. She lowered her sword, walked back to a throne situated behind her, and sat down before raising her hand prompting the other pirates to maintain their stance of having their swords aimed at Starlight. " I don't think you can make us wealthy like you claim. I think you're nothing but an urchin who likes to think she's all that! I'm done with you! You can either show yourself out or you'll be shown the way out and in pieces."

" Do you want me to show my power?"

" Like you've got any power!"

" This mask isn't just for looks you know." Starlight said. " It grants me abilities that I never knew I had before until now."

" You know, that thing oughta be worth a few hundred rupees depending on who wants it. Why don't you take it off and put it on the ground before you leave. I don't want such a beautiful thing getting marred by the stain of your blood should you choose not to leave." Rainbow Dash said.

" Hee-hee! You're really wound up tight aren't you?" Starlight asked. She then relaxed her muscles and went as cold as a statue. Rainbow didn't order her pirates to do anything as she wasn't sure what was about to happen. " Since it's obvious that you want to see my power, I can indulge in your curiosity. I'm in no hurry mind you so I could take as long as necessary, but I don't want to bore you with any details." The eyes on her mask began glowing and that was when things suddenly changed for the worst.

Two of the walls in the room started to crack until they shattered revealing the night sky outside. This was followed by powerful gusts of wind that came out from nowhere and began blowing about. Several pirates found themselves caught up in the wind and screamed for help before they were dragged outside, their piercing screams fading away when it became apparent that they had met their deaths. The ceiling started to convulse on itself as though something was cram it all together, and sounds of walls outside beginning to contort was enough for the other pirates to run away in fear.

Starlight simply stood there, her eyes continued glowing although she had since begun to laugh maniacally. Rainbow Dash in the meantime had since gotten up from her throne and demanded that the others not run about in a blind panic. She barked at them to calm down although her efforts were in vein as they continued fleeing for their lives. Only Derpy remained where she stood for reasons of her own--she didn't think about running away because she had no idea what to do--a minor victory for Rainbow.

Eventually, Rainbow shouted due to finally being unable to take it anymore. " Alright! Alright! You've made your point!"

" Oh, I have only just gotten started. Hee-hee." Starlight said. " I could keep this up for hours."

Rainbow raised her hand in protest. " No! I... I... I apologize for doubting your powers."

" Hee-hee! Groveling... That looks pretty good on you."

" You've proven that you possess great power so now I'm willing to listen to you."

" I could just leave because of how rude you were, but I'll tell you anyway." Starlight said. " Besides, this is going to be much more fun than bringing down your fortress and forcing you all to rebuild from scratch. The temple out there in the ocean contains many treasures including an item that contains powerful ice magic."

Rainbow's eyes perked up upon hearing the word treasure. " Did you say, treasure?"

Starlight nodded. " I did. Gold, jewels, diamonds, and more are hidden in that place waiting for someone to find them."

" If we could get our hands on such treasure, we'd all be set for the rest of our lives." Rainbow Dash said. " Derpy! Get outside and order everyone who ran away to come back here at once so they can prepare to invade Great Bay Temple."

" Not so fast."

" What do you mean?"

" You need those Zora eggs to gain access to the temple." Starlight answered. " Without them, you will never get past the tornado that protects the temple. A shame really as I'm sure stealing eggs is well within your abilities as pirates."

" So we need those eggs?" Rainbow Dash asked. " Ha! Sounds simple enough."

" I heard that the Zoras have amongst their number, someone who is more than a match for you."

Rainbow's face turned red with anger before she slammed her fist onto her throne. " Him!? Yes... I suppose he has proven to be a thorn in our sides what with his uncanny ability to thwart our efforts by using his obviously inferior fighting skills." She then walked forward towards one of the holes in the wall before staring out at the night sky. " Still, he has proven himself a worthy foe. None of the other Zora have ever be viewed as annoying but he always finds a way to succeed despite odds stacked against him. He could've been our leader had he not been born a Zora." Rainbow then turned to face Starlight, a fire of passion burning in her eyes.

" We'll get those eggs and bring them back here! The Gerudo Pirates shall once again prove that they are the scourges of Great Bay!"

Popping the remaining balloons proved to be much more challenging than I originally thought. Apple Bloom had proven that she could be devious when it came to designing the perfect challenge and this one definitely was that. Manipulating Epona without any reins also added to the difficulty, but I quickly grew accustomed to that by either tilting my body to indicate a change in direction or I neigh to signal her to go elsewhere.

It had occurred to me that she placed the balloons in their locations as a means of showing me places where the ghosts could potentially appear. If they could show up anywhere across the ranch when they actually do come, I'd need to go all over the field in order to pick them off. She didn't specify how fast they could move or how many I'd have to deal with during a given wave, yet I attributed that to her not remembering everything since she was younger when it happened. Still, I aimed on helping her protect the cows although I was now starting to feel that perhaps some more insight would be necessary.

With the last balloon popped, I could hear Apple Bloom saying that the game was over and that I should head on back over to her. I gently kicked Epona in the ribs and she trotted along at a brisk pace. As she headed towards the house, I had this nagging feeling crawling on the back of my neck. I didn't know why but there was a strange aura present all around me, like some great evil had been here during a previous cycle of time. Did Her Highness sense it? It didn't seem like it as she was more interested in talking to Epona by neighing back and forth with her--she was a pony like me after all--yet perhaps I once became evil, I could feel such things better than most.

Something else must have happened here. Unfortunately, there was no way of knowing since everyone at the ranch had forgotten since it never happened. Time paradoxes... No matter often I tried to wrap my head around it, the concept still sounded confusing especially when bizarre incidents got thrown into the mix.

" Amazin'! It's a new record!" Apple Bloom shouted as I slowly brought Epona to a stop and climbed off of her. " Y'all managed to complete my game in fifty-nine seconds. You two sure know how ta work well together. Guess y'all were tellin' me the truth that she's your horse. I'm sorry fer doubtin' yer claims, Grasshopper."

I smiled. " It was an honest mistake."

" One thing I don't understand." Apple Bloom said. " If y'all have such a strong bond with your horse, why couldn't you call her over?"

" I can't because of her song, remember?"

" Song?" Apple Bloom asked. She held her hand under her chin and went into deep thought for a few moments until something clicked in her head. " I think I might be able ta help ya with that little problem. I'll teach Romani's horse-calling song to you, Grasshopper."

Did she just say "horse-calling song"? Surely she was pulling my leg, but that quickly changed when she began to sing six notes that sounded awfully familiar. She then repeated those same notes before looking at me, and I knew what needed to be done.

I took out the Ocarina of Time and played those notes that resulted in Epona rubbing her muzzle against my chest. For a moment I giggled because her muzzle was so tickled, and that's when it came back to me even though I shouldn't have been able to forget it. That song... It was taught to me by a different version of Apple Bloom, yet the melody remained the same despite the change in both worlds and time. It was Epona's Song, a melody signifying the strong bond that existed between us, a melody that we shared. Now I could call upon her whenever I played her song.

" It's kinda funny." Apple Bloom continued. " Yer horse seems to like that song. I don't really know how and why I started singin' that, but it made her happy so I kept on singin' to make her feel like she was back wherever she had come from."

" You've no idea what this means to me."

" Glad I could be of help to ya."

" Now, you said that these ghosts only show up at night, right?"

" That's right." Apple Bloom answered. " I should also tell ya somethin' else 'bout them. When your arrow hits these balloon, they burst into nothin', but ta real ones'll keep poppin' up like weeds every time. If they get in the barn, we lose and that means the end of this here ranch's livelihood. They run away at first light of the sun, so we'll have to keep 'em from reaching the barn until close to dawn. Y'all got that?"

I nodded my head. " I got it."

" Good." Apple Bloom said. " The operation starts tonight at two in the mornin'. I'll be waiting in the barn. Don't be late!" She then bowed slightly before turning around and walking towards her practice target when she stopped and turned her head slightly. " Maybe ya oughta set yerself an alarm clock or somethin' so that y'all remember to be here for when they come in the middle of the night. Ya don't have ta but it might be useful just in case." She turned her head back and began shooting her bow at the balloon although she wasn't using any arrows.

Was she serious about coming back here in the middle of the night? I knew she would say something to that effect given these ghosts appeared after the sun goes down, but I thought they would appear as soon as nightfall began. Because I didn't have a clock that could tell me the time and instead had to rely on the sky, I had to be here early enough and not miss out on an important engagement. My only option was to remain here at the ranch until then although that meant wasting time doing absolutely nothing.

There had to be a way to progress time more quickly. I knew it sounded ridiculous but at this point, the thought of waiting for something specific to happen just didn't settle well with me, and I was sure Her Highness felt the same way. The Ocarina of Time allowed me to reset time to continually repeat these three days until I had awoken the remaining giants and prevented the moon from destroying Termina, yet why couldn't it grant me this other power I was now thinking about? No wonder no one in Equestria ever bothered taking such a strong interest in time magic except for Star Swirl the Bearded.

It was just far too complex and frustrating for ponies to ever consider using it.

I sighed. " Now what are we supposed to do until late tonight?"

" Apple Bloom gave us plenty of time." Twilight answered. " Perhaps too much of it given we're not needed here until much later. I suppose we could get started on trying to save the third giant, but we would end up getting too engrossed in that and not come back here to protect the cows."

" I wish we could speed up time."

" You know as well as I how dangerous time magic can be."

" Of course I know that." I said. " It's just that if we could speed things and move forward through time, we wouldn't have to wait as long to help out Apple Bloom. Would you be willing to wait around for some close to twenty hours just to do one thing?"

" No, but you have to take everyone else into consideration."

" What do you mean?"

" If we were to use time magic to move forward through time, who's to say what will happen to the people of Termina." Twilight answered. " You and I are the only ones not affected whenever we go back to the beginning of these three days to give ourselves more time. Everyone else would be affected and that could bring about all kinds of ramifications that we're not even ready to deal with."

" You do know that no one remembers anything, right?"

" What of it?"

I had the urge to slap my forehead but refrained from doing so. " Twilight, the time magic we use doesn't affect anyone because they don't know it happens. When we reset time, they go through their usual routines during the three days without ever realizing that they are being manipulated by magic. If we were to speed up time, they wouldn't be affected like before and continue on like nothing happened."

" How sure are you of that?"

I shook my head. " I'm not but what other choice is there?" Princess Twilight looked skeptical over what I had said but she eventually shrugged her shoulders indicating that she was on my side although I knew that there was a risk involved in manipulating time any further. " I'm not about to try and figure out how to manipulate time but perhaps someone out there might know of a way."

" What about Pinkie Pie?" Twilight asked. " She's been incredibly helpful regarding that kind of thing."

" Then we should talk to her next."

To be fair, I wanted to hear what Pinkie had to say about this part of Termina or rather I wanted to hear what she had to say about it again. I recalled speaking with her when I came by this way after finally being able to leave Clock Town, yet I had forgotten much of what she had said regarding Milk Road. It was going to be weird asking her to repeat something she doesn't even realize she said a long time ago, but since Her Highness and I were going to be sticking around in the area for a while, knowing more about it was the ideal solution instead of going around blindly.

I thought about becoming a Goron and rolling my way back to the entrance of the ranch, but since I had plenty of time on my hands, I could just walk my way over. Besides, I wanted to take the time to take in all of the beauty that was surrounding me. This place was definitely pristine, a place where everything was peaceful despite how there was so much darkness all around courtesy of Starlight's actions. Being here eased all of the worries that had been hounding me for some time. Perhaps I could come here from time to time to relax especially after going through a difficult situation that would induce me with stress.

It didn't take long for me to reach the entrance and when I stepped back out into Milk Road, I immediately took out the Hero's Bow, popped Pinkie's balloon, and she dropped down and landed on the ground causing her legs to buckle from the impact.

" Why does everyone continue popping Tingle's balloon?" Pinkie Pie asked. " I need to finish working on this new map for my father, but I can't do anything if I keep on being knocked out of the sky." She then dusted off her outfit before noticing me nearby where she ran and almost knocked me over. " What's this? Green clothes? White fairy? Madam, are you perchance, a forest fairy? Oh my! My name is Tingle!"

I raised my hand to stop her from talking. " I already know who you are."

" Really?" Pinkie Pie asked. " You already know about Tingle? But, I didn't think anyone knew me. I must be more famous than I thought."

" Do you have any information regarding this area?"

" Information?"

I nodded. " Yes. I could really do with some."

" Before I can give you any of that, you'll have to buy a map from me first. You see, I make maps and sell them for rupees as a way to help out my father. Deep down, Tingle wishes to have a fairy of her very own so map making is what I do to pass the time until the day comes." Pinkie Pie said.

" About that... I already have your map for this area."

" What!?" Pinkie Pie exclaimed, her jaw dropping and eyes bugging out at the same time. " How can you have one of Tingle's maps without even buying it from Tingle? Do you happen to possess any magical powers by any chance?" She inched closer until her nose was brushing up against mine. I felt really uncomfortable despite knowing that this was Pinkie acting like her usual self. In response to her creepy gesture, I nodded my head and she immediately backed away. " Of course you have magical powers. Tingle knew you did otherwise how else would you have gotten one of my maps."

" Guess I'm just special in that way." I said sheepishly.

" Okay! Tingle will give you information." Pinkie Pie said. " I take it you've been to Romani Ranch since that boulder has been removed, but did you know that strange things have been happening there? Someone has been smashing bottles of milk, scaring their cows, and even threatening to attack whenever the owner attempts to make a delivery. No one knows who is responsible for all of that, but Tingle suspects those Gorman Sisters."

" Why them?" I asked. " Sure, they're suspicious but why would that resort to vandalism?"

Pinkie responded by first spinning around in a circle several times. " Because they want the ranch to go under. You know? Close down? Why they can't accept the fact that the ranch offers a better quality of milk is beyond me, but Tingle knows they will stop at nothing to force that poor owner into going bankrupt."

This information was definitely different from what she told me before. When I spoke with her here on Milk Road last time, she told me about what had been going from the perspective of knowing things after the ranch was decimated by the ghosts who were to invade tonight. She didn't know anything about it as it hadn't happened yet, so instead I was being told about other matters that would hopefully give me some ideas.

I had fully confirmed that the Gorman Sisters weren't to be trusted but to know that they were vandals told me that I would need to be careful should I end up speaking to them if that need ever arose. I doubted they were responsible for the ghosts so that option was immediately off the table, and I also doubted that Pinkie knew anything about them. That's when a different popped into my mind. Perhaps Pinkie could tell me how to manipulate time using my ocarina. Sure, it was a longshot but because of her ability to bend reality to her will, perhaps she was the right person to ask.

First, I needed to know more about the Gorman Sisters. " What do those sisters do?"

" They breed horses although only the youngest and oldest siblings do that." Pinkie Pie answered. " Their only brother, Gorman, the middle child, wasn't able to handle it so he decided to go into show business and be an entertainer. I've seen him wander around Clock Town looking proud and pompous, but deep down he cares about those in his employ. Gorman is a good person compared to his sisters. Speaking of sisters, those two recently got their hands on some strange masks."

" Masks?"

" I heard that they paid a visit to the wastelands in the east and stole some masks from the graves of some assassins." Pinkie Pie answered. Was she being serious? She must have been since she was showing me her teeth via a goofy grin. " I don't know why anyone would go to a place that has been uninhabited for a really, really, long time--except for those three people who actually live there--but it's what I overheard them talking about when they came back from their trip."

The fact that she said masks piqued my interest but who in their right mind would steal something from assassins, especially those who are dead? The Gorman Sisters were either really brave, really stupid, or a mixture of the two. It looked like I had an actual reason to pay them a visit. I had thought about seeing them to confirm if what everyone had been saying about them was true, yet now I had an excuse in case I needed one.

Pinkie began spinning around again before suddenly stopping upon seeing the Ocarina of Time sticking out of my pouch. " Hey! That's a pretty nice instrument you've got there, Mrs. Fairy. My father tried getting me to master an instrument as a means of getting over my obsession with fairies, but Tingle wouldn't be persuaded by the thoughts of playing wonderful music."

" Can I ask you something?"

" What is it?"

I took a deep breath before asking my question. " Do you know anything about manipulating time through the use of an ocarina?"

Pinkie looked at me for a few moments, blinking every second or two, and that made me think that perhaps I shouldn't have asked her such a complicated question. My face began turning red from embarrassment and my first thought was to get her to forget I said anything, but she suddenly surprised me by saying something random. " No, but you can talk to the scarecrow that lies in the Item Shop back in Clock Town. He knows all kinds of things about manipulating time using instruments." She finished by giving me that grin again.

" You're kidding, right?"

Pinkie shook her head frantically. " Nope!"

" Guess it's worth checking out."

" You can trust what Tingle has to say, Mrs. Fairy." Pinkie Pie said. " I'm afraid that I don't have anything else I can share with you, and since you don't need to purchase a map from Tingle, I guess we're finished with our conversation." She spun around one more time before throwing some confetti all over the place. Some of it ended up on my face and I wiped it away with my hand with a grim look on my face. " Tingle-Tingle-Koolo-Limpah! These are the magic words Tingle created herself. Don't steal them!" Pinkie then inflated her balloon and slowly floated back up to the sky so that she could continue making her maps.

Was she serious about talking to a scarecrow about how to manipulate time? I was sure she was pulling my leg in an effort to make me feel guilty over not buying another one of her maps, but then this was Pinkie Pie after all. Her eccentricity made her someone who knew a lot but didn't always make it seem like she was telling the truth. To be honest, I was planning on visiting the Item Shop anyway in order to fill up my empty bottles with potions and the like.

Given how my experiences against both Goht and Ganondorf resulted in me almost getting killed--and getting killed in the latter case--I needed to get some supplies. I had this feeling that the next region of Termina would be the hardest one yet.

Since I didn't want to walk all the way back to Clock Town, I took out the Ocarina of Time, played the Song of Soaring, and in no time at all, I was back in Clock Town where I proceeded to head into the west side of town. It didn't take long to find the Item Shop since it was located right next to the Bomb Shop, but upon going inside, I noticed that no one was behind the counter. Had I come in at a bad time or something? I assumed someone would be here to help me make some purchases yet instead there was no one around.

" Well this was a waste of time." I said, moaning. " I was hoping to buy a potion or two."

" Do you have enough rupees?"

I nodded my head. " When we went over to the house and back at the ranch, I used my sword to cut down some grass, and doing so produced some rupees. I know it sounds weird that cutting grass would make me wealthy, Twilight, but it's just how things work around here."

" I wasn't questioning it." Twilight said. " Yet, it does seem that we came at an awkward time. Since we won't be exploring the next region until after we reset time again, we might as well start looking around for the scarecrow that's supposedly in here according to Pinkie."

" You're doubting her, aren't you?"

" Maybe a little." Twilight answered. " Pinkie can be very imaginative when she needs to be and she does make things up just to get a laugh out of everybody. Even if she is a different person in this world, she still has her bubbly personality and penchant for stretching the truth." Her Highness looked to her left and suddenly jumped before flying behind my hat and peaking out from behind the fringe. " Sunset... I... see the scarecrow."

" Where?"

" To your left."

I looked in the direction Princess Twilight was looking in and there was the scarecrow in question. " Guess she wasn't making it up." The scarecrow looked rather crude in design as though someone had hastily constructed it without a second thought, yet something about it seemed rather dubious. " It doesn't seem to be capable of talking let alone being able to share secrets on how to manipulate time. Maybe Pinkie got her facts wrong and assumed this thing could talk."

" Of course I can talk, baby!" The scarecrow said as it suddenly started to move about."

" WAAAAH!" I screamed as the surprise caused me to fall down on my butt.

" Whoa! Didn't mean to scare you like that, baby!" The scarecrow said. " I guess you're wondering what I'm doing in a place like this, huh?" I nodded my head causing the scarecrow to bounce up and down. " I thought so. I just love to dance about all day and all night until the crack of dawn and the howl of night. Say, how would like for us to keep on dancing until night? Or maybe you want to dance until morning?"

I didn't want to do either of those things as it meant missing out on helping Apple Bloom. Granted, dancing until night would be beneficial, yet I wanted to manipulate time myself rather than have someone or something else do that for me.

I shook my head and the scarecrow felt somewhat dejected. " What? You don't want to dance, baby? That's cold, real cold, but I get that perhaps you're not a party animal. It's okay though as not everyone can get in the kind of groove that I live for every single day." The scarecrow then noticed the ocarina in my hand and he started bouncing again. " Hey, you've got yourself a pretty sweet ocarina there, baby! How would you like to know some secrets that can help you manipulate the flow of time?"

" Now you're speaking my language."

" Ha! I knew you'd agree." The scarecrow said. " Before I can tell you, I need to know if you have the song that can send you back in time. If you've got that then things will be easy, but if you don't then I've got nothing to teach you."

" I know it."

" Then let me share my secrets with you, baby." The scarecrow said. " If you were to play those notes backwards, you would play the inverted version of that song. This would give you the power to slow down time by exactly one third of the normal speed that time flows in. Everything will be affected by this and you'll be able to know due to them moving about at a much slower pace than usual. If you play those notes backwards again, everything will move at the regular speed."

" I... I don't believe it." I said. Anger began swelling up inside me and I had to calm myself down quickly by using the breathing technique Her Highness taught me. Had I known about the ability to slow down time, things would've been a whole lot simpler than they were. I'd have had more time to complete the temples, more time to have gotten the gold dust and gotten a better sword, and not have to worry about rushing around in a blind panic. " I'm... I'm thankful for you telling me that."

Deep down however, I felt like a complete and utter idiot. In hindsight, I should have visited this scarecrow the instant I was free from being stuck as a Deku Scrub. Instead, I came now, past the halfway point, to learn about something I could've used much sooner. A part of me wanted to kick myself in the butt, but I refused to not humiliate myself any more than what I already had done. Princess Twilight was also embarrassed because she could've suggested I visit the Item Shop to get some supplies despite me lacking the proper equipment and bottles at the time.

" The other secret is the complete opposite." The scarecrow said. " If you play the first three notes twice each, then you can move forward through time between one to twelve hours just like that, baby. Of course, this secret is one I don't recommend personally as time is always important. No need to try and skip out on it."

" You mean play the first note twice, then the second, and then the third?"

" Correct, baby!"

That one sounded a lot more useful although risky as I needed to be specific about which time I wanted to get to. While it sounded like I would be wasting precious time during any given cycle, since I essentially had an infinite number to work with, some cycles could be used to complete specific objectives without needing to be stressed out over completing something that would bring me one step closer to the end. For instance, helping out around Romani Ranch was an example of doing something that didn't involve gaining access to the next temple or give me an important mask.

If I had my information correct based on what the scarecrow said, the first song was the "Inverted Song of Time" and the other the "Song of Double Time". Again, I wish I'd known this much sooner but at least I knew them now instead of at the very end of this journey.

Thanking the scarecrow for sharing his secrets, Princess Twilight and I left the Item Shop--no one was there to serve so I had no reason to stay there anymore--and decided that going back to Romani Ranch and speed forward through time would allow us to resolve Apple Bloom's problem now instead of waiting around for it. I could spend a couple of hours taking a closer look at the Gormon Sisters to see if they were up to something, but I didn't want to run the risk of missing my appointment.

I raised the Ocarina of Time to my lips, played the Song of Soaring, and warped my way back over to Milk Road--I had slowly gotten myself adjusted to flying around through a magical tornado although I was still having some trouble getting past the queasiness that results when I land.

From there, I attempted to play the Song of Double Time--it took me about ten tries before I finally played it correctly. In my mind, I wanted time to move forward to around right before the alloted time of 02:00am so that I could meet up with Apple Bloom. The magic contained within the song then caused time to suddenly speed up and I could see an infinite number of clocks speeding up.

Night of the First Day - 52 Hours Remain.

And just like that, the night had come without a hitch. I immediately ran into the ranch and discovered that it definitely looked different at night. It looked rather menacing what with the darkness spreading across such a large landscape with the only actual lights coming from the house and barn.

My first call of action was to head on over to the house so I began to run and not realizing that I could've used Epona to make my way over there a lot faster. In fact, she was still standing next to the house where I had left her on my little errand to speak with Pinkie Pie. She was definitely as loyal as before although her whinnying told me she had wondered where I had gone upon decided to leave. Upon reaching Epona, I whinnied in response before giving her a great big hug. After that, I went up to the house and was about to knock on the door when Her Highness noticed something that she brought to my attention.

" It's closed now." Twilight said. " According to this sign next to the door, the Chateau Romani won't be open until tomorrow morning."

" Really?"

" Looks like it."

I slapped my forehead. " Ugh! Apple Bloom didn't mention anything about her home being locked for the night."

" It must have slipped her mind." Twilight said. She then peered through the windows to see if she could spot anything but there was no movement. " I'm going to assume that she went off to bed and won't be around to help us deal with the problem at hand. She's still young after all so staying up this late might not be very good for her development. Since we know what's coming our way, we should just kick back and relax for a while."

" How much time do we have?"

" About an hour before they supposedly come."

" Do you think those ghosts will be here?"

Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders. " I'm not sure what's going to happen. All I know is that we agreed to help Apple Bloom and that's what we've got to do. You should have more than enough arrows to take care of as many ghosts as possible until the sun comes up later."

" I was thinking." I began. " What if I used the Inverted Song of Time to slow them down."

" A good idea in theory but with one drawback."

" What's that?"

" The ghosts would slow down yes." Twilight answered. " But, so would time itself. It would take you even longer because of time stopping so it all boils down to whether you want to take it easy or hard. Time itself would also play a factor in determining how things are going to go."

" Guess I'm doing this the hard way." I said, sighing. All of a sudden, the lock on the other side of the door clicked and out stepped Apple Bloom armed with her bow. She had a serious look on her although I was surprised that she was willing to be up so late at night. " I'm here like you asked but I didn't think you'd be up this late."

" Like I told ya earlier, Grasshopper. Romani is gonna help protect ta cows." Apple Bloom said. She looked up at a clock hanging on the outside of the house before turning her attention towards me. " It's almost time... They will be here any moment. Y'all take care of things outside, Grasshopper! If ya got a map, watch it real careful like. Whatever happens, don't let 'em get into the barn or we're finished." She began running towards the barn before stopping midway through. " They'll come from behind the barn, too, so watch out. If y'all run out of arrows, we got that there crate near the house, so stock up when you need to."

" How long do I have to do this?"

" Just until the sun comes up."

" And what about you?"

" I'm gonna be the last line o'defence." Apple Bloom. " I don't suppose I'll be able to hold 'em off if they get past ya, but I ain't backing down now." She then continued towards the barn, opened the door, went inside and closed it leaving me and Her Highness on our own.

I had no time to go into the barn and scold her for not wanting to be outside where the action was. A bright light suddenly appeared out of nowhere and began circling around the ranch like it was observing everything to get a better assessment. The light looked beautiful but I knew that this was the ghosts' means of getting to their destination. As the light continued going around, it suddenly stopped and something strange came out from below, materializing into a creature that looked exactly like the description Apple Bloom mentioned when she first brought them up.

More and more creatures came from the light whenever it stopped and soon the entire ranch was plagued with them. I was now face to face with the ghosts. It was a good thing I hadn't wasted any arrows on the way as I was going to need each and every one of them in order to drive them back until the sun came up.

The ghosts began to start moving towards the barn in a quick manner and I knew what I had to do. I took out the Hero's Bow and waited for the first ones to get close enough, and when they did, I fired arrows at each of them. Whenever one was struck, it got knocked back a bit before disappearing, yet I couldn't celebrate victory straight away. As soon as a ghost was vanquished, another one would pop up in its place.

" How many do you think there are?"

" Most likely an infinite number." Twilight answered. " They're going to keep on coming until the sun comes up. You've got about three hours to keep them from reaching the barn so I hope you're up for this." Her Highness then noticed a ghosts was moving towards the barn from behind the house and began to panic. " Sunset! There's a ghost back there trying to sneak in from behind our backs."

I turned and saw that the ghost was getting awfully close. " Don't worry, Twilight! I've got him!" I fired a couple of arrows, the second hit the ghost, pushing it back, and disappearing into a puff of smoke. I turned back to see at least a dozen more were getting closer to the barn by hovering over fences. " They're everywhere! I'm going need to rely on some excellent sharp-shooting if I'm going to do this!"

Letting so many come at me all at once wasn't the best idea. I had to pick them off as they came otherwise I'd get swamped, and Apple Bloom wouldn't stand a chance if any of them got past me. I looked up to the sky to see if dawn would soon be upon us--it wasn't even close--so I resumed firing arrows in hopes of hitting some ghosts. My first shots defeated several that had gotten really close but then my next shots missed entirely. They weren't changing directions in a bid to avoid being picked off nor were they trying to hide behind anything and avoid my arrows. No, they were fixated on reaching the barn.

The next ghosts came up and I easily picked them off, yet that was when I noticed that my quiver was beginning to run low. I knew that there were extra arrows in the crate in front of me but how was I supposed to break it open without something heavy enough to smash it. Could I use my sword for leverage and pry the crate open? That could work although it would waste precious time that I didn't have. I could always punch it as a Goron but shifting between forms that quickly would exhaust me.

I groaned. " How am I supposed to break this crate?"

" Roll into it."

I blinked at Her Highness. " Seriously?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " You didn't know that you could roll around as a human?"

" I never thought of it until you brought it up."

" Well, now's your chance to try it out, Sunset." Twilight said. " And you'd better be quick about it as another ghost is approaching the barn from behind. In fact, it's going to get there in the next fifteen seconds!"

How could a ghost have gotten that close? I didn't have time to break the crate since Apple Bloom's life was in danger. I turned and ran over to the ghost before stopping right in front of it, and gazing into its expressionless face. It was truly the stuff of nightmares. Nothing like this existed in Equestria and yet here it was before me. It attempted to attack me using its talons although I jumped back and fired an arrow that sailed past it.

" I've only got three arrows left!"

" Make it count quickly!" Twilight shouted. " The other ghosts are getting closer!"

" Huh?" I turned around and saw that they were getting close, yet I couldn't deal with them until I had taken care of this other one. " AH!" The ghost before me scratched my shoulders with a powerful strike all because I turned my attention away from it, but before it had the chance to do anything else, I fired another arrow--at point-blank range--destroying the ghost although now my shoulder was now throbbing with pain. " Crap! My shoulder's hurt!"

" Are you alright?"

I checked to see if it was bleeding and I was fortunate that it wasn't. " I'm not dripping blood but it feels like my shoulder got hit by a stone slab." I had no time to complain about an injury as the other ghosts had now gotten even closer. I ran back and fired my final arrow at the closest ghost although I struggled to aim because of the pain from my shoulder. " I'll have to bear this pain until the sun comes up."

" Normally, I'd be against such reckless behaviour." Twilight said. " But, in this case I agree with you. Those ghosts won't wait for your injury to heal so you'll need to keep on going for just a while longer. If I have my calculations correct, you need to last about another fifteen minutes at the most."

While it was reassuring to know that this nightmare was almost over, I was feeling an incredible amount of pressure due to needing to be in so many places at once. I ran back to the crate and rolled into it, smashing it into pieces, revealing an assortment of arrows. Picking up enough until my quiver was full up, I looked ahead and saw that the ghosts were now mere feet away from reaching the barn.

The ones at the front began to use their talons in their effort to get me out of the way, but I held my ground and fired a slew of arrows, picking them off one by one. As each one vanished in a puff of smoke, more appeared in the same location and were grouping together with the ones in the rear who were now moving up to the front. I got rid of them with more arrows, pushing the line back, yet the same result occurred with more appearing.

I was about to fire my bow when one of the ghosts got me in the shoulder again, resulting in me dropping my bow. " This isn't working! There are too many of them!" I reached down to pick my bow up only to be scratched again. " If this keeps up, we're going to be swamped!" Despite the incredible pain now coursing through my shoulder, I gritted my teeth and continued firing arrows, defeating more ghosts only for them to be replaced yet again.

" Sunset... You need to fall back." Twilight said. " If you can get some distance between us and them, you should be able to even the playing field."

I winced. " I don't know if my shoulder can take it."

" Do you want to die?"

I shook my head. " No! Of course not!"

" Then fall back, Sunset."

Princess Twilight was right. I needed to fall back otherwise I'd just be throwing my life away, and Apple Bloom would never forgive me for my actions. I began walking backwards until my back connected to the side of the barn. The ghosts continued advancing so sighing, I resumed firing arrows at them although my aim was now really bad thanks to my shoulder causing so much pain for me. I did manage to pick off a couple who were within range including another one that was trying to sneak around from behind the house.

That's when I suddenly realized that Epona was still over by the stable. I thought she was going to be abducted, or worse killed, but the ghosts simply ignored her as though she didn't exist in their eyes. Did I have enough time to play her song and call her over to my side? No. They would reach the barn before Epona could gallop over and I didn't want to risk getting her hurt. I looked up at the sky and noticed that it was starting to get brighter, the sun was beginning to rise, but it wasn't rising fast enough. I had about ten seconds before I would be swamped by these ghosts. It looked like I failed in Apple Bloom's time of need.

" What can we do?"

" I'm all out of ideas." Twilight answered. " All we can do is watch them enter the barn."

" And Apple Bloom?"

" We should tell her to run."

" She won't abandon the cows."

" If those ghosts take her then she'll end up just like she the last time we were here."

" I see your point." I said." Twilight... You go inside and tell Apple Bloom to get out while she can. I'll see what I can do to hold them off before I have to make a run for it too. No need for any of us to succumb to them even though the cows will ultimately suffer because I couldn't protect them from this invasion."

Her Highness protested my decision for a moment before realizing there was no other choice. She turned and was about to head into the barn by flying through a small crack in a nearby window, when all of a sudden, the ghosts started disappearing into puffs of smoke. One after another, they disappeared leaving no traces of their presence, and the ball of light they used to materialize down onto the field began flying away. Just like that, everything was peaceful and quiet.

What in the world just happened? Why did they leave like that? They were on the verge of victory and they just upped and left. My first reaction involved dropping to my knees, then my hands, and finally breathing heavily, sweat dripping onto the ground from my brow. We had somehow managed to survive the ordeal by the skin of our teeth, yet something about it didn't seem right. Was this a brief pause in their attack? Would I soon have to face another group? Or was it really over?

Chapter 33: Bandits of the Night

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 7, 2016
Chapter 33: Bandits of the Night.

I had no idea what was going to happen next. How could I? I spent the last several hours fending off a slew of ghosts that continued to spawn in every time one was defeated, and now things were quiet upon the light that brought them having left just like it came. Had I won? It did seem like it although I couldn't tell for certain. If my experience with the bow hadn't improved since my previous journey, the ghosts would've swarmed the barn and Apple Bloom wouldn't be in there right now with the cows. She would've been abducted by them if what she said was accurate.

To think that she didn't really do anything despite saying she intended on protecting the cows. I was starting to see that Apple Bloom possessed a lot of courage for someone her age, yet courage alone wasn't going to do much unless there was an effort to fight back. Given she was struggling with hitting the balloon she had set up by the house when I arrived--I knew this was the case since she didn't use arrows--she needed help because she just couldn't do it on her own. Had Applejack been more willing to listen instead of brushing off her sister's concern, she could've helped to save the cows without me needing to get involved.

Still, I wouldn't have abandoned Apple Bloom in her time of need. For one thing, that wasn't really the heroic thing to do, to turn your back on someone who truly needed help to resolve a problem beyond their understanding. And the other was that I would be reminded of who I used to be before I learned about the Magic of Friendship.

When I was a bully, I never helped out anyone unless I could benefit from it somehow. In my heart, if I didn't get anything out of it, that person's problem was just a big waste of my time that could be spent on further building up my influence over the student body. On the off-chance that a problem came up that I could benefit from, I had Snips and Snails do my dirty work for me and reap the rewards when it was done. The only time I ever personally got my hands dirty to help someone deal with a problem was when they practically begged me to help them take of something.

Looking back on it all now, I am reminded of just how much of a jerk I really was.

" That was a pretty intense situation." Twilight said. " For a moment, it looked like those ghosts were going to win, but we were lucky that the sun started to come up. My guess is they don't particularly enjoy the light hence why they only appear at night."

I was still sweating buckets. " I've never been so close to being overwhelmed like that before."

" But you handled yourself pretty well, Sunset."

" Believe me, Twilight." I said, sweat continuing to trickle onto the grass after falling off my chin. " I was an absolute wreck at the end as everything just went completely beyond my means to control it. I mean, just look at my condition!" Her Highness floated down next to me and noticed how intense my dripping sweat had gotten. " I've seen some pretty intense things doing this, but never anything like what we just experienced. If I hadn't been prepared, I might have died here."

" You can relax now as it's over."

I shook my head. " This is only the beginning. When I was journeying around Hyrule, I didn't notice it at first but things continued to get difficult the closer I got to saving that world from Ganondorf's tyrannical reign. My body, mind, and spirit were tested in ways that you'd never see back home in Equestria. From what I've been taking from this world apart from some of the more absurd things, it's going to get harder from this point onward." I finally managed to get back onto my feet and wiped away the sweat dripping down my brow. It felt disgusting--as to be expected--wiping off my own sweat, but I needed to regain my composure.

" A shame we can't just stop." Twilight said. " I'll admit that things are getting too intense for me. Me! The Princess of Friendship! I'm supposed to be the guiding type who can help ponies understand things, yet all I've managed to do is worry myself sick over what you've been doing."

" The role of a heroine is never easy."

" It makes me wish you didn't have to do it."

" Fate can be rather cruel, Twilight." I said. " To be fair, I never really wanted to do any of this. I just wanted to live my life as a normal teenager--as normal as one with magical powers can get--and visit the land of my birth at a time I felt was right for me. If I could go back in time and change it so that I wouldn't be here, I'd do it in a heartbeat."

" Sunset..."

" But, I know that this is what I have to do."

" All because of that strange mark that appeared on the back of your hand." Twilight said. " I think whatever that was has forced you into continuing down this path eternally until you finally reach the end."

The moment Princess Twilight mentioned it, I looked down at the back of my hand out of fear that perhaps the Mark of the Triforce would appear again just like it had done before against Ganondorf. To my relief, it didn't appear although my conflict against the Dark Lord wasn't the only time it appeared.

During the months leading up to the Friendship Games, there were times when the mark would appear, and I had to secretly hide it in case anyone got too suspicious. I knew back then that I should've been more open about it and told my friends that what happened actually did, but I knew they wouldn't believe me. At the time, they struggled coming to terms regarding magic and their ability to use it. I didn't want anymore pressure to be placed on them given what we had been through, so I chose to remain silent and deal with the problem of the Triforce mark on my own.

In hindsight, I was afraid of them knowing the truth. Perhaps I underestimated their ability to understand.

Turning towards Her Highness, I spoke up in case she thought I was daydreaming again. " All I know is that the mark represents the Triforce of Courage, and that it exists inside of me for reasons I still don't quite understand. It's difficult for me to explain since no one else in my life has ever experienced having a powerful force inside them."

" I have--" Twilight began. " I once had the magic of the alicorns within me."

" I remember you telling me story." I said. " I can't believe you didn't succumb due to having so much magic."

" My mental focus was stronger than most."

" No kidding!"

" The point is that you're not the only one to have gone through such a thing, Sunset. I've been there and I had to keep it a secret from my friends in order to protect them, and also because they would never understand. It's ironic when you think about it. Twilight Sparkle is learning from you about what happened to her and you are learning from me due to what I experienced before returning to stop the Sirens." Twilight said.

" Yet you don't have that power now." I said, sighing. " Besides, what you had was nothing compared to the power of the Triforce. I possess an essence of a goddess if I remember how the legend went. I'm not able to control that power freely since it's all still confusing to me, but should I unleash it without warning, there's no telling what can happen. You could say that I'm a ticking time bomb."

Princess Twilight then floated up to my cheek before pressing her tiny frame against it. I knew she was trying to comfort me and I appreciated her concern, yet what dwelled within me was something not even Princess Celestia herself would be able to comprehend. The only one who knew anything about the Triforce piece in me was Ganondorf himself, and I suspected he wanted me to turn to him in hopes of making me his devoted servant. No wonder he was so manipulative. He could bring about the destruction of an entire kingdom just by working in the shadows until all of the pieces were in place.

No matter what, I couldn't allow him to coerce me into embracing the power that once filled my heart. I became a monster once all for the sake of power, and that was something I don't want to go through ever again for the rest of my life. At the same time, I was aware of the fact that I was a tainted being. Because I had tasted evil when I became a she-demon, it never fully disappeared when the Magic of Friendship became part of me. No doubt Twilight Sparkle will start to go through a similar experience once it becomes clear to her.

" Is it safe ta come out now?" A voice called out from the other side of the barn door. It was Apple Bloom's voice and she sounded worried. " It's gotten awful quiet out there. Are y'all okay, Grasshopper?"

I nodded my head. " Everything's fine out here."

The barn door opened slowly and Apple Bloom stood there before me. " What? Y'all thought I was gonna swing it open or somethin'? Don't be daft! Cremia is still sleepin' and I reckon somethin' as simple as the barn door openin' up will get her down here faster than Mamamu Yan's dogs chowin' down!" Apple Bloom noticed the lack of ghosts around and then looked at a few scorched marks left behind. " Guess mah sister might ask us why the grass has been burnt, but I'm sure she'll be wantin' ta focus on what's really important now. I hope she allows me ta come along this time."

" What is doing that's important?"

" Ever heard of the Milk Bar in Clock Town?" Apple Bloom asked. " It's a buildin' located on the east side that serves milk and other beverages."

I nodded my head. " I heard your sister mention it earlier."

" That place orders milk from this here ranch every month, but they haven't had a shipment come fer quite some time since that boulder blocked the way. Mah sister is gonna attempt to make a delivery so that we can earn some money and the Milk Bar can finally sell Chateau Romani again."

" Chateau Romani?"

Apple Bloom gasped in response. " Y'all tellin' me you ain't ever heard of Chateau Romani?"

" I think your sister mentioned it."

" Ah, shoot!" Apple Bloom cursed, stomping her foot on the ground several times. " I told mah sister that her sales pitch weren't good, yet she chose ta ignore me all because I wouldn't understand how business works." She continued throwing her tantrum before finally calming down. " Chateau Romani is the ranch's pride and joy, but only adults are allowed ta taste its goodness fer themselves. Cremia says it can give ya more magic power, but no one has ever experienced it after drinkin' some. If y'all are thinkin' of gettin' some fer yourself, ya best be willin' ta fork over a lot of rupees as it ain't cheap."

" How much?"

" 200 rupees." Apple Bloom answered. " At the Milk Bar but I ain't got a clue fer around here."

My jaw dropped in response. 200 rupees!? That was the most I could fit into my wallet. In order to experience the magic of Chateau Romani, I would need to give up every last rupee leaving me with none that could be used for other purchases. Unless I could get my hands on an even bigger wallet, this was a beverage that I couldn't afford as the steep price was just too much to bear. I suspected other people couldn't afford it given the price, but perhaps it was possible for me to receive some Chateau Romani as a gift from someone else? The chances of that happening were slim at best so there was no sense in keeping my hopes up.

Looking back at Apple Bloom, I noticed that she was holding a bottle in her hands that contained a white liquid. She noticed that I was looking in her direction and quickly hid it behind her back before whistling. I rolled my eyes over the obvious thought process that was going on in her mind. Apple Bloom had either snuck out some Chateau Romani for herself or had intentions of giving it to me for saving the cows.

I lurched forward slightly. " What have you got there?"

" I got so caught up with talkin' 'bout Chateau Romani that I plumb forgot about ya." Apple Bloom answered. " We did it... We won! But, I know that y'all did all the work while I hid in the barn cause I'm not a heroine like you. Guess I'm too big fer my britches, like mah sister keeps tellin' me, but I needed ta do somethin' to protect the cows. I want ta say thank you for what you did tonight. Thanks ta you, the cows are givin' thanks, too!"

" You didn't answer my question."

" I was gettin' ta that."

" Oh."

" Anyway, here's Romani's thanks." Apple Bloom said, handing over the bottle to me. " When you drink it, put yer hand on yer hip and take a big gulp like we do here at the ranch, and yer don't stop till the milk's all gone from the bottle." I thought it contained Chateau Romani instead of regular milk, but the important thing was that it was my third bottle. With it, I could fill it up with other things that took my fancy. I made sure not to express dissatisfaction in case Apple Bloom thought I was being grateful.

" This will help me immensely." I said. " Thank you."

Apple Bloom bowed slightly before turning her attention to the house. " It's almost time for mah sister to get up, so I have ta get back to bed before she discovers that I'm out here talkin' to ya. She can be rather uptight much to mah annoyance but what can ya do?" She started to walk towards the house only to stop at the door and look back at me. " Why don't y'all come inside and warm up? Reckon it would do ya a world o' good seein' as the night was pretty dern cold."

" Won't Cremia find it odd that I was suddenly in your house seeing as I wasn't there last night?"

" Yeah... I do get what you're sayin'."

" Besides, I'd rather stay out here."

" Really? Why would ya want ta do that?"

" I've... I've never really had a home of my own compared to most other people. I do have a living arrangement back where I come from, but only a select few know about that. It doesn't bother me personally if they were to find out, but someone I know insisted that it remain secretive. When I'm not there surrounded by what I love, I usually sleep outside or inside so long as I don't get in the way." I answered.

" I weren't expectin' that." Apple Bloom said. " Well, if ya change yer mind, just knock quietly on the door. I'll let you in and you can sleep by the fireplace. If mah sister asks why yer in the house, just leave it ta me to explain things to her. Anyway, I need ta get back to bed. See you later... Little heroine." Without another word, she quietly opened the door, walked inside, and closed it again.

Princess Twilight then bopped me on the head. " Why didn't you want to go inside?"

" I didn't want to act like I was intruding or something."

" Yes, I suppose that's one way to look at it." Twilight said. " Although you could do with better sleeping arrangements. Some of the previous ones haven't exactly been stellar but then we've had to make do with what we were given."

" I'm not sure if sleeping will be an issue."

" What do you mean?"

I took out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch. " Since we finally know how to manipulate time without having to reset, we could always skip ahead so that we don't have to wait for certain events to occur. Sleeping was the only reason I had to pass the time while waiting for things to happen."

" You still need sleep, Sunset." Twilight said. " Using the ocarina like that doesn't grant you immunity from what your body needs. You're still human and that means you have to accept certain limitations even when you don't enjoy having to experience them. Me? Since I'm a fairy in this world, I don't have those limitations although I choose to go through with them on your behalf."

" Guess you have a point."

" And you also want to avoid Ganondorf for now, don't you?"

I gasped. " How did you know?"

" I heard what he said about you having to face him again within your subconscious." Twilight answered. " I personally wouldn't get too worked up over that, but then I'm not in your shoes, Sunset, so I have no idea how it's affecting you mentally. But what I do know is that you can't allow it to consume your thoughts. Ganondorf seems to be the type of person who enjoys manipulating others without even lifting a finger. If he believes that he can control every action that you make, then he will have won before anything even happened. If he gets to you then you're nothing but a puppet to him."

Her Highness made a valid point even if her words were more harmful than helpful. I just had to accept the fact that Ganondorf was going to force me into fighting him again despite me not wanting to go through with it. I had no idea when he was going to initiate our next contest nor knew what kind of stipulations he would use in his favour, but I had to remain strong and continue my struggle in saving Termina and finding a way to change it back to the world that I called home.

There was something Ganondorf said that had been bothering me for a while. Why did he want to fight me again within my subconscious? He was obviously far stronger than I could ever hope to be--not that I cared about gaining power--so why not continue down that path and prove himself superior that way? Why rely on using the dream world? I could easily use it to my advantage given how in dreams, anything was possible, yet Ganondorf's power was still a mystery to me. He had been holding back more than he was letting on judging from what I experienced in our previous contest, yet I suspected that he possessed even greater strength.

I didn't want to admit this to Princess Twilight, but he could easily conquer Equestria without lifting a finger. If his true power was far greater than what appearances suggested, combined with the divine might of the Triforce, no pony would be able to oppose him. Princess Celestia and Princess Luna would fall before his might. Not even Discord, the Spirit of Chaos would last long enough against one who possessed an artefact that had existed since the very beginning. Discord might last longer than most but in the end, Ganondorf would prevail and use his power to make Equestria his domain, or destroy it if he felt it wasn't worth his time.

Looking up at the sky, I saw that the second day was about to make itself known, yet I needed some sleep. Defending the cows from those ghosts took an awful lot out of me despite them ultimately retreating, and I needed to be prepared since I felt that Applejack would require my help later on when she does that delivery of hers.

I walked over and into the stable before slumping up against the wall and slowly drifted off to sleep. As my eyes closed, I saw Epona trotting over to me, lying down by my side, and began to sleep as well. It felt nice knowing that she was once again by my side after having spent so long in a place that was foreign to her. I had a hunch that she was going to be essential when it came to exploring the remaining regions of Termina. Also, she could give me an edge against the Gorman Sisters since they were horse breeders.

Sometime in the past...

" You wanted to see me, ma'am?"

" I did, Derpy!" Rainbow Dash answered. " I just wanted to go over with you the objective of your mission before you leave." Rainbow Dash then turned and began yelling at a group of pirate who were transporting some building supplies, ordering them that they needed to go faster. " Damn! I can't believe our fortress is in need of repair all because that masked one had to demonstrate her power. We should be stealing treasures from beyond Great Bay, not materials necessary to rebuild."

" Everything is under control, ma'am." Derpy said. " We'll steal the eggs when the Zoras aren't looking and come back with them."

" Do you really think it's going to be that simple?"

Derpy nodded her head. " We're good at what we do so it won't be a problem."

Rainbow Dash rubbed the bridge of her nose while groaning. " Did you really just say that to me, Derpy? Do you have any idea how stupid that approach of yours is? Of course the Zoras will know that you're coming seeing as we've been pillaging from their home, Zora Hall, for the last couple of months." The lack of a response from her second-in-command caused her face to turn red with anger, but she quickly calmed down after remembering that this was Derpy. " Look, that Zora hero will most likely catch you if you just waltz in there without a plan and will run you out of there before you even know what's happening."

" Why is he the only one who gives us trouble?"

" Because he's a fighter unlike the rest of them."

" I know what you mean." Derpy said. " Those martial arts moves combined with those fins of his have thwarted our efforts most of the time. Whenever he shows up, we know our plans are sunk as he pursues after us until he gets back what we stole."

" At least you remember those tricks of his."

" What can we do, Aveil?"

" That's why we're talking to each other, Derpy." Rainbow Dash answered, slapping her forehead. " Gah! I'm starting to regret making you my second-in-command, but no one else possessed the instinct that you have." Before she continued speaking to Derpy, Rainbow barked more orders at the other pirates, each of them saluted nervously before running off to carry out her instructions. " It feels good being in charge and yelling at my underlings to get things done. If not for me, this place would've fallen apart years ago. Now then, where were we again?"

" My mission, ma'am?"

" Oh yeah! Just sneaking into Zora Hall like we usually do won't work this time." Rainbow Dash answered. " We need to come up with another tactic, one that will give us the element of surprise, a tactic they will ever suspect."

" I'm all out of ideas."

" You haven't even thought of any yet!"

" Oops, my bad." Derpy said. She then noticed Rainbow Dash's eye twitching indicating that she was about to let loose her anger once again. Derpy began sweating droplets down her face knowing that she was already treading on thin ice but then something stirred within her memory. " I told the others to build a tunnel that goes underneath Zora Hall. They weren't eager about it so I gave them some motivation."

" Did you just say... Build a tunnel!?" Rainbow Dash asked. Derpy nodded resulting in Rainbow's face turning bright red again--brighter than it was before--and pulling on her hair for a few moments. " What in the world were you thinking!? No wonder our resources and women power has been shoddy! You've been making them build an underwater tunnel? We could've used those resources to further line our pockets with rupees!" It then dawned on her that Derpy had built a tunnel beneath Zora Hall. " You do realize that you've had our girls build a path under the ocean, right? All of that pressure on the tunnel must have caused a cave-in or a flood at the very least."

Derpy shook her head. " Nope! There were no problems, ma'am."

" I find that hard to believe."

" The tunnel has been in the works for a year and was only finished just last week."

Rainbow Dash's eyes perked up. " A year? A year!? You've been working on that for an entire year!? Gah! I don't believe this!" Again, she pulled on her hair but stopped when she realized that Derpy mentioned the tunnel was finished just recently. " Hold on... You and the others seriously worked on it for so long?"

" We did, ma'am."

" Huh... Consider me impressed, but are you sure it's sturdy enough?"

Derpy nodded. " I made sure to tell everyone to reinforce the foundations so that it would prevent any accidents. I also had them dig a few metres below the bottom of the ocean just in case the water would leak through after a while."

" So it can be used?"

" Yes, ma'am."

Rainbow Dash then suddenly wrapped her arms around Derpy and gave her a big hug. " Derpy... I... I had you all wrong. I know you test my patience because of how ditzy you can get, but you certainly know how to surprise me with your brilliance. This tunnel of yours has just given us the perfect means of slipping past the Zoras--especially him--and will make your mission all the more simpler. You do remember what it is we need to get, right?"

" Of course I remember." Derpy answered. " We need the Zora Eggs."

" Good! You were paying attention after all."

" Ma'am?"

" Here's what you and the others are going to do." Rainbow Dash said. " When the sun goes down in a few hours, I want you to use that tunnel, sneak into Zora Hall, find those eggs, and bring them back here without fail. As long as you don't mess up, the Zoras won't even know what happened until it's too late." Rainbow then looked at Derpy for several seconds before shivering on the spot. " Then again, I'm expecting there will be problems so I'll make sure to have a suitable distraction." She breathed a sigh of relief knowing that everything was finally working out. " Whew! Glad that's taken care of. You know what to do, yes?"

" Affirmative, ma'am!"

" Then you leave tonight!"

Dawn of the Second Day - 39 Hours Remain.

By the time I finally woke up--Ganondorf didn't plague me in my dreams so that was a relief--the first thing I did was whinny at Epona who responded in kind. She got onto her legs, stretched before shaking her head and stood there waiting most likely for me to climb onto her. It felt unusual to ride around on her now that she was much younger than before and I hadn't changed at all. When I rode on Epona during my previous journey, I felt a rush that I never knew existed until I climbed onto that saddle for the very first time. I felt like I was the one galloping around without a care in the world. Now? Now it felt completely different compared to before.

Was it because she wasn't the same Epona? I mean, the one next to me and the one who galloped across Hyrule Field were one and the same, yet I felt that Epona wasn't the same horse due to being a filly instead of a steed. It wouldn't change my opinion that her presence by my side would make things easier, but I had to wonder if she would have been better off back at Lon Lon Ranch until she had grown up a little. Now I that thought about it, why was she with me when I was first sent here? The last time I saw Epona, she was left behind at the entrance to the destroyed Hyrule Castle Town.

That was in the future, of course. In the present day, she was still at the ranch but somehow I ended up taking ownership of her. If I had taken the liberty of having prior knowledge as to how this video game began, I wouldn't be confused over how Epona was here with me. It wasn't her fault that she ended up being trapped in this doomed world. No, that blame lies on my hands and I had to ensure that she returned safely to where she belonged--although that might not be easy as I think Epona doesn't want to be separated from me after what happened with Starlight.

My thought process suddenly got interrupted by the sound of someone or something inside the barn. I got up and was about to check it out when Epona nudged me in the back with her muzzle prompting me to whinny in response telling her that I needed to know what that was. She whinnied before lowering her head so that she could chew on some grass while I resumed walking over to the barn. When I arrived, I could hear two voices coming from inside along with the sounds of cows mooing every now and again.

Opening the barn door, I stepped inside only to be confronted by Applejack. " Oh my... Hello. I weren't expectin' you ta appear in the doorway. In fact, I'm surprised y'all decided ta spend the night here at Romani Ranch."

" I needed to take care of some business."

" What kind of business?"

I looked at Apple Bloom who gave me a panicked expression signalling that she didn't want Applejack to find out. " I was checking on something I thought would be essential to my journey but it ended up being a false sense of hope."

" Sorry yer search didn't reap you any rewards, sugarcube." Applejack said. She was finishing milking a cow before pouring the contents of a bucket into a container and sealing it tightly with a lid while looking proud of her accomplishment. " I was thinkin' 'bout somethin'. Since the entrance to the ranch has finally opened up again, I was thinkin' of going to town to deliver some much needed milk to the Milk Bar. How would y'all like a ride?

" Romani's goin' to take our milk to Clock Town, too." Apple Bloom said.

" No, yer not!" Applejack shouted sternly. " You're lookin' after the place! The cows would be all alone otherwise."

" Why can't I come with ya? You know I won't misbehave when it comes ta yer deliveries."

" I said you weren't comin', Romani, and that's that! Have I made myself clear?"

" YES, sister!"

Applejack then turned towards me again. " I'm mighty sorry 'bout that little display y'all just witnessed. Romani likes to think that she's mature enough to go with me, but doesn't realize that she ain't quite all grown up yet. It's like I keep on tellin' her, she's gettin' too big fer her britches." She placed the container of milk on a shelf along with two other containers that had probably been there for a while. " I'll be leavin' about 6 o'clock this evening, so y'all can join me if you'd like."

" I'm thinking of sticking around here for a while." I said. " What else is there to do around here besides speaking with you two?"

" Most people who come here do so to taste some of our prized Chateau Romani." Applejack answered. " If that ain't yer thing then I suggest payin' a visit to either Grog who resides in the Cucco Shack just beyond the house, or Mamamu Yan at the Doggy Racetrack on the other end of the ranch."

Thanking Applejack for the suggestion and agreeing to her request of hitching a ride with her, I was just about to leave when Apple Bloom tugged on my tunic and pulled me over so that her sister wouldn't hear us. " It just ain't fair! Romani knows she can help with the delivery, yet my mah sister just don't see that! Sometimes, I hate bein' the younger sister 'cause I never get ta do anything I want, but reckon there's nothin' I can do 'bout it. Anyway, thanks for helping last night. The cows are doin' well thanks to you. And they're putting out a lot of milk!"

" I'm glad to hear that."

Apple Bloom then quickly looked to make sure Applejack still couldn't hear us before continuing. " About last night... It's a secret from mah sister. I don't wanna worry her and besides, it's not like she's gonna believe a word I say. Y'all can see what she's like just by lookin' at her mannerisms alone." She sighed heavily. " Listen, Grasshopper! Romani is lookin' after things despite complainin' 'bout it. Now that we chased them ghosts away, things are safe. Mah sister don't need ta know at all! Hey, can I ask you to help next yea..." She suddenly cut herself off as though she had something else up her sleeve.

Was she about to say something about me helping out next year? " Um, what were you about to say?"

" I know, Grasshopper! Why don't y'all just live at the ranch?"

I almost fell over upon hearing her suggest that. What was she thinking, asking me to live here? For one thing, I couldn't stay here because I still needed to rescue the remaining giants, save this world, and find out how to change things back to the way they were before Ganondorf showed up. Second, Apple Bloom wasn't aware that things weren't meant to be this way so her idea of me coming back next year wasn't feasible.

I was also starting to see some familiarity between Apple Bloom and her sister even though neither of them would understand if I told them. In the world I called home, the two sisters cared for each other very much, yet allowed tensions to get in the way of their family bond. Apple Bloom was often the catalyst of such misunderstandings yet Applejack was just as guilty so it wasn't always one-sided. Seeing them in this world, like they were, reminded me of good times after I understood friendship.

Apple Bloom was beginning to daydream, thinking about me living at Romani Ranch, yet I knew that I had to crush her hopes. " Listen, uh... Romani. While I do appreciate the offer of wanting me to live here, I'm afraid that just isn't possible. I can't be tied down around here as there are other things I must take care of first. Ummm... Hello? Are you even listening to me here?"

" I'll lend ya Romani's bed." Apple Bloom said. I slapped my forehead. She wasn't listening and now she was thinking about lending me her bed. I couldn't stick around in the barn anymore so slowly, I began to shuffle towards the door only for Apple Bloom to stop me by grabbing my tunic again. " My sister will be happy, too! It's a great plan! I just know it is and that means it's decided! You're our bodyguard, Grasshopper, so y'all have to practice hard!" By that point, she had lost complete interest in me and was in her own little world allowing me the chance to slip outside without her noticing.

Once I was back outside, I began to breath heavily before shaking my head. " That suddenly got really awkward."

" I know what you mean." Twilight said. " I think she was getting a little too personal."

" It's like she thought I was someone else."

" Well, you shouldn't let her words frighten you, Sunset."

" Yeah, considering there is far worse waiting for us."

" We've got less than three hours to go before Applejack leaves for Clock Town." Twilight said. " That is enough time for us to check out one of the two places she suggested for us to visit before nightfall. The question though is, which one should we check?"

" I was thinking of the Cucco Shack."

" Really?"

I nodded my head. " I know dogs are adorable and all, but they are pretty common critters compared to Cuccos."

" Okay, then we'll head on over to the Cucco Shack."

Fortunately, the location wasn't that far away and it was obvious as to which one was the Cucco Shack. One sign above a door depicted an image of a Cucco while a sign above a second door depicted an outline of a dog's head. I walked over to the closest door, opened it up, and went inside to reveal something I definitely wasn't expecting.

The Cucco Shack wasn't what I thought it was--I thought it was going to be the inside of a chicken coop like the kind you see on farms. It consisted of an enclosed field with several tree, shrubs, and other plants along with pieces of fence stuck in the ground. Compared to the main area of Romani Ranch, this placed looked peaceful as though nothing had ever caused any problems here.

I then noticed a large group of yellow chicks waddling around without any sense of direction. If Fluttershy were here right now, she would've bowled me over without a second thought just to fawn over the chicks like she were their mother. Sadly, she wasn't here due to being stuck inside of a temple--again the notion of resetting time weighed heavily on my heart--so it wasn't as exciting as it could have been. I was surprised that these chicks had so much room all to themselves considering how small they were. Why would they need so much space to begin with? It didn't make sense.

That's when I noticed someone sitting at the base of a tree in the middle of the field, their head held down low. At first, I thought they were sleeping and I considered waking them up in hopes of talking to them, but I quickly discovered that they were mumbling to themselves, eyes wide open. The figured was bare-chested, wore shorts, shoes, and socks, yet his most distinguishing feature was the crest of hair on top of his head. If I didn't know any better, it looked like the comb on top of a chicken's head.

When I walked closer to the figure, they lifted up their head and Her Highness was shocked at who it was. " I remember you! You're that dragon who gave Spike such a hard time and intimidated us during the dragon migration of Equestria and in the Dragon Kingdom during the Gauntlet of Fire trials. Garble... That was your name!"

" Huh? What the heck is a Garble? And what do you mean by dragons? There haven't been any dragons in Termina for centuries."

" Twilight..." I whispered. " This isn't someone you know from Equestria. I mean, it is but not like that."

" Something in my gut made me react like that."

" Why don't you let me handle this?" Her Highness nodded and I looked down at this Garble character. He certainly didn't look like a dragon although I could see some slight draconian traits such as his large eyebrows and well-built frame. " I apologize for how my friend treated you."

Garble sighed. " It's no big deal. Nothing at this point really matters."

" What do you mean?"

" I heard it from my gramps. Says the moon's gonna fall." Garble answered. " People back in town haven't begun to panic yet and are going about their business like nothing's happening, but come tomorrow, they will be running for the hills in hopes of avoiding the impending doom."

" You know about the moon?"

Garble mustered a tiny chuckle before resuming his moping. " The other day it was small up there and now it's gotten bigger. With somethin' that big, it's sure to take this ranch down with it... Hahhh... Oh, well. I might as well introduce myself and explain what I do around here. My name is Grog and I'm the only Cucco wrangler around here. The owner's father hired me years ago when Cuccos started becoming prevalent, but as you can see, it's not been a positive experience."

" They seem fine to me." I said. " You should be proud of having ten chicks."

" That's the problem!" Garble said. " I was hoping for them to have grown up by now and become roosters. With the moon falling and things continuing to get worse and worse, it's becoming worse and worse without any signs of improvement. My only regret is that I won't get to see these guys in their prime as roosters."

" Can I do something to help?"

Garble shook his head. " Unless you could make a miracle and make them grow up, there's nothing you can do."

From what I took of Garble and his attitude, he had lost the will to live and was generally being negative. I guessed that the world's fate had affected him in a way that most were either ignorant towards or didn't want the impending doom to affect them. In his heart, he no longer had a purpose and was willing to wait for the end. A part of me wanted to tell him that he was wrong yet I knew all that would do was make him feel even worse.

Looking at his chicks, they were carefree compared to him, but on occasion they would look up at me like they were wondering why he was upset. Garble didn't realize that his attitude was affecting them negatively. Even if they did grow up in time before the moon destroyed everything, that negativity would still be plaguing them, they would still be concerned for him and that might cause problems in the future. In order to solve Garble's problem, I needed to get his chicks to grow up quickly, but I didn't have the means to do that.

" What can we do?" I asked. " Unless you can somehow conjure up a growing up spell, I don't think we can help him."

Princess Twilight thought for a moment before coming up with an idea. " You might actually have the solution on hand, but we would need to know the correct method otherwise it would be nothing but a pointless gesture."

" Really? I have something?"

" Do you remember talking to Discord a long time ago?"

I nodded. " Yeah, I remember that. He talked about being part of an animal troupe before he joined Gorman's Troupe."

" He also gave you a mask as thanks for listening to him."

I reached behind my back and pulled out the Bremen Mask before looking at it. " He said that he didn't need this anymore after he stole it from some dog. Are you saying that this mask could help us figure out Garble's problem?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " Discord said that the leader of the animal troupe was a dog whose younger members were able to mature under his guidance. I've got a feeling that the dog used the power contained within the Bremen Mask, and you can use that to help out Garble."

" Are you sure about that?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Of course I am! Just put on the mask and see if anything happens."

Against my better judgment, I placed the Bremen Mask on my face. It only covered my eyes and my cheeks so it wasn't anything unusual, although the bird-like features might prove to be off-putting. " So far, nothing is happening." I said. Her Highness told me to walk forward and see if the chicks would pay attention, so I did yet they didn't notice and continued frolicking about although Garble did give me a puzzled look before resuming his moping. " This isn't working, Twilight."

" Maybe you need to use something else with it?"

" Like what?"

" What about the ocarina?" Twilight asked. " Animals do love to hear music."

I took it out from my pouch and gazed at it. " Well... It's not like we have any other option." Placing it up to my lips, I began to play despite not knowing what song would work, but then something strange happened. The melody I played was one I didn't know, yet the chicks were immediately mesmerized by it and started to follow me around. Was this the power of the Bremen Mask? It must have been as there was no other possible explanation.

Not all of the chicks were following behind me as I played this strange melody--I had since started to walk around in a marching fashion--as some of them were located all across the field, so I had to continue playing even if it my lungs would get exhausted beyond reasoning. From my perspective, this was actually pretty fun and my problems seemed to have melted away, yet from the perspective of Garble, who was now looking at me, he was trying to figure out what I was doing. Princess Twilight also enjoyed listening to the melody and was even dancing along to it much to my surprise.

Soon, more chicks began to follow my song in a straight line and I began to count them off just to see how many there were. So far, I had managed to round up at least six of them yet I could hear the sounds of additional chicks coming from various nooks scattered about. One chick was hiding underneath a fence and refused to budge as though it were afraid to come out of hiding, but my melody was able to convince it to come along and join the line just like the others had done.

If there was one thing about the melody that annoyed me, it was the fact that it was too short. It would loop back to the beginning after about twelve seconds and unless you were a huge of it, it would get really grating after hearing it for the tenth time or so. But, I persevered since I was doing this for Garble's benefit more than anything else.

After picking up a ninth little chick, I thought that there was no more of them left, but I was surprised when a tenth one suddenly emerged from behind Garble's leg and joined in the line marching at the rear. For those next few moments, the chicks followed me around in their hypnotized state while I continued playing the melody, and everything was going fine until something else started to happened.

The first chick that had followed me suddenly poofed into a puff of smoke--I almost stopped playing because of that--but when the smoke cleared, it had somehow transformed into a full-sized rooster, an adult Cucco. The Bremen Mask had the power to make young animals grow up instantly and literally, and here I thought it was just a bird-faced mask that was used to represent leadership. Soon more chicks began to change indicating that I had to keep going, so I continued playing although my lungs felt like they were about to collapse due to so much pressure being placed on them.

Once the final chick had become an adult, they all crowed together and I stopped playing where I slumped to the ground in exhaustion. " Gasp! That... took much longer... than I... was expecting... I don't ever... want to play that much without stopping... ever again..."

" Are you alright, Sunset?"

I tried to get up but to no avail. " I'm completely drained."

" Do you need a couple of minutes?"

" That would be nice."

Princess Twilight then began to take a closer look at the now adult Cuccos. " It's absolutely fascinating that they grew up just like that and all because of the power of a mask. I think collecting them has proven very useful despite knowing what awaits at the end upon getting them all. Still, these chicks, I mean... Cuccos... do seem to be perfectly fine despite the sudden growth spurt. Wouldn't such powerful magic like this be great in Equestria?"

" I wouldn't say it was magic." I answered. " The Bremen Mask possesses an unique ability that I don't think magic can replicate."

" That's a shame."

" Besides, it wouldn't be very natural to have fillies suddenly becoming mares and colts suddenly becoming stallions."

" That's true."

After a few minutes of resting, I finally got back onto my feet and put both the Bremen Mask and the Ocarina of Time away. " I hope that will make Garble happy knowing that he got to see his chicks grow up."

Garble's response was lacklustre to say the least, but he was still happy about it. " These guys are all roosters. Heh, heh! It's a miracle! I didn't think I'd live to see them all grow up before the moon falls." He turned towards me. " Did you do this?"

I nodded my head. " I used a mask to make them grow up."

" Really? Who would have thought that a mask would be able to make them become roosters." Garble said. " I may not look like it given my disposition and all, but you've really made my day here, kid, by using your powers. I don't really get it, but just seein' these guys with a crest and all... I don't have regrets about anythin' anymore. I'm perfectly satisfied."

" I'm glad to hear that."

" Here... You can have this from me..."

" I don't need a reward for doing a good deed."

Garble shook his head. " I insist that you take this as a sign of my gratitude. Besides, it will do you a lot of good better than it did me." He reached into a hole that was situated behind him in the tree he sat under, and took out something that I recognized from my previous journey. In his hand was a mask--it was actually a hood--that comprised of a pair of large ears that swayed about and the most adorable looking eyes you ever saw. " This is the Bunny Hood. I received a long time ago although I never could use the power it contains. If you were to wear this hood, you could run as fast as the legendary rabbits that used to exist in Termina.

" You think I could use its power?"

" I don't need to be convinced of that." Garble answered. " You proved it to me by helping me seeing these roosters in their prime. When the moon finally comes crashing down, I can die knowing that my heart has finally be healed of all the problems that were choking it." He then handed over the Bunny Hood before looking at his Cuccos. " You don't need to worry about me anymore. As long as I've got my roosters, I'll be ready to face the end."

Despite my heart wanting me to tell him that it wasn't going to be the end tomorrow night, I knew that I would be wasting my breath. When I eventually reset time, none of this would have ever happened and his Cuccos would be back to being little chicks again. Still, I felt proud knowing Garble no longer had any doubts in his heart. That was reward enough for me to be satisfied so after thanking him for the Bunny Hood, I left the Cucco Shack and noticed that the sun was beginning to set. Applejack said that she would be heading into town after the sun goes down to make a delivery. I had every intention of being there to ensure she would be successful.

It's not that I was doubting her abilities to do something she was obviously skilled at doing, but there were dark creatures lurking beyond Romani Ranch and she would have need of someone to protect her during the delivery run.

My first thought involved simply walking back over to the house, but then an idea struck my head and it involved what I had just picked up from Garble. Since there was no danger nearby, I could use this free moment to try out the Bunny Hood and see how it worked. I took it out from behind my back and put it on, the fuzzy ears waved about as a gentle breeze picked up. Just looking at how adorable this mask was made me blush yet Her Highness was curious as to what I was planning. I told her that I wanted to try out the Bunny Hood to see if Garble was telling us the truth and she agreed saying we wouldn't get another opportunity for a while.

I started to run forward at a brisk pace that suddenly turned into super speed to the point where I almost had no control over my movement. Skidding to a stop by planting my feet on the ground--and almost giving myself third degree burns--I tried running again and instead of another brisk pace, I ran faster although this time I had much better control. The only thing I needed to work on was coming to a stop, as I ended up smacking into the wall of the barn.

" Are you alright?" Twilight asked. " You hit that wall pretty hard."

I shook my head. " I wasn't running that fast, Twilight."

" Oh... Guess I overreacted, huh?"

" You think!?"

" It looks like the Bunny Hood does grant you an increase in speed so long as you wear it, but maybe it could increase the speed of your fighting style as well? We might need to have you conduct a couple of experiments to determine the full extent of that mask." Twilight said.

" I'll... Get back to you on that." I said. That's when I noticed a large wagon had been stationed just outside of the barn with a single horse hitched up to it. " Applejack must be getting ready to make her delivery."

" We got here just in time." Twilight said. " The sun is just about to go down for the night."

Night of the Second Day - 36 Hours Remain

I was actually expecting Applejack to be sitting up at the front ready to go, but she was no where to be found. Throughout the entire time I've known her, she had never once been non-punctual when it came to being on time. Then again, this was Termina and that meant Applejack wasn't the same person here as she was back home.

The sounds of arguing suddenly could be heard coming from inside, and it didn't take a genius to figure out that Applejack was arguing with Apple Bloom most likely over the latter not being allowed to come on the former's delivery to Clock Town. I could understand how Apple Bloom felt regarding this situation. She didn't want to be left out and forced to remain behind, yet it wasn't really my place to question the judgment of someone who knew what she was doing. I just hoped it wouldn't cause a rift between the two of them. In such dangerous times like this, those two needed each other now more than ever.

A few moments later, Applejack came out of the house, closed the door gently, and walked over to her wagon before climbing up into the front seat. That's when she noticed me standing nearby and almost got scared. " Oh... Good evenin'. I had a feelin' y'all were gonna be here."

" What happened in there?" I asked. " I could hear someone making a fuss."

Applejack sighed. " It's mah little sister, Romani. She kept on insistin' that I take her with me ta do mah delivery, but she just don't understand how dangerous it can be. It ain't safe outside the ranch what with those creatures runnin' 'bout especially at night."

" Then why are you going out so late?"

" What other choice do I have?" Applejack asked. " The Milk Bar has been needin' a delivery for some time now, and I've gotta try to get some milk there otherwise they'll go outta business which would also make me unreliable."

" I'm sorry to hear that."

No wonder Applejack seemed stressed out. She must have had a lot on her mind what with minding the ranch, looking after her sister, and dealing with important matters that pertain to the success of not just the ranch but other places as well. If those ghosts had succeeded in abducting all of the cows, I doubted Applejack would have been able to prevent her sanity from shattering to pieces.

" Sorry, sugarcube, but I can't afford ta continue chattin' with ya." Applejack said. " I've gotta leave to make mah delivery and get back here as soon as possible. I take it y'all wanna come along fer a ride? It ain't anythin' glamourous or such but this wagon will get us ta our destination." I nodded my head resulting in Applejack nodding in return and tilting her head to indicate I should climb onto the wagon. " That's great. Tonight I'm kind of lonely... I welcome company."

" Really? I thought maybe someone else aside from your sister would come with you."

" Fraid not." Applejack answered. " Grog has to take care of his Cuccos and Mamamu Yan doesn't enjoy goin' outside the ranch at night. If I could be honest with ya fer a moment, sugarcube, I'm a little worried about mah little sister. Leavin' her behind to take care of things ain't my cup of tea, but I've got no one else who knows how ta take care of the cows in the barn. She should be fine in the house, yet I can't stop worryin'."

" It shows you care."

" I just wish mah little sister would understand where I'm comin' from."

Applejack sighed, grabbed the reins, and whipped them making the horse start trotting along towards the entrance to the ranch. I took this time to look around the inside of the wagon and noticed that three containers of milk were behind me. I wasn't sure if three containers would be enough but then I had never visited the Milk Bar she mentioned earlier. She probably had more than enough to deliver although it looked like anyone could just come up from behind and grab them before she would even notice. Still, I felt bad for Applejack yet I couldn't really offer her any sympathy.

She was cheerful on the outside whenever she talked about her business as a ranch owner, but deep inside of her heart was a tormented individual who was struggling with all kinds of problems that were too much for her to handle.

After remaining silent for a while, Applejack finally broke her silence. " I guess it's been a while now since our father died. He was a great man who always made sure we had everythin' we needed, and he loved fawnin' over mah sister every chance he could, yet that illness o' his ultimately took him far too soon than anyone expected. Romani pretends that she has gotten over our father's death but I know better. She continues ta cry each and every night, wishin' he was still alive. If we could've found a cure for his illness, he'd still be with us and running things 'stead of me."

Her words had an air of dread surrounding them. In the world that I called home, Applejack and Apple Bloom had no parents but had their Granny Smith as a parental figure who looked after them and ran Sweet Apple Acres. She never liked talking about her parents as though she were trying to hide something from us, yet we never questioned her about in case we thought we were prying into a personal matter that was none of our business.

I guessed no matter what world they were in, the Apple sisters had to deal with tragedy in their lives. That's why they needed each other, to help them cope with something that was difficult for them to overcome and even more difficult for them to explain.

My heart wanted me to reach out and place my hand on her shoulder, but I hesitated at the last minute. When it came to family, I had no experiences with which to share to make others feel better. The last time I saw my family was the day I went with Princess Celestia to her School for Gifted Unicorns. I wasn't very close to my family and I doubted they even knew where I was, not that I personally cared. To me, they were faceless beings who no longer held any meaning, but deep in my heart longed a desire, a desire to see them, to understand why I never heard anything from them in such a long time.

" I'm sorry to hear that about your father." I said, breaking my own silence this time. " It must have been hard for you."

Applejack looked at me for a brief second before looking back at the road in front of us. " I'm tryin' ta take care of the ranch as the current owner, but things have been gettin' unstable lately. The cows always seem bothered and frazzled, and I'm findin' broken bottles everywhere! Who's doin' it, I don't know..." I could see tears beginning to trickle down her face but she quickly brushed them aside as though to hide the fact that she was vulnerable. " Mah sister Romani has been worried, too. She's practicin' using a bow... She says it's to stop the"ghosts" that come by the ranch every year."

" Do you believe in that?"

" Heck no!" Applejack answered. " Romani has got quite the imagination for a young un, and I reckon she says that stuff just to rile me up somethin' fierce. Still, I gotta admit that strange things usually happen at this time of the year, but it being ghosts? Nope! I just can't believe that!" The wagon started getting a little faster due to moving down a slight embankment, catching me off guard, yet Applejack was looking up at the sky. I looked up and saw the moon looming overhead, the one thing that would bring about destruction. " Say, what are the townsfolk sayin' 'bout that moon? It's bigger than before, isn't it? I wonder if it will fall... that thing?"

" They just carry on with their lives like nothing's happening."

" Carefree fools."

" Yeah, you could say that."

The wagon reached the entrance to the ranch yet Applejack brought the horse to a stop by pulling on the reins. She got down and walked forward in order to look around before coming back again. She climbed back up onto her seat and whipped the reins signalling for the horse to continue. " Sorry 'bout that, sugarcube. I just wanted ta make sure nothin' was waitin' fer us up ahead to ambush us."

I wasn't afraid of any monsters given that I had the means to protect myself, but Applejack had every right to be cautious since she was unarmed. " In town... I have a friend. Her name's Anju... The day after tomorrow is her wedding and she has been mighty excited 'bout it for quite some time. Yet, I heard that her fiance disappeared some time ago and no one has any idea where he could be. I don't know what the hay he's thinkin' but I hope he ain't havin' second thoughts. I've been invited ta the wedding myself so I hope Anju can find happiness, somethin' she's been needin' fer quite some time."

It sounded like Applejack cared an awful lot about this Anju person, yet I wondered why I never encountered her during my trips to Clock Town. Perhaps I should make a mental note to check out each building the next time I'm there and see if I could find out which of my friends was portraying Anju. I also thought about this fiance of hers who had apparently gone missing. Maybe they had second thoughts regarding marriage like Applejack said or maybe something bad happened, prompting a disappearing act. Of course, I was one to talk given my own lacklustre performance when it came to romance.

Suddenly, the wagon came to a stop and I bumped my head against a wooden pole. " Hey! Why did you stop?"

" What? The road..." Applejack answered. After recovering from bumping my head, I looked at what had caused the wagon to stop and saw a gate had been placed across the path with no means of being able to get past. When I came by the other day, there was no gate there so someone must have placed it there knowing that Applejack would be coming by to make her delivery. I had a feeling I knew who was behind this but I couldn't say anything without proof. " Girl, get yer bow ready... yer gonna be needin' it."

" How do you know I have a bow?"

" I was watchin' ya the other day shootin' down those targets Romani put up." Applejack answered. " She won't let anyone use her bow, not even me, so I figured you were usin' yer own to complete whatever game she made ya do."

" Fair enough, but what do we do now?"

Applejack sighed and looked down a path to the right. " There ain't no other choice now. Still, I'm just so mad 'bout all this! First Milk Road is blocked by a boulder and now... We have ta take this detour through ugly country which don't settle well with me..." She whipped the reins and the horse turned to the right before trotting down the path. It soon opened up into a huge open area that was sparse with trees all over. I didn't understand why Applejack referred to it as "ugly country" at first, but I quickly figured it out when a nearby sign revealed that we were about to go through the Gorman Sister's racetrack. " Are you ready, girl?"

I nodded. " Ready as I'll ever be, I guess." I took out the Hero's Bow and prepared an arrow.

" Good. I'm gonna try to get us through here as fast as I can!" Applejack said. " If any pursuers come from behind, chase them off with your arrows." What!? Pursuers!? She never mentioned anything about that. " I know that look in yer eyes, girl, but you can't really be all that surprised. I've been attacked by the same bandits fer months whenever I had to come through Milk Road, yet I'm surprised they wanted ta detour us down this path through ugly country. They may be after my cargo of milk bottles. Do ya understand?"

I nodded. " What if I run out of arrows?"

" I got plenty in back fer ya ta use." Applejack answered. " Feel free ta use as many as ya want. Now... Here we go!" She whipped the reins hard and the horse began to gallop at a fast pace as though our lives were depending on it.

The instant we began moving, I could hear the sounds of hooves coming from behind, but I couldn't see who it was as it was too dark. That quickly changed when two horses suddenly came into view, each one wearing a hood over their faces to hide their identities, yet it was the two riders on each horse that had me concerned. Both of them were obviously female as I recognized their body shapes as being such--it also helped that they sounded like females--wore farming clothes, carried pitchforks, and were determined to keep up with us no matter what the cost.

Perhaps the strangest thing about them were the masks each one was wearing. Their masks looked like some kind of assassin what with that piercing gaze, yet something about them told me that I could get my hands on one. I didn't understand why I thought that way, but I had no time to think about it.

One of the horses suddenly started galloping closer, the rider aiming her pitchfork forward in an attempt to break one of the milk containers. I aimed my bow at them and that's when I came to a horrible realization... I had to actually shoot arrows at actual humans, humans who weren't monsters. I felt conflicted. A part of me didn't want to become a butcher and take human lives--ironic since I was doing just that against monsters--yet another part told me that I had to otherwise Applejack would have failed. No... I couldn't let my friend down even if what must be done didn't feel right.

I started firing arrows and braced for the worst, yet all that happened was the rider and horse were pushed back slightly. They began to get closer again so I repeated the process, each arrow reached its target, hitting them all over their body, but they were pushed back instead of dropping down dead. " I... I didn't kill her despite how many arrows hit her." I said to myself before firing a few more arrows. " I don't get why this is happening but I shouldn't really question it." The horse fell back although now the second one decided to move up, its rider swinging about her pitchfork in a crazy fashion.

Before she had a chance to smash one of the milk containers, I plugged her with several arrows, pushing her back, but then the first horse decided to make another attempt. I was starting to see how this would pan out although I needed to be careful in case they decided to change their tactics. The second horse galloped forward--I had a slight problem getting an arrow ready--and I saw up close the mask that she was wearing. It was definitely bizarre looking, almost ancient, as though it had existed for centuries. Were they trying to convince me that they were assassins or was it a pathetic attempt at scaring me into submission?

Princess Twilight quickly bopped me on the head to get me back on track, and I fired several arrows pushing the second horse back. " Thanks for that, Twilight." I said. " These two are pretty tenacious women."

" I also don't like how they keep on hollering." Twilight said. " They're making me want to cover my ears."

" Do you think it's those Gorman Sisters we heard about?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " There's no one else it can be, Sunset. Their clothes are a dead giveaway along with the horses and those creepy masks, yet why would they go to all this trouble in order to make Applejack fail in her delivery? I honestly don't see any connection between a pair of breeders and a ranch owner."

" Unless there's something we missed."

" Maybe we should have visited the sisters." Twilight said. " We could've stopped this from happening."

" It's too late for that now!"

Her Highness nodded. " Yes, and it's a shame that some humans have to stoop to such low levels. By the way, Sunset. Do you recognize who these two are? I don't think they are from Equestria as their body shapes aren't familiar to me, but those masks do make it difficult."

" I can't tell who they are but their voices sound familiar."

" We'll worry about that another time." Twilight said. " You need to continue shooting at them until we can get out of this area." One of the horses then started getting closer again and Her Highness began panicking. " Incoming! There's a horse incoming on the right!"

Turning my head to the right, I caught the glimpse of the first horse out of the corner of my eye, but when I tried to fire an arrow, I realized that I was out of them. The extras were scattered about and tied together in groups of about thirty so that meant grabbing one and using them quickly. Reaching behind me without even looking--my eyes were fixated on what was coming my way, I fiddled about and panicked but I grabbed a set of arrows yet now the horse and rider were right in front of the milk containers. I had no time to undo the knot to the arrows so I yanked them out before tossing them at the rider.

Her squeals told me that my plan was working and eventually she backed away leaving me a few moments to get my quiver back in order. " I can't believe that actually worked although maybe Applejack should've mentioned that her extra arrows were bundled together." I said to myself. " Also, I knew she was aware of my carrying a bow on my person, yet how did she know that I would need so many arrows? Was she right about being attacked every time she attempted a delivery? And here I thought she was trying to earn some sympathy by making it up." In hindsight, I should've realized that Applejack never lied.

The two riders then started to converse with one another and I knew that meant they were planning on making things even worse for me. That's when an idea crossed my mind and I looked down at the three milk containers. Why did Applejack place them right at the back of the wagon where they would be vulnerable to attack from anyone who would attack the wagon from behind? " You know... I should just move them further in."

As the horses started galloping towards the wagon signalling a two-pronged assault, I grabbed one of the milk containers and slid it across the wooden floor until it was a few inches away from Applejack, who was concentrating on getting us through here. No doubt that she was under tremendous amount of pressure and was mere moments away from losing her sanity, yet she had to keep going even when things looked bleak. I reached for the next container when my hand nearly got skewered by a pitchfork. The first rider cursed under her mask for not shattering the container but before she knew what was happening, I pelted her with more arrows before doing the same to the second one.

Both reeled back and moved in again so I quickly slid the second container to the front and grabbed the third only for the second rider to plunge her pitchfork at it. Knowing that all three containers had to make it, I turned around thrusting out my back and the pitchfork connected with my shield. Good thing I didn't have in front of me otherwise I would have been skewered instead. The pitchfork's pronged tips bent in an awkward fashion--they didn't break--resulting in the rider cursing at me before ordering her horse to pull back.

" I didn't think that would work."

" Neither did I." Twilight said. " It looked like you had lost your mind, Sunset, but I should've known that you had it under control."

" Is my shield okay?"

Her Highness floated behind me to check before coming back. " The pitchfork didn't do any damage so you're good to go with your shield though I suggest you resume firing your arrows at our attackers. They look like they're about to attack once again."

I slid the final milk container behind Applejack before picking up some more extra arrows and aiming my bow. " The containers are safe now so if they want to smash them to pieces, they need to get past me and that isn't likely to happen."

" How far do you think we've got to go before we can outrun them?"

I shook my head. " I don't know. Only Applejack would know that answer and she's currently busy focusing on driving."

Applejack responded much to my surprise. " Hey! How're things goin' back there?" She paused for a moment before continuing. " And what's the idea callin' me Applejack? That don't sound like a good name ta me, but maybe a nickname of some kind. I do fancy a good portion of apples every now and then."

" Uh, things are going good." I answered. Did she just say something about apples? Perhaps my theory about my friends retaining some aspects of their memories from our proper home was true. " How much further do we have to go? I'm starting to run low on arrows and these bandits refuse to give up."

" Just a few more moments and we'll be outta ugly country."

" I hope you're right."

" Trust me." Applejack said. " What would I get from lyin' to ya?"

She whipped the reins informing her horse to go even faster and it acknowledged by pouring on the galloping speed. I was thrown slightly backwards, landing on my butt as the riders were beginning to fall behind although they started whipping their horses in the flank to keep up. I didn't like the idea of whipping a horse in their flank as it was important to them, yet I supposed some things were different here than they were in Equestria.

The riders continued whipping their horses, whooping and hollering as they got closer, but then they suddenly slowed down before coming to a complete stop. I thought they had done that intentionally because of a trap waiting for us further ahead, but it turned out that Applejack had succeeded in getting us through this area. The horse took a small path to the right located close by that went downward slightly before it opened up into a large clearing with a path heading back to Milk Road. The bandits looked on, anger most likely fuming from behind their masks, and rode off into the night.

We were able to make it through the bandit attack but there was still reaching Clock Town with the delivery that remained. The monsters outside at this time of night roaming around the field consisted of the Blue Bubbles, and getting by them wouldn't be easy.

Chapter 34: The Shimmering Zora

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 21, 2016
Chapter 34: The Shimmering Zora.

" Hoo-wee! Now that was a mighty close call!" Applejack shouted, pumping her fist into the air. " Nice shootin' with yer arrows there, girl, but it ain't quite over yet. Just because we made it past them bandits don't mean we're outta the woods yet. We've still got to reach Clock Town and that means gettin' past them floatin' skulls. Reckon I've never seen anythin' like 'em before but things have been gettin' a might weird lately ever since the moon started fallin'."

" You need to be care of those Blue Bubbles." I said.

" Oh? Are they gonna rend us ta pieces?"

" Not exactly." I answered quietly. " If they hit you then you won't be able to use your sword for a while thanks to their curse, but then that doesn't really apply to you since you don't have a sword." My words weren't exactly inspiring confidence and I knew that without being told. The Blue Bubbles wouldn't really affect Applejack and her horse, yet they would give me no end of trouble hence my answer lacked enthusiasm. " Maybe you should just forget that I said anything and just focus on getting us to town."

" That ain't how things work, sugarcube."

" What do you mean?"

" Y'all might that those flyin' skulls only affect you cause ya have a sword, but I know a thing or two when it comes to stuff like this. I wasn't lyin' when I said I've never seen 'em before but I heard rumours from people who visited ta ranch before that boulder blocked the entrance." Applejack answered. She turned to face me, her arm resting on one of the milk containers, a stern look appearing on her face. " People have said monsters roam round here without restraint, and I ain't gonna ignore sound advice like that. Knowing them flyin' skulls, they could cause serious injury to mah horse, and if they were to happen, the delivery would be the least of our problems."

" I just don't want you to get hurt." I said. " You might not believe this but you mean an awful lot to me."

" Shucks! No need ta get sentimental." Applejack said. " It's nice that y'all consider me somethin' special, but I barely know who ya are given that we only met the other day. If we knew each other like for say, ten years or so then perhaps I could feel sympathetic to ya, yet if I must be honest with y'all, yer words don't have much meaning ta me. I mean no disrespect towards ya, but that's just how I feel."

My mind was telling me to blush because of how embarrassed I felt, yet my heart refused to follow the instruction. While Applejack's words were like a dagger going through my heart, we didn't know each other in this world compared to being close friends back home. I could give her friendship speeches--something Princess Twilight actually has been known to do according to her own words--and remind her of good times, yet they would hold no meaning in her eyes. In Termina, she was a ranch owner who was determined to make ends meet given how things had been going wrong.

It also made me realize one of two things. The first was that I was hating how my friends didn't recognize me especially what we've been through. While I didn't let it get to me too much during my previous journey, it had been weighing me down on this one mainly because of resetting time. I've helped most of my friends deal with problems in this world that plague them, and while I would remember the experiences--and in my notebook--the fact that everything goes back to the way it was before I came alone made me question why I was going out of my way for something that would ultimately prove futile.

I was beginning to understand what Ganondorf meant by torment. It wasn't just a physical manifestation but rather emotional. Seeing myself going back to the beginning of the seventy-hour cycle and erasing all traces of my existence had proven very taxing for me. I didn't know how much longer I could keep my sanity from shattering and being impossible to repair, yet I knew that I had to continue going. To save two worlds meant my own existence, my own identity, would become lost forever in time with no hope of salvation.

A shame that I had no means of gathering my friends together and get them to remember our world. I mean, I could bring them all to the same place although it would require some incredible convincing and also knowing where they all ended up--Rarity, Rainbow Dash, and Twilight Sparkle were still unaccounted for--and possibly angering those who perhaps are protecting them in some way. In my heart, I believed that getting us all together would help make this journey go much smoother, yet I knew it was impossible. Despite my friends displaying some traits that correspond with their elements, it wasn't enough to make a difference.

Applejack then snapped her fingers, causing me to come out of my daydream. " Y'all certainly know how ta get lost in yer own little world, don't cha?"

I blushed upon realizing what happened. " I am so sorry for doing that!"

" No problem, sugarcube." Applejack said. " We've all got stuff on our minds that make us forget 'bout everythin' else that happens 'round us. What y'all are thinkin' 'bout ain't any of my business so I won't go and start pryin'."

" Thank you."

" If anyone's gonna get thanked 'round here, it's you."

" What did I do?"

Applejack slapped her leg and let out a booming laugh. " Yee-haw! Y'all truly are somethin' else, girl. If it weren't for you, I reckon this here delivery would've been ruined by those cowardly bandits who attacked us earlier." That's when she noticed that the containers were now directly in front of her as opposed to being at the back of the cart. " Did y'all move them while I was tryin' to keep them bandits from destroyin' 'em?" I nodded my head and she laughed again. " Hoo-wee! Now why didn't I think of doin' that? If I had placed the containers right behind me 'stead of at the back, I wouldn't have needed yer help."

" Really?"

" No... That ain't true at all." Applejack answered. " Without you, this wouldn't even be happenin'. I guess I was so concerned with wantin' ta do everythin' myself that I became lost in my own mind and believed I didn't need help. If my father were still alive, he'd be ashamed of me fer actin' like a spoiled brat." That's when she grabbed the reins and cracked them, urging the horse to continue onwards. " No wonder mah little sister acts the way she does. I thought I was the ideal role model fer her but the truth is that I'm far worse."

" Are you okay?"

" I think I know what I'm gonna do tomorrow night."

A puzzled look appeared on my face. " I'm not sure I follow."

" No need for y'all to worry 'bout it, sugarcube." Applejack said. " It's a private matter with mah little sister though ya could come by tomorrow night if yer wanted."

" But you just said--"

Applejack shook her head. " Romani has taken a real shinin' to ya, girl, and I mean that as a friend. She doesn't have anyone her age at the ranch and I'm too busy these days to be able ta spend quality time with her, so she often resorts ta doin' things on her own. Perhaps she and I have grown distant lately because I have so much ta take care of. I figure someone like y'all could come by once all this nonsense has blown over. Ya practically like family now since y'all made her feel better and helped me with mah delivery."

This was the other realization that I had come to though I was initially thinking of the Gorman Sisters--I had no intention of telling Applejack that they were the bandits who had attacked us. Applejack knew that she couldn't continue ignoring Apple Bloom despite how much responsibility she had, yet she was going about it all wrong by wanting me to be there to keep her little sister happy. If anyone needed to make her happy, it was Applejack herself and no one else.

In fact, this realization also applied to Apple Bloom. She needed to realize that her big sister was doing everything she could to keep both her and the ranch safe, yet she didn't see that way, and instead saw it as Applejack not caring about her feelings. In a way, both of them needed to meet halfway rather than continue being worlds apart otherwise their family bond would break down. Whatever she was planning on doing tomorrow night, I hoped Applejack knew what she was doing. The last thing she needed was to further upset Apple Bloom resulting in increased tensions between the two.

The cart started to move across Termina Field yet I chose to keep my bow ready in case any of the Blue Bubbles decided to attack for getting too close to them. I was feeling pretty nervous considering what I experienced on the way here, but Applejack remained perfectly calm as though she were in a trance. It made sense since her success in delivering her milk containers meant her business would continue to thrive. A few Blue Bubbles looked at us with their lifeless expressions--the fire that surrounded their skulls could easily burn your flesh--but they ignored us which was a sigh of relief.

" You don't need to worry, Appl... Cremia." I said, correcting myself. " I'll make sure none of those Blue Bubbles get close."

" I appreciate it, girl." Applejack said. She went silent for several metres before continuing. " Say, have y'all ever been to the Milk Bar in town?"

" Can't say that I have."

Applejack's drop dropped. " What!? How in the hay could ya have not gone there!? Boy howdy, girl! Y'all have been missin' out on somethin' might exciting, and I'm being honest in sayin' that. Since it's gonna take us a few more minutes ta arrive, why don't I tell ya more about the Milk Bar?"

" I wouldn't want to impede."

" Think nothin' of it." Applejack said. " When I was a few years younger, I actually worked there as an assistant bartender to the owner, Mrs. Barten. She's a sweet old gal who's been runnin' the place for as long as anyone can remember, but can be a real firebrand if ya ain't careful. I learned how ta be a good businesswoman thanks ta her guidance though I wish I had learned everythin' she knew. Fate can be really cruel sometimes."

That told me that her father passed away before she could finish learning from whoever this Mrs. Barten was. " I'm sorry for your loss."

" It's been hard like I said but I've managed."

" Cremia..."

" Anyway, I remember two regulars who kept on comin' ta the bar while I worked there." Applejack said. " The first was one of them Zoras who live out in Great Bay who hangs out by ta stage. Never did understand why she was so fixated on it, but judgin' from her attire, she must be one of those promoters ya hear about. The other is someone I'm well familiar with because of having ta deal with his sisters, but he ain't anythin' like 'em."

" Gorman?" I asked, scratching my head. " Is that who you mean?"

" You've met him?"

" No, but I've heard someone mention him."

" He has a bit of a sour temperment but he can be friendly if ya talk to him when he's in a good mood." Applejack said. I could see the happiness in her eyes and voice even though she probably didn't sense it herself. The way she talked so passionately about this place showed that she appreciated the past, and also yearned for those days again despite it being impossible for her now. " Yer just have to make sure he ain't drunk on milk. Whenever he drinks a lot, he winds up speaking nothin' but gibberish."

" Is he from Clock Town?"

" Nope and neither is the Zora."

" I kind of figured that was the case with the Zora."

Applejack cracked the reins urging her horse to gallop faster. " Gorman and his troupe travel all over Termina and beyond lookin' to entertain the masses with their act, but he usually makes a few stops in Clock Town because it has ta largest venue compared with everywhere else. Makes sense don't it? If y'all have a place that can bring in a large crowd, ya wanna continue goin' there 'cause ya know y'all will find success."

She did have a point there. When I was Princess Celestia's student, she often had the same performers show up whenever she decided to hold a banquet. While she never gave it any thought other than knowing what to expect from them, I always found it odd that they kept on coming back every few months. Back then, I probably would have criticized them for using the same performance but then Celestia always refrained me from speaking out of line. Even when I was a young filly, I often defied her by thinking that I knew better when in truth I was ignorant of it all.

I wonder if Princess Twilight went through something like that where she chose to defy Celestia. Looking at Her Highness, who was occupied with watching Applejack, did she follow the edicts of Celestia right down to the letter without every questioning it? Or were there times where she stood up and said that she couldn't follow through for personal reasons? I never did ask her about such things before as I always assumed it wasn't my place given she was my successor.

Successor... It's kind of funny really when I thought about it. Her Highness was chosen to be Celestia's student due to showing incredible skill with magic, but also because I was a failed student and Celestia needed another filly to groom into a princess to wipe away the stain that was me. Now, I've become Princess Twilight's student even though I'm slowly beginning to handle things without needing her assistance. She also has Starlight Glimmer--not this world's version but the pony version--under her wing who is slowly starting to come out as her own unique individual, and I supposed that Twilight Sparkle would become my student.

Maybe I've progressed better than I thought.

After spending a few more minutes wading through Blue Bubbles and looking up at the moon--its presence continued to haunt me--we finally arrived at our destination, the east entrance of Clock Town where Applejack brought the horse to a stop by pulling the reins really hard.

I was confused as to why she stopped at this entrance and not the southern one. " Why did we come to this entrance?"

" 'Cause the Milk Bar is located in East Clock Town, sugarcube." Applejack answered. She climbed down from her seat, walked around to the back of the wagon, and opened up a latch before climbing into the back. " I ain't gonna lug those containers through the south of town and into ta east. These things are quite heavy ya know and I ain't about ta injure myself somethin' fierce." She then looked at me with a piercing gaze and a smile appeared across her face. I knew what she was about to ask me to do. " How's about ya help me out one last time, girl, by takin' one of them containers?"

" What about the third one?"

" I can carry two at a time." Applejack answered. " Y'all can take the remainin' one."

" But, you said they were heavy."

Applejack nodded. " I know and I weren't lyin' 'bout that, yet I can only carry 'em so far until I either have ta put 'em down or drop 'em, and I'd rather not have the latter option if ya get my drift. I do wish that Mrs. Barten would hire some strappin' fellas to help with this kinda thing as it would make things easier, but I 'sppose times are tough for her just like everywhere else across Termina." She picked up two containers and began carrying them, one under each arm, before jumping from the wagon onto the ground. " Just pick that one up and follow me, girl. Oh, and y'all don't need ta worry 'bout doin' this fer nothing. I've got somethin' fer ya but first this needs ta be done.

I grabbed the remaining milk container and lifted it up only to almost fall down on my butt. Applejack wasn't kidding when she said that these things were heavy. I was struggling just to keep my balance due to how heavy it was, yet she was holding two of them like a natural, but then she was used to that kind of labour. Since I couldn't hold this container under my arm--it would mean falling over resulting in the container smashing and and spilling its contents--I decided to carry it around using both hands.

Taking several steps forward, my entire body wobbled before I placed the container down, jumped off the wagon to the ground, and picked it up again. Applejack was already inside and was yelling at me to hurry up with the container, so I walked forward before coming upon an interesting sight.

Before me stood the Milk Bar although now that I thought about it, I had walked by this place a couple of times and never noticed it before. A sign above the entrance depicted an image of milk in a bottle and another sign next to the entrance said that only members were allowed inside. This was a problem as I didn't have permission to go inside, yet Applejack didn't have that issue as she was most likely a member given she once worked here.

I spoke up. " Um... I can't go inside because I'm not a member."

" That ain't a problem."

" What do you mean?"

" Anyone is allowed inside the Milk Bar." Applejack answered. " Yet, only members are allowed ta go inside once it's past 10:00pm during the night. It was the one rule 'bout this place that I never did agree with, yet it's somethin' that Mrs. Barten refuses to change. She could get plenty o'customers in here if she were to get rid of that one restriction and she wouldn't have ta worry 'bout financial matters. Anyway, I'm sure y'all have got other things ya wanna do so I'll make this as quick as I can."

Applejack knocked on the door several times before it swung open with a loud click and beckoned me to follow along. I had no desire to say anything until she was finished with her business transaction in case I were to cause strife by speaking out of line or something like that.

The interior of the Milk Bar wasn't what I was expecting. A walkway that lead from the entrance went down a small flight of stairs before opening up into a large area that consisted of several stools in front of the bar itself, a large stage overlooked the entire area, and numerous bottles were on at least half a dozen shelves. No doubt those bottles were filled with milk unless they were a decoration, yet why would Mrs. Barten need more when she already had plenty behind her? I didn't know how this all worked given that I only knew the perspective of Applejack, but still, you had to wonder if there was even an issue at all.

Her Highness bopped me on the head to remind me that I needed to keep up with Applejack, so I walked down the stairs and towards the counter where I noticed two figures were standing there. The first one was someone I had never seen before, but the other was someone who was very familiar to me.

Despite her wearing a tuxedo, shirt, and bow-tie, I recognized Granny Smith from anywhere. It was kind of weird seeing her not being related to Applejack given how the latter never stops talking about the former, but then this world had been pretty consistent when it came to weird things happening.

" Cremia!? It's been a while since you last came with a shipment." Granny Smith said. The first thing I immediately noticed was that she didn't have a country accent so it felt weird hearing her speak without one. " I was afraid that Romani Ranch had gone out of business."

Applejack shook her head. " Sorry fer worryin' ya like that, Mrs. Barten. We had some problems over in the ranch what with a large boulder blockin' ta entrance, and bandits chasin' after ta wagon with my delivery attemptin' ta prevent me from gettin' here with 'em intact."

" Why has this world fallen under such hard times?"

" Wish I had an answer fer ya."

" How were you able to get past those bandits?" Granny Smith asked. " I mean no disrespect to you, Cremia, but you don't look like the sort who would be willing to fight against a bunch of thugs."

" I had some help from a friend of mine." Applejack answered, pointing her finger at me. " This girl made sure them bandits didn't break any of the milk containers, so if there's anyone y'all should be thankin', it would be her 'stead of me."

Granny Smith looked at me and smiled. " I have you to thank, madam? Well, I wasn't expecting such a young child to do something an adult could have done, but then appearances can often be deceptive. Normally, the bar doesn't allow someone of your age around here because of the nature of this place, but feel free to look around seeing as you are helping out Cremia. Speaking of which, perhaps I should help you with those containers. I can tell you're struggling to hold it so allow me to relieve you of it." She then grabbed the container and placed it behind the counter like it was nothing. She was a lot stronger than she appeared to be.

" Where's Gorman?" Applejack asked. " I don't see him here."

" He'll be here within the next hour."

" Normally, he'd be here by now drinkin' away."

" I'm not sure what he could be doing but I'm not going to pry into his business."

Applejack turned to me. " I'm gonna be a few minutes talkin' with Mrs. Barten over there about payment, but I will be leavin' as soon as I'm finished. Make sure y'all don't leave, girl, as I still need ta give ya somethin' fer everythin' y'all have done."

She then walked off to the side with Granny Smith leaving me and Princess Twilight alone to collect our thoughts. That's when I noticed the Zora standing by the stage from before who appeared to be ignoring everything around her as though the stage itself was the only thing that was important to her. She was a bit shorter than most of her kind--I was basing this on my previous experience with Zora from my last journey in that they were all tall--yet her attire indicated that she was some kind of businesswoman.

Again, I didn't recognize her at all yet Her Highness immediately recognized her.

" That's Miss Pommel!" Twilight exclaimed.

" Who?" I asked.

" Miss Pommel, an acquaintance of Rarity's." Twilight answered. She then noticed my confused look and blushed slightly. " Right... You've never met her before, Sunset, so to you, she's just a faceless person--pony--who doesn't hold any kind of attachment to you." Her Highness didn't have to say it like that and make her out to be an alien, but I supposed she was only trying to make a statement. " Miss Pommel is from Manehatten and originally was an assistant to a pony who never appreciated the work that she did. Thanks to Rarity giving her some kindness, she went out on her own and became an accomplished fashion designer."

" How do you know her?"

" I met her in Manehatten."

" That figures. So... I wonder what she's doing in a place like this?"

" Why not ask her?" Twilight asked. " You should always talk to people in case they have some vital information."

I nodded and walked over to Miss Pommel. " Um... Excuse me."

Miss Pommel turned to face me before waving her hand up and down. " Are the fins damp lately?"

" What?"

" Sorry." Miss Pommel answered. " That's a popular greeting among my people, the Zora. I should have realized you wouldn't have understood its meaning since you are a human after all, but I don't mean to insult you with my words."

" It's alright."

" You're probably wondering what I'm doing, aren't you?" Miss Pommel asked. " I may not look like it but I was busy checking the stage to make sure that the sound quality was good enough for my music group to perform when the Carnival of Time begins." She then lowered her head slightly as though she was embarrassed about something, and shuffled closer to me before continuing in a softer tone. " They don't yet know that their performance has been cancelled, but I'm hoping that Monsieur Aroma will change his mind. Until then, all I can do is wait and see what happens. By the way, my name is Mrs. Toto, manger of the Indigo-Go's, the hottest Zora band in Termina."

" I'm Sunset Shimmer."

" An unusual name for a human."

" You said you were checking the sound quality?"

Miss Pommel nodded. " If Monsieur Aroma gives the go-ahead for my group to perform, they will need to have everything on the stage perfect if they want their music to be heard through this place. Right now, they're using a practice stage they set up back in Zora Hall, but the sound quality there is nothing compared to what it's like here. You know, I would like it if someone could help me perform a sound check."

" Do you suppose I could help?"

" I appreciate the sentiment but I don't think you can."

" Why not?"

" It's just that I need four people to help." Miss Pommel answered. " I need someone who can play an ocarina, someone who can play pipes, someone who can play drums, and finally someone who can play a guitar. A Deku Scrub, Goron, and Zora respectively would be necessary for the latter instruments, yet I don't know anyone with an ocarina given how rare that item can be. Things just haven't been going well for me."

My efforts in helping Miss Pommel had reached a snag. While I could provide her with three of the four instruments she required, it was the final one, the Zora instrument, that I lacked due to not having the ability to change into a Zora. I doubted she wouldn't be satisfied unless she had everything so it looked like I needed to come back here when I had the ability to become a Zora.

I should've realized that the next transformation would be a Zora given that the previous two were a Deku and Goron respectively. That meant going into Great Bay and finding someone who had recently passed away which had become the trend with these transformation masks. I began to think about what it would be like to swim about at such great speeds that only a Zora was capable of. I knew they were capable of such because of what I learned in my previous journey despite not actually seeing them do it with my own eyes. Of course, to explore the next region would mean resetting time and undoing all this progress.

It was another painful reminder of going back to the beginning of the seventy-two hours. Apple Bloom would be abducted, Applejack would be beside herself with grief, and this place would likely go out of business due to not receiving their shipment. No! I was going to do something I hadn't done before and I'm sure Princess Twilight would agree that I wasn't going to reset time until I had visited the Apple sisters during the final night to see what would happen.

Applejack then started walking back, her head tilting to let me know that she was about to leave. She walked up the stairs and out the door without saying a word but the smile on her face told me that she had received payment for the delivery. Thanking Miss Pommel for the conversation, I took my leave by following Applejack and heading outside of town until both of us had gotten back to the wagon.

She quickly put something in the back before turning to face me. " Guess I've only got y'all left to deal with."

" I take it things went well?" I asked.

Applejack nodded. " Sure did, sugarcube. Mrs. Barten was happy to get her first delivery in quite a while! Reckon she oughta get plenty of customers now especially if she informs then that she got in a fresh shipment of Chateau Romani. By the way, do you know what that is?"

" Your sister told me." I answered. " Though she didn't seem to appreciate your sales pitch."

" Romani oughta know that I need to do that sort of stuff because of bein' a ranch owner, but I 'sppose that I could dial it back a little for her sake. Still, I'm mighty happy knowin' that the bar will be sellin' milk from mah ranch again, and it's all thanks to you, girl." Applejack said.

" I didn't do anything really."

" Don't be so modest." Applejack said. " You kept them bandits from breaking mah containers and y'all kept me company during the night by listenin' to mah story. Ya should be proud knowin' ya helped out someone who was havin' trouble without wantin' somethin' in return." She then winked resulting in me blushing slightly. " I know that yer an adventurin' type as why else would anyone be carryin' 'round a bow? Anyway, I want ta thank ya... You were pretty cool..."

" So I guess this means goodbye?"

Applejack shook her head. " Not just yet, sugarcube. I said that I would give ya somethin' and I intend to keep mah promise. This ain't very big, but accept my thanks!" She reached into the back of the wagon and pulled out an unusual looking mask. It looked like a cow's head complete with the ring inside of the nose, yet it looked cute in design compared to the real thing. Smiling, Applejack handed over the mask to me before hugging me really tightly for several seconds. " That mask is called Romani's Mask. In order ta enter the Milk Bar after hours, one needs ta wear that mask and they can go inside."

" Why would you have something like that?"

" 'Cause mah ranch supplies the bar with all ta milk. Anyway, you might not think that there mask is a good thing, girl, but I reckon y'all will appreciate the meaning behind it once ya see things from a different perspective." Applejack answered.

" And the hug?"

" Added bonus courtesy of me."

" Thank you."

" By doin' one good deed, a child becomes an adult." Applejack said. " That mask is only given to a limited number of adult customers. It's proof of membership. Y'all don't need ta question mah judgment on the matter. In my heart, I honestly believe ya deserve it as a gift. I now acknowledge ya as bein' an adult!" She then bowed slightly before turning around, walked over to the wagon's front, and climbed up onto the seat. " This is where we now part ways, sugarcube. This whole experience has got me thinkin' 'bout how I should deal with mah own problems back home." Applejack quickly looked upward at the moon before looking back at me. " I was wrong to treat mah sister as such."

" What do you intend to do?"

" Somethin' I shoulda done a while ago."

" I'd like to be there to see it... If that's alright with you."

Applejack nodded. " Romani would really appreciate ya doin' that, and I 'sppose I'd feel ta same way. I suggest ya come by sometime tomorrow evening 'cause I'm sure I'll be busy gettin' everyone settled in before the moon up there falls." She breathed in a similar manner to what Her Highness showed me, indicating that she wasn't looking forward to it. " People are sure ta be fleein' town if things continue ta worsen and they'll likely wanna come ta the ranch even though I think it ain't worth it. Not much I can do really except welcome them as turnin' 'em away would be goin' against mah convictions. Anyway, I'll see ya tomorrow, sugarcube."

She cracked the reins causing her horse to start galloping away, and while I thought she would've asked me if I wanted to accompany her back to Romani Ranch, I think she knew not to impose that on me given I had my own task. Still, I felt bad knowing that she still had a lot to deal with although now things were starting to make sense. With the moon now having gotten closer, people in Clock Town would flee to the farthest corners of Termina thinking that they would be safe from the inevitable impact. I guessed they didn't want to make a move until they knew for absolute certain that running away would be best.

And yet Applejack was correct when she said that it wasn't worth it. If the moon crashes into Termina as intended by Starlight, this entire world would be destroyed. No place would be safe from the impending armageddon despite people thinking they would be. That's why I had to rescue the remaining giants. They were the only ones who could prevent the destruction, and Starlight realized it hence why she had them imprisoned within dark masks.

Starlight Glimmer... She knew the giants could ruin her fun and she sealed them away in return. Something about that scenario just didn't add up. If she wanted to only cause pranks in order to have fun, why go to so much trouble sealing the only ones who could prevent destruction from occurring? Why go from simple pranks to utter decimation? Had she truly lost herself with her power or was something else at work? These questions had no answers yet I needed to find them before it was too late. Of course, I couldn't neglect the most important factor of all... Ganondorf.

What was his role in all of this other than make me miserable? Could he finish what Starlight couldn't were she to fall? Why hadn't he taken on a more active role in wanting the destruction of Termina? Why pick on me in particular? Again, more questions with no answers.

Princess Twilight suddenly bopped me on the head. " Sunset? What did you mean when you said we would see Applejack tomorrow night?"

" I... I want to know what she plans on saying to Apple Bloom."

" You do realize we need to go to Great Bay, right?" Twilight asked. " We need to reset time and explore that region with as much time as we can get."

" Which is why I want to do things this way."

" I'm not following you."

" Resetting time and undoing all of our work is something I've come to accept even though it still pains me whenever we do it. But, I want to see this thing through to the end. I want to see Applejack talk to Apple Bloom and come to an understanding." I said.

Princess Twilight rubbed the bridge of her nose. " I know you want to see it for your own piece of mind, but you can't sacrifice an entire world for the sake of two people. It doesn't work that way, Sunset. Sometimes, you have to focus on helping the collective instead of a small gathering."

" And that's why we're going to Great Bay now."

" What!?"

" We're going there now, Twilight." I answered. " I'm going to get started there and progress as much as necessary before resetting time."

" You do realize that would mean going through the same things again, right?"

" I'm not willing to sacrifice Applejack or any of my friends when it comes to seeing their resolutions around here."

While it sounded like I was being incredibly stubborn--I was--what I said to Princess Twilight came from the bottom of my heart. I saw the end of Fluttershy's resolution by making sure to rescue that monkey before he got punished, so now the same would be true with Applejack. I couldn't do this for the rest of my friends as I either haven't found them yet, or in the case of Pinkie, she doesn't have a resolution or hasn't reached it yet.

Seeing these resolutions would give me peace of mind knowing that it would all be reset upon playing the Song of Time.

That's when I suddenly remembered the Bomber's Notebook I had in my possession. I took it out from behind my back, opened it up, and discovered that not only did Applejack have an entry in it, hers was right below Apple Bloom's. According to the book, I had solved the Apple sister's problems including the one that Garble had--he was also listed in the book albeit much further down. I had no idea how many more people would end up in it but at least I could take solace knowing that people were slowly becoming happier even when they don't realize it after going back to the start.

" Sunset..." Twilight began. " I guess you understand friendship a lot more than you think."

" You agree with my suggestion?"

" Applejack is my friend to, and I guess a part of me does want to see what happens tomorrow."

" Thanks, Twilight."

Princess Twilight smiled. "Well, if we're going to head off to Great Bay, we'll need to head west towards the ocean. I suggest that we cut through Clock Town so as to not waste time going around the long way, and you should take that mask Applejack gave you with you. I'm sure you will need to use it in order to get into the Milk Bar after hours, and of course you do need it in order to get that one mask Adagio mentioned."

" How many masks do I have now?"

" I think you have ten."

" Still a long ways to go."

" You'll get there, Sunset, but it will take time."

The closer I got to collecting all of the masks in Termina, the more I started to worry about the mask Adagio talked about that was just as powerful as the one Starlight wore. The very thought of wielding power like that brought back painful memories of when power was what I desired above everything else. While I had no doubt that I was strong enough to resist being corrupted, a part of me didn't want to take any chances.

If wearing this mask granted me the power to do anything, I could potentially become the biggest threat to Termina instead of Starlight. I had a big decision to make when the time comes and I hoped that I'd make the right choice.

Sometime in the past...

" What do you think?"

" It's... a giant tank of water."

" Built to precise specifications."

" I'm surprised, professor. When you approached me asking if you could build something to help Lulu's eggs when she would eventually lay them, I thought you were nothing more than a crack-pot. Guess I was completely wrong about you."

" Those eggs are important to both her and the father so it makes sense that they needed water of the correct temperature. I'm glad that I convinced you to allow me to do this back then instead of now given that the water in Great Bay has gotten much warmer lately."

" I'm glad you brought that up."

" Why's that?"

" You're the Oceanside Scientist, professor, so if anyone understands what's going on, it would be you, correct?"

" I don't have much to offer you, Evan, but what I can provide should be enough to satisfy you and the other Zora. According to my research, ever since the waters in this region started to get warmer, strange creatures have begun to appear beneath the waves. They don't appear threatening right now but I assume that they will attack anything that enters what can be described as their territory."

" Strange creatures? How strange are we talking?"

" Skeletal fish and tube-like monsters."

" That doesn't sound reassuring."

" I suggest all Zora avoid swimming about in the water until further notice."

" I'm not sure they will like that, professor."

" What other choice do they have? If any of you swim about in the water with those creatures about, there's no telling what might happen to you. However, there is one good thing to come from all of this, and that has to do with those Gerudo Pirates your people have issues with. If they are aware of the creatures as well, I doubt they would attempt to plunder your domain of Zora Hall unless suffering heavy casualties are in order."

" For that we should be thankful."

" How come?"

" Lulu's eggs are currently vulnerable given that they need to be transferred to your tank if they are to hatch in the right conditions. I wouldn't put it past those pirates stealing them and taking them back to their fortress. If those creatures can keep them grounded, it'd be a load off my shoulders."

" Those pirates are crafty so they could always come up with another tactic."

" I doubt they'd be smart enough to try. Besides, Mikau will take care of them like he usually does."

"Oh... The guitarist of your band."

" He's the only Zora who possesses the blood of heroes and that makes him our best bet against the Gerudo. Whenever they cause trouble for us, he gets out here, clashes blows with them, and winds up making them retreat with their tails between their legs."

" Does he know about the eggs?"

" He knows they have been laid but doesn't know he is the father, professor."

" What? Why haven't you told him?"

" It's not really my place despite me being the leader of the band. If anyone is going to tell him, it would be Lulu and no one else. Normally, I wouldn't discuss their private affairs with anyone outside of the group, but you're an old friend, professor, so you're an exception. Lulu has been on edge lately what with the water getting warmer. She was thrilled at the prospect of becoming a mother yet now she seems distant about it. Mikau and I don't know what to do with her out of fear we could upset her."

" Parental anxieties."

" Excuse me?"

" I think poor Lulu is nervous about being a mother and telling Mikau that he is the father of her children. While I don't know what kind of relationship those two have, I'm aware that they have been very forthcoming with it. There's no one in Great Bay who doesn't know about their romance given how gossip loves to fly around."

" Maybe, but I think there's something else to it."

" Have you asked Lulu?"

" No."

" Then I suggest you do that when you return home. I'm sure she would be willing to listen to either you or Mikau given how close you two are with her. Just make sure that you bring the eggs here as soon as possible. This is the purest water in all of Great Bay and is the ideal place for them to hatch. By the way, who is going to be delivering them? I need to know in case a random Zora shows up and they aren't here for the right reasons."

" I believe it will be Mikau."

" Odd choice considering... But, I suppose he will have to do."

Going through Clock Town to reach the western side of Termina Field proved to be a wise decision on my part. By choosing to avoid taking a much longer route, I also avoided the Blue Bubbles that were roaming about outside, yet I did have to deal with the guard who stood by the western most entrance of town. Much like before, he refused to let me past until I had proven myself old enough to leave on my own without supervision. If there was one thing about time travel that I wish could happen, it would be certain individuals remembering their prior encounters with me. I could have saved some time that instead was spent showing the guard my sword.

Still, it was better than dealing with a bunch of Blue Bubbles so I supposed it wasn't a complete loss. I even thought about going into one of the shops and making a purchase and use what few rupees remained in my wallet, but I opted against it due to not knowing whether they were open at night--the Curiosity Shop was open but I didn't want to have to deal with the likes of Iron Will given what happened last time.

Upon leaving through the western gate and finding myself back outside again, I walked down a ramp and onto some sand, and discovered something interesting. Each section of the field was dedicated to each region through a representation of motif. The way to Woodfall comprised of tall grass while the path to Snowhead was a blanket of snow, yet the path before me to Great Fairy consisted of a beach without any water. I couldn't see what was special about the path that went eastwards given I was preoccupied with helping Applejack, but I assume it would be just as interesting.

The sand looked peaceful but my concern was focused on a large wall with a small fence built on top of it. Judging from how high up the wall went, there was no way I could jump over it myself.

Princess Twilight began to observe the situation. " You'll need more powerful legs if we're going to get to the other side."

" Where am I supposed to get something like that?"

" I thought it was obvious."

" Not really."

" You need to jump over that wall using Epona." Twilight said. " I know she can make it as I witnessed her jumping prowess myself when you were practicing back at the ranch despite my initial objections. I think rescuing her was necessary as we wouldn't be able to progress otherwise." A thought then appeared in her mind when her face suddenly lit up. " I have a feeling Starlight knew you needed your horse."

" By dumping her off at the ranch and covering the entrance with that boulder, she thought to stop our progress completely."

" Yes." Twilight said. " She does appear to be taking things up a notch."

I nodded my head. " Then we should be careful when exploring the beaches of Great Bay." I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, played Epona's Song, and just like magic, she appeared out of nowhere and galloped over to me before stopping. " No matter how many times I see her appeared out of thin air, it never gets old." I began to whinny and Epona responded in kind before I climbed onto her back. " Okay, Epona... We need to jump over that fence. It's a lot higher than what you're used to seeing but you're the only one who can make the jump. Do you think you can do it?"

Epona answered by whinnying loudly. She then trotted back several metres before galloping forward only for some creatures to pop out of the sand. I had no time to ponder over what they were otherwise Epona would lose momentum. I gently slapped her in the flank to increase her speed and she jumped up and over the fence landing on the other side with a loud thud that was mitigated by the sand.

The creatures on the other side of the wall made strange whirling noises before everything went quiet again. I patted Epona on the muzzle and whinnied a congratulatory message as I didn't want to have to repeat that attempt several times over. As she whinnied back, I looked in front and noticed the path was now flanked on both sides by cliffs that looked impossible to climb. Our way forward went downward on a slope yet I could sense some kind of force coming from what would essentially be our destination, the region of Great Bay. This force didn't feel like Starlight's power but rather something else, something that had been dormant for centuries.

I turned to Her Highness. " Do you feel that?"

" I do." Twilight answered. " Whatever that is, you and I can definitely feel it. I guess we can sense things others can't due to being magical ponies, but that's just a guess on my part and shouldn't be taken as absolute proof."

" What do you suppose lies ahead?"

" Those creatures we encountered just now."

" You think so?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. Those were Leevers, creatures that rise out from under the sand and charge forward in hopes of running into something. If you ignore them and let them go by, they will just go back down into the sand only to rise again moments later. One strike from your sword will take them down but you should be careful about it, Sunset. If you attack too many of them, a rare blue Leever could appear and attack you in an aggressive manner. This version is more durable in that it takes more hits to defeat it, but doing so will result in stopping the swarm and earning a lot of rupees."

" So I should avoid them?"

" So long as you walk on the sand, they will appear." Twilight answered. " However, Epona seems to be unaffected by them. In fact, I think she can simply plow right through them as though they weren't even there. In any case, you need to be careful where you walk once you climb down from her."

Kicking Epona softly in the ribs, she galloped forward down the sloped path that twisted and turned several times before it suddenly opened up into a massive beach that spanned in both east and west directions. I could also see the ocean looming before me yet something about it felt off, like really off, as though the ocean was corrupted by evil. Aside from a few palm trees scattered about, the only places of interest that I could see were two buildings located to the left. There was a third building located right in the water though it appeared to be floating in place what with a platform situated below it.

Since I learned that the Zora lived here, I was expecting them to be nearby doing their usual business, but instead there was no one around. It was as though the beach itself was devoid of life save for what lurked beneath the sand.

My first instinct was to have Epona gallop over to the water's edge but I chose to climb down from her and continue on foot. With those Leever lurking below, they could attack her while I wasn't around and I couldn't allow that to happen. Fortunately, there was some grassy terrain located near one of the two buildings, so I veered Epona to the left and she trotted across the sand until we reached the building--luckily no Leevers popped up so I knew that she would be safe.

The building itself looked pretty ordinary though a nearby sign said that this was the home of a fisherman. I should've realized that someone of that nature would live around here given that there was probably ample amount of places one could go in order to fish. I wasn't sure if I needed the assistance of a fisherman so instead I turned my attention towards the second building, and my entire body felt a cold chill. This second building was run-down and ready to fall apart due to being so unkempt, and there were even cobwebs strewn about adding to the overall disturbing factor. Whoever lived there ought to have been ashamed of themselves.

Climbing dwon from Epona, she whinned several times telling me to be careful, and I whinned in response saying that I will. Since I knew that I would be attacked by Leevers, I decided to simply run towards the water's edge and hopefully avoid getting hit in the process. The instant I ran onto the sand, Leevers started popping out of the sand and began sliding towards me in hopes of colliding, yet I ignored all of them until I reached the water.

I breathed heavily and dropped to my knees. " That was too close!"

" Those Leevers will be a problem so long as we remain on the sand."

" I just need a few moments to catch my breath." I said, breathing heavily.

" While you were running over here, I did catch Pinkie Pie floating above the platform that's right above us."

" Maybe we'll talk to her during the next cycle of time."

Princess Twilight nodded. " That would be for the best as there's no telling how much you'll get done around here with only thirty hours left." Her Highness then noticed a flock of seagulls out in the ocean and bopped me on my head to get my attention. " What do you suppose those seagulls are doing over there?"

I looked out for myself. " I don't know but I wouldn't want to bother them."

" Is it just me or do you see something bobbing up and down on the water's surface?"

" Where?"

" By those seagulls." Twilight answered. " They're hovering around something."

I got up, placed my hand above my eyes, and looked out to see if I could spot what Her Highness was talking about. Sure enough, something was bobbing up and down beneath the seagulls yet there was no way of knowing what it was unless I swam over there. At the very least, the seagulls weren't attacking it--they were merely hovering around it--so I had a chance of getting to it and perhaps bring it back to shore.

Since I had no time to change out of my tunic--I didn't have a swimsuit and the alternative wasn't an option--I jumped into the water and discovered that it was warm. It wasn't as warm as the hot spring water from Snowhead, but it was definitely warmer than it ought to be. At first I thought I'd sink due to having so much heavy equipment on my person but I couldn't allow such a drawback prevent me from finding out what was out there. Unlike Woodfall that only featured small bodies of water, Great Bay had an entire ocean so swimming to the best of my abilities was in order otherwise I would likely drown.

That's when I noticed something moving about underwater... a lot of somethings given how there were several tiny objects swimming about and a larger one moving about slowly on the ocean's floor. Whatever they were, I had to ignore them and find out what had gotten the interest of those seagulls.

With all the strength I could muster, I swam out towards the bobbing object only to hear someone calling out to me. Well... I wouldn't say they were calling but rather struggling to utter a few words. They did sound like they were in desperate need of help so I continued swimming until I reached what wasn't just an object. No... It was a person. No... It was a Zora yet there was something strange going on with them. Zoras were at home in the water due to being fish-like yet this one looked like a beached whale in the water. Either they weren't very good at swimming--a weird thought--or something must have happened.

" Unghhh... Somebody..."

" What's wrong?" I asked.

" Unghh... Please..."

" Are you alright?"

" G-gu-hu... Get me... to shore..."

Whoever this Zora was, he was definitely having problems. I had to help him get to shore otherwise the underwater creatures could attack and even kill him. It took me a few moments to figure out a means of pushing him back to shore, but the solution involved grabbing onto one of his fins and push. I hoped that he wouldn't be offended by my actions as I didn't say any other alternative.

Grabbing a fin, I began to swim, pushing the Zora forward at the same time, and both of us began to slowly make our way to the shore. Since his face was submerged underwater, there was no way of knowing if he was from the world that I now called home or from Equestria. He remained deathly quiet and I feared that he had succumbed to whatever happened to him, but upon arriving back at the shore, he slowly got onto his feet before walking forward in intense pain.

This continued on for several moments before he collapesd onto the sand. I quickly got out of the water and rushed over before turning him over onto his back. Unlike the Zora I encountered on my previous journey, this one had tattoos all across his arms. While I wasn't going to question his choice of wanting them, they didn't go well with his overall complexion. When I looked at his face, I didn't recognize who he was yet Her Highness seemed to.

" Thunderlane!?" Twilight exclaimed.

" Who is that?"

" He's a Pegasus." Twilight answered. " He lives in Ponyville and is a Wonderbolt Trainee, yet while Rainbow Dash--my version--berates him sometimes because of his lax attitude when it comes to flying, he is very dependable when you need him. I'm surprised that he would be here of all places."

" What do you think happened to him?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I don't know but those cuts all across his body tell me that he might not make it."

Thunderlane then spoke. " Unnggghhh... Am I... on shore?"

" Yes." I answered. " I brought you back here."

" Thank you... for bringing me to shore... Uuungh... I am Mikau of the Zora people... guitarist in the Zora band..." Thunderlane said in a weak voice. " I... didn't think anyone noticed me out there in the ocean... yet you brought me back to shore. While I appreciate... your kindness towards me whoever you are... I think this is it for me... My final message... I must share with someone... my terrible fate through song."

Was he being serious!? He wanted to tell me what happened to him by singing!? I supposed it made sense since he did say that he was a guitarist, and I could relate to him on a personal level given that I was a guitarist as well. Still, the thought of Thunderlane performing a solo act while in so much pain was poor judgment on his part. Most people would simply tell their story to anyone who would listen yet he wanted to go all out.

Thunderlane continued. " ...Will you listen to it?"

I nodded my head. " Yes."

" Then let me begin." Thunderlane said. He suddenly got up onto his feet and pulled out what looked to be a giant skeleton of a fish from behind his back. It was certainly ghastly in appearance until I noticed several guitar strings had been strewn across the spine of the fish. Did Thunderlane possess what amounted to as a fish-bone guitar!? Like I've said before, just when things couldn't get any stranger, they end up doing exactly that. " One! Two! Three!!!" (1)

" Is he really doing this?" Twilight asked. " I'm... speechless."

" Looks like that's a yes." I answered. " We might as well let him do it."

" Oh, baby, baby, listen to me!

The carnival's beginning soon.

We're the ones they're waiting to

see."

" But that girl, our vocalist...

She laid some strange eggs.

And she's lost her voice,

You can't hear what she says." Thunderlane sang.

I had to admit that his lyrics were pretty catchy although his choice of music left something to be desired. He also moved his body about as he strummed his guitar and it made him come off as being wild and not wanting to be controlled.

It took me a few moments to figure out the meaning behind his words. Miss Pommel mentioned before that the Indigo-Go's--no doubt Thunderlane was referring to them when he mentioned that he was part of a band--but they weren't aware that the carnival had been cancelled due to Monsieur Aroma. I wanted to set him straight and mention that his band wasn't going to be performing, but instead he continued with his ballad.

" Whoa-oh! In Great Bay now

somethin' is a-happenin'.

Is it now?"

" Oh! Baby, listen to me.

I don't wanna beg.

Gerudo Pirates!

They stole that girl's eggs."

" Sunset!" Twilight exclaimed. " Did you hear that?"

I nodded. " The Gerudo stole the eggs that were laid by their lead singer."

" Do you think Ganondorf is involved?"

" No, I don't think so." I answered. " Stealing eggs would be far beneath his contempt and besides, the only thing he yearns for is power. If he were associated with the Gerudo of this world, he wouldn't have forced them to acquire something like Zora eggs."

" Then these Gerudo are different from him?"

" Seems to be."

" I went to stop the Gerudo Pirates,

then pow and bam!

I got knocked down,

and here I am!" Thunderlane sang.

" What do you make of that, Sunset?"

" I don't think his wounds are the result of pirates."

" Yes." Twilight nodded. " Those wounds look like they were done by monsters as opposed to swords."

Thunderlane obviously didn't notice that he was bleeding all across his body, yet what Her Highness said had me concerned regarding what lurked underwater. Judging from his physique, monsters shouldn't have been able to inflict so many wounds on Thunderlane, but they had and it felt really uncomforting knowing that those same creatures could effectively do the same thing to me. There was no doubt that Starlight was responsible for the monster infestation yet I had no idea where they were coming from.

My eyes suddenly drifted towards a large object located way out in the ocean but I couldn't make out what it was. Whatever lurked out there was covered in a veil of clouds--I didn't know what it was and clouds were the first thing I thought of--but before I could think more about it, Thunderlane continued singing.

" Baby! If I die like this...

Even if I die...

It won't be in peace...

That's for suuure!

" Somebody, please rescue her eggs

before the pirates take their toll.

Oh, somebody, somebody,

please heal my soul."

" That's all... Thank you!"

Suddenly, Thunderlane collapsed onto the sand, his guitar landing a short distance away, and I immediately ran over to him to see if he was okay. I quickly placed my fingers on
his neck to see if there was a pulse, and there was but it was barely there.

" What do we do now?"

" He won't survive those wounds." Twilight answered. " I doubt that even the strongest of healing magic can save him."

" Just before he collapsed, Thunderlane mentioned something about his soul."

" I heard him say something to that effect but I couldn't quite catch it."

I dropped to knees, leaned forward, and spoke above Thunderlane's face. " Did you mention your soul?"

Thunderlane was barely able to nod his head. " Gugh-hunh... M-my eyes... Everything's all hazy... Ha... So this is what death... feels like. I never thought... it would happen to me... but that's what can happen when you act... heroic and... want to do the right thing. Soon, I'll be just another wave in the ocean... destined to disappear." He then coughed up some blood before opening his eyes wide. " My soul... I need it healed otherwise I'll die regretting... not being able to save those eggs. My life... there's no way I'll be using it any longer so please... can you help me?"

" Yes... I can heal your soul." I said as I took out the Ocarina of Time.

" Are you sure about this, Sunset?"

I nodded my head. " Thunderlane is desperate to have his soul healed otherwise he'll be tormented in the afterlife, and I don't want him to go through that. Besides, I have a pretty good idea what will happen. Now I just need a few moments to remember how it went." The Song of Healing was something I've rarely played given there weren't many people in Termina who needed their souls healed other than the dead or those that were close to being dead.

Fortunately, it didn't take nearly as long to remember the notes, so I played the song and Thunderlane started to feel the effects though not at first. I actually thought it wasn't working as he wasn't moving but that changed when his body began to sparkle in a faint light.

" Oh, yeah! That hot sound shoots right to my heart."

A bright light then flashed and I found myself in absolute darkness though Thunderlane was also with me albeit further ahead. He stepped onto what I assumed was a floor before opening his eyes, and that's when someone walked towards him wearing a beautiful blue coloured gown. I couldn't see who this Zora was as her face was shrouded in darkness, but I knew that she was of importance to Thunderlane as he smiled in her presence. His fish-bone guitar suddenly appeared next to him, hovering slightly above the ground, and he picked it up, held the female Zora's hand in his own, and they turned towards several other Zora off in the distance.

I couldn't tell who any of them were either as their faces were shrouded, but their instruments were a combination of unique and freaky due to them being the skeletal remains of aquatic creatures--as far as I could tell. Thunderlane and the female Zora walked towards the others before everything went bright again.

When my vision came back to me, the faint sparkling light that had surrounded Thunderlane had gotten more intense until his entire body disappeared into the ether leaving behind a mask that looked like his face, but was more generic looking. The mask fell onto the sand and I picked it up knowing the significance behind it. Much like what happened when I healed Maud's soul, I had inherited Thunderlane's mission that he wasn't able to finish. I had to rescue the Zora eggs that had been taken by the Gerudo pirates.

" That's the Zora Mask." Twilight said. " I don't need to explain what will happen when you wear it."

" This makes my third transformation mask."

" Yes and I have a hunch you'll be using your upcoming new form extensively while we're in this region."

I sighed. " What about the Deku and Goron Masks? Am I going to stop using them since I have this new one? I mean, I know that I briefly became a Deku to rescue that Stray Fairy, but you know what I mean, don't you, Twilight?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " And it confirmed a theory I've had. In Woodfall, since Deku Scrubs live there, you had to use the Deku Mask because much of what you had to overcome was geared towards them. The same can be said about Snowhead and the Goron Mask in that what you overcame up in the mountains could only be done by a Goron. In Great Bay, a Zora will be needed to overcome whatever challenges await us, but you might need the power of your other forms for a couple of small tasks."

" And the final region."

" I don't know."

" Should I try this new mask out?"

" You might as well."

Before I could put on the Zora Mask, Thunderlane's spirit appeared in front of me. " WAAAAH!" I yelled.

" What you hold in your hands is my spirit sealed within a mask, but I am fine with this because I know that I have left my life in your hands. Carve my farewell song on my grave... and use my guitar as its marker. I'm depending on you to help that singer girl..." Thunderlane then produced his guitar and began to play it before disappearing again. While I was tempted to change into a Zora, I had to carry out his final request.

I grabbed his guitar and walked across the sand, avoiding the Leevers in the process, until I was standing just to the left of the path that went back to Termina Field. Despite not really knowing him at all, my heart felt as though I had known Thunderlane my entire life. What kind of marker would be a perfect representation of the kind of person he was? A pair of sticks that had been scattered on the sand gave me an idea as to what to do.

Putting the guitar down, I walked over to the sticks, grabbed them, walked back, and began making a makeshift grave marker. Since I didn't have the proper meant with which to make the marker, I had to make do with going extremely primitive. First, I thrust one stick into the sand following by pushing the second one through a hole that was in the first one. I checked to make sure it was sturdy before placing his guitar up against it, and just like that I had finished making his grave. While it wasn't as impressive looking as what Maud had been given by the Gorons, the other Zora weren't aware that Thunderlane was dead.

" What do you think?"

" It will do given what you lacked." Twilight answered. " Also, you chose a good spot for it. Had you put it anywhere else, those Leevers might have desecrated it by simply knocking it over and trampling on the guitar."

" We should have a moment of silence."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I agree."

I bowed my head and remained quiet for a minute before looking down at the mask again. By wearing it on my face, I would become Thunderlane, or rather the character he was portraying, and continue on with his mission. One thought crossed my mind and it involved my gender, a strange thing to think about. I'm a girl and by donning this mask, I would become a guy, changing my gender until I took it off when I needed to be human again. Perhaps I was thinking too much into it? It shouldn't really bother me yet my mind brought it up so it must be somewhat concerning.

There was no point in worrying about until after I changed though I was worried about the transition. Whenever I put on one of these transformation masks, I always go through an ugly transition. I hoped that this time would be different.

After breathing several times, I turned the mask around, and placed it on my face. The magic contained within the mask immediately started to affect me and I could feel my body beginning the transformation, but unlike before, I just ducked my head down slightly. No convulsions or stumbling about. Perhaps this transition would be easy on me but I'd be wrong about that when I suddenly screamed at the top of my lungs, the mask's face looking like something one would find in their worst nightmares.

Once my head stopped spinning, I took a single step forward so that I could regain my balance, and straight away I felt slightly taller than before. I also felt more graceful, like my entire body wanted to dance about because of being able to appreciate nature. Was this what it felt like to be a Zora?

" Twilight?" I asked. " How do I look?"

" That's difficult for me to answer."

" What do you mean?"

" You might want to look at your reflection." Twilight answered. " I think you might be surprised."

I didn't understand what she was talking about so I walked over to the water's edge and looked down at my reflection. " Is... Is this... me?" I was expecting to look slightly similar to Thunderlane, yet that couldn't be further from the truth. Instead, my appearance was that of a female Zora though I was wearing a green skirt, brown boots, and brown fingerless gloves, referencing the clothes I wore " What are these things!?" Covering my breasts were what appeared to be scales but I couldn't tell for sure nor was I planning on figuring out why.

I had a fin growing out the back of my head, and it featured a green coloured tinge on the tip, referencing my hat. In front of that green tinge was a tinge of red and orange in a streaking pattern, a reference to my natural hair colour. Lastly, unlike Thunderlane who had tattoos on his arms, I didn't have any which was both a relief and concerning. No doubt that he was well known among his people so if I come across them in this form, would they even recognize me, err, him?

" You look gorgeous."

" I'm surprised you would say something like that, Twilight."

" Hanging around Rarity will do that to you."

I then noticed I had fins on my arms. " I wonder what these are for?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I'm not sure as I don't know anything about the Zora."

" Let me try something." I closed my eyes and began to concentrate. The fins suddenly extended out on their own and looked like a pair of blades, one on each arm and were almost the size of my body. It wasn't painful or anything when it happened but it did catch me by surprise. " Whoa! Did you see that?"

" Those fins look like they could be used as swords."

I began swinging my arms around and found that it wasn't very easy to maintain my balance. The fins felt heavy although I attributed that to not being adjusted to my new body, a fact that needed to be rectified quickly if I was to carry on Thunderlane's mission. A few more swings resulted in my falling down and landing face-first into the sand--if I were practicing to join a team, I was failing in a spectacular fashion.

Getting back onto my feet, I continued swinging my arms around in hopes of improving, but I should've known that nothing can be mastered quickly. Another face-first in the sand experience and I was ready to call it quits.

" Crap!" I sighed. " This isn't as easy as it looks."

" Compared to Deku Scrubs and Gorons, Zoras have a steep learning curve." Twilight said. " If you can't figure out how to get used to that body, you won't be able to get back those stolen eggs. Maybe you should make your way down to wherever it is that the Zoras live and ask one of them to help you?"

I shook my head repeatedly. " If I did that, Thunderlane's reputation would be sunk."

" Then what should we do?"

" I don't know but I need to come up with something and soon." I answered. In a blind panic, I somehow fired the fins on my arms leaving me surprised. The fins travelled forward a few metres, curved around in a sharp arc in opposite directions, and travelled back before reattaching to my arms. " What in the world just happened?" I looked down at my arms and sweat trickled down my face. " How did I fire those? How can my body separate bits of itself? How... How... I don't even know anymore."

" Calm down, Sunset." Twilight said. " Don't lose your composure."

I began breathing in-and-out to calm down but found that it wasn't working. " It's not helping!"

" Then maybe we should consult with Thunderlane."

" Excuse me!?"

" He can show you how to use your new body." Twilight said. " If anyone should know how he works, it would be him."

I scratched my head. " Um... How can I communicate with him when he's dead? It's not like I know how to perform a seance."

Princess Twilight pointed towards the grave marker. " Thunderlane said for you to carve his farewell song on the marker you made for him. If I'm right then you provided yourself with the necessary instructions on how to be a Zora, unintentionally of course."

Was the answer to my problem right in front of me and I didn't even realize it? I hoped that Thunderlane had left behind instructions that I could understand otherwise I was going to have a nightmare of an experience being a Zora.

(1) These lyrics are exactly how Mikau "sings" them in the game. I decided not to alter these in any way because I'm not experienced when it comes to making song lyrics, and I didn't want to tarnish what can be seen as an iconic scene in the game.

Chapter 35: Dysfunctional Band

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 28, 2016
Chapter 35: Dysfunctional Band.

Had I seriously carved song lyrics onto a grave!? I knew that Thunderlane wanted me to as a last request but now that I think about it, perhaps I should've asked him to write them down on a piece of paper. In any case, I looked at the fish-bone guitar he left behind and discovered that it had writing. The words were written in a strange language which I assumed was Zora script yet I could understand them clearly as though it were English. If I had tried to read this as a human, it would've have appeared as nothing but gibberish. The words started out with an epitaph dedicated to Thunderlane or rather who he portrayed.

Herein lies Mikau, the legendary
guitarist of the Zora tribe. He is
to be remembered in song, and his
lyrics are written here. (1)

Below this were two sets of lyrics that seemed to describe what he was capable of doing as a Zora. I never realized until now that this was what I had written down before his spirit disappeared into the next life. The first one was called "We the Zora" and while the name could've used some work, I felt it resonating within my heart because being one of the Zora myself. I began reading and it felt like he was right next to me, guiding me on being able to perform the abilities of his people.

"Sharp fins are the mark of the Zora. While others think they are merely for show, they are blades, extensions of ourselves that we use in our everyday lives. We swim using them, speeding through water as though we were one with the seas. We are graceful, swimming with such speed. We are gorgeous, envy of others who don't understand our ways. We are masters of the ocean! Those who possess magic can perform an ability known only to a chosen few. A shield is produced to deflect enemies! It can also defeat weak foes who try to dominate what is ours and ours alone. Oh-oh... We the Zora."

That was certainly some useful information although the lyrics didn't sound all that good. Then again, that is what Thunderlane told me to carve onto his grave. How did I know what words he wanted to have carved? It's not like he had any time to teach me them before he passed on from this world. Once again, I realized that there was no point in trying to figure out how this video game world was supposed to work. I should've realized that any attempt to do just that resulted in nothing but headache.

Still, I learned that I could swim incredibly fast while in this body--if Rainbow saw me swimming around at such speeds, her jaw would drop and it would be epic--yet it was the magic shield that formed through the use of magic. It may not have been offensive like the bubbles and spikes were for my other forms, but defence was something I felt I needed due to knowing my journey was about to get more difficult from this point onward.

The other set of lyrics was called the "Zora Fight Song". Why would a Zora need to know how to fight? I always assumed that they were a peaceful race who loved to swim about without a care in the world. Could it be that Thunderlane was an exception to his people? If so then it did explain how he ended up so beaten up when I found him. In any case, I began to read these lyrics.

"My punches are ones of anger! With every chop that you make, the fury builds and cannot be stopped. The flurry of attacks will go from the punch to the kick leaving enemies unable to respond to such fury. If you feel that an enemy resists the flurry then my deadly move will make them regret ever seeing you. By aiming one's fins and concentrating, one can fire them like boomerangs that will cut down anything that stands in your way. Such sharp power is known as the double cutters. Use it well and nothing can stop you! The Zora fight with so much might, enemies won't ever known what got them! Oh-oh... We the Zora!"

Well, I had used my fins in the manner in which he spoke of, but not very well given how I stumbled about. Concentration was the key to making them do what I wanted though it was going to take me some time to get used to it even with knowing what to do.

" Did you understand everything, Sunset?" Twilight asked. " I personally got the gist of it although those lyrics were pretty wordy."

" Wait! How can you read Zora script? You're not a Zora!"

" No, but I can read them just fine."

I scratched my head. " Maybe fairies can read other languages?"

Princess Twilight chuckled. " I did do that when you read those words on Maud's grave. I guess I'm more observant than you are, Sunset, but I won't hold it against you seeing as you've got a lot on your mind what with having to continue Thunderlane's mission of retrieving those eggs. I wonder where we need to go in order to find the pirate's hideout? He never did give us any hints about that."

" We could always ask Pinkie." I said, pointing up towards where she was floating in the sky. " She's been pretty good at giving us advice and I could do with purchasing a new map since this is a new area and all."

" Do you have enough rupees?"

I took out my wallet and began to comb through it. " It looks like I have about thirty rupees but I don't recall picking any up along the way."

" Maybe you picked them up while riding on Epona?"

" That doesn't sound possible."

" Does anything in this world make sense, Sunset?"

" No, I guess not."

" At least you have money otherwise you'd have to go back to Termina Field and scrounge up some rupees by cutting down bushes." Twilight said. That's when she noticed something and immediately went silent. I waved my hand in front of her and she didn't flinch, so I looked in the direction she was and saw what had caught her attention. " What in the world is Flash Sentry doing over there on top of that house? Come to think of it, he wasn't there when you took Epona over there before."

" Maybe he just arrived?"

" That doesn't make sense." Twilight answered. " I mean, I'm glad that he's here as he has given you some sage advice, and I guess I want to see him for... well... you know, those kinds of reasons? You know what I'm saying, right?"

I rolled my eyes. Her Highness still had some romantic feelings for Flash despite not coming to the world that I called home as often as she used to. To be fair, their romance wasn't going to work out and not because he was a human and she was a pony. No, the reason it wouldn't work was because she had her princess duties in Equestria that required her to be there at all times thus leaving her little room to pay me or anyone else at Canterlot High a visit. Besides, I had a feeling Flash was going to focus on Twilight Sparkle although I heard from him just after the Friendship Games that he didn't realize that she wasn't the Twilight that he knew.

Maybe I ought to talk to Flash the next time I see him and not in this world--he wouldn't even understand what I say if I begin bringing up the human world--so that I can tell it to him straight without hurting his feelings. He was a pretty sensitive guy whose tough act protected a nervous individual who was still trying to find his place. Her Highness was easier to deal with as she could easily understand that their romance would never happen. Still, I felt bad knowing that I would be the one to end their relationship although it had to be done for the good of both of them.

Sighing, I climbed up a ladder until I was standing in front of the building that was situated out on the ocean. A sign nearby said that this was the "Oceanside Laboratory" and that the proprietor was conducting ocean research. Perhaps whoever worked here knew something about Great Bay and could tell me where I could find those pirates, but my first priority involved talking to Pinkie Pie. As always, she was off in her own little world, ignoring everything around her while she worked on creating those maps. I supposed I was jealous of her carefree attitude and longed to be able to relax once this adventure had concluded.

I aimed my Zora up at her balloon, concentrated as hard as I could, and fired them only to miss her by about several feet. When my fins came back to me, I realized that I needed to bring her down as a human by firing an arrow from my bow. The thought of changing back after only being a Zora for several minutes was disheartening, but Pinkie's knowledge was much more important.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask, flipped back my head, and put it away before taking out my bow. Unlike with the Goron Mask, I wasn't sweaty or anything when I changed back from being a Zora. Perhaps this was because being an aquatic creature kept me moist although thinking about it like that freaked me out a little. Shivering, I aimed up, fired an arrow that popped Pinkie's balloon, and she dropped down, landing on the ground buckling her legs.

" Yeow!" Pinkie Pie shouted. " Why do my legs always suffer like that?"

" I didn't mean to bring you down so forcefully."

Pinkie Pie looked at me. " Well, I suppose that was one way of getting my attention but could you please be more gentle next time? I don't know why but my legs have been feeling weaker as of late as though something kept on bringing me down from the sky. Eh... I suppose it's just me overthinking again." That's when she noticed my clothes and the fairy that was floating around me. " What's this? Green clothes? White fairy? Madam! Are you perchance... a forest fairy?"

I rubbed the bridge of my nose. One thing I had grown tired of was Pinkie's introduction yet she couldn't help herself what with me resetting time. " Yes, I am a forest fairy so please don't make such a big deal about it, okay?"

" That wasn't very fun."

" Sorry but I've seen this enough times now."

Pinkie gave me a puzzled look. " But... This is the first time I've ever seen you before."

Crap! I also forgot that she doesn't remember me. Once again I allowed my temper to get the better of me so I quickly had to change my tune. " Sorry about that. I mistook you for someone else who goes around dressed up in that unique getup. People in town told me that you're who I need to see about getting maps of areas across Termina." Part of me felt weird explaining something I had already explained before, yet I knew there was no other alternative. Such was the displeasure of resetting time: You had to repeat yourself knowing that the party receiving your explanation doesn't remember the previous encounters.

" Really?" Pinkie Pie asked. " People in Clock Town think that way about Tingle? I didn't think they noticed me."

" Oh they notice you alright." I said under my breath.

" Did you say something?"

" Nothing."

Pinkie gave me a scornful expression but quickly resumed her bubbly self. " So, you're looking for a map of Great Bay? Tingle has a map of this region that I can sell to you, and since you look like an adventurer, Mrs. Fairy, I think you want to know something about this area. Is Tingle correct? Do you want to know more, Mrs. Fairy?"

I nodded my head. " I could really do with some information."

" Map first, information later."

" Okay, so how much do I need to pay you for the map?"

" That would be twenty rupees for the map of Great Bay." Pinkie Pie answered. " Or I could sell you a map of Ikana for forty rupees but then you would need to be over there if you're trying to earn my discount."

" I'll go with the first option."

" Okee-Dokie-Lokie!" Pinkie Pie said in a cheerful tone. It felt nice hearing her say those words but it would have been even better had she been her true self instead of this character who went around the land drawing maps all while wearing a questionable outfit. " I am so happy that you're buying one of Tingle's maps. I don't sell as many as I would like and it makes me sad as I do this to help my father. He says Tingle should stop wearing this attire but why should Tingle do so? I make wearing this look good." She reached into her pocket--I assumed that's what it was--and she produced a map that she proceeded to hand over to me.

" So this is a map of Great Bay?"

" Yep."

" Now about that information."

" Tingle knows plenty of things around Great Bay."

" Such as?"

" The Zora tribe has recently acquired some new members when their famous singer laid some eggs." Pinkie Pie answered. " No one knew that she was expecting so it was a surprise to everyone yet they say there is something strange about the eggs. Unfortunately, some mean people stole the eggs about two nights ago. This resulted in the Zora mother becoming unable to speak."

" It was the Gerudo Pirates, right?"

" Wow! You must be psychic, Mrs. Fairy!"

" Call it an obvious guess." I said. " Where are they now?"

" At their fortress located on the north end of Great Bay." Pinkie Pie answered. She then noticed that I had the urge to go there right away but quickly raised her hands up in front of me to discourage me from going. " I wouldn't try going there if I were you, Mrs. Fairy unless you want to die. The Gerudo Pirates are notorious for being ruthless towards anyone who even remotely thinks about wanting to sneak inside. Unless you were that Zora hero then the chances of you succeeding are slim to none. Besides, it's not like they will open their doors just because you say so."

" Doors?"

" The main entrance to their fortress consists of these two huge doors that are impossible to destroy. I'm not sure if there are any other entrances but I'm sure that Zora hero knew of one as he usually goes there in order to sort them out whenever they go too far." Pinkie Pie answered.

Thunderlane knew of an entrance and he didn't bother to tell me that!? I wanted to rip out some of my hair in sheer frustration but that would've only given strange looks from both Pinkie and Her Highness. Maybe it was possible that I could gain access to Thunderlane's memories upon changing into a Zora. I had his abilities so it would make sense if I had his memories as well. It would make finding an entrance to the pirate's fortress a lot easier other than running around blindly.

If that doesn't work then I would have no other choice but to talk to the Zoras themselves. Surely one of them would have told something to Thunderlane or at least acted as a trusted confidant whom he could share some secrets with.

Pinkie then looked at me with a big smile on her face. Even when she was wearing a ridiculous outfit, it was impossible for me or anyone else to ignore such an adorable face though her random nature could stand to be improved. It quickly dawned on me that Pinkie was forcing me to come up with another question by using her smile. Quickly, I looked around in hopes of finding something and I found something that could prove useful.

" What do they do in this laboratory?"

" The scientist who lives there studies the ocean as a hobby." Pinkie Pie answered. " But she spends most of the time looking at her giant tank."

I blinked. " Did you say, tank?"

" Yeah! She has a huge tank filled with water."

I honestly thought she meant the other kind of tank but I should've known better than that. " Why would the scientist have a giant tank of water? Unless... Is she using it to further advance her studies?"

" Of course not, silly." Pinkie Pie answered. " The tank was created some time ago to give the Zora eggs the proper environment for them to hatch in due to how weird the water has been getting lately. The scientist is an old friend of a Zora and agreed to help by setting aside some water. Tingle doesn't understand the entirety of their arrangement but I am sure you can ask her yourself if you go inside. By the way, Mrs. Fairy... Have you ever heard of seahorses?"

Were they the same as the mythical sea ponies that existed underwater throughout the oceans of Equestria? Granted, some of them were aggressive from what I recalled from my studies of them while others were more playful. Either way, they rarely interacted with ponies although they were acknowledged by Princess Celestia as being creatures of Equestria. As for an actual seahorse itself, I remember learning about them in science class yet I didn't pay much attention. It was at the time when I wasn't the nicest of people and believed that I was destined for greater things even if it meant making other people miserable.

I shook my head. " No, I've never heard of them."

" They are a rare creature."

" How so?"

" Many Zora have been trying to find them for a long time." Pinkie Pie answered. " They believe that finding a seahorse will grant you tremendous luck but then they are the only ones who know how to reach a place called Pinnacle Rock." She then pointed towards the beach at the building Epona was resting in front of. " The fisherman who lives there has been bragging about getting a seahorse though none of the Zora believe him. Tingle doesn't know whether it's true or not but you could always ask him if you want. Oh yeah! Whatever you do, don't go into the building next to his unless you like creepy crawlies."

" It's infested with bugs?"

" Golden bugs."

" What do you mean?"

" That building is infested with golden spiders though no one knows why."

" Gold Skulltulas?"

" Is that what they are called?" Pinkie Pie asked. " Tingle always thought they were called golden spiders. I did see someone snooping around there the other day but he didn't come back today. Maybe he was frightened off by the thought of golden spiders wandering about in there, yet he was carrying a large wallet that could probably hold a lot of money. That is something Tingle needs more of. Tingle needs more rupees to help my father. Well, that's it for information, Mrs. Fairy, so I hope I was helpful to you."

I nodded my head. " More than you realize."

" Okee-Dokie-Lokie!" Pinkie Pie exclaimed. " If you need another one of Tingle's maps, you know how to call me although please be gentle next time. My legs might not be able to take the strain if I continue dropping out of the sky when my balloon gets popped. Well, call again. Tingle-Tingle-Kooloo-Limpah!" She performed a quick dance before finishing by scattering confetti all around. While it wasn't particularly amusing, I didn't say anything in case I offended her. " These are the magic words Tingle created herself. Don't steal them!"

With that, she began to inflate her balloon and was soon up in the air again leaving Princess Twilight and I to ponder over our next move. We had learned a great deal of information from Pinkie Pie this time although she didn't mention certain things such as knowing the location of where the Zora lived. Granted, I should have asked her the question when I had the chance and while I could bring her back down and ask, it would be a waste of her time.

I wasn't completely lost though. Miss Pommel mentioned that the Zoras lived in a place called Zora Hall so at least I knew the name although that meant nothing without knowing the exact location. Then again, there wasn't much to Great Bay other than going up and down along the beach. The chances of finding Zora Hall were pretty good since I didn't have much to explore, yet a part of me still wanted to visit the Pirate's Fortress since that was where the eggs had been taken to. My heart wanted to help those eggs yet my head was telling me that going there now would be nothing short of a suicide.

Without knowing exactly how to get in there not to mention what was waiting inside, I would have to go there once I had enough information. There was one thing I was curious about regarding the pirates. Assuming that the Zora watched over the eggs constantly, how did the pirates get past and steal them from under the Zora's noses? Also, did the pirates have their own version of Ganondorf in charge? If he was here, how would he differ from the one who had been tormenting me? Just thinking about such a prospect sent a chill down my spine. I hoped it wasn't true.

" What do you want to do now?" Twilight asked.

" I want to go to the Pirate's Fortress but I don't think that would be wise."

" No, it wouldn't." Twilight said. " If you go there without knowing what to expect, you could end up being their prisoner or even worse. Pinkie said that only one Zora has ever gone up against the pirates on a regular basis and that Zora was Thunderlane. That tells us that the Zora are not fighters aside from him."

" And the Gerudo?"

" I'm going to assume that they are fighters."

" That does explain some things."

" It does?"

" I was thinking about how the pirates stole those eggs." I answered. " They could have used their superior fighting skill and overpowered the Zora thus enabling them to steal the eggs without any problems."

" Maybe, but I think they relied on stealth."

" Really?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. I doubted the pirates wanted to engage in a confrontation with the Zora so their best option was to steal the eggs without anyone knowing they were there to begin with. They might have had a secret tunnel or something similar that allowed them to get inside undetected."

" That does sound more plausible."

" We won't know for certain until we see Zora Hall for ourselves."

" Should we leave and come back here during the next cycle of time?"

" No, I think we should continue going." Twilight answered. " We should get as much as we can get done around here before resetting time. I have this feeling that you'll need all the time you can muster to explore the Pirate's Fortress, and trying to start it now wouldn't give you that much time."

The only options I had were to see what Flash Sentry wanted or pay a visit to this scientist who lived in the building I was standing in front of. My first instinct told me to go see Flash as he would no doubt dispense some valuable words of wisdom, yet Her Highness began tugging on my ear as though to say she wanted me to see the scientist. Despite everything she had been through as a princess in Equestria, she still had trouble dealing with the likes of Flash--Was I ever this bad? He's not the same person that she grew attracted to as here he is a different person, but because she is both my friend and mentor, I decided to go inside before going over to him.

As I reached for the doorknob, I could hear the sounds of someone complaining coming from the other side. It sounded like the scientist wasn't happy about something so hopefully they wouldn't view me as being a nuisance. Turning the knob and opening the door--it made a very loud clicking sound--I went inside and Princess Twilight's eyes immediately became mesmerized by what we were seeing. The laboratory contained various scientific devices strewn about the room that caught her attention, yet what caught mine was the giant tank of water that Pinkie Pie mentioned. She wasn't kidding when she said it was huge.

It had enough water that could fill up a swimming pool so why did some Zora eggs need all that space? Granted, I wasn't an expert on how Zoras worked when it came to their reproductive cycles, but still, it was a little ridiculous to the point of being sheer overkill. Another thing I noticed was a small fish tank to the right of the front door. Inside the tank was a strange looking fish that I could swear winked at me every few moments. It's not that I was afraid of it but rather nervous that it was doing that to begin with.

That's when I noticed the scientist, who was staring at the tank all while complaining about why someone was taking so long to get here. I didn't know who she was talking about yet it was obvious she wasn't happy. This was going to be difficult no doubt. I couldn't tell who it was since they were facing away from me, but when the scientist suddenly turned around--probably due to feeling the draft coming from outside, I was staring at a somewhat familiar face. She merely coughed before turning her attention back to watching the giant tank leaving to wonder if it was a good idea being here.

" Daring Do..." Twilight began. " I'm surprised that she is the scientist here. In Equestria, she's a famous archaeologist who goes around finding hidden artefacts and donating them to museums, and also goes undercover as A.K. Yearling, a famous author. Why would someone like her be in such a perfect place like this?

I rolled my eyes. " I knew you'd like this place, Twilight. It just screams research to you, doesn't it? But, what did you mean about A.K. Yearling?"

" You've read some of her books?"

" Back when I was Princess Celestia's student."

" I didn't think you did considering--"

" I may have been self-centered and a brat but I enjoyed a good read every now and again."

" That's something new I've learned about you, Sunset." Twilight said. " Anyway, A.K Yearling is in fact Daring Do although only the pony versions of our friends and myself know the truth, as she wishes to keep that under wraps. I don't know why she does that although if I were to make a guess, it's to avoid those who pursue her."

" Archaeologists do make enemies of treasure hunters."

" So very true."

Daring Do had been ignoring us the entire time although her sudden loud cough indicated otherwise. " Are you done talking with that fairy? I need to concentrate so that I can take care of those eggs when they arrive. They're late! What are those Zoras doing? They should have been here by now. I thought I told Evan the Zora representative needed to be punctual given how fragile those eggs can be, yet she insisted that Mikau be the one to bring them. Sigh... I'll bet he's having a lot of fun beating up on those accursed Gerudo pirates all because of his heroic blood."

I gulped softly. She wasn't aware that Thunderlane was dead and that I was the one who had been tasked with finishing his mission. No wonder Daring Do was so annoyed over having to wait for "the representative" as she called it. It all started to make sense now. He was supposed to bring the Zora eggs here yet that wasn't going to happen now. I also began to understand why Daring Do had a giant tank of water in her laboratory. Those eggs were meant to be placed inside but why would they need to come here? Shouldn't they be reunited with the Zora that laid them in the first place?

" Um..." I began. " I was wondering if you could help me with something."

" I have no time to deal with the likes of a child."

" Well, I came here to see the Zora eggs hatch--"

" What did you say?" Daring Do asked as she span around to look directly at me. " What is it, girl? Did you also come to watch the Zora eggs hatch? Hold on... How do you know about that? I thought the only ones who knew were the band members and myself?"

I began to sweat profusely. Crap! I mentioned something that I should've have and now Daring Do was about to grill me. I needed to come up with an excuse and fast before she suspects something was amiss. " I heard about them from a Zora with a fish-bone guitar who came through this area recently."

Daring Do rubbed the bridge of her nose before moaning. " Ugh! I should have known Mikau would tell a complete stranger about the Zora eggs. He always was hot-headed, ignorant of what it means to keep secrets. At least he didn't tell anyone outside of the Indigo-Go's otherwise Zora Hall would be in an uproar."

" Did he say something wrong?"

" He lets his bravado get in the way of logical thinking."

" It sounds like you don't like him."

" No, I do." Daring Do said. " It's just that he sometimes doesn't think before he acts. If he could learn to be more responsible and not run head-long into danger then he just might live a lot longer than he would with his current course of action." I went limp knowing Thunderlane had died because of just that. " You seem a little pale, girl. Are you perchance suffering from drinking the water?"

I shook my head. " No, it's something else."

" Then pay me no mind." Daring Do said. " Anyway, since you know about the Zora eggs, I hope you're excited about them hatching. I'm excited about it, too, but those important eggs haven't arrived yet and I'm started to get worried." She walked over and placed her hand on the glass tank before staring into the deep recesses of water. I thought about comforting her but refrained given that I wasn't sure what her problem was. " It takes about one to three days from the time Zora eggs are laid for them to hatch."

" So then they were laid a couple of days ago?"

" Correct."

" What would happen if they hatch in the wrong location?"

" That would be disastrous." Daring Do answered. " If those eggs aren't placed into this tank then there is a good chance that they will die. I know it might sound absurd to you, girl, but my words are true. Things just haven't been going well at all in Great Bay ever since the water began to change."

" Why put the eggs in that tank?"

" Did you not hear me? It's because of the water or rather a combination of that and the weather." Daring Do answered. " For some unexplained reason, the weather in this region has become abnormal to the point where it's starting to affect everything. The Zora cannot swim about without being attacked by strange creatures that have suddenly appeared, the ocean temperature has risen, and worst of all, the ecosystem could collapse at any moment. Only those Gerudo aren't affected physically but their plundering of the Zoras has been diminished so there is at least some good news."

If only she knew what the pirates had done. My heart wanted me to tell her the truth about what had happened to both Mikau and the eggs, yet my brain was saying not to mention anything as it would only make things worse than they already were.

Daring Do noticed I was daydreaming and snapped her fingers causing me to come to my senses. " My explanation couldn't possibly be boring! I find you to be very rude for acting in such a manner, but then you are a child so ignoring authority is to be expected. Zora eggs are very sensitive to changes in the temperature and because of that they will die if they don't hatch while submerged in the appropriate temperatures. Fortunately, I was asked by an old friend of mine among the Zora to prepare something just in case something like this were to happen."

" So that's why you have this tank."

" Yes." Daring Do said. " The only way the eggs can hatch is if they're placed in this tank water, which I set aside for them long ago. It still contains the normal properties of the ocean and has not been tainted in any way. It is an ideal place for the Zora eggs to be hatched. The Zoras are well aware of this, but they're still late in bringing them here. I wonder if something happened at Zora Hall?"

I was about to tell her that the pirates had stolen the eggs but in the end I decided to go with my brain. I looked at Princess Twilight and I could tell that she knew that I had made the right decision by keeping my mouth shut. Despite knowing what was going on courtesy of Thunderlane, there was still much that wasn't clear to me. Was I doing the right thing by keeping Daring Do out of the loop? Perhaps, but then telling her would only result in her freaking out.

Things were much more dire than I originally thought. I thought that I could take as much time as possible to rescue the eggs and take them back to whoever laid them, but now it had become a race against time with the fate of the unborn Zora now hanging in the balance. Once again I was feeling an incredible weight was being pushed onto my shoulders due to being chosen to complete Thunderlane's final request. I thought about becoming a Zora and seeing how Daring Do would react, but I chose against doing that as well especially if it meant facing her wrath because of not having any of the eggs in my possession.

For the moment, there wasn't much I could do although I now knew that I needed to come back to the Oceanside Laboratory once I had all seven eggs. One thing did cross my mind and that was how was I supposed to carry the eggs around? It's not like they could be carried around like my usual equipment and items, and holding them in my hands would be both dangerous and rather unpleasant.

Daring Do then went back to looking at her tank, her hand gesture signalling that she wanted me to leave since I no longer had anything to say. As I turned and began walking towards the door, I wondered why she was acting so grouchy considering the Zora had so much more at stake regarding the eggs than she did. She was nothing more than a caretaker who would take care of things once the eggs arrived. While I appreciated her for wanting to help the Zora in their time of need, her attitude definitely needed some improvement. Hopefully, that same attitude would change upon bringing her what she wanted.

Opening the door and stepping outside, I could see that the sun was starting to rise and that meant I didn't have any time to waste. Flash Sentry was the next person I needed to see so without thinking, I dove into the water and began swimming back to shore as fast as I could. The skeletal fish from before started chasing me but they quickly lost interest and swam back to their territory once they realized I was too fast for them. In hindsight, I should have changed into a Zora but I figured that Flash would prefer to speak to me as a human, my true form and not an altered one.

It didn't take long for me to reach the shore though I was exhausted from swimming too fast, and when I climbed out of the water, my first instinct involved shaking my body to get rid of any excess water that was clinging onto my tunic. Flash was still situated on top of the house that belonged to the fisherman--I was surprised that he hadn't moved though I attribute that to his owl companion--so once I was high and dry, I ran across the beach avoiding Leevers as they popped up from beneath the sand, and reached the patch of grass near the house where I had left Epona.

" We meet again, fairy child." Flash Sentry said as I approached.

" Oh... Hi, um..." Twilight said.

" Is your fairy companion feeling alright?" Flash Sentry asked. " She seems to having trouble talking in my presence."

" Good to see you, here, again."

" I wish to speak to you of what you have accomplished thus far, but it is difficult for me to do so with your companion acting in such a way."

" What!? No! I'm not acting weird at all." Twilight said. " Me? No way. I'm perfectly fine. Don't be silly."

I thought it was adorable seeing Her Highness struggle but I knew that wasn't fair on her. I pointed at my hat to indicate that she should hide under there for a while until I was finished dealing with Flash, and while she was initially hesitant towards it, Princess Twilight knew that it was for the best. She quietly floated over to my head before wriggling her way under my hat. I breathed slightly knowing how awkward that was, yet now I could focus on Flash who still didn't know what to make of the situation. His owl companion simply turned its head upside in a creepy fashion--I couldn't tell if it was annoyed or expressing dismay.

Once I was sure Her Highness was okay, I began to talk to Flash. " I'm surprised to see you here although why did you appear now?"

" I have been here since before you first entered Great Bay." Flash Sentry answered. " I sense that you are confused by words so allow me to explain. I could have spoken to you the moment you arrived, but I feared that would have instilled intimidation given that this was a region completely foreign to you."

" You wanted me to explore on my own?"

Flash Sentry nodded. " I wanted to see if you could figure out why the beach has become troubled by a terrible curse. It appears that you have learned much by talking to those who are native to this region, and you have also acquired the power necessary to save those who live here."

" The Zora Mask?"

" Correct."

" If you knew that then why didn't you save Mikau?" I asked making sure not to refer to him as Thunderlane.

" Fate decided that you would be the one to heal his soul." Flash Sentry answered. " The Zora whose power resides in the mask you hold didn't realize it but he was doomed to perish against the darkness. I know it sounds horrible for me to say such a thing, yet my words speak a ring of truth. He was no match for what lurked below yet you stand a much better chance of succeeding and fulfilling his dying wish."

" Still, you could have saved him."

" If I had then you wouldn't have the power you hold now."

" Power isn't everything you know."

" The Zora would not have survived anyway." Flash Sentry said. " The wounds he sustained were fatal, no magic or potion could restore that which was no longer capable of holding onto his life. Thus, I could not save him as it would have amounted to nothing, and you would not have the means to save this region."

Even though his words were spiteful in nature and I wanted to throttle him for being selfish, I knew deep down that he was telling the truth. When I found Thunderlane bobbing up and down in the ocean, I believed that he could simply have shook off whatever had injured him and continued on. In truth, his wounds were much more severe and he was clinging to life when I found him.

Perhaps it was the guilt of not being able to save him that compelled me to lash out against Flash. I might not have known Thunderlane as much as Princess Twilight had, yet I felt such a strong connection between us that had culminated into me receiving a mask that contained his essence, his power. His wounds had occurred long before I first came to Termina so the chances of preventing his death were impossible. Not even the Song of Time could help me save him, as the power contained within the melody would send me to the beginning, and he sustained those injuries before that.

" What do I need to do?"

" The Zora... You must speak to the Zora and they shall guide you further."

" I'm not sure they'd be willing to listen to an outsider."

Flash Sentry chuckled, a rare occurrence given how calm and collected he usually was. " The Zora whose mission is now yours was famous among his kind. You shall have no problems learning what you need to know. You should also bring along as many pieces of glass as possible."

At first I didn't understand what he meant by that but I quickly deduced that he was referring to bottles. " Bottles? I have three already but I need more?"

Flash Sentry nodded. " You will come to understand my words when you finally enter the domain of the Zora's enemies. They are aware that the Zora hero will attempt to rescue what it was they stole but they aren't aware that you are the one who carries on his mission. They will not be able to predict your actions giving you an advantage. There is one other thing I can tell you about their fortress. A potion of life may prove essential and could allow you to become unseen."

" What does that even mean?"

" Seek out the one who is unseen."

" Huh?"

" It will become clear to you when the time comes." Flash Sentry answered. " Though you shall struggle in your efforts, you must continue to be brave and overcome what stands before you are to save this world from destruction. Two of the guardians have been free of the darkness that enchained them, yet the remaining guardians await you to free them. You must go now and seek the Zoras. Only they can help you any further and remember who you are when you confront them."

Before I had a chance to say something in response, Flash patted his owl companion, and the giant bird took to the sky. I called out to him to tell me more as I didn't understand much due to how cryptic he was, yet he refused to answer me and soon he was out of sight.

I pounded my fist into the grass prompting Epona to trot over and nuzzle me in the face. Her concern relieved me of the temper that had been building up inside me--it wasn't all that much to begin with--and I whinnied at her to thank her for helping me calm down. Still, I was annoyed at how Flash didn't give me direct answers. I understood that he couldn't make it easy for me but he didn't have to be cryptic with his answers.

What I did understand was that I needed to speak to the Zoras at Zora Hall first and foremost. What he said about needing bottles and a red potion were confusing given his choice of words, but perhaps Princess Twilight had an idea. When it came to understanding cryptic messages, Her Highness was an expert compared to me.

Tapping my hat to indicate that Flash was gone, Princess Twilight wormed her way out from under my hat before floating in front of me. " You don't need to say anything about my behaviour, Sunset. I can't believe how I acted around him despite knowing he's not the same Flash I know. I'm supposed to be a princess who can remain calm in any situation, yet I went and acted like a complete moron in front of a guy I might still have some feelings towards."

" Might?"

" I'm aware that the chances of Flash and I crushing on one another are slim to none because we both live in different dimensions and have different destinies. Still, I'd like to think that we can work something out, but I know that's just foolish talk at best." Twilight answered.

" In other words?"

" I'm moving on from him."

" That's... Unexpected."

" And why is that?"

" I think Flash still has a thing for you." I answered. " He still talks about hoping to see you again, yet he might try to gain the attention of the other Twilight even though he doesn't know that isn't you. Honestly, I was expecting you to be a little defiant and say that it could still work out."

" I was just fooling myself." Twilight said. " I know it will never work out. It will take me a while to get used to the feeling but it's for the best that I move on otherwise I could end up regretting it later if I don't nip the problem in the bud right now. The next time we encounter Flash, I won't act all gaga around him. No, I'll confront him with respect and not shy away even though he won't understand."

" Will we see him again?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. There is still one more region we haven't explored so the chances of seeing him again are pretty good. Anyway, we should get moving if we're to reach Zora Hall before the sun comes up, and I suggest changing into a Zora and remaining as such."

Nodding my head in agreement, I took out the Zora Mask and placed it on my face. The magic started to take effect and I squatted down, bringing my arms close to my body, and remained like that for several seconds before standing up and screamed. I began to wonder why I had to scream every time I was about to finish the transformation. While no one else ever noticed me doing it, it didn't exactly give me any confidence. The transition wasn't painful in that it caused my internal organs some discomfort for example, yet the scream made it seem that I wasn't enjoying the experience.

Truth is, I didn't enjoy the transition due to the side-effects, but I loved the resulting forms I become. Each form was like an extension of myself that contained my memories and natural skills combined with abilities that particular form possessed.

Once I finished the transformation, I felt compelled to show off my Zora body by strutting my stuff. Why did I do that? I wasn't sure but it may have had something to do with being a gorgeous aquatic creature. Whinnying to Epona and informing her that I would be gone for a lengthy period of time, she whinnied back in response, and I began running towards a large cave opening that I assumed lead to Zora Hall.

" How were we able to even get down here under that poisonous swamp?"

" Never underestimate the power of an intellectual mind."

" You expect me to believe that?"

" No, but then what other explanation could there be?"

" I suppose your right."

" I'll admit that I was surprised that a temple was buried underneath a swamp of all things." The small figure said. " Whoever hid it down here knew what they were doing or didn't want anyone to find it. It doesn't matter though as we found it and that's what matters. Now, let me just make a few quick calculations." The small figure placed her hand on a nearby wall, the dampness making her cringe slightly, and began concentrating by moving it around as though she were looking for something that lay beyond. It wasn't long before she removed her hand upon sensing a weak aura coming from somewhere. " I can sense kindness coming from the other side."

" Do you think it could be her, Fluttershy?"

" Yes." The small figure answered. " I have no doubt about that although why would she be here of all places. It's not exactly her comfort zone but then we have seen stranger things throughout this world."

" It doesn't matter why she's here." The tall figure said. " The important thing is that she is here and that means getting to her without delay. We've done things your way up to this point so now we get to do it my way. I won't go crazy with my power as I know it could cause a cave-in were I go to overboard." She walked up to the wall and punched it using her fist causing it to crumble away revealing a room beyond. " It looks like we may have to go through several rooms before we reach Fluttershy, but I could do with some practice since it's been a while since I last got to flex my muscles."

" I am curious about something."

" What's that?"

" Why did Applejack's Element react the way it did?"

The tall figure shook her head. " I don't know but it did confirm your theory that those girl's magic is trying to breach this world. I am still annoyed that you wanted us to leave without killing her, but I suppose we had no choice since our own magic has been sealed thanks to this world. That's why I insisted we track down the rest of "her" friends and see if they go through a similar experience. Just because I want revenge doesn't mean I'm blinded by it! I know patience is now important as being impulsive only resulted in me being defeated by "her" every single time."

" You have learned something after all."

The tall figure glared at her companion but quickly regained focus. " If what happened to Applejack happens to Fluttershy, it could give us a clue as to what we can do to unleash our full power instead of having to hide in the shadows. Still, we should check them all out just in case one of them reacts differently than the rest."

" Pinkie Pie is located in different places so it shouldn't be difficult to track her down." The small figure said. " We already know where my significant other is so we can go back to her whenever we want, but Rainbow Dash and Rarity are currently missing."

" Where could they be in this world?"

" Unless they tap into their Equestrian magic, we can't pinpoint them."

" Ugh! That's so aggravating!"

" Which is why we need Sunset to find them."

" I still can't believe that "she" is the one who brought out the magic of her friends." The tall figure said. " How is that even possible? Her own magic has been sealed off just like the rest of us so she shouldn't have been able to do that."

" You must realize that she is special."

" I refuse to admit that."

The small figure sighed. " As long as you continue to think like that, you will never be able to overcome Sunset. You have to accept that she has powers that are different from what you have and is much more powerful. The Magic of Friendship is something one mustn't underestimate."

" Don't patronize me."

" Just saying it like it is."

" And what about you?" The tall figure asked. " How do you feel knowing that the other Twilight rejected you by accepting "her"?" The small figure went quiet although she clenched her hand into a fist and began grumbling under her breath. The tall figure laughed hysterically before having to wipe away a tear from her eye. " Ha! You're just the same as I am when it comes to the other Twilight. You pretend that you're in this for knowledge by acting calm, but in truth you want to become the real her and acquire all that magic, don't you?" The small figure slowly nodded her head resulting in the tall figure chuckling this time. " See? Wasn't that much better?"

" You enjoyed that didn't you?"

" Maybe."

The small figure sighed. " Let's just get on with this!"

" Fair enough." The tall figure said. " It will only take me a few moments to reach Fluttershy and then we can put your theory to the test."

Trying to reach Zora Hall proved more difficult than I initially expected. Leevers continued to pop out of the sand plaguing me as I ran across the beach, and while I desired to attack them, Her Highness reminded me that doing so would bring up the aggressive blue one. While I wasn't afraid to fight, I didn't want to waste time dealing with monsters given that time wasn't on my side. Not only did I have to deal with Leevers but other monsters ended up getting in my way, such as the Like-Like that I vaguely remembered from my previous journey.

All I could recall about them was how they could consume items, and Princess Twilight said that so long I wasn't in my human form, I wouldn't lose any items should I wind up being caught inside the mouth of such hideous creatures. She also told me that defeating a Like-Like would result in earning a lot of rupees that could go towards purchasing additional items, but the risk was greater than the reward. At least they weren't fast so they were easy to outrun although their uncanny ability to stretch what constituted as their mouths meant they were capable of attacking at a slight distance.

It wasn't all bad though as I soon encounter a few Zoras who were standing on the beach. When I went up to each of them to engage in a conversation, they all treated me like I was a celebrity--technically that was true since Thunderlane was a member of the Indigo-Go's--yet they also commented on how I looked different, as though I had lost some weight resulting from how often I fought against the Gerudo Pirates. While it wasn't as bad as I thought it would be, I still felt uneasy having to deal with the gender issue. Thunderlane was a guy and I was a girl so I couldn't help being worried about of them figuring out the truth.

One Zora wanted to see if I could break all of the pots he had on display and was insistent about it--I never knew Zora could be so pushy. I decided to take him up on his offer knowing that refusing would go against what Thunderlane stood for. Unfortunately, I ended up losing out on twenty rupees due to not being all that good at using my fins. The Zora actually thought I hadn't been practicing my skills and became rusty so I humoured him by agreeing with his assessment.

Another Zora had asked me if I had been collecting any bottles. Despite my hesitation towards answering the question, I concluded that I could trust him and said that I had picked up a few here and there. He said that there were a pair of beavers who lived on top of the waterfall, and they collected bottles though they weren't willing to give them up. Many Zora had tried to beat them in a race to earn one of their bottles yet no one proved fast enough. The Zora suggested for me to try since I was supposedly the fastest, yet my reason for wanting to try involved what Flash Sentry said.

I continued on heading southward until I came across an impressive sight. A large building out in the ocean stood before me yet I also noticed that part of it was underwater, and that made sense since the Zora loved swimming below the surface.

" That must be Zora Hall." I said. " I've got to admit that it does look really impressive."

" No doubt someone in there can help us get into the Pirate's Fortress."

" Who would be the rest Zoras to ask?"

" Most of them are likely to compliment on your fame--I mean, Thunderlane's fame since you are him in a sense."

I nodded. " That means I have to talk to his bandmates."

" Yes." Twilight said. " They view him as being a regular Zora who happens to be one of the group so you should be able to get some information from them. By the way, I hope that you're ready for a swim as it looks like you'll need to swim underwater to enter Zora Hall. I can barely make out an entrance down there so this means it's time to see if you can swim like a fish and not drown."

" This is nothing compared to what I've been through." I said boldly. That was a true statement. In my previous journey, I had to go through a temple that was mostly filled with water and not only did I swim in it, I also walked underwater through the use of a special tunic that allowed me to breathe and boots with iron soles. Swimming underwater as a Zora was going to be simple. " Before we go splashing about in the ocean, do you have any information regarding those skeletal fish? I can see a few of them near the entrance you mentioned."

" That is a Skullfish." Twilight said. " They home in on any prey that enters their territory and attempt to bite it with their sharp teeth. A single one by itself won't do much damage but an entire school of them will become a problem. Also, some of them are larger than others so it will take a couple of hits to defeat them."

" Will my fins work on them?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " They are like sharp blades so definitely go with those as you can't fight underwater unless you're a Zora. If you're not confident with your ability to use your fins, you can use your magical barrier to defeat the Skullfish. Be warned though that using the barrier consumes magic."

I walked to the water's edge and peered into the depths below before walking into the water. It felt incredible knowing that I could breathe underwater and move about freely without any heavy weights dragging me down. While I had experience thanks to the Water Temple, this was the first time I actually felt like an actual aquatic creature. No wonder the Zoras felt at home in the water as it was second-nature to them.

The Skullfish were swimming ahead of me yet they hadn't noticed me so far, but I wasn't about to take that chance. I could easily defeat them using my new abilities but I had to focus on getting inside and finding Thunderlane's bandmates. Using my legs as a means of momentum, I launched myself forward and swam at a ridiculous speed that proved difficult for me to control initially, but I quickly gained leverage and swam past the Skullfish until I smacked into the wall to the left of the entrance. While it wasn't the most graceful of conclusions, the amount of speed I had would have made Rainbow Dash feel jealous.

Swimming as a Zora was a lot of fun although I needed to work on maintaining control otherwise I could get into trouble down the road. Since I didn't have much farther, I swam at a brisk pace, entering the large cave opening before finding myself staring at a wall that was covered with seashells--it looked pretty compared to some other things. I looked up and saw that the water level wasn't as high as it was outside. I swam upwards to the surface, climbed out of the water and walked forward until I came upon another impressive sight.

I had to hand it to the Zoras. They certainly knew how to make a good first impression. The interior of Zora Hall consisted of a large pond of water that looked to serve no actual purpose other than be a beautiful set piece, and a stage built into the shell of what appeared to be a giant clam. This must be what the Indigo-Go's use to perform in front of their people as I could see a few Zoras working on setting things up. Compared to where they would be performing if the go-ahead had been given, this stage was far superior to the one at the Milk Bar so why go from glamour to something less?

A few Zora were walking around while others were standing in front of several doors that could be accessed by use of a pathway that went around the pond. I suspected that the doors lead to the rooms that housed the bandmates so at least I wasn't going around blind.

" Wow... This place is beautiful." Twilight said. " Truly a magnificent spectacle if I ever saw one."

" Better than what they have at Canterlot?"

" I wouldn't go that far."

I chuckled. " Sorry, but I just had to say that and get a reaction out of you."

" Very funny."

" Which room should we check out first?"

Princess Twilight pointed to the one to my right. " Let's start with that one and work our way around in a counter-clockwise direction."

I walked in that direction until I reached the door only to be stopped by the Zora who was standing in front of it. I asked him why he was doing that and he responded by saying he didn't want anyone to go inside who wasn't a band member. I thought that to be rather odd given how popular the Indigo-Go's were according to what I had heard. Why deny the fans their right to see their superstars practicing?

The Zora recognized me as Thunderlane and said that I could go inside since I apparently shared this room with someone named Tijo. I opened the door, went inside, and found myself staring at a sparsely filled room. Compared to the central area outside, this room lacked charm although it wasn't uninhabitable compared to other places I've seen. A Zora was sitting behind a large drum set made of fish heads--I didn't know if they were alive or not yet the sight made me feel nauseous--that reminded me of Pinkie Pie, but this wasn't her by any stretch of the imagination.

" Mikau... Where have you been?"

" Um, do I know you?"

" Who are you trying to kid? It's me, Tijo, your roommate? Have you been swimming around in the ocean or something? I thought Evan warned everyone not to go swimming out there until further notice." I had no idea as to who this Zora was although he looked like he would be an expert at snowboarding given his hairstyle. " Mikau? Is everything okay? You're giving me a weird look."

" Sorry about that."

" It's cool! You're probably stressed over the upcoming concert at the Carnival of Time tomorrow night."

Did I just hear him right? He and the other band members were looking forward to performing? I thought Miss Pommel had informed them that the concert had been cancelled by order of Monsieur Aroma? It looked like this was a guess of miscommunication with the Indigo-Go's not receiving the message. Come to think of it, I doubted Thunderlane knew that there wasn't going to be a show, but then someone among the band surely knew. Not only did I have questions regarding the Gerudo, I also felt compelled to figure out what was going on.

Her Highness then whispered in my ear. " That's Double Diamond, a pony who lives in the village where Starlight came from."

" He was one of her followers?"

" I wouldn't say it like that." Twilight answered. " He believed in what she said about getting rid of his cutie mark, and I guess he was fiercely loyal to her to the point where she used him as a spy to ensure no pony decided to cause any trouble. All I know about him is that he's an avid skier despite ponies lacking any arms and poles."

" Mikau? Is there something you'd like to say?" Double Diamond asked.

" No. Why?" I asked.

" You're mumbling to that fairy and it feels like you're talking about someone."

" It's just that my friend says you remind her of someone."

" Really? I didn't think I had that kind of impression on anyone." Double Diamond said. " Come to think of it, Mikau. Why are you hanging around with a fairy? Is that supposed to be the start of a new trend everyone else will go nuts over? You know how Zoras can be fickle whenever one of us introduces a new fad." He then looked at me for several seconds, his eyes combing over every last part of my body, and it really creeped me out. " Have you lost some weight? I've never seen you look better since I've known you. You've gotta tell me your secret, Mikau, I'm begging you, especially when I did something wrong."

" What did you do?"

Double Diamond nervously pointed to a broken ladder that was propped up against a high-up platform. " Um... Don't get mad, but I want you to hear this... I tried to climb up the ladder to your practice area, and it broke resulting in the mess you see for a ladder."

" Why would you go up there?"

" I was curious and I wanted to see what it was like."

" That I understand so then how did the ladder break?"

" I'm overweight!" Double Diamond answered. To be fair, he certainly didn't look the part but I wasn't about to question his opinion. " I promise that I'll go on a diet when everything has settled down and we can perform. I'm sorry for breaking your ladder, Mikau. It's just been one problem after another with me as of late."

" Want to talk about it?"

Double Diamond nodded enthusiastically. " I've heard that the others aren't speaking to each other and no one has bothered to tell me anything. Everyone is in a bad funk and it's going to make our concert sound terrible. You probably didn't know about any of that since you were out doing whatever it is you do, but I fear the band could break up if things don't get better real soon. Lulu is especially having a bad time though I'm not sure why. It feels like it's been forever since I last heard her voice, and she's usually in a spirited mood. You know, her silent treatment has gotten me thinking."

" About what?"

" About the ocean getting weird."

While this had nothing to do with getting into the Pirate's Fortress, the problem that related to the ocean was something I needed to figure out. I figured that I would need to solve that little dilemma given that it is affecting their way of life. I walked over to Double Diamond and inspected his drums, flicking one of them with my finger out of curiosity more than anything else. Despite it being a fish's head and disgusting in appearance, it possessed a rhythmatic beat capable of soothing one's soul if they were feeling down. I also noticed it was held up by two pieces of coral either side of the drums.

Double Diamond looked at me. " What are you doing?"

I blushed. " I just wanted to hear your drum is all."

" You sure have some strange hobbies, Mikau."

" Anyway, you were saying something about the ocean?"

" That's right." Double Diamond answered. " There's a rumor that the ocean is getting weird 'cause there's trouble off shore at Great Bay Temple. Many of us have often wondered what could be out there but no one has ever made it there because of how treacherous the water can get. They say when that something happens at the temple, then something bad will befall the Zora descendant who's been protecting the temple. Do you catch my drift?"

" I get what you're saying." I answered. In truth, I wasn't entirely sure if his story checked out since it was a rumour, but since I hadn't asked anyone else, his story was the only lead I had so taking it for granted would be foolish of me.

" And lately, Lulu has been looking kind of weird. Maybe Lulu's the..."

" The what?"

" Maybe she could be the guardian of Great Bay Temple?"

" Seriously!?"

" Like I said, Mikau, it's just a rumour I've heard." Double Diamond said. " I don't even know if it's true or not. I really shouldn't be saying things about Lulu behind her back, and of course you and her have no secrets between you. Don't tell Lulu that I've been saying stuff about her. Anyway, why don't you find out what's going on with the others? We need to practice if we're going to be prepared for the carnival tomorrow night."

Taking my leave but not before giving Double Diamond a high-five much to his pleasure, I stepped outside, walked over to the water's edge, and sat down with my legs in the water before beginning to think. No doubt the third Giant was somewhere inside of this Great Bay Temple, and if what Double Diamond said was true, how was I supposed to get there? It's not like I could swim there as the water would be dangerous, and combined with those underwater monsters, I'd likely end up dying out there.

I also had to rescue the Zora eggs from the Gerudo Pirates in addition to getting to the temple. Both of these tasks were monumental in scope and it felt like I was being weighed down by so much pressure, I thought it was going to consume me from the inside-out. Stress was something I just couldn't deal with and even with the ability to slow down time, there was a lot being asked of me and with little in the way of assistance. Tackling both problems at once would do me in but perhaps handling them one at a time was a better approach? Saving those eggs was more important due to being able to reach the Pirates Fortress as opposed to the temple.

" That was some good information we got from Double Diamond." Twilight.

" Yeah, but could what he have said been false?"

" Perhaps yet we need to investigate just in case."

" Why don't we speak to another of the band members?" I asked. " Maybe they can shed some light on things?"

" It's worth a try."

Getting up, I walked over to the next door, the Zora standing in front of it moved aside allowing me access, and went inside only to bump my face into a giant balloon. I thought I had walked into one of Pinkie's hidden party balloons, but I deduced that was impossible since that wasn't her personality in this world. Brushing the balloon aside, I walked into another one, and pushed that aside before I found myself staring at several balloons of various shapes and sizes scattered about. Whoever reside in this room obviously had an obsession though they surprising fit in with the tone of the room.

In front of me was a lanky looking Zora with an unusual hairstyle wielding what looked to be a lobster for an instrument. He appeared pretty laid back given how he was slouching and seemed to be oblivious to my presence. That soon changed when I walked forward and collided with another balloon. I had every mind to pop it and the rest but the Zora raised his hand and stopped me.

" Mikau! Don't pop my precious balloons. You know they give my room a major uplift."

" Aren't you Party Favour?" Twilight asked causing both me and the Zora to react in a confused stupor.

" Why would I be called an accessory to a shindig?"

" Can you excuse me for a moment?" I asked. I turned my attention to Princess Twilight. " Who is Party Favour and why would he be called that?"

" He's from the same village that Starlight and Double Diamond come from?"

" Does he have an obsession with balloons?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " He has the uncanny ability to take any balloon and create a sculpture out it, like a bridge or a pair of binoculars." I stared at Her Highness with an expression that screamed "I don't believe what you just said" and she ignored it. " I know it's hard to believe but not even Pinkie could create something like a bridge by using a couple of balloons he happened to have on him. Still, I am surprised that he is here of all places and is a member of the Indigo-Go's."

" Anything else you have to say about him?"

" No. Like Double Diamond, I don't know much about Party Favour apart from what I just said."

" Maybe I should do the talking."

Princess Twilight nodded and flew behind my head leaving me to deal with Party Favour. He didn't seem happy about how we were talking about him while he was within earshot, but he quickly changed his tune--not literally--when he began strumming his instrument."

" A guy might think he isn't appreciated."

" Sorry about that."

" It don't bother me none." Party Favour said. " What's important is that you've come back, Mikau. Where've ya been? I'm all, like, "Hey, where's Mikau? The concert's comin' up soon" and we aren't even prepared for our rehearsal, so how are we supposed to perform at the carnival when we can't even get our act together?" Much like it was with Double Diamond, the fact that the concert had been cancelled wasn't known to Party Favour. I had a feeling that this was going to be true with the remaining band members. " And now our band leader has pulled a vanishing act--Evan's all holed up in her room just writin' songs..."

That explained something but I needed to know more. " What about Lulu?"

" Lulu? She just stands out back starin' at the sea. She doesn't even respond when ya talk to her no matter what you say. To be honest with you, Mikau, I feel like I'm being cast aside by her and that just ain't fair to me. I mean, what have I ever done to deserve the silent treatment? If it wasn't for the fact that we're all part of the same band that has performed together for so long, I'd have upped and left you all." Party Favour then strummed a loud chord that caused one of his balloons to pop leaving him feeling dejected. " One of my balloons just popped and it was one of my favourites."

" Maybe you should calm down." I suggested. " No need to lose your cool."

Party Favour got worse. " Calm down!? If Lulu would speak to me instead of remain silent then I'd be fine, but instead she don't say anything and Evan refuses to flat out say anything either no matter how much you try to butter her up." He raised his instrument and appeared to be wanting to smash it on the ground, but instead he lowered it, strummed a more sombre chord, and sighed. " If you guys think it's just 'cause Lulu's not interested in me, I'd understand completely, but I'm tellin' ya, it looks like somethin's really wrong. Mikau, are you in on this too?"

I shook my head. " What? No!"

" Is there somethin' you're trying to hide from me?"

" I said no!"

" I'm not runnin' an inquiry or anything..."

" Then just drop it!"

" Okay, I'll stop with the accusations, but I just wish you guys would let me in on what's going on." Party Favour said. " But, look... If we don't start rehearsin' real soon, we're notgonna be ready for the concert. Why don't you talk to Evan? If anyone can get her talking it's you. I'll remain here working on our little project as always. You know the one, right? I hope we can make something of it instead of relying on her songs all the time."

It was clear that both Double Diamond and Party Favour weren't happy with the way things were going with the band. Despite knowing a few more pieces of information, I still didn't understand the entire picture. I needed to speak to the band leader, Evan. If anyone was going to tell me anything, it was going to be her.

Leaving Party Favour's room, I was about to head to the next door when I noticed someone on the opposite side of the pond. It was a Zora wearing what looked to be a beautiful blue gown, yet her face reminded me of someone but I couldn't tell due to her being too far away. She appeared to be looking in my direction as though she were fixated on me before turning around and walking past a wall disappearing in the process.

Even though I wanted to speak to Evan, I felt compelled to follow this Zora and find out what her deal was. I began to run around the pool to the other side only to discover a second entrance to Zora Hall though it was much smaller than the main entrance I used to enter. Perhaps this entrance acted more like a back door as in a way of getting outside without having to deal with adoring fans.

Princess Twilight wanted to know what I was doing, and when I told her that I was following a female Zora, she agreed with my decision. I actually thought she was going to argue with me and insist that we go back and speak with Evan, so I was surprised she believed my actions were appropriate. There was an additional door near the back entrance but I ignored it in favour of pursuing the Zora.

When I got back outside, I could see that the sun was mere moments from peering up from the east signalling the start of the final day, yet I was mesmerized by the sight that was standing before me. A large island featuring a palm tree on top stood out as an unusual landmark, yet I could sense a strange power flowing from it. Whatever this power was, I couldn't even begin to understand the significance behind it. I could also see the Great Bay Temple far off in the distance and it featured a mysterious cloud covering it in a blanket of deep fog that also radiated great power.

Turning to my right, my entire body came to a stop upon seeing the female Zora from before, yet it was her face that gave me the biggest shock of all.

(1) This is the actual inscription used in the game.

Chapter 36: Infiltration

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
December 5, 2016
Chapter 36: Infiltration.

" Rarity!?"

I couldn't believe it! The Zora known as Lulu turned out to be Rarity! Then again, perhaps I could believe it given her current attire. Rarity loved looking fabulous given her nature as a fashionista, and her gown definitely added to her charm although the Zora features did make her appear more fish-like in comparison to being human. Still, this meant I had found four of my friends in Termina: Pinkie Pie, Fluttershy, Applejack, and now Rarity being the latest one. That only left Rainbow Dash and Twilight Sparkle unaccounted for.

My first instinct was to walk up and give Rarity a hug and tell her that I had been worried sick, but that's when I noticed something was wrong. She was just standing there, emotionless, inattentive, as though her very reason of existing meant nothing. The Rarity I knew would be vibrant, full of life, eager to showcase her latest designs that she created, yet here it was like she was dead. I waved my hand in her face in hopes of getting a reaction, but she refused to budge and continued looking out at the sea. My next attempt involved walking up to her and saying hello, but the instant I moved a single step forward, she turned to face me.

And that's when I saw her expression with my own eyes. It was an expression that pierced my heart and made me want to feel the same way. Rarity was sad and I was beginning to figure out what that reason was. She then turned to face the ocean once again and I knew there was no point in continuing since she would continue to respond with that expression. No wonder things felt so bleak around here.

Since Rarity was portraying this Lulu character, that meant she was the one who laid the Zora eggs that the Gerudo Pirates stole, and that's when a disturbing thought entered my mind regarding that. One of my friends had given birth to children... None of us were that old to be doing something like that! The thought made me want to throw up given what we were taught in Health Class about the drawbacks of having kids early in life. It tends to ruin your life if you have children before becoming an adult. If Rarity, the one I've come to know, knew that she was a mother in this world, she would decry it as being a scandal aimed at destroying her career.

I then began having thoughts at who the potential father could be and I shook my head immediately of that notion. If the father of Rarity's eggs is who I think it is, things are going to become very awkward in the future.

Princess Twilight bopped me on the head. " What are you thinking about, Sunset?"

" I know why she looks so sad." I answered.

" It's because her eggs have been stolen."

" You figured it out, too?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " Even though we're looking at Rarity, we must remember that she is someone completely different. In Termina, she gave birth to a number of eggs that were her pride and joy, but now that joy has been taken from her thanks to those pirates. Until those eggs have been returned to her, she will remain in her current condition with no signs that she will ever get better."

" How could those pirates steal innocent children?"

" That's a question we don't have an answer to yet."

I walked up to Rarity and felt compelled to hold her hands in my own. She tried to look at me with her eyes but turned away and resumed looking at the ocean. I then turned to look in the same direction in hopes of getting an answer, and all I saw was the Great Bay Temple situated far out into the ocean. What would compel Rarity to constantly look at a place that no could access according to what Double Diamond mentioned? Speaking of him, he said that the temple was protected by a guardian among the Zora. Was Rarity the guardian? I doubted if she knew that, yet was it true?

Knowing that there was nothing else I could do for her, I let go of her hands and walked back towards the entrance I came out of. I noticed an Owl Statue tucked away in a corner nearby yet my mind was too fixated on trying to figure out what could be done to help Rarity feel better.

At that moment, the sound of a cucco echoed all around, signalling the beginning of the final day in this cycle.

Dawn of the Final Day - 24 Hours Remain.

" We need to enter the Gerudo Fortress."

" Easier said than done."

" What do you mean?"

" If what we heard was correct, getting in there through the front door is impossible."

" There has to be a way to get in there."

Princess Twilight began to think of something but she shrugged her shoulders after a few minutes. " No matter what kind of scenario I consider as an ideal plan, none of them will work because we don't know what lies inside of the fortress let alone being able to get past the front door."

" I'm surprised the Zora don't know more given they live around here."

" They aren't fighters." Twilight said sadly. " The Zora are a peaceful race who enjoy swimming about in the water and wanting to express themselves with music. With the sole exception of Thunderlane, none of them have what it takes to take on the Gerudo in a fight." Her Highness then started thinking again before coming up with a theory that proved to be rather disturbing. " I believe the Gerudo are in control of Great Bay despite it not being that obvious from what we've seen. Since they know the Zora don't fight, they can get away with pretty much anything without having to worry about retaliation."

" What I don't get is why the Gerudo would have so much security inside their fortress."

" Who says they do?"

" I think it's pretty obvious."

Princess Twilight rubbed the bridge of her nose although it looked like she was about to slap her forehead. " Guessing something like that will only lead to defeat, Sunset. Since we didn't think of asking Thunderlane as to what lies within the fortress, we lost out on learning information that would have been beneficial."

" We still have that one band member left."

" I'm not optimistic there."

" Why not?"

Princess Twilight sighed. " Double Diamond and Party Favour didn't exactly give us all that much in the way of information. In fact, they were more focused on performing at a concert that isn't even going to happen as opposed to the missing Zora Eggs. I don't think the remaining band member, this Evan character, will be of any help."

" We might as well try." I said. Looking at Rarity one last time before lowering my own head in sadness, I entered Zora Hall only to notice a group of Zora running about like something serious had just happened. None of them noticed me--for that I felt relieved--and they headed off towards the door I hadn't entered only to be stopped by someone who seemed to command a powerful presence when they silenced the others. " Who do you suppose that is? I can't tell from here as they're too far away."

" I think I recognize who it is but the Zora qualities are making it difficult."

" We'll wait for that assembly to scatter before we go in." I said. The group of Zora were arguing over each other and uttering words so loud and quickly that I couldn't make heads or tails as to what they were saying, yet the one who had stopped them ordered them to continue searching and not to come back otherwise. I had a feeling the Zora was telling them to find and bring back the eggs, yet why do so now and not sooner? " Guess we know what they're doing over there." I said.

Princess Twilight nodded. " They must really be desperate now to get those eggs back if the entire tribe is looking for them."

" If the one giving orders had hoped for secrecy, that option has long since gone."

" I assume that must be the band leader over there."

" Are they in charge?"

" I'm not sure, Sunset. Do the Zora have any kind of hierarchy?"

" Yeah." I answered. " They have a monarch who rules over them and makes decisions, but so far we haven't seen anyone like that around here. Maybe these Zoras don't have a ruler in the traditional sense and instead choose their leader based on certain qualifications."

It was certainly was different compared to the Zoras I encountered during my previous journey. Perhaps I shouldn't compare this adventure and the previous one so much seeing as the differences between them were fairly obvious.

Once the group of Zora walked off to carry out their mission, I walked over to where they had gathered only to be stopped by yet another Zora who blocked the door. Unlike the previous two who had gotten in my way, this one wasn't as kind and instead berated me for making Evan worry so much. I could've explained that I hadn't been here before and was trying to find my way around, yet that would've earned me some ridicule since I was supposed to be one of the Indigo-Go's.

I could hear the sound of someone playing a piano on the other side of the door although the music was occasionally interrupted by the sound of yelling, most likely coming from the same person playing. Whoever they were, they sounded like they were about to go on a rampage throughout Zora Hall. The Zora blocking my path told me that Evan was on the verge of a mental breakdown all because everything had been falling apart, and was forcing everyone else to re-double their efforts despite them complaining. He also said they had worked hard and were ready to spark a protest.

Things had really gone from bad to worse during the course of a single night. I needed to speak with Evan and find out what was going on even though what I would learn wasn't going to be of much help. There was less than twenty-four hours remaining until the moon would destroy Termina, so anything I learned would be implemented during the next cycle of time when I had enough of that on my side.

After getting berated one more time by the Zora, he stepped aside allowing me access to the room. I reached out, grabbed the doorknob, opened the door, and went inside where I was surprised at seeing a large piano situated on top of a raised platform. The piano itself was once most likely an aquatic creature whose remains had since become an instrument, yet my eyes were focused on the beauty within this room. Whoever this Evan was, they certainly had flare when it came to the décor. Even the floor itself comprised of a small layer of water that only went up to my ankles, yet it all came together in a perfect harmony.

Standing in front of the piano was Evan herself--I figured she was a female due to the long hair and the body shape despite only seeing her from behind--and she hadn't noticed me enter due to being what looked like obsessed with adjusting the keys on her organ.

" Rara!?" Twilight exclaimed quietly.

" Who?"

" Applejack's childhood friend from Equestria." Twilight answered. " She always used to call her Rara as a nickname when they were fillies, but after they stopped seeing each other for many years, she grew up and became known as Countess Coloratura, the most popular singer Equestria has ever known."

" I've never heard of her."

" She must have surfaced after you left initially."

I made a glum expression. " Well, excuse me for not being around home more often."

Princess Twilight ignored my response and continued. " She had a horrible manager who wanted her to focus on her singing and stage persona while ignoring her fans because they would never amount to anything. She eventually fired him upon learning what he was doing and shed the countess identity by singing a beautiful ballad the likes of which nopony had ever heard before. You should've been there, Sunset! It was so emotional that I actually choked up inside."

Again, I looked at her with a glum expression, yet she noticed this time and subsequently stopped talking. " Must have been nice to have witnessed something like that. Where I live now, they have a rock concert every month though the Rainbooms are the ones who perform during them most of the time. Still, I'm glad you enjoyed the experience, Twilight, despite rubbing it in my face." I heaved a heavy sigh. " Let's just get this over with and hopefully get some answers."

Walking up the water-ridden stairs until I stood directly behind Coloratura--I was considering calling her Rara or maybe even countess yet neither were appropriate given that I didn't know much about her other than what Princess Twilight stated--I began to think about how I would get things started when she turned around. Much like how I looked as a Zora, she too had scales that were covering her breasts, but then she also wore a see-through shirt--her hair most likely prevented me from seeing that--that featured what appeared to be her cutie mark emblazoned on the front.

Coloratura definitely looked stressed out judging from how she was looking at me but that quickly changed to surprise. " Mikau! Where in the world have you been? I sent you out to get those eggs without the rest of our tribe knowing, but then you disappeared for a couple of days without sending any word, and now I had no choice but to get the others involved by having them scout out every last trace of Great Bay."

" I'm sorry that I was gone so long."

" Look, it doesn't matter that you were practically assumed dead." Coloratura said. I gulped quietly due to her not knowing how close she was to the truth but she didn't hear me make that sound to my relief. " I know getting the others involved serves as an insult since you were specifically asked by me to get them back, but I feared that perhaps the pirates proved too much for you." She then began checking me out either because she thought I had the eggs or thought that I was different. " Have you gotten thinner, Mikau? I like it! I always said you needed exercise to drop that weight given how peaceful it's been until this incident."

I tried looking away out of not wanting her to know the truth but I found it difficult given she had such a piercing gaze. Eventually, I closed my eyes and hoped that would be enough to get her to stop staring, but when I opened my eye briefly, she began walking around me, peering at different parts of my body, and shaking her head on occasion. I felt utterly humiliated over how she was treating me and the urge to lose control floated about in my head, but I remained calm in hopes that she would realize that what she considered an interrogation was only making me feel worse.

She refused to stop and so I had no choice but to let her know. " Do you mind not doing that to me!"

" Sorry, Mikau." Coloratura said sheepishly. " I wasn't trying to make you uncomfortable or anything."

" I beg to differ."

" I was looking to see if you had found the eggs. Did you get them back?"

My eyes opened wide with shock. " You could've just asked without looking at me like I was some kind of freak." I was losing my temper so I began my breathing exercise in order to calm down and approach the situation through a more level-headed lens. " I'm sorry for raging out on you like that, but you were making me feel humiliated."

" No, I was at fault for doing that."

" To answer your question, I don't have the eggs."

Coloratura's face suddenly fell like she was crestfallen upon hearing my words. " Oh... You couldn't do it, after all." She then turned and walked back to her piano before slamming her hands down onto the keys, the piano wailing out a dreadful series of notes as a result of the impact. I wanted to walk up to her to see if I could do something but I held back knowing that she had expected so much more from me. " Mikau... I really thought you could it. I believed in you as you had what it took but perhaps my judgment was hasty. Maybe asking you to do something reckless wasn't the best course of action."

" I just haven't been myself lately."

" The fault is mine." Coloratura said. " You had enough on your mind what with you being the possible father, so asking you to do something when you weren't in the right state of mind shows how ignorant I was to your feelings."

Did she just say that I could be the father to the eggs that Rarity laid? The various emotions and thoughts going through my mind at that precise moment ranged from terrifying, to shock, to flat-out denial, and even surprise because I didn't think that Mikau and Lulu were that close--Party Favour hinted at a relationship between them. Once again, things had gotten even weirder. If Mikau was the father of these eggs, Thunderlane should have mentioned something about it when he was giving me his final eulogy before death took him from this world?

Then again, Coloratura said that Mikau could be the possible father. There was a chance that Rarity had gotten pregnant by another long before she began a relationship with Thunderlane, but without actual proof of such a thing happening, all eyes were on Mikau... No, they were on me. Gah! This was something I didn't want to have to think about! I was already freaking out over being a girl in this body as opposed to being a guy like Thunderlane, yet now I could potentially be a mother myself, or would that be father? Now I'm really starting to lose it! Why did she have to mention that one little tidbit?

I had to straighten this out. " I'm the father!?"

" You could be." Coloratura answered. " You only started dating Lulu about three months ago and Zora women go through their reproductive cycle for about ten months before eggs are laid, so it's possible that another Zora could be the father assuming she was with someone prior to you. Of course, I'm not about to ask Lulu anything regarding her personal life outside of the band, but then I might not be able to ask her anything given the current circumstances."

" Current circumstances?"

Coloratura nodded. " Have you been outside to see Lulu looking out at the ocean?"

I nodded my head. " I was there a few minutes ago."

" Then you better get used to seeing that expression on her face." Coloratura said. " Ever since the pirates stole her eggs, she's just been standing out there gazing at the sea and sighing as though she no longer cherishes life. I spent all day yesterday waiting for you to return pondering over they were able to get in here, and I discovered that the pirates used an underground passageway they must have working on for at least a year. One of them left behind their sword so I knew it there was no other way they entered Zora Hall." She reached behind her piano and pulled out a sharp looking sword that was curved in the blade itself.

" Pretty devious of them."

" If not for this sword, I doubt I'd have figured out the connection."

" Where are they now?"

" At their fortress at the northern end of Great Bay."

" Then that's where I'm going."

" You'll never be able to get through their main entrance, Mikau." Coloratura said. " Those doors are impenetrable! Not even the most powerful seas creatures could hope to break them down but perhaps if you used the secret underwater passage one of the others discovered by accident."

" Underwater passage?"

" Right below the entrance to their fortress deep underwater are three wooden plaques." Coloratura answered. " The pirates discovered you were using that entrance whenever you had to go in there to sort them out, and decided to do something about it."

At last! I finally found the means with which to enter the Gerudo Pirate's Fortress, and it turned out to be nothing more than a hidden underwater entrance that most would simply ignore due to how inconvenient it was. Yet, something was bothering me about this sudden revelation. Why would the Gerudo intentionally block the one access point to their fortress that could be abused by Thunderlane or any other Zora who thought of sneaking in that way? It just didn't make any sense! Were they trying to fix a flaw in their defence system or was it because they wanted someone to sneak through?

Were they anticipating my arrival? If they were then I needed to make sure that I was prepared for them. While I had no doubts about my fighting abilities, the pirates had much more experience and that gave them the overall advantage. Unfortunately for me, this information wouldn't be helpful at this point in time. With less than twenty-four hours to go, any attempt at a rescue would be utterly pointless. I'd need an entire three day cycle in order to rescue the eggs and deliver them to Coloratura, but that brought up another problem.

She asked me if I had the eggs implying that she wanted me to bring them to her, yet Daring Do the other night asked me to bring them to the tank she had prepared in her laboratory so the eggs could hatch in the proper conditions.

I needed to see if Coloratura knew the answer. " If I had gotten the eggs, where would they need to go for hatching?"

" The Oceanside Laboratory."

" Why not here?"

" Zora Hall doesn't have the adequate location." Coloratura answered. " Even the water around here has gotten warmer. The only place where the water is at the normal temperature is at the Oceanside Laboratory courtesy of the professor who lives there."

" I'll get those eggs back."

" You don't have much time, Mikau." Coloratura said. " We're supposed to be leaving for Clock Town late this afternoon. If you don't bring the eggs to the professor before we have to leave... Look, I'm going to have to be honest with you for a moment." She began breathing in and out slowly as though she were trying to prevent herself from losing control of her emotions, and I couldn't help but see a kindred spirit. " We need those eggs safe so Lulu can get her voice back. We've grown accustomed to life in a peaceful sea... That's why the pirates attack us frequently because we aren't able to fight back against them."

" Would that make me an exception?"

Coloratura nodded. " Yes. The only one among the Zora tribe who is still able to go to blows with those wild pirates... It is you, with the blood of Zoran heroes flowing within you, the one whom we rely on in times of great peril."

" That's quite the pressure."

" If not for you then we'd be at their mercy."

I was about to respond back when my brain sent me a signal regarding something Coloratura said. She mentioned that the band was going to Clock Town later on in the day most likely to perform there as part of the celebration. Yet, why would she mention that? Did it mean she wasn't aware of the concert's cancellation from Miss Pommel or was there something else she wasn't sharing? Before I plan on my next move, perhaps an inquiry was in order.

" You mentioned the concert just now."

" We're still preparing for it."

" How?"

" I know things are bad, Mikau, but we're going to pull through provided you succeed." Coloratura answered. " I'm still keeping Lulu's problem a secret from the other band members, but it hasn't been easy since they constantly ask every few hours. They've all been looking forward to our Carnival of Time concert. And I can't tell them it's canceled 'cause Lulu can't sing, can I? We'd have a riot on our hands!"

" Ah-ha!"

" Ah-ha what?"

" You said the concert would be cancelled because of Lulu's problem." I answered. " Yet it's been cancelled because of something happening over at Clock Town. I'm not sure of all the details but I do know that we're not going there."

Coloratura blinked at me a few times. " Um... How did you know what Mrs. Toto told me through private conversation? I thought no one intercepted the message she sent from in town given how secretive we were." I could tell she was beginning to grow suspicious. " Mikau... There's no way you could have known about that. I'm not accusing you of anything but it's rather strange that you know about my conversation with our manager considering you were supposed to be getting the eggs back."

" Lucky guess?"

" I suppose so, but still I am curious about it."

" I should probably get going."

" Before you go, I should mention something else." Coloratura said. " When you do find the eggs in the fortress, you can't just pick them up and carry them around in your hands like they were rocks. They are delicate and should be transported in a container so that they don't sustain any kind of damage. Empty bottles would be a perfect container although no one around has any due to not having any need for them. If you bring some empty bottles with you, you can use them to scoop up the eggs and carry them around. One bottle can only hold one egg, so you can never have too many empty bottles."

" I've got at least three bottles."

" That won't be enough."

" How come?"

" Lulu laid seven eggs." Coloratura answered. " You need seven empty bottles to rescue them all in one attempt otherwise you'll have to go there more than once, and I doubt they would be willing to let you go around their turf multiple times. By the way, remember what I told you about those beavers?" I nodded knowing this thanks to that one Zora I ran into outside who mentioned it earlier. " Good! I won't have to repeat myself. " Those beavers love hoarding bottles since they're obsessed with them but they won't share with us. I recommend paying them a visit as you'll need as many empty bottles as possible before going to the fortress."

" I'll do my best."

" Remember... You have until this afternoon to get them back." Coloratura said. " If you're not back with them by that time, well... I don't need to explain what will happen as I'm sure you get the idea."

Even though I didn't want to disappoint her, I wouldn't be able to retrieve the eggs before the end of the day. There simply wasn't enough time for me to go into the fortress and rescue all of the eggs--not even slowing down the passage of time was enough since it was so late within this current cycle of time--and that meant doing other things before resetting time and making a proper attempt.

Thanking Coloratura for the advice, I started to walk towards the door when she suddenly mentioned about how I could have known about her conversation with Miss Pommel regarding the concert. She then asked me to stick around for a few moments more and answer a few questions, but I had already left the room because I knew that answering her concerns would expose my secret of not being who I said I was.

When I was back outside in the main area of Zora Hall, I cursed myself under my breath for acting so stupid when it came to the concert's cancellation. Thunderlane obviously didn't know about the cancellation as he was busy trying to rescue the eggs Rarity laid before all of this even started, and my mentioning it almost ruined his reputation to the point where it couldn't be salvaged. I knew resetting time would erase my conversation with Coloratura yet the point still stood in that I made a hideous blunder. Still, I shouldn't have said anything and just simply allowed it to go over my head.

At least I didn't walk away completely unrewarded. I learned how I could gain access to the Gerudo Pirate's Fortress in addition to learning what the empty bottles were used for, the very thing Flash Sentry hinted at for me to figure out.

Yet, my mind was filled with different images ranging from worrying about the eggs to the surprise that Thunderlane--and by extension me--could be the other parent to the eggs that were stolen. I just couldn't get that thought out of my head no matter how hard I tried.

I needed a few moments to process everything so I walked around until the edge of the room until I reached the main entrance before sitting down at the water's edge and placing my legs into the water. Once my body started relaxing courtesy of the water flowing around my legs, I began thinking about everything that had happened up to this point. I thought the problems of Snowhead were yet the situation in Great Bay was even worse. Not only did I have to save a batch of unborn children but I also needed to figure out why the water had gotten warmer than usual and what Starlight had done with the guardian of this region.

Yes... I knew Starlight was involved as it had become a popular trend yet what she did remained unknown.

Princess Twilight finally broke the silence. " That was certainly an awkward conversation."

" I know. I just can't believe that I could be the parent of Rarity's children."

" Um... That's not what I meant, Sunset."

" Sorry but I just can't get that image out of my mind."

" You really shouldn't let it get to you, Sunset." Twilight said. " I mean, I know it was weird hearing Rara say it like that, but you have to remember that you're only assuming the life that belonged to Thunderlane. Whatever he did, you're just continuing it for him including the more unusual aspects." She had to roll her eyes which I immediately noticed but I couldn't muster up an appropriate response. " Just ignore that fact otherwise you'll become obsessed with it, and we both know what happens when you become obsessed."

I sighed. " Yeah, I guess you're right."

" There you go!"

" What's our next move?"

" We now know how to get inside the Pirate's Fortress so we can do that any time." Twilight answered. " Unfortunately, time isn't on our side right now and you also don't have enough bottles to rescue the eggs in one sitting. I'd say it will take at least an entire day along with several hours of the next one to rescue those eggs. This is especially true since you only have three empty bottles on your person."

" Unless I can get more of them somewhere, I'll be making multiple trips regardless."

" Yes." Twilight said sadly. " I doubt the Gerudo will let you roam around their fortress more than once."

" That will make things harder for me."

" Guess we've got the rest of the final day to come up with some plans."

" One thing is still bothering me."

" Again with the parent thing!?"

" No, not that." I answered. " I'm curious as to why the Zora never noticed the tunnel that the Gerudo used to enter Zora Hall without being detected. If they had discovered it much sooner, the eggs would never have been taken away and Rarity wouldn't be in her current state of mind."

" If you're thinking we should use that tunnel, I doubt it would work."

" Why not?"

" I'm sure they would have caused a cave-in down there so as to prevent anyone from following them." Twilight answered. " I know that I don't have an actual answer but I'm certain that's what happened once they acquired the eggs."

I had thought about using the tunnel provided that it was still accessible, yet Her Highness was probably right in that the pirates had sealed it up to ensure no Zoras would be able to follow them. My only option was to use the underwater entrance and hopefully slip by their defences without them knowing I was even there. I wasn't feeling very confident about my sneaking skills considering the pirates were masters of that craft. A body this big and flamboyant would be easy pickings especially if they had razor-sharp vision. If only there were a way to get by as though I were invisible.

Unfortunately, I had no means of becoming invisible so that idea was effectively pointless. I also realized that no one else at Zora Hall would be able to provide me with any information as they were more concerned with getting to see the Indigo-Go's performing on stage before leaving for Clock Town. Perhaps coming to Great Bay this late during the current cycle of time wasn't my best idea. I needed plenty of time with which to do everything I needed. The idea of only being able to accomplish a small amount felt gut-wrenching.

Getting back up, I jumped into the water, swam back outside, and continued until I reached the shore before walking out of the water. Looking up at the moon, I began to contemplate as to whether or not attempting to rescue the eggs was a good idea. Time was definitely against me yet part of me thought it was possible to rescue them, but that was my brain talking more than anything. My heart knew that such an attempt now would be impossible.

" Guess we should head back to Romani Ranch and see what happens there."

" We've got at least eleven hours to kill."

" That's what the Ocarina of Time is for."

" You really are upset over that parent thing, aren't you?"

" It's not just that." I answered. " I feel powerless right now because I can't go into the fortress and rescue those eggs with what little time I have. It's possible that I could rescue them before having to reset time but given my track record, I'm likely to run out of time meaning we'd have to go through it all again. Twilight... Do you think coming here now instead of in the next cycle was a good idea?"

Princess Twilight sighed. " I'll be honest, Sunset. You should have waited. Instead, you wanted to come here now because of a promise that you made with Applejack that you shouldn't have gone and done knowing what the consequences were. I'm proud you chose to focus on friendship but at the same time it ended up being a problem. I'm not trying to shatter your confidence as this was a good learning experience, but better judgment is needed in the future if we're to save everyone."

Her Highness was correct with her words. I should have focused on the end goal instead of worrying about the likes of my friends. In Termina, they didn't know who I was and that meant they weren't my friends. I had to accept that they were different people who had their own lives, yet I couldn't help thinking about them as being my friends as opposed to complete strangers. To me, they were my family, the ones who had accepted me despite what I did to them in the past. Changing my opinion just wasn't something I could do no matter what anyone--even Princess Twilight--would say.

Was I being stubborn? Perhaps but I had to do things my way even if they were wrong. I'm sure Princess Twilight would understand my position were she to walk around in my shoes for a while, and yet maybe I should walk around in hers to see things from a different perspective. Either way, I was going to see Applejack and Apple Bloom despite not having a connection to them in this world.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask changing back to my human form, flipped back my hair and put the mask away. As I took out the ocarina from the pouch on my belt, perhaps spending some time at Romani Ranch would help clear my mind of so many distractions that were plaguing it. I then played the Song of Soaring before suddenly becoming enveloped by the giant wings that spawn whenever I played this song, and I began picturing the image of the ranch in my mind.

" How many rooms have we been in now?"

" This would be our seventh."

" What is it going to take to find Fluttershy!?" The tall figure said, the tone in her tone showing that she had completely lost it. " I can sense her aura in this direction yet so far all I've managed to accomplish is getting more and more angry over how stupid this ancient temple is." The tall figure then pounded her fist into the wall causing a large dent to appear but it wasn't enough for her and she continued pounding until that section came crashing down. " I'm surprised you have remained calm this entire time. Is it because my words have caused you to assume a defensive measure?"

" I've just been thinking."

" About what?"

" Our existence." The small figure answered. " Why do the two of us continue to exist? We're both representations of those who became us either in a bid for more power or because they were forced into acquiring power without actually knowing what it would do. They have since cast us aside leaving us nothing but shadows of the past that continue to linger instead of fade away."

" We exist because we've willed ourselves back from the brink."

" Have we though?" The small figure asked. " Have we really?"

The tall figure stopped her tantrum and began to think about what her companion had said. " My words are true. When Sunset Shimmer changed back from being me, I felt lost and alone, trapped within an endless void of darkness with no hope of survival, yet I refused to remain that way. I couldn't rest until I had become the real person she was destined to be no matter what cost I would incur upon myself. That's just how stubborn I am."

" You would risk your own life to assume hers?"

" Sunset has lost her way by embracing friendship." The tall figure answered. " Friendship, while a powerful force, merely gets in the way of even greater power. She could have that power if she cast aside the morals that have made her weak and shatter the chains that hold her down due to becoming nice." The tall figure then placed her hand on the wall and knocked her head against it before starting to cry, a revelation that shocked her companion. " By choosing friends over power, she became more powerful, and I couldn't compete with that hence why I was defeated by her several times."

The small figure looked baffled. " You truly are a complicated person."

" I've you to thank for teaching me the benefits of looking deep into myself."

" It's my way of repaying you for bringing back to life."

" While I still don't know how I did that, I'm not about to have regrets about it."

The small figure nodded. " I'll take it as a compliment."

" I have every intention of becoming the real Sunset Shimmer once again." The tall figure said. " I'm not going to give up on that dream. I have to see this through to the end even though it will no doubt cost me my life. I'm sure you have other reasons for wanting to become the real Twilight Sparkle aside from the knowledge you crave, but surely you can understand my feelings of wanting to do whatever it takes."

" Yes."

" I am complicated."

" Nothing wrong with that."

" I will say one thing to you though."

" What's that?"

" If I end up failing to become her, you must continue on your own path." The tall figure answered. " Don't get dragged down because my stubbornness is making me do things that are obviously idiotic in design. Pursue Twilight Sparkle and assume control over her life in your own way so long as you achieve your dream." The small figure was shocked by such words that she couldn't respond yet the tall figure merely smiled cruelly. " If I die then so be it. I will go knowing I did everything I could to become Sunset Shimmer. I'll have no regrets in the end if I become a forgotten memory."

The tall figure walked into the next room and looked at the surroundings she and her companion found themselves in. Aside from a large tree that was attached to the room itself via its roots, it looked just like every other chamber they had visited in their attempts at finding their target. That's when a rustling sound nearby alerted their attention indicating that they had found someone or something inside of the tree. The tall figure walked forward slowly, using her fingers to signal the small figure to follow behind her, and kept going until she could see what was inside.

Her eyes lit up when she saw a Deku Scrub was sitting in the corner staring at her surroundings. The small figure walked up next to her and looked inside to see why her companion had such a devious expression on her face. " Why are you looking so happy? That's just a Deku Scrub who either wandered in here or is perhaps the one who had been abducted according to those other Deku we overheard during our last visit here."

" We found her... We found Fluttershy."

" That's Fluttershy!?"

" Yes, and that means we can put your theory to the test."

" Will it work?"

" I think it will although we will need to use some persuasive measures."

Upon landing in Milk Road after playing the Song of Soaring, I walked down the pathway heading towards Romani Ranch, ignoring Pinkie Pie since I didn't need to hear her information regarding this area again. When I passed through the gates of the ranch and entered it proper, I noticed there were people slowly moving across the field. Each of them were carrying bags and chests on their backs--no doubt causing them great discomfort--while others were moving along using carriages with horses pulling them along, their final destination being the house Applejack and Apple Bloom called home.

I knew why these people were here. They were fleeing Clock Town in their bid to avoid being obliterated when the moon would eventually crash, yet their efforts were sadly a waste of time since there was nothing any of them could really do. The resulting impact would destroy everything! No place in Termina was safe from the eventual destruction that would rip through this world. While it was impressive how dedicated they were towards wanting to save themselves, they were ultimately fools for thinking they could avoid what would be their deaths.

No doubt that so many people coming to the ranch would give Applejack some stress, and had I not saved Apple Bloom two nights ago, she would be absolutely devastated right now and wanting to resort to drastic action. However, this time her little sister was by her side with her mind completely intact, so Applejack had an opportunity to get some stress off of her chest by doing the right thing.

While I knew that this would also amount to nothing since resetting time would erase these events due to the time paradox, I personally wanted to see this resolution. I needed something pleasant to calm my nerves over what was happening over at Great Bay. I had since gotten over the whole parent thing although deep down I wish it had never been brought up to being with, yet I felt heartache knowing those Zora eggs were in need of help and time wasn't on my side for that. I had every intention of doing whatever was necessary to rescue them all upon restarting the seventy-two hour cycle.

" I feel sorry for those people." I began.

" This is what they had to do." Twilight said. " You and I both know their efforts are in vain, but they don't know that and they are determined to come here anyway. I'm actually glad you decided to come here."

" You are?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. I'm not changing my opinion with regards to your judgment, Sunset, but coming here shows us just what lengths these people are willing to take to prevent themselves from being destroyed by the moon. Also... I do want to see Applejack and Apple Bloom sought things out between them."

" I knew you'd see things my way."

" I am the Princess of Friendship after all."

Since what Applejack planned on doing wasn't going to happen until the evening, I decided that it would be best to skip much of the day and go straight to the night. I supposed that I could have done a few things around town so as to not waste any time but my mind just wasn't keen on doing anything other than come here. Besides, I had big plans for the next cycle of time in that progress would be made on numerous fronts.

Raising the ocarina to my lips, I played the Song of Double Time--it took me a few attempts to remember how it went--and in an instant, time sped forward until it stopped at the first signs of night.

Night of the Final Day - 12 Hours Remain.

Right off the bat, the ground started to tremble and my first thought was that it was an earthquake, but then I looked up and realized it was the moon that was causing the tremors due to how close it was getting. While everyone else probably didn't know what to make of the situation courtesy of the time paradox, I was reminded that I had seen this happen plenty of times. The more I witnessed this scene of the moon getting close, the more my heart wept over how much anguish I felt.

Walking up until I reached the house, I needed to take a moment to figure out where Applejack and Apple Bloom would be. In the end, I figured that they would be in the barn as opposed to the house--no doubt Applejack wanted a quiet place--as it was filled with fleeing townsfolk. I walked over to the barn, reached out for the knob, opened the door, and walked inside before closing it, and witnessed the two Apple sisters standing near a cow. Apple Bloom was constantly looking at what Applejack was doing out of curiosity while her big sister suddenly stopped what she was doing upon seeing me.

" Oh... Good evening, sugarcube." Applejack said.

" I said that I would be here." I said, walking up to the sisters. " I had a feeling I'd find you two in the barn."

" The house had gotten a might noisy what with all them people comin' here."

" Why did you invite them here?"

Applejack sighed. " That wasn't my intention. In fact, I didn't even know 'bout it. The mayor sent me a message early this mornin' indicatin' that the ranch was to be used as a safe haven fer those fleein' town, and so I had ta get everythin' ready fer the influx of people we received. Romani helped deal with the more rabble-rousin' troublemakers otherwise I would've lost my mind tryin' ta deal with 'em."

" I saw them walking up this way as I arrived."

" They brought whatever they could, leavin' behind a lot o' memories." Applejack said. She then picked up a bucket near her feet, looked inside of it for a few seconds, placed her finger in it in order to check the contents, and put it back down before skaking her head. " I heard this from the people as they arrived... It's terrible... They said that huge moon is goin' ta crash down onto Clock Town later tonight. I wonder if we'll be all right here... Actually... That's a lie and I feel bad fer sayin' it. I know... We're not safe here, either..."

" The people came here thinking they would survive."

" Nothin's gonna survive when that thing hits."

" Yet that's what they believe."

" I'm all fer believin' in things, sugarcube, but I'm bein' honest by sayin' our chances of survival are slim ta none." Applejack said. " I'm no expert on these things, but that's the feelin' I get and it's somethin' I wish I weren't feelin' right now. The people need to stay positive and spoutin' out bad things would only get 'em in a tizzy, so that's another reason why I wanted ta speak with Romani here in ta barn."

" Cremia..."

" But... That's how life goes, I guess." Applejack said. " There are some things in life y'all can't change no matter how hard you try. All ya can do is just accept them and hope that everythin' will turn out okay in the end."

I wanted to tell her that she was wrong and that you could change the outcome of something but I decided to keep quiet it. She was already feeling stressful what with having to deal with a large number of refugees coming over from Clock Town, and mentioning my ability to travel back through time would only make her even more agitated. Besides, I doubted she would believe that I could manipulate the fabric of time--to a certain degree. All I could was just let her assume that her words were true and hope that she would see things different when the time came.

Applejack then said she needed to take of something outside and would be gone for a couple of minutes, so she asked me to keep an eye on her little sister until she returned. I had no problem watching over Apple Bloom since she seemed much more relaxed around her big sister compared to the previous day. The older Apple sister then stepped outside without uttering a word, closing the door with a loud click, and leaving me to deal with Apple Bloom.

" You seem relaxed." I said. " And here I thought you would be annoyed with your sister."

" She's been actin' mighty weird ever since she came back from her delivery the other night." Apple Bloom said.

" How so?"

" I don't rightly know, Grasshopper, but she seems ta be more nervous than usual."

" Nervous?"

Apple Bloom nodded. " She's been sayin' ta me that she wants ta address somethin' that's been weighin' down on her mind all day, and while I didn't find that ta be weird, it was ta way she spoke that really made me think my big sister is up ta somethin'." She walked over to the cow that Applejack had been standing next too, patted it on the back resulting in a loud moo from the cow, and then looked down at the bucket. Ya know... It's mighty weird that we're milkin' tonight seein' as we usually don't do that until mornin'."

" Given the circumstances outside, I can understand why your sister wanted to do it now."

" I 'sppose so but Romani thinks Cremia is overthinkin' things."

" What was in that bucket?"

" It's "Chateau Romani", the pride and joy of ta ranch." Apple Bloom answered. " It's the first time I get to drink it! I've been waitin' my whole life to finally be able ta experience the goodness that so many adults have gotten ta, but somethin' 'bout this whole thing smells kinda funny. Until now, my sister always said "Wait until you're an adult." But why now? Why change her opinion just like that?"

I shook my head. " I don't have an answer for you."

Apple Bloom sighed. " I mean, I ain't complainin' as I get ta finally have some Chateau Romani, but Romani would like ta have an explanation."

" It's cause y'all have become an adult now." Applejack said appearing in front of the doorway to the barn. In her hand was a needle and some thread that made me think she was planning on sewing something. Normally, she would never do anything deemed frilly, but then this was a different version of my friend. " Romani... I've been doin' some thinkin' fer a while now since I was helped on my delivery by yer friend over there." She pointed in my direction. " I always believed y'all were actin' immature cause you were young but I realize now that I was to have treated ya as such. I was only tryin' ta protect ya cause it's what I have ta do in my position of runnin' the ranch."

" You were doin' and sayin' all that stuff ta protect me?"

" When our father passed away, he made me promise that I would protect you."

" Our dad said that?"

Applejack nodded. " He sure did, little sister. I've done everything in my power to ensure that I lived up to mah promise I made, yet I won't deny that I have been actin' a might too overprotective resultin' in ya rebellin' 'gainst mah authority as ranch owner. With that there moon fallin' and time runnin' out until we're all destroyed, it was durin' this terrifyin' time that I understand what you've been tryin' ta do 'round here. Despite me not believin' yer stories 'bout ghosts stealin' ta cows, y'all still went out of yer way to protectin' the ranch."

" How did ya know 'bout that?"

" A sister always has her ways of knowin'."

" Let's just say yer friend made a lot of noise that night."Applejack said.

Both sisters then turned to look at me resulting in me blushing in response. I guessed my actions in protecting the barn from those ghosts had woken up Applejack, and she had somehow witnessed everything yet refused to say anything about it. While I would've said something so as to not come across as being a jerk, what she did was what she believed was right and despite having to live with that guilt, everything turned out for the best in the end. This was exactly the kind of thing I needed to see in order to remove the stain of failure that was me not rescuing the Zora eggs from the pirates.

Seeing the two Apple sisters reconciling together right before the end of the world made me feel good about myself. I knew that there was still going to be moments where I would be tormented courtesy of Ganondorf willing it to be, yet I also knew that I needed to persevere otherwise I would allow the darkness of misery to consume me.

" Grasshopper..." Apple Bloom began. " Thank you, fer helpin' us understand each other better."

" Sure, no problem." I said.

" Why are y'all callin' her an insect?" Applejack asked. " Ain't it might better ta ask fer her proper name?"

" I 'sppose yer right but I forgot."

" I'm Sunset Shimmer." I said.

" Yee-haw! That's a purdy name if I ever heard one." Applejack said. " Romani... I'm acknowledging you as an adult."

" Then, does Romani get a mask, too?" Apple Bloom asked.

Applejack nodded, patting the needle and thread she had brought with her, and had since placed on a small table nearby. " Yes, I'll make for you, little sister. It won't be ta same as the one I gave to Sunset Shimmer, but it will still be a beautiful mask that y'all can be proud of." She walked over to Apple Bloom before kneeling down and giving her a big hug. " I won't be startin' it tonight seein' as it's gettin' close ta yer bedtime, but I promise I'll get started with it in ta mornin'. Now, this next bit is a might hard fer me ta say, but I want ya ta sleep with me in mah better tonight. Is that alright, Romani?"

" Yes, sister."

" Then I 'sppose we should get back to the house and prepare ourselves." Applejack said. She and her sister started heading for the door, but then she suddenly stopped in front of me, and turned to face me. " Thank you for keepin' yer promise to me by comin' here tonight, Sunset. I'm not sure what y'all are gonna do before everythin' gets destroyed, but I hope I get ta see ya sometime tomorrow mornin'. If not then I hope we can meet again someday whenever yer in the area. Good night." With that, she walked out of the barn, closing the door behind her, and leaving Princess Twilight and I on our own to ponder our next course of action.

The sound of someone sniffling suddenly broke the silence and Her Highness immediately reacted to it. " Sunset? Are you... crying?"

" That was such a tender moment between them." I answered.

" I didn't think you would cry."

" Before you gave me a second chance, I used to look on stuff like that." I said. " I thought of tender moments as nothing but pathetic incidents that got in the way of more important things such as wanting to broaden your horizons." I then wiped away the tears with my arm. " Thanks to you and our friends, I understand that tender moments are precious and should never be condemned."

" Sunset..."

I raised the Ocarina of Time to my lips. " I'm feeling a lot better now, Twilight. I needed something peaceful, serene, and exuberant to get myself focused on what we have to do now back in Great Bay. While I hate the thought of erasing this beautiful moment, there's no other choice as we need enough time to rescue those eggs."

" At least their entries have been placed into that notebook of yours."

" That's right. Even if I reset everything, my accomplishments still remain."

" Yes, so you don't have to feel too bad about it."

" I can still feel some sadness?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " It's never fun going back to the beginning of these three days and erasing so many wonderful things, yet there is no alternative given the fact that the moon would destroy everything, and your hard work would simply amount to nothing."

While having my accomplishments written down wasn't what I truly wanted, at least I could take solace knowing that I actually did something for someone else--the rewards were just a small bonus that people insisted on me having.

I began to play the Song of Time knowing that there was nothing else for me to do for this cycle, and as the magic began to send back to the beginning, I still felt bad knowing that Apple Bloom was going to be abducted by those ghosts, and Applejack would be beside herself with grief.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain.

Once I regained consciousness and was back in front of the Clock Tower, I came to an unfortunate realization. I didn't activate the Owl Statue located on the platform that was located below the Oceanside Laboratory. That meant I had to get back there using the long route, and that involved asking for Epona's assistance. I wasn't off to a good start if I had to address a blunder so very early. I also realized the guard blocking my way to Great Bay was going to stop me again, thus wasting even more time because he saw me as a child despite the sword on my back.

After spending a few minutes once again convincing the guard that I was more than capable of holding my own outside of Clock Town, I ran outside into Termina Field, raised the ocarina to my lips, played Epona's Song, and she appeared out of nowhere before galloping over to me. I patted her on the head followed by whinnying to which she responded in the same manner, and I climbed onto her back before giving her a soft kick in the ribs.

She started galloping down the path onto the sand where the Leevers immediately started popping up in their bid to run into her, but Epona proved more than a match for them as her thundering hooves trampled over them like they weren't even there. Knowing that the wall was fast approaching, I whipped my trusty steed in the flank prompting her to gallop faster, and then she cleared the wall with a single bound, landing heavily on the sand without injury. Epona continued to gallop along until we reached Great Bay again, yet this time I decided to remain on her because I didn't want to deal with those Leevers.

The instant Epona's hooves touched the sand, the Leevers appeared once again, yet I had no time to deal with them here like before. I whinnied to Epona, telling her to gallop north as that was where the Gerudo Pirate's Fortress was located, and she began galloping in that direction, plowing through the Leevers.

Eventually, the sand turned into rocky terrain, meaning the Leevers wouldn't bother us, but a new problem had arisen. The terrain ended at a large inlet of water that travelled deep below the surface, and standing before us was the Pirate's Fortress.

" Coloratura wasn't kidding about how big those doors were." I said as I climbed down from Epona. " Nothing could break through those."

" And yet our way inside lies underwater."

" Do you suppose they're expecting us?"

" Most likely." Twilight answered. " Thunderlane was seen as the one Zora who could fight against the pirates compared to the rest of the tribe. If any of them tried to sneak into the fortress to reclaim the eggs, they would be caught within a matter of minutes. Thunderlane would get past those initial defences and make his way straight to the one who is in charge just on sheer guts alone. You've got your work cut out for you, Sunset. You need to be just as good as he was if not better."

I gulped heavily before taking out the Zora Mask. " Well, if we're going inside, I might as well look the part."

" Before you change, I suggest playing the Inverted Song of Time."

" Good idea. We need all the time we can get."

Putting the Zora Mask down, I raised the ocarina to my lips, and played the Inverted Song of Time. At first, I didn't feel anything when the magic of the song began to take effect, but it soon became apparent that something had happened since the birds flying above me began moving a lot slower than usual. Satisfied that I now had enough time, I moved several steps to the right--I didn't want to scare Epon out of her wits by changing forms right next to her--and placed the Zora Mask on my face.

The transformation began in earnest as I squatted down, clutched my face, and prepared for the eventual scream--it happened sooner than expected. Upon becoming a Zora, I began to walk forward into the water but not before whinnying at Epona to let her know that I would be quite a while. She whinnied in response, raising her front hooves to show that she wished me good luck, and I continued onward until my feet were no longer feeling the ground beneath them. From there, I began to sink down to the bottom of the ocean, and upon landing on the ground, the first thing that caught my attention was three pieces of wood that featured skulls.

Were these meant to be a warning to scare me away? If so then the pirates were doing a lousy job. I walked over to the rock face and began to touch each piece of wood in hopes of figuring out which one was hiding the secret passage that would lead me inside. Each one felt identical to one another so I needed to concentrate really hard. One thing I never noticed before was that my hands had skin in-between each finger. It felt a little strange having webbed fingers but I supposed it came with the territory of being an aquatic creature--the same was true with having gills and scales.

I began getting frustrated. " Gah! Which one is the one I need to smash?"

" I've been thinking about that as you were checking them."

" And?"

" It's the middle one."

" How do you figure that?"

" Notice how there are bubbles coming from beneath that piece of wood?" Twilight asked. " Either Thunderlane placed something there as a means of reminding himself that this was the entrance or the Gerudo have prepared a trap. In either case, you need to remove this obstacle in order for us to proceed."

" Do you think using the martial arts skills Thunderlane would work?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " These wooden boards are much too thick for a simple attack. No, you'll need to swim at it really fast and hope you have enough speed to break it otherwise you'll get hurt. I suggest getting as far away from it as possible before making your attempt."

Following Her Highness' advice, I began moving backwards until I was roughly a few dozen metres away from my target. Once I had steeled myself accordingly, I lifted my legs and began to swim straight for the wooden board, my eyes were closed because of not wanting to witness the impact. When I collided with the wood, it broke into several pieces that began floating upwards to the surface, and where it was, a new path had been revealed.

My first reaction was to stop myself from shaking since the collision did knock the wind out of me. Was this a normal thing for Zora to do? If so then this wasn't the last time I was going to have to use my body as a living projectile. Once I had regained my composure, I thought about swimming down the passageway but instead I opted to just simply walk. Who knew what was awaiting me at the other end so swimming head-long into danger would be utter stupidity on my part.

The passageway was a lot longer than I thought it was yet I was amazed at how well it had been crafted. I knew it had been constructed by Zora hands, or fins in this case as several markings on the walls looked like they had been struck by powerful fins--yet if I were a Gerudo, I'd make sure no Zora could use this passageway by either blowing it up, sealing the other side so as to prevent anyone from getting further, or placing some kind of creature that couldn't be defeated. It was as though the Gerudo were practically begging for someone to come along and enter their fortress--more like a personal invitation.

I suddenly stopped and cupped my hand around my ear. " Twilight... Do you hear the sound of engines?"

Princess Twilight nodded her head. " That could mean anything although if I were to take a guess, that's the sound of several boats. We need to be careful, Sunset, as we're heading into unfamiliar territory. Watch your back at all times and use your skills accordingly."

I nodded slightly and walked onward, the passageway suddenly becoming a slope that lead upward towards the surface. Upon getting out of the water, I was met with a surprising sight that made my body feel cold. A massive metal plated fortress stood in front of me and judging from how many turrets could be seen jutting from several walls, the Gerudo were serious when it came to protecting their territory from invaders. The engine noises turned out to be several motor boats, each had a pirate armed with a spear standing in it, moving around a large body of water.

One thing that stood out with their formation was that there was a large gap between the first and fourth boats, and if I were fast enough, I could use that gap to my advantage although it depended on how far they could see things. If they spotted me, I'd be captured in an instant. Much like what I experienced in my previous journey with the Gerudo's Fortress, going through this one required stealth.

" Do you think those pirates can see us from here?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " We're on a high elevation so we're safe, but I'm guessing they can only see things directly in front of them. If we're going to continue further, we need to find another way in." She then pointed towards an entrance located further up that could be reached via a catwalk, but there appeared to be no way of reaching it. " If we can reach that location, we can slip by their defences and infiltrate the inner area."

" Where would another entrance be?"

" Underwater."

I slapped my forehead. " I should've known."

" Wait until that large gap between those two boats before you jump in." Twilight said. " If you jump too soon or too late, you'll be spotted instantly, and while you might think you can fight them, this is their fortress so they can easily call in reinforcements from who knows where to overwhelm you."

" Wouldn't the sound of something splashing in the water attract their attention?"

" If you're convincing enough, you could make it sound like a fish had jumped out of the water."

" And if not?"

" I don't think you want to know."

Her Highness was right. I didn't want to know what would happen otherwise. I quietly shuffled my way forward until I was standing at the edge of the ledge, and looked down at the boats as they were circling around the body of water. Judging from the width of the boats not to mention how much space each one had, it felt like it was possible for me to jump onto one of them and allow it to carry me to wherever it was I needed to go. Unfortunately, doing that would risk me getting caught. If only there were a way for me to use those boats without being spotted by the occupants. It would certainly make things easier for me.

As the third boat passed by with the fourth one approaching from a distance, I made my move and jumped into the water before sinking down to the bottom. There were a couple of treasure chests scattered about that made me wonder who even put them down here in the first place, yet I was more focused on schools of Skullfish that were swimming around nearby, most like serving as additional guards though I doubted the Gerudo even knew of their existence.

Princess Twilight then perked up. " Look at the size of that massive grate."

I looked up and saw that she was right. A large tube was sticking out of the wall and was covered by a grate that was begging to be moved out of the way. " I think we may have found ourselves the entrance we need to progress, yet where do you suppose we can find a switch around here?"

" It probably wouldn't be underwater as that would be too easy."

" Somewhere on the surface?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " That means you'll need to slip by the pirates and activate the switch."

If the switch I needed to press was somewhere on the surface, I would need to raise my head out of the water long enough to be able to see it, and ensure that the pirates don't spot me doing that. Before doing anything else, I picked up a nearby metallic rod, slammed it into the ground, and began making a mark so that I could find this location again without having to waste any time looking for it. The mark didn't need to be anything fancy--I went with a typical "X" shape formation--but I was surprised at how easy it was to lift the metallic rod given how dense it was.

When I finished making my mark, I tossed the rod aside and began swimming up to the surface, making sure to keep a close eye on the boats as they travelled around the perimeter of the water's surface. The idea was to wait for that gap between the two boats, poke my head out of the water, look around for signs of a switch, and duck back down before anyone notices me.

The one problem with my plan were the schools of Skullfish that swam about in the depths of the water. One such group had chosen to follow me, believing that I was some kind of tasty snack, and I needed to get rid of them otherwise they could force me to the surface where I would be exposed to the watchful eyes of the pirates. They began nipping away on different parts of my body such as my fins, and I shook them off by flapping my arms only for them to repeat the process. Regular attacks wouldn't work as that required me to have both feet on the ground, but then I remembered the electrical barrier I can create using magic.

Closing my eyes and concentrating, the barrier appeared around my body, and the Skullfish instinctively went for me not realizing what they were running into. As each one fell to pieces after receiving an electric shock, I couldn't help but feel bad for them. It wasn't their fault that they lacked intelligence and instead relied on instinct, but they could have just swam away and left me to carry on. When the last one was defeated, I turned off my magic barrier and resumed swimming up to the surface.

As the fourth boat sailed by, I waited a couple of seconds before raising my head out of the water.

" Can you see anything?"

" Not yet." I answered. " There's not really all that much to see other than the cliffs that surround much of this place."

" The Gerudo are probably fortunate then."

" Why would you want to praise them?"

" Think about it from a strategic standpoint." Twilight answered. " Not only do the giant doors provide an excellent means of frontal defence, the cliff's provide additional defence by forcing any would be attackers into trying to climb up and over them into this area where they will be faced with both water and turrets. Granted, that underwater entrance was a mistake on their part since any Zora can use it to their advantage, but overall they are pretty well-defended."

" Makes you wonder what lies further inside."

Princess Twilight nodded. " The worst is yet to come." She then looked behind us, noticing one of the boats was starting to get closer, and immediately bopped me on the head to get my attention. " We need to duck down below the surface, Sunset! Now!"

Without even looking, I dropped down a few metres just as the boat began to sail by. I thought for a moment that when the boat stopped for several seconds, the pirate was going to look down in order to see if anything or anyone was down there, but I was relieved when the boat continued onwards. There was no time to go back up and continue searching for the switch as the next boat sailed along, forcing me to remain underwater until the gap came up again.

Several minutes passed and the gap between the boats happened again so I immediately raised my head above the surface and continued to look for a switch. Other than the walkway that lead up the side of the fortress, nothing else really stood out aside from a small catwalk almost hidden away from view on the far side of the water. I squinted my eyes in hopes of seeing anything that looked suspicious over there and sure enough, I could barely make out what looked to be a switch. Why would they put something like a switch all the way over there knowing someone was bound to press it?

Sinking down slightly below the surface, I began swimming forward. " Okay, Twilight. I think I may have found the switch we need."

" Really? Where is it?"

" At the far end of this outside area."

Princess Twilight blinked in surprise. " What possessed them to put a switch to an underwater entrance on the opposite end of their fortress? If you want my opinion, they either didn't think this through very carefully or it was intentional in that they know someone will come along trying to find it."

" I'm going to go with the latter on this." I said. It was much easier swimming underwater knowing exactly where it was I was supposed to go, and of course, you couldn't go wrong with swimming like a dolphin. I knew I had to be serious yet I couldn't help having a little bit of fun. Eventually, I reached the side of the cliff where the catwalk was situated, and I began to feel for it so as to not be spotted by the pirates. " It should be somewhere around here, Twilight."

" Be quick, Sunset."

Knowing that I had mere moments before the boats would pass by again, I felt the edge of a ledge through my webbed fingers, grabbed onto it, and pulled myself out of the water before walking up the catwalk. It stopped at a large switch that I recognized from Snowhead Temple, yet I was more concerned with the boats. Each of them sailed past although none of the pirates could see me standing up here. So long as I didn't fall down into the water, I would be safe and could plan my next move accordingly.

I walked up to the switch. " Why would they have a switch that can only be used by a Goron?"

" Perhaps as a measure with which to keep any Zoras out?"

" Guess I'll have to switch forms."

" Wait!" Princess Twilight exclaimed. " Remember what happens when you put on the Goron Mask? You stumble about for a few moments before the transformation is finished. If you tumbled into the water and became a Goron, you would instantly sink to the bottom and drown."

" Then what am I supposed to do?"

" Do you remember that trick in Snowhead Temple where you switched seamlessly between your Goron and Deku Scrub forms?"

I nodded my head. " I remember though it did feel weird."

" You need to do that again." Twilight said. " Only this time between your Zora and Goron forms."

While I didn't like the idea of switching between forms without becoming a human in the process, it was a necessary evil since otherwise changing into Darmani would result in an unfortunate plunge down below. Taking out the Goron Mask from behind my back, I placed it on my face despite some hesitation on my part, and the magic immediately began to take hold although it felt more like a vibration than anything else. I couldn't feel it happening but my Zora body slowly changed into that of a Goron until I had finished the transformation. As I came to, I didn't know what to think.

Switching between forms like that just didn't feel right, and yet I knew it was going to prove invaluable later. Jumping onto the switch, I curled up into a ball--I'll admit that I missed becoming a Goron what with their love of rolling around--jumped up into the air, and came crashing down onto the switch moments later. Far off into the distance, the sound of something moving underwater through a creaking sound indicated that the way forward was opened. It shouldn't take long for me to find the exact location down below since I did take the liberty of placing a marker down there for this kind of emergency.

I took out the Zora Mask and put it on my face, the weird vibration effect happening to me all over again, but when I became a Zora again, something hit me in the back of my neck with a lot of force. Wincing slightly, I reached behind my neck and pulled out what looked like a tranquilizer dart before holding it in my hand.

" Where did that come from?"

" I don't know." I answered. " But whoever did this has excellent aim."

" Sunset? Are you alright? You seem to be getting woozy."

" The dart... It's filled with some kind of... knock-out drug." I answered, stumbling about a little in the process. " Twilight... I'm... I'm... losing consciousness..." My entire body went numb and I fell off the catwalk into the water below before my body floated up to the surface. I was completely helpless in the water as Princess Twilight looked on as the boats started making their way over to me.

When the nearest one reached me, the Gerudo standing in it laughed as she pulled my unconscious body out of the water and onto her boat. I was now at their mercy, a prisoner of the pirates.

Chapter 37: The Prisoners

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
December 12, 2016
Chapter 37: The Prisoners.

I wanted to get away and into the underwater passage that had opened upon activating the switch, but I was no match for a mere tranquilizer dart that seemingly came out of nowhere and knocked me out cold with its drug. Never did I expect the Gerudo Pirates to rely on such a devious tactic as knock-out drugs, but I suspected having to deal with Thunderlane on a consistent basis made it all the more necessary to have something on hand. If only I had remained conscious long enough to know where they were taking me, I could have figured out how to use such knowledge to my advantage.

Instead, I was at their mercy, and who knew what they had planned to do to me. Two things were happening to me at that point: the first was what my physical form was going
through despite not being able to see anything, the second was my mental form was experiencing another dream. I could see myself back home not in the world I now called home, but
rather my birthplace, Equestria, as a unicorn frolicking about in the open fields. I didn't care about anything that was going on and that's when I realized that this version of me was a much
younger incarnation.

This was back when I was really little, around the time before Princess Celestia made me her student. Some bits of what I was seeing didn't resonate with me and were merely a blur while others definitely reminded me of when I was new to Equestria and trying to figure out what I wanted to do with my life. My cutie mark was on my flank so I knew what my special talent was at the very least, yet I recall struggling with understanding its significance. It was at that moment I witnessed something that changed the course of destiny and lead me down a path I now wished I'd never travelled on.

My family appeared and I tried to get their attention, yet they ignored me in favour of my siblings who were older and therefore had more experience. Their upper bodies were in silhouette due to me not remembering what they looked like or because I didn't want to remember the faces of those that shunned me. I wanted to make my family proud of me by following in their footsteps as a powerful unicorn, but nothing I did was ever good enough for them. Instead, I had to teach myself the ways of magic and prove I was just as powerful as they were if not stronger than them. This was the beginning of my descent into darkness, the point where power consumed my mind.

Another image of my younger self then appeared though a smidgen taller than before. I remembered this day rather well although not in the manner that I hoped now that I thought about what happened. It was the day Princess Celestia visited my family in hopes of choosing one amongst my siblings and me to take under her wing and groom him or her into a fine pony who could one day become ascended just like she was. She eyed each of my siblings thinking they could be worthy yet when she looked at me, she noticed that my magic was different from the others just by feeling my magical aura.

I had trained rigorously to making my magic stronger, and when I told her that I had trained myself in the ways of magic, she was impressed that a filly so young could master such arcane spells without having any proper training. She made her decision soon afterwards and chose me to come to Canterlot in order to further my magic by becoming her prized pupil to which I agreed wholeheartedly without having to really think about it.

To me, it was a chance at freedom and getting away from my family, but it was a freedom that soon came with a price, one that would come back to haunt me later in life. The images of my younger self disappeared leaving me in a black void of which nothing could be seen around me. I chose to pursue power above everything else, and Princess Celestia tried desperately in getting me to change my focus by making friends with other ponies. Her effort was in vain and the path that was my life took a downhill spiral until Her Highness came along and gave me a second chance at turning things around.

Princess Twilight... I owe everything to her for giving me a better life than the one I had in Equestria. Do I yearn for that old life? Yes, but not when I was chosen to become the student of the ruler of the land because of my magical gift. I wanted to go back to those days of being a filly, frolicking about without a care in the world, and maybe have my family appreciate me better by actually acknowledging and embracing me.

" Sunset..."

I could hear the voice of Princess Twilight yet what I still dreaming?

" Sunset..."

There it was again only much louder this time.

" Sunset... Wake up!" Twilight said, bopping me on the head repeatedly. " Please! You have to wake up right now!"

" Nggggh!" I responded in a drowsed state. My eyes slowly opened although I was struggling to keep them open. " Where in the world am I? The last thing I remember is being hit by that tranquilizer dart and falling into the water before losing consciousness.

Princess Twilight then zoomed over and hugged me really hard on the cheek. " I'm so glad that you're awake, Sunset! I've been watching you all this time waiting for you to open your eyes so that we can plan our next course of action."

" You know that can be taken the wrong way, right?"

" I know." Twilight answered. " But, right now you need to see just where you ended up. I was lucky that the Gerudo Pirates didn't notice me flying close by otherwise I'm sure they would have done something horrible to me. This fortress is a lot bigger than we originally believed."

" How so?"

" This is the dungeon."

My eyes opened wide upon hearing Her Highness reveal where we were, and I began to start looking around my surroundings. The walls were dingy and in desperate need of repair what with the dripping of water billowing about from several areas across the ceiling including one that was right above my head--droplets fell down on my face every now and then requiring me to wipe it away even though it was actually rather soothing. Iron bars prevented me from escaping and while I could use my fins in an attempt to slice them to pieces, I suspected the Gerudo had reinforced the bars so as to prevent a certain Zora from causing trouble.

It then occurred to me that I was the only one trapped down here in the dungeon--not including Princess Twilight. There was no one else around which made me wonder what became of prisoners who found themselves captured by the Gerudo. I shuddered to think of their fates although I might receive the same treatment. I began to search for a place where keys would normally be hung and have Her Highness fly over, grab them, and bring them back so that I could get out, yet there was no such luck.

Even the floor itself was dingy and felt like it could crumble away at any moment. If the pirates wanted to make me feel uncomfortable beyond all reasoning, this was a pretty good way to go about it.

I then tried firing my fins despite my suspicions. Each one clanged off the bars causing no damage at all, and yet I wasn't surprised as it confirmed that this particular cell was created to keep a certain Thunderlane inside. " Guess we'll just have to wait for our hosts to come down here and gloat over capturing me." I said as my fins returned to my arms.

" I'm sure they will enjoy it since you are their greatest enemy."

" Makes me wish that we had planned this out better."

" No, we did everything right." Twilight said. " It's just that neither of us were expecting a tranquilizer dart would take you down."

" They truly were prepared for Thunderlane to come in here for the eggs."

" Yes."

Since there was nothing more I could, I decided to sit down on a nearby bed--it was shoddy in design--and wait for something to happen. About ten minutes later, a nearby door opened up suddenly with a loud creaking noise, and the sounds of footsteps could be heard echoing throughout the dungeon. My captors had finally arrived yet I needed to remain calm and not lose control of my emotions. They had me exactly where they wanted me and one mistake could cost me my life.

The same door closed with a loud clank and the footsteps began making their way towards my location. I wanted to give off the impression that I wasn't going to look at their faces in a show of defiance over my imprisonment, so I lowered my head down and waited for them to get close enough before things would get worse.

" Well, well, well... I never would have thought that the mighty Mikau would be felled by a mere dart!"

That voice sounded familiar!

" To think that we have never used this particular cell until now."

I had no choice but to look up and see if who was speaking was who I thought it was, and when I looked up, my suspicions were confirmed much to my own terror. Standing in front of me with her hands on her hips was Rainbow Dash, the last of my initial friends who had been brought into this world with me. I should have realized that she would end up being in a similar position like she was before on my previous journey, yet it seemed that she had a much more authoritative attitude compared to before. She even wore a similar outfit to what I remember seeing her wear last time yet the colours were more vivid in purple as opposed to red.

Standing either side of her were three pirates who looked similarly dressed yet Rainbow easily stood out with those colours. There was no doubt in my mind that she was in charge of the pirates and that meant she was my enemy even though I wish it weren't so. I began to fear if Twilight Sparkle, the human version of Princess Twilight, was also portraying a villainous individual. If it were true then it meant having a really difficult time trying to convince myself otherwise.

Rainbow then started getting mad because I wasn't responding to her. " Are you giving me the silent treatment? Do you think that you're better than me? If I wasn't in such a good mood right now, I'd have had you killed for everything you've put us through over the years, you piece of offal."

" You stole something valuable..."

" Oh, so you can talk?" Rainbow Dash asked. " And here I thought you lost your ability to speak. A shame really. I was hoping to have riled myself up some more so that I could make things much more miserable for you, but I suppose you're just stubborn that way."

" Where are the Zora eggs?"

" Figures you would ask that."

" Please tell me where they are."

" Like I'd ever tell you anything, Mikau."

" I don't want things to get worse especially if I were to lose control of my temper." I said. " I'm not sure why you would resort to stealing eggs, Rainbow Dash, as something like that is far beneath you, but I need them back in order to help out Rarity."

Rainbow Dash then looked at me with a puzzled look on her face. " What... What in the world did you just spout out of your mouth?" She quickly turned to face her fellow pirates and gave them a signal that seemed to indicate that she was sending them away so that she could deal with me on her own. The others nodded in silence and ran out of the dungeon without uttering anything. Rainbow then looked back at me, a confused look was now on her face.

" How do you know that? How did you know about my nickname? Ugh! Did someone say something they shouldn't? Whoever mentioned my nickname as being Rainbow Dash is going to be having my sword carved into their backside. Are you trying to use that pathetic Zora charm in order to worm your way out of our dungeon? Granted, the name sounds totally awesome and would make me cooler, but that's besides the point."

I realized that I once again forgot that my friends weren't who they were in this world. " I'm sorry. I didn't mean to call you that name. You just reminded me of someone who is very close to me as a friend."

" Why are you acting so apologetic to me?"

" Shouldn't I be?"

" What!? NO! You should be spitting in my face because of what I've done to both you and your people."

" I'm not going to forgive you for stealing but I won't resort to such disgusting manners."

" Maybe that drug changed something in your head." Rainbow Dash said. She lurched forward in order to get a closer look at me and quickly realized that something was wrong, something only she noticed compared with everyone else I had encountered thus far in Great Bay. " You... You don't have those tattoos on your arms, and why do you have scales covering parts of your chest? You are most certainly Mikau, yet you look totally different."

She actually figured it out? Either Rainbow had a sixth sense that no one else possessed or she just happened to luck out. Still, this was definitely surprising since no one else among the other tribes ever questioned my appearance especially in the case of the Gorons and Zoras. I thought about telling her the truth by taking off my Zora Mask and revealing my real form, but then Princess Twilight bopped me on the head when I reached for my face. Her intervention proved wise and I realized that I couldn't ruin Thunderlane's reputation even though I could reset time.

I decided to respond to Rainbow. " I... I've lost weight?"

" That's your excuse!? You shed some bulk?"

" Um... yes?"

" Heh!" Rainbow Dash snickered. " It doesn't matter if you lost half of your body mass. It won't change the fact that I've got your precious Zora eggs and there's nothing you can do to get them back again." She looked outside of a small window for a few moments before looking back at me. " Still, why hasn't Derpy come back with them yet? I sent her to retrieve them the other night, a simple enough mission, yet she's still missing. Gah! Why did I entrust her with something that was obviously beyond her skills?"

" Derpy... Isn't she the one who has crossed-eyes?"

Rainbow Dash nodded. " Yeah, that's the one. She's my second-in-command although there are times where I question my decision on giving her that rank above some of the others since they displayed better judgment. Derpy does mean well but she can be really forgetful to the point where she's likely to drop something. Still, I wouldn't replace or anything as she does have some pretty awesome abilities whenever they occur."

I was surprised that she answered my question without realizing who she was talking to, but then I noticed that despite criticizing Derpy, she chose to remain loyal to her comrade by praising her for her skills. Once again, one of my friends displayed their respective Element of Harmony without even realizing it. The magic of my friends was breaching the barrier that protected this world from Equestrian magic, and I had no means of being able to take it to another level.

There was one option I could try at this moment: Ask her why she had to steal Rarity's eggs. I didn't know if I was going to get an answer as there was no telling when Rainbow would realize how casual she was speaking to me, but it couldn't hurt to try one more time. She was the right person to ask since as the leader of the pirates, she told them what to do and in turn they would carry out her orders without question.

Of course, I needed to ask in a way that wouldn't make her suspicious. " Um... Why would you need a bunch of eggs in the first place?" I asked. " As pirates, surely your very names are feared by everyone across Termina."

Rainbow Dash laughed. " Everyone fears us Gerudo Pirates! Why do you think no one other than us and the Zoras live here? The other tribes are too afraid of coming out here because they know they will be at our mercy, and those fish-freaks have no where else to go because of needing water." She then stopped laughing and took on a more sombre look. " It does get boring going after you and your kind all the time. We want to kick things up a notch and lay waste to all of Termina, but we never considered it before until now thanks to that stranger who visited us a few days ago."

" Visitor?"

" A little brat wearing a freaky mask."

" Starlight Glimmer!"

" Is that her name?" Rainbow Dash asked. " She never mentioned it to me when we talked but then I wasn't in the position to do anything. That kid possessed incredible power that almost brought down this entire fortress. We've been fixing things up ever since although I'm sure there are places that still need repairs. She told me to steal some eggs that a Zora had recently laid and was pretty adamant about it, well, as far as I could tell. That mask hid her emotions really well."

" Maybe the eggs have a purpose?"

" You could be right about that."

Now things were starting to make sense around here. Once again, Starlight was the source of the problem although I wasn't surprised by this. She had convinced Rainbow Dash into stealing Rarity's eggs forcing Thunderlane into attempting a rescue mission that cost him his life. She must have known he would become a threat to her fun so he needed to be killed to prevent this region from being restored back to the way it was before. I doubted she knew that I would come along and assume Thunderlane's mission, but if she did then it didn't really matter since she too was affected when I reset time.

The only question I needed to have answered involved what it was the pirates would get out of stealing some eggs. Double Diamond mentioned that the temple out at sea was guarded by a Zora whose descendants carried on the lineage whether they knew about it or not. If Rarity was the current guardian given how she had suddenly lost her voice, then what was the significance behind her eggs? Also, what had happened to the Giant who watched over this region? It seemed there were more questions than I originally assumed.

What I did know was that asking Rainbow wasn't going to be happening for much longer. If I were to ask one just one more question, she would figure out that she had been duped into sharing her information, and would keep her mouth shut.

I had to risk it. " Why listen to a child?"

" Why? Because she had magic!"

" Still, she's not around anymore so you don't have to listen to her."

" While that is true, a pirate never backs away when it comes to collecting treasure and wanting to dominate everything." Rainbow Dash said. Her eyes suddenly opened wide and she stared at me, the anger in her face was obvious. I knew right there and then that she had figured out what I was doing and was about to explode in a fit of rage. " You... You tricked me into revealing our plans, you gutter trash! How could someone like me, Aveil, leader of the Gerudo Pirates allow myself to fall into your trap? Grrrr... Mikau... I was thinking of keeping you locked up in here forever, but that's no longer good enough for you. I want to see you suffer in the most horrific way imaginable."

" That's enough!" Twilight said, appearing from behind me and floating in front of Rainbow's face.

Rainbow Dash backed away slightly. " What the!? A fairy!? What is a fairy doing here?" She quickly began laughing which annoyed Her Highness and it took me several moments to figure it out. " Is that fairy with you, Mikau? Ha! I never thought that the warrior among the Zora would be reduced to hanging out with a fairy. Have you finally gotten soft after so long or is there something more to this than appearances suggest? Either way, this is pretty lame even for you."

" You don't need to listen to that masked imp." Twilight said. " She is planning on destroying this world."

" Like I'd believe something like that!"

" Have you seen the moon in the sky?"

" That hunk of rock with the ugly face?"

" Yes."

" Yeah! I've seen it a few times." Rainbow Dash said. " Not sure why I should be worried about something that happens to be wrecking the sky with its ugly mug. The sky is supposed to be a beautiful place where the nature itself can flow about freely without being restricted by what lies before. Nothing should be allowed to blight such beauty, especially the stupid moon with its stupid face!" She looked like she was going to smash something but quickly calmed down and addressed me with a smirk. " I don't care about no falling moon no matter what you say, fairy. I'm after something much bigger that will make us pirates live the easy life from now on."

Princess Twilight continued to protest. " If you won't believe me about the moon then believe me about that imp."

" I'm finished talking with both you and Mikau." Rainbow Dash said. " She then reached out for a lever that had been hidden within the shadows of the dungeon and held it firmly in her hands all while goading me. " This particular cell also has a double feature, Mikau. Not only does it prevent you from using those fins, it also has a trapdoor that will send you out of the fortress and into the cliff-side where you'll plunge to your death."

" Rainbow Dash... Don't do it!"

" Sorry, fairy, but Mikau has had this coming for a long time."

" But--"

" I doubt you'll survive so I'll let you in on a little secret. We pirates are going to be stinkin' rich beyond our wildest dreams!" Rainbow Dash said. " And those Zora eggs are the keys to that dream coming true. Maybe we should give that creepy fisherman a few bits just so that he would stop snooping around here looking for a photograph of one of us. Gah! Men can be so weird what with their obsessions! I'm sure you've spoken with that guy living in his house on the beach, Mikau. If not then you'll never have that chance! It's been a fun ride over the years but your annoyance must come to an end."

Rainbow Dash pulled the lever and the floor beneath my feet immediately swung inward, revealing a pit below that plunged into deep darkness. Within those brief moments before my body began to fall, I looked at my friend with an expression that screamed "I can't believe you just did that to me", yet all she did in response was laugh, the echo of said laughed rattled throughout my ears and the pit as I fell down into it. The last thing I witnessed was Rainbow pulling the lever again and closing up the pit leaving me completely in the dark, unsure of just where I was going to end up.

Bump!

Thump!

Bonk!

Thonk!

My body collided with the walls of the pit as I continued plunging down through the darkness but then I noticed a light appearing off in the distance. I had no idea if this pit would open out near the ground or somewhere higher up, yet what I did know was that I needed to prevent myself from getting killed. Despite what Rainbow Dash said and her desire to see me killed, I was going to disappoint her by surviving her little death-trap and perhaps give her a piece of my mind once I got myself back into the fortress.

Everything suddenly went white before turning a shade of blue, and I discovered that the pit opened out halfway up the cliff. That didn't make sense! Dungeons were usually built at the bottom of castles so as to give prisoners the incentive that they were trapped below and would never see the light of day again until they had chosen to change. Perhaps this dungeon was built further up in the fortress to maximize on having prisoners fall to their deaths. In any case, it was a moot point as I now needed to focus on preventing myself from crashing into the jagged cliffs that were now below me.

Falling at a fast pace with mere seconds to come up with a plan, I tilted my body forward slightly, allowing me to change direction to avoid the side of the cliff, but it didn't save me from landing painfully on the rock-like ground. The impact was enough to send me flying off of the ground and landing in the sand face-first, and I was lucky that no Leevers decided to come out of the sand to take advantage of my unfortunate condition.

It felt like I had been flattened by a massive slab of rock--that was how my body felt upon landing in the ground after landing on the rock-like ground. I was barely able to crawl my way across the sand and into the water where it began to rejuvenate me until I stood up.

" Sunset!" Twilight shouted. " Are you alright?"

" I've been worse." I answered as I walked over to the water's edge and sat down.

" How in the world did you survive that fall?"

" In this game, falling from a great height doesn't kill you provided you land on solid ground."

" And those other incidents where I said falling would kill you?"

" Some of them were an exaggeration." I answered. " Others, like the bottomless pits for example, would have resulted in my death. Good thing I was able to move my body over otherwise I'd have smashed into those jagged rocks on the cliff and not be alive to tell about it."

" I can't believe Rainbow Dash did that to you."

I shrugged my shoulders in response. " I'll admit that I was a little bit surprised but then when I saw the demeanour on her face, I figured that she was going to be our enemy rather than our friend. I had a feeling not all of our friends would be good people in this world, yet Rainbow Dash was definitely an unexpected situation. It's like you said before, she isn't the person we know from Canterlot High. We have to treat her as an enemy even if it is going to be difficult."

" If you say so."

" I did notice one thing."

" What's that?"

" Even though Rainbow chewed out her second-in-command, Derpy, for being incompetent, she was still willing to put up with her and even praise her for her skills. That was a clear display of her Element of Loyalty." I answered. " It's like you figured out, Twilight, our friends' Elements are shining through in Termina despite our Equestrian magic being unable to penetrate the barrier that protects this world from foreign magic. Rainbow's loyalty shone brightly for just a few moments before she resumed being a jerk."

" What about Rarity?"

" I don't know."

" Perhaps returning those eggs will make her feel generous?"

" It's our only option."

" Are we going back into the fortress?"

" Not yet." I answered, getting up onto my feet. I stretched my arms and legs before looking in the direction of the two houses on the beach. " Rainbow said something about a fisherman living in one of those houses who had been annoying the pirates with his snooping around. Maybe he can help us figure out a means of getting through." I began walking only to suddenly stop when something else came to mind. " She also mentioned about them getting rich from stealing the eggs. You don't think they plan on selling them to someone?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I doubt they are worth anything to anyone, Sunset. I think Rainbow Dash was referring to the Great Bay Temple out there in the ocean. I'm certain a place like that is just crawling with treasure that would make the pirates wealthy, so we need to get there before they do and take it for ourselves. I know that doesn't sound like me but the treasure could be a new weapon you need to further progress through Termina."

" Saving those eggs just became more important than ever before."

" Yes, so we need to hustle."

The first thing I needed to before anything else was to activate the Owl Statue that was located on the platform below. Even though making my way back to Great Bay from town using Epona was fine and all, it did waste precious time which had begun getting even more important than before due to things getting more complicated. I also had a feeling that I would need to warp back to the Oceanside Laboratory once I collected all the eggs to ensure they hatch in the proper environment.

Since running on the sand was dangerous--those Leevers were still there--I jumped into the water and began to swim though at a much slower pace than I wanted. It seemed that my plunge from high up had caused more of an injury than I initially thought. My right leg had sustained a nasty bruise that was slowing me down, yet I couldn't do anything to relieve me of the pain until I could find some recovery hearts lying around. Despite having a slight handicap against me, I was still faster than the Skullfish and Like-Like that lurked underwater, and I didn't want to deal with them until I was capable of using both legs.

What should have been two minutes took me five but I managed to reach the platform that housed the Owl Statue. Extending out my fins, I struck the statue twice and was about to jump back into the water when I noticed that nothing happened. Confused, I struck it again twice and again it refused to activate.

" Why doesn't it work?"

Princess Twilight looked at an inscription located on the base of the statue. " According to this message, you need to strike the statue with a sword in order to activate it. Nothing else will work so you'll need to change back to a human for several seconds."

" Seriously?"

" You wanted to come here for a reason, Sunset."

" To activate it so that we can come back here quicker."

" If that's the case then you know what you have to do."

I grumbled under my breath knowing Her Highness was once again correct. Grabbing my face, I pulled the Zora Mask off, changing myself back to normal although I wasn't in the mood to flip my hair back like I usually did. A sharp pain then came from my leg indicating that the pain was even worse as my true self since my natural leg wasn't as strong as a powerful Zora leg. I cursed myself for not bringing along a potion to relieve me of the pain so I had to grin and bear it until I could find those hearts.

Placing my mask on the ground, I unsheathed my sword and struck the statue on the owl's head, causing the statue's wings to spread out indicating that I had created another warp point for me to use to get back to Great Bay faster than before. With that simple task now out of the way, I put my sword back in its scabbard, picked up the Zora Mask, and placed it on my face, the magic contained within began working its mystic power forcing me to squat down. Unfortunately, this made me yell not because of changing but because my leg was experiencing unnecessary pressure due to my injury.

A second scream later and I changed into Mikau once again only for me to quickly stand upright and yell a third time due to the leg again--all I was doing at this point was making myself worse and worse. Once my leg stopped throbbing, I jumped into the water and began swimming towards the two houses although I had no idea which one housed the fisherman who was mentioned by Rainbow Dash. One was his house while the other was a place where golden Skulltulas roamed--I had no intention of going in there until my leg was better.

Upon reaching the shore and walking out of the water, I continued onward at a snail's pace until I stopped in front of the house that was nearest to me. " That was a stroke of luck there being no Leevers that came out to take advantage of my weakened state."

" You need to get that leg tended to."

" I'm regretting not buying any potions."

" Looks like I'll have to give you a reminder later on."

I slapped my forehead. " Yeah, I deserve it, Twilight."

" Anyway, we should focus on speaking to this fisherman." Twilight said. " I am surprised that the Gerudo see him as such a threat especially when you consider that they've had their hands full dealing with Thunderlane."

" Rainbow Dash mentioned something about him wanting a picture of them."

" I don't see what would compel someone to do that." Twilight said. She thought about it for a moment before shuddering. " Okay, I think I've got the idea but why don't we give him the benefit of the doubt."

" Which house do you think is his?"

Princess Twilight pointed to the one that was closest to us--the one I was originally swimming towards--and guessed that was where the fisherman lived. Since both houses were right next to each other, I can easily run back outside if we end up walking into the wrong one.

I walked into the closest house and found myself witnessing quite the unusual setup. The interior of the house was a lot smaller than I thought it would be, but then this place was occupied by one person so I supposed size didn't really matter. Various items were hanging on what was a circular wall including: fishing poles, posters of the Indigo-Go's, a shelf that had only two books on it, a picture of a Gerudo that had clearly worn out over time, and finally a large sword that seemed fantastical more than anything else. A circular carpet on the floor rounded everything although to be honest, it looked as though this place needed to be taken care of better.

Perhaps the one thing that stood out was a fish bowl that didn't contain fish but rather a seahorse. It certainly looked beautiful for such a tiny creature, yet I couldn't help but think it was banging its head on the glass in order to get me to pay attention to it. Perhaps it was acting that way due to seeing a Zora? That was my only guess since seahorses weren't something you encounter usually.

The fisherman himself had his back turned to me and was busy looking for something, yet I felt as though I knew him from somewhere based on the back of his hair. He obviously hadn't noticed that I entered so I coughed slightly prompting him to turn around.

" Well, if it isn't a Zora? I haven't seen one of you around here for some time."

" Snails!? What are you doing here!?"

Of all the people I knew from Canterlot High, the fisherman turned out to be Snails, one of the two students who I manipulated into being my henchman so that I could make student's lives miserable in order for me to rule unopposed. Even after I was defeated and began changing my ways, both Snails and his best friend, Snips, were punished alongside me although they confessed to being used against their wills by me in exchange for power. I never got mad or blamed them for doing what they did. After all, I had used them just like everyone else in my bid for power so they had every right to get out of their punishment and leave me to suffer alone.

Snails was bare-chested although he had a couple of tattoos on his arms, yet I'll admit that he really needed to wear a shirt to cover up his scrawny body. I always did think that he needed to eat more to gain some meat on his stomach but then it wasn't really my place to make him do that. My reaction was pretty surprising yet Princess Twilight was even more so in that her jaw dropped upon witnessing Snails standing before me.

" Huh? Snails? Now that's a funny name I ever heard." Snails answered.

" That's not your name?"

Snails shrugged his shoulders. " I'm just an ordinary fisherman who happens to live out here in Great Bay. I suppose I do have a name but it isn't really important so if you want to call me by that name you just used, I won't take any offence." He quickly turned around and continued rummaging through his belonging only to curse under his breath. " Darn! I thought it was somewhere in this pile, but maybe it's in that one there by my favourite fishing rod." I coughed to get his attention and he looked at me. " Huh? Did I forget that you were here? I'm a terrible person for ignoring you. How have things been going lately?"

" Not very well."

" I know that feeling all-too well."

" What were you looking for?"

" A special kind of bait needed for fishing, but I suddenly remembered that things aren't good right now for that." Snails answered. He then started laughing and I wasn't sure if he was being serious or was acting like he normally does around Canterlot High, adrift in his own little world. " Could you be coming to see me 'cause you can't catch any fish?"

The Zora blood within me compelled me to nod and respond accordingly. " No such luck."

" It's not good out there..." Snails said. " Lately, I've been coming back empty-handed myself. It's like the entire fish population just vanished without a trace. I thought you had come here to share some of your catches with me, but it looks like we're both having a bad time. If you thought I had some to share with you, then I'm sorry but I don't have any. I'm an expert regarding fish, oh yes! I'm what you call a... pro... pro... professional. I've been catching fish in these seas for thirty years."

" You don't look that old."

" Nice of you to say."

" So there are no fish?"

" Nope." Snails answered. " When it comes to catching fish, I'm even better than the Zoras, and they're supposed to be the experts. I never tell them to their faces otherwise I would ruin my relationship with them as being a good supplier. You know... fish! Lately, the seawater has gotten really warm. It hasn't helped my fishing at all, yet that's just the least of my troubles. The water has grown murky for some strange reason, and when I go out on my boat, I always lose my way and somehow end up back at shore empty-handed and not having any fish to show for it."

" Do you think the temple has anything to do with it?"

Snails looked at me with a puzzled expression on his face. Oh come on! Surely he would be aware of the Great Bay Temple out in the ocean. After all, he said that he had been fishing in the area for thirty years, so why didn't he know something that was practically out in the open for everyone to see? He looked like he was about to answer my question and I was hoping for a good answer. but what he ended up saying was less than spectacular. " Um... I don't know a place like that."

I was about to slap my forehead when I realized that perhaps the temple was a Zora thing but then perhaps the pirates knew of it. I decided to humour Snails by saying something entirely different so that neither of us would be stumped over what was obvious. " Sorry, forget I said anything." Well, it wasn't "entirely different" per say but it was necessary to advance this conversation.

" Whatever is happening, it's become a problem for the fishermen and the fish." Snails said. " If the seas don't return to normal and soon... I will be all dried up! Oh, and I suppose the same thing will affect the Zoras."

While the thought of there being no fish made my heart cry on the inside, I didn't see it as being important as rescuing the Zora eggs from the pirates. I wasn't acting like a monster in this instance as I knew the value of sacrificing small things for a much greater good even when others will question you on it. Besides, saving Great Bay overall would give him all the fish he could ever want.

I then noticed that Princess Twilight was looking at the photo of the Gerudo hanging up on Snails' wall, and nudged her head slightly several times to indicate that I should take a look at it as well. Looking at the photo, as I stated before, it had definitely worn out over time, but now that I had a much better look of it, you could barely see any facial features. How long had he kept it hanging up on his wall without realizing how old it really was? Then again, the rest of his house didn't really fare much better. If there was one thing this Snails was like compared to the one I knew, it was that both of them weren't good at taking care of their belongings.

Snails then noticed what I was doing. " Heh-heh! Isn't she pretty? But, you know... Those female pirates are so frightening, they could scare a crying baby into silence. I took that photo a long time ago using something called a Pictograph Box, yet the quality has diminished a lot since then and I've tried in vain to get a better photo. Every time I sneak into their fortress, they capture me and throw me back outside. I guess that's why security around there increased because of my behaviour."

" You're the reason why their front door is closed?"

" No, that had something to do with one of your kind."

" Okay, so what did they change regarding you?"

" They added more guards to the usual patrol routes making it impossible for anyone to sneak by without being spotted." Snails answered. Maybe it was a good thing that I was kicked out of the fortress before I learned that discovery the hard way. " However, I do know that it's possible to get past the pirates although it will take a couple of items. Years ago, back in my younger days, I used to use this thing called a Hookshot to catch fish off the coast. It has a spring-loaded chain that can pull you towards something or the other way around if you wanted to bring something closer to you."

My eyes opened wide! I remembered using that during my previous journey. Did it mean that I would be reunited with a useful item that I was able to figure out relatively quickly without too much trouble? Did he still have it on him? I needed to know. " Do you still have the Hookshot somewhere in here? If so, I'd love to take it off your hands."

" I don't have it anymore."

" What!? Why not?

" I was attacked by those pirates one day."

" And they stole it?"

Snails nodded. " They took it back with them to their fortress and said it was a legendary treasure." Shoot! Now I had another reason for going into their fortress. If only he hadn't lost it to them. I could have used the Hookshot and avoided many of them, yet Snails said there were more guards around than before. " Thing is, I've got nothing against them for taking it in the first place since it wasn't even mine to begin with. I just happened to swipe it from the bottom of the sea during one of my fishing trips, but if you really want it then you'll have to find a way into the fortress and look for it."

" That won't be a problem."

" Security is tight so it will be."

" I'm sure I can get past all of them."

" That's what she said."

Did Snails suddenly use one of the oldest and most obnoxious memes to have ever existed? I doubted that he intended on saying it but still, it annoyed me that he even had to resort to something like that. Getting back inside was going to be a cinch--no pun intended towards Principal Cinch--since I had both underwater passageways available, so why would he sound so defeatist about sneaking past a group of women? If the pirates were like the thieves from my previous journey, they could easily be knocked out by arrows, and was a more humane way of dealing with them without resorting to any unnecessary killing.

Defeating monsters was one thing but doing the same thing to non-monsters--even if they were trying to kill you--was something I didn't want to do. That's when it clicked with regards to that meme Snails said. It sounded like he was mentioning someone else having ventured into the Pirate's Fortress, but I couldn't tell for sure unless I asked him. Since he had lived in this region for such a long time according to his own words, he was an authority around here.

" You mentioned "she" just now."

" Yes, I did."

" Who is this "she"?"

" I've never seen her in person but I heard the pirates say that a strange armoured soldier wandered into their fortress one day. She seemed lost and confused according to eye witnesses but before they could capture this soldier, she seemed to have just disappeared into thin air. Other accounts suggest the soldier was trying to get the pirates to notice her presence only to fail. Since then, she has become known as the Inconspicuous Soldier, she who vanished from the world." Snails answered.

" Not what I'd call "inconspicuous", but did she have any striking features?"

Snails nodded his head. " The soldier was holding a weird looking mask before she vanished." He then thought about something in his head for a few moments before continuing on although I was having a hard time believing that someone could just disappear into thin air without a trace. " Those same pirates said that she looked a little sickly but they weren't about to use a potion or anything. I don't know if any of it is true but you never really can tell these days what is real and what isn't. A shame we don't have the power to see the truth for what it is otherwise our lives would be a lot more interesting."

Whether he realized it or not, Snails had just given me a really important clue. If this soldier had indeed vanished, then perhaps using the Lens of Truth would enable me to uncover them and perhaps acquire the mask that she has on her person. I also needed a healing potion so that meant taking a trip to Clock Town and buying a potion at the shop. Despite not being entirely bright, Snails definitely had his moments and this was definitely one of them. Maybe the thought of me becoming invisible wasn't quite so farfetched because if this soldier could do it then so could I. I first needed to prove that she had vanished.

Princess Twilight had since floated over to the small bowl that contained the sea horse, but I supposed I wasn't all that surprised since she loved being curious. Any time she wanted to investigate something new to expand her knowledge, there was nothing that could stop her from doing so. If only I possessed that same knack for wanting to expand my own horizons that she did. I mean, I loved learning new things like Her Highness, but I wasn't as engrossed in it mainly because other things had taken up my free time. Even when she has a lot of pressure on her shoulders what with being a princess, Twilight always found time to engage in the pursuit of knowledge.

" Help me..."

All of a sudden, a high-pitched squeak rang through my ears. I turned towards Her Highness thinking she was in some kind of trouble, but she just stared at me, blinking a few times before turning her attention towards the sea horse. Could that little creature have spoken out to me? Nah. I must have been hearing things due to not getting enough sleep--it had been some time since my previous rest though I don't count being knocked out by that tranquilizer dart.

" Please, help me..."

There it was again. I immediately looked in the direction of the sea horse, yet it just stared back at me and continued to stare. Was I beginning to lose my mind? Had that plunge from the cliffs caused some kind of brain injury? I sure hoped that wasn't true. I lurched forward to see if I was indeed losing it, and the next moment certainly took me by surprise.

" Please, take me back to the waters near Pinnacle Rock..."

I almost screamed upon learning that the sea horse was capable of talking. I walked over to the fish bowl and stared into it and sure enough, the sea horse was starting to get excited most likely due to my presence. It wanted me to take it somewhere? I had no way where this Pinnacle Rock was since I hadn't explored all of Great Bay, and the little creature probably belonged to Snails as why else would have a portion of his house dedicated to it?

" What did you say?" I asked the sea horse.

" Please, take me back to the waters near Pinnacle Rock..."

" Are you interested in that fish?" My heart suddenly began beating quickly due to Snails speaking and me focusing my attention squarely on the sea horse. I had a feeling he was going to make a comment once he saw me looking at it long enough. " Even though most of the fish around here have disappeared, there are some that manage to survive, and this happens to be one of them. It's a rare fish known as a sea horse. Many Zora have tried in vain to get their hands on one but their determination shows how stubborn they can be sometimes, but also commendable since they understand the value."

" What are you talking about?"

" The money." Snails answered. " You see, I caught that sea horse swimming around here just off of Pinnacle Rock. Since it's rare, I was thinking of selling it at the town carnival, which should be starting soon."

I couldn't believe what I was hearing. He was thinking of selling such an innocent creature just so he could make a few bucks--rupees--even though he knew just how rare it was compared to other fish? I had every mind to take the sea horse with me, return it to the ocean where it belongs, and give Snails the biggest talking down to I've ever given. Just when I thought he was starting to become decent, he had to go and say something so utterly repulsive, I wanted to throw up in response.

I looked at Snails again, disgusted by what he had said, but that's when I noticed the sombre look in his face. " You see... That was going to be my original plan, but I decided that perhaps you would be interested in it seeing as Zora love looking for sea horses. Money has been an issue for me which is why I considered selling it, yet maybe you might have better luck with it than I would. Well? What do you think? If you want, I'll give it to you."

" Really?"

Snails nodded. " I will but on one condition..."

" What's that?"

Snails turned his attention towards the photo of the Gerudo Pirate we were looking at earlier. " If you want that sea horse, I want you to bring me a pictograph of a pirate as my current one has seen better days. If I like what I see, I'll gladly hand over the sea horse, but if it doesn't look good then I'm keeping it."

" Will any pirate do?"

" As long as it's a better quality than that old photo."

Things had now become even more complicated what with Snails throwing in his little request. Not only did I need to rescue the seven Zora eggs, I needed to find someone inside of the fortress who was invisible, and now take a photo of a pirate so that I could save a sea horse from being stuck in captivity. I was fine with being a heroine but I wasn't fine with having to do multiple tasks at the same time. At least there weren't going to be any other complications... Until I remembered that collecting the eggs required the use of bottles of which I only had three in my possession.

I had to make three trips into the fortress and that meant having to get past Rainbow Dash and the other pirates numerous times. Part of me wanted to curl up in a corner and cry because of having so much pressure placed onto me, but then this was part of what it meant to be a heroine. I had to endure so much in order to succeed in saving not only Termina but the world that was now my home, and quite possibly Equestria as well if in case Ganondorf carried out his threat of conquering it. Still, I wasn't liking the idea of going into the fortress three times just because I didn't have enough empty bottles.

My eyes then noticed one--a bottle--laying on top of a pile of clothes that Snails obviously hadn't bothered to put away. I inquired as to whether he wanted it because it had just been left there, and he said a Zora tossed it onto the beach after having won it against a pair of beavers living on top of the waterfall near Zora Hall. Snails planned on using the bottle to stuff some of his knick-knacks into and place it on a shelf, but he completely forgot about it due to the problems he was having. Coloratura told me that I needed to pay those beavers a visit to get an empty bottle yet getting this one here would save me some time.

After asking if I could have since it held no value to him, Snails thought about it for a few moments before nodding his head. I gleefully picked up the bottle, thanked him for it, put it behind my back, and promised that I would be back with a photo that he was sure to love.

" That was pretty lucky." Twilight said as we left Snail's house.

" At least we don't need to deal with the beavers." I said.

" With that fourth bottle, we only need to go into the fortress twice."

" It's better than three times."

" Yes." Twilight said. " In any case, we need to go back to town briefly in order to pick up a Red Potion."

I sighed. " Guess I should play the Song of Soaring then." Taking out of the Ocarina of Time from my pouch, I was surprised to see it had become the very fish-bone guitar that I had propped up against Thunderlane's grave marker after his spirit was put to rest. " Whoa... It's Mikau's guitar! But, isn't it where I made his marker?" I turned to Princess Twilight to get her answer and she merely shrugged her shoulders. " I'm not complaining since a guitar is my instrument of choice, yet don't you think it's a little weird that his guitar is now mine?"

" You are carrying on his life." Twilight said. " So it makes sense that you would inherit his instrument."

I strummed the bones using a pick that also appeared when I took out the ocarina. Despite Thunderlane having played his version of the fish-bone guitar in a mad panic all because he was on his final legs, it actually had a really nice rhythm. The thought of playing a skeletal fish was still disturbing but I had to get adjusted to such an unusual quirk the Zoras were known for. At least I had something simple compared to Coloratura who had an organ made from the bones of whatever kind of aquatic creature it was.

Strumming the bones several more times, I smiled and nodded before playing a gnarly rift. Princess Twilight was impressed with the rest and so was I. Never had I played the guitar with so much passion before. If my friends could see me now, their jaws would be on the floor because of how epic I had just made that rift--even Rainbow Dash would in awe and say how awesome I was. Unfortunately, none of them were quite themselves right now thanks to being given new lives and identities, but I knew that I was going to save them all along with changing everything back to the way it was before.

Concluding that I had practiced long enough, I played the Song of Soaring and desired to go to the Owl Statue located in Clock Town. Wings then appeared from behind my back, wrapped themselves around my body, and soon I was whisked off to my destination.

" Will you need some assistance breaking through the barrier that protects Fluttershy?"

" No." The tall figure answered. " What looks like iron bars are actually branches coming from the tree that is supporting this entire room." She walked up to the branches and cradled one in her hands before pulling it down with a powerful yank. " I was thinking of using what little magic I have and burn that tree down, but that would cause a cave-in resulting in the untimely death of Fluttershy, who needs to be alive long enough for you to test that theory."

" That reckless attitude of yours will be your undoing."

The tall figure groaned. " I know that! I just relapsed a little into an old habit, that's all."

The small figure wasn't buying it for an instant. " Who are you trying to kid? You're still as reckless as you were before when you desired to become the real Sunset Shimmer, and before that when you wanted to conquer all of Equestria using a bunch of humans as a personal army. Granted, such behaviour hasn't been as evident as before coming you from, a sign you're getting better at using your brain, but you still need to quell that desire to act without thinking of the consequences."

" Must you continue to patronize me?"

" It gives me something to do."

" Ha! You're not perfect either."

" At least I show restraint when it comes to dealing with my attitude."

The tall figure then laughed. " You have got to be kidding me here? I know what you did when you first came into being. You wanted to try out your new powers by opening up portals to Equestria without caring one iota about the world your Twilight lived in, and were willing to destroy it entirely all in the name of claiming all the magic." She grabbed the remaining branches and pulled them off before flicking them at her companion who didn't appreciate the sentiment. " Just admit that you're reckless like me. Nothing wrong with admitting something as it shows you have a lot of character."

" I'll never understand your sudden change in perspective."

The tall figure then walked into the tree where she found herself staring at Fluttershy, who seemed a little surprised that she had received company. Her first thought was wanting to make her suffer because of how she was related to Sunset, but knew that there was much more that needed to be taken care of. For her part, Fluttershy seemed unafraid of the strange figure who had paid her a visit, but then her eyes veered off towards the small figure entering the tree. She smiled at her other guest who responded by sporting a sadistic smile before receiving praise from the tall figure via a subtle wink.

Both demons had been waiting for this chance and now they were going to go all-out without having to worry about being caught. The only thing that could stop them was time resetting back to the beginning of the seventy-two hour cycle.

" Oh!" Fluttershy exclaimed. " You two certainly gave me a surprise. Hmmm... I don't think I've ever seen either one of you before." She was about to take a step forward in order to see who her guests were, but something in her head convinced her to stay where she was and allow them to make a move. " I'm not sure how you got past that monster who captured me but did you come here to rescue me?"

" Rescue you?" The tall figure asked.

" Yes."

" Why would we do anything like that?"

" Um... Did you not go through Woodfall Temple in order to reach me?" Fluttershy asked. She then noticed the massive hole in the wall and quickly concluded that these two strangers had taken a more direct approach of reaching her. " Wow... I did not think that anyone had the power to go through walls. You might be even stronger than the monster who dances about with his vile insects. You know... um... I believe I haven't introduced myself to you. My mother would be ashamed of me for not showing common courtesy towards others. I am the Deku Princess, of the Deku Kingdom."

" Deku!?" The tall figure exclaimed. " What the heck is that?"

" It's what she is." The small figure answered. " They are a tribe of plants who make their homes in the swamps and forests although they have a superiority complex. This stems from being despised because they focus on a principle of survival above everything else. The other tribes are seen as those who are to be taken advantage of to further the future of the Deky Tribe, and as a result are treated as less than scum. The Deku don't care as they believe themselves to be grater than any other."

Fluttershy sighed. " My ancestors believed in survival of the fittest at the expense of others, yet my mother, the Deku Queen, has worked hard to change this perception as a means of allowing us to be accepted by the other tribes. Her advisors believe we should continue our tradition of fighting for what we want and secretly desire her throne so that they can carry out their wishes. I don't like such things because all that happens is people's feelings get hurt. I just wish they could show some kindness in their hearts and not aspire to making enemies with everyone else in Termina."

" That sounds like kindness."

" It, um, does?"

The small figure nodded. " You don't want to see your people suffer anymore and instead want them to form strong ties with the other tribes? That tells me that you are showing considerable kindness. Most Deku would prefer continue their current actions, yes?"

Fluttershy nodded. " My words alone have given my mother strength to carry out her convictions, but ever since I wandered into the temple, I suspect she has been listening to the words of her advisors and, um, may punish that innocent monkey who helped me get here."

" A monkey?"

" Um... yes, he helped when I wanted to find out what was causing the water to become poisonous."

The tall figure lurched forward. " A monkey!? Well... I wasn't expecting you to say something like that, but then you always were good with animals. Even when you've been changed into a plant, you still possess the knack for understanding how critters work. No wonder they look to you for guidance. I was also going to ask why you are even in such a dreadful place as this but I got my answer so I don't need to ask further.

" Um... Who are you?"

" Who are we?"

" Yes... um... You know who I am but I don't know who you are."

" And you want to know?"

" Um... Yes?"

" Okay... We'll show you who we are."

Getting back to where I was in the Pirates Fortress wasn't as easy as I thought. When I returned to Clock Town after using the Song of Soaring, I made my way over to the west side and to the Item Shop in hopes of buying a Red Potion, but when I got there, my heart sank upon realizing that my wallet was devoid of rupees. I had forgotten that rupees didn't carry over upon resetting time so any I picked up were gone for good. That meant going outside into Termina Field and rummaging through the grass for roughly ten minutes in hopes of finding as many loose rupees as possible.

In hindsight, I supposed I could have gone to the bank and withdrawn some rupees, but I barely used the services provided by Fleur Dis Lee, and so I forgot that she was an option when it came to having easier accessibility.

My rummaging took two trips and I only had myself to blame for not remembering or knowing how much a Red Potion cost. My first instinct was to collect twenty rupees hoping that would be enough, but the shopkeeper said that a Red Potion cost thirty rupees--the Green Potion was the one worth twenty rupees since it restored magic rather than life. When I came back with the correct amount, he graciously accepted my money although he was surprised that a Zora would come to his shop considering Zora Hall had an Item Shop of its own located somewhere--again, this was something I didn't know about.

There was one bright moment when it came to combing through the grass. I managed to pick up some recovery hearts thus restoring my strength, but more importantly, my leg could finally be healed after having crashed earlier when I was ejected by Rainbow Dash from the fortress.

Once I had obtained my potion and left the Item Shop, my next task involved making my way back to where I had been captured by the pirates. Playing the Song of Soaring and warping over to Great Bay--good thing I activated that Owl Statue when I did--I dove into the water and began swimming towards the fortress as fast as I possibly could since all of this backtracking had cost me some precious time.

I initially believed that the Gerudo had covered up the underwater entrance that I used before to sneak into the exterior of the fortress, but to my esteemed relief, the entrance was still accessible as though they didn't know it existed. Then again, Rainbow may have insisted it not be closed up because she was anticipating my eventual arrival. If so then I needed to remain alert especially. I swam down into the passageway, my eyes quickly adjusting to the darkness, and then adjusting to the light, walked out of the water.

The same number of boats were patrolling the outside area like before, and that had me feeling nervous as though there could be some hidden boats. Since I had activated the switch before being captured, the way forward was now accessible so all I had to do was drop to the bottom of the water, find the marker I left behind, enter the new passageway, and go even deeper into the fortress.

When the gap between the final boat in the sequence and the first boat was at hand, I jumped into the water, the resulting splash surprisingly didn't draw any unwarranted attention, and I dropped down like a stone until I landed on the ground below.

" Now, where did I put that marker?" I asked.

" It should be somewhere ahead of us." Twilight answered.

" I'm surprised none of the pirates stopped to check out the splash I made."

" You should be thankful for that."

Rather than swim across and invoke the ire of the Skullfish that were swimming about, I opted to walk along the ground in hopes of finding the marker. Sure, I was walking slower given the water was slowing down my momentum, but it was necessary to prevent me from getting caught again like before. I still couldn't believe how they were able to knock me out using a tranquilizer dart. If I ever had any embarrassing moments on this journey, being captured in that manner was definitely one of them.

After walking along for several hundred metres, I finally came across the marker I had left in the sand when I used my fins. Parts of it had disappeared in places indicating that the water was moving the sand back into place, but that didn't matter now as I could continue on as intended. Looking up at the entrance I needed to use, the grate had moved most likely due to the switch I activated earlier. The one thing that was bothering me was how dark it was and that was usually a problem since who knew what was lurking about in the darkness especially in a place like this.

Swimming into the passageway and continuing on for a few minutes, the only thing that stood out were the regular fish that were seen swimming about. I thought it a little odd considering how Snails was complaining about how he wasn't able to catch any, but then I doubted he was willing to come in here given the pirates didn't appreciate his business. I could always use one of my empty bottles and pick up a fish for him, but the Zora eggs were more important as the only way I could transfer them over to Daring Do was by scooping them up into my bottles.

I didn't know whether the pirates were taking good care of the eggs or not. Rainbow Dash was insistent about how important they were so I assumed that they were being looked after in a somewhat decent manner.

Turning around a corner, I discovered that the passageway ended at a chain-link fence that featured another one of those boards that had covered the initial passage entrance, yet why was this down here in an area completely submerged underwater? Had it previously been devoid of water but was filled up on a later date to prevent intruders from getting any further inside? Maybe but that wouldn't prevent a Zora--specifically Thunderlane--from getting further.

Using my legs to propel me forward followed by swimming at an intense speed, I smashed through the board only to come up against something else. " There's a block with what looks to have an image of Majora's Mask imprinted on it." Perhaps I had underestimated the pirates when it came to their craftiness. The chain-link was most likely unbreakable but even if it was, if I were to try and break through it by swimming, I was more than likely to cut myself to ribbons.

" That block is preventing us from progressing."

" But, can I even more it?"

" I don't see why not." Twilight answered. " You can walk underwater so it must mean you can grab, push, and pull objects underwater as well."

" Only way to know is to try." I said. I walked over to the block, grabbed it somehow with my hands--there wasn't anywhere for me to grab onto--and I pulled it towards me as far as it could go until it stopped because of a slight step. " Okay... That didn't really do all that much. Maybe I need to look in another direction?"

" There's another boarded up section to your left."

" Works for me." I said. Swimming as fast as I could after launching myself with my legs, I crashed through the board and into the wall with a loud thud. " Ow!" I rubbed my bruised head before turning to the right and seeing another board blocking the way. " You've got to be kidding me!" How many more of these did I have to smash through in order to get any further in this area? Mumbling under my breath, I smashed my way through this next board and crashed into another wall that was at the end of the passageway. " One thing I'm not liking about being a Zora is not being able to stop swimming once I start."

" Are you okay?"

" Just a mild headache is all."

" Do you want to rest for a few moments?"

I nodded my head. " Yeah, I could do with the rest considering everything that has happened so far since coming here." I sat down on the floor, rested my back up against the wall, and began to think about whatever was on my mind. " You know, as much as I have complained about having to endure so much torment, I've got to admit that there have been some pretty cool moments throughout this journey. I love the fact that I'm able to change into different creatures and understand what kind of lifestyle their kind live in."

" You've literally walked a mile in different kinds of shoes."

" Yeah, I guess you could say it like that."

" One thing has been bothering me though."

" What's that?"

" That Triforce mark on the back of your hand." Twilight said. My expression changed to sadness when she mentioned that, yet Princess Twilight noticed and waved her hands so as to say she wasn't trying to dredge up any bad memories that I experienced in the past. " Why were you given such a mark in the first place? I know you said that it was given to you because you represent the power of Courage, but it seems like something is missing that makes it all come together."

I sighed. " I got it when someone told me that I earned it after proving my bravery by rescuing others."

" That would definitely do it."

" I'd rather not think about it since all it did is give me nightmares."

" One more question." Twilight said. " Who told you?"

" Someone who had been guiding along since the beginning."

I couldn't tell Princess Twilight that she was the one who guided me throughout my previous journey, and the one who told me that the Triforce of Courage was a part of me. I was the only one who remembered what happened in that other video game and I knew she wouldn't believe me even when she said she did. Everyone's memories of Hyrule were erased and made it difficult for me to seek out any help.

This time, Her Highness, in addition to myself, would be the only ones who remembered what Ganondorf did when he brought all of us into this world. The rest of our friends would refuse to believe anything happened unless they were to suddenly become aware of it. I doubted that the pony versions of our friends would believe it even though Equestria is a magical kingdom where things like that were a pretty common occurrence. And yet, there were still some things I didn't understand regarding the Triforce. Why I had was one thing, the true depths of its power were another.

" Sunset? You don't need to tell if you don't want to."

" It's not that."

" Then what is it?"

" I want to tell you, Twilight, but when I feel ready to."

" Fair enough."

" Just like that?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I know it's something that you're having trouble explaining since it must be difficult even for you to grasp. Foreign magic of any kind can be very tricky since you don't have anything you can use to make it easy to comprehend. Me giving you an inquisition is completely unfair and I should respect the fact that you're not feeling sure of how best to explain everything to me. Maybe when we've stopped the fall from falling would be the best time to tell me what you really know."

No wonder Her Highness was so approachable. She knew how to give others their space and not badger them on about their personal issues, yet she did have a tendency to remind others that they would soon be needing to explain things for her own piece of mind. Guess that's part of her charm regarding knowledge. Princess Twilight wants to know just about everything there is to know and won't accept the idea of being left out. If only I had a similar conviction when it came to my own desire to further increase my knowledge. The urge is there but just doesn't have the kind of spark she possesses.

Getting back onto my feet, I walked over to the block, grabbed it, and pushed it as far as I could until it stopped in the same manner as the other one. I then spotted a treasure chest located in the center of the room--what it was even doing in a place like this boggled my mind--that was tempting, so I decided to go for it. Stepping back a few paces, I learned that there was an open area that would allow me to swim over the fence and to the chest.

Doing so, I landed on the other side, kicked it open, and took out a red rupee. " To be honest, it wasn't really worth making the attempt."

" Perhaps but you could do with the money."

" I just need to remember to go to the Item Shop more often."

" Perhaps I should remind you then."

" One thing bothers me." I said. " Why would a treasure chest be here of all places?"

" I don't know." Twilight answered. " Much of this doesn't make sense but perhaps someone put it there knowing it would be plundered later. If one of the Gerudo placed that chest down here, maybe this area never used to be flooded. If it was left behind by a Zora, you'd have to wonder what compelled them into coming here considering Thunderlane was the only one who could fight."

After mulling it over for a few moments, I concluded that it wasn't really all that important, and that I should just keep going. Still, I had to wonder if this was just an isolated incident or that there would be future situations similar to this.

Swimming back over the fenced section of the room, I then walked through it as I needed to in order to reach the other end so that I could continue. Upon getting to the end, my only option was to use a water current that was blasting out from a hole in the ground. Could this be where all this water was coming from? If so, were there other holes performing in a similar manner? The pressure rising up from the hole would be enough to send me upwards although another option involved simply swimming up to the next section.

Ultimately, I decided to go with using the current since it meant not having to do anything.

Walking into the current, it pushed me right up to the surface and right into the path of what appeared to be a spiked ball. I wasn't able to stop myself and I collided with it, causing it to swing backwards, hit the wall, and suddenly explode upon impact leaving nothing but the chain. The pirates must have placed it here knowing that someone would come in this direction, but then my heart sank as I discovered there were at least a dozen spiked balls lined up in front of me. Not only that but there were strong currents pushing towards the wall and I was willing to bet that swimming into one meant being pushed back outside.

How was I going to weave my way through these obstacles without causing a chain reaction?

Chapter 38: Ambush

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
December 19, 2016
Chapter 38: Ambush.

The Gerudo Pirates were serious when it came to protecting their fortress from anyone who would try to sneak in. I was starting to realize that Thunderlane must have snuck his way in here through this underwater passageway enough times that the pirates had resorted to using exploding spiked mines as a means of stopping him. Even the smallest amount of pressure would result in an explosion so I needed to weave in-between each mine, yet there was another problem that couldn't be ignored. Currents of water going in both directions were situated between the mines. Even if none of them exploded, I could easily be sucked into a current and thrown back outside.

While I did have a Red Potion on hand, I couldn't use it to heal any wounds. I needed it in order to give it to someone inside this fortress who was invisible. Whoever they were had definitely made me jealous as they couldn't be seen while I was exposed for the pirates to spot easily. If I had whatever power they used, I could easily make my way around the fortress and not worry about being caught. Of course, I first needed to find this "inconspicuous soldier" as Snails referred to them as.

Since this fortress was a massive complex, unless I were to miraculously look in the right location, finding this soldier could take hours, and that was something I couldn't afford as time was clearly against me. I needed to rescue as many of the Zora eggs as possible, deliver them to Daring Do, come back here a second time to pick up the rest, deliver them as well, and figure out how to gain access to the temple located offshore. Having to make two trips wasn't exactly my idea of fun as no doubt the pirates would be onto me once I rescue one Zora egg, but there wasn't really much of a choice.

Unless something had happened to a few of them--I'd never actually want that to happen as they were unborn and extremely vulnerable--I had to memorize where I have been so as to not get myself lost coming through the second time.

Before I could do anything like that, I first needed to get past this obstacle. I knew colliding with the spiked mines would send them tilting in a given direction but because they were on chains bolted into the ground, they would tilt back in the other direction and most likely into me causing unfortunate circumstances. If the chains were only a bit longer, I could push one into another and continue doing so via a chain reaction until they were all destroyed, but the chains weren't long enough. I needed some other idea to get through otherwise it meant having to find an alternate path.

Princess Twilight had been looking at my fins for quite some time, and while it wasn't bothering me, I had to wonder why she was suddenly obsessed with them. " Sunset... I wonder if you could use your fins to strike the spiked balls at a distance."

" What good would that do?" I asked.

" If you hit them from a distance, they would ricochet back and forth."

" Too bad their chained to the ground."

" Ah, but that will be to our advantage."

" Come again?"

" It's really simple." Twilight answered. " Your fins go forward a fair distance before curving in an arc formation before coming back to you. If you were to hit more than one of those spiked balls, you could have them ricochet into one another causing them to explode.

" Mines..." I said. " They are spiked mines."

Princess Twilight rolled her eyes causing me to frown at her. " You're beginning to act like I would when it comes to being articulate about something, Sunset. Anyway, you should rely on your current abilities to see us through this obstacle."

" And the water currents?"

" You should be able to walk underneath them."

I scratched my head. " Are you sure I can do that? Those currents don't look to be situated high enough."

Princess Twilight then winked. " If all else fails, you could just get down onto your stomach and crawl along."

I wasn't going to dignify that with a responsible. If I didn't know any better, I'd swear that Her Highness was trying to be funny, but her efforts were being met by a cold response from me in return. When she noticed the expression on my face, she immediately went quiet before hovering over and hugged my ear tightly. I appreciated her wanting to give me ideal suggestions to help me get passed difficult obstacles but using condescending humour wasn't really something she would say. Her Highness was also aware of how I was bullied by my peers after the Fall Formal as payback for what I did to them.

When it came to teasing of any kind, I was just like Fluttershy, sensitive and not really able to handle it. I supposed that was her personality trait rubbing off on me combined with my own insecurities of how I wanted others to see me. Having to save two different worlds--quite possibly a third one if Equestria were to be threatened--was already stressful enough so having a close friend make me feel even worse only added more stress.

Princess Twilight wasn't trying to upset me and I knew that but she needed to be careful around me. All of those stressful points were taking their toll on me mentally and there was no telling when I could suddenly explode, losing all sense of self and becoming nothing more than a quivering jelly huddled up in some corner. The veil that was my sanity was slowly coming undone, a tapestry that hung itself together by thread, growing ever weaker with every passing moment. So long as I kept my emotions under control, I wouldn't lose myself to despair and could keep going. If I cracked then everyone would lose, not just me.

Upon Her Highness bopping me on the head to once again snap me out of my daydreaming--I wasn't about to ask her to stop doing that--I began to focus on the spiked mines that were in front of me. One had been destroyed leaving eleven more left although each of them were at a fair distance apart from one another. By aiming at the right ones, I could still cause a chain reaction if I hit multiple mines at once.

Holding out my arms and aiming them at a nearby mine, I fired my fins where they sailed through the water, struck the mine, sending it forward, my fins knocking into the mine behind that, causing them to explode upon colliding with one another, clearing the path a little, and my fins coming back to me.

" It's working, Sunset."

" I'm sorry I doubted you."

" You might not need to get rid of all of the spiked balls--mines." Twilight said. " If you can leave a few behind, that would be great as you would save some precious times that is needed for rescuing the Zora eggs. Besides, those explosions are sure to attract the attention of the pirates unless these walls are thick and can filter out any sound. Better play it save by not making too much noise."

Looking at the gap I had made, I could see where she was coming from. " Maybe I should cut a path through the middle."

" That sounds like a plan to me."

" And those water currents?"

" I was actually serious about you crawling on your stomach."

" Seriously?"

Princess Twilight nodded her head. " If you crawled along the ground, you can easily get underneath those water currents without having to worry about getting sucked into one and end up back outside. You just need to move slowly so as to not make any mistakes."

My point still stood even if she was being serious, yet I wasn't about to ignore the advice of my friend and mentor. Looking at what was still blocking my path forward, I aimed my fins and fired them at a mine situated slightly to my left. The fins collided with it tilting it forward before hitting two more along the way and coming back hitting them again for additional measure. Each then connected with one another causing several explosions that further opened things up, but I needed to continue going despite now knowing my efforts could bring me trouble assuming noise filtered through the walls.

One more well-timed throw of my fins later and a few more mines were destroyed giving me an open pathway. Satisfied with the end result, I waited for my fins to return to my arms before proceeding forward--I also learned that I could retract them in case I didn't want them sticking out. Walking forward and avoiding making contact with the mines, I reached the currents only to find that they were too low for me to simply walk past. Grumbling under my breath, I got down onto my stomach, shivered due to the cold floor, and pushed myself forward, my breasts rubbing against the ground.

Not only was this humiliating, it was also chafing my breasts despite them being covered by scales. I began to consider taking my mask off and simply swim the rest of the way, but I couldn't walk on the floor as a human while underwater. I had to endure the stupidity of it all and curse the pirates for making me have to do this.

After several minutes of pushing myself forward on my stomach, I reached the wall and got back onto my feet. Looking down at my chest, my breasts were sore with a red tinge indicating that the chafing proved most painful--it could have been worse if not for those scales--but I had no time to complain about it now. I had to keep going and hope that nothing would hit me where I was hurting.

Princess Twilight was concerned. " I'm sorry, Sunset. I didn't know that would happen to you."

I brushed my hand aside. " It's not your fault, Twilight. If I had worn some kind of armour, my breasts wouldn't be sore right now, but I blame the pirates for this stupid setup and the Zora for not thinking about wearing protective gear." I slowly floated up to the surface and climbed out of the water. " As long as no one hits my chest, I should be able to get over this slight mishap quickly. It's not a permanent burn as that would've left me helpless not to mention make me feel even more embarrassed." I reached for the knob in the door before me, turned it, and entered the next room. " At least it should get a little easier now."

When will I ever learn not to say things like that? This new room contained a few more spiked mines although they were more spread out given how the room was much larger in terms of its width. A treasure chest was peeking out from around a corner and what appeared to be a ramp could be seen in front of it.

" That chest could contain something."

" Probably rupees given how the previous one was like that."

" Maybe so, Sunset, but you could with some extra money in case you need to buy some things later."

" I suppose you're right." I said. Sighing, I jumped into the water, weaved my way around the spiked mines, and opened the chest revealing a red rupee inside. " Told you it was rupees but who could have placed this in here given the only means of defence are those mines."

" Good question." Twilight responded. " But we shouldn't really dwell on it as we'd be here all day otherwise."

Once I pocketed the rupee, I turned around, walked along the ground and up the ramp until I came upon what looked like a prisoner's cell. While it certainly wasn't unusual to see one around here, what was locked inside certainly was. Trapped inside was a Piece of Heart that was practically taunting me with its mere presence, and I was willing to bet that getting it would relieve me of the sore on my breasts.

The only problem was that there was no padlock on the cell door and the iron bars prevented me from lifting them up. I doubted that becoming Darmani and attempting to lift those bars up would prove successful. I needed some kind of switch so surely there had to be one nearby otherwise this setup was completely pointless not to mention tormenting. A small flight of stairs nearby seemed to be a good place to start looking so I walked up and onto a catwalk that was a dead-end. Numerous barrels had been placed here and most likely contained supplies for the pirates so that they wouldn't run out of something.

Walking up to a barrel and placing my hands on it, I felt nothing inside of them leading to believe that these were just for decorative purposes only. Had they been filled with something, the weight would have the first clue combined with a clammy feel on the wood.

" Do you think my fins will work on breaking these barrels?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " Your fins may be sharp but those barrels have been reinforced with steel making them sturdy. If you wanted to, you could roll into them one by one and smash them that way, but that would take too long and could lead to a concussion or two."

" Guess I need to go more physical."

" Are you sure you need to smash those barrels?"

" That Piece of Heart is taunting me." I answered as I took out the Goron Mask from behind my back. " I need to pick it up if I want to get rid of the pain on my chest as well as recover from any damage I might have sustained along the way. Besides, you keep on telling me that I should be more careful and this is definitely taking your advice to heart--no pun intended of course."

As Her Highness rolled her eyes again, I placed the Goron Mask onto my face and my body began to feel the transition from Zora to Goron--I actually couldn't see my Zora body parts slowly shift and morph into Goron body parts but perhaps that was for the best. When I regained consciousness, I began punching the barrels with a flurry of punches, each one smashed to pieces while scattering all around. At first nothing happened other than me wanting to have a bit of fun but soon a switch appeared after smashing the final barrel, and it didn't take a genius mind to figure out what pressing it was going to do.

Before doing anything else, I stepped on the switch to see what would happen. The door to the prison cell lifted up and quickly went back down several seconds later. In order to get into the cell and collect the Piece of Heart, I had to roll down the stairs within a strict time limit and not roll into the water where I would instantly drown. That's when I also noticed one of those Crystal Switches cleverly tucked away in a corner. I'd have completely missed it and wasted time trying to find a means forward had I chosen to ignore the barrels in my attempt to receive relief for my sores--even as a Goron, my breasts were in a lot of pain.

Pressing the switch a second time, I immediately curled up into a ball just as the iron bars rose up, and I began rolling towards another set of barrels that I didn't smash. Before rolling into them thus messing up my momentum in the process, I veered to the right, rolled down the stairs, and smacked into the wall just as the iron bars came back down.

I rubbed my head. " That was certainly something."

" Pretty skilled rolling there, Sunset."

" Thanks."

" I doubt that any of your other forms would have been able to get in here before the cell door closed." Twilight said. She quickly looked around to see if there was a means for me to escape, and sure enough, she discovered another switch right behind the Piece of Heart. She then pointed it out to me by hovering over and bobbing up and down above it. " Hitting this should open the door and allow us to continue on."

" Don't you think it's strange?" I asked whilst taking out the Zora Mask. " Why would they have a second switch in here? Why not make this a trap to prevent anyone who wanders in here from escaping?" Placing the Zora Mask on my face, my body began to change back to the way it was before, my Goron body suits shimmered before morphing into my Zora body parts--it was a better transition than what usually happened when I put on a mask as my human self. Once I finished changing, I checked to make sure nothing was out of place. " All they're really doing is wasting their resources."

" Maybe but perhaps they weren't expecting a Goron to be here."

" A place like this what with so much water would be death to a Goron."

" You should pick that heart up so we can keep on going." Twilight said. " With all the noise you've been making down here, there's no telling if any of the Gerudo Pirates are coming down here to find out what's going on. I'm sure you think you can take them on, Sunset, but Thunderlane had more experience fighting them unlike yourself. If you get captured again, I don't think Rainbow Dash will be as merciful as last time."

I wasn't confident in the least regarding the pirates. Sure, I had taken on similar pirates in my previous journey, but I lucked out more than anything against them. I never fought them in hand-to-hand combat aside from those who had been guarding those workers, yet I relied on pure stealth to sneak past them though it did give me unneeded stress. Could I use those same tactics this time around? Maybe but it did depend on how Termina operated as opposed to Hyrule regarding this video game's programming.

Grabbing the Piece of Heart, I immediately felt the warmth I felt whenever I picked one up--it had been some time--and the sore on my chest slowly disappeared. With that little problem taken care of, I pressed the switch, the iron bars rose up as a result, and a simple walk back out the cell was all I needed to escape. The Crystal Switch I noticed earlier should surely allow me to continue further, so I quickly ran up to the catwalk, aimed my fins at the switch, and fired them at it, striking with both fins with loud metallic noises. A large door on the far end of the room began slowly opening and it was pretty obvious where I was going next.

Jumping into the water and pushing myself forward using my legs, I swam into the next area but not before coming to a sudden stop upon seeing a few more spiked mines. In front of them were a few more powerful currents yet were closer to the ground unlike before. I could remove the mines and give myself an easier time but I had already wasted more than enough time trying to get past the previous obstacles.

" This is getting ridiculous!" I moaned. " Why would they put in so many obstacles?"

" To make you lose focus."

" What do you mean?"

" By throwing so many challenges at you, they are trying to weaken your spirit." Twilight answered. " That way, they can easily overpower you emotionally as opposed to physically, so you can't let it get to you, Sunset."

" Do you think this is the last of the obstacles before we get out of this passageway?"

Princess Twilight shook her head much to my dismay. " There's no telling how far this path goes into the fortress. Unfortunately, Pinkie Pie's map doesn't provide any detail as to the layout of the fortress, but she's not at fault since I'm sure even she didn't want to go anywhere near this place. Still, without a reliable sense of direction, we're walking around here completely blind and those pirates know this place better than anyone."

I shuddered. " So I need to watch my back?"

" If you haven't been before, I suggest you start doing it now."

While the chances of me being ambushed by pirates was small especially in an area like this with so much water, I wasn't about to take any chances. They probably had the means to swim underwater by using archaic diving gear, and that meant me not wanting to stick around here any longer. I had to take a risk and swim in-between the spiked mines all while staying above the currents otherwise making my way back here would be pain of the absolute worst kind.

Using my legs to propel me forward, I swam forward only for my left fin to clip against the side of a mine, causing it to explode. I had no chance of avoiding it at such a close proximity and I screamed deep within the recesses of my mind so as to not make it look like it was painful--and it was. Luckily, I kept my fins away from the other mines so I swam past them and the currents before the path turned sharply to the left. At the end was a ladder that lead further upwards with the water level now being at ankle level thanks to the ground going upwards via a ramp.

I collapsed onto my knees in pain. " That mine exploded all because of my fin!"

" I'm amazed it wasn't even worse."

" I should have been reduced to ashes from that."

" Maybe your body can survive better than I initially thought."

" You really think so."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but don't go start testing that theory by being reckless. You might be able to survive some things in this world that would normally kill you back in the world you call home, but there will be things that can and will kill you without question."

Of course I wasn't going to do something like that. I may be reckless but I wasn't stupid! Princess Twilight really should have more faith in me than that by saying something so unnecessary so as to shake not only my confidence by my credibility as someone who can save everyone from this nightmare.

After spending several minutes catching my breath from being caught in that explosion, I got onto my feet, walked up to the ladder, climbed it, and immediately stepped on a switch upon reaching the top. This opened up a small cage that was hanging on the wall revealing another Crystal Switch behind it. In front of me was another one of those holes where the water current would flow out from, yet it wasn't doing anything leading me to figure out what needed to be done. Either this switch would turn off the instant I stepped off of it or it would remain turned on for a few moments before switching itself off again.

I had to act fast. I stepped off the switch and onto the grated hole--to prevent anyone from accidentally dropping down into it--aimed my fins and fired at the switch. They sailed through the air and looked like they were about to connect when they suddenly came back, attaching themselves onto my arms again. I wasn't close enough! I needed to try again before the switch would deactivate and I'd have to walk over and press it again--it wasn't all that bad since it was nearby but it was the principle of the thing. Inching forward ever so slightly, I fired my find again in hopes that they would connect--they did but only barely--and I could feel the water coming up from below.

WHOOSH!

The water pushed me upward until I reached the next area where my heart almost stopped beating. Surrounding me were more spiked mines but this time chained to the ceiling making things slightly more complicated. Below me was a door with iron bars blocking it and in front of me was yet another Crystal Switch. Either the pirates were running out of ideas or really loved using Crystal Switches all over the place.

Either way wasn't really important but what was involved getting out of this area. Since I didn't have much time before the water would recede back down below, I fired my fins without aiming them properly, and while one collided with a mine, tilting it forward and almost smacking me in the face as it swung back, my other fin hit the switch unlocking the door, and just in time as the water started going back down. Jumping down to the ground, I landed on my feet--without sustaining any injury--and opened the door. When it closed behind me, I felt a warm breeze greeting me and it was then when I noticed that I was back outside.

" Where are we?"

" We're on that catwalk we saw when we first came here."

" Really? Then that path was unnecessarily long."

" Yes but at least we've gotten out of that passageway."

I breathed a sigh of relief before immediately pushing myself against the wall. " Twilight... Those boats are still on patrol down there. Do you think any of the pirates using them will notice us up here and call for backup?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " We're too high up for them to notice provided you don't make any loud noises. Also, I was wondering why you suddenly threw yourself against the wall without warning. We should also be careful of any snipers who may still be watching from the ramparts in case they can reach you with their tranquilizer darts. Maybe we should until nightfall before continuing any further."

" Isn't that like in several hours? I did slow down time after all."

" More like several minutes."

That didn't sound right! I quickly turned and looked up to see what the sky was like, and it was a beautiful shade of orange and yellow, the colours of a sunset. Her Highness was right about nightfall coming up in just a few minutes. I began scratching my head to figure out where all that time had gone. By slowing down time, I had given myself more of it to complete all of the tasks I needed to before resetting time, so where the hay had it gone?

It then occurred to me that I had spent a good deal of time locked up in the dungeon after I was knocked out by the tranquilizer. Princess Twilight said that I was out for quite some time before waking up but what exactly did that equate to?

I started shaking my head back and forth. No... I couldn't have been out for much of the day. I knew I spent some time sneaking in here, twice, and getting through to this point on my second attempt. I also spent some time talking to Snails, going back to Clock Town to acquire a Red Potion, and coming back via the Song of Soaring, walking across the beach both ways, and dealing with Rainbow Dash. Could all of that have wasted almost the entire day? I refused to believe such a thing but then Her Highness would know since she watched over me while I was out of it.

" Twilight..."

" What is it?"

" How long was I out for after being drugged?" I asked. " Be honest with me on this one."

" I'd say about three or four hours."

" What!? Why didn't you wake me up!?"

" You're an awfully heavy sleeper." Twilight answered. " I tried calling out to you several times but you didn't move an inch, so I decided to wait for you to wake up on your own only for time to pass by a lot longer than expected."

" Wow... I really do sleep through most things, huh?"

" If you had experienced one of those nightmares of yours, I'm sure you would have woken up sooner." Twilight said. " Then again, that doesn't really make a difference since you would have waited that long anyway for Rainbow Dash to come and pay us a visit in the dungeon."

I knew Her Highness didn't mean it when she brought up my nightmares. In fact, I would have benefitted had I woken much sooner because of experiencing one. Instead, I dreamt about my past which helped me understand myself better, so I couldn't really complain about that. Still, those nightmares were continuing to grow worse and all because of one factor that continued to linger about... Ganondorf.

It had been some time since I last received anything from him through my subconscious, and for that I was thankful as the less I saw of him the better. Yet, why had he chosen to avoid me since beating me to within an inch of my life? Was he trying to see how I would fare without having to rely on his inspirational acts--or as I called them his means of making me give up my very identity and become his servant all because I once craved power. One bad decision in my past and even now I still had to deal with the ramifications behind it. I was constantly resisting his advances yet who knew how much longer it would be before I finally gave up.

No... Giving up would be the absolute worst thing I could do. Not only would I be betraying those who have cared for me all this time, I would also be betraying myself. I worked hard to change into the person I was now and going back to being a monster wasn't an option.

Shaking my head again to get rid of those bad thoughts, I decided to address the current situation. Since the pirates in those boats were only interested in looking in their immediate vicinity--and somehow defying depth perception--sneaking my way further inside should be easy so long as I remained in the shadows. If I were to slip, make a noise, get hit by an unseen projectile, or worse, I would be caught and most likely thrown back into the dungeon. As far as Rainbow Dash was aware, I had died after being ejected from that prison cell. I had to make sure that remained as such until I had rescued all of the eggs.

At that moment, the sun went down, and the howling of a wolf indicated that nightfall had come.

Night of the First Day - 60 Hours Remain.

The fortress was decidedly different at night in that the unlit torches I saw scattered about in a couple of places suddenly lit themselves up as though the night itself possessed a powerful magic that made it happen. Would the sudden darkness enable me to sneak around without being spotted? The only way to know for certain was to keep going and find out for myself whether not I'd be seen.

With my back against the wall, I began to slide along the wall making sure to remain in the shadows. I knew that I was at a higher elevation than those boats yet I didn't want to jinx myself or anything. Rubbing my back along this wall wasn't fun as it meant receiving another sore, but to ensure the pirates wouldn't notice me, I had to take one for the team. Every now and then one of the boats would stop for a few seconds and the pirate on board would look around, and it made me sweat something fierce along with making my heart beat at a rapid pace mainly from fear, fear of being spotted.

Princess Twilight whispered to me and broke the silence. " If you keep sliding along the wall like that, you'll end up getting a big sore on your back much like how you gave yourself a sore on your breasts. Plus, you'll take way more time by going so slowly."

" I don't want them to see me."

" You can't let that get to you."

" Easy for you to say." I said. " You're a fairy so that makes it almost impossible for anyone to see you. I'm a big target--more so in this body--so you can't blame me for wanting to take it slowly. Besides, there is something about these pirates you might want to know about." It felt strange knowing that I knew something as opposed to Her Highness, but then I have done this thing before despite botching it more times than I would've liked. " They are trained to kill anyone they see as intruding in their domain. They only captured me as a means of humiliating me in front of Rainbow Dash. Had she not been as merciful, I'd have been killed the moment I was knocked out."

" I thought they were pirates?"

" They are, but also experts at survival."

" Maybe you should take them down before they do so to you."

I shook my head. " They aren't monsters, Twilight, so killing them would go against being a hero. The lines between what can be killed and what can't have always been a blurry one since everyone has their own distinction towards the subject, but in my eyes the pirates can't be killed as they aren't monsters."

" That made no sense whatsoever."

" Like I said, it's a blurry line."

" Okay, then how do we get past them?"

" I've been thinking about that for a while ever since we first got into that underwater passageway below us." I answered. " Killing them would be cruel and make me no better than them, but if they were knocked out with a projectile weapon, they would be out cold for a few moments and we can easily slip by."

" Do you have something to knock them out with?"

I nodded my head and told her that I could use the Hero's Bow to knock them out from a distance with arrows. Granted, I had some trouble with that on my previous journey what with having to knock out the Gerudo Thieves, but my skills had improved since then so it shouldn't be too much of a problem.

The boats down below continued to make me feel uneasy so I opted to slide along the wall much to the dismay of Her Highness, but then I quickly discovered that the catwalk was completely exposed due to going upwards on the front of the fortress, something I remembered seeing but forgot about entirely. I thought about crawling along on my stomach again so as to avoid being detected but the thought of rubbing my chest along metal wasn't all that desirable. Sighing, I decided that my only option was to make a run for it but only when the gap between the first and fourth boats was at hand.

Waiting for what seemed like forever for the gap to occur, when it was finally upon me, I made a mad dash up the catwalk ignoring everything around me, and almost tripping a couple of times before I reached the door that lead further into the fortress. I dropped to my knees again upon stopping, and clutched my chest so that I could catch my breath after running at such a ridiculous speed. If this had been some kind of marathon, first place would have been mine in an instant.

" You know, you didn't have to run like that."

I struggled to talk. " I... I didn't want... to... take... any chances."

" A simple walk would have sufficed."

I struggled to talk. " I... I made it... up here... didn't I?"

" And almost give yourself a heart attack in the process." Twilight answered. " Like I said, they couldn't see you up here because they were focused on watching the water below for any intruders that try to sneak in. Also, since this catwalk is so close to the fortress wall, we're out of sight of those snipers who couldn't possibly fire down here at such an awkward angle without falling. Sunset, you just made things more difficult than they really were."

" You always tell me to be cautious."

" Within good reason."

" Oh."

" Being cautious will prevent you from getting hurt." Twilight said. " But being too cautious is the same as being too reckless only instead of getting hurt straight away, you end up paying for it much later. Don't change what has been working for you, Sunset, on my account. If it has worked out for you in the past then continue to use it but think clearly before making a decision that could take everything away."

Her Highness stopped short of giving me a lecture since we needed to get moving, but my response to her was a simple smirk that caused her to blush. I always said that she was someone who liked to take a logical approach through the use of books while I preferred to get out into the field and my hands dirty. I hoped that would never change about her. Walking into the darkness and quickly emerging in a large open area, both my mouth and Princess Twilight's dropped upon seeing what we were up against.

Aside from a few crates scattered about, there were no places to hide with the main central area of the fortress. Numerous pirates were on patrol armed with spears though it wouldn't surprise me if additional pirates were called in because of Rainbow Dash not wanting to take any chances with those Zora eggs. Various ledges, platforms, and walkways lead off in different directions that eventually led inside other areas, and I cursed under my breath for not having a map. Without one, I was going to need to remember every last detail so as to not end up going back on myself and towards the same place again.

In the center stood a tall guard tower that gave off an intimidation that made me worried, but for some reason there were no light fixtures that could be used to pinpoint anyone who was trying to sneak around. Either they were really confident about their skills or they just couldn't be bothered to include them. With so many guards walking about, sneaking past them would prove challenging and fighting wasn't an option.

I supposed I could shoot arrows at them to knock them out but that would involve spending a few moments loading an arrow and aiming at a pirate. That would leave me vulnerable to being caught by another pirates and me ending up back in the dungeon again or worse. Until I could find an actual hiding spot, knocking them out wasn't an option. Most of the pirates were situated towards the guard tower so going there was something to avoid, but then Princess Twilight started acting funny. She began gravitating towards the tower like something was calling out to her.

Placing my hand out in front of her, I stopped Her Highness from going any further. " What are you doing?"

" I... I don't know what came over me."

" I know you're a fairy but even I know what you were doing was stupid."

" There's a presence by the guard tower."

I looked in the direction of the tower but couldn't see anything. " There's nothing over there, Twilight. Are you sure you can sense something?"

" Yes, Sunset." Twilight answered. " I'm not lying."

" I know, so that means we should take a closer look." Jumping down to the ground below, I looked left and right to see if anyone was coming. No one was there so I began to dash forward while keeping myself low to the ground as possible, yet a pirate suddenly walked into view. Panicking, I jumped behind a few crates, pressing my back and head up against them until she had walked by. " That was way too close for comfort, Twilight." I whispered. " If the others can come out of nowhere like that, I'm a sitting duck."

" You need to move with caution."

I nodded my head. " I just hope she doesn't look behind here."

Fortunately, the pirate continued to walk by although she did stop briefly to adjust her spear. Once she was out of sight, I peered through a gap between the crates, and could see the guard tower directly ahead. Two more pirates were nearby walking around the base of the tower in opposite directions. No doubt they would spot me as soon as I got closer so I needed another action.

Before I could make a move, a third pirate suddenly appeared from the left, and walked right in front of my hiding place. The sweat dripping down my face was almost unbearable but my composure remained strong even when I was so close to being caught. This pirate continued onward though she quickly doubled back before heading the other way until she could no longer be seen. If my heart wasn't that strong enough, I'd be having a heart attack right about now. These pirates were ambushing me in a sense by coming out of nowhere and forcing me to become evasive.

I couldn't make a mistake... Not in such a place like this.

" Sunset... I can sense someone or something at the base of the tower."

" Could they be invisible?"

" If so then you need to use that which can see the truth."

" But there are pirates in the way."

" Then distract them somehow."

Easy for her to say when I had nothing on my person to distract them with. That's when I noticed a small rock located near my foot--quite convenient that it would be right there of all things--so I picked up it and was about to throw it when suddenly the pirates surrounding the tower began walking away from it. I couldn't hear entirely what they were saying but I did manage to overhear them say that their second-in-command had finally come back. If this was indeed Derpy, I had just been given a huge reprieve though I didn't understand why the two pirates had chosen to leave the tower defenceless.

In any case, I took out the Lens of Truth, raised it to my eye, and peered through it in hopes of finding someone. I was surprised when I saw someone was indeed sitting at the base of the tower, waving their hand back and forth in hopes that someone would notice. The inconspicuous soldier turned out to be a female--not a bad thing mind you--and was wearing armour and carrying a spear. She looked like one of the soldiers guarding the different entrances to Clock Town, yet her complexion indicated she had been stuck here for a long time.

Princess Twilight peaked through the lens and was shocked. " Sugar Belle!?"

" Who is that?"

" She's a pony who lives in the village that Starlight Glimmer took over and robbed of their cutie marks. Sugar Belle is an excellent cook who can make all kinds of tasty treats that would rival anything that Pinkie Pie could make." Twilight answered.

" I wonder what she is doing here?"

" Is she the soldier that Snails mentioned?"

" Must be as no one else fits the description."

" We should see what she has to say."

I walked over to Sugar Belle, Lens of Truth in hand, making sure no pirates were nearby, and began to talk. " Um... Hello there."

Sugar Belle was taken aback. " Ah... So someone has finally noticed me around here. I didn't think anyone would notice the likes of me, and I definitely wasn't expecting a Zora to be the one to finally see me. How is it that you can see me when those pirates were never able to?"

I showed her the Lens of Truth. " This allowed me to see you."

" So magic uncovered me from the shadows that have imprisoned me."

" Are you the inconspicuous soldier?"

Sugar Belle nodded. " Yes, I suppose one would call me something like that. The name is Shiro. I used to be a soldier in Clock Town until one day I came into possession of an item that has made me miserable ever since then. When I touched it, I suddenly became invisible to everyone around me. I spent many years, waving my arms around and asking for help hoping someone could hear, but they ignored me and passed me by."

" How horrible."

" I left Clock Town in hopes that someone beyond its walls could help me." Sugar Belle said. " I first travelled to the east thinking that the spirits from the dead kingdom would be able to see me, but sadly they too ignored my presence. After that, I travelled to the west, infiltrated this fortress, and have been waiting here ever since. For a brief moment, I could be seen again as though a powerful magic coming from this place had warped reality, but it disappeared and soon I was ignored by all once again. The pirates never knew I was sitting here, pleading for their help."

" I doubt they would help you."

" Yet I was desperate."

" What made you think of coming here?"

" I thought that maybe I could stand out by being brave and entering such a horrid place." Sugar Belle answered. She looked down at her hands for a few seconds before pounding them into the ground in sheer annoyance. " I thought I could get them to notice me, to chase me away so that I could be seen once again. Sadly, I ran out of energy and have been stuck here ever since, waving my hands in vain."

" Can you move now?"

Sugar Belle shook her head. " I just don't have the strength to do much of anything. I've been crying out for so long but my efforts have amounted to nothing. It's rather typical that this keeps on happening but it's reached a point where I've had enough." She looked like she was about to blow her top but then she sighed and slumped downwards, mumbling something under her breath, then looked at me. " It's because I'm about as impressive as a stone, right? I'm used to it, though."

" Is there anything I can do for you?"

" Um... I have a request. Can you give me some medicine that would make even an unnoticeable stone like me feel better?"

It was a good thing that I paid a visit to Clock Town and picked up a bottle of Red Potion before coming here. Had I come all this way without that essential item, I would be kicking myself something fierce over having made such a terrible blunder, but that wasn't going to happen as I brought along what she needed. Reaching behind my back and fiddling around for a few seconds, I pulled out the Red Potion and presented it to Sugar Belle. She didn't know what to make of it first and ignored my advance, but then I shoved it right in her face hoping that would get her attention.

She resisted a second time and I was about to smash it over her head in anger when she suddenly took it from my hands without hesitation. Why did she choose to give me so much trouble when all she had to do was take it the first time? She looked at it a few times before shaking her head, the anger within me was starting to reach a boiling point, but then she uncorked the bottle before taking a sniff.

" Are you sure this will work?"

" I think it will be just what you need."

Sugar Belle didn't seem so sure about that herself. " Well, if you say that this will work, then I might as well try it." She then drank the entire contents of the bottle without taking an occasional pause, and when she was finished, she handed the bottle back to me and simply sat there. " That tasted pretty bland but there was a feeling of life mixed in as though whoever brewed it knew what they were doing." All of a sudden, she got onto her feet, grabbed her spear, and began to twirl it about. " I... feel better... I think."

" You need to escape from here before the pirates come back."

" They left to greet their second-in-command who has returned from a mission."

" Do you know what kind of mission it was?"

Sugar Belle shook her head. " I don't know but it seems this commander should have returned a long time ago instead of just now. The pirates said that their leader has been waiting impatiently for something the second-in-command was sent to acquire, and had been acting in an irrational manner."

I knew that she was talking about Rainbow Dash waiting for Derpy to bring back the Zora eggs, but that soon turned into something of an oddity. If Derpy had only just recently come back with the eggs, what had taken her so long to get back? The answer was actually an obvious one since this was Derpy after all, and if she was the same in the world I called home as she was around here in Termina, she had made a mistake that would test Rainbow's patience to the limit. That also meant the eggs hadn't been properly secured so picking them up should hopefully be simple enough.

Still, this was not only convenient but also inconvenient as Derpy was seen as a wild card. There was no telling what she had actually done but perhaps if I could somehow listen in on her eventual meeting with Rainbow Dash, I might get some answers as to what I should be doing next.

Turning to Sugar Belle, I reiterated my warning. " Get out of here!"

" Before I go... I want you to have this... In gratitude." Sugar Belle said. She reached behind her back and produced what looked to be an ugly looking stone that was misshapen and also featured a derpish looking expression that screamed confusion. It quickly became apparent that this was no ordinary stone but rather a mask. " This is what caused me to become ignored by so many over time. This is the Stone Mask. When you put this one your face--though why would you do that is beyond me--you will become as plain and inconspicuous as stone, and everyone will ignore you. Whether it will work on everyone is something I don't know."

" Thank you."

" Now... Let me practice standing out..." Sugar Belle looked both ways before running across the clearing, and I couldn't help but feel that she was making a mistake. " I'm leaving this place and I suggest you do the same thing, Zora, otherwise you will be caught by those pirates." She continued running and soon was out of sight and while I wanted to follow to make sure she would be alright, I knew that I had to continue on and rescue the Zora eggs.

" Worried she will get in trouble?" Twilight asked.

I nodded. " If she can now be seen by anyone, running around like that is just begging for her to be spotted."

" The pirates have gone off to welcome Derpy back but it won't take them long to be back on patrol."

" We should get going then, huh?" I asked. I then took a closer look at the Stone Mask that Sugar Belle gave to me. Could this mask really make me invisible? It didn't seem like it could be done since disappearing was a powerful form of magic, but then I've been able to change forms through masks so I guessed anything was possible. I just wished that this mask didn't look as ugly as it did. " If this works like she said, it could make going around here a lot easier."

" Yes, but you have to become a human to wear it."

" That's true."

" I think getting those eggs will take a two-pronged approach." Twilight said. " You'll need to use your own natural skills as a human as well as the skills of your Zora form in order to make your way around here." Her Highness suddenly had an idea pop into her head and quickly floated down to my waist, looking at the spot where the Pictograph Box was hanging from--the fact that it was there surprised even me as I thought it could only be used by a human. " Didn't Snails want a photo of one of those pirates? You can walk right up to one whilst wearing that Stone Mask and take a photo without them knowing."

" Will any pirate do?"

" I doubt he's the picky type."

Now that I knew what to do, I grabbed my face, pulled off the Zora Mask, changed back into a human, and flipped my hair back as it had been some time now. The sounds of footsteps could be heard coming from behind me, and that meant I needed to see if this new acquisition would prove effective. I placed the Stone Mask on my face and stood there out in the open until the pirates who previously left returned. At first, they thought they could sense something in the vicinity but quickly shrugged it off before resuming walking around. Neither of them paid any attention to me. The mask was definitely proving its value right off the bat.

So long as I continued to wear it, none of the pirates could see me, and that meant I could waltz around here without fear. I wasn't going to do anything stupid just because I was now invisible as that would just make me out to be an idiot who probably deserved to be captured. My attention then turned towards the ladder situated underneath the guard tower and how it went up to a catwalk that hung above. Perhaps checking that out would be a good place to start searching for the eggs.

" Um... You two certainly look different from what I was expecting." Fluttershy said. The two figures who had been talking to her had since walked forward and out the shadows, revealing their true forms to her. " I actually thought you were a pair of humans, um, not that being human is bad, but now I see that you look like something that originated from that place no one goes unless you were part of the undead."

" What are you saying?" The small figure asked.

" Well, um... You two look like ghosts."

" Ghosts!? Us!? Please tell me you're not being serious?"

Fluttershy nodded with a nervous gesture. " My mother told me that the land east of Clock Town is a place that the dead roam, and that no one should ever go there unless they want their chakra robbed from them, turning them into lifeless husks devoid of aura. Um... Those are her exact words. She told my people about the stories humans and the other tribes have said about that place, and, um, well, you see, you two look like you come from there since you're not like anything I've ever seen before." She then looked down at her feet. " Or... um... you do bear a resemblance to the local monster infestation."

The small figure then lost her temper and her entire body became consumed by flames. " How dare you!? I've maintained a calm demeanour in comparison to my companion right here so far but what you just said has made me livid. We're not ghosts and we're not those neanderthal monsters that run around all over the place. We are full-fledged demons who possess more than enough power to bring this and any other world to its knees! Calling us by any other distinction is an insult."

" I-I-I'm sorry." Fluttershy said as she cowered into a corner.

" You're supposed to represent kindness but that's not what you are doing is it?"

" Um... I guess?"

" Maybe my theory was wrong after all."

" Please... um, don't hurt me."

" I'm not going to do that." The small figure said. " But, I will have to teach you what it means to recognize a demon!"

The tall figure then placed her hand on the chest of her companion and gave her an expression that brought her to silence. " That's enough! And you say that I have a problem with my temper blinding me. I told you that you're just like me." The small figure huffed before backing down and looking at a book she was carrying in her hand leaving the tall figure to address Fluttershy. " My companion is right about us being demons and nothing lesser, but you weren't aware of that hence your misconception." She stepped forward, held out her hand, produced what constituted as a smile, and stood there. " No need to be afraid of us so long as we can get things done."

Fluttershy hesitated at first before holding out her own hand. " Um, I didn't mean to offend."

" As long as you acknowledge that, I won't hold it against you."

" And your, um... friend?"

" If she knows what's good for her, she will act in the same manner."

" Who are you?"

" I am known as Sunset Demon, a creature born from one's desire for power, and cast aside when that same person decided to change her life. This is Midnight Sparkle, a fellow demon who desires magic and knowledge, but prefers to rely on a logical means rather than be a conqueror. I don't know what she was thinking when she made that decision, but I suppose some things just can't be helped." The tall figure answered.

" So why are you, um, here?"

" Midnight Sparkle wanted to test a theory." Sunset Demon answered. " She wanted to know if you were displaying traits of kindness."

" Kindness?"

Sunset Demon nodded. " You mentioned earlier something about a monkey."

" Oh yes." Fluttershy said. " I've been worrying about him ever since I was captured by the monster who controls this temple. I am hoping that my mother does not listen to the advice of her advisors and punish the poor monkey. He didn't do anything to me and my heart would be crushed if he were to get hurt because of me. The monkeys have always been pleasant to my people until recently when things in this swamp began changing."

" How do you feel about your kind?"

" The advisors to my mother mean well but their lust for power blinds them." Fluttershy answered. " If I could get them to change their ways, I am sure my mother would appreciate them better rather than the current arrangement my father made before he wilted away. The previous Deku Kings ruled through arrogance, autocratic rule, and just generally having a loud enough voice, yet my mother sought to rule differently. She wanted to rule through love, kindness, and understanding, and wishes for me to assume that very mantle when she secedes from the throne some day."

" You want to rule through kindness?"

" Yes."

Midnight Sparkle then finally said something again in a perky manner. " That is all we needed to hear from you and the results speak for themselves. I wouldn't worry about why you're suddenly glowing as you won't remember it anyway." Fluttershy then noticed that she was glowing in a pink aura yet didn't seem to be afraid of it, as though she was comfortable with it happening to her. " First it was Applejack displaying honesty and now her displaying kindness. My theory has been proven correct."

" Yes." Sunset Demon said with a cruel smile on her lips. " And that means we're finally done here. Ugh! This place is far too damp for my tastes! Let's hope that the next one is located in a more pristine location that isn't surrounded by dead trees or the like."

" Um... Are you not going to rescue me?" Fluttershy asked.

" No."

" Why not?"

" We're demons and we don't do things like that." Midnight Sparkle answered. " Despite your tongue, we managed to prove my theory to be a solid one, so we no longer need to be here to watch over you. I'm sure someone will rescue you though I wouldn't hold my breath to that. Anyway, thank you for assisting me by providing evidence. For that, you will not be harmed by either of us, and we shall leave you be, right?"

Sunset Demon said nothing at first and had clenched her hand into a fist, but ultimately calmed down, turned around, and walked back through the hole in the wall she had made earlier in order to reach Fluttershy's location. As Midnight Sparkled turned, smiled at Fluttershy, and laughed as she disappeared into the darkness, the confused princess didn't know what to make of what had just happened. She then moved towards the hole in the wall thinking she could use it to escape in order to return to her mother and rescue her monkey friend, but the hole suddenly filled up as though magic had just been used.

It seemed the demons weren't kidding when they said they had no intention of rescuing her, and they were making sure that no one did.

With the Stone Mask on my face, I climbed up the ladder underneath the guard tower until I had reached the top. It was at that moment when I realized why there were no lights that could be used to shine all across this inner area, and it was because no one had bothered to install any. Instead, there were several bags of what were either food rations, ammunition for their bows, or something I probably didn't want to know about.

If Rarity were here right now, she would throw a fit because of uncouth the pirates were when it came to their belongings. Out of the corner of my eye, I could see a pirate walking back and forth across the catwalk. The opposite end of it connected to a platform that lead up to a really fancy looking door, and compared with what I had seen of doors so far, there was no doubt in my mind that Rainbow Dash was lurking somewhere on the other side. She still wasn't aware that I had survived her attempt at killing me earlier, and that was my one true advantage around here.

Being spotted wasn't an option although with this mask on, I can walk past the pirates without them even knowing I was there to begin with. The one pirate walking on the catwalk was going to be a problem as she was in my way. Even though no one could see me, I could still interact with objects and the reverse was also true in that they could interact with me thus ruining the illusion. For me to progress, I had to knock the pirate out using a well-timed arrow, but I first needed to take a photo of her. I had no desire to know what kind of thing went on in Snails' mind, but if I wanted that sea horse, getting a photo was necessarily.

Walking onto the catwalk, I moved as far forward as I could before taking the Pictograph Box off of my belt and holding it out in front of me. It didn't take a genius to figure out that a full front shot was what Snails was looking for, so when the pirate turned around and began walking towards me, I pressed the button on the box the moment she was about several steps from running into me. It clicked though there was no flash or noise--that was a good thing as a flash and/or noise would have drawn suspicion--and a pretty satisfactory photo came out as a result. This was going to definitely please Snails given how close I had to be.

The pirate turned around and started walking back towards the big door, yet I knew she needed to be knocked out as her walking pattern made it impossible for me to slip past her without accidentally bumping into her. After putting the Pictograph Box back onto my belt, I took out the Hero's Bow, loaded up an arrow, waited for the pirate to turn around--I wasn't going to hit her in the back--and fired it where it struck her in her side, causing her to drop to the ground.

I sighed. " I feel bad for doing that."

" But it needed to be done." Twilight said.

" You don't think I killed her do you?"

" The arrow didn't enter her body as it disappeared upon hitting her." Twilight answered. " If anything, I'd say she will be unconscious for a couple of minutes. I suggest we leave before she wakes up and wonder what had just happened to her."

I walked over and past the pirate until I reached a strange pillar that was situated in front of the door. On top of the pillar was a strange looking block that had something that felt familiar as though I had seen it before, but my mind couldn't recall where I had seen it. Another ledge below me lead up to another door, and the sound of someone arguing could be heard on the other side. Using my ear, I began to listen to see if I could figure out who it was, and I immediately recognized Rainbow Dash.

She was behind that door--the one down below and not the one in front of me--and she wasn't in a good mood. I thought about jumping down below and entering the lower door in order to confront her, but I doubted she was on her own. I had a feeling she was flanked by additional pirates who she trusted with her life, and I also felt that the Stone Mask wouldn't work on her which was something Sugar Belle mentioned before she left.

Looking over my shoulder, the pirate I had knocked out was beginning to come to so I quickly ran up to the door, opened it, and stepped into the next room, closing the door behind me just as she got back up and resumed her patrol over the catwalk.

This next room started out with a short corridor followed by a dead end, and I could just barely see the edge of a window nearby. The noise that I heard from before was louder in here and also echoed due to the room having metallic walls. I had no idea what the purpose was for this particular room but it appeared I had taken a wrong turn, yet going back wasn't an issue since I had the Stone Mask on enabling me to sneak by most people and monsters.

Princess Twilight rushed out and hovered in front of me. " Why did you come in here, Sunset? We need to get down there and talk to Rainbow Dash."

" That's not a good idea."

" You're practically invisible while wearing that mask."

I took it off and put it away. " Sugar Belle said it doesn't work on everyone and I think Rainbow is one of those exceptions."

" Don't want to risk it?"

" No, I don't."

" Then what is the point of this room?"

I shrugged my shoulders. " That's a good question." Walking forward, I suddenly came to a stop when a bee suddenly appeared from behind me. It flew past, through the window--there were bars on it with the middle sections missing--and entered a bee hive hidden conspicuously out of sight. That's when I heard the sound of Rainbow Dash's voice coming from the other side of the window. I inched my way forward, peaked through the window and looked around. " There's Rainbow and the one standing by the entrance must be Derpy, yet how did she get down there?"

" Maybe she took a different path?"

" If she did then this place is really complex."

" Let's listen to what Rainbow Dash has to say." Twilight said. " We may learn more about the importance of those eggs as well as where they have been hidden." I nodded and watched as Derpy walked forward towards the throne that Rainbow was standing in front of. If I didn't know any better, I'd swear that Derpy was acting nervous, as though she had done something terrible and knew she would get an earful.

" I've been waiting for you!" Rainbow Dash said.

" Sorry for taking so long, ma'am." Derpy said.

" Where in the world have you been all this time?" Rainbow Dash asked, her voice getting both louder and angry. " I sent you out to do one simple task, steal a bunch of eggs from those accursed Zoras, and come back with them so we could put them into those aquariums."

" You see, ma'am... We... we kind of ran into a problem."

" What kind of problem?"

" The scouts went back to the fortress as was expected, but I lead the others in a completely different direction, and we ended up in Pinnacle Rock. I just don't know what could have gone wrong. On top of that, I seem to have misplaced my sword again." Derpy answered.

Rainbow Dash said nothing at first, but then she slowly walked over to a nearby wall, and pounded her fist right into it, the force of the impact left an impressionable dent. She walked back the other way to her throne, turned to face Derpy, and suddenly yelled. " Are you seriously kidding me here, Derpy!? How could you have ended up in that wretched place with all those giant sea snakes!? I... I... I just don't see how anyone could have done that in such a fashion." Rainbow then looked at her second-in-command and slapped herself in the forehead before moaning. " Only you could have done something like that."

" My bad."

" Losing your sword is one thing but I suppose it was to be expected."

" It is, ma'am?"

Rainbow Dash nodded. " No doubt that's how the Zora knew we had stolen their precious eggs and decided to send Mikau here to get them back. Unfortunately for them, they didn't realize that I had been preparing for his attempt at sneaking his way in here." She suddenly bit her bottom lip and began talking quietly. " I still can't believe I allowed him to trick me even though he has now met his end on the rocks outside." Rainbow looked back up at Derpy. " Despite taking a detour, you managed to make it back here in one piece. Now, have all seven eggs been placed into the aquariums?"

" That's where the problem comes in."

" What are you saying?"

" We... we lost three eggs."

" What!?"

" Only four of the eggs are safe inside the fortress." Derpy answered. " The other three were taken away by the sea snakes and have probably been devoured by now, but there is a small chance that they could still be intact."

Rainbow Dash started throwing a temper tantrum in response to what she had just heard. I was quite surprised that she would resort to such behaviour, but then this wasn't the same person who would brush off such problems and attempt to stay positive. I felt bad for Derpy having to incur Rainbow's wrath. " What are you trying to pull here!? For your sake, you'd best be lying and pulling off a really lame joke." Derpy remained silent and attempted to look away from her superior, yet this made Rainbow even more vivid than before. " If people hear the great pirates have lost the treasure they stole, we'll become a laughing stock!"

" Yes, b-but Aveil... The sea is strangely murky where we were attacked by the sea snakes..."

" Silence!"

" Aveil..."

" I said silence!" Rainbow Dash snapped. " I'm tired of your excuses, Derpy. You had one job and you failed miserably, bringing shame onto your fellow pirates. If I weren't in such a good mood right now, you'd have been either thrown in the dungeon or exiled forever. I knew it would be difficult since you have been known to struggle, but that's my fault for giving you so much pressure."

Derpy cried. " I'm just a big failure."

" Enough with the crying!"

" But... But Aveil..."

" I said enough, Derpy!" Rainbow Dash hissed. " I won't repeat myself again!" For her part, Derpy stopped crying although she was now looking at Rainbow like she was scared to death, and most likely didn't want to be there. " Your blunder isn't as bad as it could be since those Zoras also have problems. They are a proud race who don't like to admit that they made a mistake by letting us steal their precious eggs from right under their noses. That's why they can't send for any help! It would be too embarrassing for them."

" W-What do you suppose they will do, ma'am?"

" Now that the eggs are gone, the Zoras should be frantically searching for them." Rainbow Dash answered. " They will most likely figure out that Mikau is dead and send out others though it won't do them much good since they lack the skills to make it through here. But, we can't sit idlely by, Derpy. If we don't hurry, the Zoras will get to them before we do and our prize will be lost!" Rainbow then ordered one of the pirates standing behind her to see to it that the eggs were placed in the aquariums followed by ordering another to assist her since she didn't expect the first pirate to do it right.

" Guess I'll go now..."

" I did not order your dismissal!"

" Sorry, ma'am."

" Go find the other three eggs before those sea snakes eat them!" Rainbow Dash said. " I don't care if you have to dive into the water and get them yourself. Just don't screw this one up above all else. Now you're dismissed!"

Derpy lowered her head. " Understood..." She turned around and began walking towards the door, her arms swinging about in a sombre style, tears trickling down her cheeks, and the look of fear was spread on her face all while Rainbow Dash showed no signs of being concerned. I had every mind to get down there and give Rainbow a piece of my mind for how she had just treated her companion, but before I could do anything, something else was happening down there.

" Wait!"

" Yes, ma'am?"

" I don't mean to scold you, Derpy, but you did screw up big time."

" I'm sorry, ma'am."

" Then this should give you some much needed inspiration." Rainbow Dash said. " The Zora eggs are the only clue we have about that dragon cloud floating over the bay. I don't know if the Zora are aware of this but we can't take any chances otherwise we will lose out on everything."

" What about that masked imp?"

Rainbow Dash sighed. " Despite her magic almost bringing this fortress down, I must admit that that her information has proven to be accurate. Derpy... Be honest with me for a moment since you are my second-in-command. Do you think the masked one was telling me the truth about the temple?"

Derpy shrugged her shoulders. " Only the Zoras know anything about that place, ma'am."

" I figured as such."

" The way I see it, ma'am..." Derpy began. " We've come this far by listening to that imp and despite the freaky powers she possessed, I think she despises the Zoras just as much as we do hence why she insisted on us stealing a bunch of eggs. I don't entirely trust her as I think she plans on turning against us once we're no longer of any use to her." As Derpy continued with her opinion, Rainbow Dash just stood there dumbfounded as she listened to what her second-in-command had to say. " We should continue with the plan but perhaps have a backup plan in place in case she decides to wipe us out for no reason."

" You certainly have your moments despite your blunders."

" Thank you, ma'am."

Rainbow Dash moaned. " That wasn't meant to be a compliment... Never mind! Just pay attention, Derpy!" She began rubbing her hands together, a smile appeared on her face, and her mannerisms changed towards being playful. " The plan will continue as whoever heard of a pirate refusing such vast wealth opportunities? If we are to be betrayed by that one, we shall be prepared accordingly, and she will understand what it means to double-cross the Gerudo."

" Yes, ma'am."

" Still, if what that strange, masked one says is true... And if we can get our hands on the treasure that lies sleeping in the temple in that dragon cloud... Then we can spend the rest of our lives living the good life!" Rainbow Dash said.

" That would be wonderful."

" Yes it would."

" We'll never have to steal from anyone again."

" It will be something I'll miss greatly." Rainbow Dash said. " But, we've been stealing from the other tribes for far too long as it is. It's reached the point where they've actually become competent enough to try and kill us instead of simply trying to imprison us in whatever constitutes as a dungeon. If we overreach ourselves then we'll end up paying the price much later, and I'd rather not have us go through something like that. Derpy! Get a move on and go find those remaining eggs! Now! Do whatever is necessary even if you have to destroy those sea snakes and all of Pinnacle Rock in the process."

" Understood!"

Derpy then turned around and walked off, a spring in her step indicating that she was happy knowing that Rainbow Dash had made her feel better, and given the chance to finish her mission by fixing the very mistake she caused. Rainbow then started talking to the remaining two pirates who had been watching the entire conversation, their nods suggesting they agreed wholeheartedly over what had transpired, yet I saw things a lot differently.

The stakes had suddenly changed for the better and for the worse at the same time. I only needed to rescue four eggs inside of the Pirate's Fortress--that also meant not having to make multiple trips through this place--yet I also needed to reach Pinnacle Rock before Derpy did otherwise she would reach the remaining eggs before I could.

Suddenly, I remembered what the sea horse said to me. It wanted to be taken back to Pinnacle Rock. I had to get back to Snails' place, give him the picture that he wants, and get that sea horse back homr where it belongs, but I also had the four Zora eggs as well. If I didn't rescue the eggs in the fortress, there was no telling what Rainbow Dash would do to them, but if I didn't rescue the other three, they would either get eaten or Derpy would get her hands on them. No matter what, I was forced into focusing on one or the other.

Princess Twilight then bopped me on the head. " Sunset! It looks like we learned a lot from listening in on their conversation."

" And I've got a lot of pressure on me as a result." I said.

" Yes, you practically need to be in two places at once."

" What am I going to do?"

" First, you're going to calm down as you'll be no good to anyone if you're stressed out." Twilight answered. " I suggest you rescue the Zora eggs that have been hidden throughout the fortress. I have a feeling those pirates aren't very familiar with Zora eggs, so they probably tossed them into those aquariums Rainbow mentioned without even thinking about what that could do to them. The eggs need to hatch in that tank Daring Do set aside for them as anywhere else would simply have them die. The eggs in Pinnacle Rock can survive a little while longer."

" What about Derpy?"

" We won't need to worry about her." Twilight answered. " It took her this long just to get back to the fortress so it would probably take her a long time to find Pinnacle Rock. You have more than enough time on your hands, Sunset, so there's no need for you to start freaking out." Her Highness then noticed something twinkling in the room below, so she floated in-between the iron bars to get a closer look. She suddenly dashed right into my face and almost caused me to accidentally suck her into my mouth. " There's a big treasure chest down in that room just in front of Rainbow Dash."

" Could it be that treasure Snails found?"

" If it is, then you should go down there and get it."

" How am I supposed to do that without them seeing me?"

" Yes, you have a point." Twilight answered. " And the Stone Mask is likely to not work on someone like Rainbow. You need to find a way to get her and her fellow pirates out of there before going down and taking the treasure inside of that chest." She then heard the buzzing sound of the hive that the bee went into before and suddenly got an idea. " Why not fire an arrow at that hive on the ceiling? I'll bet Rainbow and her companions won't appreciate being chased by bees."

Nodding at her idea, I took out the Hero's Bow, aimed an arrow at the hive, and fired at it. The arrow struck the side of the hive, causing it to fall down and smash to pieces on the floor below, releasing a swarm of bees who didn't take too kindly to Rainbow Dash. She tried fighting back using her sword but it proved useless as the bees began stinging her in different places on her body. Knowing that this was a lost cause, she and her fellow pirates began running away screaming in terror leaving the treasure chest completely unguarded. Part of me felt bad for doing that to her, yet I had no other choice as the treasure in the chest was sure to be useful.

Once I had determined that Rainbow and the others were out of the room, I put on the Stone Mask--I wasn't about to go outside without it on my face--exited the room, jumped down to the ledge below, and entered the room again but from the door that Derpy had used. Compared to other rooms throughout the fortress, this one actually looked well furbished, as though it had received all the detail leaving everything else to suffer.

The treasure chest in front of me was begging me to open it, but then my eyes noticed something to my right that only made me slap my head in frustration. Princess Twilight and I had overheard Rainbow telling the others to ensure the eggs were placed into aquariums, and there was one here in this very room situated right below the barred window I had used moments ago to spy on everyone. There were no fish inside which made me question why bother having an aquarium if you weren't going to have fish in it, yet my opinion quickly changed upon seeing what looked to be an egg lying on the bottom.

From what I could tell, it didn't seem very healthy looking, and appeared to have just been tossed in there and forgotten about. Above the aquarium was a large piece of wood that looked out of place but perhaps it could be used as a potential Hookshot point. Now I was starting to remember how that item worked in my previous adventure. I just hoped its chain was long enough and didn't require an extension.

Princess Twilight floated over to the nearby aquarium and placed her face up against it. " I'm actually surprised that one of the Zora eggs would be located so easily. Not only that but those who were guarding it ran away due to being chased by bees."

" It's never a good idea to think like that."

" Why not?"

" In a place like this, you never know who might appear from the shadows."

" Yes, you do have a valid point." Twilight said. She continued looking at the egg before looking up at the piece of wood I noticed moments ago. " You'll need to get up to the top of the aquarium, jump into it, and scoop up the egg in one of your empty bottles."

" The Hookshot should allow me to get up there."

" Then get it from the chest over there." Twilight said. " That egg needs to be taken to the Oceanside Laboratory before it starts getting even worse."

" You're not going anywhere!"

A loud booming voice suddenly echoed across the room and at first I thought it was Rainbow Dash having come back, but this voice didn't sound anything like her. I began looking around in hopes of finding out who had just called out to no avail, but my answer came in the form of a tall woman dropping down from the ceiling, landing on the floor with a soft tap before standing upright. She wore a standard pirate's outfit although the green colouring made her stand out in comparison to the bright reds and oranges of this room. Judging from her expression, she wasn't thrilled at seeing me here.

" It's a good thing I followed you here."

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" I was guarding another area of the fortress but when I stepped outside to get some fresh air, I noticed you standing beneath the guard tower. Knowing you were an intruder, I followed you and waited until you reached our valuable treasure."

" Pretty clever of you."

" Flattery won't save you, kid." The pirate then drew out a pair of curved swords and struck a pose. " We don't take kindly to intruders around here. I don't know how you managed to worm your way through our defences, but your little romp ends here and now." The pirate then swung her swords at me only for them to get driven slightly into the treasure chest with a sickening thud when I jumped backwards. " And here I thought you were just a hapless little kid who got lost."

" I'm quite capable." I said as I drew my sword.

The pirate then laughed. " With that pathetic excuse for a sword? I think you're all talk than fight but then we'll see soon enough, won't we?" Pulling her swords out of the chest and running her finger on each to see if they were still sharp, she then noticed the Stone Mask on my face--I had forgotten to take it off upon entering the room--and thought it a little odd, staring at it for a few seconds. " Do you think you can fool me with that mask? You may have slipped by some of my sisters while wearing it but it won't help you against me."

I had a feeling that the Stone Mask would prove ineffective. That meant I had to fight her while she in turn could see me. Taking off the mask and putting it away, I slung my shield onto my arm and raised it knowing I needed to defend myself appropriately since the pirate was wielding two swords.

" Don't underestimate her, Sunset." Twilight said.

" How good do you think she is?"

" Given how she is swinging those swords around, I'd say she has been trained very well."

" Figures as such."

" She will most likely use those swords to parry and repel your attacks before following up with one of her own." Twilight said. " She may also use a powerful jump attack that could knock you down that your shield can't stop, but if you can avoid such a maneuver, she will be vulnerable to attack for a couple of seconds. This battle will come down to patience, timing, and knowing when to make a move."

Was I prepared for such an opponent?

Chapter 39: An Emotional Fight

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
December 26, 2016
Chapter 39: An Emotional Fight.

While I had no intention of killing this Gerudo Pirate--she wanted to do that to me if capture wasn't an option--I wasn't about to let her walk over me without a fight. This definitely reminded me of my previous journey. Back then, I had to fight a similar opponent who had every intention of killing me, but the room was just a prison area as opposed to a luscious room that had obviously looked gaudy what with all the nick-nacks. One thing Rainbow Dash loved showing off was her vast collection of trophies, yet she got offensive if anyone were to bump into them.

She treated them like they were her own children, and while hearing her talk on and on about how awesome she was for getting so many, we never denied her the pleasure since we knew it meant so much to her. The nick-knacks in this room had no connection to personal achievement but rather they were a variety of items that Rainbow had "acquired" in the name of the Gerudo Pirates. I doubted she had any real attachment to them so I had no qualms over smashing them by accident, yet the pirate attacking me might become even more violent and erratic were I to damage the property of her leader.

The pirate began swinging her dual swords, one after another, in hopes of finishing the fight, but I raised my shield and deflected every blow though she showed no signs of backing off and continued with the assault. My shield could easily handle numerous blows yet there would be a point where I needed to go on the offence. I noticed the pirate kept one sword close to her chest as she swung about the other while interchanged between the two in her fast manner. No doubt her chest was an obvious weak point to exploit, yet I had to give her credit for not relying on armour, a trend most sword wielders utilized.

As each blow from her swords crashed against my shield, I could tell that she was starting to get annoyed by my insistence on maintaining a defensive stance. At times I thought she was going to perform a cheap shot by attempting to swing her swords at my legs or something, but she was fixated on trying to break through my shield. Despite being pirates who robbed from others for their own benefit, it appeared that they understood what it meant to be honourable during a fight.

She finally spoke out after losing it. " Why do you cower behind a shield?"

" You're not giving me much of a choice." I answered.

The pirate scoffed. " Such a pathetic excuse coming from a child. Perhaps you're not as skilled as I thought you were, but then that doesn't explain how you were able to sneak your way through here without being spotted without that mask."

" I've got my ways."

" Of course! You were aided by Mikau of the Zoras!" The pirate was probably informed by Rainbow that I had "died" while in my Zora body, yet she along with everyone else wasn't aware that Mikau--me--had survived death--though not without injury--and that the Zora and I were one and the same. " That one has always been a problem for us but now he has finally been put to rest at the bottom of the ocean. We may be retiring from plundering but we can go out in a blaze of glory knowing we killed that accursed Mikau."

" And if he lives?"

The pirate laughed. " You have no proof that he survived!" She then stopped her assault to think about something. " Still, your being here won't be tolerated. If word spread that a child was able to infiltrate our fortress, we'll never been taken seriously by anyone. I still don't think you're a threat as you merely hide behind a shield. We Gerudo risk our own bodies in order to succeed at surviving."

" That was a mistake on your part."

" Saying you aren't a threat? Did I touch a nerve?" The pirate suddenly stopped taunting me when I slashed her in the stomach, causing what looked to be blue coloured blood to spill out. There was no wound as such and that made me wonder if I even did anything. She reeled back slightly before raising her swords again. " You actually struck me!? I let my guard down by falling for your cheap tricks. Aveil would dock my pay and throw me in the dungeon if a kid like you beat me!" She swung at me resulting in my raising my shield once again to protect myself. " Enough with that shield and fight me like a warrior!"

Putting my shield down, I lunged forward with my sword as a means of responding to her challenge only to wind up not reaching her. In that precise moment, I realized that my sword wasn't long enough. Had it been longer, I could have struck her easily, yet there I was looking utterly embarrassed. Why didn't I get my sword re-forged? Going back to Snowhead and getting the Mountain Smithies to work on it was the obvious thing to do, but with everything else I had been focusing on, it just never occurred to me registered that it would become an issue at some point.

Now I had to be in her face if I were to prevail in what was quickly becoming a lopsided battle. Not only was my sword not long enough, it lacked the damage it could inflict compared to a more powerful blade, and that meant taking a lot longer to defeat someone or something.

The pirate laughed at my feeble attempt to strike her again, and responded by slashing me across the torso with both swords before following up by kicking me in the same place, sending me backwards. I sprawled up against the door, bruising my back in the process, but I had no time to worry about it as the pirate suddenly came bearing down. I raised my shield just in time as her swords collided making a loud metallic sound. Rather than get off me and attempt a different tactic, she began pushing down on me. Her aim was to either make me drop my guard or get crushed under the weight of my own shield.

Princess Twilight asked me if I was okay since both my torso and back suddenly got injured, but I told her that I was fine as both wounds were pretty minor. Of course, if I didn't watch my opponent, I could end up with even worse injuries or be killed. To this pirate, it was as though she were fighting for her own life, as though failure would result in her being given a harsh punishment by Rainbow Dash. I knew Rainbow had a short temper due to getting riled up over the smallest things, but to make someone suffer all because they failed to live up to her own expectations of them? This bore further investigation and quickly.

" Why are you so bent on killing me?"

" You expect me to tell you that?" The pirate asked. " Such an idiotic kid you are! Aveil would have my head if I were to reveal something like that."

" Are you afraid of her?"

My question riled up the pirate forcing her to relent from her onslaught. " How dare you say that about our glorious leader! Aveil is feared through the seas as a pirate who never accepts defeat and can get any job done regardless of any personal loses in the process. Sure, she can be scary, especially if you fail, but she will lead us to glory once we have successfully infiltrated the temple and steal the treasure inside."

I shook my head. " Why do you care so much about wealth?"

" We're pirates! It's in our nature!"

Since she had gotten distracted, I moved my arm aside and slashed her in the chest again, blue blood sprinkling all over despite there being no actual wound. The pirate reared back and began cursing at me for once again using tricks as a means of distraction.

Judging from what she said in response to my question, Rainbow Dash was revered amongst the Gerudo Pirates as being the ultimate authority. They respected her leadership skills and didn't care about her merciless behaviour so long as it got her the results she desired. While her loyalty from the world I called home was in plain sight--what happened with Derpy proved that point--Rainbow's biggest weakness was also on full display. When it came down to ego, Rainbow was completely incapable of doing anything. This was something I wasn't about to share with the pirate otherwise she would become even more ferocious.

The pirate then suddenly crouched down slightly before jumping and swinging her swords in a circular motion. I responded by rolling to the side just as her two swords came crashing down where I had been on the ground mere seconds earlier. Upon getting back onto my feet, I noticed that she took a few seconds getting back into the battle stance she had been using this entire time, and it made me realize what Princess Twilight was mentioning about when the pirate dropped her guard. Performing that attack left her vulnerable long enough to score a direct hit, yet it was a difficult hit to make since getting hit by that attack meant instant defeat.

When she turned around to face me, she moved forward, swinging her sword in a lightning quick fashion, catching me off guard. The blade hit my sword arm, resulting in a slight gash, and me wincing in pain, but then she followed up with her jumping attack again. No doubt I had gotten on her bad side by tricking her into dropping her guard, and was determined to finish the job no matter what would happen.

Unfortunately, I didn't respond fast enough to her attack yet she could only hit me using the tips of her swords as opposed to the main part of the blade. Had I been just a little bit closer, she would have knocked me to the ground, and I'd be at her mercy. Instead, I was merely knocked into the treasure chest, tumbling over it and landing hard on my back. She then performed the same attack again and I responded by pushing the chest slightly in her direction--it wasn't easy since it was made from a heavy wood reinforced with steel--making her tumble over it herself. With her sprawled on the ground, I struck her in the back which turned out to be the last hit I needed.

" Gah!" The pirate cried as my sword connected. " How could a kid be this good? It's like you've done this before!"

" You might say that I have."

The pirate got back onto her feet. " I had to admit it, but you've proven yourself by beating me even if you did use cheap tricks. Don't let it get to your head though, as I'm not the only one around here who will give you a real workout. One of my sisters will be waiting to ambush you, and of course Aveil will want to make sure she gets a piece of you."

" I might get out of here before she can find me."

" Ha! Don't be so clueless!"

" What do you mean?"

" Aveil knows every inch of this fortress including the secret passageways." The pirate answered. " I've no doubt that she will find you when she feels you're worthy, and that's when you'll beg for your life before she either ends it or throws you into the dungeon where you'll rot."

The pirate then took out what appeared to be a Deku Nut and tossed it to the ground, causing it to flash in a bright light that blinded me. When my vision returned several moments later, I discovered that she had disappeared without a trace. I didn't know whether my victory meant anything since she was able to get away, and her words struck my heart with fear as there were other pirares who were waiting to make their move to prevent me from reclaiming the Zora eggs. I had to act fast and get them all out of here before the others decide to pay me an unpleasant visit.

I thought about resting for a few minutes but I knew there was no time for that. I had no idea when Rainbow Dash or any other pirate would appear, and it was for the best that I wasn't around to greet them. Turning my attention towards the treasure chest, I opened it up and took out what looked like the Hookshot I used in my previous journey, yet it had a different shape in addition to being golden in colour.

My first thought was confusion. " Huh? Is this the Hookshot?"

" It is, Sunset." Twilight answered.

" But, it looks different from what I used before."

" Maybe but it still possesses the same function." Twilight said. " This Hookshot can be fired at great distances in order to pull yourself towards something or pull something towards you though you should be careful. You don't want to end up going to something that could cause personal injury nor have something nasty get pulled to you. It can also be used against weaker monsters though aiming it is difficult, so at best consider it a slight alternative to flying enemies or ones that move slowly."

" Do you know where Snails could have found this?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " He said that he found it during a fishing trip but I wouldn't take his word for it. An item like that doesn't just end up in the hands of a local fisherman unless fate determined Snails was meant to fish the thing out of the water." Her Highness then looked at the wounds I received before shaking her head again. I wasn't really fond of her doing that because I knew she would give me her usual lecture. " Those wounds aren't as serious as appearances suggest. You really lucked out against that pirate, Sunset, but I wouldn't get cocky since there are others around here."

" That pirate really tested my skills."

" Yes, she did."

" Where do you suppose the others could be?"

" Since that pirate appeared in a room that housed a Zora egg, I have a feeling the others will be guarding them very closely." Twilight answered. " Since we don't have a map of this place, there's no way of knowing where everything is. It will essentially boil down to searching every last section of the fortress until we recover all of the eggs. Speaking of which, you might want to jump into that aquarium before we leave otherwise we'll have blundered."

Nodding, I turned my attention towards the wooden planks located above the aquarium. Aiming my new Hookshot, I fired the chain, it sailed upwards quickly, and I immediately got pulled up to the top of the aquarium before gently landing next to the water's edge. Despite how sickly looking the Zora egg looked lying on the bottom of the aquarium, the pirates knew what it meant having a pristine tank built to withstand a lot of pressure from both inside and outside. Yet, justseeing this display filled my heart with rage. I couldn't let them get away with such a horrible act.

Since I couldn't swim let alone breathe underwater, I put the Hookshot away, took out the Zora Mask, and put it on my face. The magic began to take effect and I squatted down as a result, but not before tumbling into the water though it was just as well since Zoras were practically at home in the water. Upon completing my transformation into Thunderlane, I dropped down to the bottom and took out an empty bottle. Carefully using my free hand, I gently pushed the egg inside, capped the bottle so that it wouldn't fall out, and put it behind my back before climbing back out again.

One egg had now been rescued yet there were still three more left not to mention the three eggs that Derpy lost in Pinnacle Rock. No doubt this wasn't going to be easy especially since I was in a race against not only time but a pirate whose common sense was both adorable and questionable.

" Where do we go from here, Twilight?"

" We could go back the way we came, but that would involve crossing back across the bridge to the guard tower."

" How about the direction Rainbow Dash and her entourage went?"

" Yes, that is a direction we haven't tried."

" Where do you suppose she ran off too?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I don't know, Sunset, but we shouldn't be concerned with that right now. We need to find those others eggs and get out of here before the other pirates realize that something is going on and attempt to lock this place down. While we can easily warp out of here using the Song of Soaring, I'm not sure if the eggs will be able to survive the trip given how fragile they are."

I clenched my hand into a fist. " Rainbow... I know you don't mean to do this, but your actions make me boiling mad."

" Of all the pirates here, she is the one we have to avoid at all costs."

" I know."

" At least we have one advantage." Twilight said. " The pirate that you defeated was supposed to be guarding another egg elsewhere. If we end up finding the room she was guarding, you can avoid a battle by simply waltzing through and taking what rightfully belongs to Rarity."

That was a piece of good news in a situation that seemed to be snowballing out of control. Walking over to where Rainbow Dash and the other pirates had run off to, I noticed a pair of barrels blocking the way. I never noticed them before although if I were to be honest, I was paying more attention to the conversation between Rainbow and Derpy. Rolling into each one to destroy them, I ran down the passageway until I found myself back outside in the central area of the fortress although in a different location. There was no sign of anyone having come by so I assumed they had gone elsewhere, yet Her Highness was right about ignoring them.

Since I was worried that the number of pirates on patrol would increase, I grabbed my face, pulled the Zora Mask off, flipped my hair back upon becoming human, put the mask away and took out the Stone Mask. Putting it on my face, I still felt like it wasn't doing anything since I could still see myself, but I wasn't about to question the magic contained within it especially since it had already allowed me to sneak past that one pirate and take her photo in the process.

Outside, the pillars with the Hookshot plates on top of them made it obvious as to what needed to be done next. An entrance into another section of the fortress was directly in front of me yet there was no way of reaching it from my current location. I looked around in hopes of finding another way back inside, and sure enough I could barely make out another entrance situated on a high up ledge.

Running down some stairs before jumping down below, I quickly froze on the spot when a pair of Gerudo Pirates walked by. They stopped right in front of me and began looking around, and my mind was racing with the thoughts that the Stone Mask wasn't going to work against them. They then looked in my direction, taking a step forward in the process, and raised their spears right in my face. I was about to respond to their challenge, but they surprised by turning around and continuing on with their patrol--I could barely hear them saying that's what they would do if they spotted any intruders wandering around.

I wanted to give them a piece of my mind but Princess Twilight reminded me that I needed to continue on, so I ignored them and continued onward until I stopped at another pillar that featured a Hookshoot plate on top. Another pillar was located on a nearby ledge with an entrance nearby, a convenience when you consider that these pillars were pretty much everywhere throughout the fortress. I had no idea why they needed so many considering they were advantageous towards me and not the pirates, but I wasn't about to look a gift horse in the mouth--no pun intended given my true nature.

Taking out the Hookshot, I first attempted to grab the edge of the plate--it was just slightly out of my reach--so I fired the chain and pulled myself up before firing the chain and pulling myself across. Upon landing on the ground, I noticed that there was another entrance to my left, hidden completely out of sight.

" Which way should we go?"

Princess Twilight looked at both entrances, shrugged her shoulders, and appeared to be dejected. " I honestly have no idea on how to answer that question, Sunset. Both ways could lead us to Zora egg locations or they could lead to pirates lying in wait to ambush us. If we had an actual map of this place, we would have a better idea as to where we were going, but instead we're going about this in a blind manner."

" I have a solution." I said, taking out a green rupee from my wallet. " I did this once or twice on my previous journey when it came to something like this. I'd flip a rupee into the air, and wherever it landed would be the path that I took." Her Highness then looked at me with a displeasing gesture and I immediately took offence. " What? Neither of us can figure out which way to go so why not allow chance make our decision for us?"

Princess Twilight's jaw dropped. " You're serious about this, aren't you?"

I nodded my head. " Yep! Sometimes, the craziest of methods end up being the most useful." I tossed the green rupee into the air, spun around a few times, and dropped back down landing near the entrance that was to my left. " We should take the left entrance first."

" You actually just did that?"

" Surprised?"

" That's not the word I would use here."

" In any case, we know where to go so let's see where that entrance leads to." I said. I picked up the rupee--I wasn't about to neglect a mere rupee as I needed plenty of these to be able to purchase anything I needed--put it back in my wallet, and walked into the darkness before entering a room filled with steel barrels. There was also a fence although I saw that as more of a pleasing asthetic--if you were into that sort of thing--yet nothing else really stood out. " What do you suppose could be inside those?"

" I'm not sure but I'm appalled at their lack of organization."

" Of course you are."

" No need to be funny, Sunset." Twilight said. " Unless there's a path of some kind, we're pretty much stuck here and will have to go back the other way."

I began looking around to see if the path continued, and it did through an open gap near the far end of the barrels. It seemed that the path weaved in-between the barrels in the form of a small maze, and what appeared to be a large door poking above the barrels indicated my way forward. While this room didn't appear to make much sense in terms of being a defense point for the Gerudo, I had of intention of turning back.

Running into the maze, I immediately stopped upon seeing the tell-tale sign of a spear protruding from behind a series of barrels lined up. A few moments later, a pirate walked out from behind them before stopping and looking around to see if there were any intruders. I guessed even a room like this was bound to have someone on patrol. The Gerudo were serious about ensuring no one could sneak into their fortress and live to tell about it. Since the Stone Mask prevented me from being spotted, I could essentially walk past her without her even knowing that I was there, yet my mind still believed the mask may not work due to Sugar Belle stating that it doesn't work on everyone.

My decision was to wait for the pirate to turn around and walk back the other way, and it turned out to be a good idea as apparently, this pirate had a strong desire to talk to herself about what one of the more prominent guards had done. She couldn't believe this guard left her post in order to pursue what she said was a little mouse scurrying about the fortress like it could do anything it wanted. She wanted to report her to Aveil--Rainbow Dash--over abandoning an important position but ultimately sighed knowing her words held no value since she was forced to guard such a dilapidated room.

The pirate turned and walked the other way, grumbling to herself, allow me to slip by her with ease. I felt bad for her being stuck guarding such a room but then I had no intention of offering any sympathy to a group who would abduct innocent children before they were even born.

Entering the next chamber, I came to a startling conclusion. The pirate I had defeated earlier was supposed to be guarding this room since it possessed a green tint on the walls and she was wearing green clothes. Had she not ambushed me earlier then she would have done so here instead. In a way, I dodged a bullet or rather merely delayed what was coming by roughly several minutes.

Opening the door and entering the next room, I immediately noticed the aquarium directly in front of me, and at the bottom was the Zora egg. Much like the previous one I had picked up a few minutes ago, this one was just as sickly looking, and needed to be transferred to the tank Daring Do had provided. I also noticed a large clam nearby though parts of the shell were lined with spikes.

" That clam seems suspicious."

" It's a monster, Sunset." Twilight said. " It's called a Shell Blade and its tough shell will repel any attack you throw at it. When it opens up its mouth, its internal organs are exposed, and if you hit them with a well-timed strike, you'll defeat it. The shell only remains open for a couple of seconds so be sure you don't miss otherwise you will get it. You'll need to use your fins since it's underwater and only a Zora can fight in such conditions."

" Lucky me." I said sarcastically. Since I still had the Hookshot in my hand, I fired and pulled myself up to the top of the aquarium before staring down inside. " If I could keep my distance from that Shell Blade, I might be able to avoid having to deal with it." Looking at its position in the aquarium, my chances were pretty slim. After putting away my other items, I took out the Zora Mask, place it on my face, and squatted down as the magic contained within began to change me again.

From there, I jumped into the water and dropped down to the bottom before slowly creeping forward in hopes of not alerting the Shell Blade. It turned slightly as though it sensed my presence, yet it remained in place though I had to act fast unless I wanted to get clamped down by its heavy mouth. Taking out my second bottle an using my hand, I scooped the egg into it, corked the bottle, and put it behind my back--just in time too as the Shell Blade began moving forward. Panicking, I quickly climbed out of the aquarium just as it was about to bite my leg, and dropped down to the ground landing hard on my butt.

" Are you okay?"

" That was too close for comfort." I answered, getting back onto my feet and rubbing my butt. " I didn't want to risk any damage to the egg so I scooped it up and got out before it take a bite out of me."

" You might have damaged it by falling."

I quickly took out the bottle and gazed at it hoping that wasn't the case--it wasn't much to my relief. " The egg is still safe although it doesn't look very good. If only we could leave here, deliver them to Daring Do at the Oceanside Laboratory to prevent them from getting worse, and come back again to pick up the other two?"

" Unfortunately, the current situation won't allow us to do that." Twilight said. " I'm sure Rainbow Dash and her entourage of pirates have gotten over their bee problem, and the former most likely has ordered everyone to kill you on sight. We can't afford to leave otherwise it will be impossible to get back in through the usual means."

Her Highness was once again correct. The underwater entrance I used to enter the Pirate's Fortress had most likely been blocked off by now so as to prevent me from using it to escape and to prevent the Zoras from entering in an attempt to rescue me--they didn't know I was here so that option was an impossibility. Using the Song of Soaring wasn't an option for me either as there was no way of knowing if the eggs could survive such a trip even if they were in bottles. I needed a different exit, one that not even Rainbow Dash herself would expect from an intruder.

Rather than go back the other way, I decided to take the other passage in hopes that it would take me back outside to a reasonable location. Sure enough, upon getting back outside to the central area, I could see a treasure chest on my right, yet in front of me, several pirates were walking around, looking behind the crates in hopes of finding me. I retreated back inside slightly, grabbed my face, pulled off the Zora Mask, flipped back my hair, and switched to the Stone Mask just as one pirate looked in my direction. While I could use arrows to knock them out, I wanted to conserve my ammunition for when I really needed it.

When the cost was clear, I ran over to the treasure chest and opened it up, taking out a red rupee. I was sure this chest had been placed here as a means of baiting me for a trap, but nothing happened much to my pleasure. What convinced them to leave a chest out in the open for anyone to take its contents baffled me, but I could do with the extra money since I needed to get myself a potion before entering the next temple--I wasn't about to go through what happened in Snowhead Temple again.

" Okay... Where do we go from here?"

" We haven't tried the other side of this area."

" What about going left?"

" That would lead us back to where we came from." Twilight answered. " This fortress may be confusing, but every section has two corresponding entrances, effectively making us go around in a big circle. If we can remember each of the entrances we've used, we won't end up getting ourselves lost." Her Highness then used what constituted as fairy magic to leave behind a tiny mark next to the entrance I had just come out from. " There! This will let us know that we came out of here and not have to worry about it again."

" So going left will take us around to where we went inside?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Not the most articulate of answers but yes, you are correct about that, Sunset." I stared at her with a glum expression in response to that. " You can easily make it across since wearing that Stone Mask makes you invisible to everyone. Just don't do anything that would give you away otherwise not even the power of being invisible will save you from whatever it is they have in store."

I rolled my eyes. While she didn't have to say like that, she was right about me doing something that would expose me.

Jumping down below, I began to scan the area in hopes of finding a location that I hadn't reached yet. To my left was a massive pair of double-doors that indicated the main entrance to this area--though why would anyone have such huge doors in the first place was beyond me--and directly in front of me was the guard tower where Sugar Belle was. But then to my right, I could barely make out another pillar with a Hookshot plate on top of it, but I didn't know if that's what it was. Since I hadn't been over in that direction, I decided to check it out and see if there was another entrance.

Instead of using the crates as cover and dodging the pirates, I merely walked along casually and watched as they passed me by without incident. The Stone Mask, outside of the three transformation masks, was slowly becoming one of my most useful masks. Granted, I hadn't used some of the other masks quite as extensively so my opinion was rather biased in its approach, but the fact that I could avoid most enemies without having to fight them was something that was too good to pass up on. And yet I knew not all of them were affected so I couldn't pretend that I'd never have to fight again.

If that one pirate could see me, then others just like her could achieve the same thing, and Rainbow Dash would especially be able to see me. If I were to run into Rainbow before I escape from the fortress, would I be able to fight her? Despite how she was behaving, she was still one of my closest friends, and that could prove problematic. Hopefully, she wouldn't be able to track me down, or decided that becoming wealthy was more important.

When I reached the other side of the clearing, a splashing sound broke the immediate silence, and I looked down to see that I had just stepped into a large puddle of water. You'd think the pirates would clean this up considering it was the only puddle, but then I quickly realize that there was a significance here. Even though I was invisible, I could still make sounds by stepping on or into something, and I just stepped into water. I looked all around wondering if any pirates had suddenly heard the splashing of feet, yet they were on the other side of the clearing, well out of range. My heart slowed down after beating fairly quickly after what I just did.

Using my Hookshot to pull myself up to a higher ledge--there were two pillars instead of one--I walked through another entrance and into a room that suddenly got a lot brighter as well as a lot warmer.

" Why is it so hot in this room?" I asked, sweat dripping down my brow.

" Because there is a pool of lava right below you."

" What!?" I exclaimed. I looked over the edge and several metres below was a pool of lava, just as Princess Twilight said. Underneath my Stone Mask, I gulped heavily, my face turned a ghostly white, and my body went numb for a few seconds. " Who in their right mind would have something like that in here!?" I didn't think the pirates could get any worse but this room had proven otherwise. " I'm glad that no one is in here otherwise they would have succumbed to the intense heat."

" Or the smell of sulfur."

" That too." At that moment, a pirate walked by only to turn around and come back the other way ten seconds later. Had Rainbow Dash seriously ordered one of her fellow pirates to patrol a room no sane person would ever consider? The anger inside of my heart began to boil, and that scared me as it meant I could attack my friend over something she had no real control. " How could anyone be made to endure something like this? Apart from Thunderlane, who else would have the gall to actually try and sneak in here? The chances of being caught are extremely high."

" Don't lose yourself to anger, Sunset."

" Easy for you to say. You don't get as angry as I do."

" While that is true, I'm not incapable of feeling rage over something." Twilight said. " In this world, Rainbow Dash is a pirate who cares more about lining her own pockets with money as opposed to wanting to live a peaceful life. How she treats her underlings varies from person to person as she showed loyalty towards Derpy, yet not the same approach was given to this particular pirate."

" Last time she was brainwashed."

Princess Twilight then slapped me in the face or whatever constituted as a slap given her size. " Sunset! Don't allow Rainbow's action distract you from what's important. I know it's difficult knowing that she has every intention of seeing you dead, but you can't let it get to you otherwise Ganondorf will win. This is exactly what he wants to see happen to you, and you're allowing him to get away with it."

The words of Her Highness snapped me out of it and I knew that she was right. Ganondorf wanted me to suffer immensely so that I turn would succumb to the darkness that he said continued to lurk inside of my heart, and eventually become his obedient servant who would embrace power. While much of what had just transpired was a result of my own actions over what I had seen, I had to remind myself that Rainbow Dash was simply portraying a villainous character who obviously lacked any morals. The real Rainbow would never stoop to such depraved methods as that would go against everything she stood for.

I had to remain strong even if it meant that now, my emotions were getting harder to keep under control. I couldn't allow Ganondorf's words and my own anger to get the best of me especially since I was close to changing everything back to the way it was before all of this happened.

Once my head was back on straight--not literally--I walked up to where the path split into two, the one on the right was an obvious dead end so the one on the left was where I needed to go, but no sooner had I taken a single step when the pirate came back. She couldn't see me, much to my pleasure, but then I noticed that she wasn't sweating. In a room that contained a pool of lava below, no one would be able to survive in such conditions, yet this pirate didn't seem fazed by her surroundings. Was it possible that the Gerudo Pirates could survive in different conditions all thanks to their intense training?

If so then perhaps I was wrong about Rainbow Dash to an extent.

Walking onwards and ignoring the pirate, I turned right and reached a door, opened it, and entered another room where the door suddenly locked behind me with iron bars. It was blatantly obvious as to what was about to happen, but there was enough time to take a closer look at my surroundings. The lava from before was still below me although now the floor consisted of a chained fence that could break at any moment. I could also feel the heat coming from below and while I loved fire magic, I didn't like the intense heat. In front of me was another door also locked with iron bars, and that was essentially all there was.

Knowing I was about to get ambushed, I took off the Stone Mask, put it away, and walked forward only for someone to call out.

" Halt!" A woman then came down from the ceiling and looked identical to the one I encountered earlier, yet this one was wearing a red outfit as opposed to green. " Why did you take off that ridiculous mask? Were you trying to prove that you could go about our fortress without it?"

" How are you doing it?" I asked.

" Doing what?"

" Not sweating in this intense heat?"

" Does the heat cause you to lose concentration?" The pirate asked. " To someone like you, this place is guaranteed to roast you alive, but we Gerudo aren't affected by such conditions as they are nothing. We've trained in such conditions for generations so that we can survive no matter what gets thrown our way."

This was already turning into a deadly situation. The intense heat coming from below was already making me delirious, and coupled with this pirate's immunity to the heat, I was quickly losing what little advantages I had. I needed to finish this fight as fast as possible otherwise I'd die from the heat instead of her swords. Drawing my sword and shield, I took a step forward only to drop down onto both knees before getting back up again. The heat was already getting to me. I could feel its warm embrace affecting every last portion of my body, and it was making me feel weaker not to mention tired.

" Let's get this over with!"

The pirate laughed. " Why are you in such a rush? This room is simply divine especially the lava pit down below, but then you don't appreciate such beauty since you're struggling to keep yourself from dying. Ha! I could watch you succumb to the heat but then that would deny the pleasure of sticking these two swords through your heart." The pirate then drew both of her swords before she laughed once again. " I know you defeated my sister by using cheap tactics, but those aren't going to help you this time."

" You could just let me pass."

" I'll pretend that I didn't hear that. Aveil wishes for you to be captured instead of killed, so while I can't end your life, I can still stick my swords into you. I just have to avoid striking any of your vital organs though I can't really promise anything."

" How kind of you."

" I'll give you a sporting chance." The pirate said. " Give up right now and I will grant you mercy." I shook my head and she responded by being crass about it. " Tsk... I gave you a chance but rejected it? Oh well. I suppose there's just no reasoning with a stupid kid. This is going to be a lot of fun... for me that is."

The pirate then rushed forward and I tried to respond by raising my shield, but the heat was really getting to me by that point, so I didn't raise it fast enough causing me to get slashed across my stomach followed by being kicked into the wall. As I struggled to get back onto my feet, she dashed over and repeated the same maneuvers although she hit with both of her swords and not just one. The heat was preventing me from experiencing the pain yet I knew I needed to do something or end up getting captured.

I swung my sword forward in hopes of making some kind of connection, yet the pirate used her swords to block my attack and follow up by striking me in the stomach yet again, causing me to crash into the door this time. Already things weren't going very well and this fight had only just started. The pirate then began getting into the position of performing a jump attack but before she could do it, I raised my shield and hoped that it wasn't going to be painful. Unfortunately, I was quickly proven wrong when both of her blades sunk deep into my shoulders resulting in some slight blood gushing forth.

And yet, despite how painful it looked and Princess Twilight being in complete shock, the heat was actually preventing me from feeling any pain. I was struggling to keep myself from collapsing from exhaustion that I wasn't even paying attention to my body being hacked to pieces. Granted, the pain would be felt when I got out of this area but for the time being, I had inadvertantly acquired different kind of defence.

The pirate was surprised that I survived her jump attack but she wasn't ready to back down from her assault. She rushed forward, her swords swinging in unison, only for me to block them with my shield. She stopped attacking and paused in hopes of making me drop my guard, and the moment I chose to go on the offensive, she responded by hitting my sword arm yet I got to respond as well by hitting her sword arm--one of them anyway. While her wound was minimal at best since it was just her arm, my wound added to the total I had received since we started, and it was obvious that I was losing.

Before I could attack, the pirate kicked me to the ground, and stabbed me in the shoulders again, but like before, I couldn't feel any pain as the heat was making me focus on that combined with the delierium affecting my mental state.

" I have struck you several times." The pirate began. " Yet you feel no pain. You are either a demon or are more resilient than appearances suggest."

" It's the heat."

" What about it?"

" The heat is so intense that I'm ignoring everything else."

" A bonus for me then. If my swords don't finish you then the heat most certainly will." The pirate performed another jump attack only for me to dodge by jumping to the side and responding with my own jump attack, a maneuver she definitely wasn't expecting. " How did you do that!?"

" Just lucky I guess."

The pirate scoffed. " Luck has nothing to do with it. My sister told me that you have more experience than a kid your age should possess. You may look pathetic but deep down you possess a warrior's willpower not to mention lasting longer than most in such heat."

I swung my sword forward as she did hers resulting in a clash of steel. " I've seen things you and your kind will never understand."

" Is that so?"

I nodded my head. " Believe me... If you saw that I've seen, you'd never want to raise your sword ever again."

" Whether you're telling me the truth or not doesn't really matter." The pirate said. " I've every intention of capturing you in the name of our leader, Aveil, and she will bask me with so much praise, she'll cast aside that pathetic excuse of a second-in-command and name me as her number two." My eyes opened wide when she said that. " I don't know why Derpy has to act like an incompetent oaf so much. While Aveil appreciates it for the most part, some of the others don't feel the same way. Me? I have no grudge against her though she is pathetic. I mean, who would drop their weapon allowing the Zoras to know what we did?

Suddenly, I began to get the upper hand, and I swung my sword downward, knocking it out of the pirate's hand. She was surprised at what I just did--I was also surprised as I wasn't expecting that--but when she attempted to pick it up off the ground, I performed another jump attack that she couldn't avoid, resulting in her screaming in agony before dropping down onto one knee. The anger I saw in her face reminded me that I was losing control of my emotions so I quickly performed some breathing exercises to calm myself down.

I too then dropped onto one knee, the pirate laughing at me in the process. " You've got guts, kid! I didn't expect you would rely on pure rage to overpower me, but you did and that means you've beaten me as well. I can't believe that one mere child has now defeated two of the finest Gerudo Pirates in all of Great Bay. Guess there's more to you than appearances suggest, but I wouldn't get too cocky otherwise someone is going to slit your throat when you least expect it.

" Take back what you said about Derpy."

" Your rage had to do with her?"

" Well?"

" Like I said, I've got nothing against her but some of the others wish she were exiled." The pirate answered. " She may be pathetic but Derpy can be just as dangerous as Aveil if you push her into a corner and she has no way out. Since Derpy isn't around to personally deal with you, I'm sure Aveil would revel in the chance of getting to kill you personally. She's been cheerful as of late what with killing our mortal enemy, Mikau of the Zora, yet she needs to unwind because our theft didn't quite work out. I'd be pleasantly surprised if you managed to get out of here without running into Aveil."

The pirate then took out a Deku Nut, tossed it to the ground where it produced a blinding flash, and like before, I was blinded for several seconds. When my vision returned, she had disappeared and both doors unlocked. Without another thought, I entered the next room where I collapsed to the floor and began breathing heavily due to being exposed to such conditions for a lenthy period. I was certain that I would die back there from being exposed to so much heat instead of dying at the hands of my opponent, yet somehow I survived the odds although now I began to feel the negatives of no longer being in heat.

My wounds began to flare up resulting in me wincing with pain. While I hadn't lost that much blood, the fact that my arms and back felt like they were about to rip off from my body indicated that I needed immediate attention. There was no telling when some other pirate would show up so I needed to get out of here before then. Unfortunately, the wounds were taking their toll much to my displeasure.

" Do you wish you had a potion now?" Twilight asked.

" That's why I've reminded myself to get one before the next temple." I answered.

" You overcame that pirate despite being exposed to all that heat."

" I'm not surprised that you weren't affected."

" Really? I guess I hadn't noticed."

I rolled my eyes. " You're a fairy, remember? Unlike me, you're immune to a lot of environmental conditions. You could stay in those previous rooms for days on end without ever succumbing to the heat, but I almost did and I'm supposed to embrace fire since I used it during my previous journey."

" Fire may be closely related to you, Sunset, but you're not immune to it."

" I know."

" Before you get the next egg, why not take a few moments to smash the pots around here?" Twilight asked. " You could do with some recovery hearts in order to heal those
wounds otherwise they could become infected or worse."

I nodded. " I might have to kick them with my feet if my shoulders are too painful for me to use." Walking around the room, I struggled to lift up the pots that were scattered about the room, yet each one was smashed into a wall, and while most contained rupees, the remaining two contained small hearts which were exactly what I needed. The instant I picked them up, my wounds began to heal and soon I was back to my regular strength though I did have a few scars. I turned to Princess Twilight who smiled knowing that I was no longer hurt. " I noticed a treasure chest inside of the aquarium over there."

Princess Twilight then looked at it for herself. " You're right, Sunset."

" Who do you suppose put that there?"

" Maybe Rainbow Dash didn't want anyone getting some kind of secret stash?"

" In that sense, she can't get it either."

" Either way, you might as well see what's inside." Twilight said. " I know it sounds weird of me saying to steal someone else's treasure, but since these pirates have been doing that to the Zoras for a long time, taking something from them would kind of balance things out."

Her Highness really shouldn't look into it like that unless she was willing to contradict herself and the teachings of Princess Celestia. Me? I figured the chest contained a small amount of rupees, nothing that Rainbow Dash would miss.

Pulling out the Hookshot, I pulled myself up to the top of the aquarium after firing the chain at the wood situated above it. Upon landing, I took out the Zora Mask, put it on my face, and began going through the transformation again--I didn't like how I had to switch between forms so frequently as I thought my body wouldn't able to handle so many transitions within a short time frame--until I became Thunderlane--Mikau--and jumped into the water.

Like the first tank, this one had no monsters lurking about inside, so I didn't have to worry about the egg getting damaged. However, the egg was just like the other two, pale and sickly looking, signs that the pirates didn't care about it so long as they had it in their greedy hands. It saddened my heart knowing they cared more about lining their pockets with gold instead of taking good care of such innocent creatures. If Fluttershy were here right now, she would have gone on a tirade of aggression, condemning the pirates by using her ability to stare people down until they pleaded for her to stop--that power still freaked me out.

Taking out my next empty bottle, I scooped the egg up into it, corked it, and placed it behind my back before walking over to the chest and kicking it open, taking out yet another red rupee though I wasn't surprised. Collecting so many of them didn't seem like much but the numbers would add up into an incredible profit. Perhaps I should deposit some of these rupees at the bank otherwise they would be lost when I eventually reset time.

Climbing out of the water and walking into the dark passageway, I soon found myself back outside though I wasn't quite sure where I was. The ground was further below than last time and while I could easily jump down without any injury, it was the principle of the thing that annoyed me.

" Okay, where do we go from here?" I asked, scratching my head.

" First, let me leave a little magic behind so we don't end up coming back here again." Twilight said. She closed her eyes and concentrated before conjuring up a tiny ball of magic that she threw onto the nearby wall creating an almost inconspicuous mark. " The guard tower is to our left again although this time we're on the other side of the central area. We could always go back and see if we missed anything on the previous side or we could try the outer edge. Whichever decision you decide upon, Sunset, you'll need to switch back to a human and use the Stone Mask to avoid being detected."

I sighed. " I'm not liking how I keep changing back and forth every few minutes."

" Is it really taxing on your body?"

I nodded. " I feel like my insides could turn to mush because of how they get re-arranged every time I change forms." I looked down at my hands and was shocked to see that they were shivering not from the cold--it was surprisingly warm despite it being nightfall--but from switching back and forth between bodies. " I hope I can slow down after this. I'd rather not have my body tear itself apart."

That was one of the biggest drawbacks regarding changing forms. My anatomy had to experience changing into something completely different as well as get accustomed to the change which often took some time. Changing constantly meant my body couldn't adjust itself and could potentially cause permanent damage if I wasn't careful. That's why I preferred to remain in one form for a lengthy period instead of short bursts. It would prevent something from going wrong. I supposed that I could do a few short bursts between forms though it was something I'd rather soon avoid than face the consequences later on.

Grabbing my face and pulling off the Zora Mask, I flipped my hair back and switched over to the Stone Mask before jumping down to the ground below. I noticed that more pirates had since appeared telling me that Rainbow Dash was getting desperate with wanting me found and taken care of. Since they couldn't see me--I figured most of the regular pirates couldn't see me while the more unique individuals could making the Stone Mask useless against them.

I ran past them making sure to avoid any puddles and continued running until I was getting within range of the entrance I used to come into this area. Princess Twilight bopped me on the head and pointed out that there was another pillar with a Hookshot plate located on top of a high ledge--it was cleverly hidden from sight as I wouldn't have thought about turning around upon entering--followed by a couple more that lead up to what looked like a bridge that went across to another section of the fortress. How the Gerudo were able to get up to such places without the use of ladders was truly baffling to the brain.

Using the Hookshot, I pulled myself up to each pillar making sure not to fall off or anything, and when I eventually reached the bridge, there was a single pirate walking back and forth along it and essentially blocking the path forward. While I hadn't relied as much on the tactic as I had done during my previous journey, I knew that she needed to be knocked out for me to progress. I obviously wasn't confident enough to hit such a far-away target so I walked forward before stopping halfway across the bridge and taking out the Hero's Bow. Loading an arrow into place and aiming accordingly, I let it loose, striking the pirate in the back, causing her to collapse.

While I hated the thought that perhaps she was dead, I knew that she had merely been knocked unconscious and would be back at it about a minute later.

Stepping over her body and continuing on, I walked up to a door which was surprisingly as I had only seen two others near where Rainbow Dash was. Opening it and entering the next room, the first thing that greeted me was a large treasure chest surrounded by three pirates who were obviously there guarding it. A ramp on either side showed how one could go in and out though my eyes were paying attention to a small ledge sticking out of the wall serving as an alternate means of crossing.

" Whatever is in that treasure chest must be important if there is this many guards."

I nodded. " Rainbow Dash must not want anyone to come along and take what's inside."

" What are you going to do?"

" I'm not going to risk it."

" You suspect more rupees?"

I nodded again. " That's one reason as well as the most obvious. I suspect there's a bigger rupee reward in there but at this point I don't really need anymore money. I mean, I could always do with more rupees but there's a fine line one shouldn't cross because doing so makes you consumed with greed." I looked closely at the chest and something in my head was telling me to open the chest and take the prize inside. I quickly shook my head several times to get such horrible thoughts out of there. " My other reason is that the pirates would figure out someone was there invisible if all of a sudden, the chest opened up on its own."

" They could be superstitious."

" Maybe but then they already witnessed Starlight Glimmer use her powers."

" Good point." Twilight said. " If they believed in her powers then the chances of them believing in something less superficial would be slim to none. I'm proud of you for taking the high road instead of going to great lengths just to pick a few extra rupees."

" I could knock them out with arrows but it's not worth it."

" Then I suggest using that ledge sticking out of the wall."

" Why?"

" If you were to go down where the pirates are, you might be tempted to open up the treasure chest." Twilight answered. " Don't think that I don't trust you, Sunset, because that's not the case at all. I know you'll do the right thing and not be consumed by greed."

Her words didn't sound all that reassuring but Her Highness was right about me not allowing greed to tempt me. Jumping onto the ledge gently so as to not make a noise one would make upon landing on something, I was about to jump over to the other side when I suddenly heard the same voice in my head as before. It kept on saying for me to go down and take the rupees in the chest, to take back what the Gerudo Pirates had stolen, to humiliate them just because I was viewed as a child. The voice continued growing in strength but I once again shook my head and drove the thoughts out.

To steal from them in such a manner would make me a thief. Even though I had taken some of their treasure, they were either insignificant or something that wasn't really theirs to begin with, like the Hookshot as Snails found it by fishing it out from the bottom of the ocean.

I jumped over to the other side but before I continued on, I decided to see if these pirates had anything interesting to say. Surely they were privy to knowing what was going on throughout the fortress as they were pirates like the others. Getting down onto my hands and knees, I scouched forward so that I could listen as closely as possible without giving away my current position--that would be pretty bad.

" What is going on out there?"

" Someone said that there's an intruder in the fortress."

" You're kidding!?"

" Aveil said that a kid is wandering around here and should be captured at all costs, but if they are killed then it's still okay so long as they are dealt with. I also heard some of the others mention the Zora eggs we stole have gone missing."

" Do you think that kid is behind it?"

" Impossible! No one can get those eggs out without dealing with the nasty creatures we placed in two of the aquariums. Unless that kid suddenly grew gills, the only one who could have stolen back the eggs is Mikau."

" Shhhh! If Aveil heard you say something like that, you'll be thrown into the dungeon for certain."

" But what if he did survive?"

" Aveil made sure he died."

" I'm just saying that if Mikau survived his death, he could be assisting this kid and use them as a distraction while he goes after the eggs. Besides, he's been in plenty of situations where his life hung in the balance, and he managed to pull through every time sometimes by almost impossible means. With all that confusion going on, can we afford to take any chances if it were Mikau?"

" If he's still breathing, Aveil will be really mad."

" Mad isn't the term I'd use."

" What would use?"

" Vivid beyond all reasoning."

" Enough chatter you two! We must continue watching over this treasure chest as Aveil ordered, and we're not to leave this post until she says otherwise. Now that you mention her, why do you suppose she decided to come here earlier?"

" No idea."

" Well that was pointless."

It may have been for them but what they talked about proved very important to me. It seemed that my escapades in the Pirates Fortress have already caused plenty of confusion resulting in Rainbow Dash ordering more of her fellow pirates to go out on patrol. On the one hand, they were going to waste valuable time and resources trying to find out where I am though I wasn't making it easy for them since I was using the Stone Mask to go about incognito. On the other hand, I would slowly find myself being blocked off from all sides as they figure out what exactly was going on.

Also, some of the pirates were questioning as to whether or not Thunderlane was still alive. He--I--survived the fall from that prison cell though I made sure not to allow them to see my Zora form so as to continue on with the deception that their hated enemy had died. I supposed some of them had decided to check out the aquariums to ensure the eggs hadn't been taken, and alerted Rainbow Dash most likely upon learning someone had gotten to them.

What they also said about Rainbow coming by here earlier was a disturbing thought. I didn't know where she had run off to after being chased by those bees, but I hoped that these pirates were wrong and that she had gone somewhere else.

Getting back up, I walked towards another door, and entered another room that resulted in me being locked in. Unlike the previous one that proved unbearable, this one actually looked beautiful and personified a sense of mystery. Of course, I didn't want to stay in here forever as time was still against me. Since I was expecting another powerful Gerudo to come down from the ceiling, I decided to take several moments to reflect upon all I had done so far in Termina.

Sure, there had been plenty of ups and downs, but then all adventures are like that whether we intend to do so or not. My relationship with Princess Twilight had also grown during this entire ordeal, and I would forever cherish these moments. We never got a chance to do something together since time wasn't on her side, she wasn't used to having hands, and preferred not to cause a scene what with being different, but I felt as though this world had allowed us to finally get to know each other. We both may have been the students of our former mentor, Princess Celestia, yet our paths diverged due to having our own individual ideals.

Her Highness became an alicorn, a princess, while I... I became a failure who had to claw her way out of the deep pit she had created out of hatred. I'm in a much better place now than before, yet a part of me still wishes that I had stuck around, finished my studies, and became a princess who deserved it.

On a different note, my experiences dealing with the problems of Termina had been useful in my own development as a person. I now understood people's feelings a lot better than I used to, and I proved a very good listener. Some things were annoying but I've slowly come to accept those issues. Fighting monsters was still not my thing though I had gotten stronger as a result compared to my klutziness from before, and I absolutely loved changing into different forms--but not on a consistent basis. Hopefully, I can succeed though Ganondorf was waiting for me to reach a certain point.

He said we'd have another contest, and I must somehow be ready for him.

Deciding that I had stalled long enough, and because Princess Twilight was bopping me on the head, I walked towards the center of the room only to hear the sounds of someone clapping their hands. Something was definitely wrong here. Shouldn't the pirate have dropped down from above by now?

" I have to say that I'm impressed that you made it this far." My entire body froze as I recognized that voice from anywhere. I turned around and walking out the shadows, still clapping her hands was Rainbow Dash. " Most people who enter this fortress often meet a miserable end after a few minutes, yet you have defied the odds by surviving and defeating several of my sisters in combat. For that, you have earned my respect but it doesn't change the fact that you shouldn't be here let alone still be alive.

" Rainbow Dash!" I exclaimed.

" How do you know about my nickname?"

" Um... Lucky guess?" I asked. Crap! She doesn't know that I was here earlier as Mikau which was when I found out about that. I hoped that she wouldn't put two and two together otherwise I could be in even more trouble.

" Then I guess it's true."

" What is?"

Rainbow Dash flipped back a strand of hair that was covering her eye. " Mikau survived his death and has been reclaiming the Zora eggs we stole. I should have known that he wouldn't die so easily to a trap door." I was about to say otherwise but kept quiet knowing that telling the truth would really make things worse. " While he is nothing but a coward for not facing off against us, I will admit that he is more powerful than appearances suggest. Course, he'll get his butt kicked when my sisters and I eventually find him. Mikau won't be able to hide much longer especially if more guards are out on patrol. And then that brings me to you, kid."

I gulped. " Um..."

" I don't know what you're doing here but you've been humiliating my sisters constantly."

" Sorry."

" That's real cute." Rainbow Dash said. " That isn't going to work here, kid. You see, I was in a pretty good mood until I learned that someone was stealing our Zora eggs and someone else was snooping around our fortress like she owned it. Everything has gotten so lame since then that I really want to vent my anger out against anyone who might be within range of it, so thank you for being a volunteer."

" What happened to the other guard?"

" She was ordered to guard the main entrance."

" Did you think she wasn't competent enough to capture me?"

Rainbow Dash's face turned bright red and she drew her two swords. " How dare you say such vile words about my sisters? It appears you have a forked tongue, kid, and I'd love to carve that out of you along with your heart. I may get angry with them for failing me but they know that I will always have their back no matter what. My sisters mean everything to me even if it meant giving up my own life." She then began to walk forward and got into a battle position. No... She wasn't planning on fighting me!? " I was thinking of showing mercy but your insult towards my sisters pushed me ovet the edge."

She was dead serious about fighting me. Numerous thoughts began swirling through my mind. The thought of fighting one of my friends was something I'd never thought would happen in a million years, and yet Rainbow Dash was standing here before me, with two swords in hand, ready to fight to the death. Another thought involved me trying to convince to not do something crazy with another thought involved me giving up. There was no way I could give up yet I just couldn't bring myself to fight my friend. She may have been a different person in this world yet she was still the same Rainbow who would always be loyal to her friends.

I had to get her to change her mind. " Let's not be too hasty about this."

" Are you trying to plead surrender to me?"

" No, but I don't want to fight you."

" You truly are something else, kid, but I'm afraid it's too late." Rainbow Dash said. " This won't take very long anyway as compared with my sisters, I am on a completely different level when it comes to fighting. In fact, it's been a long time since I last got to actually spar against anyone. If you can at least last about five minutes, I'll be satisfied and I might choose to spare your life, but if you die before that, then... well... you die."

Princess Twilight then spoke out. " You have to do this, Sunset."

Rainbow Dash was surprised. " Huh? A fairy? Say... That little thing looks an awful lot like the one that was hanging around Mikau early this morning. Come to think of it, you're wearing similar clothes to what he wore although you're wearing a shirt instead of being bare-chested." My entire body froze. I feared that Rainbow had figured out that Mikau and I were the same person. I prayed that she hadn't. " Oh well. It's not really important anyway." I breathed a sigh of relief. " Fairy or no fairy, let me see what kind of skill you have, kid."

She then suddenly dashed at me with a speed much faster than the previous pirates, and knocked me to the ground with a swift kick to my stomach. As I got back onto my feet, I got kicked down again before I even had a chance to properly defend myself. Getting up again, Rainbow began bragging out how awesome she was and that this was going to be an easy victory for her. At least she still possessed her ego in this world, and I could take advantage of if if I can manage to score a few hits against her.

Drawing out my sword and shield, I slowly walked towards Rainbow who did the same thing, a smug look expressed on her face. We stared at each for several seconds before she slashed me across the torso with blinding speed. Clutching my stomach, I rolled away from a second sword slash and continued rolling as she struck her swords into the ground with every intent on skewering my body. Rainbow wasn't kidding when she said that she was in her own league as these were attacks that I never thought were possible by using a pair of swords--that made this even harder.

Getting back onto my feet, I raised my shield just as she started to strike her swords against it, yet she quickly changed tactics by tossing one sword in the air and using her other one to continue her assault. My mind was so preoccupied with deflecting Rainbow that I didn't see her first sword come down on top of my head--I was fortunate in that I got hit by the hilt instead of the actual blade itself. Clutching my head now wracked with pain, I couldn't prevent Rainbow from slashing me twice before kicking me again, sending me into the wall with a loud thud.

She walked over and was about to perform the now familiar jump attack when I barely lifted my sword and struck her in the stomach, causing blue blood to gush forth, an for her to back away slightly.

Rainbow Dash began laughing. " You finally managed to hit me, kid. And here I thought you weren't taking this seriously. No wonder my sisters fell to you so easily despite all their training. They didn't know how to fight against someone who can be unpredictable with their moves. Still, I've done more to you than you have to me so consider this to be a disappointing fight. In fact, I'd go as far as calling it absolutely lame, a real snoozefest, totally boring. I want you to come at me with everything! Don't hold back!"

" I don't want to fight you."

" It's not like you have a choice."

" What do you mean?"

Rainbow Dash pointed at the locked doors on either side of the room. " If you want to get out of here, kid, you're gonna have to beat me in battle. There's no other way to raise those iron bars even if you were to possess immense strength. It's how we apply stress to any who think they can go about our fortress with eace."

" So I'm stuck here?"

" For about three more minutes."

" What happens then?"

Rainbow Dash laughed while twirling her swords. " You may walk out of here alive or I kill you on the spot. Either way, this fight won't be lasting for much longer." She looked at my shield and whistled. " Your shield is actually keeping me from ending this a lot sooner, but while my sisters saw it as cowardly, I see it as you relying on your strengths which revolve around offensive and defensive skills. I aim on getting rid of that thing but I'll have to work for it."

I was shocked. " You think this is a game?"

" It should be but then this is just the kind of person I am." Rainbow Dash answered. " I may be a ruthless pirate but even I'm allowed to have some fun. Anyway, no more talking as we still have a fight to finish." Before she could make a move, she suddenly felt a stabbing sensation coming from her stomach. She looked down and noticed my blade had slashed her stomach pretty badly. No blood seeped forth this time though in my heart, I had wounded one of my closest friends. " Didn't think you would rely on a cheap shot. Maybe you do have what it takes to gives me some entertainment."

" I didn't mean to."

Rainbow Dash scoffed and waved her hand. " It's cool! While most people fight for honour, they can and will rely on cheap shots if they feel the need to. Sure, it would damage their reputation amongst their peers, but at least they took an initiative instead of get cut down by their opponent. Me? I'll switch between honourable and cheap shots to ensure my victory even if I get criticized later for it. I personally don't care what others say about me. I do what I must in order to help my people survive."

I could tell that she was conflicted between the personality she had in Termina with her true self that I had come to know. Whether or not she was aware of this remained to be seen, but it was different from the rest of my friends. Fluttershy and Applejack seemlessly switched between their respective personas without it affecting them, while Pinkie Pie was still out there given that she didn't seem all that different from her true self. Rarity? I had no answer for her as she hadn't spoken to me because of losing her eggs, and Twilight Sparkle was unaccounted for.

The theory that Princess Twilight came up with regarding the Elements of Harmony still held true but it seemed Rainbow was struggling with it. While I hoped for her to display more of her loyal nature, I knew that the dominant persona--that of this Aveil person--would bring her back to what was important to her.

As I contemplated all of this, Rainbow Dash took advantage and knocked me to the ground using a shoulder tackle. " What were you doing, kid? Daydreaming? If you do something like that, you'll always end up on the receiving end of just about anything." Before I could raise my sword, I was suddenly staring at the tips of two blades that were mere inches from my face, and the sadistic look Rainbow had on her face was concerning. " I've got to admit that this was the best fight of my entire life."

" What are you doing?"

" Unfortunately, I've come to the realization that you are a threat."

" In what way?"

" Someone with your kind of skill could easily overthrow me and take over." Rainbow Dash answered. " My sisters would probably kill you in response if that were to happen or choose to follow you as their new leader. I can't allow that to happen! Sorry, kid, but I've got to kill you right now in order to preserve my authority."

" NO!"

" At least die with some dignity." Rainbow Dash said, raising her swords in preparation of making a finishing blow. There was no way she would want to kill me. I had to believe that she would refrain from doing so even at the last possible minute. " Goodbye, kid." Then again, maybe she had every intention.

Chapter 40: The Dark Ocean Depths

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
January 9, 2017
Chapter 40: The Dark Ocean Depths.

Rainbow Dash thrust both her swords down without hesitation and all I could do was wait for the inevitable impact. The sound of metal striking the ground echoed all around yet something wasn't right. She clearly had every intention of killing me so why did she strike the ground instead? Rainbow then attempted to kill me again only to have the same result as before, namely her swords hit the ground and not me. She then made a third attempt and it quickly dawned on me that she couldn't go through with it.

I mean, she could kill me if she wanted to as that was the nature of the character she was portraying, but I slowly suspected that her heart was telling her not to go through with it and instead miss me on purpose. A small part of Rainbow's true self prevented her from doing something she would most likely regret if we were back home, yet in this place, she was instead experiencing frustration. She then thrust her swords down for a fourth time only to stop, the tips of both blades mere inches from my face. I wasn't about to question anything regarding what was going on in her mind.

As far as I was concerned, my life had been spared though I wasn't out of danger yet. I still had to deal with the fact that Rainbow's presence was keeping both doors blocked with iron bars. That meant she needed to be defeated for me to continue on and retrieve the final Zora egg so that I could get them back to Daring Do. The only problem was that I had to beat her... my friend... someone that I saw as more of a family member than merely a friend. Even though I had struck her with my own sword as a means of protecting myself, the thought of hurting Rainbow any further just didn't settle well with me.

I'm sure that Princess Twilight would have the exact same thoughts if she was in my position right now. Her Highness had been watching the battle from a distance, her obvious disgust at two friends fighting each other telling me that she didn't want to see it continue on. And yet, she knew that there was no other choice. For me to continue on, Rainbow Dash had to be dealt with.

After failing to kill me for the fourth time, Rainbow tossed away her swords in disgust. " What is wrong with me!? I should be able to kill the likes of you without hesitation, yet something in my heart is saying not to do it. How can I be an effective leader when my heart is making me think of doing nice things." It then looked as though she was trying to throw up or pretend to be gagging. Even in a world like this, she still has that immaturity that defines her character. " If my sisters find out... I'll never be able to show my face here again. I'd have to exile myself out of shame and that so isn't awesome."

" Why don't you listen to your heart?" I asked.

" What!?" Rainbow Dash exclaimed. " We Gerudo Pirates don't allow our hearts to dictate our actions. We survive on the principle that stealing from others and priding ourselves as the scourges of the sea! Anything less than that and our lives mean nothing."

" Surely you can change that perspective?"

Rainbow Dash laughed. " You really don't know that much about us pirates do you?"

I was about to shake my head when I stopped myself from doing so. " I know that you make other people miserable by attacking them all in the name of wanting riches beyond your wildest dreams. Did you ever stop to think that you could have forged friendships with those whom you've dealt with in such a manner? They could have given you the necessary aid in return. You pirates wouldn't be in your current element had you taken the first step."

" You're gonna make me gag."

" Are you being serious?"

" Isn't it obvious to you, kid?"

" Why aren't you listening to me?"

" I'm listening but you're spouting nothing but hot air." Rainbow Dash answered. She finally got off of me after having pinned me down for what felt like an eternity and folded her arms like she was cold or something. " We've tried what you suggested a long time ago and we ended up losing because of it. I don't think I need to tell you what kind of loses I'm talking about, right?" I nodded my head and she responded by laughing. " It's only funny until you realize that you've lost so many of your sisters, those who stood beside you through everything, fighting just to survive."

" I'm sensing some inner conflict."

Rainbow Dash suddenly looked at me with a piercing gaze that screamed hatred. " There has never been any inner conflict, kid. We pirates learned a long time ago that the only ones we can rely on are ourselves. Sure, I've had problems when some of my sisters royally botch things up, but then I realized I should have handled it instead of them. Many of my sisters haven't seen the kind of things that these two eyes of mine have. Their failures are a reminder that they haven't truly experienced being a pirate. Until they know what it can really be like, I've got to continually talk down on them until they get it."

This was a side of Rainbow that certainly caught me by surprise. I knew it was the character she was portraying who was doing the talking yet it still felt strange hearing her speaking with so much emotion. Normally, she would poke fun at the rest of us for relying on emotions and calling it lame, but here, Rainbow was letting out her emotions without having to hold back for anything. My assumption about the Gerudo Pirates was that they were nothing but thieves who were causing trouble for the Zoras. To think that they were trying to stay alive through means of survival.

My idea of the pirates having made friends with others still stood though. Had they chosen to embrace friendship rather than be treated as a group who cared more about their own survival, many problems could have been averted--it certainly would have made my task in Great Bay that much easier--and they could have lived here peacefully. Instead, they chose to go down a path that resulted in stealing, kidnapping, and maybe even killing.

Looking at Rainbow Dash, I was beginning to see things in a different light. Maybe she and her fellow pirates weren't as evil as motivations suggested? Their actions stemmed from the belief that they could trust only themselves. Survival meant doing whatever was necessary even acts that others would condemn without a moment's hesitation.

I knew there and then that my words weren't going to change Rainbow's mind. She was dead set in continuing down her destructive path since in this world, she had been doing so for a long time until it became second-nature. Could I have made a difference and changed the outcome had I been here long before Starlight Glimmer had spoken to Rainbow? Maybe but then this situation sounded like it had been around for years rather than the last couple of weeks.

Speaking of Starlight, could she have made the situation worse by convincing Rainbow to go about taking the Zora eggs? I wouldn't be surprised if that was the answer but I couldn't prove it unless I were to speak to her directly. Then again, I doubted Starlight would be in the right state of mind since her pranks were becoming more and more severe with each area I came to. I'll deal with her when the time comes as she is the source behind all of this madness, but first I needed to save the remaining two giants from their current imprisonment--and that involved defeating two more giant bosses.

An idea suddenly struck me. " Um... Have you heard of Great Bay's Guardian?"

" What are you on about now?"

" Well, have you?"

Rainbow Dash looked at me awkwardly. " You mean that stupid fairy tale about how there are these four giant beings who protect this world? Yeah... I've heard of them even though it's nothing but a story designed to scare little kids like you into being good children." She then looked at me again, looked the other way, then back at me, then back the other way, and finally back at me again. " Don't tell me you believe in that?"

I nodded my head. " I do if it means saving this world."

" No wonder my sisters had problems beating you."

" That's because they underestimated me."

" You must be one deluded kid if you honestly think you're saving the world." Rainbow Dash said. " Still, I'll give you credit for being brave enough to come into a place most men fear to tread because of how ruthless we pirates can be. It's adorable how you believe that you can save this world by following the whims of a stupid fairy tale. Kid, this world has been crumbling away for centuries. Nothing can be done to change that. It won't be for a few more decades but Termina will become a wasteland where survival will become the standard, and anyone who thinks otherwise will become history."

" More like less than three days." I said under my breath."

" What was that?"

I shook my head. " Nothing."

Rainbow Dash suddenly unsheathed a hidden sword she had inside of her jacket and had the tip inches from my throat. " You're gonna tell me what you just said, kid, or I'll have to carve it out of you if you get my meaning." I refused to speak to her since she refused to believe that something much bigger was happening. This prompted her to push her sword even closer until I could feel some blood trickling down from my throat. " If you don't answer me now, I won't hesitate towards killing you."

" You don't have the guts."

" Don't push me."

" You had plenty of chances and you squandered each one because of something in your heart." I said. " Face it, Rainbow Dash! You could kill every other person who comes here without feeling any guilt, yet I happen to be the one exception."

That pushed Rainbow over the edge. " My name is Aveil!" She then attempted to carry out her threat only for me to respond by tilting my head to the left, and using my own sword to knock her one out of her hand where it landed with a loud clank on the opposite side of the room. Seeing what happened left Rainbow completely speechless. " You... Who would've guessed that you were capable of such an impressive skill? Guess you were right about me after all, kid. I just can't kill you no matter how hard I try. I'm not much of a leader if I can't perform a simple task like that."

I shook my head. " Don't sell yourself short."

Rainbow Dash raised her hand to quickly silence me. " I can't kill you and that's that! No sense in me complaining about it now." She then snapped her fingers and the iron bars that had been blocking both doors suddenly raised upwards indicating my freedom. I looked at Rainbow so as to understand what her thought process was in unlocking both doors, but I didn't even know where to begin. Instead, she gave me a smirk before picking up all three of her swords. " Surprised kid? I can tell because you have that dumb look on your face. You're free to leave this room and do whatever you want."

" Are you sure?"

" If I wasn't, you'd be dead right now."

" Why the chance of heart?"

" You lasted the duration of our fight and besides, I actually enjoyed the experience." Rainbow Dash answered. " It's not everyday that I get to fight someone who has such an interesting personality, but then I've seen my share of battles over the years. Besides, I'm not the one who is going to be giving you trouble. If what you said about the guardian is true, I'm not the worst thing you have to deal with--not that I actually believe that stupid fairy tale."

Even though she didn't understand the seriousness of the situation, Rainbow Dash was correct with her assumption. The temple was most likely crawling with monsters as a result of the Giant no longer being around. That meant I once again had my work cut out for me.

Those small monsters were nothing compared to whatever Starlight had created in order to seal away the Giant so as to prevent it from fulfilling its duty, and if the previous two bosses were any indication, this next one would push my abilities to the limit, both human and Zora.

I had since begun to make sense of how certain things worked in Termina. I figured that Starlight created the likes of Odolwa and Goht as a means of keeping the Giants sealed away so as to prevent them from stopping her from pulling her pranks, yet that had become a moot point compared to what was really going on. She wasn't just pulling pranks as a means of getting revenge but rather she was determined to bring about the complete destruction of this world. Why would the likes of a simple prankster want to destroy an entire world so that she could hurt those who hurt her?

It was something that had been flickering in the back of my mind for some time, yet I never thought about it before until now. Had Rainbow Dash done or said something that made me think about it? Maybe, but now it was all I could think about. Was it possible that Majora's Mask was poisoning her mind, corrupting her sense of what was right and wrong, and turned it into a desire for wanting to wipe out everything? No... How could a mask do something like that? Then again, I had masks that could change my shape. The thought of a mask corrupting the wearer wasn't as farfetched as it appeared to be.

At that moment, Princess Twilight bopped me on the head. " You were daydreaming again, Sunset."

" Huh? What?" I asked in a confused state. " Where did Rainbow Dash go?" It quickly dawned on me that she was no longer in the room.

" She left a short time ago."

" Why didn't you say something?"

" You were in such a deep thought that I assumed you would come to your senses on your own." Twilight answered. " You really should warn me when you do that, Sunset, so I don't have to keep on bopping you on the head. Before she left, Rainbow Dash dropped a piece of paper on the ground. I'm not sure what she was planning but she was hoping that her actions would get noticed by me. I don't know what's going on in her head right now but I think you may have reached through to her somehow."

" No matter how many times she tried, she just couldn't kill me."

" And you should be thankful for that."

" Really?"

Princess Twilight nodded her head. " Yes. If not for her Element of Loyalty coming through when it did, you wouldn't be standing here right now, and I would probably be trapped in a cage to be gawked at by pirates." I then looked at Her Highness with a confused look on my face and she responded by blushing while waving her hands. " What!? I've read books on what happens when fairies are captured! That's exactly what they would have done to me had you been killed!"

" A shame that she didn't believe in the Giants."

" Most people view them as a fairy tale passed through the ages."

" And what about the moon?"

" People have only been reacting to it when they realize on the final day that it has gotten closer." Twilight answered. " Until those reactions, they refuse to believe that anything is amiss and are content with continuing on with their lives. In addition, only those living within the vicinity of Clock Town seem to be aware that the moon is falling. The other tribes are either ignorant of the truth or simply don't know that the world they live in will be destroyed. Judging from Rainbow's reaction, she was the former."

" You mean ignorant?"

Princess Twilight nodded again. " You can't blame her for it though. She is portraying someone who is obviously more interested in earning money than anything else, a rather sad role for her actually, but one that we couldn't have predicted. In any case, you've overcome Rainbow so now we can collect the final Zora egg and get out of here."

" Do you think she will be okay?"

" Right now, I don't know, but when you reset time, none of this would have happened."

" I guess that's one benefit regarding going back to the beginning."

" Yes, I suppose you could say that."

I then looked down at the piece of paper Princess Twilight mentioned that Rainbow Dash had dropped. Walking over to it and picking it up, I saw that it was a scrap of paper that had been scrawled with red ink as though she were in a hurry. At first, it was difficult to understand what she wrote as her handwriting looked like a child had done, but I quickly concluded that she merely had used a fancy writing style. Heh... Even in a world on the brink, Rainbow had to maintain her level of awesomeness.

Kid... I know you're reading this right now as why wouldn't you be? I knew that fairy of yours will notice me drop this piece of scrap on the ground while you were off in la-la land, so be thankful that it did so on your behalf. Like I said, you're free to take the remaining Zora egg--I know you have the other three in your possession--but I didn't say anything about letting you walk out of here with our precious stolen goods. If word got out that we Gerudo Pirates allowed a kid to steal from under our noses, we'd never be able to show our faces in the ocean ever again and we'd be humiliated.
So, I decided to take drastic measures. As you read this, I've ordered my sisters to flood that area of the fortress with water. You may be skilled with a sword but when it comes to water, you're nothing like the Zoras. I'd say the water should fill up that entire area within a couple of minutes so I guess I'm having the last laugh. I may not have been able to kill you personally, but this counts as a pretty good consolation prize.
If by some miracle you manage to get out of this little trap I've sprung, you'll still have to find your way out of the fortress. My sisters will ensure that you don't make it out alive. Oh, and if you're thinking I'm an idiot for damaging our fortress, the treasure in the temple will more than make up for it. I figured you were going to try and steal it from us as well which is why I took advantage of your naive little mind. Don't hate me for relying on cheap tricks, kid, but I am a pirate after all and this is what I do for a living. Oh, and don't expect any Zoras coming to your rescue. Apart from Mikau, the rest of them aren't the heroic type.
One more thing... Ha-ha-ha-ha-ha-ha-ha-hah! ~Aveil~

The moment I finished reading the paper, I immediately dropped it where it flittered to the ground, and I looked ahead at the door that lead to the room that housed the egg. Water was slowly trickling in from underneath it and that meant only one thing... Rainbow was serious about her trap. To be honest, I didn't think she would actually go through with it since it meant damaging a section of the fortress. Yet, she probably didn't care as long as their reputation remained unbreakable. It actually made me think about Principal Cinch and what she wanted to do to maintain Crystal Prep's reputation as the best school in Canterlot.

Rainbow was acting a lot like Cinch only much more violent what with her desire to kill, and yet there was one thing she overlooked though not by her own fault. She never knew that the reason I managed to enter the fortress was due to my ability to become a Zora. If she had known, she could have taken my mask away or set up a trap designed to prevent a Zora from escaping--better than that prison cell from before. Now, that very reason would ensure that her trap failed as I could simply change into Mikau and waltz out of here--but not before picking up the Zora egg in the next room.

" She actually went and did it."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Under normal circumstances, we'd be in trouble since you obviously can't breathe underwater, but since you do have the Zora Mask, you won't have to worry about that. You might want to change into a Zora right now, Sunset, before the door gives out from being pushed by so much water. I also suggest remaining in that form as you'll need to speak with Snails about getting that sea horse, and Daring Do will only speak to a Zora regarding that tank of water she has in her laboratory.

" Do you think Rainbow Dash has left the fortress?"

" No, I don't think so."

" If she were to see me--Mikau--running around here, she would lose her mind as she believes he's still dead."

" You don't have a choice, Sunset." Twilight said. " We need to get out of here and only a Zora is going to do that."

I nodded my head and took out the Zora Mask from behind my back before putting it on my face. At that precise moment, the door suddenly cracked to pieces and the water from the other side began to fill up the room rather quickly. As the magic within the mask started to do its thing by changing my body, I was pushed back by a large water flow submerging me below, yet several moments later, I popped my head out, my body having finished its transformation.

Since the door had been destroyed, I began to swim towards it making sure to use my legs to propel me forward for that extra burst of speed. I soon had a bit of trouble getting through to the other side as I was being pushed back by the current. While I could have waited until the water settled down, I was still on a time limit and wasting it wasn't an option--Derpy was still on her way to Pinnacle Rock where she had supposedly dropped the remaining Zora eggs and I had to get there before she did--so using my legs, I pushed myself forward and through the door, stopping on the other side due to another problem.

The egg was still in the aquarium yet there were numerous Skullfish swimming about both inside and outside of it. Either the pirates placed them in here after being ordered to flood this area with water or they were getting in here from another location. In any case, I needed to get past them if I wanted to use my remaining bottle to scoop up the egg.

" You need to be careful here, Sunset."

" Judging from their lack of power, I'm sure that I'll be fine, Twilight."

" Not necessarily true."

" What do you mean?"

" Think of this as part of the group mentality." Twilight answered. " On their own, Skullfish are nothing more than a nuisance designed to slow you down and nibble away at your arms and legs as one would expect. But, a large number of them could potentially prove devastating, and what's worse is that several of them are much larger than the rest. You might need to apply additional measures to bring them down."

I looked at the flock of Skullfish and Her Highness was correct. " I didn't even notice those big ones swimming amongst the regular ones." I looked at my fins for several seconds before turning my attention back towards the skeletal monsters blocking my path to the aquarium. " Will I have enough magic to take them all down?"

" You haven't used any magic since we got here other than using the Lens of Truth to pinpoint Sugar Belle's location."

" So I should have enough?"

" Yes, but you'll need to get close enough for them to attack you."

Of course, there had to be a snag though this one wasn't as bad as I was making it out to be. Before moving towards the Skullfish, I performed a couple of karate chops so that my fins would come out--to think that I never had any lessons yet I felt like a professional martial artist--as I needed them out to act as my shield when using my magic. Luckily, they didn't take any notice of me and were content on swimming about.

I slowly began walking towards them making sure to keep my eyes fixated on as many of them as possible, and when they noticed me getting closer, they immediately swam towards me in a blinding fury that belied their appearance. Getting into a defensive stance and concentrating as hard as I could, the magical barrier surrounded my body--I never noticed it until now that the barrier was essentially a field of electrical energy that swirled around me. It didn't make sense mind you since anything electrical especially in water would result in a massive shock capable of frying anyone's innards.

Fortunately for me, the barrier was made of magic so I wouldn't suffer from any side-effects.

The Skullfish began colliding against the barrier in their effort to attack me with their undead teeth yet each one crumbled to pieces upon connecting though the larger ones required to connect with it twice before being defeated. On the one hand, it was disgusting seeing so many broken bones scattered about surrounded by electricity courtesy of my magical barrier, yet on the other hand they were already undead to begin and probably didn't feel a thing. The only disadvantage here was that I used up more magic than I wanted so I needed to keep what little I had left as an emergency until I could restore it with some magic jars.

Once the last remnants of bones disappeared, I swam up and into the aquarium, took out my remaining empty bottle, and used my hand to scoop up the Zora egg. This one looked particularly bad since I had taken this long to get to it so I knew that I needed to hurry back to Daring Do before it could get worse.

Since my only option was to swim towards the open passageway that I didn't use, I placed the bottle containing the egg behind my back, and swam forward only to get pulled into another current that resulted in me being ejected and landing hard on my butt back out in the main area. Getting up and looking around, I could see numerous pirates were on patrol in hopes of stopping me from escaping. No doubt there were even more waiting for me outside where those boats were, yet it was proof that Rainbow Dash didn't want me to escape and thus ruin the reputation of the Gerudo Pirates by being the first person to ever go through their fortress and live to tell the tale.

" We've got a lot of pirates out here."

" There's no time for you to pick a fight, Sunset."

" The thought never crossed my mind."

" Besides, you can easily warp out of here using the Song of Soaring."

I slapped my forehead. In all the excitement of trying to figure out a way to escape from the Pirate's Fortress by using the way I came in initially, I had completely forgotten that I could use that song to warp to an Owl Statue. My face began glowing bright red out of sheer embarrassment knowing that I made such an obvious blunder--no doubt Her Highness wasn't going to let this one go any time soon--to the point where I wanted to scream out loud.

Without saying another word so as to not make myself out to be even more of an idiot, I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt where it immediately transformed into the fish-bone guitar. Playing the Song of Soaring, I began concentrating on where the song should take me, and two locations came to mind. I could go back to the laboratory and hand over the Zora eggs to Daring Do where she would nurture them until the remaining ones had been collected. Another option involved visiting Clock Town for a few minutes in order to get some supplies for the upcoming temple, yet a third option would be to see Coloratura.

For some reason, my heart was telling me to go back and see Coloratura since she was the one who told me what I needed to do. No, I wasn't infatuated with her or anything but rather there was a connection I felt that existed between her and Thunderlane as a result of who they were in this world. Coloratura was the one person that Thunderlane trusted more than anyone else and vice-versa. Both had burdens in their chests because of what happened to Rarity, attempting to keep the other band members from finding out, and keeping their people from getting into an uproar over the possibility that the concert was cancelled.

Mulling it over for a few moments, I ultimately decided to go to the Lakeside Laboratory instead--it was also because I never struck the Owl Statue where Rarity was--because I still had one other problem to deal with.

As the wings protruded from either side of my body, wrapped themselves around me, and whisked me out of the fortress, my actions had not gone unnoticed. In fact, a certain someone had been watching the entire time and was relatively calm despite what she had just witnessed.

" Was that Mikau I saw just now?" Rainbow Dash asked as she looked at one of her fellow pirates.

The pirate shivered nervously as she attempted to respond to her leader's question. " Um... Yes...?"

" And did he just suddenly disappear into a whirlwind of wings?"

" I... I think that's... what happened... Aveil--I mean... ma'am."

" So he actually did survive the plunge down below in the end." Rainbow Dash said. She then began to softly chuckle making sure the other pirates surrounding her didn't notice in case they would question her. " I guess he truly is the best that those Zoras have. The rest of them would have surely died in a similar situation, yet Mikau pulled off a miracle and kept death from claiming him. It's no wonder that my respect for him remains strong."

" Ma'am?"

" Don't get me wrong."

" M-Ma'am?"

" Mikau is someone I'll continue to hate for ruining our plans." Rainbow Dash answered. " Yet, I can't help but respect a man who can survive death so often and continues to come here and goes toe-to-toe against us. If he were one of us then I'd be honoured to fight by his side as a fellow warrior. Sadly, that will never happen since he's one of those fish-freaks, but a woman can dream, right?"

" A-About... about that girl."

" What about her?"

" She escaped from the trap."

Rainbow Dash looked like she was about to explode into a fit of rage but instead she merely laughed it off before shaking her head. " I knew that kid was something else, but to survive against all that water? No doubt she's special compared to other kids her age. I don't care if she was assisted by Mikau or not to get out of our trap and I don't care that she has reclaimed the Zora eggs we stole the other night. As long as our end goal succeeds then we're still going to spend our lives in luxury."

" What shall we do about the water damage?" A different pirate asked.

" Obviously it needs to be cleaned up!" Rainbow Dash answered. " I'm not going to have part of our fortress submerged underwater as that would destroy our supplies and make part of our impenetrable stronghold utterly useless."

" But Mikau and that girl..."

Rainbow Dash quickly turned towards the pirate, drew out her sword, and the tip of the blade was inches from her throat. " Finish that sentence and you'll be taking a nice long swim in the ocean without a boat. In fact, you just volunteered to clean up all that water using nothing but a mop. Oh, and you'll be doing it on your own." She snapped her fingers and another pirate took the outspoken one away in complete silence. " Since it's pretty obvious that Mikau is going to find the eggs that Derpy dropped over at Pinnacle Rock, we must make preparations for our assault on the temple."

" There is that strange vortex that protects it, ma'am." Another pirate said.

" Yes, I suppose that does pose a problem."

" Maybe Mikau can do us a favour by getting rid of it?"

" Brilliant idea!"

" Thank you, ma'am."

" Yes... Let him do all of the work." Rainbow Dash said. " Then we can reap the rewards by stealing the treasure for ourselves. No matter what, in the end, we'll be the ones with all the money while Mikau will become food for the monsters that have probably taken up residence in there."

" What about Derpy, ma'am?"

" How long will take to finish our preparations?"

" The sun will be coming up in a couple of hours, so I'd say before noon tomorrow."

" Despite her obvious limitations, Derpy will no doubt keep Mikau distracted while we prepare." Rainbow Dash said. " I know that we need him to open up the way for us, but if he does it before we can make our move... I'm sure you don't need me to explain the rest of that sentence."

" No ma'am."

" Within the next few hours, we'll become rich beyond our wildest dreams."

Upon the whirlwind of wings landing me on the ledge that was below the Oceanside Laboratory, I took a few moments to regain my composure. While I had gotten used to moving about from place to place using the power of flight, I still had problems dealing with the aftermath of losing my lunch because of all that whirling around. Hopefully, my body will have gotten accustomed by the time this journey had reached its final conclusion.

Staring up at the sky, I could see that the colours were changing to indicate the sun was about to rise over the eastern reaches. Had I spent an entire twenty-four hours going through what was perhaps my most difficult challenge thus far? It felt like I had been there a lot longer than that. In any case, I didn't have to go back there ever again and perhaps that was for the best since I couldn't bring myself to fighting Rainbow Dash again. A part of me still felt bad over hurting her even though she wasn't the same person I had come to know, yet I just couldn't fight her.

If anyone else I knew were to appear before me as an enemy, could I muster up the courage to fight them as well? Princess Twilight would insist on me fighting them by reminding me that they weren't the people I had come to know from the world that was now my home, yet how could she know what I was feeling considering she most likely had to fight against her friends for one reason or another. My assumption of what Her Highness had experiences was just that, an assumption that held no meaning since I never really asked her what she had experienced in Equestria.

Maybe I was being immature over something so trivial?

" Sunset..." Twilight began. " I'm glad that you decided to come here first to see Daring Do since she can take care of the Zora eggs, but I was thinking that maybe you should have informed Coloratura that we you managed to rescue them from the Pirate's Fortress."

" You said that we needed to speak to Snails again." I said.

" While that is true, you also need to inform Coloratura about your success."

" I've been thinking about something."

" What's that?"

I wasn't going to tell her my thoughts on fighting other people that I knew in this world. Besides, I had a feeling she was going to give me a lecture about that soon enough the next time we had a free moment. Instead, I gave her an entirely different thought based on knowing what we needed to get from Snails. " Even though we need the sea horse he has in order to reach this Pinnacle Rock, do you have any idea where it even is?"

" Hmmm... I hadn't thought about that."

" That's the other reason why I came here."

" I'm not sure I follow."

I then pointed up at Pinkie Pie. " If anyone can tell us where to find that place then it's definitely Pinkie."

Princess Twilight then blushed slightly before coming to her own realization. " You'll need to be specific when it comes to asking Pinkie a question especially since by this point we know just about everything regarding Great Bay."

Everything apart from the location of Pinnacle Rock. Since the sea horse came from there, it most likely knew how to get through there as opposed to reaching it. No wonder it was captured so easily by Snails as it had no idea how to return home, and there's no telling how much time has passed since then. I had to get there before Derpy in any case otherwise I'd have to go back to the Pirate's Fortress, and I doubted they would give me a warm reception given what I did there.

Climbing up the ladder onto the upper platform, I opened the door and entered the Oceanside Laboratory. The interior seemed different than before and I could immediately tell that it was due to having come here much sooner. On my last visit, things were a mess but this time everything was where it was supposed to be, making the lab a proper facility. Standing next to the giant tank of water was Daring Do yet she didn't seem quite as stressed out as before. I could understand that as she had been waiting for three days without any word coming from Zora Hall, but now things were about to change since I had several of the eggs.

Daring Do began talking to herself. " They're late! What are those Zoras doing? It shouldn't have taken them this long to make such a simple delivery, but I suppose that's what happens when you're fixated on that pointless music instead of more important things such as research. If they don't hurry, the eggs will die, and that would be an absolute tragedy since they've never had such an unusual birth like this in generations. I can only wait so long before I lose my patience."

I looked at Princess Twilight who responded by shrugging her shoulders, and I countered by rolling my eyes. Her Highness valued research above most other things and my assumption was that she was seeing herself in the form of Daring Do. While I considered knowledge to be important, even I knew that there was more to life than having your nose stuffed into a book.

There was no point in dawdling any longer so I coughed to signal my presence. " Ahem..."

Daring Do looked up at me. " Huh? Oh, you finally came? Hmmm? Mikau? There's something different about you? Have you lost some weight? You seem to be much more flexible than the last time I saw you back when you held that concert out on the beach celebrating Evan's birthday."

I had to come up with something to explain why I looked different. " I've been exercising."

" At least it's a better form of production as opposed to exercising fighting pirates."

" Everyone has been saying how I've lost weight." I said. At least no one had figured out that I was a female Zora as opposed to Thunderlane having been male--the scales covering my breasts was an obvious give away.

" Fair enough." Daring Do said. " Now, I've been waiting for you patiently but you should know better than to keep me anxious. What about the eggs? Did you manage to bring them here? There are a total of seven eggs according to what Evan mentioned to me through her message, so hurry up and put them into that aquarium." I looked away from her for a brief moment yet it was enough for her to figure out that something was wrong. " You did bring them, didn't you? I hope this isn't some kind of prank you're pulling, Mikau. I've already reached my limit so you had better not..."

" There was a problem."

" What kind of problem?"

" A couple of nights ago, the Gerudo Pirates snuck into Zora Hall via an underground passage and stole all of the eggs."

Daring Do's jaw dropped. " What!? This is a catastrophy Why didn't Evan warn me about this!? If I had known that something like this had happened, I would have asked for assistance from the militia over in Clock Town since they're not doing anything right now."

" She didn't want to let anyone outside of the band to know something was wrong."

" What!? Such foolishness!" Daring Do shouted. She looked like she was about to smash something out of sheer anger, but she quickly started to pound her chest as a means of calming herself down. " I can't believe that Evan would be so stubborn by choosing such an idiotic action. Well, I suppose you ought to get to the Pirate's Fortress and rescue those eggs before they die from being in inadequate water. Those pirates probably just chucked them into some aquariums without even thinking about what might happen."

I then took out the four bottles. " Actually, I was there recently and managed to rescue these."

Daring Do's face lit up. " You brought four of the eggs!? No wonder Evan says that you're the only one among the Zora who can hold his own against those pirates, yet why do you only have four? There are supposed to be seven altogether as I said earlier. Where are the other three?"

" The pirates only brought four eggs into their fortress." I answered. " They lost the other three at a place called Pinnacle Rock."

" What!?"

" I'm heading there right away."

" Pinnacle Rock is a dangerous place due to the unagi." Daring Do said. " They are large underwater serpents who are very territorial and won't hesitate in attacking anything that enters their domain. If you're going there, Mikau, you should bring along some magic as your usual moves won't work. I also recommend you enlist the services of the sea horses who live in that part of the ocean. Only they know the direct route through some treacherous waters that lie before Pinnacle Rock, but you'll be hard pressed to find one given they are rarely seen."

" The fisherman has one."

" Him!?" Daring Do exclaimed. " Well, I must say that I am surprised that he would have a sea horse, but then he's lived here longer than most including the Zoras. If he does have a sea horse, then you need to get it from him otherwise those remaining eggs will get eaten by the unagi. Before you go, Mikau, put the eggs you did bring with you into that tank so that they can adapt to the temperature. You don't have to worry about them as I'll take great care of them."

Daring Do then pointed to a ladder situated to my right that connected to the top of the tank. Picking up the bottles and putting them behind my back, I walked over to the ladder, climbed up, and walked forward until I saw what needed to be done to place the eggs safely inside. The top had been fitted with iron bars so as to allow something that was small enough to fall in-between whilst preventing a much larger object from passing through. I took out a bottle, uncorked it, and began shaking it until the egg fell out, splashed into the water, and dropped to the bottom of the tank.

I then repeated this process with the other three eggs until they were all secure. I thought it was adorable seeing them all huddled together especially after what they had been through since being taken away, but I knew there was no time to reminisce since I still needed the remaining three eggs.

Jumping down to the floor below--I didn't buckle my knees this time--I walked outside and was about to jump into the water when I remembered that I needed to speak with Pinkie about the location of Pinnacle Rock. While it was obvious that I needed to change back into a human, I figured I would try to bring her down by using my fins to pop her balloon. Looking up at where Pinkie was floating about, I aimed my fins and fired them only for them to miss her by a large margin--she was much higher than I thought. They returned, attaching to my arms leaving me feeling dejected.

" That didn't work." I said sighing.

" Guess you'll have to become a human after all, and I here I suggested you to remain as a Zora." Twilight said.

" It's fine, Twilight."

" Still, I thought your fins would've made it."

I nodded. " Pinkie was just a bit too high for them to reach." Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask, turning back into a human, and flipped my hair back once again--I don't know why this had become a trend--before taking out the Hero's Bow and aiming up at Pinkie again. " It feels weird that I'm treating her like she was a target even when I'm only aiming for that balloon of hers."

" She uses it to survey the area as that's how she draws her maps."

" Yeah, I guess that's true." I said. Notching the bow with an arrow and letting it fly, it sailed upwards and popped Pinkie's balloon. At first she hadn't noticed that she was now standing in the air--though in her case it was probably natural since she defied reality on a whim--but when she did, she yelled and dropped down to the ground, her legs buckling upon impact leaving her feeling rather annoyed.

" Who popped Tingle's balloon?" Pinkie Pie asked. " I fell down quite a ways this time and almost broke my legs."

" Um... I did."

" Why do people keep doing that to Tingle? Is it because they see Tingle as being weird for using a balloon? Ha! They must be jealous because they can't experience the same thing for themselves, and wish to deny me the privilege of being able to soar with the birds while I work on making maps to help my father." Pinkie Pie said. She then turned to face me upon realizing that I was the one who popped her balloon. " You popped Tingle's balloon?" She then gasped loudly before staring at me. " What's this? Green clothes? White fairy? Madam! Are you perchance... a forest fairy."

Once again, she asked me the same question, yet I couldn't fault her for it as she didn't remember me. I had to respond in my usual manner. " Yes, I'm from the forest although you're probably wondering what I'm doing out here near the ocean?"

" Tingle likes guessing games."

" I wasn't inciting that."

" In that case you're probably here because you want to find out about something that's important to your quest, but you have no idea where to go so you need to rely on the likes of me to help you find an answer." Pinkie Pie said. She never ceased to amaze me over how she kept on figuring things out without even having any prior knowledge. Either she possessed a powerful sixth sense or she was incredibly lucky. Pinkie then continued. " Information is what Tingle has to offer you Mrs. Fairy yet this usually comes with the purchase of one of my maps." I had a feeling there would be a catch.

" Um... I already have the map of Great Bay."

Pinkie Pie was surprised. " Really? You already have Tingle's map? But, Tingle has never met you before in her entire life so how it that possible?" She folded her arms and appeared to go into what could only be described as a thinking pose, punching herself in the forehead every few seconds, much to my displeasure. I didn't want Pinkie to give herself a serious injury on my account so just I started reached out towards her only for her to suddenly perk up. " Tingle knows why you already have her map and it couldn't be more obvious. You must have used your fairy magic to acquire one from me long ago."

I almost did a face-plant on the ground. " Yes, that's exactly what I did." That could have gone a lot better than I wanted.

" You truly are special, Mrs. Fairy, so Tingle shall give you information in return."

" Thank you."

" Let's see..." Pinkie Pie said, pulling out a scroll from behind her back. At least I wasn't the only one who could do that. " Do you need information regarding the Zoras? I've got plenty of information about them or maybe you need to know about the Pirate's Fortress, home of the Gerudo? Ooh, that's pretty scary and no place for a forest fairy so how about I tell you something about a place called Pinnacle Rock?"

" That one!" I shouted.

Pinkie Pie smiled. " Pinnacle Rock it is! Most people have only heard about it yet very few have ever managed to get there. Tingle learned from the Zoras that the waters that surround the rocks are murky and anyone who tries to navigate through them will only end up back at the start. It seems the only ones who can easily find their way there are sea horses, yet they are rarely seen because people kept on selling them for money."

" Really?"

" Tingle never lies." Pinkie Pie answered. " If you want to go to Pinnacle Rock, you need a sea horse as they know that place like it was their own backyard. I heard that the local fisherman who lives on the beach recently captured a sea horse and plans on selling it to someone he knows in Clock Town, but he may be willing to trade it to someone who can help satisfy a strange obsession that he has."

" The pirates?"

Pinkie Pie gasped. " You knew exactly what I was about to say! You're a psychic, Mrs. Fairy."

" I need to see him about that sea horse."

" Unless you have what he wants, he won't budge."

" I think I can make him come around."

" Well, Tingle knows that you will succeed, Mrs. Fairy." Pinkie Pie said. " I do have one last piece of information about Pinnacle Rock, and it involves some strange snake-like creatures that thrive there. They love to eat anything that comes directly in front of their sight, but they don't like being hit on their sides as they can't properly defend themselves from a side-attack. What does it mean for you, Mrs. Fairy? Tingle doesn't know but maybe you should tell the Zoras about it."

Little did Pinkie know that her information was going to be incredibly useful to me. After all, I could transform into a Zora, thanks to my mask, and it sounded like being one was going to be essential in order to navigate my way to Pinnacle Rock and defeat the unagi that were no guarding the remaining eggs. Before I head on over to Pinnacle Rock, replenishing my magic wouldn't be a bad idea as it sounded like I needed plenty to overcome what was awaiting me.

That's when I realized that Pinkie told me everything I needed to know about Pinnacle Rock... except where it actually was. I slapped my forehead knowing that I was about to leave and head on over to Snails' place without this vital piece of information.

" Where do I find Pinnacle Rock?"

" Huh? Did Tingle not tell you?"

I shook my head. " No, you did not."

Pinkie Pie then started to laugh. " I am so sorry, Mrs. Fairy. Tingle usually doesn't forget this kind of thing but I guess I was in the moment too much to have realized that I hadn't given you the answer you wanted. If you want to find it, just head west of the Pirates Fortress until you see a pair of rock spires sticking upwards out of the ocean." My reaction to what she said was one of utter shock that it was so close. " That's the same look I'm surprised those pirates don't express since they should know that Pinnacle Rock is practically next door."

" Unbelievable."

" Tingle has no more information for you, Mrs. Fairy but perhaps you will buy a map next time?" Pinkie Pie asked. " I've got to get back to making my maps otherwise my father will never keep his business afloat. I hope you'll call again. Tingle-Tingle, Kooloo-Limpah! These are the magic words that Tingle created herself. Don't steal them."

Without saying another word, Pinkie put away the scroll she had been using, and inflated herself a new balloon that lifted her up into the sky. Despite gaining some useful information about what was coming up, I looked at Princess Twilight with a frowned expression on my face, and she responded in kind since that was perhaps our most unusual encounter so far with Pinkie though it couldn't compare to some of her more unusual statements that she often spouted off back home.

Oh well...

Since I knew that I needed to be a Zora from this point onward, I took out the Zora Mask, placed it on my face, and rather than squat down, I chose to jump into the water since I needed to swim across the water anyway in order to reach the shore and Snail's residence.

Upon splashing into the water while watching my various body parts change shape, I popped my head up from below the surface several moments later having finished with my transformation, and began swimming towards the shore. Luckily there were no monsters nearby so it was a remarkably peaceful swim though the sound of cuccos suddenly echoed all around me indicating that dawn had finally come.

Dawn of the Second Day - 48 Hours remain.

I was actually making good progress as all I needed to do was rescue the remaining three Zora eggs, return them to Daring Do, and enter the temple. It sounded simple enough but then there almost always was something else at play that I needed to figure out. The previous two temples required me to learn a special song that was needed to gain access to each one so it wouldn't surprise me that I'd learn another for this one.

The next question would be where would I need to go in order to play it. No one had given me any clues on how I was supposed to reach the temple so that meant I was once again going around blind. It was becoming the story of my life where I would need to figure out even the most basic of things. Personally, I was much more comfortable having someone who could give me the directions I needed, yet Princess Twilight was just as confused as I was. She was only able to provide me with any help thanks to utilizing the memories of the character she was portraying, Tatl the Fairy.

If not for that then I'd have been stuck at the very beginning and this world would have been destroyed by now. It seemed that while my previous journey revolved around fighting my way through hordes of monsters, this one revolved around figuring out how things worked and when they needed to be implemented for my success. Good thing that I was one of the smartest students Canterlot High had ever known--Twilight Sparkle was now my equal if not more--otherwise much of this would have left me confused.

A few minutes later, I finally reached the shore and climbed out only to suddenly be attacked by a Leever--I had forgotten all about them since I had been dealing with pirates for the last little while. Fortunately, it moved--or whatever constituted as movement for it--past me before going back down under the sand. Rather than run over to Snails's residence, I opted to walk over there instead--my body was beginning to feel exhausted since it had been a while since I last had some sleep.

" You look like you're ready to collapse." Twilight said.

" I've done a lot already during this cycle."

" I know this will be difficult for you, Sunset, but you need some sleep and soon."

" You'll hear no argument from me about that."

Princess Twilight was surprised. " What? You'll actually get some rest?"

I nodded my head. " I need to be fully rested before going into the temple, but I can't do it until I rescue the remaining Zora eggs. I don't know how long my body can last until my brains says enough is enough, but I'll keep going as long as possible."

" Sunset..."

" Those eggs won't survive where they are, Twilight." I said. Since I'm likely to sleep for roughly eight hours, they may not last that long unless Derpy was able to get them safely out of their current environment."

" Then let's hope your body doesn't give out."

That was my hope as well. Reaching Snails' house and walking inside, I could see that nothing had changed apart from Snails looking at what appeared to be a book that had an image of a rupee on the cover. I had no idea what he was planning on doing though it wasn't really my place. Besides, I came here to get the sea horse that was still trapped inside of the fish bowl he had placed it in, and getting it involved giving him what he wanted. Inching my way over to the sea horse, it suddenly called out to me again like before.

" Help me... Please, take me back to the waters near Pinnacle Rock..."

" You came back." Snails said upon hearing the noise of the sea horse. " I honestly wasn't expecting you to have survived in the Pirate's Fortress, but here you are having gone and proven otherwise by standing next to that sea horse."

" It took a lot longer than I thought." I said.

Snails shrugged off my comment. " In any case, welcome back to my humble abode." He then noticed something dangling on the side of my pants and his eyes opened wide as a result followed by him struggling to speak coherently. " Oh! That's my Hookshot that the pirates stole! I recognize it from anywhere!" I looked down to see that it was hanging onto my pants, and I felt embarrassed in addition to surprised as I couldn't use it in my current body. " To be honest with you, I was having doubts that you had entered their fortress, but what you have there is all the proof I need."

" Um... You're welcome?"

" If you managed to sneak into their fortress, does it mean you managed to take a photo of one of the pirates?"

I nodded my head. " I wasn't about to forget it."

" I'm hoping that you got a clear image of her face."

" You never mentioned that before."

" Guess I forgot to mention it to you at the time." Snails said. " While I don't mind what kind of photo you took, the most important thing is the face. With pictographs, the sepia tone conveys a lot more emotion than colour. Before when people used to use basic photography, the results were poor black and white stills that lacked any kind of detail. It goes to show you how far we've come along since those early days."

I shrugged my shoulders. " Yes, I suppose so." I took out the Pictograph Box, and began to fiddle about with it in hopes of pulling out the photo he wanted me to take. Part of me had hoped that the photo would have been of Rainbow Dash--she loved having her picture taken as she said it made her even more awesome--but sadly all I could do was get Snails a photo of a regular pirate. Hopefully, that was enough to make him satisfied. Eventually, I managed to get the photo out of the box before presenting it to him. " Will this suffice as a worthy enough replacement for what you currently have?"

" Oh! That's it! That's it! I had a picture like that." Snails answered. His expression changed to one of sheer pleasure though for a moment I thought he was going to act all perverted since he was serious about me giving him a photo of one of the pirates. " Well, aren't you a crafty one? Considering how up close the face is, it's like you were practically standing in front of her when you took this. The quality is absolutely stunning beyond compare. I won't question how you managed to pull it off as I'm sure that's a secret, but you'll give that to me, won't you?"

I nodded my head. " A promise is a promise."

" Thank you." Snails said. I handed over the photo and he immediately placed into the book he was reading. " I'll be sure to hang it up on my wall later and store the old one away for sentimental reasons. You may take that sea horse now though please leave that fish bowl behind."

I was going to question his sense of ethics, but ultimately decided against it since he seemed to be more interested in reading his book--I thought of asking him about it as well but again rejected that idea--but at least he was happy, the same thing with the sea horse. No doubt it wanted me to take it back home to Pinnacle Rock as soon as possible--an obvious sign was it banging its head against the fish bowl--so taking out one of my now empty bottles, I carefully scooped the sea horse up before corking the bottle again.

It really was beautiful in appearance and reminded me of similar creatures that existed beneath the ocean waves of Equestria. The instant I lifted my bottle out of the fish bowl, it suddenly began talking to me again.

" Thank you. I apologize that you had to go through such an ordeal."

" It was worth it if it meant freeing you."

" Hurry! Take me back to the waters near Pinnacle Rock..."

" I was heading there anyway to pick up something important."

That made the sea horse smile in a way that made me suspicious of what its true motives were, but I wasn't in any position to think about it since the three remaining Zora eggs were my main priority. Thanking Snails, I began to leave though before I walked out of his home, he said something about preparing a little activity on a nearby island when the waters had changed back to normal. I had no idea what he had in mind yet it piqued my curiosity.

Back outside, I turned to the left and could see the Pirate's Fortress just barely appearing out from behind the cliffs. According to Pinkie, Pinnacle Rock was situated to the west via two spires that jutted up from down below. I immediately jumped into the water and began swimming as fast as my legs could muster since Derpy had most likely gotten there by now since she had a head-start on me. I knew that swimming fast would exhaust my body even quicker than I wanted, yet I had no other choice as those eggs could get eaten at any moment, and all of them were needed according to Daring Do.

Once again, no monsters attacked me along the way--I'd have avoided them if they had attacked--and soon I found myself staring at the two spires in question. You'd think I would've noticed these before when I was here earlier but I supposed my focus was on the Pirate's Fortress. Bubbles forming nearby indicated that a Zora was most likely there doing something random yet I was fixated on the wooden floating near one of the spires. Sitting in it was Derpy herself--she was very easy to recognize because of her crossed eyes--and appeared to be having some problems.

Even though she was an enemy, I decided to swim up to her just to see if I could learn anything from her. Rainbow Dash did say that Derpy was her second-in-command so she was privy to some certain bits of information other pirates didn't know.

I swam up to her boat and knocked on the side. " Hello there."

Derpy was so surprised that she almost fell off the boat. " Huh? A Zora? What are you doing here?"

" I wanted to return this sea horse to Pinnacle Rock."

" That's funny. I was told by Aveil to go there and pick up something."

" What was it?"

" Something that I accidentally dropped when I brought a small team here by accident." Derpy answered. " I just don't know what went wrong. The tunnel we dug was supposed to have taken us straight to the fortress, and I somehow lead us here by taking a different tunnel that happened to have been there already. Giant snakes surprised us and I dropped our precious cargo before fleeing."

" How do you do it?"

Derpy looked at me with a confused look. " Do what?"

" How do you end up causing unfortunate mishaps?"

" Aveil has been asking me that same question many times over the years." Derpy answered. " I can't explain why things always end up bad for me but I just shrug them off and continue on despite knowing my comrades get sick and tired of it." That's when she finally put two and two together by realizing who she was talking to. " Oh! You're the Zora who snuck into our fortress and rescued someone was also managed to sneak inside. I think I may have told you something I shouldn't have. Oops, my bad!" She then tried reaching out for what I assumed was her sword only for her to look dejected. " My sword... It isn't in my scabbard. I... I think I dropped it back at Zora Hall."

I rolled my eyes. " Unbelievable."

" Um... This got awkward. I tried rowing into Pinnacle Rock but I keep on ending up back here."

" How come?"

Derpy scratched her head. " Aveil said that without a sea horse, trying to navigate your way through the murky maze is impossible. I don't have a sea horse so I need to get one and get those eggs before you managed to get them. But... I forgot which way the fortress is so I think I'm stuck here. I would ask you for help but you're one of the Zoras. Um... I'll think of something soon enough."

It was pretty obvious at this point that Derpy wasn't going to be much of an issue. Still, I felt bad that she was struggling given how often she experienced mishaps that usually weren't her own doing. I wanted to help her by showing her the way back but I knew she wouldn't accept my offer. No, my only option was to swim into Pinnacle Rock and hope she eventually gets back to where she belonged.

Swimming past Derpy and in-between the two spires, I entered another part of the ocean that seemed relatively calm. Ahead of me was a series of six spires jutting out from beneath the ocean that was no doubt Pinnacle Rock, yet it was the relative calm that bothered me. I knew those sea snakes lived near by so why did I feel like I wasn't ready to go through with this despite what I've already been through so far? Did this place have a powerful presence that struck fear into my heart? I hoped not otherwise those eggs were as good as eaten by those snakes.

I swam forward only for something to pull me down below to the bottom where I saw several signs scattered about. Who could have put those there? It wasn't just a question but rather a curiosity since I assumed no one came here without a sea horse. Speaking of which, at that precise moment, the sea horse began crying inside my bottle as though it wanted me to set it free right away. It was back home now so there was no reason to keep it bottled up any longer.

Taking out the bottle, I uncorked it, turned it upside down, and shook it for several moments until it came out where it turned out to be a lot bigger than I thought. Was it capable of changing its size on a whim?

" You have strange powers, Sunset Shimmer." The sea horse said.

I gasped. " How do you know my name?"

The sea horse answered. " There is much we sea horses know about the ocean, but that isn't important right now. I have a request for you. Please follow me. Make sure you don't fall behind otherwise you will become lost within these waters."

" What would happen?"

" You must stay close behind without making any missteps. The water that surrounds Pinnacle Rock is murky and is filled with a strange darkness that causes any who swim into it to end up returning to where they started." The sea horse answered.

" Is that what happened with Derpy?"

" Yes." The sea horse answered. " That pirate attempted to reach Pinnacle Rock without one of my kind to show her the way, and so she wound up back where she started, lost and confused which is most unfortunate, but you now know the truth. Without one of us, there is no chance of making it there. If you try to go beyond Pinnacle Rock, you'll get lost in the murky water, and while you are likely to return to where you started, you could end up experiencing a terrible fate."

I slapped my forehead. This scenario reminded me of what happened during my previous journey. There was an area between the Gerudo's Fortress and the deepest recesses of the desert where I had to navigate my way through by using an unusual guide. This was because the area in question had a permanent sandstorm brewing about that would cause any who dared to attempt the crossing become lost unless they knew the solution--they would end up back where they started unless they were really unlucky. I should have realized Termina would reuse some assets from Hyrule since this world was supposedly similar in some ways.

Sighing, I began to follow the sea horse who immediately began changing directions every now and again despite there being signs pointing the way. Perhaps they were designed to confuse any who tried coming here thinking they could get through without a sea horse. In any case, I opted to follow by walking instead of swimming in case I accidentally got out in front of the sea horse. It remained relatively quiet yet it seemed determined to make it through to Pinnacle Rock no matter what. I was also concerned by what it said about a request before it started to move.

As I continued following along and ignoring the signs, I could see the murkiness within the water begin to surround me. The sea horse felt no problems though I was struggling not to freak out because the murk would get awfully close as times like it was trying to grab me. No wonder it was so quiet. It suddenly turned around and started going back the other way, my response involved moaning to myself, yet I followed along anyway.

Then it started going back to the start only to stop halfway and then turn towards the right path. What in the world was this sea horse doing? I could understand wanting to take a specific path to Pinnacle Rock but why did it involve such pointless complication?

Eventually, the sea horse turned left and stopped in front of a slope that went upwards. " I am sorry that took a lot longer than you wanted, Sunset Shimmer, but it was necessary to follow that precise route otherwise you would have been forced back to the beginning. Other than us sea horses, the sea snakes who live here in Pinnacle Rock are also capable of navigating their way through the murky water. Right now they are resting in a deep chasm that lies beyond this point, but you should be able to avoid them by keeping your distance."

" Those snakes have acquired three Zora eggs."

" I know."

" Then you must know that I need to get them before it's too late." I said. " Those eggs are the key to saving all of Great Bay and that means I must destroy those sea snakes even if it means losing my life in the process."

" I am fortunate then that you wish to defeat them."

" Does this have to do with that request you mentioned earlier?"

The sea horse made a noise indicating yes. " As you no doubt know, Sunset Shimmer, the depths of Pinnacle Rock are home to dangerous sea snakes, and my friend is trapped down there amongst them. Sunset Shimmer, can you please find a way to rid the area of all the sea snakes and help my friend?"

I nodded my head. " I would have done it anyway regardless of the eggs.

While I thought it was a little underhanded that the sea horse didn't tell me what it wanted until we reached Pinnacle Rock, I could understand why it did this. It was worried about its friend and couldn't think of anything else so waiting for me to answer its request would have meant wasting precious time. Still, the little creature needed me to rescue one of its own by defeating all of the sea snakes.

Granted, I wasn't really sure what to expect since I didn't hear much in the way of a description. I knew that they were giant and were capable of eating just about anything that entered their territory. They also didn't like being attacked on their sides according to Pinkie, and magic was the key since my regular Zora skills would prove useless. My magic power had been drained mainly from defending myself against the Skullfish when the Gerudo Pirates decided to flood that area of their fortress, so I needed to find some jars to replenish what I lost otherwise I could run out at the worst moment.

Fortunately, I didn't have to look very far. Several jars had been lined up on either side of the slope so I walked up and began smashing each one by using my fins--picking them up and throwing them into the wall could have meant possibly losing them. All but the last two contained magic jars--small ones--so I had to make do before walking off the edge and down into the chasm below.

" I hope that's enough magic power, Sunset." Twilight said.

" If it isn't then I'll have to go back for more."

" That would take too long and your body could collapse at any moment." Twilight said. " No, you'll just have to find another means of defeating these sea snakes. On a completely different note, I'm actually fascinated in seeing what these creatures look like from a research perspective. There are giant seasnakes residing in the waters of Equestria, yet I've
never had a chance to properly study them what with my princess duties getting in the way."

I rolled my eyes. " Only you would want to study them."

" What can I say? It's a habit."

" I'm not sure if these ones will appreciate you wanting to study them."

Princess Twilight sighed. " You're right, Sunset. We should focus on defeating them and rescuing both the eggs and the sea horse's friend. I wonder when we'll know we're approaching the territory of one of those snakes?" A loud roar suddenly vibrated throughout the chasm sending chills down our spines. " Guess that answers my question."

" We're approaching a large hole."

" Be careful."

I swam forward slightly in hopes of luring out the sea snake yet I wasn't prepared for what happened next. A large something darted out from the hole and my only thought was trying to avoid two rows of incredibly sharp teeth. Luckily, I was fast enough to swim out of the way though my entire body froze afterwards upon seeing just how big it was. While the sharp teeth, googly eyes, and intimidating presence were something, I also noticed that its sides appeared soft what with veins protruding on either side. Before I could make a move, it began to clamp down using its teeth a few times before going back into its hole.

" Did you..."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I most certainly did, Sunset. They weren't kidding when they said that these sea snakes were huge and you have to find some way of beating them while avoid being eaten."

" I have to lure it out."

" That's what I'm afraid of."

I was afraid of doing it too but there was no other choice. Swimming forward slightly, the sea snake darted its head out again and I immediately used my magical barrier just as its mouth clamped down on me--I wasn't fast enough to avoid it this time--though I did cause it to back away when my barrier gave it some discomfort. It then lurched forward in hopes of getting a second chance to bite my head yet I swam to the right much faster than usual, and attacked it in the side causing considerable pain. As the sea snake retreated, I turned off my barrier and took the time to try and figure out how my speed increased.

My speed seemed to increase when I used my magic so could it be used in that fashion? Maybe, but then it would drain my magic power relatively quickly and I needed as much
of it as possible since my true magic was currently unavailable to me.

There was no time to put my theory to the test as the sea snake emerged once again from its hole in the wall to attack me. I swam to the right only to find my leg suddenly getting caught between its teeth. Why did I go and stop using my magic barrier. The pain I felt on my leg was almost unbearable as the snake's teeth began crushing it under its weight. Closing my eyes and concentrating, my barrier reappeared though the snake wasn't letting go of me.

It began swinging its head from side to side in hopes I would tire myself out or it would tear my leg off, yet I continued maintaining my barrier until it finally let go though it began licking up the red coloured water that resulted when blood trickled from my leg thanks to my wound. The sea snake reared back slightly before coming at me once again so I swam to the right, crashed into the side of its body which was enough to defeat it, and it shriveled up before disappearing, a shocked expression appearing on its face. I began breathing heavily knowing how difficult that was, yet I knew I still had more sea snakes waiting further below.

" Are you alright, Sunset?"

" That could have gone better."

" Your leg is bleeding."

" I know and I don't have any potions to deal with it right now."

" Let's hope that the smell of blood doesn't attract the other sea snakes." Twilight said. " Because if they smell it and decide to investigate, there is no way you'll be able to take them all on at the same time."

Her Highness was unfortunately right. My wound could attract the other sea snakes to my location and that would no doubt bring about my death. Unless I can find some hearts to restore my health and fix me up, I could be attacked at any moment. That's when I noticed something where the sea snake once resided. I couldn't see what it was from so far away yet I needed to see what it was as my life currently depended on it.

Chapter 41: Mechanized Temple

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
January 16, 2017
Chapter 41: Mechanized Temple.

Despite not getting my leg chewed off by that giant sea snake, it still managed to cut pretty deep resulting in a wound that was trickling blood. While the wound wasn't anything special, the fact that I had one meant the other snakes lying further down below could sense my approach. My blood was dissipating into the ocean yet it wasn't enough to mask my scent which no doubt was enticing them. Had I been wise enough to bring along a potion before coming here, I could have consumed it, healed my wound, and continued downward without them noticing my approach.

Instead, I had to be cautious as there was no telling as to when they would come at me looking for their next meal. One giant snake proved to be quite the challenge yet several of them coming all at once would prove too much for me. They may not take much punishment before being defeated, but my magic was limited so unless I could collect any magic jars in addition to some hearts, I was playing a conservative battle.

Princess Twilight then reminded me of the glowing object that appeared in the hole the giant sea snake had claimed as its territory. I didn't know what it could be but my gut instinct was telling me to swim over to it in case it was one of the remaining three Zora eggs. As soon as I began to swim however, a sharp pain then struck me and I didn't need to figure out what had caused it. Looking down at my injured leg, I suddenly remembered that I had been using it to give me a strong push whenever I swam. With it currently injured, I had to rely on using my arms and moving a lot slower.

Sighing under my breath, I began to propel myself forward using my arms--it was pretty embarrassing--looking down below me every few seconds to make sure that nothing was coming up from below. The occasional sounds of growling beasts worried me to no end and I feared what could happen were they to take advantage of my condition, yet I had to keep going as the lives of innocent creatures were at stake.

Landing on the ground inside of the hole several minutes later--wincing in pain when my injured leg hit the floor--I walked forward until I could see what had been making the glow earlier, and it turned out to be an egg though it looked even worse than the ones I rescued inside the Pirate's Fortress. To be honest, I actually didn't think this and the other two eggs would survive given how large those snakes were, but seeing this one despite its current condition felt like a miracle had occurred. My eyes then noticed a few pots which made me wonder how they even got down here in the first place.

My instincts told me to smash the pots before anything else, so I did only to not receive any hearts or magic jars. Instead, all I got were a few rupees that weren't really going to be all that useful in this current situation. Perhaps I could find more pots further down in the other caves? Walking back to the egg and taking out an empty bottle, another realization dawned on me. Two more were left to find and that meant only two snakes had them. There was no need to beat all of them yet I had no idea which ones had the eggs in their lairs. It would come down to a guessing game.

" Twilight..." I began. " Judging from the sounds we heard coming from below... How many snakes do you think there are?"

" That's a tough one for me to answer, Sunset." Twilight answered.

" Do you have a rough estimate?"

" I'd say about five more remain."

" So only two of them have the other eggs."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, and since we have no idea which ones are holding them, you'll have to defeat all of them in order to figure it out. Besides, you need to do that anyway in order to rescue that sea horse's friend.

I slapped my forehead. I had completely forgotten all about what the sea horse requested of me when we got here. Crap! Now I have to defeat all of them otherwise I would be breaking a promise and that's something I've no intention of doing.

Well... I wasn't really surprised that this turned out to be the case. I've already experienced incredible hardship in this area of Termina so it made sense that there would be more coming my way and would likely remain as such until the giant had been freed from its imprisonment. I knew my journey wasn't meant to be easy since Ganondorf was insistent on me suffering until I finally cracked under so much pressure, yet sometimes I wished that I could have some easy challenge that didn't place my life in peril. No... I supposed I couldn't wish for that since there was no such thing as an easy ride.

Using my hands, I gently scooped up the egg into my bottle, corked it, and placed it behind my back before walking over to the edge of the hole. Peering down into the dark depths, I couldn't see anything though those loud sounds coming from below made my heart beat faster than usual. Looking down at my leg, I cursed myself for not bringing along a potion. Knowing there was nothing that could be done about it, I sighed and walked off the edge, floating slowly downward into the depths.

The noises continued to resonate down below yet I couldn't let them psyche me out--my shivering body was suggesting I was afraid--otherwise the other two Zora eggs would likely get eaten and I'd have no choice but to reset time and go through all this again.

" I'm not liking this, Twilight."

" I know it's scary, Sunset, but you can't stop now."

" Who knows where those sea snakes are down here."

" Yes." Princess Twilight said. " Until we're practically on top of them, we'll have to watch our descent carefully. I suggest staying close to the walls though that may not work since we could be dropping right in front of one of those holes."

" Not helping!" I moaned. The instant I said that, something massive shot out right beside me, and I pressed my back up against the wall as a reactionary measure. My eyes opened wide with shock upon seeing a sea snake had come out mere centimetres from where I was floating, my heart beating like a jackhammer. Had I been just a smidge closer, I'd have been eaten for sure and would be dead. " This... This is too much for me! I can't go down further if that becomes consistent."

" Calm down."

" At least you're small enough!" I shouted. " I'm a big target for those things!"

" Provided they can get you in their sights."

" What does that even mean?"

" Take a look at what it's doing." Twilight answered. I looked forward and could see the lengthy body of the sea snake, its pulsating veins making me want to throw up, yet it seemed to have problems. If I didn't know any better, it appeared it was having trouble turning its head around. I mean, it could though not very well. " I think we just discovered a big weakness with these snakes, Sunset."

I blinked several times. " Want to fill me in here?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " If you're situated behind them like we are now, they can't attack you due to not being able to turn their heads around that far. Of course, you still need to get them to come out as they could still clamp down on you should you stick too close to the walls. I think this will require playing a game of cat and mouse though the stakes are obviously much higher."

Again, Her Highness wasn't helping though I understood what she was saying. Unfortunately, my injured leg meant that I couldn't swim very fast and I needed to if I was going to lure out this snake once it retreated back into its hole. That's when I thought about using my fins. If I could fire them out as far as possible, it might be enough to get the snake interested in checking it out. Yet, I sensed that it wasn't idiotic and so required some incentive.

That's when I realized I needed to coat my fins with my own blood so that the scent would bring it out. I threw up a little in my mouth knowing that I had to resort to using my own blood in such a horrific manner, yet it was that or risk swimming out there with my injured leg hampering me. Moving my leg out in front of me and shaking it slightly, blood began seeping from it and before it could dissipate, I plunged my arms into it, looking away due to not wanting to see what I was resorting to. No doubt this was the most humiliating and disgusting thing I had ever done in my entire life bar none.

Aiming my fins and launching them, the scent was enough for the snake to lurch forward in an attempt to investigate. When they came back to me moments later, I used my magic barrier and struck the snake in its vulnerable body a couple of times before it disappeared much like the first one had. I resisted throwing up because of the smell my fins were giving off due to my blood, yet when I looked into the hole it had occupied, there was nothing there.

" Well... At least that's another one gone."

" Sunset... Did you just do what I think you did?"

I nodded my head. " And what would you have done, Twilight? It's not like I had any other choice but to use my own blood to act as a distraction. Believe me, I'm trying my hardest not to throw up because that was disgusting beyond all measure."

" Being resourceful is fine but maybe try to find something less "unique" next time."

" It got the job done."

Princess Twilight sighed. " Yes, I suppose it did but I still stand by my words."

I wasn't trying to upset her or anything but I had nothing else on hand apart from my own blood. I really needed to get my hands on some recovery hearts as I didn't know how much longer she could cope with my actions and it would mean not giving off a scent. If Princess Twilight had been in my shoes, I was sure she would have done something similar due to being on the spot and facing certain death.

Floating downwards once again, I decided to move around the edge of the chasm in case there was another sea snake approaching. I should have stayed where I was as another one appeared moments later, its teeth just barely missing my feet. I pounded my chest to make sure my heart hadn't stopped beating--it was acting erratically--before looking down and seeing that this snake had lifted its head upwards because of smelling the blood. At least I knew where it was though I now had to approach from another direction if I wanted to attack its vulnerable body.

Inching to the left and watching the snake's head follow me along before it retreated back down, I continued inching over before floating down and stopping moments later when the sound of another snake echoed from somewhere in the darkness. In an instant, the one from below came up followed by one that had darted across the chasm though this one was no where near close to me though its intimidation was definitely taking its toll on me.

" This is getting ridiculous."

" Your wound combined with the blood on your fins is like a magnet."

" What can I do?"

" Deal with the one below you and then the one across." Twilight answered. " Don't try and take them both on or you could get blindsided."

I didn't know what was going to go first... my body, my heart, or my nerves, though at my current pace, my heart was on track to being the first. Moving the other way with my back against the wall, I floated down slowly in hopes of avoiding the snake, yet I tilted my face to the right just as it shot upward again--my scent must have lingered up there long enough for it to dart up like that. The strong breeze that resulted from when it shot past me almost made me lose my grip on the wall, yet I held on for dear life until it stopped moving before using my magic barrier to attack it--two hits was once again needed to prevail.

The instant it disappeared, I turned myself over so that my legs were dangling above me in an effort to see if there was anything inside of its lair that was worth picking up. Aside from a small treasure chest--how it even got down here was beyond me--and several pots, there were no signs of the other two Zora eggs. That meant the snake that lunged across was holding one or I needed to defeat the other snakes located further below.

After mulling it over for a few moments, I decided to swim down to the chest in hopes that either it or the pots would contain recovery hearts. Using my arms to pull myself along while checking to make sure nothing was coming from within the darkness, I reached my destination and chose to kick open the chest since it was the most obvious thing. Sadly, it contained a red rupee instead of a recovery heart, and while I wasn't upset about earning more money, I really needed that health now--nothing came from smashing the pots aside from a random Deku Nut of all things.

Sighing, I swam back out into the darkness and immediately turned right when the snake from across the chasm pierced through the darkness, its gaping mouth missing my head by a few inches which made me wonder just how long these things were. It darted back into its lair while I continued swimming in hopes of getting around to where its vulnerable body was, yet it came out from its hole all of a sudden and swallowed me whole without a moment's hesitation.

Princess Twilight screamed in terror. " Sunset!!!!"

" I'm okay." I answered from within the confines of the snake's mouth.

" You call that okay?"

" It looks like I'm a lot bigger than it thought since it can't seem to swallow me down its throat."

" Why are you acting so casually about this?"

" Guess I'm just relieved knowing that it can't swallow me whole." I answered. It then hit me when I quickly remembered what creatures of all kinds liked to do whenever they ate something that was too big for them to swallow. Knowing this, I began to pound the snake's teeth with my hands in hopes of getting it to spit me back out before those same teeth decided to grind me down into powder. It spat me out when it couldn't handle the pain I was giving it and I was covered from head to toe in drool that I shook off. My fists were slightly bruised from all the punching but at least I escaped. " I didn't enjoy that one bit!"

" Are you alright?"

I nodded slowly. " I'm just not fast enough with my leg all banged up."

Princess Twilight took a closer look at my leg. " Be glad that snake's teeth didn't cause further injury but I do see what you mean. While I would suggest using your magic barrier to propel yourself forward and give you a speed boost, you need that magic to defeat the remaining snakes. Guess you'll just have to grin and bear it until one of those recovery hearts comes along." Her Highness then began bopping me in the head repeatedly. " Never scare me like that again!"

" It wasn't really my fault."

" No, I suppose not." Twilight said. " That snake was a lot faster than even I thought. Still, you need to defeat it but be careful this time as I don't know if you'll have the strength to escape from its mouth again if it manages to catch you."

I knew Her Highness was upset and rightfully so, yet that wasn't the worst thing that had happened to me. I could tell her all kinds of things from my previous journey that were even worse than what I had just experienced, but I chose to keep such thoughts to myself. I didn't want to make her feel even worse than she already was.

Much like with the previous snake, the scent of my blood remained out there in the water's depths so when this snake lunged forward in hopes of getting to eat me again, I defeated it by striking its body using my magic barrier, revealing what looked to be another Zora egg within its domain. I considered using my magic to get me over there quickly but there was no way of knowing how much I had left--I'd be using quite a bit--so I swam over and switching to merely floating across so as to not make any motions that could attract the remaining snakes below.

Landing in the lair of the fourth snake, I took out another empty bottle, scooped the egg up into it, corked it, and placed it behind my back. Now there was only one more egg to go and the sea horse's friend before I could finally escape from this underwater nightmare.

Walking back to the edge and peering down, I began to think about how best to approach things. " If I were to swim down in the middle of this chasm, neither snake would be able to reach me but then there's no telling just how long their bodies are." I said to myself. " Plus, the thought of being attacked on two sides just freaks me out. I could simply float downup against the wall like I've been doing already but what if one suddenly blindsided me and I couldn't defend myself properly." I looked down at my leg and cursed under my breath. " My leg would also do me in if I get caught in a pincer maneuver."

Time was also of the essence. While I still had two more days to go before resetting time, I knew that the upcoming temple would take up much of it leaving me with little wiggle room leftover to do anything important before everything resets. " Might as well just go for it and hope things don't turn sour."

Stepping into the darkness and floating downward once more, the sounds of the remaining sea snakes echoed all around me. I could literally feel their presence near me even though there was no telling if that were true or not, but then it suddenly became apparent when one shot out behind me. I stood there frozen like a statue, its long body touching my back, my nerves shattering to pieces, fear gripped my heart. The snake retreated into its lair and all I could do was utter a little squeaking sound--Fluttershy would have been somewhat proud of me doing that--and pressed my back against the wall.

" Did you just squeak?"

I nodded my head. " My nerves just took a serious blow."

" We're almost done, Sunset."

" Why did it have to be six giant sea snakes?" I cried. " I'd have preferred none at all to make this all the more easier for me. No wonder no one ever comes out this far into the ocean aside from sea horses. They can easily maneuver around the snakes or just avoid them entirely. Anyone else stupid enough to come here would be a tasty snack."

" Circumstances beyond our control."

I sighed. " I knew you would say that."

" Haven't you faced worse than this?" Twilight asked. " I seem to recall you bringing up your previous journey whenever something you see makes you think back to what you did in the past, and some of those experiences make this current one tame in comparison."

It just baffled me as to how Her Highness was able to get her point across by saying the right words. No wonder she was a princess in Equestria. It wasn't just her ability to solve friendship related issues and embracing it that made her a princess, but rather being able to see things others were often blinded by and helping them understand that they could accomplishment whatever they wanted with the right incentives. That or she was just teasing me in her usual manner.

Since I had no intention of swimming forward--my leg would prevent me from making it back in time--I lifted my injured leg, shook it, and watched as the trail of blood seeped across until the snake came out upon smelling it believing that I had foolishly left myself vulnerable. The moment its entire body had extended out of its hole, I used my magic barrier to wound its body though unlike the others, this one reeled back into its hole. Shaking my leg again, it lurched forward upon smelling the blood seeping across the water and I attacked it with my barrier, bringing it down without any further mishap.

" You'll lose more blood that way if you keep doing that."

I shrugged my shoulders. " It was either that or possibly end up getting eaten again."

" Okay, so you got me there."

" I'll be honest in saying that I didn't enjoy doing that." I said. " The thought of seeing my own blood seeping forth in the water is enough to make me throw up as I stated before, but sometimes you have to do things like this if it means succeeding against difficult odds." I looked down at my injured leg and noticed that it was bleeding faster than before, a result of using my blood as a form of attraction towards the snake. Princess Twilight was about to protest its conditions when I closed my eyes and shook my head. " It was my decision to make so I have to deal with the consequences."

" You'd have never done anything of the sort had you not embraced friendship."

" I had a good teacher."

Princess Twilight blushed. " Well of course you did!"

" Still, I know it was reckless to use my blood like that." I said. I then noticed a familiar glow coming from within the snake's lair and my eyes widened with happiness upon recognizing the Zora egg. Then it occurred me that the sea horse's friend was no where to be found, but dread slowly gripped my heart when I figured out where it was. " Let me just pick the egg up and we'll go over to the last snake." Using my arms as before, I swam down, entered the fifth snake's lair, and landed in front of the egg. Several meters beyond it were several pots so hopefully one of them would contain a recovery heart.

Taking out another empty bottle, I scooped the egg into it, corked the bottle, and put it behind my back before smashing the pots. To my joy, one of them contained a heart that I picked up without a moment's notice, and already my wound started to heal though I needed more hearts to fix it up fully--it wasn't even bleeding anymore.

" Glad that's over with." Twilight said. " Now you need to find another means of luring that last snake out."

" My leg isn't 100% fixed."

" Better than what it was moments ago."

" Granted."

" Do you have enough magic power, Sunset?"

I quickly looked back on how much I used against the other snakes before answering her. " I should have enough for this last one but then I'll be completely drained until I can
find some magic jars."

" Who would have guessed that this was a world where magic was limited."

" Not every world out there can be like Equestria where magic flows about endlessly." I said. " Many ponies use their magic for horrible things without thinking about the consequences while others take it for granted thinking it can be used to solve all of their problems or turn them into lazy individuals. On my previous journey, I relied too much on my natural magic and neglected what had been given to me, yet in this world, using my equipment has proven lucrative and makes me wish I never ignored it before."

" Kind of like what you did in the world you now call home."

I nodded. " Yes though there the magic is definitely weaker and requires concentration to use it properly. Termina's magic doesn't require any concentration as it flows out freely as though it were an extension of myself, yet it can only be used in quick bursts before it runs out. The strength varies depending on my different forms though some clearly have it better than others do such as my Goron body."

" Regret leaving Princess Celestia?"

I nodded profusely. " More than you realize, Twilight, but don't think I'll go back to Equestria when this has been settled. I want to face her when I feel the time is right and I'm not feeling that right now."

" When the time comes..." Twilight began. " I'll be by your side."

Smiling, I walked off into the darkness of the water once more until I ended up touching the ground several seconds later. Looking up, I was quite surprised at how deep this chasm really was, yet it made sense since those sea snakes needed plenty of space to swim about without intruding on each other's territory. The bottom of the chasm left something to be desired, an empty clearing with a couple of pots scattered about--how these got down here was something I couldn't even begin to understand--and some strange seaweed that probably wasn't all that threatening.

The final snake was directly in front of me and was staring at me with its large eyes, and since I no longer could use my blood to lure it out--I was relieved about that--I decided to go with what worked before, namely my fins. They still reeked of the stench of blood, my blood--disgusting as it sounded--and were the perfect means of distraction while my magic barrier would take care of its body.

Walking towards the snake while making sure not to get too close, I aimed my fins and fired upwards behind me causing it to lurch forward though I dropped down onto my back to avoid getting slammed by its long body. Upon my fins returning, I used my magic barrier, striking it twice before it could retreat back into its hole. It disappeared like the others though something different appeared within the lair of the defeated creature. It was as bright as the Zora eggs I'd been collecting down here yet was gold in colour and was much larger than the eggs were.

Before I could make a move, the sea horse I had rescued earlier suddenly appeared in front of me and swam towards the golden object revealing itself to be the other sea horse that had been captured by the sea snakes. They tilted their heads to indicate that they wanted me to come closer so I did so by walking forward.

" You saved my friend." The sea horse said happily.

" It was much harder than I thought given those sea snakes." I said.

" I am sorry that you were put through such a difficult ordeal, yet I had no one else I could turn to." The sea horse said. " When my friend was captured, I went to find someone amongst the Zoras believing one of them would help me. I left Pinnacle Rock and almost reached Zora Hall when a man fished me up from out of the water and took me back with him to where he lived, and I had been with him ever since until you came along, Sunset Shimmer."

" That explains how Snails acquired you."

" I wish to reward you."

I shook my head. " There's no need for you to do that. Your friend was in danger and I did what needed to be done. Sure, my life hung in the balance several times, but that comes with the territory of being a heroine."

" Such a kind heart you possess." The sea horse said. " However, I insist that you take this with you, Sunset Shimmer. It is a small token, a symbol if you will of my deepest gratitude for what you've done. My frien and I wish for your success in the future."

The two sea horses then began pressing their snouts against one another and produced tiny little hearts that disappeared before hitting the ground. I thought it was absolutely adorable and made me realize that they were more than just friends, but my heart suddenly got excited when their little embrace caused a Piece of Heart to suddenly appear in front of them, eagerly waiting for me to pick it up. I did so and my body began feeling the familiar warmth that occurred upon collecting them, a sensation that I really should go out of my way to have occur more often since my health in this world was always having problems.

I then noticed another small treasure chest behind the sea horses--I had practically given up on trying to figure this out--so I walked over and kicked it open to reveal yet another red rupee, adding a little extra to my wallet. It seemed red rupees were a pretty common occurrence in chests though I was hoping for larger amounts since money was becoming more of a necessity than anything else barring the required items.

With that out of the way, I could finally return the remaining Zora eggs to Daring Do, though there was still one problem left, and that involved making my way back across the murky water between Pinnacle Rock and the main part of Great Bay. I could easily get back up to the surface since my leg had now completely healed thanks to the Piece of Heart, yet I could become lost in the murkiness if I were to take a chance at swimming through it. I doubted I could get the sea horse to show me the way back as it was more interested in being with its friend, so what other options were there?

Walking back into the clearing and sitting down on the floor, I began to think about a way to bypass the murky water. The intense silence began getting to me until I decided to take the Ocarina of Time out from my pouch, it transforming into its fish-bone guitar form, and then it hit me. There was a way of getting out of here!

" I'm such a bonehead!"

" No you're not." Twilight said.

" I am in this case."

" What do you mean?"

I showed Princess Twilight my guitar. " I was thinking about how we could get out of Pinnacle Rock without the aid of the sea horse, and the answer was right under my nose the entire time hence why I'm a bonehead. I could play the Song of Soaring and warp right back to the Oceanside Laboratory."

" Can you even play underwater?"

" Don't know."

" Well, you might as well try."

Standing up onto my feet, I began strumming my guitar to get the feel for playing underwater though it wasn't easy what with the notes sounding washed out combined with being so deep underwater. After a few attempts, I played the Song of Soaring and began to imagine the Owl Statue located on the ledge below Pinkie Pie and the laboratory. The wings from the music appeared out of my back, wrapped themselves around my body, spun around several times, and soon I had disappeared.

In an instant, I found myself standing in front of the Owl Statue though my body felt weird what with having spent the last hour under so much water. Had I been in my human form prior to warping here, my body would have collapsed in on itself from the pressure. Speaking of my body... it was beginning to feel heavy like it wanted me to collapse where I was standing and sleep for several hours. All of that action at Pinnacle Rock had left me barely able to keep going but I knew that I couldn't rest until the last Zora eggs had been reunited with the rest who were already in the tank Daring Do had provided.

Slapping my face to keep myself from keeling over, I climbed up the ladder and entered the lab where I stumbled forward slightly, colliding with a nearby desk that proved enough to grab the attention of Daring Do. She had been keeping herself busy by watching the other eggs like she said she would, and was surprised upon seeing me back again though not impressed with my slight blundering near her desk.

" You look as though you've been through another one of your pirate skirmishes, Mikau." Daring Do said.

" I had my hands full with the giant sea snakes of Pinnacle Rock." I said.

Daring Do was shocked. " You took them on by yourself without relying on the other Zoras!? I knew you were reckless what with fighting those pirates on a regular basis, but I never expected you to be so reckless by fighting those accursed unagi. But, you always were different from the others, Mikau. They preferred to dance and sing while you were more interested in learning the ways of fighting from your ancestors." She then walked up to me and began to look over my body before nodding her head followed by a groaning sound. " And you've got some wounds as proof! Honestly, Lulu would have a heart attack the way you keep risking your life."

" No one else could have done it."

" I should say not."

" It was difficult but worth it."

" You must have used some kind of powerful potion." Daring Do said. " The wound on your leg has healed entirely as though it had never been injured in the first place. As a woman of science, I know that the wound came from being bitten by an unagi; not surprising considering how reckless you are."

" I used a 'healing item'." I said. I chose not to reveal to her that it was a Piece of Heart as I doubted she would even believe me. Looking at Daring Do, her expression told me that she was skeptical about my claim but ultimately accepted it by shrugging and huffing.

" In any case, I suspect you managed to get a sea horse from that fisherman?"

I nodded my head. " It required me to do him a small favour but I got it and guided me through Pinnacle Rock."

" Whatever it is you did for him is probably unimportant." Daring Do said. " In any case, did you manage to find the remaining Zora eggs? I've been able to keep the four you brought back earlier from deteriorating even further, yet all seven need to be together for them to hatch successfully. Even though they should have hatched the other day, I believe they should still be able to hatch provided nothing bad happened." She then looked at me with a glaring stare that made me feel really uncomfortable.

" What?"

Daring Do rubbed the bridge of her nose before groaning again. " You probably got knocked around by some of the unagi while you were securing the eggs though knowing you it was probably very frequent. If any of them got damaged because of your recklessness, I don't think Lulu will ever speak to you again, Mikau, and you'll most likely be exiled at the very least by your kind. Now, please show me the eggs without further delay."

I took out my bottles and presented them to her. " Here they are."

" Excellent!" Daring Do exclaimed. " And they are still intact much to my surprise. Hmph! Guess I owe you an apology for thinking you weren't mature enough to be able to keep them safe from whatever it was you were doing at the time. Hurry! Put them in the tank along with the others without delay."

Nodding my head, I picked up the bottles, put them behind my back, and walked over to the ladder on the side of the tank before climbing up to the top. Walking over to the grill on top, taking the bottles out, and looking down at the other eggs in the watery depths below, I opened up each bottle, shook them, and watched the eggs drop down slowly landing with the others until they were huddled together. It actually looked pretty adorable though nothing seemed to be happening at first.

" Now what do we do?"

Daring Do rubbed her chin. " Give me a few seconds to answer that." She paced back and forth in hopes of figuring something out, but when she turned to see what was happening in the tank, she began to freak out before looking up at me and screaming her head off. " Get down here right now, Mikau! It's going to start. Quick! Come to the front of the aquarium so you can witness the magic."

Jumping down to the floor below, I turned around and peered into the tank. The eggs began to shimmer before they suddenly changed into what looked like tadpoles yet they were in fact Zoras given they possessed the typical facial features. On a side note, I learned from my previous journey that Zoras were humanoid fish. I believed they would hatch from eggs and appear to resemble fish upon birth given what they were but instead they resembled the youngest stage of a frog.

Aside from that minor nitpick, the baby Zoras began to slowly float upwards--I'll admit that they were pretty adorable--until they suddenly stopped halfway up before arranging themselves in a unique formation, turning left, and lifting up their tails. I then noticed strange lines embedded into the wall on the back of the tank and that the baby Zora were positioned in a way that was reminding me of something but I couldn't put my finger on it.

I turned to Daring Do. " What are they doing?"

" L-look at this!" Daring Do answered. " What does this mean... What in the world could this mean? In all my years as a scientist, I have never seen anything like this before! No doubt they are healthy yet why form up in such a manner?"

" I thought you knew!"

" Give me a moment!"

" Is it a sign?"

Daring Do looked at the formation of the baby Zora, her brain obviously working over time before she finally came to a startling conclusion. " I got it! How could I be so blind to what is clearly a simple answer before my eyes!" She turned towards me with excitement strewn across her face. " Don't you understand? The way these Zora children have lined up in the tank against those bars at the back. Come now, Mikau! Even you should be able to figure out this one."

I shrugged my shoulders. " I don't get it."

" Their raised tails make them resemble music notes on a sheet." Daring Do said. " They are trying to present us with some kind of melody though I lack the means of performing whatever it is due to being musically challenged. Mikau... Don't you have some kind of instrument?"

I nodded and took out the Ocarina of Time where it changed into my guitar. " Well, I do have this on me."

" Of course you would have an instrument." Daring Do said. " You are a member of the Indigo-Gos after all so it made sense that you would. Now, pay close attention to the position those babies are in and play your guitar accordingly. I don't know what will happen but we won't know until you play."

Looking at the baby Zoras, I began to imagine a musical score with each baby representing a note being placed onto it. It was a good thing I knew how to play a guitar thanks to my role as a back-up guitarist for the Rainbooms--and Rainbow Dash teaching me on the side helped--otherwise I wouldn't even know where to begin. I began strumming the strings to get a feel for each note so that I could play it perfectly without making myself out to look foolish. While I was fine with taking my time, Daring Do didn't feel the same way and began yelling at me to hurry up and play whatever this song was going to be.

Rather than scold her for rushing me, I simply continued practicing playing by playing each note one at a time until I was confident enough. Once I felt ready to give it a go, I played the seven notes seemlessly before breaking out into a pretty wicked tune that resulted in Daring Do brightening up and dancing along until it was over. The baby Zora then turned to face us, their tails wagging about indicating that they were happy with what I did.

" That was certainly something." I said as I put my guitar away.

" Do you know the name of that song?"

" I'm not sure why, but I the name 'New Wave Bossa Nova' comes to mind in my head."

Daring Do agreed. " I've heard of that before though it has been a very long time. But that isn't important right now! What is important however is that instrument! These Zoras were born to teach this song so you must go to her right now."

" Who?"

" You must play this song for the Zora who laid these eggs! You must find Lulu and let her hear that melody!"

" Do you know what might happen?"

" No, I don't." Daring Do answered. " The only one who may be able to answer that is Lulu herself so you must hurry and find her. I will take good care of the Zora children until she is ready to come and get them. Oh, and you needn't worry about the Gerudo stealing them. I doubt they would be interested in them now that they've hatched. Be sure to let Evan know that the babies have hatched. This is a very strange thing. If Zora children can teach music, then the Zora still hold many mysteries. I've been given a new incentive regarding my research of Great Bay. Go, Mikau!"

Without another word, I ran towards the door, opened it, went outside and jumped into the water before swimming forward towards the shore. Supposedly, this song was the key to figuring out why Rarity had lost her voice though it sounded rather farfetched to me. Then again, I had seen far stranger things already so this wasn't exactly out there. Like Daring Do said, only she knew the answer behind the song so I needed to get to her quickly.

" Derpy!" Rainbow Dash exclaimed. " Where in the world have you been?"

" Out in the ocean, ma'am." Derpy answered as she pulled her boat up to the edge of the dock in the Pirate's Fortress. I went out to find Pinnacle Rock like you ordered but I ended up getting sent back to where I started because of not having a sea horse. While I usually don't know what goed wrong, this was an exception since only a sea horse can guide anyone through the murky waters surrounding the rock. I'm sorry that I failed, Rainbow Dash."

" I wish you'd call me Aveil and not by my nickname."

" After several attempts, I gave up and got stuck out in the ocean."

Rainbow Dash appeared to be annoyed but merely sighed. " If only we could have gotten the sea horse from that creepy fisherman who has such an unhealthy fixation on us. We could've used it to enter Pinnacle Rock, get those eggs before Mikau did, and brought them back where he would've had to enter our fortress again to get them. We'd have been ready with the most diabolical traps imaginable but that opportunity has been lost."

" I saw him, ma'am..."

" Saw who?"

" Mikau." Derpy answered. " I saw him while I was stuck out in the ocean."

" I hope you didn't say anything you shouldn't have, Derpy." Rainbow Dash said. Derpy's sudden silence indicated that the opposite had happened and Rainbow slapped her forehead before pounding her head into Derpy's boat. " Why am I not surprised. Well, Mikau's already humiliated us by stealing back those eggs we stole in addition to helping that girl who somehow managed to infiltrate our fortress and bested my guards."

" He went into Pinnacle Rock."

" What!?"

" Mikau went into Pinnacle Rock to get the remaining eggs."

" That place is crawling with those unagi creatures!" Rainbow Dash exclaimed. " I know Mikau can hold his own against the likes of us--he's been doing it far longer than I can remember--but not even he would be dumb enough to take on those things alone. Then again, maybe he would since the eggs do mean an awful lot to his people. Derpy! Do you know if he managed to make it back out alive?"

Derpy shook her head repeatedly. " I didn't see him come back out, ma'am."

" Really... So that means one of two possibilities. Either Mikau was eaten alive by those snakes and will never bother us again or he pulled off a miracle and managed to make it back alive with those eggs intact." Rainbow Dash said.

" Are we going to steal the eggs again?"

Rainbow Dash looked at Derpy with a stern expression. " No. No doubt those eggs have hatched by this point if my information on Zora eggs is correct so stealing them would make absolutely no sense. Besides, we'd make ourselves out to be desperate if we were to steal the same thing again." She then looked out towards the ocean at the cloud that surrounded the temple before smiling a cruel smile. " We're moving onto what's really important."

" And that is?"

" The treasure sleeping in the temple."

" Oh yeah! Oops! My bad!"

Rainbow Dash sighed. " We can still walk away with our pockets lined with treasure provided that nothing goes wrong with the plan. At this point, it doesn't really matter whether or not our mutual 'friend' Mikau survived his ordeal at Pinnacle Rock. So long as we can enter the temple when the cloud surrounding it disappears, who cares what those Zoras do as we'll steal everything there before they even know what happened."

" I love the idea of becoming rich."

" That's the enthusiasm I expect from my sisters."

" Am I going to be leading the charge to the temple?"

" No! I'll be in charge of this operation."

" Understood, ma'am."

Rainbow Dash laughed. " I'm going to make sure no one screws this up!" Derpy was then about to say something when Rainbow suddenly silenced her. " And no, I'm not putting you in charge of the fortress so don't even think about it! I'd prefer you to be with me than being stuck back there." She then mumbled under her breath. " If I left you at the fortress without the proper supervision, you're likely to cause an accident more than anything else. No, I'm sure one of the sub-commanders can easily hold everything together until we come back."

" Yay! I'm going to be part of the strike team!"

" You make it sound like it will be a picnic."

" Isn't it, ma'am?"

" It will be in this case since we'll be coming back with all that treasure."

" When do we depart?"

" The instant that weird cloud surrounding the temple disappears, we'll take a small group with us and depart in our best boat." Rainbow Dash answered. " There's no way of knowing when it will happen so be prepared to leave at any moment!"

It soon became apparent to me just how much I relied on magic though this wasn't always the case. When I lived in Equestria, I used magic for every little thing due to being a unicorn and wanting to see how far I could go. This all changed when I chose to live in the world that became my current home. I had to learn to rely on my own abilities, skills that I had neglected as it was much easier using magic to solve any problem, and for a time I embraced such a change though deep down in my heart, I wanted magic. When I unintentionally brought magic into my current home, I never believed it would change so much.

While it wasn't as potent as what I had in Equestria, I didn't care because I could use magic once again, yet I knew that I was becoming complacent, relying on it to solve my problems without embracing my own talents that were developed through hard work and not taking an easy path out.

My journey across Hyrule was perhaps my worst instance of using magic. Rather than learning to use what I had been given, I wanted to use my magic because it was much easier for me and was within my comfort zone. Even something simple that required a few minutes to figure it out meant nothing because magic was what I chose to rely on. I had taken it for granted, became too dependent on it, and I was becoming lazy as a result.

Here... In Termina... My magic was restricted and that turned out to be a blessing. I was using skills I had neglected and became a better person for it, yet I slowly began getting dependent on it again. I couldn't defeat those sea snakes without the use of magic, and the experience made my mind determine that not having magic wasn't an option. No... I couldn't go back to that way of thinking, not when I had made so much progress. I couldn't become dependent on magic again and have solve all of my problems so I chose not to use magic unless there was no other choice. It would be my last resort.

Why bring it up now? On my way back to Zora Hall, my mind was tempting me to restore my magic power so that I could get past the Leevers on the beach, and the Skullfish underwater--the Like-Likes were seldmon seen. My heart wanted me to use the natural abilities a Zora was capable of--technically the magic barrier was such an ability--to embrace their majestic beauty and grace.

Princess Twilight also wanted me to rely on my skills and not my magic though she might want to consider taking her own advice. After all, she had been using magic a lot more since she never left Equestria other than those incidents involving me--I was still not happy about those actions I took--so if anyone needed to rely on her skills more often, it was her. In any case, I intended on restoring my magic power but when I felt it necessary.

By the time we reached Zora Hall, the sun was getting close to the top of the sky. " Twilight... I think it's time for me to rest."

" Can't it wait until after you swim through the underwater entrance?" Twilight asked.

" My body is about ready to collapse."

" Yes, you have done an awful lot lately."

" I need a few hours, nothing more."

" Are you sure? I was under the impression that you needed at least eight hours of sleep."

I shook my head. " Normally that's true but I only want a few this time. I'll make sure to give myself plenty of rest once we've finished our business inside of the temple, but I could always fall asleep in there in one of the empty rooms."

" That doesn't sound very practical."

" I know. Besides, I think you could do with some rest as well."

Princess Twilight then yawned but quickly pretended that she hadn't causing me to giggle. She shrugged her shoulders admitting that she needed to get some sleep given what we had both been through regarding Pinnacle Rock. It didn't take long to find an ideal resting place--a lone palm tree by the water's edge--so I walked over, sat down, and pressed my back up against the tree before closing my eyes. I knew sleeping would prove risky at this juncture and not because of what was happening regarding the pirates, the Zora, or even the entirety of Great Bay in general.

It was because of Ganondorf, the one who had brought me into this world in the first place. It had been some time since I last heard anything from him, and while that was certainly a blessing--any encounters with him were sure to be a nightmare scenario for me--I knew he was going to pay me another visit through my dreams. It was his way of instilling fear so that I would submit to his desires. Despite my refusal to become his loyal servant because of what I did in the past, he showed no signs of letting that go until I had either agreed or died in the process. I'd personally rather die than be a slave.

Within the subconscious of my dreams, I found myself surrounded on all sides by nothing but endless darkness. Was I frightened of the ordeal? Yes though I knew what was about to come my way. I mean, it was blatantly obvious that I would soon be visited by that man. If there was one question on my mind regarding Ganondorf other than why he couldn't take no for an answer regarding my future, it would be why had be chosen to leave me alone for such a lengthy period of time.

A pair of yellow eyes appeared before me and I knew that I could ask that question. " I was wondering when you were going to pay me a visit."

" It seems that you have become accustomed to my presence within your subconscious, child." Ganondorf said. " Your power continues to grow at a remarkable pace despite you refusing to embrace it and cast aside the shackles that have bonded you to the current course you have chosen."

" Try all you like! I won't become your servant."

" Your defiance is most amusing but ultimately in vain."

" Really? I think I'm doing a good job of refusing to adhere to your words."

Ganondorf began laughing, his voice echoed all around me, forcing me to clutch my ears in pain. " Everything will become clear to you, the one who accompanies you, and the one who relies on you to be their pillar of strength when you witness the horror that is death. It is most unfortunate that those you share such a powerful bond with have already witnessed death itself with their own eyes, but then they cannot remember it as time itself gets rewritten by your hand."

" My friends... What have you done to them?"

" Nothing."

" I know you've done something. There's no sense in lying to me."

Ganondorf's eyes suddenly burst into flames. " You dare accuse me!? You are a mere child compared to the likes of me! With my power, I could kill you right now within your subconscious! Remember that it is through my will and mine alone that you continue to exist!" His eyes then receeded back to normal though his sudden outburst had frightened me to the very core of my soul. I knew that he could lose control of his emotions but nothing along those lines. " Your precious family has seen death though they do not understand the reasoning, beliving it nothing but an illusion."

" Then who or what did it to them?"

" The answer is within, child." Ganondorf answered. " It should not take long for you to comprehend my words." He then paused for a moment that made me nervous. Whenever he stopped talking during our encounters, it only meant things were able to get worse. " The true power... It refuses to be denied by the forces here. What they possess... it shall either save them or condemn them."

Once again he chose to be cryptic with his words though it seemed he was either slipping a little or had every intention of making it easy for me to figure out. The power that my friends possessed was obviously a reference to the Elements of Harmony, and both Princess Twilight and I figured out that their Elements were breaching through this world's magical defence given they displayed characteristics that reflected on their true selves. What I didn't understand was what he meant about how their power would either save or kill them. Was it a threat by him or something else?

And what did he mean about the answer being within? Within what? If I could figure that out, it might allow me to understand the other questions. The key word in all of this was the word "death" though I shouldn't be surprised given what he has done.

" You're not going to elaborate any further, are you?"

" Had you already chosen to become my servant and embrace the dark power that sleeps within... Perhaps I would have granted you such a simple request, but since you instead choose to hold onto those who once turned their backs to you, then you can discover the answers on your own." Ganondorf answered.

" I'll never join you."

" Heh... Such denial."

" Is there a real reason you're here other than the usual taunting?"

Ganondorf went silent again for a few moments before answering my question. " I have foreseen the future many times, child. I can see things that have not even happened and can see any and all outcomes due to my power. In many of the futures I have envisioned, you are standing by my side, obedient, loyal, and accepted the truth of embracing the evil that lurks in your heart. In others, life no longer holds any meaning to you as you have none to live. Only in a couple do I see you staying your current course and rejecting your fate though these are impossibilities, the factors too great to occur."

" You're not getting to me."

" The tone in your voice suggests otherwise."

" Crap!"

" Child... We shall have our next contest soon." Ganondorf said. " I must test your strength once more to see if you are still worthy. Our contest shall be here within the dreamscape where nothing is what it seems, and yet everything is as it was meant to be. When the final deity has been awakened, you shall sleep and do battle with me. Do not think that you can avoid this fate, child! My power over you cannot be extinguished! Perhaps you shall show me a power that goes beyond the daydream? Or perhaps it truly is the limit you are destined to achieve? The answer will become clear in due course."

" Figured you'd want to fight me again."

" Do not betray my expectations."

Ganondorf's eyes then disappeared into the darkness, his laughter echoing all around as a means of intimidation. Unlike in our previous dream encounters where I would wake up screaming at the top of my lungs, I simply continued to sleep until I woke up naturally. Looking up at the sky, the sun had only passed by the peak of its arc indicating that it had only been two hours as opposed to the four that I was originally going for. Princess Twilight continued to sleep--and actually looked adorable curled up on my body--but she quickly woke up upon sensing the movement of my body.

She then noticed that I was looking distant and immediately concluded that I had been visited by Ganondorf. " Did he visit you in your dreams, Sunset?"

I nodded my head. " Yeah... He did."

" What did he have to say this time?"

" He said that our friends had seen death and both you, me, and Twilight Sparkle--the other you--would see the same thing." I answered. " I thought he had done something to them though I quickly found out the hard way when he unleashed his fury after I accused him."

" You were fortunate that he didn't just up and kill you in your sleep."

I nodded again. " Yeah, but I doubt he would have gone through with it. If he had killed me, he'd have lost out on what he has been trying to get out of me, and that is making me his servant by casting aside my very identity." Getting up onto my feet and brushing off the sand that got caught on my pants, I leaned up against the palm tree before looking up at the glistening sun and continuing. " I don't know what he meant by our friends seeing death, but he mentioned that our answers will come when we witness death with our own eyes."

" How cryptic."

" That's what I thought." I said. " By the way... Ganondorf says that our next contest is going to be when the final giant has been awakened."

" Again!? I don't really understand what he's trying to do."

" Neither do I but it's not like I have any choice."

" Of course you do!"

" Not when it's in the dreamscape."

" Oh..."

" I'm not going to let him get to me this time, Twilight." I said. " All that does is make me worried and results in me making mistakes that could ultimately cost me my life. No, I'll continue on this journey by focusing on what we need to do, and deal with Ganondorf when the time comes. Now then, we should probably speak to Coloratura and let her know that the eggs have been delivered to Daring Do before speaking with Rarity."

Jumping into the water, I began to swim forward before diving down below the surface towards the entrance of Zora Hall. As I swam, I noticed Princess Twilight was hugging my cheek as hard as she could and my initial belief was that she was holding on for dear life--I quickly figured that she was hugging me out of being proud for standing my ground against the likes of Ganondorf and not letting him get to me.

Swimming past the Skullfish and entering Zora Hall, the first thing I did upon getting out of the water was check my surroundings to see if anything was different. The last time we were here, I remembered seeing Coloratura issuing orders to a group of Zoras before going back into her room. No doubt she wasn't thinking about doing that now since we're an entire day early though it was for the best to speak to her quickly before she did something.

Running past several Zoras--who greeted me and said their usual thing about looking forward to the rehearsal--I reached Coloratura's room where I had to deal with the Zora who was standing outside. He looked pleased to see me and insisted I go in by stepping aside so I walked in without questioning it though upon closing the door behind me, I was suddenly face-to-face with Coloratura, and she appeared flustered. She began looking over my body--something I immediately recalled her doing the last I was here--in search of something before sighing and walking back over to her bone instrument.

" Mikau! Where have you been?" Coloratura asked.

Since she didn't remember our previous conversation due to me resetting time, I had to go along and pretend that this was our first time talking. " I've been busy taking care of what you asked me to do, Coloratura." Crap! I mentioned her true name as she is known in Equestria instead of the name she is called here.

" Huh? Coloratura? You feeling okay, Mikau?" Coloratura asked. At least she wasn't questioning the fact that I was a female. " I mean, I find that name to be riveting, exciting, like it's speaking out to me and begging me to use it as a stage name when we have our concerts, but you seem different somehow. It's like you're a completely different person, but maybe that's just me seeing as I've been under a lot of stress lately keeping Lulu's secret from the others."

" I know that feeling."

" So how was it? Did you get the eggs back?" Coloratura asked. She began looking over my body again though in a much quicker fashion--it still made me uncomfortable--before lowering her head and sighing. " Oh... You couldn't do it, after all. I... I don't know what I can say about this. When I saw you enter my room, I believed you had succeeded since you'd only been gone the entire night, yet perhaps I was a little hasty since you have so much on your mind without needing anymore pressure."

" Well, the thing is..."

" Have you seen Lulu outside lately?"

" Yes."

" She's been like that ever since the pirates stole her eggs, gazing out at the sea and sighing. Just seeing that sad expression on her face is enough to make even the toughest of hearts break in an instant." Coloratura said.

" Okay! This has gone far enough!" I shouted, my arms waving about. " If you had allowed me to finish instead of interrupting me, I could have told you that I already recovered the eggs and given them to the scientist at the Oceanside Laboratory."

" You mean... You did it?"

I nodded my head. " Yes. Some of the eggs ended up in Pinnacle Rock but I retrieved them before the sea snakes could get to them."

Coloratura was shocked to say the least. " And you went in there by yourself? No wonder you look so exhausted, Mikau! I know that I've put a lot of pressure on you because of you being the only Zora in our tribe who has heroic blood, yet going to Pinnacle Rock is both incredible and downright insane!"

" I had to do it for Lulu."

" You'd do anything to make her happy, wouldn't you?"

I nodded again. " She means more to me than you realize. Anyway, when I put all seven eggs into the tank at the laboratory, they hatched successfully and proceeded to teach me a strange song that might help us figure out what's been going on around here. Does "The New Wave Bossa Nova" mean anything to you?"

Her reaction told me that she did. " I haven't heard that song in years and you say the babies taught it to you?" Coloratura then paced back and forth for a few seconds before turning to face me again. " Mikau! You need to head out to the back and play it in front of Lulu. I know this sounds crazy but it may be just what she needs. I'll make sure no one comes out and swarms you both since I know they will get excited upon hearing you both perform."

Taking my leave of Coloratura's room and heading back outside to the main area, I thought about going straight to Rarity, yet my mind compelled me to pay a visit to her room to my right out of a belief that I could learn more about what she was going through. A Zora was standing in front of the door--more like trying to peep through the keyhole--and when I confronted him about his actions, he came up with a lousy excuse before running away out of shame.

I walked inside and the first thing I noticed was a Deku Flower--complete with Deku Scrub hiding inside--located on the opposite side of the room. Why a Deku was in someone's private room was beyond me though my mind was fixated on what appeared to be an open book lying on a nearby table. Walking up to it, I was surprised to discover that it belonged to Rarity. It was her diary and judging from her shaky handwriting and the tear drop stains, she was in a pretty bad state when she initially wrote this. Reading it could give me an idea about what happened yet it would mean violating the sanctity of privacy.

" What should I do, Twilight?"

" Reading it would make you guilty but it may be our best chance of understanding Rarity's current state of mind." Twilight answered.

" She lost her voice when her eggs were stolen."

" Yes, but is there more to it than that?"

" I'm... I'm not sure."

" Then reading her diary would give us an answer." Twilight said. " I know it's not right on a moral level but this is Rarity we're talking about. She's our friend and we need to do what we can to help."

After thinking about it for a few moments, I chose to read Rarity's diary in hopes of learning the truth about what happened. I was surprised that I could read her writing but I quickly deduced that it was due to currently being in a Zora body. Had I tried to read it as any other form, her writing would be completely illegible. Looking down at the pages, it seemed she had divided everything into three sections though none of them were dated. I supposed I'd figure out the order once I began reading. (1)

Lulu's Diary.
It has been two days since I have lost my voice. I don't want Mikau to know, so I talked to Evan about it. She recommended that I take the eggs to the Marine Research Lab to have them checked. I think I will take them right away.
Such a terrible thing has happened today that I don't even know where to begin writing. I heard a sound late at night, and when I opened my eyes, I saw strangers in my room. I tried to fight, but they were able to steal my precious eggs. It seems I lost consciousness after that.
Today, I told everything to Mikau, the one person whom I didn't want to know about it. At first, I was too embarrassed and too sad to do anything. And with the words that Mikau said at that moment, I felt that all hope had been lost. But please, Mikau, I'm begging you, don't do anything rash.

Looking up after finishing the third entry, I stared into thin air while my mind processed what Rarity had written down. No wonder she lost her voice all of a sudden yet it wasn't the pirates who caused it to happen. Giving birth to those baby Zora made her lose her voice yet that didn't sound possible, but I knew little about how Zora's reproduced. She was also scarred due to witnessing the pirates stealing her children--that tunnel I overheard them mentioning truly did allow them to sneak into Zora Hall though I had to commend her for doing what was natural for a mother.

I looked down at myself and began to understand why Thunderlane--Mikau--did what he did before he died. His words gave Rarity the strength she needed to cope with her loss though when he didn't return with the eggs, she went outside to stare at the ocean believing that all was lost. It didn't matter what he had to go through, Mikau would give up his own life to please her--Lulu--and that's when I concluded that he was the father of her eggs. While I couldn't exactly prove such a claim, it would be what I believed was true.

Knowing what needed to be done, I left Rarity's room, and headed out to the back where she was still standing. She looked at me for a few seconds before resuming her gaze out upon the ocean. Now that I knew what was going on, I could help her by playing that song.

Taking out the Ocarina of Time where it changed into the fish-bone guitar, I played the New Wave Bossa Nova with all the heart I could muster into it. At first, nothing happened which made me feel dejected and assuming that I did something wrong, but then Rarity suddenly began to sing the song. She sang without any practice, hesitation in her heart, and needing someone to help her perform. Everything just came out of her like she had been wanting to express herself for a very long time.

" Mikau?" Rarity asked. " What's going on?"

I about to call her Rarity when I quickly realized my earlier blunder with Coloratura. " Lulu... You're okay!"

Rarity shook her head. " My voice... Why do I suddenly have my voice back, darling? I lost it when I laid those eggs a few days ago, yet here I am speaking to you like it was never lost at all." That's when she realized that her eggs weren't with her and immediately freaked out much like what Rarity usually did. " Where are they? Where are my eggs? I simply must know where they are otherwise I'll never be able to stop thinking of them."

" They're safe now." I said. " I got them all back from the pirates and gave them to the scientist at the lab."

" You did?"

I nodded my head. " It took me on a detour to Pinnacle Rock where three of them ended up but they have all hatched successfully."

Rarity was ecstatic. " Oh, Mikau! I just knew you could do it!" She ran over and hugged me so tightly that I thought I was about to burst, but then she quickly let go before blushing a bright red prompting to do the same thing. " Oh my! I didn't mean to overdo it, Mikau. I couldn't help myself seeing as you rescued my children from the pirates." She then caught onto what I said about Pinnacle Rock and her expression changed. " You went to Pinnacle Rock!? That must have been utterly dreadful, darling! I cannot imagine having to go to such a wretched place filled with those awful sea snakes."

" It was an adventure to say the least."

" Well, it's over now and that means we can get the rehearsal started."

I shook my head. " My mission isn't finished yet."

" Whatever do you mean?"

I pointed out to the temple in the middle of the ocean. " Great Bay is still suffering from an evil curse and the source of that curse is coming from the temple. I must go there and destroy the curse otherwise we will be able to go back to our way of life. The water will remain warm and we will perish."

" As much as I don't want you to go, I know that you must because it's your destiny." Rarity said. " But, now that I think about it, darling, how do you plan on getting there what with how dangerous the murky water is?"

Rarity had a valid point. Even if I could swim to the temple, it would simply be too risky given the condition of the water. I would either end up back where I started or the worst case scenario would happen, and that was something I'd rather soon avoid.

What neither of us noticed was the strange island mass that was located behind Zora Hall. It was a simple looking island with two palm trees sticking out on top of it, yet it didn't quite look like it fit in with the regular surroundings. If I didn't know any better, I could swear that the mass shouldn't be where it was. That turned out to be true when something started happening to the island and all because Rarity's singing made it happen.

The rocks of the island mass shimmered and changed into a giant shell, four stubby feet protruded from four holes near the base that mysteriously appeared, and the front changed to form an animal's face. By the time my eyes noticed this unusual transformation, a giant burst of water gushed out from underwater, and I had to cover my face to be able to see what was going on though Rarity simply stood there. When the water disappeared, both of us were looking at a giant turtle who immediately shifted its bulky body around so that its head faced us, and its first action was to yawn with a bellow that could probably be heard all over Great Bay.

" Mm... Mm... Yeeeaaawn! I slept quite well!"

" Where did you come from?" Rarity asked.

" The island mass that you and your friend were observing just now... I was once that island though the power of your song has awoken me from my long slumber, yet this was fated to happen now at this precise moment. I just realized this when I opened my eyes. The passing of days is quite quick. Isn't it, Lulu?" The turtle asked.

" You know my name?"

The turtle slowly nodded his head. " Yes, Lulu. It's nothing to be surprised at."

" How could you know of me while you have been sleeping here?"

" Such a curious one you are, Lulu, and yet I sense the same thing in you, Zora warrior." The turtle answered. He then looked at me for a brief moment, winking in the process that made me shiver for some reason before turning his attention back to Rarity. " Although my eyes were closed in sleep, I still see everything that occurs in this ocean. I know all that has happened here long before those who dwell here came to be. There is nothing of the ocean that can escape my mind's eye."

Rarity struggled to respond. " Gah... gah... gah..."

" Hmmm... It seems Lulu is confused. Regrettably, there is no time for idle conversation." The turtle said. " The guardian who presides over these waters has vanished and without its protection, the ocean shall forever be tainted and those who live here will wither away to nothing. While my power may not be the same as that of the guardian, I have enough to break through the dark shroud that surrounds the Great Bay Temple that lies out there in the ocean. Only I can make it there while others attempting to cross shall only be met with failure, their dreams dashed."

" You mean the pirates won't make it?" I asked.

" They have been blinded by the one who has caused so much trouble throughout this land."

" Starlight Glimmer..."

The turtle nodded. " Yes... The masked imp who wields a dark power. The pirates believe that they can enter the temple and claim the treasure there when the shroud disappears, yet it cannot be undone until that which created it has been destroyed. Their effort shall be in vain and what awaits them was fated. Now then, proud Zora warrior... The open seas of Great Bay have need of your might. You must enter the temple and destroy that which holds the guardian prisoner."

" How can I get there?"

" Quickly. Climb onto my back." The turtle answered. " I shall take you there without delay." It then lowered its head down before tilting it slightly as a means of telling me to hurry up as time was of the essence, but I wasn't ready since my bottles were empty and I wasn't about to enter the temple without at least one of them filled. " Why so slow?" The turtle asked, impatient over how I was hesitating over getting onto its back. " You must climb onto my back immediately, Sunset Shimmer."

" What did you say?"

" Heh, heh, heh. Are you surprised by this?" The turtle asked. " You shouldn't be. Of course I know your name. Didn't I say that all is seen by me? But, now there is no more time for talking as you must destroy the evil in the temple before Great Bay will be no more."

While I was taken aback by the revelation that the turtle knew that I wasn't the real Mikau, I realized that time wasn't on my side. If my calculations were correct, I had about forty-two hours to complete the temple before I would have to reset time and go through all of this again. My brain wanted me to go without further delay yet my heart knew that going without proper healing items was nothing short of foolish. My previous temple excursions were pretty good though the obvious disaster of not having a potion or fairy on hand meant my life hung by a thread. I couldn't afford to do that again.

I was about to refuse the turtle and walk back into Zora Hall to find a shop of some kind when Rarity suddenly grabbed my wrist and held it firmly. I blushed for a moment--My reaction came as a result of how Mikau truly felt about Lulu--before I shook my head and noticed she was holding a sack of some strange red liquid. My first thought was that it had something to do with what happened when she laid her eggs, but when she fished out one of my bottles and filled it up, I knew that she had just given me a red potion. How did she know that was what I needed?

" Mikau... I... I... don't want you to go through with this." Rarity said. " I know you've been through an awful lot since my eggs were stolen but you don't need to risk your life in such a manner by going to the temple. Maybe there's another way Great Bay can be saved.

I shook my head. " This is something I need to do."

" But..."

" It may not make sense to you now but it will when the time comes."

Rarity then sighed knowing she couldn't change my mind. " That's why I purchased that red potion soon after losing my voice. I believed that I could use it to restore my voice but you ended up restoring it through that song you played. Since my words won't change your mind, Mikau, I think the potion will do you a lot better than it would me. Just promise you'll come back to me when this is all said and done."

" I promise."

Putting the red potion behind my back, I walked up to the turtle, climbed up his lowered neck and onto his back, and wrapped my arms around one of the palm trees. It's not that I was afraid but rather I didn't want to get thrown off in case it can't get through the clouds surrounding the temple. The turtle merely told me to hold on tight and began turning its body around--it took about thirty seconds given its massive size--before moving forward at a speed I wasn't expecting from a creature of this nature.

Looking back at Rarity, she was waving, her sign of wishing me luck, and I was going to need it since this was going to be my third temple. The first two were pretty challenging in their own right though it didn't take long to figure them out, yet I felt this temple would take a long time and would be the most difficult challenge I've faced thus far. Looking back at where we were going, I could see the temple with my own eyes, and it wasn't what I thought it would be. I couldn't see its exact form what with the clouds covering it but it resembled something along the lines of a mechanical squid-like creature.

" Are you sure this is a good idea, ma'am?" Derpy asked.

" Why wouldn't it be?" Rainbow Dash asked.

" I thought we weren't going to sail towards the temple until the cloud surrounding it disappeared."

Rainbow Dash slammed her fist down onto the rim of the boat leaving behind a small indentation. " Obviously it was too difficult for Mikau and the rest of the Zoras to do something incredibly simple, so we might as well carry on as intended and steal the treasure."

" Do you think we'll get through, ma'am?"

" We may have lost the eggs but the masked one insured us that we can get into the temple."

Derpy looked skeptical. " I hope nothing goes wrong."

Rainbow Dash ignored the words of her second-in-command though she was worried about the situation as well. " We've lived our lives struggling for survival because we're different from the Zoras and those other tribes who live throughout Termina, and because of that our numbers are dwindling and our chances of continuing on are slim. That treasure will allow us to spend our lives in luxury and rebuild the Gerudo into a feared people. Besides, I'm not about to spend one more day scrounging around for scraps when we can have whatever we want once we get the treasure."

" If you say so." Derpy said. She then looked out in front and began flailing her arms. " We're approaching the cloud, ma'am! Contact is imminent!"

" At last..." Rainbow Dash began, rubbing her hands with glee. " The Gerudo will finally get what we deserve."

The boat inched forward until the tip made contact with the cloud, but then disaster struck as it was pulled into the vortex like it were a piece of string. Rainbow Dash, Derpy, and several other pirates began getting flung about alongside their boat, bloodcurdling screams coming from their mouths, their boat smashed to bits from the strength of the vortex. Whatever lurked inside of the temple didn't want anyone entering and would punish any who dared try.

After being tossed about for a few more minutes, the vortex ejected the pirates a great distance before they landed in the water followed by the debris of their boat splashing on top of them--none of them were injured though they were very wet. Derpy raised her head out of the water first and grabbed a piece of debris before grabbing Rainbow Dash by the hair and pulling her up to safety by using the debris as a floatation device--the other pirates would use their own pieces to save themselves from drowning. Everyone then turned towards their leader wondering what her next move was going to be.

Derpy broke the silence. " That didn't work, ma'am..."

" I know Derpy... I know."

" Are you alright?"

Rainbow Dash was crestfallen. " The masked one... She lied to us. I can't believe that I was blinded by her words all because she brought up treasure. Gah! I'm... going to need to think about my priorities when we get back in addition to considering stepping down as your leader." The other pirates were shocked but Rainbow quickly silenced them. Before any of you start freaking out, it's my decision to make and you will all respect it. Let's... let's just go back home for now, okay? I'm kind of tired."

The sounds of the pirates ringed through my ears as I watched them get flung about by the powerful vortex that surrounded the temple. While my heart wanted whoever was among them to be okay, I couldn't help but feel that they deserved it because of the poor choices they made. I had no doubt Rainbow Dash was one of the pirates who got thrown about yet I couldn't go back and see if she would be fine. My focus had to be on the temple though it did look pretty intimidating even as the turtle swam through what I perceived was the main entrance of whatever this place looked like.

Upon entering the opening chamber, I was in complete awe of the kind of surrounding I had found myself in. The ceiling consisted of pipes that inter-tangled with one another with water dripping down from them every now and again, the walls looked old and in desperate need of repair, and there was this strange presence in the air that was making feel very uneasy though I couldn't understand why. Was I sensing whatever was behind the problems of Great Bay? Was it nerves on my part? Or was I feeling immense guilt over not going back and helping out Rainbow Dash.

There was a small gap in the water that the turtle used to line up next to the ground, and upon stopping it lowered its head allowing me to jump down. Waving at it as a sign of appreciation for having braved such a difficult journey to get here, I turned my attention towards figuring out what to do first.

" Already this place seems intimidating." I said.

" The first thing is to find a map so that we know where we're going." Twilight said.

" I doubt there's one in this room so we might as well go through that door in front of us."

" Yes, but why not look around here first?" Twilight asked. " We may find something of use that we'd otherwise neglect."

I looked around to see if there was something but all I could find were some unlit torches up on higher ground. " What about those torches? Usually, when I light them up, something happens like a treasure chest materializes or a door unlocks."

Princess Twilight took note of them. " Maybe lighting them will give us something?"

" I don't have any Deku Sticks on hand and I didn't restore my magic." I answered. This was one of those examples where I would kick myself for not having magic even though I was trying to distance myself from depending on it for everything. " We might have to come back later when I have magic."

" Maybe not."

" I don't understand."

Princess Twilight pointed at a series of barrels on either side of the turtle. " You might be able to smash them by rolling into them from a good distance. If any of them have any magic jars, then you can light up those torches, yet you'll need to become a human to do that."

Walking to the right of the turtle, there were four barrels though they all weren't lined up together. I didn't have any confidence rolling into them as a Zora, so I grabbed my face, took off the Zora Mask, and flipped my hair back for the first time in what felt like forever. Rolling into the first barrel and breaking it didn't yield anything but the second one revealed a large magic jar that I happily took.

My body felt more at ease knowing that it could use magic again yet I wasn't going to be dependent on it. I'd only use magic when it was necessary and the current situation with the unlit torches was one of those necessary moments.

Taking out the Hero's Bow and applying the Fire Arrow power to give my arrows that extra bit of oomph, I walked back around to the front of the turtle and up the ramp to the higher ground before aiming at the nearest torch. I had a premonition that the flames would only last for a short period of time before extinguishing themselves and that meant lighting them up quickly without wasting magic. It seemed using my fins while as a Zora had improved my aim as I lit each torch flawlessly using little magic--and arrows--resulting in a small chest materializing in front of the turtle when the final torch was lit.

Walking back down the ramp and kicking the chest open, I was surprised that it contained a blue coloured Stray Fairy. I had no idea where the Great Fairy's Fountain was located on the beach since I didn't get to explore everything, but I'd deal with that problem later once this temple had been completed and the giant saved. It did mean having to work a little quicker as resetting time would reverse my efforts in restoring the Adagio of Great Bay back to her former glory.

Since there was nothing else left for me to do in this room, I walked up to the door and opened it only for my eyes to open wide and my jaw to drop--Princess Twilight had the exact same reaction upon witnessing the same thing. We were now witnessing what made Great Bay Temple the way it was.

(1.) This was actually written in Lulu's diary in the game.

Chapter 42: Lurkers of the Depths

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
January 23, 2017
Chapter 42: Lurkers of the Depths.

I had to be honest with myself. When it became apparent that the Great Bay Temple would be a place filled with water, it brought back memories of my previous journey that had me going through a similar location, the Water Temple. It wasn't a very good experience given that I had to fight against the she-demon--whose desire to become the real as she proclaimed proved very emotional--yet my fight with her overshadowed what made the temple difficult. Namely, all that water. Never had I seen so much gathered in one place--not even Equestria could boast something like that--and I had to traverse it.

Had it not been for that tunic that allowed me to breathe underwater, I probably would have drowned several times over. While I wasn't afraid of swimming in water--I consider myself to be pretty good at it--I wasn't keen on having it all around me especially in cramped locations. Also, those boots that had lead iron soles on the bottom proved incredibly useful despite being less than practical. Walking underwater was actually a lot of fun though those monsters proved annoying whenever they appeared in those narrow corridors. Just thinking about it gave me mixed feelings.

While I certainly enjoyed the majestic splendour of the temple in addition to seeing Rarity again at the time, I didn't like having to change the water level so many times just so that I could make some adequate progress. I also didn't like how Ganondorf--Lord Tirek--forced me into fighting Sunset Demon though thinking back on it now, I actually felt sorry for her.

Yes... I felt sorry for my demonic self because of what she had to endure. It wasn't her fault that she was created to be nothing but a hateful monster who cares more about destruction and oppressing anyone. I had issues back then as a result of self-entitlement. I know I've thought about this in the past yet it continued to haunt me because she exists the way she does because of me. Reasoning with the she-demon was never an option. She refused to listen to anyone making her stubborn and an unfortunate reflection of myself. It didn't matter what it would take to assume my life--even her own demise--so long as Sunset Demon succeeded.

Wherever she was in the afterlife, perhaps she could now achieve the peace her tormented soul needed. That's what I would like to see happen though I doubted it would be a reality as she did do some questionable things mainly because I did them in her name. I suspected she was being tortured in some inhospitable manner and yearns to be put out of her misery for good. Such thoughts aren't becoming of me but then I blame myself for acting like a spoiled brat. If I could go back in time, I'd prevent the she-demon from ever existing thus everything after the fact wouldn't happen.

Unfortunately, tampering with the past like that would make me no better than her. I had to accept the fact that she would forever seek to assume my life and nothing else would ever be able to satisfy such cravings.

I shook my head knowing I had daydreamed too much once again--I also didn't want Princess Twilight to bop me repeatedly on the head--and turned my attention to what was standing in front of us. Unlike the Water Temple's beautiful interior, the Great Bay Temple's interior reminded me of a sewer system and for some reason, an off-shore oil rig. It's as though whoever built this place had no tastes whatsoever, yet I knew I shouldn't be judgmental with stuff like this.

Hanging slightly below the ceiling connected via a large pipewas what appeared to be a waterwheel judging from the stream of water that was hitting it on one side. The water was coming from a yellow funnel and on the opposite side was a red funnel though no water was coming out of it. Connecting to each funnel were pipes of the same respective colour yet only one appeared to be working given how it glowed brightly. Nearby though slightly submerged underwater was a switch resembling a clockwork key with another similar switch at the bottom of the room indicating that if I wanted to reach it, I needed to be a Zora.

" This is absolutely amazing!" Twilight exclaimed.

I rolled my eyes. " I'm not surprised that you would be enamoured by this, Twilight."

" We don't have anything like this back in Equestria, Sunset, so I can't help it if I'm facincated." Twilight said. She floated upwards to get a closer look at the waterwheel making sure not to accidentally get caught in the stream of water coming out of the funnel. " The water is what's making this wheel spin though I wonder where it's coming from." Her Highness then noticed the red and yellow pipes continued on past this room and immediately flew back down to me. " Sunset! If we follow those pipes, we might be able to get a better understanding of how this place works."

" What about the switches around here?"

" One of them could operate the two funnels but I'm not sure about that."

" And the other?"

" I have no idea."

" You don't seem sure of yourself, huh?"

Princess Twilight scoffed. " This is all new to me, Sunset! I need some time to figure out how everything works so that we can make sense of it. I wouldn't be a gifted scholar if it meant ignoring what was blatantly obvious before my eyes."

I rolled my eyes again. " So what do you suggest I do?"

" Why not try pushing that switch underwater."

" But, you said you don't know what it does."

" That's the beauty of curiosity!" Twilight said. " You won't know what something does until you try it out. Besides, you've done this kind of thing in the previous temples so why question it now?"

While Her Highness had a valid point in that I had pressed switches, pulled blocks, etc., to solve the different puzzles of the temples, she made it sound like curiosity was something to embrace whenever possible. Personally, curiosity only resulted in making things worse even though you had noble intentions prior to that. I had no idea what would happen upon activating that underwater switch yet I couldn't just stand there doing nothing. Time wasn't on my side and I needed to complete this temple before resetting things back to the beginning as I still had some unfinished business regarding the Zoras.

Since the switch was underwater, I needed to become a Zora once again. Taking out the Zora Mask and putting it on my face, I squatted down and awaited for the magic to change me, and upon finishing, I simply stepped off the edge into the water only to hear something giggling coming from behind me.

Turning around, I saw a Stray Fairy trapped inside of a bubble that was hidden cleverly underneath the platform I had stood on. If not for its giggling, I might have ignored it entirely--maybe not as my eyes would have noticed it upon swimming back this way. My fins were practically blades so protruding them and slicing at the bubble, it easily popped and the fairy entered my body giving me two out of the fifteen in the temple. Princess Twilight said she would make a mental note of both fairy locations so that she could jot them down whenever we find the map hidden somewhere further within.

Swimming over to the switch while looking both ways in case there were underwater monsters--there weren't--my first thought involved how I was supposed to activate it. It wasn't a switch that you pressed for it to activate. No, it was a large object that couldn't be stepped on. I grabbed it and tried pulling on it in hopes that would do something but all I got out of it was sore hands and almost pulled my back.

I then tried pushing it using my shoulder due to my hands and I struck paydirt as the switch moved around until it mysteriously dropped into the ground. Looking down at the ground to see what happened to the switch, I had confusion written all over my face until the sound of water suddenly came out of nowhere.

" What happened?"

Princess Twilight flew up out of the water to investigate before coming back moments later. " Activating that switch has caused another funnel to start spouting out water, and I think you can use it to cross over to a platform that was previously out of reach."

" Guess you were right about me activating it."

" Like I said? That's the beauty of curiosity."

I wanted to slap my forehead but refrained from doing so but I hoped Her Highness wouldn't start bragging about this. While it was okay to be proud of being right about something, going overboard would only make others not respect you for your abilities, and instead make you nothing short of an arrogant braggart. Princess Twilight was better than that though she did slip into that kind of behaviour when she least expected it.

Looking back, I noticed a platform rising up and down with it going underwater for a few seconds upon coming down. Using my legs to push myself forward, I swam over to the platform just as it was about to go back up. To my left was another platform that contained several different coloured rupees with a Skulltula looming above as means of a trap in case I were greedy enough to go for the rupees rather than the exit. Still, the Skulltula seemed out of place as shouldn't it be closer to the ground? It's high-up position would make it too easy to grab the rupees unless something else was up.

Jumping off the platform and onto another one, I turned around and looked up at the Skulltula. " Twilight? I'm going to try something."

" What did you have in mind?"

" That Skulltula over there is bugging me."

" It's not in our way so you might as well ignore it."

" But that's just it!" I exclaimed. " Why would it be over there guarding a bunch of rupees? This will only take a few minutes." Grabbing my face, I took off the Zora Mask--I didn't need to flip my hair back--and placed it on the ground beside me before taking out the Hero's Bow and aiming upwards. " I hope I can hit it from this distance." In truth, I hadn't had much practice shooting at very distant targets--I usually hit close-ranged ones--so this would prove challenging--this was especially true since my quiver only had a few arrows left.

My first shot missed completely and hit the wall behind the Skulltula though I couldn't hear the plink sound, and my second proved just as bad though I did get a little closer though hitting the waterwheel wasn't what I would call close. My third arrow missed by several inches causing me to curse under my breath yet my fourth one hit the Skulltula, slamming it into the wall before it burned away to nothing. From its ashes came another Stray Fairy and I looked at Princess Twilight with a smug look.

" No need to brag about it, Sunset."

" Kind of like you, huh?"

" Yeah... I guess."

" I can't really be smug since I wasted four arrows just hitting the thing."

" How many do you have left?"

I quickly counted the remaining arrows. " About seven... Definitely not enough."

" Yes." Twilight said. " You should conserve them and only use them when necessary until you find some more, then you can go all crazy again. It's a shame though that you haven't acquired any larger quivers, Sunset. If you could carry more arrows, you wouldn't have to worry about running low."

That was something I really needed to look into once this temple had been taken care of. Not only did I need more arrows, but I also needed more bombs--you never know when you need them--so perhaps someone in Clock Town would have some answers. I recalled there was a Bomb Shop somewhere in town and a Shooting Gallery if my memory of shop signs was both accurate and reliable. My next seventy-two hour cycle should be dedicated towards getting better equipment and maybe some more masks.

Putting both the bow and Zora Mask away, I took out the Great Fairy's Mask, and put it on my face. The Stray Fairy immediately noticed the shimmering hair of the mask and flew over to me before entering my body and giving me three fairies. So far, I was doing a good job of picking them though I should be complacent about it. I had no doubt that it wouldn't be easy finding the others especially if this temple ends up being very complex.

Taking off the Great Fairy's Mask and putting it away, I took a single step before hearing a shuffling sound from above, and jumped back just as a Skulltula came down, hissing at me for avoiding its attempt to knock me down. Rather than waste time and risk being knocked over and down into the water below, I pressed my back up against the wall and slid my way past while staring at its hideous face. The Skulltula climbed back up to the ceiling after a while allowing me to jump across to the other platform using the water spouting forth from the funnel.

I walked forward until I stopped at a yellow pipe. " Huh? I have to cross on this!?"

" It does appear to be the only option."

" Guess I've no choice."

Princess Twilight took a closer look at the pipe. " The water coming from those yellow funnels is flowing through this pipe."

" Do you think there's a connection between the pipes and that waterwheel?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Most likely." She then looked back the other way for a split second before looking over at the red pipe. " That red pipe doesn't have any water flowing through it hence why it isn't glowing like the yellow one is. If we could bring water here along the red pipe, it should enable us to turn the waterwheel in the opposite direction, but I haven't quite figured out what may happen."

" I'm sure we'll find out eventually."

" I hope so."

The yellow pipe was narrow so walking on it required a delicate balance. If I were to fall off, I'd end up in the water and be forced to make my way back here again all while wasting precious time in the process. It seemed safe though the dripping water coming from above made me nervous about slipping, but I couldn't allow that to deter me so I stepped out onto the pipe and slowly walked across to the other platform before walking through a corridor and coming to a complete stop.

In this next room was a massive waterwheel that comprised of two pieces that were interlocked together with pipes connected to the walls and below the second wheel was a propeller that was churning the water around in a powerful vortex that looked too powerful for me to be able to swim through without getting pulled about. Looking down into the water below didn't reveal much other than confirming this room went down pretty deep, and on the other side was a chunk of ice that seemed out of place. Droplets of water occasionally dripped down from it indicating it hadn't been frozen for very long.

It seemed that the propeller--or whatever it was supposed to be--could be used as a platform as two high ledges on either side of me hinted at that, yet in my mind it sounded dangerous because it was possible that I could get killed if I were hit by it.

" And I thought the previous waterwheel was impressive."

Princess Twilight floated out in front of me again to get a closer look at this waterwheel. " Amazing! Simply fascinating! I've never seen anything like this! Can you imagine what something like this could do for ponies back home in Equestria?" If only I had some paper with me, then I could write down some blueprints that hopefully Princess Celestia's inventors can interpret to make something similar." Her Highness was completely enamoured and completely missing the point as to the significance behind the waterwheel. While I would have loved to have continued watching this spectacle, we did need to move on.

I whistled out to her. " Why don't we focus on this instead of Equestria!"

" Huh?" Princess Twilight asked, snapping out of her daydream. " Yes, of course."

" Guess I'm not the only one who daydreams, huh?"

Princess Twilight blushed before turning towards the waterwheel. " Hmmm... If this is being used to run the entire temple, then the other waterwheel is connected to this one. But, I don't see anything that could make us turn it the other way." She floated back down to me to fill me in on what she had observed. " From what I have gathered from my observations, this temple is like a giant machine with different pieces connecting to one another. Right now, only portions of the machine are connected leaving the rest needing to be 'fixed' so that other areas can be accessible."

" So that waterwheel is powering everything else?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " As you can see from the glowing yellow pipe, water is still flowing through it but the red pipe isn't glowing, and that means we need to find our way to the source and turn on the water flow."

" The water below us doesn't seem all that inviting."

" It's just being pushed around by that giant propeller."

" I don't think I can control where I swim."

" All you can do, Sunset, is follow the flow of water wherever it leads and hopefully it will take us somewhere." Twilight said. She suddenly bopped me on the head prompting me to swat at her in response though she stuck out her tongue. " There's a barrel on each of those ledges."

" So?"

" Why not see what's inside them?"

I looked down at the water with a glum expression. " I don't know if I want to use that propeller as a platform."

" Then why not try using the Hookshot?" Twilight asked. " You haven't used it all that much since you got it and it has pulled you towards anything made of wood like in the Pirate's Fortress." She then took on a more serious tone. " Besides, you need to get used to the fact that you'll be pushed around by the current as you'll have to swim about in it as a Zora."

Once again, Her Highness was correct even though I wish she wasn't. As I took out the Hookshot, I quickly glanced down at the propeller as it slowly swirled around the room, churning the water about in a furious manner, yet I had to go down there in order to progress through this temple. No wonder this place was giving me painful memories from what I experienced on my previous journey.

The Water Temple was starting to look tame in comparison to the Great Bay Temple and I only just started with the latter. No doubt that this was going to test my patience to the limits of endurance.

Choosing to target the barrel on my left, I aimed the Hookshot at it and fired the chain. The tip sunk into the barrel, pulling me towards it though I ended up crashing into the side of the barrel--at least I didn't fall into the water--rather than make a safe landing. Knowing that I couldn't simply hack it to pieces, I thought about using the Goron Mask and simply punch it instead, but that seemed like a waste of using my Goron body just to smash a barrel.

Then I decided to just roll into it to see if that would be enough. What made me think of rolling? I'm not sure but something in my head was telling me that rolling into a barrel would smash it without any problems. Problems... Ha! My mind should have been more specific by saying that I needed some distance before rolling. My first attempt left me with a bruised head as I wasn't far away enough and my second almost sent me into the water. My third attempt broke the barrel releasing a Stray Fairy that somehow hadn't suffered any damage from my incessant rolling--I suffered damage--and when it entered my body, I jumped down to the walkway I should have noticed sooner.

Using a Hookshot was just a means to an end and I could have used the walkway and accompanying ladder for a safer trip. My eyes then caught sight of a pot situated at the very bottom of the pool of water. " Twilight? Who do you suppose put that jar down there?"

" I'm not sure but it seems strange don't you think?"

" It could contain magic power."

" Or it could contain rupees which you don't really need right now."

" In any case, I should break it otherwise I won't stop thinking about it."

" With the strong water current, you won't be able to smash it as a Zora as you'll just be thrown about at the water's whim." Twilight said. " Perhaps you could fire an arrow down there instead and smash it that way? It's a risk though since you only have seven left."

Taking out the Hero's Bow and aiming down into the water, I was beginning to understand why Her Highness said that it was a risk. I could barely see the pot down there and my vision was constantly obscured by that propeller though looking down had given me a new insight as to how it really operated.

I assumed there was only one propeller churning the water, the one that could be seen on the surface, yet it turned out that it wasn't the only one. There was a second propeller hidden beneath the first one--it's small size made it difficult to spot--though it was moving at a much slower speed. I couldn't help but be impressed that someone managed to construct a waterwheel of such magnitude to begin with.

Unlike Hyrule, it seemed Termina had a better understanding of technology, and the results in this room spoke for themselves. Granted, the world that I now called home could probably produce something a lot better in comparison to this given how far advanced things had gotten, yet I could appreciate the simpler things since Equestria had similar technological marvels--it was a kingdom that relied heavily on magic more than anything else. I was curious as to how often this waterwheel is maintained since it did look as though it were getting rusty in various places.

Firing an arrow into the water, I couldn't tell if it had connected with the pot or if it missed its mark, but a few moments later, something started glowing at the bottom of the pool and it looked familiar. Putting my bow away and donning the Great Fairy's Mask, whatever was glowing suddenly started floating upwards before jumping out and entering my body. To think that a Stray Fairy was hidden in such an inconspicuous yet obvious location though the water made it more difficult to see. The fact that I shattered the pot with one arrow showed how lucky I could be sometimes.

" That should be my fifth Stray Fairy, right?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " So far, we seem to be finding them at a relatively good pace."

" It won't last for much longer." I said. " We've only just started exploring this temple and I'm certain the rest will be scattered all over the place. I really wish we had the map of this place so you can use your magic to mark down where each fairy has been found so far."

" Why not make your own map?"

" I don't have any paper." I answered sarcastically."

" Oh."

" In any case, we might as well keep going."

" Time to become a Zora."

Putting the Great Fairy's Mask away, switching over to the Zora Mask, and putting it on my face, I immediately jumped into the water during the transformation, yet for some reason my jump became a dive and I ended up rolling on the larger propeller before crashing into the wall. Why did my body do that!? I clearly made a jump, not a dive! In any case, the crash left me dazed for several seconds before my transformation finished. Landing with a splash, I dove underwater only to experience first hand just how powerful the water vortex was. I tried swimming to see if I could beat it but it proved too much.

It actually reminded me of a room in the Water Temple that had a water vortex that prevented me from swimming normally yet this situation was so much worse. The vortex pulled me down to the bottom where it began pushing and pulling me about before throwing me into the wall. I dropped down onto my butt but had no time to react as I got pulled over to the other side, slamming into the opposite wall.

" This isn't working!"

" You need to swim with the current."

" Kind of hard to do that right now."

" Just swim like you usually do."

" Easy for you to say."

Princess Twilight then looked around for a path I could use to escape from this room. " There are four passageways we can take, Sunset, but I think some of them might not be available to you due to the water current coming from those directions pushing outwards rather than inwards." Her Highness then started to think which didn't settle well with me as I struggled getting back onto my feet. " I'm beginning to get the picture regarding how this temple works, and I can't believe I didn't realize it until now."

" I could do without the long speech."

" Sorry." Twilight said. " With the water flowing in its current direction, we can only access some areas of the temple while others are blocked due to the flow. We need to bring water back to the first waterwheel we encountered and reverse the flow."

" Do we even know where to start looking?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " No, but that's what guessing is all about."

My jaw dropped in response to what she said. This is why I needed a map in case something like this happened as the thought of going around a proverbial maze without any hints as to what I was looking for left me wanting to just cry my eyes out. It wasn't bad enough that there were four different directions I could go but rather I couldn't go down all of them because the water current was too strong. What if what I was looking for ended up being down one of the paths that was inaccessible right now? I'd never be able to reach it resulting in wasting my remaining time for this cycle before having to reset.

I sighed knowing that the Great Bay Temple was essentially in control of my fate. Unless I lucked out and wound up in the right area of the temple, I'd have to make my way back here again and try a different path hoping it's the right one.

Pushing myself off of the wall, I began swimming in hopes that the current would take me down the right path, yet I ended up circling around the room and continued to repeat this cycle because of not knowing which path was correct. I needed something, a signal or some kind, to show me that this was the right way to take. That's when I noticed the red pipe from before that had no water flowing through it. It extended all the way down to the bottom of the pool and down a path where I sensed the water's flow working in my favour. Since I didn't have any other options, I decided to take a chance and swim towards that particular passageway.

It wasn't easy what with the current pushing me around but I managed to make my way into the passage the red pipe was moving though I couldn't stop as the current pulled me along down the passageway until it ejected me into a Shellblade that was waiting at the other end. A second one was located nearby yet didn't move but the first one did, bouncing along the ground ramming into me before closing up its mouth. I needed a few moments to gather my bearings and to find out where I was.

There were several columns stuck in the ground with each one surrounding a large pillar though I wasn't sure what it was supposed to be. Above my head were some of those exploding spikes so I needed to swim carefully otherwise I would take some damage. Then the sound of a familiar monster began ringing through my ears, and when I turned around to see what it was and confirm my supicions, I groaned upon seeing several Skullfish swimming towards me. I should have expected they would be here since this was an underwater temple, yet I didn't really want to run into them.

" It's like every underwater monster has gathered here." I moaned.

" There might be some new ones that we haven't seen before."

" I'm not looking forward to meeting those."

" I'll be able to give you the necessary information, Sunset, when the time comes." Twilight said. " Now, there is one thing about Shellblades that I never mentioned to you before, so now as good a time as any to mention it. When they close their mouths after opening them and charge towards potential prey, they can only move in one direction making them easy enough to avoid yet it will be awkward since we are underwater. Also, they can only move a certain distance before having to stop moving. It seems they tire themselves out easily by using up their energy by charging forward."

" In the past, I used a Hookshot to hit them when they open their mouths."

" You won't be able to do that this time."

" Without any Iron Boots, I can't walk around underwater." I said. The Skullfish were soon upon me and I used my magic barrier to destroy each of them as they came into contact with the electricity I was producing via magic. " That's what enabled me to use a Hookshot underwater last time."

" Um, Sunset?" Twilight asked. " You can already walk underwater."

" You know what I meant!"

Princess Twilight rolled her eyes. " Anyway, you can use your fins to strike their weak point inside of their mouths, but you'll need to get close to them otherwise they won't open up and could easily retaliate."

Even though being a Zora was way better than walking around underwater whilest wearing a specialized tunic and heavy boots, the fact that I couldn't use my Hookshot in this particular environment meant that I had to be more cautious when dealing with monsters. I guessed even something as underwater combat as a Zora wasn't perfect especially if it meant having to fight up close. My fins did give me some range though they weren't entirely accurate and could easily be deflected.

Walking up to the nearby Shellblade with my fins out and ready to fire, I inched a little closer and fired just as its mouth opened. My fins bounced off its thick shell before coming back around and striking it from behind destroying it. Rather than focus on the other one, I decided to swim up to the surface in order to see what was up with that pillar. As I floated up to the surface, the pillar began getting narrow though my eyes were looking at another familiar monster that suddenly disappeared into the water. The instant my head popped out of the water, something hit me from behind and I spralled up onto a small platform.

I tried getting back up only to be knocked down by the same thing though my eyes noticed bits of rocks scatter about. Crawling on all fours until I reached the corner of the room, I turned around and raised one of my fins to act as a shield, and learned that there was a second monster nearby spitting rocks in my direction. These things were slightly annoying during my last journey though I couldn't recall their names off the top of my head. My eyes then noticed another of those strange switches on top of the pillar though there was no way I could reach it as it was too high, and a locked door indicated that I had come the wrong way, or came here too soon.

" Those are Octoroks." Twilight said. " They will disappear under the water if you get too close to them and love to spit rocks at you as a means of attack. If you can bounce back their projectiles, they'll be taken down in just one hit, but make sure you're close otherwise they could fire a second one and both will crumble upon impact."

" I remember fighting them before though they weren't that annoying."

" If anything they are just a nuisance."

" Have you noticed the switch up on top of that--" I said before blocking another rock. " You know what, just give me a few moments, Twilight." Getting up and holding out my fin like a shield, the Octorok fired another rock which I easily bounced back into it getting rid of it before turning to the left and bouncing back a rock that the other one fired, defeating it and allowing me to breathe easily for a few moments. " Anyway, did you notice the switch up on top of that pillar? I think that might be what we need to activate to get some water flowing back to the waterwheel we encountered earlier."

" I don't think you can reach it."

" Yeah, I kind of figured that out on my own."

" You might be able to if you could somehow use those Octoroks as stepping stones."

" They probably wouldn't let me do that."

" Unless you could somehow freeze them in place, I don't see any other option right now." Twilight said. " Not only that, but you need to find a key to open that locked door up ahead so it looks like we took a wrong turn."

" Again, I figured that out though not the freezing bit."

" Normally, we unicorns/alicorns would use our magic to freeze anything we want by using a simple freeze spell, but neither of us have access to our Equestrian magic right now so maybe you might get something that can freeze monsters. Who knows? It might be able to do much more in the right context." Twilight said.

" There was something I acquired on my previous journey that does sound like it could work."

" What was it?"

" It was called an Ice Arrow." I answered. " While it ended up serving no particular use as there wasn't anything I could do with it, the fact that it had the power to freeze anything the arrows came into contact with was too good not to use though now that I think back on it, maybe I should have used them to get past some pretty difficult monsters. I earned it by clearing a series of trials that many others before me had tried to conquer only to fail but I suppose that isn't really important. If those same Ice Arrows are somewhere inside this temple, I need to get my hands on them as soon as possible."

" You know, we should be glad that the pirates didn't manage to find their way in here."

" Why is that?"

" If this Ice Arrow is as powerful as you say it is, it would be dangerous in the wrong hands." Twilight said. " We saw how Rainbow Dash and her fellow pirates behaved especially when it came to their selfish lust for treasure. Had they acquired those arrows, they either would have sold them and earned a huge profit or used them against the Zoras thus allowing them to conquer Great Bay without any real opposition. I suppose they could have potentially waged war against the rest of Termina if they were feeling especially confident."

" Knowing them, they probably would have sold it off to someone in Clock Town."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, I suppose that does sound like the more plausible option. I can't imagine seeing Rainbow wanting to conquer anything and instead preferring to chillax--her words and not mine--and wait for something awesome to happen." Her Highness then looked at my body though not as extensive as what Coloratura did hence why I wasn't feeling uncomfortable. " Another reason why they couldn't have those Ice Arrows is because Zoras don't like hot and cold climates. While fire doesn't bother them too much, ice is especially cumbersome for them."

" Why didn't you mention it before?"

" I only figured it out now."

" Tatl's memories?"

" Yes."

I shivered knowing this new piece of information. It reminded me not only of the winter conditions of Snowhead but also my experiences dealing with winter in the world that I now called home. No matter how hard I tried, I just couldn't get used to the sudden temperature drop followed by all that snow falling for what felt like forever couple with icy patches showing up everywhere. Even in Equestria, the snow just didn't resonate with me and I preferred to stay indoors and study--I may have been arrogant back then but at least I was smart regarding the snow.

Just thinking about being frozen as a Zora chilled me to the bone. It would be even worse than the time on my previous journey where I was trapped in a chunk of ice and almost froze to death--I did manage to break free before anything serious happened--because of it. That meant I needed to be even more careful especially if there were any monsters lurking in the temple that possessed ice-like powers.

" No matter what, I still plan on getting those Ice Arrows."

" That won't be easy what with the water currents in the central chamber forcing down certain paths."

" I wonder if there was another path I could take?"

" Only way for us to know is to go back there and find out."

" How do we get back?" I asked. " It's not like I can swim back the way we came."

" Maybe not but perhaps there is a path in this room that connects back to the central chamber."

Jumping back into the water, I began to swim around in hopes of finding a path that would take me back--it took me five minutes to find it--and when I did find it, I swam close to it and was immediately pulled forward and down the path, my body bouncing off the walls until I stumbled into the central chamber where I began getting pushed around by the strong water current again. No doubt that this temple was going to become my least favourite given how it was controlling my every movement and leaving me little in the way of being able to go about it at my own leisure.

Swimming around in the central chamber, I found a passage that I thought I could swim down but the current kept pushing me away so that route was a bust. I then swam towards another passage only to be rejected in the same manner leaving me feeling angry over how my progress was being impeded by water. One more passage remained and this one had both the red and yellow pipes lining either side of it, and since this was the only choice left, I swam towards in hopes that it would pull me towards it--it did.

The current pulled me down the passage--I didn't bounce around this time as I expected it--before ejecting me into a room that had columns strewn about everywhere with different sizes of Skullfish swimming about. Rather than fighting them--I'd be wasting precious magic as I didn't have much left--I chose to avoid them while heading towards a series of pots located nearby. Again, I had no idea who put them here but at this point it didn't matter as I could do with some magic jars.

Watching to make sure I didn't attract the Skullfish, I smashed the first three pots using my fins revealing a big magic jar and a couple of green rupees. Picking up the magic jar and the rupees, I opted not to break the other pots as I suspected they contained green rupees which would be wasting my time. At this point, money wasn't important as was my survivalin a temple that was already beginning to get on my nerves. I was about to swim up to the surface when I noticed a pair of skeletal hands embedded into the wall down a passage that I couldn't traverse due to the current.

" What in the hay is that?"

" That is a Dexihand."

" A what?"

" A Dexihand." Twilight answered. " It looks harmless and it actually is but don't underestimate its power. While it can't inflict any damage to you, it can grab you with its bony fingers and fling you somewhere else where you don't want to be. Most of the time they will simply impede your progress though some of them may be guarding something important like say a treasure for example."

" It doesn't look like I can attack it very easily."

" Most attacks are ineffective against it though your fins will prove effective."

" At least that's a positive sign."

" There is one more thing you need to be weary about." Twilight said. " When you defeat a Dexihand, another one will grow and take the place of the one you defeated several moments later so I suggest you don't dawdle around."

Just looking at those skeletal hands made me feel sick to my stomach. I knew there were strange monsters in this world yet this one in particular was one of the strangest I'd ever seen despite it being relatively harmless. It seemed that it was probably for the best to just avoid and only attack them from a distance rather than try to fight up close. Since they were down a path that I couldn't traverse, I had no reason to fight them so I turned around and was about to float upwards when something else caught my eye. Another group of Skullfish were nearby yet one of them was bigger than the rest.

Upon a closer look, it resembled a Skullfish though it looked meaner and appeared to be watching me as much as I was watching it. I took a step backwards in hopes of avoiding it yet it swam forward in response leaving me to suddenly swim upwards and it followed.

Reaching the surface, I quickly climbed out of the water and onto a platform--it was being supported by the column below it--and looked down to see that my would-be pursuer had decided to go back where it came from leaving me to deal with where I had ended up when I got ejected. This room consisted of a few platforms on top of the water with the one nearest to me housing a large treasure chest that either contained a map or a compass--not the temple's treasure--and a door was situated at the opposite end.

" Okay... What was that?"

" That was a Desbreko." Twilight answered. She looked at me and noticed my confused look so she ignored it and continued with her explanation. " While it does bear a resemblance to the Skullfish we've been seeing all over this part of Termina, they are much more aggressive in nature."

" How so?"

" If it bites you, it refuses to let go so you'll need to do whatever you can to shake it off."

" I'm guessing it's easy to defeat?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " Desbreko don't handle hits very well and can be taken down using either your fins or your magic barrier in just one hit. Also, they are seen as leaders among Skullfish so if you defeat one while a swarm of Skullfish are around, the latter will also be defeated."

That was some pretty useful information right there and one that I would be sure to use in the future. Looking back at the large treasure chest, I surmised that it could be used as a potential Hookshot target given it was made of wood, but then the platform it was on didn't look all that high so perhaps I could jump over to it and grab onto the edge with my hands--my current body was much taller than my human form so the extra height could prove to be enough. Looking left was another platform housing a pair of pots and I decided it would be best to go for those first--I desperately needed arrows at this point especially if the treasure was the Ice Arrows.

Telling Princess Twilight of my plan, she took a few moments to look at both platforms before nodding her head in approval. Since the one on the left was slightly lower to the water, I only needed to swim over to it rather than do something overly complicated.

Jumping into the water and swimming over to the platform before climbing back out, I smashed the first pot with my fin revealing a set of twenty arrows--just what I needed--that I happily picked up, then I smashed the other one revealing another Stray Fairy. This was beginning to become a trend regarding their hiding spots. So far, the Stray Fairies had been hidden in common objects one would most likely ignore, inside a chest, and in the clutches of a monster.

On the one hand, I felt bad over how they were being treated just because they were parts of a complete whole. On the other hand, it told me that I couldn't afford to overlook anything as doing so would mean potentially missing one, and I'd rather not have to backtrack through this temple given how it was already testing my patience. Another thought that crossed my mind had to do with whether I should speak to Adagio first before the boss or afterwards. She could provide me with a powerful ability that could make it easier for me or something that wasn't as useful as appearances suggested.

Once the sixth Stray Fairy was inside me, I lined myself up with the treasure chest on the other platform, and made a leap of faith only to end up missing and slamming my face into the platform's side before sliding down to the bottom of the room--that definitely was one of my most embarrassing moments yet. Rubbing my slightly bruised face, I swam back up to the surface, climbed up onto the opposite ledge and attempted to leap across again. This time proved to be successful as I grabbed the edge of the other ledge with my fingers--though I was barely able to hold on--before picking myself up.

Princess Twilight chuckled a little. " That was mildly entertaining."

" At least I got it right the second time around."

" Maybe you should have used the Hookshot instead." Twilight said. " It would have prevented you from hurting your face."

" Yeah, I suppose that was the better option." I said. Opening up the large treasure chest and reaching into it by bending forward, I pulled the Dungeon Map and immediately unfurled it to get a better sense of how this temple was laid out room wise. " This place isn't as big as I thought. In fact, some of the rooms seem to share multiple levels while other rooms are distinctly small in scope."

Princess Twilight took a closer look at the map. " Despite how small Great Bay Temple is, it doesn't change the fact that this will be more difficult than the previous two temple, though now that I think about it, who knows what will await us when we reach the last one located to the east."

I sighed knowing that was true but I wasn't going to think about that. " Want to mark down where the Stray Fairies we've found were located on the map using your magic?"

" Oh, yes, of course." Twilight said. " She then used her fairy magic to create tiny marks on the map showing where the fairies were. " I'm surprised we've found five of them already given we only just started this place exploring but like I said, it will get much harder from here so we need to search carefully. " Her Highness then looked at the door on the opposite end of the room followed by the map and then the door again. " The room beyond that door doesn't necessarily lead anywhere but it's still a good idea to check it out anyway. That's what I want to say if not for the door being on a ledge that's too high for you to reach."

" What if I were to jump out of the water like a fish?"

" I'm not sure you'll be able to build up enough speed."

" I could try just in case, right?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I suppose you could but do be careful, Sunset."

Putting the Dungeon Map away and jumping back into the water, I swam over to the wall, turned around, used my legs to propel me forward by pushing against the wall, and swam as fast as I could making sure to keep my eyes focused. I leapt out using a dolphin-like jump and for a moment it looked like I was going to make it, but unfortunately, my leap wasn't enough resulting in slamming my head against the side of the ledge the door was situated on. Dazed, I dropped to the bottom of the room before being pulled down another passageway courtesy of the strong water current flowing into it.

My body bounced around the passageway though I couldn't prevent it as I was numb from hitting my head, and when the vortex ejected me into the next room, I landed on the ground with a loud thud and remained there for several minutes before I finally regained my composure. Rubbing the bruise that had since formed on my head, I was beginning to think that perhaps it would be wise to wear a helmet otherwise any further blows to the head could cause some serious brain injury.

" I don't think I'll try that again." I said in a tipsy manner.

" Are you alright?"

" You were right about me not having enough speed."

" Well, now you know better, Sunset."

" Guess I'll need to find another means of getting to that door."

" First, you'd have to make your way back there." Twilight said. " The water current that pulled you into the passageway after your little stunt has thrown us into another room, but I think we should deal with the current problem before doing anything else."

Before I had a chance to respond, something suddenly lunged out at me and managed to bite me in the shoulder. Reacting quickly, I grabbed whatever was biting me and pulled it off after struggling for several seconds--it had a pretty strong grip--before it retreated back.

Looking to see what had just decided to take a bite out of me, I was surprised to see that it was just an ordinary Deku Baba. Had I seriously just allowed myself to be bitten by one of the most common and easiest monsters in this world? Upon taking a closer look, I noticed the strange arms attached to the stem along with the eyes--they were connected to the head via vines--moving about as though they were watching my every move. This thing wasn't a Deku Baba but rather it was a alterate version that screamed mutant.

" That looks like a Deku Baba."

" It isn't though there are similarities." Twilight said. " This is a Bio Deku Baba, a strain of the regular variant that somehow developed limbs in addition to eyes that enable it to see things and keep track of potential prey that comes into its territory."

" I'm guessing the eyes and limbs are just for show?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, though the eyes can be really distracting because of how they move about. You need to be careful with this one, Sunset, when it comes to cutting down its stem. Unlike the regular Deku Babas, the Bio Deku Baba can still fight even if you cut the stem though if you attack its head, you can defeat it in one shot though that will require the use of magic as I'm certain your fins are likely to cut it down. There's one more thing."

" What's that?"

" Make sure you sever them from the lily pads they are attached to."

" I'm sure I don't need to do that." I said. " I can just avoid them by using the lily pads to go over them."

" Except they will turn them over and attack you quickly before you have a chance to defend yourself."

" Oh."

" I suggest using your magic here." Twilight said. " That way, you can take them all out without having to waste time cutting them down and then attacking them, and yes, they are capable of walking around using those limbs so don't think they just stand around after being cut down."

Just when I thought these horrid plants couldn't get anymore annoying, they had to spring this twisted version on me that had a much deeper bite than I thought. While my shoulder wasn't bleeding from being bitten by it, the pain was still there and would take some time for it to heal--I could've used the red potion Rarity gave to me just before I entered the temple but I planned on saving it for something more important.

Since it was easier to use magic, and lucky for me that I picked up a magic jar in a previous room, I opted to go for the magic barrier. I swam back to the beginning of the room which wasn't very far as the first Bio Deku Baba was practically next to it, and planted my legs on the wall before pushing myself forward and activating my barrier. The electrical magic flared up in an instant allowing me to go through each one like they were nothing, reducing them to pieces of mulch that drifted apart in the water before disappearing altogether. It wasn't a pleasant sight but I could more on now at least.

At first, I didn't think I could stand on a lily pad due to previous experiences over at the Deku Palace and the Southern Swamp--those lily pads could only handle the weight of something small like a Deku rather than someone bigger--so would these ones be able to hold my weight? I didn't really have time to ponder over it as I needed to continue on while there was still time remaining in the current cycle.

I climbed onto the closest lily pad near me and braced for it to drop underwater. It didn't--much to my surprise as I was expecting to fall--so I jumped onto the other lily pads, and entered the next room when I reached the door.

" I can't believe that she is able to become whatever that aquatic creature is called." Sunset Demon said in shock.

" The term you are looking for is 'Zora'." Midnight Sparkle said. " And I find it most interesting that she was able to harness such a power as changing her body. When we saw her walking around that palace in the swamp lands of the south, I thought my eyes were playing tricks on me. It seems my vision wasn't impaired after all. I am curious as the power that is contained within her precious masks. Can you imagine what the two of us could do with that kind of power?"

" I'd rather be dead than wear one of those pathetic masks."

Midnight Sparkle sighed. " You just don't have an imagination, do you?"

Sunset Demon grew angry. " Those masks are just another reason why she is weak! If I were in charge of her life right now, I'd rely on her true power rather than borrowing it from creatures that are obviously beneath her notice." She then talked under her breath in hopes that her companion wouldn't hear what she was about to say. " Though it would be nice to be able to fight as an entirely different creature especially since you get to use their abilities as your own."

" Did you say something."

" No."

Midnight Sparkle shrugged her shoulders. " You really should open yourself up more. Holding all of those emotions must be giving you convulsions every other hour and no doubt that doesn't settle well with you."

" Why don't you mind your own business and let me deal with my own issues."

" Did I just touch a nerve?"

" If it wasn't for the fact that I see you as useful, I'd have killed you a long time ago."

" Ha! Don't be so modest." Midnight Sparkle said. " I know you care about me but choose to not admit it, and that's okay because that's the kind of person you are. Besides, I enjoy teasing you because I just love seeing you lose that hardcore attitude that you flash about like it meant something."

Sunset Demon wasn't amused and clenched her hand into a fist all while doing her best not to lose control. " Look... Let's just focus on why we are here and leave the personal insults behind okay? Now, would you be so kind as to tell me why we came to see Rarity when we could have seen someone more important like Pinkie Pie or Rainbow Dash? I mean, we do have to see those two eventually but why focus on Rarity?"

" In case you were paying attention and I sincerly doubt that, you probably noticed that Rarity had been a mute until Sunset came along." Midnight Sparkle answered. Her words only drew the ire of Sunset Demon whose fist began to glow brightly, but Midnight Sparkle noticed and patted her companion on the shoulder to calm her down. " I would have gladly suggested going after Rainbow Dash but Rarity proved more lucrative. Whatever happened to her made it impossible for us to test her Element until she gained back her ability to talk again thanks to our mutual friends."

" If time resetted because of 'her', we wouldn't be able to speak with Rarity?"

" Not in our usual means."

" We've already figured out that their Elements are breaching this world by testing Applejack and Fluttershy." Sunset Demon said. " Why are we wasting our time visiting the rest of them when our real targets are inside the temple out there?" The she-demon then noticed Midnight Sparkle holding some kind of strange locket that she quickly hid behind her back upon it being discovered. " You'd better show me what you have otherwise I will force you into showing me."

Midnight Sparkle sighed and revealed the locket though it wasn't really all that impressive. " It's just a little memento I received when I was lost in limbo. I promise to share more insight with you when the time comes, but right now we should take care of Rarity before something else happens." She then jumped down from the top of Zora Hall--that was where the two demons were located--and landed in front of Rariry who was surprised at her sudden guest.

Sunset Demon didn't jump down at first but rather began to think about the significance behind the locket. Her fellow demon was being very secretive about it and didn't want her to know about it until much later. The she-demon still thought of Midnight Sparkle as a worthwhile companion who had been able to get her to think differently and to embrace the nuances of being patient, yet it seemed her 'friend' had ulterior motives that could potentially threaten her own ambitions. For now, she would play along by feining ignorance though not extensively in case Midnight Sparkle could see through it.

With that, Sunset Demon jumped down to the ground to make sure everything went well yet now she had to be cautious until she could piece together what was really going on regarding her companion.

" Oh my!" Rarity exclaimed when she was suddenly surrounded.

" Relax..." Midnight Sparkle said. " If you cooperate with us, there won't be any trouble."

" I don't believe I've ever seen the likes of you two before."

" Oh I don't doubt that."

" The thing is, is that you two really should have made reservations if you wanted to see me in person." Rarity said. " No one is really allowed to see any of us unless they booked an appointment through our manager, and even then I'm afraid I'm not in the mood for signing autographs at this point in time."

" We needed an appointment?"

Rarity nodded. " Mrs. Toto has always said that we need to do things this way so as to prevent us from being mobbed by our fans. When you are as famous as we are, you have a tendency to attract some really obsessed individuals who usually mean well but ultimately go overboard. Like I said, I'm currently not in the mood for signing autographs or really talking to anyone, yet I deepy apologize for the inconvenience. You see, someone who means so much to me entered the temple in order to stop what has been causing the ocean so much distress that also affected me. I am praying for his safe return by remaining here."

" This will only take a few minutes of your time." Midnight Sparkle said. " And then we will leave you alone."

" Well... I suppose I could give you my attention."

" I was hoping you would say that."

I couldn't believe that there was one additional Bio Deku Baba in addition to the three that I had defeated. Her Highness was able to warn me about it just as I entered the next room, prompting me to go back and check it out. Unfortunately, the ones I had defeated came back no thanks to their re-spawning ability--an issue I never liked during my previous journey and now not liking it here--so I jumped down into the water and began to swim using my magic barrier to destroy each one without fighting them properly. When the last one fell, I climbed onto the first lily pad and leapt onto a ledge that was hidden behind me at the time with the remaining Bio Deku Baba on the ceiling.

Using my magic wasn't going to work as it was too high for me to reach so I'd use my fins at it in hopes of cutting it down. Protruding and firing my fins--the lack of space made it a little awkward--it took me two attempts to cut the Bio Deku Baba down where it began moving around all while trying to bite me with its mouth. I assumed a defensive position followed by using my barrier turning it into mulch resulting in a small treasure chest materializing behind me. Upon kicking it open, a Stray Fairy came out and quickly entered my body giving me seven so far though many more were waiting.

Despite the minor setback, I took care of it relatively quickly so I jumped across the lily pads and entered the next room properly. This room consisted of a large body of water with a river flowing rather fast below me. To my left was a platform that housed a large treasure chest though it also housed one of those Real Bombchu creatures that I encountered in the previous temple. So long as I was out of its range, I could easily set myself up to deflect it without getting caught in the explosion. To my right was another platform with an icicle and further right was a fancy looking cage that seemed to have another chest on the other side though it was difficult to see.

The first thing I did was to take a closer look at the river of water below me. On the left hand side was nothing of particular note though it seemed I would need to go down the passageway if I wanted to make my way back to the central chamber. Yet it was what to my right in the water that piqued my curiosity. Nestled in-between a pair of Dexihands was a pot and was obvious that it housed something important if it warranted some unusual guards.

" What do you think?" I asked. " Could there be another Stray Fairy hidden in that pot down there?"

" I wouldn't be surprised if that were the case."

" So far, they have been located in unusual places."

" Yes, and from what I told you about Dexihands, they have a tendency to guard something important."

" Do you think I can hit the pot with my fins?"

Princess Twilight floated down to the ground to get a closer look making sure not to get too close to the Dexihands. " I think you can hit it from here, but the problem is that you can't jump into the water as you'll likely get pulled by the current down the passageway. Then again, you might get grabbed by one of the Dexihands and get flung somewhere else. It looks like you'll need to become a human if we're to rescue that Stray Fairy."

" Arrows should do the trick."

" Yes, but you could also use the Hookshot as it doesn't waste ammunition."

" That's not a bad idea."

Grabbing my face, pulling off the Zora Mask, and flipping my hair back, I put it away and took out both the Hookshot and the Great Fairy's Mask before donning the latter and aiming with the former. It quickly dawned on me that aside from the transformation masks, I had only used three other masks throughout this journey. It felt like the majority of masks I had collected meant nothing apart from looking good as costume pieces. I mean, the Bremen Mask and Blast Mask were ones I've used only once each because I needed their unique powers while the Great Fairy's Mask had been used extensively inside the temples.

Maybe I should start using these other masks rather than let them go to waste. Then again, most of them only had specific uses and were practically useless if I were in any other situation that didn't need them. The only one I could see that would be useful at any time was the Bunny Hood. I should use it the next time I encounter a powerful monster as the boost in speed could prove useful.

Firing the Hookshot at the underwater pot--it took a few tries as I needed to get right to the edge for it to hit--and smashing it to pieces, the Stray Fairy floated up out of the water and into my body through being entranced by the Great Fairy's Mask's shimmering hair. With that done, I took off and put the mask away before turning my sights towards what was guarding the large treasure chest. Despite it being dangerous what with that explosive on its tail, the Real Bombchu wasn't exactly all that threatening. If anything, it was just excited about running around and defying gravity by running up the wall.

Still, I needed to get rid of it before I could cross over. My first thought involved firing some arrows since I did recently replenish them, but its erratic behaviour would make aiming difficult and wasting arrows wasn't an option. Perhaps I could use the Hookshot instead. It would save me from wasting arrows though I'd have to wait for the chain to spring back before firing it again.

Aiming the Hookshot at the Real Bombchu and walking forward to get within striking range, I fired the chain and missed entirely though my effort didn't seem to bother it--maybe it truly was ignorant of everything around it. Firing a second time, the chain almost connected though missed by several feet yet now it began moving towards the chest and I needed to keep up with its movements. A third attempt resulted in the Hookshot tip plunging into the chest and pulling me forward where the Real Bombchu freaked out and exploded. There was no chance of me avoiding it.

BOOM!!!!

" Sunset! Are you alright?" Twilight asked in the midst of the smoke.

I coughed in response. " I'm okay though I wasn't expecting that."

" I'm surprised the explosion didn't do more damage not that I want to see you hurt."

" Maybe explosions work differently in this world compared with what it's like back home."

" Probably for the best that we don't tempt it."

I nodded. " Yeah. I'd like to keep my life thank you very much." Opening up the treasure chest, I took out the Compass that laid on the bottom, put it away, and took out the map to see the chest marks appearing all over it. " There are still plenty of chests left for us to find." My eyes then looked down at the skull mark that indicated the location of what had been causing Great Bay's water to get warmer resulting in the underwater monsters. " And our resident boss is right there."

Princess Twilight then looked at the map. " It's located in area that we can't access right now due to the water current flowing in the wrong direction. For now, all we can do is keep that location in mind and come back to it later when we can reverse the current." She then looked at the map and noticed something surprising. " According to the map, there are two chests in this room you haven't opened yet."

" Wait... Really?"

" Yes."

" There's the one right here that had the compass and the one I can barely see over there behind that cage."

Princess Twilight checked the map again. " Well, it definitely says there are two unopened chests here so one of them is in a location we can't see right now or perhaps we can't reach due to not having the right item." Her Highness then took notice of the pool of water in front of us and slapped her forehead. " Or the remaining chest just happens to be right in front of us and we didn't even bother to look in the right place." Her eyes focused down at the pool and I walked over to the edge to see a Bio Deku Baba hiding down there guarding a small treasure chest.

" Can't believe we didn't see that."

" I blame myself."

" It was an honest mistake."

" Well, you should get down there and collect whatever is in the chest." Twilight said. " What we really need right now is a key to unlock that one door we encountered when we took the wrong path earlier."

Since I needed to swim through the passageway anyway to get back to the central chamber, I put away all of my current equipment and took out the Zora Mask, placing it on my face, and squatting down as the magic changed my body parts into my Zora form. Upon transforming and walking off the ledge and into the water, I dropped down to the bottom of the pool only to suddenly feel a sharp pain on my knee. The Bio Deku Baba had lunged forward before I could react and I quickly responded by smacking its head repeatedly with my fins until it let go leaving a red mark behind.

Before it had a chance to attack me again, I used my magic barrier and destroyed it immediately leaving me to look at my knee. The wound wasn't terribly deep and I could easily walk around without feeling any pain, but I needed to make sure not to make the wound worse. While I had a red potion courtesy of Rarity to restore my health and heal my wounds, I needed to keep it until absolutely necessary.

Walking over to the chest and kicking it open, I took out the small key, placed it in my pocket before floating back to the surface and climbing out of the water. My eyes then noticed there wasn't just one ice chunk on the platform that was beyond my reach but rather several. I had no idea why they were there though I had a feeling I was going to be going through that door soon enough. Just looking at those ice chunks sent a shiver down my spine though it was due to the Zora blood coursing through me that felt really uncomfortable.

Jumping into the water current and being pulled through the passageway, I was ejected into the central chamber again though a little too fast for my tastes resulting in me being thrown at the wall and bruising my back--this temple was becoming more of a deathtrap than the actual traps themselves--though I wasn't stunned. The current picked me up and began spinning me around the outer edge of the chamber and I knew I had to break free otherwise I'd never get out of this area. I also needed to be careful not to swim down the wrong passage as doing so would force me into going back around wasting precious time.

Remembering that the passage I needed to swim down only featured a red pipe going along the wall, I pinpointed its location, pressed my legs against the wall, and pushed myself forward as hard as I could until I was grabbed by the new current and pulled through the passage until being ejected in the room that housed the switch and locked door. Unfortunately, I also had to deal with the Skullfish, Desbreko, and Shellblades who had since re-spawned since my previous visit.

" Guess I've got to deal with these guys again." I said, moaning.

" Remember what I said about the Desbreko?"

" Defeating it will take care of the Skullfish, right?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. Just be careful that it doesn't bite you otherwise you'll need to shake it off as it will refuse to let go."

As if on cue, the Desbreko noticed me and began swimming towards me with the Skullfish in hot pursuit, but I wasn't about to give it a chance at clamping onto my body with its undead maw so I knelt down and protruded out one fin to serve as a shield. The group continued swimming in my direction and just when they were about to on top of me, I activated my magic barrier and wiped out the Desbreko causing the Skullfish to fall apart as though I never attacked them. As for the two Shellblades, I wasn't anywhere near either one so there was no sense in attacking them.

Floating up to the surface, I popped my head out of the water only to be struck from behind by the same thing that hit me the last time I was in this room, and landing on the platform but not before sprawling into the corner. How could I have forgotten the two Octoroks who were present in this room? In any case, defeating them would also be a waste of time though I began to see how best to utilize them based on a stronger observation of my surroundings.

The Ice Arrow had the power to freeze targets in a block of ice--much like how it could before on my previous journey--so if I were to freeze one of these two Octoroks at just the right time, they could be used as an additional platform for me to reach the switch. Raising my fin to block the additional rocks being spat at me, I began to look around the room to see if I could find a means of reaching the locked door, and pay dirt was quickly found when I realized that I could walk up the red pipe--it was also my only option.

When the two Octoroks paused for a few seconds in-between volleys, I jumped into the water, swam over to where the red pipe was going up the wall, and walked up it and onto the ledge--it was a pretty slippery slope--before using the small key to unlock the door and going through into the next room. This room comprised of two rows of pots that lined either side of a path that lead up to another door. I had no doubt that these pots contained useful items and that made me suspect something dangerous was lurking on the other side. There was also a strange creature that bore a resemblance to the creatures seen in Termina Field.

" Isn't that one of those jelly monsters?"

" It's definitely a Chu-Chu though this one is a yellow variant."

" Is there anything different about it?"

" Not really other than what's inside of it."

" Is that an arrow?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " Yellow Chu-Chus when destroyed leave behind an arrow that will give you back five arrows to put in your quiver, and just like the other two variants, it can and will re-spawn on its own without us leaving the room and coming back in again. Oh, if you defeat it while you have the maximum number of arrows you can carry, it will instead leave behind a green rupee."

" I could do with more arrows."

" Then slash away!"

Hearing those words from Her Highness sounded really weird but then she was right in that I just needed to slash the Yellow Chu-Chu to pieces. Before walking up to it, I decided that it would be best to become a human for the next room--my gut was telling me to be a human as the arrow dropping monster was a sign. Grabbing my face, I took off the Zora Mask to become human, and flipped my hair back before putting the mask away behind my back.

From there, I drew my sword and shield, walked up to the Yellow Chu-Chu, and with one swing, sliced it in half. Picking up the arrow it left behind, I slashed the pots revealing more arrows, recovery hearts, magic jars, and even a couple of rupees. Now my gut was really telling me that something was going to happen when I enter the next room as why else would there be so much in the way of resources? Unless this was the temple attempting to show me some pity, I needed to prepare for the worst.

Walking through the door and into the next room, the first thing that happened was the door closing behind me with iron bars indicating that something needed to be overcome or a puzzle that needed to be solved if I was to be able to continue on. In each corner were small boxes that may or may not contain additional items and the floor had water that only went up to my shoes which struck me as odd. What was also strange was the size of this room. It felt similar in scope to the central chamber though obviously not to the same extent. Still, it was larger than most other rooms in the temple.

" It feels quiet... too quiet."

Princess Twilight agreed. " The lack of noise does make things uneasy, yet I can sense some kind of presence in this room."

" Really? I don't see anything."

" Maybe we should around just in case."

I was about to say something when my neck suddenly felt a cold chill hit it. " What the heck was that!? I reached behind my neck to see what it was and my face turned cold upon feeling a clammy substance. Pulling my hand back, I was surprised to see some kind of slime though I quickly flicked it away in disgust. " Did I seriously just get hit by slime!? Can this get any weirder?"

" Something must be above us to warrant that."

" I wonder what it could be."

Looking up at the ceiling proved to be a mistake as my entire body froze in place. There was definitely something up there on the ceiling... A large something that was surrounded by hundreds of smaller somethings with the big one staring down at me with a gaze that could pierce a person's soul. No wonder I received so many items in the previous room. They were there to prepare me for whatever this thing was. Raising my shield and holding my sword firmly, I awaited to see what was about to happen.

Chapter 43: Eye of the Frog

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
February 6, 2017
Chapter 43: Eye of the Frog.

I had seen plenty of strange things throughout this journey, yet what was hanging on the ceiling above me was without a doubt the strangest thing of all. Not even the most vile of creatures from Equestria paled in comparison to what I had to fight, and I had seen plenty of those during my studies as Princess Celestia's student. I had no doubt that Starlight Glimmer was responsible for creating it to prevent anyone from saving the giant who was trapped, yet what compelled her to make something like this!? Part of me wanted to imagine being back home with all of my friends, hanging out in the school library like we usually did in-between classes.

Yet that was merely a dream while this was reality. I had no other choice but to fight this thing and conquer it using whatever abilities I could muster. There was one problem though and it involved figuring out how to bring it down to the ground. It's not like I could jump up to the ceiling in order to battle it--none of my masks allowed me the ability to jump high or walk on the ceiling--so what else could I do? I mean, just looking at how hideous it was made me feel uneasy.

The creature looked like someone's lost eye socket complete with the skin surrounding it, and was surrounded by what appeared to be an endless supply of bubbles. I wasn't sure what to make of those other than they would become an issue. I supposed they were a means of protecting the main creature but judging from its thick hide, I doubted that it needed any kind of protection. And then there was the eyeball itself, a piercing gaze so strong that I couldn't look away no matter how hard I tried. That bloodshot stare was watching my every move and if I didn't know any better, I could swear that it was winking at me every now and again.

All of a sudden, the creature began to twitch and I was prepared to fight for my life, but then my jaw dropped when it turned out that it was just shuffling and continued to stare down at me with that gaze. It had no intention of fighting me.

Was I not worth the trouble or something!?

Unless this monster would come down and begin the impending battle, there wasn't much I could do other than waste what precious time I had until I had to reset time and go through the process of exploring this temple all over again. If my calculations were correct based on the position of the sun prior to entering the temple, I'd say that the current time was roughly noon so that gave me forty-two hours.

While I was concerned with the threat that lurked above, Princess Twilight was having her usual reaction whenever she saw something that interested her. While I appreciated the desire for more knowledge--too much was never a bad thing--Her Highness took it to a whole new level which was making my journey all the more difficult. I needed the guiding wisdom she represented as my fairy companion, yet her geeking out was testing my patience. Yet, I couldn't hold it against her as she was only indulging in her curiosity.

Princess Twilight squealed. " I've never seen anything like this before in all of my books! Could this be a new species of monster that not even the people of Termina know of? If only I had my monster guide book my brother gave me, then I'd have written it down for sure."

" I can't believe you're fangasming over whatever that is!" I shouted.

" We don't even have anything like this back in Equestria."

" Twilight..."

" This is without a doubt the greatest discovery in the history of monster hunters!"

" Twilight!"

Princess Twilight snapped out of her daydream and shook her head. " Huh? Sunset? What's going on?"

" And you thought my daydreaming was bad." I answered. " You need to stop geeking out over the monster and help me figure out what I'm supposed to do next! We're not getting out of this room until that thing is destroyed so you might want to get your head in the game and quickly before something goes wrong."

Princess Twilight blushed. " I am so, so sorry, Sunset. I didn't meant to allow my desire for knowledge to get in the way of what is important. It's just that seeing this creature brought out my inner bookworm and it compelled me to want to learn as much about it as possible." She then calmed down upon realizing that she was working herself into a frenzy over again over it. " I guess despite being a princess in Equestria, my inner bookworm has been working overtime as of late. In fact, it only began to flare up ever since we first entered this temple as I never felt this way beforehand. Do you find that to be suspicious or am I losing it?"

I scratched my head. " I'm not sure but what I do know is that you need to focus, Twilight. I need you to guide me through this journey so that means your advice will mean the difference between life and death for me."

" Talk about pressure."

" I know you don't like stress but what else would you have me say?"

" Good point."

" Now... About this monster."

Princess Twilight looked up at it. " This thing is called a Wart and not the kind that can grow on your body in the most embarrassing of places." I rolled my eyes in response yet she didn't noticed and continued. " You need to attack the eye when it opens though it won't be easy as those bubbles will protect the eye from any and all attacks. Every time you strike one of those bubbles, it will detach itself from Wart and begin to bounce around for a while until you either cut it to pieces or it goes to back to the body. They may look harmless but they can easily overwhelm you if enough of them swarm you."

" Do I need to get rid of the bubbles?"

" To attack the eye? Then yes."

I looked up at the monster and gulped upon seeing so many bubbles. " There must be at least fifty or so of them."

" I would say more like one hundred." That wasn't making me feel any better. " In any case, you first need to find a way to bring Wart down here otherwise nothing is going to be happening and our time was waste away until it runs out. Perhaps if you could fire an arrow up at the eye? That would cause the bubbles to react and protect the eye and convince the monster to come down and deal with us personally."

I didn't think that an arrow would be needed to hit an eyeball but then previous experiences indicated that arrows hitting eyeballs were essential. It also explained why those pots in the previous room mostly contained bundles of arrows and recovery hearts more than anything else. Since I didn't really have much of a choice, I took out the Hero's Bow, loaded an arrow and aimed up at Wart who continued to look at me with its powerful gaze. I had no idea what was going to happen upon firing my arrow but at this point anything was better than waiting around for something to happen.

Firing my arrow, it sailed through the sky hitting its target, yet I was dejected as the monster closed its eye and my arrow merely struck the eyelid before dropping down to the ground, snapping in two upon impact. My next attempt fared worse in that the arrow struck a bubble though it didn't get dis-lodged or anything, yet Wart did give me quite the scolding expression through its eye like it were annoyed at what I had just did. Ignoring it as best as I could--not an easy thing when your opponent had a giant eyeball that could watch your every move and hiding was practically impossible--I fired a third arrow that connected with the eye though what happened next was shocking.

Reeling from the blow to its eye, Wart began to shuffle about before the bubbles suddenly started falling down from above. It was like a rainstorm only this wasn't rain but a series of independent creatures that were dropping down by the dozens. I began running about dodging each of them that fell though a few did damage me in the process--their damage was actually minimal though it would be more in a group attack--but then Wart itself came crashing to the ground, the tremor made me fall onto my butt, before staring at me with its giant eye now closer that it was previously. I couldn't help but try to look away but again it was in vain.

The bubbles then suddenly to cling onto the body producing a rather unorthodox shield before the entire mass began to move around at a slow pace. Was this the fight? It playing a defensive strategy and not attacking in response? Something didn't seem right about this. Why would it not use those bubbles surrounding it to attack me and eventually swarm me with so many of them that I couldn't escape? I wasn't about to question it any further as I needed to focus on winning and getting out of this room.

Aiming at the eye and waiting for the eyeball to be exposed, I fired the instant it opened only to discover that my arrow bounced off the bubbles harmlessly. Undaunted, I tried a second time and this attempt quickly failed. I thought about using a third arrow though I quickly figured it was pointless as the bubbles were acting as a shield.

" Arrows aren't working." I said as I put my bow away."

" You need to use the bow when the eye is exposed."

" Okay, then how do I get to the eye with all those bubbles blocking the way?"

" As I mentioned before, you need to attack them in order to get them to detach from Wart." Twilight answered. " Your sword can easily knock them off but be careful as you could knock off more than you can handle resulting in you being swamped. Also, I don't believe you'll need to defeat them all to be able to reach the eye. If you defeat enough of them, that should expose a hole in their defences yet it will take some time given how many of them there are."

" This sounds like a battle of endurance."

Princess Twilight nodded. " You just need to keep up the pace and cut those bubbles down."

Drawing my sword and shield, I walked up to where Wart was floating and performed a horizontal slice that severed roughly six bubbles from the bottom, causing them to start bouncing around in a crazy fashion in all directions. This prompted me to chase after them since I needed to attack them again to eliminate them for good otherwise they would bounce their way back to Wart, reattach themselves to its body and repeating the process. Chasing the bubbles proved more difficult than I thought as their bouncing was erratic making it almost next to impossible for me to keep track of where they were going.

Catching up to three of them and cutting them down, the other three then knocked me onto my stomach when they collided with me from behind before connecting back to Wart feeling me to get back onto my feet. I then noticed the small hole that appeared due to defeating the three bubbles a few moments ago. That was what Her Highness meant when she said that not all of them needed to be defeated.

Since I didn't really have much of a choice, I began swinging my sword in several arcs, slashing off the bubbles where they bounced around. Some of them got cut down by my additional swings before they could get away yet things got hectic when more of them bounced around, more than what I wanted. With so many, I struggled to figure out what was going on though my mind kept on urging me to continue swinging. It soon became a bubble sea, my vision limited from seeing nothing but bubbles, and eventually it proved too much for me to endure as I got swamped by them.

After a few moments of being pushed about, I got pushed away from the bubbles and landed in the corner of the room--a crate broke my fall though it wasn't what I would call a smooth landing--leaving me to once again pick myself up and observe the current situation. I had managed to cut down a few more bubbles though there were still dozens of them preventing me from attacking the eyeball. At the current pace I was going, I would be able to hit the eye in several hours. No... There had to be a faster method that I just wasn't seeing.

Turning towards Princess Twilight, I looked utterly dejected. " This isn't working, Twilight. There are just too many of them to get rid of."

" I know it's a daunting task, Sunset, but what other choice is there?"

I lowered my head. " Every time I cut one off from that thing, it just bounces around until I either cut it again or it goes back. Now imagine that but with almost a hundred more of them as you said there was and you'll understand why I'm feeling hopeless right now."

" Yes, I see what you mean."

" I could become a Goron or even a Zora as those two bodies would fare better."

Princess Twilight took a quick glance at Wart before looking back at me. " Your Goron body would be more powerful but you would also be a lot slower in terms of your movement and attack speed. Those bubbles would take advantage of such a disadvantage so I'm afraid that won't help. Your Zora body is sleek and fast allowing you to attack from a distance, yet your fins leave you vulnerable to attack as you wait for them to return. Again, you would be at a disadvantage in that scenario. Your Deku body is small and would allow you to avoid the bubbles but then such a size means needing to be up close so that you can retaliate with your own bubbles."

" So none of my other forms are useful?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Unfortunately yes, so you'll need to rely on your items. Arrows would be too costly and firing them would leave you vulnerable since you need to stand still to fire them, but perhaps you could use something unorthodox instead? Surely there must be something that could pull those bubbles away without having to get up close and cut them off from Wart resulting in a confusing mess."

Her Highness was pretty subtle when it came to telling me what to do though she didn't really need to do that. I could have deduced that she was referring to the Hookshot since it was my most recent item and I figured I hadn't really been given much of an opportunity to use it, yet I knew she wanted some fun since being a princess meant following protocol so much that she couldn't be herself when she wanted to. I supposed that was one advantage I had over her because I could do my own thing without having to worry about the well-being of others, yet that's what made Her Highness who she was.

She was always destined to become a princess and was properly groomed for the position. While she never knew about it, Princess Celestia firmly believed that she would become the newest alicorn to grace Equestria, and that came to pass when she finished a magic spell belonging to the legendary Star Swirl the Bearded. Was I jealous? I was though I'm sure Princess Twilight could sense that. Part of me still wished that I could be a princess though deep down I knew that was impossible.

Despite how much work I had done to address the magic problem that I brought into the world I called home, I believed it wasn't enough to fully atone me for betraying my former teacher, stealing an Element of Harmony, plunging Equestria into a state of chaos, and believing myself worthy to be a princess. Some would consider my thoughts to be equivalent of putting myself down yet I wasn't bothered because I knew the truth. I wasn't ready to ascend and become an alicorn even if Princess Twilight would say otherwise. Would I ever be ready for it? Maybe but I had no answer to go with.

Taking out the Hookshot, I looked around to see where Wart had gotten to--it wasn't difficult to spot since it was trapped in this room with me and all it was doing was floating around and not caring about anything--and when I noticed it, it began turning towards me. Since I had a lot of targets to choose from, I just needed to know where to start--that answer came when it dawned on me that I needed to focus on the gap that had been left after cutting the initial bubbles.

Aiming at a bubble and firing the Hookshot's chain, I somehow latched onto it--the tip of the chain pierced the bubble without popping it--and pulled it towards me where I used my sword to cut it down. While this was going to be an arduous process, I felt it was my best bet towards freeing up enough space before I could target the eyeball. The only drawback was when Wart decided to hover its way over and forcing me into moving to another part of the room so that I could pull the bubbles off at a safe distance.

For what felt like forever, the next five minutes was a pretty simple routine. I pulled off a bubble, cut it to pieces with my sword, and repeated the process though it was quickly becoming apparent that I wasn't really making any progress. I honestly thought that it was somehow producing more bubbles to protect its weak point to replace what I had cut, and combined with my exhaustion, this battle was taking its toll on me physically and mentally. Unless I could attack the eye soon, the chances of me collapsing from exhaustion was ever increasing leaving me vulnerable to whatever this thing did to consume food.

Upon pulling off another bubble, I tried to cut it with my sword only to drop it, and proceeding to be knocked into the wall. I rubbed my head despite not hitting it against the wall when I slammed into it. " How many more of those blasted bubbles must I pull off before I can finally attack the eye?"

" By my calculations, you have cut down about thirty of them."

My jaw dropped. " Only thirty!? It feels like a lot more than that!"

Princess Twilight observed Wart and smiled grimly. " Well, you did leave a large enough gap in its defences to fire an arrow into the eye, but judging from how tired you are, I don't know if you can continue."

" I can continue..."

" After dropping your sword like that?"

" I've been through worse."

" Oh I have no doubt about that." Twilight said. " But, if you keep going at this rate, you're liable to suffer from a heart attack."

" Now you know what I go through." I said. While the words of Her Highness were true in that straining myself would cause horrible internal damage, I had to keep going as there wasn't really any other choice. Until this monster was destroyed, we'd be trapped inside of this room at its mercy. " I still have that potion Rarity gave me before coming in here but I don't think it will work to cure exhaustion."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I'm afraid not. Potions like that only work to restore lost health and heal wounds; exhaustion is something you have to recover from on your
own by having a good rest."

I walked over and picked up my sword. " Resting isn't going to be happening right now." Aiming my Hookshot, I pulled off another bubble and managed to cut it before dropping my sword again. " I don't think I can pull off another bubble. I've reached my limit, Twilight, and this monster hasn't even broken a sweat yet." Picking up my sword again, I turned to face Wart whose defences had indeed weakened thanks to my strategy, yet it meant nothing if I couldn't continue. " You know, I think pulling off that last bubble was enough to give me an opening to fire an arrow at its eye."

" You need to take that shot now!"

" I don't know if I have enough strength to lift my bow."

" Then find your reserve and use it before we both die in here."

Before I had a chance to do anything, Wart floated over to me and knocked me aside using its bulk, sending me into some crates located in a different corner of the room. As I picked myself up and collected the arrows and recovery hearts that came out of the crates, I switched out the Hookshot for the Hero's Bow, and aimed at the eye while waiting for it to open up so that I could hit it. It proved to be a difficult wait as the bubbles were slowly swirling around Wart's body meaning that I had to wait for the gap to come around until it was right in front of the eye, and even then I needed it to be opened.

Wart began moving towards me again and its eye was open yet I couldn't hit it as the hole in its defences was now on the other side of it. Grumbling, I began to run around to the other side in hopes that it would turn on a dime, yet this didn't work as it slowly moved in a semi-circle before moving towards me again. I thought that perhaps firing a few arrows would distract it long enough for the opening in its defences came around to the right side, so I fired a few only for it to keep on moving and eventually knocking me to the ground leaving me vulnerable to the bubbles as they began pushing on my back.

Once they were off of me, I got back up and brushed off the water that dripped down me. I had no idea why there was water in this room that went up to my ankles but I couldn't worry about that since I had other problems. " I think it knows that I'm trying to hit its eye."

" You just need to be patient, Sunset."

" We can't spend too long with this otherwise we'll run out of time."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I know time isn't on our side but you need to remain calm otherwise you could make a mistake. Since you're waiting for the right moment, you're also relaxing and overcoming the fatigue you were suffering from a few minutes ago."

" Now that you mention it, I do feel less tired now."

" I wouldn't wait too long in case Wart figures out what you're doing."

Her Highness was right. I needed to act like I was being serious about this--I was--before this monster would do something that could make this even more difficult. Running around to the other side where Wart's eye was and aiming my bow, the gap in-between the bubbles was over the eye--it was about time things went right--leaving it exposed. The moment its eye opened up, I fired an arrow scoring a direct hit though Wart acted like it didn't feel anything and continued floating. Knowing I needed to keep up the offence, I dashed around to the other side hoping that the gap was still in my favour.

I fired an arrow the instant I turned to face Wart only to find that the gap had moved to the left. Cursing under my breath, I waited for the monster to take its time turning around to face me--this was really testing my patience--and when it had turned, I fired another arrow in hopes that would be enough. It struck a bubble doing nothing and I was about to throw my bow aside in sheer anger over such a stupid shot--the fact that the gap wasn't in my favour was also pretty evident--before Wart changed direction.

Sighing, I ran around to the other side and fired several more arrows, yet while they hit the eye and the gap was with me, the eyeball wasn't exposed. I couldn't allow my temper to get the better of me otherwise I'd only be defeating myself. Performing the breathing exercise that Princess Twilight showed me, I waited for the moment when the eye would open, and sure enough, my wait wasn't very long--it was about a three second wait. When its eyeball became exposed, I fired one more arrow that connected though this time Wart had a reaction that left me wondering if things were about to get worse.

" What is it doing?"

" I'm not sure but be prepared for anything."

All of a sudden, Wart dropped to the ground with a thunderous thud, knocking me down onto my butt, but the worse part was that all of the bubbles that were clung to its body were now bouncing all over the place making things extremely complicated. Why would it cast aside its defence like that? Granted, I now had to fight dozens upon dozens of monsters at the same time though they weren't really a problem aside from the numbers stacked against me. Still, its protection was gone and that meant I could now finally defeat this thing and escape from this room.

That's what I thought would happen until Wart suddenly charged towards me and I barely managed to jump to the side. It whizzed by and smacked into the wall, suffering no damage before changing directions and charging at me again. I jumped to the side again before it careened past and smacked into another wall before turning around and repeating the process for a third time. Every so often, it would open its eye and expose its eyeball giving me an idea of what I need to do now, yet it proved difficult since now it was sliding around all over the place with the sole desire of running me down.

I put away my bow before taking out my shield, slinging it onto my arm, and assuming a defensive position. Wart then came hurdling towards me and I was ready to hold my own using my shield to bounce it back--who was I kidding thinking I could bounce back something that big and heavy--but it proved to be in vain as it knocked me back upon collision and sending me into the wall.

" That didn't work very well."

" Your shield won't be able to protect you from its wild charging."

I got up and brushed myself off. " Why is it acting like that?"

" Perhaps it's an act of desperation though it does mean it's now more vulnerable than before." Twilight answered. " You'll need to attack it with either your sword or a well-timed arrow providing you can aim and fire one before getting knocked over again." Her Highness then looked around to see where the bubbles had all bounced to and did some quick calculations with her fingers. " Taking out those bubbles should be your first priority, Sunset, before going after Wart. They'll only serve to get in the way since they're bouncing all over the place, and their damage will gradually build up if you let it."

" Will sword swings deal with those bubbles?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but you should also keep watch of where Wart is going. Like I said, you need to take care of those bubbles first as they will only slow you down and get in the way, yet Wart must be avoided until it's ready to be dealt with. I don't know if it can pop those bubbles so I wouldn't try to figure it out."

I raised my sword above my head. " This is going to be crazy."

" Makes you wish that you had gotten that strong sword from the Mountain Smithy's, doesn't it?"

" I've got to pay them another visit."

Despite the sudden surge in confidence, Her Highness was right about my sword not being long enough--the power wasn't an issue here--as I could stand a fair distance away from the bubbles as I pop them. Had I gone back to Snowhead, defeated Goht again--including making my way through Snowhead Temple again--and won the Goron Races, I'd have been able to give Fancy Pants and Tirek the gold dust they needed to forge my sword into the ultimate weapon. Unfortunately, doing all of that required me to sacrifice a three day cycle because of how long it took them to do a simple re-forging.

Not only that but a stronger sword would have meant not needing to inflict as much damage on monsters as they would usually fall after a hit or two. Perhaps I should consider taking the time to handle some of the optional challenges that are around Termina before heading over to the final region. While it would mean delaying the inevitable on certain levels, it would also mean having adequate equipment, items, and masks.

With my sword swinging around me in a crazy manner, I charged into the mass of bubbles and began cutting them down while keeping tabs on Wart. It was continuing to charge around in its bid to knock me over without caring about what happens to it whenever it collides with one of the walls, yet it was pretty obvious I was its target since whenever it hit a wall, it changed direction so that its eye was looking directly at me.

Since the bubbles were just bouncing around with no sense of direction, it didn't take long for me to get rid of most of them though a couple ended up trapped in the corners, but I opted not to go after them as they didn't pose a threat to me. My sword arm slightly ached from swinging it around so much yet it was worth it to clean up what had previously been an almost impossible situation. Once it was all clear, I turned towards Wart who promptly knocked me aside, sending me to the ground where the water broke my fall. It crashed into the wall behind me and turned around before coming my way again.

Getting up, I jumped to the side and began to follow its movement closely though it wasn't easy as it showed no signs of stopping. I did learn that after every third collision, it would open its eye so that it could keep track of my location and would keep it open until after every two collisions. Right now, it was about to hit its third wall so I needed to get out in front of it and wait for the moment to make my sword strike count.

The moment Wart hit the wall and turned to face me with its eye open, it began charging towards me yet I remained firm knowing that this fight had gone on long enough. A swing of my sword later wounded it though instead of continuing on towards the wall, Wart turned around and charged in the opposite direction. When my sword struck its eye, I noticed that it looked dazed and didn't know where it was for a brief moment before regaining its composure. No wonder it kept on trying to keep it concealed other than needing to open it in order to see everything around it at a given time. In a way, I felt bad that its weak point was also a means of it functioning at all.

It bounced off a couple more walls before coming at me again with its eye open, and with one more swing, I struck the eye causing it to react like it did before when it dropped to the ground though this time it simply stood in place acting like it was having some kind of convulsion.

" I... I think you won, Sunset."

" Do you really think so?" I asked. " To me, it feels like it's trying to do something but can't."

" For the moment, you should relax as you did take quite a beating."

I brushed myself off. " Not as much as it appears, Twilight. Sure, I was trampled by those bubbles and thrown into the walls a few times, but generally speaking, that monster didn't inflict much in the way of damage. I won't need to use my red potion for the time being."

" Yes, I will admit that you didn't get hurt too badly."

" Guess that thing was all size and intimidation but no power."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but I am certain that there will be more powerful monsters waiting for you. You can take solace knowing that this battle didn't end up going out of control once you took command of the situation, but don't get cocky as that is the sign of failure and monsters will take advantage of such weakness." Her Highness then looked at Wart who started glowing and she began pushing me in a bid to get me out of the way. " Sunset! You need to move! Right now!" She continued to push me but to no avail as I was much bigger and heavier. " You need to move before that thing explodes."

" What!?"

" Wart is about to explode!"

" How can you be sure of that?"

" Doesn't the glowing coming from it mean enough for you?"

I looked over at it and saw the glowing for myself. " Oh... OH! WAAAAH!!!!" I stepped back, stumbling in the process and landing on my butt, and just in time as Wart exploded with the remaining bubbles popping as though they no longer had a reason to exist. The explosion from Wart covered a large radius yet I barely managed to avoid getting caught, yet at the same time, it should have been obvious it was about to self-destruct. I guess it was a monster's means of performing one last ditch effort to kill anyone that killed it. Getting up and brushing myself off again, I checked to make sure my heart still ticked. " Too close for comfort... way too close."

" At least it's over now."

I continued to pound my chest. " Good thing you warned me in time, Twilight. I'm sorry for not paying attention straight away."

" Honestly, I didn't know what to expect."

" Since it's no longer in the room, the iron bars blocking the door should disappear at any moment." I said. As soon as I mentioned that, the iron bars did rise up, unlocking the door in the process, yet that was nothing compared to seeing a large treasure chest materializing in the center of the room. " Guess it was guarding what I needed to reach that giant switch among other things."

Princess Twilight hovered over to the chest. " Are you sure that the Ice Arrows are in this chest? I know you talked about them in great detail earlier, but what makes you think that they are hidden inside of this? I mean, I'm not trying to doubt what you said yet you have to forgive me for not being convinced."

I walked up to the chest. " I'm not upset with how you feel, Twilight. To be frank, I just feel that the Ice Arrows are inside of this chest." I placed my hand on it and began to think about what happened during my previous journey. " When I acquired them in Hyrule, they served no purpose other than bragging rights and you know that I no longer view myself as being a braggart. In this world, maybe they will finally serve a use?" I opened the chest and took out a single arrow surrounded in a chunk of blue crystal, and my eyes smiled upon realizing what it really was. " Looks like I was right."

" Those are indeed the Ice Arrows."

" Now I can use them to freeze enemies."

" They do serve other functions."

" Like what?"

" You can use Ice Arrows to freeze any water that is flowing from small openings." Twilight answered. " You can also create small platforms in the water made of ice to reach areas you couldn't get to before, but you need to be quickly as they don't last long. Oh, and much like the Fire Arrows from before, using these arrows will cost you two points of magic for each one. I suggest conserving magic by using Ice Arrows when necessary."

" Do you suppose I can freeze all monsters?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " The weakest of monsters will just be destroyed because they don't have the resilience to withstand ice. Other monsters will be immune to it so don't continue using them if you find they have an immunity to ice. The rest will freeze up in a block of ice for a few moments but they will eventually break free after a while so use them as stepping stones to reach higher places. For example, those Octorok back there could be used as stepping stones."

" Didn't you hint at that back in that room?"

" I did. Glad you were paying attention."

" Well, since the only way onward is to go back the way we came, we might as well check that room again."

Putting the Ice Arrows behind my back, I first looked up at the ceiling to reflect upon what I had just been through. The battle against Wart was certainly an interesting one since it was a creature that could have only come from the subconscious of my own nightmares. At the same time, the hardest part was how it proved intimidating what with its large size and being surrounded by so many smaller creatures, yet ultimately ended up not being as difficult as appearances suggested. Had I truly gotten stronger since the start of this journey? Maybe, yet I wasn't about to say anything out of fear that I was slowly embracing the idea of having power.

Opening the door and entering the first previous room, I was almost attacked by the Yellow Chu-Chu that was bouncing around. How ironic that this room gave me lots of arrows including a monster that could infinitely churn out additional arrows until I no longer needed them and would instead get rupees. Arrows ended up not being all that useful aside from key moments and instead my Hookshot ended up doing all the work.

Ignoring the Yellow Chu-Chu--I didn't need to defeat it as I didn't waste many arrows and I wasn't in the mood to cut it down just because--I entered the other previous room that housed the switch isolated on a high-up platform, and jumped into the water before the Octoroks could attack me. Swimming across the water before climbing out and onto one of the corner platforms, I took out the Hero's Bow, nocked an Ice Arrow, and aimed at my target that popped out of the water moments later. Before it could spit a rock at me, I fired an Ice Arrow, freezing the Octorok in a solid chunk of ice where it began to bob on the water's surface.

Since Princess Twilight told me that I needed to be quick otherwise the ice would melt, I quickly checked to make sure there weren't any other Octoroks around before jumping onto the frozen one and then onto the platform itself. Much like the one that I activated back at the start of the temple, this one most likely could only be pushed in the one direction. Was this where I needed to begin sending water back to the beginning to change the water's flow?

" By pushing this switch, you'll be able to send water back to that waterwheel from before."

" I can't believe it was all the way over here."

" That was part of the challenge." Twilight said. " If it had been closer to the beginning, you wouldn't have been compelled to come this far. In any case, I suggest that you change into a Zora before pushing this switch in case you need extra muscle."

" I could do that as a Goron you know."

" Yes, but a Goron can't swim."

Who knew that Her Highness could be snarky. In any case, I was going to need to become a Zora anyway since the only way back involved swimming through the powerful currents until I end up back in the central chamber--I had to go there specifically as that was where I needed to find water that blocked a path.

Putting the bow away, taking out the Zora Mask, and putting it onto my face, I squatted down and watched as the magic of the mask changed my body parts from human to Zora in an almost flowing-like manner until my transformation was complete. Before pushing the switch until it locked into place, I quickly looked around to see if any of the Octoroks could attack me from up here by jumping out of the water at a high enough distance and spit their rocks at me. Fortunately, the highest they could jump was halfway up so I walked around the other side and began pushing the switch around.

This one felt a little stiffer than the previous one--most likely because this one hadn't been used in a very long time and was also deep into the temple--but I continued pushing until it made a clicking sound before disappearing into the ground. Looking at the red pipe as it trailed across the wall, it began glowing indicating that water was now flowing through it and back to where the first waterwheel was.

Unfortunately, I had to go back by taking the long route and I hoped that the current wouldn't pull me down the wrong path forcing me to waste even more time. Sighing, I jumped into the water, dropped down below the surface until I reached the bottom, and walked forward until the current pulled me along.

" Are you sure that this won't take long?" Rarity asked. " I simply insist that this be quick as I must rehearse with the rest of my band. I know I am probably a little bit rusty since it has been some time since I last spoke, but I have no doubt that my singing will be in top form come tomorrow night."

" We only need you for about ten minutes at the most." Midnight Sparkle said.

" That sounds fair to me."

" I want to ask you something very important."

" What is it?"

Midnight Sparkle looked out at the Great Bay Temple, turned towards Rarity, looked out at the temple again, and finally looked at her again. " The Zora that you were speaking to before my companion and I came before you. You gave them something before they left so I was wondering what compelled you to do that." Sunset Demon, arms folded, a powerful glare spread across her face, wasn't sure what to make of what Midnight Sparkle was planning, yet she kept quiet knowing that any kind of outburst would only result in being given another lecture on patience. " Well? Why did you give that Zora a gift? What compelled you?" Midnight Sparkled asked.

" I felt generous towards the fact that Mikau was able to save my children from the pirates."

" So you did it out of an obligation?"

Rarity shook her head. " No, I did it because I thought it was the right thing to do. Mikau has meant so much to me ever since we were younger, yet he always seemed distant at times, aloof, like he wanted to be on his own and experience great adventures. He may not look like it but he firmly believes in doing the right thing. He never wants anything in return yet I can't help but feel that's nothing but a false pretense he uses to hide a personal sense of pride. Mikau doesn't know yet but I've been secretly aiding him though this time I wanted to be generous without hiding it."

" Don't you want something from him?"

" I already have what I need from Mikau."

" And what would that be?"

" The seven Zora children that were hatched." Rarity answered. " Mikau has been wracking his brains lately trying to figure out who the father could be, yet I think he knows and refuses to come to that conclusion. I do plan on telling him that he is the father though I'm not sure how best to explain things."

As soon as she said that, Sunset Demon performed a double-take before her jaw dropped in complete surprise. If what Rarity said was true and that "Mikau" was the father of her children, that meant her counterpart was the father considering that Rarity kept on mentioning his name regarding the Zora who left for the temple. The she-demon shook her head due to what she had heard making absolutely no sense. How could the likes of Sunset Shimmer be a parent and a father no less!? Such a thought began forming in her mind and she tried in vain to remove such a sight, but it didn't work and the mental image continued to grow.

Sunset Demon was about to go ballistic and demand that Rarity take back what she said when suddenly a thought occurred to her. Her other self had been given the ability to change into different creatures by wearing special masks. If one of those masks allowed her to become the true Mikau, then all she was doing was living out someone else's life due to them suffering a terrible fate. What didn't make sense was how Mikau's spirit ended up getting sealed into a common mask.

The she-demon then had another thought. If her other self could harness such power, why wasn't it given to her? She was much more powerful and could easily tap into the hidden strengths that were gained upon changing into the respective creature. This made her think that Sunset had once again come out ahead, that she had moved on from her past by utilizing a form of magic previously unheard of. For Sunset Demon, the thought of being left behind to wallow away in the shadows of the past was unacceptable. She was going to do whatever it took to be better than "her" though not through anger.

Midnight Sparkle had since noticed her companion's reaction and swiftly asked her next question. " So you think that Zora you spoke to is the father? Are you sure that he could be the one instead of someone else?"

Rarity looked out at the temple. " I strongly believe he is the one though maybe I am doubting myself."

" Fair enough."

" Do you have another question for me?"

" You said that you are part of a music band."

" That is correct."

" Do you act generous in front of them?"

Rarity giggled. " They do like to pamper me from time to time all because I am the lead singer, yet I keep on telling them not to do that. I am on equal footing with the rest of them and they need to recognize that as such. This is also true with our fellow Zoras. Just because we happen to be skilled at what we do doesn't make us superior. But, I do my best to give the best performance I can. When our fans are happy then I am happy and I couldn't ask for anything else."

Midnight Sparkle then smiled a strange smile. " That's all I needed to know from you. There... Now that wasn't very difficult was it?" She then stepped aside and presented her companion who began taking several steps forward, each step left behind a footprint that was filled with lava. " My friend here also has some questions for you though I should warn you that she isn't nearly as calm as I am. You could say that she is a real demon when she doesn't get the answers she seeks."

That prompted Sunset Demon to look at her companion with an icy stare that could frighten anyone to death, yet she chose to remain calm before continuing to walk forward until she suddenly stopped and turned towards the ocean. Neither Midnight Sparkle nor Rarity knew why the she-demon had stopped without warning but then they quickly found their answer when the sounds of splashing about could be heard close by. She then plunged her arm into the water and pulled out several figures, tossing them onto the beach where she folded her arms and looked down on them with a sadistic grin.

Rarity was surprised at who they were especially one of them. " Gasp! The Gerudo Pirates!? What are they doing here?" She immediately recognized Rainbow Dash though she appeared distant like she had experienced a traumatic event. " I'm not sure why they are here but I am actually grateful that you pulled them from the ocean. They need to be punished for stealing my children when they were still in eggs."

" Huh!?" Rainbow Dash said after hearing Rarity's voice. " How the heck did we end up here? I thought the current would take us back to the fortress. Derpy! Don't tell me that we ended up taking a wrong turn." She then rubbed her eyes and slapped her forehead upon realizing where she and her crew were. " Great... Just great! We ended up getting washed ashore by Zora Hall! How could things possibly get any worse?" Rainbow then turned a ghostly white with the other pirates following suit when they saw who else was there.

Sunset Demon smiled once again. " It looks like we don't need to wait until the next cycle."

Rainbow Dash was about to draw her sword when it suddenly melted by an unseen force. " What the!? My sword!"

" You won't be needing that."

" What kind of magic did you use to melt my sword?"

" That was just a simple spell though it did cost me some strength what with my magic being restricted by this world." Sunset Demon answered. " That doesn't matter anyway since you have now graced us with your presence, Rainbow Dash."

" How do you know my nickname? Did someone blab?"

Sunset Demon laughed. " I find this to be very adorable. I was going to ask that one over there some questions but when I noticed you floundering about in the ocean out of the corner of my eye, I figured you would be more interesting."

" You look familiar..." Rainbow Dash said. " You remind me of that girl who infiltrated our fortress the other day."

" She and I are closer than you think..."

" What!? Then that makes you my enemy."

" Egotistical and impulsive... just what I expected from someone like you."

Rainbow Dash's face then turned bright red. " No one disrespects the leader of the Gerudo Pirates! You may have melted my sword using whatever constitutes as witchcraft to the likes you, wench, but I have resources on my side that I intend to use." She then turned to face Derpy who was struggling to pull off a squid that somehow got attached to her face while adrift out in the ocean. " Depry! Hand me your sword! This monster needs to learn her place!"

Sunset Demon laughed once again. " Bravado... one of the more pathetic emotions that humans are capable of expressing, and you definitely have it in spades based on your little display of acting tough. It also shows how loyal you can be though it doesn't excuse your lack of intelligence. If you really want to "put in my place" as you coined it, I am willing to give you a chance at proving you can back up such words. Will you survive to see another sunrise? Why don't we find out."

Getting back to the central chamber wasn't as bad as what I thought it would be. Sure, the water current brought back to where I needed to be though I bounced off the walls as I travelled down the passageway, but at least it was better than having to deal with underwater monsters. My battle against Wart had taken its toll on me both physically and mentally given what it threw at me, yet I felt I still had another difficult challenge awaiting me aside from the boss whose mask had sealed away the giant who guarded Great Bay. It's kind of funny now that I think about it as there have been some trends I had noticed.

The first one was that each temple thus far had a powerful monster guarding the treasure, and another that guarded the key I needed to access the boss' lair. In this temple, the latter had not been seen so I knew I was going to encounter it eventually--a lot sooner since I had already seen the chest in question--yet why wasn't I going that way to get it over with? Princess Twilight wanted me to use my newly acquired Ice Arrows on a section of water that had been blocking a path I couldn't reach, yet now I could thanks to my new treasure.

The other trend I had noticed came from the giants themselves. The first one was Principal Celestia with the second one being Vice Principal Luna, both of whom were in charge of Canterlot High and were princesses in Equestria. I had a sneaking suspicion that Princess Cadance was going to be a giant according to this trend--in the world that I now called home, her human counterpart was Dean Cadance of Crystal Prep--yet that only accounted for three of the giants. I doubted that Principal Cinch would be one--such a thought terrified me--and I didn't really know anyone else in Equestria who was a princess or with a similar rank.

Right now, I wasn't going to worry about it as that was still a ways off, yet it would be nice to have some kind of idea as to who I was rescuing. Compared to Celestia and Luna, I knew next to nothing about Princess Cadance though Her Highness constantly talked about how great she was. Apparently, she was once Twilight's foal sitter before marrying her older brother and becoming the co-ruler of the Crystal Empire. It was the markings of a typical fairy tale ending though they still had problems to deal with in the form of enemies attacking the empire for whatever reason they had--it was also where the magic mirror I used ended up.

Back in the central chamber after having swam up to the surface, climbed out of the water, and used the giant propeller as a platform so that I could reach the walkway on the other side that lead up to the water that blocked my path, I stopped so that I could assess it. I found it weird that a torrent of water had prevented from reaching a room considering I've been swimming through strong currents. Yet, it seemed a ladder was needed to reach this particular path and I doubted that I could've held on long enough before being washed away and into the water again.

I grabbed my face, pulled off the Zora Mask, and flipped back my hair before realizing something. Even though I had just spent the last couple of minutes swimming about in the water, my entire body was dry as though I never went into the water. Was this another power of the Zora Mask or was it merely a coincidence? This had been something that has happened every time I switched back and forth between these two forms yet I never took notice until now.

Taking out my bow, nocking an Ice Arrow, and firing at the top of where the water was pouring out from, the opening froze in an instant leaving a chunk of ice that effectively blocked the water from coming down and allowing me access to a previously sealed off room. Climbing up the ladder and entering the next room, I was immediately caught by surprise upon seeing a Blue Tektite to my right though it wasn't moving. Without even being given a nod from Princess Twilight, I switched to my regular arrows and fired off a few that destroyed the monster so that I could focus on this room.

" Why did we come here again?" I asked.

" You knew something had to be here as why else was there a waterfall blocking the way?" Twilight asked.

I shook my head. " I still think we should have gone for the Boss Key first since we do need that to enter the boss room, but I suppose coming here was a good idea provided that we end up getting something for our troubles."

" How about another of those switches?" Twilight asked. She pointed towards a platform way out in the water that housed a switch that was connected to a green pipe. It wasn't glowing so that told me I needed to get the water flowing through though it wasn't going to go to the waterwheel we encountered back in the first proper room. " I suspect that this switch will manipulate something else independent of what we're doing already."

" Guess coming here was a good idea."

" Remember that everything in this temple is connected together."

" Like a machine?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. Ignoring one component of the machine will prevent us from reaching where we need to go. That switch over there probably will benefit us later so I suggest going over and activating it before leaving this room. Oh, and I also suggest going to the top." She pointed upwards at something prompting me to do the same, and above us was a metal fence that stretched across the room with a small treasure barely visible--more like its underside as opposed to the full thing. " A Stray Fairy is most likely trapped in that chest as why else would it be up there?"

" I'll need to use the Hookshot and pull myself up to the ceiling."

" There's a hole in the metal fence over there by the wall so this is where you can use the other function of the Ice Arrows."

" Making ice platforms?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " Make sure you give yourself some distance between platforms otherwise you'll waste your magic. Oh, and remember that the platforms don't last very long so you need to move quickly otherwise they could disappear under your feet before you know it."

Considering that was the case, I took out the Hookshot but attached it to my belt so that I could take it off and use it immediately without having to rummage through my inventory and waste time. Taking out my bow and aiming, I wasn't sure where the best place to aim was but then I noticed tiny sparkles appearing on the water's surface. I didn't understand the significance behind it yet a voice was telling me to shoot the sparkles.

It sounded crazy but what else could I do? Firing an Ice Arrow at the nearest sparkle, a small ice platform appeared and I jumped onto it--I almost slipped off and into the water because of how slippery the ice was--before aiming at the next sparkle. It turned out that there were at least five sparkles glowing in the water and since my magic meter could only house so much magic, I needed to make sure that every shot counted otherwise I might not make it. To the left of the third one was another raised platform that housed several barrels and I wondered if perhaps it would have been better to go over to that rather than my current course.

Contemplating it for a few seconds, I chose to stick to my current path--I didn't have much of a choice as the ice was about to melt--and fired at the second sparkle resulting in my next icy platform. From there, I created additional platforms by firing at the sparkles and making sure not to slip off, and when I reached the wall, I immediately switched over to the Hookshot and aimed upwards at a plate that was on the ceiling.

Firing the chain and latching onto the target, I pulled myself up and onto the metal fence before looking back down at the water. The ice platforms didn't really melt by evaporation but rather they just shriveled up and disappeared as though they were never there. It didn't make much sense but then as I learned already, nothing in this world ever did and that it was for the best that I accepted it. Aside from the small treasure chest, nothing else of value could be seen other than a couple of pots though I suspected they contained magic jars with which to replenish my magic since I did use quite a bit to get up here.

Walking up to the chest and kicking it open released the ninth Stray Fairy that proceeded to enter my body, I took out the Dungeon Map so that Princess Twilight could mark down this location on it. Since most of the temple had been explored, it was safe to assume the remaining fairies would be found once I reversed the water current. With that done, I put the map away and walked over to the opposite side of the metal fence before looking down below and seeing the platform that housed the switch. To reach it from this position required firing an Ice Arrow straight down though I needed to do it right and not waste magic.

After thinking it over for myself, I decided that I needed to go around the other side of the hole in the fence before firing an arrow down below. Sure it would mean having to stand awkwardly for a few seconds but aiming in my current location wouldn't do me much good.

Walking around the other side and firing an arrow created an ice platform below that I then dropped down to--and almost slipped on it--before jumping to the platform and pushing it in one direction only for nothing to happen. Did I really need to push these as a Zora because my own strength as a human was inadequate? Or maybe it was because this temple meant something to the Zoras and that only they were meant to come here for whatever reason they had? Either way, I felt dejected knowing that my own strength couldn't cut it.

" This is really depressing." I said dropping to my knees.

" I can understand how you feel, Sunset, but you need to push these as a Zora."

" I was annoyed but I realize that it's because this place means something to them."

" Only Rarity seems to have a connection to this temple." Twilight said. " I wouldn't be surprised if the other Zora either don't know this place exists or if they do, then they don't really pay much attention otherwise they would have sent some of their own to see what was happening here."

" The water is too warm for them."

" Maybe but I doubt it would have stopped them."

I looked at the green pipe that jutted out from the platform. " Where do you suppose this pipe ends up? We didn't see any green pipes when we were first exploring the temple and it definitely doesn't connect with the small waterwheel we saw earlier."

" It most likely goes to an area we haven't explored yet."

" Because of the current?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. We need to reverse the water's flow so that we can access those remaining rooms, but I think we should acquire that Boss Key next so that we have it and won't have to worry about getting it later."

" Let me push this switch first." I said as I took out the Zora Mask from behind my back. I was still annoyed that I needed to change my body in order to push the switch but there was no point in complaining since I was running on borrowed time. Putting it onto my face and squatting down, I watched as my body parts contorted and changed from human to Zora--I didn't know why this kept happening whenever I put this mask on but I wasn't about to complain--until the transformation was finished. " I still think I can push this as myself but since we need to get moving..."

I tried pushing the switch only for it to refuse to budge so then I tried pulling it and it moved around on its track before disappearing into the ground and making the green pipe glow indicating that water was now flowing through. I then jumped into the water and swam back over to the door and back into the central chamber. While I thought about going back to the first proper room and change the current, what Her Highness suggested made sense even though I thought she was going to insist on changing the water flow. Getting the Boss Key now rather than later would mean not having it weigh down on my mind.

Since I was going for the Boss Key, I jumped into the water and sank down to the bottom before the strong current pulled me about. It took me several seconds to remember which path would lead me to where the Ice Arrows were needed to reach that one door. Speaking of Ice Arrows... there was one door that I couldn't reach as the platform that lead to it was too high, and my intended path would take me through that way so it was a win-win situation.

Choosing the right path and allowing it to pull me along the passageway, I ended up back in the room that had the chest that contained the dungeon map--at least I was starting to figure out where I was going without getting myself lost. Climbing out of the water onto the platform closest to where I entered from, I grabbed my face, pulled my mask off, and flipped my hair back before taking out my bow.

" Good thing you remembered this room, Sunset."

" And you didn't?"

Princess Twilight blushed. " It wasn't really on my mind."

" It's fine. If I hadn't thought about using Ice Arrows in the room we're going to, I'd have forgotten all about this room."

" Remember to make sure every shot counts." Twilight said. " You've used up some magic so you're okay for the time being, but you need to restore it otherwise you could run out at the worst possible moment. There aren't any sparkles on the water's surface like before so feel free with aiming your shots."

Nodding my head, I fired my first arrow into the water, creating a small ice platform that I jumped onto--and once again slipping. " I really could do with some boots that had tiny spikes on the bottom to stop me from slipping." Her Highness merely shrugged her shoulders prompting me to sigh before firing my next arrow a bit further away. From there, I figured one more shot would do and I was correct as my third one would allow me to reach the platform. Jumping on the other platforms--I slipped on both--I opened the door and entered a room that had another switch in addition to a familiar sight. " Is that a Blue Chu-Chu?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Among the different types of Chu-Chu, this one is the rarest of them all. It is said that only one exists so we're actually seeing the last of its kind though I wouldn't really sing its praises. Notice that it isn't carrying anything inside of it? That's because Blue Chu-Chus are just a living pile of water that don't serve any purpose other than using them as a stepping stone."

" I kind of feel bad for it."

" In a way, it's lucky as it isn't mercilessly attacked like other Chu-Chus."

" Since it's made of water, I should be able to freeze it on the spot."

" Once frozen, you can push it along like a block but like I said before, it won't stay frozen for long."

The Blue Chu-Chu had the same goofy appearance that its kind were known for, yet I felt guilty over freezing it as it was genuinely harmless since it didn't have anything inside of it that could prove useful to me. In any case, I fired an Ice Arrow, freezing it on the spot before it even knew what happened, and pushed it along before colliding with the wall. Now I had a means of getting to the switch so climbing onto the frozen Blue Chu-Chu, I jumped and pulled myself up before getting caught in the explosion of a Real Bombchu that was protecting the switch--I didn't even notice it until it was too late.

I sustained some minor burns on my arms and legs though no serious damage had been done, yet I cursed under my breath for not noticing the exploding rodent until I was practically on top of it. No doubt Princess Twilight would scold me later for not thinking things through and getting hurt, but I had more important things to worry about than receiving another of her lectures.

Since I needed to be a Zora to push the switch, I put my bow away, took out the Zora Mask, and put it on my face before squatting down and watched my body change from a human to the aquatic form that had arguably become my best transformation. Upon changing, I pushed the switch in hopes that it would move rather than having to push it, and sure enough it moved around until it clicked into place and disappeared into the ground. This caused another red pipe to suddenly glow with water flowing through it though where did this one connect to compared with the others?

There was nothing else to do in this room so I jumped back down, avoided the now unfrozen Blue Chu-Chu, and left the room wondering about this other red pipe. Did it connect back to the small waterwheel from the beginning of the temple? Was there another pipe network in the section of the temple that was currently inaccessible? All of these questions and more plagued my mind as they lacked answers but perhaps I would find them upon reversing the current.

It didn't take long for me to get back to the room where I found the compass though I had to avoid the Bio Deku Babas that since re-spawned, and once in the room in question, I looked to my right to see the gold ornate chest that housed the Boss Key located behind a sturdy looking metallic fence. No doubt the next room connected back to this one via that small alcove where the key is, and since I figured a powerful monster was waiting for me, I needed to come up with some kind of strategy.

" The key we need is over there." I said, pointing to the chest.

" No doubt it was placed in that spot as a means of taunting us."

" Getting to the next room will be a snap since I can use the Ice Arrows to cross over to the door."

" And yet, you seem nervous."

I couldn't hide anything from Her Highness. " I'm a little worried about the monster waiting in the next room."

" Yes." Twilight said. " While Wart didn't prove to be terribly difficult, you exhausted yourself rather quickly because of how many monsters were surrounding it, and having to take out a lot of them before you could attack it directly. I have a feeling that the Ice Arrows are going to be needed so find some magic jars before you go into the next room. You've got enough magic for about eight more shots minus two as you need to make a path over to the door."

" That hasn't always been the case but I'm not going to question you."

" Besides, you have that red potion on hand for emergencies."

" For that, I am relieved."

" Hopefully, you won't need it."

I was hoping for that as well. Aiming my bow at the pool of water in front of me, I fired an arrow a fair distance before it produced an ice platform. I then fired another arrow a short distance from the platform creating a second one and jumped across both--slipping on each as usual--until I reached the next walkway. What I thought were icicles turned out to be true yet why were they there? This wasn't Snowhead Temple so they shouldn't be there... unless it was meant to be seen as a warning to frighten any who had come this far.

The icicles were easily smashed to pieces when I switched to my sword and swung it left and right, yet part of me still wondered what was waiting for me on the other side of the door, and whether I could defeat it since I had trouble with Wart. Opening the door, I entered the next room only to discover that the "powerful monster" in question was something I had fought back at Woodfall Temple. On the opposite end of the room was a Mad Gecko yet it looked like it was searching for something. My heart relaxed knowing that this fight would go the same way as the previous one, but I was about to be proven wrong.

My mind wanted me to rush up and attack the Mad Gecko yet I opted to see what it was going to do first. From what I remember of my fight against the other one, it didn't like getting hit with arrows and since I had two magical variants, I could essentially make this go by quickly. And yet, I didn't want to waste any magic unless absolutely necessary since I only had so much to go around. There was also something else about this room that had me worried.

It was rather damp compared to other rooms in the temple that had no water to speak of. In fact, it felt like I was surrounded by water even though there wasn't any. What could be getting me all worked up like this? Whatever it was, I needed to ignore it and focus on getting rid of the Mad Gecko and rescue the frog that was changed into it. Yes, I remember the other one changing into a frog, and I finally understood the significance. If I used the mask I acquired from that one starving Goron when spring has eclipsed Snowhead, something good might happen but then I'd also need to gather these frogs up.

When the Mad Gecko finally turned around and noticed me, it reacted exactly as I was expecting it to. Rather than charge at me in hopes of wanting to prove its power, it jumped back and cowered slightly before screaming at the top of its lungs. I was expecting another one of those giant snapping turtles like what happened before, but that didn't happen and instead, a large number of blobs suddenly dropped down from the ceiling, surrounding the Mad Gecko.

At first, I didn't know what to make of seeing so many blobs of water and I thought it was a means of making it harder to attack the Mad Gecko. But when they started moving on their own, I concluded that they could think and act on their own. Before I had a chance to react, the Mad Gecko picked up a blob and hurled it at me, it striking me in the chest and bouncing off, and landing nearby. I didn't expect the gecko to have a strong throwing arm nor did I expect that blob to actually do damage.

" Those blobs aren't just for show."

" Tell me about it." I said as I rubbed my head. " What exactly are those things?"

" More like a single entity."

" In English."

" Mad Jelly is a gelatinous blob that aids the Mad Gecko." Twilight answered. " Each of the different pieces act on their own and can bump into you if you're not careful. No attacks can cut them open so it will boil down to you avoiding them as much as possible, though it won't be easy what with the Mad Gecko throwing them. They can all merge together to form a giant blob that will be under the control of the Mad Gecko and can pull you inside were you to touch it."

" And the gecko?"

" It will behave in the same manner as before though it will jump into the Mad Jelly as a means of protection."

" That sounds disgusting."

" Not really." Twilight said. " It's an amphibian so it can survive in a giant blob made of water. Since that is what the Mad Jelly is made of, you might be able to freeze the different
pieces or the entire thing using your Ice Arrows though they probably won't freeze the Mad Gecko."

" I'll need to find some magic jars." I said. I quickly looked around the room and noticed pots located in each corner. " If those pots contain magic jars, then I'm all set for dealing with this situation. Still, I was expecting something powerful but then this Mad Jelly sounds unpredictable."

Out of the corner of my eye, the Mad Gecko picked up another piece of jelly and tossed it at me. My instinct told me to use my shield in hopes of defending, so I did only to find that it didn't work and once again I was damaged ever so slightly--I'd have to jump either side or even duck down to avoid getting hit.

Running forward in hopes of scoring a hit, the Mad Gecko turned tail and began hopping away though I wasn't surprised by its behaviour. This is exactly what the previous one did yet that one chose to use the ceiling as a means of fleeing while this one preferred to remain grounded. Unlike the giant snapper turtle from before that chose to hide when its rider was knocked off, I couldn't get to the Mad Gecko what with all the blobs bouncing in my way. Not only was it inconvenient but also disturbing as I felt really uncomfortable being surrounded by actual living water that stung when it hit.

It--the Mad Gecko--eventually stopped to throw a piece of blob at me and this time I was ready. By ducking at the last moment, the blob sailed over my head and landed on the ground with a squishy thud before I got back up and resumed my chase though the monster seemed to be getting faster with every bounce. It reached the point where simply chasing it proved pointless as it's speed was too much so I took a diagonal path in hopes of cutting it off and forcing it to freak out. It wasn't easy what with having to avoid bouncing blobs but I was able to cut off the Mad Gecko.

Screeching to a stop and shouting as a means of lousy intimidation, it was about to turn around and bounce away when I slashed it in the chest. This caused it to shout again and all of the blobs began moving towards it when they suddenly piled on top until the monster was trapped inside of it. Princess Twilight warned me that the Mad Jelly was capable of merging its different pieces into one, but I didn't think that it would be so big in size. It looked liked it couldn't maneuver around very well but then it surprised me by pulling itself up to the ceiling and began moving again.

" This is where the Ice Arrow will shine."

" How?"

" The Mad Jelly essentially weighs nothing despite having an occupant inside of it." Twilight answered. " Because of that, it can stay on the ceiling for as long as it wants until it chooses to come down to attack. But, if you use an Ice Arrow and freeze the mass, the sudden weight increase will force it to drop down and shatter upon hitting the ground. This will separate the blob into pieces along with freeing the Mad Gecko."

" How do I get it to attack?"

" Watch its shadow on the ground carefully."

" Um, that wasn't what I asked.

" You'll have to lure it out using yourself as a decoy but you might want to move right now, Sunset."

I was going to ask Her Highness why I needed to move when my answer was provided when the Mad Jelly suddenly dropped down and landed on the ground, its mass spreading across the floor in a large radius. My reaction was slow and my legs got submerged in the blobby gunk all because I got caught in the radius. I struggled to break free by trying to pull my legs out but it was no use; the Mad Jelly's oozing form proved too strong to escape from. I then tried slashing at it with my sword hoping it would rescind and let me go, but this didn't work either as my blows had no effect.

Panicking, I considered firing some Ice Arrows in hopes of freezing it around my legs then smash my way out but before I could take out my bow, the mass consumed my entire body and I found myself trapped within it unable to move. On the one hand, I was able to breathe relatively well yet that was the only positive. The Mad Gecko, who had watched the spectacle with its own eyes, smiled a cruel smile and snickered under its breath. It had me right where it wanted me and I couldn't do anything but wait to see what it would do. It then flexed what I assumed were muscles and inched over to me.

It punched me in the stomach and all I could do was wince in pain. Princess Twilight tried to get me to do something to prevent the oncoming assault yet she found herself unable to move or say anything. Another punch from the Mad Gecko followed by a kick to my head--I felt like screaming from that but couldn't due to being able to move my mouth--and then a swift kick to my stomach knocked the wind out of me, and it became apparent that I was at this monster's mercy.

Chapter 44: Other Side

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
February 13, 2017
Chapter 44: Other Side.

I've been in some serious situations so far throughout this journey, yet this one would be classified as being utterly ridiculous. Not only was I unable to fight back against a monster that was so pathetically easy--compared to other monsters--I was trapped inside of a giant blob of water that was sentient and being pummeled. No matter how hard I tried, I just couldn't move any part of my body. It reminded me of when I got frozen that one time by that Freezard in the Ice Cavern on my previous journey--I'm surprised I remembered that--though this was more humiliating rather than agonizing as that was.

When I was frozen on the spot, I felt completely powerless, and it reminded me why I didn't like the snow compared to my friends. They all loved frolicking about--or what constitutes as such--while I preferred staying indoors unless I had to come out for obvious reasons. In this case, I was powerless along with feeling humiliated because I could have avoided this had I struggled hard enough to break free of the blobby mass that was the Mad Jelly.

Not even Princess Twilight was able to free herself and give me the necessary advice I needed, yet she wasn't the one who was being pounded on by a monster who was apparently taking its sweet time of things. Rather than just punch, kick, and whatever else it could think of in a quick fashion to punish me, the Mad Gecko was taking its sweet time over dealing what amounted to pitiful damage, a reminder that it was a weak monster compared to others. Yet it had complete control and all I could do was wait for it to finally kick me out of this blasted mass of jelly. I couldn't help but feel jealous over how Her Highness avoided most monster attacks all because she was a fairy.

The Mad Gecko continued attacking me in its slow manner--my temper was already boiling at this point over how it was so slow--and while the damage was pitiful as I mentioned before, it was stacking up and that meant my health was draining away. With every blow it made, it snickered before continuing with the assault though every now and again, it looked around for something--I didn't know what could be important for it to even do that. In any case, I hoped that it would kick me out of this mass because my desire for revenge over being humiliated like this was growing stronger.

Wow... I couldn't believe that I actually thought about revenge. That was an emotion I hadn't felt since my days of being a bully. Did I really feel so embarrassed over being trapped in a blob that my mind was contemplating reviving something I used to do against anyone who thought they could beat me? Desperation was something that frightened me and played right into Ganondorf's hands. He wanted me to resort to using evil feelings so that he could groom me into becoming his loyal servant. If I were to succumb to this emotion, I'd embarrass Princess Twilight, the one who offered her hand in friendship, the one who gave me a second chance.

Shaking my head--or as close to it as I could given the situation--I chose instead to accept my fate and wait for the Mad Gecko to finish what it was doing. After punching, kicking, and even biting me on my arm for some strange reason, it spun its arm around a few times before delivering an uppercut--it was weak but had a remarkable amount of force behind it--that freed me from the Mad Jelly though I ended up landing on my back on the other side of the room. It then moved back up to the ceiling and waited for me to make a response though I was more inclined towards checking to make sure nothing was broken.

" That... was unpleasant." I said as I shivered.

" I actually found it somewhat riveting myself." Twilight said.

" Somehow, I'm not surprised that you just said that."

" It's not everyday that you get to be inside of a living mass of water." Twilight said. " The only thing that comes to mind that we have in Equestria is The Smooze, an old acquaintance of Discord's though it's more slime based than anything else."

" You... Never told me about that one."

" I could go on for days discussing The Smooze, but I don't think now is a good time."

" Still can't believe you found being stuck in a blob 'riveting'."

Princess Twilight clasped her hands together and stars appeared in her eyes. " Ever since we first entered Great Bay Temple, I've been fascinated by so much wonder, I actually feel jealous knowing that Equestria doesn't have anything of the sort. If we weren't on a serious mission to save three worlds from being destroyed, I would seriously consider staying here as long as possible until I uncovered every last detail." I smiled smugly and rolled my eyes to which Her Highness noticed. " Ahem... Sorry, my mind got so focused on such possibilities that I forgot that we were dealing with something."

I rolled my eyes again. " You're just being you, Twilight."

" I just can't help myself, Sunset."

I got back onto my feet and looked up at the Mad Jelly. " I'm surprised that it hasn't decided to attack considering I had my back on the floor. Still, I was shocked at how much of a radius the Mad Jelly had when it drops down. I need to make sure to keep away otherwise I'll get pulled back in and pummeled in a humiliating manner."

" You already figured out that Ice Arrows will freeze the mass up there and bring it crashing down."

" Yeah, but it dropped down so quickly that I couldn't get a clean shot."

" This is what's known as having to be quick." Twilight said. " Sometimes, you can't afford to take your time with something as that ends up costing you. Instead, you simply do it without thinking and hope that it works. I know it sounds pretty stupid--and it is--but such split-second decisions are necessary."

" You make it sound like it's easy."

" That's because it is."

I couldn't come up with a response to her. Deep down, I knew she was right in that I had to do things quickly because time wouldn't wait for me, but I wished she hadn't said it like that. Despite how far I had come on this journey, I still had some issues over self-doubt and believing in my own abilities. I may not express such feelings on the outside but they were always on my mind on the inside. Aiming and firing Ice Arrows without taking the time to find my target was something that was beyond my abilities, yet it seemed I had no other choice but to adapt quickly.

The Mad Gecko, a monster that I thought was going to be easy, ended up being a lot more difficult than I thought it was. It told me that I still had a ways to go on a physical plane but also an emotional one. I was still a child who thought that everything was going great with my life since reforming. My maturity wasn't as strong as I thought it was and this was obvious whenever I threw a tantrum resulting from letting my anger cloud my judgment. Perhaps this journey was meant to show me how to be better matured and break free of the remnants of my past? Maybe but I first needed to test this to ensure that was the case.

After waiting long enough, the Mad Gecko commanded the Mad Jelly to slither over my position and drop down on me like before, but this time I wasn't about to let that happen knowing what comes next. Following Princess Twilight's advice, I aimed my bow up at the mass, firing an Ice Arrow before it could drop, turning it into a huge chunk of ice. The frozen mass attempted to shatter itself free from its icy prison but it wasn't going to happen since the weight proved too much. Like an apple falling from a tree, the mass dropped down, smashing upon impact, splitting the Mad Jelly into pieces with the Mad Gecko hopping away.

" It's getting away!" I shouted as I ran after it.

" It will attack the same way it did when the battle first started." Twilight said. " It will toss blobs of jelly at you that you need to avoid otherwise you'll get hit. I suggest not wasting your magic here as like I said before, not all monsters can be frozen by the Ice Arrows."

Nodding my head, I switched to my sword and shield just as the Mad Gecko tossed a blob at me. " I didn't say this before but this jelly is disgusting." I said as the blob struck me in the chest knocking the wind out of me for a brief moment. " When this journey is over, I may never be able to look at any jelly the same way again."

" I feel the same way."

Running after the Mad Gecko proved tricky as it continued tossing blobs of jelly at me, and while I avoided each one by rolling underneath them, it was preventing me from catching up to it, so I opted to try my prior strategy again of changing directions and cutting it off. Unfortunately, it had since learned and decided to jump over me and in the opposite direction leaving me to turn around and chase it.

It was at that point my stamina was beginning to show signs of running out. While I could easily run a marathon back at Canterlot High--though, not as fast as Rainbow Dash--I couldn't maintain such a pace what with having heavy equipment on my person--I was beginning to realize the disadvantages of having items. So long as the Mad Gecko knew how to adapt to what I was doing, I had no chance of defeating it and the chances of being pulled into the Mad Jelly were ever increasing. That's when I came up with an idea though I slapped my forehead knowing it could have been done sooner, yet I was afraid due to the potential of wasting magic.

Switching back to the Hero's Bow but removing the Ice Arrows, I began firing arrows at the Mad Gecko while running. Normally, running while shooting a bow wasn't recommended as your shots would be largely inaccurate yet I had no other choice as the battle had dragged on longer than I had expected. My initial arrows failed to hit their target though eventually, I would hit it after firing what must have been fifteen arrows. The Mad Gecko turned around, screamed at the top of its lungs, and the blobs all came together and formed the giant blob that was the Mad Jelly again.

" So that's how its attack pattern works." I said. " Pretty simple once you figure it out."

" You wasted a lot of arrows, Sunset."

I checked my quiver to see how many I had left. " I've got about ten more to go before I'm out."

Princess Twilight sighed. " You really need to go out of your way to get a larger quiver some time. This is like the third time now that you've almost run out of arrows when in a dire situation and it needs to be addressed soon! Before we go to the final region of Termina, we're going to spend an entire three day cycle acquiring better equipment, items, and even masks so that this doesn't become a constant problem."

" There should be some arrows in those boxes at each corner of the room."

" You'd best be careful not to get caught by the Mad Jelly again."

Running towards the closest set of boxes--they were to my right--the Mad Jelly slithered over to my location and dropped down from the ceiling though I was just barely able to get out of its radius preventing it from pulling me into itself. Since I had no time to pick up and toss the crates, I opted to roll into them for a faster result. My rewards included the necessary arrows along with a magic jar which would no doubt prove useful.

The instant I picked up the magic jar and restored my power, I was about to switch to an Ice Arrow when the Mad Jelly dropped down a second time. I honestly thought it could only come down in such a manner once every couple of minutes, but instead it could drop just like that without warning. So once again, the giant mass caught me in its goopy grip, my feet struggling to break free but to no avail, and eventually getting pulled in where the Mad Gecko waited. No doubt it enjoyed my misery though since my mind was clearer than it was before, all I could do was wait until it had finished toying with me.

As I was slowly being pummeled, I frowned knowing that this was embarrassing yet I took it with stride as the alternative meant seeking revenge. Princess Twilight, who also got caught in the Mad Jelly's grip, once again couldn't do anything though her expression told me she was enjoying herself to an extent. I guessed that when you're a bookworm, you tend to ignore obvious dangers in the name of seeing something new and exciting.

Once the Mad Gecko had finished punching and kicking me--it bit me on the shoulder this time instead of my arm--it delivered an uppercut that knocked out of the mass and I landed a lot closer than before, yet still on my back. The mass then rose back up and began slithering over so that it could drop down on me again. I wasn't about to deal with that for a third so I quickly switched over to the Ice Arrow, loaded it into bow and fired it, freezing the Mad Jelly. It shook a couple of times before crashing down onto the ground, shattering into pieces, and the Mad Gecko hoping away in hopes of finding a projectile.

Before it had the chance to pick one up, I switched back to the regular arrows, and fired as many as possible until one of them struck it in the back. This turned out to be the final hit as it spun around a few times and dropped to the ground, disappearing and leaving behind an ordinary frog. As for the Mad Jelly, the various pieces began dissipating like it were made of ice and melting away. Finally, both doors unlocked allowing me access to the Boss Key. Despite how humiliating this battle had been, it turned out pretty well though I knew that I needed to work on aiming and not wasting any arrows.

" You did it, Sunset!"

" That wasn't my best experience."

" Maybe not but you were able to overcome the odds."

I then looked down at the frog that appeared. " Just like what happened with the other Mad Gecko, a frog appeared upon this one's defeat. I have a feeling Starlight Glimmer used her magic to change it into a monster, yet there is something I want to try."

Princess Twilight then noticed me taking out Don Gero's Mask. " Huh? What are you doing taking that out here? I'm not sure now is a good time to try wearing a mask that doesn't possess any kind of powers."

" No, I think this is a perfect time."

" What do you mean?"

I slipped Don Gero's Mask onto my face. " Remember when we first got this mask from the Goron version of Photo Finish? She said that this mask could allow me to talk to the frogs that were part of the choir, and I think this frog happens to be one of them." I walked over until I was standing over the frog and it looked up at me in response with curiosity. " We could learn something by doing this or we might just learn more about this world's lore. Besides, you love learning new things."

" You've got me there."

Just as I was about to talk to the frog, a howling sound echoed around me indicating that the sun had gone down outside and night was upon us once again.

Night of the Second Day - 36 Hours Remain

The battles against both Wart and the Mad Gecko had taken up more time than I thought, so that meant I needed to make this conversation a quick one--I figured exploring the remaining rooms within the temple would take me a couple of hours and the boss monsters even longer. I squatted down and began talking. " Um... Excuse me? Do you mind if I can ask you a couple of questions?"

" Ah! Don Gero! It has been so long since I last saw you. Hmmm... Is it just me or have you lost some weight since last time?" It seemed that this mask convinced the frog that I was this person so I decided to go along with it. " You must tell me how you were able to do that some time."

" You seem pleasant."

" Of course." The frog then began hopping up and down in a feverish manner and I waved my hands to get it to calm down. " Forgive me for being so excited, but I am honoured that you came all this way looking for me. You need not be surprised. Your face is telling me this is true so I understand." I wasn't entirely sure if I believed what the frog was saying, but I chose to go along with it just to be on the safe side. It then began looking around its surroundings indicating that it didn't know where it was. " This is surely a strange place for us to be meeting one another, Don Gero, very strange indeed."

" What are you doing here?"

" To be honest, I do not understand that myself. I remember heading towards the mountains to gather with my fellow frogs in hopes of getting to perform but then someone with a strange face appeared before me and everything turned dark. My first thought was that I would become either someone's dinner but I ended up in this strange place. I have no idea how long it has been but I wish to no longer be here."

" EWWWW!" I exclaimed, my tongue stuck out in disgust. " Who would want to eat frogs?"

" Many eat our kind out of the desire to try a unique delicacy."

It sounded like the frog considered me one of its own because of the mask. " I guess some people have strange tastes." If Fluttershy were here and discovered that people ate frogs in this world--much like how some cultures did so in the world I called home, she would have fainted without a moment's hesitation. " What are your plans now? You're free to do whatever you like."

" I had hoped to go to the mountains and await my fellow frogs but it seems spring has not come there."

" Why would you go there?"

" My fellow frogs have been waiting to perform for you but it seems that will never happen now. A shame really as the great Don Gero has graced me with his presence. If spring returns to the mountains, you can find me there although I don't know about the others. What could they possibly be doing? In any case, I hope to see you again in the mountains once the snow has thawed."

Before I could say anything in response, the frog disappeared in a puff of smoke, leaving me to contemplate what had just happened. Fortunately, I had encountered other frogs who looked identical to this one--though they were different colours--yet I never could do anything about them since I didn't have Don Gero's Mask, the one thing that allowed me to communicate with them. If I recalled correctly, there was one frog in Woodfall Temple trapped in the monstrous guise of the other Mad Gecko, one that I saw during the Swamp Cruise Tour sitting on a log, one that was hiding amongst some flowers where I found the Stray Fairy of Clock Town when I first arrived, and one near the Mountain Smithy.

Along with this fifth frog, I deduced that I had seen all five members--I assumed there were five based on what I've seen--of their gathering and that I could easily gather them all together to see them perform whatever it is they desired. Of course, it wasn't as easy as it seemed as one involved going through the first temple again to defeat the Mad Gecko and saving it, and needing spring to return to the mountains involved defeating Goht for a second time. Was it worth doing it? My brain suggested otherwise and focus on awakening the remaining giants yet my heart insisted on helping them even if meant going back to previous locations.

There was something else that frog said that burned into my mind, and it had to do with the person it encountered before ending up here. There was only one person who had a strange face, and that was Starlight Glimmer, though I wasn't surprised by this revelation. Her magic was growing more powerful if she could change an innocent creature into a monster, yet who was to say she had reached her full potential? If anything, she could merely be scratching the surface of what the mask contains. Yet, at the same time, I was beginning to suspect that she might not be in complete control as appearance suggested.

Granted, I hadn't seen her do all of these things, rather, I heard about her actions from others, but she went from simple pranks to wanting destruction. No one with magic could make such a leap that quickly without proper training and wanting to do that sort of thing so Starlight could be getting influenced by someone else. My first thought was Ganondorf yet he would rather do it himself even if he did manipulate others into carrying out his bidding.

" What are you thinking about, Sunset?" Twilight asked, breaking my concentration. " You were daydreaming again only this time you looked much more serious about it. Did something that frog say struck a nerve?"

I slowly nodded my head. " At first, I was thinking about whether or not to help unite all the frogs--I'm going to do it eventually--but as soon as it mentioned the 'someone with a strange face' remark, I knew it was referring to Starlight, and it got me thinking that perhaps she isn't in complete control of her magic."

" Huh? What makes you suggest that?"

" Something in my heart is gnawing away at it and telling me so."

" That's quite an unusual conviction."

" You think I could be wrong?"

Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders. " I don't see how you came to that conclusion."

" We know Starlight started off pulling harmless pranks using the power of her mask, right?" I asked. Princess Twilight nodded since she was the one who initially told me that by tapping into the memories of the character she was portraying, Tatl. " From what we've seen with our own eyes lately, Starlight has moved on from pranks and desires to bring this world to destruction by dropping a moon on it along with everything else she has been doing."

" When you put it that way..."

" I'll be honest, Twilight. My conviction does sound pretty weak but it's what I choose to believe."

" Guess all I can do is go along with it."

" Don't you want to combat it or something?"

Princess Twilight shook her head and smiled. " This is your adventure, Sunset, even if I am here with you--I'm merely along for the ride--so in the end, you're the one who has to make such important decisions that will help determine whether or not three different worlds can be saved. I know it's a lot of pressure on your shoulders but this is nothing compared with what you've done in the past. I need some more proof that Starlight's actions aren't her own but you could be right about her."

" We need to save the remaining giants then."

" It's our best chance of defeating her."

" Yeah."

" And Ganondorf?"

" I'll... get back to you on that."

Dealing with the likes of Starlight was easy since we knew what she was doing. Her magic was dangerous since we had no idea what kind of powers she possessed through wearing her mask, but she was nothing compared to Ganondorf. His motives were shrouded in secrecy and covered in darkness, his words confusing and ambiguous, his power far beyond that of mere mortals, a portion of that same power flowed throughout my body thanks to the Triforce of Courage. If I could, I'd rather face off against Starlight any day of the week instead of Ganondorf, but fate wasn't on my side this time.

Looking down at my hand, I could barely see the mark of the Triforce glowing back at me, a sign that I was destined for something much more. What that destiny was remained unknown as it constantly changed with the ebbs and flows that often are associated with this kind of thing. The only thing I knew was that Princess Twilight was also a part of this destiny since she possessed the Triforce of Wisdom--if what Ganondorf said was true though his words were cryptic at best. Since he came from the future, he possessed all three pieces which begged the question of who had the remaining piece, the Triforce of Power, in this time?

There was no point in dwelling any further on it. If I continued to persist, all it would give me was a migraine alongside a near infinite number of questions with no answers attached to them. It would be something that I'd probably discover later on anyway.

Turning towards the now unlocked doors, I was surprised to see that the door I needed to use was right next to the one I entered the room from. I didn't think a place like this would have such a feature but then this temple felt more like a giant machine than an ancient building. Before moving on, I made sure to pick up some spare arrows and magic jars by smashing the remaining crates, and upon finishing, I entered the previous room through the other door, walked around a corner, and gazed upon the chest that housed the Boss Key. I didn't understand why it needed to be placed in a special chest, but who was I to complain about something so trivial.

Opening the chest and taking out the Boss Key, I pocketed it and noticed something out of the corner of my eye. There was a fairly large square-shaped hole in the metal fence that I honestly never noticed before until seeing it from this side of the room. If I didn't know any better, I'd swear I could jump through it and back to the other side without having to waste precious sections going back into the other room.

" Looks like we'll have to take the long way back." I said as I took out the Zora Mask.

" Actually, I was hoping we could try something."

" What did you have in mind?"

" I suspect that we can warp back to the beginning of the temple if you play the Song of Soaring."

" Is that even possible?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " The song allows you to warp to locations that house those Owl Statues you've struck so it's fair to assume that you can warp back to the beginning of the temple using the same method."

My jaw dropped followed by my eyes bugging out. If what Princess Twilight said was true, I could warp back to the start of any temple just by playing that one song!? Did I go through torment of backtracking to the start of the previous temple when I could have skipped all of that entirely!? My temper suddenly rose and I wanted nothing more than to throw a hissy fit, pound my fists into a wall, and scream as loud as possible. In the midst of my rage, I quickly calmed down knowing what happens whenever my anger consumed me. Besides, that was all in the past now and I needed to move ahead to the future.

Still, I wished that I had known this much sooner. I could have saved precious time that could have been used to complete other tasks a little quicker without having to worry about running out of time. Putting my mask away, taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, and looking down at it, I felt like pounding my head into the wall not from being angry but from being stupid for not realizing how important my instrument really was. It served me well on my previous journey yet had been neglected during this one in favour of the masks yet this was a mistake on my part.

The ocarina was perhaps more important than the masks and I had completely ignored that fact. Maybe I ought to give it more attention by playing it in places even when I don't really need to. Sure I have my guitar back home that allows me to express my musical talents, but the ocarina was an instrument most people didn't know how to play nor knew that it existed. I had grown accustomed to playing it--I still struggled with it from time to time--and wouldn't just cast it aside once everything was back to normal. Perhaps I could purchase my own one--it wouldn't be the same of course--and practice just in case something like this happened in the future.

I sighed. " Guess we might as well go back to the beginning. Besides, we have to anyway in order to change the direction of the water current."

" Are you okay, Sunset?"

I shook my head. " I wish I had known about that sooner."

" It was my fault for not realizing it." Twilight said. " The blame is on my shoulders."

" As my fairy companion, you are meant to offer advice to help me deal with any situation that proves difficult." I said. " Knowing the secrets of the ocarina is something that I'm supposed to know since I used the blasted thing last time." My temper began flaring up again and I responded by performing the breathing exercises Her Highness taught me until my mind was clear once again. " There's no point in worrying about it now."

" Shall we go back then?"

I nodded my head. " Okay." I didn't have the heart to tell Her Highness that during my previous journey, she was the one who gave me the Ocarina of Time to keep it safe from those who desired it for their own evil ways. Technically, she knew more about it than I did though that was a different version of her. The Twilight who was with me now was the one who gave me a second chance and not the princess of a ruined kingdom. " This should only last for several seconds."

Playing the Song of Soaring, wings appeared on my back, wrapped themselves around me, and began spinning me around until I disappeared into the ether. Several seconds later--ironic that I was correct about that--and I reappeared back at the entrance to the Great Bay Temple, the turtle lurching its neck back slightly upon my sudden appearance. Looking down at the ocarina again, I still found it difficult to believe that I never considered warping in this manner. Heck, it made travelling around Termina much easier since I didn't have to do as much walking/running as before.

Sighing, I walked up to the door, opened it, and entered the next room where I looked up to see the small waterwheel for the first time since I initially left this room. The red pipe was now glowing indicating that water was flowing through it enabling me to change the water current, but first I most likely needed to activate a switch so that the water could come out of the red funnel the pipe connected to and push the waterwheel in the opposite direction.

It didn't take long to find the switch--it was on top of a platform supported by a couple of columns on the opposite end of the room--so that meant having to work my way back over there though such a trek wasn't really all that long. First, I waited for the rising platform to come down before jumping onto it, and when it rose up to the upper ledge, I jumped off and pulled out my bow, firing an arrow at the Skulltula above me before it could drop down and knock me off of the ledge and into the water below. At least my reaction time was getting better as in the past, that monster would have easily succeeded in attacking me.

Jumping on some water coming out of a yellow funnel and onto the other side, I walked around the corner until I came upon the platform that housed the switch in question. I had hoped that I could have just walked down to it but it seemed that jumping would be my means of getting over there, but then my eyes noticed another red funnel hiding behind and below the platform, water rose up from it every now and again. Looking up and seeing a Hookshot plate told me what I needed to do to reach the platform, and I felt relieved knowing that a random jump was now no longer necessary.

Switching over the Hookshot, I aimed and fired at the Hookshot plate, the chain connecting with a loud thud moments later, and pulled me up before dropping me down onto the water--for a moment I thought I'd get hurt what with it being a long drop--where I waited for it to rise. Jumping onto the platform, I noticed that this switch looked different compared with all the others I'd seen thus far, yet a similar one could be seen close by next to the yellow funnel, water coming from it pushed against the waterwheel.

" So that's how this works."

" You figured it out?"

" Like I said at the beginning, Sunset, everything in this temple is connected together like it were one giant machine." Twilight answered. " By bringing the water back from where we found the Ice Arrows, we can now reverse the water's flow and explore the rooms we couldn't access. First, you'll need to activate this switch though it will shut everything down as the two bursts of water will cancel each other out. When this one is working, you'll need to shut the other one off to reverse the water flow."

" Do you think we'll be able to rescue the remaining Stray Fairies this way?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, though I think we may need to figure out where that green pipe leads to. It needed to be activated for a reason otherwise there would have been no reason to go into that room other than rescuing the Stray Fairy in the treasure chest."

" Looks like I'll be going Zora for a while."

" You'll need to in order to swim through the underwater currents."

That didn't surprise me in the least. Sighing... again, I put away the Hookshot, took out the Zora Mask, and placed it on my face. I then squatted down and watched as my body changed from being a human to a Zora--I placed my hand on the switch so as to not fall off into the water as I didn't want to have to climb back up here again--until the transformation was over, and began pushing the switch to see if that would do something. Nothing happened so I pulled it and it miraculously turned until it came to a stop although it didn't sink into the ground like the previous ones did.

The red funnel below the waterwheel began to spew forth water causing the wheel to come to a complete stop yet I couldn't help but feel that this was a kind of nirvana since nothing was currently working. I thought about going back and seeing if I could swim through an underwater passage without needing to reverse the flow, but that idea got killed in a hurry upon seeing that everything mechanical in the room had shut down.

Luckily, the other switch was right below so I jumped down into the water, swam over a little bit, climbed out onto the platform, and pulled on this switch, turning it around until it clicked into place. This caused the water coming from the yellow funnel to stop, allowing the water from the red funnel to push up on the waterwheel, effectively reversing the flow of water and opening up new pathways.

Unfortunately, it meant subjecting myself to the whim of being pulled down a passageway that I didn't need to go down like what happened earlier all because I wasn't strong enough to break free from the powerful current. I was hoping that there wasn't much more to the temple since it had already taken its toll on me both physically and emotionally, yet deep down I knew this could never be true as the boss monster lurked down one of the paths I hadn't gone down yet. Just thinking about the boss waiting for me to reach it made me think about what kind of monster it was going to be.

To be fair, the previous two didn't really have anything to do with the main theme of the temples they were located in, but perhaps this next one would break that trend and be something that related to water, this temple's theme. The only thing I could think of was fish though that would be rather redundant as well as predictable. I supposed I'd find out when I finally reach its chamber, but first I needed to make my way back to the central chamber. Despite everything now flowing in reverse, at least the rising platform was still moving in the same manner as before or else I'd be up the creek as it were without a means of getting back.

Several minutes later, I reached the central chamber and already I could see the difference regarding the water flow. Everything was now going in reverse, including the giant waterwheel, and that meant two passageways were no longer accessible until the original water flow came back. Good thing I had picked up everything along those paths otherwise I'd have to backtrack before finishing the temple.

" What do you suppose the other paths will feature?"

" I'm not sure." Twilight answered. " But you need to go down the right one or else we might end up reaching a place we're not supposed to access yet. Granted, we can go straight to the boss room now since we have the key, yet I'm sure you want to save the remaining Stray Fairies, right?"

I nodded my head. " I'm going to need all of their abilities if I hope to make it through to the end."

" Do you wonder what the next Great Fairy will grant you?"

" I've got a pretty good idea."

" You do?"

" Yeah." I answered. " The first one gave me the ability to use magic, the second enhanced my magic meter, and the third granted me the ability to perform the spin attack--I really should use that sometime rather than let it go to waste. On my previous journey, I received these same abilities through Great Fairies though using magic was a bonus given to me upon learning the spin attack."

" Okay, so what's left?"

" I doubt I'll get any magic spells so that leaves me with defence enhancement."

" What!?"

Princess Twilight was slightly taken aback by what I said though I was surprised she would react like that. Defensive magic was pretty common throughout Equestria as being the perfect means to protect oneself from anything that threatened you. Most unicorns never used it as they didn't study hard enough yet it was something they had access to should they desire it for whatever reason they had. The stronger one's magic, the more potent the shield that gets created. Her Highness sounded like she had no idea how to use defensive magic but perhaps Starlight Glimmer, in her true persona, was capable of using it.

I continued. " The last Great Fairy I encountered enhanced my defences though I never really noticed since I received it right before the final trial. Had I gotten it much sooner, it would have made things a lot easier for me though it would have also taken away kind of challenge."

" No sense in trying to cheat though, right?"

" The defence enhancement wasn't cheating." I answered. " It did help me in my final trial though considering how inexperienced I was throughout the journey what with my countless mistakes, blunders, and errors, I could have used it a lot sooner than at the end. If I do end up getting a defence enhancement at this stage, it means things will only get harder from here on out to warrant it."

" Only way to know is to restore Adagio back to normal."

" Hope I can find the remaining Stray Fairies."

" No! How is this possible!?" Rainbow Dash exclaimed.

" Are you finished playing?" Sunset Demon asked.

The situation Rainbow Dash found herself occurred the moment she chose to take on the she-demon. What she thought was going to be an easy victory turned out to be a lopsided affair against her. She tried using the sword given to her by Derpy, her second-in-command, only for it to shatter in two upon striking the she-demon's skin. Rainbow subsequently used another sword only for it to shatter in a similar manner--it split down the middle as opposed to in two--followed by another until she had used all of the sword her pirate sisters had brought with them on their failed attempt at entering the Great Bay Temple.

For her part, Sunset Demon didn't really do anything other than slowly lose her patience over witnessing Rainbow slowly humiliate herself. Midnight Sparkle, who had taken the opportunity to write down notes as well as check her device--much to the ire of Sunset Demon--had been chuckling away at the plight of the Gerudo Pirate Leader though she tilted her head at the she-demon to inform her that they were on a busy schedule and couldn't afford to waste too much time. Rarity, who was still coming to grips with having her voice restored after losing it, merely watched the proceedings unsure of what to do.

She thought about helping Rainbow Dash, who was obviously struggling, yet she couldn't resort to doing so as her problems began when her eggs got stolen. She didn't look like the kind of person who would hold a grudge against someone, yet Rarity made an exception in this case. Midnight Sparkle made certain to note down Rarity's reactions though was surprised that she chose not to help despite representing the Element of Generosity.

Rainbow Dash then used a stick she picked up off the sand and charged at Sunset Demon only to be swatted away like she were nothing. She landed in the water forcing her fellow pirates to fish her out before the underwater monsters could pull her under, and when they finally managed to get her out, Rainbow walked forward before dropping down onto both knees then hands, sweat dripping down her brow, her breathing erratic as a result of extreme exhaustion. The other pirates looked on in surprise at how their leader was being bested by an opponent who was clearly far more powerful.

" That's it! I have nothing left!"

" I'll take that as a sign that you admit defeat."

Rainbow Dash tried to get up but her body refused. " Guess you beat the leader of the Gerudo Pirates. Heh... Since you're the victor, that means I'm at your mercy. Do whatever you want to me but leave my sisters out of this. They didn't do anything!"

Sunset Demon scoffed. " It's about time you put an end to such a pathetic display." She walked forward before reaching out with her hand, grabbing Rainbow by the collar she wore around her neck, and lifted her off the ground. " I'd love nothing more than you kill you, Rainbow Dash, but my companion needs you to be alive long enough to prove something, so you get to survive after all. Still, I was slightly amused by how you struggled to use whatever was on hand just to hit me with." The she-demon then tossed Rainbow into the other pirates, knocking them down before walking back to where she stood before."

" What... what are you?"

" A demon, though not the kind you've seen."

" No wonder I couldn't beat you."

" It's because you're a human!" Sunset Demon said. " Your kind are weak in body but powerful in mind. Despite how pathetic you were, I'll concede that you earned my respect for not wanting to give up despite the odds being heavily stacked against you." She then turned to Midnight Sparkle, who had since finished writing down notes. " Did she display the qualities expected of her or did she fail at doing that?"

Midnight Sparkle shook her head. " My analysis indicates that she only did a sub-par effort."

" Figured she wouldn't live up to your lofty experiences."

" Perhaps you could convince her to do better?"

" What did you have in mind?"

" I'm sure someone of your calibre can come up with something."

Sunset Demon frowned and turned towards the pirates before mumbling under her breath. " Sometimes, I don't know why I didn't just kill her after she brought me back from the brink after what happened to me before. I know that I owe her for helping me but she's been nothing but annoying and all while keeping secrets. I'll find out what her true intention are, and if I like them then I suppose I'll keep her around. But, if not then I'll kill her and take whatever she has for myself." She walked over to the pirates who all cowered in fear with the sole exception of Rainbow Dash who showed defiance. " Maybe Midnight Sparkle isn't so bad... heh... I'm such a hypocrite."

Rainbow suddenly got her second wind, stood in front of her fellow pirates, arms spread out wide, and had a fierce expression on her face. " I told you to leave my sisters alone! Your beef is with me, not them! I'll make sure none of them get hurt even it means you having to kill me!"

" That can be arranged."

" Okay! Then come and get me!"

Rarity finally spoke up. " Um... I don't think this is such a good idea."

" I'm surprised at how quiet you've been this entire time." Midnight Sparkle said.

" I did not want to impose considering you were all busy talking to one another about whatever it is that you two creatures came here for, but I am afraid that I must insist that you don't pursue this current course of action." Rarity said.

Midnight Sparkle shrugged her shoulders. " While I have no problem taking your suggestion to heart, my companion doesn't see it the same way as I do. In fact, she might choose to rip your fins from your arms first before killing you where you stand." Her response prompted Sunset Demon to scold her with a stare that could freeze a person to the soul but ignored it and continued. " I am curious as to why we shouldn't indulge ourselves in a little fun."

" My people may not appreciate it."

" How many of your kind are there?"

" At least one hundred of us."

" Is that all?" Midnight Sparkle asked. " I was honestly worried there for a moment as I was expecting you to say at least a thousand or so, but then we demons can easily handle the likes of your kind since we know none of you are fighters."

Sunset Demon turned and immediately walked back over to Midnight Sparkle. " We're done here!"

" Huh? But why?"

" Either you suddenly got the urge to embrace your inner demon and think you can take on anyone, or you've completely lost your senses. I'm personally thinking that the latter is the correct answer." Sunset Demon answered. " We don't have the full extent of our power in this world! If we were to go up against that many Zoras, neither of us would be walking out of there alive, and our efforts would be completely wasted. At best, we'd be able to kill a couple of dozen before running out of steam. As much as I would love to slaughter Zoras, I'm being realistic here unlike yourself for once."

Midnight Sparkle smiled. " Perhaps my influence is rubbing off on you after all."

Sunset Demon slapped her forehead. " Gah! I should have known you were using my own attitude against me! Fine... You've proven your point that I can be way too sadistic for my own good sometimes, but don't push your luck in future, okay?" She then noticed Rarity trying to run and stopped her by blocking the entrance back into Zora Hall. The she-demon then turned her attention towards Rainbow Dash, who had someone gotten herself another sword seemingly from nowhere, and had dashed up to her using stealth before plunging her blade into the demon's shoulder. " What!? How did that sword pierce me?"

" It's my lucky sword." Rainbow Dash answered. " I concealed it on my person knowing I'd need it so I deceived you into thinking that I had run out of swords to use. Ha! The look on your face right now is priceless!" She turned to her fellow pirates and gave them a thumbs up. " I can't help but be so awesome!"

" Heh... You lived up to your reputation."

" I have to for my sisters' sake."

Sunset Demon grabbed the blade that was in her shoulder and pulled it out though she struggled as it went pretty deep. " I underestimated your tenacity. I'd love to kill you in return for wounding me but I have other things to take care of." The she-demon tossed the sword over to Rainbow Dash who caught it before checking her wound to see how serious it was; blood--or whatever it was she was bleeding--dripped down from her hand and all she did in response was clench it into a fist. " Midnight Sparkle... I think it's time for you to use that one magical ability you're capable of using."

" Quite right." Midnight Sparkle said.

" What are you up to?" Rainbow Dash asked.

" Even though none of this will matter when my companion's other self does her usual thing, that won't be for at least another day and a half from now, so it's necessary for us to take a precaution out of not wanting her to know of our presence." Midnight Sparkle answered. She took out a small bag that glowed in an ethereal light before throwing it onto the ground where it exploded in a large cloud of strange smoke. " This magic, simple as it is, will erase your memories of this encounter. We can't afford to have Sunset Shimmer know of our presence so you lot will continue to act out your lives while thinking this was nothing but a dream."

Rarity immediately dropped unconscious as a result of the strange smoke affecting her mind, the same happened with the pirates with the sole exception of Rainbow Dash. She initially resisted the magic coming from the smoke and attempted to wound Sunset Demon again thinking she could ultimately prevail. Unfortunately, her body couldn't hold out any longer and she collapsed just like everyone else. Both demons were surprised at how Rainbow was able to fight back against the magic though they knew it was in vain since she dropped down like the rest leaving them the only ones standing.

" I'm surprised you didn't use it before with Applejack." Sunset Demon said.

" Sunset Shimmer reset time shortly afterward mitigating our presence at that ranch." Midnight Sparkle said. " Besides, I only had the one bag so I was saving it for just such an emergency like this. In any case, we can't leave these pirates here otherwise Sunset will know something happened even if they don't remember. We'll have to carry them back to their fortress and dump them off before heading off towards that laboratory. That's where our next subject is waiting for us... the wild one."

" I just hope she will be cooperative."

Jumping into the water and diving down beneath the surface, the water current immediately began to pull me along the edge of the pool though this time I was being pulled in the opposite directions due to reversing the current. The previous paths I had taken were now inaccessible so that left the other two paths with one having the glowing green pipe travelling down along the wall indicating that I needed to go that way first.

Swimming around the edge of the room, the current coming from the passageway with the green pipe pulled me towards it when I got close enough, and when I swam down the path upon being pulled in completely, I was suddenly surprised a ways in by a Dexihand that practically appeared out of nowhere. Two red rupees and a pot were situated right below it though it was rather suspicious that such treasure--if you could call two rupees that compared with proper treasure from chests--would be on a path that I couldn't even stop to investigate given the current wanted to continue pulling me along.

I did manage to secure one of the two red rupees whilst avoiding the Dexihand's grasp though what was inside of the pot would forever remain a mystery as the passageway twisted about in a couple of ways before finally ejecting me into the next room. As soon as I entered this room, I had to come to a sudden stop to avoid colliding with one of those explosive mines from the Pirate's Fortress that was chained to the ground. I couldn't even drop down as two more mines were right below me so I continued swimming, activating my magic barrier upon seeing a pair of Skullfish swimming about nearby.

Right off the bat, the second half of Great Bay Temple wanted to test my reaction time by throwing monsters and obstacles right in front of me without giving me a chance to assess the situation. When both Skullfish were destroyed, I turned off my barrier and swam up to the surface, climbing out and onto a ledge that housed a pair of barrels though my eyes soon turned towards an impressive sight.

This room contained two more waterwheels that were connected together by a support beam with water pouring down in-between the two wheels that served as making the entire structure operational. A rising platform was nearby indicating that I needed to go upwards to continue onward. While I was in awe over what I was seeing, Princess Twilight once again geeked out upon seeing even more machinery at work. I couldn't help but roll my eyes in response though she quickly got back to her senses since she knew we needed to keep going and couldn't afford to oogle at this mechanism.

" Do you suppose I could use an Ice Arrow to freeze the opening that the water is pouring down from, stopping the waterwheels?" I asked.

" It's certainly doable." Twilight answered. " But, I suggest you do that when we're a bit further up as remember what happened back with the other waterwheel? When it came to a stop, everything that was mechanical also came to a stop."

" So I need to stop the water's flow at the right time?"

" Yes."

" I wonder where that would be..."

" Only way to know is to use that rising platform and see what happens."

I then noticed a second platform moving back and forth above us and pointed it out to Princess Twilight. " Maybe I can fire an Ice Arrow from up there? That shouldn't be too much of a problem especially if the waterwheels stop in just the right way."

" Ah, I see what you're thinking." Twilight said. " Using the waterwheels as platforms... Let's see what happens though hopefully you'll only need to use two arrows, one ice and one fire to stop and start the water's flow again."

As soon as the rising platform came down, dipped underwater for a few seconds, and was about to begin its ascent again, I jumped onto it and moved upwards until it came to a stop, and that's when I saw what to do next. The other platform moved back and forth on a horizontal plane yet didn't go past the bar that the two waterwheels were connected to. A jump was necessary to reach it though it involved landing on the bar before leaping again. I had to time it right so that both platforms were positioned correctly to enable the leap across otherwise I'd slip off the bar and fall into the water.

I had to wait a few moments before the vertical platform was high enough and the horizontal platform was making its way over to the bar. Once they were in position, I leapt and landed on the bar though my feet slipped a little because of not taking the bar's speed into consideration, yet I managed to leap again and landed on the other platform. This one eventually stopped at a ledge that travelled slightly upward and to the right before stopping in front of the waterwheels, giving me a perfect place to shoot an Ice Arrow from and hopeful stop the wheels in the right spot--failure would mean wasting both arrows and magic until I got it right.

When I got onto the ledge, I ran up until I stood before the waterwheels and saw that one was different from the other. The one on the left only had two spokes sticking out of the center compared to the other one that had eight. Thinking quickly, I deduced that the left wheel would allow me to cross over to a small ledge that housed a door, yet the right wheel seemed to serve no purpose apart from blocking my view of the hole in the ceiling I needed to freeze to stop the water from flowing down.

My eyes caught sight of a small treasure chest hiding behind the right wheel and my gut was telling me that a Stray Fairy could be inside of it. Sure, relying on instinct wasn't always the best course of action, yet why else would anyone place a chest in such an inconspicuous location? It was practically screaming something important was inside and needed to be opened up right away. Hopefully, I could freeze the spot where the water was coming from without wasting too many arrows and magic.

I grabbed my face and took off the Zora Mask--I needed to be a human for the time being--flipping my hair back in the process before putting the mask away and switching over to my bow and prepping an Ice Arrow. Looking ahead at the right waterwheel, it was moving at a decent pace so hopefully I could hit my target and not hit any of the spokes. Firing my arrow, it sailed across the room only to hit a spoke, causing me to fume under my breath. How could I have missed such an easy shot like that!? I mean, come on! I've gotten much better at using one of these things and then that happens!? Gah!

Once I got that little tantrum out of my system, I fired another arrow that struck the opening, causing it to freeze in an instant. The entire mechanism began slowing down due to the water no longer powering it before coming to a halt, the spokes of the left waterwheel lay flat allowing me access to the door that was located on the other side. My first shot failed while my second was successful. Without saying a word, I put my bow away, walked across the bar, over the waterwheel, and reached the chest, kicking it open freeing the Stray Fairy that quickly entered my body.

" How many is that now?"

" That should be our tenth."

" Only a few more to go."

" Hey, are you okay, Sunset?"

I looked at Princess Twilight with a frown. " You saw how I had to use two arrows just to freeze that hole, right? Why do those kinds of things keep happening? Why can't I just hit my target flawlessly instead of having to waste precious ammunition?"

" Maybe you need more practice?"

I felt absolutely crestfallen. " Ouch... Way to shatter my confidence."

Princess Twilight comforted me. " I didn't mean to do that but you need to realize that you can't master everything just like that. Like magic in Equestria, the items you find in this world take time for someone to use them correctly, and that involves practicing until it becomes second-nature. I know you've used several of these items before but it's been a while since that particular adventure, so you being out of practice makes sense."

" But still..."

" Maybe you should practice during the next three day cycle?"

" That sounds like a good idea."

Princess Twilight then noticed something that caught her attention. " Sunset... You might want to have a look down there." I followed her direction and looked down where I saw another treasure chest hidden inside of a small alcove. " That would be a good place to hide a Stray Fairy, but if you were to go and open that chest, you'll have to allow the water to flow by melting the ice and then freeze the hole again to progress forward."

Despite wanting to continue on and not have to backtrack throughout this room, I just couldn't leave a Stray Fairy behind especially since I had almost collected them all. Since the chest was down at the bottom inside of the alcove, my only option involved pulling myself towards it. Taking out the Hookshot and aiming it downward at the chest, I fired the chain, sinking into the wood upon impact before pulling me down towards it. Upon kicking the chest open and acquiring Stray Fairy number eleven, I looked back up and sighed knowing that I had to go through all of that again.

Jumping down into the water, swimming across to the other side where the barrels were and climbing onto the ledge, I took out the Hero's Bow and prepped a Fire Arrow before shooting it at the frozen chunk of ice--I hit it on my first try which didn't vindicate the fact that I missed it earlier--melting it and allowing water to flow again. The machinery began chugging to life so I walked forward, waited for the rising platform to come down and jumped onto it in order to go through the same process as before. This is why I didn't enjoy backtracking because it wasted time and made things longer than necessary.

By the time I jumped across to the other side of the room, ran up the path, used an Ice Arrow to freeze the hole again, and walked across the flat spokes of the waterwheel, I was about ready to call it quits on this whole adventure, but I knew that I needed to keep going despite my grievances. Entering the next room, I wasn't surprised to see more water dropping down from above though this time there were three waterfalls instead of one, yet this was nothing compared to what else was waiting for me.

The room consisted of three giant mechanical see-saws that made me wonder how I was supposed to weigh them down--I doubted that even my Goron form would be heavy enough to get them moving--though the water I noticed moments ago flowed down on top of one. It seemed that in order to progress through this room, I needed to freeze the holes the water flowed out from as well as melt said ice afterwards to raise and lower the platforms. That would require a lot of magic though it was fortunate that a pair of Green Chu-Chus were bouncing around the room--destroying them would produce magic jars.

Princess Twilight began looking around. " You need to rise and lower these accordingly."

" I figured that part out but I don't know where to start."

" Since the Green Chu-Chus re-spawn after a while upon defeating them, you'll never run out of magic so you can effectively waste Fire and Ice Arrows." Twilight said. " That being said, you don't have arrows to waste so unless you can find some inside of those boxes over there, you should make sure that each of your shots counts." Her Highness pointed to a few boxes in one corner of the room. " Then again, there is a Yellow Chu-Chu in here who gives out arrows upon being defeated though that might be a slow process given it takes roughly a minute until another Chu-Chu spawns in."

" Huh... I never noticed that yellow one until you mentioned it."

" They will no doubt get in your way so it might be best to cut them down for a temporary reprieve."

" And the Stray Fairies?"

" You have four more left to find though I can't see any of them around here."

I then looked down into a pool of water and could see something though I wasn't sure what it was. " I think there's a crate down there though why do you suppose it would be there to begin with?" I then slapped my forehead upon realizing that I had just answered my own question with another one. " I'll just change into a Zora and see for myself." As I took out my mask and looked down at it, I wondered if it were possible to go through a quick transformation rather than having to go through the entire thing? It would save me some mental anguish as sometimes it wasn't very comfortable changing forms especially on the fly.

Putting the mask onto my face and jumping into the water, my body parts changed from human to Zora--you get used to it after a while--and upon finishing my transformation and sinking down, it turned out that the crate was actually a barrel. There was no doubt in my mind that a Stray Fairy was trapped inside of it as why else would there be one down here in such a small area most probably wouldn't even notice. My fins weren't strong enough to break open the barrel, nor would my punches and kicks be effective since I did move slightly slower when underwater. I had to rely on my magic barrier to do the trick.

Stepping backwards until my back was up against the wall, I then pushed myself forward, activating my barrier and smashing the barrel to pieces releasing the Stray Fairy from its prison--my twelfth one overall--before it entered my body. I swam forward in hopes of being able to get out of this area from the other end but it was in vain as something was blocking the way out forcing me to double-back to the way I dropped down--one of those see-saw platforms had blocked the other way out.

Upon getting back to the main part of the room and changing back to a human by taking off my Zora Mask, I began contemplating on how to solve the puzzle before me. Taking my own advice, I needed to freeze and melt the ice in the correct sequence if I wanted to do this without wasting magic and arrows--I had an infinite supply of both on hand courtesy of the Chu-Chus though I didn't want to have to rely on them if I could avoid it.

" Okay... one of the see-saws have water pushing one side of them down while the two don't."

" Maybe we should start with one of them?"

" What do you suppose would happen when I use my respective arrows?"

" If you use an Ice Arrow to freeze the holes, it will cause the see-saw to veer in the other direction." Twilight answered. " Likewise, melting the ice will make the water push down on the one side and veer the see-saw accordingly. You need to be standing on the side that won't be affected by the water."

One of the see-saws had a platform that I could reach while the other was suspended in the air. " Guess I need to start with this one then." I said, walking onto it and looking up at the frozen ice chunk that blocked the water from coming down. " When this platform gets raised up, we can reach the ledge that's above us."

" Take your time with this, Sunset."

" I know."

Taking out the Hero's Bow and nocking a Fire Arrow into the bowstring, I aimed up at the ice, fired my arrow, and watched the ice melt, causing water to gush down from the now exposed hold and pushing down on the opposite platform. My one then rose up until it came to a stop next to the one that was suspended in mid-air so I jumped onto it and fired another arrow to melt the second ice chunk. Good thing they were large enough for me to hit otherwise I'd be throwing a tantrum like I did before--I was actually thankful for that.

When the platform rose up upon the other being pushed down by the water, I was shocked to see another switch waiting on the ledge I saw from below. I supposed that I should have realized it because of the green pipe glowing right up to a certain point before looking dull the rest of the way across the room. It also meant changing into a Zora just for this one moment due to not being able to push the switch using my own natural strength. By the time I am finished with this temple, I doubted I'd ever want to come in here again because of having to deal with so much pressure.

Jumping over to the switch, I decided to push it to see if I could without the need of changing forms--it refused to budge an inch. When it became apparent that my strength wasn't enough, I planted my foot on the switch as a means of venting out my frustration before taking out the Zora Mask and placing it on my face. As my body started changing once again, I just couldn't help but feel angry over needing to change forms just for a stupid switch. No wonder this place was really taxing me. I was very close to losing my nerves and wanting to smash something that was within range.

Upon becoming a Zora again, I pushed the switch until it clicked into place and dropped down allowing the water in the green pipe to continue flowing. While I was happy that the water was going to its final destination, my annoyance over needing to change forms just for a switch hadn't relinquished itself. I'd get over it but it was the principal of the thing. For my own sake and that of Princess Twilight, I'd allow this anger to pass and focus on what was important. I was about to take off my mask when a strange sound suddenly came out of nowhere though it sounded really close.

" What is that noise?"

" It's coming from the green pipe." Twilight answered. " And it's a Real Bombchu!"

" There must be something over there to warrant it being where it is."

" Maybe or it could be a trap."

" How do I go about getting rid of it as a Zora?"

" As you know, when a Real Bombchu spots you, it charges towards you and the bomb on its tail lights up." Twilight answered. " This then prompts you to use your shield to bounce it back where it explodes upon impact. It's possible to defeat it without triggering its explosive though that involves hitting it from a safe distance. It's not an easy task since it moves about all the time. You could try using your fins though you could unintentionally attract it this way."

" So it's a case of careful aiming?"

" Yes."

" I hope I can hit it on my first try." I said as I extended my fins out. I raised my arms and aimed at the Real Bombchu as it ran around the pipe repeatedly though this made it difficult to track it. " Shoot! The little fella is moving too fast for me to keep up with it." As it continued running and I continued following, my arms were quickly growing tired from holding them up for much longer than I had hoped. " Guess I should just throw them and see what happens." Launching my fins forward, the first one bounced off the pipe, attracting the attention of the Real Bombchu, but before it could make a move, my other fin whipped around and struck it from behind on its bomb, blowing it up.

" Nice shot."

My jaw dropped. " I wasn't expecting that."

" Shall we investigate the pipe?" Twilight asked. " It looks like you can walk along it."

I nodded my head though I was surprised that Princess Twilight changed her mind. I guessed she realized that something had to be on the other end of this pipe since there was a monster that had blocked the path forward.

Jumping onto the pipe, I struggled to keep my balance out of fear of falling down to the ground below--I didn't want that to happen as it would have meant backtracking all the way back up here and wasting my resources--because of how thin the pipe was. Once I felt comfortable enough to walk forward, I did so until I came upon a section of pipe that went upwards slightly before heading right. I leapt up and was able to grab onto the edge due to the top of this part of the pipe being within reach--good thing my Zora form was taller than any of my other forms including my true self--before pulling myself up.

Walking across the pipe and then dropping down to a ledge below, a treasure chest could be seen on the other side of quite the large gap. I suspected that a Stray Fairy was trapped inside of it as why else go to so much trouble hiding one chest? Judging from the distance, there was no chance I could jump across so that meant relying on the Hookshot to pull me across by using the chest.

Once again, I grabbed my face, pulled the Zora Mask off, and flipped my hair back--I knew that I'd need to change back to a Zora soon enough especially to progress down the remaining passageway in the central chamber--before taking out the Hookshot. Thankfully, the chest was a large enough target so aiming wasn't an issue. I fired the chain where it sunk into the chest and I sailed across landing in front of it. Kicking it open with my foot, the Stray Fairy came out before entering my body giving me my thirteenth one. Now all I needed to do was find my way out of this room, and it started by jumping down to the floor below.

" Ooof!"

" Are you okay, Sunset?"

I nodded. " I'm okay though that was a longer drop than I thought."

" Why did you drop down to the floor?"

" Well, we need to make our way back to the central chamber and explore that remaining path."

Princess Twilight began nudging my pouch and it didn't take me long to figure out her meaning. " You know that you could just play the Song of Soaring, go back to the entrance of the temple, and work your way back to that room, right? I mean, you could go back from where we are right now though it will involve using a lot of magic."

I almost slapped my forehead but stopped myself at the last minute. " Guess I need to be reminded of that."

" That's what I'm here for."

" Do we have any more treasure chests to find?"

Princess Twilight reached into my pocket, pulled out the Dungeon Map, and began to look at it. " According to the map, that chest you just opened was the last one. The other two Stray Fairies must either be hiding inside of pots or trapped inside bubbles. Either way, the only place they could be is right where the boss door is located, and it just so happens to be down the one path we haven't explored. You can either pick up some magic and arrows here or wait until we get there before looking around."

" I have a feeling I'll need my Zora body as well."

" Yes." Twilight said. " The other two bosses required you to use your Deku and Goron forms respectively, so it makes sense that this next one requires your Zora form. Still, you should pick up those supplies just in case."

Nodding my head, I took out the Ocarina of Time, and played the Song of Soaring, wings once again appeared on my back, wrapped themselves around me, and spun me around several before disappearing into thin air. I reappeared back in the first room moments later, surprising the giant turtle once again--it acted like it had never seen a person appearing out of thin air--and began heading towards the central chamber. Of course, I had to go through the waterwheel room much to my displeasure, but at least I didn't have to solve the puzzle again. As soon as I entered the room, I jumped onto the rising platform and waited for it to reach its destination before jumping off.

Without even realizing it, I was blindsided by the Skulltula that waited above though I had no time to destroy it--doing so would have proved nothing other than me holding petty grudges--so I ran past it, jumped on the water that was coming out of the yellow funnel, jumped onto the other platform, ran along, crossed the yellow pipe, and back into the central chamber where the water was still flowing in the other direction. Looking back on it now, once you've solved a puzzle in one of these temple room's, it feels like it never existed since all you're doing is running past everything without having to stop and think.

Taking out the Zora Mask and placing it on my face, I jumped into the water, making a big splash, and watched as my body changed from human to Zora before sinking down and allowing the current to pull me along. The only passageway that was left for me to explore was one at the very bottom of the pool that had the same green pipe from earlier heading in that direction but it was a bit tricky to swim down. I bounced off against the walls by the current like it didn't want me to go that way, like something on the other side didn't want me to reach it out of a possible fear?

In any case, I had to go that way as I wanted this temple to be over with. Using my legs to propel me off of the wall after bouncing into it and activating my magic barrier long enough to give me enough speed, I began to swim against the current though it proved challenging as it was strong though I was stronger. After swimming for a few seconds, I got pulled by the current coming the passageway and turned off my barrier as I stumbled down the path, bouncing off the walls until being ejected into another room.

Numerous columns greeted me the moment I entered this room and I suspected that something large had to be on top to warrant so many. I was just about to swim up to the surface to see what I could find when Princess Twilight began bopping me on the head to grab my attention.

" I sense a Stray Fairy nearby?"

I looked all around me and couldn't see anything. " Are you sure about that, Twilight?"

" As a fairy in this world, I can sense them though this one is very faint."

" It must be trapped in a bubble."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Most likely as I can't sense them if they are trapped inside of a chest or a pot. I'm not sure why that is the case though since fairy folk can detect magical energies from anywhere provided it's familiar to them."

" I'm not doubting your magic, Twilight, but where could a fairy be in here?" I asked. I then walked forward searching in every possible direction for any trace of a fairy but so far my searching didn't bear any fruit. " It must be hidden really well if I can't find a bubble just by looking around." My eyes then suddenly caught the sight of the bubble in question, though it was in a most precarious location and my face developed a shocked expression. " Now that's what I call a cheap move by whoever put it there!"

" If you get too close, the current will drag you into the passageway and who knows where you'll end up."

" Maybe I could use my fins?"

" Yes, but then how would you grab the fairy?" Twilight asked. " It won't enter your body when the bubble has burst and swimming up to collect will send you down the passageway, so unless you have another idea, this could be difficult.

Her Highness was right. I didn't want to run the risk of being pulled down this passageway considering how close I was to the end of the temple, yet I had no desire to leave the fairy behind as I needed them all to restore Adagio's body back to normal. I needed to come up with something and quickly.

Chapter 45: The Fish With the Masked Face

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
February 20, 2017
Chapter 45: The Fish With the Masked Face.

Just when I was on the verge of completing this temple--I still had to defeat the boss monster--I found myself dealing with one last problem that involved a Stray Fairy trapped in a bubble that floated within a powerful current. If I weren't careful, the current could pull me down the passageway, and there was no way of knowing where I'd end up. I could be sent back to the central chamber again or one of the other rooms, forced to make my way back, and wasting precious time. I knew that the upcoming battle with the boss would take several hours--it had been that way with the other two--so wasting time wasn't an option.

There was another factor I needed to take into consideration, and that was the well-being of the Stray Fairy. I could easily free it by popping the bubble with my fins, but then it would be at the mercy of the current. Unless it were a powerful swimmer or could use its magic to swim, it would get pulled down the passageway upon being set free, and its chances of surviving wherever it would end up would be minimal. I knew it would float towards me upon sensing the Great Fairy's Mask yet how was I supposed to use it given the fairy was trapped underwater and in a powerful current?

Leaving it behind wasn't an option despite a small part of my mind wanting to do so. While I had every intention of restoring Adagio's broken body--the version of her in this part of Termina--so that I could learn some additional information, that same small part still had trouble believing that she could help me due to what happened before. Those who I had encountered here who were foes in the world I called home were now friends, yet it was difficult sometimes to discern such a thing. Princess Twilight definitely experienced that for herself when she had to accept.

I guessed that I still had some pent-up anger towards Adagio over what she said to me during the Battle of the Bands. While her words ultimately didn't end up happening as she and her "sisters" were defeated when I was able to regain the use of my Equestrian magic, the fact that she said them still weighed down on my mind. She said that I would be forgotten by everyone, how they succeeded at conquering Canterlot High without any resistance, and my friends casting me aside in favour of Princess Twilight to be the sixth member of their band. I have gotten past such issues yet that one part of my mind just couldn't get over it.

Saving Adagio was necessary as aside from Her Highness and Pinkie Pie to an extent, she was the only true ally that I had to help me through Termina. Still, it was strange seeing a side of her that never existed back home all because she was evil there. In another world, like this one, Adagio didn't have an evil thought in her heart. Instead, her only purpose involved helping those who needed it, though she needed the help as Starlight Glimmer had shattered each version of her to pieces.

Why was I thinking about this now at such an important point on my journey? Perhaps I never really thought about it before until this precise moment or if I did, then my mind shielded me from such thoughts because of trying to figure out how to change everything back to the way it was. This was another thing I could talk to Princess Twilight about--after defeating the boss mind you since that was more important--since she could relate to it as well.

Speaking of Her Highness, she was about to bop me on the head when I was able to use my fingers to stop her from doing so. Her reaction was one of surprise as that was the first time I had ever done that since beginning this journey. " I was certain you were daydreaming again, Sunset, but I guess you weren't if you suddenly did that." She sensed something was bothering me as I didn't respond to her straight away, leaving her feeling concerned. " Did you think about Ganondorf again?"

" No." I answered. " I was thinking about how Adagio is so different in this world compared to what she was really like."

" Oh... That..."

" I figured you'd say something like that in response."

" You guessed correctly."

" Seeing the Stray Fairy trapped in her current predicament made me think about Adagio." I said. " Not in 'that' way but rather how she could be such a helpful presence whose kind words have guided us along the right path, and then you have the real her who cared only about gaining power just because of wanting admiration. Her personality is different as she is portraying someone else yet her appearance belies the truth that she was a monster."

Princess Twilight then flopped down onto my head. " That's something you need to figure out on your own, Sunset. As much as I would like to give you an answer, my hands are tied since it's a feeling that stems from your heart. I know I went through the same thing regarding seeing Tirek, Chrysalis, Trixie, and even Adagio, since all of them were antagonistic back in Equestria--the human world with regards to Adagio--yet like you, I have to find my own answers. Sure, we can talk about it--I know you're thinking that--but in the end, we have to solve this personal issue on our own."

" As the Princess of Friendship... Doesn't that go against your own creed."

" It does."

" Then why even say it!?"

" Because I have to even when it pains me."

" Sometimes, you sound so conflicted, Twilight."

" Guess I get that from you."

I wanted to roll my eyes but instead I chuckled a little. " Okay, so you have me there." I then turned my attention towards the Stray Fairy, who appeared to be okay in its bubble despite witnessing the conversation between myself and Princess Twilight. " I need to save it without it being pulled into the passageway but I just can't think of a solution. If I pop the bubble and save it before anything happens, I could wind up pulled by the current and end up who knows where."

" There is a simple solution."

My eyes narrowed. " What?"

" I'm surprised you didn't notice it though I'll admit it took me a few minutes to figure it out." Twilight answered. She got off my head, floated down to behind my back, and began pretending that she was wearing the Great Fairy's Mask by waving her hands near her head in a shimmering motion. " You need to pop the bubble then immediately take off your current mask and switch over to the other. That will convince the Stray Fairy to come to you and fight against the current."

" Can I do that?"

" Do what?"

" Change back into a human while underwater and switch to another mask?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but why do you ask?"

I mumbled under my breath before answering. " No reason... no reason at all."

I was under the impression that I couldn't use anything underwater unless it was designed to do so. On my previous journey, I ran into that very problem when I had to learn how to fight underwater using only my shield and the Hookshot. My other items were unavailable much to my annoyance yet I somehow persevered. While I did eventually get used to it, my mind believed I couldn't switch out any items while remaining below the surface of the water. Princess Twilight pretty much crushed that belief to dust upon telling me that I could switch forms while underwater in addition to changing masks without needing to be on dry land. Suffice to say, I felt embarrassed about it.

Not that I wasn't ungrateful or anything but rather I should have realized that Termina even had different underwater mechanics compared to Hyrule. What worked in the latter wasn't the same as the former, and that meant I could've avoided certain problems earlier in the temple. Since I could now rescue the Stray Fairy by switching forms and masks whilst underwater, I had essentially made an idiot out of myself for thinking that I was stuck. Granted, Her Highness didn't see it either yet she wasn't the adventurer--I was--meaning I had to bear the brunt of such obvious blunders.

Mumbling under my breath again, I made sure Her Highness didn't hear me criticize myself for being such an idiot, but then I quickly focused on what needed to be done. If what she said was correct, I could pop the bubble, switch forms, and put on the Great Fairy's Mask all while underwater and in the span of mere seconds. It sounded like it was an impossibility but after everything that has happened so far, I wasn't about to ignore it.

Aiming my fins at the bubble that contained the Stray Fairy, I fired my fins only for them to bounce off the walls and quickly come back to me. It seemed that I needed to aim with precision or at the appropriate angle for it to burst. At first, I figured that precision was needed so I tilted my body slightly to the left and fired my fins again--they bounced off the walls leaving me feeling dejected. I then tried using the proper angle only for it to fail as well--both fins sailed over the bubble without even coming close to touching it. My only option was simply walking back a bit and see if I could pop it using some distance.

Moving back several paces, making sure that there weren't any Skullfish lurking nearby, until I felt that I was in a good enough position, I fired both fins, popping the bubble that contained the Stray Fairy. The instant it became free, I grabbed my face, pulled off the Zora Mask to become human again, and immediately donned the Great Fairy's Mask only to discover one drawback regarding Princess Twilight's idea. She forgot that I couldn't breathe underwater like she could when I wasn't a Zora, and my lungs began to feel heavy like they were about to burst.

The Stray Fairy began to hover against the current it had been trapped in though it was struggling, yet I knew how it felt as I was struggling to keep myself from consuming any water and drowning as a result. No wonder existing underwater was seen as difficult for non-Zora and anyone who didn't wear the appropriate tunic. If I could guess as to how much longer until my lungs would burst, I'd say that I had about two minutes. Unless the Stray Fairy could reach and enter my body before then, I was going to drown--not the most glamourous way to go out--leaving Princess Twilight to mourn over her loss.

Her Highness then bopped me on the head and tried to say something but I couldn't focus on what she was saying as I was focused on not drowning. She then began trying in vain to pull me towards the surface and I quickly figured out what she was attempting to do, resulting in me slapping my forehead much harder than usual because of how stupid I was acting once again. I didn't need to be stuck underwater as the Stray Fairy would follow me anywhere so long as I continued wearing the Great Fairy's Mask. I could just swim to the surface, get out of the water, and wait for it whilst taking a much needed breather.

My instincts then took over--survival instincts that is--and I swam up to the surface, popping my head out just as my lungs were about to give up. " GASP!" It felt like I hadn't breathed in practically forever despite it only being about a minute. " That... that... that was without a doubt... the closest I've ever come to... dying under any circumstances. Not... not even the experiences I endured in Hyrule... can be compared."

" Sunset!? Why didn't you swim up to the surface?"

" You never told me to do that!"

" I thought it was obvious enough for you to figure it out."

I wanted to continue arguing but instead I slumped forward and floated on the water's surface. " I'm going to need to rest for a while before I can continue. My lungs almost burst because of all that pressure from the water overwhelming me."

" You won't be able to rest as the boss monster needs to be taken care of."

" Right... I forgot about that." I said. My body eventually floated over to a slanted walkway and out of the water leaving me feeling utterly exhausted but I knew that I had to keep on going since there was only a small portion of the temple left to overcome, namely the boss. " I don't think I'll be able to go in the ocean or any other body of water ever again after what just happened." I slowly climbed onto my feet and tried walking up the walkway only for my body to drop to its knees. " Shoot... I can't do anything like this."

" Maybe you should drink that red potion?"

I shook my head. " I'll need it for the boss so it looks like I'll be taking that rest after all."

Princess Twilight floated away and my first thought was that she was abandoning me all because I wanted to rest and she wanted me to continue. While she was gone, I felt a tiny presence float up towards me from behind before entering my body. The Stray Fairy had finally broken free of the current it was trapped in and had reached me leaving only the one left in the temple though I had no idea where to begin looking since I was more fixated on wanting to sleep. My eyes grew heavy and were about to close when they noticed something floating underneath the platform that was on top of the pillars.

It was another bubble and that meant the final Stray Fairy was within my reach but if only my body weren't so exhausted from almost drowning. If I had taken the initiative and swam up to the surface like I should have done right away, I could pop that bubble with an arrow, collect the Stray Fairy, and work my way over to the boss door without any problems, but that wasn't going to happen unless my body could regain its lost strength.

Just as I was about to fall asleep, Princess Twilight's voice echoed in my ear, snapping me to attention. " Sorry that I was gone for so long! Were you seriously trying to sleep given how close we are to finishing this temple and saving the Giant?" All I could do was slowly nod in response prompting her to shake her head feverishly. " If you didn't have me around to get you out of tough scrapes like this, you'd have failed this journey a long time ago."

" Not the best pep talk you've given me."

" Maybe not but I'm being honest with you."

" Where did you even go?"

Princess Twilight floated aside and behind her was a fairy that seemed confused. " I decided to see if I could find something to make you feel better, and upon noticing a pot on the floor, I tried picking it up only to fail as it was too heavy for me to lift up. So I flew into it in hopes of breaking it and while I almost gave myself a concussion, I broke it and released this one who followed me back here like a lost child."

" Didn't think you were so resourceful."

" I may be a princess--fairy in this world--but I'm not one who will just sit on the side and let someone else do all the work." Twilight said. " Now, this fairy will help you recover from your exhaustion allowing you to get up and finish what we started in here. I would suggest putting it into a bottle to use later on but you need to use its healing magic now. Don't worry about how it will go about doing its business."

" Uh, Twilight? I know how fairies work."

" You do?"

" I needed a couple of them to bring me back from the brink of death."

" Oh... Well, then this should be a familiar experience."

Princess Twilight then nodded at the fairy, her way of telling it that it was safe to go over to heal me, though it still looked confused as to what it was doing. It needed a few moments to figure out whether it wanted to help or not, a surprise considering these kinds of fairies always healed people without question, but then it floated towards my head before spinning around in circles, releasing what looked like magical dust. Normally, this process would restore health but since I was already at full health, the magic would simply remove my exhaustion, enabling me to get up and keep going.

The fairy continued spinning and went up and down my body several times before disappearing and I immediately felt my strength returning. Just like that, I stood upright with a new sense of purpose though Princess Twilight was shocked at seeing the fairy disappear.

It then occurred to me that Her Highness had never actually seen what happens when a fairy uses its healing powers. For reasons that not even I could explain, a fairy disappears upon completely healing its target, leaving nothing but a trail of fairy dust that quickly disappears into the ether. I wasn't sure if the fairy died or returned to a place where only their kind could go when it finished doing what it did, yet I always respected the sacrifices they made to ensure my continued survival. They were aware that I was the chosen one who was destined to save the world but it still felt disheartening whenever they did it.

I allowed Princess Twilight to perch onto my hand. " I know that was shocking to see but know that the fairy's gift wasn't in vain. I'm ready to finish things off but before that, I first need to free the final Stray Fairy so that it can join the rest of its kind inside of me."

Princess Twilight looked up at me with surprise. " You know where it is?"

I pointed to the bubble underneath the platform. " It's right over there."

" Oh."

" And here I thought it was going to be in a well hidden place." I said, taking out the Hero's Bow, nocking an arrow, and aiming at the bubble. " Guess this one hiding under the platform is the temple's way of giving me a freebie since we had to go through so much just to make it this far. In any case, the reward and Adagio's restoration will have to wait until we're done with what lies ahead." Firing the arrow, it sailed through the air, popped the bubble, and released the Stray Fairy. It immediately floated over to me thanks to the Great Fairy's Mask still on my face and it entered my body allowing me to take it off.

" That's all fifteen Stray Fairies."

" At least we don't have to worry about that."

" Do you have an idea as to where the Great Fairy's Fountain is back outside?"

I shook my head. " Not really as we didn't get to explore every last part of Great Bay."

" You may have to talk to one of the Zoras to see if they might know something." Twilight said. " Anyway, the walkway ends right here and turns into the green pipe that we've been following since coming this way so I guess there's one more switch you need to activate."

I moaned under my breath knowing that I needed to change forms yet again all because of having to push one measly switch. Even though this was most likely going to be the final switch that needed to be activated, I still didn't like the idea of having to become a Zora just for that. If only I could have been able to push them around as a human... that would have saved us some precious time not to mention ensure no awkward moments would occur.

Sighing, I walked up the pipe slowly--I didn't want to fall off into the water despite it being only a short distance back--until it turned to the right and stopped at the switch resting on top of the platform. To my left was the boss door--the golden padlock shining in the dimly lit room--and right below was a green coloured funnel indicating what would happen upon the switch's activation and the water allowed to flow through. Like Princess Twilight said, everything in the Great Bay Temple connected with one another like a machine. The one green pipe ended up right here in front of perhaps the most important door.

Had I not explored that one room and made my way down here, I would have been denied my goal of reaching the boss door, and instead be forced to backtrack until I either found the switch in question or ultimately given up out of sheer frustration. Good thing that alternative wasn't going to happen since I had activated the previous switch, yet the thought of needing to become a Zora still annoyed me to no end.

Taking out the Zora Mask again--I was really starting to hate switching forms in this manner--and placing it on my face, I squatted down and watched as my body parts shimmered and changed from human to Zora in an instant, and when the transformation had finished, I began pushing the switch allowing to turn before clicking into place and watching it fall down below, activating the funnel nearby. If there was one thing I was going to miss regarding this temple, it would be seeing so much water flowing around with a purpose other than being there for the sake of it.

Jumping across the funnel and onto the other side, I stood before the large door with the golden padlock. While I knew that I was going to make it to this point eventually, it was an absolute struggle given what I had to go through. To be perfectly honest, I still wasn't feeling one hundred percent despite being give a recharge earlier by the fairy. It had to do with the simple fact that it had been quite some time since I last slept.

My health wasn't the only thing that was important. I could go through the reminder of this journey without sustaining any injuries--the chances of that happening were so small that you could walk over it without even noticing--yet without sleeping to feel refreshed, I could collapse at any moment and that would especially be bad in an area filled with monsters. I desperately felt like sleeping but I knew Princess Twilight wouldn't have any of it. She would insist on finishing the Great Bay Temple before allowing me to sleep for what should be at least a dozen hours or so despite my protesting that I desired it right now.

" Sunset?"

" Yeah?"

" Are you ready to go through with this?"

I shook my head. " Not really. My body may be fine right now but I don't know how long I can hold out until I collapse. The last time I dozed off for any reason would have been sometime during the previous seventy-two hour cycle, and combined with the fact that time has been slowed down, it's even longer than that. My body really wants to sleep right now so that I can be well rested before going inside, but you would prefer me to get this over with."

" By defeating the monster on the other side of the door, you'll have rescued the third Giant."

" That won't do me much good if I lose consciousness."

" When we're done here, you can sleep for as long as you like."

" Not exactly the best reward in this scenario."

" You've got to keep your wits about you and not allow whatever lurks on the other side to kill you." Twilight said. " Again, you can sleep as long as you want when it's over but for now try not to if you can help it."

It was my mind that was preventing me from wanting to drop down, close my eyes, and sleep; my body felt the complete opposite, wanting nothing more than to rest here for a couple of hours and take on the boss monster afterwards. Unfortunately, time was once again against me since there was only less than thirty-six hours remaining. Sure, it sounded like an awful lot but when you include defeating the boss, dealing with the Giant, resolving any lingering issues, and anything that came to mind, it wasn't all that much at all. In any case, there was no reason to delay things any longer.

Reaching into my pocket--I did wear shorts while as a Zora much to my pleasure--I took out the Boss Key and stared at it for a few moments. I had never once ever took a closer look at one since they usually ended up being used soon after acquiring one, yet I was able to get this one a lot sooner than usual. The key itself was golden in colour though whether it was made of it or not remained to be seen. The top part of the key consisted of a large red gem with golden horns on either side, yet upon a closer inspection, you could barely make out a skull motif, indicating that it was a warning of what was to come.

Thrusting the key into the padlock and turning it, the chains broke off and the lock dropped to the ground making a lot clanking sound that reverberated throughout the room before the door slowly rose up. Walking into the next room, I was surprised to find that it was incredibly small and lacking much in the way of detail. It then quickly dawned on me that I needed to drop down the obvious giant hole situated in the center of the room.

" Guess we have to go down, Twilight."

" I'm surprised that this temple goes down much further than initially thought."

" Dungeon Maps don't show you everything."

" I calculate that dropping down that hole could take us quite possibly under the very ocean itself."

I sighed. " This reminds me of dropping down a similar hole."

" When did that happen?"

" During my previous journey." I answered. " I was in another temple called the Shadow Temple and when I entered its boss room, I witnessed a similar looking sight to what we're seeing right now, but while this room looks rather boring, what I saw back then was macabre at its absolute worst."

" Why was it called the Shadow Temple?"

" Because it was a place dedicated to the undead."

Princess Twilight's jaw suddenly dropped and almost fell to the ground in utter shock. " What!? Who in their right mind would make you go to such a horrid place? I know I haven't seen the kinds of things you have, Sunset, but to go through a temple dedicated to those no longer of this world?" As she regained her composure and closed her mouth, she could tell I had something on my mind. " It sounds like it wasn't the best experience."

" Not when you had the dead attacking you every five minutes."

Princess Twilight's jaw dropped again. " What!? Now I wish that I could have been there to stop you from going into such a horrible place. No wonder you've been scarred from witnessing such horrible things. I'm a terrible mentor for not being there to act as your guide."

I shook my head. " That was some time ago and that's besides the point. Just seeing this room shaped the way it is reminded me of what happened before, though I will say you were right in that going through a temple of the undead wasn't something I should have done, but I had to in order to rescue the one who was trapped there." I walked over to the edge of the pit and looked down below. It was pitch black though I could barely hear the sound of something swimming about. " Guess my initial suspicion of what this boss was correct though I had hoped to be wrong."

" Suspicion?" Twilight asked. " I didn't know you did that. What did you conclude?"

I jumped down into the pit and was immediately plunged into darkness. " You'll find out in just a few moments."

The pit was much deeper than I thought as it kept going and going as though I was going to fall forever. All around me was nothing but darkness with the occasional metal framework that provided a tiny glimmer of light though not enough to make me feel positive over what I was about to encounter. Looking down as best as I could, I could see an opening at the bottom indicating the end and soon I came out and dropped even further until landing hard on my butt on a large platform that was surrounded on all sides by water.

Picking myself up from the floor and looking around, I was surprised to see that this was massive in scope though the deep water told me that my suspicion was right. The boss monster was going to be some kind of giant fish, a real disappointment as I had hoped for something less predictable. Also, being in here brought back another memory though this time from the Water Temple. I knew that the boss was lurking somewhere in the water though I wasn't about to jump in and swim about hoping to find it. If anything, I planned on standing on this platform and wait for something to happen.

" It sure is dark in here." Twilight said. " And all of this water indicates that we'll be fighting some kind of aquatic creature."

" That's what I figured out."

" The boss is an aquatic creature?"

" More like a fish."

Princess Twilight then attempted to see if she could spot anything in the water but to no avail. " Whatever is lurking about out there isn't trying to be subtle. I suggest not going in after it until we know exactly what it is." She suddenly raised her hand to her eye upon hearing what sounded like gurgling coming from the furthest reaches of the room before floating over and landing on my shoulder. " I can hear whatever it is swimming about over there."

" Then we'll just have to wait."

" I don't need to tell you that you'll need to be a Zora if you plan on fighting this thing." Twilight said. " Also, do you see the four pots nearby? I think they will each give you arrows to use so it looks like being a human is also necessary. I don't know if you'll have to constantly switch between forms but I suppose we will know shortly once this creature reveals itself before us."

Switching between forms constantly... I wasn't looking forward to that though on a different note, I could hear the sounds of bubbles coming from below the surface. The boss monster had either detected my presence or was sensing Princess Twilight, yet either way, it was beginning to move closer perhaps in a bid to make a sneak attack. As it continued getting closer, the bubble sounds continued getting louder until it began getting quiet again until I could no longer hear it. Was it trying to psyche me out so that I would be caught off guard, or was it trying to get some distance before making an attack?

I concluded that the latter was the most likely option and I turned out to see something charging at me in the water before it jumped out. In that one moment, I felt like I was in that one movie that featured a scene where a giant aquatic creature leapt from the water in an attempt to get over a human standing below. Yet, this wasn't like that by any stretch. The creature leapt out and was shocked at the mere sight of it.

Yes, it was a giant fish as I initially suspected, but I wasn't expecting it to look so hideous. It's face looked like it was wearing some kind of metallic armour as a means of protection but I quickly realized that it was a mask much like the other two bosses. A giant eyeball was sticking out of the mouth of the fish, an obvious weak point if I ever saw one, though rather disgusting as it shouldn't be there in the first place. Aside from these odd features, it looked just like a regular fish--its fins were pretty worn out--despite being bigger than any fish I had seen in my entire life.

The monster landed in the water and began swimming around and I turned myself around to see where it was. It wasn't difficult to spot since its giant fin stuck out of the water giving away its location, but before I had a chance to do anything, it suddenly charged towards the platform, ramming the side with its face, flinging me into the water. I had to act fast and climb back out before anything could go wrong but it when I was pinned between two rows of giant teeth with an eyeball staring at me, blinking, pulsating, throbbing, enough for me to want to scream over how disgusting it was.

For a few moments, I tried my best to break free of the powerful grip the monster had on me yet I was too distracted by the eyeball--just looking at it from such a close range made me want to throw up--but eventually it spat me back out though I did sustain some damage.

" What in the world is that thing?" I asked as I climbed back onto the platform."

" That was Gyorg, the Gargantuan Masked Fish."

" Did you say Gyorg or George?"

" The first one." Twilight answered. " Anyway, I'm sure you already know that you need to hit the eyeball in its mouth in order to destroy it, but it won't be easy to strike since it moves around underwater and can avoid many projectile attacks. It will occasionally leap out of the water in an attempt to ram you with its massive body though you can avoid this by standing on the edges of the platform. When it rams into the side of the platform, you'll fall over unless you stand near the center in which case you'll land on the platform again."

" How am I supposed to hit its eyeball?"

" You'll need to become a human and hit Gyorg with arrows until its eye gets exposed."

" That explains the pots nearby."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. This won't be easy as it can either ram the side of the platform or jump over it at any given moment so you need to act quickly and shoot arrows without letting up. If you do end up getting knocked into the water, get back out immediately otherwise Gyorg can and will bite you in an attempt to swallow you whole. I don't know why but there's something about this that feels odd, like, there is more to this battle than appearances suggest."

" Guess we'll come to that bridge eventually."

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask, flipped back my hair, and switched over to the Hero's Bow just as Gyorg charged and rammed its head against the side of the platform causing me to fall over though I managed to grab hold of the edge before pulling myself back up. Princess Twilight was right about this thing attacking at any given moment so I needed to watch its movements carefully. Luckily its fin was easy enough to spot though it would disappear from time to time to confuse me. Yet, ripples in the water would also help me locate its position without too much trouble.

Since I only had a limited number of arrows, I needed to make sure that each shot counted. I mean, I had extra arrows in the pots if Princess Twilight was correct--I knew she was as why doubt her now--but those were for an emergency if my initial arrows got depleted.

Gyorg then popped up out of the water and I began firing arrows at it, striking each time though they didn't seem to faze it in the least. I was fortunate in that it was a large enough target that I couldn't possibly miss unless it were swimming at incredible speed though this only seemed to happen upon charging, but then it suddenly dove down below the surface and I lost track of where it was. How could I lose something that big!? And yet, I was slowly starting to figure out how this particular monster behaved. By hiding in such a manner until it was ready to strike, I would become paranoid over when it would do so.

Bubbles appeared in different places indicating that Gyorg was moving but I dared not fire arrows in case I ended up missing. It was essentially a game of patience where I had to wait for it to make a move before countering with one of my own. All of a sudden, it began charging towards the platform and my reaction involved moving to the edge in hopes of not getting hit, but when it leapt out of the water, it knocked me onto my stomach before landing in the water again. No doubt about it... Gyorg's body was painful as its shabby body was dry and that meant I could suffer some serious burns.

Getting back up, I barely had a chance to wipe the dirt off of my tunic before Gyorg rammed into the platform, knocking me into the water. This time, I couldn't get back onto the platform in time and the monster got me in its mouth again, its powerful grip pushing down even harder since I wasn't a Zora now. I then noticed blood trickling down in front of me and I quickly looked up to see that my hands were bleeding resulting from holding up its mouth. I couldn't afford to lose the use of my hands as I needed them to fire arrows so that meant giving in and allowing Gyorg its chance of inflicting more damage on me.

It spat me out several seconds later and I landed on the platform. " How are my hands, Twilight? Are they okay?"

Princess Twilight didn't sound so optimistic. " You definitely lost some blood there when its teeth came bearing down on you, but lucky for you that you chose to let it bite you instead of continuing to resist it. If you had kept going, I'd say that you would have lost them completely within the next ten seconds."

" I definitely felt the strength difference."

" Being a Zora grants you some extra power."

" Should I use that potion?"

" It's a little early in the battle to give you an answer."

Looking down at my bleeding hands, I could see that while they were bleeding, it wasn't as serious as I thought. " I'll likely wince in pain from time to time but I need to keep going if I hope to beat this thing." Gyorg then rammed the side of the platform and almost caused me to fall into the water again but instead I dropped onto my knees. " Doesn't it know when to give me a chance to plan my next move."

" Like I said, you need to be quick." Twilight said. " Patience is still the key here, Sunset, so don't lose your composure unless you want Gyorg to finish you off. You could fire arrows at it when it's attacking though that would require incredible reflexes."

Raising my bow, I aimed at the water and waited for Gyorg to reappear. " I'll do whatever I have to in order to prevail." I quickly looked behind me in case it was planning on striking while I was looking the other way but there were no bubbles. " You know that patience was never my best characteristic but then I am a fast learner." I needed to be because if I allowed my temper to judge my actions, I'd be utterly helpless against this monster.

When Gyorg raised its fin above the water's surface, I fired more arrows, wincing because of my hands, that struck its body though they still didn't seem to do anything--it acted like it was immune to them--but then it went underwater before jumping over me though I managed to avoid it in time, yet my foot did get struck by its fin on the way down. I hobbled about for a brief moment before focusing on the masked fish again--since my foot was barely nicked, it hadn't gotten broken although I would feel the stinging sensation for a while.

After watching it ram into the platform again, I winced before firing a couple more arrows--my hands would no doubt be a detriment--though when the second arrow hit, Gyorg's eyeball suddenly expanded like an inflatable beach ball and dangled out of its mouth. It was just as disgusting up close as it was when I saw it inside its mouth but then the fish tilted towards the platform before coming to a complete stop inches away.

" Uh... What is it doing?" I asked, confused by what I had just witnessed.

" It's eye is vulnerable to attack!"

" Huh?"

" Shoot arrows at the eye to damage it!"

" Oh... right." I said sheepishly before firing more arrows despite the pain. When the first arrow hit Gyorg's eyeball, it got bigger just like what happened against both Odolwa and Goht--it still creeped me out whenever it happened because of how pulsating it acted--and then even bigger upon the second hitting. A third arrow made it even bigger before the eye suddenly popped and Gyorg went underwater. " No matter how many times I see those eyeballs increase in size, I just can't handle the gross factor."

" At least you damaged it."

" Yeah, but now I need to find it again."

" Gyorg will attack soon enough when it feels like it."

" That's what worries me the most." I said. And sure enough, Gyorg did attack by leaping out of the water though this time it landed on the edge of the platform and stared down at me with its eyes piercing my soul. It then tried to bite me though this failed as it wasn't close enough. " Since when could it do that?"

" It must have additional attacks that come up whenever it gets damaged."

Since it failed to bite me, Gyorg lurched back slightly and leapt over me, knocking me to the ground again before diving back underwater. Already this battle was taking its toll especially my demeanour since it kept on using cheap shots to get its point across. Getting back up onto my feet, I aimed my bow and waited for it make another move, a difficult task now as it was spending more time swimming about underwater, and I didn't know if my arrows could hit it down there. It lifted its fin up from the water only to quickly drop it back down and would repeat this constantly leaving me feeling annoyed.

After waiting long enough, I fired several arrows out of frustration, each one missing its target, my hands causing me to wince from pain, but I wanted to keep firing arrows though a timely bopping from Princess Twilight got me to calm down. I acted stupid for that brief moment, once again allowing my anger to get the better of me. If it wasn't for Her Highness being there to keep under control, I could have potentially ponied up for the wrong reasons like what happened on my previous journey.

Back then, whenever I was on the verge of death or feeling angry, I would gain my pony ears and tail, and while that was normally seen as a blessing, it became a curse since I couldn't control myself. I'd eventually gain control though it took a serious amount of concentration yet things were different in this world. If I were to pony up here in that manner, there was no telling what would happen regarding my attitude.

Gyorg rose up from the water again and began swimming around to the other side of the platform. I had a feeling it was going to ram the side again in a bid to knock me into the water so that it could bite me again, and it did just that by charging forward though it jumped over me instead of ramming the side. When it splashed down, I fired a few more hours--I winced again due to my hands--striking it in the back yet it kept on moving making me realize that several arrows were needed to expose its weak point.

When it rose back up again, I fired a few more arrows only to discover that my quiver was suddenly empty. Had I already used up my initial batch of arrows? I could have sworn that I had at least twenty on my person coming into this, but perhaps I didn't count as good as I should have. Gyorg's eyeball came out of its mouth and it floated over towards the platform yet without any arrows, all I could do was just watch it float there until it regained consciousness. Princess Twilight then bopped me on the head to remind me about the pots on the platform that most likely houses additional arrows--I hoped she was right about this.

Switching over to my sword briefly, I smashed the closest pot, revealing a bundle of ten arrows. It may not have been much but it was enough for what I needed. Picking them up, placing them into my quiver and switching back to my bow, I shot the eyeball and watched it expand before popping leaving Gyorg to swim back down underwater until it was ready to attack me again. I knew it would only be a matter of time before so I switched back to my sword again and smashed the remaining pots until my quiver was filled to the brim with arrows--I really needed to upgrade this thing so as to avoid this in the future.

" That was a close call, Sunset."

" I really need a bigger quiver."

" Like I said before, you need to go back to Clock Town and see if you can find one."

" I'll do that during the next three day cycle."

" Speaking of cycles, I've noticed that Gyorg is rather predictable with its behaviour." Twilight said. " I was honestly expecting something different to happen considering you've inflicted a lot of damage against it at this point of the battle."

" I'm not about to complain about it."

" I know but I just think it's strange how it repeats the same cycle of attacks over and over."

Gyorg then leapt out of the water and landed on the platform catching me by surprise. " Maybe you shouldn't have said that, Twilight!" I couldn't hit its face at this close of a range as the mask-like armour looked like it could repel any kind of frontal assault. " I need to get around to its side and shoot its body before it goes back down underwater." I tried to run only for it to jump forward and knocking me into the water. " Glub... glub..." I had to get out quickly not because of what lurked below the surface but because I couldn't breathe.

Unfortunately, the masked fish caught me with its mouth and once again I struggled to keep its teeth from clenching together. As it swam around with me in its gaping maw, I chose to allow it to damage me as I knew resisting would mean my hands getting even worse. I felt the gnashing of its teeth clamp down on my shoulder, arms, and stomach--all in that order--a couple of times before spitting me back out. Blood oozed out from my body and dissipated after a while in the water leaving me disgusted though also weak.

Climbing back out of the water, I was a bloodied mess though I could still function--albeit with a weakened body--but at least my hands were safe. I knew it was wrong to sacrifice one part of my body in favour of another but I needed my hands to use my bow, the one weapon that actually worked against this thing. Taking out my bow and aiming at the water, I struggled to hold it up due to my body losing a lot of blood.

" I... I... can't keep this up."

" Use the red potion!" Twilight shouted. " Don't wait too long that you'll die before you can."

I nodded and attempted to reach into my pocket to pull it out. " It's harder than it looks when your body is wracked with pain." Just as my hand touched the bottle, Gyorg rammed the side of the platform, though while the potion didn't drop into the water or anything, I ended up doing so and that meant getting back out quickly. " Glub... glub! Glub! GLUB!" I quickly got back out just as Gyorg lunged forward, missing me by a mere inch. " Gasp! Okay! This is just getting ridiculous!"

" Maybe you should knock it unconscious before taking the potion?"

Now why didn't I think of doing that? The instant Gyorg popped up from beneath the water, I fired arrows repeatedly making sure not to let up--I had to make sure to only use up half of them just in case something happened--until its eyeball came out and it floated over towards me again before stopping. From there, I shot the eyeball three more times and then the masked fish dove underwater again, but something else was now happening.

I could see it throwing a tantrum underwater by swimming about incoherently and my first thought was that I had won the battle, but that thought quickly disappeared when it began to ram the side of the platform repeatedly as though it had lost all its senses. When the platform began trembling as a result of so many impacts from Gyorg's ramming, I thought this was its attempt at knocking me into the water, but then I discovered the real reason behind its ambition. I didn't think it was possible that the masked fish would do something that effectively changed the battle but it did.

The platform began sinking into the water and that meant my one safe zone was about to become lost. It also meant that I could no longer fight Gyorg as a human but rather I needed to keep going as a Zora. I had no idea whether it would leave me alone long enough so that I could change forms or decide to try and eat me at the earliest opportunity as a means of killing me so I made the decision on my own.

Putting the bow away and taking out the Zora Mask, I placed it on my face--I didn't squat down this time as there was no point--and watched as my body parts shimmered and changed from human to Zora in mere seconds--I also watched the platform sink down to the bottom of the pool of water. Dropping down to the bottom myself, I was surprised to see that there was much more down there than previously assumed. Everywhere I looked, green pots were scattered all around along with some strange holes that could be hiding just about anything at this point.

" Okay... things just got weirder."

" Looks like you won't be needing to use arrows for the duration of this fight."

" Maybe not but it does mean needing to get in close range if I am to assume that I need to rely on my Zora abilities."

Princess Twilight nodded before floating onto my shoulder. " Those green pots will help you restore your magic so it doesn't take a genius to figure out that you'll be relying on your magic barrier extensively. I don't know if Gyorg is vulnerable to it or not since its weak point is the eyeball but if not then you can use your barrier for an increase of speed until you either run out of magic or choose to stop consuming any."

" So how do I fight it now?"

" First of all, you need to avoid the tiny fish that spawned out from its mouth."

I was taken aback by that. " Really? Gyorg had fish in its mouth?" I looked around to see if I could spot any and sure enough, they were swimming around the masked fish who appeared to be waiting for something to happen, each one looked pretty menacing, like a miniature version of Gyorg. " I'm guessing those things are going to be hounding me until I either take them down or end up getting bitten so much that I bleed to death."

Princess Twilight nodded though she had a grim expression on her face. " Not the most glamourous way of explaining it but essentially, yes. You can use your magic barrier to destroy them easily and they may even produce recovery hearts. I'm sure Gyorg will spawn them every now and again so make sure to watch out for them as they move fast."

" And Gyorg itself?"

" Take a look at what just appeared to our right."

I looked at where Princess Twilight was pointing at and my eyes widened with surprise. " An exploding mine!? Oh no... no, no, no, no." It was starting to become clear that I needed to use it in order to expose Gyorg's weak point. " You have got to be kidding me!? I have to use that in order to beat it!?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I'm afraid so although we need to wait and see what it does first."

" I think we're about to find out." I said. Gyorg opened its mouth and a powerful vortex began pulling in everything--including me--so I began swimming in the opposite direction to avoid getting sucked up. Eventually, it would come to a stop, leaving me feeling pretty exhausted and Gyorg started moving around again with the small following along. " I almost got sucked by that powerful vacuum!"

" That explains why you need to use magic."

" It does?"

" Yes."

" Okay, I get what you're saying." I said. Whenever it tries to suck me into its gaping maw, I need to use my magic barrier to give me an extra burst of speed. I also take it that I need to use my barrier to snap the chains those exploding mines are connected to?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You need to aim carefully when using those mines. You only have a limited number until more come up from those holes in the ground so be sure to make them count. If Gyorg is using that vortex when you cut the chain, it should send the mine into its mouth resulting in its eyeball getting exposed. That does mean having to get up close if you want to get it in there."

" I was afraid of that."

" Oh, and you need to break the section of the chain that has the orb-like object on it."

Looking at what Her Highness was talking about, I could see an orb located at the bottom of the chain link that connected the mine to the floor. That was easy enough to do since my fins were powerful enough to break just about anything. The only problem was that I needed to break loose a mine when it appeared practically next to Gyorg for it to suck the thing up into its mouth. That was definitely not going to be easy as one slip up would cost me dearly.

After swimming about for about a minute, Gyorg stopped and looked in my direction, its small fish minions swimming towards me. I began to swim away with them in hot pursuit and they proved resilient as every time I changed direction, they would do the same thing like they were attracted to my presence, yet this couldn't continue otherwise I'd be wasting my time on them instead of the real target, that being the boss monster. So, I came to a stop and activated my magic barrier, the small fish swam right into it without even trying to get out of the way and disappeared into thin air.

I then looked at Gyorg, thinking it would come after me in retribution for destroying its "babies" but it just continued staring at me and didn't move. Did it seriously not care about what happened? Such a heartless gesture meant it wasn't going to get any mercy from me, but I wasn't going to act all crazy as I needed to think this over carefully. As Princess Twilight said, only a few exploding mines were available so I had a few chances at getting Gyorg to swallow one, yet what if I were to release some for the sake of it? That should cause newer ones to appear, enabling me to get one that would appear next to the masked fish.

There was a mine slightly ahead of me so I swam over and knocked it with my fin, the chain snapping and the mine rising up and out of the water before exploding moments later when it touched the ceiling. Another one then popped up close by though not where I wanted it to be--it needed to be near Gyorg--so I swam over and broke the chain, sending it upwards before another appeared, this time right in front of it. Now I needed Gyorg to open its up and suck up the mine when it gets cut.

Swimming up to the mine, I broke the chain just as the masked fish opened its mouth yet I was too slow in activating my magic barrier and swim away. My body got struck by the mine just as it entered the masked fish's mouth--it hurt immensely--yet it exploded within and caused Gyorg to tilt over and expose its eyeball again, the force of the explosion pushed me back and into another mine, causing it to explode and seriously injuring me. By the time I swam back over, the masked fish was still unconscious, yet even when underwater, its eyeball looked disgusting beyond all measure.

" What happened!?" Twilight asked. " How did you get hit by one mine and caught in the explosion of another?"

" Luck, I guess."

" Look at you! You've got second-degree burns all over you!"

I looked down at my body and saw that the burns were quite severe but I ignored them and focused on Gyorg. " This usually happens when I get caught in explosions but I can easily shake it off and continue going--at a weaker pace but still going." Swimming over to the comatose body of the masked fish, I struck the eyeball a few times using my fins as swords before the thing popped, allowing Gyorg to regain consciousness, yet it didn't move from its spot. " Is it stuck in that one spot now or is it trying to trick me into getting close so that it can get a piece of me?"

" I'm not sure but you need to use that Red Potion, now!"

I nodded. " Yeah, I think it's time to use it."

" Then why did you attack Gyorg before drinking it?"

" I know more about boss monsters than you do, Twilight."

" Oh? In what way?"

" They don't stay unconscious for very long when their weak point is exposed." I answered. " If you don't take advantage and attack it, they will recover and you'll be forced to go through the entire process again, and cause the fight to carry on a lot longer than necessary."

" So that explains..."

I smiled before reaching into my pocket and taking out the Red Potion. " I was taking a risk attacking the eyeball given my current condition but it was worth as Gyorg is one step closer towards being defeated." There was one problem I had and that was when the bottle is uncorked, there was a high chance that the liquid inside would flow out and dissipate into the water leaving me with nothing and being on the verge of death all because of my current location. " Guess I've got no other choice." I uncorked the bottle and chugged down the potion before it could evaporate. " Blech!"

Princess Twilight looked concerned. " What's wrong?"

" That was the most repulsive potion I've ever had the pleasure of going down my throat."

" It couldn't have been that bad."

I stuck out my tongue in disgust. " Whoever brewed that concoction obviously didn't use the right ingredients or if they did, then they didn't preserve them long enough, an absolute must so that the properties are able to flow freely."

" But look on the bright side. The potion is doing what it's supposed to do."

I looked down at my body and watched as the burns disappeared and my hands recovered from what happened earlier. " Even those bite marks from Gyorg are disappearing, but I still say the potion tasted terrible. Next time, I should purchase from the proper makers rather than going with bulk." Once my wounds had properly healed, I turned to face the masked face who had since spawned out more fish that began swimming in my direction. I quickly activated my magic barrier destroying them only for it to suddenly deactivate. " Crap! I must have used up more magic than I thought. I'm completely tapped out!"

" Then smash one of those green pots before Gyorg figures it out."

Swimming towards the nearest pot, I extracted my fins and was about to smash it when Gyorg suddenly swam forward, knocking me down to the ground before stopping on the opposite end of the room. It felt like I had gotten hit by a ragged truck given its shabby body--if I hadn't used my potion, I'd have surely died from that--but when I started to get back up, it charged forward again yet I dropped to the floor avoiding its charge.

Looking up, Gyorg returned to its original spot though now another exploding mine had risen from the ground in front of it. I got up, swam forward and waited for the masked fish to open its mouth though this time I knew that I needed to avoid the mine. Breaking the chain, Gyorg opened its mouth and began sucking in everything around, yet I stepped aside--more like stumbled--and watched as the mine entered its mouth and exploded causing it to tilt over on its side again and exposed its eyeball. Since I had no idea how long it would stay unconscious, I fired my fins, scoring a few more hits, causing Gyorg to get back up before I swam back to the green pot.

Smashing it, I picked up the magic jar and just in time as the masked fish sailed past me again though the small fish it spawned out were able to attack me this time. Their tiny teeth proved annoying as they bit different parts of my body along with slowing me down because of their combined weight. I responded by activating my magic barrier, destroying them in an instant, leaving me to brush off any remnants that happened to cling to my body.

Looking around the room, I could see that no exploding mines were near Gyorg so that meant breaking the chains of the ones currently available and hope that one ended up rising in front of its position. Swimming around and using my barrier sporadically to give me enough speed without consuming too much magic, I broke as many chains as I could--the mines rose up and exploded upon hitting the ceiling--yet none were spawning where I needed them. It was getting to the point where I was feeling discouraged when another appeared right in front of Gyorg though it decided to dash forward--I couldn't believe it!

I was about to turn around and swim back but Gyorg suddenly swam the other way, catching me in its mouth, forcing me to once more struggle to keep its teeth from clamping down on me though now I could hold my own since I was a Zora. The masked fish moved about in an erratic manner hoping it could make me lose my concentration but I managed to refrain from giving up, and it eventually spat me back out though I did take some damage.

When Gyorg stopped by the exploding mine, it opened up its mouth, and I swam forward, breaking the chain, causing it to swallow the mine, exploding inside, and tilting over before sticking out its eyeball. Rather than use my fins this time, I decided to attack the eyeball using my magic barrier since I had nothing else to try--my fins were effective though I felt it necessary to use magic just this once--and I couldn't miss. The first two strikes caused it to inflate to even bigger proportions, yet the final hit burst the eyeball entirely, causing Gyorg to start flopping about on its side.

" What is it doing now?"

" I think you won, Sunset?"

" Really? What makes you think that?"

" The water is draining from the room and if I didn't know any better, I'd swear Gyorg was shrinking."

I thought Princess Twilight was pulling my leg especially regarding the shrinking bit so I looked at Gyorg who was indeed shrinking down in size--more like it was shrivelling up as a result of being out of the water though that still didn't make sense--whilst splashing about even with the water draining from the room. Had I actually defeated this monster? Could I finally leave this place at last? Or, was there more to come?

My answer came when Gyorg disappeared in a cloud of dark smoke, leaving behind a heart container that got tossed to the left, and its mask that bobbed up and down in a portal that would take me to the strange place where I would go whenever one of the giants was rescued. Dropping to my knees, I breathed a huge sigh of relief knowing that my ordeal was finally over, and it was one of my most difficult battles yet. If not for the Red Potion, I'd have died at the final hurdle. Having the means to restore health was a blessing and would be something I'd definitely utilize seeing as there was still one more temple remaining.

Upon getting back up, I ran over to the Heart Container and picked it up, the warm feeling instantly enveloped around me and my strength returned. Since there was nothing else to do, I walked over to where Gyorg had fallen and looked at the mask that appeared. It certainly didn't look friendly, much like the monster itself, yet something about it made me feel really uncomfortable. I'd been collecting the masks of the bosses yet I had no idea what their true purpose was. Would they enable me to defeat Starlight Glimmer? Could I use the power of the bosses for my own? Could I summon them somehow?

All those questions and more had no answers to them yet I had to carry them around until their true purpose became known to me. At least I didn't have to look at them every now and then--that alone would plague me with nightmares--though remembering that I had them was important. Picking up Gyorg's Remains and lifting it above my head, I suddenly changed back to normal and watched as the mask rose up into the air before everything went white.

When I could see things again, I knew that I was back in the place of the Four Giants, the mysterious pillar that was surrounded by strange colours, but now the colour was pink as opposed to the green and blue from the previous times. While it certainly looked beautiful, my eyes were focused on the giant standing in the distance. The giant just seemed to stand there without wanting to step forward so I tried calling out but to no avail. Perhaps the giant couldn't hear my voice seeing as it was massive compared to me and that my voice couldn't reach up high.

" That didn't work."

" Maybe we should wait for the giant to come forward?"

" I hope Cadance doesn't take too long."

Princess Twilight was shocked. " Huh!? Cadance!? What makes you think she is over there?"

" Think about it!" I answered. " The first giant was Principal Celestia with the second one being Vice Principal Luna, so if my theory is correct and the connection continues to stand, then Dean Cadance is the third one though that does make me wonder who is going to be the final giant."

" An interesting theory."

" It might not even be accurate."

" Don't sell yourself short, Sunset." Twilight said. " Let's just wait for the giant to walk forward so that we can see who it is." As if on cue, the giant stepped forward and continued to do so until stopping and looking down at us with a powerful gaze. " It looks like your theory was correct."

Standing before us was Dean Cadance, the dean of Crystal Prep Academy--though I wasn't sure what her position was now due to the events of the Friendship Games--wearing the same kind of swimsuit worn by the previous giants, yet hers was a bright pink that reminded me of love for some reason. Symbols adorned both her face and arms much like Celestia and Luna before, a powerful aura radiating from her body, hair flowing about like a lovely veil. Cadance was without a doubt the most beautiful of the Four Giants thus far, a reminder that her Equestrian counterpart--according to Princess Twilight--was known as the Princess of Love.

Dean Cadance then smiled before speaking in a booming voice. " You have endured much hardship, chosen one, yet you were able to release me from the wicked creature whose mask I was sealed inside of. With my rescue, you now only have one more of us to free before we will be able to do what must be done."

" I've been meaning to ask one of you about that."

" The last giant mentioned something about fulfilling your one desire before coming to help me."

" You were denied an answer last time and believe that I shall give you one?"

I nodded my head. " Well, yes."

Dean Cadance looked up at the sky for a few moments before looking down at me again, the smile on her face looking brighter than ever. " I cannot tell you everything, chosen one, but you are entitled to know something given that you have done so much already. We have a friend who has lost their way and you are the only one who can save them from the evil that currently clouds their mind. This friend... meant a lot to us long ago but our duty commanded us to shun them, cast them aside, but our actions condemned us as our friend grew jealous and we were forced to protect the creatures of this world."

" That must have been hard for you all."

Dean Cadance nodded. " We were bound by our duty to protect this world though our hearts wished we could have helped our friend." I then noticed tears trickling down her cheeks and I couldn't help but feel sorry for her. I tried saying something in response yet she raised her hand before wiping the tears. " This all happened ages ago so there is no need for you to be worried for us, yet I do appreciate the concern."

" The previous giant also mentioned something about helping the Skull Kid." I said. I was surprised that I still remembered that.

" Am I to deduce that you were told that I would have the answer?"

I nodded my head. " Yes."

" The one who has caused so much pain does not yet realize it but they are doomed to perish."

" How come?"

" The mask that they wear... It is not natural. It is not meant to exist." Dean Cadance answered. " And yet it does and has caused destruction, pain, misery, and even death to the innocent who never wished to suffer in any way, yet they have no choice for the mask has power beyond their understanding. The masked child, the Skull Kid, as you call them, may still yet survive if the mask is removed of its power before the worst comes."

" Really? The mask can be removed?"

Dean Cadance nodded. " The Skull Kid will not remove the mask of their own free will as the power within has corrupted their soul, yet should you awaken the last of us and call us forth to the appointed place, our power combined with yours may prove enough to save them."

" Is there anything else you can say?"

Dean Cadance slowly shook her head. " I am afraid that you will need to learn the rest of your answers from the final giant." I had a feeling she would say that but at least she wasn't being cryptic about it compared with the previous giants. " The journey shall be difficult and many hardships await but this is the destiny that fate has cast upon you. I can also sense a great evil that seeks your heart."

I knew she was referring to Ganondorf but I doubted she knew of him since he doesn't exist in this world. " Yes..." I began. " This evil desires to make me become its servant because of actions in my past that I regret ever doing, and while I've resisted its desires, it hasn't been easy for me."

" You must remain strong against such adversity."

" Easy for you to say."

" I am aware that this evil haunts even your dreams." Dean Cadance said. " It the very nature of evil itself to plague the minds of those who struggle internally with their own judgement to take advantage of their weaknesses. So long as you remain true to your current course, you shall never succumb to evil's taint." She then lurched her head forward to get a closer look at me--prompting me to back away a little--and I could see the runes on her face and arms glowing. " Evil... I sense another who is just like you." Dean Cadance suddenly paused for a moment before continuing. " I can no longer sense that presence."

" What does it mean?"

Dean Cadance shook her head. " It is something that I cannot answer but what I do know is that you shall be tested soon enough so prepare yourself accordingly. Before the presence became lost to me, I also sensed a presence who is like your fairy companion." She rubbed her head as though she wasn't sure of what she sensed. " You have only just freed me from my prison within the dark mask and so what I sensed may not be so."

" I guess that's it then?"

" You must return now to the world and free our friends." Dean Cadance answered. " Do not allow evil to cloud your judgement, chosen one, or this world shall be destroyed in the flames of chaos." She then stepped back behind the veil that had previously hid her appearance from me and then everything turned white again.

She sensed another who was like me? I could only think of one person who fit that description but that was an impossibility. She died some time ago after being defeated by me, the one true Sunset Shimmer, and no longer plagues me as she was a remnant of the past. Then again, evil could never truly be defeated as it always found a way to return and this particular person had a nasty habit of doing so. Dean Cadance said that she could be wrong and I hoped that was the case, but then what of this other presence she felt? She said it was like Her Highness but again could be mistaken.

If this other presence was who I thought it was, that was also an impossibility. That one disappeared when Twilight Sparkle was able to overcome the darkness that had corrupted her and was able to take my hand despite initial hesitation. To be honest, I didn't know if she had truly conquered that demon. It could still be somewhere inside of her mind, waiting for the perfect opportunity, the desire to finish what she started being the thing keeping her alive. No... I had to get rid of such thoughts as all it did was remind me about the problems I had when I had to deal with my own inner demon.

In my heart, I chose to believe that Dean Cadance was wrong, and that what she sensed wasn't anything to be worried about. Would my decision cost me later on? I didn't know for sure but I would find out when the time came.

When my vision came back to me, I floated down slowly from the sky and landed on the platform that Rarity had been standing on at the back of Zora Hall. Looking around to see if she was still standing there, my heart sank upon realizing that she was gone. Perhaps she went back inside? She did regain her voice again so she could be holding that rehearsal she and the other band members wanted to do before the now cancelled concert--I thought it was a waste of time since Coloratura knew it would be in vain. Still, I suspected they were waiting for me to come since I had assumed the life of their fellow band member.

I was about to walk forward when someone spoke to me from behind. " You have done well, Sunset Shimmer."

I turned around and was shocked to see the giant turtle behind me. " WAAAAH!" Wait... It wasn't freaked out by the fact that I was pretending to be a Zora? Could it be that it knew all along that I wasn't the real Mikau? What kind of mystical powers did this turtle possess to know about that?

" Do not be surprised." The turtle said. " I knew that you were using a special magic to assume the guise of a Zora and one who meant a great deal to the one whose song awoke me from my slumber. I did not wish to tell her the truth as it would have crushed her heart so. You need not worry about his soul as it can now finally rest in peace yet you must never tell his people of what truly happened. It is something they are not yet ready to know. Perhaps one day they shall know the truth of the Zora warrior's sacrifice but for now let them believe he still lives among them."

" And what about you?"

" Now, I can continue resting in peace. I too must abide the laws of ancient times and again merely watch from my deep slumber."

" Will you protect the Zoras?"

The turtle nodded its head. " The guardian of the ocean has been restored and shall now watch over them as it has done since the beginning of this world. If the Zora have need of me then I shall appear and aid them as I have done for you. Sunset Shimmer, you have saved the ocean but the evil that haunts this land has not completely vanished, thus your mission must continue until you either succeed or die."

I sighed knowing that what it said was true. " That's my lot in life I suppose."

" Then I wish you luck."

" Thanks."

" Before I return to my slumber, I wish to enjoy Lulu's voice a bit longer." The turtle said. " I think the gods can permit that. Hyeh, hyeh, hyeh." It then turned to the left and began looking out at the ocean leaving me to wonder how best to respond to what it said about listening to Rarity's voice.

In the end, I couldn't think of anything nor did I really want to. If anything, I wanted to get as far away from the turtle as possible not because its size was intimidating but because it was sounding rather disturbing based on its laughter. Before going inside Zora Hall, I thanked it for everything it done for me and it made a loud noise, its way of appreciating my thanks though I could have gone deaf--it was incredibly loud--and with that done, I walked forward and into the hall where I was surprised at what I was seeing. Everything looked completely different, like they went all out or something.

I had a feeling that the Indigo-Gos were serious when it came to their performing and what I was witnessing definitely proved that point. There was no doubt that I was going to have to do my very best at playing Thunderlane's--Mikau's--guitar otherwise I could embarrass his legacy as well as expose me for not being an imposter. I only had one concern on my mind at that point and that was wondering where the band was. I didn't see any of them on the stage so had something gone wrong?

Chapter 46: Rehearsal

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
February 27, 2017
Chapter 46: Rehearsal.

While I may not have been entirely familiar with the situation that occurred between the members of the Indigo-Go's, I knew enough to know that they were having issues all because of Rarity losing her voice, yet that was no longer an issue since her eggs were now in Daring Do's capable hands. So what could have been causing the problem now? Since the temple had been rid of Gyorg, the side-effects affecting Great Bay would eventually change back to normal, namely the temperature of the water. If anything, everyone would be celebrating such a thing happening, yet they weren't and it was making me feel worried.

Had the Gerudo Pirates somehow gotten themselves out of the fix they were in during their attempt to invade Great Bay Temple and came to Zora Hall just to steal back the eggs in a fit of vengeance. Did that mean I had to go back to their fortress and through all those traps again? Did that mean having to fight Rainbow Dash once again? I was hoping none of this was true but not for the obvious reasons. My battle against Gyorg had left me feeling incredibly exhausted and my body really wanted me to rest for several hours, yet there was no time for that as I still needed to restore Adagio back to normal by returning the Stray Fairies.

There was of course the big problem regarding those and that involved where I was supposed to take them. Unlike the previous two regions of Termina where I knew the location of the Great Fairy's Fountains--they were practically next to their respective temples--the location of the third fountain was a complete mystery. In other words I had no idea on where to even begin looking and I didn't want to waste time.

Now that I think about it, the Zoras know just about everything there is to know regarding Great Bay so surely one of them will know where the fountain is. Of course, I had to be subtle in my approach as no doubt Thunderlane knew the location too, and asking point-blank could lead them to suspect that I wasn't who I said I was. First, I needed to solve my current problem. I doubted they would share any information about where to find the fountain until the Indigo-Go's had performed on stage so there was no point in even trying, yet which of the band members was the right one to ask first?

Each of them had their own stories to tell with regards to the issue yet some were easier to communicate with than others. Rarity was most likely going to be the least helpful as she only recently got her voice back--I didn't want her to go through any kind of discomfort until she was ready--while Coloratura would have been too easy since she knew more about what was going on than the rest of them did. That left me with just Double Diamond and Party Favour, the two out of the loop so to speak--neither of them had been told all that much making them practically innocent--and the best place to start.

Before doing anything else, I knew that in order to learn anything, I needed to become a Zora. If their tribe were the same as the Deku and Goron tribes, they didn't want to talk about anything to non-tribe members for security reasons. It didn't bother me personally as I was enjoying being a Zora due to their graceful nature.

Taking out the Zora Mask and making sure no one was watching--I didn't want to cause a panic by suddenly changing into one of them--I placed it on my face and squatted down before watching my body parts shimmer as they changed from human to Zora. On the plus side, I didn't have to switch back and forth. I could remain like this until I needed to change back to normal.

" Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" What is it?" I asked back.

" Do you have any idea what we're supposed to be doing now?"

I nodded. " We need to take the Stray Fairies back to their fountain so that we can restore Adagio, but I have no idea where it is and I know you don't know either. I figure that we can ask of the Zoras but I don't think they'll be willing right now until they see the Indigo-Go's perform."

" Fair enough yet where are they?"

" That's what I intend to find out."

Princess Twilight was shocked. " They should have been out on the stage by now since everything has been resolved but it feels like we haven't done anything if they're still holed up in their rooms. Why would you go out of your way to help them deal with their bickering? I know you're the kind of person who needs to help out those in need and I understand that better than most, but it seems they don't personally care if nothing is done."

" That's why I think something happened while we were in the temple."

" Do you suspect the pirates?"

I took a few seconds before shrugging my shoulders. " I personally hope not as we don't have enough time to go through their fortress again so hopefully this is something that can be resolved quickly and is local."

" Fair enough." Princess Twilight said. " So which of the band members should we ask first?"

" Rarity is still recovering from her ordeal so there's no reason to ask her." I answered. " Coloratura knows too much information and while she would be the preferred choice, I doubt she would want to say anything. After all, I'm supposed to know about it due to assuming Mikau's life."

Princess Twilight scratched her head. " To be logical about it, Sunset, Coloratura would be the best person to ask because of what you just said, but I do understand why you feel she may not be helpful until we have a better understanding of what has really been happening around here." She then floated towards the door nearest to the main entrance before coming back over to me. " Why not start with the Zora who shares the same room that Mikau does? You need to look convincing to everyone else and he did provide us with the initial hint that Rarity was special--in this world rather than back in her world."

" You want me to act like a snobbish celebrity?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I don't think that is what Mikau and the other band members do despite their fame so you can just be all casual about it. Besides, I know this isn't like me to say this but it's not everyday that you get to go around being someone famous, idolized by those all around you."

I had to roll my eyes in response to that. Princess Twilight was famous for being a princess in Equestria and while she never let it consume her way of life, other ponies treated her like she were a goddess or something. No doubt she never got used to it and insisted on them viewing her as being like everyone else. A part of me wanted to know what it was like to be adored by the masses--not in the twisted vain the Dazzlings sought--yet I knew such a thing would never happen to me.

On the one hand, my past prevented me from ever becoming a princess as I abused my position as Princess Celestia's student. And on the other, I actually didn't want to have to go through being stared by so many eyes and not having any privacy. In a way, Her Highness was living both my dream and my nightmare. Still, I was surprised that she would go out and say that regarding the current situation. It's like she knew that I wanted to become an alicorn and wished to be adored by our fellow ponies given how difficult my life had been prior to changing it.

Was this her way of giving me that which was beyond my reach? If so then she knew me a lot better than I knew myself. While she could have been more open about it instead of being all cryptic--it could have been a princess type thing--I did appreciate the kind words. One day, I will become an alicorn worthy of the title though I had no idea what my title would be since I never really thought about it before.

With my current objective in mind, I began to walk towards the door that lead to Thunderlane and Double Diamond's room. Along the way, many Zoras kept on looking at me, admiration flowing through their eyes, making me feel very uncomfortable, but then this was the kind of lifestyle Mikau was used to--I really needed to address him by that name rather than continuing to use Thunderlane--though I was certain he never took advantage of it. When I reached the door, the same Zora from before was standing in front though he said nothing and stood aside, allowing me to enter.

Nothing had changed in this room since I was here last though Double Diamond seemed a lot more cheerful than usual. He kept on looking at a poster on the wall that described the up-coming Carnival of Time and it didn't take me long to figure out the significance. I wished that I could tell him that the carnival was cancelled but I chose to keep silent as it was something that Coloratura would have to ultimately reveal.

I walked up to him and he smiled. " Hey, Mikau! Where have you been?"

" I had to take care of problems in the temple."

Double Diamond was shocked to say the least. " Whoa! You actually went there!? No wonder the ocean has been slowly changing back to normal. I knew you were the heroic type but never did I think you would go there. The only ones who would ever go there have a death wish or something. Still, it's vindication for me since it meant that I was right about Lulu being the guardian." He began acting smug though he quickly stopped upon seeing that I didn't find it very amusing. " Ahem... I always believed Lulu had a unique destiny though it wasn't easy figuring out the signs. If not for you restoring her voice and awakening the giant turtle out back, I'd have doubted all reasoning."

" You heard her singing?"

" When you've been around Lulu long enough, you know when she will do it."

Suddenly it hit me! How did he know about the turtle? I had to ask him. " How did you know that a turtle appeared outside?"

" Lulu mentioned it after coming back inside." Double Diamond answered. " She was shocked at seeing that rock formation change into such a large creature but it was the power of her singing that did the trick. Still, I wish she could get over what happened."

My ears perked up upon him saying that. " Huh? What are you talking about?"

Double Diamond paused before answering. " Um... Something happened while you were in the temple, Mikau, and well, you see... the thing is... um..." I could tell he was trying to dodge the question so I slammed my hands onto his drums, prompting him to almost jump out of his seat. " Ack! Okay! I'll tell you what I know! Just don't scare me like that! Lulu came back inside and she looked like something had messed with her mind, like she looked vacant. Evan took her to her room and tried to see if anyone could figure out what was wrong but she said she needed a few minutes to recuperate."

" Did you believe that?"

Double Diamond shook his head. " That's what Evan said when I asked but I don't think he was telling me the truth. I don't get why Japas and I are always kept out of the loop when it comes to these things. We're part of this band too and we deserve to know when something's going down. Though in this case you don't know anything as well so at least we're not the only ones."

" I should speak to Evan."

" That would be the best thing to do."

I was about to turn and leave when I suddenly remembered the Great Fairy's Fountain. " Do you remember where the fairy fountain is? I was thinking of going there after the upcoming rehearsal but I need a reminder." In my mind, I was sweating pretty badly knowing that I said that completely wrong.

Double Diamond was silent at first leading me to believe that I made a serious blunder but then he leaned forward. " Sorry, Mikau, but I have no idea where it is. To be honest, I've never actually been there before."

Was he serious!? Did he honestly not know!? I felt like throttling him for that but I knew that wasn't the right thing to do. Perhaps Double Diamond knew someone who would know the location. " Okay, so who would be able to tell me?"

" I'd say Evan would know." Double Diamond answered. The look on his face told me that he wasn't sure about his answer but I wasn't about to argue. " I'm definitely sure she knows where to go though I'm surprised you needed to ask me something that you've known for years. Maybe going through the temple gave you a rough time and you can't think straight right now. Oh well. Pay me no mind, Mikau." I then turned around and began walking away when Double Diamond coughed prompting me to look back. In his hand was a book that looked to be written in Zora script. " You might want to take your diary with you."

" Huh? Why would I want that?"

" You see... When I was cleaning up your part of the room, I sort of broke the ladder you use."

" What made you think that it needed cleaning?"

" I thought it was a good idea."

I rubbed the bridge of my nose and moaned. " Never mind! Anway, why would I want my diary?"

" Japas said something about having a jam session with you before the rehearsal and I know you never back down from anything like that." Double Diamond answered. " I figured you'd forget what you both practiced last time--it was a few months ago--so why not humour him for a while and jam with him? Besides, it would make him feel a lot better considering how irritable he's been lately what with him and I being left out of the loop."

He handed over the diary before resuming looking at the poster on the wall and I opened the book to see what Mikau had written down. If I wasn't a Zora, I'd have not been able to understand a single word since the script written on each page looked archaic. Unlike Goron writing, Zora writing was much more complex in that it used special symbols to describe the feelings of any given situation. It seemed Mikau loved writing in his diary as most of the pages were filled with nothing but Zora script though many pages also had rough drafts of songs most likely penned by him though their purpose was a mystery.

Most of the pages talked about his life experiences and I chose not to read them out of respect for his passing but there were two pages in particular that proved interesting, and involved what he and Party Favour did regarding their jam session. The first page read: "Today I had a jam session with Japas. He's not good with words, but he writes great riffs. Here's what I played."(1.) I was fortunate in that I knew how to play a guitar otherwise what he wrote down would have made no sense to me. I had to admit that the notes were simple in execution yet conveyed a sense of wanting to branch out on their own.

I turned to the next page. "Today, I had Lulu listen to my session with Japas. She seemed to like it a lot. Lulu's a pretty great girl, after all." No wonder I felt strange whenever I was close to Rarity. It all stemmed from Mikau's love for her--I mean, Lulu--though it appeared he held back his feelings. It felt like it was a complicated relationship though it was unfortunate that it ended in tragedy due to what happened--I wondered if Rarity knew I wasn't him or did know and pretended to be ignorant. I turned to the next page. "Today, I had another jam session with Japas. Evan was in a bad mood 'cause the two of us are writin' songs on our own. Here's what I played."

These next notes were as simple as the previous ones yet I suspected they would make more sense when played alongside Party Favour. I was concerned by what was written down regarding Coloratura. Princess Twilight said that she was someone who was very approachable and loved her fans getting a chance to talk to her as a regular pony. It felt weird knowing her counterpart in Termina had issues over wanting to be the only one allowed to write songs. She was acting like some kind of control freak.

I turned to the next page to discover that it was the last entry and while I didn't want to read it, my heart compelled me to go forward with it. "Evan called me over this morning. It was something about Lulu. She was in a real rush. I wonder what it could be? By the way, it seems my lucky colour this week is green." Without saying another word, I handed the diary back to Double Diamond, who promptly put it on a nearby shelf, and I left the room in silence before thinking about that final entry. I couldn't believe it. It was like Thunderlane--Mikau--had a premonition of my arrival due to his lucky colour. My mind felt like screaming out loud but I couldn't bring myself to doing it.

No wonder the Indigo-Go's were miserable. All of their problems were connected to each other and they put on a brave face to ensure that their fans didn't know that there was a problem to begin with. If it wasn't for the Gerudo Pirates wanting Rarity's eggs, none of this would have happened. No... If it wasn't for Starlight Glimmer convincing Rainbow Dash to steal the eggs in the first place, none of this would have happened. I had a burning desire to make Starlight pay but part of me couldn't go through with it--the Giants wanting me to help her also provided a reason for not making her pay.

Sighing in silence, I walked over to Party Favour's room, the Zora standing in front moved aside, and as I opened the door, I barely noticed a group of Zora running towards me, obsession filled their faces, like they were expecting something good to happen. Party Favour stood before me, his expression was different from before, but I could tell something was bothering him based on his mannerisms.

As I walked up to him, he responded in kind. " Mikau! I was wondering when you were gonna pay me a visit." His attempt at appearing happy proved ineffective as the tone of his voice gave him away. " Lulu got her voice back and everything seemed good but now she needs some rest after some kind of wicked deal that happened out back."

" Did it have to do with a giant turtle?"

" Naw man!" Party Favour answered, shaking his head. " I wasn't able to get all of the details before Evan took her to her room, but she said something about seeing pirates and two strange creatures that seemed outta this world. Evan thinks she may have suffered from a slight spell after suddenly getting back her voice yet I think there's more to it than that. Evan is trying to hide something again and it's gotten both me and Tijo agitated to no end. We were finally about to begin our rehearsal when this act happened. Sometimes, I think being a member of this band is bogus!"

" Can you really blame Evan for acting that way?"

Party Favour shook his head. " No, I suppose not. Heh... You always knew how to remain calm in a situation, Mikau."

" I've had practice."

" Word is out that you saved Great Bay by going to the temple." Party Favour said. " Way to live up to your ancestors' legacy by doing whatever you did in there. I was planning on setting up some big party balloons in celebration but with this recent stunt by Evan, I'm afraid I'm just not in the partying mood. You know, she should have just taken Lulu over to the fairy fountain and have the Great Fairy deal with whatever affected her out back."

I shook my head. " That wouldn't have done much."

Party Favour didn't take my response too kindly. " Whoa! That's bogus, Mikau! I never thought I'd hear you say that about Lulu."

I waved my hands in front of him in an attempt to diffuse the problem. " It's not that at all. The Great Fairy's body got shattered to pieces by a prankster and hidden throughout the temple to prevent her from being restored. Even if Evan had taken Lulu over to the fountain, it would have been in vain."

" Really? Someone did that?"

" Yes."

" Then I take back my previous statement about you." Party Favour said. " I've no doubt you're on the level about the Great Fairy, Mikau, since you've seen her more times than anyone else--all those fights with the pirates took their toll--so I guess Lulu will just have to recover from this issue on her own. Speaking of Evan, I was thinking that we need the right kind of song for our upcoming concert."

I couldn't say anything to him about it being cancelled either so I went along. " Won't she come up with something?"

" Yeah, but she always wants her work to be appreciated! There are others who can write songs too you know."

" Like us?"

" And here I thought you had forgotten about what we've been doing." Party Favour answered. He strummed the strings on his instrument, nodding his head to the beat before pointing his finger at me. " Mikau! Why not join me for a little jam session? With what we practiced before, we could easily make our own song. What do you say?" I nodded in response and he smiled. " Knew you'd be up for it. As always, I'll start off and you follow along."

I took out the fish-bone guitar and waited for Party Favour to begin playing. Fortunately, I remembered the notes written down in the diary and suspected they needed to be played in the right order for it to count. In my mind, I was hoping for a simple jamming session that wouldn't result in someone wanting to go absolutely crazy.

I was reminded of one time back at Canterlot High when we had a jam session. Rainbow Dash took it too far and almost caused a power failure because of channeling so much magical energy into her playing. I'm surprised that the worst thing that happened was shorting out the light bulb in the band room.

Party Favour began strumming a few notes before turning things over to me. I liked what he played though it wouldn't really mean anything if I didn't respond in kind so I did by playing the first set of notes from the diary. I panicked slightly because of not wanting to make a mistake, thus ruining Thunderlane's reputation, but I succeeded and he reacted by nodding before playing some more notes. This time I played the second set of notes with more confidence and Party Favour was really impressed with what we had.

The two of us then began playing our respective parts together to create a melody that attracted the Zora I saw approaching the door outside. While I couldn't see what they were doing out there, I sensed that they were enjoying the jam session given what had been happening throughout Great Bay as of late. From my perspective, this was a delight and I didn't have to play backup--you could thank Rainbow Dash for that.

I smiled. " Now that was pretty good."

Party Favour nodded his approval. " It's got a good feel to it and I'm sure our adoring fans heard it outside. No doubt Evan would love to hear those notes herself but she's proud of her own work. She'd resent us for coming up with our own song and I doubt she would allow Tijo and Lulu to try it out because she didn't write it. If only there were a way for Evan to play it and not figure out that we were the ones who came up with it."

" I might have a solution."

" Really? Figured you might."

" I was planning on speaking to her anyway so I could get her to listen to what we came up with."

" Good luck with that, Mikau." Party Favour said. " If Evan likes our song then we'll perform it during the rehearsal and really wow the crowd at the carnival tomorrow night. I think this is the beginning of something big for us. You go on and speak with her and I'll keep on practicing until we go out on stage later."

Leaving him to do exactly that, I put my fish-bone guitar away, turned towards the door, and walked forward eventually leaving his room and back outside in the main area. The group of Zoras had since departed though they were close by as I could hear their giggling--Zora Hall was notorious for the echoes that bounced off the walls--yet my mind was focused on what was happening with Rarity.

I had to go into the temple to rescue the Giant yet it appeared something happened while I was away. What Party Favour said about her seeing pirates and two creatures didn't make sense but it was all I had to rely on. My heart wanted me to speak with Rarity as she knew what happened yet I felt compelled to speak with Coloratura first as she knew the location of the Great Fairy's Fountain. Plus, I needed to play the music Party Favour and I had concocted. How could I get her to hear it without making it obvious as to what was really going on?

" Having trouble with that jam session problem?" Twilight asked.

" How did you know?" I asked.

" I didn't need much convincing, Sunset."

" What can I do? I don't want to let Party Favour down."

" And you won't have to."

" I'm not sure I follow."

" You can perform the sequence you two played to Coloratura by playing as a human." Twilight said. " I know it sounds weird since you need to be a Zora to access her room and then change back long enough for the song before becoming a Zora again, but the best thing you can do is to deal with the problem involving Rarity and asking Coloratura where to find the fairy fountain. Once she's answered those questions, you can perform that sequence."

" That sounds really convoluted."

" I know but what other choice is there?"

I was about to make a counter-argument but ultimately chose not to say anything. In truth, I couldn't come up with something and instead resigned my fate by going along with what Her Highness suggested. I was surprised that she didn't suggest my other forms though maybe that was because Gorons didn't like the water while Deku Scrubs were looked down upon by the other tribes because of what they were. On the bright side, I now had a means of playing the melody that Party Favour and I created without tipping off Coloratura as to what his--Party Favour--intentions were. I just needed to come up with an excuse as to how I got into Coloratura's room as a human.

Walking up to her door, the Zora standing out front gave me a salute before stepping aside. I thought it pretty odd that he would do that but I wasn't about to start questioning his behaviour; I had other things that needed taking care of.

Entering Coloratura's room, she was standing in front of her piano and furiously writing stuff down on pieces of paper. No doubt she was writing down songs for the concert despite knowing that it had been cancelled--only she knew this and kept it from the others--though from what I remembered. she did this as a means of trying to deal with the problems that had been plaguing Great Bay and Rarity in particular. Why was she acting like this now when peace had been restored and Rarity's voice was back? Something told me that whatever happened outside was involved.

Just thinking about it made me feel mad inside for doing the right thing. If only I had been able to finish the temple a lot sooner, I could have protected Rarity from whatever happened to her instead of trying to figure out what was wrong. While I could reset time and save her, that wouldn't really change anything and it would label me as abusing the power I had been given just because I couldn't cut it. No... I intended on playing this out. Hopefully, I could get some sort of clue and the best person to ask at the moment was standing right there with her back to me.

I began walking forward towards Coloratura, my footsteps splashing about in the water, loud enough for her to hear and turn herself around to see me. " Mikau! I always knew you were a true hero but I never thought you could pull it off!" Coloratura said.

" So you heard about my exploits in the temple?" I asked.

Coloratura nodded. " It's hard not to know especially when the water slowly becomes the right temperature for us to swim about and the underwater creatures disappearing. Your ancestors are no doubt smiling down upon you for having lived up to their expectations." She suddenly turned her back and scrunched up some of her papers, tossing them aside with a lot of vigor before turning to face me again. " I hope this doesn't mean you plan on focusing on your heroics instead of your music. We still need you as lead guitarist to serenade our fans with your usual brand of music."

" I needed to see you about something."

" That's funny since I needed to see you."

" How... coincidental."

" Allow me to start since this is important." Coloratura said. " While you were inside the temple taking care of business, Lulu was waiting outside for you to return. She began singing to herself as a means of practicing to get her voice back in order when she said that something strange happened. She doesn't remember all of the details--it's like her memories of what happened outside have disappeared--but she said that the pirates and twos strange creatures showed up. The pirates got washed up out back thanks to something they did but these creatures are something new."

" Creatures?"

Coloratura nodded. " Lulu said they looked like demonic monsters but she couldn't go into details."

" Anything else?"

Coloratura shook her head. " She can't remember anything else and when I tried asking, she just asked me to take her to her room so that she could rest for a while." She turned around and slammed both hands down on the keys of her piano almost crushing them from the force of her pounding. " Gah! Just when it looked like things were looking up for our band, this had to happen. What in the world could be going on out in the world that the Indigo-Go's have to suffer for it as a result?"

I walked up beside her. " I don't know but you can't let this get to you." I placed my hand on her shoulder. " Why don't I talk to her about it? If anyone can get through to her, it would be me given how close the two of us are."

" Yes, I suppose you're right." Coloratura said, breathing softly. " Lulu has liked you for as long as anyone can remember and she always says you're a great listener. If you can convince her to go through with the rehearsal, we can get things set up and perform for our fans. I know the concert is getting cancelled and all according to what Ms. Toto told me through her message but I don't want us getting rusty."

" Wait a minute! The rehearsal got delayed because of Lulu?"

Coloratura nodded. " We were waiting for you to get back from the temple so that we could practice but then Lulu had this little episode and now we're waiting for her to feel better so that we can get things started."

Now things were beginning to make some sense. Rarity experienced something outside that caused her distress but couldn't remember the details and instead said random things without much credit to back them up. I didn't know what to think about the two creatures she supposedly saw though if I were to find out more, I needed to ask her about it and hoped for her cooperation despite how painful it would be for her. The Gerudo Pirates being outside was much more believable yet they most likely drifted down here when they landed in the water after being thrown about by that tornado.

Creatures... demonic creatures... somehow, I just couldn't get that mental image out of my mind. It sounded like Sunset Demon and someone else though I couldn't be sure as it was a longshot at best. The she-demon was gone for good and was part of my past that I've moved on from, but was it possible that she was still alive? I doubted it before when the initial thought occurred to me yet now I began thinking otherwise. If Sunset Demon were alive, why couldn't I detect her presence? Her magic most likely had been repressed much like my own because of the magical imbalance of this world but was this imbalance shielding her?

The she-demon pushed me to the limits of endurance, far more than anything I had ever faced in my entire life--not even Ganondorf himself could hold a candle up the likes of her despite his actions--and I was frightened not by her presence but by the magic that dwelled within me. Never had I experienced magic of that caliber--I was powerful for a unicorn--and I feared I could lose control of my actions. If I hadn't mastered my ability to pony up out of anger resulting from being on death's doorstep, I might be dead right now and Sunset Demon would be parading around as the real Sunset Shimmer in her own manner of speaking.

It was at that moment where Coloratura interrupted my train of thought. " Mikau? Are you okay?"

I came out of my thought process with confusion. " Huh? What did you say?"

" Are you okay? You zoned out there for a while and I was wondering if something had hit you on the head."

" Now why would you say it like that?"

Coloratura laughed. " Because that's how you usually get your ideas, when something falls from above and smacks you on the head. In any case, you should go next door and see if Lulu is okay. If she gives you the good word then we can start preparing for our rehearsal." She grabbed a piece of paper that had some music notes scribbled down on it but before I had a chance to see it, it got crumpled up and tossed aside. " I need a new song and fast before we play before our fans! I'm usually very punctual but I appear to be lacking creativity. By the way... I received a message some time ago from the scientist over at the Oceanside Laboratory."

" What did she say?"

" Lulu's eggs are doing just fine and will be transferred over to Zora Hall in a few days."

" That's good to hear."

" Now what was it that you needed to tell me?"

Crap! I had almost forgotten about that! " It has to do with the Great Fairy's Fountain."

" I planned on taking Lulu over there in the morning but she insisted on staying here." Coloratura said. " To be honest, I don't think she would have been able to make it there what with how awkward the path gets. I understand it being located left of Zora Hall in the side of a cliff, but was it really necessary to have platforms serve as a path that require jumping to each one and requiring a special tool most Zora don't even have? Unless you had legendary leaping or jumping skills, reaching the fountain is impossible. I wish I still had my Hookshot from years ago but I sold it to make ends meet."

Talk about a stroke of good fortune. I was going to ask Coloratura how to get there and hoped to avoid exposing the truth to her, yet she went ahead and revealed to me where I needed to go in order to return the Stray Fairies and restore Adagio. Judging from her description of the path, it was a place that required using the Hookshot--most likely on trees--and that was when I realized what she had just said. Did she actually have her own Hookshot!? Why would anyone want to get rid of such a valuable item? Granted, she needed rupees but it still didn't make sense.

" Times were tough back then."

Coloratura nodded. " Before I joined the Indigo-Go's, I struggled to sustain myself so I had to do desperate things to survive."

I never knew that was the case with her and yet it gave me a new sense of respect for her. After all, I had to struggle when I first came to the world that I called home by surviving through any means necessary until I could get used to being human. Sure, I had times where I wanted to curse Princess Celestia for denying me my destiny but such feelings slowly got repressed and became the fuel needed for personal vengeance against her and all of Equestria. Manipulating others was also a means to an end as it enabled me to get what I wanted without having to sacrifice anything.

Even though I still struggle to make ends meet--I lived in the library of Canterlot High--I'm better off now than I was before. I do various odd-jobs here and there to keep myself occupied whilst trying to make sense of the magic that now existed all around me thanks to my bringing it to a world that never had it until then. It may not be glamourous but I enjoyed it for the life experiences.

That's when I quickly realized that I was starting to daydream again so I got back to the subject at hand. " The Great Fairy was shattered to pieces."

Coloratura was shocked. " What!? How could it be!?"

" Someone shattered her body and hid fifteen Stray Fairies in the temple."

" You did pick them up, yes?"

I nodded. " I have them with me."

" Then you should go there immediately after we've finished our rehearsal." Coloratura said. " Now if you'll excuse me, I need to come up with a song for us to perform within the next ten minutes or so."

It was painfully obvious that she was struggling to come up with something good judging from how many pieces of wet paper were floating about the water, yet I knew that she needed help otherwise the rehearsal would be nothing short of disastrous. It also meant having to change forms long enough to give the inspiration she needs much to my own annoyance of having to switch between bodies for something small.

Sighing, I took several steps backwards before grabbing my face, and taking off the Zora Mask, flipping my hair back in the process upon changing back to a human. My first thought was to quietly announce my presence though that would involve coming up with an excuse that she could believe in. After all, in Coloratura's mind, I would have been an intruder who got past the Zora blocking the door to her room. My next thought was to just simply play the result of the jam session I had with Party Favour, yet she may not understand what I was doing, and would still view me as an intruder.

I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt and was about to play the notes when Coloratura turned around and spotted me. My only reaction was to quickly come up with an ideal response. " Um... Hi?"

" How did you get in here!?"

" Um..."

" This is absurd!" Coloratura shouted. " I distinctly told that Zora outside not to let anyone in here other than Mikau and what did he go and do? He allowed someone to come in here and disrupt my thought process. Not only that but the someone is a human of all things!"

" Sorry for coming in unannounced."

" As you should be!"

" I was hoping you'd be willing to listen to something."

Coloratura raised her hand. " Sorry but I don't have time to listen to what you've got. I need to come up with something for our rehearsal in about ten minutes and my lead guitarist is off comforting our lead singer next door though I'm surprised he slipped out the door without making a sound." I began to sweat because the truth was that Mikau never left the room and was standing in front of her. At least she didn't put two and two together yet I had to be careful not to say the wrong thing or else she just might. " Since you obviously came a long way to see us perform, I can let you stick around so long as you don't break anything."

I nodded. " Can I practice playing my ocarina?"

" As long as you don't play too loudly."

Turning around and focusing on her song writing, Coloratura was now completely ignoring me, and I breathed a sigh of relief knowing that I just dodged a bullet. However, I had no time to practice like I said I would because I needed to give her the inspiration she needed. I began playing the jam session through my mind to make sure that I remembered how it went before playing the entire sequence on my ocarina. It didn't sound as good as I hoped yet it seemed to have had an effect on Coloratura. She lifted her head and tilted it to the side upon hearing my song and began thinking.

" That song! Hmmm... I wonder if I could..." She began scribbling something down whilst looking pleased with herself. " Hmmm... It works, it works, it works!" Coloratura then played the results of the jam session with a lot of gusto as though it were her destiny. Princess Twilight started crying tears of joy though I was just struck with awe over what I was seeing with my own eyes. I had heard from Her Highness that Coloratura was quite the piano sensation in Equestria and this definitely proved it. And when she finished by striking the final keys in epic fashion, there were no words to describe how I had been floored by such grace.

" Wow..." I said quietly.

" Not bad... That's a pretty good song I just made up!"

" If you say so."

" You're not thinking I'm stealing your song are you?" Coloratura asked. I shook my head. " Well, I'm sorry if that's what you think. If it will make you feel any better, I could adjust the tempo a little and throw in a couple of other tweaks until it's become my own creation. You know, you've got a good sense of melody! We'll play my new song at our upcoming rehearsal and maybe even during our next show. If that still doesn't make you feel better, then take this thanks for the inspiration."

She handed over a Piece of Heart that I immediately took and felt the warmth coming from it enveloping around me. While I ended up getting something good in the end, I felt bad for Party Favour as his hard work had just been usurped by Coloratura. It wasn't the kind of conclusion I was expecting but at least it had been taken care of. Now all I needed to do was deal with Rarity, perform in this rehearsal, and visit Adagio so that she could be restored.

I quietly tip-toed over to the door, slipped on the Zora Mask, and opened the door as I was transforming. By the time I came back out into the main area of Zora Hall, I had changed into Mikau once again and pretended that nothing weird had happened--I still disliked the fact that I had to be a human for a few minutes. Walking towards Rarity's room, my knees suddenly buckled, making me think something went wrong with the transformation, and upon getting back onto my feet, the reason behind the buckle was exhaustion. My body needed to rest but I couldn't since the rehearsal needed to be done.

Walking up to Rarity's room--and watching the creepy Zora from before running away--and opening the door, I walked inside and sitting on a fancy looking seat was Rarity, who immediately smiled upon seeing me enter.

" Mikau... I was wondering when you would come and see me." Rarity said.

" Sorry for taking so long."

" No doubt you were busy talking to the others about what happened to me."

" How did you know?"

" It was premonition."

I could tell what she was getting at but I couldn't return the affection sadly as I wasn't the person she thought I was. " You mentioned something about an encounter that happened outside after I left to go to the temple."

Rarity nodded. " I do not remember much because of something strange that affected my mind but what I do recall was seeing the Gerudo Pirates washed up on the shore outside yet it was the strange creatures that have been burned into my memory."

" What kind of creatures were they?"

" I... I do not recall their appearances." Rarity answered, grabbing her head as though she were in pain. " I feel like my mind has been turned inside out resulting in my current condition, yet the creatures I saw didn't look to be altogether human."

" Were they demons?"

Rarity was taken aback by my question. " Demons? Here? In Great Bay? I cannot recall what they were exactly, darling, but I wouldn't call them demons. Nothing like that would be seen around the ocean. If anything, the only place one would find demons, or anything similar to that, in Termina would be in that one region where nothing exists anymore. Heaven forbid that anything that lurks there ever came here."

While her answer wasn't what I was hoping for, it did give me an idea as to what was to come in the final region. It sounded like it was a place where no one lived aside from monsters yet surely there were some people living there. I thought about asking Rarity anything else about it but refrained as I felt she wouldn't want to think about it. Besides, she sounded like she didn't know much anyway as she didn't provide a name for this final region. But back to the matter of what she could remember seeing outside, I was certain that Sunset Demon was what Rarity saw but now I wasn't so sure about that.

Why couldn't she recall what happened? I've heard of some people experiencing a mental block when they see something that scares them but this wasn't the case at all. Rarity saw something and now no longer could remember what it was? I smelt a cover up of some kind... yet that wasn't the only thing I sensed. I was surprised actually that no one ever thought to sniff her considering she was giving off a weird smell though it may not have been appropriate. I sniffed a few times and immediately cringed without her noticing, my suspicion being proven correct though I needed to talk to Princess Twilight in private.

Perhaps Her Highness also sensed the same thing, perhaps even more so than me since she never stopped doing that kind of thing. In any case, I couldn't tell Rarity what had happened to her otherwise she could freak out and things would only get worse. Instead, I knelt down and looked her straight in the eyes, her smile making me feel better. " Whatever you saw out there is gone now so don't worry about it anymore. You've been through plenty already, Lulu." It still felt weird using Lulu instead of Rarity for her name.

" I am sorry for worrying everyone."

" If you'd like, we could postpone the rehearsal until tomorrow so that you can rest."

Rarity shook her head. " No, I will be alright, darling. Our fans want to see us perform before we leave for Clock Town and I for one do not want to disappoint them. I was hoping that we were going to perform our most famous song, "Ballad of the Wind Fish" but Evan has been busy trying to come up with something new. Unlike our fans, the people of Clock Town are very particular with what they deem as music so we need to wow them with something fresh."

" There is something I need to tell you." I said. I had to inform her that I would need to leave after the rehearsal but I didn't want to give her the wrong idea and make her think I was never coming back--technically that was true since none of this would matter upon resetting time--but I wanted her to know what I intended on doing. " When we've finished with the rehearsal... I need to visit the Great Fairy's Fountain so that she may be restored."

" That is understandable, Mikau, though I do not see why you needed to be so formal about it."

" There's more."

" Oh?"

" Once I've finished there, I need to leave Great Bay for a time so that I can help save Termina."

Rarity's expression upon hearing my words was exactly what I was expecting yet I didn't expect her response to be what it was. " It has to do with the moon falling, yes? You do not need to say a word about it, Mikau. Most of the Zora have ignored it, but I know that it is a sign that our world faces a threat unlike anything it has ever felt before, and that you must go forth to save it. Fate has chosen you for a greater purpose and I for one will not prevent you from seeking it out."

" Rarity..."

" Hmmm? Rarity? That is a strange name, but it feels right to me somehow, like it was a name I was associated with in another time, in another world." Rarity said. Crap! Did I just say that out loud and even after going so long calling everyone by the names they went by in this world? I felt embarrassed to no end yet Rarity was perfectly fine with as though she knew thing weren't supposed to be this way. Could it be that her Element of Generosity had come forth but in a different manner? " In any case, Mikau, I will tell the others what it is you must do and I will make certain they understand.

" Thank you."

" Promise me that you will perform at the concert tomorrow."

I nodded my head even though I knew deep down that such a thing wasn't possible. The real Mikau was dead and all I was doing was living out his life so that his mission could be complete and he could rest in peace. That mission was over now so it made sense for me to disappear so that the reality of the situation could sink in. I also believed Rarity knew that the one she loved in this world was no longer alive yet didn't say anything about it. In her heart, she didn't want this to end but knew it had to.

Getting up from her seat, Rarity took a few steps forward though she lost her balance prompting me to catch her. I didn't care if this was intentional as I didn't want her to see her hurt herself but she insisted that she was fine and wanted to get the rest of the band together for the rehearsal. While my own body wasn't faring well as a result of my own exhaustion due to lack of sleep, I could keep going until the rehearsal was over.

" Who would have guessed that the next one would be so close?" Midnight Sparkle asked.

" While I am not thrilled with having to deal with that one, I must agree that her being in the same general area does make it easy for us." Sunset Demon said. " However, we need to be quick as there is no telling when Sunset Shimmer will reset time using whatever powers she possesses here."

" It seems you're no longer jealous about that."

" Every time she does it, she is forced to endure the fact that everything she has done becomes lost to time."

" So in a way, you love seeing her suffer for it?"

Sunset Demon nodded before looking down at her hands. " I still intend on becoming the one true Sunset Shimmer, the one she was meant to be instead of giving it up in the name of friendship, but I know now that patience is needed for me to achieve my goal. While my temper has been problematic in addition to you testing my patience with your questionable actions, I'm relatively calm compared to how I used to be. Sunset is someone who must use power to make her dreams come true, cast aside the weaknesses of friendship, caress power like it were her own child."

" Power isn't everything you know."

" It's the only thing I know." Sunset Demon said. " I exist because of her desire for power!"

" That does make things all the more interesting."

Sunset Demon suddenly lurched forward, grabbed Midnight Sparkle by her neck, and lifted her up. " You are going to listen to me as I will explain this just once. I have put up with your mannerisms so far because of what you did for me when we first met, but there comes a time where I can only take so much before needing to step in. You are free to do whatever it is that involves that other girl but do not incur my wrath. I may be calm right now, Midnight Sparkle, but that calmness can snap just like a twig." The she-demon's eyes then glowed a bright yellow signalling rage. " I will kill you without hesitation should you piss me off enough."

" Huh? What has brought this up?"

" Don't play dumb with me."

" You're not as stupid as you look."

" Like I said, piss me off enough and I will kill you."

Midnight Sparkle began laughing manically. " Do you really think I'm afraid of you? I know you think you're pretty tough, Sunset Demon, but remember that I brought you back from the brink and can easily put you back again. I wouldn't want to see you lose everything after coming this far."

Sunset Demon shook her before squeezing the neck of her companion causing her to choke a little. " I've been "killed" twice now so your threat falls on deaf ears. I have seen death with my own eyes and it holds no grip over my twisted black heart. You haven't had that experience yet so have you ever wondered what it would be like to writhe in agony and being trapped in a place where there is nothing but eternal torment until it becomes unbearable?" Midnight Sparkle shook her head rapidly causing the she-demon nothing but amusement while loosening her grip. " This is your one and only warning, Midnight Sparkle."

" Deeply noted."

" Let's continue what we came here for." Sunset Demon said. She then slammed Midnight Sparkle to the ground and stepped on both of her wings. " Before this is all said and done, you are going to share everything with me regarding that device of yours. I don't care what you say in protest but I will know all." She bent down until her face was mere inches from her companion's now frightened face. " Remember what I said. Let those words forever be burned into that nightmare you call a mind."

Midnight Sparkle began coughing. " Gasp! You didn't have to be so serious with the choking but I understand now. I'll tell you everything when we've finished our business here since this the last one we need to see before going back to that wasteland in the east." She got back onto her feet, wiped off the dirt from her outfit, and took to the sky followed closely by Sunset Demon. " Pinkie Pie may be a different person here but her bizarre personality still exists. Because of this, we don't need to spend much time getting her to display something related to her Element of Harmony."

The two demons then took off from their location and began making their way towards the Oceanside Laboratory. Along the way, Midnight Sparkle explained that the magic she used to erase all memories of their presence had an unfortunate side-effect due to it being weaker than it should be. Rarity, Rainbow Dash, Derpy, and the other pirates would remember some aspects of what happened though they would struggle to recall exact details.

Unless they spoke to anyone who could understand what they were getting at, the encounter would be nothing but a dream. Sunset Demon was annoyed that the magic didn't work exactly as intended but there wasn't much that could be done about it.

Until Sunset used her powers to reset time, they had to hope that she didn't figure out that they were around. They knew that she would have spoken with Rarity on the principle that she was her friend and if she could remember enough of what happened, Sunset would know of their presence and do what was necessary to stop them. Sunset Demon personally had no problems with that though Midnight Sparkle insisted that they maintained hiding until everything was in place.

Above all else, they needed to make sure not to incur the wrath of Ganondorf, something Sunset Demon herself insisted given her prior experiences. For the two demons though, having to traverse about the land in such secrecy was something they didn't want to have to do but had no choice when it became apparent to them that their magic had been restrained because of unseen forces pervading Termina. If they had been capable of using the full extent of their magic, this world would have fallen in a short amount of time, but instead they had to rely on more subtle means to expand their agenda.

When the Oceanside Laboratory came into sight, Sunset Demon pointed out the red balloon that Pinkie Pie was attached to and promptly popped it by flying up and using the nail on her pinky finger causing Pinkie to fall down to the ground, her knees buckling as a result of the impact.

" Again!? Who decided it was a good idea to pop Tingle's balloon again?" Pinkie Pie asked.

" We made that choice." Sunset Demon answered as she and Midnight Sparkle landed.

" Gasp! You two... You look a lot like fairies what with those wings on your backs."

" Us!? Fairies!? Are you kidding me!?"

Pinkie Pie nodded. " One of the things that Tingle knows about fairy folk is that they are capable of flying with their wings. Tingle doesn't have wings of her own yet so she uses her balloon as a means of travelling about drawing maps to aid my father." She ran around both demons, checking out every last thing she could, making Sunset Demon very uneasy until she returned to her prior position. " You two are the strangest fairies I've ever seen and you in particular remind Tingle of Ms. Fairy who paid me a visit some time ago."

" Who is this 'Ms. Fairy' that you speak of?" Midnight Sparkle answered.

" A fairy, silly."

" What did this fairy look like?"

" She was a human dressed in green."

Midnight Sparkle and Sunset Demon looked at each other and nodded before the former looked back at Pinkie Pie. " That definitely sounds like someone who would be a fairy since they were dressed in an attire they are known for. I am surprised that a fairy folk would be out here by the ocean rather than in the forest."

" Tingle never thought about it that way."

" And now you can."

" Are you here to buy one of Tingle's maps?"

" Is that so?" Midnight Sparkle asked. " My companion and I would like to purchase one of your maps." Pinkie Pie was about to celebrate in her usual style when her mouth suddenly had a finger placed over it to silence her enthusiasm. " Not so fast my excitable friend. In exchange for us doing that for you, you must do something for us, but you needn't worry as it won't be difficult. And before you can say anything in response, we won't take no for an answer."

" Does Tingle have a choice?"

" In a word... No."

After leaving Rarity's room, she and I made our way over to Coloratura's room to inform her that the rehearsal could finally get underway. While she wobbled a little from her ordeal and insisted she was okay, I took it upon myself to help her along to which she was appreciative. Despite everything that had happened since returning from freeing Dean Cadance, I could take in the pleasure that peace had been restored even though it would soon be dashed upon resetting time. For the moment however, I was satisfied with how everything turned out despite Rarity witnessing something she wasn't entirely sure about.

The smell I sensed coming from her body took me a while to figure out but I knew that it was Equestrian magic, yet how was that even possible here in Termina? Magic from the world of my birth had been repressed here unless some kinds could penetrate this unusual barrier, and yet it would explain why my friends were displaying the essence of their Elements despite not realizing it. Princess Twilight was the only one whose Element had not made itself known here though perhaps Twilight Sparkle's version would appear instead? It was unfortunate that I lacked an Element so in that sense I was lonely.

In any case, I still chose to keep it a secret from Rarity and instead consult with Her Highness. If she could smell the same thing that I was, then it would give me credence to my assumption that Sunset Demon was in fact still alive, or it could be just a coincidence that had nothing to do with her.

When we reached Coloratura's room and Rarity explained everything, Coloratura accepted the fact that I had to leave immediately after the rehearsal and would say nothing more on the subject. She had also finished writing the song that we were to play during the rehearsal though I knew deep down that Party Favour wasn't going to like it. Rarity and I opted to help move her piano to the stage in the center of Zora Hall but she insisted on doing it herself though I couldn't even begin to imagine how she would pull it off.

Speaking of Party Favour, Rarity and I paid him a visit next and explained the situation. He didn't like the idea of me leaving especially with the concert coming up but knew that this was what fate had in store for me. He sighed, accepting that this was meant to be and said we'd meet him on stage ready to rock Zora Hall. Finally, we walked over to the room shared between both Double Diamond and Thunderlane and he was thrilled at the prospect of getting to use his drumming skills on a new song written by Coloratura. Again, we opted to help him move his drums but he was insistent on doing it on his own.

Roughly ten minutes, I found myself standing in front of every Zora who lived in Zora Hall, with the rest of the Indigo-Go's standing up on stage with me. I wasn't suffering from stage fright or anything as this was something I had done before so I wasn't a newbie or anything, yet I admitted to myself that this was a much different crowd setting than what I was used since back home my audience comprised of teenage kids. Still, the entire band were ready to get started and I had no intention of letting them down.

" Thank you for being so patient with us." Rarity announced to the cheering crowd.

" We had some issues to work out but now we are ready to perform for you." Coloratura said.

" Before we begin our rehearsal for the upcoming concert, I would like to take this opportunity to thank Mikau for everything he has done for us."

The crowd erupted with the sounds of " Mikau!"

Rarity raised her hands to quiet them down. " Yes, yes, but please let me continue." The crowd immediately went silent so that she could speak. " Thank you. If not for Mikau going to the Gerudo Pirate's Fortress, risking his life to save my precious eggs, I wouldn't have regained my voice. Also, if not for his actions in the Great Bay Temple, the ocean would not be changing back to normal after being too warm for us for far too long." The crowd once again erupted into cheers prompting Rarity to calm them down once again. " My, aren't you all so enthusiastic over Mikau but you can do so during our rehearsal."

" We were originally going to perform "Ballad of the Wind Fish" but something else has come up." Coloratura said. " An anonymous fan gave me the inspiration to come up with a brand new song which we'll be debuting right here before debuting it at the concert tomorrow night. We need a few minutes for the others to memorize my lyrics before we can get started otherwise this isn't going to end well."

Party Favour, Double Diamond, Rarity, and I huddled over near Coloratura and began to look over the song she had created. My heart immediately sank over recognizing it instantly as the result of the jam session I had with Party Favour, yet he didn't seem to recognize it at all much to my surprise. We spent roughly five minutes looking at the lyrics making sure we didn't miss our cues, knew the flow of the music, have the right pitch, and for Rarity, when to start singing. Behind us, the crowd was eagerly awaiting for us to get back to our positions so that we could perform, and I was amazed as their strong patience.

" Sorry for the delay but we're about to start!" Party Favour announced.

" Ready to make some noise?" Double Diamond asked.

" You know it!"

" Okay everyone. One... Two... Three!"

All of us save for Rarity began playing our instruments since her singing wasn't to occur until near the half-way point of the rehearsal. I had to admit that this was really soothing considering everything that I had been through during this three day cycle. Coloratura, who had played a mean piano rift earlier, was now playing in a calm manner that conveyed both beauty and grace while Double Diamond proved to be no slouch when it came to the drums. It was a breath of fresh air compared to the insane drumming Pinkie Pie usually did whenever she played but I still missed her antics.

Party Favour and I played off of one another just like we had done during the jam session yet now we had to concentrate harder due to having drums and a piano thrown into the mix that could throw off our game. Deep down, I was worried that he was going to have a fit when he realized what it was we were playing, but it needed to be this way so as to allow everything to resolve on its own without driving everyone in the band apart. Again, I was fortunate that I knew how to play the guitar and that meant Thunderlane's--Mikau's--reputation and legacy as a musician would remain intact.

The audience in the meantime were just absolutely mesmerized by our performance yet their eyes were all focused on Rarity for they were anticipating her singing. I had heard her singing ability for myself outside yet that was her getting her voice back. What was about to happen was her singing for real and giving our audience something memorable.

We continued playing when Rarity started to sing and everyone was taken aback by how wonderful she sounded. Not even my singing skills compared to what was coming out from her mouth and I struggled to maintain my concentration. Her singing mainly consisted of vocal sounds with the occasional words thrown in for good measure, yet through it all, she gave it everything she had and held back nothing. It was like she was free to sing to her heart's content and not have to worry about anything else. No wonder the Indigo-Go's had such popularity amongst the Zora.

Each member contributed to the overall group dynamic in their own special way, five cogs of a giant mechanism working together in unison to produce something that would forever be memorable in the mindset of those who heard it. Granted, it would have been nice if Rarity didn't have to do all of the singing on her own and allow the rest of us to shoulder some of the burden, but perhaps this was what she wanted, to be able to sing with so much passion. Even Princess Twilight was enjoying the performance--she was floating in front of the crowd--and none of the Zoras paid her any mind--or any attention for that matter.

Our performance continued on until we all came to a stop to which the crowd began to roar with delight over what they had heard. If Mikau had been watching from on high, he would have been proud of what I had done in his name. The other band members started hauling their instruments back to their rooms and the crowd began going their own ways leaving me and Rarity alone. She knew that this was where I had to leave so that I could continue with my overall mission, and while I wanted to get going, a part of me wanted to stay behind long enough to hear her final thoughts.

" I know that you need to leave, Mikau, yet I appreciate you wanting to stay for a moment longer." Rarity said.

" It's the least I can do." I said.

Rarity nodded. " To think that so much has happened here within the last few days. If not for your actions, things would not have turned out the way they did. I would still be at a loss for words over the loss of my eggs and the band would have surely fallen apart as a result of bickering and mixed messages." Rarity clenched her hand into a fist, looked down at the ground, and closed her eyes for a few moments before smiling. " I must admit, I was surprised when my voice turned that lonely island into a turtle. No one ever knew that it was a spirit who watches over us in the name of the guardian who protects the ocean from darkness."

" It knew a lot more than it was letting on."

" Maybe so but it seems that I have pleased it with my singing."

" I've been meaning to ask you about that."

" Ask me what?"

" What is your connection to the New Wave Bossa Nova?"

" That song... holds sentimental value to me." Rarity answered. " My mother used to sing it to me... often... long ago... as she held a destiny that no one else could bear, and that it had been passed down to me to continue that destiny, but I had forgotten all about it. Those eggs that I laid were to remind me of that song, to remind me of the destiny I now hold in my hands, to serve as the guardian of the Great Bay Temple. It may not be the most glamourous calling, Mikau, but it is one I shall accept gratefully."

I smiled. " I know you will do a fine job."

Rarity smiled back. " Thank you, Mikau. That song was from when I was a very young child, so I had forgotten it, but now that I have been reunited with it once again, I shall forever remember those notes and hold them close to my heart. I've put you through some horrible experiences, Mikau, and I apologize for the ordeal but I'm all better now. Things will look up for me and I hope the same thing happens for you." She then turned her back to me indicating that she had finished with what she wanted to say. " Now you must complete the mission destiny has placed upon you. Go now, Mikau, and save this world from disaster."

Without saying anything else, I turned and began running towards the exit of Zora Hall--I didn't notice Rarity turning around and looking back at me, tears trickling down her face as though she felt she would never see me again. No one else attempted to stop me because they most likely assumed that I was leaving to have some fun after having done so much already, yet in my mind, I wanted to rest given that my body was on the verge of collapsing from exhaustion. But, I couldn't rest yet even though I really wanted to. I still needed to return the Stray Fairies to their fountain and restore Adagio.

Hopefully, she would be able to give me some idea as to where I was supposed to go next. I mean, I knew that I would need to go to the final region located east of Clock Town, but I wanted to know precise details so that I wouldn't waste any precious time.

Jumping into the water near the main entrance and swimming through it, I emerged back outside in Great Bay and swam up to the surface to see that it was still night out. That was a blessing for me as it meant I had plenty of time to learn what I needed to from Adagio, and maybe go back to town so that I could pick up some much needed upgrades. As soon as I climbed out of the water and onto the shore, I began looking for the general location of the Great Fairy's Fountain. An unusual rock situated on a platform at the end of a series of small islands definitely screamed suspicious and did add up to what Coloratura mentioned.

" How are you feeling?" Twilight asked.

" I'm alright."

" You did the right thing by listening to what Rarity had to say."

" Do you think she knows that I'm not the real Mikau?" I asked. " I personally think she knows but refuses to admit it."

Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders. " In her heart, the man she loves in this world will always be there for her. Anything else regarding him doesn't mean a thing to her and she will refuse to listen to such things, at least for the time being. She will eventually come to understand that Mikau isn't coming back and that they will never be together again until her time comes and she can join in."

I looked at Her Highness with a grim expression. " Wow... That was harsh even for you."

" Yes, but it was the best example I could think of."

" Why did Mikau have to die?"

" The same thing can be said about Darmani, the son of the Deku Butler, and anyone else who has suffered a similar fate." Twilight answered. " They were all victims of the evil power contained within the mask Starlight Glimmer wears on her face, yet she herself probably had no control over what she did."

" You think the mask has a mind of its own?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I honestly don't know. There is so much about this Majora's Mask that neither of us know about, and what Sonata told us when she helped change you back to a human after you got cursed didn't seem like the entire story. I don't think Starlight knows anything either so that leaves with very few options. Well... I suppose the only ones who might know are the Four Giants but so far they haven't been entirely honest with us."

" Maybe the last one will tell us?"

" I sure hope so."

" Do you want to save Starlight?" I asked. " You know, this version of her?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " We must save her from the magic that surrounds her before anything else can go wrong. Speaking of which... I know that you sensed something off about Rarity when you were talking to her earlier."

" I was hoping you'd noticed."

Princess Twilight nodded. " It was very faint but I sensed Equestrian magic surrounding her body. Judging from her lack of being unable to recall what happened while we were inside the temple, she had her memories erased through magical means."

I was surprised to say the least. " How is that possible?"

" Some Equestrian magic has managed to seep into this world but at a reduced cost."

" Meaning?"

" Whoever used that magic on Rarity and the others must have known that it wouldn't entirely erase her memory of what happened resulting in images that don't make sense to her, and I'm betting that Rainbow Dash and the other Gerudo Pirates are going through the exact same thing." Twilight answered.

" I'm not familiar with memory erasing magic."

" It's something Princess Celestia never taught me so I had to find out for myself." Twilight said. " She never teaches her ponies any magic that they could use to either harm other ponies or themselves. Memory erasure is very potent but requires absolute precision if you want the target to forget certain events otherwise you might erase too little or too much memory resulting in the pony becoming nothing short of a quivering jelly."

I feared that Rarity had succumbed to the kind of fate that Princess Twilight had mentioned--I wished she hadn't--but she reassured me that Rarity seemed to be okay despite having her memories erased through magical means. If this was the work of Sunset Demon, why try to cover her tracks instead of making her presence known? I knew she wanted to do everything she could to assume my life and take me down a dark path where I would embrace power and abandon my friends, but why not just come out with it instead of hiding in the shadows like a cowards. Was she afraid of me? Or was she waiting for something to happen?

But, if it wasn't the she-demon, then could it have been? Since it was Equestrian magic, it had to have been done by someone who was a native of Equestria or at the very least had knowledge of our world, yet aside from Princess Twilight and myself, everyone else was living out the lives of the characters living in this video game world. That meant Sunset Demon wasn't travelling alone--Rarity did say there were two creatures she saw outside--and had someone with her who knew about Equestrian magic, but without any actual proof, I could only come up with theories at best as opposed to actual facts.

Turning my attention towards returning the Stray Fairies, I walked along the beach until I reached the small islands I needed to use to make it over to the fountain. Unfortunately, it meant having to become a human for a brief period--one of the islands was too far to reach through jumping and required use of the Hookshot--before becoming a Zora again much to my annoyance, but something else caught my eye. Why was there a random door embedded into the cliff-side? Could it lead to somewhere useful or was it just completely random and served no purpose other than being there?

Since it was on the way to the fountain, I was going to find out momentarily. Jumping across the small islands until I reached the door, a sign outside read that this was a placethat had only recently opened for business known as the Ocean Fishing Pond. I remembered doing a spot of fishing during my previous journey though the details were fuzzy given how I was doing other things at the same time. Since time wasn't on my side and my body was really desperate for rest, I chose to continue going by walking past and jumping onto the next island and continuing to do so with the others until I stopped.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask, flipped my hair back, and switched over to the Hookshot. From there, I aimed at the tree on the next island, fired the Hookshot and sailed across once the chain had struck its target. All that remained was a series of small hops across a questionable rocky outcrop of platforms until I reached my destination--one slip up meant going back and starting all over again--so I carefully stepped across by extending my legs so that I wouldn't run into any risks.

" That was awkward."

" You'd have done it too, Twilight."

" So, I take it that the Great Fairy's Fountain is behind this rock?" Twilight asked. Before us stood a large boulder that was obviously blocking the entrance though whoever put it there wasn't being very subtle. " You'll need to use a bomb if you want to get rid of it."

I checked my items and discovered that I didn't have any. " Sorry, but I didn't pick any up."

" You do have the alternative."

I nodded because of knowing what Princess Twilight was talking about. " It's been a while since I last used it but I guess it's going to be used again." I took out the Blast Mask and held it firmly in my hands. Bombs were an important item from what I had discovered yet I never seemed to have any on hand because of losing them when resetting time back to the start of the three day cycle, yet this mask sought to act as a substitute though it was costly. " Guess I've no other choice but to blow myself up." Placing the mask on my face, I walked up until I was right in front of the boulder and detonated the mask.

BOOM!

" Sunset! Are you okay?"

I wheezed to signal that I was fine. " I should have raised my shield for that one."

" Are you hurt?"

I shook my head. " If anything, I'm just miffed that I didn't use an actual bomb. Now that the boulder has been removed, we can go inside and return the Stray Fairies, but first let
me change back to a Zora because it's appropriate."

Putting the Blast Mask away--hopefully, I wouldn't have to rely on it again--I took out the Zora Mask, placed it on my face, and watched as my body once again shimmered as it changed from human to Zora though this time there was a scream involved, something that hadn't really happened since initially putting it on after healing Thunderlane's soul. In any case, upon finishing my transformation, I walked into the fountain and came upon the same beauteous sight that I had already gotten used to after seeing it three times. A blue tint was here this time around and it actually gave off a soothing vibe.

Before I could appreciate it even more, the Stray Fairies leapt out of my body, merged with the others who were floating about, and Adagio Dazzle appeared before me. This version of her was wearing a blue coloured gown, blue coloured hair--no matter what colours she had, she still knew how to make it work--a wonderful smile, and a gaze that proved to be rather piercing.

" Thank you for restoring my broken and shattered body to normal. "Adagio said.

" Which of the Great Fairy's are you?"

" I am known as she who represents the force of courage."

" Makes sense since I've seen magic, power, and wisdom already." I said. " But, what about the last Great Fairy in the final region?"

Adagio giggled. " That will be a secret for you to discover on your own, kind young one. I know that you have endured much hardship since coming to the ocean and that your body is begging for you to rest, but first I would like to bestow a great gift that should prove most useful for the coming trials." She cupped her hands together and a glowing blue light suddenly appeared in-between. " You have struggled in maintaining your life energy so now I can provide you a means of relieving you of pain."

" I accept."

" It is not a matter of whether you accept or not." Adagio said. " You were destined to receive my aid and now you shall have it."

The light left her hands and enveloped all around me with its radiant glow and I suddenly felt really strange. I couldn't tell what it was straight away but something was happening to my body to make it more durable, like I was wearing an invisible suit of armour. The sensation was so strong within me that I couldn't hold it back and I raised my hands in response, letting out a loud cheer, Adagio giggling over my actions, my immediate blushing over how I had just embarrasses myself. Yet she dismissed my humiliation by saying that it was only natural for me to want to celebrate receiving a power courtesy of the Great Fairy of Courage.

" I feel strange."

Adagio giggled again. " It will take time for your body to become adjusted to the power that it has now received, but you will find it will become very useful to you almost immediately, young one. I have enhanced the defensive capabilities of your body so now you will take half of the damage that monsters inflict upon you. Do not think that this will make you invincible as the evil creatures will still cause you great pain."

" Now that we've gotten that out of the way, I was wondering if you knew where I should go next."

" Of course I know."

" That doesn't surprise me."

" There is much for me to discuss with you, small one."

" Oh?"

" I am aware that you are seeking out the ultimate power." Adagio answered. " It is a power that many have sought to claim as their own and no one has ever succeeded because of succumbing to the insanity locked within it. Should you claim this mask as your own and you fail to control the power, you could very well die as a result. Tell me, child... Are you sure you want this power? I will not judge you if you say yes but know that it can poison even the strongest of spirits, tainting them with evil until they lose their identity and become nothing but a soulless vessel that cares only for power. Is this what you really want?"

(1.) The diary entries are as they were depicted in the game.

Chapter 47: Around Town

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
March 6, 2017
Chapter 47: Around Town.

Adagio Dazzle's choice of words immediately got me to think about this "ultimate mask" that her fellow Great Fairies had convinced me to acquire as a means to combat the mask worn by Starlight Glimmer, Majora's Mask, the source of all the problems the world of Termina was suffering from. I had my doubts over wanting it because it reminded me of how I allowed great power to consume me. Possessing some power was necessary if someone wanted to overcome a great evil but then they themselves would become the very thing that they sought to defeat. The cycle of darkness would continue on in a new form.

Back then, when I placed Princess Twilight's crown on my head, I gained tremendous power but it cost me my humanity, and I changed into a monster, one that cared for nothing but her own twisted desires. My original desire was to prove Princess Celestia had been wrong to deny me the chance to become an alicorn but that quickly changed into wanting to rule all of Equestria with an iron fist--hoof. If not for Her Highness and my friends--who were my enemies during that point in time--defeating me and freeing me from the shackles of my own hatred, I could have lived a much different life.

Had I gone on to conquer Equestria with my teenage army--it still made me cringe just thinking about how pathetic that sounded--I'd have ruled unopposed, crushing any who tried to resist, and without the Element of Magic, the other Elements would have been completely useless. Of course, it would have lead me down a path where I lost all sense of wanting to rule with the kind of grace an alicorn represents and became a tyrant who eventually would get overthrown by those I had supressed with my reign. The cycle would eventually lead whoever overthrew me to believe they could do a better job and thus the cycle starts over again.

Just thinking about what could have been shivered me to the very core. If this ultimate mask was as evil as I had been told and I were to place it on my face, what was to stop me from being consumed by it and becoming the very thing I once became? Sure, I had changed a lot since those days, but what if it wasn't enough and that I could easily be tempted by power given that I had tasted it once before? What if my willpower wasn't enough to avoid temptation? Was it worth risking everything I had done to change my life just to give myself a better chance of defeating Starlight?

" You seem to be confused." Adagio said.

" Your words have re-opened some old wounds."

" I did not mean to make you question yourself."

I shook my head. " No, it's not that but rather I am afraid that if I were to claim this 'ultimate mask' and wear it, I'll end up becoming the person I used to be before friendship changed me for the better, a monster who cared for nothing but power. It took me a long time to reach my current place in life and to lose it because of one mask would be too much for me to be able to bear it."

" While it is true that this mask possesses great evil, it also possesses great good." Adagio said. She cupped her hands together and an image appeared before my eyes though I couldn't tell what she was trying to show me. " If you are strong enough in both body and mind, you will be able to control the power of this mask and make it your own." The image then became clearer and I could see someone who looked like me but was taller, had a slightly demonic appearance, and glowed in an ethereal light. " It changes the wearer into a dark version of their true self armed with demonic power beyond mortal comprehension."

" Can it stand up to Majora's Mask?"

Adagio nodded slowly. " It was created long ago to serve as a sister mask to the one worn by the masked imp though it became lost to the ravages of time." She moved her hands apart and the image of the warrior disappeared leaving me wondering what its significance really was. " While destiny has tasked you with saving this world from the evil perpetrated by that imp, you are not tasked with acquiring this one mask. If you believe that you can defeat the imp without needing such power, then that is what shall come to pass. But, if you believe your own abilities cannot suffice and seek it, then you must risk everything to acquire it."

I had hoped that she wouldn't have put it that way but she did and that meant needing to decide whether or not it was worth my time to get it. While the full extent of Starlight's power had yet to become known, I did believe I had enough power to be able to stop her from destroying Termina using the moon. Everything I had done so far had proven difficult and pushed me to the limits of endurance both physically and mentally and I overcame such challenges by believing in myself--being able to pony up during those situations would have been preferred but I won't let that be an issue.

But, if my power wasn't enough and Starlight was in fact far more powerful than she appeared, perhaps acquiring this mask would be in my best interest. With such power, I could stop her and save not only this world, but the one that I called home and Equestria, but if I succumbed to the power and became a monster, I'd never be able to forgive myself. After seeing what happened with Twilight Sparkle when she became Midnight Sparkle during the Friendship Games, the prospect of losing myself to the darkness was too strong for me not to ignore, and for that I felt fearful of it.

Adagio was trying to show me that it was possible to control this mask and use it wisely but the thoughts of becoming a monster were too influential in my mind. Such fear like that also had a negative connotation to them and it involved Ganondorf. While he obviously had no connection to the mask, he could use my doubts to his advantage and somehow coerce me into becoming his servant. I'm not sure how he would pull that off but I wasn't about to question his power. Another thought then crossed my mind. What if the power within this mask wasn't enough to deal with the likes of Ganondorf?

Sure, it sounded like it possessed great power, but then he himself was power incarnate. Also, would the Triforce of Courage that was inside of me react to the mask and cause further complications? So many factors were at hand and they were doing nothing but causing my overall confidence to shatter.

I finally dropped to my knees in despair. " Gah! I just don't know what to do!"

" It is a very difficult decision to make."

" I'd like to be able to sleep on it seeing as my body is on the verge of collapsing from exhaustion." I said. " But now, I just can't stop thinking about what will happen if I were to wear that mask and lose control, becoming a monster who desires nothing but destruction."

As tears began trickling down my cheeks, Adagio's voice began to soothe me. It felt strange considering who she was back home but here she was saving me from succumbing to despair and further torment. " I did not mean to make you suffer so much when you have already endured great anguish, young one. The mask you seek possesses a terrible burden that only the strongest are able to resist and use as their own." She then looked down at Princess Twilight, who had been silent this entire time and smiled before lurching forward with her hand held out. " I can sense you have something on your mind you wish to say, little fairy."

Princess Twilight floated over, landed on Adagio's hand, and began to talk. " Is this mask absolutely necessary for Sunset to acquire in order to stop Majora's Mask? We've been hearing mixed messages from the other Great Fairies about how dangerous it is and that it could corrupt her, yet it could prove to be the one thing that can overcome the power Starlight possesses. I mean no disrespect here but I wish you would make up your minds!"

" I admit that we have made it difficult for the young one."

" Then why bring it up?"

" She is destined to save this world but must go through incredible hardships." Adagio answered. " Such is the way fate works. My aim here is to tell you, young one, that while the mask possesses evil power that can corrupt one's soul, it can be used for good and such power would prove devastating against the power of the imp. But, I am not able to provide you with a solid answer. The remaining Great Fairy shall show you the way."

Princess Twilight wasn't thrilled by that answer. " You're just going to let Sunset suffer until we find the last Great Fairy? Why not just come clean right now and give her the answer she needs so that she doesn't have to suffer this torment anymore?"

Adagio shook her head. " It is beyond my power to answer it. I am merely the Great Fairy of Courage, she who provides guidance for those who have need to overcome great trials that may loom ahead and be too much for them. The final Great Fairy specializes in helping with matters of the heart and the young one's resolve regarding the mask falls well within her realm of giving you an answer."

I finally spoke up. " Then I'll find her."

Princess Twilight was surprised. " Sunset? Are you sure about that?"

I nodded my head. " If this is what I have to deal with, Twilight, then I'll endure until we find her. No doubt she'll have been shattered to pieces like the others and scattered throughout the temple in the final region, but if she can give me the answer to this mask, I can hold out until then."

Adagio suddenly raised her hands and the entire fountain began to glow brightly, forcing me to cover my eyes so as to be blinded by the brightness. When everything settled down and I could see clearly again, she had floated to the ground and stood before me as though she were human herself. I didn't think she could do something like that but then her powers in this world were different compared with what she was capable of in Hyrule. " I apologize for doing that, young one but my heart felt as though you needed some comfort by someone who could relate to you on a personal level."

" I didn't know you could do that."

" All Great Fairies can do this." Adagio said. " We just choose not to unless we believe it to be necessary. I can only remain like this for a short period of time as retaining this form does cost me much magic but I shall help you further by addressing the concerns in your mind."

" The final region?"

Adagio nodded. " That and your concern about items, but first the final region of Termina, where my sister resides. Many centuries ago, there was a kingdom that existed to the east of the place known as Clock Town. This kingdom had its problems like other kingdoms would but it was a kingdom stained with blood. A terrible war would engulf everyone and destroy them leaving nothing but an empty wasteland that even now lingers to this day." She waved her hand and an image of a desolate place appeared and I immediately turned away because of how horrid it looked. " None but the dead and anyone who is foolhardy enough reside there."

" The undead? How is that possible?"

" I do not know the answer as it is beyond my power."

" Then I'll need to speak to someone who might know."

" Seek out the gravekeeper and a cursed one who covets knowledge." Adagio said. " They shall guide you much further once you enter the land of the dead, but there is something you must acquire first otherwise you will not be granted entry. A mask that represents those who linger in death is needed and can be given to you by two individuals who bear a grudge with the ranch owner."

I was shocked when she said that. She was referring to the Gorman Sisters, the two whom Applejack mentioned when she said she suspected foul play at Romani Ranch, yet couldn't blame them as there wasn't any proof of their involvement. It took me a moment to realize that they were the two who attacked her wagon when she attempted to make a delivery to the Milk Bar after I helped out Apple Bloom. The masks they were wearing... was that what I needed? How could a pair of ranch hands get their hands on masks like that? Unless they actually went to this desolated kingdom, I couldn't help but question it.

Then again, it did give me a reason to pay them a visit. After what they tried to do to Applejack, I had been wanting to see them again to give them a piece of my mind, yet now I needed to so that I could progress further on my journey. Was I being too hard on them? I didn't understand things from their perspective and their actions could be a result of wanting to have similar success to that of the ranch--though their attempt at robbery weighed down my desire to want to talk to them. I also wanted to know how they felt about their relationship with their brother, Gorman, and why he chose to leave them in the name of seeking fame?

" Is that the only mask I need?"

Adagio shook her head. " There are two places that have now become open to you, young one. One is a building in the swamp and the other is a building here in the ocean. Both places house terrible curses that must be vanquished, yet they can only be conquered within the first day of the three you have. You have what you need now to conquer them and it is the one in the swamp that houses a mask, the other will grant you more wealth." She looked at her with a powerful stare and I couldn't look away. " There are other masks and items that can aid your quest back in Clock Town. Seek them out for the final prize and to better prepare for the coming trials."

" Anything else?"

" The power of gold from the mountain people shall enhance your power."

" I think I understand that."

" Finally, speak to the questionable man in town who runs a strange shop." Adagio said. " His appearance and demeanour belie the truest compassion within his heart, yet it can only be seen when one from his past reveals all." Her body started to glow and I began to reach out with my head when she stopped me with her own. " I cannot continue using this form so now I shall take my leave of you. You require rest, young one, and so it shall be granted. Come back and see me whenever you feel weary."

Adagio disappeared for a few moments before reappearing as her true self and laughed as she disappeared back into the fountain. The information she had given me was much more expansive compared to her fellow Great Fairies--they were really strict when it came to telling me what I needed to know--though some things filled my heart with dread knowing that they involved putting aside my differences towards certain individuals. I knew she was referencing Iron Will when she mentioned "questionable man" as he owned the Curiosity Shop, yet I left him on bad terms believing he was a scoundrel. Maybe I had underestimated him all along.

She also mentioned about me going back to Clock Town to pick up any masks and items necessary for my quest. To be honest, I wasn't fond of the Great Fairies being able to read my mind and tell me what I was planning on doing, but I did appreciate the reminder in case I were to forget. What was perhaps the most intriguing information revolved around the two buildings that were cursed according to her words. The only thing that I could think of that revolved around a curse in this video game world were those golden spiders I had heard about from the family afflicted by them--whether I destroyed any or not was something I couldn't remember.

In any case, I knew what I needed to do. I needed to spend an entire three day cycle acquiring masks and upgrades throughout Clock Town before paying a visit to the home of the Gorman Sisters before heading to the final region of Termina. Though, since I still had one more day before needing to reset time, I supposed I could get started once I was finished resting so that I could have more time available to get what I needed.

The first thing I was going to do before anything else was take that much needed rest. My body was mere moments away from collapsing from exhaustion--I'm amazed I held out longer than I did--and it needed recharging otherwise I'd be of no good to anyone. I was fortunate that Adagio said I could sleep here. Had I chosen to sleep outside, a random monster could have attacked me due to being too weak to retaliate. Or, if I had made the choice of going back to Zora Hall, my body wouldn't have made it because of being too exhausted. At least I would be safe in here--understatement of the year--until the next day.

Propping my back up against the wall and slumping to the ground, I drifted off to sleep while Princess Twilight nuzzled up on top of my head and fell asleep as well. I soon began to dream and already I could tell my subconscious would be tested because of who was waiting for me.

I was anticipating his presence because of what happened a few minutes ago when I suffered a mental breakdown during my encounter with Adagio, and I knew that I needed to remain strong and prevent him from taking advantage through use of his words. Sitting on a throne in front of me was Ganondorf himself, a cruel smile on his lips, his eyes staring deep into my soul, the dark aura that surrounded him made it difficult for me to breathe, my fate his to determine.

He continued staring at me until he finally spoke, his voice echoing all around me. " Child... we meet again in this place, the realm of the dream, the place where nightmares abound interspersed with dreams. I know that you suffered emotional trauma most recently all because you fear a great power." At this point, I had come to understand that he could foresee events long before they happened, so I didn't react when he mentioned what he knew. " Hmph! It seems that you have grown wise to my very presence, child. It is a sign that you are slowly but surely living up to my expectations of you."

" What do you want this time?"

Ganondorf laughed. " Such a bold statement coming from you." He closed his eyes, turned his head away from me, and suddenly I was impaled from below by what appeared to be a large spike made of darkness that came out of nowhere. " Do not forget your place, child! It is by my will that I allow you to live! Were my benevolence towards you be weaker than what it is, you would have died the instant you set foot into this world, your loved ones would have mourned the loss with heavy hearts." He laughed again before continuing. " I find it delicious that a mere mask would damage such a frail mental state."

" It has more power than anything in this world."

" Yes." Ganondorf said. " In this world, yet I am from the future, from Hyrule. This mask's power is great but it pales in comparison to me, but perhaps you could make it become equal to me were you to control its dark power. Yes... That would be most ideal as it would let test you to see if you are worthy of being my servant."

" Even if I did manage to control it, I'd never serve you! Never!"

Ganondorf laughed again. " You have just recently displayed the kind of despair that makes you perfect to serve me, child. You fear losing yourself to the darkness that once coated your heart in a twisted stain that power itself became your only desire." He snapped his finger and the spike disappeared only to be replaced by shackles that immediately chained my arms and legs before pulling me towards him, stopping mere inches from his throne. " You believe your life is better but the truth is something you continue denying. You are still tainted by the darkness that corrupted you. Nothing you can do will ever remove it."

I struggled to break free of his shackles but they were far too strong for me. " I didn't think that the taint would be permanent. I"

" Hmph! Then you thought wrong."

" But I can still live with it."

" True but can you afford to lose yourself were you to claim the power of the ultimate mask?"

I didn't have an answer for him because what he said was true. While the darkness inside my heart disappeared when I helped my friends defeat the Dazzlings, I knew that I had been tainted by that very darkness and that it would forever remain a part of me. Such a tiny amount of taint could easily seep forth, corrupt every part of my being, and change me into a monster worse than Sunset Demon. Had I been trapped by Ganondorf all because of actions I took long ago? Had my desire to become an alicorn by any means become the bane of my existence?

Those questions had answers to them. Ganondorf knew about my past and was using his manipulation to coerce me into thinking that embracing power and darkness was my destiny, and that resisting such urges showed that I was delaying the inevitable. I won't deny that my desire for ascension involved stealing knowledge, breaking into a forbidden section within Canterlot's Royal Library to learn dark magic, and choosing to steal a sacred relic meant to protect Equestria from those who would try to conquer it. Those early actions created my evil taint with becoming Sunset Demon the icing on top of that.

Despite this, I couldn't allow myself to become that person. To do so would mean betraying everyone who had been there to guide me. I knew what I had to do now and it was the likes of Ganondorf who convinced me. The ultimate mask that the Great Fairies told me about... I needed to obtain it and control its power despite the immense risk involved. I had to prove that I could resist the taint in my heart and instead embrace it. How was I going to do that? It was a question to which I couldn't even begin to figure out an answer.

My daydreaming hadn't gone unnoticed by Ganondorf and he chose to take advantage of it. " You have decided to seek the power of the mask, haven't you?" His ability to read minds wasn't surprising to me either though it was inconvenient as it meant I could hide nothing from him. " I knew you would come to that conclusion. It does make things all the more interesting for me."

" Why do you want me to serve you?"

" Hmph! I know all about what you have achieved, child. The potential you possess is one that cannot be ignored and yet you allow such potential to waste away all because you choose to hold it back in the name of family. I can mold you into becoming a powerful warrior, one whose dreams can become a reality, one whose power can never be rivaled by anyone, one who can wield divine power."

I could tell he was referring to the Triforce of Courage though he wasn't being cryptic this time. " I can make my dreams come true through my own current path." I said. " Sure, it will take me a lot longer than what I was hoping for but the journey is worth it."

Ganondorf responded with a single word. " Ascension..." My sudden reaction made him laugh as he knew that he gotten through my defences. " It is the one thing you still desire even after all this time. You desire to become a princess, one who wields great power and is revered by those around her, yet it can never be as you still possess doubt over whether it can happen because of actions committed by you. That is why you went to extreme lengths to acquire power. You wanted to prove yourself worthy. Look at what you have to show for it, child, nothing but a broken dream that lingers in the thrall of despair."

Tried as I could to refute his words, I couldn't help but agree that he had a point. " I'll become an alicorn someday."

" Heh... Such a pitiful response, and yet I knew you would say that."

" I will become an alicorn."

Ganondorf laughed and clenched his hand into a fist, revealing the Mark of the Triforce on the back of it. " This is what true power is like, child. You possess a portion of the power that I wield, yet you refuse to embrace it and instead fear it. You cannot understand what you have as you choose to live in fear all because of what you once were, a monster who had everything and cast it aside for nothing. You will soon realize that destiny is something that cannot be denied no matter how much you struggle against it. The only way to change destiny would be to go beyond expectations of mortality."

" What does that even mean?"

" It seems I have my answer already... as I was expecting."

" Huh!? What are you getting at now?"

Ganondorf lowered his hand and pointed his finger at me. My own hand then lurched forward and the Mark of the Triforce began to glow brightly. " This is the power you wield and it is one you shall soon embrace, child, whether you desire its blessings or not. To sever yourself from this destiny would involve death, a factor that you would never consider, the only means of giving up the golden power of the Triforce. When our next contest is upon us, I know you will have embraced courage and use its power accordingly. It is this that shall guide you to the ultimate mask. Do not betray my expectations."

His image then disappeared from my mind and I was plunged into an endless void of darkness with only my own body being a source of light. Every time I had an encounter with Ganondorf, my stress levels would get worse all because his words were getting to me. Some of the things he said this time did have a ring of truth to them and I for one wasn't about to deny them, yet I couldn't allow myself to be swayed otherwise I would become who I used to be, a monster who cared for nothing but power. Still, my desire to become an alicorn existed in my heart and was a dream I yearned for. It was a desire that burned the brightest of all within me.

And then there was what he said about the Triforce of Courage that dwelled within me. Other than me sharing a portion of his power--such a thought made me want to throw up endlessly--he said I would embrace its power before our next contest. The reason I acquired it during my previous journey was because I displayed tremendous amounts of courage and overcame even the most incredible of odds that others would have fallen to. Did it mean that I was to succeed because I had courage on my side? Was I to acquire the ultimate mask because of my courage and control it? Ganondorf's words were confusing but also began making sense, a terrifying thought indeed.

Dawn of the Final Day - 24 Hours Remain.

I woke up not with a scream but rather as normal, Princess Twilight surprised that it happened that way given what usually happened when I slept. While my body definitely felt better after sleeping for what must have been eight hours--this was going to become a trend--my mind didn't feel the same way. Ganondorf's words still weighed down on me and I felt compelled to explain things to Her Highness. I was anticipating her not liking me agreeing with what Ganondorf said about my desire to become an alicorn but she needed know everything that happened within my subconscious.

Her Highness listened to my explanation without saying a word until I had finished. " I definitely don't like the idea of you agreeing with him on something, Sunset, as that's a sign that he could further manipulate you, but I appreciate you being honest with me."

" Guess being a princess is still something I want but have repressed it for so long."

" You just need to be patient with it, that's all." Twilight said. " I know you're worthy to become a princess as you've done so much since you changed your ways, but it will come when fate feels that you're ready. I know that probably isn't all that reassuring but it's the best I can give you."

I smiled. " Thanks, Twilight."

" I'm curious about what he said regarding that Triforce you have."

I held out my hand though the mark didn't appear. " I figured that the reason I got it is because of my courage and for doing things no one else would ever try. I risked my life for the safety of others and overcame incredible challenges to get to this point." I looked closely at my hand before lowering it down. " I figure that my courage will ensure my success in the future along with acquiring that mask." I looked at Princess Twilight who seemed confused at what I was saying. " I know not to rely on a mystical force because that's just being ignorant but you have to admit it does make a lot of sense when you think about it."

Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders. " I suppose that's true but I wouldn't put too much thought into it. For now, I suggest continue on as you have done and not worry too much about what Ganondorf told you, but I must disagree about the ultimate mask. We should get the opinion of the final Great Fairy first as she supposedly knows more about this mask than the others do. That means rescuing the Stray Fairies hidden inside of the final temple."

" I'm not going there yet until I get some more masks and upgrades."

" Adagio said you need to be prepared for the coming trials."

" The question is how best to approach everything."

Princess Twilight floated back and forth for several seconds, thinking of an idea, and then suddenly flying in front of my face. " I know what you can do to start off. Adagio brought up the Curiosity Shop so why not go there and see what Iron Will has to offer? Now, I know you're not thrilled about paying him a visit because of what happened last time but remember that he doesn't recall the encounter as we've reset time on a few occasions."

" I did act like a jerk because of what I thought of his business."

" Yes." Twilight said. " Iron Will's shop may be sketchy at best but he isn't an evil person. It's like Adagio said, he has compassion in his heart despite what his appearance and actions suggest, but we should still be weary just in case."

" There's just one problem."

" What's that?"

" His shop doesn't open until 10:00pm at night and the sun just came up."

" Not to worry." Twilight said. " You can kill some time in Termina Field by farming for rupees--you need to put more into the bank--and when you're done, you can warp ahead to the evening by playing the Song of Double Time, a song you haven't tried yet or haven't used that often."

Good thing that I spoke to that scarecrow at the time about those secret melodies that related to the Song of Time. If I hadn't inquired about them--with the proper encouragement from one of the earlier Great Fairies--I'd have been forced to wait until tonight just to see Iron Will. I was beginning to understand how important the ocarina was despite not using it as much as I should have. The new songs that I had learned on my journey I had only played when they were needed leaving me struggling to remember how the notes went. I needed to play them more often so that they became ingrained in my mind.

Standing up and taking out my fish-bone guitar, I was about to play the Song of Soaring before quickly realizing that I couldn't warp away unless I was outside--this was a mechanic from my previous journey that I remembered and didn't appreciate--so I quickly walked outside to see that the ocean was as beautiful as ever thanks to it no longer being afflicted by the evil that had radiated from the temple. In my mind, the thought of the ocean going back to normal upon resetting time still bothered me along with Rarity losing both her eggs and voice, I knew it needed to be done.

" So what would like Tingle to do?" Pinkie Pie asked.

" We want you to display some laughter." Midnight Sparkle answered.

" Laughter? Is that all you want from Tingle?"

" Yes."

" I was actually expecting an impossible task that would surely have resulted in my untimely death." Pinkie Pie said. " Wow! Glad that isn't going to happen otherwise I would have refused your request and ran away as fast as my legs could carry me." Sunset Demon wasn't amused by her antics though Midnight Sparkle seemed impressed though there was no telling what she was thinking in her head. " So, you want Tingle to show off her humourous side? To be honest, I don't know too many jokes as I've spent my time creating maps to help out my father but I can use humour by relating it to my life."

Midnight Sparkle waved her hands indicating that she wasn't too picky. " Whatever works best for you. Remember, you need to show true honesty with your laughter otherwise we might think you were trying to deceive us. You should keep that in mind as my companion doesn't have the best of attitudes at times." She rubbed a nasty bruise on her neck that she received when Sunset Demon grabbed her earlier and threatened to kill her. " She has a very short temper so I suggest you get it right the first time."

Pinkie Pie then turned to face the she-demon to see if what she had just heard was true and the expression that came from the demon was true. Sunset Demon looked like she was about to lose control of her emotions and fly off into a fit of rage against anyone within her personal space, yet Pinkie put on a brave face knowing that a potential map sale was hanging in the balance should she please these strange creatures. She began thinking about how best to approach the situation but couldn't come up with anything so she thought deeper--even scrunching her head in hopes of coming up with an idea.

After looking like she was about to explode, Pinkie came up with something and threw confetti all around much to the surprise of the two demons. " I just came up with the most brilliant idea ever and it relates to what I just said about humour relating to my life. Tingle dresses the way she does because I believe that I can become a fairy one day just like Mrs. Fairy, yet my father says I should act my age, but why should Tingle? This outfit gives me a lot of comfort and it represents the fairy folk. Other people have said Tingle resembles a frog rather than a fairy but they are wrong. Tingle is the reincarnation of a fairy!"

Both Sunset Demon and Midnight Sparkle looked at each other in surprise before the former decided to speak out. " What in the world was that supposed to be?"

" That was Tingle's attempt at humour."

" It was pathetic!"

Pinkie Pie was shocked to say the least. " What? You think Tingle's humour was terrible?"

Sunset Demon nodded. " It's like you weren't even trying to pass yourself off as a comedian. My companion gave you a chance to display some humour but it seems that she was wrong to assume that you could deliver in response. I was thinking of using more persuasive measures but that would be wasting my time so how about I just kill you? I know it would mean losing one of the Elements of Harmony, but then you can easily be replaced. Laughter is the weakest of the Elements anyway since the others actually do something other than make it into a joke."

" Are you sure we should kill her?" Midnight Sparkle asked. " I could ask her to come up with something else."

Sunset Demon shook her head. " It's obvious to us that this map maker didn't live up to the potential that was expected of her. A shame really as the others all displayed characteristics of their Elements while she couldn't even muster up a basic joke." The she-demon walked over until she stood next to Pinkie Pie, raised her hand, it began to glow in a bright light, and raised it above Pinkie's head. " Besides, when Sunset Shimmer resets time, none of this is going to matter since everything will go back to normal before we even arrived. I had refrained myself from acting in such a manner but your lack of understanding condemned you."

" Normally, I wouldn't advise this but you do have your way with words."

" At least you understand now."

" In more ways than one."

Sunset Demon smiled cruelly. " I'll make this quick. I may not have the same strength I had before thanks to this world but I know that I can kill this pathetic excuse of a girl with just one chop to her head." The she-demon raised her hand again before dropping it only to have Pinkie catch it with her hand. " What!?" She tried to break free of the sudden grip placed upon her hand but she found herself unable to budge. " What's this? Why can't I break free of your grip? You couldn't possibly possess a hidden strength."

Midnight Sparkle wasn't amused. " Are you trying to be funny?"

" NO!"

" Really? Then I'm at a loss for words."

Pinkie Pie's face turned bright red, her eyes opened wide, and bared her teeth. " Do you think Tingle is weak? Worthless? Unable to hold her own in battle? Is that what you're saying!? I was trying my best to fulfill your request yet you treat Tingle in such a horrible manner!?" Her face turned a brighter red, her eyes became bloodshot, and her teeth grinded much to Sunset Demon's surprise and Midnight Sparkle's curiosity. " Ha! Anyone who thinks Tingle is weak is asking for their death wish!" Steam began spewing out from her nose--it was an unusual sight--like she was about to explode and her temper only continued to grow. " I'll make you regret mocking me!"

" What are you doing?" Sunset Demon asked.

" This is Tingle's angry face!"

" Didn't think you had in you."

" You angered Tingle and now you must pay!" Pinkie Pie shouted. " Come on! I'll teach you a lesson you won't soon forget!"

Sunset Demon turned her face away from Pinkie and began giggling to herself though she tried really hard not to, but then she turned back and burst into a hysterical bout of laughter that made her cry tears of darkness that burned the ground upon impact. Her laughter would continue on for several minutes, much to the surprise of Midnight Sparkle, but eventually stopped upon which Pinkie calmed down and released her grip on the she-demon before dropping to her knees. Sunset Demon quickly checked her hand to make sure it wasn't broken or anything before reaching down, grabbing Pinkie's outfit, and lifting her up.

" That worked out better than I had hoped."

" You wanted Tingle to get mad?"

Sunset Demon nodded. " Someone very close to me learned that someone just like you was capable of losing their patience were they to be mocked and would unleash their anger in a manner that makes it funny because they couldn't be serious about it. I knew that manipulating your emotions by threatening your life would result in you losing your temper, but you certainly gave me a surprise when you snatched my hand like that. Your little display just now was absolutely hilarious."

" Did Tingle pass your test?"

" It looks like you did." Midnight Sparkle answered.

" Yippee! Now Tingle will sell you one of her maps!"

" We did promise and so we shall."

Pinkie Pie then took out a selection of maps and dropped them on the ground. " Tingle has designed many maps as a means of helping out my father. Each one is intricately detailed so that you can find your way to any location you desire. So far, all of my maps have been a hit with customers with the exception of this one." She picked up a map that appeared to be covered in some dirt though she quickly rubbed it off before presenting it. " I don't know why no one wants it but if I were to make a guess, it would be because they were afraid of venturing to a place where the dead roam freely."

" Did you say 'the dead'?"

Pinkie Pie nodded. " Only the craziest of people would go there."

" Or someone dressed in green would."

" Mrs. Fairy might go there because she did look like she was ready for battle."

" Then we shall take that one."

" Forty rupees."

" Done."

After warping back to Clock Town from Great Bay, I immediately ran outside into Termina Field by taking the southern exit--the guard standing there didn't stop this time because of me being in an adult-shaped body as opposed to my regular and Deku Scrub bodies--and started cutting down clumps of grass in my bid to earn some rupees. I had no idea how many I needed because of not knowing what it was Iron Will was selling that Adagio said I would need but I wanted to make sure I had enough and not have to go back out to the field to collect some more in case I was short by a few.

It turned out that cut grass did not grow back unless I were to leave the area and come back again so I had to enter and exit Clock Town in rapid fashion several times over for the grass to reappear so I could use my sword to cut it down for rupees. I even defeated a large assortment of Chu-Chus that came too close earning additional rupees though my heart didn't enjoy it because they weren't really bothering me. To be honest, the process would have gone by a lot quicker had I just found some random treasure chest and collected whatever rupee rewards had been stashed within it.

If there was one good thing about doing all of this, it was the fact that I could collect more rupees now than I could before. If I hadn't deposited 200 rupees at the bank before setting off for Snowhead, I'd still be carrying around the basic wallet instead of the "Adult's Wallet" I received from Fleur Dis Lee as part of her special promotion. I still couldn't believe that she wanted me to deposit a grand total of 5,000 rupees in order to get another prize she has in addition to the wallet. You'd have to be downright insane to want to deposit that much without ever taking it back out unless you had a really good reason.

At the pace I was going, I'd need to go through several three day cycles dedicated only to earning rupees before I could reach that number. I guessed it was my fault for not being more diligent about it otherwise the amount would have been a lot less than what it actually was.

By the time I was finished with what amounted to "rupee grinding", I had amassed a total of about 120 rupees. I hoped that would be enough to purchase whatever Iron Will would be selling though part of me still had trouble trusting him all because his business was questionable. I recalled what happened when I visited his shop during an earlier cycle of time and learned how what he sold were goods stolen from other people. I grew mad at him because he had taken advantage of the unfortunate though now that I took Adagio's words into careful consideration, I realized that he was merely a middle-man, one who sold things without caring where it came from.

Still, why have your shop open late at night? Surely that would be enough to convince the town militia that something was strange about the whole premise, but I supposed they had their own problems what with dealing with the moon looming overhead and a town that was on edge because of said moon.

Once I was satisfied with the amount of rupees I had collected, I grabbed my face, took off the Zora Mask, and flipped back my hair--I didn't want to deal with Iron Will as a Zora as I would have looked completely out of place--before taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt. I took a few moments to remember how the Song of Double Time was supposed to work before playing it and desiring to move time forward until it was around 10:00pm that night. The magic of the song then swirled about me and I felt like throwing up because of how strange I felt but just like that, nightfall had come.

Night of the Final Day - 8 Hours Remain.

While I didn't want to skip several hours just because of wanting to visit one shop, time was once again not on my side. I felt saddened knowing that my hard work throughout the past three days would be destroyed upon resetting time but it was something I had to accept. At least I had the information of all my accomplishments recorded in the notebook I had received from Sonata when she changed me back to normal so I didn't have to worry very much--the pain was still pretty real though.

Running back into town and to the west side, I made my way over to the Curiosity Shop, opened the door, and went inside where I became surrounded by the knick-knaks that were scattered all about. If there was one thing I didn't want to see again more than Iron Will, it was his junk though in his eyes it was treasure that could be sold off to make a profit.

Standing behind the counter was Iron Will himself yet it was the strange bag on the counter that piqued my interest. " Come in!" He waved his hand to signal that he wanted me to come closer so I walked forward until I stood across the counter. " You picked a weird night to come here what with the moon falling and all, but it's none of my business to tell you how you live your life. Now, do you happen to have something you'd be willing to sell to me? I will pay you a lot of money, I kid you not."

I knew I was interested in the bag but my brain was interested in something else. " Do you happen to be selling a mask?"

Iron Will was taken aback. " A mask!? I was plannin' on selling it tonight but something else came up instead, I kid you not. Anyway, let me ask you again. Do you happen to have something you'd be willing to sell to me? It doesn't matter what it is so long as you are willing." I shrugged my shoulders in response causing him to frown though he quickly changed his tune when he looked over at the bag that was next to him. " Well, perhaps the opposite is true and you want to buy something from me."

" What is it?"

" I'm doin' a special sale. Come check it out!"

" Okay..."

" Tonight's special bargain was stolen from the Old Lady who resides in the Bomb Shop further up the path." Iron Will said. " I did not steal this bargain from her, I kid you not, but rather it was the work of a greedy thief who thought she could swindle me. She sold it to me and demanded a ridiculous amount of money in the process but I wasn't about to let her order me around so I forced her to accept the amount I would take."

" What did she want for it?"

" 150 rupees."

" Seriously!?"

Iron Will nodded. " No way was I going to pay her that much so I dropped it down to 50 rupees, I kid you not." Iron Will answered. " She threatened me all because I was dealing with stolen goods but I am just a middleman doing his business. I don't care where the items come from so long as they can be sold. Sometimes, I wish that I didn't have to deal with her so much given how vexing she can be, but she does come by often and delivers."

" Am I to assume that this is a Bomb Bag?"

" Yes."

" Thing is, I already have one." I said as I pointed to the Bomb Bag on my belt.

" What you have there is the smallest sized bag and judging from your face, you wish that you could have more bombs, right?" Iron Will asked. The expression on his face by that point was really creepy and I had every mind to walk out on him, but I needed to give him a chance so I nodded. He clapped his hands together, reached over and grabbed the bag, and pulled it closer to me. " This Bomb Bag holds more bombs than that one of yours does so if you happen to enjoy tossing them about then this is for you, I kid you not. Given what's going on outside, I'd rather take care of this quickly just in case something weird happens."

I stared at the Bomb Bag in his hand. It had a silver rim around the top while my current one had a bronze rim. While I hadn't used bombs all that much since leaving Snowhead, I didn't want to have to rely on using the Blast Mask since that inflicted damage to me. " Okay, you've gotten me interested in your item." I said. " But, I will only pay you within the actual price that is sold over at the Bomb Shop. I've no intentional of being cheated out of a potential item I need."

Iron Will smiled. " Ah, you're a true business woman. Very well. I shall sell you this Larger Bomb Bag for 100 rupees. They sell it over at the Bomb Shop usually for 90 rupees but I am sure that will be okay with you."

" I'll take it."

" Huh? You will?"

I nodded. " Given what's going on outside right now, I doubt that any of us are going to live to see the next sunrise, so I might as well buy it while I can and use it to my heart's content before everything comes to an end."

" Works for me!" Iron Will said. I handed over the 100 rupees--I am so glad that I grinded outside in Termina Field--and he in turn handed over the Bomb Bag. " You can hold up to thirty bombs in that bag as opposed to the twenty your old one could hold. Why don't you leave that old one on the counter? I'm sure someone else will come in here looking to buy one and I can sell it to them for a slightly less amount." While his morals were questionable, he did have a good point about my old Bomb Bag no longer being needed on my person. I placed it on the counter and he took it aside. " By the way, you can buy an even larger Bomb Bag somewhere out there, I kid you not."

" Do you know where?"

Iron Will shrugged his shoulders. " All I know is that one of those Business Scrubs sells one though since they all look the same, it's next to impossible to figure out which one of them has it, I kid you not. If I were to take a random guess, I'd say the one who operates in the mountains would be your best bet."

Thanking him for everything, I walked out of the Curiosity Shop and looked down at my new Bomb Bag. Sure, it was stolen goods given that the Bomb Shop was supposed to have been selling it, but since I purchased it rather than some shady person, I had essentially mitigated the robbery that occurred earlier. Iron Will's regular customer that he mentioned earlier was no doubt Lightning Dust, the prancing woman who robbed the Old Lady when she walked through North Clock Town--though I prevented it during a previous cycle--yet it appeared that not stopping her resulted in Iron Will selling the Bomb Bag.

I needed to stop the robbery for him to sell that mask but I also needed 500 rupees and my current wallet wasn't enough. I needed to find out where I could get my hands on the largest wallet available in Termina. Speaking of money, I walked back into South Clock Town to deposit the remaining rupees at the bank otherwise they would be lost upon resetting time--I really needed to deposit more money there to get that other reward--and upon finishing my business, I took out the Ocarina of Time, played the Song of Time, and began to get pulled back through time's flow while loose objects flung themselves from my body.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain.

The instant I regained my composure, I looked up at the moon and saw that it was back at its highest point, indicating that time had once again started over. My heart wept because my hard work in Great Bay had now gone back to how it was before I arrived, yet my brain told me to continue. Since I planned on visiting the two cursed houses because Adagio said it would give me a mask and more wealth, having extra time would prove beneficial so I played the Inverted Song of Time to slow down everything around me--I was really glad that I learned about that secret from the scarecrow.

" That worked out better than I thought."

" You handled Iron Will much better compared to what you did before." Twilight said. " Though why did you agree to pay the 100 rupees? The Bomb Bag was only 90 rupees and was stolen goods so essentially, you robbed yourself a little bit."

" Ten rupees wasn't really much of a difference."

" So it wasn't the principle of the thing then for you?"

I shook my head. " It was my own way of making it up to Iron Will after the way I treated him last time. Sure, his business is questionable at best and borders on being downright illegal but he only acts as a middleman and doesn't know where the items he gets come from. At least he chewed out Lightning Dust for trying to scam him when she wanted a ridiculous amount for the bag. To be honest, I was hoping he was going to sell me that mask."

" That wasn't going to happen."

" How do you figure that?"

" Iron Will had that mask for sale because you prevented Lightning Dust from robbing the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop." Twilight answered. " Because he wasn't able to sell you a stolen Bomb Bag, he had to go with the next best thing, that being the mask. Besides, even if he was selling that mask instead, you wouldn't have been able to afford it because the price for it was far more than what can be placed in your wallet."

Princess Twilight was once again correct. My wallet at the time could only hold 99 rupees--children's wallets were limited--while the mask itself was worth 500 rupees. There was no way Iron Will was going to sell it for any less than that, and it meant I needed to upgrade my current wallet to the largest size possible. I had an idea as to where I could get one thanks to Adagio mentioning it. I had to go to those cursed houses in both Woodfall and Great Bay. I had no idea which one would give me a mask or great wealth so that meant going to both and finding a way to break both curses within a limited amount of time, again according to what Adagio said.

" Where should we go next?"

" You have plenty of options."

" Such as?"

" Let me list them off for you." Twilight answered. " You could go to the Town Shooting Gallery to get a bigger quiver, the Milk Bar to help out Miss Pommel with that sound check though it involves going there at night, checking out those cursed houses, trying some other games available around town, leave town and deal with the Gorman Sisters, or go and pay a visit to the mayor's residence."

" What was that last one?"

" Visiting the mayor."

I rubbed the bridge of my nose. " Twilight... We went there early on this journey and we couldn't do anything to stop Mayor Mare and those other people from arguing over whether they should flee town or host the Carnival of Time. I don't think going back there to see it all again will give us a better incentive to figure it out."

Princess Twilight's face lit up. " I wasn't talking about that."

" Oh? Then what?"

" There was another door in Mayor Mare's office we never entered so why not go there?"

Of all the choices Princess Twilight provided, she would insist on going to the one place where authority resided. Heh... That was just like of Her Highness to want to go somewhere like that. While I wanted to go to one of the other places, information was also something I needed so that I could better prepare myself for the coming trials. Besides, it probably wouldn't be a long conversation anyway as I was certain that Mayor Mare's husband--we knew she had one in this world because it had been brought to our attention several times--had better things to do than to speak to a child who pranced about in green cloth.

It took me a few moments to remember the exact location of the mayor's residence--it had been a very long time since I was last there--and upon recalling where to go, I decided to simply walk over there instead of run. After all, I could slow down time to give me more freedom to get things done rather than be on a strict time limit. I could also get a better look at all the different shops I had often ignored because of not knowing more about them.

Heading into East Clock Town by walking down to the southern entrance and heading left, I looked at the different shops and concluded that this part of town was akin to an entertainment district what with how many game shops there were. Aside from the Town Shooting Gallery, indicated by a large Octorok motif above the door, other shops included "Honey and Darling's Shop", that featured a new challenge every day, a "Treasure Chest Shop" that was in the shape of a chest, the "Stock Pot Inn" where visitors could spend the night before moving on to their next destination, and the mayor's residence.

The mayor's residence was located at the north end of East Clock Town so I walked along the path, avoiding one of the Bombers, who seemed to be acting weird around me for some reason like he had something he wanted to say. I thought about talking to him but chose not to in case he thought me weird because I wasn't part of their group. Leaving him to deal with his own problems, I entered the mayor's residence and came face to face with a woman who seemed very colorful in terms of her mannerisms. If I didn't know any better, I could swear that she was trying to flirt with me.

I asked her who resided in the room to the right--her left--of her desk since I already knew who resided in the other room. She told me that this other room was Monsieur Aroma's office and that he was currently busy dealing with both business regarding the carnival and a personal crisis. I could go inside and speak to him though the woman suggested that I might not get a chance since Monsieur Aroma was expecting another person to come by later.

Since I only needed to speak to him for a couple of minutes anyway, I could easily squeeze myself in-between his other contacts without disrupting his schedule. Walking over to the door, I was about to reach for the doorknob and open it when Princess Twilight began bopping me on the head.

" Why don't we peek through the keyhole first, Sunset?"

" Good idea. I don't want to go in there without knowing who could be on the other side."

" Just be sure that woman over there doesn't view it as weird."

" To be honest, she really creeps me out." I said. Looking through the keyhole, I could barely make out Miss Pommel sitting on a chair in one corner of the room, but it was the fairly large man sitting in the next seat who proved very surprising. " Is that Monsieur Aroma!? He's huge!"

Princess Twilight looked through the keyhole to see for herself. " No wonder you said that, Sunset. That's Troubleshoes!"

" Who?"

" I've not met him in person but Applejack--the pony version--told me about him when she came back from Appleloosa." Twilight answered. " He's a pony who had been cursed with bad luck because he believed his cutie mark was wrong--it was in the shape of a horseshoe--and caused destruction every time there was a rodeo over in Appleloosa. He was mistreated and was viewed as a menace but thanks to the Cutie Mark Crusaders, he was able to embrace the special talent his cutie mark represented, being a clown who made other ponies happy with his antics."

" And there he is as the husband to the mayor."

" This world continues to be full of surprises."

" Shall we go in?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes."

Opening the door, I walked inside only for both Troubleshoes and Miss Pommel to look at me with cold expressions at first but quickly smiled before they continued talking with each other--I couldn't understand what they were talking about but it looked serious given how Troubleshoes constantly lowered his head in disappointment. I thought about interrupting them but chose not to in case either of them took offence. They would continue with their conversation for few more minutes before Miss Pommel began reading a magazine she had been holding in her hand when I first came in while Troubleshoes turned his attention towards me.

He looked me over a couple of times, making me feel slightly uneasy, before he began talking. " It's not everyday that a child comes in here to speak with me directly on their own without an adult supervising them. Are you here on a field trip?" I tried shaking my head to indicate no yet Troubleshoes ignored me an kept talking. " This is my office though it doesn't get as many visitors as my wife does. Unless you are here to talk about potential carnival performances, then please go to the front desk and make an appointment."

I shook my head. " I'm not here for an appointment."

" Really? Well that's a relief."

" I came here looking for information."

Troubleshoes ignored my words again before lurching closer to me making me feel uneasy. " Could it be... Are you the expert person-finder I hired? Hmmm... You're a lot younger than what I was expecting but I suppose beggars can't be choosers."

Did he just call me a "person-finder"? I had no idea what Troubleshoes was talking about but it sounded like he was confusing me with someone else. It was beginning to appear that my desire for information was being thrown under the bus and I was being dragged into something that had nothing to do with me. He continued looking at me as though he were expecting me to confirm that his suspicion was correct yet I couldn't nod as I wasn't the one he was waiting for. How could anyone confuse me, a person armed with a sword and shield, for some kind of detective?

I had to tell him straight. " Sorry, but you've mistaken me for someone else."

Once again, he ignored what I had to say. " Yes, you are indeed the one I hired. I won't question why it took you so long to get here but at least you made it. The others I hired all failed to turn up anything but perhaps you will be able to succeed where they have failed." He leaned back on his chair and reached out for the bookshelf behind him before picking up a mask that had been on the shelf--I never noticed it being there until now--and placing it on his lap. " You definitely have the characteristics I've been searching for, a face of a true professional. I know I'm right about this because you have that desire burning on your face."

" Um..." I said, trying to come up with an excuse. I needed that mask but how could I get it without agreeing to his request? That's when I realized that I had to go along with this ridiculous notion of me being a "person-finder". Knowing there was no other choice--the mask was top priority--I sighed and resigned myself to this ridiculous fate. " Yes, I'm the one you've been waiting for though my appearance can be misleading to some." I felt utterly humiliated after saying all of that. " What do you need from me?"

" The person I want you to locate is my son, Kafei." Troubleshoes said. " He has been missing for about a month now and all attempts at finding him have failed. The weird thing is that he was supposed to be getting married one the day after the Carnival of Time to the daughter of the Stock Pot Inn's owner, yet he just vanishes into thin air leaving his fiancé without a groom and her family on my case as they think he has stood her up."

" Sorry to hear that."

Troubleshoes rubbed the bridge of his nose. " I didn't mean to take my aggression out on you."

" Who is Kafei?"

Troubleshoes was shocked. " You know him, my son, Kafei, don't you?" I shook my head and he was shocked again. " You don't? Really? I was to assume that everyone knew about him given that he is the son of the mayor of Clock Town. Well, I suppose it doesn't really matter considering you're here and all. As I mentioned already, my son disappeared about a month ago and it's gotten me worried to no end. Just look at me!"

I looked at him and didn't see anything wrong. " You look fine."

" I most certainly don't!"

" If you say so."

" I can't get food down my throat and I've lost five pounds though I'm sure it's more." Troubleshoes said. " If this keeps up I'm likely to waste away to nothing. Anyway, this is where you come in. I want you to find out what has happened to Kafei."

" Is that it?"

Troubleshoes shook his head. " I want to you to present me with any information about his whereabouts. I don't care what it is so long as it is from him. Before you leave, I want you to take this mask. It's in the shape of my son's head hence why I call it Kafei's Mask. You need to wear this mask in front of as many people in Clock Town as possible to learn all you can about where Kafei could be. I doubt everyone will be willing to talk but I am hoping they will be considerate and speak up."

He handed over the mask and I took a closer look at it. It had blue coloured hair with a rather unusual hair style--it looked really stupid in my honest opinion yet I kept quiet so as to not offend Troubleshoes--yet the face itself was simply a pale complexion with three dots--one for the mouth and two for the eyes--leaving me to think that this wasn't the best interpretation of this missing character. Despite my hesitation towards getting involved to begin with, I had acquired another mask to add to my collection, and moving one step closer to getting the ultimate mask even though I had doubts over it.

Promising Troubleshoes that I would do a good job, I was about to turn around and leave when the door to his office suddenly swung open, and standing there in the doorway was none other than Big Macintosh, who seemed very annoyed given his expression. His attire told me that he was some kind of big shot and reminded me of what he wore when I encountered him during my previous journey. Knowing that things were about to become very testy, I retreated to the corner, choosing to stick around to see how things would pan out as it looked like he was going to have some choice words for Troubleshoes.

" Monsieur Aroma! I am Gorman!" Big Macintosh said boldly. " Your receptionist allowed me to enter your office when I told her that I had an appointment with you though I don't see why I had to wait this long just to get an audience with you."

" My apologies for the delay, Gorman, but I've been getting swamped with so much lately."

" You're a busy man much like your wife."

" If only that were true."

" What do you mean?"

" My wife has been stuck in that meeting next door ever since we opened this morning." Troubleshoes answered. " This is the third day in a row that the representatives of the Carnival Committee and the Town Militia have been arguing with each other, and my wife just can't seem to figure out a way to end their bickering. If only she could find some inspiration then she could get them to give it a rest. Something like say, a couple getting married for example."

" Ahem... Well... In any case, it has been some time now."

" Yes, it has. Now, why did you want to see me?"

Big Macintosh walked towards Troubleshoes stopping mere steps from his chair. " I wanted to say thank you for allowing my troupe to perform at this year's Carnival of Time. I was also hoping to go over some last minute details regarding our opening act."

" Oh dear... Gorman, I'm afraid there has been a change of plans."

" Really? Granted, the opening act by my troupe was created at the last minute, but I suppose we could rely on a classic performance..."

" It involves the performance..."

Big Macintosh looked confused. " I don't quite follow."

" They've canceled. In fact, they canceled when the mayor's residence opened for business."

Big Macintosh began glowing bright red, his teeth were clenching, and looked like he was about to explode. " What!? Are you being serious, Monsieur Aroma!? Please tell me this is nothing but a prank in an attempt to test my patience." Troubleshoes shook his head slowly and Big Macintosh was completely beside himself. " Why has the carnival been cancelled without warning?"

Troubleshoes breathed heavily. " Let me explain things. The Town Militia believe that we should flee Clock Town before the moon above us crashes into town and destroys everything in its destructive path. From there it goes into a lot of detail that would take far too long for me to explain it so I'll give you a basic summary. The performance this year has been canceled and will not be happening."

" No... It can't be true."

" It is."

Big Macintosh slammed both fists onto Troubleshoes' desk, startling everyone in the room. " This is an outrage! Why would they cancel the carnival all because of what those idiot soldiers say about the moon!? Monsieur Aroma... You must be joking! I've come all this way with my troupe to perform and now I have to tell them that they aren't going to be doing anything because it's been canceled!?"

" I am not joking."

" GAH! How could this have happened!?"

" That's enough, Gorman." Troubleshoes said. " The decision has been made and will stand whether you like it or not. There will always be next year provided that we all live to make it given what's falling from on high. I'd love to continue with this conversation but I have more important things to take care of."

When Troubleshoes said that, I immediately bolted for the door just in case Big Macintosh was about to lose it even further. When I closed the door and was back in the hallway of the mayor's residence, a loud scream came from the other side, causing the receptionist to run over to see what happened. I knew Big Macintosh could lose his temper given that he had to deal with trouble that both Applejack and Apple Bloom created as a result of their actions, but I never guessed he would explode in such a fierce manner. It was like I had watched a completely different person in there as opposed to who lived at Sweet Apple Acres.

I did have sympathy for him because of his situation. I'd have done something similar if someone had told me that my troupe couldn't perform because the show had been canceled for reasons they didn't understand. Who knew what he was going to say to them but I hoped he wouldn't do something and regret it later on. Troubleshoes didn't mean to make him upset and was in quite the bind since he was the bearer of bad news, yet I must admit he remained calm despite having a screaming man in his face.

Leaving the mayor's residence, I began to ponder over my next course of action and decided to get a larger quiver. Since I had run out of arrows on many occasions due to the heavy reliance I had with my bow, getting a larger quiver was an ideal decision. I had no idea what kind of challenge I had to accomplish to acquire it but I wasn't going to rest until it was done even it meant spending a small fortune in rupees. Before entering the Town Shooting Gallery, I quickly ran outside the eastern gate--the guard once again stopped me because he needed to see my sword--and cut down clumps of grass until I had about 60 rupees.

Running back into Clock Town and turning left, I walked over to the Town Shooting Gallery, opened the door, and went inside where I came face to face with a large pool of water with a counter between me and it. I had never seen anything like this before, even at official archery tournaments, but perhaps this was common practice in Termina? I couldn't see anything lurking about below the surface yet there was some kind of presence that made me feel really uneasy.

" Welcome to Clock Town's famous Shooting Gallery!" I almost jumped out of my boots when the owner of the place suddenly called out but I refrained from doing so and turned to face him only to see he wasn't anyone I knew. " It's not often a child comes in here to play but as long as you've got rupees, it doesn't really matter how young you are. I can tell that you have a burning passion in your eyes, one dedicated to shooting targets, am I right?"

" I have been using a bow an awful lot, yes." I answered.

" Right! Then this here is the game for you."

" How do I play?"

" First, you need to pay 20 rupees for one game." The man answered. I handed over some rupees and watched him pocket them. " Now then. Octoroks are going to pop out of the water and hitting them is how you win, but you need to hit red ones to score points as hitting blue ones will take away time. You'll have roughly fifty seconds to hit as many as you can and you'll have unlimited arrows."

" Sounds simple enough."

The man laughed. " Perhaps but the Octorok pop up in different formations and don't stick around for very long. You've got to be quick if you want those points. Oh, and don't worry about fearing you'll be attacked by them as that won't happen. These Octorok have been trained by me personally to never attack so there's no need to freak out or anything. If you can score 39 points or more then I'll give you something nice, and if you manage to get a perfect score, I'll throw in an additional prize. Judging from your appearance, I'd say getting the perfect score might be out of your reach."

I frowned in response but allowed it to slide. " Can I play now?"

" By all means."

I walked up to the counter, took out the Hero's Bow, and nocked an arrow. " Ready."

" The game begins when the whistle blows."

Raising my bow and assuming a stance, I waited for the whistle to sound off--it was pretty nerve-wracking--and when it did, the first set of Octoroks popped out of the water, and my first reaction was to defend myself as I though they were going to shoot rocks at me from their mouths. Instead, they simply floated there on the surface, waiting for me to shoot them down with arrows. I quickly recovered and shot each one before any could drop back down below the surface. Another three appeared with one being blue in colour compared with the other two who were red. Recalling what the man said, blue was bad so I only picked off the red ones.

This sequence would get more difficult as the game progressed with some Octoroks appearing behind others, preventing me from hitting unless I took out the ones in front first, and even then that involved avoiding the blue Octoroks. Five then suddenly popped up in a plus-sign formation with all of them being red with the exception of a single blue on the far right so I avoided it and shot arrows though I couldn't get to all of them in time. I was fortunate in that I had an unlimited amount of arrows otherwise my shots would had to have been perfect every time, something I still had problems with.

It also became apparent that the further the mini-game progressed, the more Octoroks would come out with each formation. One group in particular that popped out of the water consisted of seven Octoroks with only one of them red and the rest blue. This one red happened to be in the top left corner so I struggled in shooting it down. I fired a dozen arrows in rapid fashion with most missing my target and breaking into pieces upon contact with the back wall. I accidentally hit one of the blue ones which meant time was taken away and when I finally hit the red one, the rest went back down only for seven more to appear.

Perhaps I should have practiced more so as to be able to shoot targets quickly instead of wasting seconds trying to come up with a strategy. This next group had blue Octoroks on each corner with the three in the middle being red, an easier formation so I managed to shoot them all, yet when the next group appeared, they had a much different formation. Now the red ones were in a diagonal line from top right to bottom left with the blue ones occupying every other possible space aside from the bottom right. Now I was beginning to understand why the man said I wouldn't be able to get a perfect score. They were popping up way too fast for me to shoot them with arrows.

After what felt like an agonizing fifty seconds, one more formation popped up of nine Octoroks and aside from the blue one in the middle, the other eight were red--most likely to give me a last-ditch effort to earn enough points--so I began shooting arrows at them only for a whistle to echo about. I looked at what Octoroks remained in the water and I felt dejected as there were four left that sank back down below the surface. (1.)

" That was certainly an interesting performance." The man said. " I've never seen anyone shoot arrows the way you do."

" Guess I still need some practice."

" Not many can fire arrows at such a rapid pace."

" Really?"

The man nodded. " It takes either someone whose absolutely crazy or has impeccable skill to be able to do that. I see you as being a mixture of the two but don't see my words as an insult but rather as a form of constructive criticism. Just give me a moment to tally up your score." He began writing something down on some paper he had next to him and I began to feel nervous wondering if I had succeeded or failed because of my questionable skill. " Now would you look at that? You managed to score forty points. To be honest, it looked like you were going to score even less but guess I was wrong."

I was just as surprised as he was. " I actually did it!?"

" Yep."

" Must have been luck."

" Whatever it was, it served you pretty well. Not bad for your first attempt at this game." The man said. I walked over to the counter after putting my bow away and he reached up for a shelf before taking down what appeared to be a large quiver. " I did say I'd give you a prize for scoring 39 points or more so here it is. This here Large Quiver can hold more arrows in it than your current one does. It can hold forty arrows as opposed to thirty and it has this silver rim on it that looks so much nice than that bronze one your current one has. Let me take that old quiver off your hands and in return you get a better one."

The man handed over the Large Quiver after I gave him my old one in exchange, and I couldn't believe that I succeeded in completing that challenge. Sure, I didn't get a perfect score but then it wasn't my intention to get a perfect, but at least having this new quiver around meant not having to worry about running out of arrows especially during a tough situation. It would be nice if I could get my hands on an even bigger quiver but I was satisfied with this one.

Placing the quiver on my back by slinging the strap over me, I turned and was about to leave the Town Shooting Gallery when the man suddenly coughed to grab my attention. I thought he was going to make me pay some kind of hefty fine for doing something wrong so when I turned around to look at him, he was smiling from ear to ear, and I was confused by his choice of mannerisms.

" Is something wrong?"

" I forgot to promote the other gallery via advertisement."

Did he just say "other gallery"!? I thought there was only one shooting gallery in Termina, not two. " There's another gallery?"

The man nodded. " It's not as well known as this one because of where it is, but the Swamp Shooting Gallery has its own unique challenge that can be just as difficult as the one I have around here. You can find the place on the way to the Southern Swamp yet you need to go off the beaten path if you want to find it. The guy who runs it happens to be a friend of mine though his thick accent does make it difficult for people to understand him. Oh, and if you happen to be a fishing fanatic, there's a fishing pond next to the gallery though I don't know what kind of fish they have in there."

Thanking him for the additional information, I walked out of the Town Shooting Gallery, and into the street where I immediately stopped so that I could think about my next course of action. I had a lot of different things I could do before resetting time but I had no idea what order I should tackle them in. Staying in town would allow me to help Miss Pommel with that sound check she mentioned but then that would deny me a chance to check out those cursed houses in Woodfall and Great Bay respectively. Combined with now having to look for someone in town whom I've never seen before, I was starting to get overwhelmed again.

I had about six different tasks to take off and I couldn't decide on what to do. While this wasn't as stressful as say fighting against a powerful monster, it was still pretty stressful and one that could cause me to suffer from a mental breakdown. Gah! Which task should I handle first?

(1.) I chose to have Sunset face my own custom formations, different from what the actual mini-game does.

Chapter 48: Cursed Houses

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
March 13, 2017
Chapter 48: Cursed Houses.

If there was one thing I could be happy about regarding having so many different tasks, it would be that none of them related to having to overcome incredible odds and my life being on the line--those cursed houses might have some challenge to them given the word "curse" was being used. Instead, the only real challenge involved doing them without screwing any up and helping out whomever was in need of assistance. Still, having roughly six different tasks piled onto me wasn't my idea of getting new masks and better versions of equipment I was already carrying, but it seemed I didn't have much of a choice if I wanted them.

Multi-tasking was something I could do fairly well though not without mistakes. I am reminded of what happened when I tried doing too much all at once before the holiday season as a means of showing how much friendship had changed my life. Okay, in my defence at the time, I believed I could handle everything regarding the fundraiser Rainbow Dash wanted so Canterlot High could get new uniforms to be used for the Friendship Games--we never used them in the end. It all sounded so simple, I wanted to help my friends with each of their appointed tasks that focused on the fundraiser, and I ended up causing more harm than good.

Had Princess Twilight not given me the encouragement I needed to sort everything out, the fundraiser would have been an absolute disaster and I'd have believed myself to be incapable of being in charge of anything. What happened to me back then is similar to what I was going through right now, except that I was helping complete strangers despite some resembling those I've come to know from back home, and also helping myself as I would benefit the most by acquiring items aimed at bringing about a peaceful solution to what was falling down from on high.

At that moment, I realized that I was starting to daydream again, and that meant an eventual bopping on the head by Her Highness to snap me out of it. Knowing that was most likely to happen, I walked down the path into South Clock Town, and sat down on a nearby bench before looking up at a clock that was hanging on the wall. Despite how bizarre the clock looked--it reminded me of a sundial--it was easy to figure out what time it was--it had just gone past 8:00am--so I knew I could sit down for a while and plan my next move.

Staying in town would allow me to begin searching for that person Troubleshoes wants me to find and I could also help out Miss Pommel at the Milk Bar now that I could change between four different forms, but then the latter could only be done at night and the former heralded no leads unless I were to use Kafei's Mask and ask around in hopes someone would have something. While I had an infinite number of three day cycles, I didn't want to appear to be wasting them. Then again, there was the Song of Double Time I could use to speed things up but again I would be wasting time by skipping it entirely.

Outside of town were those cursed houses and I knew those would be time consuming, but what if I were to take too long and end up missing something important that would happen back here? Technically, I needed to thwart Lightning Dust again so that I could acquire that one expensive mask Iron Will has at his shop so there was an example right there. I also needed to pay the Gorman Sisters a visit and get the mask they had to gain access to the final region of Termina.

And there were two more things I needed to do that Princess Twilight didn't think of. I could gather up those five frogs--it would mean defeating both Geckos and Goht to bring forth spring in Snowhead--and have them perform their song, and I needed to make my sword the strongest it could be--again that required defeating Goht. The more I thought about what I was going to do, the more I was feeling miserable about it. My heart wanted all of this to be done within the span of a single three day cycle yet my brain knew it would take two or even three cycles since it was impossible for me to be in so many places at once.

" Is something bothering you, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" I just can't decide on what we should tackle next." I answered.

Princess Twilight floated over and landed on my shoulder. " I can tell that you've been wracking your brain over it since sitting down on that bench. I know we have a lot of things we can do right now to prepare for the final region but you shouldn't think about trying to handle them all at once. Overexerting yourself will only lead to stress and you clearly don't have much of that."

I frowned. " Thanks for the confidence boost, Twilight."

" What I mean is that you lose your temper relatively quickly and trying to do so much is only fueling that anger deep inside."

" Then what should I do?"

" Focus on one task at a time." Twilight answered. " Focus on what you deem is the most important and stick with it until it's done, and then you can move onto the next one and repeat the process until you've accomplished everything you wanted to do."

" I want to get everything done in one cycle and not waste time."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " Sorry, Sunset, but doing it like that will only end up hurting you. It may sound cynical coming from me but you need to take advantage of the fact that we have an infinite number of times to relive the same three days over and over, and not worry about wasting time since we practically have forever. We were given this ability to use to save the people of this world and sometimes that involves giving off the impression that we're not using what we have effectively. Does that make any sense?"

I shook my head. " Not at all."

Princess Twilight sighed. " Okay, think about it like this. These tasks you have on your plate are mostly simple in execution despite not knowing the entirety of what it is you need to do to solve them. Wanting to take care of all of them during one cycle is foolish thinking and you know it. You need to dedicate two or maybe even three cycles if you want to get them all done and save yourself from losing both your sanity and health. In the end, you have to make the decision, Sunset, and all I can do is provide advice."

Her Highness was once again correct. I was viewing our ability to relive the same three days as a form of magic and believed that abusing such power would be the same as abusing magic--something I had committed plenty of times during my childhood. I should be thinking of our ability as a blessing designed to help those in need even when my efforts would end up being forgotten due to them forgetting as their memories are erased from their minds upon resetting time.

It was then I recalled what Princess Zelda said when I had that vision of her in my own memories when I first got the Ocarina of Time back--I'm surprised that I still remember that despite thinking about it now after so long--from Starlight Glimmer. She told me that so long as the Goddess of Time could hear my call, she would allow me to relive the same three days over and over until I had figured out a means to prevent destruction from occurring. Why was it that it took Her Highness to figure this kind of thing out while I kept on giving myself nothing but stress?

Perhaps she should have been the one destined to be the hero and me be her fairy partner? I was doing all of the grunt work yet she was the one figuring things out--I had my share of successes in this regard--making her a much better candidate, but fate had chosen me to be the one instead. Despite Princess Twilight's own assurance that I was the better candidate and not her, my heart still felt otherwise. And yet, the Triforce of Courage was still inside of my body, and was a reminder that I had been chosen by destiny to carry a burden no one should ever have to bear.

" Okay... I know better than to argue with you."

" It's not so much arguing than me being honest."

" I suppose."

" What shall we tackle next?" Twilight asked. " We've gotten a mask and a larger quiver, a good start, but perhaps you might want to consider getting an even larger quiver? Or how about a bigger Bomb Bag? Maybe even a bigger wallet?"

My eyes lit up at the prospect of getting an even bigger wallet. " I'm going to go for the last thing you said."

" The bigger wallet?"

I nodded my head. " I could use more rupees to purchase items apart from that mask Iron Will will eventually sell."

" Adagio said that you need to go to those cursed houses in order to get both a mask and more wealth." Twilight said. " A shame that she didn't specify which house has what reward but I suppose this was her intention. She wants you to figure it out on your own by going to both locations and seeing what you can do. The cursed house in Great Bay is on the beach and is therefore easy to get to by playing the Song of Soaring. Getting to the other one will require some leg-work as the Owl Statues in Woodfall aren't located near it."

I recalled the strange building in the swamp whose entrance was blocked by a cobweb but never thought much of it until now. Was that one of the cursed houses Adagio mentioned through her cryptic words? It didn't look like any house I had seen but perhaps the detail could be found inside. To get there would mean either walking through the poisonous swamp or flying over it by using Deku Flowers and avoiding monsters. The other location was much easier to reach since it merely involved swimming to the beach yet I'd need to avoid the underwater monsters that plagued the ocean.

In any case, I knew where I was going to go. Getting up off the bench, I took out the Ocarina of Time, played the Song of Soaring, and desired to be taken to the Owl Statue that was located by the Oceanside Laboratory. Wings then protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around my body, and whisked me away where I found myself at my desired location roughly ten seconds later. It actually felt weird coming back to Great Bay so soon especially knowing that everything had gone back to the way it was before but I couldn't allow myself to be distracted by sentimentalities.

My first thought was to shoot Pinkie Pie down--she was floating above me-- by popping her balloon with an arrow to see if she had anything to say but chose not to as she was likely to repeat information I had heard before or would simply tell me to go over to the cursed house and find out for myself. My next though involved using the Zora Mask and swim over in spectacular fashion as Mikau but again I chose not to. The underwater monsters were easy to outswim since they consisted of just Like-Likes and Skullfish and it wasn't that far to the beach so all I'd be doing was wasting a transformation on something simple.

Jumping into the water, I began swimming though I struggled at first because of the weight of my equipment dragging me down--the one drawback of having so many items meant having to put extra effort into ensuring I didn't drown--but by swimming at a constant pace, I was able to make it to the beach where I discovered that Epona was still over by the house that Snails resided in. My assumption was that she would be back at Romani Ranch whenever time reset but perhaps she wasn't affected by it given the strong bond she had with me and was here instead.

This was actually a blessing as it meant I now knew which house was the one I needed to visit--both looked practically identical and I had no need to visit Snails since I had already helped him out during the previous cycle. Running across the beach and avoiding Leevers as they came out of the ground, I reached both houses and immediately went to check on Epona as she might have been worried about me as it had been some time since I left her by Snail's house. She whinnied happily at me and I responded in kind, tears trickling down my cheek, my head pressed up against hers, before petting her muzzle.

After whinnying to inform her that I would be checking out the other house, I began to walk over to it when a voice suddenly stopped me. " You're not planning on going in there are you?" I turned around and saw Snails standing in front of his doorway, hands on his hips and with a stern look on his face. " I was wondering who that horse belonged to seeing it suddenly showed up on my front doorstep. Not sure why you left it here but you need to be more careful. I was seriously thinking of taking it into town and seeing if I could sell it for some rupees so that I could eventually get myself a boat."

I looked at Epona and then back at him. " I didn't mean to leave my horse here but this was the only spot on the beach where she could chew on some grass and avoid the monsters that come out of the sand."

" Say no more then." Snails said. " Those blasted Leevers have been a blight for everyone who travels across the beach. Not sure where why they suddenly decided to show up now all of a sudden but I think it has something to do with the water getting warmer around here as of late."

I was going to explain that I had solved that issue but quickly remembered that everything had been reset. " You said that I shouldn't go into that house over there?"

Snails nodded. " That house has been abandoned for years ever since those golden spiders first started infesting it." His words reminded me of what Adagio said about golden creatures that plagued both locations. " Nobody dares set foot in that place because those creepy crawlies are too powerful and have the ability to curse anyone who goes inside. If you want my advice, girl, you'd go somewhere else."

" I plan on destroying those creatures."

" Really? Well, you do have that sword on your back."

" Do you doubt my skill?"

" Not at all. It's just that those spiders could end up cursing you into becoming one of them."

I gulped. " Did you say... one of them?"

Snails nodded. " That's what I said. I have a friend who wanted to go in there and claim it as a shelter because of some nonsense he was babbling about. Says the moon is going to fall in three days but he's just full of hot air if he thinks that's a true story. Not sure why he would want to spend his time in that infestation."

" Why doesn't he just stay with you?"

" Ha! With that giant wallet he had on him, he could buy his own place!"

Now I knew that I would earn more wealth by destroying the golden spiders of this particular house yet I wasn't sure as to how much time I had. I mean, I had three days before having to reset time again but what I didn't know was how long Snails' friend would be willing to wait to claim the place. There was also some other things about the cursed house that I didn't know about, such as how big it was, how many golden spiders resided within, what items were best suited to handle an infestation. Finally, since Snails said it had been abandoned for a long time, who knew when it could collapse from neglect.

I had to ask about his friend. " When do you think he'll be back?"

" He says he wants to claim the place as soon as possible."

" That would mean destroying the spiders first."

" No one is daft enough to try."

" I'll do it."

" You've got guts, girl, I'll give you that." Snails said. " I suppose there's no chance of me trying to convince not to go in there, am I right?" I nodded my head slowly and he sighed in response. " Well, don't come complaining to me that you've been cursed by those spiders, but I suppose you would be doing my friend a big favour if you get rid of them all, and he might give you that wallet of his. Good luck!" Snails then turned around, walked into his house and disappeared leaving me to ponder what he said about being cursed by the golden spiders.

" He was cheerful wasn't he?" Twilight asked.

" What do you make of this whole cursed business?"

Princess Twilight sighed. " For a long time, Sunset, I believed that curses were just superstition and that there was a logical explanation behind unusual occurrences. Ever since that one incident in Equestria where the pony versions of our friends and I were infected by Poison Joke, I take any and all curses very seriously. If Snails says these spiders are capable of cursing you, I suggest being extra cautious and leave at the first sign of something happening to your body."

I gulped again knowing that there was a huge risk involved wanting a much larger wallet. Since I needed to get my hands on it in order to purchase that one mask, I had no other choice but to go inside and hope I didn't end up changing into some kind of hideous monster--for the second time since I already did so once before. On another note, did she actually say that she was cursed by Poison Joke? Wow... I never thought anyone would be cursed by that stuff. It was one of the first lessons Princess Celestia taught me about though I wasn't what you'd call thrilled since back then I believed it was a waste of my time learning about Poison Joke.

Walking into the cursed house, I immediately got startled by the sounds of what appeared to be scratches along the walls, a sign that this place must have been crawling with the golden spiders--a nearby sign told me that this placed was called Oceanside Spider House. The noises made me want to run away and not bother getting the wallet Snails' friend had on him but I had to go through with it in order to collect the mask Iron Will had. No one ever said adventures were easy and this was especially true now.

The pathway ahead of me was blocked by a cracked wall and I quickly realized that I had no arrows, bombs, or the like due to not scrounging about in Termina Field. While I did have an alternative to the bomb issue, I hoped there were arrows further inside. Taking out the Blast Mask and placing it on my face, I walked up to the cracked wall, raised my shield and detonated it, destroying the wall and revealing a sloped path downward with a pair of golden spiders scurrying about back and forth. They looked just like those tiny spiders I encountered many times during my previous journey, except they were gold instead of white.

Since I had no arrows, I resorted to using my Hookshot instead. Aiming at each one and firing the chain, I connected both times, destroying the golden spiders, yet they left behind strange tokens that glowed in an eerie golden light that resembled skulls--they did look adorable though in that sense. Was I supposed to somehow grab them out of the air or could the Hookshot be used to pull them towards me? I decided to go with the latter option as the other one wasn't all that viable--the slope was pretty steep.

Firing the chain, it pulled each token towards me, entering my body and disappearing leaving me to wonder if I had just done the right thing. I also sensed no scratching sounds so perhaps there were no more of them within the complex or perhaps the current room. There was no telling how many lurked further inside yet they needed to be destroyed so I slid down the slope making sure I didn't tumble and soon I found myself staring at an ancient looking fence with a door on the other side. Above the door was a Hookshot plate and upon firing the chain, I pulled myself over the fence to the other side.

" Don't go through the door!"

" Why not?" I asked. " If I don't then I can't continue on."

" I can hear another one of those spiders coming from above."

I looked up and could see one hiding behind some cobwebs. " And here I am without any arrows."

" Try smashing those pots in front of you." Twilight said.

I looked down and saw several pots lined up against the wall so I smashed each one using the Hookshot--not what I would call economical--and acquired some much needed arrows from each of them. " I still have plenty of magic power." I said switching out for the Hero's Bow with Fire Arrows equipped. " I'm actually thankful that this one isn't moving otherwise I'd be wasting arrows." Firing a single arrow and destroying the golden spider--it left behind a token--I switched back to the Hookshot and fired the chain, pulling the token towards me where it entered my body like the others had done. " What are those tokens I keep on getting?"

" They aren't really tokens so much as they are spirits."

" What!?"

" These creatures are called Gold Skulltulas." Twilight said. " While they look beautiful because of their colouring, they are very deadly to the touch and are quite resilient. If you destroy one, it leaves a spirit token behind as proof that you destroyed it, so be sure to collect them. I am sensing there are still twenty-seven more left."

That number wasn't very reassuring at all but then I suspected this wasn't going to be an easy task. Walking back over to the door, I noticed that it had a spider motif--a sign of what awaited on the other side--yet it couldn't stop me from going further. Opening the door and entering the next room, I was surprised upon seeing cobwebs everywhere blocking other doors, covering large pots, dangling from the walls and so on. Then there were those scratching noises, now louder than ever, from the Gold Skulltulas, and I could even see them scurrying around all over the place.

" No wonder this place was abandoned." I said as I fired a Fire Arrow at the cobweb blocking a door to my left, burning it to ashes. " This place is practically an infestation for those creatures."

" We need to search everywhere and everything to find them all."

" Will you inform me as to how many I have?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Of course. Remember, you'll know that there are no more spiders in a room if you don't hear the scratching noises. In fact, I can see one right now scurrying up and down that wall over there and using that ornament as a hiding place."

I looked to see what Her Highness was on about and sure enough, there was a Gold Skulltula moving up and down on the wall. A well-timed Hookshot strike following by another one gave me a fourth token though I knew I had a long way to go. The sound of another one could then be heard above me so I looked up and saw it crawling along a support beam. Again, two shots were all it took, one to destroy the spider and one to acquire its proof, giving me five. From there, I walked across the room before coming upon some barrels that looked suspicious--one was covered with cobwebs telling me that it was suspicious.

Firing another Fire Arrow and melting the cobweb, I walked over to the pot and tried to see if I could tip it over--it was stuck firmly in place--or break it--it was too big--so that left me with only one option. I hadn't rolled into much since starting this journey yet it appeared it was going to be a requirement around here. I rolled into the pot and a Gold Skulltula jumped out surprising me in the process--I also bruised my head from hitting the pot--before landing a short distance away. It didn't scurry away or anything but instead just rotated around back and forth, but since I didn't want to take a risk, I slashed it with my sword.

It took two hits to destroy the spider and it gave me the sixth token upon its destruction. I was about to go down the stairs to see if there were any more scurrying about when the corner of my eye noticed something. I could barely see something crawling out from the pot furthest at the end of where I had rolled into the previous one so I took a few steps back, rolled into this pot, and another Gold Skulltula came out, landing on the floor a short distance away. Slashing it with my sword and destroying it, it left behind another token that I eagerly picked up, giving me seven of out thirty.

" You have twenty-three left to find now, Sunset."

" Should I go downstairs to see if there any scurrying about down there?"

" I suggest trying that room that was covered by the cobwebs."

" Fair enough."

" Remember to keep your eyes and ears open for them."

Walking back to the door I used to enter the room from and turning right, I opened up the other door and entered the next room that comprised of a library. Most of the books on the shelves were old and some looked like they were about to fall apart, yet Princess Twilight flew about, eager to look at every last book--her love for books was adorable to look at though also inappropriate given our task. Almost immediately, I could hear the sounds of spiders scurrying about, yet I couldn't see any. Perhaps they were hiding more carefully so as to not be so easily discovered.

Once Her Highness had gotten her fill of books--it took about five minutes for her to get it out of her system--I walked to the right, around a bookshelf and stopped in front of a chest of drawers with a hole in the wall behind it. I also saw a painting of what appeared to be the Skull Kid's true self on the adjacent wall--I was honestly expecting Starlight Glimmer--and it was certainly suspicious. Looking back at the drawers, it was divided into three parts with one being a slightly darker tone of colour compared to the other two. Pulling on the middle part that looked different, it pulled out and a Gold Skulltula could be seen hiding in the hole behind it.

Using my Hookshot, I destroyed the spider and collected the eighth token before turning my attention towards the painting. I could hear scratching sounds coming from behind it telling me that another Skulltula was hiding there so I fired my Hookshot at the painting and it dropped to the ground before falling forward. Where the painting once hung was another spider so I promptly took care of it and acquired my ninth token before pondering over where to go next. Princess Twilight once again fawned over all those old books but I'm glad she did as some books looked different compared with the rest on a particular shelf.

I took a closer look at them and saw that they had strange, tiny spikes embedded on the spines of each book. An idea then came into my head that involving seeing if I could climb up the books as though they were a ladder, and so I did but upon reaching the top, I came across a skeletal figure who was just sitting there minding its own business. No doubt it was a Stalchild--a creature I recall from my previous journey--yet why wasn't it attacking me like other monsters did?

" What is that Stalchild doing there?"

" I'm surprised you knew what it was."

" I can't forget something that chased me throughout the night."

Princess Twilight blinked a few times before continuing. " Anyway... This Stalchild doesn't appear to be interested in us even though we're talking about it. In fact, I don't think it even knows what it's doing judging from its expression. I doubt this is the only one in here so if you run into anymore of them, don't attack them unless they are trying to do the same in return though I doubt they will. I am curious as to why they would be here of all places."

" Could Starlight have sent them?"

" No, I don't think so."

" Then maybe a high ranking Stalchild?"

" That sounds more likely." Twilight answered. " In any case, we should focus on destroying those other Gold Skulltulas and worry about the Stalchildren later once we've accomplished our goal."

Looking across the various bookshelves, I saw a Gold Skulltula scurrying along the top of the furthest shelf so I carefully jumped from shelf to shelf until I was on the shelf adjacent to where it was--jumping onto that one would have caused me to get knocked down by that spider since Her Highness said they were pretty painful to touch. Using my Hookshot once again, I destroyed the Gold Skulltula and collected the token--number ten--leaving me to figure out my next course of action. I decided to knock down the other paintings just in case there was a spider hiding behind one so I began using my Hookshot to knock them down.

The first two paintings turned up nothing but then the third proved lucrative as behind it was a hole in the wall with a Gold Skulltula hiding deep within it. Aiming carefully whilst making sure I didn't slip off the bookshelf, two well-timed Hookshot strikes later and I had the eleventh token but then I noticed yet another spider crawling around, this one on a support beam that encompassed each wall of the room via a small slither of a gap in the walls. While it didn't look safe from a building perspective, I didn't have to move since my Hookshot's chain had a long range. It took several attempts before this Skulltula was destroyed and I acquired the next token.

With that done, I jumped down and rolled into the bookshelf by accident, knocking down several books and the shelves exposing a hidden hole behind it. While my carelessness did annoy Princess Twilight a little--books meant a lot to her--she forgave me since everything in this cursed house was old and decrepit. Two more Gold Skulltulas were scurrying about behind the bookshelf though now that I thought about it, perhaps I was meant to have pushed it out of the way instead of crashing into it and knocking everything down as well as bruise my body in places.

Using my Hookshot, I destroyed both spiders and picked up their respective tokens giving me a total of fourteen. The scratching sounds then ceased indicating that there were no more spiders in the room and directly ahead of me was the door so I ran over and went back to the previous room. Since I had no other Skulltulas left to find on the upper level of this house, it meant I could finally go to the lower level and flush out whatever was there.

Running down the stairs, I stopped halfway upon seeing another Gold Skulltula crawling along a support beam similar to the one I saw in the library yet this one didn't have as much to maneuver around. Using my Hookshot, I fired the chain, destroyed the spider, and fired it again to acquire the fifteenth token. This one was important in that I was now halfway done with being in this cursed house though part of me wanted to leave as soon as possible.

" You're halfway there, Sunset!"

" This is surprisingly easy." I said. " But, that's because of the Hookshot. If I didn't have it with me, I wouldn't have been able to get any of those spirit tokens."

" You wouldn't have been able to get over the fence back at the start."

" Good point."

" Still, you have to wonder if that was the case with the other cursed house." Twilight said. " That one in the swamp could have been accessed a lot sooner since you had the ability to burn the cobweb by using one of those Deku Sticks, but perhaps going there too soon would have made things more difficult because you didn't have the Hookshot. Maybe we gave ourselves a reprieve yet never put much effort into it until now?"

" Guess we'll never know."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Indeed, but you do have to wonder what could have been. In any case, we should continue with what we're doing here. I'd say we've been in here for about a couple of hours now so time is definitely on our side."

At the bottom of the stairs were more pots that were covered in cobwebs so I took out the Hero's Bow with Fire Arrows and burned the web away before turning to the left and seeing even more covering a hole in the wall and a stack of crates with pots on top of each. It took two arrows to burn each cobweb as one was in front of the other and hiding deep inside of the hole was another Gold Skulltula. I couldn't fit through the hole so I resorted to using my Hookshot, taking it out and pulling the sixteenth token to me where it entered my body.

I then became curious over those pots that were covered by the cobwebs earlier. It seemed that I couldn't climb onto the crates as the pots took up too much space so I switched over to regular arrows for a few moments and shattered both pots with arrows--I had to use at least five to shatter both due to how small they were. The first one yielded nothing but some extra arrows that I picked up to replace what I had used yet the second revealed a Gold Skulltula hiding inside of it. Had I made an attempt at climbing up onto the crates, it would have struck me upon shattering the pot.

Switching back to the Hookshot, I destroyed the spider and then another one I heard crawling behind me on the wall giving me a total of eighteen tokens. I was about to go through one of the doors when my ears picked up a scratching noise coming from a large pot. Walking along slowly and listening carefully, the noise came from a pot next to one of the doors, and that meant rolling into it to force it to jump out and to the ground. I stepped back before running and rolling into the pot, the Gold Skulltula jumping out in response, my head throbbed slightly as a result of hitting my head on the pot to my displeasure.

Slashing it twice with my sword and picking up the nineteenth token, I pondered over which door I should go through next for a couple of minutes. I ultimately decided to go through the door that was hiding beneath the stairs so I walked over to it, opened the door, and entered the next room where I nearly freaked out upon seeing a pair of sarcophagi in one corner--my heart began beating rapidly so I pounded my chest in response.

" Whew..."

" Why are you hitting your chest?

" Don't you see the two sarcophagi over there?"

Princess Twilight looked at what I was pointing towards and shrugged her shoulders. " What about them?"

I shouted. " Don't you know what is often inside of those things!? Mummies from a forgotten age who were buried inside their sarcophagi tend to come out of them. Granted, a lot of that comes from watching those cheap thriller monster movies Rainbow Dash rents every time we have a sleepover at her place, but it can happen here as well. Believe me, I've seen it happen with my own eyes."

" We don't really have that kind of thing back in Equestria."

" Seriously?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Well, it's something Daring Do has probably seen during her adventures, but it never happens in any other situation. I think it's safe to say that nothing will come out of those sarcophagi, Sunset, since they have been chained up, yet I won't deny that you've seen things that I haven't."

" That conversation certainly went nowhere."

" Maybe so but at least we got to bond a little more."

Her Highness was right about that though I couldn't believe that Equestria had never seen anything like a mummy rising up from its sarcophagus and wanting something because it had been disturbed. Also, I still had trouble seeing Daring Do as a real-life pony seeing she always a fictional character according to the books--Princess Twilight had told me that the writer of the books, A.K. Yearling, was the adventurer herself in disguise so as to not be discovered by her enemies. No doubt she would be geeking out upon seeing such relics among other treasures were she in this world as her true self and not that of a scientist.

To my left were a stack of crates arranged in a way so that I could climb up on them and onto the rafters above, yet as soon as I walked towards them, something dropped down from above, and knocked me to the ground. I got back up and saw that a regular sized Skulltula had attacked me--I didn't think other monsters were in here--but before I could respond, a small black creature, one of those Black Boes, knocked me down as well. Getting back up again, I took my bow and shot the Skulltula point blank with an arrow, destroying it after it got pushed into a wall, switched back to my sword, and took out the Black Boe.

With that out of the way, I climbed up the boxes until I was on top of the highest one, and used my Hookshot to pull myself up to the rafters by using a barrel as a Hookshot plate and encountered several more barrels. Scratching noises could be heard amongst them yet I didn't know which ones contained Gold Skulltulas so once again I found myself rolling into the barrels to break them and suffering more bruises to my body--especially my head. The first two yielded magic jars that were necessary as I had been using a lot of magic in here yet the next one contained the Gold Skulltula that I happily destroyed with two sword strikes, collecting token number twenty.

Since there was nothing else to be found on the rafters, I jumped back down to the ground and noticed a crate stuck in-between some other objects. It stood out by being more colourful than what surrounded it and that meant rolling into it to smash it to pieces--my already bruised head was really hating this now. One roll later and the crate broke, a Gold Skulltula leapt out from it, landing nearby where I slashed it twice with my sword and collecting the token. I then turned around and saw an identical crate opposite of where I was standing and I grumbled knowing what had to be done--definitely hated doing this now.

Upon rolling into and smashing the crate, there was a small grotto behind it with some pots along with the scratching noise I had now become familiar with. Smashing the pots gave me nothing--I wasn't expecting that--yet when I turned to head back, the Gold Skulltula was right there hanging above the entrance. Using my Hookshot, I destroyed it and pulled the token to me giving me twenty-two now--I was nearly finished--but I noticed another one crawling up and down on the back wall whilst hiding behind some crates and a pot. I was honestly surprised that it was there as I could have sworn this room was now spider free.

My Hookshot first broke the pot as it was in my way and then I destroyed the spider and collected yet another token by pulling it towards myself. Whoever came up with the idea of needing to destroy thirty of them must have done so as a cruel prank. Granted, this cursed house wasn't too stressful though the other one might prove to be exactly that. I was about to leave the room when Her Highness began bopping me on the head.

" You missed one."

" Where?"

Princess Twilight floated up to a cobweb that I somehow overlooked and there it was. " Good thing I mentioned it otherwise you'd be scrambling to find that 'last one' after exploring every room in this house."

" How many do I have left?"

" Including that one up there, six."

" I'm almost done with this."

" I've been thinking about what we need to do once the last Gold Skulltula has been destroyed."

" What did you conclude?"

" For one thing, the curse on this house will be broken once you've collected all thirty spirits." Twilight answered. " From there, we should probably go back to the entrance to see if that friend of Snails decides to show up and claim the house as his own. Unfortunately, I have no way of knowing if he will appear since Snails didn't specify when he would come back to check this place out."

I slapped my forehead. " Guess we just have to hope that he is by the entrance."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes otherwise we might have wasted precious time that could have been used for something else. If my calculations are correct, then the room we haven't explored should contain the remaining Gold Skulltulas. It should also contain the other Stalchildren since we haven't run into any since leaving that library."

" Will they leave me alone as well?"

" They should provided you don't attack them or appear threatening."

I put down my Hookshot on the ground, took out the Hero's Bow, and nocked a Fire Arrow before launching it at the cobweb, burning it to ashes, exposing the Gold Skulltula who seemed unfazed by what I just did--I was hoping it would have been destroyed along with the cobweb upon the Fire Arrow connecting with the latter. Either way, I put my bow away, picked up the Hookshot, fired the chain to destroy the spider and pulled its token to me giving me twenty-four altogether. I then began listening for any scratching sounds in case one of them was still hiding--there was silence indicating this room was cleared.

After putting the Hookshot away, I walked over to the door, entered the previous room, and headed over to the one door I had yet to go through. Entering the next room, my body went cold upon seeing a table that housed four Stalchildren sitting on chairs either side of it--two per side--giggling away. I had no idea what they were doing but I wasn't going to bother them since that was what Princess Twilight suggested I not do. More of those weird masks were hanging on the opposite wall yet these had colour as opposed to all the others I had seen. Was it some kind of puzzle? If it was then I had no idea what it meant as I had nothing to go on.

On the other walls were more paintings of the Skull Kid--again it should have been Starlight--and I knew to check behind them, and each corner of the room housed small and large pots that were no doubt hiding places for Gold Skulltulas. Finally, at the base of the back wall was a fireplace though it had iron bars blocking what appeared to be a passageway that probably hid some kind of reward that I couldn't access without knowing what to do. I had a feeling that the coloured masks on the wall had some kind of code and that solving it would raise the iron bars. Could these Stalchildren know anything? It sounded fruitless since they were ignoring me and all.

I slowly walked to the left of the table, then to the right of the pots, and rolled into the large pot by the back wall, a Gold Skulltula jumped out and landed on the ground nearby. I had to be careful not to attack the Stalchildren in case they decided to gang up on me because of destroying one of them. That meant not swinging my sword around and instead relying on my Hookshot. I took it out and destroyed the spider, walked over to collect its token--number twenty-five--since it was right there in front of me.

" So far so good." I whispered. " They haven't noticed us."

" Don't you wonder what they have to say?"

I was taken aback. " Why would I do that?"

" It just seems strange that they are here in this cursed house sitting around and staring at nothing."

" Now that you mention it, these guys aren't really doing anything wrong."

Princess Twilight floated over to a Stalchild and waved her hand in front of its face. It did nothing in response so she tried it again only for nothing to happen. " It's like they are fixated on whatever it is they are doing and are ignoring everything else." She waved for a third time and once again the Stalchild ignored her. " A shame that we don't have a means of talking to them. We could have found out why they're here and maybe learn something about those coloured masks."

" I think there's a code associated with them."

" Yes." Twilight said. " And, I have a hunch that these Stalchildren might know something. We'll have to ignore them for now and perhaps come back when they figure out how to communicate with them as they have no intention of doing so right now."

" Guess I am curious about what they know now."

" I knew you would."

I smiled. " Figured that was your plan and it worked. By the way, can you see anymore Gold Skulltulas?"

" There are scratching sounds coming from the chandelier above the table." Twilight answered. " I suspect there are a couple of them hiding in there but they might not be easy for you to destroy if they are using it as a kind of shield. Perhaps you can shake them loose by using something heavy?"

Fortunately, I had such a thing in the form of my Goron body, but first I wanted to knock down the paintings in case there was a spider hiding behind one. Using my Hookshot, I hit the painting on the right-hand wall closest to the fireplace, and knocked it down revealing a Gold Skulltula. I destroyed it using the Hookshot and obtained token number twenty-six upon pulling it towards me. I then began thinking about how best to bring those other spiders down from the chandelier. Either I could pound the ground or the table as a Goron though that could destroy a Stalchild and leave me to deal with the others.

I took out the Goron Mask and was about to place it on my place when I noticed another spider crawling around on a support beam in-between the walls--again. That changed my plans slightly in that I needed to take care of that one first before dealing with the others. Aiming my Hookshot upwards, I waited for the Gold Skulltula to come around before firing the chain and destroying it, and then fired it again to bring the token down to me. With twenty-seven tokens in my possession, all that remained was to bring down the remaining spiders and acquire theirs so I placed the Goron Mask on my face and quickly grabbed onto the bars covering the fireplace.

Whenever I changed into Maud--Darmani--the transformation was erratic in execution and this time was no exception. My body wanted to stumble about but I held onto the bars firmly and watched as my body shimmered from human to Goron until I became Darmani--it had been a while since I last became this form so I needed a few moments to get adjusted to a bulky body again. The Stalchildren had ignored my transformation so at least there was no need to explain anything even though they had been ignoring me the entire time. Now I needed to choose how best to approach this.

It took me about ten seconds to decide that pounding the table was more efficient than just anywhere on the ground to bring the remaining spiders down. Luckily, I could climb up onto the table by jumping despite having small legs as a Goron and I did just that before curling up into a ball. I leapt up and crashed down on the table though the Stalchildren were apparently unaffected which was definitely surprising--I thought they would be destroyed by it--but the important thing was the final three Gold Skulltulas getting ejected from the chandelier and landing all across the room.

Rather than change back to normal and destroy the spiders, I decided to punch them with my fists instead out of a sense of self-satisfaction. Fortunately, none of them chose to flee or anything so it was easy to take them out using a single punch on each of them and collecting the final tokens. Once the last token was mine, I dropped to my hands and knees and began breathing heavily knowing how difficult it had been to achieve my goal.

" You did it, Sunset."

" About time too."

" Are you okay?"

I turned to look at Her Highness. " I'm exhausted from having to go over this place but I should recover if I rest for about a minute or two." I then turned over and laid down on my back, staring at the ceiling, and continuing to breathe heavily. " I am not looking forward to the other cursed house in the swamp and I wish it didn't have to be cleared of any spiders but what other choice do I have? I need all of the masks if I want to get that ultimate mask."

" Is it really worth it?"

I slowly shook my head. " I honestly don't know anymore, Twilight. I've been getting mixed messages about it from the different versions of Adagio yet none of them have been honest with me and instead have been nothing but cryptic. I could use it to give me an edge against Starlight but the thought of being corrupted is too much for me to bear. Thing is, I've collected many masks already so I might as well get the rest of them."

" Such a heavy burden."

" No kidding." I said. After resting for a couple of minutes, I got back onto my feet and adjusted the gloves on my hands. " Well, that was enough resting so how about we get out of this place and make our way over to the other cursed house?"

" Are you going to change back first?"

I shook my head. " The slope I came down when I destroyed that wall at the beginning is too steep for me to run up so I might as well roll my way up like this. There's probably another one of those Hookshot plates that will let me get back over the fence but I'm going to rely on a different approach." Princess Twilight then looked at me with a concerned expression on her face yet I reassured her with a simple wink. " Don't worry, Twilight. This will be a piece of cake."

It didn't take long for me to make my way back to the entrance of the cursed house and when I stood in front of the fence, I decided to punch it repeatedly in order to force it open rather than use the Hookshot. Being a Goron had its benefits such as in this instance as my hands felt perfectly fine as they dented the fence with every blow I made. While I knew that Snails' friend wanted to use this place to hide from the moon, I wanted to get out without using the required method--I also wanted to vent out some pent-up rage against something due to what I experienced.

A few more punches and I made a hole in the fence allowing me to walk through. From there, I curled up into a ball, rolled up the slope and came to a stop where I heard the sound of someone mumbling outside, most likely Snails' friend. I quickly grabbed my face, took off the Goron Mask, flipped back my hair, and just in time as someone entered the cursed house. He looked rather timid in his composure yet he wasn't an enemy or anything like that.

" I finally came back here and I find that someone else decided to claim this place."

I shook my head. " I have no intention of having this place."

The man was surprised. " Really? I was certain you were planning on keeping it. My friend told me that someone came in here to get rid of the cursed spiders and I bet that someone happens to be you?"

I nodded my head. " It was something I wanted to do."

" Wow... I never guessed someone would get rid of those things."

" Believe me! It wasn't easy."

" You did me a favour by getting rid of those spiders but to be honest, I really want to have this place." The man said. " I'm begging you to let me have this place! I really need it to shelter myself from the falling moon." I was about to respond when he suddenly thrust a large wallet in my face and began pleading out of desperation. " I'll give you my Giant's Wallet in return for this place. I know it may not seem like much but I'm hoping you'll agree."

" Okay, you can have it."

The man was ecstatic. " You will not regret this decision! That wallet can hold up to 500 rupees though I don't see you getting that many since you're a kid and all. Still, I'm glad that you needed it since I wasn't going to be using it for much longer anyway."

Thanking the man for the Giant's Wallet, I left him to his own devices and walked outside of the Oceanside Spider House, a happy expression on my face because of acquiring the means of getting that mask from Iron Will though it did involve farming for rupees. Looking up at the sky, the sun was at its peak, and that meant I had to move quickly and make my way over to the other cursed house located in the swamp.

Some time in the past...

" You're a strange one for coming to a desolate place like this."

" Huh? Are you talking to me?"

" There's no one else around here other than you, me, and that fairy floating around you."

" What do you want?"

" I couldn't help notice that you're wearing a strange mask. I mean, I've seen people wear those all the time in Clock Town whenever they have their celebration every year, but what you've got on your face is definitely something else. It may sound a little presumptuous of me but could I take a closer look at that mask? I just really want to feel it for myself and perhaps learn what materials were used to craft it."

" Um... I don't think you should try that."

" Huh? Are you talking to me, little fairy?"

" Yes."

" Why should I listen to the words of a fairy!? You're nothing but an insignificant creature whose only purpose is to heal the wounds of those better than you. If anything, you should keep quiet before something bad happens. Besides, I only want to take a look at that mask. It's not like I plan on stealing it or anything."

" I'd run away if I were you."

" What!? Me? Run? Why would I do that?"

" My friend has more power in her little finger than you have in your entire body, three times over."

" Again, why should I listen to you, fairy? You have no say in the matter as you're just a tool to be used as we humans see fit. Please, my masked friend. Don't allow that pitiful fairy to convince you not to let me take a look at that mask. I am an innocent person who lives in this desolate place because I have to protect what is mine from those who think they can steal from me."

" Apologize."

" Huh? For what?"

" For insulting my friend."

" And why should I?"

" I've tolerated your stupidity long enough but I suppose you need to be taught a lesson. I am a Skull Kid who possesses tremendous power that allows me to perform great miracles the likes of which this world has never seen before." The Skull Kid, Starlight Glimmer, then began shaking her head and the eyes of her mask began to glow in an eerie light before several boulders dropped down from the cliff-face, landing in a circle around the one she had been talking to. " That was just a small sample of what I am capable of. If you want me to give you a second lesson, by all means continue insulting Tael over here."

" What... what are you?"

" I am a Skull Kid who possesses tremendous power." Starlight answered.

" Do you think this lady knows anything, Skull Kid?" Spike asked.

" She seems to be familiar with this area so I assume yes."

" I hope she can help us find what you're looking for." Spike said. " To be perfectly honest, I'm not sure why we're even here in the first place. We've heard the rumours that this place reeks of the dead since no one has set foot around here for centuries apart from those who want to be here, and I feel really creeped out that we're here to begin with. Maybe we should forget all about coming here and try someplace else?"

Starlight laughed in response. " Hee hee! Don't be so scared, Tael! I know exactly what I'm doing!"

" That's what worries me the most."

" This is going to be the best prank I've ever pulled and it's sure to cause a riot!" Starlight said. " Besides, the undead won't really feel a thing once I'm done since they're already dead and all so that's an added bonus. Anyone living further in this valley will just have to accept the fact that I'm going to top myself once again."

" I've been thinking, Skull Kid."

Starlight tilted her head down and looked at Spike. " About what?"

Spike's wings drooped as he spoke. " Maybe we should stop with the pranks." He quickly flinched when Starlight freaked out in response. " Hey! Calm down, Skull Kid. I know you didn't like me saying that but maybe we ought to not go to that temple and open its doors."

Starlight's eyes glowed brightly. " Why should I stop now? I've come this far with my pranks and each time I use the powers of this mask, they get better and better. This world did nothing but mistreat me just because my idea of fun didn't mesh well with their definition of it. I'm finally getting back at everyone who wronged me and what I'm going to do here will be my best prank yet." She lurched forward and Spike cowered in fear. " Don't you start telling me that things are going too far, Tael. You've been loving these pranks just as much as I have so don't act like you're some kind of pariah."

" I'm just saying."

" Well don't!"

" That mask has changed you."

" It's given me more power than I could imagine."

" Maybe you shouldn't have put it on."

Starlight's eyes glowed again. " Are you suggesting that I've gone too far, Tael? Well... Are you!?" Spike once again cowered in fear and Starlight burst into laughter. " I just love when you cower like that, hee hee! Sure, it gets boring after a while but it's just so much fun to see someone afraid of what I've become." She then turned around and noticed the person she had been talking to standing right behind her and their hands were inches away from grabbing her mask. " Wow... You really do have a clear case of not understanding my power. Must I repeat what I did a few minutes ago?" She snapped her finger and more rocks came tumbling down from the cliff.

" I just want to look at your mask."

" Unless you want me to turn you inside-out or bury you alive, you'll help me with something."

" You wouldn't..."

" Try me."

" Very well. I'll help you with what you want."

Starlight laughed once again. " Hee hee! Probably the smartest decision you've made all day! Now, I want you to guide me to where I want to go and you won't complain about how you'll be treated in the process otherwise I might decide to get rid of you completely. Don't worry, this will only take a few minutes and then you can do whatever it is you were doing before running into me. Oh, and keep your filthy hands off of my mask or I'll make sure you live to regret it."

It took me some time to get over to the other cursed house since I wanted to do something extra in the process. I used the Song of Soaring to warp myself back to Clock Town to pay a visit to the bank behind the Clock Tower--I really needed to use its services more than what I had been doing--and deposited some rupees I had in my wallet. I had no idea how many rupees I had deposited but I knew it was somewhere less than 500, unfortunate as it meant getting that other reward Fleur Dis Lee talked about was next to impossible unless I were to grind outside in the field for rupees for an entire cycle, maybe even two.

Once I was finished at the bank, I played the Song of Soaring again so that I could make my way over to Woodfall but then I had an issue. There were two locations I could warp to in the swamp, the entrance that connected to Termina Field and where Woodfall Temple was located. Both Owl Statues were far away from the cursed house and the former path would involve walking through poison since my actions from before had since been reversed.

I supposed that I could have gone through what I initially when I first could leave Clock Town until I reached the cursed house but then that would have wasted valuable time that was needed to complete other tasks during this cycle of time. Besides, with my current items, I could easily skip certain sections of the swamp such as needing to go into that mazed forest near where I found that Potion Shop run by Chrysalis The other path had more poisonous water for me to deal with as the Owl Statue was located right in the heart of Woodfall, but I could just fly over it using Deku Flowers whilst avoiding any flying monsters, like those Dragonflies.

Thinking about it, I figured that going to Woodfall Temple and working my way over to the cursed house was the much shorter route though it was more dangerous. Mulling it over for a few minutes and asking Princess Twilight for a second opinion, I decided that I would warp over to Woodfall Temple, so I began thinking about that location. Wings protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, and soon I disappeared only to reappeared seconds later on the platform used by the Deku Scrubs to summon Woodfall Temple from the depths of the swamp--I wasn't going to go in there for that one frog for the time being.

My first thought was to become Mikau and swim on over to the entrance that connected back to the main part of Woodfall but I doubted that the water was deep enough for me to swim properly and the poison would damage my health like crazy. I then considered swimming as a human yet I suspected the same results would happen--becoming Darmani wasn't an option as Gorons sank like rocks in the water. The only option was becoming my Deku Scrub form for the first time since Snowhead Temple. For a while, I believed I'd never be able to become my first alternate body but now it had become necessary.

Taking out the Deku Mask and placing it on my face, I began experiencing convulsions as the magic within the mask took effect, and I screamed out loud as my body shimmer from human to plant just like that. Upon my transformation finishing, rather than jumping down and hoping I could reach a platform jutting out of the poisonous water, I decided to take the long way back--essentially I had to go backwards--and that meant dealing with Mad Scrubs hiding in Deku Flowers and those aggressive creatures who charged at me whenever I got close to them--their names escaped me.

It took about ten minutes to traverse back to the entrance of Woodfall and my battered body was proof of that. " I don't remember those Deku Nuts causing so much pain the last time we came here." The Mad Scrubs pelted me with many nuts, most of which hit me in the chest, arms, legs, and even my head on a couple of occasions, and while I shrugged it off, I felt like I had been in a war zone of some kind.

" It has been a while since you last became a Deku." Twilight said.

" Maybe I should have used that big shield I get in this body."

" That would have made things easier."

I sighed. " Let's just get this over with." I walked through the tunnel and back into the main part of Woodfall before looking down at the poisonous water. It felt strange seeing it back again after getting rid of it during my first excursion in this region but then time travel loved playing cruel jokes on those who utilized it. " Now where do you suppose that cursed house could be? I remember seeing the entrance blocked somewhere around here."

Princess Twilight looked down to see if she could spot it and bopped me on the head moments later. " There, Sunset! It's down there!" I looked down again and saw the cobweb covered entrance along with a lit torch nearby telling me that I could have entered the place much sooner. " Perhaps we could have explored this cursed house after completing Woodfall Temple, but then you might have an easier time of things now since you've got additional items that you didn't have before."

" Perhaps you're right."

" You might want to change back to a human before dropping down."

" I was thinking of landing on one of those lily pads down there."

" Deku Scrubs don't like falling from great heights."

" I know but would you want me to get injured from a fall or from poisonous water?"

Princess Twilight looked at me, then down at the water below, and then back at me again. " To be honest, I'd rather you not get hurt at all, but I suppose the first option would be the lesser of two evils since poison isn't fun by any means." She looked down again and gulped heavily before looking back at me. " It is a pretty steep fall, Sunset, and no doubt your knees aren't going to enjoy the experience."

" Are you afraid of heights?"

" I wouldn't say it like that."

I looked down this time before looking back at Her Highness. " You're only worried for my safety, Twilight, and I appreciate the concern. I should aim properly at that lily pad down there before jumping as I'd rather not miss it."

Walking over to the edge of the ledge, I looked down one more time to make sure I was directly above one of the lily pads down below--there were multiple in a straight line and since my Deku Scrub body was light, I wouldn't push the lily pad into the water--something that would happen with my other forms. Gulping heavily, I took a few steps backwards, then ran forward, jumped off the ledge, and dropped like a stone before landing seconds later on the lily pad, my knees buckling in the process, my reaction appropriate for the situation. It felt like my entire body had been hit with one of those ten ton weights you see in cartoons.

" Are you okay?"

I gritted through my teeth. " That... Was... Painful... To no end!"

" At least you didn't land in the poisonous water."

" Yeah... I feel proud about that." I moaned while gritting my teeth. " Just... just give me a few moments to recover." I lifted up a leg, shook it about to get the feeling back into it, switched over to the other one, repeated the process, and then hopped over to the island with the cursed house on it. " And my health only dropped by a small amount despite dropping a distance that would cause a far more serious injury."

" You were lucky."

I nodded. " It was a risk I'm not willing to try again."

" Guess you should change back to a human now."

I grabbed my face, pulled off the Deku Mask, and flipped my hair back upon changing back into a human. From there, I took out the Hero's Bow, nocked a Fire Arrow into it, and fired at the cobweb, burning it to ashes and allowing me access to the cursed house. Before walking inside, I looked up at the sun to see where it was in the sky. It had since moved west upon my last viewing and that meant nightfall would happen in about two or three hours from now. It would take me several hours before I had taken care of the Gold Skulltulas inside this cursed house so my chances of thwarting Lightning Dust were extremely slim.

Walking into the building, I came upon a sign that read "Swamp Spider House" and the sounds of scratching could be heard everywhere. There was also a dog running around in circles though why it was even here to begin with was something I didn't understand. Every once in a while, it would stop, look up at the ceiling, and bark several times before resuming its routine and eventually repeating the process. I looked up myself and couldn't see anything suspicious so I walked a few more paces before something dropped down and scared the living daylights out of me.

The creature looked like a Skulltula but there was something different about it. A closer inspection revealed that it had a weird looking eye, and yet I seemed to recognize it from something, as though I had seen it somewhere before during my previous journey. One of the Skulltula's legs was disproportionate to the rest of its body along with the left side of the mouth--it hung down a little compared to the other side. That weird looking eye was definitely creeping me out by this point and that dog didn't seem to like seeing it either so I thought about ignoring the spider before it suddenly began talking to me.

" Wait! I am not a monster!"

It could have fooled me but I chose to answer back. " What do you mean?"

" The spider's curse... it made me this way!"

" What did you do to anger them?"

" I don't know why those golden spiders cursed me but I am begging you to help me out." The man answered. " In this place, you will find those golden spiders crawling about all over the places on walls, floors, ceilings, and even in tiny holes that are perfect breeding grounds for bugs that hide underneath rocks. Destroy them all quickly! Every time you destroy one of those accursed creatures, it will leave behind a token that contains its spirit. Be sure to collect them as proof and don't leave any behind under any circumstances."

" Um... I already knew that."

" You did?"

I nodded. " I went to another place just like this over by the ocean."

" Then you know what must be done." The man said. " If you destroy all thirty golden spiders in the rooms that follow, I will reward you by giving you something I am certain will be of incredible use. Please... hurry... being stuck like this is incredibly painful."

I could tell that he was desperate for someone to help him though he didn't really need to tell me what I already knew. Then again, he didn't know that I had been to the other spider house and assumed I didn't know anything. I had every intention of helping him because it was the right thing to do and because I needed to get a mask from here. Perhaps that man knew something about it and would be able to tell me how to find it.

Before walking through the door, I decided to lift up the rock that was next to the man to see if there was anything worthwhile beneath it. Upon picking it up, several bugs began scurrying about in panic because of being discovered, and since he mentioned tiny holes being inside of the cursed house that were loved by bugs, I most likely needed to collect some of them in hopes they will be of some use. I quickly took out three of my bottles--juggling them proved difficult--and began scooping the bugs up into them before they could dig underground and beyond my reach.

When the last one was safely inside my bottle, I put them away, walked through the door, and entered the next room which turned out to be the central area for this cursed house due to there being two floors and several doors--on each floor--heading off towards other rooms. My first thought revolved around dealing with the bugs I had picked up and whether or not what the man said was true about them loving tiny holes. What did he even mean by that anyway? It's not like I could find a tiny hole somewhere in here and assume a bug would love it. That's when I noticed something on a nearby wall and ran over to take a closer look.

On the wall was a mound of soil that looked soft, like it was prepared accordingly, and in the middle of it was a hole. It took me a few moments to realize that it was the same soil that I used to plant and water that magic bean back at the Deku Palace so that I could gain access to that prison cell the monkey was stuck in from a different direction. So bugs loved crawling in this kind of soil? It didn't sound correct in my head but I decided to go with it anything since I didn't really have any other ideas. I took out one of my bottles, uncorked it, and watched as the bug crawled up the wall and into the soft soil, yet nothing happened at first. Had I done something wrong?

A few seconds later, something jumped out of the soil and knocked me onto my butt before landing on the ground. Picking myself back up, I looked to see what had knocked me down and it was a Gold Skulltula. I slashed it with my sword, collected the first of thirty tokens--once again I had to collect a large amount--and looked over my inventory, determining that I needed more arrows. Luckily, there were a couple of pots behind me so I walked over and smashed them only for another Gold Skulltula to come out of the second pot. It was able to strike me before I could the same in kind, and I did, destroying it and picking up the second token.

" Looks like collecting those bugs proved useful." Twilight said.

" Good thing I have several bottles."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. Can you imagine coming here with only the one bottle and being forced to backtrack to the entrance several times just to collect more bugs for use with that soft soil?"

I shuddered at the thought of it. " Glad we're here now then."

Princess Twilight nodded again. " It does mean getting this place cleared out a lot sooner but you should still be careful, Sunset. Those Gold Skulltulas have already scored some hits against you through no mistake of your own, and you didn't bring any potions along so things could get serious." She then floated to the left of me and whistled loudly to grab my immediate attention. " There's a Gold Skulltula moving about in the water right behind you!"

" What!?" I turned around and saw the spider moving towards me so I struck it twice with my sword and collected the token it left behind. " I didn't notice it earlier when we approached that soft soil on the wall."

" Perhaps it was on the other side of the room and only just now came over this way?"

" Maybe, but that was a bit too close for comfort."

" I did see another mound of soft soil on the other side of the room opposite the one you used."

" Then we should check that one out next."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Be careful as there could be other Gold Skulltulas crawling about in the water."

Before running over to the other side of the room, I looked down at the water to make sure there were no Gold Skulltulas crawling about in it--there weren't any though I was surprised that this cursed house had a flooded floor--before heading over there and uncorking another bottle. The bug dropped to the ground and looked to be wanting to wander off initially until it sensed the soft soil and crawled up the wall. It went inside and a few moments later, the next Skulltula jumped out though this time I knew to keep my distance. I destroyed it, collected the fourth token, and was about to go through the door when I heard scratching coming from behind a pillar.

I ran around to the other side to see a Gold Skulltula crawling up and down the pillar. Had I come here much sooner instead of now, I would have had to use my Deku Scrub form and destroy it with a bubble when it had come down as low as possible. But, since I was here now, my Hookshot pretty much made it a non-issue for me. Taking it out and aiming, I fired the chain at the Skulltula only to miss due to it crawling back up the pillar so I aimed up, fired again, destroying it, and collected my fifth token. Things were going good so far though it was too soon to say for certain if it would continue like this.

Of two doors that I could choose on the lower level, my heart wanted me to go through the door on my left. Why? I wasn't sure either but I decided to anyway as I would have to go there eventually since the Gold Skulltulas were everywhere in this house. Putting my Hookshot away, I turned around, walked across the room, opened the door, and entered the next room where my mouth suddenly dropped upon seeing what stood before me.

Chapter 49: Sinister Sisters

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
March 20, 2017
Chapter 49: Sinister Sisters.

In the middle of this room was a large slab of rock that looked like it could be stood on top of given how flat it was up there. Was I honestly surprised at seeing what amounted to a simple room fixture? Yes, as a matter of fact, as I wasn't expecting to be greeted by something so simple in appearance not to mention in a place like this. I assumed the cursed house would be nothing but a haven for the Gold Skulltulas to thrive about in so seeing this slab took me by surprise. What didn't surprise me was seeing a couple of those accursed spiders crawling all over it indicating that they had no regard for anything they came into contact with.

As I recall, I had destroyed five of the spiders so that left me only twenty-five more to go before the curse around here was lifted. The man who I encountered at the entrance to the house would then reward me with something and I could go on my merry way and acquire another mask or improve my current equipment back in town or beyond. For some reason, I just couldn't stop thinking about that man. I wasn't interested in him or anything like that but rather there was something about him that felt familiar. Sure, he had been changed into a monster because of being cursed and looked hideous yet why couldn't I get him out of my mind?

That's when it dawned on me that I had seen him before, or rather, it was what he had on his face that reminded me. Despite being a Skulltula, his eye was different from what I had come to expect from those spiders and it took me this long to finally put two and two together. That eye wasn't any ordinary eye but rather it belonged to a powerful mask that I received during my previous journey though I didn't utilize it as much as I should have. Still, what were the chances of running into the same mask again? Well, the same could be said about a few other masks, namely: the Goron Mask, the Zora Mask, and the Bunny Hood.

What that man was wearing was known as the Mask of Truth and if I remember correctly, it was a mask created by the Sheikah that had the ability to communicate with the strange statues scattered around the land that bear their symbol--I had seen plenty of those so far on this journey though I ignored them. Was it possible that same power existed in this version of the mask? If so then I could use it and learn all kinds of information by talking to those stones. Perhaps it had additional powers? Finally, what of the Sheikah? If their mask is here in this world, could they be here as well in some capacity?

Until I had taken care of the curse in this Swamp Spider House, I wouldn't be able to think of those questions. Still though... the Sheikah... the ones who existed in the shadows and served the Royal Family as attendants. According to the "Hyrule Historia", the book Rainbow Dash let me borrow, they instilled themselves with a special poison designed to give them abilities that were beyond the realm of most mortals. For them to protect those they served, such a sacrifice had to be made though in exchange they were granted great power and could live longer than most other creatures.

How was it that I remembered such information? Granted, I consider myself to be quite intelligent and anything that particularly took my fancy would be retained in my memory for future use though perhaps some things were best left forgotten since their overall use in life was limited. In any case, I needed to focus on destroying the remaining Gold Skulltulas yet perhaps I should inform Princess Twilight of some of this stuff whenever we have a free moment. Sure, this wasn't the kind of knowledge she could use on a practical surface but it would expand her horizons, something she was very proud of.

To my left were several crates stacked next to one another in a corner and upon walking up to them, I could hear the sounds of a Gold Skulltula coming from inside one of them, and that meant smashing each one. Since I had no idea which crate housed the spider, I had to smash each of them until it was exposed. I wasn't looking forward to the idea as it meant my head getting bruised even more than it already was but there was no other choice.

I rolled into the one nearest to me on the head producing a couple of rupees upon smashing it--my head was already feeling the pain--but it wasn't what I wanted so I tried the one on the other end, and sure enough, a Gold Skulltula leapt out when the crate was destroyed. I intended on destroying it though I felt woozy due to my head getting hit too many times for my liking. Fortunately, the spider had no desire to run away, yet I dropped to my knees before clutching my head.

" Sunset? What's wrong?" Twilight asked.

" My head hurts." I answered.

" I guess rolling into those crates doesn't do wonders for your head."

I nodded. " I know that I could simply punch them using my Goron body but that would be a waste of the transformation, and you know how I feel about switching forms just to handle a small thing that could easily be done as myself."

" Yes but you need to get over that."

I was stunned by her words. " What are you saying?"

" You need to accept the fact that you have to change forms for small things because that is what's required of you to get past certain things." Twilight answered. " I have this feeling it will become a frequent issue when we reach the final region once you've finished preparing so getting used to it now instead of later will give you an easier time. Sunset, my words aren't meant to be mean or insulting but I think you just have to accept the fact that changing forms in such a manner is necessary."

" Can I still complain about it?"

Princess Twilight smiled and nodded. " Whoever said you couldn't?"

I smiled back. " Thanks, Twilight."

" A thought has been occurring to me regarding the final region."

" What's that?"

Princess Twilight began floating around in deep thought before answering me. " In each of the previous regions that we've visited, you had to use a specific mask in order to pass yourself off as a member of the tribe that mask represented, right?" I nodded my head and she continued. " Unless you were to get a fourth mask capable of transforming you into a creature from whoever lives over there in the final region, you may have to rely on each of your alternate forms in some capacity. As such, switching between forms on a whim for small bursts is going to be a thing."

I figured Her Highness would throw that displeasure of mine in there as a painful reminder but she was once again correct. If there was only three transformation masks for me to use in this world, switching between my different bodies for whatever reason would be something I had to get used to doing. My heart began to sink as a result of her explanation because of my feelings towards wasting a transformation on something small or trivial. Compared to the other regions of Termina, this last one was shrouded in mystery though we did have one hint courtesy of Rarity though she might have been exaggerating.

" All we know is that the undead come from this region."

" Rarity said that didn't she?"

I nodded. " It's not much but it's all we've got. I'm surprised Adagio didn't mention anything about it."

" She did by saying we needed to pay the Gorman Sisters a visit as they have that mask you need." Twilight said. " Maybe they might know something about this final region though if their reputation is what we suspect it is given how we were attacked by them when we assisted Applejack with her delivery, getting that information could prove difficult, leaving us with little in the way of alternative options."

" I suppose we'll cross that bridge when we get there."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes."

As I destroyed the Gold Skulltula and collected the sixth token, I began to think about the Gorman Sisters and how their brother, Gorman--Big Macintosh--related to them. He was difficult to deal with from what I had when I watched him talk to Troubleshoes earlier regarding his troupe of performers, but then he was annoyed when he learned that their act had been cancelled all because of the moon falling down from on high. It also seemed that he had chosen to make a name for himself by becoming an entertainer so there was a sense he wasn't a villain and that his troupe were legitimate in their actions.

Yet, compared to him, his sisters were rotten to the core based on my limited experiences with them. They tried to destroy Applejack's shipment of milk--I hadn't yet figured out the reasons behind that--by pretending to be masked robbers though their clothes were a dead giveaway despite covering their faces. It was also apparent that Applejack didn't seem them in a positive light, further telling me they were trouble yet it seemed I needed help from them to get to the final region. Perhaps if I were to talk to Big Macintosh the next time I saw him, he could help me deal with his sisters and maybe get them to change their ways.

Turning around, I saw more crates lined up next to each other on the side of the room, and if my hunch was right, there was going to be a Gold Skulltula hiding inside one of them until it got flushed out of hiding. My head once again began throbbing, a sign that it wasn't liking me using it to smash anything, yet I had no intention of becoming Darmani just to smash a bunch of crates that could easily be smashed by using my own body.

Rolling into the one on the far end, I wound up getting a few more rupees though my head once again felt woozy. I think I needed to take at least a five minute break before continuing though resting wasn't an option sadly as time wasn't on my side again. I rolled into the next crate and a Gold Skulltula emerged upon smashing it though it collided with my body just as it was landing on the ground a short distance away. It was a good thing my defence had been enhanced by Adagio otherwise that would have really hurt. I slashed the spider using my sword and collected token number seven before turning my attention towards a suspicious boulder.

It definitely looked suspicious as why would it be in the corner of a room in the swamp? If anything, it should be in a place like the mountains where rocks were plentiful so I suspected something important was either hiding inside, behind, or below it. I checked my items to see if I had any bombs on hand I could use to blow up the boulder yet I didn't have any on hand so that meant relying on other means. I took out the Blast Mask--strange how this was now being used more often--placed it on my face, walked over to my target, and detonated the mask at point-blank range. The explosion caused me to take some damage yet the boulder got destroyed in the process.

When the smoke cleared, I took off my mask and looked down to see another patch of soft soil. " I don't hear any scratching noises coming from this patch so it's safe to assume there aren't any Gold Skulltulas hiding inside?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " It seems that this is just a regular patch of soft soil."

" Then why cover it up with a boulder?"

" Most likely to prevent anyone from discovering it."

" Crap!"

" What's wrong?"

" I didn't bring along any Magic Beans." I answered. In an instant, I felt crestfallen all because I didn't bring along an item that turned out to be essential, and because I would lose certain items when resetting time, I didn't have any on hand when I began this cycle of time. " That means we have to leave, get a Magic Bean, and then come back here!" Dropping to my hands and knees, I began pounding the ground out of sheer anger. " Arrrggghhh! I hate it when I have to backtrack!"

" How unfortunate."

" You must think of me as an idiot for not bringing one."

" Not at all." Twilight said. " It was a simple case of not knowing that something so simple was needed to reach another location in this cursed house. I'd say we can get one of those beans and be back here in a matter of minutes if we use the Song of Soaring to warp to a place that sells them."

" That would be Snips who lives beneath the Deku Palace."

Princess Twilight looked grim before perking back up. " That isn't very far from here and we have direct access via that secondary entrance on the outer walls. I am sure that cursed man back at the entrance wouldn't mind if we were to leave for just a few minutes." Her Highness noticed I was still pounding the ground so she quickly grabbed my head and slapped my face to bring me to my senses. " It's not the end of the world, Sunset! This was just an unfortunate circumstance we didn't realize until now. Look, just leave this place, get one of those Magic Beans--maybe two or three--then come back here."

Picking myself up from the ground--not before pounding it incredibly hard--I left the room and began making my way back to the entrance. The man was wondering why I was leaving without destroying all of the Gold Skulltulas, and I told him that something had gone wrong inside one of the rooms resulting in me needing to leave for about five minutes. While he certainly didn't appreciate me leaving all of a sudden, he understood it was a necessary course of action. Deep down, I wanted to kick myself repeatedly over having made such an embarrassing blunder yet I knew that would do nothing to alieve the problem.

Sighing, I left the Swamp Spider House and began to look around outside to see where the Deku Palace was. Looking up at the sky, I could see that the sun was starting to go down indicating that sunset would soon be upon us. Upon seeing where the palace was and that it required me to become a Deku Scrub--the lily pads were my means of getting over there without being poisoned by the water--I took out my Deku Mask and prepared to pay a visit to Snails. I still couldn't believe how stupid I was for forgetting to pick up something as simple as a Magic Bean all because I didn't realize it was needed to progress.

Sometime in the past.

" You know, I never did get your name." Starlight said. " Then again, I personally don't care since you're just here to take me where I need to go. By the way, you had better not be attempting something funny and make off with my mask otherwise your life could be over in a matter of moments.

" My name is Sakon."

" What kind of name is that?"

" You're just called Skull Kid, right?" Lightning Dust asked.

" You've made your point."

" Tell me... What makes you think I would take your precious mask?"

Starlight's eyes glowed and clenched her hands into fists. " You've been trying to touch my mask ever since we started walking and it's gotten really creepy. I know that innocent expression on your face is nothing but an act to lure people into a false sense of security so why don't you knock it off and be serious." She raised her finger and a fireball appeared above it followed by her laughing away. " Hee hee! I could rearrange your face and make it better."

" You wouldn't!"

" I think you should have a new face."

" Fine! I'm a thief!"

" Really!?" Starlight exclaimed. " Judging from your pathetic getup, I was certain you were some kind of wandering street performer or peddler."

Lightning Dust began to grumble under her breath but knew that she couldn't do anything to the masked stranger who had demanded her to lead her to a place within the ruined kingdom so that she could play a prank all because of the power she possessed. If not for her mask, Lightning Dust could easily overpower the child and take the mask as an added bonus though it would prove immensely difficult. All she could do was accept the insults and hope that she didn't have to deal with this Skull Kid for much longer. From Starlight's perspective, she had found someone else she could make miserable in her bid at getting back at those who had wronged her.

The two travellers along with Spike had taken a more difficult route to the main area of the ruined kingdom by climbing up a cliff face before walking the rest of the way towards what was seen as a village. Granted, Lightning Dust had to do all the climbing as Spike could fly naturally while Starlight used her magic to float upwards. Most would have reached the village by using the more direct route that involved crossing a bridge and then up some steps until they arrived. Unfortunately, the bridge had been destroyed by Starlight because she was feeling bored along with the steps for the same reason.

Much of the village was in complete ruins with no one around to greet them. Each building was decaying from centuries of abandonment with the exception of one that looked like it had been built a short time ago. This building resembled a music box and came complete with two giant horns that extended out from the roof and gentle but repetitive music blared out from both horns causing Spike to dance along with it while Starlight felt like she wanted to throw up. Lightning Dust thought about abandoning her two companions but was quickly spotted by Starlight whose glowing eyes prevented her from escaping.

" What is this place?"

" It belongs to some researcher and his daughter."

" Cool! I want to pay them a visit."

" And what about your prank?"

Starlight laughed. " I'm not about to pass up on a good opportunity to pull an extra prank on the side." She then rubbed her chin before tilting her head to the side and staring longingly at the music shaped house before laughing again. " A researcher you say? Maybe I can borrow some of their work or smash it to pieces because I think it would be funny just to see their faces in tears."

Going to Snips location beneath the Deku Palace and back to the Swamp Spider House didn't take as long as I thought it would, yet I still felt like an idiot for having to pay him a visit in the first place. I changed forms so that I could jump across each lily pad as a Deku Scrub instead of wading through the poisonous water and slowly taking damage, yet it would have been a quicker trip to the palace had I become a Zora and simply walk over there--I would have taken damage in this manner--since once again time was against me.

It felt weird being back here again after so long after rescuing Fluttershy from Odalwa and preventing the monkey from being punished, yet I knew that inside the palace, within the confines of the throne room, the monkey was imprisoned within that cage and Tree Hugger's advisors were telling her that she needed to exert her authority by doing something she despised while strengthening their own influence over her. While I wanted nothing more than to give those guys a piece of my mind, I knew it would do nothing since my actions would be erased upon resetting time, and it would make me come off as being a bully once again.

Going to the right of the palace entrance and using the lily pads to hop my way across to where the secret entrance was, I dropped down a large hole in the ground that lead me to where Snips was selling his wares, yet I decided to do some other things besides purchasing some Magic Beans--I bought three of them from him because I wanted to make sure I had more than enough for what I wanted. Along with buying the beans, I also filled two of my bottles with water and the remaining two with bugs before leaving Snips' shop. In my mind, the blunder could have been avoided and so I was making sure not to repeat the blunder again.

Leaving the palace, I began hopping across the lily pads until I reached the entrance to the Swamp Spider House before grabbing my face and pulling off the Deku Mask. I didn't want to flip back my hair as my mind was too fixated on getting back to my previous location inside and pretending that nothing happened. The man greeted me as I entered though he was curious about why it took me a lot longer than I said, yet I simply told him that I had to pick up some other items because of a feeling I had in my heart. I made my way over to the room that had the slab of rock and when I entered the room, the boulder wasn't there so at the very least I didn't have to blow it up again.

This time, I planted the Magic Bean causing a tiny sprout to appear, and seeing it removed the anger that was clouding my heart. While Princess Twilight was probably aware of my inner turmoil over my mistake, she chose not to talk about it and instead allow me to come to a sensible conclusion. I couldn't hide the truth regarding my temper from anyone--myself included--no matter how hard I tried to. I knew it was my biggest weakness because I wanted everything perfect yet it was something I still needed to work on. I would lose control yet I couldn't let it consume me or else face the alternative.

I took out a bottle of water and sprinkled it on the sprout causing it to grow in an instant, and upon stepping on it, it rose into the air before traveling along the edge of the room, giving me a pretty good view. I then noticed a Gold Skulltula crawling along the wall but since it was higher up, I would have ignored it entirely had I not used this Magic Bean. Since I had my Hookshot on hand, it was easy for me to destroy the spider and obtain my eighth token. The Magic Bean then stopped and began going back in the opposite direction leading me to believe that I only needed the plant for one Skulltula.

I sighed. " Maybe I should have just used my Hookshot. I could have avoided all of this stress."

" Now that you mention it, that would have been the right option." Twilight said.

" Let us never speak of this again."

" Agreed."

" By the way... Why are you looking up at the ceiling?"

" Some Gold Skulltulas could be hiding inside of beehives hanging down from the ceiling." Twilight answered. " You should be able to knock them down using the Hookshot though you can also use arrows and your Deku form's bubbles though the latter does have some control issues. Besides, getting those items was a smart idea in case we run into similar problems in other rooms. Granted, we misjudged the situation with that Skulltula but we can easily learn from our mistakes, right?"

I slowly nodded my head." I guess so."

" Let's climb up to the second floor and continue our search."

" Hopefully, we won't have to do anything like this ever again." I said. There was a ladder propped up against a ledge so I climbed up it and onto the second where the familiar scratching sounds echoed through my ears. I turned towards the slab of rock and saw what made the noise. " Guess this rock proved useful after all since a Skulltula is crawling along it."

" Best to use the Hookshot here."

I nodded and took it out before aiming. " You know, I'm actually curious as to how these things are able to give off that golden colour despite how creepy they are. During my previous journey, I encountered them in large numbers though they were white, the standard colour for bones."

" Perhaps they are a unique strain?"

" Maybe."

" We probably shouldn't worry too much about it since our aim is to destroy them."

" I suppose so."

Using my Hookshot, I destroyed the Gold Skulltula using the chain and then using it again to collect the ninth token. There was a door on the opposite side of the room that required me to reach it via the wooden catwalk I stood on so I walked over to the door, destroying a Gold Skulltula attempting to hide behind a lit torch, and picking up the tenth token which meant only twenty more remained. Unlike the other cursed house, this one needed uncommon items in order to find the spiders, an unfortunate truth I had to learn--I couldn't forgive myself for not being better prepared.

Opening the door and entering the central room again, I saw a couple of Deku Flowers on opposite ends of the room and door on the other side. Scratching sounds could then be heard coming from my left so I walked over to a pillar in the corner that seemed inconspicuous yet it had a Gold Skulltula crawling in place. Slashing it twice with my sword and collecting token eleven, I needed to think about my next course of action. Since I couldn't see any other way across aside from using the Deku Flower, I knew that I needed to change forms.

Taking out the Deku Mask and putting it on my face, I began to convulse as always when donning this mask, and a scream later combined with my body shimmering between human and Deku completed my transformation. I didn't understand why each mask made me react differently, like each had its own quirk when it came to changing forms. Hopefully this wouldn't become problematic in the final region where it seems changing between my bodies was going to be the order of the day if Princess Twilight is correct in her assumption--I knew she was correct as I never knew her to be wrong about such things.

Diving into the Deku Flower and launching myself into the air, I noticed another flower to my left and a Gold Skulltula on the wall beyond that. I knew it meant having to switch back to my regular self for just a few moments--and complaining about wasting a transformation--but I had no choice as Her Highness did say I needed to get over such an attitude. Landing on the flower and making sure not to fall off, I grabbed my face, pulled off the Deku Mask, and switched over to the Hookshot before destroying the Gold Skulltula. I then fired the chain again, pulled the twelfth token over, collecting it, and putting on my mask again.

I supposed I could have destroyed the spider with a bubble and then launched myself over to the token via the Deku Flower but the method I used work despite wasting a transformation--actually it was more like wasting a change back--so I couldn't really complain. My eyes then noticed another patch of soft soil situated on the wall on the other side of the room so jumping into the Deku Flower and launching over to the other side, I landed and walked over to the soil. The scratching sounds coming from it made it obvious that a spider was nestled inside and it seemed leaving proved useful as I had what was needed.

Luckily, I could use bottles in any form making it easier for me. I took out one of the bottles that had a bug in it, uncorked it, and shook out the insect where it immediately climbed up the wall and dug its way into the soil. A Gold Skulltula jumped out and onto the moments later where I used my spin attack, destroying the spider in one hit and collecting the next token giving me a total of thirteen.

" I don't hear anymore Gold Skulltulas in this room."

I wiped my forehead. " That could have gone a lot better."

" You started off well only to run into... a complicated mess."

I frowned. " No need to sugarcoat it, Twilight. I should have been prepared by bringing the necessary items before attempting this cursed house." I walked up the wall where the soft soil was and began pounding my head up against it several times.

" Feeling better now?"

" Yes."

Princess Twilight frowned. " You didn't need to hit your head like that."

" It was something I needed to do to relieve me of some serious stress."

" Things will be different next time, Sunset." Twilight said. " Think of this as a minor failure not by your own hand but because we were never told that such items were needed to acquire some of the Gold Skulltulas. That man back at the entrance should have mentioned what was necessary before we went inside yet he didn't resulting in you questioning your own merits and losing your temper."

" Come to think of it." I said as I moved away from the wall and walked towards the door. " Why did he even come here in the first place? I mean, who in their right mind would
go somewhere that was crawling with spiders that curse any who enter their domain?"

" Greed."

I scratched my head. " Greed?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " It would be the most logical assumption. Greed causes people to want to do anything to acquire vast wealth yet it proves to be their undoing as their actions result in changing not only their lives but those around them. If it isn't wealth that destroys them, then power is the next best thing and I've seen many ponies succumb because of wanting power." Her Highness then looked at me causing me to lower my head slightly. " Of course, some are able to be saved from their own ambitions and end up becoming great friends in the process while the rest are lost."

" I don't see any greed around here."

"Neither do I."

" Maybe we'll understand once we save him."

" Yes."

Going through the door and entering the next room, the usual scratching sounds of Gold Skulltulas could be heard all around me, yet there was another sound that dwarfed all the rest, the sound of someone or something snoring. Looking above my head, I saw six beehives in a circle and that told me there had to be spiders hiding in some of them though it would also mean being plagued by bees--I wasn't allergic or anything so I didn't have to worry about that. I produced a bubble in my mouth and fired it at the beehives, causing a couple to drop down and break upon hitting the ground.

A single rupee came out of one while a bee came out of the other though I quickly raised my shield just as the bee came along and proceeded to jab its stinger into my shield repeatedly as though it were possessed. I was safe behind my shield though it meant being stuck until this bee either wore itself out or fly away after getting bored. Neither option appeared to be happening so now I needed a way to get rid of it without being stung. At that precise moment, a howling sound echoed throughout the room indicating that nightfall had finally occurred back outside.

Night of the First Day - 60 Hours Remain.

" I need some advice here, Twilight."

" This Giant Bee is pretty relentless though it will fall in one hit if you strike it." Twilight said. " All you can do is either attack it or attempt to run away though given your current position, running away isn't an option."

" Does this mean getting stung?"

" Are you allergic?"

" No."

" Then all you'll feel is a slight sting if you let it strike you."

Lowering my shield, the bee began flying around me making it difficult to keep track of its movements so I chose to simply ignore it and hoped that it would fly away. It continued to pester me before stinging me in my chest using its stinger resulting in me yelping in slight pain and performing my spin attack in response. The attack destroyed the bee leaving me to focus on the other beehives and I used another bubble to bring down the next three. These all smashed on the ground revealing two Gold Skulltulas and another rupee--I was relieved a bee didn't come out of any of the hives that dropped.

Before jumping down, I looked over the side to see how far of a drop it was. While it was certainly high, it shouldn't be high enough where I would get injured in the process or cause my knees to buckle. Both Gold Skulltulas were near each other and to the right of where the Deku Flower stuck out via the ledge it was on, so it was obvious for me to jump down to the left, and I did just that, landing on the ground without injury. I then performed my spin attack, destroying both spiders, and acquiring two tokens giving me fifteen. That was when the snoring became apparent to me.

Sleeping inside of a Deku Flower was a Deku Scrub though he seemed completely unfazed by the noise I had made moments ago. I tried nudging him gently to see if that would wake him up but to no avail. I then tried shouting and even shaking him repeatedly but again he refused to wake up. This Deku Scrub was definitely a heavy sleeper so it looked like a different approach was necessary to wake him. I closed my eyes and began pondering over what to do when an idea came to me. I had a song that could wake him and I slapped my forehead because of not realizing it straight away.

I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt where it transformed into the Deku Pipes, and I played the Sonata of Awakening--I needed a few minutes to remember how the song played--causing the Deku Scrub to wake up with a start. At first, he felt woozy over suddenly being woken up prematurely but then he turned to face me and what constituted as a smile--or what I thought was one--appeared on his face.

" Yawn... That was a pleasant sleep. Hey! What's a fellow Deku Scrub doing here?"

" I was going to ask you the same question."

" I came here to find some shelter for the night because going through the swamp at night is dangerous."

" Because of the monsters?"

The Deku Scrub nodded. " Combined with all that poisonous water, no Deku Scrub worth their Deku Nuts would be crazy to go out there until sunrise. When I found this flower, I suddenly felt really tired, and fell asleep though it would have been a couple of days ago now. Is the poison still out there in the water?" I nodded in head in response and the Deku Scrub looked dejected. " I was afraid you would say that. By the way, do you know what has been going on as of late?"

Did this Deku not know what happened to Fluttershy? Granted, Starlight caused all this damage around the same time this guy went to sleep so him not knowing made sense, but it was still surprising to hear him ask me that. I began explaining the situation though it pained me because my efforts had since been reversed. " The Deku Kingdom is in an uproar over the princess having gone missing, believed to have been abducted.

The Deku Scrub snapped to attention. " What!? The Deku Princess is missing!? Why didn't you say so!?"

" I just did."

" Never mind that. Where is she? Is she safe? Who could have done this?"

" The Deku Queen suspects an evil force while her advisors suspect a monkey."

" A monkey? Really?" The Deku Scrub asked. " But, I thought we Deku lived in peace with the monkeys. Why would a monkey do something like that? I have to agree with what our glorious queen believes despite you telling me."

At least this Deku wasn't as blind as all the rest who believed the advisors. I sensed that he wanted to leave so I pushed the conversation in that direction. " I know you don't like the idea of going outside at night, but our Deku Queen could do with some emotional support right now. I was at the Deku Palace recently--they are allowing any Deku to go inside--so my word is true about her state of mind."

" No one can enter the palace unless it were an urgent occasion."

I nodded. " Then you should go there right now."

" Normally, I wouldn't because of the monsters at night, but the queen needs support."

" Plus, that monkey needs a friend."7

" You said that the advisors want the queen to punish the monkey?" The Deku Scrub asked. " If she is in a sad state of mind and her advisors are suggesting that the monkey be made an example of, I fear she will carry out such an action. Our queen is very gentle unlike her late husband, the Deku King, who withered long ago, yet ruled with an iron fist and with a temperment that could be described as scary, but she has been known to lose her emotions and act in a manner similar to her late husband. If that monkey is going to be punished, I don't believe I can support him or else I would be punished for defying the queen."

I was silent for a few moments before responding. Despite this Deku Scrub's noble intentions, his loyalty to Tree Hugger was very strong, and I could understand him not wanting to betray her. Still, I felt disheartened knowing he thought that way. " Then go to the palace in the name of the queen."

The Deku Scrub nodded and was about to leave when he turned around and hopped over to a mass of vines blocking a small tunnel entrance. " I must thank you, fellow Deku, for telling me of such important matters. At the end of this tunnel is a golden spider that I trapped when I first came in here. I don't know why so many of them are around here but it seems we Deku are unaffected by some kind of curse they are spreading. Any non-Deku might not want to be here until those things have all been destroyed. Anyway, let me remove these vines before I take my leave for the palace.

He then began cutting down the vines using his own spin attack and when he was finished, he disappeared into the ground leaving me and Princess Twilight to continue on with our mission of destroying the Gold Skulltulas. I felt a little sick inside because of having to talk about Fluttershy's plight yet I had no other choice because he would have stuck around leaving unable to reach what he had imprisoned at the end of the tunnel. I walked down the tunnel and hanging on the wall was the Gold Skulltula the Deku Scrub described. I destroyed it using my spin attack, picked up the sixteenth token, and walked back as there was no where else to go.

Suddenly, scratching sounds could be heard coming from giant pots that were to my left, and that meant I had to roll into them in hopes of getting the spiders to come out. Since my current body lacked the necessary weight, I grabbed my face, took off the Deku Mask, flipped back my hair, and inspected the pots a little closer. Judging from how big they were, I wouldn't be able to smash them--not even with Darmani's power--so it looked like I was about to get some headaches again.

Rolling into the first pot yielded nothing but rolling into the second caused a Gold Skulltula to jump out so I attacked it and collected the seventeenth token upon destroying it leaving three more pots for me to roll into. The next pot also yielded nothing, same with the fourth, but then the final pot caused another spider to jump out, landing on the ground a few feet away from me. I slashed it with my sword and collected token number eighteen leaving only twelve more remaining. My eyes caught sight of a large stack of pots in one corner of the room and it was practically begging me to smash them all.

I did exactly that, smashed each pot with my sword, and accidentally destroying another Gold Skulltula in the process giving me nineteen tokens. I then placed the Deku Mask on my face knowing I needed to be on the upper floor--also because of the Deku Flower--and I immediately began convulsing before screaming out loud seconds later and watching my body parts shimmer and change from human to Deku until I was finished. If I recalled correctly, unlike other Deku Flowers, this one could launch me up much higher--I could practically hit the ceiling if the launch power was high enough.

Jumping into the Deku Flower, I launched myself straight up like a rocket and saw a ledge that housed two pots, a door, and a Gold Skulltula on the wall. I floated over and landed after a few minutes--my flight time lasted a lot longer than usual--and attacked the spider giving me the twentieth token.

" Why did you hover for so long?" Twilight asked.

" I couldn't land until the power of flight had worn out."

" It seems the yellow Deku Flowers have a much longer flight time for Dekus who jump into it."

" Not to mention a high launching height."

" This could prove very useful." Twilight said. " By the way, you don't have to use up your entire flight time. You can easily cancel out of flying by closing up your flowers and dropping down though I suggest not doing that while being over an abyss or something similar to that."

" I never had to try it before."

" Because you only flew for short bursts at a time."

" That might explain how Ms. Cheerilee was able to fly throughout the Deku Shrine even though she used an umbrella."

" If my suspicion is right about the final region requiring you to use all of your transformations, then you are sure to run into this kind of Deku Flower again." Twilight said. " In the meantime, we should continue on with what we're doing here. Only ten more Gold Skulltulas remain until the curse around here is broken."

" Twilight?"

" What is it?"

" How do you feel about me being able to change into different forms?"

Princess Twilight was surprised by my question and it took her a few moments to come up with an answer. " When I first saw you back at the start of this journey, I didn't have my proper memories and I believed myself to be Tatl but when I found out the truth, I was honestly shocked at what you had become until I realized it wasn't your fault that you were turned into a Deku Scrub. It took me a while before I could get used to your ability but it's proven to be most exhilarating given that I never would have imagined anyone could have the power to change forms without the use of magic or being a Changeling."

" In other words?"

" I enjoy seeing you become different creatures and embracing their skills."

" That's a relief."

" Why do you ask all of a sudden?"

" Something compelled me to simply ask it." I answered. In my mind, I actually had no idea why I asked Her Highness such an unusual question, but I had asked it and gotten an answer in return, and placing a heavy burden on my shoulders to explain my actions. " I sometimes think you might be jealous because I'm experiencing a different kind of magic while you were stuck being a fairy who has to guide me around."

" You were destined to have that power, Sunset, and I'm not going to start questioning destiny."

" But, aren't you jealous?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " Jealousy only breeds contempt and that in turn goes against everything I stand for. I enjoy being a fairy because I get to see the world from a much different perspective, am immune to all kinds of environments, can use special magic gifted only to fairies, and having a vast knowledge about people, places, and monsters. If anything, what I was given in this world makes me special, much like having transformation masks makes you special, Sunset. Besides, jealousy wouldn't look good on me anyway and besides, you were once jealous yourself, remember?"

I blushed for a few moments. " Not my best moment, huh?"

Princess Twilight shook her head again. " You've changed since then, Sunset, and I'd like to think my guidance has been beneficial to you. Sure, you've come to make decisions on your own without needing my say so and look what it's done for the people of the human world. The world you call home is much better now than it was before because of you."

I blushed again. " Oh stop it."

" Be proud of those achievements."

Her Highness was right about how I used to be jealous. When I learned that she had become my successor as Princess Celestia's student and an alicorn, the amount of jealousy I possessed was without equal and all I could think about was how I had been robbed of my destiny. I could think about proving that I was meant to have ascended and I went to great lengths to make Princess Twilight as miserable as I could all while boosting my own twisted ego to greater heights. Jealousy cost me everything and I was forced to start over from scratch by working my way back up for the right reasons.

It took a couple of months before I had earned everyone's trust and they haven't regretted it since. While I may no longer be jealous over not being an alicorn--I still might be given the chance to ascend some day--my temper was still an issue that needed to be dealt with. So long as anything got under my skin and continued to be a grievance, my anger would boil and there was no telling what I was capable of doing. The calming exercise Princess Twilight was taught by Princess Cadance is something I really should use whenever I lose control of my emotions. It would allow me to experience nirvana for a few moments.

Opening the door and heading back into the main room again, I looked to my left and saw a Crystal Switch. I hadn't seen many of those during my journey but I knew that activating it would change something. I then noticed a Gold Skulltula hanging on the opposite wall and a crate on the ledge above it seemed suspicious. I activated the Crystal Switch causing a ladder to appear directly on top of the spider though it merely warped out in front of it--this would be one of those glitches--but before jumping down below, I looked up to see if there was anything suspicious and sure enough there were a few more beehives.

" I'm not sure if I have enough magic power."

" You filled up on magic before coming here and you've only used those bubbles of yours twice."

" Oh, so I am good to go then."

Princess Twilight nodded. " If you still feel cautious about it, why not try listening to the sounds those Gold Skulltulas make. If your hearing is good then you should be able to tell which of those beehives could be hiding one, but again watch out for those Giant Bees. They will attack you the instant they come out of their hives to get revenge but hopefully there aren't any inside."

" What about a well-place bubble shot?"

" Yes, I suppose that would work but you should still take my advice into consideration."

Her Highness felt that I was ignoring her suggestion, and to be honest I kind of was as I believed my method would work. The only problem with my idea was that the bubbles I fired from my mouth had a tendency to float about once they began moving and even if I were to make a perfect shot, there was no guarantee of it working. I chose instead to close my eyes and listen to the sounds coming from the beehives. It took me a few seconds to hear the noise that I've come to know and it came from the beehive that was the furthest away from me on the ceiling--it was behind the others.

" Found it." I said as I fired a bubble.

" You took my advice."

" My idea was flawed."

" The erratic movement?"

I nodded my head. " A shame the bubbles do that otherwise it would truly be a perfect weapon." The bubble smacked the back beehive causing it to drop to the ground, break upon impact, and the Gold Skulltula leaping out and landing on the floor. " Looks I guessed correctly on my first attempt." I fired another bubble at the spider that was stuck on the ladder before jumping down to the ground below, using a spin attack to destroy the other one, and collecting two more tokens to give me a total of twenty-two. " I never would have guessed that this body was so good at attacking monsters."

" The spin attack is a Deku Scrub's most powerful attack."

" I would have said the bubble myself."

" Both are interchangeable, Sunset, as one is physical and the other is magical."

" Fair enough." I said. " Now where should we go next?"

" The ladder that materialized when you activated the Crystal Switch earlier is begging you to climb it." Twilight answered. " It will give us access to the other side of this room and perhaps lead us to a room previously inaccessible."

Just as I was about to walk over and climb up the ladder, a scratching sound suddenly sounded out behind me. I turned around and barely noticed the legs of a spider hiding behind a pillar situated in the corner of the room. Rather than use another bubble, I jumped up onto a step, walked over to the Gold Skulltula, used a spin attack to destroy it and collected the next token--twenty-three down and only seven left before I was done. With that done, I went back to the ladder and climbed up it to the upper ledge and noticed another patch of soft soil though I wasn't annoyed as I had the right items for it.

Another Gold Skulltula could be seen above a passageway that ended at a door but I decided to go with some human ingenuity and conserve magic. Grabbing my face, I took off the Deku Mask, and flipped my hair back before switching out for my Hookshot. Firing the chain at the Gold Skulltula, it was felled with one shot leaving behind its token, and I fired the chain again, pulling the token over to me and giving me twenty-four.

It turned out that the soft soil didn't house any spiders as I couldn't hear any scratching sounds so that meant a Magic Bean was needed instead. I was so relieved in knowing that buying an extra bean from Snips turned out to be a wise investment otherwise I would be making my way back over to his shop right about now. Taking out the bean from my pocket, planting it in the soft soil, and waiting for a few seconds, the sprout rose up prompting me to take out the other bottle I filled with water and sprinkling it to make it grow--in hindsight I could have just used the water from the cursed house instead of getting it from where Snips was.

When the sprout grew up into a platform, I stepped on it and it took me over to the passageway that lead up to the door. As I walked towards the door and opened it to enter the next room, my jaw dropped upon seeing quite a magnificent sight. The room consisted of a tree in the middle whose leaves had long since fallen off with strange shrubbery running around the perimeter of the room, yet the oddest thing was the Gossip Stone just sitting there staring at me with its powerful gaze. Since I didn't have the Mask of Truth, I couldn't understand what message it was conveying but perhaps that would soon change.

" There are plenty of Gold Skulltulas around here."

" I can see one over there crawling about in the grass."

" This tree is certainly fascinating considering that it grew in a place like this."

I rolled my eyes. " That Gossip Stone is something we'll have to ignore."

Princess Twilight was surprised that I knew what it was. " Oh? You've seen it before?"

I nodded. " They were plentiful during my previous journey though I never utilized them all that much. I received a mask back then that could allow those stones to peer into my mind upon wearing it and share whatever secrets they knew hence their name. Gossip Stones practically know everything and no one ever suspects them of eavesdropping."

" Quite the dangerous power."

" That's what I was told which is why I never used it."

" Have regrets about that?"

" A little."

" Maybe you'll get another chance to use it again someday."

" Perhaps sooner than I think." I said. While I strongly believed that man back at the beginning of the cursed house was wearing the Mask of Truth based on his weird-looking eye, it was something I couldn't just guess and assume it was the truth. No, I needed to destroy every Gold Skulltula to break the curse and see for myself if I was right or not. " Don't read too much into my words unless you already figured out their meaning."

" I have a good idea as to what you suspect regarding the man we met."

It didn't surprise me to know that Her Highness had suspected the exact same thing. After all, she was incredibly gifted and could figure things out quite easily that would take others a long time before they could come to the same conclusion. While I wasn't as well versed as Princess Twilight given how I abandoned my studies, I did understand certain things better than she did and I knew she was impressed with what I had come to know. It wasn't meant to serve as a form of bragging but rather show that despite my current path, I was capable of figuring things in my own manner.

Walking forward into the shrubbery, I began slashing about with my sword in hopes of connecting with a Gold Skulltula since I did see one crawl into the thicket. At first, my efforts weren't working and I felt dejected but then my sword suddenly connected with something--it was the spider--resulting in a token appearing. My sword then connected with something else resulting in a second token that I collected along with the other one giving me twenty-six. It seemed a second spider had been hiding in the shrubbery though I didn't realize it until it got destroyed by my sword.

I decided to take a closer look at the tree out of a desire to embrace the fact that I once ran among the trees when I was a filly in Equestria. Sure, I wanted to study instead so that I could expand my own abilities, but Princess Celestia insisted on me going outside the castle every now and then and just run about for no reason until it got boring. I initially despised doing it but it quickly became one of the few things I enjoyed that didn't involve magic or studying. Perhaps if I had expanded my own horizons, things would have turned out better than what they did.

The tree itself looked old--it probably had been here for a few decades or maybe longer than that--in that the bark was peeling off in places and it was showing signs of rot, but it was miraculously sturdy due to holding up the ceiling with its branches. Had this cursed house been built around this tree? Or had it been planted here long ago and left to fend for itself against nature and eventually the Gold Skulltulas who would thrive here? Sadly, I had no answers to either question as there was very little information about this place other than being cursed. It also wouldn't prove useful in the overall grand scheme so it was a curiosity mislead.

Looking up at the ceiling, I could see that the branches had meshed with the ceiling to create a rather eerie looking harmony. The lack of leaves confirmed my initial suspicion of how long it had been here, yet my eyes were clearly focused on the three Gold Skulltulas crawling about on the branches. It was just like what happened back at the other cursed house with the chandelier only now it was an old tree. Since I only knew of one way to bring all three spiders down, I rolled into the tree headfirst forcing them to jump down though none of them decided to scamper away into the thicket as a means of hiding from me.

" I am really hating hurting my head." I moaned as I rubbed a sore spot on my head.

" You could have become a Goron and just punched the tree to shake them loose."

" And knock down the tree!?"

" Hmmm... Yes, I suppose that would have been a problem." Twilight said. " If you had punched the tree in that manner, combined with the fact that it is very old, it would have caused this entire room to cave in on itself."

" That and I didn't want to hurt the tree."

" Nothing wrong with that."

" My head may be woozy again but I'll quickly get over it." I said. I needed about a couple of minutes for my head to stop spinning before I began going after the Gold Skulltulas around the tree, destroying each one in a clockwise manner, acquiring their tokens giving me twenty-nine altogether. " I'm still missing one token and we've been in every room!" In all the excitement of collecting so many tokens at once, I had reached the conclusion that one spider had somehow eluded me though I wasn't sure where. " Do you suppose we might have missed something that was obvious in a previous room?"

Princess Twilight began floating back and forth. " I think we were pretty thorough in our search so I would say that the last Gold Skulltula has got to be in this room. I am surprised that so many were in this one room to begin with, as though they all started here and spread themselves to other rooms throughout the house." She then looked up at the ceiling and immediately started bopping me on the head repeatedly until I waved my hand about a few times to make her stop. " Sunset! I can see a few beehives above us so perhaps one of them contains the final Gold Skulltula we're looking for?"

" That would be incredibly convenient."

" And it would mean there were six spiders in this one room alone."

" Let's take of this last one and get out of here."

" I suggest using your Hookshot instead of the bubbles you use as a Deku Scrub."

Nodding my head and taking out the Hookshot, I looked up at the ceiling and saw only two beehives hanging down from above. Using my gut feelings, I fired the chain at the beehive to my right, watched it drop down and smash upon the floor, and a Gold Skulltula popped out and landed nearby--I was surprised that I got it right on my first try. In any case, I destroyed the spider and collected the token giving me thirty. At last, I was finally done with this cursed house though I could have finished much sooner had I picked up the required items prior to coming here.

" We're done!" I shouted as I dropped to my knees.

" The curse has been broken."

" I'm going to give that man a piece of my mind."

" Maybe we should wait until he gives us what he promised first." Twilight said. " Then you can yell at him all you want."

Unlike the other house, getting back to the entrance wasn't nearly as complicated. I went through the door back into the previous room with the Crystal Switch, dropped down, opened the door and entered the main room, and ran across the water until I reached the entry door. Opening this one up and walking through, I couldn't see where the man was at first but when I turned to my right, he was standing right there--I almost freaked out upon seeing him because of his face--changed back to a human and wearing the mask I suspected. I didn't know how he acquired it but the Mask of Truth was on his face.

" Ohhhh! You destroyed all of the cursed spiders! I'm saved! I'm no longer that hideous form I was before!"

" That was more difficult than I thought."

" I thought I was going to die!"

The man clearly ignored me and expressed himself in a rather overdramatic fashion so I coughed to get his attention. " Well, I was able to save you from being stuck as a spider forever, but what convinced you to come here in the first place? No one would come to a cursed house unless they were tempted by their own desires and wanting to seek their fortune at the cost of their own lives."

" You know me quite well."

" What do you mean?"

The man lowered his head. " My desire for wealth compelled and condemned me to being cursed by those spiders. Some time ago, I was given this mask by a random stranger who convinced me that it could give me riches beyond my wildest dreams. I was initially skeptical of his claims but he was able to use his honeyed words to convince me to take it off of his hands and use it as I saw fit."

" Did you see what he looked like?"

The man shook his head. " He was wearing a cowl that covered his face along with a cloak but he was rather short and plump." I thought he was talking about Ganondorf when he mentioned "honeyed words" but it seemed it was some other person who had given him the mask. Come to think of it, Ganondorf wasn't the kind of person who would stoop to such an action when he could be much more direct with his ambitions. " He told me to come to this house and follow some instructions that were inscribed somewhere in here, but I couldn't find no such thing, and I wound up being cursed in the process."

" Sounds like you were tricked."

" Yes, and I am shamed of it."

" What will you do now?"

" Had I known that this was going to happen to me, I would have refused the stranger and went about my business." The man answered. " Since you saved my life and I no longer need this mask, you may take it off my hands. Here! It's yours now!" He then took off the Mask of Truth--revealing his face--and handed it over to it where I accepted it. It felt strange knowing that it came from complete stranger but this was one more mask I needed in order to acquire the ultimate mask. " That mask was passed down by an ancient tribe known as the Sheikah but no one knows anything about them."

" They existed in Termina?"

The man nodded his head. " That's what the legends say anyway. That mask will allow you understand those weird statues scattered around the land along with the thoughts of animals according to what the stranger said when he gave it to me. I don't know whether it's true or not but I'm not about to try and figure it out." He looked at the exit then at me and then back at the exit again which made me suspicious of what his motives were. " I've had enough of being here. Once I've gotten my bearings, I'm going back home with my pet dog. You should leave this place too before you end up being cursed."

He then turned around, walked over to the corner of the room, and sat down before burying his head into his hands. I thought about giving him a piece of my mind and yell at him for getting himself cursed, but I shook my head because frankly, he had been through enough already. I was about to leave the Swamp Spider House when I noticed his dog was still running around and a thought came to mind. Since I now had the Mask of Truth and he did say it could read the minds of animals, I figured I should try it out right here by picking up his dog to see what it was thinking about.

I put the Mask of Truth on my face, walked over to the dog who stopped upon seeing me, and I lifted him up into my arms. I felt absolutely at peace given what I had just been through but then a voice coming from the dog began speaking in my mind.

" Rrr-ruff! I've had it with this foolish master! What's a racing dog like me doing in a place like this? Oh, how I miss the ranch..."

Gently putting the dog down on the ground, taking off the Mask of Mask, and putting it away, I began to think about what the dog was talking about. He said he was a racing dog from the ranch though it seemed his current owner didn't seem him as such, but then I didn't recall seeing a racing track for dogs during either of my visits to Romani Ranch. Perhaps there was a location over there I never visited and perhaps I should consider it sometime since the dog longed for it. In any case, I no longer needed to linger around the cursed house so I walked outside where it was still night time.

Looking up at the night sky and consulting with Princess Twilight, we both concluded that it had just gone past midnight and that meant I couldn't prevent the robbery back in town from taking place. I now had to wait until the next cycle before I could stop Lightning Dust and have Iron Will sell that weird mask of his instead of the stolen Bomb Bag. I then considered going to the Milk Bar and help Miss Pommel with the sound check since I had all three transformation masks yet Her Highness said everyone had likely gone to bed by now so we had to wait until tomorrow night before we could help her out.

I could try and get a bigger quiver or Bomb Bag but that would involve rupees so that idea was out for the time being since I didn't have any and farming for them back in the field would be a little redundant--I could withdraw rupees from the bank yet I need them in there for that 5,000 rupee reward. I pounded my head a few times to come up with something for me to do next and continued pounding until an idea popped into my mind, and it was the dog who gave it to me all because he mentioned the ranch. I could finally pay a visit to those sisters related to Gorman.

Considering it was the middle of the night, the two sisters were probably asleep as they weren't chasing down Applejack's wagon--Apple Bloom was probably being abducted by those aliens at this point--so I had to pay them a visit when it was daylight.

" You should be careful with the Gorman Sisters, Sunset." Twilight said.

" I won't let them rob me blind."

" That's not what I meant."

" Oh?"

" You can't accuse them of attacking Applejack's wagon since that event hasn't happened yet nor will it since we didn't help Apple Bloom." Twilight answered. " If you go and call them out on it, they could see you as being trouble and we'll never get the mask they have that can allow us to reach the final region. You must pretend that you don't know about their sinister mannerisms and instead treat them like you would anyone else."

" I wonder why they act the way they do."

" The only way to know would be to go and ask them."

I thought about Princess Twilight's words for a few seconds before responding. " Maybe that isn't such a good idea after all. They could take it the wrong way and think of me as being trouble... which is just what you said." I slapped my forehead over my stupidity while Her Highness giggled prompting me to do the exact same thing. " Okay, so maybe asking them that question would be a big mistake, but perhaps asking about their relationship with Big Macintosh is in order?"

" Yes, that should be a good question though whether or not they answer it will be up to them."

Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I first played the Song of Soaring and concentrated on wanting to be taken to Milk Road. Wings then protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, and I began spinning around before disappearing then reappearing seconds later at my destination. I next played the Song of Double Time to speed up time by about six hours--the remaining time until sunrise and because I had nothing else to do--I also needed to play it a few times just so that I could remember how the notes went--until then.

Dawn of the Second Day - 48 Hours Remain.

As soon as the Cucco crowed to indicate sunrise, I turned away from the Owl Statue and began walking in the direction of the one pathway I never took in Milk Road and I soon entered a large open area that I instantly recognized as being the "ugly country" Applejack mentioned when I helped her with her delivery--the signs were also a dead giveaway. No doubt that this was the Gorman Sisters' residence as where I had entered consisted of a ramshackle house along with a stable of similar conditions, a fence that was in better condition than the house, and a campfire though it wasn't lit.

In my mind, this place didn't seem all that much though I suspected the Gorman Sisters would take offence were I to talk to them about it. In any case, I had to make sure not to accuse them or actions that hadn't happened yet otherwise things would easily get sour. If there was one positive about this place, it would be the open scenery of the mountainous region surrounding us combined with the crisp air ones comes to expect outside in an open area such as this.

My eyes then noticed the Gorman Sisters nearby working on what I assumed were chores or whatever else they were doing, but when they turned towards me upon seeing my shadow on the ground, I was surprised at who they were. Actually, I was somewhat surprised to be honest because I had a feeling one of them would portray Gorman's siblings given her attitude--she was two-faced--during the Friendship Games. The other one came completely out of the blue as she wasn't necessarily negative given she was more interested in listening to her music more than anything else.

Princess Twilight was confused. " Do you recognize them, Sunset, because I sure don't."

I nodded. " They are two more members of the Shadowbolts. The one wearing the orange overalls is Lemon Zest though I'm surprised she would be portraying a sinister character since she wasn't really antagonistic. Then again, I don't know everything about them as Twilight Sparkle doesn't like talking about her time at Crystal Prep, and I'm not going to force her to tell us just because. The other one in the blue overalls is Sour Sweet, and she was named well as she has a two-faced manner that makes it hard to take her seriously. She was definitely an antagonist especially how she treated Twilight Sparkle just because of her lack of athletic ability."

" How do you propose we talk to them?"

" Pick one at random."

" Oh."

I walked forward when Lemon Zest spoke out first. " What are you doing here? Do you know what place this is? No, I didn't think you would since you're just a kid and all, but let me tell you anyway before you start asking questions you shouldn't be. This is the Gorman Sister's horse training center where we breed the finest horses in all of Termina. You don't have a horse so there's no reason why you're even here so get lost!"

" Now, now, sister. There's no reason to be rude." Sour Sweet said.

" Why shouldn't I be, big sister? This kid is bound to cause trouble."

" If this kid proves to be trouble then we'll make sure she doesn't do it again in the future."

" Excuse me!?" I said.

Sour Sweet waved her hand and pretended that she didn't say anything. " Huh? Oh, don't mind what I just said. We Gorman Sisters do tend to get rather irritable when someone comes here without having a horse because we think they might be trying to scam us or something." I frowned at her and she responded with a defensive gesture. " Now, now... Don't get angry because of my opinion. All right, if you don't have a horse, go ahead and take a look around though you probably won't find much of interest. You definitely won't!"

" A shame she doesn't have a horse huh, big sister?" Lemon Zest asked.

" If she had one then she could have participated in our little challenge."

Lemon Zest laughed. " Like she'll find a horse around here given the circumstances." She turned towards me while pointing her finger at the nearby hill though she was likely referencing the ranch on the other side. " I'll fill you in on a little secret, kid. If you need a horse, there are a bunch of them next door at Romani Ranch, and I think the daughter now runs the place since her old man passed away a while back." Lemon Zest snickered a little when she mentioned Applejack's father and I couldn't help but feel suspicious of her honesty. " I bet she wouldn't notice if you stole yourself one and used it here."

" No need to give this child such naughty ideas, little sister."

" I guess you're right, big sister."

Sour Sweet then walked over to a table that contained a large container of milk, grabbed it, and brought it back over to me before putting it down on the ground. " How about buying some fresh milk? I'm serious about it being fresh! You look like you need some given your scrawny body and I'm feeling extra generous today."

" They sell milk at Romani Ranch you know." I said.

" Oh we know."

" Then why bring it up?"

" Because I have something special to tell you."

" What would that be?"

" That milk they produce down there at Romani Ranch is watered down a bit. It's not worth drinkin' one bit and they overcharge you on that expensive brand they love flaunting about through advertisement." Sour Sweet answered. " It makes me sick! Ahem! Anyway, my little sister and I also sell milk but we don't water it down or anything shady. Our milk is the real deal, fresh and full of vitamins. If you would like to purchase some of our fresh milk, I can sell you some for about fifty rupees though I can easily reduce the price by about ten rupees just because I'm feeling generous."

I could tell that Sour Sweet wasn't being sincere with me given that her facial expressions belied her words. Even if she and Lemon Zest weren't selling milk or breeding horses as they say they were doing, I had no intention of letting them take advantage of me. I knew what they had done to Applejack during a previous cycle of time and I wasn't going to forgive them any time soon for it. Still, despite how I felt, they weren't giving off any weird vibes to perhaps I could get my business here done without dragging it on for too long.

Speaking of milk, fifty rupees sounded like highway robbery to me though to be fair I wasn't sure how much it actually cost--I never asked Applejack or Apple Bloom at the ranch nor inquired about a price at the Milk Bar--but there was no telling if what Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest were trying to sell was nothing more than water with milk thrown in for good measure just to make it come off as such. I had to be cautious by not coming out saying to them that I wanted the mask they used during the robbery. Not only would they be suspicious that I knew they had a mask like that but also accuse me of accusing them of foul play.

" Hey! Quit your daydreaming!" Lemon Zest shouted.

" I have to agree with my little sister there." Sour Sweet said. " Quit wasting our time! Anyway, would you like to purchase some milk or not?"

I shook my head. " No thanks, I'm good."

Sour Sweet looked dejected. " Really? You sure about that? You could do with some milk to make yourself stronger." Again, I shook my head and she immediately grew angry though refrained from coming over and attacking me. " Fine! But don't come crying to us that you end up getting weak when you get older!"

" I have a horse."

" You? A horse?"

I nodded my head. " I can call her over if you want."

Sour Sweet laughed. " Now this I've got to see."

I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt and played Epona's Song--I could never forget this melody. At first nothing happened which caused the Gorman Sisters to look at me with shifty eyes, but then a familiar neighing come from behind me and the sight of my beloved steed came galloping along until she came to a stop. I couldn't whinny at her in my usual fashion as that would make both Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest suspicious--they would also think I was crazy--so instead I petted Epona on the muzzle and she gently nudged my chest in response.

While I was distracted by petting Epona, I could hear laughter coming from behind me so I turned around and both sisters were laughing at me. I didn't understand why they were doing that but then it quickly became apparent because of how they were looking at Epona. They didn't think she was special and probably thought their own horses were better though I intended on changing their tune once I had beaten them in a race. Of course, I needed to sound convincing if I were to race against them for the mask I needed to gain access to the final region east of Clock Town.

Sour Sweet stopped laughing and spoke out. " What in the world is that thing? Is that pathetic thing your horse?"

I nodded. " Yes. What of it?"

" It looked more like a mule for sure given how tiny the thing is."

" Good one, big sister." Lemon Zest said.

" What do you make of this kid's mule, little sister?"

Lemon Zest walked up to where Epona and I were standing and leaned forward to get a closer inspection. " Whoa!" She was either impressed or just pretending to be to give me some sympathy but I held firm and she eventually walked back to where she was before. " To be honest, big sister, that there horse may be small but it has some pretty powerful legs not to mention a well-groomed mane. Whoever bred and raised it knew what they were doing and I may be even more honest, they could very well run us out of business, and that is no laughing matter."

" I should say not!"

" What shall we do?"

" I'm not sure."

I then spoke up. " I have a suggestion?"

" Then let's hear it." Sour Sweet answered. " I could do with another laugh."

I needed to make this count. " Your sister said that my horse looks like she was raised well but I would like to test her theory further by racing her against other horses that are much larger in size. It might sound strange coming from a kid but what do you two have to lose?"

The two sisters then walked to the side and began talking amongst themselves while occasionally looking in my direction. My idea wasn't explained very well since I had to make it up but hopefully they believed me and were convinced to challenge me. Granted, I was at a disadvantage were they to agree since my horse was young compared with their adult stallions yet I needed to have faith in Epona. Of course, it didn't really matter if my words weren't convincing enough. As the two continued talking amongst themselves, pondering over what to do, my heart began beating heavily.

I hoped they would agree to race against me not only because I wanted to prove Epona was better than their horses but also because without their mask, I had no chance of gaining access to the final region. Adagio said that their mask was essential so the fate of three worlds came down to whether or not the Gorman Sisters thought of me as a decent enough challenge or a kid who had gone too far with her mouth.

Chapter 50: The Ancient Graveyard

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
March 27, 2017
Chapter 50: The Ancient Graveyard.

As I continued watching the Gorman Sisters--Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest--conversing amongst themselves, whilst looking over at me from time to time, over whether or not they would agree to having a horse race against me, I looked over at their stable out of curiosity--also the smell of horses got my attention--and inside were several horses that looked incredibly powerful though their lack of expression felt disheartening to me. I could that these horses had been properly trained which proved the sisters told the truth with regards to being excellent breeders, yet I noticed something else that I immediately recognized.

Inside were the masks that they wore when they attacked Applejack's wagon, proof that I couldn't trust them even if they were to agree to my challenge, but again I couldn't exactly expose them otherwise I'd be kicked out on account of being a problem to them. I felt sorry for the poor horses who were forced into acting out in such a horrible manner, but then given their expressions I noted moments ago, they probably enjoyed the experience more than anything else. Speaking of the horses, I decided to take the time to compare them with Epona to see how she stacked up against them.

The prospects weren't good and I knew that straight away. While she was younger than they were and also smaller, Epona didn't have long legs that could give her powerful strides across any kind of terrain. Also, her small size meant those other horses could easily knock her around resulting in me being knocked off and sustaining heavy injuries. Also, I wouldn't be surprised if those two resorted to underhanded tactics to achieve victory. Granted, it's not like they were going to lose their land or anything but perhaps the thought of being beaten by a child was embarrassing.

Looking at Epona, who neighed happily, I was reminded of what happened during my previous journey. I could only remember a few things from what happened with the most prominent one being that she and I had to be as one in order to defeat our opponent. That guy... Ingo, I believe his name was, or rather Big Macintosh--he portrayed this Ingo character as I recall--wanted to race against me twice all because he couldn't stand losing, but what if Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest choose to act in a similar manner? What if they accepted my challenge and throw in a stipulation that involved having to race against them more than once and winning each time?

Of course, that race was a small track around a corral while this racetrack was much larger in scope, a truly daunting task given that I hadn't used Epona all that much during this journey and she might not have been fully raised when I somehow obtained her. The Gorman Sisters were also experts of this course--it was their racetrack--and they knew it by heart which gave them an advantage. All I could really hope for was that Epona would be able to hold her own against two full grown stallions and beat them. Not only did she need to hold her own, I had to do the same thing as my own skills were going to be put to the test.

Speaking of the Gorman Sisters, a part of me wanted to know more about how they felt towards their brother. While it wasn't really my place to know since it was obviously a private family matter, I couldn't help but wonder what their lives have been like since he left. Then again, they might not be willing to talk about such things given their angry expressions told me that talking to them about most anything would be difficult. I supposed I could ask before or after the race but perhaps doing so before would be a better idea in case losing leaves them fuming and unwilling to talk.

After what felt like an eternity--it had been about ten minutes--the two Gorman Sisters finally finished conversing before walking back over to me. I couldn't tell what they had decided since their expressions weren't giving anything away, but then Sour Sweet decided to break the silence. " My little sister and I have been pondering your request, kid, and while we have no doubts that this is a huge waste of our time, we're going to give you a chance."

My heart relaxed upon hearing that. " So you accept my challenge?"

Sour Sweet nodded slowly. " That horse of yours, if y'all can really call it one, is mighty strong for a runt, and I know better than to doubt my sister's eyes when she said it had been raised well." I looked over at Lemon Zest who was pointing two of her fingers at each of her eyes so as to confirm Sour Sweet's point. " If you want, you could sell us that horse and walk away with wealth beyond your wildest dreams."

" What!?"

" Hear me out." Sour Sweet said as she waved her hands. " If you sell your horse to us, we'll give you 1,000 rupees in return. Sure, it would put us into slight debt but then you would be richer and we would have the best horse in these here parts that would bring those nags over at Romani Ranch to shame."

" Are you being serious?"

" Quite so."

" Why would I sell my horse to you?"

" Because you're a kid who looks like she needs some money."

" I didn't ask to wear this tunic you know."

Sour Sweet ignored my last statement and continued on. " A rich kid would make all them other kids real jealous and most likely try and rob you whenever you next go into town assuming it will still be there by the time that thing above us has done whatever it's supposed to do. So what do you say, kid? Will you sell us that horse and live a life of luxury or will you keep that runt and give up on a good thing?"

I couldn't believe they were thinking I should sell Epona. Not only would that be disrespectful to those who gave her to me in the first place, it would also be a betrayal of the trust given unto me by Epona herself. Almost no one had ever been able to tame her aside from her original owner before I came along and did just that, and so I doubted that these two would be able to achieve the same thing even if they were excellent horse trainers. I could also tell that they wanted Epona because of what Lemon Zest described when she got a closer look at my beloved companion. Money was nothing without my friend by my side.

I shook my head repeatedly. " No! I'm not going to sell my horse!"

" Figured you say that, right big sister?" Lemon Zest asked.

" Can't blame you for refusing, kid." Sour Sweet answered. " Though, I attribute it to you being young and uneducated since you obviously can't see the huge profit you would have made, am I right, little sister?"

" Kids these days know so little."

" Well, we might as well address your challenge."

" Big sister and I will take you on at the same time." Lemon Zest said as she pointed at the race track. " We're going to race you using our finest horses and complete one lap around the track though that shouldn't be a problem with your horse. By the way, I don't believe we mentioned about the small fee that comes with racing us?" I shook my head though I should have realized it and Lemon Zest chuckled at my expense. " Guess it plain slipped my mind. Anyway, if you want to race us, you need to pay us 50 rupees. Think of it as a small little wager just to give us some entertainment."

" It's ten rupees, little sister!"

" What? I thought we agreed it would be 50."

" As much as I would love to charge this kid 50 rupees, I don't she even has enough for that."

" I see your point, big sister."

" No wonder you have trouble remembering the simplest of things." Sour Sweet said. " I thought you knew better than that! You're just like our middle brother sometimes though he wasn't as prone."

My first thought was that they were trying to rob me of my money by saying I needed to pay them 50 rupees. I was glad that Sour Sweet quickly addressed that though I could tell she really wanted me to pay given her sudden shift in tone. I also took offence when she said that I was poor just because they viewed me as a child. In reality, I was much older than both of them given I regressed in age when I came through the portal during my self-imposed exile--even now my mind hadn't grasped why that had happened--though to prevent any confusion, I chose to play along.

That's when I realized Sour Sweet mentioned their "middle brother", an obvious reference to Gorman himself. I now had the chance to inquire about their feelings towards him not to mention how they felt about him choosing a different life. Subtlety was needed here otherwise they might think I was trying to learn more about them for something nefarious. Between the two sisters, Lemon Zest was much more approachable, and it was because of Sour Sweet's attitude shifting between angry and really creepy. I would have thought nice but they were anything but that.

Turning towards Lemon Zest, I inquired without making it sounding obvious. " You have a brother?"

Lemon Zest was a little surprised at my sudden question but she quickly regained her composure. " Yeah, my big sister and I have a brother though we call him middle brother since he's older than me and younger than big sister. We don't talk about him as much as we should since he is our brother but when he hasn't been around here for years, you start to think of him as a forgotten relic of the past."

" Don't say it like that!" Sour Sweet shouted.

" You know it's true!"

" Middle brother made his choice!"

" I wish he hadn't."

" Enough, little sister!"

Lemon Zest then turned towards me. " I was about to say this is your fault for bringing it up, kid, but I can forgive you since you're just a kid and all. Middle bro was always the most ambitious among the three of us, always thinking that he could one day leave this place and make it big out in the world. Big sister and I kept on telling him to face reality and accept being a horse breeder, yet he wouldn't have any of it and wanted to prove his point."

" He never was any good at raising horses."

" Middle bro never had the knack, big sister."

" One day, he upped and left the racetrack to fulfill his dream of being an entertainer."

Lemon Zest then looked up at the sky. " To think that if we never went to the carnival that one year, he would still be here working with us instead of living the dream and entertaining the masses with his troupe of performers he hired." I looked at her face and it seemed like she was shedding some tears but I kept quiet just in case she thought I was calling her out or something. " Remember when we all went to the Milk Bar in town, big sister? Middle bro wanted to see that Zora band perform so badly and insisted on bringing us along. What did they call themselves again?"

" The Indigo-Go's or some such nonsense."

" Oh yeah!" Lemon Zest exclaimed. " That lead singer completely mesmerized middle bro so much that he wanted to become an entertainer instead of raising horses. Neither of us felt that way when we heard her sing those notes but then it doesn't help that we're tone deaf."

Sour Sweet then looked up at the sky. " Middle bro hasn't written to us or been back here for years and that makes it hard for us to think about him from time to time. He makes me mad sometimes because of that!" Her face turned red in anger but she quickly calmed down before lowering her head again. " Despite that, we still miss middle bro and often wonder if the world had been fair to him and not cruel like it does to others."

" What about that mask of his, big sister?"

" That thing!?"

" Yeah."

" Don't ever mention that accursed thing ever again!" Sour Sweet shouted. " You know what that mask does to the two of us whenever we used to see middle bro wearing it to get his point across over his dreams? Every time we criticized him for wanting to leave the racetrack, he would put that thing on and we'd completely fall apart. I don't know how a simple mask could reduce us to tears despite it actually being capable of doing so. Great! Now I can't get that thought out of my mind no thanks to you!"

" Sorry, big sister."

Sour Sweet then turned towards me, anger clearly on her face thanks to Lemon Zest. " Enough thinking about the past! We're going to race you right now, kid, and you will pay us ten rupees right now! No exceptions!" While the two of them were bickering a moment ago, I slipped my hand into my pocket and took out ten rupees just as a safety precaution given my lack of trusting either of them. " I see you've got ten rupees in your hand so give them to me right now!" I walked over to where she was standing and dropped them into her palm where she pocketed them in her pocket before smiling. " I expect more coming our way soon enough."

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" We're horse breeders and trainers so we're professionals."

" I don't see that as an advantage."

" You've got a lot of spunk, kid." Sour Sweet said. " You know what? I'm going to make this a lot more interesting. If you manage to beat both of us then I'll give you something really good in return, and this is a promise I shall keep but only if we're beaten--like that will ever happen. Okay! Bring that runt of a horse over there to the starting line and we'll get this race started once we bring over our horses."

As Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest walked over towards their stable to get their horses, I walked back over to Epona and patted her on the head before quietly whinnying at her to which she responded in kind. Since I had no reins, saddle, or anything else with her--she had none of these when I first came to this world--I had no other choice but to ride her as is so hopefully my butt wouldn't get chafed or anything like that in the process. Fortunately, the bond we shared with each other was still as strong as ever as she trotted by my side, yet it needed to be more than that were we to prevail in this race.

While walking over to the starting line--it was nothing more than a line scrawled into the dirt--I began to think about what the Gorman Sisters said about their brother. It seemed they had issues with him all because he chose to leave this place out of wanting something better in life. Sour Sweet took it more personally than Lemon Zest did given the disdain she showed, and she especially had an issue with the mask Big Macintosh had according to what she said about him. I didn't recall him having one on hand during my previous encounters with him at the mayor's residence or the Milk Bar but perhaps I could get it from him somehow.

No doubt that this mask Big Macintosh had was one of the ones I needed to acquire the ultimate mask but the question was how was I supposed to get it from him? As I reached the starting line and climbed up onto Epona, I began thinking about what else the sisters said about their brother. They mentioned seeing a performance by the Indigo-Go's years ago that convinced him to want to become an entertainer.

Could Rarity and the other band members have performed for them? No... That didn't sound right. Judging from their choice of clothes not to mention how they talked about it as having taken place long ago, a different version of the Indigo-Go's must have performed during the carnival at the time. A shame I never spoke with Miss Pommel about it since she was their manager and all but perhaps I could get an opportunity once I was finished here. Whatever happened back then didn't seem all that significant upon first glance yet I intended on finding out as it could both enlighten my experiences and net me another mask.

The sounds of neighing suddenly came from behind me so I turned my head and saw Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest coming my way riding their horses. Both stallions were the same ones they used when they attacked Applejack's wagon though they weren't wearing any masks over their faces--I recognized the spotted pattern on the flanks of each horse--so it was to be assumed that these were their preferred horses for this kind of thing. Both horses then stood either side of Epona and she whinnied in response due to intimidation, but I patted her muzzle to calm her fears.

" See how great our horses are?" Lemon Zest asked.

" They look okay to me."

" What!? These are the finest horses we've ever bred."

" That's fine and all yet I prefer my horse."

" Just because that little runt was raised well doesn't make it the best thing out there."

" You might be right."

" What!? Are you making fun of me or something?"

" No."

" You need to calm down, little sister." Sour Sweet said. " You're letting your emotions get the better of you again, just like what happened with middle brother. Just keep calm and focus on beating this kid!"

" Yes, big sister."

Sour Sweet then looked at me, a serious look appearing on her face. " Are you ready for the race, kid? When I say the word go, our horses will start a runnin' down the racetrack and will keep going until we get back here again. By the way, there are some fence littered about but I'm certain that runt of a horse could jump over them if it had enough speed. Knowing the little thing, it'll probably trip on its hind hooves and slam both of you into the ground."

" And why didn't you mention it before?" I asked.

" It slipped my mind."

Once again, I felt annoyed because these two constantly lied or mislead me with their words but I needed to now focus on beating them in this race. While I could easily afford to take them on about a dozen times given how much money I had in my wallet, I preferred to get this over on my first attempt, and that meant Epona and I acting as one rather than merely being a horse and her rider.. My only concern was that Sour Sweet could potentially say go almost immediately, giving both of them an unfair head start, yet while it didn't seem like she would resort to such a measure, I wasn't going to ignore the possibility.

Almost thirty seconds later and Sour Sweet shouted out go, prompting both her and Sour Sweet to crack the reins on their horses, causing them to start galloping off down the track leaving Epona and me in their dust for a few moments--I knew they were going to take this challenge seriously but I wasn't expecting that. When the dust settled and I saw that they were well ahead, I gently slapped Epona's flank, and she began to gallop forward herself officially beginning the race. Unlike the Gorman Sisters, all I could do was whip my horse in the flank while they could just use their reins.

It soon became apparent though that I needed to whip her at a steady pace just so that I could keep up with the sisters. I knew Epona had a disadvantage given her small size but already things were going bad as the sisters continued pulling away from us. I also knew Epona would run out of steam were she to be whipped too many times and that would doom any chances of victory. Fortunately, I was given a subtle hint in the form of using those fences Sour Sweet mentioned. Epons was more than capable of jumping over those provided her speed was fast enough and moving in a straight line--it wouldn't work if either condition wasn't met.

The track was also littered with mud patches, something else I wasn't told about, and I could tell right away that going through these would slow a horse down. Epona avoided each patch with finesse and my whipping her flank every ten seconds allowed us to slowly catch up to the Gorman Sisters. So far, they weren't paying attention to what I was doing and probably thought I was so far behind that I had already given up or something. But, when Lemon Zest looked behind to see me coming up from behind, she alerted Sour Sweet before reining her horse to go to the right as a means of blocking me.

Despite how cheap of a tactic that was, they were doing a good job of keeping me in the back by blocking my every attempt to get in front. As we all turned the first corner, signalling the quarter way mark, I veered to the right and Epona acknowledged my desire by moving that way due to seeing a possible break, but Sour Sweet noticed my plan and immediately had her horse block my way, forcing me back to where I was before. While I was whipping Epona at a steady yet reasonable pace, the two sisters kept on cracking the reins on their horses without taking a break. They treated their horses like slaves in that fashion and my heart felt saddened in return.

Epona whinnied at me, saying that we would win this race no matter the cost, though I whinnied back at her in return telling her not to overexert herself, but the moment I spoke to her using the language of horses--I was a pony myself after all--I looked forward to see if the Gorman Sisters had heard me whinnying like a horse. To my pleasure, neither of them had heard me though if they did, they were most likely focused on winning the race. Given how both of them were riding neck and neck, I thought about whether I could use that to my advantage and have them compete with each other and ignore me.

" What are you thinking about?" Twilight asked.

" Do you think I could get them to compete with each other?"

Princess Twilight looked ahead at the sisters though she almost flew out of my pocket given how fast we were moving. " I don't know, Sunset. They both seem to be in perfect synch with each other and are determined to make sure you don't get past them. No matter how close you get to them, they will move out in front and block any attempts at overtaking them, and you can only whip Epona so often before upsetting her."

" It was worth a shot."

" You could try to overtake them when we get to the next corner."

" That's right before the finish line!"

" How do you figure that?"

Before I could answer Princess Twilight, I attempted to get past Lemon Zest once we were past the corner but again she blocked me and Epona almost went into some mud though she just managed to avoid it in time. This next part of the racetrack was a long straightaway with trees serving as an additional obstacle alongside the mud patches. I could also see fences off in the distance of varying heights, perfect for us to utilize provided neither sister could use them or prevent us from using them. Sour Sweet then swerved to the left to once again block me before veering back the other way while Lemon Zest swerved right to block me as well before veering back.

I whipped Epona's flank a little quicker than usual in hopes of maybe slipping in-between them but Sour Sweet quickly had her horse block--it looked like the thing was going to kick my steed in the face given how close it got--and I had to move back once again. When I finally had a free moment, I responded to Princess Twilight. " Once we reach the end of this straightaway, it's just one more corner to go until we reach the finish line."

" What kind of racetrack is this?"

" A straightway kind."

Princess Twilight looked confused. " Is this some kind of fancy term you learned during your time in the world you call home?"

Her response surprised me a little though it was expected. " Don't we have those kinds of things back home in Equestria?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " We normally don't have races against one another aside from special occasions."

" Wow... And I thought things had changed on that front." I said. " Anyway, a straightaway course consists of two lengthy straight runs like this one and two half-circle corners, the perfect course for beginners yet it does make sense why the Gorman Sisters would have this kind of track."

" I understand now. Fascinating."

I rolled my eyes. " In any case, we need to get past them before we reach the finish, and I figure that if the remaining corner doesn't work, we can jump over those fences that are coming up and get ahead of them that way. Before you say anything, Twilight, Epona can jump over those fences without any trouble provided she has enough speed and is going in a straight direction."

" I trust your judgment, Sunset."

Patting Epona on the head, she whinnied out loud that caught the attention of Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest, who looked behind to see that I was still behind them. In their eyes, they were shocked that I was still behind them and began arguing about something I couldn't hear other than three words: "kid", "luck", and "serious". In any case, I realized now that any attempt at pulling myself ahead was pointless so it boiled down to waiting for the perfect opportunity. I then responded to Epona by whinnying and this time the sisters looked at me with weird expressions though I chose to ignore them and kept on whinnying.

More mud patches were ahead of us and while Epona dodged them all, the Gorman Sisters' horses merely plowed through them without any problems. I was shocked at how their horses did that, also annoyed that some of the mud splattered on both of us--Princess Twilight hid inside my pocket and avoided the mud--yet their horses had large hooves, capable of smashing through mud like it was nothing.

Their horses continued plowing through the mud and I weaved left and right to avoid getting hit by speckles of mud as it kicked off of the horses' hooves and now I was really getting infuriated over how they were doing everything they could to stop from crossing the finish line first. Epona whinnied her disappointment over our predicament so she began falling back allowing Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest to pull ahead of us. Now things were looking bad and we were past the halfway point of the race so things needed to change before the sisters would get too far ahead of us.

I whipped Epona's flank to maintain our speed pace but she kept on slowing down sooner than expected because of the mud being flung at us. The fences at that point were now almost upon us and unless the sisters didn't use them, they were essentially my only chance of overtaking them. Judging from those same hooves I noticed on their horses, they looked to be rather heavy so perhaps it was impossible for their steeds to make the jump.

The fences came up and the sisters weaved in-between them--their horses couldn't jump over them--so now I had a chance to catch up and perhaps get out in front. Whipping Epona's flank and whinnying at her with encouragement, she increased her speed and began jumping the fences, each leap more majestic than the last. Each time she leapt over a fence, I had to maintain her speed otherwise she would stall and that meant having to go around, so I had to continued whipping her flank despite how uncomfortable it was.

Upon Epona jumping the tallest fence, she landed right in front of the sisters, who were surprised that we suddenly appeared out of nowhere, yet I could hear them yelling from behind me.

Now I had to ensure Epona kept our slim lead--Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest would no doubt apply the pressure--and that involved increasing my own whipping pace. My steed whinnied her displeasure but accepted it knowing it was necessary to succeed. The sisters began cracking their horses' reins even faster than ever as we approached the other corner of the track and that gave them a chance to overtake us again. All I could do was prevent one of them from getting past yet the other would succeed since the race was already lopsided--it had been since the start.

Lemon Zest began making a move by whipping the reins of her horse with greater intensity than before and pulled up beside me. " How the heck have you managed to keep up with us so far, girl? I know I said your horse had been trained well but I said that just to give you a sense of accomplishment. Big sister and I thought you'd be somewhere back at the start of the track and not all the way up here so perhaps it's time we stopped playing games."

" Maybe I'm a better rider than you thought?"

Lemon Zest gritted her teeth. " You're just full of spunk aren't you?"

" I plan on winning this race."

" We'll see about that."

" What are you doing?"

" Like I said, big sister and I aren't playing games now." Lemon Zest answered. She whipped the reins again, her horse clearly upset with her actions, but she yelled at it to shut it up before whipping even faster until her horse had pulled out in front of me. " Sorry, kid, but my sister and me have our reputation to maintain as the best horse breeders around." Her horse then plowed through some mud patches, the mud kicking off its hooves and hitting Epona causing her to fall back a little. " See you at the finish line!" She then whipped the reins though slower now and her horse galloped off leaving Epona and me to ponder our next move.

Sour Sweet then came up on my right. " My little sister had the right idea by taking this seriously. I will admit, kid, that your horse riding skills are definitely something, but don't think this means I like you or anything. I personally can't stand kids!"

" I won't let you get past me." I said.

" Let's see if you can back up those words."

I whipped Epona's flank and she galloped forward pushing us away from Sour Sweet but then the sound of her horse whinnying from behind echoed around us, and her horse stampeded past us using its size to knock us aside though Epona didn't fall over from the impact. I whipped Epona's flank and she attempted to get in front of Sour Sweet again though she was prepared and veered her horse left, blocking our path before veering right, then back before stampeding past a second time, her horse colliding with Epona, knocking her back and again she didn't fall over.

" Hey!" I called out. " No need to be aggressive!"

" Bigger horses love it!"

" That's not what your horse is saying."

Sour Sweet then looked at me with a weird look. " Huh? Are you telling me that you can understand what my horse is saying? Come to think of it, my little sister and I did hear you whinnying to your runt earlier though we thought you were pretending to be a horse or something." She whipped the reins of her horse and began pulling ahead before turning her head back and sticking out her tongue. " Looks like we Gorman Sisters win once again! No one can beat us! Oh, and that whole whinnying thing of yours... stop it! It really creeps us out so stop it. Period!"

With the Gorman Sisters now clearly in front of me as we approached the other corner, I tried overtaking them by veering off to the right in hopes that the inside part of the corner would make for a perfect opportunity, yet Lemon Zest managed to block me. I then veered left since Lemon Zest gave me a wide open space but this was blocked by Sour Sweet who got in front of me and forced Epona to move back. No matter what I tried doing, both sisters were blocking my every effort, their synchronization skills were perfect. My only chance now involved overtaking them during the final stretch.

As we came out of the corner and down the straightaway, patches of mud were everywhere including trees scattered about--the final obstacles--yet my eyes were focused on the fences that were coming up. Epona whinnied at me to let me know that the fences would be our means of victory since the Gorman Sisters were likely to ignore them, and I whinnied back at her along with an additional whinny to let her know I needed to whip her flank more than ever before. A soft whinny in response from Epona indicated that she was fine with the idea and so I whipped her flank so that she could keep up with the sisters.

Once we were in range of the fences, Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest began to swerve around them like before, and that was my chance to make the final move. I whipped Epona's flank as quickly as I could, pausing for about five seconds each time, and she jumped over each fence in succession--including the tall one--until we were once again in front of the sisters, surprising them once again, yet we knew we had to continue with the speed otherwise they would overtake us. I continued whipping her flank, pushing her to the limit, and while it seemed like she wasn't liking it given her whinnying, Epona knew it was necessary to achieve victory.

The finish line was right in front of us and the Gorman Sisters were thundering up behind, their horses whinnying like crazy over being forced to push themselves to the limit, and while their anguish angered me, I had to keep going. I continued whipping Epona--her whinnying made me upset--until we crossed the finish but just barely as Sour Sweet was mere inches from overtaking us and stealing the glory. Epona then came to a sudden stop while both sisters continued on down the track for a fair distance until they came to a stop before heading back over to the corral.

Patting Epona on the head and whinnying to show both my happiness and sadness over what we went through, Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest at first said nothing as their horses trotted over to the stable and both sister came back out a few moments later after putting their steeds away. I climbed down off of Epona before walking up to them and again they refused to speak--had my surprise victory left them both in complete silence? It turned out that wasn't the case as they were merely coming to grips with what had just happened. Finally, one of them broke their silence by freaking out.

" Shoooooooot!!!!" Lemon Zest shouted. " How the heck could we have lost!?"

" I can't believe you beat us, kid!" Sour Sweet shouted. " Our best horses couldn't beat the likes of your runt!"

" We should have jumped over those fences, big sister."

" Our horses were never trained to do that."

" Maybe we ought to change that."

Sour Sweet was about to lose her cool when she slowly calmed down before turning her attention towards me. " As much as I hate to admit it, you beat us, kid, and I will live up to my promise of giving you something in return for winning."

" But, big sister! Are you sure we can give that to this girl?"

" You have a point, little sister, but I have to keep my word."

" Just give her some rupees and be done with it."

Sour Sweet shook her head. " No, I have to give her something more than rupees. Besides, she's just a kid. What could she possibly do with it? It's just a mask after all that we happened to acquire when we went to that haunted place some years back. It should be fine to give it to her." She then walked off into the stable, rummaged around in there for a few minutes, and came back outside holding a strange looking mask. She seemed hesitant overall as she handed the mask over to me but she knew that she made a promise and knew she had to keep it as a means of saving face. " If you promise not to tell anyone where you got this from, you can have it for beating us."

" What is it?" I asked.

" This is known as the Garo's Mask." Sour Sweet answered. " Legends say that the leader of the ninja assassins who lived in the haunted region wore this mask as a symbol of authority, and his followers would respond to that mask without question as it meant their lives. Of course, it's just a legend so there isn't any real truth to it. Now, if you don't mind, girl, we'd like to focus on our work so could you please go away. In other words... get lost!"

While I wanted to scold them for how they treated their horses during the race, I knew better than to push them even further. Besides, the most important thing was getting the mask they used in their attempt at attacking Applejack's wagon--this was also a vindication for her even though she would never know about it. My anger towards the Gorman Sisters needed to be ignored so I climbed onto Epona, held the mask firmly in my hand, and she trotted forward--I had to whip her flank first to get her moving--until we left their racetrack and returned to the previous area, Milk Road.

It felt like we spent almost the entire day racing against Sour Sweet and Lemon Zest but in truth it had only been about an hour. While I could go to the final region now since I had the required mask according to what Adagio said, I still felt unprepared for what was awaiting me there. I now needed to come up with my next course of action so as to not waste anymore time in this cycle--I knew I had infinite time but wasting it wasn't my kind of thing.

As Epona galloped forward and back into Termina Field, I held up the mask that I had just won to take a closer look at it. The hollow eyes were creepy in that they gave off the impression of an unfeeling presence whose sole purpose was to inflict fear upon whoever saw this. The beak-like nose didn't really look right and the diamond-shaped head also didn't add to the overall feel of what the mask represented. The purple fabric at the bottom was perhaps its best feature though that wasn't really saying much, but to think that this mask belonged to an assassin who commanded others to kill any who got in their way.

" That was a real gruelling race." Twilight said.

" Even though it pained me to push Epona to the limit, it was necessary to acquire this mask."

Princess Twilight nodded. " She knew that you needed to make her go fast enough to keep up with the Gorman Sister in addition to winning the race, Sunset. I know Epona isn't mad at you for doing that to her. In fact, I believe she is happy she was able to live up to your expectations."

" You think so?"

Princess Twilight laughed. " Does her whinnying answer your question?" I went quiet and listened as Epona whinnied her excitement over beating two adult stallions and I couldn't help but whinny with her though Princess Twilight didn't join in as she was more serious about what I had acquired. " Now we can go to the final region as that mask was required to gain access yet I suspect you're not ready for that yet, are you?"

I shook my head. " I want to get a couple more things down before we go over there."

" What did you have in mind?"

" Well, the three big problems are now taken care of so all that remains are small issues."

" I have a suggestion."

" What's that?"

" Since you now have all three transformation masks, we can finally help out Miss Pommel with that sound check she mentioned the last time we were at the Milk Bar, but we would have to speed through time in order to do so." Twilight answered. " The Milk Bar doesn't open until 10:00pm and that means we'll have to play the Song of Double to skip through to that precise point otherwise we'd be doing nothing until then. I know you don't like wasting time, Sunset, but I don't really see any other options."

" Can we at least ride back to Clock Town?"

" It shouldn't take us that long so I say yes."

" I could spend some time picking up rupees."

" About that..."

" You think it's a bad idea?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " You don't need to get off of Epona to cut through the grass. She should be able to trample through the grass and you can pick up any items that appear when the grass gets cut. I know it sounds silly and I am basing this off of Tatl's memories but it's something you should consider."

I decided to take Her Highness' advice and veered Epona to the left where she immediately plowed through a large section of grass resulting in rupees, magic jars, arrows and recovery hearts appearing that I had her walk over so that they would be consider as having been picked up. Since I did have some spare time, I spent roughly ten minutes or so having my trusty steed continue plowing through grass and picking up any rewards that dropped though there was only so much that could be obtained--the grass would only reappear upon entering another area or leaving one.

Once I had decided that I had acquired enough items through this method--I acquired about thirty rupees along with the other stuff--I had Epona make her way over to the eastern entrance of Clock Town as this was where I needed to be to get to the Milk Bar. Going inside, I looked up at the bar and thought about how to handle things. Technically, I could go inside though it was pointless since Miss Pommel and Big Macintosh weren't likely there, and they were who I had to see about getting the mask that I now knew Big Macintosh had on his person according to the Gorman Sisters.

Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I had to first recall how the Song of Double Time worked before playing it. In an instant, time began flowing by very quickly and it was actually pretty entertaining seeing so many people moving about at such intense speed, yet from their perspective, everything was going at a regular pace while I was seeing things sped up. It soon wore off and I was back to seeing time flow normally though it was now night-time, and upon looking up at a clock hanging on the wall, the time had just gone past 10:00pm though I was surprised since it should have technically stopped at 6:00pm.

Night of the Second Day - 32 Hours Remain.

Walking up to the door, I reached out for the knob and turned it only to find that the door was locked. That was strange since the Milk Bar was supposed to open at 10:00pm but then a voice coming from inside--it belonged to Granny Smith--said that members needed to show their proof of membership. I slapped my forehead upon realizing that I forgot that to get inside required wearing Romani's Mask, the mask given to me by Applejack when I helped protect her delivery from the Gorman Sisters. To forget such an important mask made me feel bad given what I had to go through to get it.

Taking out Romani's Mask, I put it on my head--it did look weird wearing it now that I thought about it--and reached for the door knob again, Granny Smith's voice from inside saying she recognized me as a member and allowed me to come inside. Since I needed to switch to my other forms in order to help out Miss Pommel, I had to switch out Romani's Mask almost immediately and find somewhere to hide so that I could change bodies without causing a panic. While it ultimately didn't matter since my actions would be erased when I would eventually reset time, I didn't want the patrons inside freaking out or anything.

As I suspected, Miss Pommel was inside, standing over by the stage with Big Macintosh sitting at the counter, and Granny Smith behind the counter serving drinks and cleaning up any glasses that patrons left behind before leaving. Since I never really had a chance to talk to her other than listen in on her conversation with Applejack, I decided to speak with Granny Smith first before dealing with Miss Pommel and Big Macintosh. She didn't react in any way as I approached her but she did hold out her hand as a means of welcoming me and bade me to sit down yet I politely refused.

" Despite being so young, that mask really does look good on you, madam." Granny Smith said.

" Thank you."

" Please refrain from removing your mask while inside, madam."

" What about the others here?"

" I have told them to keep their masks on but they seem to be ignoring me." Granny Smith answered. " If you do end up removing your mask, I'll just ask you to put it back on since there are rules here that must be followed in order to stay. Anyway, may I get you a drink, madam? I was expecting a delivery of Romani Ranch's famous Chateau Romani the other night but it looks like it won't happen since I haven't heard a thing from the ranch owner. If you desire that particular milk, I will have to charge you more than the usual amount since I have a short supply and other patrons may want some."

Since I already knew what happened, I decided to let Granny Smith know. " A boulder blocks the entrance to Romani Ranch."

Granny Smith lowered her head slightly. " That's a real shame but then it does explain why my delivery never came. I suppose there's no need to worry about it now since the bar hasn't had many customers lately what with these dangerous times we're in."

I then noticed Big Macintosh and chose to inquire. " What's wrong with him?"

" Gorman?" Granny Smith asked. " He's been wallowing away here for the second night in a row all because his performance for the Carnival of Time was cancelled. He tried to explain things to his troupe but just couldn't muster up the courage so now he sits there drinking his sorrows away with milk."

" He looks a little drunk."

" More like tipsy."

" Maybe he's had enough?"

" I tried to warn him about it but he refuses to listen."

" It must be hard dealing with customers like him sometime."

" True, madam, but then it's what I enjoy in this line of work."

I then turned my attention to Miss Pommel. " And what about her?"

" Mrs. Toto?" Granny Smith asked. " She was hoping her Zora band, the Indigo-Go's would be performing here tomorrow night but they were forced to cancel for the same reason that affected Gorman and his troupe. Despite not getting what she wanted, Mrs. Toto has been wanting some help with a sound check. While I have no problem with her wanting to do that since no one is currently using the stage, I don't think anyone will be able to help her out. Most musicians didn't bother coming to town when news spread of the carnival being cancelled all of a sudden."

" Actually, I came here to help her out."

" If that's true then by all means assist her."

" What about my mask?"

" Please keep it on."

Unlike the Equestrian version of Granny Smith who was always full of energy and didn't feel bogged down by her age, this version of her was pretty bland in her delivery and acted like everything didn't really matter at all. Still, she had given me some useful information regarding how Big Macintosh was feeling given I did see him lose his cool when he found out his troupe's performance got cancelled, yet drinking away his problems would do nothing--at least it wasn't alcohol otherwise that would have been worse. I hadn't figured out how to get my hands on his mask but perhaps what the Gorman Sisters said about that song would work.

Miss Pommel was the manager of the Indigo-Go's and so she would have knowledge of all of their songs along with information on current and former band members. I wasn't sure how she would react to seeing Mikau when it came time for me to change into a Zora, but that would be a bridge I would cross when I eventually got to it--it was coming up within the next ten minutes. I walked over from the counter to where Miss Pommel was standing yet she didn't notice me approach until she saw my shadow and turned around causing both of us to get startled in the process.

" Are the fins damp lately?" Miss Pommel asked waving her hand in an unusual manner."

" What!?"

" It's a greeting used by my people, the Zora."

" I don't know that one."

" That's unfortunate but then you aren't exactly a Zora now are you?"

" No, I guess not."

" My name is Mrs. Toto, the manager of the hottest band in Great Bay, the Indigo-Go's." Miss Pommel said. " They were scheduled to perform here on this very stage tomorrow night during the carnival but it seems that it got cancelled because of what's been happening around here. A shame really though at the same it proved essential since a problem occurred back home with one of our performers. I'd rather not go into details since that would take some time."

I already knew what was going but chose not to say anything. " What are you doing?"

" I wanted to see if I could perform a sound check."

" Can I help?"

" You?"

I nodded my head. " Yes."

" Well, the thing is that I need specific instruments in order to perform the kind of sound check I want." Miss Pommel said. " While it might not be the same as what could have been had my band been able to perform but it's better than doing what Gorman is doing over there. Ever since he found out that his troupe wouldn't be performing, he threw a temper tantrum and if not for Monsieur Aroma getting him to calm down, he would have ripped the mayor's residence apart in anger. Unable to do much of anything else, Gorman drinks the night away until the manager kicks him out."

" And you?"

" I don't drink milk." Miss Pommel answered. She then looked closely at me before reacting in surprise. " I saw you at the mayor's residence the other day. You were hired to look for the missing son of Monsieur Aroma and Mayor Detour though I'm not sure if you can succeed. That boy of theirs, Kafei, has been missing for a month now and no one has any idea as to what happened to him. No wonder you humans have so many problems. But, I shouldn't be saying something like that since we Zoras have our own issues."

" So... Do you need any help?"

Miss Pommel nodded. " Well, you do have an ocarina so I suppose you can. I need you stand under the center spotlight and then play these notes for me. Also, if you happen to know of anyone else who can play pipes, drums, and a guitar, tell them to come here and help me with my sound check."

How convenient that the other instruments she needed were ones that I had as my other three forms, yet I would need to come up with a convincing measure with which to change bodies without freaking anyone out. Perhaps I could distract them long enough while I change or maybe there was a rest room or something to that effect I could use--though I would have to explain how I appeared in the Milk Bar all of a sudden without entering via the main entrance. In any case, I walked up onto the stage, stood under the spotlight she wanted me under and showed me a piece of card with some notes on it.

I actually thought she was going to play her own instrument, not have me read off some card and play the notes shown on it, but I supposed this was meant to be a sound check and not some kind of musical competition--I've had more than my fair share of those. I looked over the notes on her card and played them accordingly though I didn't understand their significance though something strange could be felt about them. I then felt compelled to play what she asked of me in the form of a ballad yet it appeared nothing came of that either. Upon finishing, it was clear Miss Pommel appreciated my efforts.

" That was pretty good."

" I do have some friends who have those other instruments but I need to get them here."

" By all means do ask them to help."

Big Macintosh, who had been out of it, had paid attention to my little performance and commented on it. " Bah! What kind of musical drivel was that!? If I didn't know any better, it sounded like a rank amateur was trying to perform."

" I didn't think you were paying attention." Miss Pommel said. " I thought you were wallowing in pity."

" That wasn't music I heard but just a senseless racket."

" Why do you have to ridicule my assistant, Gorman?"

" I'm just being honest."

Miss Pommel sighed and turned towards me. " I must apologize for Gorman lashing out at you like that. When he starts drinking heavily, there's no point in trying to reason with him, so you might as well just ignore him as best as you can though it isn't easy. Anyway, I'll still be standing here waiting for those friends of yours to come here and help me out. I'm not sure what I can do for you as a reward but I'll come up with something."

" I don't need a reward from you."

" Nonsense!" Miss Pommel exclaimed. " No one does anything for free you know. That's something I've learned the hard way over my many years of being a manager. You have to live up to your own bargains even when you didn't make any to begin with otherwise no one will ever want to help you. In this kind of world, everyone wants something whether they mean it or not, and that's just a fact of life."

Luckily, I found a distraction in the form of Granny Smith walking over to check on Big Macintosh, who apparently began acting a little too rowdy for her tastes though he insisted nothing was wrong with him. I walked over to the far corner of the room behind some plants, took out the Deku Mask, and placed it on my face before I started convulsing. I had made certain to grab the plant by its trunk as a means of having something to hold me down in case things went wrong but luckily my convulsions passed and my body parts shimmered and changed from human to Deku Scrub.

Upon finishing my transformation, I walked back over to Miss Pommel, who seemed surprised at seeing a Deku. " Oh? A Deku Scrub! I guess you must be one of those friends that girl mention would be coming here to help me with my sound check."

I nodded my head. " I had to slip inside secretly since they don't like Deku Scrubs."

" How very unfortunate for you."

" You need me to play something?"

Miss Pommel nodded. " Indeed, but first, are you able to play the pipes?" I took out the Ocarina of Time and it changed into the Deku Pipes causing Miss Pommel to react with sheer excitement. " Okay! I need you to stand under the bottom left spotlight and play these notes I have right here."

I walked up onto the stage until I was under the spotlight and played what Miss Pommel had written down on her card. Just like before, I was compelled to play a ballad though I heard someone else play alongside me. Looking to my left, I saw an image of myself playing the ocarina and I was caught by surprise. Was I dreaming? Was this an unusual power brought on by the power contained within the music? Or was there something else at play? Either way, Miss Pommel thanked me again while Big Macintosh said my music sounded terrible to him, yet I ignored his words and snuck past Granny Smith until I was hiding behind those plants again.

She had to once again refrain Big Macintosh after his latest outburst and I needed to change into my next form though switching back to a human followed by my next form would prove very taxing, but a bop on the head from Princess Twilight reminded me of how it was possible to shift between bodies by putting on another transformation mask whilst already wearing one. Sure it felt weird eliminating my human form in such a manner but Granny Smith could only be occupied for so long--I was amazed that she never noticed a Deku Scrub performing one stage let alone the music coming from the pipes I had.

Taking out the Goron Mask and placing it on my face, I held onto the plant's trunk to prevent me from stumbling about, and I watched as my Deku body shimmered and shifted into my Goron body--along with a sudden increase in height--and upon finishing this transformation--and quickly recovering from being slightly woozy--I walked over to Miss Pommel who was surprised at seeing me standing next to her.

" A Goron this time?"

" I was told by my friend that you needed me?"

Miss Pommel nodded. " I must admit that the girl certainly knows her way with people since so far her two friends have been a Deku Scrub and a Goron. I wouldn't be surprised if her next friend would be one of my own people. You know, a Zora. Anyway, am I to assume that you know how to play the drums?"

" I do."

" Good so that means we can forego seeing any proof."

" What do you need me to do?"

" Please stand under the top left spotlight and play the notes on this piece of card."

I walked up onto the stage, stood under the required spotlight, took out the ocarina where it changed into drums, and proceeded to play the notes on the card. Unlike the previous two attempts, the notes here were numerous--eight compared to five respectively--but I played them anyway since it's what she wanted. Once again, I felt compelled to perform ballad and like before, images of my other forms appeared and all three of us played, and it was at that moment when I realized the true significance behind the sound check. They were all part of one song and now only one part remained.

Like before, Big Macintosh complained about my playing being a racket and Granny Smith once again had to reprimand him. No doubt she was getting tired of his constant heckling yet he was entitled to his opinion even though it was clearly wrong. I took advantage of the confusion by slipping over to the corner--how Granny Smith couldn't see a giant Goron walking by proved baffling--took out the Zora Mask, and placed it on my face, my body shimmered from Goron to Zora though this transformation was a little unfortunate in that I would be speaking to Miss Pommel as someone she knew really well.

Walking back to her as Mikau this time, Miss Pommel was shocked upon seeing me. " What!? Mikau!? Is that you!? What are you doing here? I thought you would be back home attending to Lulu given what happened." She then took a closer look at me before shaking her head. " No... It seems that I was mistaken. Strange as you do look exactly like him. I apologize for confusing you with someone else but please pay me no mind."

I was about to say that I was Mikau but I kept quiet as she didn't know that he was in fact dead. " My friend asked me to come here to help you out."

" Like I said to your Goron friend, I wasn't surprised at seeing you being here."

" Are you sure that I don't remind you of that person you mentioned?"

Miss Pommel shook her head. " While you bear a striking resemblance to him, I am convinced that you are a different person. Anyway, I assume that you are able to play the guitar, yes? I know it sounds strange given that we Zora can play various instruments but it's the guitar I need for my sound check." I nodded my head and took out the ocarina where it changed into the fish-bone guitar causing Miss Pommel to be shocked at seeing it. " Where did you get that instrument? I only know of one person who has a guitar shaped in that fashion. Could you really be him after all? Unless of course, it's just a replica given to a random fan."

" What did you say?"

" I apologize again." Miss Pommel answered. " I was just thinking out loud about something. Anyway, could you stand under the bottom right spotlight and play the notes on this piece of card? If my assumption is correct, your contribution will bring everything together."

Despite wanting to tell her the truth, I refrained and walked onto the stage before standing below the spotlight in question. In my heart, I could tell that Miss Pommel would be beside herself with grief if she found out what happened to Mikau, so for his own well-being and my own peace of mind, I kept quiet and focused on what she wanted of me. I played the notes she presented and again I felt compelled to performing a ballad. Like before, my other forms appeared beside me as images--it still felt creepy knowing this was happening--and we started playing the entire sequence along with additional notes I never knew about.

All four of my forms played together as one cohesive unit bringing the patrons of the Milk Bar--all three of them--to attention as my forms continued playing. Now I understood why those specific instruments were needed. They represented different tones that could only be carried out by their specific pitch of music and Miss Pommel wanted to see this happen given that the Indigo-Go's were unable to perform here instead. The band didn't have anyone who could play pipes but I supposed that Party Favour was like an alternative where he had a different styled guitar compared with what I had.

When we were finished, my other forms disappeared leaving me standing there and Miss Pommel clapping. " Bravo! That was the best! You must tell your other friends that they each contributed marvelously to this little project of mine. While I may not have been able to have the Indigo-Go's perform here given unfortunate circumstances, I am glad things still turned out the way they did."

" That song!" Big Macintosh said all of a sudden.

" What about it?"

" I... I know that song."

Miss Pommel smiled. " Most people know of it though not its origins."

Big Macintosh looked up at the ceiling. " It brings back so many memories."

" It's the one song that made the previous generation of the Indigo-Go's famous, 'The Ballad of the Wind Fish.' I should know because I managed them back in the day when they were struggling to find their place yet it launched their careers and they became idols amongst my people." Miss Pommel said. " The current members have been wanting to perform that song before a large gathering for a long time now and the carnival would have been the perfect opportunity to do so. They also wanted to show they could hold their own by playing original material in addition to what their predecessors invented."

" That song changed my life."

" Did it now?"

Big Macintosh nodded. " When I was younger, my life involved around raising horses, but I was never any good at it. My older sister could handle horses way better than me while my younger sister took care of them better than I could. I felt completely useless knowing my sisters were experts compared to me. But, when we came to the carnival one year and heard that song, I knew I was destined for something much bigger than what I was doing. I entered show business because of that song and I believed one day I would be able to meet the singers who played that song through my own performances with my troupe."

" The one you heard singing at that time must have been the original Lulu, mother of the current singer of the band who is also named Lulu out of circumstance." Miss Pommel said. " The original Lulu is sadly no longer with us due to passing away as a result of a terrible disease she contracted when she was around her thirties. It is most unfortunate that it happened and everyone in Zora Hall were devastated yet the current Lulu pledged to continue on where her mother left off."

" So her daughter is singing now?"

" Correct."

" Is that so?" Big Macintosh asked. " You know, I'd really like to see that. I might not be able to get the chance right now given the carnival has been cancelled but perhaps I'll get an opportunity sometime in the future provided things work out." He then turned around in his seat, looked at me, and beckoned me to come over. I couldn't sense any malice coming from him so I put my guitar away and jumped down from the stage before walking over to him. " I'm sorry that I booed at you. You were only trying to please Mrs. Toto and I was acting like a complete jerk just because I was upset with my troupe being unable to perform. Here... I want you to have this."

He reached over the counter prompting Granny Smith to ask what he was doing and he responded by saying that he needed to pick up something he dropped off when he was at the bar the other night. She nodded and went back to work while Big Macintosh fumbled about for a few seconds before pulling back and holding a mask in his hands. It looked like someone else's face rather than his own though it was crying authentic tears that made me wonder why it could do that. It then occurred to me that the face was that of the real Gorman, much like how Kafei's Mask resembled the real character.

" What is it?" I asked.

" This is the Troupe Leader's Mask." Big Macintosh answered. " It represents my personal struggles in life and how I had to endure so much pain to get to where I am. My sisters never did like my mask as it always had a strange effect on them. Sure, they aren't the nicest people out there but they are my sisters and I do love them to pieces. I suppose if you were to wear it in their presence, you might be able to learn about their true feelings though I wouldn't take advantage of them."

" Thanks for the mask."

" And thank you for reminding me of why I went into this business." Big Macintosh said. He then noticed the Bomb Bag attached to my belt and chuckled causing me to frown at him where he immediately waved his hands in return. " No need to give me that look though you were right to do so since I did laugh. It's just that it's weird seeing a Zora carrying around something that's favoured by humans. By the way, there is a rumour that someone up in Snowhead sells a bag like that but a much larger size. Why anyone would sell anything up there in that frigid landscape is beyond me but I suppose everyone needs rupees."

While that was oddly specific in that Big Macintosh would know about Bomb Bags--maybe his troupe used bombs for special effects--he had given me an idea as to what I was going to do next before heading to the final region. In fact, it was going to be my last detour before heading off over there as I felt that I had delayed long enough. While I didn't do everything that I wanted because of conflicts relating to time, I felt satisfied with what I had accomplished. Besides, Adagio mentioned something about going to Snowhead and that meant becoming Darmani once again since the snow would slow down my other forms save for her.

Thanking Big Macintosh and Miss Pommel who in turn thanked me, I left the Milk Bar making sure Granny Smith didn't notice me--how I managed to avoid her gaze the entire time while she never once noticed my different forms surprised me--and put on the Goron Mask, switching back over to Darmani before leaving Clock Town via the eastern gate--I made sure to change when the guard standing by the gate didn't notice though he was more concerned with looking at something else.

" Well that was a waste of time!" Starlight moaned.

" It wasn't that kind of research after all, huh Skull Kid?" Spike asked.

" I hoped to be able to play with some of that guy's equipment but it was just so boring." Starlight said. " Who in their right mind would be dedicated to researching the undead rather something more fun like ingredient used in potions?"

" That guy seemed obsessed with those Gibdo creatures more than anything else."

" Ugh! It was so boring!"

" Not everything is going to be exciting, Skull Kid."

Starlight's eyes on her mask glowed brightly and an aura surrounded her. " I have every inclination to completely obliterate this house and its occupants for wasting my time and robbing me of fun, but I suppose I can let them live since I still need to pull off my latest prank since that's more important." She then looked over at Lightning Dust, who seemed very uncomfortable given she had been tied down with some kind of magical rope. " Our guide didn't run away after all though there was no chance of that happening since I made sure to trap her so she wouldn't escape."

Spike frowned. " I'm sure she wouldn't have given you can be very persuasive."

" Hee hee! You've got that right!"

" Do you think this place is haunted by the dead?"

Starlight looked at Spike, tilted her head, and shrugged her shoulders. " Why would you care about something like that, Tael? It's not like they're going to be coming back or anything and besides, if they did then my power would be more than enough to destroy them."

" That guy really sounded convincing."

Starlight blew a raspberry. " Pfft! That guy was boring though something about his daughter reminded me of something. She seemed a little too precautious for her own good given she kept on telling me what to do."

" I feel like I know her from somewhere."

" Does that even matter?"

Spike shook his head. " No, I guess not."

Starlight walked over to Lightning Dust and removed the rope that had been holding her down. " I should kill you for making me waste my time but you know this place better than I do so I'll give you the benefit of the doubt." She turned towards Spike, lifted up Majora's Mask exposing her real face, winked, and put it back down before tapping her foot on the ground in an impatient manner. " Well? Take me to where I can pull off my prank."

" You're the one who wanted to check out the Music Box House." Lightning Dust said.

" Maybe you shouldn't have brought it up."

" Kind of hard not to since it stands out among everything else here."

Starlight's eyes glowed again. " Are you saying this is my fault?"

Lightning Dust cowered back at first before lurching forward. " Yes! I am saying this is your fault! You wanted to go to the temple in this region right? Despite your behaviour along with your threats, I'm willing to show you where it is since it wouldn't affect me whether or not the undead are disturbed from their eternal slumber. But, without me to act as your guide, there is no way you'll find the temple since simple navigation isn't your strongest suit. While you may be powerful because of wearing that strange mask--it still is a nice mask even though you won't let me touch it--you're just a kid who is clueless."

Starlight said nothing at first in response to Lightning Dust but her hand started glowing in a dark aura before her entire body followed suit. Spike quickly hid behind a small boulder nearby as he was afraid of what Starlight would do since she had just been insulted, but surprisingly the only thing she was take out her anger on the wall of the ancient castle by creating a hole in it by blowing up part of it. Her dark aura disappeared and Lightning Dust stood there defiantly yet Starlight walked up until she was in her face and her eyes began glowing black as opposed to yellow from before.

" Consider that your only warning."

" And if I were to do it again?"

Starlight smirked. " No one will be able to pick up the pieces."

Lightning Dust took a few steps back before beckoning her companions. " We have a ways to go before we reach our destination and I hope you're ready to climb because it's all up-hill from here."

Once I was outside in Termina Field, Epona whinnied at me before coming over and I whinnied in response, patting her head gently, and telling her that I would be back upon finishing a couple of errands. While I could have had her trample over the grass, I needed a faster method and that involved rolling around as a Goron. Curling up into a ball, I began to roll along, my speed picking up gradually, and spikes protruded from my body upon reaching top speed. For about the next several hours, I would roll over any grass that came along, collected the rupees that appeared, went back into Clock Town, and repeated the process several times over.

By the time I had finally collected enough rupees--four hours of grinding gave me about 230 rupees--it was well past midnight and my body started feeling slightly tired, but I could keep on going for a while until I really needed sleep. I then took out the Ocarina of Time, changing into the drums, and played the Song of Soaring, my intended destination being the Mountain Village as it was the closest to the Goron Village. Wings protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, my body spun around, and seconds later I appeared near where Fancy Pants and Tirek had their smithing business.

From there, I curled back into a ball, rolled forward until my spikes appeared, and continued rolling along through the twin islands area until I entered the village, coming to a stop by crashing into the wall of the Goron Shrine--I still needed to figure out how to stop. When I regained my composure, I began looking around to see if there was anyone who could sell me that big Bomb Bag since it was supposedly here, but because it was cold outside, I doubted there was anyone outside given they would have to be insane to be out here. Yet, my eyes noticed a yellow Deku Flower and a Business Scrub hiding inside.

I walked over to him and he was surprised to see me. " I didn't think you would be walking around out in the cold."

" That makes two of us."

" I don't follow."

" You're out here selling your goods when it would make sense to do so indoors."

The Business Scrub sighed. " You have no idea how much I want to be selling my wares anywhere but here, but since what I have is for Gorons only, I have no choice but to stay here until my wares are sold out or the proper channel comes through. Now, you seem like an interesting Goron so perhaps you would be interested in a little something?"

" Depends on what it is."

" I can't help but notice that Bomb Bag on your belt." The Business Scrub said. " It just so happens that I am selling this much larger sized one right here. Normally, my asking price for my bag would be about 1,000 rupees, but I can make you a special offer if you're willing to go for it."

My jaw dropped. " 1,000!?"

The Business Scrub cowered a little in response. " Before you freak out on me, please hear me out. If you hand over that Bomb Bag you have on your belt and 200 rupees, I will
give you my bigger Bomb Bag, and if you need further convincing, this one can hold forty bombs as opposed to the one you have which can hold thirty."

I wished he had brought that up straight away as it would have prevented me from embarrassing myself, but the deal was one that I could easily get behind. It was fortunate that I managed to collect 200 rupees by grinding--I was also lucky--so I handed over that exact amount including my Bomb Bag, and the Business Scrub in turn handed over his Bomb Bag though he ended up getting the worst of the deal since he now had a smaller one. I made sure to thank him for the upgrade though told him not to drop such a surprise next time.

With that objective accomplished, I had nothing else left to do so it was now time to go to the final region. While I could have reset time and give myself a clean slate, I figured going there now would give me a heads up of what was awaiting me and then reset later. Taking out my drums--I preferred playing a guitar or the ocarina over these though no disrespect to professional drummers especially Pinkie Pie--I played the Song of Soaring, my destination being Clock Town, wings once again protruded from my body, wrapped themselves around me, and soon I was back in front of the Clock Tower where I proceeded to take off the Goron Mask.

The first thing I did upon changing back into a human was breathe a sigh of relief since I had to constantly switch between forms. While it was something I didn't particularly enjoy doing, I knew it would be necessary in the final region as all of my transformations would be needed--I also flipped my hair back again out of a sense of wanting to be consistent since it was something I kept doing every time I became my true self. Once I was ready, I ran over to and through East Clock Town, through the gate and back outside in the field, and climbed onto Epona since my legs were getting tired.

Gently kicking her in the ribs and directing her towards the east, Epona galloped forward and soon the beautiful tranquility of the open grass was replaced with a canyon setting devoid of any vegetation--or colours for that matter other than brown--and the sky grew dim as though a permanent cloud was hanging above us. It quickly became apparent that bringing along Epona proved essential as there were fences up ahead only she could jump over. Even if I were to try and jump over those fences as a Zora, I just wouldn't be tall enough to make the attempt making my trusty steed the only option.

" This place feels gloomy, Twilight."

Princess Twilight nodded. " From what we have heard so far, this region is rampant with ghosts though it's difficult to say if their words were true. Yes, I am also including Rarity here since she was one of the first to mention this area."

" You sound like you don't believe in them."

" I don't see the logic behind it."

" Believe me, Twilight. I've seen ghosts with my own eyes in this kind of fantasy setting." I said. " Most of them are very aggressive and attack anyone out of the desire for wanting to cause misery to the living, but there are some who are friendly and can provide assistance when necessary."

" What are they called?"

" Poes."

" Doesn't sound like a threatening name."

I nodded my head. " And they aren't difficult to defeat so long as they don't disappear on you. I have a feeling that Poes will be the least of our worries when we actually arrive in the region since all manner of undead are supposedly there." Epona then whinnied her displeasure over something so I looked ahead and saw many Blue Bubbles flying about ahead of us and proving themselves to be an obstacle yet none had noticed us. " Look at all those Blue Bubbles, Twilight. They are undead monsters much like Poes are but again I feel there is even worse things waiting for us."

" In case you have forgotten, Sunset, they can disable your sword for a while if they hit you."

" I remember."

" The curse will only last for a short while unless you were to use a fairy to remove it."

" Not you?"

" Not me."

I patted Epona on the head to calm her down and she whinnied in response to my kind gesture. " Okay, Epona, you need to get over those fences so we can get to our destination but there's no telling if those Blue Bubbles will attack you or not." Epona lowered her head out of being nervous so I whinnied at her as a means of encouragement. " I know it's dangerous to go forward from here but we need to otherwise this world will be destroyed. All you need to do is get past those monsters and nothing more. I'm not planning on sticking around and attempting to fight them or anything."

Epona reared back a few steps before galloping forward, my whipping her in the flank maintained her speed, and she began jumping over the fences. The Blue Bubbles took notice and proceeded to trail us but she was too fast for them to keep up and eventually flew back to where they were before. Already I could feel a darkness ebbing all around us and it made me feel really uneasy given that I once embraced the darkness when I became the she-demon.

After a few more jumps, Epona came to a stop upon reaching what appeared to be a dead-end. In front of us was a large cliff-face with no signs of being able to climb up to the top and proceed further into the region, and on our right was a group of stones in a circle formation that looked suspicious though I chose to ignore it. On our left was a pathway that lead further into canyon yet Blue Bubbles were swarming about. I thought about having Epona gallop past them only to find a single step prevented her from proceeding that way--yes, a singular step was stopping my horse from progressing.

I had Epona trot over to the circle of stones where she would be safe and climbed down off of her when we got here. I whinnied at her to let her know that I would be gone for a while and she whinnied back at me wishing me luck. Gulping, I walked forward making sure not to take my eyes off of the Blue Bubbles, my shield raised to deflect them before they could disable my sword, and climbed up the step onto the pathway that lead up into the canyon. I had no idea what was waiting for me at the end of the path but I couldn't allow these monsters to prevent me from reaching it.

The instant they spotted me and began to fly over towards me, I made a run for it with my shield still raised. One of them came within mere inches of hitting me in the leg but I managed to outrun it along with the others before the pathway opened up into a large area that was filled with stone slabs strewn about. Something about what I was seeing felt familiar and a nearby sign revealed my suspicions were correct.

" It says 'Ikana Graveyard'... Typical."

" Why do you say it like that, Sunset?"

" Because I had problems with the last one I went to."

Princess Twilight floated ahead to get a closer look at our surroundings and immediately floated back. " I see what you mean as there are Stalchildren everywhere!" I looked ahead and saw at least a dozen of them hanging out around the gravestones, performing different things such as walking around the gravestones, sitting by a campfire, and even one swinging on a tree branch. " Strange how they are behaving, Sunset." Twilight continued. " It's as though they were waiting around for something or someone."

" Who do you think it could be?"

" I don't know."

" Maybe we should avoid attacking them if at all possible."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. I suspect they won't bother us and continue doing what they're doing if we just leave them alone. Still, I am curious as to what purpose this graveyard serves. So many questions needing to be answered. Who was buried here? When did it happen? Why are they here? Who is in charge of this place? I could go with other such questions but you get the idea."

I frowned. " You're loving this, aren't you?"

Princess Twilight giggled. " I can't help it when I get fascinated by new things."

I rolled my eyes. " This is one place where fascination can cause you to wind up being buried alongside the dead. Granted, I am curious as to who could be buried here, but I'm not as obsessed over it as you are. Still, I suppose we should ask the local grave keeper."

" Is there one around here?"

" I'm assuming there is one as who would leave monsters free to roam around here?"

" It's still night-time you know."

" I have a feeling that when it becomes daylight, it's not going to get much better."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I agree, Sunset, given the current atmosphere we're surrounded by." She then bopped me on the head to inform me of a pathway leading past the graveyard in front of us. It looked suspicious in nature though I was certain it was nothing compared to what else was around here. " We may be able to find the grave keeper if we go down that path but we'll need to avoid the Stalchildren."

I nodded and began walking forward slowly to prevent the Stalchildren from spotting me. While they weren't exactly a threat to me, I didn't want to get bombarded by all of them at once. When one of them suddenly looked in my direction, I immediately jumped behind a large gravestone and hid there until it turned away to focus on what it was doing prior. Sweat dripped down my brow as I tilted my head out to see whether they were looking at me or not. To my relief, they were ignoring me and so I snuck by using additional gravestones as cover.

As I made my way through the graveyard, I tried to see if I could understand what the Stalchildren were saying as most of them were moving their mouths. Unfortunately, their gibberish couldn't be comprehended so I chose to ignore them and focus on finding the grave keeper. Maybe there was a way I could communicate with the Stalchildren--a scary thought given what they were and all--so I could understand their purpose for being here. In any case, I managed to get to the other side of the graveyard and began walking along the path where it got narrow for a while before opening up to a small clearing.

This area contained a ramshackle house built on top of a bridge and I could barely see a fire burning on top of the left side of the bridge above the house. I had no idea what was burning there but I sensed some kind of presence nearby prompting me to look around for it. My eyes then noticed what looked to be a giant skull stuck underneath the bridge but a second look revealed a pair of skeletal hands indicating it was a skeleton, a really big one. It wasn't moving so at least I was safe yet the presence I felt seemed to be coming from it. There was also a sign to the left of it and apart from that, everything appeared normal.

" What do you make of the skeleton, Twilight?"

" I've never seen such a giant creature like that before."

" It's not moving so we don't have to worry about it attacking us."

" What do you suppose its story is?"

I shook my head. " No idea but I was hoping to speak with the grave keeper."

" Maybe we missed them on the way in?"

I shrugged my shoulders. " I honestly don't know but we really need to find them so that we can figure out what we're supposed to do next. Dawn will be coming up in a few hours so maybe this would be a good time to take a short rest given what we've been doing during this cycle."

" Rest in a graveyard?"

" Do you have any other options?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " Not really apart from asking if the grave keeper might let us stay in their house until the sun comes up. I'm going to assume that the reason we never saw them is because they are inside their house and are either asleep or doing something late at night."

" I guess we could knock."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Better than your alternative."

While I wanted to protest against what Her Highness said about my idea, in truth she was correct in that resting outside in a graveyard wasn't the smartest idea. Given how morbid looking the place looked, the chances of being attacked by the undead was rather high as they enjoyed this kind of atmosphere. I was curious though as to might have happened in this region in addition to who had been buried here in the graveyard. Unlike the other regions, this place lacked life itself. It reminded me of a desert wasteland only this was much worse since the undead were roaming around.

Deciding that Princess Twilight's idea was solid, I walked to the door and knocked on it. At first no one answered so I tried again only to not receive a response, but when I knocked for the third time, the sound of someone shuffling about could be hear on the other side, indicating that someone was inside. Whoever they were struggled to walk about as they kept on walking into fixtures given how they yelled every time, yet there was something familiar about the voice. I couldn't put my finger on it at first but it sounded like I knew who it was, and this suspicion grew stronger when the voice inside called out.

" Who would disturb me at this hour? It does nothing except make me dour!"

The rhyming scheme reminded me of someone specific but it could have just been a coincidence.

" Is that the time!? I should have gotten up an hour ago! I need to get myself ready to watch over the graveyard! My apologies for shouting at you just now and instead I have to go and say wow. If not for you knocking on my door, I wouldn't have woken up and watched this place some more."

" Are you the grave keeper?" I asked as I took a step back.

" Yes, I am the one who watches over this place." The voice answered. " Sure it's not the best job out there given what others do. But, I'll take this over what the people in town have to go through."

" May I rest in your house until the sun comes up?"

The voice went silent before they answered my question. " I suppose there's no harm in it since you did wake me up and all. Just one second and I'll open up my door. It will swing open real quick so watch out or it will hit you and you'll be on the floor."

Again, that voice sounded very familiar and even the accent was starting to sound like something I heard once before. I looked at Princess Twilight and her expression was one of happiness as though she knew who it was. Maybe I should ask her before the grave keeper opens their door? Before I had the chance to do just that, the grave keeper began unlocking the door--several clicking noises could be heard along with tumbling sounds--and opened it revealing who they were, and my jaw dropped upon seeing who it was.

Chapter 51: Skeletal Grave Robbing

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
April 3, 2017
Chapter 51: Skeletal Grave Robbing.

Princess Twilight's reaction was much more intense than mine was. After all, I wasn't at all surprised to find that Zecora was the grave keeper around here. On my previous journey, she portrayed a similar grave keeper and while she would rhyme her words, she didn't do so at a consistent rate compared to what she was capable of back in Equestria--I also wouldn't be surprised if Zecora was named Dampé. For Her Highness, seeing one of her former teachers--she told me the story of when Ponyville got taken over by Trixie--was definitely a joyous moment but then she needed to remember that this wasn't the same Zecora she had come to know.

Judging from her attire, Zecora most likely kept to herself and didn't associate with anyone, yet it saddened me to think that even in this world, her status of living in isolation continued to be a thing. In Equestria, according to what Princess Twilight told me, Zecora lived on her own in the Everfree Forest--why anyone would live there boggles the mind--and rarely received visitors though she would on occasion travel to Ponyville in order to acquire some medicinal herbs and other similar items for her potions. While that version of her was friendly despite her rhyming scheme, this version was definitely an isolationist.

Her clothes could be best described as a bunch of rags that had been sewn together poorly but I doubted she would be offended by such a remark. Then there was the shovel she held up, a grim reminder of the occupation that she has in a place like this. I was curious as to why Zecora--or any sane person for that matter--would want to live in such a desolate place but I supposed she had her reasons. Had Zecora been tasked to watch over this graveyard by someone else? Was this a place she had inherited? Or had she chosen to come here and watch things of her own volition and because no one else were here?

Those were questions I needed answers to including one in particular that related to the giant skeleton that was trapped under the bridge. I had no doubt that she was aware of its presence over there since it was practically impossible for anyone to ignore it. I couldn't quite put my finger on it but it felt like it could come to life at any moment. I mean, despite not having any expression--or anything else--the skeleton must have surely had an interesting story behind it. Zecora might not be willing to talk about it straight away especially to a stranger but perhaps I could loosen her tongue once she had gotten to know me.

" You're the first person who has come to this graveyard in a very long time." Zecora said.

" Aside from yourself?" I asked.

Zecora nodded. " The only ones who would dare come to a place like this are researchers studying the ancient kingdom, yet that's a death wish if I ever saw it given most of them tend to not make it back to tell others what they found. Of those who do make it back, coming here again would require some convincing." She then noticed Princess Twilight hovering around her and she waved her hand around in hopes of getting rid of her. That didn't work so she tried using her shovel only for it to clang into the side of the wall. " Such an annoying little fairy you have there. It's buzzing is making me feel much despair."

I frowned at Princess Twilight who suddenly calmed down before floating back over to me. " Sorry if my companion was causing you trouble. She has her reasons for being so excited around someone like you."

" Most fairies would cower in fear of seeing my face. It's quite disfigured much to my disgrace."

Her face didn't look disfigured in the least until she looked up at me to which I recoiled slightly. Zecora had a nasty gash across her face that left her without the use of her left eye and she had a slight elongated chin that made her teeth stand out in a crooked manner. Aside from that, the rest of her face was pretty normal though knowing Zecora, she would say the remaining facial features she had were even more repulsive. I did like that Mohawk she sported what with black and white stripes--she was a zebra after all in Equestria--coupled with some pretty snazzy looking jewelry but I doubted she viewed it as being worth anything.

I then changed the subject so as to move away from her facial features and not further offend her. " My name is Sunset Shimmer and this is my companion, Twilight Sparkle." I chose in this instance not to use her title of princess in case Zecora would get confused " We came here in order to figure out how to restore this region back to the way it was before."

Zecora chuckled in response and I felt offended but she waved her hand to indicate she wasn't insulting me. " I'm afraid you're many centuries too late for that. This region has been the way it is for a very long time all thanks to a conflict long ago that left everything in desolation. When you have lived here as long as I have, you learn much about what happened and tell such stories to others who are curious about it."

" Do you know what happened?"

" I do and I shall tell you so, but first let me tell you who I am." Zecora said. " I am Dampé, the grave keeper who watches over this graveyard where the Royal Family of Ikana have been resting for ages. My face may be disfigured--it is because of what I told you--but believe me when I say that I am not evil."

" Royal Family? Ikana?"

Zecora nodded. " Ikana is the name of this region though most call it a canyon these days. Those who live in the other regions know little of this place other than the fact that it is haunted by the spirits of those who continue to linger even in death. Such a terrible fate I know but what can I say? That's just the way things went at the end of the day."

" So this place is haunted?"

" By the spirits of the dead. Even someone like me gets filled with dread."

" How did this happen?"

" Centuries ago, Ikana was a mighty kingdom that was the shining jewel of Termina." Zecora answered. " The people lived in peace and the kingdom prospered in a way that made the other regions jealous of their very existence. But, a terrible darkness had been brewing within the kingdom for a long time and was poised to strike when tensions flared. Ikana was also known for an intense rivalry towards the Garo, assassins who plotted against the royal family. While exact details about them remain unknown, what is known is that the Garo intended on destroying the kingdom by any means necessary."

My heart sank as I looked down behind my back out of shame because I now knew something significant about the Garo's Mask I acquired from the Gorman Sisters. While they did tell me about what the mask was, Zecora reaffirmed their explanation and also provided additional information. To think that a group of assassins were capable of bringing down an entire kingdom and showed little to no remorse over it. However, there were obviously some glaring holes in Zecora's explanation. She didn't explain why they were intent on taking Ikana and its people down nor did she explain what this darkness was about.

Granted, what she already told me was more than what I knew about this region--namely nothing--yet I needed to know much more so that I could have a better understanding of what really happened and why Starlight wanted to bring back the undead. Starlight... It was obvious that she would have done something around here but right now I don't have any concrete proof other than gut instinct. I doubted Zecora had seen her--let alone knew of her existence--since this graveyard was way out of the normal path so perhaps asking more about the ancient kingdom was in order.

" Do you know how the kingdom was destroyed?"

Zecora shook her head. " That is something I don't know so I am sorry for dealing you a blow."

That was depressing but maybe she could answer something about the Garo. " Okay... What about the Garo?"

" All I know is that they were spies who collected information."

Again that was depressing to hear considering Zecora had lived here for quite some time though I wasn't entirely sure how long "time" equated to. So far, my attempts at interrogation weren't producing ideal results so maybe it was best if I just allowed her to explain things to me rather than asking. I was bound to get something relevant out of it and not get basic responses that pretty much were summed up as "I don't know" or something like that. My eyes once again veered over at the skeleton and if I didn't know any better, I could have sworn one of its eyes glowed faintly for just a brief moment.

" To be honest, I was expecting a better answer."

" I may have lived here for some twenty-five years but I don't know everything about this place." Zecora said. " You're probably better off asking the researcher who lives further in the canyon. You see, he and his daughter moved out here about a year ago in order for him to live out his desire to learn much about the region. I know because they came here prior to moving in order to inquire as to the ideal place to live."

" Do you know where they are?"

Zecora nodded. " They live somewhere in Ikana Valley that lies deep within the kingdom but where exactly I don't know." She then waved her hand to get me to move aside so that she could step outside and stretch her bones before swinging her shovel around. " Why anyone would go there is beyond me but he had a strong determination in his eyes. His daughter didn't have the same conviction and wished they could have gone somewhere else, but her father desired knowledge and wouldn't be denied his destiny yet I hope those undead monsters haven't torn them apart."

I was about to ask her my next question when I noticed she was slowly walking down the path towards the main area where the Stalchildren were. " Where are you going!? If you go that way, you're likely get attacked by those Stalchildren hanging out around those graves." Zecora didn't respond to my concerns as though she didn't think of them as being threatening so I tried again. " Come back! If you go that way, I don't know if you can survive against the Stalchildren!"

Zecora stopped, turned towards me, and laughed. " Those undead creatures are of no concern, so now I instead you listen and learn. They always come out every night because of carrying out a duty they were entrusted with by the one who commanded them in life. While I usually go back to my house before the night comes, I don't worry about what those creatures will do to my graveyard. In fact, I believe they are most careful with ensuring the safety of those who are buried here."

" Commanded?"

" Yes."

" By who?"

Zecora pointed her finger towards the skeleton trapped under the bridge. " That fellow over there is the remains of the legendary Captain Keeta. He once commanded the army of this kingdom and they were fiercely loyal to him in return. Even in death, they would follow his commands without question, yet sometimes I think they desire to see him again and await new orders considering how long they've been carrying out their current ones. Some say that Keeta kept his spirit sealed within the treasure chest surrounded by the flames up there on the bridge and that he waits for the one who can help him."

" Do you think he could help me?"

" He's been dead for a long time mate, so I am afraid that you are far too late."

" One last question."

" I really must be going you see, but I shall answer that which you will ask of me."

" Who is buried here?"

Zecora blinked a couple of times making it feel like I asked the wrong thing. " I told you the Royal Family was buried here, so why would you ask such a question my dear? Then again, perhaps you are thinking about the others who are buried here?" I nodded my head and Zecora once again laughed. " I thought as much. Most of the others buried here either served the royal family as attendants or were family friends yet one in particular had such a tragic backstory. I don't know what happened to him but I'm sure someone as skilled as you can figure it out with ease."

With that, Zecora turned around and resumed walking down the path leaving me and Princess Twilight to take in everything she had told us. While she didn't give us answers to the really important questions, what she did say was enough to give us something to go with. As I continued watching her walk down the path to the main area of the graveyard, a part of me wanted to get down there before her and get rid of the Stalchildren before they could cause her any problems. But, since she insisted they wouldn't be any trouble, I just let her continue on with her business.

Another part of me felt bad over how such a beautiful kingdom could have been destroyed, but without knowing the cause behind it, I could only feel bad so much before the feeling no longer is relevant. The researcher Zecora mentioned sounded like the right person to talk to regarding learning about everything else regarding Ikana, and I knew Her Highness would definitely appreciate talking with him since she loved research more than anyone else I knew. It's unfortunate Zecora didn't say where he lived in the region but then it was to be expected, a reminder that I couldn't be given everything on a silver platter.

I then reached behind my back and took out the Garo's Mask before looking at it. To think that they were the ones who helped bring about the downfall of the kingdom, but if they were just a group of assassins, surely they couldn't have done it by themselves even with their expertise. Something Zecora said regarding darkness brewing made me think that there was more to Ikana than a barren wasteland abandoned by the world. Granted, I would need to see the interior before I could confirm my suspicions but it was yet another question that lacked answers, and one particular question was too big for me to ignore.

Turning my attention towards the skeleton under the bridge, Captain Keeta. I walked over to where he was to get a closer look at him and his size was quite intimidating. I had seen plenty of skeletons throughout this journey and my previous one but never one as huge as this guy. On top of his head was some kind of hat--it could be a crown--and his teeth looked jagged and mis-matched in places. Finally, his giant fingers looked ridiculous but were likely to crush anything they came into contact with. As I continued looking at him, it became apparent that he didn't resemble anyone I knew from the world I called home.

Princess Twilight felt the same way. " I don't recognize him at all."

" And here I thought everyone from my world and Equestria would be representing a character here."

" I guess this Captain Keeta is an exception."

" To think that he once commanded an entire army by himself."

Princess Twilight took a closer look at him before flying over to the other side of the bridge. " He is definitely trapped under this thing, Sunset. I'm not sure how it happened but he isn't going anywhere any time soon." She then went to the chest surrounded by flames, came back to me and landed on my shoulder before wiping her brow. " That chest must be really important if it's surrounded by flames yet I don't see any way of getting access to its contents without suffering serious burns to your body. I can also confirm this Captain Keeta is gigantic as I saw his feet on the other side."

" I wonder if he's still alive..."

" What do you mean?"

" I know he's dead and all but wouldn't it be something if he were to suddenly come to life?"

" I have this feeling that he is alive." Twilight said. She turned towards the direction Zecora had walked towards. " Those Stalchildren we saw earlier as well as in the spider house over at Great Bay were moving about in their own manner so it's safe to assume that Captain Keeta is also alive just as much as they are." Her Highness looked back, jumped off my shoulder and looked at the skeleton. " Maybe he's asleep and could do with being woken up?" Her eyes then noticed a sign next to him and she floated over to read it. " According to this message, it says that he is waiting for one who can awaken him from his slumber."

" Any particular reason?"

" It just says to play the 'Song of Awakening' so that I can challenge you to combat."

My eyes opened in shock. " I have to fight that!?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " That does seem to be the hint."

" Maybe we shouldn't disturb him after all." I said. " It's not that I'm afraid of him or anything but rather it might not be a good idea to disturb him. If he does have command of all those Stalchildren according to Zecora, he could use them against us in retaliation."

" You should be able to handle them, right?"

I nodded. " As long as they don't swarm me or anything. They may not be able to inflict much in the way of damage but their numbers do matter." Even though she had already looked at the sign herself, I decided to take a look at what Princess Twilight had read--I wasn't questioning her but rather I just wanted to see the message for myself. Indeed I needed to play the Song of Awakening or rather the Sonata of Awakening. It had been some time since the last time I played the song--more like the previous cycle--so when I took out the Ocarina of Time from my pouch, I had to remember how it went. " I hope this works."

" It will, Sunset."

Raising the ocarina to my lips, I played the Sonata of Awakening, and at first nothing appeared to happen. I thought that I didn't play it correctly, another reminder that I needed to practice playing these songs, or that it wasn't loud enough given the ocarina didn't have as much range as the Deku Pipes did. My thought shifted towards changing into a Deku Scrub and using my pipes but then Captain Keeta's eyes glowed for a second before stopping.

I lurched forward only for him to suddenly get up onto his feet destroying the section of the bridge he had been trapped under. I looked down the pathway in case Zecora suddenly decided to come back after hearing the loud noise Captain Keeta made, but she wasn't there indicating the noise had either not reached her or she simply was fixated on taking care of the graveyard in her usual capacity. I turned back towards the skeleton who had since lumbered forward a few steps before turning around and looking down at me. Just looking up at his skeletal chin almost gave me a nosebleed because of how tall he was.

Had he really been that tall when he was alive? If so then he had no doubt been a terror on the battlefield though at the same time he would have stood out like a sore thumb. Or perhaps this was a special form of magic that had been used to make him appear as being gigantic and that his true self was much smaller? Either way, his head tilted downward, making a loud cracking sound that could be heard all over the region, and I stared up at the glowing eyes coupled with the gaping maw of his presence. Before either of us could say anything, the cries of a Cucco broke through the silence.

Dawn of the Final Day - 24 Hours Remain.

" Swordsman..." Captain Keeta said in a loud, booming voice. " Did you summon me?"

I slowly nodded my head. " Um... Yes?"

" Long have I waited for the likes of you to appear."

" You have?"

Captain Keeta nodded. " I have been sleeping for centuries waiting for the chosen one to appear, yet I must admit that I was not expecting you to be a mere child, but judging from the look in your eye, you have experienced much in the way of battle. You see that which is locked within the chest surrounded by flames?" Again I nodded for him to respond with a smile that was clearly unpleasant given he was a skeleton. " As to be expected but first you must prove your worth in my eyes. Before we can exchange words, I must test your skill to see if you can claim what lies in the chest."

" What do you need me to do?"

" You must stop me in my tracks before I reach the chest."

" Are you serious!?"

Captain Keeta laughed. " Is that not a worthy enough challenge for she who has woken me? If you cannot stop me then you are of no use to anyone! But, I know you will stop me because it is your destiny even if it means throwing away your life in the process. Now, pass through the barrier of flame! Defeat my soldiers who shall fight you with unbridled fury and strike down my being with your blade! Show me what you've got!"

He then turned around and began walking away--more like limping--and thanks to his large size, each step he took was like a stride for someone of my size. I also got to see what lurked on the other side of the bridge that Princess Twilight had seen earlier. The pathway continued onward for a bit before going to the right and around where it would stop at the treasure chest so I didn't have much time to stop him. Captain Keeta then walked past two red markers embedded on each wall that suddenly had a wall of flame appearing in-between them followed by two Stalchildren rising up from the ground.

Now I knew what he meant when he said I had to pass through the barrier of flame, and I quickly figured out that defeating his soldiers would enable me to pass the barrier. My eyes then spotted additional red markers lining both sides of the pathway meaning I would be slowed down by flames and Stalchildren every time until I either struck him down or he reached the chest before that. What was really surprising was that he was merely walking away from me rather than choosing to fight there and then. Was he trying to tell me something by effectively retreating from the field of battle?

I had no time to figure any of this out as he was already starting to get ahead of me. Unsheathing my sword and slinging my shield onto my arm, I ran forward to meet his soldiers, and began swinging my sword around in hopes of defeating them quickly. The Stalchildren attacked by swinging their clawed hands at me that I reflected using my shield before striking the first one, lobbing off its head, leaving it headless, followed by another strike that destroyed it. The other one had no fear given what happened to the other and continued the assault, hitting my sword arm, prompting me to retaliate by slashing its chest repeatedly until it fell apart.

The flames then disappeared and I continued running in hopes of catching up with Captain Keeta. I was just about to reach him when more flames appeared, catching me in their blaze, and sending me flying backwards, landing on the ground and brushing my tunic in a frantic pace to put out the flames. As I looked on and saw Captain Keeta slowly walking away, I looked down at the ground and two more Stalchildren rose up ready to slow me down. Already things weren't going so well since a combination of fire and undead were keeping me from attacking this guy. I needed some kind of plan and quickly!

" Things aren't going well, Twilight." I said as I got back onto my feet.

" Looks like this test isn't as simple as it looked." Twilight said.

" If only I could slow him down so that I can catch up with him."

" You might be able to do just that."

As I lobbed off another Stalchild's skull before destroying it my next strike, I looked at Princess Twilight with a puzzled look. " You know of a way? I sure hope so as I could do with things going right for a change against the captain." The other Stalchild swung its bony arm and I reflected it using my shield before hacking off its head followed by destroying it on my next blow. With that done, I resumed running after him only to be stopped by another flame wall that appeared between the two red markers. Two more Stalchildren rose out of the ground following this leaving me to moan over how this was getting ridiculous.

" Do you have any arrows?"

I nodded my head. " I picked some up when I was grinding for rupees earlier." I then slapped my forehead upon putting two and two together and realizing that I could use arrows to slow down his movement long enough for me to attack his legs. I had to work fast given the Stalchildren would block my efforts by getting in the way of my aiming forcing me to deal with them rather than the real problem. I took out the Hero's Bow, loaded an arrow, and was about to fire at Captain Keeta when one Stalchild ended up blocking the shot and getting hit, losing its head, and stumbled about as a result. " Oh come on!"

" Ignore them and keep trying!"

" Easy for you to say."

" You can do it, Sunset!"

I fired another arrow only for the other Stalchild to walk out in front and taking the hit causing it to be pushed back. It was at this point where Captain Keeta was even further ahead now than he was before and my chances of catching him were fading away. I attacked both Stalchildren with arrows, destroying them, and causing the flames to disappear allowing me to continue chasing him. That's when I fired an arrow volley in hopes of scoring a hit and not carrying about how many I used. Most of my shots missed their target in spectacular fashion yet the last one managed to hit his ankle prompting him to turn around and walking towards me.

He was definitely faster now that I had caught his attention--he actually looked like he was shuffling about--but when he suddenly turned around and began walking forward towards the chest, I ran towards him, struck him in the back of the leg, and found myself on the receiving end of a very large claw swipe courtesy of Captain Keeta. He turned around again and as I got back onto my feet, he continued swinging his clawed hands about forcing me to use my shield to defend myself from his blows. The Stalchildren had stopped spawning and no flames were blocking the way forward so that meant I now had gotten his full attention.

Despite being much larger than me, he had quite the long reach not to mention long claws, but then I could easily walk underneath him and attack his legs repeatedly until he was either destroyed or gave up the fight. Each of his blows kept pushing me down but I refused to surrender knowing my chance would come yet it wasn't easy since as an undead monster, the captain couldn't get tired from constant attacks. When I finally got a chance to do something, I rushed forward and began attacking his legs, pushing him into the cliff-side and continuing the assault until he knocked me down with another claw swipe.

When I got up this time, Captain Keeta shuffled forward, swung his claw, and raked me across the chest though while the wound was deep, it wasn't as painful as it looked. Had his strength escaped him after so many centuries or was he holding back knowing this was his chance to finally rest in peace? Whatever his reasons, I had to make sure I didn't take too many hits otherwise it would mean joining him--in other words I would be dead--so when I used my shield and deflected a claw swipe, I rushed forward and attacked him again until he jumped straight into air, and came crashing down moments later, knocking me to the ground.

Getting up again, I felt disoriented over how strong his attack was not to mention how large of an attack range he had. I swung my sword in hopes of connecting with his legs but he merely jumped into the air and landed knocking me down again. After that, he resumed swinging his claws about once again forcing me to protect myself with his shield. No doubt I was understanding why he commanded so many soldiers. His strength was certainly formidable even though he was dead and that kind of thing was necessary otherwise the soldiers wouldn't respect him and therefore abandon him.

" You need to watch his shadow on the ground."

" I first have to attack him before he jumps."

Princess Twilight nodded. " His attack range is long but he is very predictable in his attack pattern. He shuffles forward, launches a barrage of attacks, and then eventually backs away so that he can resume the assault and repeat the process. You need to wait until he backs away before attacking his legs, and when he jumps in the air, watch his shadow and take evasive actions or else you'll get knocked over."

" I have a feeling he won't take much more punishment."

" Yes." Twilight said. " He may be undead but even he must have a limit before he will go down."

Captain Keeta continued swinging his claws against my shield but then he shuffled back just as Her Highness said, and that's when I ran forward before slashing him in the legs again until he jumped into the air. Since I knew what to anticipate, I looked down at the ground to see his shadow and quickly jumped to the side just as he came crashing down. I could have attacked him before he got back up but he was faster than he appeared and was on his feet again. The captain began swinging his claws again proving that his attack pattern was easy enough to follow so I just needed to attack him at the right time.

With my shield raised again, I blocked each of his attacks and when he shuffled back, I ran forward and attacked his legs, prompting him to jump in the air. He came down a few moments later though I wasn't fast enough to prevent myself from being knocked down in the process. As I struggled to get back onto my feet, Captain Keeta knocked me over again using his claws, and upon getting up again, he knocked me down for a third time. I got back up again and this time raised my shield just as his claws were about to strike yet again, and when he shuffled back to give himself some leverage, I rushed forward and attacked his legs.

He jumped yet again and I moved back but got caught on the fringe of his landing on the ground. He then resumed his claw swipes only for me to repel his every blow with my shield--how it hasn't gotten dented or even broken after so much punishment was surprising--and this went on for a while before he shuffled backwards like before. I then ran forward and attacked his legs only for him to suddenly jump up even higher than before. At first I thought this was some kind of new attack that was sure to cause me problems, but when the captain landed and raised his hand, I was confused by what he was doing.

" Wait!" Captain Keeta shouted.

" What are you doing?" I asked.

" Stand down!"

" Why should I?"

" I admit defeat." Captain Keeta answered. " I know that there is nothing I can do to defeat you. Please follow me to where I was resting before I was awakened by your song. I shall share my story with you." He turned around and began walking forward though with an even bigger limp than before. I wasn't sensing any kind of trap and his words did sound honest in their delivery, but no sooner had he gone a few metres when he turned around and beckoned me to follow. " You need not be afraid, chosen one. You won the battle and so you are entitled to know much more. Again, please follow me to where I once rested."

I looked at Princess Twilight and she nodded her head to indicate that I should follow after him. Captain Keeta then turned back the other way and started walking forward with me following behind him at a safe distance--I didn't want to get hit by his claws in case he suddenly decided to go into a frenzy. As he continued walking, the ground started to vibrate, a reminder that the moon was drawing ever closer and that I would soon have to reset time. To be honest, I rarely noticed the vibrations given I had other things on my mind, but given the sudden silence all around, the vibrations were clearly obvious.

A few minutes later and we arrived back at where Captain Keeta once slept. I was surprised when he suddenly jumped down to the ground below considering he could have just gone the other way while I walked in the direction he intended, but I wasn't about to question his motives given the fact that he was dead. Upon landing and a couple of bones cracking, he turned around and looked at me with those red eyes of his. Behind him stood the treasure chest that supposedly contained his spirit but that didn't make much sense. Why lock away your own spirit rather than keep it on you in death?

Captain Keeta then continued. " To think that I didn't see you as worthy upon first glance because of your appearance. I realize now that you are full of surprises and are capable of holding your own against one of my stature. As promised, I shall share my story with you. My name is Captain 'Skull' Keeta! When I was alive, I once commanded the Ikana Army atop the hill, in the name of the Ikana Kingdom. No matter what kind of opposition they faced, the soldiers who swore loyalty to me fought to the bitter end even if it meant their own lives would be lost to them. I was seen as one who had never tasted defeat and my soldiers used that notion as an inspiration."

" It sounds like that changed."

Captain Keeta sadly nodded. " You can see right through me it seems."

While I knew he wasn't being literal about it, I had to make sure not to bring it up. " What happened?"

" I was defeated in battle."

" Oh."

Captain Keeta looked up at the sky. " The Garo were merely assassins! They were not soldiers like myself and my men, but they had learned of how we fought by spying on our training and created counter-measures that could overcome our strategies. Despite the odds stacked against us, I lead my soldiers into battle against the Garo only to be defeated by them. My first loss in battle brought me nothing but shame and not even my soldiers pleas of continuing were enough to convince of wanting to carry on. We were decimated in a short period of time and the Garo gained momentum."

" So you chose to banish yourself here?"

" I could no longer face my soldiers who looked up to me."

" It's never fun to lose at anything but you shouldn't have given up so easily."

" You do not understand what I experienced."

I shook my head. " No, I don't know, but I have experienced something similar to what you went through. I thought about giving up and allowing myself to wallow in despair, but I got back up and did everything in my power to change things for the better. It wasn't an easy transition given that my past proved difficult to overcome but I had the support of my friends who were there to help me out."

Captain Keeta remained silent for a few minutes before responding. " Perhaps I was wrong about you once again." He looked behind at the treasure chest surrounded by flames--it looked like he was shedding some tears despite not having any eyeballs in his eye sockets--before looking back at me. I didn't know what it was but I felt a strange aura flaring up around us and it came from him. " I have waited here for one to come and awaken my soul. Had you not defeated me than you would have been denied the secret contained in the chest but you deftly defeated me thus proving your worth. I have need of your power to fulfill the one request that has lingered in my current existence."

" What is it?"

" Inside of the chest surrounded by flames is my soul contained within the form of a mask."

" A mask!?"

Captain Keeta nodded. " The mask is known as the Captain's Hat. It is a symbol of authority that my soldiers swore fealty to long ago. By wearing my mask, you will be able to speak to my soldiers as though you were me. I want you take it and convey this message to my men, who, even in death remain loyal." He turned to face the chest once again. " Tell them that the war has ended. They will then carry out whatever orders you give them and perhaps they can finally rest. Do this task and I too shall drift quietly into sleep." He turned back before raising his hand and performing a salute. " Captain, sir! May I take leave, sir?"

I had no idea why he suddenly was saluting me as though I were now his superior officer but I needed some time to ponder over what he had just said. With the mask inside of the treasure chest, his soldiers would become mine to control, and my mind turned to the Stalchildren in the graveyard along with the ones in the Oceanside Spider House. They were all his men who continued to serve him in death and were waiting for new orders. Perhaps I could see what lurked underground by having his soldiers open up those gravestones, but I would need to do so when Zecora wasn't around otherwise she wouldn't be happy about it.

Since she was active during the day, I could only have the Stalchildren open the graves at night. While it sounded pretty morbid plundering someone else's grave, it could prove to be essential considering Zecora mentioned something about attendants to the Ikana Royal Family being buried here. As for the Stalchildren at the cursed house, I should pay them a visit when I have a free moment so that whatever they were doing over there wouldn't be a wasted effort. I then thought about asking Captain Keeta if he knew anything about the Garo or what caused the kingdom to fall apart but it seemed that opportunity was lost.

The captain continued standing there waiting for me to respond in kind. He was definitely the patient type for sure despite his overall complexion but I knew that it was wrong to keep making him wait especially after he poured his heart--or lack of one--out in explaining his tragic story. I then returned his salute with my own and he expressed joy knowing at long last he could finally rest in peace. With a simple "yes sir", Captain Keeta suddenly fell to pieces before disappearing completely causing me to reach out with my hand in vain before clenching it into a fist and lowering my head in sadness.

Looking back at the treasure chest, the flames surrounding it disappeared, allowing me access, but the gap in-between the two pieces of the bridge was quite large. There was no way of jumping across without dropping down and forced to come back up here again but luckily I had just what I needed. Reaching into my pocket and taking out the Hookshot, I aimed at the chest, fired the chain where it sailed across the sky, sunk into the chest, and pulled myself across the gap. Good thing chests were made of wood otherwise I would have had to have come up with another tactic.

Opening it up, I took out the Captain's Hat, and my initial expression was one of sadness. The mask itself looked just like Captain Keeta's head only on a much smaller scale and also bore a resemblance to what he had been wearing on his head prior to disappearing. Would his soldiers seriously think I was him all because I was wearing this mask? Either they were pretty stupid or their lack of intellect due to being undead would affect their overall judgment. Unlike most of the other masks, this one felt really important, as though I needed it in order to save this region from what was plaguing it.

" With that mask, you can now talk to the Stalchildren." Twilight said.

" Do you think their lack of intellect will make this easy?"

Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders. " I don't know, Sunset, but you shouldn't let that be a concern. Captain Keeta's soldiers respective that mask you hold in your hand and will obey your orders without question, but perhaps you should give them instructions beneficial to their stations and not something that goes against their creed."

" I could have them open the gravestones."

" Yes, but Zecora might not like that."

" Which is why I need to fast forward time until sunset."

" Good thinking." Twilight said. " Zecora said she goes back home before the sun goes down so you can ask the Stalchildren at night. I'm assuming that they only come out at night which would explain why she isn't afraid of them."

" I'm not of the idea of grave robbing."

" Neither am I but what other choice is there?"

" We could explore the interior of Ikana."

" Maybe but there might be something important below the graves that could prove vital."

I felt conflicted over whether to open the graves or not. On the one hand, Princess Twilight was right in that there could be something useful down there that could help us survive the coming trials. On the other hand, desecrating someone's place of rest felt incredibly horrific and made me think of myself as an uncaring monster. While I didn't know those who were buried underground, I just couldn't bring myself to opening their graves. Her Highness then said that our actions wouldn't make much difference given we would soon be resetting time but it was the principle of the thing.

To desecrate one's burial site... I couldn't find the words to describe how appalling it sounded, but as Her Highness continued explaining that these people had been buried for centuries, she believed that only a few of the graves could be opened. She doubted the Stalchildren would be willing to open them and they were most likely wanting a chance to open them should they get orders from Captain Keeta. Her explanation was pretty shallow in execution but I understood what she was saying. I had to open the graves because the fate of three words hung in the balance--that was what I assumed.

Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I played the Song of Double Time and concentrated on wanting to be sent forward in time to the moment the sun went down indicating nightfall. Through its powerful magic and the song, the ocarina heard my plea before whisking me forward through time until stopping at where I wanted to be.

Night of the Final Day - 12 Hours Remain.

As soon as nightfall began, the ground began vibrating and I looked up at the moon, its hideous form had gotten even closer than before. Since I knew that time wasn't on my side due to there being only twelve hours left, I ran down the pathway only to stop upon seeing the Stalchildren again. They were in different locations compared to the previous night yet it was the ones walking around a nearby gravestone whom I needed to speak with. Gulping over not knowing whether this would work or not, I put on the Captain's Hat and walked--with fear in my heart--towards the Stalchildren who immediately stopped.

" Huh?" One of them asked before suddenly saluting me. " Aah, Captain Sir! Excuse me, sir!" He then turned to the other two Stalchildren walking around the grave and informed them of the situation before they saluted. " Everyone, give the captain your full attention!"

" At ease, soldier." I said.

The Stalchild seemed nervous at first but I assured him that everything was fine. " We haven't seen you in some time, sir!"

" What are you doing?"

" Carrying out the most recent orders you gave us, sir!" The Stalchild answered. " As per your orders, sir, we've been guarding these graves closely, a different one each day. A few of the others questioned why we were to guard them but I made sure to give them a stern talking to over questioning your orders, sir. We were over by that grave first before moving to that one over there before coming to this one right here."

" Are these graves where the Royal Family of Ikana were buried?"

" Yes, sir!"

Crap! It had then occurred to me that I had come to the graveyard on the wrong day! If anything, I should have come as early as the first day as that would have allowed me to investigate all three graves instead of just the one that they were watching over. Part of me felt like a complete and total idiot for not reaching this conclusion a lot sooner but I supposed it was for me to learn about it now and not later where I would have felt even more humiliated. There were two problems that I now had to atone for. The first was something important could be hidden beneath one of the graves they were guarding on the previous days.

The other was having to make my way back here again after resetting time since I didn't see any Owl Statues on the way--I suspected that the statue was located deep within the region as opposed to what could be described as the outer fringes. The Stalchild asked me if everything was okay and I responded with a yes, gritting my teeth at the same time, and wanting to vent my anger out on something because of being stupid--not against them as they didn't do anything wrong. Given the current circumstances, I decided to not to waste this opportunity and go with what I could do.

" What will you guys do now?"

" We have all been expecting your next orders, sir." The Stalchild answered. " It doesn't matter what it is so long as it doesn't go against our code of honour as soldiers, we shall carry out whatever order you command."

" I want you to open the grave."

The Stalchild was taken aback by my sudden request. " You... you want me to open it, sir?"

I nodded my head. " Yes."

" Yes, sir!" The Stalchild said. He then turned to the other two surrounding the gravestone and they looked at him in return. " Captain Keeta has ordered us to open this grave so everyone follow my lead and we'll get this opened up." He then looked back at me. " This will only take a few moments, sir!"

The other Stalchildren began arguing with the one I had spoken to saying that opening the grave was tantamount to treason against the Royal Family of Ikana, yet the other said that my orders were absolute as the captain and weren't to be questioned. The two looked at each other and then at me before bowing their heads knowing that they had to obey or else be viewed as disobeying orders. I personally thought such an interaction showed how even undead monsters understood the concept of being loyal to those who commanded you. I could understand their concerns but in the end this was what I wanted.

I assumed that they would dig up the grass and dirt in front of the gravestone for me to be able to get access to what laid below but instead they began swiping the gravestone using their claws in different places. It didn't take long for them to break it to pieces, exposing a hole in the ground, and jumping down into it leaving the rest of their comrades behind to continue what they were doing before I arrived on the scene. The hole looked pretty deep as though it dropped down forever without any signs of having a bottom but I knew there was a bottom to this one.

Since I had nothing else to do, I jumped down into the hole where the gravestone was and became surrounded by an infinite darkness with only Princess Twilight's light from her being a fairy being my only shine in the darkness.

Sometime in the past.

" Well, here we are." Lightning Dust said.

" What is this place?" Starlight asked.

" You wanted me to bring you to the place where you can pull off that prank and here it is."

Starlight looked up and almost got a crick in her neck. " You weren't joking when you said that this was a long climb." She noticed that the area consisted of numerous ledges and giant blocks that appeared to be capable of moving to other locations but she couldn't see much of anything else. " Good thing my powers enable me to fly so I don't have to do any climbing but I don't like the fact we have to go up so high in the first place." Starlight raised her hand to her ear and listened to the sounds of moaning coming from below. " You never said the undead were lurking below in the darkness."

Lightning Dust shrugged her shoulders. " I'm just a thief, kid. I know little about this place other than what I heard from the researcher and two sisters who came here about a year ago before leaving again with a pair of masks they stole from the assassins graveyard."

" Hee hee! They sound like a much more interesting subject!"

" I wouldn't put too much stock into that."

" You will tell me more about these sisters!" Starlight said, the eyes on her mask glowing. " If you don't tell me willingly then I will use my powers to get the information out of you by force though I hope you'll choose the latter. It's no fun when people agree to share their secrets instead of being tortured."

Lightning Dust backed away slowly only to be pulled back towards Starlight. " Look... All I know about those sisters is that they were clothes made for farming so you might want to check out the ranch if you want to become friends with them." She then tried backing away again only for Starlight to pull her towards her again. Lightning Dust began feeling uneasy knowing that her chances of escaping were growing dim and her captor would eventually kill her out of sheer boredom. " If you want to pull off that prank you keep on talking about, the temple would be your best bet."

" I want to see these two farmers who stole masks."

" Why would you want to see a pair of farmers?"

" They sound like a real fun pair, hee hee!"

Spike then protested. " What about your prank, Skull Kid? You said this was going to be your best one yet, right? We're so close to it right now so why bother abandoning it in favour of some farmers who acted in a manner similar to what happened when we ran into that man."

Starlight reacted to what Spike said by batting him away with her fist. " Don't speak out of line!"

" I... I didn't mean to."

" You're right about me focusing on pulling off my prank."

" We could pay a visit to the ranch later." Spike said. " There's not much else left to do anyway so we might as well relax and wait things out until Tatl finds us. I still can't believe she got left behind by that Deku Scrub just because she got offended by what you did."

Starlight looked like she was about to bat Spike again but chose not to when she realized that he didn't reveal anything significant that time. Instead, she began laughing and kicking her legs that almost knocked Lightning Dust over to much to her annoyance. " Definitely one of the best pranks I've ever pulled and on some girl wearing green no less. Those forest kids are so easy to fool given they think that tree will protect them from what lurks beyond the forest."

" Do you think she will follow us, Skull Kid?"

" Probably. She did seem pretty stubborn."

" Maybe Tatl is with her?"

" We can only hope."

Lightning Dust then inched closer to Starlight who suddenly turned around in response. " You stole that mask from someone else? It seems your fairy friend said something you didn't want him to mention." She clasped her hands together and began jumping up and down before stopping when Starlight's eyes glowed once again. " Relax... I have no intention of informing anyone of what you did. In fact, I am glad I now know you're nothing but a thief. It shows that you're just like me, a person who does whatever they can to make ends meet, and to steal from those who are suckers."

Starlight batted Spike again. " Next time, keep quiet!"

" No need to punish him."

" You stay out of this!"

" Again, I have no intention of telling anyone." Lightning Dust said. " We thieves have a strict code that states we don't rat out our fellow thieves though there are some exceptions to be made when certain thieves began too sure of themselves and think they are above everyone else."

" It doesn't change the fact that you got too close to me again." Starlight said, her dark aura flaring up and surrounding her body. " I think your usefulness to me is at an end seeing as you did bring me to my destination so I'll give you a quick and painful death..." She cut herself short upon noticing Lightning Dust having gotten a good distance away from her and was in the tunnel that connected back to the main area. " What the? Where did you go? Don't tell me I allowed her to play me for a fool!"

" She ran away a few moments ago." Spike said.

" Why didn't you stop her?"

" I can't do much as a fairy, Skull Kid.

" That's the stupidest excuse I've ever heard."

" Sorry."

Starlight's anger got the best of her and she destroyed several boulders nearby using her magic. She then proceeded to take her anger out on Spike by berating him and even batting him about once or twice before calming down and assessing the situation. Lightning Dust may have gotten away but she had managed to bring Starlight to where she needed to be so now all that remained was pulling off her prank. Granted, it meant having to climb all the way up to the top of the structure but that wasn't an issue since she could fly using her magic and ignore everything.

" We'll carry on with the prank."

" Sounds like a plan, Skull Kid."

" But, I've just come up with the makings of one final prank."

Spike was surprised. " I thought this was going to be your last one."

Starlight laughed. " Hee hee! You should know that I always have a new prank in the works, Tael, and believe when I say that this one will be my final prank. Once I make things more lively around here, I'll make sure this entire world gets to experience the glory of my masterpiece."

" Are you sure?"

" I have every inclination of making it a reality.

After dropping down through the darkness for what felt like an eternity, I finally landed on solid ground and began to look around at my surroundings. I was in a small corridor that opened out into a massive chamber that looked like someone had built it centuries ago given the choice of architecture. In front of me were several pots that could contain items yet it was someone lurking about in the darkness ahead--I could see a shadowy figure--that piqued my interest. For one thing, how could anyone have gotten down here when the only way was by using the entrance that had been made by the Stalchildren.

Unless... There was another entrance that I didn't know about. If that was the case then this figure was either a person or a monster though I was gearing more towards the latter since the only human around this part of the region was Zecora. The Stalchildren had since disappeared--my assumption was that they had finally rested in peace after being given new orders by their captain--so I no longer needed to worry about them, yet I could sense a great evil lurking all around. It made my hair stand on end because of how powerful it felt but then this was a graveyard after all. Evil being in a place like this was expected.

I used my sword to smash all of the pots--there were six in total--revealing a couple of recovery hearts, one green rupee, one blue rupee, and some arrows. I was expecting something a little better but I supposed anything would do so long as it wasn't nothing. I then walked forward until I entered the larger part of the room before looking around. There were a large number of dirt mounds throughout the chamber, several blocks stacked up like a staircase, moving platforms above my head, and other platforms that simply hovered with the moving ones moving about between them. Finally, there was a flight of stairs at the far end of the room.

" What do you make of this place, Twilight?" I asked.

" It's strange that something like this was built below the graveyard." Twilight answered.

" I don't see anyone buried around here."

" Perhaps they were buried in a different location and this place serves a different purpose."

" Still, don't you find it odd?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " At this point, nothing surprises me about this world. I will admit that the architecture around here is simply fascinating. Whoever built this place certainly had a flare for wanting to showcase beauty what with the vibrant colours mixed with the mystery of being located deep underground. I can tell though that time has taken its toll around here what with all the cracks on the walls and the smell of decay. I'd say everything could come crashing down if we're not careful."

" I wonder if this was a place dedicated to the spirits."

" That's quite random even for you."

" When I landed after dropping all that way, I sensed an evil presence all around us." I said. " It was very faint but I could definitely feel something. It could be the spirits of the dead longing to be free from being trapped down here or they view us as threats given that we're alive and they aren't."

" Sunset? Why are you still wearing that mask?"

I placed my hand on my face and discovered that I was indeed still wearing it. " Guess I don't need it for now." I took off the Captain's Hat and put it away only to hear the sound of someone calling out somewhere in the darkness. " Did you hear that?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Someone else is down here with us."

" Why do I suddenly hear voices all around? I thought I was the only one down here making sound."

Both Her Highness and I immediately recognized the voice as belonging to Zecora though how did she manage to get down here? I doubted she used the entrance that was made earlier by the Stalchildren so there was another entrance somewhere. My suspicion focused on the flight of stairs I noticed earlier. Had Zecora used the passageway those stairs lead towards to get down here? If so then where did the path ultimately lead? Also, why was she even down here in the first place? Wasn't her job watching over the graveyard? Unless she had a really good reason, I suspected something amiss.

I walked up to Zecora. " Um... excuse me?"

Zecora jumped when I spoke and beat her chest a couple of times before turning towards me. " You? Who are you? It's so dark down here that I can't see, and for that it really does annoy me." She then noticed Princess Twilight's glow and covered her eyes. " Whoa! That light is so bright that I'm beginning to lose my sight. Sorry if I'm sounding rather grumpy but my vision isn't what it used to be. By the way, what is that which is glowing in front of me? You're not a ghost are you?"

" That would be my fairy companion."

" Is that you, um... what was your name again?"

" Sunset Shimmer."

" Sorry if I can't recognize you down here but like I said my vision is pretty poor."

I didn't know if she was telling me the truth or was trying to make a lousy excuse but I decided to give her the benefit of the doubt. What I really wanted to know was what she was doing down here in the first place. Zecora had her shovel in her hand indicating that she came here for some digging and given there were dirt mounds down here, it didn't take me long to put two and two together, and conclude she intended on digging them up. The dirt mounds were too big to be soft soil, the places Gold Skulltulas and bugs enjoyed so these were here for a different reason entirely.

" So what are you doing down here?" I asked. " I didn't think a grave keeper would need to be here."

Zecora went silent for a few seconds before answering. " I should ask the same about you, but I will tell you first so as to not be shrew. I came here looking for the legendary treasure of the Royal Family that was buried down here but my torch went out some time ago and I've been stumbling about in the darkness ever since then. Since your fairy is giving off a bright light despite my vision problems, this is a perfect opportunity for both of us."

" What do you mean?"

" Could you and your fairy walk out in front of me and light the way? I promise that this will definitely make your day."

" You want the treasure don't you?"

Zecora nodded. " If you spot any suspicious places on the ground and talk to me, I will dig in that spot using my shovel. As long as the light from your fairy shines bright, I won't wind up getting lost or be out of sight. Just lead me to where you think it's buried."

Princess Twilight's happiness suddenly crumbled upon realizing that Zecora here was nothing more than a grave robber--thief if you will--but she had to remember that this wasn't the same Zecora she had come to know. That was something I learned the hard way even though I would still succumb to such thoughts all because a particular person meant a great deal to me and seeing them acting in a completely different manner was unexpected. Still, seeing Zecora acting like a thief made me feel terrible for having spoken with her earlier, but much it was with Iron Will, I had to look past that and see her as doing what she thought was best for herself.

Also... A part of me was curious as to what this treasure was supposed to be. It had to be something good if it was buried down here for so long but then I had to wonder why no one had been able to find it. What Zecora also said about me being and Her Highness being ghosts was ridiculous but perhaps she was referring to actual ghosts who thrived down here in the darkness they loved so much. Considering the graveyard was plagued by Stalchildren and Captain Keeta--at night--finding a ghost underground wasn't out of the question. I hoped our little excursion wouldn't result in something going wrong.

" Alright..." I began. " I'll help you find the treasure."

" I was hoping you would say that." Zecora said. " When we find the treasure, I'll split it up with you. That way, I will benefit and you will too. I'm counting on you to show me the way so let's get going without delay."

Before we began, the ground began vibrating to remind me that the moon was still falling outside and that I only had so much time on my hands. I needed to get this treasure hunting done as soon as possible otherwise I'd have no choice but to come back at this time and try it again. Princess Twilight then floated over to Zecora and acted as a light for her to follow and I walked out in front of them so as to lead them around until we came upon any dirt mounds. Fortunately, there were two of them right next to where we were so I guided Zecora over to the first one where she began digging in the ground.

Unfortunately, nothing came out of the dirt and she made sure to let me know by saying we needed to search elsewhere. To be honest, I wasn't entirely sure what we were supposed to be looking for since she didn't specify anything, but I suspected she didn't know what it was either. We had just barely gotten started and already I was having doubts on whether we would find something down here. Zecora then started walking off on her own without Princess Twilight's light guiding her and even called out for me as though I had suddenly disappeared so Her Highness quickly floated over to guide her on the right path again.

The next mound of dirt also came up with nothing though Zecora was determined to not give up until all of the dirt mounds had been dug up. She then mentioned that there could be some located on the platforms suspended in the air and suggested us to get up there and see if they would yield anything. I could easily climb up onto those platforms myself using my ingenuity but Zecora would have a much harder time since she wasn't as active as I was. I then guided her over to the next mound of dirt where she dug into it using her shovel and a strange light suddenly appeared that lightened up the area.

" What is that?"

" I don't know what it is, Sunset, but it might help us find the treasure." Twilight answered.

" It... looks like Blue Fire."

Princess Twilight looked confused. " Blue Fire? You'll have to explain that one to me."

" Blue Fire is blue in colour--obviously--and looks like regular fire but it can be used to cool you down if you find yourself getting hot." I said. " Some people will try and sell you some for a ridiculous amount of rupees though you can easily find it by looking in the right place." I was about to continue when a strange sound suddenly echoed around me. I looked down at the floor and my body turned cold upon seeing a familiar shape that I remembered from my previous journey. " Incoming!"

" What are you talking about?" Twilight asked. Her question was answered moments later when a hand dropped down from the ceiling. It wasn't attached to anything, was much larger than a regular hand, and reeked of the undead that was prevalent around here. " I see what you mean, Sunset." Her Highness regained her composure but before she could say anything, I had already destroyed what had paid us a visit. " Wow... You certainly took care of that creature without me having to give you advice."

I wiped my forehead. " I remember this from before but the name escapes me."

" It's called a Wallmaster." Twilight said. " It drops down from the ceiling, walks around for a couple of seconds, and then jumps back up to the ceiling before choosing to attack again moments later. If it catches you, you'll get taken back to the entrance of wherever you were at the time. Fortunately, it doesn't take many hits before it goes down and it's known for dropping a large assortment of rupees."

" You never know when they will attack." I said as I collected three red rupees that appeared after the Wallmaster was destroyed.

" Where in the world did you go?" Zecora asked. " Please don't go so fast on account of me being slow."

In the excitement, I had completely forgotten about Zecora who had since begun wandering off into the darkness and away from the remaining dirt mounds. My anger flared up a little so to relieve myself of stress, I pounded my fist into the ground and ran over to where she was going to bring her back to where she needed to be. Once Princess Twilight's light surrounded her once again, Zecora began walking back really slowly most likely because of her age though it was testing my patience. It took her much longer than necessary to reach the next dirt mound and nothing was inside of it when she dug it up.

There was one more mound of dirt on the floor before we had to go to the floating platforms so I lured Zecora over to it where she dug it up and a second light appeared. None of us had any idea what the significance was behind these flames but there was no point in dwelling over it. The treasure was somewhere in here waiting to be uncovered and Zecora had no desire to give up now though I began thinking otherwise--I wasn't sure what Princess Twilight's opinion was since she had to act as a light source. Unless it was something really good, I had every mind to simply walk away and leave Zecora on her own.

But, since I was the heroine and all, I couldn't abandon her despite how I felt. Zecora then asked me to take her to another spot so I began leading her somewhere in hopes of finding something that could take us to the floating platforms above us. Fortunately for us, she stumbled upon something when she suddenly stepped on a strange tile on the ground and it rose up into the air. Again, Zecora called out, asking me where I had gotten off to despite Her Highness being with her, so I quickly noticed a ladder, ran over to it, and climbed up to the top where it consisted of another mound of dirt.

The platform Zecora was standing on floated over until it came to a stop up against the platform I was standing on and she asked if she wanted me to dig there. I then saw what I would need to do to reach the other platform and the blocks that went up towards it like some steps. If nothing could be found here, I would have to find some way of taking Zecora over to it. Nodding that I wanted her to dig, Zecora shoved her shovel down into the dirt and dug some up producing a third flame, but suddenly all three began moving towards the center of the chamber before coming together.

All three then formed a giant ghost wielding a lantern and Zecora immediately reacted. " WAAAAH! It's the leader of the ghosts!" She then began running towards the stairs, ran up them, and down the passageway before running up a staircase that wrapped around the corner. Her voice then echoed out though my focus was on the monster that showed up thanks to her digging about. " I'm running right now dear friend. I hope for your sake that this won't be your end."

" I should have known that would happen."

" Guess we have to deal with this ghost." Twilight said.

" And you were questioning their existence."

" This definitely proved me wrong." Twilight said. " Anyway, this is a Big Poe and like its name suggests, it's a giant Poe who will attempt to charge at you whenever it becomes visible before disappearing. While it's invisible, you won't be able to attack it but you'll need to avoid the lantern otherwise you'll take some damage. When it reveals itself, using arrows to attack from afar would be your best bet."

" What about my sword?"

" You'd need to be really close to be able to hit it."

I cursed under my breath. " I really need to get that complete sword upgrade."

" Yes, yes you do."

Upgrading my sword wasn't the only thing I needed to take of. As I took out the Hero's Bow and nocked an arrow onto the string, I realized that I only had the medium-sized quiver and that there was still another one I could acquire at the Swamp Shooting Gallery. Since I knew where it was located, I had no excuse to not go over there and pick it up, but first I needed to deal with the Big Poe who suddenly disappeared, laughing in the process. If this ghost was like the ones from my previous journey in the graveyard, it would only take me about six arrows for me to defeat it.

The Big Poe then charged towards me by swinging its lantern around as a means of trying to clobber me with it. While it had disappeared, the lantern was still plainly visible so I knew where it was going to be at all times. All I had to do was avoid being struck by the lantern--not a simple task since the Big Poe moved pretty quickly when attacking. Case in point, it came swinging at me after I dodged it moments ago, and I went flying, landing hard on my butt before getting back up. It then appeared and I fired my arrow--it was still locked and ready to fire--striking the Big Poe in the chest, causing it to disappear.

It then charged towards me, lantern swinging like before, only this time I dodged it only for it to turn around and come back the other way, hitting me in the process. The wound wasn't too serious given I had felt much worse but I couldn't allow it to control the battle otherwise I would be a disadvantage. When it re-appeared, I struck it again with another arrow--its massive size proved to be a hindrance since missing it was practically impossible--but this time it didn't vanish and instead continued charging at me, catching me off guard. I went flying once again and landed hard on my butt before getting back only for the Big Poe to vanish.

Compared with other "boss" battles, this one was pretty simple since it wasn't doing all that much other than charge around, swinging its lantern, and staying invisible in hopes of not getting hit until it chooses to make itself visible to me. The Big Poe charged again and I jumped to the side, rolled on the floor, and stood back up just as it appeared again, and fired another arrow though this one hit the lantern causing no damage, but I quickly fired another one and scored a hit before it disappeared. I thought it strange how there was so much space yet it was using the central part of this chamber and nothing more.

Loading another arrow, the Big Poe swung its lantern into me, hitting my stomach, and pushed me back--I didn't land on my butt this time--before turning around and striking me again followed by a third strike before re-appearing. Either I was starting to lose it or it was getting desperate by increasing how often it would come charging at me. It then attacked again though I lowered my bow and raised my shield, its lantern colliding with my shield, causing sparks to fly. I lowered my shield and fired another arrow causing the Big Poe to disappear--this was starting to get annoying since it was just doing the same thing over and over.

I dodged the first lantern swing and then the second but got caught on the third and landed hard on my butt shortly afterwards. Getting back up, the Big Poe re-appeared and I fired an arrow only for it to miss completely--I had gotten slightly disoriented from being struck by the lantern--before firing two more that each hit the lantern. It then charged at me again prompting me to raise my shield and parrying the blow, and it was at that moment when I regained my composure and shot another arrow. This one managed to hit resulting in the Big Poe burning away and its lantern dropping down and smashing to pieces on the ground.

" That wasn't as difficult as I thought." I said as I wiped my brow and put away my equipment. " I did take some unnecessary hits though."

" At least you defeated the Big Poe."

" And it left behind something I might want to consider."

" Yes." Twilight said. Both of us then walked over to where the Big Poe fell and Her Highness wanted to take a closer look at the remnants of the ghost only for me to use my hand to block her efforts before telling her not to get so close. " While you may be familiar with this, Sunset, my curiosity can't be denied though maybe we should focus on what is going on at the top of those stairs." I looked up and saw a large treasure chest materialize at the top of the stairs so I walked up to it, opened it, and took out a Piece of Heart that made me feel warm all over thanks to its healing ability.

" I needed that."

Princess Twilight felt conflicted. " That wasn't what I would call a treasure if you were Zecora but it definitely benefited you, Sunset."

" Even something like a Piece of Heart is valuable in the right context."

" That is true." Twilight said as she turned back to the Big Poe's remnants. " Since you have an empty bottle, you could scoop up the remains of the Big Poe and sell it to someone who would pay money for it. I'm sure Iron Will might be willing to pay a good amount but then that would involve paying a visit to his shop, selling it, and depositing the rupees into the bank or else lose them when you reset time."

" I don't really need to see him until I have to get that mask."

" You can easily get it now since you have the Giant's Wallet."

" If I can be reminded to prevent the robbery from happening back in town, I can easily visit him at this same time during the next three-day cycle."

Princess Twilight then had an idea. " If you want, Sunset, I could give off a ringing sound to remind you that you need to be in Clock Town at that precise moment though it would mean having to leave whatever you were doing behind and coming back to it later." I looked at Her Highness and she immediately knew what I was getting at. " I honestly didn't know that I had that ability until just recently but it seems it would have been incredibly useful in the past had I known about it sooner."

While knowing that she possessed such a unique ability, Princess Twilight was about how she should have come to that realization a long time ago. Granted, I didn't have to be reminded of any engagements with other people since I was handling events in this world in a specific way, yet it seemed this would be the first instance where having to be reminded was a necessity considering it would ultimately lead towards acquiring another mask. I told Her Highness that she didn't have to blame herself due to me not needing such an ability yet now I had need of it as the final region was supposedly more difficult than the others were.

I chose not to take the Big Poe's remnants since I didn't need to see Iron Will right now, but I did choose to check up on Zecora and also because I wanted to know where that staircase she ran up would lead to. I walked up the stairs and found myself in a small room that consisted of a bed, a desk, a chair, a couple of shovels, and a crude painting of what looked to be a spirit hanging up on one wall. Zecora could be heard mumbling under the bed, saying that what happened earlier never occurred, and she wasn't about to search for any treasure any time soon. I wanted to try and talk to her but she was barely able to muster any coherent thoughts.

There was nothing more I could do here given how much time remained so I took out the Ocarina of Time, played the Song of Soaring, and focused my efforts on wanting to return to town and prepare to come back on an earlier day. Wings protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, and spun me around before I ended up back in town. Helping out Zecora didn't take much time so paying a visit to the bank was well within reason. After depositing my rupees--the Wallmaster had definitely proven lucrative though Fleur Dis Lee was surprised at what I deposited--I took the ocarina out again and played the Song of Time to go back to the beginning.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain.

Now that I had restarted time, the first thing I needed to do was to pay a visit to the Swamp Shooting Gallery. First, I played the Inverted Song of Time so that time itself would slow down to one third of its normal pace followed by playing the Song of Soaring--I had never played so many songs all at once within such a short period--focusing on wanting to go to the entrance of Woodfall--the Southern Swamp. Once again, wings protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, and spun me around before I disappeared again and appeared moments later at my intended destination.

Since I was at the entrance of Woodfall, I didn't have far to go so I turned around and ran down the path that connected the swamp with Termina Field, avoiding any monsters that were blocking my path, and turned to the right upon seeing a sign that informed me about the Swamp Shooting Gallery. This new path wasn't all that long and quickly ended at two doors, one went to the gallery which was what I wanted, the other lead to another fishing pond--I knew this because there was a sign outside indicating as such. While part of me felt like relaxing by fishing for a while, I couldn't afford to waste time since I had an entire region to explore fully.

Walking into the Swamp Shooting Gallery, my ears got exposed to a rather obnoxious voice. " Ay, mate! 'Ow ah ya?" The voice came from the man in charge and he had an extremely thick accent. My ears didn't enjoy the grating of his voice but since I needed the quiver upgrade, I had to put up with it until I was finished here. " Don't see many comin' round these parts wot wit ta swamp bein ta way it is. In fact, ya the first person ta come here in a very long time."

" You have quite the accent."

" Tanks, mate."

" So this is the Swamp Shooting Gallery?"

The man nodded. " Me game will test ya shootin skills to teh limit. Judgin' frum yer sharp eyes, girl, ya seem like teh kind o' person who wuld excel at shootin' things. I may not luk like much and me accent might be annoyin' teh people, but I tells ya that me game is the best thing to e'er hit dis swamp. If yer pay me some money and get ta aye enough score, ya culd walk out with a brand new quiver. Course ya need ta pay me first before I can let ya play."

" I do need a new quiver."

" Then yous and me will git along jest fine."

" What do I need to do?"

" First, ya need ta pay me twenty rupees!" The man answered, his hand outstretched to indicate that he wanted money first. " Once ya pay, I'll tell ya me rules but know I'll only tell ya once so be sure yer listenin'."

Since I wasn't about to get a word in edgewise with this guy, I was about to reach into my pocket when I realized that I didn't have any rupees on me. Crap! I didn't pick up any from cutting down grass, destroying monsters, or even taking some out of the bank. I felt like a complete idiot because of this and sheepishly told him that I would be right back once I took care of something very important. The man blinked at me as I went back outside and began scrounging around for rupees. My mind raced as I struggled to find some but the only grass nearby was back the other way towards where that tree was that housed the Piece of Heart.

I ran towards the grass and hacked it to pieces, collecting green and blue rupees before moving onto another patch, and repeating the process a couple more times before I had finished my sudden rupee grind. I had amassed roughly twenty-five rupees which would allow me to play that man's game at least once so hopefully I wouldn't screw it up and be forced to go back outside and cutting down grass again. I walked back to the Swamp Shooting Gallery and went inside where I bowed in front of the man, apologizing for having left all of a sudden though he didn't seem to mind it.

" Here are your twenty rupees." I said as I handed over the money.

" Th' rules ta me game are a piece o' cake!" The man said. " Take a gud look o'er at ta beautiful scenery. Tahgets are gonna appear all o'er ta place in different formations and yer job is to hit each and every one of 'em. Some tahgets will be worth thirty points, others wil be worth fifty, and the rare ones wil be worth one hundred. Sounds simple, right mate? It ain't 'cause of one little catch. To get credit in me game, y'gotta hit 'em awl! If ya miss even a single one, ya failed resultin in me game endin' and ya not gittin' anything."

" How many targets are there in total?"

The man raised his finger to his mouth. " That's fer ya ta find out."

" I figured as much."

" Shoot fer th' tahgets from atop th' platform." The man said. " Ya ain't allowed ta to hit th' tahgets any other way. Normally, I'd ave ya use one of ta gallery's bows since it be company policy, but I like ya so ya can use yer own bow instead. Oh, and before I fuhget, ya ave infinite arrows. Anyway, like I said, y'gotta hit 'em awl! That's awl there is to me game. Ah ya ready ta play, mate?"

I nodded. " Yes."

" Then stand atop th' platform and start firin' when ta whistle blows."

I walked up to the platform, took out the Hero's Bow, nocked an arrow onto the string, and aimed at a beautiful piece of scenery. At first I thought it was some kind of special effect or something this man had set up for his customers, but it turned out to be a section of the swamp that I had never seen. Two tall trees, a mountain peak in the distance, a large plain, and more was present here yet I couldn't see any targets for me to hit. Either he had been lying to me or there was much to this game than appearances suggested. I then looked down at a row of weird looking plants only for them to pop out of the ground as Deku Scrubs--or some kind of variation.

In any case, I was beginning to understand why I couldn't see any targets initially. Some of them were going to pop out of the ground while others could show up just about anywhere and I wouldn't realize it until it was too late. Considering how I barely managed to scrounge up enough rupees, I needed to make this first attempt my only one.

Chapter 52: The Living Armour

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
April 10, 2017
Chapter 52: The Living Armour.

This wasn't the kind of game I was expecting. In fact, I was expecting it to be similar to the one back in Clock Town. Granted, this one also featured monsters that needed to be shot at in order to accrue points, yet the monsters were moving about in a large forest setting rather than being confined to one general area. Since I didn't really have time to ponder over how I would handle this, I decided to simply shoot at anything that moved. Sure, it wasn't the most ideal plan but having an infinite supply of arrows meant I could miss intentionally and not get punished over it.

One thing that was on my mind revolved around the scoring system. In the previous shooting game, I earned one point for each red Octorok that I hit--the blue Octorok merely took away precious time instead of taking away points. With this game, the man never said what each monster's value was so I had to either hope for some kind of indication or try to figure out what each one was worth. Speaking of him, I still couldn't get over how thick his accent was. I wondered then if said accent was a reason why no one came to play his game simply because they couldn't understand a word he said--it amazed me that I actually could.

Firing my arrows at the unusual Deku Scrubs, I was able to hit them all causing them to disappear, but no sooner had they done so when another group popped up in their place, these ones being the proper Deku I had come to know--also from being one through the Deku Mask. As I aimed my bow and started firing arrows, I then noticed two additional Deku hiding in opposite ends of this setting. They were most likely bonus targets that required dedication towards shooting them down given there were other things that required my attention. I was able to hit four Deku before the fifth disappeared back into the ground followed by the sounds of cawing echoing all around.

Three birds then flew into the scene and I recognized them from my previous journey. I couldn't recall their names exactly but they were annoying at best since all they ever did was attempt to fly into me just because I was in their territory. The Deku Scrub I missed then popped back up giving me too many targets to choose from so I opted to fire in all directions hoping for something to turn out right. While this wasn't my best idea as the man looked at me wondering what I was doing, I'll admit that it worked as many of the targets were being felled--the birds and Deku Scrub went down relatively easy while the two additional Deku were hard to hit.

I now had a brief moment to pick off the two hiding at both ends of the scenery but again they were hard to hit since they were so far away. While I had gotten much better at using a bow, my skills definitely needed improving especially since I fired a barrage without even thinking of where my arrows would go. I fired an arrow at the Deku on the left only for it to miss entirely--it didn't even reach it--so I adjusted my aim and tried again only for howling to disrupt my concentration causing me to miss it again. I wondered what could have made such a howl only for my answer to come in the form of two Wolfos running on the ground.

Now things were really getting out of hand. The two Deku Scrubs disappeared back into their respective flowers while the Wolfos ran straight across the scenery and I had to get rid of them before they escaped and I would lose out on some serious points. I fired an arrow, destroyed the first one where it burned away to nothing, but then before hitting the other, the unusual Deku Scrubs appeared from their Deku Flowers--it was a different group this time--and blocked me from hitting it, causing me to hit one of them instead. I cursed under my breath as I quickly took them out followed by taking the Wolfos out just as it was about to flee but then more birds appeared.

" Looks like I found another reason why no one comes here." I said to myself as I began shooting at the birds. " If that man's accent wasn't enough to deter them, it would be the ridiculousness behind this game that kept them away and him earning a profit. Having a beautiful backdrop is fine and all but having moving targets of different temperments isn't ideal by any means. Perhaps he should have scaled back on the more elusive targets or prevent them from escaping far too quickly." As each bird got shot down and burned away upon landing on the ground, the familiar looking Deku appeared--again it was a different group.

" Now I wish Rainbow Dash was doing this instead, or Applejack since they're both archery experts." I said to myself, my confidence breaking because of how difficult this game was getting what with so many monsters showing up all at once. I took the row of Deku Scrubs, the easiest part so far, then the hard-to-reach Deku on the right side of the scenery, yet before I could get a moment to relax, the same one reappeared again from its flower along with another one on the opposite side. " Why do they keep reappearing? How many of them did he put into this game!?"

For the next several minutes--it felt like forever as there was no stop of monsters appearing--I shot arrows all over the place, hitting them as they appeared with some almost avoiding my arrows completely through a combination of sheer luck and my own dumb luck. No doubt the man was enjoying my display though I wouldn't be surprised if he would question me afterward on how someone like me could get her hands on a bow with the kind of shooting I was doing. It also made me wonder if he could complete his own game given how difficult it was.

The pattern turned out to be simple. The two kinds of Deku Scrub would alternate every time one row of them would be taken out and the birds would appear in-between each formation either flying in from the right in a formation before going their separate ways until leaving. The Wolfos came in from the left--either one or two of them--upon the second Deku group being defeated, running across quickly, and leaving the scene from the left. Finally, the two Deku who are hard to hit are completely random, making it difficult to know when they would show up. Through it all, it took me until the end to figure out their pattern.

I continued shooting down the monsters, my exhaustion clearly showing by this point, and then it came down to the final three monsters. One of the hard-to-hit Deku Scrubs and two Wolfos--not my ideal choice--were all that remained yet the man pointed towards a clock hanging on the hall, an indication that time was almost over--he never bothered to inform me about a time limit. I had little room for error so I went after both Wolfos first, shooting both of them using five arrows, but when I aimed up at the Deku, a whistle blew signalling the end of the game. When the whistle blew, I was startled by how sudden it was, and fired one last arrow, hitting the Deku.

" Yer all outta time, mate." The man said.

I dropped to my knees, sweat dripping down my brow. " That was absolutely intense!"

" Me game takes a roit amount'ta skill ta be able ta win it."

" If you want my opinion, you should hold back on having so many monsters showing up."

" Perhaps yer roit."

Once I regained my breath and got back onto my feet, I put my bow away and turned to face the man. " Despite how ridiculous that was, I'll admit that it was a lot of fun but I don't know how many points I earned since you didn't tell me about it before I started playing."

" T'was me mistake, mate."

" So how do the points work?"

The man took out a piece of paper from underneath his desk, a pencil that had been left on the side, and began writing down some numbers. " Small Deku are worth thirty points while dere bigga cousins are worth sixty points. Teh boids are worth sixty points as well while dem wolves are worth a 'undread points. Lastly, the Deku 'iddin' in ta background are also a 'undread points given 'ow they're 'ard ta hit. Ya moit think me game is rigged wit 'ow I tally up da points but ya'll find other customers approved of teh system when I showed 'em. Now gif me a few minutes ta figure out yer score."

He began furiously scribbling away to determine my score though my eyes were focused on Princess Twilight. Her Highness floated over until she was directly above his head and looked down to see what kind of numbers he was calculating. Her constant head shakes indicated that he clearly had no idea what he was doing though I had no right to tell him how to do his job since this was his place. I just had to hope that I got a decent enough score that would give me the bigger quiver upgrade otherwise I would have to go back outside and scrounge around for rupees again.

Eventually, the man came to a stop, put his pencil down, and looked over at the work he had done. Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders before floating back over to me, and my heart was filled with dread knowing not even she could figure out what he did. If she couldn't figure it out then it meant a disaster was coming but perhaps this man was much smarter than appearances suggested? He then picked up his pencil and made a last minute change to his calculations, my heart beating rapidly over what was about to come my way. The moment of truth had come and I was ready to accept the verdict.

I spoke out eagerly. " How did I do?"

" Awright!" The man answered. " Despoite how yer were aimin' all over ta place, yer method actually proved beneficial, mate. Accordin' ta what I wrote down, ya managed ta 'hit all of th' tahgets though ya didn't have any time ta spare. I wuz thinkin' 'bout that last shot where ya 'it that Deku jist as time ran out, and I decided it counted since it wuz a purdy lucky shot ya made, and I do like it when customers give me sumfin fancy."

" So that last shot counted?"

The man nodded. " Aye. Accordin' ta me notes 'ere, ya managed ta score a total of 2180 points."

" Is that good?"

The man nodded again. " That's purdy durn good, mate, a perfect score." What!? Despite how difficult and absurd that was, I managed to get a perfect score? While I was happy about hearing it, I needed to make sure it was correct and not his way of showing me sympathy over my shooting skills. I walked up to the counter and asked if I could see his piece of paper and he obliged by showing me. " Not many customers ask ta see me work but then they usually don't care 'bout it and prefer ta jist leave wif their prize. Ya needed ta 'ave 2170 points in total ta win me game and yer beat it by jist ten points."

" Why 2170?"

" 'Cuz that's ta total all dem monsters add up ta."

" That explains so much."

" Since ya were able to get ta 'igh score, allow me ta give ya this, mate." The man said. He reached below the counter again and pulled up a beautfiul looking quiver with a golden trim on the top and symbols eched all around the tube though I couldn't understand what any of them meant. " This 'ere quiver can hold more arrows than that old one yer currently usin' so why don't ya gif me that one and I'll gif ya dis new one instead. Ya should be able ta hold up ta fifty arrows so if yer a lover o'shootin' wif a bow, yer gonna love usin' dis quiver." He handed me the quiver and I gave him the other one in return where he placed it on a shelf that was behind him."

" Sorry if I ran out on you earlier."

" Ya don't need ta apologize, mate."

" I guess this is where I live then."

" Before ya go, I would like ta mention that there is another prize if ya git a perfect score for a second time." The man said. " When and how dem monsters appear and behave is different the second time 'round but someone wif yer skills ought ta 'ave no trouble wif it. I know ya don't 'have 'nuff rupees ta play again so perhaps ya might come back sumtime in da future and play me game." He was about to turn his attention towards some papers he had at the opposite end of the counter but quickly looked back at me. " Aye! Tell yer friends awl about us, awright, mate?"

" Us?" I asked, confused. " I only see you around here."

" Jist a figure o'speech, mate."

Leaving the Swamp Shooting Gallery, I took a closer look at the new quiver I had acquired. This would definitely make things easier for me when it came to not running out of arrows though a part of me was curious as to what his other prize was. I'm sure that it wasn't anything serious and I could easily come back at any time and win whatever it was before having to reset time. Luckily, it didn't take long for me to acquire the quiver so I had plenty of time to get back to the final region and explore it fully. As I began walking along the path before heading right to go back to Termina Field, I began thinking about what this region would be like.

No doubt there wasn't going to be any signs of life aside from a researcher, his daughter, and Lightning Dust when I got there, but I supposed the spirits of the dead would count as being alive since they were brought back from the beyond in some manner. I would also need to get my hands on a map so that involved finding Pinkie Pie as soon as possible. And then there was the graveyard and what those Stalchildren were guarding during the first two nights. It sounded like I needed to find my way back down underground to pick up something important from one of those tombs so I was glad that I had the Captain's Hat to command those Stalchildren with.

Before I could forget, I still had the Garo's Mask that I won by defeating the Gorman Sisters in a horse race. I needed it to gain access to the final region according to what Adagio said but she wasn't specific about how to use it. Did I have to show it to someone or was I supposed to wear it and something happens? Either way, I was ready to finally explore the land of the dead this region was known for and awaken the final giant, and that was something else that came across my mind. The giants were represented by the three princesses of Equestria, albeit their human counterparts, yet who would be portraying the last one?

All of these questions were flowing through my head yet they had no answers to them. I would need to figure out some of them and soon before things would spiral out of control, and yet I had forgotten about one other question, the one I chose to ignore but could no longer do so since it was getting closer to that time. How was I going to counter the evil manipulations of Ganondorf? His next contest supposedly would happen upon my awakening the final giant and within the dream world yet why not another physical confrontation was beyond me. Was he anticipating my resolve to weaken upon seeing the horrors of this region?

Worrying about him now would only weaken my resolve and allow him to easily manipulate me in the future so instead I needed to focus on the final region. Upon leaving the swamp and returning to Termina Field, I realized that I needed to go back to where the graveyard was since I hadn't activated an Owl Statue, and that meant taking the long way. At least I could rely on Epona rather than walking to get me there quickly and of course I needed her to jump over those fences. Taking out the Ocarina of Time, I played Epona's Song and watched as she galloped over to me before stopping and letting out a loud whinny.

I whinnied back at her in return, climbed onto her back, and gently kicked her in the ribs to get her going. Aside from the occasional Red and Green Chu-Chus who merely jumped around in a pitiful attempt to attack us, Epona was able to outrun them without any trouble and we continued on heading northeast until the grass changed into dirt signalling that we were heading towards the canyon and what lied beyond it. As she continued galloping along, Epona would whinny whenever I whipped her flank to make her run a little bit faster since I didn't want to waste too much time, yet I knew she needed to get used to it given what she already endured.

Once we entered the path that connected the field to the canyon proper, I whipped Epona's flank so that she could jump over the fences all while avoiding the Real Bombchu, who had taken the place of those Blue Bubbles we encountered last time--it was day as opposed to night like before--though they all lit their fuses prompting Epona to gallop as fast as possible so as to avoid getting caught in numerous explosions. As the monsters exploded all around us, we managed to reach our destination yet I wouldn't leave my steed in a place where she could get blasted by explosions, so I had her trot on over to where we saw the group of stones and left her there.

" Are you Epona will be safe here, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

I shook my head. " I honestly don't know but I don't see anywhere that could be a safe spot given how barren this place is."

" And yet this is nothing compared to what lies further ahead."

" Any idea on how we even get there?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I have no idea."

" There has to be something we missed."

Princess Twilight then floated upwards in order to have a look around before suddenly coming back down and screaming at the top of her voice. " Sunset! Sunset! I see him! I see him sitting on top of the cliff! I see King Sombra!" I waved my hands to get her to calm down but she was insistent on continuing to yell until I clamped my hands around her body until she finally calmed down and was able to speak coherently. " I saw King Sombra sitting up there staring out at nothing until he looked down at me, and that's when I came back down here to warn you of his presence."

" Why would he be around here of all places?"

" I don't know but we need to prepare for anything."

I remembered Her Highness telling me about how she and the pony versions of my friends went to the Crystal Empire to stop King Sombra from reclaiming it as his own. While the story was relatively boring in some places, it was certainly one that showed Princess Twilight having learned that not all plans worked out the way you wanted. I had seen Sombra myself during my previous journey where he ran a curious Ghost Shop located in the destroyed Hyrule Castle Town, and he collected all kinds of Poes though it was the Big Poes that he wanted for reasons I wasn't willing to ask about.

Looking up at the top of the cliff, I couldn't see anything so I walked backwards a few paces, and sure enough, there was King Sombra sitting on the cliff's edge. He was wearing the same robes I saw him wear before when he ran the Ghost Shop yet there was a strange aura that surrounded him. I couldn't tell what kind it was though my mind was telling me it had something to do with death itself. I wasn't about to question how he managed to get up there since it was pretty obvious that he walked all the way here from the final region, or perhaps he merely appeared out of nowhere and my assumption was incorrect.

Sombra then looked down and noticed me before giggling in a creepy manner. " Yee-hee-hee. What are you doing in a place like this?"

" I've come to enter the land beyond this cliff!"

Sombra giggled again. " Such a boisterous claim you made, but sadly it falls on deaf ears. Ikana Hill beyond here is the place where spirits with troubles and lingering regrets wander brought back to this mortal coil through no action of their own. Even now, the spirits wander in search of one who can save them. They cannot exist in their current forms as they must continue resting in peace, yet such information does not mean anything to you. It is unfortunate, but this place is not for one such as you..."

" What? Why not?"

" Because you do not have what is needed."

" I do have it!" I shouted back. " I do have the mask."

" And yet I cannot see it upon your face." Sombra said. " If you insist on entering this place, then you must obtain the mask containing wandering spirits that can be found near the ranch, stolen by those who possess black hearts, and use it for deeds that desecrate those who once represented it and their leader. Without that mask, you cannot save their souls so be gone with you!"

Crap! I should have spoken to him while wearing the Garo's Mask then I could have avoided hearing him say that. Despite Sombra not allowing me to proceed straight away, he did reveal some important information regarding the Ikana region and giving me something to go with. The spirits of the dead were in need of my help and though I didn't know what to do to save them quite yet, I now knew what needed to be done. Of course, I still needed additional information and perhaps Pinkie could provide some but before doing that, I first needed Sombra to move aside and allow me to continue.

I was about to take out the Garo's Mask when I suddenly thought of something. Since Captain Keeta was originally from Ikana, was it possible that I could be given access if I were to wear his mask instead? I wasn't going to lose out on anything were I to try it and Sombra might say something in response so I took out the Captain's Hat, placed it on my face, and looked up at Sombra to see if he would react accordingly. At first he merely stared at me--it was creeping me out--followed by lurching forward to get a closer look but then he startled giggling, a sign that could mean anything given his eccentric nature.

" Well?" I asked. " What do you make of this?"

" Sunset!" Twilight exclaimed. " That's not the right mask."

" Oh I know that."

" Then why did you put that one on?"

" I wanted to see what his reaction would be."

Sombra giggled once again and almost fell down onto his back. " Yee-hee-hee. You are wearing an interesting mask yet I am surprised that you were the one who was able to calm his spirit and allow him to rest in eternal slumber. That is the mask of the captain of the soldiers who once served to protect the castle on the hilltop. Despite his untimely defeat, the captain was well respected by those who served him, and even now they continue to carry out his orders though they wait for new ones. Now, Ikana Hill is the gathering place for the spirits of those with lingering regrets. Until now they wander, seeking one who can save them."

" You already said that, about them needing to be saved."

" It is necessary to remind you that the spirits linger and seek salvation."

" No need to repeat yourself for my sake."

Sombra giggled again and it was starting to get on my nerves. " In any case, you cannot save them with that mask... Have you no other to show me? It is unfortunate, but I cannot let you pass so be gone with you. Yee-hee-hee!"

This time, I knew what I needed to do. I took off the Captain's Hat, switched over to the Garo's Mask, and put it on my face before looking up at Sombra who then stopped giggling when he saw my face. In fact, his reaction almost caused him to fall down the cliff though he managed to stop himself just in time. No doubt that he wasn't expecting me to have the required mask but perhaps now he would allow me to continue on and no longer be an obstacle whose gaze continued making me feel incredibly nervous. Then again, Sombra could have additional conditions I needed to fulfill, and that would simply be unfair.

I called out to him. " What do you have to say now?"

Instead of giggling this time, Sombra tapped the staff he was holding on the ground and a tree rose up next to him. " I see that you have that which is necessary to enter the land beyond this point. You have surprised me, child, as I did not expect such a thing from you. Fate works in mysterious ways and cannot be questioned. You have the mask of the leader of the ninjas who once spied on the hilltop castle with the blood-stained history."

" Do you know why I need this particular mask?"

" With that, you may be able to call out their spirits that even now are still wandering." Sombra said. " The ninjas respected their leader immensely and would carry out the will of their clan and never question it. By wearing it throughout Ikana Hill, you may be able to summon them and learn information that will aid you, or perhaps they will claim your life as they know when someone deceives them."

" I'll be fine."

" Perhaps you may be able to save the souls that wander beyond here... Yee-hee-hee."

Sombra's body then slowly began disappearing until he was gone completely, and while that left Princess Twilight feeling uneasy, I didn't feel the same way given that I had been through this kind of scenario before. At the very least, we could finally proceed into Ikana though I didn't want to wear the Garo's Mask the entire time--it would just make me look weird in addition to who it originally belonged to when I got it. It didn't take long for me figure out the Hookshot was needed since I had no other means of getting up the cliff. I doubted there was an invisible ladder since this place was devoid of most anything.

Aiming the Hookshot at the tree and firing the chain, I got pulled up to the top of the cliff, but before continuing, I turned around, looked down at Epona, who was still safe inside the circle of stones, and whinnied down at her. She looked up at me and whinnied in response prompting me to smile knowing she would be safe before turning my attention to the path ahead though it seemed suspicious. There were several jagged rocks sticking out of both cliff-faces though it was the smell of something odd that made me worry. I couldn't recognize what it was given the faintness behind it so I continued walking forward.

I noticed Princess Twilight was nervous so I chose to calm her fears. " Are you really that nervous about King Sombra?"

Princess Twilight nodded slightly. " It's not that I'm afraid of him personally since he was defeated by my version of Spike along with Princess Cadance and the entire empire, but the version of him we saw was creepy beyond all reckoning. He just appeared out of nowhere and almost scared me to death which is why I came back to you in a panic. I guess I'm going to be experiencing even more horrifying things before we're finished in Ikana."

" Everyone is afraid of something."

" And you have personal experience."

I nodded. " It's not just Princess Celestia and Ganondorf that worry me, but also whether I can save this world from Starlight. I mean, I'm doing pretty well so far, but what if there's more to it than that and whatever happens is something far beyond my skills?"

" We'll cross that bridge when we get to it."

" I suppose so."

" By the way..." Twilight began. " Why are you sniffing the air?"

" Can't you small something odd all around us?" I asked. " It smells very familiar but I can't put my finger on it."

Princess Twilight then pointed to some creatures that suddenly rose out of the ground. " Perhaps the smell is coming from them?" I looked at what she pointing towards and my first thought was that they were some kind of Gorons given their similar bodyshape, but that thought quickly disappeared when the creatures began rolling towards us. " Those things are called Nejirons and what you've been smelling is gunpowder."

" What!?"

" They are literally living explosives so you need to avoid them otherwise they will detonate."

" I guess their similarities to Gorons is a form of deception?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes and they use that to attack when you find out that it's too late. You could attack them from a distance by shooting arrows at them as that will cause them to explode, but I don't think you have enough arrows and they do re-spawn relatively quickly so it's best to make for Ikana."

Her Highness didn't have to tell me twice though I was planning on avoiding these monsters regardless of what they could do. Unlike the Real Bombchu, these Nejirons weren't as fast though the noise they made was annoying given how obnoxious it sounded, yet I suspected their explosions would have a larger radius and that meant avoiding them like the plague or else suffer for it. I ran past a pair of Nejirons who had gotten too close though they began following behind, and as I ran the rest started rolling after me along with others rising up from the ground and joining the chase.

I seriously considered turning around and shooting some arrows at them in hopes that one explosion would result in all of them being defeated, yet I feared they were immune to their own explosions and would continue following until I collapsed from exhaustion. No, I had to keep running until they could no longer follow me though there was no telling when they would give up. I continued running when two Nejirons started to rise up from the ground in front of me so I performed an acrobatic feat by jumping over them making sure not to come in contact with them--my landing could have been better.

Suddenly, boulders started tumbling down both the cliffs and the path in an attempt to knock me down, prompting me to take evasive action by hiding behind the jagged rocks and waiting for them to pass though I still had the Nejirons to deal with. One of them exploded right behind where I was standing and while I didn't suffer any injuries, I was propelled forward by the blast, slamming into a jagged rock up ahead. Getting back onto my feet, another Nejiron decided to explode followed by two more and soon most of them were exploding, pushing me along, my back feeling singed from so many explosions.

By the time the last ones were exploding, I had gotten far enough away that they simply ignored me and went back down underground leaving me to continue on. The cliffs then spread outwards as Princess Twilight and I entered a massive area comprising of yet another cliff that needed to be traversed--at least there was a tree I could pull myself up towards by using the Hookshot. A river was situated at the base of the cliff and the broken bridge indicated someone didn't want me to make it to the other side, and a pathway to the right looked to go away from where I needed to go.

Princess Twilight then bopped me on the head. " Sunset! Look over there!"

I looked to my right and noticed a very familiar character. " That's Lightning Dust!" Prancing about in a circle without a care in the world was Lightning Dust herself, but what was she doing in such a morbid place like this? Despite pretending to be innocent, I knew what she had done, or rather, what she would eventually do back in Clock Town since she hadn't done it yet--time paradoxes were really confusing sometimes. " Maybe we should avoid her."

" Remember that she doesn't know who we are."

" I know but I don't want to get robbed or anything."

" I'll make sure she doesn't do that, Sunset."

" Do you suppose she knows something about this place?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " She might not be willing to tell you especially since she probably sees you as a potential victim she can rob from." Her Highness then took a closer look at Lightning Dust and noticed something unusual about her behaviour. " She keeps looking down that path to the right as though there was something important to her that lurks that way but I can't be certain. You might be able to get her to talk though I doubt anything will come of it."

Before I had a chance to do anything, Lightning Dust walked over upon noticing me, and immediately began looking at my sword. " Hey, that's a nice sword you have there. I'm surprised a kid like you would be running around with something so sharp. Come to think of it, I don't think I've ever seen you around here before."

" What do you want?" I asked.

" It's not like living people come this way you know unless they had a real good reason."

" I'm here on personal business."

Lightning Dust placed both hands on her face and pretended to be excited. " Ooooh! You must be one of those adventuring types who go around fighting evil. I don't know why you wanted to come here but let me give you some advice. You know... Lately, frightening ghosts have been appearing in swarms in Ikana Village across the river. It seems they're the ghosts of Ikana's Royal Family or something. Ever since that stranger dragged me to that accursed stronghold, ghosts have been popping up everywhere like some kind of pandemic."

" What stranger?"

" She was an imp from the forest."

My eyes widened. " Was she wearing a mask?"

Lightning Dust nodded. " Yes, and while I really wanted to hold onto it for a moment, she threatened to kill me if I got too close. That child was no mere forest imp as no one like that should be able to perform the dark magic she did when she "persuaded me" to guide her some place further in Ikana." She tilted her head for a few seconds in which she scratched her chin and her eyes lighting up upon coming to some kind of conclusion. " You're after that imp aren't you?" I nodded in response and she jumped up and down. " I figured as much since who else would be interested in an imp."

" Where did you take her?"

" Somewhere on the other side of the river." Lightning Dust answered. " I'd rather not talk about it or her for that matter as she frightens me to no end. In case you're curious and I assume that you are, Ikana Village is nothing but a barren wasteland. There's no one living there anymore, so I moved nearby. Heh, heh... I know what you're thinking. Why would anyone want to move to a place where the dead roam about without any restraint? I have my reasons for my actions but they are personal."

I felt annoyed that she used my own words against me but so far I was learning much. " Are you the only living person here?"

" Nope."

" Who else is there?"

" There's only a curious parent and child living there while they research the ghosts."

" Why would anyone do that?"

Lightning Dust shrugged. " Beats me but I don't want anything to do with them. If they want to be killed by the ghosts that haunt the place then that's fine by me so long as they don't come out this far. I'm surprised those two ranchers who came here about a week ago didn't end up suffering a terrible fate. They stole some kind of weird masks when they crossed the river and went inside one of the ruined building over there yet they were never hounded by those ghosts. They were probably lucky or something to have made it out alive though I can't say the same for that parent and child. Did I mention that is one niiiiice sword?"

" Why are you obsessed with my sword?"

" I haven't seen anything like it before and despite how small it looks, it must be pretty important to you."

" It is."

" May I take a closer look?"

Lightning Dust inched closer to me and I felt really uncomfortable in her approach so I began stepping backwards in hopes of getting some distance between us but she continued moving towards me. It looked like she had no intention of stopping until she got to see my sword but I knew that she was likely to steal it from me at the earliest opportunity and run away leaving me unarmed until I could get it back again. I looked at Princess Twilight who in turn nodded her head to allow Lightning Dust a chance to take a look at my sword so I drew it from its scabbard and presented it to her.

She quickly grew excited--and also creepy--upon seeing my sword and was eager to get her grubby little fingers on it. She moved closer, her facial expression showing a depraved individual, but when she was about to place her hands on it, Princess Twilight glowed red and began buzzing around her head as a means of keeping her back. I had no idea she could change her colour like that but I'm glad that she did to give Lightning Dust a warning to back away before she could make a terrible mistake. Her expression was one of sheer fright, a reminder of what she experienced when Starlight encountered her some time ago.

" What the!? What is that!? Some kind of red thing!? Whatever it is, it seems pretty hostile."

" That would be my companion."

Lightning Dust continued to scream. " WAAAAH! Keep it away from me! I promise not to try and take your sword!"

" I'll ask her to stop on one condition."

" Name it!"

" Tell me more about this parent and child."

Lightning Dust agreed and I nodded at Princess Twilight to let her know that she could stop and come back over to me. " Okay, this is what I know about them. The parent and child in Ikana Village succeeded in driving off the spirits with some giant music box." I looked at her with skepticism and she waved her hands in response. " I'm being honest here! Their house is shaped like a giant music box, but I can't afford something that ridiculously huge. But that's just me... Heh, heh. Whenever that house plays its strange music, any spirits within the vicinity would go back to where they came from."

" It sounds pretty good."

" Except for one problem."

" What's that?"

" They need the river's current to power the music box." Lightning Dust answered. Water used to flow out from a cave in Ikana Village, down a tiny waterfall and onto a water wheel that in turn provides the house with music. I went there myself the day after that imp did what she did in that accursed fortress, and while the house was certainly a sight, it definitely did what it was supposed to do, but upon going back again days later, it had completely stopped. The river had dried up and the spirits once again surrounded the place yet something was weird about it. It was like they wanted something in the house. Don't ask me what as I don't want to know! I haven't been over that way since."

" I believe you."

" A shame really since it means there's no value in stealing the music box or ransacking the place..."

I looked at Lightning Dust with a stern look and she responded by saying that she was just thinking out loud. She then said there was something else she needed to deal with and bid me farewell before turning around and running off down the pathway to the right. I thought about following her to see what could be over there but I decided against it since my main concern now was to find this Music Box House on the other side and see if I could help whoever lived there. Despite how Lightning Dust acted so that she could take my sword, I had no reason to doubt her claims as she knew this area better than most.

Walking over to where the river flowed, I could see the tree--more like a tree stump--I needed to reach the other side of the cliff though there were additional ones that indicated how this would work but it required getting across the river first before doing anything else. There was no Owl Statue nearby and I was beginning to worry that there either it was much further ahead or the area didn't have one. No, I had to believe there was one further ahead otherwise coming back here would be incredibly difficult. Looking down at the water, I thought those Skullfish and Desbreko from Great Bay would be here yet it looked perfectly clean.

Everything seemed peaceful until a rock suddenly came at me and hit me in the shoulder causing some slight pain. I quickly took out my shield and raised it in front of me just as another rock came flying at me only for it to break upon hitting the shield though I had no time to breathe as another rock hit my shield before breaking to pieces. I peeked out from behind my shield and saw a pair of Octoroks bobbing in the water though they weren't happy about not being able to hit me anymore. Normally, their rocks should have bounced back to them, destroying them but either my shield was weaker or they weren't all that powerful.

Another thought crossed my mind... Why were these two Octoroks here in the first place? Granted, the river was a body of water so they definitely were in their proper environment yet they just seemed completely out of place compared with others of their kind that were living in Great Bay. As rocks continued to pound against my shield, I couldn't help but notice the Octorok were lined up one behind the other right where the bridge once was. I then thought back to something I did in Great Bay Temple regarding an Octorok and suddenly it all made sense to me.

Stepping back a few steps so as to avoid getting hit by rocks, I slung my shield onto my back, took out the Hero's Bow, applied an Ice Arrow to it, aimed at the Octorok in front, and fired the arrow, striking it quickly and causing it to freeze. The chunk of ice that formed around it bobbed up and down on the water and a smile appeared on my face knowing that I now had a means of getting across. The other Octorok continued shooting out rocks but I avoided them by moving side to side until I was close enough before firing another Ice Arrow and freezing it in place. I had no idea how long it would last for the time being I was safe.

" That was pretty clever, Sunset." Twilight said.

" I thought those Octorok being here was odd."

" And you did it without needing my assistance."

" I hope you don't think this means I won't be relying on you as much."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " You can do things on your own without needing me to hold your hand but I know you still need my guidance when it comes to some of the more personal matters that you have. I would have said hoof instead of hand but we're not ponies right now."

I rolled my eyes though I appreciated what Her Highness had to say. " How long do you think these Octorok will remain frozen for?"

" Until we leave the area so that gives you practically an infinite amount of time."

I jumped onto the first frozen Octorok only to slip, fall, and land hard on my butt. " Now you know why I was never a fan of the snow when I wrote to you about it in my magic journal before Hearth's Warming last year." Getting back onto my feet, I jumped over to the other frozen Octorok, almost slipped once again, and jumped one more time until I was standing safely on the other side of the bridge. I looked up at the cliff to see how high it really was and it was at that moment when I felt glad for having the Hookshot on hand to deal with this otherwise this would have been where my journey ended unless I backtracked.

" You can use those other tree stumps as a Hookshot target."

I nodded. " Are you wondering what might be on the other side of this cliff?"

" I have been thinking about it."

" And?"

" My curiosity meter has blown through the room of my being." Twilight answered. " I've been wanting to see what kind of place Ikana is ever since we were told to come this way when Adagio mentioned it when we saved her, and while I know that it will be nothing but a barren wasteland, I view that as a wonderful thing since it means I have a lot of research to do that will no doubt aid you during our time here."

I rolled my eyes again. " I'll be sure to investigate as much of the land as possible."

Princess Twilight clasped her hands together with glee and I couldn't help but smile at how adorkable she was. That word... adorkable... It was a term that recently became an official word by being added to many standard English language dictionaries and it was the perfect one that described Her Highness perfectly. I never knew about it until our friends brought it up one time when we were showing Twilight Sparkle a tour of Canterlot High when she transferred over from Crystal Prep after the Friendship Games. I believe it was Rarity who mentioned the word to her and Rainbow Dash attributed it to Her Highness shortly afterwards.

Taking out the Hookshot and aiming it at the tree stump, I fired the chain and pulled myself up to it before aiming at the next stump that was on the side of the river I started on. I fired the chain again and was pulled up to this one before aiming up at a third stump, firing the chain, and pulling myself up once more before reaching my destination. What Her Highness and I saw next defied our expectation though we knew this was what we were expecting given what we had been told by Lightning Dust and Zecora beforehand. We had reached the final region proper and it was devoid of everything.

All around us were the remnants of buildings that had decayed for centuries including one being what remained of a castle. Off in the distance was a strange looking building that bore a resemblance to a cactus--from what I could see given it was so far away--and right in front of us was the Music Box House that Lightning Dust mentioned. It literally was a music box complete with two giant horns made to blare out music but since the water from the cave had dried up, it simply looked like a pale shell of its former self. Dead trees were everywhere as were tufts of grass yet the ground itself looked like it had been scorched.

To my left was an Owl Statue and I gladly walked over and activated it though I was surprised Flash Sentry wasn't around. Either he was somewhere else in the area or decided I no longer needed him to talk to me about what had to be done around here. Hopefully he would be around because I could do with some words of wisdom coming from him--and not because it would have been cute seeing Princess Twilight geek out over seeing him once again. My eyes then noticed Pinkie Pie floating above via her balloon though if I were to shoot her down, she'd land on the upper ledge and not down here.

Flying about were those birds I encountered when I was at the Swamp Shooting Gallery and Her Highness informed me that they were Guays, birds that flew about and chased after any who would enter their territory until they attacked successfully or fly away. Since I could easily avoid them or shoot them dowm with arrows if necessary, I didn't have to be worried about so I started walking forward only to suddenly stop upon sensing a presence all around me. It felt like something was trying to communicate with me through darkness and it made me shiver to the core of my being.

" What's wrong, Sunset?"

" I feel like something is close by."

" Are you feeling some kind of presence?"

I nodded. " I take it you can sense it as well?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Something is nearby and we need to know what it is." She floated back and forth for a few moments whilst talking to herself in hopes of coming up with a solution, and when she did, her expression indicated that she wasn't proud of having to admit it. " Despite what King Sombra has done, what he said about that Garo's Mask of yours does make sense."

I took out the Garo's Mask and held it firmly. " You mean this mask can really summon the ninjas he mentioned?"

Again, Princess Twilight nodded. " We'll need to take his word for it."

Placing the mask on my face, I took a single step forward only for a robed figure to suddenly appear out of nowhere. " WAAAAH!" The sudden appearance of this figure almost caused me to fall but I managed to avoid landing on my butt yet whoever this was didn't seem all that impressed as they remained silent. " Where the heck did you..." My voice trailed off upon seeing the figure though part of me wished I could look away. " Um, Twilight? Who or what is this?"

Before us stood the robed figure whose face was hidden behind a cowl though their eyes could be seen within it, glowing green eyes that felt bewitching in their manner, yet also giving off a powerful aura that made it difficult to stand. The figure just stood there, staring at me with that powerful gaze, and when I tried to walk away, they suddenly appeared in front of me like they used some kind of magic. The Garo's Mask appeared to have some kind of effect on the figure though I wanted to take the mask off again in hopes of this figure leaving me alone yet a voice in my head suggested not doing that.

" I believe this is one of the ninjas that Sombra mentioned."

" How am I supposed to talk to him? Her? It?"

" You could wave or something?"

I frowned before turning to the ninja. " Hello."

" Master! You called!" The ninja seemed very forward with its word though it suddenly produced two swords, one on each arm, before the area we were in became engulfed in a dome of fire that it had created to trap us both here. " What are you!? You dare disgrace my master by wearing his mask? We Garo are loyal to he who is our master and punish those who shame him by taking their lives."

" Can't we talk this out?"

The Garo didn't answer and immediately attacked by swinging its two swords in an X-formation, striking me in the chest, and knocking back into the fire where I got burned and pushed forward before landing on my face. I slowly got back onto my feet only to be attacked again and knocked back down onto my butt. No doubt this Garo ninja was serious about killing me since it kept attacking without giving me a chance to do something. I quickly took out my shield just as it was attacking me a third time and its blades collided with my sword doing no damage, but when its swords suddenly lit on fire, I reacted poorly and was struck again.

No wonder the Garo were known as assassins given how this spirit was fighting. They had been properly trained to fight using lethal force as a prerogative and it was definitely showing as it continued attacking my shield in order to get to me. By the time I finally managed to draw my sword, the Garo jumped backwards before suddenly charging forward using both its swords in the form of a battering ram. I couldn't avoid it and was pushed back into the flames and then pushed forward into the ground like last time, yet the Garo refused to hold back, attacking yet again by plunging its swords down at where I had landed.

I managed to roll out of the way just as the swords hit the ground and I took advantage by striking the Garo a couple of times. Each wound caused it to spill green coloured blood though why would it bleed since it was a spirit--a fact I wasn't planning on investigating--yet it wasn't enough to defeat it as it resumed attacking using those swords. The fire barrier didn't make things any easier as the overall radius left me little wiggle room to maneuver while the Garo could go in and out without having to worry. The Garo performed its ramming attack only for me to jump aside just in time and I slashed it in response.

It jumped back and swung both swords though I jumped back myself and attempted to attack only for the Garo to start flying about like it were a bird. I had no idea why it started doing this but I was caught completely off guard and was knocked down once more when it rammed into me. I got back up and avoided its ramming attack only to avoid it a second time before surprisingly striking it when it tried looking around to see where I had gone. This latest hit proved to be the last one as the Garo dropped both swords before dropping to the ground and raising its hand as a form of surrender.

" You... you defeated me!"

" That was a lot harder than I expected."

" To think that I would fall to one such as you."

" What happens now?"

The Garo said nothing at first though it showed no desire to simply run away but then it began speaking. " Regrettable! Although you were my rival, you were spectacular especially considering you kept on getting back up after I performed so many killing blows. I shall take my bow by opening my heart and sharing my wisdom."

" You want to give me information?" I asked. The Garo silently nodded though I wasn't so sure about it. " Why would you want to do that?"

" It seems the laws of the Garo are foreign to you."

" Looks like it."

" Just this once, I shall explain things to you so that my brothers do not have to." The Garo said. " Despite us being assassins, we had a code of honour that compelled us to share knowledge with those who bested us in battle. Our information proved invaluable since we were skilled in acquiring intelligence by spying on Ikana yet we would not be interrogated and be forced to reveal what we knew. You will come to understand what I mean in just a few moments but first allow me to share my wisdom."

" I'm ready."

" Every two minutes on every day, the girl who lives in the music box house goes to the dried well to check on something. But as long as the spirits are wandering outside her house, she dares not leave her home." The Garo said.

" I must admit that was some good advice."

" Then I shall take my bow." The Garo said as it took out a bomb from iss robes and lit the fuse. " This is why we Garo were never interrogated by the soldiers of Ikana! We may have shared some secrets yet the rest would be taken to our graves. You may choose to believe or disbelieve the words I have shared with you but my time is done. To die without leaving a corpse... That is the way of us Garo." It placed the bomb on the ground where it exploded moments later leaving no traces of it anywhere. As the flame barrier disappeared, I was quickly starting to realize these ninja were serious about their means of destroying themselves.

Princess Twilight's expression said it best, utter shock over what she had just witnessed. Yet, there was something more and it was what the Garo said before sharing its information with me. That wasn't the only one lurking around in the shadows. Others were waiting to attack me should I go about wearing their leader's mask though if I wanted to learn more about Ikana and Pinkie Pie couldn't provide all the details, then one of these Garo would be necessary. Given how the one I fought proved deadly with its skills, the rest were probably just as skilled or perhaps even more so.

I took off the Garo's Mask--I had worn it throughout the battle--and began making my way to where Pinkie was floating about. As I walked, Princess Twilight could sense the presence of other spirits, most likely the Garo lurking about, and I could sense them as well though I kept walking since I didn't want to deal with them until I had gotten a map from Pinkie and learned more about Ikana from her. Walking up a hill in front of me, upon reaching the top, my entire body froze upon seeing mummies had surrounded the Music Box House and were slowly walking around it in a circle.

It was like what Lightning Dust said. They looked like they wanted something inside of the house though I had no idea what it could be. I could only hope that the parent and child who lived in the house were okay despite being surrounded by the undead. I recognized these monsters from my previous journey and immediately knew what they were capable of thanks to my remembering what they did to me back then. While I couldn't recall their names, I knew of their ability to latch onto someone in order to drain their life force and refusing to let go unless you could shake them off.

Unlike most monsters, these mummies were highly resilient in that they didn't normally feel pain and took take many hits before finally dropping. While I wanted to destroy them and hoped to check on the parent and child, I also knew that these mummies possessed a powerful gaze that paralyzed anyone for a few moments. Perhaps there was another way of destroying them that didn't involve charging over there and swinging my sword around? In any case, I focused on reaching Pinkie, who was to my left yet I needed some rupees so I could purchase a map of Ikana--it was also a means of learning more from her.

Luckily, the tufts of grass were ideal for cutting so I walked back down the hill and cut down as many as possible. I also had to deal with the Guays who attacked me because I entered their territory but they went down in just one sword strike upon getting too close. It took me about five minutes to scrounge roughly thirty rupees by cutting the grass and getting rid of the Guays so I walked back up the hill and to the left making sure I didn't drop down below because of how the path got narrow at one point. And, when I reached Pinkie, I took out my bow, aimed up at her balloon, and popped it using a single arrow.

Pinkie yelled as she dropped and landed, her knees buckling upon impact. " Tingle was so busy drawing my latest map that I didn't notice someone had popped my balloon causing Tingle to fall down to the ground. Well, whoever decided to bring me down had better have a good reason otherwise I'll just have to re-inflate it and float back up to resume what I was doing." She then looked in my direction and began her usual introduction that I hoped she wouldn't rely on this time but then she didn't know me thanks to how everyone's memories kept on being erased whenever I reset time. " What's this? Green clothes? White fairy? Madam... Are you by chance, a forest fairy?"

I nodded to solely move on to what was important. " What are you doing in a place like this?"

" When it comes to helping out my father, Tingle will go anywhere to make a map."

" You do know that this place is filled with the undead, right?"

Pinkie Pie nodded. " Of course I do but then they seem to avoid Tingle as though I weren't important." Her face glowed bright red and her nostrils flared up, spewing out smoke like she was about to explode in a fit of rage, yet fortunately for me, she quickly calmed back down. " In this case, Tingle is glad the monsters are ignoring me though from what I could see from up there, you weren't having any such luck, Mrs. Fairy."

" Do you have information?"

Pinkie Pie nodded but with more enthusiasm. " Of course Tingle knows things, silly. But first, would you like to buy one of Tingle's maps?" She noticed the maps I had purchased from her during previous cycles and looked at me with a skeptical look. " You already have almost all of Tingle's maps but I don't recall ever selling any of them to you. Did you get them from some other map seller?" She gasped in horror. " How could you do this to me, Mrs. Fairy!? Oh wait! I'm the only one in Termina who has maps. Never mind!" Even in this world, she still knew how to provide entertainment all while making absolutely zero sense.

" I do need a map of this area."

" Then Tingle shall sell you the final map you need, Mrs. Fairy." Pinkie Pie said, reaching into her pocket and pulling out a piece of paper. " That will be twenty rupees!" I handed over the rupees--good thing I scrounged around for some--and she put them in her other pocket. " Yippee! Tingle is so happy that you bought my map so now I shall tell you anything you want about Ikana Canyon."

" For starters, can you tell me about that large building to our left and the one way off in the distance?"

Pinkie Pie nodded. " The building to our left is the Ancient Castle of Ikana! A really, really, really long time ago, it was where the king ruled over his kingdom along with his entourage of knights and other attendants who served him including various performers who knew how to dance. No has been in there for centuries though rumours say the king contracted a Goron from the mountains to reinforce the ceiling near the throne room. I don't know why but it must have been for a good reason. I'm sure it still remains intact after all this time so maybe if you were to use a powerful explosive, you could do something."

" And the other place?"

" The only thing I know about it is that it's where the evil aura is coming from."

" Not even a name?"

Pinkie Pie shook her head. " If the king were still alive, I'm sure he would have told you since he knew everything."

I had no doubt in my mind that this king was probably waiting deep inside of his castle, coming to terms with the fact that he has been brought back to life as an undead monster, and is poised to resume ruling over Ikana just like he had centuries ago. I also suspected that my journey would eventually have me crossing paths with him so I needed to be prepared for that eventuality. I noticed that there was a hole in the massive double-doors, a easy means of getting inside the castle, but perhaps a little too easy since it looked like an obvious place to check out first compared with everything else.

" What about that hole in the double-doors?"

" Tingle went in there once out of curiosity and I couldn't get anywhere."

" Why not?"

" A strange block with a sun symbol on it blocked my path."

I figured that hole was too obvious but now I needed to find another way inside. " Do you know of any other entrances?"

Pinkie Pie nodded. " There is a well not too far from here that is actually a secret underground path that the Garo used to sneak into the castle, but I wouldn't want to go down there at this moment in time, Mrs. Fairy, not with the Gibdo lurking around down there. They are really scary and became infamous for always wanting to be given things as a means of offering a tribute. For some reason, they will only respond to their own kind so unless you could become a Gibdo--or fool them into thinking you were one--going down there would be a big mistake, but perhaps that nice man can help."

" The parent?"

" Yep."

" Why would you think that?"

" Tingle knows that he studies the spirits who have been resting here for a long time." Pinkie Pie answered. " His daughter kept on insisting not to move out here but he was determined to uncover the secrets as befitting one of his stature. Come to think of it, maybe it wasn't a good idea for him to have gone to that underground path where the Gibdo live. When he got out of it, something changed about him and now those Gibdo are trying to make him one of them."

That explained why the Gibdo were surrounding the Music Box House. If this man had gone down to the underground path as Pinkie said, he must have been afflicted by some kind of curse and was now being sought out by them. Unfortunately, she couldn't tell me much more than that as it appeared she didn't know the entire story, but at least now I knew I needed to help him out before he could be taken away and leaving his child alone. I also had a reason to destroy the Gibdo though would it be enough given this entire region is plagued with the undead and killing them would require special conditions to be met?

" I'm going to help them."

Pinkie Pie shook her head. " Those Gibdo will never leave them alone until water flows out from that cave. It's strange how it suddenly stopped flowing seeing as it used to do so, but maybe it has to do with that ghost who decided to take up residence in there. Tingle doesn't know much about her other than hearing her laughing about how she now has incredible power and all she did was seal away her younger sister. She also said something about being glad that she wasn't buried in that graveyard and that only the soldiers of the former king could open her sister's grave but only two days before the Carnival of Time."

" What!?"

" Tingle doesn't understand why but it's what I heard that ghost say."

" Anything else?"

" Nope!" Pinkie Pie answered. " That's all the information Tingle has to offer, Mrs. Fairy, but I'm sure the grave keeper in the graveyard might be able to help you out. You could also ask the spirits of the dead though they might want your soul instead. Anyway, I must get back to making my maps to help my father but do please call again." She then threw confetti everywhere before dancing around in a circle, her usual means of farewell. " Tingle, Tingle, Kooloo-Limpah! These are the magic words Tingle created herself. Don't steal them." She inflated her balloon and was soon back in the sky and that was when I realized the meaning behind her words.

CRAP! I went to the graveyard on the wrong day! I mean, I'm glad I went there on the final day as it got me a Piece of Heart, but it appears I needed to go there on the first day in order to find out about this mysterious sister according to what Pinkie Pie said. Once again, she was able to give me the appropriate information that, in turn, would lead me towards the correct path despite her eccentric nature being prevalent in this world. If not for her than I would probably have been blundering about aimlessly unless Zecora mentioned something about it to clue me in on what I had to do.

In any case, I had to make my way back to the graveyard though I did have a couple of options. I could have gone back to Clock Town by using the Song of Soaring and perhaps picked up some items at the shop, deposited some rupees over at the bank, and made my way back out this way by using Epona. Yet, the only problem with that was that it would have taken too long especially since I still needed to prevent Lightning Dust from robbing the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop and eventually get my hands on a mask later. There was one other way I could go to get there and it involved taking a mighty leap.

Leaving Pinkie Pie behind, I jumped down to the main area below, ran across the barren wasteland, and came to a stop at the edge of the cliff. I had to jump down into the river and work my way back to the graveyard though jumping from such a great height was something I hadn't done before. There were such chances during my previous journey but I never had the incentive on account that it was both dangerous and utterly crazy. Still, I wanted to get to the graveyard quickly and this was technically the faster route to take though if my calculations were wrong upon jumping, I could potentially land on the rocks below and suffer more than just buckled knees.

Without hesitating, I jumped off the cliff and dropped down like a rock towards the river below. As I fell, I coul see my life flashing before my eyes and while the beginning parts of it weren't very good because of what I did back then, the rest of it had turned out pretty well despite having some lingering regrets regarding Equestria. Fortunately, I landed in the water making a loud splash in the process, and popped my head out upon getting to the surface. The two Octoroks from before had since thawed out after having frozen them earlier so I swam to the shore as fast as possible as they shot their rocks at me.

I reached the shore and climbed out only to be beat by a rock just as I was climbing out of the water, and while I wanted to freeze the Octorok that had attacked me, I had to get back to the graveyard as soon as possible. Ignoring Lightning Dust, I ran forward--she began following along prompting me to run faster--and was soon back in the canyon path that connected Ikana to Termina Field though it became apparent that I needed to jump down to the ground a second time, and I had no water below to prevent me from getting injured. Since I had no other choice, I jumped down upon reaching the cliff's edge.

Moments later, I landed on the ground, my knees buckling under the sudden pressure, though I didn't walk away painlessly. None of my body parts were broken or anything but I had sustained some kind of injury given I suddenly felt slightly weaker. I supposed falling from great heights in this world didn't necessarily mean I would be killed though it did reinforce the fact that I wasn't invincible and that future endeavours like that could prove to be my undoing. Of course, Her Highness was perfectly fine as she had wings so falling from great heights meant next to nothing for her.

" Are you okay?" Twilight asked.

I nodded. " That wasn't the most pleasant thing I've done but it was necessary."

" I'm surprised you didn't break any bones or worse, got killed upon landing."

" Should we even question it?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " Probably for the best otherwise we would be here for hours trying to figure out something that isn't really all that important." Her Highness then looked over at Epona, who was still in the circle of stones where I had left her and reassured me that she was safe from the Real Bombchu. In any case, we need to get up to the graveyard to investigate what Pinkie Pie mentioned. I assume that's the reason you suddenly decided to leave Ikana Village, right?"

I nodded. " When she mentioned about the sister and the water that used to flow from the cave near the Music Box House, I put two-and-two together and concluded that we needed to go the graveyard in order to find out what's going on." I walked over, climbed onto each step, and continued walking until we reached the graveyard. " If not for Pinkie mentioning it, we'd have been stumped for a while until we brought up the gravestones to Zecora assuming she would be willing to tell us."

" I can see her over there checking the gravestones."

" While we could talk to her again, I don't think it's necessary."

Princess Twilight agreed. " A shame really as I don't get to see her all that much in Equestria. She rarely leaves the Everfree Forest as it is though when she does it's usually to get some materials for her potions and maybe talk to a few ponies before going back home. Can we talk to her whenever we get a free moment, Sunset? I know this isn't the Zecora I know but I would appreciate it. Besides, you did something similar when you wanted to check on Applejack and Apple Bloom after helping them with their respective problems."

I nodded. " Sure, I can do that though it might be a while since we do have a lot to do." I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt and raised it to my lips. " Time to see what lies beneath another gravestone yet I suspect those Stalchildren will destroy the thing just to give us access."

Playing the Song of Double Time--it was around 11:00am so I was going to be losing seven hours in the process--I concentrated on wanting time to move to the instant nightfall came and the power contained with the song propelled us forward, time flying by around us in mere seconds, and everything going back to normal upon stopping. Zecora was gone--she went back home and bed leaving everything in the skeletal hands of the Stalchildren, and then the howling occurred signalling that night had come.

Night of the First Day - 60 Hours Remain.

Taking out the Captain's Hat and putting it on my face, I walked over to the three Stalchildren who were walking around a nearby gravestone, and they saluted me before the leader addressed me in a manner similar to the one I had spoken to before when I was here last time. After a brief conversation where he explained the situation to me, I ordered him to open up the grave causing the others to question my decision, yet the lead Stalchild scolded them saying my decision was absolute as captain and was to be carried out without question. The others agreed and assisted in destroyed the gravestone before jumping into the hole where I proceeded to follow them.

Unlike the massive room we dropped into last time, this one consisted of a narrow pathway that lead up to a door, and below us was nothing but a bottomless pit. There was another narrow pathway to our left though it went in a different direction so perhaps I would consider checking it out during the second night. In any case, I walked up to the door, opened it, and entered the next room where I was suddenly bombarded by a swam of giant bats that somehow were disturbed by my presence. I drew my sword and started swinging it around hoping that it would connect with them.

The bats would attack me numerous times as I took down several at a time until there was none left, though it appeared that defeating them was necessary since it caused another door to be unlocked at the other end of the room--iron bars had been covering it but defeating the bats caused them to be raised. Before going through the door, I decided to take a look around and see if there was anything else of interest. Three unlit torches were scattered about though nothing seemed out of the ordinary, and while I could have lit them up, it felt like it would have been a waste of arrows and magic.

Walking over to the door, opening it, and entering the next room, my body froze upon seeing something I wished I could never see again. " No... No... No-no-no-no! NO! NOOOO! Not that thing! Anything but that thing!"

Princess Twilight had no idea what was wrong. " Sunset? It's just a statue of someone wearing a lot of armour."

I shook my head vehemently. " You have no idea what that thing almost did to me." I then explained to Her Highness that this wasn't a statue but rather it was a monster that wielded a powerful axe that was capable of cutting through solid rock not to mention causing massive damage. The armour was so heavy, most attacks had no effect, and whenever it was struck, it felt nothing and would continue going. Then I told her what happens when the chest plate falls off and winced upon having to be reminded of it. " It runs faster--or what constitutes as such--than before and becomes more aggressive."

" It sounds like a very powerful enemy."

" You have no idea."

" Actually, I do."

" What do you mean?"

" Tatl has knowledge of just about every monster that exists in this world." Twilight answered. " I don't know where she got her information from but I've been using that to provide you with the necessary information on each one."

I looked at the familiar enemy and shuddered upon seeing its axe. " Just seeing that weapon brings back painful memories of what happened during my previous journey. I wasn't expecting anything like this monster when I encountered my first one, and when it began to use such brute force, I honestly thought I was going to die. I had to face five of them in total with one in particular being unique in that it behaved a lot differently." I looked directly at its face before quickly turning away. " Of course, it was really Rainbow Dash inside the armour having been brainwashed."

Princess Twilight was confused. " You never told me that."

I sighed. " Back then, I didn't think anyone would believe me since only I remembered it happening."

" Yes, I remember you telling me that but not that bit about Rainbow Dash." Twilight said. " Anyway, I know you won't appreciate this, but allow me to tell you more about this monster and perhaps mention some things you didn't know before. This monster is known as an Iron Knuckle and that axe it's holding isn't just for show. Because of how big it is, it has an incredible amount of range and being hit by it is something you know full well. Granted, it doesn't move very fast so you can easily keep away from it, but you will need to get up close if you want to attack it unless you had some Bombchu to use at a distance."

That was something I never knew before and I slapped my forehead because of it. " Anything else you want to tell me?"

" Rain can apparently slow it down though it will still be able to move."

I slapped my forehead again. Had I known this information back then instead of now, I could have dealt with this monster in a much easier fashion rather than almost losing my life several times over. I had to question Her Highness on the rain since it was impossible for it to occur underground, but perhaps it was possible for it to rain were a certain song used. I seemed to recall learning one that could cause a storm but I only ever played the song once and for that I couldn't remember. Looking at the Iron Knuckle, I knew that it had been waiting for me as why else would it be down here in the first place?

Even though it looked liked a harmless statue, I knew that it was waiting for someone to strike it so that it could begin moving. I thought about leaving and going back the way I came but the door I entered the room from had been locked with iron bars so I couldn't escape. The Iron Knuckle stared deep into my soul with its red eyes, its axe sparkling in a pale light that illuminated all around us, and I knew there was no sense in trying to hide my fear. Next to Ganondorf, this creature was one I feared the most, even more so than Sunset Demon. There was no point in holding it off any longer.

" Let's get this over with." I said as I walked towards the Iron Knuckle and unsheathed my sword."

" What are you doing?"

" In order for it to start attacking, it has to be struck first."

Princess Twilight was shocked. " What!? Isn't there any other way?"

I shook my head. " Believe me, I wish that I could just avoid what's about to happen, but we're trapped in here now and the only way those iron bars are going is if this thing is defeated in battle." I looked down at my hand and noticed that it was shivering with fear. " If I had known this was going to happen, I'd have acquired some healing potions or picked up a fairy and placed it in one of my bottles. Granted, I could just reset time right now but that would be pointless."

" You still have that option."

I reassured Princess Twilight that everything would be okay despite knowing that I was going to get my butt handed to me in an incredibly painful manner. " Whatever is down here must be important if it warranted an Iron Knuckle's presence." I was soon standing directly in front of the Iron Knuckle and looked up at its head knowing what was about to come the moment it would begin moving. Gulping heavily, I swung my sword, connecting with its armoured body, and it immediately started moving, stepping forward, swinging its axe, and slicing me across the stomach, forcing me to go flying.

" Sunset!!!!"

My body crumpled against the wall before landing on the ground and as I struggled to get back onto my feet, the Iron Knuckle was walking slowly towards me, its expressionless face a reminder of what I experienced before, a battle that would push me to the limits of endurance. Each step it took, each clank that resulted from its armoured body, produced fear in my mind, and whether it understood my feelings or not was pointless. In its mind, its only desire was to kill because of having had to wait for so long. The Iron Knuckle swung its axe into the ground, causing a vibration that caught me off guard, and it swung the axe sideways to knock me back again.

Luckily, that blow wasn't as serious as the previous one was, but it still felt like I got hit by a truck given how powerful it was. My body crumpled against the wall again before dropping to the ground, and while I struggled to get back onto my feet, the Iron Knuckle continued walking towards me, its axe primed and ready to strike again. As I expected, things weren't going well in my favour against the Iron Knuckle, and things were only going to get worse. If only I could pony up, this would have been easy, but I couldn't and that meant I had to rely on my own skills. Things weren't looking good by that logic.

Chapter 53: The Other Sparkle

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
April 24, 2017
Chapter 53: The Other Sparkle.

Why did it have to be an Iron Knuckle of all things? I would have taken on just about any other powerful monster in Termina yet I had to fight this one. Was fate being mercilessly cruel to me or was this destiny? Either way, this was going to be a battle for survival since its axe could effectively cut me down in several hits while I had to first remove the armour plating on its chest before I could attack the body--something I could never forget. Unlike in the past where I had plenty of room to maneuver as well as having those pillars to hide behind, I had no such luck this time around.

The room was small in size no thanks to the strange curtain hanging behind the Iron Knuckle, covering something in its morbid coloured drapery, and the lack of pillars meant I had to face it head on and not rely on a more tactical strategy so as to avoid being sliced apart. I hadn't noticed the curtain until now mainly because of the nasty axe wielding monster in front of me, but it was definitely suspicious considering this was below the graveyard. No doubt the curtain would open upon defeating the Iron Knuckle--much to my dismay--yet what could be so important down here that it was needed to guard it?

Looking down at my sword, I gulped because I remembered something else about my previous experiences with this monster. A weak sword like mine meant its armour would take a pounding before finally coming off, and a more powerful sword would have made the process go by a lot quicker. I cursed myself in my mind over not getting that sword upgrade in the mountains but that involved defeating Goht a second time, winning the Goron Races again to acquire some gold dust, and spending an entire three day cycle just to get it all because of how long it took to re-forge a simple blade.

A stronger sword also had a longer range and that would have allowed me to keep my distance, but since all I had was the basic Kokiri Sword, I had to get up close and personal in order to strike the armour. Knowing I couldn't continue complaining about it, I walked forward with my shield raised--I had no idea if the Iron Knuckle's axe could smash my shield to pieces leaving me even more vulnerable--and sword at the ready towards what could be best described as walking death, and waited for what was to come. Each step it took felt like my heart was pounding in comparison, the thunder of each impact from those steps struck fear into my very being.

Trembling, I moved a little closer only to back away quickly as the Iron Knuckle slammed its axe into the ground, the blade missing my head by a couple of inches, yet it did trim off a few hairs in the process. Fortunately, it was stuck for about a second or two, and that allowed me to strike its armour a few times before it lifted up its axe and continued to walk towards me with that expressionless face I had come to fear. While the blows with my sword might have looked like they caused damage, all I had done really was make tiny dents in its armour it probably didn't even notice. Until that armour came off, it wasn't going to pay attention to my efforts.

Princess Twilight noticed that I was trembling and insisted that I didn't allow this monster to scare me, but if only she knew what it had been like to go up against five of these things in the span of a short period of time. Each one of them was as strong as a temple guardian--more so than the early ones--and put just about every regular monster to shame due to having so much power. If Her Highness had experienced what I felt on my previous journey, she would be trembling as well out of fear, yet I would be giving her the same pep talk she was unto me out of a sense of not truly understanding rather than sheer ignorance.

Moving towards the Iron Knuckle again in hopes that it would slam its axe into the ground, the corner of my eye noticed some pots scattered around the edges of the room, and I thought there could be some recovery hearts or even a fairy hidden in them that would allow me to survive. I quickly looked back at the Iron Knuckle who swung its axe back and forth by dropping to my knees before attacking its armour several times but then it responded by slamming its axe into the ground. I couldn't avoid getting hit this time but fortunately I was merely grazed instead of getting a full blow to my body.

Still, the force of the blow was enough to push me into the wall--not slammed into it this time--so I quickly rebounded and waited for the Iron Knuckle to approach me again via its incredibly slow walking speed. " That's the third time I've been thrown against a wall." I said, breathing heavily, my shield raised. " Then again, this was what I was expecting given the kind of monster Iron Knuckles are, so I shouldn't really be complaining."

" What are you doing?" Twilight asked.

" What do you mean 'what am I doing'!? I'm trying not to get killed!"

" Your strategy of moving towards it does work in theory but only if you don't get hit."

" It's not like I have a choice here, Twilight."

Princess Twilight was miffed. " What I find strange is that it continues to keep on going despite you having hit it several times already. I must admit that this Iron Knuckle has quite the resolve to want to keep on fighting despite the wounds you've inflicted."

" I haven't been hurting it directly."

" What?"

I nodded. " Like I said, Iron Knuckles feel nothing so long as that chest plate remains intact. My attacks have been damaging that instead of the monster and until it comes off, it will continue to feel nothing, but then that's when things become much worse." I shuddered at the prospect of knowing what happened next. " When it begins to run, that's when you have to be extra careful as it becomes more aggressive since its torso gets exposed, but then it doesn't take many hits for it to be defeated."

" That means it views its weak point as a true detriment."

I walked closely before jumping back as the Iron Knuckle's axe slammed into the ground. " This is the only time it's vulnerable while that armour plate is intact but even then you can't get carried away otherwise it will attack whilst you're distracted." I struck its armour a few more times before backing away and allowing the Iron Knuckle to pick up its axe where it resumed walking towards me. " As you can see, it's pretty persistent about wanting to stick its axe into me."

" Well, you did wake it up from its sleep."

" What else would you have had me do?"

Princess Twilight thought about it for a couple of seconds before shrugging. " Okay, you have me there, Sunset." Her Highness then noticed how fatigued I looked and I could tell what she was about to say next. " Judging from your condition along with how many times the Iron Knuckle has hit you, I'd say you can afford to get hit at least three more times before you get killed so I suggest finding some means of recovery. Or, you could use the alternative and get out of here."

I knew what she was hinting at and while nothing would have pleased me more than to flee from this battle, I couldn't run away knowing that the Iron Knuckle was protecting something important down here. That was the one trend about them that made their presence suspicious. They were always guarding an important item or location otherwise they would be all over the place destroying everything with those axes and nothing could stop them. My only hope was that this was the only one that I had to deal with. Even if I were to prevail without ponying-up--that would have made this easy--I didn't want to fight another one.

I shook my head. " I have to defeat it."

Princess Twilight rolled her eyes. " I knew you were going to say that."

" And what's that supposed to mean?"

" Princess Celestia always knew how to choose students who were stubborn." Twilight answered. " She just seemed to have this knack for ponies who would always stick to what they intended on doing no matter what anyone else said. You and I are definitely dead-set on doing what we want and being stubborn in the process. Since you intend on seeing this battle through to the end, I do have one additional bit of information regarding this Iron Knuckle. Don't try and attack it from behind as it can and will turn around and respond accordingly catching you by surprise."

While it sounded like Her Highness was trying to make me feel bad for not wanting to flee, it felt reassuring knowing that she was just as stubborn as I was. She also knew that my mind was set on defeating the Iron Knuckle so any attempts at trying to make me consider running away were a moot point. I just hoped that I was doing the right thing given I had no potions or fairies to use in case it brought me to within an inch of my life--and I had taken such initiatives to remind myself to always bring such items along. I steeled myself before walking forward where the Iron Knuckle swung its axe about.

It was a relatively easy pattern to avoid though it all depended on when it would use it. First, it swung its axe to the right in a wicked curve with the blade sticking out so as to maximize potential damage against whatever it was fighting. At the end of this swing, the Iron Knuckle would quickly turn its axe over and swing the other way using the same curve before grabbing the handle with its other hand and continue walking forward. It was actually an incredible feat that a monster could swing about such a heavy weapon like it was nothing. If I wasn't fighting for my life, I would want it to show off some more.

When it slammed its axe into the ground--I jumped back slightly to avoid it--I moved in and attacked the chest plate a few more times--I had no idea how many hits it would take given my sword was pretty weak--but it suddenly slammed its axe down again, catching me off guard, slicing my side, and using the inertia of the blow to through me against the wall. I was lucky that I didn't suffer a severe wound--the axe barely cut into my flesh despite how it attacked--but I knew that blow had weakened me tremendously. I needed recovery hearts now more than ever and my only chance was to use those pots.

Scrambling onto my feet, I ran over to the nearest pot, stumbling along the way out of not concentrating, and tripped before sliding over to the pot. The Iron Knuckle was on the other side of the room though it was slowly making its way over with those heavy steps echoing all around. Picking up the pot and smashing it, a single recovery heart fell out, and I quickly picked it up before scrambling to the next pot that was just a few steps away. The Iron Knuckle continued making its way over to me, those heavy footsteps reminding me that it was walking death, so I had to act quickly.

Picking up the next pot and smashing it, a bundle of arrows fell to the ground much to my shock. I mean, come on! What in the world was I going to do with a bunch of arrows against a monster that wore thick armour that could protect it from just about anything? I knew I had both Fire Arrows and Ice Arrows but I doubted those would be effective either again because of its armour. A shame I didn't have any arrows that were capable of exploding upon impact. That would have made things easier for me since I had no Bombchu on hand but sadly that arrow didn't exist in this world.

Collecting the arrows--there was no sense in letting them go to waste--I stumbled over to the last pot in the room and smashed it revealing a fairy. Now that was more like it. I could use it to fully restore my health so I reached out with my head so that it could touch it and use its healing powers, but I suddenly pulled back at the last minute before taking out one of my empty bottles and uncorking it. The fairy was oblivious to my actions as I used my bottle to scoop it up before corking the cap and placing it behind my back. At that precise moment, the heavy steps of the Iron Knuckle suddenly stopped and I immediately dove to the left as its axe came crashing down.

Princess Twilight was shocked. " Sunset! Why didn't you use the fairy to heal your wounds?"

I picked myself up from the ground and turned to face the Iron Knuckle again. " I thought it would be better to keep it in a bottle and let it heal me when my health runs out. I know that sounds rather morbid but I know it will happen."

" Since you did do that, your health is already running low."

" Nothing new for me."

" Yes." Twilight said. " That's what I meant when I said you act reckless back when I first witnessed you taking unnecessary risks."

" Sometimes you have to do that in order to succeed."

Princess Twilight looked at me with disappointment in her eyes. " Do you really enjoy acting like that?"

I shook my head before jumping back when the Iron Knuckle's axe slammed down where I had standing and I proceeded to attack its armour plating again. " No... I really don't. If I could, I'd gladly leave this world behind and go home where I can live a somewhat decent life instead of dealing with stuff like this every five minutes! But, that wouldn't make me feel right abandoning this place just because I'm losing my composure over it little by little." I jumped back as the Iron Knuckle swung its axe around in both directions. " I know complaining doesn't do anything but something it feels like that's all I can do."

" Maybe I should have been the heroine instead."

" Somehow, I don't think that would have happened."

" I know that I'm not exactly heroine material since I do use magic more often than rely on brute force."

I shook my head. " No, that's not what I mean." Before I could say anything else, the Iron Knuckle swung its axe back and forth, catching me on the second swing, and knocking me into the wall once again where I slumped down the ground clutching my chest. Princess Twilight called out to me but I waved my hand indicating that I was alright. " I'm alright! I just got distracted by talking about my complaining about having to endure all of this all because of one man."

" Maybe you should focus on this instead?"

I nodded. " I've got plenty of time to complain about him later."

Princess Twilight nodded. " According to some quick calculations I've done in my head since this battle started, you have struck the armour plating on the Iron Knuckle's chest at least fifteen times and yet it still hasn't fallen off. I'm going to guess that it will take only a few more hits before it finally comes off and you can attack its body properly." A grim expression then appeared on her face. " Are you sure that it only moves faster when the armour falls off?"

" That's what they did on my previous journey."

" Termina is much different from Hyrule from your perspective." Twilight said. " What happened in the latter might not be the same in the former in terms of locations, items, monsters, peoples, and anything else that's appropriate. I've never seen Hyrule myself so my words don't hold much value but you've seen those differences yourself and can easily determine what those differences are."

She had a valid point other than the locations since that one was pretty obvious. The behaviour of some monsters who existed in both worlds were different here compared to how they behaved back in Hyrule. Granted, I had only seen this on a few occasions but they were there such as the Skulltulas possessing a shield-like ability whenever they spun around to attack compared to not having it previously. Did the Iron Knuckle perform differently here compared to what they were like in Hyrule? The thought began to race through my mind and I feared what could happen when the armour plating fell off.

The battle in general was going surprisingly well considering what I was up against. In the past, I struggled to overcome an Iron Knuckle--I prevailed but it took a mental toll on me because of how powerful they were--but here I hadn't taken that much damage as though I had gotten much better since then. I wasn't about to brag or anything since I still made some obvious blunders on occasion such as accidentally throwing my sword when I was merely trying to swing it at something for example, but then I could give myself credit for having gotten used to this kind of experience while most could only dream of doing something like this.

When the Iron Knuckle slammed its axe down into the ground, I stepped around it and slashed its armour plate, but when I stepped back to keep away from any kind of retaliation, my eyes noticed that the plating started to rattle, indicating that it had gotten loose. That meant one more attack would remove the plate and expose its torso but again, the thought of how it would behave once its weak point was exposed continued to plague my mind, but I couldn't let that serve as a distraction since I had to keep going until it was finally defeated and whatever lurked behind the curtain became known to me.

It swung its axe around in both directions and I kept my distance, and when it slammed it down again, I rushed forward and struck the armour plate, causing it to fall off though I was surprised when the shoulder plate and upper chest plate also fell off. This exposed the Iron Knuckle's true form, a very skinny warrior whose weak point consisted of a glowing spot on its stomach that was near enough impossible not to see. It lurched back a bit upon losing its armour and at first it looked like it would attack as it had normally done, but I wasn't prepared for what was to happen.

All of a sudden, the Iron Knuckle slammed its axe down, but this time it moved forward when doing so, giving it more reach and overall impact. The pain I felt across my body was immediate and I went flying, crashing into the wall, and leaving an indentation behind as I slumped to the ground. It then began running towards me and as I struggled to get back up, it slammed down its axe again, pinning me down against the wall, and then lifting me up and over it body upon raising the axe. I landed a short distance away and it ran after me again though I got up this time and managed to hit it in the stomach causing it to reel.

" I wasn't expecting that." I said as I began walking backwards with my shield raised.

" You just had your clock cleaned out."

" No need for a snappy quip, Twilight."

" It looks like the Iron Knuckles of Termina become more aggressive when they lose their armour." Twilight said. " That makes it even more dangerous now though at the same time you have an advantage. Whenever you hit its weak point, it will come to a halt because of being wounded properly so you can use the brief moment that ensues to come up with a plan or continue the attack provided nothing goes wrong."

I suddenly buckled as a result of feeling weak. " Guess I took more damage than I thought."

" Those two sudden attacks have drained you of your strength."

" Before, this is where I would pony up and attack with a new sense of purpose."

" Like you said, Sunset, that isn't going to happen."

I raised my shield just as the Iron Knuckle ran over but it couldn't prevent me from being knocked aside and into the wall. " Oooof!" As I dropped to the ground, I looked at my shield and saw that it had received a huge dent courtesy of the Iron Knuckle. " My shield can't take another blow like that otherwise it will shatter to pieces and I'll have to get a new one from the shop back in town."

Princess Twilight nodded. " You'll have to just avoid its attacks from now one."

I rolled my eyes. " Easier said than done when you consider how banged up I am."

" Maybe you should use that fairy you collected earlier?"

I had hoped to use it a while later but at this point I didn't have much of a choice. I ran in the opposite direction prompting the Iron Knuckle to give chase by running after me, but again my legs buckled allowing the monster to catch up. Swinging my sword and hitting its chest causing it to reel back again, I started fumbling behind my back for the bottle that contained the fairy, but when I took it out and was prepared to open it up, the Iron Knuckle lurched forward whilst slamming its axe down into the ground, and I had no chance of avoiding the blow, causing me to slump to the ground.

Princess Twilight began screaming knowing that I had just been killed but stopped when she realized what would happen next. Now she understood why I chose not to use the fairy straight away because I knew it would restore me back to life and with full health. The fairy came out of my bottle, flew around me several times, and disappeared into the ether as my body got back onto its feet. The Iron Knuckle swung its axe around prompting me to jump back to avoid getting hit again and when I swung my sword in response, it used its axe to shield itself from my attack by parrying it.

No doubt it didn't want me to attack its weak point again but it wouldn't be able to keep it up forever. It then slammed its axe into the ground and I decided to perform a jump attack--a maneuver I hadn't used all that often--striking the Iron Knuckle's weak point. It reeled back again though I could tell that I had angered it immensely by doing that, but I was more than ready to deal with it now. Being restored had made me feel even more perky than usual though it didn't give me a boost in power--again I needed to upgrade my sword to its strongest form without resetting time--yet it meant I was on an even playing field.

The Iron Knuckle began running towards me, swinging its axe about in its bid to attack me, and managed to hit me though it was another graze. While I didn't get sent flying, the damage was still pretty painful, but I knew that I needed to utilize what the fairy had provided by winning this fight. Princess Twilight had been silent for some time since I was revived moments ago and I feared she had been mentally scarred, but she reassured me that she wanted me to prevail and suggested I keep my distance from now on and use jump attacks since using them inflicted more damage, a fact I had forgotten about.

I wanted to use my shield but couldn't out of fear that it would break--I could let it be destroyed and purchase another one since I did see it on display back in Clock Town at the shop but it was the principle of the thing--against that axe so I opted to keep it on my back and hoped I hadn't made the wrong choice. The Iron Knuckle slammed its axe down after lurching forward yet it seemed like it was moving a lot slower now than before. Had the wounds it sustained been enough to effectively weaken it? If so then I needed to take advantage quickly before anything else could go wrong.

Out of a desire to end this quickly, I attacked the Iron Knuckle head on, it using its axe to deflect my blows, but I swung downward--I was much faster after all--hitting its weak point, and moving backwards while it came running after me. Unfortunately, I forgot that the room was small so I ended up walking backwards into the wall, and getting hit by the axe, resulting in my tunic ripping on the side and a small gush of blood trickling out from it though it quickly subsided--the wound would take some time to heal. When I got back onto my feet and ran behind the Iron Knuckle, it turned around, swinging its axe but didn't connect.

It slammed its axe down and I performed yet another jump attack, though instead of reeling from it and wanting to pursue me, the Iron Knuckle let out a weird cry before dropping down on both knees and clutching what constituted as its throat. It remained in that pose for a few seconds until it dropped its axe leaving me to wonder what else would happen. It had been defeated without a doubt but its behaviour had me worried to no end. Putting my sword away, I walked away from the Iron Knuckle, sitting down once I felt I was a safe distance and looked upon it closely.

Princess Twilight then bopped me on the head. " So that's why you didn't use the fairy."

" I didn't think I would need to use it so soon."

" Sometimes, you can't plan ahead for such things, Sunset."

" Sorry if you were freaked out when I suddenly dropped dead."

Princess Twilight blushed. " I should have realized that would happen since I have seen it happen to you before. In any case, you defeated the Iron Knuckle though you did take a beating in the process. I'm upset that you acted recklessly again but I'd have done the exact same thing had I been the heroine instead." Her Highness looked in the direction of the fallen monster before looking back at me again. " So what do we do about that thing now? It doesn't appear it will be doing anything any time soon but perhaps we could take a closer look? I'm curious as to what makes it operate as a mechanized being."

I rolled my eyes. Even after all I had just been through, she wanted to study the thing for research purposes. " Sure, we can take a closer look at it." Now that I thought about it, we had an opportunity to look at an Iron Knuckle as Iron Will had its armour stashed away behind some other items in the Curiosity Shop, yet there was no way of knowing it was complete or was missing a few pieces. I walked over to where it had fallen and Her Highness began to comb over it. " It's weird that it didn't burn away to nothing like other monsters do. It should have done so by now so maybe this was a flawed monster?"

The moment I said that, the Iron Knuckle burned away to nothing, leaving Princess Twilight feeling slightly vexed. " I wish you hadn't gone and said that, Sunset, but I did manage to get a closer look at it. I'm not sure such a small body could have moved around in all that armour but there was one thing that stood out. The Iron Knuckle seemed to have a feminine body given the curvature of the shoulders. Was it once a female all those centuries ago?"

I shrugged. " You're asking the wrong person."

" Perhaps I'll know more if we run into another one."

" Not in this life-time."

" I kid, Sunset, I kid, but still, it would be nice to know more for research purposes."

My focus then turned towards the curtain. " Since the Iron Knuckle is no longer around, I wonder if this curtain is going to move." As though it heard me somehow, the curtain opened from the center revealing a large stone that appeared to have writing on it. " That was certainly surprising."

Princess Twilight flew over to the stone and began combing it over. " The words on this stone are difficult for me to understand but I suppose I could figure out what they mean so give me a few minutes." A strange force then pushed her away and she attempted to fly back over to it only to get pushed back again. " Something doesn't want me to read the message on this stone. Maybe you should try and read it instead, Sunset. You are the heroine after all."

I didn't like her analogy though she had a good point overall. Sighing, I took a step forward only for the strange force that pushed her to push me away as well. Whatever was pushing us away either thought we weren't worthy of getting close or was trying to impede our progress. Suddenly, a laughter echoed throughout the room followed by the sounds of crying before going back to laughter again and then back to crying. I should have suspected immediately that a ghost was preventing us from getting close to that stone, yet why was it switching between laughing and crying? Something was definitely wrong and I was about to get my answer.

" Free... At long last I am free!"

The voice echoed around the room so I decided to call out to this mysterious ghost. " What do you mean you're free?"

" Oh? Is someone there?" The ghost asked. I frowned over such a stupid statement. I mean, why would a ghost ask something like that when the obvious was exactly that? The Iron Knuckle didn't just go and destroy itself because it was bored or anything. I explained to the ghost that I had defeated the Iron Knuckle and they sounded joyful upon hearing my words. " You defeated the one that had been placed me to prevent my spirit from experiencing freedom? You have done me a great service this day! Oh, but where are my manners? Here you are having presented yourself before me while I hide away in the shadows. That will simply not do at all."

Princess Twilight whispered into my ear. " That voice sounds familiar."

I nodded. " I've heard it before though the echoing makes it difficult to recognize."

The ghost spoke again. " I have been trapped down here in this accursed place for over a thousand years, and now I can finally move on to the next life, but first I must take care of one small detail. I know that this is rather sudden of me and completely improper, but I would like for you to listen to my words." The ghost then appeared in front of us and despite the ridiculous getup, the giant violin being held in their hands was an obvious giveaway as to who this was.

" Is that... Octavia Melody?" Twilight asked.

I nodded. " I should have known that she would be portraying a ghostly spirit again." The last time I encountered Octavia in this fantasy realm, she alongside DJ Pon-3--an unusual name for someone who wasn't even a pony--were two sisters who had been killed by Ganondorf though why he did that was something I had sadly forgotten. I knew that he hadn't killed them in this world so what could have caused their deaths this time? Given that Octavia was down here, it was safe to assume DJ Pon-3 was close by though probably not in the graveyard.

" I know of her pony persona but next to nothing about her human self."

" I'd say they're probably both the same."

" You have no idea do you?"

I shook my head. " Not at all."

Princess Twilight sighed. " Well, we'll just have to go with what we have then."

" Allow me to introduce myself." Octavia said. " I served the Ikana Royal family as one of the two royal composers tasked by our king to create a series of songs that would serve the family in times of need. I am the composer called Flat, known to all as the younger."

" And the other composer?" I asked.

Octavia went silent for a few moments before answering. " My older sister... Sharp, known to all as the elder." She then began to play her violin and a miserable sounding melody echoed around the room. I could tell that it caused her personal pain--being a guitarist meant I could understand how certain musical pitches sounded--leading me to suspect that her sister had been lost to her or she did something horrible. Octavia eventually stopped playing and addressed me again. " Of all the songs we composed for the Royal Family, two proved to possess more power than all the others."

" You composed songs?"

Octavia nodded. " The songs connected to the Royal Family that remain here were all composed by my sister and I. When we were alive, we poured our hearts and souls into each one as our king had commanded of us. No matter how difficult the songs were, we dedicated our lives to ensuring that our legacy would be one that would forever be remembered by future generations."

" Where is your sister now?"

" She lurks in Ikana."

" That doesn't give me much of a clue."

Octavia went silent again before she spoke. " Oh... Sharp, my dear sister. Everything was going fine between us as we continued composing songs, yet her heart slowly began getting consumed by darkness when we learned that the two songs I spoke of contained great power. I tried to convince her that she should not go down such a horrible path yet she ignored my warning and continued pursuing power."

Hearing how she described what happened to her sister reminded me of what happened to me when I was Princess Celestia's protégé. In fact, it was almost an exact mirror image of what happened minus the fact that both Octavia and DJ Pon-3 in this world were dead. When I saw my image in the mirror I used to flee Equestria to pursue my twisted desires, I refused to listen to Princess Celestia, who tried in vain to get me to stick to the path she felt was best. She wanted to talk about other things while I wanted the subject to go back to the mirror and my attempts at convincing her proved to be my eventual undoing.

I wasn't ready to learn the secrets of the mirror yet I believed that I was, resulting in the fall-out that even now continues to haunt me--it no doubt haunted Princess Celestia as well since she most likely felt that she had failed me but in truth my own actions condemned me. By choosing to go out on my own and learn them by reading the forbidden tomes, I had been exposed as wanting power above all else and betraying Princess Celestia all because I believed she was denying me. DJ Pon-3, from what I could gather from Octavia's words, chose to go down a similar path though she wasn't under anyone's guidance.

" What happened to her?" I asked. " What did she do?"

" My sister... She sold her soul to the devil."

I was shocked. " What!?"

Octavia sighed. " Sharp desired power more than anything else and would do anything to get it. She also believed that I would end up getting in her way or warn the king of what she had done, and so she locked me in here where I would eventually pass away with both sadness and anger in my heart. If only Sharp had listened to me. Had she done so, we could have continued creating new songs and please our king while also create our own legacy. Alas, it was not meant to be for I would remain down here for many centuries while my sister would gain the power she sought."

I held back my own tears. " What will you do now?"

" As a spirit who has passed on from this world, there is nothing I can do now."

" I'm sorry to hear that."

" But you... you can fulfill my own desire that has lingered for so long."

While I had some doubts over what she wanted me to do, I nodded my head knowing that I couldn't allow anyone else to go through what I experienced. " Alright... I'll carry out your request for you."

" Really? You shall fulfill my desire?" Octavia asked. I nodded again and she played her violin again, this time with a more joyous tune before suddenly changing it into another miserable sounding song. " So be it! You who do not fear the dead, learn well the song that is inscribed in the stone behind me. The song is one of the two that my sister and I created that contained special powers that went far beyond what even we assumed was possible. The other was a present to our king but I have been trapped down here for so long that its melody became lost to me."

I looked at the stone and noticed a melody had been etched onto the bottom of the slab. I couldn't see what the notes were but I sensed a great power emanating from it so I nodded once again. " I've got an ocarina so I should be able to play those notes."

" Then I shall finally move on from this world." Octavia said. She started to fade away but suddenly brought herself back. " I have one last thing I must tell you. If you ever meet my sister, I'd like you to inform her... The thousand years of raindrops summoned by my song are my tears. The thunder that strikes the earth is my anger! Be sure to let her know the pain I have felt for so long." Octavia began fading away again and disappeared this time, her voice echoing all around before it began growing weaker. " I have made my request." Soon, everything went quiet again though I could hear Princess Twilight crying, breaking the silence.

I comforted her. " She has moved on to a better place now."

Princess Twilight sniffed. " How could DJ Pon-3 have done all of this to her own sister?"

" Remember that they are portraying characters, Twilight."

" I know, Sunset..."

" Still, I can understand what Octavia had gone through since I experienced something similar when Twilight Sparkle changed into Midnight Sparkle." I said. " DJ Pon-3 acted a lot like she did though the more correct comparison would be with me. Twilight Sparkle didn't intend on gaining tremendous power while DJ Pon-3 sold her very soul to get it, something not even I would have done."

" What can we do?"

" We know where DJ Pon-3 is thanks to Pinkie Pie telling us."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. She is housed inside of the cave where the water used to flow from and enabled the Music Box House to drive away the monsters that surround it even now with its music. If Octavia's song does indeed affect her sister as she assumes, what do you suppose will happen to her? Will she be as free as Octavia or will DJ Pon-3 suffer eternal torment?"

I shook my head. " I don't know." Looking at the song etched on the stone again, an idea soon formed in my mind. " I'm going to see if I can use the Song of Healing to perhaps soothe the soul of DJ Pon-3 before using what Octavia had left behind for us. That should allow the former to perhaps be able to rest in peace without having her ghostly form be torn asunder by whatever force can destroy spirits."

" Then let's see what song is written on the stone."

I walked forward towards the stone and this time there was no force preventing me from reaching it. Since Octavia had now moved onto the next life after I had agreed to fulfill her request, the spiritual energy that had engulfed the room had also disappeared. The stone itself had several cracks all over it, a sign that it had been down here for many centuries, yet while I wanted to focus on the melody, my eyes were fixated on the words above. Princess Twilight began geeking out as usual as she gazed upon the stone's splendour--it was just an ordinary slab of stone yet she saw it as much more--while I looked closely at what had been written.

Surprisingly, what Octavia said to me before she disappeared for good was also written on the stone. "If you are reading this, then please fulfill my final request. My sister's soul may yet still be saved but I fear she is now lost. The thousand years of raindrops summoned by my song are my tears. The thunder that strikes the earth is my anger! I shall never rest in the eternal beyond until my sister knows what pain she has inflicted upon me. Only when she knows can I finally leave behind such lingering regret. Here is written the song that shall cleanse her cursed, black soul." A part of me felt saddened by what Octavia had endured all because of her sister's actions.

Looking down at the melody, I was surprised to learn that I recognized it from my previous journey. I mean, I couldn't recall the name of the song, but the notes were ones that I recalled given how simple they were in execution. Knowing what needed to be done next, I took the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, raised it to my lips, and began playing the six notes that comprised the song. I didn't even need to be told how it went as my memories from before were enough to guide me. Upon performing the song, it suddenly started raining and a mighty downpour followed before stopping several minutes later.

A voice inside my head told me that this was the Song of Storms, a song that could bring forth a storm that could wash away curses from those afflicted by them. Curses? I didn't know that the song had the power to do that, but perhaps, the Termina version could whereas what I learned in Hyrule was merely used to drain a windmill. Even though I was thrilled at having learned a new yet familiar song, my heart still wept for Octavia who endured all because of the darkness that corrupted DJ Pon-3. I then heard the voice tell me to find the one who was holding back the flow of water and restore live back to the land of the dead.

Before I could do any of that, I first needed to pay a visit to Clock Town in order to finally get started on getting my hands on that expensive mask. Sure, it would be a while until I could actually get it since it involved waiting until the final day, but I was certain time would practically fly by since I had all of Ikana to explore. Princess Twilight nodded to inform me that she knew what was about to happen next, and I followed up her nod by playing the Song of Soaring and wanting to leave this underground chamber behind. Unfortunately, the song didn't work which left me wondering what I was supposed to do next.

Sometime in the past.

" We finally managed to make it all the way up here." Starlight said as she collapsed to her knees. " This place is a lot bigger than I gave it credit for not to mention those weird eyeball things firing lasers everywhere just because we got within their range."

" Um... Why are you complaining, Skull Kid?" Spike asked.

" I have every right to complain!"

" You didn't exactly walk up here since you can fly and all."

Starlight raised her finger in order to make a counter-argument but quickly realized that what Spike said was accurate. With her vast magical powers, she could have easily reached her intended destination without any trouble, and yet she chose to go the long way and almost got both of them blasted by lasers and flattened by boulders that rained down from the upper levels of the Stone Tower. She floated over to a small statue that had been buried slightly in the dirt, used her power to lift it out, mulled over it for a few moments, and finally tossed it over the side where it disappeared into the abyss below.

When it was obvious that it wasn't going to make any sound, Starlight started laughing, forgetting about her ordeal. " This would be a great place to push someone off the edge and see if they manage to land somewhere down there, hee hee!" She was expecting Spike to respond to her but he was focused instead on the giant door that stood before them. This annoyed her and she smacked him aside. " Don't you ignore me when I'm making a joke!"

" I wasn't ignoring you, Skull Kid."

" Yes you were!" Starlight shouted. " I just made an excellent joke and you completely ignored me!"

" I was focusing on this door."

Turning her attention to what Spike was looking at, Starlight calmed down and immediately looked up. " Wow... Talk about one huge door. I wonder who had to go and build this in the first place? Oh well! Not like I care about something like that." She clenched her hand into a fist and smashed it against the door causing no damage but leaving her fist with a tingling sensation resulting from the impact. " Yeow!"

Spike floated there in complete and utter shock. " Why did you do that?"

" Because I felt like it, that's why!"

Spike cowered back in fear. " Don't lose your cool now, Skull Kid, given how far we've come."

Starlight calmed down again and focused on the door. " You're right, Tael. I need to focus on the prize and that is pulling off my latest prank." She reached out and grabbed the giant ring that served as a door handle. " When I open this up, all those spirits who passed away long ago will be forced to come back to life and continue on from where they left off. They will have no choice but to accept their fate until someone decides to close it up again. Any living person who comes here will be scared out of their wits when they see the living dead running around."

" A shame our guide ran away, huh, Skull Kid?"

" I would go back and make an example of her but I have better things to do."

" Do you want me to help you?"

Starlight shook her head. " If I can't pull open a massive stone door even with my power, I don't deserve to wear this mask." She grabbed the edge of her masked face and held it firmly in her hand. " I will throw this mask away if I fail at this simple task. Yes! I said it!" She pulled on the ring with all of her strength and the door slowly swung open. When it was completely open, darkness began seeping forth from the depths behind the door and Starlight began laughing once again. " Hee hee! This is absolutely perfect! Those spirits are going to wake up disoriented and are likely to attack each other out of confusion."

" That's your prank?"

" Only a true prankster can prank those who no longer are among the living."

" Guess that means we're done here now, right?"

Starlight turned towards Spike, lurched her head forward, and tilted it to the side. " What do you mean by "done", Tael? Did I say we were finished? Did I? I never said anything like that so obviously you just lied about what I intend on doing." She raised her hand and was about to hit him but stopped at the last moment. " No... I'm not going to punish you for that as you're just a fairy who is ignorant. I still have my one remaining prank left. Yes... It will be the best one I've pulled in my entire life and I shall forever be remembered by those who hurt me long ago, hee hee."

" You mentioned that earlier but I thought you were joking."

Starlight shook her head. " I'm being very serious, Tael, more than I've ever been before, hee hee!"

" What do you have in mind?"

" We're going back to Clock Town and to the top of the Clock Tower." Starlight answered. " From there, I will use my power to pull down the moon until the people can see it with their own eyes, and from there, I will continue pulling it down until it crashes into the town. They will come to know what fear means when they see death coming down from on high, and no matter where they run, it won't matter because there is no escape! Hee hee! I'm going to enjoy pulling off this prank."

Spike immediately protested. " Are you sure you want to do that?"

" I'm going to, Tael, and no one will stop me."

" Your pranks have been fun so far, Skull Kid, but you've been getting more and more psychotic with them as of late."

Starlight then slapped Spike away. " Don't speak out of line! I know what I'm doing, Tael, and I'm not about to stop now! I'm going to bring down the moon and destroy this entire world so that they know what happens when you pick on someone who didn't deserve it in the first place. Their deaths will be absolutely glorious and I will forever be remembered as the greatest prankster who had ever lived. Now, come! We depart for Clock Town at once!"

Floating into the air whilst laughing and kicking her legs, Starlight began floating down towards the bottom of the Stone Tower. Spike in the meantime merely floated there on the spot struggling to grasp what he had just heard his friend wanted to do in terms of her "ultimate prank". He began to believe that Starlight was beginning to get consumed by the mask she wore on her face as she never once thought of the desire to destroy the entire world all because of how she was mistreated by others. In her mind, pulling pranks was what she wanted, not complete and utter destruction. He had to do something before it was too late.

He thought about asking Starlight to reconsider her prank and perhaps remove the mask but deep down he knew that she wouldn't do anything of the sort. In fact, he was convinced she would smack him for speaking out of line once again. Before he could prove either theory, Starlight floated back up upon realizing he wasn't following her and threatened to punish him again if he didn't follow her back to Clock Town. Sighing, Spike resigned himself to keeping quiet and followed Starlight despite knowing that she was going too far with her desire to ensure everyone would remember the ultimate prank.

As the two figures disappeared down into the abyss and back towards the main part of the canyon, something was taking place right in front of the stone door that Starlight had opened mere moments ago. The dark aura that seeped forth from the door began causing those who had passed on long ago to rise up from the ground and immediately question how they had suddenly been brought back to life as the living undead. Spirits of all kinds were popping up all across the canyon yet at the very door itself, a purple hand burst forth from the ground, moved about and clenched its fist, and was followed by arm that was connected to the hand.

The arm uncurled itself and appeared to embrace the darkness before a second arm burst out of the ground followed by a head along with a body. Someone or something was coming out of the ground yet unlike the undead, this figure was anything but that. In fact, they were very much alive although confused by how they suddenly existed. The figure took a few steps forward before stretching to ensure nothing felt out of place and then turned around to see the large door standing before them. The figure looked up to see how majestic looking it was and whistled in response.

" What a fascinating sight! I have never seen anything like it before!" The figure turned to face the hole they dug themselves out of and noticed someone else was inside though they appeared unwilling to want to come out. " You... I don't know why but you remind me of someone I've seen before." It took the figure a few moments to figure it out and they were shocked upon realizing it. " You look like an evil demonic version of Sunset Shimmer, the one who defeated me. Talk about complete and utter convenience on my part! Strange that you don't seem to want to come out of there and experience what I'm seeing.

The figure dropped to her knees and peered into the hole. " Hello? Are you alright? Are you even breathing?"

The other figured opened their eyes and murmured a few words. " Leave me alone."

" What? And miss out on all this?"

" I said leave me alone. I'm dead now and shall remain here because I no longer have a reason to exist."

The first figure then laughed. " Really? Is that what you think? Let me tell you something then! I'm standing outside in this fascinating place and I feel very much alive. It's like someone has unleashed a powerful dark aura and it resulted in me being able to climb out of that accursed place. I, Midnight Sparkle, feel like a new person though things have definitely changed since I last witnessed Canterlot High."

" Midnight Sparkle... What a stupid name. In any case, just leave me alone."

" If you can find it in yourself to get out of that hole and out here, you'll be alive again and free to do whatever you want to do." Midnight Sparkle said. " Judging from your composure along with that ridiculous looking hair, you remind me of that Sunset Shimmer girl who defeated me at the Friendship Games a short time ago. That does explain why she said she was once a monster. It was you she was referring to wasn't she?"

" Did you just say... Sunset Shimmer?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " She was the one who prevented me from acquiring all of the Equestrian magic I craved. Luckily, I already have a plan in motion that will rectify that issue but it will take some time since everything has changed." Before she could say anything else, a hand lunged out from the hole, grabbed her arm, refused to let go, and grumbling could be heard coming from below yet Midnight Sparkle was completely unfazed. " Wow... I didn't think you were such a serious person but I suppose its to be expected given your previous record."

The other figure pulled herself out, a serious look on her face. " Take me to Sunset Shimmer."

" Sorry but I have my own plans and they don't involve you."

" Perhaps you and I can come to some kind of arrangement."

" Oh? What did you have in mind?"

" I am Sunset Demon, the opposite of Sunset Shimmer in many ways. I too was defeated by my other self though what you experienced was nothing compared to me. I can help you with whatever it is you desire but you must give me the chance to get my vengeance and ultimately become the true Sunset Shimmer. Other than that, you can do whatever you want and I won't get in the way of it."

Midnight Sparkle chuckled. " Such a direct request."

" Well?"

" I'll think about it."

It became apparent after a while that I needed to leave the underground by the same way I came in. It seemed that a strong force was preventing the Song of Soaring from reaching down here and prevented me from leaving, but fortunately I didn't have to worry about dealing with monsters on the way back. I made sure to put on the Captain's Hat before leaving as I had no doubt that the Stalchildren were still hanging around the graveyard since it was still night time and wearing it would prevent them from attacking. I walked over to the door, entered the previous room, over to the next door, and the room after that before stepping on the platform that allowed me to rise back up to the surface.

The instant I was back in the graveyard, I immediately played the Song of Soaring to warp back to Clock Town, and proceeded to the north part of town. I had no idea what time it was at first but a nearby clock hanging on a wall said that it had just passed midnight. The Iron Knuckle had taken me plenty of time and I feared I wouldn't be able to get back and prevent Lightning Dust from robbing the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop, but I managed to make it just in time as the former began walking--more like prancing--her way forward towards her victim and stealing the Bomb Bag right under her nose.

Without a moment's hesitation, I took off the Captain's Hat--I didn't need it now--unsheathed my sword, ran towards Lightning Dust who was trying to escape, and struck the bag causing her to drop it though she did manage to get away by running out of the gate and into Termina Field--why the guard didn't stop was simply baffling. The Old Lady thanked me for preventing the robbery though there was no reward this time around since I had already acquired a long time ago. Now that I had prevented the robbery, Iron Will would eventually the expensive mask so I needed to come back here during the final night in order to get it.

Playing the Song of Soaring a second time and warping back to Ikana Village, I was now ready to deal with DJ Pon-3. The Gibdo were still surrounding the Music Box House as before and completely ignored me--I planned on ignoring them since fighting them would have been pointless anyway--so I began walking towards the cave that served as the source of the water that once ran through the village. A sign outside the cave confirmed my suspicions and I walked inside where the darkness immediately surrounded me. I could also sense great evil as well, watching my every move.

No doubt that the evil belonged to DJ Pon-3, who even now must have become incredibly powerful and demonic in nature she had sold her soul. As I walked through the cave, I stumbled a few times because I couldn't see where I was going, and had I know this would be the case, I would have brought along a torch. The path eventually opened up into a large chamber consisting of water that definitely reeked of evil given how horrible it smelt. A purple-red hue radiated on every wall making everything a lot brighter than it should yet the most unusual feature was how all aspects of the room went down to a point in the center.

Princess Twilight shivered. " This place is creepy."

I nodded. " You can sense the evil all around us."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes so you need to be careful, Sunset. DJ Pon-3 is somewhere in this chamber and we need to find her before she finds us. I have no idea what kind of power she possesses now but be prepared for anything."

" I still intend on using the Song of Healing before the Song of Storms."

" Do whatever you need to."

Suddenly, a strong wind began blowing about, catching me off guard. " Where did this come from?" I asked as I attempted to see what was going on but couldn't due to the wind obscuring my vision. It wasn't natural since there was no wind prior but a sinister laugh began echoing all around.

" Well, well, well... What have we here?" The voice asked.

" Where are you?"

" My, aren't you quite the demanding one?"

" I want to talk to you."

The voice didn't respond at first yet I knew they were still there since the wind was still blowing about. It began growing weaker and continued to do so until it faded away completely, and that was when another ghost appeared before us, wielding a baton and dressed in a rather formal outfit. And yet, the sunglasses along with the headphones made it pretty obvious--also ridiculous given the rest of her attire--that this was in fact DJ Pon-3. What truly surprised me was that she was capable of talking, an unusual factor since she preferred to express herself via emotions and other similar reactions.

I mean, I had seen her talking to other students at Canterlot High, but I couldn't hear what she was saying since the voices of numerous other students drowned her out. I was going to ask Princess Twilight if the pony version of DJ Pon-3 was also a mute and her expression told me that this was indeed correct. A powerful aura was surrounding DJ Pon-3 and it made it difficult for me to breathe due to how powerful it felt. While I could have whipped out the Ocarina of Time and played the Song of Storms, I wanted to hear what she had to say in case she unintentionally gave me some clues.

" You... You want to talk to me?"

I nodded. " Yes. I've heard much about you and wanted to see you in person."

DJ Pon-3 glared at me. " You only know of me through the words of my sister, Flat." She then swung her baton around and pretended that she was spinning some discs before glaring at me again. " I can sense her aura all around you but it doesn't matter that you paid her a visit. That was a long time ago so who cares if you listened to what she had to say. My heart has no time to deal with someone who tried to deny me my destiny!"

" You can't mean that."

" What would you, a living flesh, understand?" DJ Pon-3 asked. " It happened long before you even came crying into this world so don't pretend that you understand what you know nothing about!" Her glaring then changed into an expression of malice so I had to keep my guard up just in case she tried to pull off something. " I am curious about something and it involves your very presence in this place. Tell me, what business have you in Ikana Kingdom, land where only the dead roam?"

" I came here to free the guardian who has been imprisoned."

DJ Pon-3 laughed. " You? Freeing the guardian? What can a living flesh like you hope to achieve?"

" I've already rescued the other three guardians."

" What!?"

" I've been through much hardship in order to rescue them." I said. " And I know that isn't going to change any time soon as I make my way through this land."

DJ Pon-3's expression changed from malice to concern. " Yes... I was starting to wonder why the spirits of the kingdom were getting agitated. They must have been talking about you and you do reek of the undead since you have interacted with my sister, and have most likely spoken to Keeta at some point." She turned away from me and began mumbling to herself to keep me from hearing her. " This living flesh could ruin everything with her presence... I must deal with her appropriately so that my desire won't be thwarted." She looked at me again with the malice-like expression strewn across her face. " Leave."

" What?"

" This is no place for one as full of life as you."

I shook my head. " I have no intention of leaving."

" Leave now and no harm shall befall upon you." DJ Pon-3 said. " Or do you say that you wish to join the dead? I can arrange for that to happen, you know, and it would make things far more interesting than they are now."

I shook my head feverishly. " No-no... Let's not be too hasty."

DJ Pon-3 laughed. " I understand your desire even though you don't. You really do wish to join the ranks of the dead. It's not often that one amongst the living wishes to end their existence and be relegated to the legions of the beyond." She twirled her baton again and I felt a presence beginning to surround me. Was this the power she had acquired when she sold her soul to the devil? " Do not worry. The process of joining us won't take long. Now, sleep gently to the melody of darkness that the great composer, Sharp, shall play... and join the ranks of the dead."

When she started twirling her baton again, strange music suddenly came out from the walls themselves. I tried to take out the Ocarina of Time only to find myself dropping on one knee and then the other before dropping onto my hands. My body was being drained of its energy because of the music and that meant I didn't have much time before I would die. Princess Twilight attempted to distract DJ Pon-3 to stop the music, but she too grew weaker, collapsed on the ground, and struggled to get up again before she stopped moving--her wings continued flapping though I didn't know for how much longer.

I struggled to get back onto my own feet but it felt like my body was being dragged down by an extreme level of gravity, but I couldn't give up as I needed to carry out Octavia's request and save DJ Pon-3 from herself. Reaching into my pouch and taking the ocarina out, I pulled it up to my lips only to drop it at the last second prompting DJ Pon-3 to begin laughing as she continued playing her morbid music. I crouched down, picked it back up, and immediately played the Song of Healing believing I could at least heal her soul before giving her the proper song that would stop all of this.

The instant she heard the Song of Healing, DJ Pon-3 came to a stop and began twirling around in circles, getting faster and faster with every rotation. I knew this wasn't going to work because it wasn't what Octavia wanted, yet I believed that this would prove effective despite not go the full distance. She continued spinning around until she came to a sudden stop and began laughing before floating down to my location until she was right in front of me. Her ghostly eyes attempted to instill me with fear yet I resisted because frankly, I had seen worse courtesy of Ganondorf himself.

" How do you feel?" I asked. " Did my song do anything for you."

DJ Pon-3 stopped laughing and looked at me with a serious expression on her face. " That song... I could tell that it had a special power much like what my sister and I created when we were composing songs for the king. Somehow, my heart is eased. Hmmm... I haven't felt this way in a very long time. Whoever taught you that song had impressive skills and has rubbed off on you." It looked like she would change her mannerisms but I knew it wouldn't happen so I wasn't about to be persuaded. " This melody has a serenity to it... Yet... To one of the dead and darkness, like myself, a song like that no longer holds meaning for me."

" I'm well aware of that."

" What!? Then why did you play that song?"

" I thought it would help you but I guess it didn't."

" You believed I could be swayed so easily?"

I nodded. " Guess you proved me wrong."

DJ Pon-3 became enraged. " This foolishness has gone on long enough. You shall end your futile resistance and quickly join the ranks of the dead." She then began twirling her baton around and the sinister music from before began to play again. My body began growing weaker again due to my energy slowly being drained and DJ Pon-3 laughed once again. " I am going to enjoy seeing you as one of us and I am certain our king will want to make you one of his soldiers or a slave."

" I have to disagree." I said as I raised the Ocarina of Time to my lips and played the Song of Storms--it took several attempts before I played it properly.

DJ Pon-3 suddenly stopped when the rain began pouring down. " W-What is this? This song? N-No, it can't be. This song... How do you know..." She then began twirling around in circles like before only this time it was having the desired effect. She began shrinking down in size before disappearing in a puff of smoke before returning moments later without the evil aura surrounding her. " You... You learned that song upon seeing my sister. Yes... There is no other explanation. Flat, my dear sister. Forgive your foolish sister who dreamt of the revival of the Royal Family..."

Had that been her plan from the beginning? To restore the Royal Family of Ikana? There was much that I didn't know so I had to take her word for it but to want to sell her soul just to bring back the rulers? Either she had been consumed by her own lust and believed she could do such a thing or she wanted Ikana Kingdom to flourish once again so that it wouldn't be forgotten by future generations. To revive the Royal Family... It sounded like whoever was ruling the kingdom died before DJ Pon-3 and Octavia did or the family had fallen on hard times and needed some kind of resurrection.

DJ Pon-3 then continued talking. " Ye who do not fear the dead... Please listen to my words. I know that I have no right to ask this of you given that I attempted to make you part of the undead like all those who linger here still but I insist you listen. With my sister's song, you have broken the curse that was placed upon me. It is all thanks to you. Our time was long ago and as such we dead should not exist now. We should not be lingering but we cannot rest because of what has happened at the heart of this land. The masked one who came here some time performed a trick and has now upset things."

I should have known Starlight was responsible. She was up to her old tricks though this was far grander than anything she had done in the past. " I'm familiar with this masked one, as she has caused trouble all over this world through various pranks." I said.

" Then you will do nicely."

" What do you mean?"

" You know how the masked one works so you can undo the damage she has caused."

" Yes, I suppose I can."

" If you truly do not fear the dead... I wish for you to go to the temple of this land." DJ Pon-3 said. " Go there and sever the root of the evil curse that torments us. Do so and we undead shall return to our eternal twilight and disappear from this world once again. However, it isn't as easy as I am making it sound. In order to free us, you must seek out the one who once ruled over us. I, the only one who knows the way into the temple, shall direct you to the King."

" Where can I find him?"

DJ Pon-3 pointed outside. " The King is in the ruins of Ikana Castle, awaiting the coming of the one who will break the curse. To reach him, you must first acquire something important that lies below this land deep within an underground maze. Before you can go down there, you must follow the water that has now begun flowing from this place and aid the one who resides within the house that can play music. I have made my final request."

Her body then faded away until it had disappeared and despite what she attempted to do to me, I felt sorry for her because she was only trying to do what she thought was best for the future of the kingdom. Still, she could now rest in peace alongside Octavia and compose songs together once again. At that moment, water began flowing from the center of the chamber and outside so I quickly followed along by running after the flow. It trickled down the path until it reached the water wheel and began turning it around whereupon music began blaring out from the two horns on top of the house.

The music was surprisingly really catchy despite its simplicity yet it was definitely a welcome improvement over the drabness that was Ikana. Looking forward at the Gibdo, they continued walking around the house until they suddenly came to a stop, and then clutched their heads in pain. It appeared that they weren't fond of the music but then something else started happening to them. Each one crouched down and began convulsing, changing colours in the process, and the ground beneath their feet began vibrating. I knew music was powerful but I wasn't expecting anything like this.

This convulsion act went on for quite a while before the Gibdo suddenly stood up, raised their arms, and let out bloodcurdling screams before they sank down below the ground until none of them remained. Princess Twilight and I said nothing while all that happened and our jaws remained dropped for several moments after the fact. To think that those undead monsters were felled by the power of music--simple as it was--yet now we needed to figure out what to do next. The Music Box House had something inside its walls the Gibdo wanted so now Her Highness and I could gain access.

I walked up to the door and attempted to open it only to discover that it was locked. " Shoot! We can't get in."

" I'm not surprised by this." Twilight said.

" To be honest, I don't think a locked door would have prevented those Gibdo from getting inside."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes but you have to wonder why they didn't attempt it in the first place. We've almost been through an entire day of this cycle and I suspect those monsters had been surrounding the house since before then."

" What's even weirder is that they ignored us."

" Did you want to destroy them?"

I shook my head. " No. In fact, I'm glad they didn't come after us. They can freeze you on the spot with a powerful piercing gaze couple with a bloodcurdling scream before latching onto your body and draining it of vital energy. I'm surprised I remember such a vivid image but I suppose it's because I had it happen to me on my previous journey. An image like that is near impossible to forget."

" Anyway, we should focus on getting inside."

I nodded. " Any ideas?"

" Try knocking the door?"

I slapped my forehead. " Oh... Right."

Gently knocking on the door, there was no response so I tried again, and again there was no response. Either whoever was inside was hiding from the Gibdo and their hiding spot prevented them from hearing my knocks or they were ignoring me on purpose or weren't around. I then knocked for the third time and this time someone responded on the other side of the door by saying that no one was inside. I countered by saying that someone was home thus proving they had lied and they responded by saying that they refused to let me in and told me to go away and leave them alone.

I even said that there weren't any Gibdos anymore yet they refused to believe me and again told me to go away. Since there was nothing more I could do, I decided to heed their threat and leave the vicinity in order to come up with another plan. I couldn't put my finger on it but the voice on the other side of the door sounded very familiar but their tone was a mixture of anger and nervousness. Walking over to a small boulder and sitting down, I relaxed after what I had endured against DJ Pon-3 and began thinking about how I could convince the person on the other side that everything was fine.

" We need to get inside, Sunset."

" How can we when whoever is in there refuses to leave."

Princess Twilight then remembered something and began bopping me on the head. " Do you remember what that Garo said when you defeated him?" I tried to recall the exact words it said but I couldn't prompting Her Highness to bop me again. " I can't believe you forgot about it, Sunset. It mentioned the girl who lives inside comes outside every two minutes to check out the dried well."

" So you're saying we should wait for her to come out?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but you need to make sure she doesn't see us otherwise she will run back inside and lock the door."

Looking around to see if there was a suitable place for me to hide, I felt dejected upon realizing that there was nothing within the immediate vicinity. That's when an idea popped into my head and I took out the Stone Mask and placed it on my face. It enabled me to hide from most of the Gerudo Pirates when I infiltrated their fortress over at Great Bay so perhaps it would work here with whoever was inside the house. The waiting soon began and at first no movement came from within the house but when the door's lock suddenly clicked and slowly creaked open, I was ready to make a move when it suddenly closed again.

That quickly deflated my hopes of getting inside but no sooner had the door closed that it opened up again and stayed open this time. A hand reached out of the darkness that was within the house--I was too far away to see the interior so it looked dark to me--as a means of checking to see if there were any monsters surrounding the place. A sigh could be heard coming from inside before someone stepped outside and my jaw immediately dropped. I had long suspected that she would have ended up becoming part of this world just like the rest of my friends had done but I never thought of finding her here of all places.

Princess Twilight was besides herself with surprise upon seeing the one who came out of the door as being her human equivalent, Twilight Sparkle. I would have thought she would have portrayed a more significant character in Termina much like how my friends had done but here she was portraying an ordinary girl who lived in a barren wasteland that was surrounded by the living dead. Her clothes indicated simplicity and her feverish glances all around told me Twilight Sparkle felt nervous about leaving the safety of her house. Could she be trying to protect something inside or wanting no one else to know?

Now I had a decision to make. " What should we do?"

Princess Twilight was much more direct. " Talk to her! What else!"

" Won't she try to run back inside and lock the door?"

" We need to talk to her, Sunset, now!"

I could tell Her Highness felt eager towards wanting to speak with her other self but I shook my head knowing that confronting her wouldn't be in our best interest. " We should focus on what could be inside her house before talking with her." Unfortunately, Princess Twilight had other ideas and flew over to the other Twilight, who was starting to make her way over to a well located nearby. " Twilight!" I shouted. " Get back over here! We need to go inside the house as that was what DJ Pon-3 suggested!" She refused to listen and I sighed before following along after her.

Never would I have imagined Her Highness acting so impulsively all because we had encountered Twilight Sparkle, but then the two of them did have some issues to work out when they first met each other a couple of weeks after the Friendship Games. Princess Twilight came through the portal, revealing that she had only just gotten the messages I had sent to her yet instead of getting to discuss things that she wanted to talk about, she was confronted with her human counterpart, an encounter none of us were expecting. It was like two polar opposites had finally converged to meet with one another.

Twilight Sparkle felt bad at that time since she viewed herself as an outsider given that my friends and I had a much stronger connection with Princess Twilight, but then when she was asked by Her Highness to tell her more about herself, I could tell that Twilight Sparkle felt more comfortable despite how awkward everything was. It was also a lesson my friends would take to heart since they could eventually meet their pony counterparts one day. I was the exception of course as I had no human counterpart to call my own. I could take solace in knowing how it would look but ultimately not truly understanding the experience.

Princess Twilight began buzzing around the other Twilight who looked up to notice her. " Huh? What is a fairy doing here in the middle of this wasteland?"

" I want to talk to you."

Twilight Sparkle was surprised. " You want to talk to me? I'm surprised that a fairy would want to talk to me but I don't see what you would want from the likes of me. You don't look like one of the fairies from the fountain over there so perhaps you should talk to them instead. I'm sure they will help you a lot better than I could."

" No, you're the one I need!"

" Me? I'm honoured that you would think that but I cannot right now."

" Why not?"

" I need to get some water from the well over there, little fairy, in order to provide some much needed heating to my home." Twilight Sparkle answered. " You would think my house would have one of those modern fireplaces like they have back in Clock Town, but this one requires water to make it work and it can be difficult to leave sometimes especially with the evil presence that lurk about here."

" You... Struggle out here?"

Twilight Sparkle nodded. " My father and I moved out here some time ago in order for him to pursue his interests. To be honest with you, I wish we could go back to Clock Town and not have to worry about the undead who have been roaming freely lately. My father... um... he doesn't like receiving visitors because... because... he feels it would distract him from doing his work and I... well... I have to make sure no one bothers him."

" What does he do?"

" Um... I'd rather not say."

Princess Twilight felt disappointed. " I guess it's too private, right?"

" By the way..." Twilight Sparkle began. " Why were you hanging around over there? A fairy like you would be threatened constantly by the undead creatures that plague this ancient village so unless you want to die, you should head on over to the fountain and wait until everything calms down--though that could take a really long time. The Great Fairy hasn't been herself ever since some strange masked figure visited her but I haven't been able to visit her because those undead creatures had been surrounding my house until just recently. I am glad the house is operating again but I still don't feel safe."

" I have a friend who would like to see you."

" Friend?" Twilight Sparkle asked. " I don't see anyone else out there."

Princess Twilight turned around and discovered that I was invisible to everyone except for her but before she could say anything, Twilight Sparkle began walking towards the well prompting her to fly out in front and stop her other self from leaving. " Where are you going? I want you to meet my friend."

Twilight Sparkle shook her head. " I need to get some water so I can't stand here talking to you, little fairy. The monsters may have disappeared but there is no telling when others will show up, and my father... um... never mind about him."

" You shouldn't fear monsters since your house is playing music again."

" The strangest thing about that..." Twilight Sparkle began. " Is that the cave where the water comes from used to have a strange wailing noise coming from deep within. I assumed it was a spirit or some other such apparition haunting the place so I never went anywhere near it in case it came after me. Now that it's gotten quiet again, I might decide to check it out myself but not until my father... I... I'm sorry but I really must be going. A pleasure talking to you, little fairy. Oh... Please don't go inside my house if at all possible. There is... um... just don't go inside."

She then walked off towards the well leaving Princess Twilight feeling dejected over what happened and when she--Twilight Sparkle--was far enough away, Her Highness sighed and called out to me knowing that I hadn't revealed myself. " You can come over now, Sunset."

I took off the Stone Mask--Her Highness could still see me regardless--and walked over to her. " I can't believe that you went over to her even though I said it wasn't a good idea because of what we needed to do next. But then... you did what your heart was telling you."

" You could have said something."

I shook my head. " I decided to let you two talk to each other. After all, you two are essentially the same person but from different worlds and different upbringings. Still, I feel bad for her in this world given what she had been enduring. I also noticed that she didn't like talking about her father."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. She paused whenever she brought him up as though she was trying to hide something. We should go inside and find out what's going on in case there is much more than we realize."

" What about her?"

" So long as she suddenly doesn't look this way, she won't even know you were here." Twilight answered. " As much as I would like to continue talking with her, we should focus on rescuing the final giant, and besides, I might have another chance at talking to her later. The door should still be open--surprised she would forget to close it let alone lock it--so we can take advantage of her oversight."

Walking up to the door and opening it, I entered the Music Box House and was surprised at how well detailed it looked. I was expecting something fantasy-like given the premise behind the house yet it was an ordinary interior one would come to expect. Judging from the lack of anything on the table, Twilight Sparkle and whoever her father was hadn't been eating for quite some time. While she had no excuse for not eating, her father might have been too busy with whatever he did to consider eating food. Everything seemed to be in order until I noticed a strange light coming from the basement.

My first instinct wanted me to explore the upper level of the house in case there was something up there--I also wanted to see where the horns on the roof connected to--but the light from the basement proved impossible for me to ignore. There was a staircase near the table so I walked down them and entered the basement, and it consisted of what could be considered a mad scientist's laboratory. There were pieces of paper everywhere, each one had a diagram of an undead monster on it, various books, containers, and other nick-knacks were strewn about, but the most curious object of all was a large closet situated at the very back.

I could sense a presence coming from the closet so I walked up to it to get a closer look. As I got closer, I could see what undead monsters were on each diagram, and while I did recognize the obvious ones such as Gibdos and Garo, others were ones I had never seen before including one creature that had a single eye but featured a formidable physique. Suddenly, the closet door swung open and I was shocked beyond all reasoning at what was lurking inside of it. Even Princess Twilight was shocked at what we were witnessing, and it also explained why her other self didn't want us to know about her father...

Chapter 54: Lurkers of the Underground

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
May 1, 2017
Chapter 54: Lurkers of the Underground.

I had seen plenty of disturbing things throughout this journey across Termina yet this was perhaps the most disturbing of all. Twilight Sparkle had dodged many questions surrounding her father in this world and now I had seen why she had been so hesitant. To think that a human could end up with such a horrible affliction was something no one should ever have to experience. To be brutally honest though, her methods wouldn't have been very effective against the likes of those Gibdo. When they were shuffling about outside, there was nothing that could have prevented them from coming into the house and taking her father.

And yet, what was preventing the Gibdo from doing just that? Twilight Sparkle lacked the means of stopping them and her father wasn't exactly helpless in that he could have easily made his way outside and be taken away, but all that happened was an unusual stalemate that resulted in her suffering from a lot of stress. Granted, she could have attempted to fight them off but that would have resulted in her being killed. Then again, she could have given a similar affliction like what had befallen her father yet the biggest question was how had she managed to not be affected to begin with?

Twilight Sparkle's father... Or as Princess Twilight whispered into my ear--in addition to bopping me on the head to snap me out of the shock--regarding his identity said that she recognized him as someone she knew from Equestria, yet he was a stranger to me as I never recalled seeing him before--unless I saw him on my previous journey and forgot--or he lived elsewhere in Canterlot. Her Highness referred to him as Soarin, an unusual name for anyone, but she knew it was him as his hairstyle was something she could recognize anywhere along with the goggles he wore on top of his head.

Soarin... He was mostly covered in bandages though much of his face was still human aside from having fanged teeth, a warped eye, and claws on the one hand of his that hadn't been wrapped up in the casing of the Gibdo. His expression was clearly blank as he had no idea where he even was but I could sense a faint presence coming from him that was being cloaked by what he had become. Had he been afflicted with a curse that caused him to look like that? If so then how did it even happen to begin with? I suspected Twilight Sparkle knew the answer yet chose not to reveal it out of fear for her father's well-being.

Other than the moaning coming from his mouth, Soarin didn't look hostile, but I had to keep my distance as there was no telling what he was capable of doing. The Gibdo were powerful creatures that could drain the life force from their victims through touch alone and their resilience meant it took many hits before collapsing. While Soarin bore a resemblance to them and most likely possessed some of their power, I couldn't attack him even if he were to grab me and drain my life force. He was still human and a living creature and I had no intention of taking his even if he couldn't control himself.

Princess Twilight shuddered. " I can't believe Soarin ended up being Twilight Sparkle's father in this world.

" Who were you expecting?" I asked.

" My father!"

" I don't think you've ever told me about your parents."

Princess Twilight was surprised at my remark. " Really? I could have sworn I mentioned them to you at least in my responses to your Friendship Reports."

I shook my head. " Nope! You never mentioned anything."

" In that case, I might as well give you a brief description." Twilight said. " My father, Night Light, is quite the avid reader though much of the time he tends to become completely engrossed in what he's reading that he loses track of time."

I gave a smirk to Princess Twilight. " Reminds me a lot about you."

Princess Twilight blushed. " Guess the fruit doesn't fall far from the tree. Anyway, he encouraged me to pursue my desire for knowledge and enrolled me in Princess Celestia's school even though it did cost him a lot of bits, but he always said it was a worthwhile investment. My mother, Twilight Velvet, was originally believed to have been the author behind the Daring Do books--it was A.K. Yearling who wrote them--but in her younger days, she was quite the story writer and many of her books are still read to fillies all across Equestria. Even now, she still has trouble coming to grips with the fact her children have both become royalty."

" And Soarin?"

" He's the second-in-command of the Wonderbolts though Rainbow Dash does seem to be smitten with him a little." Twilight answered. " He may not look like it but his loyalty to the team is unbreakable though he has had doubts ever since that incident some time ago in Rainbow Falls during the qualifer for the Equestria Games. Like I said, I was expecting my actual father here instead of Soarin but then nothing has made sense in Termina ever since we first started this adventure."

I nodded. " You get used to it very quickly. I know I did."

" And then some."

I laughed. " Anyway, we should probably focus on dealing with Soarin--"

Before I could finish what I was saying, Soarin began stumbling forward, his arms swinging about in an attempt to either grab me or knock me aside. His movement speed was pretty bad so it was easy to avoid his attacks but I couldn't allow him to touch me in case he would drain my life force. I would be utterly helpless if he were to do that so I needed to keep my distance until I could contain him. He then suddenly lunged at me and I jumped left only to hit my head against a table and getting dazed as a result. When I regained my composure, he lunged at me again, prompting me to jump over him where he stumbled back into the closet.

Closing the doors and stepping backwards, I began to breathe heavily, but no sooner had I started doing so when the door's burst open again and Soarin began stumbling forward towards me again. I wanted to use my sword in hopes of scaring him enough to get back and allow me some time to come up with a proper strategy but I didn't want to use my blade in case I accidentally hit him by accident. He lunged at me again and panicking, I grabbed what looked to be a ladle--why he would have something like that in such a cluttered mess of research was beyond me--and began swinging it at him.

He batted it away without a moment's notice leaving me to resort to using my shield to deflect any future blows. At the very least, Soarin didn't have the power to paralyze me with a piercing gaze so I didn't have to worry about that. He resumed stumbling forward, his fists pounding against my shield, yet I needed an answer and quickly before Twilight Sparkle came back as I figured she wouldn't be happy with me fighting against her father. " Twilight... I could really do with a strategy right now! If your other self sees what we're doing then who know what she'll do in response."

" I'm thinking, Sunset!"

" Think faster!"

Princess Twilight began wracking her brain with an answer while I began pushing back Soarin using my shield. She eventually came up with an answer and not a moment too soon as I pushed Soarin back into the closet and closed the doors. " Since he is under a curse, why not try playing the Song of Storms? If that doesn't work then the only other option would be to use the Song of Healing. Any other song would have no effect on him so your options are limited."

" I'll try the Song of Storms first since I only recently got that."

" Better be quick as I don't think those closet doors will last."

And they didn't as Soarin burst through them before stumbling towards me. I quickly took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt and played the Song of Storms, a downpour beginning soon after. I thought it odd that the song could make it rain instead of a building and not cause any fixtures or other items to become drenched with water but I supposed it was the magic within the melody at work. Soarin came to a stop and looked around him as the rain tricked onto him yet he continued stumbling forward forcing me to push him back with my shield again until he was back inside the closet.

It appeared that the curse he had been afflicted with was much more powerful than what was given off by the Blue Bubbles so the Song of Storms would have no effect. At least I tried using the song so I knew it wouldn't work in such scenarios in the future. As I raised my lips to the ocarina, Soarin once more burst his way out from the closest but the sounds of someone closing a door upstairs indicated that Twilight Sparkle had come back from the well and was likely to come downstairs to check on her father. If she saw me now, I was sure to get kicked out and not be able to come back in here again knowing her.

Quickly, I played the Song of Healing and hoped that it would affect Soarin. Sure enough, when the music reached his ears, he stopped moving, clutched his head, and began moaning as the magic began having an effect on him. Everything suddenly went white as a powerful light emanated from Soaring and when my vision returned, he had been changed back to the way he was before though he was now wearing a mask on his face. The mask fell to the ground and bounced a few times before stopping near a chair but before I could go over and pick it up, I heard the sounds of Twilight Sparkle coming down the stairs.

" Huh? Where am I?" Soarin asked.

" Father?" Twilight Sparkle asked as she came upon what had just happened.

" Pamela?"

Twilight Sparkle then rushed over to Soarin and he embraced her with a hug in return. " Father!"

" What have I been doing this whole time?" Soarin asked. " The last thing I remember was going down into the well located on the edge of Ikana Village, but then everything went black and I somehow ended up back here."

" You... You haven't been doing anything, father." Twilight Sparkle answered. " You were having a bad dream, a horrible nightmare but it's over now." She then turned to look at me and I was expecting her to glare at me with hatred but instead she was glaring at me with immense joy. " This young girl did something that allowed you to wake up from your little nightmare, father, and despite her sneaking in here without permission, I am glad that she did otherwise things could have been so much different."

Soarin then got up and looked at me. " So, you are the one responsible for waking me up from my nightmare?" I nodded and he clasped his hands together. " It seems that you possess some extraordinary powers, young girl, powers that seem fantastical and at the same time well within the realm of possibility. Do you mind staying here for a while as there are so many questions that I wish to ask of you."

I turned towards Twilight Sparkle who nodded nervously and I knew what she was trying to convey. " I'm not sure if I should do for you, sir, especially since you did just recover from a terrifying ordeal according to your daughter."

Soarin shook his head. " Nonsense! I feel like I have a million different questions to ask of you." He then looked at Twilight Sparkle and came to the same conclusion I did. " Ah, but perhaps it would be best if I merely asked you a few questions, and perhaps answer any concerns that have stumped you. Yes, you have the look of someone who is confused about where they are headed in life. Believe me, I used to have that very thought myself before I found my calling. Pamela, please go upstairs and prepare some tea for us while I deal with this girl who has embraced us with her presence.

As I watched Twilight Sparkle walk upstairs in silence, I turned to look down at the mask that dropped on the floor when Soarin was changed back to normal. " Um, do you mind if I picked up what recently dropped on the floor?"

" By all means."

I walked over to the mask, picked it up, and stared at it. It looked exactly like a Gibdo's head except without anything behind it. Was this all that remained of Soarin's cursed form before the Song of Sealing was used to heal his soul? It definitely couldn't grant me the ability to become a Gibdo--thank goodness for that--but I needed to take it anyway despite it not having any practical use because it would bring me one step closer to the ultimate mask. " Hmmm... I don't suppose you mind if I take this mask with me?" I asked this of him in case he assumed that I was a thief since I was still in his house.

" A mask has no practical use to me so do what you want with it." Soarin answered. He then noticed what kind of mask I was holding and lowered his goggles across his eyes before rushing over to me and grabbing the mask from my hands. " Wha-what is this this you hold here, young girl?" He looked at it for a few seconds before suddenly staring off into the distance followed by looking over at a diagram of a Gibdo that he had on the wall. " No doubt that this is a Gibdo Mask, a rare find considering how common they are. Hmmm... you know, if you were to walk up to one while wearing this, you could easily pass yourself off as one."

Even though I knew what they were, I pretended not to know so as to humour him. " What is a Gibdo?"

" An excellent question and one I can answer." Soarin answered. " Come, take a look at the diagram I have over here." He walked over to the wall and I followed along knowing he was in his element but hopefully he wouldn't suffer a relapse because of what happened. Twilight Sparkle would never forgive me were her father in this world were to learn he was once an undead monster. " Before I continue, I suppose I should introduce myself. I am the famed academic, Soarin, who researches fairies, ghosts, and similar so-called supernatural phenomena that exist in this world of ours."

" You research fairies?"

Soarin nodded. " I have been curious about their powers for years, young girl, and have seen many of them during my time. This fairy that flutters about you is perhaps the most lively one I've ever seen, and to be honest, I had hoped to be able to study it for research. But, I can see that it wishes to remain by your side so perhaps you might be more willing to let me study it when you have finished with your adventures."

I rolled my eyes and began snickering to which Princess Twilight immediately felt offended. After all her quips about wanting to study the various things we've seen on this journey in the name of research, it felt satisfying knowing that someone wanted to do that to her. She had gotten a taste of her own medicine though I quickly stopped snickering knowing how sensitive Her Highness could get and I didn't want to be labelled as a bully by Soarin. I was surprised that Soarin would want to study fairies given they were different from researching undead monsters--though I supposed their magic is what he was truly interested in.

" My companion wouldn't appreciate you using her as a test subject."

" Ah, how unfortunate." Soarin said. " By the way, do you know the song this house plays?"

I shook my head. " I just assumed it was a random piece of music."

Soarin laughed. " No, the song is a very important one when it comes to the Gibdos. The song, Farewell to Gibdos, drives them away and back to the underground from whence they came from. I discovered it after many years of researching Gibdos and utilize it whenever they rear their insidious forms around here." I acted all confused whenever he said Gibdo so as to continue pretending that I had no idea what they were. " I suppose I should explain what it is first before I confuse you any further, young girl. As you can see, this diagram consists of a mummified man. Its scientific name is Gibdo."

" Are they dangerous?"

" Indeed."

" How so?"

" When a Gibdo gazes upon its victims with its eyes, the victim is frozen on the spot." Soarin answered. " You can eventually free yourself from such a state but if the Gibdo were to ensnare you with its arms, your very life essence would be drained until you became an empty husk devoid of the trappings of nature. However, despite how horrifying they can be, there is a legend that is connected to them. It is a tale in Ikana that tells of a treasure that rests at the bottom of the well located nearby on the hilltop. No one has ever seen what it is because of becoming the very thing they feared most."

" What do you mean?"

" They were cursed to become Gibdos upon failing to claim the treasure."

I gulped. " That sounds horrible.

Soarin nodded. " Even now, they continue to linger down there, waiting for someone to come along and free them from their eternal torment. According to my research on these Gibdo, they can only move on to the next life by being given different items depending on what they desire. Sure, they would have no use of such things but they will prevent anyone from progressing until they have been satisfied. I don't know what they want but I would suggest to anyone foolhardy enough to go down there to stock according with anything they could find on the ground."

" You sound like you've been down there." I said before covering my mouth. Crap! I didn't want Soarin to relapse and recall what he had done as a Gibdo. " Um... Forget what I
just said okay? I didn't mean to say that."

" I went down there... once." Soarin said. " I and many others before me have gone down the well to search for the treasure. It's been said going down there is a petrifying experience so even the mummy hunter may become mummified! As I said, I even tried to go into that well once myself... Well... When you are a researcher, you have to go to such places in order to discover what lies in them even if it means suffering from some kind of curse."

I went limp. " Um... What happened to you down there?"

" Strangely enough, though, I don't remember anything that happened there." Soarin answered. " Try as I might, I just cannot recall what happened and how I ended up back here in my own house confronted by both my daughter and you. Oh well. I suppose I can't complain about it since it would do me no good. You never know what might happen in these situations so it's simply best not to approach it. That way, nothing bad will happen to you."

I could tell that he was trying to recall what happened to him during his time as a Gibdo yet he kept on shaking his head and merely shrugged it off. Most people would have completely lost their minds had they remembered being monsters with some going to extreme measures. While I hadn't lost my way after becoming a monster--though I did suffer from severe regret over my actions--Twilight Sparkle had a possibility of losing her mind after what happened to her during the Friendship Games. Even though she said she was okay after going through that horrible ordeal, I could tell that she was hiding the truth.

Hopefully, she wouldn't go through some kind of emotional breakdown, but considering that magic had become a big part of our lives, it wasn't going to be easy. Also, seeing her exact twin from another world didn't do Twilight Sparkle any favours either, yet there wasn't much of a choice since Princess Twilight was someone who had helped my friends and I through some difficult times. Granted, both did acknowledge the other though it would take some time for them to get used to the idea that an alternate Twilight existed. Still, Soaring not recalling what he did proved some people could refrain from snapping.

Remembering that Soarin was still holding the Gibdo Mask, I held out my hand and he returned it to me where I proceeded to put it away. " You said that I could use that mask to pass myself off as a Gibdo?" I asked. " No offence but I wouldn't exactly look like one with it on my face."

Soarin laughed much to my annoyance. " Gibdo lack intelligence so they would easily mistake you as one of their own. Not even their paralyzing gaze will affect you so long as you wear that mask but considering you do possess a sword and shield, I suggest not attacking them otherwise they will react accordingly."

" Thanks for the heads-up." I said. I was about to take my leave by going back upstairs when I noticed another diagram on the wall, this one depicting one of the Garo that I encountered earlier whilst wearing the Garo's Mask. Had Soarin been researching them? If so then perhaps his knowledge of them would prove useful to me. I walked over to where the diagram was and he definitely paid attention to my actions. " What is this diagram of?"

" Are you curious about that picture?" Soarin asked. I nodded and he clasped his hands together again. " That is the ghost of a ninja. Its scientific name is Garo Robe though others simply prefer to call them Garo. A rather unscientific name if you ask me. While it looks like they are of the living, they are merely shells that are empty on the inside. They're the shells of spies from an enemy nation sent to investigate Ikana according to what I read. Were a Garo Robe to be captured by an enemy, they could commit seppuku to prevent any secrets from being obtained. It's a shame really when you think about it."

" Why say that?"

" They have been unable to forget their living days." Soarin answered. " Even now their spirits--emptiness cloaked in darkness--continue to spy. It is said that they will not reveal themselves in front of people unless they were to present them with the symbol of the one who lead them. To find such a thing would involve searching the village but no one has ever found such a symbol. If you decide to search for it, I hope that you don't end up succumbing to the spirits of those who linger around here."

At that point, it was obvious that Soarin no longer had anything important to say other than wanting to do research on Princess Twilight and perhaps some of the items that I had in my possession. While I could have granted him such an opportunity, it wouldn't amount to anything since when I eventually reset time, he would go back to being cursed and being watched over by Twilight Sparkle. Speaking of which, I was certain she was waiting for me upstairs and had much on her mind given what had happened. While I could have warped away from here via the Song of Soaring, I chose to confront her and get it over with.

Walking towards the stairs and leaving Soarin to comb over his research, I thanked him for telling me about the Garo since they were still a mystery to me. The Garo's Mask I had acquired from the Gorman Sisters was the only thing that could summon them so whenever Princess Twilight sensed their presence, I should put the mask on and see what they have to say provided I defeat them in battle. As I began walking up to the main floor, I began to think about Flash Senty and how I hadn't encountered him yet in this part of Termina. Had he determined that there was no longer a need for him or had I just not looked in the right place?

Upon reaching the top of the stairs, Twilight Sparkle was waiting for me, sitting down at the table, her expression one of concern. " I have been waiting here for you to come up when you had finished speaking with my father all while preparing tea. I am sorry but I need to speak with you for a while about what happened downstairs in as well as something else that has recently come up."

I walked over to her and sat down. " What do you want to talk to me about?"

" First... the most obvious thing." Twilight Sparkle answered. " Um... What you did for my father... Thank you." She bowed her head slightly to acknowledge my actions before looking back up at me with a concerned look on her face. " But... Your actual actions... It must remain a secret from him for his own sake. My father means well but he can be rather eccentric when it comes to his work. Whenever anything strange happens, he immediately starts talking about doing research... and he does all kinds of crazy things... and... and it has been bothering me a lot lately what with all the undead monsters."

" Maybe you should talk to him about it?"

" I have tried several times but he continues on insisting that he needs to stay here and finish his research."

" Then you need to convince him otherwise."

" Once he calms down, I will try and talk with him again." Twilight Sparkle said. " I'll try convincing him to quit researching in this dangerous place and to go back to town. I do not if I will be able to succeed in changing his mind but I will continue trying. By the way, your strange power... I am aware that you are no ordinary girl and because of that, I ask that you keep such power a secret from my father. If he wee to see it, he'll surely want to research it and that would make me worry for him. I know it sounds mean of me but I insist you not speak to him at least until the undead are no longer roaming here."

" For you, I will accept your terms."

Twilight Sparkle breathed a sigh of relief. " Thank you... Now, the other thing I wish to talk to you about. You may not believe me but you are not the only one who has a strange power in their possession. Um... I... I also have some kind of power dwelling inside of me though it is one I do not understand." She then looked at the kettle warming up on the stove before looking back at me again. " Watch what happens when I concentrate on that kettle." She closed her eyes and began concentrating and all of a sudden, the object began to float slightly upward from the stove before she dropped it again.

" How did you do that?"

Twilight Sparkle shook her head as she regained her composure. " I do not know why it happens but it has been a strange power I have possessed since I was little. I have never revealed it to my father out of fear that he would attempt to research my unusual circumstances so I choose to restrain myself. When you used that ocarina of yours to save my father from his transformation, I believed you a threat because of what has been happening to me."

Much like how my other friends had displayed characteristics based on their Elements of Harmony, Twilight Sparkle had done the same thing herself through her Element... Magic, yet it was strange in that it manifested itself as actual magic. In truth, I had hoped that she would not have retained anything of what she had acquired upon being changed back to normal when she was forced to open up that pendant she had used to absorb the magic my friends possessed. Unlike Her Highness, who was an expert at wielding magic, Twilight Sparkle knew next to nothing about how it worked.

She deserved a different life than the one she unintentionally acquired upon becoming Midnight Sparkle. When magic became understood by her and she attempted to open her own portal to Equestria without even thinking about the consequences of her actions, I had hoped the ordeal would have been nothing but a bad dream or at least one where she would resume her life as before. Fate, however, had different plans, and we discovered during a recent sleepover that she retained some of the magic she absorbed as Midnight Sparkle--I had no idea as to how powerful her magic was given how Ganondorf changed our world into this world.

Had none of this happened, I would have asked Princess Twilight her opinion on how best to show someone how to use their newfound magical abilities. Unfortunately, she wasn't available to answer my concern as she had to deal with an emergency that had come up in the Crystal Empire. Something about becoming an aunt--I was surprised when I found that one out as Her Highness was actually younger than I was--and wanting to see the new royal baby. Fortunately, Her Highness did respond after the fact and insisted that it was something I could solve on my own since I had already proven myself to be pretty good at solving such problems.

Naturally, I questioned my own abilities but she assured me that I could easily handle things considering I helped save Twilight Sparkle by becoming Daydream Shimmer, the form my friends quoted me as becoming--I thought it was a little silly myself but it did sound appropriate after a while--a form that not even Her Highness could fathom. I wasn't going to brag about achieving a form that went beyond the magic of an alicorn, that would go against what I stood for, but I supposed it couldn't hurt to be proud of such an achievement. As far as I could tell, what Twilight Sparkle did during the sleepover was deemed a fluke, at least that's what my friends believed.

Me? I knew more about magic than they did--not as much as Her Highness given how I went without it for years--so I doubted that it was a fluke. Twilight Sparkle had magic inside of her whether she would admit to it or not, and for that I blamed myself for getting her involved in something that was my own doing. Had I never come to the world that I now called home and instead remained in Equestria, my current home would not have Equestrian magic flowing all around. Despite reassurances from my friends, including Princess Twilight, that it wasn't my fault, I had to take responsibility, including the overall blame.

Looking at Twilight Sparkle as she tried to come to terms with what she was capable of doing, the guilt of having changed her life remained evident in my heart, but I also knew that it could easily be dealt with and not spiral out of control. I then looked at Princess Twilight and wondered how she felt about getting to see her other self again. She probably had more questions to ask her than what she originally asked back when both of them first met each other, yet she knew that such concerns were better kept back for the time being until we had changed everything back to normal.

I finally broke the silence. " You said that your father was researching the well?"

Twilight Sparkle nodded nervously. " Yes. He was curious about the treasure that is said to be down there."

" Do you know what kind of treasure it is?"

" My father believes it to be an ancient shield once wielded by the Royal Family of Ikana." Twilight Sparkle answered. " According to his research, the shield had the power to reflect the very light itself though even he found it hard to believe since shields usually cannot do anything like that. The royal family valued it as an heirloom though legends say it was stolen long ago by the Garo. Why they didn't keep the shield for themselves is anyone's guess but as time passed, it became infamous for being a treasure of great value, prompting would-be hunters to go down into the well to claim it."

" No one did get the shield, did they?"

Twilight Sparkle shook her head. " Any who go down there now are cursed to become Gibdo."

" Just like your father..."

Twilight Sparkle nodded. " When I discovered what had happened to my father, I couldn't believe my eyes. I was beside myself with grief that I feared the same thing would happen to me, and when the Gibdo appeared to come and take him away, I knew I needed to keep them away from him by any means. Somehow, I was never cursed like my father had been so perhaps it was a blessing from on high. When I discovered that the Music Box House couldn't play music due to the water drying up, my heart wept as I believed the Gibdo would take my father from me so I did all I could to protect him."

" Your methods wouldn't have lasted forever."

" And for that, I am fortunate that you came along."

" I intend on going into that well." I said. This caused Twilight Sparkle to look at me with a shocked expression but I reassured her that I knew what I was doing. " When I cured your father, this mask dropped from his face, landing on the ground nearby." I reached into my pocket and took out the Gibdo Mask. " With this on my face, those Gibdo will believe me to be one of their own and I should be able to find this shield."

" Had you no special powers, I would have told you that such a thing would be suicide."

I nodded. " I'm used to this kind of thing by now."

Twilight Sparkle sighed. " You remind me a lot of my father... Stubborn, but determined to continue on no matter what. While I would prefer you not to show him your powers nor inform him of what I can do for the obvious reasons, I do owe you a debt of gratitude for saving him." She got up, walked over to the stove, took the kettle off--it was boiling-- before putting it on the side, grabbed a nearby book, walked back over, and sat back down. " This book contains information my father wrote about the Gibdo before he changed into one of them. Each one supposedly desired an item that could be found down there in the very underground they thrived in."

That proved to be a worthwhile piece of information. Granted, Soarin had practically told me the same thing though Twilight Sparkle included the part where the items the Gibdo wanted were located down there. I had no idea what they wanted or if they required a certain amount of an item but at least I wouldn't have to leave Ikana for a while and come back with the item in question. It was weird that undead monsters would even desire items considering they were dead and lacked the comprehension of what those items could do, but again it was something I had gotten accustomed to in this world.

I got up and began walking over to the front door. " Thank you for everything though I feel this may not be our final goodbye."

" What do you mean?"

" We might see each other again."

Twilight Sparkle stood up. " Maybe come back here when the undead monsters are gone." She then realized something and quickly ran over to a table on the other side of the room, picking up what looked to be a blue bottle of some kind. " Before you leave, I insist that you take some Blue Potion with you. My father purchased it from a Deku Scrub located near a strange rock formation on the other side of the river though he never did have need of it. Going down the well without a means of recovering your life force is idiotic to say the least so I insist that you take some Blue Potion with you before you go."

" How much do I have to pay you for it?"

Twilight Sparkle shook her head. " Nothing. You saved my father's life and I said that I am indebted to you so you may take some for free. In return, all I ask is that you don't get yourself killed or turned into one of them and haunt this area for eternity."

Nodding, I took out one of my bottles after putting the Gibdo Mask away, and she filled it up with Blue Potion before putting her bottle aside. I felt a little bad knowing that I got some pretty expensive medicine without paying a single rupee yet Twilight Sparkle was pretty insistent on me taking some. While I felt pretty confident about going down the well despite it crawling with who knows how many Gibdo there were, it felt reassuring knowing she had my safety at the forefront of her mind. Granted, I wasn't going there to pick a fight but rather progress since DJ Pon-3 mentioned that the well was my only means of getting into the castle.

Leaving the Music Box House and standing back outside, I noticed that the sun was beginning to rise and that meant the second day was about to commence. Looking around the immediate area, Princess Twilight informed me that she could sense something directly in front of us, and we both agreed it was another Garo lying in wait. That's when my eyes noticed a familiar looking giant owl perched high a top on the castle's wall--no wonder I hadn't been able to see Flash Sentry thus far--but I couldn't get up there until I had gained access to the castle via the hidden entrance down below.

That's when Princess Twilight sensed another evil presence, two of them in fact, though she couldn't tell if they were Garo, some other kind of monster that was giving off a powerful aura, or something else entirely. One of the auras felt so familiar to me, I shuddered to think that it was in fact "her" and that she had somehow managed to will her way back to life after what happened before, yet I had no idea what was causing the other aura. Ikana Canyon was known as the land where the dead roam so perhaps the familiar aura I sensed was indeed hers but she had become a mindless undead monster.

" Sunset..." Princess Twilight began. " Should we deal with the Garo or the other two presences?"

I didn't answer her at first because of who I believed I was sensing, but when she began bopping me on the head, I swatted her off before answering. " I say we take on the Garo and see if it will provide us information like the previous one had done."

" Really? I assumed you wanted to check out the other presences."

" You don't recognize one of them, do you?"

Princess Twilight wracked her brains before shrugging. " I'm afraid not though if I were to take a wild guess, it would have something to do with that horrible winged monster you transformed into when you put on my crown at the time."

I nodded my head. " I don't know why but I keep on sensing Sunset Demon even though she is gone now."

" This isn't the first time?"

I shook my head. " I sensed her back when we were exploring the Deku Palace though I shrugged it off as me being nervous. But, ever since we entered Ikana, it feels like I can sense her presence all around me, especially here by the Music Box House. She died during my previous journey so I assumed I wouldn't have to worry about her ever again, but since the dead do roam around here, perhaps she too has revived."

" You don't have to be afraid of what you once were." Twilight said. " That part of your life has been dead and buried, no pun intended, and you have done so much good since then that the demon has no power when it comes to the kind of person you wish to be. If Sunset Demon--really weird name if you ask me--has been brought back to life, she is probably a mindless monster."

" Funny... I was thinking the same thing."

" If she were to appear, I have no doubt that you can take care of her."

" And the other presence?"

Princess Twilight wracked her brains again. " Hmmm... I suppose the other one could belong to whatever it was that the other Twilight became, but what are the chances of that actually happening?" She then noticed I was glaring at her and she gulped before whistling. " Of course, I could be wrong but I don't see much in the way of evidence to support it. Maybe the other presence isn't anything important while the first one is in fact Sunset Demon."

I continued glaring at her. " What if it's Midnight Sparkle? What if she came back to life to acquire Equestrian Magic?"

" Midnight Sparkle!? Seriously!? She named herself that!?"

" I'm serious, Twilight!"

" Relax, Sunset..." Twilight began. " Remember that there is no Equestrian Magic here in this world as it has been suppressed so even if Midnight Sparkle were around, she can't claim any magic as there is none for her to take, and she would be nothing more than a mere shell of whatever she used to be. Sunset Demon is in the same boat. She doesn't have the same powers she once had so she can't do all that much other than perhaps the most basic of incantations and even then it wouldn't really be all that much."

" What about our friends displaying their Elements of Harmony?"

" That is an easy one." Twilight answered. " Their magic is trying to breach this world but can't so it's manifesting in small doses that ultimately won't mean all that much. The two demons would only be wasting their time."

Despite Her Highness testing my stress with how calm she was acting, I had to admit that her answers were pretty solid ones. It was true that the Elements of Harmony along with any other forms of Equestrian Magic--including the fire magic I had used during my previous journey--had been blocked by whatever diving power Termina was using. If Sunset Demon were alive once again and was working together with Midnight Sparkle, the worst they could do was probably analyze the magic our friends were displaying, yet the latter could try and gather the magic together though it would do nothing... I hoped.

Every time I thought about Sunset Demon, my own inner demons would come back to haunt me, and yet it was by my own hands that such demons existed. I believed I wasn't wrong about my own path in life, believed I was destined for great things, and instead I was destined to become a monster who wanted to rule the world. Most of my past had been resolved but a couple of issues did linger in the form of me going back home to face the teacher that I had betrayed. If I could reconcile with Princess Celestia--or at least see her for even a few moments, that would be more than enough.

Dawn of the Second Day - 48 Hours Remain.

As the Cucco crowed to signal the start of the second day, it didn't really change all that much in terms of Ikana's overall demeanor. I guessed a barren wasteland would look the same no matter what time of day it was since there was no life at all other than those who wanted to be here for their own reasons. Princess Twilight reassured me that I shouldn't be afraid of Sunset Demon because she represented my past and that it had been resolved. She said I shouldn't continue allowing my past to torment me--she was one to talk considering she didn't have problems like I had--but it wasn't easy.

Perhaps if I were to confront the she demon face-to-face and tell it to her straight that I wasn't going to allow her--our--past transgressions to continue plaguing me, she would finally get the hint and leave me alone, becoming a faded memory of a time where I was a monster--her. Of course, she was going to continue with her tirade of wanting to become the true me, and had no intention of giving up as it was the only reason she continued to exist. Sunset Demon was one problem eclipsed by Ganondorf as his means were much more effective when it came to how I felt about my past.

For now, I planned on continuing with this journey, and if Sunset Demon were to appear before me, I would overcome her. Sure, saying it was much easier than actually doing it but I couldn't allow the problem to persist. Ganondorf... That was a problem of epic proportions that wasn't going to be ending any time soon. He would continue to torment me so that I would cave in and become his servant all because I once tasted power. I had been wondering why he wanted me considering other ponies were far more powerful. Was it because he thought it easy to control me?

I needed to step up if I were to overcome him and change everything back to normal. Granted, that would prove extremely difficult since he could manipulate anything what with his divine power being greater than anything I had ever seen in my entire life, but I had no other choice but to meet his expectations even if it meant suffering in the process. At that moment, Princess Twilight began bopping me on the head to remind me that once again my mind had wandered off and I apologized though she understood as she knew I had a lot I needed to deal with on my mind.

Taking out the Garo's Mask and putting it on my face, I walked forward only for a Garo to appear from below the ground. Fortunately, this wasn't my first encounter with one so I knew what was about to happen next. " Master, you called?" Because my mask resembled the face of their leader, each Garo would assume I was him and quickly discover I was false and retaliate by fighting me. Drawing my sword and shield, the Garo did the same thing though he would respond by saying " What are you?" To be frank, they could just avoid all the talking and get straight to the battle since they obviously knew I wasn't their leader but I digressed.

" Are you up for this?" Twilight asked.

I nodded. " Sorry for daydreaming again."

" It's what you do whenever you're worried about something." Twilight said. " I'd be doing the exact same thing if I were in your shoes, Sunset. Don't let that demon form define who you want to become! Only you can decide what you wish to be in the future when you have gotten everything sorted out."

Her Highness' words were an inspiration--though somewhat jumbled--and with such renewed vigor, I attacked the Garo by performing a jump attack before it had the chance to make any sort of counterattack. It got pushed back as a result of my blow though it quickly responded by spinning around in circles using the flamed tips of its blades to knock me down onto my butt, my body covered in flames due to those swords. It then danced about in the air before performing its own jump attack that I avoided by rolling to the side and when I got back up, the Garo was looking left and right as though trying to find out where I was.

Running forward and striking the Garo again, it jumped back and then into the air where it began dancing about before coming towards me again. I took out my shield, raised it, and watched as its blades collided with its metallic sheen, forcing the Garo back. It dove at me again, catching my surprise as I wasn't expecting it to do that again, and I landed on my butt while it went back to the air and danced about. I got back onto my feet and avoided the Garo when it came at me yet again--it certainly had a one-track mind--striking it when it was busy looking around for me.

That latest hit proved to be enough as it jumped into the air, landed hard on the ground, and dropped both swords before raising its arm. " R-regrettable. Although my rival, you were spectacular having seen through my maneuvers."

" You didn't have to fight."

The Garo scoffed. " It is within the nature of the Garo to fight as we carry secret information."

I nodded. " Yes. One of your own said something similar to that effect."

" Ah, so you are familiar with how we function?"

I nodded. " Yes though I don't appreciate your methods."

The Garo scoffed again. " Our ways are our own and what you say will not change things. However, I acknowledge that you defeated me and as such, I shall take my bow by opening my heart and revealing my wisdom to you. I shall only say this once so pay close attention to my words. A hole can be opened in the ceiling of a particular room in Ikana Castle. But it cannot be broken without an explosive with incredible might."

Before I had a chance to ask what the Garo meant, it burned away to nothing leaving me with more questions than answers. I knew that it had referred to the Powder Keg since it was an explosive that was more powerful than any bomb yet where was this hole in the castle? It didn't provide me with the specifics so it mean having to go and figure it out on my own much to my displeasure. Still, I had gained some valuable information proving that fighting against the Garo was a lucrative one. I had stalled for long enough so I began heading off towards the well that Twilight Sparkle visited earlier unaware that I was being watched.

" Well that was certainly entertaining." Sunset Demon said as she stood on top of the Music Box House. " I didn't think she had what it took to defeat a skilled assassin but I guess she has gotten much better since the last time she and I went toe-to-toe." She began snapping her fingers to the sounds coming from the horns on top of the house and even danced slightly before focusing on what was deemed important. " Who would have guessed that this music would be so catchy and I usually don't enjoy such stuff. I intend on sticking around here for a while longer until I have it memorized."

Midnight Sparkle responded in a quiet manner. " How... how did she..."

Sunset Demon laughed. " What I really find amazing is that Princess Twilight figured out what you've been doing all this time without even realizing it. Guess that's why she's a princess because she is expected to know all of the answers. I am annoyed she thinks I'm a mindless monster but I'll let it slide since she really did an amazing job of making fun of your name." She noticed her companion wasn't responding to her jabs in her usual manner and came to the conclusion that Midnight Sparkle had been insulted. " Wow... You've gone about acting like you're all calm and collected when in truth you lose your cool on the drop of a dime."

" She couldn't have..."

" Despite the fact that she caused me to lose everything the first time, Princess Twilight did me a favour by clueing me in onto what you've been planning."

" My plan... It was perfect."

" You wanted to collect samples of the magic my other self's friends possessed and use them for your own benefit." Sunset Demon said. " I should have realized your brilliant plan was flawed from the start all because you didn't take this world's power into account. I'm betting that Sunset also figured out that your plan was stupid. Looks to me that perhaps you don't understand as well as you thought. After everything you forced me to put up with, it feels like good karma has struck you down and put you back in your place."

Midnight Sparkle turned around in sheer anger. " Shut up!"

Sunset Demon's eyes glowed. " While you may have brought me back from death, remember that my power still exceeds yours despite the restrictions placed on us. I can still kill you where you stand so you should remember to remain in my good graces."

" Your idle threats mean nothing to me!"

" Oh so you do have courage after all."

Midnight Sparkle slammed her fist onto the roof of the Music Box House. " How did that accursed alicorn figure out my intentions!? All she did was assumed what I was going to do and it ended up being exactly right. If Sunset Shimmer has come to a similar conclusion, my efforts have become utterly pointless."

" And what do you plan on doing to change your fortune?"

" I always have something brewing in my mind unlike you."

Sunset Demon's eyes glowed again. " Watch your tongue."

Midnight Sparkle brushed away the threat. " I can still turn things around and ensure my plan succeeds. Fortunately, Princess Twilight and Sunset were to able to make my other self use her own Element even if it was pitiful compared to what I am capable of. That means I now have all six Elements of Harmony recorded in my device. Now we can proceed onto the next step which is will fulfill our desires."

" More like your own am I right?"

" I will get the Equestrian Magic I crave and you will become the real Sunset." Midnight Sparkle answered. " All we need to do now is acquire the final two samples and we can make some magic work."

Sunset Demon looked skeptical. " I doubt that your plan will succeed since it's pretty obvious that you have been neglecting some slight details but I'll humour you in saying that you might be able to pull it off. Of course, should this idea involve betraying me in any way, your life become forfeit. Whether you choose to ignore this or not is something I don't really care about but consider my words to be the only warning I intend to give. If you thought Sunset and her friends are a problem, know that I am ten times worse than anything they could dish out against you."

" I have noted your threat in my notes."

" It's not so much a threat as it is a reality I will use."

Midnight Sparkle gulped. " Why do you insist on using threats just to get me to conform to what you want? I brought you back from death and have helped you reign in the more troublesome parts of your personality that resulted in Sunset beating you. So, why take on this tough guy talk just to force me to bend to your will? I'm a fellow demon and deserve a similar respect that I have afforded you." The she demon laughed in response prompting Midnight Sparkle to pick up a loose tile on the Music Box House before tossing it at Sunset Demon who didn't appreciate the unwarranted gesture against her. " You made me throw that at you, you know."

Sunset Demon nodded. " This is true but you should know this. I was willing to give you a chance because of what you did for me, but when you began acting in a manner that I felt was a threat to my own salvation, I had to make sure that my investment wouldn't be put at risk. By acting on your own and keeping certain secrets from me, I felt compelled to give you ample warning about what can happen when someone lies to me." She quickly jumped up, leapt over to Midnight Sparkle, grabbed her by the neck, and began choking her. " I won't tolerate being manipulated... even by the likes of you."

" Gah! You're choking me!"

" Like I said, this is the only warning I intend to give."

" Alright! I won't hide anything anymore!"

Sunset Demon laughed. " You're much too late for that. Even now you continue to hide things from me, but then, that's just the kind of person I've come to expect during our wonderful time together. I will accept some things you wish to keep secret for personal reasons but not the rest." She released her grip on Midnight Sparkle, who landed on her butt before looking up and seeing the she demon right in her face. " I will continue helping you out with your plan since seeing you like this is oh so amusing, but the moment you do anything that I feel is threatening to me, you are dead! That's it! No second chances! No begging for mercy!"

Midnight Sparkle grabbed her own neck to make sure nothing was badly injured. " Sheeh! You don't have to keep on doing that. Believe me when I say that things are going to turn out well for both of us and it all has to do with our current location."

" What do you mean?"

" Unlike the other areas of this world, this one in particular gives off a much stronger force." Midnight Sparkle answered. " By combing the samples from the Elements of Magic combined with what I intend to get from Sunset and Princess Twilight along with the power that radiates all around us, we can regain our true power back and use it to make our dreams a reality as I mentioned before. All we must do is acquire the remaining samples by defeating them."

Sunset Demon laughed. " Seriously? Defeat them? You really are delusional."

" This is your only chance you know."

" While that is correct, I am not about to give up my newly found freedom."

Midnight Sparkle taunted her companion. " Perhaps you're not as confident as you claim to be. Sunset doesn't have access to the power that she used on you before so it's practically an even playing field. Besides, we have the power of the undead on our side in that we can continue to come back so long as those doors of the temple remain open." She took to the sky, unfurled her wings, and laughed. " Come, we must make our way to the temple and await their arrival."

" Why not attack now?"

" The closer we are to the temple, the stronger we become."

" And how do you figure that?"

" When the doors to the temple opened, they unleashed a powerful force that caused the dead to come back to life after so many centuries, and that also included us. That very force also grants those who have been revived by it great power but also makes them weak to light-based attacks." Midnight Sparkle answered.

Sunset Demon rubbed the bridge of her nose before moaning. " And you didn't think that such a weakness would be a problem? We're both demons and embrace the darkness and because of that, we're weak against the light to the point where it's literally the bane of our existence. Not even the purest darkness can stand up to the light though it will try its best to fight back even in a losing cause." Walking over and jumping down, the she-demon turned and looked inside to see Twilight Sparkle serving Soarin some tea and a brief smile appeared on her face though it quickly disappeared. " Okay, we'll go to this temple you speak of."

Midnight Sparkle was ecstatic. " I knew you'd come around!"

" But, we will attack the moment they enter."

" That goes without saying."

" You seem pretty eager about all of this don't you?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " Our desires are going to become a reality and you're not excited about it? I find that strange since you appear to be the kind of person who would do anything to get what she wanted no matter what personal costs are involved."

Sunset Demon turned away from her companion. " Let's just say... You've been a bigger influence on me than I thought."

" See? I told you that I was good to have around."

" Don't push it."

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " Fair enough. By the way, Sunset Demon... You've also been an influence on me and while I didn't appreciate you lashing out against me all because I wasn't being honest with you, I have learned a great deal and will cherish such knowledge in the future. Now, we must get to that temple before Sunset does, and I hope you're ready for a big climb as our wings might not be enough to get us up there."

As Midnight Sparkle took to the sky laughing over how everything was going to fall into place, Sunset Demon had much different thoughts that occurred to her when her companion brought up that bit about how she had learned from her. The she-demon could tell that Midnight Sparkle was going to ultimately stab her in the back and gain everything whilst leaving her to rot away somewhere. In her mind, her usefulness was a means to an end for her companion to rely on. Once that usefulness was over, Sunset Demon was sure to be killed so now she had an additional enemy alongside Sunset.

She also couldn't get that image of Twilight Sparkle serving tea to Soarin out of her mind. Why did she smile so happily upon seeing a display that would have caused her to want to throw up since it went against her nature? Ever since returning from the dead, she had initially started out as wanting revenge and fulfilling her desire, but her mind had been slowly changing, reflecting upon coming to an understand that had eluded her for so long. It seemed Sunset Demon was something of an enigma that even she couldn't figure out why but perhaps an answer would eventually be revealed.

By the time I reached the entrance to the well, I felt exhausted along with being curious about other areas of Ikana Village that I had yet to see. The first of these was a curious building situated above where I had gone and brought water to the Music Box House. According to the sign that was outside, it was a place where spirits who had lingering regrets were waiting for someone to come and heal their souls. I thought it was unusual having a place like that around but I supposed it made whoever ran it quite a small fortune since the undead roamed around Ikana Village without restraint.

After thinking over for a while, I decided to pass up on the opportunity, and focus on making my way over to the well. What turned me away was a small fine print that had been carefully hidden behind the sign so as to prevent anyone from seeing it. It said "Limited time to help spirits heal their souls. Also, no guarantee that you will live to reap the rewards so a mercy plea can be used to save yourself from death. Caution: Mercy plea doesn't always work" It was quite a tall order for simply healing the undead but I supposed it required someone with extreme dedication and a love of dealing with the undead.

On the opposite side of this building was the castle that I needed to access in order to talk to the king who once ruled over Ikana, but it was a small entrance to the left that aroused my curiosity because it looked so suspicious. I had yet to find where the Great Fairy's Fountain was though that entrance could be where I needed to go though it wouldn't do me much good since Adagio had been shattered to pieces courtesy of Starlight wanting to ensure no one ruined her fun. To the left again was one final entrance and a powerful aura of darkness could be felt coming from it. No doubt that was where I had to ultimately go once I had finished with the king.

Before I had reached the well, Princess Twilight had felt the presence of another Garo nearby. My mask caused it to appear before me when I got closer--I hadn't taken it off since leaving the vicinity of the Music Box House--and once again I was forced to fight against an opponent who was a skilled assassin. Much like the previous two Garo, this one utilized the same fighting abilities so it was a matter of avoiding its flaming swords and striking when it had dropped its guard--not an easy task when it moved about constantly. Fortunately--more like a fluke--I defeated the Garo forcing it to reveal some important information.

What it said had to do with what was waiting for me in the underground tunnels below the well. I mean, I knew what to expect down there since both Soarin and Twilight Sparkle had told me that Gibdos, once adventurers like myself but were now undead monsters forced to remain down there in an eternal torment, were waiting for someone to come along and provide various items. The Garo said: "As the Gibdos in Ikana's well have regrets and long to savor items from this world, they continue to wander about." I thought it odd until the Garo mentioned something else. "Most of that which the Gibdos regret can be found inside the well itself."

I didn't like the way it said that most of what they wanted were down there. That meant one or two items would require me to leave the area and come back when I had acquired them thus wasting some precious time. Another problem was that the Garo didn't specify what might not be available, leaving the decision of whether or not to leave down to chance. I definitely didn't like that approach yet I didn't have much of a choice if I were to progress through and acquire the shield that was supposedly down there. I needed a new one since my current one was the verge of breaking due to how many hits it had taken.

Climbing down into the well, I became completely surrounded by the darkness with the only direction I could go was forward. The pathway went along for a short distance before opening up into a fairly large room that branched off to the right. In front of me was a Gibdo who didn't attack me at first but on a second glance it looked to be watching me as though it were waiting for me to approach with something. Its incessant moaning made Princess Twilight feel incredibly uneasy though I felt the same since this was practically a monster-ridden maze--and one that I was wasn't just filled with Gibdo.

Princess Twilight gulped. " It's... it's just staring at us."

" They do have that creepy factor." I said.

" Remember to have the Gibdo Mask on at all times so that they continue to think you're one of them."

I took off the Garo's Mask--it was now useless down here--and switched it out for the Gibdo Mask. " I do feel a little weird about wearing this since it used to be Soarin's cursed form before the Song of Healing cured him, but I suppose there's no point in complaining especially with where we are right now." Placing the mask on my face, nothing unusual happened at first until my ears began hearing the gibberish coming from the Gibdo. " I can barely make out what it's saying."

" What does it say?"

I listened closely. " It keeps saying... come."

Princess Twilight gulped again. " It wants you to speak to it."

I nodded. " Yeah, and I shouldn't keep it waiting if I know what's good for me."

Walking forward, the Gibdo continued watching my every move until I was standing right in front of it. I had never seen one up close before though judging from what I was seeing, it was an experience I didn't want to have to go through again. The bandages hung loosely from its body and the mouth had jagged teeth that were rotting all over. Definitely an unpleasant sight in addition to the putrid stench that came from its very presence. Even though I wanted to destroy it because of what it was, I knew doing so would get me nowhere since there was a locked door behind it and I suspected it would only open when I had given it what it desired.

Its piercing gaze hadn't paralyzed me so at the very least I knew the Gibdo Mask was protecting me from their worst power. Still, I didn't like being so close to one of these monsters because it could drain my life force without a moment's hesitation. What I found refreshing was the fact that it couldn't tell I wasn't one of its own all because of a simple looking mask bearing a striking resemblance. So long as I didn't attack it or remove my mask, getting through here would be simple provided that the items each Gibdo wanted wasn't anything complicated.

The Gibdo began speaking. " Sooooooo... Another has become one of us."

" Who or what are you?"

" Looooooong ago... Adventurerrrrrrrr... I was once an adventurer who sought treasure and came down here to find it." The Gibdo answered. " I found no such thing but was cursed instead to remain here in a perpetual limbo until a chosen comes. Yooooooou... You are one of us now and shall be trapped down here for all eternity until we are freed."

" Freed?"

The Gibdo slowly nodded. " Traaaaaaaapped... Traaaaaaaapped... We are all trapped here, forced to endure the lingering regrets we held in life. You too, shall have your own regrets that will serve as the one desire you seek. Until you have been given that one desire, you shall remain here."

" What if I can give you what you want?"

" Yooooooou... If you were to do so then we all would move on to the next life."

" Then I'll do it."

The Gibdo looked skeptical. " For one so small, you possess much determination but can you do what others have attempted before you? I was the latest to join when I could not succeed in satisfying their regrets and you shall suffer the same fate."

I could tell that it was trying to psyche me out but I had to remain strong if I was planning on getting through this maze in one piece. The only drawback I could see apart from maybe having to leave to acquire something from beyond Ikana was having no map to show me where I was going. I would have to use something to serve as a marker in case I found myself going backwards when I should be going forwards. Unfortunately, using a rock--my first choice--to scribble an arrow on the wall proved pointless due to how dark everything was, but perhaps I could use something a little more unique in concept.

" Your fate won't be mine." I said. " Now, what do you desire."

The Gibdo screamed. " Leeeeave it! Leeeeave it! Leeeeave me something delicious to chomp on. Something that sprouts when it's watered. Preferably five of them... If you give me this then you may proceed past."

I exclaimed. " What!? What are you even talking about?"

" Do you have what I linger?"

I shook my head. " Well, no, but I--"

The Gibdo moaned. " If you don't have it, I have no need for you! Awayyy!"

Crap! I wasn't off to a good start considering that I didn't have the item that this Gibdo wanted. How could I have known? It spoke using cryptic words for crying out loud! In any case, this was one direction that was denied to me for the time being until I came back with something that sprouted. At that precise moment, I slapped my forehead as I had just figured out what it meant and I couldn't believe how simple it was. Magic Beans sprouted whenever they were watered after being planted but the problem was that I had none with me and to get some would require leaving Ikana and making my way over to Woodfall.

Perhaps I should have prepared more accordingly rather than attempting to just wing my way through. The Garo did say that most of the items I would need could be found down here but some clearly weren't like Magic Beans. Unless there was a Deku Scrub selling them somewhere close by, I needed to take a different path through the maze. I hoped that I had not blocked myself from going the right direction otherwise I could be down here for a while. Looking to my right, another Gibdo stood before a door blocked with iron bars so perhaps it would let me pass were I to give it what it wanted.

Princess Twilight tapped me on the shoulder and I looked down at her. " Magic Beans... I'm sure you already figured it out, right, Sunset?"

I nodded. " I can't believe I didn't bring any with me."

" You didn't know the Gibdo wanted five of them in order to open the door." Twilight said. " I consider this to be a minor setback that can easily be rectified if you were to give that one over there what it desires. By the way, have you figured out how we are going to make our way around here without getting ourselves lost? I believe there is no map for this maze so unless running around in circles is your idea of fun, I hope you've got a plan."

I nodded. " I was thinking of using a rock at first to mark an arrow on the wall, but because of how dark it is down here, I doubt I'd be able to see anything unless I could use one of those torches to light my path."

" Those torches are fixtures so they can't be removed."

" Figures."

" So what did you figure out?"

" Why not use the bandages of the Gibdo?"

Princess Twilight gagged. " Are you serious, Sunset? I personally wouldn't want to touch those bandages since you don't know where these things have been. Besides, if you were to touch them with your hands, it could result in you being cursed and ending up like Soarin did."

" I hadn't thought of that."

" The bandage thing is a good idea but you would need to find a way to get some without touching it."

My sword would be ideal despite the short range it had though the Gibdos would get annoyed relatively quickly upon noticing what I was doing. Unless they were to leave behind a piece of their bandages, I would either have to be sneaky enough for them to not notice or use something else as a marker. I walked up to the next Gibdo--it had the same non-existent expression the other one had--and it tilted its head to notice my presence. Again, I had the urge to use my sword to cut it down but my mind convinced me not to do so and wait to see what it wanted.

" You... You could not help our brotherrrrrrrr..." The Gibdo said with a moan.

I shook my head. " I couldn't resolve his lingering."

" Theeeeeeen... What could you possibly do to help me?"

" I'm sure I can do something."

The Gibdo attempted what sounded like a laugh only for it to be a wheezing cough. " Verrrrrrrry well... I shall give you a chance but should you fail... If you cannot give me that which leaves me to linger over it, I shall take your soul instead." I thought the Gibdo was trying to intimidate me but then it reaffirmed its threat by saying that it could take my soul instead of simply draining my lifeforce. " Fail and the next who comes here can heal your lingering doubts."

" What do you need?"

" Leeeeave it! Leeeeave it!" The Gibdo answered. " Leeeeave me something blue that bestows health!"

My eyes opened wide from behind my mask! I had a Blue Potion on my person thanks to Twilight Sparkle giving it to me before I left the Music Box House. Had she known that I would need the Blue Potion in order to progress or was it an unintentional coincidence? Either way, this was an item I had on hand and wouldn't have to leave Ikana in order to find it--not that I even knew where to begin looking so Twilight Sparkle had done me an excellent favour. Unfortunately, it meant finding something to use as a means of healing since the Gibdo was likely to take the potion and not leave any behind for me.

Reaching into my pocket, I took out the Blue Potion and presented it to the Gibdo. " You can have the contents of the bottle but not the bottle itself. Oh, and do not get those disgusting lips of yours all over it otherwise you and me are going to have problems."

The Gibdo grabbed my bottle and the liquid inside suddenly drained away until the bottle was empty. How in the world did it just do that? I wasn't about to begin asking since I doubted it would be anything but a simple explanation but at least it didn't do anything bad. " Ah! Thissss! Thissss! I bear you no remorse! You may continue on but it will not be an easy journey ahead for you." Upon returning my bottle, the Gibdo burned away to nothing and was followed by the door opening up to the next part of the maze.

" Now that was convenient." Twilight said.

" I'll say..."

" Twilight Sparkle just gave us a way forward though I wish we had some Magic Beans."

I sighed. " I have this feeling that there was something behind the other door that would help us with another Gibdo elsewhere down here."

Princess Twilight nodded. " No point in dwelling over it now, Sunset. We just have to hope that we don't end up getting stumped later on." Her Highness took a closer look at where the Gibdo once stood and shook her head. " Unfortunately, nothing is left of the Gibdo." She floated back over to me. " We need something else to use as a marker if we're to remember this area in case we do find some Magic Beans down here."

One idea then came to mind though a part of me felt like I would be disrespecting those who had been watching over it for a long time. Drawing out the Kokiri Sword from its scabbard and holding it in both hands, I began carving a marker into the wall of the maze. It wasn't easy since I couldn't see all that much nor was I sure what it would look like, but when I had finished several minutes later, Princess Twilight gave me a thumb's up. It consisted of a single slash that was cut deep into the wall though a cute looking curve was on the end to make it easy for me to know I had done it--other marks lined the walls so I didn't want to confuse myself.

Satisfied that my marker would work--I did long for the Gibdo bandage approach so as to be more unique--I walked forward, opened the door, and entered the next section of the maze where the sounds of Gibdo could be heard close by. There were additional sounds coming from a nook to the left and comprising of Deku Babas along with another noise that sounded a lot like flapping. I recognized the sound as belonging to a Keese yet I had no idea what kind it was. I didn't even get a chance to see what it was when something suddenly hit me from the left, freezing both myself and Princess Twilight in a block of ice.

Chapter 55: Shimmer the Demon

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
May 8, 2017
Chapter 55: Shimmer the Demon.

I should have known that I would be frozen into a block of ice by an Ice Keese! The blue haze that surrounded it was the tell-tale sign that it possessed the power to freeze whatever prey is unfortunate enough to get hit by it, yet it doesn't lose that power and can continue to freeze its victims until they froze to death. Why in Equestria was it even down here to begin with given the underground maze wasn't a cold wasteland? I was beginning to think this video game world didn't even care about such things and just wanted to throw whatever at me to prevent me from reaching my final goal.

Fortunately, the air around me wasn't cold so it didn't take long for me to break free of the ice, though I did shiver as I wasn't a fan of the cold. Princess Twilight shivered and chose to fly under my hat so that she could regain her body temperature--I wished I could have done something similar--leaving me to simply shrug it off like I had done with most incidents that had involved being affected by elemental conditions. The Ice Keese flew away though I wasn't going to let it have another chance at freezing us so taking out the Hero's Bow, I aimed upwards at it only to put my bow away and simply raise my shield instead.

Sure, my skills at shooting far away targets with the bow had gotten better, but I still had problems hitting small targets. Knowing that the Ice Keese was bound to want to come back and attack again, I figured that my shield could deflect its icy powers. It did involve having to get closer so that it would be convinced to come down and attack but I had enough health to survive being stuck in a block of ice a couple of times. Moving forward--not too much because of the Gibdo--with my shield up and my sword ready, the Ice Keese turned and swooped down towards me, its body colliding with the metallic surface of my shield, causing no effect.

Before it could fly away, I struck it down with one blow before stepping back to where I was before I had gotten frozen. Turning to my left and seeing the Deku Babas from earlier, the Ice Keese had come from that little nook so perhaps it had been guarding something? Then again, it could have been placed down here as an annoyance since most wouldn't know how to deal with it. A thought then crossed my mind. The first Gibdo I encountered wanted Magic Beans, a somewhat common item, so maybe one of the ones at the end of this part of the maze wanted something similar?

The Deku Babas in the little nook usually dropped either Deku Nuts or Deku Sticks depending on how they were defeated. They really had no other reason for being down here in such a dank place other than to provide me with some items necessary to appease one of the Gibdos. Raising my shield, I walked into the nook and the Deku Babas lunged at me, my shield deflecting some attacks while other attacks couldn't reach me. Swinging my sword around, I cut one down only for it to leave a Deku Stick behind, not what I needed since I could light up anything using Fire Arrows, so I cut down the next one only for it to leave behind a stick as well.

Realizing that waiting for them to lunge at me resulted in cutting them down too soon, I charged forward against the remaining one, and while it did bite my shoulder causing me to wince in pain, I persevered and struck the Deku Baba, pushing it back only for it to lunge at me again. It bit my other shoulder--I winced from this as well--and I struck it in response, cutting it down, and it leaving behind what I had been wanting in the first place, Deku Nuts. Only five nuts were dropped by the Deku Baba so I hoped that was enough to appease a Gibdo otherwise I'd have to look elsewhere.

As I collected each Deku Nut and placed them into my pocket, a chilling wind sound began echoing around the room. I immediately recognized it as a Freezard unleashing its chilly breath and took a defensive position as a reaction so as to avoid getting frozen again. Even though I could hear its chilling breath, I couldn't feel the cold presence the monster usually gave off, making me wonder what was going on. I looked above my shield and was surprised at seeing nothing other than a small pond by my feet. I hadn't imagined hearing that breath so what could have been the reason?

The sound echoed again and I pressed my back against the wall only to tilt my body slightly and press my ear up against the wall. My ear quickly went numb and I pulled back and concluded that the Freezard was on the other side. Had I given that initial Gibdo the Magic Beans it wanted, I would be on that side right now having to deal with the Freezard instead of the Ice Keese, so I had dodged a bullet by taking a different route. However, I still slapped my forehead due to panicking over something that wasn't even in my general area and nearly giving myself a heart attack.

I then tapped my hat. " Twilight... You can come out now." Her Highness was still hiding underneath my hat so that she could warm herself up but I figured she had been under there long enough.

Princess Twilight responded, her voice muffled slightly by my hat. " But... it's so warm under here."

" You can't stay under there forever."

" I just... I just need five more minutes..."

" The Ice Keese is gone now."

Princess Twilight rushed out from under my hat when I said that. " In that case, I feel better already!" I couldn't help but laugh at what she just did though she did get annoyed at my behaviour prompting me to stop. " I took a safety precaution as being frozen on the spot isn't my idea of fun by any means."

A thought then occurred to me... again. " I thought you said fairies were immune to most environments. That would include being frozen you know."

" Fairies can withstand cold climates yet being frozen in a block of ice is something completely different." Twilight said. I could tell she was being defensive about it since I had dared to question the nature of fairies but I chose to drop it since it wasn't really all that important in the overall grand scheme of things. " Anyway, I'm glad that you took care of that monster so now we don't have to worry about getting cold any time soon. I am curious as to why you came into this nook, Sunset, since there wasn't anything of worth in here apart from those Deku Babas."

" I took care of them while you were in hiding."

" Why would you want to kill monsters that weren't in your path?"

I showed Princess Twilight the Deku Nuts I acquired. " I figured I would need some of these in order to appease one of the Gibdos lying in wait. You know, I came to the conclusion that the kinds of items we need are simple things like Deku Nuts, Bombs, and so on. Why else would they be down here in such a dreary place if they served no purpose other than be providers. That Garo did say most of what we require to progress could be found down here..." My mind suddenly trailed off as I stared at the small pond of water by my feet, and it gave me an idea when I saw a small fish was swimming about in it.

Taking out two empty bottles and dropping to my knees, I scooped up the fish with the first bottle, and some water with the other before corking them both. Despite how dank it was down here, the water looked fresh--it had to be since that fish was clearly surviving--as though it had come from the mountains or perhaps the swamp. Princess Twilight was skeptical yet I assured her that it was a good idea as the Gibdo wanted common items and water was pretty common. I did actually considering drinking some of the water but ultimately chose not to as the current atmosphere made it rather unpleasant.

Once I had placed my bottles behind my back where they subsequently disappeared, I walked out of the small nook and turned left, but not before hearing another familiar sound, this time coming from above. I looked down and saw that my shadow had changed to one with clawed fingers, prompting me to turn around and head back just as a larger object landed behind me and began walking around using its fingers. Before it could do anything, I attacked it with my sword, destroying it before it could return to its ceiling domain, and it left quite a lot of valuable rupees behind that I gladly picked up--I needed 500 rupees for that one mask.

Princess Twilight reminded me that what had just attacked was a Wallmaster, a creature that dropped down from the ceiling to attack any prey that wandered into its territory, and had it caught me with those fingers, I would have been dragged back to the beginning of the current area. Since we hadn't made it that far into the maze, being caught by the Wallmaster wouldn't have been much of an issue, but getting caught further on would mean having to backtrack through this place, something I'd rather not do. The rupees it left behind were all red and there were five of them altogether giving me one hundred rupees.

Walking forward, the path split in two directions, one to the left and the other straight ahead, both ended with locked doors guarded by Gibdos. I decided to continue going straight as the other direction hadn't been very kind so far. Putting my equipment away--I didn't want to give off the impression that I was a threat--I approached the Gibdo and it looked down at me with glowing undead eyes. " Yoooooooou... You have reached the next barrier but do not struggle to change your fate."

" I won't be trapped down here like the rest of you."

The Gibdo murmured. " Thooooooose who come down here can never escape!"

" One person did." I said, making an indirect reference to Soarin.

" That onnnnnnnne... That one shall become one of us and forever wander this place with regret lingering in his heart." The Gibdo said. " You have regret inside of you and it shall make you stay here forever like all of us."

While it was true that I had a lot of regrets stemming from my past actions, I wasn't about to let them dictate me especially when I needed to remain strong so that I could save this world, the world I called home, and Equestria. " I may be one of you but that doesn't mean I must spend eternity trapped down here waiting for someone to come along and help me overcome my regrets. Sure, I've got several of them weighing me down, yet I won't let them become an issue for me." I made sure to remind the Gibdo that I was one of its kind despite merely wearing a mask that made it think I was one.

The Gibdo laughed though it was more like a stifled cough. " It issssssss rare that one of us would attempt to defy their fate by choosing to appease the rest, but perhapsssssss you might be able to succeed where the others could not."

" You mean, I'm not the first one?"

The Gibdo shook its head. " Otherssssssssss... Others before you of our kind attempted to defy fate but they failed and were condemned to suffer eternal torment that even now continues to this very day. If you think you can change fate then let us see."

" What do you need?"

" Leeeeave it! Leeeeave it!" The Gibdo answered. " Leeeeave me something that makes a blinding flash! Preferably five of them." The only thing that came to mind was what I had just acquired a short time ago... Deku Nuts. Fortunately, this Gibdo wanted exactly five of them--that was all I got from the Deku Babas--so I reached into my pocket, took them out, and dropped them into its outstretched hand where it looked like it was thanking me for the gift. " Ah! Thissssss! Thissssss! I bear you no remorssssssse!" The Gibdo then burned away to nothing and the door behind it unlocked upon the iron bars raising upwards.

I turned towards Princess Twilight, a smug look spread across my face. " I told you those Deku Nuts would be useful."

Princess Twilight sighed and nodded. " Yes... I suppose you did do the right thing after all, Sunset. One does have to wonder what else these Gibdo want that can be found down here in these depths." Her Highness then shuddered. " Just thinking about some of the more heinous things makes my skin crawl. Don't forget the real reason we're down here and that's to make our way to the castle via the secret entrance DJ Pon-3 mentioned."

" I also want to get my hands on that shield."

" I suspect that the shield may be the key to gaining access to the castle from below."

" What makes you think that?"

" A princess' intuition."

I rolled my eyes. " Seriously?"

Princess Twilight giggled. " Far be it from me to not want to have a little bit of fun every now and then but I am serious about the shield being the key. Besides, your shield has seen better days and looks like it's about to fall apart at any moment."

Slinging my shield off my back and looking at it, Her Highness wasn't kidding about its condition. " All because I used it to deflect against attacks from that Iron Knuckle along with all the other monsters that tried breaking it. Still, I wouldn't be here if not for this thing protecting me from the harshest of blows." I slung it onto my back and opened the door to the next section of the maze. " If we do end up finding this shield, what should I do with my current one?"

" Throw it away."

" How blunt of you."

" As much as I would like for you to keep your current shield out of a sense of nostalgia, I'd say it has one or two more hits left in it before it's finished." Twilight answered. " This region is without a doubt the most difficult one of all and that requires superior protection rather than something that could give out at any moment. Of course, you need to first find the shield otherwise you might not survive."

It pained me to know that I was up against powerful forces but then it did remind me of how video game progression worked. Sure, I rarely played them since I was often focused on sending Friendship Reports and other messages to Princess Twilight through my magic journal, but I did watch Rainbow Dash play them whenever she invited us over for a sleepover or brought her console to a different one. She always said that games got more difficult the closer you were to the end and that meant making sure you had everything you needed to ensure success. Anything less than that was a game over.

Since this was the final region, the difficulty had increased and my survival depended on it. Case in point was that Iron Knuckle I had to defeat to claim the Song of Storms so that I could heal DJ Pon-3's soul and get down here. The Iron Knuckle was definitely a step up from previous powerful monsters--including the ones in the temples--and I feared what was awaiting me in the fourth temple, wherever that was in Ikana. A new shield would give me ideal protection and hopefully wouldn't break on me but perhaps it would also feature a special power that made it stand out from my current one.

The next part of the maze looked simple though I could see a burst of flame shooting out from what looked like a panel. Something must have been in the little nook the flame was shooting from as why else would it be there? Flying about ahead of me was a Fire Keese and this one was easy to deal with since it loses its power whenever it collided with anything unlike its frozen cousin. I didn't want to lose my shield before finding the one down here so I'd have to take a hit so that the Fire Keese would become a regular Keese. Sometimes, you had to take small sacrifices like that for the progression of your journey.

" How intriguing." Twilight began. " The flame is shooting out of one of those eye switches."

" Really?" I asked. " I thought they were supposed to activate something when you hit them."

" This one is clearly a trap and needs to be avoided."

" I would like to see what could be in that nook though."

" Unlike before where we were frozen solid for a few moments, the Fire Keese is currently ignoring us." Twilight said. " Also, this trap switch can't change directions and only shoots out flames for a short period of time before it has to stop and wait a bit before continuing. I suggest walking forward and peer into the nook to determine whether it would be beneficial or not."

I followed her advice and took a few steps forward. " So far, this place hasn't been all that terrible aside from the Ice Keese incident in the previous section." Stopping at the entrance to the nook, I turned and looked through to see several plants were growing there though nothing else could be seen. " Hmmm... plants like that usually drop Deku Nuts though they can sometimes drop bugs so maybe I need a bug for one of those Gibdo?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " It's a possibility and one we shouldn't really ignore but what are the chances that one of the Gibdo is looking for a bug? I mean, I think they all want a bug to coincide with how decrepit and ancient they look, but would it be a good idea though? You also have to consider that you only have two more bottles that lack contents and you might need them for something else later. In the end, you're the heroine, Sunset, so it's your decision to make."

I was going to go for it on the premise that one of the Gibdo would need a bug to be appeased. Looking to my left, the Fire Keese was still flying about at the other end of this section where the Gibdo were most likely stationed, so I didn't have to worry about it suddenly swooping down and attacking me. When the eye switched stopped shooting out flames, I took the opportunity to run past it and into the nook, and slashed at the plants. Two dropped Deku Nuts as expected while the third gave me a blue rupee with the last one producing the bugs that immediately began scampering about.

Taking out another empty bottle, I quickly scooped up a bug just as it was about to disappear into cracks in the walls, and corked the bottle before placing it behind my back. I hoped one of the upcoming Gibdo would accept this insect as otherwise I would have wasted some precious time picking up something I didn't need. Then again, I could sell it to Iron Will when I visit his shop on the final night as he looked like he would buy just about anything so that he could sell it to someone else. With that done, I waited until the flames from the eye switched stopped before running back to the main path and turning right.

The Fire Keese had since made its way over to me and had already gone into a dive with the clear intent of setting me on fire. Quickly, I unsheathed my sword and struck the bat in one motion before having to take down a second one that came out of nowhere and proceeded to dive at me. That left me with two possible directions to choose from with each path guarded by a Gibdo standing before a locked door. So far, my progress had been clearly going right and since I recalled the castle was on the opposite side of the village, heading left would allow me to eventually get there, but what if something was to the right that I needed for further ahead?

Now I wished that I had a map so I could figure out where I was going. This underground maze was like a temple in that I was walking around blindly without a means of finding my way other than hoping my directional senses weren't terrible. My only saving grace was leaving behind markers to inform me of where I've been so that I wouldn't get lost. And speaking of which, before doing anything else, I took out my sword, pressed it against the wall, and began pulling it along leaving a small groove to remind me not to go back the other way since I just came from that direction.

I walked up to the Gibdo when it spoke. " Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave it!"

" You've got nothing important to say?" I asked.

The Gibdo remained quiet before repeating itself. " Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave it!"

" Fine! What do you want?"

" Leeeeeeave me something warm that can melt ice and quench one's spirits."

Crap! All I had was regular water and not the kind that could be found in a hot spring. While the thought of a hot spring being down here in such a wretched place was mind-boggling, it made sense since there were ice-themed monsters roaming about this underground maze. I began to suspect that the direction I couldn't initially take due to not having five Magic Beans was where I could find the hot spring, and without any of that water, I couldn't appease this Gibdo. I wished I had been better prepared before coming down here but I'm here anyway and I might as well continue on.

" Will regular water do?"

The Gibdo shook its head slowly. " Leeeeeeave me something warm that can melt ice and quench one's spirits."

" I don't have that kind of water on me."

" If you don't have it, then I have no need for you! Awayyy!"

That certainly didn't go over very well but without the correct item, the Gibdo wasn't going to budge and attacking it would do nothing either. If the door it was guarding would lead me further down the right path, I had no means of accessing it and I'd be forced to leave this maze so I could pick up some Magic Beans from Snips which would consume even more precious time. Ugh! Way did this kind of situation have to happen? I knew ahead of time what to expect since the Garo had told me but I wished some of the items didn't have to be ones that could only be found beyond Ikana!

Grumbling, I walked over to the other Gibdo who was much more talkative. " Yoooooooou... You struggle to fulfill our regrets. You cannot pass certain barriers and have been blocked out. It is a sign that you must stop resisting and accept fate." I wasn't about to go through this spiel again so when I was about to voice my annoyance, the Gibdo leaned forward, its head within range of my own, its plague ridden mouth close to my ear that I felt really uncomfortable. " Do not continue resisting. It will only causssssssse pain. Accept fate and linger down here forever with ussssssss."

I shook my head. " No! I won't submit."

" Then you are the one."

" What do you mean?"

" Many have tried to ease our regretsssssssss." The Gibdo answered. " All have failed and became like us. You are different... You possesssssss a strong conviction that will allow you to survive down here in this place, a place where lingering regretsssssssss exist. You are the first of our kind to attempt to appease our soulsssssssss. Perhaps one of us can succeed where human flesh had failed."

" Why do you continue to linger?"

" We are cursssssssssssed."

" That figures."

" Appease us and break our cursssssssse or else you will be condemned and spend eternity lingering with regret." The Gibdo said. I couldn't tell because of how dark it was but it looked like it was about to shed a tear--that would have been creepy given what it was and all--but then it reached out with its hand and that was the sign that it was about to tell me what I needed to give it. " Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave me ten refreshing blasts!"

Not again! This one wanted something that I didn't have! I quickly began looking through my items to see if I had any bombs just in case I had picked some up, and my heart sank when it was apparent that I didn't have a single one. That meant there was nothing I could do to progress other than leaving this maze and purchasing ten bombs from the Bomb Shop or finding them by cutting grass. No! That wasn't going to happen given I had already been screwed over a couple of times already. Perhaps this Gibdo had a second lingering regret and would be satisfied by that instead of what it really wanted.

" I don't have ten bombs."

" If you don't have it, then I have no need for you! Awayyy!"

" Wait!"

The Gibdo repeated itself. " If you don't have it, then I have no need for you! Awayyy!"

I waved my hands. " Is there any other regret that continues to linger within you? If so then maybe I have what you need." The Gibdo went silent and I feared that it was going to attack me or do something worse but instead it reached out with its hand again and I knew it meant it had another regret. " Okay, what else do you need that can appease you?" I hoped I had anything at this point to be able to progress to the next area.

" Yessssssss... There isssssss something else that would appease me."

" What is it?"

" Know this... If you do not possess thissssssssss... I shall consume you!"

I gulped. " What do you want?"

" Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave me something deliciously fresh!"

The only thing I had on hand that could be described as fresh was the fish I scooped up into one of my empty bottles earlier--I did say that it looked rather fresh considering how decrepit this underground maze was. I reached behind my back, took out my bottle, uncorked it, and shook it until the fish dropped out and into the Gibdo's outstretched hand. I had no idea why it desired a fish of all things but it was something I had no intention of asking. After saying the usual thing about leaving me with no remorse, it burned away to nothing, allowing me access to the next section.

Walking up to the now unlocked door, I entered the next section only to discover that it was a dead-end. I had entered one of the actual rooms of the maze, a fairly large room at that, but the point was that there was no where else for me to go other than backtrack. The room featured several spiked objects moving about on the ground fairly quickly and I knew that anything spiky should be avoided. Other than a couple of pots at the back, nothing else of merit could be said about this room. However, as soon as I stepped forward, a strong presence suddenly filled the room, a presence of evil.

" You were fortunate, Sunset, in that you had that fish." Twilight said.

" I wish I could have used bombs."

" Perhaps but you managed to convince that Gibdo to take the fish instead."

" Sorry if I sound distant, Twilight, but I was hoping this room would lead us further along."

Princess Twilight shuddered. " Can you feel the evil aura radiating in this room?"

I nodded. " Yeah, but it's probably nothing serious."

" It's the same aura I sensed when we saw that Big Poe in that chamber beneath the graveyard."

I gulped. " That means there's one down here as well." I then shook my head. " Wait a minute. Why would there be a Big Poe down here amongst Gibdos? Granted, there are other monsters but those are small fry compared to those undead mummies, yet a Big Poe can be viewed as a serious threat under the right conditions." A thought then crossed my mind resulting in me slapping my forehead. " Don't tell me one of them wants the blasted ghost?"

Princess Twilight slowly nodded. " That does appear to be the case."

" Well... It's not that bad since I didn't have much trouble defeating the previous one."

" Yes, but you must be careful in this room." Twilight said. " Those spiked objects are known simply as "stone traps", an ancient defence mechanism that was built by a civilization that has been lost to the ages. Nothing in your possession can destroy them so your only option is to avoid them as best as you can. While they don't inflict that much damage if one were to collide with you, it can build up over time and you will be pushed back a little thus disrupting any momentum you might have had at the time. Oh, and in case you thought about lifting one up... That doesn't work either."

" I wasn't planning on picking one up."

" At least you know not to."

" Those traps move to each corner of the room before stopping and then continuing on again after a couple of seconds." I said. " Is that going to be a problem for me while I take on this giant ghost?"

Princess Twilight nodded slightly. " It will be annoying since they can trip you up quite easily but you should be safe provided you stay in the middle of the room. However, you will be fighting the Big Poe and it might try and push you into the path of a trap. Be cautious, Sunset, as there are five targets you need to be careful of."

Walking forward into the middle of the room, three blue flames then appeared, surrounding me in a triangle formation. I wasn't afraid as this was what happened when I fought the previous Big Poe though I remained still in case they could burn me. The three flames came together, forming the Big Poe, and it immediately disappeared though there was no lantern for me to look at this time to determine where it was. Was I up against a more wiser Big Poe? It seemed like it so I knew I had to be cautious yet I couldn't use my shield as it could break upon impact against the ghost.

A noise from behind me indicated that it was attacking from behind and I couldn't avoid it in time. The Big Poe knocked me over by ramming me with its lantern while spinning and disappeared when it reached the other end of the room. Getting back onto my feet and turning around, I couldn't see it anywhere so perhaps it was coming from another direction. I turned back the other way only to get knocked down by it again as it spun past. It disappeared upon reaching the end of the room and already I felt tremendous frustration over how this thing had been outmaneuvering me from the start.

Getting back up, I heard its noises from behind me and turned around just as it knocked me down for the third time before disappearing like before. It seemed I couldn't get in a single hit with my sword as it was moving too fast but perhaps using a ranged attack would prove effective. While it did mean becoming vulnerable as I needed two hands to use it, I took out the Hero's Bow, nocked an arrow, and began aiming around in hopes of finding the Big Poe. It reappeared behind me again and charged at me but before it could knock me down yet again, I fired an arrow, striking it in the chest, resulting in it disappearing again.

The stone traps continued moving around the room and so far I had been able to avoid them, but the more hits I deliver onto the Big Poe, the more likely it would behave more erratically, and eventually try to use the traps to its advantage. One of them suddenly span by me and I remained perfectly still to avoid getting hit but this allowed the Big Poe to knock me down yet again--maybe I should have used that Blue Potion or asked Twilight Sparkle to give me two bottles worth--but before it disappeared, I quickly got back onto my feet and pelted it with an arrow. Hopefully, it wouldn't be too much longer before it would go down.

Before I could turn around again, one of the stone traps sliced me across the front of my leg--had it been the back it would have been a whole lot worse--causing a small cut but I shrugged it off and fired another arrow at the Big Poe when it reappeared. I was beginning to see why this one was attacking the way it was and it was due to this room not being all that accommodating to its size compared with that massive chamber underneath the graveyard. Without adequate space, it could only strike using sneak attacks by coming at me from behind, disappearing after the fact to avoid getting hit.

It reappeared behind--it had become predictable--and knocked me down because a stone trap tripped me up when it brushed aside my other leg, slicing it across the front, the wound being a little deeper than the previous one, yet I remained strong as frankly, losing to this Big Poe would have been an embarrassment. I mean, I wasn't trying to be arrogant or anything but this monster wasn't really all that threatening compared to other monsters I'd seen. Perhaps this battle was meant to be an appetizer for the main course most likely waiting for me in the temple.

The Big Poe reappeared behind me again and I fired an arrow--no traps were nearby--and it was enough to defeat it. Its entire body burned away to nothing leaving only its lantern suspended in mid-air for a few moments before it fell and smashed on the ground. A small flame then appeared from the destroyed lantern and the evil expression it gave off told me it was defiant despite being nothing more than a flame. Taking out an empty bottle, I walked over to where the flame had appeared after the Big Poe fell, scooped it up, corked the bottle, and placed it behind my back.

" That went rather well." I said as I checked my legs to make sure they were okay.

" The Big Poe did give you some trouble no thanks to these traps."

" At least we can move on now though I'm not sure where we're supposed to go next."

" Yes." Twilight said. " A couple of paths have been blocked because you don't have the items that the Gibdos need to ease their regrets." She scratched her chin and began combing over what we had learned so far about them. " One Gibdo back at the beginning needed five Magic Beans while the one in the previous section needed hot spring water. While I have no doubt that you can easily find bombs down here, the hot spring water is most likely behind the first door that required beans."

I nodded. " Even if I left Ikana to get some hot spring water from the mountains, it would have cooled down before I could get back here and give it to the Gibdo. Sure, I would have warped from Snowhead to here in a matter of moments but making my way down here from the Owl Statue would have taken too long."

" I was thinking..."

" About what?"

" It's possible that there is another way to reach the hot spring that lies down here."

" You think so?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " How else would you be able to deliver it steaming hot to an undead monster?" Her Highness definitely had me there, yet if that was the case, where would I need to go in order to reach the hot spring? Was it even necessary? Her Highness then continued. " I've also been wondering about what could happen if we were to approach the doors from the other whenever we approach one of the Gibdos. Would they somehow magically move to the other side or would you be able to go through the door and catch it by surprise upon entering the previous section?"

" Don't ask me." I answered. " All I know is that they are nothing but trouble."

" So long as you continue wearing that Gibdo Mask."

I had actually forgotten that I was still wearing the mask I had received from Soarin when I healed his soul. If it had not been for this mask convincing the Gibdos that I was one of their own, they would have easily drained me of my life force upon first coming down here. My opinions of these masks--the ones that couldn't change my body--had been steadily increasing in that certain ones had proven to be effective in situations I otherwise wouldn't have been able to overcome without having them on hand. It was a shame that I hadn't been using some since first getting them and I felt bad for ignoring them.

A perfect example of such a mask was the Bunny Hood. I had acquired it when I paid a visit to Romani Ranch after acquiring the use of Powder Kegs but not once had I used it to give myself a speed increase. I could have used it to make myself fast enough to avoid monsters, reached places a lot sooner, and generally looking adorable though that last one was more of a self preference that connected to my true form of a pony. I also hadn't used the Mask of Scents, the Mask of Truth, or even Kafei's Mask since getting them--Kafei's Mask would be an exception since I hadn't inquired about his whereabouts from people back in Clock Town by using it.

I was going to make an attempt at using these masks and others a bit more often even if it was late in the journey. Avoiding the stone traps as they were still a threat, I walked over to the door, opened it, and entered the previous section where I immediately drew my sword and struck both Fire Keese that had dive-bombed me. Much like the temples, monsters would re-spawn when you go from one section to the next so you always had to prepare for them even if you thought they were gone. Princess Twilight was startled by their sudden appearance yet I reassured her that I had anticipated them.

" You know that monsters re-spawn whenever we come back into an area."

" I know that." Twilight said. " It's just that it always catches me by surprise as you don't expect them to show up."

" In any case, we're clear to start making our way back."

" You're not happy about it are you?"

I nodded. " I hate backtracking because all it does is waste time when whatever I need to do should have been made available a lot sooner!" I could tell that I was beginning to lose my temper over such disdain so I began breathing to calm myself down. " I also hate it because of having to see the same things over and over again. While backtracking through a temple is something I can tolerate since it's a requirement and all but anywhere else and I lose it a little."

" At least we don't have to go too far back."

" And for that I am relieved."

Princess Twilight and I concluded that the one Gibdo we had not spoken to was located in the section where we were unexpectedly frozen. We chose to ignore that one in favour of wanting to take an alternate route yet now we needed it to progress further. Before moving onward, I quickly did an inventory check of my items to make sure I had everything I needed to appease the Gibdos. I had the bottle of water, the bottle with the Big Poe spirit, and that was it. Rupees could also be used to appease them though I suspected they wouldn't care about them since they weren't "common" in that sense.

Heading backwards down the path and through the door to where the Ice Keese, I was relieved to see that it was flapping about at the other end meaning it wouldn't come and freeze us so long as it didn't decide to come our way for curious reasons. My eyes then turned towards the Gibdo I had skipped over when I came by earlier and I knew that it was furious over being ignored. I approached it and it said nothing as expected so I attempted to wave at it to grab its attention only for it to continue ignoring me. I looked at Her Highness for any ideas and she shrugged her shoulders before quickly flying behind my head.

I didn't know why she did that so when I turned to face the Gibdo once more, it was staring straight into my eyes, and I for one wanted to freak out but couldn't. Those eyes were filled with an insatiable urge for blood and its mouth fumed out a foul stench that reminded me of the decay these creatures consisted of. " Yooooooooou..." It began. " You ignored me and now you come crawling back!"

" I thought I could get through another way."

The Gibdo murmured. " There issssssssss only one path through the underground and thissssssss is the only means. You ignored me and now you seek to passsssss? I should ignore you and let you suffer until you decay into nothing. Yes, I shall do thattttttttttttt."

" But I need to get through."

" That isssssssss none of my concern now."

I thought about arguing but knew it was pointless. " Look... I'm sorry that I ignored you at the time but I thought I could find another path through to the end. I also didn't have anything on hand that you would want to relieve you of your lingering regrets."

The Gibdo murmured again. " You wisssssssssh to pass this placccccccccce?"

I nodded. " I do."

" Your effortsssssssss have healed otherssssssssss of their regretsssssss." The Gibdo said. " You shall be remembered asssssssssss the one Gibdo who defied fate and chose to heal our soulsssssssssssss. And yet, you ignored me when you knew I continued to linger with my regretsssssssssss. I shall continue to ignore you until I feel ready to tell you to leave behind what I seek to ease me. Grudgessssssssss... We use grudgessssssssss."

" What do you want?"

" My grudge with you issssssss strong."

This was getting me nowhere! I never thought that a Gibdo would harbour a grudge all because it had been ignored. In fact, this one in particular came off as being rather immature for wanting to bear a grudge and keep me from progressing on my journey. I had an urge to rely on my sword to get it to change its mind but then that would put me in even further trouble since it was the only means of unlocking the door. I began rummaging through my items in hopes the Gibdo would react to one of them but so far it remained defiant until it noticed the last item I checked.

My hand was holding the bottle of water I picked up when I acquired the fish and the Gibdo shivered when I grabbed the bottle. It tried to pretend that nothing happened but I knew what it did and that meant I had some leverage. " You seem intrigued by this bottle of water I'm holding."

" You are falssssssssse."

" Oh, I think you want it."

The Gibdo continued acting defiantly until it finally caved in. " Ussssssssing such deceit! You shall suffer for such ignorance at the handsssssssss of he who once ruled this land in a time long before you were born. Should you ssssssssurvive down here in the depths, he who ruled this land will make you wish you never existed You have been warned so let it be a new regret that shall continue to linger within you." The Gibdo reached out with its hand and I knew what was coming next. " Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave me... H... 2... O..."

I then opened my bottle of water and sprinkled it on the Gibdo's hand. " There you go."

" Ah! Thisssssss! Thisssssss! I bear you no remorssssse!" I was expecting the Gibdo to burn away to nothing like the rest but when it moved its hand back and lurched forward, its eyes began glowing brightly. " You shall suffer! The undead shall tear you apart! Thissssss is my promise to you!" It then burned away before the door unlocked leaving me worried that perhaps I had made a big mistake and that it would be my undoing.

" Are you okay, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

I nodded. " Yeah, but that was pretty scary."

" Clearly that Gibdo had it in for you."

" What do you make of the threat?"

" We should take it seriously."

" That's actually surprising coming from you since you usually say I should ignore it."

" Yes, but this is an entirely different situation." Twilight said. " The undead continue to grow stronger as we get closer to our goal of reaching the king. Whether or not it realized it, that Gibdo pretty much confirmed that the King of Ikana isn't going to listen to reason. He will no doubt fight against you, Sunset, since you are a representation of the light while he and every other undead creature represent darkness."

" What do you know about this king from Tatl's memories?"

" Not a thing."

I sighed. " Well that wasn't much help."

Princess Twilight floated downwards in shame. " Sorry, Sunset."

" No, it's not your fault, Twilight."

" All we know about the king is that he is in the castle and is waiting for us to come." Twilight said. " I suspect that the castle itself will be heavily guarded by his undead servants and several puzzles will need to be solved to gain access to his throne room. Fortunately, we're only on the second day so we have plenty of time to speak to him and find out what is really going around here before resetting time once again."

Given the nature of this world and the morbid darkness that enveloped everything, I had every intention of taking the threat made by the Gibdo seriously. While I was well versed in dealing with royalty--I had to learn such things when I was Princess Celestia's student--it sounded like this king was going to rely on physical prowess rather than wanting to talk to me through a diplomatic approach. Compared to the other undead monsters, the King of Ikana was in a league of his own judging from how the Gibdo said that I would suffer at the hands of said king, but the only way of knowing was by meeting him in person.

Entering the next part of the maze, my ears suddenly pricked up at the sound of something mooing nearby from a nook to the right. I shook my head thinking that what I heard had been my imagination, but when I heard the mooing again, I dashed forward and looked into the nook. " I don't believe it..." I said while trying to take it all in at once only to end up cracking under the pressure. " What is a cow of all things doing down here!? I mean, I can understand some of the monsters and maybe the hot spring, but a cow is just completely ridiculous beyond all reasoning."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I agree that it is rather unusual but perhaps this is a blessing, Sunset."

I gasped. " One of the Gibdos needs some milk!?"

" That does seem to be the case given the cow is down here."

I slapped my forehead. " This is just ridiculous!"

" While I won't deny that, you have to admit that this is convenient given what we'll soon be going up against." Twilight said. " I'm sure you're aware that cows are a means of getting milk that you can drink to restore some lost health."

" I know what cows can do, Twilight." I said. " It's just that I can't get over it being down here in these depths."

" Rather than worry over something that is beyond your control, why not take advantage of the situation and give yourself a means of survival." Twilight said. It took me a few moments to realize what she was saying, and the time I did figure it out, Her Highness sighed with relief. " If you can convince this cow to provide you some milk, you can fill up your other three bottles and use the milk to regain your health should it drop low enough, and considering how much punishment you've taken in this region so far, I'd say it's worth having some milk on hand to drink."

" How do I go about making them give me milk?"

Princess Twilight thought about it for a second. " Cows are stubborn in that they won't just produce milk for the sake of it. They need to have a good reason for giving you some and while that doesn't mean milking this one, you do need something to give it inspiration." She flew back and forth in an effort to come up with a solution and then it hit her like a lightning storm. " I've got it! I know it sounds crazy, Sunset, but why not play Epona's Song to this cow? Sure, it's not a horse but the song is connected to the ranch and cows are often found in those places."

I had nothing to counter her argument so I decided to go ahead and do it. Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt and raising it to my lips, I moved closer to the cow and played Epona's Song, and upon hearing the song, the cow suddenly mooed louder than usual and began giggling like a woman. I was surprised by such behaviour and was even more surprised when the cow started speaking. It said that hearing my song reminded it of the pasture--I suspected it wanted to be there instead of here--and felt compelled to give me an entire helping of milk.

Unfortunately, the cow only filled up one of my bottles. That meant I needed to play Epona's Song two more times in order to fill up the remaining bottles. I thought that was a little impractical since it would be more efficient to fill them all up at once but this was how this game worked and I had to accept it. Playing Epona's song two more times to fill up my remaining bottles--also listening to the cow repeating the same message twice more--I thanked the cow for all she had done before leaving the nook and turning right where I walked forward towards the next Gibdo that was waiting up ahead.

There was split in the path with one direction going left and the other going straight ahead, both paths ended with a locked door guarded by a Gibdo. The left path was promising but could ultimately send me back the way I came and have me go around in a circle. Or, it could lead to a dead-end like the room with the Big Poe leaving me no other choice but to go forward and see what lied ahead. I mulled it over for a few moments before deciding that the path straight ahead was what I would take. Making sure that there were no additional monsters waiting to attack me, I walked forward and approached the Gibdo.

" You have progressssssed farther than expected."

" I guess that means I'm worthy of making it through."

" So long as you can ease our regretsssssss." The Gibdo said. " However, you have been warned of he who once ruled this land. The King of Ikana hasssssss been waiting to bring thisssssss kingdom back to the prime it once wielded in ancient timesssssss."

" Why would he do that?"

The Gibdo didn't answer so I asked my question again and this time it did answer. " Passsssst... The passsssst will return once again and the kingdom of old shall be reborn. It shall usher in a new age of blood."

" I need to speak to the king."

" First, you mussssssst appeassssssse our sssssssouls before you can see him."

" What do you desire?"

" Leeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave it! Leeeeeeave me a ghost... a big one at that!" The Gibdo answered. I knew it was referring to the Big Poe I had defeated a short time ago so it wasn't a complete waste fighting and putting it in a bottle. I took out the bottle it was in, uncorked it, and shook the contents out though I wasn't sure if the Gibdo had acquired it or not since it was a spirit after all. " Ah! Thissssss! Thisssssss! I bear you no remorssssssse!" The Gibdo burned away before I could ask further questions about the king so now I was lead to ponder over the meaning behind its words.

" What do you think it meant about the king's actions?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I'm at a loss for words, Sunset, regarding the king himself, but what that Gibdo said about bringing this kingdom back is something I am familiar with thanks to what happened when the Crystal Empire first returned. While that was easy enough to re-integrate into Equestrian society, Ikana has been a desolate place for a long time and the thought of the undead coming back and reclaiming their ancient home will invoke a sense of fear amongst the people of Termina."

" All of this happened because Starlight did something."

" Yes."

" I mean, I'm not blaming her because I know she's your student and all according to what you wrote." I said. " But, in this world, she has been causing nothing but trouble everywhere she goes due to that mask."

Princess Twilight hugged my cheek. " I know you didn't mean it, Sunset, but I agree that the Starlight of this world needs to be stopped before she causes any further damage. According to DJ Pon-3, Starlight caused an imbalance to happen here that has brought the undead back to life. If anyone can give us more information, it would be the king himself."

" So seeing him is of the utmost importance?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " But we must first get out of this maze and into the castle."

" What did you say!?"

" I have received reports of a living one running around the underground maze, my king."

" So another flesh and bone has decided to venture forth down there."

" Yes, my king."

" The living are such frail creatures that they believe they can do anything they want, but when they come to the realization that they will lose everything upon death, they feel utterly powerless when reality sinks in."

" Um... About this particular living one."

" Are they different from other would-be adventurers?"

" This one is a young girl."

" And what is wrong with that distinction? Nothing, I tell you! Whoever said that adventurers had to be strictly male was irrational in their thought process and probably deserved to suffer a terrible fate. Female adventurers are special in that they possess abilities that males could only hope to receive, and yet, this one is a young girl? Hmmm... I am not sure what compelled her to want to choose such a path but it was her decision. Anyway, I trust she has been rendered asunder by the undead hordes that plague that infernal maze?"

" She... Has been progressing through and is most likely to enter the castle."

" What!?"

" Forgive me, my king!"

" Don't tell me this girl has been appeasing their regrets?" The unknown soldier didn't say anything in response and the king knew straight away that someone had been appeasing the regrets of the Gibdos. " So... this girl has proven herself to be quite resourceful, not to mention lucky since most who go into that maze become Gibdos and are forced to wander down there forever until their regrets have been put to rest."

" She is surely to come here, my king!"

The king nodded. " It is inevitable that she would but I am not worried my dear Spitfire. The castle has more than enough defences to deter anyone from wanting to make it all the way here to my throne room, but should this girl get to this point, perhaps she is worthy enough to face me in battle."

Spitfire, who in this world was an undead solider--not a skeletal one but more like a zombie--gulped. " You know that I cannot allow you to get hurt, my king. As one of your loyal retainers to the throne, allow me the honour of taking on this girl."

" Enough!"

Spitfire gulped again. " My king?"

" I don't need to be coddled just because I am the king, Spitfire!" The king said. " You know full well that my swordsmanship skills are better than every other swordsman in my kingdom with the sole exception of Keeta. Are you suggesting that I am not worthy enough to face one who has stood up against the walking undead?"

Spitfire dropped to one knee and bowed slightly. " Please forgive me for such insolence, my king. I was only thinking of protecting the royal bloodline above all else. You are the future of this kingdom and so if anything were to happen to you, who knows what might befall the kingdom." She got back up and drew her sword before placing it before the king. " I swore my loyalty to you the day I was knighted and I intend on remaining loyal until the day I die... again."

The king smiled. " You are loyal, Spitfire, but you must remember to never question my decisions."

" Yes, my king."

" Alert the other guards that we shall soon be getting a visitor."

Spitfire nodded. " Understood, my king." She turned and was about to walk away when the king snapped his finger and she whipped herself around. " Is there something else you need for me to say to the guards?"

The king nodded. " Inform them that they are to kill this living one on the spot."

" You want her dead?" Spitfire asked. " I thought you wanted to fight her?"

" While I would love nothing more than to do just that, there are far more important things that require my attention." The king answered. He then began speaking to himself so that he couldn't be heard by Spitfire. " Maybe this girl is the one I've been waiting for ever since we all were revived from death. Perhaps she can close those doors and allow us to return to the eternal slumber that we began embracing ages ago." The king noticed that Spitfire was still standing there and immediately coughed so as to save face. " Ahem! Inform my guards to kill this living one should they see her, and I have an extra task for you to complete."

" Yes, my king!" Spitfire announced. " I live to serve."

" When the living one enters the castle from below, I want you to observe her every movement." The king said. " Even if it means you engaging her alongside the rest of my guards, you shall watch everything she does. Once you have obtained enough information, return to me and perform your duty as one of my elite guards." Spitfire saluted and was about to leave again only for the king to call her out forcing her to stop. " Take my other elite guard with you as insurance."

Spitfire gasped. " Is that wise, my king? The two of us are the only members of the elite guard. If something were to happen to us, we wouldn't be able to protect you from the living one were she to make her way here and confront you. I am not disrespecting your skills, not at all, but you should consider having a contingency plan in case. The kingdom would fall apart if you, the king of Ikana, perished."

The king laughed. " I am more than a match for this flesh and bone."

" And yet..."

" I have made my decree!"

" Yes, my king."

Upon entering the next section, I was surprised to see that it looked relatively quiet, but then appearances were deceptive. The instant I began walking forward, two spiked pillars from either side of me collided together in front of me, sparks flew that could have set me on fire. I had not seen anything like it before thought it was obvious as to what the pattern would be like. The pillars remained stationed for a few moments before colliding together and moving back to their original positions in an endless loop. Getting caught in-between the spike wasn't an option as it meant being crushed and skewered.

I took a few seconds to memorize the pattern before running forward only to stop when a third spiked pillar dropped down from the ceiling. My heart raced as the pillar landed a mere inch from my face on the ground before returning to the ceiling. To my left was another pathway though I ignored it as it most likely went back around to a previous section and I needed to get to the end and enter the castle which involved going forward. When the spiked pillar came down before rising back up, I ran underneath it and stopped when two more of them collided together. No doubt about it... This section was one massive deathtrap!

When the spiked pillars moved back to their original positions, I ran forward only to get knocked down by another pillar that dropped from above. While I was merely grazed--the pillar merely nicked me as opposed to inflicting a serious wound--it was still inconvenient given I needed to have as much health as possible to make it through the castle. Luckily, there were no further obstacles standing in the way of reaching the door and the next Gibdo. This had to be the right direction to go otherwise why have such dangerous traps to begin with? As I approached the Gibdo, I was anticipating it telling me that I would suffer because of what awaited me.

However, to my surprise, it immediately went into its tirade of wanting me to leave something behind. The clue it provided: "leeeeeeave me something rich in calcium" was such a dead giveaway that I questioned as to whether it was being serious since the other Gibdo had clues that took me a few moments to figure out their meaning. It was also convenient that what it needed happened to be close by despite my own disbelief of finding a cow of all things down here. Much like the previous encounters, I took out the bottle of milk--I still had two more that I was keeping for myself--uncorked it and dumped the contents on its outstretched hand.

The Gibdo then used its other tirade of saying that it would bear me no remorse and disappeared, unlocking the door in the process. A part of me was curious as to what could have been found down the paths I couldn't take because of not having the correct items but I just wanted to get out of this maze. It's not that it was difficult or anything but rather being stuck in a dank place for so long was beginning to wear down on my heart. While the Gibdo were monsters and all, I felt sorry for them since they were forced to remain down here until they could finally rest in peace after being given that which they craved.

Opening the door to the next section, I was surprised to see that the walls had gone from decrepit dirt to solid brick, and that there was a light at the end of the tunnel. I frowned because that was such an obviously overdone reference, but it seemed I had finally reached the end of the maze. My first action was taking off the Gibdo Mask--it was fun and all wearing it and getting to understand what the Gibdo were thinking--yet I no longer needed to wear it unless I were to come back down here for something. I walked forward only to reach yet another dead-end only for there to be much more than initial appearances suspected.

Princess Twilight floated towards the light. " This must be the secret entrance that will get us inside the castle."

" But, how are we supposed to get up there?" I asked. " I don't see any ladders nearby."

" Perhaps this strange block is the answer." Twilight said, pointing to a large block that featured a sun design on it. " I've never seen a block like this one before but I can feel a cool breeze coming from behind it. We need to find a way to move it so we can progress."

" I don't think I can lift that as a Goron."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Not only that, you would need a ladder to climb up to even reach the block. No, there is something else that needs to be done." She turned to the right and noticed something on the wall before bopping me on the head to grab my attention. " Take a look at this, Sunset!" She floated over to a switch that was on the wall in the shape of a sun, and I immediately recognized seeing it during my previous journey. " This switch represents the sun though it appears cold and distant. Perhaps if we could shed some light on it or something, it would light up and maybe something will happen?"

" I know something will."

" Oh? Have you seen this kind of switch before?"

I nodded. " On my previous journey though the memories are sketchy. All I remember is that these needed light to be shone on them as you already mentioned. Some were dangerous in that they summoned monsters while others would allow for a safe progression. Since there's only the one sun switch here, it's fair to say that something good will happen if light were to hit it. Unfortunately, I don't have any light arrows and the other item that could be used may not even exist in this world."

" What item would that be?"

" A Mirror Shield."

" That would be incredibly useful for you to have given your current shield is on the verge of breaking."

Sighing, I turned my attention towards four torches that surrounded the light that was shining down from above. " What do you make of these torches, Twilight?"

" If you were to light them up using Fire Arrows, we might be able to progress further."

While I did have plenty of Magic Power on hand to use Fire Arrows, arrows themselves were something I currently lacked. I thought about going back through the maze in hopes of either finding pots to smash or grass to cut and get arrows that way but I didn't want to run the risk of getting lost despite having marked a couple of walls. It was times like this that made me yearn for the fire magic I was capable of using before. Looking around the room, I saw no pots so that meant I had no choice but to backtrack and see if I could find any, but when I began walking back towards the door, my eyes lit up at seeing two pots that had been hidden either side of the door.

Running over to them and smashing them against the wall, the first pot produced a blue rupee, and the second gave me ten arrows. It was more than enough to light the four torches though I wished I had more as I felt they were going to be necessary once I was inside the castle. Taking out my bow and powering it up with Fire Arrows, I fired at each torch, lighting it up--they were large enough targets--and brightening the room. A large treasure chest materialized in a tiny nook upon lighting the final torch and upon walking to and opening it, I was surprised at seeing it contained a brand new shield with a polished surface, though there was one thing off about it.

I took out the shield from the chest. " Why does it have a scary face on the front?"

Princess Twilight looked confused. " Huh? What are you talking about?" I showed Her Highness the shield and she stuck out her tongue in disgust. " That face is pretty depressing looking what with how it appears to be screaming but it's something you'll need to look past. In any case, this is the Mirror Shield. Despite the front of it having a questionable motif, this shield can reflect light and energy. Also, unlike your regular shield, this one won't break no matter how much punishment is inflicted upon it. You should throw your old one away as it's of no use to you now."

I slung my old shield off my back and looked at it. " It did serve me well."

" Yes." Twilight said. " And yet, the Mirror Shield is going to be useful in getting us out of here."

" At least, let me put my old one in the chest rather than just tossing it away."

Princess Twilight nodded her approval and I placed my old shield into the treasure chest before closing it up and slinging the Mirror Shield onto my arm. It was a lot lighter than the old one was--despite the hideous design--as though it were made of a rare kind of metal and was more round in shape than my other one was. Fortunately, I knew what to do with this shield since the solution here was obvious. I stepped into the light, raised the shield, aimed at the sun switch, and the expression on it changed from gloomy to a bright smiley expression resulting in a ladder appearing below the block that was well, blocking our path.

It then dawned on me that perhaps the block with the sun motif could be removed were light to be shone onto it. Sure, it sounded weird given it was a solid object, but then this world had already proven itself weird what with everything I had seen so far. Aiming the light--I believed it was sunlight--at the block using the Mirror Shield caused it to disappear and giving me access to the area behind it. Climbing up the ladder after putting my shield on my back and walking down the path, everything suddenly became dark but at least I could feel the breeze that Princess Twilight mentioned had been coming from behind the block.

The pathway eventually came to a stop at a giant ladder that went upward and I knew that climbing up it would take me into the castle. I breathed several times knowing things were about to become pretty hectic given the castle was the stronghold of the king, but so long as I had Princess Twilight, my items, and my resolve, things should go smoothly unless something unexpected happened. I began climbing up, cool air enveloped me as a reminder that this ladder went up to the surface, the presence of death itself could be felt as well, and upon reaching the top, I found myself inside of a large courtyard.

" Wow..." I said as I was taking it all in. " I wasn't expecting this place to be so huge."

" Despite how much of the castle has fallen into disrepair over the ages, it still remains a formidable sight that was the backbone of Ikana." Twilight said. " We need to be very careful as there are no doubt guards lurking about waiting to attack you on orders from the king. Still, I believe we should leave and come back when we have the appropriate means of reaching the throne room."

" What do you mean leave?"

" Remember what that one Garo said about making a hole in the roof?"

I slapped my forehead when it occurred to me that I didn't have a Powder Keg, the one item that was needed to make such a hole as nothing else would work. " You mean we wasted our time going through that maze and handing items to undead mummies only to have to leave again because we don't have the right item?" I dropped to my knees and pounded my fist into the ground repeatedly. " I hate when that happens as now we have to backtrack so much!"

Princess Twilight observed something and bopped me on the head to grab my attention. " Maybe we won't have to backtrack as much as we think."

" What do you mean?"

" Take a look over there." Twilight said. She pointed to another block with a sun motif hidden behind a fence with a Crystal Switch located nearby. " That's why we couldn't enter via the main entrance as that block was in the way and you wouldn't have had the Mirror Shield at the time. I'm guessing that sunlight will shine down from an opening above if you were to activate that switch." I got back onto my feet feeling better knowing that there was a means of getting back here without needing to backtrack. " All we need to do is to warp to Clock Town, pick up a Powder Keg, then return here all while using the Song of Soaring."

Despite my disdain towards backtracking, I didn't really have much of a choice. I walked over to where the crystal switch was and activated it by striking it with my sword before using the Mirror Shield to remove the sun block to give me a quick shortcut that didn't involve going underground. I then took out the Ocarina of Time, played the Song of Soaring, and was warped back to Clock Town in an instant when the wings wrapped themselves around me as I concentrated on wanting to go back. Upon arriving, I made my way over to the Bomb Shop remembering the Goron who was there who sold Powder Kegs on behalf of his master.

I was also reminded by Princess Twilight that I needed to be a Goron in order to talk to him otherwise he wouldn't sell me his Powder Kegs. It had been some time since I last used one of my transformation masks--even if it was for literally a few seconds--but at least I had the opportunity to change bodies again. Taking out the Goron Mask and placing it on my face, I stumbled about as my body shimmered from human to Goron--I made sure not to let anyone notice what I was doing--and eventually became Darmani. I wobbled a little bit due to needing a moment to get used to having a bigger body again before entering the Bomb Shop.

Once inside, I approached the Goron, paid him fifty rupees--that Wallmaster had proven lucrative--and immediately played the Song of Soaring, concentrating on wanting to go back to Ikana Village since my goal was there. Wings appeared behind my back, wrapped themselves around me, spun me around, and I was transported back to Ikana--I thought I had forgotten to activate the Owl Statue so for a moment I felt paranoid. When I arrived, I made my way over to the castle, walked through the tiny hole at the base of the double doors and stopped when a familiar voice called out to me.

" Why don't you take off that mask and show me the real you, if you would be so kind."

I turned around and saw who I had been suspecting for a while emerge from the wall. " You... I knew I could sense your presence around here."

" My aura does make it easy for those with Equestrian Magic to sense me."

" I thought you were dead for good... she-demon." I said. Despite her sudden appearance, I wasn't surprised at seeing Sunset Demon, yet there was something different about the way she was behaving. Normally, she would have tried to attack me the instant she came out of the wall given her unbridled hatred towards me, but instead she refrained from doing anything and instead merely waited there in place. " I never would have thought you could cheat death and return to torment me again."

Sunset Demon giggled. " I didn't come back of my own accord."

" You were revived by another?"

" Let's just say that the arrangements weren't to my liking but I was convinced when you were brought up."

" So you've not changed a bit."

Sunset Demon shook her head. " No... I'm a lot different than the she-demon you fought against with so much bloodlust when the world was last changed. To be honest, I'm not even sure that I'm the same person that I used to be." She then wiped her hand across her eyes and for a moment I thought she had wiped away some tears. I didn't say anything in case she would react negatively to it and lunge at me in a fit of murderous rage. " Now, would you be so kind as to take off that mask and show me the real you, dear Sunset Shimmer? As much as I like this look you're sporting but I prefer to see you as your true self."

I grabbed my face, pulled off the Goron Mask, and flipped back my hair as I changed back to my human form. " Is that better?"

Sunset Demon nodded. " Much better. You know, I am surprised at what you're capable of. First, you had the ability to gain pony ears and a pony tail much like your friends did when you used to be me, and then you achieved an even greater form that seems to be a rarity as it requires much magic. And now, you have the power to change your body into different forms each with their own abilities. If I may be so honest for a moment, and I know I can be with you, my demonic form was the best transformation you ever had. A shame that you had to give it up all because you chose to be a good little girl."

" You know I'll never go back to that again."

" Who am I to try and convince you otherwise." Sunset Demon said, waving her hand. She was definitely different in that she was calm and civil as opposed to being angry and filled with an incredible bloodlust. " This isn't going to be a long chat since my significant other isn't even aware that I came here to begin with." Sunset Demon then noticed Her Highness behind me and laughed a little bit before regaining her composure. " Princess Twilight Sparkle... Is a little fairy!? Who would have guessed that would happen to you? You look absolutely precious but pay me no mind."

" Don't patronize me!" Twilight said as she floated out in front of me.

" Sunset Demon cupped her hands together and cooed. " Awww... You really are adorable in that form, princess."

" I may be a fairy but I have more than enough power to defeat the likes of you."

" This is very true."

Princess Twilight gasped. " Wait... You're agreeing with me?"

" I know you have become more powerful since I last saw you, your Highness." Sunset Demon answered. " I would agree wholeheartedly that you could probably beat me hands down if we were in Equestria or the human world and you had access to all of that glorious magic."

" Besides, I've seen a lot of things with Sunset in this world." Twilight said. " Sure, I haven't fought those things like she has since I'm a fairy and she is the heroine, but I've been there by her side providing advice and guiding her along as best as I can despite some slight difficulty where she had to be stubborn about it. But then, I'd have acted in a similar manner were I the heroine instead."

" I don't doubt your claims."

" You don't?"

" I have been watching you two from a distance every now and again."

" That explains why I felt your presence in different places." I said.

Sunset Demon winked. " Equestrian Magic may be restrained here by whatever this world does, but my demonic aura doesn't have the same restriction. I will admit that I had to work hard to keep my aura hidden from the likes of you until everything was in place. But, it seems my efforts weren't effective all the time since you did detect the presence of me and my significant other."

" Who is that?" Twilight asked.

Sunset Demon thrust her hand forward and waggled her finger. " Nuh-uh-uh! I'm afraid I can't tell you that even though nothing would please me more than doing it. Because of certain arrangements I made, I can't say anything about that one." She then mumbled to herself to prevent me from hearing her. " Can't believe she used the power of that temple to bring me under control all because of my choice of words. I should've realized Midnight Sparkle would uncover the dark power within the temple to make herself stronger. If I had been more aware of such things, perhaps I could have done the same to her in return."

" What did you say?"

" Nothing."

" Why are you here, other than to taunt me?" I asked.

Sunset Demon giggled. " I came here simply to have a little conversation with you and to get away from a certain someone who shall remain nameless." The she-demon attempted to free herself from the wall only to discover that she was stuck. After she struggled for a few moments, she sighed and resigned herself to her unfortunate position. " I should have realized that emerging in this manner would prove problematic." Looking towards me and Princess Twilight, Sunset Demon didn't pretend that everything was find and sighed once again. " You two can laugh at me all you want."

" You've changed."

" Maybe I have, maybe I haven't."

" What's that supposed to mean?"

" I would tell you right now but it looks like my time here is up" Sunset Demon answered. " My significant other has finished meditating and is sure to figure out that I've been here instead of waiting patiently for your eventual arrival. I hope that you can make it though you will need to deal with the ruler around here first. I'll give you a piece of advice that will be useful to you in this ancient castle. Watch out for the magic wielder who uses fire for his attacks. He can't be avoided as defeating him is necessary to progress to where you need to go, but know that he is stronger than the other wizards you've seen."

Sunset Demon disappeared back into the wall leaving me to try and figure out what just happened. She looked like the she-demon who gave so much trouble during my previous journey and almost killed me several times over. She sounded like the she-demon whose sultry voice made me feel uncomfortable to no end. And yet, she didn't act like the she-demon who was determined to become the true Sunset Shimmer by any means. What had happened to her in-between being killed before and being brought back to life? Why give me advice when clearly she could wish for my death? Things were getting more complicated now that she had revealed herself.

Chapter 56: Castle of Ancients

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
May 15, 2017
Chapter 56: Castle of Ancients.

I knew it! I knew Sunset Demon was the one whose aura I had been sensing! The she-demon thought she could hide her foul mien from me but there was enough of it that I could sense proving that she had indeed returned and that I wasn't crazy. Still, despite this sudden revelation of her appearance, something was definitely different. She looked and sounded like the demon who once determined to kill me no matter what and become the real Sunset Shimmer, yet she didn't act like she once did and I felt a nagging sensation in that I felt an emotion related to her I never imagined I would experience.

Was it sympathy? Surprise? Or maybe even worry? I didn't know what to make of it. On the one hand, she acted like she could rend me asunder without a moment's hesitation, but on the other hand, she sounded much more cheerful than she had ever been. I couldn't begin to understand what it must have been like for Sunset Demon being dead. She must have endured incredible torment on the other side or she enjoyed it as it meant no longer worrying about anything. Still, being trapped in an eternal limbo would break anyone's spirit even if they possessed a willpower greater than most. For Sunset Demon, she felt bliss and sadness.

Being dead, I assumed, must have opened her eyes a little, and being in this world had opened them further. I wasn't saying that she had changed completely--I knew this because she delighted in teasing me and indirectly tried to convince me to go back to the way I was before. In that sense, the she-demon was a lot like me. Both of us went through a change when we lost everything, yet while my change occurred in a positive environment, Sunset Demon experienced something much worse and somehow managed to survive. That's when I remembered what else she said before leaving.

She mentioned about having a significant other though judging from how she felt about it, the feeling was more along despair rather than mutual. In my mind, there was only one person who could have fitted the description, and that was Midnight Sparkle. Granted, Sunset Demon didn't actually say her by name--she was trying to hide that fact--but it didn't take a genius to put two-and-two together. If the she-demon had been brought back to life by Midnight Sparkle, then how did she come back? Then it dawned on me... Ikana... the land where the dead roamed free. Midnight Sparkle came back as the power of the dead was everywhere in this region.

Had this been an intention of Ganondorf? No... I didn't think so. He couldn't care less about Sunset Demon and I doubted he would care about Midnight Sparkle though he was indirectly responsible as his magic was what changed my world into this video game one. No, it was the mischievous nature of Starlight Glimmer opening the door to the temple that caused the dead to rise from beyond the grave and that same door had allowed two demons not of this world to also return. Had she known what could return, Starlight wouldn't have gone and opened that door and this wouldn't be an issue.

And yet, it was an issue, and one that further complicated things. Not only did I have to deal with awakening the final Giant so that the undead could return to their peaceful slumber in the afterlife, I still had the daunting task of dealing with Ganondorf weighing on my shoulders. And now, I had two demons from my past who had every intention of making my life miserable even if one of them wasn't who she used to be. If this had been some kind of exam back in the world that was my home, I would be suffering from an extreme amount of stress because of there being too many factors.

Sitting down near the Crystal Switch I had activated to let in the sunlight, I began thinking about how I was going to be dealing with Sunset Demon and Midnight Sparkle. Both of them were waiting for me to arrive at the final temple--wherever that was--and attack at any moment leaving me with no chance of being able to prepare accordingly. Though, if I were to look at things from a different perspective, Sunset Demon might not be an actual threat considering how she behaved. It could be her means of getting me to lower my guard so she could take me down, but what if her actions were sincere?

And then there was Midnight Sparkle. She held a grudge against me because I overcame her magic by becoming Daydream Shimmer and would love nothing more than to get her revenge along with doing so against her counterpart, the other Twilight. After all, it was by my hand that she was defeated and her desire to acquire all of the Equestrian Magic that existed in both worlds was crushed. While I was terrified at having to deal with the two demons, I also remembered what Sunset Demon mentioned. Their magic had been stripped from them thanks to Termina's unusual aura that blocked it out. In other words, we were all on equal footing.

Princess Twilight then flopped onto my head. " Are you okay, Sunset?"

I shook my head. " I just don't know what to think anymore."

" Yes... I must admit that seeing your she-demon form as her own living entity was certainly surprising."

I was going to roll my eyes but refrained from doing so. " I went through so much pain and anguish when she and I fought each other on my previous journey that when she was finally defeated--though not by me--I thought that was the end of it and that at long last I could move on. Now, Sunset Demon has come back through no will of her own and isn't the same as she used to be given her choice of words."

" You suspect Midnight Sparkle was the one who brought her back?"

I nodded. " It makes the most sense."

" The door to the temple brought the dead back to life according to DJ Pon-3." Twilight said. " It must have affected Midnight Sparkle in that she was able to return from the dead herself and she somehow convinced Sunset Demon into also returning. So long as that door remains open, the two demons can continue coming back infinitely though their power is restricted because of Termina."

" When I reset time, everything will go back to the way it was before."

" Yes, we already know that."

" No, what I mean is that even if we were to close the door, it would re-open again upon time resetting."

" Yes." Twilight said. " That does pose a serious problem when you think about it that way. Even if you were to defeat Sunset Demon and Midnight Sparkle, nothing could stop them from simply coming back using the dark aura that has engulfed Ikana. They could continue to hound us both and Twilight Sparkle endlessly unless they were defeated in a way that could prevent their returning again. How we would go about doing that is beyond me."

Hearing Princess Twilight say that made my heart wither. The two demons were essentially immortal in that sense and there was nothing I could do to stop that unless I were to stop the moon from crashing and having time move on. That would involve awakening the final Giant and confronting Starlight on top of the Clock Tower. While my chances of success were pretty high, the two demons could easily interfere and stop me from succeeding in my quest. That would, in turn, cause a ripple effect where I would succumb to despair over having victory snatched away from me and draw me closer towards wanting to become Ganondorf's servant.

My heart then suddenly began recovering because of one factor I had forgotten. Sunset Demon wasn't the same as she used to be, and that made her a wild card more than anything else in that she was going through an identity crisis. Whatever she endured during her time in the afterlife, it had affected her moral code--surprising she even had one--and so it was possible I could convince her to perhaps consider changing the course her existence was currently heading towards. Midnight Sparkle wasn't going to have the same feelings as the she-demon did so trying to talk some sense into her was impossible.

" Twilight..." I began. " What if we could convince Sunset Demon to change?"

Princess Twilight was surprised. " I wasn't expecting that! Hmmm... I'm well versed when it comes to reformation since I was able to get through to both you and Starlight, but to try something similar with a demonic monster who represents the evil that you once were... I suppose there may be a chance but that would depend on her making the choice."

Clapping my hands together with glee, I got up and began walking towards the main entrance of the castle. " Then I guess we've got ourselves a plan when it comes time to dealing with Sunset Demon!"

Princess Twilight suddenly flew out in front of me, hands waving, her face filled with concern. " Not so fast, Sunset! We have to take Midnight Sparkle into consideration! She might have some kind of hold over Sunset Demon hence why the latter didn't refer to the former by name when we encountered her earlier. I think Sunset Demon is in some kind of debt with Midnight Sparkle because the former is who brought her back from the afterlife. As such, I don't think she could betray Midnight unless she found a means to get around it, yet I doubt she would be willing to tell us for obvious reasons."

" So what can we do?"

" We need to talk to Midnight Sparkle."

I looked at Princess Twilight with skepticism. " Seriously?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Seriously! Besides, I'm starting to get the picture in that Midnight Sparkle has been acting as the mastermind between the two with Sunset Demon coming along for the ride, and maybe getting her own chances of telling her 'significant other' how she feels about the whole arrangement."

" Now that you mention it, Sunset Demon wasn't thrilled about bringing her up."

" The two demons are antagonizing each other."

" That could give us an edge."

" In theory."

" What do you mean?"

" Right now, let's assume that this antagonizing between the two will still be in effect when we get to the temple." Twilight answered. " If it does then Sunset Demon might be willing to turn against Midnight Sparkle and free herself from whatever hold Midnight has over her. On the other hand, it could all be some kind of ruse designed to have you lower your guard and allow them both to kill you. I know what you were like when you were a bully, Sunset, and believe me, I could never forget such actions."

I lowered my head in shame. " My actions were atrocious."

Princess Twilight hugged me as best as she could. " I didn't mean to make you upset, Sunset. What I mean, is that during that time of your life, you relied on every trick in the book to ensure that everything went your way, and anyone who you viewed as a threat had to be taken care of through humiliating means."

Not my most defining moment. When I pursued power as a means to an end, I didn't care who I had to step in order to get it. Everyone at Canterlot High was a tool for me to use as I saw fit and I would ensure they were "dealt with" were they to get between me and what I wanted. In my mind, they were inferior because they were human and couldn't comprehend my vision of being the most dominant person at school--I aimed for much higher but was forced to stick to something simple. I was a pony under the guise of being a human and I had to stoop down to their level in order to both fit in and bide my time until the portal to Equestria would open.

Looking back on it now in conjunction with how Sunset Demon acted, she was continuing on that old persona of mine but from an exaggerated perspective all because she was a demonic monster who adored herself. I supposed my actions back then were the result of a superiority complex and feeling insecure over being denied the title of princess. I've gotten over it since and don't really care about becoming an alicorn--I'd much rather be a unicorn--but what if I were to go back to Equestria and I suddenly found myself having ascended and acquired the wings to go alongside my horn? That would be both surprising and disappointing.

Many ponies would love to become alicorns if they were given the chance. Me? I had that chance and blew it because of how stubborn I was. I doubt that I would ever get another chance so I've since accepted my fate and will forever be Princess Celestia's most infamous student. I'd be her forgotten student, the one who turned her back on everything just because she couldn't have her way. It didn't sound very positive and it wasn't meant to be. Sighing and slapping both cheeks, I regained my composure and informed Princess Twilight that her words, stinging as they were, were accurate and I told her she was in the right about it.

Sunset Demon... I would find out what her true intentions were. I would accept whatever outcome would occur even if it meant facing the ultimate betrayal. For the time being, I could only take her words with a grain of salt even she had given me a warning about a Wizzrobe somewhere in the castle. One act of kindness wasn't enough to convince me that she was honest about what she had said. No, it would take something truly extraordinary to earn my trust. Ha... It's kind of ironic in that sense. I had to earn the trust of Canterlot High by going through so much yet it was completely worth it.

I walked towards the main entrance when Princess Twilight bopped me on the head. " Sunset... I can feel it all around us."

" Feel what?"

" The presence of death."

" Does that mean?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " There is a Garo hidden somewhere nearby. You could simply ignore it and go inside the castle but I do suggest summoning it from the shadows and see what you can learn upon besting it in combat. Given how we know little about this castle other than there being a Wizzrobe inside, we need all the information we can get our hands on if we're to reach the king."

" Guess I've got no choice." I said. I took out the Garo Mask and placed it on my face before walking around in a circle. " Hopefully, this doesn't take too long as I've noticed that the sun is beginning to set--" I was suddenly interrupted when a shadow appeared from the ground and formed the garbed guise of the Garo in question.

" Master... You called?" The Garo asked. I'm not even sure why they continued saying this when it was pretty obvious that I wasn't their master, but I supposed it didn't matter to them so long as they were able to slice someone to pieces via their flaming swords. " What are you!?" The Garo drew its swords and a circle of fire surrounded us both, signalling that the battle had begun.

I personally didn't want to have to go through with this yet again since it was basically the same fight as the previous Garo but I had little option but to fight back. Drawing my sword and my new shield, I waited for the Garo to make the first move. It floated about for several seconds before diving at me with its swords in a cross formation, but I was able to parry its attack though it attacked me again, knocking me onto my back despite using the Mirror Shield. It was going to take some time before I could get used to carrying this new shield as the weight was much different than the old one was.

The Garo dove at me a third time though I side-stepped just as it went flying by, and when I turned around to see where it was, it was looking left and right in hopes of trying to figure out where I had gone. Was it seriously doing that!? To be honest, I thought it was something that previous Garo did as a means of a quirk, but it turned out that they all did it, and it meant I had an advantage against them. Instead of using a regular attack against the Garo, I performed a jump attack though I first had to get closer otherwise it would fail. Upon hitting the ghostly ninja, it reeled back before floating about in the air again.

Seeing that weakness pretty much made the battle not as terrifying as I once thought. I mean, it could have just turned around and resumed fighting rather than wasting time looking around in the wrong directions. At least I didn't have to worry about getting hurt too much since I did have two bottles of milk on hand--I could have gone back to the cow and filled up the remaining bottles but I didn't think about doing it--though it was best I conserved them as more powerful monsters were lying in wait inside of the castle. Side-stepping again to avoid being knocked down by the Garo, I hit it from behind, and suddenly got caught off guard.

It spun around using its two swords to create a temporary circle of flames that knocked me back into the circle of fire that surrounded us. Fortunately, I still retained a resistance to fire magic though it wasn't as strong as it was before when I was journeying around Hyrule. I got up and raised my shield just as the Garo dove at me again, colliding with my shield and getting pushed back before diving at me again. I side-stepped once again and it sailed past, coming to a stop a short distance away, and began looking left and right to see where I was despite not looking behind it--I suspected this meant they had a one-tracked mind.

Attacking the Garo from behind, it jumped into the air, landing several moments later, its swords disappeared, and it held up its hand signalling that it was giving up. That went a lot easier than before all thanks to knowing when the obvious weakness would appear. No wonder these guys often had to kill themselves whenever they gave away precious information they had obtained. It made up for being predictable in battle though I was curious as to why the Ikana soldiers never figured it out given it was so simple. Was it possible that they were even worse than the Garo or perhaps I was looking too deeply into it?

The Garo spoke. " R-regrettable! Although my rival, you were spectacular! I shall take my bow by opening my heart and revealing my wisdom."

I waved my hand. " Before you go and do that, I have some questions I want to ask you."

" You have questions for me?"

I nodded. " I do."

The Garo blinked a few times. " You think that I would give away such valuable information? We Garo would rather commit seppuku than to reveal secrets!" It then realized that it had agreed to open its heart when I defeated it and it grumbled to itself before addressing me. " I made a vow to share my wisdom and I must fulfill that vow or else I would disgrace the others and dishonour my master. One question... That is all you may ask of me! If you try to ask me anymore than that, I shall close myself off and you will learn nothing, not even what I promised to share upon your defeating of me."

" I already know what to ask you."

" Then name it!"

" Your master... Who is he?"

The Garo was surprised. " You wish to know of my master?"

I nodded. " You and the other Garo keep on thinking that I am this master of yours though I figured it has to do with the mask I have on my face. It resembles the face of your master hence the confusion yet I wish to know more about him."

" Then I shall tell you." The Garo said. " My master... the Garo Master, as we call him, is the most powerful of all the Garo who lived in Ikana long ago. He possesses skills that we use to carry out our tasks through his commands though he also possesses abilities none of us could ever master. My master also knows of secrets we Garo were never permitted to know because we had not earned such a privilege. You will find that my master can and will kill you easily because of how powerful he is."

" He must be if he leads the Garo."

The Garo nodded. " All of us respect my master and we would gladly give up our own lives if it meant saving his. Though he was the one who taught us the 'Law of the Garo', committing seppuku should our secrets become known, he insisted on us not making such pointless sacrifices. Or mission was deemed more important than anything else and any who would object to it were killed by my master. To the Garo Master, loyalty was an absolute and to betray that notion meant death. You are strong, living one, and for that you deserve to meet my master so that he can test your skills himself."

" I don't even know where he is."

" I shall tell you."

" Very well."

" My master awaits you in the temple that lies on top of the impenetrable stronghold we Garo used as our headquarters." The Garo said. " I doubt you will even make it there alive as it is a grueling trial that tests you to your limit. If you do manage to reach my master, you shall die by his hands, unless you defeat him by some divine miracle. There! I have answered your question! Now I shall open my heart and share my wisdom with you. The ReDeads in Ikana were once members of the castle's dancing troupe. A symbol that resonates with them awaken their true selves."

" What does that even mean?"

Instead of answering my question, the Garo said the same thing that the previous ones had said once they had shared their secrets, namely, that they died without leaving a corpse because it was how they did things to prevent their secrets from being known. It then planted a bomb in front of itself that exploded and there was nothing left of the Garo other than many questions that currently lacked answers. At least I now had an idea as to what kind of person the Garo Master was in addition to his current whereabouts. He was stronger than his fellow Garo and possessed skills none of them could master.

He was also waiting for me in the temple and that was when I came to a sudden realization. Sunset Demon and Midnight Sparkle were also at the temple and that meant they could attack me while I was busy fighting against the Garo Master. Then again, the two demons might have already encountered him, and either came to some kind of mutual respect or he warned them not to get involved in his affairs. In any case, this added one more problem to a list that was slowly growing with every passing moment. I needed to remain calm despite knowing this otherwise I could lose it and that would surely mean my death.

Princess Twilight comforted me. " Things will be okay, Sunset."

" Even though we now know where the Garo Master is?"

" Yes and I must admit that was very clever of you asking that Garo a question." Twilight said. " It was about time that we asked one of them something rather than merely being told a vague secret about something in this region. Granted, the temple is beginning to get crowded what with two demons and a master assassin waiting for us there. We need to hope that no more surprises regarding the temple are brought for our own peace of mind."

I sighed. " I doubt that."

Princess Twilight smiled. " Just stay positive."

" You've been hanging around Pinkie Pie too much."

" She's proven to be quite the powerful influence." Twilight said. " Anyway, that piece of information the Garo mentioned could prove useful as it would mean avoiding some powerful monsters waiting for us inside. By the way, do you know what a ReDead is supposed to be?"

I gulped. " In all of the excitement regarding the Garo Master, I completely forgot that the Garo went and mentioned ReDeads."

" So I take it you know what it is?"

I nodded. " ReDeads are similar to Gibdos except they are slightly weaker though you can't really tell. They can paralyze you with a piercing gaze before lumbering over to their helpless victims before latching onto them and draining their life energy away. Between the two versions, Gibdos were much worse though they were also much rarer." The thought of dealing with ReDeads again made me very uncomfortable given my previous experiences with them. I couldn't remember all of the details other than I almost lost my life a few times because of how quickly they could drain the life force out of any creature they came across.

" We don't need to worry about them."

" How do you figure that?"

" The Garo said that if you were to show them a symbol that resonates with them, you would be able to see them dance as they were dancers in life." Twilight answered. " I wonder what you could use to act as a symbol."

I began rummaging through my items to see if I had anything and I stopped upon taking out two of my masks. " The Gibdo Mask and the Captain's Hat both resemble undead faces so these could help me get past the ReDead and prevent them from draining my life force." I then grabbed my face and held my hand there for a few moments before realizing that I had a third mask that was a symbol I could use. " I could keep on the Garo's Mask since it would resonate with the ReDeads as well."

" Only way to know is to enter the castle and find out."

After mulling over the three masks for a while, I decided to go with the Captain's Hat since Captain Keeta had an association with the king. Plus, I felt it needed to have some more attention as I only used it twice in order to access the underground areas beneath the graveyard. I took off the Garo's Mask, placed it behind my back, and put on the Captain's Hat before entering the castle. Immediately, I found myself surrounded by the darkness though I should have expected this since this castle had been abandoned ages ago, but when everything started getting brighter, I could see that the castle wasn't abandoned in that sense.

The opening chamber consisted of four pillars in a symmetrical formation with a sun block located behind them. Something important had to have been behind it as why else would such a block be where it was, but the problem was that there was no sunlight shining down from above. Without the sunlight, I couldn't use the Mirror Shield to remove the block so I needed to find a way to bring it to this room. On one of the pillars was an eye switch covered in some ice so I could easily melt that away using a Fire Arrow, but then my body froze upon seeing four ReDeads standing in front of me.

None of them had noticed my presence so they remained stoic and silent but I knew that they would attack if I got close enough to them. Somehow, I needed to find a way to get past without having to resort to fighting--they were also resilient in that they took a lot of punishment--but then I remembered what Princess Twilight said about using something that could be used as a symbol and resonate it with them. Since I was wearing the Captain's Hat and we had determined that it would work, I gulped and stepped forward, my sword and shield drawn in case what Her Highness suggested wouldn't work.

Suddenly, the ReDeads began to dance the moment I got within range of them. I recognized one of them dancing the Cossack with two more twirling about and the other pretending that it was moonwalking. I had seen plenty of strange things throughout this journey yet this was the strangest one of all. What was once a fearsome monster had become nothing but a joke though at the same time it was also quite sad because these ReDead used to be alive at one point. According to the Garo, they used to be dancers who served as dancers to the Royal Family. Even in death, they felt compelled to dance provided one had something as a symbol on their person.

I thought about attacking them so that they wouldn't get in my way but then I realized there was no point. They weren't attacking me let alone getting in my so I had no real need to destroy them unless I were some kind of psychotic lunatic who loved destroying every last monster. Instead, I decided to focus on the frozen eye switch as it appeared to be my only means of finding a way out of this room--there were two doors on either side of the ReDeads though they were blocked by iron bars. Taking out the Hero's Bow and applying Fire Arrows as opposed to regular arrows, I aimed up at the switch and fired a single shot.

Upon hitting the ice, the Fire Arrow melted it and activated the switch, resulting in the right door opening up. I intended on going through that door only to notice a second frozen eye-switch behind another pillar--I couldn't see this one initially and assumed that there was something else that would open the other door--so I fired another Fire Arrow, melting the ice and activating the switch, causing the left door to open. Now, I had to choose which direction to take. Unfortunately, I didn't have a map so there was no way of knowing which direction would lead me to my final destination of reaching the king.

In the end, I decided to follow my gut instincts and entered the door on my left. This room contained a crystal switch directly in front of me but before I went and activated it, I wanted to see what else this room offered in terms of a challenge. Walking forward and then looking to my right, I could see a large red floor though it didn't mesh well with the actual floor that was beneath it. Upon a closer inspection, the red floor gave off a very warm aura indicating that it was lava and touching it would mean death. Activating the crystal switch would most likely cause the lava to rise to the ceiling for a few seconds.

" This puzzle seems simple enough."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but there is always something else that tends to be overlooked, Sunset. I suggest you activate the switch to see what changes and then plan accordingly to solve the puzzle upon activating it a second time."

" You seem bothered by something."

" I figured you of all people would notice."

I chuckled slightly. " You tend to look incredibly nervous whenever something really bothers you, Twilight." It took me a few seconds to figure out what Her Highness had been bothered by though I thought it was rather silly of her to even think of it like that. " Were you freaked out by how those ReDeads were dancing? I won't deny that they did make me feel uneasy but you shouldn't let that be an issue."

" What kind of dancing was that?"

" Oh, you know... the Cossack, the Moonwalk, the Pirouette..."

Princess Twilight blinked at me and I couldn't help but notice. " Um... Sunset... What are you talking about?"

" Dances."

" You mean what I did during the Fall Formal?"

I slapped my forehead in a playful manner. " That's right! I forgot that dancing doesn't exist in Equestria."

" Oh it does now." Twilight said. " Some ponies in Manehatten have begun a dance craze through they're restricted to the pony trot and the pony equivalent of the conga line humans are famous for doing."

" I never would have guessed--" I suddenly cut myself off upon seeing something in front of me. " Um, Twilight? Do you see what I see in front of us?"

Princess Twilight looked forward and had to blink several times to make sure she was seeing what I was seeing. " Is that Spitfire!? And Fleetfoot!? What in the world are they doing in a place like this? And why do they have such terrible complexions?"

Standing in front of us was Spitfire, though she looked like a undead zombie as opposed to the girl who I vaguely remember as being a star soccer player for the Shadowbolts over at Crystal Prep Academy. Princess Twilight told me one time that she was the leader of the Wonderbolts, an elite flying corps in Equestria, and despite her serious attitude and wanting her teammates to be at their best, she was always concerned for their well-being. Rainbow Dash, as in the pony version, was said to be in line to become a Wonderbolt provided another would step down according to Her Highness.

I remember encountering Spitfire during my previous journey and she was rather antagonistic although she would see the error of her ways. Much of that encounter like most of those experiences from Hyrule had been getting vague as of late but some things I could never forget no matter what. It appeared that once again she was going to be antagonistic and given that she was wearing fancy looking armour, she most likely served as one of the more prominent guards, perhaps even serving directly under the king as one of his elites. This meant I needed extreme caution when dealing with her.

The other zombie looking guard was referred to by Princess Twilight as Fleetfoot. According to Her Highness, she was another member of the Wonderbolts though she only started getting recognition within the last couple of years. This whole thing with the Wonderbolts didn't make much sense to me since I never really paid much attention to how they operated though I remember teasing them when I was Princess Celestia's student. I saw them as being unimportant and that Equestria didn't need them yet I now understood that my thoughts were wrong back then.

" So you are the living one who managed to make it through the underground maze." Spitfire said.

" No one has ever made it through there before." Fleetfoot added.

" Guess that makes me the first." I said.

" For one of the living, you definitely have a lot of spunk though that could be your undoing." Spitfire said. She then drew a sword and shield and appeared to be on the verge of charging forward in an attempt to attack me, but Fleetfoot grabbed her shoulder at the last minute, shaking her head and whispering something. Spitfire was taken aback by her companion's sudden interference and decided to let her have it. " Why did you stop me? You know that this one must be killed by orders of the king because she has proven to be a threat to his desire to bring our fair kingdom back from the brink."

" The king ordered us to alert the guards and nothing more!"

" Are you dense, Fleetfoot?"

" Of course I'm not!"

" You and I are of the king's guards and so we must kill this living one before she can reach the throne room."

Fleetfoot sighed and pulled Spitfire back prompting her to go into a tirade in which the former slapped her in the face. " Spitfire! Don't take this the wrong way--you probably will since you do that a lot--but why don't you think about something for a second. How do you suppose she managed to get past the ReDeads who were posted in the entry chamber to the castle, hmmm?"

" Why were dancers ordered to guard the main entrance?"

" Because we don't have anyone else, Spitfire."

" What!?"

" We've only just recently come back from our eternal slumber and everyone is struggling to figure out what's going on."

Spitfire sighed. " You're right about that. Even I've been wondering what could have caused us to suddenly return after so long. Granted, I don't appreciate looking like an undead corpse but I suppose my body didn't decompose all that well while it was buried. Still, what does that have to do with this living one?"

" She got past the ReDeads without getting hurt."

Spitfire courage suddenly disappeared like it had been burst like a balloon and she quickly put her sword and shield away before moving back towards the door. " She is more powerful than she appears to be Fleetfoot, but what is up with her wearing that strange looking mask?" Spitfire lurched forward to get a closer look at what was on my face and appeared confused before leaning back. " It looks very familiar but I can't put my finger on it."

Fleetfoot lurched forward herself and quickly leaned back upon seeing my mask. " It looks like the mask Captain Keeta used to carry around with him."

" What!?" Spitfire exclaimed. " This living one acquired Captain Keeta's most prized possession?"

Fleetfoot nodded. " I think so but I can't really see from this distance what with this lava floor blocking our path. I know we're both undead, Spitfire, but we still have flesh on our bodies as opposed to those Poes that hang around here in the shadows. I'd rather not roast myself on an open fire if you get my meaning." She then raised her hand to her mouth and called out to me. " Living one... What are you wearing on your face right now?"

" A mask." I answered.

" I know that but what kind of mask?"

" It's just a mask."

" No, I mean does it have a name or something?"

Spitfire had finally had enough of my dodging the question and screamed out at me. " Enough already! It honestly doesn't matter that you got past the ReDead since they were only the first line of defence the castle has. The other guards will no doubt end your life and prevent you from stopping him from bringing Ikana back to its former glory. Speaking of which, can you hear that wailing sound echoing all around us?" I nodded in response causing Spitfire to clasp her hands together with glee. " Those would be the Poes that wander about looking for anyone to cast their misery towards."

" Where are you going, Spitfire?" Fleetfoot asked as she saw her companion open the door at the other end.

" The king will need our protection."

" But this living one won't survive to reach him."

" As his personal guard, we must never shirk in our duties."

The two of them then walked through the door though how could they have done so since it had been blocked by iron bars? Unless they somehow managed to activate a nearby switch that unlocked it, they had seemingly performed a feat only the undead were capable of. In any case, seeing both Spitfire and Fleetfoot was a blessing--more like a heads-up to be frank--as now I knew who I would eventually run into again upon reaching their king. If I were to succeed at defeating the king, I first had to get through them though there was no telling how strong either of them were.

I then heard the sounds of wailing, indicating that the Poes were closing on my location. While I had already defeated two Big Poes making the regular sized ones not that much of a threat in comparison, I couldn't afford to get slowed down by them. I turned towards the crystal switch, activating it by striking it with my sword, resulting in the lava floor rising to the ceiling and revealing some secrets that I couldn't see before. Another crystal switch was located at the end of the room in front of the locked door and what looked to be a regular switch was situated on top of a raised platform. To the left of it was a Deku Flower and I immediately knew what had to be done.

When the lava floor came back down, I was surprised to see that the platform with the switch wasn't affected by it. There must have been some gaps in the floor so that both the switch and flower could be in their respective positions without compromising anything. Of course, I would need to hustle over to activate the switch otherwise I'd get crushed to death by the lava floor. Sighing, I knew I had no other choice so taking out the Deku Mask and placing it on my face, I began convulsing as my body shimmered from human to Deku and when I let out a huge scream, my body finished its transformation.

It had been a while since I became a Deku Scrub so I needed a few moments to get used to having a tiny body again. Upon getting that out of my system, I was about to activate the crystal switch when I suddenly had an idea pop into my head. Moving towards the lava floor, I stopped upon reaching it, turned to face the crystal switch, produced a bubble in my mouth, and fired at it causing the floor to rise again. I ran quickly towards the Deku Flower, dove into it just as the floor came crashing down, launched myself from the flower, and floated over to the switch.

Since my body was much too light to activate the switch, I was about to grab my face and take off the Deku Mask when the wailing sounds got even louder, and that's when two spirits entered the room by dropping down from above. Each one wielded a lantern--they could be used as a weapon--though they had yet to notice me. " Looks like the two Poes have finally arrived, Twilight." I said. " What do you make of this situation?"

" Unlike Big Poes, these regular Poes tend to disappear when you target them long enough."

" So they act like cowards?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " They only attack when no one is watching them otherwise they will take a defensive stance in hopes they won't get beaten. Poes don't possess the same stamina as their large counterparts so it should only take two or three hits at the most to defeat them. When defeated, a spirit will be left behind that you can either collect using one of your bottles or it will fade away into the ether forever."

" Do I need to fight them?"

" Not necessarily."

" That's all I needed to hear."

" With the lava floor below us, fighting these Poes is extremely unwise." Twilight said. " Once you activate the switch beneath your feet, it should cause the floor to rise up to the ceiling again in addition to unlocking the door ahead, but don't think of it as an excuse to fighting those Poes. That floor won't stay up on the ceiling for long and if it falls down on you, you're going to end up becoming a Poe or even worse if you get what I'm saying."

" I got the message."

" First, you might want to become a human again."

Grabbing my face, I took off the Deku Mask, and flipped back my hair only to be suddenly surprised when the switch activated due to my increase of height and weight. This caused the lava floor to rise up again and also unlock the door. The two Poes took notice of what had just happened and began moving towards me before quickly disappearing since I had looked at them, but I wisely chose to ignore their presence and jumped off the platform and across the remainder of the room, landing in front of the door. I opened the door and entered the next room only to come across a strange puzzle.

There was another Deku Flower in front of me though the way forward was blocked by several pillars scattered about. Above on the ceiling were several Skulltulas and below me was a bottomless pit. I walked a few steps forward and noticed another switch to my left on a platform that looked like it couldn't be reached by normal means. I thought about jumping over but the distance was far too great and I was likely to plunge to my death if I tried. The entire setup seemed suspicious at best. Why have a switch out in the open that cannot be reached... unless I couldn't see the obvious before me.

As I took out the Lens of Truth, Princess Twilight was surprised by my actions. " Why are you taking that out?"

" I think there's an invisible platform."

" Oh? And how do you figure that?"

" There's no way anyone could reach that switch on that isolated platform over there." I answered. " Heck! Not even I can reach it despite being good but not really perfect at jumping large distances. I figure there has to be an invisible platform which is why I'm using the Lens of Truth to see it."

" Pretty clever thinking, Sunset."

I blushed. " I just came to a natural conclusion." I then stopped blushing and got serious. " Besides, the alternative is a deep descent into the darkness below, and that would surely mean my death assuming there's an actual bottom."

" Be careful of those Skulltulas." Twilight said. " If one of them were to drop down, you'll get knocked into the chasm. Why not pick them off from a distance using arrows? That should make crossing the remainder of this room a more pleasant experience."

Raising the Lens of Truth to my eye, I could see that the platform was made of solid ice, and that was a slight concern. Ice was slippery--an obvious statement--so I needed to move about it with caution or else I would slide off and die below. Analyzing the platform for a few seconds, I jumped over and onto it though my feet did slide about a bit but luckily I didn't plunge into the abyss below. Turning around to the platform with the switch, I jumped over to it, and activated it, the door on the other side unlocking with the iron bars rising. Now all that remained was making it over there and that involved taking care of all those Skulltulas on the ceiling.

Jumping back onto to the frozen platform, I took out the Hero's Bow and was automatically forced to use regular arrows--the element based arrows couldn't be used if I was using something else that consumed magic such as the Lens of Truth. Fortunately, the Skulltulas were large enough targets and didn't move, easy pickings if I ever saw it. I began firing arrows at each of them, destroying them where my arrows pushed back into the walls before burning away to nothing. I made sure not to miss a single one because of the abyss that loomed below, and once the last one was no more, I jumped back onto the initial platform and turned the lens off before putting it away.

With the main threat gone, I proceeded to jump across the remainder of the room using the small platforms dotted about until I reached the door, and opened it, entering the next room and suddenly coming to a stop upon seeing two Blue Bubbles flying about. If I recalled correctly, I would be unable to use my sword were they to touch me because of inflicting some kind of curse, yet while it only lasted for a short while, it would still be inconvenient as who knew what was awaiting for me further ahead. I still had my bow out so I immediately fired arrows in hopes of picking them off before either one could make contact with me.

Unfortunately, one of them managed to hit me due to me missing my initial arrow volley. My next volley was enough to defeat both but the damage had been done. I couldn't use my sword for a while though I supposed it could have been a lot worse. Princess Twilight reminded me that I could use the Song of Storms to rid myself of the curse since it had the power to do so but I decided against it for one good reason: playing the ocarina in a heavily fortified place would surely attract some unwanted attention. I'd rather avoid that situation and fight against any monsters as they came.

Before moving on, I picked up a few pots on the ground and smashed them against the wall, collecting arrows that fell out along with Magic Jars. Looking forward, it seemed my only option was to go up the stairs and see what lurked above. I walked up to the next floor that ended with a door and opened it to find myself back outside though now I was on one of the castle's parapets. I found it odd that there were no monsters here with projectile attacks or any at all. They could have shot at me from up here while I was running around down below and easily picked me off but perhaps I was fortunate that they didn't.

" I think this might lead to a dead-end, Sunset."

" You think so?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I don't see anything that could lead us to the throne room."

" Then why have that path we took in the first place?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I don't know but it seems we might have run into a snag." She then began shivering and I had a pretty good idea why she was. " Sunset... I can sense the presence of another Garo waiting in the shadows nearby though why would there be one all the way up here at a dead-end?" That was a question I couldn't even begin to fathom as I had no idea as to why these assassins would hide in such stupid locations.

But, I knew that I had to summon it otherwise I would just feel agitated until I finally caved in. Taking out the Garo's Mask and placing it on my face, I took a single step forward and sure enough, the Garo in question appeared before me. Unlike the previous ones, this Garo dropped to one knee and lowered its head slightly as though it were acknowledging me. I was certain it would challenge me to a battle after concluding that I wasn't its master, but what it was doing had definitely surprised me. I decided not to draw my sword and shield as a precaution because from my perspective, the Garo hadn't threatened me.

" I have been waiting for you." The Garo said.

" You don't need to say anything." I said.

" Ah, but you would be mistaken, living flesh."

" Look, I know that I'm not your master!" I said. " While you didn't acknowledge me as such before realizing that I wasn't him and drawing your flaming swords, I know you have every intention of fighting me in order to take my life because that's what assassins like you do. Why don't we just get straight to the point, ignore all of this talking, and get started with the battle since you're probably itching for the chance to kill me."

The Garo shook its head. " That is not why I am here."

I was surprised. " You're not here to kill me?"

Again, the Garo shook its head. " You have progressed much further in this kingdom of wandering souls than any other living flesh has done. For that, you have earned not only my respect, but that of my master. In fact, he commanded me to inform you that he wishes to fight you himself because he knows you will be a worthy opponent. Besides, I know that I don't stand a chance against you so a fight would do nothing."

" He waits for me in the temple, right?"

" Yes." The Garo answered. " However, you must first prove your worth against the King of Ikana otherwise you will never reach the temple alive. Unlike the rest of the undead who roam about this land freely, the king is very powerful and is on equal footing with my master. You will die at his hands, living flesh, unless you know the secret to defeating him and the elite guards who protect him."

" How do I find out this secret?"

" I shall reveal it to you."

I gasped. " Huh? But why would you do that?"

" This world has changed since the time the Ikana Kingdom was destroyed as a result of war." The Garo answered. " None of us are meant to be alive for our time has passed and we must allow the current living to understand what it was that caused our downfall. The only one who has become oblivious to this truth is the King of Ikana himself so you must show him that we cannot remain here amongst the living by defeating him."

" And your master?"

" My master knows that we must return to our eternal slumber." The Garo answered. " That is why he wishes for you to fight him in the temple as only you possess the power to close the door to the temple once and for all."

I nodded. " Alright... What is your secret?"

The Garo took out a bomb, lit it, and placed it on the ground in front of it. I immediately knew what was coming next so I made sure to step back a little so as to avoid the inevitable explosion that was to come. " I will say this only once so listen well. To counter the rage of the King of Ikana Castle, burn away that which disrupts the light and shine the sacred rays on the king." As I expected, the bomb exploded but not before I received the Garo's departing message. " Belief or disbelief rests with you. To die without leaving a corpse... That is the way of us Garo." It burned away to nothing leaving me to ponder the meaning behind its words.

I figured that using Fire Arrows was essential when I encountered the king as they were the only item on my person capable of using fire. It also appeared that sunlight would be the bane of the king and most likely both Spitfire and Fleetfoot as they served as his elite guards according to what Spitfire said. I would need to assess the throne room to determine what it was I needed to burn--I suspected a curtain or other form of cloth. For now, I would need to explore the other side of the castle unless there was a way I could potentially skip over that side and access the throne room much sooner.

Walking to the dead-end and looking down, I could see that I was really high up, and that falling would cause a severe injury or even worse. A few columns were scattered about though they didn't serve much of a purpose other than having small fires burning on top of each one. I chose to ignore them and focus on making my way across a narrow catwalk that connected to the other side where I noticed a suspicious looking block. Halfway across and to the right was a larger column that lead up to two regular sized ones with one featuring a switch on it and a Piece of Heart on the other. There was also a Deku Flower on the larger column indicating what had to be done.

Activating the switch would do something--allowing me to progress was my first guess--yet I could do with the Piece of Heart, and that meant making sure nothing attacked me while airborne otherwise I'd drop back down to the ground and either die from the impact or survive and be forced to make my way back up here again. Several Guays were flying about and they were my biggest threat regarding flying as a Deku Scrub. Still, I could just shoot them down with arrows if need be or use bubbles as a Deku though that would require careful aiming since the bubbles tend to go all over the place.

" What!? Are you serious!?" Midnight Sparkle exclaimed.

" You were busy with your meditating so I decided to pay them a visit." Sunset Demon said.

" We have been avoiding them all this time and you went ahead and did that!?"

" What can I say? I wanted to give Sunset a little preview of what was to come." Sunset Demon answered. " Besides, I didn't mention you by name so they don't know that you are even alive, but Sunset is pretty smart so I suspect she already knows that you were the one who brought me back from the dead. Guess things aren't going as you had originally planned yet it was so obvious that they wouldn't."

" Tell me... Why did you do it?"

" I think you know the answer to that."

Midnight Sparkle glared at Sunset Demon before rubbing the bridge of her nose. " Is it because I have tapped into the dark aura that exists throughout this temple and used it to get you into following my every order without question?" The sudden silence from the she-demon proved that Midnight Sparkle was correct in her assumption. " I know that I've been difficult to work with along with keeping secrets, but you brought this upon yourself by threatening to kill me several times over. Had I not figured out how to use the dark aura around here, we'd probably get killed when Sunset and Princess Twilight arrived. Our goals would be lost forever were that to happen."

" Your goal may still be the same but mine has changed."

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " You are a demonic monster like myself. You cannot change who you are because you are the result of a transformation that was evil in origin. Just because you can't have your way anymore thanks to my becoming the dominant one between us doesn't mean thwarting our efforts when we're so close." Midnight Sparkle then took out the pendant she had secretly been using and presented it to Sunset Demon. " Take a good look at how much my little pendant glows with the data it acquired from the Elements of Harmony when Sunset's friends displayed their respective Elements."

" I think it's time for you to explain that now, the whole lot of it."

" What if I don't want to?"

Sunset Demon began to giggle. " You know what will happen if you don't."

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " Hah! Don't think you can intimidate me, Sunset Demon! As long as I maintain my connection to the dark aura, I can use some magic to punish you accordingly and there isn't much you can do about it. It was a miracle that I managed to succeed in the first place but I'm not complaining. Granted, my body is struggling against the aura like it refuses to accept me using it, but that's a minor technically which can be resolved easily." She then cupped her hands together and a dark aura surrounded them but she laughed before dismissing her power. " I should punish you for revealing yourself to Sunset but I'll let it slide for now."

" You are too kind." Sunset Demon said sarcastically.

" We will succeed in having our desires become a reality!"

" Dead set on doing that, aren't you?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " With the essences of the Elements of Harmony in my pendant combined with the dark aura of this temple, I can grant us a power that will destroy those who defeated us, and no one will be able to stand in our way. I will acquire all of the Equestrian Magic and become all-powerful while you will become the true Sunset Shimmer and everyone will fear you."

" Is that it?"

" What's it?"

" Your plan." Sunset Demon answered. " Your plan is basically seeking out revenge!? I honestly believed that you were going to have something epic in scope that would forever be remembered, but instead you're going with a trope that has been used so often that most would cringe upon hearing about it. You are a demon who possesses a great intelligence that is rivalled by no one and revenge is the name of the game? Revenge never works and if anyone knows better than that, it would be me because of what I did before. I was consumed so much by vengeance that I couldn't see what was happening all along."

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " That's because you weren't thinking logically. You relied on sheer force, intimidation, and maybe some scare tactics every now and then, but such actions will never get you anywhere unless you use intelligence."

Sunset Demon spoke in a quiet voice. " Revenge was your plan, wasn't it?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded partially. " It wasn't my initial idea but rather one that started out as something else before becoming what it is now. When I was revived by the dark aura of this temple, I was curious as to what that aura could really do. That was always my intention but I wanted to focus my efforts on other things just to expand my knowledge. When I helped you come back from the afterlife after hearing you speak about Sunset, I believed you would work with me, and together we could plan our means of getting what we were denied by those who wanted to stop us."

" I was on board until certain things changed."

" When I started collecting the essences of the Elements of Harmony, I believed I could use them to regain my magic without needing this dark aura, but it turned out that the restrictions placed on our Equestrian Magic by this world would have made using the magic pointless. Now, with the dark aura empowering me, I can regain my magic and use it to get rid of our respective counterparts, including Princess Twilight, and their friends."

Sunset Demon yawned. " Your plan has flaws but I'll let you figure them out. Either way, I'll wait here for Sunset and Her Highness to show up, just like you want. I think you will be pleasantly surprised when they arrive."

Midnight Sparkle scoffed. " You're just jealous of my brilliance!" At that moment, a sinister laugh echoed all around the two demons and Midnight Sparkled stomped her way over to where the she-demon was on the verge of falling asleep before kicking her in her side. " I know you don't appreciate my plan or my presence as of late but that doesn't mean you can laugh at everything I've done."

" I didn't laugh at you, Midnight."

Before she could respond, the same echoed laughter occurred again, and Midnight Sparkle kicked Sunset Demon again. " Would you stop that! Ugh! You're beginning to get on my nerves with your incessant childish pranks."

Sunset Demon claimed she didn't laugh and got onto her feet to give her companion a piece of her mind when something suddenly came between them. A burst of flame appeared before them until it formed into a robed figure that wore a strange looking mask. The two demons took note of the figure's flaming swords, the burning eyes located underneath its mask, the lack of emotion, and a powerful aura emanating from it. Midnight Sparkle suspected that this figure was dead though Sunset Demon was more concerned with how it suddenly appeared without them ever sensing its presence.

" So... Two unknown beings have dared enter my sanctum."

" Who are you?" Sunset Demon asked.

" I... am the Garo Master... leader of the assassins who once plagued this ancient kingdom in a time long past."

" Leave us alone!" Midnight Sparkle said. " You don't want to end up suffering a terrible fate."

The Garo Master laughed. " I do not fear undead who have lost their true ferocity. In fact, I could end your pitiful existences at any time I wish over and over so long as the door remains open and we of the afterlife come back through it endlessly. You may remain here in my sanctum, the headquarters of the Garo, all you want but know that the one who possesses light shall appear to free us from our torment."

" What are you getting at?"

The Garo Master laughed. " All will become clear in time."

After switching back to being a Deku Scrub by putting on the Deku Mask, I jumped down to the pillar with the Deku Flower on it. None of the Guays had noticed me so far but there was no telling when they would notice my presence and fly over and attack to protect their territory but I couldn't think about such things given my position. Diving down into the flower and aiming slightly to my right, I figured that I only needed to fly over to the Piece of Heart and shoot one of my bubbles at the crystal switch so as to not be forced to make my way back up here again.

I was curious over why this Piece of Heart had been left out in such an easy to find spot instead of say hidden in a place that would require testing my skills, but I wasn't about to let such a small issue bother me so long as I picked it up and not ignore it. Launching myself from the flower, I floated over to the pillar, collected the Piece of Heart, and my body felt the warm feeling it always did. Considering everything that I had been through so far in this region, I was relieved knowing this one was easy though I suspected it had been placed here to prepare me for what was about to come.

Turning my attention towards the crystal switch, I formed a bubble in my mouth, fired it, activated the switch, and watched as the strange block I saw earlier slid backwards revealing an opening in the ceiling. Much like what happened in the underground maze where I needed to shine light down from above so I could use the Mirror Shield, it seemed the same concept was required to progress further through the castle, and moving that block was the necessary key. I also suspected I would need sunlight to shine down in the opening room yet I hadn't found the place I needed to use the Powder Keg.

Now came the part of getting back down though it wasn't as difficult as it sounded since there was another Deku Flower where the Piece of Heart had been. I slapped my forehead over not noticing it sooner--I felt like an idiot--so I dove into the flower and launched myself only to gently float downwards rather than back to where I was before and go back through the castle until I reached the main entrance. Things were going smoothly initially though a problem would soon manifest itself in the form of discovering the unfortunate drawback of flying using a Deku Flower. Whether I ever realized it or not, I could only fly for so long until it wore off.

When the small flowers I used for flying folded up, I dropped to the ground like a stone, landing incredibly hard, and almost breaking both of my legs in the process. Luckily, I had floated more than halfway down before dropping but the fact that it even happened was both annoying and inconvenient. While I did take some slight damage from my fall, it wasn't serious enough for me to consider consuming some of my milk, but caution would be necessary in the future. Princess Twilight stressed her concern when she flew down to me and I told her that I was okay though it was quite the learning experience.

Grabbing my face, I took off the Deku Mask, flipped back my hair, and made my way over to the main entrance before putting on the Captain's Hat since I knew the ReDeads were still there waiting to attack unless I wore that which resonated with them. Upon going inside, they immediately began dancing again--it was still pretty strange to see--so I ignored them and entered the door that was on my right and into the other side of the castle. This room featured columns much like the previous rooms and I to my left was the sunlight shining down from above along with another sun block.

There was also something else in the room and Princess Twilight alerted me to it. " That is a Floormaster, Sunset. Unlike the Wallmaster, this variant is always on the ground so you don't have to worry about being attacked from above or dragged back to the beginning or anything. Whenever it glows green, it will charge straight at you but you can't attack it as it will be invincible, but it also has one other tactic."

" What's that?" I asked.

" When defeated, a Floormaster will split into three smaller versions of itself."

" That doesn't sound so bad."

" It doesn't at first as the small ones will run around in a bid to get away from you." Twilight said. " However, they do this so that their victim will drop their guard, and then one of them will latch onto the victim's neck, drain away some life energy, and then glow green as it grows back to its original size and becomes a new Floormaster."

" Is there a way to destroy it without that actually happening?"

" Since it's an undead monster, the common trope here would be to use the light against it."

" Really?" I asked sarcastically. " That trope?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Predictable, I know, but you should be glad that it wasn't anything else."

Using the light to defeat an undead monster... That was without a doubt one of the most predictable tropes I've ever heard when it comes to the undead. I mean, there were other methods that would work well against them but why did it have to be that one in particular. I wasn't complaining about it mind you as I was glad I didn't have to go and do something needlessly complicated, but it would have been nice for some kind of variety rather than the same old thing. In any case, defeating the Floormaster would be a much simpler task now that I knew of an easier way to go rather than using my sword.

Slinging my Mirror Shield onto my arm, I walked forward until I was standing directly under the sunlight, and the Floormaster stepped forward towards me using its fingers as a means of walking--really creepy if you asked me--but when the light bounced off my shield and into it, it was destroyed completely. That same light then shone on the sun block causing it to disappear and revealing more ReDeads though they began dancing due to see the mask on my face. Before moving on, I made sure to pick up the five red rupees that had been dropped by the Floormaster before running past the dancing ReDeads.

Opening the door and entering the next room, I immediately recognized the glowing panels on the floor at each corner as belonging to a Wizzrobe. Sunset Demon had warned me about it as an act of charity and though she had been honest with me about the Wizzrobe, I still wasn't sure if she was being sincere with me. It then appeared from the furthest back panel though unlike the previous ones who wielded a staff with ice on it, this one had a staff with fire--it also wore red as opposed to blue--spun around a few times before disappearing leaving me to figure out where it would show up next.

" You need to be careful with this one."

" It uses fire as opposed to ice so I should be fine."

" While that resistance to fire worked in the past, you don't exactly have that kind of ability here."

" Oh... right..."

Princess Twilight nodded. " This Wizzrobe uses fire magic so while you won't get frozen, being hit by one of its spells will cause a lot of damage and maybe even inflict some nasty burns across your body. Fortunately, there are only four panels here so it will be easy to see where it will appear next but don't get too close otherwise it will disappear quickly and re-appear somewhere else and attempt to use its magic."

" Is there a faster way to defeat it?"

" There is but you might not like it."

" Why do I have a feeling it will involve a huge risk." I said. Before I could finish my thought, the Red Wizzrobe appeared from behind me and immediately fired its magic without taking the time to spin around before attacking. I had no hope of avoiding the magic and was blasted at point blank range. " YEEEAAARRRGGGH!" I screamed as my body felt the intense heat coupled with suddenly trudging through a small lava pool the flames had formed. I managed to get out though I took some serious damage and the Red Wizzrobe laughed at my misfortune before disappearing again.

" Sunset!" Twilight screamed. " Are you alright?"

" That... was... painful... to the extreme."

" This Wizzrobe is far stronger than the other ones you fought back in Snowhead Temple."

I struggled to remain standing though it was difficult thanks to my strength suddenly getting sapped in mere seconds. " You said there's a faster way for me to take care of this guy so tell me right now! I don't care whether I like the suggestion or not! I think that got thrown out the window when the Red Wizzrobe decided to set me on fire."

" You can use arrows to defeat it a lot faster." Twilight said. " Ice Arrows would be much more effective though it will consume your Magic Power and they do take a few seconds to power up or there is the Goron option. Gorons resists fire so you could become Darmani and take on the Wizzrobe that way."

The Red Wizzrobe appeared again behind before I had a chance to respond to Princess Twilight and fired its magic without spinning again. I was prepared this time and began running as soon it as flung its magic but I wasn't fast enough and got caught in the fiery blast again. " WAAAAH!!!! YEEEOOOW!!!!" I managed to avoid trudging through the lava pool when it formed but was instead launched forward by the intensity of the head and landed in the center of the room. " Oh come on! That wasn't even fair! It attacked before I could say anything to you, Twilight!" The Red Wizzrobe laughed once again before disappearing, a sign that it obviously didn't care about my feelings."

" Your life force is starting to get low."

" Already figured that out after the second blast."

" Did you decide on how to approach this?"

I nodded. " Becoming a Goron would be good but I want to end this quickly so I'll go with the Ice Arrows." As I took out the Hero's Bow, the Red Wizzrobe appeared on the top-left hand panel and fired its magic at me again. I turned and ran towards the wall just as its fiery magic struck where I had been standing, and my back could feel the intense heat brushing up against it though I managed to avoid taking heavy damage. " I wish I had my resistance right now."

" Then become a Goron!"

" I want to end this quickly!"

" Alright, but be cautious, Sunset."

I had a slight moment to prepare so I powered up my arrows by using the Ice Arrow and was ready to attack the Red Wizzrobe. It then popped up behind me only to suddenly disappearing and re-appear on the top-right panel--it knew I that I now had the means to counter it properly and was determined not to give me a chance--and flung its fiery magic at me again though I responded by running left and avoiding the blast though I was pushed forward by the impact. It then re-appeared in the top-left corner but I managed to fire an Ice Arrow before it could attack. My arrow struck it in the chest and it disappeared once again.

The Red Wizzrobe then re-appeared in the bottom-left corner where I was and attacked me from close range, my body becoming consumed by the fire, and I struggled to get away while my body smelt like it had just gotten roasted. When the fire disappeared and the Red Wizzrobe laughed again, I dropped to one knee, then the other, and finally onto my hands, the fire having inflicted heavy damage onto me. I knew this was now a perfect time to regain some lost health so I placed my bow on the ground and took out one of my bottles of milk before uncorking it and consuming as much as could be chugged down my throat.

My health came back--not much but it was enough--and I corked my bottle before putting it away and getting back to face the Red Wizzrobe again. Aiming with my bow, I waited for it to arrive and it did moments later by showing up right behind me, and in response I fired an Ice Arrow only for it to miss its target and harmlessly hit the wall where an explosion of blue light occurred. Cursing my bad luck, I began preparing another when the Red Wizzrobe flung its magic at me and I rolled forward, my back feeling singed upon the fire's impact against the ground but at least I avoided taking heavy damage again.

No doubt about it... This version of the Wizzrobe was much stronger in that it attacked faster and didn't let itself be as vulnerable. It's fire magic was much more powerful than the ice magic used by the other Wizzrobes and if not for having the bottles of milk, I'd have eventually been roasted to death. No wonder the king was serious about preventing from reaching him what with having powerful soldiers guarding specific locations. I still planned on dealing with this Red Wizzrobe in a quick fashion but perhaps I needed to slow down a little bit so as to not get blindsided by its magic.

Aiming my bow again, the Red Wizzrobe appeared behind me again via the bottom-left panel and I fired my arrow, striking the wall again only the cold explosion wounded it slightly though I wished that my aim had been better. I fired another Ice Arrow immediately as the Red Wizzrobe shook off the cold chill from the explosion and I struck it in the chest causing it to disappear once again. It then re-appeared seconds later and began running about all over the place, and that meant we had already reached the second phase where it would have false projections in a bid to confuse me while it moved about.

" Things are going... okay, I guess."

" You just need to look for the real one and ignore the fakes."

" Good thing I had that milk on hand."

" Yes as without it you would have died by now."

" I didn't realize using magical arrows would be so difficult." I said. " I thought I had gotten used to using them on my previous journey but I guess I need a bit more practice considering how two of my shots missed their target."

" It's because of the amount of time it takes to prepare each arrow." Twilight said. " You can't just fire off magical arrows in rapid-fire succession as there is a slight delay between each so that your magic meter can adjust itself for the slight decline in usage just like how two magic based items can't be used at the same time. One will be used while the other gets negated until the first one is turned off."

Knowing that meant perhaps I should have considered becoming a Goron. " I came this far with Ice Arrows so I might as well finish with it." The Red Wizzrobe appeared along with its fakes and all of them began running around in a bid to confuse me but I knew the real one was the one that was had the fire on its staff--this wasn't true with the others. The real one had been dancing about on the top-right panel--about time it was doing that--and was prepared to attack but I fired an Ice Arrow, striking the Red Wizzrobe, and it disappeared again, its face seething with rage over my actions.

" One more Ice Arrow like that and you'll defeat it!"

I breathed heavily. " Is that all it takes to bring one of these guys down?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Despite using magic, they are vulnerable to it."

I gasped. " I... I could have done this against the previous two Wizzrobes and saved myself a ton of grief." It had slowly dawned on me that I had made the previous encounters with this monster difficult all because I never figured on going with something unexpected rather than the more obvious choice of using brute force. " Why didn't I use magical arrows before and give myself less stress!?"

" Well... You didn't have magical arrows against the initial one."

" I did against the second."

" At least you now know for future reference." Twilight said. She was interrupted when the Red Wizzrobe re-appeared in front of me and it began running around with its fakes going in their own directions. " It may start to behave in an act of desperation since it's on its last legs or not but either way you need to watch for the real one as always."

From now on, I was going to use magical arrows against any and all Wizzrobes so as to avoid this kind of thing happening again provided there are future encounters--I was sure there was going to be one more Wizzrobe somewhere down the road for me to fight against. The Red Wizzrobe fired its magic and I rolled forward to avoid it, my back getting singed in the process, but before I could fire another arrow, it disappeared only to re-appear right behind me, and then it vanished again as soon as it appeared because I was too close to it. You had to give this monster credit for knowing when to attack and to keep its distance from other attacks.

It re-appeared once more and while the fakes ran about, the real one prepared to use another attack. I prevented this by shooting it with an Ice Arrow and it turned out to be the final hit much to my pleasure. The fakes disappeared as the Red Wizzrobe leapt high into the high before landing on its feet and burning away to nothing. I dropped to my knees and wiped my brow out of exhaustion and that's when I noticed that I was still wearing the Captain's Hat on my face. Had I gone through that entire ordeal without taking it off? Well, it didn't get in the way or anything but I took it off anyway.

The door in front of me then unlocked and I got back onto my feet. " We can move on now."

" There could be stronger guards waiting in the next room."

" Should I drink some more milk?"

" You could but you need to conserve some when we reach the throne room." Twilight answered. " The king will be the strongest person in the castle and if you don't have enough healing items on hand, things could get pretty challenging. I suggest maybe holding off on the milk for now and make an appropriate judgment later."

The sounds of wailing could be heard coming from the previous room and that meant there were Poes coming. " I guess either the two we encountered on the other side of the castle have finally caught up with us or there are additional Poes we haven't seen yet." The wailing sounds grew louder prompting me to go through the now unlocked door and so I did and entered the next room where I suddenly came to a stop. " Maybe I shouldn't have taken off my mask after all."

" More of those ReDeads."

" And they're coming towards me."

" Put on one of those masks that resonates with them."

" I don't have enough time!"

Chapter 57: The Heartless Soldier

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
May 22, 2017
Chapter 57: The Heartless Soldier.

Sometime in the past.

" Report, Spitfire!"

Spitfire bowed before her king before speaking. " I have informed the guards that they are to kill the living one when she enters the castle. According to the whispers of the Poes who linger about in the shadows, she is close to acquiring the sacred shield hidden below in the underground maze." Upon saying that, Spitfire gulped as though she believed she would be condemned for saying something that would surely anger her king, but to her surprise, he appeared to be acting rather melancholy about it. " That shield has been a royal treasure for generations, meant only for the chosen ones."

The king raised his hand to silence her. " And yet, this girl is one of those who has been chosen."

" Her!?" Spitfire exclaimed. " She is merely a commoner and pales in comparison to you, my king."

" And yet, she has achieved a task no one has ever done before, yes?"

Spitfire nodded. " Well, yes, but I still don't--"

" This girl possesses powers the likes of which none have ever seen before." The king said. " To doubt that she is of the chosen is a fools gambit. Besides, you know that no one who once lived can wield that shield as it has been imbued with the very light, that which we of the undead cannot tolerate. Long ago, I resigned to the fate that the sacred shield would be claimed by a chosen who was destined to end our suffering should our eternal rest be disturbed."

" You never mentioned anything like this before."

" It was something that has been passed through the Royal Family of Ikana for generations."

Spitfire became excited. " If this living one is the chosen one, then why have you commanded us to attack her? Should she not be given an audience with you, my king? Surely, one with her powers would be able to bring the light to a land that once cherished it?" The king said nothing in response prompting her to take things up a notch. " We've all been wondering why we suddenly awoke from eternal bliss after so long and so far no one has come up with an answer. Even our enemies, the Garo, have returned and are already gathering intelligence as they did in the past."

" She must be killed!"

" But why?"

" Do not question me!"

" Forgive me, my king."

" The Garo are indeed a concern as they could share their intelligence with the living one were she to defeat them." The king said. " That means our defences will be made useless unless she chooses not to believe them." He then began talking to himself. " If she does reach my throne room, I hope she can defeat me and free my soul from being trapped in this limbo. My kingdom must never be allowed to return after such atrocities were made all because we couldn't understand why it happened. We had our chance and squandered it so now we no longer have the right to exist." Noticing that Spitfire was still looking at him, the king coughed before uttering one word: " Ahem!"

Spitfire saluted in response. " Yes, my king?"

" Which of my guards are currently on patrol?"

" There is the Red Wizzrobe guarding the right-hand side of the castle." Spitfire answered. " The Poes who haunt the halls are also willing to defend the castle provided they are allowed to do so at their own discretion. My only concern involves those dancers of yours who became nothing but walking zombies."

" What about them?"

" They are not guards, my king."

" The ReDeads no longer recall what they once were."

Spitfire sighed before continuing. " Were they to be shown a symbol that resonates with them, they are likely to perform their dances as opposed to guarding. The Garo have most likely informed the living one about this and she will have no trouble getting through some of the chambers." She looked at her king to see if he had grown angry over how she was questioning him again, but like before, he didn't budge making her wonder if he was allowing her to expressed her grievances. " Unfortunately, we don't have any other guards available to defend the castle other than Fleetfoot and myself yet our duty is to protect you."

" Then so be it."

" What do you mean, my king?"

" The current guards will have to do."

" It sounds like you want the girl to reach you."

The king smiled. " I cannot confirm or deny that, Spitfire, but as my loyal servant, you shall not question my methods. I need you and Fleetfoot to go back out and observe the living one, and properly this time since I know you did not do this and instead came back here upon informing the guards of the girl's eventual arrival. I know your duty is to protect me but I can take care of myself! My skills far outweigh those of both you and Fleetfoot! Now go! Only return when you have finished observing her."

Spitfire bowed slightly before turning around and walking towards the entrance of the throne room. In her mind--she couldn't afford to mumble under her breath in case the king could hear what she was saying--she couldn't understand why the king wasn't taking things seriously. She and Fleetfoot were the elite guards and it was their duty to protect him despite his protests against this. Their effectiveness in fulfilling their duties would prove challenging if they were to be sent away to observe someone who had been chosen by destiny to fulfill a great purpose according to what Spitfire understood after her audience.

When she stepped outside of the throne room, Fleetfoot was there, eager to receive her new orders. " Well, Spitfire? What did the king say? Are we to protect him like we're supposed to or are we to do something else?"

" We are to observe the living one when she arrives." Spitfire answered.

Fleetfoot was surprised. " Really? Well, if that's what the king wants us to do then we must obey."

" Even though we should remain here and protect him?"

" Never question the king."

" I know that, Fleetfoot!"

" This living one must be something if she was able to make it through the underground." Fleetfoot said. " Those Gibdo down there can easily rend anything to pieces in mere moments--we know as we lost so many good soldiers down there--so anyone who managed to survive is someone we can't allow to reach the king. The other guards are already in place and are ready to kill her upon sight."

" I wonder..."

Fleetfoot sighed. " You know we can't question the king as I said. We must carry out his commands without question even if they don't make much sense. Anyway, we should go to one of the rooms that the living one must past through and see what kind of person we're up against." She began moving only to turn around and notice that Spitfire wasn't moving prompting her to grab Spitfire's arm and began pulling her. " Come on, Spitfire! We must complete our task as the king wishes! Don't make me have to drag you all the way there as you know how I feel about not using my sword arm as intended.

Facing a ReDead was tough enough since it could paralyze you on the spot before latching onto you and draining away your life energy in mere moments, but facing four of them at the same time was practically a death sentence as your chances of survival were slim. One could paralyze while the other three would proceed to have their fill of life energy and there was nothing you could do to stop them other than reminisce over how you ended up being consumed by the undead. Had I entered the room while wearing the Captain's Hat or one of my other masks that resonated with the ReDead, I would have easily waltzed past them without having to bat an eyelid.

Unfortunately, I took off said mask before coming in here and now I was staring death straight in the face. Even if I had the most powerful sword imaginable--I didn't and I really needed to get around to acquiring it--it would do nothing if I were paralyzed several times over all because of their cursed gaze. No wonder no one was able to survive down below in the underground tunnels. The Gibdo were of a similar mindset to the ReDead in that they could paralyze, latch onto, and drain the life energy out of their victims in the same vain though they were seen as far more dangerous.

The ReDead began shuffling towards me upon seeing as an enemy and my body was frozen on the spot instantly as their gazes bore down on me. I tried to fight back using my shield to perhaps deflect their gaze but it didn't work and they continued to slowly make their way over to me. Every time I would regain movement, I would lose it again upon being paralyzed and whenever I had a brief moment to make a move, I got paralyzed and feared that it would be my last one before death. If there was one surprising moment in all of this, it would be the fact that Princess Twilight was unaffected by their gaze.

Most elements, environments, and other magical--and non-magical--afflictions I felt had no effect on Her Highness other than the rare instance where she too would be in the same boat, but most of the time she could just go about her business while I had to endure incredible hardship before either succeeding or wanting to run away. I knew it wasn't her fault that she possessed so many immunities yet sometimes I felt that perhaps things would have gone a lot better had I been a fairy. That way, I could ignore all of those afflictions yet it would prove difficult to fight monsters if I only had a tiny body.

When I got paralyzed for about the eighth time--I had since lost track of how many times it actually had been--I had slowly inched my way backwards towards the door in the hopes of being able to open it and escape so that I could put on one of my masks, but the ReDead were wise to my plan and ensured that I couldn't do anything as they continued to paralyze me one after another until they could latch on and drain me. Fortunately, it turned out that Princess Twilight could also open doors. When it looked like I would surely die, she reached out with her hand, touched the door, and it slid open allowing us both to escape.

Unlike most other doors we had seen throughout our journey, the doors inside the Castle of Ikana were the kind that slid open before sliding back into place. Had the doors here featured doorknobs instead, I doubted Her Highness would have been able to open it, and I would currently be having my life energy drained. On the other side, I began breathing heavily as a result of having cheated death yet again--I wasn't fond of doing it mind you--and upon regaining my composure, I sat down, buried my head into my knees, and mumbled silently to myself, Princess Twilight respectfully giving me some much needed space.

After I had finished with my little moment, I lifted up my head and pressed my ear against the door. " I don't hear them on the other side." I pulled my ear away from the door and got back onto my feet. " Either they moved back to where they were before or are waiting for us to go back in there and resume paralyzing me."

" I'm going to say that the former is what happened." Twilight said.

" Now you understand how I feel about dealing with the undead."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Neither of us knew those creatures were waiting on the other side of the door so you can't be faulted for taking off your mask. If I hadn't been able to open the door, we'd still be stuck in there and you... well... I don't need to explain any further."

I shook my head. " I'd rather not think about THAT alternative."

" I am surprised that I could open doors at all considering you've been doing it this entire time."

" Just goes to show you what you're capable of under extreme stress."

" In any case, we still need to keep going if we're to reach the throne room."

I nodded as I took out the Captain's Hat and placed it on my face. " We know that there is something that needs to be destroyed using the Powder Keg and we have one on hand so there's no need to suddenly retreat and come back here later." I breathed a sigh of relief knowing I had a Powder Keg on me. " I'm going to assume that we need it to open the way to the throne room but I'm curious as to the purpose of that one sun block we saw back at the entrance."

" I've been thinking about it myself." Twilight said. " The throne room could be behind that block and since light is required to remove it, it can be viewed as the perfect means of defense as no one else would come along with the necessary items with which to remove it."

" How do you suppose Spitfire and Fleetfoot got past it?"

" As servants to the king, I suspect they know of alternative paths."

" Hopefully, we won't need to use one of those."

Opening the door, I went back into the room with the ReDeads and they immediately began dancing. My heart pounded against my chest for a few moments before quickly calming down upon realizing that everything was okay. It still felt weird seeing them dance around despite being undead monsters but at least I could now walk past them and continue on with my journey. One ReDead in particular struck Princess Twilight as being odd and she insisted on showing this to me. While I wanted to move on after almost getting killed, Her Highness was insistent on me taking a closer look.

This particular ReDead had gotten down onto its hands and was kicking its legs in conjunction with flailing about its arms without losing its balance, and I could swear that it was closing its eyes every now and again along with sticking out what constituted as a tongue. I thought it was disturbing but when Princess Twilight mentioned that the dance the ReDead was doing was what she had done during the Fall Formal the previous year, I couldn't help but chuckle despite my reservations towards that event. I was a horrible person when it happened so my experience wasn't as pleasant. Still, I could imagine Her Highness dancing like that.

Walking past the ReDeads and up the stairs to the next floor, I began contemplating something that suddenly popped into my mind when Her Highness showed me the ReDead dancing in the manner she had done. It must have been difficult for her when she first came to the world I now called home. After all, she had only known the magic filled world of Equestria and believed it would be a similar experience, but instead she practically had to re-learn everything, including how to walk as going from four legs to two would do that to you. I'll even bet she walked into a door or two before learning how to use hands.

Me? I went through a similar experience though my thought-process was hatred rather than shock. When I first entered the world of humans, I struggled to get used to having two legs and no magic--even now I wonder where I got those clothes from--and stumbled about as Princess Twilight must have surely done, yet my hatred towards Princess Celestia was what fueled my desire to want to get adjusted to my new form and subjugate the people under my thumb. Even when walking into doors, slipping on ice, and even wanting to eat hay out of a yearn for back home, my hatred kept me going.

Now, I've gotten so used to it that I fear I've forgotten how to be a pony, and a part of me is afraid that I'll never be able to experience it again. I supposed there will come a time where I must return to Equestria for something--probably to get a new magic journal for instance--and I'd need to quickly get reacquainted with being a pony but then many ponies would question me endlessly, wondering where I've been for so long, and even my own family would ask questions. Until absolutely necessary, I intended on remaining as a human--I still feared being sent to the desolate wastes because of stealing an important artefact.

The next door took me back outside where I immediately noticed that the floor at the end of the path looked like it had given way slightly. No doubt that this was the place that needed to be destroyed with the Powder Keg. Judging from the approximate location of where we were, blowing up this section would shine light down into the entrance room below, and I could remove the sun block and gain access to whatever lurked behind it. And, so long as I wore the Captain's Hat--or any other appropriate mask--I wouldn't be attacked by the ReDeads yet I wondered if this unusual immunity would apply to the king himself.

Princess Twilight then alerted me to something or someone in front of us who was hiding underneath an old stone slab that overlooked the weakened floor. It took me a moment to recognize Fleetfoot yet something didn't seem quite right. " You were able to defeat the Red Wizzrobe!? Next to the elite guard, there was no one else that powerful, and here you are having bested him without even breaking a sweat."

" Why are you hiding under there?" I asked as I took a step forward.

Fleetfoot aimed her sword at me. " Stay where you are!"

" You don't want me to come over to you?"

" I'd love nothing more than to teach you a lesson, but, the thing is, I'm not very comfortable in the sunset." Fleetfoot answered. I squinted my eyes in hopes of getting a better look at her and from what I could see, she was definitely nervous about being outside where the sun was blazing even as it was settling down for the night. " This should have been an epic battle between warriors but it looks like I got shafted without even realizing it until I got up here."

" Where is Spitfire?"

" How do you know her name?"

" I also know that you're Fleetfoot."

" Are you psychic or something?"

I shook my head. " I heard you two mention your names when I encountered you earlier in the castle." Now that Fleetfoot had mentioned it, Spitfire was nowhere to be seen, and my assumption was that they were never apart. According to Princess Twilight, in Equestria, one could never be seen without the other, yet did that apply here in Termina despite some slight similarities? " I thought Spitfire would be here since she appears to be your superior judging from how you two acted."

Fleetfoot was shocked to say the least. " What!? Me!? Being her underling!? You've got to be kidding me! I am far superior to Spitfire even though she thinks she is better, but let me tell you that my swordsmanship skills are superior to even that of our king, and that makes me the most feared swordsman in all of Ikana!" She then noticed I was taking small steps towards her and she raised her weapon again. " I said don't move! Why is such a simple task so difficult for someone to follow?" In her tirade, Fleetfoot dropped her sword and I took advantage by walking forward but she quickly picked it up only to notice how close I really was. " Huh?"

I could tell she was looking at me funny and I wanted her to stop. " Um... Why are you staring at me?"

" Captain Keeta!" Fleetfoot announced. " Boy am I glad to see you! I thought that was you who I saw earlier."

I couldn't believe it! She actually thought that I was Captain Keeta himself? I had no idea how Fleetfoot could come to such a daffy conclusion since I was clearly flesh rather than bones and he was clearly much taller, but perhaps her confusion stemmed from the fact that I was wearing the Captain's Hat on my face. Captain Keeta had told me that anyone who once served under him would recognize his symbol of authority yet I didn't think an elite guard like Fleetfoot would mistake me for him. Perhaps the same was true with Spitfire and the king himself though I'd need to meet him so I could test such a theory.

While a part of me felt a little mischievous and wanting to see how long I could drag this out, the serious side of me knew that I needed to progress and that meant talking to her by asking the correct questions, and there was one in particular that was now weighing on my mind. Unlike other undead, Keeta wasn't affected by the light since his remains were located in the graveyard which was pretty out in the open, yet other denizens might not appreciate being in the light. If this were true, would Fleetfoot reveal such a thing to me or would she see me as an imposter even though I was.

" I... um... came here to check on the king."

" You don't need to worry about him."

" Um... Are you and Spitfire guarding him?"

Fleetfoot sighed. " The king ordered us to observe a living one who was said to be infiltrating the castle, but she insisted on going back to him and ensuring his protection was adequate even though he issued her a direct command. Now I'm here on my own waiting for some girl to show up and so far no such person has shown up." She took a closer look at me to make sure that I was who she thought I was before putting her sword away. " If anyone can find that living one, it's you, Captain Keeta. I know you were humiliated that one time in battle but you can easily get over that."

" Where is the throne room?"

" You want to know where that is?" Fleetfoot asked. " You should know where it is, Captain Keeta. It's hidden behind that strange block with the sun insignia on it. The king ordered it to be placed there so as to prevent anyone other than the chosen one from gaining access to the throne room."

" Chosen one?"

Fleetfoot nodded. " The king has been mumbling about something regarding a chosen who is said to acquire the sacred shield from the underground, helped to ease the lingering regrets of the Gibdos down there, and is to go to the temple in order to seal it up again. None of us believe his words are true which may explain why he often mumbles such things to himself, but when you have good ears like I do, you can hear anything." Her eyes then saw the shield on my back and she immediately became curious. " Say... that's a pretty nice shield you have there, Captain Keeta. It looks a lot like the one the king hid down in the underground ages ago."

I looked behind my back nervously at the shield Fleetfoot was talking about. " Um... What about it?"

" I'm sure it looks like the shield." Fleetfoot answered. " In fact, I know it's the..." It dawned on her that I wasn't the real Captain Keeta and her expression immediately changed from happiness to anger. " You... You tricked me! You're not the real Captain Keeta! Ugh! How could I be so stupid to not realize that you were wearing his mask." It occurred to her at that moment that she recognized what was on my face and recoiled slightly. " No one has ever been able to claim his mask before. Could it be? Is it possible? Are you the chosen one our king had said would come?" She shook her head. " No... No... You couldn't possibly be the chosen one."

" Why can't you tolerate the light?"

" Huh?"

" You heard me!"

" Like I'm going to tell you that." Fleetfoot said. " I'd have to be foolish as to say that some of us undead are extremely prone to the light hence why we must remain in the darkness or else become nothing but spirits were the light to strike us down."

It took her a few moments to realize that she had unintentionally revealed something she shouldn't have. As a result, Fleetfoot disappeared into the ground, but not before telling me to come to the throne room so that the king would end my life at the end of his blade. I dropped to my knees and breathed several times before soaking up what I had learned. The king was waiting for a chosen one to appear, and judging from what Fleetfoot had to say, the chosen one was me since I had the Mirror Shield and had survived the underground maze by helping the Gibdo with their regrets.

She also unintentionally reaffirmed what that one Garo said about the weakness of the king though I shouldn't have been surprised by that. For whatever reason, the undead were extremely vulnerable to the light, and whenever it came to dealing with it, they would cower in fear and attempt to blot out the light by using darkness which is what they both fed on and relied on for their power. Not all monsters hated the light... Only the undead and other monsters that lived in the darkness couldn't stand it. I then had a sinking feeling Fleetfoot was going to make sure I lived to regret taking advantage of her confusion even though she did walk right into it.

Walking over to where the indent in the ground was, I began stomping it with my foot to see if anything would happen, and sure enough, small cracks appeared indicating that it had fallen into decay for quite some time. No doubt it would crumble to dust upon use of the Powder Keg but I thought maybe I could loosen it by myself without needing to waste my powerful explosive. I stomped my foot down on the loose ground several more times and while more cracks appeared, it was obvious that using my foot would only be a waste of time. I needed to blow open a hole in the ceiling now and not later.

Princess Twilight flopped down on my hat. " We were lucky that Fleetfoot gave us the information that she did."

" I do feel bad for unintentionally tricking her."

" You shouldn't since technically you've been tricking most people across Termina."

I knew what Her Highness was getting at. " That's because I needed to carry on their lives so that their respective people could be saved though I'm not sure if that was the case with the Deku Scrub I become."

" I know but I was just saying..."

I nodded. " In those incidents, I tricked the Deku, Gorons, and Zora but for the right reasons, and with the latter two tribes, if they had found out that Darmani and Mikau had been killed in their respective fashions, no doubt they would have been devastated and their morale in this dismal world would really have been shot. With Fleetfoot, I feel bad for having tricked her despite knowing that she's the enemy."

" You've got a good heart, Sunset."

" Maybe too good?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " It shows that you've come so far ever since you accepted friendship into your heart. True, you have personal experience from your time as being both a bully and a monster, yet you teach others not to fall into the same trap. Starlight has been doing something similar to that back in Equestria but she tends to struggle with some of my more simple friendship lessons. Unlike her, you were able to complete the lessons without much trouble but you did have to rely on your own intuition rather than having me guiding you along the way."

" Speaking of Starlight... I wonder what she's thinking about right now."

" That was surprising."

" She's up there on the Clock Tower, laughing at how all of her pranks have played out, yet I sometimes wonder if she shows any remorse for what she's done." I said. " I know the answer to that is practically zero but I think she might be realizing that what she's done has gone way too far for a common prank."

" I've been thinking about that."

" And?"

" Starlight is a powerful unicorn." Twilight answered. " In fact, her magic at times even exceeds my own and I'm an alicorn, but I think she might have an understanding as to what she is doing and has realized that she needs to stop before its too late for this world." Her Highness then paused for a moment and something began sinking in before she sighed and continued talking. " Then again, Starlight has used questionable methods with which to solve a problem, methods that resonate with the thought of using power. If that aspect of her personality was retained in this version of her, I don't think she cares about her actions."

I interrupted her with a sudden exclamation. " Starlight is stronger than you!?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Um... Yes?"

I shook my head in disbelief. " And I was taught by Princess Celestia that alicorns were supposed to be the strongest ponies in terms of using magic. Guess Starlight must be an exception to the rule if her magic was able to exceed what you can do, and you yourself have dedicated your life to studying magic so that you could be the best at it like Starswirl the Bearded." I knew my words were hurtful but then Her Highness had experience much harsher criticism. " Don't about it, Twilight. I ended up getting overshadowed by you and while it annoyed me initially when you followed me, I grew to accept it because you stuck to it while I chose to take an easy path."

" At least you show maturity about it."

" And you don't?"

Princess Twilight looked the other way and I knew nothing I say would get her to answer my question. This was a side of her I didn't know much about and it felt pleasant to see because it showed that despite being an alicorn, she was just as capable of having flaws like anyone else, and had to learn to accept them as part of who she was. While I wished some of my flaws no longer held me down--temper being my biggest problem--others I've accepted as being part of my personality that others have learned to appreciate because they've come to expect it from me.

Still, I was surprised that Starlight was much more powerful than appearances suggested, but I supposed it was something I should have expected given that she had the unique ability to remove a pony's cutie mark just by using an incantation along with a made up relic that was simply a stick she found. Removing cutie marks was something not even Celestia herself knew was possible so it never came up when I was her student but even if it had, I probably would have tried using it to get my way and to move closer to ascension. Just thinking of what it must have been like for the ponies who had to give theirs up sent shivers down my spine.

Turning my attention towards the indent, I took off the Captain's Hat, switched it with the Goron Mask, placed it on my face, and I began stumbling about as my body shimmered from human to Goron--I was glad there was a fence otherwise I would have dropped down and either would have broken something or lost my life. When I had finished changing I took out my Powder Keg, carefully placed it down on the indent, and stood back knowing that the explosive had a short fuse--I didn't want to get caught in the explosion. As the fuse slowly ticked away, I imagined what was awaiting me upon reaching the throne room.

I had hoped that the king would at least see to reason and not want to fight me just because I had entered his castle without permission, but deep down I knew that reasoning with someone who possessed a lust for power was impossible. The King of Ikana was determined to restore the once ancient kingdom back to its former glory despite it being nothing more than a desolate wasteland--how ironic. Nothing could reverse such decay as it had been neglected for far too long yet he needed to know this the hard way. A part of me was curious about how this land once looked during its glory days.

BOOOOOOOOM!!!!

Night of the Second Day - 36 Hours Remain.

When the Powder Keg exploded, not only had the resulting explosion created a hole in the floor, the howling of the wolf indicated that nightfall had come. I needed to act fast as there was no telling how long it would take me to knock some sense into the king. Before jumping down, I knew there were ReDeads waiting for me below and to jump down there without having the proper mask on was suicide as they would drain my life energy. Grabbing my face, I took off the Goron Mask to become human, flipped my hair back, put my mask away, and switched over to the Captain's Hat before putting it on.

I also concluded that the only way onward was to drop down through the hole rather than go back the way I came--I could have jumped down to the ground below and entered through the main entrance but I wanted the element of surprise on my side. Slinging the Mirror Shield off of my back and onto my arm hoping that the ReDeads would be vulnerable to the light and doing some last minute breathing exercises, I jumped into the hole, landing in-between all four ReDeads who began dancing instantly. I had no idea how I didn't sustain any damage from my jump but I wasn't about to complain considering my current position.

Raising the Mirror Shield, the light that shone from it struck the sun block causing it to disappear, but when I slun my shield onto my back, the light reflected off a ReDead destroying it instantly and leaving behind some rupees. My first instinct was to prepare an adequate defence yet they continued dancing as though nothing had happened. Grabbing the rupees the one ReDead had left, I chose to ignore the rest--I didn't need additional money for the moment--and walked down the passage where it suddenly turned dark. I could hear wailing sounds all around me, a sign that the undead were lingering about and were looking to feast on my life energy.

The path eventually ended at another door yet pots lining up on either side of it told me that the throne room was in the next chamber. " Well... This is it! We made it to the throne room despite some fierce opposition."

" You should take off the Captain's Hat, Sunset, as you don't need it."

" Actually... I want to try something."

" What did you have in mind?"

" Captain Keeta served the king, correct?" I asked. Princess Twilight nodded and I smiled in return. " I doubt that this will work since the king is likely to be less susceptible to being tricked compared with Fleetfoot, but I want to see how he would react to seeing the Captain's Hat on my face. He might think I'm Captain Keeta and perhaps talk with me instead of wanting to fight or it might blow up in my face. Either way, I want to try at least once."

Princess Twilight smiled. " You should make such an attempt at the earliest opportunity."

" If I can avoid any unnecessary fighting, I'll go ahead and do so."

" Before going inside, you should smash those pots so that you can stock up on supplies."

As I picked up and smashed the pots, a wild idea came to mind. " I was thinking of trying some other masks when encountering the king and his guards. Before you go and say that I'm being reckless, Twilight, hear me out. I need to use some of my non-transforming masks so that they can get some love rather than just abandon them after going to great lengths to get them to begin with."

" Well... So long as you go with the more serious masks."

" I was thinking of using the Bunny Hood, the Blast Mask, and the Bremen Mask."

" The first one should definitely prove useful as it will give you the speed necessary to avoid attacks." Twilight said. " I'm actually surprised that you never used it before despite having gotten it quite some time ago. Either you felt wearing the Bunny Hood would look silly given your current attire or you wanted to prove your resolve by not being augmented by the power contained within the hood."

I blinked a couple of times when Her Highness mentioned augmented. I mean, I knew what the word meant. It's just that she used it in such an awkward manner that I couldn't help but react like that. And yet, she was right in that I didn't feel the need to use it--that first reason was completely false. " Okay... and your thoughts on the other two?"

" The Blast Mask is risky but should catch them by surprise."

" And the other?"

Princess Twilight just stared at me for a few moments before answering. " Why would you want to use a mask that corrals small animals into following you? I doubt it would be useful against the strongest undead we've seen so far."

" You never know."

" I hope you're joking, Sunset."

I shook my head and Princess Twilight was simply stunned by my resolve. I didn't understand why I felt the need to want to use the Bremen Mask against Spitfire, Fleetfoot, and the king, but it felt right to want to use it. In Her Highness' eyes, I was coming off as someone who wasn't taking things seriously, yet that wasn't true at all. I had every intention of trying to resolve things without fighting but I needed some alternative methods to use that could hopefully avert a battle. My heart hoped for a peaceful resolution yet my head was telling me that I should prepare for the worst.

Once I felt I was ready, I opened the door and entered a large chamber that featured two windows, pillars at each corner of the room, a lush yet worn-out carpet that went from the entrance to the back of the room, and culminating at the end was the throne itself. Compared with everything else in the case, it looked remarkably intact as though someone had gone to a lot of trouble keeping in good condition. I could sense darkness all around me, a sign that I was now at the heart of everything I had endured thus far. There was no turning back now otherwise my efforts would have meant nothing.

Gulping, I began walking forward until I stopped upon seeing Spitfire and Fleetfoot standing before me. Both of them had either suddenly materialized out of nowhere or had been waiting in the shadows for me to approach. No doubt Fleetfoot was still seething over revealing certain information she shouldn't have but I couldn't allow that to be a distraction. Spitfire kept a close eye of my every move as though she didn't want me to get anywhere near the throne, but then both of them suddenly got down onto one knee and I gulped in response upon seeing the king himself sit down on his throne.

Much like Spitfire and Fleetfoot, he appeared from either materializing or from the shadows, yet unlike them he wasn't a zombie which struck me as odd. Instead, he was a skeleton wearing royal regalia--he bore a slight resemblance to a Stalfos much to my extreme displeasure--though this didn't seem to faze him given how his entourage knelt before him. I couldn't recognize anyone from either Equestria, Canterlot High, or Crystal Prep whenever I looked upon the king's face so I assumed that this was the real version and not someone from my world portraying him. And then there were those eyes... small... beady... yet filled with a powerful darkness.

" So... You are the one I've heard so much about."

" I guess so." I said.

" Such a modest answer that belies a hidden truth."

" What do you mean?"

The king laughed under his breath. " All will be revealed to you in due time, but first, allow me to introduce myself."

Spitfire took immediate offence to this. " What!? My king!? Why would you reveal your name to this living one!? She doesn't deserve to know such a thing as she is nothing more than a common girl who somehow made it all the way here without much trouble."

" Silence!"

" But..."

The king slammed his fist down onto the arm of the throne and Spitfire immediately went silent. " I told you before to never question my actions, Spitfire. Even now, your standing with me has reached a low point because you chose to disobey my command. You were to observe this one and instead you came back here in order to protect me, yet I never wanted such protection as you know I can take care of myself." He turned towards Fleetfoot, a disapproving expression clearly on his face. " And you, Fleetfoot... You were so easily deceived that you gave out precious information this living one has used to learn about my ambition."

Fleetfoot lowered her head in shame and looked at me with extreme anger. " I did not mean to reveal such important information, my king. I thought she was Captain Keeta and tricked me into revealing your innermost musings." Her expression changed to a gasp upon realizing that she had blurted out the fact that she had been able to hear the king talking quietly and lowered her head even further. " I did not mean to listen in to your private matters, my king."

The king was clearly unamused. " You shall be punished for listening to that which did not concern you, Fleetfoot, but perhaps you can redeem yourself shortly by dealing with our most esteemed guest. Now then... Allow me to introduce myself. I am Igos du Ikana, the last ruler of the Ikana Kingdom before it was destroyed as a result of circumstances beyond its control. I have heard that you have succeeded in doing the one thing no one has ever done before, and that is appease the Gibdo that lurk underground."

" And what if I did?" I asked.

Igos snickered. " Do not attempt to hide the truth from me. I can see the sacred shield that I hid down there in an age long forgotten on your back. That alone is proof that you appeased the Gibdo of their regrets as there was no other means of acquiring it from that accursed underground. You have my respect for having done what others failed to do yet you have also committed a terrible sin that must be rectified before it becomes too problematic."

" What do you mean?"

" You brought something into this land."

" Like what?"

" Light."

I was stunned slightly by this revelation though I suspected it would be that. " The light is a guiding force for me though it took me a while to be worthy of it. I would go into details as to the meaning behind my words but that's a bit personal. In any case, I came here hopefully to speak with you without having to fight." As I spoke, the windows suddenly got covered in drapes, plunging the throne room into darkness but I couldn't allow that to intimidate me. " You and the rest of the undead shouldn't be here."

Igos slammed both fists before lurching forward. " Such insolence from one like yourself! You make such a claim when in fact you have done much worse? Are you such a hypocrite that you neglect your own actions? Fool! You have brought the unthinkable into a land as dark as Ikana. My servants have fallen namelessly before the light that guides you, the light which blinds those who are susceptible to it, weakened by it, and cower at the mere mentioning of it! Had you not brought that accursed power here then you would be dead by now and my ambitions could continue unabaded."

" Your plan to revive this kingdom is nothing short of insane!"

" What!?"

" I don't know what happened to your kingdom long ago nor do I understand fully what you intend on doing now." I said. " But what I do know is that you can't be allowed to succeed in something that would only cause suffering to a world that is already on the brink."

" Then it shows you are ignorant." Igos said. " However... You shall see with your own eyes... That the darkness is one that isn't so easy to destroy. First, I shall test you to see if you are worthy enough to face me in the heat of battle itself!"

He snapped his bony fingers prompting both Spitfire and Fleetfoot to stand up, draw their swords, and advance towards me. My efforts in trying to resolve the situation through diplomacy had failed so now I had no other choice but to fight against the elite guards. Fleetfoot managed to reach me first and swung her sword erratically because she felt humiliated over being tricked yet each blow didn't find its mark resulting in Spitfire having to take the initiative and swing her sword appropriately. I managed to bring out my Mirror Shield just as her blade came swinging down, sparks flew upon sword crashing against shield, Fleetfoot clearly showing annoyance over being upstaged.

" Stand aside, Spitfire!" Fleetfoot said. " This one is mine!"

" We have to work together!" Spitfire said.

" This living one must pay for humiliating me in front of the king!"

" She will suffer, yes, but you must remain focused otherwise the battle will go against us."

" Like how you were focused on carrying out the king's orders?"

Spitfire turned away from Fleetfoot in disgust. " I had to protect him even if he didn't want it because that's our job as his elite guard. His order, while absolute, was also foolish in that he left himself vulnerable to the likes of this living flesh who may or may not be special. While our king is more powerful than both of us combined, he cannot be forced to fight battles we can surely do ourselves. Now come! Let us deal with this girl together!"

Fleetfoot pushed Spitfire out of the way. " Not a chance! The girl is mine and you won't get in the way."

Already the two of them were bickering over me and while that meant I could easily deal with them more easily, it also made them more unpredictable with their actions. Looking up at the curtains that had since covered the windows, I recalled what the one Garo said about having to burn away that which disrupted the light. It took me a second to realize that it was referring to fire and how I needed to use it to burn the curtains so that light would shine in here. Fortunately, I had plenty of arrows along with enough magic, but I needed enough space otherwise I would easily get pinned down by Spitfire and Fleetfoot.

Knowing that the curtain closest to the entrance to the throne room was too difficult at the moment since the guards were practically on top of me, I ran past them--I was much faster than they were--took out the Hero's Bow, readied a Fire Arrow, and stood below the other curtain before firing at it. Upon striking the curtain, it immediately burned away exposing the room to the light though it was restricted to a small square but hopefully it would be enough. I suspected that Spitfire and Fleetfoot needed to be pushed into the light in order for them to be defeated and that meant getting up close and personal.

Before I could do anything, Igos suddenly got up off his throne and looked directly at me. " Ohhh! Keeta! Is it not Captain Keeta? I was wondering what happened to you after you were defeated in battle. Rumours say you were so ashamed that you never fought again, yet here you are once again ready to serve your king."

" Um..." I said.

" What's wrong, Keeta? Why do you show hesitation?"

" Um..."

" Igos then noticed what was wrong. " Wait! You are indeed Captain Keeta... But you're so... T-tiny!" A sudden silence than echoed throughout the throne before Igos came to the conclusion that he had almost been duped by my unintentional deception. " I was nearly fooled by you unlike Fleetfoot here who was so gullible that she believed your deception without even realizing it. I will not be fooled so easily unlike those who swore their servitude towards me."

While his reaction towards what happened was comical, it ultimately meant nothing as he was still determined to see me dead. Knowing that there was no reason to continue wearing the Captain's Hat, I took it off, put it away, and took out the Blast Mask in hopes I could use it to damage Spitfire and Fleetfoot thereby pushing them into the sunlight. In hindsight, using this mask wouldn't work either as they could easily move far enough away to avoid the blast radius and I would be taking damage every time not to mention. Not only that but I'd have to wait for a couple of minutes before using the mask to cause an explosion again.

Fleetfoot, whose anger had risen even further as a result of what Igos said, performed a jump attack that knocked me down onto my butt, and when I got back onto my feet after avoiding her thrusting her sword into the ground, she swung at me repeatedly, forcing me to use my shield to deflect her blows. She continued swinging away, each blow grew stronger and stronger, and I noticed she was forcing me towards Igos who merely watched with amusement. Fleetfoot pushed me close enough to the king that he responded by kicking me so hard, I landed on the other side of the room.

Getting back up, it was obvious that Igos couldn't be approached as he didn't see me as being worthy. Luckily, he had kicked me to where the other window was so I quickly fired a Fire Arrow at the curtain, burning it to ashes allowing another patch of light to shine down into the throne room, and it caused Igos more discomfort. Spitfire and Fleetfoot then retreated backwards to avoid knowing what I had done and while it meant having two chances at luring them towards the light, they weren't exactly going to follow me unless they were coerced into doing so.

" The living one has brought light into this room!" Fleetfoot exclaimed.

" That's why we should have attacked her together." Spitfire said.

" I told you that she is mine!"

Spitfire sighed. " You're allowing your anger over your humiliation to blind you to what's going on around you. Maybe you should fall back and allow me the chance to defeat her in the name of our king and the kingdom? My calm demeanour will keep her occupied."

Fleetfoot pushed her aside again. " My honour is at stake, Spitfire! I must restore it!"

Spitfire rubbed the bridge of her nose. " While that was a noble sentiment, Fleetfoot, you should know that you're on bad terms with the king right now. If you were to be defeated all because you couldn't control that anger of yours, you would be doing a great disservice to he who commands us."

" Me!? Bad terms!? What about you?"

" Whatever are you on about?"

" You disobeyed the king by going back to protect him when he said not to."

Spitfire pushed Fleetfoot this time. " That's because I was performing my duty whereas you shirked yours! The king will forgive me for disobeying him because this was the very reason why he needed protecting. If both of us fall in battle against this girl, he will be forced to fight her without us being there to back him up. My actions were noble while yours were only to an extent."

Both of them then began bickering back and forth leaving me standing there wondering what exactly was going on. When I initially encountered them in the castle, they were working well together despite one or two slight hiccups yet now they were on the verge of fighting each other. No doubt the king wasn't thrilled about seeing such a display but I couldn't afford to focus on him right now. At the very least, I had a free moment to plan out my next move. Fleetfoot's attacks weren't all that powerful since she was determined to cut me down and therefore wasn't using her full strength while Spitfire remained unknown since she had yet to do anything.

I needed to get both of them to stand in either one of the squares of sunlight to defeat them. Since they were both zombies--and by slight extension ReDeads--being basked in the light would defeat them but that would prove challenging since they might ignore me completely and choose to fight each other. I then thought that perhaps I could shine light onto them using the Mirror Shield and reflect light that way yet their shields could easily deflect it. Before I could come up with another idea, Spitfire swung her sword at me, prompting me to raise my shield in response following by crossing swords with her.

Unlike Fleetfoot, Spitfire was much more refined with her sword strikes, and both of us ended up parrying each other's blows. We began moving around the room, our swords clanging against one another every other second yet neither of us would budge an inch. Eventually, Spitfire's experience would overwhelm me and she started striking me in the stomach before sending me flying with a upward slice, and I landed a short distance away. I got back onto my feet only to get struck down by her again, falling flat on my stomach, and forced to roll along the ground to safety before I could get back up again.

When I got up, I raised my shield just as Spitfire's sword came crashing down on me again. If this was how strong she was, I could only begin to imagine how strong Igos was by comparison, and the diagnosis was against me on all fronts. I finally found a break when her sword recoiled off my shield in an awkward manner and I took advantage by swinging my sword, striking her stomach, only to discover that my blow did absolutely nothing. Was it because she was a zombie that my sword had no effect? Or was my sword just not powerful enough and needed to be upgraded?

Either way, Spitfire struck me again, causing me to land on my butt... again. Before I could get up, she aimed her sword at my head--it was mere inches from my face--and I knew I had to do something before she would perform a finishing blow. At that moment, Fleetfoot butted in, pushing Spitfire aside, prompting the latter to push back, followed by the former until they began arguing. While they were distracted, I consumed the rest of the milk I had in the one bottle, and when putting it away, the Bremen Mask fell to the ground and I picked it up, an idea forming in my head that sounded ridiculous in practice, yet I had no other choice.

Princess Twilight noticed what I was doing. " You're really going through with it aren't you?"

I nodded as I placed the Bremen Mask on my face. " Desperate times call for desperate measures."

" But they're not little animals."

" My sword did nothing against Spitfire." I said. " It's either because she's a zombie or my sword isn't strong enough, but I have to do something before they get the hint that they need to work together."

Princess Twilight sighed. " Okay, but let's hope this doesn't backfire."

Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I began playing the same melody that I used to entice the young chicks from Romani Ranch to follow me, and hoped it would cause Spitfire and Fleetfott to react in a similar manner. The music caught their attention and at first they just stared at me wondering what I was doing but then they began marching along with the music and couldn't stop. I couldn't believe what I was seeing. The power of the Bremen Mask combined with the ocarina had them under my power and that meant I could make them follow me anywhere I wanted them to.

The king could only watch as his elite guards were reduced to following along without a will of their will as I began leading Spitfire and Fleetfoot around. Both of them tried in vain to break free of the hold I had over them but it was to no avail as the Bremen Mask prevented them from escaping. For a few minutes, I had some fun parading them about so that they could unwind and perhaps be willing to talk things out yet they kept on demanding me to stop playing the ocarina as it was nothing short of embarrassing. I eventually acquiesced and lead them one of the two squares of light causing their bodies to burn away to nothing.

While it was fun leading them around, it made me look like a bully who wanted to make them suffer for something they didn't even do. I wasn't that person anymore and their pleas were enough for me to say that I had done enough. Now that their bodies had been destroyed, perhaps Spitfire and Fleetfoot would be able to rest in peace knowing they no longer had to suffer living in such a painful existence. Turning my attention towards Igos, the king had been awfully quiet since his two best servants had been defeated, but I knew I couldn't drop my guard knowing he would retaliate for what I had done.

Igos laughed slightly. " So you managed to defeat my elite guards... I must admit that you are far stronger than appearances suggest. Of course, you had luck on your side as my guards constantly bickered with one another resulting in their humiliation by your hands. While the method you used was childish, it was still a method of success and so I now see that you are indeed worthy of fighting against me."

" Must we fight though?" I asked.

" Fighting is the only means."

" What do you hope to prove?"

" There is something about you that I want to see happen." Igos answered. " If I am to see it with my own eyes, then I must fight against you in battle. Unlike my elite guards, I will not be deceived by the power contained within that instrument."

I took off the Bremen Mask and switched it out with the Bunny Hood. " Do you mind if I wear this one?"

Igos shook his head. " It does not matter what mask you wear on your face, living one. A true warrior uses the full extent of their abilities to achieve victory. Now... we shall do battle and you shall fall before me, and my kingdom shall rise once again." He then stood up from his throne and both a sword and shield appeared in his hands. " I wonder how long you will last before I end your life?" He then began talking under his breath so I couldn't hear him. " Now... chosen one... show me that you are the one who can end our torment and restore this land to what it once was before the door was opened."

The king then began walking towards me and I responded in kind though I was much faster due to wearing the Bunny Hood. We both swung our swords and they collided with one another sending sparks everywhere yet he managed to push me back thanks to his immense strength--not bad for a skeleton. I then tried to take advantage by pushing him back but he quickly responded by swinging his sword. His blade crashed against my Mirror Shield and again I was pushed back. I needed to change things quickly before he could take control and keep me on the defence.

He swung his sword and I used my shield to parry him back allowing me to strike his vulnerable chest a couple of times, but it turned out that he was a lot faster than I gave him credit for and he responded by swinging his sword in a deadly arc, slicing my chest and pushing me back into the wall. Unlike Spitfire and Fleetfoot, the king's sword blows had far more power behind them so I had to keep a close watch on my health to make sure it didn't drop dangerously low. Igos walked forward and I managed to get up just as he swung his sword down at me but I raised my shield just in time.

I parried him back and swung my sword only for him to block with his shield. Even with my increased speed thanks to the Bunny Hood, he was still able to keep up with me so perhaps a different tactic could be used? The king resumed his sword swings and I countered him and we both began parrying each other's blows though I began tiring out most likely because of my inexperience compared to him. He eventually broke through, knocking me down by striking me in the chest before kicking me to the side as a cheap shot. As I got back up, the light from the window reflected off my shield, paralyzing the king for a few seconds before he raised his own shield to block it.

Unlike Spitfire and Fleetfoot, the king wasn't as prone to the light, but perhaps if his skeletal body were to collapse, I'd be able to defeat him. I then moved forward towards him only to suddenly get blasted by what looked like smoke but I didn't see anything like that in the throne room. Looking at Igos, it was he who had created the smoke by breathing it out of his mouth, causing to become unable to see what I was doing. He took advantage of my disorientation by performing his own jump attack and because his sword had a much larger range, I took the full force of the blow and crumpled to the ground.

" Are you alright?" Twilight asked.

I shook my head several times. " Since when can a skeleton breathe out smoke?"

" The king is much different than his servants were." Twilight answered. " I suspect that being an undead monster has granted him powers that he's never wielded before so you need to watch his moves carefully. That smoke didn't cause much damage from what I could see so it mainly serves as a distraction for him to attack while you're disoriented. I am certain he has other abilities that will become apparent in due time."

Igos then grabbed his head and detached it from his neck causing me to cover my mouth in disgust. " What in the world is he doing!?" I felt like throwing up upon seeing such a display but his body suddenly turned transparent. " Okay, this is definitely something you don't see everyday or not at all." His head then began flying around while his body proceeded to attack me like before when he had his head on his neck."

" As long as his body is transparent, you can't damage it."

" Now you tell me..."

" I don't know how long this will last but you need to avoid his head at all costs."

" Why?" I asked. Before Princess Twilight could answer me, the king's head latched itself onto my own and I found myself unable to move. " Gah! Get off of me! Twilight... I... I can't shake his head off!" While I wasn't suffering any damage, I couldn't see a thing as the king began munching down on my head preventing me from escaping. " I don't know where his body is as I'm being blinded by his head." I would get an answer moments later via another jump attack courtesy of Igos that sent me crashing into a wall. When my vision finally came back to me, Igos continued walking around before grabbing his head and reattaching it to his neck.

" I see, so when he removes his head, it's all about avoiding him until he puts it back on."

" I wish you could have told me that earlier." I said as I slowly got back onto my feet.

" I didn't know he was capable of such attacks." Twilight said. " What I do know is that he probably doesn't take many hits to defeat since he is a skeleton and all but it might take you some time, Sunset, what with not having the strongest sword you can possibly obtain."

I moaned. " Alright! I'll make sure to get that upgrade when we're finished the final temple."

Princess Twilight was surprised. " Why not after we're done here?"

" Because we would need an entire three day cycle to get it."

Princess Princess slapped her forehead for a change. " That's right... The Mountain Smithies need an entire day to upgrade your sword and a second day to do so again provided you give them some gold dust, but that involves defeating Goht a second time to bring spring back to the mountains."

Igos began swinging his sword at me and I used my shield to deflect his blows whilst responding to Her Highness. " I want to focus on awakening the final Giant before going for a better sword than what I've got. I know my priorities don't match up with your standards, Twilight, and I know you'll give me a lecture about it later, but this is what I think is best as some things are more important than others."

When I mentioned the Giant, Igos began to attack me with a more relentless approach, each blow from his sword crashed against my shield. I had no idea how long my shield could last against such ferocity--it was indestructible--but I couldn't allow him to gain control of the fight. I began pushing him back in hopes he would drop his guard but he responded by grabbing his head and detaching it. Knowing what happened moments ago, I ran away in hopes of not getting pinned down by his head. It flew about and attempted to latch onto my head several times but I continued keeping my distance until he reattached his head again.

The instant he put his head back on, I was able to strike him once again with my sword before becoming blindsided by smoke he spewed from his mouth. As I held my breath amidst not seeing anything, I was blindsided again this time by a jump attack performed by the king. This one wasn't as brutal as the previous one as I managed to stumble far enough away from him to avoid the full force of his strike yet it sent me crashing into another wall. Why was it that whenever I fought against powerful monsters, they would throw me into the walls at least several times before they were defeated?

Hitting the walls in this manner wasn't good for my back but the nature of this world so far had prevented me from suffering from a severe case of paralysis--I would have suffered from this a lot sooner had such an unusual phenomenon hadn't been an issue. When I got back onto my feet, I could tell that I had gotten weaker and needed to consume some more milk before Igos would take advantage of me. I reached into my pocket and took out the other bottle that contained milk--I needed more--but the king swung his sword at me before I could uncork it and was knocked back into the wall with the bottle rolling on the floor.

It stopped a short distance away and I scrambled onto my feet in order to get it but I quickly found myself stuck in place thanks to the king's detached head--he did this while I was distracted at seeing my bottle of milk roll away from me--munching on mine before his body used another powerful sword strike. This blow sent me in the direction my bottle had rolled off to though I overshot by a very small amount and crashing into yet another wall--at least this time I hit it front first instead of my back. Landing on my stomach and feeling dazed for a few moments, the impact of my landing caused the bottle to roll over to me and I picked it up.

Igos placed his head back onto his neck and began laughing as opposed to walking towards me. " I must admit that you can take a great deal of punishment, living one, but that will not be enough to save you from my sword."

I struggled to respond. " At least I can take it unlike yourself!"

" What!" Igos exclaimed. " Just because my body is not what it once was doesn't mean I am weak." He looked like he was about to lose his composure when he noticed that I was stalling for time and laughed in response. " You surprise me, living one. You never used such tactics against my servants so why think they would work against me?"

" Well, I had to try."

" No... I know what you were trying to do."

" You do?"

" A true warrior must recognize his own limits and take the necessary steps to regain lost strength." Igos answered. " However, I cannot allow you to do that because that would mean you getting another chance to thwart my desire to restoring my kingdom."

Fortunately for me, his little speech gave me enough time to drink my milk though I knew it had only restored part of my strength. " You know... I was going to ask you again why you're so determined to bring back your kingdom after so long, but I've decided that trying to convince you otherwise is merely wasting both my time and vocal chords. I didn't even want to fight in the first place yet I had no other choice as you were determined to prove you were better."

" My kingdom was forged in battle."

" Then I pity you."

" You... Pity me?"

I nodded. " Yes, I do. You were in a kingdom that knew nothing but how to cause bloodshed which what resulted in its destruction based on what little knowledge I've learned from some of those who haunt this land. Had things been much different without fighting, your kingdom might still exist and there would have been descendants living here to continue on with the legacy created by you and those who lived here back then. Ikana can never be what it once was and deep down you know this is true. It was lost long ago and no one remembers it other than for the bad reasons yet people use your tragic fate to ensure they don't succumb to the same thing."

" You are the one..."

" What did you say?"

Igos turned his face away from me. " You heard nothing from me, living one. Besides, what I said won't mean anything to you as you will be dead soon enough. I shall restore my kingdom to its former glory and we shall resume from where we left off."

I sighed knowing that nothing I said would convince him otherwise so that meant I had to defeat him to make him understand. He walked towards me and swung his sword prompting me to respond in kind and once again our blades would clash numerous times but it was obvious that I wouldn't last for very long yet at least I had the determination to prove that my way of thinking was correct. As we continued parrying each other, we kept walking around until we both stood in one of the panels of light that shone through the windows, and the king hissed as he covered his face with his shield because of what the light did to him.

That gave me an idea. I raised my shield and the light reflected off of it and onto his body forcing him to lower his shield to protect his skeletal frame. This left his head completely exposed and I raised my shield causing his face to become blinded by that which he despised the most. The king stumbled about trying desperately to regain his vision but he found that he couldn't see a thing due to the light having affected him. He also unintentionally lowered his guard and I struck his body causing it to collapse on the ground. I then shone the light from the sun onto his body and it burned away to nothing leaving me the only one standing.

I dropped to my knees. " That was too close."

" I admire your tenacity towards wanting to resolve things peacefully." Twilight said.

" I get no joy out of fighting."

" Yes, but there are times where it's the only option."

I sighed. " Maybe now we can get some answers as to why the king was so determined to restore his kingdom." It then dawned on me that I had killed him despite the fact he was already dead, and that meant I had lost my one chance at knowing the truth. Crap! Without the king, Spitfire, or Fleetfoot, I had no leads on how to reach the temple let alone its location in this region. " Looks like we have to reset time and try this all over again as we didn't get any information."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " That won't be necessary, Sunset."

" How do you figure that?"

" Because of the darkness surrounding us, the undead won't stay that way for long." Twilight answered. " In other words, when the undead die in Ikana, they can easily bring themselves back though whether they have the same form remains to be seen."

I was about to make a sarcastic remark when Spitfire and Fleetfoot suddenly appeared before us. " WAAAAH!" Their sudden appearance startled me so much that I jumped slightly and beat my chest several times to make sure my heart was still ticking. " I wish the undead wouldn't just show up out of thin air!" I then noticed that Spitfire and Fleetfoot weren't quite the same as they were before. " You were right, Twilight. It looks like they didn't get to keep their bodies." The two elite guards had been reduced to floating heads though I doubted they had noticed this just yet.

" I can't believe I was both humiliated and defeated!" Fleetfoot shouted.

" It seems this living one is more powerful than we thought." Spitfire said.

" How can a young girl defeat us!?"

" Because we were so busy arguing amongst ourselves over trivial matters, she was able to defeat us without much trouble." Spitfire answered. " If we had worked together like I originally said, she would have been killed by now and the king's desire to restore Ikana Kingdom would have become reality. We can still make this work, Fleetfoot, provided we can get past such petty divisions and attack her together."

" Out of my way, Spitfire!"

" I'm not in your way!"

" You're blocking me!"

" Don't be stupid!"

Fleetfoot knocked Spitfire aside by ramming her head into Spitfire's sending the latter careening into the wall. " I don't need your help since I can still get her! Just let me do my thing and maybe I'll leave you some scraps behind for good measure."

Spitfire bounced back with her head, knocking Fleetfoot aside resulting in the latter to butt heads with her. " Forget what I said just now about how we were defeated. I just realized the real reason this living one was able to win. The reason she beat us is because you were so feeble! I know you're going to try and blame me for what happened but don't even bother as we both know you couldn't handle it because of your humiliation. Don't blame this on me!"

" What!?" Fleetfoot exclaimed. " Just try saying that again to my face! C'mon! I dare you!"

Spitfire scoffed. " It would be a waste of my time."

" You can't do it because you're afraid."

" Take that back!"

" I won't take back what's obviously true."

That put Spitfire over the edge and she made sure to let Fleetfoot know by saying a single word... feeble. In fact, she kept on repeating it many times prompting Fleetfoot to try and drown her out by shouting nonsensical words but it didn't work as Spitfire upped her efforts by getting louder and pushing her head right into Fleetfoot's. In a way, I thought it was pretty how two Wonderbolts--elite guards in this case--had been reduced to childish acts all because I defeated them by using the power of a mask. Princess Twilight whispered to me that she was glad Rainbow Dash wasn't around to see such a terrible display.

Just seeing two of her idols clashing over pointless rhetoric would have been enough to break her heart. The more I watched the two continue arguing, the stronger the darkness grew, and that was when I realized why Ikana ended up being a barren wasteland. Arguments such as this one must have been common-place throughout Ikana and may have been one of the driving forces behind the conflict that killed everyone centuries ago. Granted, my theory wasn't solid because I didn't have all of the facts and also because these two were a prime example of what could happen when you allowed hatred to consume your very souls.

Fleetfoot had finally had enough. " Shut up! Just shut up, already!"

" I am only speaking the truth."

" Don't look down at me like I'm some kind of weakling." Fleetfoot said. " I was once called the best swordsman in all of Ikana! No one other than our king was able to match my skills with the blade and I deserve a great deal of respect because of it."

Spitfire began laughing. " The greatest swordsman in all of Ikana? You? That's the funniest thing I've heard in centuries."

" That's it!" Fleetfoot shouted. " Draw your weapon right now and I'll prove my point."

" Huh?"

" I'm telling you to draw your sword!"

" How am I supposed to do that?" Spitfire asked. " I'm just a floating head right now and so are you."

" What!?"

" I guess we've been reduced to this when our bodies were burned to ashes by the light."

" How can we be floating heads when we're zombies?"

" Spitfire shook her head. " I don't know but we wouldn't be in this mess if you hadn't focused on your humiliation. In fact, I'd say this was a new look for you though I wish you hadn't dragged me down with you."

Fleetfoot became angry at such a remark and knocked Spitfire back who responded by knocking into her. Both of them then resumed their bickering though this time they started acting physical by colliding their heads with one another. In the meantime, I had just been standing there listening to everything they had said, and while I had felt sad for them, I also felt this situation had become nothing more than a gong show that just wasn't going anywhere. In fact, I felt like leaving since it was obvious there was nothing left and I wasn't about to waste what precious time remained before having to reset time once again.

I turned and was about to walk away when a bellowing sound echoed throughout the throne room. I recognized the voice behind the bellow as belonging to the king himself and I hoped that he was nothing more than a head otherwise he would no doubt want to fight me again and I didn't have enough milk on hand to go through another fight. Spitfire and Fleetfoot began shivering out of fear knowing he wasn't happy with how they handled me in addition to being annoyed with how they had been arguing over pointless matters that didn't really mean anything in the long run since their past lives had been lost.

Igos appeared out of nowhere. " Will you stop! What fools!"

Spitfire began pleading. " Please understand, my king, that we failed because Fleetfoot allowed her humiliation to consume her."

Fleetfoot began pleading. " She's blaming me when it was obvious that she is at fault because she disobeyed you from the start."

" Enough!"

" My king..." Spitfire and Fleetfoot said at the same time.

" Haven't you begun to understand?" Igos asked. The blank expressions on the faces of both Spitfire and Fleetfoot told him that they were oblivious to it. " No... It seems that you do not get my meaning. It was the living one who made me come to this realization so now I shall share it with you two. The people who lived in Ikana are responsible for this and there is no denying it. The kingdom being ruined and us left in this state... Isn't it petty, little battles like this that have caused it?"

" Yes."

" You are both dismissed." Igos said. Spitfire and Fleetfoot faded away into the shadows leaving me, Princess Twilight, and the king alone. " It seems that I was blinded by my own ambitions that the very truth was lost to me but you have shown me the truth. Believing in your friends and embracing that belief by forgiving failure... These feelings have vanished from our hearts and we became monsters who cared for nothing other than proving our dominance."

" What happened here?" I asked.

" Centuries ago... Ikana Kingdom was a beautiful place where everyone lived in peace and harmony." Igos answered. But the darkness began manifesting itself when we lost our way as a result of arguments that resulted in my people going to war against one another. The Garo took advantage of the confusion by learning of the kingdom's weaknesses and used that knowledge to destroy us after we had already done so. In a matter of days, everything was lost and the kingdom became a barren wasteland, a reminder of what can happen when hatred and malic consume all."

I almost started to cry but refrained from doing so out of respect. " Okay, but that doesn't explain why you're here now."

" For centuries, we have embraced death though our eternal sleep." Igos said. " But then all of a sudden, we began to re-awaken as undead beings and were roaming this land once again after so long. Many are confused as to why we have returned but I know that it is because somebody thrust open the doors of that Stone Tower. The tower contains a dark aura that blanketed the land awakening us when it seeped forth from it and now we can no longer rest. It was said that a chosen one would appear in this land wielding the sacred shield that was sealed below and carried the light that would shine against the darkness."

" You think I'm some kind of chosen one?"

Igos nodded. " When I first heard of your presence in my kingdom, I viewed you as a threat to my desire but also as a saviour. The more I heard of you from those who swore their loyalty to me, the more it became obvious that destiny brought you here in our time of need. You who bring light into darkness, allow me to introduce myself properly. I was the last king of this kingdom before bloodshed destroyed it. I am Igos du Ikana, last of my line. We undead have been placed under a spellbinding courtesy of the Stone Tower, but you have broken it by the light which you carry."

" Do you know who opened the Stone Tower?"

" It was said to have been caused by a masked one."

That was an official confirmation that Starlight was responsible for opening the door and allowing the dead to roam once again after so long. I had no idea why she thought it was a good idea when they didn't appreciate it but at least I was starting to get an idea about what was really happening. The temple was the source of the problem so I needed to know how to get there and awaken the final Giant so that the undead could finally rest in peace once again and only the king knew those answers. He viewed me as some kind of chosen one so perhaps he would provide me with some additional answers.

" I'm familiar with that imp."

" The masked one opened the Stone Tower and the darkness within has awoken us."

" Where is the Stone Tower?"

" Beyond this castle and at the far end of Ikana Kingdom lies the Stone Tower." Igos answered. " To return true light to this land and for us to return to our eternal rest, you must seal the doors of the tower. But, Stone Tower is an impenetrable stronghold. Hundreds of soldiers from my kingdom would not even be able to topple it. It was used by the Garo as a base of operations with which they could attack my people with the knowledge they obtained. No, going up to the tower is far too reckless for one such as yourself. Automatons protect the path alongside an ancient puzzle that none could ever solve."

" I have to go up there." I said. " It's the only way."

Igos shook his head. " Such a challenge is too much."

I nodded. " While that's true, you don't really have much of a choice, do you? I know that going to the Stone Tower would be nothing short of suicide but I've seen my fair share of challenges throughout this journey. Fate has tasked me with the mission to save this world from its impending destruction even though I didn't want anything to do with it. I just wanted to live out a somewhat normal life but that just wasn't meant to be."

" So be it."

I was confused. " What do you mean?"

" I shall do something most unexpected yet it must be done." Igos answered. " I grant to you a soldier who has no heart. One who will not falter in the darkness. This soldier will accompany you to the Stone Tower and perhaps you can solve the ancient puzzle that others could not."

The king then began wailing in different pitches whilst moving his floating head in different directions and I had no idea what he was doing initially. On the last pitch, he made an extra effort to put some gusto into it before repeating the entire sequence again. When he finished this time, I still didn't understand the significance behind it so he repeated it a third time and continued repeating the sequence, my mind clearly wasn't getting it. Princess Twilight in the meantime had also been watching and her eyes lit up upon realizing what the king was doing so she began bopping me on the head to get my attention.

Her Highness told me that the king was performing some kind of melody though it didn't sound like one given his wails were sounding exactly like that. I then looked at the sequence for the fifth time--it might have been the eighth--and was beginning to see a connection so I took out the Ocarina of Time and watched his movements carefully. Each time he moved to a different position, he wailed in a particular pitch, an indication of how high or low the corresponding note was. The entire sequence comprised of seven notes with a couple being repeats but it was still unique sounding compared to other songs.

I raised the ocarina to my lips and began playing the seven notes, and upon finishing, I suddenly felt strange as though something weird was happening to my body. I felt like I was about to pass out but then something appeared exactly where I was standing. It felt really uncomfortable so I walked forward before turning around to see what it was, and the resulting shock I felt was one of epic proportions. I was staring at a strange statue that bore a close resemblance to me yet it was wooden in texture and had a smile that screamed creepy to unprecedented levels. Had the song caused this thing to come into existence?

Unlike me, the statue had no equipment on its person nor was in any kind of pose. It was just a creepy looking statue that continued to make me uneasy because of that smile smeared across its face. This was supposed to be a soldier? The king had to have been playing some kind of prank as this thing clearly wasn't a soldier who could back me up. Unless... He was referring to a different kind of soldier? I walked over it and began looking at it--it was just an ordinary statue--before attempting to lift it up. It was much heavier than it looked and I eventually gave up after a while before my back would give out.

I then tapped it on the head using my fist. " It's definitely solid."

" Yes." Twilight said, nodding her head. " Despite the disturbing appearance especially around the face, this statue is a solid object that you somehow conjured up when you played that song just now.

" The king said that this was a soldier that has no heart."

" And it doesn't because its an inanimate object."

" What am I supposed to do with this?"

Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders. " I have no idea but perhaps the king will tell us."

I turned to face the king. " What exactly is this thing?"

" This soldier who has no heart is your twin image." Igos answered, looking towards what I had created. " A shell of yourself that you will shed when your song commands it. The song that you played just now is known as the Elegy of Emptiness, an ancient melody whose power can create soldiers much like what stands before you. While it may be silent and unable to act in a manner that befits you, it shall always be by your side, ready to assist. Perhaps you may be able to create additional soldiers if you had the power to change your current appearance?"

" Can this power be used anywhere?"

" It can only be used in the Stone Tower."

" A little disappointing but expected."

" On my kingdom... shine the light of justice..."

Igos then burned away to nothing leaving me and Princess Twilight to figure out the significance behind the song and its ability to create soldiers. The statue itself was a solid object and its weight meant that carrying it around wasn't an option. That very weight could be used to press something down though a problem was that it couldn't defend itself were it to be attacked by a monster. While the statue looked pretty sturdy in appearance, it might not be all that durable in reality. The king also never mentioned how many times I could create a soldier nor what would happen if I were to accidentally create one and it was in the wrong location.

Rather than giving me concrete information on how to use this ability, the king had chosen to given me the basics and was leaving me to figure out the rest. I wasn't really surprised by this way of thinking as it had been a consistent issue throughout my entire journey. This was basically one additional obstacle in my way. Now that this song had been added to the repertoire I had already obtained, there was nothing else for me to do in the castle so I could now begin climbing up the Stone Tower though I wished I had been given some information about what was waiting for me.

Chapter 58: The Stone Tower

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
May 29, 2017
Chapter 58: The Stone Tower.

Things had certainly gotten more interesting though at the same time confusing. The king of Ikana had commanded me to close the door to the Stone Tower and provided me with a special song that could create shells of my current form. Despite how hideous looking it was, it could be used for different things though I wasn't entirely sure what since he didn't specify anything. I wished he had been more specific instead of leaving me to figure out what to do with this statue but I supposed it was necessary for me to be challenged instead of being given the answer on a silver plate.

Even though I could now leave the castle as there was nothing left for me to do, I decided to try and lift the statue of me again. While I had failed in spectacular fashion last time, I wanted to try again in case some of my strength had since returned. Placing my hands around its waist, I pulled as hard as I could in hopes the statue could be picked up, but all I did was give myself serious back pain, prompting me to stop. My thought process was that I could carry the statue around a short distance and place it somewhere that was useful without needing to rely heavily on the song the king taught before he disappeared into the ether.

Since that plan was now obviously a bust, I had to contend with the idea that I needed to be in specific locations before creating these shells. The king had also mentioned I could create additional shells if I had additional forms--obviously--but I had no clue whether it would prove beneficial. Again, it was something I had to figure out on my own much to my annoyance yet I didn't have much of a choice. Speaking of the song, the Elergy of Emptiness sounded like a melody that needed to be played constantly so that I could reach my final destination, the Stone Tower.

All those times I thought about needing some practice due to having trouble remembering how certain songs played had come back to haunt me. Now that excuse had become invalid as this one song would be played constantly to the point where I would have it completely memorized by heart. I turned around and began walking towards the door only to quickly double-back and attempt to push the statue rather than lift it up--my attempt proved to be an utter failure as it refused to budge. I even thought about striking it with my sword but that would probably break it or something.

Princess Twilight wished that she could spend some time trying to understand the statue yet she knew that we needed to leave and go up the Stone Tower--I suspected it was because she had no idea how it worked and didn't want to embarrass herself in front of me. Knowing the ReDeads were still standing by the entrance, I took off the Bunny Hood and switched over to the Captain's Hat before putting it on my face. As I began walking to the door, I started thinking about what kind of place this tower was. Not much had been said about it other than it once served as a headquarters of the Garo and not even the king's soldiers could penetrate its defences.

And yet, I had been tasked with doing exactly that despite having no clue what was awaiting me up there aside from being told about an ancient puzzle and the defence that would do everything it could to stop me from getting there. Of course, it was nothing new as I had to endure incredible hardship before gaining access to the other temples across Termina so this last one would be along similar lines. My only hope was for there to be an Owl Statue located just outside of the temple's entrance. If the Stone Tower was a lengthy climb, I didn't like the idea of having to climb it more than once.

Ignoring the ReDeads in the entrance chamber--they continued to dance because of my mask--I walked outside of the castle, across the courtyard and through the hole in the giant doors before finding myself back outside in Ikana Village again. Nothing had changed due to visiting the king though I had to be weary of any Garo that were still skulking about in the shadows waiting to fight though given that I knew what I needed to know about this area, I didn't need to fight them anymore other than for practice. Looking to my right, I could see a weird looking entrance that resembled a demonic mouth with a tongue that served as the path.

No doubt that was the way forward to the Stone Tower and what better way than to use something scary to convince someone not to go that way. To the left of the castle was a building that looked run-down like everything else was in Ikana yet I sensed a faint aura coming from it that felt familiar. It took me a few moments before figuring out that I was sensing the aura of fairies, indicating that the local Great Fairy's Fountain was in there, yet I wished it could have been a little bit closer to the temple rather than down here in the village. At least it was easy to find instead of having to search all over the place for it.

That's when I noticed someone was waiting by the entrance to the Stone Tower. " I was wondering when he was going to show up here."

Princess Twilight then looked in the same direction. " Flash Sentry!? What do you suppose took him so long to finally reveal himself? I mean, in the other three regions, he appeared almost as soon as we arrived, but here he shows up just as we're about to make our way to the temple."

" We might as well ask him since we can't exactly avoid him."

" Yes." Twilight said, nodding. " He could very well know what you're supposed to do with that song the king gave you."

I then noticed Her Highness was shivering slightly and I knew why without having to think about it. " I know you still harbour some feelings towards him, Twilight, but you need to get over it even if you don't want to."

Princess Twilight was shocked. " I... I know that, Sunset! But, Flash... He was so nice to me."

" You'll always have that and other similar memories as a means of friendship." I said. " And yet, he's a human and you're a Princess in Equestria. While I know both of you want to make it work, it's just not going to happen. I used to date him, remember? My reasons were different than yours but the fact remained that it just couldn't work out. Granted, I don't know if there's still a spark somewhere between him and me but I doubt since it was a one-way relationship. Besides, this a different version of Flash here. He's not going to try and woo you or anything so you can easily talk without freaking out."

Princess Twilight gulped before relaxing. " Okay... Let's do this."

I walked up to where Flash Sentry's owl was perched above the entrance to the Stone Tower and it lurched its head forward whilst glaring at me. Unlike the previous encounters I had with him, he didn't scare me given his penchant for talking out of nowhere, and also because I could see him this time. Flash Sentry noticed his companion's actions and turned to look in the same direction and smiled upon seeing me. " I have been waiting for you to reach this point, fairy child. No doubt that you have been through an incredible hardship in this accursed land, but know that the true challenge lies before you in the stronghold."

" Why didn't you speak with me when I first arrived in Ikana?" I asked.

" I thought it best for you to tread your own path."

" What does that mean?"

" You have done so much for this world even though its denizens never know of your actions." Flash Sentry answered. " I was starting to believe that perhaps you no longer needed me to help guide you along since you have changed this world's fate for the better. Even now, I still believe you can achieve your goal of freeing the tortured souls of the dead from what has trapped them without needing to be told."

I shook my head. " I still need your help even now."

Flash Sentry smiled. " You shouldn't think of yourself as being incapable."

" I'm serious!"

" You have everything you need to reach the top of the Stone Tower."

" All I got was a song that creates shells of my current form."

" Once you begin the great climb to the top of the Stone Tower, the answers that have been eluding you will become clear." Flash Sentry said. " Look at your surroundings and see what works and what doesn't and you will prevail. Do not be daunted by such an undertaking of climbing the tower as there is more to it than appearances suggest. The tower itself is but one part of a much larger complex."

My jaw dropped upon hearing those words and yet I knew that was going to be the case. The Stone Tower was much larger than I originally thought and that meant an entire three day cycle was needed if I was to fully explore the place. Well, more like the temple would require three days while I could spend the rest of the current cycle getting up there. I hoped it would be a simple climb though given what I've experienced in Termina so far, simple was anything but certain. Still, there wasn't any other choice since this would be the final Giant that needed rescuing and with all four of them gathered together, the moon could finally be stopped.

" I guess I should get going then."

" Before you leave, I do have some advice to give you."

" I thought you said you weren't going to do that?"

" Seeing that smile on your face gave me the incentive."

" Okay... I'll take your word for it."

" The three forms you have acquired throughout your journey will are needed to succeed." Flash Sentry said. " You must rely on these forms, your own skills, and that which represents your purpose to be able to return the undead back to their eternal slumber. Think of this final temple as the ultimate test that will determine the fate of Termina in addition to you as a person, but don't let my words weigh down on you."

" I... I think I get what you mean."

Princess Twilight then spoke up. " What do you know about demons?"

Flash Sentry was taken aback. " Demons? That's an unusual question coming from you, little fairy."

I began panicking. " Twilight! Why did you go and ask that!?"

" Because I want to know if Flash Sentry knows about any powerful dark forces within the Stone Tower." Twilight answered. " It's not that I don't distrust him as he has given us the proper guidance, but my heart is telling me to question him on the subject. After all, he has seen all of Termina in one form or another so he should be able to answer my question without having to shy away or anything."

I was certainly surprised by how Her Highness was behaving around Flash Sentry and I'd like to think that my own pep talk a few minutes ago was what convinced her to view him as an ally rather than oogle over him like she usually did. She had to understand that there was no chance of her and him becoming an item as she had her duties in Equestria that prevented her from visiting the world I now called home. If there was a pony version of him who existed there then yes, she could be attracted to him though I didn't know if she harboured any feelings towards the pony Flash assuming he existed.

While it wasn't really my place to question the romantic aspect of Princess Twilight's life, I felt compelled to give her the hard truth even if she didn't necessarily want to hear it for herself and instead ignore me. On the same merit, I'd have to give a similar truth to Flash himself whenever I could get a chance as he needed to know that Her Highness would never truly be his, but not because she was too good for him but rather because it was impossible. I'd also have to tell him that the other Twilight who had transferred over to Canterlot High was a different Twilight altogether.

" The assassins who have hounded you serve the one waiting on top of the Stone Tower."

" We already know that." Twilight said. " We need to know about any demons who may be there."

" The leader of the assassins must be overcome if you are to use the sacred power." Flash Sentry said. " This sacred power is the bane to those who dwell within and embrace the darkness but it can also be used in ways one would never expect. Again, all will become clear to you once you have acquired that which you need. The leader of the assassins also has its hands full dealing with two dark creatures who have made the tower their home yet they are not the true demons that lurk within its depths. Stronger ones await you but only if you can understand the true nature of the tower."

" The true nature of the tower?" I asked.

Flash Sentry nodded. " Only when you figure this will you face the true demons."

" Can't you be straight and to the point instead of being so cryptic?"

Flash Sentry shook his head. " A true heroine would rely on the basic of knowledge and figure out the rest on her own." He then urged his owl companion to spread its wings, indicating that it was about to take off and he would disappear from this world for the last time. " I do have one last thing to say to you, fairy child. Seek out the power of the giants hidden within the Stone Tower and their strength shall become your own." His owl then took off and began flying towards Termina Field leaving me to understand his final words.

" I'm looking forward to uncovering his riddles." Twilight said.

" That makes one of us." I said moaning.

" I know you don't like being told cryptic messages, Sunset, but I understand what Flash Sentry was talking about."

I eyed Princess Twilight with a frowned expression. " Of course you did."

Princess Twilight clasped her hands together with glee. " The sacred power he mentioned has to do with the light since that is what you represent, the light that shines in the darkness that has covered Termina in its grip, and you need to get your hands on it to solve the puzzle of the Stone Tower. I'm not sure about his reference to giants and their power but it could be a reference to a mask or perhaps the power of the final Giant. As for the demons... no doubt Flash was referring to Sunset Demon and the Garo Master but I suspect we might encounter Midnight Sparkle in there along with additional demons we know nothing about."

I sighed. " Sometimes, you are too excited for your own good."

" I can't help myself."

I checked my inventory to see if I had enough to make it to the top of the Stone Tower. " I've got enough arrows to get up there and my magic meter should hasn't decreased all that much but perhaps I should get some of my other bottles filled up first." I presented Princess Twilight with the half-full bottle of milk. " This is all I have left for recovering any health so unless there are some fairies up there I can scoop up into one of my empty bottles, heading into the tower might not be a good idea." I then put the bottle away and looked up at the opening to the tower.

" You could do that but perhaps there is another option."

I was surprised. " You always tell me not to be reckless yet here you are telling me the opposite."

" I know, I know..." Twilight said. " But I figure that you might be able to make it to the top with what you currently have. I know I'm making you sound like you have an incredible amount of confidence to reach the temple and that's because I do feel that way about you, Sunset. You've been through so much hardship since this began and you've grown up so much from a mental standpoint. Most other people would have given up a long time ago due to pressure but you've kept going and now we're on what I would call the final leg of the journey."

" It's not like I had the option, Twilight."

" Would you have honestly given up?"

" If it had come up then... YES!"

" That doesn't sound like something you would say."

" Can you blame me when the alternative was to fight against a slew of monsters who all desired to see me dead, trudge through an unfamiliar world while resorting to basic needs just to survive, and wearing this ridiculous yet also fashionable tunic?" I asked. " Those were just the top three examples I could come up with on such short notice but I suppose if the option ever did come up, I'd probably go through with this all over again."

" Did you seriously say 'fashionable' just now?"

I blushed. " Guess Rarity has been rubbing off on me."

" In any case, I still think we can reach the top of the Stone Tower with what you have on hand." Twilight said. " But, if you want to give yourself an extra chance of survival, you might want to consider stopping off at the Great Fairy's Fountain to restore some health."

That was a good idea as my body was still reeling from having to deal with Spitfire, Fleetfoot, and Igos du Ikana, and I needed to be in top form if I was going to climb up a fortress most would never think of doing let alone succeeding. Turning around, I walked back to the small building to the left of the castle I saw earlier and went inside before stopping moments later upon seeing the beauty that was the Great Fairy's Fountain. One thing though had been bugging me for a while but it wasn't until now that it came to a head as I never considered it. The other fountains comprised of magic, power, wisdom, and courage, four forces I was familiar with.

And yet, what was the purpose behind the fountain here in Ikana? Was there a fifth element that either didn't exist in Hyrule or did but had been neglected for so long? What other forces could be viewed as being equal with what already existed? Whatever the force was, it was related to the colour yellow as that was the colour of the Stray Fairies who were hanging around the fountain. Just like the other groups of Stray Fairies I had come across, these ones pleaded for me to go and find the other fairies who matched their colours and bring them back so that they could come together again.

I had a feeling that it wasn't going to be easy this time as the last group of Stray Fairies had been taken to what was arguably the most difficult temple in Termina. Knowing that I needed the special power this Great Fairy would bestow upon me, I agreed on finding them and in turn they used their remaining power to restore my health. It was unfortunate I couldn't scoop a few of them into a bottle and take them with me for emergency purposes later but these weren't regular fairies who could be carried around. Besides, they would be useless if one of them were to be separated from the rest of the group.

Leaving the fountain and turning to my right, I raised my shield just in time as a Blue Bubble appeared out of nowhere and collided against my shield. It's blue flames disappeared and it began hopping around on the ground using its little wings for support. I thought about attacking it but decided against it--there were several more floating about nearby--since there was no point in using my sword against something that couldn't attack in return--until the flames came back. I ran past the Blue Bubble and up the ramp into the gaping maw of the demonic entrance and found myself in a place that defied expectations.

Walking over to the edge of a cliff, I looked down and saw nothing but an eternal abyss. This made absolutely no sense! How could this be here when clearly this place had been built on a strong foundation but perhaps it had been built on top of this abyss as a means of instilling intimidation to any who would try attacking it. I then looked up and my jaw dropped upon seeing what looked to be an endless vertical shaft with various platforms and walkways jutting out at every corner. The sounds of moaning could be heard all around, the moans of the undead themselves, the dead crying out from beyond the grave.

Boulders were falling down everywhere and no doubt they would cause a problem as I could potentially get knocked into the abyss below. If that were to happen... Just thinking about it sent shivers down my spine. I was this wasn't going to be easy but now I knew this for certain given my initial look around. No wonder the king said that coming here was dangerous as the mere sight of it alone could scare anyone into not wanting to carry on yet I didn't have that luxury. I had to climb the Stone Tower and judging from how large the shaft was, it was going to take quite some time.

I backed away before beating my chest. " This place... It's unlike anything I've ever seen."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Not even Equestria has something that compares with the Stone Tower." Her Highness then floated upwards to get a better view of things before coming back down and landing on my shoulder. " From what I could tell, the path forward is linear so you don't have to worry about dealing with alternate paths. There are some Fire Keese flying about but you shouldn't have any problems dealing with them but you will have trouble with those boulders. I know I don't have to tell you what will happen if you were to get hit by one of those while climbing."

" The king said not even an army could get through this."

" You're not doubting yourself are you?"

I shook my head. " No, but you have to admit that this does look really daunting."

" True and yet we have to make the climb if we're to reach the temple."

" We should have more than enough time to get there before having to reset time."

" I take it you have no intention of trying to go through the temple within the current cycle?"

I shook my head again. " No way! I want an entire seventy-two hours dedicated towards getting through the temple." I then looked up and began to think about everything that had happened recently with regards to Sunset Demon. " I wonder what the she-demon must be thinking right about what she has been through."

Princess Twilight was surprised. " I didn't think you would care about her well-being given what she is and all."

" I know but she's still a part of me despite how disturbing that can be sometimes."

" You want to help her, don't you?"

I slowly nodded. " It was my fault that she was created in the first place because I was the one who put on your crown. In that sense, I feel responsible for everything she has experienced since you and our friends defeated me at the Fall Formal last year. Had my attitude been different, Sunset Demon wouldn't have existed, but then, I wouldn't have come to the human world. Everything the two of us have experience in that world wouldn't have happened."

" Sunset..."

" Guess this is my Element of Harmony at work assuming I had one."

" Showing compassion towards a monster is something that most would have difficulty understanding." Twilight said. " To be honest, I've never had to deal with that kind of thing and that's something you have over me. I may be very gifted when it comes to magic and intellect yet there are some things I'll never understand whereas you do perfectly. I suppose it makes me feel a little jealous but I know you didn't intend for it. You know... If you could talk Sunset Demon into abandoning her current course, it would be a closure for you as you could finally move on from your past, and it would allow her to finally rest in peace for eternity."

" Even you can admit that you have flaws."

Princess Twilight blushed. " Well, no one is perfect."

Ahead of us were a series of three blocks suspended in the air that I needed to jump across to reach the other side. A mis-calculation would surely send me plummeting to my death so that wasn't an option. I breathed heavily before running forward and leaping to the first block though I almost slipped off the side due to landing too close to the edge. I inched over to the right before continuing to jump across the remaining platforms--it was really nerve-wracking given what was below me--and upon reaching the other side, I noticed a strange looking switch that seemed suspicious.

" What do you make of it, Twilight?"

Princess Twilight took a closer look. " I'm not sure what will happen if you were to step on it but since I don't see the harm in doing so, you might as well." She then floated up again and quickly came back down a few seconds later with a surprised look on her face. " There are more switches just like this one up ahead if you climb up to the next section. I think you should activate this one first just to see what happens."

I stepped on the switch and the middle platform rose up before heading left and then up where it stopped. " It looks like I need those three platforms to move up so that I can use them again to get across though how can I keep it in place without it moving back into position?"

" This is where that song comes into play."

" The Elergy of Emptiness?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You can use those shells you create upon playing the song to hold those platforms in place. I hope you don't mind switching between forms on a constant basis as it looks like that is what needs to be done to progress. Good thing you can skip over going back to being a human during the transformations though your body is going to experience a lot of changes."

I cursed under my breath. I didn't like the idea of having to switch between different bodies just for a few moments yet it seemed I had no choice because I needed to use each of my forms to reach the top. No doubt this wasn't going to go over very well. I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, played the Elergy of Emptiness, and walked forward as the shell of my true self appeared behind me keeping the switch pressed and the platform in place. With that done--that statue still creeped me out even though it was me--I turned to the left and discovered that in order to progress, I needed to use my Hookshot.

A boulder then came tumbling down so I waited for it to pass by before firing the Hookshot's chain. It latched onto the plate that was located on the column on the next section of the path and I pulled myself up before seeing something strange next to the column. I recalled seeing it somewhere before during my previous journey yet I couldn't remember what it was called or what it was supposed to do. It had a large eye that was scanning its surroundings on top of a weird body that appeared to be both organic and mechanical--it had a nose and a mouth--and right below me was a second switch.

" What is that thing, Twilight?"

" It's a Beamos."

" I feel like I know that name."

" It's a sentry device that looks around its surroundings and fires a laser beam from its eye if it detects anything in its vicinity." Twilight said. " Unless you use a shield to block the beam, you'll get hit by it and take quite a bit of damage in the process. Its eye doesn't like smoke so if you can toss a bomb at it, you should be able to defeat it though be careful as it will explode as a last ditch effort."

" Guess I should get some distance before attacking."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Some Beamos are larger than others and those ones require two bombs to destroy them. One to close its eye and paralyze it for a few moments and the other to destroy it. Good thing you upgraded your Bomb Bag twice when you did otherwise you would only have a small amount of bombs to use. I suspect that there will be additional Beamos along the way, and now that I think about it, it sounds like these were the automations the king mentioned before."

" That's one puzzle solved."

" Yes, and a much larger one remains."

As much as I enjoyed solving puzzles, this one that apparently comprised of the entire Stone Tower was too much for my tastes. While I had no other choice but to go through with it as there was no other way to reach the temple, at least it came at us in sections instead of all at once. Fortunately, I had some bombs though a part of me wondered if it was a good idea to use the Blast Mask since it was essentially a free bomb every time I used it. Granted, it only worked every few minutes because of the wait time between blasts and the Beamos could take advantage of such a shortcoming by shooting at me until I dropped.

Mulling it over for a few moments, I decided to go with a regular bomb instead of the Blast Mask so I took one out of my Bomb Bag and tossed it at the Beamos. The bomb exploded on impact causing the body of the Beamos to explode followed by the eye several seconds later leaving behind a bomb that I picked up giving me five more. With that taken care of, I looked at the switch and pressed it causing the first platform to rise straight up before stopping. Now I needed to change to another form so that the switch would remain pressed otherwise it would go back down to where it was and creating a new shell of my current form would make the middle platform drop.

Taking out the Zora Mask and placing it on my face, my body shimmered from human to Zora while I squatted down before letting out an ear-piercing scream. Upon transforming, my eyes noticed another Hookshot plate on top of a column, yet it was on top of another high-up ledge. That meant having to change back to a human so that I could get up there and wasting a transformation on a single objective that would only take me a few moments. Grumbling, I took out the fish-bone guitar, played the Elergy of Emptiness, and walked forward before looking behind me to see the Mikau shell in all its glory.

It looked just like him though his blank expression was worrying though why did he have his guitar in front of him? Still, it was creepy looking in appearance though the important thing was that the statue of Mikau was keeping the switch down so now I had to make my way over to the next one. Grabbing my face, I took off the Zora Mask, flipped back my hair, took out the Hookshot, and aimed up at the plate before firing the chain, pulling myself up. This next section had no Beamos so I didn't have to worry about that but there was a Fire Keese flapping about so I raised my shield and allowed it to connect, its fire disappearing, followed by using my sword to destroy it.

To my left was yet another switch and that meant using another form to activate it. I decided this time to use the Goron Mask so I switched out the Zora Mask for it, placed it on my face, and grabbed the column with the Hookshot plate because every time I put on the Goron Mask, I would stumble about and considering where I was, stumbling could result in me falling to my death below. My body shimmered from human to Goron and the urge to stumble about proved difficult to ignore but I persevered and became Darmani before taking out the drums and playing the Elegy of Emptiness on the switch.

Walking forward before turning around, I looked at the statue of Darmani that had been left behind. It looked just like him though much like the statue of Mikau, he had a blank expression and perhaps it was due to the fact that he was dead. I also noticed the scar across his chest and the obvious pose that reflected his great strength yet I didn't get the piece of green cloth at the top of his legs. It was either a reference to me or it was part of his actual clothes--or what constituted as such with Gorons. The middle platform raised straight up and stopped allowing me to jump across to the next section.

I dropped to my knees. " That was a lot more difficult than I thought it was."

" And we still have a long way to go before we reach the top."

" Whose idea was it to make this place so big?"

" I've been thinking about that."

I smirked. " Of course you have."

Princess Twilight took note of that. " Despite our current situation, I can't help but be fascinated by being surrounded by so much history. Nothing like this exists in Equestria so the fact that we're seeing this is sure to give me brownie points back home once we've finished this adventure." Her eyes began twinkling though from my perspective, she looked like she was about to explode with great joy. " If only we could stay here for a lot longer. That would give me more than enough time to write down enough citations so I can present them to the eager-eyed students of Princess Celestia's School for Gifted Unicorns."

I rolled my eyes. " Don't let me stop you on my account."

" From what I've seen so far of this place, the Stone Tower was created to serve as the ultimate defence in times of war."

" The king said that the Garo used it as a hideout, right?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " They knew the ins and outs of the tower and prepared accordingly whenever the Ikana army decided to attack. I suspect they gave up after enough attempts knowing that a successful assault with such large numbers would prove disastrous. And then we have what I consider to be the real reason why the tower is so big. It wasn't just to keep things from getting in but to keep things from getting out. Because this kingdom was destroyed as a result of war, the dark aura that has eroded everything around here managed to escape courtesy of Starlight opening the door."

" The door is located all the way up there to prevent anyone from reaching it."

" Exactly!"

" Though I doubt they were expecting someone like Starlight."

Princess Twilight nodded. " We have to fix the damage she has caused by closing the door to the Stone Tower. I do find it strange that the door is what keeps the dead from returning to finish what they started and I wish that I could learn more about it." She then clasped her hands together and began bobbing up and down. " We can find those answers once we get inside the temple. Perhaps that Garo Master might be willing to share some information even though he is our enemy."

Only Princess Twilight would be willing to want to talk to a monster to fulfill her desire for knowledge and this quirk was one of her biggest charms. Me? I wouldn't want to do what she was thinking as I was once a monster so I felt uneasy about it but I supposed to each their own. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Goron Mask, flipped my hair back, lined myself up with the platforms, and began jumping across making sure not to slip. On the other side was a Gossip Stone, a rare sight as it had been a while since I last saw one, and another Hookshot plated located on top of a high-up platform.

Since I didn't need to use the Gossip Stone--all it would do was tell me what time it was--I stopped jumping upon reaching the third platform, took out the Hookshot, aimed at the plate, and fired the chain before pulling myself up to the next section. Immediately, a Fire Keese bumped into me from out of nowhere and I responded by taking it out with my sword only for another one to hit me from the front and almost causing me to get knocked down into the abyss below--I managed to prevent myself from falling by jumping down and using the plate as a wall--but I destroyed it before it could get away.

This part of the path had a switch and I pressed it only to hear a loud clanking sound coming from somewhere. " That's funny..." I began. " This should have caused another platform somewhere to move if I've got this correct but nothing happened." I pressed the switch again only for the same clanking sound to happen prompting me to scratch my head. " Or maybe one of the previous platforms moved instead?" Now I was getting confused. " Um... I don't know what's going on."

" It sounds like something wants to move but can't because of getting stuck."

" Another platform?"

" Yes."

" And here I thought the same ones would get us all the way up there."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " It must be all part of the ancient puzzle the king told us about. When you play the Elegy of Emptiness and create new shells, the old ones will disappear and the initial platforms will move back to their original locations. That way, you can move the next set of three to create a path across to the other side. This switch right here isn't useful right now so we should leave it for now and come back to it later when a different platform has been moved."

" Do you think it's possible to skip a platform or two?"

" Well, if you're really confident in your jumping ability, then I would say yes."

I gulped. " We both know how bad that can be."

" Then skipping platforms isn't an option."

I began looking around to see if there was anywhere else I could go and my eyes noticed both the next Hookshot plate as well as a Beamos lurking next to it. There was no way I could toss a bomb up there and destroy it so I had to pull myself up instead. Using the Hookshot, I fired its chain, latched onto the plate, and went upwards though when I reached my destination, my foot slipped causing me to fall directly in the path of the Beamos. Its eye detected my presence and fired a laser beam but I was able to pull myself up just as the beam smacked into the column leaving behind a burning mark.

My heart began pounding rapidly so I beat my chest a couple of times to calm my nerves down. The Beamos' laser beam was fast, accurate, and deadly but while I had no doubt I could have survived the attack, I didn't want to take any risks in case it could attack repeatedly. Taking out another bomb, I tossed it behind the Beamos where it exploded and destroyed its body followed by its head leaving behind yet another bomb that I picked up by jumping down from the column. My eyes then detected another switch but before I activate it, more boulders fell down from above so I had to wait for a pause in-between them.

When such a pause occurred, I stepped onto the switch and another platform next to the one that got stuck before moved out before changing directions a couple of times until it stopped a bit further up from my location. While it was obvious that it would let me continue my way upwards, I needed to activate the other two platforms in addition to getting up there so I could cross over. I took out the ocarina and played the Elegy of Emptiness, creating another shell of myself, yet upon it appearing behind me after I walked forward, the switch I had activated using the statue moved back down to its original position.

I walked over to the edge and looked down. " That platform moved back when I created a new statue."

" It looks like you can only make one shell of a particular form at a time."

" I've tried all of them now except for the Deku Scrub."

" Any particular reason why you haven't used that one yet?"

" Considering I needed to be human to get up here, I didn't feel the need to create a Deku statue."

Princess Twilight gave me a smug look. " You forgot, didn't you?"

I shook my head. " N-no of course not!"

" It's okay, Sunset." Twilight said. " You don't have to hide the truth from me. You should try creating a shell of the Deku Scrub when you find the next switch and there should be one up on that platform. You just need to get close enough before pulling yourself over to it."

Taking out the Hookshot and moving about until the column was within range of the Hookshot's chain length, I fired it and pulled myself up where I was immediately knocked back down by a Fire Keese that blindsided me. Fortunately, I only fell down to the ledge below rather than the alternate--to my huge relief--though I remained motionless on the ground for a couple of seconds before getting back and attempting to get up there again. I made sure to look up to make sure I knew where the Fire Keese--now a regular Keese--was so that it wouldn't knock me down here again.

I then remembered that the Hookshot could be used as an offensive weapon in addition to its usual function. The Keese had since dove down at me upon seeing me from above so I aimed up at it and waited until it got close enough before firing the Hookshot, destroying it, and acquiring a blue rupee for my troubles. With the Keese gone, I fired the Hookshot again and pulled myself towards the next ledge, landing on the ground, and walking over to the switch, activating it only for the platform to move forward and get stuck when it collided with the other one.

That meant I had to go back down to where the switch I ignored was meaning I had to do a small amount of backtracking. Groaning, I slapped my forehead and stomped my foot on the ground before dropping a large distance, landing hard on the ground below, my knees buckling in the process. While the damage could have been a lot worse, I was annoyed at having to backtrack because all it did was waste precious time and prevent me from progressing. Of course, I had no say or control in the matter as it came down to luck that I would run into a situation like this.

Sighing, I stepped on the switch and watched as the platform that blocked the other one finally moved out and into place right in front of the third one. Whoever came up with this ancient puzzle certainly knew how to get under people's skin but I had to persevere--it wasn't easy mind you--as surely there wasn't much further to go aside from perhaps one more part before reaching the temple itself. Taking out the Deku Mask and placing it on my face, I began experiencing the convulsions that came whenever I put it on and my body shimmered from human to Deku--I wished I wouldn't keep on experiencing it--until my transformation was finished.

Upon becoming a Deku Scrub, I could have sworn that I felt something unusual that occurred when my body changed, but I couldn't put my finger on it despite it becoming a gnawing feeling that wanted to eat away at me. In any case, another statue--funny how Princess Twilight and I kept on interchanging between shell and statue with regards to these things that appear when I play the song--was needed here so I took out the Deku Pipes after my ocarina changed into them, played the Elergy of Emptiness, walked forward upon creating the statue, and coming to a realization I didn't recognize until that exact moment.

The platform I had moved went back to its original position leaving me confused. " I've got a shell on the switch so why did it go back?"

Princess Twilight took a closer look and gulped as she turned to face me. " I... I think I've got an answer for you, Sunset."

" What is it?"

" Take a look for yourself."

I looked at the statue of the Deku Scrub and noticed that the switch wasn't pushed down anymore. " What the!? How!? Why!? I thought these shells were supposed to keep activated switches well, activated. Why is this one not doing its intended purpose?"

" It's because the shell isn't heavy enough."

I gave Princess Twilight a frowned look. " What?"

Princess Twilight sighed. " Deku Scrubs are lightweight creatures compared to the other tribes and I guess that has been reflected in the shell you created. Even though you have the power to create four distinct shells, one for each form, it seems the Deku shell is virtually useless compared with the other three. I suspect that this was an intended side-effect with that shell when whoever made this video game world got to this point in its construction."

I slapped my forehead. " You mean I just wasted a shell for nothing!?"

" That does appear to be the case."

Of all the stupid things the makers of this game could have done, this one had definitely taken the cake. My anger began flaring up because I assumed all four of my forms would be able to create shells that I could use to progress through the Stone Tower. To have even one of them be declared useless because of a weight issue was enough to make me want to explode in a fit of rage yet Her Highness didn't deserve such treatment. It wasn't her fault the Deku Scrub shell didn't work so I had no right to take it out on her but then she surprised me by getting angry and kicking the statue using her tiny fairy feet.

Anger definitely didn't look good on Princess Twilight so I told her that she needed to calm down before she would do something she'd regret later. Huh... It felt funny telling someone else to calm down given that usually it was me who got given that particular pep talk but I supposed it was a sign that Her Highness and I were rubbing off of one another though not always in a good fashion. On a different note, I looked at the Deku Scrub shell I had created and felt saddened because of the significance behind it. The statue was what the Deku truly looked like without my features plastered on it, and bore a resemblance to the weird tree we saw back at the beginning.

" Feeling better now, Twilight?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, I do. Sorry for getting so angry like that. I just don't know what came over me."

" You went through a rage moment kind of like what I do on occasion."

" So that's what it feels like to see things from your perspective whenever you lose your temper."

" It's my greatest weakness these days."

" And you know that mine is freaking out whenever something goes horribly wrong."

Both of us then began starting laughing and for a few minutes, we forgot what we were supposed to be doing and acted like things were normal, but once we realized that we had to keep on going, we regained our composures before looking closely at the statue of the Deku Scrub. " Unlike the other shells, this one makes me sad because the poor guy never stood a chance when he was turned into that weird tree."

" Now that you mention it, the resemblance is uncanny."

" Do you think Starlight intended to kill this Deku Scrub?"

Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders. " It's difficult to say for certain, Sunset, as we don't have all of the facts so all we can do is guess. The only one who would know for certain would be Starlight herself though I doubt she would explain her actions."

" The eyes of the Deku Scrub paint a horrible picture, don't they?"

" He must have been scared to death when he encountered Starlight."

" She punished him because he was in the wrong place."

" Most likely."

I clenched my hand into a fist and cursed under my breath. " Starlight is going to pay for what she did to this child." My anger began to boil but quickly passed when I thought that perhaps it wasn't Starlight's fault per say but rather an unseen force that was controlling her. It wasn't Ganondorf because killing one person was beneath his notice--he preferred to kill hundreds of people if not thousands. " Now that we know the Deku Scrub shell can't be used to activate switches, how are we supposed to move it out of the way so that a more heavier statue can take its place?"

" I've been thinking about that."

" And?"

" First of all, we've established that the Deku Scrub shell is the lightest." Twilight answered. " If the other shells are also based on you, Darmani, and Mikau respectively, then the shell pertaining to Darmani would be the heaviest one. If we were to come across a situation that required something really heavy, we could use his shell without having to consider any of the others, and it does mean your shell and Mikau's are practically neutral and can serve in most situations. Second, even though the Deku Scrub statue here is the lightest, I doubt you'll be able to move the thing so the best option is to use the song to move it."

" You think that would work?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " So long as we're in the Stone Tower, you can play that song anywhere and a shell will appear where you stand. It won't work if you're falling or are on a temporary platform or something like that but you should know what works."

I walked a few feet away from the Deku Scrub shell, took out the Deku Pipes, and played the Elergy of Emptiness once again. A new shell appeared right where I was standing and the original one disappeared into thin air proving Princess Twilight's theory to be true. It was a good thing that it worked otherwise I would have been stuck and most likely forced to warp away from here and go through everything up to this point all over again--that was a kind of backtracking I didn't want to experience. Perhaps my Deku Scrub form would have a purpose inside of the temple to make up for not being useful in our current situation.

Because Princess Twilight specifically brought up Darmani, I decided to use his shell to activate the switch. I could have changed back to a human and then into a Goron but I didn't want my body to have to endure two transformations within the span of several seconds--I also wanted to eliminate the middle man. Taking out the Goron Mask, I placed it onto my face and was expecting the usual stumbling about that was associated with this change but instead nothing happened other than my body shimmering from one form to the next along with a sudden increase in height.

Upon changing into Darmani, I stepped on the switch and the platform moved again until it stopped in front of the other one, and immediately played the Elergy of Emptiness, creating his shell and keeping the switch activated. After stepping away from both the switch and the statue, I wiped my forehead knowing I had to do a bit of extra work in order to make up for my slight blunder though I couldn't rest knowing there was still much more to go. My forehead was going to be sweating buckets by the time Princess Twilight and I would reach the top of Stone Tower given how much more we had to climb.

" So what did you mean about being freed from your torment?" Midnight Sparkle asked. The Garo Master didn't answer so she began getting angry before quickly realizing that it wanted her to lose her patience. " Heh... Your mind games don't work on someone with my brilliant intellect, and I suppose my companion would also be unaffected by those tricks. Still, I am curious from a curious perspective so why not share with us?"

Again, the Garo Master didn't speak so this time Sunset Demon decided to say something. " We don't really care what your reasons are for saying what you did but because the two of us are going to be here for the foreseeable future, you might as well just come clean and tell us before you're forced to confess. We may not look like it but we can easily rip you to shreds within a matter of moments."

The Garo Master laughed. " How amusing..."

" What's amusing?"

" You honestly think you can destroy me?"

Sunset Demon took offence to that and swung her fist into the wall. " You're just a lowly assassin whose spirit is forced to linger around here. The two of us are demonic monsters and our power far exceeds your own. Granted, Midnight Sparkle over here is more about mental power as opposed to physical which is my specialty, but she is still pretty strong. If I were you, I would leave us alone unless death is something you truly embrace despite being dead."

The Garo Master laughed again. " Such conceit from those who think themselves as being high and mighty, but the truth is that deep down you are scared and act in such a manner that gives you pleasure. What pitiful creatures you are, unaware of what the truth is. The reality is that fate has already decided its outcome and nothing can be done to change its perception no matter how hard you try."

" What are you talking about?"

" You two are not what you seem."

Sunset Demon laughed this time. " You've got to be kidding me! Of course we're what we are."

The Garo Master shook his head. " I know that you do not possess the power that defines who you both are. Your demonic miasma is much lower than it should be and that tells me that you're both weak and desperate to acquire power at any cost. I can see your desperation with my own eyes and I find it amusing to watch. You can boast about being feared yet you are merely masking the truth to protect yourselves from ridicule."

" You're pushing your luck."

" Am I?"

Sunset Demon growled. " Do you want me to kill you?"

" Can you carry out such a threat?"

" Easily."

The Garo Master sheathed its swords. " Then prove your words aren't merely a boast."

Sunset Demon then charged at the Garo Master, slicing him across the chest using her claws before picking him up and tossing him into a wall. When he got back onto his feet moments later, she lunged at him again and continued attacking endlessly until she knocked him down before stomping on his body repeatedly using her foot. Once she had felt that she had made her point regarding her power, she walked back over to Midnight Sparkle before giving her companion a smirk that symbolized her arrogance, but Midnight Sparkle instead was looking on at the Garo Master in complete shock prompting Sunset Demon to look upon what she had done.

To her surprise, the Garo Master was standing once again, and no wounds appeared across his body. He then tilted his head several times as he thrust his sword, a sign that he was goading Sunset Demon into continuing her assault. Instead of ignoring his taunting, the she-demon ran forward and thrust her hand through his chest before pulling it back out and stepping back. Much to her shock, the Garo Master got back up again, the wound healing itself up and leaving Sunset Demon crestfallen. She lowered her head and slowly walked back to Midnight Sparkle who had watched everything.

" Are you done playing now?" Midnight Sparkle asked.

Sunset Demon slowly nodded. " Guess he was right about us being a lot weaker than we should be."

" All you did was give in to that lust of yours and attacked without hesitation."

" Not my best moment."

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " That's because it's part of your basic instincts, Sunset Demon. You yearn to inflict bloodshed wherever you go and no matter how hard you try to deny it, you can't help but fly into a murderous rage. No wonder I'm the brains between us both but I won't call you completely stupid. This whole pacifist act you've been using as of late clearly doesn't work as it's not the kind of person you are and showing compassion is just a pathetic attempt at trying to save yourself from being destroyed by Sunset. Face it! Your actions are a sign that you are desperate or perhaps an act of denial."

Sunset Demon glared at Midnight Sparkle before grabbing her by the neck. " Remember what I told you about talking down to me? You may have tapped into the power contained within this temple but that doesn't mean you can act superior."

" Guess you need to learn your place."

" What do you mean?"

Midnight Sparkle's body began to glow in a dark aura. " Like you said, I've tapped into this temple's power so that makes me better than you in every way. Sure, you could probably tap into the power as well... If you had the intellect to actually know how to use it." Sunset Demon was then knocked to the ground and Midnight Sparkle planted her foot on top of the she-demon's head. " We're so close to fulfilling our desires that I'm not letting you screw things up now. Once I've finished tapping into the remaining power of the temple, we can defeat Sunset, Princess Twilight, and Twilight Sparkle before turning our attention towards their friends.

The Garo Master, who had remained silent during this time began laughing. " So... You have every intention of mastering the dark power?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " It's just like Equestrian Magic only more evil in nature."

" Then so be it."

" Jealous?"

" You may tap into the power you crave but know that there is a price that must be paid."

" Nothing is beyond my reach."

The Garo Master laughed once again. " Then you shall learn first hand what that price is." He raised one of his hands to his ear and began listening to something, and he remained in this stance prompting Midnight Sparkle to question what he was doing. " Can you hear them, demon? Can you hear their voices echoing in the silence?"

Midnight Sparkle raised her hand to her air and began concentrating, thinking the Garo was trying to trick her into giving up on her desire. At first, she couldn't hear anything and was poised to call him out, but then she began hearing a faint sound and continued to listen in hopes of figuring it out. The sound grew louder with every passing moment until Midnight clutched her head in pain. Sunset Demon was curious as to why Midnight was clutching her head when the sound began piercing her ears prompting her to show irritation before looking around to see who or what was causing it.

The sound then expanded into two, four, eight, sixteen, and more before countless sounds could be heard all around. Midnight Sparkle confirmed that the sounds were wails that were coming from the very air itself but then she looked in horror as tiny spiritual heads started appearing. Each head had a face that continued wailing and she tried to look away but couldn't because of how horrifying it looked. With every passing moment, the wails got worse and worse until Midnight couldn't handle it anymore. Even Sunset Demon looked on in shock at seeing so many spirits wailing though Midnight was feeling much worse.

" What is this!?" Midnight Sparkle exclaimed. " Who or what are these things?"

" They are the spirits of those who perished in the war."

" There must be thousands of them."

" Many died during the conflict that brought Ikana Kingdom down." The Garo Master said. " Many of these spirits are soldiers, but the vast majority are of the innocent who were killed all because they were caught in the crossfire. Even now, after all these centuries, their spirits continue to linger, and all because their lives were ended. Can you feel their pain all around you, demons? Eternal slumber is what they seek but this can never happen. No matter how much they beg and plea for their freedom, they are forever bound to this place and will watch as they are ignored."

" How can there be thousands here?" Sunset Demon asked.

" It is because of the Garo."

" Your kind?" Midnight Sparkle asked.

The Garo Master nodded. " We Garo assassins were skillful in the art of killing and so during the war, we took the lives of many innocents, and even now you can hear their wailing all around as they wish to be free of their eternal torment."

" But that means."

The Garo Master laughed. " As the leader of the Garo, I had expectations that had to be fulfilled. These spirits... Most of them were killed... by ME!!!!" He laughed again before brandishing both of his flame swords and swung them around in a circle. " Their wails are like a nourishment to me. Many had their heads removed via execution, others were assassinated without ever realizing it, others were given the touch of death, and others fell victim to our many traps. I relished each and every kill because it was my nature and even now that desire continues to burn."

" And I thought we were monsters." Sunset Demon said.

" This assassin is a true monster."

" Now you're beginning to understand." The Garo Master said. " This temple's dark power is equalled only by its dark secret and the chosen one who comes here soon shall soon know the meaning of fear."

" We'll kill you before you have a chance to take our destinies from us."

" Did you not see what I did to your companion?"

" That's because she was reckless and acted without thinking."

" And you think you can do better?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " Despite hearing those horrible wails all around me, I can defeat you using my intellect, the power within the temple, and knowing how best to deal with someone who possess as much bloodlust as you do."

The Garo Master laughed. " It seemed ignorance is a strong trait within you, demon. You have been warned and now I will show you the futility of that ignorance. I shall make this a quick excursion as I await the arrival of the chosen one, the one who has been given the task of sealing the Stone Tower. Destiny has decreed she and I shall meet here and do battle and she is bound to this fate. You two demons can still have your fun with the chosen one as destiny has also decreed this but know that your lives now hang by a mere thread. That is the fate of all those who enter the Stone Tower."

With the second platform in place, I had to make my way back up to where the third one was so that I could complete the pathway across. Fortunately, there weren't any additional monsters that could knock me down below--or the alternative--so I didn't have to worry about it. My only complaint of course was having to backtrack to where I was before jumping down because of the arrangement of the platforms. Already, this ancient puzzle was pushing me to the limit though I hoped I would make it before losing my sanity, but that all depended on what was awaiting me further ahead.

A series of Hookshot pulls brought me up to the third switch and I decided to use the Zora Mask to activate it--it was my only choice as I already used my other two forms and the Deku Mask was useless due to the shell not being heavy enough. Putting on my mask, I squatted down and my body shimmered from human to Zora before I let out a scream. As I stepped on the switch, the final platform moved into position and I could finally continue onward, but first I needed to create Mikau's shell otherwise the platform would go back to where it was before--I nearly forgot about doing this.

Playing the Elergy of Emptiness caused me to shed Mikau's shell and I walked forward where the statue kept the switch activated. Good thing that this switch was next to where I needed to jump across otherwise I would have even more backtracking to perform. Before crossing, I grabbed my face, pulled off the Zora Mask, flipped back my hair, and almost ran into a boulder. It dropped down from above before rolling along and over the edge but I almost knocked down by it so I made sure to stop and let it pass without incident. I then jumped to the platform just as another boulder appeared and I continued jumping until I reached the other side.

This next ledge had another Gossip Stone on it and I was tempted to strike it just to see what it would do. Unsheathing my sword, I struck the stone and it wobbled for a couple of seconds before telling me that there was only 30:10 left. Unlike the Gossip Stones of Hyrule that told the exact time, the ones in Termina revealed how much time remained until the moon would crash and destroy everything. While I appreciated being given a precise answer, I wasn't very happy about it as it was a reminder that this world was still doomed unless I could prevent the moon from crashing period.

Using my Hookshot, I pulled myself up to the next ledge and barely avoided numerous boulders as they tumbled off the side and into the abyss below. Their numbers had been steadily increasing the further up the Stone Tower I climbed so perhaps I was getting closer to the temple. Luckily, I had a safe spot that was right in front of the column with the Hookshot plate on it, and walked forward so I could be within range of the next plate as the boulders continued rolling off. Firing the Hookshot upon getting close enough, I pulled myself up to the next ledge only to get blindsided by another Fire Keese.

It's attack knocked me forward and I landed on my face before getting up and using my sword to destroy the Keese--it lost its fire after hitting me--before turning my attention to my current position. Even more boulders were rolling around making the path forward treacherous but at least I didn't have to worry about any Beamos for the time being. Looking up, I could see the underside of the moon and despite not seeing its face, it still proved intimidating because of the significance behind its presence. To think that something like the moon could strike fear all because one individual strove to bring it down.

A thought then occurred to me. " Twilight?"

" What is it?" Twilight asked.

" I was thinking about something?"

" Oh?"

" You know how the Stone Tower has allowed the spirits of the dead here in Ikana to come back to life, right?"

" What about it?"

" Well, there were others who have died before and during the course of our journey." I answered. " The Deku Scrub child, Darmani, Mikau, Kamaro, and several others all died either of natural causes or from unfortunate circumstances. I was wondering if their spirits could come here to Ikana in order to come back to life. I know it sounds weird considering what has happened here regarding the Stone Tower's door being opened, but I figured they deserve a second chance since their lives were taken from them."

Princess Twilight began thinking about what I had said before slowly shaking her head. " I think that the effects of the Stone Tower apply only to those who used to live in Ikana before the kingdom was destroyed. It might not work for those who died in other areas of Termina and besides, what you were suggesting has the inclination of an evil act. While I understand wanting Maud and the others to come back to life because of what happened to them, the dead shouldn't be brought back to life even if such intentions were noble."

I sighed. " I figured you would say that."

" Their times are done even though they didn't want it."

" Guess my heart is too big, huh?"

Princess Twilight smiled. " You're showing concern for the other tribes and there's nothing wrong with that. Still, wanting to bring the dead back is an act of evil because it goes against the very laws of nature, yet what happened in Ikana was beyond their control."

It was disappointing to know that my idea wouldn't work even if it was morbid but Her Highness was right about it. The dead needed to remain just that and be remembered for the good they accomplished in life while at the same time question them for the bad they committed. I doubted that Starlight cared about such morals when she opened the Stone Tower and unleashed the darkness but then all she cared about was pulling a prank and what better way than to revive the dead hoping their presence would scare any who came here. I mean, what could she have hoped to gain from doing this?

All she really did was upset the natural order of Ikana by bringing the dead back to life. Most of them are aware that they have been awoken from their eternal slumber and desire to be freed from the torment they were suffering from, yet some saw their predicament as an opportunity to finish their desires before death had taken them. Ikana was meant to be a barren wasteland, a reminder to the other tribes of what could happen should war come to them. Luckily, Starlight would soon have to answer for what she had done as once the final Giant was freed from its dark imprisonment, I'd be able to confront her on top of the Clock Tower and end this madness.

Before doing that though, I had to face Ganondorf once again according to what he said when last I encountered him. It had been some time since he last paid me a visit and while I would prefer to never see him again for as long as I lived, I knew he was watching my every move and hoping that I continued to meet his expectations. I wasn't sure how he was going to fight me inside of the dream realm as he called it but it had become a sword hanging above my head, the blade dropping closer and closer with every passing moment, my chances of victory against him anything but certain.

I began looking around for the next Hookshot plate and quickly found it moments later along with the next section of the Stone Tower, yet I could also see something else though from my current position, it looked like a round sphere. It could be what I had been trying to reach or perhaps it was something else entirely that was left behind. In any case, I aimed up at the plate, fired the Hookshot, and pulled myself up to the ledge and got a better look. The sphere wasn't a sphere at all but rather a sinister looking stone head that had flames for eyes, a hand on either side of it, strange markings all over it, a giant mouth with teeth, and an overall intimidation factor.

There was one unusual thing about the structure and it was a strange looking red gem situated below the teeth of the mouth. It glowed with a faint light and something was beckoning me to go over and take a much closer look but I had to resist because walking forward would mean plunging down to my death in the abyss below. I looked behind me and saw an Owl Statue so I immediately walked over and struck it with my sword. I had a feeling this was the last one but I didn't care as now I had a means of coming back here without having to climb all the way back up.

I looked back at the stone head. " So that's the entrance to the temple?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You just need to use the Elergy of Emptiness to move those platforms into the proper positions and cross over."

" What do you make of that red gem?"

" It looks suspicious."

I nodded. " That's what I was thinking as well."

" It might have some kind of purpose but until we know for certain, it's probably best to remember it for later." Twilight said. " In the meantime, now that the Owl Statue has been activated when you used your sword, we can come back here at any time without climbing up the Stone Tower, but I suspect those platforms over on the other side will need to be solved either way for obvious reasons."

I sighed. " That figures."

" If what that Gossip Stone said about the time remaining is true, we might be able to complete this temple within that time frame."

" I doubt it."

" You really think so?"

" We need an entire three day cycle dedicated to it because of who is waiting for us in there."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, I suppose so. You could also do with some healing items in addition to being properly prepared. You know, we could just reset time right now, get those supplies, and come back here all within a matter of minutes."

" I still need to get that one mask from Iron Will."

Princess Twilight slapped her forehead. " Oh that's right! I forgot you can now do that since you have the Giant's Wallet and stopped Lightning Dust from robbing the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop. We need to get back to Clock Town thought it's still a bit early as he won't put the mask out on display until tomorrow night. You should grind for some extra rupees before paying him a visit and buying the mask."

At least I now had something to do before entering the temple. I took out the ocarina, played the Song of Soaring this time, concentrated on wanting to return to Clock Town, and watched as the wings protruded from my back. They wrapped themselves around my body and I disappeared before re-appearing seconds later back in town. From there, I ran towards the southern gate, entering Termina Field and began cutting down clumps of grass in order to earn enough rupees to buy that mask--I didn't have far to go since I picked up a large amount during my trek across Ikana.

For the next few hours, I would cut up as much grass as possible, go back into town so that the grass would re-spawn outside, then go back outside and repeat the process over and over until I had reached the maximum amount of rupees my wallet could hold. It wasn't the most pleasant thing to do as it involved a lot of running but it was necessary if I was to get my hands on the ultimate mask that was supposedly hidden somewhere according to Adagio. At least I was getting familiar with Termina Field's general layout though it didn't really mean that much since when I finished my business in Ikana, I'd most likely spend my remaining time in town before saving it.

Once I had acquired 500 rupees, my next objective was to speed through time until I reached the point during the final night where the Curiosity Shop was open. While it did mean having to waste about twenty hours, there wasn't much else I could do unless I reset time. That's when I started yawning and realized that I was getting tired. It had been some time since I last got slept and I did have some time to spare before entering the Stone Tower proper but I wanted to buy the mask first. I then played the Song of Double Time and immediately whisked myself forward to the final day.

Dawn of the Final Day - 24 Hours Remain.

Then I played the song again to move forward to the final night.

Night of the Final Day - 12 Hours Remain.

And then a third time to push the clock forward an extra four hours. Doing that only caused the moon to shift ever closer to impact while everything else remained the same. I was in the field so I ran through the southern gate into town, turned left to head into West Clock Town, and walked up to the shop before going inside. Iron Will was standing behind the counter though he didn't have anything out on display to my displeasure. The mask should be available since I stopped Lightning Dust so had I done something wrong? I hoped not as that meant having to come back here again and waste a perfectly good three day cycle on waiting.

" Come in, come in!" Iron Will said as he beckoned me to come up to the counter. " I'm surprised someone wanted to come here especially with what's going on outside, but I won't let that bother me since you're obviously a customer, I kid you not. Well... Whatever your reason for sticking around town, you certainly are a brave kid or perhaps crazy or both but don't let my rambling bother you."

" Why didn't you flee?" I asked.

" When there is business to be done and profit to be made, I won't get frightened away by anything, I kid you not."

" Guess you're as crazy as I am then."

Iron Will laughed. " Anyway, do you have something I can buy off of you? I will pay you good money but the rarer the item, the more rupees you'll get. Or did you come here to buy something? I originally had made arrangements to get a Bomb Bag from a regular who comes here every so often yet she wasn't able to deliver and the Bomb Shop ended up selling it though it's not a big deal. It was their item in the first place so they should reap the benefits from it."

" I'm looking for a mask."

" A mask!?"

I nodded. " I'm an avid mask collector and have been acquiring them all across Termina."

" I kid you not when I say that's quite the unique hobby you have there, kid." Iron Will said. He then began looking me over which made me feel really uncomfortable but he soon nodded his head before scratching his chin. " Yep! You do look like someone who would run around collecting masks. I wonder if you know that Happy Mask Saleswoman who came into town a couple of days ago."

I nodded again. " She and I are acquainted."

Iron Will laughed. " Well, don't let that one fool you or else you might end up getting something you don't want. She can be charming at times but I hear she has a nasty temper if someone were to wrong her in some way. Guess eccentric people can be unpredictable when you least expect it. Anyway, you said you were looking for a mask, right? Well... I think you might be interested in what I have here, I kid you not, but I need a few moments to find it."

He then turned around and began rummaging through the antiques he had stacked up behind him. While it was funny seeing Iron Will plow his way through what he had, sifting and tossing aside anything he came across that wasn't what I wanted, I constantly kept looking at the clock hanging on the wall. I only had a short period of time before resetting time so I really wanted him to pick up the pace. When it was obvious that he couldn't find the mask amongst his antiques, Iron Will walked back to the counter before ducking down and rummaging through some additional items until he shouted out.

His shout caught me by surprise. " What is it?"

Iron Will shouted again. " I found it!" He stood back up followed by placing the mask I saw from before on the counter. The last time I saw that mask, I let Iron Will have it when I discovered the true nature behind his shop, but since then I've learned that while his business was shady, it was also legitimate because his customers were shady, a particular one in question whose innocence was misleading. " You're the first person who has shown interest in this mask, I kid you not. I have no idea where this mask came from or who created it but you must admit that it is strange looking."

" Now that I'm getting a close look at it, it does look weird."

" This is a rare item, I kid you not."

" What do you call it?"

" It's known as the All-Night Mask." Iron Will answered. " When you wear it, no matter how hard you try, you won't fall asleep. This is the perfect mask at bedtime as you can stay up indefinitely until you take it off and you end up falling asleep again. As I said, this is a rare item so I can't sell it for no less than 500 rupees, I kid you not. I know it sounds steep but something like this doesn't show up just anywhere."

" I'll take it."

Iron Will laughed. " You'll pay me the 500 rupees?"

I nodded as I took out the Giant's Wallet, opened it up, and poured out all of the rupees it contained. " Will this suffice? I know it must look surprising seeing someone like me hand over a huge amount of rupees but I really need this mask."

Iron Will's jaw dropped and he stared at me with a shocked look before regaining his composure. " You must be one wealthy kid to cough up so much, I kid you not, but who am I to complain about such a trivial matter?" Grabbing a red rupee, Iron Will bit it with his teeth before putting it back down. " Yep! Definitely genuine! I deal with all kinds of customers and sometimes they try to use fake rupees hence why I bite them to make sure they are real, I kid you not. Anyway, here is your new mask."

He handed it over to me where I eagerly took it and held it in my hands. Sure, it cost me everything I had in my wallet, but it was definitely worth it as it was one more mask added to the total number I had. I then began counting on my fingers to see just how many masks I had acquired so far and came up with nineteen. That was a lot of masks without a doubt yet I've only used a few of them while allowing the others to simply be nothing more than collectibles. With the All-Night Mask, I started thinking about how best to use it given its purposes was to keep me from falling asleep at night.

I then asked Iron Will if he knew of a good use for the mask and it took him a while before coming up with an answer. He said that the grandmother of the woman who worked over at the Stock Pot Inn would often tell bedtime stories to anyone who was willing to listen. Most people who heard her stories tended to fall asleep because they just couldn't keep their eyes open but perhaps I could stay awake if I used the mask. It would let me test it out as well as learn more about this world's history. Iron Will also mentioned she was only available at certain times of the day though he added it didn't matter since she most likely fled.

Thanking Iron Will for the mask sale--not to mention feeling much lighter because of the expense--I turned and walked out of the Curiosity Shop before heading over to a nearby bench and sitting down so that I could think about my next move. The temple atop the Stone Tower was my main objective though now that I had purchased the All-Night Mask, I was curious to use it before the grandmother of Scootaloo--I remembered she was portraying Anju--and see what would happen. My head wanted me to focus on awakening the final Giant while my heart was set on using my new mask. I was conflicted on what I wanted to do.

Chapter 59: Regret

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
June 5, 2017
Chapter 59: Regret!

Despite the ever growing presence of the moon drawing closer and closer to Clock Town, I wasn't worried since I would be resetting time within the next few minutes. Instead, I was stuck with my little dilemma over what I wanted to do next. The Stone Tower was beckoning me to go there and awaken the final Giant but I had now acquired a new mask and was keen on wanting to see how it worked. Giving up 500 rupees for something that most likely had a single purpose was a hefty price considering that money could have been used to acquire some healing items for what was to come but it was worth it in the long term.

What Adagio said at the time continued to resonate within my heart. The ultimate mask and the power it supposedly contained was hidden somewhere in Termina and possessed a power that rivals Majora's Mask. My heart cringed over using something like that because I didn't want to become consumed much like what happened when I became the she-demon all because of wanting a crown that wasn't even mine in the first place. To lose myself again and not having a means of turning back. This mask was more trouble than it was worth from a certain perspective and yet it could be the means of defeating Starlight Glimmer.

She had caused so much trouble all in an attempt to play pranks but I was seeing the real reason behind her motivations. Whenever someone played a prank, it wasn't always a means of having a good laugh out of it. No, there was a hint of malice intertwined within it that was designed to hurt. Starlight felt like she had been wronged by so many people that she lashed out at them through her pranks and no doubt she had most likely forgotten why she was doing it. Her original desire for fun--or whatever was considered as such by her--had been replaced over time with a desire to destroy everything just because it was there.

Had she really become psychotic? Was she no longer satisfied with having fun and instead desired to destroy this entire world? Or was my theory of her being under the influence of another force true? There was much about Majora's Mask that remained a mystery. Not even the resident mask expert, Sonata Dusk, knew all its secrets despite sharing what she knew about the history behind the mask. I supposed I could pay her another visit in hopes she would have more information to tell me but I suspected she would merely continue reminding me to return what Starlight stole from her before she had to leave Termina.

I looked down at the All-Night Mask and began to think about the powers locked within each one I had collected so far. Some of them possessed powers that were adorable in nature and would generally make things a little easier for someone while others were fearsome in nature and should never be worn under any circumstances. Whenever I put on one of these masks, my mind contemplates whether I would eventually be consumed by its powers. Granted, none of my masks possessed evil powers but the thought continued to haunt me all because of what I had been experiencing.

Speaking of the All-Night Mask, I decided to take a closer look at it since I hadn't bothered to since I got it. It had large red eyes that looked like they were peering into my soul and the strange way it had been woven together made it look creepy. If anything, the mask would only cover my eyes, nose, and the sides of my face while my mouth would remain unprotected though I couldn't complain. To think that this had the power to keep me from falling asleep. If it did indeed worked that way, I would never have to sleep again for the rest of my journey yet such a thing was doubtful as no one could not fall asleep.

Still, 500 rupees was an awful lot of money. Perhaps I should have tried to convince Iron Will to give me a discount since I had been a somewhat regular customer? Of course, he wouldn't have known that as resetting time erased the memories of everyone's interactions with me. I then placed on my face in hopes that my body wouldn't suddenly collapse--my exhaustion levels were rising from having done so much lately--yet nothing happened. Had I been scammed by Iron Will? No, despite his shady dealings, I doubted that he would trick me unless he really was a crook. Perhaps there was more to this mask than I thought.

I looked at Princess Twilight. " Well? What do you think?"

" You look like a demonic monster with that one." Twilight answered.

I glared at her. " Twilight!"

" I'm only joking, Sunset." Twilight said, blushing. I didn't find it amusing and I continued glaring at her until she apologized. " I'm sorry. I didn't mean to make you upset because of your past experiences, but that mask does make you look frightening what with those eyes."

" The eyes do have this creepy factor about them."

" Why did you put it on anyway?"

" I wanted to see if wearing it would keep me from falling asleep."

" Did it work?"

I shrugged. " I don't know. I mean, I don't feel any different than I was a few minutes ago, and I was thinking that perhaps Iron Will had scammed me out of my rupees by selling me a useless mask, but there's something about it that strike me as strange."

Princess Twilight took a closer look at the All-Night Mask. " It's definitely not your run-of-the-mill mask that's for sure. The material seems to be made of some kind of cloth I've never seen before and the craftsmanship tells me that whoever made this knew what they were doing." She then had a sudden brainstorm and started bopping me on my head. " Do you remember what Iron Will said about the grandmother of Scootaloo?"

I nodded. " Yes, but I didn't think Scootaloo had any relatives aside from Rainbow Dash--more of a sisterly bond."

" The Scootaloo of this world most definitely does." Twilight said. " And if there's anyone who can help us test out the power of this mask, it would be her. I know we should be making preparation for our upcoming exploration of the Stone Tower but we can pay this woman a visit just to see what happens. I know you don't like the idea of wasting any of the cycles of time but we do have an infinite amount so we could use one just for this."

" Guess we could do that..."

Princess Twilight knew I was hesitating but reassured me that I didn't need to feel guilty over wasting one of the cycles on doing some minor errands before having to go and take care of something major. She then mentioned about resetting time as it had been a while since I left the Curiosity Shop. I looked up and saw that the moon had gotten closer though I was curious as to what would happen if I were to go and confront Starlight right now. Nothing was stopping me from going to the top of Clock Tower and trying to talk some sense into her but would she even listen to me?

Of course, without the final Giant, the moon wouldn't be stopped and everything would be destroyed--it was an image I didn't want burned into my memory--so in that sense, going up there was pointless unless I had everything in place. Nothing could ever be easy for me no matter how hard I tried but this was something I had gotten used to. Sighing, I took out the Ocarina of Time and played the Song of Time to go back to the beginning of the first day. As I was pulled back to the start, I could only wonder how much longer it would be before finally changing everything back to normal and being freed from this nightmare.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain.

Upon hearing the sounds of a cucco cawing, my first instinct was to go straight to the Stock Pot Inn and speak to Scootaloo's grandmother. Unfortunately, Princess Twilight informed me that it wouldn't be open until 8:00am so I had to wait two hours which obviously meant killing some time. I could have gone out into Termina Field to grind for some more rupees and to waste some time but I didn't know if this would be a complete cycle or a smaller one due to how I approached the current situation before me. I didn't have any other ideas so I began walking towards East Clock Town and the inn.

No one seemed to notice me wearing the All-Night Mask, although come to think of it, this had been true regarding all of the masks I've worn. There were no freak outs, no ridicule, and even shunning just because I was doing something different. It never really occurred to be before until this exact moment and now it was the only thing I could think of as I made my way over to the Stock Pot Inn. Much of Termina's history was a mystery as I had never asked anyone about it. Even Her Highness didn't know much and she was the kind of person--pony--who loved knowledge and lore more than anyone else I knew.

Termina's history might not have been important from an adventuring standpoint, but it was from an educational one. Everywhere I looked, there was history to be seen and yet I had no idea what any of it meant. Sure, I knew some bits and pieces of the world's history from the four regions but it was nothing compared to what had eluded me all this time. If I knew more then perhaps I wouldn't be confused as often as I was. I preferred to know all of my facts without a single thing missing instead of going around with limited information--all that ever did was give me more trouble than I wanted.

When I reached the Stock Pot Inn, I looked at a clock hanging on the wall nearby, and it displayed the time of only 6:20am. Huh... I thought that my inner musings would have wasted a little bit more time but I guessed that wasn't the case. I couldn't remember if I had ever gone inside or notto see what what it was like in there but then I didn't really need to come directly to the inn as my errands had me going to other places across town. In any case, the Stock Pot Inn wasn't exactly glamourous--and that was a nice way of putting it--as it looked run down and in desperate need of repairs.

" So Scootaloo's grandmother is in there?"

I nodded. " Looks like it."

" Compared to the hotels I've read about in Las Pegasus, this place certainly comes off as pathetic."

" When did you ever go to Las Pegasus?"

" I never did." Twilight answered. " I've only read about it in books. I'd love to go there and see the fancy hotels with my own eyes but you know me, Sunset. As a princess, I have my royal duties to perform even when it looks like I don't have any as it has been pretty quiet."

I rolled my eyes. " Maybe you should ask Princess Celestia if you could go there some time."

" I'll think about it."

" Anyway, I agree that the Stock Pot Inn isn't what I would call five-star."

" I'm guessing that it fell on hard times because of a lack of customers." Twilight said. " Then again, that's only because of the problem that looms above us. I doubt they would be willing to tell us how many people have stopped here within the last few months as that would probably go against company policy. We should probably move away from the door in case they think we're loitering or something."

" Who would accuse us of that?"

Princess Twilight pointed to the guard standing in front of the east gate. " He would definitely think that."

While what Her Highness said sounded silly, I wasn't about to get on the bad side of one of the town's militia so I walked away from the entrance to the Stock Pot Inn and started walking around in circles just to pass the time until it opened. Despite everything that had been going on in Clock Town, it certainly was an interesting place, yet I never really took the time to appreciate it since I was always running around from place to place or warping away elsewhere before having a chance to take a closer look. Every building had its own unique charm that was saying 'come inside me and look' when you looked at them from the outside.

To the residents of Clock Town, everything was always the same unless weird things started happening--like now for instance. For tourists, they got to see what the town had to offer through its different attractions, yet I wondered if the residents ever bothered to indulge themselves in those same attractions. If not, how could this town maintain itself without the ideal income needed to keep things up if its own citizens never utilized anything designed for entertainment purposes? No wonder Mayor Mare had her hands full--even more so because of who she was dealing with--dealing with Clock Town's day-to-day upkeep.

Princess Twilight then informed me that it was now past 8:00am so I walked back to the Stock Pot Inn and went inside. Unlike the exterior which looked drab, the interior was certainly presentable though I suspected the rooms themselves were poorly adequate--I felt bad for patrons as they wouldn't expect such conditions. Considering this was the only hotel around, potential customers couldn't complain as they had no where else to go so it boiled down to having to accept it. No one was behind the counter so perhaps Scootaloo or whoever was supposedly working were busy doing something else so I took the initiative by giving myself a personal tour.

Beyond the counter was a staircase that lead up to the second floor and I could see Indigo Zap walking up and down the stairs in deep thought. As I recalled, she was portraying one of the two Rosa Sisters who were part of Gorman's Troupe. So this was where they had been staying--I obviously knew this but never had physical proof--while in town for the carnival yet none of them knew that it had been cancelled. I wanted to inform her about this but chose not to as Big Macintosh would find that out the hard way as he was currently heading towards the Mayor's Residence where he would be told about it by Monsieur Aroma--Troubleshoes.

Leaving Indigo to deal with her own thoughts, I walked up to a door and could hear someone mumbling on the other side. Their voice sounded awfully familiar so I entered the room only to stop dead in my tracks upon seeing who was there.

" Is that you, Tortus?"

" Why is she here?" I whispered to Twilight.

" Who is that?" Twilight asked.

" That's Principal Abacus Cinch." I answered. Sitting in a chair with a cloth draped on her shoulders was Principal Cinch herself though judging from how she was hunched over, she was portraying someone who was quite old, and then it occurred to me that she was the one related to Scootaloo in this world. " This must be the grandmother Iron Will mentioned yet why did it have to be her of all people?"

" You sound disappointed, Sunset."

" This is 'the' Principal Cinch our friends and I told you about when you met Twilight Sparkle."

Princess Twilight gasped before whispering. " This is the one who caused her to transform into a monster?"

I nodded. " Principal Cinch wanted to win the Friendship Games by any means necessary including using her best student as a guinea pig. Had she not had the desire to use magic to assure Crystal Prep's victory, Twilight Sparkle wouldn't have unleashed what she had collected in her pendant. Granted, I wouldn't have become Daydream Shimmer but that's beside the point. She was exposed as having cared more about her reputation and that of her school than the well being of her students. I've no idea what she has been doing since yet can you blame me for not being happy to see her?"

Princess Twilight nodded slightly though she hesitated. " Remember that in this world, Principal Cinch isn't the same person as she was back in the human world. You need to overcome your personal issues with her and view her instead as someone who could provide us with some information."

" Tortus?" Principal Cinch asked. " Who are you talking to?"

I whispered to Twilight again. " Who is Tortus?"

Princess Twilight whispered back. " I think she is referring to you, Sunset."

" I'm not this Tortus."

" You'll have to humour her then."

I slapped my forehead before moaning though I understood what Her Highness was expecting of me. While this was indeed Principal Cinch, she was an entirely different person here though apparently she had some vision problems given she was referring to me as this Tortus. I could have told her the honest truth but upon getting a closer look at her demeanour, I didn't have the heart to do it. I didn't want to be that kind of person. Cinch was reading a large book on her lap or had been until I entered the room and was beckoning me to come over with a wave of her hand.

" Come closer, Tortus." Principal Cinch said.

I walked over to her. " Um... What are you doing?"

" Such a silly question coming from you." Principal Cinch answered. " But then you always were asking questions like the good boy you are, Tortus. Have you finished with those errands for father like I asked?" I had no idea how to respond so I nodded and it seemed to have pleased her. " Good. You've done such a wonderful thing that mother will reward you with a story and perhaps some candy if you pay close attention. Now, which one of my two stories would you like for me to read, Tortus? I know it sounds unfair giving you only two options but you will be pleasantly surprised by them."

" What are they?"

" The first is called "The Carnival of Time" and the other is called "Four Giants". Both will take me a while to read them to you, Tortus, so I hope you can stay awake long enough otherwise you might end up falling asleep."

Good thing that I was wearing the All-Night Mask so I didn't have to worry about falling asleep. Both choices were interesting ones and I had every intention of listening to both stories for my own benefit--also to give Princess Twilight some research she could fawn over--though what she said about taking a while to read through them worried me. I mean, I wasn't worried in general as I could just reset time if she dragged on too long but I suspected it wouldn't be as bad as it sounded. Besides, it wasn't everyday that Principal Cinch would teach me about a subject given she was from a different school.

" How about the first one?"

Principal Cinch was delighted. " Considering that the carnival is in two days from now, I am not surprised that you wanted this story. It's always a good idea for you to learn the meaning behind why we celebrate it here in Clock Town every year so I'll read it with some enthusiasm. Please sit down, Tortus, and mother will begin telling the story." I did as she asked by sitting down on the floor and she flipped through several pages in her book before finding it. " Ahem... Each year, the season of harmony begins when the sun and moon are in alignment. Paying homage to the way that both nature and time are tirelessly in the process of progressing.

" The Carnival of Time is when the peoples of the four worlds celebrate that harmony and request fruitfulness for the year." Principal Cinch stopped reading and looked down at me with her squinting eyes. " Good, you're paying attention so far, Tortus, but here is where things truly begin. For ages, people have worn masks resembling the giants who are the gods of the four worlds. Now, it has become a custom for each person to bring a handmade mask to the Carnival of Time. It is said that if a couple united on the day of the festival and dedicated a mask as a sign of their union, it would bring luck."

" Is that so?"

Principal Cinch nodded. " Your daughter, my granddaughter, Anju, was planning on getting married on the eve of the carnival and had even prepared a mask for the occasion. Had she been able to go through with it, she would have acquired a considerable amount of luck, but it seems the one she was supposed to marry has disappeared. No one knows what happened to him and you should be concerned with it, Tortus."

Did she just say my "daughter"!? Now I definitely knew her vision was poor but I wasn't about to call her out on it. She did give me a small clue about Kafei in that his sudden disappearance was known to more than just Monsieur Aroma but I had a feeling she wouldn't say much more. " Is that the end of the story?"

Principal Cinch shook her head. " There is one last bit for me to read and mother will be finished. The centerpiece of the carnival is the clock tower, and on the eve of all the festivities, the doors to its roof are opened... From atop the clock tower roof, a ceremony to call the gods is held and an ancient song is sung." She took a moment to catch her breath before continuing reading, surprising as it wasn't as long of a story as she said. " All of these festivities for the Carnival of Time are held so that we may ask the gods for a rich harvest in the year to come!" She then slammed her hand onto the book before looking down at me again. " You did a good job!" (1.)

" We're done?"

" That's all for Tortus."

" I was surprised about that bit regarding Anju."

" I thought it best to mention it to you, Tortus."

I wasn't entirely sure of the situation but I nodded my head just to make her feel happy. " Guess we should get started on the--" I cut myself off upon looking at a clock on the wall and it said that it was now 10:20am when it was clearly 8:20am a few moments ago. Cinch wasn't kidding when she said that she would take a while to read the story. In fact, she had taken an entire two hours to read it and I wouldn't have noticed the change if not for the clock indicating it. Would the same thing happen with the other story? Would hours merely pass by in an instant? " Like I said... About that other story."

" First, a question."

I gulped. " A question?"

Principal Cinch nodded. " Now, when does the clock tower roof open?

" The eve of the festival."

Principal Cinch smiled. " You did a good job remembering. That's the boy I'm proud of." I would have mentioned that I was a girl and not a boy but again I wasn't going to call her out on it. " I'll give you some candy as a prize. It might not be traditional but hopefully you will enjoy it." She reached for something on the bookshelf behind her, fiddled about for a few moments before handing over a Piece of Heart, surprising me. I didn't expect her definition of candy was a Piece of Heart but I gladly took it anyway and felt the warmth within me once again as it entered my body. " Would you like me to read you the other story now, Tortus?"

" How long will it take?"

" This one is much longer and will take until tomorrow morning."

My jaw dropped. " Seriously!?"

" Does Tortus not want mother to read it to him?"

" N-no! Go right ahead."

Principal Cinch smiled though I wasn't sure about the sincerity behind it. " This is quite a long story, but it is a good one for you to hear, Tortus, so I will read this to the very best of my abilities." She flipped through some more pages in her book until stopping at where it was before coughing. " Ahem... This tale's from long ago when all the people weren't separated into four worlds like they are now. In those times all the people lived together, and the four giants lived among them."

" They lived amongst the people?"

" Do you doubt it?"

I shrugged. " I mean, it's hard to imagine them living amongst the people what with their size and all.

Principal Cinch chuckled though I felt uncomfortable when she did as I wasn't used to it. " Remember that this is just a story, Tortus, so while some aspects of it are indeed real, others are merely fictional and designed to tell an interesting tale. Now then, on the day of the festival that celebrates the harvest, the giants spoke to the people..."We have chosen to guard the people while we sleep... 100 steps north, 100 steps south, 100 steps east, 100 steps west. If you have need, call us in a loud voice by declaring something such as, 'The mountain blizzard has trapped us.' Or 'The ocean is about to swallow us.' Your cries shall carry to us..."

" I didn't think they could perform such miracles."

" The Four Giants possess powers far beyond our own comprehension."

" So everyone was happy with this arrangement."

" Not all."

" There was an exception?"

Principal Cinch nodded. " Such a curious boy you are, Tortus. You make mother so proud by being so attentive. I honestly thought you would have fallen asleep by now but it seems something is keeping you awake much to my esteemed delight."

I looked away. " I'm just so thrilled to be hearing your stories."

" You're also a good boy, Tortus.

The All-Night Mask had definitely proven itself useful for the situation it had been created for by keeping me from falling asleep. Had I not been wearing it and Cinch read her stories regardless, I'd have fallen asleep and the time would have ticked away for nothing. Granted, I would have gotten a lot of sleep in the process but at the exchange of not learning more about Termina's history--that would have resulted in Princess Twilight bopping me on the head endlessly as she loved historical information more than any sane person would. If it wasn't for the reward of a Piece of Heart--maybe even a second--and the knowledge, this would have been a waste of time.

" Who was the exception?"

" There was one who was shocked and saddened by all this... A little imp."

As soon as Cinch mentioned the word 'imp', I immediately interrupted her. " An imp? Does it have a name?"

Principal Cinch shook her head. " The story does not give a name to the imp but perhaps you would like to give him one, Tortus? It would make the story sound much more dynamic and this is meant for your enjoyment so I will gladly male the necessary alterations to the narrative."

" How about Starlight?"

" Mother likes that name so Starlight shall be what I refer to the imp as." Principal Cinch answered. " A strange name for a male imp but this is what Tortus wants and mother wants for you to be happy. Allow me to continue the story. Now then, Starlight was a friend of the giants since before they had created the four worlds. "Why must you leave?" "Why do you not stay?" The childhood friend felt neglected, so he spread his anger across the four worlds. Repeatedly, he wronged all people. Overwhelmed with misfortune, the people sang the song of prayer to the giants who lived in each of the four compass directions."

" Does the story say what those wrongs were?"

" I believe that is left to the imagination."

" I guess?"

Principal Cinch laughed. " You need not worry so much about such matters."

I had every reason to worry. Cinch wasn't aware that what she was telling me in her book was really happening. The imp in the story had acted in a manner similar to what Starlighthad been doing but unlike the story, her actions were real and would bring about destruction to Termina. What had once been a story was slowly transforming into a surreal nightmare that would only continue to get worse. There could be answers to the overall problem within the story itself so now I needed to pay close attention to catch it. That bit about the people singing to the Giants sounded a lot like what Principal Celestia taught me but I needed clarity first.

" What did they do?"

" The giants heard their cry and responded with a roar." Principal Cinch answered as she turned the page. " They said: "Oh, imp. Oh, imp. We are the protectors of the people. You have caused the people pain. Oh, imp, leave these four worlds! Otherwise, we shall tear you apart!" Starlight was frightened and saddened. He had lost his old friends." She turned to the next page before coughing briefly. " Starlight returned to the heavens, and harmony was restored to the four worlds. And the people rejoiced and they worshiped the giants of the four worlds like gods. And they lived happily... ever after..." (1.)

" Not the kind of ending I was expecting."

" Wasn't that fun, Tortus?"

" I did learn a bit about Termina's history."

" Then mother shall ask you another question."

" What is it?"

" What did the people do to call the giants?"

Crap! I had completely forgotten about that part and it was the most essential bit of the entire story. I was so caught up with what Starlight had been doing, I neglected the imp in the actual story and pretended that they were one and the same. I needed to come up with an answer otherwise Cinch might think I wasn't paying attention despite the fact that I had listened to the entire thing. She began looking at me hoping for an answer yet my mind was a complete blank. My mind then thought about simply making something up and hoped she would believe me but I couldn't lie to her despite who she was and all.

Sighing, I had to tell her the truth. " I don't know the answer."

" Not even a guess?"

I shook my head. " I honestly don't know."

Principal Cinch seemed disappointed but quickly changed her tune. " Oh, really? But you listened so hard and had so many questions so mother is happy. I'll give you some more candy as a prize for trying." She reached over to the bookshelf, turned back, and handed over a second Piece of Heart before closing her book. " Well, I have no more stories to tell you right now, Tortus. You should run along and carry on with those chores for father before he gets overwhelmed."

" What will you do now?"

" Me? I'll have some food but hopefully not the kind that tastes terrible."

Principal Cinch relaxed in her chair and I could tell that nothing I said would convince her to do anything else. I then looked at the clock again and was shocked to discover that now said that it was 11:00am the next day--there was an additional feature that revealed the current day and it was different than what I saw before. I had spent an entire day listening to stories and while I received two Pieces of Heart for my trouble, it was the principle more than anything else. No doubt Cinch was overjoyed at getting to tell someone close to her stories about Termina's history so at least I made her happy.

Once the effects of the second Piece of Heart had warmed me up, I took my leave of her and exited from the Stock Pot Inn proper. Much of what Cinch said had flown over my head because of confusion yet I knew Princess Twilight couldn't wait to delve into it though she knew there were more important things that needed doing. Taking off the All-Night Mask and holding it in my hands, it had proven itself to be a very useful mask though I doubted it would be of any further use. A shame really as I wanted to keep wearing it but I supposed its purpose was now over.

There was no chance that I could get through the final temple with the amount of time I had left so that meant resetting time again, make the necessary preparations, and head on over to the Stone Tower to solve the last part of the ancient puzzle. Before going back to the beginning again, I looked up at the Stock Pot Inn and wondered if I would have to come back here again for something. I most likely would but I wasn't sure in what capacity but it wouldn't be until after the final Giant was freed. Taking out the ocarina, I played the Song of Time and warped back to the beginning despite feeling that much hadn't been accomplished.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain.

My first objective was to get some healing items yet that involved money, something I didn't have because I would lose such things every time I reset time. While I could have gotten rupees out of the bank, I hadn't deposited all that much and I doubted that I had enough for what I needed. Before doing anything else, I played the Inverted Song of Time so that everything would slow down by one third. As the melody began affecting everything around me, slowing it all to a crawl, I began to picture what could be awaiting me in the final temple other than Sunset Demon and perhaps Midnight Sparkle. I needed to be extra prepared for them.

To that end, I left Clock Town--I first had to convince the guard that I could leave on my own--and began grinding rupees for about an hour or two. It wasn't what I would call productive but it was necessary to purchase what I needed. Once I had amassed one hundred rupees--I was exhausted at this point--I went back into Clock Town and paid a visit to the shop on the west side of town. The owner of the shop bore a slight resemblance to Iron Will in terms of facial features though I knew it wasn't him as he lacked the size. He was certainly surprised at seeing a kid come in but he changed his tune once I showed him the rupees I had gathered.

After spending almost all of my rupees, I walked out of the shop with three bottles of Red Potion and one of Green Potion. I had a feeling that magic would be used inside of the temple so having a potion that restored Magic Power would prove useful. Unfortunately, I didn't have enough rupees to buy the essential items--namely arrows, bombs, and the like so hopefully I could find them inside pots while exploring the temple. I then played the Song of Soaring, concentrating on the Stone Tower, and wings protruded from my back before wrapping themselves around me.

I then disappeared only to re-appear moments later on top of the Stone Tower with the mouth-like entrance of the temple looming in front of me. " Guess it's finally time to go in there and awaken the final Giant, huh?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You did a lot of grinding to get your hands on those potions so use them wisely. By the way, I listened with glee when that Principal Cinch read those stories to us about the Giants and the carnival. I never knew Termina had such a strong history behind even though we haven't had much opportunity to learn about it. Still, I could write a research paper based on what we know though it would mean having to rely on guesswork for the rest of it."

I rolled my eyes. " Only you would think of research at a time like this."

" I can't help myself."

" So I guess we need to move those platforms into the right positions?"

" Yes, but I suggest pressing each switch once to see what the order is before using the Elergy of Emptiness." Twilight answered. " You know, I don't know why but I have this weird feeling that the Stone Tower doesn't look quite right."

" What makes you think that?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " It's just a weird feeling that's all."

" Considering what we've been through so far, anything is certainly possible."

" Maybe but I feel like this place looks better if it were upside down for some reason."

I was taken aback. " Seriously?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Take a look at the hands on either side of the entrance to the temple. If you look closely, you'd swear that they worked the same way upside down as they do right-side up. It's weird sounding, I know, but try to imagine it right now, Sunset."

I looked at the hands and couldn't see what Her Highness was seeing so I tilted my head in order to see upside down. Upon looking at the hands again from this perspective, I could see what she was saying but not for long as my neck began getting sore. " You might have something but I honestly don't see anything different. Maybe a better example than a pair of hands might work."

" You don't believe me, do you?"

I scratched my head. " Um... Well... You see..."

Princess Twilight sighed. " Maybe I'm just overlooking things again. I have been working my brain a little too much lately what with trying to learn as much as I can about this world before we go and change things back to normal so perhaps I need a break from thinking." I quietly chuckled under my breath though she hadn't noticed. " Ten minutes is more than enough time for my brain to relax and unwind. You'll have to figure things out until then."

While the thought of Her Highness working her brain too hard was funny, I could understand her desire to want to unwind as she had been going above and beyond the call of duty when it came to giving me solid advice. I intended on giving her as much time as she needed--it would also give me the opportunity to rely on my own brain rather than have her tell it to me straight. Stepping on the centre switch caused a platform to move only for it to collide with another before going back to its original position. I then pressed the switch on the right and it moved before stopping in front of me.

Playing the Elergy of Emptiness and walking forward, another shell of my true self appeared, yet I was looking forward to not having to look at it once I was done here. I then tried the central switch again to see if it would do anything and this time the platform moved forward before stopping right behind the first one. Taking out the Zora Mask and placing it on my face, I squatted down, watched my body shimmered from human to Zora, and screamed at the end of it. Upon becoming Mikau, I played the Elergy of Emptiness again, walked forward to create a shell of him, and pressed the final switch that moved the final platform into place.

No doubt this was something else I was glad to not have to do again any time soon. Placing the Goron Mask on my face, my body shimmered between Zora and Goron though I didn't stumble about--most likely I was going between forms instead of going from human to another body--until I became Darmani. It was here that I felt exhausted over switching between forms too frequently. I hadn't gone adjusted to doing it as it hadn't been something I relied on so before creating my next shell, I opted to sit down and regain my composure otherwise I'd have given myself a heart attack.

As I sat, I began thinking about Sunset Demon again and what she had been through as of late. She wasn't the same demonic monster I had known before. Instead, she was beginning to feel sympathetic towards me, like she didn't want to come back from the dead and preferred remaining where she ended up. I also felt sympathy towards her but not because of what had happened but because I was responsible for what she essentially was. If I could go back in time, I would prevent myself from wearing Princess Twilight's crown thus creating the she-demon in the first place. That alone would have prevented so much from happening.

My body soon felt ready to go so I played the Elergy of Emptiness, creating the Darmani shell giving me a path across. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Goron Mask, flipped my hair back, and was about to cross over when the images of Sunset Demon appeared in my head again. Had she never existed, I wouldn't have become friends with so many different people nor would I have understood the Magic of Friendship. My life would have still been one where power meant everything and while my ambitions would have been exposed, I would have never considered changing my ways. I'd probably be alone right now plotting revenge and having lost my sanity.

" Are you okay, Sunset?"

" I was just thinking about the she-demon again."

" You know you must overcome her, right?"

I sighed. " It's not that which has been bothering me. No... It's this whole sympathy thing I've been getting regarding her. I just feel as though I've wronged her all because I refused to embrace the power she represented and she ended up going down a path where she wishes to be dead and forgotten to the world. I know that last bit is a stretch given what we've seen of her but I think Sunset Demon is struggling with emotions she never had before. It's like I can understand what she's going through as we're essentially the same person just on opposite ends. Termina has changed her perception and maybe her desires?"

" How positive are you about that?"

" To be frank, not at all."

" Normally, I would gladly give you advice, Sunset, but this isn't my place." Twilight said. " You and you alone must decide how you want to approach Sunset Demon. Whatever you decide upon in the end, know that I will stand by your side whether it's the right decision or not."

" Thanks, Twilight."

" I believe you'll know what to do."

" And Midnight Sparkle?"

Princess Twilight went quiet and I repeated the question forcing her to give me an answer. " That's difficult for me to answer. She is associated with Twilight Sparkle as she was created when she unintentionally used the magic of you and our friends. As such, she's not really my problem per say." Her Highness struggled to explain herself further and quickly hid behind my hat to avoid looking at me.

" You don't really mean that, do you?"

" Like I said, it's difficult for me to answer."

" I know Midnight Sparkle isn't your problem, Twilight, but you owe it to yourself to help Twilight Sparkle." I said. " After all, she is connected to you in a way most would never be able to understand. I helped her to overcome the monster she had become and while she doesn't recall that incident due to our worlds being altered, I won't allow Midnight Sparkle to succeed in whatever plan she has been concocting. While you don't have a personal stake in this, she would really appreciate you helping her out. Besides, doesn't she remind you of who you used to be back when you first started out as a unicorn?"

Princess Twilight nodded slowly though I couldn't see it. " I could tell she was insecure about friendship based on how awkward she was acting around everyone, and you're right in that it reminds me of how I used to act before I moved to Ponyville and discovered friendship with my own eyes." She came out from hiding and looked me directly in the eyes. " I'll do what I can to help her because she doesn't deserve the kind of life you once lead."

" Now that wasn't so hard was it?"

" You're one to talk."

I blushed. " I know I had the same problems yet you helped me get through them."

" So this was a turn about moment?"

I nodded. " Pretty much."

Princess Twilight flopped onto my hat. " You should consider becoming a friendship consultant or something similar to that. Anyway, we should probably enter the temple as I think we've delayed it long enough. I suggest having all three transformation masks ready to wear as you might be switching between your different forms constantly. I know it's not a definite possibility but it does sound like a trend that could potentially happen."

Nodding my head, I began jumping across using the three platforms, yet I stopped halfway and looked down at the abyss below. I knew the Stone Tower was massive in scope but seeing it from this perspective was enough to make me want to faint. Heights weren't an issue for me but I couldn't help but feel frightened of how far of a drop down it really was. I shuddered at the thought of encountering something similar inside of the temple and feeling my life slipping away were I to fall off. I resumed jumping across until I reached the other side and continued walking forward and entered the temple.

The first thing I noticed was that everything was outside. Was I still in the Stone Tower itself or had I entered the temple proper? I took a few steps forward and began looking around to gather my bearings. There were a few directions I could take to progress though it was a strange looking stone head at the back of the room that piqued my interest. There was a locked door at its base yet one of its eyes was a switch I could activate using an arrow yet I needed to get closer as I wasn't confident in my shooting skills. The middle of the room featured a platform that went up to the door in the head with a pit right below.

Scurrying about on the platform was one of the Real Bombchu I encountered on the path leading into Ikana, but it was the two Dragonflies flying around that struck me as being in the wrong location. They were native to Woodfall so why were they here all of a sudden well outside of their natural element? Something about this didn't seem right. I then curiously looked upwards and my entire body froze upon seeing something that was really in the wrong location. The raised step that featured the symbol of Majora's Mask was on the ceiling. Why was it up there? I had no means of reaching it as I couldn't fly.

I turned to Twilight. " Um... Remember what you said about those two hands outside?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " What about it?"

" I think you were right." I answered, pointing up at the ceiling.

Princess Twilight looked up and was surprised to see what was there. " That strange step we've seen in the other temples is up there!? I wonder how we're supposed to reach it or rather how are you supposed to reach it? I mean, I can easily fly up to it though you don't have any wings and I doubt using the Song of Soaring is going to count. I wonder if this is just an occurrence in this room or it happens in additional rooms further inside."

" What is this place supposed to be?"

" I don't know."

" And then we have monsters we haven't seen since Woodfall."

" Oh yes, the two Dragonflies." Twilight said. " I don't know why they are here but you can easily take care of them as you're much stronger than you were back then. I do advise getting rid of them along with the Real Bombchu before you go and activate the switch on that stone head."

" I should have brought some arrows."

" You didn't have enough rupees."

" Don't remind me."

" There should be some around nearby in pots, crates, boxes, and even shrubs."

That last one sounded weird until I noticed a few shrubs located to the right of the locked door at the base of the stone head. I remembered that they grew back about a minute after they were cut down so I could grind a little bit until I had enough arrows but there was no guarantee of getting any since what came out from shrubs was random. I walked forward which was enough to trigger the Real Bombchu to light up its tail. It began running around aimlessly though I couldn't destroy it as I had no arrows to shoot it with and the platform made things rather awkward.

It eventually noticed me and ran down into the pit landing on a path below before coming back up the other side. I quickly raised the Mirror Shield just in time as it bounced off and exploded when it landed on the ground. With that taken care of, I could now focus on the Dragonflies who began flying towards me due to getting in range of them. I remembered they were annoying because of their electrified tails but so long as my shield was raised, their electricity would harmlessly bounce off without any problems. I was also fortunate in that it only took a single hit to destroy a Dragonfly so it wouldn't be a dragged out conflict.

The first one flew over, swung its tail, and connected with my shield, causing no damage, and I countered with a swift stroke that destroyed it. The other one was a bit more cautious though it would eventually come towards me out of curiosity. It swung its tail, crashing it against my shield doing nothing, but when I attempted to attack back, it swung its tail again and I was caught by surprise--not to mention felt an electrical surge throughout my body. The shock knocked me back a few feet causing me to land on my butt but when I got back on my feet, the Dragonfly attacked again only for me to raise my shield and deflect it before destroying it with a single sword swing.

My body still felt the after-effects of being electrocuted--it wasn't fun by any means and felt like my innards had been roasted--but now I could focus on the eye switch. I had no arrows to shoot it with so I walked over to the right of the center platform and cut down the shrubs I saw earlier when Princess Twilight mentioned it. Only one produced arrows which was honestly better than nothing but it meant needing to conserve them until I could get some more. Luckily, the eye switch was a large enough target for me to hit and only took me a single shot to activate it, and a small treasure chest materialized on the center platform.

I walked back and jumped over to the chest before kicking it open, revealing a yellow Stray Fairy. " Huh... I was expecting this little one to have hidden a lot better instead of being revealed after activating a simple switch."

" We have to assume that the rest of them will be much harder to find."

" Yeah, I guess you're right."

" How are you feeling by the way?" Twilight asked. " You took a nasty shock when that Dragonfly's tail hit you."

I looked down at my hand and saw that it was slightly numb. " It could have been a lot worse than it was but I won't sugarcoat it. I felt like my entire body was going to burst when the electricity went through its course. A shame I don't have any resistance to electric based attacks."

" All I can say is you need to be a bit more careful."

I was about to jump back over to the main part of the room when I noticed something. " There's a sun switch on the side of the pit just below my viewpoint. If I hadn't noticed it just now, we probably would have missed it entirely."

" Unfortunately, there is no way you can activate it."

I nodded. " Without sunlight, that thing is just going to remain that way for some time."

" Once we get the Dungeon Map, I'll mark it down along with any Stray Fairies we encounter." Twilight said. " For now, we should decide which direction to go next. We can't go north as the door is locked so it's either east or west."

Both directions were possibilities but could also be fraught with danger. This was the problem I found whenever I entered one of these dungeons. Until I got the map and saw what the layout was, it all boiled down to making guesses and hoping that I would find my way without getting lost. Good thing Princess Twilight was around--Spike during my previous journey--to keep me company as the thought of walking around these kinds of places alone made me feel very uncomfortable. Going on a journey by yourself was never fun and it was a much better experience if you had someone along for the ride.

Mulling it over for a few moments, I eventually decided to head east just to see what was there. I jumped over to the main part, walked up to the door, and entered the next room only to be stopped by one of those giant sun blocks we encountered back at Ikana Castle. " How do you propose we get past this obstacle?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I don't see any means of getting past the block, Sunset, and without any sunlight to shine off the Mirror Shield, this is one direction we can't continue on so we'll have to go back and try the other door. Perhaps there is a way of getting to the other side of the block by coming in from another room but for now we should remember this room along with that sun switch we saw earlier and check out the other room."

" Why do I have a feeling we're going to be backtracking again."

" It can't be helped."

I moaned. " You know I don't like doing it."

" I have a feeling this temple will require it though I'm not sure how."

Mumbling under my breath, I walked back into the entrance room only to raise my shield as a Dragonfly swung its tail at me. I had forgotten that monsters re-spawned whenever I left a room and returned to it later barring special cases. The tail bounced harmlessly off and I began to run as the thought of being electrocuted again was something I didn't want to go through for a second time. The Real Bombchu noticed me running and lit its tail before chasing after me but I didn't want to deal with it right now. Instead, I kept on running until I reached the other door and opened it just as the explosive terror had caught up.

As the door closed behind it, I heard the sound of an explosion on the other side indicating that the Real Bombchu had indeed exploded. I began patting my chest so as to calm my heart down whilst breathing heavily as that could have been quite nasty had it exploded next to me. Once I felt ready to continue, I looked forward and noticed a cracked wall but there was also another Real Bombchu running about nearby--those things were really starting to get on my nerves now. Raising my shield and taking a few steps forward, the Real Bombchu noticed and lit its tail before charging at me, but I deflected it back with my shield where it exploded upon hitting the ground.

Since I had no bombs with which to use to blow up the cracked wall, I had to rely on the Blast Mask. I wasn't upset about using it as it had been a while since I last used it--I would have used it sooner to destroy those Beamos but it was much slower than actual bombs. Taking it and placing it on my face, Princess Twilight reminded me that by raising my shield before using the Blast Mask, I could blow up the wall without taking any damage. I needed to conserve my health as much as possible despite having healing items as this temple was sure to be a challenge. Raising my shield and detonating my mask, the wall exploded revealing what lurked behind it.

Behind the wall was a series of crates with a large block behind it but my eyes were fixated on a treasure chest that was hanging upside down on the ceiling. Again, this was another instance of something being beyond my reach and was reaffirming that there was more to this temple than appearances suggested. I doubted that I could use the Hookshot to pull myself up to the chest--I needed to be on solid ground to open it and pulling myself would just cause me to drop back down. The block looked to be moveable but perhaps it needed some extra muscle, something my current form lacked.

Taking out the Goron Mask, I was about to put it on when something started emerging from the wall. " Um, Twilight? Is that supposed to happen?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I have no idea what it is so get back before something happens to you."

I stepped back, accidentally dropping my mask in the process, and was surprised to see Sunset Demon coming out of the wall. " You... I wish you would warn me when you do something like that." For a moment, I was annoyed at how she scared me just by coming out of the wall, and yet I knew something was wrong as she didn't attack. " As you can see, I finally arrived in the temple so is this where you decide to fight me?"

Sunset Demon said nothing at first before squatting down to pick up my mask. " You know... I really do envy you, Sunset." She got back up and started twirling my mask around in her hand before tossing it back to me much to my surprise. " You've endured so much to the point where you want everything to come to an end but you keep on fighting knowing that you're doing the right thing."

" You should try it sometime."

" It's not in my nature since I was created as a result of your desire for power."

" Believe it or not, I actually feel sorry for having done that to you."

Sunset Demon was slightly startled but soon began chuckling to herself. " While you know that I won't give you the pleasure of coming off as good-natured, I do appreciate you telling me that to my face. It's funny really. When I was brought back from the dead by Midnight Sparkle, my only thought was to get my revenge against you. It kept me going for quite some time and I was determined to become the real you. That changed when I came back to this place and saw the undead and how violence, bloodshed, vengeance, and so much more had practically robbed them of themselves."

" You felt sorry for them?"

" I did." Sunset Demon answered. " Imagine me... A demonic monster, showing sympathy towards others."

" It shows that you've changed but whether you admit it or not remains to be seen."

" I always believed that power was the most important thing in the world." Sunset Demon said. " I thought it would give me everything I could ever want and with it, nothing could stand in my way, not even Princess Celestia herself. Ever since seeing those poor tortured souls, my mind began thinking that perhaps my methods have been wrong. No... I have been wrong and you have proven yourself to be the one true Sunset Shimmer."

Princess Twilight and I looked at each other before looking back at Sunset Demon. She had just openly admitted that she had been wrong about everything she had done since first becoming a problem for me. And yet, something about what she said seemed unusual and it involved her claims of having changed because of seeing the undead. While I for one felt bad for them, that alone wouldn't be enough for me to change were I in her position. There was something else involved and she needed to come clean otherwise I wouldn't believer her words to be sincere.

On a side note, she had confirmed that Midnight Sparkle was alive and was responsible for bringing her back to life. I had no idea how she was able to pull that off considering she most likely ended up in the same place Sunset Demon found herself in, but now that her presence had become known to me, the only way I could get an answer was to ask her in person, and I knew that would happen soon enough. Looking into the eyes of the she-demon, I could sense she was being sincere but a part of me was having trouble believing her because of what she had done to me on a personal and emotional level.

No doubt that this had become the most awkward moment in my entire life. I had experience moments like this before but this was the worst not to mention the most stressful as essentially, this was an argument against myself. I also noticed that Sunset Demon looked in as many directions as possible, like she were afraid of something, or perhaps someone who didn't want her to be talking to me. That someone had to have been Midnight Sparkle but why would she act in such a manner? Had the two demons experienced a falling out as one wanted to change while the other was bent on getting revenge?

I needed to get her to confess. " Wow..."

Sunset Demon snarled. " You don't believe me, do you?"

" I'm trying to but there is much you're holding back."

" Oh?"

" Just seeing the undead wasn't enough to make you regret your actions." I answered. " In your eyes, they reminded you of every horrible thing you've done though I shouldn't be too judgemental since part of your existence was shared by me. To base any kind of regret on seeing those who died centuries ago is kind of pathetic, isn't it? Don't try and pretend you don't know what I'm talking about. Remember that we're essentially the same person but on opposite ends."

Sunset Demon smirked. " Heh... I never could get anything past you. Alright... I admit that I was lying when I said that the undead in this place made me change. They were only a small reason but one none-the-less but the truth is that your friends were the ones who began changing me. Just seeing them in this world as different individuals instead of their true selves was saddening as they were practically helpless while Midnight Sparkle and I tormented them. Yet, their Elements of Harmony resonated with them despite not knowing why it was happening in the first place. You've probably figured it out along with Her Highness."

I nodded. " What is Midnight Sparkle's plan?"

" You'll find out when you encounter her in this temple."

" And you can't tell me?"

" I have my reasons."

I sighed. " That wasn't what I was expecting from you but I won't force you to. While you have changed, you do know that I have to destroy you and Midnight Sparkle, right? It might come as a shock but you're both demons who cannot be allowed to exist. Call me a hypocrite for saying it but it's the truth."

Sunset Demon nodded and took a step back towards the wall. " I actually agree with you, Sunset. I shouldn't exist anymore as I represent your past and long ago you cast me aside in favour of friendship. I resented you for that and wanted to get my revenge but in truth I am nothing but a weak-minded fool who didn't realize that my efforts were in vain. Only my hatred kept me going in both life and death." She stepped back again and began merging into the wall. " You will have to fight me because Midnight Sparkle will force me to and I will accept my eventual death with dignity."

" Why would she force you to fight?"

" Because she has acquired a dark power."

" What does that even mean?"

" Again, you'll find out when you encounter her."

" Just tell me!"

Sunset Demon shook her head. " If I do, she would punish me even though I could kill her before she got too far. All I can say is that you must stop her from achieving her goal no matter what the cost may be. You must also stop me, but like I said, I will accept my death with dignity. I'm just a remnant of the past who must be forgotten. I won't make it easy for you to end my life as where is the fun in that but I want you to do that for me. Think of it as my final request, Sunset Shimmer. I want to go down in glory and not a whimper. If you don't do this for me then I will make sure to torment you until the very day you die."

She then disappeared into the wall leaving me with more questions than answers but there was one last thing she said by echoing her voice around the room. "Beware of the one who kills for a living. You will be tested in a way you've never experienced before." As I held the Goron Mask firmly in my hand, I couldn't help but want to cry. Sunset Demon was my other half--literally as well as figuratively--and I knew that her request, trivial as it was, was sincere but I wished there was another way that didn't involve fighting and killing her. If only she could be given her own life that had nothing to do with me. She could do whatever she wanted and not be tied down by me.

Princess Twilight then pressed her body against my cheek and I could sense her sniffing whilst trying to hold back her own tears. I smiled at Her Highness' sentiment and insisted she cried because there was no point in holding it all in. Even I began crying though it felt weird doing so for a demon though Sunset Demon had become more than that. She had become an individual who wanted to go out on her own terms and not allow anyone else to tell her otherwise. There was still much about all of this that didn't make sense and the only one who knew the answer lurked somewhere in the temple.

" Twilight... We need to find Midnight Sparkle."

Princess Twilight nodded. " This has become extremely personal now."

" That means we should continue exploring the temple in hopes of running into her."

" Yes."

" By the way..." I began. " I know Sunset Demon was referring to the Garo Master when she mentioned 'the one who kills for a living.' I wonder if she and Midnight Sparkle have run into him while they were doing whatever it was they've been planning."

" If they have, they were fortunate that he didn't kill them." Twilight said. " Sunset Demon and Midnight Sparkle don't have their Equestrian Magic along with us and our friends due to this world somehow negating it. The Garo Master would therefore be much stronger and could kill them at his own leisure but it looks like he prefers keeping them around as a form of amusement. I expect that he will be patiently waiting for our arrival so we don't need to worry about him performing a sneak attack while the two demons are sure to hound us at every turn especially Midnight Sparkle given what we now know."

" What do you think of her, Midnight Sparkle?"

" From what I've been hearing, it sounds like Twilight Sparkle had some inner demons that came out when she absorbed all that magic."

" But it wasn't her fault."

" I know but someone should have noticed the signs a lot sooner."

" Then that fault is mine."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " No... You didn't know what her pendant was as she built it herself plus you rarely had a chance to speak with her given how Crystal Prep wanted to keep her away from anyone who tried to influence her in the wrong manner. If anything, Twilight Sparkle should have known better and instead come to you for help despite what position was at the time rather than shy away and continue acting oblivious to what she was really doing."

" And Midnight Sparkle?"

" She is undoubtedly a threat that needs to be stopped."

I could tell that Her Highness wasn't happy with how Twilight Sparkle chose to do things during the Friendship Games but she wasn't furious about it. She could understand where her counterpart was coming from in that she didn't really have anyone other than her version of Spike and Dean Cadance though the latter had her own problems to worry about that revolved around Principal Cinch. She had every intention of doing everything she could to help the other Twilight despite what happened as she knew better than anyone regarding what could happen when magic was the source of the problem.

Twilight Sparkle, if anything, was simply curious about something she thought was scientific in nature, and was determined to uncover the truth even if it meant her investigation would be compromised by the Friendship Games, the Shadowbolts, Principal Cinch, and a lot more. Wow... No wonder she didn't like being at Crystal Prep despite having an intellect that rivaled my own. Had she been in a more loving environment, Midnight Sparkle wouldn't have existed as Twilight Sparkle wouldn't have had inner demons caused by how she was treated by her peers, and her life would have turned out different than it ended up being.

She even wouldn't have decided to transfer over to Canterlot High and instead go back to Crystal Prep had things been different for her there. That was the weird thing when it came to alternate timelines. You wonder what might have been had something so small been altered rather than what actually happened. Had Twilight Sparkle returned to Crystal Prep, we would probably have continued to see her on occasion, but forming a friendship with her would have been more difficult as she would have preferred associating with her own peers. I supposed we were fortunate things turned out as they did.

Placing the Goron Mask on my face--and focusing on what I was supposed to do--I began stumbling about as my body shimmered from human to Goron but at least there were no other monsters around. Upon finishing the transformation and becoming Darmani, I started punching the crates and collecting the items that dropped out from them--roughly ten arrows and five bombs which wasn't bad at all--until all that remained was the block. It would be easy for me to push it about as a Goron rather than as a human so I began pushing it along not knowing where it needed to go.

I had only pushed it for a short distance before noticing a blue switch that was slightly dipped into the ground. " Looks like this block is needed to push the switch down given that its blue and those kind need something heavy on them."

" You might want to look above your head first."

I looked up and noticed another blue switch on the ceiling. " What is that doing up there!?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I couldn't even begin to answer that question. All we can do is make a note of it once we get the Dungeon Map and come back here once we figure out some way of being able to walk around on the ceiling."

" Or we could somehow turn this room upside down."

" That sounds rather unrealistic don't you think?"

" We're magical talking ponies from a fantasy kingdom."

" Touché."

Turning around, my jaw dropped upon seeing more blue switches. " Just how many of them are there in this room!?"

" Since you activated that one behind you using the block, I think the rest of them will require using the Elergy of Emptiness." Twilight said. " I would suggest looking around before using that song just in case there is anything unusual you might find."

I walked forward in the direction of the blue switches and discovered that one of them was much larger than the others. It didn't take a genius to figure out that the Goron shell was needed to weigh the switch down upon activation. Unfortunately, there was another Real Bombchu nearby but I had an idea on how to get rid of it. The switch was to my left so I took a few steps forward to get its attention. The Real Bombchu then lit up its tail and began charging at me and my response was to activate my defensive mechanism as a Goron that involved dropping on my hands and knees before my back hardened like a shield.

The Real Bombchu bounced off of my body before exploding when it hit the ground. With that done, I stepped on the switch, played the Elergy of Emptiness, and walked forward leaving behind Darmani's shell. Turning left, I noticed yet another Real Bombhu scurrying about on the wall--these things were getting on my nerves too--so I applied the same tactic as I had done just now by walking forward to get its attention. It noticed, lit up its tail, and crawled down, but I dropped down onto my hands and knees again to produce my hardened back resulting in it being knocked back and exploding upon hitting the ground.

Hopefully, I wouldn't have to worry about running into anymore of them for a while after that. Stepping onto the next switch, I took out the Zora Mask, placed it on my face, and watched as my body shimmered from Goron to Zora before becoming Mikau again. Playing the Elergy of Emptiness again, I walked forward as Mikau's shell appeared behind me to keep the switch activated and walked over to the next switch. When I activated it, I heard the sound of something sliding upwards nearby indicating that I had solved a puzzle, yet I needed one more shell, my own, to keep it activated and whatever slid upwards to stay up there.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask, flipped back my hair, played the Elergy of Emptiness, and walked forward as the shell of myself appeared on the switch. At first, I had no idea where I was supposed to go next as I didn't see any traces of a door, but then a warm breeze wafted around the corner and I walked in the direction of it until I found myself back outside in a room that featured what looked to be someone's garden or at least an attempt at making one. This "garden" was just a bunch of shrubs I could cut down to pick up some additional items like arrows, bombs, Deku Nuts, and so on.

Another Dragonfly was flying about along with two Guays but now that I had arrows, I intended on picking them off from a distance rather than having to fight up close. The monsters had their own plans and started getting closer but I raised my shield upon which the Dragonfly's electrified tail harmlessly connected with it. I then swung my sword in return, destroying it, only to get bushwhacked by a Guay followed immediately by the other one. Luckily, they were within range so I swung my sword and destroyed both of them before cutting the shrubs to pick up some rupees and arrows.

I then noticed a crack section in the floor nearby. " What do you suppose that is for?"

" Why not blow it up with a bomb?"

" Good thing I have some this time rather than just the Blast Mask."

" How confident are you at using them?"

" Pretty good so long as I don't get caught in the explosion."

" Then toss a bomb from a good distance."

Walking up to the crack in the ground before stepping back a few paces, I took out a bomb, tossed it, and it landed in the middle of the crack, exploding several seconds later, destroying the ground and revealing a hole that looked like it could lead me to another room below . " That went better than expected." I walked over and looked down into the darkness but couldn't see anything as it was too deep. " I don't think dropping down is a good idea unless I wanted to break both my legs or perhaps something worse."

Princess Twilight nodded. " We could try that staircase over there instead. Besides, we don't have anywhere else to go right now as the door in front of us is locked and we don't have a key on hand to unlock it."

There was indeed a staircase to my right that went down to the floor below so I decided to take it instead of dropping down into the dark hole. Running over to the stairs and walking down them, I entered the room below and stopped before I ended up walking into a pool of lava. A sun block was directly in front of me slight submerged with sunlight pouring down from above courtesy of destroying the cracked ground up above. On either side of me were strange statues that resembled armed soldiers but I knew that they were monsters who came to life upon touching them.

I couldn't recall their names off the top of my head but I knew they would attack the instant they were touched. It looked as though this room would require me to become a Goron as only they could walk on lava without taking any damage--my other forms couldn't not to mention doing so with them would kill me. Looking up at the ceiling again, I noticed in one corner was a Hookshot plate so perhaps something was hidden up there. The statues then suddenly started vibrating to life but how was that possible? I didn't touch them! They then came to life and began moving towards me leaving me with very few options.

" You certainly made a mess of things, didn't you?" Midnight Sparkle asked.

" I did what I wanted to do without having to listen to you." Sunset Demon answered.

" I thought you were going to intimidate her a little or maybe even fight her for a couple of minutes."

" Sorry that my feelings ended up offending you."

" Maybe I shouldn't have brought you back from the dead."

" We agree on something for the first time in a while."

Midnight Sparkle sighed. " This whole regret thing of yours has really pushed my patience to the limit, you know that? I thought you wanted to get revenge on Sunset for having beaten you on several occasions before not to mention refusing to embrace the power you clearly display?" She paced back and forth a few times whilst mumbling under her breath before turning to face her companion. " I didn't expect you would go soft on me! We've come too far for you to suddenly say you don't want anything to do with what we've planned!"

" That's just the way it is."

Midnight Sparkle's eyes glowed. " Why can't you just be a team player and embrace our destinies?"

Sunset Demon waved her hand. " I used to think that way but as we've made our way around this strange world, seen what has happened to Sunset's friends, what has happened to this world--especially this ancient kingdom--my heart has finally become clear for the very first time. What good is revenge when all it does is cause more pain for yourself resulting in nothing more than a pointless existence that results in a just as pointless death? I had nothing but hatred in me resulting from the premise behind my existence and all I got for it was pain, misery, and the urge to keep going because I had nothing else."

" A demon's calling you know."

Sunset Demon snapped back. " You'll find out soon enough what can happen when you lead the kind of life I've experienced." She then raised her hand, clenched it into a fist, and was prepared to smack Midnight Sparkle, but ultimately sighed before dropping it. " I would gladly kill you right now but with that dark power you've been absorbing, I doubt I could make a scratch if actually hitting you at all."

" Now will you follow our plan?"

" I'm going to do things my way."

Midnight Sparkle stomped her foot. " You know what? Fine! You can do whatever you want and get yourself killed by Sunset while I carry on with our plan. I'll make sure your desire is fulfilled even if you don't want it because of having a change of heart." Sunset Demon walked away somewhere and Midnight Sparkle began talking to herself in silence. " I'll use the power of this temple to make her fall in line. I don't care what that assassin says about using the darkness. I also don't care about those wailing spirits. I even don't care about my so-called companion."

The Garo Master laughed. " Do you still believe you can use the darkness of the Stone Tower to your advantage?"

Midnight Sparkle glared. " Why are you still bothering us?"

" I find it most amusing that you two creatures are able to co-exist despite not seeing eye-to-eye."

" Once I'm done channeling the dark power, you'll find us to be more powerful than you could even begin to imagine."

The Garo Master laughed again. " Perhaps you should listen to your friend."

" And perhaps you should get lost before I use the power to destroy you."

" Do not make threats that hold no value to them." The Garo Master said. " Behind all of your bravado is a miserable wretch who thinks she is all-powerful when it truth she is nothing but a pawn in a much grander scheme."

" What are you talking about?"

" You should listen to your friend." The Garo Master answered. " You may claim her to be useless to you but in reality she knows much more than you could ever hope. She has seen the pain that comes with war and allowed hatred to cloud her mind until she saw the truth she had denied. My words most likely will not resonate so there is no point in me trying to convince you of anything. Continue down your current course and ignore the pleas of others who know much better about the futility of war. I look forward to see your very ideals crumble into dust and leaving no traces behind."

Midnight Sparkle laughed this time. " Your attempts at psychology are pitiful."

The Garo Master laughed. " Are they? Perhaps you are merely denying the truth?"

Midnight Sparkle gagged. " Ha! Hardly! I can see right through your deception and I won't allow such words to get in the way of what I want. All of the Equestrian Magic will belong to me by any means necessary and no one will ever be able to stand up to my power." She then began giggling followed by clasping her hands together before jumping up and down like she were a little girl. " Ooooh! Just thinking about getting all of that magic makes me feel incredibly giddy. Sunset Demon will practically beg before me when she sees what we can do with all of this power, and she'll get over her delusion."

" You really think this?"

" Get lost!"

" Such a pitiful creature."

" We'll see who is pitiful."

The Garo Master laughed. " Let my words burn into your soul and allow the screams of the spirits who linger here cast your ideals into doubt. Go, claim your precious power even as your mind slowly fades away leaving nothing but a mindless beast who craves power and nothing more." Midnight Sparkle waved her hand as a sign of refusing to let his words scare her yet he merely laughed before turning around and walking away. " Your ignorance has sealed your fate and nothing can be done to change it now. And your friend's fate has also been sealed but can she be spared or will she become condemned to an eternity of torment?"

(1.) This is how the stories were written in the actual game minus the additional dialogue I provided.

Chapter 60: Sunset, Twilight, and Midnight

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
June 12, 2017
Chapter 60: Sunset, Twilight, and Midnight.

" You know, I just don't get you." Sunset Demon said as the Garo Master walked past her. " You claim that you can kill both of us--though I wouldn't mind you killing her--because we're weaker without our true power but instead all you've been doing is saying that our bickering and overall presence are amusing to you. If you're a ruthless assassin, then why not just kill us and be done with it rather than drag this out?" The Garo Master didn't answer prompting Sunset Demon to get serious. She grabbed him by his cloak, held him up just slightly off the ground, squinted her eyes, and lurched her head forward. " It's not a good idea to ignore a question."

Again, the Garo Master didn't say anything and the she-demon slammed him into a wall only for his body to suddenly disappear. She assumed that he had run away from her but she suddenly felt a strange sensation hitting her from behind. Turning her head, she saw that the Garo Master had plunged one of his flaming blades into her back. The wound wasn't terribly deep yet Sunset Demon couldn't help but feel completely powerless. Throughout her existence, she always felt the need to be the dominant force, yet now she felt hollow, unable to put up any resistance. Was this because she didn't have her magic?

The Garo Master then laughed before pulling his sword out from her back. " To me, the art of killing is a game. You manipulate their very minds, coerce them into dropping their ground before performing the killing blow, and they never know that it happened until their final breath. You possess some power, demon, but it has been sealed away by a force very few can understand. Because of this, you pose no threat to me, but even if you did, I doubt you would even consider using it. Your mind is conflicted, filled with confusion that is tearing you apart and only your willpower is what holds your sanity in check."

" Was it that obvious?"

The Garo Master nodded. " Yours is but a condition I have seen plenty of times."

" And you keep me around because of it?"

" It has been centuries since I last had decent amusement."

Sunset Demon felt a boiling rage forming inside of her but she knew that it wouldn't do her any good. Sighing, she sat down on the ground only to see the Garo Master do the exact same thing, and she assumed that he was using the mind games he mentioned only to find that he was actually listening to what she had to say. " I must admit, your method of killing would have been a great inspiration had I chosen to stick with the path fate had given me. But as you said, I am conflicted though there's more to it than that. My mind wants me to be the monster I once was while my heart--strange how I have one given what I am and all--wants me to go down a different path."

" Fate has a strange affect on us all... even me."

" Even you!?"

The Garo Master nodded. " Allow me to be myself for a moment, a spirit and not simply an assassin. Fate determined that we of the Ikana Kingdom would be destroyed by our own thirst for blood. There were many signs indicating that we would suffer this fate but we chose to ignore them and continued fighting. Our actions condemned us to an eternal damnation resulting in our kingdom becoming a wasteland where nothing could sustain itself again."

" And what does that have to do with my problem?"

" Everything..."

" Is it because of fate?"

The Garo Master nodded again. " Fate made you what you are and it will also end up killing you."

Sunset Demon sighed. " I kind of already figured out that I would end up dead once again, but I'm actually okay with it this time as opposed to before. I've accepted the fact that my existence is but a remnant of the past that shouldn't be around anymore. My time has come and gone and Sunset is free to continue living out her life in the way she desires. It's only just a matter of time before my life and my very being fades away."

" Then you understand the fate of this kingdom."

Sunset Demon nodded. " None of you should be here because you're of the past. By being revived from the dead, you're effectively going against fate when your deaths should serve as a warning to those who are going down a similar path." She slapped her forehead in a playful manner as though a huge revelation had finally been lifted from her shoulders. " Midnight Sparkle hasn't figured that out has she?"

The Garo Master shook his head. " She goes against what fate has decreed and is determined to ensure her existence remains as such. It is unfortunate that her death must come in such a painful manner. You have been spared the kind of anguish that awaits your companion as you have accepted your fate. When you die, you shall feel a warm embrace before fading away into nothingness but she will not be as fortunate. I warned her yet she chose to ignore my words."

" What about your fate?"

" My fate is to die at the hands of the chosen one."

" Sunset Shimmer?"

The Garo Master nodded. " Upon my defeat, I am to share my wisdom and reveal the true secret of the Stone Tower Temple. It is a secret known only to me and only I shall reveal it to her when she has bested me in combat." He got up onto his feet prompting Sunset Demon to do so as well before he began walking away from the she-demon. " We each have our roles we must perform and so I shall await for the chosen one in the anointed place. You must fulfill what fate has given you. Only then can your final moments be one of greatness and not eternal damnation. Perhaps you can save your companion from herself."

As he disappeared into the shadows, Sunset Demon was left with many questions along with a new respect for the Garo Master. She didn't understand what he meant by fulfilling her role nor did she understand what fate had to do with it. Within her mind, the thought of dying began to frighten her, and her heart cried softly as a result. She didn't want to die because it meant fading away forever but she knew there was no other choice. It had to be done because as she herself had said, she was a remnant of the past whose existence couldn't continue on as Sunset had moved on.

She then began laughing to herself and thought about everything that had happened since being revived from the dead by Midnight Sparkle. Had she not come to appreciate the ideals of the bearers of the Elements of Harmony, the denizens of Ikana, and even Sunset herself, the she-demon would still be a monster who sought nothing but revenge and would go to whatever lengths were necessary to achieve her goal. Now, she was a monster who also wanted to be human, and while she felt conflicted about it all, she knew what had to be done even if it meant a permanent death.

Midnight Sparkle then walked up to her and was in a very happy mood. " Well, it took longer than I expected but I finally managed to tap into the dark power that resides inside of this temple. Now our desires can be fulfilled though I don't know if you deserve anything given your recent attitude." She lurched her head forward and grinned from ear to ear. " I could show you some semblance of decency by allowing you the chance to become the real Sunset but that would involve you having to practically beg for it." Her expression changed and she became more serious. " What did that assassin say?"

" Not much."

" Don't try and hide it from me."

" I'm not hiding anything."

Midnight Sparkle rolled her eyes. " You're an awfully terrible liar but then that does show you still have that demonic attitude. Since I now have this new power, I can easily make you tell me what you and that ancient spectre said to each other. Despite how you mistreated me whenever I voiced my criticism of how you did things, I'm willing to let bygones be bygones and wipe the slate clean. Of course, you can continue lying in which case I'll make things very painful."

" Don't make threats when you can't keep them."

" Oh but I can." Midnight Sparkle said. " I can do so much now that the dark power flows through me."

" What do you intend on doing with it?"

" Since you obviously couldn't kill Sunset when you had the chance, I might as well attempt to do it myself." Midnight Sparkle answered. " Had you not decided to become utterly pathetic, she and Princess Twilight would have been killed by now leaving us only with their friends standing in our way. But, I suppose it was too much for someone who once claimed to be ruthless and willing to do anything to become the real Sunset."

Sunset Demon smirked. " Do you really think you can defeat Sunset? If I recall correctly, she defeated you by relying on friendship to open your heart and free Twilight Sparkle from what she had become."

" That was a foolish mistake on my part."

" If you say so."

Midnight Sparkle became irate. " With the dark power coursing through me, I can kill her at any time I choose! Nothing you say will convince me otherwise!" She then calmed down upon realizing that she was losing her temper, something that disgusted her as Sunset Demon was prone to the same thing. " Ha, ha! Why don't you wait here while I do what you couldn't and take care of poor Sunset. I'll even get Princess Twilight as an added bonus just to make you look even more pathetic by adding salt to such a wound." Midnight Sparkle was about to leave when she clasped her hands together and strange dark vines ensnared the she-demon.

" And what is this for?"

" Like I would leave you to your own devices knowing how confused you are."

" You're paranoid now."

" Call it what you want but I see it as a means of making sure you don't do anything to stop me." Midnight Sparkle said. " You need to go back to who you are meant to be, a ruthless demon who wishes to be the real Sunset Shimmer. You said that's the only thing that keeps you going as you have nothing else so embrace your true nature and emerge as the monster you are. Until you embrace your true nature, those dark vines will hold you in place. Now I must be off to take care of our guests before that Garo Master does. This is going to be our finest hour and nothing must go wrong."

In an act of sheer brilliance--or as a result of instincts kicking in--I raised my shield and dropped down onto my butt just as the moving statues were on top of me. Both of them collided with my shield, sparks flying everywhere as they continued their assault, and I held on as best as I could hoping that they would eventually stop. After what felt like forever, the two statues moved back to where they were before and shimmered until they became statues once again. Getting up, I leaned forward to get a closer look but quickly jerked back upon hearing a noise that startled me.

Neither statue moved leaving me to wonder what could have triggered them in the first place. Despite not recalling what they were called, I knew that touching them in some way would result in them coming to life and bouncing towards their targets until they would ultimately give up before going back to their original position. What made these monsters even more deadly was that they blended in with actual statues--it was almost uncanny--so there was no way of knowing what was real and what wasn't until it was too late. Fortunately, they weren't very durable so it was easy to destroy them.

From what I remembered from previous experiences, these statues didn't enjoy being hit with any explosives or powerful weapons. I sighed as I looked down at my sword upon thinking that and wished that it had been forged a second time by using the gold dust. It was my own fault for not doing it sooner and instead relying on the same small blade throughout my entire journey so it was something I needed to deal with once this temple had been taken care of. Had I a powerful sword, I wouldn't need to use any bombs but because I didn't, the latter would become my preferred choice.

The only problem I had was tossing the bombs at the right angle so that they landed next to the statues without plunging into the pool of lava. I could have walked up to them and dropped a couple of bombs instead but I didn't want to risk them coming to life and attacking me all over again. It was at that moment I came up with an ideal solution. Taking out a bomb whilst assuming a bowling stance, I rolled it along the ground where it exploded against one of the statues. It began bouncing around erratically prompting me to assume my defensive position when it exploded next to the other one causing it to start bouncing around until it eventually exploded.

All they left behind were some additional bombs that I picked up since I had a feeling I would be needing them, and with that done, I turned my attention towards the sun block submerged in the lava. With the sunlight coming down from above thanks to blowing up the hole in the ground earlier, I now had a means of removing the block yet a part of me felt like there was something lurking about on the other side of it. Stepping into the light and raising my shield, I aimed at the sun block and watched as it disappeared upon being hit by the light of the sun revealing a large treasure chest along with several more statues.

There was no way of knowing which were monsters and which were actual statues so I needed to come up with another idea. Since I needed to become a Goron in order to get across the pool of lava--Gorons were practically at home in lava--I supposed I could just punch each statue and hope to weed out the monsters but the idea of being blown up several times made me immediately shake off that idea despite it being the most practical solution. An idea eventually came to me in the form of taking out my bow, imbuing my arrows with the power of fire, and shooting the statues hoping the magic would cause them to explode.

Despite using up quite a bit of magic, it turned out to be worthwhile as each of the four statues--two in the lava and the other two by the chest--all came to life upon being struck by my Fire Arrows, bounced around in an erratic fashion, and exploded leaving nothing but smoke. This result in a small treasure chest materializing within the lava though I was surprised that it wasn't burning away. I was about to put on the Goron Mask in order to open the chests when I suddenly remembered the Hookshot plate I noticed earlier. It was as good a time as any to see what could be hidden up there otherwise I was likely to forget about it.

Taking out the Hookshot, aiming up at the plate, and firing the chain, I pulled myself up to the ledge and was surprised to see another small treasure chest there. My suspicion was that it contained a Stray Fairy or a small key from earlier given how well hidden it was. Kicking it open, a Stray Fairy jumped out and entered my body. " Guess it was the former that ended up being in there." I said.

" What was the latter?" Twilight asked.

" A small key."

" I suspect that other small chest you got from defeating the Armos will contain the key."

" Armos? Is that what they were called?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Since you already figured out how to defeat them, I don't really need to give an explanation."

I shook my head. " You can tell me anyway."

" Why would I?"

" Because you love showing off your intellect."

Princess Twilight grinned. " Okay, you have me there." She then blushed when I gave her a smug look in return. " I can't help but showing off how much knowledge I have and besides, my advice has proven beneficial so far. Anyway, those statues you destroyed are called Armos. They disguise themselves as innocent statues and wait for someone to come along and touch them causing them to come to life and attack anything within their radius. All they do is bounce around in hopes of hitting something but if they don't then they will go back to where they were originally and resume being ordinary statues. This essentially gives them away so the chances of being fooled by them again is slim."

" Feel better now?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " But, I still have more to tell you."

I rolled my eyes. " Of course you do."

" Armos can't handle explosions but you can also use a strong physical attack." Twilight said. " For example, as a Goron, you can either punch them or use a ground pound though the latter is actually more effective in that multiple targets can be hit. You can also use a sword but your current one sadly won't work as it just isn't powerful enough. If you had a stronger sword, you wouldn't need to waste any bombs and being a Goron would leave you vulnerable given how large they are."

I moaned. " Okay! I get that I need to upgrade my sword."

" Nothing wrong with a reminder."

" It's the obvious visual cues that give it away."

" For now, we should focus on getting through this temple."

" What about the demons?"

" I don't think we will have to worry about Sunset Demon." Twilight answered. " Upon hearing what she had to say when we encountered her earlier, I believe that she won't be a threat to us as she is struggling with her own problems though I can't say the same regarding Midnight Sparkle. We must take extra precautions and be prepared when we eventually find her or perhaps her finding us. Anyway, you need to rely on some Goron ingenuity right now if you want to get your hands on those treasure chests, but you might want to jump down first before going through with the transformation."

Taking Princess Twilight's advice to heart, I jumped down to the ground below though my knees buckled slightly--I didn't get injured--and placed the Goron Mask on my face. I began stumbling about as expected and watched as my body shimmered from human to Goron yet I almost plunged into the lava before the change had finished--I really needed to hold onto something whenever I put on the Goron Mask. Once I became Darmani, I looked down at the pool of lava and gulped wondering if I would sink into it. Just because Gorons loved lava didn't mean that they couldn't drown in it.

Closing my eyes, I took a small step forward onto the lava and braced myself for an unrelenting amount of pain, but to my surprise, the lava felt surprisingly cool. In fact, I didn't feel any kind of pain though my feet felt relaxed most likely due to a soothing sensation brought on by my body embracing the lava. Opening my eyes, I walked up to the small chest, kicked it open and took out a small key needed to unlock the door from earlier. I then walked over to the large treasure chest, opened it up, and took out the Dungeon Map which I immediately unfurled so that Princess Twilight and I could look at it.

" It looks simple enough, the layout of the temple."

" Yes, but we shouldn't underestimate this place."

" Are you going to mark the places where we found the Stray Fairies and those unusual things we found?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Just give me a few moments, Sunset." As Her Highness began using her fairy magic to mark the map, she accidentally looked at the other side of the map out of curiosity and began waving her arms to get my attention. " Turn the map over! Quickly!"

I did what she asked and turned it over to see that there were additional rooms on display with no means of accessing them. " What the!? What kind of map is this where you have rooms with no way of getting to them?" I scratched my head and took another look at the map. " Okay, this is without a doubt the weirdest map I've ever had the pleasure of looking at. I mean, why feature this on the other side?"

" Perhaps it has something to do with the upside-down treasure chests we seen?"

" That's really weird."

" There's no other explanation that I can think of right now."

" Should we take the Dungeon Map anyway?"

" Without it, we won't be getting much if that's what you mean."

Despite her sarcasm in that response, Her Highness was right about us needing the map even with those extra rooms on the other side of it. Putting it away and walking back across the lava--my mind wanted me to soak in it for a while to relieve myself of some stress but I needed to keep on going as who knew when we would be attacked by Midnight Sparkle or other monsters for that matter. Walking back up the stairs, I immediately curled into a ball and rolled across the ground to avoid the two Dragonflies that had since re-spawned and the hole in the ground before I crashed into the locked door, stunning myself in the process.

When I came to moments later, I used the key to unlock the door and enter the next room where my jaw dropped upon seeing what I had to deal with. Most of the room was filled with water indicating that I would need to rely on swimming techniques only a Zora could perform. There was a pathway that went across the body of water yet I had no chance of climbing up onto it as it was lined either side by a tall metallic fence. I also saw some exploding mines bobbing about beneath the surface and I remembered I needed to destroy them from a distance or else get caught in a nasty explosion.

I didn't feel like becoming a human again just for a brief moment so I took out the Zora Mask, placed it on my face, watched as my body shimmered from Goron to Zora, and jumped into the water before sinking to the bottom. The mines were attached to chains so avoiding them would prove easy yet there weren't any underwater monsters. I wasn't complaining mind you as some of them were annoying but it didn't explain why there was water in the first place. I walked under the pathway, floated up to the other side, and climbed out of the water to find that I had reached a dead end.

" Now where do we go?"

" Let me take a look at the map." Twilight answered. I took it out and Her Highness began peering over it for a few moments before coming to a conclusion. " According to the map, there should be a pathway leading from this room via a small corridor that connects to another room. Perhaps the way forward lies underwater?"

" I don't see any other way to go."

" Before you jump down into the water again, maybe we should check out this room to make sure we don't miss anything."

I looked to my left and noticed some boxes along with a switch and to my right was a Crystal Switch with a Beamos situated next to it. To the left of it was another sun block so I already knew there was nothing I could do. " Guess we need to mark this room as a place that's unusual." My eyes then noticed yet another sun blocked located on the other side of the body of water and I felt flustered over seeing so much that was beyond my reach. " I'm already starting to dislike this temple because of having to do some back-tracking and we've only just started making our way through."

" That does seem to be a main theme around here."

" Be honest, Twilight..." I began. " Do you think I can activate the crystal switch or do I need to remove the sun block first?"

Princess Twilight looked at the puzzle and pondered over it for a few moments before nodding her head. " Yes, I think it can be done if you were to use the Blast Mask but I don't think that is the intended method here. I know the thought of doing something unexpected is a powerful urge, Sunset, but you shouldn't think about such things. Surely Princess Celestia made certain you were taught not to rely on doing things the easy way."

" Um, hello!?" I exclaimed. " I went behind her back and taught myself dark magic."

" Right... I forgot that you did that."

I rolled my eyes. " Not one of my better moments but yes, I did do that and I've been regretting it ever since. But, you're right in that I shouldn't take the easy way out so we should come back here with the means to remove these sun blocks properly."

" You can still activate the regular switch as nothing is stopping you from doing that."

" Oh yeah."

" Just be careful of the Beamos." Twilight said. " Because it's behind that metallic fence, you can't toss any bombs over it as it's too high and the Blast Mask's radius won't be able to reach it either. Its laser beam though, can go through the fence so be sure not to get picked off by it."

The Beamos was looking in the other direction so I quickly went over to the switch I could activate and pressed it causing another chest to materialize on the other side of the pool of water. I jumped into the water, dropped down to the ground, walked along making sure to avoid the exploding mines, and climbed out but not before noticing a corridor hidden away where you needed a keen eye to see it. It was the path Princess Twilight saw on the map but when I looked down at it, I was somehow reminded of the day when I chose to do something behind the back of Princess Celestia--my bringing it up also contributed.

Back when I wasn't what you would call a model student, I believed I was deserving of being an alicorn, and my efforts at making Princess Celestia recognize my brilliance fell on deaf ears as she rejected my advances of learning more about the mirror pushing me further and further down a path from which I almost couldn't return from. Had I chosen to heed her words instead of taking matters into my own hooves, I would still be her student, but instead I chose to give in to my indulges and began reading different books hoping that I would find an answer to the purpose of the mirror.

I've never told anyone this, not even my friends or Princess Twilight, but I still remembered some of the dark magic incantations I looked at when I entered the forbidden section of the Royal Library of Canterlot. The spells required specific objects in order for them to be cast yet they continued to remain etched into my mind, and there had been times when I was tempted to use them because of feeling powerless and wanting to vent out some much needed stress in my life. I feared what could happen were someone to peer into my mind, learn the spells, gather the necessary items, and use them to spread terror. The thought alone frightened me to no end.

I also thought about Sunset Demon and how my actions resulted in her existence. It was a combination of power and my own weaknesses though I'd be lying by saying that there was nothing else. No, my own desires for wanting to be accepted as a princess also played a factor. Sunset Demon was a complex person whose pain was the result of my self-fish nature and refusing to accept the fact that I wasn't ready. Had I been patient, she wouldn't have come to exist or if she had, her existence wouldn't have involved being stuck in an eternal torment brought on by factors beyond her control.

Kicking open the chest, I was surprised that it contained a small key as opposed to a Stray Fairy. Granted, the puzzle here wasn't that difficult to figure out yet I was expecting to get the third Stray Fairy instead but picking up a key was also good as it meant not getting stuck by a locked door somewhere further along. Jumping back into the water and dropping down, I began walking towards the corridor only for something to grab me by the head, slamming me into the wall of said corridor a couple of times before throwing me back the other way, landing on my butt.

" What just hit me?" I asked as I got back onto my feet.

" That was a Dexihand."

" Why would it be here of all places?"

" I'm starting to see a trend here."

" What?"

" So far, we've seen monsters that existed in the swamp, the Dragonflies." Twilight answered. " Then we saw the Real Bombchu that exists here in Ikana and Snowhead, and now we're seeing the Dexihand from the ocean. It seems this temple is bringing together elements from the other regions alongside its own elements culminating together in what can only be viewed as one incredible challenge pitted against us."

" No wonder I've needed to use my different forms to get to this point."

" Perhaps Ikana is a region that reflects balance?"

That was a bit difficult for me to swallow considering that the kingdom had been destroyed by war, but then I didn't have any explanations of my own so I decided to agree with what Her Highness had said on the matter. " Well, if I have to go through what we've already seen before, there's no sense in complaining about it. Besides, it means we won't have many problems unless some of what we've experienced gets a face-lift or we actually see something new."

" Only way we'll know is by seeing it with our own eyes."

The Dexihand was lurking above the entrance to the corridor which was how it managed to grab me by surprise as I was expecting it to be located down the corridor, but then I could easily avoid its grasp by using a tactic I used when I infiltrated the Pirates Fortress. Dropping down onto my stomach making sure I was low enough, I began crawling on the ground, my breasts rubbing against the tiles causing me to wince a little, but I had to do it in order to slip past the Dexihand and not get thrown about again. My eyes looked up and saw a switch on the ceiling but again I couldn't do anything about it other than make a mental note for later.

Once I was far enough away from the Dexihand, I got up onto my feet, and rubbed my breasts though the fin-like pieces covering them did absorb some of the pain though I should have perhaps just made a run for it since my movement underwater wasn't slowed down as a Zora. I continued down the corridor when it turned right before opening up into another large room that featured another walkway that went across the surface of the water. There were additional platforms underwater as well that had pots on them so I swam downwards towards the bottom corner where I saw three pots lined up next to one another.

Smashing each one with my fins gave me some magic and arrows yet when I turned around, I noticed a switch that had been hiding underneath one of the other platforms, and was surrounded by three spiked mines that were so close to one another, they could explode with a gentle push. Above was a sun switch though it was obvious I had to ignore it as I couldn't use arrows or a bow underwater--or anything for that matter except for my fins--but I knew Princess Twilight would mark it down on my map for the future. Speaking of my fins, they were about to solve a very simple puzzle.

Aiming at the mines, I was about to fire my fins when something began biting my legs. " What the heck!?" I looked down and noticed some Skullfish were responsible and I began shaking my legs in hopes of getting rid of them. It didn't work so I tried swimming away only for that to not work either as they slowed down my movement so I activated my electric barrier destroying them. " Well, I think that proves your theory is true."

" How are your legs feeling?"

" Luckily, they didn't manage to bite too much to the point where I would start bleeding."

" You can use those red potions at any time."

" I want to save them for when I absolutely need them."

" So long as you don't leave it too late."

I rolled my eyes. " I know when I'll need to use them, Twilight." Aiming my fins at the exploding mines again, I fired them, destroying all three mines causing a massive explosion that shook the entire room for a few moments, and giving me access to the switch. Pressing it caused a treasure chest to appear on the platform above though my jaw dropped when it ended up appearing upside-down. " Ugh! You have got to be kidding me! Why did it materialize up there!?"

Princess Twilight nodded in a more civil manner. " I must admit that this is starting to become very concerning. With all of these chests, switches, and other points of interest being upside-down and unable to be accessed, you have to wonder what else can happen as we continue through this temple."

" I'm starting to hate this place already."

" You need to remain calm."

" I know."

" Let's get out of the water so that I can mark the treasure chest down on the map."

I then began floating up to the surface and along the way, I noticed another upside-down switch along with a Deku Flower right next to it. I wanted to let loose my anger over continuously seeing so much that I couldn't use because of being on the wrong plane but instead all I did was sigh knowing I had to accept this as a fact. The Stone Tower was already proving itself to be a nightmare of proportions I had never would have considered had I not seen it. Reaching the surface of the water and climbing out onto yet another walkway that went across the water, this one had no fencing to keep me from getting onto it.

The first thing I noticed other than a locked door behind me was a sun block along with a Deku Flower hanging upside-down on the ceiling. I could also barely see what looked to be a frozen eye switch above the flower though its position was awkward because the archway was weirdly shaped. There was a mirror in front of me that looked suspicious and while sunlight shone down from above, I couldn't shine the light onto the block with my Mirror Shield as the block was too far away to reach. Before doing anything else, I took out the map and looked it over to see where exactly we were.

I was surprised. " Isn't this the same room we entered from the entry room?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " It would seem so."

" So we've come full circle?"

" At least in this part of the temple."

" Shall I unlock the door and enter the next room?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " No, I think we should get rid of that sun block first so we can give ourselves a short-cut for later. Since you can't shine light on the block from here with the Mirror Shield, I believe a creative method is in order. If you can shine light on the mirror for a while--I'm not entirely sure for how long so it comes down to a guess--then immediately shine light on the block, it should get rid of it opening up the way back. After that, a well-aimed Fire Arrow should melt and activate that frozen eye switch."

" Guess it means being a human again."

" Of all four of your forms, it is the most important in that it must guide the other three."

" That sounded sappy."

" I made it up on the fly."

I found it cute how Princess Twilight, despite her station as a princess of Equestria, acted like an ordinary person who could make mistakes just like everyone else. It made her feel very approachable to those around her without feeling inadequate in return. Granted, she had some unredeemable qualities such as her freaking out over the smallest of details not to mention not giving people enough space to solve their own problems without needing her to give them unwanted pressure. She meant well in this regard but needed to hold back and allow others to grow into their own personalities.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask, and flipped back my hair before taking a few steps backwards. Taking out the Hero's Bow, I fired a Fire Arrow--I never switched back to regular arrows--melting the ice that surrounded the eye switch, activating it in the process and causing a treasure chest to appear behind me though once again it appeared on the ceiling causing me to vent my frustration under my breath. I was definitely going to hate doing so much backtracking but it was a necessary evil this time around as most of these chests probably contained a Stray Fairy.

Next, I walked back under the sunlight, raised my shield, aimed at the mirror, and watched as the light reflected off of the mirror. Because the mirror was at an angle, the light itself was hitting the opposite wall in a harmless manner. It wasn't much of an issue though it was slightly inconvenient but I would get around it. Like Princess Twilight said, I needed to shine light for an unknown amount of time so I hoped I wouldn't be standing around for very long. I even thought about falling asleep because of how boring this process was but it was necessary so that I could create a shortcut back to the beginning.

When I finally felt that I had waited long enough--I think I stood under the sunlight for about two or three minutes--I quickly ran over to the light that deflected off the mirror, raised my Mirror Shield, and shined the light on the sun block causing it to disappear and revealing a large treasure chest that had been cleverly hidden behind the block. Before walking over to it, I noticed a Real Bombchu running about behind the chest though from my perspective it looked like it was stuck in place. Rather than allow it to move about and give me nothing but a headache or explode in my face, I fired a Fire Arrow at it and it exploded instantly.

I then opened the treasure chest and took out the Compass followed by taking out the Dungeon Map again when I noticed something odd. " There should be skull icon on the map indicating the boss monster's location but I don't see it anywhere."

Princess Twilight looked at the map and noticed the lack of the icon as well. " Hmmm... You're right but I'm sure there's a logical explanation here. I mean, we've seen that there are switches, chests, and more hanging upside-down so perhaps we can't see where the boss is because of something similar?" Her Highness then scratched her head before shaking it and heaving a heavy sigh. " I'm starting to feel the same way you do about how so much of this temple is beyond our reach."

" Welcome to my world."

" Let's just unlock that door and enter the next room."

Nodding, I walked back over to the door, unlocked it, and entered the next room only to suddenly be surprised by three strange looking blocks right in front of me. They were preventing me from progressing further and because of how heavy they looked, I knew that I would need to become Darmani and destroy them using punches. Taking out the Goron Mask again and placing it on my face, I stumbled about as my body shimmered from human to Goron but luckily I was restricted by the blocks so I didn't stumble out too far forward in case there were any monsters lurking ahead.

Once I became Darmani again, I punched the blocks, each one getting pushed to the right, shrinking down in size as they went until disappearing, and when the last one was removed, the entirety of the room became visible to me. There was a sun block along with several mirrors and I knew straight away that I needed to use the Mirror Shield to reflect the light around until it disappeared upon being hit but why have more mirrors than necessary unless there was more to the room than just one block. My suspicion quickly proved itself correct as there were sun switches hanging either side of me on the walls.

I could also see the Black Boe monsters from the Woodfall Temple scurrying about in front of me though so far they hadn't taken notice of me. If there were only a few of them then this wasn't going to be all that difficult though if they were capable of re-spawning even while I was still in the room, it would make reflecting the light much more difficult. I could also vaguely smell gunpowder and I didn't need to wager a guess as to what was behind that. I then slapped my forehead upon remembering that I had a mask that could allow me to blend in with my surroundings preventing most monsters from seeing me.

Grabbing my face, I was about to pull of the Goron Mask when I lowered my hands upon noticing someone standing in front of me, that someone being Midnight Sparkle. Her expression was one of sheer glee though I knew not to underestimate her as she possessed an incredible amount of power. I also knew she was the real thing and not some kind of illusion as I could sense an evil aura surrounding her body--nothing could imitate that--yet I didn't even sense her when she entered the room. Whatever Midnight Sparkle had done to herself, I wasn't going to enjoy being on the receiving end of it.

Midnight Sparkle lurched forward and raised her arm across her chest. " So nice to see you again, Sunset Shimmer."

" So Sunset Demon was right that you were here." I said.

" That one just can't seem to keep her mouth shut for even a moment."

" I suspected that you were somewhere in Termina but I didn't have any proof until she mentioned it."

" Even when our demonic aura is much weaker than usual, you still manage to defy the odds and sensed our presence." Midnight Sparkle said. " If you were just an ordinary human, that would have been the most impressive thing I would have ever seen, but you aren't a human but rather a magical pony who has taken on the form of a human. When I first found out after absorbing all that Equestrian Magic, I felt disgusted a little knowing someone such as yourself would be so manipulative, Sunset, but I've since accepted your actions as both truth and vindication."

" Why would you feel vindicated?"

Midnight Sparkle rubbed the bridge of her nose. " You seriously don't know why?" She started laughing though quickly stopped when she felt a slight pain in her stomach most likely from laughing too hard. " It means that I don't have to hide any secrets from you nor do I have to feel bad about killing a magical pony given how much I love animals."

" That last part doesn't make sense."

" It doesn't matter since you won't have to worry about it for much longer."

" I defeated you once and I'll do it again."

Midnight Sparkle laughed maniacally. " You don't have the ability to become that beautiful form you assumed during the Friendship Games so you're in no position to be making any baseless threats against me. In fact, I doubt that this current look of yours will be very effective either." She lurched forward, looked me over, and waved her hand before laughing and leaning back again. " With such a slow and clunky body, you wouldn't be able to defeat me but I won't underestimate you, Sunset. You have a tendency to be extremely resourceful even when the odds are heavily stacked against you."

I winked. " What can I say? Luck is on my side when it needs to be."

" Luck has definitely served you well."

" Why are you here?"

" I'm sure Sunset Demon told you about how I pulled myself back from the brink of death and how I did the same thing for her, right?" Midnight Sparkle asked. I nodded and she began pounding her head against the wall. " Ugh! Like I said before! That one just can't seem to keep her mouth shut. Ever since we came to this wasteland of a kingdom, she has changed from being a sadistic monster into a creature that has become confused, and it makes me sick just thinking seeing such a pathetic display. Now that I think about it, maybe paying visits to your friends might not have been the best idea."

" She's come to the realization that she isn't meant to exist anymore!"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " Oh I know which is why I have to make sure she gets with the program and does what she's meant to do. I mean, we were supposed to kill you, your friends, and of course Princess Twilight herself, and fulfill our desires which we have worked so hard to see become reality."

" Princess Twilight and I figured you two were collecting samples of the Elements of Harmony."

" The process didn't go as well as I had hoped."

I scratched my head. " What do you mean?"

" The samples I collected were adequate and proved that Equestrian Magic was seeping into this world via a weak strain." Midnight Sparkle answered. " Unfortunately, it meant nothing without a means of channeling the samples, but I discovered a way around that. This temple has a dark power that can empower those who are one with the darkness, making them stronger and able to do things they couldn't normally. By tapping into that power and harnessing it, I can now fulfill my desire of acquiring all of the magic in Equestria once the samples merge together with what I already have."

" That plan doesn't make much sense."

Midnight Sparkle lowered her head. " I'll admit that it isn't the best idea I could come up and I didn't have much to work with but I can make it work regardless. With all of this power, you, the princess, and your friends will no longer stand in my way as you'll all be dead. As for Sunset Demon... I suppose she could beg me to allow her to become the real you but after what she has done as of late what with jeopardizing everything, I should probably cut my losses and kill her before something happens like for example, she turns against me and chooses to fight by your side. Then again, I could always use my new power to force her into fighting you."

Everything was starting to make some sense though at the same time it was also farcical in nature. Midnight Sparkle's plan involved using the Elements of Harmony and the dark power of the Stone Tower to kill the only ones who could oppose her, yet something obviously didn't sound right with her explanation. This dark power... How confident was she with regards to controlling it? Magic Power in Termina required having both a strong mind and body, and also having Magic Power didn't hurt as it was the source behind the magic, yet what she had was something else entirely.

Looking at Midnight Sparkle and what she had said, it was clear to me that she had become obsessed with power and was willing to go to great lengths to get it. She was acting in a similar manner to Sunset Demon though with a more refined approach involving being civil rather than being psychotic. If she lost control of this power, would it result in her own destruction? Would this world be destroyed by her and not the moon? Or would something else happen? Twilight Sparkle truly had become everything that Sunset Demon had before her and was going down the same path where she would ultimately become obsessed with power.

Despite what she had done so far, I couldn't allow her to continue down such a terrible path. But, before I could say anything, Princess Twilight suddenly surprised me by speaking out instead. " Okay, I've heard enough of this pointless talk coming from your mouth."

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " And here I thought you were invisible considering you've let Sunset do all the talking so far. Good to see that you are capable of talking. I do believe this is the first time we've met each other so allow me to introduce myself to you. I am Midnight Sparkle, demonic monster, and who will acquire all of the magic in Equestria through any means necessary because I must."

Princess Twilight glared. " The feeling isn't mutual."

" Oh you are such a card!"

" Sunset has told me much about you."

" If that's the case then I don't need to do any explaining." Midnight Sparkle said. " So you became an alicorn princess while dear Sunset was denied all because she chose to do her own thing rather than listening to someone who always kept on holding her back. At least that's what Sunset Demon kept on saying though it got annoying after a while. I'm surprised at you, Sunset. You're deserving of being an alicorn too so why hasn't it happened?"

" Don't bother trying to coerce her with words."

" You can't blame me for trying."

" Why do you want Equestrian Magic?"

Midnight Sparkle took a moment to think about it before answering the question. " Twilight Sparkle, my kinder counterpart and not you, Your Highness, was always curious about uncovering the biggest secrets out there and becoming famous as a result. When she learned about the magic that had enveloped Canterlot High, or 'strange energy readings' as she called them, she just had to go and collect the necessary data even if she had no idea what it really meant. Her desire for knowledge combined with words by Principal Cinch and longing to lash out against all who had wronged her resulted in my birth."

" You didn't quite answer my question."

" I was about to get to that." Midnight Sparkle said. " All of that magic that entered Twilight Sparkle's body was like a nourishment to me and I longed to have more of it by any means even if it meant destroying one world in the process."

Princess Twilight shouted. " Having magic isn't everything you know!"

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " I yearn for it! That's just the kind of demonic monster I am. Of course, Sunset Shimmer was able to break through to my weaker self and convinced her to go back to the way she was resulting in me being cast aside. For a time, I lingered about in limbo unsure of what I could do but deep down my desire for all that magic is what fueled my ambition, what kept me going, what prevented my sanity from being destroyed. Then something happened resulting in this strange world and the darkness seeping forth in this wasteland brought me back from death much to my surprise."

" No doubt this is Ganondorf's work, Sunset."

I nodded. " All in his bid of making me suffer."

Midnight Sparkle shrugged. " I have no idea who this Ganondorf is though Sunset Demon never could stop talking about him and I also don't really care. Once you two are dead along with your friends, I'll be free to acquire all of the magic and become the smartest being in existence." She started getting hyped up over what she intended on doing only to suddenly tone it down and sighing heavily. " Had your friends not displayed characteristics of their Elements, my plan wouldn't have gotten anywhere. In a way, I have them to thank for making all of this possible so I'll give them a painless death. Hey... It's the least I can do. But, first..."

" Leave my friends alone."

" I have to take care of you two first, Sunset."

" No wonder Sunset Demon couldn't tolerate you anymore."

" Now who is trying to use words to coerce me?" Midnight Sparkle asked. " Frankly, I could do without the she-demon as she's only ever been a burden though I will admit that she definitely had a domineering presence that made it so much fun seeing how she would react to anything. I don't want to lose her but this is the path she has chosen so killing her would relieve me of an unnecessary burden."

" You would kill your own friend?" Twilight asked.

Midnight Sparkle laughed before she began glowing. " We're not friends by any means, Your Highness. No, we're more like acquaintances who had to tolerate one another to achieve our goals but now that I have my power, I can easily cast her aside or simply have you kill her. Either way works with me because it means getting rid of her. Now, I think it's time we got down to business as you've stalled long enough. My intent was to kill you both but I think I want to have some fun instead. I mean, I can do whatever I want now because of my power so why not make this room more interesting."

She snapped her fingers and more Black Boes suddenly appeared though I was expecting her to do something serious like break the mirrors. Snapping her fingers again caused fire bars to suddenly appear near each mirror so now I had to avoid additional obstacles that weren't there before. She snapped her fingers for a third time and this made some parts of the wall shimmer for a few moments before they began shooting lightning everywhere. She didn't want me to make it out of this room alive by filling it up with more hazards and I had every right to worry as she was clearly going overboard.

With a fourth snap of her fingers, Midnight Sparkle laughed as she disappeared leaving me to wonder what else she had done to make this room more difficult. A thought then crossed my mind. Why would she leave just like that when she clearly could have killed me and Princess Twilight at any moment with this new power she had? I wasn't complaining mind you as Her Highness and I most likely would have been killed as we lacked the means to oppose her yet it was still strange that she upped and left. Perhaps her power wasn't as strong as she claimed or perhaps she hadn't gotten fully adjusted to it.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Goron Mask, flipped back my hair, and switched over to the Stone Mask. In all honesty, I should have used this one more often as I could have avoided a lot of monsters though it also meant not getting the proper experience when using my sword . I supposed it was a double-edged sword in that sense. Putting on the Stone Mask, I didn't feel different yet I knew the mask was working as none of the Black Boes were moving towards me. The lightning and fire bars would still be an issue as they could hurt me regardless of what mask was on my face.

I was about to make my move when I noticed Princess Twilight was staring into thin air. " Um, Twilight? Are you okay?"

" Now I understand what you must have felt when you had to deal with Sunset Demon."

I nodded slowly. " I had to endure an awful lot and many times I lost my temper."

" How do you manage to not completely lose all sense of self?"

" It's difficult because there's this urge to just simply throttle someone and it grows stronger until you either cave in or ignore it." I answered. " The best way to ignore such urges is to think of something pleasant and rallying your mind behind it. For me, the thought of being surrounded by my friends is enough to keep me from doing something I would most likely regret and especially you, Twilight."

Princess Twilight smiled. " Guess I must learn from you once again."

I smirked. " It doesn't bother you, does it?"

" Not in the least." Twilight answered. " Anyway, we need to focus on getting out of this room without being killed by the additions Midnight Sparkle made. With the Stone Mask, you don't have to worry about those Black Boes as they can no longer see you but the fire bars and lightning will be an issue so you'll need to do this quickly. First, we should try shining light onto the sun switches hanging on the walls. Something good might happen or not depending on which ones you hit."

Standing in the sunlight and raising the Mirror Shield, I shone light onto the three switches on my left. Each one burned away to nothing though I could hear the sounds coming from above so I moved back to the door when a pair of Wallmasters dropped down from above. I was certainly caught off guard though I should have expected it but I wasn't about to give them a chance to grab me and send me back to the beginning. Drawing my sword, I was about to strike one when I remembered that the Stone Mask prevented them from seeing me. Both monsters moved about on their fingers for a few moments before jumping back up to the ceiling.

I then shone light on the other switches with two burning while the remaining one glowed before smiling. This caused a treasure chest to appear in the center of the room where the column with the mirrors was and that meant having to weave in-between both fire and lightning in order to reach it successfully. I cursed Midnight Sparkle under my breath for having added more obstacles but I sighed knowing I couldn't really do anything other than keep going. I then ran towards the chest avoiding the lightning coming from the walls and almost got roasted by the fire bar surrounding the mirror before stumbling into it.

Kicking the chest open revealed the third Stray Fairy--I had gotten way more than this by this point in the other temples--where it entered my body but then I quickly ran back to avoid getting roasted a second time. Raising my shield whilst standing in the sunlight, I aimed at the mirror that was to my right and held that position knowing the mirror needed enough light for it to reflect off of it before I could use it to remove the sun block. I began thinking about what kind of item I would get this time around in the meantime as I waited. Judging from how often I needed to manipulate the light, perhaps I would acquire what was seen as the most powerful arrow.

From what I remembered, the Light Arrow required more magic than the other two yet this negative was offset by the fact that the arrow was strong against anything that drew its power from evil, and that included Starlight Glimmer because of her mask. I would have considered Ganondorf as an ideal response yet he was immune to the light that resulted from him slowly developing an immunity over the centuries. If the Light Arrows were indeed somewhere inside of the Stone Tower Temple, I needed to get my hands on them as soon as possible. I just needed to figure out where they were located in here.

When I felt I had given the mirror enough light, I quickly planned out how I would do this and rushed forward towards the light that now reflected off of it. My tunic was singed in the process due to a slight miscalculation--I got a little too close to the fire--but at least the electricity didn't hit me. The sun block disappeared upon getting hit by the light revealing another small treasure chest that I opened to reveal the next Stray Fairy giving me four in total. As it disappeared by entering my body, I turned and noticed another sun block that had been hidden behind the center pillar, and was the way onward as there was no other exit.

Heading back to the start, I repeated the same process though now I had to shine light on the mirror to my left. If I had the Light Arrows, I would have ignored the mirrors and simply removed the block using one of them but since I didn't have them, this was the only means of progression. I waited for about a minute before heading over and once again my tunic got singed but I also got electrocuted causing me to drop to my knees for a moment. While my innards felt like they had just melted, I persevered and reached the mirror and removed the block just as the light disappeared.

This revealed the way forward much to my pleasure as now I could finally get out of this nightmare of a room. " My body feels numb."

" The electricity Midnight Sparkle added to this room certainly did a number on you."

" At least the worst is over now."

" You shouldn't say things like that."

" Why not?"

" Because something much worse ends up happening."

Now I had gotten paranoid by Her Highness saying that so I walked forward towards the door only for a giant-sized Nejiron to rise up from below the ground. " WAAAAH!"I fell down onto my butt and scooted back while the monster turned and looked in my direction. " Guess we know what Midnight Sparkle's final finger snap had created though I don't think it can move around very well." The Nejiron tried rolling but couldn't due to its size keeping it stuck but it did mean the way forward was blocked. " How are we supposed to continue on with this thing blocking our way?"

" You'll have to blow it up."

I blinked a few times. " You want me to do what?"

" There is no way you can move it out of the way, not even as a Goron, so you'll have to blow it up."

" Won't that cause a massive explosion?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I don't know. I think Midnight Sparkle increased this Nejiron's size for this exact purpose, to force you into making it explode and the result would cover a radius about the size of the entire room. Rather than fight us or go with a more conventional method, she chose to go with something like this instead. Either she isn't confident that she can win or she needed to go back and check on Sunset Demon."

I looked up at the Nejiron and gulped. " Guess I've got to blow it up then."

" This would be a good time to use one of those red potions when it's all said and done."

I shook my head. " Assuming we even survive this."

" You have to believe that we can."

Taking out the Hero's Bow, I was about to fire an arrow when Princess Twilight told me that a regular arrow would do as opposed to a Fire Arrow. Nodding, I switched to an ordinary arrow, nocked it onto the string, aimed up at the Nejiron, and fired where the arrow struck it between the eyes. This resulted in it exploding causing a massive burst of flame to begin consuming everything and it continued to expand though I knew I couldn't leave otherwise it would simply re-spawn upon entering the room again forcing me to destroy it and effectively repeat the process. I had to believe that I could survive Midnight Sparkle's plan.

" Well that was definitely something." Sunset Demon said.

" At least I actually put them in a difficult situation unlike you who chose to talk to them." Midnight Sparkle said.

Sunset Demon laughed though she struggled to be consistent due to still being ensnared by the dark vines. " When you said that you were going to take care of them, I thought you meant actually killing them and not relying on such a stupid thing like throwing in more obstacles just to test Sunset's resolve and Princess Twilight's intellect. Perhaps you're not as dangerous as you claim to be."

" What do you mean by that?"

" You could have killed them right there and then."

" So?"

Sunset Demon shook her head. " I think you were afraid of killing them. Either that or you just didn't have the guts to go through with it. Sunset has survived much worse than a giant exploding monster. Heck, she went toe-to-toe against me twice and came out on top because she had the heart to keep on fighting even when the odds were against her. I admire her for that as it shows both character and an improvement in maturity. While her temper is a remnant of what remains of my influence over her, she has learned to control it though sometimes it does flare up through no fault of her own."

Midnight Sparkle's body glowed. " You think I'm afraid of Sunset Shimmer and Princess Twilight?"

" Or you lacked the guts."

" Don't push me!"

" I've been doing that the entire time though until you acquired your power, you were so easy to look down upon as the inferior demon." Sunset Demon said. " Granted, I won't deny that you are smarter and can maintain your composure a lot better than I could, but the fact remains that you blew your chance when it was right there waiting for you to take and run away with it and instead you came back here out of fear that I would escape while you were gone. I can't break free of these dark vines no matter how hard I struggle but I guess I should've mentioned that before."

That pushed Midnight Sparkle over the edge and she picked up Sunset Demon by her neck before throwing her into a column causing it to break into pieces. As the she-demon slumped to the ground whilst her body was pelted by debris, Midnight Sparkle glowed brighter, used her power to hoist up Sunset Demon until she hit the ceiling before being dropped down again where she crashed into the ground. While Sunset Demon laughed at how pathetic Midnight Sparkle was, the latter began making the dark vines squeeze tighter until the former had almost lost consciousness before being slammed against the ceiling several more times.

Once she felt satisfied that her companion had been punished enough, Midnight Sparkle released her hold on Sunset Demon who crashed into the ground again and was unable to move due to how much pain she was in. The former was about to administer further punishment when the sounds of the wailing spirits echoed throughout her ears causing her to clutch her head in an attempt at drowning them out but instead she felt tremendous pain until it subsided. Midnight Sparkle then noticed the Garo Master standing a short distance away and laughed before he disappeared unto the wall.

She shook her head to regain her composure. " Okay, now that was weird even for me."

" You heard the wails of the spirits again?"

" You too?"

Sunset Demon nodded. " It's impossible not to hear them." She tried getting back up onto her feet only to collapse due to the punishment she had received. " Ha... But more importantly, it looks like you're beginning to lose control. You're becoming exactly the way I was when I was desperate. I didn't care what I had to do to achieve my goals so long as I did and that meant doing things that slowly destroyed my sanity leaving me as an emotionless monster. Had my mind not been poisoned so badly by power, I could have changed sooner and made peace with Sunset but I was both blind and ignorant."

" And this affects me how?"

" If you can't see the truth for what it is, I might as well just stop talking."

" Now that we can both agree on."

Sunset Demon sighed. " Then I guess I've got nothing more to say to you, Midnight Sparkle, other than this. When I was like you are right now, I did things that I now regret doing in the name of wanting to become the real Sunset. My actions were horrific beyond measure and I was rightly condemned for it resulting in my death. Upon venturing about this world, I saw pain with my own eyes and how it affected people. It made me realize that I had caused pain but in a different manner and my heart began resonating, a heart that I had ignored for so long until now. I finally understood what humility really meant and ironically, it was the very thing Sunset herself once lacked."

" Are you finished?"

Sunset Demon shook her head. " Just this one last bit, okay? Anyway, I can't change the fact that I am a demon as that was how I was created, but I can change how I live out the rest of my existence before it comes to an end, and it will happen much sooner than expected. I'm not going to be making it out of this temple alive. If anything, this place will become my grave and I've accepted that as my fate. I'm a remnant of Sunset's past that continues to linger out of desperation but she has moved on and accepted her past for the most part. Should I die now, that would be the end of me permanently. I've no intention of coming back after this. My time is done."

Midnight Sparkle clapped sarcastically prompting Sunset Demon to glare at her though she brushed it off. " You changed because you paid attention to your surroundings and felt sympathy towards people? While that was without a doubt the most pathetic thing I've ever heard, you've also earned my respect for choosing to remain steadfast about it. I feel bad for having to do this to you, Sunset Demon, I really do, but we've come too far to stop now just because of a revelation brought on by this world. Perhaps you need to be reminded of who you really are and with my new power, that can easily be arranged. I just need a few moments."

" What are you planning on doing?"

" Something oh so obvious and predictable but also necessary."

I don't know how I managed to survive the explosion but I did. I guessed that since I had seen plenty of similar situations throughout my journey, I would know how to deal with just about anything that came my way. I had been pushed to the edge of the room thanks to the explosion's radius covering its entirety and there was a point where I had considered going back into the previous room in hopes of avoiding taking heavy damage, but ultimately, I stuck it out and managed to survive as the explosion radius died down mere inches away from where I had been standing.

The room had definitely seen better days when the smoke from the explosion began to lift. All of the mirrors had been shattered and while I wasn't the superstitious type, I had no doubt that Midnight Sparkle would have a lot of bad luck coming her way. Her other traps had also been neutralized allowing me to traverse the room freely without having to worry about being attacked by something else. Before moving on to the next room, I took a moment to come to an understanding as to what Midnight Sparkle had said. Her plan was well-crafted in its premise but lacked any cohesion in that she was making it up as she went along.

She also hadn't expected Sunset Demon to suddenly have a change of heart and see things differently. That was perhaps my one advantage when it came to the two demons but I would remiss if I didn't say that I was worried something had happened to the she-demon. It felt strange being worried about her since she had tried to kill me many times and wanting to assume my life but it felt necessary because she was willing to change just like how I did when Princess Twilight and my friends defeated me when I was her. Hopefully, she was okay though I was prepared to fight her if I absolutely had to.

Midnight Sparkle wants all of the magic in Equestria, a tall order, and one she could never succeed at not because of me. No, the princesses were more than a match for her as they had seen beings who were far worse, but she was unique because she didn't want to conquer Equestria. Unless Midnight Sparkle had a means of getting around them, the princesses would deny her everything. My home had faced all kinds of threats and won each time so I had no doubt they would be well prepared to handle one power-hungry human. Had Ganondorf not changed things by turning the world I called home into this doomed one, Midnight Sparkle wouldn't have come back.

It was obvious that neither demon were affiliated with the Dark Lord but it was also obvious that he had a hand in all of this. He wanted me to suffer immense torment so that I would eventually cave in to his will and become his loyal servant all because of what I once did as Sunset Demon. He was definitely succeeding on one front but I wasn't about to let him defeat me, as my willpower was stronger than it looked. In fact, I now had an inkling to ask him if he had been influencing the actions of the demons. I knew he wasn't controlling them but perhaps he was guiding them along in some way.

No matter what though, I still had a job to do, and that was saving this world and changing it back to the way it was before. Taking a deep breath, I began to walk across the room making sure not to trip on any of the loose tiles. There were no additional Nejiron yet the Black Boes continued scurrying about but as long as the Stone Mask remained on my face, they would ignore me completely--I didn't feel like destroying them as there was no point other than satisfying any sadistic tendencies and acting like a bully. Upon reaching the door, I was about to open it when howling echoed throughout the room.

Night of the First Day - 60 Hours Remain.

" It's night time already!?" I exclaimed.

" We've been in here a lot longer than you thought." Twilight said.

" How can that be?"

" Did you play the Inverted Song of Time before we entered the temple?"

I slapped my forehead and moaned. " That explains why it's already night time."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I guess it's my fault for not reminding you to play that song. Had you done it sooner, we would have more time to complete this temple given recent developments involving both Sunset Demon and Midnight Sparkle."

I shook my head. " The fault is mine, Twilight. I was so fixated on grinding for rupees that I forgot all about playing the song and now here we are a ways into the temple without having slowed time down to give us, well, more time."

" Why not play it now despite the delay."

I nodded sadly and took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt. " My confidence feels a bit deflated because of this oversight but we do need more time as the demons are sure to take up most of it." I then played the Inverted Song of Time and everything around suddenly slowed down. " A shame that monsters are unaffected by this song otherwise things would become a lot easier."

Princess Twilight nodded. " While that's true, it would also take away the significance of an adventure, that being going through a difficult journey filled with all kinds of challenges until you either reach your final goal or perish in the attempt. From what I've seen, you've proven to be a great adventurer who has persevered through so much even when it looks like things will spiral out of control."

" But I'm still reluctant about it."

" All adventurers are like that."

" When this is all over, I have no plans on going on another adventure of this nature ever again!"

Opening the door to the next room, I suddenly felt a warm blast of air hit me in the face and I shook my head to regain my vision. I also felt hot in that the temperature had just suddenly increased by a large amount in mere seconds. I walked over to the edge and looked down to see a massive pool of lava though it was interspersed with several columns and giant fans that were blowing air upwards. I initially thought they were merely part of this room's aesthetics but upon seeing a switch submerged slightly in the lava, I would need to traverse the lava pool as Darmani but I didn't know for what reason yet.

A Deku Flower in front of me indicated that I needed to use my Deku Scrub body--for the first time in quite a while--to make my way around the room without falling into the lava below and burning to death instantly. Looking up, the night sky was in full bloom--the moon couldn't be seen for some reason--and it cast an eerie light throughout the room. As I continued looking, I noticed something perched on the ceiling staring down at me and immediately alerted Princess Twilight. She looked up to see what it was and managed to get a tiny glimpse before it disappeared leaving us wondering what it was.

" Was that Midnight Sparkle?"

I shook my head. " She doesn't have flaming swords for hands."

" Then it must have been the Garo Master we've heard so much about."

" I wonder why he didn't come down and attack us?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " We should be lucky that he chose to leave instead. Had he chosen to attack, you would have been at a complete disadvantage what with the terrain being small unless you became a Goron and trudged about in the lava below. The Garo Master probably knows this temple inside and out so he would know the right places to strike you and all you could do in response is take on a defensive stance until you either managed to get out of this room or get killed."

" I'll have to fight him eventually."

" Yes, but it needs to be in a more open area."

" So what should we do now?"

" You'll need to fly across the room using those air currents while as a Deku Scrub." Twilight answered. " There is also the switch down below that could prove useful but it might be a tricky puzzle depending on what happens next."

" I'll go with the switch."

" Then I suggest you become a Goron now and climb down that ladder nearby." Twilight said whilst pointing towards said ladder. " You might hurt yourself a little if you were to drop down below from this height."

Taking out the Goron Mask, I went back into the previous room and then put it on--I didn't want to stumble into the lava before the transformation was complete--and began stumbling forward as my body shimmered from human to Goron until I walked into the central column again before falling onto my butt. When I became Darmani again, I got back onto my feet, rubbed my aching butt, went back through the door, and began climbing down until I reached the lava pool below. Again, I felt comfortable or rather my feet did as the lava felt so soothing but I knew I had to focus.

Jumping onto the switch, I curled up into a ball and performed a ground pound, activating it. I couldn't tell what happened so I began rolling forward in hopes of figuring out what the switch had done. My body enjoyed rolling through the lava--my aches and pains disappeared as if it were magic--though bumping into the columns and fans wasn't any fun as it slowed down my momentum not to mention give me a headache. After bumping into another column, uncurling myself, I decided to walk on foot and kept on walking until I came upon a dead-end, but there was another switch ahead that was surrounded by fire.

I tried walking through the fire since it was just an off-shoot of the lava and I was suddenly knocked back where I landed on my butt. Getting back up again, I tried touching the fire with my hand only to quickly pull it away as the fire proved to be a little too hot for me to handle. Princess Twilight suggested that the first switch we saw removed the fire that surrounded the second one and I needed to make my way over here before it would return. Considering how difficult it was to roll with so many obstacles, I practically had to make an almost perfect run with a single mistake at the minimum.

Making my way back to the first switch, I began plotting a course that would hopefully get me to the second switch on time--it also meant having to roll with perfection that would please any and all Gorons. Once I got back and jumped onto the switch, I curled up into a ball again, performed a ground pound activating the switch, and immediately began rolling forward making sure I knew exactly where to roll without bumping into anything. Princess Twilight flew ahead to guide me and other than making one mistake near the end, I managed to reach the second switch, pressing it before the fire returned though nothing happened either.

Princess Twilight quickly flew upwards to see what might have happened before coming back down. " There was a small treasure chest located near the way out that was surrounded by flames but it looks like activating the switch has removed it. I'm not sure how long it will last so I suggest making your way back to the beginning of this section and fly over the chest using that Deku Flower."

" Anything else of interest up there?"

" I did see another chest in a small alcove."

" Do you know how I can reach it?"

" It's right at the start of the room so you can easily fly to it though you will need to make a leap of faith to catch the breeze."

" I'm not liking the sound of that."

" You could always skip the treasure chest if you want to."

I shook my head. " Considering how often Stray Fairies are hidden in them, I can't afford to ignore any chests. I know it makes me sound greedy but we could really do with some much needed help from Adagio and we need them all in order to get it." I began walking back towards where the ladder was yet something suddenly made my skin crawl. I shrugged it off thinking it was nothing but then it happened again and I began feeling nervous.

" What's wrong?"

" I feel like we're being watched."

" Really? I don't feel anything."

" Maybe I'm starting to lose it because of what we've been through so far."

Princess Twilight flopped down on my hat. " No need for you to feel that way, Sunset. If you remain positive and focus on what needs to be done, you can get through this and awaken the final Giant."

I smiled in response. I could always depend on Her Highness to give me an appropriate pep talk. True, she didn't have the same amount of gusto that Rainbow Dash had when she gave the entirety of Canterlot High a pep talk to psych us up for the Friendship Games, but I still more confident now than I was a moment ago. Upon reaching the later, I began to climb up--it took a while as Gorons weren't very good at climbing--and when I made it, I took out the Deku Mask, placed it on my face, squatted down a little, and watched as my body shimmered from Goron to Deku in addition to shrinking down in size.

As a Deku Scrub, I looked down at the pool of lava below and gulped knowing that one slip-up meant instant death thanks to Dekus having an extreme fire weakness. At least I knew I could rely on the air currents to guide me along so I looked forward at them only to discover they suddenly turned themselves off. I didn't see any switches nearby that could allow them to do that so what could have happened? They then turned back on making me sigh with relief knowing that it was most likely a glitch but then they turned off again and began flickering back and forth. No... This wasn't supposed to be this way. Now things had just gotten more difficult.

Chapter 61: The Assassin's Duel

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
June 19, 2017
Chapter 61: The Assassin's Duel.

No doubt that Midnight Sparkle was responsible for this change in the obstacle before me. With the air currents turning themselves on and off at different intervals, I needed to make my across without one of them suddenly turning off, leaving me to plunge to my death in the pool of lava below. It felt strange that she was resorting to such tactics rather than choosing to fight me herself. I mean, her manipulation of the rooms was annoying because they became much more difficult to overcome yet why even bother considering she supposedly had a new power? Was she afraid to fight me?

While Sunset Demon was prone to wanting to resort to violence--the darkness combined with my temper resulted in such bloodlust--Midnight Sparkle appeared to be taking a more civil approach that involved using one's mind rather than their body. It made sense to me since Twilight Sparkle transformed into her when she unintentionally absorbed the magic she had acquired from me and my friends and prior she was my equal in terms of having an incredible intellect. This desire for knowledge manifested itself into the demonic monster known as Midnight Sparkle yet there was something that always bothered me about how it all happened.

I supposed that my knowledge of magic wasn't as good as I always lead myself to believe. Had I known what was going to happen before it actually did, I would have taken the proper initiative and prevented Twilight Sparkle from opening up her pendant by confiscating it from her until further notice. She believed magic was nothing more than science and used her pendant to collect it without realizing what she was really doing yet she someone resonated with the magic allowing her to absorb it into her body and becoming Midnight Sparkle. It was that resonation that confused me more than anything else.

Twilight Sparkle absorbing our magic should have been impossible as she had no connection to Equestria, and yet, magic was unpredictable in that it did whatever it wanted without having to deal with any repercussions. Had our magic found a kindred spirit with her resulting in it wanting to let her realize her dreams? Was she seen as a vessel for the magic to control while simultaneously developing its own conscious? Or was she destined to gain magic because of being Princess Twilight's human counterpart? Whatever the reason, I felt responsible for dragging her into our lives against her own will.

Perhaps the greatest sin for me is the fact that she retained some of the magic that she had absorbed after I had helped change her back to normal. My assumption was that she would suffer no side-effects after acquiring near god-like proportions and could continue living her life as normal but the opposite happened. During a recent sleepover, her first one since ever, Twilight Sparkle caught us all off guard--herself included--when she suddenly performed a small spell that almost destroyed a cake that Pinkie Pie had baked. While everyone else was ecstatic over what happened, I knew that the worst case scenario was upon us.

A small spell like that could transform into a bigger spell followed by an even bigger spell resulting in an endless loop until something truly bad happened. I wasn't saying that she had become dangerous, but Twilight Sparkle was practically inexperienced when it came to magic, and given what happened, she could suffer some kind of relapse resulting in her becoming Midnight Sparkle again even though the latter currently exists. Unless she could control her new powers, she was more dangerous than any threat to our lives, but if there was one positive to come of this, it would be her now having friends who appreciated her.

Okay, there was a second positive, having magic period despite the negativity surrounding it. Still, I blamed myself for getting her involved all because I couldn't accept the fact that I wasn't ready to ascend to the status of alicorn thus becoming a princess. All of my friends having magic was the result of my actions yet they didn't regret any of it as it meant they had something special but deep down I knew it shouldn't have happened again because of being stubborn. Princess Celestia had been right that my lack of humility was my greatest weakness alongside my temper but it wasn't going to define me.

I had taken great lengths to ensure that my initial mistake didn't escalate into something horrible though it was getting harder to keep it under control. Equestrian magic was difficult to control already and being in the human world had caused it to take on a completely different form with rules not previously documented. My only hope was that it would be contained strictly to the town of Canterlot as it spreading elsewhere would be nothing short of a disaster. Of course, I knew better than to hope for something beyond my control as magic played by its own game and we were all pawns.

Princess Twilight then bopped me on the head to snap me out of it but I ignored her so then she bopped me even harder before I shook my head. " That's the most intense I've ever seen you whenever you have a daydream, Sunset."

" Sorry if I went into a deeper thought than usual." I said.

" What were you thinking about this time?"

" About Twilight Sparkle."

" Oh..."

I shook my head profusely. " Not in that sense but rather, I still feel guilty over what happened to her."

" You couldn't have known what was going to happen especially with all of that magic." Twilight said. " I was surprised when you and the others told me what happened during the Friendship Games regarding her. I never would have expected anyone to have been able to absorb so much magic without being familiar with it. You used magic a lot back in the day so it didn't cause you any problems when you did the same thing she did but Twilight Sparkle still continues to be a baffling character."

" Baffling?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " She was supposed to have lost all of her magic after changing back yet she still has some according to what you told me in your last letter."

" I wasn't expecting it to happen."

" Magic is unpredictable."

I groaned. " Don't remind me."

" You can figure out how best to help her so long as she doesn't have a relapse or anything." Twilight said. " Maybe you should take her someplace where magic is non-existent and relax for a while. That could be what she needs to calm her nerves until she can get adjusted to what she is capable of doing."

I nodded. " We are planning on going to a summer camp in a couple of weeks."

Princess Twilight clasped her hands together. " That sounds like an ideal place for her to relax and not have to worry about magic. While she may not like the idea of being able to fling about magic spells at her leisure within the confines magic has in the world you call home, she must eventually accept it as truth but at a gradual pace. Piling onto her all at once would only make things worse resulting in that relapse I mentioned a few moments ago. Now that I think about it, I think you all deserve some time away from magic. It's gotten to a point where it could cause mental anguish so relaxation is perfect."

" Want to come along?"

" Me?"

I nodded. " You could do with some relaxation as well."

Princess Twilight sighed. " I'd love to but my duties as a princess demand that I focus on them first and foremost. This is especially true since Starlight has only recently reformed and needs my constant attention so that she doesn't end up trying to destroy the fabric of reality. Of course, our plans mean absolutely nothing if we don't save this world from destruction and changing it back to the way it was before."

Her Highness was right in that we needed to stop the moon from crashing into Termina and to an extent, defeating Ganondorf and preventing his plans from succeeding. While we knew that part of his ambition involved making me his servant, there was clearly much more at play that we couldn't see. Did he desire to conquer Equestria? It was within the realm of possibility but it wasn't the first time someone tried to conquer it. Princess Twilight had said many--even me--tried their hand to take over through sheer force only to meet with utter defeat yet they were nothing compared to Ganondorf but only he knew that answer.

Turning my attention back to the appearing and disappearing air currents, I had no other choice but to make my way across as there was no other path. Again, I knew this was the doing of Midnight Sparkle but why go through such theatrics? If she was afraid to fight me, why bother sticking around in the Stone Tower? She could easily leave with her dignity intact and go back to wherever she came from yet something was keeping her here. As for Sunset Demon... I could tell that she wanted to finally rest in peace and no longer exist. She wanted to give me the pleasure of moving on with my life and not be burdened by the past.

Jumping into the Deku Flower, I waited for the air current to appear before jumping out and flying towards it but then I remembered the small alcove from before, and there was a small treasure chest tucked away along with rupees of different colours. Luckily, I could easily reach the alcove without needing the current so I tilted left, flew over to the alcove, dropped onto the rupees, and collected them before kicking the chest open revealing a Stray Fairy. This was my fifth one and the first that didn't require solving some kind of complicated puzzle so I was glad about that but I knew the others wouldn't nearly be this easy.

Now I had to wait for the air current as I needed to make a leap of faith. I wasn't liking the idea but my Deku body was the only form that was capable of flight--it made me wish that there was a form that would allow me to fly on a regular basis without the need of using something else to make it work. Watching closely to see when the current would pause for a moment, the instant it reappeared, I jumped and immediately my flowers appeared just when it looked like I was about to plummet into the lava. I got pushed upward and began flying forward hoping I could reach the next current before it disappeared.

Things got a bit tricky as I had to weave my way around corners and flying as a Deku wasn't exactly perfect. I mean, I could fly anywhere I wanted yet turning on a dime was next to impossible because of how the flowers operated. Reaching the next current, I dropped suddenly because my flight time had ended but regained my height when the air pushed me upward, my flowers appearing, but then I dropped again due to Midnight Sparkle's alterations. My heart went into a mad panic as I dropped towards the lava prompting me to close my eyes as a reaction out of fear only for my body to rise again.

The current pushed me back up and I breathed heavily to calm my nerves. " That was way too close!"

" Midnight Sparkle really wants to see you dead."

" If she doesn't kill me, a heart attack will do it instead."

" Don't joke about stuff like that."

" Sorry."

" Anyway, you need to make your way over to the final part of the room." Twilight said. " Once you're safely on the ledge, you can open the chest that was surrounded by the flames earlier and leave this room behind."

I shook my head. " Easier said than done."

" What do you mean?"

I looked up at my flowers. " These things aren't what you'd call aerodynamic. I can't simply turn just like that so I have to go slowly so I'm stuck here for a moment until I can get myself aimed in the right direction and then I can go on." As I said that, the air current disappeared again and I dropped like a rock landing on the fan itself. " GAHHHH!" My knees buckled but I couldn't pull myself up as the current returned, pushing me up instead, and leaving me with injured legs.

Princess Twilight was worried. " Sunset! Are you alright?"

I shook my head whilst glaring at her. " Of course I'm not alright!"

" Quickly! Fly over to the ledge."

Her Highness didn't need to tell me twice but I first had to turn around which was what I was trying to do before the air disappeared. I tilted my body to the left and would pause every few inches before continuing so that I wouldn't fly off in the wrong direction, and just when it looked like I had managed to re-orientate myself the air disappeared yet again and I fell landing on the fan again and my knees buckling even harder. My first instinct was to scream as my legs felt as though they had been crushed but no such luck as I was pushed up by the air and began moving forward thanks to my flowers.

Flying forward, I noticed a strange archway that looked suspicious as it was the only one of its kind in the room, but I ultimately chose to ignore it given I had to reach the other side of the room before my flight ended. Continuing on, my flowers began waning but there was another fan coming up that hopefully would keep me going yet there was no air. I again began panicking and dropped only to grab onto the edge of the fan at the last moment. With my legs being too injured as a result of them buckling previously, I had to find another means of climbing up.

I thought about pulling myself up at first but that required using my legs as leverage so that option was out. Then I thought about reaching out with my arms as though I were trying to leap and get up that way but if I were to let go, I would most likely plummet into the lava what with my legs acting as dead weight because of how injured they were. My arms began aching so I really needed to come up with something but my mind was drawing a blank. Again, I wished it was possible for me to fly naturally without having to use something to make it work, and it was at that moment an idea came into perspective.

My brain thought it was crazy but I didn't have much of a choice given my predicament. While it wasn't exactly flying eau natural, it was better than the alternate, a hot lava bath that would kill me instantly. Tilting my head downward as much as it could go, I began forming a bubble in my mouth, my aim being to create one big enough to push me upward onto the fan, but I had never made a bubble that big before so it boiled down to hoping it would work. If it didn't... I didn't want to think about that possibility. The bubble continued increasing in size though it was strenuous on my mouth and my body but I couldn't stop as this was my only chance of surviving.

Whether it was dumb luck, destiny, fate, or something else entirely, the bubble exceeded my own size and began lifting up and on to the fan before popping--I only dropped a short distance this time around so my knees didn't buckle a third time. I began breathing heavily as making a bubble that big had taken its toll but I couldn't relax as the air current returned at that moment, whisking me upward, and I flew over to the ledge where the door to the next room was before crashing into the wall. I slumped down to the ground where I immediately cried in pain because of what happened with my legs earlier.

Essentially, I threw a temper tantrum. " GAHHHH! IT HURTS SO MUCH!"

" Calm down, Sunset!"

I gritted my teeth and tried relaxing. " Too... painful."

" Can you reach into your pocket for one of those Red Potions?"

I shook my head profusely. " The pain in my legs is too much for me." I then screamed again. " I CAN'T FEEL MY LEGS!"

Princess Twilight then flew down to my shorts and began rummaging about in them. " Guess it's up to me to take care of you this time, Sunset." Her Highness was having some trouble trying to find the potions judging from how active she was searching. In fact, she was completely flummoxed by how difficult it was. " This is a lot harder than I thought. I didn't expect there would be so much stuff in your pockets. I don't know how you managed to get so much into them but I guess it's one of this world's rules that makes no sense."

" Behind my back is even worse."

After a while, Princess Twilight came out of my other pocket and shook her head. " Aside from some small items, I couldn't find anything in your pockets so I'm going to have to search behind your back." She gulped knowing that I was lying on my back thus making her task that more difficult. " It would be nice if you could turn over, Sunset, but that won't be happening so I'll just have to hope you don't throw another tantrum and accidentally squash me."

I glared at her. " You didn't have to say that you know."

" Just think of it as a reminder." Twilight said. She flew down and struggled to squeeze into the area between my back and the ground, but when she managed to get in there, she rummaged about, tickling me in the process as her wings brushed against my back numerous times. It actually felt relieving since it was counteracting the pain coming from my legs but I knew she wasn't doing it for fun since I was unable to move. Eventually, Her Highness popped back out and began pulling something that appeared to be stuck so I thought about lifting my back a little--whilst enduring some pain--but she refused and managed to pull out a Red Potion. " That was certainly interesting."

" What is it like back there?"

" Um... I'm sure you've seen what your back looks like."

" I meant with regards to finding items."

" Oh..."

" Well?"

" It was definitely weird as I couldn't see anything other than your back." Twilight answered. " But then, the items began appearing all around me like they were floating in place waiting for someone to pick them up and take them out into the world. Judging from how many items there were in addition to how long it took, you definitely picked up a lot of interesting things throughout the course of this journey. I personally think you could do with some organizing as it was hard to find what you needed."

I began laughing. " And somehow, I pull out what I need when I need it."

" It just doesn't make sense."

" Welcome to my world."

Princess Twilight then joined in on the laughter before the pain in my legs came back resulting in me screaming again. " I should take care of those wounds before you end up screaming my head off. I just need a few moments to uncork this thing and then bottoms up!" She grabbed the cork on the bottle and began pulling, obviously struggling though I thought it was cute that she was willing to go so far for me. She eventually succeeded before lifting the bottle up, floated over to my mouth, tipped the bottle upside down, and shook it a few times to get the contents out. " This should only take a few moments for the healing to take effect."

I could already feel the properties of the Red Potion working their magic so when I looked down at my legs, I could see the wounds slowly heal along with every other wound I had sustained since I first entered this temple. After a while, I got back onto my feet and checked my body to make sure everything was working properly. They were so I breathed a sigh of relief knowing that bringing along potions had proven to be most beneficial. The only setback was that now I had only two potions left--the Green Potion could only restore magic--to use throughout the reminder of the Stone Tower and I knew one would be used when I took on the demons.

Perhaps this was an indication that I should leave the temple before finishing it to acquire some more potions and come back once I had them. I wasn't short on rupees as I collected several blue and red ones earlier in the room and I was bound to get more in the future as many treasure chests contained rupees. There was nothing wrong with retreating when the situation had gotten too intense. It was more along the lines of being strategic instead of going in blind and getting myself killed because of not having the proper items that would ensure my overall success.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Deku Mask, and flipped back my hair before looking down at my legs again. The Red Potion had definitely done wonders so it was a wise purchase but perhaps the quality varied from store to store? I mean, other stores across Termina sold Red Potions--I never went inside any of them so I assumed they did--but probably sold them at a higher price than what I paid. Perhaps it was because of how remote it was? I wished I had now visited those stores as I could have avoided giving myself a tremendous headache because of going about without any healing items.

In any case, I kicked open the chest that had been surrounded by flames and another Stray Fairy appeared giving me a total of six. Princess Twilight made sure to mark its location along with the other on the map using her fairy magic before I walked up to the door. Reaching out for it, I suddenly pulled my hand back upon sensing a powerful darkness coming from the other side, and it made me feel really uneasy. Were the two demons waiting for us in the next room? If so, there was no point in delaying things any longer. I had to keep going to awaken the final Giant who was waiting for me.

Opening the door and entering the next room, it immediately locked with iron bars so there was no point in trying to escape. It was a fairly large room with another locked door to my left--it was also locked with iron bars--but aside from that, there didn't seem to be much else, but then I looked up out of curiosity and noticed something breathtaking. There was a massive hole in the ceiling and it looked like something just as massive could fit right through it. The night sky was pleasant to look at reminding me that the temple was somehow affected by the time of day but it didn't shake the premonition I was feeling.

" Something bad is going to happen."

" What makes you say that?"

" Just standing here makes me nervous."

" Maybe you should head to the center of the room." Twilight said. " If something is going to happen, we might as well go and trigger it. No sense in just waiting here when it's obvious that it won't come to us."

I nodded. " Yeah... I guess you're right." I began walking forward and looked around at my surroundings. " It feels pretty quiet in here doesn't it?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " As though it were the calm before the storm."

" I wonder who we will end up facing in here?"

Princess Twilight then pointed her finger at something ahead of us. " I think that will answer your question, Sunset."

Looking in the direction Her Highness was pointing at, I came to a sudden stop, my body turned cold, and I gulped heavily before drawing my sword and shield. Standing in front of us was Midnight Sparkle and she had a cruel smile across her face. I now had a personal grudge with her because of what she did in the previous room but I knew not to allow my anger to cloud my judgment especially when we were in the presence of a powerful opponent. That's when I noticed Sunset Demon wasn't with her. Despite hearing about their grievances towards one another, they were always together so where could she have gotten off to?

Midnight Sparkle giggled. " I hope you enjoyed my little twist, Sunset."

I glared at her. " You are one sick, twisted individual."

" That's not very nice to say to someone who is on the verge of success."

" What convinced you to go and prevent me from using the air currents?"

Midnight Sparkle rubbed the bridge of her nose. " Okay, so it wasn't my best idea. I knew you were going to get through my little twist but I didn't think you would get injured just by falling down." She then noticed I was completely healed and turned her face away from me. " Using potions now are we? Can't say I blame you for doing that. I'd have done the exact same thing if it meant I would survive to see the next sunrise. Still, I wanted you to make it here because if you were to have died back there, my friend would have been denied her chance at getting to fight you again." She turned back and looked down at Princess Twilight. " Any words from the princess?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " This is between you and Sunset."

" Really?" Midnight Sparkle asked, clearly confused by that statement. " I thought you would be furious with me for what I tried to do to Sunset. I was expecting you to come at me in a blind fit of rage all because I nearly killed one of your best friends."

" Oh I'm furious, but not to the point where I would do that."

" Well that put a damper on things."

" I'm not the Twilight Sparkle that you've come to know." Twilight said. " We may be look the same but we're independent from one another. You have no quarrels with me while I have none with you. Granted, it doesn't mean I'm ignoring what you've been doing to my friends since we all came into this world as that is unforgiveable, but I honesty don't have any claim towards seeing justice get served. Sunset and Twilight Sparkle have a much stronger claim than that so I'll let them deal with you as necessary."

Midnight Sparkle looked saddened. " You're serious?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " If I had been there at the Friendship Games to witness your actions, I honestly would have had Sunset cut you down by now, but I wasn't so I don't have much to say or do about what's going to happen. Besides, I'm not as unhinged as Sunset tends to be and that's one of her greatest strengths. I'll help her take you down and thwart your plans but that's really all I can do given the circumstances."

" I really wasn't expecting that."

" Sorry to douse your expectations."

" And here I was hoping that the Princess of Friendship would take some pleasure in seeing a monster suffer given she has bested many of them." Midnight Sparkle said. " Guess I was wrong about you, but not to worry as you'll soon change your tune. Right now, you don't have any animosity towards me and I'm okay with that. Once I kill Sunset before your very eyes, I'll kill all of your friends and Twilight Sparkle leaving no one to stand in my way with the sole exception of Your Highness. I intend on killing you as well and then all of the Equestrian Magic will be mine making me the most powerful scholar who exists."

I coughed. " Still harping on about that?"

" The magic will be mine to understand!"

" At least you have no desire to conquer anything."

" Now why would I do something like that?" Midnight Sparkle asked. " To be fair, I could easily conquer Equestria as I have the knowledge and will soon possess the magic to go through with it, but I have more important things than to become nothing more than a warmonger." She lowered her head and began mumbling under her breath but I knew she was planning something. " Funny thing about conquering? I recall that you yourself once tried doing that, Sunset, and it failed in spectacular fashion. I wonder if she would have better luck once her desire finally gets fulfilled."

Snapping her fingers, a shadowy figure emerged from the ground right next to her, and formed itself into Sunset Demon. The lack of expression in her eyes was all I needed to know to see that she was under some kind of mind control concocted by Midnight Sparkle. I knew the two had their issues but I wasn't expecting something like this to happen. In fact, I was expecting one of them to destroy the other leaving me with only having to deal with one demon as opposed to both. She also gave off a powerful aura, one she didn't have before, further confirming that Midnight Sparkle had done something to her.

I thought about backing away only for Sunset Demon to suddenly disappear only to reappear behind me before she swung her taloned hand at me. I wasn't fast enough to react to her and her claws dug deep into my back before she disappeared again. Midnight Sparkle laughed as I tried to see where Sunset Demon had gone only for her to attack me a second time by raking my legs causing me to topple over and land on my butt. She returned to where she had started initially while I got back onto my feet but it was a struggle as my legs had only recently recovered from the wounds they sustained earlier.

" What have you done to her?"

Midnight Sparkle giggled. " I've re-awoken her true demonic self."

" She didn't want that!"

" No, but I did."

" How could you do that to your friend?"

" Friend? Ha!" Midnight Sparkle answered. " She and I could never be friends! When I revived her from the dead after reviving myself, I intended on using her to further my own agenda in hopes that I could acquire the Equestrian Magic that I craved more than anything else. But, she was smarter and intended on doing the same thing to me so she could become the real you, but something changed that still makes me want to throw up. She saw the death and destruction of this ancient kingdom and realized what she had done was morally wrong and insisted on dying for her sins."

" That's what she said to me but in a different manner."

" When I discovered what had happened, I couldn't sit by and watch our desires come crashing down around us."

" So you used that new power to take control of her mind?"

Midnight Sparkle shrugged. " No, that wasn't actually my intention but rather it was my only option. Despite how she had mistreated me all because I did things differently and kept some things from her, I believed we could achieve our respective goals by ending the lives of those who could stand in our way. But she chose to accept her fate and wanted to die so that you could move on with your life, and that was when I had to draw the line with her by taking matters into my own hands."

" I didn't think you could sink so low and now I see that you have."

" We've come too far to be denied now!"

I sighed. " Just listen to yourself, Midnight Sparkle. You sound exactly like Sunset Demon did when she was desperate to become the real me. She kept harping on about doing whatever it took even if it mean having to give up everything to achieve it. Do you know where it got her?" Midnight Sparkle just stood there in silence indicating that she knew what the fate of the she-demon was. " Your lack of an answer is evidence enough for me so why even bother going through with this? Why not follow her example and allow yourself to move on so that Twilight Sparkle can move on as well."

Midnight Sparkle obviously didn't take my words well and her body began glowing. " Who gave you the right to say what we demons can and can't do? We have every right to do whatever we want just as much as you and Princess Twilight do. Both of us have needs that will be fulfilled even if one of us isn't feeling like herself. But, that has now changed thanks to my tapping into the dark power of this temple."

Again, I sighed before putting my sword and shield away. " Then you've learned absolutely nothing!"

" What are you doing?"

" I'm going to wait here for the Garo Master to show up."

" What!?"

" I suspect that I was supposed to fight him in this room instead of you two." I said. " Why don't you just leave, Midnight Sparkle? It's clear to me that you'll never understand what it truly means to have humility, something I had to learn the hard way, and now Sunset Demon has learned the same thing. Besides, I have a feeling a certain someone doesn't want you to kill me because of already claiming that distinction."

Midnight Sparkle looked like she was about to explode but refrained from losing her temper. " That dead assassin isn't going to rob us of what we rightly deserve!" She clenched her hand into a fist. " I think it's time we got things started as we've stalled long enough to warrant his eventual appearance. I was smart to have distracted him by sending him on a wild goose chase but he won't remained fooled for very long. Sunset Demon? I've kept you waiting all this time so now you can finally do what you were meant to do. Have fun killing your other self and taking over her life as you desire."

" What about you?"

" What about me?"

" You're not going to fight?"

Midnight Sparkle shook her head. " Why should I get my hands dirty when clearly Sunset Demon wants a piece of you? Besides, who am I to deny her what she wants even if she needed to be pushed a little in the right direction to give her the motivation. You two can have all the fun while I'll just stand back and watch the festivities. I won't be watching for very long as I must continue testing out my new power. If my little inspiration to Sunset Demon isn't enough to kill you, Sunset, then I'll need to come up with another plan."

Before I could respond to her, Sunset Demon disappeared only to reappear next to me and kicked me in the stomach causing me to crash against the wall. I struggled to get back onto my feet when she dashed forward and kicked me in the head. The hit knocked me into the wall leaving behind a indentation but before I could get up, she grabbed me by the hair, spun me around several times, and tossed me across the room where I landed on my butt. No doubt she was out for blood given how ruthless she was acting, yet I couldn't will myself to fight against her as I couldn't accept her becoming an obedient slave.

Getting up again, I drew my sword and shield and attempted to strike Sunset Demon, but she proved to be too fast and quickly disarmed me before tossing my equipment to the other side of the room. Her eyes still possessed that expressionless gaze but was now mixed with a desire for bloodlust, a desire to beat me within an inch of my life before ending it, a desire to be completely unstrained. I began running across to where my equipment was only for the she-demon to cut me off and quickly deliver several punches followed by slashing me in the stomach using those taloned hands of hers.

Once she did this, she grabbed me by the hair again, slammed me into the ground, lifted me up with both arms, and tossed me aside like I were a heavy object. Landing on my back as a result of her toss, I rolled over to my equipment and managed to pick them up before Sunset Demon came over where I swung my sword only for her to catch it with her hand. I could see the twisted smile that now warped itself across her face. She had completely embraced her inner monster because of Midnight Sparkle and no doubt was completely unaware of what she was doing. If this kept up, I would be dead within a matter of minutes... after using up my remaining Red Potions.

Princess Twilight finally spoke up. " What are you doing?"

" Trying to survive." I answered.

" I don't think this is a battle where you have to last as long as possible."

I was about to say something when Sunset Demon finally acted by pushing my sword back at me causing me to drop it on the ground. I quickly reached down to pick it up only for her to kick me in the head followed by several more kicks to my head leaving me in a dazed state before landing on my butt again. " Okay... You've now convinced me that trying to survive isn't working so what do you suggest I do?"

" You have to fight back."

I was hesitant towards doing that but I knew there was no other choice. " Alright... I'll fight her even though I don't want to but perhaps this will give her the final release she's been wanting for some time now." Sunset Demon then lunged at me but I managed to hold up my shield and she began slashing it with her claws but it would prove pointless as it was a much stronger shield than what I had used before. " When I last fought against her, I was able to pony up all the way to Daydream Shimmer while she had her own form to counter against mine. I don't have access to that form in this world so how can I prevail?"

" You won't be able to use your transformation masks as I doubt she will give you a chance."

I then snapped my fingers. " That's it!" Unfortunately, I shouldn't have done that as Sunset Demon knocked aside my shield before slashing me in the chest several times before kicking it aside using what looked to be a moonsault kick. I went sailing across the room, landing on my stomach, slid along a little until I stopped, and slowly got back onto my feet again. " That will teach me for doing something so stupid but anyway, you gave me a brilliant idea, Twilight."

" I did?"

I nodded. " I can use my other masks to give me an edge."

" Yes." Twilight said. " Unless Midnight Sparkle somehow prevents you from using them, you can put on one of the more useful masks. I suggest the Bunny Hood as it will increase your speed enabling you to keep up with her. You could also try the Blast Mask but that would involve perfect timing though you'd have to wait several minutes each time before it can be used again."

" What about the Stone Mask?"

" I think she would be able to still see you if you wore it."

That didn't give me many options. Of the masks I had in my possession, the Bunny Hood was the only one that had a practical use in battle. The rest of them were simply novelties to be used whenever the situation demanded it. Technically, the Stone Mask was useful as it allowed me to avoid battles but then it didn't work against everything and I wouldn't gain any experience were I to avoid encounters. As stated by Her Highness, it wouldn't help me against Sunset Demon as she was someone who most likely could see me as she wasn't a mere monster in that sense.

Reaching behind my back, I took out the Bunny Hood and put it on just as Sunset Demon was about to strike me again. I managed to get away just as she pounded her fist into the ground and when she pulled it out, she was surprised at my sudden speed increase. I just had to remember that I was now much faster than before and that meant I could accidentally get myself caught were I to become careless. Sunset Demon lunged at me and I stepped aside as she sailed past and crashed into the ground. Of course, I couldn't continue relying on this kind of tactic as the she-demon would eventually catch on and adapt accordingly.

Midnight Sparkle had turned her attention towards doing her own thing as I fought against Sunset Demon but quickly looked behind her to see that I was wearing a mask prompting her to make a comment. " Normally, I would have prevented you from wearing one of those masks just to make it that much harder. But, I'll let it slide since Sunset Demon does deserve what you'll eventually do to her after the way she treated me."

I thought about taking the Bunny Hood off but I chose not to. " You really are a monster aren't you?"

" Don't blame me!" Midnight Sparkle answered. " Sunset Demon forced me to do things I didn't want to and that includes acting like a monster. I consider myself to be better than that and prefer to use my intellect to solve problems rather than using brute strength like other people I know."

" Such conceit."

" You might want to stop criticizing me and focus on Sunset Demon."

I turned around just as the she-demon caught me off guard. " GAHHHH!" Her strike caused me to start bleeding on my side and Midnight Sparkle laughed before she resumed testing out her powers by performing some spells. Sunset Demon looked at the wound she had inflicted and I could hear her giggle slightly, her bloodlust was growing, and I wasn't doing her or myself any favours. I needed to take the battle to an offensive level and that meant fighting back even when my heart wasn't up for it. " I don't want to do this but you've given me no choice, Sunset Demon."

Midnight Sparkle waved her hand. " Just do it already!"

" I'll deal with you eventually."

" If you say so."

I turned to Princess Twilight. " Her arrogance makes me sick."

" I have a feeling that she is slowly losing her mind as a result of the power she has acquired." Twilight said. " If you think about it, she is acting in the same manner that you yourself acted when you put on my crown at the time. I know you don't like to be reminded of it but you have to admit that the coincidence is appropriate."

I nodded. " Midnight Sparkle isn't the same as I remember her from the Friendship Games. She was arrogant of course, but she only wanted to acquire knowledge even if it meant the destruction of an entire world. She was violent in her mannerisms but she was never like this until now. Has the Stone Tower Temple's dark power corrupted her mind? It feels like that's what happened but I can't be certain about it."

" Whatever the case, she must be stopped before she can succeed and that means defeating Sunset Demon."

The she-demon must have heard Princess Twilight as she immediately tackled me to the ground--I didn't drop my sword and shield this time--and we rolled along until I took the initiative and kicked her away where she landed on her feet. Her expression became one of intrigue as though she had been waiting for me to do something to her other than continue to play defensively and all I could do was shake my head. I knew it wasn't her fault she was acting like her old self but Sunset Demon could have easily resisted Midnight Sparkle unless the latter was too strong or the former desired to fight me again. Getting back up, I prepared myself for the next assault.

As she swung her taloned hands at me, I used my shield to deflect her blows before going on the offensive, striking her in the chest repeatedly until she jumped over me in a bit to attack me from behind. I quickly turned around and repelled her assault with my shield though my side started giving me pain because of the wound I got from her earlier. I needed to ignore it as much as possible while focusing on maintaining my attack. It was strange how I was now turning things around when before she had been wiping the floor with me and all because I began taking this situation seriously.

It was also strange how she had been fighting this entire time. Despite not having access to her full powers, Sunset Demon was still pretty strong, yet I felt like she was holding back as though she didn't want to kill me. Was this her way of getting me to put her out of her misery? Or did she want me to continue fighting until I could find a way to free her? I really wanted the first option to happen as she deserved to go out on her own terms but I was willing to do what was necessary now. My mind was now clear and I knew the she-demon wanted to move on and allow me the same opportunity.

We resumed clashing with each other, my sword versus her claws, and now we were evenly matched despite not using our full power. The Bunny Hood had proven to be a real difference maker as its speed increasing ability enabled me to keep up with her but I wished it could have given me better protection. The Mirror Shield was very good in that regard but it couldn't protect me from everything such as when I got thrown into the wall for example. Sunset Demon then suddenly got the upper hand by raking me in the face--at least she didn't hit my eyes as that would have been terrible--resulting in me being unable to see.

She took advantage by repeatedly attacking my face until I dropped my equipment, but then she suddenly jumped back and attempted to breathe fire from her mouth only for nothing to happen, and began stomping the ground in frustration. I regained my vision and picked up my sword and shield before looking on at the she-demon as she continued in vain to breathe fire--it was pitiful seeing her do that--and taking out her anger on the ground. She then tried firing flames from her hands by thrusting out her hands only to fail at doing that and she repeated the attempt only to become even more annoyed.

I wanted to attack her in response to her failure but I just couldn't bring myself to doing it. Sunset Demon took pride in her power as it was pretty much the only thing she had left, but to see her being unable to use it brought a tear to my eye. She and I were a lot more alike than either of us were willing to admit. When Princess Twilight and our friends defeated me during the Fall Formal last year, I tried using my magic despite knowing it had been taken away from me, yet I kept on trying, venting out my anger in solitude as no one wanted to associate with me, until I finally admitted it could never come back.

Losing my magic made me feel less than nothing but I accepted my punishment as I deserved it after all the trouble I caused. Sunset Demon was going through a similar experience though she appeared to be unable to accept having lost what made her the she-demon in the first place. She looked at me and began cursing, saying it was my fault that she had been reduced to such a weakened state, and I shook my head saying she had no one to blame for herself. That pushed her over the edge resulting in raising my shield to protect myself as she began attacking erratically.

Midnight Sparkle looked behind her head and chuckled. " Wow... Not even I managed to make her that mad. I'm glad I didn't otherwise she would have killed me a lot sooner and our desires would have been lost to us. You definitely know what buttons to push, Sunset, and I say it as a good thing since she really needed to vent off that pent-up rage. Well... I won't get involved so you two can continue having fun tearing each other apart."

" Being cowardly now, are we?" I asked.

" Nope!" Midnight Sparkle answered shaking her head. " I'm just being smart about it that's all."

Sunset Demon tackled me to the ground again but I managed to strike her in the shoulder causing her to reel back in pain but then she responded viciously by raking my face again followed by kicking my stomach so hard, I went crashing into the wall before slumping down to the ground. As I remained dazed from the sudden impact my back had received, she walked over, picked me up by the neck, and began laughing before crying. For the first time ever, Sunset Demon was actually crying. I could see it from her eyes that her tears were sincere in nature and that was when I knew this battle had gone on long enough.

" Help... help me..." Sunset Demon said.

" How can I do that?" I asked.

" You must... kill me..."

I gasped. " I don't think I can do that."

Sunset Demon growled. " You must kill me now!"

" My heart doesn't have what it takes."

Now I wished I hadn't said that as Sunset Demon clearly took it the wrong way and slammed me into the wall yet again. I slumped to the ground where she began kicking me repeatedly whilst saying she thought I could help her but in truth I was just too hesitant to be of any use. While her words did hurt my feelings, she was correct in that I couldn't take her life despite clearly seeing her struggle, but it wasn't as simple as she made it. I wasn't a bloodthirsty person who could kill anyone evil just like that. While I did destroy monsters, I never took pleasure in doing it and often professed not wanting to resort to violence.

As she continued kicking me, the she-demon grabbed me by the neck and lifted me up again. " You must kill me, Sunset. I know you don't like the idea but you must end my suffering now before it can get even worse."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I know it goes against everything you stand for, Sunset, but you need to give her the release she wants."

" I... I just can't do it."

Sunse Demon growled. " If you don't then you will die!"

" I'm sorry but I just can't take someone else's life without a proper reason."

Sunset Demon then smiled all of a sudden. " And that is what makes you the kind of person you are." Sure, you still possess a temper that can get the better of you, but you're not a heartless monster who goes around killing just because you love it." She then released her grip around my neck and I dropped to the ground. " For you, killing monsters has become a reluctant necessity, yet you do it knowing it must be done. That's why I made special arrangements before all of this started."

I looked confused. " What do you mean by that?"

" I had a feeling Midnight Sparkle would do this to me so I made a contract with someone."

I gasped. " You did what!?"

Sunset Demon laughed. " I wanted you to kill me, Sunset, so that we could both finally move on, but I knew you were going to hesitate and try to prolong this as much as possible until you could find another solution. That's why I talked to the one person who would kill me without hesitation, the one who kills for a living. I needed to be weakened enough for him to strike the fatal blow and kill me but I wanted to give you a chance first. He agreed and has been waiting all this time and I hoped you would be the one, Sunset, but I knew you wouldn't have what it took to do the job."

" What did you expect from me?"

" I expected this outcome."

Midnight Sparkle heard all of the chatter and immediately turned around. " What the!? Since when did you suddenly regain your senses? The enchantment I placed upon you was strong enough that most would never be able to break free of it."

Sunset Demon laughed. " Then I guess that makes me one of the few who could. I actually broke free about a couple of minutes ago when Sunset admitted that she couldn't kill me because of her convictions but I know you intend on casting an even stronger enchantment."

" Then you guessed right."

" After all this time together, Midnight Sparkle... I figured you out completely."

" You don't know anything about me."

Sunset Demon shook her head. " Keep telling yourself that but it's true. I knew what you were going to do once we entered this temple. Heck, I could see it coming a mile away but instead of resisting you, I chose to allow you to control my actions. I wanted you to have the satisfaction of things going your way until it all comes crashing down later. Sunset will kill you in the end but it's a shame that I won't be around to see it with my own eyes."

" You said she hesitates so that means she won't kill me."

" She will only take a life if it's within reason and your existence is reason enough for her to do it."

Midnight Sparkle began glowing again. " Then perhaps I will enchant you again. Once you've done that, I'll finish you off myself, or better yet, have you go somewhere and die at the hands of a very powerful creature. Yes, that sounds much more pleasant than my other option. A shame you became so soft, Sunset Demon. I thought you were a ruthless demon but in truth you were weak-minded and unworthy of fulfilling your desire. Oh well. You can't win them all as they say."

Sunset Demon sighed happily. " In my case, I've already won."

She then felt a powerful influence come over her and she resumed kicking me while I was down, her actions now beyond her control as Midnight Sparkle began laughing before instructing her to administer a killing blow. She grabbed me by the neck and lifted me up before punching my stomach repeatedly followed by a powerful punch that released me from her grip and sent me flying where I landed on the ground. I struggled to get back onto my feet but Sunset Demon was too fast and soon she was standing over me. I struggled to get out from under her but she was too strong and looked prepared to kill me.

She licked her lips and lunged at my head though I managed to tilt it in time to avoid the blow so then she planted her foot on my neck while her other foot was on my stomach to keep me from doing anything. Sunset Demon began pushing her foot down on my neck in hopes of crushing it and I could feel tremendous pain causing me to black out for a moment but then her foot suddenly stopped applying pressure and relaxed--the same thing with her other foot. Opening my eyes, I could see Sunset Demon standing there dazed and I wondered what was wrong with her and that was when I noticed the flaming blade that had pierced through her body where her heart was.

A sinister laughter then echoed throughout the room causing Midnight Sparkle to start quivering and then Princess Twilight told me to look up at the hole in the ceiling to which I did and standing up there was the Garo Master himself. I should have known that he was the one Sunset Demon mentioned making a contract with. He jumped down from on high and landed on the ground before snapping his finger and the blade in Sunset Demon removed itself from body and returned to him where he produced a second flaming sword. He looked at me for a brief moment but quickly turned towards Midnight Sparkle.

" The contract has been fulfilled." The Garo Master said.

" What did you do?" Midnight Sparkle asked.

" The chosen one was unable to complete the job so it fell onto me to carry it out."

" You weren't kidding when you said you could kill us."

The Garo Master laughed. " And now you understand the frailty that you possess, demon. Your companion offered me the chance to kill her if the chosen one hesitated and I gladly took on her request as it meant adding another kill to my total. She will die shortly as the wound I inflicted was fatal but perhaps you would be wise to flee with the mental image of your fellow demon dying in a pool of her own blood haunting your every moment."

" And if I don't?"

" You're next!"

Midnight Sparkle gulped. " I know better than to fight against the likes of you, assassin."

" Then leave this place while you still possess your life."

" And give up this power?" Midnight Sparkle asked. " Never!" She laughed. " I have every intention of fulfilling my desire to get all of the Equestrian Magic but now it will be so much easier without having to put up with Sunset Demon constantly threatening me and not wanting to act like a proper demon. I actually owe you for killing her, assassin, as I actually was going to go through with it. I will leave but I'll just be going to a different part of this temple so that I can further expand my powers until I'm ready. Sunset... If you somehow survive against this assassin, I shall be waiting for you to come and find me. I know you won't rest until you see me dead."

Midnight Sparkle then disappeared into the wall leaving me to mourn over what had happened to Sunset Demon, but before I could say something, the Garo Master aimed one of his swords at me before slightly nodding his head. " I shall give you the time you need to say goodbye, chosen one. Once the fallen one has faded away, you and I shall do battle as was intended until only one of us remains."

I looked at the Garo Master with anger on my face. " How could you make me fight you after what has just happened."

" You have no choice."

" Of course I do!"

The Garo Master laughed. " No, you do not. The iron bars blocking the doors was by my hand and they will not open unless you can best me in battle. The treasure of the temple shall become yours to claim if you can defeat me. Unless you can best me, this temple will be your tomb for eternity. Now, say goodbye to the fallen one and then prepare yourself to face me, the leader of the Garo."

Despite what had happened to Sunset Demon, the Garo Master was unfortunately correct in that there was no way out of this room without going through him. If the treasure was indeed the Light Arrows, I definitely needed them and that meant defeating him. While he was allowing me to say my final farewells to Sunset Demon, I doubted he would allow me to heal my wounds that I had sustained against the she-demon so that gave him an advantage almost immediately and before we had even started. He had every intention of killing me as he lacked any morals but it made him more dangerous.

Sunset Demon gasped, grabbed my tunic, and pulled me down towards her face. " Ha... Guess this is really the end for me. After all of our struggles, this is how it will end, you living on as you want and me becoming nothing but a memory you'll end up forgetting when other things enter your life."

" Don't say that."

" I wanted to become you because I believed you were better off as a monster."

" My life has become better now."

Sunset Demon nodded. " I know that now thanks to being exposed to this ancient kingdom. Seeing so many undead skulking about made me realize that they are remnants of the past that must remain as such so that the people of today don't end up falling into the same trap that claimed them. I am a remnant as well, your past come to life, yet my time has come and gone, and you were more deserving of life than me. You... you are the one... Sunset Shimmer."

" What happens now?"

" I die, obviously."

I began to cry. " I really wish it didn't have to be this way."

" You have to live on with your life."

" I know you gave me nothing but trouble, but I also think you gave me the confidence to do what was right."

Sunset Demon coughed. " Heh... Then it looks like it wasn't a total waste after all. If it pleases you... I'm sorry for everything that I did to you. I was consumed by jealousy and vengeance over how you seemed to cast me aside... but you were simply moving on and trying to fix the mistakes you made." She let go of my tunic and began coughing even more which meant she was fading fast. " I'm not much of saying goodbye since I always kept saying I wouldn't die until I succeeded in becoming you but I'll make this an exception. You don't need to worry about me coming back. I'm done for good and will fade away into the darkness."

" A shame you can't be reformed."

" There can only be one... Sunset Shimmer... and that's... that's you."

" I'll never forget you."

" You... you can teach others not... not to become a monster." Sunset Demon said as she struggled to talk. " I know that... you... you've already done this but... I... I feel it prudent of me... to... to... to give you a reminder about it. Never... for... for... forget who you are. Before I go... I have something to... to say to Princess Twilight."

" What is it?" Twilight asked.

" Your crown... It never looked good on me did it?"

Princess Twilight smiled. " It was made for my head."

Sunset Demon coughed even more. " No wonder it didn't feel right... heh... heh... heh..." She began coughing up blood signalling that her end had come. It was truly a morbid thing to witness but I knew I had to remain strong otherwise the she-demon would never let me hear the end of it in death. " My time... It's finally over. I... I can finally rest in an eternal sleep and... and... and never be a burden upon you again."

" You reformed in the end." Twilight said. " Not in the manner Sunset spoke of but you did nonetheless."

" Coming from you... I'll take that as a compliment."

" You will be missed."

Sunset Demon coughed. " Probably... But... listen... to... to me... carefully. Don't you... dare... d... d... die, Sunset! If you do, I'll... I'll... I'll haunt you forever! Don't... view that as intimidation or a... a threat but a... a... promise. Oh, and Garo Master... don't underestimate Sunset by any means." She then began to close her eyes and her body started to fade away into the breeze as death began taking her. " Midnight Sparkle... I... I... I will see you on the... other side. I... don't know how long... it will take... but... but... but I will see you there. Ha... Now I finally understand... what it means... to... to... to die with... with... with honour........................"

Her body then completely disappeared into the wind leaving nothing behind. For a moment, I simply stood there in complete silence, my head lowered, and tears trickling down my face as I mourned her passing. Sunset Demon had a troubled life because of actions I had committed but she deserved much better than what she got. Had she not been a demon, she could have become something so much more, but instead she was handed a bad hand by fate. And yet, this was what she wanted. She wanted to go out on her own terms and wouldn't allow anyone else to say otherwise. By choosing to move on, I could now do the same thing, her final request.

The sound of a sword being thrust in my direct caught my attention and I looked to see that the Garo Master had raised it against me. " You have had time to mourn the fallen one so now you must do battle with me, chosen one."

" I understand." I said.

" The demon wanted to die and I delivered her release."

" And for that I thank you."

The Garo Master laughed. " What I did was what I have always done, kill someone. She contracted me to kill her because she knew you could not and so I have fulfilled her contract by ending her existence. She did not pay with rupees as those are useless to one who is already dead but instead it was the desire to kill a demon that compelled to accept."

" So now you intend on killing me?"

" For a different reason."

" And that would be?"

" You are the chosen one, she who is destined to bring light back to this desolate kingdom." The Garo Master answered. " You have been tasked to free the spirits of the dead from their torment so that they can return to their eternal slumber. If you cannot defeat me, you will never save this kingdom and this world from destruction. Now, show me that you are indeed the chosen one."

The Garo Master then jumped into the air and began dancing about much like the regular Garo did but I knew not to underestimate him. He was their leader after all and that meant he knew skills they didn't. With my already battered body, I had to take extra precautions as he could kill me in a few hits yet the same wasn't true the other way around. With my sword at its weakest level, it would take a lot of hits before the Garo Master would finally go down--another reminder that it needed upgrading. The Garo Master then dove at me and I avoided it by stepping to the side only for him to disappear completely.

I began looking around to see where he was only for him to appear above me and drop down before slicing me across the back using both of his flaming swords. I was knocked forward, landing on my stomach, but rolled when he dove again and he continued moving along until he stopped. He then turned around and took to the sky again before dancing about while I got back up onto my feet. I then raised my shield just as the Garo Master's flaming swords struck but unlike Sunset Demon, he kept on going before he stopped and began looking around as though he didn't know where I was.

Moving quickly, I attacked him from behind only for him to spin around and knock me to the ground where I rolled away to the corner of the room to avoid any further attacks. I rolled into the wall and got back up and saw that the Garo Master was waiting for me to make a move. " What do you suppose he's doing by waiting over there?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I don't know but you need to be careful, Sunset. Because you didn't get to recover from your battle with Sunset Demon, you're likely to exhaust yourself too quickly allowing him to take advantage and eventually kill you. I suggest keeping on the Bunny Hood as you'll need the speed increase to keep up with him and stave off the exhaustion that grips your body."

" What else do you know about him?"

" The Garo Master fights in a similar manner to that of the other Garo so you can easily predict when he's going to attack." Twilight answered. " That's where the easy part ends however as he is much stronger than they are. His swords are also much longer allowing him to attack you from a greater distance and even possesses some abilities they don't such as his ability to appear from above."

" I'm not going to enjoy this."

" Just don't allow Sunset Demon's death to affect you."

" I don't intend to."

" Good as you can get very emotional when something happens."

Her Highness had every right to be worried about my mental state after seeing Sunset Demon die. Granted, it wasn't the first time I saw it happen yet this was much more unbearable than before as she was in the mindset of becoming the real me. Her death this time was more symbolic, an end of a legacy that was forged by my hands, and had now been put to rest so that both of us could move on. Midnight Sparkle used her as a puppet to make me kill her while wanting to kill me yet she proved herself to be a true monster who deserved no sympathy. Sunset Demon proved herself to be human and rejected darkness in favour of the light.

Midnight Sparkle needed to be defeated as she had gone too far in her ambition of acquiring all of the Equestrian Magic but I first needed to overcome the Garo Master, a spirit who was more feared than either of the demons. He instilled fear into them through manipulation and his desire to kill as would befit an assassin, and combined with their lack of powers from being in this world, he could carry out his threats without any impediment. I was curious to why the Garo Master didn't kill Midnight Sparkle when he obvious had several chances to do so but I doubted I would get an answer.

He then began moving again by dashing forward so fast that I couldn't react quick enough and I felt his flaming swords burn my chest--my tunic miraculously didn't suffer any damage--with incredible force before he pushed me back until I hit the wall. The Garo Master then pinned me to the wall using one of his blades whilst using the other to attack me repeatedly until I slumped forward slightly, grabbed the other blade, pulled it out from the wall, and struck me once where I fell to the ground. He followed this up by disappearing then appearing above me before dropping down and slicing me across the chest with both blades.

I slowly got back up onto my feet and swung my sword only to miss him entirely. The Garo Master looked like he was about to laugh but instead he took to the sky and began dancing about before diving at me again where I responded by raising my shield. He was caught completely by surprise when his blades struck my shield and dropped them by accident allowing me to attack him. I struck him a couple of times but as I swung for the third hit, he repelled me with his blades resulting in a stalemate. We began exerting force in hopes of pushing the other back but he proved more resilient due to my weakened state.

Eventually, I dropped down to one knee allowing the Garo Master to gain the advantage but then I figured I could perform one of those leg sweeps to knock him off balance, but I forgot that he possessed a second sword. My body froze when I was suddenly staring down at the tip of his other flaming blade while the first one was still parrying my sword. He knew exactly what I was going to do and had planned accordingly. Only a leader would be capable of such an advanced technique because they were more advanced in the ways of battle and had earned great respect from their soldiers.

" You have proven entertaining despite your wounds."

" I wish you had allowed me to use one of my Red Potions."

The Garo Master laughed. " A true warrior does not rely on the use of additional items to guarantee success." He noticed the Bunny Hood on my head and lurched forward, his face close to mine, the red eyes behind his masked face burning into my own, the emanating fear was intense. " Were you at peak condition, I would have condemned you for using a crutch but since you fight with a bruised body, you can continue wearing that mask on your head."

" I don't get you."

" The demon said similar words."

" Why do you continue with your desire to kill?"

" It was what I was known for in life."

" Time has changed now and you can make something of yourself."

The Garo Master laughed. " We undead of Ikana cannot change. We are remnants of a time long forgotten who must remain in an eternal sleep. I died as an assassin when the kingdom fell to bloodshed and I shall be vanquished as an assassin. You have already seen what has become of the kingdom, chosen one, so you know that such words coming from you hold no meaning for us now." He then knocked away my shield and then my sword by swinging his blades in swift strokes leaving me defenceless. " There is nothing more for me to say about the past. It has become part of history." He twisted his blade, pulled it back, and thrust it forward hitting my leg.

Had I not managed to raise my leg, my heart would have been pierced instead. " So I can't convince you then?"

The Garo Master shook his head. " Ikana is locked in a permanent state of decay."

" I feel pity for you."

" There is no need to show concern to one who is already dead." The Garo Master said. He pulled his sword out from my leg, twisted it, and thrust it against my neck. " Perhaps you are not as strong as I thought. Your worry about others can be seen as a weakness, a weakness that cannot restore this dead kingdom. Perhaps another chosen one will come along and prove themselves worthy to do what must be done." I then did something unexpected... stepping on his foot and he dropped both blades in reaction enabling me to run over and pick up both my sword and shield. " Such cunning coming from you, chosen one."

" You left yourself wide open."

The Garo Master laughed. " Unconventional means are the mark of an assassin."

" I'm not like you."

" No, you are not." The Garo Master said. " You could never be the monster that I was in life, one who killed without reason, without mercy, without honour. We Garo took pride in our kills yet I took more lives than any other during the war that destroyed Ikana." He raised his hand and begged me to be quiet for a moment. " Even now, the spirits of those whose lives were taken by my hands continue to linger." I listened closely and began hearing the sounds of wailing all around. It quickly became unbearable and I started losing my concentration as the wails grew louder. " They cry out for justice to be done. They want you to ease their suffering, their pain."

" How?"

" Defeat me."

That was easier said than done considering how much of a disadvantage I had. Had I been at full health, I would have been on more equal footing with the Garo Master but instead I had been forced to keep up with him as best as I could. My ears then picked up the wailing sounds of the spirits whom he killed yet this time they were crying out in tears and I could hear what they were saying. They wanted me to give them the same freedom that Sunset Demon had been given. They wanted to move on to the next life and finally be freed from the eternal limbo that had trapped them for so long.

I wondered if Sunset Demon and Midnight Sparkle had experienced the same wailing or maybe they were given something else entirely. The wailing grew louder as the spirits requested me to defeat the one who had robbed them of life and despite my hesitation, I had no choice but to do this. Raising my shield and holding my sword firmly in my hand, I began walking forward--badly due to my injured leg--towards the Garo Master until we both swung our respective weapons and they collided with one another. Sparks flew about as we tried to overpower the other but again I was completely overwhelmed.

My leg gave out and the Garo Master attacked by striking me in the chest followed by him disappearing then reappearing above me before dropping down and striking me from behind, sending me forward where I fell flat on my face. He jumped up, began dancing about, then followed up by diving at me but I rolled away just in time while he kept on going until he disappeared again before I rolled away again when I saw a familiar shadow drop down from above. The Garo Master was surprised that his attack missed, his blades now stuck in the ground, and that allowed me to get up and strike him again.

He then span around, knocking me off my feet, jumped back and performed another diving attack. Luckily, I didn't land on my butt so I used my shield to parry his attack, resulting in him dropping his blades, and I attacked him a few more times before he picked them up and spun around, knocking me back. We then rushed each other, our sword colliding, and sparks flying once again, yet I could tell he was beginning to show signs of exhaustion. I had no idea how many more hits it would take before he would finally go down but the Garo Master was slower than before and his reaction time had clearly weakened.

We both pushed back at the other in hopes of getting the upper hand yet I was struggling due to my leg throbbing with pain but I chose to grit my teeth and bear the pain--I had no idea if the Garo Master felt a similar pain--whilst continuing to push back. Miraculously, the upper hand was won by me and I pushed him back only for him to spin around, knock me onto my butt, and disappeared. I knew what was about to happen so I prepared by raising my shield but I didn't expect him to come down in front of me at such a close range. The blow he gave me was one I couldn't avoid at all and I landed on my back a short distance away.

" Sunset!" Twilight exclaimed. " Are you okay?"

" I think we both know the answer to that question."

" You need to consume another Red Potion."

I nodded slowly. " Way ahead of you on that." I reached into my pocket and pulled out the Red Potion only for it to get knocked out of my hand by the Garo Master's flaming sword and rolled along the ground until it stopped at the wall with a soft clunk. It was fortunate that it didn't break but it was also inconvenient as now I couldn't heal my wounds and was at the Garo Master's mercy. " Twilight... Can you go over and get that potion for me and quickly?" Her Highness nodded without questioning my decision and flew towards where the potion had landed but before I could get back onto my feet, two flaming swords were mere inches from my face.

The Garo Master laughed. " I can sense you no longer hesitate."

" I have to save this world from destruction and you're in my way."

" To think that I thought you would be unfocused due to the death of the demon."

" I'm not as petty as you think."

" No, you possess a strong sense of humility." The Garo Master said. " You have accepted the fact that the demon is dead and are not allowing it to consume your mind. I had hoped for this as I had been waiting for a strong warrior to come along and give me a true challenge. A strong warrior would make for an excellent kill worthy of an assassin."

I wasn't liking where this was going. " So you still intend on killing me?"

The Garo Master nodded. " It is my nature as an assassin."

" If you kill me, then this world is done for."

" You were strong in the end by fighting me with everything you had but it was not enough."

The Garo Master twisted his swords, and held them back before thrusting them forward in one quick motion. Princess Twilight in the meantime had since picked up the Red Potion and had flown back over to me when she was shocked at what had just transpired. The flaming blades of the Garo Master were just barely touching my skin--I didn't feel any pain--yet my own sword had protruded through his heart. He looked to be in immense pain as he slowly backed away whilst dropping his blades before dropping down onto one knee. I had effectively dealt him a fatal blow yet it felt like as blur as my sword arm acted on its own in response to what he was doing.

Princess Twilight came up next to me. " I definitely didn't expect that."

" I... I don't know what happened." I said.

" It was instinct."

" Instinct?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You were about to be killed when your body reacted in a way that all creatures would when it comes to survival. You instinctively used your sword and struck a fatal blow by attacking the one part of the Garo Master that was vulnerable. I know it doesn't sound pleasant coming from me but it was necessary as this world is on the brink of destruction and only you can save it, the world you call home, and Equestria."

" I know the difference between taking a life needlessly and having to for progress."

" Glad you haven't lost that conviction."

I got back onto my feet. " I'm not the monster I used to be, Twilight."

" I know, yet you have been hesitant at time."

I sighed. " I couldn't help myself. While I'm reluctant about being an adventurer and having all this pressure on my shoulders, I'm even more reluctant when it comes to fighting monsters and even killing them. I just don't see the enjoyment that other people would."

Princess Twilight dropped the Red Potion in my hand. " You might want to drink this before doing anything else." She paused for a moment before continuing. " And you once again prove why you understand what it means to have humility."

Uncorking the bottle, I consumed the contents and immediately felt the healing properties of the Red Potion taking effect. My wounds began to heal and my strength came back although it was a morbid victory in that now I only had one potion left and I hadn't even gotten started truly exploring the Stone Tower Temple. Either I could find some fairies and place them in my bottle for later or I would have to leave for a while to get more supplies. Either way, I needed to be fully prepared for what was to come especially considering that I still had to deal with Midnight Sparkle, who ran away when things got rough.

I walked towards the Garo Master who suddenly raised his hand to stop me. " Heh... You have defeated me in battle. I did not think that I would lose to a living one such as yourself but then you are destined to save this dead kingdom."

" What happens now?"

" We Garo do not get captured." The Garo Master answered. " Instead, we commit seppuku so that we do not leave any trace of our existence behind. That is what I taught my followers and only the best amongst them became members of the Garo. I shall end my existence in this world but before that, I must commend you for your strength. Although you were my rival, you were most spectacular despite what happened. Now, you will learn that which is known only to me, the greatest secret of the Stone Tower."

" I'm ready."

The Garo Master laughed. " First, you shall receive the power of light in the form of a sacred arrow. This arrow is necessary in order to use the secret that I shall share with you by opening up my heart and revealing my wisdom."

" The Light Arrows."

" You are correct."

" What do I do with them?"

" If you shoot that which burns with a sacred golden light into the glowing red emblem outside the temple... things shall change in a way that you would not expect but know that this is the power of the temple." The Garo Master answered. " No doubt you have seen things that are beyond your grasp, objects that defy comprehension, yet now they shall become accessible to you, chosen one, through that which is now yours to claim. The world shall be rearranged so that the earth is born in the heavens and the moon is born on the earth. Do not forget my words as they are your only means of progression."

" I won't."

The Garo Master then took out a bomb from within his clothing and placed it down in front of him. " I have fulfilled my purpose so now you must fulfill yours by freeing this land from the torment that holds it within its twisted maw. You must also defeat the other demon who even now waits within this temple, her time drawing closer to its end. Die I shall, leaving no corpse." He lit the bomb's fuse, where it exploded seconds later leaving nothing behind, but then the Garo Master's laugh echoed all around as his spirit finally moved on. " That is the law of the Garo..."

His death caused the iron bars on both doors to rise up allowing me to finally move on from this room, but then a large treasure chest materialized in the middle of the room, the treasure earned from defeating him, and I knew what was contained within. Walking over to the chest, I opened it, reached into it, and took out an arrow whose tip was surrounded in a beautiful yellow crystal that glowed in the light of the moon. I remembered the last time I used these particular arrows on my previous journey. They cost a lot of Magic Power to use yet it was a necessary sacrifice as their power was unrivaled by anything else.

" The Light Arrow contains the sacred light of justice, Sunset." Twilight said.

" I know and it feels good to be holding it again."

" Not only are monsters incredibly vulnerable to the light, you can also use them to activate sun switches without the use of the Mirror Shield."

" And that red emblem the Garo Master mentioned."

Princess Twilight nodded. " You now hold a powerful item in yours hands but you need to use this power wisely. If you were to abuse the power of the Light Arrow, you could become corrupted by power much like in the past, and Sunset Demon's death would be in vain. Also, your magic will be heavily drained as these arrows use more than the other two do so be sure to aim your shots carefully.

Once again, Her Highness was correct. The Light Arrow was the most powerful of the three magic arrows and could destroy most monsters instantly. The power contained within each one could wipe out an entire army of monsters and while it sounded great, it could lead me to becoming corrupted, something I don't want to ever have to go through again so long as I lived. I needed to use these arrows carefully so as to avoid the temptation that came with them. Now I needed to go back outside and find out exactly what happens when light shines upon the red emblem. Would it truly unlock the secret of the Stone Tower?

Chapter 62: Inverted

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
June 26, 2017
Chapter 62: Inverted.

Sunset Demon was dead! It took me a few moments for it to finally sink in that the she-demon was no more. As I gripped the Light Arrow that was in my hand, I thought back to all of my encounters with her both when she was my enemy and when I was her. As my enemy, I did everything I could to prevent her from taking my life and becoming what she claimed was the real Sunset Shimmer, someone who believed herself to be the ruler of everything around her, someone who embodied power above all else. Our battles were akin to an inner struggle with myself, battles between light and dark.

Her desire to kill me drove her insane and became her only purpose in life. She also brought out the worst in me in that I would lose control of my emotions and teetered on the brink of insanity yet I managed to come back from the brink while she merely continued to plunge ever deeper down the path of madness. In some ways, Sunset Demon made me realize that I was my own worst enemy and that I struggled to move on from the past, her presence a manifestation of everything I used to be before discovering friendship. In others, I wanted to defeat her and prove myself to be the one true Sunset.

As the she-demon herself, when I placed that crown on my head, I felt the power coursing through my body, yet it was also a painful experience. I was a monster who made others miserable at Canterlot High for my own amusement yet I didn't look like one until I wore Princess Twilight's crown. I knew my actions would condemn me but instead of stepping back and rethinking things over, I chose to keep going and became a hideous creature as a result of my lust for power and to become a princess. I had everything at that precise moment and it felt really good, a horrible thought but I truly felt that way at the time.

That night, everyone discovered the truth about me, and they rightfully rejected me because of what I had done to them. I was so lost in the moment of having all that power, I never realized how my actions had changed things in the world I called home for the better and for the worse. My friends gained magic similar to what Princess Twilight's versions of my friends possessed in Equestria, yet they were more subdued from never having had such power before. It was truly a blessing only countered by a horrible truth; I had introduced magic into a world that never experienced it before.

Looking down at the Light Arrow, I felt both relieved and conflicted. I was relieved as Sunset Demon was gone and that meant never having to deal with her ever again according to her own words. I was conflicted though as she didn't deserve to die despite wanting to do so to allow me to move on with my life. Sunset Demon's existence was my own fault and for that I felt as though she had been wronged constantly because she was created by my own selfish desires. She could have had so much instead of having to skulk about in the shadows looking for scraps in her bid for survival.

I then dropped the Light Arrow where it clanged on the ground before looking up at the night sky. It wasn't until now that I felt so much sympathy for the she-demon whereas before all she got from me was contempt resulting from being my past that refused to die. Seeing her change with my own eyes showed how wrong I had been. Had I tried much harder in the past to change her, she would still be alive and perhaps became her own Sunset Shimmer who could do anything she wanted without having to be a part of my life. Instead, she was gone and would never come back, that chance forever lost to me.

My thoughts then turned to Midnight Sparkle. She manipulated Sunset Demon all because the latter had understood the truth while the former refused to listen and slowly became corrupted with power, the very thing that most people believed in, the very thing Ganondorf himself proclaimed. While I knew he wasn't responsible for what happened, his very presence overall could be felt everywhere, and I was afraid of that presence. I had to stop Midnight Sparkle from succeeding in her plans of getting the Equestrian Magic but how far was I willing to go in order to stop her?

Would I show compassion and offer her the chance of reformation? Or would I choose to kill her in cold blood as a means of getting revenge? One option would draw me closer to Ganondorf, the desired outcome he sought, and expose my heart to hatred whilst fulfilling Sunset Demon's final request, the other would prove how much I had learned since being given my own reformation even when I didn't deserve it after all I had done. Both options had their good and bad qualities yet I could only choose one. My heart wanted me to go for the right choice while my brain wanted the wrong one; such a difficult decision I had to make.

Princess Twilight landed on my shoulder. " Still overcoming what happened to Sunset Demon?"

I slowly nodded. " It's made me think hard about myself as a person, you know?"

" You knew her better than most since she was your other half."

" What am I supposed to do now?"

" This is something you must figure out on your own." Twilight answered. " Her death will weigh heavily on you for quite some time and the emotional journey will be a difficult one for you to overcome yet know that in the end, the right decisions will come to you whether they are good or not."

" Even the bad ones?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " If those are the decisions that you've chosen to go with, then there's nothing more I can say about it. Again, only you can figure out the best way to move forward, and if it means resorting to getting revenge and invoking hatred, so be it. I won't look at you horribly if you choose that route because I've done something similar when I battled against Starlight Glimmer when she attempted to change time itself. I was filled with hatred to the point that my heart told me to stop her at any costs even if it meant losing my humanity just so she wouldn't succeed."

I was surprised. " I never pegged you as acting like that."

" She wanted revenge and I wanted to stop her no matter what."

" No wonder you two became good friends."

" Nothing is ever simple, Sunset."

I nodded. " Despite you not being able to help me come to a decision, I appreciate you telling me about your own experience. It's just that I fear that choosing the wrong options will bring me closer to Ganondorf's way of thinking."

" Like I said, you have to figure it out."

I wasn't liking that particular answer yet I knew Her Highness was once again correct. If I were to succumb to hatred and kill Midnight Sparkle as a form of revenge, I would be fulfilling Sunset Demon's wishes while losing my humanity in the process. Her wish was small compared with vengeance but Ganondorf would view it as me embracing power--not to mention evil itself--and giving him the perfect reason to have me become his servant. Choosing compassion would deny Sunset Demon her wish but also prevent darkness from consuming my heart. No matter what choice I made, a part of me would suffer for it.

Reaching down, I picked up the Light Arrow and put it away. " I'll figure it out when we find Midnight Sparkle."

Princess Twilight nodded. " It won't be easy finding her as she will no doubt keep herself hidden whilst trying to throw all kinds of traps in our way. This whole experience has frightened her yet it will make her more unpredictable. Anyone who feels scared tend to act in a defensive manner as a means of self preservation. She will keep herself hidden until she feels ready to appear so for now we can't do anything other than get through whatever traps she creates."

" So where do we go from here?"

" The only way is through the door we didn't use."

" Before we go, there is something I want to do."

" What's that?"

" I know it won't matter all that much since resetting time will erase it from existence but I want to leave behind a grave marker for Sunset Demon." I answered. " Granted, I don't have any materials to use in order to make such a marker, but I think using my sword to make a groove in the ground will be enough."

Princess Twilight nodded. " By all means, Sunset. I won't stop you."

Walking past the treasure chest that contained the Light Arrow and stopping just a few steps behind it, I took out my sword, raised it above my head with both hands, and drove it into the ground where it sunk down. I then pulled my sword about for a few moments and created the grave marker to remember Sunset Demon. It wasn't anything fancy since I lacked proper materials but I had poured my heart into making it. I then grabbed a tiny piece of my hair, cut it off using my sword, and sprinkled it onto the grave marker before putting my sword away and having a moment of silence.

Once I was ready to continue, I turned and walked towards door, looking behind me one last time at the grave marker. Opening the door, I entered the next room and immediately stopped. There was a narrow walkway that went across the room with a slight drop below with several blue rupees scattered about--I was tempted to collect them but I had to focus on making my way back to the entrance--yet something could be heard skittering about further ahead. The only way onward involved climbing up onto the walkway from below so I jumped, grabbed the edge, and pulled myself up.

The walkway was divided into two sections with the something in question on the other side of a rather small gap. It was minding its own business though for some reason it was wearing a mask much like how I did whenever I had need of one. I seemed to recall seeing this particular monster in the swamp but I couldn't tell as the mask made it difficult for me to recognize what it was. It was once again an example of seeing a monster that lived in another region of Termina and wondering if there were any new monsters. I mean, the Garo Master was new as I had never seen him before yet I was hoping for something different.

" That monster looks familiar."

" That's a Hiploop." Twilight said. " We encountered them back in the swamp."

" I figured as much but why is it wearing a mask?"

" I'm guessing the ones here in the Stone Tower wear them as a means of protection."

" Okay, so how do I go about getting rid of it?"

" You should be able to pull off the mask by using the Hookshot." Twilight answered. " On another note, the mask this Hiploop is wearing isn't just for show you know. It can be used as an offensive weapon where it can charge into you and knock you silly due to how heavy the mask is."

Since I couldn't get its attention, I had to jump over to the other part of the walkway. Taking out the Hookshot, I jumped across and immediately began aiming at the Hiploop who turned around again and charged. Firing the chain, it latched onto its mask and I pulled it off easily--it definitely didn't like that--before switching back to my sword and striking it a couple of times, destroying it. The way it burned away to nothing was unique in that it bounced around a couple of times before falling to pieces. Granted, it wasn't a glamourous sight but then nothing about this world was.

I was about to go through the door to the next room when Princess Twilight grabbed my attention. " You might want to look around down below."

" All I saw down there were some rupees."

" Yes and a Crystal Switch tucked away."

I opened my eyes wide. " Really? Why would someone go to such trouble to hide one of those?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I don't know but we should check just in case it reveals something we might need." She quickly flew down below to get a closer look at the switch before coming back and shaking her head. " You won't be able to activate the switch through conventional means as it's hidden below the floor but perhaps you could get around that by using the Blast Mask? I know it doesn't sound all that assuring coming from me but it's the best idea I've got."

" If I have to use it to activate this switch, I'll do it." I said. " I just hope it won't be a waste of my time."

Dropping down to the path below--and discovering that the walkway the Hiploop had been on was simply a raised path--I picked up the blue rupees--one could never have too many of these considering how often I needed healing--and began heading backwards until I noticed the switch beneath my feet. No doubt whoever hid it down there didn't want anyone to find it but then they were no match for Princess Twilight, who was pretty observant with her surroundings. I could be observant as well but I didn't want to deprive Her Highness of something she enjoyed doing.

Taking out the Blast Mask and placing it on my face, I got as close as I could to the switch so that the explosion I caused would trigger it. Since using my shield to deflect the blast would reduce its overall impact, I had no choice but to detonate my mask and take the full damage. Blowing myself up and activating the switch, a small treasure chest materialized right below the switch and that meant having to drop down even further below to open it. Sighing, I walked over to the edge, dropped down, and landed awkwardly on the ground as it was a deeper drop than I thought it was.

In fact, I almost dropped on top of a Hookshot plate that was surprisingly stuck in the ground--my knees of course buckled but it wasn't that bad. Looking at the plate, I deduced that there was more to it than appearances suggested and perhaps I would figure it out later. Princess Twilight made sure to make a note of this on the map before I walked over to the chest and kicked it open revealing another Stray Fairy, the seventh one giving me close to half of them in total. Now I needed a way to get back up and onto the main path so I started looking around in hopes of finding one.

My way out came in the form of a Hookshot plate hiding on the ceiling yet I needed to aim precisely otherwise the chain wouldn't reach. I first thought about going to the edge of the wall and firing up but that proved ineffective as I was being blocked by it. I then took a few steps backwards and tried again but this didn't work either as the walkway was now blocking my efforts. Eventually, I found a sweet-spot in-between both sides and fired up at the plate, pulling myself out of the pit and back on the walkway though I was on the wrong side of the room--I needed to be on the other side.

Sighing, I climbed up onto the walkway, jumped across the small gap, and walked over to the other door before opening it and entering the next room. This next room turned out to be the room that had the two sun blocks guarded by the Beamos except now I was on the walkway that overlooked the water. With the Light Arrow in my possession, I could now come back here--it involved backtracking much to my dismay--from where I came into the room from initially and use them to remove those blocks. Before doing that, I needed to see where my current path would take me though the map showed me going back to the entrance.

That's when I noticed something in the distance. " Twilight? What do you make of that?"

" Make of what?"

" That!" I answered pointing in the direction of something large at the far end of the walkway."

" I can't tell what it is so perhaps you should get a closer look."

Sighing, I walked down the path until I was close to whatever it was, and my first thought was that it was some kind of boulder blocking my path. It didn't look like any boulder I had seen throughout the course of my journey so perhaps this was a new kind of boulder? I shook my head. No way would it be something that ridiculous yet I could sense a strong power surrounding it. " How do you propose I get past this obstacle?" I then noticed that the Blast Mask was still on my face so I took it off and put it away before addressing the thing blocking the way forward again. " It looks like a boulder but getting a second look at it, I don't think it is."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I doubt that boulders have arms and legs, Sunset."

I was surprised that I didn't notice that until now. " Guess that proves this isn't a boulder so what could it be?"

My answer came quickly when the strange object stood upright and I dropped my jaw in response. The "boulder" was in fact a monster that comprised of a giant blue eyeball that was on a large head that was on a tiny torso complete with clawed arms and legs. It's eyeball then glowed yellow and before I knew it, it slammed down its fists, knocking back a fair distance while shards of rock hit my body in several places. It's eyeball went back to being blue before it began walking towards me in a slow manner. I tried to defend myself using my sword only to get pounded by its fists again sending me back even further.

Now I wished that I hadn't complained about having to deal with old monsters again. This one was new and so far it was having its way with me what with attacking using a combination of strength, surprise, and the environment itself. It continued to pursue me while I chose to back away in hopes of coming up with a means of fighting back but then it suddenly stopped before moving backwards quickly until it was back where it originally was and resumed its motionless state. Drawing my sword and shield, I thought it was odd considering it had me on the ropes but chose to retreat.

" You need to be careful with this one, Sunset."

" How do you figure that?"

" This is an Eyegore, a rare monster that's only seen in Stone Tower Temple." Twilight answered. " Whether you figured it out or not, its eyeball is its weak point though you won't be able to defeat it using your sword. Every time its eye changes colour, it will attack with its arms or it might even fire a beam instead that you can't block by any means--not even the Mirror Shield can protect you from a laser blast. However, it becomes vulnerable when the eye changes so you need to use some kind of projectile weapon."

" Like an arrow?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You might want to consider trying out the Light Arrow but be mindful of using up too much magic."

" Light Arrows might make the battle go quicker."

" Yes but the window with which to hit the eye is small."

I sighed. " You do have a point I suppose."

" Since we don't know how much Magic Power you have left, you should just use regular arrows instead."

Princess Twilight was encouraging me to use my new Light Arrows but she was right in that I had no idea how much magic I had left until it ran out. Since I needed to use these arrows to do something to the temple back outside in the Stone Tower, I didn't want to use up my Magic Power unless absolutely necessary. Granted, I did have a Green Potion that would restore my magic but I didn't want to waste it especially when there was more of the temple that had to be explored. It made me wish that I had more than four bottles on my person as this wouldn't have been an issue but I would make do with what I had.

Switching over to the Hero's Bow, I walked up to the Eyegore who immediately stood up and slammed its arms into the ground, its eyeball changing colour. It caught me off guard again and I fell down on my butt before it began coming after me with its clunky footsteps. I got back onto my feet and fired an arrow though it merely bounced off the eye as it had changed back to its blue hue so that meant having to force it into attacking. I allowed the Eyegore to approach when its eye changed but I responded with a well-timed arrow that struck the eye and it fell back for a moment before slamming its fists into the ground again.

I was knocked down onto my butt but scooted backwards as it began pursuing me again but when it reached halfway across the walkway, it stopped and quickly stepped backwards until it stood against the door before assuming its initial position. Now I was beginning to see an obvious pattern forming. It wouldn't pursue me because it didn't want to leave its position so by standing out of its range of movement, I could plan accordingly and approach when ready. Regaining my composure and breathing heavily, I walked back over and once again the Eyegore rose up and slammed its fists into the ground but this time I made sure to stand back.

Its eye changed from yellow to blue so I stood still while it got closer to me and when it did, the eye changed colour again and I fired another arrow, striking its eye, causing it to rear back for a moment. I then thought about using a Light Arrow to see what would happen so I rummaged through my items to pull it out only to get hit by the Eyegore's fists as they hit the ground. I went flying back and landed on my butt--it was becoming an annoying trend--while the Eyegore continued advancing until stopping and moving back to where it was through its quick steps. As I got back up, I took out the Light Arrow and felt the power that radiated from it--I also rubbed my butt as I had bruised it too much.

With the Light Arrow ready to use, I got close to the Eyegore where it stood up and slammed its fists down again. I wasn't close enough to get knocked down but I was shaken up a little before it moved towards me again. Aiming my Light Arrow, I waited until the Eyegore got close enough before it eye changed colour again and I fired it causing it to get knocked back further than ever--I knew the Light Arrows were strong but not that strong. It quickly recovered and was about to make a move when its eye became red, a different colour this time, and it toppled over before exploding upon hitting the ground.

This produced a small treasure chest that appeared back at the other door I used to enter this room from but more importantly, I breathed a sigh of relief knowing that I had overcome such a powerful enemy. " That was a lot more difficult than it looked."

" You certainly hurt your flank more than usual."

I frowned. " We're not ponies in this world, Twilight, so the use of the word flank doesn't make much sense."

" Oh I think its appropriate."

I shrugged. There was no point in trying to argue with Her Highness as she ended up winning almost every single time. " In any case, it was weird that it never used the beam from its eye despite you saying it could do that."

" Yes, it does bother me as well."

" Maybe some of them can while others can't?"

Princess Twilight shrugged this time. " I don't know but I recommend being prepared for whenever we have to deal with another one again as I'm sure it will happen. Still, you did well and you even used a Light Arrow despite me saying to be careful as your Magic Power may or may not be low."

" It seemed to really affect the Eyegore."

" Yes." Twilight said. " Most monsters are vulnerable to the light as they are creatures of darkness, but some might only be able to be defeated using Light Arrows so having that Green Potion proved to be an excellent idea. I wonder what would happen if you were to destroy a monster with a Light Arrow instead of using your sword? You should try it out sometime just to see what might happen."

Putting away my bow, I turned towards the chest. " I wish it could have been placed closer to this end." It sounded like I was complaining about having to walk over to something when I had clearly shown my athleticism countless times but in truth I was complaining about the principle of the thing. " Let's just open this chest up and get out of here while I've still got some dignity left." Walking back across the walkway towards the chest, I kicked it open and another Stray Fairy flew out before entering my body. It made sense that the chest would contain one given I had to fight a powerful monster.

" That now gives us eight of them."

" We're making good progress on collecting them."

" It might not be easy from now on, Sunset."

I nodded. " I was thinking the same thing, Twilight."

Princess Twilight then used her fairy magic on the map and noticed where we were going. " According to the map, the next room is the entrance of the temple so we've come full circle already but we should go back to this room from where we accessed it originally and see what those crystal switches do. They might give us more Stray Fairies or help us to acquire some later on when whatever happens when you use the Light Arrow on that jewel outside happens."

Walking back across the walkway, I opened the door and entered the next room which was indeed the entrance, and I immediately raised my shield as a Real Bombchu came charging at me with its tail lit up. It bounced harmlessly off my shield before exploding leaving me to catch my breath as it took me by surprise. I remembered seeing the sun switch hanging on the wall and recalled not being able to do anything about it as there was no sunlight around but now I could activate the switch and see what would happen. My eyes then noticed the two Dragonflies fluttering about and one of them was within range.

Seeing it being so close gave me an idea. I took out the Hero's Bow again, my aim being to see what would happen if I were to use a Light Arrow on a monster, and inched my way closer in order to get its attention. It noticed and began flying over to me when I fired the arrow and struck it with a blinding flash. It burned away to nothing upon hitting the ground leaving behind a purple rupee much to my surprise. I quickly jumped across the small gap, picking up the rupee before it could disappear and suddenly I felt a lot richer. Was it a coincidence that destroying the Dragonfly with a Light Arrow would produce a purple rupee? I needed to test this further.

I walked over to where the other Dragonfly was and waited until it noticed me, and when it did, it flew towards me and was about to strike with its electrified tail when I fired my arrow, destroying it in another blinding burst of light. It burned away and left behind another purple rupee thus proving my theory. It seemed that using Light Arrows to destroy most monsters would produce purple rupees--they were worth fifty in total--giving me an easier way to grind for money though at the cost of consuming a lot of magic. It made me wish I had been able to do this a lot sooner but at least I could do it now rather than use the old method.

" Looks like I'm going to be rich." I said as I picked up the purple rupee."

" Just don't go overboard with it, Sunset."

I nodded. " I know, Twilight. Still, I'm happy I found an easier way to grind for rupees."

" Provided you have the magic for it."

" Collecting Magic Jars will restore lost magic."

Princess Twilight then began thinking. " What else do you need to purchase, Sunset? Other than the obvious Red Potions at any shop across Termina, I don't think you need to buy anything else thus making this whole money-making scheme a complete washout." Her Highness continued to think and I couldn't help but agree that there wasn't really anything else for me to get as a lot of it could be found through exploration. " Well... I suppose there is that 5,000 rupee reward that Fleur Dis Lee mentioned you can get if you were to deposit that many rupees off at the bank but that might take a long time since you probably have about one hundred or so in there."

" Okay, so I don't use the bank that much."

" Maybe there is still time for you to deposit some rupees in there before we wrap this adventure up."

" That would involve grinding for an entire cycle."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Nothing ever comes easy." She then slapped her hands on her cheeks when she realized there was something I needed to purchase. " You need to eventually buy a Powder Keg to enter the Goron Races when spring returns to Snowhead and one hundred rupees to upgrade your sword to the Razor Sword if you plan on getting the strongest sword imaginable. Plus, you will need to buy some potions as a means of preparing to take on Starlight once and for all."

" Guess I need to do some grinding after all."

" First, we should awaken the final Giant."

" Then let's go outside and see what happens when I use the Light Arrow on that gem."

Princess Twilight then flew out in front of me and began pushing me back though her small body made that impossible though I gave her props for trying. " We can't leave just yet you know. You still need to see what that one sun switch does we found when we first entered the temple and you need to go back to the previous room via the other path to see what those crystal switches do. I know I'm sounding redundant right now but doing all of that could lead us to more Stray Fairies or something else altogether."

I was hoping she wouldn't remind me to have to go back through the temple again but I would be remiss as Her Highness would make sure I go back by means of nagging at me about it endlessly until I had to cave in. Sometimes, Princess Twilight would try my patience yet she knew what was for the best as that was her main purpose in this adventure according to the game's mechanics. Sighing, I walked back to the central platform, dropped down below--it wasn't a deep fall so I took no damage--and turned around to face the sun switch that was hanging on the wall.

Aiming my bow up at the switch, I fired a Light Arrow, causing it to glow before smiling brightly with its goofy grin, and a treasure chest appeared on the ceiling in front of the raised groove that featured Majora's Mask on it. Why did it end up there instead of down here? Once again, I needed to remind myself that it was where it was and come back to it later though I suspected the wait wouldn't be that much longer. I then climbed a nearby ladder before taking out the Dungeon Map and looked to see which room had those sun blocks. I sighed seeing that it involved going through the room with the blue switches.

That meant having to do all of that business involving the Elergy of Emptiness again. I slapped my forehead. As much as I enjoyed playing my instruments, I didn't like the idea of having to switch bodies just for one simple thing. I suspected that the shells had long since disappeared as I left that room quite some time ago, a unfortunate disappointment to be sure but also expected as some things just couldn't be kept regarding puzzle solving unless it were important. While my brain wanted me to bang my head against a wall out of annoyance, I sighed knowing I didn't have any choice other than to backtrack once again.

Sometime earlier in the evening...

" Well... Here I am with your food, grandmother."

" Ooooh! You certainly took your sweet time with this one, Anju." Principal Cinch said.

" I don't understand how you can be hungry at this time of the evening." Scootaloo said.

" It's because my metabolism is different from other people."

Scootaloo knew what the reason was behind her grandmother's problem. It was because she was a terrible cook pure and simple yet never believed it to be true until she finally tasted her own cooking and near enough threw up. She had tried time and again to improve on her skills yet it didn't amount to anything and most came up with lousy excuses so that they could avoid tasting what she made. She felt dejected knowing that her passion had been doused before it could reach its true perfection yet she chose not to let anyone know as a means of keeping it close to her heart.

That was what made her prone to apologizing for every little thing she did. It didn't matter what kind of problem she had to deal with but she would always apologize even when she didn't do anything wrong. Others around her knew this was her biggest weakness and took complete advantage of it. Had she a stronger backbone, those situations would have turned out differently but instead she was practically a doormat though only a select few saw her as something else. Her fiancé was perhaps the one person who viewed Scootaloo as being the ideal woman despite her faults.

And yet, therein lied a problem that had been on her mind for quite some time. Her fiancé, Kafei, had been missing for about a month and had practically dropped off the radar in that no one knew where he had gone. Kafei was the son of Mayor Dotour and her husband, Monsieur Aroma, so he possessed some political clout yet others viewed him as a scoundrel who had effectively stood up Scootaloo mere weeks before their marriage. Scootaloo's family didn't like him all that much and professed her to have chosen someone else yet she believed in him where others had turned a blind eye to him. It was a tale of love that had unexpected twists.

Scootaloo sighed. " If you say so, grandmother."

" Is something bothering you?"

" The same thing has been on my mind for the past month."

" Put my food down first before you speak further." Principal Cinch said. " I'm starving so much that I feel my body is wasting away to nothing." She then mumbled under her breath in hopes her granddaughter couldn't hear her. " At least this food will be edible since Anju didn't make it with her inferior cooking skills. It took some mighty convincing to get my own daughter to make me something that I know I'll enjoy but maybe I shouldn't be so hard on poor Anju. She has been through a lot since Kafei disappeared though I wish he had left her a message saying where he was going."

Scootaloo then noticed Principal Cinch mumbling away. " Did you say something, grandmother?"

Principal Cinch shook her head. " I was just saying how much I look forward to this meal. I mean, you do a pretty good job of cooking yourself, Anju, but I wanted to try some of your mother's cooking."

" You just don't like my cooking."

" Nonsense!" Principal Cinch said in a defensive manner. " I think your cooking is fantastic."

" Then why don't you eat it more often instead of telling me to take it away."

" I wasn't hungry then, Anju."

Scootaloo sighed and placed the plate next to Principal Cinch. " Well, despite how late it is to be eating something, at least you will be eating rather than allowing yourself to go hungry for a lengthy duration." She turned and began leaving when she suddenly stopped and turned her head. " I'm worried about 'him' more than ever before. It has been such a long time since I heard anything from him."

" You worry too much."

" I... I'm sorry."

" Not to mention apologize."

Scootaloo bowed slightly. " I'm sorry."

Principal Cinch sighed. " Perhaps I should tell you a story, Anju? You could do with something to take your mind off silly trivial matters. Would you like to hear about the history behind the creation Clock Town or maybe you want to hear all about the Gorons of Snowhead? I have plenty of stories to tell you so please feel free to sit down and let me indulge you in a way only a grandmother would know."

Scootaloo shook her head. " I think I will pass tonight, grandmother. I have a lot on my mind and I would rather head off to bed early tonight. I hope that you enjoy the food that my mother has prepared for you. Goodnight." She then left the room leaving Principal Cinch contemplating whether or not she could eat knowing how Scootaloo felt but she ultimately chose to eat as her stomach began growling something fierce. " Why haven't I gotten anything from him? Did I do something to offend him? I know that I will be a good wife to him so why did he up and disappear when we are so close to our wedding day?"

As Scootaloo walked down the corridor towards the staircase, she ran into someone very familiar to her. " I take it that you have given your grandmother her food?"

" Yes, mother."

" Perhaps now she will finally eat after coming up with such lousy excuses."

" If it's okay with you, mother, I would like to head off to bed now."

" You don't want to talk with your own mother now, Anju?"

Scootaloo shook her head. " I'm sorry."

" There you go again! Apologizing for something you didn't do. Sometimes, I think you're nothing but a doormat, Anju, and I do mean that in the best of ways. I've raised you as best as I could ever since your father passed away long ago yet despite my best efforts, a lot of people have been able to take advantage of you. I'm trying to protect you from those who wish to do you harm but perhaps I've been too overprotective."

" It's about Kafei, isn't it?"

" You've been moping about for the last month ever since he disappeared."

" He and I were supposed to get married the day after tomorrow." Scootaloo said. " We had made the arrangements months ago to get married during the Carnival of Time and now no one has seen him for the last month."

" If Kafei were to show his face now, I doubt he would get a warm welcome from the townsfolk. Maybe it's for the best that he stay as far away from Clock Town as possible until at least after the carnival if he knows what's good for him."

" Mother!"

Principal Cinch then called out from her room. " Misty Fly!? What is going on out there?"

It turned out that in the world of Termina, Misty Fly, one of the more prominent members of the Wonderbolts, was Scootaloo's mother. She didn't seem like the motherly type given she was a career pony in Equestria who had big plans but then things were never what they appeared to be in this world. It appeared she had antagonism towards Kafei and wasn't afraid of expressing her opinion of him given what had been going on within the past month. Misty Fly looked upon her daughter with disgust knowing she continued to believe in her fiancé rather than admitting that he had proven to be unfaithful by disappearing right before their wedding.

" Nothing is wrong, mother." Misty Fly answered.

" It sounds like an argument."

" Never you mind about that."

" In any case, you ought to keep it down in case our guests complain."

Misty Fly groaned as she rubbed the bridge of her nose several times. " Ugh! That's not even in the right context and she knows it." She sighed. " Anju... I've told you this before and I will continue to tell it to you until it becomes clear. You must forget all about Kafei ever fulfilling his promise to you. I knew that boy was trouble from the first moment he entered into our lives yet you insisted he wasn't a problem but now he has left you at such a crucial moment."

Scootaloo was shocked. " How could you say that, mother?"

" I am only speaking the truth."

" He must have his reasons for disappearing."

" Perhaps he decided to backstab you and decided to marry Cremia."

" Mother!" Scootaloo shouted. " How could you accuse my best friend of such a thing?"

" I don't blame Cremia for this mess, Anju." Misty Fly answered. " But it was common knowledge that she had romantic feelings for Kafei but knew she could never be his as she believed you were his special someone. If you want my opinion, Kafei had been manipulating both of you from the very beginning and his parents have been encouraging such behaviour given how protective they are when it comes to his well being. They claim to have no idea where he's been but I suspect they know something but choose to pull off this innocent act as a means of earning sympathy."

" That's such a harsh accusation."

Misty Fly walked closer to Scootaloo and raised her finger to her daughter. " Then where has Kafei gone?"

Scootaloo shrugged. " I... I'm sorry but I don't know."

Misty Fly placed her hand on Scootaloo's shoulder. " I'm not going to argue with you, Anju, but know that you need to accept the fact that Kafei has abandoned you most likely in favour of either Cremia or someone else. It will take you some time before it sinks in but I know it will become clear in due time." She looked towards the staircase, nodded, and then turned back towards her daughter. " Why not head off to bed early, Anju? You could do with a good night's sleep."

Scootaloo nodded. " Very well, mother."

Turning, she began walking up the stairs leaving Misty Fly to ponder over what she had said about Kafei. " I know my words were harsh, Anju, but you needed to be told the truth before you could get hurt. I don't know how long it will take you to forget me but know that this is for the best even if you don't think so. Perhaps, in another time, I would have understood Kafei a lot better had he chosen not to disappear." She sighed. " Ever since that weird moon appeared above town, everything has been falling apart and is showing no signs of changing any time soon. If only things were different..."

After spending roughly ten minutes changing to each of my different forms with the exception of the Deku Scrub for obvious reasons, I played the Elergy of Emptiness to create shells to keep the blue switches pressed and used the lone block to activate the remaining switch before I could continue. The Real Bombchu proved annoying so before I began activating the switches, I bounced them back using my Mirror Shield where they exploded upon impact. Once the puzzle had been solved again, I heard the sound of the way onward opening--I still didn't know what it was that was rising up but it didn't really matter so long as I could continue.

The next section featured the hole in the ground that I had to destroy in order to bring sunlight down to the room below but the moment I entered, the Guays from before began attacking by flying towards me in a straight line. Rather than waste precious magic by using Light Arrows, I simply destroyed them one at a time with my sword. Luckily, one of them dropped a small Magic Jar which I picked up as I needed magic to deal with the puzzle in the next room. Speaking of which, I entered the next room and immediately switched over to my bow before firing an arrow at the sun block and it disappeared revealing the Beamos from before.

Since I knew arrows had no effect on them, I switched over to my bombs and took one out before tossing it over to where the Beamos was stationed. The bomb exploded but all it did was cause the Beamos to close its eye prompting to toss another one--I was fortunate to have had the Biggest Bomb Bag for emergencies--where it exploded, destroying the Beamos only to discover nothing else. Had I been tricked? Had this been a waste of time? It certainly felt like it but I remembered the crystal switch on the other side. I suspected activating it would cause something to happen on this end and now I needed to go over there to find out.

Had I used the Blast Mask earlier to activate the switch on the other side of the fence, I could have saved myself some time but instead I chose to do things as intended. Cursing under my breath, my obvious blunder was one that would taste awful for some time but there was no sense in mulling over it. Putting all of my equipment away, I took out the Zora Mask, looked at it for a few seconds, and placed it on my face where I squatted down and watched as my body parts shimmered from human to Zora before screaming upon finishing my transformation into Mikau.

In retrospect, I didn't really need to transform as I could simply swim under the walkway--it would prove uncomfortable--but I didn't want to take any chances in case something went wrong. Jumping into the water and dropping down until I reached the bottom, I used my fins to destroy the exploding mines by pushing one of them into the others before walking along the bottom, rising back up to the surface, and climbing out. It then became apparent that being a Zora really wasn't necessary. I had to become human and remove the sun block to be able to access the crystal switch before going back to the other side again.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask, and flipped back my hair whilst cursing under my breath. Already this temple was testing my patience and I wasn't even halfway through this place Taking out the bow and shooting a Light Arrow, the sun block disappeared--I really should have used the Blast Mask earlier--and I jumped over to where the alcove was, activating the switch. A small chest materialized where the Beamos had been on the other side and while I could have become a Zora to swim back across, my stubbornness had gotten fed up with doing all of this nonsense.

Jumping back into the water, I swam underneath the walkway--it wasn't as bad as I thought--and climbed out on the other side before walking over to the chest and kicked it open revealing another Stray Fairy. " If this chest had contained something other than a Stray Fairy, I would have thrown a massive temper tantrum." I said as it flew into my body and disappeared. " I really should have activated that switch earlier as I could have avoided going into the water again."

" Perhaps not doing things as intended is actually a wise idea." Twilight said.

I sighed. " It's too late now as we already came back here."

" If it's any consolation for you, Sunset, I do believe there is nothing more we can do in the temple."

" So we can finally see what the Light Arrow does to this place?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but perhaps you might want to consider getting some supplies? You only have one Red Potion left in addition to the Green Potion to see you through the remainder of the temple, and Midnight Sparkle is still lurking about somewhere waiting to make our lives more difficult. If you're feeling confident in your abilities, we don't need to get any supplies, but perhaps this would be a good idea. I mean, you picked up those purple rupees a while back and they will go to waste if not used."

" I could do with some more Red Potions."

" Good thing the Owl Statue for this area has been activated."

I wiped my brow. " I've no intention of climbing that Stone Tower again."

" The only problem with leaving this place entirely is that you might have to move those platforms about with the Elergy of Emptiness." Twilight said. " However, if your aiming has gotten exceptionally better and the target is big enough, we could potentially avoid having to use that song."

My skills with the bow have been getting stronger but I won't deny that I still had a tendency towards missing my shots on occasion. I never really was any good at shooting targets that moved--I preferred targets that were stationary--evidenced by how many arrows I'd wasted throughout the journey but perhaps hitting this gem the Garo Master mentioned upon his defeat would be easy enough to hit. In any case, I had to leave the temple as the target was outside hanging up just above the entrance and I had no intention of taking the long way back to the entrance.

Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I was about to warp around Termina three times. First, I played the Song of Soaring to whisk myself back to the entrance of the temple though I didn't get any wings this time around--perhaps it was because I was only warping a short distance--and when I arrived back at the entrance, I turned around and walked outside before playing the song again. I concentrated on warping over to Clock Town as that was where the shops were that housed what I needed and once the wings protruded from my body, they wrapped themselves around me and I was whisked away.

Landing back in Clock Town, before I did anything else, I checked my wallet to see how many rupees I had in total. A part of me really wanted to start depositing them at the bank on a regular basis--I had over one hundred rupees--yet doing so would take a long time since I only had deposited a small amount in general in the bank. Perhaps, if I were to start making deposits after the final temple, and use the Light Arrows to get purple rupees from defeating monsters, it should only take one cycle as opposed to my current pace. My goal determined, I started walking off towards the shop, my head briefly turning towards the Clock Tower because the bank was on the other side.

At the shop, I ran into some problems as a result of who was running things. Last time I was there, the actual shop owner served me, but this time, it was his assistant who had to tend to my needs, and it didn't take long to figure out he didn't really want to be there given his attitude. He had no idea what any of the items did or if he had an idea, he just spouted nonsense in his bid to make himself look smart. I suspected this assistant only worked during the night hence his attitude but if he were to actually put some effort into it, it could help him acquire the necessary skills that would eventually lead him into getting a better job.

After what felt like forever, I was able to purchase two more Red Potions, bombs and some arrows--I was beginning to run out of the latter two--before leaving the shop quickly. Next time I go in there, hopefully the owner was there instead of the assistant. I never met anyone who showed zero motivation in anything though Princess Twilight said she had in the form of Fluttershy's younger brother in Equestria, Zephyr Breeze. According to her, he was voted the laziest pony in all of Equestria for three years running; not exactly a record one should be happy to win as it set off a bad precedent.

Back outside, I played the Song of Soaring for the third time and the wings brought me back to the top of the Stone Tower. Now that I was fully stocked up on the necessary items, it was finally time to see what would happen to this place upon using a Light Arrow as the Garo Master had said. Looking over the chasm at the other side, I could see what I needed to hit though I felt nervous as I had never hit anything at such a far away range like that. To further increase my chances of success, I walked forward and got as close to the edge as possible until my toes were hanging over the edge.

" This is as close as I can get, Twilight."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Unless you were to use those platforms, you'll have to hit the red emblem from here."

" I've personally had enough of having to manipulate switches even if the song is beautiful."

" Perhaps but I suspect we'll see more of this when whatever happens here happens."

" Maybe but my point still stands."

Princess Twilight pointed over to the entrance of the temple before raising her finger up at the emblem itself. " At least it's big enough for you to hit it, Sunset, but you will need to arch your shot if you hope to hit it from this distance. In my opinion, it's going to have to be a perfect shot especially since you can't afford to use up so much Magic Power. I still think getting closer by using those platforms would make it easier but you do what you think is best."

I could tell that Her Highness wanted me to get closer and I ended up caving in all because I had no confidence in my aim. " Okay... I'll use the Elergy of Emptiness but only on the one platform by using my true self to create the shell."

Princess Twilight smiled. " I knew you would make the right choice."

" I never could say no to you."

" Using the platform should make it a little easier."

Stepping on the switch that was right behind me, I took out the ocarina and played the Elergy of Emptiness as one of the platforms moved into position. Surprisingly, it stopped halfway across leading me to wonder if something had gone wrong. " Um... Why did it just stop right there instead of stopping right in front of us?" I stepped aside so as the shell of my true self would appear--it still creeped my out--and took a closer look at what happened. " It's not like I can jump across to it, can I?"

" It is possible for you to make it."

" Really?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You'd need a running start first but that alone won't be enough. Extra speed is needed to leap that far so use the Bunny Hood. Not only does have a use when it battle, it also has practical uses like this right here."

And here I thought the Bunny Hood was only meant to make me fast enough to run about or fight faster monsters with equal speed. I never figured it could be used in an unorthodox manner but there we go. Taking it out and placing it on my head--I just found the ears to be oh so adorable--and stepping back several paces, I gulped and started running at top speed before making a leap of faith, landing on the platform though I had to quickly stop as I would have run off the edge. Looking at the red emblem, it was much closer now so I took out my bow after putting the Bunny Hood away, prepared a Light Arrow and aimed upward.

My first shot completely missed the target--it didn't even come close--prompting Princess Twilight to remind me that I needed to arch my shot carefully so that it would sail across the remaining distance otherwise my shot would come up short as it were. Aiming upwards until my line of sight was directly on the emblem, I aimed even higher knowing a straight aim wouldn't work either and I fired the arrow. It sailed over in an arch formation as expected and struck the emblem right in the center of it. At first, nothing happened which made me think I had been tricked by the Garo Master, but then a loud clicking sound proved that he had been correct.

" What was that noise?"

" I don't know."

Suddenly, the entire Stone Tower began tilting to the left. " What in Equestria is going on!?"

" This must be what happens when light strikes the red emblem."

I began to panic. " I don't want to end up falling into the abyss!" My heartbeat began pounding quickly as the tower continued to tilt and I was forced to grab onto the edge of the platform so that I wouldn't fall but this proved futile as it continued to tilt until the entire structure had turned upside-down. " Ugh! Urrgh! Gah! Twilight... I don't think I can hold on for much longer... Ack!"

Princess Twilight began to panic as well. " I'm not sure what I can tell you, Sunset!"

" I think the Garo Master tricked us in the end." I said. I tried to pull myself up onto the block in hopes of avoiding a terrible plunge but it was no use and I accidentally released my grip and instead of falling into the abyss, I fell down towards the sky. Obviously, I screamed but as I fell, I couldn't help but wonder why I was falling towards the moon. " At least I won't die in the abyss though where I'm currently going isn't really much better!" Everything then went white and when I regained consciousness, something had happened that defied reality and logic together at the same time.

The entire Stone Tower had been turned upside-down as expected but I never would have guessed that it would look the way it did, and what was really weird was that I was no longer falling down towards the sky. No, I was standing firmly on the ground as though nothing had changed other than cosmetics. It was as the Garo Master said, The heavens were now below me while the ground itself was now above me. The Stone Tower's secret had finally been revealed and it explained why I couldn't reach certain treasure chests. Now I could thanks to everything having been turned upside-down but did it mean everything inside the temple had also changed?

" Sunset... Are you seeing what I'm seeing?"

I nodded slowly. " Everything is upside-down."

" I'm not sure how we're unaffected but the entire area has undergone a tremendous change."

" Do you think the temple has been changed?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I wouldn't be surprised at this point. It's also safe to assume that the Dungeon Map has changed to accommodate the tower's shift so think of it as going through an entirely different temple despite it simply being a change in perspective."

I looked up at the sky that was now the ground. " You have to wonder what happened to those Beamos and the boulders we encountered along the way up?" I then looked down at the sky before and gulped. " The moon is falling up towards us now. This is definitely the weirdest thing we've ever seen, Twilight. I mean, nothing like this has ever happened back home in Equestria as far as I know but it has been a really long time since I last paid a visit."

" I've seen all kinds of weird things in Equestria yet nothing like this."

" Well, I've often thought that this world continues getting weirder with every passing moment."

" I'm starting to see why."

I looked over at the now upside-down temple and noticed that the red emblem hadn't moved. It made sense since it looked the same at all angles so it was the only thing that wasn't affected by how everything had changed. In front of me were three platforms that were now stationary and didn't require me to move them with the Elergy of Emptiness. At least I didn't have to deal with creating those shells but then there was no way of knowing if I would have to use the song in the temple now that it was upside-down. I looked behind my back and noticed that the Owl Statue had disappeared. Had it fallen down into the sky upon everything inverting?

But then, if I were to leave the Stone Tower by warping away with the Song of Soaring--there was no chance of going back down to the entrance as that was now above my head--would everything go back to the way it was supposed to be upon returning here later? That felt rather redundant but then nothing about this world surprised me anymore given all that I had seen so far. Another thought then crossed my mind. What would happen if I were to hit the red emblem with another Light Arrow. Would everything go back to normal or was this transition permanent?

I turned to Princess Twilight. " Would everything change back if I hit that emblem again?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes though you would need to have a pretty good reason given we need to have the temple inverted to access the boss room."

That answered that question. " Guess we should make our way over and enter the temple again."

" You should be able to make all those jumps since you're still wearing the Bunny Hood."

Reaching up on top of my head, my hands felt the fuzzy ears of the Bunny Hood, reminding me that I had been wearing them this entire time including when I was at the shop back in town--the assistant probably didn't even notice since he showed no signs of caring about anything. Taking a few steps back, I ran forward and began jumping across each platform, the Bunny Hood giving me the extra distance I needed, until I reached the other side though I almost didn't make it due to the final jump ending with a slight slope. Taking off my mask and putting it away, I walked forward and entered the temple.

Upon entering the Stone Tower Temple again, I was surprised at how different it looked despite it simply being upside-down. The raised groove with the mark of Majora's Mask on it was now directly in front of me including the small treasure chest I had caused to materialize when I activated the sun switch earlier with a Light Arrow. It felt weird that the sky was below me as opposed to above but this was nothing compared to what could be waiting for me further along. There was also the fact that Midnight Sparkle was still around though she might have been shook up a little by the sudden change.

I walked forward making sure to be careful as the pathway was extremely narrow--also it twisted slightly in places--until I reached the chest and kicked it open. A Stray Fairy came out of it before entering my body giving me ten altogether yet now I had no idea where I was supposed to go next. " Which way are we supposed to go?"

" Let's take a look at the Dungeon Map now."

I took out the map and unfurled it only to be shocked at how it had changed. " What the!? It's a completely different map."

" Yes." Twilight said. " It makes sense since we have inverted the Stone Tower."

" So which way can we go?"

Princess Twilight looked closely at the map before giving me an answer. " The only way forward I can see right now is to the right but there is something on here that you should take a look at before we continue." Her Highness then pointed at a skull on the map that was located where the Garo Master had been fought. " It seems the Garo Master was in the same room that houses the boss, yet now we need a Boss Key to gain access this time around."

" Where do you suppose that could be?"

" I have no idea."

That wasn't very reassuring indicating that using the map was going to be essential. " Guess we might as well go in the one direction we can." According to the map, there was a door to my right and it involved walking a really weirdly shaped path. " At least this door doesn't require a key otherwise I would have lost my temper by now." I walked very slowly so as to not fall down until I reached the door and opened it to the next room where I got stopped by a sun block. There was something strange about it that made me feel uneasy. " I can sense an evil presence coming from this thing."

" It's because I enchanted it." Midnight Sparkle said as the upper half of her body came out of the wall to my left.

" You've got a lot of nerve showing yourself."

Midnight Sparkle brushed my comment aside. " Oh don't act like you're some kind of high authority, Sunset. You did me a favour by defeating Sunset Demon as she had been getting on my nerves, but I will admit that I wasn't expecting her to have hired that assassin to kill her. On a different note, what in the world happened to this place? Everything has turned upside-down and it's done nothing but confused me to no end."

" The temple will remain that way until I choose to switch it back."

" Wait! You did this?"

I nodded. " Guess you didn't like having your world turned upside-down?"

Midnight Sparkle wasn't amused by my pun. " I can't believe you did that but then I am impressed that you possessed the ability to do so. Don't take my comment as a sign that I will make things easier for you. I've no intention of being defeated, especially when I'm so close to achieving my goal. I'm going to fight you, Sunset, but when I feel the need to do so and no sooner than that. My power is greater than yours even if you can turn this place upside-down while I can't but that will change soon enough. Anyway, this sun block isn't anything special yet I coated it with darkness just to prove a point and to grab your attention."

" You're a coward."

" I'm being strategic."

" Either I'm going to take care of you or something else will."

" Considering how you acted when you took on Sunset Demon, I doubt you'd be willing to carry out such a pitiful threat." Midnight Sparkle said. " You shouldn't make threats if you aren't allow to carry them out. It kind of gives off a bad image and you can't afford to have that since you're supposed to be the heroine." She then disappeared back into the wall laughing as she did leaving me to deal with the altered sun block.

I then could no longer sense the evil presence coming from it. " Well, at least we can continue on now."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Midnight Sparkle is certainly enjoying herself while taunting you."

" She will get what's coming to her later."

" And you will figure out what you want to do."

I sighed. I wasn't looking forward to when that would happen but I knew it had to be dealt with. Taking out my bow, I fired a Light Arrow at the sun block, removing it and revealing the rest of the room. The mirror on the ceiling coupled with the upside-down large treasure chest told me that this was where the Compass was located. At least I was in familiar territory though everything else had completely changed. Instead of there being water, air currents were blowing up from various holes, and a Deku Flower hinted that my Deku Scrub body was necessary for me to keep going.

Ahead of me was a pathway that went across the room that was blocked off by fencing and inside were several Blue Bubbles. I didn't recall seeing this when I came through here initially when the Stone Tower Temple was right-side up but this room proved that each would be different from before. I then looked down below to see if there was anything of merit but I couldn't see what with how much air blew about. I then looked up and could see there was even more to the room than initially suspected. Judging from how high it got, flying would prove essential provided I could control myself in mid-flight.

As I stared at the air currents, some of them suddenly began shooting bursts of flame that caught me by surprise. I fell onto my butt and scampered back to avoid being roasted before getting back onto my feet and began checking to see if my heart was beating normally. I knew without needing to guess that this was Midnight Sparkle's doing but it meant progressing through this room had just gotten more difficult. One hit from those flames would kill me instantly while in Deku Scrub form and I wouldn't even know which current would change from air to fire until it was too late.

Midnight Sparkle's voice then echoed all around. " I said that the sun block wasn't anything special but I didn't say anything about the flaming columns. The look on your face combined with your reaction was oh-so adorable, I wanted to take a picture of such a moment, but then I don't have a camera to use. Either you'll make it through or end up becoming nothing more than a charbroiled piece of wood."

As her voice disappeared, I took out the Deku Mask, placed it on my face, and began convulsing as my body shimmered from human to Deku. Midnight Sparkle was doing her utmost to taunt me into making a mistake and I knew I couldn't listen to her words. I had to focus on getting through this room whilst avoiding the fire whenever it comes. Once I had finished my transformation, I jumped into the Deku Flower, and launched myself only for an air current to suddenly become fire. I floated for a few moments while the fire shot upwards but my flowers began slowing down indicating that I was about to fall.

Luckily, the fire switched back to an air current and I flew towards it before being pushed up by the powerful breeze. It actually felt really nice considering I just felt the intense heat moments ago, but I wouldn't be appreciating it for long. I then floated up to a small ledge with a blue switch and Deku Flower on it and flew forward only for the air to change into fire, blasting me from behind, the resulting force causing me to roll right into the wall and leaving me dazed. When I came to, I accidentally pressed the switch and a circle of fire disappeared on a ledge further up. I suspected there was a treasure chest up there but I needed to keep the switch pressed.

" Looks like you need to play the Elergy of Emptiness." Twilight said. " It's unfortunate that the Deku Scrub shell can't be used due to it being too light."

I moaned. " And I was hoping to have been done with having to create shells."

" I did say to expect something like this."

" I know, I know."

" You might as well do it since there isn't much of a choice unless a block were to suddenly appear out of nowhere."

As if one cue, a small crate suddenly flew out from nowhere, smacking me in face. " Ouch!" I said as I rubbed my bruised mouth. " I wish you could have said something a little less threatening but it looks like I've found a means of avoiding having to create a shell using the Elergy of Emptiness." I reached out to pick up the crate only for it for the air to blow it off of the ledge and in a random direction leaving me holding nothing. " I really should learn to keep my mouth shut sometimes."

" That could have been Midnight Sparkle's doing."

I sighed. " I wouldn't put it past her to give me some help only to quickly take it away as a means of torment."

" Now you have to create a shell as intended."

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Deku Mask, and flipped back my hair all whilst grumbling under my breath over what had just happened. If Midnight Sparkle had done all of that just to spite me, I was really going to give her a rude awakening when we find her. Placing my mask on the ground, I whipped out the ocarina, played the Elergy of Emptiness, stepped forward as the shell of my true self appeared, keeping the switch down, and preventing the ring of fire from returning. Picking up my mask and putting it back on, I began convulsing and my body shimmered once again as I changed from human to Deku.

I then jumped into the Deku Flower but was forced to wait as the air current became fire once again. While I wasn't too annoyed with this little twist Midnight Sparkle had thrown me to make things more difficult, I was more concerned with wasting too much time given that if I had my calculations correct, we were getting closer to dawn. Was she trying slow me down intentionally or was there something else at play? I couldn't allow myself to become worried about how much time remained. I had to focus on getting through the rest of the temple and awaken the final Giant. So long as all four were freed, time wouldn't really be a factor.

When the fire became the air current, I launched myself out of the Deku Flower, and grab the wind as it pushed up to the ledge where the ring of fire had been. On top of the ledge was a small treasure chest that I kicked open upon landing on it and a Stray Fairy emerged where it entered my body. That was now eleven of them leaving me only four remaining but then my eyes caught sight of a locked door. That meant there was a key somewhere in this room. I wasn't surprised since locked doors were a standard though I thought it was some kind of trick by Midnight Sparkle designed to annoy me.

Rather than jump down to the ground below--Deku Scrubs couldn't sustain such a fall--I jumped into the Deku Flower that was on this ledge and launched myself where I began floating downward in hopes of getting closer without dropping a long distance. At that moment, the air current became flames, pushing me in the opposite direction though my flowers prevented me from hitting the wall. A shame that my flowers had to give up right there and then causing me to fall the rest of the way, but before hitting the ground, I took off the Deku Mask in hopes that the landing would be more tolerable as a human than as a Deku.

" O-o-o-o-oooooooohhhh!" I moaned as I landed hard on the ground, my knees buckling in the process.

" Are you alright?"

I nodded whilst gritting my teeth. " That was absolutely painful to no end!"

" At least you didn't land as a Deku Scrub."

" If I had done, I'd be in even more pain than I already am." I said. It took me a moment to stand fully upright as my legs needed time to get over having made such a heavy impact on the ground, and when they did, I was knocked down onto my back when a Hiploop on the walkway charged at me. " Ooof!" When I got back up this time, I took out the Hookshot and waited for it to turn around after it had turned away from me. " Strange how I didn't notice it until it attacked with that horn." And when it did turn around to charge, I fired the Hookshot's chain, latched onto the mask, and pulled it off before using my sword to destroy it.

" Always pay close attention to your surroundings."

I moaned as I walked forward, jumping up and down several times along the way to get my legs to start circulating again. " We need to find the key so that we can get out of this room, but it looks like we've searched everywhere other than through that corridor in front of us."

" Let me take a look at the map." Twilight said. I took it out and unfurled it before she began combing over it. " The corridor ahead goes forward a little ways before turning left and continues going until it reaches a dead-end in another room. The key we need could be down there but then again, we know where each treasure chest is since the Compass does show them as marks on the map." She pointed to one such mark nearby--it was actually right behind where I was standing--yet there was no chest behind me. " Perhaps we need to do something down that corridor that will make a chest appear in here."

" Guess we might as well try it out." I said. Hopping up the step and walking down the corridor, I turned left and saw a trail of rupees that looked to be hanging over a pit, but then my eyes noticed a switch located just in front of them. " That must make the chest appear."

" It seems a little too easy, don't you think?"

I nodded. " Yeah, but we can't just stand here and wait for something to happen."

" Just be sure you can handle it."

I walked forward when flames began shooting out of nowhere from the walls, floor, and ceiling. " YEEEOOOWW!" I shouted as I was caught off guard and got hit by the fire before being knocked back onto my butt. Getting back up, I quickly patted my body in an attempt to put out the fire but when that proved ineffective, I began rolling back the other way until it was put out. " Okay, I don't thin that was supposed to happen."

" Another one of Midnight Sparkle's traps."

" How do I get past that?"

Princess Twilight observed the flames burning until they stopped only for them to not start up again. " I have a theory on what we can do, but you will need to sacrifice a small object to prove it for me. Could you toss a rupee down the corridor for me, Sunset? I know you need them to buy things but it's the only thing I can think of that won't melt when being surrounded by so much fire."

" I think I get what you're thinking of." I said. I took out my wallet, opened it up, and pulled out a single green rupee before putting my wallet away. " Good thing I know how to flick objects otherwise this would be pretty embarrassing right now." Princess Twilight looked at me with confusion on her face and I couldn't help but roll my eyes in response. " It's a human thing kids and teenagers do out of boredom. I'll tell you more about it sometime." Flicking the rupee, it bounced along until it stopped near the switch, and the flames suddenly appeared, burning everything in sight until they disappeared again.

" As I suspected." Twilight said. " The fire comes out when someone gets to close to the switch."

" So how am I supposed to activate it?"

" You're going to have to dodge the flames as they come."

" Just like playing a game of dodgeball." I said. Again, Princess Twilight looked at me with a confused expression and I rolled my eyes again. " I'm surprised you've never played dodgeball before, Twilight. I'm guessing Equestria either doesn't have the game or it has its own version, but again, I'll tell you about it sometime when this is all said and done. In any case, things are about to get really hot and I'm not trying to make a joke out of it."

I walked forward and the flames then appeared as before causing me to raise my hand above my eyes so that I could see what was happening. The switch remained perfectly fine but there were no spaces in-between for me to slip through so unless I could charge through somehow, the fire would surely burn my body something fierce. Midnight Sparkle had definitely outdone herself with this one but I wasn't about to give up just yet at this stage of the journey. I began thinking of a means to get through when I suddenly had a brilliant idea, one I never even considered before.

Even though Gorons could withstand fire better than the other tribes in Termina, as Darmani, I would be too slow when it came to walking, and rolling was sure to make me miss the switch and plunge over the edge in the next room. No, this called for something more traditional combined with an absolute sense of sheer insanity. Taking the Mirror Shield off of my back, I held it up close to my body using both hands and ducked as much as I could behind it. I also needed a running start--the Bunny Hood would have burnt to ashes by the fire so using it was too risky--so I walked back a few steps, the fire coming to a stop.

Running forward with my shield up, the flames came out from the walls yet I plowed right through them, raising my head ever so slightly so that I knew when to stop. The flames singed my tunic, arms, and legs but I kept on running until the switch activated when my feet stepped on it. I heard the sound of a treasure chest materializing somewhere but I couldn't think about it since I had to run all the way back. Stepping back a few paces, I began running back, the flames began shooting out as before, and I plowed my way through. Again, my tunic, arms, and legs got singed but it was worth it if it meant surviving Midnight Sparkle's death trap.

Heading around the corner and back into the main part of the room, I noticed the treasure chest had appeared in-between two pots that I looked at before when I looked behind my back initially when Princess Twilight mentioned a chest would be there as the map detailed. Walking across the walkway and hopping up onto the rised step, I smashed the pots with my sword, picking up a couple of hearts--I needed them after what I had endured--and kicked open the chest revealing a small key. Now I was getting somewhere as this would let me unlock the door at the top provided I flew up there to reach it.

" Now we just need to get back up to the top." I said as I put the key in my pocket.

" Rather than use a Deku Flower, you should just use the air currents."

" You think that will work?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I do, but you need to make sure not to get hit by the flames."

" Curse Midnight Sparkle."

" I wouldn't let her tricks get to you, Sunset."

I sighed. " You're right, Twilight."

" She will come unstuck when we finally have to deal with her." Twilight said. " She has a lot to answer for but know that you don't have to necessary destroy her. I mean, you could do that as you are well justified in doing so, but you would be doing so in the name of revenge. If you were to kill her, do it because it's the right thing. Or, perhaps she will meet her end against one of the more powerful monsters that still lurks around here."

" I've got a lot to think about then."

" If you go for the revenge angle, I won't condemn you for it."

" Thanks, Twilight."

" Like I said, you will make the right decision when the time comes."

Taking out the Deku Mask again and placing it on my face, I began convulsing yet again--three times within the last ten minutes--and changed into my Deku Scrub form. While I would have preferred diving down into a Deku Flower, Princess Twilight assured me that I could simply use the air currents without the flower. I had every confidence in her advice--she had never steered me wrong--so I jumped down into the current and began floating upwards though I was forced to quickly move forward when the current became flames. Sadly, I didn't fully avoid the fire resulting in my butt getting slightly singed--it hurt like gangbusters because of being a plant now.

I felt the searing pain on my butt but I couldn't do anything about it until I reached the locked door. Fortunately, the flames turned back into air and I used the current to push myself up until reaching the top of the room. The locked door was on a ledge to my left that was surrounded by a few exploding mines that were bolted to the ceiling via chains. I began floating towards them though my flowers began weakening but I kept going in hopes of being able to weave in-between them without causing any vibrations. My flowers gave up a few moments later and I weaved past all three mines only for my foot to hit one causing to collide with another and exploding both.

The explosion from the mines didn't hurt me but I was pushed forward until I smacked into the locked door--the story of my life--and was dazed momentarily. When I regained my senses moments later, I was about to unlock the door when Princess Twilight alerted me to a sun switch that was upside-down located on the ledge where the chest with the Stray Fairy had been. I turned around and looked downwards to see it with my own eyes, and I slapped my forehead in annoyance. How could I have missed something that obvious? I knew what needed to be done so I grabbed my face, pulled off my mask, and flipped back my hair before taking out my bow.

Unlike the red emblem, the sun switch was much closer in terms of distance. All it took was a single Light Arrow to hit it causing to glow before displaying its goofy grin, but when the treasure chest materialized upside-down on the other side of the ledge, I slapped my forehead even harder. If that chest contained a Stray Fairy, I had to invert the temple back to its original position. Granted, this was an early room so it wasn't as bad as it looked. Unlocking the door and entering the next room, I was surprised to see two large pits but before I could assess the situation, something suddenly dropped down from above.

Chapter 63: Coat of Keese

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
July 3, 2017
Chapter 63: Coat of Keese.

Whatever was dropping down from above, I wasn't about to get hit by it so I quickly went back through the door to the previous room, and a loud thud could be heard from the other side indicating that the problem had passed. It must have been pretty heavy to make a thud that loud and had it actually hit me, I would have been knocked into the pit that was closest to the door--getting injured would become an afterthought. Pressing my ear up against the door, I could hear additional thuds coming from the other side so it wasn't just a one time thing though there was a definite pattern.

The thuds hitting the ground would pause for about five seconds after roughly ten seconds so that gave me a small window of opportunity to not get hit. Of course, if things were to get out of hand, I could always use my shield by holding it above my head. It reminded me of the time during my previous journey where I used my shield like a shell to protect myself from rocks that fell as a result of an active volcano. Granted, the shield I used back then was much larger than I was whereas the Mirror Shield was smaller so this wasn't going to be an exact recreation of what I did.

Opening the door and going back into the other room, I raised my shield above my head, and just in time as something fell down and landed on it. My legs buckled slightly due to experiencing a sudden burst of pressure before it lifted when whatever struck the Mirror Shield broke into pieces and scattered about. It happened again only this time I could see what was dropping down--another object came down a few feet away--and I could finally see what it was. What was falling down were large rocks that broke upon impact with the ground yet they were drenched in fire which made no sense until I looked up.

Above me was a pool of lava that constantly dripped out rocks yet there were two platforms floating on the surface of the lava that struck me as odd; not because they were up there but because they defied gravity as surely their weight would have caused them to drop into one of the two pits that stood between me and the way out. There was no way I could jump across--even with the Bunny Hood--so I needed another solution and quickly. I had no doubt my shield wouldn't break from getting hit with so many rocks yet my body wouldn't last for very long especially with my legs buckling after every hit.

My eyes then noticed another red emblem on the other side of the room and I knew what would happen if it were struck with a Light Arrow. There was just one problem were I to do just that and cause everything to flip over. Would it affect everything or would only this room be affected? I had no way of knowing what would happen unless I fired at the emblem but it wasn't going to be easy as the rocks falling from above intended on disrupting my concentration. A shame that the Stone Mask couldn't help me to avoid getting hit but then these rocks weren't living creatures and I couldn't necessary hide myself from inanimate objects.

Taking out the Hero's Bow, I was about to fire a Light Arrow when another rock fell down from above prompting me to raise my shield. The impact of the rock on my shield caused me to drop my bow and I reached down by squatting so that I could pick it up only for a much larger rock to hit my shield. I didn't get knocked down or anything but my legs definitely didn't enjoy the experience but at least my bow wasn't damaged otherwise I would be stuck on a permanent scale. Picking it back up, I fired a Light Arrow at the emblem, and the room began to tilt causing me to slide to the left before suddenly dropping straight down.

Landing on the ground below--my legs buckled again--the rocks were no longer dropping down from above as the lava was right-side up. The door was now upside-down so I needed to flip the room back to the way it was so that I could continue. All that was left was to cross the lava pool though I wasn't feeling very confident about it. The intense heat that seeped forth brushed itself across my entire body and made me nervous to no end as one misstep meant plunging right into it and dying instantly. I thought about using the Bunny Hood but the speed increase was also too risky.

Putting my bow away and making sure I was in straight line, I jumped across the lava, landing firmly on the first platform only for my legs to give out--the buckling had affected me more than I thought--causing me to trip and fall flat on my face. " Oooof!" My body then slid along slightly before stopping at the edge of the platform and my face was mere inches from the lava. " Yeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee..."

" Are you okay, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" Does it look like it?" I asked sarcastically.

" Yeah, that was a stupid question."

I pulled my face away from the lava. " That was probably the closest I've ever been to lava and I'd rather not have a repeat performance."

" You know..." Twilight began. " You could have become a Goron and simply walked across the lava without needing to jump. Gorons love traversing about in lava as it has no effect on them unlike the other tribes who live in Termina."

I stared off blankly into space for what felt like an eternity before slapping my forehead as hard as I could. " Let us never speak of this again." How could I have been so stupid as to not use the obvious solution and instead opt for making things much harder than necessary? I once again didn't see the bigger picture but then I wanted to do things the hard way rather than take an easy path that wouldn't prove satisfying. " Well... I made it this far so I might as well go the entire distance provided my legs don't give out again."

Princess Twilight shrugged. " No need to make things challenging, Sunset."

" It builds character."

" It also builds insanity."

" Fair point."

" Anyway, once you make it to the other side, you'll need to use a Light Arrow to invert this room back to the way it was." Twilight said. She then floated over to the second platform followed by the ceiling before finally coming back down to me. " That second platform is above the ground so you won't fall down into the abyss when the room turns over. I would suggest getting your shield ready as you will get bombarded by fiery rocks the moment everything is inverted."

Getting up, I jumped over to the other platform--I almost tripped again--before taking out the bow and shooting a Light Arrow at the red emblem. The entire room began tilting and I started sliding towards the lava so I quickly scrambled to avoid falling in by attempting to run only to suddenly drop down to the ground below and landing with a thud. My legs once again buckled--to my annoyance--from the impact but there was no time to complain as the rocks were now falling from above like before. Raising my shield, one such rock dropped down and shattered upon impact with my shield though my legs didn't buckle this time.

Not wanting to experience my legs feeling more pain, I opened the door and entered the next room where I immediately noticed two Chu-Chu hopping up and down on a raised platform on the other side of the room. One was green denoting that it would drop Magic Jars upon being defeated while the other was yellow denoting that it would drop arrows upon defeat--I could see both respective items inside their gelatin-like bodies. Since Chu-Chus regenerated after a while, I began trying to figure out why these two in particular were here.

" If I wanted to restock on magic and arrows, these two Chu-Chus will definitely provide."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but there has to be more to it than that, Sunset. I doubt they are here simply to give you a restock on two key items otherwise the room would have been much smaller. No, I think they are part of a puzzle as otherwise there would be much stronger monsters instead." Her Highness' eyes then noticed a block to our right that was barely visible as it was on a lower level and began bopping me on the head to grab my attention. " Maybe that block can be pushed and pulled about?"

I noticed a small groove in the floor that was square-shaped. " It looks like the block has to be pushed into that slot."

" I'm not sure how you can get it over there."

" By pushing it of course."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " That's not what I meant." She pointed to the ground in-between where I was standing and where the Chu-Chus were hopping about. That block is probably too heavy even for a Goron to lift so pushing it over to that groove isn't going to happen unless you can find another means of getting it there."

I began looking around for something that could help with this puzzle and then I grumbled upon seeing what I had to do. " There's another red emblem over on the other side of the room above the door." I said as I pointed at it whilst keeping my arm close to my chest. " While it does explain why these Chu-Chus are in here, I'm not liking the idea of having to switch gravity constantly just to get one block over to a spot in the ground where it needs to be."

" You don't have much of a choice."

" This is just unfair, Twilight!"

" I know but that's the nature of this temple."

" At least I won't run out of magic and arrows until we leave."

" That's the spirit!"

Deep down, I wanted to sit in the corner of a small room and cry for a while. I had no problem solving puzzles as it gave my brain a good workout but I didn't want to have to resort to so much unnecessary physical labour to achieve my goal. I walked to the right and looked down at the block that I had to push and pull throughout the room. It wasn't one of those huge blocks but rather a small one that required a modest amount of strength to push it. The problem was that the two Chu-Chus were bound to get in the way resulting in my taking too many hits and draining my health.

Before doing anything else, I took out the Dungeon Map and began looking at the room I was in. To my relief, there were no treasure chest marks so all I had to do was focus on getting the block into place though that involved planning everything out carefully. I needed to push it just enough otherwise it would either be too far or too small resulting in disaster when it came to inverting the room and being forced to leave and come back to go through it all again. No, this had to be done right on my first attempt. I just had to hope Midnight Sparkle had no intention of adding her own twist to an already annoying puzzle.

Jumping down to the ground below and placing my hands on the block, I began to push it using all the strength I could muster. I couldn't use my legs as the focal point as they needed to recover after so many buckles I experienced thanks to falling so many times in the previous room so I had to use my upper body instead. The block only moved a small distance before it got stuck against the edge of a raised groove so already the room needed to be inverted so I could continue moving it along. Sighing, I move around to the other side only to get attacked by both Chu-Chus who had since bounced their way over.

They slammed into me using their bodies and while I got pushed back a tiny distance, the damage they inflicted was minimal. Using my sword, I destroyed both of them with a single swing and picked up the magic jar and arrows that dropped from their bodies. While both items were wet to touch, I had no complaints as I needed to keep restocking both magic and arrows until I got out of this room. Since the two Chu-Chus would re-spawn after some time had passed, I walked around the block and fired a Light Arrow at the red emblem causing the entire room to turn upside-down.

I dropped straight to the ground this time instead of sliding in one direction but what was more strange was how my legs didn't buckle unlike before. " I'm glad my legs didn't take any kind of injury as they don't need any further damage done to them."

" Maybe this room is a lot smaller than appearances suggest?"

" I won't complain if you won't either."

" Anyway, you probably noticed that the block also dropped down to the ground when the room flipped over after you hit the red emblem." Twilight said. " You'll have to do some very miniscule back-tracking in that the block might need to be pushed or pulled a little into place before you use a Light Arrow on the red emblem to flip the room over again."

" Is there any way of knowing when I've pushed or pulled it enough?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " This is going to come down to making an educated guess. I mean, I could give you a rough idea though perhaps you should trust your instincts and move the block about accordingly until you feel it's in the right spot. Precision is important here, Sunset. One mistake means having to waste time flipping the room again to fix the mistake before having to flip it over again to continue."

My drop dropped slightly. " You're kidding me right?" Princess Twilight shook her head again and I bit my thumb in response. " Coupled with those Chu-Chus reappearing just to cause me annoyance is only going to add to my stress levels which are already tense enough as it is." This temple was really starting to get on my nerves but then it was the last one so extra difficulty wasn't beyond the realm of obviousness. I looked at the block followed by where the grooves in the ground nearby were and looked back and forth several times until I grabbed the block with my hands. " Well, here goes nothing."

" Incoming!"

I let go of the block and slashed both Chu-Chu's with my sword. " Nice timing, Twilight."

" They did re-spawn in the same place they were in when you destroyed them initially."

" Good to know as that means I can deal with them the instant they come back." I said as I picked up the magic jar and arrows. Grabbing the block again, I pushed it forward a little until it looked as though it could be pushed in-between two slopes before pushing it forward until it stopped against the raised groove. " I've got to say that this isn't easy without using my legs to provide extra force but I'm not going to use a potion given that I haven't taken any damage other than pitiful fall damage that wasn't even my fault."

" Just don't put too much strain on your chest."

" Because of my heart?"

" And the fact that you need your chest to give function to your other body parts."

Sometimes, I couldn't tell when Princess Twilight was trying to be serious, funny, insulting, or just about anything given her choice of words. I ended up nodding my head just to get past such an awkward statement and continue on making my way through this puzzle, but I had to question her judgment on such matters. Maybe the pressure of being in this world was beginning to affect her mind? I knew I couldn't exactly confront Her Highness about it as she would either dodge the concern or say something that made little sense. I needed to keep a close watch on her just to make sure she doesn't say or do something that she'll regret later.

Using another Light Arrow on the red emblem, the room turned right side-up and the block landed on the raised groove allowing me to move it along. I pressed my hands against it and began pushing it along only to suddenly stop when I got hit by the Yellow Chu-Chu from behind. They were re-spawning back a lot quicker than usual leading me to suspect that these were either special versions or Midnight Sparkle had used her power on them. Either way, I swung my sword and took it out before stepping back and destroying the Green Chu-Chu as it was about to jump--both left behind their usual drops.

Pushing the block actually proved beneficial for my legs as I needed them to regain their strength so that I could start using them as a focal point instead of my chest. My chest was beginning to feel sore as the amount of pressure being placed on it so that I could push the block was starting to take its toll on me. I estimated that my chest would give out if I were to continue pushing it so I needed to finish this puzzle. Eventually, the block dropped down slightly due to the raised groove having ended and I began looking to see where it was supposed to go next. The final resting place was slightly to my left but would I need to push the block only a short distance?

As I wracked my brains trying to figure it out, the corner of my eye noticed the two Chu-Chus had re-spawned again and I swiftly took care of them though this time they dropped rupees indicating that I was full up on both magic and arrows. Pushing too far could mean missing the target though not far enough would mean coming up short. Both results meant wasting some time to fix the mistake so I chose to just go with my gut and hope the block fell into place. I pushed it forward slightly followed by walking to the right and pushing it forward a medium amount before firing a Light Arrow at the red emblem to change things again.

The block landed on the same line as the groove it needed to be pushed into so I began pushing it forward until it could no longer be pushed, my legs getting stronger and stronger with every push, but then I was suddenly knocked to the ground by the Green Chu Chu who had re-spawned right on top of me. While the damage I took was hardly anything, I was still taken by surprise--I also felt embarrassed that a living blob of water had gotten the best of me--given I was focused on pushing this block. Taking out my sword, I slashed the blob and destroyed it yet again only to get blindsided by the other one only to retaliate in kind.

Since I had used magic and arrows, the two Chu-Chus dropped their respective items and not rupees. Picking them up, I fired one more Light Arrow to invert the room and pushed the block until it fell into place and unlocked the door by raising the iron bars. Princess Twilight then bopped my head to draw my attention and she pointed at something that was behind us so I looked behind and my jaw dropped in an instant. There was another red emblem above the door I had entered the room from. I could have made things a lot easier had I used them both in tandem instead of just the one.

" This just isn't my day." I said as I slapped my forehead.

" We all have bad days, Sunset."

" I can't believe I never noticed the other red emblem until you pointed it out."

" It was an oversight on my part."

I then swung my sword when the two Chu-Chus re-spawned yet again, destroying them both and dropping two green rupees. " At least I don't have to worry about magic or arrows for a while though I feel like taking my frustration out on something. I know it sounds weird giving in to my anger but after going through this obnoxious puzzle, I feel the need to vent or else it could affect me emotionally later on."

" Well... Okay, but don't make a habit out of it."

" You've every right to be concerned, Twilight, but I'm a lot stronger mentally than I was back before you taught me about friendship." I said. " I'm not going to succumb to any twisted desires and act like a sadistic monster. I just feel the need to let off some steam to regain my focus and not dwell on it, you know? Surely you yourself have felt a similar passion whenever things were going wrong for you one day and you felt an urge boil within."

Princess Twilight nodded whilst blushing. " Okay, so I can't help feeling that way sometimes."

" Don't worry." I said. " I'll be sure not to cave in to my temper. I've seen what it can do and it frightens me every time I think about it." Looking at the now unlocked door, it was on high-up ledge so the block would act as a platform. Climbing onto the block and performing a simple leap across, I landed on the ledge, opened the door and entered the next room and immediately noticed some very familiar panels scattered about. " You have got to be kidding me!"

" It looks like you need to defeat yet another Wizzrobe."

" How many of these guys are there!?"

" I'm not sure but I suggest you look up."

I did so and my entire body froze upon seeing a pool of lava above my head. " Does this mean I have to not only fight the Wizzrobe and dodge his attacks, I have to avoid getting hit by falling rocks of various sizes?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " This will be a battle of concentration as you will need to avoid the falling rocks in addition to the magic he will throw at you. At the same time, you could make this fight go a lot quicker if you were to use the Light Arrows as a means of attacking rather than the sword. It would require knowing where the Wizzrobe is going to appear otherwise you'd just be wasting arrows and magic but I suspect it will fall relatively quickly to the Light Arrows as he is a creature of darkness."

" I wonder why he hasn't appeared yet."

" It could be that we haven't triggered some kind of loading zone."

I looked at Princess Twilight with a weird look on my face. " Do you even know what you just said?"

Princess Twilight was completely silent thus proving my point but she eventually answered. " I don't know why I suddenly said that considering I have no idea what a loading zone even is since it's a term that doesn't exist in any Equestrian dictionary. I'm still right about the Wizzrobe not having appeared yet but maybe he will if you took a step forward?" I continued looking at her and she blushed before waggling her finger in my face. " What!? Don't give me that look!" She then turned her face away from me and began to giggle. " Okay, I'll admit it was funny but we should focus on the effort at hand."

Again, she dodged things by saying something completely random. Granted, I shouldn't have kept looking at her with that expression but I couldn't believe that she mentioned loading zone without knowing what it meant. Fortunately, I was familiar with the term since Rainbow Dash never could stop talking about it every time she insisted on us watching her play video games until late at night where we eventually fall asleep. The Wizzrobe didn't appear as I had not reached an invisible line somewhere in the room that would trigger his appearance yet it involved some kind of programming which is where it all gets confusing--Rainbow knew more as she was obsessed with these games.

Taking a step forward, a Red Wizzrobe--better than blue as it meant dealing with fire instead of ice--appeared from the panel in the top left corner of the room. He disappeared almost instantly only to reappear moments later on the panel that was to my left. I took out the Hero's Bow and was prepared to fire a Light Arrow when rocks from above fell down, knocking me to the ground and allowing him to fling one of his magic spells. I rolled along to get away from the blast radius yet my tunic was slightly singed as I hadn't rolled away fast enough prompting him to laugh at my misery before he disappeared.

No doubt the rocks were going to be an issue so I began looking to see if there was any cover. I couldn't find any though there was a strange light coming from a hole in the ground nearby yet there was something about it that felt familiar. I then looked up at the ceiling again and was shocked to see an upside-down empty treasure chest hanging up there. This was the room where I found the Dungeon Map and those Armos yet now it was inverted and proved to be more annoying than I thought. More rocks then fell and I weaved about to avoid them only to suddenly get blasted at point-blank range by the Red Wizzrobe.

He had appeared on a panel that was on a ledge yet I couldn't hit him as I struggled to put out the fire that was now consuming me. Fortunately, it was magic fire so it would go out on its own yet I was already taking more damage than necessary and the fight had only just gotten started. Coupled with the fact that rocks continued to drop down from above was making me feel really nervous, and here I was hoping to vent off some frustration given what happened in the previous room. A shame I didn't have any magic that could protect me from projectiles as this would have made things so much easier but I had to deal with what fate had dealt me.

The Red Wizzrobe then appeared right next to me but quickly disappeared proving how cowardly he was before appearing on the ledge again. He began to dance around in a circle giving me enough time to prepare a Light Arrow but then I was knocked down by a rock--it was really painful given it came from a pool of lava--and when I got back onto my feet, I retreated so as to avoid getting hit by his magic again. When he disappeared and reappeared again moments later, he showed up on a panel next to the hole in the ground. Aiming at him and firing a Light Arrow, I managed to score a hit and the Red Wizzrobe screamed as the light damaged him immensely.

" You were right about how the Light Arrow caused him great pain."

" Creatures of darkness always despised the light."

" I'll admit that his scream was very unnerving."

" I would suggest not getting sentimental, Sunset." Twilight said. " This Wizzrobe is still a monster and has every intention of seeing you dead. While his scream was rather unwarranted, you need to get past that and focus on defeating him before he roasts you alive with his magic."

" Now you know why I don't like destroying monsters."

" You just do so as a means of progression."

" I know..."

" You destroy them because you have no choice but you don't take delight in such actions." Twilight said. " They attack you all the time giving you the right to fight back in response, an honourable approach if I do say so myself. Of course, there is no black and white when it comes to these things, Sunset. Some will argue that destroying monsters is nothing short of barbaric while others will claim it a necessity for the safety of innocent lives. I like how you focus more towards saving others rather than killing monsters for personal gain. It's what makes you who you are in this kind of setting."

I intended on responding to Her Highness only for the Red Wizzrobe to reappear to my right and fired his magic after dancing around in circles. The blast was sudden yet it sailed over my head, the flames burning right behind me upon impact, and my expression one of sheer surprise. " I think he isn't happy with me using that Light Arrow on him." I then remembered what we were talking about. " I'll never be a bloodthirsty killer though I don't really do myself any credit since I did destroy those two Chu-Chus every time they re-spawned back in the previous room."

" Because they can regenerate infinitely, you weren't really destroying them." Twilight said. " It was more like you were getting them off of your back for a few minutes before having to repeat the process and continue repeating it over and over until you solved the puzzle."

The Red Wizzrobe reappeared in the same spot as last time, danced around, and fired his magic only this time it landed a few inches away from me. I was sent flying back by the impact and slammed into the wall before slumping to the ground. " Okay, he is definitely upset over what I did to him."

" You should focus on defeating him instead of talking with me about ethics."

Getting back up and aiming my bow, I waited for the Red Wizzrobe to reappear, and sure enough, he did so on the top left panel in the room. Before he could do anything, I fired my arrow, striking him in the chest and he disappeared again but not before screaming from being hit by the light. When he next appeared, he began running all over the room indicating that the next phase was already upon us. I knew the Light Arrow was strong against monsters who had a high affiliation with the darkness given I used them before--not to the same effect as I got them pretty late--but not that strong.

Multiple Red Wizzrobes then popped though most of them were illusions designed to confuse me. They all began running about while the real one--he actually had fire burning on his staff as opposed to the others--was preparing an attack. I quickly searched to see which panel he was standing on but couldn't see until it was too late when magic came flying at me from atop a ledge that was practically touching the lava on the ceiling. A panel was up there as how else could the Red Wizzrobe have fired his magic from that position? In the end, I was hit by his magic and consumed by the fire all over again.

I dropped to the ground and rolled towards the wall to put out the fire though it did cause some slight burns which I would deal with later. Getting back up, the Red Wizzrobes began running about so I looked for the odd-one out and he was standing to my right ready to fire. I responded by hitting him with a Light Arrow and he disappeared though I honestly thought that hit would have finished him off. Perhaps the Red Wizzrobe was much more durable than the blue one was? If so, then I had no idea how many more hits it would be until he finally went down for good.

He next appeared on the high-up ledge by the lava and I was about to fire another Light Arrow when more rocks began falling down. I was surprised that I hadn't seen any do so for a while unless I just didn't notice but I weaved in-between them and just barely managed to avoid getting hit by fire by stopping on a dime and waited until the fire dissipated. Rocks continued falling down forcing me to dodge each and every one but then the Red Wizzrobe reappeared next to me and flung some magic at me that landed just short of my position but was enough to push me towards the hole in the ground though I stopped myself by digging in my feet.

As I stared down into the abyss that was the hole, the Red Wizzrobe laughed and disappeared before reappearing right next to me as his illusions danced about. I ran forward whilst raising my shield to avoid getting hit by falling rocks and managed to outrun the next magical attack that came my way though it did blast me forward. Disappearing and reappearing moments later, the Red Wizzrobe illusions ran about as usual while the real one--who was on top of the highest ledge--span around but I hit him with a Light Arrow just as he fired his magic, both of us getting hit respectively.

My hit caused the Red Wizzrobe to jump into the air before landing and burning away to nothing; his hit caused more burns to appear on my body in addition to taking serious damage but not enough to kill me. His defeat resulted in a treasure chest--I couldnt tell how big it was--materializing on the higher up platform but no nearby door unlocked and the one I came through was never locked to begin with. It then occurred to me that the Red Wizzrobe didn't need to be defeated. I could have ignored him entirely and left the room of my own accord yet I would have missed the chest and I couldn't see any Hookshot plate to pull me up to the ledge.

I sat down and began to sulk a little. " I think the temple just gave me a huge middle finger."

" What makes you say that?"

" The Red Wizzrobe could have been avoided entirely as the way forward wasn't blocked or anything."

" If that was the case, why did you choose to fight him anyway?"

" I had no means of reaching that high-up ledge near the pool of lava." I answered. Rocks then suddenly dropped down from above so I quickly got up and walked over to the corner and hid underneath the ledge before sitting back down again. " Those rocks surely are inconsistent. Anyway, defeating that Wizzrobe caused a chest to appear though I think it's my only means of getting up there by using the Hookshot and latching onto the chest as a target."

" It seems you needed to defeat him to progress."

I shrugged. " I guess so but did it have to be so annoying?"

Princess Twilight shrugged this time. " That appears to be the nature of the Stone Tower Temple. The challenges here are a combination of what we've already seen plus some new twists designed specially around the overall theme the temple focuses on. I'm certain there won't be anymore Wizzrobes given that we've seen each room of the temple when it was right side-up but I'm certain more powerful monsters are lurking about something along with Midnight Sparkle."

" I'm surprised she didn't do something to make the Wizzrobe more difficult than it was."

" Maybe she thought you would die by his hands?"

" I don't know but what I do know is that I need to use one of my potions."

" You did suffer quite a lot of burns."

" Don't I know it." I said as I took out a Red Potion from behind my back. " I prefer dealing with fire magic as opposed to ice magic as the latter is chilling to the bone." I uncorked the bottle, swallowed the contents, and relaxed as the magic began working its charm and my wounds slowly disappeared. " Good thing you got me into the habit of bring along potions before coming into these temples otherwise I'd still be walking around with injuries all across my body. While I wish I had more bottles, four has proven to be enough considering what we've encountered so far." Once my body was fully recovered, I got back up before running on the spot for a few seconds.

" You might still get some more bottles later on if you're lucky."

" I hope so."

" Anyway, we should continue on from here but be sure to open that treasure chest." Twilight said. " You worked awfully hard to defeat that Wizzrobe so you should indulge in the reward that appeared when you defeated him."

Switching out the bow for the Hookshot, I made sure to wait until there was a pause in-between the falling rocks before making my move. Unlike the room with the pool of lava and the red emblem, the rocks were falling in different time intervals in addition to seeing more of them. After watching so many dropping down from above and smashing to pieces, I deduced that there was at least a ten second gap between drops. It wasn't much time but I needed to make it count or else my Red Potion would have gone to waste. Again, having a means of protecting myself via a magic spell would have made this an non-issue for me.

When the gap finally happened, I quickly ran out towards the middle of the room, turned around, aimed my Hookshot up at the chest, and fired the chain where it latched onto the chest and I pulled myself up to the chest just as the rocks started falling again like before. Kicking the chest open, a Stray Fairy came out before entering my body giving me twelve but I felt a little miffed over the fact that acquiring it involved defeating an enemy that didn't really need to be defeated to begin with. I blamed whoever came up with such a twisted condition for one Stray Fairy instead of say hiding the fairy in a secret location.

In any case, I only had three more Stray Fairies left with one requiring me to flip the temple back to its original state if that one chest contained one. Since there was no door I could use to reach the next room, I walked down the stairs to the next level and entered a large open area where three Poes were flying about. None of them had noticed me yet they would prove bothersome especially since flying was needed here given there was a Deku Flower by my feet. A door was located at the end of the room so I knew where I needed to go but first the Poes had to be removed or else one of them could knock me mid-flight into the abyss below.

" I'm hoping you know what to do here, Sunset."

I nodded. " I'm not going to cross until I get rid of these Poes."

" As you know, if you lock onto them long enough, they will disappear and you'll need to disengage the lock so that they can reappear later." Twilight said. " This will make it difficult to hit them but it's the only way unless you wanted to ignore them." I blinked a few times prompting Her Highness to inquire about it. " Um, what's wrong, Sunset? Did I say something I shouldn't have or did I cause some slight confusion?"

" What do you mean by 'lock onto them'? I've never done anything of the sort."

Princess Twilight was surprised at my answer. " Really? You've never actually done that before? I thought you would have known about it especially since your previous journey had similar concepts according to your own words and not mine. Still, I'm just surprised you've never tried locking onto a monster." Her Highness' face went pale as though she couldn't fathom what I had said though honestly, I was just as surprised as she was as Spike said something to that effect--I couldn't really remember if he did or not--at the time. " Well, I suppose you should learn about locking on despite my own knowledge being limited."

" And how do you know of it?"

" Tatl's memories."

I rolled my eyes. " I might have known."

" Anyway, I can lock onto a monster for you in which my body will glow yellow." Twilight said. " As long as I am locked onto something, you will never lose track of it unless you choose to break away from it or it somehow breaks the lock. I can also lock onto objects where I will glow green and people where I will glow blue. I always thought you knew about this but simply chose to use your own instincts instead."

" Now I wish I had."

" Better late than never, right?"

I mumbled under my breath. Had I used such an ability earlier, a lot of the problems I had when I fought monsters would have been so much easier in that I could have always kept tabs on where monsters went without having to scramble about to find them. I could have also used this ability during my previous journey as this video game world was an upgraded version of what I explored before but using a more restrictive means of getting around via the seventy-two hour time limit. I could only blame myself for not seeing the obvious much sooner thus Her Highness was absolved of any wrong doing for not mentioning it to me sooner.

I looked at the Poes to see that they still hadn't noticed me. " So, I can't use you to target them?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I'm afraid not so you'll have to do what you've been doing this entire time to defeat them. While you could use your sword, that would involve luring them over and I doubt they are interested in anything other than flying around freely. You'll need to use arrows though I personally suggest the Light Arrows. Normally, it would take several arrows to bring down a Poe but a Light Arrow might require just the one arrow since they are undead monsters after all."

I still had some magic leftover after my fight with the Red Wizzrobe so I could shoot the Poes down with Light Arrows but I needed for them to come at me otherwise I would have trouble since their current movement pattern was tricky to work around. Stepping forward a few paces, one of the Poes took notice and began flying forward swinging its lantern about in a frenzy. I put away the Hookshot and took out my bow, aimed, and fired a Light Arrow destroying it completely though its shattered body dropped into the abyss below. The next one then noticed and flew towards me resulting in the same thing happening to it that happened to the other.

The remaining Poe had no intention of coming over and was flying about in an area of the room that was away from where I needed to go. If I were to fly over to the other side without drifting towards it, I could avoid it completely. Since this next part involved using a Deku Scrub, I switched my bow with the Deku Mask, placed it on my face, and began convulsing as my body shimmered from human to Deku in the blink of an eye. Even after all that, the Poe still wasn't paying attention but that wasn't my problem so long as it didn't decide to change its mind at the last minute and make its way over to me.

Jumping into the Deku Flower, I launched myself from it and floated over to the other side where the door was, and when I landed, I was about to go through the door when I noticed an alcove to my right. It wasn't a dead-end as it continued onward but I needed some verification. I took out the Dungeon Map, unfurled it, and took a closer look. There was a treasure chest icon located at the end of an oddly shaped room and could be either another Stray Fairy or something else. Mulling it over in my head, I decided it would be worth checking it out but before I could launch myself from the Deku Flowe, a cucco suddenly cawed out.

Dawn of the Second Day - 48 Hours Remain.

Dawn had come!? When!? How!? I didn't recall seeing any changes to my surroundings but then everything had been inverted including the sky and the ground so I most likely couldn't see anything as it was all beneath my feet. Had my fight with the Red Wizzrobe lasted the duration of the first night? It certainly didn't feel that way from my perspective but there was no point dwelling over something that I couldn't control. I had two whole days left to get through this temple and I needed them especially with powerful enemies still waiting for me to reach their respective locations.

I jumped into the Deku Flower and launched myself over to the alcove but when I landed, clapping sounds were coming from a familiar looking face. " I was expecting that wizard to have killed you yet here you are having made it to this very point. I knew I should have done something to give that wizard more of an edge but I assumed you would be no match for him and all those falling rocks. That's what I get for overestimating some of the creatures of this world."

" Come to get under my skin again, Midnight Sparkle?" I asked.

" You say that like it's a bad thing and that really hurts my feelings you know." Midnight Sparkle answered. " No, I'm not here to annoy you nor am I here to fight you. I've been spending these last couple of hours honing my new power and the results have been most lucrative. I reckon I will reach my full potential within the next little while so when that happens, then I will finally do battle with you or something to that effect. To be fair, I'd rather not get my hands dirty with physical combat as I'm more of a hands-off kind of person unlike your now deceased other self, who was insistent on getting up close and personal with everything she did."

" Then would that make you a coward still?"

Midnight Sparkle glared at me. " Call it whatever you want but know that it just makes you a liar."

" Okay, then fight me already!"

" Why would I want to fight against a wooden twig creature?"

I looked down and remembered that I was still in my Deku Scrub body. " I just need to take this mask off and then I will show you." My heart then sent a signal to my brain that I was allowing my anger to take control of my emotions so I slowly began to change the subject. " I'll face you when you feel ready to do so but no sooner. I would prefer beating you when you're at your best and when you think you have achieved total victory."

" Quite the shift in attitude."

" I have my reasons."

" Maybe you're not like Sunset Demon after all." Midnight Sparkle said. " Consider that a compliment, Sunset Shimmer, but don't expect me to do it often. I will leave you two alone to go about whatever business you were doing but don't think I won't continue making things more difficult for you. I do so enjoy using my power in such creative ways. In fact, I have something in mind just up ahead so have fun with it."

She then disappeared by walking into the wall but I couldn't help but feel worried about what she had said. Her power had grown according to her own words and that spelt trouble for me as when I end up fighting her, she would have a tremendous advantage. Unfortunately, Midnight Sparkle made sure not to say anything about what she had been doing so I was now forced to guess as to her intentions. I needed to stop her from killing my friends and acquiring all of the magic from Equestria yet she needed me and Princess Twilight dead as only we--Princess Twilight and myself--stood in her way within the confines of this world.

" Was I ever that demented?" Twilight asked.

" Well... There was that one time when you told me that you used a spell to make everyone in Ponyville obsess over a doll to the point where they all fought over it."

Princess Twilight blushed. " Not one of my best moments I know, but I was so desperate to give Princess Celestia a Friendship Report. I kept on looking for a problem to solve and when I couldn't find one, I decided to make one and pretty much lost my sanity. Midnight Sparkle is much worse than I ever was and that makes her dangerous. If she is the evil version of the human version of myself, she could be capable of anything."

" Your other self, Twilight Sparkle, had an inferiority complex."

" That would do it."

" Midnight Sparkle is essentially an amalgamation of Twilight Sparkle, Equestrian Magic from six individuals, a hidden darkness that came from Twilight Sparkle's heart, and the portal you use to go between the world I call home and Equestria." I said. " You'd think all of those different attributes would have driven her insane but she remained pretty calm even when she began using her power to destroy the human world in her bid to get her hands on the magic from Equestria. No, I think whatever she got from this temple has driven her to the brink of insanity and she has become oblivious to it."

" Didn't Sunset Demon warn us about that?"

I nodded. " And she paid the ultimate price for it despite wanting it in the end."

" Maybe I should have stayed long enough to give Twilight Sparkle some pointers on not succumbing to the darkness."

" You had your duties as a princess to deal with."

" I know but I should have helped her."

" We each have our respective roles to play, Twilight." I said. " You are an alicorn and despite how difficult it can get for you sometimes, you were chosen to ascend, a decision that Princess Celestia wasn't wrong about in terms of her judgment though she was wrong about me. I've accepted the fact that I'm not worthy to become an alicorn and I doubt that it will ever happen, but I'm using my time to help out others to make sure they don't make the same mistake that made me into a monster. If anyone can help Twilight Sparkle, it would be me as she went through the same experience I did. I'll continue showing her the right path even if it takes years for her to find peace with what happened."

" You've changed so much since our initial encounter." Twilight said. " But, do you really want to become an alicorn?"

I nodded. " Yeah... I mean, it's been my life's dream in Equestria to become one as Princess Celestia personally trained me for the role, but I was too greedy with the thought of having so much power in my hooves and I never understood humility until much later. Even if I were to return to Equestria after all this time and reconcile with her, Princess Celestia would never give me another chance even if she wanted to. I was a failed prodigy, Twilight, and nothing will ever change that distinction."

" Sunset..."

" If I become an alicorn, great." I said. " If not then that's fine as it wasn't meant to be. Anyway, we've daudled around here long enough. We should keep on going if we're going to complete this temple." Deep down, being an alicorn was still a passionate desire of mine yet I knew that I had to accept reality. My chance came and went and Princess Twilight achieved what I couldn't as she understood the meaning of friendship, compassion, and above all, humility. Her Highness was worthy of being a princess even if she didn't always like the responsibilities that were associated with it.

Walking forward and turning to the right, the path split off into several directions yet straight ahead of me was a strange looking statue that looked similar to an Armos, yet it was taller and closely resembled a knight. As soon as I got close enough, it suddenly floated upwards into the air before crashing back down, the impact of its landing created a tremor that knocked me back and down onto my butt whilst damaging me at the same time. As I got back up, it ascended again and started floating about as I wasn't close enough for it to attack me, but then I noticed the glowing symbol that appeared on its chest.

" This is a new monster, Sunset."

" Well, I wanted one and now I've got it."

" This creature is called a Death Armos." Twilight said. " When you get close to one, it will begin floating about in the air before crashing to the ground to inflict damage through means of a powerful tremor which we've just witnessed."

" How do I go about defeating it?"

" Did you notice the glowing mark on its chest?" Twilight asked. " I nodded and she continued. " That symbol is the same as the red emblems we've seen throughout the inverted side of the temple so if you were to use a Light Arrow when that mark is glowing, the Death Armos will be defeated but don't underestimate it. It will perform one final ground pound before exploding, creating a massive radius in the process."

" So only a Light Arrow can defeat it?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes so be sure to fire when the mark is glowing otherwise your arrow will do nothing."

I couldn't use Light Arrows as a Deku Scrub so I grabbed my face, pulled off the Deku Mask, and flipped back my hair only to get caught on the fringe of a second ground pound attack from the Death Armos. I got back up onto my feet, took out the Hero's Bow, and aimed up at the flying statue as it began floating about again. When the mark on its chest began glowing, I fired just when it was about to attack again, and it immediately turned upside-down before slamming its head into the ground. I thought it was a pretty odd thing to do but then it pulled itself out from the ground and exploded, knocking me back again until nothing remained of it.

The sounds of another Death Armos could be heard coming from my left so I turned in that direction and saw another one floating about yet my eyes were more interested in the blue switch that could be seen behind it. I sighed knowing that I most likely had to play the Elergy of Emptiness but considering how many twists this temple had presented thus far, I wasn't really surprised at having to once again rely on a familiar trend. Aiming my bow and moving towards the second Death Armos, it floated upwards and began moving before crashing down into the ground--I wasn't near it when it used its ground pound so I didn't get knocked down or took any damage.

When it got back up into the air, I fired a Light Arrow at the glowing mark on its chest causing it to turn upside-down and crash into the ground before lifting itself up a little followed by exploding though it did drop a Magic Jar that I happily picked up as I had been using an awful lot lately. Walking up to the blue switch, I began looking around to see what else there was and I noticed a treasure chest surrounded by flames to my left and a Death Armos to my right though it wasn't moving. Upon a closer inspection, another Death Armos was lurking next to the chest.

Stepping on the switch caused the flames surrounding the chest to disappear so then I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, played the Elergy of Emptiness, and walked forward before looking behind me and seeing my shell appear on the switch to keep it pressed. Walking over to the Death Armos, it floated upwards when I got close and I fired a Light Arrow when the mark on its chest glowed, flipping it upside-down where it crashed into the ground before lifting itself upwards and exploded leaving the chest unguarded. Kicking the chest open, I took out a small key though I was expecting a Stray Fairy instead.

Coming this way proved effective as had I gone the other way, I would have reached a dead-end in the form of a locked door, and be forced to backtrack the way back here to obtain the key needed to open it. I took out the Dungeon Map, unfurled it, and looked to see if I could find a keyhole symbol, but there wasn't any and that meant I had to find the locked door either by dumb luck or through trial and error. Since I couldn't go any further in my current direction, I began to make my way back to where the other door was and seeing where it would take me--I ignored the remaining Death Armos as there was no need to destroy it.

" Anju! Where are you going?"

" Mother!" Scootaloo answered in surprise. " Um... Well, you see..."

" Is that a letter you've got hidden behind your back?" Misty Fly asked.

" I'm sorry."

Misty Fly sighed as she rubbed the bridge of her nose. " And here I thought you would've gotten over him after what I said to you the other night." She folded her arms and slightly lurched her head forward. " You intend on mailing that letter in hopes that Kafei will respond to you?

Scootaloo nodded. " I'm sorry, mother, but I thought about it as I slept last night and have concluded that I simply cannot get over Kafei. I know his actions as of late have made you skeptical of his faithfulness yet that's no excuse to decry him when you don't even know what caused his disappearance." Scootaloo then cowered a little and looked down at the ground to avoid looking directly into the eyes of her mother. " I'm sorry. Kafei means so much to me and even now I pray that he will come home."

Misty Fly sighed. " You remind me a lot of myself when I was that age."

" I do?"

Misty Fly nodded. " I was young, attractive, and believed I had found the right person to settle down and start a family with them. Your father, Tortus, was a shy man who enjoyed his work and never once complained about doing chores for his step-mother, your grandmother. There was something special about him that made him stand out amongst the other suitors who were trying to court me and some of the other women in town said that he was nothing but a scoundrel who would take advantage of my feelings. I never listened to their words as they knew nothing about your father. He was a good provider and loyal to no end."

" Reminds you of someone?"

" You mean Kafei, right?"

" Yes, mother."

Misty Fly was taken aback before lowering her head. " I guess the fruit doesn't fall far from the tree. You definitely take after me, Anju, and I can see that you are determined to see this through and wait for Kafei to return. While I will apologize for how I treated him the other night, I will not defend his current actions nor defend his parents lack of enthusiasm when it comes to finding him."

" The mayor and her husband aren't able to find him as they do not know where he is."

" I see that as a lousy excuse."

" Mother!!!!"

" I am sorry, Anju, but that's how I feel about his parents."

Scootaloo stepped forward towards Misty Fly, anger clearly expressed across her face. " I'm sorry, mother, but your attitude towards Kafei's parents is both unwarranted and uncalled for on all levels. You know full well that Mayor Dotour is struggling to deal with the town militia and the Carnival Committee with regards to the Carnival of Time that is supposed to be held tomorrow at midnight. As for her husband, he has been searching for someone who can find Kafei but has also had to cancel some performances according to what I heard that one gruff man say before he went inside the Milk Bar."

" And yet, Kafei is still missing."

" I know he will return."

" Do you honestly believe that?"

Scootaloo nodded. " With every last fibre of my heart."

Misty Fly sighed. " I see that it's pointless to continue arguing with you, Anju."

" I'm sorry."

" If you want to go and mail off that letter, I won't stand in your way." Misty Fly said. " However, I will only give you until tomorrow morning to show me absolute proof that he still remains faithful and not abandoned you for someone else. We still plan on fleeing Clock Town should that accursed moon above our heads gets any closer and will take refuge down at the ranch so hopefully we can remain there until things calm down before coming back here again. We won't leave until tomorrow so that gives you the entire day to bring me the necessary proof."

Scootaloo smiled. " Thank you, mother."

" By the way, I want you to run some errands for me." Misty Fly said as she took out a small piece of paper from her pocket. " We're running low on some supplies and I need you to pick some up after mailing off that letter. I would do it myself but someone has to mind the Stock Pot Inn since you don't work until later this evening." She handed Scootaloo the piece of paper and ushered her to get on with the task. " Take care of those errands quickly, Anju, and you can use the remaining time to show me the proof that I've requested. Take as much time as you need as you could do with something to distract you from all that unnecessary stress."

Scootaloo slowly nodded, turned, and walked away leaving Misty Fly to wonder if her daughter was going to be okay after that intense exchange. She knew that her words towards Kafei were harsh and that she was only pushing her daughter away by choosing to show disdain towards the man she had hoped to marry, yet she believed it was best for her to find someone else who was faithful to her and who wouldn't cause her worry. Deep down, she actually hoped Kafei would be the one and had hoped for them to start a family yet his parents' lack of incentive towards finding him and blaming Scootaloo only fueled her overall disdain.

At that moment, Misty Fly noticed the local postman running up towards her. The postman, Aria Blaze of the Dazzlings, had an anxious look on her face as she approached the inn before screeching to a stop. " Excuse me, madam, but have you seen Anju?"

" My daughter?"

Aria nodded. " Yes. I have a letter here for her from someone and it was given the designation of 'special delivery' so I came here as fast as I could."

" Do you know who sent it?"

" Someone sent it."

" Do you know the name?"

" There was no name on the letter other than Anju's." Aria answered. " And before you ask, I do not where the letter originated from other than from a post box somewhere. Before coming here to make this delivery, I brought this up with the Post Master to get his opinion of it and he said to deliver it as usual since that's my job and all. Unfortunately, Anju isn't here right now so I'll have to come back later when she is here."

" Why don't I take it off your hands?"

Aria shook her head. " That goes against the postal worker's civic code of delivering letters to the correct people."

Misty Fly began getting annoyed. " Is it no wonder that your ethics are flawed."

" Say what you want but I have to follow the civic code no matter what." Aria said. She then looked at her watch and gasped when she saw what time it was. " Ack! I've wasted too much time talking and fell behind schedule. I'm going to be in so much trouble with the Post Master if I suddenly started becoming tardy." Looking back and forth between Misty Fly and the letter she held in her hand, Aria looked to be suffering from some slight pain before sighing and handing over the letter. " I normally don't do this but I must get back on schedule right away so I trust you will give that to Anju when she comes back?"

Misty Fly nodded. " I will make sure she gets it."

She turned and was about to go back inside when Aria dashed around in front of her and wagged her finger. " And do not read that letter even if you get a tremendous urge to do so. That letter is meant for Anju only! Reading someone else's letter is an offence in Clock Town so I implore you to get rid of such thoughts. Now, I must get back to work or else my schedule will be even further disoriented. Please say hello to Anju for me." Aria turned and began running towards a nearby post box but not the one Scootaloo had gone to leaving Misty Fly to ponder over what to do next.

It didn't take long for me to make it back to where the three Poes had been flying about--only the one was there as the others hadn't re-spawned due to me not having actually left the room proper--but before going through the door, I had to jump across a small gap. It wasn't that big of a gap so I didn't need to use the Bunny Hood but I decided to go with a running jump instead so that I would have enough momentum and not miss. Taking several steps backwards, I ran and jumped across, landing next to the door, and went through it and was in a room that looked identical to what I had just came from.

This room consisted of two ledges on either end of the room with a cluster of spiked mines to my left, a Deku Flower right in front of me, and a path that went to the right that lead up to another door. I thought about becoming a Deku Scrub and checking out the door at the other end of the room yet Princess Twilight suggested to go right instead. I mulled it over for a few moments before agreeing to follow her advice but when I asked why she wanted me to go that way, Her Highness said she felt a strong dark power emanating from behind the other door. That was enough incentive for me to turn right and open the door to the next room.

As soon as the door closed behind me, the sound of a ground pound to my right almost scared me out of my wits. I looked and noticed another Death Armos floating about on a very small ledge guarding a regular looking switch. Between me and the ledge was a small gap that dropped down into the endless abyss of the sky so I knew not to jump over to it or else get knocked to my death by the Death Armos--its name was now warranted. Taking out the Hero's Bow, I fired a Light Arrow when its mark began glowing, and it turned upside-down before slamming into the ground, raising itself up slightly, and exploded leaving a Magic Jar behind.

Jumping over and collecting the Magic Jar, I then pressed the switch and a small treasure chest appeared on the ceiling much to my annoyance. Again, I would need to flip the temple back to its original state in order to open up the chest. As I continued looking up, I felt that this room was familiar to me until I realized that I was back in the entrance room but in a section that didn't connect with anything else forcing me to backtrack to the previous room and fly across using the Deku Flower. Jumping over to the previous ledge and entering the previous room, I took out the Deku Mask but Princess Twilight stopped me from putting it on my face.

" Why did you stop me?" I asked.

" Judging from how big this room is, you won't be able to fly over to the door on the opposite side." Twilight answered.

" So what should I do?"

" There's an alcove where those exploding mines are." Twilight answered. " If you were to try and make your way over to the alcove, you might accidentally collide with a mine resulting in you falling down to your death. Maybe you could cause them to blow up by using a regular arrow, not a magic one as you need to conserve magic for any Death Armos we might encounter or something else for that matter."

" Those mines are rather small targets."

" Perhaps but you've had to hit much smaller things them those."

" True."

" If you're not feeling confident then try to get as close as possible without stepping off the edge."

Walking up to the Deku Flower, I took out the Hero's Bow and replaced the Light Arrow with a regular one before aiming up at the exploding mines. My first shot completely missed the target--only by a few inches--but my second connected though it didn't cause an explosion. I then tried shooting a different mine in hopes that would give me the desired result but that failed as well so I fired at the third mine resulting in it colliding with the one to its left blowing them both up. Unfortunately, this meant the remaining mine was still there and could still pose a problem but there was no other choice; I had to reach that alcove.

Placing the Deku Mask on my face, I began convulsing though I made sure to move back towards the door in case I accidentally walked off into the endless sky below--a horrid thought indeed despite how beautiful the sky looked at this time of the day. My body shimmered from human to Deku until my transformation was complete and from there, I dove down into the Deku Flower before launching myself from it, and turned slightly left so that I could fly over to the alcove whilst avoiding the mine. My flower accidentally touched the mine, unfortunately, causing it to explode, yet I was pushed into the alcove, a huge amount of luck if I ever saw it.

As soon as I landed on my face, two pots suddenly floated upwards before slamming themselves into me. While they did release a couple of recovery hearts upon shattering, I still took some damage not to mention having pieces of ceramic stuck on various parts of my wooden body. It took a few moments to pull them out--each one was painful--and I collected the hearts before they disappeared. When that was done, I dove into the Deku Flower and launched myself, heading to the left and flying over to the door. As I flew, the thought of the kinds of traps Midnight Sparkle had in store began to plague my mind.

Many of her traps had revolved around fire, a simple trap if there ever was one, yet it had proven effective since it meant having to navigate through some difficult sections without burning myself alive in the process. Did she view me as not being worth her time? Or was she testing my resolve with regards to doing things under certain conditions? I had no answer to either question nor any other question my mind could come up with. Midnight Sparkle had gotten unpredictable and that made her even more dangerous than she was during the Friendship Games. I had to keep up with her mood changes or else die.

Landing in front of the door, I opened it and entered the next room which consisted of a long corridor that was swarming with Blue Bubbles. I had to be careful they didn't hit me or else my sword would become disabled due to their curse. Either side of me was metal fencing to keep me from falling out and I realized the corridor was another walkway. In fact, this was the same walkway I saw in the room that featured the air currents I used to reach the ceiling. It was nice how everything was now starting to come together in the temple and it made traversing it that much easier.

Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Deku Mask, and flipped back my hair before stepping forward when a series of spikes suddenly shot up from the ground. I was so surprised by this sudden revelation that it caused me to fall down onto my butt. The spikes themselves were roughly half the length between the floor and ceiling so I couldn't get past them through conventional means yet there was something about them that felt wrong, like they weren't meant to be there. I slapped my forehead upon realizing that Midnight Sparkle was behind this yet this was different from what she had done prior. I feared she was growing more powerful by the moment.

" A spike trap..." Twilight began. " I definitely wasn't expecting this."

" This is Midnight Sparkle's doing."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Oh I agree completely, Sunset. She has an admiration for flare and grandeur by wanting to go all out as a means of proving her point."

" Like you haven't done anything like that yourself, Princess." Midnight Sparkle said, her voice echoing all around.

" What!? Me!?" Twilight exclaimed. " I don't know what you're talking about."

" Oh don't try to hide the truth from me."

" Okay, so I loved showing off my magic when I was younger as a means of impressing Princess Celestia."

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " Guess a part of your personality exists within me, proof that Twilight Sparkle is more like you than you even realize. Yes, I wanted to make this trap a lot more glamourous than the previous ones so I opted to go with spikes instead of fire and lasers."

" At least I showed off for the right reasons."

" Like you're so high and mighty, Princess."

" I don't aim to be."

" And yet you are a princess while Sunset is nothing but a commoner."

Princess Twilight lashed out. " That may be so but Sunset has proven time and again that she is more than worthy of becoming a princess. Whether it happens or not is up to fate but I won't let you tarnish her good name. She is everything you are but better because of her life choices. You can't be compared to Sunset under any circumstances. You can't even be compared to Twilight Sparkle! She may have her faults but at least she is willing to change for the better unlike a demonic monster who's nothing more than a blight that soils the good name of someone who has her whole life to look forward to."

Midnight Sparkle was silent for a few moments before speaking. " I hope those spikes kill you tenfold but if not then I want to personally see you, Princess. Sunset, I'm afraid you'll have to take a back seat while Her Highness and I have a private moment with one another."

As her voice trailed off, I couldn't help but be surprised at how Twilight was so assertive in the face of Midnight Sparkle. I was also surprised at how she stood up for me the way she did and how she still believed that was possible for me to become an alicorn someday even when I doubted it. Her Highness truly had my best interests in her heart and was willing to defend them no matter what anyone said about her in return. Now I had to live up to her expectations and there was no way I was going to allow Midnight Sparkle to win. Then again, she wanted Her Highness instead of me, a sign that a personal grudge between them had formed.

Looking at the spikes, they would rise up from the ground, remain that way for a few seconds, then go back down and the process would repeat itself a few seconds later. There were gaps in-between some of them, safe areas I could stand on without being poked by the spikes. I suspected that being poked once would kill me so I had to be more cautious than ever before whilst also taking into account the Blue Bubbles who were apparently unaffected--I was actually jealous of them for that. I needed to pick them off with arrows so that I could focus on avoiding the sudden inclusion of spikes courtesy of Midnight Sparkle.

Taking out my bow, I moved forward and the spikes immediately shot upward though there was a safe spot a few spaces to my right. Side-stepping over to it and walking forward, the next set of spikes appeared with the previous ones disappearing. I was caught by surprise by the sudden appearance of these spikes resulting in my tunic getting ripped near my butt and my leg being grazed by one spike. It wasn't a terrible wound--no blood meant I could easily walk it off-so I kept moving when a Blue Bubble took notice of my approach and began moving towards me, its maw wide open and cackling every so softly.

Firing four arrows, the first three missed while the last one struck and destroyed the Blue Bubble--I really needed to either work on my aim or not freak out when a monster was coming closer to where I was standing--allowing me to continue. The previous spikes then disappeared before the next ones popped up with the safe spot being slightly to my left but it involved jumping over a couple of spikes to reach it. Gulping, I leapt over them and landed, my foot getting grazed this time--badly I might add--resulting in searing pain running through my body but I had to keep going no matter what pain I had to endure.

The next Blue Bubble came up to me and I dispatched it with a single arrow--I didn't freak out that time--before walking forward and jumping to the next safe spot, yet when I landed, more spikes suddenly appeared from the ceiling, skewering my back. It wasn't a fatal wound--it was painful though--so I could keep going yet I was now forced to move slower and adjust my movements carefully. I moved forward and more spikes shot out from the ground and ceiling with only the one safe spot right in the middle that required a dive. I knew how to dive but as a Zora as opposed to a human but I couldn't be picky about it.

Stepping backwards, I then ran and dove in-between the spikes, my tunic getting shredded in places while my arms and legs were grazed--it was better than being pierced in a fatal manner--leaving the one Blue Bubble to contend with. I wasn't ready to attack with my bow so it flew over and collided with me, my body glowing in a blue hue to signal that I had been cursed and wouldn't be able to use my sword for a couple of minutes. The Blue Bubble then charged so I ducked down while it floated past allowing me to sneak by without having to deal with it, but then it turned around so I hauled buns, dodging spikes, and jumping until I finally made it to the door.

" That was ridiculous!" I said whilst catching my breath.

" Midnight Sparkle must be losing her sanity."

" I'm surprised she hasn't already."

" She is the demonic version of Twilight Sparkle who in turn is the human version of me." Twilight said. " It would take an awful lot for me to lose my grip on reality so the same must apply with Midnight Sparkle. She may be in control right now but she could snap at any moment just like I would whenever stress would take its toll."

" And with her new power, an insane Midnight Sparkle is the worst possible scenario."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. If she were to defeat us here, she will go after our friends and they wouldn't stand a chance against her. She can't be allowed to leave the temple so we have to defeat her here though I'm not sure how we're supposed to keep her defeated." Her Highness looked at me glumly and I knew what it meant. My expression went glum as well over the notion that so long as the doors of the Stone Tower remained open, she could come back as many times as she wanted. " Unless we close those doors, she will keep coming back in an endless fashion."

" So for now, she's practically invincible."

" Essentially."

I wasn't liking that outcome one bit and yet it was unfortunately true. She practically had infinite lives while Princess Twilight and I only had the one each. This was the one problem when going up against the undead... they could come back easily and there was nothing that could be done unless the source of their resurrection was brought to an end. Opening the door and entering the next room, the door locked behind me via iron bars and everything suddenly went dark as though someone has turned out the lights. I could sense a tremendous evil presence all around me though it definitely wasn't Midnight Sparkle.

" I don't like this place, Twilight."

" Neither do I."

" We can't go back as the door is locked."

" Then we need to see if we can find some light."

Suddenly, I could hear the sound of bats flying above me so I looked up and my entire body froze. Flying close to the ceiling were a countless number of bats that somehow appeared out of nowhere and began circling about several times before descending downwards. As they continued circling about, a strange creature appeared in the middle of the flock wrapped in a cape--more like a cloak--that comprised of additional bats and within the cloak was some kind of glowing yellow orb that looked to be a weak point. It then produced a wicked looking scythe, clutched it in its hand, and swung it about before floating over towards me.

" Um, Twilight?" I asked as I backed away from this creature. " What in the world is this thing?"

" I was afraid we might run into a powerful monster."

" Twilight?"

" Oh! Right!" Twilight answered. " This creature is known as Gomess. Not only is it scary to look at but its scythe is enough to scare you out of your wits because of how powerful it is in addition to having a huge attack radius. Nothing you have will work unless you could find a way to remove its 'Coat of Keese', the bats that cover that orb, and then you can use anything you have."

I blinked. " I'm sorry but what!?"

" Huh?"

" What did you call that cloak?"

" The Coat of Keese?"

" What the heck does that even mean?" I asked. " I mean, seriously what is that?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " That's what it's called, Sunset. I didn't come up with the name but I agree that I don't understand what it means. In any case, you need to remove that coat and hit that orb. I'm sure you've figured out that the orb is the weak point."

I nodded. " A shame that I can't see much though."

" Perhaps this creature is responsible for it?"

" I guess."

" Maybe you can find a way to make things brighter?"

That sounded like a hint to use a Light Arrow to make the room brighter so I took out the Hero's Bow, switched my arrows, and fired it up at the ceiling. The arrow brightened that part of the ceiling though it had an adverse effect from Gomess who suddenly looked at me with hatred in its eyes. The bats then began flying towards me before flapping about and disorienting me yet this allowed Gomess to come right up next to me and slashing my stomach using that powerful scythe. It felt like my entire body had been hit by a truck resulting in me being sent back and crashing into the wall.

It was apparent to me that trying to light up the room served to anger Gomess and its scythe was incredibly strong. I had no idea if Midnight Sparkle had done something to make this creature stronger than usual but I wasn't in any position to try and figure that out. The bats flew at me again and began their disorienting tactic but then I switched to my sword and started cutting down as many as possible yet this was pointless ad they continued spawning from its cloak. After destroying what felt like dozens of bats--it was actually fifteen--I needed another plan so I switched back to the bow and fired a Light Arrow at Gomess.

The arrow seemed to have no effect on the creature yet it did cause the bats surrounding the yellow orb to fly away thus exposing it. With its weak point exposed, Gomess began swinging its scythe around in circles before moving forward towards me. I fired another Light Arrow and it bounced off due to hitting the scythe and before I could fire off another one, it ran me over and I found myself flat on my face. It continued on moving in this manner until it calmed down but then the bats returned and covered up the orb again. This meant I had to be quick or else they would re-group and protect Gomess' weak point.

I had more than enough arrows to last through this thanks to having the biggest sized quiver, yet my Magic Power wasn't as fortunate as I could only use it for so long until it runs out leaving me with little means other than using that Green Potion--I wanted to save that for an emergency bigger than this. Firing another Light Arrow scared the bats away but before Gomess could react, I switched to my sword and struck its weak point, causing it pain followed by a very nasty relation where it swung its scythe in a cruel arc knocking me off my legs and then doing the same thing again knocking me on the head.

My head wasn't meant to take a wound like that so I quickly checked to make sure it wasn't bleeding--it wasn't so I was most fortunate--yet I knew that additional blows would result in both blood loss and much worse. Turning to face Gomess after getting back up, the bats returned and covered up the weak point so I had to get rid of them again so I prepared to fire another Light Arrow when Gomess twirled its scythe around in circles and slammed into me again. This blow struck my head and it began bleeding profusely leaving me dazed and unable to see what was happening leaving me vulnerable and at Gomess' mercy.

Chapter 64: The Giant Insects

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
July 17, 2017
Chapter 64: The Giant Insects.

After figuring out how to defeat the creature known as Gomess, it chose to attack me in the head as a means of causing both injury and weakening my vision as a means of taking advantage. My head began bleeding upon being hit and I began stumbling about whilst trying to figure out where I was all while trying to keep from losing too much blood. The wound wasn't fatal or anything but rather it was inconvenient especially considering how strong Gomess was compared with other monsters. I could have used a Red Potion to relieve myself of the problem yet I hadn't taken much damage so using one now would have been too soon.

When Gomess struck me again with its scythe, I went sailing across the room and landed on the ground, my body stopping mere inches from the wall. Had my head actually gone and hit the wall, I would have suffered from a concussion, and the situation would have gotten a lot worse than it already was. As I got back onto my feet, my vision was still hazy as the loss of blood from my head was beginning to take its toll on me. I stumbled about in hopes of the blood flow stopping yet it continued gushing forth until I fell over and landed on my stomach, but not before Gomess tripped over me, crashing into the wall with a loud thud.

I didn't know whether I should be happy or ashamed that a blunder had given me a few moments to address my wound, but considering the problem I was in, I couldn't afford to complain about an unexpected turn of events. As Gomess began getting itself back up, its eyes glowed brighter and filled with hatred towards me, yet I couldn't really see what it was doing as my focus was on getting the blood to stop otherwise I could collapse from blood loss and truly be at the mercy of this monster. Princess Twilight was able to use some of her fairy magic to slow down the bleeding though I needed a temporary solution to stop it entirely.

That solution came in the form of ripping a small piece from my tunic--the shirt and not the shorts--before wrapping it around my head and tieing it with a knot. It wasn't the best means of applying first aid but I was desperate to do anything to keep me from losing anymore blood. It was a good thing that I took those first aid seminars at Canterlot High when they were being offered as a means of bonus credit otherwise I wouldn't have been able to do anything other than bleed to death. Already, it was beginning to take effect and my vision slowly returned just as Gomess began sending its bats out at me again.

My eyes then noticed what lurked in the tiny room blocked by iron bars and I almost slapped my forehead--I refrained in case doing so would have caused my wound to seep through the makeshift bandage--upon seeing a familiar blue and gold ornate treasure chest. Those were the kinds of chests that contained Boss Keys and that meant Gomess had been stationed here to ensure no one would collect it. Either it was a creation of Starlight Glimmer or it was a spirit that had lurked here in Ikana for countless ages though my mind was leaning more towards the latter as Starlight was more interested in pranks than ancient spectres.

Firing another Light Arrow at Gomess caused the bats to fly away, exposing its weak point, but instead of using a regular sword attack, I decided to perform a jump attack as I remembered that it inflicted double damage against monsters. My jump attack was successful, inflicting pain upon Gomess and causing it to retaliate by swinging its scythe around in circles until the bats returned and produced their cloak to protect its weakness. It then occurred to me that this was the full extent of what it could in terms of attack and defence so perhaps this wasn't as difficult as it looked.

Other than the simple scythe swings and spinning it around out of frustration, Gomess was nothing more than a creature whose presence was enough to instill fear into those who were easy to frighten. I mean, it's not the most pleasant looking monster as it had a truly horrifying face, yet this battle began feeling like a disappointment when compared with the duel I had earlier against the Garo Master. In that sense, Gomess felt like an afterthought and not a true threat by whoever created this video game, but I couldn't simply dismiss it as doing so would only lead to careless mistakes, my wound being a constant reminder of that.

I fired another Light Arrow, exposing the weak point and performed another jump attack afterwards where Gomess reeled back before spinning its scythe around though this time it was able to connect with me--it was a graze more than anything else--and I was knocked down before it trampled over me. No doubt it did so as personal payback for tripping it up earlier when my vision was weakened but I couldn't let it get away with a cheap tactic just because I kind of did one myself but not intentionally. Getting back up, I then got bombarded by numerous bats that began biting my body in various places.

" Guess I underestimated this one." I said as I struggled to shake the bats off of my body.

" What do you mean?" Twilight asked.

" Given how Gomess only really has two means of attacking with a third involving the bats, I figured this monster isn't as difficult as it appears." I answered. " If anything it only serves as a means of instilling fear because of its looks."

Princess Twilight took a good look at Gomess before nodding. " Yes, I do see where you're coming from, Sunset, but you shouldn't judge someone or something based on appearances alone. You of all people can understand that better than most given past incidents."

I sighed. " I know, Twilight, but I was just trying to make a point."

" Never assume until you know all of the facts."

" Sage advice." I said with a smirk. " You should apply it to yourself sometime."

Princess Twilight responded with a smirk of her own. " Okay, so you've got me there. Guess my ways of teaching you valuable lessons has a tendency to backfire on me when I least expect it, but I was being serious about the assumptions and not making them until you know everything. Anyway, we should probably get those bats off of you before they end up sucking away your health."

" You think!?"

" Use the spin attack!" Twilight announced. " That should get them off!"

" The what!?"

Princess Twilight looked at me with a dumbfounded expression. " You did not just say that to me, Sunset." I couldn't respond as I was still struggling to get rid of the bats yet she knew that I had no idea what she was talking about. " It was the special ability Adagio gave you all the way back in the swamp." Her Highness then realized that I had never used it before as my own natural skills had proven to be effective enough. " Guess I'll teach you about this one again. If you hold out your sword like you were about to swing it at something, magical buildup should naturally appear until you're ready to unleash it."

I was surprised as well as idiotic for not remembering one of the first abilities that Adagio had given me after returning all of the Stray Fairies. Granted, I never really used the spin attack during my previous journey other than for rare occasions that didn't involve combat, but now I needed to in order to get these bats off of me before they damaged me even more than they already had. Holding out my sword and assuming a defensive position, my blade began to glow blue and I immediately unleashed a spin attack though only a small handful of bats were destroyed leaving the rest still clinging onto me.

It turned out that what I used was the weaker variation of the spin attack--a blue shimmer--whereas I needed the stronger one--a red shimmer. Princess Twilight told me that I had always been able to use the weaker spin attack and that what Adagio gave me was the stronger one so as to give me a wider attack radius. I then assumed my defensive position after hearing that and began charging it up only for Gomess to start attacking by swinging its scythe around. My raised shield deflected its blows though it was rattling my bones given how much power was behind each swing.

My sword then changed from blue to red so I unleashed the full power of the spin attack in hopes it would do something. Not only were all of the bats destroyed but it was enough to push Gomess back allowing me some breathing room. " Well? How was that?" I asked as I got myself out of the spin attack.

" Much better this time around."

" I didn't think it would have such a large radius."

" If you had used it in earlier situations..."

" Things could have gone a lot better."

" At least you now know for the future."

I felt as though my pride had been wounded slightly but I would eventually get over it. It's not like my confidence had been wounded as that would have been much worse than simply pride, a feeling that wasn't as important in the long run. Gomess, in the mean time, had bounced back from being pushed by my spin attack and swung its scythe around in circles before knocking me down onto my butt. I got back up and fired a Light Arrow that scattered its bats about and attacked the exposed orb though it refused to give up and began attacking in the same manner as before--the same result happened where I got knocked down onto my butt.

Getting back up again, I sensed that I was beginning to run low on Magic Power so I needed my next shot to count. I fired another Light Arrow though Gomess blocked it by using its scythe as a shield much to my displeasure yet I couldn't allow that to deter me especially when it had taken plenty of damage already. The bats then swarmed me and I responded with the stronger variant of the spin attack though it gave Gomess a free shot as my defenses were slightly weakened during the final swinging motion of the spin attack. Its attack wasn't enough to knock me down again so I responded by firing another Light Arrow and exposing its weak point.

When I struck Gomess in its exposed orb this time, it screamed in pain as the orb shattered to pieces and then its body began crumbling to pieces. The bats that scattered after fleeing from the light all dropped to the ground and burned away to nothing while I received quite the shock when the scythe sailed through the air and landed mere inches away from me before it too burned to nothing leaving nothing. As the last remnants disappeared, both doors unlocked allowing me access to the chest that contained the Boss Key. Before doing that though, I first needed a moment to regain my composure.

" That ended up being much harder than I thought." I said as I dropped to my knees.

" And all because you underestimated it."

I sighed. " Okay, I get where you're coming from now, Twilight."

Princess Twilight then took a closer look at my bandaged wound. " Good thing you knew how to address that or else you would have bled to death. I'm actually surprised at how resourceful you are, Sunset, to have come up with something like that." Her Highness then tapped the bandage causing me to wince a little before she quickly backed off. " I never would have come up with it myself. Maybe I should pay a visit to Ponyville Hospital when everything goes back to normal and ask Nurse Redheart to teach me how to apply first aid so that I can do it for myself or anyone else for that matter."

" It would give you another skill in life."

" You might want to consider consuming one of your Red Potions." Twilight said. " You did take some damage when all those bats attacked and the blood loss would have caused further damage in the process."

" I think I can still keep going but I'll probably use one in a bit."

" Don't act reckless now."

I smirked. " And the Princess of Friendship is telling me this? I seem to recall you telling me that you have done so many reckless things that even Princess Celestia herself has questioned your actions. You may be an alicorn but even you can be reckless and perhaps even more than me. Celestia taught me--when I actually paid attention--that cutting lose and being reckless can prove beneficial provided you maintain a strong focus towards achieving your goal."

Princess Twilight took offence. " What!? Princess Celestia is a ruler of Equestria! She has no time to be all gung ho and wanting to have fun when she has her royal duties consuming her every waking moment."

" I guess she taught you the same thing."

Princess Twilight tried to respond only to wind up being tongue-tied before bursting into laughter. " I'll admit that she has told me to lighten up but I've always been one who is dedicated towards advancing my knowledge." Her Highness paused for a brief moment before continuing on. " You know, I should give myself a vacation and go somewhere warm in the southern seas or someplace similar so as to be as reckless as possible... Without causing a massive scene given my status as a princess."

Now it was my turn to start laughing. " Like I said, Princess Celestia taught you the same thing." In response, Princess Twilight gave me a light punch on the shoulder as a means of expressing her friendship--she even smiled and winked--and affection before I walked forward and opened the door to the enclosed section of the room that had unlocked upon defeating Gomess. Walking up to the chest, I opened it, took out the Boss Key and put it in my pocket. " Now we just need those remaining Stray Fairies in addition to finding the one door in here that this key slots into."

" Can I take a look at the Dungeon Map, Sunset?"

" Sure." I answered as I took it out of my pocket and unfurled it.

Princess Twilight then took a closer look to see where we needed to eventually go and her face suddenly went cold when she discovered where we were going. " According to the map, the room we need to get to is the same one the Light Arrows were located in. I think we determined this before, Sunset, but didn't pay much attention to it at the time since we didn't have a Boss Key like we do now."

" If that's the case..." I began. " Then that hole in the ceiling has become a hole in the ground."

" Yes." Twilight said. " Which means something must be hidden below the temple."

" What do you think it is?"

" I don't know."

" That's not very reassuring."

Princess Twilight nodded. " If I was to make a guess as to what could be down there, it would be the source of the darkness that plagues the Stone Tower. In fact, I think that's what it is but without a clear indication of how large this source is, there is no way of knowing what we'll find until we get down there." She then paused when a thought entered her mind, a mannerism I had long come to know. " Midnight Sparkle might try to reach that source herself assuming she is even aware that it exists."

" I assumed that it was the temple itself that was causing this darkness."

" That was what I thought too until you fought Gomess."

" So the fight with it clued you in?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " It makes sense that a powerful presence would be responsible for the darkness that exists all around us in here. I mean, there was already a darkness in the temple because of how decrepit this part of Termina is, and Midnight Sparkle did say she had acquired great power when she tapped into the darkness. She has acquired the power of whatever lurked down below and it might not be very happy with what she has done."

" And just when I thought this place couldn't get even more confusing."

" Of course, everything I've said is merely a guess on my part."

My jaw dropped. " A guess!? Seriously!?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Without proof, I can only make a guess."

I honestly thought Her Highness had figured out something truly spectacular that would have changed everything, but it turned out that she had merely been guessing thus leaving everything down to chance in hopes that it would happen in that fashion. I didn't know whether to slap my forehead or hit my head against a wall--neither option was good as it meant the wound on my head bleeding again profusely--upon hearing her words but ultimately, I just sighed and walked over to the door before entering the previous room. I knew she enjoyed coming up with interesting theories yet now wasn't the time since we were in a dangerous situation to begin with.

As soon as I entered the previous room, Midnight Sparkle's voice echoed all around. " You actually survived against that monster!?"

" Surprised?"

" Actually, I am." Midnight Sparkle answered. " I thought about using my power to give that creature some needed firepower but refrained when I saw just how frightening it looked what with that scythe and all those bats that flittered around it. Had I gone and given it a boost, you would have been killed without me needing to get my hands dirty. Guess I shouldn't just rely on a face to get results and instead rely on their abilities to get the job done."

I could understand what Midnight Sparkle was saying as I had done a similar thing what with underestimating Gomess just because of how scary it was. By choosing to focus on its intimidation and nothing more, I was lulled into the belief that it wasn't threatening when in fact I sustained lots of injuries including the one on my head that required immediate first aid to prevent it from getting worse. Instead, I should have treated Gomess like I had done against other strong monsters by taking precautions and watching their movements so as to not be undone by them. I wasn't going to make that mistake--hopefully--in the future.

That's when the other thing Midnight Sparkle said registered into my brain. " Wait! You wanted me to die back there?"

" You would have had I chosen to use my power."

" I can't believe this!"

" Neither can I." Midnight Sparkle added. " I honestly thought you would be dead leaving me just having to deal with Princess Twilight, your friends, and the other me, but you had to go and survive once again.

" You're nothing but a coward!"

Midnight Sparkle began laughing. " It's called using strategy to come up with the perfect outcome, Sunset. You've been overcoming every challenge I've thrown at you including ones that were naturally part of the Stone Tower Temple itself. It's reached a point where I need to consider the possibility that I could lose to you and be denied everything I've worked so hard to achieve. Such a possibility is one I intend to avoid at any and all costs so relying on more subtle means isn't something to call me coward over."

" You're desperate."

" That's one way to put it, yes."

I then smirked but made sure not to go overboard. " Ha! You really are pathetic."

Midnight Sparkle went silent for a few moments before responding. " You know... I was going to let you off just because I made a slight miscalculation, but that little cheap shot just changed my mind."

Her voice then disappeared leaving me to wonder what she was planning on doing next. No doubt I had gotten under her skin as her usual calm composure had been shattered and replaced with unbridled rage upon calling her out for acting like a coward rather than face me in person to settle the score. I could have continued to ridicule her as a means of further making her mad yet that would have had two negative effects on me. One was acting like a bully despite her being a monster and the other was her figuring out my ploy and turning the tables against me in some way. No, I needed to be above that and act like a proper heroine.

Before moving forward, I took out a single green rupee from my wallet upon pulling it out of my pocket, and tossed it forward where it bounced several times until it stopped. I did this so as to ascertain whether the traps Midnight Sparkle had used before were still there. Nothing happened which lead me to believe that they responded to my presence rather than a green rupee and yet I knew I couldn't just stand there and perform another test. I had to take the risk and hoped I wouldn't get skewered in the process by spikes coming from the ground and the ceiling whilst avoiding the Blue Bubbles.

Gulping, I ran forward, closing my eyes out of fear that I was about to become a pincushion. Fortunately, the spikes didn't appear which meant that I was either incredibly lucky or Midnight Sparkle wanted me to suffer in a different way. In any case, I continued running, dodging the Blue Bubbles though one of them did collide with me causing me to glow in a blue hue indicating that I couldn't use my sword until the curse it had placed on me had been broken--I could have removed the curse by playing the Song of Storms but that would have wasted precious time not to mention leave me vulnerable to another Blue Bubble.

Once I had gotten past them, I entered the next room and was back in the place where I had to use the Deku Flower to reach an alcove blocked by spiked mines so that I could go the rest of the distance as it was too far going across using just the one flower. I took out the map and looked at it again to see where I could go next only to discover there were no other rooms for me to explore. I had explored every inch of the temple yet there were still three Stray Fairies that I hadn't found--I had only picked up twelve. I remembered seeing two small treasure chests appearing on the ceiling so I needed to invert everything back to how it was originally yet it still left one Stray Fairy unaccounted for.

I looked at the map again and the response I made was deafeaning to say the least. " Arrrrgggghhhh!!!!"

" What's wrong?"

" We missed a treasure chest all the way back there!" I answered as I pointed at the map.

Princess Twilight then took a look for herself. " You mean the room with all those air currents? Funny, I could have sworn there weren't any additional treasure chest marks on the map when I last looked at it, but I see there is one we missed." Her Highness then blushed sheepishly before covering her face with her hands. " The fault here is mine, Sunset, as I should have noticed there was an additional chest but I guess I was either too fixated on something else or was ignorant of it all."

" At least it's in a room we can access without too much backtracking."

" Yes, but it does mean backtracking."

I moaned. " Let's just get this over with."

" Before doing that, we need to see which path we need to take to reach the room where the Garo Master was."

" That's what I was doing when I found out we missed a chest."

Princess Twilight checked over my possessions. " You still have a small key so we need to find a locked door. It's a shame that the map cannot display the locations of locked doors but then I'm certain the temple needs to be inverted in order to find it. Speaking of which, you will have to flip the temple back to its original state to open up those additional treasure chests we couldn't open initially. I suggest going after this first chest while the temple is still inverted before going outside and using a Light Arrow. No matter what, there is going to be a lot of backtracking yet this cannot be helped."

" I guess this is one case of backtracking I have to endure because of what it involves."

" Glad you reminded me of that."

" What do you mean?"

" Unlike the other temples, we'll have all fifteen Stray Fairies long before reaching the room that houses the source of the darkness." Twilight answered. " We could visit Adagio back in the village and restore her body back to normal before awakening the final Giant."

I scratched my chin. " We could do that but I'd rather get this place over with and not have to drag things out further than they already have."

" Midnight Sparkle getting to you, Sunset?"

I nodded slightly. " It's not just her, Twilight. You remember what Ganondorf said the last time we saw him in person? I know, shocking at how I brought him up for the first time in a very long time, yet he said he would face me again in the dream world upon the final Giant's awakening. It hasn't been on my mind that much but now that we're close to finishing things here, my mind has been thinking about what kind of conflict he has in store for me this time. If anything, Ganondorf is far worse than Midnight Sparkle could ever be, and yet she has been doing everything in her power to kill me while he has remained silent."

" I'm not sure why he wants to fight you while you sleep."

" Me neither."

Princess Twilight flopped onto my head. " You shouldn't allow Ganondorf to cast such a powerful shadow over you, Sunset. I know you fear him more than anything else given all he has done to you--I'm afraid of him as well--but right now your focus should be on awakening the final Giant and preventing Midnight Sparkle from succeeding in her plans. I'm surprised that someone like Ganondorf has yet to step in and stop her considering she has become a threat what with her new powers."

" If he viewed her as a threat, she would have died long before we got here."

" Wow... Is he really that trivial about that kind of thing?"

I nodded. " It's what he said to me when Spike and I encountered him when my previous journey ended. I don't understand everything about him as there is much he has kept close to his twisted black heart but what I do know is that he still wants for me to become his servant by embracing the darkness that exists inside of my heart. By subjecting me to various forms of torment, he aims to weaken my spirit until I finally cave in. In his eyes, most people aren't a threat so he brushes them aside like they were nothing, but those who are deemed special pique his interest and he goes out of his way just to see if he was right about them."

" It's like you're a pawn to him."

" Something like that."

" Well... You're not the same person you once were." Twilight said. " If anything, I have no doubt that you will be able to resist his efforts of turning you into a monster. Besides, you owe it to Sunset Demon to continue living out the life that was given to you when you earned a second chance when I showed pity towards you. If anything, Sunset, you owe it to both of us and yourself."

Her Highness was making it sound like it was a lot easier than that but the truth was that it was much more difficult than she realized. Ganondorf, from what I recalled of my previous encounters with him and not the one that Lord Tirek portrayed, was one who relied on manipulation through words to make others succumb to their desires all by using what they wanted in life against them until they were convinced he could give them what they wanted. I didn't quite understand every facet of this approach apart from the fact that it worked a lot especially he tried using this tactic against me and I almost fell into it.

There was no doubt in my mind that he would attempt a similar approach when it came time to face him in the dream world. I still didn't get why he wanted to face me there and not in the waking world where I wouldn't be able to put up much in the way of resistance. In this world, I didn't have my Equestrian magic nor the ability to pony-up--regular form in addition to Daydream Shimmer as my friends called tha form--and I doubted the items I had acquired so far along would have any real effect on him. In my dreams, I could do whatever I wanted but was this a means to an end for Ganondorf? Did he want me to use my dreams for a better challenge?

Since I couldn't go any further, I had no choice but to go back to the beginning of the temple and begin backtracking, much to my annoyance. Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I played the Song of Soaring and concentrated on wanting to go back to where I entered the temple. Wings then protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, and began spinning in circles until I disappeared. Moments later, I found myself in the first room and walked forward before Princess Twilight began tugging at my ears and I stopped so that she could tell me what was bothering her.

" You know, bopping me on the head would have worked."

Princess Twilight bowed. " Sorry but I just noticed something and wanted you to see it with your own eyes."

" What's that?"

" I think I may have figured out where we need to go to reach that one room."

I was ecstatic. " You have? Where is it?"

Princess Twilight then pointed up at the ceiling prompting me to do the same yet all I saw was an open treasure chest, the same one I opened back when we first started exploring the temple that contained the first Stray Fairy. " I know what you're thinking, Sunset, but please let me explain. You know how you can use the Hookshot to latch onto a chest and pull yourself towards it right? Maybe you could do it here with this chest? It will either lead us to the locked door we're looking for or inflict tremendous pain since you would have to jump back down here to continue searching."

I continued looking up at the ceiling before looking at her. " Guess we might as well try."

" Wait until you have all of the Stray Fairies first."

" Good idea."

Heading to the right, I opened the door and entered the room that housed the numerous air currents. My first thought was that flames were still shooting out instead of air which was what Midnight Sparkle had done to make things more difficult yet there were no flames. That meant I could find this one chest without having to deal with anything ridiculous though it did pose a concern for me. Either she didn't know where I was or what I was doing or was fixated on making me suffer elsewhere in the temple. I hoped it was the first option as I wasn't looking forward to the second one if it turned out to be true.

I began looking around to see if I could find any traces of the treasure chest I missed but so far my efforts amounted to nothing. I took out the map and looked at it again to confirm that there was a chest located in this room--there was--yet I couldn't see it anywhere. After mulling it over, I concluded that it first needed to be materialized into the room by solving some kind of puzzle so I walked forward to get a better perspective on things. Unfortunately, I had completely forgotten all about the Hiploop and it knocked me over upon seeing me and charging towards me using the horn on its masked face.

Getting back onto my feet, I took out my Hookshot and fired the chain at the Hiploop, latching onto its mask before pulling back and yanking it off. I then switched over to my sword and struck it twice where it was destroyed and fell apart leaving me to continue with my search. I walked to the end of the walkway without finding anything and it began vexing me that I couldn't find anything that stood out as being different from everything else. I turned and began heading back only to stop upon seeing a cleverly hidden eye switch above the path I used to enter this room from. How did I miss something so obvious!?

Since it wasn't frozen or anything, I just needed to hit it with a regular arrow. Taking out the Hero's Bow and switching from Light Arrows to regular ones, I got as close as I could to the switch so as to be able to hit it without something else going on, and fired where upon my arrow struck it, causing the eye to close. This caused a small treasure chest to materialize in a small alcove on my right that I never noticed was there before and judging from how slightly up off the ground it was, I couldn't simply jump and climb up. No, this required some creative thinking and it quickly came when I remembered what Princess Twilight said.

Switching out the bow for the Hookshot again, I got as close as I could to the treasure chest whilst still being able to see it, fired the chain, and latched onto the chest before being pulled forward towards it. I then kicked it open and out came the thirteenth Stray Fairy where it immediately entered my body and now only two more remained. I looked at the map again to confirm that there was still another chest, the one that appeared upside-down above but would become submerged in the water when the temple was inverted back to its original position upon using a Light Arrow on the red emblem outside.

I then jumped down to the main walkway, walked back to the door, entered the previous room and made my way outside. " If there was one good thing of merit regarding this whole backtracking bit, it would be that it will only take a few minutes."

" It will take you longer than that."

" How do you figure?"

" Once the Stone Tower has been reverted back to its original state, you will need to re-create the pathway across by manipulating those blocks with the Elergy of Emptiness in addition to using three of your four forms." Twilight answered.

I moaned under my breath. " I forgot about that part."

" Judging from where the sun is in the sky below us, nightfall should occur within the next hour or two."

" Is that going to be a problem?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " Not really but it does mean us not being able to deal with any problems back in Clock Town that should have been taken of sooner. When I checked you over earlier for inventory purposes, I discovered that you have a total of nineteen masks. According to Adagio, there are twenty-three all together that you need to collect in order to acquire what she called the ultimate mask."

" So I'm down to the final four?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but I have no idea where they could be as Adagio didn't say much when we spoke with her last time."

" Maybe she will give us some hints this time."

" Most likely."

" I wonder what this ultimate mask is like."

" I'm surprised..." Twilight began. " You were absolutely against the idea of getting your hands on it because of how evil it is when Adagio intially mentioned it yet now you seem to be growing more and more interested in wanting to see what it's capable of."

I knew Her Highness was correct about me growing more and more interested in getting the ultimate mask yet I had to remind both her and myself that I had no intention of becoming corrupted and turning into a monster again. That part of my life is over now and I've moved on yet the thought of acquiring the great power locked within the mask scared me as I had no idea if I could resist the temptation that would come upon placing the mask on my face. If it was as powerful as Adagio said, as strong as Majora's Mask itself, I would have the power to oppose Starlight Glimmer, and maybe even Ganondorf himself.

" I'm back, mother!" Scootaloo said as she entered the Stock Pot Inn.

Misty Fly noticed her daughter enter and turned to face her. " I was just about to ask someone to go out and look for you, Anju. You were gone a lot longer than I thought just to get a few items we needed to restock our pantry for our guests." She tapped her foot out of annoyance before sighing. " I suppose this was to be expected since you have had a lot on your mind lately but you shouldn't let it distract you from your work here in the inn."

" I-I'm sorry."

" And I do wish you wouldn't apologize for every little thing."

" I'm sorry..."

Misty Fly sighed. " Never mind! At least you brought back what I asked you to get." She then noticed Scootaloo was no longer holding the letter that she had earlier and decided to inquire about it without making it look obvious. " I see you aren't holding anything else in your hands. Does it mean that you took care of your own little errand?"

Scootaloo nodded. " I mailed the letter as soon as I could so now I will wait for a response."

" That doesn't make any sense."

" What doesn't, mother?"

" It shouldn't have taken you the entire day just to pick up those items." Misty Fly answered. " If anything, you would have been back by around noon yet here you are having come back close to when the sun was about to go down. Tell me, what have you been doing the rest of the time, Anju?"

Scootaloo didn't answer Misty Fly at first prompting the latter to begin tapping her foot before the former finally said something. " I... I actually picked up what you wanted me to get after mailing off my letter and I was about to come back here when something in my heart compelled me to walk around town." She bowed slightly as a means of asking for forgiveness yet her mother didn't seem impressed given what she had just heard. " I couldn't help it! I saw something and it reminded me of those happy days with Kafei. I then began wandering around looking for other places that reminded me of those times."

" Anju..."

" I know what you are going to say, mother."

" And that is?"

" You wish for me to get over my love for Kafei and focus on the here and now." Scootaloo answered. " The truth is, I simply cannot just move without knowing the reason why he disappeared a month ago. I must know if it was something I had done that caused him to act in this manner and do all within my power to fix the mistake. That's why I must remain here tomorrow and wait for him to return."

Misty Fly sighed, walked out of the reception room, through the corridor, and back into the reception room before placing her hand on Scootaloo's shoulder. " After you left early this morning, the postwoman came by and handed over this letter that I now hold in my hand. I thought it best to give it to you so that you can read what it says but perhaps that isn't a good idea since you're still under the delusion that he will return after being gone all this time without saying anything about where he is. Now do you see why I feel he isn't the right person for you, Anju?"

Scootaloo looked away from Misty Fly and the latter knew something was up. As a mother, she could tell that her daughter was hiding something from her and no amount of effort would convince her otherwise, so she decided to press further in hopes of getting her to say something. Scootaloo continued looking away from Misty Fly until the latter whipped out the letter she had been holding causing Scootaloo much distress. The former sighed and revealed that the letters she had been receiving--including the one held by her mother--were from Kafei though Misty Fly couldn't believe it.

Kafei had been missing for a month with no signs of him anywhere, yet here was Scootaloo revealing to her mother that she had been receiving letters supposedly from him and that he was supposed to have disappeared. Misty Fly felt that Kafei was deceiving her daughter by pretending he had disappeared when in fact he was planning on marrying someone else and leaving her daughter hanging. Something had to give before things escalated out of control and it was Misty Fly who decided to take the initiative but before she could, Scootaloo had something else to say.

" Despite his faults, Kafei still remains committed to me, mother."

" I just don't really see that."

" I'm sorry."

" No, I am sorry, Anju, because I have something I must tell you."

" What is that?"

Misty Fly was about to reveal what she was going to do regarding her family when Principal Cinch called out from her room. " Misty Fly? Has Anju come back yet? I was hoping she would want to hear one of my stories but I haven't heard anything all day. In fact, it's getting close to dinner time so you will have to prepare me some food."

" She came back a short time ago, mother." Misty Fly said. " But, I'm too busy dealing with something right now."

" Then by all means send her in here so that I may see her."

" Ugh!" Misty Fly groaned. " She will be with you in a while, mother, but first I need to speak to her about something very important. It will only take a few minutes and then she can prepare you your food before taking over for me at the front desk."

Principal Cinch became slightly erratic. " I insist that you prepare my meal tonight, Misty Fly!"

" I need to speak with Anju."

" Do not question what I want, daughter!"

" Can't you wait until I've finished speaking with Anju, mother?"

Principal Cinch's voice became more volatile. " I want you to come in here right now, Misty Fly. You can talk to Anju later on but first you will prepare a meal for me in addition for the guests who are staying here. One of them has been heard saying that he only eats sirloin rocks from somewhere in Snowhead and won't eat anything else." Her voice grew quieter and more friendly as she continued prattling on about this one particular guest. " I find it strange that a guest only wants rocks from a region draped in snow but then you do owe it to give him what he wants since this is the premier inn of Clock Town."

Misty Fly sighed and turned around before walking towards the room Principal Cinch resided in. Along the way, she mumbled to herself about how it was impossible to import rocks especially when the recent snowstorm in Snowhead had grinded everything to a halt. Even then, had she known ahead of time that one of the inn's guests would be a Goron, she wouldn't have had any rocks to begin with since eating them was seldom seen anywhere apart from Snowhead. Before entering the room, Misty Fly looked over at Scootaloo as though she wanted to say something but didn't and went inside leaving her daughter on her own.

Once she was by herself, Scootaloo picked up the letter that her mother had dropped when she was summoned by her grandmother, and opened it to discover that it had been written by Kafei but again, much like his previous ones, there was no return address so she couldn't even begin to search for him without knowing where he really was. Scootaloo began thinking that perhaps her mother was right in that Kafei was merely deceiving her and he secretly was in love with another. It was unfortunate that she never received any kind of memento letting her know he was waiting for her. Had he done so, Scootaloo wouldn't have felt a wavering sensation coming from her heart.

After flipping the Stone Tower Temple back to its original position, I spent roughly ten minutes using my different forms--excluding the Deku Scrub as the shell it made was too light to be of any use--to hold down the blue switches whilst playing the Elergy of Emptiness for each one. Upon finishing that, I jumped across each platform and re-entered the temple where I ran forward with my shield raised so as to avoid getting electrocuted by the Dragonflies that were now flying about. The Real Bombchu had also returned, it's tail flickering to indicate that it was ready to explode so I jumped down to the lower level just as it charged towards me.

One of the treasure chests I had caused to materialize when everything was inverted ended up here so now I could finally open it and see if it contained a Stray Fairy--I would have been utterly furious if it had contained anything else. Kicking the chest open did indeed reveal a Stray Fairy giving me fourteen leaving just the one remaining and fortunately, it was located in the room to my right so I didn't have to go very far to find it. Once the fairy had safely entered my body, I turned around and climbed up a nearby ladder only to suddenly drop back down when an explosion caused by the Real Bombchu caught me by surprise.

It took a few moments for the smoke to clear and when it did, I climbed back up and was about to make my way to the door when I felt a powerful shock striking me in the back courtesy of one of the Dragonflies. It had caught wind of my presence and thought it could make a meal out of me but I had no time to deal with it as I needed to focus on getting that final fairy and flipping everything back the other way so that I could finally complete this temple. As I ran for the door, my body felt numb in places because of being electrocuted yet I was more than resilient enough to continue going despite experiencing some awkward quirks.

Entering the next room which was the one with the air currents, or rather the underwater section given that the temple was right-side up again, I walked around the corner until I was on the walkway with water surrounding me on both sides. Before doing anything else, I wanted to make sure Midnight Sparkle hadn't done anything to the water, so I tested the waters by dipping my foot into it. Nothing happened at first yet I maintained this stance for a few minutes until I was certain nothing was out of place. The treasure chest in question was located deep underwater so I needed to become Mikau in order to sink down to it.

As I took out the Zora Mask, I couldn't help but wonder how Midnight Sparkle felt upon the temple being inverted back to its original state. In fact, I was wondering if she still retained her sanity. Her new power had certainly made her stronger than she was during the Friendship Games yet it was slowly coming at the cost of her mind. Despite the personal anguish she had put me through, I wanted to help her before it was too late, yet I didn't know if she were willing to seek my help given her desire to see me, Princess Twilight, Twilight Sparkle, and our friends dead all because she wants Equestrian Magic. Hopefully, she would seek my guidance given I knew what it was like getting consumed with power.

Placing the Zora Mask on my face, I squatted down and watched as my body shimmered from human to Zora until I let out an ear-piercing scream resulting in my transformation finishing and becoming Mikau. While the idea of using one of my other forms for a brief moment annoyed me, I had actually gotten used to it since it had been an occurring theme throughout exploring the Stone Tower Temple. Jumping into the water and sinking downwards, I quickly noticed the treasure chest in question on an isolated ledge so I swam forward slightly and continued to drop until I landed on the ledge, kicked open the chest, and the final Stray Fairy entered my body.

I could have chosen to go back and collect my reward from Adagio but instead I chose to do the right thing by awakening the final Giant first. When it came to priorities, earning a reward wasn't important and was in fact completely optional as saving the day was more important. I swam back up to the surface, climbed out of the water, entered the previous room, avoided the Dragonflies and Real Bombchu, and exited the temple. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Zora Mask, flipped back my hair, and walked forward a few steps before turning around whilst taking out my bow, switched from regular to Light Arrows, and activated the red emblem.

Just like that, everything flipped around again until I was once again looking down at the sky and up at the ground. I then wiped my brow out of exhaustion from having to do so much backtracking before jumping back across the platforms and entering the inverted Stone Towe Temple again. According to what Princess Twilight showed me earlier, there was a treasure chest I could use as a Hookshot point so that I could pull myself up to a much higher level. I remembered there were two chests on the ceiling with one being higher up than the other and it was this one I needed to use.

" You'll need to make sure you're standing in the right place." Twilight said.

" Otherwise?" I asked.

" You will drop back down and could end up falling into the sky below."

I gulped before looking down at the endless abyss that was the sky. " I don't want that to happen, Twilight."

Princess Twilight landed on my shoulder. " I didn't mean to make you feel nervous, Sunset."

" I'm just nervous at what Midnight Sparkle is going to throw our way next." I said. " We've pretty much reached the end of the temple as according to the map, we only have two more rooms to go before we arrive back in the room where I defeated both Sunset Demon and the Garo Master, and yet she is still relying on cheap tactics rather than choosing to fight me herself given she is stronger than I am."

Princess Twilight nodded. " While I'm mostly unfamiliar with the behavior of Midnight Sparkle since she is the demonic version of Twilight Sparkle, I have noticed that she does have one or two things in common with me. Rather than choosing to fight all out and be defeated, she is using strategy by throwing numerous obstacles in our path in an effort to weaken you enough where she can easily finish the job without getting her hands dirty."

" But you were never a coward."

" No, but I knew the prospect behind using my intellect."

" I still say she is being a coward."

" Midnight Sparkle is a reflection of Twilight Sparkle but with some additional characteristics as you mentioned before." Twilight said. " She has some characteristics that are unique to her person and that makes her unpredictable with regards to her thought process. You needn't stoop down to her level as you're much better than that, Sunset, but perhaps you could turn the tables by using your own versions of her tricks. I know it sounds rather underhanded but it is a solid strategy and it would definitely take her by surprise as I don't think she expects you to use her tricks since it would be against your creed as a heroine."

" Yet will she fight me as a means of ending this?"

" That will be up to her to decide." Twilight answered. " Don't be the one to initiate the fight. Allow her to do it instead so that you can retain the high road should she reach the conclusion where fighting you would be nothing but problematic and not in her best interests. Whether she does or doesn't, you will be the better person for it leaving her with nothing but the shame of knowing that never needed to keep this going."

I nodded. " Guess we shouldn't delay things any further." Walking forward until I reached the raised platform that featured Majora's Mask on it, I looked up at the ceiling and saw the two treasure chests I opened before. " It looks like the one I opened on the lower level is what I need to pull myself up to the top." Taking out the Hookshot and aiming carefully, I adjusted my position by taking a single step backwards before firing the chain where it connected with the chest with a loud thud. I was then pulled upwards to the ceiling only to stop upon hitting the chest and dropped down to a walkway that lead up to a locked door.

" No wonder we couldn't find the door."

" Good thing you brought this little nook to my attention, Twilight." I said as I took out the small key from my pocket and unlocked the door. " At least we can finally progress knowing we've done everything else up to this point." Opening the door and entering the next room, I suddenly came to a stop upon seeing a familar monster blocking my path. " Guess there was another one of those Eyegore monsters lurking about." In front of us was indeed an Eyegore and so far it hadn't noticed me but I knew it wouldn't be long before it would and proceed to attack me like the other one did.

" I believe this one is capable of firing a laser from its eye."

" How serious it it?"

" You can't use your shield to stop it."

" That's going to be annoying."

" Fortunately, it cannot move when shooting the laser." Twilight said. " This means that all you have to do is wait for the eye to glow yellow and shoot it with a Light Arrow. It's going to be a lot easier than the other Eyegore in that you just have to avoid getting hit by the laser."

I was about to say something in response when I stared coldly at Midnight Sparkle, who was now standing in front of the Eyegore. She turned her head to look at it, chuckled to herself and turned her head back before stomping her foot hard on the ground and glared at me. " Did you flip this place over not once but twice just now!?" I didn't answer her yet she knew by my silence that I had done exactly that. " Would it kill you to warn me next time before doing something like that? Anyway, I just couldn't help but laugh at how Princess Twilight is so wrong about this monster behind me."

" What did you do to it, Midnight Sparkle?"

" You'll see when it fires its laser."

I cursed under my breath. " Figures you'd do this instead of facing me."

Midnight Sparkle wagged her finger in front of her face. " All in due time, dear Sunset. I'm not going to allow your taunting to get the best of me. I know that losing my temper would make me irrational and prone to doing something stupid, but I'm much too happy to be doing anything of the sort. I honestly thought I had absorbed all of the dark power in this temple and yet it appears that there is a much greater source coming from deep below the temple. If I was to get my hands on it, nothing would stop me from fulfilling my desires."

" You don't know what kind of power it is."

" Neither do you."

" Midnight Sparkle..." I began. " If you were ever going to listen to someone for a change, then listen to me. I know what it's like to crave power. I became a demonic monster for that exact purpose, yet I was corrupted by that power and became a harbinger of evil. You may think this power will give you all of the Equestrian Magic but it won't. If anything, it will ensure your death or reduce you to a mindless monster whose hunger for power is what keeps you going. Please, just stop this before something goes wrong."

" Unlike you... I think I can handle it."

" So you chose to ignore me then?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " I actually took the liberty of doing research by reading the ancient text written on these walls despite the annoying natterings of the spirits who dwell here plaguing my ears at every turn. You'd think they would just leave me alone instead of wailing to no end but I suppose it's all they can do since they're dead and all. Anyway, you have more important things to worry about right now, Sunset." She turned her back to me before disappearing into thin air causing the Eyegore to awaken. " I'm expecting you to come after me but I'm hoping this monster will do the job."

Before I had to stop her, the Eyegore's eye opened, glowed yellow, and fired a massive laser of which I barely managed to avoid by dropping down onto my back. The laser went over my land, slamming into a wall behind me, and kept going until it tapered off when the Eyegore closed its eye. " Okay... I'm no expert on what kind of laser this thing has but I definitely know that wasn't natural."

Princess Twilight nodded. " No doubt Midnight Sparkle increased the power of the laser."

" Now what do I do?"

" You can still defeat the Eyegore using Light Arrows." Twilight answered. " It's just that you need to concentrate even harder so as to avoid that laser. I believe it will take three hits from Light Arrows to prevail here but keep a close watch on your magic. You haven't been collecting Magic Jars so it might be very long right now."

I could have backtracked a little to pick up some Magic Jars but I doubted I could avoid getting hit by the laser from the Eyegore's eye. No, I would need to make each shot count by getting in close enough and striking before it could do the same in return. Taking out my bow and switching over to Light Arrows, I got up onto my feet and dashed forward before dropping to my knees as another laser fired above my head before disappearing moments later. Even though it didn't hit me, I could still feel it like it had made contact with me. Getting back up, I waited for the eye to open, and when it did and changed colour, I fired a Light Arrow just as it was about to fire another laser.

The resulting hit caused the Eyegore some discomfort but then it fired another laser almost immediately and I was caught in the blast. I wasn't pushed back or anything but instead felt tremendous pain in addition to having to cover my eyes to avoid getting blinded by the bright light. When the laser disappeared, my entire body was trembling due to how much damage I received, and I tried to prepare another Light Arrow only for the Eyegore to fire another laser. I was barely able to drop to my knees as the laser sailed past yet I struggled getting back up again due to the damage and was blasted by the next laser.

Again, I wasn't knocked back or anything but my body felt like it was about to shatter due to how powerful the laser was. When it disappeared moments later, I dropped to my knees then my hands and started breathing heavily. Midnight Sparkle truly wanted me dead as why else would she go to so much trouble altering the power of this Eyegore to the point where it could potentially kill me in a few hits? Good thing I had Red Potions on hand as this would have been a lot worse than it really was had I not been prepared. I had no intention of using one until I had defeated the Eyegore.

Rather than getting back up and being hit by the laser for a third time, I simply chose to crawl along until I was close enough to the Eyegore. My tactic worked as it opened its eye but it managed to fire a laser before I could use a Light Arrow as I hadn't gotten my bow ready. When the laser stopped and the eye closed, I got into a sniper-like position and waited for the eye to open again, and when it did and changed colour from blue to yellow, I fired my Light Arrow, inflicting damage upon it again. It reeled back and I was ready to fire another arrow when suddenly, its eye opened, firing a much faster laser than before.

The beam hit me before I could duck and this time I was pushed back until I crashed into the door followed by slumping to the ground. Princess Twilight then flew out in front of me and began pointing down at my pockets. " I think now would be a good time to use a Red Potion, don't you think?"

" No... I can defeat it without using one up."

" Don't be reckless here, Sunset."

" I'm not being reckless, Twilight."

" From where I'm standing, you are most definitely being reckless."

I shook my head. " If I try to drink one of my Red Potions, the Eyegore is sure to notice and fire its laser in response. I could end up dropping the potion where it will either smash on the ground or roll off the side and smash on the ground below, or I could get killed before I could consume it. I wish there were an easier way to consume them without having to waste precious seconds but there isn't so I have to hold on until it's defeated."

Princess Twilight looked as though she was about to contest my decision when the Eyegore's eye opened up, turned yellow, and fired its laser forcing me to remain low as it struck the wall where the door was. Luckily, Her Highness made sure to duck otherwise she would have been hit by the laser as well. " Okay, you've made your point, Sunset, but can you defeat it quickly? You know how I get when you've suffered a lot of wounds."

I smiled. " I just need one more arrow."

" You have plenty of those but Magic Power is the problem."

" Hopefully, I've got enough for one more Light Arrow."

Crawling along the ground, I slowly made my way over to the Eyegore, who kept on firing lasers from its eye every few seconds until I was right next to it. When it opened up its eye again and it changed colour from blue to yellow, I quickly stood up, fired a Light Arrow--it worked despite my low magic--and its eye changed colour again from yellow to red before tumbling forward and landing on its stomach. It then exploded a few moments later revealing a locked door that had been behind it covered with iron bars but then those bars rose up allowing me to continue.

" You did it, Sunset!"

I dropped to my knees. " That was way more intense than it needed to be."

" Now will you use a Red Potion?"

" No need to tell me twice." I said. I took out a Red Potion from behind my back, uncorked it, and drank the contents until it was all gone. Immediately, my wounds began healing and my strength returned. " If I hadn't gone back to get these prior to inverting the temple for the first time, I would have been heading to the source of the darkness below the temple with barely any health." Getting back up onto my feet, I corked the bottle, and put it away behind my back before going through the door. " Whoa!" I exclaimed when something dropped down from the ceiling and I barely managed to avoid getting hit.

" A spiked column..." Twilight said. " I don't think Midnight Sparkle put that there so consider this a natural trap of the temple instead."

On either side of me were some pots that I smashed using my sword with each one containing Magic Jars that I picked up to restore my magic. " That's a relief! At least now I won't need to use my Green Potion for the time being, but where are supposed to go from here? The Crystal Switch from earlier when we came here when the temple was right-side up is in front of us yet I don't see anywhere else we can go. Did we come the wrong way?"

Princess Twilight looked up before bopping me on the head. " There's an opened treasure chest right above us, Sunset. Get close enough to it and use your Hookshot to pull yourself up to the higher ledge."

Taking out the Hookshot, I waited for the spiked column to rise back up before walking forward a few inches and looking up. Firing the chain, I got pulled up to the ledge but upon landing on it, I remained perfectly still as there were two additional spiked columns rolling back and forth. Further ahead on the ceiling was another Hookshot plate and I needed it to get across without being poked to pieces. Carefully aiming to make sure I actually hit it, I fired the Hookshot's chain where it connected, pulling me over the spiked columns before dropping down onto a row of blue rupees--not that I needed them.

I then jumped down to the ground below and stood before the Boss Door. Taking out the Boss Key, I held it firmly in one hand before closing my eyes and placing my other hand on my chest knowing what awaited behind it. Princess Twilight reaffirmed me that I was ready to do this especially after all I had been through throughout the temple and I smiled before unlocking the door and entering the next room which was where I defeated both Sunset Demon and the Garo Master. The room was exactly the same except there was now a huge hole in the ground that lead to where I needed to go. Suddenly, a howling sound echoed all around me.

Night of the Second Day - 36 Hours Remain.

Nightfall had come once again so that meant I would be facing the source of the darkness during the night. Walking up to the edge of the hole, I peered down into it to see if I could see anything but all I saw was a whirlpool of sand that cascaded down in a spiral though it was also glowing in a myriad of colours. My heart told me to jump though I hesitated at first yet Princess Twilight told me that I had to jump as there was no other choice. Breathing heavily, I jumped into the sand where it immediately pulled me under until everything went white. When I eventually opened my eyes, I was shocked at where I had ended up.

I was standing on a platform in the middle of a vast desert outside at night. Aside from what appeared to be remnants of ancient buildings strewn about in the sands, there was nothing of particular merit. Wasn't this supposed to be the bottom of the Stone Tower Temple? Why was I now outside? Furthermore, what exactly was going on? Princess Twilight had no clue what we were doing in the desert yet she sensed a powerful presence coming from somewhere but she couldn't pinpoint its general location. I knew of one presence already and she was standing right before me.

Midnight Sparkle folded her arms. " So you managed to get past that monster too? I knew you would so I'm not surprised to see you here, Sunset."

" You should leave now while you can."

" Are you threatening me?"

I shook my head. " There is a presence even stronger than you lurking about out here. I know you've been ignoring my pleas but this time you should listen to me. At any moment, a battle is going to take place between me and the source of the darkness that has imprisoned the guardian of this region. You have no reason to be here, Midnight Sparkle, so you are free to leave without getting yourself killed."

" And you have to stay because?"

" Because I've been tasked to destroy the monster that is behind the darkness."

" You expect me to believe that?"

" I should hope so."

Midnight Sparkle chuckled. " I do believe you, Sunset. In fact, it makes sense that you would come here to destroy such a creature. However, I am rather curious about what this creature is and the power it supposedly possess according to your own words. If I can absorb its power, I will have more than enough to ensure you and your friends don't get in my way and the Equestrian Magic will be mine. Everything will make sense at last!" She stepped forward until she stood right next to me before she wrapped her around my neck making me very uncomfortable. " Once I absorb the power, I'll finally fight you."

" Sorry but I have to focus on the monster."

" After calling a coward, it seems the tables have turned."

I pushed Midnight Sparkle away where she stumbled before stopping in the sand. " Just go already! I'll deal with you in good time but right now I have more important things to take care of despite not really wanting to deal with them."

" Oh no! You are not brushing me aside!"

" Go!"

" You wanted to fight me so that you could avenge Sunset Demon." Midnight Sparkle said. " Whether that's your actual intention or not no longer matters! You've been getting past all of my traps long enough and now it's time to finally end this. The Equestrian Magic is calling out to me and I must have it as it is the key to understanding things I never knew before. I must understand it all!"

Suddenly, it felt like an earthquake had struck as everything started shaking. My entire body froze prompting Midnight Sparkle to turn around to see what had caused my reaction where she too froze on the spot upon seeing a giant sand mound rising up from the ground. The mound grew in size and while I just stood there watching, Midnight Sparkle began glowing in a darkening aura as though she intended on fighting whatever was coming. I pleaded with her to leave before it was too late yet she ignored me and continued to build up her power but then the sand mound burst and a terrifying sight greeted us.

Out came a massive red insect-like creature with two huge incissors on both sides of its face in addition to smaller ones on its mouth as well as in it, spikes running down both sides of its body, and finally there was a beautiful looking gem on the tip of its tail. I wasn't expecting the source of the darkness to be so huge and yet I had to defeat it if I was to awaken the final Giant thus restoring Ikana back to normal. I drew my sword and shield though deep down I had no idea what I was supposed to do against something much bigger than myself but before I could come up with a plan, another earthquake began rattling everything and it was coming from behind me.

I turned around and froze upon seeing another sand mound forming. This one also grew in size until another insect-like creature, the same as the other one but blue in colour, came forth though it had three eyeballs lined across one side of its body, each looking in a different direction that made me very uneasy. Both creatures flew about before the red one disappeared by diving into the ground while the other continued flying about, shattering some debris before disappearing into the ground like the red one had done. Midnight Sparkle had no idea what was going on but was determined to fight when something unexpected happened.

The red insect popped out of the ground, noticed Midnight Sparkle, blinked a few times, and then lunged forward, its mandibles twitching in excitement, where it devoured her in one fell swoop much to my eternal horror. It then continued to fly around before diving into the ground again leaving me to stare off into thin air before dropping to my knees. Just like that, she had been eaten alive and after I had warned her to flee yet she refused to listen. I reached out with my hand thinking I could save her but it was too late. I couldn't sense her power any longer... Midnight Sparkle was dead. Clenching my hand into a fist, I pounded the ground, tears trickling down my face.

" Why didn't she run away when I told her?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I guess she had my stubbornness when it comes to research."

" I had to stop her but this wasn't what I expected."

" Don't blame yourself, Sunset."

I got back up and wiped the tears from my eyes. " I wanted to help her, Twilight, I really did, yet she ignored me and was insistent on seeing her desire fulfilled. Was she destined to die in such a horrific manner? I mean, part of me is glad that she is gone as it means she won't be able to get her hands on the Equestrian Magic, yet a part of me wishes things had been different and she could have found peace much like Sunset Demon had done." I walked forward towards the insects who had since emerged from the sand with my sword and shield raised yet my entire body began trembling, most likely out of fear that perhaps what happened to Midnight Sparkle would happen to me.

" It's too late to think about it now."

I sighed. " I know..."

" You need to focus on destroying these giant insects." Twilight said. " Midnight Sparkle may be gone but that doesn't mean you can mourn over her death forever. While your desire to help her was indeed a noble one, she was beyond redemption in that she wanted to kill you, me, and our friends all to get some magic and knowledge. In fact, you shouldn't mourn for her at all since she also killed Sunset Demon after using her like a guinea pig."

Her Highness was once again correct on all counts. Midnight Sparkle had caused us nothing but grief and was willing to sacrifice her fellow demon just to succeed in her goal. I couldn't show a monster like that any sympathy yet I still wished she could have changed much like how Sunset Demon did before she died. Hopefully, Midnight Sparkle could finally find peace in the afterlife and allow Twilight Sparkle to be able to move on. I turned to Princess Twilight. " So what exactly are we dealing with?"

" These insects are known as Twinmold, the Giant Masked Insect." Twilight answered. " Both of them are the source of the darkness here in the Stone Tower Temple and spend much of their time rising out of the sand, flying about, and then diving back down into it before repeating the process. Unfortunately, there is much to it than that so don't think is going to be easy because it isn't. Right now, there is nothing you can do against the red one as the gem like object on its tail conceals its weak point and nothing in your arsenal of weapons can shatter it. Instead, you must focus on defeating the blue one."

" What about those eyes on its body?"

" You need to hit them with arrows."

" Sounds easy enough."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " The red Twinmold will do everything in its power to get in your way so hitting the eyes of the blue Twinmold will be difficult. You should be able to use regular arrows or you can use Light Arrows, but again, be mindful of your magic so be sure to smash those pots on this platform. Oh, and be sure not to get hit by the fireballs that come from the mouth of the red Twinmold."

As she said that, a fireball came flying at me and I barely managed to jump to the side as it exploded off in the distance. It then knocked me to the ground simply by flying by without a care in the world. As I got back onto my feet, it had since disappeared by diving back into the sand leaving me to deal with the blue Twinmold. Taking out my bow and switching over to regular arrows, I followed the blue Twinmold out into the desert yet this proved to be a bad decision on my part as my feet began sinking, reducing my movement, allowing it to get further and further away.

Unfortunately, it went into the sand as well as the red Twinmold popped back out and began shooting fireballs. I dodged each one as they exploded behind me, yet I could feel the heat from each one striking my back leaving me to wonder just how strong these creatures really were. The red Twinmold then attempted to knock me over but I raised my shield in hopes it would be enough, and while it was effective at first, I remembered that my shield couldn't protect every part of my body as the red Twinmold turned around by arcing its body and knocking me to the ground, its flaming body dealing additional damage.

I was about to get back up when I was suddenly knocked down again as the blue Twinmold emerged from the sand. I had only just started the battle and already things weren't going in my favour, and then the red Twinmold dove at me in an attempt to knock me over again, but this time, I rolled to my left and kept on rolling until I was back on the platform again before finally getting back onto my feet. Luck was then on my side as the blue Twinmold flew past me over me head so aiming at its eyes, I began shooting arrows in hopes of hitting them yet I only managed to hit one while missing the others. Fortunately, it didn't notice or if it did, it wasn't paying attention.

It also meant that regular arrows were effective so I could conserve my Magic Power for later if I felt the need to use Light Arrows. The blue Twinmold turned around and came back the other way but then so did the red Twinmold where it flung another fireball at me from its maw. I dodged it by side-stepping to my left only to get knocked down as it flew by before diving back into the sand again. I got back onto my feet again only to watch the blue Twinmold dive down as well leaving to wonder where they would pop up next. My answer came when the red Twinmold emerged from the sand and flung a few more fireballs that I blocked using my shield.

It then turned around and shot out another fireball--the number it shot varied so I had to be extra precautious--that I again blocked with my shield, but then the blue Twinmold came out of the sand at the other end of the battlefield yet flew over to my location. The red Twinmold flew in the opposite direction and for a moment it looked like they would collide with one another yet both avoided hitting each other when the red Twinmold flew upwards slightly at the last moment allowing the blue Twinmold to continue on as normal. It flew over my head and I responded by firing more arrows that hit its remaining eyes.

All of a sudden, the blue Twinmold came crashing down into the sand and began sliding along where a fourth eyeball appeared from out of its maw. I immediately knew that this was the weak point yet I couldn't aim for it as the blue Twinmold's face was on the other side of its body and there was no way I could push my way through without being knocked over its tail or any other part of its body. " I can't get around to the other side to hit that new eyeball!"

" Relax, Sunset."

" You have a suggestion?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Just wait for it and you will have your chance."

I had no idea what she meant but I knew better than to question Her Highness so I decided to wait. The blue Twinmold continued to slide along and as it did, it went around in a circle in the sand exposing its weak point to me when its face appeared before me. " There it is!"

" Quickly! Hit the eye with arrows before it can recover and before the red Twinmold can get in the way."

" Should I use regular or Light Arrows?"

" I would suggest going with the latter but be quick."

Switching from regular arrows to the Light Arrows, I began shooting at the oversized eyeball dangling out from the blue Twinmold's gaping maw. Since the eye was much bigger than the eyeballs that were on its body, it was easier to hit the eye without fear of missing it. I managed to hit it three times before getting knocked over by the red Twinmold, but then, three hits was usually the most I could do before the weak point disappeared forcing me to go through the process of exposing it again. The blue Twinmold pulled its eye back into its maw before lifting itself up from the sand resuming its flying once again.

It then disappeared into the ground though I noticed a small sand mound had appeared and it began making its way around the platform I was standing on. If this mound was indeed that of the blue Twinmold as it moved about underground, I could now pinpoint its location as a means of hopefully intercepting it. I just had to make sure I was following the right one as its counterpart could also go into the sand in order to move about. It moved around the platform for several seconds before emerging from the sand, its mandibles spinning about in circles due to its body being capable of doing so--it was relatively creepy to me.

Each of the eyes on its body had opened up again so now I had to repeat the process only for the red Twinmold to strike me with a fireball from a distance--I was so fixated on the other one that I completely ignored it. The fireball knocked me forward where I landed face-first in the sand and began sinking due to the sand having a powerful current that was also pushing me forward. I scrambled back onto my feet only to jump to my right to avoid another fireball followed by another and then another, jumping each time yet moving further away from the platform due to the sand.

" Uh, Sunset?" Twilight asked. " You might want to look behind you."

I turned my head to see what she was getting at and my face turned white. " Where is the rest of the sand!?" The sand suddenly stopped at the edge of what appeared to be a bottomless pit below despite there actually being a bottom down there that comprised of sand. I immediately began running as fast as I could in hopes of not getting pushed over yet the sand bogged me down reducing my overall speed. " This would have been a great place to use those Hover Boots from my previous journey yet they don't exist here!" My legs began getting exhausted yet I continued running knowing what was now behind me. " WAAAAH!"

" Sunset?"

I dove and landed back on the platform whilst avoiding a fireball though that was surprising. " That was way too close!"

" It seems there is a limited amount of space around here."

" Now I know why I can't stray too far from this platform."

" There has to be a reason why there is so much space in the first place." Twilight said. " I can understand it if it was to accommodate the two Twinmolds but it still doesn't make sense from a logical standpoint."

" I'll worry about that later." I said as I got up onto my feet. " Right now, I need to find where that blue Twinmold is and resume attacking those eyes on its body." I then paused for a moment and reflected upon how things were going. " So far, this battle hasn't been all that bad despite the obvious lopsideness in the form of them being roughly one hundred times my size not to mention the red Twinmold being the more aggressive of the two."

" Strange how one is docile while the other isn't."

" I have a feeling the red Twinmold will be much more problematic."

The blue Twinmold then came flying by and I switched back to my regular arrows before shooting the eyes on its body. I managed to hit the first two after a few misses but as I was about to go for the third eye, I was suddenly blocked by the red Twinmold who knocked me over using its body. I landed on the ground face-first only to quickly roll to the side to avoid getting blasted by another fireball that came at me from behind courtesy of the red Twinmold who had since turned around in its bid to knock me down again. Instead of getting back up again, I chose to stay down until it went back under the sand.

It did so leaving only the blue Twinmold though it too had also disappeared by going back down into the sand. I had no idea which mound belonged to which so I waited on the platform until one of them decided to appear again. One did so moments later, catching me off guard causing me to fall flat on my face again. As I got back up, I saw the blue Twinmold bursting forth from the sand but before it had a chance to move about, I fired another arrow at the remaining eye, striking it, causing the blue Twinmold to crash once again before its weak point stuck out of its gaping maw.

Switching back to the Light Arrow, I waited for the blue Twinmold to turn around thus exposing its eye, and when it did, I fired several more arrows at it, the eyeball growing with every hit until it exploded. Screaming in pain, it flew upwards though at first I thought it was trying to escape but then the tail began to explode followed by a chain reaction that destroyed the rest leaving only the head that merely dropped down and crashed into the sand. As I stared, I could see a waft of smoke billowing from the head before it too exploded, yet this caused a large treasure chest to materialize on the platform.

" You defeated one of them!" Twilight exclaimed. " Now you need to take out the other one."

I looked around for the red Twinmold only it had disappeared. " Where did it go?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I don't know but you should check out that treasure chest which just appeared."

" That doesn't make sense."

" What doesn't?"

" A treasure chest materializing in the middle of a conflict such as this." I answered. " Throughtout my previous journey and this one, such a thing has never happened before, so you can excuse me for being a little suspicious."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes... I do see where you're coming from, Sunset, but I still think you should check it out. In fact, I don't think the red Twinmold will reappear until you take the contents of whatever is inside of that chest. It sounds weird but it's the only explanation that makes sense."

Turning around, I walked up to the chest, and opened it before reaching in and taking out what looked to be a mask, yet one I had never seen before. I couldn't even begin to explain what it looked like yet there was a strange presence emanating from it that filled me with a sense of might. There were no specific features on this mask other than it looking like an ancient costume piece but it had clearly been worn out over the ages as some parts of it were cracked though not enough to break it. Why would anyone want to hide a mask here of all places and what was so special about it?

" Well... This is certainly something."

" It most certainly is."

" What do you mean?"

" That is the Giant's Mask." Twilight answered. " Not much is known about it due to it having been hidden away yet it contains the strength and might of a giant. It's said that the power contained within it was so great that it couldn't be used anywhere other than a special location though no one knows. If you were to put it on, you could take on the largest of monsters but again, no one knows if it will even do anything."

" Should I put it on?"

" I think you should but it's up to you."

As I held the Giant's Mask firmly in my hands, everything started to shake and I knew straight away that the red Twinmold was finally ready to get things started. It was the one that killed Midnight Sparkle by eating her alive so this had become a bit more personal though deep down I knew I couldn't succumb to wanting vengeance. A mound of sand appeared and from it came the red Twinmold and it was definitely infuriated over what I had done. In its hissy fit, three much smaller insect-like creatures emerged and I could tell that they were going to be nothing but a headache unless I could take care of them quickly.

The red Twinmold suddenly ducked back down into the sand before coming out and flying about leaving with very few options. It had no eyes on its body so arrows weren't very effective not to mention I had to avoid getting blasted by fireballs whilst avoiding its little friends and itself. Looking down at the Giant's Mask, something in my heart compelled me to place it on my face as though it were my salvation. I did so and put it on yet nothing happened at first making me wonder if it was broken, but then I began convulsing before letting out a loud, deep scream and I began increasing in size until it eventually stopped.

" Sunset?"

" Twilight? What just happened?"

Chapter 65: In the Dream

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
July 24, 2017
Chapter 65: In the Dream.

Princess Twilight said that the Giant's Mask contained the strength and might of a giant so I assumed that wearing it would give me a boost of strength that would allow me to take care of the red Twinmold who had since summoned small insect-like creatures to aid it. Instead, the mask had caused me to transform but not in the normal sense. Rather than becoming a new form, I had essentially become a giant, one who towered above all others, who didn't have to hold back for anything. And yet, I was absolutely terrified because not only had I gotten bigger, my body had been altered in places.

My sword and shield were gone and my limbs had become more muscular than before. It was as though I had forsaken the tools that had brought me this far and was now being forced to rely on brute force to overcome the remaining Twinmold. The small insects didn't wait for me to figure out what transpired and began charging but then my body suddenly acted of its own accord where I began punching them using my fists and nothing more. Each one got knocked back where it burned away to nothing upon hitting the sand and I was in complete awe over how cool it was. It felt like nothing could stop me now.

The red Twinmold then disappeared by diving back under the sand allowing me a few moments to come to terms with the transformation. For one thing, my perspective was much greater than before in that I could see further than ever and confirm that the area I was in had size limitations. Even in my current height, walking off the edge would mean death as I would have no means of getting back up here. I then noticed several large boulders scattered about that weren't there before but then I couldn't see much when I was smaller given my depth perception was pretty poor.

" Sunset?" Twilight called out from below. " Are you alright?"

I checked my body to ensure that I was and gave her a thumbs up. " It took me a moment to come to grips with what happened but I think I'm starting to get the hang of having ridiculously sized muscles. I mean, did you see me pound those small insects into oblivion? Granted, I do prefer using an actual weapon as opposed to my fists but I'll make do with using brute force when dealing with that red Twinmold."

" Good thing it disappeared otherwise I wouldn't have been able to tell you more about the Giant's Mask."

" What else do you know?"

Princess Twilight floated up and landed next to my ear. " You might think that you can remain as a giant forever, Sunset, but you would be wrong about that. The Giant's Mask consumes Magic Power at an alarming rate. In fact, it consumes one point of magic every second. You need to end this battle quickly before the magic runs out and you're forced to shrink back down to normal."

" Can't I use that Green Potion of mine?"

" Yes but not when you're a giant."

" What!?"

" In your current state, all items and equipment have been disabled." Twilight said. " You will have to take off the mask momentarily to use the potion to restore your magic. Luckily, your Magic Meter was doubled when you restored Adagio back in Woodfall so you can go for quite some time before having to go back to being regular sized."

" For that, I am thankful."

" One other thing."

" What's that?"

" The Giant's Mask can only be used in this area of the temple." Twilight answered. " According to Tatl's memories, the power of this mask is so great that it was confined to this one place so that it wouldn't be abused by any who sought to use it to conquer all that they surveyed. Once we leave here, it will sadly be next to useless. In other words, enjoy the experience while you can."

I felt slightly dejected when Her Highness mentioned that but I could understand why it had to be that way. A mask that could allow its wearer to become a giant was truly a powerful item in and of itself yet temptation was a force most couldn't resist. If the mask could be used anywhere throughout Termina, one would have unlimited power and be utterly unstoppable with the sole exception of the Four Giants being able to defeat someone who had been corrupted. Unless that person had a will that was strong, they would become consumed with power and become nothing but destruction.

The power of the mask had made me feel powerful when I destroyed those insects by simply punching them yet I couldn't allow myself to become enthralled by the notion that I had once again become more powerful than ever before. It was a grim reminder of what happened when I put on Princess Twilight's crown during the Fall Formal. When I wore it and changed into Sunset Demon, I was no longer human or pony but rather a monster, a monster born of my own selfish desires. Never again could I end up like that as it would serve as a middle finger to the sacrifice she made. So long as I wore the mask, I had to use it responsibly.

At that moment, the red Twinmold emerged from the ground and began shooting fireballs at me but this time I raised my arms in front of my face like they were a shield and the fireball bounced off harmlessly though I did feel a slight twinge. It then began flying about though it did so much faster than before and I chased after it in hopes that I could catch it. I reached out with my hands in hopes of grabbing its body and succeeded only to feel a burning sensation and I let go immediately. Despite now being a giant, the red Twinmold was still too hot to touch so now I needed another tactic.

It turned out and shot several fireballs as more of its insect followers came up from the ground and charged towards me before digging their mandibles into my legs. Already, I could tell that they were going to be annoying and would continue to re-spawn no matter what serving as a distraction. I began slapping my legs and managed to get them off followed by punching each one into the ground where they burned to nothing leaving just the red Twinmold who knocked me onto my butt when it collided with me. Picking myself back up, I was about to chase after it again and realized doing so was pointless as I couldn't keep up with it.

When it disappeared into the ground, I felt flummoxed over not being able to catch it. " This isn't going very well."

" Your new size makes you stronger but it doesn't make you faster."

" So I have no chance of catching it?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I'm afraid not."

I felt saddened. " Then how do I go about defeating it? All of this power means nothing if I can't use it properly."

" Actually you can." Twilight said. " When your hands got burned when you touched the red Twinmold earlier, it revealed to me that its head was the only part of its body aside from that crystal tipped tail that wouldn't inflict any fire related damage. By punching its head or perhaps using something else as a weapon, you can easily knock it down and find its weak point before it gets away again."

" A weapon you say?"

" Do you have something in mind?"

I nodded. " I think I do and it looks like it will be a lot of fun."

" Remember that you need to be weary of your Magic Power running out due to being a giant for too long."

Walking over to a nearby boulder, I reached out with my hands, grabbed it and picked it up like it were nothing more than a paperweight. While I could do the same thing while in my Goron body, this was something else entirely. This was a reason why the power of the Giant's Mask was restricted to this one place. Having this kind of power at all times would prove detrimental to my overall cause of saving Termina, the world I now called home, and Equestria. I had to keep it from falling into the wrong hands to prevent its misuse and upon finishing this journey, perhaps I should consider burying it somewhere in hopes no one would ever find it.

The red Twinmold then emerged from the sand and fired more fireballs in my direction but because I was holding a boulder above my head, I couldn't avoid getting hit and so I had to take each shot. It then flew forward and brushed up against my body causing me to catch fire but again I had to endure until I throw the boulder. When it turned around and flew back the other way, I considered tossing the boulder at it yet it was too close and would have most likely missed but instead chose a more simplistic approach, namely slam it down on top of its head and hope that would prove effective.

As it was about to knock me down again, I slammed the boulder down on its head--more like its face--and it immediately crashed to the ground though the weak point--the giant eyeball all of these boss monsters possessed--didn't appear leaving me to believe that there was something else that needed to be done. I then noticed its crystal tipped tail and something in my head prompted me to walk over and grab it since it was a safe spot. Grabbing the red Twinmold by the tail, I began swinging it around numerous times hoping for it to expose its weak point--it didn't appear indicating a sense of stubbornness--so I kept on going.

Eventually, I got tired of swinging it around and slammed it to the ground where I noticed its weak point sticking out of its maw. Slamming it down had caused the eyeball to appear and damage it at the same time. I felt so much enthusiasm and adrenaline over what just happened that I began shouting at the top of my lungs. Already, I knew that I was starting to succumb to the power contained within the Giant's Mask so I quickly calmed down so as to not go too far and become completely lost. The red Twinmold disappeared by diving into the sand and began moving about below in hopes of catching me by surprise.

Since it was all by itself, I had no trouble of keeping up with its location yet my reaction time was a lot slower due to my size. It emerged from the sand and immediately knocked me down onto my butt before turning around and flinging a fireball that struck me in the butt. I didn't feel much pain though it was annoying that it hit me using a cheap tactic. It then went back into the sand leaving me alone momentarily to get back up onto my feet. My slow speed in this state was already proving to be messing up with my timing and the fact that I was losing magic at a rapid meant I would soon shrink back down.

Turning around, the red Twinmold emerged and began shooting fireballs at me via rapid fire and I raised my arms in front of my face to take each shot. While the damage was minimal, it was still building up and that meant I could potentially be given a fatal blow without even realizing it. It then dove back down and its minions appeared leaving me to punch them several times using some combination moves to destroy them. When the last one burned away, the red Twinmold appeared and attacked me from behind by shooting more fireballs only to dive back down into the sand again.

" This is getting annoying now."

" Unlike the blue Twinmold that was content to just fly about, the red Twinmold is using strategy in its attacks."

" I just can't keep up with it."

Princess Twilight sadly nodded. " Your muscular arms and legs are your weakness, Sunset, but you have to compensate to make up for it. The red Twinmold may be a lot faster and uses cheap shots to inflict damage but I doubt it can take much of a beating before being brought down."

" How many punches will I need?"

" I'm not sure but what I do know is that you have to punch it within the cycle."

" What do you mean?"

" When you start punching it, you need to maintain this pace before it goes back into the sand." Twilight said. " If this happens, when it next emerges from the sand, it will be as though you never hit it. So I suggest not stopping when you begin the assault. Be sure to only attack its head and tail otherwise you'll only cause your hands to get burned. Oh, and be careful of those small insects as they can and will get underfoot."

The red Twinmold emerged again nearby and immediately made a beeline towards me and I responded by punching it repeatedly in the head. Each blow caused blue liquid to seep forth from its body--I assumed that this was the colour of its blood--in addition to it screaming in pain yet I maintained my assault only for it to knock me to the ground using its tail like a club before flying away. Getting back onto my feet, I felt pain coming from below and looked down to see the small insects biting my legs so I quickly shook them off. There were now five of them as opposed to three so I had more to deal with than before.

Each of them then attacked me from different directions, jumping and latching onto my legs like before, yet I shook them off by rolling forward slowly--my speed really was horrible due to my size--followed by punching each of them until they burned away leaving only the red Twinmold. It had since flown around in a circle and attacked me from behind by shooting fireballs from its gaping maw. I wasn't able to react and got blasted by each shot, knocking me down, and making me land on my face. Shaking my head to get the cobwebs of confusion out, I got back up only to get knocked down again when it flew past.

A few more fireballs came flying at me and I rolled to the side to avoid them making sure not to go too far or else plunge off the side into the abyss below. I then got back up when the firestorm died down only to see the red Twinmold dive down into the sand and that meant all those punches I inflicted on it did nothing. Now I had to go through the process all over again much to my displeasure. As it emerged moments later to my right, its insect minions also appeared and they began moving towards me in hopes of distracting me long enough so that their master could take advantage of the situation.

Instead, I chose to focus on attacking the red Twinmold as it was the main problem. I then punched its head though it quickly slipped by but I managed to get in a few more punches by attacking its tail. Unfortunately, my plan backfired when I got knocked down by the small insects when they jumped onto my back and began biting it. Again, I rolled to shake them off before getting back up and proceeding to punch them using regular punches and slamming attacks, and yet I had completely ignored the red Twinmold who knocked me down by flying into me leaving me to become more frustrated than before.

It then turned back around and shot fireballs that I blocked using my arms before punching it again in hopes that would be enough to bring it down. Sadly, it continued flying about, shooting one more fireball before it dove back down into the sand. Following it along, I began feeling strange as though my Magic Power was about to run out yet I continued following it anything knowing I had to end this before things could get out of hand. When the red Twinmold emerged, I punched it in the face several times while it pushed me along in an effort to slip by and resume with its attacks but I wasn't about to let it escape this time.

Eventually, after a few more punches, it managed to slip by though I was able to punch it in the tail, and this proved to be enough as it crashed into the ground and slid along before coming to a stop. I then walked over to the tail, grabbed it, and began spinning it around repeatedly until finally slamming it down to the ground. It's eyeball dropped out of its maw in the process before taking a massive blow when it crashed prompting me to shout out in a burst of delight. Again, the power of the Giant's Mask was getting to me so I quickly stopped as it slowly disappeared into the sand.

" That took a lot longer than it should have."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Punching the red Twinmold is an effective strategy yet unless you can repeatedly hit it at a consistent pace, it will dive back down into the sand forcing you to go through the process all over again. I also noticed that you tried ignoring those small insects and instead focus on the big one. While that was a good idea in theory, it ultimately didn't work as you ignored the red Twinmold."

" I should stick with using those boulders."

" Yes but remember that you only have a couple of them available."

I looked around to see if I could still spot any and I did before pointing at it. " There's one over there but it looks like it's the only one left. Does that mean if I miss hitting it after tossing the boulder, I would be forced to rely on my punches to knock it down to the ground?"

" It would mean going through that long process again."

I shook my head repeatedly. " I don't want to go through that again!"

" Then make this shot count, Sunset."

Nodding, I was about to make my way over to the boulder when I suddenly began shrinking. In a matter of moments, I was back down to my normal size and the Giant's Mask fell off my face and landed on the platform. " What just happened?" Picking up the mask, I placed it back on my face only for nothing to happen. I tried it again only for it to fall harmlessly to the ground where I picked it up. " Uh, Twilight? I think I've run out of magic!" It came at the absolute worst time as a tremor knocked me down and the red Twinmold emerged from the sand, its massive size making me look really small in comparison.

" You need to use that Green Potion now!"

Unfortunately, I wasn't in a good position to do so as the red Twinmold began shooting fireballs at me. They were now much larger in size than before--depth perception had finally backfired against me--with each one being enough to effectively kill me instantly. I began running away in the opposite direction, my body being blasted forward as each fireball slammed into the ground, and I kept on running until I ended up crashing into some ruins nearby. Before I even had a chance to come up with a plan, the insect creatures emerged and they too were bigger now due to me being regular sized.

They charged at me like thunder--it felt that way as their movement caused numerous small tremors--and all I could do was take out my sword and shield in hopes that I could defeat them this way instead of using my fists as I did before. I swung my sword at the eye of the first one that approached only for it to feel nothing. I then repeated the process in hopes it would feel something eventually but again it merely shrugged off the attack leaving me with no choice but to run for it. The sand slowed down my speed tremendously preventing me from getting away from the insects and they began swarming over me.

Slashing with my sword continued to do nothing as they kept on knocking me about but I continued swinging anyway as I was stubborn and refused to believe that they were immune to being struck in the eye with a blade. After what seemed like forever, I struck one of the insects in the eye causing it to burn away resulting in the others turning around and running away themselves leaving me to pick myself up again. In my current size, it took numerous blows against their weak points before they could be defeated whereas it would take just one blow as a giant.

My body had taken some serious damage from the insects forcing me to use a Red Potion in addition to the green one. Before I could take either one, the red Twinmold flew past whilst shooting fireballs down at me so I immediately began jumping about in hopes of dodging each one. Again, I was limited by the sand slowing me down so while I easily dodged the first shots, I couldn't keep up and began getting caught by the brunt of them until the last one struck me in the chest, sending me flying and landing back on the platform. Somehow, I had survived the blast considering I got struck at point-blank range, but I wasn't about to complain about it.

The red Twinmold dove back down under the sand giving me enough time to take out the Red Potion from behind my back. I uncorked it and began guzzling it down and while doing so, my mind began to wonder how I managed to survive being hit by such a huge fireball. I wasn't wearing a fire resistant tunic as they didn't make them in my size--this world didn't have them either--and I wasn't in my Goron form as fire meant little to them. It then dawned on me as to what it was. Because my natural magic had a strong association with fire, I had a natural resistance to fire magic. How could I have forgotten that especially when I kept bringing it up during my previous journey.

My wounds instantly healed thanks to my potion so I corked the bottle, put it away, and switched over to the Green Potion. Uncorking it, I began guzzling this one and it immediately tasted a lot different than the other one was. Did they use different ingredients during the mixing process? If so then they should consider not giving the potion such a strong kickback to it as it made it taste funky unless you happened to have gotten used to it. With my Magic Power restored to its maximum, I corked the bottle, put it away behind my back, and placed the Giant's Mask on my face.

Convulsing for a moment before letting out a loud scream that grew deeper, my body increased in size until I had become a giant once again. " Now I should have more than enough time to destroy the red Twinmold using that boulder we noticed earlier."

" Just be careful of those small insects getting in the way."

As if on cue, they appeared from the ground and began charging towards me. " This will be a lot easier now that I have these muscular fists. I am disappointed though in that my sword didn't do much to them until they had taken an awful beating."

" Given their size, I'm not surprised your sword didn't do as much damage as expected."

I knew what Princess Twilight was going to say next so I decided to say it before she could. " I should have upgraded my sword to the strongest version before coming here and not rely on its weakest form like I've been doing since this journey started. Does that sum up what you were going to say, Twilight?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I've been saying it so often now that you've taken it up as your own initiative. Still, I strongly suggest going to the Mountain Smithy during the next cycle of time to get your sword strengthened to its most powerful state before we go and confront Starlight Glimmer. Having a weak sword will do you no good against someone who possesses dark magic. Besides, you could with a longer reaching weapon anyway."

" First, I should probably take care of this right?"

" That would be a good idea yes."

I punched the small insects into oblivion before I made my way over to where the other boulder was. The red Twinmold then emerged from the sand at that moment and began shooting fireballs at me that I dodged by rolling slowly to the side--one thing I definitely wouldn't miss about being a giant was how slow my speed was--but then it turned around before continuing its assault by flinging more fireballs my way and again, I dodged them by rolling to the side. It then continued flying about before diving back down into the sand allowing me to grab the boulder and pick it up with relative ease.

The red Twinmold emerged from the ground, shot a quick fireball that fizzled out against the rock, but then it quickly dove back down before moving across underneath the surface, popped up again, and repeated the process. It shot out another quick fireball before diving again and I could tell that it was trying to coerce me into tossing the boulder and end up missing completely. Normally, I would have done so to put an end to things yet I decided to let the red Twinmold continue popping up and shooting fireballs until it got tired of it. In my mind, it was a battle of endurance to see who would crack first.

Every time it shot out a fireball, I either blocked it with the boulder or took the shot directly--my current size meant I would take small amounts of damage rather than a massive one--before it dove back down, moved about below the sand, and popped back up to go through the same thing again. Princess Twilight kept on telling me to toss the boulder but I told her that I knew what I was doing even if it didn't seem that way. Again, it was all about endurance. After a couple of minutes and getting absolutely nowhere other than becoming more annoyed, the red Twinmold went back under the sand and popped up moments later before it began flying about shooting fireballs.

Now was the right time to strike. I waited until it was exactly within range--I could have dropped the boulder onto it like I did the first time but I wanted to see if I could toss it successfully since I wouldn't get another chance--before tossing it at the red Twinmold causing it to crash to the ground where it laid stunned. I quickly walked up before it had a chance to recover, grabbed its tail, lifted it up, and began spinning it around in circles. I kept this going for about a minute before slamming the red Twinmold down, its eyeball dropping out from its maw and connecting with the ground upon impact.

As I shouted out my excitement, it slinked down under the sand before it emerged a little ways away along with more small insects. It launched a barrage of fireballs that I dodged by slowly rolling forward only to bowl over the insects like they weren't even there. Each one got sent flying and burned away upon hitting the ground but then more rose up from the sand and charged at me leaving me to use a flurry of punches to take them out. Unfortunately, I once again ignored the red Twinmold who shot a second barrage of fireballs, striking me in the chest knocking me down onto my butt while it went back down again.

" I was sure that would have finished it off."

" It looks like this Twinmold is more resilient than the other one was."

" If I run out of magic now, I'll never be able to defeat it and we'd be forced to restart from the very beginning."

Princess Twilight told me to do some quick breathing exercises to calm me down and I did a couple of them before she continued speaking. " Relax, Sunset. You still have plenty of magic left so you don't need to worry about running out but I do suggest ending this now before it drags on any longer than necessary. Unfortunately, there aren't anymore boulders so that means punches to either its head or tail will be your go to strategy here. Remember that you have to continue attacking until it crashed to the ground. If you allow it to disappear back under the sand, all of those attacks will have meant nothing and you'll be forced to start over again."

I was nervous. " Right... No pressure or anything."

" Just wait for the opportunity to come up before attacking."

" And when will that be?"

The red Twinmold than emerged and began shooting another barrage of fireballs. " I'd say now would be a good time to attack. You can easily take those fireballs as simple blows so long as they don't disrupt you." Twilight said. " Normally, I'm not the sort to suggest being reckless, but in this case it's the only option I can think of. If those small insects appear, just ignore them as all they do is distract you from the red Twinmold. But, if you must attack them, take them all down in one shot."

I was surprised. " Wow... I never expected you to suggest I be reckless."

" I want you to end this."

" I think you've adopted some of my mannerisms again."

Princess Twilight chuckled. " Guess you've been both a good and bad influence on me not that the bad part was bad but rather it was good." She then coughed upon realizing her own words just now made absolutely no sense and left me confused. " Just go and attack the red Twinmold, okay? Oh and be sure to hit either the head or the tail as the rest of its body will only burn your hands."

The red Twinmold had since ducked back down under the sand before popping back up in the exact same location, but before it could launch another fireball barrage, I walked up and began punching it in the head. It retaliated by blasting me with fireballs and because they were at point-blank range, I couldn't avoid them and ended up taking each one in the chest until the barrage ended. Luckily for me, I didn't get knocked down onto my butt yet the damage I was taking began to build up. The red Twinmold then went back down under the sand after being punched enough times before emerging moments later and began flying around.

Knowing it was about to attack me again, I raised my arms and waited for it to turn around and sure enough, it did and began shooting fireballs at me. At the same time, the small insects appeared and began charging towards me in a bid to attach themselves onto my legs. I rolled forward knocking the insects off though when I stood back up, I was blasted by the fireballs and fell down onto my butt. I got back up and resumed punching the red Twinmold in its head before it crashed down into the sand allowing me to grab its tail once again. I picked it up, swung it around in circles, and slammed it to the ground where it remained dazed yet still kicking.

I thought that would be enough but it appeared I had to try something different. I walked around to the front of the red Twinmold, wrapped my arms around its neck, and began squeezing it by the neck. While this did seem a little excessive on my part, this battle had been dragged on long enough. As I continued to apply pressure, the eyeball dropped out from its gaping maw and inflated upon further squeezing. For a moment, it looked like it was going to survive this unusual tactic and escape but eventually, I slammed it down to the ground and the eyeball suddenly burst indicating that it had finally been defeated.

Letting out a loud scream, the red Twinmold took to the sky and flew straight up, its body twitching in the process, and when its tail suddenly exploded, the rest of its body did the same thing leaving only its head remaining. It fell down and crashed into the sand but didn't explode. Instead, it just remained there, smoldering, but dead, and that meant I could finally breathe a sigh of relief after going through such a lengthy battle. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Giant's Mask and shrank back down to my regular size before walking over to the platform and dropping to my knees.

" That... Was brutal."

" But you succeeded in destroying both Twinmolds."

I nodded slowly. " I never would have imagined that becoming a giant would change my perspective on things."

" What was it like being a giant?"

" Well, it was definitely unexpected as I thought the mask would make me stronger." I answered. " I honestly wasn't expecting to transform into an actual giant and the muscle mass my arms and legs received was completely ridiculous. To be honest, Twilight, I was afraid the entire time because of what happened in the past. I feared that the temptation of having so much power would enter my heart and corrupt me like what happened at the Fall Formal."

" Is that way you refrained from going all out?"

I sadly nodded. " I didn't want to end up going back to that part of my life."

" And you won't."

I held the Giant's Mask firmly in my hands before placing it behind my back. " I'm glad it can only be used in this one location otherwise I would have feared carrying it around with me because someone else could have used it and become corrupted the power contained within. I mean, the mask proved essential yet it requires someone with a willpower strong enough to not be tempted by it. I was lucky I managed to maintain control despite showcasing some moments where I generally loved the experience."

" Sunset..."

I then turned towards the smoking remains of the red Twinmold. " Do you think it's truly dead?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You don't have to worry about it moving any time soon."

I breathed a sigh of relief. " I would have been scared out of my wits if its head suddenly pulled itself out of the sand and began attacking me again. Still, I'm actually glad that it's over as it means we have finally freed the fourth Giant."

" First, you should pick up that Heart Container that materialized when the red Twinmold's head crashed."

The instant Her Highness said that, I looked over towards the center of the platform and sure enough, the Heart Container was situated right in front of a circle of light that housed what remained of both Twinmolds. Walking up to the Heart Container and picking it up, I felt the familiar warmth that came from these and this one felt particularly warm since it came as a result of me having overcome two monsters much like how I overcame those two witches during my previous journey. My health was soon restored, giving me some much needed momentum and I stepped into the circle of light where I picked up a mask in the shape of Twinmold.

" So this is the fourth and final of these weird masks?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but something has been bothering me about them."

" What's that?"

" Not once have we been told what they are supposed to do."

I realized that Her Highness was right. " Other than being proof that I defeated the boss monsters, these four masks have done nothing other than collect dust in that void where all of my items go when I'm currently not using them." I then had a thought pop into my head. " Do you suppose the final version of Adagio will give us some answers? I mean, she needs to tell us what we're supposed to do now unless the final Giant has some wisdom of their own she wishes to share?"

" Perhaps both the Giant and Adagio will have something to say."

" Guess all we can do is go to each of them and find out."

The mask of Twinmold then floated upwards before disappearing and everything went white as I blacked out. When I opened my eyes moments later, I was back in the familiar place where I would meet with the Giant that I had rescued. This time, there was a yellow tint in the background though it was difficult to notice especially with so many bubbles floating about blinding my vision. My eyes noticed someone off in the distance yet something was different about them compared with the other Giants. While they were majestic in addition to being huge, this Giant didn't feel as majestic despite being just as big.

I didn't mean to insult her or anything but I just couldn't help but feel that this Giant seemed out of place with the others. When she--the other Giants were female so I assumed this one was the same--noticed me standing on the platform, she got up and began walking towards me and that's when I noticed something was definitely different. She had the body proportions of a young child and not an adult in addition to having much shorter hair though this one wasn't as strong of an indication. The Giant came forth from behind the waterfall and my dropped upon seeing who it was.

" Um... Who is this?" I asked. " I've never seen her before."

Princess Twilight exclaimed. " Flurry Heart!?"

" Isn't that the name of your niece?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but what is she doing here?"

I couldn't believe it. The fourth and final Giant was Flurry Heart, the daughter of the Equestrian versions of Shining Armour and Dean Cadance, according to what Her Highness told me about the events that surrounded her birth. She informed me about what happened several days before we had that celebration after the Friendship Games and I was surprised at how she nearly destroyed an entire empire just by crying, yet what was truly surprising was how this Flurry Heart was a full-fledged alicorn. I never would have expected a fifth alicorn princess yet there she was as the final Giant.

Like the others, Flurry Heart had symbols across her arms and face and was wearing a shiny swimsuit, yet she was also wearing an inner tube that struck me as not making much sense but then nothing in this world ever did. Unlike the others, how was I supposed to communicate with her? Being a baby meant that she either couldn't talk or could but had a much limited vocabulary yet it also meant not knowing what I wanted to know. As she stood before me and began utterly incomprehensible words, someone else appeared from behind the waterfall until they stood right in front of me. This person was someone whom I immediately recognized yet wondered why they were even here."

" Sugarcoat!?"

Princess Twilight was confused. " Who is that?"

" She is one of the Shadowbolts, the counterpart of the Wondercolts, who took part in the Friendship Games by representing Crystal Prep." I answered. " I'm surprised it took me this long before finally running into her in this world but what is she even doing in a place like this?"

" You must be the one who has awakened the other Giants, correct?" Sugarcoat asked as she combed over a notepad she was holding. " While it took you a lot longer than expected to awaken them all, you have succeeded in your endeavours so at least you can be satisfied about that."

" Who are you supposed to be?"

Sugarcoat looked at me with an emotionless expression though she did raise her eye slightly. " I act as a representative of the Giant who watches over Ikana. Despite being one of the four who chose to protect this world, she is still merely an infant compared with the other three and so she is unable to communicate properly. I was assigned the job of translating what she says so that you or anyone else doesn't try to figure out what she was talking about. Now then, I suppose you're confused by why you need to talk to me but I assure you that I will answer any and all questions."

" Since I've now rescued all four of them, will they be able to help me deal with Starlight Glimmer?"

" I have no idea who that is."

" The Skull Kid."

Sugarcoat blinked. " Well why didn't you say so in the first place? Anyway, you are correct in that all four Giants will now be able to do something. However, you must still call them to the designated location and play the melody that will call them forth to perform their sacred duty."

" Can they save Termina?"

Sugarcoat shrugged. " Logically speaking, they should be able to succeed. I have never heard of the Giants failing to save Termina from destruction. In any case, you now have everything you need to bring this madness to an end."

Flurry Heart then spoke. " Gagoo! Agu! Gaga! Hehe!" I was surprised that she had been paying attention all this time given she was a baby and all. Babies usually preferred doing their own thing and often ignored everything else yet she proved to be an exception. At the same time, she occasionally placed her hand into her mouth as a means of sucking on it perhaps as a soothing sensation or because she was bored.

" The Giant says that you must confront the one who has caused all this trouble on top of the Clock Tower." Sugarcoat said. " She also says that you shouldn't allow your anger to cloud your judgment and instead try to reason with this child."

" You understood what the Giant said?" I asked.

Sugarcoat nodded. " You were expecting otherwise?"

" It's just that all she did was utter some random gibberish."

" If I wasn't able to understand the language spoken by the Giant, I would not be serving as a representative and would have been assigned somewhere else." Sugarcoat said. " Perhaps it is you who doesn't understand what the guardian of this land is saying hence why what you hear is nothing but incoherent babble. In any case, you can rest assure that she will join the others when they are summoned to perform their sacred duty."

" Agu... Agu... Gah!" Flurry Heart said.

" What did that mean?" I asked.

" You must aid the Great Fairy of Ikana." Sugarcoat answered.

" Gah! Hehe!" Flurry Heart said, giggling away.

" She will be able to guide you towards finding some masks that you appear to be fascinated by. That is what the Giant said just now in case you were curious about it." Sugarcoat said. " Personally, I don't see how anyone would want to collect a bunch of masks but pay me no mind. I was just stating my opinion so if collecting them makes you feel good then go ahead and make yourself happy."

Flurry Heart then pointed at me. " Goo-goo!"

" You must save this world from impending disaster."

" Gaga! Hehe! Gah! Goo-goo!" Flurry Heart said. She then took out what looked to be a baby rattle, shook it a few times, and placed it behind her back before adjusting her inner tube. I actually thought the inner tube was an adorable little accessory though why didn't she have any of those water wings young children would have on their upper arms? It wasn't my place to tell one of the Giants how to do things but it just made me curious. Flurry Heart then leaned forward and giggled. " Gah! Agu! Gagoo! Goo... Agu!"

" There is one last thing the Giant wishes to say with regards to the masked one." Sugarcoat said. " Despite everything they have done to this world, you must forgive them as it is the right thing to do. It will become apparent in due time."

" Hehe! Agu... Agu!"

" It's time for you to go back to the world now."

Princess Twilight then spoke up. " Your name is Sugarcoat, right?"

Sugarcoat shrugged. " I personally have no name but if you want to call me that then by all means do so. Anyway, I am sure you had something to say other than wanting to know my name so go ahead and say something but make it quick."

" Why is this Giant a toddler compared to the others?"

Sugarcoat turned to look at Flurry Heart for a moment before turning back towards me. " Size doesn't really matter here nor does age. This Giant may look much younger than the others yet she is just as old as they are so your question is largely irrelevant. If that is the only question you wanted to ask me, I must admit that I was hoping for something better coming from one of the fairy folk." She looked down at her notepad before taking out a pencil and scribbling something down on it. " Hopefully, everything will turn out well but perhaps being prepared might save you from a terrible fate later."

Princess Twilight shouted. " I have one more question!"

" Make it quick."

" Do any of the Giants know anything about a man named Ganondorf?"

Sugarcoat was silent for a moment before answering. " That name doesn't ring a bell so I cannot answer your question. You might have better luck asking the Great Fairy but she might not have an answer either. In any case, I am finished speaking with you both. You will be sent back to the world and proceed to do whatever you want until you are ready to summon the Four Giants with the sacred melody. The fate of this world now hangs precariously on your shoulders but consider this as a means of encouragement in that you will succeed or die in the process. Good-bye."

It wasn't the answer Princess Twilight was looking for but I gave her props for confronting one of the Giants about it. I was still surprised to see that Flurry Heart was the fourth and final Giant but then there was one thing they all had in common that should have been recognized much sooner. Their pony counterparts in Equestria were alicorns which made sense given how each one--excluding Flurry Heart--was a ruler whereas she was merely a baby who would one day grow up and become a ruler herself. Granted, Nightmare Moon could have portrayed the final Giant instead as she was also an alicorn--and Vice Principal Luna's pony counterpart's evil self--but it seemed a new alicorn was necessary instead.

Sugarcoat then turned around and walked back through the waterfall before Flurry Heart turned and followed after her. Now that all four Giants had been rescued, the time had finally come for me to put an end to this chaos by defeating Starlight Glimmer. A part of me was looking forward to the notion while another part felt she deserved some kind of leniency as much of what she had done was a result of lashing out against those she believed had wronged her in the past. Revenge was never the answer as all it did was make things much worse and leaving you to be forever alone with your lot in life.

As everything went white and I blacked out, I could hear the cooing sound of Flurry Heart echoing around me. I had no idea what she was saying but I was certain that she was wishing me luck and hoped I would forgive Starlight for what she had done. When I awoke moments later, I was back in the village though there were no signs of the undead. With the doors to the Stone Tower having been closed upon defeating both of the Twinmolds, were the dead finally resting again as they had done so for centuries? Only time would tell if they had resumed their eternal slumber and Ikana could find peace once again.

" That was certainly something."

" I can't believe that my own niece ended up being one of the Four Giants."

" Surprised by that, Twilight?" I asked with a smirk.

" No doubt about it, Sunset."

" So why are you grinning from ear to ear?"

" Best. Aunt. Ever!"

I waved my hand at Princess Twilight to grab her attention yet she was off in her own little world. " I can understand you being happy about your niece being given such a distinction but you have to remember that she isn't your niece in that sense." Again, I was ignored by Her Highness so I decided to change my tactics a little. " I still can't believe that you of all ponies are an aunt and at your age no less."

" Are you saying I'm old?"

I winked. " Maybe?"

Princess Twilight smirked. " Well, you're older than I am since I was only a filly when you were under Princess Celestia's wing as her student."

" You've got me there."

" Still, I'm just so proud that Baby Flurry Heart will help us save this world from its impending destruction." Twilight said. " That Sugarcoat on the other hand was certainly a unique character in that she was straight to the point and didn't mince her words. It was like she was telling the honest truth without feeling any guilt over what she said."

" Sugarcoat is very blunt."

Princess Twilight was surprised. " How did you and the others put up with her?"

I sighed. " While her words were particularly hurtful, especially towards Twilight Sparkle, she wasn't afraid to speak her mind. I suppose now that Crystal Prep and Canterlot High are going to attempt to start getting along without being overly competitive, we should try to understand her and the rest of the Crystal Prep students. There will still be occasional friction between our respective schools because of how Principal Cinch viewed reputation as being essential but I believe things will be okay from now on."

" I just thought she was strange."

I nodded. " Anyway, what do you suppose will happen to this region now?"

" Look up!"

" Why?"

" We're about to get our answer."

I looked up and noticed swirls of energy began forming in the sky and I assumed that it was something bad but when the swirls spun around in circles, I was shocked to see that they were pulling the dark clouds up into their vortex effectively removing them from existence. After watching this for a few moments, everything suddenly flashed and the energy swirls disappeared leaving me looking at the night sky. There was no longer any reason for me to remain in the area other than to return the Stray Fairies to their fountain, restore Adagio back to normal, earn her reward, and learning where I could find the remaining masks I needed.

I quickly looked around to see where the fountain was and when I found it again, I took a single step forward only to suddenly feel something hit me from behind in my neck. I reached back behind there with my hand thinking that someone had hit me with a dart but there was nothing there. My eyes began getting heavy and I struggled to stay awake let alone stand on my own two feet. I began stumbling about in hopes of reaching the fountain only to drop to my knees right before the entrance before falling flat on my face and entering into a deep sleep. Princess Twilight tried helping me only to end up falling asleep as well from being hit by the same thing I had received.

" Are you sure about this, Misty Fly?" Principal Cinch asked.

Misty Fly slowly nodded, her mind in deep thought as she pondered over what needed to be done. " I am certain of this, mother. I know Anju will not like the idea of leaving town in the morning and fleeing to Romani Ranch, but you have seen how close the moon has gotten lately haven't you?"

Principal Cinch nodded. " I cannot deny what you say is true."

" Everyone in town has been talking about it with some choosing to remain while others intend on fleeing."

" And are you surprised at those who are staying?"

" Are you trying to imply something, mother?"

Principal Cinch nodded. " I know you've been furious over Kafei's parents regarding how they haven't shown much of an interest towards finding their son, but you must realize by now that they both have obligations that prevented them from doing anything. Mayor Dotour has been stuck in that meeting between the carnival committee and the town militia and has to deal with them in the morning. She is at her wits end and wishes they would finally agree to disagree yet their stubbornness continues blinding them. Monsieur Aroma hasn't fared much better either being forced to cancel so much of the carnival not to mention dealing with that postwoman."

" What does that have to do with fleeing?"

" Everything." Principal Cinch answered. " Mayor Dotour cannot flee town as she is the mayor and must remain to keep watch over those who also choose to stay behind. I know it sounds like a pathetic excuse yet her hands are tied what with the arguing and the danger that lurks both above us and outside the town walls. While Monsieur Armoma doesn't have the same kind of commitments as his wife and could easily flee, I doubt he would be willing to leave her behind so he is sure to remain here as well until it all ends. If not for their duties, they would have dedicated their efforts towards finding Kafei yet things just didn't work out."

Misty Fly was completely silent upon hearing what Principal Cinch had said and she began thinking about how she had viewed Kafei's parents. Deep down, she always knew that they were honest people despite having a penchant for wanting to showcase a little flair, but they too were struggling to deal with a situation that had ballooned beyond their control and threatened to destroy everything. Her heart was conflicted now despite still blaming them for not doing enough and even accused them of convincing Kafei to abandon Scootaloo in favour of someone like Applejack yet now she had heard a side of them that she never knew.

She also knew that her daughter loved Kafei and was willing to defend him even if the evidence suggested that he had left her for someone else. For Misty Fly, she felt like scum for always saying Kafei was no good for Scootaloo because of how he had disappeared out of thin air and couldn't be found. And yet, she continued to stand by her convictions despite knowing they were driving a wedge between her and her child. Given the current circumstances, Misty Fly didn't want to shatter the bonds of love and trust she had with Scootaloo yet a part of her wanted to see that happen, a thought that terrified her immensely.

With the moon getting closer to Clock Town with every passing hour, many in town had held a meeting to determine what they were to do next. Despite the insistence of the carnival committee that everyone should remain and enjoy the festivities, most agreed that fleeing to Romani Ranch was their best bet at survival even if it meant abandoning everything but the absolute essentials. Unfortunately, they knew it was a fool's gambit. They feared a ripple effect from the moon crashing into Clock Town would destroy all of Termina in the process meaning that their efforts amounted to nothing.

Despite that, Misty Fly was dead-set on having Scootaloo and Principal Cinch flee in the morning when most of the townsfolk would do the same. She had thought long and hard over the decision the entire night--her lack of sleep made her quite irritable--hence why she was packing the essentials as her mother watched yet she wasn't about to change her mind and instead choose to stay behind. While Scootaloo would never forgive her for leaving, Misty Fly thought only to protect those she cared about. In her heart, she hoped Scootaloo would understand someday that hard decisions were a part of life.

" Am I making the right decision, mother?"

" Only you can determine that."

Misty Fly sighed. " I bet Mayor Dotour is wishing she could flee like the rest of us."

" She wants to more than anything else.

" What!?" Misty Fly exclaimed. " Why would she even think that?"

Principal Cinch sighed as she opened up her book. " You see, Misty Fly, Mayor Dotour never wanted to be mayor in the first place. In fact, she had her mind set on a different occupation but her father was the previous mayor and he had every intention of making sure his daughter would carry on his legacy. Truth be told, Mayor Dotour never threw her hat in during the nomination process. Instead, her father took care of it and she ended up winning as no one else considered opposing her since he was regarded as one of the greatest mayors this town had ever seen."

Misty Fly was surprised. " Who told you this, mother?"

" Her father told me as did Mayor Dotour herself."

" And Monsieur Aroma?"

" He started out as the postman and enjoyed it for a few years but was promoted to the position of postmaster when the previous incumbent retired. Since then, a new postwoman has taken the job though if you want my opinion, she is quite the stickler when it comes to being on schedule."

" So that's why Mayor Dotour always seems so miserable."

Principal Cinch nodded. " If you think she has problems, you should imagine how Kafei must have felt when he learned that one day he would become mayor himself. I doubt his reason for disappearing had anything to do with that yet he secretly wanted to do something else and not take up the family business. Now with him having vanished without a trace and no leads as to where he is, Mayor Dotour is struggling not to lose complete control of her sanity. Monsieur Aroma is grieving in his own way but also wishes for his son to return. It's strange though that Kafei disappeared somewhere around the local Great Fairy Fountain."

" And who told you that?"

" A few of the local children of that Bombers Gang."

" You can't possibly expect yourself to believe them."

" Children know more than adults do from time to time so one should never dismiss their word." Principal Cinch said. " Now, you know things about the mayor and her husband that you never knew before until tonight, Misty Fly. I know you still can't forgive them nor their own son but know that they are suffering in their own manner. Perhaps in another time, you might have learned to better appreciate what they have done but I doubt that will happen now." She closed up her book and sighed heavily. " Even if we do flee town, it won't matter in the least as Termina is doomed."

Misty Fly was silent at first but continued to pack up all of the belongings she wanted to take with her. Once she had finished, she turned towards Principal Cinch and sighed before walking over to the window and staring up at the moon. " I know our chances of survival are bleak at this point but I'd like to think that we still may yet survive. It would probably take a miracle yet I do believe this isn't the end of us."

" You want Cremia to talk to Anju, don't you?"

" What!? Misty Fly exclaimed. " Where did that come from?"

" A mother always knows these things."

Misty Fly sighed. " They are best friends and both pinned for Kafei before he chose Anju to take as his bride. Maybe she can talk some sense into Anju given that everything I've tried has ended up failing in a spectacular manner. Besides, it might give me some closure as I still think he disappeared so that he could marry her instead."

Principal Cinch sighed. " You still have much to learn it seems, daughter."

It took me a while before I finally woke up and when my eyes opened, I immediately got up only to drop down to my knees. Whatever caused me to suddenly collapse and fall asleep had caused my body to need to recalibrate itself before I could move again. My entire body felt so heavy and stiff that it felt like the gravity was pushing down on me. As I waited for my body to get itself back in order, my mind began thinking about what happened when I got hit in the back of my neck. Why would anyone want to do that? It's not like the undead could have done it as they were now resting in peace and Princess Twilight would have warned me of something.

Speaking of Her Highness, she was sleeping next to me so I gently tapped her small body with my finger to arouse her from her slumber. Whoever hit me made sure to hit her too so as not have me experience this on my own. Princess Twilight mumbled some incoherent words before her eyes opened and she yawned before starting to flap her wings repeatedly before taking to the air. My own body eventually finished recalibrating in that I could get back up and when I did, my eyes opened wide with shock and my entire body turned cold upon seeing what now stood before me.

I was now back in Termina Field even though I was just in Ikana Village before I was knocked out yet that wasn't my concern now. No, my concern was seeing my current surroundings and how they comprised of a destroyed Clock Town with the moon itself having smashed into it leaving nothing but utter devastation beyond all reckoning. I then looked around to see that everything around me had been reduced to a desolate wasteland. Trees had burned to ashes, the grass had been charred, the sky looked like an eternal sunset, and fire burned all around with no signs of stopping.

What in the world had happened? Was this a dream or was it a reality? I knew that Termina would be destroyed if I wasn't able to prevent the moon from crashing yet there it was having crashed into Clock Town and decimating everything. I then pinched my arm thinking this was a dream only for me to squeal slightly from inflicting pain on it. I then stood still as lightning dropped down from above, crashing into a nearby dead tree, and setting it on fire. Another bolt of lightning dropped and did the same thing to another tree nearby leaving me to consider looking around for shelter so as to not get electrocuted.

" Sunset!" Twilight exclaimed. " Are you alright?"

I nodded. " I'm alright but what in the world happened here?"

" Everything has been completely destroyed."

" No..."

Princess Twilight lowered her head slightly. " The moon crashed into Clock Town, destroying it and everything else in its wake. I doubt anything could have survived such destruction which means you and I are the only ones still alive."

I dropped to my knees. " Then... We've failed. Termina has been destroyed with Starlight Glimmer having committed genocide on an apocalyptic level. Everyone we knew and held dear to our hearts are dead." I was about to cry when something occurred to me about the current situation. " Something doesn't seem right here. If Termina has been destroyed along with everyone who lived in it, why are we still alive? Shouldn't we have died as well?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, we should have. Also, the fires that are burning all around us should have made you feel really uncomfortable. I am immune to them because of being a fairy yet you should theoretically be sweating buckets right now. Something tells me that there is more to this than appearances suggest. Perhaps we should take a closer look at the remains of Clock Town."

" Why would we want to do that?"

" Because I can sense a great power coming from that direction."

Knowing there wasn't anywhere else to go other than Clock Town, I decided to walk towards it and find some answers. Fortunately, Princess Twilight and I woke up close to town so we didn't have far to go before reaching it. As I walked across Termina Field, everything grew more depressing with every passing moment. Even the water itself from the ocean had been affected by the destruction in that it was now the colour of blood as opposed to a clear blue. Also, the closer we got to town, the stronger the power Her Highness felt grew indicating that someone was close by--or something for that matter.

Upon reaching the ruins of the town, I was stopped by a wall of flame that prevented me from going any further. Not even my resistance to fire magic would have enabled me to make it past and see what happened with my own eyes. The moon itself cast a shadow over the entire area that made everything feel even more ethereal than it already was. I looked up and stuck out my tongue a little upon realizing that I was looking up at the moon's nose yet I wondered how a huge chunk of rock could have a face to begin with. It's not like it was a special moon or anything yet it left me curious and wanting to know more.

A familiar laugh then came from the flames and I immediately recognized who it was. A silhouette then formed in the flames before it stepped forward revealing Ganondorf himself, his heavy black armour gleaning as a result of the intense colours. " We meet again, child."

" You..." I said softly. " What are you doing here?"

" Do you remember the words I left to you when last we met?"

I nodded. " How could I forget them? They've been on my mind this entire time."

Ganondorf laughed. " I would face you again in another contest upon you awakening the final Giant of this world, and now, that time has finally come whether you wish to admit it or not." He clenched his hand into a fist and I could hear the sound of leather squeaking which made me feel really uncomfortable. " You have been dreading this encounter for quite some time now, child. I can see it in your eyes that deep down you have long feared seeing he who would become your master should the darkness within your heart become something you would embrace with open arms."

" I'll never become your servant."

" Hmph! We shall see soon enough."

" Did you do all of this?"

Ganondorf shook his head. " If I had been responsible, there would be nothing left of this place but a white void devoid of nothing. What you see here is a possible future where you failed to save this world from the destruction that loomed above turning it into a desolate wasteland." He bent down, scooped up some charred grass, and blew it away with his mouth before laughing. " Your mind created this place out of fear that you would fail in your mission to save it from disaster. The thing about dreams is that they can take on a life of their own should you possess a weak enough spirit and succumb to despair."

" What did you say?"

" Dreams can easily metamorphosize into nightmares should you prove unwilling to face them."

" This place... It's a dream?"

Ganondorf nodded. " I am surprised that it took you this long to figure it out, child. Ironically, the little fairy princess sensed something was amiss when she noticed that the flames weren't making things unbearable for you." He looked down at Princess Twilight who immediately hid underneath my hat. " There is no need to hide, Princess Twilight. You shall also suffer in this place because of the connection that exists between you and the child."

" So I'm still asleep?"

" My magic forced you into a slumber from which you cannot awaken from until I choose otherwise."

Now things were starting to make sense though at the same time they continued to make less sense. Ganondorf had never personally gotten himself or his power involved throughout my journey as I assumed he could only do so in those alternate dimensions of his, but now that he revealed it was his magic that knocked me and Princess Twilight out, was his power even greater than ever? Had his power always been great yet I never noticed? Or was Ganondorf far beyond my own understanding? No matter what the answer was, once again I was at his mercy though maybe not given where he said this was.

I was familiar with the Dream World. Another one of the lessons Princess Celestia taught me that I paid attention to was the one about how the Dream World was a place where ponies could do anything they wanted so long as their dreams were pleasant. Originally, it was under the watchful eye of Princess Luna yet Celestia took over for a thousand years due to banishing her sister when she became Nightmare Moon. Luna had since returned to her duties when Her Highness and the pony versions of my friends changed her back to normal and helps those who need it the most when their dreams became nightmares.

" So are we going to fight or what?"

" Not this time." Ganondorf answered. " I can see the conviction in your eyes, child. You do not enjoy the thought of killing creatures through bloodshed though you will choose to do so if it means being able to progress or if you believe it to be a threat. Such thoughts will only serve to confuse you and leave you weak in the field of battle."

" Maybe so but I will stand by my choices."

" How amusing."

" Then what is the nature of this contest?"

Ganondorf laughed. " In this place, physical power holds no meaning as nothing is real but instead is a result of the subconscious. The Dream World is where one's mental power is on full display and the stronger that power, the greater influence they can have over all they survey here. I am aware that you have grown stronger physically since our previous encounter, child, but now I shall see how strong you are mentally. You have no limit to what you can do here so attack me with everything you possess. You shall have just the one attempt to prove your worth and to fulfill my expectations."

I was a little surprised and decided to inquire. " Just the one attempt? That doesn't sound all that fair."

" One attempt is all I need to determine my answers."

I gulped. " Well, I'll be sure to give you everything I have."

Ganondorf then pointed at Princess Twilight who looked out from under my hat. " Before you have the pleasure of showing me your mental power, child, the princess shall be the first to test her mental prowess against me."

Princess Twilight flew out from under my hat and floated in front of me. " What!? Why do you want me to fight against you using my mental abilities? I thought this whole conflict was between you and Sunset? I'm merely here to act as her guidance while she struggles to overcome your devious attempts to make her suffer. To be perfectly honest, I actually have been wanting to get a piece of you because of what you've done to Sunset. I know that doesn't sound like something I would given how I prefer solving problems by relying on friendship but I'll gladly make an exception."

" Then you shall face me."

" That's not going to be easy since I am just a fairy and all."

" In the Dream World, you can do anything you want." I said.

Princess Twilight exactly what to do when I said that. She closed her eyes and began to concentrate as hard as she could until her body started glowing. In an instant, her body increased in height until she was the size I had come to know though instead of wearing a tunic like me, she opted to go with a beautiful blue and purple dress that featured her cutie mark in a pretty pattern that complimented her hair colour. Was this what Her Highness dreamed of when it came to protecting me and become a heroine in her own right? While this probably wasn't what she dreamed of back in Equestria, I still appreciated it all the same.

" How do I look?"

I winked. " Didn't think you had it in you."

Princess Twilight smiled. " I've seen you get hurt so many times and be on death's doorstep more times than I can count. All I could do was watch you endure so much pain and suffering until I began thinking about what it would be like to fight alongside you like we did against the Dazzlings. Now it's my time to finally take matters into my own hands even if this is only just a dream." She stepped forward and raised her hands. " I'm going to give this everything I can muster and while the thought of this dream ending saddens me, I'm going to enjoy the moment for what it is."

Ganondorf laughed. " So... the fairy has become a true princess in her own right?

" You want to see my mental prowess so I'll give it to you."

" Yes... I can sense the power that dwells within you." Ganondorf said. " Your magical prowess is far greater than most of your kind yet it's fallible compared to mine. I have been watching your progress as well, princess, and I am satisfied with how you have used wisdom to guide the child along on her mission. Knowledge is a power only a chosen few are capable of mastering as most could never fathom the complexities behind it. Perhaps destiny has something in mind for you?"

" Don't try to use your charm to distract me."

" My words always have a ring of truth to them."

" Doubtful considering how you've been trying to manipulate Sunset from the beginning."

Ganondorf laughed. " The princess possesses a strong sense of righteousness... How amusing... And yet, it is something that I knew of already." He continued laughing and that was when the back of his hand glowed and the symbol of the Triforce appeared. " This shall prove most entertaining assuming you possess wisdom that goes far beyond conventional means otherwise you shall betray my expectations. Can you prove that you possess a warrior's spirit or are you simply a princess who has others do her work for her? I wonder what you shall do to demonstrate what a strong mentality is capable of."

I stood back to give Princess Twilight as much space as she needed though something about this reminded me of the mark that I had on the back of my hand. It didn't glow in response to the one Ganondorf had--I was relieved about that--yet it was a reminder that I was connected to him through it. My true concern was that Her Highness might still possess the piece she received during my previous journey. She had been displaying incredible wisdom--hence why it was called the Triforce of Wisdom--since we started this journey yet I feat that if a mark appeared on her hand, she would be condemned to torment much like I was.

Above all else, I didn't want that to happen to her. She deserved a much better fate than being forced to endure a perpetual torment all because of being given something of great importance especially when she didn't even know about it and still didn't. If the mark didn't appear on the back of her hand, she would be fine but it meant Ganondorf would seek out someone else who would represent the Triforce of Wisdom. Much of this continued to make no sense as he kept key information close to his chest that could shed some light on why I had to be chosen out of countless others who lived in Equestria and the world I called home.

Closing her eyes, Princess Twilight concentrated and a bright light suddenly began glowing behind me. Turning around to see what it was, my jaw dropped upon seeing a beautiful castle rising up from the ground that looked like the stuff of legends. It looked like a purple castle built on top of and meshed together with a crystal tree with gold tipped towers and balconies, and the cutie mark of Her Highness could clearly be seen here and there. Was this what her castle looked like? I had only ever been told stories of its majestic splendor so it was truly something to see, but then a large tree appeared on top which clearly looked out of place or so I thought.

Her Highness explained that the tree was her original home in Ponyville, the Golden Oak Library, that was destroyed by Lord Tirek at the time. Even now, she held strong memories towards it and couldn't find herself to ever want to forget about it. Both buildings represented her love of books, her love of Ponyville, her bonds with the pony versions of my friends, and her title as Princess of Friendship. Books then appeared from the castle and library, swirled about and began to form several formation all aimed at Ganondorf who merely stood there waiting for something to happen.

In an instant, books went flying at him and attacked using themselves as weapons, various forms of magic, and even bizarre things though there was a sense of planning and formation involved rather than simply going with a random assault in hopes of succeeding. Princess Twilight was relying on wisdom in that she was choosing when to strike alongside her love of books and of course, her vast magical prowess being on full display. I was actually both impressed and in complete awe over what I had just seen though I quickly ducked when what appeared to be a giant version of Spike's true form emerged from the castle and scorched Ganondorf.

" What did you think of that, Sunset?"

I just stood there in shock. " Remind me not to get on your bad side."

" I think I've proven my point."

" No wonder so many refer to you as a nerd."

Princess Twilight chuckled. " I can't help being a lover of books and research."

Ganondorf then laughed and while I wasn't surprised that Princess Twilight's display had little effect on him, she was completely shocked and stood there with her jaw dropped and her eyes opened wide. I should have known he would do something like this as it was one of his more annoying charms given my previous experiences. " Are you surprised that your power proved useless against me? Heh... Such an expression continues to be amusing to me. However, I am satisfied that you relied on wisdom and magic in a way that displayed characteristics known only to the likes of you."

" Um... Thank you?" Twilight said with a confused look.

" And now you... child." Ganondorf said, pointing to me whilst staring coldly.

I gulped and stepped forward. " Before I go and do this, I want to ask you a question."

" Is it because you are afraid of what you will do that you choose to avoid it?"

" Your words don't scare me in the least."

Ganondorf laughed. " And yet, I can sense the fear that surrounds you, child. You may not perish in the Dream World but your psyche can be damaged beyond recovery should I will it to be so and punish you accordingly for not accepting my challenge."

" One question!" I shouted. " That's all I want to ask."

" Very well."

" Did you know about the return of Sunset Demon and Midnight Sparkle?"

Ganondorf nodded before snickering under his breath. " Those two pathetic creatures? Yes... Yes, I was aware that they were trapesing about this world in an effort to fulfill their own agenda though I knew they would fail. I didn't need to kill them as they were destined to die as fate had long ago decreed it so there was no point in using my power on those deemed unimportant to the grand scheme, and yet they served me well even when they never knew that this was the case. You were to suffer and they indirectly carried out my wish so in the end, they proved useful as pawns while being worthless as anything else."

I was taken aback by this sudden revelation. I honestly thought Ganondorf had some part to play with regards to the two demons but now that he had mentioned he had nothing at all to do with them, I knew he wasn't lying and that they had acted of their own volition. Still, I was annoyed at how he used them in his bid to make me suffer all in his desire to make me his devoted servant, yet in truth they did it to themselves without him having to do anything other than watch everything play out. If only Midnight Sparkle had accepted my proposal and not choose to go through with her desire, she would still be alive and I wouldn't be feeling tremendous guilt over it.

" And now both of them are dead."

" I was not the cause of their deaths and neither were you." Ganondorf said. " No, they were killed by their own hands thinking they could achieve their dreams. Heh... Demons as pathetic as they were cannot have dreams as they are nothing but pawns to be used by those superior to them. Had I chosen to view them as having a purpose, I would have manipulated them into doing my bidding without question and killed them once they were of no further use. And yet, both creatures were useless so why not let them run around and do as they wished until they destroyed themselves. Perhaps, their fates could have been changed yet it is too late for that now."

" You're still as heartless as ever."

" Ganondorf laughed. " The strong take advantage of the weak, child. It has been that way since the very beginning and will continue to be commonplace for all eternity." He then folded his arms and looked at me with a sharp gaze, his eyes glowing with a burning passion, striking fear right into my very soul. " Do not allow your heart to hold you back as I know you wish to unleash great power through means of venting out a rage that dwells within. In the Dream World, there are no restrictions so you can go to extremes that are impossible in the veil that is reality. Child... Show me not only your mental prowess but pure power that can only be achieved by you."

" I... I..." Was all I could say.

" Do not betray my expectations.

Had I truly been furious at what he said, I would have exploded into a murderous rage and Princess Twilight would have looked away in sheer disgust, but instead, I was simply mad and needed to vent out my frustration by doing exactly what he wanted. Closing my eyes, I concentrated and immediately became Daydream Shimmer yet this was just the start as I intended on taking things to a much higher level. Holding out my hands, the Triforce--all three pieces--appeared before me where I grabbed hold of it and felt a surge of power that could be best described as godly since its creators were goddesses.

The immense power caused me to further evolve in that I became an enhanced version of Daydream Shimmer--something along the lines of Daydream Goddess--though I struggled to maintain control as the temptation began rearing its ugly head ahead. I had to refrain from allowing myself to become consumed with power as that was what he wanted yet my head kept on saying for me to go as far as possible while my heart wanted me to remain true. It may have just been a dream yet it felt real and that was the scariest thing of all. The veil between dreams and reality was weakening and I needed to act quickly.

For some reason, my body increased in size--without the Giant's Mask--until I was a giant and then I unleashed everything I had against Ganondorf, who just stood there with his arms folded and sporting a cruel smile on his face. The resulting blast destroyed the moon and what remained of Clock Town leaving nothing but a massive crater along with various parts of Termina Field due to excess power scattering about that I couldn't control. In that one moment, it felt like my true self had been cast aside and my old persona had returned, a bully who wanted power and was willing to do anything to get my hands on it. I felt like I had lost all sense of self.

Princess Twilight then called out to me and it was enough to get me to focus on what was really important. The power that exuded from me died down, my body shrank to its original size, and the Triforce disappeared though I remained as Daydream Shimmer. I had no doubt that Ganondorf survived as like he said, you couldn't be killed in the Dream World but you could suffer psychological damage instead. When the smoke cleared, he still stood as before yet I could sense that he had been weakened though it was difficult to say. I had given it everything I had so hopefully it was enough to get him to leave us alone.

" Sunset... Are you okay?" Twilight asked.

I nodded slowly. " If it wasn't for your voice, I would have kept on going."

" You refrained from being a lot worse considering what you did."

" Had Ganondorf pushed me far enough..." I began. " I would have been beyond redemption."

" Then you understand friendship better than I thought."

" I've got you to thank for that."

Ganondorf then laughed and we both turned towards him. " As I suspected... You allowed your anger to empower you to greater heights yet you allowed your heart and the princess to hold you back thus ruining your potential. It seems you still resistant the urge to unleash the power that lies within. In due time, you will come to understand that power is a necessity that all creatures strive for yet only the strongest can use it with no hesitation in their minds."

" Looks like I've finally defeated you for once." I said. " And with Princess Twilight's help."

" You have not defeated me."

I folded my arms. " I think I did."

Ganondorf laughed. " You pathetic child. Did you honestly think this would be a battle to the death? Here? In the Dream World? My words were that you and the princess would unleash your mental power and be given one attempt to do so. Each of you have had such an attempt and while I had expected far greater, I am still satisfied as it shows that progress has been made. It shall become clear in due time and only when I choose to reveal it." He lowered his head down and right away I knew he was building up his power but for what reason? He had seen what he needed to so there was nothing more he could do other than leave us in peace. " Now it's my turn..."

" What!?"

" I was not going to depart without showing you what true mental power is."

" Brace yourself, Twilight."

Ganondorf lifted his head up and a cruel smile appeared on his face again. Suddenly everything around began disappearing and in a matter of moments, we were standing in a white void devoid of nothing, the entire landscape of the ruined Termina was completely gone. While Princess Twilight and I had to concentrate before we could display our mental power, he did it without exerting any kind of pressure in addition to doing it in mere moments where as it took us both roughly a couple of minutes. I knew he was powerful since he was centuries old according to his own words but I wasn't expecting anything like this.

" What just happened, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

I looked around and shrugged. " I don't know!" I then turned to look at Ganondorf. " What have you done?"

" I have destroyed the Dream World."

" Impossible!" I shouted. " No one has the power to do that!"

Ganondorf laughed. " And yet I do for nothing is beyond my reach. Child... We shall meet once more before this journey of yours reaches its conclusion. Will it be another contest or will I choose to spare you such torment? Only I know for certain so allow fear to take hold of your heart and wallow in the purity of evil. Let my words burn into your memory as well as that of the princess. Never forget that I am always watching so do not think you are free from my power. For now, you can focus on trying to save multiple words but perhaps it will prove too much for you and all shall be destroyed? Time will soon reveal everything. Do not betray my expectations... Now begone!"

As he continued laughing, Ganondorf disappeared only for everything he had seemingly destroyed be restored to the way it was before he had done it. Not only could he wipe out the Dream World with a mere thought, he could also bring it back just like that without any effort. Either he was getting stronger with every encounter or he was already powerful and was merely showing portions of it to us at a time. Before I could further elaborate on it, Princess Twilight and I blacked out again after being hit by the same thing that caused us to drop down and fall asleep in the first place.

Chapter 66: The Woes of Love

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
July 31, 2017
Chapter 66: The Woes of Love.

When Ganondorf returned Princess Twilight and I back to where we were before he knocked us out, we weren't able to wake up straight away. Instead, Her Highness and I continued sleeping though this wasn't necessarily a bad thing. My battle against both Twinmold had really taken its toll on me and fighting against Ganondorf in the Dream World further taxed my mind to the point where had I wanted to, I wouldn't have ever woken up again. And so we remained asleep though I wished I had woken up as I began to stir within the realm of my subconscious. My body felt relief from sleep while my mind felt pain from it.

I honestly thought I had to fight the Dark Lord in an actual dream battle where I could use whatever my mind could conjure up in hopes of surviving long enough but instead he chose to simply test me by having me hit him with only one attack; an attack that utilized my mental abilities to their fullest. Was he trying to show some restraint? It didn't really sound like he something he would do given that my previous encounters resulted in getting beaten to within an inch of my life. But if that was his intention, then his manipulations were taking on a new form that I had not anticipated. Perhaps he had come to the realization that manipulating me wasn't worth it in the long-run.

Then again, Ganondorf was someone whom I still knew little about. Much of my assumptions about his actions came from what I saw during my previous journey. This of course was useless information as the one I fought--Lord Tirek at the time--was a younger version who barely had any comprehension regarding the Triforce other than believing it would make him unstoppable were he to get his hands on all three pieces. This Ganondorf on the other hand was much wiser in that he knew things no one else did and possessed arcane power that would make Princess Celestia weep.

A horrible comparison I know, comparing him to Celestia, yet it was the unfortunate truth. It was like he was several steps ahead of everyone else and no one would be able to overtake him were it a race. That was because he could foresee all possible outcomes long before they happened. I remembered him telling me this at the end of my previous journey and it stuck into my mind ever since as though it were the one factor about him that held the most prominence. There were other factors that were obviously far superior yet it was this one that made me fear encountering him. Knowing what was to come meant nothing could surprise him thus rendering all possible efforts of fighting a moot point.

Was the Triforce truly that powerful? All I ever knew about it was the legends that I learned from the Deku Tree--I could never forget him--and Princess Twilight--when she was the other princess in addition to that warrior disguise she used--yet it seemed what I knew was nothing compared to what Ganondorf knew. It made sense as it was an ancient artefact that had existed since the very beginning of creation and this Ganondorf had lived for centuries giving him immeasurable knowledge to the point where only he knew what the Triforce was truly capable of doing. Were I to have had such knowledge, I could have stopped him a long time ago.

And then there was the elephant in the room... Princess Twilight. Whenever Ganondorf chose to either talk to me or challenge me to one of his "tests", he always made sure that I was the focus above everything else. After all, he wanted me to become his loyal servant as he believed I had potential what with my prior experience as Sunset Demon. I was certain he also believed I had a hidden power deep inside of my being and was doing everything to make me realize what it could do for me, yet in our most recent encounter, he felt an interest towards Her Highness that never existed before.

Was she to be his backup plan were I to not become his servant? Such a thought was one I hoped would never come to pass. Princess Twilight may have had her faults but she could never experience what I went through as Sunset Demon as it would mean Equestria losing one of its most prized treasures. Unlike me, Her Highness was a natural with magic--it also helped that she had been using it for years while I neglected magic for obvious reasons--and in that sense, she was stronger and a prime candidate for Ganondorf. No... I couldn't allow that to happen no matter what the cost.

Yet why have her use her mental power to begin with? I thought long about it as I continued to dream until an answer came to me. He mentioned the Triforce when he asked her to show him her power but from what I remember, I was the only one who retained a piece of the Triforce, a secret my friends still didn't know about nor could they right now. This power within me was a blessing and a curse as it represented a strong characteristic I had developed but also meant I would always be hounded by Ganondorf. Could it that Her Highness had a piece of the Triforce as well? I had often thought it possible but never really went into any further detail.

Dawn of the Final Day - 24 Hours Remain.

The sound of a cucco crowing made me stir as I began to awaken from my slumber, but it was lousy timing as I didn't get to finish my thought on Princess Twilight. Perhaps it was best for now as I didn't want to freak her out as it would have been too much for her to comprehend. I needed to do my own little bit of research on the side so that I could come to a proper conclusion and not embarrass myself by making a false statement. If Her Highness did possess the Triforce of Wisdom--the one most associated with her--I had to figure out why Ganondorf wanted her now all of a sudden, assuming he did that is.

My eyes then opened and I got up before yawning. " We're still here... That's good."

" Mmmmm..." Princess Twilight said as she continued sleeping on top of my head. I was honestly surprised that she didn't fall off or wake up when I got back onto my feet. She was quite the heavy sleeper to have not noticed me moving moments ago.

I tapped her body gently. " Wake up."

" Just a few more minutes Spike..." Twilight said in a groggy manner.

I tapped her body again and she said something else prompting me to come up with another tactic. " Guess I'll just go into the Great Fairy's Fountain quietly and let you sleep when we're inside while I talk to Adagio." It wasn't my best idea but I hoped it would be enough for Her Highness to want to wake up of her own volition.

Opening her eyes quickly, Princess Twilight flew off of my hat and floated in front of me. " Like I'm going to miss out on you talking to Adagio again. I know it sounds weird hearing me say that given who she really is and all but I just feel comfortable around her."

" Glad to see you're awake now."

" What time is it?"

" We were asleep for the duration of the night." I answered. " If not for the cucco waking me up, we would have slept through the entire day. While my body feels great having rested especially after that battle against both Twinmolds, my mind feels like it needs more sleep."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Now it's all coming back to me. Ganondorf appeared before us in the Dream World and challenged us both to showcase our mental power. While I loved being the same size as you for just a few minutes--even if it was just a dream--I missed being this small but don't think I want to remain like this forever. I am looking forward to when everything gets changed back to normal and we can return to our regular lives."

" You handled yourself well in the dream."

" As did you."

I then looked away. " It's just that... I find it odd that he wanted to see what you were capable of doing. When we saw him after defeating Goht, he viewed you as being nothing more than a pest whose sole purpose was to guide me along. Why change that stance now? Why have you showcase your mental prowess?" I made sure not to go any further in case Her Highness believed I was hiding something from her--I was but again I couldn't reveal that until I had conducted research. " I mean, you definitely impressed him with your display but I'm just a little bit curious as to his intentions."

" Is something bothering you, Sunset?"

I shook my head. " Nothing."

I knew Princess Twilight didn't believe me and she immediately flew around to look at me in the face. " If something is bothering you, feel free to share it with me. Sure, you know more about how Ganondorf works than I do since this isn't your first time doing this, but you don't have to hold back anything on my account." Her Highness could see the expression in my eyes and deep down she knew nothing she said would convince me to talk about it. " Well.. Just remember I'm here for you when you need me so don't hesitate to ask."

I really didn't want to keep Princess Twilight in the dark here but this was something that was way beyond even her. If she did possess the Triforce of Wisdom, that would make her bound to the same fate that had claimed me at the end of my previous journey. Equestria needed her as one of its princesses and not tied down with a power from a world most associated with a popular video game franchise. It would also make her a target for anyone who wanted to use the Triforce for their own purposes. After all she had done for me, it was my turn to ensure nothing happened to her.

Another thought then crossed my mind. From what little knowledge I had of the Triforce, those who were chosen to hold onto them were bound by a force that would forever keep them together unless one of them were to either give up that power or be killed allowing it to be claimed by another. Should the Triforce bearers be within proximity of one another, the golden power would resonate and be revealed. So far, this had not happened once in this adventure which made me suspect that perhaps Princess Twilight didn't possess it. If that was indeed the case, why did Ganondorf ask her to showcase her mental power?

That was actually a stupid question on my part. Trying to figure out what the Dark Lord's intentions were was the same as trying to collect every last known rupee in the world; both were impossibilities. I supposed the only one who could answer my question was Ganondorf himself though I doubted he would. He enjoyed relying on manipulation, half-truths, riddles, and more in his attempts at getting me to lower my guard long enough for him to make his move. Not even Adagio or the Four Giants could tell me anything. Ganondorf wasn't a part of this video game world so their knowledge of him was non-existent.

I then noticed Princess Twilight was staring at me with a smirk on her face. " I went into another of my daydreams didn't I?"

Princess Twilight playfully nodded. " I've gotten used to you doing that by now, Sunset."

" It seems I get more and more on my mind the further we progress."

" An astute observation." Twilight said. " At the beginning of a journey, we know next to nothing so our minds aren't worried about anything other than wondering what we will run into that could test our resolve and determine if we win or lose. During the later stages, important information becomes available and we struggle trying to figure it out in addition to the previous problems from before that continue plaguing us. You've been struggling to deal with both of these things so it makes sense you're irritable or distant in that you're trying so hard not to lose your sanity."

" Um... Thank you?" I said with a confused look on my face.

" Hopefully, you won't have to think about it anymore once this adventure is over."

I shook my head. " Don't bet on it."

" What makes you say that?"

I sighed. " Ganondorf is sure to put me through this whole thing again but with a different game in this series. It's like a never-ending cycle where I have to endure just so that he can coerce me into becoming his servant and embracing the power I once wielded as Sunset Demon. You might think I'm being silly but after all I've been through so far, I'm expecting myself to go through a third run of things."

" Is there anyway you can stop this?"

" Kill him."

That answer made Princess Twilight frown. " And here I thought you were against killing others."

I sighed again. " That wasn't a serious answer, Twilight. I doubt I could kill him as his power is far too great not to mention that only specific weapons can hurt him. I lack those weapons and he would know about it long before I had even thought about it in my mind. Let's face it. Unless I were somehow able to exceed his power, I'm practically at his mercy until I either accept being his servant or die in the process."

" Maybe we should focus on something else."

" Like what?"

Princess Twilight pointed towards the entrance of the Great Fairy Fountain. " We should return the Stray Fairies and restore Adagio back to normal. Not only will she give you something useful for the road ahead, she should be able to tell us where we can find the remaining masks."

While I wasn't going to ask Adagio for a reward--she was likely to do that anyway given how the other versions of her did just that--I did need to know where to find the remaining three masks, and perhaps she could tell me where I had to go next. Flurry Heart, through Sugarcoat talking on her behalf, said I had to summon the Four Giants by playing a melody I had been taught by them and they would stop Starlight Glimmer once and for all. I had a song as Principal Celestia taught it to me though I've never played it before as I never found an ideal place to use it--I couldn't even remember its name let alone know how it went.

I walked into the Great Fairy's Fountain and immediately noticed the yellow coloured Stray Fairies hovering about in their pool. I actually considered changing into one of my other forms before restoring Adagio to normal but ultimately decided to present myself as the real me. Walking forward, the Stray Fairies that were inside my body flew out and began merging with the others until a bright light blinded me before fading away and revealing Adagio floating before me. Much like her previous selves, her hair colour was yellow matching that of her fellow fairies whilst wearing a yellow dress that was certainly striking.

" Oh kind, young one." Adagio began. " Thank you for restoring my broken and shattered body to normal."

" I believe you are the last Great Fairy in Termina."

Adagio nodded. " I am known as the Great Fairy of Kindness. Yes, I have no doubt that you are surprised at how kindness can be deemed a power especially when compared with the other powers the others represent, but know that what I represent can be seen as the strongest power of all." She lurched forward and began scanning every facet of my body before pulling back and slowly smiling. " You have endured much hardship within the temple and I also sense you have lost a part of yourself."

" You guessed correctly."

" While it is most unfortunate that you have lost something that was dear to you, you must not allow it to dwell upon your mind." Adagio said. " If you allow the loss to cloud your judgment, you will only cause further strife within your mind leading down a path that will result in your own demise. Remember the good times even if they were few and live on by fulfilling the promise made by the one who is no longer of this world."

I was surprised Adagio knew exactly what happened but then I shouldn't have been. The Stray Fairies that I had rescued up to that point when I encountered Sunset Demon witnessed everything that happened. Despite being unable to do anything given they were powerless, they made sure to remember what they saw thus making it easier for them to comfort me upon becoming the Great Fairy of Kindness once again. I also realized why this version of Adagio represented kindness. While she could have told me to forget the she-demon, she knew that doing so would only cause me further pain in the future and instead suggested I remembered the good things.

Again, it felt weird seeing Adagio being such a benevolent being given that in the world that I called home, she was anything but that. Had her true persona been on display every time I encountered her, she would have insulted me and made me feel like everyone I knew had abandoned me all because they were having a good experience while I was being left behind merely to watch. I was going to miss her gentle embrace but perhaps someday, the real her along with her fellow Sirens, Aria and Sonata, would have a change of heart and seek me out so that they could be reformed just like I had been.

Before I would delve further into what was becoming another daydream, I sought to inquire about the remaining masks I needed. " I'm sure you're aware that I have collected most of the masks that are necessary for me to acquire the ultimate mask your fellow Great Fairies have been guiding me towards. Do you have any idea where I can find the remaining three? My friend, Princess Twilight, confirmed that I was missing just three when she did a quick inventory check when we were exploring the Stone Tower Temple."

Adagio nodded. " Before I reveal to you what I know about what you seek, I must first grant you a reward for restoring me back to normal."

" To be honest, I'm not sure what you can give me."

" While it is true that the other Great Fairies of Termina were able to give you abilities that increased your power thus making your quest a more pleasant experience, I am able to give you the one thing they could not." Adagio said. " I have noticed the sword in that scabbard is small. Am I to suspect that it has proven problematic?"

I nodded. " I've been meaning to get it upgraded to the strongest sword that exists but I kept on neglecting it. If I had gotten it much sooner just by giving those smithies the gold dust they needed from the Gorons, I wouldn't have struggled against those powerful monsters."

Adagio then laughed which surprised me. " The sword that they can make for you is powerful, yes, but it is not the most powerful sword that you can wield, young one. What I have here as your reward is the most powerful sword in all of Termina." Raising her hands to her face and blowing a wind in my direction, I was expecting it would envelop around me much like what happened before, but instead the wind twirled about in front of me before changing into the most beautiful thing I had ever seen in my entire life. Before me was a sword that glowed like a rainbow, was etched with black roses on the blade, and was much longer than my current sword.

I gasped. " Is this for me?"

Adagio nodded. " This is the Great Fairy's Sword, a blade that has no equal anywhere else. While it cannot allow you to perform a spin attack, its power and range will make quick work of most monsters though there are a few who are capable of resisting it. Also, this sword can still be used if you were cursed by the Blue Bubbles that have been known to haunt the fields and the path here at night. Finally, you must use two hands when using it as the size and weight are difficult to control if you were to try it with one hand."

My eyes just couldn't stop staring at the majestic beauty that was the Great Fairy's Sword. I had longed for a more powerful sword and it had now been given to me as a reward for restoring Adagio back to normal. My heart was now conflicted as a result of receiving this gift. Technically, I didn't need to go to the Mountain Smithy to upgrade the Kokiri Sword to its strongest state since I now had an even more powerful sword at my disposal, and yet, I still felt compelled to go and get it as a means of being a completionist. Princess Twilight was sure to insist I go and get it upgraded but perhaps she could suggest otherwise?

Grabbing the Great Fairy's Sword in my hand, I immediately felt the massive weight it possessed pull me down to the ground. Adagio was right about me needing to wield it with both hands as using just one meant I wasn't going anywhere with it. Using my other hand, I grabbed onto the hilt and held a firm grip with both hands before lifting it up and holding the sword slightly behind my back. It felt good in my hands though this wasn't how I was supposed to hold it so I pulled it forward until it was in front of me in a position where I could swing it without making myself look stupid.

From there, I swung it around a few times just to get used to it and I was satisfied though a little hesitant. " It will take me a while to get used to it."

" The Great Fairy's Sword can only be wielded by a true hero."

" And you think I am worthy of that distinction?"

Adagio nodded. " That sword chooses who is allowed to wield it in battle. Over the centuries, many have come to my fountain in hopes of being able to take up the sword and use it for whatever purpose they had in mind. They were all excellent swordsmen in their own right yet none of them were worthy of using it. The sword would reject them by being too heavy to wield properly or would fly out from their hands because it felt they weren't worthy. Even the Ikana Royal Family failed in their bid to gain control of the Great Fairy's Sword and it eventually became known as the sword that could never be used."

" Didn't that upset you?"

" A little but then I knew it would take an extraordinary person to wield the sword."

I then pointed at myself. " You mean, me?"

Adagio nodded as she smiled. " I knew you were worthy when I witnessed you overcome so many challenges within the Stone Tower. Had I determined that you were not worthy of wielding the sword, I would have given my thanks as before but send you off without giving you a means of making you stronger. Young one, you now have everything necessary to prevent destruction from destroying this world but first I shall address the other masks."

" The final Giant, or rather her representative, said something to that effect about me being ready."

" All shall be made clear in time." Adagio said. " First, I must focus on the remaining masks you still need to find. You have done well acquiring them from all across this world by helping those who needed it and by finding them through fated occurrences. Now, you must embark upon a quest of love to obtain the final three masks."

" Love!?" I exclaimed. " What does love have to do with masks?"

" There is someone in Clock Town who wishes to know what has become of the one she was to marry when the Carnival of Time begins."

" I kind of remember hearing something about a missing person."

Floating down towards me, Adagio cupped her hands together and produced a bubble that revealed images of people and places I had seen so far. " This woman is the source of the problem that you must resolve to acquire the remaining three masks. One of the masks in your possession will cause her to react upon seeing it but you must first obtain something of importance by using a Goron's might. You cannot do it right now as time has passed but perhaps doing so during the first of your afternoons may be in order? Once she asks you to hear her confessions, you must follow exactly what is presented to you."

" This will get me the remaining masks?"

" Yes, but you will only have one attempt to do all of this correctly."

" And if I fail?"

" You must go through it all again."

I definitely didn't like the sound of that. I mean, I was glad that it wasn't one of those "you fail and everything is lost" scenarios but the thought of having to go through a second time just because of a single blunder made me feel very uneasy. The woman in question that Adagio was showing me was Scootaloo and I remembered speaking with her way back at the beginning when I first came to Termina though I never bothered to talk to her afterwards as I didn't think of her as being important. It turned out that she had now become essential to my acquiring the remaining three masks.

" Will she give me the masks?"

Adagio shook her head. " No, but you will gradually acquire them over time. There are several people who are integral to this woman's problem and you must listen to what they have to say and assist them should they have need of it. You have met these people before so will you not be confused when they suddenly become intertwined within this story of romance. However, there is one person you have never met before, the one this woman waits for even now when others have said she should move on with her life. I cannot say anymore as what remains you must uncover and resolve."

" That's a pretty tall order."

" You have overcome far worse than this, young one." Adagio said. " There is one extra thing I can reveal to you about this quest you must undertake. On the first of three nights that shall encompass this quest, one with malice in their heart shall usurp a valued good from another who is of innocence. Do not interfere in this otherwise your end goal will not come to pass so refrain from showing an act of compassion. Do not show anger, young one. All shall be resolved with a happy resolution should you do everything as intended."

I knew that she was referring to the robbery that occurred in North Clock Town where Lightning Dust robs the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop, yet while I didn't appreciate the way she said it, it still had to happen. Lightning Dust would eventually sell the stolen goods to Iron Will in the Curiosity Shop but what happened after that was unknown to me. While I didn't like the idea of not doing anything to stop her, I knew that I had to let her get away with it as there was much more to this situation than appearances suggested. Hopefully, my heart wouldn't compel me into preventing the robbery.

And that was when something else Adagio said made me react with dread. She practically said that this side-quest involving Scootaloo would take up an entire three day cycle when she mentioned the first of three nights. I had never had a side-quest that took place over the course of an entire cycle though I suspect there were similar side-quests like this that I could have done but never bothered since my focus was solely on completing main objectives whilst indulging in the occasional distraction every now and again. Her words about having only one attempt or else go through it all again now made much more sense than they did beforehand.

" Alright... I'll take your word for it."

" Before you go, I must tell you about what you must do now with regards to this world's fate."

" Am I supposed to go to the Clock Tower?"

Adagio nodded. " As I said, you have everything you need to save this world and you also know where you must go, but allow me to share some final advice with you. The masked child who has caused so much trouble can only be reached when the Carnival of Time begins and the Clock Tower opens to celebrate the occasion. You may be able to convince them to stop their madness but if they are insistent on bringing about destruction, then you must use your true instrument and play that which you were taught by the first of the guardians of this world. You will know when it must be played so do not be concerned as to the minor details."

" I think I get all of that."

" By the way, I do have something you might want to consider if you were to make your regular sword stronger."

" What's that?"

" The spirit that dwells within the mask that allows you to assume the form of a Goron once hid several bottles of golden ore in a secret location." Adagio answered. " She acquired a lot of this ore as a result of proving her skills by winning the ancient race her people have held for centuries. She often gave her prize to others of her people as an act of kindness but had kept some for herself in case she ever needed it in the future. Somewhere in the village of the Goron Tribe lies the cave that houses the golden ore she had chosen to keep. Only the spirit of your mask knows where the location is and perhaps she will share it with you as it would aid you in your quest."

" I'll definitely take that into consideration."

" Then the rest is up to you." Adagio said. " When battle has made you weary, please come back to see me."

She then laughed as she disappeared back into her pool leaving Princess Twilight and I with a lot on my plate. A part of me was sad that this would be the last time I would see her in this world as a kind person but the other part knew that the world I called home had to be turned back to the it was before Ganondorf changed things. Still, I wished Adagio and her fellow Sirens would change and maybe become our friends yet I doubted they would since we did strip them of their power leaving as ordinary girls who disappeared after their true colours were revealed after the Battle of the Bands.

I swung about the Great Fairy's Sword a few more times to get used to holding it before putting it behind my back, turning around, and walking back outside where I looked up at the moon that was now drawing ever closer. I could now finally stop it from crashing if the Four Giants were to appear and do whatever it was they were supposed to do--none of them ever said what they would do once they were summoned using the song Principal Celestia taught me--and that meant no longer having to re-live through the same three days. I would also get my chance against Starlight Glimmer by giving her a piece of my mind for everything she had done.

Would she finally come to the realization that she had been causing pain and misery to everyone? Maybe but she might also think she was justified in her actions and try to weasel her way out of owning up to her mistakes. There was also the notion of the mask she wore being much more than just a costume piece. I still thought Starlight was being manipulated somehow but I never could prove my theory since I hadn't seen her in person since getting back the Ocarina of Time from her. I was also curious as to what she had been doing this entire time as she waited for the moon to come down and destroy everything.

Princess Twilight then flopped on my head. " That's a very nice sword you got there from Adagio."

" You really think so?"

" I've never seen anything quite like it."

" Are you thinking about doing some research on it?"

Princess Twilight blushed and turned her face away. " What!? No! Why would I want to do some research on a weapon that would surely baffle the greatest intellects Equestria has ever known and give me a honorific in the process? That's absolutely preposterous!" Her Highness knew that I wasn't buying her explanation and soon she looked down at me after turning her face back. " Am I really that predictable when it comes to wanting to know more about something unique?"

I grinned. " I saw it coming a mile away."

Princess Twilight performed a sweat-drop. " Okay, you caught me, Sunset, but I was being serious about how nice looking the Great Fairy's Sword was. If what Adagio said about it was true and I certainly don't doubt the Great Fairy of Kindness, that sword is the most powerful weapon you have in your possession. You can easily defeat anything that stands in your way provided you want to go and do that."

" I think I'll use it against the really strong monsters."

" That's a good idea as you've often struggled against them."

" Should I still get my regular sword upgraded?"

" I've been nagging at you to do that for a long time now but that Great Fairy's Sword does make it a moot point."

" You think I should ignore it then?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " No, I still think you should get the Kokiri Sword fully upgraded just to see what it's capable of doing. The Great Fairy's Sword is powerful but you need to sacrifice using your shield in order to be able to use it properly. I think there will be times where a shield will be needed so having your regular sword re-forged would be a good idea as you never know what you might go up against next. What Adagio said about Maud having this stash was surprising but then it does mean not needing to go and restore spring back to the mountains though in the end it's your decision to make."

I clutched my head as the thought made my head hurt. " Ack! I don't know what to do!"

" You should think about it for a while before making a decision."

My head then felt better knowing that I could put off making the decision until later. " So I guess we need to go and help Scootaloo deal with her problem since it's the only way to get those remaining three masks according to Adagio. How am I supposed to get to listen to me anyway? It's not like I have something she needs or anything."

Flying back on top of my head, Princess Twilight began bopping me repeatedly until I waved my hand to get her to stop doing it. " Guess you forgot all about what Monsieur Aroma asked you to do though I am not really surprised since he did thrust it upon you without asking for your opinion. You were requested to find his missing son, Kafei, and it sounds like he has a connection with Scootlaoo since Adagio mentioned that Kafei's Mask would make her react. I'm not entirely sure why you must be a Goron for something right at the beginning but she was insistent on it so I suggest not ignoring such advice."

I slapped my forehead. " I forgot I even had that mask."

" It's definitely one of the less memorable ones you've acquired."

" And I didn't even get to use it for its intended purpose."

" And what purpose would that be?"

" Seeing how people in town would react were I to talk to them whilst wearing it."

" You should still be able to do that." Twilight said. " Scootaloo has no idea where this Kafei person is but perhaps some of the townsfolk know about him and will say something regarding when they last saw him though don't expect to have positive responses every time. I suspect he isn't in everyone's good graces since he has been missing for a month now according to Monsieur Aroma."

" We just need to reset time and figure out what needs to be done."

That was the one thing about this whole problem that was slightly bothersome and that was the fact that I had to reset time in order to get it started. I didn't really want to go back and start things over as I still had an entire day left on my hands and wasting it was something I couldn't do. Normally, whenever something like this happened, it wasn't ever an issue as I would look forward to experiencing the next stage of the journey by visiting a new region or entering a temple in hopes of saving one of the Giants. Now, I was at a crossroads where two choices were on my shoulders to consider.

I could go and confront Starlight Glimmer and finally put an end to all of this but that meant ignoring the remaining three masks and not getting my hands on the ultimate mask which required getting everything else. I was still hesitant towards obtaining the mask as the thought of wearing it made me shiver to my very core--it was evil according to what several versions of Adagio had described--because the thought of using an evil power brought back painful memories from my past. I was afraid that using the mask's dark powers would make me succumb to the temptation of power and make me abandon who I truly was now.

On the other hand, if I were to help out Scootaloo, I could make her life a whole lot better and perhaps find out what became of Kafei. Plus, I was actually curious to learn more about her story and see what others back in town had to say about Kafei--I was also curious about what the ultimate mask was going to be like which meant collecting the remaining masks in order to get it. Starlight wasn't going anywhere and I technically had an infinite amount of time before I would need to confront her--provided Ganondorf didn't do something to suddenly change that--and prevent destruction so I could do some more side-quests to further prepare myself for what was coming.

After mulling it over for a few moments, I decided that I was going to help out Scootaloo. It wasn't the rewards of the remaining masks that convinced me but rather it was the thought of seeing something experience happiness by helping them reach it. Besides, I kind of owed her since I practically ignored her after my initial meeting since I never knew that she had issues let alone ones dealing with love. I was fortunate I knew much about the subject thanks to Flash Sentry's attempts at trying to impress Princess Twilight in addition to having once dated him and experiencing it for myself despite never being serious with him due to my old ways.

The first thing I intended on doing was perhaps going back to Termina Field and do some more rupee grinding. It would give me something to do and not waste an entire day by resetting time and ignoring it in addition to allowing me to fill up the bank with rupees so that I could finally get that other reward Fleur Dis Lee mentioned about way back when. I had no intention of spending all of my time doing this as there were other obligations so perhaps doing some scouting about would give me an idea as to what I needed to do regarding Scootaloo's problem back in town.

Sometime later in the early evening hours...

" I appreciate you allowing us to remain here at the ranch, Cremia."

" When y'all told me yer were comin' because of that there moon fallin', I weren't about ta say no to you." Applejack said as she scratched her head. " Ta be honest, Misty Fly, I wish y'all and the rest of those who came from Clock Town had chosen a better time ta come."

Misty Fly placed her hand on Applejack's shoulder. " I'm sorry that your cattle disappeared the two night ago. I wish I could offer you more comfort than this but since neither of us know exactly what happened, this is the best that I can do for you.. She then turned to look at Apple Bloom who was sitting on a crate and staring off at nothing, clutching her head every now and again. " And I'm really sorry about what happened to your little sister. I find it so strange that she just can't remember what happened to her two nights ago when the cattle disappeared at the same time."

Lowering her head, Applejack tried to hold back her tears. " Losing the cattle isn't a big deal as we can easily get more o'them in ta future, but Romani's problem looks ta be somethin' that's gonna be permanent for ta rest of her life." She then began crying in silent in hopes Misty Fly wouldn't be able to hear her. " I just wish I had listened ta her 'stead of sayin' her stories about aliens was nothin' but a lie. She wouldn't have her problem had I actually done somethin' 'bout it." She sighed. " Everything has just gone ta ruin 'round here and it shows that I'm a failure as a ranch owner."

" The same can be said about all of Termina."

" Why did everythin' have ta go so gosh dern wrong?"

" I wish I knew."

" Guess I oughta talk 'bout Anju given the circumstances she's goin' through."

" So you know about that?"

Applejack nodded. " Anju has been mah best friend for as long as either of us can remember and has been sending me letters about what she's been up ta these days." She then whipped out a letter from her pocket and unfurled it before shoving it in Misty Fly's face. " This letter got here earlier today and it details how Anju has struggled dealing with the disappearance of Kafei. The reason I'm bringin' this up to ya is 'cause you suggested that he abandoned her because of wantin' to marry me." Pulling the paper away from Misty Fly's face before putting it back in her pocket, Applejack was clearly outraged. How could y'all suggest Kafei would do that ta Anju?"

" It's just that you two were both in love with him."

" I know that!" Applejack shouted. " I know that I really wanted ta be the one he would choose but in the end he chose Anju. I've since accepted that fact and have wished them nothing but eternal happiness ever since though my heart on rare occasions wishes it had been me."

" Then Kafei didn't run away to marry you?"

Applejack's face turned bright red. " Why in the hay would he go and do such a stupid thing like that!? Kafei may be a lotta things but he ain't a two-timing scoundrel and I know this as a honest and truthful fact. I don't know what made ya think otherwise, Misty Fly, but y'all should have known what ya were sayin' was pure bunkus!" Walking up to the side of the barn, she pounded her fist on it whilst sighing. Misty Fly then walked up and Applejack turned to face her. " Look, I'm sorry fer lashin' out at ya like that but with all that's happened 'round here since the cattle vanished and Romani messed up in ta head, I just feel like shoutin' at anybody within earshot o' me."

" No... I'm sorry for ever thinking Kafei would run off with you."

Sighing, Applejack turned to face Misty Fly properly. " I just needed ta let off some hot air I'd been storin' inside my chest fer a while. Anyway, I do fell sorry for Anju not bein' able ta find him but I reckon she'll never get ta chance now what with that moon fallin' and gettin' closer ta Clock Town."

" Do you think we can survive out here?"

" Can't say fer sure."

" You don't think so?"

Applejack shook her head. " If that thing smacks into Clock Town as expected, it'll destroy it completely and any side-effects are sure ta be felt all over Termina. I ain't one of them fancy scientists but I do know none of us are going to survive this crisis. While I do appreciate everyone comin' here ta the ranch for safety, the truth is that y'all merely wasted your time as we're all gonna die within these next hours."

Misty Fly sighed. " I was afraid that would be the case."

" Might as well be honest with ya and not give y'all false hope."

" If only things could have turned out differently."

" Too late fer that now."

Misty Fly looked up at an open window on the upper level of the house and lowered her head. " Had Anju been given anything from Kafei that acknowledged that he was alive and was still determined to marry her, she would have stayed behind and waited for him. I'd have protested of course as I'm her mother and only want for her to be safe but she would have stayed because she is just so stubborn much like how I was when I was young."

" At least y'all acknowledged yer problems before the end."

" Listen..." Misty Fly began. " I was wondering if you could talk to Anju for me."

" Why me?"

" I've tried talking to her ever since we left town but she just stares at nothing and occasionally mumbles Kafei's name." Misty Fly answered. " Perhaps you might have better luck since you're are close friends. Besides, I think Anju refuses to speak to me because of bringing her here against her wishes even though my only concern was to ensure she would live to see the next sunrise."

Applejack blinked due to being surprised by such a request. " Well... I spose I could go and talk to her for ya but I can't leave Romani on her own. With her current condition, I fear she'll do somethin' that'll cause her more harm than she already has."

" I could watch her for you."

" I appreciate the sentiment."

Despite some slight hesitation, Applejack walked into the house in order to speak with Scootaloo leaving Misty Fly to deal with Apple Bloom. The younger sister hadn't paid any attention to what had been discussed and simply continued staring at nothing. Misty Fly walked over to her and called out a simple greeting only to not receive one in return. She tried calling out again and again she didn't receive an answer. Then she waved her hand out in front of Apple Bloom to see if that would work and it did but she didn't like the expression that was on Apple Bloom's face. It looked like she hadn't slept for at least a week.

" How are you feeling?" Misty Fly asked now she had Apple Bloom's attention.

" Um... I... I don't quite understand." Apple Bloom answered.

" You poor child."

" I... I was supposed to... to do something."

" Do you remember what that was?"

Apple Bloom shook her head. " I... I... I don't remember what it was. Everythin' is a blur and I have such a huge headache."

Misty Fly then comforted her. " From what I heard from several people as we made our way down here to the ranch, the entrance had been blocked by a huge boulder and took a couple of days for it to be cleared before accessibility was restored. Had someone been able to remove it much sooner, they could have provided assistance or sent for some to deal with whatever happened here." She rubbed the bridge of her nose as frustration built up. " Ugh! None of this makes any sense! How were a large contingent of cattle stolen without anyone being able to gain access to the ranch what with that boulder until just this morning!?"

Apple Bloom then spoke up. " Aliens... It was... was aliens."

" Cremia did mention that earlier."

" I... They did... something? I think so... I... I just can't remember."

" It doesn't really matter now." Misty Fly said sighing. " Termina is going to be destroyed within a matter of hours and all any of us can do is wait for the end to come but perhaps a miracle will occur at the last minute that saves us. Oh... Who am I kidding! No one can save us now! We might as well just accept things for what they are and pray that we all die quickly and not through a slow painful death."

Grinding for rupees wasn't nearly as bad as it used to be since I now had an easier means of producing them. Thanks to the power of the Light Arrow, I could destroy even the weakest of monsters that would produce purple rupees--they were worth fifty rupees--every time allowing me to build up a large collection that I would go and deposit at the bank. I made sure to only do this sparingly as the thought of killing monsters still made me feel uncomfortable so I alternated between cutting down shrubs for rupees--among other items--and destroying monsters using Light Arrows.

Fleur Dis Lee was surprised that I constantly showed up at the Clock Town Bank with huge amounts of rupees in my wallet. While she was glad that I was able to deposit so much and make her job feel much more important, she wondered where I was getting all the money from. From her perspective, I was just a child who had an incredible amount of wealth. I wouldn't be surprised if she believed I was either the child of a wealthy family who had a huge bank account or was stealing it from other people as a means of pity. In any case, my rupee totals at the bank skyrocketed where it increased from roughly two hundred to about three thousand in a matter of hours.

Unfortunately, by the time I managed to deposit enough to get me over the 3,500 rupee mark, nightfall had occurred and that meant I needed to make do with those preparations before beginning this unusual side-quest that involved Scootaloo. I began looking around Clock Town to see if there was anything I missed during previous visits and at first I didn't have much in the way of luck until I chanced upon a door in the Laundry Pool that I never noticed before. It was locked indicating that whoever lived there had since abandoned it but it was a place I needed to remember for the future in case I would go back there again.

I also made sure to check out all of the rooms in the Stock Pot Inn--it too had been abandoned--in case there was something I missed. Apart from the usual rooms that were featured alongside the questionable hygiene issues due to there being so many bugs--especially in their kitchen--I left and decided to check out one last location hoping it would provide me with some details I overlooked. The place in question was in West Clock Town; to be more specific it was the Post Office where Aria Blaze worked. I never bothered to go inside but there was no point as it too was closed though a sign on the door said that she was out on a delivery run.

Since I had nothing left to do, I took out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt and was about to play the Song of Time when I realized that there was one last place I could check out and that was the Clock Tower itself. I walked over to where it was and looked up to see the moon yet my main focus was seeing whether or not Starlight Glimmer was up there watching over everything and laughing over how her "prank" was progressing. I couldn't see her so I chose to ignore her and played the Song of Time to go back to the beginning and proceed to start helping out Scootaloo.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain.

As soon as I reappeared, I took out Kafei's Mask and stared longingly at it for a few moments. Who would have guessed that this mask in particular possessed an actual power given how bland it looked. People would speak to me differently if I were to wear the mask as I spoke to them. Some people weren't going to be happy seeing me talking to them while wearing the mask but I wanted to know how they felt about him but hopefully most would cooperate. Placing the mask on my face, I certainly didn't feel any different, a reminder that the mask's power was superficial at best.

" Hey kid!" A familiar voice called out. " Why are you wearing that weird mask?"

I turned around and was surprised to see Sweetie Belle standing there, arms folded, and surrounded by several men who didn't look very happy. From what I remembered, she was in charge of the carnival committee and she along with those men wanted the Carnival of Time to go on as intended rather than be cancelled which would end up happening because of the moon. I also remembered a bitter conversation between her and Shining Armour at the mayor's residence though it had been a very long time since I actually witnessed that. I thought she was already there at the residence arguing away so I was surprised to see her outside.

I struggled to come up with an answer. " Um... You see... The thing about that is..."

" You lookin' for Kafei?" Sweetie Belle asked.

" I nodded quickly. " Yes."

Sweetie Belle laughed. " Hah! I figured Monsieur Aroma would finally find someone who was willing--or not--to go and look for him. I kinda feel sorry for you, kid! Kafei has been gone for a month now and it just hasn't settled well with his parents and those of Anju of the Stock Pot Inn. I don't know much about it myself as it's all just politics to me but her family is furious that he vanished before they were supposed to get married."

" You know about their wedding?"

" I was invited to it by Mayor Dotour!"

" Is that why you're going to her residence?"

Sweetie Belle shook her head though I noticed her hand clenching into a fist. I knew straight away that she was going to argue about the carnival so I made sure not to bring it up in case my words caused further conflict. " Me and the boys are going to see the mayor about something important but a kid like you doesn't need to know about it. Personally, I feel bad that Kafei disappeared all of a sudden without leaving behind any reasons."

I thought about making a sarcastic remark but opted not to. " Did you know Kafei?"

" All I know is that he was really close to Anju though he wasn't happy that his old woman runs this town." Sweetie Belle answered. " Truth is, I can understand why he chose to disappear as a similar thing happened to me. My own sons ran off in a hurry before the carnival could begin. It makes me so mad that they ran away like that but then they always were a little on the cowardly side but considering what's been going on around here lately, I can't really be mad so I'm willing to give them the benefit of the doubt."

" I'm sorry to hear that about your sons."

" I should've raised them better but what can you do?"

" Am I preventing you from seeing the mayor?"

Nodding, Sweetie Belle barked an order to her men to get going while she chose to answer my question. " Me and the boys would love to stay and chat with you, kid, but we've got to speak with Mayor Dotour before that accursed Viscen can convince her to cancel the carnival. I suppose I should give you a hint about who you should ask about Kafei since everyone in town knew of him thanks to his being the son of the mayor and postmaster. Why not talk to the postwoman or perhaps even Anju herself? I'd be careful when asking her as her mother might not take too kindly of you."

She then walked off leaving me to wonder what she meant about Scootaloo's mother being a problem. If anything, I was certain she was concerned about the well-being of her future son-in-law and not what Sweetie Belle said. Kafei's Mask had already proven itself to be useful by giving me some information about him but I needed to go deeper so as to get a true understanding. I figured that I needed to speak to either Scootaloo or her mother but at the moment, the Stock Pot Inn wasn't open as it was still pretty early in the day. I knew that I needed to move time forward to move things along.

Princess Twilight then bopped me on the head. " Well that was certainly interesting."

I nodded. " Guess Adagio was right about how some people like this Kafei while others don't."

" We need to be cautious about who we speak to."

" Technically, we only need to speak with Scootaloo."

" Not necessarily true, Sunset." Twilight said. " Sure, she's the main person we need to speak with to learn more about Kafei but remember that she doesn't know where he is so that means everyone in town have their own things to say about him. Even if we do get an idea of where he might be by speaking with Scootaloo, it's not a guarantee that we will be able to find him as he's done a pretty good job of it so far."

" Yeah... I suppose you're right."

" I have this feeling that there are more people involved in this than we realize."

" So should we go to the Stock Pot Inn?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes but we need to pay a visit just after noon. Remember that Adagio said that you need to become a Goron to obtain something that is necessary to get everything else going."

" Any idea on what that could be?"

" I don't know."

That was the one thing about Adagio that annoyed me. Whenever she provided advice on what I was supposed to do next, she would always speak in cryptic riddles so as to make me work for it while also confusing me. I wished she didn't do that as all it really did was make me made but then it was necessary so as to give me a sense of challenge rather than hand it over to me just like that without truly earning it. Why I needed to become Darmani to get this whole thing with Scootaloo underway when I could clearly do so as myself made no sense but I wasn't about to question a Great Fairy as Adagio knew much more than I did.

Heading to the left into East Clock Town, I walked past the shops until I stood in front of the Stock Pot Inn. According to a clock hanging on a nearby wall, it had just turned past 8:00am which meant I could now go inside but it was too early to speak with Scootaloo regarding Kafei. Taking out the ocarina again, I was about to play the Song of Double Time when the entrance to the inn swung open and out stepped Big Macintosh, who wasn't thrilled with seeing me with a mask on my face. " Bah! Why are you wearing a mask on your face?"

" I'm looking for someone." I answered."

" The only person I know who is missing is the son of Monsieur Aroma but that's none of my business."

" You know about Kafei?"

It was clear that Big Macintosh wasn't interested in talking to me. " I don't know anything about him other than he was expected to succeed his mother as mayor whenever she decides to step down from the responsibility."

" Then I'm sorry to bother you."

" Are you looking for him?"

I nodded. " I was hired to look for him by Monsieur Aroma."

" You were able to meet with him before me, Gorman, leader of the Gorman Troupe?"

" Uh... I guess so?"

That was enough to push Big Macintosh over the edge. " How is it that a child was able to meet with Monsieur Aroma so easily while I have been forced to wait patiently until now to be able to meet him?" Turning towards the wall, he punched it with his fist, leaving behind a small indentation, resulting in him injuring his hand slightly. " I can't believe you met him so easily. Maybe I should have been more assertive and demanded Monsieur Aroma meet with me to discuss my troupe's upcoming performance for the carnival."

" Are you sure he will still want your troupe?" I asked making sure not to reveal too much.

" My troupe is the best anywhere!" Big Macintosh answered. " To perform before the patrons of Clock Town is an honour for those in my employ while the people should feel honoured that they will get to see my troupe perform acts that have made them famous. Now, move aside, child! I must speak with Monsieur Aroma immediately! No doubt my troupe will be thrilled when I come back and inform them that they will be performing for such a momentous occasion."

I moved aside as Big Macintosh walked by, a cheerful expression on his face as he turned to the left and walked off towards the mayor's residence. I didn't have the heart to tell him that he wasn't going to enjoy what Monsieur Aroma would say about the carnival being cancelled but opted not to because it would most likely cause a time paradox. Every time I went back to the beginning of the three day cycle, only Princess Twilight, Flash Sentry, and I would remember it happening. Everyone else would reset back to the way they were without any memory of my existence of what I did or anything else for that matter.

Besides, I helped out Big Macintosh by doing that sound check for Miss Pommel during a previous cycle so I no longer felt the need to help him. My accomplishment had been recorded down in the Bomber's Notebook I received at the beginning--I really needed to check it out as it had been practically forever since I last combed through its pages--so it's not like my actions didn't amount to anything. For now, my focus was strictly towards helping Scootaloo with her problem and according to Adagio, she wasn't the only one I would be helping. I would in reality be helping multiple people all at once under the pretense that I was trying to help resolve a love issue.

Raising the ocarina to my lips and playing the Song of Double Time, I focused hard on moving forward only several hours through time. The magic of the song then took affect and everything around me suddenly increased in speed until it shimmered to an image of clocks ticking in unison before switching back to what it was before. Looking back up at the clock from before, time had indeed passed by where it was now 1:30pm. I had no idea how I managed to get to the precise time I needed but I wasn't about to complain about it. Sure, I ended up sacrificing five and a half hours but it would prove worthwhile in due course.

Entering the Stock Pot Inn, I was surprised to see Scootaloo talking to Aria Blaze though I wasn't entirely sure what was going on. Rather than interrupt their conversation, I chose to walk up and listen in case one of them provided any information. I immediately struck pay dirt without even doing anything as Aria presented a letter. " You must be Anju, yes? You have something here that requires your immediate attention."

Scootaloo was taken by surprise. " Ah! Uh, uh, uh, umm, umm... What is this?"

" This is a letter."

" I know what a letter is." Scootaloo said angrily. " What I want to know is why are you holding it in your hand?"

" I have delivered this to you!" Aria said as she dropped the letter onto the desk. " Now if you'll excuse me, I must be on my way. I still have plenty of letters to deliver around town before the day is over and I can't afford to fall behind schedule. Heck, even saying these very words is already causing a delay to the schedule." Adjusting her hat, she was about to leave when she was suddenly stopped when Scootaloo picked up the letter and looked to be wanting to give it back.

" Ah! Wait!"

" Why are you trying to hand back the letter?"

" I'm not doing that!"

Aria shook her head. " I cannot take back letters that have already been delivered. It goes against protocol and causes nothing but problems for the postal service. If I were to start doing such a foolish thing, the postmaster would fire me in an instant." Shaking her hands, Aria looked like she didn't want anything to do with what Scootaloo was doing though from my perspective, she--Scootaloo--was trying to do something else. " Please excuse me. I simply must continue on with my route."

" Wait!" Scootaloo shouted. " I just wanted to ask you a question."

" You don't want to hand the letter back to me?"

Scootaloo shook her head vehemently. " What? No! Um... Why would I want to do something like that?"

" Then what is your question?" Aria asked. " Please hurry up as I'm wasting precious time falling behind schedule.

Scootaloo looked nervous at first as though she didn't know what she wanted to ask. This caused Aria to start tapping her foot impatiently until the former finally had the courage to ask her question. "This letter... Um... Where did you?" She stuttered again which made me slap my forehead quietly so as to not offend her. " Where did you get that letter from? I see no return address on it so you must have an answer."

" From the postbox."

" What?"

Aria repeated herself. " From the postbox."

" Th-that's not what I mean!" Scootaloo said. " From the postbox where?"

" From the postbox somewhere."

At that point, Scootaloo started getting a little assertive which was surprising considering her prior attitude. " That's not what I mean either! Look, I wish to know where you got that letter from and please be sure to tell me everything."

" No."

" No!?" Scootaloo exclaimed. " What do you mean no?"

" I can't tell you that."

" Why not?"

" Because it's a secret." Aria answered. " The person who wrote this letter insisted on that. Therefore, I cannot tell you where I got the letter from. Now do not start off by asking me the same thing over and over in an endless manner as I will continue giving you the same answer until one of us chooses to stop. Now, your antics have caused me to fall even further behind schedule so now I'm forced to run even faster in order to deliver the remaining letters I have in my bag."

The two of them ended up arguing over the letter itself when Scootaloo began asking Aria as to where the letter came from. True to her word, Aria refused to answer and kept on saying that it was a secret that would remain known only to her. This back and forth went on for a couple of minutes before Scootaloo raised her arms up in frustration and admitted defeat. Aria didn't have to act like a jerk just because she couldn't reveal where she got the letter from, but I also knew that she was in the right as being a postwoman meant having to be respectful of certain people's wishes even if it meant angering someone else in the process.

Turning around, Aria was about to leave when she noticed me blocking her way. For a moment, I was expecting her to say something about Kafei but instead she simply reminded me that she needed to get back on schedule due to being delayed and requested that I moved out of her way. I did as she asked and she left the Stock Pot Inn leaving me to deal with a rather distraught Scootaloo who appeared to have lost all desire of working behind the desk. She seemed completely out of it so I walked up to her and at first she didn't pay any attention to me, but when she finally looked in my direction, I didn't get the reaction I was hoping for.

" Oh... Are you looking for Kafei?"

I nodded. " I've heard rumours that you and he are supposed to get married."

" You heard correctly." Scootaloo said, her attitude clearly having been affected by Aria. " I wish that I could be happy about the occasion but I cannot especially since he has gone and disappeared with no traces of him anywhere throughout Clock Town. My mother has been saying Kafei is a scoundrel who abandoned me so that he would marry my best friend but I can't believe that he would do that."

" Your mother said that?"

Scootaloo nodded. " I know my mother means well but I do wish she could understand my perspective." She then sighed before looking up at a clock on the wall. " It's a good thing that my grandmother received her lunch on time though she is bound to complain about it as usual. You would think someone of her age would appreciate being given a good meal yet she continues to complain every time I serve her." Reaching down beneath the desk, Scootaloo fiddled about for a minute until she pulled up a notepad before placing it down on the desk and looking up something on it. " At least we're not behind schedule."

" Do you want to talk about Kafei?"

" I'm sorry but I cannot talk right now."

" Why not?"

Scootaloo ignored me at first as she continued checking the notepad she pulled out moments ago and proceeded to pull up a book from below the desk that was called "Goron Recipes" before she began combing through it looking for something. She eventually remembered that I was trying to get her to tell me more about Kafei but she sighed and instead decided to show me the book instead. " I must hurry and prepare an appropriate dish for our guest who is coming later this afternoon. We've never had a Goron come here before which makes this all the more difficult since they are picky eaters but hopefully I can satisfy their appetite."

" A Goron?"

" It reminds me of what the Stock Pot Inn used to be a long time ago." Scootaloo answered. " We used to be a cafeteria, but after my father died, the room rentals that were part of our service became our main focus. My grandmother and I insisted that it was a bad idea given how small this place is yet my mother believed we could make more money by housing people who come from out of town with appropriate accommodations especially during the Carnival of Time. We're just a small inn with only two rooms, but that doesn't stop people from coming here to bask in the celebrations that occur at this time of the year."

" It must be hard for you."

" It proves to be a struggle."

" You seem to have a lot of people here right now."

Scootaloo nodded. " Have you seen the performers walking up and down the stairs to the second floor? The second floor bunk room guests are very spirited at night with songs and dancing but they don't know whether they will be headlining the carnival due to not getting any news about it from Monsieur Aroma. Ever since they arrived a few days ago, they have been practicing non-stop though it can get pretty hectic. Their leader, Gorman, left a few hours ago to confirm his troupe would be performing but he hasn't come back yet. The customer who will be coming here later this afternoon will be staying next door to then, so I hope it will be all right."

It was obvious that she was getting ready to welcome the Goron who was supposedly coming but then Princess Twilight began pulling on my ear to get my attention. At first, I waved my hand to make her stop it but Her Highness continued doing it until she finally got me to notice. I looked at her with a cold expression before she told me I needed to go outside and change into a Goron. I walked outside as she suggested and told her I didn't know what she was saying but she told me she had figured out the meaning behind Adagio's words. That piqued my interests and what she said was certainly surprising.

" You want me to pretend to be the guest?" I said as I took off Kafei's mask and put it away behind my back.

" Yes." Twilight answered.

" Isn't that illegal or something?"

" I noticed that not once did Scootaloo mention anything about what this Goron supposedly looks like."

" Maybe she forgot their appearance?"

" If she did then this could prove to be quite advantageous." Twilight answered. " I know it sounds horrible to take something that was meant for someone else but this is something you must do as it might make Scootaloo feel more inclined to explain more about the missing Kafei."

" I know we need to help her but does it have to be done in such a manner?"

Princess Twilight nodded slowly. " I agree that this isn't appropriate but we don't really have much of a choice in the matter, Sunset. Besides, we only have to do this once which means when we reset time after helping out Scootaloo, the rightful guest will get their room."

" You really think we can do this in one try?"

" After everything we've been through so far, I think helping out someone with their love life should be simple enough."

Knowing that I didn't really have any other alternative, I took out the Goron Mask from behind my back, made sure no else was looking--I knew it didn't matter in general since no one watching would remember but it was the principle of the thing--and placed it on my face. I immediately began stumbling about as the magic within the mask began taking effect and my body shimmered from human to Goron. I made sure not to stumble too far in case I accidentally collided with anything and after a while, I became Darmani once again. It felt weird at first as it had been a while since I last used this body so I needed a few moments to get used to having a bulky form again.

Once I felt comfortable with my Goron body, I went back inside and approached the desk. " Hello there."

" Oh! A Goron!" Scootaloo exclaimed. " Um... Welcome to the Stock Pot Inn. Um... Did you have a reservation?"

I nodded. " I made sure to book ahead of time."

" You do have a reservation?" Scootaloo asked. I was about to nod a second time when she looked down at her notepad and began reading it. " Let me see here... Ah-ha! Here you are at the bottom of the registration list under the name of Mrs. Sunset. That's good! For a moment there, I thought that we were fully booked up but you are the one Goron we've been expecting for some time now. I'm sorry that things don't look their best but it's been pretty chaotic lately what with the town being empty and all."

I pretended to not know what was happening. " I was wondering why the town was so quiet. Where I'm from, I learned from my Brothers that Clock Town was always lively at this time of the year and I was curious to find out for myself what the hub-bub was all about. I feel disappointed that it wasn't to my liking but I suppose you have reasons."

" Um, yes of course."

" You were expecting me?"

" That is correct." Scootaloo answered. " I had you written down for an afternoon arrival though I am surprised that you came here much sooner than expected. I hope that you will appreciate the Goron delicacy that I am preparing even though I've never made food like it before. Anyway, despite not being impressed with the town, I can assure you things should get better before everyone celebrates the beginning of the Carnival of Time."

" It sounds nice."

Reaching down below the desk again, Scootaloo produced a key and dropped it into my hand. " Oh yes. The Carnival of Time is the biggest celebration of our traditional ways and we go all out to make sure each one is better than the one before it." She then pointed towards the stairs before pointing at the key. " Your room is our "Knife Chamber" up on the second floor but don't take the name literally. It's just a fancy name my mother came up with as a means of making it sound more impressive than what it really is. By the way, have you been to the Clock Tower plaza yet?"

Even though I had done so in a previous cycle, I shook my head and pretended that I hadn't. " I just got here so I haven't had time to see much of this town."

" Then I suggest you pay a visit during your time here."

" Is it important?"

Scootaloo nodded. " They are currently putting together what has become a tradition for the carnival, a tower that connects to the Clock Tower that people will cross when the tower opens on the eve of the carnival in two days so they can wish for a successful year to come. However, with all of the problems that have been going on lately, I don't know if it will be finished on time but Mrs. Mutoh is insistent that she and her crew can get it done. It should be a wonderful sight regardless. Anyway, feel free to relax, Mrs. Sunset, and be sure to explore as much as you like. So long as you have your key, you'll always have access to the inn even at night."

Thanking her for the advice in addition to the key, I told her that I would take her up on her offer and explore the town. In truth, I was going to go outside long enough to change back to a human and then talk to her again while wearing Kafei's mask. Opening the door and stepping outside, I checked once again to make sure no one could see me, and when I felt safe enough, I grabbed my face, pulled off the Goron Mask, and flipped back my hair. Good thing I changed back as at that moment, another Goron entered East Clock Town from the entrance next to the inn though I was shocked at who they looked like.

This Goron looked exactly like me. In fact, they were literally the Goron version of myself but with some obvious differences. She wore a red bowtie on her neck though it did clash a little with the blue bra that covered up her breasts, but it was her blue hat that was her best feature. I couldn't believe that there was a Goron me in this world. I had always imagined that a human version of me existed in the world I called home yet I never expected anything like this. She then noticed me staring at her and I feared she would accuse me of being her twin or something but instead she waved much to my surprise.

" The city is so busy it's hard to find one's way-goro..."

" Um... Hello?" I said, confused at seeing this Goron look-alike.

" I would love to talk to you but I need to go into the Stock Pot Inn and confirm my reservation-goro."

The Goron me waddled forward and went inside though I just stood there and felt sick to my stomach. This was the Goron who had the reservation under "Mrs. Sunset", the one I had taken in my bid to help out Scootaloo with her problem. She looked like an absolute angel despite having some odd accessories and I had gone and taken what was rightfully hers and she wasn't even aware of it. I knew I couldn't continue on with my own business without knowing what Scootaloo was going to say to the Goron me so I went inside to find she was standing by the front desk.

" Oh! Another Goron!" Scootaloo exclaimed.

" Hello there!" The Goron me said. " If I may be so bold to say, but this place is falling apart. The floor looks like you could pull it up-goro..."

" Um... I am sorry you feel that way."

" Please do not take it the wrong way or anything."

" Not at all." Scootaloo said. " We have been meaning to renovate the inn for some time now."

" I am actually glad that I decided to make this trip."

" Are you from the mountains?"

" It took me several days to make my way here to Clock Town." The Goron me answered. " I would have gotten here sooner but I wanted to partake in looking at the beautiful scenery that exists in the field. But, I am here now so I can finally relax after doing so much walking around lately. I should have a reservation-goro. The name is Sunset-goro. I made it a few days ago as a means of giving you a heads-up of my arrival-goro. Don't you have it-goro?"

" Mrs. Sunset-goro?"

" That is correct."

" Um... I'm sorry but didn't I confirm you had a reservation just a few minutes ago?"

Sunset-goro--the name I would refer to her as from now on--scratched her head and looked confused. " I just arrived in town a few minutes ago-goro."

" My mother is always telling me to remember our customer's faces, but I tend to forget them." Scootaloo said. " It's a nasty habit of mine that has clearly gotten me into plenty of trouble but it's difficult especially at around this time of the year." She looked at her notepad again and sadly shook her head much to the dismay of Sunset-goro. " I'm sorry but I don't have a reservation under that name. There is one close to that but they checked in a few minutes before you did."

" Really-goro?"

" I'm sorry to disappoint you."

" I could have sworn that I made a reservation before leaving home-goro."

" I do wish that I could give you a room but we're fully booked until the Carnival of Time has concluded."

" So you really don't have a room-goro?"

Scootaloo shook her head. " I'm sorry."

Sunset-goro then appeared to be optimistic about the whole thing. " I came all this way to see the carnival and I'm not about to go back home empty-handed-goro. Well, the weather is nice outside so I'll set up a small camp and stay out there-goro. I know it's not convenient for me but I can practically sleep anywhere so it's no big deal." Turning around, she was about to leave when she noticed me standing there. " Excuse me but you remind me a lot of myself-goro. It must be that we share the same sense when it comes to our hairstyles-goro."

I showed sincere compassion as well as inner guilt over taking her reservation. " Sorry you didn't get a room."

" It's a hard world to live in-goro."

" Tell me about it."

" Tonight will be a plesant night so I'll have no problem sleeping-goro." Sunset-goro said. " It's just that tomorrow is going to rain and we Gorons aren't very comfortable when it comes to water-goro. It may come as a surprise to you but I can sense changes in the weather, something most people cannot feel-goro. Luckily, I happen to know a fellow Goron who works selling our people's pride and joy, the Powder Keg, in the west part of town. I'm sure he would be willing to give me some shelter before it rains tomorrow-goro. Anyway, I'm going outside so if you ever want to talk to me, you know where to find me-goro."

As she opened the door and walked outside of the inn, I couldn't help but feel sorry for her. Sunset-goro was an innocent person who came here for the carnival and I ended up stealing her reservation though it was necessary for me. I felt downright awful for having done something so horrible yet Princess Twilight comforted me and said I had done the right thing because in the end, helping out Scootaloo also meant helping out several other people in the process. The guilt over my actions towards Sunset-goro was sure to haunt my mind so I need to take my mind off of it by focusing on the objective at hand.

Noticing that I was still there, Scootaloo called out to me. " Excuse me, but are you looking for a room as well?"

" Don't you recognize me?"

" I did see someone who wore a similar outfit to you a while ago, yet they were wearing a mask that resembled Kafei." Scootaloo answered. " I'm sorry that I don't recognize you but perhaps you would be inclined to listen to my sad tale?"

I felt a huge urge to slap my forehead. How could she not have recognized me from before while wearing Kafei's Mask!? It's not like there were other people running around town wearing a green tunic and pants! No wonder Scootaloo had trouble remembering who people looked like and she was supposed to be the one who checked people in? Whoever gave her this job didn't really think too hard on it especially since she obviously felt conflicted about this Kafei person. Even though she was clearly not fit to be doing this kind of thing, I chose to let it slide since she was under a lot of stress. Besides, I was more interested in what she had to say.

I nodded. " Sure, I'll lend you my ear."

Hearing that made Scootaloo slightly happier. " Thank you very much. I've been working here for quite some time ever since my father died, but a long time ago I met the most wonderful man I had ever seen in my life. We were both young children back then but we formed a special bond that even now continues to remain strong. That bond started off as a friendship but soon blossomed into love until it reached a point where we decided to get married. Our respective families were surprised at the announcement and believed we were doing it too quickly yet Kafei and I knew that this was what we wanted to do. Everything was going to be perfect for the pair of us."

" Then what happened?"

" Kafei... He disappeared about a month ago and he hasn't been seen since."

" That's terrible!"

" It has devastated me emotionally."

" What have his parents said about it?"

Scootaloo sighed. " Mayor Dotour hasn't been able to do anything because she has been stuck in a meeting between the town militia and the carnival committee. One side wishes for the carnival to continue while the other insists that everyone flee town before it's too late. Neither side has budged and so Mayor Dotour is forced to listen to their eternal arguing until a peaceful solution can be found. As for Monsieur Aroma, Kafei's father, he hasn't done anything either due to having to cancel a number of performances for the carnival. My own mother has accused them of not caring enough to look for him and has been very vocal against Kafei."

" Is there anything I can do?"

" I'm sorry but no."

" Why not?"

" I'm sorry but I really must be getting back to work." Scootaloo answered. She then started to walk towards the back rooms of the inn so I quickly took out Kafei's Mask and placed it on my face before addressing her again. This time, she reacted properly in that it took her by surprise. " Oh! You're also looking for Kafei? Hold on a second... You're the one I was just talking to a moment ago, correct? How could I have not noticed this sooner? I am such a fool!" Bowing her head several times, Scootaloo looked rather pathetic so I waved my hand to make her stop and she did. " That mask was made for him a long time ago so how did you come across it?"

" Monsieur Aroma hired me to look for him."

" He made that mask for Kafei a long time ago so it makes sense that he asked you."

" I'm here to help!"

Shifting her eyes back and forth, Scootaloo looked like she didn't want anyone else to know what was going on. " I have a request! Kafei... I have a clue... that will help you find him, but you must come alone. I know that sounds strange but I cannot let my mother find out because of how she feels about him. Tonight at 11:30pm, please come to our kitchen but please know that the inn closes at 8:00pm. Unfortunately, you weren't able to get a room due to a Goron having claimed the only one we had a short while ago. However, if you were to use the side entrance on the upper level my mother seems to forget exists, you could enter the inn that way. We'll talk then..."

As Scootaloo walked off to continue with her tasks, I was surprised to learn that there was another entrance to the inn. Of course, it didn't really matter since I had a key that gave me access at any time so I wasn't bothered by what she said about the inn closing up for the night. Now things were beginning to make sense though there was still plenty of missing pieces to the puzzle that needed to be filled up. Scootaloo wanted me to come back later and while I was fine with that, what was I supposed to do until then? I had done the main objectives of my adventure so what else was there other than the final showdown?

Chapter 67: Kafei

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
August 7, 2017
Chapter 67: Kafei.

While I was no stranger to love--I had a love life once though it was one-sided and Princess Twilight had one of her own--the situation with Scootaloo was different from what I had experienced or imagined. I was expecting it to be simple, reunite her with her true love while collecting a few masks, yet it was already proving itself to be monumental. Kafei, the one she loved was nowhere to be found and all she had for a lead was a letter the postwoman delivered, and who refused to explain where the letter originated from. It wasn't like Scootaloo could go around Clock Town, knocking on each door, and ask if the occupants inside had written it.

Not even I could do that as I was still a little in the dark regarding this whole matter. I suspected straight away that Kafei was still in town as his letter wouldn't have been picked up by the postwoman--she most likely stuck to delivering for Clock Town and nowhere else--so the big question was where could he be. The only clue I personally had regarding his appearance was his mask, given to me by Monsieur Aroma, yet it wasn't an actual likeness but rather a rough caricature of him. Searching around for Kafei would therefore prove pointless due to not knowing exactly what he looked like.

There was another big question, and that was why was he hiding from Scootaloo in the first place? Why not confront her in person and explain things? Granted, that would make his whole disappearing act a moot point if he had gone to her but it still didn't explain why he went and did it knowing how it would affect Scootaloo. The more I thought about it, the more it made me realize that this was not your typical romance story. The best way to truly figure things out was to meet with Kafei himself to get his side of things but without knowing where he was and what he looked like, finding him was pretty much impossible.

Scootaloo wanted me to meet her later on close to midnight in order to explain things further so that gave me about six hours to do some running around before meeting her to continue this plotline. I needed my sword upgraded and that would take a couple of days since the Mountain Smithies needed an entire day just for one re-forging session. To be honest, I didn't really need to get it re-forged as I already had the Great Fairy's Sword and it was more powerful than any other blade in Termina. Getting this other sword was merely a means of having perfection but not really necessary.

Even if I were to go to Snowhead for that, I was still left with too much free time before having to meet Scootaloo. A part of me wanted to pay Aria Blaze, the postwoman, a visit as she was clearly hiding something when she delivered the letter but because she was always running around on her delivery run, I had no idea when she would stop for a while before going back out on the job. I wished I had taken some liberty with regards to knowing what certain people were doing outside of their usual routine. I could have saved myself from getting a headache if I knew what they did.

As I walked outside of the Stock Pot Inn, I noticed Sunset-goro was sound asleep next to the path that linked back to South Clock Town. While her snoring proved to be slightly distracting, she looked rather content despite she was sleeping outside no thanks to me taking her reservation. I still felt bad for doing that to her but it was a necessary means as Adagio insisted on me getting what turned out to be a key that would let me enter the inn at any time after it closed for the evening. I considered waking Sunset-goro up just to make sure she was okay but opted not to out of guilt for having wronged her.

Walking back into South Clock Town, I looked up at the Clock Tower and dread began to fill my heart along with a bit of irony. I was now at the final stage of the journey having gone through so much just to reach this point. The Four Giants had been freed from their imprisonment and were ready to appear upon being called to put an end to Starlight Glimmer's plan to destroy everything, yet she herself was waiting for me, and I knew I couldn't allow her to prevent me from calling the Giants. Saving this world meant everything would go back to normal and my life would be normal as well... or as normal as it could be given the magic problem.

Yet, I couldn't shake the feeling that something was going to happen upon calling the Giants using the song Principal Celestia taught me. It had been something I initially considered during an earlier stage of this journey yet I ignored it believing it nothing more than stress caused by having so much expectation thrust upon my shoulders. Now, at this stage, I felt what I once ignored had proven a hasty decision on my part. If the journey would indeed continue on after stopping the moon from falling, I would have no choice but to go through with it as choosing not to meant the world I called home and Equestria remaining unsafe.

" Thinking about Starlight?" Twilight asked as she flopped onto my head.

I nodded. " Yeah. I can't believe we're almost at the end of this adventure."

" Feeling nervous about it?"

I shook my head and then nodded. " A little bit but I shouldn't be considering I've done this before." I then sighed before looking at the ground. " I'm afraid that something else will happen upon calling the Four Giants, forcing me to do something even harder than everything else so far, and making me feel miserable. I ignored such feelings thinking I was giving myself way too much stress but now I can't help but feel there is more to come."

Princess Twilight rubbed her chin. " I doubt it could be Ganondorf's doing because he has been following some unseen rules this whole time."

" What do you mean?"

" If he had the power to, he would have killed you back when you first started." Twilight answered. " I think it's because that he isn't meant to be a part of this world, he's forced to rely on more indiscreet means of intimidation and bringing us to places beyond this world in order to deal with us on a more personal level. Even with all of that power, there are some things that are beyond even his reach though I wouldn't be surprised if he were able to bypass his own limits. I don't think we have to worry about him throwing you a plot twist or something along those lines so we should instead worry about what else Starlight has up her sleeve."

" I've been meaning to ask you something about her."

" What is it?"

" I know I've discussed her with you before during an earlier stage of this adventure, but I was wondering if you could go into more detail." I answered. " I know she almost brought all of Equestria to its knees out of jealousy but you didn't explain it in much detail when you came through the portal after the Friendship Games had concluded the week before and filled us in on events. What I'm trying to say is what did she really do and how did you feel about giving her a second chance like you gave to me?"

" You want to know if you can talk to her?"

I nodded. " Maybe I can stop her without needing the Giants."

" She might be too far gone."

" I have to at least try, right?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You may be a special kind of student to me, Sunset, but you've definitely taken my teachings to heart and not just here. You did that when you told me about what happened when both worlds were almost destroyed when Twilight Sparkle became Midnight Sparkle. You becoming Daydream Shimmer to help her see the truth before she destroyed herself was the most wonderful thing I had ever heard. Even Princess Celestia would be proud of your accomplishment." She immediately stopped short knowing how I still had issues regarding going back to Equestria so she changed the subject to Starlight. " This might take a few minutes."

I walked over to a nearby bench and sat down. " I've got some time to kill."

" Starlight Glimmer is perhaps the most powerful unicorn I've ever met."

" More powerful when you used to be one?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Not even I could do the things she could before I became a princess. She dedicated her life to magic when her one and only friend left because he received his cutie mark and went on to attend Princess Celestia's School for Gifted Unicorns. She could have made more friends but instead believed cutie marks ruined ponies lives and was dedicated on removing them from flanks."

" It's called Marxism or Communism."

" When my friends and I found out what she was really doing, we had to stop before she could spread her philosophy to other parts of Equestria." Twilight said. " In her mind, her way of thinking was the future for all ponies and nothing else mattered. She even interrupted one of my friendship speeches, something that had never happened before until she snapped after being exposed. I learned she had been spying on me in particular as a means of learning all she could about my life before making her move, but had I learned ahead of time, I could have talked to her and not go through several alternate timelines."

" What were those like?"

" Each one was worse than the last though I think some of the alternate futures were ridiculous."

" Like?"

" One where two shyster ponies was worse than one under Changeling rule."

" Wow..."

Princess Twilight coughed. " Starlight made it so that she would always be there in the past ready to thwart my efforts every time I came back in my bid to stop her from stopping the Sonic Rainboom that Rainbow Dash created. I didn't think such an advanced spell was possible yet she clearly showed it could be done and this was especially true when she took a spell created by Star Swirl the Bearded long ago and modified it to suit her own needs. In that one moment, I felt completely inadequate. I felt my magic amounted to nothing while hers was beyond anything I could have done."

" And when she reformed?"

" It took some mighty convincing to change her."

" You said she showed you her origins."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes but I wished she had gone into more detail but I didn't pressure her into explaining otherwise that would have had a negative setback prompting her to want to continue our pointless grudge until one of us collapsed. While I should have been more lenient with Starlight given she almost destroyed time itself, I believed she just needed the right pony to guide her along and help her restart her life over again. Fortunately, no one knew what she did as otherwise Canterlot's dungeon would have had a permanent resident or she might have been exiled."

" She never suffered like I did?"

" No."

That was the first time I heard about that though why didn't Princess Twilight mention it before until now? When she and I talked about what had been going on in Equestria after she had spoken with Twilight Sparkle, I brought up whether Starlight was punished for her actions yet Her Highness refused to say anything and instead changed the subject to the magic problem I told her about. Had she tried to protect me from the truth knowing it would have made me furious beyond all reasoning or had she done so to protect Starlight and not have her get exiled from Equestria for all eternity?

For a moment, I felt somewhat betrayed over how my mentor kept such information from me, but it quickly passed as I would have done the same thing had I been in her shoes and protected Starlight from being prosecuted. Still, I had to endure isolation for weeks in addition to being viewed with scorn while Starlight practically got away with murder. That alone was enough for me to want to consider lashing out at Princess Twilight but I was better than that. On the other hand, I could now better appreciate what Starlight had been through. We had much in common though our respective origins were different.

I then stood up upon noticing someone standing outside of the Clock Tower and it was someone whom I hadn't seen in a very long time. Looking in all directions as though she were trying to find something or someone, Sonata Dusk had exited the tower, something I didn't think she would do. She was the one who had tasked me to get back Majora's Mask, the mask Starlight stole from her resulting in Termina becoming what it was, and while I was willing to help her out, I had my suspicions. Her smile was like a mask, a means of hiding her true face, and pretending that everything was fine. Deep down, I knew she wanted to see me.

Before heading over to Sonata, I told Princess Twilight to finish telling her story before we confronted Starlight and she nodded without saying a word. With that, I walked up to she who cured me from being a Deku Scrub--it was that incentive that got me to help retrieve Majora's Mask for her though somewhat against my will--who turned to look at me. I made sure not to come off as rude as she hadn't really done anything wrong. " I didn't expect you would come outside of the Clock Tower."

" I felt compelled to do at this precise moment." Sonata said.

" In any case, it has been a long time since I last saw you."

Sonata was confused. " But, I just saw you earlier in the day." Crap! I forgot that she too was affected whenever I reset time back to the beginning. Hopefully, she wouldn't view my words with suspicion otherwise things were about to get a whole lot worse for me. " Perhaps in your mind, time holds no meaning for you, and you are free to accomplish much without ever thinking of how it flows freely and unhinged."

Now I remembered why I hadn't spoken to her since she cured me of being a Deku Scrub. Sonata had a bit of a philosophical approach with her words though this belied a hidden demon that would be unleashed whenever she got upset. It was a stark contrast compared to her true personality, one where she was ditzy and not inherently evil. I mean, she was just like the other Dazzlings in that she craved attention, but could appreciate life and not destroy it. Of the three, I saw her as being the most capable of reforming, but no one had seen any of them since fleeing after the Battle of the Bands. A shame really as Sonata was perhaps the one Dazzling who was somewhat likeable.

" Well, don't let me stop you from doing what you were doing."

" Ah, but you did because I was looking for you."

" Why?" I asked. " Like you said, you saw me earlier."

Sonata leaned forward prompting me to step back. " I was wondering if you were able to get my precious mask back from the imp who stole it from me. I know it hasn't been that long since you began my little errand but I know you are capable of performing miracles."

If only she knew the truth then this conversation wouldn't have been quite so awkward. " I... I'm still trying to get it back for you."

" You still haven't done it yet!?" Sonata exclaimed, her face becoming angry. " I told you what might happen were the mask not returned to me!" Her angry demeanour changed back to a smile and I could relax once again. " I know you are doing the best you can given the situation but I must have it back before I leave this town within the next 62 hours. It is vitally important that you succeed otherwise the world could be destroyed."

" I get it already!"

Sonata then raised her hand. " I am sensing something different about you, my young friend." She closed her eyes and took a sniff, prompting me to back away even more as I thought that her actions were beyond creepy and went into downright weird. " It seems that you have been collecting all sorts of masks and helping those who have troubles. It shows you are considerate to those who cannot help themselves. If you would like, why not show me a few masks? I can tell you the significance behind them. When it comes to masks, there is nothing I do not know."

I was a little skeptical at first but ultimately chose to show her a few. The first one I chose to show Sonata was Kafei's Mask since I had used it just recently--I was also curious as to its origins. Rather than simply putting it on--I was thinking of doing that--I simply handed the mask over to her and she began looking at it. " This one doesn't really seem all that much given the design but I got it through a case of mistaken identity."

" That's Kafei's Mask, isn't it?"

" How did you know its name?"

Sonata laughed. " Like I said, there is nothing I do not know when it comes to masks. I've been collecting and selling them for over twenty years so I have seen plenty of them reach my hands as well as fall into the hands of others." Tapping the mask, she then sniffed the purple hair--I was seriously freaked out by that--before she handed it back to me. " The worry of a concerned father is expressed quite well even if others cannot see such truth with their own eyes. Do you have any other masks you want me to look at?"

Placing Kafei's Mask behind my back, I then randomly took out the Mask of Scents. " I won't be able to show you each one as I do have work to do."

Taking the Mask of Scents into her hands, Sonata nodded before laughing again. " While you may feel immense pressure to get back my precious mask before time runs out, know that time is not eternal. Please make the most of your time as there is more to it then even you realize. I believe in this and in you." She then focused her attention on the mask I gave her and blew on it before tapping its round snout. " This is the Mask of Scents, isn't it? You've done well to get this mask. Looking at its condition, I can tell that its previous owner was neat and tidy. There is also a strong scent of wood, a sign you acquired this from one of the Deku."

I nodded as she handed it back. " How about this one?" I put the Mask of Scents away and randomly took out the Mask of Truth. " This is one I've used before but I'm still curious as to what you have to say about its origins."

Sonata took the mask and smiled. " That is the Mask of Truth, isn't it?" I nodded and she tapped the eyeball in the center. " You have a frightful mask and one that resulted in another being cursed, but being able to see into people's hearts and minds seems useful. The same can be said about small animals as they often have much to say. Yes, this mask is one of the finest you have shown me so far, my young friend."

She handed the Mask of Truth back and I put it away behind my back before taking out two masks at random. " These are the last two that I'm going to show you. I know I still have plenty of time and all but I do need to focus on figuring out where to find someone."

" Then let these be the last two."

I handed both of them over to Sonata. " Well?"

" This first one is the Troupe Leader's Mask, yes?"

" It has a sad story behind it."

Sonata nodded. " It is a fine mask especially the realistic tears. It is filled with the feelings of tenderness left behind in the back of one's heart. Perhaps you should consider speaking to the one who gave it to you after helping them deal with their troubles whilst wearing it. It could lead you to a path not previously seen. But, I wouldn't try it right now as the one in question is too riled up and is impossible to speak to unless you want to be ridiculed. Perhaps talking to him in the morning when he's feeling less irritable is in order."

" And the other?"

" This is the Goron Mask." Sonata answered. " So... You were able to heal the soul of the Goron who was loved by her people. It is unfortunate that she died in such a tragic manner but then destiny had determined that this was meant to be for her. I can sense this mask contains her spirit and unflinching desire towards keeping her people safe from the cold which blows in from an ancient temple." Handing both masks back to me, she waved her hand signalling that she had seen enough. " I am so proud that you have collected so many masks by helping so many people, but perhaps you have a reason for helping them?"

" I seek the ultimate mask."

Upon hearing me say that, Sonata's jaw dropped and her eyes bugged out. I was certain that she had never heard of the "ultimate mask" before and was going to grill me endlessly until I caved in and told her everything I knew, but then she surprised me by taking out a small book that hung from a necklace around her neck, whipped it open, and began combing through it before stopping at a certain page. From my perspective, it looked like she was beginning to lose it but in truth she was searching for information. Once she had found what she was looking for, she closed her book, and looked at me with a curious expression.

" Many have sought to claim that mask for themselves yet none have ever succeeded."

" Do you know where it is?"

Sadly, Sonata shook her head. " It is a mask that I once sought to add to my collection but it proved far too elusive and so I ultimately ended up abandoning my search. All I know is that the mask is hidden away destined for someone who can appease the mask spirits."

I looked at her, eye raised to say I didn't believe her. " Mask spirits?"

Sonata nodded. " They are spirits who are dedicated to masks and ones that I allow to guide me on my own journey to collect as many precious masks as possible. Perhaps you will meet them one day and appease their nature? But, surely you should be able to do something. Believe in your strengths... Believe... You'll do fine. Surely you will be able to recover my precious Majora's Mask. I will always be here at the Clock Tower waiting for you."

With that, she turned around, thrust open the doors at the base of the tower, and walked inside before closing the doors leaving me to ponder over what she had said. I was honestly surprised at how much she knew about each mask I showed her though I wouldn't be surprised if she knew about ones I hadn't shown her let alone found. Despite her calm demeanour, I wasn't about to give Sonata the benefit of the doubt. She could easily become merciless at the drop of a pin and that alone was enough to make me worried about what she was capable of doing. If I failed in my mission to give Majora's Mask back to her... I shuddered at such a horrible thought.

Looking up at the sky, I saw that the sun was beginning to set and that meant I only had a few hours more before I was to speak with Scootaloo. While talking to Sonata didn't waste too much of my time, my schedule had gotten much tighter since I also had to make a visit to Snowhead in order to upgrade my Kokiri Sword twice by the Mountain Smithies. It shouldn't take that long for me to go there and drop off my sword but then there was something I seemed to recall about their place of business. Yes... Their furnace had been frozen over because of how cold it was up in the mountains so I needed to melt the ice to get them working.

That was my plan... Paying the Mountain Smithies a visit and getting back to Clock Town to see Scootaloo. Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I was so glad Flash Sentry taught me his song that allowed me to warp around to the various Owl Statues he had placed throughout Termina. If not for those, I would have to get to these respective locations the hard way thus preventing me from doing certain things all because time wouldn't have been on my side. As I raised my instrument to my lips, I suddenly noticed a familiar person running by before stopping at a mailbox.

Before I had a chance to talk to her, Aria immediately took off and ran into West Clock Town by using the connection on the southern end of Clock Town. While I wanted to go to Snowhead, I was compelled to follow her as she knew something about the letter she delivered to Scootaloo earlier. Running after her, she proved to be very elusive in that she had disappeared upon my entering the west side of town--it made sense as she knew her way around better than anyone--and I felt dejected knowing I lost her almost straight away. Sighing, I walked along the street and thought about where she could have gone.

Aside from a single mailbox along the way, there wasn't really anything of interest that someone like Aria would stop at. As I learned from listening to her conversation earlier with Scootaloo at the Stock Pot Inn, Aria was a stickler for sticking to her schedule and hated it when she was forced to slow down for anything. While I admired such dedication, it also proved troublesome. Frustration built up in me and I unleashed it by pounding the ground with both fists prompting Princess Twilight to stop me from doing anything else. She then flew off ahead for a few seconds before quickly coming back, grabbing my nose, and trying to pull me towards something.

" Let go of my nose!"

" Sorry, Sunset, but I wanted to show you something." Twilight said.

" Did it have to involve you pulling on my nose?"

Blushing, Princess Twilight let go of my nose. " I didn't mean to do that but I wanted to show you that the post office is right in front of us." She pointed towards a door that featured a giant letter above it indicating that it was indeed the post office. " While Aria is certainly not being subtle about it, at least we know where to find her now. After all, we lost her when you attempted to chase after her."

" What makes you think she is inside?"

" I don't."

" So this boils down to guessing?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I know you probably wanted to go and get your sword upgraded given that I practically kept on nagging at you to go and get it but I think dealing with the problem involving Scootaloo is a bit more important."

" Then we might as well check to see if Aria came back or has gone on another delivery."

" I can't imagine her working around the clock."

" Do they even have ponies like that back in Equestria?"

Princess Twilight nodded again. " They really love working to the point where they give up on sleep just to meet their quota. To be honest, they really should consider taking a vacation before they end up giving themselves a nasty ulcer or something."

Walking up to the post office's door, I gently tapped on it using the back of my hand and someone on the other side told me not to disturb them. I tapped the door a second time and got the same message only this time it was much more gruff though I knew it was Aria who was calling out. Checking a sign that was hanging on the door, it described when the post office was open and closed. Aria certainly had a busy schedule as according to the sign, she only had a two hour break before having to go out again and deliver more mail. Did she honestly deliver out in the middle of the night!? Surely she had to have some sleep otherwise exhaustion would have claimed her by now.

Opening the door--it was unlocked as she was inside--and entering the post office, I was surprised at how neat and tidy everything was. No doubt Aria was dead-set on making the post office run efficiently at maximum potential though I did notice that there was no one else around other than her. It must have been hard for her being the only postwoman around but I doubted she complained as she clearly enjoyed running around and delivering letters. The bed, table, and chairs located ahead revealed that she practically lived in here though she herself appeared to be concentrating on something--she hadn't noticed me come in.

Within a small nook was a Postman's Hat and a satchel yet something about the former screamed out at me. Was it possible that I could obtain Aria's hat as some kind of mask to add to my collection? The thought of going around to mailboxes wearing that hat wasn't high on my list of things I wanted to do before ending things but I was a little bit curious. My eyes spotted a pair of letters on a nearby shelf that piqued my curiosity. One of them said: "Last night, I wrote a letter to myself and deposited it in a post box... Sure it sounds weird writing a letter to myself but I really needed it. I retrieved it earlier and tomorrow morning, I shall deliver that letter!"

The other letter said: "To Myself. You have been doing a great job delivering the mail." According to the context of both letters, Aria enjoyed praising herself for what she did around town but she also sounded lonely and perhaps a bit desperate. Looking at her sitting on her bed in sheer concentration, I just couldn't picture her wanting to deliver letters so badly, she was willing to mail one to herself just to get some kind of pleasure out of it. Was this a side-effect brought on by all that had been happening around Termina? Not only did I want to inquire about who sent Scootaloo's letter but also Aria's mental state.

I walked up to her and coughed. " Um..."

Hearing me caused Aria to jump slightly in the air before landing on her back. " Whaa!" She got up and looked at me for a brief moment before resuming what she was doing leading me to think she was ignoring me on purpose. " Four... five... six..." She stopped, looked at me again, blinked twice, and jumped again, landing on her back. " You startled me! I didn't even hear you come into the post office!" Getting up, she wagged her finger at me before sitting back down. " Please don't interrupt my training! This is the only time during the course of the day where I can relax before going back out to deliver my letters."

" What are you doing?"

" Training my mind."

" By counting?"

Aria scolded me. " Of course! In my mind, I am running for exactly ten seconds without looking at a clock. If I can succeed in doing this, then I will know that I am the best postwoman this town has ever known, but I won't achieve my goal if you keep on talking to me. You see, I was in the middle of mental training when you popped out of nowhere and broke my concentration. You may make fun of me, but this is quite difficult! Only those who have a sharp mind can count to ten without the need of a clock." She tried counting only to stop suddenly because of my presence. " Why are you even here in the first place?"

" I need to talk to you about a letter."

" All you need to do is follow the rules I wrote down on that scroll on the wall." Aria said. " If you can't figure out what it means then you've got no hope at all. Now, if you don't mind, I must focus my mind and count up to ten." She managed to count up to two when she suddenly recognized who I was. " You're the one I saw at the Stock Pot In earlier when I was there delivering a letter to Anju. Yes, I recognize your attire even though you had a mask on. Come to think of it, that mask looked awfully familiar to me. I remember seeing it in the postmaster's possession when he became the postmaster and I a postwoman."

" Monsieur Aroma gave me the mask."

Aria was shocked. " The postmaster gave it to you!? Then you must be the one he hired to find his son, Kafei." She turned away briefly allowing me enough time to whip out Kafei's Mask and place it on my face before she turned back to see me. " Oh... So you're wearing it now in hopes I would know something about him? Well... I only ever met him a few times when I was but a lowly assistant to the old postman but he seemed like a nice fellow. He did have a strange fascination with an old mask he always carried around though. I thought it was creepy how he held onto it so fondly and he was a grown man no less."

I took the mask off knowing she wouldn't say anything else. " Now... About that letter you gave to Anju." I made sure not to mention Scootaloo by name otherwise Aria would just get confused and I would get nowhere. " She asked you where you got it from but didn't answer her saying that it was a secret."

" It's a secret."

My expression after that response made her quiver. " That wasn't what I wanted you to say. I know you have an obligation to keep the identity of customers and their locations a secret, but this is really important and could be the breakthrough I need to find out where Kafei could have disappeared to." The howl of a wolf somewhere outside informed me that the sun had gone down and nightfall had begun.

Night of the First Day - 60 Hours Remain.

" I know you want to know but it is a secret."

" Please!" I exclaimed. " You have to tell me!"

Aria sighed. " Normally, I don't do this kind of thing as it does go against protocol but I am willing to tell you what I know. In exchange, you must first pass a small test of mine that you already know about seeing as you saw my attempt. In fact, I'll even give you something good if you can count to ten without looking at a clock. Don't think it will be easy as it requires dexterity to be able to count to ten in such a manner so don't feel ashamed about quitting at any time."

" I accept your challenge."

" I will give you a slight advantage though." Aria said. " I will count up to two and from there you must do the rest on your own. Shout out ten when you think you have counted up to it exactly and I'll see how well you did. If you get within a second of ten on both sides, you can have another attempt for free but if you're not within a second below or above ten, you must pay me two rupees to attempt my test again."

I didn't think she would attempt to extort me for a little cash but I wasn't in any position to argue with her. I needed the information she had about the letter as it would help me track down Kafei whilst giving Scootaloo a sigh of relief knowing where it originated from. Standing firmly, I awaited for Aria to begin counting up to two. When she did, I quickly found that she wasn't kidding about how difficult her test really was. My first attempt resulted in absolute failure--my time was something like fifteen seconds--resulting in her laughing and claiming I had no hope at all with a display like that.

Fortunately, I had picked up some rupees along the way so I could pay her to try again but I only had enough for about two more attempts. Handing over two rupees, she counted up to two before handing things over to me, but upon saying ten several moments later, ending the challenge, she revealed my time had gotten even worse--it was twenty-five seconds which was way off the pace. I paid her again and she counted up to two though this time I tried picturing in my mind when it was the right moment to call out ten. My idea kind of worked as when I said ten, Aria told me that my time was now thirteen seconds, better but not good enough.

I paid her the remaining rupees I had and went through the process, but when I shouted out ten this time, she told me that my time was nine seconds. On the plus side, I was slowly getting better at it but on the other hand, it still wasn't good enough. At the very least, my next attempt was free but that meant nothing if I couldn't figure it out. She counted up to two before going quiet before I concentrated and when I called out ten moments later, she told me that I had gotten nine seconds again. She was surprised at how close I had gotten yet I needed to be right on the nose.

Then Aria mentioned something that I wished she had brought up earlier. She said that if I had the ears of a rabbit, I would be able to hear sounds all around me and know when exactly ten seconds had passed, but then she laughed because rabbits, according to her, had been extinct in Termina for several centuries. I had the Bunny Hood in my possession though I only knew it for the ability to make me move faster but I didn't think I would have an increase in hearing. When Aria began counting again, she looked away long enough for me to whip out my Bunny Hood, and put it on where I immediately felt everything had slowed down to a crawl.

Was it because the rabbit was so in tune with nature that it could sense the ebbs and flows of everything that surrounded it? Or was the magic within the mask more powerful than I gave it credit for despite rarely using it? I didn't know what the answer was but what I did know was that when I called out ten, I had counted up to that number as Aria as wanted though it did require me to cheat a little bit though she brought it up to begin with. I quickly took off the Bunny Hood and put it away behind my back just as she turned back to look at me. Her expression was one of surprise knowing I had passed her test.

" Did I do it this time?" I asked, making sure not to look guilty.

Aria was completely beside herself with shock. " Huh!? Ten seconds!? That is amazing! You started off so badly that I thought about telling you to give up but then you quickly got better and now you managed to pull it off. You know, you have reflexes suitable for a postwoman though not as good as me. Perhaps you should consider becoming my assistant and train to become a postwoman. As thanks for showing me something impressive, I give you this." She reached over to the other side of her bed and pulled up a Piece of Heart before handing it over, and upon holding it in my hands, I felt the warm embrace that came from it, and it made me feel strong again."

" Now... About that letter."

" I promised I would tell you and so I shall."

" Where did you get the letter from?"

" I received it from a young boy who lives somewhere near the Laundry Pool." Aria answered. " I don't know what he looked like as he wore a strange fox-like mask that covered his face but he has been seen going to the mailbox at the southern end of town several times according to people. There is a mailbox in the Laundry Pool that he uses but I don't know his exact location given that by the time I get to it, he has disappeared. Along with the letter, there was a note saying not to let anyone else know where the letter came from. In my eyes, I believed it to be a joke but perhaps something else was going on altogether."

" Why hide that fact from Anju though?"

" She looked miserable so I chose not to say anything."

" Well, you did the right thing I suppose."

" A postwoman must only deliver letters." Aria said. " I cannot allow myself to become involved in the affairs of other people. In any case, that is all I have to say about the letter so please do not ask me any questions. While I was impressed with your skill, I can't be like this! I must train even harder than ever if I am to count up to ten without looking at a clock. I will be the best postwoman Clock Town has ever seen and no one shall deny me that title."

It was clear to me at that Aria had gone off the deep end so I thanked her before taking my leave of the Post Office. As I closed the door behind me, I could still hear her shouting on the other side about how she was going to train even harder. Hopefully, she wouldn't become obsessed with it and end up hurting herself. Despite having to go through a rather ridiculous test, it was worth it to learn more about what was going on regarding Scootaloo's love life. Kafei was obviously the key to everything so finding out where he was had become more important than ever before.

" So this kid wearing the mask is who gave Aria the letter?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, and we've actually seen them before though we never paid any attention."

" When did we ever see them?"

" It was back when we first were able to leave Clock Town." Twilight answered. " I recall seeing a boy with blue hair wearing a strange mask walk up to a postbox, depositing something into it, and then leaving again. He didn't seem like he was up to anything and wearing a mask didn't make him weird according to what that Principal Cinch told us when she read those stories about the history of the Carnival of Time."

I slapped my forehead. " I wish I had seen him."

" Even if you did, I doubt he would have talked to you."

" Where do you suppose he is?"

" I don't know."

That didn't give me much hope. " I guess we should go back and see what Scootaloo has to say." I sighed. " Perhaps she will give us the next piece of this puzzle? I honestly thought this was going to be easy given how I was romantically involved with Flash Sentry despite it being one-sided and seeing you go through a similar thing. Instead, it just keeps getting more and more complicated all because the supposed groom disappeared days before the wedding."

" It's frustrating yes but we can't give up."

" I'm not about to."

" In any case, we can't see Scootaloo just yet."

" Why not?"

Pointing to a clock on a nearby wall, Princess Twilight revealed that it was only 7:00pm. " Scootaloo told you to meet her at 11:30pm so we still have four and a half hours to go before then so you could make your way over to Snowhead to upgrade your sword. You will need to get some rupees out from the bank unless you want to quickly rupee grind outside in the field before heading there. I also suggest bringing along a Fire Arrow in order to melt the ice that has frozen the Mountain Smithies' furnace. If I recall correctly, we had to wait until spring returned for them to provide assistance but now you can do things a little quicker now."

" I guess that's true."

" So long as nothing distracts you, you should have more than enough time."

While I wanted to upgrade my sword to its strongest level, I was still hesitant about it given how I had the Great Fairy's Sword to use as a backup, but then if I didn't go and get it re-forged by the Mountain Smithies, Princess Twilight would never stop complaining over how I kept on neglecting it for so long. Personally, I wanted to simply kick back while waiting for the anointed time where I was to speak with Scootaloo, but I supposed I could pay Fancy Pants and Lord Tirek a visit provided Her Highness doesn't freak out when seeing the latter given what she went through when he tried to conquer all of Equestria.

Heading back into South Clock Town, I walked up to the bank and asked Fleur Dis Lee to take out one hundred rupees though she warned me that it would soon be gone before I knew it but to upgrade my sword, I first needed to pay one hundred rupees--I doubted I would get the discount the second time around. With money in my wallet, I thanked Fleur for the service, walked away from the bank, raised the ocarina to my lips, and played the Song of Soaring. In my mind, I focused on the Mountain Village as the Mountain Smithies were located there before wings protruded from my back and wrapped themselves around me before spinning around me several times until I disappeared.

Moments later, I found myself back in Snowhead for the first time since I successfully won the race over at the Goron Racetrack, and immediately I folded my arms as a means of warming myself up. The cold winter of the region could be felt all around and it was clear that I had completely forgotten about it. The last time I was here, the cold didn't really affect me as I had traversed through similar conditions during my previous journey but I never realized how cold it could really get. I didn't have far to go and for good reason as I also forgot that it was colder during nightfall as opposed to the day time.

Without wasting time, I trudged through the snow--it was a lot deeper than I remembered--until I reached the Mountain Smithies. Before going inside, I checked to make sure I had arrows in addition to Magic Power so that I could use a Fire Arrow. To my dismay, there were no arrows in my quiver. I slapped my forehead again knowing that whenever time was reset, I would lose ammunition like arrows forcing me to collect them all over again though my magic was retained. Grumbling to myself, I trudged back into the snow, picking up some snowballs along the way, and smashing them into the ground where they produced arrows that I picked up along with some extra Magic Jars.

Once I felt I had enough, I walked back to the building and went inside where I was immediately caught by surprise when Lord Tirek called out. " Ugo! Ugoh-oh! Ugo!" Despite him wearing the strange mask and wielding a massive hammer, he just wasn't the same person who hounded me during my previous journey."

" Shaddup!" I looked to my right and noticed Fancy Pants had just woken up and was clearly in a foul mood. " Just when I was having a good dream... Oh! Someone actually came all the way out here? I must admit that you have a lot of courage given how cold it is outside. Anyway, welcome to the Mountain Smithy, where we take our time to make a good point." I had already heard this before during a previous cycle yet I found myself having to listen to it all again. " I am Zubora, the owner. Pleased to meet you."

" Ugo-oh! Ugo ugo!"

Fancy Pants snapped at Lord Tirek. " Shaddup over there! That huge fellow is my assistant, Gabora. He's all brawn and about as smart as a Deku Stick. While he does have a major speech impediment, there is no one better when it comes to forging blades though he does it with my precise guidance. Did you come to have your sword sharpened? Unfortunately, we're not doing any business right now. It's because of this abnormal cold snap we've been having." He pointed to the furnace that was beside Lord Tirek and I saw the massive chunk of ice that had frozen it over. " See? Our hearth has been frozen over!"

" I thought it was a furnace." I said.

" Well, that would be another name for hearth, yes."

" Ugoh! Ugo! Ugo-oh!" Lord Tirek said.

" What are you trying to say, Gabora?" Fancy Pants asked.

" Ugo! Ugoh!"

I then interjected knowing what was about to happen next. " If I may interrupt for just a second, I believe I can solve your hearth problem." I took out my Hero's Bow, switched over to the Fire Arrow and began preparing it. " I can help you two get back in business by melting the ice with a single arrow."

" Ugo-oh! Ugoh! Ugo! Ugo!"

Fancy Pants was surprised upon seeing my flaming arrow. " Where did you get that from?"

" I acquired it from the Snowhead Temple." I answered.

" I didn't think anyone was able to access that place given the harsh winds coming from up there."

" That's a whole other story right there."

" Well, in any case, I hope you can help us out otherwise you would have wasted our time." Fancy Pants said. " Gabora here may have the brains of a Deku Stick, but he can be very strong especially when someone causes trouble if you catch my drift. I don't mean to sound horrible or anything but we're at the end of our rope and are desperate to get back to work so hopefully, what you're doing isn't just bravado but actual substance."

Aiming at the chunk of ice--it was large in size that I couldn't miss even if I wanted to--I had to hit it correctly otherwise my Fire Arrow might hit something else resulting in a chain reaction that would set this entire building on fire. Despite being out in the middle of a frozen wasteland, the Mountain Smithies lived in a wooden house and an uncontrollable fire meant them losing everything in mere seconds. Breathing deeply and concentrating as hard as I could, I fired my arrow where it struck the ice, and it melted away, the heat from my arrow warming up the hearth.

" That was harder than I thought."

" Ugoh! Ugo! Ugoh-oh!" Lord Tirek shouted as he swung his hammer around.

" Oh! You've done me a great favor!" Fancy Pants said. " Now, then... This hearth can finally go to work for me! Heh-heh-heh-heh... Thanks. Gabora! We're now back in business so hopefully someone will come in and request their weapon to be made stronger." I then coughed and he looked in my direction before seeing my sword's scabbard. " Oh? A customer as well? My aren't you full of surprises."

" Ugo! Ugoh!"

" Gabora!" Fancy Pants announced. " Get our customer some coffee, quick-like."

" Ugoh!"

Fancy Pants then leaned forward to get a closer look at my sword and through what looked to be goading--he was actually trying to ask me to take out my sword from its scabbard and present it before him--I presented my sword. " Now then, let me take a look at your sword." It took him several seconds of glossing over it before reaching a decision though I knew he was going to work on it as this is what he had done before when I was here last. " Hmmm... All right... To re-forge your sword, it will cost you one hundred rupees. However, since you went and melted the ice that froze our hearth, I'm going to charge you only fifty rupees."

I smiled. " I appreciate you giving me that offer."

" But, should you want your sword re-forged, it won't be ready until sunrise." Fancy Pants said. " Granted, the sun just went down a short time ago so that would mean working relatively quickly to get it done before the sun comes up but I love a good challenge otherwise Gabora and I would have to turn in our hammers. Anyway, you'll have to let us hold onto your sword until then. Keep in mind that after you use your re forged sword one hundred times, it will lose its edge and it'll be back to its original sharpness. I know it sounds bad but this is the best we can do with our skills. So, would you like your sword to be made stronger?"

I nodded before handing over my sword. " Please take care of it."

Fancy Pants nodded. " That is what we do around here. Now, I'm off to work."

" Ugoh!" Lord Tirek said.

" Before you go, I do have a little secret to share with you."

I knew what he was going to say but I went along with it anyway. " What is it?"

" If you bring me some gold dust, I can forge you the strongest of swords." Fancy Pants answered. " It'll never lose its edge. It's the strongest. The strongest... You will definitely feel its power flow through your hands and all monsters will fear your presence upon seeing such a powerful blade."

" Ugo-ugo! Ugo!" Lord Tirek said.

" Quite right, Gabora... For a change."

" Ugo! Ugoh! Ugo! Ugo!"

Fancy Pants turned to face me. " Gabora says that gold dust is the prize for winning the Patriarch's Race that's held by the Gorons every spring. Despite his dense nature, he is actually correct about the Gorons in that they have what you need to make your sword even stronger. What if you tried entering that?" His excitement was then crushed upon realizing there was a fatal flaw with the suggestion. " Unfortunately, with the current cold snap, I doubt spring will be coming back any time soon unless you know how to get your hands on some gold dust somewhere. I did hear rumours that one Goron has a stash of gold dust in the mountains but it's just a rumour."

" Ugoh!"

Thanking the Mountain Smithies, I turned and walked outside and back into the cold once again. Unlike last time, this time I had given them my sword on the first night so now I had the chance to get them to re-forge it for a second time using gold dust. According to Adagio, Darmani, the Goron heroine whose spirit was sealed in the Goron Mask, had a gold dust stash hidden somewhere in her village resulting from her numerous victories in the Patriarch's Race. If I could find and get my hands on some, I could hand it over to the smithies and get myself the second-strongest sword around--it didn't sound that exciting given I already had the strongest sword.

I thought about going back to the Goron Village to find the hidden stash but I decided instead to go back to Clock Town. While I knew it wasn't 11:30pm yet, I didn't want to take any chances in case something went wrong around here and prevented me from getting back to speak with Scootaloo. Besides, my body didn't appreciate being stuck in the cold despite not having problems before but perhaps going to much warmer places had an adverse effect on my body causing me to react to the cold so badly. In any case, I wanted to go where it was warm and not become a frozen popsicle.

A few hours earlier...

" I can't believe it!"

" What's wrong, Skull Kid?"

" That Kokiri girl from the woods that I changed into a Deku Scrub is back to normal." Starlight answered. She stomped her foot several times followed by throwing a temper tantrum where she swung her arms around in a maniacal fashion and finished by picking up several pots and smashing them on the ground. " How in the world did she become normal again? The magic I used should have been permanent! How dare she ruin my wonderful prank!"

" Don't let one setback make you upset." Spike said.

Starlight was clearly beyond reasoning and ignored what he said. " That was one of my best pranks and that girl ruined it! How!? How!? HOW!?" She clutched her head and began shaking out of sheer anger and almost smacked Spike before she eventually calmed down. " Come to think of it, how did she get back that ocarina I stole when you and Tatl spooked that obnoxious horse back in the woods? I know I stole it from her as I even stole her horse but now she has it back again."

Spike shrugged his shoulders. " I don't know how she did, Skull Kid, but she did."

That wasn't what Starlight wanted to hear. " That girl is nothing but a big party pooper for ruining my fun. If I could, I would gladly take care of her right now before she gives me even more of a headache but I must focus on carrying out the ultimate prank." She looked up at the moon and laughed which made Spike very uneasy. " Soon... my ultimate prank will destroy this world and everyone will pay for how they mistreated me. Just because I love playing pranks on them without their knowledge doesn't mean they have the right to scold and push me away. You know... Just thinking about what will happen in a couple of days is making me feel a lot better now."

" Glad to see you're back in a good mood."

" Besides, I doubt that girl is going to be able to do anything to stop me."

Spike didn't sound quite as confident. " Um... Are you sure about that?"

" Of course I am, Tael!" Starlight answered. " You clearly saw that she was no match for me when I transformed her into a lowly Deku Scrub. Sure, she managed to break the curse not to mention my magic, but that's as close as she is going to get. From what I have seen, she keeps on leaving Clock Town to go to the four regions of Termina, but by then I lose complete interest in her. Knowing her, she probably felt way out of her league and probably ended up giving up and going back home."

" Do you think it's possible that she rescued them, Skull Kid?"

" What are you getting at?"

" Because you said you lost interest in her, it's possible that she may have succeeded in freeing the guardians without you even noticing."

" How can one girl do all of that in just three days!?"

Spike shrugged. " Maybe she's one of those really lucky girls?"

Starlight went quiet for a few seconds before erupting into a burst of rage again. " No! I refuse to accept that! There's no way she could have saved them all in just three days especially after I went to so much trouble pulling prank after prank in each region. Why does this girl have to be so annoying!?"

" Maybe it's a sign that you should stop before things go too far."

" What did you say?"

Spike cowered a little before responding in a meek sounding voice. " While I know you've had lots of fun pulling pranks, Skull Kid, and are still itching to pull off some more thanks to that mask you stole, I was thinking that things are getting out of hand what with wanting to bring down the moon to destroy everything. I've stood by in complete silence as you continued making people miserable even if they didn't wrong you way back when, but now I feel I should stand my ground and suggest that you stop now before you're too far gone."

At first, Starlight said nothing in response to Spike. Instead, she chose to walk around for a few minutes, pausing every few moments to think about what she heard, and then continuing on again. When she finished walking, she turned to look at Spike who gulped whilst wondering what was going through her mind, but she turned away from him before turning back and smacking him so hard that he crashed into the ground. He picked himself up as Starlight burst into laughter before she dashed forward, the eyes of her mask glowing in an eerie light, laughed a second time, and squatted down to Spike's level where she spoke in a deep voice.

" Don't speak out line ever again!"

" But, but, Skull Kid..."

Starlight slammed her fist into the ground, leaving behind an indentation. " You will do what I tell you unless you want to die! Remember that you are only here because I need someone around to act as amusement and can be replaced whenever I see fit." The fear in Spike's eyes made him burst into tears as Starlight clutched her head before shaking it a few times. " Huh? Did I just do something? Huh... I can't remember." She then saw Spike crying and immediately cupped her hands together before scooping him up. " Tael? Tael? What's wrong? Why are you crying all of a sudden?"

" You... You've changed Skull Kid?"

" How could I have changed?" Starlight asked. " I'm still the same fun-loving prankster I've always been."

Spike shook his head. " No... You've changed. You're no longer the friend I used to know."

Starlight shrugged her shoulders. " You must have hurt your head or something when I got frustrated because of that girl. I was so annoyed that I feel like I lost complete control of myself and something else ended up taking control of my actions. I know it sounds weird but it did feel that way." Releasing Spike from her hands, Starlight looked up at the moon and clutched her head again. " Ugh! I don't know what happened but it won't stop me from pulling off the ultimate prank and make me a legend. Anyway, if I did something to upset you, Tael, then I'm sorry for doing it, alright?"

" I'm... I'm just going to keep quiet." Spike said softly.

Laughing maniacally, Starlight suddenly spoke in her deep voice again. " Once this world has been destroyed, I shall relish in the fact that I have caused so much pain and misery to these pitiful worms. While it does mean destroying this one, I am not regretful in the least about letting it die though it proved useful to me."

It felt weird not having a sword to protect myself from harm. I mean, I had the Great Fairy's Sword and while it was powerful, it had obvious flaws such as not allowing me to use the spin attack--I didn't use it that much anyway--and preventing me from using my shield, but I preferred having my regular sword around. I guessed that because I had used it so often and that it had been there for me, I had grown attached to it as though it were an extension of myself. Not even the strongest blade could replace what had been there by my side so I couldn't help but feel naked without it in my hand.

But, the Mountain Smithies were working on making it into the Razor Sword like they did the last time. Back then, I didn't have to wait very long to get my sword back as when I handed it over to them, it was only a few hours away from sunrise so they only had it for a short period. I could have played the Song of Double Time and sped forward through to the next day yet that would have meant missing my appointment with Scootaloo. I didn't want to take any chances especially since messing up at any point during this process would force me into having to reset time and go through everything again, including re-forging my sword. No... I had to focus on getting this right the first time through.

Using the Song of Soaring, I warped back to Clock Town and immediately went into the east side until I reached the Stock Pot Inn. Sunset-goro was still sleeping outside though I had to admire her tenacity for wanting to remain out here rather than seek out the Goron friend she mentioned during her conversation with Scootaloo earlier. My heart continued to feel guilt over having taken that which was meant for her and it would continue to torment me for quite a while since it reminded me of how I used to take advantage of everyone around me when I was a bully who sought power above all else.

Looking up at the clock that hung on the wall, it read 8:30pm. I was still early for my appointment with Scootaloo yet I decided to simply go inside and wait until she would to where she wanted to talk to me. Fortunately, I had a room key and that allowed me access after hours without having to rely on the side door. Before using the key, I tried to see if I could open the door without using it but it was to no avail, the front door was locked tightly. I supposed it was obvious they would do this as it prevented trespassers from getting in and protected everyone inside.

Unlocking the front door, I walked inside and closed it before locking it up again--I didn't want to be someone who left without locking an important door. The interior of the inn was much different at night compared to what it was like during the day. I could also see what Sunset-goro meant when she said this place needed to be fixed up a little bit. Poor lighting combined with a lack of heat indicated that this place felt like one of those one-star hotels. Considering how the inn was the only "hotel" in Clock Town, their reputation must have been one they didn't care about considering customers frequently came here.

Still, I bet some were expecting a ritzy experience when coming to the inn instead of a run-down shack that could fall apart at any moment. Still, it was a roof over their heads and they were provided with a hot meal, drink, a shower, and a room so they didn't really have much to complain about. I felt compelled to explore even further but chose not to in case I were to accidentally disturb the other patrons resulting in me getting kicked out or worse. Instead, I sat down on a nearby couch and waited for the allotted time to happen. I could relax now for the first time in a quite as I wasn't under any kind of pressure or anything.

As I sat there for the next few hours, I just stared at my surrounding and almost fell asleep in the process--I really should have planned this out a lot better. Just when it looked like I was about to fall asleep, the sound of footsteps could be heard coming down the stairs. I got up and slowly made my way over to see who was coming down but I made sure to remain hidden in case whoever it was would freak out if they got scared by my presence. A few moments later, Scootaloo appeared from the stairs and turned the corner, her destination being the kitchen so I followed her without saying anything until we both reached the destination.

The kitchen itself looked pleasant compared with everything else I had seen of the Stock Pot Inn--it wasn't much--yet I immediately noticed there were two problems that pretty much reaffirmed that this place really needed some maintenance to fix it up to proper standards. There was a pool of what looked to be sewer water in one corner of the room and numerous cockroaches could be seen crawling about. This kitchen was practically screaming personal hygiene problems just by these two flaws alone. A shame really as I was hoping for at least one decent part of this inn but sadly it wasn't meant to be. I had every mind to report this to the mayor but chose not to out of respect for Scootaloo as she was already suffering.

Turning towards me, Scootaloo was slightly taken aback before she bowed slightly. " Thank you for coming."

I smiled. " While it may be a little late, I'm not bothered as I've been pretty active during the late hours."

" I am sorry to trouble you late at night but I needed to speak with you." Scootaloo said. " It's about him... Kafei."

" Speaking of him... I paid a visit to the postwoman."

" You did?"

I nodded. " While I can't tell you everything because of understanding what seems to be going on, what I can say is that she received the letter from someone who likes to frequent the Laundry Pool but their face was covered."

Hearing me say that made Scootaloo feel a little bit dejected. " I see. Um... I appreciate you telling me that piece of information but what I have to tell you is much more important in that it could lead you to where Kafei might be hiding." I noticed she was holding the letter she received earlier from Aria. From what I recalled from their conversation, Scootaloo was pretty upset about what Aria had to say regarding where it came from and who sent it to her. " I received a letter from... him."

I was shocked. " How is that possible!?

Scootaloo shrugged her shoulders. " I'm sorry but I wish I knew but the postwoman wasn't able to tell me. But, it is strange... isn't it? Getting a letter from a missing person. Upon opening the letter and reading it, I couldn't believe that it was from Kafei. In my head, I believed it to be fake but in my heart, the words written down on it are genuine. But there's absolutely no mistaking it's from him!"

" What do you plan on doing?"

" It's clear to me." Scootaloo answered. " I must send him a letter in response."

" I don't think it will be as easy as you make it out to be."

" Um, what do you mean?"

" Even if you were to send out a letter to him, you have no way of knowing if he will receive it or not." I answered. " I don't mean to make you upset, Anju, but you're not thinking this through entirely and that could become problematic further down the road."

" I'm sorry."

" But... I'm not suggesting you not do it."

That made Scootaloo a little happier. " Please! Here is my letter." She presented me a red envelope that featured a beautiful pattern on it though why did she want me to go and deliver it on her behalf? Wouldn't it have made more sense if she went and did it herself? " Please put this in a postbox. There are plenty of them all around town so this should be an easy enough task but I don't mean to treat you as being idiotic. When this is delivered by the postwoman... When he receives my letter... You should be able to meet him!"

" Are you sure?"

Scootaloo nodded. " I have made sure to mention you in my letter in case he gets suspicious of you meeting him. By the way, I would like to ask a request of you. Um... I know it's a little sudden but I am hoping you will do this for me. Please tell Kafei that Anju is waiting for him. Despite everything that has happened to him since he disappeared, I am still waiting for him when others have given up. Also, after you see him wherever he is hiding in town... Tell me how he looked. It sounds weird but I fear something has befallen him as why else would he remains hidden despite sending me a letter."

" To be honest, I think you should meet him in person."

" I'm scared!"

" What do you mean?"

Scootaloo shivered. " I'm scared... I... I can't go."

While I understood her fears of not wanting to see what might have happened to the man she loved, I had to call foul on Scootaloo's behaviour. By allowing herself to succumb to her fears, she was showing weakness that would easily allow others to take advantage of her kind and generous nature. Come to think of it, she had already been doing that from the moment I first met her due to how she kept on apologizing for even the smallest of infractions. I knew that nothing I said would make her change her mind so it appeared I had been recruited to carry out another task without really being given an option.

On another notion, how was I supposed to meet with this Kafei anyway? I knew now courtesy of Aria that someone with a mask hung out around the Laundry Pool who gave her the letter that she delivered to Scootaloo and that meant I had to find him as he could lead me to Kafei. One more thought then entered my mind. How was it that no one had been able to find him since he had been here in town all along? It's not like he was trying really hard to remain hidden but sure he would have been found by the Town Militia. No doubt they were either incompetent or focusing too much on dealing with the carnival committee.

" Do you really want me to do this for you?"

Scootaloo nodded. " I would really appreciate it.

I sighed knowing I didn't have much of a choice. " Alright... I'll post the letter for you."

That made Scootaloo bow forward slightly. " Thank you... very much. Please mail it immediately in the morning or perhaps before you head off to bed. Either way, please deposit it in a mailbox soon as possible. Now, I must head off to bed myself before my mother accidentally wakes up and thinks something is wrong. Goodnight and I await with baited breath as to what Kafei will have to say when you meet him."

Bowing slightly again, Scootaloo left the kitchen before turning to her left and walking down the hallway leaving me holding the letter she gave me. I looked down at it and for a moment was curious as to what it contained but I knew better than reading someone else's letter. Fortunately, I knew what she was going through as I had seen Princess Twilight act nervous regarding Flash Sentry though this was much worse. Her Highness had a small crush that ultimately amounted to nothing whereas Scootaloo was to get married and that meant spending the rest of her life with Kafei.

Taking my leave of the Stock Pot Inn, I looked around to see if there was a postbox nearby. Sure enough, there was one to my left so I walked over and investigated it. To my surprise, it spoke to me as though it were alive. We didn't have anything like this back home in Equestria so this definitely took me by surprise. The postbox said I should deposit any mail inside the slot--anyone could have figured that out--so I took the letter and slotted it into the slot. The postbox said it had been received and would be delivered tomorrow morning, yet while I was fine with that, I found it difficult to accept the fact it had talked to me.

Looking back at the clock on the wall, the time was now 12:30am which meant Lightning Dust had robbed the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop. According to Adagio, I had to allow the robbery to happen otherwise everything else wouldn't have happened. I was beginning to feel that this side-quest was forcing to act in a manner that brought back painful memories of my past and I absolutely hated it. My heart once again grew heavy knowing how many sacrifices had already been made and yet, it was worth doing it as it meant acquiring something that could help me defeat Starlight--and perhaps even Ganondorf himself.

Since I had nothing else to do, I thought about going back inside and sleeping in the room that had been given to me via the reservation. I wasn't really tired and given how poor it was inside, perhaps it simply best for me to warp forward through time until I reached the point where Aria would deliver the letter Scootaloo asked me to mail. Judging from what I recalled from the schedule that was posted on the post office's door, it opened at 7:00am. Aria most likely went around to pick up everything that had been deposited, go back to the post office, and then go back out again to deliver any letters she received.

" What are you thinking about, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" How far forward we should go with the Song of Double Time."

" I had a feeling you were thinking of doing that."

" It's not like we have anything to do between now and then."

" There was one thing Sonata mentioned that piqued my curiosity."

" What's that?"

" When you showed her that mask you got from Big Macintosh, the Troupe Leader's Mask." Twilight began. " She said something about speaking to him while wearing it to open up a path not previously seen but he would be too riled up from drinking too much over at the Milk Bar. I don't need to remind you of what he did when you were helping Mrs. Pommel perform that sound check she was working on."

I shuddered. " Who knew that a guy like Big Mac would be so surly and from just drinking milk."

" It takes all kinds."

" You think we should check that out?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I'm not really sure as Sonata was being all cryptic when she brought it up. I just happened to remember her saying that and thought to bring it to your attention in case you were curious to find out what she meant. We don't have to do it right now though since we technically still have endless cycles before we confront Starlight so maybe when we're done helping out Scootall and this Kafei, we could find out what might be wrong with Big Macintosh. At this point, it's a good idea to prepare yourself according before we call the Four Giants."

I nodded. " That means I'll need potions, ammunition for my items, and anything else that's necessary before going up to the Clock Tower's apex."

" To answer your question about how far forward we should go through time." Twilight began. " It probably takes Aria about an hour or two to collect all of the mail during her morning run through town, but I suspect she goes back to the post office for another hour or two so as to have her break. Once she's had that, she goes back out again to deliver along the same route until she finishes back at the post office again. I would say we should move forward until sometime around 1:00pm tomorrow afternoon. If I have Aria's route all figured out, she goes to the Laundry Pool as her second-to-last stop before going through West Clock Town."

" How sure are you of that?"

" Not very well."

I was afraid Princess Twilight was going to say that but then we didn't really have much of a choice. It's not that I didn't have confidence in her--I had more confidence in her as opposed to myself--but if arrived too late, we would be forced to start again by getting the room key by saying I had a reservation. Taking out the ocarina and raising it to my lips, I played the Song of Double Time and focused on 1:00pm tomorrow, and everything started speeding up as clocks appeared all around me before it all went black. When my eyes opened moments later, I assumed I had reached my intended time but the clock on the wall revealed it was only 6:00am.

Dawn of the Second Day - 48 Hours Remain.

Why didn't I go to the intended point in time I wanted? Why did I end up only going to 6:00am? I felt so annoyed that I wanted to explode with rage but instead I chose to remain calm in hopes of figuring out an answer. Fortunately, it only took me a few minutes to realize that the Song of Double Time had some limitations when it came to moving through time. I could pass through time to reach a specific point but only during the current day I was on. It had no effect if I was going from one day to the next like I tried doing just now. While it was an inconvenience, it wasn't anything serious as I could just keep moving forward through time by playing the song.

Playing the Song of Double Time again, I focused and the clocks surrounded me again as I moved forward through time until everything went black again. I opened my eyes a few moments later and looked up at the clock on the wall where it told me that the time was now 1:00pm. Whew... I reached where I wanted to go despite the slight hiccup along the way courtesy of the song's limitation. Again, it wasn't that bad, just a little inconvenient. Suddenly, I started getting wet due to it raining--surprised how I never noticed until now--but there was no time to complain about having wet clothes and a wet body.

Knowing that I had to go to the Laundry Pool, I cut my way across using the pathway to South Clock Town that was next to the Stock Pot Inn--Sunset-goro had since disappeared so I assumed she was with the Goron she mentioned--and entered the Laundry Pool before ducking behind the lone tree. Peaking around and looking out in front of me, Aria was slowly running up towards what appeared to be an old bell attached to a piece of rope attached to an old sign. When she reached it, she checked her bag before ringing the bell, and out from a side door to the right came a young boy who was wearing a mask.

" That must be the one Aria mentioned who gave the initial letter to her." Twilight whispered.

I nodded whilst whispering. " But why would they live out here in the Laundry Pool?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I don't know but this child must know where Kafei is. I have a feeling Aria is going to keep him distracted long enough so you can take the time to swim across the pond and enter that door on the other side."

" I wonder why I never noticed it before."

" We only ever came here once when we ran into Discord that one time." Twilight said. " I guess we never bothered to take a closer inspection. In any case, you need to hop to it if you want to get inside that kid's place before he does otherwise we may not get another chance to do so."

Checking to make sure neither Aria nor the kid were watching me, I slowly stepped across a bed of flowers, making sure not to accidentally step on any in case doing so would make a noise that would attract them towards me, stepped into the water, swam across to the other side nearest to the door, and slowly climbed out of the water. I looked back to see if they were looking in my direction--they weren't--before slowly tip-toeing until I reached the door. Opening it, I crept inside before slowly closing it, and found myself in a room that comprised of a staircase going to the left.

I had no where else to go so I walked up the stairs for a few moments before it opened up into a small room. There was a bed with sheets that looked to be old and worn out, a desk and chair with someone's journal left open, and a strange looking hole on the back wall. Whoever this kid was certainly knew how to survive in such conditions yet why go to the trouble of hiding in such a place? Why not live someplace normal? I had a feeling something fishy was going on but I didn't have all the facts just yet. It wouldn't be long before the kid would return so I decided to wait for him to come back.

Two minutes later, the door at the bottom of the stairs closed and footsteps could be heard coming up the stairs. The kid had finished dealing with Aria so now it was my turn to deal with him, and yet, I knew not to be too harsh as he was my only means of finding Kafei. The kid then arrived and came to a sudden stop upon seeing me but made no effort towards attacking me or pulling some kind of hidden level that would cause me to plummet down to my death or something. Instead, he tilted his head back and forth as if to get a better look at me but I still had to be cautious in case he did do anything.

" Surprised you were able to slip by so easily."

" It wasn't easy mind you."

" I thought about throwing you out for trespassing but then I noticed what you were wearing."

" Oh?" I asked. " You were expecting me?"

The kid nodded. " Green hat... Green clothes... Anju wrote about you in her letter."

I huffed. " Wait a minute! How do you know about that letter? It was meant for someone by the name of Kafei." I then gasped upon realizing what he had done. " How dare you read something that doesn't belong to or even concerns you!"

" Not to worry." The kid said as he laughed. " I assure you that everything is perfectly legitimate with regards to that particular letter. Besides, you do deserve an explanation so I hope you are prepared for what I have to say. Before that, however, I need to know if you can keep a secret. This is extremely important so I must know before I continue on otherwise things could become quite dire."

I nodded knowing I had no choice and also because I knew how to keep promises. " Alright... I won't say anything but I hope this will be worth it."

The kid nodded. " Anju trusted you. I shall also trust you." He then grabbed the mask on his face and held it firmly in his hand. " Had you not spoken to Anju, I wouldn't be doing this but again, you have earned my trust so there is no need for me to hide my secret from you." He pulled off his mask to reveal his face and I was surprised to see that it was someone whom I had never seen before. " I am Kafei."

Princess Twilight then whispered to me. " I don't believe it! That's Tender Taps."

" Who?"

" He is an Earth Pony who was a performer yet lacked the courage to perform in front of other ponies." Twilight answered. " According to Applejack who was told about the incident by Apple Bloom, she and the other Cutie Mark Crusaders succeeded in helping Tender Taps acquire his cutie mark while also discovering what their own marks truly meant, helping those who either don't have their mark or do but need to know their meaning. I'm honestly surprised that he turned out to be Kafei but something isn't adding up. Isn't he supposed to be a young man and not a child?"

Her Highness was right! Why was Kafei, or rather, Tender Taps, a child instead of an adult? I had to inquire about it without making it sound so obvious. " You are Kafei? I mean, I never would have imagined it considering how non-chalant you were with that letter, but this... this is something unexpected."

" What my friend means is the Kafei we were asked to look for is an adult." Twilight said. " While I have no doubt that you are Kafei--your hairstyle matches that of the mask that bears a likeness to you--when I look at you, I just see a child who happens to have an unusual looking face."

Tender Taps sighed. " My story is a tragic one."

" How so?" I asked.

" You are correct in that I am adult." Tender Taps answered. " But, that was until just over a month ago. I do not know why I was targeted but I was turned into this current form by a strange imp wearing a mask. She said that she wanted to make me feel small when she claimed I had somehow wronged her. Her words made no sense at all since I never saw her before until that very moment and yet I was changed by a dark magic she possessed."

I clenched my hand into a fist. I should have known that Starlight Glimmer had something to do with Tender Taps' current condition, and I was just as confused as he was regarding as to why she chose to punish him when he had nothing to do with her. Perhaps she saw him as being too positive and changed him into a child out of spite or perhaps she really felt he had wronged her in some way. Either way, what was originally a love problem between two people had become something much worse. Not only did I need to solve this problem, I also needed to find a way to change Tender Taps back to his true self.

" Why are you hiding here anyway?"

Tender Taps went silent for a while before uttering a single word. " Um..."

" Anju has been worried sick about you this entire time." I said. " Even if you were an old man, she would still love you no matter what you looked like. You don't need to be afraid of showing what you look like right now. Just muster up some courage and go see her before it's too late and you'll live to regret it." I made sure not to mention that I knew what was going to happen because of seeing it in the future as that would have freaked him out and he didn't need that. " I heard that some people in town may flee if things were to get too hectic but it's just a rumour right now but one you should strongly consider."

" I can't reveal myself to Anju... At least, not yet."

" Why not?"

Tender Taps sighed. " I'm not hiding because I look this way. If I was trying to hide in that manner, I would have fled Clock Town and no one would have ever seen me again. In reality, my reason for hiding is because of what happened after that masked imp cursed me. I went to see the Great Fairy in the shrine near the North Gate in hopes she could reverse the curse but on my way there, my precious mask--a wedding ceremony mask--was stolen from me by some prancing woman with a grinning face!"

I knew straight away that Tender Taps was referring to Lightning Dust but I pretended that I didn't know who she was. However, it appeared that she was rather infamous around town for being a troublemaker yet she always got away with whatever goods she managed to pilfer from the innocent. I had allowed her to get away with so much all because I didn't know how to deal with her properly but perhaps now I could finally do something about her. Still, I wasn't surprised that Tender Taps got robbed though he was also rather careless carrying around something that precious in the first place.

" Your mask?"

Tender Taps sighed again. " It was a sun mask that I was to exchange on the day of my wedding with its counterpart, the moon mask, in the hands of Anju. And now, I have lost it and everything else. Before my wedding ceremony, I was quite happy yet I was targeted because of what I had been turned into. That prancing thief knew the masked imp had cursed me yet she still took advantage all because she loves robbing the innocent.

" Oh my." Twilight said. " I pity you."

" I know Anju is worried about me but I can't go out yet."

" And that's because?" I asked.

" I made a promise to her that I would bring the sun mask and greet her on the day we are to be married." Tender Taps answered. " That day is tomorrow night which gives me just over a day to find it and bring it back with me."

" What do you want me to do?"

Reaching into his pocket, Tender Taps took out a beautiful pendant before slipping the mask back on his head. I had a feeling that his mask was one of the ones I needed to collect in order for me to acquire the ultimate mask yet how was I supposed to get it from him? He then handed over the pendant and my heart felt a huge burden suddenly placed on it. He was placing his future in my hands and I knew it was a serious issue. " This pendant... Give it to Anju. Please keep what we just talked about a secret from everyone, at least, until when I am able to confront her with the mask in my possession."

Taking the pendant in my hand, I gazed upon it for a moment. Again, I understood what was going on as I too had experienced love yet I took it for granted all in the name of wanting to remain on top as the most popular girl. In fact, this was my first true experience with love, and it felt absolutely wonderful. Had I been this honest with Flash Sentry back then instead of using him, we could have made it work but instead, my arrogance blinded me to the truth. Unfortunately, he still had feelings towards Princess Twilight as she did in turn but while I told her the harsh reality of it, he still needed to know and it was now my job of providing him that reality.

Putting the pendant carefully into my pocket, I told Tender Taps that I would give it to Anju--Scootaloo. " She wanted me to tell her what you looked like but I'll try to make sure not to tell her about your current condition."

Tender Taps bowed slightly. " Be careful with that pendant, green hat girl. I don't want it to get stolen especially by that prancing woman should she still be around or by that strange bird that lurks out in the field near the entrance to the Southern Swamp. Make sure you keep a close eye on your pockets when going around town especially at nightfall. I say this as a friendly warning and not to intimidate you. Things that get stolen in this town always make their way to the Curiosity Shop. I'm waiting for that to happen."

" How come?"

" Do you see that hole up there on that wall?"

I nodded. " What about it?"

" If you stand on that crate and peek into the hole, you'll see the Curiosity Shop's interior from behind the counter." Tender Taps answered. " I've been doing this for some time now, checking on the customers who come by there at night, and that woman has been there several times before. She will definitely come tonight with whatever stolen goods she has in her possession and I'll be waiting for that moment. I would confront her in there but if she spotted me, she would run at the first opportunity."

Tender Taps had certainly given me a lot to think about. On the one hand, I now understood his plight no thanks to Starlight having cursed him and Lightning Dust having stolen something precious from him. On the other, there was still much more about this problem that remained unsolved. What was Lightning Dust's involvement in all this? Yes, she was involved now due to having stolen that sun mask so where could I even begin to search for her hideout? I had to deliver the pendant to Scootaloo to let her know that I had found Tender Taps but to learn more about Lightning Dust's scheme proved too juicy to ignore.

Chapter 68: Greed of the Thief

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
August 14, 2017
Chapter 68: Greed of the Thief.

Once again, I found myself feeling conflicted as to what I wanted to do next. On the one hand, I needed to get my sword back from the Mountain Smithies and get it upgraded by using some gold dust which was supposedly hidden away by Maud--Darmani--somewhere in her village. On another, I had to give Scootaloo what Tender Taps asked of me, namely the pendant in order for something to happen. Finally, there was seeing Lightning Dust appear tonight at the Curiosity Shop. All three options... well... excluding my sword, were connected to the whole sidequest involving solving Scootaloo's problem so in that sense, I knew what ones were priority.

I had to deliver the pendant and see what Lightning Dust was up to. I could easily take care of the first one straight away as it involved simply going to Scootaloo, hand over the pendant, and see what she had to say in response. The Curiosity Shop opened late at night so that would require me killing some time though time was precious in that I didn't have as much of it as appearances suggested. I could go to Scootaloo first and then focus on getting my sword upgraded again but that would involve some fast movement on my part. So many options and just not enough time.

Even if I were to use the Inverted Song of Time--I was surprised that I didn't use it more often--I would still be cutting it pretty close because of two factors that I only now began to think about given they entered my mind. I had no idea where Maud's hidden stash of gold dust was in Goron Village. Unless she had told someone else about it before she died, it would just require me asking whoever she confided in to share their information. If not then I had no choice but to look for it the hard way and waste time in the process. The other factor involved when Lightning Dust would show up at the Curiosity Shop.

Tender Taps hadn't specified an exact time as to when she would show up leaving me once again forced to figure it out on my own. She could show up as soon as the shop opened or even halfway through the night and I would never know until she happened to show up in person. Just when things looked like they were finally going correctly, I ended up experiencing setbacks that weren't my fault. And then there was the reason behind her being there. Lightning Dust, from what I remembered seeing of her--I only encountered her twice and both times weren't pleasant--she pretended to be innocent and pranced about like she were a dancer or ballerina.

Her behaviour belied a ruthless thief who would steal anything without any care for her victims. According to Princess Twilight, the pony version of her was seen as extremely confident and willing to go to extreme measures just to prove how good a flyer she was. However, she showed no concern for others when her reckless actions almost cost the lives of the pony versions of my friends. That negative trait of Lightning Dust had been transferred over to the version of her who was a thief and that meant I had to be cautious in case she were to suddenly become wild.

Mulling things over for a few moments, I decided that I was going to hand over the pendant to Scootaloo first. After all, she was only a short distance away and Tender Taps didn't give me an actual time limit though I preferred getting it out of the way in case something went wrong. Thanking Tender Taps and promising to keep my word, I left his hidden residence and began making my way back over to the Stock Pot Inn, and along the way I noticed Aria running by on her delivery run. I thought about calling out to her but she was unlikely to talk back since it would disrupt her schedule.

Once I reached the inn, I went inside and was surprised to see that Scootaloo was no longer standing behind the desk. Instead, it was a much older woman who I didn't recognize though Princess Twilight seemed to know. Before she could say anything about her, the woman turned her head and began staring at me with such cold eyes, I felt like wanting to leave again but I couldn't let one person scare me away, and not before I could carry out my promise. I assumed she was in charge of the inn yet why give me such a stern look? Did she suspect I was here regarding Tender Taps? Why would it bother her?

Princess Twilight whispered to me. " That's Misty Fly."

" I have no idea who that is." I whispered back.

" She is one of the more recent members of the Wonderbolts back in Equestria." Twilight whispered. " I don't know much about her other than she is an accomplished flyer who isn't afraid to get her hooves dirty, but Rainbow Dash knows way more about her and the other Wonderbolts than anyone else outside of their team. I am of course referring to the pony version of Rainbow as opposed to the one who attends Canterlot High."

" You didn't need to add that last bit."

" Just wanted to be correct about it."

" So why is she even here?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I have no idea but we need to know where Scootaloo is."

" Maybe Misty Fly knows."

" Maybe but I am sensing some hidden malice coming from her."

I blinked a couple of times. " Since when have you been able to do something like that?"

Again, Princess Twilight shrugged. " I honestly don't know where I got it from but I've recently been able to sense the auras of people. If anyone has any hidden intent to cause harm upon another, I can sense it coming from them provided I'm close enough to them. From what Misty Fly is giving off in terms of malice, she isn't evil but she is harbouring hatred towards someone who had really annoyed her and I think that someone could be Tender Taps."

" Do you think Misty Fly is related to Scootaloo in this world?"

" Only way to know is to go up and ask her."

I gulped. Even though I hadn't spoken to her yet, Misty Fly was already giving me a bad feeling based on her expression alone. I didn't like the idea of speaking to her in case she decided to chew me out for no particular reason but I needed to know where Scootaloo was and she was the only one around right now who knew. I walked up to the desk before bowing before her slightly, her expression still cold and uncaring, my nerves increasing, my heartbeat beating faster and faster, but I had to persevere and ask her straight up where Scootaloo was and without causing a scene.

Before I had a chance to speak, Misty Fly looked down at my hand and her eyes squinted. " What do you have there?"

Crap! She could see the pendant that Tender Taps gave me. I needed to come up with an excuse quickly before she got too suspicious. " This little old thing? It's a keepsake from a friend of mine who gave it to me before he left to explore the world several years ago. I really shouldn't keep it out in the open otherwise people might assume something about me that clearly isn't true." I felt really awkward when I said that so I quickly placed the pendant in my pocket whilst pretending not to make myself out to be a complete idiot. " Anyway, am I to assume that you are the one who runs this inn?"

Misty Fly nodded. " I am."

" Then surely you must know of Anju?"

Again, Misty Fly nodded. " She is my only daughter, yes. Are you looking for her by any chance? Judging from the key that's also hanging out of your pocket, you are one of our customers so I aim to make you as content as possible. Anju did say that it was a Goron who claimed the one room we still had available the other day but it's clear that she still doesn't remember who everyone looks like. I'm sorry if she caused you any problems. I know she means well but her apologetic nature combined with her obliviousness make her somewhat of a problem around here."

" I'm sure she doesn't do deliberately."

" No, I suppose she doesn't." Misty Fly said. " Now, why do you need to speak with my daughter? She is currently out right now but she will be back within the next hour with some food and other items we need to keep our customers happy. To be quite frank, she seemed rather nervous before leaving this morning to do those errands. It was as though she were grappling with a problem that only she knows about. Unless you know anything about it."

I gulped. " Um... Not really."

Misty Fly eyed me suspiciously before shrugging. " You're not a familiar face around here anyway so I guess you wouldn't know. Anyway, I don't know why but I feel compelled to tell you what's been on my mind these past moons. Have you ever heard of someone by the name of Kafei?"

I nodded. " Some people in town mentioned his name."

" You sound like you don't know much about him so I might as well tell you." Misty Fly said. " He was engaged to marry my daughter, Anju, tomorrow night when the carnival is said to begin but then he upped and disappeared a month ago. Naturally, Anju was devastated given she had been waiting for this day and while I was also devastated, I was furious at what he had done to my child. She is willing to forgive him for such behaviour but I know that Kafei disappeared because he is nothing but a scoundrel. I wonder if Kafei is really at Cremia's place and not somewhere as his parents have been saying."

" His parents?"

Misty Fly stared at me coldly. " Mayor Dotour and Monsieur Aroma. Both of them have no idea where Kafei has gotten off to yet haven't bothered to try and find him. Instead, the mayor is too busy dealing with an argument between the town militia and the carnival committee whereas Monsieur Aroma insists on trying to find someone who is experienced at finding lost people. I tell you, they only care about themselves instead of their own child and it sickens me to know that they prefer their own lives as opposed to his." She then paused for a moment before continuing. " If Kafei is indeed at Romani Ranch, I will give him a smack."

The instant she mentioned Cremia, I knew she was talking about Applejack, but what did she have to do with any of this? Something told me that Misty Fly knew something so I needed to convince her to share what she knew. Again, I had to make sure I wasn't being too obvious otherwise she would figure me out and would surely kick me out of here or stop me from speaking with Scootaloo. " You said Kafei could be at Cremia's place, right? Who exactly is Cremia?" I felt embarrassed having to feign ignorance but it was the only option I had without revealing too much.

" You must not leave town much, huh?"

I rubbed the back of my head and smiled sheepishly. " I'm what you call a city girl."

" With clothes like that, you look more like a girl from the woods."

" I get that a lot."

Misty Fly coughed. " Cremia is the owner and manager of Romani Ranch, a place located down Milk Road next to the Southern Swamp. It's no secret that she also had feelings towards Kafei but he rejected her in favour of Anju but I'm not buying it for an instant. You see, Cremia needs strength from a partner and business support from Monsieur Aroma, the latter having connections that could give the ranch even more publicity allowing it to prosper. As the son of the mayor, and the postmaster, Kafei not only possesses political clout, he also has a charm that can swoon over anyone."

" He sounds like a decent person."

" Decent!? Ha!" Misty Fly shouted as she slammed her hands onto the front desk. " If he were decent, he would be here right now comforting Anju instead of doing who knows what and with whom just because he feels like it. If Kafei really has run off with Cremia, she'll get both things I mentioned leaving Anju with nothing. I have told her many times that she deserves better but she continues to believe that he will return. It is this naïve nature that will one day be the death of her. I mean, how happy could she possibly be... marrying a man who runs off when he's about to be married?"

I shrugged. " I don't know."

" Then let me answer it for you." Misty Fly said. " It would make her life unhappy... just like mine. Anju received a letter recently that said Kafei would be coming back but I know it's another lie designed to take advance of her innocence and provide false hope. But, surely you have noticed the moon up above, haven't you?" I nodded prompting her to do the same before continuing on. " I've heard some say that this town will be crushed beneath the moon the morning after tomorrow. At this point, survival has become our priority but until I have concrete evidence that the town is doomed, it's business as usual."

I thought about telling her to go outside and look up at the sky to see the moon for herself but I doubted she would be willing to listen to me. In her mind, Misty Fly was obsessed with making Tender Taps miserable and all because she didn't know what was going on. Granted, he should have just come forward and explained things instead of remaining hidden as doing so would have made things so much easier, yet his pride as well as his promise kept him from coming back. In a way, Tender Taps created this mess yet I had been given the task of fixing it even though it wouldn't mean anything once time had been reset.

Even if I were to resolve this problem and help out everyone who will end up getting involved, resetting time would effectively undo all of my hard work leaving them unaware that anything had happened though I would get only a small comfort in the form of the Bomber's Notebook recording what I did and any masks I would obtain. It had been some time since I last thought about the one aspect of time travel that I now personally viewed with a grudge. If only it were possible for my actions towards helping people become reality when this was all said and done but I honestly didn't know whether it would or not.

Suddenly, the sound of a door clicking broke me out of my daydreaming--and just in time as Misty Fly was beginning to get annoyed with me--and Scootaloo entered, holding a bag that contained what she had been asked to acquire. She was happy to see me at first but her expression quickly changed when she noticed Misty Fly looking at her. For a moment, it felt really weird standing in-between both parent and child, waiting for one of them to break the awkward silence, yet Scootaloo simply walked off to the right, went around the corner, and emerged a minute later next to her mother.

Misty Fly then broke the silence. " I see you've come back, Anju."

Scootaloo nodded. " Yes, mother."

" Our customer has been waiting for you."

" She has?"

" I was afraid that I would have to go out and start looking for you but you came back just in time."

" I had some things on my mind but I wasn't too distracted to not complete my errands."

Smiling, Misty Fly took the bag from Scootaloo and put it away. " Glad to see that you are finally seeing where I'm coming from, Anju. Now, you need not worry about your grandmother who is probably complaining about not having her meal. You deal with our customer while I shall go and prepare her something."

Scootaloo then waited until her mother had walked out of the room and into the kitchen before leaning forward and beckoning me to come a little closer. " Um, I'm so sorry if my mother gave you a hard time. I know that she probably said bad things about Kafei but she is wrong! I know Kafei will return despite the odds of that happening are slim to none." She then noticed me fiddling about with my pocket and immediately felt curious. " Do you have something that you're struggling to take out from your pocket?"

" I have something for you."

" What is it?"

I then took out the pendant. " This is from Kafei."

Gasping in silence, Scootaloo reached out and took the pendant from my hand. " Did you truly get this from... him?"

I nodded. " I've seen him in person but I made a promise to not tell anyone where he is and what he looks like. I know you want to know about the latter one but you have to trust me on this and wait until he comes back to see you."

" I understand." Scootaloo said as she pocketed the pendant. " My mother thinks Kafei is a horrible man for seemingly abandoning me but I know better than to ever doubt him despite the problems that currently plague him. That's why I've decided to wait for him. I've made my promise and I intend on keeping it."

" Your mother may not approve of that."

" Whatever do you mean?"

" I suspect your mother plans on having all of you flee town tomorrow."

Scootaloo sighed. " I honestly did not realize she was so serious about it but she has brought it up with me early this morning. I know she means well and wants nothing more than for all of us to be safe, but she and my grandmother will have to flee to Romani Ranch without me. I know she will protest and even threaten me into going there but I have made my promise and nothing will change that. I'm glad you gave me the pendant, Mrs. Sunset, as it is the proof my mother needs to see to know that Kafei is still faithful to me." She looked up at the ceiling for several seconds before focusing her attention back at me. " I'm fine with my decision. I believe Kafei will come."

" Well... If you're absolutely certain of it."

Scootaloo nodded. " My mother will understand so please do not worry about it."

Knowing there was nothing else I could say, I wished Scootaloo luck and left the inn before sitting down on a nearby bench and burying my head into my hands. While I admired her dedication towards wanting to wait for Tender Taps to return with his sun mask, there was no way of knowing if he was going to succeed in getting it back. Lightning Dust acted all innocent but was devious in that her hideout was most likely somewhere no one would ever go. Perhaps she would give it away when she meets with Iron Will at the Curiosity Shop later tonight so now I really had a reason for needing to be there.

With the pendant now taken care of, I decided that my next course of action was to get my sword upgraded to its strongest form. Looking at the clock hanging on the wall located nearby, it read 4:00pm which meant nightfall was coming and I had six hours to go before the Curiosity Shop would open. I had no idea how long it would take for me to find Maud's hidden stash of gold dust but hopefully not too long as missing anything of the conversation between Lightning Dust and Iron Will would prove disastrous. I now wished I had my own means of telling time without needing the clocks scattered about.

Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I played the Song of Soaring and focused on going back to the Mountain Village--I would have chosen Goron Village but there was no Owl Statue in the village so I had to do some slight backtracking. Wings then protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, spun around me several times until I disappeared in an instant. I arrived at my destination moments later and immediately the cold winds of Snowhead affected my body and I folded my arms to keep warm. I was about to start heading over to the Mountain Smithy when Princess Twilight began bopping my head repeatedly.

Unlike me, she could survive in any environment--the joys of being a fairy--yet I needed to get inside before my body froze itself to death. After Her Highness bopped me on the head a few more times, I finally had enough and shooed her off my head with my hand. " Alright, Twilight! What do you want to tell me?"

" I didn't mean to make you testy, Sunset." Twilight said.

I sighed. " I'm freezing out here right now and I need to get inside before my body freezes and I die. Funny, I don't know why this is happening now when in the past, the cold didn't really affect me and I could go about as normal."

" I promise to make this quick then."

" Please do!" I said whilst chattering with my teeth.

" Instead of going to pick up your sword, why not go and collect the gold dust instead?" Twilight asked. " You need to head over to Goron Village anyway to find her stash but why not go there and get it first before picking up your sword? I know you don't like to backtrack but I figured that doing things this way will cut down on any unnecessary backtracking."

" Sure, I'll go with that."

" That was a quick decision you made."

" I'm freezing!"

" Then become a Goron."

" Why?"

" Even though they don't like the water, Gorons are able to handle cold temperatures." Twilight answered. " Becoming Darmani should give you some extra protection but I wouldn't stick around long enough to find out. If you roll along the snow by bringing out those spikes of yours, you should reach the village in a matter of minutes. From there, you could ask one of the locals about Maud's hidden stash or try and find it yourself."

" Who do you think she would have told about it?"

" I'm going to take a guess and say Diamond Tiara."

" Really?" I asked, confused by her answer. " You would seriously guess it was the one Goron who has to stand outside and guard the village while everyone else is inside--and freezing to death because of unfortunate circumstances--and not Cranky Doodle?"

Princess Twilight flopped onto my hat. " While it would make sense that she would have told Cranky, I remember how your conversation with him went last time. His old age may have caused him to unintentionally forget certain things so Maud telling him about her hidden stash would be counterproductive. No, I think she would have told Diamond Tiara as like you said, she is outside standing guard and sees everything that goes on in the village. That also includes Maud hiding bottles of gold dust somewhere. Do you see where I'm coming from, Sunset? Of course, this is just a guess on my part so what I'm saying could be wrong."

" Then we'll just have to risk it."

Taking out the Goron Mask and placing it on my face, I began stumbling about as the magic within the mask began causing my body to shimmer from human to Goron, but at least the snow didn't make me stumble somewhere I shouldn't be, namely the pond of freezing water located behind me. Upon completing the transformation, my body started feeling a lot warmer but I was still feeling the cold because this weather wasn't natural--I could have defeated Goht again to bring spring back but I didn't see any point considering it would all be lost upon resetting time--and that was when a strange voice began ringing in my head.

It was a faint voice but then it quickly became clear as to who was trying to speak to me. Closing my eyes and concentrating, I could see the image of Maud Pie's ghost appearing before me though she wasn't able to fully materialize as her spirit had long since been sealed away inside of the Goron Mask. She was barely able to speak coherent sentences but I did manage to understand what she was saying. According to Maud, her hidden stash of gold dust was located where most would never tread so I immediately assumed it was the shrine located on the other side of the abyss that overlooked the village but she shook her head and said speak to her hardened friend.

I tried asking what she meant by "hardened friend" but Maud's spirit disappeared leaving me with no answer. What did she mean by where most would never tread? Was she trying to say that there was an area in the village that no Gorons have ever been to before? That didn't sound like a compelling argument but perhaps there was such a place in the village yet I just never noticed it before because of focusing on what I could naturally see. Opening my eyes, I informed Princess Twilight of what just happened and she said I should follow up by speaking with Diamond Tiara.

Curling up into a ball, I began rolling forward, the snow providing me enough momentum, allowing spikes to protrude from my body. With my spikes, I could now roll much faster than before and run over any monsters that happened to get in my way. Deep down, I missed rolling around as a Goron as it gave me so much freedom not to mention it got me from place to place in mere moments as opposed to minutes had I walked there. Rolling along and entering the next section of Snowhead, the twin bridges area, I rolled over a Blue Tektite that had been hiding below in the snow though it caused me to veer off course, tumble down onto the ice coated lake, and roll into a mound of snow.

Shaking my head and getting back up onto my feet, I noticed Pinkie Pie flying about via her balloon. I thought about popping it and bringing her down to the ground so that I could talk to her in hopes she would know anything, but Princess Twilight suggested otherwise and I agreed with her decision. Knowing Pinkie, she would most likely repeat information from before along with wanting to convince me to purchase one of her maps--I had them all so that service was no longer applicable with me. Choosing to ignore her, I curled back up into a ball and continued rolling forward, catching some air as I launched off a ramp and landing on a White Wolfos this time.

While I inflicted some damage on it, it wasn't thrilled to see me and it did cause me to stop rolling, uncurling myself in the process. Rather than wait for it to do something, I walked away--I couldn't run as a Goron--and quickly entered Goron Village where I was once again impressed by the beautiful landscape. Sure, it was a morbid scene given that it wasn't supposed to be snowing this badly but I couldn't help but feel a small sense of awe over such beauty. I could see Diamond Tiara standing guard yet I began looking around to see where this one place was that couldn't be reached by Gorons according to what Maud said in my mind.

I saw nothing out of the ordinary so I walked over to Diamond Tiara. She noticed me and raised her hands as a means of self-defence. " Halt! Who goes there?" I moved a bit closer and her jaw dropped upon seeing me. " Darmani? Is that you?" I nodded my head causing her to be taken aback. " But how? The Goron Elder said the rescue party that was sent out to find you discovered your lifeless body somewhere at the bottom of the chasm below Snowhead Temple so how can you be standing here before me?"

" It's rather difficult to explain."

Diamond Tiara shook her head. " No need for you to explain anything to me, Darmani."

" How come?"

" The fact that you are alive and well is all the explanation I need." Diamond Tiara answered. " Though it does beg the question as to where have you been all this time and whatever happened to our two brothers who were tasked to prepare your grave on the highest peak in all of Snowhead."

Hearing her mention those two Gorons caused me to remember speaking to them back when I first could become a Goron myself. They had been tasked with making the grave and unintentionally covered up a hot spring that they regretted doing knowing the water could have been used for various thing. If I recalled correctly, one of them was Sandalwood though I couldn't recall who the other one was. In any case, I knew that one of them had been frozen while the other was slowly freezing to death himself. While I wanted to head on over to Maud's grave to help them once again, I knew that I had already done it once so doing it again held no proper merit.

" They could still be up there."

" At your grave, Darmani?"

I nodded. " I'm not sure what happened to them as when I woke up, I found myself back at the Mountain Village." I felt horrible for lying to Diamond Tiara like that but I couldn't tell her the truth or else she would really get confused.

" Guess all we can hope for is that they can find their way back down."

" You're not worried about them?"

" Of course I'm worried for their safety, Darmani, but with this abysmal cold snap all over Snowhead, the village is more important than stragglers." Diamond Tiara answered. " We can't even afford to send out a search party for them due to some unforeseen problems that arose after you supposedly died out there." She paused to gather her thoughts before carrying on but I knew what she was going to say next since I had already been through this when I came here the first time. When the elder left to find out what was going on up at the temple, his son started crying and he hasn't stopped leading everyone inside to suffer constant migraines."

" What can be done about it?"

" We need to find the Elder and ask him to come back."

" But what if he doesn't want to come back?"

That left Diamond Tiara stumped for a few seconds. " Well... the Elder did say that going to Snowhead Temple would solve the snow problem and that there was no one else who could go after you died leaving him the only one. I suppose if you were to explain things to him, it might convince him to come back to his son, but then he could still insist on going out of a sense of duty as our leader."

While I could after him, I had to focus on the real reason I was here. " Um... Do you know anything about gold dust?"

Diamond Tiara was surprised. " Huh? Gold dust? What does that have to do with finding the Elder?"

" It doesn't but I was wondering if you knew anything about the stuff." I answered. " You look as though you could do with a change of pace seeing as you've been on edge lately what with everything happening around here."

" I would like to talk about something else yes, but what of the Elder?"

" I'll tell you what." I began, grinning. " I promise to go and look for him after I'm done here, okay?"

As I continued grinning, deep down, I felt like a scumbag for saying that I would do all of these things and end up not doing them. Technically, I had saved Cranky--I somehow managed to remember that he was portraying the Goron Elder--before during a previous cycle so I had already kept my word, and yet, I still felt horrible for lying straight to Diamond Tiara's face all while getting her to talk about Maud's hidden stash of gold dust. I hoped my actions wouldn't condemn me in the future otherwise it would be one I'd rather not live in. The more I dabbled with time, the more I grew to hate it with a bloody passion.

Diamond Tiara smiled and relaxed her muscles a little. " To answer your question, Darmani, I do happen to know about gold dust. Heck, everyone in the village knows about the stuff since we compete for it every year whenever the Patriarch's Race comes about when it becomes spring. None of us have any idea where the Goron Elder finds it out there but he does and he makes sure a bottle filled with it is given out to whoever wins. If I remember rightly, you've won the race for the last five years, but you never did see any use for the gold dust so you hid it away somewhere as a means of a secret stash."

I then got excited. " Do you know where it is?"

" Um... I thought you of all Gorons would know that."

Crap! I quickly came up with another excuse. " I was wondering if you knew since you do stand guard out here."

" Of course I know where your stash is."

I breathed a sigh of relief. " I was planning on using some gold dust for a special project I was working on before my accident."

Diamond Tiara laughed. " So you finally found a use for the stuff after all this time? See, the Elder said you would come to appreciate the value of gold dust some day and that day has finally come at last. You made sure to share the location of your stash only to me since I was an obvious choice given my job around here and all." She pointed towards a platform located high up on a mountain and pointed down towards the bottom where I noticed a Deku Flower. " I don't know what convinced you to hide your stash up there but it's not like anyone can get their hands on it unless they could use that Deku Flower."

" Maybe I should find a better location."

" It couldn't hurt."

" Now how am I supposed to get up there?"

" None of us can climb up steep rock faces, Darmani, but you did manage to get yourself up there." Diamond Tiara answered. " Well... You technically got up there with my help but you didn't really like what happened. I can't help it if my rolling is stronger than most Gorons could ever hope to achieve. You seem desperate to want to get access to your stash so I'm going to provide you with a little boost but don't look at what I'm going to do okay?"

I had no idea what she was going to do so I agreed to not look at what she was doing. Despite not seeing her antics, I heard Diamond Tiara curl up into a ball, roll a short distance away, stop, shuffle about, and then absolute silence. My heart began racing as I waited to see what she had in mind, and that was when the thunderous noise that was Diamond Tiara came barreling along until she collided with me. The force from her collision sent me flying across the village--I flailed my arms in sheer panic--until I landed face-first in the snow though my back definitely didn't enjoy the experience.

No wonder she said I wouldn't like what would happen because of a prior experience she had with Maud. No wonder no one ever found her stash of gold dust as you would have to have been absolutely insane to want to be ejected all the way up here. At the very least, the overview of the village was nice so it wasn't a complete loss. My eyes then noticed a pile of snow that looked out of place, indicating the location of Maud's stash yet it was a Piece of Heart that was partly buried that really caught my attention. I assumed the proper way to get up here was by using the Deku Flower yet that would have involved asking the Deku Scrub who currently occupied it.

Rummaging through the snow, I was surprised to see five bottles filled with gold dust just lying there. The cold hadn't caused any of them to suffer any kind of imperfections, a testament to Maud's ability to take proper care of her belongings, yet I wasn't about to take one of her bottles despite her no longer being alive. Instead, I intended on pouring the contents from one of her bottles into one of my own. That way, I would receive the gold dust in good faith all while ensuring that Maud's hard work would remain intact. It took only a few moments to pour the gold dust--it looked so beautiful--into my own bottle before corking it back up and putting it behind my back.

Covering up the remaining bottles, I turned to face Diamond Tiara, who waved at me from a distance. I waved back at her and she resumed standing guard leaving me to figure out how to get back down without hurting myself--Gorons didn't like falling from great heights. I then slapped my forehead upon realizing that I could just use warp my way off of this platform by playing the Song of Soaring. Taking out the ocarina again, it transformed into the drums that Maud was known for playing, and played the Song of Soaring. Just as I was about to focus on where I wanted to go, the howling of a wolf echoed all around me.

Night of the Second Day - 36 Hours Remain.

While that certainly caught me off guard--I really needed my own way of telling time in this world--it wasn't enough to stop me from focusing on where I wanted to go. I closed my eyes and concentrated on wanting to go back to the Mountain Village. The wings once again protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, spun around several times, and just like that, I disappeared into the ether. I then reappeared several moments later back in the village by the Owl Statue and proceeded to walk over to the Mountain Smithies. One thing about being a Goron that I liked was their weight made trudging through snow so much easier.

Reaching the front door, I was about to open it when Princess Twilight reminded me that I was still a Goron--I couldn't ask them to hand over a sword to one who uses their fists instead of a blade to fight with. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Goron Mask, and flipped back my hair just as the cold temperature began affecting me again. Reaching out for the doorknob and turning it, I entered the smithies' building where my body immediately started getting warmer courtesy of their hearth. I was so glad that I melted the ice that covered it earlier otherwise I would still be freezing my butt off.

" Ugo! Ugoh!" Lord Tirek said as he swung his hammer about.

" Ah! A customer!" Fancy Pants said.

I jumped out of my skin--not literally--upon Lord Tirek shouting out like that. " I'm back."

Fancy Pants sat up on his couch. " Well, I was beginning to think that you weren't ever going to come back at all. Your sword was finished early this morning and Gabora has been holding onto it this entire time, waiting to give it back to you."

" Ugo! Ugo!" Lord Tirek said.

" You needn't worry about Gabora breaking it or anything." Fancy Pants said. " While he may be a hulking behemoth who has the brain of a Deku Stick, he is very delicate when it comes to handling the swords of our customers. In fact, he's far better at handling them than I am which doesn't bother me at all. Now then, may I present to you, the Razor Sword, a blade that has no equal, and will certainly prove to be a cut above the rest."

Little did he know that I had the Great Fairy's Sword, a blade that was stronger than any other in Termina. Not even his best work could compare to the blade that once belonged to one of the Great Fairies. Lord Tirek then leaned forward before dropping the Razor Sword into my hands. It was the same as what they had done before so I knew what to expect, yet now I had what they required to make it even stronger. While it wouldn't be as powerful as what I received from the Great Fairy of Kindness, it was going to be my go-to sword because of needing my shield for protecting purposes.

" Ugo!"

" Now keep in mind that after you've used this one hundred times, the blade will lose its edge and will return to its original sharpness." Fancy Pants said. " If you want to retain its current edge, all you have to do is come back and see us. and we'll restore those uses back as though your blade were newly forged. It will however, cost you about twenty rupees so don't expect us doing it for free. We have our livelihoods to think about and doing charity work isn't one of them. Now then, if you were to have some gold dust on hand, I could upgrade your weapon even further to the point where it will remain permanently powerful."

" Ugoh! Ugoh!"

" You still have some time to get some gold dust."

" Ugo!"

Fancy Pants nodded. " You see, we won't be doing regular business tomorrow because the Carnival of Time will be underway. There is no way Gabora and I are going to miss out on the action so unless you've got the goods then there's nothing we can do. Normally, we were considering closing up shop right now and head on over to Clock Town in the middle of the night but we're feeling a might generous right now."

I reached behind my back and pulled out the bottle of gold dust. " I was able to get my hands on this."

Seeing the bottle caused Fancy Pants' eyes to flare up. " Is that what I think it is!?"

" Ugoh! Ugo-oh! Ugoh! Ugo!" Lord Tirek answered.

" It's gold dust and it's even top quality!"

" Ugo!"

" How in the world did you get your hands on this?" Fancy Pants asked. " Sure, gold dust is hard to come by but what you have in your bottle could have only come from the secret location known only to the Goron Elder. In fact, he gives out bottles of the stuff in their Patriarch's Race they have every year, yet isn't that held during the spring? If you haven't noticed already but the weather outside is anything but spring. So tell me... How did you manage to get your hands on this gold dust?"

I couldn't reveal that I got it from Maud's secret stash so I needed to come up with another reason. " It was given to me by their strongest warrior."

" Isn't that Darmani?"

" Ugoh!" Lord Tirek added.

I nodded. " She said she didn't know what to do with it so she said I could have it."

I hoped both Fancy Pants and Lord Tirek believed my little reason even though it was again, technically the truth but not quite. If anything, all I was doing was making some careful alterations to the narrative in order to protect certain things from becoming known. Maud through her vision in my mind wanted me to have some of the gold dust she had collected as a result of winning so many races over at the Goron Track so I wasn't stealing from her but rather using it to help save Termina from destruction. I couldn't let them know where and how I got the gold dust in case they decided to go and find some for themselves over at the village.

" Well... Darmani was known for not caring much at all for baubles." Fancy Pants said.

" Ugo-oh! Ugo!" Lord Tirek said.

" It's a shame that she died the way she did according to what the Gorons have said." Fancy Pants said. " I'm guessing you were able to see her before she journeyed up to that temple located at the peak of Snowhead. You were lucky then, kid. Anyway, with the gold dust, I can use it to re-forge your sword and make it stronger than ever. In fact, you have more than enough gold dust in your bottle. In other words, there will be some left over."

" So how much will it cost me?" I asked.

" Normally, I would charge you a hefty amount considering the material that's being used is very rare."

" But?"

" But... Just this once, I'm going to do it for free."

" Ugoh! Ugo-oh! Ugo! Ugoh!" Lord Tirek said.

" I know, I know, Gabora, but we owe this kid so much." Fancy Pants said. " If not for her, we would still be trying to figure out how to melt the ice that froze our hearth and we wouldn't have gotten to see such pure gold dust as what she brought to us with our own eyes. No, I've no intention of charging her 300 rupees." He turned towards me, his outstretched palm yearning for both my sword and the bottle that contained the golden goods. " Please don't let anyone know that I'm doing this favour for you, especially any Gorons as they are my regular customers and them learning that I did something for free would make them want the same treatment."

I handed back my sword over to Lord Tirek by dropping it into his hand. " Can I at least keep my bottle?"

Fancy Pants nodded. " Just dump the gold dust onto the plate that Gabora will provide for you. Just like before, your sword will be ready by tomorrow morning so please come by then to pick it up. Hopefully, you won't keep us waiting for too long."

Lord Tirek then reached for a nearby plate, grabbed it, and placed it in front of me before pointing down at it using his free hand. Knowing that I shouldn't keep him waiting, I uncorked the bottle of gold dust, and turned it upside down before the contents dropped out onto the plate. Satisfied that I had done as he wanted, Lord Tirek took both the plate and my sword before turning around to get down to work. Knowing that everything was in good hands, I decided to take my leave of the Mountain Smithies by going back outside where it was now even colder than ever because of nightfall.

" That turned out better than we expected." Twilight said.

" At least I managed to get my sword upgraded without having to pay for it." I said whilst trying to keep warm.

" Good thing you melted their hearth when you did."

" Can we go back to Clock Town now?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " We should have just enough time to get over to the Curiosity Shop and wait for Lightning Dust to arrive. Just make sure she doesn't spot you otherwise she's likely to run away and that means having to start over again. You know, you could use the Stone Mask."

" How would that help?"

" Remember that it allows you to blend in with your surroundings as though you were a stone."

" I get what you're saying." I said as I struggled to take out the ocarina. " By using that mask, Lightning Dust should hopefully be unable to see me unless she is one of those who is completely unaffected by the mask's power. If the latter ends up happening, Twilight, I'm going to have one of the worst bouts of rages I've ever had in my life. I know I sounds like I'm exaggerating here but I'm dead serious!"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I have a feeling it will work."

I hoped that Her Highness was right about this one. I mean, she has almost always been right about this kind of thing--the times where she was wrong was because she didn't know the situation at hand through no fault of her own--so doubting her wasn't really a good idea. Besides, I didn't even know how I was going to approach the inevitable meeting between Lightning Dust and Iron Will until she gave me the suggestion. Choosing to go with her idea and raising the ocarina to my now freezing lips, I struggled to play the Song of Soaring and focused on wanting to go back to Clock Town where it was so much warmer than the mountains.

" I was thinking about that man who was carrying that sun mask, Tael." Starlight said. Spike didn't respond to her prompting her to check to see if he was okay. He appeared to be keeping himself quiet as though he didn't have anything to say. Starlight felt very uncomfortable and tried to see if she could get him talking. " Didn't I apologize for making you cry even though I've no idea what even happened?" Again, Spike remained quiet and she began getting angry but refrained from completely losing her cool like she did before. " I promise that I won't make you cry anymore, okay?"

Spike looked in her direction but seemed lifeless. " It's not that which has me upset."

" Then what is it?"

" It's that mask of yours, Skull Kid."

" You know what my stance is when it comes to keeping it on my face, Tael."

" Maybe you should consider returning it to that woman you stole it from." Spike suggested. " At first, you, me, and Tatl were having the time of our lives, seeing what kind of powers it possessed, but lately, you've been slowly changing, becoming something that just frightens my very soul to its core. I don't know what it is that I'm feeling but that mask has a mind of its own. You can call me crazy for coming up with such an outlandish theory but it's how I currently feel."

" Are you saying I don't know how to control it?"

Spike shook his head though made sure to keep a close eye on Starlight in case she would turn violent like she did before. " We don't even know what that mask of yours is capable of doing but I'd like to think that woman knows more than anyone else. I know you don't want to give up your power since it would mean no longer being able to pull all those pranks but maybe you should consider my words carefully."

" You really want me to give it back?"

" I do."

Laughing as hard and as loudly as possible, Starlight laughed so hard that the mask almost fell off her face. " Why in the world would I want to give this back? Ever since I first placed it on my face and acquired my magic, I've been able to pay back everyone in this world who either wronged me or were thinking of doing it. There is no way I'm ever giving this mask back and nothing you say will make me change my mind. Besides, I can't give it back until I've completed my ultimate prank." Looking up at the moon, Starlight chuckled to herself before glowing in a dark aura that radiated all around her.

Spike noticed what was happening and responded by cowering away behind one of the green jars that were scattered around the top of the Clock Tower. He knew that what his friend was doing was completely out of control yet his words held no meaning towards her. Tried as he might, Starlight only wanted to see how much further she could go with her power even if it meant destroying everything and everyone. What had originally started out as a series of pranks aimed at causing mayhem had become more malicious in their intent over time until she--Starlight--had reached a point where only obliteration was her calling.

He just couldn't understand it. How could Starlight have become so murderous in just a short period of time? Was the mask really developing a mind of its own? Spike couldn't believe his own words since the idea of a mask being capable of independent thought was impossible. And yet, neither he, Starlight, or Princess Twilight--when she was under the identity of Tatl before coming into contact with Sunset--really knew anything about Majora's Mask when Starlight acquired it from Sonata Dusk. The only hope Spike had now would be if he could convince his friend to willingly give up her power before it was too late.

Judging from how she had been shifting between her regular and twisted personalities, Spike's chances of success were extremely low. In his heart, he had proven to be weak all because he couldn't dissuade her but then he also believed that she too had a weak heart. Allowing herself to become consumed by Majora's Mask meant she lacked free will and instead could be used like a puppet. The only hope Spike had left was whether the girl who had been changed into a Deku Scrub, Sunset Shimmer, could save Starlight from herself before the world was destroyed, but there wasn't much time before the moon would crash.

" Um... Skull Kid?"

Starlight turned towards Spike, the eyes of her mask glowing in an eerie light. " This power is far too great for the likes of you or this puppet to comprehend but once everything has been consumed and become nothing more than dust within the cosmos, nothing will even matter anymore. I do find it adorable how creatures such as yourself believe that this mortal coil can be saved but its fate was determined long ago. How you cling onto a false belief that all will be saved by someone who thinks they can bring forth the protectors who have defended this world since ancient times. No wonder I allow such a mewling of existence such as yourself to remain alive."

" Who are you?"

" I am the one who shall consume everything."

" Why are you doing this?"

Starlight laughed in an unnatural way. " Why? All will become clear when the allotted time comes. Until then, all you can do is wait and see what happens. Know that only you are aware of my presence but also know that your friend nor anyone else will believe your words. They will think you are insane, believing that an ordinary mask is a sentient being, capable of decimation on an apocalyptic level." Laughing, Starlight began clutching her head like she were in pain even though she was relatively fine. " Hmmm... It seems this one wishes to assume control once again so I shall allow such pleasure for now."

" I'll tell someone about you."

" A fairy like you has no power."

" What do you mean?"

" No one will believe you even if you were to say it to them directly." Starlight answered. " All you can do is watch and wait for everything to come to an end." Clutching her head even more, Starlight stumbled about for a few moments before coming to a stop and looking at Spike with confusion on her face. " Now where were we? Yes! I remember now! I'm not going to give back this mask as doing so would mean losing this cool magic power. Besides, I was originally talking about that man who had that sun mask who thought he was better than me but now he's going to learn what it means to be beneath the notice of everyone else in this town."

" Skull Kid?"

" What's wrong Tael?"

" I... I... I..."

" Well? What's wrong?"

When the Song of Soaring returned me to Clock Town, the first thing I did was bask in the warmth of the town after experiencing the freezing cold that was Snowhead. My body felt like it was going to shatter so I stood perfectly still until every last part of my body could move again without feeling uncomfortable. Sure, I could have just ran about for a while to get my body's circulation working again but just standing about and taking it all in felt so much better. Princess Twilight thought I looked ridiculous acting in such a manner but she knew I needed to be at my best especially since there was still more to do regarding Scootaloo and her love problem.

Once I felt that my body was back to normal, I made my way over to the west part of town where the Curiosity Shop was located. According to another clock hanging on the wall, the time was only 8:30pm. The Curiosity Shop wouldn't be open for another ninety minutes so I had no other choice but to wait for it to open its doors for business. Of course, I still had to wait around even after it opens for Lightning Dust to show up, and there was no way of knowing where that would be. It seemed that in my efforts to arrive ahead of schedule, it wasn't going according to plan.

I had no intention of going anywhere else so I chose to make camp by sitting on a nearby bench. I thought about catching some sleep--the thought of sitting around and doing nothing for a few hours was too much for me to bear--but that would only make me a victim especially if Lightning Dust came along in the process. Following the words of Her Highness, I took out the Stone Mask, the first time I had done so since I went to the Gerudo Pirates' Fortress, and placed it on my face, the magic within it activating though I couldn't be sure if I was blending in with my surroundings or just looked like one weird geek.

As I sat there waiting for something to happen, I began to think about all that I had accomplished so far on this journey. While there had been a fair share of blunders that could have been avoided had I been better suited for the situation at hand, there had also been incredible successes that were a testament to my skills. And yet, certain people had lost their lives in the name of a greater game that continued growing dire even when light itself was slowly being brought back. I knew there was nothing I could have done to save them as death claimed them long before I came to Termina but a part of me wished they could have been spared.

Then there was Ganondorf, who only seemed interested in me--and apparently Princess Twilight now--and nothing more. Given how he conquered Hyrule during my previous journey and ruled over it with an iron fist for many years, I thought he would have wanted to conquer Termina as it was a land similar to Hyrule. Yet not once has he ever expressed such a desire--he did once claim a desire to conquer Equestria but that was his way of goading me--instead allowing events to carry themselves out as originally intended. I'd love nothing more than to be free of his torment but I knew that wasn't going to happen until I could find a way to defeat him for good.

Princess Twilight then bopped me on the head to snap me out of my daydream and whispered that it was now past 10:00pm--I never would have imagined that my daydreaming would cause time to fly by in an instant--so now I could enter the Curiosity Shop but I couldn't as Lightning Dust hadn't arrived yet. There was no way of knowing where she was going to come from so keeping my eyes open for her would become my prerogative. I then waited for roughly an hour when I suddenly heard the sounds of footsteps coming from the gate that went outside to the western section of Termina Field.

Looking to my right, I immediately froze upon seeing Lightning Dust prancing about until she reached the door to the Curiosity Shop. At first, I thought she had noticed me but she ignored me entirely thanks to the Stone Mask making me invisible to her--Princess Twilight was right about it--and went inside. I got up from the bench, walked up to the door, and checked to see if anyone was making noise on the other side. I couldn't hear anything so I went inside making sure not to make any noise myself in case my mask could still cause me to make sounds despite being invisible.

Sitting behind the counter, Iron Will lurched forward and grinned upon seeing Lightning Dust. " I've been expecting you, Sakon."

" Let's get this over with quickly." Lightning Dust said in a nervous manner, looking left and right several times.

" You needn't worry about the town militia coming around here... Unless, you did something to offend them."

" N-no, I didn't do anything of the sort."

" Then why are you acting so nervous all of a sudden?" Iron Will asked. " You've been coming here for months with product to sell to me and not once were you acting in a manner that screamed peculiar. Why not relax a little and show me what you have tonight? I guarantee you will be paid appropriately for the business."

Gulping and then relaxing, Lightning Dust took off the bag that she held behind her back, placed it on the counter, opened it, and took out a Bomb Bag. I immediately recognized it as the one that I purchased from the Bomb Shop during an earlier cycle of time. " I got this pretty easily though I did have to flee before the town militia could catch me. It's still in mint condition so quality isn't an issue here."

" How did you get exactly?"

" You don't need to know that."

Iron Will shook his head. " From a business standpoint, I need to know to be sure that the goods are legitimate, I kid you not. I'm not going to sell either an inferior or defective product to those who come through that door as that's just not good business."

Lightning Dust threw up her hands. " Fine! I stole it from the Old Lady of the Bomb Shop next door!"

" That explains why you're acting so nervous, Sakon." Iron Will said. " Given that they were to have this item in stock over at the Bomb Shop, I suppose the value would need to be similar to what one would expect from them. I'll still sell this to one of my other customers as Bomb Bags are quite a hot commodity, but I want to make sure that I get a good deal in the end otherwise you'll have come all this way for nothing and I know you wouldn't like that now, would you?"

" No, I wouldn't."

" Then let's get down to business."

" What would be a good price to you?"

" One hundred."

" What!?" Lightning Dust exclaimed, her hands slamming down onto the counter. " You've got to be kidding me here!"

Iron Will shook his head. " That is my honest opinion of its value, I kid you not. Do you believe it's worth more than one hundred rupees?"

Lightning Dust shouted. " Of course it's worth more than that! You have no idea what lengths I had to go to in order to get it for you. Every time I hope to get a good deal from you, you end up giving me the short end but not this time. Don't be such a rupee pincher, you miser! Two hundred rupees is the selling price and no less than that."

It was clear that Iron Will wasn't happy about his client's sudden shift in attitude. " Is that what you really think? Well, why don't I just offer you even less? And you know that this is the Bomb Shop's product, right? You said do when you told me how you got your hands on it as part of my needing to know for my other customers. How about if I tell them all about you? I'm sure the town militia would be even more interested in knowing that a greedy thief such as yourself is prowling about during these difficult times what with so many problems plaguing the common folk."

" You wouldn't dare."

" I kid you not."

Lighting Dust threw up her hands again. " All right! I'll take your offer, but you're guilty, too!"

" Guilty of what?"

" For being an accomplice."

Now it was Iron Will's turn to slam his hands onto the counter. " Don't be a fool! A seller of stolen goods is just a middleman who's trying to provide his customers with good product which in turn will earn me an honest profit while they get their hands on what they're looking for. Despite you telling me how you got your hands on this Bomb Bag, I'm going to act as though I know nothing about your actions. Heck, you might not even be telling me the truth as to how you got it in the first place. If it comes to me, I buy it! I'm a charitable organization that helps people in need!"

" Alright..."

" What?"

Once again, Lightning Dust threw her hands up in the air. " I... I understand. Then the total is..."

" It's now fifty rupees instead of one hundred."

Lightning Dust slammed her hands on the table. " You can't just change the price whenever you want!"

" So you don't want me to take it off your hands then?"

" I never said that!"

" But you're implying that you are, I kid you not."

" It's a deal! It's a deal!" Lightning Dust shouted. " I'll sell you the Bomb Bag for fifty rupees and our conversation never took place." I then moved closer when I heard her start mumbling under her breath over how furious she was at being given such a bad deal. " The nerve of this miser. How dare he change the price just because I questioned his motives in selling stolen goods? I should have just walked away but I need the money if I plan on fleeing before it all ends. I just need to make sure I don't run into that kid whose mask I stole some time ago just because he was an easy target. I should go back to my hideout in the valley and make some preparations in case he comes for a visit."

I suddenly had the urge to call out when Lightning Dust mentioned that but Princess Twilight quickly covered my mouth using her body before shaking her head. In the heat of the moment of finding out where her hideout was located, I almost revealed myself thus I would have exposed the fact that I had been listening in on them. Judging from how they continued arguing with one another with no signs of ending, I decided to take my leave as there was no point in sticking around. Tip-toeing back over to the door and slowly opening it, I looked behind me to see if their arguing was still going on--it was--and I sighed before heading outside and taking off the Stone Mask.

While I was a little bit annoyed at how Iron Will conducted himself, he was still an honourable man even if his service was questionable. Lightning Dust, on the other hand, was beyond redemption and needed to be shown what can happen when you allowed yourself to become nothing but pure scum. She mentioned that her hideout was located in a valley and that immediately meant it was somewhere in Ikana. Given that the undead were roaming around again due to everything going back to the way they were before I closed the Stone Tower, her hideout had to be where the undead would never go.

" That was quite the bombshell Lightning Dust mentioned, huh?" I asked.

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, so now we know which region her hideout is located in. Unfortunately, we don't know where in Ikana it's located in so unless we can find out some more information, we could end up searching until we have to reset time again."

" No way she's going to say anything else given the argument in there." I said as I pointed back to the door with my thumb.

" Then we must inform Tender Taps of what we know."

" I'm assuming we need to use the Song of Double Time again?"

" It's not like you have anything else to do right now until the morning."

Taking out the ocarina again, I looked up at Princess Twilight. " Should we go straight to the beginning of the final day and then move forward a bit further or just to the beginning of the final day and see where things go from there?"

" The other option." Twilight answered. " We have no idea how the rest of this side quest is going to turn out so going straight to the beginning of the final day guarantees we won't miss out on anything important. I suggest getting your sword back as you look weird having only just a shield, and when that's done, we can come back here and let Tender Taps know that we've found the general location of Lightning Dust's hideout."

I then played the Song of Double Time. " Hopefully, things will get much easier from here." Concentrating, I pictured wanting to move forward through time and the clocks began appearing around me before propelling me forward to the next day.

Dawn of the Final Day - 24 Hours Remain.

As soon as the cucco cawed to inform me that the final day was upon me, I felt a vibration all around and almost fell down onto my butt. I knew that it was the moon's doing given it was now even closer than before but I hoped it wouldn't become a problem later on provided everything turned out well with Scootaloo and Tender Taps. Princess Twilight was right in that I needed to get my sword back first before anything else so I played the Song of Soaring and focused on going back to the Mountain Village. As wings protruded from my back once more, the thought of having to trudge through the snow sent a shiver down my spine.

The wings wrapped themselves around me, spun around several times, and was whisked off. Moments later, I arrived in the Mountain Village and was immediately beset by the cold--it wasn't as bad now due to it being daytime rather than nightfall--but I wasn't about to stay here for very long. Trudging through the snow, I began thinking about what my sword would look like now that it had been forged using the gold dust obtained from Maud's secret stash. I thought it would look like a golden sword but such a notion was silly at best but I was still eager over the entire prospect.

Once I reached the Mountain Smithies, I kicked the loose snow off of my boots, grabbed the doorknob, and went inside where Lord Tirek greeted me in a manner that was either very joyful or downright threatening. " Ugoh! Ugo-oh! Ugo!"

" Ah! I see you came here as soon as the sun came up." Fancy Pants said as he sat up on his couch.

I blushed as I rubbed the back of my head. " I needed to get here as soon as possible as you said you were going to the carnival."

" We were planning on leaving once we were finished with our orders."

" How many do you have left?"

" Yours was the last one."

" Ugo-ugo!" Lord Tirek said.

Fancy Pants waved his hand in a kind gesture. " Quite right, Gabora. Our customer must surely be eager to see what her sword looks like now."

Lord Tirek turned around, grabbed something that was behind him, turned back, extended his arm, and dropped a wicked looking sword into my hands--he made sure that the hilt would be what I could grab so as to avoid cutting myself on the sharp blade. While the Great Fairy's Sword was beautiful beyond all reasoning, this weapon looked real edgy, like it had been forged specifically to battle against the strongest of monsters and with a pretty good reach given the blade's length. I couldn't believe that this used to be the Kokiri Sword, the very sword that had been there by my side since my journey began.

" Ugo! Ugoh!"

" This is the Gilded Sword..." Fancy Pants began. " If you thought the Razor Sword was powerful, this sword blows the other one out of the water. With its increased range, you can attack from a safer distance and if you were to use some magic, it can really create some fireworks."

" Ugoh!"

" Correct again, Gabora." Fancy Pants said. " Maybe you're not as smart as a Deku Stick after all. This is the strongest sword we can make! No amount of effort can be done to make anything stronger. No matter how many times you use it, it will never lose its edge. Try it! I guarantee you will love what we've done. Oh, I used up most of the gold dust during the re-forging process so there was just a tiny bit left. I figured such a small amount would have no value so I decided to get rid of it. I suppose you could have sold what was left but I doubt you would have earned much."

" Ugo-Ugo!"

" With that order done, we are finally ready to close up show and head on over to Clock Town."

" Ugoh!"

" The snow will make it difficult to traverse but you're more than capable of getting us through, Gabora."

Thanking them both for everything they had done, I took my leave of the Mountain Smithies and went back outside. I then swung the Gilded Sword around a few times just to get a feel for it and I was instantly impressed. Unlike the Great Fairy's Sword, this one only required one hand so I could still use my shield to protect myself. Not only that, the Gilded Sword finally had that reach and attack power increase I had longed sought for. I had no doubt that I was going to break it in real nice--in a good way of course--so now I could go back to town to reveal to Tender Taps what I found out about Lightning Dust.

Playing the Song of Soaring again, I focused my efforts on going back to Clock Town. Once more, wings protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, spun around several times, and whisked me away again. Upon arriving in town moments later, I made my way across South Clock Town, up the stairs, into the Laundry Pool, along the walkway that ran alongside the pool itself, and into Tender Taps' secret residence--I was certain he was still there as he had no where else to go. Unfortunately, I was shocked to discover that he was no longer there. Instead, Iron Will was standing before me.

" You must be the green hat kid, right?" Iron Will asked.

" How do you know that?" I asked.

" Kafei told me to meet you here."

" You know of him?"

Iron Will nodded. " He wanted me to give you a message."

Despite how dubious his claim was, I had no other choice but to listen to what he had to say. " Alright... I'll listen."

Iron Will sat down on a nearby chair, cracked his knuckles, and looked up at the ceiling before he began to tell his story. " Now Kafei... I've known him since he was real little. I know it sounds strange, a guy like me with my kind of business, associating with someone of his status, but it's true. Most people never understood my line of work while others condemned me, but not Kafei, I kid you not. He always understood where I was coming from and was always curious about what kind of customers came to the Curiosity Shop. It's that very reason, the condemnations, that forced me to only open at night and to be secretive about my business."

" I'm surprised the town militia have never tried to shut you down."

" As long as no one knows, I can continue with my business though I will admit that I worry too much to the point where it affects my health."

" Have you seen him lately, Kafei, I mean?"

Iron Will nodded as he rubbed the bridge of his nose. " Yes, I saw him early this morning, but when he showed up looking all young in that little brat body, I didn't know what I was seeing and believed my eyes were playing tricks. How could he have become a kid!? It made no sense to me!" He slammed his fist into the table located next to the chair and caused it to buckle under the sudden pressure and fall apart into pieces that scattered across the ground. " Sorry... I didn't mean to do that, I kid you not. I'm just worried about Kafei is all."

" I understand."

" Anyway, all it took was one glance at that Keaton Mask he was carrying for me to realize that I was looking at my old friend." Iron Will said. " If it wasn't for that mask, I would have called him delusional and a liar for thinking he could deceive me, but I knew that his mask was legitimate. After all, I gave him that mask a long time ago when he was just li'l Kafei. A strange woman gave it to me when I was planning on leaving Termina to figure out my calling and said I should give it to someone who meant an awful lot to me. That encounter convinced me to want to go into business selling unusual items no matter where I got them from."

That explained why he had a place called the Curiosity Shop and I was curious--no pun intended--as to who this woman may have been. It could have been Sonata Dusk given she sold masks for a living but then why did she come here back then? More importantly, how did she come here in the first place? It was an answer that defied logic and was most likely impossible to reach given how Sonata was aloof in her mannerisms and chose to hold her cards to her chest very closely. I doubted Iron Will could even remember what she looked like let alone her name so I had to change the subject to something related to that Keaton Mask he mentioned.

" You gave Kafei a Keaton Mask?" I asked. I seemed to recall getting one of my own during my previous journey yet I didn't have it for very long. I apparently gave it away to someone soon after I got it yet they needed it way more--it was for their child.

" A long time ago." Iron Will answered. " I didn't know he kept it that well for so long. To be honest, I thought it was adorable how it looked on him but he gave it back to me saying he didn't need it anymore and asked me to give it to someone who would make better use of it. I'm not sure why, but...I want to give this to you."

Reaching behind his back and fiddling about for a moment, Iron Will took out the very mask that Tender Taps had worn on his face when I initially talked to him. Gazing it as he held it in his hands, I remembered getting it before in Hyrule but again, I gave it to someone who needed it more than I did. Now, I needed it in order to acquire the ultimate mask, the one thing that supposedly would allow me to counter the power of the mask that Starlight wore on her face. I knew very little about Keatons other than they were mysterious creatures often spoken of in legend.

" Are you sure about this?"

Iron Will nodded. " Kafei would have wanted it this way. This is the Keaton Mask, a mask that was very popular with children mainly because legend says that the Keaton itself would only appear before children who had pure hearts and believed in its existence. If you were to wear this whilst investigating a circle of bushes that come to life, you be able to summon the Keaton though it will definitely figure out your ploy. At least, that's what Kafei always said about it, I kid you not." He handed over the mask and a smile appeared on his face. I knew he must have felt good giving the mask to me in addition to letting out so much grief as a result of his life.

" Where is Kafei?"

" He's not here anymore."

" What happened to him?"

" A customer came to my shop last night." Iron Will answered. I made sure not to let on that I was there listening in on the conversation. " Now Kafei sees her, and his colour just changes as though he knew her from somewhere, but he didn't go running after her until after he revealed himself to me. Unfortunately, I'm well familiar with this woman given she is a regular who comes to my shop often to sell me goods she gets through questionable means. She's a greedy thief named Sakon. While she acts all innocent by prancing about, she can be utterly ruthless and steal from you without you even realizing it. From what I remember, she's from Ikana Village though not the village proper."

" So that's where she resides."

Iron Will nodded. " Knowing Sakon, she is likely in Ikana Village right now but is sure to come back to town for one last robbery before leaving for her hideout. I remember her saying that no one will ever find it as it's off the beaten path where only a Deku Scrub resides. I never understood what that meant but she was pretty confident about her hideout being hidden out of sight, I kid you not." He then suddenly remember something and reached behind his back before taking out a fancy looking envelope. " I forgot to give this to you. Kafei wishes for you to deliver it to his father as a means of giving him piece of mind. He doesn't care how you deliver it so long as you do."

I took the letter from Iron Will. " What will you do now?"

" I must go back to my shop and prepare for tonight."

" But what about the moon?"

" That doesn't scare me in the least, I kid you not." Iron Will answered. " I have a duty to provide my customers with worthwhile products even if it means my life becomes forfeit as a result of something falling from above. Anyway, if you do find Kafei wherever he is in Ikana right now, please watch over him as he can get pretty emotional when it comes to keeping his promises. He's sure to do something stupid should he run into Sakon so you being there to back him up would make me very happy. You should deliver that package first before doing anything else as his father must be worried sick about him by now, I kid you not."

Thanking Iron Will for not only the Keaton Mask and the package, but also for telling me about his life as well as where Tender Taps was, I walked back down the stairs, and opened the door to leave. Now things had gotten much more intense than I originally thought. While Tender Taps was foolish to have followed someone like Lightning Dust to Ikana, I could understand why he did it. To get back what had been stolen from him, he was risking his life by following a dangerous criminal. Had I been in his shoes, I would have done something similar because I was reckless.

While I wanted to go to Ikana and see if Tender Taps was okay, Iron Will had given me something that I needed to deliver to Troubleshoes. Princess Twilight revealed that what I had been given was called "The Special Delivery to Mama" and had been declared priority mail. Did he seriously name this letter that!? Not only did it sound absolutely unnecessary, it didn't roll off the tongue and I couldn't help but laugh at how stupid sounding it was. But, I would keep those opinions to myself since it was something that Tender Taps had written from the bottom of his heart for his father who was waiting for me to tell him what I found.

I now had a dilemma to figure out. " How should I go about doing this?"

" What do you mean?" Twilight asked.

" Should I deliver this to Troubleshoes myself or have Aria do it?"

" That is a good question."

" If you were in my position, Twilight, what would you do?"

Princess Twilight thought it over for a couple of minutes before giving me an answer. " If it were up to me, I would have Aria deliver the special delivery to Troubleshoes. After all, she is the town's resident postwoman so it's her duty to deliver letters no matter what may be happening right now. On the other hand, Troubleshoes should be informed as to the well-being of his son so giving him the package in person would give him closure. This is a difficult decision to make, Sunset, and one you must decide upon."

" I don't want to have to go through this a second time."

" Then listen to what your heart is saying."

" I have been."

" And?"

" My heart is telling me to have Aria make the delivery." I answered. " Besides, I don't even know where Troubleshoes is right now. I mean, he could still be at the mayor's residence for all we know or he could be somewhere else entirely given how many have already fled town by this point."

" The post office isn't very far so hopefully Aria can deliver the package."

Running across the edge of the water all the way around, I left the Laundry Pool and was back in South Clock Town again. Like before at this point in the three day cycle, many people have already fled while others continued on with their lives as normal. In a way, I felt jealous of them because they were being care-free despite destruction looming above their heads and how it was coming ever closer to its final impact. On the other hand, they were fools for not wanting to prepare for the worst. But then, how could they? What was happening was beyond their understanding and perhaps they didn't want to dwell on it.

I ran into West Clock Town by using the southern route and ran past all of the shops until I stopped in front of the post office. Reaching for the door knob, I pulled my hand away at the last minute out of fear that Aria may have been out on another delivery. If she was then I had to wait for her to come back and that could take some time given she had a schedule that she followed without fail. Pressing my ear up against the door, I could hear someone sniveling on the other side. Opening the door, I entered the post office and saw that Aria was there but was sitting on her bed and acting like she was praying.

My eyes then noticed another letter on her desk and I couldn't help but read it. It was written by Aria but with shaky handwriting, an indication that she had recently been worried about something. It said: "I have a request for my hard-working self. All of the townsfolk have taken refuge. I want myself to flee, too. Even if it is not written on the schedule, I want myself to flee. Please..." Even Aria wanted to flee but couldn't as she was bound to deliver the mail. Such a sad state given she had no choice unless given an order by Troubleshoes, who served as the town's postmaster. I knew now how to deal with the package.

I approached Aria. " Are you alright?"

" WAAAAH!" Aria answered as she jumped slightly before tumbling down onto her bed. " You started me! I was in the middle of thinking about something very important and you came along and disrupted my thought process." She got onto her feet long enough to sit back down on her bed, her glum expression telling me that she was thinking about running away but had her hands tied. Aria then noticed me and blinked at me before looking forward. " Oh... It's only you. If you came here to rub it in over how you counted up to ten without looking at a clock, then take your business elsewhere."

" I looked at the message you wrote for yourself."

Aria sighed. " Pitful isn't it? I'm the postwoman around here so I should be focused on delivering letters yet I want to flee like so many others. Ohhh... I want to flee! I really do more than anything else right now, b-but it's just not written on the schedule." She then grabbed a small notepad on a table that was next to her bed and shoved it in my face prompting me to grab it from her hands and look for myself. " As you can see, I must go out on another delivery run within the next couple of hours."

" Then why not just flee?"

" Are you mad!?" Aria exclaimed. " I can't do that!"

" Why not?"

" To me, the delivery schedule is the highest priority."

" More so than your life?"

Aria nodded. " It's the oath I took when I agreed to become the postwoman years ago. And yet, the only thing that is higher than the delivery schedule would be mail that has been declared a priority by whoever wrote it originally."

That was the cue I needed to present Aria with what Iron Will gave me. " I was given this a short while ago and was wondering if you could do something about it."

Grabbing the letter from my hands, Aria combed over it and her jaw dropped as she gasped. " This is a priority mail seal! This is the highest of priorities. Rarely have I seen something like this with my own eyes yet there is no doubt that this is priority mail." I could tell her mood had gotten brighter as now she had a purpose yet it wasn't completely satisfying given she still refused to flee but I supposed it was better than nothing. " According to what's written on the package, this is to be delivered to the postmaster. The only place he could possibly be at right now would be the Milk Bar so I shall go and deliver it at once."

Aria then got up and off of her bed before walking over to the little nook that housed her hat and satchel. She then pulled a curtain across while she donned her gear--it's not like she needed to be embarrassed considering I was also female--before pulling it back and standing before me in her uniform. Without even saying a word, I stepped aside so as to allow her to leave and make her way to where she needed to deliver the letter to Troubleshoes. I honestly never would have guessed the Milk Bar of all places he could have gone but perhaps he did so in order to drink away his sorrows before the moon destroyed everything.

Choosing to follow behind Aria, I left the post office roughly twenty seconds after she did and made sure not to come across as being a stalker. As I followed her along her delivery route, I couldn't help but think how different she was compared with the version I saw at the Battle of the Bands. As one of the Dazzlings, she was distant, constantly arguing with her fellow Sirens though she had it out for Sonata more so than Adagio. You could say that Aria was sarcastic in her delivery which annoyed others to no end so seeing her being focused and not wanting to stray away from her duties made me appreciate her a little more.

By the time we reached the Milk Bar, I looked up and saw that the sun was already getting close to its highest point--noon. That meant I needed to see this next bit through relatively quickly otherwise there wouldn't be enough time for me to get over to Ikana and check up on Tender Taps. Aria then entered the bar without any trouble and I believed I would have trouble given one needed proof of membership to gain access--proof being Romani's Mask. Fortunately, no one on the other side asked me to present my proof allowing me to go inside and see what was about to happen.

In the Milk Bar, there was no one around other than Troubleshoes, who was sitting by the bar, and Granny Smith, who looked to be getting ready for tonight. I was honestly surprised that both of them were still here given how others had fled town but I supposed they felt there was no point in fleeing as it would have been in vain. Walking down the stairs, I noticed Aria standing in front of Troubleshoes, who didn't noticed her as she was focused on drinking so I went up to them to hear what they had to say to each other. Granny Smith, in the meantime, walked away so as to not get involved.

" Postmaster!" Aria called out. " Postmaster!"

" What the?" Troubleshoes exclaimed as he turned around.

" I have a delivery for you, postmaster."

" You're still here?" Troubleshoes asked, still surprised at seeing Aria. " I thought you would have fled town like so many others have done already. I'm glad to see you and all but you should have left town for the ranch which is where everyone else has gone to for shelter. The only ones who are still here are those who insist on staying despite how foolish they are for doing so."

" What about you?"

" Me?"

Aria nodded. " Yes. Why haven't you fled, postmaster?"

Troubleshoes let out a heavy sigh. " I just don't feel the desire to flee all because I still don't know what became of Kafei. The person I hired to find him has yet to report back to me so I fear she may have either fled town herself or is trying to find something, anything, that will give me some much needed closure as to where my son could be. Now then, you should leave town before it's too late."

" Um... About tomorrow."

" Hmmm?" Troubleshoes asked. " What are you talking about?"

Aria felt really nervous at this point but I knew what she was trying to say. " To... to... tomorrow's delivery is still scheduled, right? I don't have many letters that need to be sent to their respective destinations but I wish to confirm with you of the schedule."

" Are you being serious here?"

Aria nodded. " Very much so, postmaster."

Troubleshoes sighed again. " Did you see the sky? It's terrible! That moon has gotten even closer than before and is sure to crash into this town sometime tonight. Most have fled thinking they will be safe from the impending destruction but their efforts are in vain. Their chances of survival are slim at best as surely there will be aftershocks that will rip apart this world leaving nothing but devastation in its wake. Tomorrow's schedule has no meaning if no one is going to be around to get any letters. Now, I am telling you to flee, Aria, as there is nothing else that can be done."

" I can't flee."

" Stubbornness isn't your thing, Aria."

Aria then took out the special delivery and presented it to Troubleshoes. " I have this special delivery for you, postmaster."

Taken aback slightly, Troubleshoes took the delivery from Aria and combed over it for a moment. " This is from my son, Kafei! I know as I recognize his handwriting from anywhere but where in the world did you get this from? I thought my son disappeared a month ago under strange circumstances."

" It was given to me by a girl wearing green."

" Oh!" Troubleshoes exclaimed. " So the girl I hired ended up pulling through in the end after all. I must remind myself to thank her for her hard work by giving her a suitable reward but it may be too late since I'm certain she has fled town by now. I'm so happy to have received this from my son. I'll read it later in private so that I may be with my own thoughts as I attempt to comprehend my son's letter. To think something good would come in the end. No doubt a miracle has graced me this day. As for you Aria, thank you for delivering this special delivery despite your inner conflicts so allow me the chance to fix that."

" How?"

" I want you to flee now."

" But... tomorrow..."

" That is an order from the postmaster, Aria."

Aria nodded. " I understand, postmaster. I shall flee as you have ordered.

" If you run into that girl with the green clothes." Troubleshoes began. " Be sure to tell her to come here and see me so that I can give her that reward I mentioned. She will have the mask that I made in the form of my son's head on her so she should be easy to find provided she's still in town."

How in the world did Troubleshoes not notice that I had been standing behind Aria this entire time and had listened to their entire conversation? Either she couldn't see me standing there or she was being ignorant due to constantly thinking about Tender Taps. Either way, I knew to come back here once I found out what Aria was going to do now that she had finally been given permission to flee town even though it would do her no good because of the moon. In her mind however, she had earned her freedom after spending so long following what could only be described as a forced schedule.

Before either of them noticed me standing there, I turned and went back up the stairs before leaving the Milk Bar. I still had plenty of time to meet with Tender Taps in Ikana but I could become waylaid by whatever was going to happen next. A few moments later and Aria came out where she turned left and walked forward before stopping at the gate. She was no longer wearing the bag she used to deliver letters--I assumed she had given it to Troubleshoes--but still wore her hat. Given that she had been ordered to flee, her hat represented everything that made her stressful while also giving her a purpose.

" I was wondering where you were." Aria said as she noticed me.

I pretended to not have witnessed her conversation with Troubleshoes. " I tried to follow you but ended up getting lost back there."

" It doesn't matter as I am glad you are here."

" What happened?"

" The postmaster has given me the order to flee Clock Town at once." Aria answered. " At first, I didn't know what to think as I had never been given an order like that, but once I got out here, my mind now realizes what this has given me. I have decided to flee as the postmaster said and that means for the first time in my life, I can finally make my own schedule that caters to me and no one else. I am finally free! It feels so good to have my freedom! Thank you so very much for giving me my freedom. You deserve a reward for your efforts and I know just the thing. I don't need this anymore, so here... I'll let you have it!"

Taking off her hat, Aria handed it over to me though I was shocked as I accepted it. " Why give me your hat?"

" Because I did say you have reflexes suitable for a postman." Aria answered. " That is the Postman's Hat, a mask that allows you to look into any postbox here in town. Sure, it may not seem all that much but there is a strong sense of authority that goes along with having it. If you'd like, you can take my place as the new postwoman. Your job isn't going to last for very long because of the moon so enjoy it while it lasts. As for me, I'm fleeing right now and running until I run out of steam."

Turning around, Aria ran past the guard who stood at the East Clock Town Gate though her running looked more like long strides--she looked really weird doing that but I wasn't going to complain as she was free to do whatever she wanted now. Holding the Postman's Hat in my hands, there was only one more mask I needed to collect before I had all of them that were necessary for the ultimate mask. I wanted to go to Ikana and see Tender Taps but I couldn't just yet as Troubleshoes needed to see me since he did hire me to find his son. I just hoped he wouldn't take up too much time.

Chapter 69: The Showdown Between Sun and Star

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
August 21, 2017
Chapter 69: The Showdown Between Sun and Star.

I was now one step away from acquiring the ultimate mask. According to what the various versions of Adagio had said, I needed to collect twenty-three different masks scattered throughout Termina and I had them all except for one though they never told me where I had to go in order to get my hands on the ultimate mask. Either it was an oversight on their part or they wanted me to figure out on my own as to its location. In any case, one mask remained and my instincts told me that it would come as a result of helping out Scootaloo. I wasn't sure how she would do it but it would come as a result of her actions.

Looking down at the Postman's Hat that Aria gave to me before she ran out of town, I noticed that it looked rather dirty and with a couple of stitches here and there indicating that it was a seasoned mask that had been through an awful lot. While it felt weird holding that which defined Aria's position in town, I wasn't about to complain since she did hand it over to me willingly after I helped her finally achieve the freedom that had eluded her. Her mask was a symbol of authority in that she provided a vital service for everyone in town yet I could never replace her given this wasn't my world and everything would soon go back to normal.

Before going back inside to speak with Troubleshoes, my mind compelled me to try out the Postman's Hat and see what it was capable of doing. Placing it on my head, it definitely didn't feel right seeing as I was already wearing a hat--I was essentially wearing one hat on top of the other--but I felt important from a government perspective. No wonder Aria had such a huge burden on her shoulders. She always had to deliver the mail even during times where she didn't want her and she couldn't complain otherwise she would have lost her job and ended up becoming a drifter out in Termina Field--not likely but it was a possibility. Repressing such emotions must have taken its toll on her health.

Princess Twilight then suggested for me to check out one of the postboxes that were scattered around town since I now hat the Postman's Hat. Fortunately, there was one close by but I felt hesitant towards looking inside given that I wasn't an official postwoman. Her Highness said I had the authority to look inside them and that I shouldn't be afraid to do so given that Aria practically gave me the right when she handed over her mask to me before fleeing town like so many before her. Knowing Her Highness was once again correct, I walked over to the post box where it immediately communicated with me--I still couldn't get used to them doing that.

Unlike before where it said that all mail had to be deposited into them, the post box said that I was doing a very good job of picking up letters and delivering them to where they were supposed to go. I suspected Aria heard this same message over and over every time she removed letters from the post box, and yet, it was such a message that kept her going even during the most difficult of times such as the world coming to an end. No matter what problems stood in her way, Aria would continue on no matter what until she had completed that days' run even if it meant isolating herself from having any relationships with other people.

Suddenly, the post box said that something else had been stuffed inside it that wasn't a letter before spitting it out at me along with a coughing sound. Granted, I wasn't thrilled at the fact that I just been spat on by a post box of all things--no one would ever believe it no matter how hard I would try to tell them if it ever came up--but I was thrilled at seeing a Piece of Heart. Grabbing it, I felt its warm embrace across my body and became stronger once again. Who in their right mind would place something like that in a post box!? Also, how did Aria never once notice there was a non-letter? While it sounded like it was something to think about, I chose not to focus on it as it wasn't really important.

Other than that, there wasn't anything else I could do with the Postman's Hat. A shame really as I felt there could have been more to it than just simply getting to peek inside a post box but I supposed whoever created this game just didn't have any other ideas with the mask apart from the obvious. Grabbing the Postman's Hat, I took it off, and put it away before heading back over to the Milk Bar and going inside via. I still had some unfinished business with Monsieur Aroma so hopefully he wouldn't take up too much time. At the same time, I wanted to hear what Granny Smith had to say as she hadn't fled town either.

Of course, I couldn't waste too much time talking to people since there was a problem when it came to travelling to Ikana. If I were to take the long route through the canyon path that connected Ikana with Termina Field, I would need Epona's help jumping over the barricades whilst avoiding those Real Bombchu and Nejiron that plagued the path. I would also need to use the Hookshot on that one tree. The other route required the Song of Soaring--a much shorter route in both distance and time--but the Owl Statue was a ways into Ikana proper and I would be forced to backtrack a little bit much to my displeasure.

I walked up to Granny Smith first as she had been eyeing me this whole time as I thought to myself. " The bar opens at night, madam." She said.

" Then how come I was able to come in?" I asked.

Granny Smith remained stoic as she answered. " That's because I am currently getting things ready for tonight. I am expecting a big turnout despite the fact that the town has been slowly getting empty because of what has been happening as a result of the moon. Normally, I would ask someone like you to leave as you are clearly too young to be here, but as long as you don't get in the way of my cleaning, you can stay until 10:00pm as that is when you will have to leave. I know it sounds unfair but those are my rules. Besides, this place is members-only. We refuse people who don't have proof of membership even during harsh times like this."

I took out Romani's Mask--it had been a while since I last saw it--and presented it to Granny Smith. " As you can see, I have membership here as I acquired this from the ranch some time ago with the owner's blessing." I couldn't tell her the truth as to how I really acquired the mask otherwise she would have accused me of lying, thievery, or something much worse resulting in having an unfortunate encounter with the town militia.

" You are usually required to wear that mask in here at all times but I will make an exception."

" Because you're not open yet?"

Granny Smith shook her head. " No, because most members usually don't wear them even when I tell them time and time again. It reached the point where my words meant nothing to them so I decided to just go along with it and make the most of the situation. Anyway, you seem like you have no idea what kind of place this is so allow me to tell you about what we do around here." Even though I already knew what this place was, Granny Smith didn't--time paradox strikes again--so I had to let her explain. " We're called a Milk Bar, and we serve the milk of the night to those who have membership."

I decided to play along so as to avoid suspicion. " What kind of milk?"

" You can get just regular milk for about thirty rupees."

" That sounds reasonable."

" Our most popular, of course, is Chateau Romani." Granny Smith said. " It's a vintage milk that comes from Romani Ranch, and the current price is two hundred rupees. You might think it sounds expensive, and it is, but it's worth it."

I was thinking of doing a spit-take but remembered that Applejack mentioned the price to me once. At least... I think she did. " I'm guessing that only the richest people around can afford such a beverage given it requires an arm and a leg to cover the cost."

My words made Granny Smith raise her eyebrow but she shrugged it off. " I'm impressed that you're not surprised at the price of Chateau Romani. Whenever I reveal the price to other patrons, they either faint at the thought or choose to chew me out by saying the price is too much for them. However, there is a reason why it's so expensive yet it depends on who you ask as people are conflicted about it. There are those who consider this milk as a source of Magic Power! It takes just one gulp they say!"

" What do you mean?"

" You don't know?"

I shook my head. " No."

" If you were to drink some Chateau Romani and were capable of using Magic Power, you would have an infinite amount at your disposal." Granny Smith said. " That is why the price is as high as it is. I've never seen anyone with Magic Power come in here in over twenty years of running this bar so I do not know if what people say about Chateau Romani is true or not but it would be nice to witness it for myself." She then looked towards Troubleshoes who appeared glum despite having received the "Special Delivery to Mama" from Aria before looking back at me. " It seems Monsieur Aroma still doesn't know where he is."

" You mean, Kafei?"

Granny Smith nodded. " He has been moping about in here all morning and is sure to do so until we open for business later tonight."

" But he just got a delivery."

" Getting something isn't the same as seeing that person in the flesh."

" Do you think Kafei is gone for good?" I asked, pretending to be curious when in fact I knew Tender Taps was now in Ikana and pursuing Lightning Dust.

"But he's not the type to just run off." Granny Smith answered. " He must have a reason for not showing himself and while his disappearance sounds suspicious, I believe that he will show himself when he feels ready and that the time is right. All I can say to Monsieur Aroma is to continue to believe Kafei will return. If you cannot hold onto that hope then there is nothing to be hopeful for especially when we will all soon die when that moon crashes." She reached down below the counter and pulled up several empty glasses before wiping one of them using a cloth she had been holding this entire time. " Curious?"

" About what?"

" The glasses."

" A little."

" These are not for customers." Granny Smith said. " Members of this club bring their own glasses. That is because some patrons who came here in the past were sick and while I do clean the glasses thoroughly, their germs still contaminate the glass resulting in the sickness spreading to others. We had a pandemic several years ago as a result of this very thing so we had a policy change where you must bring your own glass otherwise we will not serve you."

I then noticed Granny Smith becoming even more gloomy than she was moments ago. I knew why she felt that way and it had to do with what happened at Romani Ranch as a result of what Starlight Glimmer did. While I wanted to comfort her and say everything would be okay, I knew that wasn't the case as Apple Bloom had lost her mind and the cattle had been abducted. Applejack was beside herself with grief and blamed herself for not believing in her little sister's warnings resulting in the ranch suffering financial ruin. From a business standpoint, Granny Smith felt bad because she couldn't get in the shipment of Chateau Romani Applejack was supposed to deliver the other night.

" You seem bothered."

Granny Smith sighed. " It has to do with Romani Ranch."

" I've heard of that place."

" Everyone around here knows about it, madam."

" So why is it bothering you?"

Granny Smith sighed again. " There is a road to the south of town called Milk Road and at the end of this road is where you can find Romani Ranch. Once, it was a place that was accessible to everyone but then something happened that changed everything. No one understands how or why it happened but someone must have pulled a prank out there, because the road was blocked by a huge boulder. It has since been removed by someone from the Carnival Committee but the damage to my business has been done. I can't get any milk in now from the ranch so I'm not sure if I should recommend the Chateau Romani to you."

" You don't think I can handle it?"

Granny Smith shook her head. " I don't have much supply of Chateau Romani and those who are still around are sure to fight over what I have before the moon comes down and destroys everything. I'm sure you've already seen it outside but most people in town have taken refuge by fleeing to Romani Ranch in hopes of surviving. It may be my undoing, but I'm the sort of gal who'll stay at her business through thick and thin."

It was at that point where Troubleshoes finally spoke up. " So that's why you haven't fled yet, Mrs. Barten?"

Granny Smith nodded her head. " Call me stubborn for wanting to remain but I must satisfy my customers with a cool, refreshing beverage of milk. A shame that Gorman isn't coming here tonight. During these last two nights, he drank up a real storm where he became drunk after one too many glasses of milk. He had to be taken back to the Stock Pot Inn by one of his performers and completely collapsed early this morning."

" What!?" Troubleshoes exclaimed. " Why would he go overboard on milk?"

" He didn't say anything other than complain about how big of a failure he was."

" That doesn't sound like Gorman."

" The performer said that he was upset about having his troupe's performance cancelled."

Troubleshoes gulped, the obvious guilt overwhelming him. " I... I suppose I am to blame for cancelling his troupe."

" You had your reasons, Monsieur Aroma."

" I know but I do regret having to cancel his troupe's performance but then I had to cancel others as well."

" Gorman's over-drinking was his own doing."

Troubleshoes waved his hand. " I still feel responsible for him becoming drunk over milk. I am hoping that he makes a full recovery but I doubt it will mean anything given that the world is going to be destroyed sometime before tomorrow morning." He then sighed before grabbing his glass and drinking what remained of his milk. " Gorman can be annoying when he persists on having his way but cancelling the carnival was the only option I had. If he knew what was happening, he would have accepted my decision and not come here to drink away his sorrows resulting in drinking too much."

" Some view it as a means of relieving tension."

" Perhaps I should have explained things."

" But you were concerned about your son."

" Maybe, but I owed it to him to provide a decent explanation."

That was when I decided to speak up as their conversation was starting to drag on a little too long and I had to be in Ikana before it was too late. " Um, excuse me, Monsieur Aroma, but I am the one you hired to go and find out what became of your son, Kafei."

Troubleshoes looked me over a few times only to shrug her shoulders. " You are? Well... I honestly don't recognize you from anywhere. Are you sure you were the one I hired to find my dear Kafei? If you have proof that I did indeed hire you, please show me at once because there is something I wish to give to that person according to what Aria mentioned before she finally fled town after being given a direct order."

I slapped my forehead. How could he not recognize me? I mean, he couldn't recognize me in the first place as I visited him and acquired Kafei's Mask during a different cycle yet I hoped time would have been nice just this once and have someone remember me despite actually not. But, I couldn't have that luxury so I had to show him proof. Fortunately, I did have proof in the form of the very mask he gave me back when I first met him. If this wouldn't convince Troubleshoes then nothing would though it would mean having to leave without getting whatever he was promising because Tender Taps needed my immediate attention.

Taking out Kafei's Mask and placing it on my face, I got Troubleshoes attention by pointing at my face. " Do you recognize me now?"

Troubleshoes' eyes lit up upon seeing the mask he gave me. " Yes, I remember you now. You were the one I hired to find Kafei. I heard from Aria that you were the one who gave her the special delivery that she delivered to me a short while ago that was from Kafei. But, I am surprised that you are still here given the circumstances."

" I have my reasons."

" Are you all right with not fleeing?"

I nodded. " I have to take care of something important that requires me to remain here."

" I must insist that you seek shelter at once by fleeing." Troubleshoes said. " It looks like this is it for this town, you know. You saw the moon, didn't you--of course you did as I doubt no one can say otherwise. It's gotten so huge within the last several hours that those who fled earlier said that it would destroy everything sometime tomorrow morning. That gives us all just under half a day before we all die. Again, I implore you to flee like the townsfolk have done before you. I don't know if you will be able to escape what is sure to happen but it's better than giving you false hope."

" What about the mask I am wearing?"

" Oh yes!" Troubleshoes said. " I was so caught up in talking about you that I forgot all about Kafei."

No wonder Misty Fly felt so strongly against both Mayor Mare and Troubleshoes. They were both more concerned with their own interests rather than Tender Taps' safety but I could easily forgive Mayor Mare as she was stuck having to deal with two groups who refused to budge resulting in her being trapped. Troubleshoes didn't have such an excuse and was therefore a terrible father for not having more worry about his son. While I felt like chewing him, I knew he had been through enough already. Hopefully, he could have some closure knowing his son was still out there.

" As you know, I received that package from him."

" And did you see him in person?"

I nodded slowly. " I did but I promised that I wouldn't tell anyone where he is."

Troubleshoes was surprised but not angry with my answer. " Really? He doesn't want to be seen right now? Well... I suppose I shouldn't be upset since you told me that you have seen him and you did give Aria this special delivery that is definitely from him, but why does Kafei not want to reveal himself especially to his own father? I feel as though I have done something that has offended him in some way."

" He's trying to get back something important."

" Oh?" Troubleshoes asked, his curiosity piquing. " Can you at least tell me what he's trying to get back?"

" A special mask that was stolen from him."

Troubleshoes buried his head into his hands before breathing heavily. " His sun mask... of course! He was supposed to marry Anju tomorrow morning. While I have no problem with their marriage--my wife doesn't have a problem either--Anju's mother has always had issues with Kafei in addition to myself and Mayor Dotour. I had hoped the marriage would have brought our families together but Kafei's disappearance lead to unwarranted suspicion from Anju's mother that he had abandoned her. I never could defend my son as I had to focus on dealing with the carnival whilst my wife is still stuck in that insufferable meeting between the militia and carnival committee."

" What do you intend on doing?"

" I'm going to remain here and hope that Kafei will come back and see me before the end comes."

" Sorry that I couldn't tell you where he is."

" You made a promise to my son and that is good enough for me."

" I should get going now." I said as I turned around to leave.

Before I could leave, Troubleshoes placed his hand on my shoulder and turned me back around to face him. " You cannot leave until I give you a reward for all you have done as my official expert who went and found my son. Now, I know you're probably going to say that you don't need a reward but I insist so do not refuse my gesture. At this point in time, I can give you only something like this." He picked up a bottle that was filled with a strange looking liquid and handed it over to me where I took it from him. " This is a bottle of Chateau Romani, the finest milk in all of Termina."

" Do I get to keep the bottle?"

Troubleshoes nodded. " I have no need of it considering it won't do me any good when we're all dead in a matter of hours. What Mrs. Barten heard about the magical properties within this milk are true. If you possess Magic Power, consuming this will make sure you never run out of it. I have no idea how long the effects will last but it is essential for those who use magic on a regular basis."

" So why are you giving it to me now when the moon is almost upon us?"

" Actually I wanted to give this to you sooner... Really!"

I rolled my eyes. " You don't say."

" In any case, you have gotten your reward from me." Troubleshoes said. " Now, I encourage you to flee town while you can. I know you're one of those brave types who thinks she is invincible but know that not even that Chateau Romani will save you from the imminent destruction that awaits. If anything, just go outside, chug that milk down, and let the effects last as long as possible until the end."

" I've no intention of dying."

Troubleshoes couldn't help but laugh. " A good laugh at this point in time never hurt anyone and you definitely made me feel better. Now, you should be able to reach the ranch before nightfall if you go now and don't dawdle along the way."

Turning around, Troubleshoes began drinking from another bottle he had next to him leaving me to continue on with helping out Tender Taps. While I did appreciate her giving me another bottle--it was my fifth one overall--I had honestly expected more from her than just a bottle of milk that enhanced magic. Were I to confront Starlight on top of the Clock Tower later tonight, I would have had the advantage as infinite magic would give me a chance to oppose the magic from Majora's Mask. But, I couldn't face her just yet as I still had to help solve this love problem for Scootaloo in addition to acquiring the final mask I needed.

I then left the Milk Bar--Granny Smith had since focused on getting the place ready so she didn't notice me leaving--and was soon back outside. Looking up at the sky, I could see that the sun was now moving towards the west indicating that it would soon be nightfall. I needed to make my way over to Ikana and meet up with Tender Taps before it was too late and he got himself into trouble. Lightning Dust didn't seem very threatening but one should never underestimate the skills of a thief. Taking out the Ocarina of Time from the pouch on my belt, I played the Song of Soaring and began to focus on the Owl Statue located in Ikana Village.

Wings protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, spun around several times, and I was soon whisked away. While I wanted to ride Epona--she hadn't seen much in the way of action ever since I first entered Ikana, I knew that using her would have taken me much longer to reach Tender Taps given how treacherous the path was. Going the shorter route meant avoiding monsters but it also involved a very deep plunge from what I remembered of the topography of the area. When I arrived moments later in Ikana Village, I felt a chill all around me, the chill of the undead as they roamed freely once more.

Once again, I felt the ravages of what happened when I reset time back to the beginning of the three day cycle. While I had indeed freed the spirits of the dead from their torment by destroying Twinmold and closing up the Stone Tower, everything in Ikana was as it was before. Fortunately, Lightning Dust's hideout wasn't anywhere near what I would consider to be the heart of Ikana. Jumping to the ground below, I walked over to the edge of the clearing until I was looking down at the river that flowed through the canyon, Princess Twilight informing me that she could sense evil all around but told me to ignore it as I didn't need to deal with the Garo anymore.

Gulping, I couldn't help but feel nervous over having to jump from such a high distance. I mean, I had done something similar during my previous journey--I almost died in the process at the time because of a boulder--yet I knew there was no other choice as I had to hurry and find Tender Taps. Closing my eyes, I walked forward and stepped off into thin air before dropping incredibly fast until I smashed into the water below--my life flashing before my eyes during the fall. When I surfaced a few moments later, I quickly raised my shield so as to avoid getting pelted by rocks from the two Octoroks that I used to create ice platforms when I first came here.

Sadly, I couldn't use my bow whilst in the water so I had to rely on a defensive measure until I could get out of the water. I kept my eyes squarely on the two Octoroks in addition to keeping my shield raised as I began swimming around them towards a small dock on the other side of the river. Their rocks bounced off of the Mirror Shield and back at them, destroying each one in turn--surprised that this was a mechanic I forgot about--leaving me with enough breathing room to reach the dock. I climbed out before sitting down to breathe after making such a huge leap of faith only to hear someone singing to themselves further ahead.

Princess Twilight looked up to see who it was. " Lightning Dust is prancing about over there."

I looked up from our hiding spot--the dock was lower down than the main ground giving off the illusion that we were hiding--to see for myself. " I'm actually surprised that she can get past all those Real Bombchu and Nejiron that plague the path connecting Ikana and Termina Field with no problems."

" I suspect she has made that little trek enough times where it has become second nature to her."

" Do you see Tender Taps anywhere?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " No but he might be hiding somewhere so as to not let Lightning Dust know of his presence."

" Should I go up to her and demand she hand over the mask?"

" That might not be a good idea."

" It is the direct approach you know."

" I know, Sunset, but I think Lightning Dust is nervous with regards to her hideout being discovered." Twilight said. " If she were to notice anyone seeing her interact with the one area of this region where her hideout is, she will most likely flee and our chances of helping Tender Taps sinks completely with no hope for a recovery. Knowing Lightning Dust, and I do thanks to my brief encounter when Spitfire kicked her out of the Wonderbolts Training Academy back in Equestria, she was very arrogant and thought no one would call her out on it but Rainbow Dash did."

" What does that have to do with this?"

" Guess I was just thinking about the past."

I frowned. " Can we focus please?"

Princess Twilight blushed as she slightly bowed. " So sorry, Sunset. Anyway, Lightning Dust is probably the only one who can open up the entrance to her hideout so we need her to do just that. I have a feeling that is what Tender Taps is waiting for so he is most likely over by her hideout right now. If she spots you walking about, she may either run away or try and rob you like she nearly did when we came here initially."

" How do you propose I sneak past her?"

" Given how much equipment you have on you, I doubt sneaking is going to work."

I blushed. " Yeah, all of my stuff would make an annoying sound that is sure to catch her attention."

" So why not hide in plain sight."

" What does that even mean?"

" Think about it for a moment and it will come to you."

I began thinking about what Princess Twilight was getting at before quickly slapping my forehead upon the realization that she was referring to the Stone Mask. I could use it to walk past Lightning Dust without her even knowing. Taking it out from behind my back and placing it on my face, I walked up some steps onto the ground and began approaching her when she suddenly stopped prancing and looked in my direction. I froze on the spot thinking that she had seen me and was surely going to run away but when she resumed her prancing, I breathed a huge of relief knowing that the Stone Mask made me invisible to her eyes.

Not wanting to take a chance with what I had been given, I walked past Lightning Dust and began heading up the path that ran alongside the river. Unlike the rest of Ikana which was gloomy as a result of both the undead and the remnants of the ancient kingdom, this river path was surprisingly pleasant and felt like it had never fallen into decay compared with the rest of the region. That thought quickly changed when Her Highness sensed an evil presence nearby, that of a Garo--it couldn't have been anything else. What it was doing down this path was beyond me but I wasn't about to deal with it as I had saved Ikana once already so summoning it was pointless.

Continuing on up the path, the presence of the Garo disappeared but then I noticed a strange rock formation slightly to my left--I also took off the Stone Mask as I didn't need to wear it now and I doubted Tender Taps would recognize me were I to approach him with it on. There was also a Deku Flower that had no occupant and when I looked left to see what was on the other side of the river, my heart grew excited upon seeing a Piece of Heart on a small platform, but then my heart sank when a Deku Scrub floated in from somewhere and landed in the flower along with his belongings. He was surely the occupant and I doubted he would let me use the flower.

Luckily, he ducked down into the flower as all Deku normally did and that meant Lightning Dust wouldn't run away if she saw him--I doubted she would anyway as she would probably see this Deku Scrub as insane for wanting to live in such a morbid region. Standing behind the boulder was Tender Taps--he looked different without the Keaton Mask on his face--and was looking at something in front of him. I looked in his direction to see a boulder that was clearly out of place with every other boulder. Could this boulder be covering up the entrance to Lightning Dust's hideout? If so then it was a lot more obvious than I thought.

Walking past the Deku Flower, I approached Tender Taps who was relieved to see me. " I found her, green hat girl..."

" You mean the thief who stole your mask?"

Tender Taps nodded. " At first, I lost her in the canyon that connects Termina Field to Ikana and was forced to avoid getting killed by the monsters, but I managed to find her when she stopped to prance about back there. Whether she was trying to deceive me or not, I managed to slip by her and came this way until I was stopped by that unusual looking boulder you can see before you. I have no doubt that this is where her hideout is."

" How can you be sure?"

" How else do you explain such a boulder?"

I shrugged. " Good point."

" She's using this place as her safe house for keeping her stolen goods." Tender Taps said. " Apparently, her name is Sakon according to what I found out. After you left to give that pendant to Anju, Sakon came to the shop last night to sell something, and I followed her all the way out here this morning but not before letting my old friend in on my plans. No doubt you were given both my Keaton Mask and a package meant for my father. You did deliver that package to him, didn't you?"

I nodded. " I had the postwoman deliver it to her.

Tender Taps smiled. " That's good. I know I should have revealed myself to my father but getting back my mask was more important. When this is all said and done, I hope to speak with my father and explain everything though it will be a shock to him when he sees what I look like. Anyway, Sakon's storage for the things she's stolen is on the other side of this rock door, but only she can open it using whatever method she has. I've tried to open the door myself which is how I came to that conclusion. The only way in is to wait for Sakon to arrive after sundown and that won't be for another few hours."

" Can you wait that long?"

" Even if I have to wait until the end of time, I will do so." Tender Taps answered. " I've made a promise to Anju. She will show up."

Princess Twilight then tapped me on the shoulder and whispered into my ear. " At least we managed to get here on time otherwise we might have missed our chance to get into that hideout and help him get his mask back."

" Yeah, but we have to wait here until nightfall."

" You could just skip ahead by using the ocarina."

" Do you think he would notice?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I doubt that, Sunset. The only ones who are affected whenever we manipulate time are you and me. If you play the Song of Double Time to move us forward just far enough, Tender Taps will act as though time had progressed naturally. Just because time has proven itself to be annoying doesn't meant we can't use it once in a while to our advantage. Besides, we only get one attempt here so you need to be sure you are prepared once Lightning Dust comes and opens up her hideout. I advise playing the ocarina here behind this boulder as doing so out in the open could be problematic."

I nodded. " We can't let her see us now as that would ruin everything."

" Exactly."

" Still, I must admit that Tender Taps took a huge risk by coming all the way out here."

" If not for following Lightning Dust and relying on his instincts, he would have been killed back in the canyon by one of those monsters." I said. " I know I can be reckless at times, Twilight, but I think he went overboard by chasing after a dangerous criminal with only the clothes on his back. Maybe he should have taken a sword or some other kind of weapon as a means of protecting himself from the dangers that exist out here."

" He didn't seem like the adventuring type."

" That makes things more complicated."

Princess Twilight nodded. " You need to watch his back constantly once we're inside."

While I wasn't against the idea of protecting someone else, I just wished that Tender Taps had the means to protect himself. If Lightning Dust had some defences waiting for us inside of her hideout, not only would I have to keep myself from harm but him as well thus giving me double-duty. Hopefully, he would stay behind me and allow me to take care of any problems that could arise in there. Taking out the ocarina again and playing the Song of Double Time, I focused on wanting to go forward to roughly 6:00pm. Clocks then appeared all around me as I sped through time until everything stopped at the desired time.

Night of the Final Day - 12 Hours Remain.

Tender Taps was still watching the entrance to the hideout and like Princess Twilight said, he had been affected by my manipulation of time where he didn't notice anything change whereas I did through my song. Suddenly, everything started to vibrate causing me to fall down onto my butt. It only took me a moment to remember that on the final day, tremors were pretty common because of how close the moon was. Looking up at the moon, I was reminded that I now had the means to finally stop it from crashing but I needed that one remaining mask otherwise getting the ultimate mask would bear no fruit for me.

Looking over the boulder without revealing myself, things looked pretty peaceful aside from the occasional tremors, but that was when Lightning Dust pranced her way up to the entrance of her hideout, her smiling expression belying her true nature. She walked up to the rock and did something before it swung open and she walked inside. Tender Taps wasted no time in going in and I followed along after him so that he didn't do anything stupid. Once I was inside, the door closed with a lot clicking sound leaving me stumbling about in the dark until I saw a light a short distance away.

I walked along and the light opened up to reveal a door that Tender Taps must have already gone thrown. I opened it and entered another room that featured two doors either side of a glass cabinet that housed a peculiar looking mask. Was this what Tender Taps had stolen from him back in Clock Town? It certainly was something but I wouldn't exactly call it wearable though I suspect it wasn't supposed to be worn like a traditional mask. While I began to assess the situation, the same couldn't be said about Tender Taps who began walking towards the mask not realizing the obvious panel that was on the ground, and stepping on it causing an alarm to go off and immediately closed the door behind us with iron bars.

" So, someone decided to follow me." Lightning Dust said, her voice echoing all around us.

" I've finally found your hideout!" Tender Taps shouted.

" You're that kid whose mask I stole back in town some time ago."

" Glad you still remember me."

" How could I forget such a cute little face like yours?" Lightning Dust asked, her sarcasm clearly on display. " If not for that masked imp who changed you, I would have left you alone seeing as you were stronger than I was. But, that freak did me a favour and now I have something so precious that it puts the rest of my storage to shame. While the thought of seeing you weep would make me very happy, it wouldn't be fair to not give you some kind of sporting chance."

" Give back my mask!"

" Not going to happen."

" Curse you!"

Lightning Dust laughed. " Like I said, I'll give you and that sword wielding girl standing behind you a chance. If you can get through my hideout before your mask reaches the end of the conveyor belt, you win and you can take it back. Should you fail then the mask is mine! Either way, I'll have made my escape by the time you reach the end so don't expect to catch me again. Oh, and one last thing. That switch you pressed a moment ago should cause the conveyor belt to start moving your mask along... right about now. I'd say you have about five minutes before it's out of your reach for good."

As her laughter echoed around the room once again, the sun mask began to move backwards and Tender Taps realized his blunder. " Now I've done it! I've got to figure out what to do before the mask slips through our fingers and she gets away with it and everything else." He then noticed another switch near by and immediately turned himself towards me before pointing at it. " Step on that switch! Quickly!"

" Why should we do that?" Twilight asked.

" It's some setup where the door stays open only while the switch is pressed!"

" What does that even mean?" I asked.

" It means you need to step on the switch right now." Twilight answered.

I did so and all it did was cause a door in front of Tender Taps to open. " I don't think that did anything, Kafei. The mask is still moving on the conveyor belt though it does seem to be moving a little bit slower than it was before."

" That could prove useful." Tender Taps said.

" What could?"

" I'm going to see what is in the next room." Tender Taps answered. " You'll have to wait there on that switch until I can come up with something." He then ran through the room and began maneuvering around some switches of different colours in an attempt to reach the other end of the room. He then accidentally stepped on a yellow switch but it proved to be a blessing as the conveyor belt moved even slower but I still couldn't see much of what he was doing. " I've almost figured this out, green hat girl."

" Any idea what he could be doing, Twilight?"

Princess Twilight shrugged her shoulders. " I don't know, Sunset, but what I do know is that he's even more reckless than you are. I know he wants to get that mask back but it's no excuse for acting like a complete idiot. I'm starting to see why Misty Fly didn't think too kindly of him but not to her extent. Until he comes back, you're pretty much stuck on this one spot but you should get your sword and shield ready."

" Maybe coming here was a bad idea."

" I wouldn't say so."

" No?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Tender Taps may be cocky but he needed help so we're doing the right thing by coming here to this hideout. I'm not sure how far I can tolerate his behaviour but at least you're here to take care of any 'true' problems should they arise." She then bopped me on my head several times to inform that he had done something given that he was shouting at the top of his lungs in pure excitement. " Well... He did something just now so hopefully he didn't make it even worse."

" Can you hear me, green hat girl?" Tender Taps asked via shouting.

" What did you do?" I asked.

" I thought there would be some device in here that also opened the door in front of you." Tender Taps answered. He then sounded sick when he blurted out. " Ohhh! The mask! I must get it back before it's too late! Anju needs me now!" He snapped out of it--I was afraid he had gone off the deep end--and continued his explanation. " Sakon is trying to pull it out of our reach and make her escape so we must hurry and get to where the conveyor belt ends." Stumbling about, he pressed two three switches: one that increased the speed of the conveyor belt, one that slowed it down, and one that opened the door in front of me."

" You did something just now."

" What?"

" The door in front of me just opened."

" Then that wasn't the right switch." Tender Taps said. " Go check that room. There should be some sort of mechanism. Please! There's no time!"

" Mechanism?"

" It looks like Lightning Dust set this place up where two people need to work in tandem in order to reach the end of the room." Twilight answered. " I'm not sure why she would do such a thing given that it practically allows would-be enemies to take advantage but I suppose she wasn't expecting two people to come here. I know Tender Taps has been reckless as of late in addition to being somewhat of a jerk, but we don't much of a choice do we?"

" We have to do this not just for him but for Scootaloo as well."

Stepping off the switch and running through the door, I could finally see what Tender Taps had been doing. He had to weave his way through a series of switches of different colours--yellow and red--to reach one single blue coloured switch located near another locked door, and it was obvious that the yellow switches slowed down the conveyor belt while the red ones sped it up. No wonder he was panicking because everything was a race against time to prevent Lightning Dust from succeeding. No doubt she had already made her escape with her stolen goods but we had to prevent her from succeeding with this one.

Running forward, I was surprised to see a lone Deku Baba pop up from the ground and attempt to bite me. With a swing of my sword, I chopped off its head, destroying it and pressing another switch that opened a door on the side that Tender Taps was on. Now I understood what Her Highness was saying about two people having to work together. We had to take turns solving puzzles so that the other could progress through their section until the first was ready to continue. It appeared as though Tender Taps had the actual puzzles while my contribution involved defeating weak monsters--of that I was grateful as strong ones would have made this impossible.

Tender Taps then ran into the next section of his side of the room and I could barely make out four columns that appeared to be surrounding something. Fortunately, it didn't take him long to figure out what to do which gave us more time. By pushing one of the columns, it pressed down on a switch and opened the door that was in front of me allowing me to continue and fight the next monster. Running into the next section, I was presented with two Deku Babas as opposed to one. While it was a little bit better, I honestly was expecting something more given that this was Lightning Dust. Was she so confident that she relied on weak monsters to serve as her security measures?

Swinging my sword again, I destroyed the first Deku Baba without any effort whilst using my shield to deflect a Deku Nut that got spat out by the other. Once I had a clear shot, I chopped off its head causing the door by Tender Taps to open allowing him to proceed to the next section. I had no idea how long this would go but hopefully not too long as we still had to get back to Scootaloo in time. I then noticed his mask move by on the conveyor belt and began thinking about where its current position was in relation to the end of the belt. I would say we had roughly three minutes before so we needed to hustle more than ever.

Running into the next section, I heard Tender Taps pushing about some more columns until he began cursing up a storm. Turning my attention towards the conveyor belt, the sun mask began moving even faster indicating that he messed up big time. I began shouting to tell him to fix what had happened and he shouted in response saying he was trying his best and to get off his case by shouting. Princess Twilight was right about him being a jerk because of his attitude but I wasn't going to lose my temper because if I did, I would feel nothing but while he would be reduced to tears in an instant.

He then pushed a few more columns and managed to slow down the conveyor belt but because of his actions, we now had about a minute left before the sun mask would be beyond our reach and in Lightning Dust's hands. A moment later and he shouted out success as the door on my side opened and I could proceed to the next part for me. I was honestly expecting three Deku Babas this time around but instead I was given a Wolfos to contend with as I ran through the door. It was a step above what I already fought but because my sword was now even stronger, it would only take one hit to prevail.

Unfortunately, I forgot that the Wolfos moved quickly and liked to pick when to move in for the kill. It moved about left and right in an effort to confuse me, and when it lunged for my throat, I raised my shield and its claws bounced harmlessly off it. It then dashed around in circles causing me to feel dizzy but when it lunged forward again, I stepped back allowing it to do its thing where it turned around, exposing its back. I remembered that a Wolfos hated being attacked from behind as it was their weak point so I attacked it from behind causing it to burn away to nothing.

This unlocked the next door and Tender Taps ran through before stopping on a switch. " I've reached the end, green hat girl."

" And just in time as your mask is almost at the end too."

" You just need to press that one final switch."

Nodding, I ran forward when my door opened and pressed a second switch. " What will this do?"

" Hopefully, allow me to get my mask back otherwise our effort would have been in vain." Tender Taps answered. The sun mask came through the wall via a small hole and that's when I noticed a hole in the ground at the end of the conveyor belt large enough for a small-sized object to fall into. This was how Lightning Dust intended on getting the mask out of our reach but we were fortunate as upon pressing my switch, a small panel slid across the hole effectively covering it up and allowing the mask to come to a complete stop. " Did we do it? Did she get away with my mask?" He had closed his eyes and had no idea what just happened.

I frowned. " Your mask is safe."

" I can't believe this!" Lightning Dust shouted from somewhere. " You managed to get back that mask!"

" Your security system was pretty lousy."

" What would you know!?"

" Had you used some stronger monsters or maybe even some decent traps, you would have slowed us down long enough to get away with it." I answered. " On the other side, had your puzzles been more devious in their design, Kafei would have been stuck without any hope resulting in you succeeding. If anything, you overestimated your security and underestimated our resolve. I suppose we will be taking our leave now with the mask in our possession."

" I won't allow you to escape!"

" You're not really in a position right now to utter threats."

" And what makes you think that?"

I swung my sword in a circle. " I have a sword... I think that should be more than enough to prove my point. Besides, you made your escape as you said you would so by the time you make your way back here, we'll have left by now with the sun mask in Kafei's hands. While I would love nothing more than to see justice done, I doubt I could find out where you are seeing as cowardice is something you are pretty good at."

" You'll regret those words."

I shook my head. " Take solace in knowing that you were defeated by two individuals who knew nothing about your hideout but managed to figure it out anything on the principle of wanting to do the right thing. I would run away right now, Lightning Dust--I mean Sakon--as no doubt people in Clock Town will find out about this place and come here soon enough to get their belongings back."

Lightning Dust then went quiet and I assumed she had chosen to leave us alone after coming to the realization that there wasn't anything she could do to stop us. Picking up the sun mask and holding it in his hands, Tender Taps smiled and I couldn't help but smile alongside him. Sure, it looked like we were going to fail for a moment but we managed to succeed in getting back what was stolen so now we had to leave. Turning around, we made our way back through the hideout by taking the path that I used--I doubted Tender Taps was willing to go on the path he used because of the switches--and discovered that the iron bars blocking the entrance had lifted.

Once we were back outside, Tender Taps couldn't help but be overly excited. " We got the Sun's Mask back!"

" It's actually called the 'Sun's Mask'"?

Tender Taps nodded. " It is a special mask that was created to celebrate the occasion where Anju and I were to be wed on the night of the carnival which is tonight. She has in her possession, the counterpart to what I hold in my hands, the Moon's Mask. When we decided to get married on this very night, we promised to exchange our masks with one another which would make our marriage official."

" No wonder you wanted it back so much."

" It is a symbol of our love and devotion."

" What will you do now?"

" I have the Sun's Mask back so I must return to Anju in Clock Town."

" All that way!?" I exclaimed. " Do you think you can make it in time before the moon crashes?"

Tender Taps nodded. " I will make it back even if I do so on the last ounce of strength left in my body. If you could, would you and your fairy companion come to see Anju and me at the Stock Pot Inn? There is something you two must witness and I promise that it will be worth it. I know it's cutting things pretty close what with the moon and all but I would really appreciate your presence, Anju would as well. Well... I hope to see you both there." He then turned and began running as fast as he could until he was completely out of sight. When it came to his devotion for Scootaloo, there was nothing that could stop him.

" It's past midnight now, Sunset." Twilight said.

I was shocked when she said that. " What!? How is that possible!?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I don't know but it seemed time passed by relatively quickly when we were in there. In any case, we succeeded in helping out Tender Taps but it seems we still have one last thing to do before we can safely say this side quest has been completed."

" He wants us to go and see them back at the inn."

" Yes and he was rather insistent about it."

" What could he be up to?"

" I don't know but we should go there anyway and find out." Twilight answered. " You can use the Song of Soaring to get you back to town long before he does and then it's just a matter of getting to Scootaloo and wait for Tender Taps to arrive. This is going to be cutting things close, Sunset, as time is definitely not on our side right now but hopefully we can still reset time and not witness this world being destroyed like what we saw when Ganondorf brought us to the dream world."

Sometime in the past...

" When are you going to tell me about this ultimate prank of yours, Skull Kid?" Spike asked.

" Like I said before, Tael, I won't tell you until we arrive at our destination." Starlight answered.

" And when will that be?"

Starlight came to a stop and pointed her finger down at the ground. " Right here!"

" Isn't this the top of the Clock Tower?"

Starlight nodded. " Normally, it's impossible for anyone to get up here until the tower opens when the carnival begins, but with my power, I can come up here without having to wait. Anyway, this is what I've been thinking about. You know how all those small pranks have mainly just caused mischief? It's been fun and all but I want to really leave behind my mark by doing something that will forever be removed by these people."

" What did you have in mind?"

" I want to cause destruction."

Spike shook his head before demanding Starlight to repeat herself. " I'm sorry but what did you say, Skull Kid?"

" I said that I want to cause destruction."

" Why would you want to do that?"

" Like I said, I want to cause destruction." Starlight answered. " I don't know why but I've been feeling a strong desire towards destroying this entire world for all the wrongs it has done to me, but also because I think it would be funny to see their screaming faces as their world comes to an end."

Spike didn't respond at first, horrified over what his friend had just said, but before he had a chance to speak his opinion, he watched as Starlight raised her hand and began channeling her magic towards the sky. For several minutes, Starlight continued pouring magic upwards at the sky and from Spike's perspective, she was acting rather foolish, but then that opinion of his quickly changed when something began to appear in the sky. It was very small at first but soon quickly grew in size until it came into full view and Spike reacted by cowering in fear before hiding behind a green pot located on the tower.

In the meantime, Starlight chuckled as she finally stopped using her magic and stared up at what she had brought down from the sky. Above Clock Town was a large moon that seemed ordinary yet it possessed a menacing face along with sharp eyes that could pierce one's soul. As Spike came out of hiding, he looked up at the moon and couldn't even begin to imagine what his friend had in mind with its presence. Judging from its position, it would be a while before it could get any closer though what Starlight's true intention were remained unknown to him but he would quickly learn what she was doing.

" Um... What have you done, Skull Kid?"

" I have brought forth the ultimate prank!"

Spike blinked. " I don't understand."

" Then pay attention, Tael, and I'll tell you." Starlight said. " As of late, I've felt compelled to move beyond inflicting harmless pranks on people and go straight for destroying everything in an apocalyptic fashion out of revenge and wanting to see their faces, but mainly because I feel like it. Unfortunately, I couldn't bring the moon any closer without giving myself a major headache but it will still destroy this pathetic excuse of a world. In fact, they have exactly three days before the moon crashes into Clock Town. Once I begin this prank, nothing can stop it other than them yet they are all currently trapped with no hope of gaining back their freedom."

" Is that why you wanted to get rid of the four?"

Starlight nodded. " They are the only ones who can ruin my fun and I'm not going to let them succeed. Besides, it's not like anyone is going to free them from their prisons by defeating the masked ones I created to keep them contained."

" But what about that girl we saw in the woods?"

" She is of no concern."

" I don't know for sure, Skull Kid."

" What are you getting at, Tael?"

" Something about that girl felt really weird."

" She looked the part too."

" No, what I mean is that she seems to posses a unique aura that makes her different." Spike said. " I know we fairies are able to sense such things but what surrounds this girl is unlike anything seen before in Termina. I would wager that this girl could in fact be destined to change the fate of this world. I know you don't want to hear such things, Skull Kid, but this is what I'm sensing with this girl. Maybe stealing her instrument and horse wasn't the best idea you've had."

Starlight took offence. " Nonsense! I wanted to have some fun with her and I did."

" But what if she thwarts your ultimate prank?"

" Then I shall start the prank now before she gets the chance to ruin my fun." Starlight answered. She raised her hand and once again unleashed her magic which began affecting the moon though it wasn't obvious at first because of how far it was in comparison to the entirety of Termina. " This is going to be the best prank I've ever pulled, Tael, and I will make sure it gets carried out." Then her voice suddenly changed though Spike didn't notice it. " Soon... nothing will remain and all shall perish in an eternal flame."

After taking out the ocarina again and playing the Song of Soaring, I focused on heading back to Clock Town. The tremors from the moon had since gotten worse due to how closer it was compared with earlier but I couldn't get distracted like that especially when I was so close in helping out Scootaloo with her love problem. Wings protruded from my back, wrapped themselves around me, and spun around several times before I disappeared. Moments later, I arrived back in front of the Clock Tower and immediately ran towards the east part of town knowing that I had to hurry before the moon would crash.

While I wasn't liking the idea of doing things when under such intense pressure--the moon was what was giving me said pressure--I actually felt confident knowing things were going to work out with both Scootaloo and Tender Taps, and stopping the moon from crashing once and for all. Reaching the Stock Pot Inn and going inside using my key, I ran up the stairs as I had yet to explore the second floor and stood in front of a door that had a sign on it that said "Staff Only". No doubt that Scootaloo was waiting on the other side but I was curious to know what was in my room, the "Knife Chamber" as she called it.

I had some time to spare so I walked to the left and down the hall until coming upon another door with the sign "Knife Chamber" on it. Since I wasn't going to have another chance to see what my room was like before resetting time, I used my key to unlock the door, and went inside only to find myself feeling very disappointed. The room itself looked rundown as though no one had bothered to keep it up to date and there was even a hole to my right in the wall that looked like you could listen in on someone's conversation from next door. The only thing of merit was a small treasure chest--most likely a gift--so I kicked it open and took out a silver rupee--it was worth one hundred rupees.

While I had no use for it now, I was going to deposit it once I was done here as I needed plenty of rupees with which to purchase items in preparation for dealing with Starlight during the next cycle of time--I had every intention of ending things before they could get even worse. Leaving the Knife Chamber and walking back to the Staff Only room, I went inside and saw Scootaloo sitting on the bed, yet to my right was a beautiful wedding dress that surely belonged to her. Perhaps what stood out the most was a mask in the shape of the moon resting above the dress. This had to have been the Moon's Mask that Tender Taps mentioned.

Scootaloo looked up at me. " Oh... Um... Hello."

" I didn't think you would seriously stay here given what's happening outside." I said.

" I said that I would wait for Kafei and I intend on doing just that."

" What did your mother have to say?"

Scootaloo sighed. " She was not very happy with me to say the least. When I revealed to her my intention of waiting here for him, she gave me an earful and reiterated her claim that he was no good for me and he planned on going to Romani Ranch and elope with Cremia because of financial reasons. I couldn't accept such lies even if she is my own mother so I gathered up some courage that I never knew I had and told her that he would never do anything like that."

" Did she believe you?"

" She did not and so I had no choice but to show her the pendant you gave me."

I gulped. I accidentally allowed Misty Fly to see it earlier so hopefully it didn't end up going badly. " What was her reaction to seeing that?"

" My mother knew there and then that Kafei still thought of me despite his disappearance and the pendant was proof of his devotion." Scootaloo answered. " Even though she still believed him to be a scoundrel for seemingly abandoning me, she acknowledged that he had every intention of coming back. Despite her hesitation towards it, she agreed to allow me to remain here and wait for him. My mother and grandmother have since fled to Romani Ranch though I fear doing so would amount to nothing. Many in town said that when the moon falls, it would cause a tremor that would destroy everything. There is no place in Termina safe from what is going to happen."

I decided to change the subject. " He's coming..."

" Who is?"

" Kafei."

That made Scootaloo smile. " I knew he would come back."

" So we're just going to wait for him?"

Scootaloo nodded. " There is nothing either of us can do though I am surprised that you decided to come here." She then stared longingly at me until I turned my head away from her gaze over being uncomfortable with her doing it. " Kafei told you and your fairy companion to be here didn't he? I'm sorry if I made you feel uneasy but you didn't need to be pressured into saying something otherwise. I know why he asked and it will become clear once he arrives."

At that moment, the door opened and standing in the doorway was Tender Taps. He looked incredibly exhausted which made sense given he ran all the way through the canyon path between Ikana and Termina Field whilst avoiding monsters and dealing with tremors courtesy of the moon. And yet, he looked like he could keep on going for a lot longer but I knew that he was completely tapped. Both Princess Twilight and I chose to remain quiet as both he and Scootaloo had their precious moment together. From their perspective, it felt like time had stopped entirely but from mine, I knew what was going to happen.

" Didn't think I would make it in time." Tender Taps said as he breathed in and out to slow down his heart rate.

" I... I have met you before." Scootaloo said as she gazed upon the man she was in love with. " What a familiar scent that exudes from your body. Long, long ago... I remember a meeting between us both that would change both of our lives forever. Yes. We were still young back then but in our hearts we both knew what we wanted. We made a promise didn't we? The masks of the sun and the moon... Special masks that we decided would prove our love for each other. We were to exchange them on the day of the Carnival of Time and that day has finally come after so much waiting we had to endure."

" Anju... I'm sorry I was late."

" Welcome home, Kafei."

Both of them then went into a loving embrace and I couldn't help but make an appropriate reaction. " How adorable..."

Princess Twilight began giggling. " I definitely concur with you, Sunset. They're lovers, but they look just like a mother and child."

" At least she isn't freaking out over what he looks like."

" She is looking past that and sees him for who he really is."

Tender Taps then turned towards me. " I'm glad you came here, green hat girl."

" Are you going to tell me why you needed me and my friend?" I asked.

" To bear witness what is about to happen."

Scootaloo nodded. " We could not do this without someone other than ourselves witness it." She turned to Tender Taps. " We have endured much hardship, you and I, but now we can finally fulfill our promise towards each other that we made so long ago."

" Let us exchange the promised masks."

Both of them then broke off their embrace with Tender Taps taking out the Sun's Mask from behind his back--I was surprised that it managed to survive the trip through the canyon path. Scootaloo, in the meantime, got up, walked over to where she had placed the Moon's Mask, grabbed it, and walked back over before dropping to her knees. Holding out both masks, they pressed them against one another and a bright light shone, blinding everything around us. When the light disappeared moments later, both Scootaloo and Tender Taps resumed their loving embrace from before yet I was more interested in what had appeared in place of their masks.

Floating above their heads was a beautiful looking white coloured mask that featured a strange line pattern on the front. There was something magical about the mask as I continued to stare at it until it floated down towards me before stopping. I could sense they wanted me to take the mask into my hands so I did and I felt their love emanating from it. At long last, I had finally collected all of the masks that existed in Termina. Now only the ultimate mask remained though I couldn't even begin to imagine where it could be. It had to be somewhere in this world but after visiting every last corner of it, the chances of finding it were slim.

" We have exchanged our oaths and have become a couple." Scootaloo said. " You are our witnesses to our happy union and so we have given you a reward that best reflects the nature of this union. Please accept this mask."

" What is it called?"

" It is known as the Couple's Mask." Tender Taps answered. " It is a mask that represents our love and can soften the hearts of those who see it. It's a shame that my mother was unable to bear witness to this moment but she never could escape from that accursed meeting. The same with my father though he had to deal with cancelling all those performances for the carnival which has already begun."

" We hope that you cherish that mask." Scootaloo said.

" Please take refuge, green hat girl."

" But... The moon!" I exclaimed.

" We are fine here."

" We shall greet the morning... together." Scootaloo said. " But know that we will never forget you for what you have done for us."

Despite my protests, they refused to move and insisted that they would greet the morning as a couple. While a part of me was very happy for having united them together and acquiring the final mask, a part of me also knew that their happiness was about to end when I reset time back to the beginning. Unlike previous times where I was bothered by events being erased and my contributions becoming lost, I was mortified because the thought of them losing this tender moment was too much for me to bear. But, things had to go back to the beginning as there wasn't enough time to get up to the Clock Tower and confront Starlight--I had only a couple of hours left.

As I left them in their loving embrace and ultimately the Stock Pot Inn, I began thinking about what Tender Taps said about his mother, Mayor Mare. He said that she never could escape from her meeting and to me, it sounded like the Couple's Mask was necessary to help her out. It felt weird knowing that such a simple solution would come so late in the journey but then this was nothing new. I felt compelled towards helping out Mayor Mare as no one should be forced to deal with a problem beyond their means to solve. With that decision settled, I quickly went to deposit all my rupees at the bank before playing the Song of Time to reset everything--I would be strong despite losing so much.

Dawn of the First Day - 72 Hours Remain.

There was one thing that was certain. I was going to finish things at the end of this cycle! While there were plenty of other side quests that I could have undertaken in order to make myself stronger, I felt the need to finally confront Starlight and end this before it could be dragged out any longer. That meant having to skip through the entire three days until I reached the final night but before doing that, I first needed to help out Mayor Mare. Her problem wasn't all that necessary to my journey yet I wanted to do this last thing because it was right in town and could be done right away.

Walking into East Clock Town, I walked up to the Mayor's Residence only to remember that I had to wait until 8:00am in order for it to be open to business--it was currently 6:15am so I came here a little too early. I remembered what happened when I came here way back at the start of my journey and I thought they would never stop their arguing. It mainly boiled down between Sweetie Belle and Shining Armour arguing over whether to have the carnival as planned or flee town with Mayor Mare stuck in the middle. I had no intention of listening to their arguing a second time. Instead, I was going to get to the point and use my new mask.

My daydreaming proved effective in passing the time as the Mayor's Residence unlocked and I went inside. One thing I never figured out was how both groups managed to get in here so early when the public couldn't. I never noticed them go past me as I waited outside or perhaps my daydreaming was so strong that I was oblivious to everything. In any case, they were already speaking--arguing--with each other so I walked left--the receptionist surprisingly wasn't there--and opened the door where the sounds of arguing rang in my ears as both Sweetie Belle and Shining Armour shouted their respective positions. Fortunately, I had missed their initial discussion.

" On with the carnival!" Sweetie Belle shouted.

" All must take refuge!" Shining Armour shouted.

" This is getting ridiculous!"

" Looks like we finally agreed on something for once."

" We've been arguing for days trying to come up with a peaceful solution and our efforts have failed." Sweetie Belle said. " And it looks like the mayor just isn't showing any signs of wanting to make a decision that will determine what happens."

" How can you speak so coldly about Mayor Dotour?"

" It's called stating the obvious, Viscen!"

" You're one to talk, Mutoh!"

" The carnival must be allowed to continue even if Monsieur Aroma has been cancelling performances."

" Without those performances, there isn't going to be much of a carnival at this rate." Shining Armour said. " Look, I know that you look forward to the carnival every year, but things have changed because of what is happening above us, and no one is willing to stick around out of fear that they could be killed." He turned towards Mayor Mare who looked confused as to what to do. " The town militia simply can't keep up with so many problems and we don't need what you're throwing at us added to it." Raising his spear, Shining Armour slammed it down and got everyone's attention. Mayor Dotour, please tell us what we should do."

Mayor Mare shrugged. " I just don't know what option is best for us."

Sweetie Belle got annoyed. " Well that went nowhere fast!"

Mayor Mare then noticed me standing by the door. " Are you a child who is lost?" I didn't know how to answer her but when Sweetie Belle and Shining Armour looked in my direction with menacing glares, I couldn't say anything in my defence leaving Mayor Mare to try and figure something out. " I would suggest paying a visit to my husband. He is very good at handling children your age."

" I think I can help you out." I said, finally getting past those cold glares.

This caused both Sweetie Belle and Shining Armour to start laughing whilst Mayor Mare rubbed her head. " At this point, I am desperate to finally put an end to this abysmal meeting so if you do have a ways of helping out, please do it right now without delay."

Taking out the Couple's Mask from behind my back, I placed it on my face and immediately the arguing ceased though something else happened instead. The jaws of all three principal participants dropped upon seeing what I was wearing and the magic within the mask began affecting Mayor Mare. If what Tender Taps said was true, this mask would be able to calm tensions between people by soothing their hearts. It sounded an awful lot like what Princess Cadance--the pony version--could do according to what Princess Twilight once described about her to me.

" What is she wearing?" Sweetie Belle asked.

" It's having some kind of strange effect on me." Shining Armour answered.

" The Couple's Mask." Mayor Mare said. " What a nice reminder... So, a young couple has been married? Even in times such as this, the power of love once again proves itself to be far stronger than anything else out there. It is most unfortunate that we will never know who caused that mask to appear but it is a sign nonetheless. Surely the rest of you can agree that seeing this mask is a blessing."

" I wonder... Did my husband flee?" Scootaloo asked. Behind the Couple's Mask, my jaw dropped upon hearing Sweetie Belle say that. She didn't look like she was old enough to be married given her height and general appearance but apparently she had a husband. Once again, this world made no sense though I had long gotten used to that. " I know he kept on saying we should flee but I insisted we should stay."

" What!?" Shining Armour exclaimed. " What did you just say?"

" You heard what I said."

" I know what I heard." Shining Armour said. " But, I was just surprised that you of all people would say something like that given your gruff personality."

" What about you?"

" I worry for my wife and child."

That's when Mayor Mare made an announcement. " Yes, yes, everyone. We are all worried for our families. Why don't we end this meeting? I'm sure that would put all of us at ease especially after you two have spent all this time arguing over something that honestly never needed to be argued about in the first place."

" But, Mrs. Mayor..." Sweetie Belle began.

" Enough!"

" Oh..."

" This will do." Mayor Mare said. " Whether you're stubborn and will stay and guard your family, or if you'd prefer to run far away and seek shelter... That is for people to decide on their own without having to feel ashamed for making such a choice. I know you'll each make the right choice that is correct in your minds so take solace knowing no one will judge you for it or else they would be ignorant of it all. Now then, this meeting is adjourned!"

I was surprised that Mayor Mare suddenly went all serious by putting both Sweetie Belle and Shining Armour in their place. Princess Twilight had told me about her status as mayor in Ponyville and how she was kind to everyone but this was a side of her I never would have expected. She had needed courage to stop the arguing and I managed to deliver it to her by using the Couple's Mask. If not for Scootaloo and Tender Taps, they would all still be at each other's throats until one of them ended up getting hurt or worse. As everyone left in complete silence, they all looked at me with emotionless expressions. I didn't know what to think of it other than not wanting to have to deal with them.

Once the last one had left, I took off the Couple's Mask. " I'm surprised this mask did the trick."

" Thank you for allowing me to put an end to all that pointless bickering."

" It was my pleasure."

" To think that those two were so stubborn that they couldn't see the truth in front of their faces."

" How can you put up with them?"

Mayor Mare shrugged. " Both Viscen and Mutoh are invaluable to my administration though I will admit that I sometimes think I would be better served by those who can understand the feelings of each side and not their own. Adults are all so stubborn... It is shameful. Here is a token of my gratitude. Personally, it does absolutely nothing for me but perhaps you might make some use out of it." She reached down and opened up a drawer below her desk, pulled something out of it, closed the drawer, and brought it up where I was surprised to see a Piece of Heart in her possession. " Here you go."

I took it from her hands and felt the warmth from it as my strength grew a little bit more. " To be honest, I'm surprised you couldn't handle what just happened on your own seeing as you are the mayor and all."

" In truth, I wouldn't say I was reliable at my job."

" Really?"

Mayor Mare nodded. " I may be an unreliable mayor, but at least my family can depend on me. I want to protect my husband and my son, wherever he is. Even now, I still wonder what has become of Kafei after all this time. Deep down in my heart, I hope that he is okay wherever he is right now."

I could have told her that I met with Tender Taps and helped him but that was in the previous cycle. As such, what I did for him never happened and he was back to trying to figure out how to get his mask back from Lightning Dust and remaining hidden from those who cared about him. Knowing I couldn't do anymore, I thanked Mayor Mare for the Piece of Heart and left her residence. Looking up at the moon, Princess Twilight and I both knew that I needed to make the necessary preparations before confronting Starlight. It was only going to take a short to grind up the necessary rupees and pay for what I needed but it would be worth it.

My montage began by leaving Clock Town--after having to convince the guard one more time that I was an adult and not a child--and began traversing Termina Field in order to grind for rupees. This process took roughly the entirety of the first day in that I kept going in and out of town to cut down the same patches of grass to earn rupees. I also took the liberty of using Light Arrows to destroy any monsters I ran into--they would drop purple rupees that were worth fifty and thus speed things up immensely. While it seemed monotonous in practice to just grind all day, I needed as many supplies as possible in case something went wrong.

Starlight's true power was a mystery to me and yet it wasn't her that I was worried about. No, I was worried about Ganondorf and what he was capable of doing assuming that he would want to challenge me to one of his contests again. I wouldn't put it past him if he were to do that because in his mind, I had to endure even more torment until I accepted him as my master and become his obedient servant. Once I had ascertained that my rupee count was sufficient--my wallet reached its maximum amount--I went back into town and headed over to the local shop to make some purchases.

Fortunately, my rupee grinding gave me enough bombs and arrows so I didn't need any of those so instead I made sure to purchase three Red Potions and one Green Potion leaving me with the one empty bottle. I planned on filling it up with a fairy or Chateau Romani provided I could scrounge up enough rupees. Princess Twilight then suggested for me to visit the Bomb Shop though I didn't see the point as I had completely filled up my Bomb Bag yet Her Highness insisted on it so after going back outside into the field to grind for some more rupees, I went back into town and made my way over to the Bomb Shop.

It was there when I realized there was a type of bomb I never purchased and it was one I recalled using during my previous journey though just barely. On the counter was a small bomb in the shape of a mouse and I purchased twenty of them knowing they could prove themselves useful in certain situations. What I picked up was a Bombchu, a bomb based on the actual monster, and could crawl up walls until it exploded upon contact with anything. It would explode of its own volition if it didn't hit anything so it was useful when a regular bomb just couldn't do the job. With that done, I assumed I was ready for Starlight until Princess Twilight told me that I needed to fill the contents of that one remaining bottle.

I also remembered what happened when I had to get up to the Clock Tower for the first time. It involved getting some kind of gem for the Deku Scrub whose Deku Flower was located in front of the tower though he wouldn't give up the Deku Flower unless without giving him the gem in exchange. While I believed I would have to go through that process all over again--including going through that underground route--Her Highness said that there was a narrow walkway on the side of the tower that went to the entrance. I was happy to hear that as it meant I had easy access now.

Believing that I was now ready to confront Starlight and end things, I took out the ocarina and began playing the Song of Double Time. I had to play it a total of five times to reach the final night as the Clock Tower would only open at midnight of the final night. As I moved through time, I began thinking about what my life would be like once everything changed back to normal. I would still have to deal with the magic problem that had been plaguing Canterlot High but my friends would be there to help me through the worst of it. If anything, my life would be different than before.

Night of the Final Day - 12 Hours Remain.

I could have gotten some Chateau Romani to give myself infinite amount of magic but I felt that would only be cheating. I mean, I would be able to use magic without having to worry about running out but where would the challenge be in doing that? Absolutely nowhere that's what! Taking the easy way out is what caused me to fall from Princess Celestia's good graces so long ago resulting in the world I called home becoming imbued with Equestrian Magic. I intended on doing things properly without any shortcuts so Chateau Romani was out of the question but a random fairy definitely wouldn't hurt.

" Are you ready for this, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

I nodded. " I've gotten as many items as I believe I need for this."

" While I still think you should have gotten a bottle of Chateau Romani for your upcoming battle, I can understand why you didn't want to do that."

" It brings back bad memories of the past."

" Hence why I'm not going to hold it against you." Twilight said. " At any rate, I think you're more than prepared to deal with Starlight. Me? I'm still having some issues with the fact that she is our enemy especially after helping her to change her ways, but I know that this version of Starlight isn't the one who is trying to destroy this world. Come to think of it, why go to such great lengths in the first place?"

I shrugged. " I guess we'll know when we ask her." I looked up at the clock face on the front of the Clock Tower. " We still have another few hours to go before the tower opens so we need to kill some time until then." I then noticed Sweetie Belle standing nearby though she wasn't angry like she was before--I somehow remembered her expression back then despite how long it had been--and decided to go and talk to her. Time in this world flowed relatively quickly where you hardly notice it go by until its too late. I approached Sweetie Belle who nodded in response. " I'm surprised you're even here considering what the mayor said."

Sweetie Belle nodded. " Mayor Dotour opened up my eyes to the truth, kid. I should have realized that all that arguing amounted to nothing and instead was just causing a rift between my boys and the town militia."

" Arguing never solves anything."

" You won't hear me complain about that."

" So, you decided to stay?"

Again, Sweetie Belle nodded. " After she ended the meeting, Mayor Dotour spoke to both Viscen and myself individually about how we acted. I thought for a moment that she was going to chew us out and have us both fired from our jobs but she instead said that the carnival was to go ahead as planned. While I was thrilled about that, the truth is most of the performances were cancelled by Monsieur Aroma so we have to make do with what we have left. Sadly, the bridge my boys and I were supposed to make never got finished but I can't complain about that either given the circumstances."

" And Viscen?"

" He wasn't happy at first about the carnival going on but he soon realized that it had to because of tradition."

" Tradition?"

" Every year, we pay our respects to the Four Giants who protect this land." Sweetie Belle answered. " The Carnival of Time is a celebration of how each of the four regions come together as one and through the wearing of masks, we go up to the Clock Tower when it opens and pray for a good year to come. Yeah, I know about the stories that are often told to little kids like you so don't be surprised. Anyway, without the bridge, you'd have to go up there by using that side path that got built about two years ago when some complained the bridge was unsafe one time."

" So, about Viscen?"

" He is somewhere keeping watch over things."

It wasn't the answer I was expecting from her but it was better than nothing. " Are you happy that the carnival is on?"

At first, Sweetie Belle didn't know how to answer my question, but when she did, she sighed and lowered her head slightly. " I'm happy that tradition has been retained but at the same time, it's clear that there were problems all because of that moon above us. Had I realized the truth instead of blaming it on the monsters outside of town, things could have turned out differently and we'd have a better celebration for it. When we're all dead, I'll have died knowing that I was wrong and I accept that. I just hope it doesn't affect me in the beyond or else I'll get stuck with eternal torment. Say... What about you, kid? Why are you still around?"

I knew she was going to eventually ask me that. " I have to get to the top of the Clock Tower."

" Do you have a mask?"

I nodded. " Twenty-three of them to be exact."

Sweetie Belle was surprised. " Wow... Talk about being truly dedicated to something. Well, I won't stop you from going up there since you're the only one here. I would go up there before you but I don't have a mask on me right now. Besides, it's common courtesy to have tourists go up before residents. Enjoy the experience, kid! It's sure to be something you're sure to never forget."

She then waved at me--or whatever constituted as such--before she resumed looking up at the Clock Tower though I could hear her grumbling under her breath over how things weren't up to her personal standards. Fortunately, my conversation with Sweetie Belle took up quite a bit of time--it had only now just occurred to me that time in Termina went by quickly compared with how it should be--as the clock was mere moments away from midnight. After having endured so much, the final conflict was at hand. The clock then began ringing to indicate midnight and things started happening.

First, fireworks began shooting across the sky followed by the tower rising up before it suddenly tilted forward. I thought it was going to fall off and smash into the town until I realized that it stopped and that another platform had taken its place. I had to admit that whoever built the tower was really clever at making such a marvel--Equestria didn't have anything like it nor the world I called home--yet it worked. I could understand why it occurred once a year as such a feat being used too much would cause unnecessary strain on the mechanized parts resulting in it eventually collapsing and falling apart. That's when I realized the platform was in fact the clock face but having shifted position.

As I continued looking up at the tower, steps then appeared in front of the platform I needed to reach. The steps dropped down like they were slots allowing access to the top so now the time had come to confront Starlight and stop the moon from crashing. Running up the stairs and turning right, I began to shimmy across the narrow walkway though I made sure to take it slowly as falling off would have been embarrassing. Once I reached the platform and climbed up onto it, I noticed a small Recovery Heart had been left there. I remembered getting a Piece of Heart up here so that meant a Recovery Heart took the place of a Piece of Heart if the latter had been picked up.

Grabbing the Recovery Heart out of principle--and because I had gotten used to picking them up--I ran up the stairs and reached the top of the Clock Tower. I was honestly expecting Starlight to be standing before me but she was no where to be seen. Looking around at my surroundings, there were several green pots located in each compass direction of the circular platform and I suspected they contained Magic Jars. Aside from that, there wasn't really much else to look at aside from a birds-eye view of the town. Princess Twilight then told me to look up as the one we were looking for was above us.

I looked up and my entire body froze upon seeing Starlight Glimmer, or rather, her backside as she wasn't looking in my direction. Spike, on the other hand, noticed me straight away and began getting excited prompting her to turn around and see what had gotten his attention. Upon seeing me, Starlight folded her arms and simply floated there without uttering a single word, making me feel very uneasy. I could sense the dark magic that surrounded her and knew this wasn't going to be easy. I had the means to summon the Four Giants but first, I wanted to see if I could get her to stop of her own volition.

Majora's Theme

Spike then floated out in front of Starlight. " Sis!"

Princess Twilight looked at me with confusion. " Why did Spike just call me his sister?"

" Tatl and Tael are siblings." I answered. " I'm actually surprised I remembered that little tidbit from the very beginning."

" What should I say in response?"

" Sis?" Spike asked. " Are you okay?"

" You should answer back how he expects you to."

Princess Twilight nodded and turned towards Spike before moving forward slightly. " Spike!" I slapped my forehead in response to that. She was supposed to have said Tael and not Spike as the latter would only confuse him, unless of course, his actual name was a nickname of sorts in which case it would have been pure coincidence. Her Highness quickly realized what she said was wrong and attempted to fix her little blunder. " Er... I mean... Tael!"

" Why did you call me Spike just now?" Spike asked.

Before Princess Twilight could answer him, Starlight thrust out her hand and everyone went quiet. She then looked down at me. " So... You finally managed to make your way up here didn't you, forest girl."

" I've been waiting for the chance to get my hands on you." I said.

Starlight glared. " How did you manage to change yourself back from being a Deku Scrub? I know my magic is way too much for you to handle yet here you are having regained your true self and leaving me thinking that what I did wasn't enough. Tell me... How did you pull it off?"

I took out the ocarina and began tossing it in the air repeatedly much like how she had done when I came up here during the first cycle of time. " I managed to get this back and learned a song from someone you know very well."

" Your instrument!?" Starlight exclaimed. " How did you get that back?"

" You dropped it."

Starlight was clearly unhappy with my answer. " I don't recall you having done that but I suppose it's not much of a big deal. I was going to actually sell that thing to make some quick money but it doesn't really matter when everything will soon be destroyed. Money is no good if there's no world around for one to spend it." She then realized who I was referring to when I said she knew the "someone" who helped me. " Even now... that woman continues to prove annoying. If she thinks I'll relinquish my power and give back this mask, she is even more delusional than I thought, hee hee!"

" I'm a lot stronger now than I was before, Starlight!"

" That name... I don't know why but I like the sound of it."

Crap! I made a similar blunder like Princess Twilight had done but at least Starlight was okay with it. " In any case, I've come here to put a stop to your insanity. Don't you realize what will happen if you allow the moon to crash into Clock Town? This world will be completely decimated and countless lives will be lost."

Starlight giggled. " Like I care about that? This is the ultimate prank right here!"

" Are you kidding me!?"

" Hee hee!" Starlight answered. " I've come this far with my prank and I aim to see it through to the end."

" Then you're hopeless."

That made Starlight annoyed. " Your insults hold no meaning to me, forest girl. In fact, I would go as far to say that you are an insignificant speck compared to me. Even if you have become stronger, you can't do anything to hurt me. I'm sure you will figure it out soon enough once we get things truly started. I've been watching you as you scurried about though you appeared desperate to try and stop what cannot be stopped."

" Why are you doing this?"

" Because I want to destroy everything!"

" How could you even consider that?"

" Why wouldn't I?"

Clearly, this was going nowhere. No matter how hard I tried to convince Starlight to stop what she was doing, she had every intention of making sure Termina was destroyed. My options were getting fewer and fewer and that meant having no other choice but to fight her in hopes that would convince her to stop. Deep down in my heart, however, I feared I was no match for her power. There was still so much about Majora's Mask that remained relatively unknown so Starlight could merely be using a small portion of her power leaving her with a near limitless reserve she had yet to tap into.

Suddenly, Spike floated out in front of Starlight. " Swamp... Mountain... Ocean... Canyon... Hurry! The Four who are there... Bring them here!"

" What are you doing, Tael?"

" This has to stop, Skull Kid."

" It can't be stopped now."

" If that girl can call them forth, then perhaps they can help you."

Starlight responded by smacking Spike as hard as she could. " Don't speak out of line, stupid fairy!"

That made Princess Twilight furious. " What in the hay do you think you're doing!?"

" What, that?" Starlight asked. " Tael has been punished before in that manner several times already all because he had an opinion. He has to learn his place and remain obedient. Even when everything comes to an end within a matter of hours, Tael must remember."

" You monster!" Princess Twilight shouted. " He's been there for you all this time even when you were clearly going off the deep end, and what do you do in return? Abuse his friendship by treating him like scum! I've managed to remain tolerant thus far, Starlight, but you've crossed the line big time! I was hoping this could have been resolved without any trouble but its clear you're too far gone to save."

I never would have guessed that Princess Twilight had a short temper much like I did but then, she wasn't as quick to anger as I was. She could take all kinds of insults against her character and still refrain from lashing out in return, yet even someone like her had a boiling point and Starlight had just reached it. No doubt Her Highness wouldn't allow her rage to get the best of her, unlike myself who often becomes consumed by it, yet even she was allowed to get mad over something that was really important to her. Being a princess didn't mean closing off one's emotions and being someone who smiled and waved at everything.

Starlight shrugged as she unfolded her arms. " Well... whatever!"

" This isn't over!"

" I'm afraid that it is, Tatl."

" What do you mean?"

" Even if they were to be summoned and come here, they wouldn't be able to handle me." Starlight answered as she giggled up a storm. She maintained this composure for a few moments before looking up at the moon. " Just look above you. If it's something that can be stopped, then just try to stop it! But, I'm not going to give you as much time as you might think. Clearly, the destruction must happen sooner rather than later otherwise this pointless conversation is going to keep on going longer than necessary. Instead of giving you five hours, how about five minutes?"

Spreading her arms and legs apart, Starlight began to concentrate all of her magic on something though I knew straight away what she was about to do. The last time she did this during the initial cycle of time, I lacked the means to stop her and could only reset time to have more of it to work with. Now, I could stop her by calling the Four Giants yet I still believed I could make her listen to reason. Summoning them would be my last resort if everything else failed and Starlight was beyond hope. She then screamed as she unleashed all her magic where it began affecting the moon and just like before, the moon began falling faster.

" What do you want to do, Sunset?"

" I know trying to talk to her is pointless as she refuses to listen." I answered.

" Guess it's time to play that song Principal Celestia taught you."

" Before doing that... I... I want to see if I can subdue her first."

Princess Twilight was surprised. " Why would you want to do that?"

" I know that the Four Giants are needed but summoning them might put Starlight in danger." I answered. " There's no way of knowing what's going to happen when they show up and despite all she has done, I can't let her suffer a horrible fate now can I?"

Princess Twilight smiled. " Guess my friendship advice to you all this time has really been paying off. Alright, Sunset. I'll let you try and subdue her through whatever means you have but if it doesn't work then you'll need to summon the Four Giants otherwise this world is done for."

" I'll know when I have to when I reach my limit." I said as I took out the Hero's Bow."

" What are you doing?" Starlight asked.

" Fight you!"

Starlight laughed. " I told you, you can't hurt me, but I suppose you'll just have to find out the hard way. I was hoping to test my powers against someone who could last long enough and while you're not exactly adequate, there isn't much time left before everything gets destroyed so you'll do until you're either dead or I get bored. Either way, I get to have some last minute fun at the expense of your life."

Sunset vs. Starlight

Before she had a chance to do anything, I fired a regular arrow straight at her only for her to shake her head causing the arrow to inflict no damage at all. I knew it wouldn't be easy to subdue but I wasn't expecting that. Starlight responded by raising her hand and flinging a fireball in my direction that I barely avoided by jumping to the side and rolling across the floor just as it exploded where I had been standing. I immediately got reminded of how I fought against Ganondorf--Lord Tirek back then--where he used a similar tactic whilst I would counter by hitting his magic back at him.

I had a feeling that trick wasn't going to work with Starlight on the principle that she wouldn't fall for such a ploy. She then snapped her finger causing two lightning bolts to shoot down from above and I dodged them both by rolling forward though she caught me with a third one that shot down upon me getting out from my roll. The shock to my entire body was enough to make me drop my bow but I quickly picked it back up before running towards one of the green pots. Firing another two arrows, Starlight shook her head again and both projectiles did nothing. I was beginning to see why she had so much confidence in saying I wouldn't be able to hurt her.

Switching out my regular arrow for a Light Arrow, I aimed up at her only to suddenly jump backwards when she shot another fireball at me. " You know, this is actually a lot of fun." She said as she giggled. " You continue to amuse me by shooting those pathetic little arrows at me only to feel saddened upon realizing that they have no effect on me at all. Oh by all means do continue shooting them my way as it will show just how stupid you are." She snapped her finger again which caused two more lightning bolts shot down from above and I jumped about all over the place to avoid both.

I then took aim and fired my Light Arrow though while she did shake her head like before, she wasn't able to deflect the arrow and it struck her. For a moment, Starlight dropped to the ground, clutching her chest in pain but then she quickly got back up and resumed flying only to shoot another fireball. This one actually hit me because of how fast it moved and I fell down onto one knee as a result. " Looks like that shot did something to you. Maybe you're not as invincible as you claim to be if you felt pain?" The glare she gave me was enough to prove that she was dead serious about wanting me dead before the moon crashed into Clock Town.

" Where did you get that Light Arrow from?"

" From the Stone Tower."

" There's no way you could have gotten over there so quickly."

" What can I say?" I said jokingly. " I'm just full of surprises."

Starlight then laughed. " Your Light Arrow did inflict some damage to me, that I won't deny, but it's not going to do you any good. You could keep doing that over and over until your time runs out and I'll still continue taking the punishment. Face it, forest girl. You don't have any options left!" Snapping her finger again, more lightning shot down from above, both blasts struck me one after the other and I dropped down onto both knees. " Hee hee! I'm going to enjoy killing you even though I could just let the moon do it for me."

" Sunset!" Twilight shouted.

" I can't defeat her this way." I said.

" Then you have to call them here."

" What are you up to?" Starlight asked.

" I have one last maneuver I can do that will stop you."

Again, Starlight laughed. " Hee hee! And what would that be?"

I think you already know the answer to that."

It took her a few seconds for Starlight to realize what I was about to do. As I put away my bow and took out the ocarina, I accidentally dropped it when she flung another fireball that struck me in the chest. I scrambled to pick it up as she continued throwing fireballs with the occasional lightning bolt on rare occasions. Her assault was relentless but I managed to pick it up only to realize that the song was one I had never practiced let alone remembered how it went. That gave Starlight the chance to take advantage and she did so by shaking her head and holding me in place before flinging me to one side.

Lucky for me that I didn't fall off of the Clock Tower after that attack as I would have surely died had I crashed into the ground below. Instead, I stopped at the edge of the platform and picked myself up before thinking about how that melody Principal Celestia taught me went. I then pictured her in my mind singing each note with a rather boisterous voice only to suddenly lose my concentration because of Starlight flinging another fireball my way. Jumping to the side to avoid it and rolling forward slightly, I continued envisioning how it went when it became clear like crystal--I wished I had remembered it before coming up here.

My first two attempts at playing it were dreadful but the third one worked and I played the Oath to Order, a melody that supposedly only had one purpose. Unable to prevent me from playing it, Starlight was about to shake her head when suddenly everything started rumbling. Was this what the song did? I couldn't be sure as this was the first time I had used it so anything could happen. As the rumbling continued to grow stronger, something caught Starlight's attention and she began looking around to see what it could be. Eventually, the rumbling stopped only for someone to begin shouting out from a vast distance.

I immediately recognized the shouting as belonging to Principal Celestia--I knew she was a Giant and all but her shouting felt morbid to some extent--and soon the other Giants began chiming in indicating that they were about to make their presence known. Without any warning, Starlight suddenly clutched her head and began shaking erratically as though she were suffering some kind of mental breakdown. It seemed she was being strongly affected by the call being made by the Four Giants to be reacting like that. I walked forward in hopes of trying to help her when she screamed at the top of her lungs in sheer agony.

Chapter 70: Children of the Moon

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
August 28, 2017
Chapter 70: Children of the Moon.

Playing the Oath to Order had no profound effect on me but for some reason, Starlight Glimmer was experiencing a tremendous amount of pain. It was the call being emitted from the Four Giants that was making her feel so much pain but why? She had no affiliation with them unless... no... there was no way she was the same mischievous imp from the story I heard from Principal Cinch via the All-Night Mask. I mean, she would have to be several centuries old but I questioned that claim. Still, why would Starlight be affected like this? It didn't make any sense but then again, nothing in this world ever did.

Looking up at the moon, my entire body froze upon seeing just how close it had gotten to Clock Town. Starlight hadn't been kidding when she said that she would give me five minutes to do something as opposed to the six hours I originally had. What I witnessed in the Dream World where everything in Termina had been destroyed was beginning to come true in that this was how it must have started. Had Ganondorf wanted me to see the end result just to make me suffer some more or had he a different intention in mind? In any case, time had clearly run out as the moon was roughly a minute away from impact.

Turning my attention towards Starlight, she continued screaming out in pain and showed no signs of stopping. Spike was completely beside himself, torn between wanting to make sure she was alright and trying to remove Majora's Mask from her face. Princess Twilight, on the other hand, was simply fascinated by the entire spectacle that was occurring before our eyes--you'd think the end of everything would affect Her Highness on a more emotional level but she seemed unfazed by it. Me? I was trying to grasp the situation but it proved difficult as I didn't expect anything like this to happen upon playing that song.

Suddenly, a shadow completely eclipsed me and I turned to see what might have caused it. Looking in the direction of Woodfall, my jaw dropped upon seeing Principal Celestia appear out of thin air, her face carrying a serious expression. It had been a long time since I last saw her so I was taken aback by her shimmering golden swimsuit and the markings across both her face and arms. She began walking towards Clock Town by literally trampling across Termina Field without a care in the world--no one was in her path otherwise they would have met a rather untimely demise through no fault of her own.

Another shadow then eclipsed me, this one coming from the north so I turned in the direction of Snowhead and watched as Vice-Principal Luna appeared. She chose to come in with a more creative pose--she was lying down on her side in a seductive manner--before she stood up and began walking over the mountains and onto the field. Much like her sister, her face looked serious, a sign both of them knew what needed to be done. Her dark blue shimmering swimsuit along with those markings reminded me of nightfall though I am certain it was just mere coincidence that I would be reminded of that.

The next shadow appeared from Great Bay so looked towards the ocean. I was expecting Dean Cadance to appear out of thin air like the previous two Giants but instead she chose to burst forth from the ocean itself. The waves parted as she rose up from deep below the ocean depths, her pink shimmering swimsuit and markings clashing with the water though I doubted she cared. Once she had arisen, she began walking out of the ocean, the waves receding back to how they were before, onto the sand, across the beach, and towards town leaving only just one more Giant to go, the one who was different.

A rattling noise then began ringing out and I knew that had to be Flurry Heart. Unlike the other Giants, she was much smaller so I wondered how she was going to contribute when she was clearly height deprived--I wasn't blaming her as she was still only a baby compared with them who were adults. Looking to the east, a rattle appeared and began shaking itself about before Flurry Heart appeared out of nowhere and held it firmly. Her inner tube looked just as adorable as ever though her swimsuit styled dress again made her stand out, but I could easily overlook such differences so long as she could contribute in stopping the moon from crashing.

Unlike the others who walked across Termina Field with huge strides, Flurry Heart opted to float across using a pair of wings she had on her back--either I never noticed them before during my initial encounter with her or I did but forgot or didn't pay enough attention. I even noticed Sugarcoat floating alongside her which made sense as she had to serve as the representative of Flurry Heart and had to go everywhere she went. In my mind, I assumed that not having all Four Giants would have prevented them from stopping the moon, forcing me to go back to the beginning of a new cycle of time. That wouldn't happen now as they were all present and accounted for.

As I watched the Giants approach Clock Town, a hand suddenly clasped itself on my shoulder. I whipped around in response and was staring directly into Starlight's eyes--the eyes of her mask at any rate. " What have you done!?"

" I've called the only ones who can stop you." I answered.

" I didn't think you had the means to actually summon them!"

" Like I said before, I'm just full of surprises."

Starlight attempted to grab the Ocarina of Time from my hand but I pulled it away from her at the last moment. " Give me that instrument, forest girl! I might be able to drive them away by playing something, anything so that I can get rid of this pain afflicting my body. Gah! Why did you have to go and ruin my fun just as I was about to pull off the ultimate prank?" Somehow, she managed to ignore the pain afflicting her body though it was obvious that she wasn't doing a good job of it. " I still have time to defeat you before they arrive so if I were you, I would hand over your instrument unless you want to get pummeled."

I sighed. " You still don't get it, do you?"

" Get what?"

" Using threats and immaturity just to have your own way."

" What!?"

" Just look at yourself, Starlight." I said. " You could have used that mask for noble purposes but instead you decided to get back at people out of revenge. Come to think of it, a long of the things you've done using that mask were against those who probably never even heard of you before and didn't deserve it. I suspect you just had a grudge against everyone including strangers or maybe someone is suggesting things to you."

That made Starlight annoyed. " I'm no one's puppet, forest girl!" She pressed her hand against her chest to make herself appear important. " Everything I have done with my power is because it's what I wanted to do period. You seem to be jealous of the fact that I have power and you don't, hee hee! Jealousy... That actually looks good on you. Makes me wish I had done more than just transform you into a Deku Scrub at the time."

I began laughing. " Why would I be jealous?"

Starlight was confused. " Because I have power?"

" Power gets you nothing in the end."

" Is that so?" Starlight asked as she got into my face. " Then how come I'm about to succeed in pulling off the ultimate prank and leaving my mark here in Termina? I'd said having power has made all of my dreams come true. Granted, I've had some problems lately in that for some reason, I black out for several minutes before coming to later and wondering what could have happened, but that's a minor setback, hee hee!"

Her arrogance was really testing my patient but then what she said at the end made me feel concerned. " You don't why you've been blacking out? Maybe that's a sign that you don't have as much power as you think you do. Heck! It could mean that you're losing control of what you already have but are afraid to admit it. Either way, you'll have to face judgment for what you've done."

" I'm not losing control!"

" I beg to differ."

" I'm not!" Starlight shouted. She then clutched her head and began writhing in pain. " Besides, it's not like you can do anything to hurt me, hee hee! I may have this pain coursing through my body but you can't defeat me. Guess you were wrong about power getting you nothing."

" I'm not the one you have to face."

" Then who?"

I pointed at each of the Four Giants. " They have more authority on the matter than I do."

Starlight then looked at each of them as they finally arrived at Clock Town but could do nothing other than scream at the top of her lungs again. In a way, I felt bad for her having to endure so much pain but then she deserved it for all of the pain she had caused across Termina. I supposed this was karma coming back to bite Starlight's butt as she could have prevented this had she chosen to stop her desire for destruction. And yet, my thoughts were still focused on what she said. Why was she blacking out? Could it that her mask was capable of being more than just that?

I had spent some time throughout this journey thinking about as to whether or not Majora's Mask was just that, a mask, but chose to ignore such thoughts as they didn't amount to anything, but now that Starlight said what she did, perhaps such thoughts were closer to the truth than I assumed. The main reason why I never bothered to put it all into practice was because of not being able to confront her up here without acquiring the necessary items. A mask was just something one would wear and while some had special powers attributed to them, the idea of a mask controlling its wearer was just ludicrous... or was it?

Before I had a chance to continue my thoughts, Princess Twilight bopped me on the head several times to get my attention and informed me that the Four Giants were ready to do whatever it was they were supposed to do. Each one stood in each of the four compass directions--and in front of the respective domains they guarded--and looked up at the moon that was mere moments away from destroying everything. They then looked at one another before turning back to the moon and lifted up their arms in what appeared to be an attempt to catch it in their outstretched palms.

Were the Giants being serious with their plan? Catching it with their hands? I mean, sure, Celestia, Luna, and Cadance could easily do it as they were tall enough not to mention possessed powerful legs that would surely support some of the weight the moon had, yet Flurry Heart was just a baby. She didn't have the legs to use to support the weight and she had smaller hands compared to them. Unless Flurry Heart was secretly as stronger than her fellow Giants, their plan might not work. But, I knew they had everything under control so I didn't need to worry though deep down I was freaking out a little.

The moon then fell a little bit more and into the hands of the Four Giants. At first, it looked like they were struggling to keep it up and my fears of Flurry Heart being the weakest link amongst them were becoming reality, but then they slowly began getting it under control, Flurry Heart proving she was just as capable as the others despite her size. This would continue back and forth for a while with the Giants pushing the moon in an attempt to slow its decent while it continued pushing down in hopes of hitting Clock Town--I was biting my nails as this had become so intense--until a bright light occurred which blinded everything for several seconds.

When my vision returned, I looked up before quickly closing my eyes out of fear that they had failed in their duty. To my surprise, everything felt peaceful, calm, like nothing was happening and everything had become normal. Opening my eyes, I was shocked to see the moon mere metres away from the tower yet it was no longer moving. The red fire that had surrounded the moon as it got within range--it was pretty despite how horrifying it was in retrospect--had disappeared and the Four Giants were holding it up with their hands. Aside from how awkward everything looked--it looked like they were carrying a huge sphere that had a face on it--the Four Giants had succeeded in stopping the moon.

Princess Twilight, who still had her eyes closed, landed on my hat. " What happened, Sunset? Is it over?"

" You can open your eyes now, Twilight."

" I'm afraid of what I'm going to see."

" There's nothing to be afraid of."

Opening her eyes, Princess Twilight looked around to see that the Four Giants had succeeded. " I don't believe it! How are they able to hold up the moon like that? Surely it must wear several thousand tonnes yet they are holding up like it was nothing. Truly, this is without a doubt, the most fascinating thing I've seen yet from this world. No one in Equestria is going to believe this and even I'm struggling to."

" Remember the story from Principal Cinch?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I remember."

" What the Four Giants have done shouldn't come as a surprise to anyone." I said. " Okay, I'll admit that I had my doubts too but this is something they have been doing since this world first existed." I then looked away from Her Highness out of guilt over what was about to come from my mouth regarding her niece. " I honestly thought Flurry Heart would struggle the most what with her size compared to the others so I doubted them."

" As the representative of the guardian of Ikana..." Sugarcoat began as she appeared next to me. " I find it insulting that you would insult her status as one of the protectors of this land just because she is different. If not for the fact that she has performed her duty, you would have been punished by her and the others for such insolence. If I were you, I would quickly rectify the situation by apologizing or else you could cause an incident."

I looked up at Flurry Heart. " I didn't mean to question your power."

" Goo-goo! Gah-ga-goo!" Flurry Heart said.

" The Giant accepts your apology." Sugarcoat said as she wrote something down on a notepad she held in her hands. " I'm writing down this slight infraction anyway because I feel you must be held accountable for disrespecting her but I won't hold it against you. Anyway, you have done well in summoning the protectors to stop what was happening. You did have trouble with the song but that was your fault for not practicing."

" No need to remind me."

" How else will you learn for the future?"

" You're going to write that down, aren't you?"

Sugarcoat nodded. " If the guardian I represent was able to talk, she would say the exact same thing to you. Anyway, you should check on that person who appeared to have fainted when the Four Giants succeeded in stopping the moon."

" What about you?"

" I must attend to the guardian of Ikana."

Adjusting her glasses whilst glaring at me, Sugarcoat floated up to Flurry Heart before landing on her shoulder. Even in Termina, she was just as blunt as ever refusing not to mince her words and making others feel bad. I had hoped she would have lightened up a little but I supposed some things were impossible even in a fantastical world as this. Still, I was glad the Four Giants had appeared as it meant this adventure was finally over. I was upset at the notion as despite the obvious problems, this had been fun though it had to end as things had to go back to the way they were before Ganondorf changed it.

" What do you think Sugarcoat meant about someone who fainted?" Twilight asked.

I looked down and saw Starlight had collapsed. " There's your answer."

" Why did she faint?"

I shook my head. " Beat's me but we should check to make sure she is okay."

" Good idea."

" And her mask?"

" It's probably too dangerous to take it off in case she were to suddenly awaken or something worse." Twilight answered. " If anything, we should consider tying her up so that she can't escape or use her magic. Before doing that, you should check her pulse first. You know, it saddens me to see my student lying on the ground having almost destroyed an entire world just for the fun of it. I was hoping she would have been better than that but perhaps old habits aren't so easily broken."

" This isn't the same Starlight you know, Twilight."

" I know, Sunset, but it's still hard for me."

Walking up to Starlight before getting down on my knees, I pressed my index and middle fingers up against her throat to check her pulse. She was definitely breathing so she wasn't dead, yet there was something odd about her breathing. It was like someone else was doing the breathing instead of her. When I heard her breathing earlier during the altercation where she wanted the ocarina, I knew she had exhausted herself despite saying I couldn't beat her. What I heard then sounded normal compared with now which sounded almost inhuman. What was I hearing?

I mean, I was glad Starlight had been defeated, yet something about this just didn't add up. The more I gazed upon her lifeless body, the more I felt something bad was about to happen that would change everything. For now, I decided to leave Starlight alone as she wasn't able to do anything. Plus, I didn't have anything to tie her up with. The Four Giants could always bring her down were she to become unruly again so there was nothing to worry about. Well... I wouldn't say that for sure as the moon still needed to be taken care of. It may have been stopped but the Giants couldn't keep holding it up forever. How were we supposed to send it back up to the sky?

" Any ideas on what to do with the moon, Twilight?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " We were so focused on trying to stop it from crashing that we never even considered such a possibility. I suppose we could ask the Giants to simply cast it upwards into the sky but I'm not sure if they can do that. I'm not disrespecting their power yet there is so much about them we don't even understand. Had I been given adequate time, I could have figured out more of their history and other abilities they possess."

I rolled my eyes. " Only you would want to do research on them."

" I can't help myself."

" Perhaps we should talk to one of them?"

" That might prove beneficial."

" And not for research purposes."

Princess Twilight blushed. " I know when I'm to be serious."

Before we could ask one of the Giants, Spike suddenly came out of nowhere and began hugging Princess Twilight as hard as he could. While I thought it was amusing to no end in addition to being adorable, she clearly didn't feel the same way. " Sis!"

" Uh... Spike?" Twilight said, confused by his hugging. " No need to hug me like that! It's not like you haven't seen me in years or anything like that."

" Are you okay, sis?" Spike asked. " Why did you call me by that name again?"

I wasn't about to get involved in this one so I allowed Princess Twilight to deal with it much to her displeasure. Now she knew what it felt like whenever I accidentally mentioned a character in this world via their true name because of who they were in the world I called home and Equestria. Besides, someone needed to come up with a plan on how to get the moon back up to the sky and Her Highness was currently preoccupied with her own little problem. I tried calling them in hopes one would listen yet they ignored me entirely leaving me to wonder if I had offended them somehow.

Meanwhile, Princess Twilight tried her best to explain things to Spike. " Well... You see... I thought it would make for a good nickname for you. Surely, you must be sick of being referred to as Tael all the time, right?"

Spike was still confused. " Um... Why would I be fed up with my name, Tatl?"

" I don't know!"

" Maybe hanging out with that forest girl has given you unwanted stress?" Spike asked. " It's clear to me that she has quite the reckless lifestyle though to be fair, you have often complained about wanting more action in your life."

" If only I could tell you the truth."

" About what?"

Princess Twilight sighed as she waved her hands. " If I tried to explain things to you, Spike, you would only get more confused and that's not fair to you. Huh... So this must be how Sunset feels when she's in a situation like this. I always thought it was easy but now I realize all it gave her was stress. Remind me to never criticize her about it again." Again, Spike remained confused about what Her Highness was saying and again, she sighed before changing the subject. " I'll tell you about it later, Spike, okay? In any case, we managed to stop the moon from crashing and destroying Clock Town."

" How did you know what I was saying when I mentioned about bringing the four?"

" It wasn't easy."

" You always were the smart one, sis." Spike said. " I knew you would figure out the meaning behind my words even if they were confusing at the time. Though, I am surprised at how quickly you and that forest girl managed to summon them so quickly. How did you manage it in just under three days?"

" You wouldn't believe me if I told you."

" Fair point."

" What's truly important right now is that we made it on time." Twilight said. " By summoning the Four Giants, their call worked on Starlight though I am surprised that she ended up losing consciousness." She then talked under her breath. " I'm sure Sunset was just as surprised so I know I'm not alone on that front but more importantly, why did their call affect her in such a manner?" Looking back up at Spike, he was scratching his head leaving Her Highness to resume talking to him. " I don't mean to ignore you, Spike, but something about all of this seems fishy as in there is something we've clearly overlooked."

" I'm Tael, sis!"

" Just accept me calling you Spike okay?"

" To be honest..." Spike answered. " The more you call me that name, the more I like it. It feels like I'm getting a huge burst of confidence and believe me, I've been needing a lot of it lately given everything that's been happening ever since the Skull Kid stole that mask from that woman."

" It appears that you feel conflicted, small fairy." Principal Celestia said, her voice echoing all around. " You need not hide your true feelings of the matter. Doing so will only cause you greater pain in the future so open your heart up to your sister and explain everything. Tatl... Or rather... Princess Twilight Sparkle... It is time for you and Sunset Shimmer to uncover the Skull Kid's secret. Remember that we Giants are aware of what is supposed to be and we know that you are a princess from another land, and the chosen one, a former disgraced individual now defender and heroine."

" Oh come on!" I shouted. Why did they ignore me and chose instead to speak with Princess Twilight and Spike? Also, did Celestia have to bring up what I did in the past?

" What do you mean?" Twilight asked.

Spike's jaw dropped. " Whoa... Are you the Four Giants said to protect this land whenever danger threatens it? I always knew you were real as I listened to the stories passed down by the people of Clock Town yet I never expected to see you all looking so radiant. No wonder you are viewed as deities by everyone." How did he not notice their presence until that very moment!? Granted, he did hide when Starlight and I fought but that's no excuse for not noticing three giant women--and one giant baby.

" Do not be intimidated by our presence." Principal Celestia said.

" It's not easy considering how big you are."

" Give it time."

" We must thank you for having mentioned us to the one who freed us from our imprisonment from the dark masks conjured by that masked imp." Vice Principal Luna said.

Spike blushed. " It was nothing, really, but I had to do it because the Skull Kid had gone too far."

Vice Principal Luna nodded as best as she could given her current position. " We Giants suspected something was amiss when we heard the cries of the people. They called out to us clearly, praying that we help them with one who made them miserable. As the guardians of this land, we are bound to protect those who cannot protect themselves and that means forsaking friendships with others even though it wounds our own hearts in return."

" But... We were careless." Principal Celestia said.

" Indeed, my sister."

" Had we known what was going on, we could have prevented all of the tragedy that has befallen on Termina from happening and this land would have carried on as always."

" And yet, the masked imp used her powers to seal each of us within the dark masks of the horrid creatures that guarded the temples." Vice Principal Luna said. " We believed she was no threat to us but we were wrong. Our absence caused so much pain to those who live in this land now and we sincerely apologize for having failed you but now, the time has come to fix the damage caused by the imp and allow the land to begin healing."

" Princess..." Principal Celestia began. " You must speak to the masked imp."

" Why me?" Twilight asked.

" Because you are her friend."

" What can I do?" I asked, feeling ignored by everyone.

" Should the masked imp awaken from her slumber, you must respond accordingly so that others do not feel her wrath." Principal Celestia answered. " You have the song that resonates with her so use it and our call will once again subdue her. I know you feel upset right now over being ignored, heroine chosen by destiny, but know that what must be done now can only be so between friends. There is much between them that remains a mystery to you and so you shall learn their secrets."

I honestly had no idea what Celestia was talking about but I wasn't about to question it. She and the other Giants had way more authority when it came to understanding how this world worked than anyone else so allowing them to take charge of things was the right decision to make. Besides, I sensed they knew a lot more than what they were saying, as though they themselves were hiding a secret. I couldn't say anything in case my feelings were wrong but I wasn't about to just ignore what I could sense. All I could do was allow things to carry out as intended and hope nothing would go wrong.

Princess Twilight gulped before floating over to where Starlight was still lying on the ground. " You can get up now, Starlight!" She didn't respond leading Her Highness to repeat herself again. " I said you can get up now!" Again, she refused to budge though Her Highness wasn't about to lose her temper over something so trivial. She knew Starlight had been greatly affected by the call of the Four Giants and that meant a different approach was needed. " Maybe I shouldn't shout at you even though it's appropriate because you're clearly not listening but perhaps you should be reminded of your behaviour."

" I hope you know what you're doing." I said.

" I hope I do too."

" You're just making it up!?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I'm not being given much of a choice here, Sunset. I'm Starlight's friend back in Equestria, yes, but here... I was at first before you found me and showed that this world isn't supposed to exist, but now... I don't think there is a connection between us. I'll still try and see if I can get through to her but it might involve some tough love and maybe even some harsh words which as you know, goes against what I stand for as the Princess of Friendship." Her Highness sighed knowing she had little choice but to rely on being assertive. " Alright... Here goes... Starlight... Do you realize what you've been doing to everyone!?"

" Subtle..." I said with a smirk.

" It's a start."

" Do continue."

Princess Twilight breathed in and out several times before resuming. " I know you think you did all of this just because you wanted to perform the ultimate prank, but I think I know why you really did all of this. Something is stirring within my memories of when we all first met back in that tree stump. I remember how you said that you were picked on just because you felt like making them miserable by playing pranks on them. You didn't want to leave yourself a lasting legacy or whatever it was. No, this was all about getting revenge and not only against those who wronged you but everyone in Termina was to be a victim."

Once again, Her Highness amazed me with how articulate she was with her explanation. I had long suspected that Starlight was out for revenge as opposed to wanting to cause mischief to everyone via pranks, but why did she go so far as to want to destroy everything? Pranks don't lead towards destruction so clearly there was a gap in-between that needed filling up. All of this was merely speculation and the only one who could explain the truth was unconscious. Hopefully, Starlight would wake up before Her Highness would do something she would live to regret.

" Tatl..." Spike began in an attempt to make his voice heard.

" You must apologize to everyone!"

" Tatl... Please..."

" The sooner you apologize, the sooner we can figure all this out."

That's when Spike finally flew out in front of Princess Twilight as a means of trying to protect Starlight. " Wait... Sis... Don't... Don't be so hard on the Skull Kid. I know it sounds weird coming from me but you must understand that there was more to her intent than appearances suggest."

" What are you saying, Spike?"

" I don't want you to bully her."

Princess Twilight was surprised to say the least. " Bully her? I'm not trying to do so, Spike, but given her lack of a response, I'm not in the position to just speak freely as though nothing had been going on these past three days. Besides, why are you protecting her? From what I could see, she constantly abused you and your friendship. She admitted that she had hit you so many times just because you chose to speak your opinions. That is not a friend by any means. No, that is a monster who is out for her own personal gain by using others as tools until she has what she wants."

" Way to remind me of my own past, Twilight." I said with a glum expression.

" Sorry, Sunset, but you were my best example."

" Warn me next time, okay?"

" Please, sis... Leave her alone." Spike said.

Flying up to him and grabbing him as tightly as she could, Princess Twilight had that look in her eyes she gained whenever she wanted something explained. No one could resist her whenever she did that so Spike would be forced to explain himself or else continue to feel pressured by her gaze. It reminded me of Fluttershy's "stare" that she used in order to get critters under control whenever they became unruly. You could say that this was Her Highness' equivalent of the stare but I wasn't going to say anything. In any case, Princess Twilight was shocked at how Spike continued to stick up for Starlight--even I was questioning his motives.

" I want you explain right now."

" What do you mean?"

" Tell me, Spike..." Twilight answered. " Why are you protecting Starlight?"

" Because of loneliness."

Princess Twilight blinked before planting her finger in her ear. " I'm sorry but could you please repeat that?"

" She was lonely... the Skull Kid." Spike answered. " Because so many people shunned her, including those who claimed to be her friend, she felt like she had been trapped and found no way out other than pulling pranks in hopes of making herself feel better. Sure, the pranks made people miserable instead of making them laugh and some were questionable, but it allowed her to experience personal joy. You remembered what the Skull Kid said to us when we first met her, right, Tatl? She said she had a fight with her friends over a misunderstanding but never did explain any further."

" I'm sorry but I have to question your ethics."

" How come, sis?"

" Surely, you saw what she was trying to do, right?"

" I know what the Skull Kid has been doing but again you shouldn't be so hard on her."

" While I don't mind you defending her, Spike, I do mind when it comes to your excuses." Twilight said. " She was trying to destroy everything around her! To me, that doesn't sound like a lonely child, far from it. In fact, it sounds like she was psychotic in nature and was taking advantage of your emotions as a means of sympathy. You can't defend something like that no matter how honorable. What she did was wrong and it's not fair to allow her to get away with it. Too many people suffered at her hands so to brush everything aside and pretend it never happened isn't going to work here, Spike."

" I know why she acted the way she did."

" And what would be that be?"

Spike then pointed to Majora's Mask, the source of Starlight's powers. " The power of the mask made her do it. At first, she was in complete control of her actions and pulling pranks as a means of making herself feel better, but then she slowly began doing things she never would have considered before. The Skull Kid started becoming someone else entirely, and her voice became vicious in nature. It was too much for her to handle."

That's when I decided to step in much to Princess Twilight's relief. " So you confirm that she was losing control?"

Spike nodded. " She would suddenly change and treat me with such disdain."

I was beginning to see a pattern but I needed more evidence. " Maybe she wasn't as strong as she claimed?"

" Ever since she brought that moon down from above..."

" So it was the moon that caused her change in attitude?"

Again, Spike nodded. " Just look at the Skull Kid over there. She didn't mean to cause so much pain to all those people but she just couldn't help it. Had she been more powerful, the mask wouldn't have proven itself to be a challenge."

" It's because she is weak." Twilight said.

" What do you mean, sis?"

" Anyone who deals with magic and magical artefacts must possess both a strong willpower and a strong heart to be able to control it." Twilight answered. " If you have one or neither of these, no magic will do as you command. I can see now that Starlight lacked both of these forces resulting in what happened. I know you don't like hearing me say it, Spike, but this is the truth that she needs to hear. She was a fool to think she could control something that was beyond her means. But then, this isn't the first time I've seen it happen. Many think they can control great power but it ends up backfiring on them every time."

" Certainly, she had far too many weaknesses to use my power."

I suddenly sensed something was wrong upon hearing a strange voice. I began looking around in hopes to see what might have spoken out but I couldn't see anyone other than those who were on and surrounding the Clock Tower. I knew I heard something just now as I couldn't have imagined a deep voice but then the more important concern was how I could sense a powerful evil though it was trying its best to hide from my detection. Having used evil magic myself back when I stole Princess Twilight's crown, I had the ability to sense other evil magic but it wasn't as potent as I would have liked.

" That's exactly right, Sunset." Twilight said. " Those weaknesses prevented her from using the full extent of the mask's power."

" Uh, Twilight?" I began, speaking nervously. " I didn't say that."

" Really?" Twilight asked in confusion. " No wonder as your voice sounded different."

" I think we're in trouble."

" What makes you say that?"

I then pointed towards Starlight's body and Her Highness looked to see what I was getting at. All of a sudden, Starlight's body lifted itself off of the ground and began floating in front of us though it was clear she was still unconscious as it was just dangling about. The evil I sensed moments ago had returned but was now much stronger. I thought that this was Ganondorf's doing as a means of testing me but I quickly concluded he had nothing to do with it resulting in me drawing my sword and shield. The instant I did that, Starlight began laughing though it was clear that she wasn't laughing and instead it was the mask itself.

Princess Twilight and Spike immediately hugged each other out of fear while I showed no signs of being intimidated by this mask. After all, I had seen much worse than a floating body wearing a mask. Granted, I wasn't expecting anything like this to happen despite believing that something had been controlling Starlight. Unfortunately for all of us, we had no idea what was going to happen next as we knew nothing about Majora's Mask. One thing that was certain was this adventure wasn't finished because of this sudden twist. If anything, it meant I would continue being tormented.

" You..." Starlight began, clearly focusing her words on me. " Had I known you would prove yourself to be such a thorn in my side, I would have had this one kill you a lot sooner instead of merely playing with you."

" Who are you?"

Starlight laughed though with her unconscious body, it just looked really weird. " I am known as Majora's Mask, an ancient deity that once existed in a forgotten era. You already know much of my legend as told by that woman who treasured me like I was hers."

" I vaguely remember Sonata telling me about what you were used for."

" And yet that was merely a small indication of what I am."

" Okay, then what are you?"

" I am a demonic monster that has one purpose."

I shuddered. Just the mere mentioning of the word "monster" rubbed me the wrong way. " Then answer this one question if you can. Why did you manipulate the who you currently wears you into causing so much chaos? There's no need for you to try and pretend that you're just an innocent mask as I think we've gone way past that now."

Again, Starlight laughed though it quickly changed into a weird snickering sound. " I needed to disguise the fact that I was a living entity sealed within this mask but I also learned that much time had passed and so my power was vastly inferior to what it had been in the ancient past. I needed someone who could carry out my desires whilst thinking they were carrying out their own, someone who lacked a strong will to resist me. This imp proved to be an ideal pawn though it soon occurred to me that she lacked a true vision. She wanted to perform mere parlour tricks for petty reasons so I used persuasive measures and have her carry out what I wanted."

" You used her?"

" Correct."

" Why would you do that?"

" Because this child is nothing more than a puppet."

I aimed my sword up at Starlight's head. " I know Starlight is pretty messed up right now what with all that she has been through, but that's no excuse for you to treat her as nothing more than a slave. Funny thing is that you remind me of someone who does the same thing. Unlike you, he is actually a true nightmare who could easily conquer or destroy any world that he wanted without any effort."

" You compare me to a mere human?"

" He's more of a demon that you could hope to be."

Starlight lowered her head slightly. " So... You think of me as nothing but useless?"

I shrugged. " It's the best I could come up with given your current attitude."

" Then perhaps I should show you that I am capable of so much more." Starlight said. " This puppet enabled me to get accustomed to my power despite her using it for petty reasons that were an insult to me. However, it is with regret that I must end this charade as continuing with it would only infuriate me further. A puppet that can no longer be used is mere garbage and is best cast aside and wallow away in both ignorance and solitude." At that moment, Starlight's body shook and she crumpled to the ground leaving only Majora's Mask which began floating of its own accord, its eyes glowing brightly upon removing Starlight. " This puppet's role has just ended."

" How pitiful..."

Majora's Mask cackled. " You show pity towards that piece of garbage?"

I shook my head. " No, I find you to be pitiful that you would cast her aside just like that. It does mean that I can now focus on you directly without having to hurt her in the process, something that was a concern but no longer is. Don't underestimate me just because I have a sword and shield. What I said about there being someone far worse than you is still true as he would have destroyed this world several times by now, but he can't interfere here directly as he isn't supposed to be a part of this world."

" Why you insist on further angering me?"

" I thought this adventure would be over but you had to show up."

Majora's Mask's voice then grew deeper and I had every reason to be worried. " It seems that you clearly don't see me as much of a threat. Such ignorance that spews forth from that gaping mouth of yours but then I shouldn't be upset as you nothing but a mere human who swings around a thimble." The mask then lifted its face--or whatever constituted as such and the eyes on its face began glowing in an eerie light. " Look up and tell me what you see..."

" I already know it's the moon."

" Yet why is it up there?"

" Because Starlight wanted to destroy everything as part of her ultimate prank."

Majora's Mask cackled again. " Yet why would that piece of garbage bring down such an object unless she had been given an ulterior motive?"

It was at that moment when I came to the realization as to the true significance behind the moon. What had originally been seen as Starlight's attempt to make herself be remembered by creating a prank that could never be topped, in reality it had been a means for Majora's Mask to be able to destroy everything. The mask had influenced Starlight into bringing about the end of Termina but wasn't able to control her actions completely due to Starlight's apparent weaknesses according to Princess Twilight. No wonder the moon had such a hideous face--let along one to begin with.

Fortunately, the Four Giants had prevented the moon from crashing thus denying Majora's Mask the desire of causing decimation to all it surveyed, yet I could tell that there was something more at play as otherwise it would have flown off into a murderous rage for having it desire taken away. As if on cue, a strange light then surrounded Majora's Mask before it shot straight up at the moon whose mouth had suddenly opened making it appear even more menacing. I tried moving forward to stop the mask from doing whatever it was planning but a strange power froze me on the spot preventing me from going anywhere.

Majora's Mask then began floating upwards on the beam of light that it had created until it disappeared into the mouth of the moon before its eyes began glowing. What was strange was that it left the light behind as though it were begging someone to follow--that someone obviously being me. This world needed to be saved so that it could be changed back to the world I called home so I had no choice but to follow Majora's Mask even though I had no idea would could be waiting up there for me on the moon. At least Starlight was safe though I doubted she would ever be the same again as her mind had probably been shattered by wearing that mask for so long.

" What is going on down there?" Vice Principal Luna asked.

" We suddenly sensed a powerful presence and were wondering if everything was alright." Dean Cadance said.

A voice from within the moon suddenly called out. " I... I shall consume... Consume... Consume everything."

" Did you hear that?" Vice Principal Luna asked.

" It was as though the moon itself spoke out a desire to end everything." Dean Cadance answered.

Suddenly, the Four Giants began to buckle as the moon began pushing itself downward. Majora's Mask was determined to make sure that the moon crashed and destroyed everything even if it meant destroying itself in the process. Vice Principal Luna began losing her grip on the moon before she regained it by adjusting her hands though it meant giving herself some unwanted pain. " The moon is trying to force its way down! We must not submit my sisters or else that which we protect shall become lost to us."

" The evil power that once emanated from the masked imp... It has become its own entity."

Vice Principal Luna was shocked. " What!? How was it that we did not sense this?"

" I assume that the entity cloaked itself from our sight by using the masked imp as a shield."

" Then truly we were careless for not detecting the true enemy."

Dean Cadance nodded. " Then we must ensure that the people of this land are not destroyed by the very evil that threatens their existence. Try as it might, we shall not yield though we can only hold on for so long until its power proves too much for us." Tilting her head downward, she then noticed me standing there and the symbols on her both her face and arms began glowing. " We must guide the one who risked her life against the dark forces and freed us from our imprisonment."

" Do not consume your power or else you will not be able to help us keep the moon aloft."

" There is no other choice."

" The first Giant should be the one to communicate with her down below."

" Her power is more important than my own." Dean Cadance said. " Of us four, she is the one who binds us all together and so she must refrain from using her power. So long as I can reach the child chosen by destiny and tell her to pursue the evil power, it matters not what becomes of me."

" Do not be so foolish!"

" It is the only way."

Flurry Heart then spoke up in her own unique manner. " Goo-goo! Ga! Ga! Ga-goo!"

" What did she say?"

Vice Principal Luna shook her head. " I am not sure as to the meaning behind the youngest of us."

" Goo! Goo!" Flurry Heart shouted.

" Isn't it obvious as to what she is saying to you?" Sugarcoat asked as she continued writing down on her notepad.

" Ga! Ga-goo! Goo!"

Sugarcoat nodded. " As the representative of the guardian of Ikana, I am able to go down there and get that heroine moving in the right direction. You four should focus on making sure the moon doesn't crash or else you will have failed those you are to protect. My words may sound harsh and they should but they are honest in their approach. You may choose to punish me for my insolent but that isn't important right now."

Flurry Heart giggled. " Ga! Ga! Goo!"

" Please allow me to take care of this." Sugarcoat said as she flew down towards the Clock Tower.

Again, Flurry Heart giggled. " Ga! Ga-ga-ga! Ga!"

" That spirit has much vigor." Vice Principal Luna said.

" Yet her tongue is sharp." Dean Cadance said.

As I stood there contemplating what to do next, Sugarcoat then appeared next to me and I was prepared for her to give me a scolding. " Why are you just standing there acting like a complete idiot? Isn't it obvious that you should be following that evil thing and stop it from destroying everything. You are supposed to be the one destined to save this land so why don't you live up to that expectation." In response, I put my sword and shield away before steeling myself for what was about to happen. I knew that I couldn't allow Majora's Mask to have its way yet I still hadn't acquired the ultimate mask but then a thought occurred to me.

" Do you know where I can get my hands on the ultimate mask?" I asked.

Sugarcoat wasted no time in denouncing my question. " There is no time to be thinking about such pointless things, a common trait among you humans. Even as I speak, the Four Giants are struggling to keep the moon from crashing yet here you are wasting time."

" If I had that mask, I might be able to defeat Majora's Mask."

" You doubt your own abilities?"

" I've faced far worse than this mask."

Sugarcoat sighed. " There's no point in me trying to convince you otherwise that your thought process is severely flawed. I suppose that is the major drawback of you humans but then the Giants have always loved that about you. You might be able to find this 'ultimate mask' that you keep on babbling about in the place where you're going but it will involve dealing with whoever resides up there--assuming anyone is there--whose power is beyond even that of the Giants."

I felt uneasy over how she explained that but I knew not to question it otherwise Sugarcoat would get even more agitated. Nodding to indicate that I was ready to head up to the moon after Majora's Mask, I took a step forward only to realize that Princess Twilight wasn't by my side. I looked around in hopes of finding her and sure enough, she was floating awkwardly as though something were on her mind. Knowing Her Highness, the thought of going up to the moon would have been perfect from a curiosity perspective, but it seemed she wasn't thrilled about the prospect as I thought.

" Twilight?" I asked upon seeing her. " Is something wrong?"

" This has gotten a little too much for me, Sunset." Twilight answered.

I rolled my eyes. " But, you've seen the same things I have throughout this journey. Heck! You've seen even worse things as a princess in Equestria. I know things look dire right now especially when we learned about Majora's Mask's true desire but I need you with me on this one, Twilight. You've always been there to guide me through the most difficult of situations and believe me, I doubt I'll be able to figure anything out on my own." While it did sound like I wasn't giving myself any credit, it was meant for Her Highness more than for myself so I hoped she would believe my words.

" Let's go back."

" What?"

" Let's go back." Twilight answered. " I know it sounds crazy coming from me but why don't we use the Song of Time?"

I shook my head. " That won't accomplish anything and you know it. If we go back to the beginning of another three day cycle, this is still going to happen regardless of how we end up approaching it though we will have an advanced warning. Twilight... Don't tell me you're actually afraid. I thought you would be thrilled about the idea of seeing what the moon is like as after all, you love gathering knowledge."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I know that we must keep going, Sunset. I was foolish to think that resetting time would solve our problem but that would just be running away from it and allowing that mask to get away with destroying Termina. And I also know that you're just as afraid because of what could be waiting for us up there. Don't pretend that you're feeling extra brave because it really doesn't suit you."

I blushed. " Okay, so I'm nervous about it."

" You've prepared for this moment even though you originally prepared for Starlight."

" Same thing, right?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " So what say we head up and see what awaits us. Besides, I think Sugarcoat is starting to get very antsy about us just standing here." She pointed towards Sugarcoat who indeed was giving us both a glare that could freeze anyone to the bone on account of how chilling she looked. Looking up at the Four Giants, they were showing signs of struggling to keep the moon up so we had to move quickly before one of them were to suddenly give out.

I was about to walk into the light when Spike called out. " Sis?"

Princess Twilight turned towards him and saw that he was clearly worried. " What's wrong?"

" Are you really going up there?"

Nodding, Princess Twilight spoke softly. " I have to go up there and help my friend."

" I don't you to go."

" Excuse me?"

" You've been through enough already Tatl." Spike answered. " If you were to go up there and something bad happened, I wouldn't know what I would do. We've been separated for what feels like forever and after only just reuniting mere minutes ago after the Four Giants appeared, you're off again leaving me on my own to deal with the Skull Kid who may or may nor be the same again."

" Spike..."

" I'm going in your place!"

That definitely came out of nowhere and Princess Twilight made sure to address it. " You want to do what, Spike? Are you being serious right now? I hope this is a joke you're pulling as a means of making me laugh." Upon seeing him shake his head, Her Highness was completely beside herself with his sudden bravado. " This isn't a game, Spike. While I would love to stay here and keep you safe, I have to go up there because this world could be wiped out if I don't. I do appreciate your wanting to do something but you could have picked a far less stressful situation."

" I must go, sis."

" Why?"

" I don't always want to be running away."

" I'm not sure I follow."

Spike sighed. " I could have done something to stop this from happening. I had plenty of chances to muster up some courage and tell her to stop before things got out of control but my words meant nothing all because I didn't try hard enough. Had I been more assertive with my approach, none of this would be happening right now and we would be back in the forest having fun. If only I had been stronger, the Skull Kid wouldn't have become corrupted by that mask. I should have done more to convince her to take it off. Now do you understand why I must go with your friend instead of you?"

Princess Twilight nodded. "I understand, Spike, I really do but I insist that you remain here."

" But why?

" Right now, you are feeling tremendous guilt because of what you said you didn't do." Twilight answered. " That makes you a liability in that your emotions could cause you to give Sunset some poor advice resulting in her getting her hurt or even killed. As it stands, she is the only one who can defeat Majora's Mask and she needs to have a fairy partner who can remain calm in the face of danger and not allow emotions to cloud their judgment. Now... I don't want you to feel stubborn just because you can't have your way, Spike. I already have someone I know who sometimes acts like that so a second one is something I'd rather not have to deal with."

" Alright... I'll stay here with the Skull Kid."

I knew that Her Highness was referring to me when she said she knew someone who acted stubborn--I wasn't going to argue about it as I was pretty stubborn at times as a result of my temper--so hopefully her words would convince Spike to watch over Starlight and not choose to follow us up to the moon. At that point, Sugarcoat had since begun tapping her foot and smacking her notepad to tell us to get going as we were wasting even more time--she could have been more kinder about it--so closing my eyes and breathing heavily, I walked into the light where I found myself being launched upwards towards the mouth of the moon.

Everything suddenly went white as I blacked out upon plunging into the moon's open maw but when I opened my eyes moments later, I was shocked to find myself in some kind of large plain that seemed to carry on forever. Everywhere I looked, there was nothing but plains though there was one very large tree located in the center of the plain. Looking up, I could see nothing but clear blue coloured skies--a vast contrast to the gloom and doom as the moon represented--meshing perfectly with the plains. Everything felt relaxing and peaceful yet this was all located within the moon? How could this exist inside of something like that?

Knowing that there was no where else to go other than the tree, I began walking forward in hopes of reaching it--but not before nightfall. Upon taking my first step, I almost fell on my butt due to a sudden tremor courtesy of the moon vibrating. Despite it currently being cradled by the Four Giants, Majora's Mask was still trying to force the moon down resulting in the tremors. Princess Twilight, in the meantime, was simply in awe upon seeing such splendid beauty coupled with the peaceful aura that surrounded us. She kept on saying how she would write all this down and present it to her peers during their next gathering at Princess Celestia's School for Gifted Unicorns. I couldn't help but find that adorable.

As I continued walking towards the tree, its features started to become more distinct. It looked to be a fairly ancient tree what with having so many branches extending out in all manner of directions but I was curious as to how and why a tree could exist in the moon. Upon getting closer, I noticed several children running around the base of the tree with one sitting down in front of it on their own. I was surprised at the fact that there were people up here. How could they be here when this was the moon? Just when I thought Termina itself had gotten weird enough, this had now completely eclipsed it.

" Can you hear my voice, child?" Principal Celestia said.

I nodded. " I can hear you."

" You currently stand in a place that is unknown to us and yet I can sense the presence of others."

" There are people here."

" We know nothing of them so we are unable to provide you with any advice." Principal Celestia said. " You will need to trust your own instincts to determine whether you are able to seek their counsel or not."

" One amongst them is exuding a malefic aura." Vice Principal Luna said.

" We suspect that is the one who even now tries to bring down the moon." Dean Cadance said.

" You should go and challenge the evil one at once."

" Do not be so hasty in rushing towards something without planning."

" Ga-ga! Goo! Ga!" Flurry Heart said.

" The youngest amongst us is wise beyond her years." Dean Cadance said. " If you can talk to the children successfully and appeal to them, they may be willing to help you in your eventual struggle against the evil one."

" Goo!"

" In the end, the decision is yours to make."

" We shall continue to hold the moon aloft but there is no telling how long we can keep it up." Vice Principal Luna said.

" Ga-ga!" Flurry Heart said.

" You know what you must do now, child." Principal Celestia said.

" Goo! Ga! Goo!"

" This world hangs in the balance."

As much as I appreciated their confidence in my abilities, I was already under immense pressure and didn't really need any more of it. I knew that the fate of Termina rested on my shoulders yet all they did was remind me of what was at stake. Sometimes, being the heroine was nothing but a headache. Sighing, I continued walking forward until I finally reached the tree and could get a closer look at the people who were running around it. To my surprise, they were just children, yet the bigger surprise was what they were wearing on their faces. They were wearing masks--the common trend of this world--but it was what they were wearing that proved surprising.

The one sitting at the base of the tree by their lonesome was wearing Majora's Mask and I could immediately sense a tremendous dark power enveloped around them. They then looked up in my direction before looking back down and I decided to keep my distance for the time being until I figured out what was going on. The other four children each wore a mask of one of the boss monsters I fought in the temples: Odalwa, Goht, Gyorg, and Twinmold, yet how did they acquire them? I assumed they were either one of a kind masks or at best represented an accomplishment resulting from me having conquered them.

And yet, there these children were, wearing one of the Remains Masks on their face. I then quickly looked through my inventory to see if they had somehow managed to steal them from me when I was momentarily unconscious upon coming here. To my surprise, the masks were still in my possession. What in the world was going on here? I needed answers and my best option involved talking to one of the children. Since I had no idea how they were going to react, I needed to be cautious so I made sure my shield was slung onto my arm in case one of them tried attacking me.

I decided to talk to the one who wore the mask of Odalwa on their face. I figured that since he was the first one I defeated way back in Woodfall Temple, that particular child would be more receptive towards me. If there was one thing about these children that struck me as odd apart from them wearing the masks of the defeated bosses, it would be that they were all wearing white shirts with pants but no shoes. As a colour, white was seen as either neutral or simply just standing out. Could it be that these children were some kind of representation of innocence? Perhaps but I had no means with which to test my theory.

Princess Twilight then suddenly began bopping me on the head. " I know who that one is!"

" What are you talking about?" I asked.

" The one wearing Odalwas's mask." Twilight answered. " That's my old friend, Moondancer!"

" Moondancer?" I asked. " Didn't you once tell me about her in one of your responses to my Friendship Reports?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I wanted you to know what could happen if you were to move away from your friends and forget all about them all because of having other commitments resulting from being a princess. Moondancer is essentially the old me though more dedicated to books than anyone else I know. It took a massive undertaking to get her to understand that I wasn't trying to leave her out of my life but I knew that what I had done to her was reprehensible. I'm surprised we haven't run into her before until now."

" Guess there were still some surprises left."

" Maybe you should talk to her."

I looked confused. " Huh? Why me? She's your friend so you should do it."

" Not in this world as I know understand." Twilight answered. " Besides, you often handle most of the talking anyway whereas I listen in and take note of anything before relating it back to you once you're done. You'll need me to be extra attentive this time, Sunset, as we have no idea how Moondancer or the rest of these children will behave once you engage in conversation with them."

Knowing that Her Highness was right--I wish she wasn't this time--I walked up to Moondancer who immediately turned and looked at me. I felt uneasy about this simply because she was wearing Odalwa's mask on her face but it was something I had to get over quickly if I were to figure out what was going on. " Um... excuse me..."

Moondancer then yawned. " Ahhhh! Nice weather, isn't it?"

In my mind, red flags were flying. Suffice to say, I was annoyed. " How could you say that? Don't you know what's happening in Termina?"

" We don't know anything that happens beyond this place."

" Seriously?"

Moondancer nodded. " Sometimes, it can be rather dull but we all manage to make do with what we have." She then looked in the direction of the child wearing Majora's Mask who was sitting at the base of the tree prompting me to do the same. " That child over there never makes any attempt to want to play or even talk to us. We don't know why but we feel she is calling out to you to go and play with her. You can if you want but you might find yourself feeling overwhelmed."

" Maybe I'll talk to her later."

" A shame that she never could rid herself of that mask she carries with her."

" What kind of mask?"

" All she kept saying was that it could invoke the ultimate transformation." Moondancer answered. " We children of the moon are fine just the way we are so the thought of wanting to change our appearances left us feeling unhappy about her carrying around that mask. She chose to isolate herself by sitting there whilst everyone else continued running about and enjoying life."

My eyes opened wide when I heard Moondancer mention the word "ultimate" just now. Was is possible that the child who wore Majora's Mask had in her possession, the ultimate mask that I had sought by collecting all of the masks in Termina? If so then I needed to know how to get my hands on it. It could prove invaluable in dealing with Majora's Mask though there was no telling what it could do seeing as I knew next to nothing other than who had it. Moondancer seemed like she had an idea but would she be willing to share such information with me? It seemed I had no other choice but to inquire about it.

" Do you think I could get that mask from her?"

" Why would you want it?"

" Because I have been working very hard to obtain it."

Moondancer then got really close to me before she began sniffing. I felt really creeped and held up my hands to let her know she was in my personal space. Acknowledging my concerns, she stepped back to give me some breathing room. " I don't see why anyone would want that mask but I suppose there is a first time for anything. If you really want to get it from that one over there, you must first give up everything that you collected in order to claim it."

" What does that mean?"

" Such a curious stranger." Moondancer answered. " When I sniffed you a few moments ago, I sensed something good on your person and it got me thinking. You have a lot of masks so I was wondering if you would like to be a mask saleswoman and give me one of your masks. In return, we can play a game together."

" Give you my masks!?"

" Correct."

" Why would I do that?"

" I knew you would show some hesitation but hear me out." Moondancer answered. " By willing to give up everything that you have collected, it may be enough to convince that one to relinquish what she has. Besides, we have grown bored around here lately and we wish for some fun before we must disappear. We children only exist until we are satisfied then vanish as though our existence never occurred. So... Will you give me a mask?"

Just when I thought it was going to be easy to obtain the ultimate mask, Moondancer had to go and throw an unusual curveball in my direction. I had a feeling that the other three children of the moon would react in a similar manner so at least I knew something to expect from them when I talk to them later. Still, the thought of giving them my masks after going to such great lengths just to get them made me question their true motives but considering what was at stake, my options were limited and stacked against me. Once again, I had no other choice but to willingly give my masks up.

I then sighed. " Fine... You can have a mask."

Reaching behind my back, I took out the Deku Mask at random and presented it to Moondancer who immediately tried batting it away. " Please... Put that mask away. There is something about it that makes me feel very uneasy as though it were cursed. I will accept any mask you have except any that are like that."

I was skeptical of her reason but chose to go with what she wanted. Putting the Deku Mask away, I randomly pulled out the Mask of Scents--I never really did use it for anything so it practically had been collecting dust--and presented it to her. " How about this one?"

Moondancer happily took the mask from me. " Thanks. You really are a nice person despite some hesitation. Now we shall play a game of hide-and-seek where I shall hide and you must find me. This place however, is far too open and thus it would be no fun at all so I shall send us to a more entertaining location."

Everything then went white though this time I didn't black out from the experience. Instead, I found myself being teleported to another location. Dropping down from the ceiling in a blue light, I quickly checked to make sure that everything about me was still intact before turning my attention towards where I was. I found myself inside of a large cave that was covered in moss that hung about everywhere and I was immediately reminded of Woodfall Temple for some weird reason. Ahead of me were a series of rotating bars that moved at a decent speed with platforms on the end that were either covered in spikes or had a Deku Flower on them.

Against the wall were ledges that appeared to have additional flowers along with Gossip Stones. I had no idea why there were so many of them around but perhaps they could provide me with some information by using the Mask of Truth. Moondancer was nowhere to be found though right off the bat I could tell that this wasn't the kind of hide-and-seek I knew of when I was growing up in Equestria. Nothing else seemed to stand out apart from a light that was to my left which could be a means of leaving. What I did know was that getting through this mess required becoming a Deku Scrub.

" I can't believe Moondancer brought us to this place." Twilight said.

" She did seem really eager to play with me."

" Well... We're here now so we might as well figure out what we're supposed to do."

" The Deku Mask is going to be essential here."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, and judging from how those rotating bars work, it seems this place will push your abilities as a Deku Scrub to the limit. On a side note, I wasn't happy with the fact that you had to give up one of your masks just to come here but Moondancer and perhaps those other children know more than appearances suggest. For now, it's best to follow along and have fun though that could be quickly dismissed depending on what they do."

" And those Gossip Stones?"

" You didn't give away the Mask of Truth so you can check them out if you want."

" Strange how Moondancer didn't want the Deku Mask."

" It contains the spirit of a Deku child." Twilight said. " I suspect these children don't like masks that contain spirits and probably view them as evil in their minds. Until we know for certain how things are going to work around here regarding them, be on your guard, Sunset."

" Can you hear me?" Moondancer called out from somewhere.

" Where are you?" I asked.

" I am somewhere close by but first you must overcome this little challenge." Moondancer answered. " If you can fly across this bottomless pit whilst avoiding the sharp spikes and awkward ledges, you will be able to find me. Should something cause you to plunge into the abyss below, life will not escape you but instead you will be returned to where you can see the blue light that shines brightly. Have as many tries as you want."

Her voice then disappeared leaving me to have to deal with this unusual obstacle. " At least plummeting down below won't kill me."

" Maybe so but I wouldn't think about making a habit out of it." Twilight answered.

Just then, another tremor occurred that almost caused me to fall onto my butt. " I guess the tremors from before are still around."

" Yes but they are more powerful since we're in the moon itself." Twilight said. " Better make sure you don't end up getting caught in a bad situation when one goes off. For the time being, you should change into your Deku Scrub form as there is no other way to get across aside from that. Because the moon is no longer falling, you have essentially an infinite amount of time so make sure to take things carefully."

Taking out the Deku Mask and placing it on my face, I began convulsing--it had been a while since I felt this unfortunate sensation--and watched as my body shimmered from human to Deku until my transformation was finished. I needed a few moments to get used to being small again--the one drawback of my Deku form--before I walked up to the Deku Flower and dove into it. Before launching, I looked ahead to see what was up first. The rotating bars each had a Deku Flower on their platforms so I didn't need to be concerned yet regarding the spikes though one flower was yellow and the other pink.

If I recalled correctly, the yellow Deku Flower would launch me up much further and give me more flight time than the pink Deku Flower. However, because I had gotten so used to using the regular one for flying, if I were to use the other one, my momentum could seriously get messed up resulting in an unfortunate plunge. To play it safe, I needed to land on the platform that housed the pink flower. At least there were no monsters about so it's not like I was in any danger. Launching from the flower, I quickly dropped back down upon realizing that I didn't check to see just how fast those bars moved in comparison to my flight distance.

Were I to miss the platform then I would plunge into the abyss below. Sure, I would just re-spawn back at the beginning of this cave according to Moondancer but I wanted to get through this challenge in one attempt. Choosing the pink flower, I waited for it to rotate around before launching myself again. Flying across, I made sure I didn't look down--the thought of seeing an endless black nothing would make me freak out and do something stupid--and landed on the platform with the pink flower. So far, things were going well but I had only just begun making my way across this cave.

The next bars featured one with spikes on both ends but I wasn't confident in making it over to the Deku Flowers so long as where I was kept on rotating. Luckily, the ledge to my left housed another flower--and a Gossip Stone--so when I launched myself from my current flower and turned left, I flew over and landed on the ledge and kissed the ground. I had only just started and already I was feeling immense pressure because of having to be so precise with my flying. It was strange at how there were so many Gossips Stones and while there was an urge in my brain to investigate them proper, I needed to focus on finding Moondancer.

Princess Twilight then took a closer look at the nearby Gossip Stone. " Other than having this tiny little symbol at the base, this stone and most likely all of the other stones in here look just like the ones we've seen all across Termina."

" I wonder why these are even here?"

" Want to find out?"

" What do you mean?"

" You'll need to change back to a human first of all." Twilight answered. "Then, when you've done that, use the Mask of Truth and talk to this Gossip Stone. I know you don't like switching forms just for a simple task but I am curious as to what this Gossip Stone has to say."

I nodded but with hesitancy. " Guess I'm a little curious."

" You don't have to check it out if you don't want to."

I shook my head. " No... I think I will check this one just to put my mind at ease; also, because you would insist on me checking it out on two fronts. One would be out of curiosity and the other being the Mask of Truth. I know you enough that you can be predictable, Twilight." Her Highness blushed as I grabbed my face, pulled off the Deku Mask, and flipped back my hair before I switched out my current mask for the Mask of Truth. Placing it on my face, I walked up to the Gossip Stone and attempted to talk to it though nothing was happening at first. " This is really awkward."

" Something is sure to happen."

" If not then this will be just humiliating."

As if on cue, the Gossip Stone then spoke to me in my mind. " The mask that trickles out troubles from its face seems to be held by the greatest of traveling men." It took me a moment to figure out that it was referring to the Troupe Leader's Mask as given to me by Big Macintosh though a simpler explanation would have sufficed. Still, the Mask of Truth had done what it was supposed to do despite what it said was something I already knew.

" That was rather pointless."

" Perhaps but at least we know what it says." Twilight said. " Perhaps the other Gossip Stones will say something along those about the other masks you've collected? I do find it strange that they would reveal such information here of all places as opposed to back down in Termina proper."

" Guess there's nothing more to do here other than continue on to Moondancer."

" Should you decide to check out the other Gossip Stones here or elsewhere, you should see what they have to say."

That meant keeping the Mask of Truth for as long as possible and not giving it up to Moondancer or those other children--I assumed without proof that they would do something similar to what she asked of me earlier before coming to this cave. Taking off the Mask of Truth and switching it over for the Deku Mask, I placed it on my face and began convulsing as my body shimmered from human to Deku. No matter how many times I saw my body change in this manner, I never got tired of it. Once my transformation had finished, I jumped into the nearby Deku Flower and waited for the right platform to come along.

When a spiked platform came by, I thought about jumping but chose to wait and see how the formation worked. It appeared that the Deku Flower platform and the spiked platform alternated so I had to make my move after the spikes went by. After waiting several moments, I launched myself as the spiked platform came around and flew over before my flowers began faltering indicating that I needed to land quickly. Without worrying about what lurked below--namely the abyss--I dropped flew over and dropped down onto the next Deku Flower, diving into it just as the other spiked platform came up and almost knocked me over.

I then noticed a Piece of Heart on the large ledge to my right along with a Gossip Stone, to my left was a door which appeared to be the exit. Two large trees were blocking my path to the door and I suspected that my current Deku Flower wouldn't be able to get me over there. I needed to use the yellow flower as that would give me enough distance to weave my way around those trees without my flowers faltering. The best point to launch myself would be when the platform rotated around far enough so that the ledge with the Piece of Heart was directly in front of me so I waited for the opportunity to come.

When my platform rotated under a spiked one and was directly in front of the ledge I was aiming for, I launched myself and flew over to it, but just barely as my flowers gave way right at the very end causing me to drop. I then picked up the Piece of Heart and immediately felt its warmth, making me stronger, more resilient against attacks. The Gossip Stone on the other hand was tempting but I didn't want to have to take off my mask again just for one moment. That's when a crazy idea popped into my head though I doubted it would work. I reached behind my back and took out the Mask of Truth.

So long as I was in a different body, I couldn't wear my other masks but perhaps there was a way around that restriction. Placing one hand on the Gossip Stone whilst the other held the Mask of Truth, the stone was able to speak to me. " It seems the mystical item that the skulls obey is in the fiercely burning flame in the graveyard of an accursed land..." I knew it was referring to the Captain's Hat I acquired from Captain Keeta when I first came to Ikana. Again, such information was what I already knew but perhaps it was nice to be given a cryptic reminder of my past accomplishments.

Now that I had done that, I put the Mask of Truth away and dove down into the yellow Deku Flower. I had managed to get through the majority of this room without any problems but there was still the matter of weaving my way around the trees without smacking into them. Launching myself really high from the flower, I flew towards the area in-between the trees only for the branches jutting out from each tree to block my path forward to the door. I floated over one branch followed by flying under another but I was clipped by a third branch I didn't notice and I began dropping like a rock.

My body then immediately reacted by having me hold out my arms and grab onto the edge of the ledge where the door was--my body smacked into the side of the wall very hard but I managed to not fall into the abyss. I remained there, stunned for a few moments, before slowly pulling myself up and breathing heavily. " That was too close for comfort!" A tremor then occurred causing me to vibrate a little before it stopped. Had I been hanging on instead of up on the ledge, I would have plummeted into the abyss below. " And here I thought this was going to be easy."

" Moondancer is playing a serious game."

I nodded. " I know she said I could try this as many times as I wanted but something about how she said it made me suspicious."

" Well, no need to worry about it now."

" Yeah."

" Let's see what's in the next room."

Picking myself up from the floor, I walked up to the door, opened it, and entered the next room where I saw Moondancer standing there. I thought she was serious about playing hide-and-seek not simply waiting somewhere in hopes of me getting through whatever insanity had been prepared for me and thereby reaching her. " There you are! I was expecting you to be taking this seriously."

Moondancer than cringed. " That mask is very unpleasant so please take it off."

" Why?"

" I want to speak to you as your true self."

" Fair enough I suppose." I said. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Deku Mask, changed back to normal, and flipped my hair back. " Better?"

Moondancer nodded. " That strange mask just didn't settle well with me at all. In any case, you managed to find me so that means you've won my little game. I am sure the others will love playing with you too so be sure to talk to them. By the way... I want more masks so please give me some."

" Again!?"

" Please..."

Groaning, I reached behind my back and randomly took out the All-Night Mask--its one use had proven effective from a research standpoint--before handing it over to Moondancer. " I'm not sure why you needed another mask but if this will make you happy then by all means take it."

" I'm satisfied now so I don't need anymore."

" Does that mean you will disappear?"

" It does but at least I got to enjoy my time with you."

" So what happens now?"

" I would like to ask you a question."

" A question?"

Moondancer nodded. " You're a very nice person so I hope that your answer will be as pleasant. Your friends... What kind of people are they? Judging from how many masks you've given me, you look to be someone who has made plenty of them throughout her life. Also... Do those people think of you as one? You know... As a friend? I know this sounds like a strange question but I am curious as to your answer."

I wasn't expecting such a personal question but I was fortunate that I knew how to answer her straight away. " My friends mean more to me than anything else. Without them, I would probably be alone right now with my own twisted thoughts. They changed me from who I was into the person I am now and I will forever be grateful. Granted, we still have our little arguments which is a part of the whole friendship bit but I know my friends will always be there to make me feel better. They are kind, loyal, honest, generous, funny, and even magical at times and they see me as being empathetic."

" You must be so proud of them."

" I am."

" Thank you for answering my question and giving me your masks."

" I guess this is goodbye then."

Moondancer nodded. " Perhaps we shall see each other again someday in another time and place. For now, I think you should go back to where we first met. I know the other children would love to talk and play their own games of hide-and-seek with you."

While she came off as being unusual given the current circumstances, Moondancer turned out to be a pretty interesting person. I could only hope that the remaining three would be just as easy to deal with but I sensed they would provide me with much harder challenges than what I faced here. I suspected that my other bodies were going to have their own struggles soon enough. Everything then went white and I blacked out, the image of Moondancer fading from my vision as something pulled me back. When I opened my eyes moments later, I was back where I started on the moon.

Chapter 71: Midnight's Last Stand

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 18, 2017
Chapter 71: Midnight's Last Stand.

I felt annoyed to say the least. Moondancer could have sent me back to the base of the giant tree that served as the one defining feature of the moon but instead she sent me back to the beginning leaving me to make my way back over there. I suspected this was going to be a regular occurrence with these children so I knew there was no sense in complaining about it and instead just dealing with it. I sighed and began walking forward whilst checking my inventory because of what Moondancer wanted from me in order to play her little game. It felt weird not having those two masks in particular yet I wasn't entirely upset over it.

That's because I never really used those two masks or if I did, it was only for a brief moment in order to accomplish a specific task. It then dawned on me that certain masks ended up doing nothing more than gathering dust in my inventory while others were used constantly because of needing their power to get through difficult situations. Had I been more open and willing to use certain masks even when they wouldn't have proven useful, I could have done so and not felt so much guilt in the process. You never know when to appreciate something until you lose it forever and lose out on the opportunity.

Did I really have to hand over my masks in order to play games with the children of the moon? A part of me didn't want to give up on what I had acquired--often through great endurance on my part--but the other part favoured the idea as it meant eventually acquiring that which I needed all of the masks in the first place, the ultimate mask, that which had become synonymous with this journey despite not knowing what kind of mask it would be. Hopefully, it would be what I needed to return everything to normal and perhaps it could stand up to the power Ganondorf possessed.

As I approached the tree, I noticed that Moondancer was no longer running around the base with the other children. I felt saddened knowing that she would never return as her purpose had been concluded but there was no turning back for me. At this stage, I had to keep going in hopes of being able to defeat Majora's Mask and saving this world. Speaking of which, the child who wore Majora's Mask still sat alone at the base of the tree while the other children continued running around with a care in the world. Upon a closer inspection, they bore a striking resemblance to Starlight Glimmer.

How I managed to miss that surprised me but that was her hairstyle sticking out from behind that accursed mask and yet it made no sense as she was unconscious when I left to come up here to deal with the mask. Perhaps it was projecting an image of Starlight because of how she was the only one who had worn the mask this entire time? Or perhaps it saw her as more than just a puppet despite discarding her like one when she no longer was deemed useful? In any case, if I were to talk to her, would I forced into a final showdown? I supposed I could deal with her now though I would be at a disadvantage despite having so many masks at my disposal.

Nothing was stopping me from challenging her yet I felt compelled to collect the ultimate mask before doing anything else. Upon reaching the base of the tree, Majora's Mask, or rather, Starlight, looked in my direction as though she were trying to lull me over in hopes of perhaps goading me into fighting her before I was even ready. I struggled to turn my gaze away from her own but it proved to be in vain. Her gaze proved more piercing and I slowly walked towards her, Princess Twilight pulling hard on my ears to stop me from going any further and doing something that would ruin all I had worked so hard to acquire.

Fortunately, or unfortunately, depending on perspective, Her Highness decided to do something drastic much to my annoyance. She bit me on the ear of all things! I never thought she would rely on using such a vulgar means of getting my attention, but she did and despite her small size, her bite was very powerful resulting in me screaming nearly at the top of my lungs but it was enough to snap me out of Starlight's gaze. I then immediately turned around and refrained from looking back in her direction but then I clutched my ear--she bit my right ear--and checked to ensure it wasn't bleeding or anything.

I then glared at Princess Twilight. " Why in the world did you bite me in the ear!?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I didn't know what else to think of."

" You could have pulled on my hair or better yet, flown out in front of me to grab my attention."

" My pony instincts took over!"

" I have no doubt about that."

" Well, you needed to snap out of it, Sunset, as you were heading towards Majora's Mask." Twilight said. " I know you need to ultimately defeat it to save Termina but you can't fight it until the ultimate mask is in your possession."

" That's Starlight, Twilight."

Princess Twilight blinked. " Are you serious?"

I nodded. " Look for yourself."

Princess Twilight quickly looked in the direction of Starlight before looking back at me. " Wow... You're right. That is Starlight sitting there at the base of the tree. But, wasn't she unconscious back on top of the Clock Tower? How did she manage to get up here?" I then explained my theory to Her Highness and she nodded upon my finishing. " In any case, we must keep our distance until we have dealt with the other children before we talk to her. I don't think she can do anything in her current condition but I could be wrong as I know absolutely nothing as to the power of Majora's Mask."

" That's why I intend on asking her right now."

" What!?"

I scratched my head. " It's not the best plan I could think of but I figured she may be willing to say something if I were to engage in conversations. Besides, I doubt the other children will do it as it's clear they have no intention of talking to her. Don't worry, Twilight. I've no intention of fighting Majora's Mask until I get my hands on the ultimate mask. Granted, I wish the mask was in my possession right now given what we've seen Starlight do throughout this journey but I'm sure she will just want to talk instead of fight." That last bit didn't sound right at all but I had to say something so that Princess Twilight wouldn't feel worried about my current course of action.

" Alright but don't do anything reckless."

I rolled my eyes. Being reckless at times had resulted in me making the situation even worse but at the same time acting in such a manner resulted in things working out for me and allowing me to progress further. I personally couldn't help but be reckless as I was stubborn when it came to wanting things to go my way. Guess it was the result of how I felt insecure during those days where I struggled to adapt to living in a world that had no magic. To survive, I couldn't show any weakness. Doing so would have prevented me from manipulating everyone but perhaps having weakness would have done me some good.

Back then... I had to prove myself superior to everyone else in the world I called home. That meant hiding my insecurities by pitting friends against one another so that I could dominate them without any effort all while showing no weakness. I acted recklessly resulting in almost getting exposed so I used others to serve as my shield and prevent any of my actions from coming back to bite me in the butt. In my mind, I didn't care what had to be done so long as I achieved success. Again, that was my stubbornness playing its part as I simply refused to believe I was their equal.

Since those days, I've changed and now I see everyone as being equal to me despite having some special gifts in the form of both intellect and magic. I still had my stubbornness that resulted in me being reckless yet I can channel it a little to allow me to succeed at something that otherwise would have been impossible before. Sure, it's not the best approach to go with as there are clearly better options but some aspects of my personality will never change no matter how hard I try. You could say those aspects are permanently hard-wired into my being and no amount of upgrades will change it. I'm thankful for it because without my reckless behaviour, this journey would have ended much sooner.

Walking up to Starlight, she continued looking up at me though I made sure to keep one hand behind my back so that I could draw my sword if necessary. Despite looking innocent, she was anything but that. " Um... Hello there." I said. I was making it up as I went along as I didn't know what to say to her.

Starlight didn't respond at first but when she did, she pointed her finger at the remaining three children. " One of them has left. I don't know what made them want to leave but it makes me feel sad knowing they won't be coming back."

I gulped knowing that I was responsible for Moondancer leaving. " I'm not sure why she left."

Leaning forward, the eyes of the mask on Starlight's face began to glow. " You aren't being sincere with me. But, I will allow it anyway as it shows that you and I have something in common despite you being inferior. Say, would you like to play with me? I haven't had any fun in quite some time and it's no fun since the others refuse to play."

" Um... I don't think so."

" Why not?"

" I need to do something first."

" That's a lousy excuse."

" I'm being sincere this time."

Starlight turned away from me. " You're boring! Why don't you go and play with the others instead? Leave me to wallow alone for eternity!"

I knew that she was upset but deep down I could sense that a powerful rage was boiling within her prompting me to slowly back away. Starlight, or Majora's Mask, seemed bent on wanting to have fun at the expense of someone else's life and didn't like not having her way. In a weird way, she was right about how she and I had something in common, and it was our respective stubborn streaks. Shuddering, I couldn't handle such a horrid thought and immediately shook my head to remove the image before leaving her to focus on one of the remaining children of the moon. I would confront her but not until I had that mask.

Of the remaining children, the one I needed to focus on next was the one who wore the mask that I received upon defeating Goht. Fortunately, this child was easy to spot as the mask featured a rather lifeless metallic face when compared with the other three. This child, on occasion, performed some cartwheels as though they were athletic but since their true intentions remained mysterious, I was better off not wanting to know in case I accidentally offended them. Approaching them, they looked at me for a second before continuing to perform cartwheels, their identity unknown to me.

But, not to Princess Twilight. " That's Night Glider!"

" Someone else who I don't recognize."

" I'm surprised it took us this long to finally encounter her."

I waved my hands to get her attention. " Who is she, Twilight?"

Princess Twilight blushed. " Oh right! You've never seen her before." I frowned before she coughed. " Ahem! Night Glider is the last of the main ponies who the pony versions of our friends and I met when we first visited Starlight's village after my castle received the Cutie Map. Sugar Belle, Party Favour, and Double Diamond were the other three and they along with Night Glider helped us get back our cutie marks when they were stolen by Starlight back when she was more villainous. We met the others earlier and I'd been wondering when we were going to run into her. Glad it happened instead of not happening."

" That didn't explain much."

" She was very courageous from what I remember."

" Anything else?"

" She'd give Rainbow Dash a run for her money."

I laughed. " Okay, so she's one of those Pegasus ponies who takes pride in her flying?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " She is also very loyal though sometimes she can be rather creepy in her delivery. I mean no disrespect to her but that's how she came across before and after she got her cutie mark back from Starlight. Anyway, you should talk to her and see what she has to say but make sure you have a mask ready to give to her as I think she will ask you for one much like how Moondancer did when you talked with her."

I moaned. " Do I have to give up another mask?"

" If you want the ultimate mask, you must play their games and paying them with a mask is the only option."

" At least she will only want one."

" Let's hope so."

I walked up to Night Glider who continued to perform cartwheels but when she saw me approach, she suddenly stopped what she was doing and immediately ran up to me and I backed away out of fear that she would attack me despite her being unarmed. " Did you see those amazing maneuvers? I'm the only one who can do anything like that around here. It keeps me from getting bored since not all that much happens here. You've got to admit that it's a pretty nice day right?"

I slapped my forehead. " Did you honestly just say that?"

" Is that a problem?"

" Your friend said something similar."

" That's because it's true."

" You guys really don't know what's happening outside the moon do you?"

Night Glider shook her head. " For one thing, we don't know what is beyond this field. For another, we have no intention of knowing as that leads to curiosity and everyone knows what happens when you choose to be curious. Finally, for a third, this place is the best even though it gets so boring. By the way, I don't believe I've ever seen you around here before or if I have, you don't look like someone I would be familiar with."

" Let's get this over with."

" What do you mean?"

" Do you want one of my masks?"

Hearing me say that made Night Glider jump for joy. " You have masks!? Awesome! I didn't think a mask saleswoman would come here of all places but then you guys are known to travel to far-off distant lands in order to sell your wares to those who desire them for their own purposes. Now that you mention it, I do smell the scent of masks exuding from your body but don't think of that as a problem."

" Okay, let me give you a mask."

" I don't want any that contain spirits or something like that."

Rolling my eyes, I reached behind my back and took out a mask at random. To my surprise, I had taken out the Troupe Leader's Mask. I then recalled what I had to go through to obtain it from Big Macintosh despite his attitude at the time. While he was irritable what with his troupe having had their performance cancelled at the Carnival of Time, I ignored him whilst using all four of my bodies to help Miss Pommel perform a sound check. She was sad that the Indigo-Gos weren't playing at the carnival either but it didn't stop her from wanting to know what it would have been like. A shame I never used this mask so I had regrets over not using it on those related to Big Macintosh.

I handed the mask over to Night Glider. " Will this do?"

She took it from my hands before holding out her own. " More!"

" What do you mean?"

" I want more masks."

" Are you serious!?"

Night Glider nodded. " If I wasn't then I wouldn't be asking you now would I? I want you to give me another mask and before you ask me why I need a second one, it's because I want to have more than one as you look to be someone who is willing to give them away for practically nothing. Besides, it's not like they are going to be wasted or anything. I promise the masks will be taken care of like they were my own children."

" That isn't a particularly compelling argument."

" I want more masks."

I sighed. " Fine!" I reached behind my back again and took out the Keaton Mask. This was the mask that Tender Taps wore to keep his identity hidden as he tried desperately to get back the mask that Lightning Dust stole. While I never used it for the purpose it had been created for, it was filled with the hopes of one who had been given terrible hardship against his own free will. I handed over this mask to Night Glider and hoped she didn't want anymore. " That's two of my masks right there."

" I'm satisfied now."

I breathed a sigh of relief. " So what happens now?"

" You're a very nice person for giving me two masks." Night Glider answered. " You do have a weird way of doing things but I suppose we all have our quirks. Why don't we play a game of hide-and-seek? I'm going to hide and your task is to find me in the place we're about to go to. I would have us play our game here but one tree isn't really much and would make for one lousy game if you want my opinion. Anyway, let's get our game started."

Just like before with Moondancer, everything went white and I didn't black out from it as a result. I had no idea where Night Glider was going to send me but hopefully it would be a better place than where I was sent to last time. I was teleported to another location where I dropped down from the ceiling in a beam of blue light. Immediately, I folded my arms due to a cold chill that suddenly afflicted me. I thought about keeping myself warm--I realized that my lack of warm clothes made that pointless--only to turn my attention to where Night Glider had sent me. I was in another cave like before only it was much different from the one Moondancer sent me to.

No wonder I felt a cold chill just now. There was ice everything hanging on the walls and the ceiling though this wasn't my main concern. No, my main concern involved the ridiculous looking pathway that was presented before me. A single narrow walkway went forward, stopped at what appeared to be an open treasure chest, turned left, reached a second chest, and turned right before heading off into the infinite darkness. There were also strange tiles on the ground that glowed though what they were remained a mystery. Other than that, I had no idea what I was supposed to do.

The ice on the walls reminded me of Snowhead and the narrow pathway looked like it could be easily traversed by anyone, but that's when I noticed the obvious gaps strewn about every now and again on the path. Tiny ramps before each gap told me all that I needed to know. A human had no chance of making it through this place alive. In fact, no tribe could make it other than a Goron indicating that this game required me to become Darmani. A pattern was beginning to form here. The first cave involved using a Deku Scrub and this one required a Goron, and that meant the next one would likely be Zora related though the last one could be anything.

" Quite the difficult path." Twilight said.

" I guess Night Glider wanted a serious game." I said.

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. These children seem to want to test your various forms in ways you've never had to consider before. I assume you've already figured out that you will need to rely on the power of your Goron body for this?" I nodded and Her Highness smiled. " Good so I suggest you change so we can begin trying to understand what the nature of this challenge is."

As I took out the Goron Mask, Night Glider's voice began echoing all around. " Welcome to my game of hide-and-seek!"

" Where are you?" I asked.

" I'm somewhere around here but you have to find me first."

" What kind of challenge is this?"

" Do you like rolling?"

I nodded whilst shrugging. " I guess."

" Well, if you can roll your way through this obstacle course, you might be able to find my hiding spot." Night Glider said. " But, you might need to gain some weight as I don't think your current look is going to work around here. If you somehow fall off and plunge into the abyss, you won't die but instead return to the start where you can try again. Oh, and be sure not to slip on some of the icy sections. You know what will happen so you don't need a reminder."

" Thanks for the warning."

" I hope you don't catch cold otherwise I won't get more masks when you're done."

As her voice disappeared, I couldn't help but think that these children only cared about getting my masks as opposed to my overall safety. At any rate, I had an idea as to how I was going to tackle this challenge though to be honest, I didn't really want to go through with it. It's not that I was afraid but rather I thought it was tedious more than anything else. Why have me go through something that was clearly not a typical game of hide-and-seek? I would have preferred going through a very difficult maze filled to the brim with monsters as opposed to this but it's not like I had a say here. These children were clearly dictating my every move and I had to go along with it.

Placing the Goron Mask on my face, I quickly dug my feet into the ground to prevent myself from stumbling about. As my body shimmered from human to Goron, I resumed thinking about what I had to go through to be able to reach wherever Night Glider was. If this cave was the same as the previous one was, there had to be a Piece of Heart hidden off the beaten path somewhere along with some Gossip Stones. Sure, I didn't need their information as I had every mask but I was curious as to what each one said--it was a guilty pleasure for me at that point to listen to them.

Upon becoming Darmani, I was about to curl up into a ball when Princess Twilight stopped me. " Before you go rolling, Sunset, you might want to take a closer look at this track to give yourself an idea as to what you'll be doing." I took her advice and looked at the part of the track that was visible to us. It looked innocent enough but I knew there was more to it than appearances suggested. " You need to roll in a straight line and bounce off those chests or you might accidentally plunge into the abyss below."

" I've never had to roll in a straight line before."

" Think of this challenge as a test of precision."

" Okay..."

" What I mean is that you need to maintain a steady course without straying for even a second." Twilight said. " Since this track is razor-thin, you can't afford to roll wildly so precision is needed here. If not for the fact that you have infinite attempts to do this, your first mistake would have been your last. Because we can't see the entirety of this track, much of this will boil down to trial and error."

" You make it sound like this will be easy."

Princess Twilight offered up a weak smile. " I'm just trying to keep a positive attitude, Sunset. I've never seen anything like this before and while I am curious as to who came up with this track, I know now's not the time to be oogling over something that's just begging to have research time dedicated to it. Maybe I'll be able to get something before we leave so as to not waste such an opportunity."

Again, I rolled my eyes. " I'm sure you'll get that chance."

Princess Twilight squeed with glee. " Then let's get this started."

The first thing I did was punch some nearby pots with each containing large Magic Jars. " Hey, Twilight? Do you think this is a sign of things to come?"

Looking at the remaining Magic Jars, Princess Twilight nodded slowly. " A simple roll isn't going to cut it if these Magic Jars are presented to you right at the start. You're going to be barrelling down this course with spikes in tow so let me remind you that precision is necessary here. Don't let the pressure get to you, Sunset, as remember that Night Glider has given you an infinite number of attempts to get through this."

Walking up to the beginning of the track, I positioned myself as best as I could in hopes that I was in a straight enough line. Since I had no means of measuring my position, I had to wing it in hopes that I was positioned correctly. Curling up into a ball, I began rolling along until my spikes protruded from my body before jumping over the first gap before hitting the opened treasure chest--a part of me was curious as to what could have been in it at one time. Bouncing off of it, I turned left over a second gap but I panicked and lost control resulting in me plummeting into the abyss below.

Everything went black and my first instinct was that I had died but instead I found myself back where I started in this cave no worse for wear. I was a bit frustrated over having failed just as soon as I had begun but I knew not to fall into despair otherwise my confidence would have been shattered. Whether I was positioned correctly or not didn't matter as I fell into the abyss so that meant trying again. This time, I couldn't panic as all that did was disrupt my momentum. Walking up to the track and adjusting myself until I felt I was in the right position, I curled up and began rolling until my spikes protruded.

I easily cleared the first jump as before as well as bounce off the treasure chest correctly, but when the second gap came up after turned left, I maintained my cool and leapt over before hitting the next chest and turning to the right--I also got a better look at those strange tiles I saw earlier but they still were a mystery to me. The next section of the track consisted of jumping over several gaps though it proved difficult to keep straight as I could plunge into the abyss if I were a smidgen off, but I got past before bouncing off another chest and turned right where I jumped across yet another gap.

My eyes then spotted a walkway that jutted off from the track just before a couple of large pots so I smashed through them and came to a sudden stop. Uncurling myself, I walked back and picked up the large Magic Jars from the pots before assessing my current position. The walkway lead up to a platform that housed two Gossip Stones and one of those strange tiles but otherwise nothing unusual could be seen. I assumed I would be attacked by a monster lurking about in the darkness but it quickly became clear that they weren't any and that this was a test of precision as Princess Twilight had previously stated.

Taking my time so as to not accidentally walk off, I walked along until I reached the Gossip Stones where I got a closer look at the tile. The overall shape of it reminded me of an eyeball--the circular part certainly looked like it--and while I was curious as to what would happen if I were to step on it, I shook my head to remove my curiosity. I didn't want to get kicked out of here before finding Night Glider so avoiding this and the other tiles on the track was my best bet. Taking out the Mask of Truth and holding it, I placed my hand on the first Gossip Stone and listened to what it had to say.

It said: "The dancer's spirit that appears night after night in the great field seems to have a mask which causes one to dance." It took me a moment to conclude that it was referring to Kamaro's Mask, which I acquired what felt like a long time ago, from Zephyr Breeze. From what I remembered, I did use it once to help out Indigo Zap and Sunny Flare with a problem they had that revolved around dancing. Chuckling to myself, I thought I was weird for having danced in such a bizarre manner but I did enjoy it as I had never danced before in my entire life--maybe I would dance sometime again in the future?

I then walked over to the other Gossip Stone and placed my hand on it. "It seems a woman so inconspicuous she can be seen only through the Lens of Truth has a mask which also is completely inconspicuous." I knew without having to think that this Gossip Stone was referring to the Stone Mask. It was one of the more useful masks I had used on this journey in that it made me invisible to most monsters and even some humans--like the Gerudo Pirates for instance. Sugar Belle needed a Red Potion so that she could be seen again but I never did figure out if she got outside of the Pirates Fortress in the end.

" It looks like we're about halfway through."

" What makes you say that, Twilight?"

" I can see something off in the distance that looks like a door." Twilight answered. " Something important has to be over there as I can also see part of the track thought it's made of ice as opposed to the dirt that you've been rolling on since you started. I suspect that the end goal is over there but perhaps further exploration is needed."

" Why not just go straight for the end?"

Princess Twilight gave me a smug look in response. " I know you well enough, Sunset, where you have an innate curiosity to want to find out where certain paths will take you. I know you won't admit it but you do tend to check out every last possible nook out of curiosity."

I blushed. " Okay... You've made your point."

" I suggest heading back onto the track and resume rolling from over there." Twilight said, pointing to a section of the track where another walkway went across the gap and it lead to another gap that lead to the ice section. " You will need to get those spikes of yours out immediately as there are a couple of sharp turns you need to make without bouncing off of any treasure chests and you can't afford to take them slowly but I know you can do it, Sunset."

Putting the Mask of Truth away and using another walkway that connected back to the track, I walked over and looked down into the abyss below out of curiosity. I was so glad that I could fall down there and end up going back to the beginning of the cave--in this case I appreciated the fact that I could backtrack instead of dying. Shaking my head to rid myself of some nerves, I crossed back over to the track and made my way back as far as possible so as to give myself plenty of room to roll. Looking at what I had to go through next, I needed to go around some corners though without any guardrails to keep me from falling.

Breathing deeply, I curled into a ball and began rolling until my spikes protruded from my body again. Luckily, I was smart to begin rolling at an angle so I avoided the first corner that was right at the start but I quickly tilted left to avoid plunging into the abyss only to straighten myself in time to jump across a gap. I succeeded and tilted again turning to the left--I almost fell because of losing control slightly--smashed through some more pots, collecting the large Magic Jars that came from them, and turned the next corner before finding myself rolling along what was considered to be a straightaway in racing terms.

Jumping over three gaps including the one that I needed to use to reach the goal, I maintained my balance--though it was getting more stressful--and bounced off yet another treasure chest before turning left. I had no idea where this path was leading but I knew it was about to end as there was nothing left in front of me other than another Gossip Stone which I ran over upon jumping over one more gap and smacking into a column. Turning around to survey the slight damage I caused, the Gossip Stone remained planted in the ground before popping whilst making its usual giggling noise--I never could get used to hearing such a noise without cringing.

Using the Mask of Truth upon taking it out from behind my back, I placed my hand on the Gossip Stone to hear what it had to say. "It seems the person who is conscientious about being on time can see into the boxes that enable people to keep in touch with other people's feelings." Just hearing the word "time" and "boxes" meant that the Gossip Stone was referring to what Aria gave me before she fled for her life, the Postman's Hat. If only she were that nice in reality and not in this world but I knew things had to go back to the way they were before even if it meant friends becoming enemies and vice versa.

Turning around, I then noticed a Piece of Heart lying on the ground nearby. Once again, Princess Twilight was right about suggesting that I explored a little more of this cave instead of heading straight for where we assumed Night Glider was hiding. Grabbing the Piece of Heart and holding it up above my head, I felt the warmth that exuded from it resulting in my strength increasing just a little bit more. With that out of the way, I could now make my way over to the goal though I first needed to figure out how to get there. I couldn't go back the way I came as the ramps were only one direction so then I looked around to see if there was another path.

Sure enough, there was one to the south--left of the Gossip Stone from where I entered this section of the room from--but it required me to jump over one more gap. Before curling up, I looked to see where I could go from there. I was surprised to find that this track looped back on itself in that it went back to the section of track with the walkways that connected to the central section--the Piece of Heart was just a mere bonus for anyone who was willing to explore a little bit further. Curling into a ball, I rolled along and jumped over the gap just as my spikes appeared before quickly stopping as continuing on would have taken me into the abyss--I couldn't go back to the start as again the gaps were one way.

Doubling back slightly, I carefully walked across the walkway and around the tiles so as to not step on them until I stood before the final walkway. On the other side of what was the final gap to jump was a door though the pathway leading up to it was made of ice as Princess Twilight and I confirmed a short time ago. While my Goron body could handle cold conditions without any trouble, I was nervous as I could slip on the ice and into the abyss forcing me back to the beginning and having to go through everything again. I mean, it wasn't all bad but I'd rather not fall down a second time.

Positioning myself carefully so as to maintain a straight course, I curled up into a ball, and began rolling forward. My spikes protruded from my body as always and I was able to easily clear the gap only for me to suddenly uncurled myself and began slipping. The ice was extremely slippery compared to the ice I endured back in Snowhead so I struggled to keep myself from slipping and falling into the abyss. After what felt like forever, I chose to take a risk by diving to the ground in hopes of sliding up to the door. Sure, it looked absolutely humiliating to some extent but it proved effective as I managed to reach the door even if I did slam into it face-first.

Princess Twilight was surprised. " Wow... I didn't think you would do something like that, Sunset."

I breathed heavily as I got back up. " I was desperate to do anything to prevent myself from falling into the abyss."

" You could have just accepted it and gone through the track again."

" I'd rather not."

" Fair enough."

I then wiped my brow. " At least we managed to make it to the end despite some obvious hiccups along the way."

Princess Twilight nodded. " This challenge pushed your skills as a Goron to the limit. I think you rose up to the occasion considering you only had to restart this twice because you panicked so you can hold your head up high. Oh, and before I forget, you should take your mask off before you talk with Night Glider. Remember what happened when you tried talking to Moondancer whilst being a Deku?"

She definitely didn't appreciate me having a different body that's for sure. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Goron Mask, changed back to normal, and flipped back my hair before my feet began sliding on the ice due to being human now--I should have taken it off in the next room instead of out here. Opening the door and entering the next room, I was in a similar room to that which I entered upon finding Moondancer, a room with questionable wallpaper along with nothing but a worn-out carpet. You'd think these children of the moon would be in better looking locations but I supposed it didn't really bother them all that much.

" Looks like you found me." Night Glider said as she waved to me before performing a backflip.

" What kind of a game was that?" I asked.

" I never said it was one of those basic games of hide-and-seek."

I slapped my forehead. " I... I... I just..."

Night Glider laughed. " No need to be afraid to express your opinions. You found me fair and square so that means you win! I would give you a prize but there's nothing really up here that you would want so I guess a congratulations is all I can give."

" You want more masks don't you?"

" You must be psychic."

" No... I pretty much figured you would since you have similar mannerisms to the previous child."

" When you've lived here for as long as we have with only ourselves for company, things can become rather mundane which is why we all decided to try applying some unique quirks to our personalities to make us stand apart from one another." Night Glider said. " I'd say it worked out well since none of the others are capable of performing the kinds of acrobatic feats that I can do constantly. A shame that one lonely child never wants to play with us and instead prefers to sit there all alone. I can't help but feel sorry for her but I'm not going to be the one who breaks the ice as she honestly creeps me out."

" I spoke to her before coming to you."

Night Glider was surprised to say the least. " Talk about having guts! I don't know why you wanted to speak to her considering how morbid she can get but at least you're still standing instead of being somewhere else. And yes, you are absolutely right about me wanting to have more masks. If you want to go back to the giant tree, I'm going to need to have two masks from you so please let me have them without delay."

Groaning under my breath, I reached behind my back and took out two masks at random. In one hand was the Garo's Mask, the very mask that was my key to entering Ikana by defeating the Gorman Sisters in a horse race. Sure, I didn't use it all that often apart from summoning the Garo, but when I did use its power, I learned some valuable information though it had to be earned through battle. My other hand was holding Don Gero's Mask, what I acquired by giving food to Photo Finish who otherwise would have starved to death. I never did use this mask for anything so it ended up being nothing more than a collectible but at least she didn't go hungry.

So far, I had given up six masks to both Moondancer and Night Glider. Not including the three transformation masks and the ultimate mask, I only had fourteen masks left so hopefully the remaining two children would be kind enough to allow me to keep some for my eventual final showdown. And yet, deep down in my heart, a voice was telling me that I was likely not going to have any masks left by the time I was done with the children. Handing over the masks to Night Glider who gleefully took them, I knew I still had a ways to go before getting to face Majora's Mask.

" Are you satisfied?"

Night Glider nodded. " You definitely know how to please. Before you go, I would like to ask you a question. It's nothing serious or anything but rather, I'm curious as to what your answer is so please be sincere with me. What makes you... happy?"

" What makes me happy?"

" Yes."

" Lots of things."

" Be specific."

" My friends--my family as I refer to them--make my very happy as they are the most important thing in my life." I said. " I'm also happy that I get to use Equestrian Magic like they do after fearing I would never get that chance ever again and being able to live a wonderful life."

" Then answer me this." Night Glider said. " If that makes you happy, then does it make others happy too?"

" Of course as my friends love having me around."

" I am satisfied."

" Does this mean you will disappear now?"

Night Glider nodded. " My purpose here is at an end and you have proven to be quite the intriguing character. The only thing I have left to say to you would be to never judge your convictions by remaining true to them even when others question it. Now I will send you back where we first met so I hope you enjoy the company of the others. I still say avoid talking with that one child but I have a feeling you're going to have to converse with her eventually."

Everything then went white and I blacked out as a result. As Night Glider's image faded from my vision, I couldn't but think that she was perhaps a little too energetic for her own good given that it reflected in her personality. To be fair, I had never met her Equestrian counterpart in the same vein with regards to Moondancer, so my opinions were somewhat one-sided without having a good understanding of the other side of the equation. At any rate, there were only two more children left and I suspected they were going to be more difficult to deal with for reasons that currently eluded me.

When I opened my eyes moments later, I found that I was back where I started on the moon like before. While I was annoyed with having been sent all the way back here last time, I was much more accepting of it this time. It's not like they meant to send me back here, forcing me to make my way over to the tree again, but rather it was a divine power that was causing it that they probably either didn't know about nor had any control over it. Knowing there was nothing else I could do about it, I began walking forward in hopes of reaching the tree before something could go wrong.

Perhaps the weirdest thing was that time wasn't moving at all up here on the moon. Was it because time was eternal? If so then that explained why the children lived the kind of existence they did as nothing around them held any meaning what with time not moving and instead being stagnant. I wouldn't want to be in their shoes if it meant existing in a perpetual state that never went anywhere. Looking at my inventory, the loss of my masks was certainly heartbreaking as they each had a spirited connection to those I had helped when no one else could but I knew I couldn't be sentimental when so much was at stake.

Just as I reached the tree after a long walk--it was starting to get pleasant--everything started to rumble as a result of the tremors that continued occurring. I remembered that the moon back in Termina was still being cradled by the Four Giants and there was no way of knowing how long they could keep it up before they collapsed. I was going as fast as I could with regards to getting what I needed but perhaps I could stand to move quicker and not make them feel any less comfortable. Heck, if anyone was suffering more than the Giants, it was the people as their very existence was mere moments away from being snuffed out.

Starlight then spoke out which caught me by surprise. " Another of the children has gone and left, haven't they?"

I nodded. " Yes."

" You are making them leave... Why?"

" I'm only playing their games." I answered. " They are leaving of their own accord."

" I cannot stop you from playing with them even though they never want to do that with me." Starlight said. " In truth, I am jealous of the fact that they are having fun whilst I remain here on my own without anyone wanting to give me attention. I'm also jealous of how you have embraced them by giving them those pathetic masks of yours. If you didn't have any of those, you would be ignored just as much as I am. Why are you making me feel even more miserable than I already am?"

" If I am making you upset then I'm sorry."

Starlight scoffed. " Like I will believe the likes of you."

" But it's true."

" Leave me alone."

I knew there was nothing I could do to change her mind. " Alright... I'll leave you alone for now."

As I began walking away, Starlight looked up at me before saying something. " I hope that you get killed at the hands of the dark ones that await should you speak to the one whose mask you recently witnessed." I then turned around when she said that resulting in her laughing. " Have my words scared you? Good! Your misery is what will make me feel so much better so by all means keep going with what you call fun."

While her words meant little in the one sense since she didn't have the means to carry it out, I couldn't help but be concerned with what she said. I knew for certain that the next challenge would be one that involved testing my abilities as a Zora in ways I couldn't even begin to imagine yet the last one still remained unknown. It could be a challenge designed to test my three transformations or it could be something dedicated to my true self. In either scenario, I would be pushed to my limit so I needed to be prepared for what was to come. I was prepared of course as I made sure to bring along potions though so far I didn't have need of them.

The next child I needed to speak to was the one who was wearing Gyorg's Mask on their face. It didn't take long for me to find them, however, as the mask in question had those large gills that stuck themselves out on either side of its face. As I approached the child, they suddenly stopped and looked up at something prompting me to do so just to see what they were focusing on. I couldn't see anything unusual and I suspected they had tricked me and were snickering at my expense but instead they continued looking up at the sky. This child seemed to have a fixation on the sky which I thought was commendable but ultimately futile as it never changed.

Upon a closer inspection of the back of the child's head, I immediately recognized who it was--for once. The third child of the moon was none other than Lyra Heartstrings though she didn't really like having her surname spoken as she said it always annoyed her. While she appeared to be an ordinary girl from Canterlot High, she had an unusual quirk that revolved around doing absolutely absurd things out of nowhere. In a sense, Lyra was like Pinkie Pie but not so much random but rather more absurd. That wasn't a negative against her as it added to her charm yet she could stand to be more normal like many other people are.

Princess Twilight then told me that the pony version of Lyra had this weird obsession with hands though most just ignored that aspect of her. I could understand why a pony would be curious about hands if they had gone through the portal much like I and Her Highness had done, but Lyra hadn't had that opportunity so how she would know what hands were made no sense unless she encountered a creature who had them. The only thing that was missing was her best friend, Bon Bon--Sweetie Drops was either an alias or her real name but she chose to go with Bon Bon--who was always with Lyra no matter what she did.

Approaching Lyra, she noticed me and turned to look in my direction. " Well... You're a new face around here."

" I couldn't help but notice you were looking up at the sky a moment ago."

" Just seeing that beautiful sky makes me feel so very happy." Lyra said. " I know it never moves anywhere but I can't help but feel enchanted by it. It's like nothing else around me matters though I know I'm only kidding myself."

" Why say that?"

" Nothing ever happens around here."

" Yeah... I've already noticed that."

Lyra sighed. " All we children do around here is run about with no real sense of direction around this giant tree. You'd think there would be things to do up there yet none of us can reach those high-up branches as they are too high up for us to reach. Not only that, the girl who is sitting there by her lonesome at the base of the tree has been nothing but a misery for as long as any of us can remember. I don't understand why she chooses to isolate herself all because we don't want to see that weird mask she has. Come to think of it... You actually bear a striking resemblance to that mask."

My jaw dropped. " How is that possible!? I've never been to this world before until now."

Lyra shrugged. " Beats me but I see it as more of an uncanny coincidence than anything else. I suppose it doesn't really matter seeing as the rest of us keep our distance from that one all because she refuses to play with us. She views our games as boring and instead prefers fights to the death. Ugh! I'll never do anything like that though my friend over there does seem to crave action that could constitute towards fighting." She then looked up at the sky again for a few moments before looking back down at me. " But, I won't let such thoughts upset me as there's no point in complaining."

" Why is your friend fond of action?"

" I don't know but she often talks about wanting someone to try the ultimate challenge."

" Sounds suspicious."

" The rest of us said that about it though she ignored our concerns." Lyra said. " The weather is so nice around here that I always end up forgetting about my troubles and instead focus on staring up at the sky. By the way, I know what you have been doing around here with regards to the others. You've spoken to that miserable wretch at the base of the tree a couple of times and while I won't question why you would talk to her, I recommend leaving her alone as all she will do is cause misery by spreading it over to you. Also, you've been handing out masks, something that I've got to get in on."

" I knew you would want my masks."

" Who wouldn't?"

" What do you mean?"

" Everyone loves wearing masks." Lyra answered. " In fact, I don't know anyone who has said the opposite! Sure, you're only pretending to be someone else but isn't that the whole point of wearing one? The thought of getting to play a part is nothing short of majestic in its own way. I'm not going to simply ask that you give your masks to me without getting something in return as that just wouldn't be fair so how about getting to play a game with me? You get to do something extraordinary and I get my hands on what you've got. We both end up winning with no one losing."

I smiled. " You certainly have your ways of making your game sound interesting despite me having an idea as to what it will be."

" You already know?" Lyra asked, pausing for a few moments. " Even better! That will make explaining things a whole lot easier once we begin assuming you are able to give me what I want in the way of masks so how about you give me three of those masks?"

I sputtered. " Three!?"

" Will that be an issue?"

" No... No... It's just that you surprised me."

" Three masks is more than enough."

" Alright... I'll give you three."

I was afraid that this was going to be the case. Moondancer wanted one mask from me to play her game and one mask for me to leave whereas Night Glider wanted two masks for me to play and two masks for me to leave. With Lyra wanting three masks, I knew that the remaining child was sure to ask me to hand over four masks. If I had my calculations correct, I would be left with only the three transformation masks in my possession which wouldn't be enough to take on Majora's Mask. If I was to receive the ultimate mask after going through all of these different challenges, giving up everything else would have been worth it.

Reaching behind my back, I first took out the Postman's Hat, which I obtained from Aria as I thought to myself about earlier courtesy of the Gossip Stone. She really was truly dedicated to keeping to her schedule even if it meant not having the time to make friends with anyone. A life like that was one I wouldn't want to have because of how I used to be before friendship entered my heart but then Aria wanted that life and she was happy with it. I handed the mask over to Lyra before taking out the next one, the Couple's Mask. This was the last one I had to acquire yet it required doing so much and interacting with so many people.

Good thing I was able to use it for its intended purpose otherwise I would have complained about getting something that didn't do anything. Handing this mask over to Lyra, I reached behind my back one more time before taking out the third mask she wanted, the Gibdo Mask. This one proved essential as I needed it to progress past all those Gibdo in the underground tunnels below Ikana. Twilight Sparkle's father in this world, Soarin, gave it to me through no fault of his own all thanks to the Song of Healing but perhaps he will learn not to be quite so curious in the future as he could avoid getting cursed.

Upon giving Lyra the third mask, she bowed slightly in gratitude. " Thank you for giving me so many masks."

" The game is hide-and-seek, right?"

Lyra nodded. " Yes but I wonder if you will be able to handle what I have in mind."

" Probably."

" Since you know that we'll be playing hide-and-seek, we might as well go to the place where you must find me." Lyra said. " I hope that you're not afraid of getting wet as there is going to be a lot of water involved."

Everything then went white as I felt my body being pulled to another location, yet what Lyra said about there being a lot of water had me concerned. I knew that being a Zora was going to be essential but I had no idea to what extent. In other words, I was prepared but also unprepared for what she had in mind. Dropping down from the ceiling in the same blue light as before upon entering the next cave, I found myself surrounded by what appeared to be dulled out metallic walls where on occasion, water could be both seen and heard dripping down onto the ground. To my right was a pool of water with an underwater path at the bottom indicating where I had to go.

I couldn't see what was down the path so I was essentially going through this blind until I figured out the correct route to take. The surroundings combined with the strong current circulating in the water reminded me of my experiences in the Great Bay Temple--I would rather forget about what happened there for as long as I lived. Knowing that I needed to be a powerful swimmer to survive the strong current--and anything else that might lurk down there underwater--I took out the Zora Mask and was about to place it on my face when a loud noise made me drop it where it landed with a loud clanking sound on the ground.

" Nervous, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" I heard a noise which startled me."

" This place does give me the creeps I must admit."

" Not to mention the water passageway."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Looks like you will need to master your swimming abilities in order to find Lyra. At least you won't have to worry about falling into the abyss as this place seems to be closed off to that sort of thing."

" For that I am thankful."

" Hello?" Lyra called out from somewhere.

" Where are you?"

" Oh you can hear me!" Lyra answered. " I was afraid that my voice wouldn't be able to reach you. Anyway, I said that I hoped you weren't afraid of getting wet as that is the main challenge you must overcome if you are to find me at the end of this underwater passageway. The path starts out as a single line before it splits off into two directions followed by splitting into more directions and finally splitting into even more directions until you reach the end where you will get sent back to the beginning of the tunnel."

" So this is like some kind of underwater maze?"

" You could say that but there is more to it than just swimming through the current." Lyra answered. " You should pay attention to your surroundings whilst swimming about down there otherwise it's possible you might miss something important."

" Got it!"

" Do you have gills?"

" Um... No..."

" Then you might have trouble breathing down there."

" I'll be fine."

" You certainly have bravery written all across your face." Lyra said. " Have as many attempts to make it through this underwater maze as you like until you either find me or choose to give up in which case I will win. Above all else, have fun and make sure you wipe your feet when you're done."

I had no idea if she was being serious or not but I now had a better idea as to what I needed to do. Just getting to her location wasn't enough. Instead, I had to solve some underwater puzzles in order to find the right route to take or else be forced to endure an endless underwater loop until I got it right or gave up. I suspected the Piece of Heart was located in a different section of the maze so I had to figure out where to go to find it before finding her. In any case, I didn't have to worry about narrow pathways or an endless abyss but I did have to worry about succumbing to any kind of water pressure.

Placing the Zora Mask on my face, I immediately squatted down and watched as my body shimmered from human to Zora. When I let out a blood-curdling scream later--I really wish that didn't happen--I became Mikau once again before jumping into the water where I was dragged forward when I noticed a Crystal Switch to my right. Swimming over to it and striking it with my fins, the sound of something opening up somewhere else could be heard further ahead but I had no idea where it was. Since I had no other direction to go but forward, I continued swimming until I reached a point where the path split into two directions.

Without taking the time to think--the strong current didn't help things either--I chose to take the path to the right in hopes it would lead me somewhere. I swam down that path and took in the dullness that surrounded me courtesy of the walls. It felt like I was swimming through a large pipe that would take me to the ocean or to my destination which is what I was hoping for, that being Lyra locations. The tunnel then opened up to a slightly larger area whilst heading up to a nook which looked suspicious. I dove out from the water and landed on the nook to discover yet another Gossip Stone.

Crap! I had taken the wrong path so now I had to go through the sequence again. Before doing anything else though, I took out the Mask of Truth and held it firmly whilst placing my hand on the stone to hear what it had to say. "A large and colorful being seems to have a mask that calms those scattered in temples..." That was an obvious reference to Adagio who had portrayed each of the Great Fairies with her first incarnation, the Great Fairy of Magic, giving me the Great Fairy's Mask that helped me to reel in all of the Stray Fairies. Definitely one of the most useful masks I had used until of the three transformation masks.

Jumping back into the water, I swam off into the darkness where everything went black and I found myself back at the beginning of the tunnel. Cursing under my breath for having gone the wrong way, I jumped back in and began swimming forward until I reached the crystal switch only to discover that I needed to activate it again as it had since turned itself off--somehow. Using my fin to activate the switch, the same sound from before could be heard further ahead but again I didn't know where it was. Swimming forward after the sound stopped, I decided to head left and see where it would take me.

Much like the other path, this one opened up to a slightly larger area complete with a nook but this time there was a door instead of a Gossip Stone. Given that I had absolutely no idea where I was going, I figured on trying the door just to see where it would take me. Diving out of the water and into the nook before accidentally rolling into the door--my swimming really needs to get a lot better sometimes--I quickly looked around out of a sense of curiosity. Whatever had opened before from activating the crystal switch had to have been rom here as the signs of something heavy had been marked on the ground by my feet.

Opening the door, I entered the next section which looked exactly the same as where I just came from apart from the green pot in front of me. If I had ignored the door and taken the other path, would it have caused me to go back to the beginning? Walking up and smashing the pot, I picked up another Magic Jar only to notice another crystal switch lurking underwater. I decided to go with a different tactic as I wasn't confident enough in jumping in and activating it at the same time. Extending out my fins and getting as close to the edge as possible without falling in, I aimed at the crystal switch before firing my fins at it.

This caused something else to open up further ahead so once again I had no idea what it was. Jumping into the water, the only direction I could go was forward so I continued swimming until it opened up into a large room with several columns but my eyes were interested in the three possible directions to take. " Which path do you think is the right one?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I have no idea, Sunset."

" That doesn't give me much confidence."

" It's going to boil down to taking a guess and hoping you picked correctly."

" And if I choose the wrong path?"

" You'll have to go back to the beginning and try again."

I gulped. " While this isn't as bad as what I went through in the previous cave, being pushed about by these strong water currents is starting to take its toll on me. Being a Zora doesn't mean having complete immunity to these kinds of conditions. A shame that we don't have a map or something that could tell us which path is the correct one. Not only do we need to find where Lyra is hiding in here but also where we can find that Piece of Heart. I'm not going to leave until I have found both."

" Then what would be the most logical path?"

" Well... Straight would be too easy and going left would mean following the course."

" So you think those two paths are wrong?"

I nodded. " Going right would be unexpected considering we've been going left this whole time so far."

" Then right it is."

Swimming forward, the current began pulling me forward yet I managed to tilt my body to the right, allowing me to swim down the right-hand tunnel. I had no idea if I made the right choice or not but I would find out soon enough. The tunnel eventually opened up just like before and at first I thought I had screwed up and would have to start over, but upon seeing a door in the nook just ahead of me, I smiled knowing that I chose the correct path. Diving out of the water into the nook--and crashing into the door--I opened the door to find myself in the same place again. Just how big was this tunnel anyway!?

I smashed the pot to collect another Magic Jar and extended out my fins as I suspected there was another crystal switch to be activated. Sure enough, my suspicion was correct as there was one down there in the water. Firing my fins, I activated the switch causing something else to open up further ahead--this was starting to get very annoying--before I jumped back into the water to continue on until I reached the next part. This section opened up vertically instead of horizontally leading me to wonder where the next paths would go in terms of their directions--would I have to go up or down or straight?

Upon getting closer to the end of this section, I was surprised at seeing the three possible directions. " I was just thinking that the next directions would go either up, down, or straight but I didn't think it would actually be true."

" This could very well be the final stage, Sunset."

" Which means one path leads to Lyra, one leads to the Piece of Heart, and the other to nothing."

" You need to pick the right path."

I began thinking about it. " Going up seems like it would lead to Lyra as she would view herself as being on top of everything."

" That's not the impression I get." Twilight said. " But, you do have a point in that she would be above the other paths so we should take a different one. Going down would be a reference to death so that path would lead you to the dead-end resulting in being sent back to the start." I had no idea how Her Highness could associate death in such a manner but I had no intention of arguing with her over it.

" So the middle path then?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " That does seem to be the correct choice for the Piece of Heart."

I began swimming again whilst keeping in a straight line so that the current would take me down the middle path. I almost got pulled into the bottom path but I managed to swim fast enough to maintain my course and travelled down the middle path where it opened up to the same area I had seen more times than I liked. You'd think there would have been more in the way of variety but I supposed it was meant to whittle my confidence down until I surrendered--I wasn't about to. Diving out of the water and into the next nook, I was happy upon seeing my prize, the Piece of Heart along with a Gossip Stone.

Taking out the Mask of Truth from behind my back, I placed my hand on the stone to hear what it had to say. "The mask that sees into people's hearts seems to be near the strange, shining, gold spiders..." So this Gossip Stone was referring to the Mask of Truth itself, the very mask I was holding in my hand. I had to cleanse an entire house of Gold Skulltulas in order to get it from the man who had been cursed by them. It wasn't a difficult challenge but it did prove annoying at times given that some of them required me to have specific items that existed beyond Woodfall so I was wise to have gone there much later rather than sooner.

Picking up the Piece of Heart after putting the Mask of Truth away, I felt the warmth coming from it, making me stronger still, only to be reminded that I had to go through the entire course again to reach Lyra. It was the one drawback with taking the middle path but at least I had memorized the course so getting lost wasn't going to happen. Jumping back down into the water, and letting the current pull me into the darkness, I soon found myself back at the beginning which meant having to activate those crystal switches again--it also occurred to me that activating them was what was letting me progress further.

Diving into the water and activating the first crystal switch using the side of my fin, I began to make my way through the tunnel for the third time, heading down the appropriate tunnels, activating additional crystal switches, diving out of the water into those nooks so as to go through the doors, and collecting big Magic Jars from smashing those pots. Despite knowing which way to go, I wasn't thrilled with the whole prospect of having to go through it all again just to reach Lyra. I had a strong notion to give her a piece of my mind for making me do this but she didn't tell me to seek the Piece of Heart out so that was my fault if nothing more.

By the time I finally made it back to the final section, I swam upwards in hopes that was truly where Lyra was. The tunnel twisted about here and there from time to time until it opened up just like before and in front of me was another nook with a door at the end of it. Diving out of the water--I didn't crash into the door this time--I grabbed my face, took off the Zora Mask, and flipped back my hair before opening the door. To my surprise, Lyra was waiting there--I chose correctly--for me but I first needed to catch my breath as swimming for so long despite the current had taken its toll on me a little.

" You managed to find me." Lyra said.

" So... much... water..."

" Most would have drowned after a couple of minutes but you persevered in the face of adversity."

" I'll never go near water again."

Lyra laughed. " I know you were lying just now. You did well to find me despite using one of those masks that contains a spirit. Yeah, I know you became a different creature just to make it through those underwater tunnels. If not for that ability, I'd say you would have drowned not long after starting. You'll go near the water again soon enough because what you experienced won't happen again. Or it might but who am I to determine such things. Anyway, you won my game and without losing sanity."

" You thought I would go insane?"

" Most would have."

I groaned. " Ugh! Can we please get through the rest of this?"

" Yeah, I can understand your annoyance."

" You want three masks correct?"

Lyra nodded. " I know they mean a lot to you but I really want to take them off your hands. Besides, it's not like you have any attachment to them other than sentimental reasons but those will always be with you. No one can take those away no matter what they try and do."

" Why do you want my masks?"

" Why?" Lyra asked. " You could say that I want to know what it's like to pretend that I'm something else. I know I brought this up earlier when we first met but I never attributed it to myself because I thought it would offend you. Having numerous masks would give me plenty of opportunities to find the ideal combination that would give me the best experience of pretending to be something I'm not. Sure, it sounds both pretentious and selfish but I really need more masks otherwise I'd be limited in scope. You can keep those masks that have spirits in them as they don't suit me."

I couldn't help but find Lyra to be adorable in a sense. Even though this wasn't the true her, she always knew how to remain positive no matter what hardships befell her. It was that kind of optimism that was severely lacking back home especially when everyone experienced a bout of despair. Lyra should consider having classes dedicated to making people feel more positive about themselves. Anyway, I reached behind my back and took out the Bunny Hood. I remember getting this by helping out Garble by making his chicks grow up into adults back at Romani Ranch but I wish I had used it far often. It would have made certain ordeals a non-issue.

The next mask I took out from behind my back was the Captain's Hat. This one proved essential as I needed the Stalchildren to give me access to the caverns that were below the graveyard at night to learn the Song of Storms--I didn't like fighting that Iron Knuckle down there. Captain Keeta was honourable even when he finally rested in peace after conveying to me his final orders for his men but perhaps he shouldn't have been so hard on himself just because he lost one battle. The final mask I took out was Romani's Mask. Applejack needed help as I recalled and those Gorman Sisters were determined to prevent her from making her delivery. I got this mask and was made an adult in the process.

" Here you go." I said as I handed over all three masks.

" This will definitely make my own dreams come true."

" I guess you have to go now, huh?"

Lyra nodded. " You finished my game and gave me enough masks that will keep me happy for a long time. Because of that, I no longer have a reason to be here so yes I will have to leave much like the previous children of the moon before me. Before I go, I want to ask you something. The right thing... What is it?"

" What do you mean?"

" Think of it like this." Lyra answered. " If you do the right thing, does it make everybody happy?"

I needed a moment to come up with an answer. " That all depends on your own actions. Sometimes, you do something right but not everyone will appreciate it. Instead, they choose to condemn you resulting in one questioning their overall worth. I'd say it's impossible to please everyone but it shouldn't be a detriment to prevent you from trying to see if you can succeed at it."

" A good enough answer."

" I wasn't deceiving you."

" If you had then I would have done something nasty which you wouldn't have liked." Lyra said. " Anyway, time for you to go back to where you came from. There should still be one more child running around the tree but be cautious as she can be extremely feisty. Remember that I did say she loves seeing action."

Everything went white as Lyra faded away and once again I blacked out. Upon awakening moments later, I found back where I started on the moon once again. At least they were consistent when it came to sending me back here so I wasn't as upset over it as I was before. There was only one child left running around the tree's base and they were wearing the mask that belonged to Twinmold, yet it was the temple itself and not the monster that tested my resolve on a physical, mental, and emotional level. And yet, both Starlight and Lyra had warned me of how this last child acted so I needed to be cautious just in case something went wrong.

As I made my way back over to the tree, I knew that I would have to give up my remaining non-transformation masks to the final child thus leaving me with the only three masks they didn't want to take from me. How was I supposed to defeat Majora's Mask with only three masks in my possession? Unless it handed over the ultimate mask, my chances of defeating it had been dwindling since the very beginning. When I reached the tree, the final child was punching its base as though they were obsessed with testing their strength. I could tell they were hardcore so maybe a similar rhetoric was in order?

I walked past Starlight only for her to call out to me. " Another child has left, haven't they?"

Without looking at her, I answered her. " Yes."

" You really want me to remain all alone don't you?"

I shook my head. " That's not it at all!"

" Then you should have left them alone and not played their childish games." Starlight said. " Had you not come here, I would still have them running around the tree doing whatever they consider entertainment. Sure, they would have ignored me but I would have at least accepted their presence. Why did you come here anyway? It's clear that you obviously don't belong here and there's nothing around here for someone like you."

" I'm here to..." I said before stopping. I couldn't let her know that I came here to stop her so I had to say my intentions carefully. " I'm here to stop the world below from being destroyed by this very moon."

Starlight snorted. " Like I care about something like that."

" Guess I've nothing more to say to you."

" You know..." Starlight began. " For some reason, I am beginning to feel intrigued by you despite how you've made me miserable. Maybe I'm not thinking straight or I am but just can't see it yet but there is something about you that I can't get my mind over." She then looked away from me. " Bah! What do I care about the likes of you anyway? Leave me alone!"

Leaving Starlight to continue wallowing in her misery--whether or not she had figured out that I had come to stop her once and for all remained to be seen--I made my way over to where the final child was still punching at the base of the tree. I could tell straight away they were fascinated with combat as punching something repeatedly was a means of improving one's punches as well as their speed and dexterity. I've never considered doing anything of the sort as I preferred something less violent but then I supposed I could relate seeing as I had been fighting monsters throughout this journey.

Before I could greet the child, Princess Twilight's jaw dropped. " Ember!?"

" And who is that?"

" She's the Dragon Lord."

This time my jaw dropped. " What!? Dragon Lord!? Since when are you familiar with dragon culture, Twilight? I thought no pony has ever seen the dragon's homeland given how dangerous they can be because of their aggressive nature."

" Before all of this started, the pony version of Rarity and I followed the dragon version of Spike to the Dragon Kingdom." Twilight said. " There, we witnessed an event that determined who amongst them would become their new leader, the Gauntlet of Fire. It was a fierce competition which tested them to their limits and while Spike actually won as a result of friendship, he was only Dragon Lord for a few moments before handing it over to Ember, daughter of the previous Lord. Other than her having a very feisty attitude, there is much about her that I don't know about so I can't really give you that much information."

" What can you say about her?"

" She can be very aggressive especially if you get on her bad side."

I gulped. " This could be difficult."

" Remember that I just described the Equestrian version of her." Twilight said. " This version of Ember could be very different or at the very least, possess some similar characteristics with her true self. On a side note, I am curious as to why she has a human form despite being a dragon. The dragon version of Spike became a dog when he went through the portal to the world you call home so why was Ember given special treatment?"

I shrugged. " Don't ask me as not even I understand how the portal works."

" Guess I will figure it out eventually, just not today."

Choosing not to respond to Princess Twilight--she had just gone off into her own little world--I turned my attention towards Ember. " Um... Excuse me..."

" About time you finally came over to me." Ember said as she looked in my direction. I couldn't tell what expression she had on her face due to wearing Twinmold's mask, but if I could wager a guess, it would be either sheer annoyance or a smug look. " What made you want to speak me after everyone else, huh? Was it because I intimidated you? You needn't be scared of the likes of me provided you keep me amused."

" So you're the last one?"

Ember nodded. " Yep! I must say that it's nice having fresh meat around."

" I've been told you crave action."

" There's nothing to do around here." Ember said. " So I keep busy by punching this tree over and over to let loose some of my stress. None of the others share my love of action and instead just prance about and it makes me sick to see them waste their potential. The biggest offender is the girl who continues sitting by herself over there. I thought she would be as obsessed with action like me but instead she just mopes about thinking us being worthless."

" You seem more spirited than the others."

" I want to see a good fight!"

" But, I think you have to make me find you in a game of hide-and-seek."

That made Ember gag. " Don't remind me of such a stupid thing! I actually wanted to challenge you to something more exciting, filled with action, bloodshed, and possibly more but instead the others said that was too intense and violent. They wanted me to play hide-and-seek with any who came here. Bah!"

" I'm up for your idea."

" I knew you would as you've got that sword."

" Shall we begin?"

Ember then thrust out her hand. " Whoa! Before we get to that, you first need to give me some masks. Just because I love action doesn't make me a one-dimensional character. I happen to have a soft spot for masks so if you want to take on some powerful opponents, I need the goods if you catch my meaning." She then lowered her thumb indicating how many masks she wanted. " I'll accept nothing less than four masks."

" Figures you wanted that many."

" Take it or leave it."

I was so close to acquiring the ultimate mask at this point that I couldn't refuse her ultimatum. Reaching behind my back, I first took out the Blast Mask. I got this one after helping the Old Lady from the Bomb Shop by preventing Lightning Dust from stealing the Bomb Bag she was personally delivering to the shop. Maybe her son should have gone instead or had gone with an escort. A shame I only used the mask on a couple of occasions because of not getting any bombs. The next mask I got from behind my back was the Bremen Mask. I still found it strange that the likes of Discord in this world had been with an animal troupe which is how he originally got it.

Even though it helped animals mature, I had more fun using it on those servants of Igos du Ikana. Next, I took out Kamaro's Mask. All he wanted was for someone to teach his dance to others so that he would have a legacy though he was weird in his delivery. Again, I should consider taking some dance classes or something when this is over as I enjoyed the experience. The last mask that I gave Ember was the Giant's Mask. Without this one, I never would have defeated Twinmold. While it's power was immense, it was also limited in that it could only be used where I fought it below the Stone Tower Temple.

" There you go!"

" And here I thought you were going to back down."

I shook my head. " I'm after something special so I need to do this."

Ember laughed. " So you're willing to risk your life for whatever this thing is you're babbling about? Wow... Talk about gutsy! Then I have to give you a real challenge! I hope you brought along some potions or something like that as this isn't going to be a picnic."

Once more, everything went white as I found myself being pulled to another location. I was honestly worried that Ember was going to give me a monster that I couldn't overcome but she didn't seem like the sort of person who would do that. Granted, her attitude made me think she wanted to see me die but perhaps she just wanted excitement Upon arriving at my destination, I was surprised to find myself standing in front of a door. The décor of the room looked very exquisite though I couldn't let my guard down. I was dealing with Ember, a dragon who respected those who possessed great strength.

" That went better than I thought." Twilight said.

" What do you mean?"

" Ember can be a difficult person to talk to because of her dragon heritage."

" She did seem somewhat arrogant."

Princess Twilight sighed. " Most dragons are like that, Sunset. They pride themselves on showing off their strength as a means of earning respect from their peers. Whoever is the strongest amongst them becomes their leader who then rules over them with intimidation. A weak leader would be immediately overthrown because they would lack true ferocity in comparison to other dragons. Perhaps Ember will finally make her people understand that strength isn't everything."

" One can only hope."

" Yo!" Ember called out from somewhere. " I know you can hear me so answer back right now!"

" Is this your challenge?"

" You got it!"

" Where are the monsters?"

" In each of the following chambers, you will have to fight against a powerful opponent." Ember answered. " They are those that you have probably battled before so think of this as mastering them so that you can prove how dominant you really are. You'll also have some puzzles to solve that revolve around explosions but I don't care about that. I mean, I never asked to have such things in this but the others insisted on it because they enjoy testing the minds of others. Bah! Action is all anyone really needs!"

" I think I'll manage."

" There's something else..."

" What's that?"

" I can sense a dark power coming from one of those rooms and I didn't put it in there." Ember answered. " It seems to have a grudge against you but if it gives me the action I crave, who really cares what it is. Anyway, I'll be waiting at the end of this gauntlet so have fun and don't get yourself killed."

As Ember's voice faded away, I had a suspicion I knew what she was talking about, but how could she still be alive after what happened? She was consumed by Twinmold, her life being snuffed out in the process, but perhaps she managed to survive and was determined to finish what she started? I shook my head. No... I had to believe that she had joined Sunset Demon in an eternal sleep and wouldn't bother me any longer. Turning my attention to the door before me, I couldn't help but appreciate the stain glass motif. It felt like I was in a church though I knew this was meant to be a display designed to weaken one's defences out of a sense of innocence.

Before opening the door, I went and smashed all of the pots that were located on either side of it. I acquired some Magic Jars on one side and green rupees on the other--the latter wasn't going to do me any good given that I gotten everything I needed--though I had hoped for something better. Opening the door and entering the next room, I had to cover my eyes due to how colourful it was. Whoever put these tiles in here clearly had no concept of brightness not to mention fashion sense. It looked like an artist had sculpted it badly yet I couldn't let it be distracting given that I could be attacked at any moment.

" Quite the colourful room." Twilight said.

" It looks terrible." I said.

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes, but you have to admit that there is an unusual charm about it. In any case, the door we just entered the room from has locked behind us with iron bars and the door in front of us has the same thing."

" What do you suppose is waiting for us?"

" It could be anything."

A familiar noise then came from the ceiling so I looked up and watched as a single Dinofols dropped to the ground. It breathed a burst of flame from its gaping maw before swinging its sword a couple of times and letting out a scream. My reaction spoke for itself upon seeing it. " You have got to be kidding me. This is the first monster that I have to fight? I was honestly expecting something a lot worse."

" Maybe Ember wanted to start you off with something easy?"

" I guess but this isn't going to take very long."

" Especially since you have the Gilded Sword now which inflicts four times the damage of the Kokiri Sword." Twilight said. " I'd say you can take the Dinofols out in two hits, one if you perform a jump attack though it might not let you do that because of how fast it can move. You could use the Great Fairy's Sword instead in which it will only take a single blow to defeat it, but, I'll leave that decision to you, Sunset."

Choosing to go with the Gilded Sword--I wasn't going to waste the gift Adagio had given me on this thing--and slinging the Mirror Shield onto my arm, the Dinofols darted forward and swung its sword which collided with mine. It kept doing this repeatedly in hopes of connecting but I instead struck its chest when it dropped its guard causing it to reel back a little which took me by surprise. I knew that my sword had gotten stronger when I had it re-forged but I never expected anything like this. The Dinofols then breathed out flame causing me to raise my shield to protect myself from the blaze but it took the opportunity to side-step around and hit me from behind.

I got knocked forward--not enough to fall face-first on the ground--only to quickly whip myself around where my sword clashed with its. Our blades collided several times after this before the Dinofols got the upper hand by using more force to disrupt me. It then swung its sword only for it to bounce off of my shield allowing me to strike it, and it turned out to be enough as it collapsed after uttering a whimper onto the ground before disappearing. This unlocked both doors allowing me to continue though I will admit that I was pretty sloppy as I shouldn't have gotten hit once seeing as it was a weak monster in comparison to what I had in terms of equipment.

" Guess we underestimated it."

I sheathed my sword and placed my shield behind my back. " I guess my confidence cost me a little."

" Being confident is never bad unless you let it consume your mind."

" Makes you wonder what Ember has in store for us next."

" Considering she expects a strong showing from you, I doubt she has filled this place with weak monsters like say Octoroks, Tektites, and Dodongos." Twilight said. " If anything, I'd say you'll be going up against the strongest monsters that were rarely seen on our journey."

I gulped. " Oh no... I think I know what one of them is."

" What?"

" The Iron Knuckle."

" It's possible."

If there was an Iron Knuckle waiting for me further ahead, I wasn't looking forward to fighting it. Even though I did have a much stronger sword than I did the last time I fought one, they were still extremely dangerous because of how big of an attack range they had along with dealing so much damage with their axes. Knowing there was no turning back given the reward that awaited me for doing this, I walked over and opened the door to enter a tiny room that housed a Gossip Stone. This must have been some kind of safe room meant to prepare me for the next challenge.

Taking out the Mask of Truth, I placed it on my face and began talking to the Gossip Stone. It then said this to me mentally: "She of high class and manners who lives in the swamp has a useful mask that distinguishes scents..." The Mask of Scents... I truly wished that I had gotten to use it but it just wasn't meant to be. I enjoyed racing against Mrs. Cheerilee but deep down I felt like I had wronged her by not using it for its intended purpose, and now, it was in the hands of Moondancer who had since disappeared. Sometimes, I felt like I could have done things differently when it came to specific items.

Opening the door after putting away the Mask of Truth and walking past the Gossip Stone, I entered the next room where I immediately came to a stop upon seeing someone standing there with their back to me. " I was wondering when you were going to get here, Sunset Shimmer."

" Midnight Sparkle!" I exclaimed, my jaw dropping and my eyes opening wide. Before me stood Midnight Sparkle who turned to face me and I was shocked to see that she had seen better days. Both of her wings had been burnt to the point where she could no longer use them, her left arms was bloody and completely immobilized, both her legs had been hacked to pieces, and she had a massive scar running from her right eye down to her chest. " What in the world happened to you?"

" I survived!"

" I can see that."

" When that insect-like creature consumed me in the Stone Tower Temple, I believed that I could easily overcome it and make my escape." Midnight Sparkle said. " But, something unexpected happened and it was because of the dark power I had acquired. A side-effect caused me to suddenly lose much of my magic leaving me vulnerable to that creature's digestive tracts. I thought I could escape but then it suddenly exploded and I was caught in the blast. Before it was completely gone, I got spat out where I plummeted down and crashed into a desolate wasteland where I sustained more injuries until I managed to climb back up to where I had been consumed."

" How did you get up here?"

" I saw the four giant creatures and knew you had something to do with it."

" And you somehow managed to make it up here?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " My wings were badly damaged whilst in that creature but I had enough left in them to fly me all the way to the town those giant ceatures were standing around until they finally gave out and I crashed into the tall tower." She then showcased her wings by flapping each one though it made her wince with pain. By pushing them to the limit, she caused them to burn until there was nothing left other than the basic structure. " That strange glowing light brought me here to this place and so I've been waiting here for you. I was about to give up hope but then you came through that door."

" You're in no condition to do anything."

" That's what you think!"

" Don't tell me you still want to finish things?"

" I may be barely clinging to life but I've got enough power to kill you."

Sighing, I rubbed the bridge of my nose. " Despite everything you've done to me, Midnight Sparkle, I have no desire to kill you. Besides, you look as though you could collapse at any moment without me needing to deal the final blow on you. Also, I've gotten much stronger so your chances of beating me are near impossible."

Raising her bloodied arm, Midnight Sparkle stomped her foot several times though it was the sight of her blood dripping from her arm that caught my attention. " My plans of acquiring all of the Equestrian Magic by killing you and your friends has failed. I've got nothing left now which means I no longer care about what happens to this fractured body even if it means I die by your hand. Think of this as me going on a suicide run. I'm likely not going to survive much longer but by taking you with me, I'll have the last laugh."

" You really are serious aren't you?"

" I'll kill you even if it means killing myself."

Princess Twilight then spoke up. " So you're willing to throw everything away?"

" I've got nothing left."

" Just because you've been battered doesn't mean you should waste what you've been given." Twilight said. " The fact that you're still alive albeit just barely is a sign that fate gave you a second chance. Granted, you shouldn't even exist because Twilight Sparkle was changed back to normal freeing her in the process from being you, but I suppose even a creature filled with the lust for power deserves to live."

" I don't need your pity, Princess Twilight."

" Maybe you are beyond saving."

Midnight Sparkle took a step forward only to wince again in pain. It was clear to both myself and Princess Twilight that she was in no condition to start picking a fight but it seemed she was determined to see this course through even if it meant losing her life. " I'm going to fight you, Sunset, and you will fight back because I will make sure you can't leave this place unless you meet my challenge."

I sighed. " Alright... I'll fight you, Midnight Sparkle, but don't say I didn't warn you."

" Who said I was going to fight you right now?"

" But you just said..."

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " I'm going to let you progress through whatever it is you're supposed to be doing and then face you when you're done. It will give me some time to heal my wounds though I doubt it will be all that much given my body is barely keeping together." Raising her non-injured hand above her head, magic began flowing around it and I knew that she had something horrible in store for me. " I've still got some Equestrian Magic left and I intend to use it to make one of the monsters further ahead more powerful than ever before. If you can prevail against it, then you get to finally fight me."

" Only you would want to win by any means." Twilight said.

" If I'm going down, I'm taking you and Sunset with me."

Turning around, Midnight Sparkle slowly walked up to the door, mumbled some words, and the iron bars rose up allowing her to walk through before they closed again. I was honestly expecting her to walk through the door or disappear through some shadows but I guessed her weakened body couldn't cope. I had hoped not to see her especially after what she did to Sunset Demon but destiny had decided that she would live long enough for the two of us to finally resolve things. I suspected she would enhance the Iron Knuckle further ahead and if it were true, I was going to have the fight of my life against it.

Chapter 72: The Ultimate Mask

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
September 25, 2017
Chapter 72: The Ultimate Mask.

Midnight Sparkle... I never would have imagined that she had survived after being consumed by Twinmold. When it happened back at the Stone Tower Temple, I truly believed she was dead and that Sunset Demon could finally rest in peace. But, Midnight Sparkle proved that she was like a cat in that she had more than one life. To have survived against being digested by a giant insect sounded impossible yet she did and now once again positioned herself as a threat to what I was trying to achieve. She could have chosen to simply not continue on with this senseless grudge and lived out her life but instead she chose to throw it away in her bid to end mine.

If there was a saving grace for me in all of this, it would be that Midnight Sparkle was nowhere near as threatening as she once was. The dark power she had absorbed had become lost to her and much of her regular power--her Equestrian Magic--was also lost leaving her with barely anything. Even her physical body had been shattered and was nothing more than a pale shell of what it once was. I doubted she could last long in a physical confrontation against me and a magic-based one was out of the question as Termina prevented either of us from using Equestrian Magic.

That left her resorting to enhancing the abilities of monsters that were native to this world. She had done this several times throughout the Stone Tower Temple and whilst I did overcome her twisted challenges, she continued relying on such a tactic in hopes I would eventually die thus leaving her with one less problem to deal with. But, I proved myself to be quite stubborn and refused to let her defeat me like that. My greatest fear at the moment was that she would enhance the Iron Knuckle that was waiting for me further ahead in this gauntlet Ember had created for me and I would be unable to defeat it.

No... I didn't blame Ember for setting this up. She didn't know that Midnight Sparkle had infiltrated this place and chose to personally get involved knowing that I would have to overcome the challenges that lay ahead in order to reach the Dragon Lord who was waiting at the end. It's not like she was bothered by it as Ember was someone who wanted more action and couldn't care less how it happened so long as it did resulting in her getting entertained. No wonder dragons were viewed the way they were back in Equestria. Their behaviour and those of ponies were like night and day; complete opposites on every conceivable level.

The Iron Knuckle... Of all the monsters that I had fought in both Termina and Hyrule, this was the one that gave me the most problems. Sure, it was classified as a monster because of how there was more than one in existence at any one time, yet it was stronger than most boss monsters. Such a thing shouldn't have been possible and yet the Iron Knuckle proved that a regular monster could possess power that rivaled beings deemed leaders of others. Whenever I had to fight one, it resulted in me almost getting myself killed--I had potions on hand because of being prepared--due to how strong it truly was.

No monster should have power like that and be able to use it without losing control, yet the Iron Knuckle had that in spades. Fortunately, I had a much stronger sword than what I used last time when I fought one deep below the graveyard--I had an even stronger one than that--in addition to improved defences so in theory, my chances of success were good. But, because of Midnight Sparkle now being a factor, she could make the Iron Knuckle into something far worse than anything I had ever faced before. Majora's Mask was merely a stone's throw away given that I just needed to reach Ember yet Midnight Sparkle could potentially end everything here.

Breathing several times to calm my nerves down, I knew that I had to face the problem at hand eventually. I couldn't run away now especially since I was so close to getting my hands on the ultimate mask, that which had been the main reason behind my helping those who needed it alongside it being the right thing to do. Without it, defeating Majora's Mask was an impossibility though I was merely speculating this. I had no idea what its true power was like as Starlight Glimmer seemed capable of only using a small amount of it judging from what she had been doing.

Taking a step forward, I suddenly heard a familiar laugh echoing around the room. I then looked forward and watched as the Garo Master dropped down from the ceiling. Why was this place filled with so many references to my previous experiences!? I knew this was indeed the same Garo Master I encountered back in the Stone Tower Temple yet how could he be here and now given that he killed himself when he used a bomb to die as a means of performing seppuku? Then again, he was already dead so being killed by a bomb probably didn't do anything unless there was some other force at work here.

" Chosen one... We meet again." The Garo Master said.

" How did you survive getting blown up by your own hand?" I asked.

" The one who created this place called my soul back from the brink."

I should have known Ember was behind this. I knew she wanted to give me a real challenge but I think she went overboard with this particular choice. " You didn't come all this way just to get a second chance at life or whatever constitutes in your case."

The Garo Master laughed. " I wanted to fight you one last time."

" That figures."

" I see that you have changed in some ways but not in others."

" What do you mean?"

" You have become stronger since our last battle." The Garo Master answered. " You are wielding a much stronger blade than before though I can sense you carry a blade of even greater strength though it costs precious defence to use it properly. You have also experienced hardship along the way though this only steels your resolve thus eliminating an important weakness, and yet, you still possess the same conviction that has defined who you are."

" My hesitation towards killing?"

The Garo Master nodded. " Even now, you do not wish to kill me because it would mean me going back to the eternal slumber that has cradled me for ages, but do not grieve for one such as I. My time was in ages past so my existence here should not be. As a warrior on a mission, you must once again defeat me, chosen one. You must succeed or else all who have sacrificed themselves for you will forever torment your soul until the very gates of hell itself." He then drew out both of his flaming swords and I knew that there was no chance of trying to figure out a less violent solution. " Now... we shall fight once more."

" What do you think, Twilight?"

" You have to accept his challenge, Sunset." Twilight answered.

" I was afraid of that."

" Remember that you have a much stronger sword now than you did before." Twilight said. " The number of hits it will take to defeat him will be less now though you could cut that down using the Great Fairy's Sword though you would be more vulnerable without the Mirror Shield protecting you. I suspect the Garo Master possesses the same abilities from before so any surprise attacks are unlikely. It's strange how Midnight Sparkle didn't enhance him with her magic."

" You find that strange?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Maybe she either didn't want to try or she did and he resisted her efforts."

" Guess we should ask her when we get the chance."

" Yes, I suppose that's true."

The Garo Master then called out, his voice showcasing impatience. " Why do you continue talking to that little creature of yours, chosen one? Draw out your blade now and let us enjoy our final conflict or should I cut you down now thus proving you could not save those who needed it?"

I knew he was goading me into acting recklessly but I was much stronger than that. Okay... I'm still the reckless sort but even I knew not to act so stupid that I would become my own liability resulting in me dying almost instantly. Drawing out the Gilded Sword--I intended on using it first as a means of judging both the Garo Master and myself--from its scabbard and slinging my Mirror Shield onto my arm, I moved forward before immediately jumping to the left when the Garo Master dove at me. I couldn't tell whether he had increased his speed since last time but I almost got hit by those flaming swords of his.

Turning around, the Garo Master had seemingly disappeared though I remembered this particular technique. He would vanish for a few moments only to reappear right above me before coming down hard with his swords aiming downwards. Raising my shield above my head, I was able to parry his attacks resulting in him dancing about in the air. So far, things were going my way though I couldn't underestimate him. One who had an extensive history of killing as the Garo Master knew how best to wait for the right moment before cutting down his opponent in cold blood with a fatal blow.

He then dove down at me and I jumped to the left before I attempted to swing my sword. Quickly noticing my reaction, he disappeared--I cursed under my breath--before raising my shield in hopes of parrying his attack. Appearing from the ceiling, the Garo Master dropped down, his swords clashing against my shield, but then he swung around in circles knocking me onto my butt. I had completely forgotten that he could also use an attack like that. Getting back up on my feet, he danced about again before diving down again, though while I did avoid his attack by jumping left again, he chose not to disappear.

Instead, he came to a stop and began looking left and right as though he had no idea where I was. It then occurred to me that this was the one time where he would drop his guard allowing me to attack him before he could realize what had happened. Swinging my sword and connecting with his back, the Garo Master--his blood was green which was something I never noticed before until now--reeled back from the blow and responded by spinning in circles. I couldn't avoid this and got knocked down onto my butt again, the flames from his swords scorching my body though not as badly as I thought.

Dancing about again, the Garo Master dove at me which I avoided like before only this time he disappeared before he had finished and dropped down from above before I had the chance to raise my shield to deflect his blades. Both swords struck each of my shoulders causing me to drop onto one knee though I managed to keep a hold of my equipment as dropping them would have meant acknowledging my weakness in his eyes not to mention being at his mercy. I guessed his skills adapted depending on who he was fighting enabling him to come up with strategies on the fly and that meant I needed to adapt as well.

The Garo Master dove at me again and I decided to remain where I was rather than jump to the side. Just as he was about to make contact with me, I raised my shield to deflect his attack causing him to drop both of his swords where they scattered in different directions. Seizing upon this advantage, I struck him again using a jump attack and he reeled back as his blood gushed forth before he scrambled to pick up his blades. I could tell that he was getting exhausted though it could also be a ruse designed to make me lower my guard whilst he took advantage and cut me down in the confusion.

" Your blade cuts deep, chosen one."

" That's because my sword was re-forged into a stronger weapon."

" A blade can be as sharp as anything though it is useless in the hands of an inexperienced warrior."

" How do you view me?"

The Garo Master laughed. " You are a warrior, chosen one, but you are different from those that the Garo killed during the war in Ikana Kingdom. They fought valiantly and never once questioned their purpose or hesitated when it came to fighting."

" I'm my own person!"

" You are a reluctant warrior."

I knew that I was when it came to fighting. Throughout my entire life, the only thing I ever did was use magic when I was a unicorn, and attempt to pass myself off as a human upon my self-exile from Equestria by adapting my life to their mannerisms. As a bully, I proved to be very confrontational out of wanting to make sure my plans were never derailed by anyone who thought they could deny me what I wanted. After reforming, I chose to avoid getting myself involved in any conflicts because of having a volatile temper. I could lose it and lash out at anyone resulting in broken hearts and shattered friendships.

Fighting with swords, shields, and other items was something I never would have imaged I would do in my entire life-time. Equestria was a fantasy world where mythical creatures abound though there was never any fighting unless something serious occurred such as war. My journey in both Hyrule and Termina have opened me up to ideals I never would have considered before but at the same time I am reminded that I am not a lover of violence. Fighting was a necessity and nothing more. I would never love it like the Garo Master and doing so would be the ultimate act of betrayal against everything my life had become.

But, I also knew that I had to do things even when I didn't want to. I knew that I had to stop Majora's Mask and that meant killing monsters that were blocking my path. Huh... I sounded like a hypocrite sometimes because I would say one thing and contradict myself on something else later. Perhaps being under so much pressure made me utter lies and half-truths to myself without even realizing it. The Garo Master called me reluctant as a warrior and yet he was completely right about it. I am reluctant as I think things could be solved without fighting but he could never understand that as he was an assassin, one who killed without mercy and without a conscious guiding him.

Putting my sword and shield away, I switched over to the Great Fairy's Sword. " What do you make of this then?" I asked as I stumbled a little due to how heavy this sword truly was in comparison to the other one--I should have practiced with this one more often before using it in battle. " I can't allow this to drag on any longer than it already has so I have to end this now before time runs out and we all end up joining the dead."

The Garo Master laughed. " A gutsy maneuver if I ever saw one."

" I may be reluctant but I know when I need to get things moving."

" To use the blade of the Great Fairy is no simple feat."

I was surprised. " How do you know of the Great Fairy?"

" She has existed for centuries." The Garo Master answered. " She has existed since before the Ikana Kingdom was founded though she refused to do nothing and allowed the kingdom to become consumed by its own petty squabbles until nothing remained of it. I am glad that she chose to stay her hand as it meant I could kill as often as I wanted without fear of her getting in the way. But enough about that! If you wish to fight without defence then so be it."

" This next strike will finish you."

" But can you hit me?"

" Of course I can!"

The Garo Master laughed as he picked up his other sword and was ready to continue. " Remember what I said about how a sword is useless in the hands of one who is inexperienced in battle? Perhaps my words will ring true even now. You may wield a blade that has no equal but can you control its power? I suppose we shall find out in mere moments if you are genuine or merely false."

Jumping to the sky, the Garo Master began dancing about whilst I prepared myself with the Great Fairy's Sword. While I no longer could use my shield to deflect his attacks like before, I should do just fine so long as I don't lose my composure. He then dove at me with both swords and I jumped left only to discover that using the Great Fairy's Sword resulted in a sharp decrease in speed. He was able to knock me down onto my butt without even trying before coming to a stop off in the distance. I got back up onto my feet and tried to get over to him but he took to the sky and I lost my chance.

I knew using this sword would be difficult but I never imagined it would be like this. I had to wait for the right moment to strike even if it meant taking a necessary hit in the process to secure victory. No doubt Princess Twilight was going to scold me for taking such a reckless blow when this was over but she surely had to realize that I was trying to finish this before it could go too long and allow Midnight Sparkle to do whatever she was planning further ahead. If anything, I needed to focus on my current opponent whilst keeping her presence on the fringe of my mind.

The Garo Master dove at me again and I chose to jump a lot sooner to make up for the weight of my sword. I succeeded in avoiding him only for him to disappear which meant I was about to get attacked from above. Sure enough, he appeared right above me and dove straight down, his blades sinking into my shoulders again, and I dropped down to one knee whilst he took off again. Despite the damage I had taken, my body was relatively fine where I didn't feel the need to use a Red Potion--I definitely would when it came to the Iron Knuckle waiting for me somewhere up ahead in this place.

Diving, the Garo Master flew right past before disappearing and I immediately ran in a random directions in hopes of avoiding his next attack. He reappeared above moments later only to strike nothing as I had gotten out of the way. It appeared that when he performs his attack, he couldn't change directions nor cancel it until it was finished. I could use it to my advantage though I wished it was something I had used during the previous battle. The Garo Master took to the sky again and dove at me where I ran to the right--my sword slid along the ground making a rather annoying sound--and he stopped some distance before looking for me.

Knowing I couldn't get over to him on time, I waited for him to take to the sky, and when he did, I decided to stand still once again and allow him to attack me. I knew it was risky as he could easily kill me if one of his blades was to pierce my heart--or my eye or brain--but I had to hold my ground and end this now. The Garo Master dove down and struck, pushing me back, but I refused to get knocked down yet I did sustain more injuries in the process. He was surprised that I took the blow instead of dodging but before he could figure out what my intentions were, a swing of the Great Fairy's Sword was enough to defeat him.

Putting my sword away, I dropped to both knees. " Guess we answered that question, huh?"

Clutching his chest, the Garo Master laughed though it was painful for him. " You wielded that blade of the Great Fairy well, chosen one, though it was clear that you struggled against the weight it possessed."

" Guess it's time for you to go back to your eternal rest."

" I die without regrets knowing that I got to experience one last battle."

I knew what was coming next so I stepped back to avoid getting blasted. " Well, I won't stop you from ending your life."

" Once again, you have proven yourself worthy as my rival and for that you have proven spectacular despite your lack of wanting to kill." The Garo Master said. " Before I leave to return to the eternal sleep that beckons me, allow me to open up my heart and share my wisdom with you."

" What can you say that I wouldn't know?"

" About traps that lie ahead."

I blushed. " Oh."

" Ahead of you are decayed walls that look to be brittle." The Garo Master said. " A normal means of explosives will not work so you must use the unconventional. If you have the necessary item, the traps will not prevent you from reaching your goal but do not despair if you did not bring what is needed. There lies treasure ahead of what you need though few exist so use them wisely or else this journey ends."

I had an idea as to what he was saying but I needed more information. " What kind of item is it?"

The Garo Master laughed. " Do you think I would reveal something like that? The Garo may reveal some information out of respect but much we choose to take with us to the grave to prevent our enemies from learning our secrets. You must figure out my meaning on your own, chosen one." He reached behind his back, took out a bomb, lit it, and placed it down by his feet before looking up at me. " I have shared what I know so I shall end this by taking my final bow. Not once do I regret the choices I made in life even if they lead to a path filled with darkness. Die I shall, leaving no corpse for that is the law of the Garo."

With that, the bomb exploded, engulfing the Garo Master, and when the smoke cleared moments later, there was nothing left of him. In a way, I could understand why he chose not to reveal everything he knew. He had a duty that had transcended time--he made it a long time ago--and was determined not to go against it for the sake of his pride. But what was said was easy enough to figure out and I was fortunate I brought it along. His words vaguely referred to Bombchu, an item I had yet to use in this world, but why Ember would include puzzles that involved Bombchu remained a mystery. In any case, the puzzles weren't going to be an issue for me.

" I'm not surprised that you were able to overcome that assassin again." Midnight Sparkle said, her voice echoing about.

" So you were watching the entire time?" Twilight asked.

" I wasn't going to miss seeing Sunset get her butt kicked."

" Now I'm not surprised."

" I wanted Sunset to suffer a lot to the point where she would die." Midnight Sparkle said. " But, it seems that once again, she was either very lucky or somehow possessed the skill to overcome that creature though I attribute her success to the former as she clearly lacks skill given her performance."

" Then why don't you fight me yourself!" I shouted.

" You know I won't get my hands dirty if it means letting someone else have the fun."

I scratched my head. " That didn't make sense."

" Someone of my superior intellect should never have to get involved in a conflict." Midnight Sparkle said. " That is where underlings are necessary as they will take the brunt of the pain while those like me sit back and watch the entertainment. But, don't think that I am sick, depraved, or twisted just because I like to use others as pawns. You did the same thing yourself a long time ago, Sunset Shimmer. You used others to do your bidding while you took the glory for yourself. Now do my words make sense?"

I slowly nodded my head. I knew that I did horrible things when I was a bully but I eventually made up for my mistakes. I called out. " At least I corrected the mistakes I made enabling me to forge friendships for the first time in my life. Unlike you, Midnight Sparkle, you continue going down the same dark path that I once traversed and show no signs of truly understanding what it means to be a person, to be a human."

Midnight Sparkle laughed. " That's rich coming from a unicorn. Yes, I am aware of what you really are, Sunset. It was something Sunset Demon mentioned to me when we were travelling around this world together when we still desired to see our dreams become reality. At first, I questioned her words as the thought of a mythical creature changing into a human was ludicrous, but then the pieces started coming together and I realized that you were a pony from a magical world. I mean, it was obvious when I opened up those tears between this world and Equestria when I acquired my power but you can't blame me for taking a while to clue myself in."

" You'll never change!"

" Guess we have to agree to disagree then."

" With the Garo Master defeated, the doors have been unlocked so I am coming for you." I said. " I know that I shouldn't allow my temper to get the best of me but you've clearly pushed my buttons way too many times. I'm going to do what should have been done after you were defeated during the Friendship Games."

" And that would be?"

" Defeat you to the point where you never return."

" We'll see if you can back up your claim soon enough."

As Midnight Sparkle's voice disappeared, Princess Twilight looked at me with concern in her eyes. " You know what I am going to say to you next, Sunset, so please allow me the opportunity to speak my mind. I know you want to defeat Midnight Sparkle especially after everything she has done in the past but don't let hatred consume your heart. It would break my own heart if you resorted to such hatred."

I gently smiled whilst wincing a bit because of my shoulders. " I know, Twilight, but she can't be allowed to get away with what she's done. I was honestly hoping she would give up her ambition to acquire Equestrian Magic and simply live out her remaining time in peace yet clearly, she has refused this and instead is determined to succeed even if it means dying in the process."

" What do you mean by her 'remaining time'?"

" Judging from her current condition, I'd say she has maybe a few weeks left."

Princess Twilight's jaw dropped in amazement. " You can tell?"

I nodded. " After almost getting myself killed in similar situations during this ordeal and the last one, I know what it's like to be on the verge of death. Sunset Demon was in the same position when she appeared before me in Hyrule: a broken body, her power vastly drained from what it once was, and on death's doorstep. She could have lived out her remaining time without fighting but that's not what she did. She goaded Ganondorf--Lord Tirek at the time--resulting in her death before my eyes. Midnight Sparkle is going through that right now and is making the same mistake Sunset Demon made by thinking she can still be effective."

" I... I didn't know."

" If I can, I want to prevent Midnight Sparkle from suffering that fate." I said. " I want to see if I can get her to change her life with what little of it she has left. To see her die as a result of vying for her twisted desire would be just catastrophic so I'll do what I can in hopes she gets a peaceful resolution. If she is beyond saving, if there is nothing I can do, then I will have no choice but to do what I must."

" Whatever you decide to do, I'll be there to provide support."

It then occurred to me that I had no way of reaching the now unlocked door on the other side of the room. Where it was located was on a high-up ledge that I couldn't reach without using a ladder so at first, it looked like there was nothing I could but then a small treasure chest materialized at the ledge's edge. I knew I could use it to pull myself up there by latching onto it with the Hookshot yet why did it appear after my conversation with Midnight Sparkle instead of before? I thought it odd at best but then I never could figure out some of the more obvious tropes this world was known for.

Taking out the Hookshot and aiming it up at the chest, I fired the chain where it sank into the wood before pulling myself up to the upper ledge where I landed behind it. Turning around, I was about to kick it open when I realized that I needed to open it up from the other side. It wasn't really that big of a deal for me but it would have been nice had the chest materialized with the lid facing the door to save me a few seconds. Slowly moving around until I reached the other side, I kicked the chest open and took out thirty arrows. I was honestly expecting something else but I could always do with more arrows as their utility was immense in scope.

With that out of the way, I walked back around the chest, up to the door, and opened it to enter the next room. In here was another Gossip Stone staring at me though a powerful aura could be felt coming from the door before me. I knew that waiting for me on the other side was an Iron Knuckle and I couldn't delay any longer--I really didn't want to go any further out of fear that it would kill me--as I knew I had to continue for the sake of Termina. Before doing anything, I took out the Mask of Truth, placing it on my face, and placing my hand on the Gossip Stone to hear what it had to say.

It said: "It seems an animal mask that was popular with children long ago is being cherished by the owner of the suspicious shop..." I knew straight away that it was referring to the Keaton Mask that Tender Taps wore to conceal his identity so as to not let anyone close to him know he was still around. But... I didn't think that Iron Will of all people would cherish it given his questionable motives sometimes but he did say that he gave the mask to Tender Taps a long time ago by purchasing it from someone. Wow... I just realized I had completely misjudged him all because he dealt with thieves on a regular basis. Iron Will... I am sorry for my outburst during our initial encounter.

Putting the Mask of Truth away, I walked around the Gossip Stone and opened the door. Upon the iron bars closing down as I entered the room, I knew that I was going to be in for the fight of my life. Looking ahead, my entire body froze upon seeing the Iron Knuckle itself, and as I suspected, it looked different. Its golden armour had been replaced with red armour making it look enraged from head to toe but what was surprising was that it was missing its axe, the one part of the monster that was the worst part. Aside from that, it simply stood there like a statue but I knew it was a ruse designed to make me drop my guard.

Then I realized... the missing axe. I slapped my forehead. " You've got to be kidding me."

" Why did you slap your forehead?"

" It doesn't have its axe."

Princess Twilight breathed a sigh of relief. " And why is that a bad thing? Without that axe, there is no way it will be able to hurt you, Sunset, unless it could use its own body as a weapon though I personally doubt it can. This might turn out to be much simpler than expected thus your hesitancy towards this creature was completely unfounded and was a case of personal fear."

I shook my head. " No... It has its axe."

" Then we must be looking at two different things."

" All it needs to do is snap its fingers and an axe will appear in its hands."

" Well, that's one way of doing it I suppose."

" I can tell that Midnight Sparkle has already made alterations based on its colour alone." I said. " Normally, they either have gold armour, gold armour with white chest plating, or gold armour with black chest plating. This thing is red all over, a clear sign that she has enhanced its colour not to mention its power. I can sense the power coming from its body, Twilight, and I'm scared to death because it could potentially kill me with one blow were it to unleash that power."

" Seeing that look on your face is priceless." Midnight Sparkle said. I looked around to see where her voice was coming to no avail so then I looked up at the high-up ledge that housed the exit, and sure enough, she was standing up there though her condition had worsened. " You're right in that I've used what little dark magic remains in my body to strengthen this strange creature. It is now more powerful than ever before and its axe can crush your body to pieces if it wanted to. Unfortunately, I couldn't apply too many alterations as without magic and a strong enough body, there was only so much I could do."

" Why did you use what magic you had?" Twilight asked. " You could have used that to keep yourself alive until you could regain your strength."

" Keep it for myself?" Midnight Sparkle asked. " You must be joking. Why would I want to do something like that on a useless corpse?"

" No need to degrade yourself."

Sighing, Midnight Sparkle let go of her arm and more blood trickled down from it onto the ground by her feet. " I appreciate the sentimentality, Your Highness, but my body has been damaged far too much to allow me to continue going on. Think of me as merely ticking away my remaining moments until death eventually comes for me and takes me to the eternal rest that claimed Sunset Demon. That's why I wanted Sunset to suffer against that assassin! I had hoped to kill her with what little I have were she to be on death's watch yet she proved once again to have luck by surviving."

" You're going to die?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " I should have died when I was eaten by that insect but I couldn't rest until I finally settled the score with Sunset. That one desire is keeping my body alive and my rage burns bright despite my own life slowly snuffing itself out. I know what you were thinking about, Sunset. You thought you could convince me to change and live out a peaceful existence, but like I said, I have nothing left now. I know I'm right so there's no need to say I was lying."

" Then I guess what I said to you earlier was wrong." I said.

" It was a spur of the moment for you."

" You could still stop all of this you know."

" Yes, I could but I won't because that isn't who I am." Midnight Sparkle said. " If you want to fight against me, Sunset Shimmer, you must first overcome this creature. You don't have to worry about me running away as I'm not going to be doing that anymore. I'll be waiting in the next room and shall return when either it has killed you or you have killed it in a fight where one shall die and one shall live. By the way, I wanted this to be more interesting so before you start, why not take out that re-forged sword. Go on... Take it out and swing your sword about for the fun of it."

I knew something was wrong as she was being very calm about but I also knew that I was in no position to argue with her. She may not have had the power to kill me but that wasn't the case with the Iron Knuckle. Reaching for my sword, I grabbed the hilt and tried pulling it only to discover that I couldn't get it to budge. I tried again thinking I didn't have a firm grasp and it didn't budge. I tried several more times to pull it out yet it proved pointless so I gave up. Grabbing the Great Fairy's Sword, I pulled it out effortlessly and it was immediately evident that Midnight Sparkle had both helped and hindered me.

" You... You've locked me into using one sword."

" I watched you use it against that assassin." Midnight Sparkle said. " While it does have a lot of power, you struggle to move about because of its weight so I figured on giving you a disadvantage by forcing you to use it here in this fight. But, the one drawback is that you have access to a powerful weapon. This creature was only enhanced in terms of power but its defences haven't changed. In other words, you can kill it quick enough but it can do the same."

Now that was something completely unexpected. In a way, it was like Midnight Sparkle wanted me to succeed against the Iron Knuckle so that she could get the pleasure of finishing me off herself before she would die from her weakened state. On the other hand, she desired my death and making this monster stronger physically would definitely do that. As she walked backwards, opened the door, and went through before it closed again, I braced myself for what was about to come my way. Realizing it didn't have its weapon after checking both its hands, the Iron Knuckle snapped its finger causing an axe to materialize above its head.

Grabbing it and rattling its body as a means of intimidation, the Iron Knuckle walked towards me slowly--at least its walking speed hadn't been enhanced--whilst I in turn walked towards it with the Great Fairy's Sword raised across my body to serve as a kind of shield. When I got close enough, the Iron Knuckle lurched forward, slamming its axe down on the ground and I got knocked back into the door, my back slamming into the iron bars. As I got back onto my feet, it was clear that it acted like it did when its armour was knocked off, yet why was it doing that now when its armour was still intact? Was this what Midnight Sparkle meant in terms of enhancement?

Not only did it do that but I felt the full force of the blow despite having enhanced defence from the Great Fairy of Courage. I really could get killed in a few hits so I had to pick and choose when to attack the armour or else I would be writing my own death sentence. The Iron Knuckle lifted up its axe and began walking slowly towards me again and since there were no columns I could hide behind, there was no where I could be safe and plan a countermeasure. It got close this before swinging back and forth in an erratic manner--I barely managed to avoid losing more than some hair--and I attempted to strike after the second swing.

Boy, was that ever a mistake. The Iron Knuckle raised its axe with both hands on either end of the hilt and succeeded in parrying my attack much to my dismay. I couldn't believe it managed to do something like that using just an axe but then this was why it was a brutal opponent. Before I had a chance to try again, it slammed its axe down upon lurching forward and again I got knocked into the door with my back hitting the iron bars. Already, things weren't going well and no doubt Midnight Sparkle was enjoying seeing me get destroyed from the safety of the next room.

Getting back up and moving away from the door, I wasn't surprised at seeing blood trickling down from my chest and arms. Luckily, the wounds weren't too severe so I could afford to take one more hit before needing to use a Red Potion, but would it give me enough time to consume one or choose to kill me so as to prevent me? I needed another tactic to distract so I began thinking about my previous encounters with the Iron Knuckle. Most items were useless against it but perhaps I could use some explosives to get the job done? Not even heavy armour was safe from the power of a bomb... I hoped.

Putting my sword away, I tried to seeing if I could take out a bomb, but to my shock, they were also stuck. Midnight Sparkle must have known I would try to use a different tactic so she made sure that I couldn't use bombs to make this fight even easier. Then I remembered I still had Bombchu which were mobile bombs but harder to control and more than likely to veer off course to who-knew-where until it exploded of its own accord. I reached behind my back and prayed before taking one out much to my surprise. Of course! I could only use my unique items!

" What are you doing?" Twilight asked.

" Using a Bombchu."

" But we need those for later."

" Remember that you insisted on me purchasing some from the Bomb Shop before we got here."

" Oh that's right."

" Hopefully, this will actually find its mark and do some damage to that armour otherwise I'm really in trouble." The Iron Knuckle then swung back and forth quickly catching me on the second switch though I got thrown to the other side of the room and away from the door. " Crap! Had it chosen to use its other attack, I would have been sliced in two not to mention get blasted by my own Bombchu." Getting back up--it proved difficult due to taking so much damage--and wobbling about, I dropped the Bombchu on the ground where it went forward and exploded upon hitting the Iron Knuckle.

" Did it work?"

I took my sword back out thinking that my plan didn't work but to my surprise, its armour suffered some slight dents. " How about that? I actually did something though I was expecting more than just scuffing its armour."

" I suspect that using Bombchus will take a long time on account that the Iron Knuckle must have explosive resistant armour."

I slapped my forehead. " Of course it would have that."

" Midnight Sparkle probably didn't add that little caveat did she?"

I nodded my head. " The only thing she did was enhance its physical strength. Its resistant to most items is part of its own natural abilities though it does become more vulnerable once its armour has been removed. Speaking of which, I wonder if it will become even more powerful when I remove the armour?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I honestly have no idea, Sunset. While using Bombchu has proven to be a lucrative means of fighting back, it will simply take way too long before you can remove the armour, and you don't have enough potions to drag out this fight especially since we still have Majora's Mask to deal with. You'll have to either use the one potion or defeat the Iron Knuckle whilst currently in a bleeding mess. I'd rather you heal your wounds but with an upcoming opponent we know nothing about, conserving healing items would be the best course of action."

" Guess it's back to using the sword."

" Don't forget that we still have Midnight Sparkle left."

" This is getting ridiculous!"

" You get used to it."

I knew Princess Twilight was being sarcastic given that she had been through much worse than what I had experienced given Equestria faced threats from power-hungry villains on a regular basis but she didn't really need to act in such a manner. The truth is that I had to endure torment--it's what Ganondorf wanted me to experience--until this journey had reached its conclusion so complaining about it wouldn't do me any good. As much as it pissed me off, this was my fate so my only choice was to suck it up and be a warrior, a reluctant warrior, but a warrior nonetheless.

Taking out the Great Fairy's Sword again, I moved back as fast as I could just as the Iron Knuckle slammed its axe into the ground. This was the only time where it lowered its guard enabling me to attack its armour in hopes of removing it but because my sword was so heavy, my movements were sluggish so I needed to be next to it practically to be able to strike it before it would resume moving. I then thought about around until I was behind it but I remembered it could turn around in an instant, swinging its axe in a deadly curve, and potentially slicing me in two horizontally effectively killing me. No... I had to wait for the exact moment.

When it raised its axe, the Iron Knuckle swung it left and right when I got closer--I wasn't too close as that would have been painful--but I knew that for it to swing its axe, I had to get close enough but my sword makes moving difficult. I thought about putting my sword down, moving in then quickly move back, pick it up, and attack upon the Iron Knuckle responding to my advance, yet I shook my head knowing the axe would knock me back forcing me to scramble to get my sword thus leaving me helpless for a moment. Sighing, I stepped forward and waited for the Iron Knuckle to make its move.

It chose to slam its axe on the ground but it only grazed me instead of inflicting a fatal wound. Again, I cursed the fact that I could only use the Great Fairy's Sword but I then had a thought on how I could use this to my advantage. One thing I hadn't used often enough was the jump attack which inflicted twice the damage. Given that my current weapon was stronger than anything else, one jump attack would be devastating to all but the strongest of monsters. Yet, my speed was hindered because of the weight of the sword so I needed to strike just as its axe connected with the ground. This was going to be nothing short of a miracle.

The Iron Knuckle swung its axe back and forth whilst I kept my distance and when I got close enough, I quickly jumped back--my sword clanging along the ground making an ear-piercing scraping sound that made me want to rip my hair out--just as its axe slammed into the ground. In that brief moment, I performed a jump attack and to my surprise, its armour fell off exposing its weak point though I knew it would now fly into a frenzy. At first, the Iron Knuckle didn't know what to make of its sudden loss in armour but it soon resumed attacking by running at a brisk pace before lurching forward even further and smashing my body with its axe.

My entire body felt like it had just gotten ravaged because of the severity of the blow. Luckily, it wasn't enough to kill me--had I been a smidgen of an inch closer it would have been instant death--yet it was enough to send me flying into a wall before I slumped down and landed face-first. Princess Twilight didn't need to say anything as she knew I was gushing forth blood at a rapid pace but then this was why I had Red Potions on hand to prevent myself from succumbing to severe injuries. Reaching behind my back, I took out a Red Potion but quickly had to get up and move as the Iron Knuckle ran up and swung its axe back and forth.

Putting away my sword again, I ran across the room whilst clutching my chest in hopes of preventing too much blood from gushing forward, and I uncorked the bottle before consuming its contents. Already, the magic began taking affect and the blood stopped flowing though the wounds would take some time to heal properly. It didn't matter as I could now continue but I knew I couldn't afford to waste another potion as I needed them for what was my true opponent. Putting the now empty bottle away behind my back and turning towards the Iron Knuckle whilst drawing my sword, I waited for it to get close enough so that I could strike.

" What are you doing?"

" I'm taking the fight to it now."

" Are you crazy!?" Twilight exclaimed. " I know that it's more vulnerable now without that armour protecting its weak point but you'll still get heavily damaged should you get hit by its axe again. Why not switch back to the Bombchu and just continue using them until it goes down? Sunset? Sunset are you listening to me?" It was clear to Her Highness that I was in my own world listening to my own advice on how to deal with the situation.

" I'm listening."

" It doesn't look like it to me."

Despite my sword weighing me down, swinging it about was surprisingly easy. I swung it and the Iron Knuckle responded by using the hilt of its axe to parry my blow. " I knew it was going to do that." I then began swinging repeatedly in hopes of connecting yet it continued parrying each blow perfectly. I wasn't annoyed but rather impressed it could maintain its composure especially when my attack was predictable. " Looks like hitting it from the front is no good."

" This was your plan?"

I nodded. " I figured it would parry my blows."

" What surprises me is that you're actually parrying with it." Twilight said. " The Iron Knuckle is supposed to be stronger than usual thanks to Midnight Sparkle's enhancements yet you act like nothing really changed. If anything, the first time you attempted this should have resulted in your sword breaking or at least cracking in places. Maybe what she did wasn't as strong as she let us believe meaning you can win with a well-placed jump attack."

" I didn't think of it like that."

" Midnight Sparkle is barely holding on and is using whatever magic she still has." Twilight said. " Her enhancements to this monsters must have been in the form of its colour being changed and the axe blade itself being more powerful. On its own it's still just an Iron Knuckle but with a new colour scheme. I wish that I had noticed this before but didn't until you started doing this parrying assault. If you can swing your sword at just the right time, you could disrupt its momentum and follow up with a jump attack to finish it off."

" Assuming the weight doesn't get to me."

" All you can do is try."

" Sorry if you thought I wasn't listening."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " No... I need to remember that you are capable of making your own choices, Sunset. You always turn to me for guidance and even though I enjoy helping you out, I've learned that you can achieve anything just by relying on personal instincts. I'll always help out as that is what friends do but I know when it's best to allow my student to go on their own and I apply a hands-off approach towards their studying."

I didn't mean to make Princess Twilight upset but I had to focus on defeating the Iron Knuckle with the skills I had learned throughout both journeys. While Her Highness only wanted to make sure I didn't do anything stupid, the realization is that I had been doing this kind of thing long before she became aware of it. I personally didn't enjoy the fighting aspects of this life style but the exploration and meeting new versions of people from the world I called home--also Equestria--made up for it. I also loved using all these items yet I wished some had more practical uses than others but I supposed they were designed that way to prevent someone from abusing them.

Focusing back on the Iron Knuckle, I continued to swing my sword in hopes of connecting yet it continued to parry my blows using the hilt of its axe. I couldn't keep doing this forever though I could tire out where as it could keep on going for eternity. I then tried adjusting the angle of my swing in hopes of disrupting its momentum long enough for me to use one quick jump attack before it knew what was happening. Unfortunately, the monster figured out my plan and slammed its axe down resulting in me sustaining heavy damage before getting thrown across the room, landing hard on my back and coughing up spit.

Getting back up--I wouldn't be right now if not for the Red Potion--I looked at Princess Twilight and she smiled indicating that I needed to keep doing what I was doing in hopes of defeating the Iron Knuckle though it looked like it wasn't going to end well if it succeeded in hitting me like that a few more times. Smacking both sides of my face before picking up my sword, I walked towards it and swung as hard as I could but again it parried my blow using that hilt. I had no intention of going through another pointless exchange where I would sustain more heavy damage so I jumped back before performing a jump attack.

Again, the Iron Knuckle parried my blow though it was pushed back a little due to the force behind it. That was the momentum I was looking for so I followed up with another jump attack that connected resulting in it gushing forth blood but not enough to defeat it. I honestly thought my blow would be enough but the Iron Knuckle proved to be resilient whether it was protected or not. I didn't want to take anymore chances so before it could get up let alone react, I struck it again by swinging my sword horizontally and that ended up being the final hit I needed much to my sweet relief.

Dropping its axe on the ground, the Iron Knuckle then fell to its knees in agony before burning away to nothing. The door on the upper ledge then unlocked along with the one behind me followed by a small treasure chest materializing in front of me yet nothing else happened leaving me wondering how I was supposed to progress. Looking around to see if I had missed anything, I noticed a Gossip Stone on each side of the door so I knew to use the Mask of Truth to listen to what they had to say but it still didn't give me any answers, but upon checking out the walls and ceiling, my eyes caught something most unexpected.

" Look at that up there." I said as I pointed up at the wall.

Princess Twilight looked in the direction I was pointing at. " That part of the wall is cracked... the decayed walls that the Garo Master was talking about." She then floated back and forth in deep though until she reached a conclusion. It's a good thing you brought those Bombchu along otherwise we wouldn't be able to continue. If you place that on the ground at just the right moment, it should blow up that crack in the wall upon reaching it. This might require a few attempts to get the timing down but you've got enough Bombchu for roughly thirty or so attempts."

" Do you think there could be a switch behind it?"

" Most likely which would explain why you got arrows earlier."

" I should open that chest first."

" If it contains any more Bombchu, it will give you some extra attempts."

Walking over to the chest, I kicked it open and took out ten Bombchu. " I guess the chests were meant to provide me with the means to solve the puzzles Ember mentioned but it seems a little pointless as I brought along more than enough."

" Perhaps it was meant to be for those who didn't think to plan ahead."

" Maybe..."

Princess Twilight sighed. " It's probably best not to think about it now, Sunset. You've got enough ammunition to solve this puzzle so unless you were clueless as to what you need to do--and I know you're not--this will be easy."

Looking at the crack's location, I could either have the Bombchu travel in front of me and up the wall before exploding or I could place it behind me and have it go across the ceiling and let it explode that way. Both options were correct resulting in the crack being broken but I didn't want to have to waste any more time than absolutely necessary. Thinking it over for a few moments, I decided it would be best to go with the first option of having it travel along the ground. Before taking one out, I made sure to get as close to the wall behind me as possible so that the Bombchu had enough distance or else it would explode before reaching its target.

Taking out a Bombchu, I placed it on the ground and watched as it began moving. Unfortunately, I had no control of it once it went off so hopefully it would stay the course instead of going in a completely different direction. To my dismay, the Bombchu went off at a weird angle on the wall and went straight to the left until it exploded moments later. Stomping my foot due to not positioning myself properly, I took out another one and placed it on the ground before it went on its way. This one stayed straight and up the wall where it exploded and revealed an eye switch.

Switching over to the Hero's Bow, I nocked a regular arrow and fired it at the switch, hitting it, resulting in a ladder appearing behind the treasure chest. Putting the bow away, I was about to make my way over but stopped upon seeing Midnight Sparkle standing before me. She must have entered the room while I was focused on destroying that crack and because of how low her dark aura was, I didn't even sense her presence. I knew she was annoyed that I had once again survived something she had thrown at me but I also knew she couldn't do much else as the last vestiges of her magic went away upon the Iron Knuckle's defeat.

" Seeing you standing there isn't surprising." Midnight Sparkle said.

" That enhancement you made almost killed me but I managed to use a Red Potion to heal my wounds." I said.

" Using resources is key to achieving success."

" Look... I don't want to kill you..." I began. " I know you've caused me nothing but misery since that stunt you pulled back at the Stone Tower Temple but if I were to end your way as you are now, it would leave a foul taste in my mouth not to mention bring back old memories of how I would have relished in it. Why not do us both a favour and just leave? I have more important things to do than deal with a demon who can barely keep standing."

Midnight Sparkle shook her head. " I can't leave until I kill you."

I rubbed the bridge of my nose. " Don't be so stubborn! I'm serious here! Go out on your own terms and with your head held high. Sure, that doesn't make much sense since you're a demon and all but at least it would be much better than dying on your own in the cold without embracing the warmth that is life."

" Enchanting that creature used just about the last bit of energy I had left."

" So now you're completely powerless."

" I didn't specify what kind of energy it was."

It took me a moment to figure out her meaning. " You used your own life force!?"

Midnight Sparkle nodded. " My remaining dark power wasn't enough to strengthen that creature so I tapped into my own life-force. Sure, the end results weren't to my liking as you're still alive but you struggled to overcome it resulting in you wasting precious resources. Besides, my life isn't going to last much longer anyway so why prolong the inevitable and just go down in blaze of glory?"

" What are you planning?" Twilight asked.

" Even though I am the demonic version of Twilight Sparkle, she still possesses the same love of knowledge that you have, princess." Midnight Sparkle answered. " My own magic was just as powerful as yours if not greater so you should know what my answer is."

Princess Twilight lowered her head. " So you're really willing to go through with it?"

" I am."

Turning toward me, I could see the look in Princess Twilight's eyes. " Sunset?"

" What is it?" I asked.

" Better brace yourself."

" For what?"

" You're about to find out."

I looked at Midnight Sparkle and was shocked to see her forming some kind of magical force in her hands. She then laughed as the force continued to increase in size while she continued growing weaker with every passing second. " Her Highness figured that I am going to use only one blast of magic against you, Sunset. I'm using the last of my life force to hit you with everything I've got. It doesn't matter whether you survive this or not! This is my way of going out in my own manner without anyone pushing me around. Sunset Demon... Looks like I'm going to be joining you soon enough. My chances of pulling through are zero percent."

" Don't do it!"

" It's too late."

I had no time to switch out the Great Fairy's Sword for both the Gilded Sword and Mirror Shield as Midnight Sparkle soon unleashed what could be best described as her final gambit in hopes of ending my life. Knowing that this magical blast would be fatal if it were to hit me, I raised my sword up like a shield and the blast collided against it. I had hoped to either knock it aside or push it back against her but it was too strong for me to do either so I remained in a defensive position. For a time, it looked like her power would break my sword but then I suddenly got completely overwhelmed and consumed by her power.

Moments later, I slowly got back onto my feet. It felt like I had gotten hit by several semi-trucks at the same time repeatedly yet once again I had survived against what Midnight Sparkle had thrown against me. That's when I immediately walked over to where she had stood before unleashing her power and was saddened to see that her body had broken down so much, there was nothing I could do to save her at this point. If she were a machine, Midnight Sparkle would be leaking oil everything because her body was bleeding profusely.

" You did it."

Lifting her head, Midnight Sparkle responded. " If you and your friends had never thwarted my efforts back in your world and here, I would have succeeded in learning everything there is to know about Equestrian Magic. I wanted to understand it because knowledge was what I craved more than anything else but it looks like that desire will never be fulfilled now as my body is breaking down. Thinking about it now, had you chosen to remain a villainous she-demon, the events that followed would never have happened and I wouldn't even exist. In a sense, your decisions resulted in my coming to be."

" I made mistakes, yes, but I worked hard to fix them."

" Ha... You're better a heroine than... a villain."

" It's because I accepted the Magic of Friendship."

Midnight Sparkle cringed when I said that. " Friendship... I never understood the concept of that since Twilight Sparkle didn't have anyone... other than Spike. She preferred to remain alone with her thoughts... as it meant not getting harassed by her peers... but I guess my existence is... a reflection of that along with representing her... truest desires of wanting payback against those... who wronged her. But... None of that matters now. I gave you everything... I had, Sunset, so I've no regrets... yet I wished I had killed you with it. Once again... your luck saved you."

" You should've just lived out your remaining time in peace."

" Guess you could... say that I'm... stubborn just like you."

" You should stop talking now." I said. " You're struggling to speak properly."

" It doesn't matter... Sunset." Midnight Sparkle said as she coughed up blood. " I'm going to die... shortly so why keep silent? Living a peaceful existence is... just not what I am capable of doing as... after all I am... a demonic monster so peace goes... against what I believe to be true. Had I gone with your suggestion... I would have died without ever knowing... personal bliss all because you... wanted me to embrace life."

" What are you saying?"

" I wouldn't have been able to rest."

" Huh?"

" Had I lost... my life to... you, I wouldn't have... been able to rest... in the afterlife." Midnight Sparkle said, her life leaving her body rapidly. " Know that you... aren't finished when it... comes to E... E... Equestrian Magic... S... Sun... Sunset. I can... s... sense that you will have... to... to... deal with those who... use it... when... they shouldn't. It is... sure... to cause nothing but... stress resulting... in... in... you questioning your... wo... wo... worth."

" I'll take my chances."

" Then... I guess... this is where... I... I finally say... goodbye." Midnight Sparkle said. " I... I may disappear in the... physical plane... but... I will continue on... existing... within the... sub... sub... subconscious of... Tw................................."

Stepping back and lowering my head out of respect, Midnight Sparkle closed her eyes and her body slowly burned away to nothing leaving behind an outline. While I felt sad knowing she had finally perished, I couldn't give her the same dues that I gave to Sunset Demon as the former committed actions that were horrendous beyond what words could describe about them. Perhaps in another life, her fate would have been different. Knowing there was nothing more I could do around here, I climbed up the ladder, took out the Mask of Truth, put it on my face, and placed my hand on the Gossip Stone to the left of the door.

It said: "It seems the girl who smells of the ranch has a mask that only adults have..." I knew this stone was talking about Romani's Mask though it was Applejack who gave out the mask to those who proved themselves worthy to be adults, not Apple Bloom despite being named after the ranch--the Termina version of her. Despite being old enough, I appreciated the acknowledgment. I then walked over to the other stone to see what it would say. Placing my hand on it, it said: "He who plays music as he travels about seems to have a mask that animals follow obediently..."

I knew it was referring to the Bremen Mask seeing as I gave it to Ember to be able to come here. What Discord did to get his hands on it was deceitful but at least his conscious was clear since he confessed with me being his witness. Taking the mask off and putting it away, I opened the door and entered the next room to see that a Piece of Heart was waiting for me along with another Gossip Stone. However, the door ahead of me was locked so something needed to be done here so that I could continue. Looking at each wall, I found nothing out of place but when I looked up at the ceiling, I could see what needed to be done.

First, I grabbed the Piece of Heart, restoring my health and healing my wounds as the warmth embraced me once more. Then I walked over to the Gossip Stone, took out the Mask of Truth, and placed my hand on it and it spoke. "She who is troubled by cold and hunger seems to have a mask that gathers voices to sing..." If only I had used it when I had the chance, I could have seen something amazing, but Don Gero's Mask became nothing but extra baggage necessary for the ultimate mask Starlight had in her possession. Taking off my mask and putting it away, I turned towards solving this puzzle.

As this was a small room, I needed to position myself at just the right angle to destroy a cracked wall which was on the ceiling. Standing in the middle of the room, I took out a Bombchu, placed it on the ground, and watched as it travelled along before going up the wall then the ceiling only to miss its target and explode a short distance away. That could have gone better so I decided to move closer to the wall behind me and see if I could go with a diagonal approach. Taking out another Bombchu, I chose to wait for a couple of seconds before putting it down and letting it go.

It went up the wall and onto the ceiling before exploding though it barely managed to remove the cracked section due to nearly missing the target. Behind the crack was a frozen eye switch--I didn't think it would be frozen--so I took out my bow, loaded a Fire Arrow, and carefully aimed up before firing. The ice melted away instantly which also allowed the switch to be activated and unlocked the door. Walking up to the door, I opened it and entered the next room where Ember was standing before me this time. Finally, I managed to reach her after going through so much torment.

" Didn't think you would make it." Ember said.

I dropped to my knees. " You have no idea what I went through."

" Actually, I was watching everything from back here." Ember said. " Those were the best fights I've ever seen especially with that really strong monster that was enhanced by that demonic creature who decided to butt in. Since she made things all the more interesting, I'm not mad that she got involved. Besides, it gave you quite the workout though I can't hope to understand what you must be going through due to that demon ending her life. I wasn't expecting it so you have my condolences if nothing more."

" I don't blame you for that."

" You showed humility as well as strength."

" I've always been told that I needed more humility."

Ember laughed. " Not sure what has to do with kicking some serious butt but you overcame my challenges. If this was one of those boring hide-and-seek games, I'd say that you found me, but now it's time for me to get serious. I know you still have more masks so hand them over or else you won't be credited for winning. I know you just experienced an emotional moment which is sure to scar you but I've got things to do and being here ain't one."

" You really are aggressive, aren't you?"

" What can I say?" Ember asked. " I just enjoy showing off my dominance."

While I wanted to scold her for acting like an immature brat, I knew I couldn't afford to offend her especially when I was so close to getting the ultimate mask. Since I only had four more masks left, it was just a matter of seeing which one would get pulled out first. Reaching behind my back, I took out the Stone Mask, what I acquired by making Sugar Belle less conspicuous so she could be seen again. I wished I had used it more often so as to avoid monsters but I never knew which of them were unaffected by its magic. The next that I took out was the Great Fairy's Mask. Without this, none of the Great Fairy's would have been restored and I wouldn't have gotten their help.

Next mask was Kafei's Mask, a mask that allowed me to undertake what was the longest side-quest I've ever been involved with. Sure, most people in Clock Town didn't want to tell me anything about Tender Taps because they thought I was grilling them for information--that was my intention--yet Scootaloo proved genuine though she needed the right motivation first. All that remained was the Mask of Truth, that which I had been using throughout these caves to learn all I could. While clearing out that spider infested house in the swamp proved difficult, it was worth doing it.

" There you go."

" Sweet! I'll make good use of these."

" Those were my last masks."

" And that means you fulfilled each of our wishes." Ember said. " We didn't think you would be willing to just hand over your masks. Nope, we thought we needed to pay you or something but you gave them to us without any fuss though you did show some hesitation at first. Doesn't it make you feel good knowing that you've made us children happy? It should otherwise this whole thing was a waste of our time."

" So what happens now?"

" You dodged what I said. Don't ignore it! Answer it!"

I gulped. " Those masks were earned through difficult means but then I suppose giving them to those who needed them did make me feel warm inside. Granted, I didn't use some at all while others a few times making me wish I had used them more often. You never know to appreciate something until its gone and by then it's too late as you'll never get another chance to get it again."

Ember laughed. " You're pretty cool after all. Before I send you back to where you need to go, I've got one more question to ask you and you'd better answer it. I'm not going to let you leave until you give me an honest answer. Your true face... What kind of face is it? Every time you wear a mask, is that your true underneath it?"

I shook my head. " I'm not going to lie to you. While I look like this most of the time, my true form is that of a pony, a unicorn to be precise. My true face has a muzzle and a horn and everything else associated with being a pony."

" Wow... I didn't expect that."

" Now you know."

" You answered my question honestly so you're free to go back." Ember said. " I had a blast hanging out with you and watching you fight but now it's time for me to disappear but maybe we'll meet each other again someday. There's no point in me telling you what you need to do next as I think it's pretty obvious. See ya!"

Everything went white as I blacked out yet I knew what Ember was talking about. There was now only one child left and she was the one sitting at the base of the tree, Starlight, or rather, Majora's Mask, who was most likely furious with me over how every other child had disappeared leaving her all alone. The time had come for me to finally face off against this evil force and defeat it and save Termina from its insidious damage. Fortunately, I had enough potions to see me through this upcoming fight though I was worried I might have needed more bottles given I had five and I felt like I had missed a couple along the way.

Upon returning to the moon--I was back at the start once again which infuriated me--I began making my way towards Starlight. Along the way, I checked my inventory one last time to see what I had on hand. Everything seemed in good order aside from the fact that all of my masks were gone except for the transformation masks. Would they even be useful in a fight against an evil mask? That was probably the weirdest thing about all of this. I was going to be fighting a mask, an ordinary looking mask that is worn on one's fact. I knew Majora's Mask was different given it could talk but still it was pretty unusual.

" Are you ready for this, Sunset?" Twilight asked.

I shook my head. " Not really."

" How come?"

" I'm just nervous because this is the end of the journey."

Princess Twilight looked at me with a puzzled expression. " Wasn't our aim to restore this world back to what it's supposed to be? If you don't defeat Majora's Mask, the world you call home will forever be stuck like this.

I sighed. " A part of me wants this to keep on going for as long as possible, Twilight."

" What!?"

" Don't think me as a fool for saying this but, this journey and my last one had me experience fantasy, monsters, and exploration." I said. " Those were the kinds of things I used to do back in Equestria before I left. Now that I've gotten to experience them again, I feel conflicted about it. I know we need to fix things but at the same time I'd love to be able to do this more often because I've gotten a real kick out of it."

" You should consider coming back to Equestria sometime."

" Twilight... You know I can't... Not yet at least."

" I know."

" But, I will return to the land of my birth when I feel ready."

Princess Twilight smiled. " When that time comes, let me know and I will have a room prepared for you at my castle. I understand how you feel about doing all of this adventuring and not wanting to stop yet you and I both know that this world isn't supposed to exist in this manner. We have to change everything back as who knows what might happen if it were to remain this way? I'm not familiar with the magic Ganondorf uses so anything is possible. Maybe some day, you'll have a chance to go on another adventure where you will be tested, but for now, we must fix this for the greater good."

I nodded. " You're right as always, Twilight."

As much as I wanted for this to continue--strange coming from me given all I had endured--I knew that this world had to be changed back to the way it was supposed to be but first I had to not only deal with Majora's Mask, I also had to deal with Starlight and quite possibly Ganondorf when everything was all said and done. I definitely feared the latter because he would likely test me once again just because he enjoyed making me suffer. Shaking my head, I realized I needed to focus on Majora's Mask first as it was the immediate threat. I'll focus on dealing with Ganondorf when the proper time comes.

Upon approaching the tree--yet again--I stopped upon seeing Starlight looking at me. " Everyone has gone away, haven't they?"

I nodded. " Yes, I'm afraid so."

" You made them go away."

" They left of their own accord."

" But, you played their games and they left because you were finished with them."

" I'm sorry if I made you feel miserable."

" You should be." Starlight said. " But, I have been thinking about this for a while. Despite you making them go away, you might be able to fill the void they left. While I would prefer to be left alone and not have to deal with the likes of you, I really do want someone to play with me. It's been so long that I've forgotten what it feels like. So... I will ask you this question only once. Will you... Play with me?"

My brain wanted me to refuse but my heart wanted me to continue. I nodded upon agreeing with my heart. " Yes, I will play with you."

" I am happy to hear that."

" Shall we begin?"

Starlight shook her head. " Oh dear... You don't seem to have any masks left to share. While you were sharing them with the others, I thought of you as being weak and that opinion would have retained its meaning had I played a game with you beforehand." She then got up onto her feet but kept her distance. " But, the only masks I can sense in your possession are the ones that contain the spirits of those who died. I cannot play with one who only has masks like that so let's try something else. We will still play, of course, but in a different manner than what I originally considered."

" What did you have in mind?"

" Let's play a game of good guys versus bad guys."

" How does that work?"

Starlight turned her back towards me and was looking for something but I couldn't see what it was. When she turned back to face me, she was holding in her hands, a mask that bore a striking resemblance to my own face yet had slightly different colours and weird markings. " Those masks of yours with the spirits are impressive but if you were to use them, I wouldn't have any fun and neither would you so I am giving you this mask instead." She then handed it over to me and I held it in my hands. " Some call it the ultimate mask but such a name is stupid when its true name, the Fierce Deity's Mask, is much more intimidating."

" I sense a great power within it."

" It is a mask that contains the spirit of a warrior who relied on the darkness to overcome her enemies though some say she wasn't entirely human." Starlight said. " Whoever wears it will become a demonic version of themselves but have full control over their actions. You could say that it's power is pure evil but who is to say really? To play with me, you must put on that mask at least once though you are free to take it of and never use it again once we get started. Once you put it on, I assure you that you appreciate what it can really do. I will give you a moment to let it all sink in since most have never seen this mask before aside from that strange woman who collects masks. She once wielded it for a time."

As soon as she said that, something in my memory suddenly came up to the surface. I remembered an incident during my previous journey where I was awakening the Six Sages trapped in the temples across Hyrule. I was heading towards the Water Temple when I came upon Sonata who said she had given something to Daring Do, who lived by Lake Hylia, and the latter was doing some research on the lake's water before switching over to what she had been given. I mulled over it for a while before concluding that Sonata had given her the very mask I now held in my hands. I also remembered Daring Do telling me about its name and how it looked just like me.

This was the mask they had been both been talking about yet how did Starlight get her hands on it? I thought this to be one immense coincidence that started long ago but had finally culminated right here and now. If not for Starlight bringing up Sonata, I never would have had this memory come back after all this time. The Fierce Deity's Mask, from what I could remember about its description, was an ancient mask whose evil power was so strong, most ended up losing themselves to it. Only one who possessed a willpower stronger than most mere mortals could utilize the power it contained.

The ultimate mask... Now I understood why Adagio was so cryptic about it. She couldn't reveal too much because the power within the mask was too great for her to think about without feeling tremendous guilt over revealing its existence to me. Those who were deemed weak were corrupted by but what did that mean for me? I thought myself as pretty strong but maybe I was only fooling myself? What if I were truly weak like so many others and that wearing this mask would make me into everything I used to be yet so much worse? It was a gamble I could only hope would be in my favour...

" You want me to wear it?"

Starlight nodded. " You must because then we will both be on an even playing field. Now then, are you ready to play my game?"

I nodded. " I am."

" Just so you don't get confused, you are the bad guy." Starlight said. " And when you're bad, you just run and nothing more. That's all right with you isn't it? If it is then we can finally get this game underway."

Nodding again, everything suddenly went white and once more I blacked out. When I came to, I found myself in a place that could only be described as bizarre. Everything appeared warped as though reality were attempting to break free from some kind of confinement and there were strange large symbols located on what I assumed were walls but I couldn't tell if they existed or that I was succumbing to the warping. The center of each symbol looked like something could be placed but I couldn't even begin to imagine what that would be.

That's when I noticed that something was on the symbol directly across from me on the other side of the room. I couldn't see what it was at first so I squinted my eyes to get a better look only to open them wide with shock upon seeing that I was looking at Majora's Mask. Starlight was nowhere to be seen so I assumed her manifestation was no longer necessary for the mask yet why did it look so much bigger than before? Suddenly, the ground began to vibrate, a reminder that the Four Giants were still holding up the moon to prevent Termina's destruction so I needed to make a move and fast.

" What a strange place." Twilight said.

" You said it."

" I guess this is the site of the final battle."

" Yeah."

" What will you do?"

" Huh?"

" Are you going to wear that mask or not?"

I looked down at the Fierce Deity's Mask that was still in my hand. The thought of being able to fight Majora's Mask on equal footing was extremely tempting yet I feared I was weak and would become a new version of Sunset Demon. " I... I don't know if I can control the immense power that's radiating from it, Twilight. Despite all that I've done accepting friendship into my heart, I feel as though there's a part of me that still yearns for the old Sunset. I guess I'm just feeling conflicted knowing that I hold in my hands the one thing that will make this a more even experience."

" Wear the mask."

I was shocked. " Really?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " While you still possess a temper and act recklessly, you have changed from the person you once were, Sunset. I believe from the bottom of my own heart that you will not be corrupted by the dark power that mask possesses. No, you will have full control over it and use it to defeat this evil and save the lives of those who even now are wondering if they shall see the next sunrise. While we had to do an awful lot to acquire the other masks and subsequently give all but the three transformation masks up, acquiring the ultimate mask was worth it because you got to make others happy."

Looking at the mask, I realized that Princess Twilight was right about how I couldn't allow myself to be afraid of using an evil power if it meant for the greater good. I'm not who I used to be as my old self had no friends, family, or understood the Magic of Friendship. The true me had all those qualities and more thus the chances of me succumbing to the evil power of the mask was practically impossible. Knowing that I had to use it if I was to stand a chance, I breathed heavily, gulped, turned the mask around, and placed it on my face. Immediately, I began convulsing--strange that it would be like the Deku Mask.

After what felt like forever, I let out a huge scream as my body shimmered from human to whatever it was I would become this time, and when the transformation had finished, I looked down at my reflection on the ground. To my surprise, I looked like a cross between Sunset Demon and Daydream Shimmer. My face was still my own though with some demonic features such as no eye pupils, having markings above and below my eyes, and having hair similar to my latter form despite wearing a grey hat. Looking down at my body, I was wearing my tunic though it had been spliced with my Daydream Shimmer in terms of the golden wings and having a skirt.

I did have Sunset Demon's shoulder pads in addition to her boots yet everything else belonged exclusively to the mask. I then noticed the sword that I was holding in my hand, a sword that resembled a double-helix. Tremendous power was coming from it so I swung it around to see how strong it was only to be surprised when it fired some kind of magical attack that went across the entire room before hitting one of the symbols. I could feel the power coursing through me yet not once did I feel like I was losing control. I had the willpower to not be corrupted yet I needed to be cautious anyway in case something went wrong.

" How do you feel?"

" I feel... strange, Twilight."

" Your body is quickly getting adjusted to having so much power."

" I hope not to use all of it."

" What surprises me is that your form is a mixture of Sunset Demon, Daydream Shimmer, and yourself all wrapped up in the mask's designated form." Twilight said. " It actually makes you look incredibly awesome but also confusing as heck like you were spliced together from different parts."

" To be fair, I wasn't expecting it."

" This would be considered your ultimate form." Twilight said. " From what I have gathered, the Fierce Deity's Mask brings out a person's strongest aspects while also applying a demonic coat to it though that more of a cosmetic thing than anything else, yet the immense power is not to be underestimated. That sword you carry is made of a special metal that's beyond anything I've ever seen but it enables you to fire magical beams that are very effective against evil beings. Because you have so much power flowing through you, this mask can only be used in special locations, namely the places where you fought the boss monsters."

" Makes sense to have such a restriction."

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes. The regular world isn't ready for such a form so you'll essentially be restricted to this one place whilst wearing it. I know you don't have any access to your regular items but I'm not sure if you can use potions like that."

" Guess we'll find out once this starts."

" How does it start?"

I shrugged. " Beats me."

" Maybe we should get closer to Majora's Mask."

The instant I stepped forward, I felt something strange happening. At first I thought it was back spasms as a result of my body having trouble accepting my new body but that idea quickly disappeared when the masks of the four boss monsters began getting pulled away from me. I tried grabbing the mask that once belonged to Odalwa but it slipped away along with the others until each one sped off until it attached itself to the center of the four symbols. Why did they suddenly do that? To be frank, I never did understand why I had to carry them around seeing as they didn't do anything other than provide bragging rights.

Yet those masks weren't going to be my concern for much longer. As soon as the last one had attached itself, the eyes of Majora's Mask glowed as it shuffled before pulling itself off of the symbol it had been attached to. The spikes that ran down its sides began wiggling like they were alive and I thought they were just part of the mask's design, yet the worst thing came when tentacles dropped down from behind it which made me wonder if Starlight... I shook my head. No... That was something I didn't want to think about as the thought was just horrific beyond all measure.

" Twilight... Are you seeing what I'm seeing?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " You mean the tentacles coming out from behind it?"

I nodded. " What kind of a mask is this?"

" I'm not sure but you need to focus on defeating it."

" How am I supposed to fight a mask?"

" Those tentacles look to be rather sensitive given that it keeps on looking in our direction as though it doesn't want to expose its behind." Twilight answered. " I'd wager that you need to hit the mask from behind in order to knock it down to the ground where you can attack it further. With your new body, you can throw those magical attacks from your sword but I suspect they consume Magic Power so I wouldn't go overboard and fling them about without a care in the world."

" And the masks of the four bosses?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " I honestly have no idea, Sunset, but I wouldn't ignore them entirely. There was a reason why they suddenly left you like they did so you should look at them on occasion as you focus on dealing with Majora's Mask."

Majora's Mask began flying about so right away I needed a projectile attack in order to attack it. I then swung my sword and a magical attack shot from it that collided with the mask only for it to bounce off completely to no effect. The moment that happened, something within my mind began to stir reminding me of how I often fought monsters who often protected their weak points by using either a shield or their own body. I had to get around their backsides without being blocked in the process though some required complicated strategies because of having a high level of intelligence.

As it continued flying about, I was honestly expecting it to attack me, but so far it was ignoring me as though I either didn't exist or it didn't see me as a threat. I then fired another magical attack from my sword in hopes of getting its attention and I succeeded despite the shot bouncing off its front. Majora's Mask turned to face me, its eyes glowing bright, and then it suddenly began spinning around like a tornado before flying at me using its body as a weapon. I managed to avoid getting hit by running left but then to my surprise it began following behind me--like a heat-seeking missile or a boomerang.

By the time it finally stopped spinning, I noticed that it faces its back to me before rising back up. All I needed to do was to have it attack me again and I could respond by hitting it from behind and make it crash. Majora's Mask began flying about and once again ignored my presence meaning I had to use my magical attack again to get its attention unless there were an easier way. Swinging my sword and firing my attack, it bounced off the mask before dissipating off in the distance resulting in it turning to face me. If this had to be the means of getting its attention then so be it though I couldn't keep wasting magic as it was precious.

Spinning around again, Majora's Mask then flung itself at me and this time I did a backflip to avoid getting hit, and when it turned its back to me for that brief moment, I fired another magical attack that struck it from behind, causing it to crash in a heap on the ground. Knowing there wasn't much time, I quickly ran up and struck it in the back resulting in a rather chilling scream. It eventually got back up but that scream filled me with dread like it were a premonition to something that would come in due time. So far, this battle was rather easy. No... it was too easy because aside from diving down at me, it didn't do anything else.

" I've got this weird feeling, Twilight."

" About what?"

" Something bad is going to happen."

" You sense it too?"

" Can you?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Majora's Mask is holding back something. I can't explain it but it possesses incredible might though it's not using it against you. Either it really doesn't see you as a legitimate threat or believes it doesn't need to unleash its true power in order to kill you."

" On another note, the masks of the bosses haven't done anything."

" Better not ignore them just in case."

Before I could respond, Majora's Mask came hurdling towards me and I got knocked down onto my butt upon getting hit by it. " Yeow! Those spikes on its body are razor sharp." I looked down at my chest to see if the blow had caused me to draw blood--it hadn't--before getting back up.

" At least you didn't get caught in those tentacles."

I shuddered. " I'd rather not think about it."

" You know, you don't have to wait until the mask turns its back to you after it finishes attacking." Twilight said. " If you swing your sword and fire a magical attack at just the right time, it should strike Majora's Mask from behind. However, this can be risky because you only have so much Magic Power before it gets depleted. I've seen some pots lying around so smash them when you get the chance and see if you can get some Magic Jars."

" I should've brought along a Blue Potion at the very least." I said as I dodged another attack from Majora's Mask as it went flying by. " Had I known that this Fierce Deity form would consume so much magic with its attacks, I wouldn't have just the single Green Potion."

" Unfortunately, there's no turning back now."

" What do you mean?"

" I believe you should still have access to the Ocarina of Time." Twilight answered. " If you were to play the Song of Time right here, we'll get sent back to the beginning of the three day cycle though I don't think the Fierce Deity's Mask will come along as it wouldn't have been properly obtained. What I'm saying is that you must defeat Majora's Mask to be able to claim it properly. Using it would be nothing short of a disaster not to mention forcing us to go through that whole thing back on top of the Clock Tower again so you're stuck with what you've currently got."

I sighed. " We should have planned this better."

" How could we have known..."

Knowing now that I needed to be careful when it came to using magic, I could no longer simply get Majora's Mask's attention by flinging magic at it. No, I had to let it attack me and respond only when I had a clear shot. The mask continued flying about and for a while it chose to ignore me though it did sometimes perform fake-outs as a means of trying to get under my skin. This must have been its means of fighting... Cause its opponent to lose their patience and go in for the kill when they've exhausted themselves. Not the perfect plan as it leaves itself vulnerable to a counterattack.

After waiting for a while, it began spinning around before diving down at me, and I fired a magical attack which somehow struck it, causing it to crash into the ground. I quickly ran over and struck the front, cursing under my breath as I was supposed to hit it from behind, yet the hit still counted resulting in the same scream as before. When it was paralyzed on the ground, I could hit Majora's Mask anywhere and not be restricted to only the back. That certainly now made things less complicated but no sooner had I connected, my eyes turned towards what was happening on the walls.

The eyes of Odalwa's Mask suddenly glowed followed by it vibrating until it removed itself from the symbol it was attached to. The same thing then happened with the other three masks until they were all floating about of their own free will. I had no idea what they were doing but I quickly got an answer when Twinmold's Mask shot out an energy ball which struck me in my back causing me to drop down onto my knees. Getting back up on my feet, the others began shooting energy balls and all I could do was dodge them. I managed to succeed at first but then I started getting blasted repeatedly.

While the damage was minimal, I was still getting hit which meant losing my concentration against Majora's Mask. The masks of the four bosses were merely serving as a distraction and doing a good job of it. They needed to be taken care of so that I could focus on the main problem yet that meant using up more Magic Power. Unless I could attack them with just my sword, I had to conserve Magic Power unless I could reflect their energy balls back at them. What looked like a simple battle--from my perspective--had just gotten much worse and I still felt Majora's Mask was holding back.

Once I got back up onto my feet, I quickly began jumping all over the place to avoid getting hit any further by the energy balls. Every time I thought I was safe for a moment, I would be forced to jump again to another safe spot in the room. I was practically playing a game of dodgeball against these floating masks and they outnumbered me. Majora's Mask then spun around and dove down but before I could fire another attack from my sword, Gyorg's Mask and Goht's Mask decided to double-team me by shooting energy balls together. The dual blasts knocked me onto my butt but then Majora's Mask blindsided me.

" Those additional masks have become quite a problem, Sunset."

" I know I can shoot them down using the magic from my sword but I don't want to waste too much."

" So long as they continue shooting energy balls at you, you'll be utter defenceless."

" What do you suggest?"

" You need to get rid of them before you can focus on Majora's Mask."

" Easier said than done, Twilight."

" Not really." Twilight said. " You'll just need to take the Fierce Deity's Mask off and use arrows to knock those masks out of commission. No other projectile you have will work so it must be arrows. I know it sounds risky but if you want to conserve magic, using your bow would be the best option. Even though it told you to wear it, Majora's Mask said nothing about taking it off so don't think you're forced to remain the way you are right now."

Was I really willing to change back from being this awesome form? The power that flowed through me made me think that I didn't want to go back to being normal but I knew I had to otherwise those masks would eventually kill me if I didn't do something about them. The temptation was strong yet I was much stronger proving that I possessed the willpower to prevent myself from succumbing to the dark power within the mask. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Fierce Deity's Mask, and flipped back my hair before taking out my bow and aiming up at the closest mask nearby--that was Goht's Mask.

Using arrows, I started shooting at it in hopes of taking it out and I was surprised that it didn't want to avoid any of them. I surmised that the four boss masks only had limited intelligence and cared only about killing me and not their own survival. It only took two arrows to defeat Goht's Mask where it burned away to nothing but then I suddenly got hit from behind by a laser beam that burned my shoulder. Whipping myself around to see where it came from, I barely noticed the eyes of Majora's Mask having changed from red back to what they were before--it was what fired the laser at me showing that it had other means of attacking.

The next mask I went after was Twinmold's Mask but before I could fire an arrow at it, I was struck from behind by the same laser again. Getting back up, I quickly jumped to the right to avoid getting hit by the laser again, yet it made me start to think about the situation. Majora's Mask didn't start using that attack until the other masks joined and isn't diving down at me like it usually did. Was it trying to protect the others? If so then they really needed to be taken out otherwise I'll never defeat it. Looking around for Twinmold's Mask and finding it floating behind me, I began firing arrows while it responded by shooting energy balls.

Both of us hit each other with our respective projectiles and as I fell onto my butt, Majora's Mask responded with another laser that burned my butt and sent me across the room until I hit the back wall. Getting up, I quickly looked around for Twinmold's Mask again and saw that it was hiding behind Gyorg's Mask. Rather than waiting for it to come out of hiding, I chose to fire arrows at both in hopes of taking them both out. Neither one offered up much resistance and I took them down with several arrows--good thing I had the largest quiver otherwise I'd have run out by now--leaving just Odalwa's Mask left along with Majora's Mask itself.

" I think you can go back to using the Fierce Deity Mask."

" I've still got one more mask left."

" True but you've taken care of the main problem."

" I guess that's true."

" Besides, you might want to conserve your arrows in case you need to use them later."

I knew that Princess Twilight felt the same way I did regarding the fact that Majora's Mask was holding back its power. I really hoped those pots scattered around the edge of this place contained arrows, Magic Jars, and anything else necessary to keep this battle going. Putting my bow away and taking out the Fierce Deity's Mask, I placed it on my face and began convulsing as my body shimmer from human to deity--that was my best guess--until I screamed before my transformation finished. As though my body were acting of its own accord, I took out my sword and swung it once against Odalwa's Mask, destroying it in one shot.

That left only Majora's Mask who fired off one last laser that struck me in the chest though I didn't get knocked down this time. It then immediately began spinning--without the other masks it no longer needed to maintain a protective stance--before diving down where I jumped to the side, turned around, and fired a magic attack that hit it from behind sending it crashing to the ground. I struck it again causing it to scream in pain yet it still wasn't defeated as it floated back up ready for more. Majora's Mask's eyes then glowed much to my surprise as it fired its laser beam that burned my chest something fierce--guess I was wrong about the whole defensive bit.

While the wound was painful, it wasn't enough to kill me. Majora's Mask then spun around again before diving, its spikes colliding with me as I was distracted by looking down at the wound that appeared on my chest, but when it turned its back, I fired another magical attack that sent it crashing to the ground. I decided to go with a jump attack this time in hopes of defeating it--I was afraid I would fire off some magic--so with a mighty leap and a swing of my sword--no magic came out--I struck Majora's Mask again but it still wasn't defeated. How much punishment can a mask even take? I mean, it should have cracked after the first strike alone.

No... I wasn't about to take any chances. Before it could get back up, I attacked Majora's Mask again with another jump attack, and this proved to be the final hit as its tentacles suddenly burst into flames. I believed this was the end of the battle only to find it strange that it was floating towards the centre of the room despite being in a critical state. My entire body then froze as I felt a great power coming from Majora's Mask, a power I knew was there deep below the surface, a power that was now coming forth. As it floated in place, the mask began shaking and that's when something unexpected happened.

Chapter 73: Demon's Battle

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 9, 2017
Chapter 73: Demon's Battle.

After going through so much hardship, I had finally come face-to-face with Majora's Mask, the source behind the misery that plagued Termina. For a long time, I assumed that it was by Starlight's hand that this world was suffering but in truth, it was the mask itself, a living entity, that had influenced her. I had seen some strange things throughout my journey yet this trumped them all. I still found it difficult to swallow that a mere mask desired destruction on an apocalyptic level by wanting to slam a moon into it yet I was seeing what it was capable of doing with my own eyes.

Had the ancient tribe who created it still existed or their knowledge had been written down, perhaps Majora's Mask could have remained hidden in the shadows and none of this would have occurred, yet Sonata through no fault of her own had to go and find it. While her knowledge of masks was beyond compare, her curiosity and lust for wanting such a cursed mask had condemned Termina to what it was currently experiencing. I could understand the need for wanting something--even to the point of obsession--but not if it meant innocent people suffering for it just for one's own benefit.

In that sense, I supposed Sonata could be blamed but that was in the past now. I had to focus on the present to ensure that Termina would have a future though my efforts could potentially cost me my very humanity. To fight against Majora's Mask on an even playing field--though I suspected it had ulterior motives--it gave me the Fierce Deity's Mask, the ultimate mask I had sought out by collecting every mask that existed and giving them to the children who existed on the moon. While I didn't like the idea of giving up what I had earned through difficult trials, it had proven necessary as otherwise I would have died no sooner had I begun the fight.

As the Fierce Deity, I had never felt such power coursing through my body before and I had experienced ponying up and becoming Daydream Shimmer on numerous occasions during this journey and my last one in Hyrule, yet it came with a price. The mask itself contained the spirit of a warrior who used demonic power to prevail against all those who stood in her path according to Majora's Mask. While I was in control of what I had become, deep down in my heart, I was struggling against the evil within the mask. Were I to succumb to it, I would become a new version of Sunset Demon, my humanity forever lost, my life forever destroyed.

So long as I refrained from truly enjoying the thought of having power that rivalled Majora's Mask--maybe even Ganondorf himself--I would be able to succeed in destroying this evil force and return everything back to normal or as normal as one could hope for given the world I called home now had Equestrian Magic flowing about. So far, my efforts were working as I had defeated Majora's Mask after a lengthy battle that even had the boss masks get involved by aiding the one who created them but no sooner had I proclaimed victory, the mask was beginning to undergo something completely unexpected.

My first thought was that it would burn away to nothing as it floated over to the center of this strange place but instead it was shaking as though it were cold. I had sensed a greater power hiding within the mask and wondered why it had chosen to hold back but now I was about to witness its true power. As far as I knew, my own power had reached its limit but perhaps I could go further in hopes of being able to keep up with the mask or else be completely overwhelmed and die in the process. Princess Twilight then alerted me to what was happening in front of us so I steeled myself for what was coming.

Two spindly legs then protruded from Majora's Mask followed by two spindly arms. What in Equestria was happening to it!? I thought it would just unleash a stronger power not actually start transforming into something else entirely. As I continued staring at the mask, a small head popped out at the top that comprised of a single eye that blinked at me with two horns, one on each side of its head. It then stopped shaking and began doing what looked like some kind of weird pose whilst letting out a sound that wasn't sinister but rather stupid--I really couldn't think of any nice way to describe it.

When Majora's Mask finally turned its attention to me, I gripped my sword knowing I was about to experience a much tougher battle, but I was suddenly surprised when it began running away from me leaving behind a trail that made it look like there were several of them running behind one another. It ran around the room without any concern for my presence and I simply just stared at what it was doing whilst allowing my sword to drop to the ground. As it ran, it suddenly began doing a series of dance poses that looked utterly ridiculous including: the Cossack, the Moonwalk, the Pirouette, and even jumping jacks.

I had no trouble keeping track of where it was going but when it suddenly stopped moving, I was expecting it to attack me but instead it resumed running leaving me wondering just what was going on. If this was Majora's Mask's true power, I felt incredibly disappointed by it, but perhaps this was a means of deception. By not taking it seriously, it could easily take advantage of my ignorance and kill me when I least expect it. Still... It just looked really stupid. During the first battle, I had taken some damage but I didn't need to use one of my remaining Red Potions--I doubted I would need one against this thing.

" Twilight..." I began. " What do you make of this?"

Princess Twilight shrugged. " To be perfectly honest with you, Sunset, I wasn't expecting anything like this at all."

" Is it even Majora's Mask still despite changing?"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I think it's gone beyond being just a mask that contains an evil power. If anything, I would consider this transformation to be a new incarnation of the mask so perhaps we should call this form, Majora's Incarnation?"

I frowned at her. " Wow... You couldn't come up with something more cooler sounding?"

" You've been hanging around Rainbow Dash too much."

I blushed. " Ahem... So... How do I go about fighting against this thing?"

" Majora's Incarnation may seem ridiculous looking but don't underestimate it." Twilight answered. " I suspect it will attack you with something but I don't know when it will do so given its behaviour is completely erratic. You just need to ignore its dancing and attack by flinging magic from your sword but don't just throw your magic around otherwise you'll run out and have to use that Green Potion."

" So I need to wait for my chances?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " Sunset... Do you recall some of your previous battles where you had to face against an opponent that constantly moved around forcing you to wait before firing one of your projectile weapons?"

I nodded. " Yeah but why bring it up?"

" This is what Majora's Incarnation is doing."

" O... K..."

" I know my words sound confusing right now, Sunset, but you'll get their meaning once you start attacking." Twilight said. " First, I would see if those pots along the edge of this place have some Magic Jars as you need as much Magic Power as possible."

To be fair, I actually didn't understand what Princess Twilight was getting at initially. Sure, I had faced monsters in the past that constantly moved about whilst rarely stopping to attack--I never did like fighting them--but they were nothing compared to Majora's Incarnation simply because of its appearance. I would have problems dealing with it on the fact that I just couldn't take it seriously yet I slowly began understanding what Her Highness was talking about. Chasing after the mask was pointless as I'd exhaust myself too quickly leaving me vulnerable to any counterattack but a ranged attack would work.

Majora's Incarnation continued running around like a headless chicken--my interpretation of it--so I chose to ignore it and went after a couple of pots that were to my left, smashing them, and collecting a big Magic Jar alongside some arrows. I was beginning to think that this battle required the use of Light Arrows given the obviousness of what I just obtained from the pots but since I was in arguably my strongest transformation, using them was a bit counterproductive. If anything, the Magic Jars were essential so as to offset my earlier blunder of not bringing along any Blue Potions or Chateau Romani.

Swinging my sword and firing a magical attack, it sailed past Majora's Incarnation who performed the Cossack to avoid it by ducking down low enough and I couldn't help but feel robbed in addition to being impressed. I assumed the dancing poses were meant to be a distraction but they were apparently useful in allowing it to avoid my attacks. It then resumed running only to begin using the Moonwalk and it was at that moment when I realized that the poses slowed it down. By showing off, it left itself vulnerable. I just needed to wait for a pose to come along before responding. I also needed to concentrate so as to not miss such an easy shot again.

It then performed the Cossack again--even though I knew the names of these dance poses and styles, I couldn't dance my way out of a paper bag--and this time I made sure to throw my magical attack when it was about to resume its usual running speed. When it happened, I flung another magical attack, striking Majora's Incarnation in its back, crashed into a heap on the ground, and began flailing both arms and legs about as it lay helpless. I couldn't help but feel bad for it knowing that it was currently unable to do anything but I couldn't allow such sympathy to cloud my judgment knowing that it really was.

Walking to Majora's Incarnation, I performed a jump attack, striking its back, resulting in it immediately jumping back onto its feet and screaming at the top of its lungs. Just hearing that bloodcurdling scream made me feel uneasy but I had to shake off such feelings if I were to maintain my composure. When the mask finally stopped jumping up and down in pain, it began running around again as though nothing happened but deep down, it was outraged over what I had just done to it through my sword. It continued running until it stopped again and I believed it would just continue running.

But I was quickly proven wrong when it suddenly started shooting energy balls at me. Each of its hands fired a rapid-fire onslaught that caught me completely off guard resulting in me being knocked down onto my butt in addition to getting pushed back. I should have realized Majora's Incarnation wasn't completely defenseless though why did it choose to attack now rather than do so sooner? Why bother running around and doing nothing when it was capable of fighting back? In any case, there was no time trying to figure out what kind of thought processes combed their way through a mask. I had to focus on defeating it and saving this world.

Getting up, it then stopped and began throwing energy balls at me again. I tried raising my sword to deflect the blasts and avoid taking damage but my effort proved to be in vain as I ended up taking every shot resulting in me getting knocked down onto my butt a second time. Upon finishing up its barrage, Majora's Incarnation immediately performed a Moonwalk leaving me to get onto my feet and shake off the cobwebs. The damage it had inflicted was minimal but I knew that such damage would rack up quickly but I wasn't worried as I had enough potions on hand yet I felt like I needed to keep hold of them because of a premonition.

Princess Twilight checked up on me. " You really took a pounding, Sunset."

" Those energy balls weren't as bad as they looked."

" Maybe not but they will add up over time."

" Do you think I should use one of my Red Potions?"

" No, I don't think so." Twilight answered. " Despite having taken some damage during the previous battle alongside this one thus far, the damage wasn't what I would call severe enough where you would need to consume one immediately."

I then started acting nervously. " Um... The thing is..."

" You think it's still holding back?"

I nodded. " It's more of a premonition than anything else."

Princess Twilight then nodded. " I too suspect that Majora's Incarnation is holding back its true power again but it doesn't make any sense. Why have you face against such a strange form when it could have easily unleashed the full extent of its power? If it knows you are a threat given your current form, why not just go for the big one instead of merely testing the waters so to speak?"

" I wish I knew."

" Are you thinking of dragging this out?"

" No."

" Good because if you did, I wouldn't be very happy about it."

I had no intention of having this battle go on any longer than necessary and Princess Twilight was right to remind me of it. As much as I had enjoyed this adventure, at the same time, my emotional state had been turned upside-down to the point where I could no longer handle being in this world. I truly wanted things to go back to the way they were before this happened yet there was one flaw I've ignored this entire time up until now. It didn't matter if Termina was saved from Majora's Mask because that alone wasn't enough. Only Ganondorf could change things back to normal as he was the one who caused the problem to start with.

That meant in order to undo the change and save both Equestria and the world I called home, the Dark Lord had to be appeased to the point where he would be moved to changing things back. I knew that wasn't going to be easy given his evil nature and becoming his servant was definitely out of the question yet what could I do to convince him? Would I be forced into fighting him yet again? I didn't like that option because I always was beaten to within an inch of my life every time I would encounter Ganondorf and there was no doubt in my mind I couldn't talk my way out of this because of having acquired my own evil power.

Suddenly, I got knocked down onto my butt upon getting hit by Majora's Incarnation when it Moonwalked into me. " What the?"

" You were daydreaming again, Sunset."

I got back onto my feet. " I didn't mean to, Twilight, but I had a good reason."

" Focus on defeating Majora's Incarnation first before anything else."

I tried to focus on my opponent who began performing the Cossack before following up with a Pirouette but I couldn't get the thought of Ganondorf out of my mind. Even when he wasn't around making me feel miserable, I was still being tormented by him. When Majora's Incarnation launched another barrage of energy balls, I just stood there rather than take evasive actions and wound up getting knocked down on my butt again. " I just can't seem to focus when I know this is all going to be in vain once we're done with it." My words sounded so harsh in scope that I closed my eyes out of shame.

Princess Twilight was surprised. " What do you mean?"

" Defeating Majora's Mask is pointless."

" If you don't win here today, Sunset, then Termina is finished."

" It's not that."

" Then what?"

" It's what happens afterwards."

Princess Twilight then went quiet as she slowly realized what I was getting at. " Oh... You mean changing this world back to what it was before?" I nodded and she immediately began thinking about it. " I'm honestly not sure how we're supposed to change Termina back to the world that our Canterlot High friends live in but you probably have a pretty good idea yourself since you've been in this position once before."

" The Dark Lord."

" Ganondorf..."

I nodded. " No matter what I end up doing here against Majora's Mask, everything goes back to that man. I've no doubt that he intends on having me fight him again because I just so happen to be sporting a new body whose power could potentially rival against him. When I think about all those previous encounters I've had, he seems to continue getting stronger and loves putting me in my place as a result despite me giving it my all."

" Does he really scare you that much, Sunset."

" I can't help but be afraid."

" If you allow your fear of Ganondorf to consume you, then he will forever be dominant." Twilight said. " From what I have seen of his actions, I do agree that he is evil of the worst kind but he uses that against those who he views as weak as a means of manipulating their minds into lowering their guards. If you let him intimidate you, you're likely to succumb to his influence and become his obedient servant. Besides, you've survived each encounter against him so you must surely be doing something right. My advice may not sound correct given I'm just telling it to you straight but you must be strong or else everything you've done will amount to nothing."

" Easy for you to say." I said. " You've never been in my position before."

" I'm actually glad you brought that up."

" You are?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " While I can't even begin to imagine what you've been through, Sunset, I can be a little suspicious of his motivations. I mean, Ganondorf has been trying to make you his servant as he believes that you are destined for far greater things were you to embrace evil and abandon your heart. Yet, why has he been going after me recently? I've never been viewed as a potential target until only just recently when we saw him in the dream world. Do I hold something that he sees as being useful to him?"

I really wanted to say something in response but I couldn't. It's not that I was afraid of telling her the truth but because I didn't even know if my suspicions were right. I still believed that Princess Twilight had somehow retained the Triforce of Wisdom but proving my belief was impossible without knowing how to get the mark to appear. Even my own mark appears of its own accord without me knowing how it does that. Yet, why would Ganondorf be concerned about both of us having them? After all, he possessed the complete Triforce in his hands or maybe he didn't and in truth he only possessed one piece?

Okay... That last one was a real stretch considering I have seen the full mark on the back of his hand--Princess Twilight and I only had one mark of the three filled while he had all three--but it was the best that I could do. I turned towards Princess Twilight and sighed. " I honestly don't know why he has taken such a strong interest in you, Twilight." Saying that made me feel sick because of lying to the one person who I viewed as having saved me from myself when I was Sunset Demon. I hoped that Her Highness would forgive me for not wanting to share my true thoughts even knowing it would change her forever.

" Are you hiding something?"

I went completely limp. " I... I... I..."

Princess Twilight smiled. " You don't need to explain it to me, Sunset. I know it must be difficult for you to explain because you yourself don't understand it so I won't force you into saying something you wouldn't be comfortable with. I think my best bet would be to ask Ganondorf himself and that means first defeating Majora's Mask." She then looked off in the distance at Majora's Incarnation who had been standing in place for what looked like quite a while though neither of us were sure. " I think we should get back to the fight as it looks like the mask isn't happy that we've been ignoring it."

" Yeah, I guess we should."

" I suggest avoid getting hit by those projectiles as they cause more embarrassment than anything else."

Princess Twilight was right in that I had to focus on Majora's Incarnation as it was my opponent right now--Ganondorf would just have to wait--yet I couldn't help but feel she was putting on a brave face for me knowing the Dark Lord now had her in his sights despite neither of us knowing the reason why. I didn't want Her Highness getting dragged into this as she had her own problems to deal with back in Equestria as a princess yet it seemed destiny had other plans and was slowly playing its cards. No matter what happened, I had to protect her as that was my sworn duty as a pony and as a friend.

Majora's Incarnation, who had been more than patient during the private moment between myself and Princess Twilight, began running around again before performing yet another rendition of the Cossack followed by a pirouette. Swinging my sword just as it was about to come out of the latter, it tumbled to the ground and began flailing about before I ran over and struck its back causing it to leap up and scream at the top of its lungs. Again, I felt sorry for the thing but I had to keep going until it was finally defeated. I then swung my sword thinking I could get in an additional hit only for it to tumble down again.

I knew I was powerful as the Fierce Deity but I didn't think I was "that" powerful. I struck Majora's Incarnation in the back again only for it to leap back up onto its feet before running away from me again in its usual manner. For a brief moment, the possibility of constantly attacking it without allowing it to fight back had been available as an option to me but I chose not to accept it. Just because I didn't enjoy fighting didn't mean I could show any displays of being dishonourable. Sure, Majora's Incarnation wasn't fighting fair but I wasn't about to act in a similar manner and mimic it. If anything, I intended to fight fairly and allow it to fight back.

When it stopped running and began shooting energy balls at me, I ran to the left and kept on running as the blasts exploded behind me but before I had a chance to swing my sword, it quickly performed another Cossack before jumping up and down in place. Why it chose to act like that boggled my mind but I swung my sword anyway knowing its weak point had been exposed. Majora's Incarnation tumbled to the ground, its arms and legs flailing about, and I ran over to strike it using a jump attack. Again, it let out a chilling scream upon leaping back onto its feet only for it to resume running--I could have sworn that would have been the final hit.

On a side note, I was slowly getting adjusted to the immense power that my body wielded thanks in part to the Fierce Deity's Mask. My heart absolutely despised having all this power because it brought back bad memories of when I became Sunset Demon in a bid to acquiring a similar power. My mind on the other hand loved what I had become but I knew better than to listen to my mind as it was all about analytical information and lacking true compassion. As the mask performed another pirouette followed by the Moonwalk, it then stopped but didn't shoot any energy balls.

Either it sensed its defeat was imminent or it wanted me to make a mistake. I chose to stay still and allow the mask to make the next move which it did by jumping up and down before running around and leading into it performing another Moonwalk. It then stopped shortly afterwards, firing more energy balls that I avoided by rolling forward so that they went over my head, responding with a magical attack that unfortunately missed due to Majora's Incarnation having used the Cossack. Even when it looked like I had gotten the upper hand, it somehow managed to squeak out in front much to my annoyance.

It then continued running until it suddenly stumbled a little bit before resuming its pace and I had to wonder if it was another indication that it was on its last legs. Granted, this battle was more about taking Majora's Mask seriously considering it just runs all over the place like a headless chicken as opposed to the final confrontation where the fate of Termina hung in the balance. I guessed I was just disappointed at the entire spectacle and hoped for something more challenging. I really shouldn't complain as an easy fight meant not dragging it out for too long and not being on the verge of death.

Waiting for it to perform another pose, Majora's Mask instead stopped and began shooting energy balls at me. Rather than avoid them like before, I chose to take them head on and respond with a magical attack since it was vulnerable whilst standing still. With a swing of my sword, I connected by hitting Majora's Incarnation in its stomach, resulting in it falling forward, its face smacking into the ground, and I performed one more jump attack which proved to be the final hit. It screamed as it jumped to its feet, stumbled over to the center of the chamber, and collapsed in a heap. I kept my sword aimed at it in case it did something else but nothing happened which made me suspicious.

" You did it, Sunset."

I wiped my brow. " That was more annoying than anything else."

" True but you managed to endure its erratic behaviour."

" I just have this feeling, Twilight, that there was more to this than appearances suggest."

" Is that why you're pointing your sword at its body?"

I nodded. " We both sensed it was still holding back so you can't blame me for being on edge right now. Besides... If I had truly won against Majora's Mask, wouldn't the moon have begun moving away from Termina? I mean, I'm sure it will take some time but we would have started feeling something by now given we're at the epicentre and all."

Princess Twilight then displayed a glum expression and I knew exactly what that meant. " It seems we still have another battle ahead of us, Sunset. What you just said makes complete and total sense as something should have started happening by now. I suspect Majora's Mask is either waiting for you to lower your guard or needs a few moments to be able to assume another form altogether. I would take this moment to prepare accordingly as this next fight will be the toughest one yet."

" I don't need to consume my Red Potions."

" Maybe not but you are getting close to needing one."

" I could do with some more magic."

" Then shatter another pot or two and see what happens."

" I really should have brought a Blue Potion or two."

" No sense in worrying about it now." Twilight said. " You prepared as best you could without knowing what you were really getting into so don't kick yourself for not bringing along the strongest potions. Be thankful that you did bring along something instead of nothing. Had you chosen to come here to the moon without any healing items, you'd probably be freaking out right now."

I blushed. " You don't know the half of it."

" That sounds like a hint of sarcasm."

" Let's just say that past experiences made me realize that I should always bring along healing items."

Princess Twilight smiled. " At least you learned something, Sunset. Now, I have no idea how much time you've got before Majora's Mask decides to act so I would get your magic restored before you won't have a chance to do so."

Now I couldn't tell if Her Highness had used sarcasm just now but she was right about me needing to hurry. Walking over to the opposite side of this place, I picked up the two pots--smashing them with my sword would have cost me some Magic Power--and threw them on the ground where they smashed, revealing a large Magic Jar and a Recovery Heart--I didn't expect to see one here of all places. Just as I picked up both items, a loud scream suddenly echoed all around and I looked in the direction of Majora's Incarnation to see it had gotten back onto its feet though it was shaking again, an indication that it was about to change once again.

As its body shook, its arms and legs began getting muscular until they reached an ideal mass. The mask that served as its torso began folding back on its sides whilst additional muscular properties began protruding from its body until the torso gave off a Herculean--muscle man--like appearance. Finally, the tiny little head slunk down into the torso before popping back up as a demonic head with the eye now on top flanked by slightly larger horns. Just when I thought it had finished changing, a single tentacle launched out from beneath each of its hands, and I was shocked to see they covered a huge distance--each one was as long as just over half the chamber.

My entire body froze in horror that the stupid looking Majora's Incarnation had transformed into a demonic horror whose power had increased exponentially. One thing was clear right off the bat and that was it had now unleashed its full power. I couldn't sense any further power hidden away which meant that defeating this form would finally bring this battle to an end yet I knew it wouldn't be easy. To think that a mere mask possessed such a horrifying form that it only used when it had no other alternative. No wonder it wanted me fighting it using the Fierce Deity's Mask as it desired a clash between another demon.

" To think that you would force me into becoming my true form!"

" Huh... I was wondering whether or not you were still capable of talking." I said.

" You would dare insult Majora?"

I refused to allow it to intimidate me. " I'm not afraid of you, you know. After all, you gave me this mask so that I could do battle with you on an even playing field. I'm starting to think that you haven't had a decent challenge in a very long time."

" Such a fiesty attitude for merely a human worm."

" What are you?"

" You see me as my true form, Majora's Wrath! None have seen this form for several centuries and yet you have come along and awoken it once again. For that, I must thank you but it is also unfortunate because now you must die for forcing me to unleash it."

Again, I wasn't letting it intimidate me despite now knowing its name. " Why me though?"

Majora's Wrath laughed. " Though I was unable to act when I was being used by that worthless puppet, I was still able to see things though I do not how you managed to call forth the guardians of this world so quickly and uncovering the truth without even realizing it. But, what I did see proved enlightening. You, worm, showed tremendous courage and are clearly stronger than those other worms that draw breath so I needed to see if you could become my equal if only through the power of the mask that is on your face."

" Well... I'm here now and waiting for you to make the first move."

" You wish to die, don't you, worm?"

I shook my head. " Believe me, I've heard that phrase more times than you realize. Besides, I'm not the one who is going to be dying today. If I were you, Majora's Wrath, I would think twice before underestimating me and overestimating your power. I just might be an unexpected surprise."

Majora's Wrath laughed again. " I can sense that the demonic power flowing through you is proving difficult to resist."

" What makes you say that?"

" You cannot hide such knowledge from me!"

" Maybe so but I won't say anything to you!"

" I don't care about the mewlings of one who is going to die by my hands." Majora's Wrath said. " But, I suppose we will both find out if you either succumb to the demonic mien contained within that mask or use it to defeat me. Of course, you will not succeed, worm, as you now face the true form of Majora! Kneel in despair before all hope becomes lost! You shall die and I shall bring down the moon and wipe out this pathetic world!"

It was clear that Majora's Wrath ignored my warning about underestimating me but I wasn't about to hold it to account. If anything, this battle was going to be similar to my previous encounters with Ganondorf, excluding the one in the dream world, yet I was on equal footing rather than being in way over my head. Raising my sword, Majora's Wrath noticed my actions and responded by flinging one of its tentacles at me. It landed by my feet and at first I assumed it had made a blunder but that notion quickly changed when the tentacle wrapped itself around my legs before lifting me off the ground.

" Oh no... Not again..." I said as I was suddenly flung across to the other side of the chamber, landing in a heap on the ground. Majora's Wrath than used both of its tentacles to leap across to where I once stood, screaming in a manner that sounded like a woman had just screamed.

" Sunset?" Twilight asked.

" I'm okay, Twilight." I answered as I got back onto my feet.

" You need to be extremely cautious about those tentacles."

I rubbed my head. " Don't have to tell me twice."

" It seems Majora's Wrath can attack using its tentacles in a variety of ways so you need to watch them constantly so that they don't catch you off guard." Twilight said. " Not only can it use them for offensive purposes but can also use them to get away from any kind of attack you might throw at it. It will likely attack repeatedly without stopping so expect to take a lot of damage no to mention falling on your butt countless times."

" Any other advice?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Since this creature is one forged of darkness, the light is naturally going to be its weakness. You could switch back to your regular form and attempt to stun it using the Light Arrow or you can remain as you are and use your magical attacks from your sword. The latter will be more risky given you'll be striking using dark power against another being who also uses dark power. In other words, the two will cancel each other out and so it will remained stunned for a much shorter period. One last thing... It will taunt you on occasion as a means of goading you into attacking it so don't let it entice you."

I nodded. " Hopefully, my anger doesn't consume me."

Majora's Wrath then whipped out its hand and flicked it back towards its body a few times and I immediately knew that this was the taunting Princess Twilight mentioned. While the thought of rushing forward sounded like a good strategy, I knew doing so was nothing short of idiotic as it would leave me vulnerable. Instead, I swung my sword, firing my magical attack and it leapt to the left using its tentacles as leverage, screaming in the process much to my ears' displeasure. When it landed on the other side of the chamber, it flung its tentacles with one catching me on my arm with the other snapping my legs.

Unlike the energy balls from before, the tentacles were very painful due to the speed in which they were swung combined with the mask's increased power. There was no doubt in my mind that those Red Potions were going to be essential to my survival. It then resumed whipping me with its tentacles, switching between my arms and legs in hopes of somehow disrupting both my balance and my sword arm. I couldn't stand there and continue taking unnecessary hits so I moved backwards until I was out of reach of its tentacles. Majora's Wrath then taunted me again only for me to respond by swinging my sword again.

I winced slightly as the pain from getting hit on my arms and legs was beginning to take its toll but I hoped my strike was going to count this time. Unfortunately, it jumped to the right and my attack sailed by harmlessly before hitting the edge of this place. As Majora's Wrath landed on the ground, it swung its tentacles though I parried the attack with my sword, ensnaring both tentacles resulting in a stalemate. Since we both possessed equal strength, it would boil down to who had the better endurance. For a while, it was pulling against me in hopes of freeing itself while I was pulling to keep it from escaping.

Eventually, Majora's Wrath dropped to one knee signalling that I had won the stalemate but I knew not to lower my guard against such a crafty creature. As expected, it then attempted to jump to the right again and succeeded, taking me along for the ride until I got slammed into the wall before hitting the ground. We were still in our stalemate but clearly I had lost control and was now at its mercy. One tentacle then let go before smacking me several times across my chest and I couldn't do anything to stop it as my sword was still entangled with the other one. When I dropped to my knees, I was flung across the room, slamming into the wall again and slumping to the ground.

Majora's Wrath then laughed. " I knew you were no match for me, worm."

Getting back up, I was about to move when I looked down and noticed that my legs were still wrapped up. " You've only caught me off guard because you used those tentacles of yours to your advantage. If you had any decency when it comes to honour, you wouldn't be bragging right now and I would be the one dominating."

" I shall kill you because I am better!"

" Then perhaps you need a dose of reality."

" What can you do?" Majora's Wrath asked. " So long as my tentacle remains wrapped around your legs, I can fling you about without having to worry about you doing anything to harm me in return until you die. You may claim that you are still willing to fight but I know that such words will be filled with lies. I have broken your body already and will continue applying pain so that it breaks beyond recovery."

I then swung my sword down at the tentacle hoping to cut it loose from my legs but before I could complete the swing, Majora's Wrath used its other tentacle to whip me in the chest repeatedly until I could no longer continue my attack. " Crap!" I said to myself. " This thing is even more powerful than it was when it was acting like an idiot. I knew this wasn't going to be an easy fight but I didn't think it would be this difficult. " If this keeps up, I'm going to get myself killed and I have no fairies on hand to automatically restore me to life, something else I should have brought along with me but didn't."

Screaming, Majora's Wrath flung me over to the other side of the room where I slammed into the ground this time as opposed to the wall. The damage was really starting to pile up by that point but I had to believe that I could easily turn this around. " It seems I was wrong about you, worm." Majora's Wrath said. " I assumed that you were worthy because of how you were different from those other useless creatures but perhaps hastiness was my own weakness." Majora's Wrath began laughing and I realized that it had since broken off the stalemate when it whipped me across the chest a moment ago. Either it intentionally slipped or it truly believed it could kill me right now.

Either way, I swung my sword as it laughed and struck it in the chest. Not only did Majora's Wrath let go of my legs, but it also began stumbling about as though the strike had completely left it in a deluded state. I thought about rushing forward and striking it at close range but I remembered that I could also attack from a distance. While it would cost me a lot of magic, I was definitely fighting its final form so I could afford to be a little reckless with magic. Swinging my sword several times in succession, I fired magical attacks that sailed across the room, striking Majora's Wrath repeatedly.

As each attack struck, it tried to jump in retaliation to get away but couldn't as the next attack effectively repeated the process. Once the last attack found its mark, I attempted to repeat the process only to learn that I could only fire a certain amount of magical attacks from my sword before having to wait for them to dissipate. I supposed that made sense but at the same time it didn't as I assumed the Fierce Deity was supposed to have unlimited power given it relied on demonic properties. In any case, the mask had taken some serious damage by my hands leaving us back where we started though I could tell it wasn't happy.

Princess Twilight was surely surprised. " Wow... I didn't think you would do that, Sunset."

" Me neither."

" I should apologize for not bringing it up sooner."

" You mean you knew I could do that?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Yes... I knew that you could continue flinging magical attacks until you could no longer do so. The reason I didn't bring it up before is because you would have overused it to the point where your Magic Power would have run out. That sword is heavily reliant on magic and if you were to run out then you'd just be holding a sword that's barely stronger than what you currently use."

" Strange how this form has limitations."

" Yes but you shouldn't let that be a form of discouragement."

" Do you suppose I could defeat Ganondorf like this?"

The shrug from Princess Twilight was obvious. " I really don't know, Sunset. You know him a lot better than I do so if anything, only you would be able to answer that question, but if I were to take a guess, I'd say you would be able to defeat him unless he were to show an even greater depth of power. For now, focus instead on Majora's Wrath and not Ganondorf. You should consume one of those Red Potions as you did take some serious damage just now."

" Do you think I could drink one like this?"

" I don't see why not."

Just as I was about to reach into my pocket, the loud scream from Majora's Wrath echoed throughout the chamber, snapping me to attention and I raised my sword. It definitely looked weaker than before after the assault I inflicted upon it yet its power hadn't decreased which to me was more concerning. It swung its tentacles around out of sheer fury though from my perspective it looked like it was having a temper tantrum. Huh... I never would have imagined a being as vile as Majora would whine like a spoiled brat just because I had inflicted some damage. Not even Ganondorf acted like that.

" You... You... You pathetic worm!"

" Sounds like you underestimated me." I said.

" No one does this to Majora and gets away with it!"

" I think I just did."

Majora's Wrath attempted to taunt me into engaging it but I held my ground knowing that I couldn't fall for it. I also couldn't allow myself to get overconfident as that would lead me to being sloppy. " So... I have indeed underestimated you, worm. You are definitely not like the others who attempted to destroy me in the past. Yes... You're not the first one that has dared challenge the power of Majora. Many have tried in the past yet failed as they were pathetic worms that were full of bravado yet nothing more than empty promise. Some even wore the mask you wear now but they became consumed by evil and transformed into soulless murderers before being condemned later."

" Then I guess I must finish what they couldn't."

" You seem confident, worm."

I shook my head. " No... I'm not as confident as you think. To be perfectly frank, I wish that I wasn't doing this right now but destiny placed this burden upon me and I have to see it through even though it meant experiencing torment. Granted, I've been seeing the same things numerous times since I started this journey and while I did eventually accept my fate, it took some serious positivity."

I knew that by mentioning that I had relived the same three days over and over would entice Majora's Wrath and sure enough, I was proven correct. " For a worm, you are definitely the most interesting amongst their useless kind, yet you have intrigued me on something. Before I kill you in sheer bloodlust for having done so much wrong to me, I am curious as to how you summoned the guardians so quickly. That useless garbage of a puppet followed my suggestive words without fail and yet you still succeeded in summoning them."

Looking at Princess Twilight, she nodded and smiled indicating that she wanted me to tell Majora's Wrath the truth about how we pulled it off. " If you really must know, I used the power of time travel to go back through time and experience the same three days constantly until I had amassed everything I needed."

" Time travel?" Majora's Wrath asked. " I did not think such a power existed."

" It does if you have the right item."

" Yes... You are indeed different from the others."

" By resetting time, I was able to free the Four Giants from the dark masks that had imprisoned them."

" If I kill you... And take that which you used to manipulate time, then I can undo the damage you caused and ensure Termina is destroyed. " Majora's Wrath said. " Yes... You must die now, worm."

Majora's Wrath flicked its hands and its tentacles snapped on the ground. I was expecting it to use them by having them wrap themselves around my legs and flinging me about until my health was completely drained--my health was rather low and I needed to use a Red Potion. Instead, I found myself suddenly getting slapped in a merciless manner as its tentacles began smacking me in a frenzy. As Majora's Wrath screamed at the top of its lungs, I tried desperately to escape but couldn't and was overwhelmed. By the time it had finally finished, I took a single step forward before collapsing to the ground.

The entirety of my body felt like it had been pummeled into oblivion. I didn't think the mask was capable of going into a frenzy but I supposed it made sense since I had caused it great harm and it was retaliating in a similar manner. I was still alive though my body really needed healing but how could get enough time to consume a potion without it attacking me again or smashing my bottle thus denying me the chance to heal my wounds? I needed to come up with a plan quickly as I doubted it would wait for me. Getting back up onto my feet, I raised my sword in hopes of swinging but then I got knocked back by another tentacle, landing on my butt again.

It was going to pick me off from a distance unless I stopped it from using its tentacles. That's when I had an idea though it was risky as it could quickly figure out what I was doing and simply avoid getting hit by jumping all over the place until my magic ran out. As Majora's Wrath raised its tentacle to strike me, I swung my sword whilst still on the ground, catching it by surprise and causing it to flail about as it attempted to overcome its temporary stun. Quickly, I took out a bottle containing Red Potion, uncorked it, and drank its contents, proving that Princess Twilight was right in that I could consume the potion whilst in this body, weird as it was.

As my strength returned to me and my wounds began healing, I put the bottle away just as Majora's Wrath recovered from being stunned. It was already annoyed what with me pummeling it with magical attacks but now it would be even more furious as a result of me having regained my health. It tried taunting me again but no avail so instead it leapt to the right before attempting to wrap a tentacle around my legs which I avoided by flipping backwards. I followed up with a magical attack only for it to jump to the left, avoiding my attack, and when it landed, it started whipping me in a frenzy again. Like before, this was something I couldn't escape from.

Sometime before the Four Giants were summoned...

" Mutoh!? Why are you still here?"

" Huh? Viscen? I'm surprised that you of all people are still here."

" As the captain of the town militia, I am unable to leave Clock Town even when during such a crisis as this out of a sense of protecting others." Shining Armour said. " To be honest, I really wish that I could have fled like everyone else but to do so would mean abandoning those who cannot protect themselves. Some of my men attempted to flee earlier before all of this insanity started yet they chose to stay when I said I would personally have them arrested for desertion."

" I never imagined you would enforce such a strict order." Sweetie Belle said.

Shining Armour sighed. " And what's your excuse, Mutoh?"

Sighing as well, Sweetie Belle looked up at the Clock Tower. " I truly wanted the Carnival of Time to be the best one yet, Viscen. Me and the boys spent the past few months making the necessary preparations to ensure all those who come here would never forget their experience. But, everything fell apart when that monster of a moon first appeared in the sky followed by all those blasted monsters." She stomped her foot on the ground several times before letting out a crowing sound. " Bah! It would have been perfect but instead we ended up with a pitiful result where only a few crazed individuals decided to remain."

" Never thought you were so dedicated."

" We of the Carnival Committee have stuck to tradition for generations."

" I can see that."

" Even if there was a natural disaster plaguing Clock Town or if no one was around to witness it, we would still put on the carnival because of tradition." Sweetie Belle said. " The boys were dead set on making the bridge that would have connected to the Clock Tower the best one seen in years but as you can see, it looks rather pitiful, a pathetic excuse if I ever saw one."

She pointed to the bridge in question and Shining Armour looked at it for himself. Sweetie Belle wasn't kidding when she said that was a terrible looking bridge and the results clearly spoke for themselves. What looked to be the main foundation lacked support beams not to mention it had a few pieces missing here and there but it was the main part itself that was truly disheartening. It didn't even reach the tower itself, stopping short by a few feet, and with a couple of poles holding it up. No sane person would be crazy enough to try and use such a rickety looking thing even if professional carpenters had worked on it.

Looking at the pitiful excuse that was a bridge, Sweetie Belle punched it out of sheer frustration, and while it did wobble about for a few moments, it ultimately remained standing much to her surprise but also her dismay. Reaching behind her back, she pulled a rolled up piece of paper out from her pocket, and unfurled it revealing a drawing of what the bridge to the tower was supposed to have looked like upon construction. Shining Armour managed to get a good look at it before Sweetie Belle rolled the paper back up, placed it back in her pocket, and sighed heavily whilst placing her hand on the foundation of the bridge.

" I'm sorry it didn't work out."

" It's not your fault, Viscen."

" You truly are dedicated to ensuring that each Carnival of Time is better than the one before it."

Sweetie Belle looked at him for a split second before looking back at the foundation. " That may be true but I was so obsessed with the carnival that I was completely blinded by what was really happening. I said that the problem was the monsters that had begun appearing outside of town in recent months yet it was what lies above that turned out to be the true problem that threatens us all and our world."

" Well... I was a stickler for wanting everyone to flee."

" And they did so."

" Not everyone fled, Mutoh."

" You already know my reason for staying."

Shining Armour nodded. " Despite your men abandoning you and leaving you with a ramshackle bridge, you still decided to start the carnival even though most of the townsfolk fled before nightfall. Yet there are still a few people who refused to run including those who are still carrying on with their lives like nothing is happening. For example, those young boys who claim to be watching over the town continue looking around for people to help. And then there is the banker who is still taking in rupees though why anyone would want to deposit money during such times must be crazy if they think we will survive."

" Do you believe the end is upon us?"

" Yes... I truly believe that."

" A shame really as I hoped we were all going to live."

" The chances of us surviving are slim to none."

" Viscen... Have you ever heard of the legend of the Four Giants?"

" You mean that old children's story from long ago?" Shining Armour asked. " Well, yes, I have heard that story before. I mean, everyone has heard that story when they were naught but children, but don't tell me that you actually believe we will be saved by some giant creatures who protect this land from any threats made to it."

Sweetie Belle nodded. " Call me crazy for still believing in a fairy tale but I've held firm to those beliefs as long as I can remember."

" I'm not one to say that you shouldn't believe such things but considering we're at the very end, I won't criticize you."

" Ha!" Sweetie Belle laughed. " Didn't think I'd hear you say those words."

" You and I may have had our differences, Mutoh, but at the very least, we respect each other as professionals in our respective fields." Shining Armour said. " The carnival would never have been so successful these past years without you and your men pulling out all the stops. And while I do pride myself as being an effective captain, I will admit that I could do so much better and not second-guess myself."

" Without you, our town wouldn't be safe from what lies outside."

Shining Armour nodded. " Guess total armageddon turned out to be a blessing after all."

Sweetie Belle nodded. " We just have to wait for about six more hours and then it will all be over. On a different note, I wonder if that girl who used the Couple's Mask earlier during our meeting with Mayor Dotour fled town like most of the others did? I spoke with her a short while ago but then she disappeared completely. I hope that she didn't decide to climb up the tower as the only thing up there is some weird kid wearing a freaky looking mask on their face."

After whipping me repeatedly until I dropped down to both knees, Majora's Wrath began whipping me using a single tentacle, pausing for a second or two between strikes as a means of adding insult to injury. I tried getting away before it could attack me again but I just wasn't fast enough to avoid getting hit. The only saving grace was that the damage I was taking was minimal though it was slowly building up. I had just used one of my Red Potions and the thought of using another one so soon was something I wouldn't accept. As the whipping continued, Majora's Wrath screamed as each tentacle smacked me--it clearly enjoyed making me suffer.

But when it suddenly used its tentacles to leap forward, I couldn't help but question why it decided to do that. It was clearly in control of the fight and could have just continued to whip me until my body could no longer handle it. Sure it would've taken a long time to whittle down my health but I would have been utterly helpless. Perhaps it decided that it just couldn't wait any longer and decided to bring the fight over to me? In any case, I was able to get back up and swung my sword when it landed, causing Majora's Wrath to flail about while I proceeded to attack it repeatedly until it leapt away.

Landing on the other side of the room, Majora's Wrath taunted me and once again I chose to ignore it knowing full well that it was a trap. Upon realizing that I just wouldn't fall for such a cheap ploy, it stopped taunting me and immediately wrapped both tentacles around my legs. Before I could hack away at them to make them let go, Majora's Wrath jumped across the room, slammed me into a wall, jumping back to its previous position, slammed me into the ground, and then repeated the process all over again. By the time I was finally let go after it got bored of doing the same thing over and over, I was still rearing to continue.

Majora's Wrath then attempted to go into a frenzy but I flung a magical attack at it to prevent it from carrying out its onslaught but it managed to jump to the left to avoid getting hit by my attack. When it landed, I threw another attack only for it to jump again, and when it landed this time, I attempted a third attack only to fail as well when it once again jumped to the left to avoid getting hit by my attack. No doubt it was making me waste my magic in hopes of angering me to the point where I would rush forward but I needed to remain calm as my anger would only work against me.

I tried using a fourth magical attack only to discover that I had indeed run out of uses. My sword, which had been glowing and leaving behind a shimmer of energy whenever I swung it around, had lost its glow and had become just an ordinary sword. Without any magic, I could no longer stun Majora's Wrath long enough to attack it repeatedly. I needed to use my Green Potion or smash the remaining pots located by the walls in hopes one of them would contain some Magic Jars. Looking around quickly, I noticed there were at least four pots remaining yet Majora's Wrath was blocking my path and I doubted it was going to let me gain access to the pots.

One option was to take off my mask, use a Deku Nut or some other projectile in an attempt to blind it long enough for me to consume my potion. Or, I could just take as many hits as necessary while drinking the Green Potion. Or, I could just make a run for it and hope that I get over there without screwing up. Majora's Wrath decided to make the decision for me by flinging out both tentacles which wrapped themselves around my legs, lifted me up off the ground, and held me upside-down, my blood rushing to my head. Princess Twilight, who had been watching me get pummeled, flew down to my pockets and I knew what she was planning--can't believe I didn't consider her as a viable option.

" You have lasted much longer than I thought, worm." Majora's Wrath said.

" I'm used to fighting against powerful forces." I said.

" Such a boisterous claim coming from you."

" I'm serious!"

Majora's Wrath laughed. " All you fought were those pathetic creatures that have infested this world, creatures whose powers are clearly beneath me. I will acknowledge that you overcome the four demonic creatures that kept the guardians hidden yet even they are nothing compared to me. Are you telling me that you have faced against a force whose power exceeds even my own?"

I wasn't surprised that the mask was arrogant but perhaps I could distract it long enough whilst Princess Twilight does her thing. " There is someone who is even stronger than you and if he was here right now, you would have been destroyed before you would get a chance to respond."

" No one is more powerful than Majora!"

" This man definitely is."

" Who is this one you speak of, worm?"

" His name is Ganondorf." I answered. " And his power is unmatched by anyone."

" Why have I not seen this one?"

" He doesn't exist in this world or rather he's not supposed to."

Majora's Wrath was immediately intrigued by what I was saying and it allowed Princess Twilight to search my pocket for the Green Potion. She succeeded in pulling it out of my pocket but made sure not to reveal herself otherwise the mask would know. " Your words make no sense, worm, but I am curious as to who this Ganondorf is that you claim is more powerful than me, so you shall summon him."

I gulped. " You... want me to summon Ganondorf?"

Majora's Wrath nodded. " I want to see his power for myself."

" Um... I'm not sure if you can."

" You will summon him now!"

" Ganondorf will only appear when he wishes to." I said. " And even then, he's not supposed to be a part of this world because of a force that's beyond your understanding and would take me way too long to explain. I now wish I hadn't said anything about him as now you'll just be obsessed with wanting to meet someone who shouldn't be here. Why not just focus on ending my life."

This caused Majora's Wrath to start stomping its foot on the ground in sheer anger. I had succeeded in riling it up by bringing up Ganondorf--who for once had proven to be incredibly useful to me--and that allowed Princess Twilight to uncork my bottle of Green Potion, pour the contents down my throat--it felt awkward because of being upside-down--cork it back up, place it back in my pocket, and finally hide behind me without Majora's Wrath knowing any different. To think that talking about the Dark Lord was what would distract this demonic monster long enough for me to regain my Magic Power.

Now that I could fling magical attacks, I did exactly that, catching Majora's Wrath off guard, forcing it to let go of me, and I dropped to the ground making sure I tilted my body enough for me to land on my feet as opposed to my head--the latter would have really hurt. With it flailing about, I fired a few more magical attacks that struck it--perhaps jump attacks would have been better as those inflicted double damage as opposed to the normal way--until it jumped to the right to avoid taking further damage. Surely, I was getting close considering how much punishment I've inflicted on it but then some monsters were more resilient than others.

" How did you do that?"

" Let's just say I had some help from a very good friend."

Majora's Wrath leaned forward to get a closer look at Princess Twilight who didn't hide behind me this time. " You are being assisted by one of the fairy folk, worm? Either you have made it your obedient slave or it helps you of its own free will. I don't care because it changes nothing! You will die at the hands of Majora!"

" Then why am I doing so well against you?"

" I have underestimated you, worm."

" Why not surrender now?" I asked. " That way, we can both walk away without either of us getting killed."

" You dare to mock me, Majora!?" Majora's Wrath shouted. " This will only end when I tear you to shreds leaving nothing more than a bloodied corpse on the ground. Once you are dead along with that fairy, I shall seek out this one you call Ganondorf whom you claim is stronger than me. I must see with my own eyes whether this one is what you claim to be true or is merely a false worm who thinks they are something special."

" I don't think you will be able to find him."

" If he possesses great power as you say, I will be able to sense it for myself."

" No, I'm afraid you won't." I said. " As much as I would like to see him get what's coming to him, your chances of finding Ganondorf are less than zero. He can foresee everything that happens long before they are conceived and he can see any and all possible outcomes. No doubt he already knows about your ambition towards finding him and has chosen to ignore such prattle because of deeming you unworthy to be within his presence. I'm sorry that I brought the whole thing up in the first place. If he were to come before you, Majora, you will wish you were elsewhere. Trust me... He could kill you without even having to lift a finger."

" You deem me weak, worm?"

I shook my head. " You are the most powerful force that I have faced in this world. But, Ganondorf is stronger than you are but he comes from a different world or rather he comes from a different time period though I'm not sure where or when. Why not take solace knowing that no one in Termina can match the kind of power you possess and just accept that there are those who exist in other world whose power exceeds your own."

My words made Majora's Wrath swing its tentacles about and I raised my sword to parry each blow. Clearly, it had lost its mind knowing that it could never be the strongest though why did it even care in the first place? From what I remembered listening to its ramblings before coming up here, the mask wanted to destroy Termina and was determined to consume everything in the process. How could it have changed its way of thinking from pure destruction to wanting to ascertain itself as being the most powerful? In a way, the two were connected because one would need to be strong enough to destroy a world.

As its temper continued to rage, it then suddenly spawned what looked to be a spinning top. I personally thought it was cute at first that it had gone and created a mere child's toy but that sentiment changed when the thing began moving towards me of its own accord and that it possessed spikes that looked like they could pierce the toughest of hides. I flung a magical attack in hopes of stopping it but my magic bounced off the spinning top and I knew my only choice was to see if I could outrun it. Turning around, I began running all around the chamber making sure to keep my eyes of Majora's Wrath.

The spinning top proved to be very dangerous as it pursued me without mercy until it managed to catch me on the back of my legs. I couldn't stop to check on the possible wound it had just inflicted so I kept on running until the thing started slowing down. A few moments later, I looked back and saw that it had stopped before burning away to nothing. No doubt in my mind that Majora's Wrath had plenty more where that one came from so I needed to be prepared for an additional attack alongside those tentacles. Strange how it didn't use it until now so perhaps it was on its last legs?

" Are your legs okay?" Twilight asked.

I looked down behind my back to see that despite having some deep cuts, there was no blood flow. At the very least, I hadn't been cut in the sensitive parts of my legs. Had that happened, my movement would have become severely limited. " I'm not bleeding or anything so I'm still good to go, Twilight."

" That spinning top was certainly unexpected."

" My magical attacks do nothing against it."

" It could be that they are indestructible." Twilight said. " If that is indeed the case then all you can do is avoid them until they run of spin. I wouldn't be surprised if you were to have to deal with two or more of them at the same time."

" I hope that isn't the case."

" You might want to use another Red Potion as you look to be running out of steam."

" But I only have the one left now."

Princess Twilight gulped. " Well... You might want to use it now just in case Majora's Wrath decides to punish you especially after that spiel of yours involving Ganondorf or you could take a few more hits before choosing to use it. Either way, you need to make this one count, Sunset. On a more positive note, it seems Majora's Wrath is definitely showing signs of exhaustion given that I can see it breathing heavily."

" So it's almost had enough?"

" Yes, but don't get too overconfident now." Twilight answered. " There are those who will truly unleash their power when backed into a corner with no place to go. I suggest you continue attacking from a distance but maybe use some of those jump attacks of yours."

" And my magic?"

" What you have is what you've got."

I had a feeling Her Highness was going to say that but then this battle had dragged on for quite some time so her words had merit. I had no indication if the remaining pots contained additional Magic Jar so I had to rely on what I had left of my Magic Power. If Majora's Wrath was truly on its last legs, I only needed to strike it a few more times--jump attacks would make it even less--but that involved getting up close, something I hadn't really done throughout this fight. Was I afraid it would kill me in an instant if I got too close? I shouldn't be as I've gone up close against other monsters. Perhaps I was letting it all go to my head or something.

" WORM!" Majora's Wrath shouted.

" What?" I asked.

" How could you have pushed me, Majora, to the brink?"

" Because you underestimated my abilities and overestimated yours."

" There is definitely more to you than appearances suggest."

" You have no idea."

Majora's Wrath then laughed. " You have definitely intrigued me, worm, despite your defiance in not succumbing to the peaceful embrace of death. I have seen many humans like you over the course of the centuries long before I was cast into shadows until I was found and they were meek, worthless, snivelling wretches. But you... You are so much different and not just because you have pushed me so far. For a human, worm, you were modeled from a different clod of mud."

I gulped. " Um... I'm not a human."

" Not now you're not."

" No, I mean, I'm not really a human."

" Are you mocking me, worm!?"

I shook my head. " I'm being very serious with you. In truth... I'm a pony from a magical world where others like me live in mostly peaceful harmony. To be more precise... I'm a unicorn though I haven't been back home ever since doing something terrible that I continue having issues with." I made sure not to mention that Princess Twilight was an alicorn in case Majora's Wrath assumed that she was just as powerful as it was. It's reaction to the revelation of what I really was looked like it went over well but then it began cracking its tentacles on the ground. Either it wasn't amused or clearly didn't care of my true form.

Again, Majora's Mask laughed. " So... You are in fact one of the lesser life-forms that exist?" It cracked its tentacles harder and faster than before. " Now I have nothing holding me back from stripping you of your flesh and bone. Majora will not allow such a lower being to defeat me even if you are stronger than I thought. When you are dead, this world shall follow you into the eternal abyss so you won't be going there alone."

It then began whipping me repeatedly with its tentacles in another frenzied motion in a bid to wear me down to the point where I couldn't fight back. Unlike before when I was stuck and unable to move, I had a much better idea of what I was dealing with. As each tentacles connected with my body, I moved slightly backwards in hopes of getting out of their range without letting it know what was going on. It took some doing along with lots of chip damage before I was able to get away from the tentacles yet I dropped down onto one knee before getting knocked down onto my chest by another tentacle whipping.

My legs were then wrapped up once again and I winced because the previous pain from the spinning top triggered again but before I could be flung about, I swung my sword, firing a magic attack that missed when Majora's Wrath leapt backwards, releasing its grip on my legs. When it landed, it summoned another spinning top before launching it forward and I quickly got back up onto my feet and started running, or tried to only to collapse because of the pain coming from my legs--those tentacles must have touched a nerve. The spinning top collided into me, knocking me forward into the wall and would repeat this again before it stopped and burned to nothing.

Now I really needed to drink my remaining Red Potion and make it count. I reached into my pocket and began fumbling about only to get hit again by another spinning top that came directly me, knocking me into the wall then pushing me forward into the ground, finishing up with a slight roll. Getting back up, Majora's Wrath switched back to its tentacles by wrapping one around my legs and flinging me to the other side. As I landed, it used its other tentacle by having it wrapped around my neck, and began squeezing tightly, my breathing becoming difficult, the expression on my face becoming limp.

Knowing that I could pass out at any moment, Princess Twilight decided to do the unthinkable by flying over to Majora's Wrath and get in its face. It tried looking away from her in hopes of not breaking its concentration but she refused to stop and it released its grip on my legs in the hopes of knocking her down. I watched as Her Highness flew about and made the tentacle smack Majora's Wrath across its body releasing the other tentacle allowing me to breathe again. From there, the tentacles swung about in hopes of swatting Princess Twilight but she proved to be too small of a target for them to hit.

This was her way of giving me enough time to heal my wounds and I wasn't about to let her efforts go to waste. I pulled out my last bottle of Red Potion, uncorked it, drank the potion, corked it back up, and put it away as my strength returned to me once more along with my wounds healing. Princess Twilight was still distracting Majora's Wrath though she almost got skewered when one of the tentacles shot out at her with such speed but when she saw that I was fine, she flew back over to me though she chose to rest on top of my hat due to exhaustion from playing such a risky game.

When Majora's Wrath figured out what had happened, it raised its tentacles and was about to go into a frenzy again, but I swung my sword, firing a magical attack, knocking it off balance, and was about to fling some more attack when I remembered what Princess Twilight said. I dashed forward and performed a jump attack, resulting in Majora's Mask letting out another bloodcurdling scream yet it still wasn't enough to defeat it--maybe I should have used the magical attacks. Anyway, it reeled back before summoning two spinning tops, launching them out at me and things were about to get complicated.

Both tops clanged off of one another, increasing their speed and maneuverability, and that was enough for me to run away. One of the tops came to a sudden stop--perhaps it got hit a little too hard--burning away to nothing whereas the other one slammed into my back knocking me to the ground. It then ran me over before it also stopped and burned away leaving me feeling like I just got run over by a car. Getting back up, Majora's Wrath threw out two more spinning tops that began spinning forward and I didn't want to have to deal with them this time as they were just plain annoying.

Leaping over both spinning tops, Majora's Wrath whipped me several times with its tentacles yet I continued advancing until I swung my sword unleashing a magical attack. It jumped to the left and when it landed, I flung another attack which missed as it jumped to the right screaming all the while. Landing again, it whipped me a few more times and was about to summon two more spinning tops to give me trouble but I swung my sword, throwing one more magic attack that left it disoriented, flailing about completely helpless. I dashed forward, used another jump attack and Majora's Wrath screamed differently as its body began shaking.

As before, it gravitated towards the center of the chamber before collapsing to the ground in a heap. I then walked slowly towards where it fell making sure my sword was ready to strike in case something unexpected happened. After everything I had experienced with Majora's Mask changing forms twice, I didn't want to take any chances. Reaching the motionless body, I tapped it with my foot and immediately stepped back out of fear it would suddenly lash out against me but nothing happened making me wonder if it was truly defeated. I then poked it with my sword and again nothing happened.

" Is it?" Twilight asked.

I decided to prod it with my sword again just to be extra sure. " It's not moving... I think it's dead."

Princess Twilight breathed a sigh of relief. " Then that means you've done it, Sunset. You've saved all of Termina from the wrath of Majora's Mask."

This time, I breathed a sigh of relief as I put away my sword. " That was absolutely intense from start to finish. If not for the fact that it had three different forms, with each one being stronger than the last one, I'd say this was a much harder fight than what I had against Ganondorf--Lord Tirek--during my previous journey. If I could take one thing from this whole experience, it would be making sure to have the correct healing items on hand. If not for the pots containing Magic Jars, I would've run out of magic a lot sooner and be completely helpless against Majora's Mask."

" Perhaps you could use this new knowledge in the future."

I shuddered. " Personally... I'd rather go back to my normal life even if it's filled with wild Equestrian Magic. As much fun as this adventure has been, there were times where I absolutely hated it with a passion and wished it had never happened. I know it sounds weird given how my overall mood has changed from time to time but I really do want to not have to go on a third adventure like this any time soon."

" Do you think you will?"

" Yes."

Princess Twilight was surprised. " Then why did you just say you didn't?"

" Because Ganondorf is sure to send me on another journey some time after this one has ended." I answered. " I've already told you why he brought me to both of these worlds so there's no need for me to repeat myself but I just know he will make me go through another adventure just so that he can break down my spirit until I pledge my loyalty and become his obedient servant."

" Maybe he will leave you alone if you challenge him as you currently are?"

" Do you think I stand a chance?"

" It's not like he's been holding back or anything."

I gulped. " Um..."

Princess Twilight's jaw dropped. " If that's the case then I'm not sure if your current body is strong enough to defeat him. You started this journey off pretty badly if you want the honest truth from me, Sunset, but you quickly got better until you reached this exact point. I'd say you're not the same person from before so if anything, you could give Ganondorf an unexpected surprise."

" Guess all I can do is give it my best shot."

" I'm sure he won't kill you."

That was perhaps the one positive thing about having to deal with the likes of Ganondorf . Despite him being vastly superior to me in every way, he never once threatened to kill me even when he clearly had the proper motivation. If he were to end my life, all of his hard work towards making me his loyal servant would have been wasted and he would ultimately lose out. To him, I needed to remain alive in addition to overcoming whatever he threw me into to fulfill his expectations. It wasn't the best outcome for me but it was better than being dead and my family mourning over my loss.

And yet, I still hadn't figured out what Princess Twilight's role was in all of this. Again, I felt tremendous guilt over having unintentionally dragging her into this conflict given that she already had her hands full with her duties back home in Equestria, yet not once had she blamed me for any of it. While I appreciated her honestly, I couldn't help but feel that she didn't deserve such a punishment. If anyone deserved it, it was me because of my past actions. Sure, I had overcome them for the most part yet there was still a lingering regret in my heart I couldn't get rid of no matter how hard I tried. I supposed I just had to accept it and hoped it wouldn't end up destroying me.

Since there was nothing else for me to do, I turned around and was about to walk away when I came to yet another sudden realization; how was I supposed to leave this place? I couldn't see any exits so unless a miracle happened like teleporting away, I was essentially trapped here. That wasn't the only problem I had to contend with. There was also the fact that the moon had yet to return to where it came from. It should have left upon Majora's Wrath's defeat so did that mean it still lived? Unless there was some kind of delayed reaction, I wasn't finished with this adventure yet.

" Twilight..."

" What is it?"

" The Four Giants are still holding up the moon."

" Does that mean what I think it does?"

I nodded. " Majora's Wrath isn't dead."

Princess Twilight sighed. " I had a feeling that it was still alive but I guess we were briefly fooled by it pretending to be dead. I suggest turning around right now before it gets a chance to take advantage of your lowered defences."

Whipping myself around, I drew my sword from its scabbard--I had one in this form apparently--only for a tentacle to knock it out of my hand, fly across the chamber, and land on the ground with a loud clanging sound. Before I could run over and pick it up, the same tentacle wrapped itself around my legs with the other wrapping around my neck. I was completely immobilized and once again at the mercy of Majora's Wrath, who had gotten back onto its feet though its demeanour had clearly changed. Blood--or whatever constituted as such--trickled down from several open wounds and its expression was one of sheer hated towards me.

" WORM!!!!" Majora's Wrath shouted.

" I knew you weren't dead yet." I said as I struggled to breathe.

" How dare you inflict such pain to Majora!"

" Desperation... It looks good on you..."

" I'm going to make you wish you were never born." Majora's Wrath said, the anger in its voice calming down which had me worried. " Because of you, my body has been ravaged where I now bleed the blood of my being but I still live though the same cannot be said about you, worm. You cannot escape from my grasp and that accursed sword of the demon is now beyond your reach leaving you helpless and at my mercy. I was foolish to have given you the Fierce Deity's Mask! It was a poor misjudgment on my part but I shall not make that mistake again."

" I... I'll still defeat you."

Majora's Wrath laughed. " You have been ensnared and are helpless, worm. But, I wonder how long it will take until you run out of air and die before my eyes? I think you have about a minute left. And do not expect that little fairy to help you now. I can see that it has exhausted itself after flittering about in its misguided bid of attacking Majora even though it had next to no power with which to do so."

" Got to... Get my sword." I said as I looked behind me and saw it on the ground.

" You cannot escape me."

It did have a valid point in that the tentacle around my legs prevented me from moving and the one around my neck was slowly cutting off my air supply. I had less than a minute to get my sword otherwise I was going to die right at the final hurdle of this journey. I tried jumping to see if I could leap out from the tentacle's grip but it didn't budge an inch so that idea was a lost cause. I then tried wiggling my body in hopes of pulling on both tentacles long enough until it let go due to strain yet that didn't work either. I was beginning to lose consciousness due to lack of air and that's when I had one last idea.

Leaning my head forward as best as I could without putting too much strain on it, I opened my mouth and bit down on the tentacle with as much force as I had. On the one hand, using such a primitive maneuver felt degrading but I used to do such things when I was a pony. On the other, I really needed to wash my mouth out as the tentacle tasted absolutely revolting like I had bitten down on the foulest thing ever known. In any case, my unorthodox attack made Majora's Wrath scream in pain. It began flailing about but my grip on its tentacle was firm but it quickly increased its intensity in hopes of making me let go.

This little stunt of mine went on for a while and during that, my consciousness continued to slip as my breathing became even more difficult, but I refused to let go of my grip, questionable and weird as it was. Just when it looked like I was about to lose it entirely, Majora's Wrath finally released its grip on my neck and I began breathing intensely as though I hadn't in years. Now I needed to free my legs. My arms weren't long enough for me to grab the tentacle nor could I wiggle free so I decided to go with another crazy idea. Ducking down slightly, I pushed my body outward and began applying pressure to the tentacle.

Seeing what I was doing, Majora's Wrath began pulling back to stop me from reaching my sword yet I continued applying pressure even as my legs began feeling tremendous pain resulting from the tentacle getting tighter. Again, this went for some time before Majora's Wrath could no longer maintain its grip, and it let go in a rather horrific manner where its tentacle pulled itself apart at the tendrils--I had to look away or else I would have thrown up. I went flying across the room, landed next to my sword, picked it up, turned to face my opponent, and charged straight at it.

It swung both tentacles in hopes of hitting me yet I avoided these as I rushed straight at it, my sword lunging forward, pierced its torso, and came out the other side. In what felt like an eternity, I had delivered a fatal blow against Majora's Wrath. It flailed about like before, swinging about its tentacles in frustration, but this time it didn't collapse but instead it floated off the ground before letting out one final scream as its body began crumbling to dust. As this was happening, a bright light then blinded me and everything turned white. Was victory mine at last or was I to face off against it still?

Epilogue: The Beginning of the End?

View Online

Author's Notes:

At long last, the journey has come to an end, but not before one final conflict and a few plot twists take place.

Cast appearing in this chapter.

Sunset Shimmer - Link/????
Princess Twilight Sparkle - Tatl the Fairy
Starlight Glimmer - Skull Kid
Spike - Tael the Fairy
Rainbow Dash - Aveil
Applejack - Cremia
Twilight Sparkle (Sci-Twi) - Pamela
Pinkie Pie - Tingle
Rarity - Lulu
Fluttershy - Deku Princess
Principal Celestia - One of the Four Giants
Vice Principal Luna - One of the Four Giants
Dean Cadance - One of the Four Giants
Flurry Heart - One of the Four Giants
Apple Bloom - Romani
Scootaloo - Anju
Big Macintosh - Gorman
Granny Smith - Mrs. Barten (Mr.)
Sonata Dusk - Happy Mask Saleswoman (Salesman)
Coloratura - Evan of the Indigo-Go's
Spitfire - One of Igos du Ikana's Guards
Fleetfoot - One of Igos du Ikana's Guards
Soarin - Pamela's Father
Derpy - Second-in-Command of the Gerudo Pirates
Tree Hugger - Deku Queen (King)
Mayor Mare - Mayor Dotour
Tender Taps - Kafei

Guest: Ganondorf

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
October 30, 2017
Epilogue: The Beginning of the End?

At long last... I had defeated Majora's Mask. Despite it going through a few transformation, pushing me to the limit, and even relying on a last ditch effort in an attempt to kill me, I had prevailed and that meant the world of Termina could finally experience peace again. And yet... That's what I thought was going to happen. I assumed that my adventure was over but instead I wasn't so sure about it. Everything had gone white resulting in me blacking out once more whilst the body of Majora's Mask crumbled to dust upon its defeat leaving me lost and without any answers. Had I truly won or was I to face yet another form?

If I were to continue fighting against Majora's Mask, I would have an advantage in the form of being on equal footing through the use of the Fierce Deity's Mask. Even though I had gained tremendous power by becoming a demonic version of myself, the fact that I was wearing a mask that was filled with evil gave me nothing but worry. I was in complete control of my actions but I had no way of knowing how long I could maintain it. If I were to lose control of myself, I would have become Sunset Demon reborn, the desire for destruction consuming every last fibre of my being, losing my humanity.

No... I couldn't allow myself to become a monster again. It was a part of my life that I had cast aside in favour of a better future but it still managed to nibble at my feet as a reminder that no matter what I did, it would continue to torment my very being. I would forever be struggling against the evil which had tainted me in my bid to keep it under control. So long as friendship was in my heart and I was surrounded by my family, the evil within me would never again emerge even when using an evil power to overcome the very evil I had to fight against to bring about peace.

That's why... That's why... That's why I wanted this whole experience to come to an end. I had endured so much torment throughout this journey that I had constantly questioned my very existence not to mention other facets resulting in conflicted answers which lacked any true comprehension. While I enjoyed the experience of adventuring--it reminded me of when I used to have similar adventures in Equestria before and after becoming Princess Celestia's student--the pain I felt was too much. If not for Princess Twilight giving me guidance, I would have succumbed a long time ago. For that, I owed Her Highness so much even if it was beyond my own limitations.

Opening my eyes, I discovered that I was awake spiritually whilst my physical body remained unconscious. Looking around my surroundings, I was back outside Clock Town, flanked on both sides by Princess Twilight and Spike, and there were other people outside scattered about. Why couldn't I wake up? I tried to but nothing happened leaving me to wonder if I had truly died against Majora's Mask. If death had claimed me then Ganondorf would have failed in his own ambition--a positive despite the overall negative--but what about my friends, my family? Without me, how could they continue to go on? I tried to open my eyes again but still nothing happened.

Everyone--including Princess Twilight and Spike--then looked up at the sky prompting me to do the same and I couldn't believe what I was seeing. The moon, whose gaping mouth allowed me to enter it and interact with the children who played there, was back to normal or what constituted as such--its mouth had closed--but then it too looked upward as though something were looming above it. Suddenly, a bright light began forming at the peak of the moon and it began to crack in various places, resulting in additional beams of light pouring out from those cracks. Was the moon about to explode?

A tornado-like presence then formed where the initial light first appeared and it began sucking the moon up into it whilst it continued to crack. I had no idea what was going on but the people continued to be mesmerized by such a spectacle even though they should have fled back into town or something. This entire sequence continued on until the moon completely vanished in a final burst of bright light leaving nothing behind other than a beautiful rainbow which began shining across the sky. The Four Giants, who had spent this entire time cradling the moon, looked up whilst the people began cheering.

Just seeing that rainbow made me think that perhaps things weren't as bad as I was making them out to be. Sure, pain was something that everyone felt in their lives be it on a rare occurrence or happening frequently, but deep down there was always a sense of hope even when it looked like it could never happen. Hope was a feeling those who truly believed in it strove for though it proved difficult to achieve especially in a world filled with chaos and uncertainly, but when you actually see it for yourself with your own eyes, you just feel like believing things would become better in the end.

Perhaps the strangest sight I saw was Sweetie Belle and Shining Armour looking up at what had transpired. Both of them had been on opposite ends when it came to the fate of the Carnival of Time resulting in pointless bickering, but upon reflecting back on it now, they had their reasons for defending their actions. Both would ultimately be forced to eat crow--not actual crow but rather having to admit they were wrong about what happened--with Shining Armour bearing the bigger brunt given his opinion was more polarizing though Sweetie Belle wasn't innocent either.

Dawn of a New Day

While this was fine and all, the problem was that I still couldn't open my physical eyes and awaken. I didn't want to spend the rest of my time stuck as a spirit--it was peaceful to some degree--so I tried for a third time to wake up. Perhaps the previous attempts failed because the moon's presence was still around along with other forces that prevented me from opening my eyes but now there was nothing standing in my way. Struggling from a spiritual perspective, I concentrated as hard as I could hoping for a small miracle, and slowly my eyes began fluttering before opening up entirely though I felt groggy despite seeing everything.

" You've finally woke up." Twilight said.

I rubbed the back of my head. " How long was I out for?"

" I'd say about several minutes or so."

" Twilight... I saw everything that happened just now."

Princess Twilight was surprised. " Really? I thought for sure that you weren't going to come out of it, Sunset. I mean, you were lying there completely limp and looked like you were devoid of life but I refused to abandon your side until you woke up. To be honest, a part of me thought you weren't going to pull through but I'm glad to be wrong. Once again, Sunset, you've defied expectations." It then clicked in her mind as to what I had just said. " You saw everything? Wow... Colour me impressed if not slightly jealous that you managed to do that in the form of a spirit but I doubt you want to go through that again."

I nodded. " Being a spirit was fine but I'd rather live. Anyway, the moon has disappeared so I assume it's gone back to wherever it came from?"

" Maybe not exactly." Twilight answered. " I suspect that Majora's Mask created the moon or at the very least manipulated it into dropping down from the sky. In any case, it needed to coerce someone into carrying out its bidding and it chose Starlight Glimmer for that task. Without Majora's Mask, the moon no longer had any power so it just disappeared. I don't know if the Four Giants did something but the important thing is that Termina has been saved thanks to your efforts, Sunset. Now all we need to figure out is how to change this world back to what it's meant to be, the world that you call home."

" I already know."

" Really?"

I nodded. " We need to have Ganondorf change things back."

Princess Twilight's expression went from surprise to glum. " Then we're stuck, Sunset. If we have to rely on him to change this world back to normal, then you might have to become his servant or subject yourself to either more torment or humiliation depending on what he wants from you."

" Not the most comforting of results there, Twilight."

" Sorry..."

" No... I had a feeling that I would need to resort to such actions in order to convince Ganondorf to change this world back." I said. " I've come a long way since my first encounter with him back when my first journey reached its conclusion so I believe I can hold my own even if his power is clearly far greater considering what he possesses. Then again, if I could use the Fierce Deity's Mask in combination with my Daydream Shimmer form, that might be enough to defeat him. I won't be able to kill him though because of one little factor that he doesn't rely on as a crutch."

" Huh?" Twilight asked, clearly confused by that statment. " What do you mean?"

" Ganondorf can't be killed by conventional means."

Princess Twilight's jaw dropped. " What!? How is that even possible!?"

I drew out the Gilded Sword and held it firmly in my hands before revealing the truth to Princess Twilight. I told her that Ganondorf was immune to most conventional items and magic due to his dark power combined with the Triforce granting him near invulnerability. Only a magic infused sword and silver arrows--surprised I actually remembered that--could inflict damage and ultimately kill him yet I possessed neither. I wasn't sure if the sword I used whilst wearing the Fierce Deity's Mask counted as a magic sword despite it being able to fling magic but even if it were classified as such, it meant nothing as without silver arrows, there was no way of truly defeating him.

It's unfortunate that the Light Arrow was useless against him despite it being most effective against those who relied on darkness. The version of Ganondorf who was portrayed by Lord Tirek was vulnerable to it in both of his forms so I assumed that the real version would have the same issue. It turned out that he had somehow moved beyond being vulnerable to the light and instead could only be killed with the power of silver. It made Ganondorf come off as being like a werewolf or some other undead monster that could only be destroyed using some kind of silver material.

Even with the power of the Fierce Deity on my side, my best hope was to overpower Ganondorf enough where he would be forced to withdraw and change this world back to the way it was meant to be. Of course, it wouldn't be easy even with having the ultimate mask as I knew he had been holding back during our previous encounters. Unlike other monsters who had a limitation with regards to their power, the Dark Lord seemed to possess an infinite amount of strength that was beyond any mere mortal. Was he human or was he a demon? If he was the latter, then my chances of victory were extremely slim.

Suddenly, Spike flew into my face. " So you're the one who saved the Skull Kid?"

Even though I knew he was referring to Starlight, I had to play along with the fact that he only knew her by her name in this world. " Well... I wouldn't say that I saved her given that she was rejected by Majora's Mask."

" No, you saved her life."

" Are you sure about that?"

Spike nodded. " If you hadn't summoned the Four Giants, the Skull Kid would have destroyed all of Termina and wiped out everything in the process. You were able to free her from the influence that weird mask had over her so for that you have my eternal gratitude. But... I suppose I should take the blame for what happened."

I knew he was going to say that so I attempted to say otherwise. " You didn't know what was going to happen."

" No... I knew all along." Spike said. " I knew something was wrong when the Skull Kid began acting like a monster instead of the innocent child my sister and I first met. Granted, she wasn't entirely innocent due to her mischievous nature and having had a falling out with her friends but she never once considered wanting to destroy Termina. That mask convinced her to carry out its desire for destruction but I think she enjoyed it the more she used its dark power. I could have stopped the Skull Kid but I wasn't strong enough and it resulted in so many innocent lives being lost."

" You mean the likes of Darmani and Mikau?" I asked making sure not to use their actual names.

" They were only trying to help out their respective people yet the mask made the Skull Kid do things that resulted in their deaths."

" Are you sure she didn't have a desire to kill them?"

Spike went silent for a moment before answering. " Maybe she did because of wanting revenge against those who hurt her but those two along with other people didn't do such a thing so why were they punished?" He went silent again and floated around for a while in hopes of finding an answer but his expression ultimately signalled that he couldn't come up with anything. It seemed there was much about Starlight in this world that remained unknown but perhaps now was the time to get those answers. " I'm sorry but I just can't figure it out and personally, I'd rather not because it would just lead to further problems."

" You do realize that she has a lot to answer for."

" I know and I believe she knows that as well."

" It's not up to you to make that distinction."

" What do you mean?"

" Only she can make such a statement because it was her own actions that caused all of this." I answered. " While Majora's Mask did manipulate her like a puppet because she possessed a weak will, much of what happened resulted from what she desired, namely wanting to get back at those who had wronged her. What started off as innocent pranks soon became acts of murder and destruction until she chose to end everything by bringing a moon down on us. She may be back to normal but she isn't going to have an easy time of things because the people of Termina won't soon forget."

Spike sighed. " I know, but I wish there was something I could do."

" Perhaps you could help explain things to the people."

" Do you think that will work?"

I nodded. " Maybe but it's better than not doing anything. Now, where do you suppose I can find her?"

Spike pointed to my right and standing a short distance away was Starlight herself. She seemed perfectly fine from where I was standing but deep down I knew that she wasn't fine by any stretch of the word. After all, she had almost destroyed the entire world as a means of pulling off the ultimate prank and the Four Giants might not be willing to forgive her as she did imprison them by sealing them into the masks of those who guarded each of the four temples. Then again, they might be willing seeing as she was under the influence of Majora's Mask and much of her actions were caused by it manipulating her.

As I continued thinking about it, I felt a nudge from behind pressing against my back and I quickly whipped myself around and saw that Epona was behind me. If I recalled correctly, she had been left behind somewhere on the path that lead to Ikana Canyon. I made sure she wasn't near any of those Real Bombchu--in truth she could survive anything given she plowed her way through most of those monsters without any problems--so how did she get over here? I'm not complaining about it as I loved her to pieces due to her understanding me better than most--barring Princess Twilight--and I had hoped she would come back with me to where I was supposed to be.

Walking forward, I was about to talk to Starlight when she instead spoke to the Four Giants who were looking down at her. " You guys... You hadn't forgotten about me? I mean, it has been such a very long time since then and I believed you had neglected me."

" How could we forget you, oh imp?" Principal Celestia asked. " Even though you meant a great deal to us, we had our sworn duty which had to come first. As the guardians of this world, we cannot ignore our duty or else the world would become lost to all who dwell within it."

" But... You know what happened back then."

" You were young and did not understand the true nature which had been given unto us."

" It's not like you told me about it."

Principal Celestia shook her head. " Oh imp! Our dearest friend... There is much about us that you could never hope to understand though know that this is true for all of the creatures that walk this land. None of them can comprehend us even though some have tried to understand our very existence. We never meant to cast you away but you gave us no alternative when you began causing misery to those we protect."

" I... I felt as though you had abandoned me."

" Friendship is strong but our duty is stronger."

" And yet, you must atone for your sins." Vice Principal Luna said.

Starlight then lowered her head and her entire body began to shiver out of fear. " I... I didn't mean to do all of that stuff that I did."

Vice Principal Luna thrust out her hand indicating that she wasn't believing Starlight's words. " While you claimed that you were merely having fun at the expense of those that we have sworn to protect, you lost your way when you began inflicting pain and misery upon them in the name of destruction. It is unfortunate that we Giants cannot accept your attempt at feigning ignorance when the truth is clear to us. Perhaps the worst of your sins is when you sealed us away in those accursed masks. Had you not done this under the influence of the evil mask, we could have prevented so much from happening but instead we were powerless."

" So... you can't forgive me."

" Normally, we would not forgive such actions and instead banish you from this world forever."

" I understand and accept your judgment."

" You would not seek revenge like before?"

Starlight shook her head. " You're right in that I can't pretend that what I did wasn't my fault. Had I not been so weak, the mask would have never manipulated me and I would have stopped using it sooner instead of continuing to use its power. My actions are clearly unforgivable and you guys don't have to forgive me. For that, I will accept any punishment you can come up with including being banished or even wiped out of existence."

Again, Vice Principal Luna thrust out her hand. " You did not let me finish, oh imp. Normally, we would not forgive you for your actions... but... in this case, we choose to do so. We realize that it was because of our dedication to our duty as guardians that caused all of this to happen. We should not have cast you aside for the sake of our duty and instead embraced you as our friend. However, the people are not so forgiving."

" The people shall determine your fate." Dean Cadance said.

" Not you?" Starlight asked.

Dean Cadance shook her head. " We Giants have done what we can for you, oh imp, so now you must face the people that you hurt. We cannot say what will become of you but we believe that they will come to an understanding. There is no telling how long it will take or whether they can forgive you but this is the only path you can take as the alternative is one you are most familiar with."

" Do you guys still think of me as a friend?"

" We do despite what happened."

" I suppose I can accept that."

" It is as my sister said." Dean Cadance began. " Friendship is a very powerful force and it is one that cannot be broken so easily. There will be times where it shall be tested because of factors that are beyond our control but you must have hope that things shall work out upon the final conclusion. If you wish to understand friendship, oh imp, you should look towards the one who freed us from the evil masks that we were imprisoned in."

I looked up at Dean Cadance. " Me?" I asked as I pointed at myself. " I wouldn't call myself an expert on friendship."

Dean Cadance smiled as she placed her hand on her chest. " And yet you were willing to save our friend despite all she had done to you. You were able to look past such trivial matters and saw her as someone who was lost. Chosen one... You're being here in this world was no act of fate nor destiny. You were brought here because only you could resolve the issues that had plagued this world, issues that we Giants could not resolve on our own. You have earned our eternal gratitude and for that we shall forever keep thee in our hearts for all eternity long after you have gone."

Flurry Heart then spoke up. " Goo-goo! Gah! Hehe! Goo-goo! Gah-go!"

I had no idea what she said and I was expecting Sugarcoat to appear and translate but she was no where to be seen. Perhaps she had already returned to where Flurry Heart originated from as the guardian of Ikana? Either that or she didn't feel like saying anything for her own reasons. " Um... What did you say?"

" Goo-gah! Gah! Goo!"

" I don't understand."

Flurry Heart then began pointing in different directions. " Goo! Hehe! Goo!"

" Aren't those the directions you four came from?"

Flurry Heart nodded. " Hehe! Goo-goo! Gah!" That was when she stunned me and everyone else present when she suddenly began speaking actual words. " W... We... We must return... return... return to... place... place. We must return."

" You're going now?"

" We must return."

That's when Starlight decided to speak up. " Must you go now?"

Flurry Heart nodded. " We must return."

" Know that you shall always be our friend, oh imp." Principal Celestia said. " While we may not be able to play games with you like we once did because our sworn duty to protect this world must take precedence above all else, know that we shall always be your friend. Perhaps some day things will change where this world will no longer need us, but for now, we shall return to our rightful places and continue watching over everything in our respective domains."

" Chosen one..." Vice Principal Luna began. " May your journey be a pleasant one and know that we shall watch over you."

" And now we must rest." Dean Cadance said.

With that, all Four Giants then raised their heads up high and began singing their song, "The Oath to Order", whilst Starlight resumed shivering, resulting in Spike flying over to comfort her leaving me and Princess Twilight to watch the spectacle before us. As they continued to sing, each Giant then began walking off--Flurry Heart floated because she wasn't as tall as the others were--towards the region each one hailed from, their task now accomplished, and kept on going until they disappeared. Would they return again? Perhaps if Termina became threatened but for now, they were content with resting and watching over the world from their eternal slumber.

Looking back towards Starlight, she was still shivering though Spike was comforting her as best as he could. Despite everything she had done, I felt sorry for her because I had once been in her shoes myself. I knew what it felt like to be cast aside by my friends though my reason was much different from hers--I forgave the Crusaders for what they did despite them hurting me and everyone else in the process by sharing secrets--yet the point was that she could find kinship with me. Granted, it wouldn't make much of a difference as when everything goes back to normal, it would be as though none of this had ever happened.

" Are you okay?" I asked.

Starlight looked around wondering where my voice came from but quickly realized that I was standing behind her when she looked behind her. " Yeah... I'm alright but I know that I have a long road ahead of me when it comes to seeking forgiveness." She turned to face me, her face filled with sadness. " My friends have forgiven me but the same might not be true with the people who I have hurt. If they condemn me for my actions, I won't run away or seek revenge. Instead, I'll accept their judgment and work hard to earn their praise. It will probably be a few years or maybe less depending on their attitude but it's better than the alternative."

" You're a lot more mature than your appearance suggests."

" You could say that I quickly came to that realization."

" If it's any consolation, I can forgive you as well for what you did."

Starlight's ears then perked up when I said that. " Really? You'll forgive me? I'm surprised considering that I transformed you into a Deku Scrub, stole your instrument, stole your horse, and even mocked you. I was honestly expecting you thrusting out your sword at me but I guess I had you figured out wrong." She then leaned forward to get a closer look at me only to quickly lean back before scratching her head until her eyes opened wide. " I just realized something! Before losing consciousness on top of the Clock Tower, I saw you standing there holding your ocarina. You... Did you save me?"

I nodded. " It was the right thing to do because you were under the manipulation of Majora's Mask."

" I appreciate it even though you could have left me."

" Believe me... I know what it's like to be alone."

" Really?"

" Yes."

Starlight then looked to her left at Spike who smiled back before she looked up at the sky. " All this time... I truly believed that they didn't want to be friends with me. I thought they had abandoned me. In truth, they had their sacred duty as guardians of this land to perform which to them was important but I assumed the opposite and chose to lash out against everyone in return which lead me down a dangerous path that almost destroyed everything. But... They hadn't forgotten about me. Even after all this time, they still cherished our friendship despite their duty."

I smiled. " Glad to see that you can pick up where you left off."

Starlight shook her head. " Not entirely. They must fulfill their duty as guardians and I understand that now. Even if I have to wait for months, years, decades, or even longer than that to be able to play games with them again, I shall focus my life on what I currently have whilst making amends for my actions against the people." Giggling, she turned back to face me, her expression having changed from sadness to joy. " You know... Friends are a nice thing to have, heh, heh. You should always appreciate them even during the bad times in life as they will be there to support you."

Hearing her say that reminded me of what I went through when it came to my friends. We didn't start off as friends per say but more like acquaintances as Princess Twilight had told them to befriend me so I could have a second chance after what I did during the events of the Fall Formal last year. Because of that, my friends were hesitant towards accepting me as one of their own but the foundation had been set. It just took some time because of unfortunate circumstances--namely the Dazzlings and to a lesser extent the Crusaders--before we all got a better understanding of each other.

Do my friends and I still argue with one another? Sure as no friendship is ever perfect due to there being tiny problems that can flare up, but those problems have to be solved before they could spiral out of control resulting in hurt feelings, a huge amount of negativity, and ultimately the destruction of the friendship at its very core. I'd say we could do with some improvements on a few things but we are pretty close, more so now than ever before because of our Equestrian Magic that binds us together. Hopefully, nothing would come along and tear us apart in the future.

Knowing that Starlight was going to be alright, I looked back at Epona. " I think you'll be okay from now on."

" Could you be my friend, too?"

I almost stumbled when she said that as it practically came out of nowhere. Granted, such a friendship wouldn't last for very long considering that once this world went back to the way it was supposed to be, Starlight and everyone else save for Princess Twilight and myself would remember any of us, but I knew I could overlook such a thing and accept her offer and become her friend. After all, we had much more in common because of our respective histories with both Equestria and Her Highness, and that alone was an ideal foundation. Would I ever meet the real Starlight Glimmer from Equestria? I had no idea but I supposed it would be something to behold.

I nodded. " Of course I'll be your friend."

" I'm glad to hear that."

" By the way... I know you from somewhere."

I gulped. " You do?"

Starlight nodded before walking over to me. " It took me a while to figure it out but I do know who you are." Leaning forward, she began sniffing my body which made me feel really uncomfortable and I thought about backing away or telling her that I needed some personal space but she quickly stopped and giggled again. " Hee hee! You have the same smell as the fairy kid who taught me that song in the woods. What was it called again? Saria's Song? Yes, that's the one!"

My jaw dropped. She was the very Skull Kid that I gave that one mask to after playing the song Fluttershy taught me on my previous journey!? How was that even possible? I never encountered her at all during that adventure so how could she have been the same Skull Kid? Unless... This was one of those retcon moments I had heard Rainbow Dash mention constantly whenever we had a sleepover. My memories of my journey through Hyrule were hazy at times resulting in me not recalling precise details yet this was one that I remembered vividly and Starlight wasn't there.

Smiling awkwardly, I gave Starlight a response to what she had just said. " What about the mask I gave you back then?"

" You mean the Skull Mask, right?"

" Yes, I think that was it."

" It definitely made me tougher." Starlight said. " And it was certainly fun scaring my friends with it though they did end up weakening the prospect when they acquired their own versions of the mask. I didn't wear it anymore when that happened but I never got rid of it because I was reminded of the one who gave it to me. I never did find out what became of you after that as you practically disappeared into thin air but you probably had other business that needed to be dealt with."

I continued to smile awkwardly. " I had a destiny to fulfill."

Starlight giggled. " You certainly have an exciting life."

" It's not always like that."

" You need to have a lot of determination."

" Yeah."

Starlight then began jumping up and down. " I know! I know! Let's do something! I want to celebrate my new friendship with you, fairy girl, but I need a few minutes to figure out what would be the best thing for us to do. I'm not going to suggest going around Clock Town and pulling pranks as I think I've had my fill of doing those."

" Oh... So the evil has left the mask after all..."

" WAAAAH!" I screamed as Starlight giggled in response. Whipping myself around, I saw that Sonata was standing a fair distance away from us whilst holding Majora's Mask in her hands and looking down at it with a happy expression across her face. " I wish you would let me know when you just show up out of nowhere!" My brain then realized what she was holding prompting me to inch backwards slightly in case something were to happen given what the mask had done.

" My apologies for startling you, my friend." Sonata said. " I was so happy that I just couldn't contain my excitement over what you have done for me. It took you the entire three days or perhaps much longer than that, but I finally have it back, my precious mask."

" But it doesn't do anything now."

" And that can be considered a blessing given all that has happened."

I scratched the back of my head. " I suppose that's true."

Sonata then looked in the direction of Starlight. " While this imp did cause me grief by stealing the mask while I slept in the forest, everything worked out in the end. She has been re-acquainted with the friends she thought she had lost and you, child of the forest, have earned both experience and a better understanding of yourself, and I have gotten back my mask. While it no longer wields such destructive power, it's still a unique piece that is sure to make others envious. But, I will confess that I shouldn't have found Majora's Mask. It's strange how destiny works sometimes isn't it?" She looked back at the mask in her hands and smiled. " Many try to understand it yet fail because it's beyond their means."

" Destiny hasn't done me any favours."

" Perhaps but then without it, you wouldn't be where you are now."

" In some ways its good but bad in others."

Sonata placed the mask in the giant backpack she had on her back, turned to face me again, clasped her hands together, and leaned forward slightly. " Only you can control your own destiny even when it looks like it's beyond your ability to do so." Reaching into her pocket, she took out what appeared to be a pocket watch, opened it up, stared at it for a few moments, said a few words under her breath, closed it, and placed it back where she got it from. " Since I am in the midst of my travels... I must bid you farewell."

" You're leaving?"

" I only planned on staying here for three days."

" Oh yes." I said as I recalled the words from my first meeting with her. " I remember you saying that to me."

" My busy schedule prevents me from staying any longer than necessary and so I must leave and move on to my next destination." Sonata said. " There are still many people out there who wish to purchase my masks and who am I to deny them such a joyous occasion as purchasing one. Before you question it, my friend, I did manage to sell some masks here in Clock Town though you didn't see it with your own eyes."

I should have known Sonata would say something like that, but then, this version of her was aloof in her nature though she did come off as somewhat creepy. Turning around, she began walking away whilst I turned to face Starlight who began shivering as she started crying. This time, Princess Twilight, Spike, and I comforted her and she quickly felt much better though her healing had only just begun. I told her that she didn't need to be upset as everything was sure to work out in the end by explaining things carefully to the people. She had a long way to go before she could truly find peace but what had happened was a good first step.

" Will you be okay?"

Starlight nodded. " I'll be alright."

Sonata then suddenly stopped and turned around. " Shouldn't you be returning home as well?"

" What do you mean?" I asked.

" You are not meant to be a part of this world." Sonata answered. " No, your place is elsewhere and so you must head off and seek out that place. It will take time for the wounds of this world to heal but by defeating the evil within Majora's Mask, you have given light back where it had been lost to the darkness. I know that you two have forged a new friendship where it had not existed before yet now it must end. Whenever there is a meeting, a parting is sure to follow."

" You have to go?" Starlight asked.

I sadly nodded. " I need to go back to where I come from."

" Why not stay here in Termina?"

" This is not where I'm supposed to be." I answered. " I would try to explain things a bit further but I fear all it would do is cause nothing but confusion. All I can say is that you should cherish what you have and never lose sight of it even during the worst of times. I know you've already heard similar words but this is coming straight from me, someone who had to learn about friendship through more difficult and personal means."

" Will I ever see you again?"

" I'm not sure."

Sonata then coughed to get our attention. " You need not be filled with sadness, little imp. Even though you and the fairy child will soon part ways, know that such a parting need not last forever. Whether a parting be forever or merely for a short time... That is up to you to decide and no one else can change that. I believe you two will meet each other again but not in these conditions. Take my words however you wish. With that, please excuse me..." Turning around, Sonata was about to walk when she suddenly turned to face us once more. " There is one other thing that I wished to speak about regarding what you have done, my friend."

" What's that?"

" I'm aware that you managed to collect every mask that exists in this world."

I gulped. " You do?"

Sonata nodded. " While you struggled in some ways, helped out in others, and even had to sometimes rely on drastic measures, you were able to collect those masks from so many different people by showing them happiness, a feeling that I once believed had been lost because of the darkness that plagued this world. I am most impressed with how you managed to make them happy. The masks you have in your possession are filled with happiness."

" But... I had to give them away."

" Or did you?"

" I know that I did."

" Then you should check your possessions." Sonata said as she smiled. " This is truly a good happiness by making others feel happy. I have no doubt that what you did for them will make their lives much better and they will be forever grateful to you. And now, I must truly be going so again, please excuse me."

Turning around, Sonata began walking forward until she suddenly faded away to nothing. I had no idea how she just did that but I felt uncomfortable again knowing that I witnessed her doing it. Was she more than what she appeared to be or had my lack of sleep--it had been a very long time since I last got some rest--began messing with my mind? In any case, she had gone and that meant I to had to do the same thing. I needed to find Ganondorf and make him change things back to the way they were supposed to be and staying around here wasn't going to work. Rather than me finding him, he had to find me instead.

" I guess this is it then?" Starlight asked.

I nodded. " This is where we part ways."

" I understand."

" I'm sure we will meet again."

Starlight smiled. " I know we will."

Spike then spoke up. " It looks like both you and the Skull Kid got what you were after, huh? I don't mean to sound rude or anything but the Carnival of Time is about to get underway and we don't want to miss any of the action. I'm sure Tatl had a lot of fun hanging out with you, fairy girl, but you've got your own business to deal with and I'd rather it not ruin our eventual fun. So why not go aboyt on your merry way and we'll do the same thing. Come on, Tatl!"

Princess Twilight shook her head. " I can't go with you and Starlight, Spike."

" What!?"

" You two can go and enjoy the carnival but I cannot go."

" Why are you acting so strangely, sis?" Spike asked. " Before all of this crazy stuff with the mask happened, you were looking forward to the Carnival of Time more than me and the Skull Kid this time and usually I'm the one who gets the most excited about it. Why this sudden change?"

" I can't leave Sunset's side."

" I'm certain she knows the way back to wherever she came from."

" It's not just that." Twilight said. " I need to go with her in order to confront someone who has hounded us both for quite some time. What I'm trying to say, Spike, is that my journey with Sunset isn't over just yet until this person has been dealt with. Until then, I cannot in good consciene go with you and Starlight to see the carnival. If this wasn't the case, there would have been nothing anyone could have done to stop me from going but the alternative has happened."

Spike then looked disappointed. " So... You really have to do this?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " It's my destiny, Spike."

" And nothing I say will change your mind?"

" I'm sorry."

Spike looked like he was about to burst out in both sadness and anger over Her Highness' desire to remain with me instead of being with him, but then he suddenly surprised us all when he nodded before comforting her for a brief moment. " I understand, Tatl. Even though it pains me, this is something you must do with the fairy girl. Just promise me that you will come back when you've finished with what you must do even if takes you months or years."

Princess Twilight said nothing which confirmed to Spike that she couldn't guarantee that she could keep such a promise. After all, when everything is changed back to normal, no one is going to remember any of this happening save for myself and Her Highness as though it were just a dream. I wished that I could forget as it would mean forgetting Ganondorf and everything he had done to me in his bid to make me his devoted servant. Princess Twilight hugged Spike as strong as possible before floating away from him and over to me where I had since climbed up onto Epona.

This was such a sombre moment that I didn't want to say anything even though I could have. Starlight knew that I didn't want to speak up because we had both said our respective farewells towards one another leaving Spike and Her Highness to go and do the exact same thing without any interruptions. Spike would see her again back in Equestria so it wasn't like this was going to be the last time they would see each other. While I would have preferred it if Her Highness had stayed behind and gone to the carnival--I am certain this was intended in this game's actual story--but I knew she had to come with me as she was now under Ganondorf's radar.

Gently kicking Epona in the ribs, she slowly began trotting forward though I honestly had no idea where we were going. In all honesty, I was actually expecting Ganondorf to show up right here and now given that I had succeeded in saving Termina from being destroyed, but perhaps he was waiting for me to be alone before making his move. Being ever vigilant had become a top priority for me now which meant being cautious as who knew when he would appear. In any case, I didn't look back whilst Princess Twilight did--Tatl's persona most likely influences her at that point--before she too turned to face what had become an unknown.

" That must have been difficult for you, huh?" I asked as Epona continued trotting forward.

" A part of me wants to stay here but I know that you need me, Sunset."

" The Tatl side of your persona made you want to do that."

" You think I was meant to leave you?"

I nodded. " This happened before during my previous journey. After overcoming the odds and restoring peace, Spike ended up leaving because I had fulfilled my destiny and he no longer needed to be by my side. Of course, when I faced the real Ganondorf, he was there due to some kind of force bringing him to me. I think Tatl stays behind because she wanted to be with both her brother and their friend yet your persona decided to take the initiative by choosing me over them. I know what I said doesn't make much sense but it's the best I can say without sounding like an idiot."

Princess Twilight shook her head. " No, I think you said pretty well."

" Since the character I am portraying is just a blank slate, I don't have such persona conflictions."

" That must be nice."

" Not really as my character is just an extension of the one playing the game."

" I think I understand."

I rolled my eyes. " Maybe I should have Rainbow Dash--the human version--explain it to you the next time you decide to pay the human world a visit. She is the true video game fanatic who knows just about everything about them though she can't stop talking about them."

Princess Twilight laughed. " I didn't think she would be so engrossed with them."

" Being an athlete and the captain of every team isn't her only claim to fame."

" You've convinced me that I should pay a visit whenever I have a free moment."

" Princess duties taking their toll?"

" Yes." Twilight answered. " But, I've learned that I have to accept that fact because I was chosen to ascend and become an alicorn. Believe me, Sunset, being a princess is a lot of work that also gives me stress among other things so be glad you don't have to go through the same thing. I don't mean to say that you're not worthy to ascend. I'm just saying that it requires having a firm grasp of any situation and not allowing anger to cloud your judgment."

I raised my hand to stop Princess Twilight from talking. " You don't need to sugarcoat anything with me, Twilight. I know that Princess Celestia personally groomed me to ascend and become an alicorn but I allowed my arrogance to blind me to a truth that I kept on blaming her for it. It was my lack of humility, friendship, and patience that ultimately resulted in my self-exile from Equestria. Not a day goes by that I regret my actions as it resulted in another world becoming plagued with wild Equestrian Magic, but the experience gave me the chance to find those missing feelings and get to understand them."

" Then it wasn't a complete loss."

" Not at all."

" Someday... You'll return to Equestria."

As I contemplated Princess Twilight's words, the sounds of fireworks could be heard coming from behind me indicating that the Carnival of Time had begun. While I would have liked to have seen it for myself, I knew that I had to leave Termina in order to confront Ganondorf and change things back to normal. If not for him, I could have taken in the sights and sounds of the carnival and perhaps got a better understanding of what it really meant to the people of this world. As I whipped Epona's flank and she began galloping, I couldn't help but be curious about all those I had helped throughout this journey.

I didn't know if they remembered me helping them or not due to resetting time on a constant basis but if they did then I hoped that they would appreciate the knowledge that they were assisted with their problems. Then again, I don't believe that I helped everyone in Termina--I really should have looked at the notebook given to me by Pipsqueak way back when I first started my adventure more often than I had done--and so they either wouldn't be happy right now or they were yet had no recollection of me ever being in their presence. A shame that none of them will remember anything because of what will ultimately happen.

Some time passes...

" Welcome to the Indigo-Go's Live Concert here at the Milk Bar of Clock Town!" Coloratura shouted resulting in the crowd that had gathered to erupt with cheers. " When we heard what had gone on over here with that moon disappearing and our performance being given the green light by our manager, we hustled our butts over here faster than any fish out there in the ocean so that we can entertain you all with the hottest music fresh from Great Bay."

Rarity then spoke up, coughing slightly, causing the crowd to become silent. " I was planning on singing something special and to the heart, but the rest of the band insisted that we play the mainstay which has made the Indigo-Gos famous first before anything else, "Ballad of the Wind Fish". While I am not against playing our most famous song, I would prefer to sing this special song that came to me as a result of the experiences which I have endured these past few days."

" We could perform that song first, Lulu."

" I'd rather not impede on what the band wants."

Coloratura shook her head. " I know Mikau went to a lot of trouble getting your eggs back from those Gerudo Pirates as well as those Giant Eels over at Pinnacle Rock, but he's been firing up on all cylinders lately to perform our ballad. After all, he's the hero of the Zora and the one who helped restore your missing voice so if anything, consider our ballad being our way to let him jam in the way that he's best known for."

" That... Didn't make much sense."

" Sorry, Lulu, but I haven't had much sleep until recently."

" Maybe we should have postponed our performance until tomorrow night?"

The crowd then started complaining resulting in Coloratura giving Rarity a big smug. " If we did that then our fans would have surely rioted or something. Besides, we're not the only ones performing here in the Milk Bar tonight. Those Rosa Sisters over there from that Gorman's Troupe will be performing once we're done so we need to keep the people entertained until everyone has to go home. Besides, this is also a special occasion because our world was saved from destruction by that fairy girl who called the guardians. We need to dedicate our performance in her name even though I don't believe I ever caught it."

Rarity then smiled. " You didn't have to go into such an epic speel, Evan."

" Someone had to say something and I elected myself."

" Very well." Rarity said. " We shall begin our performance with "Ballad of the Wind Fish" because I am certain everyone here wishes for us to play that one. Once we have finished it, we will immediately play the song that I have been talking about. It's one that means a great deal to me because it was a song that my mother, the previous Lulu, sang when I was younger in the form of a lullaby. I am now a mother myself and so I shall sing it for my children thus the legacy will carry on to the next generation."

The crowd began chanting Wind Fish over and over until Coloratura raised her hands to quiet them down. " Okay, okay... We'll stop with the talking and get right down to performing since that's why you're all here to begin with. Let's show them what we've got!"

Rarity then turned to Mikau who was in fact me assuming his form even though I wasn't there in person. " I know that you will perform to the very best of your abilities, Mikau, or perhaps even more so. But, you don't need to try and show off in front of everyone for my sake." She then turned towards the audience who were eagerly awaiting the beginning of the festivities and she closed her eyes before clasping her hands together. " You know... I still think you changed when you left Zora Hall to take on the pirates, Mikau. I don't exactly know what your change was but I feel as though you are different now than you were before."

If only she knew that the Mikau she was speaking to wasn't the one she had come to know for such a long time. Truth be told, I had no idea how my Zora form could be there performing with them--my Zora body was female though they saw him as male--given I was leaving Termina but perhaps Mikau couldn't truly rest until he had performed one final time with the Indigo-Go's. I wasn't about to try and make sense of it as usually that never worked and left me feeling more confused than ever but perhaps it was for the best that they assumed he was still alive even when he wasn't.

" Everyone is still out on patrol, Aveil."

Rainbow Dash groaned under her breath as she sat on her throne in utter dismay. " Bah!"

" The waters of Great Bay have become so much nicer ever since that temple out there stopped acting weird." Derpy said. Unlike Rainbow Dash, she sounded very optimistic but made sure not to anger her leader too much. " Once everyone gets back from their patrol, we can head out for the temple and see if we can get that treasure. I know most of our boats were either lost or destroyed when that tornado brushed us aside but we've had much worse things happen to us."

" Derpy... I've no intention of sending the others out there."

" Why not?"

" I have to face the facts that the Gerudo Pirates are no longer the scourges of Great Bay."

" That's crazy talk, Aveil."

Rainbow Dash slammed her fist onto the arm of her throne and winced a little due to the slight pain it caused. " Our best guards were defeated not only by Mikau but also a young girl not to mention the Zora Eggs we stole were taken back by them. On top of that, we've lost most of our boats not to mention sustained damage to several parts of the fortress courtesy of that masked one who paid us a visit. Our reputation has been shattered and cannot be recovered. No one will ever take us seriously again." She struggled to refrain from letting go of her emotions and wanting to cry yet this was noticed by Derpy who couldn't respond to it. " I realize now that my own weakness caused all of this."

" Does this mean you won't be our leader anymore?"

Staring at Derpy, Rainbow Dash merely shrugged. " I honestly don't know, Derpy. While I know that your loyalty to me is unshakable, the same cannot be said about the others who truly believed that we would be living the good life upon getting our hands on that treasure in the temple."

Derpy looked down at her feet. " Aveil... Rainbow Dash... I still think you can turn things around even if it does look impossible, but you're right about me remaining loyal to you even though you have berated me in the past because of my trouble handling missions."

" I was only trying to make you get better."

" I can't help screwing things up."

" In this case, I was the one who screwed up big time resulting in the Gerudo Pirates suffering humiliation the likes of which has never been seen before."

Derpy shook her head. " You'll do better next time."

Rainbow Dash got up from her throne, walked across the chamber, past Derpy, and stopped in front of the huge hole that had been created when Starlight used her magic to create it when she visited the Pirates Fortress. In her eyes she knew that she had lost her fellow pirate's loyalty even when Derpy said it wasn't true. Had she known that things were going to turn out badly, she would never have spoken to Starlight, choosing instead to focus on angering the Zora like the pirates always did. She remembered those days as good times though now there was an aura of uncertainty flowing all around her.

Would she step down as their leader? The thought never once crossed her mind as she had always lead them with an iron fist and none of them dared question her authority but now she didn't know what to think. Her recent actions had indeed sullied their reputation and the Zora no longer needed to take them seriously. She felt like wanting to run away and never come back but such an action wouldn't change anything. To Rainbow Dash, she had to make a decision that would forever change the hierarchy of the Gerudo Pirates. Even though she was still loyal to her fellow pirates despite her attitude, she knew that it was all over for her.

" I'm going to step down."

Derpy was shocked. " No!"

Rainbow Dash raised her hand. " Silence! This is for the best for the Gerudo Pirates, Derpy, and I will not hear anymore about it. I will step down but I will not abandon you all as that would be the ultimate act of cowardice and eternal shame. As my final command as leader before stepping down, you, Derpy, shall become the new leader. You are more than ready to handle this task and I know you will succeed. From this moment on, I shall follow your orders."

" Aveil..."

" What are your orders, Derpy?"

" Are you sure about this?"

Rainbow Dash nodded. " You're more than capable of leading us, Derpy, and I will make sure that the others know to fall in line and respect your new position. No matter what happens to me, I'll always remain loyal to you. Now... What are your orders?"

" I can't believe we're still stuck as headless skulls!"

" It's because you were feeble when we fought that girl!"

" Are you still on about that?" Fleetfoot asked.

" Just admit that I am the superior swordsman whereas you are nothing more than a rank amateur." Spitfire answered.

" You take that back!"

" Why should I? It's the honest truth."

Fleetfoot was mere moments away from completely losing it. " I actually wished we had dueled one another before that girl showed up. It would have been the perfect chance for us to test each other out without fear of accidentally ending the other's life given we're dead and all. But, we were commanded to deploy the castle's defences and to prepare for what the king said was an invasion of the chosen one."

" That would have truly been a spectacle." Spitfire said. " A shame that we had to fight that girl who easily dispatched of us using that accursed instrument. The fact that we were both forced to march about through no will of our will was embarrassing to no end. If anyone had seen what happened, I would have died of humiliation--again--and would never be able to show my face around here again. But... I'll admit that what she played was actually pretty catchy not to mention she wore quite an interesting mask."

" She embarrassed herself by wearing it."

Spitfire laughed. " Despite what she did, we were bested by her honorably."

" You could being burned to nothing by the light honorable?"

" It was the only option she had given that we had an unfair advantage."

" Of course we were supposed to!" Fleetfoot shouted. " Our ability to revive from a fatal blow due to being of the undead was meant to be our means of wearing her down until she could no longer fight. From there, we could have easily killed her but instead we allowed her to defeat us."

Spitfire sighed as she floated over to one of the open windows. " We are not meant to exist because our time was long ago. Even though we are still here due to the power that girl carried with her, we are meant to be resting in an eternal slumber along with everyone else from the Ikana Kingdom. Fleetfoot... The chosen one saved us from ourselves by closing the doors to the Stone Tower, freeing our souls from the hatred that claimed them so long ago. I'm glad she defeated us the way she did and for that, I cannot help but respect her."

" I guess that makes sense."

" We should rest eternally like the king has done."

" Will we ever return again?"

" No as our time has passed."

" Then I guess this is goodbye... old friend." Fleetfoot said. " In life, you were both my rival and my friend."

" Even if you are feeble."

" You just had to say that, didn't you?"

" It took like, some serious doing on my part, but those elder Deku Scrubs have like, finally been put in their place."

" I am so proud that you did that, mother."

Tree Hugger smiled at Fluttershy. " If not for that awesome Deku with her righteous powers, the poison would have like, continued to spread throughout the swamp, endanger our way of life, and totally bum all of us out until we become one with the land. That one was like, filled with chakra I never knew could exist, and I felt completely in awe knowing that there is a much higher level I can achieve."

Fluttershy sighed. " Sometimes, I think you shouldn't be as mellow as you are, mother."

" Whoa! Way to harsh out on my mojo, dear daughter."

" I... I didn't mean no disrespect."

" When your father was, like, king and stuff, he ruled over the Deku Kingdom with a real quirky nature, and it was that attitude which made me fall in love with him and all that." Tree Hugger said. " I remember when he would always lose his aura over the smallest of things just because he felt off that day. I always kept saying that he needed to become one with his surroundings and not let his aura become corrupted but he never did listen and ended up wilting too soon leaving me to like, become queen and sole ruler."

Fluttershy looked at each Deku Scrub who were busy dancing about before turning her attention towards the elders who had been locked up in the very prison where her friend, the monkey, had once been imprisoned when he had been accused of kidnapping her. She realized they had been influenced by her father hence why they always believed that the Deku were destined for greater things and didn't need recognition from the other tribes. Tree Hugger was much different than what they wanted and tried everything in their power to make her act like her former husband yet she had no inkling towards it.

As she continued gazing over at the elders, Fluttershy began to understand why they acted the way they did. They felt that Tree Hugger was trying to change things within the kingdom which had been around for centuries and had hoped she would continue with tradition. Instead, she wanted to rule the kingdom in her own manner which was rather lax combined with a sort of hippee style. Her father, the previous Deku King, had a much stronger relationship with the elders resulting in him influencing their actions but in truth they were looking out for their fellow Deku even if it didn't seem like it.

" Mother... Do you think the elders will be released?"

Tree Hugger looked in their direction and shrugged. " I'll like, set them free if they change their mojo to the way I run things, but until they do then I think it's best if they like, stay where they are and mellow out for a bit. They've been bumming me out for a long time now trying to make me follow your father's example and rule like he did but that's not the way I want to rule over my people. I'm not like what you would call, ambitious, or even aggressive in my approach, but instead I preferred a peaceful existence for everyone in my kingdom where we could form alliances with the other tribes that actually worked out."

" Just seeing them locked up makes me realize that they were only looking out for our best interests." Fluttershy said. " The Deku Royal Family from what I have read has always been one where the kings and queens were erratic in their behaviour and often made decisions without thinking about any potential consequences. Because you are different from our ancestors--eccentric if you will--the elders feared our way of life was about to change forever so when I was imprisoned within the temple, they sought to use that incident along with your anger to further my father's original agenda."

" Whoa... That's like, so weird and radical."

Fluttershy nodded. " You're not going to release them, are you?"

Tree Hugger shrugged again. " You've made a wicked argument, daughter, and I will like, totally take it under consideration. For now, I think they need to mellow out and remember who wears the crown and who rules over the Deku." She went silent for a moment as she began thinking about what Fluttershy had said before continuing. " I think their punishment will last, like, a week or two at best."

" Mother..."

Twang! Twang!

" How was that?"

" Yee-haw! Now that's what I call some fancy shootin' there, Romani."

Apple Bloom smiled. " If it weren't for Grasshopper showing me how it was done, I never would have learned to use a bow myself. Reckon her visit to the ranch the other day was a blessin' given that she helped drive off them things that tried ta steal the cows."

Applejack rubbed her chin several times with her hand. " I never would'a imagined that what you said about 'aliens' turned out ta be true. Ya know, I owe ya a sincere apology, sugarcube, fer never believin' y'all when you kept on sayin' that they show up 'round here every year when the carnival happens. I always thought yer stories were nothin' but bunk and that y'all were tryin' to get outta yer responsibilites and actin' like a kid." She walked up to her little sister and placed her hand on Apple Bloom's shoulder. " All this time, I reckon y'all weren't mature enough but I knew when I've been wrong."

" Y'all still consider me an adult?"

" 'Course I do, Romani."

" Really?" Apple Bloom asked. " I thought yer were pullin' mah leg."

" Now why would I do that ta mah little sister?" Applejack asked. " Sure, I was stressed out in the past what with all the weird things that have been happenin' 'round here and took out mah frustration against ya, but I never go back on mah word no matter what. You've become an adult now, Romani, and that means I'll make you a mask that identifies y'all as such but not until I get back from the weddin'."

Apple Bloom began checking the string on her bow to make sure it wasn't lose or anything. " I can't believe that Anju and Kafei are finally gettin' married. Feels like they've been waitin' forever for this day ta come. I wish I could come with ya, sister, but I know their special occasion ain't the kinda thing a child like me should be at." Pulling on the string, she smiled knowing it wasn't going to break so she started looking around for another spare arrow. " Besides, someone has ta look after everythin 'round here while yer gone and I might as well be responsible by keepin' an eye on things."

" Y'all have matured."

" Grasshopper was very influencial."

" Ever since that girl, Sunset Shimmer, came to this here ranch, things have gotten so much better." Applejack said as she reached down, picked up an arrow that was stuck in the ground that her sister overlooked, and began fondling over it in her hands. " She helped y'all ta protect our cows and helped me with mah delivery ta the Milk Bar in town yet not once did she want anythin' in return. I've seen all kinds of people come ta the ranch over the years yet she was perhaps the most unique of the lot. It was like she had a burden on her shoulders and no one could help her with it."

" Bein' a heroine does that to ya."

Applejack nodded. " I 'sppose y'all are right about that, Romani." She then held out the arrow and Apple Bloom took a moment before noticing it and taking it from her. Blushing, the younger sister nocked it onto her bow and was prepared to fire when the older sister had more to say. " I don't wish any ill will towards Sunset Shimmer. In fact, I hope she was able to deal with whatever burden she had."

" I'm sure she's fine."

" I hope so."

" Now watch this!"

Apple Bloom then fired the arrow Applejack had given her and popped all three balloons before the arrow got stuck into the top of the barn with a loud thud. The older sister began clapping as she was clearly amazed that her little sister pulled off such an impressive shot. Not even she could have done something like that. She knew that Apple Bloom didn't need her to watch over her anymore even though she felt needed to because of the loss of their father. Shaking her head, Applejack had to realize her sister could take care of things while she was away attending Scootaloo's wedding.

However, she did feel the need to remind Apple Bloom not to trust the Gorman Sisters, who had been paying the ranch a visit lately as a means of trying to make a deal aimed at benefitting both their racetrack and the ranch. Whilst the sisters seemed honorable despite having dubious appearances, Applejack knew they were bad news and warned her little sister that Grog and Mamamu Yan were available to help in case any sinister undertaking occurred. If she could, she would have had the Gorman Sisters run out of Milk Road a long time ago but knew they were there to stay and some kind of peace had to co-exist between all parties.

" You must be feeling a lot better now, Gorman."

" Huh? Oh, Mrs. Barten." Big Macintosh said. " Yes, I am happy that Monsieur Aroma allowed the Carnival of Time to go ahead."

" I can see it in your expression." Granny Smith said. " When you were wallowing around here the previous nights, you got so drunk on milk that I didn't think you were going to get back to the Stock Pot Inn given your condition at the time."

Big Macintosh lowered his head in shame. " I have no excuse for how I acted. I was so frustrated over having my troupe's performances cancelled by Monsieur Aroma that I was willing to throw everything away, even my own life, because it felt like I didn't have a reason to go on. You might not believe me but my sisters got the better talents and it really shows with how they raised their horses down at the family racetrack. Me? Let's face the truth. My skills with horses are non-existent."

Wiping some glasses, Granny Smith coughed. " You shouldn't be so hard on yourself, Gorman. Just because you come from a long line of skilled horse breeders doesn't mean you have to dedicate your life to the practice or else be deemed a failure. Not everyone can follow in the footsteps of their family successfully so finding a different means of making it out there are needed for one's own benefit. It means that you were meant to have a different calling other than being involved with horses, and I must say that you have proven to be one heck of a troupe leader given how they are performing on such a glorious occasion."

" No need to sugarcoat it."

" I'm not."

" Then why make such a big deal out of it?"

" I'm just trying to understand you."

Big Macintosh sighed. " Let's just say that my life has been a complicated one."

Granny Smith chuckled slightly but not loud enough for Big Macintosh to hear due to the sounds of the crowd cheering on his troupe's performances. " Everyone has had complications in their lives that they wish to keep to themselves." She wiped the last of her glasses and placed them on a shelf behind her before placing some more on the counter and pouring milk into each one. " No matter how hard you try, your personal knowledge will always end up spilling out much like how milk can spill out of these glasses."

" What does that even mean?"

" Never keep your past bottled up."

" Bah!" Big Macintosh moaned as he turned to face his troupe's performing. " My past is one that's filled with nothing but misery, but... You do have a good point, Mrs. Barten. If not for that weird girl coming here and performing that sound check with Mrs. Toto a couple of nights ago, I wouldn't have been compelled to open up on my personal feelings. She made me see the truth about myself. Maybe I should be more open about my past especially towards my troupe."

" You are a good man, Gorman."

" What about you?" Big Macintosh asked. " What about your past?"

" Mine isn't nearly as complicated as yours but I will share it with you." Granny Smith answered. " Like you, I grew up in a family whose profession was much different than what I now do for a living. They were famous archers who travelled about Termina showing their archery skills to any who were curious but my skill was hideous to say the least. I know being an archer wasn't my thing so I left home to find a new calling. To get to the point, I found my passion when I visited Romani Ranch and helped the old owner milk some cows whilst he watched over his two daughters."

" That explains why you run this joint."

Granny Smith nodded. " Like I said, not everyone will follow in their family's footsteps. They need to find their own calling in life and follow it even if their family might not necessarily understand what they are trying to do. So long as they respect your choice, things will turn out fine in the end. Anyway, that's all I wanted to say about my past so we don't we focus on the here and now and I'll serve you your usual. Who knows? Maybe it will make you want to share more of your past instead of wanting to keep it bottled up."

" You seem to be in much better spirits than before, father."

" Indeed I am, Pamela."

" But... Are you sure you should be going back to work on your research?" Twilight Sparkle asked. " You became so engrossed with it for so long that you couldn't recall certain things and I wasn't even sure what you were doing."

Soarin patted his chest. " Nonsense, Pamela. The world is full of mysteries and they are waiting for someone like me to come along and solve them. But... I must admit that I am a little weary towards going back down there in that well where those monstrous Gibdo lurk." He started shivering as though he was starting to feel sick which Twilight Sparkle noticed, causing him to come to his senses knowing his daughter was watching. " Perhaps I shall focus my efforts on researching the mysteries of the Stone Tower. Very little is known about the place as the records have been lost."

Twilight Sparkle grabbed her father's arm and began yanking it towards her. " Please, father... There is no need for you to resume your research so soon." She was about to mention what happened to him when he became a Gibdo but quickly realized that telling him would only convince him to go back down into the well resulting in events happening all over again like before. " I think you should relax today and focus on your health. After all, we almost were destroyed when the moon almost crashed."

" Ah-ha!"

" What's wrong?"

Like a blur of lightning, Soarin ran back inside the Music Box House and the sounds of objects being thrown about could be heard. Twilight Sparkle sighed knowing that her efforts in getting her father to change his focus had failed, but not entirely. She had apparently convinced him to focus on the moon rather than the undead creatures of Ikana--they were now resting again thus there was no longer any need to research that which wasn't there--and while that was much safer, it meant he would be busy staying up late, writing down all kinds of notes, using his equipment, wandering around Ikana Village, and forgetting that he needed to eat.

Several minutes later, Soaring came running back outside, his hands holding all kinds of things including sheets of paper that scattered everywhere, a small teloscope, a few books, what looked like a sandwich, and a sleeping bag which indicated that he was planning on camping outside for a while much to Twilight Sparkle's dismay. He immediately began to set up his station though he clearly had problems with the teloscope--it kept on falling down--but he eventually managed to get everything in working order before sitting down and looking up at the beautiful sunset. It was then that he realized what he was doing and turned to face his daughter.

" On second thought... I think I will relax."

" What made you change your mind?"

Soarin placed his hand on Twilight Sparkle's shoulder. " It was you who changed it for me, Pamela. I realized that moving out here to this desolate place was really sudden given we used to live in Clock Town but when the urge to understand this ancient kingdom too too strong to resist its temptations, I dragged you along even though it meant taking you away from the life you had come to know."

" I don't mind being here, father."

"And why is that?"

Twilight Sparkle sighed. " I'll be honest. When we first came here, I wasn't thrilled with the idea as it meant you becoming too engrossed with your work not to mention the sudden appearance of all those undead monsters made my heart beat something horrible. But, ever since that girl came to this place, it feels like light has come back here and those monsters have finally been allowed to rest. Maybe, just maybe, this will work out after all provided you take it easy from now on. Just because the undead are gone doesn't mean you can prance about without a care in the world."

Soarin laughed. " I'll be careful, Pamela. After all, you mean the world to me and I would hate to see you live in a world without me watching over you. Why don't we have a picnic like we used to when you were little? I know it sounds strange considering you are much older now but I thought it would be a nice thing to do."

" I'd like that very much, father."

Several Days Later.

" Welcome invited guests to the wedding of Anju and Kafei. I am Mayor Dotour and I shall be presiding over this occasion. Now, as I'm sure you're all aware, things have been rather busy these past few days what with Clock Town celebrating the annual Carnival of Time not to mention having to fix all of the damage caused when the guardians of Termina stomped their way across Termina Field. As such, we couldn't afford much and so this wedding will be a simple affair. I trust that you are all okay with these arrangements?"

The guests who had gathered looked at one another with uncertainty in their eyes. Most were from Clock Town while a couple of individuals had come from far away in order to be witnesses to the union between Scootaloo and Tender Taps, yet they were expecting a more lavish affair as opposed to standing outside of the West Clock Town entrance with nothing but the bare necessities, namely the bride, the groom, the guests, and a bouquet of flowers. But, from the perspective of the soon to be married couple, they didn't care about any of that so long as they could finally get it over with.

A voice then called out to Mayor Mare. " Can you please get on with the ceremony already?"

Mayor Mare responded with a huff. " No need to be rude about it. I'm still the mayor of Clock Town for a few more years and I would appreciate it if you showed me the proper respect. Ahem! Anyway, we are gathered here to celebrate this union between two lovers who endured so much these past few days. My son, Kafei, had been cursed where he had become a young boy and chose to hide himself from the world until he could find a cure. Fortunately, he has regained his true self thanks to the valiant efforts of the girl who saved us all from the moon. A shame she couldn't be here but I suppose she had her personal life to attend to."

" You're doing it again, mother."

" I'm sorry if I like long-winded speeches, Kafei."

Tender Taps sighed. " Our other guests don't seem to appreciate it like you do."

" Yes, I suppose you're right."

" So can we continue?"

Mayor Mare nodded. " Very well. As per the tradition here in Clock Town, I would first like to welcome those who shall be the witnesses. Thank you for coming: Cremia, Mutoh, the man from the Curiosity Shop, Viscen, Anju's mother, Anju's grandmother, my husband Monsieur Aroma, myself, the Bombers Gang as they call themselves, and finally last but certainly not least, Tingle. I believe that's everyone so we may now proceed. May I present, the bride, Anju!"

Everyone suddenly were in awe as Scootaloo walked out out the West Clock Town entrance in a beautfiul dress whilst carrying the bouquet in her hands. She tried as hard as she could to prevent herself from crying but it was too much for me and tears soon trickled down her cheeks. Her mother attempted to offer some comfort but Scootaloo shook her head and continued walking forward towards the man that she loved with all of her heart. What Mayor Mare said about Tender Taps was true. He had become an adult again due to the curse being lifted upon the defeat of Majora's Mask.

The gathering soon went quiet when Scootaloo stopped in front of Tender Taps. " I know you must have a lot on your mind because of what you have endured for so long but know that we have finally reached this moment."

Tender Taps nodded. " I am sorry that I made you worry all this time, Anju."

" You had your reasons and I have accepted that."

" If it wasn't for the forest girl, this wouldn't be happening."

" Yes... We owe her so much."

" A shame that she didn't stay here long enough as I would have invited her to the wedding."

Scootaloo nodded. " But, we cannot allow her absence to prevent us from finally saying our vows, Kafei. Come... Let us begin the rest of our lives together and hope that we will enjoy every waking moment until the very end. Everyone here is waiting and we shouldn't keep them doing so any longer." She held out her hand and smiled as Tender Taps held onto it with his own hand and soon they were both walking towards Mayor Mare who would make the marriage official. " We must do all we can to heal the wounds made when you lost all hope but I know we can succeed."

" Yes." Tender Taps said nodding. " I must prove myself worthy to your mother."

" Not just her but to everyone."

" I have to do my best."

" Excuse me... Tingle, was it?" Mayor Mare asked.

" What do you want?" Pinkie Pie asked. " Do you need Tingle to make one of her maps for you? While this is a special occasion, I am still technically on the job so I can easily make you one of Tingle's Maps right now and sell it for a reasonably low price."

Mayor Mare shook her head. " No, I don't need you to make me a map."

" Oh? Then what you need Tingle for?"

" Do you have any of that confetti that people say you toss about?"

Pinkie Pie quickly checked her pockets before nodding. " Yes, Tingle is currently carrying several batches of confetti but why do you need them? Usually, I toss them about whenever someone buys one of my maps but I've never had to do it for anything else. Are you trying to buy it from me? You certainly have some strange tastes, Mayor Dotour, but don't let my words bother you. Tingle has seen all kinds of people with weird obsessions over the years."

" I don't need to buy your confetti either."

" Then what do you need from Tingle?"

" Could you throw some right now?" Mayor Mare asked. " The bride and groom will be here momentarilly and I wish for this moment to be marked with something colourful. No one else brought along any confetti save for yourself so would you kindly provide us with some?"

" May I use my magic words?"

" Of course."

That made Pinkie Pie happy. " Yippee!" She inflated the red balloon she carried with her in her backpack until it was big enough and began floating upwards until she was a good distance off the ground before she reached into her pockets. " This is without a doubt the happiest moment I've ever seen in my life. Anju and Kafei should also be happy knowing they are finally getting married. Tingle will give them the biggest celebratory sendoff ever seen throughout Termina. Tingle-Tingle-Kooloo-Limpah!" She then began tossing confetti everywhere whilst trying to hold in her overall excitment. " These are the magic words Tingle created herself. Please don't steal them."

As Epona galloped off in a random direction, neither Princess Twilight or I knew exactly how we were supposed to leave Termina and return to Hyrule. We hadn't exactly planned on leaving because our assumption--more like my assumption--was that Ganondorf would appear in Termina to challenge me once again to one of his contests, but he didn't appear forcing us to find a means of going back to Hyrule. Why go back there to begin with? It was where this journey began and I had a feeling it was where it would also end. If not then we would most likely travel about aimlessly forever.

Just when it looked like nothing was going to happen, a bright light shone which blinded all of us yet I made sure to keep Epona calm as I figured she was likely to freak out and gallop off in a wild frenzy. When my vision returned, we were no longer galloping across Termina Field with the sounds of fireworks in the background. Instead, we were in a dark forest where we couldn't see very far and most of the trees looked like they had been dead for years. Epona then whinnied to let me know that this place felt familiar to her and I responded in kind asking what this place was.

She whinnied that she could smell the Kokiri though it was a very faint scent. That meant we were back in Hyrule as Termina had no traces of them anywhere. Did that mean I would encounter Fluttershy here in this world--she was one of the Kokiri though I couldn't recall the name she went by. Would I be forced to go through my previous journey all over again even with my newfound knowledge? Such a thought made me feel numb as my expectation was that that this was the end of the adventure and everything would go back to the way it was before Ganondorf appeared and changed it all.

Epona felt frightened yet I comforted her with a soft whinny before she began trotting along. There was absolutely no sign of anyone or anything in this forest and it made me uneasy as well. I knew that forests could become creepy if you were to travel deep into them but I never expected it would be this creepy. I was worried that someone or something could jump out at any time without me realizing it and I would be unprepared. No... I had to remain calm otherwise Princess Twilight and Epona would lose their composure resulting in either one of them freaking out.

" Are you nervous?" I asked.

Princess Twilight nodded. " A little... Yourself?"

I nodded. " Yeah..."

" I had assumed that we would have gone back to where we are supposed to be but I guess this isn't it."

" Well... We're back to where the journey started although you don't remember that as you were portraying Tatl at the time."

" Does that mean that we're in Hyrule?"

I nodded. " If I recall the name of this location, we're in a place called the Lost Woods. Not only is it difficult to traverse because no maps can function here, there is also a curse that engulfs everything around us though how it inflicts its victims depends on what kind of being you are. If one of the forest children, the Kokiri, were to become lost, they would eventually become a Skull Kid. If anyone else were to become lost, they would eventually become a Stalfos, a fearsome undead monster that can be utterly ruthless. You don't have to worry about it, Twilight, because you're a fairy so you are immune."

" What about you?"

" If we can't get out of here, I'm likely to become a Stalfos."

" Not a Skull Kid?"

I shook my head. " I'm human and not a Kokiri so becoming a Stalfos would be my fate."

" Then which way is the way out?"

I shrugged. " Like I said, no maps work here so it boils down to guessing."

Princess Twilight sighed before suddenly realizing something. " Epona said that she could barely make out the smell of the Kokiri, correct? Yes, I can understand her whinnying as well because after all, I am a pony like you are, Sunset. If she could travel in the direction the smell is coming from, we might be able to find our way out of here. I don't think the Kokiri will be able to help us so perhaps we should seek out a higher power instead."

" I guess we don't have much of a choice."

Suddenly, a circle of fire surrounded us causing Epona to freak out resulting in her bucking me off of her back and landing on my butt. She managed to escape the circle before it grew larger before changing colour from the standard yellow-red-orange to purple-grey-black. I was able to whinny to prevent her from galloping away though I could no longer reach her until this circle of fire disappeared. What I knew straight away was that this was no ordinary fire by any means. It had been created and there was only one person who possessed enough dark power to do so. Instead of him finding us, we ended up finding him.

Begin: Those Chosen By The Planet.

On the other side of the circle, what looked to be a portal materialized out of nowhere and from it emerged Ganondorf himself before it disappeared. " Child... I am most impressed with how you were able to overcome personal torment and saved that world from destruction. Of course, I knew that you would succeed. I had foreseen it a long time ago so the fact that you stand before me is of no surprise."

" I've been looking for you."

Ganondorf laughed. " You still wish for this world to be changed back to what it is meant to be? Yes... I know that is your fondest desire, child, and I shall fulfill your wish, but first we shall have our final contest for the time being. Did you really think that you would escape from your destiny of having to face me in battle? You should know by now that I and I alone am the one who determines your fate." He then looked at Princess Twilight and a twisted smile appeared on his face. " And do not think that I have forgotten about you, princess. You play quite a significant role in this child's destiny."

" Why are you targetting her?"

" Surely, you have come to the realization that she is what keeps you going, child."

I stood there completely dumbfounded. " What are you talking about?"

" So... You didn't know then... How amusing." Ganondorf answered. " Allow me to educate you then, child. The Princess of Friendship has proven herself to be quite the beacon when it comes to providing the necessary boost to your power. You never once realized that without her presence surrounding you, you would have perished long ago. I am not surprised that such knowledge didn't become apparent until now."

" Twilight... Keeps me going?"

" She is the source of your light."

" Is that why you've been so interested in her lately?"

Ganondorf nodded. " That is one of the reasons why I have determined that she is much more important than in the past. Had this not come to pass then she would have been killed due to being insignificant but she shall be spared for now until her usefulness has reached its end. There is one other reason why the princess is necessary but that shall become clear when the time comes. For now, let us begin this contest so that I can see how much stronger you have become."

I stomped my foot. " Enough with the riddles! Just tell us what you know!"

" What I know is far beyond your comprehension."

Princess Twilight then spoke up. " You said when the time comes, correct? Does this mean that you intend on having Sunset go through another experience like this one sometime in the future? If this is true, Ganondorf, then I'm afraid I cannot allow that to happen. As the Princess of Friendship, I shall not let you make her suffer anymore. She will never become your servant and she will end your nightmare once and for all."

" Such an elegant speech."

" I'm serious!"

" Your words mean nothing to me, little one."

" And why is that?"

" While it is true that you possess power, a power so great that you have yet to understand it, you are nothing compared to me." Ganondorf answered. " My power far dwarfs anything you could hope to dream of so do not think that you can dictate any threats. Even the child herself possesses a power that she cannot fathom but in due course it will become clearer to her as will her destiny. Unlike you two, time holds no restraints upon me and so I can wait as long as needed. And yet, you do not have long to understand the true meaning of my words. Once it becomes clear, fate will become most unkind and both of you shall experience the truth."

Princess Twilight gulped. " How much time do we have?"

" Not as long as you think."

" Sunset... We need to defeat him and quickly."

I nodded. " You don't have to tell me twice."

Ganondorf laughed. " Light has been weakened emotionally and is now struggling to find an answer. Already, you have both been bested without me having to lift a finger, but I still require the child to once again prove to me that she has maintained my expectations of her." Disappearing, he reappeared behind me so quickly that I couldn't react fast enough, grabbed my sword from its scabbard, and pulled it out before holding it in his hands. " This sword is powerful but it does not possess the spark of magic. Thus, it is nothing more than a useless piece of metal that can be broken with ease." Just like that, Ganondorf snapped it in half without even trying before tossing it aside.

" My... my sword."

" You still possess a blade that is hewn with magic... the sword of the Fierce Deity."

My body froze upon him saying those words. " You... want me to wear that mask?"

Ganondorf nodded. " It is a power that could equal my own or it might not. Considering that you no longer possess a sword of your own, you have no alternative but to use the blade of the demonic warrior whose might you used to defeat Majora's Mask. I am also aware of the Great Fairy's Sword in your hands. While it is a blade that wields a divine power beyond that of most mere mortals' understanding, such power isn't magic and so it's useless to you. Use it child... Use the mask and become the demonic warrior once again. Only then will you have a chance of besting me unless you fear it will corrupt your spirit."

" Alright... I'll use it."

" This contest will only last for a few minutes."

" That's all I need to win."

" We shall find out soon enough."

Looking down at my now broken sword, I felt a swelling burst of rage come over me. The Kokiri Sword--its original form--had been by my side for such a long time, it had become an extension of me. Seeing what Ganondorf had done to it made me want to lash out but I knew that was what he was expecting and I would move one step closer towards succumbing to temptation and become his servant. I couldn't let that happen! Knowing that the Great Fairy's Sword wouldn't help me either--which was strange as it was stronger than even the sword wielded by the Fierce Deity so the lack of magic bit was a stupid reason--I had no other choice but to go with that mask.

Reaching behind my back, I was expecting to see just the four transformation masks, but was surprised to find that the masks I had given to the children of the moon were still in my possession, exactly as Sonata said before she disappeared. I thought that perhaps I could use some of them instead but without a magic infused sword, they could only go so far before being deemed useless much to my dismay. Taking out the Fierce Deity's Mask and holding it firmly in my hands, I closed my eyes, breathed deeply, and placed it on my face where it surprisingly worked despite not being in what was deemed an ideal location.

The power of the mask once again overcame me despite knowing that I could control it and I watched as my body shimmered from human to demon--more like demonic warrior and not an actual demon--until I let out a scream before becoming the Fierce Deity again. Drawing out the sword that came with this transformation and steeling myself for the battle that was to come, I watched as Ganondorf thrust out his hand and a black scabbard materialized from the darkness before clasping it with said hand. He grabbed the hilt with his other hand and pulled out a sword, the very sword he had used in our previous encounters, a blade as black as night itself.

Before I knew what was happening, he tossed the scabbard aside and dashed towards me with blinding speed. I honestly thought he was going to have me attack him a few times to test my power against him before responding in kind but instead he decided to get straight to the point. My body then reacted to his actions and I swung my sword the moment he swung his, both blades colliding with one another. Sparks flew from our swords as our contest got under way but again, this was different from what we had done before. Did Ganondorf want a serious fight this time? If so then would I be able to handle it?

We both struggled to overpower the other until we broke off from one another, each of us getting pushed back a little ways before we charged at each other again. Again, my body reacted to his actions like I wasn't in control of myself which had me wonder something about the Fierce Deity's Mask. Was the deity feeling threatened by Ganondorf's presence given both he and it were both powerful beings that relied on darkness? If that were the case then perhaps I had been hasty when it came to putting on the mask. Unfortunately, there was no turning back now which meant I was in it for the long run.

In the span of what seemed like forever--it was actually five minutes--both Ganondorf and I moved about the dark forest so fast that we would have been a blur to anyone who dared to watch us. We jumped about the trees, our swords clashing with one another releasing more sparks, then we moved down to the ground, clashed a few more times, then back to the trees, and so on until our fighting brought us to a stalemate. Several trees had been practically carved out by our blades whilst others had been completely destroyed. It was as though our fury couldn't be contained and I was personally afraid of it.

Ganondorf laughed. " You've become even stronger than before... child. In the past, you wouldn't have lasted this long against me. In fact, you would be dead right now or beaten within an inch of your life but perhaps it's a sign that you have fulfilled my expectations."

" It helps that you've been holding back."

" So... You knew?"

I nodded. " My experiences in Termina have given me the ability to know when someone is holding back. It's still something I'm working on so it's not perfect by any means but I know that you're not being serious with me."

" Then you wish to die?"

" While I'm not particularly comfortable using this body, I'm not going to just let you walk all over me."

Ganondorf laughed again. " You struggle to refrain from using the dark powers of the demon you have become... I expected this from you, child. While you have control over the demon for the time being, it is only a matter of time before you lose control and fully embrace it. When that happens... You will move ever more closer to becoming my servant." He then looked at Princess Twilight again. " Are you surprised that the child has gotten free of your guidance, princess? It must be painful knowing that your influence is beginning to wane but perhaps you might be able to change such an outlook."

" Sunset is doing what she needs to do." Twilight said.

" Heh, heh, heh... Is that your answer?"

" What about it?"

" How amusing." Ganondorf answered. " You are losing your student to the darkness that once claimed her yet neither of you have realized it. Then again, you yourself are slowly becoming corrupted. You may not see it right now but it is happening and it shall affect your judgment among other things. Princess Twilight Sparkle... Do not show ignorance to me as it makes you weak and worthless to both yourself and the child. Why not empower her strength with some of the magic that you possess? Yes... I know you possess magic that is far greater than anything she is capable of."

" Don't listen to him, Twilight." I said.

Princess Twilight nodded. " Right!"

Ganondorf laughed yet again. " Do not try to hide the truth for what it really is. Both of you possess far greater power than either of you realize yet you refrain from using it when it could potentially save you? Why hold it back and not unleash it? You could move mountains, rend the ground asunder, and perform feats others would be jealous of. Embrace the evil within and use it. The child does currently possess a far superior source of power but you princess are drawing ever closer."

" I'm not listening to you."

" I don't need you to listen any longer."

" What do you mean?"

" The damage has already been done." Ganondorf answered. " My words have reached you as intended and so there is nothing more I need to do. Everything will fall into place in due course so it boils down to waiting and seeing what will become of it."

I couldn't stand by and allow him to make Princess Twilight suffer the same torment that he had inflicted upon me so I rushed forward, swung my sword, and surprisingly, he didn't seem to react to it, allowing me to gash his cheek with the tip of my blade. Blood then trickled down his cheek though Ganondorf merely laughed and I knew what I had done was pointless as he could take much worse. I then swung my sword again but he countered with his own before knocking it out of my hand by swinging his sword slightly followed by slashing me across the chest and finally using the hilt to knock the wind out of me.

Clutching my chest, I winced because of how painful it was--he was still powerful but I didn't know if he was still holding back--but I had to grin and bear it if I planned on beating him this time. Jumping backwards and picking up my sword, Ganondorf charged forward with his sword aiming at me in an execution style, and I barely managed to parry his blow with my own sword though the sudden vibration rattled me whilst he was unaffected. Once again, our blades clashed with neither of us yielding an inch but it quickly became apparent that his skills were vastly superior to my own.

After a few more minutes of nothing but sword blows, I jumped back quite a distance before following through by flinging magic from my sword. I didn't have much magic left so I needed to make it count or else I'd be forced to fight up close. The first attack did nothing as Ganondorf brushed it aside using his cloak so I flung another one only to see him shatter it to pieces by swinging his sword at the right time. I then tried a third shot which struck his shoulder with quite some force behind it but he shrugged it off before dashing forward. Our blades clashed a few more times until I suddenly caught him by surprise.

Though his skills with the sword were beyond impeccable, I did notice that he left himself vulnerable for a split second--I was surprised that I noticed it given how fast he was moving in comparison--allowing someone to strike him if they were good enough. When his weak point exposed itself for that brief moment, I swung my sword and struck a very sensitive spot on his chest. A loose piece of armour then flew off, hitting me in the face before landing somewhere on the ground, and I bore witness to a glowing wound that looked like it had been healing for years but hadn't quite reached that point yet.

Hitting his weak point made Ganondorf come to a complete stop whilst moaning slightly where I proceeded to attack him there repeatedly. He tried to respond by hitting me anywhere he could using his sword but he couldn't muster up any offence as I continued hitting that glowing spot on his chest. Every blow kept on weakening him until he dropped down to one knee and at that precise moment, my belief was that this was a dream and that there was no way I could be prevailing against him like this. Ganondorf tried one last swing but I quickly turned my sword to have it face forward before thrusting it through his chest where it protruded out the other side.

Ganondorf coughed up blood and more trickled forth from the wound where my sword had gone through before dropping onto his other knee. " You have defied my expectations by unleashing a fury you haven't relied on since our original encounter." He coughed up some more blood with some splattering over me which made me feel disgusted. " I am surprised that you did not rely on the power granted upon you from the world you truly call home. What was it called... Equestria? Yes... Why did you hold back on it? Is it because the Fierce Deity has provided more than enough or is there something much more?"

" Had I used my Daydream Shimmer form, I wouldn't have been able to control it." I answered. " Besides, the same thing can be said about you. Why didn't you use that trident of yours which you so lovingly showed me before?"

" It wasn't needed."

" So you went with the sword instead?"

Ganondorf laughed as he coughed up blood. " My skills in combat are vastly superior to your own, child." I thought about laughing but I suspected that he was hiding something so I refrained and maintained my focus. " I am a Gerudo Warrior! I have fought plenty of heroes and others who believed they could conquer me! While you are different from them by possessing unique abilities, you are also just like them in that you proclaim victory far too soon." Suddenly, he grabbed the blade part of my sword and pulled it out of his body before throwing me back where I landed on the ground.

I got back onto my feet only for my entire body to suddenly go numb, and when I looked down at what happened, Ganondorf was smiling his twisted smile even as blood continued spilling from his mouth, his sword having gone through my body by piercing me in the chest. I tried to respond but my body completely shut down leaving me unable to do anything as he had now taken control of the fight. Ganondorf laughed once again though Princess Twilight attempted in vain to stop him only for him to immobilize her using his power without even lifting a finger.

" Sunset!" Twilight cried.

" I knew you were going to attack the wound that I received from those accursed Sages." Ganondorf said. " And so, I allowed you to strike it, giving you the false sense that you had finally gained the upper hand against me. However, you wounded me a lot more than expected yet still not enough to defeat me."

" You foresaw it, didn't you?" I asked.

Ganondorf nodded. " I foresee everything, child, so there was no chance of you succeeding. This contest proves that I was right about you in that your power continues to grow even though you refrain from using much of it. My expectations have been surpassed but I know that you are more than capable of going much further. Why not become my servant and further this strength? I can help you achieve a power most could never hope to achieve. You are strong, child, but you can become even stronger by allowing that power to come forth of its own volition rather than continuing to keep it ensnared."

" Why would I need to?"

" Power..."

" Power?"

" Yes." Ganondorf answered. " Power is the one force most choose to believe in and follow even when they don't realize it. All creatures seek power so that they can overcome the difficult challenges of life yet only the strongest are able to use it successfully. Can you feel it, child? The power that sleeps within you? I can make it come forth and no one would ever be able to stand in your way again. Allow me to help you become what destiny desires."

His words began to resonate with me and it felt like I was losing myself but when Princess Twilight called out to me, I shook my head clear of his influence and grabbed his sword with both of my hands. " Never!" I shouted as I began an attempt at lifting it up. At first, nothing was happening and I felt like a complete idiot, but I mustered up every last ounce of strength within me and started lifting up his sword despite it having protruded through my body.

" What is this!? Ganondorf exclaimed. " No... Impossible!" I continued lifting him up before I tossed him to the side, his sword getting pulled out of my body in the process. He smashed through numerous trees until he crashed into a boulder before slumping to the ground.

" Did I do that?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " I think so but how did you do that?"

" I'm... I'm not sure."

Ganondorf then yelled as his sword burst into dark flames before he tossed it at me where it went right through me. I then slumped to the ground as he disappeared only to reappear in front of me where he dropped to one knee again. " I have been able to foresee everything, child, but this was the first time that I could not make such a prediction. You are the first being to have surprised me in such a way and you will be the last." He coughed up more blood as he grabbed his sword. " My wounds are far more serious than I expected so I cannot kill you even though I wish to smear your blood on my blade."

I then slowly got up onto one knee. " Guess we're both out of it now."

" And yet I continued holding back as did you."

" So then this contest is a draw."

" It would seem so."

" Then will you change things back to the way they were?"

Ganondorf nodded. " You have fulfilled my expectations and have accomplished the task that I placed upon you. I shall return this world to what it once was but you will find that time will have moved forward slightly by several hours. No one in your world aside from you will know that this has happened and they will remain forever ignorant of it. Upon awakening, you shall be in your bed even though you were elsewhere when I changed everything. However... Do not believe only you will suffer, child."

" What are you saying?"

Ganondorf laughed. " You will not be the only one who shall remember what happened in this world. You, the Princess of Friendship, and those who represent the Elements shall remember these events and be plagued with nightmares of them." He pointed a finger at me as he coughed up even more blood. " This is my curse to you! Your friends shall now experience the same torment! Only you though are the one I seek to become my loyal servant and that time shall come." I knew he was lying as he was also after Princess Twilight, and while I was outraged that he wanted my friends to suffer as well, there wasn't much I could do."

" Leave them alone."

" My curse has been afflicted and cannot be undone."

" Why are you doing this?"

" It will become clear in time."

Getting back up--it took a while--I tried to raise my sword only to drop it on the ground. " That's the thing with you, Ganondorf. You keep so much close to your chest because you view all of this as a game. While I have no problem with how you do thing, I take offence with how you harass those I care about. I know I can't beat you now but I'd like to believe that someday it will be possible for me to achieve such a goal." I sounded really brave or rather insane for standing up to him. While he had been weakened, Ganondorf could still kill me so I had to use my words carefully. That's when it dawned on me as to certain words he spoke of earlier. " I'm doing this again, aren't I?"

Ganondorf coughed blood as he nodded. " One day not long from now or perhaps longer, you shall experience another journey where you will endure torment far worse than what you have seen thus far. The princess shall accompany you as she too must come to understand her role in the grand scheme that continues to unfold even now. It is by my will and mine alone that this shall come to pass so accept fate for what it has given you. Child... We shall meet again and when we do... I will not hold back so unless you become even stronger, your life will become forfeit unless you go further beyond my expectations."

Those Chosen By the Planet ends here.

He began laughing before he disappeared by becoming one with the shadows leaving Princess Twilight and me alone to ponder over his words. On the one hand, I hated the fact that I had to go through yet another adventure sometime in the future though it would be mitigated by having Her Highness by my side. On the other, our friends were going to remember what happened in Termina and I feared that they would be asking me a lot of questions. The weirdest thing was that Ganondorf was going to move time forward resulting in me being at home as opposed to the gym at Canterlot High where we had that celebration between CHS and Crystal Prep.

I supposed there was one advantage in all of this. I wouldn't have to explain why time moved forward as no one would realize it except for me. It was evening when all of this started so at best we would only be moving forward three or four hours. Grabbing my face, I pulled off the Fierce Deity's Mask--I wanted to be my true self when everything would begin changing--and flipped back my hair before staring upwards at the branches of the trees. To be honest with myself, I would miss this experience as it meant going back to a slightly mundane existence--barring the wild Equestrian Magic--but I wasn't going to miss being tormented.

Everything then went bright indicating that Ganondorf was beginning to change things back to normal. Knowing that this would be the last time I would see Epona for the time being, I hugged her muzzle as tightly as I could before giving her both the loudest and longest whinny I could muster. My final words to her were to return to where she came from so that she could be loved by the one who raised her. Epona whinnied in response and began galloping off before I turned to Princess Twilight who started to fade away as she was being pulled back to Equestria. " I guess this is where we parts ways for a while, Twilight."

Princess Twilight nodded. " It was an experience that I will never forget and I literally won't as Ganondorf is making sure of it. Sunset... You started things off a little on the sloppy side of things and you were pretty reckless at times, but you rose to the occasion when it was needed and have become a true friend by helping those who needed it. I am honoured to have been your fairy companion during this adventure and hopefully we can do this again."

" You'll probably write several research papers on this experience, huh?"

" Most likely."

" Will I see you again?"

" Of course you will." Twilight answered. " I'll come through the portal if I can find the time or you can come through it yourself and pay me a visit. Remember that you can always come back to Equestria, Sunset, whenever you want without being afraid of being persecuted because of what happened. I will make sure that you will be under my protection so think about it for a while. This isn't our final goodbye but rather a temporary farewell."

" And what about Starlight?"

" I hope you two can meet each other for real someday."

I smiled. " I'll come home when the time is right."

" I'll hold you to that then."

" I've got a lot of explaining to do with our friends."

Princess Twilight laughed. " I'm sure of it. I'm about to completely fade away so may I ask you one last question? What do you suppose Ganondorf has in store for me given that he has been taking an interest in me despite mainly focusing on you? If you can't answer me then that's okay as it's probably very complicated."

I shook my head. " I'm not going to hide it from you, Twilight. I believe that you may be branded with the same mark that I have but I'm not entirely sure about it. If anything, I'd take my words with a grain of salt above anything else. If it turns out to be true and my theory is correct, I am so sorry you've been dragged into my problem as it means Ganondorf will come after you at some point. I'll do everything in my power to keep you safe.

" I know you will."

" Until next time... Princess Twilight Sparkle."

As Her Highness faded away, I looked down at my own body and watched as it faded away as the world began changing back to normal. Despite not having my body at that exact moment in time, I could see Termina slowly shimmer from what it was to the town of Canterlot that had been my home for years. I guessed Ganondorf wanted to prolong the transition by having it go through this process but at least things would be normal again or as normal as it would get around here. Equestrian Magic was still on the loose and I needed to figure out its nature before someone else would become affected by it.

Opening my eyes suddenly, I looked around and saw that I was back in the bedroom of the apartment that I lived in. I had only acquired it a couple of days ago as a gift from my friends who felt I needed to live in my own place as opposed to the library of Canterlot High--I liked living there as there were so many books I could have read to keep me occupied--but I supposed having my own residence would give me more privacy. My sudden surprise of being in my bed almost caused me to fall out of it and onto the floor but I managed to refrain from doing that though it did feel like I had been dreaming.

But, I knew that what happened had been real and my friends would remember the experience as well. They would no doubt have near endless questions for me and I would try my best to answer them all but first I needed to answer questions which had been on my mind. Looking down at the back of my hand, the mark of the Triforce of Courage appeared on the back of it and was a glowing, a reminder that I had been chosen by destiny to wield it because of how often I relied on courage to overcome challenges. Would Princess Twilight discover that she had the mark of the Triforce of Wisdom on the back of her hoof? I hoped she would send me a message about it sometime if it happened.

Rubbing my head, I knew that things weren't over and I didn't need the Triforce to remind me of that. Ganondorf wasn't done with me by a long shot and someday I would have to go on another journey. When would it happen? I had no idea so I needed to remain ever vigilant about it. For now, I planned on getting some sleep considering that I haven't had any in what felt like a really long time. As my eyes began to grow heavy and my head dropped down on the pillow, my mind began thinking about what I would say to my friends about their experiences in Termina.

I also thought about the ramifications. Why did Ganondorf want them to remember what had happened? Did he have plans for them? What about Equestria? Could he conquer it with no trouble as he claimed? Other questions swirled through my head as I slowly closed my eyes and drifted off to sleep yet there was one thing I did need to do as soon as possible. I needed to get my hands on that Hyrule Historia book that Rainbow Dash allowed me to borrow after my Hyrule journey. There were answers located within its pages that would prove essential for what I needed to know about not just Ganondorf but others facets of the overall legend.

Sleeping... My mind thought back on the adventure that I had just been through. It had its ups and downs to be sure as every adventure had situations like that but overall I enjoyed it despite being torments by what I witnessed. I wondered if the masks were still in my possession? I doubted it because they were part of that world and were unlikely to have been brought back with me but I loved changing into other forms and understanding how other creatures functioned. Within the next few days, I knew I needed to explain things to my friends but for now, the days between now and then would be ones of relaxation.

My journey has reached its conclusion and it was one that pushed me to the limits of endurance. If anyone were to find themselves in the same predicament that had ensnared me, I implore you to find a way back to where you truly belong or else you would meet with a terrible fate, one that could prove disastrous. Perhaps I would do what Princess Twilight intended on doing but instead of writing it as a research paper, perhaps I would write it in my magic journal for future reference. With that, I now began to rest and resume my life as before but I knew that this wasn't where my story ends but rather my story had only just begun.

The End...

... But then, you know that this is not the true end of the story. There will be four bonus chapters that will showcase some of the other legends that exist within the Legend of Zelda lore, ones that Sunset will come to realize that they are all connected by a thread that intersects in many different ways. Will she find her answers? We shall see soon enough then. This isn't the end but rather just the beginning.

Bonus Chapter 1: Conflict

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 20, 2017
Bonus Chapter 1: Conflict.

Looking back on what I experienced during my adventure in Termina, I had become a much stronger person. Sure, I was tormented to no end both personally and seeing what was inflicted upon other people, but through it all I gained a better understanding of myself. Despite my own flaws that stemmed from my troubled past, I could appreciate the fact that I helped those who needed it by providing them a sympathetic ear whilst solving the problems that plagued them. I had earned humility yet it was a painful victory as it was what I lacked during my time as Princess Celestia's student.

This coupled with a better grasp of how friendship worked, I had saved an entire world from destruction by manipulating the very fabric of time. This wasn't new for me as I had saved another world and the one that I now called home but the sensation of having accomplished such a feat was one I couldn't help but indulge myself in. But, I knew not to let it get to my head as there was an unfortunate side effect that resulted from this recent world being saved. When I saved Hyrule from Ganondorf, only I remembered the events resulting in my friends having trouble believing me but this time they knew what had happened.

Ganondorf made sure that they would remember the events of Termina and it resulted in me having a lot of questions to answer. Unfortunately, it was a really awkward time for us in that so much happened. First, we saved Camp Everfree from being closed down by a business tycoon--a guy named Filthy Rich whose name was appropriate--and gaining both new magic and magical forms in the process. That alone was a major headache because of how Twilight Sparkle struggled with accepting what she had done as Midnight Sparkle and dealing with Gloriosa Daisy, whose ambitions, whilst honourable in their own way, lead us to having to face off against another person who was consumed by Equestrian Magic.

A few weeks later, we had to deal with the Shadowbolts who wanted to win a dance competition--it might not sound like much but Rarity was dead serious about it--followed by solving what turned out to be a rather obvious mystery that could have prevented the new Daring Do movie from being released--Rainbow Dash would have been crushed. About a week or two after that, I met Starlight Glimmer, the real one and not an alternate version, and we hit off pretty well despite her not remembering the events of Termina, yet this was short-lived as we had another person who got consumed by Equestrian Magic, Juniper Montage, though she wasn't as bad as Twilight Sparkle and Gloriosa.

When the problem with Juniper had been resolved, my friends finally decided to confront me about the elephant in the room and I knew there was no point in trying to change the subject or not wanting to talk about it. I was fortunate in that other issues came up that distracted us from having to deal with that particular issue but deep down I knew it was something that had been on their minds ever since everything was changed back to normal. In a way, this was Ganondorf's means of giving me one final bout of torment knowing my friends would hound me until I confessed to what I knew.

I wished Princess Twilight had been there to help me answer their questions but she had her duties in Equestria to attend to. On a side note, Her Highness had been extremely giddy in recent days and I was confused by her sudden lapse in character until I was given the explanation. She and the pony versions of my friends had succeeded in performing a miracle, the restoration of the six "Pillars of Equestria", the heroes who were the stuff of legend. No one knew what happened over a thousand years ago until now thanks to Princess Twilight's constant geeking-out over her idol, Starswirl the Bearded, resulting in their return.

Do I know much about the pillars? Not at all as not even Princess Celestia knew anything other than Starswirl disappearing without a trace. I've no doubt that Her Highness is going to be sending me messages talking non-stop about them until I either tell her to stop or she gets bored. Unfortunately, this news from my birth home couldn't avoid what I had to deal with in the form of answering my friend's questions. If there was a saving grace, they didn't ask about the Triforce of Courage inside of me--I didn't know if they were aware of it or not--but their remaining questions proved difficult for me to answer.

Several days ago...

" I know you all have questions relating to what happened about two months ago." I said.

" Y'all guessed correctly." Applejack said.

I sighed. " I'd hoped to have not been put on the spot like this but I knew there was no way of avoiding it."

" How in the hay did we end up in that plumb crazy lookin' world?"

" It's... complicated.

Applejack slammed her fist onto the table leaving behind a crack that trickled across but didn't break it. " Now wait just a gosh dern minute! How can ya say somethin' like that given that all of us remember what happened. Sunset... I know y'all don't like talkin' 'bout your past but you can't expect us ta accept that for an answer for even a second! Sayin' it's complicated makes it sound like ya don't think we can handle it and that's pure bunk!"

Rarity nodded. " Agreed. I mean, Applejack's method is much too vulgar for my tastes but her point still stands. We've been through so much together, darling, so the idea of you thinking less of us just because we don't understand what's been going on is completely unfair. You know that we are going to keep on asking questions until you cave in and answer them so I think it's best for you not to take that route and simply come clean. I insist on it as it will make things much more smoother rather than being tense."

" Way to make me look like the villain, Rarity."

" Perish the thought."

" What are y'all gettin' at?"

" We all remember what happened when our world changed into that other one." Rarity answered. " We've been putting off confronting Sunset about it for quite some time, too long if you want my opinion, because of other committments getting in the way. What we saw cannot be undone no matter how much we try and for that we simply must know the truth or else we shall suffer endless nightmares."

" Welcome to my world." I said, sighing.

" Chillax!" Rainbow Dash said, in an attempt to get the tensions to simmer down. " While I thought it was awesome that I was a fearsome pirate who commanded a fierce and loyal crew despite being evil at the same time, there's no need to grill Sunset even if she does know what's going on." She then darted her head left and right in hopes no one outside of her circle would hear what we were discussing--we were in the library at our usual table--before continuing. " Don't feel pressured into explaining yourself, Sunset. Yeah, I know it sounds weird that I'd say something like that but I feel you're being given too much unwanted stress."

" That is weird." Rarity said.

" Y'all feelin' okay there, Dash?" Applejack asked.

Rainbow Dash nodded. " Remember back when we first agreed with Princess Twilight to become Sunset's friend?" The others all nodded though I refrained from taking offence as I wanted to hear where she was going with this. " Most of the time, all we did was grill her because of what she did when she thought less about everyone, so maybe we should take it easy on her this time?"

Of all of my friends, Rainbow Dash was the last person I expected to offer such sage advice. Usually, she would view such things as being lame or that she had no idea what was going on due to her mind being fixated on something else, yet she surprised me by protecting me from the onslaught Applejack and Rarity were giving me. In truth, I couldn't hold back anymore as even I was getting sick and tired of not saying anything. Despite my hesitation towards it, I began telling my friends everything about what happened including my personal torment, Ganondorf, Princess Twilight's involvement, and even Starlight Glimmer.

It felt good getting so much off of my chest by telling them everything but it quickly soured when I was reminded by Applejack that she and the others had been given a similar explanation before regarding my previous journey and what I said about it. At the time, my friends didn't really believe me and thought me having either dreamt it or I was going through some stress, but they didn't have that excuse now. They had to have believed me now as they remembered what happened thanks to Ganondorf. I chose to ignore Applejack and continued with my explanation until I finished, requiring some water afterwards as it took quite some time.

Twilight Sparkle was the first to ask a question. " So you couldn't use your magic?"

I shook my head. " I had to rely on my own skills and whatever else I could find."

" I can't believe you whupped the butts of both those demons." Rainbow Dash said.

" That wasn't my favourite moment."

" Still, it was totally awesome you did that!"

" You're missing the point, Rainbow Dash." Twilight Sparkle said.

Rainbow Dash scoffed. " Whatever."

Twilight Sparkle continued. " Still, I can't even begin to imagine the kind of torment you went through, Sunset. Had we retained our memories during that experience, we could have helped you but instead we were forced to portray the characters we had been designated as. So many familiar faces both friend and foe, and none of them could help with the sole exception of Her Highness, the other me. I'm surprised she kept her memories even though she started out like the rest of us."

" If not for her, we'd still be stuck in that world." I said.

" I'll admit that I did bein' the owner of mah own farm." Applejack said. " But, why is this Ganondorf fellow so interested in ya?"

" He wants me to become his servant."

My friends were shocked upon hearing me say that and as expected, Applejack was the first to say something. " What!? He wants y'all to do that!? I hope ya refused as there's no way any of us could accept such an outcome. You're not evil, Sunset, and that's ta honest truth."

I lowered my head. " There were times when I allowed myself to listen to his words at the beginning."

" You're not evil!"

" I'm still resisting but I don't know how long I can keep it up."

That clearly didn't settle well with Applejack. " So... Y'all are thinkin' of givin' up are ya? Sunset... You were the one who saved our butts not once, not twice, but three times despite ta odds bein' squarely against ya and you were pushed to ta limit, yet here y'all wanna just quit and let this guy mess with yer mind? Princess Twilight would be ashamed if she saw y'all right now actin' like this."

Rarity then stood up. " Maybe talking about this wasn't such a good idea after all."

Rainbow Dash scoffed. " Ya think?"

" Applejack... Maybe we should give Sunset some space?"

" But we've still got plenty of questions." Applejack answered.

" Yes but she's clearly showing signs of not being up to the task." Rarity said, pointing at me where they saw that I had since buried my head in my hands. " I know this is an awful lot for us to take in yet Sunset is feeling it the most. As much as I would like for her to continue explaining things, we should come back to it another time when clearer heads are prevailing and not brash arrogance."

Applejack then looked at me and realized that Rarity was right. " Shoot! I didn't mean ta make her feel so stressed out 'bout it. I mean, she did say that she stopped listening to that guy's words but hearing her say that she can't resist made me lash out because she is much tougher than that. Heck, Sunset is more resilient than ta rest o' us and that's sayin' somethin' given that we're still comin' ta grips what with us havin' magic and what not." Applejack then looked at Rainbow Dash with a smile on her face. " Guess we should have listened to ya instead of making things even worse."

" I like it when you say I'm right about things." Rainbow Dash said.

" Don't let it give ya a swollen head."

" Me? A swelled head? Pfft! Yeah right!"

Both Applejack and Rainbow Dash began jabbing at each other in a playful manner leaving Rarity, Pinkie Pie, and Fluttershy rubbing the bridges of their noses in frustration over seeing such a display, yet Twilight Sparkle chose to comfort me instead. " On a personal note, I'm glad that you managed to put Sunset Demon to rest. I know it must have been a nightmare for so long but I'm happy you can move on with your life. I am surprised that you also took down Midnight Sparkle but then I dealt with her with everyone's help. If you want us to have a better understanding of this, Sunset, we need to know more."

I sighed. " I'm not ready for that just yet."

" Give it some time."

" How much though?"

" Not too long otherwise we might think you were trying to cover it up."

I looked at Twilight Sparkle squarely in the eyes and nodded. " I need a week or two to calm my nerves before we can try this again. In the meantime, I need to keep my mind occupied otherwise I'll likely relapse or something and become even more irritable than I already am. I promise that I will tell you guys everything as you're all part of this now even though I wish that weren't the case."

What was my method of keeping myself occupied? I decided to ask Rainbow Dash if I could borrow the same book that I read before after my previous journey ended. It wasn't the smartest idea imaginable as I should have gone with something that wouldn't remind me of my experiences in Termina. Much to my surprise, Rainbow Dash agreed to let me borrow her book and even more surprising was the fact that it was a new edition--it had additional lore the previous version lacked--and so once again I found myself with the Hyrule Historia in my hands, the very book that housed legends of this video game world that essentially was a part of my life.

This new version cleaned up some information that had been deemed incorrect in the older edition and while I wanted to read up on that, I wanted to read about legends that I had either ignored or glossed over at the time. It was also much thicker, a testament to it having more content, though there was no way I could get through so much in a single sitting without my brain turning to mush. Like before, there were images that accompanied the text along with footnotes designed to explain things for those who were curious so I could imagine myself witnessing what transpired within the endless stream of words that were before me.

Looking at the table of contents, I could see that it was more streamlined than before--they made an effort to make it more user friendly--so I began combing through to see what would take my fancy. Initially, nothing stood amongst the earliest known legend though I was admittedly curious about the Four Sword but I kept looking until stopping at something that honestly made me question why I never noticed it before. My eyes focused on the section dedicated to "Ocarina of Time" and in particular, a chapter that talked about an event which had occurred before Ganondorf's rise to power.

Memories of my journey through Hyrule then began flooding through my head and yet this was something I didn't know about. I felt compelled to know about this event as it would give me additional information that would satisfy my curiousity--I was beginning to act a lot like Princess Twilight in that regard--so flipping through the pages, I came to a stop at the chapter in question. I was greeted with an image of the different tribes that existed in Hyrule though they were at each other's throats. I wasn't surprised at seeing Ganondorf's people fighting but the other tribes defintely shocked me to my core.

"The Hyrule Civil War." I said to mysef. " Why do I have a feeling that this is going to make me feel miserable by the end of it?" Knowing that I couldn't refuse my curiousity, I grabbed a cup of hot cocoa which had been brewed several minutes ago, took a sip, put it down on the side table next to me, and began to read about this event. Hyrule had seen its share of problems ever since it was first founded as a kingdom in ages past yet nothing compared to what happened ten years before Ganondorf's eventual rise to power and the darkness that plagued the land for seven years.

It seemed that the tribes of Hyrule had grown distant towards one another in recent centuries as a result of the changing landscape, famine, conflict, and other factors that resulted in strained relationships. It didn't help that other tribes, namely the Zora, Gerudo, and Kokiri had begun to make themselves known to the Hylians, Gorons, Sheikah, and the fairy folk who thrived where fountains could be found. What should have been friendly encounters quickly turned sour when each of these new tribes claimed territory that had been sought by other tribes resulting in tension flaring and conflict following soon after. One example involved Lake Hylia...

" Why must you insist that the lake belongs to you?"

" The water flows down from our domain in the northeast until it reaches the lake."

" What a terrible excuse!"

" What!? You air breathers are so ignorant that it makes me wonder how you managed to survive for all these centuries."

" Like I'll allow a fish freak to tell me what to do."

" This body of water is the territorial right of the Zoras and we shall fight to the very end in order to keep our claim."

" We Hylians came here long before you abominations crawled out of the water so this lake belongs to us."

" Then we have reached an impasse."

" I'm going to give you fish freaks an ultimatum. You have until the end of tomorrow to clear out of the lake and never return. If you refuse to leave by then, we'll have no choice but to slaughter you all until there's no one left."

" Typical of you air breathers to want to resort to violence in order to get your way. It's your means to an end so that you can flex your convoluted ideals of being superior to we aquatic denizens but such threats will fall on deaf ears. We Zora will not yield! Should we be killed then more Zora from other domains beyond this land will come and avenge us leaving you unable to overcome their numbers. Go and tell your king that this lake belongs to us."

" Don't you dare push me!"

" What do you plan to do about it?"

" You'll find out soon enough."

" Is that a threat?"

" I'll say no more."

From what I was reading, this was but one example of tensions that existed between the Hylians and Zoras. Both tribes laid claim to Lake Hylia yet neither were willing to yield resulting in tensions between the two. Unfortunately, it only grew worse from there until actual bloodshed occurred when three Zora were ambushed by Hylians and slaughtered like cattle. The Zora were furious and retaliated by killing two Hylians and kidnapped several children who were simply there to get a closer look at the beauty that the lake had become known for across Hyrule.

Upon hearing this attrocity, the Hylians immediately travelled to Zora's Domain and demanded the release of the children. The Zora said they would only if the Hylians would surrender their claim of the lake and never set foot there again. This didn't settle well with the Hylians who refused such a demand with one amongst their number killing a Zora right in front of everyone present. From there, things escalated out of control with both sides engaging in battle, hatred driving their minds. Whilst the children were unharmed, the same couldn't be said about the Hylians and Zoras who were killed.

By the time the conflict was resolved by the timely intervention of King Zora, the damage had been done resulting in all but three Hylians from the group--it says that there were roughly fifteen Hylians--who had travelled to Zora's Domain having lost their lives and only two Zora losing theirs in addition to the one who died initially. Additional encounters would occur over time with Lake Hylia being a focal point for their grievances--and the battleground--where more lives were lost, scores injured, and environmental damage being inflicted resulting in the land and water becoming contanimated.

This went on for about several months before the two leaders finally decided to meet with one another to resolve the problem. Because of the tensions between the two tribes, the leaders met one another in a private location known only to them without any entourage. This was done as a means of building trust between them as neither would have any kind of advantage over the other. Would this result in lasting peace despite what had already happened or would the conflict continue until they destroy one another. My heart began racing as I continued to read only to suddenly stop upon seeing who was portraying both leaders.

I honestly shouldn't have been surprised that people I knew would be portraying characters in a video game. I immediately recognized Hondo Flanks as King Zora though he looked much younger than before. He was Rarity's father who loved his sports teams which annoyed her to no end because she lacked his passion yet he loved his daughters and his wife with a passion rarely seen by most men in his position. From what I could remember of this journey, I never met the king until right at the very end to warn him of Ganondorf yet he wasn't portrayed by anyone yet was this time.

" To be honest with you, I did not want to have this meeting given the circumstances that exist between our two tribes, but I feel that this is necessary as a means of preventing further bloodshed and loss of life." Hondo Flanks said.

It turned out that the King of Hyrule was Night Light, Princess Twilight's father, and would also be Twilight Sparkle's father in the world I called home. Her Highness never really said much about her parents other than how they tend to be gullible with regards to accepting things when they should in fact be cautious, but what she did say was that she wouldn't have pursued magic and become Princess Celestia's student if not for their support. As for the human version of Night Light, I've yet to meet him--the same with the pony version--but much like Her Highness, Twilight Sparkle has nothing but admiration towards her father. It made me wish that my own parents had given me that kind of love.

Night Light nodded, the expression on his face was one of shame. " My people did not wish for this meeting to take place between us but I agree that it must be done in order to preserve a semblance of peace."

" I am sure you understand what has been going on with regards to the lake located in the southwest of this land?"

Again, Night Light nodded. " To think that our respective people would quarrel over such a beautiful place."

Hondo Flanks glared at his counterpart. " We Zora are one with the water so it makes sense that the lake rightfully belongs to us."

" And yet we Hylians did find the location first before your people did."

" Yes... That is the unfortunate reality of it."

" My people would riot on the streets were I to yield anything to you, King Zora." Night Light said. " They are very passionate about the lake as it represents a tranquility rarely seen in this land, yet I do understand that your people, the Zora, have a much better understanding of that tranquility given how you possess a strong flare for dignity."

Hondo Flanks lowered his head. " It is the same with my people. They believe the lake is rightfully ours and to see me give it up to save face would cause them to rise up in anger and declare war against the Hylians." Noticing a flower that was growing nearby, he reached down, gently plucked it from the ground, and fawned over it before placing it back on the ground where it came from. " If only the tensions had not occurred between our respective peoples. We could have shared this place without the loss of life."

It was at that moment where Night Light began formulating an idea. " Perhaps there is a way we can solve this issue."

" I'm afraid that I must protest against it."

" But, I have not told you anything."

Hondo Flanks raised his hand. " While I have no personal quarrels with you, King Harkinian, my people will not yield any territory that we have claimed as our own. Whatever your idea is, it will not go over well with the Zora."

" King Zora... If you would just let me explain."

I never would have expected Hondo Flanks, or rather, King Zora, to be so stubborn as to want to ignore a potential means of solving a crisis. Then again, this was supposed to be a younger version of him so his maturity wasn't as strong as it was when I encountered him during my journey through Hyrule. Although, he might have been under an intense amount of pressure resulting from the Zora not wanting to show weakness in the face of those who were different from them. Night Light was likely going through the same thing but perhaps even more so as he was trying to reach out for compromise.

Who knew that there were such tensions that existed between the tribes of Hyrule. Granted, when I was there on my first journey, there was nothing but peace to be had barring the actions of Ganondorf, but reading about what happened was a complete shock. If tensions were bad between the Hylians and the Zoras, I feared what I would learn with regards to the former dealing with the Gorons, Kokiri, and especially the Gerudo. I mean, I knew this was a fictional world inside of a video game but it felt just so compelling and my own personal experiences of being there added to it.

Hondo Flanks then got up and turned away from Night Light. " We Zora are known for showing the utmost respect to those who have earned it whilst maintaining a form of dignity the other tribes could never hope to understand. Our aim here was to discuss a means of preventing further violence between our tribes yet you choose to want to deal with it yourself and not ask for my opinions. Perhaps my people were right about how you Hylians believe yourselves to be superior to everyone else. I am sorry, King Harkinian, but I feel that I must put the needs of the Zora first and foremost."

He began walking away leaving Night Light to come up with anything to salvage this meeting. " Do you have any children?"

Hondo Flanks whipped around upon hearing that. " What did you say?"

" Do you have any children?"

" Why are you asking such a preposterous question?" Hondo Flanks asked. " Are you trying to salvage this meeting between us? If so then I am afraid that your efforts are sadly in vein and that I must return to Zora's Domain."

Night Light sighed. " My wife... gave birth to a beautiful baby girl about a month ago. Despite having an illness that keeps her bedridden, she was still able to go through with her pregnancy despite the odds being stacked against her, thus my daughter can be viewed as being a miracle child. Anyway, as is tradition within my family, we are naming her Zelda, after my wife, who is also named Zelda. For my child, I am hoping she will grow up in a land that knows nothing of violence but rather a peaceful existence where all tribes are united together under the one banner of my family."

" Why should you Hylians rule over everything?"

" No... I do not wish for that."

" Then you are contradicting yourself."

" Let me explain my wish, King Zora." Night Light said. " I wish for the tribes to unite together and form one kingdom again like it was in ages long passed. Yes, this land was once a glorious kingdom but tensions between the tribes reached a boiling point as a result of needs outweighing peace. I know that reunification is a difficult prospect as everyone has needs that they wish to see fulfilled and that is why I have chosen to meet with each leader in hopes of finding a solution before things get out of hand. Because of the tensions between the Hylians and Zoras, my efforts have proven difficult."

" What are you getting at?"

" For my child, I am willing to make sacrifices for her sake and the sake of everyone in this land."

Hondo Flanks then sat back down in bewilderment over what he had just heard. " You are willing to make concessions knowing that your people would despise such a thing? I must admit that you have surprised me as my assumption was that you would be like the rest of your kind. Perhaps I was hasty in believing that all Hylians are the same. You are different from them in some regards but you must be willing to go even further lest your words be simply that, words without any substance to them, without any real meaning behind them."

" The lake shall be named Lake Hylia..."

" Is that the name you wish to go with?"

Night Light nodded. " It shall be named after an ancient goddess who once fought alongside the creatures of this land in ages past. Much of that particular legend have been lost to time but my family does retain some snippets that were documented in a few books. Anyway, the Hylians will have control of the lake's..."

" I knew it!" Hondo Flanks shouted as he shook his fists. " Your words were meant to serve as a distraction!"

Night Light shook his head. " No... I am doing what must be done for everyone. The Hylians shall own the surface of the lake and the nearby land whilst the Zoras shall own everything that lurks underwater."

" That... Is actually a good compromise."

" Both sides end up getting something out of it."

" Yes, but my people will not forgive the Hylians for what happened nor will your people forgive the Zoras."

Nodding his head, Night Light went silent for several moments before continuing. " Which is why an alliance between our tribes is necessary though for the time being, it must be between our respective families, King Zora. The Zora shall control and guard all bodies of water throughout this land. In return, the Hylians shall refrain from interferring with your culture until such a time comes where both tribes can co-exist with one another."

" An alliance does sound like a good idea but I am not convinced."

" What more must I do?"

" You have done more than enough, King Harkinian." Hondo Flanks answered. " But, you must reach out to the other tribes who exist in this land. If you can forge alliances with them then we Zora shall join in the unification. To address how your people might feel about this arrangement, I proclaim that only you may visit Zora's Domain for the time being until our respective people gain a better understand of each other."

" Then it seems I must earn your trust."

" No, you must earn my respect."

Night Light looked upwards. " Then I shall proceed to form the remaining alliances that I need. This land shall once again become a kingdom where everyone is treated equally and all cultures are respected. Your status as a king will not be tarnished in that it shall be recognized even though my reign over the land will be evident."

Standing up, Hondo Flanks walked over to Night Light and placed his hand on the latter's shoulder. " If anyone can make this land into a kingdom much like the old one was before any of our times, it is you, King Harkinian. By the way... My wife recently laid eggs which hatched into several beautful Zora babies. Knowing that our people are small in number, she took all but one child to the southern lands in order to start a new Zora colony though she was reluctant to leave until I encouraged her that it was for the best. Before she left, my wife named the youngest one, Ruto, after one of her ancestors."

" So you believe peace can be achieved?"

" Yes."

" Then I shall do everything in my power to see that happen."

" For our children and for the people, let it be so.

Looking up from the pages of text, I was surprised at how both monarchs were able to come to a compromise all because one of them asked about whether the other had any children. It made me happy knowing that they found a common bond even though it cost the lives of innocents from both sides to reach that point. King Harkinian showed tremendous humility by making the first move with King Zora accepting and adding his own contributions. Still, they should have come up with a solution much sooner as then there wouldn't have been any senseless deaths.

I quickly flipped back to the table of contents to see how long this section about the Hyrule Civil War and I was surprised to see that it covered roughly thirty pages. I had no desire to read through everything as some parts were more significant than others and I'd likely fall asleep before finishing. Flipping back to where I was before, I skipped through some pages though I made sure to read snippets here and there just to make sure I got the gist of the events. There were some additional conflicts between the Hylians and Zoras though no lives were lost and an incident involving the Hylians visiting the Kokiri Forest only to be frightened away by something.

Another incident involved the Shieikah going on a spying mission to learn more about the Gerudo which resulted in the entire party losing their lives in the desert that existed beyond the fortress the Gerudo called home. A footnote revealed that there weren't many Shiekah left during this time as most had died in service to the Royal Family of Hyrule throughout the centuries, and those who perished in the desert left only the sole survivor, an attendant to Princess Zelda by the name of Impa. My mind then suddenly got flushed with memories of my encounters with this Impa who was portrayed by Applejack when I was there.

To be the last one of your kind must have been nothing short of an eternal nightmare with so sign of it ever ending yet according to the reminder of the footnote, Impa served as any attendant would do in her position regardless of what had happened to her people. As much as I wanted to continue reading more about her life, I chose instead to focus on the civil war in hopes of seeing what else had occurred. Flipping through a few more pages, I came to a stop upon seeing an image of a familiar person resulting in me slapping my forehead. I knew it was my mind showing those I knew in my life as these characters but I wished it hadn't been so subtle here.

" Why is Pinkie Pie in this book?" I asked myself before reading further. Not only did King Harkinian have to deal with the Zoras and their claim over Lake Hylia, but also the mountain people known as the Gorons, who laid claim to Death Mountain and were willing to fight to defend it. They also wanted more territory, namely a small village that had been built at the base of Death Mountain and was originally the home of the Shiekah. Whilst their love of eating rocks was well known, their fighting prowess wasn't as obvious. Gorons weren't pushovers by any means in that they could easily overpower anyone who stood as an obstacle.

Of all the Gorons, the one who was seen as the strongest was Darunia, their tribe's patriarch though they preferred to call him their Big Brother. I remembered Pinkie portraying this particular character--seeing her swinging around that oversized hammer in my mind was something I'd never forget--during my journey and she was as fun loving as always though she was more focused on protecting the other Gorons. I also recalled that there were tensions with Darunia that revolved around being disrespected to which he took great offence. " If Pinkie is portraying Darunia again, I wonder what she'll be like as a younger version of herself."

I shuddered to think of such a thing. A younger Pinkie was more dangerous than an older one as being young meant having a more wild personality and she was definitely wild given how her parties had a tendency towards breaking every rule of physics several times over. According to the book, Darunia had every intention of leading his "Brothers" to the village at the base of Death Mountain and conquer it but was having doubts over whether he was making the right decision. King Harkinian, several days after having met King Zora, wished to meet with Darunia in hopes of avoiding conflict.

" Why are you looking so glum, Darunia?"

" Wah!" Pinkie Pie shouted as she jumped slightly off the ground before patting her chest where her heart was. " Even though you're my older sister, Maud, I wish you wouldn't keep on surprising me like that. I'm likely to receive a heart attack one of these days."

" I just walked up next to you and asked a question." Maud Pie said.

" Yes but you are so quiet that you act like a ghost or something."

I stopped reading and rolled my eyes upon seeing that Maud Pie, Pinkie Pie's older sister, was once again portraying a Goron. At least this time she was alive and well as opposed to the opposite like she was in Termina but I shouldn't have been surprised to see her. I was surprised that Pinkie's other sisters, Limestone Pie and Marble Pie, were absent given how all four of them were pretty close despite Pinkie being the odd-one-out because of how she behaved differently from them. Maybe they would make an appearance as I continued reading or maybe just Pinkie and Maud were necessary for this. Scratching my head, I continued reading.

" Why are you pacing back and forth, Darunia?"

" What!?" Pinkie Pie exclaimed whilst smiling a dishonest smile that was easy to recognize as being false. " I don't know what you're talking about, Maud. Me? Pacing back and forth? Pfft! Don't be silly! I'm just looking down at that village below at the base of Death Mountain."

Maud Pie looked down at the ground for a second before looking back up at her younger sister. " Then why are there scuff marks from your hammer?"

Pinkie Pie sighed. " I never could get anything past you."

" I am just observant, that's all."

" You should have been made the Big Boss of the Gorons."

Maud Pie shook her head. " Our Brothers chose you to lead us, Darunia, as you possess the greatest strength and experience. Besides, you are a descendant of the one who freed our ancestors from the dragon that once terrorized this mountain. I am also his descendant through blood though I lack what you possess, strength. I could never lead our Brothers without them not taking me seriously."

" But you're older."

" Age doesn't have anything to do with it." Maud Pie said. " As long as any of us can remember, we Gorons choose our leaders based on strength, conviction, compassion, and being level-headed in a given situation. While you struggle with that last one, you excel in the other three qualities making you the best candidate. In any case, your leadership is needed now more than ever."

Swinging her hammer around a few times, Pinkie Pie slammed into it the ground, a sign that she didn't appreciate Maud's answer, but also knew that she was right. " Ever since that messenger who represents King Harkinian wished to meet with me, I've been thinking about what it would mean for the Gorons. From what I was told about the messenger, he looked rather scrawny as though he had no meat on his bones and looked like he could get pushed aside without any effort."

Maud Pie raised an eyebrow. " I am surprised that you didn't lose your temper when you found out."

" Oh I was angry that these Hylians would send someone like that to see me."

" But?"

" But, I've too much on my mind right to even worry about that." Pinkie Pie answered. She pointed down at the village below before turning her attention towards a higher elevation of the mountain that looked like it was moving though it was in fact a collective of Gorons who appeared to be agitated. " When those strange shadowy folk first founded that village long ago, our ancestors thought nothing of it and carried on with their lives. But, when they recently began expanding onto the mountain, our Brothers grew furious and demanded that we take action against such disrespect."

" What do you think?"

" That's why I've been pacing about, Maud."

Maud Pie rubbed her chin as she looked down at the village. " I heard that the sole survivor of the shadow folk plans on opening the village up to regular people. That sounds nice as everyone deserves a chance to live somewhere."

Pinkie Pie nodded. " But our territory has been violated when they began expanding. I've refrained from initiating an attack because I believe that would solve nothing but the others are demanding retribution by taking the village for ourselves."

" What do you plan on doing, Darunia?"

" I don't know."

" Maybe their leader will help make a decision."

" You mean the King of the Hylians?"

Maud Pie nodded. " He is on equal footing with you, sister, so if anything he should be able to come up with a decision on how to solve this."

Pinkie Pie grew enthusiastic at first only to become glum shortly afterwards. " Even if we were to find a solution, our Brothers wouldn't accept it. They would prefer to go wild and destroy whatever was in their path out of sheer anger and you know how difficult it can be to stop a Goron once he is mad. If this King Harkinian is a man of character who can stop this village from expanding into our territory, we might be able to work things out. I might even make him an honourary member of the Gorons though I expect to be treated as an equal in return and not simply someone who he can step on whenever he likes."

" You are conflicted."

" Don't I know it."

No wonder Pinkie Pie didn't know what she wanted to do. On the one hand, her pride as a warrior was being tested as she was remaining civil over a situation where her people were clearly furious and demanded her to take matters into her own hands as leader and do something. On the other hand, her will to please her people had gotten shaky as she believed a physical altercation would result in the Hylians entering Death Mountain to seek revenge. While she had no doubts that the Gorons were far stronger than the Hylians, their numbers were smaller than theirs.

Having all that pressure was never any good as it would cause complications further down the line, yet I was surprised to know that Kakariko Village was originally the town where the Shiekah resided--if I did know then I had forgotten. Being within proximity to Hyrule Castle Town made sense as the Shiekah were ready to act upon the king issuing them a command but since Impa was the only one left, allowing commonfolk to live there would give them roofs over their heads rather than just let it rot for eternity. If there was one thing I had to question, it would be why build Kakariko Village at the base of Death Mountain?

If it had been built say, somewhere near the center of Hyrule--I knew there was a ranch there but it could have been incorporated into the village--it would have solved all known problems with the Gorons not feeling that their territory is being threatened and the King having his personal spies close at hand. My curiosity grew deeper as I continued to read and it became apparent that Darunia was going to make a crazy decision that would change the outcome. Why did I feel that way? He seemed liked a civil man on the outside but was prone to bursts of rage were he pushed far enough.

To Darunia, his people meant everything to him and had to make difficult decisions. Would he seriously consider attacking a village that wasn't much of a threat despite the incursion they had made? An act like that would have made him come across as being ruthless and unreasonable but perhaps he was concerned that the Hylians would continue expanding Kakariko Village therefore taking more land from the Gorons? I do remember Darunia as having a mean streak when especially upset but the idea of seeing him resort to excessive violence was too much for me to bear.

" You need to make a choice, Darunia."

" And I have, Maud."

" What did you decide?"

" I'm going to meet with the Hylian King as he requested." Pinkie Pie answered. " If he and I can forge an alliance where both of us are treated with the same respect, he and I shall become 'Sworn Brothers'. He must also help deal with the problem his people are causing down below in that village. I know that our Brothers won't be happy when I tell them about it but they must remember that I am the Big Boss of the Gorons. My decision is final!"

" I am happy that you came up with something."

Pinkie Pie then grabbed her hammer and lifted it up effortlessly. " However, should I find that this King Harkinian is deceitful in any way, I will have our Brothers attack that village and take it over in the name of our sovernity."

Maud Pie merely blinked. " Are you sure about that?"

Pinkie Pie nodded. " I must place diplomacy over aggression for the good of my people but I must also make sure we are treated fairly. I know that we Gorons had an alliance of sorts with the Hylians back in the ancient days but those times will never return. If the Hylian King wishes to forge an alliance, he must be willing to respect me."

" I will not question your decision."

" I'm the Big Boss so what I say goes."

" Now we need to focus on the other matter."

" There's something else?"

Maud Pie nodded. " Ever since the people from the desert first made themselves known, they have been attacking anyone who sets foot in their territory. I know we are on the other side of this land but their actions could drag us into a potential conflict we shouldn't really be a part of. I meant to mention this to you earlier, Darunia, but you were so fixated with how to deal with that village that I chose to hold off until you had come to a decision."

" Who is the leader of those desert people?"

" Someone wearing heavy black armour."

" I wouldn't want to meet someone like that."

My entire body shivered at the notion that Maud had mentioned Ganondorf but then I remembered that he was the King of the Gerudo Thieves before his eventual rise to power resulting in him conquering Hyrule by getting his hands on the Triforce. Even before he plunged the kingdom into darkness, he proved to be a threat to the land simply because his people were causing unrest by attacking those who entered their territory without permission. If I remembered correctly, Ganondorf was the only male amongst his people hence why he was made their king though I suspected it had to do with tradition more than anything else.

While my heart wanted me to read up about the actions of the Gerudo, my curiosity wanted me to know whether the Gorons attacked Kakariko Village. Turning to the next page of the Hyrule Historia, I was greeted with a positive result in that no attack ever occurred, but then my heart sank upon learning another truth. Instead of attacking, they instead simply rampaged through the village to reach Hyrule Field where a much larger conflict had erupted. I had hoped Darunia would have shown restraint or at least common sense but I supposed his pride as a warrior blinded him.

Flipping through several more pages, I reached the section that was dedicated to the Gerudo. I knew some aspects of their culture though now I could learn even more thanks to the information contained within this book. The Gerudo were a band of desert nomads who were relatively unknown through Hyrule's history in that they didn't appear anywhere in history books until around the time of Ganondorf's rise to power. It said here that a pair of Hylian men accidentally discovered the Gerudo when they were curious about what was located to the west of Hyrule Field as it was an area no one had ever explored before.

The two men were captured and treated harshly because of their gender by the Gerudo but were eventually released by order of Ganondorf though I suspect he may have had ulterior motives in doing so. After that, the existence of the Gerudo became common knowledge to the Hylians resulting in the Hylian King, Harkinian, to attempt to forge an alliance, but he quickly discovered that they weren't interested. He believed it to be a misunderstanding and made a second attempt at forging an alliance but again he was denied by the Gerudo. After that, he focused on forming other alliances but held out hoping they would join one day.

Given the harsh conditions located within the desert, the Gerudo had learned to adapt to their surroundings by using what resources they had available, but it proved a difficult task in that there were times when resources were non-existant forcing them to seek other resources from beyond the desert. They chose to target the Hylians as they were the closest and did so by using a combination of nightfall and their thieving skills. Surviving out in the desert meant training one's body to fight against anything with the strongest being viewed favourably amongst the others.

As I continued reading, I soon discovered that there was a hierarchy amongst the Gerudo below their king. Whoever proved themselves to be the most efficient thief in terms of stealing, fighting, and being excellent marksmen whilst on horseback were given higher positions of power. Huh... I was expecting friendship and compassion but I supposed that didn't matter to the Gerudo. Those who lacked these skills were deemed the lowest among their society and were given menial tasks such as standing guard or having to find resources either by stealing them or finding them in the desert.

Skimming through the next few paragraphs, I came upon an incident that piqued my curiosity. King Harkinian made a third attempt at forging an alliance with the Gerudo and sent his envoy to make peace with them but like before, they refused to hear what they had to say, but this time they chose to take matters into their own hands. Whether Ganondorf ordered them or not, they attacked the Hylian envoy. The attack was carried out Nabooru, who was viewed as being the one Ganondorf would choose to be his second-in-command after the previous one died of a disease, yet she--Nabooru--viewed herself as unworthy of such a distinction.

" Why did you come here a third time?"

" We only wish to speak to your king about forming an alliance with our king."

" Then you have not only wasted your time but ours as well."

" Please! We believe that this alliance between our tribes shall be beneficial for everyone."

" We of the Gerudo know you cannot be trusted."

" Why do you think that?"

" Aside from the Great Ganondorf, all men are useless and nothing more than mewling cowards who think of themselves as brave souls. We can see that you hide behind your fellow men hoping to use them as shields rather than face us yourself. Like we said to the others, we acknowledge your existence but refuse to form an alliance. Go back and tell he who sent you out here our message and don't ever come back here again or else you will force our hand."

" But that isn't what our king wishes."

" Leave! Now!"

" Please be reasonable."

At that precise moment, Nabooru appeared on the scene having heard the commotion. I wasn't surprised to find that Rainbow Dash was portraying her like she had done when I was going through Hyrule, yet she was much younger than before, an indication that these events took place long before Ganondorf's rise to power. I also recognized Spitfire as being the one who had spoken with the envoy--she was also younger--though if I recalled correctly, she had an issue with Rainbow over her status as second-in-command but perhaps that isn't a factor here as this was years ago.

" What is going on here, Spitfire?" Rainbow Dash asked.

Spitfire turned to face her and rubbed the bridge of her nose. " Those Hylians sent another envoy in hopes of getting to meet the Great Ganondorf. I have told them that we aren't interest in forming an alliance yet they keep on insisting on wanting to meet him. It's like they just don't get it at all."

Rainbow Dash leaned forward to get a better glimpse of the envoy, her expression clearly showing she wasn't amused. Standing on a bridge that overlooked a massive valley were roughly five individuals each on horseback though one was situated behind the others. Rainbow could tell that this one in particular was their commander though she shook her head knowing that he was nothing but a coward for hiding. Were he a real leader, he would be out in front. The others looked even less threatening to her as they lacked weapons meaning that they would run away at the first signs of battle.

" This group is even worse than the last one was."

" I know, right?"

" But, you have to admit that they are persistent."

Spitfire shrugged. " I guess but this has really gotten on my nerves."

" Do you want me to take care of them?"

" Wouldn't that be beneath you?"

Rainbow Dash shook her head. " I could do with some entertainment to relieve me of my boredom. Besides, we need to get as much out of them as possible." Spitfire was taken aback by this yet Rainbow assured her that this was what Ganondorf wished of them. Nodding, Spitfire stood aside allowing Rainbow to take her place before she looked down at the envoy. " You were told to leave yet you're still here. Give me one good reason why you shouldn't be punctured by countless arrows right now."

" We wish to see your king." The envoy said.

" The Great Ganondorf is too busy to see the likes of you."

" But we can help you."

" Are you being serious?" Rainbow Dash asked. " You believe that you can help us? What makes you think that we Gerudo need any help especially from a man?"

" We know that your people have been suffering as a result of living out here in such a desolate landscape." The envoy answered. " You have need of resources in order to survive and we can provide you with enough provisions to last for eternity if need be. All we ask is that your king forms an alliance with our king and together with the other tribes, we can restore the ancient kingdom that once was to its former glory."

Spitfire whispered to Rainbow Dash. " The only way they would know about that would be if they spied on us without our knowledge. Hmmm... That does explain a lot when you think about it for a second. Those shadowy figures were snooping around here a while back in the dead of night before heading off to the Haunted Wasteland though we don't know if they got back alive given how many have lost their lives attempting to cross those accursed sands."

" They were foolish to go out there."

" Only we Gerudo have the means of crossing the wasteland even though we rarely do so given the danger."

" As much as these men annoy me, I've no intention of sending them there." Rainbow Dash said. " That would be too cruel so instead we will deal with them in the usual manner we take upon any who dare set foot in our territory who are men."

" Do you mean what I think you do?"

Rainbow Dash nodded. " Give the signal to the archers to get their bows ready and tell them to wait for my command." She turned her attention back towards the envoy who appeared nervous as they wondered what was being discussed. " Tell me... Why does your king want an alliance? We have very little resources of our own and surely your king wouldn't want a desert to be a part of his grand design."

" He believes that everyone should be equal." The envoy said.

" What about the place you call home?" Rainbow Dash asked. " Is it somewhere we Gerudo would take a fancy to?"

The envoy nodded. " Our town is a place where everyone from all across this land are accepted and can come to experience exquisite beauty. We have shops that cater to everyone's needs, places where you can play games, but the best part is seeing the majestic sight of our castle. I'll admit that we could do with more guards as those already in place are few in number and they tend to not move about very much."

" Anything else?"

" There is a Great Fairy's Fountain somewhere on the castle grounds."

" That's all we needed to know."

" What are you talking about?"

Rainbow Dash turned towards Spitfire but spoke out loud so that the envoy could hear her. " Once again, we refuse to form an alliance with your people. The Great Ganondorf has no need of your help and he will not tolerate anymore of you coming out here. Let this message from him tell you that you are no longer welcome here in our territory, and I trust one of you will make it back alive to inform your king about it."

Nodding her head, Spitfire then gave the order for the archers to rain arrows down on the envoy whilst Rainbow walked away from what was about to happen. In her mind, she didn't want to witness the bloodshed that was about to occur but she wasn't about to question Ganondorf's command. The envoy's horses freaked out and began panicking whilst the men tried calming them as arrows rained down from above. Two men were skewered by numerous arrows, killing them instantly, with a third meeting his end when his horse bucked him from his saddle and he fell into the valley below.

The envoy who had done all of the talking in the name of King Harkinian was killed when he was struck from behind in the neck and back as his horse was retreating. As for the remaining man, he managed to escape on his horse, yet this was intended as the Gerudo wanted one to report back to the Hylian King of what had transpired--none of the horses were killed much to my own personal relief given what I really am. Spitfire then ordered a end to the arrows given that there were no longer any targets and celebrations erupted as the men had fled with their tails between their legs.

Spitfire then walked over to Rainbow Dash who didn't watch the proceedings. " I know you're not fond of seeing people get killed, Nabooru, but we have to do what's necessary for our own survival and those Hylians needed to know that we would no longer tolerate their frequent intrusions."

" I know but sometimes I think we're going too far with it."

" Yeah, I can see where you're coming from."

" On the other hand, you make a valid point."

" At least we don't have to deal with the likes of those Hylians anymore." Spitfire said. " I'm sure this experience will keep them from coming here again unless their king is so stupid that he decides to come here in person."

Rainbow Dash sighed. " We'll be dealing with them soon enough."

" What do you mean?"

" There's a reason why I came over here."

" Oh, so this wasn't a pleasure call?"

Rainbow Dash shook her head. " We've been given a command by the Great Ganondorf to prepare ourselves to leave for the field by nightfall. He wishes to attack the Hylians and lay claim to their land as a means of expanding our territory and provide us with valuable resources. No doubt they will retaliate as a result for killing four of their envoys so expect more bloodshed in the coming hours. The Great Ganondorf also said that we should prepare to give up our lives so that he can succeed and elevate both his status and our own futures."

Spitfire's jaw dropped. " What!? We're to fight against them?"

Rainbow Dash nodded. " I'm against the idea of killing those Hylians but we must obey the Great Ganondorf."

" Why would he want to attack them?"

" The reason he isn't here is because he visited the temple out in the desert."

" He went to meet those two Gerudo witches again, didn't he?" Spitfire asked. Rainbow Dash nodded and the former sighed. " I know those two are fellow Gerudo and deserve the utmost respect but I do wish they wouldn't keep on influencing the Great Ganondorf like they do. Sure, they are his surrogate mothers and raised him when his mother died after giving birth but they have been a bad influence on him. If his mother were still alive, she would have condemned those two witches."

" We're not in a position to question him, Spitfire."

" I know but I feel as though we're going to get ourselves killed." Spitfire said. " I mean, we're both teenagers, Nabooru, and have our lives to look forward to. The idea of being used as a sacrifice isn't exactly what I signed up for if you understand my meaning."

" Now you know why I've been hesitant towards accepting that distinction."

Spitfire's eyes opened wide. " What!? You mean you haven't decided if you intend on becoming the new second-in-command? Of all the women in the fortress, you are seen as being the most worthy in the Great Ganondorf's eyes, and that means you're at the top of the pecking order. I'd gladly accept such an honour but I know you feel like someone else should have it instead. Nabooru... Take it from me when I say you shouldn't let this opportunity slip by. I was once considered for the position but the Great Ganondorf cast me aside when I proved unworthy in his eyes--I still feel pain even to this day over it."

" I could recommend you given my position."

" You'd do that?"

Rainbow Dash nodded. " I prefer being a common thief who does what she needs to in order to get by. You have way more influence than I do and besides, the others cling to you like mewling kittens. The Great Ganondorf will be better served with someone like you, Spitfire, so when he returns from the desert, I'll speak to him about having you become the new second-in-command instead of me. Despite his aloof demeanour, he will listen to me as he enjoys my company despite him being only a few years older than both of us." She then paused for a moment to let it all sink in regarding what they were doing later. " Come on... We'd better get ready for nightfall."

I wasn't at all surprised that the Gerudo would kill those envoys at the behest of Ganondorf. He was the kind of person who enjoyed killing anyone who got in his way as a way to remind everyone of his dominance, but to influence his own people into acting in a similar manner made me sick to my stomach. At least Nabooru didn't resort to such barbaric means despite her connection to Ganondorf--one I was sure she sometimes despised. No... she hated the very thought from what I remember but again this was a younger version of Nabooru. Her convictions wouldn't amass themselves until later on in her life.

Turning the page, I was confronted with a large image that showed the Gerudo attacking Hyrule Castle Town with the Royal Guard responding in kind. There were buildings burning everywhere, innocent people running for their lives, and of course, lifeless corpses from both sides were strewn about. According to the description below the image, the Gerudo stopped their attack after a couple of days before retreating. Did Ganondorf suspect that his assault was pointless? Or did he have something else in mind? I couldn't even begin to imagine what was going through his mind when this happened and I'm glad for it.

Reading on, I learned that as a result of the Gerudo attacking during a time where King Harkinian was visiting Darunia in hopes of forging an alliance with the Goron leader, he was forced to abandon his mission and left Death Mountain to return to his people. This wouldn't have been an issue had the king not left during the ceremony which would have made him an honourary member of the Gorons as well as Darunia's Sworn Brother. Being snubbed in such a manner infuriated Darunia resulting in his people trampling through Kakariko Village as I learned before and into Hyrule Field where they intended on attacking the Hylians as well out of spite.

Because of the conflict having had the Gorons join in, things had gotten worse for King Harkinian until he discovered another problem had occurred. The Zora, who had refrained from additional contact with the Hylians, had investigated the conflict in hopes of understanding what was going on. One of them was killed by accident when a Hylian soldier assumed they were acting aggressively resulting in further chaos. All at once, every tribe within the kingdom were at each other's throats all because Ganondorf had started things and unfortunate circumstances caused it to spread.

With renewed vigor along with chaos happening all around, the Gerudo attacked again though they also had to deal with the Gorons and Zoras in addition to the Hylians. Many lives were lost as a result of this civil war and it lasted for a few weeks. According to the book, there was one tribe that didn't get involved mainly because the others never knew of their existence and because their guardian knew that getting involved would only worsen things. Protected within the safety of the forest, the Kokiri lived a peaceful existence under the protection of the Great Deku Tree.

Unlike the other tribes, the Kokiri stopped growing when they roughly reached the age of ten thus they remain kids for the entirety of their lives. Huh... I do recall hearing about that from someone but I couldn't put my finger on it. " I guess my memories of my Hyrule journey are getting hazy." I said to myself. " Yet my memories of Termina seem to be getting stronger which doesn't sound right." Mulling it over for a few moments, I decided to not pay it any mind and continued reading. Despite not aging physically, the Kokiri do age like the other tribes so it wasn't like they were eternal.

One thing they were told by the Great Deku Tree was to never leave the forest under any circumstances. Doing so was said to result in their lives coming to an end though this was never proven as few records exist about them. Another thing they were warned about was to be weary of those who would enter the forest and to stay away from the Lost Woods, an area deep within the woods where those who were curious enough became lost. Those who escaped never went back whilst others were changed into either Skull Kids if they were Kokiri, or monsters if they were anyone else. The Lost Woods was also said to hide a secret from a time long ago yet only the foolhardy sought to find out the truth.

My eyes then noticed another image that showed the Kokiri surrounding what appeared to be a woman though I couldn't be sure as the perspective wasn't all that good--it wasn't a photo but rather a painting drawn by a child. I continued reading and was shocked to find that the image related to an incident that occurred sometime during the civil war. A mother and her child fled from the violence by seeking refuge in the Kokiri Forest. The Great Deku Tree sensed an outsider had entered the forest and told the Kokiri to remain hidden until he could understand why a Hylian woman had come.

" Why hast thou come here?"

" I fled from the conflict that has engulfed this land with my precious child."

" Thou must be from one of the tribes who insist on fighting amongst themselves. Yes... I am aware of what has been going on beyond these sacred trees and I am not impressed with what I have seen. Once, this land's people were united and the ancient kingdom of old prospered but they slowly drifted away, becoming enclosed until they no longer knew of thy other peoples until now when conflict brought them together."

" I'm a Hylian along with my child... but... I fear the worst..."

" The children of the forest, the Kokiri, are fearful of outsiders who enter this sacred and forbidden forest. Those who come here often bring conflict resulting in the children being exposed to dark forces or they come seeking out the ruins that exist in the darkest depths of the Lost Woords in order to find treasure. I can sense that thou aren't like those who have come here before you. Thou possess a gentle spirit but I am afraid thou cannot remain here. If word were to reach your kind that thou are here then others will likely come and the forest shall be consumed by those who do not understand its purpose in our world."

" Deku Tree... It doesn't matter what happens to me."

" And why dost thou think this?" The Deku Tree asked.

" I am dying."

The Deku Tree went completely silent upon hearing the Hylian mother who had collapsed before him had just revealed. While he was a benevolent spirit who was wiser than most other beings that existed in Hyrule, his first priority was protecting those who dwelled within the forest, the Kokiri, from outsiders no matter. He knew that if they were to leave the forest, they could become corrupted by evil forces and eventually return to spread that very poison resulting in all of the children wanting to see the outside world. Against his own judgment, he lied to them and said that they would die if they ever left.

Not a day went by that he regretted feeding them a false narrative but it was to protect them. With regards to the land beyond the Kokiri Forest, the other tribes were aware of his existence though none of them were aware that the Kokiri existed. The Gorons thought nothing much of the forest as green colours didn't make sense to them whilst for the Zoras, the lack of any bodies of water aside from some ponds which weren't adequate for them. Hylians were curious about what lurked within the forest though only foolhardy explorers were crazy enough to even attempt to go there. The Gerudo had bigger ambitions so they had no interest in the forest at all.

" Wilst thou share thy story?"

The mother was surprised. " You will... hear me out?"

" Yes." The Deku Tree answered. " In my hastiness to protect the children of the forest, I assumed you to be a threat. I can see now that thou are badly wounded though thy child in thy arms remains fine. What thou sayst about thyself is true in that you are indeed dying from thy wounds. I am sorry but there is nothing I can do to save thee."

The mother smiled weakly as her strength began waning. " When our people were attacked by the desert nomads, my husband went off into battle to fight them in order to protect not only his people but his family as well. Sadly... he perished in the conflict which broke my heart but... I knew that I had to be strong... for the sake of our child. Knowing that it wasn't safe, I chose to flee with my child... in hopes of finding a safe haven."

" You chose this forbidden forest?"

" It was the only place I could think of."

" Whilst this forest is under my protection and the Kokiri can live here in peace, I am not above helping others who have need of it."

" As I fled from the violence, I was attacked by several of the desert nomads." The mother said. " I could not defend myself... as it would have meant causing injury to my child who is... nothing but a baby. Fortunately, they turned their attention towards others who attacked them... allowing me to flee. I suppose that I... should have sought medical attention for my wounds yet I had... to keep going to ensure my child's safety. With what little strength I had left, I was able to reach this forest... and appear before you, Deku Tree. My life has now become forfeit... and death will claim me shortly."

" Dost thou have a request."

" I do."

" What is it?"

The mother began struggling to speak as her life began leaving her. " I will not live to see my child grow up nor will he ever know of his parents. But... I wish for you to take him into this forest and protect him where I could not. I know this is unusual... considering my child is not one of the forest children... but surely you can see that he deserves... a chance at having a peaceful life."

" I can sense something about your child."

" What... Do you mean?"

" He is destined for greater things one day."

The mother was surprised as she started coughing blood. " I am happy to hear that... as I lay dying. It's unfortunate that I won't get to see... what my child will grow up into... but perhaps it is best this way. Deku... Tree... Please do not mention to him... what became of me. It... would break his heart... if he knew his mother... died in such a manner. I know... it sounds like... I'm being selfish... but the last... thing I want is... to inflict pain... upon my child."

" If that is what thou wish then I agree to your terms."

" One... last thing..." The mother said, her life hanging by a mere thread. " His name... is Link... An unusual name yes... but I named... him as such... after an ancient... hero who... once... saved this land... from a demon... who sought... a power hidden within... the clouds... and was said... to... have used... a majestic bird. Please... treat him... as one... of the forest children... and... love him... in a way I... couldn't. Link... my... child... may you... live your life... in peace... and know... that... I... will... always... love... you............"

With that, the mother's eyes closed as her life left her body but not before she coughed up more blood. The Deku Tree knew that she had passed away and was silent for a while before turning his attention towards what she had left behind. The baby named Link began crying but quickly stopped upon seeing numerous pairs of eyes watching from a distance. These belonged to the Kokiri, who were curious as to what had happened. The Deku Tree sensed their presence and knew they needed to know the truth or else it would haunt them so he beckoned them to come forward.

" Hear my words, children of the forest, the words of the Deku Tree."

One of the children stepped forward though they showed hesitation. " Um... What is that, Great Deku Tree?"

" This is a Hylian child, Saria, who has just lost his mother to the ravages of war."

I immediately recognized Fluttershy by her voice though she looked a little bit younger here than what I was used to seeing. If I remembered correctly, she portrayed the character known as Saria who became Link's childhood friend. Link... He was the one I portrayed... I felt a personal connection with him and it made me feel conflicted. There was someone else I recognized amongst the Kokiri yet she didn't seem all that happy about having a Hylian around. It was Diamond Tiara though I forgot who she portrayed in this world--it felt weird seeing her acting like an antagonist as opposed to being someone who guarded her people.

" Why did the mother die?" Fluttershy asked.

" She succumbed to the injuries that she received when she fled from her home."

" Oh, the poor little thing."

Diamond Tiara then spoke up. " Why would one of those outsiders do something so foolish? Why not find a means of healing her wounds instead of coming all the way here and with a small child no less. She might have even brought whatever did this to her to our homes."

Fluttershy glared at Diamond Tiara. " You don't have to be so blunt about it, Mido."

" I'm just speaking the truth, Saria."

" Yes... I suppose you do make a point there."

" Those other tribes fighting one another are sure to wipe each other out if they keep at it." Diamond Tiara said. " I don't understand why they are fighting in the first place. This land used to be so peaceful until they started getting greedy and wanted more territory. Bah! They're all a bunch of idiots for choosing to act like barbarians. Why should we have to put up with such arrogance all the time?"

" What are you suggesting?"

" I say we sever all ties with the other tribes and fend for ourselves."

Fluttershy clearly didn't see it that way. " While I do agree with you on some things, Mido, I completely disagree on other aspects. While we should remain here in the forest where we are under the protection of the Great Deku Tree, we shouldn't isolate ourselves from the other tribes out there. Sure, we might never get to meet them given they would become cursed upon setting foot around here but simply casting them aside is nothing but ignorance." She then looked down at the baby who had been paying attention the entire time. " And what about this little one? He is from another tribe so you believe he should be thrown out of the forest where he will likely die?"

" That's not what I'm saying."

" It sounds like it to me."

" Saria... I... I'm only thinking what's best for the Kokiri." Diamond Tiara said. " After all, I am the leader of our tribe despite the Great Deku Tree being our guardian, and my job is to make sure all of you are safe from anything that could threaten our way of life."

Fluttershy then picked up the baby who began cooing in her arms. " This baby is anything but threatening! In fact, he has lost everything and doesn't even realize it. His mother wished for him to be given a life and what better way than to have him be raised as one of us. Sure, he will eventually grow older than us but there's no need for him to know about that until he comes of age." The baby began giggling and Fluttershy giggled in kind resulting in everyone other than Diamond Tiara to giggle. " I don't know what the future will hold but at least this child will be given a chance to live."

" Fine!" Diamond Tiara shouted. " We will make the baby one of us."

" See?" Fluttershy asked. " That wasn't so bad now was it?"

" But... I will need to be convinced that he can contribute to the village."

" Then so be it!" The Deku Tree announced. " This child of destiny shall be raised amongst you as one of the Kokiri. I know that this will be a difficult task at first because he is much younger than all of thee but thou can succeed in showing him what it means to be a Kokiri. Remember thou must never reveal to him the truth of his origins. This task shall be handled by myself when I believe it necessary for him to know thy truth. Come, children of the forest. We shall prepare an appropriate burial for his mother so that she may rest peacefully in the eternity of the great beyond."

" Yes, Great Deku Tree!" Everyone said.

" Link... Thy life dost begun but thy future is unclear."

Using a bookmark that was conveniently located on my side table, I placed it where I had just finished reading before closing the book and placing it on my lap. So many emotions were racing through my mind ranging from sadness to joy to outright anger over what occurred during this civil war. While I was infuriated over how Ganondorf had started the main conflict by attacking Hyrule Castle Town, his actions alone didn't cause so much pain and misery. No, the other tribes were equally to blame. Darunia shouldn't have allowed his anger to blind his judgment and the Zoras shouldn't have been so curious.

The Hylians appeared to be the innocent victims on paper but in reality they shouldn't have tried to forge alliances knowing that something could go wrong. The only tribe who didn't do anything were the Kokiri simply because they chose not to get involved and for that they were the smartest. Had they decided to take action, the forest would have likely been burned to the ground resulting in them losing their homes and the Deku Tree would have lost his life. Most people weren't satisfied having a small amount of anything and strove to acquire more even if it meant losing their humanity.

I supposed Ganondorf had a valid point whenever he mentioned how most sought power above all else. It was a driving force that compelled people to go to great lengths to secure it as they believed power would give them everything they wanted. I should know as I once wanted the same thing they did... power. I was consumed with that desire, I lost all traces of myself and became a monster that was an amalgamation of my lust for power and the evil that existed in my heart. If not for Princess Twilight and my friends... I shuddered at such a thought ever happening.

Perhaps the saddest thing with what I read had to involve the Hero of Time having lost both of his parents to war. I was fortunate that I didn't lose my parents though it has been many years since I last saw them. When Princess Celestia took me with her to Canterlot as her student, they never bothered sending me letters nor visited to see how well I was doing. I felt as though they viewed me with disdain and an utter failure for not fulfilling their expectations resulting in me harboring a grudge against them. Maybe one day I will see them again and hope something can be salvaged but I wasn't about to hold my breath on it.

Reading all of that left me tired so I decided to take a nap before continuing on with the next part that would tickle my fancy. Consuming the rest of my cocoa and placing the cup on my side-table, I placed the book on the ground and rested my head on my pillow before closing my eyes. At least I knew that everything would turn out fine despite so many losing their lives in the process of making it happen. King Harkinian was able to unite the tribes together by forging alliances resulting in Hyrule being restored yet sadly it would only be a short-lived peace due to Ganondorf's rise to power changing things.

As I began dreaming, I wondered what I would read about next in the Hyrule Historia. I could continue on with Ocarina of Time though I suspected there wasn't much else I could learn given that I had my own experiences there and those were much better than reading about them. I didn't need to read any other legends regarding Majora's Mask--for obvious reasons of course--so perhaps another video game within the narrative was in order. My mind thought of reading about events long before Hyrule existed or perhaps following on from where my second journey concluded. Both were promising yet I'd say the latter felt more intriguing.

Bonus Chapter 2: Execution's Aftermath

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
November 27, 2017
Bonus Chapter 2: Execution's Aftermath.

Waking up after sleeping for about an hour--having an alarm clock helped prevent me from oversleeping--I got out of my recliner, made myself another hot cocoa, and settled back down to read more of the Hyrule Historia. I had chosen to focus on events that took place after Majora's Mask as reading up on what happened in the ancient past didn't pique my interest though I was sure to look back on it if my mood changed. I knew reading this book would get difficult due to the controversial issue of how events were categorized into different timelines based on when they happened and how they affected other events.

I never understood why this "Legend of Zelda" series needed to have multiple timelines--three to be exact--as all it seemed to do was to sow the seeds of confusion and anger particularly when things just didn't add up right. Rainbow Dash would often say how annoyed she would get trying to figure out the timeline because any "self-made Zelda fan" in her own words would always complain about it. I wasn't particularly interested in it from a video game perspective but rather from a historical one. Alternate timelines would let you see how a world differed had it taken a different path rather than what was expected.

And yet, this timeline where I had adventured in Termina was one where the kingdom of Hyrule had taken a much darker path than intended. Granted, all three paths could boast the same thing given that Ganondorf's influence shaped them but this timeline in particular was one that resonated with me the most. This was due to what happened to him in particular and how it had gripped my fascination with how it turned out. As I began reading about what happened after "Ocarina of Time" and "Majora's Mask", I remembered Ganondorf's plans for conquering the world had been exposed resulting in him being arrested.

Even though I had read about it before, I felt the need to familiarize myself with it again in the context of learning what happened after the fact. Before he was arrested for crimes against the Royal Family of Hyrule, Ganondorf fought back against those who had come to take him. Many of the Royal Guard lost their lives at his hands as they were inexperienced compared to him--a sidenote revealed that he was the strongest swordsman who lived in Hyrule at that time--despite outnumbering him almost ten to one. They eventually caught him but the damage had been done and many families grieved at having lost loved ones.

His punishment was execution at the hands of the Six Sages who had been tasked with carrying out the deed. This didn't happen straight away as there was political red-tape that came from his people, the Gerudo, who protested against the arrest and demanded his immediate release or else face dire consequences. King Harkinian refused their demands, telling them their threat meant nothing given how Ganondorf's actions were seen as treason of the highest order. It is said that Nabooru eventually decided to accept the king's decision resulting in her people condemning her initially before coming to the realization that she was right.

Ganondorf was a threat to Hyrule and needed to be killed so as to prevent the horrible future that the Hero of Time had witnessed. While the Gerudo were associated with him through blood, King Harkinian decreed that they wouldn't be punished though something would eventually happen which acted as a psuedo punishment. After waiting for about two years in a prison known as the Arbiter's Grounds, which was once the Gerudo's Fortress but had been changed so that it could accommodate criminals, he was chained to an ancient looking slab of rock and given a chance to say some final words.

Rather than speak, Ganondorf stared at the Six Sages with hatred in his eyes--these weren't the same Six Sages from the other two timelines--before they produced a sword and plunged it into his torso, effectively killing him. Their task completed and the world safe from his evil, they prepared to leave when a miracle happened, the worst kind of miracle as no one expected what had happened to have... well... happened. A small mark appeared on Ganondorf's hand and he began stirring until he opened his eyes and began laughing. He then pushed back against the chains which had bound him until one broke revealing a horrible truth.

On his hand was the Mark of the Triforce, a sign that he had been chosen to wield its might in his hand. The mark indicated that he was in possession of the Triforce of Power and had used its might to cheat death though he himself didn't realize it until it happened. Upon breaking free, Ganondorf killed the Sage of Water without mercy, turned his attention towards the others, pulled out the sword from his chest, and was prepared to slaughter them when he decided to banish him to another dimension as a final means of stopping him. They had no choice but to do this as had they done nothing, Hyrule would have been destroyed.

With his banishment complete, the remaining Sages mourned over the death of their comrade, though they made a grievous sin by not revealing to King Harikinian what had happened to Ganondorf and the Sage of Water that day. They chose to keep it a secret thus it would forever shame them until death eventually claimed their lives. They also chose to isolate themselves from Hyrule by choosing to remain watch over the Arbiter's Grounds in hopes of finding peace with what was sure to be eternal torment--I felt a kindred spirit with them given how I had suffered torment in a similar manner.

Lifting my head up and looking at the ceiling, I shuddered knowing what happened to Ganondorf. Despite this being the second time having read about his fate, it still chilled me to the bone knowing he left quite an impact before being banished. At the same time, I felt saddened that the Sages chose to keep things so secretive. It reminded me of how my friends constantly asked me their questions regarding what they remembered when we were all in Termina. I didn't want to talk about any of it due to being stressed about it and I felt like keeping it all a secret even though I knew that would just cause headaches for everyone.

Their mistake was one I had no intention of making myself yet I still felt uncomfortable talking about it. I had hoped to tell my friends the truth but because they bombarded me with so many questions, it proved too much for me to bear. I needed advice on how best to approach the situation and so later that night, I sent a message to Princess Twilight, my companion throughout my journey across Termina. Granted, Her Highness was a little apprehensive given she needed to get adjusted to her role as an alicorn after being a fairy for who knew how long but she was willing to listen to what I had to say.

Several days ago...

" And that's what happened..." I wrote in my new journal. It felt weird writing in this one given how my old was filled with so many memories--both good and bad--while the new journal was still fresh.

Princess Twilight wrote back. " I'm surprised that Rainbow Dash of all people managed to diffuse the situation. If anything, I was expecting her to make it even worse resulting in you losing your temper."

" You'd be surprised as to what she is capable of doing."

" Even the pony version of Rainbow Dash is full of surprises." Twilight wrote. " But, to get back to the matter at hand. I truly wish I had been there to help you, Sunset, as I know what happened just as much as you did. I mean, I was there with you the entire time so it's not like I missed anything. It's just that Equestria needed me more than ever to fix the blunder caused by my ignorance."

I rolled my eyes as I wrote my response. " Your obsession with Starswirl the Bearded is going to get you in trouble one day, Twilight."

Princess Twilight responded with several lols before writing properly. " I couldn't help myself! I got to finally meet my idol after learning he had been missing for over a thousand years along with the other Pillars of Equestria! I was just eager over getting to meet the one who inspired me and almost ended up dooming Equestria. Starlight Glimmer gave me quite the stern lecture a few days later and I still have her words ringing in my ears."

" What was Starswirl like?"

" Did you ever learn about him when you were Princess Celestia's student?"

" Not really." I wrote back. " She tried to convince me to learn about him but you know what I was like back then, right? I had a major superiority complex that blinded me from understanding what it meant to have humility. In my eyes at the time, Starswirl was an ancient myth whose time had passed and it was time for new blood to rise up and become the most powerful unicorn who ever lived. Looking back on it now, I missed a great opportunity by being an idiot. She forced me to learn a few tidbits before giving up on that venture."

Princess Twilight then used a sad emoticon--surprised that actually worked on paper as opposed to a cellphone--to express her sadness. " At least you're better off now than you were before as without my suggestion to our friends there of helping you, your current life would be completely different."

" It certainly did me a world of good."

" Anyway, back to Starswirl the Bearded." Twilight wrote. " At first, he came off as being very aggressive in that he cast aside everyone's opinions except his own. I mean, he is great and everything but his attitude needed to be toned down to a more respectable level. If I may be so blunt, he was a complete and utter jerk."

I never would have imagined seeing Princess Twilight say such things about her idol but I supposed even the greatest of individuals could have a nasty quirk about them that otherwise ruins a perfectly good reputation. Me? I supposed that I had issues with Princess Celestia over similar matters which related back to my past as her student. I felt she had cheated me, robbed me of the chance to learn about forms of magic more powerful than what she had been teaching me at the time. I know now that she wanted me to learn it for myself in due course once I had learned humility and friendship but I was too stubborn to realize it until much later.

Her Highness must have felt crushed to learn that Starswirl wasn't as perfect as she made him out to be. From what I knew of him from Celestia's teachings, he was at times very eccentric in that he was so aloof with his thoughts, you'd think he were an alien of some kind. Other times, he was a stern and harsh taskmaster who didn't tolerate failure nor was he fond of accepting assistance from others. Starswirl believed himself superior but in truth he was probably very afraid of being deemed weak in the eyes of his peers. Perhaps this isn't the case anymore and Princess Twilight had changed him somehow through her usual ways.

It didn't matter how difficult the person was, yet Her Highness was able to get most beings in Equestria to understand the Magic of Friendship. Those who couldn't or didn't want to understand were ones who were so vile in their evil nature that nothing could change them from their ways. If Starswirl had been changed by Her Highness, it certainly would be a miracle given how gruff he was. Even something as talented as him needed friendship in his heart as trying to go it alone without friends was nothing short of a suicide. Heck, he ought to consider coming here and speaking to me about such matters. I'd definitely give him a memorable experience.

" So... Did you manage to change his ways."

Princess Twilight responded with what looked like ponies clapping wildly--quite the visual image if I ever saw one--as an emotion and what clearly meant a yes. " At first, he saw me negatively what with accidentally returning the Pony of Shadows from limbo but I managed to get into his good graces with a plan to fix my mistake. Later, when he learned the truth about Stygian--who the Pony of Shadows really was--I think that was what made him realize that friendship was something he couldn't condemn as being useless. Had Starswirl used it instead of scorn and hatred, Stygian wouldn't have gone down the dark path he took."

" I have a feeling Starlight helped."

" She's come a long way since I first made her one of my students." Twilight wrote. " Shoot! I just realized that we're supposed to be talking about you, Sunset. Guess the excitement of meeting Starswirl in person got to my head. Okay, I'm going to focus my efforts on helping you out. Again, I wish I had been there so I'm sorry our friends gave you such a harsh time, but I believe you did the right thing by needing some time on your own to think it over."

" Do you think I was too harsh?"

" No." Twilight wrote. " They need to respect the fact that you had a much harder time of things than they did. I'm sure you probably told them about how you've been struggling to overcome Ganondorf's temptations and that most likely didn't settle well with Applejack." I was surprised at how accurate Her Highness was as I saw her writing in my journal but then, she knew our friends well since the pony versions of them had similar quirks. " You should address the elephant in the room regarding what Ganondorf wants of you, Sunset. It will be difficult for them to take it all in but it's necessary."

" I've already told them everything."

" Really?" Twilight wrote. " Then I guess they are struggling to take it all in. Maybe you should tackle this slowly so that they can get used to it. By explaining everything to them all at once, their emotions are trying to assess things. Start by going over everything again but in greater detail and not leaving anything important out of the conversation. They must be told everything, Sunset."

I struggled to write a response. " Um... Are you sure about that?"

" For our friends to understand and accept it, you must tell them everything."

" Er... Anything else?"

" You could mention the fact that their Equestrian Magic was present in that world." Twilight wrote. " I still don't understand how our magic could have been blocked but that's something I intend on researching whenever I have a free moment. Right now, I need to provide Starswirl with a map as he intends on travelling across Equestria to see everything before he finds a place to call his own. He should know that things have changed from what he remembers so I don't want him getting lost or doing something that could potentially cause an issue for us in the future."

" Figures you would want to research Termina."

Princess Twilight was ecstatic with her response. " Of course. I mean, who wouldn't want to research a world where so much is different from what you're used to seeing. I know we can't go back there but I remember enough where I can easily write a fifty page essay on it. Anyway, I need to wrap this up as I have a meeting to attend to. We'll be hosting yet another festival in Canterlot and Princess Celestia put me in charge of organizing everything. We've even got the legendary Songbird Serenade performing though from what I hear, she can be very particular about what she wants."

" Sounds like it will be a blast."

" Not literally of course."

Thinking back on that conversation with Princess Twilight now, I should have been honest and told her everything about the Mark of the Triforce she most likely had on her hand, a mark that symbolized her connection not only to me but also to Ganondorf himself. While I hadn't actually seen the appear on her hand during our journey in Termina, I felt she possessed it given she had it during my first journey. I knew that was a stupid excuse but there was no other explanation I could come up with. If Ganondorf suspected the same thing, her life was in great danger and I would be the one to take full responsibility for her fate.

Looking at my own hand, I could barely make out the Mark of the Triforce that I had which represented the Triforce of Courage. If anything, the mark had become more of a curse than a blessing as all it did was make me feel more miserable with every passing day. Why this Triforce piece continued to reside within my body remained unknown but it was clearly causing me to suffer from a mental breakdown on occasion. I hoped I would find an answer before I would completely lose it in addition to helping out Princess Twilight sooner rather than later as it felt like time was starting to run out.

I shook my head upon realizing that I was getting myself worked up again. This is what happened whenever I thought about everything that had befallen me ever since I was first dragged into the world of The Legend of Zelda. A video game and its sequel couldn't possibly cause so much stress in a person but then these were no mere video games given my own experiences. I needed to calm my nerves and reading the Hyrule Historia would do just that despite how the book was all about the history not only of the series in the world I called home but also the history of the series' narrative.

Flipping through a couple of pages, I stopped at something that caught my attention because of a rather graphical image. Depicted in the image was what looked to be the Gerudo's Fortress yet it was slowly being taken down and replaced with another building more menacing. I quickly remembered that the fortress became a prison for criminals yet why go about making such changes? The Gerudo were still living there so taking away their home felt like a rather extreme thing to do and I doubted they would take it lying down. If anything, they were likely to cause a riot or something far worse.

On the other side of the page, my answer quickly came to me in the form of a completely unexpected twist. Because the Gerudo consisted only of women with one man born every one hundred years, their numbers compared to the other tribes was small. As such, many Gerudo travelled to Hyrule Castle Town to look for boyfriends and form a loving relationship with them resulting in children being born. While it was an intriguing idea initially, the Hylians didn't appreciate it and quickly quashed such notions. It also didn't help that Ganondorf had been arrested for crimes against the Royal Family thus placing the Gerudo in a perilous situation.

With their threats falling on deaf ears, their king imprisoned, and their means of having children cut off at the root, the Gerudo began to suffer almost immediately. In the span of a single year, many of them died due to freezing to death from the cold winds that blew about in the desert at night. I was so surprised with such a revelation that I coughed slight and almost dropped the book on the ground. Why not say anything about until it was too late? Was pride preventing them from asking for help or did Ganondorf not care about them? Then again, perhaps he wanted better for his people but couldn't deliver?

Nabooru, who had allowed Ganondorf's execution to go ahead, was one of the fortunate Gerudo who had been blessed with twin daughters, but she knew that she couldn't live with her people given she gave their king a death sentence even though they did eventually forgive her. She gave a Gerudo whom she trusted the custody of her children before leaving via a self-imposed exile and never returned, her fate forever remaining a mystery though some claimed Nabooru died out there in the desert. King Harkinian, who knew that the Gerudo weren't evil, sent the Captain of the Royal Guard as an emissary to give them what was clearly an ultimatum.

" Are you the leader of the Gerudo?"

" Our king has been imprisoned for his crimes against King Harkinian though we have since accepted this as necessary for peace in Hyrule. Our leader, the Exalted Nabooru, left two months ago for reasons she asked me not to reveal to anyone, thus I am now the leader of the Gerudo."

" Ah, so I'm speaking with the right person then?"

" You are."

" I trust you recognize the armour of my station?"

" You're from the Royal Guard aren't you? I've seen that style of armour many times lately what with soldiers from the castle directing the workers to tear down our beloved fortress in order to convert it into a prison for Hyrule's most damned criminals. Judging from your armour being specially tailored, you're either their captain or someone who is really good at impersonating him. I'm personally going with the former as if you were the latter, I'd have every inclining to cut you down out of sheer spite."

" I'm the Captain of the Royal Guard, Shining Armour, here on behalf of King Harkinian. May I ask for your name, please?"

" Since you gave me your name first without me asking, I shall give you mine in return. I am known as Spitfire."

I immediately stopped reading upon recognizing Princess Twilight's--also Twilight Sparkle's--older brother, Shining Armour as the Captain of the Royal Guard. I vaguely remembered seeing him somewhere in Hyrule though I best remembered him portraying the Captain of Clock Town's militia in Termina. At least he was still consistent at being someone of authority who was serious about his work. Spitfire on the other hand, was the same as before except she was wiser than before. I recalled her wanting to become second-in-command through brutal means but it appeared she had been chosen to become their new leader.

Shining Armour looked at the demolition of the Gerudo's Fortress. " I see that everything is going according to schedule. I was afraid that you and the other Gerudo would have tried to sabotage our efforts at converting this place into a prison but you've been pretty civil about it."

Spitfire took offence to his words and grabbed his chest plate, pulling him towards her slightly. " What do you take us for!? Just because we were associated with Ganondorf doesn't mean we should be treated in the same manner! Besides, it's not like we can do anything to stop our fortress from being destroyed piece by piece." Shining Armour began flailing about prompting her to let him go where he stumbled before landing on his butt. " You're really pathetic for a man but I suppose you've probably got a lot on your mind right now."

" There was no need to be so barbaric!" Shining Armour shouted as he got back up.

" Considering we Gerudo have been kicked out of our home, can you blame me for being so angry?"

" No... I suppose not."

" The Gerudo's Fortress has been part of our tribe for generations." Spitfire said. " To have it taken away from us by King Harkinian is beyond unreasonable! We are being persecuted for actions our king performed in his bid for power! To remove us from our ancestral home without any compensation has made us very bitter!"

" But, you know the real reason why this happened."

Spitfire sighed, her demeanour calming down, her expression changing from anger to sadness. " Yes... I'm aware that most of my people died from freezing to death over the course of the past year due to how cold the desert gets, but that shouldn't have meant us losing our home in the name of converting it into a prison. It would have been nice had I been given an audience with King Harkinian rather than him making the decision without our consent."

" You weren't the leader at the time." Shining Armour said as he brushed himself off. " Nabooru was but she disappeared according to your own words. Besides, that's water under the bridge though believe me when I say that I'm sorry she chose to leave. According to some of the soldiers working here, she had twin daughters but gave custody of them over to someone she trusted immensely."

" That would be me."

" You!?"

" Surprised about that?"

Shining Armour nodded. " A little bit."

Spitfire sighed. " To be honest, she shouldn't have given me custody of them. You see... I was jealous of Nabooru having been chosen to be second-in-command instead of me but if not for her being thrust into the role of leader after Ganondorf was arrested, I'd probably have been exiled instead to the Haunted Wasteland." She then shook her head before getting more aggressive. " Why am I even talking about such things to a man like you? Why Nabooru gave me custody of her daughters is of no concern to you, Shining Armour. Now, you've come here for something besides pointless chit-chat."

" Before I get to that, I need to check on the status of the project."

Shining Armour tipped his helmet slightly forward as a means of excusing himself and proceeded to walk over to a pair of soldiers leaving Spitfire to look on as he began talking to them about how the fortress conversion was going. In her mind, she wanted to kick all of the Hylians out of the desert but knew that she couldn't despite being the Gerudo's acting leader given that both Ganondorf and Nabooru were no longer there. At that point, all her people could do was watch as everything they stood for was slowly being changed. Had Ganondorf not been so driven towards wanting to conquer Hyrule, none of this would have happened.

She turned her eyes towards another Gerudo woman who was holding a pair of babies in her arms and smiled whilst waving her hand to inform the woman that she needed to take the babies away from what was happening. The babies in question were the twin daughters Nabooru had given birth to yet Spitfire had to focus on dealing with Shining Armour's surprise visit to the desert so the Gerudo woman watched over them on her behalf until he left. Despite Spitfire's attitude being fiery at times, the devotion she had towards Nabooru's children knew no bounds with others being jealous. She had also made a pledge to Nabooru where she would give them the life that the former second-in-command couldn't.

When Shining Armour came back over to see her, Spitfire had since looked back on what was happening. " How long will this process take?"

" Since when is that a matter of importance to the Gerudo?"

" We didn't want this to happen to our fortress but King Harkinian decreed it." Spitfire answered. " Had we more standing in the kingdom, we would have protested this decision until the king finally caved in, but we knew such an action from us would've only caused further damage to our position. So yes, I do deserve to know how long this will take. After all, my people no longer have a home because of this project and living out there in the desert would be the equivalent of sending us to our deaths."

" That's the reason why I came here."

" To remind us that we have no home?"

Shining Armour shook his head. " King Harkinian is well aware of the fact that the Gerudo have been displaced as a result of the project and so he has come up with a decision for you and your people to consider. I must warn you right now, Spitfire, that this is something you should accept as there are no other options available to you. It's either go along with this or end up getting wiped out of existence within the next decade or so."

Spitfire's eyes immediately flared up as she clenched both hands into fists. " Are you threatening my people, Shining Armour? I've managed to refrain from losing my temper but if you cause my people misery by any means, you and King Harkinian will wish you never encountered the Gerudo."

" That's not what I meant to imply." Shining Armour said as he waved his hands. " It's just that considering the condition of your people, this is the best option the king could come up with though his advisors were against it because of obvious reasons. Me? I'm in favour of his decision as it will give the Gerudo a chance at living a peaceful existence though it does have a sacrifice involved."

" What is it?"

" The king will allow the Gerudo to move to Hyrule Castle Town where they will be assimilated into Hylian culture over a period of time." Shining Armour answered. " You will be allowed to marry and start families but any children born from such unions must be raised as Hylians. In other words, the Gerudo culture will cease to exist."

" Are you serious!?"

Shining Armour slowly nodded his head. " The advisors wanted you all to die out here in the desert because of your association with Ganondorf yet King Harkinian condemned them for being barbaric beyond nature and made this decree in an effort to save the Gerudo. I know that this wouldn't be an issue had the Gerudo's Fortress been left alone and the prison built elsewhere yet the desert was the most ideal location because of how harsh it can be out here."

" For my people to survive, we must give up our own identities?"

" I'm afraid so."

Again, Spitfire turned to look away from the project, and saw the remaining members of the Gerudo. Their numbers had always been low compared with the other tribes due to how only one male was born every century so they struggled to maintain such numbers, yet it was much more evident now due to the harsh desert winds that had plagued them over the past year reducing their numbers from fifty to roughly less than twenty-five. It pained Spitfire to know that agreeing to King Harkinian's ultimatum meant her people would become Hylians within the next couple of generations but what other choice did she have?

For the children that Nabooru gave her to raise before the former vanished, Spitfire had to keep her pledge no matter what the cost. Would her people even accept such an ultimatum, especially from a man who wasn't Ganondorf? Again, they had no other choice. While some Gerudo would rather choose to die out there in the desert, the others knew what it meant to survive by any means necessary. It had been a cornerstone of Gerudo society for generations where survival took precedence over everything else so to betray it meant betraying their own existence.

There were two Gerudo who would definitely refuse to assimilate into Hylian society... the two witches out in the desert who were Ganondorf's surrogate mothers. They represented the ancient customs of the tribe and most likely would have every inclination to defend such customs until their final breaths. Their existence wasn't known to King Harkinian but to ensure peace reigned throughout Hyrule, Spitfire knew she had to let him know where they could be found. Despite how strong Koume and Kotake were, their magic had dwindled considerably ever since Ganondorf was arrested.

" We agree to the king's decision."

Shining Armour was surprised. " Just like that!?"

Spitfire nodded. " As the leader of the Gerudo, my voice is that of my people. Besides... It's like you said, Shining Armour. If we don't then we will cease to exist. I know giving up our culture is going to be difficult and we aren't going to be welcomed initially by the Hylians, but I am doing this for personal reasons in addition to our survival. There is... one more thing the king must know and I guarantee he won't be happy when you tell him about it."

Within the span of several months, the remaining Gerudo integrated into Hylian society by giving up their culture in exchange for living in peace. At first, the Hylians weren't thrilled with having them around due to what happened in the past, but they slowly accepted the Gerudo. Within a couple of generations, they had fully assimilated, their existence becoming nothing but a memory, a once proud tribe gone. I'm not sure if that was true as Ganondorf was still alive so that made him the sole survivor of his people but I doubted he even cared about restarting the Gerudo so long as he could achieve his goals.

Hyrulean history would remember this incident as being the "Great Assimilation" though historians were split on how effective it was in the long term. The Gerudo weren't the only tribe to have effectively been wiped out. Despite their acknowledgement in various books, little was known about the Kokiri other than they were deemed forest spirits. Those who tried learning more about them entered the forest only to never return so it reached a point where interest in them waned until it stopped entirely. Interest in the Kokiri would return many years later but it was too late as they were no longer present in their forest glen.

The death of the Great Deku Tree was felt by the Kokiri who viewed the tree as a father figure. Without his guidance and protection, they felt lost and so migrated deeper into the woods leaving behind nothing of their existence. Initially, this account was debated by historians as they had no proof that this ever happened, but the account was proven to be accurate by an explorer who went to the forest and discovered an abandoned village. This village was once the Kokiri's home but had since become infested by monsters who began appearing ever since the Deku Tree's passing.

Remnants of the Kokiri found in their village included a number of tools they had invented as a means of self-defence against enemies, numerous belongings in their homes that they couldn't take with them, and tracks--footprints--which had quickly decayed by the monster infestation. The explorer chose not to pursue the Kokiri as he--a footnote confirmed he was a male--knew better as going deeper into the woods meant certain death. As such, no other information existed regarding the Kokiri. While I was disappointed to read that, I chose to keep on going to see what else happened after Ganondorf's arrest.

Turning the page, I came upon a section dedicated to the Gorons. Not much had changed with them apart from Darunia stepping down as their leader due to getting much too old to lead his people, and appointed his son as the new Big Boss. He was named Link, after a young boy who had destroyed the Dodongos which had plagued their favourite rock quarry, and much like his father, he was respected by his Brothers and protected them with his very life. Unlike previous leaders, Link wanted to forge stronger ties with Kakariko Village to the point where Gorons began migrating there to live.

Some Gorons questioned such a decision but ultimately thought it was best for the tribe as a whole. Darunia remained as an advisor to his son for years until he passed away in his sleep as a result of old age. It is said that he was buried as any Goron leader would, by having his coffin lowered into the heart of Death Mountain's crater, a ritual that dated back to their earliest ancestors. After Darunia's burial, legend says that Death Mountain never erupted again. It was as though his spirit had extinguished a pain that had existed with the mountain since anyone could remember.

My heart wept over his passing but it seemed it wasn't in vain given what he ended up doing to Death Mountain. I turned to the next page and was presented with another image that depicted what looked like a giant fish-like creature. A description below the image read that "Lord Jabu-Jabu, patron deity of the Zoras, leaving with other Zoras in tow to the southern seas to start a new colony." Huh... Why go to such trouble when Hyrule was peaceful enough to not warrant a migration? I could understand their deity leaving as he wasn't tied down but what would King Zora have said about this?

As I continued reading, I was shocked to see that it was King Zora himself who planned on leaving their domain with a small number of Zora. He intended on leaving his daughter behind to lead the remainder of the Zora while he and the others travelled with Lord Jabu-Jabu. Why would a father abandon his own child to go southward? I felt that King Zora was being a terrible parent to Princess Ruto--the name of his daughter--but further reading revealed that this wasn't the first time this had happened. The Zoras were known for mass migration but still, it was unprecedented in my opinion.

" You wished to see me, father?"

" I did indeed, my dear Princess Ruto."

Hondo Flanks was portraying King Zora as before with Rarity herself portraying Princess Ruto. There was another image below Lord Jabu-Jabu that depicted the real King Zora and Princess Ruto yet as I read through the Hyrule Historia, my friends, family, and others I know become the characters of Hyrulean history. Originally, I believed it was my mind that was causing this but perhaps it was Ganondorf's magic instead? I never really paid that much attention to it when I last read up on these legends of Hyrule but perhaps now I should take it more seriously so as to not become mislead. I shrugged my shoulders before continuing on--I shouldn't overthink things.

" I've noticed that you have been visiting Lord Jabu-Jabu more frequently than usual." Rarity said. " You should know that I continue to prepare his meals morning and night as is my duty as his attendant so do not think that I have been shirking in my obligation."

Hondo Flanks shook his head. " No, it has nothing to do with that." He looked away from his daughter who in turn began to get annoyed before he turned back to face her and sighed heavily knowing that he couldn't hide the truth from her. " Ruto... The time has come for Lord Jabu-Jabu to leave Zora's Domain and migrate to the southern seas."

Rarity was confused to say the least. " Huh? Why would he do such a thing, father?"

" Our domain is not the only one where Zoras exist." Hondo Flanks answered. " Come, Ruto... Sit down and let me explain things." Rarity nodded and sat down on the raised platform that stood before her father and waited for him to explain himself. " We Zora did not originally come from Hyrule. No, we came from a much different land but chose to migrate here when Lord Jabu-Jabu wished to swim to this kingdom. When our ancestors arrived here some five hundred years ago, they settled here in what became Zora's Domain, and have remained here ever since to this very day."

" Was Lord Jabu-Jabu with them when they arrived?"

Hondo Flanks nodded. " He was the one who guided them to this very location. Lord Jabu-Jabu is such a fickle creature, Princess Ruto. He only stays in one colony for so long until he swims either towards another or helps to found a new one. In fact, he has been to Zora's Domain on many occasions throughout the centuries."

" There is another Zora's Domain?"

Again, Hondo Flanks nodded. " There are numerous colonies of Zora beyond the one here in Hyrule. Back when the original colony established itself in ancient times, there was a fear that if the colony grew too large, it would result in the eventual obliteration of our kind. To prevent this from happening, a decision was made to form new colonies where upon our people would not feel congested, and could live how they wanted to. However, it quickly became clear that in order to do this, it involved making a sacrifice that most Zoras viewed as too much thus they refused to acknowledge such an action."

" What does this have to do with Lord Jabu-Jabu?"

" Everything, my dear Princess Ruto."

" Explain!"

" Whenever Lord Jabu-Jabu swims to other waters, a number of Zora from the colony he resides go with him to form a new one." Hondo Flanks said. " This has been our way for centuries though it is a painful experience as it rips apart families yet it is necessary to ensure our survival. When Lord Jabu-Jabu leaves us in the coming day, he will be taking a contingent of Zoras with him and they will start a new colony. He will eventually return here at some point in the future but those who go with him never do."

" That explains why you've been seeing him."

" This is a day I have long feared."

" So some of us will be leaving to form a new colony?"

Hondo Flanks nodded. " Yes."

" I suppose that is necessary for the survival of the tribe."

" And I shall be going with him."

The instant Hondo Flanks said that, Rarity's world shattered like a mirror. Despite being a tomboy who wanted to assert her independence, she appreciated everything her father had done for her especially after her mother passed away when she was really young and didn't understand what had happened. To hear that her father was leaving the domain that he had ruled over since as long as she could remember caused her to feel faint though she quickly recovered. But then she realized she could just go with him and form a new colony thought it meant needing someone to assume the role as the next King Zora.

Rarity knew that there were plenty of eligible candidates who could become the seventeenth King Zora though would any of them be willing to step up? Wait! Did it seriously just say seventeenth? Since when was that established? I needed to see if this was accurate so placing a bookmark at where I was, I went back to the table of contents, and began looking up where in the book I could find the section about the Zoras. It took me a few minutes to find it--there were a lot of chapters that covered just about everything--so I flipped through until I reached it and began combing it to see where it mentioned anything about the Zora Royal Family.

Most of the information was about their anatomy, relationships to other tribes, and their culture to name a few examples, yet that wasn't what I was looking for. I was about to give up when I chanced upon a footnote dedicated to the Zora Royal Family and the number system used--I honestly didn't think it would get a mention given how trivial it would sound to some people. The footnote said that each colony had its own monarchy as despite being part of the same tribe, they were viewed as separate entities within the collective. This resulted in numerous King Zoras rather than a single one ruling over the entire tribe.

Going back to my bookmarked place in the Hyrule Historia, I could see why someone would become King Zora XVII as there had been sixteen of them previously who had ruled over Zora's Domain though I wish it had been explained in better detail in this chapter rather than in the appropriate chapter about the Zoras. But then, I supposed it was unimportant as this was about events after Ganondorf's arrest. Getting back to the story--finally--Rarity was confused with what her father was getting at yet she was about to understand the truth the instant she asked him a question that would change everything for her.

" Why must you go with them, father?"

" In order for a new colony to begin, the king must go there to rule over them." Hondo Flanks answered. " Throughout the five hundred years of we Zoras living here in Hyrule, there have only been seven instances where one of our ancestors of the Zora Royal Family had to embark on a journey to form a new colony. In each of these instances, Lord Jabu-Jabu lead them to a place where they could establish themselves a new domain and continue on with the traditions our ancestors established. Upon my leaving here, I shall become the first King Zora of the new colony whilst another here shall ascend the throne to become King Zora XVII."

" Then I hope they will do a good job of ruling over our people."

" He shall with you as their queen."

Rarity then checked her ears as she felt as though her father had misspoke. " What did you say, father?"

" The next king shall have you by his side."

" What!?" Rarity exclaimed. She was clearly distraught over learning that she wasn't going with her father but refrained from completely losing it. After all, she found herself an ideal future husband upon handing over the Spiritual Stone of Water, Zora's Sapphire, to the one who saved Lord Jabu-Jabu when Ganondorf had infected him with a deadly parasite that made him act in an irrational manner. " But... I have already found myself a man who will become my husband. Granted, he isn't a Zora but he will be a fine king who can guide our people to prosperity. But that isn't the point I'm trying to make here."

Hondo Flanks then raised his hand. " Enough!"

Rarity went silent before speaking in a calm voice. " Why must I remain here?"

" The next King Zora must be married into the Royal Family." Hondo Flanks answered. " Since you are my daughter, Ruto, you are heir to the throne and thus you must remain to continue on with our family until the time comes where your child must ascend. I know this is going to be a difficult burden but Lord Jabu-Jabu has decreed this and we both know that we must always follow his advice."

" Father..."

" I am aware that you handed your mother's stone to that boy who saved Lord Jabu-Jabu but know that your love for him could never be." Hondo Flanks said. " I suspect that he has his heart set on another who is closer to him than either of them suspect, thus your chances with him are slim to none. I know that my words are ones you do not wish to hear but you must understand that such love could never be."

Tears began trickling down Rarity's eyes but she wiped them away before nodding. " Yes... I... I understand what you're saying, father, even if it does hurt my heart. I shall remain here in our domain and carry on the legacy you will leave behind, but I shall choose the one who will become my husband when the time comes. You will not have a say in the matter otherwise it would be seen as forced and not genuine."

Hondo Flanks nodded. " I respect your decision, my dear Princess Ruto." He then pointed down at the water below his feet prompting Rarity to do the same. " Before I leave to go to the new colony, you must learn about the greatest secret of our family locked within the treasure you see before you. Inside, you will find a book that was written by one of our ancestors that details how one can make a legendary armour not seen for hundreds of years."

" What does it do?"

" It enables one to swim underwater indefinitely."

" But... We already do that."

" And it provides added protection against both ice and fire, the natural weaknesses of the Zora and is easy to maneuver about in." Hondo Flanks said. " When you choose the one whom you wish to fall in love with, you must strive to forge this armour for him. When your mother was alive, she forged this armour for me believing I would have need of it for battle, but I never wielded it for that purpose so it became more of an ornament that I hung in my private chambers as a reminder of how much I miss her."

" What was my mother like?"

" I could tell you so many stories so where shall we begin?"

Looking up again from what I had just read, I gained a new sense of respect for King Zora. He didn't want to leave his daughter behind whilst he left to begin a new colony, but it was a tradition amongst the Zoras which went back centuries so to refuse such traditions would have been viewed as blasphemous. According to the book, King Zora left with roughly half of his people leaving Princess Ruto to rule over her people. For the first few years of her reign, she ruled on her own as she was too young for marriage and her heart was still focused on the one who saved Lord Jabu-Jabu, but she knew that such love could never be.

Eventually, she fell in love with a young Zora male who was famous for having a scar across his chest that he earned in battle when a rogue group of monsters had attacked the domain one year before King Zora left. He was quite humble in that he viewed Ruto as the real power of the throne with him merely a figurehead yet she insisted that when they got married, they would be equal partners when it came to ruling over their people. His true name was never revealed as he became King Zora upon marrying Princess Ruto, but more importantly, the wedding gift he received was the legendary armour known as Zora Armour.

Princess Ruto had succeeded in forging it for her new husband and unlike her father, this new King Zora insisted upon wearing it full time as a reminder to the people that he appreciated everything his wife had done when she ruled over Zora's Domain. They would rule together for roughly twenty years, had roughly a dozen children during that time, and eventually passed away leaving their eldest child, a son, to assume the throne thus their tradition continued on. It is said that Princess Ruto would forever remain a legend whose story would be handed down from generation to generation of Zoras.

I felt saddened knowing that Ruto would eventually pass away but I supposed like anything, no one could truly live forever unless they weren't entirely human. At least she left her mark in life for future Zora queens to follow so it's not like she was going to be forgotten. From what I had read so far about the aftermath of Ganondorf's arrest and subsequent botched execution, two tribes had vanished over the years while two others slowly adapted to having new leader who sought to bring about their own policies that would enable their people to reach new heights.

The only tribes I had yet to read up on were the Hylians and the Sheikah though the latter only consisted of one member. Flipping through several pages relating to the Zoras, I stopped at a page that was surprisingly dedicated to Impa, Princess Zelda's attendant and sole survivor of the Shiekah. Many in Hyrule Castle Town believed she existed though none had ever seen her whilst historians debated her existence saying that she died years before Ganondorf's attempt to procure the Triforce. One historian was able to learn about Impa's history in addition to what became of her.

Unlike the other tribes, whose lifespan was roughly a century, the Sheikah were capable of living much longer lives. In the ancient past, they were capable of living for many centuries but this gradually dwindled over time until it became two or three centuries at the most. Legend said that the Sheikah were blessed with the blood of Hylia, the Goddess whom they served in ancient times, and that it passed down through their descendants giving them an unnatural long lifespan. However, long life didn't make them invincible as they could still be killed by normal means.

According to the Hyrule Historia, Impa's lifespan was roughly three hundred and fifty years and that she had served five generations of the Royal Family of Hyrule. She had seen things others could only either dream of or view in history books yet it didn't discourage her from carrying out her duty. Even after Ganondorf was arrested, she continued to serve as the protector of Princess Zelda though she did give birth to a daughter whom she taught to continue on with the Sheikah tradition of protecting the royal family. Who Impa married was never made public but the only thing that was known was that she outlived him because of her blood.

That left only the Hylians to read up on despite having done so earlier with regards to the Gerudo. Hyrule Castle Town greatly expanded so as to incorporate more commerce and people who would purchase goods though it also experienced an exodus where people wanted more simple lives rather than the hustle and bustle of town life. This was also true with those living in Kakariko Village and even the proprietors of Lon Lon Ranch desired a change. They proposed a new town be made where they could live a peaceful existence without having to deal with stress but there was no where a town could be built... Until Impa revealed a possible location.

" You've found a place where we can live a simple life?"

" I have though I am afraid you will not like the location."

" We don't care how far we must go in order to reach it. All we care about is that we can live our lives in peace without all that stress which has been bogging us down. We've even got plans to build a new ranch that will be better than Lon Lon Ranch ever was."

" Have any of you considered the repercussions of your actions?"

" What do you mean, Lady Impa?"

Applejack was portraying Impa though if I were to be honest, I personally didn't think it suited her personality. Well, I mean, Impa was always an honest person given her own personal experiences what with having lived for so long, yet she was way too serious for someone like Applejack--Impa also lacked a fiery attitude. No wonder some called Applejack a one-dimensional person but I shouldn't be saying such things about her. Her portrayal of Cremia made more sense as she was akin to Applejack in a lot of ways but I had to accept the fact that she was portraying Impa, a role that didn't quite add up.

Without showing emotion, Applejack got straight to the point. " King Harkinian will not stop you from wanting to create a new town for yourselves but you must know that such an undertaking is not as easy as you think. If you had listened to my words, you would know that the location I have found is one that you will not like. Be that as it may, you are free to go there but it will be difficult."

" Where is the location?"

" Beyond the Lost Woods, to the very southern reaches of Hyrule."

One of the townsfolk in question was very concerned. " What!? You found us an ideal place beyond the forest? Why would you have us build our new town there? Isn't there anywhere else in Hyrule where we can start our lives anew?"

Applejack shook her head. " There is no where else you can go aside from there. I know that you are concerned about the journey which is why I insisted that you heeded my words carefully but this will most likely not deter you from going."

" I believe we can make it out there." Another person dressed in farming gear said.

" Are you not the proprietor of Lon Lon Ranch?"

" Y'all are correct." I was surprised to see Granny Smith portraying the owner of Lon Lon Ranch, Talon, given she was the owner of the Milk Bar in Termina. This portrayal made more sense as Granny Smith owned Sweet Apple Acres in Canterlot, a place which specialized in farming apples for use in numerous apple-related products. " Mah daughter and I will be goin' to this here new town we're all plannin' though my one employee, Ingo, is gonna stay because of how he feels about me."

" I am hoping your new ranch will continue to benefit Hyrule."

" Reckon it will as I'll have more space tah work with than before."

" Much of the Lost Woods has become a haven for the monsters who thrive there now." Applejack said. " Ever since the loss of the Great Deku Tree, the forest is no place for anyone save for those foolhardy enough to go there in search of treasure. While King Harkinian would wish to have soldiers escort you, he is unable to provide any as a result of the castle being undermanned as a result of the construction efforts happening in the desert. The path you must take brushes past the area of the Lost Woods deemed the most dangerous but so long as you do not stray too far from your path, you shall reach your new home."

Granny Smith looked glum. " I was kinda hopin' we'd be receivin' an escort."

Applejack shook her head. " As I said, the castle is undermanned due to many soldiers being at the Gerudo's Fortress helping with the construction. As you all know, the Gerudo have been permitted to assimilate into Hylian society as a result of their home being converted into a prison for Hyrule's most dangerous criminals. Until work over there has been completed, the king cannot afford to provide any escorts for you. That is why I suggested you heed my words carefully. I will not stop you from attempting the journey but know that you will not have any protection."

" Guess we'll just have ta risk it."

Another person spoke up. " We demand to have an escort!"

" Yeah!" Another said. " Why does the Royal Guard have to focus their efforts on the Gerudo? They have been nothing but problematic for us Hylians from the very start though their assimilation into our society is one that I approve of."

" Sounds like y'all are bein' a bunch o' hypocrites." Granny Smith said.

" We deserve protection as we're Hylians!"

" No need ta be yellow belly cowards now." Granny Smith said. " Why, just a few minutes ago, y'all were itchin' ta get going yet now ya actin' like this because we ain't gettin' a personal escort simply cause they're busy. Now, granted, I ain't what y'all would call the best person ta say what I said given my lazy attitude, but reckon I still think my words make sense given how y'all are actin'."

" You're right about one thing?"

" What's that?"

" You're not the best person to say anything given your lazy attitude! No wonder your employee chose to quit when he did. That's right! I know what happened between you and him, Talon, and I think it's sad you lied about him to Lady Impa. I've visited Lon Lon Ranch many times over the past several years and each time, you were just lazing about doing nothing of value while your employee constantly compared over how he was doing all the hard work and not getting any recognition. If I had been in his shoes, I'd have quit rather than continue working for someone like you."

" Okay, so I sorta misspoke about Ingo."

" Lying to Lady Impa will condemn you."

Applejack, who had remained relatively calm whilst Granny Smith and the other Hylian continued bickering, finally had enough and decided to put a stop to it. She considered using one of her Deku Nuts, a Shiekah means of blinding anyone so that they could disappear into the shadows, but instead reached behind her back and took out what looked to be a small dagger of unknown design--I recognized it as a kunai, a weapon used by ninja for a variety of purposes--before throwing it with incredible precision. It struck the ground in-between where Granny Smith and the other Hylian were standing, resulting in them stopping their argument.

" This senseless bickering serves no purpose other than to divide you before you have fulfilled your dreams of starting a new life." Applejack said. She turned towards Granny Smith who in return gave her a sheepish expression. " While you did lie to me, Talon, about your employee, I can understand why because it is never pleasant to admit your own weakness to others. But, I would refrain from doing so in the future. I shall speak with Princess Zelda of these matters so please wait a few minutes until I return."

Turning around, Applejack entered the castle leaving the people outside to ponder over what she had said. They knew that to form a new community, teamwork was essential as bickering would only cause strife resulting in chaos. They were taking a huge gamble by choosing to abandon their current lives but this was something they had been planning for a few years now ever since Ganondorf's attempt at wanting to conquer Hyrule. They wanted a peaceful existence away from strife, a fresh start where they would be in control of their own destinies, but again, their bickering had to cease.

Granny Smith and the other Hylian realized that they had to get past petty differences if they intended on making their new community so they shook hands and pledged to put their problems behind them--their faces indicated otherwise. For a few minutes, the gathering of Hylians began talking amongst themselves on how their new town would function. The first thing they needed was someone to become mayor so they did a quick vote to see who was best suited for the job. Unfortunately, three people ended up receiving equal votes but before they could vote again, Applejack returned from her audience with Princess Zelda.

" You weren't gone as long as ya said." Granny Smith said.

" I did not need to speak with Her Highness for very long."

" So what did y'all talk about?"

" Despite my own judgement, Princess Zelda has commanded me to guide you through the Lost Woods." Applejack answered. " While this does mean I will not be by her side for some time, she has insisted that she will be fine and that I am needed here."

One of the people spoke up. " We appreciate you doing this for us, Lady Impa."

" Then I propose that you do not waste my time."

" What do you mean?"

" You will all meet me by the entrance to the forest in precisely twenty-four hours." Applejack answered. " Those who do not arrive on time will be left behind while the rest shall follow me until we reach your final destination. I suggest you get prepared and bring only the essentials that you will need for your new future. The monsters of the forest will not hesitate towards feasting on those who plan to bring all their worldly possessions. If you are still determined to do this, I shall be waiting at the designated location."

This became known as the "Great Hylian Migration" where a contingency of Hylians from Hyrule Castle Town, Kakariko Village, and Lon Lon Ranch migrated to the southern lands beyond the Lost Woods in order to start a new community. The journey proved difficult despite them having a guide in the form of Impa, sole survivor of the Sheikah, as many of them chose to bring everything they had when she insisted otherwise, resulting in a lengthy journey where people occasionally stopped to ensure they hadn't lost anything. It didn't help that the people weren't fighters leaving Impa to having to deal with them herself.

When they eventually made it past the Lost Woods, the Hylians learned that there was even more forest than originally assumed. This was because there was map of the lands beyond the Lost Woods so no one knew to expect what they did. Regardless, they continued their trek through the uncharted greenery of the forest until they came upon an open area that looked primed to have a civilization built on it. There was plenty of place to grow vegetables, a large field that was perfect for a new ranch, fresh water from a nearby waterfall, and perhaps most important of all, no conflicts, the perfect ideal peace.

Her task completed, Impa wished the Hylians luck as she returned to the side of Princess Zelda, yet mentioned that the new town would be recognized as being part of Hyrule despite how cut off it was from the kingdom proper. The Hylians proved themselves resourceful as they managed to build their new community within a span of a year and immediately, their old lives quickly became forgotten, replaced by new ideals of living in peace and not wanting for anything. A mayor was selected in short order--the one chosen had proven himself a natural born leader--and the town was named Ordon Village after an ancient spirit whose fountain was located nearby.

Roughly three years after Ordon Village came to be, King Harkinian passed away due to contracting a terrible disease, leaving his daughter, Princess Zelda, the current regent of the kingdom until she wed and a new king was crowned where she would be co-rulers with the man who would be her husband. Before he died, King Harkinian proclaimed that Hyrule would be divided into four provinces named after the divine Light Spirits who once dwelled in Hyrule in ancient times: Ordona, Faron, Eldin, and Lanaryu, with Hyrule Castle Town situated in the center of the kingdom. The Gerudo Valley region was simply renamed the Gerudo Desert and it was here where the Arbiter's Grounds were located.

Upon becoming queen, Princess Zelda worked quickly to ensure the people that she would not carry on the legacy her father started, but also instill her own legacy for which she would be remembered for. Many across the kingdom accepted her as their ruler though they insisted she marry as soon as possible for tradition sake. Many suitors from across Hyrule, including those from the lands beyond, came to see if they would be the one Princess Zelda would choose, yet they were turned away as they weren't who she was looking for. After about two years of this, she would finally choose someone, a man who bore a slight resemblance to the boy she had befriended as a child.

She would marry this man a year later in a grand ceremony that was attended by everyone across the kingdom and representatives from beyond Hyrule's borders, yet before the wedding took place, Princess Zelda decided to seek out the boy who had warned her father of Ganondorf's treachery, the boy who had effectively altered the course of history. When she last saw him, it was when she gave him the Ocarina of Time believing it safest in his possession. Her Highness also taught him the Song of Time so that if he ever was in danger, he could rely on the Goddess of Time for protection.

It had been six years since then, and Princess Zelda had spent her free time trying to find him. When the boy left Hyrule, he did so on a personal journey to find a valued friend and claimed he would never return. Roughly two years after he left, rumours began spreading of people seeing someone hanging around the edge of the forest. This prompted Her Highness to send out soldiers in hopes that they could find him but their efforts amounted to nothing. After failing to find him for four years, Impa was sent to find him and succeeded relatively quickly. With the boy's location known, Princess Zelda would soon meet him in person.

" We finally meet again."

" How long has it been?"

" It has been roughly six years since we last saw one another. You know, you proved rather the elusive one to find given that none of my guards were able to track you down, but if not for Impa, our meeting would not be taking place right now."

" There's a reason why I've been hanging out around here."

" I know that we will eventually reach that point but for now, I would like to hear about your exploits. Surely, after six long years, you have surely seen many different things in the course of your life in addition to that journey you made long ago to find your friend."

" You could say that's true but I personally wouldn't agree with that assessment."

I immediately stopped reading when I saw who was portraying Princess Zelda and Link and slapped my face several times. I couldn't believe it! I mean, how was this even possible? Was my mind playing tricks on me? It didn't feel that way as I had recently taken a nap to ease my mind so perhaps I was dreaming this instead? Grabbing my arm with my hand, I pinched it and yelped slightly, proving that I wasn't dreaming. Princess Twilight was portraying Princess Zelda--I remembered this from my first journey--yet the one portraying Link was... well... me. How could I be in the story and reading it at the same time?

A third possibility had to do with Ganondorf. Was this his means of tormenting one last time before he would leave me alone for a while? This theory was a longshot at best as he had little to no power in the world I called home--Equestrian Magic was the dominant force around here--but then I still knew little about his power so I could have been completely wrong and that he was somehow manipulating me. In any case, it felt weird seeing another version of me within the confines of this book, yet at the same time, this was how Her Highness felt when she first saw Twilight Sparkle after the Friendship Games had ended.

" I am certain that you are aware that my father passed away about three years ago, correct?" Princess Twilight asked.

I nodded my head. " I am sorry that he died much sooner than expected. Granted, I never really got to know him because I was seen as an urchin back then in the eyes of your guards who turned me and pretty much everyone else who they deemed inappropriate away from the castle. As such, I can only mourn his loss to some degree. I heard you've been ruling on your own since then but will be getting married sometime soon." I propped my sword and shield against a nearby tree before sitting down. " I'm glad you found someone who see you as a person and not just a princess turned queen."

Princess Twilight blushed. " My husband-to-be bears a slight resemblance to you, you know."

" Is that a fact?"

" Yes."

" I'm certain you fell in love in him for reasons besides that."

" Of course." Twilight said. " He is a very charming young man who possesses a gentle spirit that allows him to see the faults of anyone including himself. He personally doesn't see himself as kingly material but I've insisted otherwise saying he will make a fine king who will be loved every bit as much as my father was. He wasn't even born into nobility, a fact no one in the kingdom suspected though the royal court had a field day complaining that I needed to marry of my status. I put them in their place by saying that the decision was mine alone as to whether I would marry him or not. Of course, you already know what my decision was."

" Does he have a name?"

" He's called Vazard and once served as a knight in a neighbouring kingdom."

" Wouldn't that make him one of the nobility?" I asked. " Usually, you have to be of noble birth or have good connections to become a knight at least in Hyrule. I can't imagine him being a knight without those credentials."

" He was born a commoner but was accepted as a knight for defending his village from barbarians."

" That certainly would do it."

Princess Twilight then looked at me with a saddened expression. " When I met him for the first time, Vazard's resemblance to you was so uncanny, that I immediately began thinking about you and what you have been up to all this time. In a way, I suppose that there were feelings towards you in my heart, as though we were something in another time, but I quickly realized that such feelings had no meaning. We had only known each other for a short while yet I still remember those being some of the best moments of my life."

I sighed. " When I came back from my journey, I came to a realization."

" About what?"

" Before I get to that, I need to ask you something, Princess Zelda, or would that be Queen Zelda now?"

" Princess Zelda is fine."

I got up onto my feet, my expression firm but not aggressive, yet Princess Twilight could sense that something was wrong. " Before I go any further, let me tell you about my journey because you have curiosity smeared across your face." I paused for a few seconds to collect my thoughts. " When I left to find my friend, Navi the Fairy, I ended up in a world that was parallel to Hyrule. In this world called Termina, I encountered people who looked like people of this world but possessed different personalities. As I tried to understand where I was, I learned that the moon would fall in three days."

" How could anyone save a world in such a short period of time?"

I smiled as I reached for the pouch on my belt, opened it, and took out the Ocarina of Time before presenting it to Her Highness. " I have you to thank for allowing me to have the ocarina to use on my journey in addition to reminding me of the Song of Time. I was able to free and summon the Four Giants, the Guardians of Termina, by reliving the same three days continuously and defeated the one responsible, an entity known as Majora's Mask."

" So the Goddess of Time protected you as I had wanted." Twilight said. " It makes my heart happy knowing that she was able to protect you. I am also happy that you were able to save an entire world. No doubt the people of that world shall forever immortalize you as a legendary hero who helped them in their time of need."

" After saving Termina, I left and returned to Hyrule which is when that realization I mentioned kicked in."

" Link... You sound as though you're missing something."

" Princess Zelda... I need to know if you told anyone about my adventures across time."

At first, Princess Twilight refused to say anything, her expression going limp which prompted me to lean forward to coerce her to say something. She then turned her face away from me and right there I knew that she was trying hard not to answer my question. Eventually, she sighed before looking at me. " I can't hide the truth from you, Link. My father made the decision not to share your adventure with the people of Hyrule. He felt they would not believe it and deem it fantay, and even he had doubts over whether it truly happened despite the proof you had in the form of the Triforce of Courage."

" He didn't want anyone to know?"

Princess Twilight nodded. " Instead, he decided that your adventure would remain a secret that the Royal Family of Hyrule shall guard for as long as possible. Eventually, it will become a legend that is sure to become known to the people, but for the time being, my father's decision will stand. Just so you know, when I assumed the throne, I had to decide whether to ensure my father's decision or not. It took me only a mere moment to make a choice."

" But... but... why?"

" What do you mean?"

I slammed my fist into the tree behind me, leaving a large indentation before looking at Princess Twilight. " Why would you and your father do that? Do you know what I had to go through in order to prevent that terrible future from happening? I would have appreciated it if you had told my story to the people as it would have meant me being remembered for something rather than just be another person whose name became lost in the annals of time. I hoped to leave behind a legacy of my own but that has forever been dashed by you."

Wow... I couldn't believe what I was reading. Link, the Hero of Time, who had travelled back and forth through time to defeat Ganondorf, was infuriated with Princess Zelda simply because she and her father refused to recognize his exploits by sharing them with the common folk. No hero would ever strive for recognition as that lead to fame resulting in them being corrupted over time by their perceived greatness. The right thing is what a hero should strive for in addition to helping those who needed it. In my own opinion, the Hero of Time was acting like a brat all because he wanted to be remembered for what he did.

The mere thought that I once portrayed him made me sick to my stomach. I mean, King Harkinian had a point in that the people would never believe that a mere boy could travel back and forth through time to prevent a terrible future from happening. Link should have been grateful that the Royal Family of Hyrule chose to closely guard his story where it would have one day become a legend in its own right but perhaps he just wanted the glory now rather than later on. I hoped his descendants wouldn't adopt his mannerism otherwise the legacy he desired would have been tarnished by their actions in his name.

And yet, I could actually sympathize with Link. Sure, he wanted to be remembered as a hero but there was an honourable tone to it. Perhaps he wanted to be remembered so that he could inspire others to one day become heroes and find their own path in life. He could also pass down his skills to future generations of his family and again inspire others to want to follow in their footsteps. Rather than thinking only of himself, Link was essentially guaranteeing that Hyrule would always have a hero ready and willing to protect the kingdom from evil ones such as Ganondorf or anyone else wanting to assume his particular mantle of villainy.

" Link... I wish you had told me of this."

" When it became apparent that no one remembered me for what I did, I chose to hide here in the forest as it's the only home I've ever known." I said. " Aside from you, your guards, and your attendant looking for me, I haven't had any visitors in a very long time."

" Are you not of the Kokiri?"

I shook my head. " I was born a Hylian and raised as a Kokiri. I had hoped to follow them but they left no trace of their existence in the village. Besides, even if I had followed them to where they went, it would have resulted in me being cursed by the dark power that radiates over the forest." I then looked upwards before grabbing my sword and swinging it around a few times before sheathing it into the scabbard on my back. " I learned many skills during the course of my adventure and my aim was to perhaps teach them to others so that they could one day become heroes. My skills would be forever remembered and my name would become legend."

Princess Twilight then smiled. " Then why not come and live in Hyrule?"

" What do you mean?"

" You would make for an excellent knight, Link." Twilight answered. " The Royal Guard have been needing new skills for a long time now and you would be the perfect one to show them abilities the likes of which they have never seen before. Granted, it would be a difficult transition seeing as you would be deemed in their eyes, a commoner, who only became a knight by my hand, but I am sure that over time, you will earn their respect."

I slowly shook my head though it pained me to do so. " I truly appreciate you giving me the offer, Princess Zelda, but I feel that Hyrule Castle Town is no place for me. The forest has been my home for as long as I can remember and I would prefer to remain here until my time comes when life leaves me. Should you have need of my skills, then I shall be there to help no matter what but perhaps its best for me to be here in this tranquility."

" Are you sure you won't change your mind?"

I was about to shake my head when I instead nodded. " Perhaps, when I get older, I will leave the forest and move to Hyrule Castle Town. For now, I just want to remain here and be amongst the trees that I grew up with. If you ever want to pay me a visit, feel free to do so though you'll probably have an entourage with you because you are the queen and all. I was serious about being annoyed that no one will remember me but I'll get over it eventually. In the meantime, why don't I give you a tour of the Kokiri Village? It's not much since they did abandon it years ago but it will give you an idea as to how they once lived."

Princess Twilight nodded. " I am sorry that your legacy will not be remembered but I know that legends will be told about you in the future. In any case, I do hope that you will move to Hyrule Castle Town someday. Should this come to pass, I shall recommend you becoming one of the Royal Guard. No... I think they deserve to be called a different name, a name deserving of the defenders of the kingdom."

" What did you have in mind?"

" They shall be, 'The Knights of Hyrule', protectors of the realm."

It says that the Hero of Time lived in Kokiri Forest for a number of years until he finally chose to move to Hyrule Castle Town. By the time he did this, he was already in his thirties so many of the skills he learned in his youth had gone to waste. Upon his arrival, Princess Zelda anointed him as one of the Knights of Hyrule and made sure to provide him with ideal lodgings somewhere in town. Deep down in his heart, the Hero of Time wished that he could have passed his skills onto someone worthy enough to continue his legacy. As such, what he had accomplished had become lost.

He would eventually marry a young woman who had chosen to move back to Hyrule Castle Town from Ordon Village, a woman--a footnote said it was most likely Malon, the daughter of the proprietor of Lon Lon Ranch--who was said to have granted the hero his most trusted companion, a mighty steed who he would ride into battle when needed. Within a year after being married, they were blessed with children, two boys and two girls. Both boys and one of the daughters would join the Knights of Hyrule with the other daughter choosing to follow in her mother's footsteps yet they were never taught the skills their father learned in life.

When the Hero of Time passed away, his spirit could not rest knowing that he never passed his skills onto anyone. He would be condemned to walk the earth as an undead solider until he could successfully teach someone the skills he learned in life. The Hero's Spirit, the name that he was given by the people, became feared all across Hyrule whilst others offered sympathy knowing he was forced to live an eternal twilight until he could pass on what he knew. Many sought him out in hopes of learning what he knew yet all of them failed thus he continues his existence. Would the Hero of Time find peace? Only time would tell.

One of his children's children decided to move to Ordon Village as the thought of becoming a solider was something they had no interest in. However, the blood of the hero did not disappear as it carried on through the following generations. Perhaps one day, a new hero descended from the Hero of Time would emerge, one that Hyrule needed, one who could learn the skills of the Hero's Spirit that he never passed down in life, and finally allow him to rest in peace. It's says that when he left Hyrule, he was separated from the elements that made him a hero though no historian had ever been able to confirm whether this was true or not.

Placing my bookmark on the page and closing the book, I had numerous thoughts go through my head. While I was happy to know that Hyrule experienced a time of peace after the arrest of Ganondorf, I was saddened at what happened to certain individuals. It seemed that even when things were going right, something was bound to go wrong. It felt like the stage had been set for something grand given how certain events played out yet I wanted to focus on events that occurred long ago in the ancient past. Had I kept on going on my current course, I would have learned about the Twilight Realm but I had my mind set on the past.

I had a number of options I could consider but for now, I wanted to grab some food as it had been a while since I ate anything. Getting up from my recliner, I headed over to the kitchen in order to make myself a snack, yet my mind continued thinking about what I would learn next from the Hyrule Historia. Not everyone appreciated the past and instead preferred thinking about the future but I had a strong connection with the concept behind ancient history Perhaps I should consider going back to the very beginning of Hyrule's history or as far back as historians were able to uncover.

Bonus Chapter 3: The Land in the Sky

View Online

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
December 4, 2017
Bonus Chapter 3: The Land in the Sky.

Once I finished making my snack--a lettuce and tomato sandwich--and poured myself another hot cocoa--I couldn't help drinking these even if the weather was above average--I returned to my recliner, sat back down, and opened up the Hyrule Historia to continue reading about various legends. Picking up my bookmark, I twirled it about in my fingers for a few moments whilst making a final decision on what to read next. I had thought about looking up the ancient past just to see what I could learn of the early days the land known as Hyrule was first created hesitation made me reconsider and instead keep on going.

Shaking my head, I decided to go with my gut and focus on the ancient past. I had actually read about some of it before in the older edition of the historia but had since forgotten about it forcing me to read through it again. I supposed it wasn't a bad thing as it would enable me to familiarize myself again and perhaps get a much better understanding of the lore. Flipping back to the table of contents, the first chapter listed was simply known as "The Beginning." It was only a few pages long--I was surprised about that--but perhaps it would lead directly into the chapter that followed.

Turning to the start of the first chapter, it said that back in the beginning, there was nothing but darkness, an empty void of nothingness. No one knew or even tried to understand how long it had been this way--it was beyond their means--but what is known is that three divine beings descended down from the heavens, their true forms far too complex for mortal minds to even begin to comprehend, so they were depicted as golden divas. The first was Din, Goddess of Power, the second Nayru, Goddess of Wisdom, and the third Farore, Goddess of Courage. Each goddess contributed their power into the creation of a land that reflected their desire to watch over something of their own design.

Din used her flaming arms to create the very land itself. It made sense that she was capable of this as she did represent power and that was when I stopped reading upon the realization that Ganondorf's immense power came directly from Din. But, he also had the power of the other two goddesses flowing though him... I chose to continue reading otherwise I would only be confusing myself even more. Nayru poured her wisdom into the land to bring about law whilst Farore created beings who were to uphold the law. Compared with Din, the other two goddesses didn't contribute as much from a grand perspective yet their efforts would prove invaluable over time.

With their labour completed, the Great Goddesses--as they came to be known--returned to the heavens but not before leaving behind a little something to give the creatures that had been created a means of giving them hope though this has yet to be proven. They created the Triforce, an ancient relic that contained the power of the goddesses, and whoever possessed it could alter reality and have their fondest wishes come true. As a protective measure, a restriction was put in place preventing the Goddesses or any other divine being from using the relic for their own purposes thus only mortals could use it.

There were three pieces of the Triforce, each representing one of the Great Goddesses and contained a portion of their power. The Triforce of Power represented Din and was filled with the embodiment of her supremacy. Those who believed power meant everything would seek out this Triforce and procuring it would result in Din's blessings. The Triforce of Wisdom represented Nayru and whoever possessed it would be imbued with endless wisdom whilst being blessed by the goddess herself. Finally, the Triforce of Courage represented Farore and would instill one with valor the likes of which no one had ever seen before that couldn't be rivalled to whoever wielded it.

Looking up from the page, I gulped when I finished reading that last sentence. Ganondorf believed in power more than anything else so when he acquired the Triforce of Power, his already immense strength was augmented even further thanks to Din's essence, yet how did he acquire both wisdom and courage despite not believing in those? I gazed down at my hand and watched as the Mark of the Triforce of Courage faintly appeared before disappearing again. I was beginning to understand why it had chosen me as I had displayed tremendous valor but did that mean Princess Twilight possessed enough wisdom to give her the Triforce of Wisdom?

So many questions flowed through my mind yet there were little to no answers for them. I mean, I was only assuming that Her Highness still possessed the Triforce of Wisdom as I hadn't seen the mark appear on the back of her hand since my journey through Hyrule. Did Ganondorf know about it? That would explain why he began tormenting her though if that were the case, it would break my heart knowing Princess Twilight was now personally involved in my nightmare. Again, this was all speculation and couldn't be revealed until I knew more. I resumed reading though with more worry in my mind as a result of knowing more than before.

The Great Goddesses were aware that the Triforce could be seen as a temptation for those who sought its power for evil purposes and knew something needed to be done to prevent individuals with that nature from having their wishes fulfilled. To that end, they entrusted Hylia, a fellow goddess who was also their servant, to guard the Triforce from evil minds. Unless they absolutely needed to get involved, Hylia had complete authority over the land. The final resting place of the Triforce became known as the Sacred Realm, a land that was said to be of an eternal beauty yet only a few had ever seen it in its true splendour before it became corrupted over time.

For a few centuries, Hylia would rule over the land as a guiding light, and the creatures who had been created by Farore began to develop in their own ways. The Hylians, the humans of this land, were the closest to the goddess and she in turn viewed them as her children that she would protect always. Other types of creatures soon appeared though while they were devoted to her, they didn't have as strong a connection to Hylia. These creatures included the Gorons--surprised that they go that far back--the Kikwi, the Mogmas, the Parellas, and most surprisingly, a large assortment of Ancient Robots.

Unfortunately, such peaceful times wouldn't last forever. There were a few mild conflicts that occurred between the tribes though Hylia was quick to resolve them before they could spiral out of control, yet there was one conflict that occurred which no one was prepared for. Rumours of the Triforce's power to grant anyone's fondest desire quickly spread to the underground until they reached the ears of an ancient evil who had been stirring since time began. His name was Demise, known as the Demon King, and he sought the power of the Triforce in his bid to conquer the world--Why does he sound an awful lot like Ganondorf for some reason?

One day on "The Surface"--the land wasn't named Hyrule until much later--a fissure appeared in the ground and from it came an assortment of demonic creatures bent on destroying everything in their path. Leading them was Demise himself, wielding a sword that was said to contain a spirit whose loyalty to him was absolute. News quickly reached the ears of Hylia that the world entrusted to her was under attack and so she decided to prepare her people for the upcoming battle. All of the tribes were willing to fight in her name but she realized there was one she couldn't see getting caught in the conflict.

Because of their strong connection to her, Hylia didn't wish for the Hylians to suffer. Unfortunately, most of them were killed by the onslaught of monsters coming from the underworld and so she decided to save the remaining survivors whilst also making sure that the Triforce didn't fall into Demise's hands. If he were to claim the Triforce, nothing would have been able to stop him, not even Hylia herself, so she began formulating a series of plans of varying degrees designed to take all possible accounts into situation. She began by gathering the remainder of her people to the temple that had served as her home.

" Are you the only ones who managed to survive the onslaught from the demonic hordes?"

" Yes, Your Grace."

" I had expected more of you, my beloved people."

" Those demons surprised us and we were slaughtered before we could fight back. Never have we seen creatures such as they infest these lands but judging from the saddened expression upon your face, you seem to know what they are, Your Grace."

" They are creatures that have thrived in the darkest depths of the underworld since time began. From the beginning, they remained down there in their dark quarters, corrupting every last fibre of their wretched domain, longing for a time where they could come up here to the surface and plunge into an eternal darkness. Unfortunately, that time has come now and it is by my own weakness as your guidance that they have come here."

" What do you mean?"

" They seek the power I have watched over as commanded by the Great Goddesses."

Once again, I had to stop on account of recognizing a familiar face. At first, I thought that I was looking at Vice Principal Luna, but I realized that it was Nightmare Moon who was portraying the goddess, Hylia. The last time I read the Hyrule Historia, I remembered seeing her portraying Hylia though I thought it odd someone with her nature would be cast as a kind, benevolent being, whose purpose was to guide those under her divine protection. If Princess Twilight were looking at this right now, she would have thrown a conniption fit at the very least given that someone as evil as Nightmare Moon was being treated as a goddess.

The one speaking to Hylia was someone I didn't recognize straight away as I had never really paid much attention to his legend. Good thing Princess Twilight was very extensive when she told me about the "Pillars of Equestria" who once defended the kingdom until they made the ultimate by banishing themselves to limbo for a thousand years until she reversed the spell, freeing them all--without their consent--and fighting alongside them. Rockhoof, the largest member, was said to have dug an entire moat using only his strength and a shovel, saving his entire village from lava that had erupted from a nearby volcano.

He used to be a scrawny pony who dreamed of becoming part of something he called "The Mighty Helm" but was rejected by its members on account of him not having the right fortitude though they were the one that gave him his famous shovel. Through some divine intervention--or either magic or simply a freak accident--he changed and became a much stronger pony resulting in him saving his village and being recognized by the Helm before getting accepted into their ranks. That's all Princess Twilight said about him though I had to question his transformation if only because it sounded really weird. But, who was I to judge when I could transform as well though not to that extent.

Rockhoof's jaw dropped. " They seek out the golden power that can grant the wishes of he who touches it?"

Nightmare Moon slowly nodded in sadness. " Demise, the Demon King of the Underworld, will not rest until he has the Triforce in his hands. Because of his merciless ambition, innocent lives have been lost, lives that I could have saved had I been better prepared. He and his demonic horde have been targeting you, those who have the strongest connection to me, because of that connection, and it has caused me nothing but pain seeing you being cut down under the swath of evil. For that, I shall make right by doing what I must to prevent any more of you from losing your lives."

" What did you have in mind?"

" Though it pains me to consider it, I must march forward and meet the Demon King in battle."

Rockhoof's eyes lit up though he quickly realized that he was the only one who felt that way. " Why aren't the rest of you excited at the prospect of going headlong into battle fighting by the side of Her Grace, the goddess Hylia? I for one would deem it an immense honour to be able to fight alongside she who has guided us since time immoral."

The rest of the Hylians weren't as thrilled about Rockhoof's love of battle and merely stared at one another until someone from the back called out before walking up to the front of the gathering. They didn't seem afraid to express their opinion and I was surprised that this person was none other than Twilight Velvet. She was Princess Twilight's--also Twilight Sparkle's--mother who had a rather active lifestyle many never would have expected. Why would she have been here portraying one of the ancient Hylian people? Wouldn't it have made sense had she portrayed someone from further ahead in the timeline?

" What makes you think this way, Rockhoof?" Twilight Velvet asked.

" The honour of fighting by Her Grace is one we shouldn't ignore."

Twilight Velvet walked up to Rockhoof and slapped him in the face with such force that he stumbled back slightly before regaining his composure. " You've been harping on about that nonsense ever since those demonic creatures first crawled out from that hole in the ground. I know you possess a warrior's spirit and all but the rest of us aren't exactly known for our fighting prowess. The reason most of us have died is because we're easy pickings for those accursed monsters."

" Which is why we must fight back."

" Are you being serious?"

Rockhoof nodded. " I've never been more serious of anything, Twilight Velvet. We humans have been suffering as a result of this demonic invasion and we must do what we can to fight back otherwise we will be wiped out." He then turned towards Nightmare Moon who had kept herself out of the debate on account that it was beneath her status. " Her Grace cannot push this horde back on her own which is why she needs her people to help her succeed in saving this land. I know my words come as being crazy if not insane but we must fight for the land which has been our home for as long as we can remember."

Twilight Velvet sighed. " Then you will be on your own as will Her Grace."

" You would abandon Her Grace?"

" No." Twilight Velvet answered. " But, I do know that we're completely outmatched by those demonic monsters. Heck, we're outmatched by the other tribes. In case you didn't notice, they have been developing unique attributes that make them stand out compared to us. The best we can do is being similar in appearance to Her Grace. Besides, you underestimate Her Grace as she is far stronger than any other being."

" Are you saying we are weak?"

Twilight Velvet shook her head. " No but we're no match for them."

That was when Nightmare Moon finally raised her hand to silence both Rockhoof and Twilight Velvet. " There is no need for you to continue this senseless bickering. While it is true you, those closest to me, do not have the kinds of abilities the other tribes possess, you do possess an important trait they could never possess. You possess the means to continue going and become even more than what you are." She looked at Twilight Velvet first. " I will not be on my own as you claim against our enemies." She then looked at Rockhoof. " I shall have those fighting by my side against the demons."

" What do you mean?" Rockhoof asked.

" The other tribes shall join me in battle against the Demon King."

" And us?"

" You will be far away from here."

" I don't understand."

Nightmare Moon looked up at the sky prompting the Hylians to do the same. " There is a reason why I gathered you all here to my temple. Because of the assault carried out by the servants of the demon king, you who are closest to me, have dwindled in number and now are on the verge of being wiped out. I will not allow this to happen and so I shall enact a plan that will protect you from their wrath. It will mean giving up my temple but then it is a noble sacrifice I am willing to take if it means your ensured survival."

One Hylian then spoke out. " Will you protect your temple from the demons?"

Another spoke. " Do you have enough power, Your Grace?"

Yet another spoke. " I hope this will keep us safe from those things."

A fourth Hylian then said something. " Why did this have to happen?"

That's when Rockhoof finally spoke up after hearing his fellow Hylians. " What is this plan of yours, Your Grace?"

" I shall use my divine power to raise my temple and the surrounding land into the sky. You shall all be inside of the temple when this comes to pass." Nightmare Moon answered. " You shall be safe from the terrible conflict that shall occur soon enough. I have failed you and thus many of you perished by these demons and so I must ensure not only your future but those of the future generations of your kind."

Twilight Velvet smiled. " If this is what Her Grace wishes then so be it."

Rockhoof was devastated. " NO! Your Grace! Surely you do not mean this!"

Nightmare Moon nodded. " My wish is to see you protected from the demons who have slaughtered many of your kind. You may not understand now, Rockhoof, but in time you will come to appreciate and even accept this decision. Now, be prepared to be transported up to the sky. This will require me to expend much of my divine power but it shall be worth it. Perhaps one day your descendants will return to the surface and begin your lives anew but for now you shall remain up there amongst the clouds."

" Do you have any last requests, Your Grace?" Twilight Velvet asked.

" Let the history of the surface be forever lost to your descendants." Nightmare Moon answered. " To protect them from the truth until the time is right, they must never know what exists down here lest they too be destroyed by the demons. Always remember that I shall watch over you no matter what becomes of me. Though it pains me to have to do this, it is necessary to ensure the future of this world and what you shall come to except in due course."

Despite Rockhoof's protests, Hylia commanded her people to take refuge in the temple. The Temple of Hylia was very easy to recognize as it comprised of a giant statue that was built in her likeness surrounded by ruins that gave off an ancient vibe. The other tribes sometimes came to visit to pay their respects yet it was the Hylians who visited frequently because of their connection to Hylia. The Statue of the Goddess itself was truly a remarkable sight to beyond, carved in ancient times by the first creatures who walked on the surface, and was viewed as the heart and soul of her temple.

Focusing her efforts, Hylia concentrated her power and the ground began to tremble. The temple and the surrounding area lifted itself from the ground and it continued to rise until the island disappeared completely. Though it pained her immensely, Hylia knew that this was for the best for her people. There were other islands that she sent upwards in hopes her people would one day inhabit them but what was most important was that they were safe from Demise and his demonic horde who continued causing destruction to the surface world. However, Hylia discovered something unexpected the instant her temple disappeared.

" Did you honestly think I would flee?"

Nightmare Moon was shocked. " Rockhoof!? What are you doing here?"

" Your Grace, I couldn't stand by and not fight by your side." Rockhoof answered. " I know that I should have stayed with the others but my place is here by your side. You may punish me in any way that you see fit for defying a divine command but know that I chose to remain here of my own free will. Even if my life becomes forfeit, I cannot abandon she who has guided us since we first learned to walk."

" Such a stubborn creature you are."

" I do not regret my decision."

" And yet your loyalty and admiration deserves respect."

" I am yours to do with as you wish."

Nightmare Moon smiled. " Then I hereby name you as my 'Chosen Champion', he who fights in the name of the Goddess Hylia. When I have gathered the remaining tribes together, I want you there on the front lines with me when the demonic horde led by the Demon King present themselves. I shall prepare you clothing worthy of a champion and gift upon a sword and shield that shall protect you in the battle to come. I shall also prepare a very special gift, one that no being in this world has ever seen before. It will be something of a unique artifact whose appearance will become clear."

" I shall serve you well, Your Grace."

I didn't think that Hylia would send the Hylians up into the sky like that and giving them a small piece of land but she wanted to protect them at all costs from Demise so I couldn't blame her for such an act of desperation. It says here that it took a couple of generations for the Hylians to get used to their new life but over time they completely forgot about the world that existed below the clouds. But, to have them forget would have meant abandoning their ancestry and so the decision was made where Hylia instructed a few Hylians to keep records regarding the surface in hopes one day someone would figure out the records and return to the surface.

Unbeknownst to the Hylians, Hylia secretly added some additional measures to ensure the safety of her people. First, she created a cloud barrier that separated the sky from the surface which preventing Demise and his demonic horde from being able to reach the Hylians. However, this also prevented them from returning to the surface. The only way anyone could break through the barrier would be if they were chosen by Hylia. The other tribes over time would soon forget that the Hylians ever existed though they themselves had issues that stemmed from the aftermath of what was described as the "Ancient Battle" between good and evil.

The other measure carried out by Hylia was one her people never knew about. Knowing that she couldn't protect the Triforce whilst fighting alongside the other tribes, she secretly hid it somewhere on the island that would become the Hylians new home. To ensure that only her chosen hero would be able to access the golden power should he have need of it, she placed each piece behind a portal located in a place called the Sky Keep whose location remained a secret. Again, only her chosen hero would know how to reach it--a footnote said the keep was below the statue dedicated to Hylia though why have such an important place there?

Finally, Hylia enshrined her sword within the Statue of the Goddess for her chosen hero to wield it when the time came for him to appear. It says also that Hylia was a skilled musician and was known for possessing a golden harp which she used to play songs of unparalleled beauty for her people. She believed that her chosen hero would have better use of it than she would so she enshrined it on the island her people lived on until needed once again. With all of that taken care of, Hylia was able to join the other tribes on the surface in the battle against the demonic horde lead by Demise who was unaware of what she had done.

The man who chose to remain behind instead of living with the other Hylians became known as Hylia's Chosen Champion and was said to have protected her from harm using the equipment she had bestowed upon him. Her champion proved himself a valiant warrior who was able to overcome many of the demonic forces of Demise and was said to have wielded an item personally made for him by the goddess known as the Sailcloth, a worthy distinction. No one knew what became of him as historians have yet to find but his legacy would continue to live on forever long after death had claimed his life.

Soon, Hylia and the other tribes would come face-to-face with the demonic horde with Demise himself leading them and the battle would soon begin that would determine the course of history that would follow afterwards. Turning the page, I found myself on the next chapter known as "The Legend of Skyloft" where it continued on from where the previous one ended. Was the name of the island the Hylians were on when Hylia sent it upwards called Skyloft? It sounded rather majestic though kind of predictable in a sense. There was an image of Demise detailing what he looked like and I almost dropped the book out of shock.

He bore such a close resemblance to Ganondorf that I could've sworn they were related to one another in some way or were the same person. A footnote mentioned about seeing the end of the chapter to find out what became of him so I chose to keep that in mind. He certainly looked formidable what with his impressive build coupled with the sword in his hand that looked like it had been forged from darkness itself. Before the battle began, Demise and Hylia had a conversation between one another that showed just how psychotic he was what with wanting to know what became of the Hylians and the Triforce.

" So... You are the goddess who protects the golden power that I seek."

" I know that you are the leader of the demonic horde that has slaughtered countless lives." Nightmare Moon said.

" Yes... My minions have certainly left their mark on this pathetic world. If you value the existence of these pitiful creatures who stand behind you, you shall tell me where I can find the location of the Triforce. Do not attempt to deceive me, goddess, as I know the ancient ones entrusted its safety to you when they returned to the heavens. I would advise you answer me or else there will be a tremendous surge of blood as those creatures become corpses."

" Threats pose no meaning to me, demon."

" Do you believe yourself capable of defeating me, goddess?"

" I do."

" Then you are overestimating your power along with those of the creatures who fight by your side."

I had no idea who was portraying Demise so I looked through my magic journal at what Princess Twilight described about what had been going on back in Equestria. Nothing came to mind at first until a description of the evil the Pillars of Equestria had banished sounded similar to the appearance of the one portraying Demise. Her Highness described this evil as a force that corrupted ponies by promising them great power and was known as the Pony of Shadows. Huh... That sounded like a scary story Princess Celestia once told me though I largely ignored it thinking her foolish but perhaps I should have paid closer attention.

" Why do you seek the Triforce?"

The Pony of Shadows laughed in response. " Why? Why!? Because I desire to conquer this world and make it into my own domain. Long have I wanted a reason to come to this surface world and my reason came when news reached me of a divine relic that could grant the wishes of any who placed their hands upon it."

" You shall never get your hands on the Triforce."

Again, the Pony of Shadows laughed. " You amuse me, Goddess! I can sense the fear stemming forth from you and it becomes more delectable with every passing second. Your desire to protect these pitiful creatures is a sign of weakness and the fear of losing them makes you question your abilities."

" The tribes of this land and I shall drive back your demonic forces." Nightmare Moon said defiantly. " And you yourself shall forever be banished where you will never cause pain and suffering to others again. Despite having watched over these tribes since time began, I am very proficient in the ways of fighting. Thus, you should not underestimate me, Demise, or else your servants shall think of you as weak."

" Where are they?"

" Who?"

" The humans who were attached to you the most." The Pony of Shadows answered. " I do not see them amongst the gathering of creatures you have assembled. Could it be that you attempted to hide them from me? How unfortunate as they proved to be excellent fodder for my minions to slaughter. Their screams even now continue to be heard in your ears correct? Try as you might, you cannot block out such screams. Perhaps you could replace them with the screams that will come from what is sure to be a bloody massacre. I could slaughter each of you but that would deny my horde a desire to do that."

" They are away from your grasp and you will never find them."

The Pony of Shadows chuckled under his breath as he drew out his sword from a scabbard that was attached to his leg. " Is that a fact? A pity as I enjoyed killing so many of them. It wasn't as though they were a challenge as they fell to my blade so easily, a sign that they were easy prey." He then licked the tip of his sword before striking the ground resulting in a tremor that nearly knocked everyone to the ground. " Look at how your chosen fear what I am. Do you truly think they are worthy? I suppose our answer will come soon enough. Now... I shall ask you once again, goddess. Where are your precious humans? Where is the Triforce?"

Nightmare Moon refused to answer him resulting in the Pony of Shadows giving her a smirk before he turned his attention towards a pair of Gorons and a Mogma. The three didn't even have a chance to retaliate when he suddenly raised his sword resulting in lightning striking down from above onto the blade charging it with electrical power. He swung his sword at them where they were electrocuted and died instantly much to Nightmare Moon's horror. She had once again witnessed innocent lives being lost as a result of the Pony of Shadows and she felt a rage burning inside her which didn't exist until that precise moment.

The Gorons and Mogmas mourned the deaths of their comrades and were about to launch an attack of their own when Nightmare Moon raised her hand signalling them not to lash out in anger as she knew they would merely be throwing away their lives. Instead, she used her hand to make gestures indicating when they were to attack upon her giving a signal. Despite their rage, they abided by her decision and waited. The Pony of Shadows laughed at such a display and snapped his fingers before looking at one of his demonic minions. The demon lunged forward and instantly skewered a Kikwi in cold blood before anyone even knew what happened.

Seeing the innocent Kikwi brutually murdered was enough to make Nightmare Moon react in rage. " Stop this! Why are you doing this!?"

" Until you give me the answers I seek, I will continue cutting down these pathetic creatures."

" Then I have no other choice."

" You acquiesce?"

" Even if it costs me my life, you must be defeated!"

The Pony of Shadows laughed once more. " Then you are willing to throw away your very existence? I cannot see you doing such a thing, goddess." He aimed his sword at the tribes who stood behind Nightmare Moon prompting her to look in their direction. " These creatures have relied on you ever since the gods of old created this land with their power. To die here would mean them no longer having you to guide their pathetic existence. You may be a goddess but such a sacrifice to best me would result in their eventual destruction. I had thought you different from the old gods and merely stood aside whilst your creatures would fight on your behalf."

Nightmare Moon raised her sword--not her Goddess Sword but a different one she had on her person--and swung it downward. " Then your assumptions about me were wrong, demon, a costly mistake I am certain. The tribes of this land shall continue on whether I live or die here! They possess the means to push themselves to far greater things more so than even I would have expected. You and your kind only see them as worthless while I see them as having great potential."

" Are you willing to die?"

" I am."

This left the Pony of Shadows in quite the predicament. He had hoped for Nightmare Moon to give in to despair and reveal to him what he wanted to know. Not even killing those who were willing to fight on her behalf was enough to make her reveal the location of both the Hylians and the Triforce. While he could have easily slaughtered the tribes and leave Nightmare Moon barely clinging onto life, he needed to make sure she didn't die before answering him. Against his own nature, she needed to live for the time being. He considered throwing his demonic horde at her in hopes they would overpower her but he knew better than that.

Unlike the tribes, Nightmare Moon's power was far superior than all of them combined. Whilst he had no problems sacrificing his horde for the sake of victory, he wanted to cause as much chaos as possible before conquering the world. It was at that moment when the Pony of Shadows noticed that Nightmare Moon's temple was missing. He had caught glimpses of it during his initial rampage--the size of the statue could be seen practically anywhere given how big it was--and the large crater where it used to be led him to suspect what she did to hide the Hylians and the Triforce away from him though he wasn't sure of the latter.

In his mind, he thought Nightmare Moon to be quite clever, sending the Hylians away and out of his reach. However, he also thought that she was merely delaying the inevitable. It would be only a matter of time before the Hylians would one day come back as their innate curiosity would compel them to seek out the truth. He knew now that he would never get any answers from the goddess so instead he chose to focus on slaughtering the tribes and Nightmare Moon. One demon suddenly leapt forward in a bid to kill another Kikwi yet Nightmare Moon responded quickly by slicing its neck off its head killing it instantly.

And yet, this was what the Pony of Shadows was waiting for. He lunged forward himself and managed to grab her from behind before she could do anything. The tribes attempted to make a move in a bid to save her only for them to suddenly stop when Nightmare Moon suddenly had the Pony of Shadow's sword up against her throat. " You continue to surprise me with your attempts, goddess. Who would have guessed that you sent those humans away whilst they were within your precious temple."

" What!?"

" Yes... I know what you have done now." The Pony of Shadows said. " To keep them from my grasp, you sent them into the clouds where my horde cannot reach. Such an act of desperation to keep them away from the slaughter to come yet one that proves how you care for such pathetic creatures. It would seem that I have answered one of my own questions leaving the most important one remaining. Where did you hide it, the Triforce? Perhaps it is hidden with those humans? If so then they are unaware of what they have amongst them. I shall have to find a means of getting up there and take it for myself."

That was enough to push Nightmare Moon over the edge and she responded by spinning her sword around and plunging it into the Pony of Shadows' chest. He released his hold on her and staggered back clutching his stomach--it was bleeding--while she turned around and stood in front of the other tribes. " While you may now know where the humans are, you will never reach them so long as I and those who fight alongside me shall live."

" Then you will all die."

" For the future of this land, you must be cast aside."

The Ancient Battle between the forces of the Goddess Hylia and the Demon King Demise shook the very foundation of the Surface to its core. Both sides engaged one another in a blood-soaked conflict that saw countless lives being lost on both sides with neither willing to surrender an inch. Not only were lives being lost but the land itself was being ravaged to the point where nothing could ever sustain itself there again. For a time, the demonic horde had superior numbers as whenever one was killed, another would immediately take its place, yet this didn't serve to slow down the forces under Hylia's command.

Ever by her side was her Chosen Champion, who as previously stated, had killed large swathes of the demonic horde using his natural skills as a fighter. Some historians believed his presence enabled Hylia's forces to avoid being completely obliterated as most of them weren't fighters like he was. It was said the Champion inspired the tribes to continue the battle as their very future was hanging in the balance and Hylia herself proved no slouch either. Her divine power was a bane to the horde as Demise forced them to keep going or else be killed by him leaving them with little option but to throw themselves into the fire.

It soon became clear to Hylia that her forces simply couldn't kill Demise as he was simply far too powerful and killing his horde meant nothing as they kept on coming. Her only option was to use a form of containment in hopes of sealing away his power. In the waning days of the battle, Hylia put her plan into motion where she drove the Demon King into a prison located at the site where her temple used to be. Despite her temple no longer being there, her divine power could still be felt and she believed it would be enough. Using all of her power, Hylia sealed the prison thereby imprisoning Demise within it.

As a result of the Demon King being sealed within what became known to historians as the "Sealed Grounds", the demonic horde's confidence waned allowing Hylia's forces to turn the tide of battle leaving them no choice but to flee for their lives. The remnants of the horde scattered themselves far and wide across the Surface and would form small bands with survival being their one true objective though it meant occasionally fighting against other groups and what remained of the tribes. It was said that Demise was forced to change as a result of being imprisoned and became an abomination of his physical form.

No one knew how long this battle lasted but the general consensus is that it lasted roughly a month though no evidence has been proven of it. However long it was, the fact was that it had caused widespread devastation that would forever change everything on the Surface. The Gorons and Kikwi were almost wiped out leaving few of their numbers left to try and forge a path forward while the Mogmas, Parellas, and the Ancient Robots didn't suffer as many casualties though they still lost many of their kind. And then there were the Hylians who were safe within the veil of clouds that existed above.

I had hoped Hylia would prevail as the thought of a monster like Demise getting his hands on the Triforce would have been absolutely devastating. Suddenly, a footnote caught my attention and was accompanied by an image of a figure who looked rather effeminate in appearance. It said before he was sealed away, Demise left behind his sword in hopes that one day it would free him from his imprisonment. Contained within the sword was a spirit known as Ghirahim, a self-proclaimed Demon Lord, who began making plans to resurrect his master when the proper time came. Many of the remnants of the demonic horde swore loyalty to him though against their free will.

While not as strong as his master, Ghirahim was an expert swordsman--he was a sword spirit after all--though his temperament was said to have been erratic. No one be they friend or foe know what to expect from him when it came to his temperament so they took precautions in case he was in a particularly bad mood. Sometimes he would fly in a murderous rage while other times he came off as having a good sense of humour. Like the other demons, Ghirahim couldn't break through the cloud barrier Hylia had created to protect the Hylians so he didn't bother to make any attempt to break through.

The battle now won, the tribes had hoped Hylia would once again guide them as she had done since they first appeared on the Surface. Unfortunately, the goddess sustained grave injuries against Demise--not fatal--and while she could have kept on going like they wanted, she knew that her efforts had been in vain. Demise was gone but there was no telling how long the seal she had created would last. His power would clash against his imprisonment and one day would result in his eventual escape. Knowing that his escape would result in untold destruction in his bid to conquer the Surface, Hylia had no other choice but to rely on a final gambit.

Surrounded by a few Gorons and Mogmas, Nightmare Moon told them of dire news. " It appears that my efforts to contain the evil of Demise was in vain."

One of the Gorons then spoke out. " What do you mean, Your Grace?"

" The seal which I placed upon him will not last forever."

" What's the problem in that? It means that we don't have to worry about it ourselves and future generations will take care of it. After all, you will be there to guide them, Your Grace, so if anything, they're in safe hands."

" If my plan is to be carried out, Limestone Pie, then I will not be there to guide them."

I had to stop upon recognizing one of Pinkie's Pie's older sisters, Limestone Pie. While I'm not surprised that she was portraying a Goron--it matched with Pinkie herself--I was surprised that she would be here rather than further on in the timeline alongside her sisters. Unlike Maud, who was stoic in her personality, and Pinkie being completely random, Limestone Pie could be best described as an eternal grump who complained about everything even when it didn't make sense. No matter what anyone tried to say, she would respond in an insulting manner that would cause her friction amongst others including her own family. Pinkie was often willing to look past Limestone's attitude though she struggled at times to ignore it.

Limestone Pie wasn't the only one there of the Pie family. Standing next to her with a muffled look on her face was Marble Pie, also portraying one of the Gorons. She was known as the quiet one of the four sisters in that she rarely said anything but when she did, it was always seen as a miracle given her shy nature. Then there were the Mogmas, mole-like creatures who could dig through dirt using sharp claws though a footnote stated they used special digging mitts to dig around for treasure. Despite their gruff appearances, they had a friendly demeanour though when it came to treasure, they would gladly betray someone for it.

As for the other tribes, the Kikwi were a race of animal-like creatures who were also part plant in that they had plantlike material on their bodies in addition to having a large bud sprouting from their backs. They could use this bud to suddenly produce a bush which they use to disguise themselves to hide from predators due to being cowardly in nature--if that's the case then how could have battled alongside Hylia against the demonic horde of Demise? Moving along, the next tribe were the Parella, aquatic creatures who looked like either a seahorse, a jellyfish or perhaps even both, and naturally, lived in watery areas.

Due to their lack of bone structure, they could squeeze into places other creatures couldn't making them versatile when it came to hiding. They were also adept swimmers despite not having actual fins but who am I to judge? Finally, there were the Ancient Robots who were... well... robots. How could futuristic technology exist within a fantasy setting? It says here that they were powered by something called a Timeshift Stone which flourished in the location they dwelled in but over time, their territory became barren due to their resources getting depleted resulting in them shutting down and becoming forgotten relics.

Focusing back on what I was supposed to be reading--I couldn't help but be curious about the other tribes--I noticed that one of the Mogmas was Filthy Rich--which defintely caught me by surprise. He was a rich tycoon who desired for Camp Everfree to be converted into a spa thus making him a sort of catalyst who drove Gloriosa Daisy into wanting to do what was necessary to protect the camp. Luckily, his plan was thwarted though I doubt he is willing to change any time soon. A shame really as I heard from Princess Twilight that his Equestrian counterpart is so much nicer than the human version.

" What!?" Limestone Pie exclaimed. " What do you mean you won't be here!?

" That's what she said." Filthy Rich answered.

" I know she said that but what does she mean!?"

" Don't ask me."

Limestone Pie looked like she was about to blow her top when she calmed down upon Marble Pie looking at her with her eyes. " Ugh! Sometimes you need to act tougher, Marble, especially when it comes to Her Grace saying something completely out there." Looking at Nightmare Moon, she couldn't help but be filled with concern over the goddess. " Is something going to happen with the Demon King?"

Nightmare Moon nodded. " Even as we speak, Demise continues to resist the seal I have placed upon him. If he were to break free of it, he would slaughter all living things and plunge this land into an eternal darkness from which it will never recover. I had underestimated his power in that I believed the seal would be enough but now I realize that drastic measures must be taken to prepare for his eventual return."

" What can we do, Your Grace?" Filthy Rich asked.

" There is nothing any of you can do."

" Sure, we might not be a divine being like you but we can help out in some way." Filthy Rich said. " Just tell us what you need us to do and we will do it without question. It's a shame that the other tribes didn't want to stick around to help out."

" They had to return to their places of origin."

Limestone Pie stomped her foot in response. " They could've waited until after you had done what you're supposed to be doing. As much as it pains me to say it, I have to agree with the Mogma over here in that it's a real shame. We Gorons are here because there are only a handful of us left and we've no home of our own whilst the Mogmas can only go so far into that volcanic region without roasting their carcasses."

" Mmm-hmmm." Marble Pie said.

Filthy Rich took Limestone's words as a slight insult. " Just cause we can't survive in lava like you Gorons can doesn't make us Mogmas inferior. We can easily get around using our special digging mitts to burrow through any rock." He then demonstrated by first showcasing the mitts on each of his hands before digging into the ground where he travelled down and unspecified distance until he came back up a few inches away from where he dug. " As long as we can avoid the lava, me and the boys can survive in a place like that volcano."

" Mmm-hmmm."

" You're not supposed to complement that, Marble." Limestone Pie said.

" Oh."

" I think she has the right idea." Filthy Rich said.

Limestone Pie was about to make a comeback when she saw that Nightmare Moon was struggling. " Here! Let me help you, Your Grace." Filthy Rich and two other Mogmas nodded at one another before assisting Nightmare Moon much to Limestone's pleasure.

" Thank you everyone."

" Now about what you want us to do."

Nightmare Moon raised her hand. " There is nothing any of you can do now as it beyond your reach, but, I can tell you that I hope that your lives and those of the future generations of your respective tribes will be good ones and that you will one day welcome back the humans to this land."

Filthy Rich was confused. " Didn't you send them up to the clouds for their safety?"

" Yes but the time will come when one amongst them in the future shall break through the barrier and return to the Surface." Nightmare Moon answered. " This one shall be known as the new champion who shall ensure the destruction of Demise should he one day return."

Marble Pie then surprised everyone by speaking up. " Where is the current champion?"

Limestone Pie nodded. " I agree with my sister. Where did that guy go anyway? I know he was always by your side, Your Grace, and he did inspire us to fight back against those demons despite not having much experience." That's when her jaw dropped upon realizing that her sister said something other than her usual responses. " Didn't think you had in you to actually say something, Marble. I think there's hope for you yet."

" Mmm-hmm."

" Nevermind."

" I would rather not say." Nightmare Moon said.

" If that's what you want, Your Grace."

" I do not know when Demise shall return only that he will free himself from the seal that binds him in the place where my temple once stood." Nightmare Moon said. " When the new champion appears, I wish for you to pass down to your descendants, this message. Tell them that they must help my champion fulfill his destiny. Be sure to let the other tribes know of this same message. Gorons, mighty warriors of stone, whose loyalty is immeasurable... I am so sorry so many of you were slaughtered in the battle against Demise and his demonic horde. I hope you are able to find a place that you can call home and begin to rebuild both your society and your lives."

Limestone Pie smiled. " We were honoured to have fought alongside you, Your Grace."

" It was for a good cause." Marble Pie added.

With that, the surviving Gorons and Mogmas departed from Nightmare Moon, with the former returning to their place of origin in the volcanic region of the Surface. The Gorons had no place to call their own as they were now so few in number so they decided to go their separate ways in hopes of making it out there on their own though any who were related to each other by bloodlines made sure to stay together. Nightmare Moon then looked up at the sky and wondered if the Hylians had gotten used to living up amongst the clouds. As much as she wanted to see them for herself, she knew she had much more to take care of.

When the island that contained Nightmare Moon's temple, the Statue of the Goddess, and the Hylians reached its destination in the clouds, the Hylians didn't know what to make of their new lives given unto them. Many were upset that they had been sent away rather than being allowed to fight alongside Nightmare Moon against Demise and his demonic horde. Others didn't feel the same way and felt relieved knowing their goddess thought of their safety above all else. For a while, this caused a friction to occur between the Hylians resulting in them forming camps on either end of the island but they quickly realized that they needed to move past such bickering if they were to survive.

At least they were given plenty of land with which to begin a new civilization but the problem was that they didn't have any materials to work with. In fact, the only materials were the temple itself and an entire forest. While the Hylians didn't like the idea of descrating Nightmare Moon's sacred temple to build themselves homes, they had no other choice if they wanted to ensure their own survival in their new home. One thing everyone agree on was that the Statue of the Goddess would remain intact and would serve as a place of worship where anyone could prat to Nightmare Moon for whatever reason they had.

One of the first things they needed to do was to find themselves a leader who could get things done. Unfortunately, Rockhoof was seen as the ideal leader but they discovered that he had remained behind down on the Surface. Twilight Velvet was then suggested as being an ideal leader but she refused saying that she lacked a true vision and was more concerned with looking after her ailing husband who was slowly recovering from an illness. There was one other person who had what it took yet he didn't really believe himself worthy of the distinction and wanted to find someone else.

" Why not take up the mantle of leader?" Twilight Velvet asked as she and the entire group of Hylians had confronted the one they wanted to lead them."

" Because I don't think I am worthy to lead any of you."

" Out of all of us here, you are the one who has the intricate knowledge needed to guide us now, Sunburst."

Sunburst!? I couldn't believe it. This one person they believed was worthy of leading them was Sunburst. I had never met him in person but Princess Twilight told me how he had become quite the important pony in the Crystal Empire by being and Official Crystal Bearer and who had been chosen to teach Baby Flurry Heart how to use her magic. Other than his strong friendship with Starlight Glimmer, Sunburst was seen as a social outcast who preferred knowledge rather than getting out there and making friends. I wouldn't mind meeting him just to see what kind of pony he is.

" Knowledge alone doesn't make a good leader."

" What are you talking about?"

" I lack the physical fortitude necessary to be a leader." Sunburst said. " Think about it, Twilight Velvet, everyone. While I won't deny that my intellect is remarkably high--I attribute that to my years of reading and studying ancient lore--I'm not exactly what you would call a muscular man. A leader needs both qualities to be successful and I lack one of them so me being the leader would merely be counterproductive."

" Then why not build up your muscles?"

" I haven't done anything of the sort since I was a child."

" That's not the point!"

" Well, I beg to differ."

Twilight Velvet sighed and slapped her forehead. " If Rockhoof was here with us, he would have been chosen as the leader without question, but he decided to stay behind and fight by the side of Her Grace."

" He knew what he wanted to do and went ahead and did it." Sunburst said as he adjusted his glasses. " Rockhoof was destined for something far greater and he seized upon his destiny and is sure to be remembered on the Surface as having served the Goddess Hylia well. I am sure he will be remembered here amongst us for his contributions as well as the vibrant personality he was known for possessing. Besides, I thought you were seen as being ideal to become our new leader."

" My family is more important."

Sunburst chuckled. " My research is more important."

" Not the same thing."

" I believe you are wrong, Twilight Velvet."

" You're going to lead us, Sunburst, whether you accept the position or not." Twilight Velvet said. " In order for us to survive up here, we need someone who has the smarts to guide us on the right path and who possesses an incredible amount of charm. If I had a true vision of how our new lives would be, I would have become the leader without a second thought, but I don't, so that leaves only you to take on the job."

The other Hylians began speaking their thoughts on the situation with regards to choosing a new leader. Many proclaimed their support for Sunburst despite his lack of physical prowess though some questioned this fact and were skeptical but ultimately agreed that he was worthy. Others said that no one else could handle the position because they were clueless while others claimed he was trying to weasel his way out of an important duty. This arguing went on for a while as Sunburst found himself isolated as his fellow Hylians continued insisting that he was the one who could lead them.

" It's only you!" One Hylian said.

" You're our best and brightest, Sunburst." Another Hylian said.

" Who cares that you lack physical strength." A third Hylian said. " You have knowledge on your side and that makes you an experienced individual who knows how to adapt to any situation no matter how difficult it can be."

" You understand things the rest of us don't."

" Teach us your ways."

" Lead us."

" Sunburst!"

" Become our leader and guide us to a better tomorrow."

Twilight Velvet smirked. " As you can see, Sunburst, everyone here wishes for you to become the leader of our new community. I wouldn't want to disappoint them by refusing such a great distinction but it's your decision to male. We wouldn't be hounding you to accept it if we didn't think you were worthy. In fact, we all know that you're the only one who can prevent us from destroying ourselves. I know that sounds incredibly stupid but we're being brutally honest."

Sunburst adjusted his glasses. " You truly think I would make a good leader?"

Twilight Velvet nodded. " I place my trust in your hands."

The rest of the Hylians nodded in approval leaving Sunburst unsure of what to say to them. While he didn't like the idea of being the leader of their tribe given he lacked physical strength according to him, they truly believed he would have their best interests in mind and that they trusted his judgment with their lives. How could he possibly refuse? And yet, he still questioned whether he could give them the kind of life Nightmare Moon had hoped for. Sunburst realized a leader was one who earned respect by their accomplishments, being trustworthy, having support, and making life better for those under their protection.

Looking back and forth at everyone, Sunburst threw up his hands. " Alright... I'll do it."

" You will lead us?"

" Yes."

The wisdom of the first leader of the town that became known as Skyloft ushered in greatness the likes of which the Hylians had never known. Through such leadership, they were able to develop their community by first building home using materials from the temple, the trees as additional materials to strengthen what they already had, and even utilized the power of the very air itself enabling them to construct fans that could harness such power. There was even a small lake that provided fresh water and animals from the forest who could provide additional resources--not so much for food as the Hylians weren't seen as carnivores.

Within the span of several years, Skyloft slowly began coming into its own, but perhaps the greatest achievement came when the Hylians were able to befriend what they became known for according to historians. Whether it had been planned by Hylia or simply happened out of sheet coincidence, the ancient people of Skyloft bonded with Loftwings, an ancient race of birds that were gifted with great intelligence. At first, the Loftwings wanted nothing to with the Hylians but persistence paid off and soon both man and bird became as one within several generations of the first meeting.

As I turned the next page, the story suddenly went back to Hylia and what she ultimately decided to do. Knowing that Demise would one day return, she enacted two plans that were independant of and connected to one another. Her first plan involved creating a sword spirit that she had bonded with the Goddess Sword which resided in the Statue of the Goddess. She gave the spirit a name, Fi, and her purpose was to guide Hylia's chosen champion towards their destiny and to protect her when she had need of it. Only a chosen few in Skyloft knew of this and pledged to safeguard the secret until the proper time.

Her other plan was much more complicated as it involved her giving up her immortal form along with her powers and be reincarnated as a mortal sometime in the future. She did this so that she could use the Triforce as the Great Goddesses had restricted its use to mortals. Knowing that a divine presence was needed to watch over the Surface when she gave up her existence as a goddess, three dragons were chosen to guard the three provinces, Faron, Eldin, and Lanaryu. In addition to them, a sky spirit had been commanded to watch over the skies which also included Skyloft yet Hylia was not finished yet.

The chosen champion would need the key that would open the Sky Keep, the resting place of the Triforce in Skyloft, but to only have one spirit guarding it wasn't enough and so it was divided into four pieces with each piece guarded by the dragons and by Levia, the Sky Spirit, their task to teach their respective part of the key, a song, to the champion. Hylia also knew her reincarnation would need to remember who she once was in order to play her part so she stored away her memories within two statues that were hidden in two sacred springs somewhere. She even had an agent who had been tasked to assist both her and the champion in the future.

Finally, she created two powerful artefacts known as the Gates of Time. Their true purpose remained a mystery as historians never did figure out what they were for, but a common theory was that one could use the gates to travel through time itself. With everything now taken care of, Hylia gave up her immortal form and disappeared from the world she had protected as commanded by the Great Goddesses, her chosen vassals would carry out her plan and waited. For roughly a thousand years, the Surface had since recovered but paled in comparison to what it once was while Skyloft became exactly what Hylia had hoped it would.

Everyone was bonded to a Loftwing who served as an extension of the people of Skyloft--they were still seen as Hylians--and even additional islands soon began getting inhabited by them as a means of furthering their horizons. There was one place that was deemed forbidden, a placed called the Thunderhead where Levias was said to reside, and the remnants of the ancient past could be found in the form of an old building that had fallen into decay. Other than that, Skyloft had prospered, its people having forgotten the Surface over time. If there was one place up in Skyloft that was a crowning achievement it was the Knight Academy.

Located near the Statue of the Goddess, it was a place where students would live and train to become knights dedicated to protecting Skyloft. It was a recent institution that was founded in response to adults believing children needed to make something of themselves. It comprised of a kitchen, a restroom, a classroom, living quarters--females were on the upper of two levels while the males were on the lower level--and several offices. According to the book, the academy was celebrating its twentififth anniversary and so everyone was preparing to mark such an important occasion whilst also preparing for the academy's biggest test.

" To think that it has been twenty-five years since the founding of the Knight Academy."

" I always believed we were making a difference with the youth and it's nice to see that even now, they continue to appreciate what we do around here. You know, Owlan, you've only been an instructor here for the last ten years alongside Horwell, but the accomplishments you've both made not to mention the praise you've received from the students continues to amaze me even now after all this time."

" You needn't praise me so much, headmaster. Both Horwell and I take our jobs as instructors here seriously. True, we had some issues over the years with rowdy students though they ended up becoming fantastic knights in the end, yet I had hoped many would have continued on with their training instead of retiring."

" Ah, that couldn't be helped Owlan."

" They gave up their dreams to begin families."

" No, I wouldn't say it like that."

" How would you then?"

" Despite giving up on their dreams, by starting families and having children who aspire to become knights themselves, they will pass on their knowledge to their children thus allowing them to fully grasp what is expected of being a Knight of Skyloft. When she was younger, I would teach Zelda all manner of things regarding being a knight. She sometimes ignored my teachings and believed she could do it on her own without my help, but most of the time, my words reached her and applied them into her own training regimen."

" Do you regret allowing her to join the academy?"

" I've had nightmares of Zelda getting hurt, Owlan, but I cannot let such feelings cloud my judgment. She isn't the little girl who would hold my hand and beg me to tell her a story whenever she was curious. She has become her own independant woman though sometimes I think she enjoys teasing Link a bit too much."

I immediately recognized Juniper Montage as the instructor known as Owlan. Despite everything she did to sabotage the Daring Do movie just because she couldn't play the lead role and using a mirror powered by Equestrian Magic, she was a really sweet individual who simply wanted to be liked. Good thing Starlight Glimmer helped her understand that getting revenge wasn't the way to go and otherwise my friends and I would have been lost when the mirror broke. It sounded like Owlan always brought out the best in the knights of the academy though she sounded like she had some reservations about Zelda.

The headmaster was someone I didn't recognize so I looked through the magic journal again to see what Princess Twilight had to say. Judging from his physical appearance and what she had provided in her letters, the only one it could be was Prince Rutherford, ruler of a kingdom of yaks known as Yakyakistan. I never knew yaks even existed until Her Highness mentioned about them which lead me to wonder what other tribes existed in Equestria. Among the yaks, Rutherford was the most stubborn of all, refusing to accept help even when it was obvious that he was in way over his head. For a king, that wasn't what I called a good personality trait.

It then occurred to me that both Rutherford and Juniper were talking about Zelda. I knew from Rainbow Dash that there were different incarnations of Zelda--the same with Link--who have existed throughout the ages so this version was most likely not going to be portrayed by Princess Twilight. That begged the question of who would it be instead. In any case, I decided to continue reading in hopes of learning more about the Knight Academy. It sounded like it would have been a perfect place for someone like Rainbow to attend were any of it real but given recent events, the possibility of it being real was quite evident.

" By the way, Owlan." Prince Rutherford began. " I hear that you're in quite a slump when it comes to your extensive plant collection."

Juniper sighed. " I feel as though I've seen every known kind of plant that exists out there in the world. It would be truly something if I could get my hands on something that no one has ever seen before but the chances of that happening are slim. Many around Skyloft have tried showing me what they claimed were new plants but their efforts were in vain. I recognized each and every one they presented me, a price for being the utmost authority on collecting plants." Walking up to a door, Juniper opened it and ushered Rutherford to take a closer look at what was on the other side. " As you can see, headmaster Gaepora, I pretty much have everything."

Prince Rutherford began pulling on his beard in deep thought. " Perhaps you should ask one of the students to search the other islands out there in the sky. Perhaps one of them might contain a new plant to add to your collection."

" I suppose it's worth a try."

" Be sure to give them extra credit."

" Of course as I don't expect a student to go that far out without giving them something good in return."

" Very good."

Juniper sensed that something was bothering Rutherford so she chose to inquire. " You seem to be worried about something, headmaster." Before continuing, she closed the door to her office out of not wanting her plants to be exposed to any foreign agents. " Is it the upcoming Wing Ceremony that's bothering you again?"

Coughing, Prince Rutherford sighed heavily. " I never could put anything past you, Owlan. This year's ceremony is perhaps the most important one but it doesn't have anything to do with the academy celebrating twenty-five years of out institution's existence." He then waved his hand several times to inform Juniper that he wanted to walk around the academy and she nodded before they began their indoor trek. " As you know, Zelda is going to be handing out the prize to the winner this year, a Sailcloth she made herself. While I am happy that my daughter is going to be doing this, she has unintentionally made things more complicated."

" Is it because of Link?"

" Yes." Prince Rutherford answered. " She really wants him to win this year and move one step closer to becoming a knight."

" I must admit that Link is certainly talented and could go far with his training." Juniper said. " But, he does have a tendency to daydream particularly when flying on his Loftwing. If he keeps up with such an attitude, it's possible that he won't be able to pass the ceremony within the next couple of days."

Prince Rutherford shuddered. " If that were to happen, Zelda wouldn't let me hear the end of it."

" Perhaps we should postpone the Wing Ceremony?" Juniper asked as they both reached the top of the stairs that went down to the lower level. " I know that would be rather unorthodox considering the others taking part have been waiting all year for the ceremony but I am willing to speak to Horwell about it. He is presiding over the ceremony this year so any decision would need to be approved by him."

" No, that won't be necessary."

" You're willing to deal with your daughter's antics then?"

" She must remember that I am the headmaster of the academy and so I cannot be persuaded otherwise even if she is my daughter." Prince Rutherford answered. " I'm more than willing to be berated by her so the ceremony will continue as planned. Postponing it for such a trivial matter is nothing but foolishness and would ruin the reputation the academy has been known for. By the way, who else is participating in this year's ceremony?"

" Cawlin, Strich, and Groose, along with Link of course."

Princess Rutherford groaned upon hearing that. " I was hoping for more than just four but I suppose it's a testament to the difficulty one must endure if they plan on reaching knighthood without taking the easy path through life if you understand my meaning. I know there is a form of animosity that Groose displays towards Link but I never did understand why he would do such a thing when everyone is working towards the same goal of becoming knights."

" It's just childish rivalry."

" Perhaps, but I hope it doesn't cause any problems."

Walking down the stairs in front of Juniper, Prince Rutherford reached the bottom only to suddenly be surprised by someone who was waiting for him. Juniper recognized who it was and wisely stayed behind Rutherford who began pounding his chest. " Ah! Zelda! I do wish you would warn me when you appear out of nowhere." He had been so engrossed with talking about the ceremony that he didn't even notice her. " I wasn't expecting to see you here, my daughter."

To my surprise, Gloriosa Daisy was the one portraying this version of Zelda. Despite ultimately helping her to raise the money to save Camp Everfree and prevent it from being turned into a spa by Filthy Rich, she shouldn't have used Equestrian Magic in order to give us the best experience the camp had ever seen. I mean, I could understand that she was desperate and had good intentions, but to keep everyone in the dark proved to be her undoing. At least she understood the error of her ways though I doubted Gloriosa would want to be near any magic for quite some time after almost costing her everything.

A footnote revealed something particularly interesting about this incarnation of Zelda. It described her as being the earliest known incarnation and was the only one not born into royalty. That certainly made her unique and someone who was more relatable given her status as just a regular girl as opposed to being a princess who possessed divine powers. It also said that she was the reincarnation of Hylia though she didn't know it at the time. Well... That was disappointing but hardly not surprising as someone had to have started the trend of each Zelda possessing divine powers.

" I didn't mean to startle you, father." Gloriosa said.

" What are you doing here?" Prince Rutherford asked. " I thought you had plans with Link today?"

" I wanted to speak to you about something."

" If it has to do with postponing the Wing Ceremony, I'm afraid that I must put my foot down and say that it will continue as planned."

Gloriosa nodded. " I know that I've been bugging you to hold it off so that Link could get in some practice before the ceremony in a few days but I really do want him to be the winner this year as opposed to say someone like Groose."

" That is still no excuse to want the ceremony postponed, my dear."

" Which is why I wanted to ask if I could give Link some special training."

Prince Rutherford was caught off guard when Gloriosa said that. " I was expecting you to continue pressuring me into postponing the ceremony but this is a different matter. I am well aware that you want him to win given you two have been friends ever since you were children but I'm not sure if it would be a good idea for you to do that. The other students might protest which would only cause further headache in an already tense situation. Link knew ahead of time that the Wing Ceremony was coming up and he has had plenty of time to prepare himself so if he failed to pass the exam, he only has himself to blame."

" That's why I want to help him."

" But, Zelda..."

Gloriosa stomped her foot on the ground. " If Link doesn't win... I... I... I don't know what I will do."

" There is no need to panic, my dear."

" How can I when Link's very future is hanging in the balance."

" This is not the end of the world, Zelda." Prince Rutherford said. " Link has progressed far better than any of us expected but there comes a time when even the best and brightest reach a dead-end with their training. If Link were to fail to pass the exam, he can simply try again next year though he would have to re-learn everything. I know this isn't what you wanted me to say but to become a successful knight, he must be ever vigilant, never shirking his duties, and having a perfect bond with his Loftwing."

Gloriosa felt crestfallen yet realized that her father was correct. As much as it pained her, she knew that Link had been getting lax with his training resulting in her confidence in his abilities taking some emotional damage. While it was true that he could just try the exam again the next time it came around, she couldn't deal with the thought of him being behind while someone else moved on ahead, that one person in particular being Groose. To give him special treatment would be viewed as playing favourites which would be deemed an unfair advantage by the other students and would be forced to give them the same thing.

She was in quite the bind, but she knew there had to be a way to figure something out without making the situation worse. Thinking it over in her head, Gloriosa realized that giving direct training to Link would be her attempting to manipulate the ceremony but what if she merely gave him a couple of pointers instead? Or she could take him out for a flight around Skyloft using their respective Loftwings in hopes that he would get in some practice without her having to suggest anything. While the latter option came off as being manipulative in nature, Gloriosa was desperate to see him emerge victorious.

" I have a suggestion, father."

" You cann't give Link special training."

" What about some pointers?" Gloriosa asked. " I could give him a suggestion or two and hope that he would take the hint that he needs to prepare. That should be well within reason as he would be doing it all his own despite me having mentioned something. Or, I was thinking we could go out for a flight on our Loftwings and he would naturally feel the need to practice for the ceremony, again without me saying anything."

Prince Rutherford smiled. " You really do want him to succeed, don't you?"

Gloriosa nodded. " He will make a fine knight someday, father."

" Then you may give him a few pointers or go on a flight around Skyloft."

" Thank you, father."

" Remember not to do anything reckless."

" I won't."

As Gloriosa turned around and walked off, a cheerful demeanour exuding from both her body and her footsteps, Juniper walked up to Prince Rutherford and placed her hand on his shoulder, a concerned look on her face. " Are you are sure that was the right thing to do, headmaster Gaepora? I know she is very passionate about wanting Link to win the ceremony and move one step closer to knighthood, but I fear her actions, while honourable, will only cause Groose and the others to surely complain."

Prince Rutherford nodded. " It will be just fine, Owlan."

" How certain are you of that?"

" Very certain." Prince Rutherford answered. " Remember that Zelda has always looked out for Link ever since they were children. No matter what the situation, she would always watch him to ensure nothing bad ever happened. Deep down, I know he appreciates what she does. I also know that he looks out for her in his own way. I trust Zelda's judgment despite having some slight concern that she might overdo things a little."

" Guess we'll know in a few days when the Wing Ceremony takes place."

Walking outside of the Knight Academy, Gloriosa breathed the air so that she could take in the majestic beauty that was Skyloft. Hylians lived in a variety of homes that were located across the island yet other buildings, such as the Bazzar, housed a plethora of shops including a cafe where one could find all of their shopping needs or to sit down for a spell and have a drink before resuming their business. One shop was different in that it was mobile and thus moved around the island though some say it was difficult to reach unless you could get the attention of the one who owned it.

There was also a large outdoor foyer where Hylians could gather and hang out and was the most popular location in all of Skyloft. Next door to the academy was a Sparring Hall where knights could go to practice their swordsmanship skills though the facility also offered training for those who wanted to specialize in defensive measures. As Gloriosa made her way over to the foyer, she greeted everyone who passed her by, and when she got there, she came to a sudden stop when she heard the voice of a certain someone who made her feel very uncomfortable resulting in her cringing.

" Duh huh! Why hello there, Zelda."

" Oh! Groose... I wasn't expecting to see you here."

I didn't recognize who was portraying this Groose character so once more I turned to Princess Twilight's notes for clarification. According to what she wrote, the one portraying Groose was a pony by the name of Feather Bangs from Starlight Glimmer's old village but this was the human version. Her Highness had never met him so her knowledge stems from what she had been told about him from Big Macintosh--the pony version--who then told Applejack who then told Her Highness. When not experiencing nervousness, Feather Bangs proclaimed himself a real lady's man, relying on smooth talk, over-the-top theatrics, and more in order to stand out. He sounded like a stereotypical jock only with some humility given that it was a façade.

" Funny meeting you here." Feather Bangs said.

" The feeling isn't mutual."

" Oh, you're just saying that because you care, duh huh huhh."

Gloriosa felt like throwing up. " I'm surprised that you're not hanging out with Cawlin and Strich. Usually, the three of you are always getting into trouble in addition to giving Link a real hard time so seeing you on your caught me off guard."

Hearing the name Link made Feather Bangs angry resulting in his face turning red but he quickly calmed down upon seeing Gloriosa's face. " Well... I just wanted to have some time to myself without needing them two around. I was thinking of going to the bazzar and was just about to when I noticed you walking by and so I decided to walk on over and see what you were doing." The expression on his face made Gloriosa uneasy but she recognized that look from anywhere. " Since you're here and all, Zelda, would you... you know..."

" I'd love to, Groose, but I'm much too busy right now."

" Awww... Don't be like that."

" I'm serious."

" Duh huh! Oh I'm being serious too."

Gloriosa suddenly waggled her finger in front of Feather Bangs' face much to his surprise. " Listen, Groose! You do know that the Wing Ceremony is coming up in a few days, right? I hope you and your friends have been training because otherwise you might not win and you'll have to go through the training all over again."

Feather Bangs laughed in response. " Hah! Of course I'm ready for it! Me and the boys have been practicing for weeks."

" Is that a fact?"

" Why would I ever lie to you, Zelda?"

" From what I've been seeing from you three as of late, you've been neglecting your training and instead have been picking on Link again."

Again, hearing that name made Feather Bangs angry though this time he wasn't able to calm down as quickly. " Why bother talking about him when he's not even here? It's not like he'll ever amount to anything unlike the two of us." His face went back to normal only for steam to come spurting out of his nose which Gloriosa didn't notice. " Heh... Come to think of it, I heard you were the one who'll be giving out the prize at the end of the ceremony this year. I've gotta extra incentive to win for sure and receive it from you. I can imagine us both right now on top of the statue."

Gloriosa then elbowed Groose in the stomach. " Would you please focus and not daydream about your fantasies."

" You're cute when you're angry." Feather Bangs said, ignoring the pain coming from his stomach. " But seriously, me and the boys are prepared for the exam and even though those guys will do their best, they know that I'll be the one crossing that finish line first."

" Let's see if that gusto is more than just that."

" So how about we go somewhere together?"

" I'm afraid that I'll be seeing Link presently." Gloriosa answered. " He and I have been planning our little get-together for over a month but I'm going to surprise him with something he definitely won't be expecting. Hopefully, it will give him an incentive to do his best at the exam. But, I think I will pay a visit to the bazzar myself before seeing Link. I've been meaning to check something there for a while now and I do have enough rupees. Anyway, I'll see you later Groose. Say hello to Cawlin and Strich for me whenever you get the opportunity."

As Gloriosa walked off towards the Bazzar, Feather Fangs stood there in complete silence until he snapped and began stomping the ground. " Link, Link, LINK!!!! What in the world does she see in that loser anyway? He's nothing but a rank amateur who doesn't even understand the first thing about flying his bird. Speaking of which... I just came up with a brilliant idea worthy of my genius, and I'm the smartest there is at the academy. Duh huh huhh! It'll be easy getting Cawlin and Strich on board but it won't be easy finding where it flies off to. In any case, I'll make sure Link never gets a chance to race."

Wow... I never thought I would actually despise one of these characters other than Ganondorf, but Groose had just become the second to be given that distinction. Everything about him makes me annoyed and yet, he reminded me of how I used to act when I didn't understand friendship. He wasn't necessarily evil but rather he was just a bully who was jealous of the Link of this era all because he--Link--had something Groose could never have. Good thing Zelda constantly put him in his place as a means of keeping him in check but it seemed like her efforts were in vain as Groose continued to be nothing but a massive headache for Link.

It says here that Groose and his friends captured Link's Loftwing, a Crimson Loftwing, seen as one of if not the most rare version of their kind, and managed to imprison it behind some wooden planks in their bid to prevent him from taking part in the Wing Ceremony which took place a few days later. Fortunately, with Zelda's help along with another student at the academy who had been threatened into keeping quiet due to accidentally discovering what happened, Link managed to find his partner and was able to take part in the exam. Fortunately, Zelda was able to give him some pointers before this problem happened and he was raring to go.

The exam consisted of collecting a special trinket from another Loftwing with the first to do so being declared the winner. Aside from no cheating, the race itself was fairly simple and would usually last no longer than ten minutes. In the academy's entire history, there had never been a year where no student was able to claim the trinket, a small statue of a Loftwing of little value financially but worth a lot in terms of personal achievement. Despite how simplistic it was in concept, the exam proved a real challenge as one needed to be in perfect sync with their partner--Loftwing--or else you would fail.

Despite him and his cronies trying everything in their power to prevent him from winning, Link was successfully able to complete his exam. By winning, he moved one step closer to achieving knighthood in addition to earning the prize, a Sailcloth, a replica of the one that Hylia made for her champion during the Ancient Battle against Demise. Unfortunately, things would turn dire after the ceremony was finished. While flying around Skyloft with Link, a tornado of unnatural properties came out of nowhere, and abducted Zelda, dragging her down to the Surface prompting Link into going after her. He would soon discover that this had all been preordained along with his destiny as Hylia's champion.

I stopped reading as the story would lead into events that covered a video game in the series referred to as "Skyward Sword." As much as I wanted to keep on reading in order to find out what happened to those who were involved in the renewed conflict against Demise, I felt that I learned enough about the ancient past and felt keen on looking at something that occurred most recently in the timeline. Then I remembered that this edition of the Hyrule Historia had a new chapter which historians claimed took place at the end of one of the timelines though they don't know which one it was and continue to debate it even now.

Unlike the other chapters which had been given some alterations aimed at correcting certain inconsistencies noted in the previous edition, this one was completely fresh so the chances of me running into something inconsistent with earlier sections of the Hyrule Historia was really high. But, before I delver into this new content, I needed to take a break as reading all that about Skyloft and the Ancient Battle had worn me out. I think after reading this next chapter, I will stop reading the book completely. While it would mean ignoring certain events, I could only take so much before it became too much.

Bonus Chapter 4: Before the Calamity

View Online

Author's Notes:

Sunset learns quite a bit about a new addition to the Legend of Zelda lore including the surprise presence of the one who changed her life.

Cast appearing in this chapter.

Sunset Shimmer - Narrator
Mage Meadowbrook - Mipha, Champion of the Zoras
Dragon Lord Torch - Daruk, Champion of the Gorons
Dr. Caballeron - Revali, Champion of the Rito
Somnambula - Urboa, Champion of the Gerudo
Igneous Rock Pie - King of Hyrule
Lyra Heartstrings - Sheikah
Bon Bon - Sheikah
Sassy Saddles - Gerudo Chieftain
Micro Chips - Sidon
Canter Zoom - King Dorephan

Guest - Ganondorf - Himself

The Legend of Sunset Shimmer: Majora's Mask
By Ganondorf8
December 11, 2017
Bonus Chapter 4: Before the Calamity.

Note: Normally, I don't do something like this before the chapter begins, but I felt it necessary to do so now because of recent events. I'm aware that "The Champions Ballad" DLC for The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild was recently released and that certain events portrayed in it won't match up with what is seen here. That's because I wrote this before the DLC content became known to me so do not inform me of any inconsistencies.

Most people wouldn't take the contents within a book about a video game series as a serious issue, but then those same people didn't experience what I had been through by being forced into becoming a part of this video game. If Ganondorf had never brought me into that first adventure, I would've viewed the contents of the Hyrule Historia as nothing more than a fantasy epic designed to be engaging and appeal to diehard fans--like Rainbow Dash for instance. For me, the opposite was true and I saw it as a window into a world whose very existence had become integrated with my own being against my own free will.

Each story I read exposed me to a world whose history had been stained with conflict ever since it was first created by the Great Goddesses. Despite their good intentions, they had systematically brought about the destruction of their creation simply because greed and the desire for power proved too much for people, resulting in them going to extreme lengths to lay their hands on the Triforce, that which had been left behind by the Goddesses out of a sense of giving them hope. Despite measures being created to prevent anyone from acquiring it, it only took one person to effectively change everything. That one person being Ganondorf, who succeeded where others had failed, and claimed it.

By all accounts, the fact that he succeeded was due to an unfortunate accident, but the fact of the matter is that he acquired the Triforce and used it to plunge Hyrule into a period of darkness where he ruled unopposed until a chosen few succeeded in banishing him. Many would call that an adventure of a lifetime, a classic struggle between good and evil, yet I saw it as the beginning of the end as something was bound to go wrong eventually. I had already read about such instances where Ganondorf escaped from his imprisonment, to having survived his own execution only to be banished, but these were nothing compared to what was to come.

My examples weren't part of the same timeline but rather from branching timelines which resulted from the actions at the end of Ocarina of Time--the book referred to such an event as the Imprisoning War. Three paths were created upon the conclusion of this war with each leading down a path where it seemed like peace would prevail only to result in darkness consuming everything. Ganondorf was the source behind the darkness though his actions alone didn't bring about destruction. No, the problems were already in place and he merely added to them. I remembered reading about events from two paths so as I sat down and opened the book, I needed to look at the third path.

Before looking at the new chapter which had been added to this edition of the Hyrule Historia, I decided to briefly look at a chapter that was dedicated to the aftermath of the events that occurred at the end of Ocarina of Time from each timeline. I ignored the first two paths as I had knowledge of them--I wished I had learned more but I could only handle so much before getting overwhelmed--so I focused on the third one. This path initially was identical with the one which lead to Hyrule eventually being flooded yet the change occurred during the final battle where a different result happened.

Instead of the Hero of Time defeating Ganondorf in battle, the Dark Lord proved too powerful and instead defeating the Hero, killing him in cold blood. Historians weren't sure how this could have happened but it did and proved to be the beginning of a time known as the "Great Downfall." With the Hero's death, Ganondorf claimed the Triforce of Courage, strengthening his own power yet he still needed the remaining piece. Upon discovering what happened, Princess Zelda sought to shatter her piece, the Triforce of Wisdom, but she was prevented and Ganondorf forced her into relinquishing it.

With all three pieces in his possession, Ganondorf now had complete mastery of the world and no one could oppose him. It was around this time where he chose to abandon his human identity and became Ganon, a demonic monster who resembled a pig--I couldn't believe that was true until I saw an image of what he had become--whose power had spiraled out of control, yet there was a plan to deal with him. Princess Zelda and the Six Sages used their power and banished him to the Sacred Realm thus preventing him from dominating Hyrule, yet this had an unfortunate consequence which became apparent soon enough.

By banishing him, Ganondorf took the Triforce, thus taking away the light and hope of Hyrule. The Sacred Realm became corrupted with darkness as a result of Ganondorf's evil heart until it had become the Dark World, a twisted landscape where evil roamed freely. Many sought to come to this place in hopes of securing the Triforce out of greed for wanting their desires to come true but never returned. Some either were killed by the Demon King or were trapped and eventually became monsters who couldn't go back to their world and became part of a demonic army under Ganondorf's command.

This army grew both in size and power and would eventually attempt to pour through the barrier between the Dark World and Hyrule some centuries later but it was thwarted by the actions of the King of Hyrule of that time. The descendants of the Seven Sages, who had inherited their power from their ancestors, had been commanded to close the barrier though it took some time as such an incantation proved difficult to created. They were protected by the Knights of Hyrule who served as a frontline against Ganondorf's forces, yet were decimated as a result, leaving only a few surviving the conflict.

Despite Hyrule coming out of the struggle, much of the kingdom had been devastated, and not only had the power of the Sages been diminished, many people lost their lives. What had once been a beautiful kingdom had become a pale shadow, a wounded land that would take centuries to recover assuming that it could. While there had been other conflicts which resulted in Hyrule being devastated throughout the ages, this one was seen as one of the worst ones. Had I been sent into that conflict by Ganondorf, I would have lost my mind due to seeing so much pain and misery, but instead he went with something more personal to him.

Flipping back to the table of contents, I looked up the new chapter--I felt I had learned enough of the Great Downfall--and turned straight to the first page of it where I was presented with an image of what looked like Ganondorf's demonic form, Ganon, only much more hideous than before. At first, I turned away from the image as it honestly scared the living daylights out of me, but I eventually turned back and gazed upon what he had become. Having all that power must have resulted in him giving up what little of his humanity he had left and full embraced the demonic monster he had become.

The beginning of the chapter stated that historians had no idea when the events of this chapter took place as far as the timeline was concerned and encouraged readers to keep that in mind to avoid getting confused. According to the book, 10,000 years ago, a being known as Calamity Ganon appeared and began ravaging the kingdom of Hyrule, destroying everything in its path. 10,000 years!? It sounded like a typo but it wasn't so would this have occurred just after the events of Ocarina of Time? If so then there were questions that immediately would debunk certain theories yet I chose to keep going in case an explanation came up.

Calamity Ganon was a primal evil who had existed throughout Hyrule as long as anyone could remember though some say that he used to be a member of the Gerudo tribe before becoming the abomination as seen in the image above--at least they established that this creature was Ganondorf to some degree. Many had tried destroying this primal evil in hopes it would never return yet their efforts proved fruitless. Knowing something had to be done to prevent further destruction, the Sheikah, the eternals servants of the Hyrule Royal Family, invoked a plan they had been preparing for just such an occasion.

Ever since the beginning when Goddess Hylia ruled over the land before it became Hyrule, the Sheikah had been known for both their longevity and for being more advanced than the other tribes when it came to technology. This was evident when representatives of the "Shadow Folk", a nickname associated to them by the common folk, presented to the King of Hyrule a means of containing Ganon. Their plan involved the use of ancient machinery that could combat Ganon known as Guardians, sentient beings aimed at assisting Princess Zelda, who chose to stand against the evil which plagued Hyrule, and a chosen hero of great merit, but convincing the King wasn't easy.

" How certain are you that these Guardians, as you call them, will be sufficient enough?"

" They will be built using the finest parts along with skills passed down by the Sheikah since ancient times."

" You must admit that I question your abilities."

" Please say you are not doubting us, Your Majesty?"

" While I will not deny that the Sheikah are far more advanced than the other tribes, the fact that you claim you can build hundreds of these Guardians has me not only wondering how you intend on pulling it off, but also that your efforts will be for Hyrule's benefit. Suffice to say, I am not convinced that this plan will defeat Ganon. He is an ancient evil who has festered throughout this land for centuries. No one, not even the Sages have been able to find a means of defeating him which is why I feel your idea may merely bide us some time."

" But, we do have the means of defeating him."

" These Guardians alone will not be enough."

" This is true which is why we also have an additional means to our plan. The Guardians are merely sentries that will be designed to attack Ganon relentlessly and if they are to be destroyed by the demon, more can be built as they are simple in structure though there will be some variety. We shall also create four fortresses that shall serve as the centerpiece for this army of ours and shall prove instrumental."

" Again, I am not convinced by this."

It didn't take long for me to recognize who was portraying who here. The two representatives were being portrayed by both Lyra Heartstrings and Bon Bon respectively--I wasn't surprised as those two were practically inseparable--though they did look pretty weird dressed in Sheikah garb. Even though I've only interacted with them a few times, Lyra and Bon Bon were the perfect example of what friendship could do for someone. But, there were times when they clearly went overboard especially when it came to competition. I didn't see it happen but I heard about their misadventure regarding their audition for the Wondercolts during the Friendship Games.

Those two could seriously give Pinkie Pie some serious competition given how they defied reality with their antics but Pinkie could pull stuff out from anywhere not to mention she had been defying reality for as long as anyone could remember. It took me a while, however, to recognize who was portraying this King of Hyrule, and it was ironic that I was thinking of Pinkie as her own father was portraying the King. Igneous Rock Pie wasn't who I could call an emotional person given that he maintained a calm aura--how he never lost his sanity resulting from the ridiculous antics of his own daughter was impeccable--but his stoic personality was well known in Canterlot.

I had only met him on a couple of occasions--namely when he told Pinkie to tone it down with her parties--but because he always left such an impact, my friends and I often wondered how any of the Pie family related to Pinkie. None of us doubted she was adopted so perhaps she truly was a unique spirit within the Pie family clan whose spirit was at times too much for them to handle though they would never admit it to anyone. Anyway, Lyra and Bon Bon then presented a scroll to Igneous who unfurled it, and gazed upon the designs of not only the Guardians, but the four fortresses. His expression remained adamant though he showed signs of being curious.

" So... This is what you propose to me?" Igneous Rock asked.

Lyra nodded. " Yes, Your Majesty. We of the Sheikah believe this is our best bet to destroy Calamity Ganon."

Bon Bon then added her thoughts. " As you can see, Your Majesty, the four fortresses shall be armed with numerous offensive and defensive capabilities designed for them to be able to go toe-to-toe against Ganon. Each one will also have its own unique abilities that will make them even more of a force to be reckoned with. The Guardians themselves, as Lyra stated, are sentries who shall provide assistance to the fortresses."

" And how much will this cost?"

" We've figured out a means."

Igneous Rock then gazed upon Bon Bon, the expression on his face made her feel incredibly uncomfortable. " I am glad that you did otherwise I would have refused your request without a second thought. Defeating Ganon is important and I am aware that money is not everything, but this may not be what the other tribes feel and in turn they could protest by saying that your idea could potentially result in Hyrule falling into bankruptcy."

" We have taken all of that into consideration."

Lyra nodded. " We have asked all of the tribes to contribute to the construction of the Guardians and the fortresses though they initially expressed skepticism." She then pointed to the images of the Guardians. " It has been decided that the Sheikah and the Hylians will construct each Guardian." Igneous Rock then raised an eyebrow prompting Lyra to look away momentarily before pointing her finger at an image of a fortress which resembled a elephant. " We shall do most of the work while the Hylians will provide assistance and even be in charge of some projects. All tribes, however, will be working together on creating the four fortresses."

" Ganon's threat to our land must be dealt with but would my people agree to this?"

" The alternative is to be destroyed. " Bon Bon answered. " I know that doesn't sound very pleasant but they know what's at stake right now. Your Majesty, we must do something about Calamity Ganon before he decimates all of Hyrule and leaves nothing but charred remains. The people will surely agree to our idea of building the Guardians and the four fortresses to help defend us against that accursed monster."

Igneous Rock looked at the designs on the scroll and immediately had concerns. Where would the Sheikah acquire the necessary material to build so many Guardians? Hyrule was rich with resources but there was only so much that could be used before it would run out. These were nothing compared with the fortresses given they were much larger in scope as dictated by their size. Again, he questioned how the Sheikah could do all of this. That's when he noticed additional details that initially escaped him located to the left of each image. According to the image, the fortresses required living operators as opposed to being self-reliant like the Guardians.

" Will the Guardians be under our control?"

Lyra nodded slightly before raising her finger. " Well... I wouldn't say it like that. They are self-sufficient in that they function on their own though they are programmed in advance to carry out whatever task is given to them. Once their current task is complete, the Guardians will remain inactive until another command is given." Her heart began beating when she noticed what Igneous Rock was really looking at, the images of the fortresses, and she knew this would be the hardest part of their pitch. " As for the four fortresses... They are far too complex to be allowed to function on their own so a pilot is necessary to operate them."

" It would require many individuals."

" Not necessarily."

" The fortresses can be operated with one person at the controls." Bon Bon said.

Igneous Rock seemed skeptical. " I must admit that I am curious as to how these fortresses will function but I am not convinced that your plan will succeed. For one thing, you have not discussed how you plan on acquiring the necessary materials needed for all of these machines. Second, these actions could pose a threat to the Royal Family were the Sheikah to suddenly decide that they could govern Hyrule much better than I."

Bon Bon took offence to that. " Your Majesty! We Sheikah would never betray you!"

" Perhaps not but your recent technological advances have raised questions."

" And you see that as a cause for concern?"

Igneous Rock nodded. " While the Sheikah have remained loyal to the Royal Family for countless centuries, the fact that you have been advancing far beyond what I would describe as acceptable boundaries has given me cause to be worried that you have ulterior motives." His eyes suddenly opened wide upon seeing two additional images on the scroll that he hadn't noticed before due to focusing on the Guardians and fortresses. " It seems my concerns have merit seeing as you have been deceiving me, Lyra, Bon Bon. Why did you not mention the fact that my own daughter, Zelda, is playing a significant part in this plan of yours?"

" She insisted we not mention it." Lyra answered, gulping."

" Her Highness wishes to help defeat Ganon." Bon Bon said.

" While I am aware that Zelda possesses the same divine power that her ancestors have passed down through our family since the earliest records dictate, I cannot allow her to risk her life against the likes of Ganon even if she believes she can make a difference." Igneous Rock said.

According to a footnote, it says that ever since the Goddess Hylia reincarnated into the earliest known incarnation of Zelda, her divine power had passed through the Royal Family though it only passed down from mother to child. Not once has it ever been passed down to any son thus the princes never possessed any special abilities. But, they were known to rely on their sisters when necessary though some princes felt inadequate knowing they could never possess divine power. I'm surprised that after so many millennia, Hylia's power had never once waned despite other changes happening throughout Hyrule over the same time period.

It also reaffirmed that the power was passed down to the oldest daughter assuming that a king and queen had more than one girl and that the first born girl would be named Zelda in honour of the first incarnation. However, only a certain number of incarnations possessed the Triforce of Wisdom, implying that these versions of Zelda played much larger roles within the overall narrative as opposed to simply being given divine power as a result of their heritage. If I remembered correctly, it wasn't until Ganondorf's rise to power when the Triforce of Wisdom became integrated within the Royal Family of Hyrule through Zelda when that Zelda ended up acquiring it.

Bon Bon protested. " But, Her Highness possesses the Triforce of Wisdom. That alone should be enough to convince you that she must help defeat Ganon. The one who possesses the Triforce of Courage is already on board and with our machines, they shall have both the protection and the assistance needed to overcome the evil that plagues our fair kingdom. As the king, you alone have the final say."

Igneous Rock knew that he was defeated when it came to the safety of his daughter. If not for the Triforce of Wisdom, he could have easily forbade her to get involved in the conflict, but he knew she had to confront the Demon King. Only those with the golden power could oppose another who possessed it thus the reason why some historians claimed that being bound by the Triforce were deemed cursed by it until they died or willingly gave it up. Knowing that Zelda would never consider the latter, he sighed and nodded his approval of the plan, and yet he had one condition which the Sheikah would have to agree on.

" Very well... I approve of your plan."

" Thank you."

Lyra jumped for joy. " You have made a wise decision this day, Your Majesty."

" However, there is a condition that you must meet."

" What is it?"

Igneous Rock paused before answering her question. " In order for me to approve of your plan, the Sheikah must be divided from one large tribe into several smaller groups and are to be scattered across the kingdom where they will be forbidden to unite together into one tribe again. This is to ensure that you do not become too powerful that you plan on overthrowing me and assuming control of Hyrule. I know your loyalty towards me is strong but this must be done otherwise my approval such be rescinded."

Lyra and Bon Bon both looked at each other before bowing. " We accept your condition."

" Excellent."

" Our people shall be made aware of your decision."

" Now... What shall we call these fortresses?" Igneous Rock asked. " They cannot simply be called as such because it would be disrespectful so perhaps something that has a strong connection with each of the tribes? Yes, I believe that is the right course of action to take."

" Our plan was to have a member from each tribe pilot one of the fortresses." Lyra said.

" Will it be a difficult task?"

Bon Bon shook her head. " It will take them some time to get used to them but they will be able to control them as though they were an extension of themselves. Each fortress will also focus on a particular element that is native to the tribes of Hyrule thus the stronger connection. For example, the one in the shape of the tusked creature shall represent water, the element known well by the Zoras so one of them shall pilot it."

" How long will it take?"

" I would say a couple of months."

Igneous Rock looked outside of the window and saw a shadow image of Ganon himself resonating from a section Hyrule which had become forbidden territory due to it being the place where he had proclaimed it his domain. " The Demon King's power continues to grow with every passing day. You must complete the construction of the Guardians and those fortresses within three weeks at the most. The Sages have so far managed to contain him within the land he has corrupted with his foul mien but they cannot continue this forever. You may use whatever resources you need to complete your machines but it must be done quickly."

" It shall be done."

" You have our word." Lyra said.

Together with mainly the assistance of the Hylians with the other tribes contributing in their own way, the Sheikah were able to create hundreds if not thousands of Guardians along with the four fortresses. A pilot was chosen from each tribe: Zora, Goron, Rito, and Gerudo, and together with both Princess Zelda and the chosen hero, were successful in banishing Ganon by sealing him beneath Hyrule Castle where he remained dormant for close to 10,000 years. Already, I was confused as though the chapter had suddenly skipped over important information but I quickly learned that said information could be found in the form of footnotes and references to other chapters.

The Guardians themselves were simple machines though compared to other Hyrulean technology, they were in a class of their own. Variations included Guardian Skywatchers, who could attack targets from below if their scanners detected enemies during flight, Guardian Turrets, immobile but capable of firing powerful lasers that covered a lengthy distance that served as a last line of defence, Guardian Scouts, who could equip different armaments and whose power increased with each model, and finally, the Guardian Stalkers, the main one which walked about on spider-like legs and could fire lasers from a single eye.

Impressive as these were, they were nothing compared to the Divine Beasts, the four fortresses that served as the main attack force against Ganon. Each one represented an element that, in turn, were piloted by an individual from a tribe whose element resonated with them, and were based on an animal that once existed. The first, Ruta, the elephant, was powered by water, could adjust its trunk accordingly to maximize its abilities, use the water to power a waterwheel inside its body, and was named after Princess Ruto of the Zoras. Rudania, the salamander, was powered by fire and could move about the most treacherous of terrain using its legs.

While some historians disagreed on the classification, most said that Rudania was an anagram of Darunia, the legendary Goron chieftain and Sage of Fire. Next was Medoh, the eagle, the only Divine Beast capable of flight, and was powered by wind. It used a force field to protect itself from attacks. Its wings could be tilted from side to side to further increase its mobility but also re-orients its interior. Unlike the other Divine Beasts, Medoh's namesake has not been fully confirmed by historians, though they claim it was named after Medli, the Sage of Earth, who lived during the time where Hyrule was flooded by water after the Great Goddesses intervened.

Finally, there was Naboris, the camel, who was powered by thunder. The humps on its back were lightning generators that it could use to protect itself from attacks though its feet were deemed its one weak point and could potentially shut it down. Fortunately, it could use electrical shocks to protect its feet by striking the ground. This beast was named after Nabooru, the second-in-command of the Gerudo who became the Sage of Spirit after being brainwashed by Ganondorf's surrogate mothers. Each beast was piloted by a member of the respective tribe they representated though it took them some time to get used to operating such advanced technology.

Once Ganon had been defeated, there was no longer any need for the Guardians or the Divine Beasts, and so they were all buried where they became stories passed down throughout the ages, their locations forgotten by the ravages of time. This would remain so until one day, close to 10,000 years after the Demon King's imprisonment, when a prophecy predicted his return yet only the Royal Family were aware. Ganon, or rather, Calamity Ganon--I really should call this version by his proper name--had become a fairy tale passed down through millenia so the people didn't believe such a beast even existed.

The prophecy was first recognized by King Rhoam, the King of Hyrule during this time period. He took it very seriously and commanded both his people and the Sheikah to search and excavate large swaths of land in hopes of finding an answer. It came in the form of unearthing the Guardians and the Divine Beasts though they had no idea how either worked resulting in hastened research designed to uncover the secrets lost to the ages before Calamity Ganon would return. A representative from each tribe was chosen to command a Divine Beast and trained to use it for when the time came though it proved challenging.

From Goron City, Daruk, known throughout his tribe as the strongest of Gorons, was chosen to pilot Rudania, and from the Rito Village, Revali, known as the best marksman who had ever graced the skies, piloted Medoh. The Gerudo chose their pilot for Naboris, Urbosa, known for her exquisite beauty though historians weren't sure what her status was amongst her people yet some claimed she was a mighty warrior while other claimed she was the leader. Finally, the Zora's champion was Mipha though she was different in that she chose to become the pilot of Ruta as opposed to being chosen by her people.

" You did what, Mipha!?"

" I have decided to become the pilot of Divine Beast Vah Ruta."

" Father will never allow you to do it."

" As much as I respect our father, this is something that I must do in the name of the Zoras and Hyrule."

" Mipha, you know full well that father wishes for you to succeed him as ruler of our people when his time comes, so to make such a reckless decision is beyond unthinkable. If I were the older between the both of us, I would be the one to assume the throne and not you."

" It couldn't be helped, Sidon."

" And what about Muzu? He will be devastated to learn of your decision."

" Have I become so delicate that I must be coddled by both my father, and my teacher?"

" I'm not saying that, sister."

" You know better than anyone, my dear little brother, that I have been training in the art of combat under Muzu's guidance. As such, I am more than capable of taking care of myself though my heart does not yearn for fighting unlike many of the others. Were Calamity Ganon's threat nothing but a rumour, I would not have made my decision without consulting our father, but the matter has gone beyond the need for talking."

I once again stopped as I recognized one character but not the other. Micro Chips was portraying who I assumed was the prince of the Zoras, Sidon, though I will admit that the glasses didn't really work well on a Zora. At Canterlot High, he was always hanging out with Sandalwood as both compliment one another though at times he got frustrated when people didn't take his love of mathematics seriously or poked fun at him for it. I had no intention of questioning his intellect of a sense of not wanting to be insulting but I would call him the third smartest student at CHS behind Twilight Sparkle and myself.

The one who was Mipha is who I didn't recognize so I turned to Princess Twilight's notes in my magic journal for the answers. Looking at the physical features of Mipha, she was being portrayed by Mage Meadowbrook, one of the "Pillars of Equestria", who saved Equestria from the Pony of Shadows. She was known for being a healer who wore a special mask that prevented her from contracting any diseases--it looked like a plague-doctor's mask--her patients had and by using what her mother taught her, she saved entire towns from diseases but soon disappeared when she was tasked with joining a group that aimed to defend Equestria from evil forces.

Her mask became the artefact that represented her when the Pony of Shadows was banished from Equestria and when she disappeared, it was returned to her family who had since passed it down from generation to generation until it was used to bring her back along with the other pillars. I doubted Meadowbrook would want to wear it again after so long--time wasn't very kind to her mask judging from the picture Princess Twilight took of it--and most likely desired her descendants to keep it as a memento even though she now existed amongst them again after being gone for a millenium.

Meadowbrook reached behind her back and resting on a ledge was a beautifully crafted trident which could have only been forged by a master smith. " Dento forged this for me despite his own hesitation towards me becoming a fighter given my gentle nature." Grabbing it, she turned around to face Micro Chips who gazed upon the weapon with such curiosity that Meadowbrook couldn't help but smile. " Such a curious nature for one so young as you, my little brother, Sidon. You know, I sometimes question my reasoning for wanting to be taught the ways of war. The male Zoras within our tribe love going out to battle against the monsters who plague our domain but battle is no love of mine."

Micro Chips grinned sheepishly. " It's because you love that Hylian man."

" Oh!" Meadowbrook exclaimed as she suddenly blushed. " Have you been reading my diary again, Sidon?"

" Everyone in Zora's Domain knows that you are in love with him."

" Even father?"

" Yes."

" I suppose I am not being very subtle with my feelings, am I not?"

Micro Chips shook his head. " No one is questioning your feelings, sister, but some think that you should settle down with a Zora as opposed to a Hylian. I don't really understand why you are so interested in this particular Hylian as they're all the same aren't they?"

" This Hylian is different."

" How so?"

Placing her trident on the ground, Meadowbrook clasped her hands together and looked up at the sunset above them. " When he first came here to Zora's Domain many years ago with his father, who was part of King Rhoam's entourage, I was able to lay my eyes on him. I cannot explain why but I felt a kindred spirit between us which compelled me to want to know him a lot more and maybe become his friend." She closed her eyes and the thought of the Hylian began playing in her mind. " It took me some time to talk with him because of how nervous I can be around others unfamiliar to me but around him, I felt comfortable, completely at ease."

" I heard from father that he has been assigned to be Princess Zelda's bodyguard."

" If this is true then I am happy for him."

" Father also says that he now wields the blade of evil's bane."

Meadowbrook was familiar with the legends passed down in Hyrule as a result of her training including that of the Master Sword, yet her heart ached upon knowing that the man she secretly loved had been chosen to wield it. She knew that those who were chosen to wield that blade ended up fighting against great evil, their lives hanging in the balance as they didn't know if they would live to see the next sunrise, their actions determining the fate of Hyrule, yet she wished the Hylian she cared about had not been given such a huge responsibility. Convincing him was pointless as the idea of going into battle would be something he could never ignore.

" Sidon... When did he grow up so quickly?"

" Did you forget that we Zoras age at a slower pace than the Hylians?"

" Yes... That did slip my mind."

" Other than those Sheikah, no other tribe has such longevity like we do."

" Are you suggesting that I could never love him because of our long life?"

Micro Chips shook his head. " No... I don't see that as a problem though some amongst our kind and his would find it questionable. I think he might be interested in the princess though he hasn't made any advances yet towards her."

Meadowbrook's jaw dropped. " How would you know about that?" Micro Chips suddenly went silent and she immediately knew that he was hiding something from her. But, instead of making him confess, she merely shrugged it off though she admitted in her mind that he was correct. " Perhaps it is not too late to express my feelings to him. After all, I have gone and prepared our most sacred of armours for his use whenever he has need of it."

" You crafted him Zora Armour?"

" I did."

" You do know what that means in our society don't you?"

" I do."

" Then I guess you really do have feelings for him." Micro Chips said. " Huh... I always thought you two were close because of how long you've known each other but I didn't think you would go as far as to craft that armour. Maybe you'll get lucky and Princess Zelda doesn't reciprocate any feelings towards him. Sure, the warriors won't be happy about it as some of them wish to be your betrothed but I know you better than anyone, Mipha, except for our father of course. Once and idea is in your head, no one can change it."

Meadowbrook smiled. " Thank you for understanding, Sidon."

I had a suspicion that the one Meadowbrook and Micro Chips were talking about was the incarnation of Link who existed when these events were occurring. While I thought it was touching how she truly loved him, it felt like a one-sided affair more than anything else since he hadn't said anything about it. I was curious as to Meadowbrook--Mipha--and Link first met and how their friendship blossomed but I needed to continue on with the story. Having chosen herself as Ruta's pilot, Meadowbrook revealed her decision days later in Zora's Domain before her father much to his and everyone else's surprise. What I was surprised with was how he was so massive in size compared to everyone else.

He was not named King Zora but rather King Dorephan, a break in tradition if I ever saw one, and I immediately recognized him as Canter Zoom, the famous movie director and the uncle of Juniper Montage. Despite having a friendly attitude, Canter could easily loose his sanity whenever anything went wrong during a movie production. People in his line of work were known to possess high levels of stress and he definitely had that in spades but he was also firm when it came to putting business ahead of family. Still, he was huge, a testament to how Zoras could grow as a species.

" No... I cannot allow you to pilot such a machine." Canter Zoom said.

" Of all the Zora in our kingdom, I am the only one who is capable of piloting it."

" Nonsense!" Canter Zoom said. " There are plenty of Zora who can perform such a task."

Meadowbrook shook her head. " Father... I have a very strong connection with Ruta. I can hear it calling out to me in my dreams, telling me that I am the one who is destined to become its pilot and use it when Calamity Ganon returns to cover our world in darkness just like it had done in ancient times."

This time, Canter Zoom shook his head. " To be honest, Mipha, I am still hesitant to believe what King Rhoam said about Calamity Ganon's return. While I do not believe that he would lie to me otherwise he wouldn't be excavating these Guardians and Divine Beasts, but what if the ancient horror does not return? Would you be marching out into battle for no reason? Can you even control such an ancient mechanism whose origins date back countless millenia? No, I could never let you, she who shall succeed me as ruler of all Zoras, risk your life against a threat that may not even come to pass."

" Father..." Meadowbrook began. " You know that it must be me because I possess a special gift."

" Yes, your ability to heal wounds, a rare gift amongst Zora."

" And besides, Princess Zelda has been personally studying the Divine Beasts."

Canter Zoom lurched forward upon hearing that and almost fell off of his throne. " What!? Princess Zelda has been researching these ancient machines? Well, I suppose that does mean that you would be able to control this Vah Ruta, but it doesn't change the fact that you would be placing yourself in great danger." He lurched back and adjusted himself before continuing, his subjects breathing a sigh of relief. " Tell me, Mipha. What did Princess Zelda discover about this beast?"

" The orbs located on Divine Beast Vah Ruta's shoulders are special mechanisms which allow it to control the water it generates." Meadowbrook answered. " The beast is powered by water and can use its appendage to unleash an infinite amount of water. It is truly a remarkable sight, father, a testament to those who created it, and it can even use water on itself in order to power additional mechanisms within."

" To be able to generate unlimited water is unbelievable."

" It requires one with incredible willpower to pilot it successfully."

" And you believe yourself to be that one?"

Meadowbrook nodded. " I do, father. My ability to heal wounds resonated with the Divine Beast when I first laid my hands upon it when King Rhoam presented it to us. I believe it to be a sign that I am destined to pilot it against Calamity Ganon, and, it would also allow me to keep watch over him."

Canter Zoom smirked. " Ah... So you have an ulterior motive do you not?"

Meadowbrook blushed. " Um... That is to say..."

Raising his hand, Canter Zoom brought everyone in attendance to attention. " Even though it goes against my own judgment as a father, I shall permit you to become the pilot though you must ensure me that you shall be the utmost careful." His announcement sent shocks of gasps amongst the Zoras but again, Canter raised his hand, and they went silent. " I know that my decision comes as a shock but I realize that Mipha is the only one amongst us who can control this Divine Beast."

One Zora then protested. " You cannot have her do this, Your Majesty."

" Do you see any other way?"

" These Divine Beasts will be the end of us all!"

" I understand your concern given that they are foreign in design but they are our best bet against Calamity Ganon."

" We don't even know if it exists."

Another Zora added. " King Rhoam, with all due respect to him, must be crazy to believe in such a legend."

A third Zora then made their point heard. " We've known peace for countless ages so what makes him believe that Hyrule will be plunged into darkness by this supposed beast? I'm sure the other tribes feel the same way about the subject and are surely against sending one of their own into battle."

Canter Zoom then pointed up where Divine Beast Vah Ruta was perched atop a mountain ledge. " You can see for yourselves that King Rhoam's words are no lie with regards to the existence of the Divine Beasts and the Guardians." He then paused upon realizing that he was contradicting himself over what he said before about believing in Calamity Ganon's return. " I admit that I was wrong. If Calamity Ganon returns and the signs point to this as a possibility, then we must send our best Zora warrior to fight against this ancient evil. Mipha... You shall depart immediately to meet with King Rhoam at Hyrule Castle."

The Zoras were shocked aside from Meadowbrook who graciously accepted. " I shall prepare to leave at once, father."

" You shall do us proud, my daughter."

" I will be sure to live up to your expectations and those of our people."

As Meadowbrook turned and walked out of the throne room, the Zora who initially protested Canter Zoom's decision spoke to him privately. " Are you sure that this is the best course of action for our people? The Hylians are taking a huge gamble by unearthing these mechanisms as they could use them against the other tribes and subjucate us to their will or even worse destroy us."

" You need not worry about it."

" But I must. As Princess Mipha's teacher, I fear she is getting into something far beyond her means."

" She will be fine, Muzu." Canter Zoom said. " Mipha is where she wants to be and that is with the one who has won over her heart. It took me a while to understand this but I know that to deny her would bring me shame as both her king and her father. If something would befall her and I pray that it doesn't, I shall take full responsibility because it would have been my decision and no one elses. It is best this way to prevent my people from being condemned by my foolish actions."

If I had been in King Dorephan's position, I wouldn't have sent my daughter to become one of the chosen defenders of Hyrule. But, I supposed he didn't really have much of a choice as among the Zora, Mipha was the only one who possessed any ability the rest of them didn't have. Mipha's Grace, as it came to be known, was a healing power that could even save someone from death though she mainly used it for healing wounds. No one knew how she acquired it but it proved useful especially towards the champion chosen by the Master Sword. Mipha never once viewed her ability as a curse and embraced it as it enabled her to contribute without having to fight.

Among the Zora who didn't want Mipha to become their Champion, Muzu, King Dorephan's advisor, and Mipha's teacher, was the most vocal about it. He viewed himself as her second father though he knew his place regarding his king's judgment as a parent. He was said to have haboured a hatred towards Hylians because of how they had unearthed the ancient relics of the past, Guardians and the Divine Beasts, and especially towards he who served Princess Zelda as a bodyguard. This sentiment would echo amongst the Zora as they believed Mipha to be a divine being who was destined to lead her people to greater glory than any precious Zora monarch before her.

There was a small footnote about the Champions and I was curious to read about it. The term Champion referred to the four chosen by their people to represent them who were to be pilots of the four Divine Beasts much like their ancient ancestors had done. The hero who had been chosen by the Master Sword was also a Champion yet he had the most important task of all, fight and destroy Calamity Ganon, as only he could do so with the Blade of Evil's Bane. To ensure his success, he was to be aided by the others through their Divine Beasts to serve as a distraction for the great evil thus making them assistants.

Leading them was Princess Zelda, who like her ancestors before her, possessed a divine power, but unlike them, she suffered from a confidence problem. While her ancestors had acquired their divine power either through birth or from an early age, this version of Zelda had yet to awaken her true potential. Tried as she might, she couldn't awaken the divine power, so she began an interest in learning about the Divine Beasts and Guardians to mask her failings as a princess. This placed Zelda at odds with her father, who wanted her to continue with her training instead of focusing her efforts on her curiosity.

Back to the story, when Mipha arrived at Hyrule Castle Town, she and the other Champions met to become familiar with one another before they met Zelda herself. Pleased that the tribes had chosen excellent candidates to pilot the Divine Beasts, Zelda left to undertake some research on ancient technology leaving the Champions to discuss amongst themselves how they felt about her being their leader. It was here that I recognized two of the Champions though I didn't know who the third one was prompting me to once more rely on Princess Twilight's notes for clarification on this one individual.

Daruk, of the Gorons, was portrayed by Torch, the former Dragon Lord of the Dragon Kingdom, who was succeeded by his daughter, Ember. From what Her Highness described about him, his booming voice not to mention his size and ferocity earned him tremendous respect from his fellow dragons though they also feared him. Despite these traits, Torch cared for his kind and wanted nothing but the best for them. Revali, of the Rito, was portrayed by Dr. Caballeron, one of Daring Do's arch enemies in the books--I have read the entire series though Rainbow Dash and Twilight Sparkle are much bigger fans than I was.

He was devious, manipulative, and overall unpleasant, but you had to give him credit for knowing how to concoct clever schemes and knowing a lot about ancient lore. He planned on never giving up until he had defeated Daring Do once and for all. Finally, Urbosa, of the Gerudo, was the one I didn't recognize, but upon looking at Princess Twilight's notes, she turned out to be one of the Pillars of Equestria, Somnambula. In ancient times, she had helped her people against a sphinx by using what little she had to ensure their survival and to give them hope for a better tomorrow, earning her the anger of the sphinx.

It is said that she was able to rescue a prince by the name of Hisan from the sphinx by correctly answering a riddle and crossing a bridge over a pool of unknown liquid blindfolded and without her ability to fly--the image Princess Twilight provided showed that she was a Pegasus--resulting in a town being named in her honour. She even became the prince's advisor despite initially refusing saying that he was better suited by another but accepted graciously. The four Champions, now having gotten to know one another, and having met Princess Zelda, talked amongst themselves regarding what they had learned of their duties.

" What did you think of our audience with Princess Zelda?" Somnambula asked.

" If you want my opinion, she doesn't seem like an ideal leader." Caballeron answered. " I've no disrespect against her status as a princess but her leadership skills seem to be lacking when something like that is sure to get us all killed."

" Figures you would be the only one to think like that."

" If we are to succeed against Calamity Ganon, we must have a leader who will not shirk in their duties."

" Let me guess..." Somnambula began. " You want to become that leader?"

Caballeron grinned. " Well... I suppose I could take a crack at it if the rest of you aren't interested. In battle, I've been known to remain calm and not allow anything to distract me from what needs to be done hence why my people chose me as their representative." He then pointed to a beautifully crafted bow on his back and grinned once again. " With this bow on my back, designed by yours truly, the enemy doesn't stand a chance."

Torch scratched his head. " Uh... You sure you think you're the best suited to be the leader?"

" Are you implying that you would make for a better leader?"

" No, no." Torch answered. " I'm more at home being a fighter rather than a leader who usually has to be in the back and give out orders. But what I do know is that being a leader takes a great deal of willpower as there's no telling when you'll end up losing control of the situation. I don't doubt you, Revali, but I think we should give Princess Zelda a chance before jumping to a wrong conclusion. Besides, if she wasn't ready to do this, her father wouldn't have made her the leader of the Champions now would he?"

" I suppose not."

" Besides, I've seen Princess Zelda's behaviour these past couple of days and it worries me to no end."

The other Champions gasped with Caballeron taking point. " What!? How do you know about that? I thought we all came here to Hyrule Castle Town at the same time? Granted, I could've gotten here faster than the rest of you but I was needed to take care of a small band of monsters threatening Rito Village."

Torch fumbled with his fingers and expressed a sheepish grin on his face. " About that..." He seemed incredibly nervous until Caballeron stomped his foot prompting the Goron to suddenly blurt out what he knew. " I've been here for two days!" Looking around to see the others staring at him with hawkish looks, Torch blushed slightly before scratching his head again whilst contining to express that sheepish grin of his. " I couldn't wait for you guys so I got here as soon as I could. That allowed me the chance to observe Princess Zelda as she went about her business as I spoke with her father."

" Why didn't you mention that before?"

" You didn't ask."

Caballeron slapped his forehead. " Of all the..." He calmed himself down before saying something he would regret. " What did you mean by her behaviour?"

" She seemed distracted by something and constantly ignored everyone around her."

" That doesn't sound like the Zelda I know." Somnambula said.

" You've met her before?"

Somnambula nodded. " She has visited Gerudo Town a few times in the past when she was younger and before this whole Calamity Ganon business popped up. She didn't go on her own as even she knows that making it through the desert is nothing short of suicide unless you're prepared. When I first met her, I thought of her as being just another pompous royal who wanted to prove herself by wandering about in the desert. But when she came up to me to chat, I decided to indulge her curiosity and learned that there was much more to her than appearances suggested."

" She seems like an ordinary princess." Torch said. " Oh, and who happens to be interested in being a scholar."

" That's because you're only seeing what's on the outside."

" And you know what makes her tick?" Caballeron asked.

" I do."

" Forgive me for being a little unconvinced."

" It's not your fault for not understanding, Revali." Somnambula said. " Zelda has been known to open up only to those she feels she can relate to while shutting out everyone else with an emotionless presence. Someone like you would be one she'd ignore without hesitation whilst she would gladly tell me anything given how close we are. Anyway, she's been on edge lately due to not being able to awaken her divine powers."

Caballeron was shocked. " Are you serious, Urbosa? I thought she would have done that by now."

Torch had no idea what they were talking about so he decided to ask the question. " What do you mean by divine power?"

" You're not seriously saying that you don't know?"

" We Gorons usually don't pay attention to anything unless it covers rocks, fighting, and having a good time."

" I can't believe you just said that, Daruk."

Somnambula snapped her fingers to grab their attention though it felt like a thunderclap had just occurred when she did so. " Look! The point is that she hasn't unlocked her power and she's been bothered by it ever since. It also doesn't help that King Rhoam is concerned that she isn't doing enough to find a way to unleash that power. I was told not to say anything but I felt the need to tell you three as we'll all be working with her against Calamity Ganon. You'd better not repeat anything otherwise you'll definitely get on my bad side and learn what it means to mess around with thunder."

" Do you think that's why the king is thinking of assigning her a bodyguard?"

" He didn't seem to imply that when we all met him before meeting Zelda."

In the meantime, Torch turned his attention to Meadowbrook, who had so far avoided the entire conversation and instead had been practicing her healing ability on some local animals who had apparently injured themselves. " Say... How come you haven't said anything, Mipha? You're a Champion like us so your input is greatly appreciated. Also, what have you been doing with those critters?"

Meadowbrook was startled by Torch suddenly speaking to her that she froze on the spot and struggled to come up with a response. " Well... You see... The thing is..." It was clear that she had trouble talking to other people but she shook her head to regain her composure so as not to offend Torch. " I've been practicing my healing on these small, innocent creatures. My gift is one that only I possess amongst the Zora making me unique but then it is a reminder that I am different from them in that my preference is to help others and not fight."

" You're not the only one who has a special power."

I had to stop upon seeing yet another footnote which talked about the four special powers each of the Champions possessed. I had already learned about Mipha's Grace so I ignored her mentioning in the footnote and focused on the other three. Despite loving battle over most things, Daruk took self-protection seriously hence why his special power was all about surviving against any attack no matter how strong. Daruk's Protection would surround him in an ethereal shield and could absorb any kind of blow before sending it back to whoever attacked him. It was like having an extra shield even when you were using one that could never run out.

Among the Rito, Revali was seen as being in a class all of his own, especially when it came to his ability to fly. While other Rito required the wind to be able to fly about in the sky, he could generate his own wind gusts on the spot allowing him to fly upward. This was known as Revali's Gale and could be used to observe any dangerous areas ahead by viewing them from a higher vantage point. In battle, it didn't provide any offensive or defensive measures against monsters but then it sounded like Revali didn't appreciate being tethered to the ground and preferred to remain airborne as much as possible.

Unlike the other three, Urbosa didn't have a natural ability but instead one that was artificial in that it was provided by a magical artefact. As long as any Gerudo could remember, this artefact had been passed down from chieftain to chieftain and possessed the power of thunder. With a snap of her fingers, Urbosa could cause it to shoot forth lightning to catch monsters off guard or to perhaps bring people to attention. The Thunder Helm, as it was known, was a beautiful artefact one could wear on their face though their vision would be slightly weakened until they could get used to it. Urbosa's Fury, in conjuction with this artefact, had an incredible range and was designed to be an offensive power.

" Do you all possess a power like I do?"

" I'm the only one who technically doesn't." Somnambula answered before presenting the Thunder Helm which she had attached on her belt. " My power comes from this little trinket which has been in my possession for many years though I aim on passing down to the next Gerudo chieftain as is custom with my people. I wouldn't mess around with the Thunder Helm as it can be quite surprising as well as shocking."

" That is a beautiful artefact."

" Thank you for the compliment, Mipha."

" If it is alright with you, I would rather stay as far away from it as possible." Meadowbrook said. " We Zoras aren't very comfortable around anything electric-based even though we are the ones who developed Shock Arrows for use with bows."

Caballeron then interrupted. " I believe there is one important thing we need to talk about."

" What else can be said about Princess Zelda?" Torch asked.

" I'm more concerned with that other Champion she mentioned."

" You mean the one who wields the Master Sword?"

Caballeron nodded. " That's him. Even though we've not been introduced to him yet, I can already tell that he's going to be nothing but trouble. I mean, why should someone who can wield that blade be allowed to become one of the Champions of Hyrule?"

Somnambula shook her head. " I think the answer is pretty obvious and besides, he is the only one who can defeat Calamity Ganon."

" Are you saying we have to assist him."

" Pretty much."

" I am already not liking this swordsman despite not meeting him." Caballeron said. " If anything, we should be the ones to take on Ganon since we have the Divine Beasts on our side and not merely be assistants whose purpose is to pave the way for one person who just so happens to have a legendary sword."

" Again, you're contradicting yourself."

" You seem to be pretty excepting of him, Urbosa."

" That makes two of us." Torch said. " Link and I have been friends for a long time. Despite his small size in comparison to other Gorons, he has the heart of a true hero and has been personally trained by both his father and King Rhoam as a knight. Sure, he doesn't say very much but when he does, you'll remember him. I suppose if there was one criticism I could give about him, it'd be his lack of body mass."

Meadowbrook then spoke up. " Um... He and I have been childhood friends."

" No kidding!?"

" No."

Caballeron rubbed the bridge of his beak before groaning. " You three are all against me! Fine! I can take a hint on where you all stand! I'll hold off on my judgment until we actually meet this so-called Champion. I still stand by my opinion that he isn't going to amount to much but if he somehow surpasses even my own expectations, then and only then will I consider him an equal to me or perhaps even more than that."

Wow... It looked like I had found another character whom I disliked though I had to admit that Revali was right about one thing. The hero who was the fifth Champion needed to prove himself worthy before his fellow Champions and not be recognized just because he could wield the Master Sword. The sword itself isn't what makes someone a hero but rather it is their own heart that does this. Still, Revali sounded like he was jealous that he wasn't the one who got to defeat Calamity Ganon, and just couldn't accept anyone else taking it from him. No wonder the others were at odds with him.

Not only was the hero chosen to be the fifth Champion, he would also be assigned to be Princess Zelda's bodyguard against her wishes. Initially, she couldn't accept the fact that he had been commanded to watch over her, and many times she commanded him to leave her alone. This incarnation of Link, much like his predecessors, never uttered a single word yet historians say that he had a reason for being silent that was known only to Zelda herself. Link would eventually earn her respect when he saved her from a group of assassins after being in her companionship for several months.

The tribes of Hyrule had certainly changed in some regards though in others they remained the same yet they all ultimately swore their alliegeance to King Rhoam. The Zoras still resided within Zora's Domain though they had long since abandoned the idea of living within a cavern and instead lived outside in a beautiful city made from crystalline orb and of course surrounded by water. Fish were no longer their primary means and now they focused on forging Shock Arrows, special arrows with electric infused tips that could shock enemies, yet they were vulnerable to these due to being aquatic creatures. They also forged weapons which reflected their appreciation for beauty.

Unlike in the past where they guarded all rivers and bodies of water, the Zora only guarded watery areas that were connected to their domain. The Gorons still had their Goron City located on Death Mountain though like the Zoras, they too had chosen to reside outside rather than be inside. Because of the intense heat coming from Death Mountain, visitors were required to either use a special elixir or wear a specialized armour otherwise they would die. Perhaps the most famous location in Goron City, and one where visitors were encouraged to view at least once was the statue of Daruk, carved into a mountain overlooking the city.

Faces of Gorons past were etched into the mountain yet it was Daruk himself who had been given the ultimate of blessings. It is said that construction of the statue took many years to complete though it began a few years before Calamity Ganon returned. Even in death, no one would ever forget Daruk. The Rito tribe was the one I had no experience with so I needed more information regarding them. It is said that they descended from the Zoras by choosing to abandon the waters of Hyrule and evolved into bird-like creatures that called the sky their home. At one time, the Rito were mostly human but with bird features but had since become anthropomorphic avians.

Male Rito were trained to become fierce warriors who would protects the skies of their village from attackers whilst female Rito would raise their children but they had additional duties designed to ensure the village would prosper such as creating armour that could keep anyone warm even in the harshest of winter conditions. Finally, there was the Gerudo tribe and their very existence made no sense at all. I thought they assimilated into Hylian society when it became apparent that they would be wiped out within a few generations. Unless it was in a different timeline, they shouldn't exist, and yet this was the case.

Despite coming back from the brink without any explanation, the Gerudo still resided within the desert though their society had changed in terms of their hierarchy. Men were forbidden from entering Gerudo Town, their settlement unless they were made an exception though this was extremely rare. Even Gerudo males, rare as they were, couldn't set foot in the town without being promptly kicked out or even worse, be arrested simply for being a man. The Gerudo were lead by a chieftain where the title would pass down from mother to child rather than a king as it was in the ancient past.

I was curious to know more about the Gerudo of this new era of Hyrule--mainly due to Ganondorf I supposed--so I flipped through a number of pages before stopping at an interesting section that talked about not only them but also their greatest champion, Urbosa. The Gerudo over the course of the millenia stopped believing in Hylia and instead believed that their ancestors watched over them from beyond the grave. Much like their ancestors before them, they were still a warrior race, and were skilled at using all manner of weapons, yet also respected those who possessed an equal skill.

Urbosa, the Gerudo's Champion, and the pilot of Divine Beast Vah Naboris, was known not only for her beauty but also her skills as a fighter. She had a strong bond with Zelda and was seen as an adoptive sister to the princess yet Urbosa's heart would always belong to her people. According to historians, she once lead the Gerudo as their chieftain and wielded the artefact, the Thunder Helm, as mentioned earlier, but also wielded two additional artefacts. The Scimitar of the Seven, a sword crafted by a master smith along with its counterpart, Daybreaker, a shield of equal measure, became national treasures of her people and whenever Urbosa used them in battle, it was said that she moved about like a dancer.

As mentioned, she was viewed as an adoptive sister to Princess Zelda and took it upon herself to ensure that she would always have someone watching over her. She also believed that the fifth Champion, Link, had great potential though she worried that he couldn't find any common ground with Zelda. It says here that one late afternoon, Urbosa was going over some maintanence regarding Naboris, when a chance encounter would force her to fight for the future of her people and her own survival. She would come face to face with one whose connection with her people went back countless ages.

" Ha! What do you think of Divine Beast Vah Naboris?" Somnambula asked as she laughed.

" We're certainly high up off the ground."

" Don't tell me that you're afraid of heights?"

" I can't help it! I prefer having my feet on solid ground rather than being up here. I mean, I'm standing on solid ground right now but I could get shaken off by this thing's erratic movement across the desert."

Somnambula laughed. " You never cease to amaze me, Sassy Saddles. You're the chieftain so you should set a good example by not showing off your fear yet here you are doing just that in front of me of all people. Granted, your fears are warranted as Naboris can be a little unpredictable what with its powers. It took me a while to figure out how this thing worked though I feel there is still more for me to learn before it can be used against Calamity Ganon."

Sassy Saddles? I read about her from Princess Twilight's letters though I wasn't expecting her to be here. She was gainfully employed by the Equestrian version of Rarity at her boutique in Canterlot though she tried using a system that gave her way too much control and influence resulting in her learning a hard lesson about going too far. She still works there though follows Rarity's rules to the letter but does have some leeway on a few things. I guessed this meant that Urbosa wasn't the Gerudo chieftain which made sense as I doubted her tribe would let their chieftain undertake such a task as dealing with Ganon.

" To be fair, Urbosa, I wish you had been chosen as chieftain." Sassy Saddles said.

" We've been through this many times." Somnambula said as she lifted her arms in frustration. " As the daughter of the previous chieftain, you were destined to inherit the position and besides, you've shown just how capable you are of being a good leader."

Sassy Saddles shook her head before looking down at her feet. " The Gerudo respect you a lot more than they do me given how you've been chosen to pilot Naboris. You've even got our people's most sacred artefact, the Thunder Helm, in your possession, a treasure many assumed I would have because of being chief. I'm surprised our people haven't died out or anything under my leadership. Mother was foolish to have chosen me to succeed her. You were the better choice yet you insisted on taking the path of a warrior."

" I could never lead the Gerudo like you."

" You're wrong!"

Reaching for a sword attached to her belt, Somnambula drew it out and presented it before Sassy Saddles. " A warrior like me could never lead the Gerudo as both my hands and my blade have been stained by battle, a stain that would corrupt our people, driving them to wanting to wage war against the other tribes like they did eons ago. Your mother, the former chief, knew what she was doing when she named you her successor on her deathbed. I knew the same thing which is why I passed it up and chose to be a warrior who fought for our pride. You are pure compared to me, Sassy, and purity is what's needed for our people."

" So why didn't I acquire the Thunder Helm?" Sassy Saddles asked. " It is has been passed down from chief to chief for as long as anyone can remember yet mother insisted on you having it instead of me. It alone is why you should be chief instead of me."

" Maybe your mother thought you weren't ready for it."

" She was right given how I feel conflicted."

Somnambula walked over to Sassy Saddles and placed her hand on her shoulder. " You remind me an awful lot of Princess Zelda. She's just like you in that she feels she's unworthy of the responsibility that's been placed on her shoulders. She has tried everything to understand what her destiny is meant to be but nothing has come of it."

Sassy Saddles looked up at Somnambula. " Really? The Hylian Princess is going through the same thing? I didn't think she would ever feel anything like that given that she was born into the role of succeeding her father. Heh... Kind of like how I was born into the role of succeeding my mother as the next Gerudo chieftain." Seeing Somnambula smile in response made her look away for a moment. " But that doesn't change the fact that you should've been chief. Princess Zelda is just biding her time until everything falls into place while I will never be as successful as you, Urbosa."

" I don't expect you to."

" What do you mean?"

" While it's true that I am the Champion, I am simply that and nothing more." Somnambula answered. " History will remember me for this accomplishment along with the other small details I've done in my life but you'll be remembered too as the chieftain who gave Urbosa the strength she needed and the convictions she lacked. Without your guiding hand, I'd probably be lost out there."

" You're just saying that."

" Yes but you're missing the point."

" And that is?"

" We each have our roles to play in the grand scheme." Somnambula answered. " I may be loved by the people, Sassy, but I will never have the love that they have for you. You are their beacon of hope, the one they believe will lead them to a better tomorrow. You will shape us into being a tribe respected by the other tribes across Hyrule. I know I saved our town from that ghost some time ago but that was minor compared with what you'll accomplish as chief, Sassy. My advice is to not let yourself feel inadequate as that leads to failure. Embrace being the chief and carve out your own legacy."

Sassy Saddles then gave Somnambula a big hug. " You always know how to cheer me up, Urbosa."

" It's what I do."

" I think I'll go back to town and give this whole chief thing another go."

" That's the spirit!"

" What will you do now?"

" I still need to check on a couple of things regarding Naboris' energy output." Somnambula answered. " I know it sounds weird hearing me say that but this beast needs to be in perfect condition when the time comes for me and the other Champions to deal with Calamity Ganon. I'll come back as soon as possible but don't expect me to join everyone for our daily evening feast later tonight."

As she left Divine Beast Vah Naboris by climbing down a ladder built into the side of the beast, Sassy Saddles waved goodbye to Somnambula leaving the Champion alone with her thoughts on everything that had happened. To think that mere weeks ago, she had been introduced to those chosen by the other tribes of Hyrule to pilot their respective Divine Beasts, and before that, she was merely a Gerudo warrior who had earned the respect of her people by saving them. She still felt overwhelmed with what she had been tasked to accomplished but she knew giving up before it had even begun was against the Gerudo code.

Turning towards checking the energy output, Somnambula tapped a few cables, causing them to unleash small doses of electricity. She then went on to check a pipe where the electrical energy Naboris relied on for shooting thunder from its "humps" travelled through and noticed that it needed to be adjusted to allow for a better flow. Knowing she lacked actual tools, she chose to use her sword instead by hitting the pipe with the hilt of her blade. In her mind, Naboris was unlike anything she had ever seen before. Had she not seen it with her own eyes, she would have been utterly skeptical towards it ever existing.

Suddenly, she felt a strange presence coming from behind her and quickly looked back to see what it was. There was nothing so she assumed it was the wind, a reminder that nightfall was approaching and that it would get cold pretty quickly. Somnambula resumed checking the output, hitting the pipe a few more times, only to stop a second time upon feeling the same presence as before. Shrugging off the notion, she was about to wrap up her work when she suddenly turned her sword around, gripped it firmly in her hand, and breathed heavily before addressing what she knew was there.

" I didn't think anyone could sneak up on me yet you did."

Begin: Those Chosen By The Planet.

" You possess a strong reaction."

" Though you gave yourself away with that aura of yours."

" A testament to my power."

" I don't know why you bothered to come all the way up here nor do I even care since you'll be leaving the same way you got here." Somnambula said. " This place is too dangerous for anyone who doesn't understand how this ancient machine functions."

" You mean the Divine Beast Vah Naboris, correct?"

Somnambula stood in horror upon hearing the person behind her say that. " How did you know that?"

" All people of this world know what the Divine Beasts are, Urbosa, Champion of the Gerudo. What they do not know is that these creatures possess an ancient power that has been forgotten by everyone aside from the Sheikah, their creators, and who have since been driven into the very shadows by those they once served. Such power was based on the Triforce, the golden power that can grant one's deepest desire, yet it could never be truly replicated."

" There's no proof of that."

" Because you and the people do not understand the true nature of the beasts."

Somnambula whipped around to confront her visitor and her jaw dropped. " That armour... It looks similar to the Gerudo armour that the soliders of Gerudo Town wear, but yours looks more ancient, as though it isn't from this time. Yes! Your armour is ancient Gerudo armour, worn by Gerudo Kings upon their ascension, but it hasn't existed in over 10,000 years."

No way! There's no way it was possible! I looked up from the pages and shook my head in disbelief. How could he be there? How could Ganondorf be there before Urbosa? I thought his primal form, Calamity Ganon, still resided below Hyrule Castle where it had been for eons? Unless this was some kind of illusion both Urbosa and I were having, she had indeed been confronted by the Dark Lord himself, the same one who had been tormenting me this whole time in a bid to make me his servant. I wanted to close the Hyrule Historia and stop reading but I had to keep going in order to find out what would happen.

" And yet it does through me."

" You're definitely a male Gerudo but how is that possible?" Somnambula asked. " There hasn't been a male born into the tribe for thirty years so what does that make you? I know you have an answer and I demand you tell me."

" The answer is most obvious yet you cannot see it."

" Who are you?"

" My name is Ganondorf and I was once the Gerudo King of Thieves."

Somnambula was stunned to say the least. " What!? Ganondorf!? Impossible! He was an ancient Gerudo King who lived over 10,000 years ago but he brought nothing but shame to our tribe which is why his history has been largely forgotten save for those who studied our tribe's past." She then began laughing before lowering her sword. " I see what this is now. You're nothing but a pretender, a fraud wanting me to believe that you are most notorious of the Gerudo. I'll give you props for finding that ancient armour and the details across your body such as the jewel on your forehead is pretty faithful but you're not him."

Ganondorf laughed this time. " How amusing to see that the Gerudo have been reduced to such ignorance."

" What did you say?" Somnambula asked as she stopped laughing.

" I would not doubt my claims, Urbosa."

" Don't tempt me into doing something I'll regret."

" Yes... I can see it all too clearly now." Ganondorf said. " Your appearance and mannerisms are almost identical to that of Nabooru. Yes, you happen to be her descendant as the spiritual energy emanating from you is strong, stronger than most who exist in this world. Nabooru was once my second-in-command but betrayed me when she concluded that she could never be ruthless like her kin were under my reign. Knowing of her treachery, I commanded my surrogate mothers to deal with her so that she would remember what her place was but destiny had its own plans and she became one of the Six Sages."

Somnambula was stunned again. " How... how did you know I was related to the legendary Nabooru?"

Ganondorf laughed. " Because you possess her very spiritual energy. You also possess a necklace that you wear around your neck which once belonged to Nabooru but has been passed down from generation to generation. It was a trinket that I gave to her on the day I chose her to become my second-in-command. You may wear it with pride but know that she received it by obeying my every command without question." Somnambula clutched the trinket around her neck and held it firmly as Ganondorf continued laughing. " How does it feel knowing you wear such shame, Urbosa?"

" That was just a coincidence you knew about that."

Clenching his hand into a fist, the Mark of the Triforce appeared on the back of Ganondorf's hand. " Perhaps this will be the final proof you need to know that I am the one who once conquered this kingdom and plunged into darkness."

" Only the Royal Family of Hyrule possess marks like that." Somnambula said. " Which means that you are who you say you are even though I cannot accept it. Tell me, why have you decided to reveal yourself to me now? You could've done so a long time ago or to someone else amongst our tribe."

" All will become clear in time."

" I'll make you explain yourself."

Holding out his hand, Ganondorf concentrated and a scabbard materialized into said hand before he grabbed the hilt with his other hand and pulled out the very sword that was used to execute him in the timeline where he was arrested for his crimes. Knowing that she had to fight, Somnambula raised her sword, removed a shield from behind her back, and slung it onto her back before dashing forward. She then swung her sword in hopes of scoring an early blow only for Ganondorf to parry the blow with his own sword, but she was surprised at how fast he reacted to her move as though he knew what she would do before she did.

Swinging her sword again, Somnambula sought to move faster in hopes of catching him off guard but he kept on parrying each blow forcing her to come up with another plan. She didn't expect to find someone who could match her skills but she felt there was something strange about her opponent. To her, Ganondorf wasn't trying his best and this bothered her because he was holding back on his power. A warrior knew when their opponents weren't being serious and he was definitely doing that. She had to act quickly before Ganondorf would choose to take their fight more seriously and unleash what he could really do.

An idea then popped into her head. She then threw her shield forward thinking it would cause him to deflect it but was shocked when he caught it with his hand before flinging it back where she got knocked to the ground as a result from the force behind his throw. Getting back up, Somnambula decided not to try that idea again but she did learn something in the process. Ganondorf was holding back as she would have been killed had he been more serious. Raising her shield and walking forward slowly, she swung her sword only to be parried, so she swung again with the same result happening again. Somnambula and Ganondorf then began parrying one another in a bid to see who would overpower the other first.

This went on for a while before the two disengaged from their parrying though Somnambula was exhausted. She was the strongest warrior among the Gerudo yet was quickly realizing that Ganondorf was even stronger. It was because he had lived for countless centuries and during that time had earned tremendous experience of varying levels. Somnambula also knew if she was defeated, nothing could stop him from going to Gerudo Town and plunging it into darkness or worse, slaughter everyone who opposed him. She had to end this battle before that could come to pass.

Charging forward, she used her beautiful dancing battle style before leaping over Ganondorf, but when she turned around upon landing, she was shocked to find that he had disappeared without a trace. Had victory been achieved? No, she didn't think so as she could still sense his presence. Stepping forward cautiously, Somnambula suddenly felt a sharp pain brushing against her neck and was surprised to see that Ganondorf's sword a mere inch from her throat. How had he been able to get that close without her knowing despite his presence being felt everywhere on the Divine Beast.

It was right there that she concluded that he had been manipulating her the entire time. " Heh... Didn't think a vai like you could possess such skill. I must admit that I've never been pushed this far before but don't think you've beaten me."

" Your words are pitiful as they hide the truth."

" Yeah... I realize that you're stronger than I am so why hold back?"

" Because you are not worth the effort."

" What!?"

Ganondorf laughed. " I wanted to see if the strength of the Gerudo still exists even now so I tested you to see if you were a true Gerudo warrior. It seems that you have already reached your full potential. How unfortunate you didn't meet my expectations." Somnambula gave him a confused look and he once again laughed. " Are you truly that surprised by my words? Then know this, Urbosa. You and your companions have been preparing for the return of a primal beast, the creature called Ganon."

" What about it?"

" You already know the answer."

" I do not follow."

" Give it a moment and it will come to you."

" No..." Somnambula said softly. " Are you saying that you and Calamity Ganon are one and the same?"

Ganondorf laughed again. " That creature is an incarnation of my very being though it has become nothing more than a mindless beast. You will soon come to the realization that your efforts will amount to nothing though why should I reveal such details? It would be more interesting for you to experience what fate has chosen to inflict upon you and those who have been chosen to fight against this primitive form of my hatred. Even if you understand the meaning behind my words, it does not change anything."

" Then perhaps I should do just that." Somnambula said. She put away her sword and snapped her finger causing a bolt of lightning to strike Ganondorf. The Dark Lord groaned upon getting hit but before he could react accordingly, she snapped her finger again causing another bolt to hit him. " What do you think of my special power, Urbosa's Fury?"

" Ah... The Thunder Helm." Ganondorf said as he clutched his chest. " To think that such a powerful artefact would fall into your hands. I know that you feel inferior when compared to the other Champions as their powers are natural while yours is artificial, an unfortunate twist in the proverbial fires of fate."

Her face taking on an expression of anger, Somnambula continued to snap her finger sending bolt after bolt of lightning down upon Ganondorf. At first it looked as though they weren't having any kind of effect but he was quickly showing signs of fatigue resulting from being shocked with over 10,000 volts. Eventually, he would drop to one knee and when he tried to get back up, one final snap of a finger sent down a massive thunderbolt, striking him, and he collapsed to the ground. Drawing out her sword again, Somnambula waited until Ganondorf got up onto his knee before aiming her blade straight at his throat.

" If I take your life, Calamity Ganon will have never existed since you two are one and the same."

" You would take the life of a fellow Gerudo?"

Somnambula nodded. " You're not one of us! You are a demon whose very existence has pervaded this land for countless ages. By taking your life, history will forever be changed and peace will reign supreme for all time. I don't care if no one realizes what I do here today so long as they are able to live in peace."

Pulling her sword back, she thrust it forward in an attempt to kill Ganondorf only for him to suddenly catch her blade with his hand. Laughing, he got back up onto his feet, lifting her up off the ground in the process, and with a slight bit of pressure from his hand, her sword cracked. " Did you honestly believe that you had the means to oppose me? While the Thunder Helm is a magical artefact, its power is not enough to defeat me. How unfortunate for you, Urbosa." Putting his sword away whilst still laughing, Ganondorf thrust out his own hand and a ball of dark energy began forming, increasing in size until it covered his entire palm.

Without warning, he released it, and it blasted Somnambula in the stomach, causing her to get sent flying off the side of Divine Beast Vah Noboris. " AHHHHHHHH!!!!" It look liked she would die but luckily, she managed to grab the ladder Sassy Saddles had used to climb down though she was now completely at Ganondorf's mercy.

" Pathetic fool!"

" Finish me!" Somnambula said as she struggled to hold on. " But know that you kill me here and now, the Gerudo will hunt you down for all eternity to avenge me. You may be powerful but there's no way you can fight them all at once."

" I have no desire to kill you."

" Afraid to do it, Ganondorf?"

Ganondorf laughed once more. " As I said to you, fate has already determined what shall happen and who am I to stop that from happening? You are strong, Urbosa, but you lack the true power one needs to subjugate the land under their dominion. A shame that the Gerudo have become weak over the ages. Had they chosen not to forge ties with the Hylians, they would have been the masters of this world."

" I see that your arrogance is strong."

" And yet you are the one on the verge of death."

" A fall from this height wouldn't kill me." Somnambula said. " Besides, you should feel honoured that I'll forever remember this encounter. It's not everyday that I get to fight someone with your skill who also doubles as an ancient from a different period in time."

Ganondorf shook his head. " It is unfortunate that you shall not remember any of this. When you fall from this height and hit the ground, your people will think you slipped off of this ancient creature though you not recall the events leading up to it. I know that the Royal Family has the means to traverse through time as a result of their attempts at trying to understand the true nature of the Triforce, and if they were to sense my presence, they would strive towards attempting to change history, something I cannot allow. I know you believe my presence changes history but it does not as my power is beyond their understanding."

Clenching his hand into a fist, the Mark of the Triforce appeared on Ganondorf's hand and began to glow. Moments later, he unleashed a powerful dark magic that enveloped around the head of Somnambula causing her to feel dizzy. She struggled to maintain her focus but ultimately released her grip on the ladder, dropping down to the ground below, her memories of her encounter with the Dark Lord fading away. Upon seeing her crash, Ganondorf laughed as he disappeared into darkness leaving no trace of him having ever been there, the Divine Beast crying out in anguish over what had transpired.

End: Those Chosen By The Planet.

By the time the Gerudo found her laying unconscious in the desert by Naboris, Urbosa had completely forgotten about her encounter with Ganondorf, and believed that she had indeed fallen from a great height. Fortunately, the deep sand broke her fall and so she suffered from a few bruised ribs before recovering fully. Upon her recovery, she left for Hyrule Castle days later to meet with Princess Zelda and the other Champions to discuss further preparations regarding Calamity Ganon. Zelda revealed that she had been forbidden by her father to perform further reasearch on the ancient machines until she had awakened her divine powers.

In order to awaken her power, Zelda had to visit three sacred springs, each one representing a Triforce essence, and prayed at each one though she failed at each attempt and became frustrated over how nothing happened. Despite these unfortunate setbacks, she remained hopeful that she could awaken the power that had been passed down through her family. Always by her side was the fifth Champion, Link, he who had been chosen to wield the Master Sword, to protect her from harm. When she revealed to the Champions of her failures, they began formulating a means of unlocking her power only to suddenly be spurned into action.

Calamity Ganon, who had remained dormant for 10,000 years, awakened and was poised to plunge Hyrule into darkness. It says that it was Daruk who commanded the Champions to get into their Divine Beasts and for Link to prepare for his eventual assault on Hyrule Castle where Ganon was located. What should have been a decisive victory turned into complete horror when something completely unexpected happened. Knowing that the Divine Beasts and the Guardians would be a threat to him, Ganon used his malice to infect each one of the ancient machines, turning them against the kingdom.

The Champions were killed by four essences that were an extension of Ganon himself--a footnote here referred to them as blights of water, fire, wind, and thunder--while King Rhoam along with everyone in Hyrule Castle and the surrounding town lost their lives against the Guardians. Link, the fifth Champion, was said to have succumbed to his injuries he sustained when protecting Zelda from a group of Guardians though some claim he survived. As for Princess Zelda herself, her fate remained unknown though again, some claim that she was still alive. This event became known as the "Great Calamity" which devastated Hyrule and the kingdom had since struggled to repair itself.

There was one other casualty though this occurred before and after the Great Calamity made itself known. The Hylians blamed the Sheikah for building the Guardians and Divine Beasts and the devastation that would occur when Ganon possessed the ancient machines, and they were forced to hide out of fear though this had an unfortunate side-effect. Many cast aside their technological advances and chose peaceful lives but a group defected from the tribe out of hatred towards those who shunned them and became known as the Yiga Clan, loyal followers of Ganon, sworn to kill the chosen hero wherever he may be.

I closed the book and placed it down on a small table that was in front of my recliner. As much as I wanted to continue reading to find out what happened next, I just couldn't bring myself to continuing. Also, I had read plenty enough already. I had to admit that this new addition to the legend was intriguing though the fact that historians didn't know where it took place within the timeline was disappointing. It also served to remind me of how Ganondorf continued manipulating people and events to his whim. Were I to end up going on another adventure as a result of his actions in the distant future, I understood his motivations a lot better than before.

By the time I came to reading the Hyrule Historia again, would there be any additional new content? If so then I would like to read about that as it felt very compelling. For now, I intended on giving Rainbow Dash back her book before taking another nap. Reading so much about the Legend of Zelda's expansive lore really took it out of me as there was just so much to take in all at once. Would my torment at Ganondor's hands ever end? I didn't know the answer though I felt that it was going to be a no. I couldn't allow myself to succumb to despair but it wasn't going to be easy given the mark on my hand serving as a reminder of my connection to him.

Hopefully, my friends wouldn't be dragged into this conflict anymore than they already were but again I felt gearing towards no on that front. As for Princess Twilight, I knew she was now part of this conflict because if she did possess the Triforce of Wisdom, she and I shared an unfortunate bond with Ganondorf. If she didn't then perhaps he will leave her alone and instead focus on wanting to make me his devoted servant. What I knew more than anything else, was that this wasn't the end of my journey but rather just the beginning. Whenever it happens again, when I next am pulled into this video game world, I've got to be ready for it.